10% de réduction sur vos envois d'emailing --> CLIQUEZ ICI

Retour à l'accueil, cliquez ici

http://help.adobe.com/en_US/Acrobat/8.0/3D/acrobat_3d_8.0_help.pdf Prise en main d'Acrobat 3D version 8

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/Acrobat/8.0/3D/acrobat_3d_8.0_gettingstarted.pdf

Migration, installation et coniguration d'ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO SERVER 7.5

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/AcrobatConnectPro/7.5/InstallConfigure/connectpro_7.5_install.pdf

ADOBE ® CONNECT ™ VISUAL QUICK START GUIDE

Getting started with Adobe Connect meeting Séminaires :

https://seminars.adobeconnect.com/_a227210/vqs-hosts/

Utilisation d'ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO 7.5

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/AcrobatConnectPro/7.5/Using/connectpro_7.5_help.pdf Using ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO 7.5 Web Services

http://help.adobe.com/en_US/AcrobatConnectPro/7.5/WebServices/connectpro_7.5_webservices.pdf

UTILISATION D’ADOBE ACROBAT 9 PRO

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/Acrobat/9.0/Professional/acrobat_pro_9.0_help.pdf

UTILISATION D’ADOBE ACROBAT 9 STANDARD

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/Acrobat/9.0/Standard/acrobat_standard_9.0_help.pdf

ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 GUIDE DE L’UTILISATEUR

http://help.adobe.com/fr_FR/Captivate/3.0/captivate_3_help.pdf USER GUIDE © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 for Windows® If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement, this guide, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by any such license, no part of this guide may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or trans­ mitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement. The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorpo­ rated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates or images are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Capture, Acrobat Connect, Breeze, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, GoLive, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, PostScript 3, Reader, and Version Cue are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType, Vista, and Windows are either regis­ tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark op The Open Group in the US and other countries. Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, and may be registered in certain juris­ dictions. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The Spelling portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 2004 IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1992 Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Text & Satz Datentechnik © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. Portions of Adobe Acrobat include technology used under license from Autonomy and are copyrighted. This product contains either BISAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Data Security, Inc. e_Db is a licensed product from Simple Software Solutions, Inc. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference. iii Contents Chapter 1: Before you begin Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Using Adobe Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 What’s new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Chapter 2: Workspace Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Work area basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Customizing the work area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Viewing PDF pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Playing movies and sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Adjusting PDF views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Grids, guides, and measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Saving PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Maintaining the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Non-English languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Chapter 3: Creating PDFs Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Overview of creating PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Creating simple PDFs with Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Using the Adobe PDF printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Creating PDFs with PDFMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Application-specific features of PDFMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Converting web pages to PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Creating PDFs with Acrobat Distiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Adobe PDF conversion settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Chapter 4: Combining PDF content Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Combining files into PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Adding unifying page elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Rearranging pages in a PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Chapter 5: Exporting PDFs Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Exporting PDFs to other file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Reusing PDF content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 iv Chapter 6: Review and comment Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Preparing for a PDF review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Starting and managing a review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Participating in a PDF review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Tracking PDF reviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Commenting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Managing comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Importing and exporting comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Approval workflows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Chapter 7: Forms Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Forms basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Filling in PDF forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Submitting forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Planning a PDF form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Creating and editing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Laying out new form fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Form fields behaviors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Setting action buttons in Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Distributing forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Publishing interactive web forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Collecting and managing form data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Chapter 8: Security Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Opening restricted documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Removing sensitive content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating or obtaining digital IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Sharing and managing certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Directory servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Securing PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Security policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Chapter 9: Digital signatures Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Digital signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Signing PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Validating signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Chapter 10: Accessibility, tags, and reflow Accessibility features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Checking the accessibility of PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Reading PDFs with reflow and accessibility features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Creating accessible PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 v Making existing PDFs accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Editing document structure with the Content and Tags tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Chapter 11: Editing PDFs Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Page thumbnails and bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Links and attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Actions and scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Converted web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Optimizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Editing text and objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Setting up a presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Adding movies and sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Document properties and metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Processing in batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Chapter 12: Searching and indexing Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Searching PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Creating PDF indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Chapter 13: 3D models Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Converting 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Capturing 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Adding 3D models to PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Inserting 3D models in Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Interacting with 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Exporting geometry from 3D models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Adding functionality to 3D designs with JavaScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Chapter 14: Color management Understanding color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Keeping colors consistent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Color-managing imported images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Color-managing documents for online viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Proofing colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Color-managing documents when printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Working with color profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Chapter 15: Printing Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Basic printing tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Other ways to print PDFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 vi Printing custom sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Advanced print settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Printing color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Chapter 16: Print production tools Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Tools for high-end output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Trapping color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Previewing output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Color conversion and ink management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Printer marks, cropping, and hairlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Transparency flattening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Chapter 17: Preflight Quickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Analyzing documents for print readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Viewing preflight results, objects, and resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Preflight reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Advanced inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Preflight profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Additional checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Correcting problem areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Automating document analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Output intents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515 Chapter 18: JDF instructions Job definition format (JDF) files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Submitting print jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Chapter 19: Adobe Version Cue Using Adobe Version Cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Working with Version Cue projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Working with files in Version Cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Disconnecting from projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Deleting files, folders, and projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Version Cue versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Editing and synchronizing offline files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 The Version Cue Administration utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Creating, editing, and managing projects in Version Cue Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553 Working with users and privileges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Viewing logs, reports, and workspace information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Version Cue PDF reviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 vii Chapter 20: Keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 1 Chapter 1: Before you begin Installation Requirements To review complete system requirements and recommendations for your Adobe® software, see the Read Me file included with your software. Install the software 1 Close any other Adobe applications open on your computer. 2 Insert the installation disc into the disc drive, and follow the on-screen instructions. Note: For more information, see the Read Me file included with your software. Activate the software Adobe software may include license management technology to ensure compliance with the product license agreement. When present, this technology prompts you to verify the license of your product within 30 days after you first use it. Verification is mandatory. You may be prompted to activate the software. The verification process doesn’t collect, transmit, or use any infor­ mation about the identity of users. For more information on this topic, see the Read Me file on your installation disc, or visit the Adobe website at www.adobe.com/go/activation. 1 If the Activation dialog box isn’t already open, choose Help > Activation > Activate. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions. Note:If you want to install the software on a different computer, you must first deactivate the software on your computer: Choose Help > Activation > Deactivate. Register Register your product to receive complimentary installation support, notifications of updates, and other services. ? To register, follow the on-screen instructions in the Registration dialog box, which appears after you install and activate the software. If you postpone registration, you can register at any time by choosing Help > Registration. Read Me The installation disc contains the Read Me file for your software. (This file is also copied to the application folder during product installation.) Open the file to read important information about the following topics: • System requirements • Installation • Registration ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 2 User Guide • Electronic licensing • Legal notices Using Adobe Help Adobe Help resources Documentation for your Adobe software is available in a variety of formats. In-product and LiveDocs Help In-product Help provides access to all documentation and instructional content available at the time the software ships. It is available through the Help menu in your Adobe software. LiveDocs Help includes all the content from in-product Help, plus updates and links to additional instructional content available on the web. For some products, you can also add comments to the topics in LiveDocs Help. Find LiveDocs Help for your product in the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documentation. Most versions of in-product and LiveDocs Help let you search across the Help systems of multiple products. Topics may also contain links to relevant content on the web or to topics in the Help of another product. Think of Help, both in the product and on the web, as a hub for accessing additional content and communities of users. The most complete and up-to-date version of Help is always on the web. How To topics The How To topics provide a brief overview of the most common tasks. If you need more information, click the link at the bottom of the How To topic to view the related Help topic. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 3 User Guide PDF documentation The in-product Help is also available as an Adobe PDF that is optimized for printing. Other documents, such as installation guides and white papers, may also be provided as PDFs. All PDF documentation is available through the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documen­ tation. To see the PDF documentation included with your software, look in the Documents folder on the installation or content DVD. Printed documentation Printed editions of the in-product Help may be available for purchase in the Adobe Store, at www.adobe.com/go/store. You can also find books published by Adobe publishing partners in the Adobe Store. A printed workflow guide is included with all Adobe Creative Suite® 3 products, and stand-alone Adobe products may include a printed getting started guide. Note: Printed documentation is not available in all languages. Using Help in the product In-product Help is available through the Help menu. After you start the Adobe Help Viewer, you can access Help for additional Adobe products installed on your computer. Topics may contain links to additional content on the web. If you search for a phrase, such as “shape tool,” enclose it in quotation marks to see only those topics that include all the words in the phrase (applies to roman language versions of the software). Accessibility features Adobe Help content is accessible to people with disabilities—such as mobility impairments, blindness, and low vision. In-product Help supports these standard accessibility features: • The user can change text size with standard context menu commands (Microsoft® Windows®) and standard menu commands (Apple Mac OS). • Links are underlined for easy recognition. • If link text doesn’t match the title of the destination, the title is referenced in the Title attribute of the Anchor tag. For example, the Previous and Next links include the titles of the previous and next topics. • Content supports high-contrast mode. • Images without captions include alternate text. • Each frame has a title to indicate its purpose. • Standard HTML tags define content structure for screen reading or text-to-speech tools. • Style sheets control formatting, so there are no embedded fonts. Keyboard shortcuts for Help toolbar controls (Windows) Back button Alt+Left Arrow Forward button Alt+Right Arrow Print Ctrl+P About button Ctrl+I Help For menu Alt+Down Arrow or Alt+Up Arrow to view Help for another application ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 4 User Guide Keyboard shortcuts for Help navigation (Windows) • To move between panes, press Ctrl+Tab (forward) and Shift+Ctrl+Tab (backward). • To move through and outline links in a pane, press Tab (forward) or Shift+Tab (backward). • To activate an outlined link, press Enter. • To change text size, press Ctrl/Command+plus sign (+) or Ctrl/Command+minus sign (-). Resources Adobe Video Workshop Adobe Creative Suite 3 Video Workshop offers over 200 training videos covering a wide range of subjects for print, web, and video professionals. You can use Adobe Video Workshop to learn about any Creative Suite 3 product. Many videos show you how to use Adobe applications together. Note: Adobe Video Workshop is not available in all languages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 5 User Guide When you start Adobe Video Workshop, you choose the products you want to learn and the subjects you want to view. You can see details about each video to focus and direct your learning. Community of presenters With this release, Adobe Systems invited the community of its users to share their expertise and insights. Adobe and lynda.com present tutorials, tips, and tricks from leading designers and developers such as Joseph Lowery, Katrin Eismann, and Chris Georgenes. You can see and hear Adobe experts such as Lynn Grillo, Greg Rewis, and Russell Brown. In all, over 30 product experts share their knowledge. Tutorials and source files Adobe Video Workshop includes training for novices and experienced users. You’ll also find videos on new features and key techniques. Each video covers a single subject and typically runs about 3-5 minutes. Most videos come with an illustrated tutorial and source files, so you can print detailed steps and try the tutorial on your own. Using Adobe Video Workshop You can access Adobe Video Workshop using the DVD included with your Creative Suite 3 product. It’s also available online at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials. Adobe will regularly add new videos to the online Video Workshop, so check in to see what’s new. Acrobat videos Adobe Video Workshop covers a wide range of subjects for Adobe Acrobat®, including these: • Setting up the workspace and taskbars • Combining files into a PDF • Converting PDFs • Modifying PDFs ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 6 User Guide • Adding comments to PDFs • Working with shared reviews • Reviewing and summarizing comments • Adding security to forms • Collaborating in real time with Adobe Acrobat Connect™ • Preflighting files • Printing documents To access Adobe Creative Suite 3 video tutorials, visit Adobe Video Workshop at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials. Note: Adobe Video Workshop is not available in all languages. Extras You have access to a wide variety of resources that will help you make the most of your Adobe software. Some of these resources are installed on your computer during the setup process; additional content is included on the instal­ lation or content disc, if applicable. Unique extras are also offered online by the Adobe Exchange community, at www.adobe.com/go/exchange. Installed resources During software installation, a number of resources are placed in your application folder. To view those files, navigate to the application folder on your computer. Disc content The disc included with your product may contain additional resources for use with the software, such as presets, plug-ins, a PDF version of the Help, technical information, and other documents. Adobe Exchange For more free content, visit www.adobe.com/go/exchange, an online community where users download and share thousands of free actions, extensions, plug-ins, and other content for use with Adobe products. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 7 User Guide Adobe Design Center Adobe Design Center offers articles, inspiration, and instruction from industry experts, top designers, and Adobe publishing partners. New content is added monthly. You can find hundreds of tutorials for design products and learn tips and techniques through videos, HTML tutorials, and sample book chapters. New ideas are the heart of Think Tank, Dialog Box, and Gallery: • Think Tank articles consider how today’s designers engage with technology and what their experiences mean for design, design tools, and society. • In Dialog Box, experts share new ideas in motion graphics and digital design. • The Gallery showcases how artists communicate design in motion. Visit Adobe Design Center at www.adobe.com/designcenter.ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 8 User Guide Adobe Developer Center Adobe Developer Center provides samples, tutorials, articles, and community resources for developers who build rich Internet applications, websites, mobile content, and other projects using Adobe products. The Developer Center also contains resources for developers who develop plug-ins for Adobe products. In addition to sample code and tutorials, you'll find RSS feeds, online seminars, SDKs, scripting guides, and other technical resources. Visit Adobe Developer Center at www.adobe.com/go/developer. Customer support Visit the Adobe Support website, at www.adobe.com/support, to find troubleshooting information for your product and to learn about free and paid technical support options. Follow the Training link for access to Adobe Press books, a variety of training resources, Adobe software certification programs, and more. Downloads Visit www.adobe.com/go/downloads to find free updates, tryouts, and other useful software. In addition, the Adobe Store (at www.adobe.com/go/store) provides access to thousands of plug-ins from third-party developers, helping you to automate tasks, customize workflows, create specialized professional effects, and more. Adobe Labs Adobe Labs gives you the opportunity to experience and evaluate new and emerging technologies and products from Adobe. At Adobe Labs, you have access to resources such as these: • Prerelease software and technologies • Code samples and best practices to accelerate your learning • Early versions of product and technical documentation ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 9 User Guide • Forums, wiki-based content, and other collaborative resources to help you interact with like-minded developers Adobe Labs fosters a collaborative software development process. In this environment, customers quickly become productive with new products and technologies. Adobe Labs is also a forum for early feedback, which the Adobe development teams use to create software that meets the needs and expectations of the community. Visit Adobe Labs at www.adobe.com/go/labs. User communities User communities feature forums, blogs, and other avenues for users to share technologies, tools, and information. Users can ask questions and find out how others are getting the most out of their software. User-to-user forums are available in English, French, German, and Japanese; blogs are posted in a wide range of languages. To participate in forums or blogs, visit www.adobe.com/communities. What’s new Viewing, navigating, and searching Getting Started window At a glance, see the main features of Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 and click links to start tasks or learn more about features. See “Start in the Getting Started window” on page 19. Maximized work area View PDFs in a new visual design for the work area, navigation pane, and toolbars. User interface elements have been removed to maximize space. See “View the work area” on page 15. Customizable toolbars Easily hide or show individual tools by right-clicking/Control-clicking a toolbar, or use the More Tools dialog box to customize toolbars. See “Display and arrange toolbars” on page 20. Search enhancements Find words or use advanced search tools, all from the same integrated toolbar. View search results in a floating, resizable panel. Search documents in a PDF package. See “Search features overview” on page 373. Embedded PDF search index Embed a search index for a specific file directly within the PDF to speed up searching. See “Create and manage an index in a PDF” on page 379. PDF creation, assembly, and editing PDF from a blank page Create a blank PDF page and type text onto the page. Format text using formatting controls. Lock the document so that it can’t be edited. See “Create a PDF from a blank page” on page 63. PDF packages Assemble PDF files (including PDF forms) and non-PDF files into a single package. Files aren’t modified when packaged, so signatures and security options stay intact. Documents within a package are viewed in the same window. Easily add, delete, or extract documents from the package. Search and print the current or selected document, or all documents within the package. See “About PDF packages” on page 119. Combined files user interface Combine files into a single PDF with concatenated pages, or assemble files into a PDF package. Choose simple options to control the size of the resulting PDF. See “Combining different types of files” on page 119. Mail merge to PDF within Microsoft® Word Convert Word mail merge documents to PDF and send them out by email. See “Create PDFs from Word mail merges” on page 81. Microsoft Excel worksheet enhancements (Windows) Select and order worksheets for conversion. Convert all links and bookmarks. Create PDF/A-compliant files. See “Application-specific PDFMaker settings” on page 85. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 10 User Guide Microsoft PowerPoint presentation enhancements (Windows) Convert overlapping shapes and images, action buttons, action settings, and speaker notes. Convert backgrounds to a separate, nonprinting layer. Create PDF/A­ compliant files. See “Application-specific PDFMaker settings” on page 85. Email conversion enhancements Convert an email message or a complete mail folder to PDF from Lotus Notes. Create PDF packages of email from both Microsoft Outlook and Lotus Notes. In Outlook on Windows, convert email archives to PDF packages and automatically archive email on a schedule. See “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78, “Migrate old Outlook PDF archives to PDF packages (Windows)” on page 80, and “Set up automatic email archiving (Windows)” on page 80. Scanning enhancements Scan to PDF or PDF/A from a broader range of scanners. Add metadata while scanning. Optimize a scanned PDF. See “Scan a paper document to PDF” on page 64. PDF/A-compliant files Create PDF/A-compliant files when scanning paper documents and when creating PDFs from Word, Microsoft Excel, Microsoft PowerPoint, Adobe Acrobat Distiller, and the Acrobat Preflight tool. Bates numbering Apply identifying labels to a batch of related documents—typically legal documents associated with a court case. Bates numbering appears as a header or footer on each page of each PDF in the batch. See “Add a Bates numbering header or footer” on page 128. Document examination Inspect PDFs for metadata, annotations, attachments, hidden data, form fields, hidden layers, or bookmarks. Remove some or all of the information. See “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248. Headers, footers, watermarks, and backgrounds Save header, footer, watermark, and background options as named settings for reuse. Remove or update existing headers, footers, watermarks, and backgrounds. Shrink content to accommodate headers and footers. Preview changes in real time. Set underline text. See “Add and edit headers and footers” on page 125. Review and commenting Acrobat Connect meetings Access the real-time, web-based collaboration capabilities of Acrobat Connect (sold separately). Click the Start Meeting button to escalate from a document review to real-time communication with others over the Internet. Acrobat Connect uses Adobe Flash® CS3 Professional and a personal meeting room for screen sharing, audio and video conferencing, whiteboarding, and more. When you first click the Start Meeting button, you can create a free trial account. Each subsequent time, you go directly to your Acrobat Connect personal meeting room. (Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages.) See “Meetings” on page 160. Shared reviews Initiate a review where comments are stored on a central server, allowing all participants to see comments in real time. No extra server software is needed. Shared reviews work with a folder on a network server, a Windows SharePoint workspace, or a web folder on a web server. Comments are automatically retrieved, even if Reader isn’t running and could be added even when you are disconnected from the network. Notifications alert users that there are new comments. Comments from reviewers outside the firewall can be merged into the shared review, and you can enable Reader users to participate in reviews. See “Start a shared review” on page 157. Review Tracker Provides details about all active reviews. For shared reviews, details include the number of comments from a reviewer, the review deadline, server status, unread reviews, and a summary of updated shared reviews. See “Tracking PDF reviews” on page 165. Commenting and markup enhancements View and accurately place callout and cloud markups as you apply them. The callout leader automatically moves as you position the callout. Selected comments are highlighted for easier visibility when zoomed out. Rotate stamps and select all tools from a single, integrated toolbar. See “Commenting” on page 168. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 11 User Guide Forms Simple forms creation (Windows) Use a wizard to create PDF forms from templates, existing electronic documents, paper forms, or spreadsheet data. Customize forms with contact information and logos. Edit in Adobe LiveCycle® Designer. See “Creating and editing forms” on page 212. PDF background artwork Import a PDF as background artwork on a form in LiveCycle Designer. Add form fields on top of the background. See LiveCycle Designer Help. Forms Tracker Track the forms you initiate or fill out. See “About Forms Tracker” on page 242. Export and compile form data Aggregate returned forms into a PDF package. Export the form data to a spreadsheet. See “Submitting forms” on page 205 and “Export records from a PDF data set” on page 241. Form field recognition Automatically recognize form fields on noninteractive PDF documents and convert them to interactive fields that can be filled electronically. See “Creating new forms” on page 212. Reader-enabled rights Enable Reader 7 and 8 users to fill in, digitally sign, and locally save forms and other PDFs. See “Enable Reader users to save form data” on page 213. Digital signatures Roaming IDs Enroll in a signing service where the server holds your private key. Authenticate to the server from Acrobat and allow the document to be signed with your credentials stored on the server. See “Set up a roaming ID account” on page 255. Signature preview mode and conformance checker Before signing, view the document content as it will appear after eliminating transparency, scripts, fonts, and other dynamic content that can alter a document’s appearance. Acrobat automatically runs the Document Integrity Checker, which now includes checking for Qualified Signatures conformance before entering signature preview mode. See “Sign in Preview Document mode” on page 280. Certificate enhancements Predetermine the signing certificate. Configure the chain model for certificate validation. See “Sharing and managing certificates” on page 258. Seed values Specify which choices a user can make when signing a document. See “Customizing signature properties using seed values” on page 277. Signatures in Reader Allow Reader users to draw a signature field. See “Before you certify a PDF” on page 281. Architecture, engineering, and construction Batch conversion/direct conversion From Autodesk AutoCAD, convert multiple AutoCAD files to multiple PDFs. Convert AutoCAD files to PDF with improved speed. See “Convert AutoCAD files to PDF (Windows)” on page 83. DWG/DWF support Convert AutoCAD DWF and DWG format files without installing AutoCAD. 2D Measurement tool enhancements Measurement is recalculated if start or end points move. Measurements snap to lines, intersections, or corners. See “Measure the height, width, or area of objects” on page 44. 3D Computer Aided Design (CAD) Produce compact PDFs Adjust 3D conversion settings to create highly compressed, universally-accessible PDF files that are a fraction of the size of the original CAD file or assembly. See “About PRC and U3D conversion formats” on page 390. Import PMI Import and view geometric dimensioning and tolerancing specifications in the 3D model as Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) instead of sending a separate 2D drawing. Supported file formats include CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX, and Pro/ENGINEER. See “View Product Manufacturing Information (PMI)” on page 406. Export geometry Export geometry to standard formats (IGES, STEP, ParaSolid, and VRML) for interoperability with Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) applications. See “Exporting geometry from 3D models” on page 414. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 12 User Guide Support for latest CAD applications Open the latest versions of most CAD file formats without installing the CAD application. See “About supported 3D file formats” on page 388. Legal Redaction tools Mark text, images, and sensitive areas for redaction. Permanently apply redaction. Modify the appearance of redaction marks, including color and codes. See “Redact sensitive content” on page 249. Search and redact From within the Search feature, mark some or all search results for redaction. See “Search and redact words” on page 250. Bates numbering Apply identifying labels to a batch of related documents—typically legal documents associated with a court case. Bates numbering appears as a header or footer on each page of each PDF in the batch. See “Add a Bates numbering header or footer” on page 128. Creative professional Color management improvements In Adobe Creative Suite, synchronize settings for on-screen color across the applications with a single click. See “Synchronize color settings across Adobe applications” on page 421. Shared transparency flattener presets Define flattener presets in one Adobe application, such as Acrobat, and then easily share those swatches with other applications, such as Adobe Illustrator® and Adobe InDesign®. See “Create a flattener preset” on page 485. Preflight Locate, modify, or remove PDF elements using customizable fixup profiles. Create an inventory of PDF content, including Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP) metadata. Perform advanced inspections on Cos objects and fonts. Convert to and validate PDF/X-4 and PDF/A files. Edit droplet settings for automated preflight inspec­ tions. See “Correcting problem areas” on page 508 and “Advanced inspections” on page 497. Booklet printing Print pages as a simple booklet, such as 2-up, saddle-stitched. See “Print a booklet” on page 444. Metadata in documents and objects Maintain and access document and object-level metadata. See “Document properties and metadata” on page 360. TouchUp Object tool enhancement See and change the color space of a selected object. Scale, rotate, or clip an object. See “Move or edit an object” on page 351. Additional new features FIPS mode Version 8.1 of Acrobat provides a FIPS mode to restrict data protection to Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 approved algorithms using the RSABSAFE Crypto-C 2.1 encryption module. See “Securing PDFs in FIPS mode (Windows)” on page 264. Microsoft Windows Vista™ support Version 8.1 of Acrobat supports Windows Vista. Installing Acrobat on 64-bit versions of Windows Version 8.1 of Acrobat supports the 64-bit versions of Microsoft Windows XP and Windows Vista. Version Cue 2.0 Manage files and versions as a single user or in a small workgroup. Integrate with Adobe Bridge to manage files for your Creative Suite projects. See “Adobe Version Cue” on page 527. Digital Editions Read and organize eBooks and other publications with Adobe® Digital Editions (a separate product). When you first click the Digital Editions menu item, you can download and install the Adobe Digital Editions software. After installation, choose Digital Editions to go directly to your Adobe Digital Editions bookshelf. See “Adobe Digital Editions” on page 54. Printing over the Internet Print documents to a FedEx Kinkos office in the United States. See “Print over the Internet” on page 440. 2D Measurement tool enhancements Measurement is recalculated if start or end points move. Measurements snap to lines, intersections, or corners. See “Measure the height, width, or area of objects” on page 44. 13 Chapter 2: Workspace As you get acquainted with Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8, make setting up your Acrobat work environment a priority. The more you learn about its potential, the better you can take advantage of its features, tools, and options. There’s much more to the application than you see at first glance. Acrobat has hidden tools, preferences, and options that can enhance your experience and give you greater control over how your work area is arranged and displayed. Quickstart Customize the work area You can change the work area to suit your needs. • To change the toolbars that appear, choose View > Toolbars, and select the desired toolbars. • To change the navigation pane view, click one of the buttons to the left of the navigation pane. • To customize the display colors for page background and document text, choose Edit > Preferences > Accessi­ bility. • To set the default zoom level and page layout, choose Edit > Preferences > Page Display. See also “Customizing the work area” on page 19 Move a toolbar Some toolbars, such as the Tasks toolbar, appear in the toolbar area. Others, such as the Comment & Markup toolbar, open as floating toolbars. ? To move a toolbar, drag the grabber bar at the left edge of the toolbar: • Drag a toolbar to a new location in the toolbar area. • Drag a toolbar out of the toolbar area to create a floating toolbar. • Drag a floating toolbar into the toolbar area. See also “Display and arrange toolbars” on page 20 Add tools and toolbars You can customize Acrobat to display the tools and toolbars you use most often. ? Right-click/Control-click a toolbar and do any of the following: • Select the buttons you want to display. • Choose Hide Toolbars and select the toolbars you want to hide. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 14 User Guide • Choose More Tools, and select the toolbars and buttons you want to display. See also “Show and hide toolbar elements” on page 22 Change the look of a tool or object You can easily change the properties for many tools and objects, including comments, form fields, and bookmarks. 1 Right-click/Control-click the tool or object you want to change. 2 Choose Properties or Tool Default Properties. 3 Set the desired properties. To apply an object’s settings to all subsequent objects of the same type, right-click/Control-click the object and choose Make Current Properties Default or Use Current Properties As New Defaults. See also “Review properties for tools and objects” on page 22 Change viewing mode To give you more space for reading a document, you can change the viewing mode. ? Choose View > Reading Mode or Full Screen Mode. In Reading mode, toolbars and the navigation pane are hidden but the menu bar is present. In Full Screen mode, everything but the document is hidden. To exit from Full Screen mode, press Esc. See also “View PDFs in Full Screen mode” on page 30 View PDFs in a package An Adobe PDF package opens with a list of the PDFs it contains and a PDF package navigation bar. ? Open the package and do any of the following: • To view a PDF, select it from the PDF list or click Open Next or Open Previous . • To change the position of the PDF list, click one of the list position icons. • To access package-related commands, click Options and choose the desired command. See also “View, sort, and search components in a PDF package” on page 27 View attachments A PDF may have other PDFs attached to it, either as single files or a PDF package. When you open a PDF containing attachments, the Attachment panel opens automatically. ? Double-click the desired PDF. The attachment opens in a new window. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 15 User Guide If the attachment is a PDF package, the first PDF in the package opens along with a list of all PDFs in the package. Click a PDF to view it. See also “PDFs with file attachments” on page 30 Reduce PDF file size Reducing the size of PDFs improves their performance—particularly when they’re being accessed on the web. 1 Choose Document > Reduce File Size. 2 Select the version compatibility you need, and click OK. 3 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. If you’re certain that all your users use Acrobat 8 or Adobe Reader 8, limiting compatibility to the latest version can further reduce file size. See also “Reduce file size by saving” on page 48 Locate PDFs in the Organizer The Organizer helps you quickly locate PDFs you’ve previously opened and PDFs you’ve organized into collections or favorites. 1 Choose File > Organizer > Open Organizer. 2 Click in the categories pane on the left to locate PDFs. All PDFs found are listed in the files pane. After you locate a PDF, you can use the buttons at the top of the Organizer to work with the file. See also “Organizer window overview” on page 48 Work area basics View the work area Acrobat opens in two different ways: as a stand-alone application, and in a web browser. The associated work areas differ in small but important ways. The Acrobat work area includes a document pane that displays PDFs and a navigation pane on the left side that helps you browse through the current PDF. Toolbars near the top of the window provide other controls that you can use to work with PDFs. Note: Opening certain types of PDFs causes specialized parts of the work area to appear: the document message bar and PDF package navigation features. For other types of PDFs, these areas are not seen and not available. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 16 User Guide See also “Document message bar” on page 18 “Navigation areas for PDF packages” on page 18 View the work area for PDFs open in the application 1 Click the Acrobat icon on the desktop, or use the Start menu (Windows) or Finder (Mac OS) to start the Acrobat application. 2 Choose File > Open, navigate to and select any PDF on your computer, and click Open. A B C D Acrobat window A. Menu bar B. Toolbars C. Navigation pane (Bookmarks panel displayed) D. Document pane View the work area for PDFs open in a web browser 1 Open a web browser application. 2 Do one of the following: • Select a PDF anywhere on the Internet and open it. • Choose File > Open (or Open File). If necessary, choose PDF or All Files in the pop-up menu for the type of file. Then navigate to and select any PDF on your computer or local network, and click Open. 3 Identify items in the work area. A B ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 17 User Guide C D PDF open within a web browser A. Web browser application menu bar and buttons B. Acrobat toolbars C. Navigation pane (Bookmarks panel displayed) D. Document pane Opening PDFs You can open a PDF in many ways: from within the Acrobat application, from your email application, from your file system, or on a network from within a web browser. The initial view of the PDF depends on how its creator set the document properties. For example, a document may open at a particular page or magnification. Some PDFs are restricted and open only after you enter a password provided to you by the PDF owner. If a document is encrypted, you may need the permission of its creator to open it. In the case of some restricted or certified documents, you may be prevented from printing a file or copying information to another application. If you have trouble opening a PDF or can’t use certain features, contact its author or owner. If a document is set to open in Full Screen mode, the toolbar, command bar, menu bar, and window controls are not visible. You can quit Full Screen mode by pressing the Esc key if your preferences are set this way, or by pressing Ctrl+L/Command+L. See also “Defining initial view as Full Screen mode” on page 353 “Navigation areas for PDF packages” on page 18 “Open secured PDFs” on page 247 Select another tool By default, the Select tool is active when Acrobat opens, because it is the most versatile tool. Specialized tools, such as those for zooming in or adding review comments, are available in toolbars and in the Tools menus. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 18 User Guide Select a tool ? Do one of the following: • Select a tool in a toolbar. • Choose Tools > [toolbar name] > [tool]. Switch temporarily to the Zoom In or Hand tool You can use these tools temporarily, without deselecting the current tool. • To select the Hand tool temporarily, hold down the spacebar. • To select the Zoom In tool temporarily, hold down Ctrl+spacebar/Command+spacebar. When you release the keys, Acrobat reverts to the previously active tool. Document message bar The document message bar appears only in certain types of PDFs. Typically, you see this area when you open a PDF form, a PDF that has been sent to you for review, or a PDF with special rights or security restrictions. The document message bar appears immediately below the toolbar area, and can be hidden or shown by clicking its button on the left side of the work area. Look on the document message bar for instructions on how to proceed and for any special buttons associated with the task. The bar is color coded: purple for forms, yellow for reviews, and blue for certified or secure PDFs. Document message bar for a form See also “Filling in PDF forms” on page 201 “Commenting” on page 168 Navigation areas for PDF packages When you open a PDF package, two unique areas appear: PDF package navigation bar Located immediately below the toolbars area. Look here for the Cover Sheet button , buttons that hide or set the orientation of the list of component documents, buttons for moving to the next or previous component document, and an Options menu with commands for viewing, editing, and using the PDF package. List of component documents By default, located between the PDF package navigation bar and the document pane, but can be hidden or displayed vertically, to the left of the navigation pane. Selecting a component file in the list opens it in the document pane. D E A B c ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 19 User Guide Navigation areas for PDF packages A. Cover Sheet button B. PDF list display options C. Open Previous button, currently displayed PDF filename, Open Next button D. PDF package navigation bar E. List of component PDFs (shown vertically) See also “About PDF packages” on page 119 “View, sort, and search components in a PDF package” on page 27 Start in the Getting Started window The Getting Started window opens by default when you start Acrobat. The home page in this window contains links that open additional pages. All Getting Started pages include buttons and links that start specific tasks or display topics in the full Acrobat Help system (which you are reading now). You can open or close the Getting Started window, or simply let it remain open behind or beside the Acrobat work area. Start a task from the Getting Started window 1 On the Getting Started home page, select a task group, such as Create PDF or Review & Comment. 2 Start a task or view a Help topic: • Click an action text link or button to initiate a task. • Click an information text link or button to open full Acrobat Help to the related Help topic. If you decide to try a different task group, click Home in the upper-left corner to return to the Getting Started home page. Reopen and reset the Getting Started window 1 Choose Help > Getting Started With Adobe Acrobat®. 2 Deselect the Do Not Show At Startup option in the upper-right corner. Customizing the work area Displaying menus Ordinarily, it’s a good idea to keep the Acrobat menus visible so that they are available as you work. It is possible to hide them, using the View > Menu Bar command. However, the only way to display and use them again is by pressing F9/Shift+Command+M. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 20 User Guide Acrobat also has numerous context-sensitive menus. These menus appear when you right-click/Control-click an element in the work area or PDF that has such a menu associated with it. A context menu displays commands that relate to the item or area that you clicked. For example, when you right-click/Control-click the toolbar area, that context menu displays the same commands as the View > Toolbars menu. Note: The Acrobat menu bar appears only if Acrobat is open as a stand-alone application. If Acrobat is open within the browser, only the browser application menu appears at the top of the window. However, context menus are available in both cases. About toolbars Toolbars reduce clutter in the work area by arranging tools in task-related groups. For example, the Page Display toolbar includes buttons for changing how many pages you can see at a time in the document window. The Comment & Markup toolbar contains tools for reviewing and annotating a PDF. Any toolbar can float or be docked. Docked toolbars appear in the toolbar area. Floating toolbars appear as independent panels that you can move anywhere in the work area. Each toolbar has a grabber bar, which is a vertical gray stripe at the left end of the toolbar. • When you position the pointer over a grabber bar, a tool tip displays the name of the associated toolbar. • When you drag a grabber bar, the toolbar moves. You can drag toolbars off the toolbar area (so that they float), dock them in the toolbar area, or rearrange them in the toolbar area. Some toolbars appear by default and some are hidden. Buttons in the Tasks toolbar behave somewhat differently from other toolbar buttons. Each of these buttons is associated with a menu of commands. Click the arrow to the right of the button name to open the menu. For example, click the arrow next to the Start Meeting button to display a menu of commands related to Adobe Acrobat Connect meetings. Position the pointer over a tool to see a description of the tool. Position the pointer over the grabber bar on the left edge of a toolbar to see its name. All tools are identified by name in the More Tools dialog box (Tools > Customize Toolbars). See also “Customizing the work area” on page 19 “Displaying menus” on page 19 Display and arrange toolbars When your work does not involve using the tools in a toolbar, you can close the toolbar to tidy up the work area. For example, if you are not adding review comments to a PDF, there’s no need to have the Comment & Markup toolbar open. When you need easy access to a toolbar that is hidden by default, you can open it. This toolbar appears as a floating panel, which you can move or dock in the toolbar area. Note: If several PDFs are open, you can customize the toolbars for each PDF independently. The different customized states persist as you switch between PDFs. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 21 User Guide Show or hide toolbars • To op en a t o olb ar, cho os e Vie w > To olb ars > [toolbar name]. A check mark next to the toolbar name indicates that the toolbar is displayed. • To hide all toolbars, choose View > Toolbars > Hide Toolbars. • To change a toolbar that is either shown or hidden, right-click/Control-click the toolbar area, and choose the toolbar you want to show or hide. • To change the visibility of several toolbars, choose Tools > Customize Toolbars or View > Toolbars > More Tools. Then, select and deselect toolbars. (Check marks by the toolbar names indicate which ones are currently visible.) Note:Whether a new toolbar opens as a floating toolbar or docked in the toolbar area depends on its default position or where it appeared in your previous configuration of the work area, if any. Move toolbars • To rearrange the docked toolbars, use the toolbar grabber bars to drag them from one position to another. • To move a floating toolbar, drag it by its title bar or grabber bar to another location in the work area. • To float a docked toolbar, drag it by its grabber bar from the toolbar area. Use the title bar to move a section of tools from the toolbar area. • To dock a floating toolbar, drag it by its title bar or grabber bar to the toolbar area. • To move all floating toolbars to the toolbar area, choose View > Toolbars > Dock Toolbars. Rows may be added to or removed from the toolbar area as you move the toolbars in and out. Return toolbars to their default configuration ? Choose View > Toolbars > Reset Toolbars. Lock or unlock the toolbar area Locking the toolbars prevents any rearrangement of the toolbar area, so all grabber bars disappear when the toolbar area is locked. Locking does not affect the positions of any floating toolbars. ? Choose View > Toolbars > Lock Toolbars. Select the command a second time to unlock the toolbar area. Note:When the toolbar area is locked, you can still move floating toolbars by dragging them by their title bars. However, you can’t dock them unless you unlock the toolbar area. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 22 User Guide About the Properties toolbar The Properties toolbar looks like any other toolbar and can be moved, docked, or floated in the same way. It also contains buttons and can be hidden or displayed by choosing it by name from the View > Toolbars menu. The buttons in the Properties toolbar display properties of the currently selected tool or object. Unlike buttons in most toolbars, the buttons in the Properties toolbar can’t be hidden. Also, many of the buttons merely display infor­ mation, so you cannot use them to make changes to the PDF. Show and hide toolbar elements You can alter the display within an individual toolbar to keep just the tools you need available with a minimum of wasted space. You can also show and hide tool labels. Show or hide individual tools Acrobat includes more tools and more toolbars than the set that appears by default. You can customize the toolbars so that the tools you use most often appear in the toolbar area. ? Do any of the following: • Right-click/Control-click the toolbar, and select a tool that you want to display or deselect a tool that is already displayed if you want to hide it. • Right-click/Control-click any toolbar and choose More Tools. Then select individual tools and toolbars that you want to display, and deselect those that you want to hide. Note: A selected tool appears in the toolbar area only if its toolbar is also selected in the More Tools dialog box. Show or hide tool labels The default view shows labels for some toolbar buttons. You can show labels for all buttons to help you as you learn to use Acrobat, or you can hide all tool labels to save space in the toolbar area. ? Choose View > Toolbars > Button Labels > [option]. Note: Tool labels are turned off selectively when space in the toolbar area becomes limited. Review properties for tools and objects The Properties toolbar provides easy access to the properties for many tools and objects such as links, comments, form fields, media clips, and bookmarks. For example, if you select the Note tool, the Properties toolbar displays the current default properties for that tool. If you select a note in the document, the Properties toolbar displays properties for that note. You can use the Properties toolbar to change many of the settings that appear there. A few items only provide infor­ mation and cannot be edited. Like all toolbars, the Properties toolbar can float or be docked in the toolbar area. The Properties toolbar is different in that it doesn’t contain tools and can’t be customized to hide options. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar. • Right-click/Control-click the toolbar area, and choose Properties Bar from the context menu. 2 Select the object or tool that you want to review. 3 Change properties for the selected item, as desired. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 23 User Guide o If you want to change object properties other than those listed in the Properties toolbar, right-click/Control-click the bject, and choose Properties. Show or hide the navigation pane The navigation pane is an area of the work space that can display different navigation panels. Typically, these panels act like a table of contents, with items you can click to jump to a specific place in the document. For example, the Pages panel contains thumbnail images of each page; clicking a thumbnail opens that page in the document. When you open a PDF, the navigation pane is closed by default, but buttons along the left side of the work area provide easy access to various panels, such as the Pages panel button and the Bookmarks panel button . When Acrobat is open but empty (no PDF is open), the navigation pane is unavailable. 1 To open the navigation pane, do one of the following: • Click any panel button on the left side of the work area to open that panel. • Choose View > Navigation Panels > Show Navigation Pane. 2 To close the navigation pane, do one of the following: • Click the button for the currently open panel in the navigation pane. • Choose View > Navigation Panels > Hide Navigation Pane. Note: The creator of the PDF can control the contents of some navigation panels and may make them empty. Adjust navigation panels Like toolbars, navigation panels can be docked in the navigation pane, or they can float anywhere in the work area. You can hide or close panels you don’t need and open the ones you do. You can also adjust the width of the navigation pane. Change the display area for navigation panels • To change the width of the navigation pane, drag its right border. • To collapse a floating panel without closing it, click the tab name at the top of the window. Click the tab name again to restore the panel to its full size. Change the orientation of a docked navigation panel By default, some panels, such as Bookmarks, appear in a column on the left side of the work area. Others, such as the Comments panel, appear horizontally across the bottom of the document pane. You can change the orientation of any panel to either vertical or horizontal by dragging the button for that panel, which appears on the left side of the work area. • To orient the panel vertically, drag its button to the upper part of the navigation pane, near the buttons of other vertically oriented panels. • To orient the panel horizontally, drag its button to the lower part of the navigation pane, near the buttons of other horizontally oriented panels. In either case, a gray frame highlights the entire panel buttons area. If you release the mouse button before the area is highlighted, the panel will float above the work area. If that happens, try again by dragging the panel tab into the upper or lower part of the button area. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 24 User Guide View a different panel in the navigation pane By default, only a selected set of panel buttons appears on the left side of the work area. Other panels are included in the View menu and may open as floating panels rather than in the navigation pane. However, you can dock the panel in the navigation pane later. ? Do one of the following: • On the left side of the navigation pane, select the button for the panel. • Choose View > Navigation Panels > [panel name]. Dock or float navigation panels • To float a panel that is docked in the navigation pane, drag the panel button into the document pane. • To dock a floating panel, drag the tab to the navigation pane. • To group two floating panels, drag the tab of one panel into the other floating panel. Options in a navigation panel All navigation panels have an Options menu in the upper-right corner. The commands available in these menu vary. Some panels also contain other buttons that affect the items in the panel. Again, these vary among the different panels, and some panels have none. Click Options to open the menu. Viewing PDF pages Open a PDF You can open a PDF from within the Acrobat application, from the desktop, or from within certain other applica­ tions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 25 User Guide Open a PDF in the application ? Start Acrobat and do one of the following: • Choose File > Open, or click the Open button in the toolbar. In the Open dialog box, select one or more filenames, and click Open. PDF documents usually have the extension .pdf. • (Windows) Choose File > [a previously opened PDF]. • (Mac OS) Choose File > Open Recent File > [a previously opened PDF]. • From either the File > Organizer submenu or the Organizer button menu on the File toolbar, choose Collections > [collection name] > [PDF filename]. • From the File menu or the Organizer button menu on the File toolbar, choose History > [time period] > [PDF filename]. If more than one document is open, you can switch between documents by choosing the document name from the Window menu. In Windows, the application places a button for each open document on the Windows taskbar. You can click this button to move between open documents. Open a PDF from the desktop or within another application ? Do one of the following: • To open a PDF attached to an email message, open the message, either by double-clicking the PDF icon or rightclicking/Control-clicking and choosing Open. • To open a PDF linked to an open web page, click the PDF file link. The PDF usually opens in the web browser. • Double-click the PDF File icon in your file system. Note: In Mac OS, you may not be able to open a PDF created in Windows by double-clicking the icon. Instead, choose File > Open With > Acrobat. Opening pages in a PDF Depending on the PDF you open, you may need to move forward through multiple pages, see different parts of the page, or change the magnification. There are many ways to navigate, but the following items are commonly used: Note: If you do not see these items, choose View > Toolbars > Reset Toolbars. Next and Previous The Next Page and Previous Page buttons appear on the Page Navigation toolbar. The text box next to them is also interactive, so you can type a page number and press Enter to go directly to that page. Scroll bars Vertical and horizontal scroll bars appear to the right and bottom of the document pane whenever the view does not show the entire document. Click the arrows or drag to view other pages or different areas of the page. Select & Zoom toolbar This toolbar contains buttons and controls for changing the page magnification. Pages panel The Pages button on the left side of the work area opens the navigation pane to the Pages panel, which displays thumbnail images of each page. Click a page thumbnail to open that page in the document pane. See also “Retrace your viewing path” on page 29 “Adjust page magnification” on page 38 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 26 User Guide Page through a document There are many ways to turn pages in a PDF. Many people use the buttons on the Page Navigation toolbar, but you can also use arrow keys, scroll bars, and other features to move forward and backward through a multipage PDF. The Page Navigation toolbar opens by default. The default toolbar contains frequently used tools: the Next Page , Previous Page , and Page Number. Like all toolbars, the Page Navigation toolbar can be hidden and reopened by choosing it on the Toolbars menu under the View menu. You can display additional tools on the Page Navigation toolbar by right-clicking/Control-clicking the toolbar and choosing an individual tool, Show All Tools, or More Tools and then selecting and deselecting tools in the dialog box. See also “About bookmarks” on page 327 “About page thumbnails” on page 324 “Set the page layout and orientation” on page 41 Move through a PDF ? Do one of the following: • Click the Previous Page or Next Page button on the toolbar. • Choose View > Go To > [location]. • Choose View > Go To > Page, and then type the page number in the Go To Page dialog box. • Press the Page Up and Page Down keys. Jump to a specific page ? Do one of the following: • Drag the vertical scroll bar until the page appears in the small pop-up display. • Type the page number to replace the one currently displayed in the Page Navigation toolbar, and press Enter or Return. Note: If the document page numbers are different from the actual page position in the PDF file, the page’s position within the file appears in parentheses after the assigned page number in the Page Navigation toolbar. For example, if you assign numbering for a file that is an 18-page chapter to begin with page 223, the number shown when the first page is active is 223 (1 of 18). You can turn off logical page numbers in the Page Display preferences. See “Renumber pages” on page 138 and “Preferences for viewing PDFs” on page 33. Jump to bookmarked pages Bookmarks provide a table of contents and usually represent the chapters and sections in a document. Bookmarks appear in the navigation pane. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 27 User Guide A C B Bookmarks panel A. Bookmarks button B. Expanded bookmark C. Click to display bookmark Options menu. 1 Click the Bookmarks button, or choose View > Navigation Panels > Bookmarks. 2 To jump to a topic, click the bookmark. Click the plus (+) or minus (-) sign to expand or collapse the bookmark contents. Note: Depending on how the bookmark was defined, clicking it may not take you to that location but perform some other action instead. If the list of bookmarks disappears when you click a bookmark, click the Bookmarks button to display the list again. If you want to hide the Bookmarks button after you click a bookmark, select Hide After Use on the Options menu. Use page thumbnails to jump to specific pages Page thumbnails provide miniature previews of document pages. You can use thumbnails in the Pages panel to change the display of pages and to go to other pages. The red page-view box in the page thumbnail indicates which area of the page appears. You can resize this box to change the zoom percentage. 1 Click the Pages button or choose View > Navigation Panels > Pages to display the Pages panel. 2 To jump to another page, click its thumbnail. View, sort, and search components in a PDF package Both Adobe Reader users and Acrobat users can view, sort, and search component files in a PDF package. Note: You can dramatically increase the speed of searches by creating an embedded index when you create a PDF package. See also “Searching PDFs” on page 373 “Creating PDF indexes” on page 379 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 28 User Guide View component PDFs in a PDF package The PDF package navigation bar contains buttons that control the visibility and placement of the list of component files. If the list is hidden, the View Top button or View Left button will make the list visible either horizontally or vertically adjacent to the document pane. 1 Open the PDF package in Acrobat. 2 In the PDF package navigation bar, select the View Left or View Top button , as needed, so that you can see the list of component PDFs. 3 Select the PDF you want to read. Or, use the Open Next and Open Previous buttons to review the component PDFs one by one. Sort the components of a PDF package Because the data categories are shown in columns in View Top mode, use that view to complete this procedure. 1 In the PDF package navigation bar, select the View Top button , if necessary, so that you can see the list of component PDFs and the categories bar across the top of the list. 2 Do any of the following: • Click a category name. Click it a second time to reverse the order between Ascending and Descending. • In the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Sort By > [category name]. • Right-click/Control-click a PDF in the list or anywhere in the categories bar and choose Sort By > [category name]. • Right-click/Control-click a PDF in the list or anywhere in the categories bar and choose Package Properties. Then choose options in the Sort By and Sort Order menus. (This sets the default sorting for the PDF package.) Note: Unless you change the default sorting for the PDF package, the sorting remains in place for only the current session or until you change the sorting again. The next time you open the PDF package, it will appear in the default sorting order. Search component PDFs in a PDF package 1 Choose Edit > Search, or choose Open Full Acrobat Search on the Find toolbar pop-up menu. 2 Select which PDFs to search. You can search only the currently open document, several documents that you select, or all the PDFs in the package. 3 Enter the search text and select other options for searching, as usual. Automatically scroll through a document Automatic scrolling advances your view of the PDF at a steady rate, moving vertically down the document. If you interrupt the process by using the scroll bars to move back or forward to another page or position, automatic scrolling continues from that point forward. At the end of the PDF, automatic scrolling stops and does not begin again until you choose automatic scrolling again. 1 Choose View > Automatically Scroll. 2 Press Esc to stop scrolling. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 29 User Guide Retrace your viewing path You can find PDF pages that you viewed earlier by retracing your viewing path. It’s helpful to understand the difference between previous and next pages and previous and next views. In the case of pages, previous and next refer to the two adjacent pages, before and after the currently active page. In the case of views, previous and next refer to your viewing history. For example, if you jump forward and backward in a document, your viewing history retraces those steps, showing you the pages you viewed in the reverse order that you viewed them. Retrace your path in a PDF 1 Choose View > Go To > Previous View. 2 To continue seeing another part of your path, do either of the following: • Repeat step 1. • Choose View > Go To > Next View. Note: You can make the Previous View button and Go To Next View button available in the toolbar area by right-clicking/Control-clicking the Page Navigation toolbar and choosing them on the context menu, or choosing Show All Tools. Retrace your path through multiple PDFs ? Choose View > Go To > Previous Document or Next Document. These commands open the other PDF documents if the documents are closed. Note: If Acrobat is open in a web browser, you can use the web browser’s Back and Forward options as usual to retrace your steps. Change the PDF/A viewing mode PDF/A is an ISO standard for PDFs. Documents you scan to PDF are PDF/A-compliant. You can specify when and whether you want to view documents in this viewing mode. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat> Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Select Documents under Categories. 3 Choose an option for View Documents In PDF/A: Never, Always, or Only For PDF/A Documents. You can switch in or out of PDF/A viewing mode by changing this preference setting again. Navigate with links Links can take you to another location in the current document, to other PDF documents, or to websites. Clicking a link can also open file attachments and play 3D content, movies, and sound clips. To play these media clips, you must have the appropriate hardware and software installed. The person who created the PDF document determines what links look like in the PDF. Note: Unless a link was created in Acrobat using the Link tool, you must have the Automatically Detect URLs From Text option selected in the General preferences for a link to work correctly. 1 Choose the Select tool . 2 Position the pointer over the linked area on the page until the pointer changes to the hand with a pointing finger. A plus sign (+) or a w appears within the hand if the link points to the web. Then click the link. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 30 User Guide See also “Links and attachments” on page 331 “Multimedia preferences” on page 37 PDFs with file attachments If you open a PDF that has one or more attached files, the Attachments panel automatically opens, listing the attached files. You can open these files for viewing, edit the attachments, and save your changes, as permitted by the document authors. If you move the PDF to a new location, the attachments automatically move with it. See also “Open, save, or delete an attachment” on page 335 Open or close reading mode The reading mode view hides everything in the work area except the document and the menu bar. ? Choose View > Reading Mode. Choosing Reading Mode again restores the work area to its previous view, with the same navigation buttons and toolbar displays. View PDFs in Full Screen mode In Full Screen mode, PDF pages fill the entire screen; the menu bar, toolbars, and window controls are hidden. A PDF creator can set a PDF to open in Full Screen mode, or you can set the view yourself. Full Screen mode is often used for presentations, sometimes with automatic page advancement and transitions. The pointer remains active in Full Screen mode so that you can click links and open notes. There are two ways to advance through a PDF in Full Screen mode: You can use keyboard shortcuts for navigational and magnification commands, and you can set a Full Screen preference to display Full Screen navigation buttons that you click to change pages or exit Full Screen mode. See also “Preferences for viewing PDFs” on page 33 “Setting up a presentation” on page 353 Set the Full Screen navigation bar preference 1 Choose Edit > Preferences. 2 Under Categories, select Full Screen. 3 Select Show Navigation Bar. 4 Select View > Full Screen Mode. The Full Screen navigation bar contains Previous Page , Next Page , and Close Full Screen View buttons, which appear in the lower left corner of the work area. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 31 User Guide Read a document in Full Screen mode If the Full Screen navigation bar is not shown, you can use keyboard shortcuts to navigate through a PDF. Note: If you have two monitors installed, the Full Screen mode of a page may appear on only one of the monitors. To page through the document, click the screen displaying the page in Full Screen mode. 1 Choose View > Full Screen Mode. 2 Do any of the following: • To go to the next page, press the Enter, Page Down, or Right Arrow key. • To go to the previous page, press Shift+Enter, Page Up, or the Left Arrow key. • To change the magnification, press Ctrl+0/Command+0 for Fit Page view, Ctrl+1/Command+1 for actual size, Ctrl+2/Command+2 for Fit Width view, or Ctrl+3/Command+3 for Fit Visible view. You can show a Full Screen tool on the Page Display toolbar by right-clicking/Control-clicking the Page Display toolbar and choosing Full Screen Mode. Then, you can click the Full Screen tool to switch to Full Screen mode. Close Full Screen mode ? Do one of the following: • Press Ctrl+L/Command+L. • Press Esc. (Escape Key Exits must be selected in the Full Screen preferences. This is the default setting.) Viewing PDFs in a web browser You can view PDFs in a supported web browser, or you can set your Acrobat Internet preferences to open linked or downloaded PDF files in a separate Acrobat window. If you open PDFs in Acrobat outside the browser, you cannot use Fast Web Viewing, form submittal in a browser, or search highlighting on the web. Because keyboard commands may be mapped to the web browser, some Acrobat shortcuts may not be available. Similarly, you may need to use the tools and commands in the Acrobat toolbar rather than the browser toolbar or menu bar. For example, to print a PDF document, use the Print button in the Acrobat toolbar rather than the Print command in the browser. (In Microsoft Internet Explorer, you can choose File > Print, Edit > Copy, and Edit > Find on the Internet Explorer toolbar.) Important: (Mac OS) If you have Adobe Reader installed on your system and subsequently install Acrobat, Safari continues to use Adobe Reader to open PDFs in your browser. To reconfigure Safari to use Acrobat, you must quit Safari and all versions of Acrobat or Adobe Reader, start Acrobat, and then start Safari while Acrobat is running. Internet preferences To open the Internet preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Internet under Categories. Display PDF In Browser Displays any PDF opened from the web in the browser window. If this option is not selected, PDFs open in a separate Acrobat window. On Mac OS, if you have installed versions of Adobe Reader and Acrobat, you can select which application and which version to use. Allow Fast Web View Downloads PDFs for viewing on the web one page at a time. If this option is not selected, the entire PDF downloads before it is displayed. If you want the entire PDF to continue downloading in the background while you view the first page of requested information, also select Allow Speculative Downloading In The Background. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 32 User Guide Allow Speculative Downloading In The Background Allows a PDF to continue downloading from the web, even after the first requested page appears. Downloading in the background stops when any other task, such as paging through the document, is initiated in Acrobat. Connection Speed Choose a connection speed from the menu. This setting is also used by the multimedia plug-in. Internet Settings [or Network Settings] Click to open the Internet or network connection dialog box or panel for your computer. For more information, consult your operating system Help, your Internet service provider, or your local network administrator. Read articles In PDFs, articles are optional electronic threads that the PDF author may define within that PDF. Articles lead readers through the PDF content, jumping over pages or areas of the page that are not included in the article, in the same way that you might skim through a traditional newspaper or magazine, following one specific story and ignoring the rest. When you read an article, the page view may zoom in or out so that the current part of the article fills the screen. See also “Articles” on page 340 Open and navigate an article thread 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Hand Tool, or click the Hand Tool on the Select & Zoom toolbar. 2 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Articles to open the Articles panel. Note: You cannot open the Articles panel if you are viewing the PDF inside a browser. You must open the PDF in Acrobat. 3 Double-click the article icon to go to the beginning of that article. The icon changes to the follow-article pointer . Note: If the Articles panel is blank, then the author has not defined any article threads for this PDF. 4 With the article thread open, do any of the following: • To scroll through the article one pane at a time, press Enter/Return or click in the article. • To scroll backward through the article one pane at a time, Shift-click in the article, or press Shift+Return. • To go to the beginning of the article, Ctrl-click/Option-click within the article. 5 At the end of the article, click in the article again. The previous page view is restored, and the pointer changes to the end-article pointer Exit a thread before the end of the article 1 Make sure that the Hand tool is selected. 2 Shift+Ctrl-click/Shift+Option-click the page or press Enter/Return. The previous page view is restored. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 33 User Guide Preferences for viewing PDFs The Preferences dialog box defines a default page layout and customizes your application in many other ways. To modify preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select the panel you want under Categories. For viewing PDFs, examine the preferences options for Documents, General, Multi­ media, and Page Display. The preferences settings control how the application behaves whenever you use it; they are not associated with any particular PDF document. Note: If you install any third-party plug-ins, set these preferences using the Third-Party Preferences menu item. See also “3D preferences” on page 412 “Multimedia preferences” on page 37 “Setting accessibility preferences” on page 293 Documents preferences Open Settings Show Each Document In Its Own Window Creates multiple Acrobat windows rather than opening multiple PDFs in one instance of Acrobat. Restore Last View Settings When Reopening Documents Determines whether documents open automatically to the last viewed page within a work session. Open Cross-document Links In Same Window Closes the current document and opens the document being linked to in the same window, minimizing the number of windows open. If the document being linked to is already open in another window, the current document is not closed when you click a link to the open document. If you do not select this option, a new window opens each time you click a link to a different document. Allow Layer State To Be Set By User Information Allows the author of a layered PDF document to specify layer visibility based on user information. Allow Documents To Hide The Menu Bar, Toolbars, And Window Controls Allows the PDF to determine whether the menu bar, toolbar, and window controls are hidden when the PDF is opened. Documents In Recently Used List Sets the maximum number of documents listed in the File menu (Windows) or when you choose File > Open Recent File (Mac OS). The default is five for Windows and nine for Mac OS. Remember Files In Organizer History For Specifies how long PDF files remain in the History list. Save Settings Automatically Save Document Changes To Temporary File Every _ Minutes Determines how often Acrobat automat­ ically saves changes to an open document. Save As Optimizes For Fast Web View Restructures a PDF document for page-at-a-time downloading from web servers. PDF/A View Mode View Documents In PDF/A Mode Specifies when to use this viewing mode: Always, Never, or Only For PDF/A Documents. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 34 User Guide Examine Document Examine Document Examines the PDF for items that may not be apparent, such as metadata, file attachments, comments, and hidden text and layers. The examination results appear in a dialog box, and you can remove any type of item that appears there. • Examine Document When Closing Document (Not selected by default.) • Examine Document When Sending Document By Email (Not selected by default.) Adobe Version Cue CS3 Enable Version Cue File-Version Manager Turns on Adobe Version Cue® CS3 (a feature of Adobe Creative Suite 3) and adds the Save A Version command and the Versions command to the File menu. Note: To use Version Cue in Acrobat, you must be able to access a Version Cue Workspace in Creative Suite. Full Screen preferences Full Screen Setup Current Document Only Specifies whether or not the display is limited to a single PDF. Fill Screen With One Page At A Time Sets the page view to the maximum screen coverage by a single page. Alert When Document Requests Full Screen Displays a message before going into Full Screen mode. Selecting this option overrides a previous selection of Do Not Show This Message Again in that message. Which Monitor To Use Specifies the monitor on which full-screen display appears (for users with multiple-monitor configurations). Full Screen Navigation Escape Key Exits Lets you exit Full Screen mode by pressing the Esc key. If this option is not selected, you can exit by pressing Ctrl+L/Command+L. Show Navigation Bar Shows a minimal navigation toolbar regardless of the document settings. Left Click To Go Forward One Page; Right Click To Go Back One Page Lets you page through an Adobe PDF document by clicking the mouse. You can also page through a document by pressing Return, Shift-Return (to go backward), or the arrow keys. Loop After Last Page Lets you page through a PDF document continuously, returning to the first page after the last. This option is typically used for setting up kiosk displays. Advance Every _ Seconds Specifies whether to advance automatically from page to page every set number of seconds. You can page through a document using mouse or keyboard commands even if automatic paging is selected. Full Screen Appearance Background Color Specifies the window’s background color in Full Screen mode. You can select a color from the color palettet to customize the background color. Mouse Cursor Specifies whether to show or hide the pointer when Full Screen mode is in operation. Full Screen Transitions Ignore All Transitions Removes transition effects from presentations that you view in Full Screen mode. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 35 User Guide Default Transition Specifies the transition effect to display when you switch pages in Full Screen mode and no transition effect has been set for the document. Direction Determines the flow of the selected default transition on the screen, such as Down, Left, Horizontally, and so forth. The available options vary according to the transition. If no directional options affect the selected default transition, this option is not available. Navigation Controls Direction Mimics the user’s progress through the presentation, such as transitioning from top to bottom when the user proceeds to the next page and from bottom to top when the user backtracks to the previous page. Available only for transitions with directional options. General preferences Basic Tools Use Single Key Accelerators To Access Tools Enables you to select tools with a single keystroke. This is off by default. Create Links From URLs Specifies whether links that weren’t created with Acrobat are automatically identified in the PDF document and become clickable links. Make The Hand Tool Select Text Enables the Hand tool to function as the Select tool when it hovers over text in an Adobe PDF. Make The Hand Tool Read Articles Changes the appearance of the Hand tool pointer when over an article thread. Upon the first click, the article zooms to fill the document pane horizontally; subsequent clicks follow the thread of the article. Make The Hand Tool Use Mouse-wheel Zooming Changes the action of the mouse wheel from scrolling to zooming. Make The Select Tool Select Images Before Text Changes the order in which the Select tool selects. Use Fixed Resolution For Snapshot Tool Images Sets the resolution used to copy an image captured with the Snapshot tool. Warnings Do Not Show Edit Warnings Disables warning boxes that would normally appear when you delete items such as links, pages, page thumbnails, and bookmarks. Reset All Warnings Restores default settings for warnings. Print Show Page Thumbnails In Print Dialog Controls the print preview display in the Print dialog box. Deselecting this option speeds up the preview. Emit Passthrough PostScript When Printing Enables Adobe PostScript® XObjects in the PDF file to be emitted when that PDF file is printed to a PostScript printer. Application Startup Show Splash Screen Determines whether the application splash screen appears each time the application starts. Use Only Certified Plug-Ins Ensures that only Adobe-certified third-party plug-ins are loaded. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 36 User Guide Page Display preferences Default Layout And Zoom Resolution Use System Setting Uses the system settings for monitor resolution. Custom Resolution Sets the monitor resolution. Rendering Smooth Text Specifies the kind of text-smoothing to apply: None, For Monitor, or For Laptop/LCD. Smooth Line Art Applies smoothing to remove abrupt angles in lines. Smooth Images Applies smoothing to minimize abrupt changes in images. Use Local Fonts Specifies whether the application uses or ignores local fonts installed on your system. When deselected, substitute fonts are used for any font not embedded in the PDF. If a font cannot be substituted, the text appears as bullets and an error message appears. Use 2D GPU Acceleration (Appears only if your computer hardware supports 2D GPU acceleration.) Speeds up zooming, scrolling, and redrawing of page content, and speeds the rendering and manipulation of 2D PDF content. This option is deselected by default. Note: If the 2D GPU Acceleration option appears on the Page Display preferences but is not available, you may need to update your GPU card driver to enable this hardware feature. Contact your card vendor or computer manufacturer for an updated driver. Use Page Cache Places the next page in a buffer before the current page is viewed to reduce the time required to page through a document. Page Content And Information Show Large Images Displays large images. If your system is slow to display image-intensive pages, you can deselect this option. Overprint Preview Turns overprint preview on or off. The Overprint Preview mode lets you see (on-screen) the effects of ink aliasing in the printed output. A printer or service provider may create an ink alias if a document contains two similar spot colors and only one is required, for example. Show Art, Trim, & Bleed Boxes Displays any art, trim, or bleed boxes defined for a document. Show Transparency Grid Displays the grid behind transparent objects. Use Logical Page Numbers Enables the Number Pages command for matching the position of the page in the PDF to the number printed on the page. A page number, followed by the page position in parentheses, appears in the Page Navigation toolbar and in the Go To Page and Print dialog boxes—for example, i (1 of 1) if the printed number of the first page is i. If this option is not selected, pages are numbered with arabic numbers starting at 1. Selecting this option helps prevent unexpected behavior when clicking Back or Go Back in your web browser. Always Show Document Page Size Displays the page measurements beside the horizontal scroll bar. Use Smooth Zooming When deselected, turns off animation effects, which improves performance. Use Smooth Scrolling When deselected, turns off animation effects, which improves performance. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 37 User Guide . Playing movies and sounds Play movies and sounds PDFs can include many types of movie and sound files, including (but not limited to) Flash, QuickTime, mp3, MPEG, and Windows Media files. These files may be accessed on a page or within a link, bookmark, form field, or page action. Each movie and sound file includes a play area from which the media can be activated. The play area typically appears on the PDF page as an image or a rectangle, but can also be invisible. Note: You must have the necessary hardware and software installed to play the media files. To help protect your computer from viruses, Acrobat solicits your approval before playing multimedia files from unverified sources. You can change this default behavior in the Multimedia Trust preferences. ? Using the Hand tool or the Select tool, click the play area of the movie or sound file. When the pointer is positioned over the play area, it changes to the play mode icon Multimedia preferences You can specify the media player you want to play movies and sounds by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then selecting Multimedia from the left side of the dialog box. Preferred Media Player Choose the default player that plays media clips from the list of currently installed media players. Accessibility Options Specify if you want special features (if available) to appear when media plays, such as subtitles and dubbed audio. Specify the preferred language for the media, in case multiple languages are available. Multimedia Trust preferences In the Multimedia Trust preferences, you can specify whether to play embedded multimedia files in trusted or nontrusted PDF documents. A trusted document is a document that you approved or that was produced by an author you approved. By setting your permissions to play multimedia only in trusted documents, you can prevent programs, macros, and viruses from playing on, and potentially damaging, your computer. The list of trusted documents and authors is stored internally and can’t be viewed. If you add a certified document to the list, both the document and the author’s certificate are added to the list of trusted documents. All documents that are certified by this author are trusted. (Trusted documents also include PDFs that were created by authors in your list of trusted identities.) To access these preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then select Multimedia Trust from the left side of the dialog box. Display Permissions For Choose whether you want to display security permissions for trusted documents or other (nontrusted) documents. Allow Multimedia Operations Select this option to allow media clips to be played. When selected, you can change the permission settings for a particular player and enable options that determine the appearance of the media during playback. Change Permission Settings For A Player Select the player in the list, and then choose one of the following options from the menu: • Always Allows the player to be used without prompting. • Never Prevents the player from being used. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 38 User Guide • Prompt Asks the user whether the player can be used. If you select this option and allow the player to play the media in a particular document, that document becomes trusted. Clear Your List Of Trusted Documents Deletes the current list of trusted documents and authors. Use this option to prevent media from playing in documents that were previously trusted documents or created by trusted authors. This option is available only when a PDF that contains multimedia is open. Adjusting PDF views Adjust page magnification Tools on the Select & Zoom toolbar can change the magnification of PDF documents. Only some of these tools appear on the default view of the toolbar. You can see all the tools by right-clicking/Control-clicking the Select & Zoom toolbar and choosing either individual tools, Show All Tools, or More Tools and then selecting individual tools. A B C D E F G H I J All zoom tools A. Marquee Zoom tool B. Dynamic Zoom tool C. Zoom Out button D. Zoom In button E. Zoom Value menu button F. Actual Size button G. Fit Width button H. Fit Page button I. Pan & Zoom Window tool J. Loupe tool • The Marquee Zoom tool works in a few different ways. You can use it to drag a rectangle around a portion of the page that you want to fill the viewing area. Or, simply clicking the Marquee Zoom tool increases the magnification by one preset level, centering on the point where you clicked. To decrease the magnification by one preset level, Ctrl-click/Option-click the Marquee Zoom tool. • The Dynamic Zoom tool zooms in when you drag it up the page and it zooms out when you drag down. If you use a mouse wheel, this tool zooms in when you roll forward and zooms out when you roll backward. • Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons change the document magnification by preset levels. • The Zoom Value option changes the page view according to a percentage you type in or select from a pop-up menu. • Actual Size displays the page at 100% magnification. • Fit Width adjusts the magnification so that the PDF fills the document pane horizontally. • Fit Page adjusts the magnification so that one page fills the document pane vertically. • The Pan & Zoom Window tool adjusts the magnification and position of the view area to match the area in an adjustable rectangle in the Pan & Zoom window’s thumbnail view of the page. • The Loupe Tool window displays a magnified portion of the PDF that matches the area in an adjustable rectangle on the document pane. Resize a page to fit the window • To resize the page to fit entirely in the document pane, choose View > Zoom > Fit Page. • To resize the page to fit the width of the window, choose View > Zoom > Fit Width. Part of the page may be out of view. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 39 User Guide • To resize the page to fit the height of the window, choose View > Zoom > Fit Height. Part of the page may be out of view. • To resize the page so that its text and images fit the width of the window, choose View > Zoom > Fit Visible. Part of the page may be out of view. To see keyboard shortcuts for resizing the document, open the View menu. Show a page at actual size ? Choose View > Zoom > Actual Size. The actual size for a PDF page is typically 100%, but the document may have been set to another magnification level when it was created. Change the magnification with zoom tools ? Do one of the following: • Click the Zoom In button or the Zoom Out button in the toolbar. • Enter a magnification percentage in the Select & Zoom toolbar, either by typing or choosing from the pop-up menu. • Drag the Marquee Zoom tool to define the area of the page that you want to fill the document pane. • Drag the Dynamic Zoom tool up to increase the magnification and down to decrease magnification. When the Marquee Zoom tool is selected, you can Ctrl-click/Option-click or Ctrl-drag/Option-drag to zoom out. Holding down Shift switches temporarily from the Marquee Zoom tool to the Dynamic Zoom tool. Change the magnification with the Pan & Zoom Window tool 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Pan & Zoom Window, or select the Pan & Zoom Window tool on the Select & Zoom toolbar. 2 Do any of the following: • Drag the handles of the box in the Pan & Zoom window to change the document magnification. • Drag the center of the box to pan across the area you want to see. • Click the navigation buttons to move to a different page. • Enter a value in the zoom text box, or click the plus or minus buttons to increase or decrease the magnifi­ cation by preset levels. Change the magnification with the Loupe tool 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom> Loupe, or select the Loupe tool on the Select & Zoom toolbar, if it is displayed. 2 Click the area of the document you want to view in closer detail. A rectangle appears in the document, corresponding to the area shown in the Loupe Tool window. You can drag or resize the rectangle to change the Loupe tool view. 3 To change the magnification of the Loupe tool, do any of the following: • Drag the slider. • Click the plus or minus buttons. • Enter a value in the zoom text box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 40 User Guide Use the Loupe tool to view a magnified area of the document. Note: You can change the color of the Loupe tool rectangle, click the Line Color pop-up menu in the lower right corner of the Loupe Tool window, and select a new color. Change the magnification by using a page thumbnail 1 Click the Pages button on the left side of the window to view the page thumbnails. 2 Locate the thumbnail for the current page, and then position the pointer over the lower right corner of the page­ view box until the pointer changes into a double-headed arrow. 3 Drag the corner of the box to reduce or expand the view of the page. 4 As needed, move the pointer over the zoom box frame within the thumbnail until it changes to a Hand icon, and then drag the frame to see a different area of the page in the document pane. A page-view box in a page thumbnail indicates the area of the page currently showing in the document pane. Change the default magnification 1 Choose Edit > Preferences. 2 Under Categories, select Page Display. 3 Open the Zoom pop-up menu and choose a default magnification level. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 41 User Guide Set the page layout and orientation Changing the page layout is especially useful when you want to zoom out to get an overview of the document layout. You can use the following page layouts when viewing PDF documents: Single Page Displays one page at a time, with no portion on other pages visible. Single Page Continuous Displays pages in a continuous vertical column that is one page wide. Two-Up Displays each two-page spread with no portion of other pages visible. Two-Up Continuous Displays facing pages side by side in a continuous vertical column. Note: If a document has more than two pages, the Two-Up and Two-Up Continuous views display the first page alone on the right side of the document pane, to ensure proper display of two-page spreads. Single Page, Single Page Continuous, Two-Up, Two-Up Continuous page layouts Set page layout • To see only one page at a time, choose View > Page Display > Single Page. • To see two pages at a time, side by side, choose View > Page Display > Two-Up. • To scroll down continuously through one page after another, choose View > Page Display > Single Page Continuous. • To scroll down continuously through two pages at a time, choose View > Page Display > Two-Up Continuous. You can also display buttons for each of these options in the Display Pages toolbar by choosing Tools > Toolbars > More Tools, and selecting them in the More Tools dialog box. Note: In Single Page layout, choosing Edit > Select All selects all text on the current page. In other layouts, Select All selects all text in the PDF. Rotate the page view You can change the view of a page in 90° increments. This changes the view of the page, not its actual orientation. You can’t save this change. ? Choose View > Rotate View > Clockwise or Counterclockwise, or click the Rotate Clockwise button or the Rotate Counterclockwise button in the toolbar. Note: If you want the rotation to be saved with the document, choose Document > Rotate Pages. Change the default page layout 1 Choose Edit > Preferences. 2 Under Categories, select Page Display. 3 Open the Page Layout menu and choose Automatic, Continuous, Single Page, Two-Up, or Two-Up Continuous. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 42 User Guide Use split-window view You can view a PDF with the document pane divided into two panes (Split command) or four panes (Spreadsheet Split command). With Split view, you can scroll, change the magnification level, or turn to a different page in the active pane without affecting the other pane. The Spreadsheet Split view is useful if you want to keep column headings and row labels visible while scrolling through a large spreadsheet or table. In this mode, changing the magnification in one pane changes the magnifi­ cation in all panes. Also, scrolling is coordinated between the panes: scrolling a pane horizontally also scrolls the pane above or below it; scrolling vertically also scrolls the pane to the left or right of that pane. 1 Start creating the type of split view you want: • To split the view into two panes, choose Window > Split, or drag the gray box above the vertical scroll bar. • To split the view into four panes with synchronized scrolling and zoom levels, choose Window > Spreadsheet Split. 2 Drag the splitter bars up, down, left, or right to resize the panes, as needed. 3 Adjust the zoom level, as needed: • In Split view, click a pane to make it active, and change the zoom level for that pane only. • In Spreadsheet Split view, adjust the zoom level to change the displays in all four panes. 4 Scroll, as needed: • In Split view, click a pane to make it active, and scroll to change that pane only. • In Spreadsheet Split view, click a pane, and scroll vertically to change the views in the active pane and the pane beside it. Scroll horizontally to change the views in the active pane and the pane above or below it. 5 To restore single-pane view, choose Window > Remove Split. View a document in multiple windows You can create multiple windows for the same document using the New Window command. New windows have the same size, magnification, and layout as the original window and open at the same page and on top of the original window. When you open a new window, Acrobat adds the suffix 1 to the original filename and assigns the suffix 2 to the new window. You can open multiple windows with the suffix incrementing with each new window. Closing a window causes the remaining open windows to be renumbered sequentially; that is, if you have five windows open and you close the third window that you opened, the windows are renumbered with the suffixes 1 to 4. Note: This feature is not available when PDFs are viewed in a browser. Open a new window ? Select Window > New Window. Close a window ? Click the close box in the window. You are prompted to save any changes. Closing a window does not close a document if more than one window is open. Close all windows for a document ? Choose File > Close. You are prompted to save any changes before each window is closed. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 43 User Guide Display off-screen areas of a magnified page When you zoom in to a high magnification, you may be able to see only part of a page. You can shift the view to show other areas of the page without changing the magnification level. ? Do either of the following: • Use the vertical scroll bars to move up and down the pages or the horizontal scroll bars to move across the page. • Select the Hand tool in the Select & Zoom toolbar, or choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Hand Tool, and drag to move the page, as if moving a piece of paper on a table. See also “About PDF layers” on page 364 Display PDFs in Line Weights view The Line Weights view applies a constant stroke width (1 pixel) to lines, regardless of zoom. When you print the document, the stroke will print at the true width. Line Weights view is off by default. ? Choose View > Line Weights. To turn off Line Weights view, choose View > Line Weights again. Note: Line Weights view is not available for viewing PDFs within a web browser. Grids, guides, and measurements About grids, rulers, and measurement tools Acrobat includes a set of tools that helps you fine-tune the layout of your Adobe PDF documents. Tools such as grids, rulers, guides, measurement tools, and the Info panel are especially useful when you’re designing forms, inspecting CAD (computer-aided design) drawings, and preparing for professional printing. View grids You can use grids to accurately line up text and objects in a document. When turned on, the grid is visible over the document. The Snap To Grid option aligns an object with the nearest grid line when you move the object. View or hide the grid ? Choose View > Grid. A check mark appears next to the command name when the grid is displayed. Turn the Snap To Grid option on or off ? Choose View > Snap To Grid. A check mark appears next to the command name when the option is turned on. Change the grid appearance 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then select Units & Guides under Categories. 2 To change grid settings, do any of the following: • To change the spacing between grid lines, use the arrow keys or the text box to enter a value for Width Between Lines and Height Between Lines. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 44 User Guide • To change the origin of the grid, use the arrow keys or the text box to enter a value for Grid Offset From Left Edge and Grid Offset From Top Edge. • To change the number of subdivisions within each grid square, use the arrow keys or the text box to enter a value for Subdivisions. Subdivision lines are lighter than grid lines. • To change the color of the grid lines, click the Grid Line Color square and choose a new color from the Color panel. Then click OK. 3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog box. Create ruler guides Horizontal and vertical rulers let you check the size of objects in your documents. You can also create guides in your document, which are especially useful for lining up objects, such as form fields. You can change the unit of measurement and color used in the ruler. Create new ruler guides 1 Choose View > Rulers. 2 Do one of the following: • Drag down from the horizontal ruler to create a horizontal guide, or drag to the right of the vertical ruler to create a vertical guide. • Double-click a location on the horizontal ruler to create a vertical guide, or double-click a location on the vertical ruler to create a horizontal guide. Show or hide guides ? Choose View > Guides. Move or delete ruler guides ? Click the guide to select it, and then drag it to a new location, or press Delete. To delete all guides, rightclick/Control-click in the ruler area and choose Clear All Guides or Clear Guides On Page. Change guide colors 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then select Units & Guides under Categories. 2 Click the Guide Color square and choose a new color from the Color pop-up menu, and then click OK. Measure the height, width, or area of objects The Measuring toolbar contains tools you can use to measure distances and areas of objects in PDF documents. The measuring tools are especially useful when you need to know the distances or areas associated with objects in a form or computer-aided design (CAD) drawing, or when you want to measure certain areas of a document before sending it to a professional printer. The measuring tools are available to Reader users only if the PDF creator enables measuring functionality. When you use a measuring tool, the tool dialog box displays the measurements of the line segments you draw. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 45 User Guide A B C Measuring tools A. Measuring toolbar B. Object being measured C. Tool dis play 1 Choose Tools > Measuring, and select a measuring tool. Or, right-click/Control-click the toolbar area, and then choose Measuring. 2 To measure areas of your PDF document, do any of the following: • Select the Distance tool to measure the distance between two points. Click the first point, move the pointer to the second point, and then click again. The measurements appear in the tool dialog box. • Select the Perimeter tool to measure a set of distances between multiple points. Click each point you want to measure. Then, double-click the last point, or hold the pointer over the last point and click. • Select the Area tool to measure the area within the line segments that you draw. Click each point you want to measure. After you have clicked at least two points, click the first point to complete the area measurement. Note: You can also finish a measurement by right-clicking/Control-clicking and choosing Complete Measurement from the context menu. 3 While measuring objects, do any of the following: • To change the scaling ratio (such as 3:2) on the drawing areas, specify the appropriate numbers in the tool dialog box. If desired, change the unit of measurement next to this ratio. • Select Measurement Markup in the tool dialog box if you want the lines you draw to appear as a comment. You can then use the Hand tool to double-click the comment and view the measurement for the line segments that you draw. Unless Annotate is selected, the object you draw will disappear when you measure another object or select another tool. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 46 User Guide View the Info panel The Info panel lets you see the coordinate position of the pointer within the document pane. The position numbering begins at the upper left corner of the document. The Info panel also shows the width and height of a selected object as you resize it. View x and y coordinates 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Info. 2 Move the mouse pointer to view x and y coordinates. Change the panel’s measurement units ? In the Options menu in the Info panel, choose a different unit of measurement. The currently selected option has a check mark next to its name. Saving PDFs About saving PDFs You can save a copy of a PDF with any comments, entries in form fields, or digital signatures that you have added to the PDF. If the PDF restricts your usage rights, the document message bar under the toolbar area describes these restrictions when you open the document. You can also save the contents of a PDF in text format. This allows you to easily reuse the text from a PDF and to use the content with a screen reader, screen magnifier, or other assistive technology. Save a copy of a PDF 1 Choose File > Save As (or Save A Copy, if Save As is not shown). 2 In the Save As dialog box, enter the filename and location, and click Save. Save comments, form field entries, and digital signatures ? Do one of the following: • Choose File > Save to save changes to the current file. • Choose File > Save As to save changes to a new file. If you are viewing a PDF in a web browser, the Acrobat File menu is not available. However, you can use the Save A Copy button in the Acrobat toolbar to save the PDF. See also “Filling in PDF forms” on page 201 “Participating in a PDF review” on page 161 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 47 User Guide Save document changes If you modify a PDF—such as by adding new pages from another file or deleting pages—you can save your changes by saving the PDF or by saving a copy of the PDF. You can also save changes to your work incrementally and then recover those changes if a problem occurs. Note: Saving a digitally signed PDF invalidates the signature. Save changes • To save the changes to the current document, choose File > Save. • To save the modified document to a new file, choose File > Save As. For Save As Type (Windows) or Format (Mac OS), choose Adobe PDF Files (*.pdf). Type a name and location, and click Save. Recover the last saved version ? Choose File > Revert, and then click Revert. About the Autosave feature The Autosave feature guards against losing your work in case of a power failure by incrementally, and at regular intervals, saving file changes to a specified location. The original file is not modified. Instead, Acrobat creates an autosave file of changes, which includes all the changes you made to the open file since the last automatic save. The amount of new information that the autosave file contains depends on how frequently Acrobat saves the autosave file. If you set the autosave interval to 15 minutes, you could lose the last 14 minutes of your work if a problem occurs. Frequent automatic saving prevents loss of data, and is especially useful if you make extensive changes to a document, such as by adding comments. You can apply autosave changes to the original files when you restart Acrobat. When you close, save manually, or revert to the last-saved version of a file, the autosave file is deleted. Note: If you use assistive technology, such as a screen reader, you may want to disable the Autosave feature so that you don’t lose your place when the file is reloaded. The Autosave feature won’t work in the following cases: • A document that has its security changed. You must save the document to re-enable automatic saving of document changes. • A document created using the WebCapture feature or extracted from a larger PDF (Document > Extract Pages). You must save the document to enable automatic saving of changes. • A document displayed in a web browser or incorporated into a container document that supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). This document appears outside the default file system and cannot support automatic saving. Recover lost changes To prevent lost changes after an unexpected interruption, the Autosave feature must be enabled, which is the default setting. Set up automatic saving 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Select Documents in the Categories list. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 48 User Guide 3 If Automatically Save Document Changes To Temporary File Every xx Minutes (1-99) is not selected, select it now. 4 In the Minutes box, specify how often you want Acrobat to save files. Recover lost changes after an unexpected shutdown 1 Start Acrobat or open the file you were working on last. 2 When prompted, click Yes to open the autosave file or files. If multiple files were open, Acrobat opens all of the files for you. 3 Save the file or files with the same names as the files you were originally working on. Reduce file size by saving You can sometimes reduce the file size of a PDF simply by using the Save As command. Reducing the size of PDFs improves their performance—particularly when they’re being accessed on the web—without altering their appearance. The Reduce File Size command resamples and recompresses images, removes embedded fonts, compresses document structure, and cleans up elements such as invalid bookmarks. If the file size is already as small as possible, this command has no effect. Note: Reducing the file size of a digitally signed document removes the signature. 1 Choose Document > Reduce File Size. 2 Select the version compatibility that you need, and click OK. If you’re certain that all your users use Acrobat 8 or Adobe Reader 8, limiting compatibility to the latest version can further reduce file size. If you want to control changes and quality trade-offs, use PDF Optimizer, which makes more options available. See also “PDF Optimizer” on page 343 Organizer Organizer window overview Organizer helps you find PDFs that you’ve previously opened and PDFs that you’ve organized into collections and favorites. With Organizer, you can see thumbnail images of PDF pages to quickly identify files. You can also use Organizer to organize related PDFs without changing their location in your file structure, and quickly browse, find, and sort PDFs that you recently viewed. You access the Organizer and Organizer-related commands in the File menu. After you select one or more files within the Organizer, you can start one of several different tasks using the buttons above the file list. A B C ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 49 User Guide Organizer window in Windows A. Categories pane B. Files pane C. Pages pane Categories pane The categories pane of the Organizer window is divided vertically into sections that contain categories. These items can help you locate and organize PDFs that reside on your computer, on a network, and on the web. History Contains subcategories that list all the PDFs that you’ve opened during a specified period of time. You can’t change the subcategory names or manually add PDFs to the History, which is automatically updated each time you open a PDF and as time passes, but you can clear the entire history by using the Clear History button in the files pane. You can also control the maximum length of the file history or turn it off with the Remember Files In Organizer History For option in Edit > Preferences > Documents. My Computer (Windows) or [disk name] (Mac OS) Lists the hard drives and folders in their current hierarchy. This category is especially useful if you know where a particular PDF resides. Favorite Places Lists any folders, network locations, and web directories that you’ve specified as favorite destina­ tions. This category functions like bookmarks or favorite destinations that you create for quick access in a web browser, except that the destinations are folders or disk drives that contain PDFs. You can add or remove destinations from the Favorite Places list, but you can’t edit the destination names. Collections Contains collection folders that list all PDFs that you’ve associated with each particular collection folder. Each collection folder can point to multiple PDFs no matter where each PDF is located; for example, a single collection folder can list PDFs that are actually located in different folders on your computer, on a network, and also on the web. You can change each collection folder’s name, add new collection folders, and add PDFs to each collection folder. Note: Collections and PDF packages both involve multiple PDFs, but in very different ways. A PDF package is itself a PDF file that can be composed of multiple PDFs and that exists in a folder on your computer. For example, you can attach a PDF package to an email message. Collections are more like reminders that help you find related files that may be stored in different locations on your computer. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 50 User Guide Files pane The files pane in the Organizer window lists the PDFs that are within the subcategory or folder selected in the categories pane; each PDF listing shows the filename, modification date, page number, file size, location, and a thumbnail image of the first page. You can sort the list by filename, metadata information, number of pages, file size, modification date, and date last opened. Use the buttons at the top of the Organizer window to open, print, email, or combine one or more selected PDFs; in addition, you can send a selected PDF for review or approval, or upload it for a browser-based review. Pages pane The pages pane of the Organizer window displays thumbnails for every page of all PDF files that are selected in the files pane. The Zoom slider and buttons at the bottom of the pages pane let you adjust the size of the page thumbnails. Selecting a PDF (left) reveals a thumbnail for each page in the pages pane (right). Adjust the Organizer window You can make changes to your view of the Organizer. See also “Combining files into PDFs” on page 119 “Starting and managing a review” on page 157 Display the Organizer window ? Choose File > Organizer > Open Organizer. It isn’t necessary to open the Organizer window if you want to open a PDF in a collection, create a new collection, add an open PDF to a collection, or open a PDF from your history of opened PDFs. Choose File > Organizer or File > History to access commands that let you do all of these things. Resize the Organizer and its panes • To resize a pane relative to the other panes, drag the vertical bar that separates two panes. • To resize the Organizer window, drag the left, right, or bottom edge of the window. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 51 User Guide Sort the files pane list 1 If necessary, select a subcategory or folder in the categories pane to display PDFs in the files pane. 2 In the files pane, do any of the following: • To sort the list of PDF files according to a particular property, choose a property from the Sort By menu. • To change the sorting direction, click the Ascending Sort Order button or the Descending Sort Order button to the right of the Sort By menu. • To view the location of the selected PDFs, right-click/Control-click, and choose Show In Windows Explorer (Windows) or Show In Finder (Mac OS). Organize PDF collections You can manage PDF collections in the Organizer window. Add a PDF to a collection ? Do any of the following: • Right-click/Control-click the collection, choose Add Files, select one or more PDFs, and click Add. • Right-click/Control-click the PDF in the files pane, and choose Add To A Collection > [collection name]. • Drag a PDF from Windows Explorer or Mac OS Finder to the collection in the categories pane. • After selecting a subcategory in the History, My Computer, or Favorite Places category, drag a PDF from the files pane to the desired collection. • In Acrobat, open the PDF and choose File > Organizer > Add To A Collection. Then either select the collection to which you want to add the PDF or click New Collection, type a name, and click Create. You can open any PDF from a collection by using the Open button in the Organizer window or by choosing the PDF filename from a submenu directly in Acrobat. To open a PDF from a collection in Acrobat, choose Collections > [collection name] > [PDF filename] from either the File > Organizer submenu or the Organizer menu in the File toolbar. Edit the collection folders • To rename a collection, right-click/Control-click the collection name, choose Rename Collection, and then type the new name. • To delete a collection, right-click/Control-click the collection name, choose Delete Collection, and then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box. The PDF files within the collection aren’t deleted from their original locations. • To create a new collection, click the Create A New Collection button in the Organizer window. Or, in Acrobat, choose File > Organizer > Create A New Collection. Type a name for the collection. Move a PDF to a different collection ? To move a PDF from one collection to another, select the collection that contains the PDF, right-click/Control­ click the PDF file in the files pane, and choose Move To Collection > [collection name]. Remove a PDF from a collection ? To remove a PDF from a collection, select the collection, right-click/Control-click the PDF in the files pane, and choose Remove From [collection name]. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 52 User Guide Organize PDFs with the Favorite Places category 1 To add an existing folder or hard drive to the category, do one of the following: • Click the Add A Favorite Place button , select a folder or hard drive, and click OK. • Right-click/Control-click the folder in the My Computer (Windows) or [disk name] (Mac OS) category, and choose Add [folder name] To Favorite Places. • Right-click/Control-click the subfolder in the Favorite Places category, and choose Add [favorite place name] To Favorite Places. 2 To remove a folder or hard drive from the list of Favorite Places, right-click/Control-click the item, and choose Remove [folder name] From Favorite Places. Expand views in the Categories pane Items in the Categories pane can be expanded and collapsed by clicking the plus sign [+] (Windows) or arrow (Mac OS) so that you can see more of the structure. When you select a date category, folder, or collection, all PDFs in that item are listed in the pages pane. Expand an Organizer category 1 To expand or collapse a category or folder in the categories pane, click the icon to the left of the category icon or folder icon. 2 Select a subcategory or folder under a main category. The pages pane lists all PDFs associated with that subcat­ egory or folder. Expand the file structure ? Select a folder in the My Computer (Windows) or [disk name] (Mac OS) category. All PDFs in that folder are listed in the files pane. Start a task from the Organizer files pane 1 Select a subcategory or folder under a main category in the categories pane to display PDFs in the files pane. 2 Select the file or files you want to work with: • To select a listed PDF file, click it. • To select all the PDF files listed, click Select All. • To add noncontiguous PDF files to or remove them from the selection, Ctrl-click/Command-click them. • To add contiguous PDF files to the selection, Shift-click them. 3 To perform an action on the selected PDF files, click one of the task buttons at the top of the Organizer window: • To open, print, or email the PDF files, use the buttons above the files pane. • To start combining PDF files into a single PDF file, click the Combine Files button and follow the instructions in the wizard. • To start a review, select the PDF and choose Send For Review > Send For Shared Review or Send For Review > Attach For Email Review. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 53 User Guide See also “Combining files into PDFs” on page 119 “Starting and managing a review” on page 157 Erase the history of opened PDFs 1 Select a History subcategory in the categories pane. 2 Click Clear History in the files pane. Maintaining the software About the updating process Acrobat application files and components can be updated in a variety of ways. Some updates are available when you open a PDF that triggers the updating process automatically. For example, if you open a form that uses Asianlanguage fonts, Acrobat asks whether you want to download the fonts. Other updates are available only from the Help menu, and you must install them manually. Some updates are available both automatically and manually. Depending on your preferences settings, Acrobat downloads updates in the background. Update the software ? Choose Help > Check For Updates, and follow any on-screen instructions. Change updating preferences 1 Choose Help > Check For Updates. 2 In the Adobe Updater dialog box, click Preferences. 3 Select Automatically Check For Adobe Updates, and specify whether you want automatic checking on a weekly or monthly basis and whether or not you want to be asked before updates are downloaded. 4 Make sure that the application you are running (Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat) is selected as the software that will be updated. 5 If appropriate, click Browse to navigate to the location in which you want the downloads to be placed. About Speed Launcher (Windows) When you install Acrobat, the Speed Launcher program is installed into your computer’s Common Startup group. The Speed Launcher shortens the time needed to start Acrobat. Although this is not recommended, you can disable Speed Launcher by dragging its icon out of the Startup folder. Note:If you have both Acrobat and Reader installed on the same system, two Speed Launcher icons appear in the Startup folder. If you want to disable Speed Launcher, remove both Speed Launcher icons from the Startup folder. For more information about this topic, see the Adobe support website.ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 54 User Guide Adobe Digital Editions Acrobat 8 changes the way you open and manage eBooks. Now, you use the free Adobe® Digital Editions software to read and organize eBooks and other publications. Digital Editions is a separate web-based Rich Internet Application (RIA) that replaces the eBooks features in previous versions of Acrobat. When you install Digital Editions, your existing bookshelf items are automatically imported and available within the new Digital Editions bookshelf experience. You can also manually import individual PDFs into your Digital Editions bookshelf. Note: When you double-click the icon for an eBook, Acrobat automatically opens the Digital Editions download website, where you can start installing the software. To learn more about how to make the transition to this new solution for eBooks and for a link to the secure download website, go to the Adobe website. Non-English languages Asian language PDFs You can use Acrobat to view, search, and print PDF documents that contain Asian text (Traditional and Simplified Chinese, Japanese, and Korean). You can also use these languages when you fill in forms, add comments, and apply digital signatures. Almost all of the Acrobat features are supported for Traditional and Simplified Chinese, Japanese, and Korean text. In Windows, you must install the Asian language support files by using the custom installation and selecting the Asian Language Support options under Create Adobe PDF and View Adobe PDF. PDFMaker and the Adobe PDF printer automatically embed most Asian fonts in your file when creating PDF files. You can control whether Asian fonts are embedded. In Windows, you may be able to view and print files that contain Asian languages without having the necessary Asian language support installed on your system. If you try to open a PDF file for which language support is required, you are automatically prompted to install the required fonts. Cyrillic, Central European, and Eastern European language PDFs You can work with Adobe PDF files that contain Cyrillic text (including Bulgarian and Russian), Central European text, and Eastern European text (including Czech, Hungarian, and Polish) if the fonts are embedded in the PDF files. If the fonts are embedded, you can view and print the files on any system. Fonts do not need to be embedded to use the Search feature. Note: If you open a PDF file in which form fields or text boxes contain these languages but the fonts are not embedded and are not installed on your system, choosing Help > Check For Updates Now automatically prompts you to download and install the necessary fonts. Hebrew, Arabic, Thai, and Vietnamese language PDFs Acrobat supports the entry and display of Thai and Vietnamese text. In Windows only, Acrobat also supports Arabic and Hebrew. By default, Right-To-Left Language Options is enabled under Arabic and Hebrew regional settings (in Windows). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 55 User Guide Enable right-to-left languages Enabling right-to-left language options displays the user interface elements for controlling paragraph direction, digit style, and ligature. When this option is selected, you can specify the writing direction (left-to-right or right-to-left) and type of digits (Western or Arabic-Indic) used for creating and filling out certain form fields, adding digital signa­ tures, and creating text box markups. Enable Right-To-Left Language Options is enabled by default under Arabic and Hebrew regional settings. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Under Categories, select International. 3 Select Enable Right-To-Left Language Options. 56 Chapter 3: Creating PDFs Adobe PDF is the solution of choice for capturing robust information from any application on any computer system. You can create PDFs from blank pages, document files, scanned paper documents, and clipboard images. Quickstart Following are quick steps for some common PDF creation tasks. Create from a file To create a PDF from within Acrobat, the application that created the original file must be installed on the system in most cases. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From File. 2 Select the file you want to convert, and click Open. The authoring application opens automatically or a progress dialog box appears. If the file is in an unsupported format, a message appears, telling you that the file cannot be converted to a PDF. See also “Convert a file to PDF” on page 62 Create from a paper document You can create a PDF directly from a paper document using Acrobat and your scanner. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From Scanner. 2 Select the input, output, and document options in the Acrobat Scan dialog box, and then click Scan. 3 If creating a new PDF, specify a filename and location, and click Save. 4 Select Scan More Pages or Scanning Complete. See also “Scan a paper document to PDF” on page 64 Create from a web page You can download and convert web pages from the top level, or any number of subordinate levels, of a URL. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From Web Page. 2 Type the URL into the text box. (Click Browse to convert a web page you have already downloaded.) 3 Specify the number of levels to download and where to download files from, and then click Create. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 57 User Guide See also “Convert web pages to PDF in Acrobat” on page 91 Create from scratch You can create small PDFs that can be edited in Acrobat. 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From Blank Page. 2 Click in the document and begin typing. Use options on the New Document toolbar to change text attributes. 3 Save the document. 4 To continue editing, choose Document > Resume Editing. To convert the PDF so that it cannot be re-edited, choose Document > Prevent Further Edits. See also “Create a PDF from a blank page” on page 63 Create from Word After you install Acrobat, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to Microsoft® Word. In Word 2007 for Windows, you access the PDFMaker options from the Acrobat ribbon instead of the toolbar. 1 In Word, open the file you want to convert. 2 Do one of the following: • (Word 2007 for Windows) Click Acrobat and then click the Create PDF button • (Other versions of Word) Click the Convert To Adobe PDF button . 3 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. 4 (Mac OS only) Click View File or Done. You can also convert a file to PDF and then email it for review by clicking Create And Send For Review (Office 2007) or Send For Review (other versions of Office). See also “Creating PDFs with PDFMaker” on page 74 Create from Outlook (Windows) After you install Acrobat, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to Outlook. 1 Select the desired email messages and click Create Adobe PDF From Selected Messages . 2 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. The selected messages are converted to a PDF package or a merged PDF, depending upon conversion settings. To convert email folders, select the desired folders and click Create Adobe PDF From Folders . You can also automat­ ically archive email messages and folders. See also “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78 . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 58 User Guide Automatically archive email (Windows) You can automatically archive your Outlook email messages as PDFs. 1 In Outlook, choose Adobe PDF > Setup Automatic Archival. 2 Click the Automatic Archival tab, and select Enable Automatic Archival. 3 Specify frequency and run time. If desired, set up a log file and embedded index. 4 Click Add, select the desired folders, and specify a filename and location for the archive. To create an archive immediately, click Run Archival Now. See also “Set up automatic email archiving (Windows)” on page 80 Create from Lotus Notes (Windows) After you install Acrobat, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to IBM Lotus Notes and commands are added to the Actions menu. 1 Select the desired email messages and click Convert Selected Messages To Adobe PDF 2 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. The messages are converted to a merged PDF or a PDF package, depending upon conversion settings. You can convert an entire folder to PDF by clicking Convert Selected Folder To Adobe PDF . See also “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78 Create from Internet Explorer (Windows) You can convert an entire web page or a selected portion of it to PDF. 1 In Microsoft Internet Explorer, open the web page you want to convert. 2 (Optional) Drag to select the text and images you want to convert. 3 Click Convert Web Page To PDF . 4 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. You can also convert one or more web pages, and even entire websites, from within Acrobat. See also “Convert web pages to PDF in Internet Explorer (Windows)” on page 89 Create using Adobe PDF printer In many applications, you can use the Print command with the Adobe PDF printer to convert a file to PDF. 1 Open the file you want to convert, and choose File > Print. 2 Choose Adobe PDF from the list of printers, and print the file. 3 If prompted, specify a filename and location, and click Save. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 59 User Guide You can also choose a different default Adobe PDF printer setting or create a customized setting. See also “Create PDFs by printing to file” on page 70 Overview of creating PDFs What’s the best way to create a PDF? There are many correct answers to this question. You create a PDF by converting other documents and resources to Portable Document Format. Adobe Acrobat is a powerful tool with many uses, but it is not an authoring application—that is, not an application in which you design page layouts, write text, or create and place images on a blank page. Instead, it works in harmony with other applications and built-in operating system features to produce PDFs that you can then use for a variety of purposes. The best method for creating a PDF depends on several things: • What is the source document? You can create PDFs from documents printed on paper, Word documents, InDesign files, images taken by a digital camera, and spreadsheets, to name just a few examples. Different types of sources have different tools available for PDF conversion. • What is already running on your computer? You can save time by using the most readily available Acrobat conversion feature. If the document you want to convert is already open in its authoring application (for example, a spreadsheet that is open in Excel), there are several ways to convert the file to PDF without opening Acrobat. Similarly, if Acrobat is already open, you don’t have to open the authoring application to convert a file to PDF. • How will you use the PDF? Every PDF strikes a balance between efficiency (small file size) and quality (such as resolution and color). When that balance is critical to your task, you’ll want to use a method that includes access to various conversion options as a part of the process. For example, you can drag and drop files on the Acrobat icon on the desktop to create PDFs, but Acrobat simply applies the most recently used conversion settings without offering you access to those settings. If you want more control over the process, another method might be a better choice. Note: In Acrobat 8, you can also create a new PDF from a blank page. See also “Create a PDF from a blank page” on page 63 PDF creation methods by file type Refer to the following lists to determine the methods available for the different types of files. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 60 User Guide Most files These methods can be used for documents and images in almost all file formats. Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From File. Adobe PDF printer Within most applications, in the Print dialog box. Drag and drop On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). Paper documents Requires a scanner and a hard copy of the document. Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From Scanner. Or, for previously scanned paper documents, by choosing From File. Document menu Within Acrobat, by choosing Scan To PDF. Microsoft Office documents PDFMaker Within the authoring application, in the PDF toolbar and on the Adobe PDF menu. For Office 2007 applications, in the Acrobat Ribbon and on the Microsoft Office Button menu. Adobe PDF printer Within the authoring application, in the Print dialog box. Drag and drop On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). Email messages PDFMaker (Windows only) Within Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes, by clicking Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar buttons or choosing commands in the Adobe PDF menu (Outlook) or the Actions menu (Lotus Notes). Adobe PDF printer Within the email application, in the Print dialog box. Creates a PDF (not a PDF package). Web pages Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From Web Page. PDFMaker Within Internet Explorer or when editing in a web-authoring application that supports PDFMaker, such as Word; in the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar and on the Adobe PDF menu. Adobe PDF printer Within Internet Explorer or when editing in a web-authoring application that supports PDFMaker, such as Word; in the Print dialog box. Drag and drop On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder, dragging the HTML file. Context menu (HTML files) On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control­ clicking the HTML file). Images copied on the clipboard Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From Clipboard Image. Adobe Creative Suite files Adobe PDF printer Within the authoring application, in the Print dialog box. Export Within InDesign or Adobe GoLive®, on the File menu. (In InDesign, using the file type menu in the Export dialog box; in GoLive, using the HTML As Adobe PDF command on the Export submenu.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 61 User Guide Save As Within Adobe Photoshop® or Adobe Illustrator, on the File menu and using the file type menu in the Save As dialog box. Drag and drop On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). AutoCAD files Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From File. PDFMaker Within AutoCAD, in the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar or on the Adobe PDF menu. Adobe PDF printer Within AutoCAD, in the Print dialog box. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). PostScript and EPS files Drag and drop On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder, by dragging to the Acrobat Distiller icon or into the Acrobat Distiller window. Double-clicking (PostScript files only) On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or Mac OS Finder. Open command Within Acrobat Distiller, on the File menu. Create PDF menu Within Acrobat, by choosing From File. Adobe PDF printer Within the authoring application, in the Print dialog box. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). 3D captures Note: Requires Adobe Acrobat 3D. Adobe Acrobat Professional and Adobe Acrobat Standard cannot convert 3D files to PDF. Create PDF menu Within Acrobat 3D, by choosing From 3D Capture. Adobe PDF printer Within the authoring application, in the Print dialog box. Context menu On the desktop, in Windows Explorer or in Mac OS Finder (by right-clicking/Control-clicking). Balancing PDF file size and quality There are important settings that you can select so that your PDF has the best balance between file size, resolution, conformity to specific standards, and other factors. Which settings you select depends on your goals for the PDF that you are creating. For example, a PDF intended for high-quality commercial printing requires different settings than a PDF intended only for on-screen viewing and quick downloading over the Internet. Once selected, these settings apply across PDFMaker, Acrobat, and Acrobat Distiller. However, there are some settings that are limited to specific contexts or file types. For example, PDFMaker options can vary among the different types of Microsoft Office applications. For convenience, you can select one of the conversion presets available in Acrobat. You can also create, define, save, and reuse custom presets that are uniquely suited to your purposes. See also “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 62 User Guide Creating simple PDFs with Acrobat Convert a file to PDF 1 In Acrobat, do one of the following: • Choose File > Create PDF > From File. • On the toolbar, click the Create PDF button and choose From File. 2 In the Open dialog box, select the file you want to convert to PDF. You can browse all file types or select a specific type in the Files Of Type menu. 3 (Optional) Click Settings to change the conversion options. The options available vary depending on the file type. Note: The Settings button is unavailable if you choose All Files as the file type or if no conversion settings are available for the selected file type. 4 Click Open to convert the file to a PDF. Depending on the type of file being converted, the authoring application opens automatically or a progress dialog box appears. If the file is in an unsupported format, a message appears, telling you that the file cannot be converted to PDF. 5 When the new PDF opens, choose File > Save or File > Save As; then select a name and location for the PDF. When naming a PDF that’s intended for electronic distribution, limit the filename to eight characters (with no spaces) and include the .pdf extension. This ensures that email programs or network servers don’t truncate the filename and that the PDF opens as expected. See also “View PDFMaker conversion settings” on page 76 “Combining PDF content” on page 116 Drag and drop to create PDFs This method is usually best reserved for small, simple files, such as small image files or plain text files, when the balance between file size and output quality is not important. You can use this technique with many other types of files, but you won’t have the opportunity to adjust any conversion settings during the process. 1 Using Explorer (Windows) or the Finder (Mac OS), select the file icons of one or more files that you want to convert to PDF. 2 Drag the file icons onto the Acrobat application icon. Or, (Windows only) drag the files into the open Acrobat window. If a message appears saying that the file could not be opened in Acrobat, then that file type cannot be converted to PDF by the drag-and-drop method. Use one of the other conversion methods for that file. Note: You can also convert PostScript and EPS files to PDF by dragging them onto the Acrobat Distiller window or the Distiller application icon. 3 Save the PDF. (Windows only) You can also right-click a file in Windows Explorer and choose Create PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 63 User Guide Convert clipboard images to PDF You can create PDFs from screen captures and other images you copy from an image-editing application. ? Use the method described for the operating system running on your computer: • (Windows) Capture a displayed image to the Clipboard, either by using the Copy command in an image-editing application, such as Adobe Photoshop, or by pressing the PrintScreen key. Then in Acrobat, choose File > Create PDF > From Clipboard Image, or choose From Clipboard Image in the Create PDF toolbar menu. • (Mac OS) Choose Acrobat > Services > Grab > [Screen, Selection, or Timed Screen]. (Grab is the Mac OS X screen-capture utility.) Your screen capture automatically converts to a PDF and opens. Note: The From Clipboard Image command appears only when there is an image copied to the clipboard. If the clipboard is empty or if you have copied text to the clipboard, the command does not appear. Create a PDF from a blank page Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 introduces the PDF Editor feature. With it, you can create a PDF from a blank page rather than beginning with a file, a clipboard image, or scanning. This process can be useful for creating relatively small PDFs of up to about a dozen pages. For longer, more complex, or heavily formatted new documents, it’s usually better to create the source document in an authoring application that offers more layout and formatting options, such as Adobe InDesign or various business software products. Note: The PDF Editor can make changes in text only with PDFs created from blank pages. To add a blank page to a PDF created by another method, create a blank document in another application and convert that file to PDF and import it into the existing PDF. Create and add text to a new, blank PDF 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From Blank Page. 2 Begin typing the text you want to add to the blank page. 3 Add any formatting to the text by selecting it and selecting options on the New Document toolbar. 4 As needed, select other tools and options that you want to apply to the PDF. 5 Choose File > Save, and select a name and location for the PDF file. Note: When the page is filled with text, the PDF Editor automatically adds a new blank page to the document. Edit text in a PDF created from a blank page 1 Choose File > Open, and locate and select a PDF created with PDF Editor (that is, one created from a blank page). 2 Choose Document > Resume Editing. 3 Add text and formatting as needed. Prevent changes in PDF Editor You can freeze the text you have added to PDFs created from a blank page. This prevents anyone from adding or changing the text. There is no Undo for this process. 1 Choose Document > Prevent Further Edits. 2 In the message that appears, click Prevent Further Edits to confirm your choice. Or, click Keep Text Editable if you want to continue adding or editing text with the PDF Editor. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 64 User Guide 3 In the Save As dialog box, select a new name and location for the file, or leave the original name and location selected to replace the original file with the uneditable version. Preferences for the PDF Editor You can access the PDF Editor preferences options by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Prefer­ ences (Mac OS) and then selecting New Document in the list under Categories. Font Specifies the font family that will be used by default for typing on a new, blank page. Size Specifies the font size of the default font. Default Margins Specifies the measurements of the insets from the edges of the page: Left, Right, Top, and Bottom. Size (under Default Page) Specifies the standard paper size, such as Letter, Tabloid, A4, and so on. Orientation Specifies whether the longer side of the page runs horizontally (Landscape) or vertically (Portrait). Scan a paper document to PDF You can create a PDF file directly from a paper document, starting within Acrobat and using your scanner. In Windows XP, Acrobat supports TWAIN scanner drivers and Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers. If you need to convert large numbers of paper documents to PDF archives, consider purchasing Adobe Acrobat Capture®. Note: You can also scan paper forms in a way that converts them into interactive PDF forms. See “Creating new forms” on page 212. Scan a paper document directly to PDF 1 In Acrobat, do one of the following: • Choose File > Create PDF > From Scanner. • Choose Document > Scan To PDF. • Choose From Scanner from the Create PDF menu on the toolbar. 2 In the Acrobat Scan dialog box, select basic scanning options. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 65 User Guide Note: The Options button under Text Recognition And Metadata is not available unless Make Searchable (Run OCR) is selected. 3 As needed, click Scanner Options and the two Options buttons to access advanced settings for your selected scanner, Optimization Options, and Recognize Text settings. Note: If you specify that you want to use your scanner’s native interface instead of the Acrobat interface, other windows or dialog boxes appear. Consult the scanner manufacturer’s documentation for more information on available options. In Mac OS, the scanner’s interface is always shown. 4 Click Scan. 5 Click the Scan More Pages (Put Sheet N+1) option if you are scanning multiple pages (where N is the number of pages already scanned); click Scanning Complete and OK if you are finished scanning. Optimize a scanned PDF 1 Open a PDF created from a scanned document. 2 Choose Document > Optimize Scanned PDF. 3 Select options in the dialog box, and click OK. The options available in the Optimized Scanned PDF dialog box also appear in the Optimization Options dialog box, which are described in detail under that heading in this topic. Basic scanning options Scanner Select an installed scanner. You must have the manufacturer’s scanning software installed on your computer. Scanner Options (Windows only) Click to open the Scanner Options dialog box. (Available only after you select a scanner.) Sides Specify single or double-sided scanning. If you select Both Sides and the scanner’s own settings are for only one side, the scanner setting overrides the Acrobat settings. Note: You can scan both sides of pages even on scanners that do not themselves support two-sided scanning. When Both Sides is selected, a dialog box appears after the first sides are scanned. You can then reverse the original paper documents in the tray, select the Scan Reverse Side (Put Reverse Of Sheets) option in that dialog box, and click OK to scan the back sides of the paper pages. This produces a PDF with all pages in the proper sequence. Color Mode (Windows only) Select a basic color mode (Color, Black and White, or Grayscale) supported by your scanner. This option is enabled if your Scanner Options are set to use the Acrobat scanning dialog box instead of the scanner application. Resolution (Windows only) Select a resolution supported by your scanner. This option is enabled if your Scanner Options are set to use the Acrobat scanning dialog box instead of the scanner application. Note: If you select a Color Mode or Resolution option not supported by your scanner, a message appears and your scanner’s application window opens, where you can select different options. New PDF Document Select this to create a new PDF; deselect it if you want to append the scanned pages to an existing PDF. Append Select this if you want to add the converted scan to an existing PDF. Use the pop-up menu to select an open PDF or click Browse to find and select another PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 66 User Guide Make PDF/A Compliant Select this option to make the PDF conform to ISO standards for PDF/A-1b. When selected, only Searchable Image (Exact) is available in the Recognize Text - Settings dialog box for the PDF Output Style option. Optimization Drag the slider to set the balance point between file size and quality. Click the Options button if you want to customize optimization with specific settings for file compression and filtering. Make Searchable (Run OCR) Select this option to make text and images in the PDF searchable and selectable. This option applies OCR and font and page recognition to the text images and converts them to normal text. Click the Options button to select specific settings in the Recognize Text - Settings dialog box. See “Recognize text in scanned documents” on page 68. Make Accessible Select this option to add tags to the document, which improve accessibility for disabled users. (Available only when Make Searchable (Run OCR) is selected.) Add Metadata Select this if you want to add information about the scanned document to the PDF file. When this option is selected, the Document Properties dialog box appears after scanning, where you can type in the metadata you want to add. Scanner Options dialog box Data Transfer Method Native Mode transfers in the default mode for your scanner. Memory Mode is automatically selected for scanning in resolutions over 600 dots per inch (dpi). User Interface The Hide Scanner’s Native Interface option bypasses the windows and dialog boxes provided by the scanner manufacturer. Instead, scanning from Acrobat opens the Acrobat Scan dialog box. Paper Size The menu lists available standard page sizes. Invert Black And White This option creates positive images from black-and-white negatives, for example. Optimization Options dialog box The Optimization Options dialog box for image settings controls how scanned images are filtered and compressed for the PDF. Default settings are suitable for a wide range of document pages, but you may want to customize settings for higher-quality images, smaller file sizes, or scanning issues. Automatic Applies default settings to balance file size and quality at a moderate level. • Aggressive Applies settings that minimize file size. In some cases, selecting this option may visibly affect the quality of the scanned PDF. Custom Settings Makes additional settings available under Compression and Filtering and disables the Aggressive setting under Automatic. If you select Custom Settings, the Color/Grayscale or Monochrome settings are available, depending on the option you selected in the Acrobat Scan dialog box. Color/Grayscale settings When scanning color or grayscale pages, select one of the following: • Lossless Does not apply compression or filters—such as Deskew, Background Removal, and so forth—to scanned pages. • Adaptive Divides each page into black-and-white, grayscale, and color regions and chooses a representation that preserves appearance while highly compressing each kind of content. Recommended scanning resolutions are 300 pixels per inch (ppi) for grayscale and RGB input, or 600 ppi for black-and-white input. • JPEG Applies JPEG compression to the entire grayscale or RGB input page. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 67 User Guide Note: The scanner uses either the selected Color/Grayscale option or the selected Monochrome option. Which one is used depends on the settings you select in the Acrobat Scan dialog box or in the scanner’s TWAIN interface, which may open after you click Scan in the Acrobat Scan dialog box. (By default, the scanner application dialog box does not open.) Monochrome When scanning black-and-white or monotone images, select one of the following: • JBIG2 Applies the JBIG2 compression method to black-and-white input pages. Settings of 0.95 or higher use the lossless method; at lower settings, text is highly compressed. Text pages typically are 60% smaller than CCITT Group 4 compressed pages, but processing is slow. Compatible with Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) and later. Note: For compatibility with Acrobat 4.0, use a compression method other than JBIG2. • Adaptive (As described above, under Color/Grayscale settings.) • CCITT Group 4 Applies CCITT Group 4 compression to black-and-white input page images. This fast, lossless compression method is compatible with Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) and later. Deskew Rotates any page that is not square with the sides of the scanner bed, to make the PDF page align vertically. Choose Automatic or Off. Background Removal Whitens nearly white areas of grayscale and color input (not black-and-white input). For best results, calibrate your scanner’s contrast and brightness settings so that a scan of a normal black-and-white page has dark gray or black text and a white background. Then, Off or Low should produce good results. If scanning off-white paper or newsprint, use Medium or High to clean up the page. Edge Shadow Removal Removes dark streaks that occur at the edges of scanned pages, where the scanner light is shadowed by the paper edge. Choose Off, Cautious, or Aggressive. Despeckle Removes isolated black marks in black-and-white page content. Low uses a basic peephole filter. Medium and High use both a peephole filter and a large area filter that removes larger spots farther from nearby features. Descreen Removes halftone dot structure, which can reduce JPEG compression, cause moire patterns, and make text difficult to recognize. Suitable for 200–400 ppi grayscale or RGB input or, for Adaptive compression, 400–600 ppi black-and-white input. The Automatic setting (recommended) applies the filter for 300 ppi or higher grayscale and RGB input. Select Off when scanning a page with no pictures or filled areas, or when scanning at a resolution higher than the effective range. Halo Removal When On (recommended), removes excess color at high-contrast edges, which may have been intro­ duced during either printing or scanning. This filter is used only on color input pages. Scanning tips • Acrobat scanning accepts images between 10 and 3000 ppi. If you select Searchable Image or Formatted Text & Graphics for PDF Output Style, input resolution of 72 ppi or higher is required, and input resolution higher than 600 ppi is downsampled to 600 ppi or lower. • On the Color/Grayscale menu in the Optimization Options dialog box, apply lossless compression to a scanned image by choosing CCITT for black-and-white images or Lossless for color or grayscale images. If this image is appended to a PDF document, and the file is saved by Save, the scanned image remains uncompressed. If the PDF document is saved using Save As, the scanned image may be compressed. • For most pages, black-and-white scanning at 300 ppi produces text best suited for conversion. At 150 ppi, OCR accuracy is slightly lower, and more font-recognition errors occur; at 400 ppi and higher resolution, processing slows and compressed pages are bigger. If a page has many unrecognized words or very small text (9 points or smaller), try scanning at higher resolution. Scan in black and white whenever possible. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 68 User Guide • When Recognize Text Using OCR is disabled, full 10-to-3000 ppi resolution range may be used, but the recom­ mended resolution is 72 and higher ppi. For Adaptive compression, 300 ppi is recommended for grayscale or RGB input, or 600 ppi for black-and-white input. • Pages scanned in 24-bit color, 300 ppi, at 8-1/2–by-11 inches (21.59-by-27.94 cm) result in large images (25 MB) prior to compression. Your system may require 50 MB of virtual memory or more to scan the image. At 600 ppi, both scanning and processing typically are about four times slower than at 300 ppi. • Avoid dithering or halftone scanner settings. These can improve the appearance of photographs, but they make it difficult to recognize text. • For text printed on colored paper, try increasing the brightness and contrast by about 10%. If your scanner has color-filtering capability, consider using a filter or lamp that drops out the background color. Or if the text isn’t crisp or drops out, try adjusting scanner contrast and brightness to clarify the scan. • If your scanner has a manual brightness control, adjust it so that characters are clean and well formed. If characters are touching, use a higher (brighter) setting. If characters are separated, use a lower (darker) setting. Recognize text in scanned documents You can use Acrobat to recognize text in previously scanned documents that have already been converted to PDF. OCR runs with header/footer/Bates number on image PDF files. 1 Open the scanned PDF. 2 Choose Document > OCR Text Recognition > Recognize Text Using OCR. 3 In the Recognize Text dialog box, select an option under Pages. 4 (Optional) Click Edit to open the Recognize Text - Settings dialog box, and select the options you want to use. Recognize Text - Settings Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software enables you to search, correct, and copy the text in a scanned PDF. If you do not apply OCR when you create a PDF by scanning a paper document, you can apply OCR to the PDF later if you have set the scanner resolution at 72 ppi and higher. OCR runs with header/footer/Bates number on image PDF files. Primary OCR Language Specifies the language for the OCR engine to use to identify the characters. PDF Output Style Determines the type of PDF to be produced. All options require an input resolution of 72 ppi or higher (recommended). All formats apply OCR and font and page recognition to the text images and convert them to normal text. • Searchable Image Ensures that text is searchable and selectable. This option keeps the original image, deskews it as needed, and places an invisible text layer over it. The selection for Downsample Images in this same dialog box determines whether or not the image will be downsampled and to what extent. • Searchable Image (Exact) Ensures that text is searchable and selectable. This option keeps the original image and places an invisible text layer over it. Recommended for cases requiring maximum fidelity to the original image. • Formatted Text & Graphics Reconstructs the original page using recognized text, fonts, and graphic elements. The accuracy of the results depends on the scanning resolution and other factors. You may need to review and correct the OCR text in the new PDF page after scanning. Note: The Formatted Text & Graphics option is available for only some languages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 69 User Guide Black-and-white scanning at 300 ppi produces the best text for conversion. At 150 ppi, OCR accuracy is slightly lower, and more font-recognition errors occur. For text printed on colored paper, try increasing the brightness and contrast by about 10%. If your scanner has color-filtering capability, consider using a filter or lamp that drops out the background color. Downsample Images Decreases the number of pixels in color, grayscale, and monochrome images after OCR is complete. Choose the degree of downsampling that you want to apply. Higher-numbered options do less downsam­ pling, producing higher-resolution PDFs. Correct OCR text in PDFs When you scan to Formatted Text & Graphics output, Acrobat analyzes bitmaps of text and substitutes words and characters for those bitmap areas. If the ideal substitution is uncertain, Acrobat marks the word as suspect. Suspects appear in the PDF as the original bitmap of the word, but the text is included on an invisible layer behind the bitmap of the word. This makes the word searchable even though it is displayed as a bitmap. You can accept these suspects as they are, or you can use the TouchUp Text tool to correct them. Note: If you try to select text in a scanned PDF that does not have OCR applied, or try to perform a Read Out Loud operation on an image file, Acrobat asks if you want to run OCR. If you click OK, the Recognize Text dialog box opens and you can select options, which are described in detail under the previous topic. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Document > OCR Text Recognition > Find All OCR Suspects. All suspect words on the page are enclosed in boxes. Click any suspect word to show the suspect text in the Find Element dialog box. • Choose Document > OCR Text Recognition > Find First OCR Suspect. Note: If you close the Find Element window before correcting all suspect words, you can return to the process by choosing Document > OCR Text Recognition > Find First OCR Suspect, or by clicking any suspect word with the TouchUp Text tool. 2 In the Find option, choose OCR Suspects. 3 Compare the word in the Suspect text box with the actual word in the scanned document, and accept, correct, or ignore the word. If the suspect was incorrectly identified as text, click the Not Text button. 4 Review and correct the remaining suspect words, and then close the Find Element dialog box. Enable Fast Web View in a PDF Fast Web View restructures a PDF document for page-at-a-time downloading (byte-serving) from web servers. With Fast Web View, the web server sends only the requested page, rather than the entire PDF. This is especially important with large documents that can take a long time to download from a server. Check with your webmaster to make sure that the web server software you use supports page-at-a-time downloading. To ensure that the PDF documents on your website appear in older browsers, you may also want to create HTML links (versus ASP scripts or the POST method) to the PDF documents and use relatively short path names (256 characters or fewer). Verify that an existing PDF is enabled for Fast Web View ? Do one of the following: • Open the PDF in Acrobat, and choose File > Properties. Look in the lower right area of the Description panel of the dialog box for the Fast Web View setting (Yes or No). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 70 User Guide • (Windows only) In Windows Explorer, right-click the PDF file icon and choose Properties. Click the PDF tab and look near the bottom of the panel for the Fast Web View setting (Yes or No). Verify the Fast Web View Preferences setting Follow this procedure to make sure that you have Acrobat set up to enable Fast Web View during the PDF creation process. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Under Categories, select Documents. 3 On the right side of the dialog box, under Save Settings, make sure that Save As Optimizes For Fast Web View is selected, or select it now, and click OK. Enable Fast Web View for an existing PDF Use this procedure after you have verified your Fast Web View Preferences setting and checked the PDF properties to be sure that the file is not already enabled for Fast Web View. 1 Open the PDF that you want to have Fast Web View. 2 Choose File > Save As. Select the same filename and location. 3 When a message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing file, click OK. You can also quickly enable Fast Web View in entire folders of Adobe PDF files by using a batch sequence. See “Run a predefined batch sequence” on page 368. Using the Adobe PDF printer Create PDFs by printing to file In many authoring applications, you can use the Print command with the Adobe PDF printer to convert your file to PDF. Your source document is converted to PostScript and fed directly to Distiller for conversion to PDF, without manually starting Distiller. The current Distiller preference settings and Adobe PDF settings are used to convert the file. If you’re working with nonstandard page sizes, create a custom page size. Note: The Adobe PDF printer creates untagged PDFs. A tagged structure is required for reflowing content to a handheld device and is preferable for producing reliable results with a screen reader. See also “Creating accessible PDFs” on page 299 Create a PDF using the Print command (Windows) 1 Open the file that you want to convert to a PDF in its authoring application, and choose File > Print. 2 Choose Adobe PDF from the printers menu. 3 Click the Properties (or Preferences) button to customize the Adobe PDF printer setting. (In some applications, you may need to click Setup in the Print dialog box to access the list of printers, and then click Properties or Prefer­ ences.) 4 In the Print dialog box, click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 71 User Guide Note: By default, your PDF is saved in the folder specified in the printer port. The default location is My Documents. The filename and destination are controlled by the Prompt For Adobe PDF Filename setting in the Adobe PDF Printing Preferences dialog box. Create a PDF using the Print command (Mac OS) 1 Open the file that you want to convert to a PDF in its authoring application, and choose File > Print. 2 Choose Adobe PDF 8.0 from the printers menu. 3 Choose PDF Options from the pop-up menu that is beneath the Presets menu (it may show Copies & Pages by default). 4 For Adobe PDF Settings, choose one of the default settings, or customize the settings using Distiller. Any custom settings that you have defined are listed. For most users, the default Adobe PDF conversion settings are adequate. 5 For After PDF Creation, specify whether or not to open the PDF. 6 Click Print. 7 Select a name and location for your PDF, and click Save. Note: By default, your PDF is saved with the same filename and a .pdf extension. Adobe PDF printing preferences (Windows) Printing preferences apply to all applications that use the Adobe PDF printer, unless you change the settings in an authoring application by using the Page Setup, Document Setup, or Print menu. Note: The dialog box for setting printing preferences is named Adobe PDF Printing Preferences, Adobe PDF Printing Defaults, or Adobe PDF Document Properties, depending on how you access it. To access printing preferences: • Click the Start button and choose Settings > Printers And Faxes. Right-click the Adobe PDF printer, and choose Printing Preferences. • In an authoring application such as Adobe InDesign, choose File > Print. Select Adobe PDF as the printer, and click the Properties (or Preferences) button. (In some applications, you may need to click Setup in the Print dialog box to access the list of printers, and then click Properties or Preferences to customize the Adobe PDF settings.) PDF-specific options appear in the Adobe PDF Settings tab. The Paper Quality tab and Layout tab contain other familiar options for the paper source, printer ink, page orientation, and number of pages per sheet. Note: Printing Preferences are different from printer Properties. The Preferences include Adobe PDF-specific options for the conversion process; the Properties dialog box contains tabs of options that are available for any type of printer. Adobe PDF Conversion Settings Select a predefined set of options from the Default Settings menu or click Edit to view or change the settings in the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. Adobe PDF Security To add security to the PDF, choose one of the following options, or click Edit to view or change the security settings: • Reconfirm Security For Each Job Opens the Adobe PDF - Security dialog box each time you create a PDF using the Adobe PDF printer. Specify settings in the dialog box. • Use The Last Known Security Settings Uses the same security settings that were used the last time a PDF was created using the Adobe PDF printer on your computer. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 72 User Guide Adobe PDF Output Folder Choose an output folder for the converted PDF, or click Browse to add or change the output folder. Choose Prompt For Adobe PDF Filename to specify a location and filename at conversion time. Adobe PDF Page Size menu Select a custom page size that you have defined. View Adobe PDF Results Automatically starts Acrobat and displays the converted document immediately. Add Document Information Includes information such as the filename and date and time of creation. Rely On System Fonts Only; Do Not Use Document Fonts Deselect this option to download fonts when creating the PDF. All your fonts will be available in the PDF, but it will take longer to create it. Leave this option selected if you are working with Asian-language documents. Delete Log Files For Successful Jobs Automatically deletes the log files unless the job fails. Ask To Replace Existing PDF File Warns you when you are about to overwrite an existing PDF with a file of the same name. See also “Create and use a custom page size” on page 73 Set Adobe PDF printer properties (Windows) In Windows, you can usually leave the Adobe PDF printer’s properties unchanged, unless you have configured printer sharing or set security. Note: Printing Properties are different from printer Preferences. The Properties dialog box contains tabs of options that apply to any type of printer; the Preferences include conversion options specifically for the Adobe PDF printer. Set Adobe PDF printer properties 1 Open the Printers window from the Start menu, and right-click the Adobe PDF printer. 2 Choose Properties. 3 Click the tabs, and select options as needed. Reassign the port that the Adobe PDF printer uses 1 Quit Distiller if it is running, and allow all queued jobs to the Adobe PDF printer to complete. 2 Open the Printers window from the Start menu. 3 Right-click the Adobe PDF printer, and choose Properties. 4 Click the Ports tab, and then click Add Port. 5 Select Adobe PDF Port from the list of available port types, and click New Port. 6 Select a local folder for PDF output files, and click OK. Then click Close to quit the Printer Ports dialog box. 7 In the Adobe PDF Properties dialog box, click Apply, and then click OK. For best results, select a folder on the same system where Distiller is installed. Although remote or network folders are supported, they have limited user access and security issues. Delete a folder and reassign the Adobe PDF printer to the default port 1 Quit Distiller if it is running, and allow a few minutes for all queued jobs to Adobe PDF to complete. 2 Open the Printers window from the Start menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 73 User Guide 3 Right-click the Adobe PDF printer, and choose Properties. 4 Click the Ports tab. 5 Select the default port, My Documents, and click Apply. 6 Select the port to delete, click Delete Port, and then click Yes to confirm the deletion. 7 Select the My Documents port again and click Close. Configure the Adobe PDF printer (Mac OS) In Mac OS, you must configure the Adobe PDF printer in three places: Distiller, your authoring application’s Page Setup menu, and your authoring application’s Print dialog box. 1 In Distiller, specify the Adobe PDF settings, font locations, and security. 2 In an authoring application such as Adobe InDesign, choose File > Page Setup. 3 Select Adobe PDF 8.0 from the Format For menu. 4 Specify the paper size, orientation, and scale as necessary. 5 In your authoring application, choose File > Print, and select Adobe PDF 8.0 from the Printer menu. 6 In the pop-up menu below the Presets menu, choose PDF Options, and set any of the following options: • Select a set of predefined conversion settings from the Adobe PDF Settings menu if you want to override default settings. Default settings are the settings currently defined in Distiller. • Specify whether to open the converted files in Acrobat in the After PDF Creation menu. 7 Specify print settings as desired in the other menus available in the pop-up menu below the Presets menu. Create and use a custom page size It’s important to distinguish between page size (as defined in the source application’s Document Setup dialog box for your document) and paper size (the sheet of paper, piece of film, or area of the printing plate you’ll print on). Your page size might be U.S. Letter (8-1/2-by-11 inches or 21.59-by-27.94 cm), but you might need to print on a larger piece of paper or film to accommodate any printer’s marks or the bleed area. To ensure that your document prints as expected, set up your page size in both the source application and the printer. The list of paper sizes available to Acrobat comes from the PPD file (PostScript printers) or from the printer driver (non-PostScript printers). If the printer and PPD file you’ve chosen for PostScript printing support custom paper sizes, you see a Custom option in the Paper Size menu. For printers capable of producing very large print areas, Acrobat supports pages as large as 15,000,000 inches (38,100,000 cm) by 15,000,000 inches (38,100,000 cm). Create a custom page size (Windows) 1 Do one of the following: • Open the Printers or Printer And Faxes window from the Start menu. Right-click the Adobe PDF printer, and choose Printing Preferences. • In an authoring application such as Adobe InDesign, choose File > Print. Select Adobe PDF as the printer, and click the Properties button. (In some applications, you may need to click Setup in the Print dialog box to access the list of printers, and then click Properties or Preferences to customize the Adobe PDF settings.) 2 In the Adobe PDF Settings tab, click the Add button next to the Adobe PDF Page Size menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 74 User Guide 3 Specify the name, width, height, and unit of measurement. Click Add/Modify to add the custom page size name to the Adobe PDF Page Size menu. Create a custom page size (Mac OS) 1 In an authoring application such as Adobe InDesign, choose File > Page Setup. 2 In the Settings pop-up menu, select Custom Paper Size. 3 Click the New button. 4 Specify the name, height, width, and margins. The unit of measurement depends on the system language. 5 Click Save, and then click OK. Use the custom page size 1 Choose File > Print Setup. 2 Select the new custom page size from the Paper Size menu, and click OK. Creating PDFs with PDFMaker About Acrobat PDFMaker PDFMaker is an Acrobat feature that operates within many business applications, such as Microsoft Office applica­ tions and Lotus Notes. When you install Acrobat, PDFMaker controls appear in the work area of the authoring appli­ cation. Using PDFMaker within an authoring application is a simple, one-click procedure. It involves clicking an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar button or (Windows only) choosing a command on the Adobe PDF menu. It is not necessary to open Acrobat. Use PDFMaker to convert a file to PDF (Windows) In Windows, Acrobat installs both an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar and an Adobe PDF menu in many popular authoring applications. You can use either the toolbar buttons or the Adobe PDF menu (the Action menu in Lotus Notes) to create PDFs, but the menu also provides access to conversion settings. Although many of the conversion options are common to all authoring applications, a few are application-specific. For Microsoft Office 2007 applications such as Word, Excel, and PowerPoint, the options for creating PDFs are available from the Acrobat Ribbon. Note: If you don’t see the PDF toolbar buttons in an application, choose View > Toolbars > Acrobat PDFMaker 8.0. Or, in Lotus Notes only, choose File > Preferences > Toolbar Preferences, click Toolbars, and select the Visible check box for Acrobat PDFMaker 8.0. See also “Customize Adobe PDF settings” on page 101 “Create PDFs from Word mail merges” on page 81 Convert a file to PDF 1 Open the file in the application used to create it. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 75 User Guide 2 Click the Convert To Adobe PDF button on the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar, or (if available) choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF. (In Lotus Notes only, PDF conversion commands appear on the Actions menu.) For Microsoft Office 2007 applications such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Access, click the Create PDF button on the Acrobat Ribbon. 3 In the Save Adobe PDF File As dialog box, enter a filename and location for the PDF, and click Save. Create a PDF as an email attachment 1 Open the file in the application used to create it. 2 Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Email. For Microsoft Office 2007 applications such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Access, click the Create And Attach To Email button on the Acrobat Ribbon. When the conversion is finished, a blank message with the new PDF included as an attachment automatically opens in your default email application. You can then address and complete the message and either send it or save it as a draft. Attach a file as PDF (Outlook) 1 In the Outlook email Message window, click the Attach As PDF button . Note: If the Attach As PDF button isn’t visible, in Outlook, choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings, and then select Show Attach As Adobe PDF Buttons. The Attach As PDF button is not available for Outlook 2007. 2 Select a file to attach, and click Open. Convert files to a secured PDF and attach it to an email message (Outlook) 1 In the Outlook email Message window, click the Attach As Secured Adobe PDF button . Note: The Attach As Secured Adobe PDF button appears only after you’ve configured an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server using the Advanced > Security Settings menu. 2 Click Browse, select a file to convert, and click Open. 3 Specify the users that can open the PDF, and then click OK: • To specify only users that receive the PDF, select Restrict Access Only To People In This Message’s To:, Cc:, And Bcc: List. In this case, the PDF isn’t secured until you send the email message. • To specify only users that are specified by a security policy, select Restrict Access By Applying The Following Security Policy, and then select a security policy in the list. In this case, the PDF is secured before it is attached to the email message. 4 If prompted, enter your user name and password to log in to the Adobe Policy Server. Create a PDF and send it for review 1 Open the file in the application used to create it. 2 Click the Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review button on the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar, or (if available) choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review. For Microsoft Office 2007 applications such as Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Access, click the Create And Send For Review button on the Acrobat Ribbon. 3 When the Identity Setup dialog box appears, enter the appropriate information about yourself, and click Complete. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 76 User Guide 4 Follow the directions in the wizard that appears, as described in “Start an email-based review” on page 158. Use PDFMaker to convert a file to PDF (Mac OS) The default Acrobat installation adds Convert To Adobe PDF buttons to Office application toolbars. You can use these buttons to create Adobe PDF files quickly and easily from Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files without opening Acrobat. The PDF creation process applies the currently selected conversion settings. If you want to change those settings, you must open Acrobat Distiller and select options there. In most cases, the default settings produce good results. Note: Password-protected Excel files can’t be converted to PDF on Mac OS. Also, many PowerPoint features aren’t converted when you produce a PDF from a PowerPoint file on Mac OS. For example, animations and transitions aren’t converted. 1 Open the file in the Office application. 2 On the Adobe Acrobat PDFMaker 8 toolbar, select one of the following: • Convert To Adobe PDF. • Convert To Adobe PDF And EMail. 3 In the Save dialog box, type a filename, select a folder in which to save the PDF, and click Save. 4 When the conversion is complete, choose View File if you want to open the new PDF in Acrobat, or Done if you want to close the Acrobat PDFMaker status dialog box without opening the PDF. If you selected Convert To Adobe PDF And Email, the newly created PDF is attached to a blank email that opens in your default email application. You can either address, complete, and send the message immediately or save it as a draft to send later. See also “Customize Adobe PDF settings” on page 101 View PDFMaker conversion settings PDFMaker conversion settings vary according to file types. For example, the options available for PowerPoint files aren’t the same as those available for Outlook files. Once you’ve selected conversion settings, those choices apply to all subsequent PDFs you create from that file type. It’s a good idea to review the settings occasionally. 1 Open a PDFMaker-enabled application (such as Word or Excel). 2 Do one of the following: • (Lotus Notes) Choose Actions > Change Adobe PDF Conversion Settings. • (Office 2007 applications) Choose Acrobat > Preferences. • (All other applications) Choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings. 3 (Optional) To revert to the original default settings, click Restore Defaults on the Settings tab. Note: PDFMaker isn’t available for email applications on Mac OS. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 77 User Guide See also “Application-specific features of PDFMaker” on page 78 “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 Settings tab of the Conversion Settings The settings available for PDFMaker depend on the application in which you’re using PDFMaker. Conversion Settings Specifies the standard by which the PDF will be optimized. When you choose an item in the menu, a description of that preset appears immediately below it. View Adobe PDF Result Opens the converted document directly into Acrobat. (Exception: when you choose Convert To Adobe PDF And Email.) Prompt For Adobe PDF File Name Lets you enter a custom filename for the resulting PDF. Deselect this option to save the file in the same folder as the source file, using the same name but with a .pdf extension. Convert Document Information Adds document information from the Properties dialog box of the source file. This setting overrides the printer preferences and settings in the Advanced panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. Note: The Advanced Settings button opens the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box, which contains many additional conversion options. These conversion settings apply to all Acrobat features that create PDFs, such as Acrobat Distiller, PDFMaker, and the Acrobat application itself. Create PDF/A Compliant PDF File Creates the PDF so that it conforms to this ISO standard for long-term preser­ vation of electronic documents. (In the Microsoft Publisher application alone, PDFMaker does not support the PDF/A standard.) Note: When Conversion Settings are opened from within Word, Excel, or PowerPoint, this option specifies PDF/A 1­ a:2005. When opened from within Microsoft Visio, Access, Microsoft Project, AutoCAD, or Publisher, it specifies PDF/A 1-b:2005. Security tab of the Conversion Settings The settings available for PDFMaker depend on the application in which you’re using PDFMaker. Require A Password To Open The Document When selected, makes the Document Open Password option available, where you type to set a password that users must use in order to open the document. Restrict Editing And Printing Of The Document When selected, makes the other Permissions options available. Change Permissions Password Specifies a password you set that users must use in order to do any allowable printing or editing. Printing Allowed Specifies whether users who use the Permissions Password can print the document and at what resolution. Changes Allowed Specifies what kind of changes users who use the Permissions Password can make. Enable Copying Of Text, Images, And Other Contents Prevents or allows users from copying from the PDF. Enable Text Access For Screen Reader Devices For The Visually Impaired Prevents or allows screen reader devices to access text. (Selected by default.) Enable Plaintext Metadata Specifies whether or not the search engine can access the document metadata. Available only when the PDF-compatibility is set to Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) or later. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 78 User Guide Application-specific features of PDFMaker Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows) You can use PDFMaker to convert one or more Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes email messages or entire folders of messages to a merged PDF or PDF package. Within a package, each email message appears as a separate PDF file. The Acrobat PDFMaker Conversion Settings dialog box contains the option that determines whether email messages are merged into one continuous PDF or assembled into a PDF package. The controls that activate an email conversion to PDF appear in two places within the email application: on the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar and on a menu. In Outlook, the menu is called Adobe PDF and appears to the right of the Outlook Help menu. In Lotus Notes, PDF commands appear under the Actions menu. You can convert one currently open email message to PDF (not to a PDF package) by choosing File > Print, and selecting Adobe PDF as the printer in the Print dialog box. The PDFMaker conversion settings do not affect this process. See also “Application-specific PDFMaker settings” on page 85 “Create and manage an index in a PDF” on page 379 Specify whether email messages become merged PDFs or PDF packages 1 Do one of the following: • (Outlook) Choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings. • (Lotus Notes) Choose Actions > Change Adobe PDF Conversion Settings. 2 Do one of the following: • To convert and merge email messages into a PDF as sequential pages of one document, deselect Output Adobe PDF Package When Creating A New PDF File. • To assemble converted email messages as components of a PDF package, select Output Adobe PDF Package When Creating A New PDF File. Convert an open email message to PDF (Outlook) ? Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF. You can also convert a different file to PDF from within an open Outlook email message if the Attach As Adobe PDF toolbar is shown. Clicking this button opens a series of dialog boxes for selecting and saving the new PDF and also starts Acrobat, if it is not already running. The resulting PDF is attached to the open email message. Convert email messages to a new PDF 1 In Outlook or Lotus Notes, select the individual email messages that you want to archive. 2 Do one of the following: • (Outlook) Click the Convert Messages button in the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar, or choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF > Selected Messages. • (Lotus Notes) Click the Convert Selected Messages To Adobe PDF button in the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar, or choose Actions > Convert Selected Messages To Adobe PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 79 User Guide 3 In the Save Adobe PDF As dialog box, select a location, type a filename, and click Save. Note: For security reasons, the default settings in Outlook 2003 block automatic downloading of pictures in HTML email messages from unknown senders and sites. If you want to download such images and include them in the conversion to PDF, you can change that setting in Outlook by choosing Tools > Options, clicking the Security tab, and then clicking the Change Automatic Download Settings, where specific options are available. For more information, see the Outlook Help system. Add email messages to an existing PDF 1 In Outlook or Lotus Notes, select the individual email messages that you want to convert and add to a PDF. 2 Do one of the following: • (Outlook) Choose Adobe PDF > Convert And Append To Existing Adobe PDF > Selected Messages. • (Lotus Notes) Choose Actions > Append Selected Messages To Existing Adobe PDF. 3 Locate and select the PDF or PDF package to which you want to add the converted emails, and click Open. Important: Do not type a new name for the PDF. If you do, a warning message appears telling you that the PDF was not found. Click OK, and select a PDF without changing its name. 4 (Outlook only) If a message appears, alerting you that the existing PDF was creating using an earlier version of PDFMaker, do one of the following: • To create a PDF package from the original PDF archive, click Yes, and select a name and location for the new archive. (The default name adds _Packaged to the original PDF filename.) When the conversion is complete and the Creating Adobe PDF dialog box closes, the new archive opens in Acrobat. • To not create a PDF package from the original PDF archive, click No and cancel the process. Note: In earlier versions of Acrobat and for email merged into a single PDF, messages might be duplicated when running the append process. For PDF packages of email converted or migrated in Acrobat 8, only new messages—that is, messages that are not already part of the PDF package—are appended. (Lotus Notes) Convert an email folder to a new PDF 1 In Lotus Notes, select the folder that you want to convert to PDF. 2 Click the Convert Selected Folder To Adobe PDF button on the Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar, or choose Actions > Convert Selected Folder To Adobe PDF. 3 In the Save Adobe PDF File As, specify a location and name for the PDF package, and click Save. To convert other Lotus Notes folders to PDF, repeat this procedure for each folder. (Outlook) Convert email folders to a new PDF In Outlook, PDFMaker can convert multiple folders to PDF in one procedure. It is not necessary to select those folders at the beginning of the process because you can make these selection in a dialog box that appears automati­ cally. 1 In Outlook, choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF > Selected Folders. 2 In the Convert Folder(s) To PDF dialog box, select the folders you want to convert, and then select or deselect the Convert This Folder And All Sub Folders option. 3 In the Save Adobe PDF File As, select a location and name for the PDF package. The Creating Adobe PDF status dialog box shows the progress of the conversion. When the conversion is complete, the new PDF opens in Acrobat. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 80 User Guide Migrating old Outlook PDF archives to PDF packages (Windows) There are two good reasons for migrating old PDF email archives to PDF packages: to facilitate sorting and other functions, and to make it possible to add new email messages to those archives. In PDF packages, each email message is converted as a component PDF. You can then sort the messages by message folder, sender, subject line, date, size, or attachments. Also, you can create custom categories and sort by those. You can open email archives you created with earlier version of Acrobat in Acrobat 8.0, but you cannot add email messages to that archive in the same way. If you try, messages will appear that will guide you through the process of creating a new archive from the old one and appending the selected messages to the new PDF package archive. Migrate old Outlook PDF archives to PDF packages (Windows) 1 Open Outlook. 2 Choose Adobe PDF > Migrate Old PDF Archives To PDF Packages. 3 If a message appears, click Yes to continue the migration process. 4 Locate and select the old PDF archive, and click Open. 5 Select a location and name for the migrated PDF package, and click Save. (The default naming adds _Packaged to the existing filename, such as renaming an archive called Inbox.pdf as Inbox_Packaged.pdf.) When the conversion process is complete and the Creating Adobe PDF dialog box closes, the new archive opens in Acrobat. Set up automatic email archiving (Windows) In Microsoft Outlook, you can set up PDFMaker to automatically archive your email messages. 1 In Outlook, choose Adobe PDF > Setup Automatic Archival. 2 On the Automatic Archival tab of the Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box, select Enable Automatic Archival, and then select options for Frequency and the time of day at which automatic archiving occurs. 3 Select other options, according to your needs: Maintain Log Of Archival Creates a record of each archiving session. Choose File Specifies the name and location of the archiving log. Embed Index For Faster Search Creates an index that you can search to find specific words or characters instead of having to search each individual document. 4 Click Add, and select the email folders and subfolders that you want PDFMaker to archive. Then select or deselect the Convert This Folder And All Sub Folders option, as preferred, and click OK. 5 In the Save PDF Archive File As dialog box, select a name and location for the archived email PDF. Then click Open. 6 Review the settings and the archive folder names listed in the Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box, and do any of the following: • To add other email folders to the list, click Add and select the folder. • To remove folders from the list, select the ones you want to remove and click Delete. • To make changes to an archive file, select any folder name on the list, click Change Archive File, and specify the name and location. • To start archiving email immediately, click Run Archival Now. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 81 User Guide Create PDFs from Word mail merges Mail merges from Word generate documents like form letters—for one common example—which are personalized with information like the names and addresses of the individuals to whom they will be sent. With Acrobat PDFMaker, you can save steps by using a Word mail merge document and corresponding data file to output mail merges directly to PDF. You can even set up PDFMaker to attach those PDFs to email messages that are generated during the PDF-creation process. Note: For more information on setting up files for the Word Mail Merge feature, see Microsoft Office Word Help. 1 In Microsoft Word, open the template that you have created as the basis of your mail merge, or create the file using the Word Mail Merge toolbar and Mail Merge wizard, as needed. Important: Do not complete the mail merge in Word. Instead, set up and preview the mail merge as usual, so that you can verify that the merge will work correctly. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Adobe PDF > Mail Merge To Adobe PDF. • Click the Mail Merge To Adobe PDF button on the Mail Merge toolbar (View > Toolbars > Mail Merge). • (Word 2007) Choose Acrobat > Mail Merge. 3 In the Acrobat PDFMaker - Mail Merge dialog box, select the options you want: • To specify which records in the data file will be imported into the merged files, select All or Current, or enter a range of pages by typing in the From and To boxes. • To name the PDF that will be created, type in the Specify PDF File Name box. Note: The PDF will be named using this text plus a series of numbers. For example, if you type JulyLetter in the Specify PDF File Name box, the mail-merged PDFs might appear as JulyLetter_0000123, JulyLetter_0000124, July Letter_0000125, and so forth. 4 For Automatically Send Adobe PDF Files By Email, do one of the following: • To create and save merged PDFs for printing or sending later in email, leave the option deselected, and click OK. • To create merged PDFs and attach each one to an email message to the appropriate recipient, select this check box, and fill in the other Email options. 5 When the Browse For Folder dialog box appears, navigate to the location you want to use and click OK. Status indicators appear as PDFMaker generates the individual PDFs, which takes an amount of time that is propor­ tional to the complexity of the merge and the number of PDFs you create. 6 If you selected Automatically Send Adobe PDF Files By Email, a dialog box appears asking for your email profile. Enter the appropriate information and click OK. When the job is finished, a message appears, telling you that the process was successful. Email options for PDF mail merges To Use the pop-up menu to select the field or column in the associated data file that contains the email addresses in each individual’s record. Subject Line Type the text that you want to appear in the subject line of each message. Message Type to add or edit text that you want to appear in the body of the email messages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 82 User Guide PDFs from Microsoft Project, Publisher, and Access (Windows) There are specific differences to be aware of when you create PDFs from files authored in these applications: Microsoft Project You can create PDFs of only the currently selected view. Views designated as nonprintable in Project cannot be converted to PDF. Note: Converting Project files requires Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D. Microsoft Publisher PDFs converted from Microsoft Publisher support crop marks, links, bookmarks, spot colors, transparency, bleed marks, printing bleed marks, and CMYK color conversion. Microsoft Access When creating PDFs from Access files, the process can involve two additional steps: • You must select the object in the Access file to be created as a PDF before using the PDFMaker button or command. • You can choose Adobe PDF > Convert Multiple Reports To Single Adobe PDF. For Access 2007, click Acrobat and then click Convert Multiple Report. You can select individual reports that you want to include, and click Add Report(s). When all of the reports that you want to convert appear in the Reports In PDF list, click Convert to start creating the PDF. Note: When you convert an Access 2003 or Access 2002 file to PDF, Access reports, tables, queries, and forms are converted. When you convert an Access 2000 file to PDF, only reports are converted. Convert Visio files to PDF (Windows) PDFs created from Visio files preserve page sizes and support layers, searchable text, custom properties, links, bookmarks, and comments, depending on your settings in the conversion settings. (Choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings to review these, if needed.) When you convert your Visio file, only shapes and guides that are printable and visible in the Visio drawing are converted and appear in the PDF. Shapes are converted regardless of their protection or behavior. Shape custom properties can be converted to PDF object data. When you convert the Visio file to a PDF, you can preserve all or just some layers, or you can flatten all layers. If you flatten layers, the PDF will look like the original drawing, but won’t contain any layer information. When flattened, the contents of only visible and printable layers will appear in the converted PDF. See also “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 Convert Visio files 1 If you want to change the PDFMaker conversion settings, open Visio and choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings. (For information about a setting, place the pointer over the setting to display a tool tip below.) 2 If you want to convert each page in the Visio file to a bookmarked page in the PDF file, choose Adobe PDF > Convert All Pages In Drawing. If this option is deselected, only the current page is converted. 3 Do one of the following: • Click the Convert To Adobe PDF button in the Adobe PDF toolbar. • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF. • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And EMail. The PDF file attaches to a new email message in your default email application. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 83 User Guide • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review. The file converts to an Adobe PDF file, and an email-based review process begins. 4 If you want to include the custom properties of shapes, select that option. 5 Click Continue. 6 Select a layers option to retain or flatten layers in the resulting PDF, and click Continue. Note: If you select Retain Some Layers In The Selected Page, you’ll be prompted to choose which Visio layers to include. 7 Click Convert To Adobe PDF, specify a location and filename, and click Save. Convert AutoCAD files to PDF (Windows) If you’re working in AutoCAD, you can convert files from within the application with the Acrobat PDFMaker. Note: Converting AutoCAD files in DWF or DST formats to PDF requires use of the default filters installed with the AutoCAD application. For more information, refer to the AutoCAD application documentation. See also “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 “What’s the best way to create a PDF?” on page 59 Convert AutoCAD files when AutoCAD is not installed The default Acrobat installation installs Autodesk filters that allow you to convert files with DWG, DWF, or DST format into PDF, without the native application installed. All layers and layouts will be created in the PDF file. For information about different methods to convert AutoCAD files to PDF, see “PDF creation methods by file type” on page 59. Convert AutoCAD files when AutoCAD is installed The default Acrobat installation adds two Convert To Adobe PDF buttons to the toolbar that allow you to convert your AutoCAD data into a PDF that preserves layers and layouts. You can create PDF settings to define the layers and layer status in the resulting PDF. You can then name, save, and reuse these settings for subsequent conversions. Note: Acrobat PDFMaker automatically acquires and uses the necessary page size and plotting information of the respective layout to create a correctly sized PDF file. 1 If you want to change the PDF conversion settings, choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings in AutoCAD. (For information on the conversion settings, place the pointer over each option to display a tool tip.) 2 Do one of the following: • Click a button on the Adobe PDF toolbar: Convert To Adobe PDF or Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review button . • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF. • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Email. • Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review. 3 To select which AutoCAD layouts to include in the resulting PDF and their order, do any of the following in the Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box, and then click OK: • To include one or more AutoCAD layouts, select the layouts in the Layouts In Drawing list, and click Add. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 84 User Guide • To remove AutoCAD layouts from the list of layouts to include, select the layouts in the Layouts In PDF list, and click Remove. • To reorder the PDF layouts, select a layout in the Layouts In PDF list, and click Move Up or Move Down. 4 To determine how the AutoCAD layers are converted, select one of the following, and click Continue: • Flatten All Layers. • Retain All Or Some Layers. The Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box displays a screen in which you must choose which layers to include in the resulting PDF. 5 Choose a location in which to save the resulting PDF file in the Save In box, type a filename, and click Save. Select AutoCAD layers to convert If you choose to create a PDF file that retains some AutoCAD layers, you can specify which layers are preserved in the PDF. The Layers In Drawing list shows all the layers in the AutoCAD file. You transfer layers that you want to be present in the PDF from the Layers In Drawing list to the Layers In PDF list. Only layers and objects of layers present in the Layers In PDF list are present in the PDF. 1 In AutoCAD, start to convert an AutoCAD file and select the Retain All Or Some Layers option. 2 To show AutoCAD layers in the Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box, do any of the following: • Choose an option from the Named Layer Filters menu to list all layers that fit that criterion. • Select the Invert option to list all layers except those that are described by the selected choice in the Named Layer Filters menu. • To change the sort order of the layers, click the headings. Note: To change a layer’s On, Frozen, or Plot properties, click Cancel Conversion, change the properties in the AutoCAD drawing, and restart the procedure. 3 Do any of the following to select the AutoCAD layers from the Layers In Drawing list that you want to convert and include in the PDF: • To select a set of layers you’ve already saved, choose a layer setting from the PDF Layer Settings menu. • To select a single layer, click the name of the layer. • To select more than one layer, Ctrl-click the desired layers. • To select all layers, right-click and choose Select All. Note: To navigate through the AutoCAD layers, use the Up and Down Arrow keys. Use the scroll bar at the bottom of the column to scroll horizontally through the table. 4 To add the selected AutoCAD layers to the list of layers to convert to PDF, do one of the following: • To convert the selected AutoCAD layers to individual PDF layers within a PDF layer set, click Create Layer Set, and optionally, type a layer name. (A PDF layer set is a folder for organizing layers in the Layers panel in Acrobat.) • To convert the selected AutoCAD layers to individual layers, click the Add Layer(s) button. The name of a layer in the Layers In Drawing list is unavailable if that layer is included in the Layers In PDF list. When you select that layer in the Layers In PDF list, a bullet appears next to the layer’s name in the Layers In Drawing list. 5 Optionally, do any of the following: • To reorder the layers in the Layers In PDF list, drag an item up or down in the list. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 85 User Guide • To include a visibility property that can be switched on or off in Acrobat, deselect Locked On adjacent to the PDF layer; to lock the resulting PDF layer’s visibility on, select Locked On. • To save the current settings of AutoCAD layers selected, click Add PDF Settings, name the layer setting, and click OK. The Add PDF Settings button is unavailable unless you’ve added at least one AutoCAD layer from the Layers In Drawing list to the Layers In PDF list. These settings are used the next time you convert an AutoCAD file to PDF and can be renamed or edited at any time. 6 Click the Convert To PDF button, specify a folder in the Save In box in which to save the PDF file, type a filename, and then click Save. Convert AutoCAD files in batches ? Choose Adobe PDF > Batch Conversion, and follow the instructions. Application-specific PDFMaker settings PDFMaker is a flexible feature of Acrobat that adapts according to its environment. The conversion settings available in one PDFMaker-enabled application may be different than those you would encounter within a different appli­ cation. Some PDFMaker settings are common to several or most applications. Some options are unique to a specific appli­ cation. See also “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 “Convert web pages to PDF in Internet Explorer (Windows)” on page 89 “Settings for a single conversion for Office 2007 applications” on page 88 Settings tab options available from within most applications The following settings appear on the Settings tab accessed from within most PDFMaker-enabled applications. Attach Source File To Adobe PDF Includes the document being converted as an attachment to the PDF. Add Bookmarks To Adobe PDF Converts certain elements in original Office documents to PDF bookmarks: Word headings, Excel worksheet names, or PowerPoint titles. Selecting this option overrides any settings in the Bookmarks tab of the Conversion Settings dialog box. Note: In Microsoft Publisher 2003 documents, PDFMaker includes Publisher headings as bookmarks in the PDF. PDFMaker does not support the conversion of Publisher 2002 bookmarks, links, transparency, or crop marks and bleed marks. Add Links To Adobe PDF Includes active links and hypertext in the PDF. Enable Accessibility And Reflow With Tagged Adobe PDF Embeds tags in the PDF. Excel-specific options on the Settings tab Convert Comments To Notes Converts user-created Excel comments to notes and lists them in the Acrobat Comments panel. Fit Worksheet To A Single Page Adjusts the size of each worksheet so that all the entries on that worksheet appear on the same page of the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 86 User Guide Prompt For Selecting Excel Sheets Opens a dialog box at the beginning of the file conversion process, in which you can specify which worksheets are included in the PDF and the order in which the sheets appear in the PDF. PowerPoint-specific options on the Settings tab Convert Multimedia To PDF Multimedia Adds any linked audio-video files to the PDF. Save Animations In Adobe PDF Converts any animation effects in the PowerPoint file to equivalent animations in the PDF. Save Slide Transitions In Adobe PDF Converts PowerPoint slide transition effects to PDF transition effects. Convert Hidden Slides To PDF Pages Converts any PowerPoint slides that are not seen in the usual playing of the presentation to PDF pages. Convert Speaker Notes To Text Notes In Adobe PDF Converts any speaker notes for the PowerPoint presentation into Text notes in the PDF. PDF Layout Based On PowerPoint Printer Settings Uses the same printer settings in the PDF as in the original file. Email-specific options on the Settings tab The following options appear when you open the PDFMaker settings from within Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes. Attachments Indicates whether or not all files attached to email messages will be included in the new PDF. Output Adobe PDF Package When Creating A New PDF File When selected, always converts individual messages as component files of a PDF package. When deselected, merges individual messages as separate pages of a PDF. Embed Index For Faster Search Creates an embedded index, which speeds up searches, especially when you convert large numbers of email messages or message folders. Show “Attach As Adobe PDF” Buttons If selected, the Attach As Adobe PDF button appears in the Outlook email message window. Page Layout options Specify page properties, similar to those found in the Print dialog box: page dimensions, orien­ tation, and margins. AutoCAD-specific options on the Settings tab Open Layers Pane When Viewed In Acrobat Shows layers structure when a PDF is opened in Acrobat or Adobe Reader. Embed Scale Information Preserves drawing-scale information, which is usable with the Acrobat measurement tools. Choose Layout Specifies whether Current Layout, All Layouts, or Selected Layouts are included in the PDF. Choose Layer Specifies whether All Layers, Selected Layers, or No Layers are included as layers in the PDF. Visio-specific options on the Settings tab The following options appear when you open the PDFMaker settings from within Microsoft Visio. Include Visio Custom Properties As Object Data In The Adobe PDF Indicates whether or not custom properties of the Visio image will be included as object data in the new PDF. Exclude Visio Objects With No Custom Properties Indicates if the new PDF should exclude Visio objects without custom properties. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 87 User Guide Convert Comments To Adobe PDF Indicates if the comments in the Visio file should be converted to PDF comments in the new PDF. Always Flatten Layers In Adobe PDF Specifies if the layers should be flattened. If you flatten layers, the PDF will look like the original drawing, but won’t contain any layer information. All shapes in the Visio drawing are converted, regardless of their protection or behavior, and shape custom properties can be converted to PDF object data. Word 2007-specific options on the Settings tab The following options appear when you open the PDFMaker settings from within Microsoft Word 2007. Fully Functional PDF creates a fully functional, high-quality, and compact PDF file. Quick And Simple PDF Creates a basic PDF file for viewing. The Bookmark and Word tab settings are not available for quick and simple PDFs. Word tab settings (Microsoft Word) Convert Displayed Comments To Notes In The Adobe PDF Changes any Word comment entries to PDF comments. If the currently open Word document contains comments, more options appear in the Comments list on this tab: • Reviewer Lists the names of reviewers who have entered comments in the current Word document. • Include When deselected, does not include that reviewer’s comments in the PDF. • Notes Open Specifies whether the PDF comment windows automatically open or are closed for that reviewer’s comments. • Color Shows the color for that reviewer’s comment icons. Clicking the color icon repeatedly cycles through a limited set of available colors. Convert Cross-References And Table Of Contents To Links Enables one-click navigation of these elements in the new PDF. Convert Footnote And Endnote Links Integrates these into the PDF. Enable Advanced Tagging Integrates this into the PDF. Bookmarks tab settings (Microsoft Word) The options you specify on this tab determine which items are converted into PDF bookmarks in the PDF. Important: The Add Bookmarks To Adobe PDF option on the Settings tab must be selected in order to include any bookmarks in the conversion process. If you deselect that option, it overrides any options you select on this tab and no bookmarks will be created. Convert Word Headings To Bookmarks Selects all the headings in the Elements list for conversion to PDF bookmarks. Convert Word Styles To Bookmarks Selects all the text styles in the Elements list for conversion to PDF bookmarks. (Deselected by default.) Convert Word Bookmarks Converts any user-created Word bookmarks to PDF bookmarks. Element list Specifies which Word headings and styles will be converted as PDF bookmarks. • Element Lists the names of all available Word headings and styles. The icons for Headings and Styles indicate the element types. • Type Also indicates whether the element is a heading or style in the Word document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 88 User Guide • Bookmark Displays X’s, indicating whether or not individual elements will be converted to PDF bookmarks. Clicking an individual Bookmark check box changes the selection status for that element. • Level Specifies where the element will fit in the hierarchy structure of the PDF Bookmarks panel. Clicking an individual Level number opens a menu that you can use to change the value. Note: When some but not all of the available Word headings and styles are selected for conversion to PDF bookmarks, the marker in the corresponding check boxes at the top of the tab change. If all elements of the type are selected, a check mark appears. If only some of the elements of that type are selected, a colored square appears. Otherwise, the check box is empty. Settings for a single conversion for Office 2007 applications For Word 2007, Excel 2007, and PowerPoint 2007 applications, if you want the settings to be used only for the selected conversion and not for future conversions, you can define the settings by accessing the conversion options from the Save Adobe PDF File As dialog box. View and modify options for a single conversion 1 Click the Office button and choose Save As > Adobe PDF. 2 Select the View Result check box if you want to view the PDF file after the conversion is complete. 3 (Word 2007) Specify if you want the PDF to be complete and fully functional or if you just need a quick and simple PDF. The quick and simple PDF option does not allow you to create bookmarks from Word styles. 4 Click Adobe PDF Conversion Options to define the options to be used for the current conversion. The initial settings in the Conversion Options dialog box are based on the options that you set using the Preferences button on the Acrobat Ribbon. Converting web pages to PDF Web pages and PDFs The core of a web page is a file written in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Typically, the HTML file includes associations with other files that either appear on the web page or govern how it looks or works. When you convert a web page to PDF, the HTML file and all associated files—such as JPEG images, Adobe Flash files, cascading style sheets, text files, image maps, and forms—are included in the conversion process. The resulting PDF behaves much like the original web page. For example, the images, links, image maps, and most media files appear and function normally within the PDF. (Animated GIF files appear as still images, showing the last frame of the animation.) Also, the PDF functions like any other PDF. For example, you can navigate through the file by scrolling or using bookmarks; users can add comments to it; you can add security, form fields, and other features that enhance it. In preparing to convert web pages to PDF, there are decisions to consider that affect how you approach the conversion process: • How much do you want to convert? If you want to convert only a selected area of the currently open web page, use PDFMaker from within Internet Explorer. If you want to convert several levels or all of a multipage web site to PDF, work within Acrobat. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 89 User Guide • Do you want to create a new PDF from the web pages or to append the converted pages to an existing PDF? You can do this in either Acrobat or Internet Explorer PDFMaker, but you choose different buttons or commands to accomplish these things. • Do you need to apply advanced conversion settings to the process? The conversion settings available from within Internet Explorer are limited. Use Acrobat for the conversion process if you need to select additional settings. When you finish your selections and have converted at least one web page to PDF from within Acrobat, those settings will apply when you convert web pages from within Internet Explorer, too. Note: To convert Chinese, Japanese, and Korean (CJK) language web pages to PDF on a Roman (Western) system in Windows, you must have installed the CJK language support files while installing Acrobat. Also, it is preferable to select an appropriate encoding from the HTML conversion settings. Convert web pages to PDF in Internet Explorer (Windows) When you install Acrobat, Internet Explorer (version 6.0 and later) gains an Adobe PDF toolbar. Using the commands on this toolbar, you can convert the currently displayed web page to PDF in various ways: You can convert the entire web page or just a selected part of it; you can create a new PDF or append the converted web page to an existing PDF. The Adobe PDF toolbar menu also contains commands that initiate further actions after conversion, such as attaching the new PDF to a new email message or printing it. A menu on the PDF toolbar provides easy conversion and print capabilities. Convert a web page to PDF 1 Start Internet Explorer and go to the web page that you want to convert to PDF. 2 Using the Adobe PDF toolbar menu, do one of the following: Note: If you don’t see the Adobe PDF toolbar in Internet Explorer, choose View > Toolbars > Adobe PDF. • To create a new PDF from the currently open web page, choose Convert Web Page To PDF. Then select a location, type a filename, and click Save. • To add a PDF of the currently open web page to another PDF, choose Add Web Page To Existing PDF. Then locate and select the PDF to which the converted file will be added, and click Save. • To create and print a new PDF from the currently open web page, choose Print Web Page. When the conversion is complete and the Print dialog box opens, select options and click OK. • To create a new PDF from the currently open web page and attach it to a blank email message, choose Convert Web Page And Email. Then select a location for the PDF, type a filename, and click Save. Type the appropriate information in the email message that opens after the conversion is complete. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 90 User Guide Convert part of a web page to PDF You can convert text or images on a web page. This is useful if you want to save content without saving navigation frames or advertising. 1 Drag the pointer to select text and images on a web page. 2 On the Adobe PDF toolbar menu, choose one of the following: • To create a new PDF, choose Convert Web Page To PDF. Then select a name and location for the PDF. • To append the selected content to another PDF, choose Add Web Page To Existing PDF. Then locate and select the PDF to which the selection will be added. 3 Make sure that Only Convert Selection is selected, and click Save. Convert a linked web page to PDF ? In the open web page, right-click the linked text and choose one of the following: • To convert the linked web page to a new PDF, choose Convert Link Target To Adobe PDF. • To add the linked web page to an existing PDF, choose Convert Link Target To Existing PDF. Then locate and select the existing PDF, and click Save. Set PDF conversion preferences for Internet Explorer (Windows) The Internet Explorer PDF preferences determine only whether converted files open in Acrobat automatically, and whether you are prompted to confirm the deletion of files or addition of pages to an existing PDF. 1 In Internet Explorer, choose Preferences from the Adobe PDF toolbar menu. 2 Select and deselect options in the Adobe PDF Preferences, as needed: • To continue working in Internet Explorer after the conversion without opening the new PDF in Acrobat, deselect Open PDF Files In Acrobat After Conversion. • To delete PDF files without further notice, deselect Ask For Confirmation Before Deleting PDF Files. • To append PDF files without further notice, deselect Ask For Confirmation Before Adding Pages To PDF Files. • To skip alerts reminding you that the PDF file you are appending to has been changed, deselect Warn Before Adding Pages If The PDF File Has Been Modified. Manage PDFs in Internet Explorer (Windows) You can open the Adobe PDF Explorer Bar within Internet Explorer to see PDF files and folders on your computer in a familiar navigation-tree pane and format. All other types of files do not appear, which makes it easier to find the PDFs on your computer. You can move PDFs and folders, rename them, or delete them, just like in Windows Explorer. The Adobe PDF Explorer Bar also contains buttons for converting the current web page to PDF or creating new folders on your computer. Note:When you right-click a web page, the context-sensitive menu includes some commands for converting PDFs. Which commands are available depends on the element you right-click on the web page. For example, the commands that appear when you right-click a text link differ from those that appear when you right-click ordinary text on the web page. 1 Open the Adobe PDF pane in Internet Explorer, using one of the following methods: • Choose Adobe PDF Explorer Bar from the Adobe PDF toolbar menu. • Choose View > Explorer Bar > Adobe PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 91 User Guide 2 In the Adobe PDF pane, manage folders by doing any of the following: • To add a new folder, select the location for the folder in the tree structure and click New Folder, or right-click the location icon and choose New Folder. • To rename a folder, right-click the folder, choose Rename, and type a new name. • To delete a folder, right-click the folder and choose Delete. Note: Only PDF files appear in the navigation structure in the Adobe PDF pane, but other files may be present in folders. If you attempt to delete a folder that contains files that aren’t visible, a confirmation message appears. If you’re not sure that you want to delete those files, click No. 3 In the Adobe PDF pane, manage PDFs by right-clicking a PDF and choosing one of the following: Open In Internet Explorer Opens the selected PDF within the document pane of Internet Explorer. Open In Acrobat Opens the selected PDF in a standalone instance of Acrobat. Open Containing Folder Opens the folder in which the PDF is located, as a new instance of Windows Explorer. Add Web Page To This File Converts the currently open web page to PDF and adds it as a new page to the selected PDF. Add Selection To This File Converts your selection within the currently open web page to PDF and adds it as a new page to the selected PDF. Note: You can also rename or delete the selected PDF from the right-click menu. Convert web pages to PDF in Acrobat Although you can convert an open web page to PDF from Internet Explorer, you get additional options when you run the conversion from the Acrobat application. For example, you can include an entire website in the PDF or just some levels of a website. Also, you can select Web Page Conversion options that apply when you create PDFs from web pages. See also “Asian language PDFs” on page 54 “Web Page Conversion options in Acrobat” on page 93 Convert a web page to PDF 1 In Acrobat, choose File > Create PDF > From Web Page, or click the Create PDF From Web Page button on the toolbar to open the dialog box. 2 In URL, enter the complete path to the web page, or click Browse and locate the HTML page that you want to convert. 3 Under Settings, enter the number of levels you want to include, or select Get Entire Site to include all levels from the website. Note: Some websites may have hundreds or even thousands of pages. This can take a long time to download, may make your system slow and unresponsive, and can even use up all available hard disk space and memory, causing a system crash. You may want to begin by downloading only one level of pages and then go through them to find particular links to download. 4 Select one or both of the following options: Stay On Same Path Downloads only web pages subordinate to the specified URL. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 92 User Guide Stay On Same Server Downloads only web pages stored on the same server. 5 Click Settings, and review the selected options in the Web Page Conversion Settings dialog box. Make any changes you want on the General and Page Layout tabs, and click OK. 6 Click Create. Note: You can view PDF pages while they are downloading; however, you cannot modify a page until the download process is complete. If you closed the Download Status dialog box, Choose Advanced > Web Capture > Bring Status Dialogs To Foreground to see the dialog box again. Add an unlinked web page to an existing PDF Use this procedure to append pages to a writable PDF. If the original PDF is read-only, the result will be a new PDF rather than new pages in the existing PDF. 1 Open the existing PDF in Acrobat (the PDF to which you want to append a web page). 2 Choose Advanced > Web Capture > Create PDF From/Append Web Page. 3 Enter the URL to the web page you want to append and select options, as described for converting web pages to PDF, and then click Create. Add a linked web page to an existing PDF 1 Open the previously converted PDF in Acrobat. If necessary, scroll to the page containing links to the pages you want to add. 2 Do one of the following: • Click a web link in your PDF. • Right-click/Control-click the web link, and choose Append To Document. • Choose Advanced > Web Capture > View Web Links. The dialog box lists all the links on the current page or on the tagged bookmark’s pages. Using the Shift key or Ctrl key as needed, click to select the linked pages you want to add, or click Select All. Click Properties to set the download options, as needed, and then click Download. • Choose Advanced > Web Capture > Append All Links On Page. Note: After pages have been converted, links to these pages change to internal links, and clicking a link takes you to the PDF page, rather than to the original HTML page on the web. Convert a linked web page to a new PDF 1 Open the previously converted PDF in Acrobat. If necessary, scroll to the page containing a web link you want to convert. 2 Do one of the following: • Right-click/Control-click the web link, and choose Open Weblink As New Document. • Ctrl-click/Control-click the web link. Note: In Windows, you can also convert a linked page from a web page displayed in Internet Explorer, using a similar right-click command. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 93 User Guide Copy the URL of a web link Use this procedure to copy the path for a web link to the clipboard, to use it for other purposes. 1 Open the previously converted PDF in Acrobat. If necessary, scroll to the page containing links to the pages you want to copy. 2 Right-click/Control-click the web link and choose Copy Link Location. Change Acrobat web page conversion options The settings for converting web pages to PDF apply to the conversion process. Any changes you make to these settings apply to PDFs you create from web pages after changing the settings. The settings changes do not affect existing PDFs. Edit the web page conversion options 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From Web Page. 2 Click the Settings button. 3 On the General tab, select new options under File Type Settings and PDF Settings, as needed. If you select a text file type, you can click the Settings button to see additional options for that file type. 4 On the Page Layout tab, select options for page size, orientation, and scaling, as needed, and then click OK. Reset web page conversion options to default settings 1 Choose Edit > Preferences. 2 Under Categories, select Web Capture, and then click Reset Conversion Settings To Defaults. Web Page Conversion options in Acrobat The Web Page Conversion Settings dialog box is available only from within Acrobat. The Settings button in the Create PDF From Web Page dialog box opens the Web Page Conversion Settings. Note: The options available in the Web Page Conversion Settings are different from those available in the Web Capture Preferences. Together, these settings apply to both the web conversion and web capture processes. General tab File Type Settings Specifies the file type to be downloaded. If you select HTML or Plain Text as the file type, click Settings to select the font properties and other display characteristics. Create Bookmarks Creates a tagged bookmark for each converted web page using the page’s title (HTML Title element) as the bookmark name. If the page has no title, the URL is used as the bookmark name. Create PDF Tags Stores a structure in the PDF that corresponds to the HTML structure of the web pages and lets you create tagged bookmarks for paragraphs, list elements, and other items that use HTML elements. Place Headers & Footers On New Pages Places a header and footer on every page. Headers show the web page’s title; footers show the page’s URL, the page number in the downloaded set, and the date and time of the download. Save Refresh Commands Saves a list of all URLs and remembers how they were downloaded in the PDF for refreshing (updating) purposes. Must be selected before you can update a PDF-converted website. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 94 User Guide Page Layout tab The upper portion of this tab shows options similar to those on a Page Setup or Print dialog box, specifying a selection of page sizes and options for width, height, margin measurements, and page orientation. The right side of the tab area shows a Sample Page that adjusts when you change the measurements or orientation options. The Scaling portion of the tab area shows these options: Scale Wide Contents To Fit Page (Windows)/Scale Contents To Fit Page (Mac OS) Rescales a page’s contents, if necessary, to fit the width of the page. If this option is not selected, the paper size adjusts to fit the page’s contents if necessary. Switch To Landscape If Scaled Smaller Than Changes the page orientation to landscape if the new version of a page is less than 70% of the original size. Available only if you selected portrait orientation. HTML Conversion Settings This dialog box opens when you select HTML on the General tab of the Web Page Conversion Settings dialog box, and then click the Settings button. General tab Lets you specify the following options: • Default Colors Sets the default colors for text, page backgrounds, web links, and text that replace unavailable images. Click the color button to open a palette, and select the color. To use these colors on all pages, select Force These Settings For All Pages. • Background Options Specifies whether to display colors and tiled images in page backgrounds and colors in table cells. If options are deselected, converted web pages may look different than they do in a web browser, but may be easier to read when printed. • Line Wrap Wraps preformatted (HTML) lines of text. When selected, this option changes the line breaks so that the text fits on the PDF pages. Select this setting if an HTML file has unreasonably long lines of preformatted text. • Multimedia Determines whether to reference multimedia (such as SWF files) by URL, disable multimedia capture, or embed multimedia files when possible. • Convert Images Includes images in the conversion to PDF. If you do not select this option, an image is indicated by a colored border (and possibly text, if specified by the page’s design). • Underline Links Underlines textual web links on the pages. Fonts And Encoding tab Lets you specify the following options: • Default Under Input Encoding, sets the input encoding of a file’s text from a menu of operating systems and alphabets. • Always Ignores any encoding that is specified in the HTML source file and uses the selection shown in the Default option. • When Page Doesn’t Specify Encoding Uses the selection shown in the Default option only if the HTML source file does not specify a type of encoding. • Language Specific Font Settings Use these settings to change the fonts used to display body text, headings, and preformatted text. Click Change, select new fonts from the menus, and click OK. • Font Size Sets the font sizes used for body text, headings, and preformatted text. • Embed Platform Fonts When Possible Stores the fonts used on the pages in the PDF so that the text always appears in the original fonts. Note that embedding fonts increases the size of the file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 95 User Guide Plain Text Conversion Settings General tab Lets you specify the following options: • Color swatches Swatches indicate the colors selected for text and background. Colors can be changed by clicking the swatch and selecting a new color in the color picker that opens. • Wrap Lines At Margin Inserts a soft return when the text reaches the edge of the text area on the page. • Reflow Text (Available only when Wrap Lines At Margin is selected.) Makes text more accessible for users with special needs. • Limit Lines Per Page Sets the maximum number of lines that can appear on a single page, based on the entry in Max Lines. Fonts And Encoding tab Lets you specify the following options: • Default Under Input Encoding, sets the input encoding of a file’s text. • Language Specific Font Settings Use these settings to change the fonts used to display body text, headings, and preformatted text. Click Change, select new fonts from the menus, and click OK. • Font Size Sets the font sizes used for body text, headings, and preformatted text. • Embed Platform Fonts When Possible Stores the fonts used on the pages in the PDF so that the text always appears in the original fonts. Note that embedding fonts increases the size of the file. Web Capture preferences in Acrobat You can set several preferences for opening PDFs created from web pages and for customizing the process of converting web pages to PDFs. To open the Web Capture Preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS) and select Web Capture under Categories. Note: The options available in the Web Capture Preferences are different from those available in the Web Page Conversion Settings. Together, these settings apply to both the web conversion and web capture processes. Verify Stored Images Specifies how often to check whether images on the website have changed. Show Bookmarks Panel When New PDF File (Created From Web Page) Is Opened When selected, automatically opens the navigation pane and displays tagged bookmarks when you open a new file. (When deselected, the navigation pane is closed when you open converted web pages, but the tagged bookmarks are still created. Click the Bookmarks button to see the tagged bookmarks in the navigation pane.) Skip Downloading Secured Pages Select Always to skip secured pages when downloading multiple levels of a website. If you select After, a password dialog box appears that times out and skips the secured pages after the specified number of seconds. Reset Conversion Settings To Defaults Changes the options in the Web Page Conversion Settings dialog box back to the original settings. Note: If you select this option, the settings revert immediately and irreversibly. If you want to restore your custom conversion options, you must enter each of those settings again. A C D F B E ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 96 User Guide Creating PDFs with Acrobat Distiller Acrobat Distiller overview In Acrobat Distiller, you can select settings used to convert documents to PDFs, security options, and font infor­ mation. You also use the Acrobat Distiller window to monitor the jobs you’ve lined up for PDF conversion. Acrobat Distiller main window (Windows) A. Menus B. Adobe PDF settings files C. Files in job queue D. Failed job E. Context menu F. Status window Note: In Mac OS, there is no context menu. Instead, a Clear List button clears all distilled jobs from the list. To convert PostScript files automatically, set up a watched folder in Distiller. Start Acrobat Distiller ? Do one of the following: • In Acrobat, choose Advanced > Print Production > Acrobat Distiller. • (Windows) Choose Start > Programs > Acrobat Distiller 8.0. • (Mac OS) Use the Finder to locate Acrobat Distiller 8.0, and double-click it to open the Distiller application. Manage the conversion queue Distiller lets you queue PostScript files that you create in authoring applications and then monitor them throughout the PDF conversion process. Queue a PostScript file 1 In Distiller, select an Adobe PDF settings file from the Default Settings pop-up menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 97 User Guide 2 (Optional) Choose Settings > Security and select an encryption level. 3 Open the PostScript file and start the conversion process, using either method: • Choose File > Open, select a PostScript file, and click Open. • Drag one or more PostScript files from the desktop to the Acrobat Distiller window. Click Pause before doing step 3 if you want to review the queue before Distiller starts converting the files. Change the queue during processing Do any of the following: • To temporarily stop processing the current job, click Pause. Or (Windows only), right-click the job queue and choose Pause. • To resume processing the current job, click Resume. Or (Windows only), right-click the job queue and choose Resume. • To delete files from the queue, click Cancel Job. Cancel Jobs deletes all files from the queue that are not yet success­ fully completed. Or (Windows only), select and right-click individual files in the job queue and choose Cancel Job(s) to delete only those files. • (Windows only) To open the folder where the selected files are, right-click the job queue and choose Explore. • (Windows only) To open the selected PDF in Acrobat, a browser, or Reader, right-click the job queue and choose View. Or, double-click the PDF to open it in Acrobat. Save a history of the job queue (Windows) ? Right-click the job queue, and choose Save List. Distiller saves and opens the history as a PDF. Clear the queue Remove all paused and successfully converted files from the list: • (Windows) Right-click the job queue, and choose Clear History. • (Mac OS) Click the Clear List button above the queue. Distiller preferences The Distiller preferences control global Distiller settings. You set Distiller preferences by choosing File > Preferences (Windows) or Distiller > Preferences (Mac OS). Notify When Watched Folders Are Unavailable Returns a message if a watched folder becomes unavailable or can’t be found. (Windows) Notify When Windows TEMP Folder Is Nearly Full Warns you if available hard disk space is less than 1 MB. Required hard disk space is often double the size of the PostScript file being processed. Ask For PDF File Destination Lets you specify the name and location for files when using drag-and-drop or the Print command. Ask To Replace Existing PDF File Warns you if you are about to overwrite an existing PDF. View PDF When Using Distiller Automatically opens the converted PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 98 User Guide Delete Log Files For Successful Jobs Creates a log file (named messages.log) only if there are messages from inter­ preting the PostScript file or if a PostScript error occurs. (Log files for failed jobs are always created.) Guidelines for creating PostScript files If you want to fine-tune the creation of the PDF with Distiller parameters or pdfmark operators, first create a PostScript file and then convert that file to PDF. For details, download the Adobe Acrobat 8 SDK or specific parts of it, such as the pdfmark Reference Manual, from various tabs on the Acrobat SDK documentation page (English only) on the Adobe website. In authoring applications such as Adobe InDesign, use the Print command with the Adobe PDF printer to convert a file to PostScript. The Print dialog boxes can vary from application to application. For instructions on creating a PostScript file from your specific application, see the application’s documentation. Keep the following guidelines in mind when creating PostScript files: • Use PostScript Language Level 3 whenever possible to take advantage of the most advanced features of PostScript. • Use the Adobe PDF printer as your PostScript printer. • (Windows) Send the fonts used in the document. • Give a PostScript file the same name as the original document, but with the extension .ps. (Some applications use a .prn extension instead.) • Use color and custom page sizes that are available with the Acrobat Distiller 8.0 PPD file. Other PPD files may cause inappropriate colors, fonts, or page sizes in the PDF. • Send PostScript files as 8-bit binary data when using FTP to transfer the files between computers, especially if the platforms are different, to avoid converting line feeds to carriage returns or vice versa. About watched folders You can configure Distiller to look for PostScript files in certain folders called watched folders. Distiller can monitor up to 100 watched folders. When Distiller finds a PostScript file located in the In folder of a watched folder, it converts the file to PDF and then moves the PDF (and usually the PostScript file and any associated log file) to the Out folder. A watched folder can have its own Adobe PDF settings and security settings that apply to all files processed from that folder. Security settings for a watched folder take priority over the security settings for Distiller. For example, Distiller does not convert a PostScript file in a watched folder if the file is marked with read-only permission. (Windows) Settings and preferences are unique to each user. On a non-NT File System (NTFS), custom settings files stored in this settings folder are read- and write-accessible by every user on the system. On an NTFS, only files created by respective users are read- and write-accessible. Settings files created by other users are read-only. (The default settings files installed with Adobe Acrobat Distiller are Read Only and Hidden.) (Mac OS) Each user’s settings and preferences for Distiller are normally not accessible to any other user. To share a watched folder with other users, the folder’s creator must set the appropriate permissions for the In and Out folders. Sharing enables other users to copy files to the In folder and get files from the Out folder. The creator must be logged into the system and have Distiller running. The other users must log in remotely to access the live watched folder and have their files processed. Important: You can’t set up watched folders as a network service for other users. Every user who creates PDFs must have either an Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D license. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 99 User Guide Set watched folders 1 In Acrobat Distiller, choose Settings > Watched Folders. 2 Click Add Folder, and select the target folder. Distiller automatically puts an In folder and an Out folder in the target folder. You can place In and Out folders at any level of a disk drive. 3 To define security options for a folder, select the folder and click Edit Security. Click OK to return to the Watched Folders dialog box. Note: A security icon is prepended to any folder name for which security is set. To return a folder to the original options selected in the Distiller window, select the folder, and click Clear Security. 4 Set Adobe PDF conversion settings for the folders: • To edit the Adobe PDF settings to be applied to a folder, select the folder, click Edit Settings, and edit the Adobe PDF settings. Click OK to save it to the watched folder as folder.joboptions. • To use a different set of Adobe PDF settings, select the folder and click Load Settings. Use any settings that you have defined, named, and saved, and then click OK. 5 Set options to manage the processing of files: • Enter a number of seconds to specify how often to check the folders. You can enter up to 9999. (For example, 120 equals 2 minutes, and 9999 equals about 2-3/4 hours.) • Choose what to do with a PostScript file after it has been processed. The file can be moved to the Out folder along with the PDF file or deleted. Any log file is also automatically copied to the Out folder. • To delete PDFs after a certain period of time, enter a number of days, up to 999. This option also deletes PostScript and log files, if you have chosen to delete them. 6 If you want to remove a folder, select the folder and click Remove Folder. Make sure that Distiller has finished processing all the files in the folder before you remove it. Note: When you remove a watched folder, Distiller does not delete the In and Out folders, their contents, or the folder.joboptions file. You can delete these manually when appropriate. See also “Customize Adobe PDF settings” on page 101 Adobe PDF conversion settings Choose an Adobe PDF preset for converting files 1 Do one of the following: • Start Acrobat Distiller 8.0. • In an Adobe Creative Suite application, choose File > Print, select Adobe PDF as the target printer, and click Properties. • (Windows) In Office 2007 applications, choose Acrobat > Preferences. • (Windows) In another authoring application or utility, choose Adobe PDF > Change Conversion Settings. 2 Choose a preset from the Default Settings (or Conversion Settings) menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 100 User Guide Note: All settings create PDFs that can be opened in Acrobat 5.0 and later, and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later, unless otherwise described. Adobe PDF presets A PDF preset is a group of settings that affect the process of creating a PDF. These settings are designed to balance file size with quality, depending on how the PDF will be used. Most predefined presets are shared across Adobe Creative Suite applications, including InDesign, Illustrator, Photoshop, and Acrobat. You can also create and share custom presets for your unique output requirements. A few of the presets listed below are not available until you move them—as needed—from the Extras folder (where they installed by default) to the Settings folder for custom settings. Typically, the Extras and Settings folders for default settings are found in (Windows) Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF, (Vista) ProgramData/Adobe/Adobe PDF, or (Mac OS) Library/Appli­ cation Support/Adobe PDF. The default settings files installed with Distiller are Read Only and Hidden. The custom settings are found in (Windows) Documents and Settings/[username]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings, (Vista) Users/[username]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings, or (Mac OS) Users/[username]/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings. Some presets are not available in some Creative Suite applications. Review your PDF settings periodically. The settings do not automatically revert to the default settings. Applications and utilities that create PDFs use the last set of PDF settings defined or selected. High Quality Print Creates PDFs for quality printing on desktop printers and proofing devices. This preset uses PDF 1.4, downsamples color and grayscale images to 300 ppi and monochrome images to 1200 ppi, embeds subsets of all fonts, leaves color unchanged, and does not flatten transparency (for file types capable of transparency). These PDFs can be opened in Acrobat 5.0 and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later. In InDesign, this preset also creates tagged PDFs. Illustrator Default (Illustrator only) Creates a PDF in which all Illustrator data is preserved. PDFs created with this preset can be reopened in Illustrator without any loss of data. Oversized Pages (Acrobat only) Creates PDFs suitable for viewing and printing of engineering drawings larger than 200 x 200 inches (508 x 508 cm). These PDFs can be opened in Acrobat and Reader 7.0 and later. PDF/A-1b: 2005 (CMYK and RGB) (Acrobat only) Used for long-term preservation (archival) of electronic documents. PDF/A-1b uses PDF 1.4 and converts all colors to either CMYK or RGB, depending on which standard you choose. These PDFs can be opened in Acrobat and Reader versions 5.0 and later. PDF/X-1a (2001 and 2003) PDF/X-1a requires all fonts to be embedded, the appropriate PDF bounding boxes to be specified, and color to appear as CMYK, spot colors, or both. Compliant files must contain information describing the printing condition for which they are prepared. PDF files created with PDF/X-1a compliance can be opened in Acrobat 4.0 and Acrobat Reader 4.0 and later. PDF/X-1a uses PDF 1.3, downsamples color and grayscale images to 300 ppi and monochrome images to 1200 ppi, embeds subsets of all fonts, creates untagged PDFs, and flattens transparency using the High Resolution setting. Note: The PDF/X1-a:2003 and PDF/X-3 (2003) presets are placed on your computer during installation but aren’t available until you move them from the Extras folder to the Settings folder. PDF/X-4 (2007) In Acrobat 8, this preset is called PDF/X-4 DRAFT to reflect the draft state of the ISO specification at Acrobat ship time. This preset is based on PDF 1.4, which includes support for live transparency. PDF/X-4 has the same color-management and International Color Consortium (ICC) color specifications as PDF/X-3. You can create ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 101 User Guide PDF/X-4-compliant files directly with Creative Suite 3 applications (Illustrator, InDesign, and Photoshop). In Acrobat 8, use the Preflight feature to convert PDFs to PDF/X-4 DRAFT. PDF files created with PDF/X-4 compliance can be opened in Acrobat 7.0 and Reader 7.0 and later. Press Quality Creates PDF files for high-quality print production (for example, for digital printing or for separations to an imagesetter or platesetter), but does not create files that are PDF/X-compliant. In this case, the quality of the content is the highest consideration. The objective is to maintain all the information in a PDF file that a commercial printer or print service provider needs in order to print the document correctly. This set of options uses PDF 1.4, converts colors to CMYK, downsamples color and grayscale images to 300 ppi and monochrome images to 1200 ppi, embeds subsets of all fonts, and preserves transparency (for file types capable of transparency). These PDF files can be opened in Acrobat 5.0 and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later. Note: Before creating an Adobe PDF file to send to a commercial printer or print service provider, find out what the output resolution and other settings should be, or ask for a .joboptions file with the recommended settings. You might need to customize the Adobe PDF settings for a particular provider and then provide a .joboptions file of your own. Rich Content PDF Creates accessible PDF files that include tags, hyperlinks, bookmarks, interactive elements, and layers. This set of options uses PDF 1.5 and embeds subsets of all fonts. It also optimizes files for byte serving. These PDF files can be opened in Acrobat 6.0 and Adobe Reader 6.0 and later. (The Rich Content PDF preset is in the Extras folder.) Note: This preset was called eBook in earlier versions of some applications. Smallest File Size Creates PDF files for displaying on the web or an intranet, or for distribution through an email system. This set of options uses compression, downsampling, and a relatively low image resolution. It converts all colors to sRGB, and (for Adobe Acrobat Distiller-based conversions) does not embed fonts. It also optimizes files for byte serving. These PDF files can be opened in Acrobat 5.0 and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later. Standard (Acrobat only) Creates PDF files to be printed to desktop printers or digital copiers, published on a CD, or sent to a client as a publishing proof. This set of options uses compression and downsampling to keep the file size down, but also embeds subsets of all (allowed) fonts used in the file, converts all colors to sRGB, and prints to a medium resolution. Note that Windows font subsets are not embedded by default. PDF files created with this settings file can be opened in Acrobat 5.0 and Acrobat Reader 5.0 and later. For more information about shared PDF settings for Adobe Creative Suite applications, see the PDF Integration Guide on the Creative Suite CD. Customize Adobe PDF settings You may want to create custom conversion settings for certain jobs or output devices. The selections you make determine such things as whether the document fonts are embedded and subsetted at 100%, how vector objects and images are compressed and/or sampled, and whether the resulting PDF includes high-end printing information such as OPI (Open Prepress Interface) comments. Default settings files cannot be modified, but can be duplicated to help create new settings files. Note: If the PDF is intended for high-end printing, ask your service provider for their custom .joboptions file with the recommended output resolution and other settings. This way, the PDF you give them will have characteristics optimized for your print workflow. B A ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 102 User Guide Create a custom Adobe PDF settings file 1 Do one of the following: • In Acrobat Distiller, select one of the predefined sets of options from the Default Settings menu to use as a starting point, and then choose Settings > Edit Adobe PDF Settings. • In authoring applications or utilities, select Adobe PDF as the target printer—typically in the Page Setup or Print dialog boxes—and click Properties. • (Windows) In the Acrobat PDFMaker dialog box, click Advanced Settings in the Settings tab. Note: In Windows, you can switch to a different preset from within the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. To do this, select Show All Settings at the bottom left and then select a preset from the list on the left. Adobe PDF Settings dialog box (Windows) A. Predefined Adobe PDF settings B. Options panel 2 Select panels one at a time, using the folder icons in the list (Windows) or the tab buttons across the top of the dialog box (Mac OS), and make the changes that you want to apply. 3 Save your customized preset in one of the following ways: • Click OK to save a duplicate of the custom preset file, which will automatically be renamed. For example, if you edit the Press Quality preset, your first customized version appears as Press Quality (1). • Click Save As, type a new descriptive name for the file, and click Save. The custom file is saved in (Windows) /Documents and Settings/[user name]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings, (Vista) User/[user name]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings, or (Mac OS) Users/[user name]/Library/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings Delete custom Adobe PDF settings files 1 In Acrobat Distiller, choose Settings > Remove Adobe PDF Settings. 2 Select a custom file that you want to delete, and click Remove. 3 Repeat step 2 as needed, and then click Cancel to close the Remove Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. Adobe PDF settings The Adobe PDF Settings dialog box in Acrobat Distiller contains panels of options that you can select to customize your PDF output. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 103 User Guide See also “PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant files” on page 512 “Find PostScript font names” on page 115 General panel options Use this panel to select a version of Acrobat for file compatibility and other file and device settings. (The panel appearance differs in Windows and Mac OS.) Compatibility Sets the compatibility level of the PDF. Use the most recent version (in this case, version 1.7) to include all the latest features and functionality. If you’re creating PDFs that will be distributed widely, choose an earlier level, to ensure that all users can view and print the document. Object Level Compression Compresses structural information (such as bookmarks, accessibility, and noncom­ pressible objects), making this information neither visible or usable in Acrobat 5.0 or Reader 5.0. Tags Only compresses structural information; Off applies no compression. Auto-Rotate Pages Automatically rotates pages according to the direction of text. • Collectively By File Rotates all pages to match the orientation of the majority of text in the document. • Individually Rotates each page based on the orientation of the text on that page. • Off Prevents pages from rotating. Note: If Process DSC Comments is selected in the Advanced panel and if %%Viewing Orientation comments are included, these comments take precedence in determining page orientation. Binding Specifies whether to display a PDF with left-side or right-side binding. The Binding setting affects the display of pages in the Two-Up Continuous view and the display of thumbnails side by side. Resolution Use for PostScript files to emulate resolutions based on the printer they are printing to. Permitted values range from 72 to 4000. Use the default setting unless you plan to print the PDF on a specific printer while emulating the resolution defined in the original PostScript file. Note: Increasing the resolution setting increases file size and may slightly increase the time required to process some files. Pages Specifies which pages to convert to PDF. Embed Thumbnails Embeds a thumbnail preview for each page in the PDF, increasing the file size. Deselect this setting when users of Acrobat 5.0 and later will view and print the PDF; these versions generate thumbnails dynam­ ically each time you click the Pages panel of a PDF. Optimize For Fast Web View Restructures the file for faster access (page-at-a-time downloading, or byte serving) from web servers. This option compresses text and line art, overriding compression selections on the Images panel. Default Page Size Specifies the page size to use when one is not specified in the original file. EPS files give a bounding box size, not a page size. Images panel options The options in the Images panel specify compression and resampling for color, grayscale, and monochrome images. You may want to experiment with these options to find an appropriate balance between file size and image quality. The resolution setting for color and grayscale images should be 1.5 to 2 times the line screen ruling at which the file will be printed. The resolution for monochrome images should be the same as the output device, but be aware that saving a monochrome image at a resolution higher than 1500 dpi increases the file size without noticeably improving image quality. Images that will be magnified, such as maps, may require higher resolutions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 104 User Guide Note: Resampling monochrome images can have unexpected viewing results, such as no image display. If this happens, turn off resampling and convert the file again. This problem is most likely to occur with subsampling, and least likely with bicubic downsampling. The following table shows common types of printers and their resolution measured in dpi, their default screen ruling measured in lines per inch (lpi), and a resampling resolution for images measured in pixels per inch (ppi). For example, if you were printing to a 600-dpi laser printer, you would enter 170 for the resolution at which to resample images. Printer resolution Default line screen Image resolution 300 dpi (laser printer) 60 lpi 120 ppi 600 dpi (laser printer) 85 lpi 170 ppi 1200 dpi (imagesetter) 120 lpi 240 ppi 2400 dpi (imagesetter) 150 lpi 300 ppi Downsample (Off) Reduces image resolutions that exceed the For Images Above value to the resolution of the output device by combining pixels in a sample area of the image to make one larger pixel. Average Downsampling To Averages the pixels in a sample area and replaces the entire area with the average pixel color at the specified resolution. Subsampling To Replaces an entire area with a pixel selected from that sample area, at the specified resolution. Causes faster conversion time than downsampling, but resulting images are less smooth and continuous. Bicubic Downsampling To Uses a weighted average, instead of a simple average (as in downsampling) to determine pixel color. This method is slowest but produces the smoothest tonal gradations. Compression/Image Quality Applies compression to color, grayscale, and monochrome images. For color and grayscale images, also sets the image quality. Anti-Alias To Gray Smooths jagged edges in monochrome images. Choose 2 bit, 4 bit, or 8 bit to specify 4, 16, or 256 levels of gray. (Anti-aliasing may cause small type or thin lines to look blurry.) Note: Compression of text and line art is always on. If you need to turn it off, you can do so by setting the appropriate Distiller parameter. For details, see the documentation available for download on the Acrobat SDK documentation page (English only) on the Adobe website. Policy Opens the Image Policy dialog box, where you can set processing options for Color, Grayscale, and Monochrome images that are less than the resolutions you specify. For each type of image, enter a resolution value, and then choose Ignore, Warn And Continue, or Cancel Job. Fonts panel options The Fonts options specify which fonts to embed in a PDF, and whether to embed a subset of characters used in the PDF. You can embed OpenType®, TrueType, and Type 1 fonts. Fonts that have license restrictions are preceded by a lock icon . If you select a font that has a license restriction, the nature of the restriction is described in the expla­ nation area of the Adobe PDF Options dialog box. Note: When you combine PDF files that have the same font subset, Acrobat attempts to combine the font subsets. Embed All Fonts Embeds all fonts used in the file. Font embedding is required for PDF/X compliance. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 105 User Guide Embed OpenType Fonts Embeds all OpenType fonts used in the file, and maintains OpenType font information for advanced line layout. This option is available only if either Acrobat 7 (PDF 1.6) or Acrobat 8 (PDF 1.7) is selected from the Compatibility menu in the General panel. Subset Embedded Fonts When Percent Of Characters Used Is Less Than Specifies a threshold percentage if you want to embed only a subset of the fonts. For example, if the threshold is 35, and less than 35% of the characters are used, Distiller embeds only those characters. When Embedding Fails Specifies how Distiller should respond if it cannot find a font to embed when processing a file. Always Embed To embed only certain fonts, move them into the Always Embed list. Make sure that Embed All Fonts is not selected. Never Embed Move fonts that you do not want to embed to this list. If necessary, choose a different font folder from the pop-up menu to display the font in the font list. Note: Fonts that have license restrictions are preceded by a lock icon. If you select a font with a license restriction, the nature of the restriction is described in the explanation area of the Adobe PDF Options dialog box. Add Name If the font you want is not in a font folder, click Add Name, enter the name of the font, select Always Embed List (or Never Embed List), and click Add. Note: A TrueType font can contain a setting added by the font’s designer that prevents the font from being embedded in PDF files. Remove Removes a font from the Always Embed or Never Embed list. The font isn’t removed from your system; the reference to it is removed from the list. Note: Acrobat 8 does not include the Times, Helvetica, and ZapfDingbats fonts that have been included in Acrobat 5.0 and earlier. If you want these fonts to be viewed and printed in PDFs that you create, embed the fonts. Color panel options Whether you’re using color management information in the PostScript file, using Distiller CSFs, or defining custom settings, you set all color management information for Distiller on the Color panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. Settings File Lists color settings, including those used in graphics applications. The None setting lets you edit the Color Management Policies and Working Spaces settings. Color Management Policies Specifies how Distiller converts unmanaged color in a PostScript file when you don’t use a Distiller color settings file. This menu is available when None is selected in the Settings File menu. Note: Color Management Policies values may affect a PDF differently depending on the compatibility setting you choose in the General panel. • Leave Color Unchanged Leaves device-dependent colors unchanged and preserves device-independent colors as the nearest possible equivalent. This is a useful option for print shops that have calibrated their devices, have used that information to specify color in the file, and are only outputting to those devices. • Tag (Or Convert) Everything For Color Management Tags color objects with an ICC profile and calibrates colors, making them device-independent in PDFs compatible with Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) and later. Converts devicedependent color spaces in images (RGB, Grayscale, and CMYK) to device-independent color spaces (CalRGB, CalGray, and Cie L*a*b) in Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) compatible PDFs. • Tag (Or Convert) Only Images For Color Management Tags ICC profiles in images only (not text or vector objects), which prevents black text from undergoing any color shift when distilling Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) compatible PDFs. Converts device-dependent color spaces in images (RGB, Grayscale, and CMYK) to device-independent color spaces (CalRGB, CalGray, and Lab) in Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) compatible PDFs. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 106 User Guide • Convert All Colors To sRGB (or Convert Everything To CalRGB) Calibrates color, making it device-independent. Converts CMYK and RGB images to sRGB in PDFs compatible with Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) or later. Converts CMYK and RGB images to calibrated RGB (CalRGB) in Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) compatible PDFs. Recommended for PDFs that will be used on-screen or with low-resolution printers. • Convert All Colors To CMYK Converts color spaces to DeviceGray or DeviceCMYK according to the options specified in the Working Spaces menu. All Working Spaces must be specified. Document Rendering Intent Choose a method to map colors between color spaces. The result of any particular method depends on the profiles of the color spaces. For example, some profiles produce identical results with different methods. Acrobat shares four rendering intents (Perceptual, Saturation, Relative Colorimetric, and Absolute Colorimetric) with other Creative Suite applications. For descriptions of these rendering intents, see “About rendering intents” on page 438. Acrobat also includes a rendering intent called Preserve, which indicates that the intent is specified in the output device rather than in the PDF. In many output devices, Relative Colorimetric is the default intent. Note: In all cases, intents may be ignored or overridden by color management operations that occur subsequent to the creation of the PDF file. Working Spaces For all Color Management Policies values other than Leave Color Unchanged, choose a working space to specify which ICC profiles are used for defining and calibrating the grayscale, RGB, and CMYK color spaces in distilled PDFs. For more information on working spaces, see “About color working spaces” on page 434. • Gray Choose a profile to define the color space of all grayscale images in files. The default ICC profile for gray images is Adobe Gray - 20% Dot Gain. Choose None to prevent grayscale images from being converted. • RGB Choose a profile to define the color space of all RGB images in files. The default, sRGB IEC61966-2.1, is recognized by many output devices. Choose None to prevent RGB images from being converted. • CMYK Choose a profile to define the color space of all CMYK images in files. The default is U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2. Choose None to prevent CMYK images from being converted. Note: Choosing None for all three working spaces has the same effect as selecting the option Leave Color Unchanged. You can add ICC profiles (such as ones provided by your print service bureau) by placing them in the ICCProfiles folder in the Common folder, the Windows\System\Color folder (Windows), or the System Folder/ColorSync folder (Mac OS). Preserve CMYK Values For Calibrated CMYK Color Spaces When selected, device-independent CMYK values are treated as device-dependent (DeviceCMYK) values, device-independent color spaces are discarded, and PDF/X-1a files use the Convert All Colors To CMYK value. When deselected, device-independent color spaces convert to CMYK, provided that Color Management Policies is set to Convert All Colors To CMYK. Preserve Under Color Removal And Black Generation Retains these settings if they exist in the PostScript file. Black generation calculates the amount of black to use when reproducing a color. Undercolor removal (UCR) reduces cyan, magenta, and yellow to compensate for black generation. Because UCR uses less ink, it’s suitable for uncoated stock. When Transfer Functions Are Found Specifies how to handle transfer functions in PDFs. Transfer functions are used for artistic effect and to correct for the characteristics of a specific output device. • Remove Deletes any applied transfer functions. Applied transfer functions should be removed, unless the PDF is to be output to the same device that the source PostScript file was created for. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 107 User Guide • Preserve Retains the transfer functions traditionally used to compensate for dot gain or dot loss that may occur when an image is transferred to film. Dot gain or loss occurs when the ink dots that make up a printed image are larger or smaller than in the halftone screen. • Apply Applies the transfer function, changing the colors in the file but doesn’t keep it. This method is useful for creating color effects in a file. Preserve Halftone Information Retains any halftone information in files. Halftone information is intended for use with a particular output device. Advanced panel options The Advanced options specify which Document Structuring Conventions (DSC) comments to keep in a PDF and how to set other options that affect the conversion from PostScript. In a PostScript file, DSC comments contain infor­ mation about the file (such as the originating application, the creation date, and the page orientation) and provide structure for page descriptions in the file (such as beginning and ending statements for a prologue section). DSC comments can be useful when your document is going to print or press. When you work with the Advanced options, it is helpful to have an understanding of the PostScript language and how it is translated to PDF. See PostScript Language Reference, Third Edition (Addison-Wesley) and PDF Reference Fifth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.6 on the PDF reference page (English only) on the Adobe website. The same website has more detailed descriptions of the Advanced options and their parameters. Note: The ASCII Format option has been removed from Distiller, but is still available as a Distiller parameter. Allow PostScript File To Override Adobe PDF Settings Uses settings stored in a PostScript file rather than the current PDF settings file. For details, see the documentation available for download on the Acrobat SDK documen­ tation page (English only) of the Adobe website. Allow PostScript XObjects PostScript XObjects store fragments of PostScript code to be used when a PDF is printed on a PostScript printer. Use only in controlled workflows where there is no other option. Available when the Standard or Smallest File Size is selected from the Default Settings menu. Convert Gradients To Smooth Shades Converts blends to smooth shades for Acrobat 4.0 and later, improving quality and reducing file size of PDFs. Distiller converts gradients from Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe FreeHand, CorelDraw, QuarkXPress, and Microsoft PowerPoint. Convert Smooth Lines To Curves Reduces the amount of control points used to build curves in CAD drawings, which results in smaller PDFs and faster on-screen rendering. Preserve Level 2 Copypage Semantics Uses the copypage operator defined in PostScript Level 2 rather than in Language Level 3 PostScript. If you have a PostScript file and select this option, a copypage operator copies the page. If this option is not selected, the equivalent of a showpage operation is executed, except that the graphics state is not reinitialized. Preserve Overprint Settings Retains any overprint settings in files being converted to PDF. Overprint settings create color by printing one ink on top of another ink. Overprinting Default Is Nonzero Overprinting Prevents overprinted objects with zero CMYK values from knocking out CMYK objects beneath them. Save Adobe PDF Settings Inside PDF File Embeds the settings file (.joboptions) used to create the PDF as an attachment. (To view the settings file, choose View > Navigation Panels > Attachments in Acrobat.) Save Original JPEG Image In PDF If Possible Processes compressed JPEG images (images that are already compressed using DCT encoding) without recompressing them. When deselected, performance improves because only decompression, not recompression, occurs. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 108 User Guide Save Portable Job Ticket Inside PDF File Preserves a PostScript job ticket in a PDF. Job tickets describe the PostScript file and can be used later in a workflow or for printing the PDF. Use Prologue.ps and Epilogue.ps Sends a prologue and epilogue file with each job. These files can be used to add custom PostScript code that you want to have executed at the beginning or end of every PostScript job being converted. Sample Prologue.ps and Epilogue.ps files are located in (Windows) /Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data, (Vista) /Users/All Users/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data, or (Mac OS)/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data. In Windows Explorer, the Application Data folder is typically hidden; to make it visible, choose Tools > Folder Options, click the View tab, and select Show Hidden Files And Folders. Or, you can type the path into the Address text box. Note: Distiller processes prologue and epilogue files only if both files are present and located properly. The two files must be used together. If the prologue and epilogue files are at the same level as the In and Out folders of a watched folder, they are used instead of the ones in the Distiller folder. Process DSC Comments Maintains DSC information from a PostScript file. • Log DSC Warnings Displays warning messages about problematic DSC comments during processing and adds them to a log file. • Preserve EPS Information From DSC Retains information for an EPS file, such as the originating application and creation date. • Preserve OPI Comments Retains information needed to replace a For Placement Only (FPO) image or comment with the high-resolution image located on servers that support Open Prepress Interface (OPI) versions 1.3 and 2.0. For more information, see the OPI 2.0 specification (English only) on the Adobe website. • Preserve Document Information From DSC Retains document properties, such as the title, creation date, and time, in the PDF. • Resize Page And Center Artwork For EPS Files Centers an EPS image and resizes the page to fit closely around the image. If deselected, the page is sized and centered based on the upper left corner of the upper left object and lower right corner of the lower right object on the page. This option applies only to jobs that consist of a single EPS file. Standards panel options By using Standards options, you can check document content in the PostScript file to make sure it meets standard PDF/X1-a, PDF/X-3, or PDF/A criteria before creating the PDF. For PDF/X-compliant files, you can also require that the PostScript file meet additional criteria by selecting options in the Standards panel. The availability of options depends on the standard you select. You can also create a PDF/X file from a compliant PDF by using the Preflight feature in Acrobat. PDF/X-compliant Complies with the PDF/X standard for high-resolution print production. Note: PDFMaker, the conversion method used to convert Microsoft Word and other application files to PDF, does not create PDF/X-compliant files. PDF/A-compliant Complies with the PDF/A standard for archival documents. Note: If you set up a watched folder for creating PDF/A-compliant files, be sure that you do not add security to the folder; the PDF/A standard does not allow encryption. Compliance Standard Produces a report that indicates whether the file complies with the standard you select, and if not, what problems were encountered. The .log file appears at the bottom of the dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 109 User Guide Note: PDFs that complied with both PDF/X-1a and PDF/X-3 standards in Acrobat 6.0 will default to PDF/X-1a in Acrobat 8. When Not Compliant Specifies whether to create the PDF if the PostScript file does not comply with the standard’s requirements. • Continue Creates a PDF even if the PostScript file doesn’t meet the PDF/X requirements and notes these problems in the report. • Cancel Job Creates a PDF only if the PostScript file meets the PDF/X requirements of the selected report options, and is otherwise valid. Report As Error Flags the PostScript file as noncompliant if one of the reporting options is selected and a trim box or art box is missing from any page. Set TrimBox To MediaBox With Offsets (Points) Computes values for the trim box based on the offsets for the media box of respective pages if neither the trim box nor art box is specified. The trim box is always as small as or smaller than the enclosing media box. Set BleedBox To MediaBox Uses the media box values for the bleed box if the bleed box is not specified. Set BleedBox To TrimBox With Offsets (Points) Computes values for the bleed box based on the offsets for the trim box of respective pages if the bleed box is not specified. The bleed box is always as large as or larger than the enclosed trim box. This option uses the units specified on the General panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. Output Intent Profile Name Indicates the characterized printing condition for which the document has been prepared, and is required for PDF/X compliance. If a document doesn’t specify an output intent profile name, Distiller uses the selected value from this menu. If your workflow requires that the document specify the output intent, choose None. Output Condition Identifier Indicates the reference name that is specified by the registry of the output intent profile name. For more information, click the question mark next to the option. Output Condition Describes the intended printing condition. This entry can be useful for the intended receiver of the PDF. For more information, click the question mark next to the option. Registry Name (URL) Indicates the web address for finding more information about the output intent profile. The URL is automatically entered for ICC registry names. The registry name is optional, but recommended. For more information, click the question mark next to the option. Trapped Indicates the state of trapping in the document. PDF/X compliance requires a value of True or False. If the document does not specify the trapped state, the value provided here is used. If your workflow requires that the document specify the trapped state, choose Leave Undefined. PDF compatibility levels When you create PDFs, you need to decide which PDF version to use. You can change the PDF version by switching to a different preset or choosing a compatibility option when you save as PDF or edit a PDF preset. Generally speaking, unless there’s a specific need for backward compatibility, you should use the most recent version (in this case, version 1.7). The latest version will include all the newest features and functionality. However, if you’re creating documents that will be distributed widely, consider choosing Acrobat 5 (PDF 1.4) or Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) to ensure that all users can view and print the document. The following table compares some of the functionality in PDFs created using the different compatibility settings. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 110 User Guide Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6) and Acrobat 8 (PDF 1.7) PDFs can be opened with Acrobat 3.0 and Acrobat PDFs can be opened with Acrobat 3.0 and Acrobat Most PDFs can be opened with Acrobat 4.0 and Most PDFs can be opened with Acrobat 4.0 and Reader 3.0 and later. Reader 3.0 and later. Acrobat Reader 4.0 and Acrobat Reader 4.0 and However, features specific to later versions may be lost or not viewable. later. However, features specific to later versions may be lost or not view­ able. later. However, features specific to later versions may be lost or not view­ able. Cannot contain artwork Supports the use of live Supports the use of live Supports the use of live that uses live transparency transparency in artwork. transparency in artwork. transparency in artwork. effects. Any transparency (The Acrobat Distiller (The Acrobat Distiller (The Acrobat Distiller must be flattened prior to feature flattens transpar­ feature flattens transpar­ feature flattens transpar­ converting to PDF 1.3. ency.) ency.) ency.) Layers are not supported. Layers are not supported. Preserves layers when creating PDFs from applica­ tions that support the generation of layered PDF documents, such as Preserves layers when creating PDFs from applica­ tions that support the generation of layered PDF documents, such as Illustrator CS and later or Illustrator CS and later or InDesign CS and later. InDesign CS and later. DeviceN color space with 8 DeviceN color space with 8 DeviceN color space with DeviceN color space with colorants is supported. colorants is supported. up to 31 colorants is up to 31 colorants is supported. supported. Multibyte fonts can be Multibyte fonts can be Multibyte fonts can be Multibyte fonts can be embedded. (Distiller embedded. embedded. embedded. converts the fonts when embedding.) 40-bit RC4 security 128-bit RC4 security 128-bit RC4 security 128-bit RC4 and 128-bit supported. supported. supported. AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) security supported. Share custom PDF settings You can save and reuse your own Adobe PDF preset definitions. You can also share a custom preset by sending a copy of the resulting file to other users, who can then add it to the Distiller applications installed on their own computers. Note: PDF settings files have the extension .joboptions. Custom preset files are stored in (Windows) Documents and Settings/[username]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings or (Mac OS) User/[username]/Library/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings. ? To add a custom PDF settings file to the menu, do one of the following: • Drag the .joboptions file onto the Distiller window. • In Acrobat Distiller, choose Settings > Add Adobe PDF Settings, browse to the copied .joboptions file, select it, and click Open. The settings file appears as the selected option in the Default Settings menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 111 User Guide Compressing and downsampling images When converting PostScript files to PDF, you can compress vector objects (such as text and line art) and compress and downsample images. Line art is described with a mathematical equation and is usually created with a drawing program such as Adobe Illustrator. Images—whether color, monochrome, or grayscale—are described as pixels and are created with applications like Adobe Photoshop or by scanning. Monochrome images include most black-and­ white illustrations made by paint programs and any images scanned with an image depth of 1 bit. When you downsample (or decrease the number of pixels), information is deleted from the image. With Distiller, you specify an interpolation method—average downsampling, bicubic downsampling, or subsampling—to determine how pixels are deleted. Depending on the settings you choose, compression and downsampling can signif­ icantly reduce the size of a PDF with little or no loss of detail and precision. When Distiller processes a file, it normally applies the compression settings to images throughout the file. However, you can assign different compression and downsampling methods to individual images. Varying the compression and downsampling methods within a PDF Before you create a PDF, you can take various approaches to applying different compression and downsampling options to the individual images that will go into that PDF: • Use Adobe Photoshop to resample and compress existing image files before using Distiller. When you are ready to create the PDF in Distiller, be careful to deselect the compression and downsampling or subsampling options. • Create separate PostScript files for each part of the document that you want to process differently, and use different compression options to distill each part. Then use Distiller to merge the files into a single PDF. • When you create color, grayscale, and monochrome images in an art application (such as Adobe Photoshop), select the compression and downsampling settings that you want when you save each image from within that application. • Insert Distiller parameters before images in a PostScript file. You can use this technique to process every image in a document differently. This technique is the most difficult, because it requires knowledge of PostScript programming. For more information on using parameters, see the documentation available for download on the Acrobat SDK documentation page (English only) of the Adobe website. Note: To apply the inserted Distiller parameters, select Allow PostScript File To Override Adobe PDF Settings on the Advanced panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box in Distiller. This option overrides settings you selected in the Adobe PDF dialog box. Compression methods Distiller applies ZIP compression to text and line art, ZIP or JPEG compression to color and grayscale images, and ZIP, CCITT Group 3 or 4, or Run Length compression to monochrome images. 112 C A B Sales Plan Kahili Mountain Coffee D ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 User Guide Suitable compression methods for different art types A. ZIP B. JPEG C. CCITT D. Run Length You can choose from the following compression methods: ZIP Works well on images with large areas of single colors or repeating patterns, and for black-and-white images that contain repeating patterns. Acrobat supports only 8-bit ZIP compression, which is lossless; that is, data is not removed to reduce file size, so image quality is not affected. Note: Adobe implementation of the ZIP filter is derived from the zlib package of Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler, whose generous assistance we gratefully acknowledge. JPEG Suitable for grayscale or color images, such as continuous-tone photographs. JPEG is lossy, which means that it removes image data and may reduce image quality; however, it attempts to reduce file size with the minimum loss of information. Because JPEG compression eliminates data, it can achieve much smaller file sizes than ZIP compression. CCITT Available only for monochrome bitmap images. CCITT (Consultative Committee on International Teleg­ raphy and Telephony) compression is appropriate for black-and-white images and any images scanned with an image depth of 1 bit. Group 4 is a general-purpose method that produces good compression for most monochrome images. Group 3, used by most fax machines, compresses monochrome images one row at a time. Run Length Produces the best results for images that contain large areas of solid white or black. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 113 User Guide Fonts Font embedding and substitution A font can be embedded only if it contains a setting by the font vendor that permits it to be embedded. Embedding prevents font substitution when readers view or print the file, and ensures that readers see the text in its original font. Embedding increases file size only slightly, unless the document uses CID fonts, a font format commonly used for Asian languages. You can embed or substitute fonts in Acrobat or when you export an InDesign document to PDF. You can embed the entire font, or just a subset of the characters used in the file. Subsetting ensures that your fonts and font metrics are used at print time by creating a custom font name. That way, for example, your version of Adobe Garamond®, not your service provider’s version, can always be used by the service provider for viewing and printing. Type 1 and TrueType fonts can be embedded if they are included in the PostScript file, or are available in one of the font locations that Distiller monitors and are not restricted from embedding. Note: (Acrobat) In some cases, TrueType fonts that have gone through a PostScript driver can no longer be searched, copied, cut, or pasted. To minimize this problem, use Acrobat on the same system on which the PostScript file was created, and make sure that the TrueType fonts used in the file are available on the system. When a font cannot be embedded due to the font vendor’s settings, and someone who opens or prints a PDF does not have access to the original font, a Multiple Master typeface is temporarily substituted: AdobeSerifMM for a missing serif font, and AdobeSansMM for a missing sans serif font. The Multiple Master typeface can stretch or condense to fit, to ensure that line and page breaks in the original document are maintained. The substitution cannot always match the shape of the original characters, however, especially if the characters are unconventional ones, such as script typefaces. Note: (Acrobat) For Asian text, Acrobat uses fonts from the installed Asian language kit or from similar fonts on the user’s system. Fonts from some languages or with unknown encodings cannot be substituted; in these cases, the text appears as bullets in the file. If characters are unconventional (left), the substitution font will not match (right). Accessing and embedding fonts using Distiller When converting a PostScript file to PDF, Distiller needs access to the file’s fonts to insert the appropriate infor­ mation in the PDF. Distiller first searches the PostScript file for Type 1, TrueType, and OpenType fonts. If the font isn’t embedded in the PostScript file, Distiller searches additional font folders. Distiller searches the following font folders in Windows: • /Resource/Font in the Acrobat folder • /Windows/Fonts Distiller searches the following font folders in Mac OS: • /Resource/Font in the Acrobat folder • /Users/[user name]/Library/Fonts ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 114 User Guide • /Library/Fonts • /System/Library/Fonts The Acrobat installation includes width-only versions of many common Chinese, Japanese, and Korean fonts, therefore Distiller can then access these fonts in Acrobat. Make sure that the fonts are available on your computer. (In Windows, choose Complete when you install Acrobat, or choose Custom and select the Asian Language Support option. In Mac OS, these fonts are installed automatically.) For information on including fonts in a PostScript file, see the documentation that came with the application and printer driver you use to create PostScript files. Note: Distiller does not support Type 32 fonts. Preview PDFs without local fonts You can create a printable preview of your document that substitutes default fonts for any text formatted in fonts that are available on your local machine but are not embedded in the PDF. This can help you decide whether or not to embed those local fonts in the PDF, to achieve the look you want for your document. 1 In Acrobat, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat 8 > Preferences (Mac OS. 2 Under Categories, select Page Display, and then deselect Use Local Fonts. Note: If a font cannot be substituted, the text appears as bullets, and Acrobat displays an error message. Add more folders to Distiller font searches In addition to the default font folders, Distiller can also search other font folders that you specify. 1 Start Acrobat Distiller by doing one of the following: • In Acrobat, choose Advanced > Print Production > Acrobat Distiller. • Click or double-click an Acrobat Distiller icon or shortcut on the desktop, Start menu (Windows), or Dock (Mac OS). 2 Choose Settings > Font Locations. The dialog box displays a list of the folders that Distiller searches for fonts. These folders can be on your hard drive or on a network. Distiller indicates that a font folder is available by displaying a folder icon to the left of the folder name. If no icon appears, or if an icon with an x through it appears with a folder name, the connection to the folder has probably been lost. You’ll need to reestablish the connection. 3 To add a font folder, click Add, select the folder to add, and click OK (Windows) or Select Folder (Mac OS). Note: To provide Distiller with access to a font folder that has been moved, use this dialog box to remove the folder listed in its old location and add it in its new location. 4 To remove a font folder, select the folder, and click Remove. 5 Select Ignore TrueType Versions Of Standard PostScript Fonts to exclude TrueType fonts that have the same name as a font in the PostScript 3 font collection. 6 Click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 115 User Guide Find PostScript font names If you need to enter a font name manually on the Fonts panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box, you can use a PDF to find the exact spelling of the name. 1 Use any application to create a one-page document with the font. 2 Create a PDF from the document. 3 Open the PDF in Acrobat, and choose File > Properties > Fonts. 4 Write down the name of the font, using the exact spelling, capitalization, and hyphenation of the name as it appears in the Font Info dialog box. 116 Chapter 4: Combining PDF content Creating complex Adobe PDFs that include different types of files—files created in a variety of formats, even if they have different page sizes and page orientations—is actually quite easy in Acrobat 8. It’s also easier than you might imagine to make changes in a complex PDF so that it contains just the information you want to include, and does so in an orderly, unified, and efficient document that serves your needs. Quickstart The following topics provide brief overviews of common tasks for combining PDFs and adding unifying elements. Create a PDF from multiple files You can easily merge files of different types into a single PDF. 1 Click Combine Files , and then click Add Files. 2 Select the files you want to combine, and click Add Files. 3 Adjust the order of files as desired, and then choose a file size and conversion setting. 4 Click Next, select Merge Files Into A Single PDF, and click Create. Rather than merging files, you can also create a PDF package of files. See also “Create merged PDFs and PDF packages” on page 121 Assemble PDFs in a package A PDF package lets you assemble related information into a single PDF while maintaining individual PDFs within it. 1 Click Combine Files , and then click Add Files. 2 Select the files you want to combine, and click Add Files. 3 Adjust the order of files as desired, and then choose a file size and conversion setting. 4 Click Next, select Assemble Files Into A PDF Package, and click Create. See also “Create merged PDFs and PDF packages” on page 121 Modify a list of files to combine When combining files, you have several options for adjusting the set of files. 1 Click Combine Files , click Add Files, and add the desired files. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 117 User Guide 2 To modify the list of files or remove a file from the list, select a file, and then do any of the following: • Click Move Up or Move Down or drag the file to a new location. • Click Choose Pages to include a subset of pages. (Button name might change based on file type.) • Click Remove or press Delete. See also “Create merged PDFs and PDF packages” on page 121 Add headers and footers You can add a single header and footer throughout a PDF or apply different headers and footers selectively to various pages. 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Add. If a message appears, click Add New. 2 Specify font and margin settings. 3 In the header and footer text boxes, type the desired text. Click the buttons below the boxes to insert a page number or date. You can save header and footer settings for easy reuse. See also “Add and edit headers and footers” on page 125 Add a watermark A watermark is text or an image that appears either behind or on top of content in a PDF. 1 Choose Document > Watermark > Add. 2 Do one of the following: • Type the desired text and set the font attributes. • Click File and browse to select the desired file. 3 Specify rotation, opacity, scale, location, and position. You can save watermark settings for reuse. For example, save a “Draft” watermark to add to all review PDFs. See also “Add and edit watermarks” on page 131 Add a background A background is an image or color that’s placed behind content in a PDF. 1 Choose Document > Background > Add/Replace. 2 Do one of the following: • Click From Color, click the color swatch, and choose a background color. • Click File and browse to select the desired image file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 118 User Guide 3 Set the rotation, opacity, scale, and position. You can save background settings for reuse. For example, save an organizational emblem to add to official correspon­ dence. See also “Add and edit backgrounds” on page 129 Rotate pages You can rotate all or selected pages in a PDF. 1 Choose Document > Rotate Pages. 2 Specify the direction of the rotation and the page range. 3 Choose the desired options from the Rotate menus. To temporarily rotate a page, choose View > Rotate View > Clockwise or Counterclockwise. See also “Rotate a page” on page 135 Delete pages After combining files, you can delete unwanted or blank pages. 1 (Optional) Click the Pages button in the navigation pane and select the pages you want to delete. 2 Choose Document > Delete Pages. 3 Click Selected to delete selected pages or click From and specify a range. If you want to retain a copy of the original PDF, make sure that you save the new document using Save As rather than Save. See also “Delete or replace a page” on page 136 Replace pages To quickly update a PDF, you can replace individual pages. 1 Choose Document > Replace Pages. 2 Select the document that contains the replacement pages, and click Select. 3 Under Original, specify the pages you want to replace. Under Replacement, specify the beginning replacement page. Interactive elements, such as links and bookmarks, associated with the original pages aren’t deleted. See also “Delete or replace a page” on page 136 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 119 User Guide Renumber pages When you renumber pages, only the numbers that appear in the Pages panel and the toolbar are affected. To change the numbers that appear on the document pages, add a header or footer. 1 Click the Pages button , and choose Number Pages from the Options menu. 2 Specify which pages the numbering will be applied to. 3 Specify the numbering style, prefix (if any), and starting number. You can also continue the numbering style of the previous section. See also “Renumber pages” on page 138 Combining files into PDFs Combining different types of files You already know that you can convert many types of files into Adobe PDFs. But you can also group files as you convert them, so that the end result keeps those files together. For example, you could combine all the documents for a specific project—such as the text documents, email messages, spreadsheets, CAD drawings, PowerPoint presentations, and so forth—into a PDF or PDF package. When you use the Combine Files wizard, you can even limit the conversion to specific pages (or spreadsheets, or slides) within individual source documents. There are three types of PDFs that involve multiple files: Merged PDFs You can convert multiple files of various types to produce a merged PDF: one in which converted documents flow into the PDF as sequential pages. PDF packages You can use the Combine Files wizard to convert multiple files of various types into a PDF package: a set PDF components in which each file appears separately and has its own pagination. Component files also retain their individual security settings, forms features, and default views, and digital signatures stay intact. On Windows, you can archive Outlook or Lotus Notes email messages and message folders as PDF packages, using PDFMaker within the email application. PDFs embedded in other files You can insert PDFs into files in other formats that support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), such as Adobe InDesign or Word documents. See also “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78 About PDF packages A PDF package converts multiple files—which can be in different formats and created in different applications—and assembles them into an integrated PDF unit. The original files retain their individual identities, but are still part of the one PDF package file. Each component file can be opened, read, edited, and formatted independently of the other component files in the PDF package. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 120 User Guide You can create PDF packages when you use the Combine Files wizard, starting either from the Getting Started window, the Tasks toolbar, or the File > Combine Files command. In Windows, the Acrobat PDFMaker in Outlook and Lotus Notes can create PDF packages when you convert email messages to PDF or migrate PDF email archives created in earlier versions of Acrobat. Depending on the circumstances, PDF packages offer several advantages over merging multiple files into an ordinary PDF: Adding and deleting You can add or remove component documents easily, without having to find and select all the pages that originated in that file. Viewing The component files do not open in separate windows, so you can quickly flip through them and make changes without having to pause for the Open or Save dialog boxes. Editing You can make changes to individual PDFs within the PDF package without affecting the other component PDFs. For example, you can change the page numbering within that PDF, digitally sign, select different security settings, and so forth, without those changes applying to the other component documents. You can also rename components. Distribution Because the PDF package is one file, you can share it with others and be sure that they are getting all the component parts. Sorting The component PDFs in a PDF packages are listed under an assortment of categories that you can add to, delete, hide, and customize. Then, you simply click the category name to sort the list. Printing The Print command on the File menu includes commands for printing the currently open document, all the documents in the PDF package, or multiple component documents selected in the PDF package list. Searching The Advanced Search window includes options for searching the currently open document, all the documents in the PDF package, or multiple component documents selected in the PDF package list. Incorporating other formats You can add non-PDF files to an existing PDF package without converting them to PDF. This can be done by a simple drag-and-drop process from the desktop, Microsoft Explorer, or the Mac OS Finder to the list of components in the open PDF package. Of course, non-PDF files do not enjoy all of the benefits of PDFs in the package. Independence from source files The source files of a PDF packages—even existing PDFs you add to the package— are not changed when you create a PDF. Changes you make to the PDFs within the PDF package do not change the original files from which you created the PDF. You can move a PDF package anywhere on your computer or network without any risk of losing or disconnecting its components. Reuse You can include or convert the same original source file into multiple PDF packages. There are two limitations to PDF packages. They cannot be reviewed using one of the formal wizards or sent out in a data-collection workflow. Note: PDF packages are completely different from Collections that you create in the Acrobat Organizer. Organizer Collections are simply tools that help you find related PDFs, regardless of where they are stored in the folder structure on your computer. PDF packages are actual PDF files, each of which is stored in a single location on your computer. Also, PDFs attached to other PDFs do not offer the same benefits as PDF packages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 121 User Guide See also “View, sort, and search components in a PDF package” on page 27 “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78 “Print documents in a PDF package” on page 446 Create merged PDFs and PDF packages The choices you make in the Combine Files wizard determine whether the files are merged into a single PDF or combined into a PDF package. 1 Choose File > Combine Files, or click Combine Files on the Tasks toolbar. If a PDF is currently open, it appears on the list of included files. 2 In the Combine Files wizard, do any or all of the following: • To add individual files, click Add Files , navigate as needed, select the files, and click Add Files. Repeat as needed to add files in other locations. • To select all the files in a specific location, click Add Folders , navigate to the needed folder, select it, and click OK. Repeat as needed. • To select files that you have combined into PDFs in other sessions, click Reuse Files . Select a previously created PDF on the left list, and then, in the right list, select the component documents that you want to include. (If you have not used the Combine Files wizard before, this button is not available.) • To add other currently open PDFs, click Add Open Files, and select those PDFs. • (Windows) To add files or folders from Windows Explorer, drag them into the Combine Files wizard or right-click the selected items and choose Combine Supported Files In Acrobat. If any files are password-protected, one or more messages appear, in which you must enter the correct password. You can add a file more than once. For example, one file could be used for transition pages between other files or a blank file could be used to add blank pages. 3 Using the list of files, do any of the following: • To rearrange the order of files on the list, select a file and drag it up or down the list. Or, select a file and click Move Up or Move Down. • To remove a file from the list, select the filename and click Remove. • To convert only part of a multipage source file, double-click the file, or select the file and click the Choose Pages button (see Note). In the Preview, review and select pages, as needed, following the instructions in the dialog box, which vary according to file type, and click OK. (Do not attempt to edit the document itself in the Preview.) Note: The name of the Choose button varies according to file type. For PDFs and Word documents, it is labeled Choose Pages. For PowerPoint files, it is Choose Slides; for Excel files, Choose Sheets; for AutoCAD, Choose Layouts; for Visio files, Sheet Selection. 4 Select an appropriate file size and conversion options (as described in the following topic). 5 Click Next, and then do one of the following: • To combine the files as sequential pages of a PDF, select Merge Files Into A Single PDF. • To combine the files into a PDF package, select Assemble Files Into A PDF Package. Then select a cover-sheet option: Use Adobe Template or Use First Document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 122 User Guide Note: If any of the selected files involve digital signatures, security settings, or XML forms, warnings will appear if you select Merge Files Into A Single PDF. In this case, combining the files into a PDF package is recommended. Also, a warning may appear if the first file listed is itself a PDF package because its cover sheet will be modified. 6 Use the Move Up, Move Down, and Remove buttons to make any final adjustments to the file sequence, if necessary, and then click Create. A status dialog box shows the progress of the file conversions. Some source applications may start and close automat­ ically. 7 When the conversion is complete, review the preview thumbnails. If you want to make changes, click the Back button in the wizard, make the changes, and proceed forward again. 8 Click Save, and select a name and location for the merged PDF or PDF package. The default name of a new package is Package [n]. See also “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)” on page 78 “Adobe PDF conversion settings” on page 99 Conversion settings Conversion settings affect all files that will be converted to PDF from other file formats. The three options available in the Combine Files wizard apply three different conversion presets. You can customize the default conversion preferences (choose Edit > Preferences, select Convert To PDF under Categories, and then specify the settings you want to use). Smaller File Size Reduces large images to screen resolution and compresses, using low-quality JPEG. Suitable for onscreen display, email, and the Internet. Note: If any of the source files are already PDFs, the Smaller File Size option applies the Reduce File Size feature to those files. This is not done if either the Default File Size or Larger File Size option is selected. Default File Size Creates PDFs suitable for reliable viewing and printing of business documents. Larger File Size Applies the High Quality Print conversion preset. Options button Opens the Options For Conversion Settings dialog box, which contains the following options: • Always Enable Accessibility And Reflow Improves the readability for users with disabilities and on small-screen devices. • Always Add Bookmarks To Adobe PDF Converts existing bookmarks in different native file formats to Adobe PDF bookmarks. Note: An individual PDF created by merging multiple files into a single PDF has structured bookmarks that you can use to print or delete individual documents from the PDF. You can also use the bookmarks to extract the original component files as independent PDFs. Add custom cover sheets to PDF packages Each PDF package includes a cover sheet, which appears each time you open the file. Typically, the cover sheet provides instructions or information that is helpful to users reading the package. The default cover sheet is the Adobe template, which briefly discusses viewing PDF packages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 123 User Guide The cover sheet does not appear in the list of component PDFs. However, you can go back to the cover sheet by clicking the Cover Sheet button in the PDF package navigation bar. 1 Using the authoring application of your choice, create the cover sheet. 2 In Acrobat, choose File > Combine Files, and proceed as usual to select files, folders, and pages, and to choose a conversion option, and click Next. Be sure to include your custom cover sheet as one of the files, and then click Next. 3 Select Assemble Files Into A PDF Package. 4 Select the custom cover sheet source file, and drag it or click the Move Up button until it appears at the top of the list. 5 Under Select Cover Sheet, choose Use First Document, and then click Create. 6 When the conversion is complete, click Save and specify and location and name for the PDF package file. Extract component files in a PDF package 1 In the list of component files, select the files that you want to extract. 2 Do one of the following: • Adjust the Acrobat window so that it does not completely fill the screen, and then drag the file onto the desktop, Windows Explorer, or the Finder. • On the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Save File As, and select a location and name for the extracted file. • Right-click/Control-click and choose Options > Save File As, and select a location and name for the extracted file. See also “View, sort, and search components in a PDF package” on page 27 Edit a PDF package Editing a PDF package involves changes at the package level. For example, you can add or remove component files or set up new categories to facilitate sorting the components. Editing the component PDFs within a package involves the same techniques used to make changes to any PDF, which are presented elsewhere in Help. See also “Editing text and objects” on page 347 “Adding unifying page elements” on page 125 Add unconverted files to a PDF package 1 On the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Add File, and select a location and name for the extracted file. Or, right-click/Control-click and choose Add File. 2 Open the PDF package, and adjust the Acrobat window so that it does not completely fill the screen. 3 On the desktop or in Windows Explorer or the Finder, select the file or files you want to add to the PDF package, and drag them into the list of component files in the Acrobat work area. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 124 User Guide Add PDFs to a PDF package ? Do any of the following: • In Windows Explorer or the Finder, select the PDFs you want to add to the currently open PDF package and drag them into the list of component files. • In the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Add File or right-click/Control-click and choose Add File. Then locate and select the files you want to add. Remove component files from a PDF package ? In the list of component files for the open PDF package, select the files that you want to remove and press Delete, or choose Options > Delete File. Customize categories for the PDF list 1 Do one of the following: • On the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Package Properties • Right-click/Control-click the categories pane in the PDF package navigation pane, and choose Package Properties. 2 Click Add, and type a name for the new category in the Add Field dialog box. 3 Make any other changes you want in the Package Properties dialog box: • To change the order in which the categories appear, select individual categories and click Up or Down until you have them in the order you want. • To hide a category, deselect its check box, or select the category and click Hide. • To show a category, select its check box, or select the category and click Show. • To remove a category, select the category and click Delete. • To change the default category for sorting the PDFs, choose another category name in the Sort By menu. • To set the sorting order, select Ascending or Descending. • To specify the default locations of the PDF list, select Top, Left, or Minimized in the Initial View menu. • To open the currently displayed PDF each time you reopen the PDF package, select Show Current Document When Opening Collection. Note: Changes made to the Package Properties affect the entire PDF package and can be viewed by other users who open the PDF package. Edit category entries for the currently open component PDF 1 In the list of component files, select the file that you want to edit. 2 Do one of the following: • On the PDF package navigation bar, choose Options > Edit Value > [category name]. • Right-click/Control-click the categories bar or the selected component file, and choose Edit Value > [category name]. 3 In the Edit [category name] dialog box, type the text to appear under this category for the currently selected component file. Insert one PDF into another 1 Open the PDF that you want to serve as the basis of the combined file, and choose Document > Insert Pages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 125 User Guide 2 Select a PDF that you want to insert into the target document, and click Select. 3 In the Insert Pages dialog box, specify where you want to insert the document (before or after the first, last, or a designated page of the open PDF), and click OK. 4 To leave the original PDF intact as a separate file, choose Save As, and type a new name for the merged PDF. You can also add an existing PDF with a currently open PDF by dragging the desktop icon for the PDF you want to add directly into position in the Pages panel of the open PDF. Placing PDFs as linked files in other documents You can incorporate PDFs into other types of files that support Object Linking and Embedding (OLE), such as InDesign or Word files. These files are called OLE container documents. Later, if you make changes to the original PDF, the OLE features in the container application can update the embedded file in the container document, reflecting your changes to the original PDF. ? Do one of the following: • Choose the OLE container application’s Insert Object command or Insert Hyperlink command. • In Acrobat, choose Edit > Copy File To Clipboard, and then choose the Paste Special command in the container application. Adding unifying page elements Add and edit headers and footers A header and footer present consistent information in the page margins throughout a PDF. For example, the infor­ mation could be a date, automatic page numbering, the title of the overall document, or author’s name. You can vary the headers and footers within a PDF. For example, you can add a header that displays the page number on the right side of odd-numbered pages, and another header that displays the page number on the left side of evennumbered pages. Each of these headers must be added individually. You can define and save your headers and footers to reuse them later, or you can simply apply a header and footer and forget it. After applying a header and footer, you can edit, replace, or delete it in the PDF. You can also preview headers and footers before applying them and adjust the header and footer margins so that they don’t overlap other page content. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 126 User Guide Kahili Mountain Coffee Company 7/31/06 CONFIDENTIAL 4 A header appears at the top of the page. A footer appears at the bottom of a page. Define and apply headers and footers You can add one or more sets of headers and footers to a PDF and apply them either globally or selectively to its pages. Each set of headers and footers must be applied in a separate session in the Add Header And Footer dialog box. Headers and footers can include automatically generated information and formatting, such as page numbering and the current date. If you use the same types of headers and footers frequently, you can save header and footer definitions so that you can quickly apply them to other PDFs. 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Add. If a message appears, click Add New. 2 Select your preferences for the font, type size, text color, and text underlining of the header and footer. Note: The text properties apply to all header and footer entries that are part of this setting definition. You cannot apply different settings to individual header or footer text boxes within the same session in the Add Header And Footer dialog box. 3 Using the three header text boxes and three footer text boxes, type the text that you want to appear in any of these locations, and then do any of the following: • To add the date of creation, click inside one of the header or footer text boxes, and click the Insert Date button. • To add automatic page numbering, click inside one of the header or footer text boxes, and click the Insert Page Number button. • To select formatting for automatic entries, click the Page Number And Date Format button, and choose the Date Format, Page Number Format, and Start Page Numbers At settings that you want to use. Note: You can combine text with dates and page numbers. You can also add several lines of text to an entry. Text typed in the Left, Center, and Right boxes appears left-aligned, centered, and right-aligned, respectively. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 127 User Guide Limiting header and footer to a range of pages 4 If you want to limit the pages on which the header and footer appear, click the Page Range Options button, and do the following: • To limit the header and footer to a specific range of pages, select Pages From, and enter the beginning and ending page numbers. • To limit the header and footer to one side or the other of a document with facing pages, choose an option on the Subset menu: Even Pages Only or Odd Pages Only. Otherwise, leave the default setting: All Pages In Range. 5 As needed, change the values in the Top, Bottom, Left, and Right options to adjust the margins within the header and footer, using the Preview area to evaluate the results. To prevent any overlapping, you can click the Appearance Options button and select Shrink Document To Avoid Overwriting The Document’s Text And Graphics. To prevent resizing or repositioning when printing the PDF in large format, select Keep Position And Size Of Header/Footer Text Constant When Printing On Different Page Sizes. 6 Examine the results in the Preview area, using the Preview Page option to see different pages of the PDF. 7 (Optional) At the top of the dialog box, click Save Settings, type a descriptive name for the header and footer settings, and click OK. Then click OK again to apply the header and footer to the PDF. If you want to add additional headers or footers, simply repeat this procedure. Update the headers and footers Updating applies to the most recently added header and footer set. 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Update. 2 Make the changes you want. Add another header and footer 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Add, and then click Add New in the message that appears. The preview shows any existing headers and footers. 2 Type text in the header and footer text boxes to add more headers and footers, noticing that the preview updates the appearance of the complete headers and footers on the page. 3 Select new formatting options, as preferred, again noticing the updating in the preview. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 128 User Guide Replace all headers and footers 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Add, and then click Replace Existing in the message that appears. 2 Type text in the header and footer text boxes. 3 Select formatting options, as needed. Note: This process applies only to headers and footers added in either Acrobat 7 or Acrobat 8. Remove all headers and footers ? Do one of the following: • To remove all headers and footers, choose Document > Header & Footer > Remove, and then click Yes in the confirmation message that appears. • To remove one header and footer immediately after adding it, choose Edit > Undo Headers/Footers. Note: This process applies only to headers and footers added in either Acrobat 7 or Acrobat 8. Add a Bates numbering header or footer Bates numbering is a method of indexing legal documents for easy identification and retrieval. Each page of each document is assigned a unique Bates number that also indicates its relationship to other Bates-numbered documents. Bates numbers appear as headers or footers on the pages of each PDF in the batch. Although the Bates identifier is referred to as a number, it can include an alphanumeric prefix and suffix, which can make it easier to recognize the central subject matter of the files. Adding Bates numbering does not change the filenames of the PDFs, rearrange them in desktop folders, link them, or add them to a collection in the Organizer. You can tell that Bates numbering has been added only by opening the PDF and looking at the headers and footers. Note: Bates numbering is unavailable for protected or encrypted files and some forms, and it applies only to the cover sheets of existing PDF packages. However, Bates numbering can be applied to individual PDFs that are then assembled into a PDF package. Add Bates numbering 1 In Acrobat, choose Advanced > Document Processing > Bates Numbering > Add. 2 In the Bates Number dialog box, do any of the following: • To include any open PDFs, select Include All Open PDF Documents. • To add other PDFs, click Browse, navigate to a folder, and select the files you want to apply Bates numbers to. Repeat as needed until all the PDFs you want to include are listed. 3 Adjust the list of PDFs, as needed: • To change the order in which Bates numbers will be assigned, select a PDF in the list and drag it to a different position or click Move Up or Move Down as needed. • To verify a PDF on the list, select it and click Preview, which opens a window in which you can see each individual page of the PDF. • To remove a PDF from the list, select it and click Remove. 4 Click Next. Then, in the Add Header And Footer dialog box, click to place the insertion point in the header or footer text box in which you want the Bates number to appear (such as Left Header Text or Center Footer Text). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 129 User Guide 5 Click Insert Bates Number. Then enter the text that you want to make up the Bates numbers: • In Number Of Digits, specify how many digits make up the Bates number, entering any number between 6 and 15. The default number is 6, which produces Bates numbers such as 000001, 000002, and so forth. • In Start Number, enter the number that will be assigned to the first PDF on the list. The default number is 1. • In Prefix, type any text that you want to appear before the Bates number. • In Suffix, type any text that you want to appear after the Bates number. Note: For court cases involving very large numbers of pages, enter a higher value in Number Of Digits. Do not use the # character in the Prefix or Suffix text. 6 Click OK and then make any other changes to the settings, as you would for any other header and footer. Add more documents to a Bates numbering series Before you begin, be sure that you know the last applied Bates number in the series. 1 Follow the procedure described above to start the Bates numbering process, selecting the files that you want to add to the series. 2 After you click Insert Bates Number, type the Suffix and Prefix text that matches the rest of the series, and then type the next number in the series in Start Number. 3 When you finish changing settings in the Add Header And Footer dialog box, click OK. Search for Bates-numbered PDFs 1 Choose Edit > Search. 2 As the search word or phrase, type in all or part of the Bates numbering that you want to find. For example, if you want to find a specific document and know its Bates number, type in the complete number as the search text. If you want to find any documents in a Bates number series, type in a distinctive portion of the Bates series, such as the prefix or suffix. 3 Under Look For Files In, click Browse (if necessary) and select the folder, computer drive, or network location that you want to search, and then click Search. Remove Bates numbering You can remove Bates numbering, but this also removes all the headers and footers in the PDFs. 1 In Acrobat, choose Advanced > Document Processing > Bates Numbering > Remove. 2 In the Bates Number dialog box, click Browse, navigate to a folder, and select PDFs. Repeat as needed until all the PDFs you want are listed, and then click Next. 3 Click OK to remove the Bates numbering and all other headers and footers, or click Cancel and start over if you want to start over and choose different files. Add and edit backgrounds A background appears behind text or images on the page. The background can be as simple as a solid color or you can use an image. You can selectively apply a background to only specific pages or page ranges in a PDF. A PDF supports only one background per page, but the backgrounds can vary from page to page. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 130 User Guide Before and after adding a background Add, replace, or edit a background 1 Choose Document > Background > Add/Replace. Note: If a message appears, telling you that the current document already has a background, click Replace Background. If you apply the new background to a limited range of pages, the old background will remain unchanged on pages outside of that range. 2 (Optional) To apply the background selectively to individual pages, click Page Range Options, select Pages From, and enter beginning and ending page numbers; then choose a Subset option for applying the background only to odd pages, even pages, or both. 3 For Source, specify what you want to serve as the background: • To reuse a background and background options that you saved in an earlier session, select it in the Saved Settings menu. • To apply a solid color background, select From Color. Then click the color swatch to open the color picker, and select a color swatch or custom color. • To use an image, select File. Then click Browse, locate the image file you want to use, and select it. Note: Only PDF, JPEG, and BMP files can be used as background images. 4 Adjust the appearance and position of the background, as needed: • To select a specific image in a multipage file, enter it in Page Number. • To show an image file at a specific percentage of its full-size display, enter a value in Absolute Scale. • To rotate a background image or colored area, enter a value in Rotation. • To give the background image or color some transparency, drag the Opacity slider to the left or enter a percentage value. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 131 User Guide • To resize a background image as a percentage of the PDF page size, select Scale Relative To Target Page. • To show or hide the background when printing or viewing on screen, click Appearance Options and select the items you want to apply. • To shift the position of the background image or colored area, enter values for the Vertical Distance from the Top, Center, or Bottom of the page and the Horizontal Distance from the Left, Center, or Right of the page. 5 If a message appears after you click OK, telling you that backgrounds have already been defined for some pages in the page range, click OK. Update a recently edited background image If the original image file that you are using as a background changes, you can update the PDF to show the new version of the image rather than removing the old version and re-adding the new one. 1 Choose Document > Background > Update. 2 Click OK, or make other changes to the background options and then click OK. Note: This process applies only to backgrounds added in either Acrobat 7 or Acrobat 8. Remove a background from PDF pages ? Do one of the following: • To remove the background from only some pages in the PDF, choose Document > Background > Add/Replace. Then click Page Range Options, and enter page numbers and Subset options to restrict the background to the designated pages. • To remove the background from all pages, choose Document > Background > Remove, and click OK to confirm the removal. • To remove a background from all pages immediately after adding it, choose Edit > Undo Add Background. Add and edit watermarks A watermark is text or an image that appears either above or behind existing document content, similar to a stamp. For example, you might want to apply a “Confidential” watermark to pages with sensitive information. You can add multiple watermarks to a PDF, and you can specify the page or range of pages on which each watermark appears. Note: Unlike a stamp, a watermark is integrated into PDF pages as a fixed element. A stamp is a type of PDF comment, which others reading the PDF may open to display a text annotation, move, change, or delete. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 132 User Guide Before and after adding a watermark Add or replace a watermark You can add multiple watermarks to a PDF, but each one must be added separately. 1 Choose Document > Watermark > Add. If the PDF already contains one or more watermarks, a message appears; select Add New if you want to create an additional watermark, or select Replace Existing if you want to replace all existing watermarks with a new one. 2 (Optional) To apply the watermark selectively to individual pages, click Page Range Options, select Pages From, and enter beginning and ending page numbers; then choose a Subset option for applying the watermark only to odd pages, even pages, or both. 3 Specify the Source option: • To create a text watermark, select Text, type the text you want to appear as the watermark in the text box, and then adjust the font, font size, font color, underlining, and paragraph-alignment options, as needed. • To use an image as a watermark, select File. Then click Browse, locate the image file you want to use, select it, and click Open. If the file has multiple pages with images, click the Page Number up and down arrows to select the page you want. Note: Only PDF, JPEG, and BMP images can be used as watermarks. 4 To change the size of an image watermark, do one of the following: • To resize the watermark in relation to the actual size of the original image file, enter a percentage in the Absolute Scale option (in the Source area of the dialog box). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 133 User Guide • To resize the watermark in relation to the PDF page dimensions, enter a percentage in the Scale Relative To Target Page (in the Appearance area of the dialog box). 5 Adjust the appearance of the text or image watermark, as needed: • To rotate the watermark, select an angle of rotation or enter a custom value. • To give the watermark some transparency, drag the Opacity slider or enter a percentage. • To stack the watermark relative to the page content, select Appear Behind Page (page content overprints the watermark) or Appear On Top Of Page (watermark overprints the page content). • To specify when the watermark appears, click Appearance Options and select or deselect Show When Printing and Show When Displaying On Screen. • To control variations in a PDF with pages of varying sizes, click Appearance Options and select or deselect Keep Position And Size Of Watermark Text Constant When Printing On Different Page Sizes. 6 Specify the position in which you want the watermark to appear by entering the vertical and horizontal distances between the watermark and the left, right, center, top, or bottom of the page. Update a watermark 1 Choose Document > Watermark > Update. 2 Make changes to the watermark, and then click OK. Important: If you have multiple watermarks in a PDF, this procedure will update only the first watermark you added and will discard all other watermarks. If you change your mind about updating the watermarks after you have completed this process, immediately choose Edit > Undo Watermark. Remove watermarks ? Do one of the following: • To remove all watermarks from all pages, choose Document > Watermark > Remove, and click OK to confirm the removal. • To remove a watermark from all pages immediately after adding it, choose Edit > Undo Watermark. Crop pages The Crop Pages dialog box is where you can adjust the visible page area. This can help you create consistency within a PDF composed of pages of different sizes. Cropping does not reduce file size because information is merely hidden, not discarded. When you prepare a PDF for printing, you can change the Art, Trim, and Bleed areas for a PDF page in the Crop dialog box. If you want to see indicators of these areas in the document pane, select the Display Art, Trim, Bleed Boxes option in the Page Display Preferences. (Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Page Display under Categories.) Crop empty areas around page content 1 Choose Document > Crop Pages. 2 Under Margin Controls, select Remove White Margins. Crop one or more pages 1 Choose Document > Crop Pages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 134 User Guide 2 In the pop-up menu in the upper left corner, leave CropBox selected, and then adjust values for the Margin Controls: Top, Bottom, Left, and Right. A black rectangle in the thumbnail page display shows the adjusted boundaries of the cropped page. 3 (Optional) One by one, select ArtBox, TrimBox, and BleedBox in the pop-up menu, and adjust the Margin Control values each time. The adjusted boundaries appear as rectangles in the thumbnail page display: red, green, and blue, respectively. 4 Select other options under Change Page Size, as appropriate for your PDF. 5 Under Page Range, in the lower right area of the dialog box, do any of the following: • To crop all pages in the PDF, select All. • To crop only one page or a range of pages, select From, and enter page numbers in the From and To options. • To crop only every other page, choose either Odd Pages Only or Even Pages Only from the Apply To menu. Otherwise, leave Even And Odd Pages selected. Note: If you select a range of pages to be cropped, the odd- or even-pages setting applies only within that range. Otherwise, it applies to all pages in the document. Because the Crop property is selected by default, the margin values that you specify determine the final Crop boundary. The dialog box displays each selected property as a differently colored box in the preview area. Select Show All Boxes to preview all properties at once. Select each property that you want to adjust. Crop a page with the Crop tool 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Crop Tool. 2 Drag a rectangle on the page you want to crop. If necessary, drag the corner handles of the cropping rectangle until the page is the size you want. 3 Double-click inside the cropping rectangle. The Crop Pages dialog box opens, indicating the margin measurements of the cropping rectangle and the page to be cropped. You can override these settings or apply other options by making new selections in the dialog box before clicking OK. Crop Pages dialog box settings Show All Boxes Shows the black, red, green, and blue rectangles indicating the CropBox, ArtBox, TrimBox, and BleedBox on the page thumbnails. When two (or more) margins coincide, only a colored line appears. CropBox Defines the boundary for the contents of a page when it’s displayed or printed. If not otherwise specified (for example, in the JDF settings), the crop boundary determines how page contents are positioned on the output medium. ArtBox Defines the meaningful content of the page, including white space. TrimBox Defines the finished dimensions of the page after trimming. BleedBox Defines the clipping path when the page is printed professionally to allow for paper trimming and folding. Printing marks may fall outside the bleed area. Remove White Margins Crops the page to the artwork boundary. This option is useful for trimming the edges of presentation slides saved as PDFs. Set To Zero Restores the crop margins to zero. Revert To Selection Reverts to the crop margin selected with the Crop tool. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 135 User Guide Undo cropping Cropping a PDF does not reduce file size because information is merely hidden, not discarded. By resetting the page size, you can restore the page and its content to its original condition. 1 Open the Crop Pages dialog box by choosing one of the following: • Document > Crop Pages. • Crop Pages from the Options menu on the Pages panel. 2 Reset the margins to the original dimensions. Rearranging pages in a PDF Rotate a page You can rotate all or selected pages in a document. Rotation is based on 90° increments. 1 Open the Rotate Pages dialog box using one of the following methods: • Choose Document > Rotate Pages. • From the Options menu on the Pages panel, choose Rotate Pages. 2 For Direction, select the amount and direction of the rotations: Counterclockwise 90 Degrees, Clockwise 90 Degrees, or 180 Degrees. 3 For Pages, specify whether all pages, a selection of pages, or a range of pages are to be rotated. 4 From the Rotate menu, specify even pages, odd pages, or both, and select the orientation of pages to be rotated. To temporarily change your view of the page, choose View > Rotate View > Clockwise or Counterclockwise. The original page orientation is restored the next time you open the PDF. Extract pages in a PDF Extraction is the process of reusing selected pages of one PDF in a different PDF. Extracted pages contain not only the content but also all form fields, comments, and links associated with the original page content. You can leave the extracted pages in the original document or remove them during the extraction process—compa­ rable to the familiar processes of cutting-and-pasting or copying-and-pasting, but on the page level. Note: Any bookmarks or article threading associated with pages are not extracted. 1 Open the PDF in Acrobat and choose Document > Extract Pages. 2 Specify the range of pages to extract. 3 In the Extract Pages dialog box, do one or more of the following before you click OK: • To remove the extracted pages from the original document, select Delete Pages After Extracting. • To create a single-page PDF for each extracted page, select Extract Pages As Separate Files. • To leave the original pages in the document and create a single PDF that includes all of the extracted pages, leave both check boxes deselected. 4 If a message appears asking you to confirm the deletion, click Yes to delete the extracted pages from the original PDF, or click No to go back to the Extract Pages dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 136 User Guide The extracted pages are placed in a new document named Pages From [original document name]-[n]. Note: The creator of a PDF document can set the security to prevent the extraction of pages. To view the security settings for a document, choose File > Properties, and select Security. See also “Extract component files in a PDF package” on page 123 Move or copy a page You can use page thumbnails to copy or move pages within a document and between documents. When you drag a page thumbnail in a Pages panel, a bar appears near other thumbnails, indicating the position in which it will appear in the PDF. This bar appears at the bottom or top when the thumbnails are in a single column, or to the left or right if more than one column of thumbnails is displayed. Note: Tagged bookmarks affect the order that reading devices follow, such as devices for the visually impaired. Tagged bookmarks do not change the sequence of pages in a PDF. See also “Insert one PDF into another” on page 124 “About tags, accessibility, reading order, and reflow” on page 289 Move or copy a page within a PDF, using page thumbnails 1 Click the Pages button to open the Pages panel, and select one or more page thumbnails. 2 Do one of the following: • To move a page, drag the page number box of the corresponding page thumbnail or the page thumbnail itself to the new location. A bar appears to show the new position of the page thumbnail. The pages are renumbered. • To copy a page, Ctrl-drag/Option-drag the page thumbnail to a second location. Move or copy a page between two PDFs, using page thumbnails 1 Open both PDFs, and display them side by side. 2 Open the Pages panels for both PDFs, and do one of the following: • To copy a page, drag the page thumbnail into the Pages panel of the target PDF. The page is copied into the document, and the pages are renumbered. • To remove a page from one PDF and insert it into another PDF, select the page thumbnail and Ctrl-drag/Option­ drag it into the Pages panel of the target PDF. The page is inserted into the target document and deleted from the source document. The pages are renumbered. Delete or replace a page You can replace an entire PDF page with another PDF page. Only the text and images on the original page are replaced. Any interactive elements associated with the original page, such as links and bookmarks, are not affected. Likewise, bookmarks and links that may have been previously associated with the replacement page do not carry over. Comments, however, are carried over and are combined with any existing comments in the document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 137 User Guide After you delete or replace pages, it’s a good idea to use the Reduce File Size command to rename and save the restructured document to the smallest possible file size. A page before and after it is replaced. The page’s bookmarks and links remain in the same locations. Delete pages, using the Delete command Note: You cannot undo the Delete command. 1 Choose Document > Delete Pages. 2 Enter the page range to be deleted, and click OK. You cannot delete all pages; at least one page must remain in the document. If you select Use Logical Page Numbers in the Page Display panel of the Preferences dialog box, you can enter a page number in parentheses to delete the logical equivalent of the page number. For example, if the first page in the document is numbered i, you can enter (1) in the Delete Pages dialog box, and the page is deleted. Delete pages, using page thumbnails 1 In the Pages panel, select a page or group of pages: • Select the page number box of the thumbnail or the page thumbnail itself. • Shift-click to select a range of page thumbnails. Ctrl-click/Command-click to add to the selection. Or, in Windows, press Ctrl+A to select all thumbnails, and then Ctrl-click to deselect the pages that you want to keep. • Drag a rectangle around a group of page thumbnails. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Delete Pages from the Pages panel Options menu, and click OK. • Click the trash icon at the top of the Pages panel. Delete material associated with a tagged bookmark 1 In the Bookmarks panel, click the tagged bookmark for the material you want to delete. Shift-click to select multiple bookmarks. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 138 User Guide 2 Choose Delete Page(s) from the Options menu. The tagged bookmark and its associated page are deleted from the document. Replace the contents of a page 1 Open the PDF that contains the pages you want to replace. 2 Choose Document > Replace Pages. 3 Select the document containing the replacement pages, and click Select. 4 Under Original, enter the pages to be replaced in the original document. 5 Under Replacement, enter the first page of the replacement page range. The last page is calculated based on the number of pages to be replaced in the original document. Replace pages using a page thumbnail 1 Open the PDF that contains the pages you want to replace, and then open the PDF that contains the replacement pages. 2 In the Pages panel of the PDF that contains the replacement pages, select a page or group of pages: • Select the page number boxes of the page thumbnails that you want to use as replacement pages. • Shift-click to select multiple page thumbnails. Ctrl-click/Command-click to add to the selection. • Drag a rectangle around a group of page thumbnails. 3 Drag the selected page thumbnails onto the Pages panel of the target document. Release the mouse button when the pointer is directly over the page number box of the first page thumbnail you want to replace so that these pages become highlighted. The pages you selected in the first document replace the same number of pages in the second document, starting at the page number you selected to drop the new pages on. Renumber pages The page numbers on the document pages do not always match the page numbers that appear below the page thumb­ nails and in the Page Navigation toolbar. Pages are numbered with integers, starting with page 1 for the first page of the document. Because some PDFs may contain front matter, such as a copyright page and table of contents, their body pages may not follow the numbering shown in the Page Navigation toolbar. Printed page numbering (top) compared to logical page numbering (bottom) You can number the pages in your document in a variety of ways. You can specify a different numbering style for groups of pages, such as 1, 2, 3, or i, ii, iii, or a, b, c. You can also customize the numbering system by adding a prefix. For example, the numbering for chapter 1 could be 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, and so on, and for chapter 2, it could be 2-1, 2-2, 2­ 3, and so on. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 139 User Guide Using the Number Pages command affects only the page thumbnails on the Pages panel. You can physically add new page numbers to a PDF using the headers and footers feature. 1 Click the Pages button to open the Pages panel, and choose Number Pages from the Options menu. 2 Specify a page range. (Selected refers to pages selected in the Pages panel.) 3 Select one of the following, and then click OK: Begin New Section Starts a new numbering sequence. Choose a style from the pop-up menu, and enter a starting page number for the section. Specify a prefix, if desired. Extend Numbering Used In Preceding Section To Selected Pages Continues the numbering sequence from previous pages without interruption. See also “Add and edit headers and footers” on page 125 140 Chapter 5: Exporting PDFs If you don’t have access to the source files that created an Adobe PDF, you can still copy images and text from the PDF to use elsewhere, or export the PDF to a reusable format. You can also export images in a PDF to another format. Quickstart Following are overview steps to some common conversion tasks. Export as Word If you don’t have the original file from which a PDF was created, you can save the PDF as a Word document that you can then edit in Word. 1 Click Export in the Tasks toolbar, and then choose Word Document. 2 Click Settings to set conversion options. Note: When you save a PDF to Word format, the resulting file isn’t equivalent to a file created in Word; some coding information may be lost. See also “Export PDFs as text” on page 145 Export as HTML or XML To easily use the content of a PDF on the web, simply convert the PDF to HTML or XML format. 1 Click Export in the Tasks toolbar, and then choose HTML Web Page or XML 1.0. 2 Click Settings to set conversion options. You can save a PDF in HTML 3.2 format by clicking Export, and choosing More Formats > HTML 3.2. See also “Export PDFs” on page 142 Export as text You can save a PDF in Rich Text Format (RTF), as accessible text, or as plain text. RTF preserves the most formatting. Accessible text preserves such items as comments, form fields, and alternate text. 1 Click Export in the Tasks toolbar, choose More Formats, and then choose the desired text format. 2 If saving to RTF or plain text, click Settings to adjust the conversion settings. See also “Export PDFs as text” on page 145 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 141 User Guide Select and copy text You can copy words, lines, or columns of text from a PDF. 1 Using the Select tool , do any of the following: • Drag across text. • Double-click or triple-click to select a word or a line of text. 2 Move the pointer over the icon that appears next to the selected text, and then choose an option from the menu. If you cannot select text, it may be part of an image or from a scanned document. See also “Select and copy text” on page 146 Select and copy an image You can copy an image from a PDF to the clipboard or to another application, or you can save it to a file. 1 Using the Select tool , click an image or drag to select a portion of it after the pointer changes to a crosshairs icon. 2 Do any of the following: • Drag the image into an open document in another application. • Right-click/Control-click the image and choose Copy Image or Save Image As. See also “Copy images” on page 148 Take a snapshot of a page Use the Snapshot tool to copy all selected content. Text and images are both copied as an image. 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Snapshot tool. 2 Drag on the page to select content, or click to copy the entire page. The selected content is copied to the clipboard when you release the mouse button. See also “Take a snapshot of a page” on page 149 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 142 User Guide Exporting PDFs to other file formats Export PDFs You can save a PDF to a number of different file formats, and then open and use that file in other applications. The available formats include both text and image formats. To make a PDF compatible with earlier versions of Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader, you can resave the PDF to an earlier version of the PDF format. 1 With the PDF open, do one of the following: • Click the Export button in the Tasks toolbar and choose a file format or choose More Formats. • Choose File > Export, and choose a file format. • Choose File > Save As, and choose a file format from the menu. 2 Click Settings to set conversion options. (If the Settings button is unavailable, there are no options for the format that you selected.) Click OK to apply the settings. Conversion settings can also be edited in the Convert From PDF Preferences. Note: These conversion settings are stored separately from the settings used with the Export All Images command. 3 Click Save to export the PDF to the selected file format. By default, the source file name is used as the file name, with the new extension, and the exported file is saved in the same folder as the source file. When you save a PDF in an image format, each page is saved as a separate file. File format options When you export PDFs to different file formats using the Save As command, each file format includes unique conversion settings. If you want to use the same settings every time you convert PDFs to a particular format, specify those settings in the Convert From PDF preferences. Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Convert From PDF from the left. Select a file format from the list and click Edit Settings. (Click the Default button at any time to revert to the default settings.) Adobe PDF options You can resave PDFs as optimized PDFs, using settings in the PDF Optimizer dialog box. The PDF Optimizer lets you change the compatibility version of your PDFs so they can be viewed using older versions of Acrobat or Adobe Reader. When you change the compatibility setting, newer features may be unavailable in the PDF. For an expla­ nation of each compatibility setting, see “PDF compatibility levels” on page 109. PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) options You can export a PDF to PostScript for use in printing and prepress applications. The PostScript file includes full DSC (Document Structuring Conventions) comments and other advanced information preserved by Adobe Acrobat Distiller. You can also create an EPS file from any PDF for placement or opening in other applications. The options available depend on whether you are converting a document to PostScript or EPS. (For a complete description of PostScript options, see “PostScript options” on page 449.) Note: If you are creating EPS files for separations, all image color spaces should be CMYK. Printer Description File The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) provides the necessary information to format a PostScript file correctly for a particular output device. Device Independent creates only composite (not colorseparated) PostScript or EPS files. Acrobat Default provides a starting point and reference for creating all types of ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 143 User Guide PostScript and restores all default settings for the conversion. Adobe PDF 7.0 is compatible with most devices.This option is available only for PostScript (PS) format. ASCII or Binary Specifies the output format of image data. Binary output yields smaller files, but not all workflows can accommodate binary output. PostScript Specifies the level of PostScript compatibility. Use Language Level 3 only if the target output device supports it. Language Level 2 is suitable for EPS files that will be placed in another document and color-separated as part of that document. Use Language Level 2 for EPS files that you import into Microsoft applications. Page Range Specifies the pages you want to export. When you export files to EPS output, each page in the range is saved as a separate EPS file. HTML or XML options When you export a PDF file to HTML or XML format, any images in PDF are converted to JPEG format. Encoding Refers to the binary values, based on international standards, used to represent the text characters. UTF­ 8 is a Unicode representation of characters using one or more 8-bit bytes per character; UTF-16 represents characters using 16-bit bytes. ISO-Latin-1 is an 8-bit representation of characters that is a superset of ASCII. UCS-4 is a Universal Character Set coded in 4 octets. HTML/ASCII is a 7-bit representation of characters developed by ANSI. Use Mapping Table Default uses the default character encoding defined in mapping tables, which appear in the Plug­ ins/SaveAsXML/MappingTables folder. These mapping tables specify many characteristics of how the data is output, including the following default character encodings: UTF-8 (Save as XML or HTML 4.0.1) and HTML/ASCII (Save as HTML 3.2). Generate Bookmarks Generates bookmark links to content for HTML or XML documents. Links are placed at the beginning of the resulting HTML or XML document. Generate Tags For Untagged Files Generates tags for files that are not already tagged, such as PDFs created using Acrobat 4.0 or earlier. If this option is not selected, untagged files are not converted. Note: Tags are applied only as part of the conversion process and are discarded after the conversion. This is not a method for creating tagged PDFs from legacy files. Generate Images Controls how images are converted. Converted image files are referenced from within XML and HTML documents. Use Sub-Folder Specifies the folder in which to store generated images. The default is Images. Use Prefix Specifies the prefix added to the image file names if you have several versions of the same image file. File names assigned to images have the format filename_img_#. Output Format Specifies the final format. The default is JPG. Downsample To Downsamples image files to the specified resolution. If you do not select this option, image files have the same resolution as in the source file. Image files are never upsampled. JPEG and JPEG2000 options If your PDF contains a collection of images, you can export them individually as JPEG, PNG, or TIFF files by choosing Advanced > Document Processing > Export All Images. Note that the options available depend on whether you are exporting a document to JPEG or JPEG2000. Grayscale/Color Specifies a compression setting that balances file size with image quality. The smaller the file, the lesser the image quality. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 144 User Guide Tile Size Divides the image being compressed into tiles of the given size. (If the image height or width is not an even multiple of the tile size, partial tiles are used on the edges.) Image data for each tile is individually compressed and can be individually decompressed. The default value of 256 is recommended. This option is available only for JPEG2000 format. Format Determines how the file is displayed. Available only for JPEG format. • Baseline (Standard) Displays the image when it has fully downloaded. This JPEG format is recognizable to most web browsers. • Baseline (Optimized) Optimizes color quality of the image and produces smaller file sizes but is not supported by all web browsers. • Progressive (3 scans-5 scans) Downloads the image first as a low-resolution image, with incremental quality improvements as downloading continues. RGB/CMYK/Grayscale Specifies the type of color management to be applied to the output file and whether to embed an ICC profile. Note: If you use the Save As or Export All Images command on a PDF that contains JPEG and JPEG2000 images, and export the content to JPEG or JPEG2000 format, the resulting image may look different when opened in Acrobat. This can happen if the images have a color profile included at the page level but not inside the image data. In this case, Acrobat cannot bring the page-level color profile into the resulting saved image. Colorspace/Resolution Specifies a color space and resolution for the output file. You can let Acrobat determine these settings automatically. To convert color images in the file to shades of gray, choose Grayscale. Note: Higher resolutions, such as 2400 pixels per inch (ppi), are suitable only for small page sizes (up to 6.826 inches or 173.380 millimeters). PNG options PNG format is useful for images that will be used on the web. Interlace Specifies if the image is interlaced. None creates an image that displays in a web browser only after downloading is complete. Adam7 creates an image that displays low-resolution versions in a browser while the full image file is downloading. Adam7 can make downloading time seem shorter and assures viewers that downloading is in progress; however, it increases file size. Filter Lets you select a filtering algorithm. • None Compresses the image without a filter. Recommended for indexed-color and bitmap-mode images. • Sub Optimizes the compression of images with even horizontal patterns or blends. • Up Optimizes the compression of images with even vertical patterns. • Average Optimizes the compression of low-level noise by averaging the color values of adjacent pixels. • Paeth Optimizes the compression of low-level noise by reassigning adjacent color values. • Adaptive Applies the filtering algorithm—Sub, Up, Average, or Paeth—best suited for the image. Select Adaptive if you are unsure of which filter to use. RGB/CMYK/Grayscale Specifies the type of color management for the output file and whether to embed an ICC profile. Colorspace/Resolution Specifies a color space and resolution for the output file. You can let Acrobat determine these settings automatically. To convert color images in the file to shades of gray, choose Grayscale. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 145 User Guide Note: Higher resolutions, such as 2400 ppi, are suitable only for small page sizes (up to 6.826 inches or 173.380 milli­ meters). TIFF options TIFF is a flexible bitmap image format supported by virtually all paint, image-editing, and page-layout applications. Resolution is determined automatically. Monochrome Specifies a compression format. CCITTG4 is the default and generally produces the smallest file size. ZIP compression also produces a small file. Note: Some applications cannot open TIFF files that are saved with JPEG or ZIP compression. In these cases, LZW compression is recommended. RGB/CMYK/Grayscale/Other Specifies the type of color management for the output file. Colorspace/Resolution Specifies a color space and resolution for the output file. You can let Acrobat determine these settings automatically. To convert color images in the file to shades of gray, choose Grayscale. Note: Higher resolutions, such as 2400 ppi, are suitable only for small page sizes (up to 6.826 inches or 173.380 milli­ meters). Export PDFs as text If you have a PDF version of a document, but you don’t have the original application file, you can export the text to Rich Text Format (RTF), a standard for exchanging content between text-editing applications, or Microsoft Word format. Images in the PDF are saved by default in JPEG format. The text file you obtain when you export a PDF to RTF or Word format is not equivalent to the source file in the authoring application. Some coding information may be lost in the conversion. You can also export a PDF to plain text or accessible text. Accessible text follows the reading order preference selected in the Reading preferences, and includes comments and form fields in its output. Accessible text also includes some formatting, such as line breaks. Any alternate text in the document tags is used in place of images and figures. Plain text follows the structure order of text in the document and ignores all artifacts and figure elements in the conversion. Hard hyphens are preserved, and soft hyphens are removed. 1 Do one of the following: • Click the Export button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Word Document. • Choose File > Save As, and then choose a text format: Microsoft Word Document (*.doc); Rich Text Format (*.rtf); Text (Accessible) (*.txt); or Text (Plain) (*.txt). 2 Click Settings, select the options you want, click OK, and click Save. Word and RTF options (For a list of plain text options, see the options for HTML and XML.) Include Comments Preserves PDF comments. Include Images Includes images in the final output. The default image format is JPEG. Output Format Specifies the image format. Select JPEG or PNG, and then select the color space and resolution options. Use Colorspace Specifies the color space. You can choose Color or Grayscale, or let the color space be determined automatically. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 146 User Guide Change Resolution Downsamples images. If you do not select this option, images are created at the same resolution as in the PDF. Downsample To Specifies the resolution for downsampling images. Images are never upsampled. You can export multiple PDFs to RTF using the Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing command. Export images to another format In addition to saving every page (all text, images, and vector objects on a page) to an image format using the File > Save As command, you can export each image in a PDF to an image format. Note: You can export raster images, but not vector objects. 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Export All Images. 2 In the Export All Images As dialog box, choose a file format for the images. By default, exported image files use the source file name. 3 Click Settings. 4 In the Export All Images As Settings dialog box, select the file settings, color management, and conversion settings for the file type. 5 For Exclude Images Smaller Than, select the smallest size of image to be extracted. Select No Limit to extract all images. 6 Click OK. In the Export All Images As dialog box, click Save or OK. Reusing PDF content Select and copy text The Select tool lets you select horizontal and vertical text or columns of text in a PDF. You can use the Copy and Paste commands to copy the selected text into another application. If you hold the pointer over the text selection, a menu appears that lets you copy, highlight, or underline the text, among other options. Note the following: • If you’re unable to select text, the text may be part of an image. Export image text to text that can be selected by using either the File > Create PDF > From Scanner command or the Document > OCR Text Recognition > Recognize Text Using OCR command. • If the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands are unavailable when you select text, the author of the PDF may have set restrictions against copying text. • If the text you copy uses a font that isn’t available on your system, the font will be substituted with a close match or a default font. Select text by dragging from an insertion point to an end point (left) or by dragging diagonally over text (right). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 147 User Guide See also “Open secured PDFs” on page 247 Select a word or line of text 1 Move the Select tool over the text you want to select. When the pointer changes to the I-beam icon , do one of the following: • Drag across the text to be selected. (You can also click to create an insertion point, and Shift-click to create a second insertion point. The text between the two insertion points is selected.) • Double-click to select a word. • Triple-click to select a line of text. 2 If you want to extend a selection letter by letter, press Shift and an arrow key. To extend a selection word by word, press Shift+Ctrl (Windows) or Shift+Command (Mac OS) and an arrow key. Select a column of text 1 Using the Select tool , move the pointer toward a column of text. When the pointer changes to a vertical bar with a box superimposed, the Select tool is in column select mode. You can force column select mode by pressing the Alt key (Windows) or the Command key (Mac OS) as you drag a rectangle over the column of text. 2 Drag a rectangle over the column of text. To select text in more than one column, drag from the beginning of the text in one column to the end of text you want to select. Select all the text on a page 1 Choose View > Page Display > Single Page. 2 Do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Select All. • Select any text on the page and then press Ctrl+A (Windows) or Command+A (Mac OS). • Click four times in the text. This method selects all the text on the page regardless of the page layout. Note: If you choose any other page layout, all the text in the document is selected. Copy selected text 1 Use the Select tool to select any amount of text on the page. 2 Copy the text: • Choose Edit > Copy to copy the selected text to another application. • Hold the pointer over the selection until a menu appears, and then select Copy. • Hold the pointer over the selection until a menu appears, and then choose Copy To Clipboard or Copy With Formatting. (Copy With Formatting, which preserves the column layout, appears only if the document is tagged properly.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 148 User Guide A menu appears when you hold the pointer over selected text. You can paste copied text into comments and bookmarks as well as into documents authored in other applications. Copy tables and charts 1 Using the Select tool , highlight the entire table or the rows and columns to be copied. 2 Right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose one of the following options: Copy As Table Preserves formatting when you copy the table to Excel. In Excel, use the Paste Special command and select XML Spreadsheet. Save As Table Lets you paste the table to a new file. Open Table In Spreadsheet Opens the table in a CSV-compliant application, such as Excel. To copy a table in RTF, drag the selected table into an open document in the target application. Copy images You can copy and paste individual images from a PDF to the clipboard (Windows only), to another application, or to a file using the Select tool. If you cannot select an image because of overlapping text, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Prefer­ ences (Mac OS), select General on the left, and select the Make Select Tool Select Images Before Text option. 1 Using the Select tool , do one of the following: • To select the entire image, click it or drag a rectangle around it. • To select a portion of an image, hold the pointer over the image until the crosshairs icon appears, and then drag a rectangle around the portion. Note: To deselect an image and start over, click outside it. 2 Copy the image: • Choose Edit > Copy, and then choose Edit > Paste to paste the image in an open document in another application. • Right-click/Control-click the image and choose an option to copy the image to the clipboard or to a new file. • Drag the image into an open document in another application. See also “Export images to another format” on page 146 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 149 User Guide Take a snapshot of a page You can use the Snapshot tool to copy all selected content (text, images, or both) to the clipboard or to another appli­ cation. Text and images are copied as an image. 1 Select the Snapshot tool by choosing Tools > Select & Zoom. 2 Do one of the following: • Click anywhere in the page to capture the entire content displayed on the screen. • Drag a rectangle around the text or images, or a combination of both. • Drag a rectangle within an image to copy just a portion of the image. Colors in the selected area are inverted momentarily to highlight the selection. The selection is copied automatically to the clipboard when you release the mouse button. If a document is open in another application, you can choose Edit > Paste to paste the copied selection directly into the target document. You can save all the images from a PDF. See “Export images to another format” on page 146 150 Chapter 6: Review and comment You can conduct reviews for many types of content by sending out an Adobe PDF version of the source document for others to review, or by posting a PDF to a shared server. Reviewers add their comments to the PDF using commenting and markup tools and then send, or upload, their comments. If you create documents in Microsoft Word for Windows or Autodesk AutoCAD, you can import comments directly into the source document to revise the content. Quickstart The following steps provide a quick overview of common review and commenting tasks. Start an email review An email-based review lets you track review status and merge received comments into the PDF. 1 Click Review & Comment and choose Attach For Email Review. 2 If prompted, enter your identity information to create a reviewer profile. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to select the PDF, invite reviewers, and send the email invitation. If your email application doesn’t send email automatically, you may need to answer alert messages and switch to your email application to finish sending the message. See also “Start an email-based review” on page 158 Start a shared review A shared review allows reviewers, including those using Adobe Reader, to see and respond to others’ comments during the review. Important: To conduct a shared review, you and your reviewers need write access to a shared comment server. 1 Click Review & Comment and choose Send For Shared Review. 2 If prompted, enter your identity information to create a reviewer profile. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to select (or add) a server, select the PDF, invite reviewers, and send the email invitation. See also “Start a shared review” on page 157 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 151 User Guide Invite additional reviewers If you initiated a review, you can invite more reviewers. If you are a reviewer, ask the initiator to add reviewers so the initiator can track all reviewers and receive notification when comments are received. 1 Click Review & Comment , and choose Review Tracker. 2 Select the desired PDF under Reviews I’ve Sent, and click Add Reviewers. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to add email addresses, change the message as needed, and send the invitation. See also “Invite additional reviewers” on page 160 Track and manage reviews The Review Tracker provides information for all documents that you’ve sent and received for review. Use the Review Tracker to rejoin a review, send a reminder, or invite additional reviewers. 1 Click Review & Comment , and choose Review Tracker. 2 Select the desired PDF on the left. 3 Do any of the following: • To rejoin a review, double-click the PDF. • To send a message, click Email All Reviewers or Email Initiator. • To invite additional reviewers, click Add Reviewers. See also “Tracking PDF reviews” on page 165 Start a meeting If you have an Adobe Acrobat Connect account, you can start a meeting to review PDFs in a web browser. You can also create a trial account to start a meeting. Note: Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages. 1 Click Start Meeting in the Tasks toolbar. 2 Click Log In, and then type your Meeting URL, login, and password. (Or click Create Trial Account and follow the on-screen instructions.) 3 Click Send An E-mail Invitation or Share My Screen. See also “Start a meeting” on page 160 Participate in an email review When you open the PDF attachment in an email review, a tracked copy of the PDF opens with a document message bar, a Send Comments button, and a Comment & Markup toolbar. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 152 User Guide Important: If you’re prompted to connect to a server when you open the PDF, you’ve been invited to a shared review. 1 Open the PDF attachment from your email application. 2 Use commenting tools to add comments. 3 Save the PDF, and then click Send Comments. See also “Review a PDF” on page 161 Participate in a shared review When you open the shared PDF, commenting tools and a document message bar with instructions also open. 1 Open the PDF attachment or link. 2 Click Connect, and type your login name and password, if prompted. 3 Type your name, email address, and job title to create a reviewer profile, if prompted. 4 Add comments. 5 When you want to share your comments, click Publish Comments. In a shared review, you can see all reviewers’ comments that have been published. See also “Review a PDF” on page 161 Add a sticky note The sticky note is the most common type of comment. 1 Click Review & Comment in the Tasks toolbar, and then choose Add Sticky Note. 2 Type your comment in the pop-up note. (Your comment remains if you close the note.) 3 (Optional) Drag the sticky note icon or pop-up window to a new location. You can also add other types of comments, such as markups and text edits. See also “Add a sticky note” on page 172 Mark up text with edits Add editing markups to indicate where text should be inserted, deleted, or replaced. 1 Click Review & Comment , and choose Comment & Markup Tools > Text Edits Tool. 2 Select the text you want to edit or place the insertion point where you want to add text. 3 Move the pointer over the icon that appears, and choose an option from the pop-up menu, or simply begin typing. See also “Mark up text with edits” on page 173 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 153 User Guide Create drawing markups You can add lines, arrows, and shapes to a PDF by using the drawing markup tools. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup, and choose the desired tool. 2 Draw in the PDF. For example, click and drag to form a line, arrow, or rectangle. 3 (Optional) Using the Select tool, double-click the markup, and then type a comment in the pop-up note. To change properties, such as line color and width, right-click/Control-click the markup and choose Properties. See also “Add a line, arrow, or shape” on page 177 Preparing for a PDF review Choosing a review type While you can send out a PDF for review through email, it’s easier to set up a managed review using a wizard. That way you don’t have to do the work of importing comments, enabling commenting for Adobe Reader users, or manually tracking reviewer responses. Note: Acrobat Professional is required to enable commenting for Adobe Reader users in shared reviews and email-based reviews. Acrobat includes three types of managed reviews. Each type of review has a wizard that helps you distribute a PDF with special tools and instructions to reviewers. The Review Tracker tracks all managed reviews and provides access to the PDF file and to information about the review and its participants. Shared reviews and email-based reviews are the best choices for most document reviews. To initiate any managed review, you need a supported email application and a mail server connection. (No additional server software is required for shared or browser-based reviews.) In addition to managed reviews, Acrobat offers a meeting option that lets you share your desktop with others to collaborate on documents. (See “Start a meeting” on page 160.) Shared reviews Shared reviews are best for groups that work behind a firewall and have access to a remote server. Shared reviews are the most collaborative form of review because participants can read and reply to each other’s comments whether they review the PDF locally, as an email attachment, or on a remote server. Reviewers outside the firewall can also partic­ ipate by sending their comments to a reviewer within the firewall, who then publishes them to the shared PDF. Of all the managed reviews, shared reviews provide the most detailed information about the active review. A notifi­ cation feature lets you know when new comments are available, even when Acrobat is closed, and you’re informed of all recent review activity each time you open the PDF. Published comments are saved to the server and to the local hard drive, and Acrobat synchronizes comments between these two locations at regular intervals to download all the latest comments and changes. Note: To view other reviewers’ comments in a shared review, you must use Acrobat 8 or Adobe Reader 8. Reviewers using Acrobat 6.0 or 7.0 must send their comments in email. Shared reviews do not support commenting in Acrobat 3D files. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 154 User Guide In a shared review, the PDF file contains special information that lets recipients easily join the review and share their comments. Email-based reviews Email-based reviews are ideal for soliciting feedback from individuals who either don’t have access to a remote server or who don’t require a collaborative approach to reviewing documents. In an email-based review, the initiator sends a PDF to reviewers as an email attachment. Reviewers add their comments to the PDF and return the document by using the Send Comments button in either the Comment & Markup toolbar or the document message bar. When receiving these comments, the initiator can merge them into their copy of the PDF. The primary limitation to email-based reviews is that participants can’t view each other’s comments during the review. Initiators can view comments only after receiving them. Note: Acrobat 6.0 or later or Adobe Reader 7.0 or later is required to participate in an email-based review. In an email-based review, participants send their comments to the initiator, who merges the comments into the master copy of the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 155 User Guide Browser-based reviews Like shared reviews, browser-based reviews are suitable for collaborative groups with access to a shared server. Reviewers can view each other’s comments during the review process. In a browser-based review, the initiator uploads a PDF to the server and then sends an email invitation to reviewers. The invitation includes a setup file that, when clicked, opens the PDF in the default browser. Reviewers click the Send Comments button in the Comment & Markup toolbar to upload their comments, which are stored in a comments repository on the shared server. Browser-based reviews lack many of the advantages of shared reviews in terms of setup and tracking tools, and support for network folders. In addition, Acrobat must download all comments in the PDF each time you join the review, often a time-consuming process. For these reasons, Adobe recommends shared reviews as the preferred collaborative method. Note: Acrobat 6.0 or later is required to participate in browser-based reviews. (Adobe Reader users cannot participate.) In a browser-based review, the initiator uploads a PDF to the server and sends a setup file to the reviewers, who can see each other’s comments. Enable commenting for Adobe Reader users By enabling commenting rights in a PDF, Adobe Reader 8 users can participate in reviews of that PDF. When a PDF with commenting rights opens in Reader, it includes a document message bar, a How To pane with instructions, and commenting tools that are otherwise unavailable. ? Use either of these methods to enable commenting for Reader users: • In an open PDF, choose Comments > Enable For Commenting In Adobe Reader, and then save the PDF. • Start the wizard to initiate a shared review or an email-based review and follow the on-screen instructions. When you’re finished, commenting is enabled in the PDF that you specify for the review. See also “Start a shared review” on page 157 “Start an email review” on page 150 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 156 User Guide Select an email application for reviews You need an email application and a mail server connection to send a PDF for review and to send comments. Acrobat supports most email applications. If more than one email application is installed on your system, Acrobat might not start the preferred application when it sends a PDF as an attachment. To specify which application starts, do one of the following: • (Windows) Double-click Internet Options in the Control Panel. In the Internet Properties dialog box, select the Programs tab, and then select the preferred email application. Restart Acrobat for the changes to take effect. • (Windows) Change the MAPI settings in your email application. Adobe Reader uses the Messaging Application Program Interface (MAPI) to communicate with your email application. Most email applications come with MAPI settings to handle this communication. For more information on configuring your email applications, see the email application’s Help. • (Mac OS) In Mail, choose Mail > Preferences, select General, and then choose the preferred email application from the Default Email Reader menu. Restart Acrobat for the changes to take effect. If your application isn’t listed, choose Select from the menu and browse to the location. If you select an application that isn’t listed in the Default Email Reader menu, Acrobat may not support it. After you verify that Acrobat works with your email application, you can initiate a review. Specify a server for comments You must specify a server location to store all the comments that are submitted during a shared review or a browserbased review. This server location is referred to as the comment server (also called a comments repository). Reviewers must have read and write access to the comment server you specify. Ask your network administrator to provide a suitable server location for storing comments. No additional software is required to set up a comment server. For a shared review, you can specify a network folder, a WebDAV server, or a Windows server running Microsoft SharePoint Services. If all reviewers are within a local area network, network folders and SharePoint servers are the best choices for a comment server—network folders being the cheapest and most reliable. To initiate a review on a SharePoint server, the initiator must use Windows; however, reviewers can use either Windows or Mac OS. All participants must have read and write access to the Document Library folder within the specified workspace. WebDAV servers (web servers that use the WebDAV protocol) are best used only if you have reviewers that are outside of a firewall or local area network. For a browser-based review, you can specify either a network folder or a WebDAV server. If you use a network folder, comments may not be viewable to reviewers on both platforms. Even if all reviewers use the same platform, they may not see comments if they access the server location as a mapped drive instead of by its full file path. If you use a WebDAV server, make sure that all reviewers have unique login names that aren’t differentiated solely by case. Specify a server for shared reviews ? Start the wizard to initiate a shared review, click Add Folder, and follow the on-screen instructions. Specify a server for browser-based reviews 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Reviewing from the list on the left. 2 For the Online Comments Repository, choose a server type from the menu. 3 To specify the server settings, do one of the following, and then click OK: • Click Browse (Windows) or Choose (Mac OS) to select a network folder, and then click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 157 User Guide • Type the path in the Administrator Provided Server Settings box. For example, type a WebDAV server using a web address (such as http://server/folder), or a network folder using a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) address (such as \\server\folder). • If your organization subscribes to automatic configuration services, click Configure Automatically. If the server information changes for subsequent reviews, you must respecify the location. Starting and managing a review Start a shared review To conduct a shared review, you and your reviewers must have read and write access to the server you use for storing comments. (See “Specify a server for comments” on page 156.) The shared PDF that you send includes the Comment & Markup toolbar and instructions in the document message bar. 1 Start the setup wizard for a shared review: • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar and choose Send For Shared Review. • Choose Comments > Send For Shared Review. 2 If prompted, type your name, email address, and job title in the Review Profile dialog box, and click OK. 3 Choose the shared location that you’ll use to store comments, or click Add New Location. If you set up a new location, type a descriptive name, specify the type of server (network folder, SharePoint workspace, or WebDAV folder), and click Next. Type the full path of the folder location, using the examples in the screen, or browse to select the folder. Verify that you have write access to that location, and then click Add Folder and click Next. The option to enable commenting for Reader users is selected by default. 4 Select the PDF to be reviewed, and then specify whether to send it as an email attachment, or to post it on the network and send an email invitation with a URL. If you want to distribute the PDF later or use a different method (such as FTP), select the option to save a copy to your local hard drive. Click Next. 5 Specify reviewers by typing their email addresses, or by clicking Address Book and selecting email addresses from a Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook address book. Insert a semicolon or a return between each address. If you want to specify a date when the review ends, select Set Deadline, and enter the month, day, and year. Click Next. 6 Review the invitation, and then click Finish. The shared PDF now contains the following information: the email addresses of reviewers, the path to the shared folder, and the initiator’s profile. No matter when or how you send this PDF, each recipient gets this information, which appears in the Welcome screen with news of recent activity when the PDF is opened. 7 If you’re sending the shared PDF as an email attachment and your email application doesn’t let you send email automatically for security reasons, answer any alert messages that this application might return, and send the message. If you distribute the shared PDF after the review has started, any review comments that have been published up to that point will appear in the file, even if the recipient doesn’t have access to the comment server. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 158 User Guide See also “Save the PDF with comments” on page 166 Start an email-based review When you start an email-based review, you send out a tracked copy of the PDF, enabling you to easily merge comments that you receive. (Form fields in a PDF aren’t fillable during the review.) Start the review Before you start an email-based review, make sure that your email application is configured to work with Acrobat. (See “Select an email application for reviews” on page 156.) 1 Start the email-based review wizard by using any of these methods: • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar and choose Attach For Email Review. • Choose Comments > Attach For Email Review. You can also start an email-based review directly from other applications that use PDFMaker, such as Microsoft Word. Choose Adobe PDF > Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review, or click the Convert To Adobe PDF And Send For Review button. For Office 2007 applications, choose Acrobat > Create And Send For Review. 2 If prompted, enter information in the Identity Setup dialog box. 3 Specify a PDF if it isn’t already open, and then click Next. The PDF that you specify becomes the master file. You’ll merge comments you receive from reviewers into this file. 4 Specify reviewers by typing their email addresses, or by clicking Address Book and selecting email addresses from a Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook address book. Insert a semicolon or return between each address. 5 To specify that persons other than yourself receive the review comments, click Customize Review Options and type the email addresses of those individuals in the Request That Reviewers Return Their Comments To box. Click OK. The option to enable commenting for Reader users is selected, by default. 6 Click Next to preview the email invitation, and then click Send Invitation. If your email application doesn’t let you send email automatically for security reasons, answer any alert messages that this application might return, and send the message. A copy of the PDF is sent to the reviewers as an attachment. When reviewers open this file attachment, Acrobat presents commenting tools and a PDF that provides instructions. Merge comments After you receive comments from reviewers, you can merge the comments into the master PDF so that they’re in one location. 1 After a reviewer sends you comments, open the attached file in your email application. If the email application can’t find the original version of the PDF, it prompts you to browse for it. Note: If you didn’t initiate the review and you receive comments that you want to forward to the initiator, merge these comments into your copy of the PDF and then send them (see “Send comments in email” on page 164). If you’ve already sent your comments, the initiator will receive only new comments. Merged comments retain the original author name. 2 If you initiated the review, the Merge Comments dialog box appears. Select one of the following options: Ye s Opens the master copy of the PDF and merges all comments into it. After comments are merged, save the master PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 159 User Guide No, Open This Copy Only Opens the reviewer’s copy of the PDF with comments. If you select this option, you can still merge comments by choosing Comments > Merge Comments Onto Master PDF. Cancel Closes the reviewer’s PDF that contains comments. You can hide comments that you don’t want to merge by using the Sort menu in the Comments list. Save and reopen the PDF, and then select Yes in the Merge PDF dialog box. Start a browser-based review When you initiate a browser-based review, a PDF is uploaded to a server, and reviewers receive an email message with a setup file in Forms Data Format (FDF). When reviewers click this file, the PDF opens in the default web browser and review settings are configured to enable comments to be uploaded to the remote server. Uploaded comments are stored as an FDF file in the comments repository, an online location that is accessible to all reviewers. You can set up the comments repository on the same or a different server as the uploaded PDF. Note: Add comments to the PDF after you upload it to the server. If you add comments to the PDF before you upload it to the server, the comments are embedded in the PDF, and you can’t edit them later. 1 Specify the comments repository in the Reviewing preferences. (See “Specify a server for comments” on page 156.) 2 Start the setup wizard by choosing Comments > Upload For Browser Review. 3 If you’re prompted to enter information in the Identity Setup dialog box, do so. 4 Specify the PDF to upload, and then click Next. 5 Select a server, using either of these methods: • Type the path for the server location in the text box, and click Next. • Click Browse (Windows) or Choose (Mac OS) to select a network folder, click Save, and click Next. You can upload the PDF to a WebDAV server using a web address (such as http://server/folder), or to a network folder using a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) address (such as \\server\folder). 6 In the Invite Reviewers box, specify reviewers by typing their email addresses, or by selecting email addresses from a Lotus Notes or Microsoft Outlook address book. Insert a semicolon or return between each address. Click Next. 7 Edit the invitation message as necessary, and then click Send Invitation. 8 If your email application doesn’t let you send email automatically for security reasons, make the email application active, answer any alert messages that this application might return, and send the message. 9 To make sure that the setup is correct, add a comment to the document, and then click the Send And Receive Comments button in the Comment & Markup toolbar. If your comments aren’t uploaded to the server, your Reviewing preferences settings are likely incorrect. Contact your network administrator for assistance. See also “Save the PDF with comments” on page 166 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 160 User Guide Invite additional reviewers If you’re the review initiator, you can invite others to participate in the review. If you’re a reviewer and want other people to participate, ask the review initiator to invite them. That way, the initiator can automatically track all partic­ ipants and receive notification when their comments are received. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Comments > Invite Additional Reviewers. • Choose Comments > Review Tracker, select the PDF, and then click Add Reviewers on the right. 2 Specify the email addresses of the reviewers to be added, change the message as needed, and then send the message. Additional reviewers appear with other participants in the right pane of the Review Tracker. Send a message During a review, you may want to contact other reviewers or send them a reminder of their approaching deadline. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Comments > Send Review Reminder. • Choose Comments > Review Tracker, select the PDF, and click Email All Reviewers. 2 In the email message, make changes as needed to the To and Subject boxes or in the body of the email message, and then click Send. Meetings Start a meeting From Acrobat, you can start a meeting to share your desktop and review PDF documents. Adobe Acrobat Connect is a personal web-conference tool that you can access from Acrobat to conduct real-time meetings on your desktop. Attendees join the meeting by logging into a web-based meeting space from their own computers. You must have an Acrobat Connect account to start and attend meetings. You can subscribe or set up a trial account by clicking the Start Meeting button in Acrobat to get started. Note: Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages. 1 To start a meeting, do one of the following: • Click the Start Meeting button. • Choose File > Start Meeting. 2 In the dialog box that appears, do one of the following: • If you have an account, click Log In. Type the Meeting URL, login, and password for your Acrobat Connect account, and then click Log In. Your Acrobat Connect account uses your Adobe ID (your email address) for your login. Note: You can also use Meeting URLs for Macromedia Breeze® and Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro accounts. These accounts require a login that is different than your Adobe ID. • If you don’t have an account, click Create Trial Account, and follow the on-screen directions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 161 User Guide 3 Do one of the following: • To invite participants to a meeting, click Send An E-mail Invitation, type the email addresses of those you want to invite, and then click Send. • To share the document that’s displayed on your screen, click Share My Screen. As participants join the meeting, their names appear in the Attendee List. 4 Do any of the following: • Type a message in the Chat pod, select who to send the message to, and click the Send Message button. • Take notes in the Notes pod and send them out after the meeting. • If you want another attendee to share his or her desktop, select that person’s name in the Attendee List, click the Set User Role button, and choose Set As Presenter. Attend a meeting If you don’t have an Acrobat Connect account, you can join a meeting as a guest. Note: Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages. 1 In the email invitation, click the URL for the meeting or type the Meeting URL in the address box of a browser. 2 Type the login and password for your Acrobat Connect account, or log in as a guest. 3 In the Acrobat Connect meeting, do any of the following: • To send a message, type it in the Chat pod, select who to send it to, and click the Send Message button. • To clear the Chat pod or change the font size, click the Pod Options button and choose an option. • To take notes, type them in the Note pod. Acrobat Connect preferences When you start an Acrobat Connect meeting, the Meeting URL and login you provide are stored in the Acrobat Connect preferences. To change your Acrobat Connect account settings, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Meeting on the left. The login for your Acrobat Connect account is your Adobe ID. To change your login, create a new Adobe ID on the Adobe website. Note: Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages. Participating in a PDF review Review a PDF When you receive an email invitation to a PDF review, the invitation typically includes the PDF as an attachment or provides a URL to the PDF. Alternatively, you may receive a Forms Data Format (FDF) attachment. When opened, an FDF file configures your review settings and opens the PDF in a web browser. PDFs in a review have special features, including commenting tools and a document message bar with instructions. Use the commenting tools to add comments to the PDF and then submit them, either by publishing comments to a comment server where others can see them, or by sending comments as an email attachment to the review initiator. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 162 User Guide Note: If you receive a PDF that doesn’t include special features, add your comments using tools from the Comment & Markup toolbar, save the PDF, and then send it back. (See “Commenting and markup tools overview” on page 168.) To review the PDF later, reopen it from the Review Tracker to ensure that your comments are added to the tracked copy of the PDF, and that the initiator receives your comments. If you don’t send or publish your comments right away, save the PDF before you close it to avoid losing your comments. Until the initiator receives your comments, they appear only in your local copy of the PDF and aren’t visible to other reviewers. If you review a PDF using a version earlier than Acrobat 8 or Reader 8, some features may not be available. See also “Reply to comments” on page 182 “Rejoin a review” on page 165 “Save the PDF with comments” on page 166 Join a review 1 In your email application, open the PDF by double-clicking the attachment (PDF or FDF) or URL. 2 Do one or more of the following, if prompted: • Click Connect in the Join Shared Review dialog box. • Click OK in the Welcome To Shared Review window. This window tells you who’s invited to the review and if they’ve made any comments, and it tells where the comment server is located. • Type your login name and password for the comment server. If you don’t have access to the comment server, click Work Offline, or click Save And Work Offline in the Comment & Markup toolbar. • Type your name, email address, company name, and job title, if prompted. 3 Save the file to a location that you can find easily, such as the desktop. 4 Add comments to the PDF using tools in the Comment & Markup toolbar. If you need to delete a comment, select it and press Delete. (You can delete only comments that you made.) 5 Do all of the following that apply: • If you’re notified that new comments from other reviewers are available, click the message. New comments appear in the PDF. • If you want to find out if new comments are available from other reviewers, click the Check For New Comments button . 6 Submit your comments by doing one of the following: • Click Publish Comments in the document message bar. • Click Send Comments or Send And Receive Comments in the Comment & Markup toolbar. • Choose Comments > Send Comments To Review Initiator. When you send comments, a PDF containing your comments is sent as an email attachment to the review initiator. When you publish comments, your comments are saved to the comment server. Options in the document message bar The options that are available in the document message bar depend on how the initiator set up the review and whether you can access the comment server. Similar options may also appear in the Comment & Markup toolbar. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 163 User Guide For information about the different types of reviews, see “Choosing a review type” on page 153. Check For New Comments Prompts Acrobat to synchronize comments between the comment server and the local hard drive. If you don’t click this button, Acrobat checks for new comments at the intervals specified in the Reviewing preferences. This button is available only when new comments are published to the server in a shared review. Merge Comments Copies the comments in the open PDF to your copy. This option is available only for PDFs you receive from reviewers in email-based reviews. Publish Comments Uploads your new comments to the comment server. This option is available only in shared reviews. Send Comments Creates an email message addressed to the review initiator that contains the commented PDF as an attachment. This option is always available in email-based reviews, and it appears in shared reviews only after an attempt to connecting to the comment server has failed. Status Displays the connected state of the comment server. If clicked, a menu with additional options appears. Review Tracker opens the Review Tracker. Save As Archive Copy saves a copy of the PDF that is no longer connected to the review. Work Offline saves a copy of the PDF that is temporarily disconnected from the review. Reconnect To Server appears only in the PDF you created by choosing Work Offline. Check for newly published comments When you participate in a shared review, Acrobat synchronizes published comments on your local drive with those on the comment server, and then notifies you when new comments are available. Notifications appear as bezel-style messages in the open PDF. In Windows, notifications also appear as balloon-style messages in the notification area (system tray). Because synchronization continues after the PDF is closed, you’ll continue to receive notifications. Messages in the notification area inform you when new reviewers join the review, when updates occur (multiple reviews), and when synchronization attempts fail. They also inform you when a new broadcast subscription is added in the Review Tracker. You can change how often messages appear and how often comments are synchronized, and you can manually trigger the synchronization process. View new comments To view new comments, you must be able to connect to the network where the comment server is located. If you can’t connect, check the server status in the Review Tracker to determine the cause of the problem. (See “Check server status” on page 167.) ? Do one of the following: • Click the Check For New Comments button in the document message bar. • Choose Comments > Check For New Comments. • Click the message in the notification area (Windows). Change frequency of synchronization and notifications 1 Open the Reviewing preferences: • Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then click Reviewing on the left. • In Windows, right-click the notification icon in the notification area, and choose Reviewing Preferences. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 164 User Guide 2 Move the sliders to change the following settings: Check For New Comments The top slider specifies (in minutes) how often comments are synchronized when a shared PDF is open. The bottom slider specifies (in hours, weeks, days, or months) how often comments are synchronized when a shared PDF is closed. Show Review Tracker Alerts Specifies how often alert messages appear. Disable notifications ? Do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), click Reviewing on the left, move the slider for Show Review Tracker Alerts to the far left until the value Never appears, and then click OK. • In Windows, right-click the notification icon in the notification area. If a check mark appears next to Show Review Notifications, select that option so a check mark no longer appears. Send comments in email If you review a PDF offline or outside of a firewall, or if you lose your connection to the comment server, you may need to send your comments in an email message. ? Do one of the following: • Click the Email button in the toolbar. Type the initiator’s email address in the To text box, type the message, and click Send. • Choose File > Attach To Email, type the initiator’s email address, and click Send. • Click the Send Comments button in the Comments & Markups toolbar, type the address for the initiator in the To text box, and click Send. Note:If the PDF exceeds the 5 MB file-size limit, you’re prompted to send your comments in a smaller Forms Data Format (FDF) file, which the initiator can import. To adjust the limit, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Prefer­ ences (Mac OS), select Reviewing, and enter the new value for Send Comments As FDF For Files Greater Than [#] MB. Publish comments from other reviewers When you participate in a review, you may receive comments from other reviewers. If a reviewer can’t access the comment server, they may send you their comments. If you solicited feedback from individuals who weren’t initially invited to the review, they may return a copy of the review PDF to you with their comments. By taking ownership of the comments, you can share them with everyone in the review. Note: If you publish comments from a reviewer who later gains access to the comments server, those comments may appear in the PDF in duplicate. 1 Open the PDF that contains comments. 2 Do one of the following: • Click OK when asked if you want to publish comments for this reviewer. The published comments appear in the PDF. Your name appears in the title bar and the author’s name appears in the body of the comments, preceded by the text “On behalf of.” • Click Yes when asked if you want to merge comments, or click Merge Comments in the document message bar and then click Send Comments. Add email addresses for other reviewers, as needed, and then click Send. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 165 User Guide • Choose Comments > Import Comments, and then click Send Comments. Add email addresses for other reviewers, as needed, and then click Send. Only new or edited comments are published or sent. Rejoin a review Use the Review Tracker to reopen PDFs in an active review. If you received a PDF attachment with an email message and didn’t save it the first time you opened it, reopen the PDF in your email application. Only PDFs that you’ve saved appear in the Review Tracker. 1 Choose Comments > Review Tracker. 2 In the Review Tracker, double-click the PDF. In shared reviews, the Welcome Back To Shared Review window shows the number of new comments that were published since the last time you opened the PDF. Click OK to close this window. 3 Add new comments or edit existing comments. If you need to delete a comment, select it, and press Delete. Deleted comments are removed from the online PDF the next time comments are synchronized or the browser window is refreshed. If you delete comments that you sent in an earlier email message, they aren’t deleted in the initiator’s document. 4 Submit your new comments by doing one of the following: • Click Publish Comments in the document message bar. • Click Send Comments or Send And Receive Comments in the Comment & Markup toolbar. Only new or edited comments are published or sent. See also “Save the PDF with comments” on page 166 Tracking PDF reviews Review Tracker overview You can use the Review Tracker to manage your document reviews. From this window, you can see who’s joined a shared review and how many comments they’ve published. You can also rejoin a review, access comment servers used in reviews, and email participants. The Review Tracker includes links to all PDF documents in managed reviews. Each link lists the date and time the PDF was sent and the list of invited reviewers. Links to shared PDFs provide additional information, including the deadline (if set) and the number of comments submitted per reviewer. Deleting a link in the Review Tracker doesn’t delete the PDF file. In addition to the Review Tracker panel, the Review Tracker includes two other panels where you can manage forms and web broadcast subscriptions (known as RSS feeds). You can access these panels by clicking the Forms button or the Subscriptions button on the left side of the window. A B C ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 166 User Guide Review Tracker A. Review Tracker icon B. Reviews you initiated or received C. Information for the selected review Open the Review Tracker ? Do one of the following: • Choose Comments > Review Tracker. • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar, and choose Review Tracker. If you’re participating in a shared review, you can open the Review Tracker by clicking the Status button menu in the document message bar of the shared PDF. Track reviewed PDFs 1 Choose Comments > Review Tracker. 2 Expand the appropriate folder: Reviews I’ve Sent Lists PDFs in reviews that you initiated. Reviews I’ve Joined Contains PDFs in reviews that you’ve received. PDFs appear in this list only after you open them. Note: PDFs listed in bold contain comments that you haven’t yet read. 3 Select a PDF. Information specific to the selected PDF review appears on the right. Shared reviews open a summary page that lists reviewers who have joined the review and the number of new comments. Save the PDF with comments You can save a copy of the review PDF that contains all the comments that reviewers have published or that you’ve imported (merged). If the PDF is in a shared review, you can save an archive copy. The copy is no longer connected to the shared review, and you can edit both content and comments in it. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 167 User Guide If you want to create a copy of a shared PDF to distribute to others, use the Save As command. The resulting file will include all comments that were published up to that point, and it can be moved, copied, or renamed without affecting its connection to the review or to the comment server. ? To save a copy of a review PDF with all the comments, open the file, and then do one of the following: • For a shared review, choose File > Save As Archive Copy, or click the Status button in the document message bar and choose Save As Archive Copy. • For an email-based review, choose File > Save As to save a new copy of the PDF. This most recently saved version is now the tracked PDF. The old version is the archive copy. • For a browser-based review, use the Save And Work Offline button in the Comment & Review toolbar to save a copy of the PDF with all the comments to the local hard drive. Check server status Check the server status in a shared PDF or in the Review Tracker to determine if you can connect to the comment server. Check status in a shared PDF The Status button in the document message bar indicates whether the last attempt to connect to the comment server was successful. 1 Open the shared PDF. 2 In the upper-right corner of the document, the Status button displays either the last attempt successful icon , the last attempt unsuccessful icon , or the attempting to connect icon . Check status in the Review Tracker 1 Choose Comments > Review Tracker. 2 On the left, click the plus sign (+) next to Review Servers to expand the list. The green icon next to the server name indicates that the last synchronization attempt was successful. The red icon indicates that the last synchronization attempt was unsuccessful. The server may be disconnected from the network, it may have problems writing data to the disk, or it may have some other problem. Contact your network administrator for help. Update your profile Your comments identify you as the author by displaying your name—the name you provided when you joined or started a review, or your system login. You can change the author name and other profile information at any time. If you do, your updated profile appears only in new comments; existing comments aren’t affected. Update your review profile You can also update your review profile from the Welcome Back To Review window that appears when you rejoin a shared review. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 To change your author name, select Commenting from the list on the left, and deselect Always Use Log-In Name For Author Name. 3 Select Identity from the list on the left. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 168 User Guide 4 Edit your profile, making sure to include the email address that you’ll use for reviews. Click OK. Update your profile for a shared review 1 Open the shared PDF. 2 In the Welcome screen that appears, click the Edit button for Reviewer Profile. 3 Edit your profile, making sure to include a valid email address, and click OK. If you change the name in your profile, it will appear twice—in the list of invited participants, and in the list of uninvited participants. Subscribe to web broadcast services You can use the Review Tracker as a news reader by subscribing to web content that uses the RSS (Really Simple Syndication) format, such as news feeds or music channels. RSS format is compatible with XML and RDF formats. 1 Do one of the following: • Click the Subscriptions button on the left side of the Review Tracker. Click the Subscribe button, enter a web address in the URL box, and then click OK. • Click the link for an RSS service. 2 If a security warning prompts you to approve the link, click OK. Commenting Commenting and markup tools overview You use commenting and markup tools (View > Toolbars > Comment & Markup) to add comments. Comments are notes and drawings that communicate ideas or provide feedback for PDFs. You can type a text message using the Sticky Note tool, or you can use a drawing tool to add a line, circle, or other shape and then type a message in the associated pop-up note. Text-editing tools let you add editing marks to indicate changes you want in the source document. Most commenting and markup tools don’t appear in the toolbar until you add them. Most comments include two parts: the icon, or markup, that appears on the page, and the text message that appears in a pop-up note when you click or double-click the icon or place the pointer over the icon. After you add a comment, it stays selected until you click elsewhere on the page. A selected comment is highlighted by a blue halo to help you find the markup on the page. A wireframe with selection handles appears so you can adjust the size and shape. You can add tags to your comments so that readers with motion or vision limitations can read them using assistive technologies. A B C D E F G H I J K L M Comment & Markup toolbar A. Sticky Note tool B. Text Edits tool C. Stamp tool and menu D. Highlight Text tool E. Callout tool F. Text Box tool G. Cloud tool H. Arrow tool I. Line tool J. Rectangle tool K. Oval tool L. Pencil tool M. Show menu ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 169 User Guide A B C D Types of comments in a PDF A. Stamp B. Text edit C. Comment rollover (tool tip) D. Sticky note See also “Show and hide toolbar elements” on page 22 “Add tags to comments” on page 318 “Comment on 3D designs” on page 413 Show the Comment & Markup toolbar The Comment & Markup toolbar doesn’t appear by default, except when you open a PDF in a managed review workflow. ? Do one of the following: • Choose View > Toolbars > Comment & Markup. • Choose Comments > Show Comment & Markup Toolbar. • Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Show Comment & Markup Toolbar. • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar, and choose Show Comment & Markup Toolbar. To add or remove tools for this toolbar, right-click/Control-click the toolbar, and select the tool. Or, choose Tools > Customize Toolbars. Select a commenting or markup tool ? Do one of the following: • Select a tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. • Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > [tool]. • Choose Comments > Comment & Markup Tools > [tool]. Note: After you make an initial comment, the tool changes back to the Select tool so that you can move, resize, or edit your comment. (The Pencil, Highlight Text, and Line tools stay selected.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 170 User Guide Keep a commenting tool selected You can add multiple comments without reselecting the tool. 1 Select the tool you want to use (but don’t use it yet). 2 Choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar. 3 Select Keep Tool Selected. Commenting preferences Commenting preferences affect both the appearance of and the way you view comments and markups in PDFs. Note: Because comments can be placed anywhere within the document frame, you may need to scroll or zoom out to see comments that are located off the page. To set commenting preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then select Commenting on the left side. Font, Font Size In Windows, you can determine the font and the size of text in pop-up notes. In Mac OS, you can select only Large, Medium, or Small settings for the font. This setting applies to all new and existing comments. Pop-up Opacity Determines the opacity of comment pop-up notes in values from 1-100. When a pop-up note is open but not selected, an opacity value of 100 makes the note opaque, while lower values make it more transparent. Enable Text Indicators And Tooltips Shows a tool tip containing the author name, comment status, and two lines of the text when you place the pointer over a comment that includes a pop-up note. Selected by default. Print Notes And Pop-ups Specifies that pop-up notes associated with comments, and icons for note, audio, and file attachments, print exactly as they appear on the page. Instead of selecting this option, you can print comment text in various layouts by choosing File > Print, and clicking Summarize Comments. Show Lines Connecting Comment Markups To Their Pop-ups On Mouse Rollover When you place the pointer over a comment markup (such as a highlight or a note icon), the shaded connector line between the comment and the open pop-up note appears. Selected by default. Ensure That Pop-ups Are Visible As The Document Is Scrolled As you scroll a PDF, the pop-up notes on a given page shift to stay in view within the document pane. Selected by default. Automatically Open Comment Pop-ups For Comments Other Than Notes A pop-up note appears when you create a new comment using a drawing tool, the Stamp tool, or the Pencil tool. Hide Comment Pop-ups When Comments List Is Open Helps reduce screen clutter when a page includes many comments. Selected by default. Automatically Open Pop-ups On Mouse Rollover When you place the pointer over a comment of any type, including drawing markups and stamps, the pop-up note opens. Always Use Log-in Name For Author Name Determines which name appears in the pop-up note you create. If this option is selected, the Login Name in the Identity panel of the Preferences dialog box is used. If this option isn’t selected, the default name you specify for Author in a comment properties dialog box is used. Selected by default. Create New Pop-ups Aligned To The Edge Of The Document Aligns pop-up notes with the right side of the document window, regardless of where the comment markup (such as a note icon or highlighting comment) is added. If this option is deselected, the pop-up note appears next to the comment markup. Selected by default. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 171 User Guide Copy Encircled Text Into Drawing Comment Pop-Ups Copies text that you circle using the drawing tools in the pop­ up note associated with the drawing markup. Copy Selected Text Into Highlight, Cross-Out, And Underline Comment Pop-ups Copies selected text to the pop-up note associated with text editing comments, such as those created by the Highlight Text tool. Change the look of your comments You can change the color and appearance of comments or markups before or after you create them. You can set the new look as the default appearance for that tool. Note: If you want to change how your name appears in comments, open the Commenting preferences—choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and choose Commenting on the left—and deselect Always Use Log-in Name For Author Name in the Commenting panel of the Preferences dialog box. A B Properties toolbar A. With note icon selected B. With pop-up text selected Change a comment’s look and set it as the default 1 After you create a comment, do one of the following: • Choose Properties from the Options menu of the pop-up note. • Right-click/Control-click the markup, and then choose Properties. 2 In the Properties dialog box, do any of the following, and then click Close: • Click the Appearance tab to change such options as the color and type of icon used. The type of comment selected determines which options are available. • Click the General tab to change the author’s name and subject of the comment. • Click the Review History tab to see the history of changes people have made to the status of a comment during a review. • Select Locked at the bottom of the Properties dialog box to prevent the comment from being edited or deleted. • Select Make Current Properties Default at the bottom of the Properties dialog box to apply these properties to all subsequent comments of this type that you make. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 172 User Guide Set the default look for a tool 1 In the Comment & Markup toolbar, right-click/Control-click the tool you want to use, and choose Tool Default Properties. Note: If the tool you want doesn’t appear in the Comment & Markup toolbar, right-click/Control-click the toolbar, and select the tool. 2 Set the properties as desired, and click OK. All comments you create using this tool will display the properties you set. Existing comments aren’t affected, nor is the appearance of text in pop-up notes. Add a sticky note The most common type of comment is the sticky note. A sticky note has a note icon that appears on the page and a pop-up note for your text message. You can add a sticky note anywhere on the page or in the document area. A B C D E Use the Sticky Note tool to add a text message in a pop-up note. A. Comment & Markup toolbar B. Sticky Note tool C. Close button D. Options menu E. Text message Add a sticky note comment 1 Do one of the following: • Select the Sticky Note tool in the Comment & Markup toolbar, and either click where you want to place the note, or drag to create a custom-sized note. • Choose Comments > Add Sticky Note. 2 Type text in the pop-up note. You can also use the Select tool to copy and paste text from a PDF into the note. Note: If you close the pop-up note, your text remains. Edit a sticky note comment 1 Click or double-click the note icon. 2 Make changes, as needed: • To resize the pop-up note, drag the lower-left or lower-right corner. • To change the text formatting, choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar, select the text, and then select the property you want in the toolbar. Or, select the text, right-click/Control-click, and choose a text style option. Use the Commenting panel in the Preferences dialog box to change the font size, default pop-up behavior, and other settings for creating and viewing comments. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 173 User Guide When you’re finished, click the minimize button in the upper-right corner of the pop-up note, or click outside the pop-up note. Delete a sticky note 1 Select the Sticky Note tool , the Hand tool , or the Select tool. 2 Select the note icon, and press Delete. Alternatively, double-click the note icon and choose Delete from the Options menu of the pop-up note. Mark up text with edits You can use text edit comments in a PDF to indicate where text should be edited in the source file. Text edit comments do not change the actual text in the PDF. Instead, they indicate which text should be deleted, inserted, or replaced in the source file from which the PDF was created. You can use the Select tool or the Text Edits tool to add most types of text edits. Shortly after you click or select text with the Text Edits tool, an icon appears. If you right-click this icon, a menu of text editing options appears. In Windows, you can export text edits directly to the Microsoft Word document that the PDF is based on to revise the source document. To use this feature, you must use PDFMaker in Word to create the PDF. Before you export your text edits, make sure that insertion comments use the exact text, including spaces and paragraph returns, that you want to add. If you add extra instructional words (such as “Add the following:”), these words will have to be deleted manually from the Word document. In Windows, you can export text edit comments directly to an Autodesk AutoCAD document that the PDF is based on to incorporate your edits. To use this feature, you must use PDFMaker in AutoCAD to create the PDF. A B Replace Text option A. Selected text is struck out. B. New text is added to a linked pop-up note. See also “Export comments to Word (Windows)” on page 189 “Export comments to AutoCAD (Windows)” on page 190 Replace text 1 Use the Select tool, or select the Text Edits tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. If you don’t want the Indicating Text Edits dialog box to appear each time you select the Text Edits tool, select Don’t Show Again in the dialog box, and then click OK. 2 Select the text you want to replace. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 174 User Guide 3 Press Enter or Return, or choose Replace Text from the menu that appears, and then do one of the following: • Type the text to be inserted or added. This text appears in a pop-up note. Any selected text is crossed out. The insertion caret appears. • To indicate that a new paragraph should be added, close the pop-up note without adding text. The paragraph insertion caret appears. Add a note to a text edit 1 Use the Select tool or the Text Edits tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. 2 Select Add Note At Cursor from the menu that appears. 3 Type your note in the pop-up note. Note: If you export your text edits to Microsoft Word, any text you add to the pop-up note that’s associated with a text edit is imported (into Word) with the text edit. Show inserted text 1 Select the Text Edits tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. 2 Click between the words or characters where you want to insert text. 3 Do any of the following: • Type the text you want to insert. • To indicate that a new paragraph should be added, press Enter or Return, and then close the pop-up note without adding text. The paragraph insertion caret appears. • To indicate that a space should be added, press the spacebar, and then close the pop-up note without adding text. The space insertion caret appears. You can also indicate text edits by using the Select tool to select text, right-click/Control-click the selected text, and then choose Replace Text (Comment). Delete inserted text 1 In the Comment & Markup toolbar, choose the Text Edits tool . 2 Select the text, and then press Backspace or Delete, or choose Cross-Out Text from the menu. Delete text markups If markup comments are stacked, delete the comments in the Comments list: Click the Comments button in the navigation pane to open the Comments list, select the comment, and press Delete. ? Do one of the following: • Select the markup and press Delete. • Right-click/Control-click the markup, such as the highlighting or cross-out, and then choose Delete. Highlight, cross out, or underline text You can use the Highlight Text tool, Cross-Out Text tool, and the Underline Text tool to add comments by themselves or in conjunction with notes. The Cross-Out Text tool and the Underline Text tool don’t appear in the Comment & Markup toolbar, by default. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 175 User Guide You can add a highlight with a note or you can cross out text by selecting the text using the Select tool or Text Edits tool, and then choosing that option from the menu that appears. However, if you’re marking up a lot of text, the specialized tools are faster and easier to use. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markups, and select the Highlight Text tool , the Cross-Out Text tool , or the Underline Text tool . Note: If you want to apply more than one comment using the Cross-Out Text tool or the Underline Text tool, choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar, and select Keep Tool Selected in the Properties toolbar after you select the tool. The Highlight Text tool stays selected after you make the first comment. 2 Drag from the beginning of the text you want to mark up. Ctrl-drag (Windows) or Option-drag (Mac OS) to mark up a rectangular area of text. This is especially useful when marking up text in a column. 3 (Optional) To add a note, double-click the markup to add text in a pop-up note. Stamp a document You apply a stamp to a PDF in much the same way you apply a rubber stamp to a paper document. You can choose from a list of predefined stamps, or you can create your own stamps. Dynamic stamps obtain information from your system and from the Identity panel of the Preferences dialog box, allowing you to indicate name, date, and time infor­ mation on the stamp. The Stamp tool appears in the Comment & Markup toolbar, by default. A B C D Stamp tool categories A. Dynamic stamp B. Sign Here stamp C. Standard Business stamp D. Custom stamp Open the Stamps palette ? Do one of the following: • Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Show Stamps Palette. • In the Comment & Markup toolbar, click the arrow next to the Stamp tool and choose Show Stamps Palette. Apply a stamp 1 Select a stamp by doing one of the following: • Click the Stamp tool. The mostly recently used stamp is selected. • In the Stamps Palette, choose a category from the menu, and then select a stamp. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 176 User Guide 2 Click the document page where you want to place the stamp, or drag a rectangle to define the size and placement of the stamp. 3 If you haven’t provided a name in the Identity preferences, the Identity Setup dialog box prompts you to do so. Change a stamp’s location or appearance ? Using the Select tool or the Hand tool, do any of the following: • To move a stamp, drag it to a new location. • To resize a stamp, click it, and then drag a corner handle. • To rotate a stamp, click it, move the pointer over the handle at the top of the stamp, and drag when the rotate stamp icon appears. • To delete a stamp, right-click/Control-click the stamp and choose Delete. • To change the stamp’s opacity or the color of its pop-up note, right-click/Control-click the stamp, and choose Properties. In the Appearance tab, set the opacity or color. Move a stamp to the favorites list 1 Using the Select tool or the Hand tool, select a stamp markup on the page. 2 In the Comment & Markup toolbar, click the Stamp tool and choose Favorites > Add Current Stamp To Favorites. Create a custom stamp You can create custom stamps from a number of different formats, including (but not limited to) PDF, JPEG, bitmap, Adobe® Illustrator® (AI), Adobe® Photoshop® (PSD), and Autodesk AutoCAD (DWT, DWG) files. Note: To add an image to a PDF one time only, simply paste the image into the document. Pasted images have the same characteristics as other stamp comments; each includes a pop-up note and editable properties. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Show Stamps Palette. 2 Click Import, select the file you want to use, and then click Select. 3 If the file has more than one page, scroll to the page you want, and then click OK. 4 Choose a category from the menu or type a new category name, name the custom stamp, and then click OK. Change the name or category for a custom stamp 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Show Stamps Palette. 2 Choose the stamp category, right-click/Control-click the stamp, and choose Edit. 3 Edit the category or name of the stamp, or replace the image, and then click OK. Delete a custom stamp You can delete only the custom stamps that you created, not the predefined stamps. When you delete a stamp, the stamp is removed from the Stamp tool menu, but the stamp file isn’t deleted. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Show Stamps Palette. 2 Choose the stamp category from the menu, right-click/Control-click the custom stamp, and choose Delete. 3 If you haven’t provided a name in the Identity preferences, the Identity Setup dialog box prompts you to do so. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 177 User Guide Delete a custom stamp category 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Manage Stamps. 2 Select the category you want to delete, and then press Delete. Note: Deleting all stamps in a custom stamp category deletes the custom stamp category. Add a line, arrow, or shape When selecting a drawing tool, consider the effect you want. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup, and select a drawing tool: • The Rectangle tool , the Oval tool , the Arrow tool , and the Line tool let you create simple shapes. • The Cloud tool and Polygon tool create closed shapes with multiple segments. The Polygon Line tool creates open shapes with multiple segments. • The Pencil tool creates free-form drawings, and the Pencil Eraser tool removes the pencil markups. To specify the line width, color, and other properties before you draw, right-click/Control-click the drawing tool, choose Properties, and set the desired options in the Properties dialog box. 2 Draw in the PDF: • To create a cloud or polygon shape, click to create the start point, move the pointer, and click to create each segment. To finish drawing the shape, click the start point, or right-click/Control-click and choose Complete from the menu. Double-click to end a polygon line. • To draw a line, arrow, or rectangle, either drag across the area where you want the markup to appear, or click twice: once to create the start point and once to create the end point. • To draw a square or circle, or to draw a line that’s horizontal, vertical, or at a 45° angle, press Shift while you draw. • To draw free-form lines using the Pencil tool , drag where you want to begin drawing. You can release the mouse button, move the pointer to a new location, and continue drawing. To erase parts of the drawing, select the Pencil Eraser tool and drag across the areas of the drawing that you want to remove. 3 To edit or resize the markup, select it and drag one of the handles to make your adjustments. 4 To add a pop-up note to the markup, select the Hand tool, and double-click the markup. 5 (Optional) Click the close button in the pop-up note. A note icon appears to the right of the markup to indicate the presence of text in the pop-up note. Note: To delete a drawing markup, select it and press Delete. Group and ungroup markups You can group two or more markups so that your comments function as a single comment. You might group markups temporarily to move them to a new location or to modify their properties rather than editing each one individually. Grouping also helps to distinguish your markups from other reviewers’ markups in a document review. Note: You cannot group text edit markups. Group markups 1 Using the Select tool or the Hand tool, select a markup. 2 Ctrl-click/Command-click to select the markups you want to group. 3 Right-click/Control-click within the selection, and choose Group. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 178 User Guide Ungroup markups ? Right-click/Control-click the grouped selection, and choose Ungroup. Add comments in a text box or callout You can use the Text Box tool to create a box that contains text. You can position it anywhere on the page and adjust it to any size. A text box remains visible on the document page; it doesn’t close like a pop-up note. Another way to add a text box is simply to paste copied text into the PDF. Text font and size are based on the system default settings. Note: You can add comments to Japanese, Chinese, and Korean text with the Text Box tool, but you must have the Asianlanguage resource files installed. Text boxes allow for horizontal text only. You can use the Callout tool to create a callout text box. Callout text boxes are especially useful when you want to single out—but not obscure—a particular area of a document. Callout text boxes have three parts: a text box, a knee line, and an end-point line. You can resize each part by dragging a handle. The knee line can be resized in one direction only; horizontal knee lines can be resized horizontally only; vertical knee lines can be resized vertically only. The text box expands vertically as you type so that all text remains visible. You can move the text box bar itself or together with the end-point line. The text box moves around a stationary anchor point—the arrow on the end-point line—which is created when you first click in the PDF. You can modify the color and appearance of the text box and add arrows or leaders to the end-point line. Add a text box 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Text Box Tool . 2 Click in the PDF. 3 Choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar, and set the color, alignment, and font attributes for the text. 4 Type the text. Text wraps automatically when it reaches the right edge of the box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 179 User Guide l . 5 (Optional) To make further changes to the text box: • Using the Select tool or the Text Box tool, click an edge of the text box to select it, and then drag a corner to resize it. Use the Properties toolbar to change the border and fill options. • Double-click the text box to edit the text or change the text attributes. Drag across text to select it, and then select options from the Properties toolbar. 6 To delete the text box, right-click/Control-click the text box, and then choose Delete. You can also paste a block of text by selecting and copying the text in any application, selecting the Hand tool in Acrobat, and choosing Edit > Paste. Add a callout 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Callout too 2 Click once to set the location of the end point, and click again to set the location of the text box. 3 Choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar, and select the color, alignment, and font attributes for the text. 4 Type the text. Text wraps automatically when it reaches the right edge of the box. 5 (Optional) To make further changes to the text box: • To resize the callout, select it and drag any of the handles that appear. • To move the text box, click inside the box and drag it. • To move the entire callout, click either the end-point line or an edge of the text box, and drag it. • To change the color, opacity, or line characteristics, use the Select tool to right-click/Control-click the callout, choose Properties, and select the options you want. Add an audio comment You can use the Record Audio Comment tool to add a prerecorded WAV or AIFF file as a comment or to record and place an audio comment in a document. Audio attachments appear in the Comments list and can be played back on any platform. However, the appropriate hardware and software for playing audio files must be installed. The Record Audio Comment tool doesn’t not appear in the Comment & Markup toolbar by default. However, you can add it by choosing Tools > Customize Toolbars. See also “Change the look of your comments” on page 171 “Add movies or sounds to PDFs” on page 356 Add a prerecorded audio comment 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Record Audio Comment tool and then click in the PDF where you want to place the audio comment. 2 Click Browse (Windows) or Choose (Mac OS), and select the audio file you want to add. 3 (Optional) To hear the audio comment, click the Play button . When you’re finished, click Stop and then click OK. 4 Specify options in the Properties dialog box, and then click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 180 User Guide . Record an audio comment 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Record Audio Comment tool and then click in the PDF where you want to place the audio comment. 2 In the dialog box that appears, click the Record button and then speak into the microphone. When you’ve finished recording, click the Stop button , and then click OK. 3 Specify options in the Properties dialog box, and then click OK. Add comments in a file attachment Use the Attach File As Comment tool to embed a file at a selected location in a PDF, so that the reader can open it for viewing. By adding attachments as a comment, you can reference longer documents that can’t easily be pasted into a pop-up note or text box. If you move the PDF to a new location, the embedded file automatically goes with it. To view an attachment, the reader must have an application installed that can open the attachment. Important: Be sure to use the Attach A File As A Comment tool in the Comment & Markup toolbar when attaching files for a document review. Document-level file attachments that you attach using the paper clip icon (Attach A File tool) from the File toolbar aren’t tracked with other comments in a review workflow and may cause your attached comments to be lost. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Attach A File As A Comment Tool 2 Click in the PDF where you want to place the attachment. 3 Select the file that you want to attach, and then click Select. If you’re attaching a PDF, you can highlight areas of interest in the file using comments. 4 In the Properties dialog box, select the settings for the file icon that appears in the PDF, and then click Close. The comment attachment appears in the Attachments tab with a page number indicating its location. Note: To delete the attachment, right-click/Control-click the attached comment icon, and choose Delete. Paste images as comments You can use the Paste Clipboard Image As Stamp tool to add images to a PDF. You can copy most image formats from drawing and image-editing applications, such as Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator. If you want to add the image to PDFs repeatedly, create a custom stamp of the image. Note: The Paste Clipboard Image As Stamp tool isn’t available until you copy an image. 1 Copy an image by doing one of the following: • In Acrobat, choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Snapshot Tool , and select an image from a PDF. • In another application, select an image and choose Edit > Copy. 2 Open a PDF. 3 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup > Stamps > Paste Clipboard Image As Stamp Tool. 4 Click in the PDF where you want the image to appear. 5 Do any of the following: • To move the image, drag it. • To resize the image, select it and then drag one of its handles. Press the Shift key when resizing the image to maintain the original proportions. • To change the image properties, right-click/Control-click it and choose Properties. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 181 User Guide • To delete the image, right-click/Control-click it and choose Delete. See also “Copy images” on page 148 Managing comments View comments The Comments list displays all the comments in a PDF, and it provides a toolbar with common options, such as sorting, filtering, deleting, and replying to comments. The Comments button in the navigation pane opens the Comments list. Open the Comments list 1 Do one of the following: • Click the Comments button in the navigation pane. • Choose Comments > Show Comments List. • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar and choose Show Comments List. 2 Using the options at the top of the Comments list, do any of the following: • Expand or collapse the comments. Click Expand All or Collapse All in the Comments List toolbar. To expand or collapse individual comments, click the plus and minus signs next to the comment. • Browse through the comments. Click a comment in the list, or click the Next button or the Previous button to go to the next or previous comment. (These buttons are unavailable if no comment is selected.) The page on which the selected comment is located appears in the document pane, and the selected comment scrolls into view. To go to the page where another comment is located, simply click the comment in the list. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 182 User Guide Sort comments You can sort comments in the Comments list by author, page, type, date, color, checked state, or status by person. In a thread of replies, only the first message is sorted, and the reply messages are sorted in the same category as the first message in the thread. 1 Click the Comments button in the navigation pane. 2 Choose an option from the Sort By menu in the Comments list. Show or hide comments You can hide or show comments based on type, reviewer (author), status, or checked state. Hiding comments is also called filtering. Filtering affects the appearance of comments in both the document window and the Comments list. When you print or summarize comments, you can specify whether hidden comments are printed or summarized. When you hide a note comment that has been replied to, all other replies in the thread are hidden as well. Note: In an email-based review, hidden comments aren’t included when you send the comments to the initiator. ? From the Show menu in the Comments list, do one of the following: • To show all comments, choose Show All Comments. • To hide all comments, choose Hide All Comments. • To filter comments, choose the categories that you want to appear. For example, if you want only note comments that you haven’t checked to appear, choose Show By Type > Notes so that only the note comments appear, and then choose Show By Checked State > Unchecked so that only unchecked note comments appear. • To reverse a filter, choose the All command for hidden categories. For example, if you filtered comments so that only those by a certain reviewer appear, choose Show > Show By Reviewer > All Reviewers. Reply to comments Replies to comments are especially useful in shared and browser-based reviews, when participants can read each other’s comments. They can also be used by review initiators to let reviewers know how their suggestions are being implemented. When one or more reviewers reply to a comment, the set of replies is called a thread. All replies in a thread appear in the pop-up note and in the Comments list. Replies are indented below the original comment. The number of replies that a comment has received appears in a box when you place the pointer over the comment. A B C ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 183 User Guide Replies appear directly below the comment, in the pop-up note and in the Comments list. A. Reply heading B. Options menu C. Reply option in Options menu Reply in the pop-up note 1 Open the pop-up note for the comment. 2 Choose Reply from the Options menu. 3 Type your reply in the box that appears. Reply in the Comments list 1 Click the Comments button in the navigation pane. 2 Select a comment in the Comments list. 3 Click the Reply button . 4 Type your reply in the box that appears. Delete a reply If you delete a comment that’s been replied to, only the comment is deleted. Any replies remain in the PDF, but they are no longer part of a thread. These replies may be difficult to view in the PDF because they are stacked. You may want to view them in the Comments list. ? Do one of the following: • In the pop-up note, right-click/Control-click the reply and choose Delete This Reply. • Select the reply in the Comments list and then click the trash icon in the Comments List toolbar. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 184 User Guide Set a status or check mark Statuses and check marks are useful for keeping track of comments that you’ve read or that require further action. In Windows, you can use a status or a check mark to indicate which comments you want to export to a Word document. By setting the review status, you can show or hide a group of comments and let review participants know how you are going to handle the comment. Once the review status is set, you cannot remove the review status display from the comment in the Comments list, even if you change the review status to None. Check marks are for your personal use and do not appear when others view the PDF unless you change the status of comments. Set a status 1 Select the comment in the Comments list, click the Set Status button , and choose an option. The review status appears in the comment along with the name of who set the review status. If another reviewer sets the review status for that comment, both reviewers’ names and review statuses appear in the Comments list. 2 To view a comment’s history of changes, right-click/Control-click the note icon, markup, or title bar of a pop-up note, and then choose Properties. Click the Review History tab. Flag comments with a check mark ? In the Comments list, click the check box next to a comment so that the check mark icon appears. Print a comment summary Summarizing comments is a convenient way to get a synopsis of all the comments associated with a PDF. When you summarize comments, you can either create a new PDF with comments that you can print, or you can print the summary directly. The summary is neither associated with nor linked to the PDF that the comments are derived from. A B C D Page layout options for comment summaries A. Document and comments with connector lines on single page B. Document and comments with connector lines on separate pages C. Comments only D. Document and comments with sequence numbers ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 185 User Guide By default, Acrobat prints PDFs with any stamps that were applied. For the greatest control over how comments are printed, choose Comments > Print With Comments Summary. 1 Filter the comments to show only those you want in the summary. (In the Comments list, click the Show button and choose the categories of comments you want to show.) 2 For the greatest control over how comments are printed, choose Comments > Print With Comments Summary. Alternatively, to create a separate PDF of the comments, do one of the following: • Choose Comments > Summarize Comments. • Choose Summarize Comments from the Options menu in the Comments list. 3 In the Summarize Options dialog box, do the following, and then click OK: • Choose a layout for the document and comments. The layout determines available options. • Choose how to sort the comments. • Specify a page range and choose whether to include pages without comments. • Select whether you want all comments to appear in the summary or only the comments that currently appear. 4 Do one of the following: • Click Print Comment Summary, and click OK. (This option appears only if you chose the Print With Comments Summary command.) • Click Create PDF Comment Summary. To print or summarize comments directly without opening the Summarize Options dialog box, click the Print Comments button in the Comments List toolbar, and choose Print Comments Summary or Create PDF Of Comments Summary. Find a comment Locate a comment in the Comments list by searching for a particular word or phrase. 1 Click the Comments button in the navigation pane to display the Comments list. 2 Click the Search Comments button in the Comments List toolbar. 3 In the Search window, specify the word or phrase you want to search for, and then click Search Comments. See also “Search features overview” on page 373 Delete comments You cannot delete other reviewers’ comments in a shared review or a browser-based review, nor can you delete locked comments. If you add comments to a PDF before you upload it to a remote server for review, you can’t delete those comments. To delete all of the comments in a PDF, use the Examine Document feature. See “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 186 User Guide Delete a comment ? Do one of the following: • Select the comment and press Delete. • Right-click/Control-click the comment, and choose Delete. • In the Comments list, select the comments you want to delete, and then click the trash icon . Note: Before pressing the Delete key, make sure that the comment is selected. Unlock a comment 1 Right-click/Control-click the comment and choose Properties. 2 Deselect Locked, and then click Close. Spell-check comments You can spell-check the text you add in note comments and form fields. However, you cannot spell-check the text in the underlying PDF. Unrecognized words appear underlined after you type them. You can edit these words in context, or you can open the Check Spelling dialog box. The comment in the document window is updated with your changes. See also “Spell-check form entries” on page 203 Spell-check a single word 1 Open the pop-up note of a comment. 2 Select the word you want to check, and right-click/Control-click the selection. 3 Select the correct word from the list of alternatives that appear at the top of the menu. Spell-check all text in comments 1 Choose Edit > Check Spelling > In Comments, Fields, & Editable Text. If the PDF is open in a browser, make sure that the Edit toolbar is open, and click the Spell Check button . 2 Click Start to begin the spell check. When a word that may be misspelled is found, it appears under Word Not Found. Suggested corrections appear under Suggestions. 3 To change the word that may be misspelled, do one of the following: • Edit the selected word. To undo your change, click Undo Edit. To accept your change, click Change. • Double-click a suggested correction. • Click Ignore if you don’t want to change the word and want to continue with the check. • Click Ignore All to ignore every instance of the word. Click Add to add the word to your personal dictionary. • Select a suggested correction and then click Change. Click Change All to replace every instance of the unrecog­ nized word with the suggested correction. 4 Click Done. Specify a language dictionary 1 Choose Edit > Check Spelling > Edit Dictionary. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 187 User Guide 2 Choose a language dictionary from the Dictionary menu, and click Done. Add a word to the dictionary By adding words to the spell-check dictionary, you can reduce the number of words that are flagged during a spell check, such as names and company terminology. You can also exclude words from being considered during a spell check. For example, if you want to use an alternate spelling for a common word like “bicycle,” add it to the list of excluded words so that it is flagged during a spell check. A separate set of added and excluded words is maintained for each installed language. 1 To add a word, do one of the following: • During a spell check, if an unrecognized word appears in the Check Spelling dialog box, click Add to add it to the dictionary. The word is added to the language dictionary selected from the Add To menu. • Choose Edit > Spell Checking > Edit Dictionary. Type the word you want to add in the Entry box, and then click Add. When you’re finished adding words, click Done. 2 To remove a word from the list, select the word in the Edit Custom Dictionary dialog box, and then click Delete. Exclude a word from a spell check 1 Choose Edit > Check Spelling > Edit Dictionary. 2 Choose a language from the Dictionary menu, and then choose Excluded Words from the unnamed menu. 3 Type the word you want to exclude in the Entry box, and then click Add. When you’re finished adding words, click Done. Spelling preferences You can specify whether words are spell-checked while you type, which color is used to underline words, and which dictionary language is used as the default. To open the Spelling preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Spelling from the list on the left. Check Spelling While Typing When selected, underlines unrecognized words as you type in a form field or comment. Underline Color Specifies the color for underlining unrecognized words. Dictionaries Lists available language dictionaries for spell-checking the PDF. Dictionaries appear in the order in which the spell checker goes through dictionaries in search of words. The dictionary at the top of the list is the first dictionary searched. Click Up or Down to change its position in the list. Importing and exporting comments Import Comments Comments can be imported from a PDF document. You can also import comments from a Forms Data Format (FDF) file or an XFDF file, which is an XML-based FDF file. You cannot open and view FDF files or XFDF files on their own. 1 In the document that you want to receive comments, choose Comments > Import Comments. 2 Choose All Files (*.*) from the menu. If you know the file format of the comments you want to import, choose it. 3 Double-click the name of the document with the comments. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 188 User Guide The comment positioning matches that of the file from which they were imported. If comments appear out of place, the source and recipient PDF documents are likely different. For example, if you import comments from a ten-page document to a two-page document, only comments from the first two pages appear. Export comments If you add comments to a PDF that isn’t part of a managed review, you may need to export your comments to send them to someone, or you may need to import comments you receive. (PDFs in a managed review workflow include special options that let you send or publish your comments, rather than export them.) When you export comments, you create a Forms Data Format (FDF) file that contains only comments. Conse­ quently, FDF files are usually smaller than PDFs. You or another reviewer can then import the comments from the FDF file into the original PDF. Export comments to a data file 1 In the PDF that contains comments, choose Comments > Export Comments To Data File. 2 Choose either Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) or Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) from the menu. 3 Name the file and specify a location for it. 4 Click Save to create a data file that contains only the comments. Export selected comments 1 In the Comments list, select the comments you want to export. 2 From the Options menu in the Comments list, choose Export Selected Comments. 3 Name the file and choose Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) or Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) for the file type. 4 Specify a location for the file, and then click Save. Compare a revised PDF to an earlier version The Document Compare feature lets you see the differences in two versions of a PDF, as well as select the type of differences you’re looking for to verify that the appropriate changes have been made. The Document Compare feature does not compare comments in the PDF. 1 Choose Advanced > Compare Documents. 2 Specify the two documents to be compared. If necessary, click Choose, select the file, and then click Open. If the documents are open, you can select them from a menu. 3 Under Type Of Comparison, select one of the following: Page By Page Visual Differences Finds any textual or graphic differences between the documents. Select the level of detail you want from the menu. Textual Differences Shows which text has been inserted, deleted, or moved. Include Font Information Compares formatting. 4 Under Choose Compare Report Type, select one of the following: Side By Side Report Creates a new PDF that displays the two documents in Continuous-Facing mode. Consolidated Report Adds markups where the differences occur in the current document. When you hold the pointer over a markup in a consolidated report using the Hand tool, the differences appear. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 189 User Guide To compare text-based documents, you may want to select Textual Differences to appear in Side By Side Report format. For technical drawings, you may want to select Page By Page Visual Differences to appear in Consolidated Report format. Export comments to Word (Windows) In some instances, reviewers make comments in a PDF that was created from a Microsoft Word document. You can revise the original Word document by exporting these comments from the PDF. For example, text that has been inserted, crossed out, or replaced using the text edit tools in the PDF can be deleted or transferred directly to the source Word document. Formatting added to comments (for example, boldface text) is lost during this process and must be added to the Word document manually. To revise a Word document using comments, you must create a tagged PDF from the Word document. Before you transfer text edits from the PDF, remove any extra words or information and then merge them to one PDF (if you have comments from multiple reviewers). If you plan to import comments more than once, you may want to make a copy of the Word document before you import the comments or comments may not be imported correctly. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Comments > Export Comments To Word. • In Word, open the source document, and then choose Acrobat Comments > Import Comments From Acrobat. For Word 2007, click Acrobat, and then choose Acrobat Comments > Import Comments From Acrobat. 2 Read the instructions, and click OK. 3 In the Import Comments From Adobe Acrobat dialog box, select the PDF and Word files, select from the following options, and click Continue: All Comments Imports all comments. All Comments With Checkmarks Imports only those comments marked with check marks. Text Edits Only: Insertions, Deletions, And Replaces Imports only those comments that you’ve added using the text edit commands in the Comment & Markup toolbar. Apply Custom Filters To Comments Imports only comments that you specify by author, type, or status. Turn Track Changes On Before Importing Comments Shows the changes made by the imported comments in Word. 4 (Optional) If you imported text edits, click Integrate Text Edits in the Successful Import dialog box to review and apply each edit individually. For each edit, select one of the following options: Apply Makes the change in the document and deletes the comment bubble. If a comment appears to be empty, you may want to integrate it to see if it’s a space or a paragraph return. Discard Rejects the edit and deletes the comment bubble. Next Skips to the next text edit. Text edits that are skipped or not integrated appear as bubbles in the Word document. Apply All Integrates all remaining text edits and deletes the comment bubbles. Undo Last Undoes the last text edit, including any manual changes. 5 Delete comment bubbles that appear in the Word document: • Right-click the comment bubble and choose Delete Comment. • Choose Acrobat Comments > Delete All Comments In Document. For Word 2007, this option is on the Acrobat Ribbon. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 190 User Guide Import comments to a revised PDF To import new or unresolved comments to a PDF after the document has been revised, use the Migrate Comments feature. This feature attempts to place comments in the correct location by searching specific word groupings and structural elements in the revised PDF. Note: Results may be less reliable in untagged PDFs, which lack the internal structure necessary to correctly place imported comments in a revised document. Text comments that reference particular words, such as highlights, cross-outs, and insertion carets, appear within the word grouping where they were originally placed. Drawing markups and sticky notes appear in the same struc­ tural location as they did in the original document. Circle, polygon, rectangle, and stamp comments always appear on the same page as the original document. If the revised PDF no longer contains the original word groupings or logical structure order that the comment refer­ ences, the migrated comment appears on the same page as the original document (or on the last page if the refer­ enced page doesn’t exist). In this case, text edits are converted to note comments. Migrate comments to a revised PDF 1 Open the original PDF and the revised PDF. 2 In the revised PDF, choose Comments > Migrate Comments. 3 Choose the original PDF from the From menu, and click OK. Set the migration status for a comment ? In the Comments list, select the comment, click the Set Status button , and choose Migration > [status]. Export comments to AutoCAD (Windows) You may have reviewers add comments to a PDF that was created from an AutoCAD drawing in Windows XP or Windows 2000. If you use AutoCAD PDFMaker to create a PDF, you can import comments into the AutoCAD drawing, rather than switch between AutoCAD and Acrobat. You can import most comment types, including drawing markups, sticky notes, stamps, and text edits. 1 Save the PDF to ensure that recently added comments are included. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 191 User Guide 2 Do one of the following: • In Acrobat, choose Comments > Export Comments To AutoCAD, and then specify the PDF file and the AutoCAD file in the Import Comments dialog box. • In AutoCAD, choose Acrobat Markups > Import Comments From Acrobat. 3 In the Import Comments dialog box, specify the PDF that contains the comments, specify which comments to import, and click Continue. If you import a custom set of comments, specify the set by making sure that only the characteristics you want are selected. You must select at least one option in each category. Show By Reviewer Imports comments by individual reviewers. Show By Type Imports comments by type, such as text edits or note comments. Show By Status Imports comments by review status. Show By Checked State Imports comments that are checked. All imported comments appear in the Adobe Acrobat Markups layer as custom objects that you can edit, filter, or delete. 4 To modify an imported comment (change the status, add a check mark, or modify text), right-click the comment, choose Acrobat Comments, and then choose an option. Approval workflows About approval workflows In Acrobat (Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, and Korean only), you can send PDFs as email attach­ ments for others to approve. When participants open an approval request in Acrobat (all languages), they can approve the PDF by adding a digital identity stamp. Then, they can send the PDF to other approvers, or return the PDF to the initiator and other appropriate participants. The initiator can track progress by choosing to be notified each time the PDF is approved. The workflow ends when the last participant adds the final approval. If a PDF isn’t approved, the approval workflow must be reinitiated. Note: To initiate an approval workflow, you must use Acrobat 7.0 or later (except for Acrobat Elements). If you use Acrobat Professional to initiate the workflow, you can invite users of Adobe Reader 7.0 or later to participate by enabling commenting in the PDF. Wizard sets up approval workflows (left); Stamps palette provides digital identity stamps for approving documents (right). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 192 User Guide Send a PDF for approval When you send a PDF by email for approval (Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, and Korean only), approvers receive the PDF as an email attachment. When recipients open the PDF attachment, they can apply a digital identity stamp from the Stamps palette and then make the appropriate selection in the document message bar. To send a PDF for approval, use the wizard in Acrobat. The wizard provides on-screen instructions to help you invite approvers, customize instructions, and send the PDF. The wizard enables commenting in the PDF so that Adobe Reader users can participate in the approval workflow. Before you initiate an approval workflow, make sure that your email application is configured to work with Acrobat. 1 To start an approval workflow, do one of the following: • Click the Review & Comment button in the Task toolbar, and choose Send By Email For Approval. • Choose Comments > Send By Email For Approval. 2 If prompted, enter your email address in the Identity Setup dialog box. 3 Click Browse (Windows) or Choose (Mac OS), select a PDF, click Open, and click Next. 4 Type the email address for the first approver in the To box. 5 If you want to enable Reader users to participate or if you want to be notified of the approval status for each partic­ ipant, specify those options. 6 (Optional) Type additional instructions for the first approver at the top of the email message. Only the default text message and instructions are forwarded to subsequent approvers. Note: The invitation email contains instructions to help participants complete the approval process. Avoid changing or removing this text. 7 Click Send Invitation. Participate in an approval workflow If you’re invited to participate in an approval workflow, you receive an email message that provides step-by-step instructions for approving the attached PDF. When you open the PDF, the Stamps palette and the How To window open, and the document message bar appears at the top of the PDF. If your version of Acrobat is earlier than 7.0, you’re prompted to download the latest version of Adobe Reader. You can select any of the digital identity stamps in the Stamps palette to approve the document. A digital identity stamp contains identity information that you provide, such as name, title, organization, and email address, and it can be used in place of a signature. When you apply a stamp, it becomes part of the document’s page content. You can delete your own stamp during the approval process; however, once the approval process is completed, your stamp is locked. You can’t move or delete stamps from other participants. You may also reject documents that don’t meet your standards. In addition to adding digital stamps to a PDF, you can add other types of comments, including note comments, text edits, custom stamps, and file attachments. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 193 User Guide See also “Create a custom stamp” on page 176 “Commenting and markup tools overview” on page 168 “Select an email application for reviews” on page 156 Approve a PDF 1 Open the PDF attachment in the approval invitation email message. Note: If you haven’t added identity information to the stamp, you’re prompted to do so. 2 Select a stamp from the Stamps palette. (To view all stamps, scroll or drag a corner to resize the window.) 3 Click the document to apply your approval stamp. Note: To delete a digital identity stamp that you’ve applied, select it and press Delete. If you select Print, Save A Copy, or Email during the approval process, you can’t delete your stamp. 4 Do one of the following: • To send the document to the next approver, click the Approve button in the document message bar. In the Send To Next Approver dialog box, type the email address for the next approver in the To box, add addresses for other recipients as appropriate, and click Send. • To complete the approval process, click the Final Approval button in the document message bar. In the Complete Final Approval dialog box, specify whether to send an approval notification from the Final Approval Method menu. If you send a notification, type an email address in the To box, add addresses for other recipients as appro­ priate, and click Send. If you don’t send a notification, click Complete. If the Notify Initiator Of Approval Status Via Email option is selected, a separate email notification appears, addressed to the initiator. Click Send to send this notification. PDFs in an approval workflow present instructions and tools. 5 Save the PDF. Important: If you use the Email button in the toolbar to send the PDF, the PDF is no longer part of the workflow, and approval options aren’t available to the recipient of that email message. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 194 User Guide Reject a PDF If the PDF you received in an approval request doesn’t meet the requirements for approval, use the options in the document message bar to reject the document and return it to the initiator. If a PDF is rejected, the approval workflow must be reinitiated. 1 Open the PDF attachment in the approval invitation email message. 2 Click the Reject button in the document message bar. 3 In the Reject And Send Notification dialog box, type the email address for the initiator in the To box. If the Notify Initiator Of Approval Status Via Email option is selected, a separate email message is sent to the approval initiator. Click Send. 4 Click Send in the email message that appears. Add or change identity information for a digital stamp 1 From the Stamp menu, choose Show Stamps Palette. 2 In the Stamps palette, select Digital Identity Stamps, right-click/Control-click your stamp, and choose Edit Identity. 3 In the Identity Setup dialog box, type or edit your name, title, company name, department, and email address, and click Complete. You can also change your identity information by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS) and selecting Identity on the left. 195 Chapter 7: Forms Adobe PDFs can be interactive forms that can streamline the process of filling out a form and of collecting form information. You can create PDF forms using either Adobe Acrobat 8 Professional or Adobe LiveCycle Designer (included with Acrobat Professional). Filling in a form can be done in either Acrobat or the free Adobe Reader. Quickstart The following topics provide overview steps to some common forms tasks. Fill in a form with fields An interactive PDF form contains form fields that can be selected or filled in. 1 Click to select options, such as radio buttons. Click inside a text field to type. 2 Press Tab to move forward or Shift+Tab to move backward. 3 When finished, click the submit button, if applicable, and save or print the form if desired. To fill out noninteractive PDF forms, use the Typewriter tool (if enabled). See also “Fill in and clear a form” on page 201 Type on a form without fields If a PDF form doesn’t contain interactive form fields that can be selected or filled in, you can still fill in the form online. 1 Choose Tools > Typewriter > Typewriter. 2 Click over a blank form field and type. 3 (Optional) Choose Tools > Typewriter > Show Typewriter Toolbar. Use these tools to change the size or position of the typed text. 4 When finished, print a copy of the completed form. See also “Fill in and clear a form” on page 201 Return a filled-in form You have several options for returning form data. 1 To return an interactive form, do any of the following: • Click the submit button. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 196 User Guide • Save and email the form (if enabled by the form creator). • Print and mail the form. 2 To return a noninteractive form, do one of the following: • If you filled in the form with the Typewriter tool, print and mail the form. • Print the form, fill it in by hand, and mail it. See also “Fill in and clear a form” on page 201 Create a form The Create New Form wizard guides you through creating a PDF form from a template (Windows only), an electronic document, spreadsheet data, or a scanned paper document. 1 Click Forms on the toolbar, and choose Create New Form. 2 Select the source for the PDF form, and click Continue. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Forms created with the wizard are LiveCycle Designer forms. To create an Acrobat form instead, choose Forms > Run Form Field Recognition. See also “Creating new forms” on page 212 Edit a form Depending upon how a PDF form was created, you can edit it in either Acrobat or LiveCycle Designer (Windows only). Note: (Windows) PDF forms created in Acrobat can be edited in LiveCycle Designer, but those created or edited in LiveCycle Designer cannot be edited in Acrobat. 1 Open a PDF form. 2 Choose Forms > Edit Form In Designer or Edit Form In Acrobat. 3 Add or modify form fields and field properties as desired. See also “Create form fields in Acrobat” on page 214 Distribute a form After you create a PDF form, you can distribute it by using the Distribute Form wizard. Note: To use the wizard, the form must contain a submit button. 1 Open the desired form. 2 Click the Forms button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Distribute Form. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 197 User Guide 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to prepare the form for distribution. 4 Specify if you want to email the form or save and send it later. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to distribute the form. See also “Distribute a form by email” on page 236 Track and manage forms The Forms Tracker helps you manage forms you’ve distributed. 1 Click the Forms button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Track Forms. 2 Select an icon on the left to see forms in that category: • To Do displays forms you’ve received. • History displays forms you’ve distributed. • Search Results allows you to search for specific forms. • Forms Library displays forms you’ve saved in the library for future distribution. See also “About Forms Tracker” on page 242 Compile data received by email As users return their form data, you can compile it into a data set. 1 Open the email attachment containing the returned form. 2 In the dialog box that appears, select an existing data set or create a new set for the form data. The new data is added and the data set opens, allowing you to review all responses. You can also compile data by clicking Forms on the Tasks toolbar, and choosing Compile Returned Forms. See also “Compile form data” on page 240 Review form responses After you’ve compiled returned form data into a data set, the PDF automatically opens for you to review the responses. ? With the desired data set PDF open, do any of the following: • To review an individual response, select a line in the response list. • To sort the response list, click the desired column heading. • To add data, click Import Data • To delete data, select a record and press Delete. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 198 User Guide See also “Manage form data files” on page 241 Export form data to a spreadsheet Once you’ve collected PDF form data in FDF or XML format, you can organize the form data into a comma- delimited spreadsheet (CSV) file. 1 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Merge Data Files Into Spreadsheet. 2 Click Add Files, and then select the desired data files. 3 Click Export, choose a location for the CSV file, and click Save. See also “Export records from a PDF data set” on page 241 Forms basics What are PDF forms? You’re already familiar with paper forms: documents with blanks that people fill in and deliver to the appropriate person or organization. An Adobe PDF form is a computer-based version of a form, which can either be distributed through email or CDs, or published on a website. PDF forms can be ordinary PDFs with blank form fields or they can be interactive. Ordinary PDFs are a convenient way of publishing forms that must be printed, filled out by hand, and physically delivered, such as by mail or fax. An interactive form can be filled out on a computer and may be submitted through an Internet or local network connection. The built-in security features can safeguard the privacy of electronically submitted data. Interactive forms simplify the work users must do to provide the needed information. Electronically submitted forms can be labor-saving at the receiving end, too, because the data from many individuals can be set up to be collated automatically. If you already use other kinds of forms, you can quickly make them into interactive PDF forms: You can scan paper forms and you can convert electronic forms in other formats (such as Word documents, InDesign layouts, and Excel spreadsheets) to interactive PDF forms. Viewing a PDF form When you open a form that someone sends you to fill out, a document message bar appears between the Acrobat toolbars and the form itself. The left side of the message bar typically displays instructions about how to complete and return the form. If you open the form in Adobe Reader, the usage rights associated with that form are also described in this area. You can hide or show the document message bar by clicking its button . The right side of the message bar has one or more buttons. The first is a Highlight Fields button , which colors the backgrounds of all blanks to be filled in and outlines any required blanks, making it easy to see them at a glance. You navigate and adjust views of a form in exactly the same way that you do in ordinary PDFs. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 199 User Guide Note: You can change the default settings for highlight color, whether forms open with the document message bar visible or hidden, and other viewing options in the forms preferences. Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Forms under Categories. Types of PDF forms The way in which you fill in and submit information on a PDF form is determined by the person who created it. Fill-and-print PDF forms Contain interactive form fields or static form fields; either way, the person filling in the form must manually deliver a printed copy of the form, such as by mail or fax. Submit-by-email PDF forms Contain a button that either extracts all interactive-field data from the PDF form and attaches it to an email message or attaches the entire filled-in PDF form to the message. Submit-online PDF forms Contain a button that sends all interactive-field data to an online repository, such as a database. Available only when Acrobat is open inside a web browser. When you fill in a PDF form, you can press Tab to jump from one form field to the next. After you Tab to a check box or button that you want to select, press Enter or spacebar to select it (or to deselect it, if it’s already selected). Another important distinction is between XML forms and other PDF forms. You can create and edit XML forms in LiveCycle Designer but not in Acrobat. Printing and saving PDF forms Interactive forms can be filled in using either Adobe Reader or Acrobat. Users running either of these applications can save a blank version of the form, and they can print copies of their completed forms before submitting them. After a form is filled in, Acrobat users can save a copy of the completed form, showing all the information they typed. Whether or not Adobe Reader users can save a copy of a completed form depends on the usage rights set up by the person who created that form. Note: When you open a form in Adobe Reader, the usage rights appear in the notification area above the form itself. About security for PDF forms As with all sensitive data you transmit, precautions should be taken to minimize the likelihood of interception and use by malicious parties. Such precautions may include the use of encryption, passwords, and other security measures on your document. All Adobe products enforce the restrictions set by the permissions password. However, not all third-party products fully support and respect these settings. Recipients might be able to bypass some or all of the restrictions you’ve set. See also “Opening restricted documents” on page 247 Forms preferences Set forms preferences to control various aspects of your interaction with form fields. To open the Preferences dialog box, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then select Forms on the left. The forms preferences are organized in three sections: General, Highlight Color, and Auto-Complete ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 200 User Guide Note: The forms preferences apply to the way the application handles open forms as you work. The preferences aren’t saved with the PDF forms themselves. See also “Change the Auto-Complete options” on page 202 General Automatically Calculate Field Values Automatically performs all field calculations upon user entry. Show Focus Rectangle Indicates which form field currently has the focus. Keep Forms Data Temporarily Available On Disk Retains forms data in the web browser if you briefly go to another web page and then click Back to return to the PDF form. Show Text Field Overflow Indicator Displays a plus sign (+) in text fields that exceed the bounds specified when the fields were created. Always Hide Forms Document Message Bar Hides the forms document message bar by default whenever a PDF form is opened in Adobe Reader. Show Field Preview When Creating Or Editing Form Fields Displays the appearance of a form field when you create or edit forms. Manage Barcode Parameters Opens a dialog box with a list of barcode items (including the Parameter Set Name, Symbology, and Built-in status for each item). Includes New, Edit, Delete, Import, and Export buttons for working with new or selected parameter sets. Highlight Color Show Border Hover Color For Fields Displays a black outline around a form field when you place the pointer over it. Fields Highlight Color Opens a color picker for selecting the color of highlighted form fields. The highlight appears when the Highlight Fields button on the document message bar is clicked. Required Fields Highlight Color Opens a color picker for selecting the border color of form fields that must be filled in. The border appears for required form fields only after you attempt to submit the form. Auto-Complete Auto-Complete menu Displays three options for Auto-Complete: Off, Basic, or Advanced. Remember Numerical Data Suggests your previously entered numerical entries when you type the same first character into a similar field. When deselected, Auto-Complete offers suggestions only for text entries. (Available only when Basic or Advanced is selected.) Edit Entry List Displays current entries stored in the Auto-Complete memory. You can select and delete any entries that you don’t want to keep for filling in future forms. (This option isn’t available if no entries are in the memory.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 201 User Guide Filling in PDF forms Fill in and clear a form If a PDF form contains interactive form fields, you can fill in the form with one of the tools in the Select & Zoom toolbar: the Hand tool or the Select tool. When you place the pointer over an interactive form field, the pointer icon changes to one of the following: • Pointing Finger or Pointing Hand Plus icon . Appears when the pointer is over a button, radio button, check box, or item in a list. • Arrow . Appears when you can select an item in a list of options. • I-beam icon . Appears when you can type text into the form field. If the form fields aren’t interactive, the basic pointer icon doesn’t change. Noninteractive PDF forms can be printed and filled in by hand. Or, you can choose Tools > Typewriter > Typewriter and use the Typewriter tool to type information over the blank form fields and then print a copy of the completed form. Note: Some text fields are dynamic, meaning that they automatically resize to accommodate the amount of data you enter and can span across pages. See also “Forms preferences” on page 199 Fill in an interactive form 1 If necessary, select either the Hand tool or the Select tool. 2 (Optional) To make form fields easier to identify, click the Highlight Fields button on the document message bar. Form fields appear with a colored background (light blue by default), and all required form fields are outlined in another color (red by default). 3 Click in the first form field you want to fill in, either to select that option or to place an I-beam pointer in the field so you can start typing. 4 After making a selection or entering text, do any of the following: • Press Tab or Shift+Tab to accept the form field change and go to the next or previous field. • Press the Up Arrow or Left Arrow key to select the previous radio button in a group of radio buttons, or press the Down Arrow or Right Arrow key to select the next radio button. • Press Esc to reject the form field change and deselect the current form field. If you’re viewing the form in Full Screen mode, pressing Esc a second time causes you to exit Full Screen mode. Note: If the current form field is a single-line text box, you can press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS) to accept your typing and deselect the field. If the current field is a check box, pressing Enter or Return turns the check box on or off. In a multiline text form field, pressing Enter or Return creates a paragraph return in the same form field. In all cases, you can press Enter on the keypad to accept the change and deselect the current form field. 5 After you fill in the form fields, do any of the following: • Click the submit form button, if one exists. Clicking this button sends the form data to a database across the web or over your company intranet. • Choose File > Save As, and rename the file to save the form with the data you entered. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 202 User Guide • Export the form data. • Print the form. Clear a form in a browser ? Do either of the following: • Select the reset form button, if one exists. You cannot undo this action. • Quit the browser, and start again. Note: Clicking the web browser’s Reload or Refresh button, the Back or Go Back button, or following a link to another page may not completely clear the form. Clear unsaved form entries ? Choose File > Revert. Change the Auto-Complete options The Auto-Complete feature stores any entries that you type in a PDF form field, and then suggests or even automat­ ically enters responses that match your typing in other form fields. The suggestions appear in a pop-up menu, from which you can select a match. The Auto-Complete feature is off by default, so you must enable it in the forms prefer­ ences if you want to use it. If you want to remove an entry from the Auto-Complete memory—such as a misspelled entry that you found and corrected later—you can edit the list in the preferences. Enable the Auto-Complete feature 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or choose Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Select Forms on the left. 3 Under Auto-Complete, choose Basic or Advanced from the menu. 4 Select Remember Numerical Data if you want the Auto-Complete memory to store numbers that you type into forms. When you select an option in the Auto-Complete menu, a description of how it affects the Auto-Complete behavior appears in the text area below. Delete an entry from the Auto-Complete memory 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or choose Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Select Forms on the left. 3 Click Edit Entry List. 4 In the Auto-Complete Entry List dialog box, do one of the following, and then click Yes in the confirmation dialog box: • To remove all of the entries, click Remove All. • To remove some of the entries, select the entries and click Remove. (Shift-click to select multiple adjacent entries; Ctrl-click /Command-click to select multiple nonadjacent entries.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 203 User Guide Adding lengthy entries in forms PDF forms can contain dynamic text fields, which grow in size to accommodate the text you type into it. A scroll bar appears in dynamic text fields when the text you type exceeds the current size of the field; when you’re finished typing and the field is deactivated, the text field expands to display all of the typed text. If necessary, the field may span onto the next page. If you want to continue editing a dynamic text field that spans across pages, you can begin editing the field on either page; you’ll have access to all of the text in the field. Entering text in form field that spans across two pages Filling in forms with barcodes Some forms include barcode fields, which capture and display other information in the form as a black-and-white pattern. You don’t have to do anything with the barcode area itself. As you fill in the form on your computer, the information you enter is included in the barcode and changes the barcode appearance. Important: For any form with barcode fields, it’s essential that you fill it in on your computer. Don’t fill it in by hand on a printed copy. If you’re going to submit the form on paper, such as by mail or fax, be sure to fill it in electronically before you print it. The barcode field makes collecting data easier for the form recipient because the barcode can simply be scanned. The results are an accurate and detailed summary of your input. Search a form When you search for words in a PDF, the search includes any text appearing in form fields (as well as other text in the PDF), whether you typed the text or selected it from a list or menu on the form. ? Do one of the following: • Type the text you want to search for in the Find box in the toolbar, and then press Enter. To find the next instance of the search text, press Enter again. • Choose Edit > Search, and type the text into the Search window. Then select other basic or advanced options for searching, and click Search. Spell-check form entries You can spell-check the text you typed in note comments and form fields. If you want to check the spelling in a comment, first open the comment window. You cannot check the spelling of text in the underlying Adobe PDF document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 204 User Guide . Correct a misspelling ? Right-click/Control-click the word in the form field or comment window, and then choose the correct word from the list of alternatives. Spell-check entries and comments 1 Choose Edit > Check Spelling > In Comments. If the PDF document is open in a web browser, make sure that the Edit toolbar is open, and click the Spell Check button 2 Click Start to begin the spell check. When a word that may be misspelled is found, it appears under Word Not Found. Suggested corrections appear under Suggestions. 3 If a possibly misspelled word appears under Word Not Found, do any of the following: • Edit the unrecognized word by typing. To undo your change, click Undo Edit. To accept your change, click Change. To change all instances of the unrecognized word, click Change All. • Select the correct version of the unrecognized word from the Suggested Corrections section and click Change. Or, simply double-click the correct version of the word. To change all instances of the word to the selected correct version, click Change All. • Click Ignore if you don’t want to change the word and want to continue with the check. • Click Ignore All to ignore every instance of the word. Click Add if you want to add the word to your personal dictionary. 4 After you make a selection in step 3, the next unrecognized word (if any) is highlighted; repeat step 3 until the Restart button appears. 5 Click Done. Specify a dictionary 1 Choose Edit > Check Spelling > Edit Dictionary. 2 Choose the language dictionary you want to use from the Dictionary menu, and then click Done. Import form data As an alternate to filling in a PDF form manually, you can import file data from a text (TXT), Extensible Markup Language (XML), Acrobat Form Data Format (FDF), XML Data Package File (XDP), FormFlow99 Data File (XFD), or Acrobat XFDF (XFDF) file into a PDF form. Some file formats are available only if you import the data into particular PDF forms, such as a PDF form created in LiveCycle Designer. Note: If you import data from a text file, each row in a text file must be tab-delimited to create columns, as in a table. When a row of data is imported, each cell becomes the value of the form field that corresponds to the column name. 1 Open the PDF form. 2 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Import Data. 3 Choose the form data type from the Files Of Type menu, select a file, and click Select. Note: If you import form data from a form that doesn’t match the form you’re importing into, only the form fields that match are updated, and those that don’t match are ignored. Existing text in text form fields is replaced if you import data to those fields. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 205 User Guide Commenting on forms Acrobat users can comment on PDF forms, just as on any other PDF. If the form creator has extended rights to Adobe Reader users, they can also add comments. Whether or not these comments are included when the form is submitted depends on how it’s submitted. For example, if you use Reader to print the form for mailing or faxing, the comments don’t appear. If you attach the filledin form to email as a complete PDF, the comments are included. See also “Commenting” on page 168 “Enable Reader users to save form data” on page 213 Submitting forms Exporting and emailing forms You can export data you enter into a form to a separate file. When you export the form data, it’s saved in a file that’s considerably smaller than the original PDF. A smaller file is preferable for archiving or sharing the data electronically. Depending on how the form was created, you can save the form data as a tab-separated text (TXT), Acrobat XFDF (XFDF), Acrobat Form Data Format (FDF), or Extensible Markup Language (XML) file; or, you are able to save the form only in XML or XDP format. You can also import data from an exported file into another form if that form has fields with the same names. Alter­ natively, you can import file data from a text file. PDF forms can contain an email-based submit button that exports the data you entered. You can email the form data with a desktop or web-based email application, or you can submit the form data at a later time. Note: If the PDF form doesn’t contain an email-based submit button, it may have a submit button that sends the form data via the web or some other service. See also “Import form data” on page 204 Export form data to a file 1 Open the PDF form and fill it in. 2 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Export Data. 3 Choose a format from the Save As Type menu, specify a location and filename, and click Save. Email a form using your email application When you click an email-based submit button in a PDF form, you have the option to submit the form data with your preferred desktop email application. 1 Click the submit or return form button on the PDF form. 2 In the Select Email Client dialog box, select Desktop Email Application; then click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 206 User Guide Your default email application displays a new email message with the To, Subject, Body, and Attachment fields automatically filled in. 3 Send the email. Email a form using a web service When you click an email-based submit button in a PDF form, you have the option to submit the form data with a web-based email service. 1 Click the submit or return form button on the PDF form. 2 In the Select Email Client dialog box, select Internet Email; then click OK. 3 Click Save PDF File or Save Data File, specify a location for the file, and click Save. 4 Log in to your web-based email service, and create a new, blank email message. 5 In the Sending The PDF File dialog box in Acrobat, copy the text in the To box. 6 In the blank email message, paste the copied text into the To box. Repeat the process for the Subject and Message Text boxes. 7 Attach the file that you saved to the email message. Submit a PDF form at a later time When you click an email-based submit button in a PDF form, you have the option of not submitting the form data, but instead saving it on your computer to send at a later time. 1 Click the submit or return form button on the PDF form. 2 In the Select Email Client dialog box, select Other, and then click OK. 3 Click Save PDF File or Save Data File, specify a location for the file, and click Save. 4 Write down the values that appear in the To, Subject, and Message Text boxes so you’ll have them when you’re ready to email the form data. 5 To email the form data, create a new message in your email application. Enter the To, Subject, and Message Text values that you wrote down, attach the data file that you saved, and send the email. Planning a PDF form Options for creating PDF forms There are many approaches to creating PDF forms. If you have existing paper forms, you can convert them to PDF in various ways, depending on their current format. If you have noninteractive PDF forms, you can transform them into interactive PDF forms that can be filled in and submitted electronically through a network or Internet connection. Using LiveCycle Designer (included with Adobe Acrobat Professional for Windows), you can also create entirely new PDF forms from blank pages or from designer-created templates. Paper forms Using a scanner, you can convert a paper form to PDF and use the forms tools to create interactive form fields in the same page locations as on the paper form. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 207 User Guide Electronic documents In Windows, you can start with an existing form or you can create a new one in an authoring application, such as Word, Excel, or InDesign, and convert it to PDF. Or you can start with an existing PDF and use Acrobat to add form fields and other forms features. Blank documents In Acrobat 8, you can create a PDF from a blank page and use the new PDF Editor feature to add text. Then, you can use the Forms tools to add form fields of various types. Or, in Windows, you can create a form in LiveCycle Designer, taking advantage of its powerful collection of advanced features and tools. LiveCycle Designer templates (Windows) Using the wizard from the Forms > Create New Form command, you can select an appropriate type of form document. Then, you personalize it by swapping out placeholder text, graphics, form fields, and properties with custom ones that you provide or define. Using Acrobat versus LiveCycle Designer (Windows) LiveCycle Designer is included with Acrobat Professional for Windows. LiveCycle Designer enhances the formcreation features in Acrobat and offers a robust collection of advanced features and controls. Note: Acrobat users on Mac OS can create and edit forms in Acrobat only if those forms haven’t been opened and saved on Windows in LiveCycle Designer. Of course, Acrobat and Reader users on Mac OS can open and fill in any PDF form, regardless of whether it was created on Windows or Mac OS, or which program was used to save it. Similarities Use either Acrobat or LiveCycle Designer to do any of the following: • Use a paper document scanned to PDF as the basis of a form. • Convert an existing electronic document to PDF, to be the basis of a form. • Design forms, starting with a blank page. (Forms created from a PDF using the PDF Editor feature in Acrobat have limited formatting options available.) • Run automatic form-field recognition on existing PDFs and documents converted to PDF. • Edit PDF forms created in Acrobat. • Create forms to distribute by email or post on a website for people to download onto their computers for completing in Acrobat or Reader or for printing and completing by hand. • Create forms that users can complete in Acrobat or Reader and submit through email. Differences Acrobat and LiveCycle Designer differ in these ways: • In LiveCycle Designer, you can start with one of the blank, built-in templates—predesigned layouts that you edit and customize. • You must use LiveCycle Designer to edit any forms that have been opened and saved in LiveCycle Designer, even if the form was originally created in Acrobat. • In LiveCycle Designer, you can extend compatibility back as far as Acrobat 6.0 and Reader 6.0 for most form data fields. In Acrobat, you can extend compatibility as far as Acrobat 4.0 and Reader 4.0. • LiveCycle Designer can create forms in formats that it can convert into HTML. This ability makes LiveCycle Designer the better application to use if you intend to post the interactive form on a website for people to fill in and submit from within a browser. You can also integrate PDF forms into existing workflows by binding forms to XML schemas, XML sample data files, databases, and web services. • With LiveCycle Designer, you can use scripting objects, integrate a form with a data source, and create dynamic forms. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 208 User Guide Note: You can start LiveCycle Designer from the Windows Start menu, or from within Acrobat Professional, either by choosing Forms > Create New Form and following the wizard for creating a new form or by selecting a Forms task in the Getting Started window. Decisions based on form content Planning your PDF form depends on what information will be exchanged through the form. Different types of infor­ mation correspond to various form elements, which are designed especially for that kind of data. In Windows, the choice between editing a form in Acrobat or editing it in LiveCycle Designer is also influenced by the content of the form. Your answers to the following questions may guide your decision about what elements to include in the form layout and which application to use to create and edit the form. What information do I need to collect from the user? This most basic planning step depends on your goals in sending out the form. What information should I provide to the user? Besides providing the questions and labels for information the person filling in the form will provide, many forms identify the person or organization that originated the form and provide contact information, instructions, graphics, logos, and so forth. If you want to edit the text or change the layout of an existing PDF form, you must edit the original source document in its native authoring application or, in Windows only, you can edit the file in LiveCycle Designer. Do I want to receive barcoded information? (Windows) Barcoding fields are supported by both Acrobat and LiveCycle Designer, with more options available in LiveCycle Designer. What are the different types of information the users will submit? PDF forms can collect many kinds of data: typed text, numbers, a single selection from limited choices, multiple selections from limited choices, and so on. The data you want to collect affects the types of form fields you use. For example, List Box fields force users to choose just one answer from a list of limited possibilities, but you could configure radio buttons that would do the same thing. Which you use might depend on the amount of space available, usability factors, and design aesthetics. What user-input is essential and what information can be optional? This issue is an offshoot of your primary goal for the form. It’s helpful to identify what data fields are essential and should be set up as required, as compared to data that is only supplementary for other purposes. For example, if the form is a purchase order, you cannot send the merchandise to the purchaser without a shipping address. However, if the user left a “Comments” field blank, you could still carry out the primary function of the form, so you wouldn’t want to mark it as a required field. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 209 User Guide Which form fields could benefit from information formatting? Many types of form fields can be configured to accept only certain types of information. For example, text boxes can be set up to accept only numbers, only letters, or a combination of the two. You can restrict input to specific sequences, such as those for dates, telephone numbers, or Social Security numbers. You can create fields that automatically display calculations from other fields. You can set text field properties so that the field area scrolls, allowing users to write lengthy responses without taking up a large area of the form. Decisions about the form’s work cycle Planning your PDF form depends on the methods you’ll use for collecting data. In Windows, the planning also influ­ ences your choice between editing a form in Acrobat or editing it in LiveCycle Designer. Your answers to the following questions may guide your decision about what elements to include in the form. How do I want users to send back information? The possibilities include: • On paper or fax, to be collated manually. • On paper or fax, to be scanned and save as an electronic document. • On paper or fax, to be scanned and interpreted from one or more barcode fields included in the form. • As an email attachment that includes the entire form. • As an email attachment that includes only the form data. • Through an Internet or network connection directly to a database. What are the needs of those who will fill out the forms? Consider the following factors, which affect who can fill in a form and how comfortable they are in doing so. • Compatibility. Consider whether all members of your intended audience are likely to be using the latest version of Acrobat or Reader to fill in the form. You may need to set up the form to be compatible with earlier versions. • Security. Especially if the form captures sensitive or personal information, consider adding security measures, such as passwords, digital signatures, or masked form data to protect you and your audience, and to prevent others from being able to access the data. • Adobe Reader users. Consider granting Reader users extended rights for the form so they can save a copy of the completed form before submitting it. Do I want to track response levels? Acrobat 8 offers tracking features that you can use to keep yourself informed on the submitted data. For more infor­ mation on this topic, go to the Adobe website. Choosing form elements Once you’ve determined what information you want to receive from users, you can match information types with appropriate form elements. • For text and numeric data that the user will type in, design the form to use text boxes or combo boxes. • For a single choice from a limited number of options, use radio buttons, a list box, or a combo box. • For a limited number of options from which the user can select none, one, or more items, use check boxes, or use a list box and set the form field properties to allow multiple selections. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 210 User Guide • For actions, such as opening a file, playing a sound or video, submitting form data, and so forth, use buttons. • For added security, add a digital signature field that verifies the user’s identity. You can also make changes to individual form field properties, making it even easier and more foolproof for users filling in the PDF form. Barcode workflow Barcode fields translate a user’s form entries into a visual pattern that can be scanned, interpreted, and incorporated into a database. Barcodes are helpful when users submit the form on paper or by fax. The advantages of using barcodes are that they save time, eliminate the need for responses to be manually read and recorded, and bypass data-entry errors that can occur. A typical barcode workflow includes the following phases: • The form author makes sure that Automatically Calculate Field Values is selected in the forms preferences, and then creates the form in Acrobat, setting up all the other fields as usual. • The form author adds the barcode field to the form, setting up the barcode so that it captures the needed data. • The form author enables the form for Reader users (if the author wants to allow Reader users to save their own filled-in copy of the form or if it contains certain barcode fields). • The form author distributes the form to other users. • Users fill in the form on their computers, print a copy, and deliver the copy to the form distributor. • The received barcode data is interpreted in one of the following ways, and can then be reviewed, sorted, and used by the form receiver: Forms faxed to a fax server The form receiver can use Adobe Acrobat Capture to collect TIFF images from the fax server and place them in an Adobe LiveCycle Designer Barcoded Forms Decoder watched folder, if the receiver owns those products. Forms delivered on paper The form receiver can scan paper forms and then use an application such as Adobe LiveCycle Barcoded Forms Decoder to decode the barcodes within those forms. Note: Acrobat Capture and LiveCycle Barcoded Forms Decoder are standalone products appropriate for enterprise workflows and are sold separately from Acrobat. Design tips for barcodes Issues that affect how you design and place barcodes include usability and space. As an example, the barcode size can also limit the amount of data that can be encoded. For the best results, follow these guidelines. • Position the barcode so that it’s unlikely to get folded when placed in an envelope, and position it far enough from the edges of the page so that it won’t get clipped off during printing or faxing. • Position it so that it can be easily seen and scanned. If a handheld scanner will be used, avoid barcodes wider than 4 inches (10.3 cm). Tall, narrow barcodes generally work best in this case. Also, avoid compressing the contents of the barcode when using a handheld scanner. • Make sure that the size of the barcode can accommodate the amount of data to encode. If the barcode area is too small, it turns a solid gray. Be sure to test a completed form before distributing it to make sure that the barcode area is large enough. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 211 User Guide See also “Create, test, and edit barcode fields” on page 219 “Manage custom barcode settings” on page 230 Form elements in Acrobat A PDF form created with Acrobat can contain the following types of elements: Barcodes Encode the input from selected fields and display it as a visual pattern that can be interpreted by decoding software or hardware (available separately). Buttons Initiate a change on the user’s computer, such as opening a file, playing a sound, or submitting data to a web server. These buttons can be customized with images, text, and visual changes triggered by mouse actions. Note: Action buttons have a different purpose than radio buttons, which represent data choices made by the user. Check boxes Present yes-or-no choices for individual items. If the form contains multiple check boxes, the user can typically select as many or few of these as wanted. Combo boxes Let the user either choose an item from a pop-up menu or type in a value. Digital signature field Lets the user electronically sign a PDF document with a digital signature. Document message bar Displays automatically generated information about the PDF form and can display action buttons and other options. The document message bar also informs Reader users about their usage rights for the form. Note: If form recipients are using older versions of Acrobat or Reader, the document message bar may not be visible or may contain different information. List boxes Display a list of options the user can select. Note: You can set a form field property that enables the user to Shift-click or Ctrl-click/Control-click to select multiple items on the list. Radio buttons Present a group of choices from which the user can select only one item. Text boxes Let the user type in text, such as name, address, or phone number. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 212 User Guide D E F G H A B C Adobe Acrobat PDF form A. Digital signature field B. Combo box C. Text boxes D. Forms document message bar E. Check boxes F. Radio buttons G. List box H. Buttons See also “Setting action buttons in Acrobat” on page 232 “Enable Reader users to save form data” on page 213 Creating and editing forms Creating new forms You can add interactive form fields to a PDF by using the extensive form tools in LiveCycle Designer (Windows) or the basic form tools in Acrobat Professional. LiveCycle Designer is a standalone application that is included with Acrobat Professional for Windows or can be purchased separately. In Windows, you can initiate the process of creating a LiveCycle Designer form either from within that application or from Acrobat, using the Create New Forms wizard. In Acrobat, you can initiate the process of creating an Acrobat form by clicking either Convert An Existing Document or Scan A Paper Form in the Getting Started window, or by opening an existing PDF and choosing Forms > Run Form Field Recognition. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 213 User Guide Note: PDF form fields that were created in Acrobat Professional can be modified in LiveCycle Designer, but PDF form fields that were created in LiveCycle Designer can’t be modified in Acrobat Professional. See also “Using Acrobat versus LiveCycle Designer (Windows)” on page 207 About the Create New Forms wizard The Create New Forms wizard initiates the process of creating a form in LiveCycle Designer. Forms saved in LiveCycle Designer can be opened and distributed in Acrobat, but you cannot use the Acrobat Forms toolbar or other Acrobat forms features to edit a LiveCycle Designer form. There are several ways to start the Create New Forms wizard from the Acrobat work area: from the Acrobat Forms menu, the Acrobat File menu, or from the Forms page of the Getting Started window, by clicking Browse The Template Library or Create New Form. Each page in the wizard contains complete instructions on how to proceed. For information on how to edit forms in LiveCycle Designer, refer to LiveCycle Designer Help by starting the LiveCycle Designer application and choosing Help > Adobe LiveCycle Designer Help. Enable Reader users to save form data Ordinarily, Reader users can’t save filled-in copies of forms that they complete. However, you can extend rights to Reader users so they have the ability to do so. These extended rights also include the ability to add comments, use the Typewriter tool, and digitally sign the PDF. 1 Choose Advanced > Enable User Rights In Adobe Reader. 2 Read the instructions that appear, and then click Save Now. These extended privileges are limited to the current PDF. When you create a different PDF form, you must perform this task again if you want to enable Reader users to save their own filled-in copies of that PDF. Creating secure PDF forms PDF forms can be secured in the same ways and by the same methods as other PDFs. Security can be especially important when sensitive information is included in the form. See also “Securing PDFs” on page 263 “About digital IDs” on page 253 Make Adobe PDF forms accessible (Acrobat) You can make form fields accessible to vision- and motion-challenged users by adding tags to the PDF and by properly structuring it. In addition, you can use the Tooltip form field property to provide the user with information about the field or to provide instructions. For example, using the Tooltip property’s value, the screen reader could say “Your name.” Without the Tooltip property, a screen reader simply names the type of form field. 1 If necessary, choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat, and make sure that the Select Object tool is selected. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 214 User Guide Note: If the Forms menu shows the Edit Form In LiveCycle Designer command, then use the corresponding procedure for that application. See LiveCycle Designer Help. 2 Do one of the following to open the form field’s Properties window: • Double-click a selected form field. • Click the More button in the Properties toolbar. (If this toolbar is hidden, choose View > Toolbars > Properties bar.) 3 In the General tab, type a description into the Tooltip box. See also “Accessibility features” on page 287 Adding JavaScript to forms The JavaScript language lets you create interactive web pages. Adobe has enhanced JavaScript so that you can easily integrate interactivity into PDF forms. The most common uses for JavaScript in Acrobat Professional forms are formatting, calculating, validating data, and assigning an action. In Windows, you can also configure Adobe PDF forms to connect directly to databases using Open Database Connection (ODBC). For more information, see the JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference on the JavaScript support page (English only) of the Adobe website. Note: If you’re creating dynamic forms, keep in mind that Reader doesn’t support some custom JavaScripts, so the form may not function properly when viewed in Reader unless additional usage rights are added to the PDF. For information on customizing Acrobat, see the Acrobat Software Development Kit (SDK). The Acrobat SDK is provided to members of the Adobe Solutions Network (ASN) Developer Program. For information on this SDK, visit the Adobe Acrobat SDK page (English only) on the Adobe website. See also “Enable commenting for Adobe Reader users” on page 155 Laying out new form fields Create form fields in Acrobat In Acrobat, you create a form field by choosing one of the form tools, dragging on the document page to define the size and location of the field, and naming the field. For each field type, you can set a variety of options through the form field Properties dialog box. Note: In Windows, you can use LiveCycle Designer to edit forms that were created in Acrobat, but Acrobat can’t edit form fields that have been opened and saved in LiveCycle Designer. LiveCycle Designer offers additional features and possibilities than are available in Acrobat alone. However, there are some situations in which Acrobat forms are preferable. See also “Using Acrobat versus LiveCycle Designer (Windows)” on page 207 “Form fields behaviors” on page 222 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 215 User Guide Create a new form field 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat. • Choose View > Toolbars > Forms. 2 In the Forms toolbar, select a forms tool, and do one of the following: • Drag to create a form field of the required size. • Double-click the page to create a form field using the default size. Note: You cannot create a form field on top of a comment. 3 In the [form field name] Properties dialog box, which opens automatically, select property options to specify the form field behavior. To add form fields to a PDF document’s tags tree at the same time that you create the form fields in Acrobat, make sure that Tag Annotations is selected in the Options menu of the Tags tab. Select the item in the tags tree that should be the parent of the form field you’re about to create, and create the form field. Create multiple copies of form fields You can create multiple copies of form fields even if the fields have different types. The new form field names are based on the original form fields and appended with a number. All new fields are created sequentially, using standard array format. 1 Select one or more form fields that you want to copy. 2 Choose Forms > Edit Fields > Place Multiple Fields. 3 In the Create Multiple Copies Of Fields dialog box, do the following: • To specify the number of rows to be created, enter a number in Copy Selected Fields Down. • To specify the number of columns to be created, enter a number in Copy Selected Fields Across. • To specify the width of the area in which the columns of fields appear, enter a number in Change Width. • To specify the height of the area in which the columns of fields appear, enter a number in Change Height. Note: The width and height values don’t change the dimensions of individual fields but designate the size of the entire area for all of the selected and newly created fields. • To change the position of the fields, use the Up, Down, Left, and Right buttons. 4 Click Preview to apply the results, make any additional changes, and click OK. Note: Copies of form fields function independently of each other. You can use a different procedure to duplicate form fields, creating an information-sharing relationship among these form fields. Lay out Acrobat form fields on a grid You can use grids to help position form fields precisely on a page. You can define the grid spacing, color, and position. You can also choose whether to have the boundaries of a form field snap to grid lines when you’re editing the form field. Grid lines don’t print. 1 Choose View > Grid. 2 To make form fields snap to the nearest grid lines when you create or move them, choose View > Snap To Grid. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 216 User Guide Copy an Acrobat form field Yo u c a n c r e at e copies of a form field on a single page of a PDF form and you can copy a form field and paste it onto other pages. When you create duplicate form fields, replicas of the original field are added to one or more other pages, always in the same position on each page as the original. Both copies and duplicates can be dragged to different locations on a page, but not from one page to another. Both copies and duplicates are created with the same name as the original form field, but with a number appended. All form fields with the same basic name share the same user data and action properties. Consequently, when a user adds or edits a response to any one of the copies or duplicates, that response appears in all fields with the same basic name. If you change the properties of any one of multiple versions of a form field that have the same basic name—such as the appearance or behavior options for the selected form field—those changes affect only that copy of the form field. The exception is when you change an Actions listing if the trigger isn’t a mouse action. If you want to prevent a duplicated or copied form field from reacting in unison with the original field to user-entered responses, change the name of the new form field using the General tab in form field Properties dialog box. Create a copy of a form field ? Select the form field, and do one of the following: • To copy the form field to the center of the current view, choose Edit > Copy, and then choose Edit > Paste. • To copy the form field and move it to another location on the page, Ctrl-drag/Option-drag it. To constrain the vertical or horizontal movement as you drag, press Shift. Create multiple copies of a form field on a page 1 Do one of the following: • Select the form field and choose Forms > Edit Fields > Place Multiple Fields. • Right-click/Control-click the form field and choose Create Multiple Copies. 2 In the Create Multiple Copies Of Fields dialog box, select Preview, and move the dialog box as needed so that you can see the original field and the copies on the form page. 3 Make the selections you want to apply: • To change the number of copies being created, enter different values in the Copy Selected Fields Down and Copy Selected Fields Across options. • To change the dimensions of the original field and all the copies, enter different values in the Change Width and Change Height options. • To move the original field and all the copies, click the Up, Down, Left, and Right buttons. Duplicate a form field across multiple pages 1 Select the form field that you want to duplicate. 2 Choose Forms > Edit Fields > Duplicate. Note: The Duplicate command isn’t available for forms with only one page. 3 Do one of the following: • To duplicate the form field on every page in the form, select All, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 217 User Guide • To duplicate the form field on a limited range of pages, click the From button, and type the start and ending pages on which you want the form field to appear. Note:Including or not including the page on which the form field originally appears doesn’t affect the duplication process. Including that page won’t create a second copy on top of the original one, and not including it won’t remove the original form field. Select multiple form fields in Acrobat Selecting multiple form fields is an essential step in several tasks you can perform, such as creating copies, aligning form fields, and adjusting the spacing between form fields. ? If necessary, choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat, and then do any of the following: • To select all form fields of all types, choose Edit > Select All. • To select a range of form fields, click the first form field in the range, and then Shift-click the last form field. All form fields between the two form fields are selected. • To select individual form fields in different parts of the PDF page, Ctrl-click/Command-click each form field. • To select all form fields in an area of the page, use the Select Object tool to drag a selection marquee around the area. • To select all form fields of a specific type in an area of the page, select the forms tool for that type of field and drag a selection marquee around the area. For example, if you select the Radio Button tool, only radio button form fields are selected. • To deselect an individual form field, Ctrl-click/Command-click that field. The form field highlighted in red is the anchor. When you select multiple form fields by clicking, the last field selected is the anchor. When you use a marquee, the form field that was created first is the anchor. If you Ctrl­ click/Command-click to deselect the anchor, the form field located in the upper left of the selection becomes the new anchor form field. Resize and arrange form fields in Acrobat After you create form fields, you may need to rearrange, resize, or move them to give the page a cleaner, more profes­ sional look. To make adjustments in the layout of form fields, you must be in editing mode (choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat or choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool). Resize a form field 1 Select either the Select Object tool or the form tool that was used to create the form field. 2 Select the form field that you want to resize. 3 Do any of the following: • To resize the field manually, click to select the form field, and then drag a border handle. Press Shift to maintain the current aspect ratio of the form field. • To resize the field by 1 pixel, press Ctrl+Arrow key/Command+Arrow key; to resize the fields by 10 pixels, press Ctrl+Shift+Arrow key/Command+Shift+Arrow key. Resize multiple form fields to match a selected form field 1 Select all the form fields that you want to resize. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 218 User Guide 2 Right-click/Control-click the form field that you want the other selected form fields to match, choose Size, and then select one of the following: Height Adjusts the heights without changing the widths. Width Adjusts the widths without changing the heights. Both Adjust all widths and heights to match. Move individual form fields You can move form fields by simply dragging them. For greater precision in less time, you can use special features that align them with each other, adjust the spacing between them, and center them on the page. 1 Using the Select Object tool, select one or more form fields that you want to move. 2 Do one of the following: • To move to an approximate location, drag the selected form fields to the new location. To constrain movement to a horizontal or vertical direction, begin dragging, and then press Shift while continuing to drag the selection. • To move either horizontally or vertically in small increments, press the arrow keys to nudge the selected form field into position. • To move the form field to the exact center of a page, choose Edit > Cut, navigate to the desired page, and then choose Edit > Paste. Note: Fields are placed in the center of the page only the first time they’re pasted. Additional pasted fields are offset from the previously pasted field. Align and center multiple form fields 1 Select two or more form fields that you want to align. 2 Right-click/Control-click the field to which the others will align, choose Align, and then choose a command as follows: • To align a column of fields, choose Left, Right, or Vertical to align them respectively to the left edge, right edge, or vertical axis (center) of the anchor form field. • To align a row of fields, choose Top, Bottom, or Horizontally to align them respectively to the top edge, bottom edge, or horizontal axis (center) of the anchor form field. Note: When you right-click/Control-click one of the selected fields, it’s highlighted in red instead of blue, indicating that it’s the anchor form field. The Align menu commands move the other selected form fields to line up with the edges of the anchor form field. Adjust the spacing between form fields In the context of laying out form fields on a page, distributing means to give a group of form fields uniform spacing, measured from the centers of adjacent fields. The Distribute commands take precedence over the Snap To Grid command. 1 Press Shift and select the form fields that you want to adjust. 2 Right-click/Control-click any one of the selected form fields, and do one of the following: • To distribute the fields evenly between the topmost and bottommost fields, choose Distribute > Vertically. • To distribute the fields evenly between the leftmost and rightmost fields, choose Distribute > Horizontally. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 219 User Guide Note: The Distribute button in the Forms toolbar has a different function: Use that button to send your form to others, who will fill in the information and return the data to you. Delete a form field 1 Select the form fields you want to delete. 2 Press Delete, or choose Edit > Delete. Create, test, and edit barcode fields One of the ways in which you can improve a PDF form barcode is by creating custom scripts. Writing such scripts requires a basic competency with JavaScript and a familiarity with Acrobat-specific JavaScript. For information, see Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ on the JavaScript support page (English only) of the Adobe website. For information about basic JavaScript, refer to any of the many resources available on that subject. After inserting a barcode of maximum size, changing the cell size or decode condition may cause the barcode to cross the page borders. Avoid this behavior by selecting the appropriate cell size and decode conditions for the barcode. See also “Design tips for barcodes” on page 210 “Manage custom barcode settings” on page 230 “Value tab for form field properties” on page 230 “Options tab for form field properties” on page 224 Add a barcode field 1 Open the form in Acrobat, choose Edit > Preferences and select Forms on the left. Then select Automatically Calculate Field Values. 2 Click the Barcode tool in the Forms toolbar, or choose Tools > Forms > Barcode Tool. 3 Drag a rectangle to define the barcode area. The Barcode Field Properties dialog box opens. 4 In the Value tab, do one of the following: • Select Encode Using, and then select a format (XML or Tab Delimited). Click the Pick button and select the fields that you want to be encoded in the barcode field. If you don’t want to include the field names in the barcode data, deselect Include Field Names. • Select Custom Calculation Script, click Edit, and then enter your custom JavaScript code in the JavaScript Editor dialog box. 5 In the Options tab, do all of the following: • Select a Symbology option: PDF417, QR Code, or Data Matrix. • Select Compress Data Before Encoding To Barcode if you want to apply this compression. Do not select this option if a handheld scanner will be used to capture data from returned forms. • In Decode Condition, choose the type of hardware that will process returned forms: Handheld Barcode Scanner, Fax Server, Document Scanner, or Custom. • If necessary, click Custom and enter values for X Dimension, Y/X Ratio, and Error Correction Level. 6 Make any other changes in the General and Actions tabs. Then click OK to close the Barcode Field Properties dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 220 User Guide JavaScript code is generated automatically to encode the selected fields in the XML or Tab Delimited format, the Barcode Field Properties dialog box closes, and the barcode for which you specified values appears on the form. Note:If you add a new field to a form after you have created the barcode, the new field will not automatically be included in the data for existing barcodes. However, you can manually include additional data fields in the barcode. Test a barcode field 1 Choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat to deselect it, or click the Preview button in the Forms toolbar. 2 Fill in the form, using sample data that represents the maximum amount of information that a each field allows or that you expect any user might enter. 3 If the barcode field is grayed out, follow either the procedure for resizing the barcode field or for adjusting the content data. (See the following tasks.) 4 When you are sure that the barcode field area is large enough to contain all of the incoming data, choose Forms > Clear Form, to remove the sample data, and then choose File > Save. The barcode form field is now ready for distribution. Include additional data fields in the barcode 1 Using either the Barcode tool or the Select Object tool, select the barcode field and choose Forms > Show Field Properties. 2 In the Value tab, do one of the following: • If Encode Using is selected, click Pick, and select additional form fields to be encoded. • If Custom Calculation Script is selected, click Edit, and write additional JavaScript to include the additional fields. After including new data fields in the barcode, be sure that the barcode area is large enough by testing sample data. If the barcode area is grayed out, adjust the barcode size, barcode properties, or text field properties so that the data content fits into the barcode area. Resize a barcode field The most common error when authoring barcoded forms is when the barcode area is too small to accommodate the data. If this occurs during your test of sample data, the barcode appears as a solid gray rectangle instead of showing its coding pattern. 1 Select the Barcode tool , and select the barcode field. Important: Be sure to use only the Barcode tool to resize a barcode. If you resize a barcode using the Text Field tool or the Select Object tool, the barcode can be distorted and becomes unusable. 2 Drag a handle along the edges or corners of the barcode field frame. 3 If necessary, drag the barcode from inside its frame to move it to another location on the page. Adjust data content to fit in a barcode field 1 To edit the barcode properties so that it can accommodate more data, select it, choose Forms > Show Field Properties, and do any of the following: • In the Options tab, click the Custom button and enter lower values for Error Correction Level and Y/X Ratio. • In the Options tab, select Tab Delimited rather than XML as the data-encoding format. XML requires more barcode area to encode information than Tab Delimited does. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 221 User Guide • In the Options tab, select Compress Data Before Encoding To Barcode, but only if you will be using an Adobe software decoder (available separately). • In the Options tab, select a different Symbology option. • In the Value tab, click the Pick button, and deselect any fields that you don’t need to encode. For example, don’t include fields with redundant information • In the Value tab, enter a custom script that converts user-entered text to either all lowercase or all uppercase characters during the encoding process. Note: The National Association of Computerized Tax Processors (NACTP) guidelines, used by the United States Internal Revenue Service and state tax agencies, recommend using all uppercase characters for 2D barcode data 2 To edit a text field to minimize the amount of barcode area needed to contain the data, select the text field, choose Forms > Edit Field Properties, and do either of the following: • In the Options tab, enter a value (or reduce the existing value) for Limit Of Characters. • In the Validate tab, write a custom script that restricts data to alphanumeric characters and to a single case. (Text that is either all uppercase or all lowercase requires less barcode area than the same text written in a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters.) Consider creating additional barcode fields in the form and mapping different data to each barcode field. Set form-field tabbing order in Acrobat If a PDF document isn’t tagged and doesn’t have a specified tab order, the order in which the form fields were created determines their tabbing order. If a PDF document is tagged, the document structure determines the form fields’ tabbing order unless the user has deselected the Tab Order option in the Accessibility preferences. You can change the tabbing order after you create the fields in either of two ways: by setting the tabbing order in the Page Properties, or manually. See also “Creating new forms” on page 212 “Make Adobe PDF forms accessible (Acrobat)” on page 213 Set tabbing order in Page Properties 1 Click the Pages button or choose View > Navigation Panels > Pages to open the Pages panel. 2 Select one or more page icons, and choose Page Properties in the Pages panel Options menu. 3 Select a Tab Order option: Use Row Order Tabs from the upper left field, moving first left to right and then down, one row at a time. Use Column Order Tabs from the upper left field, moving first from top to bottom and then across from left to right, one column at a time. Use Document Structure For forms with tagged fields, follows the order set up in the tagging. Unspecified Uses the existing sequence. For untagged forms, this is the order in which the fields were created. Reset tabbing order automatically 1 Choose Forms > Edit Fields > Set Tab Order. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 222 User Guide Note: You can choose this command only if the tab order property in the Page Properties is set to Unspecified. 2 Click Yes in the message that appears to automatically determine the tab order. Set tabbing order manually 1 Choose Forms > Edit Fields > Set Tab Order. Note: You can choose this command only if the tab order property in the Page Properties is set to Unspecified. You can verify this by selecting the page in the Pages panel and choosing Page Properties in the Pages panel Options menu or context menu. 2 Click No in the message that appears. Numbers representing the tabbing order for the fields appear in the upper left corner of each field. Note: If you decide not the change the tabbing order, click a blank area of the page or a part of the page that is not part of a field. This hides the tabbing order numbers so that clicking a field no longer changes the tabbing order. 3 Click anywhere in the field that you want to be first in the tabbing order. The number in the upper left corner is set as 1. 4 Click each of the other fields in the order that you want tabbing to occur. Form fields behaviors About Acrobat form field properties How a form field behaves is determined by settings in the Properties dialog box for that individual field. You can set properties that apply formatting, determine how the form field information relates to other form fields, impose limitations on what the user can enter in the form field, trigger custom scripts, and so forth. You can set a variety of properties for an Acrobat form field, depending on the form field type. The properties for each type of form field are selected on a series of tabs. All types of form fields have a General tab, Appearance tab, and an Actions tab. Other tabs appear only in specific types of form fields. The Options tab appears for most form field types but the options available are unique to each type of form field. Two items are available on every tab. If you select one on any tab, a check mark will appear, and the option will be checked on all tabs. These are: Locked When selected, prevents any further changes to any form field properties. Close Applies and saves the current form field properties, and closes the form field Properties dialog box. Note: If you select Locked on any tab, it locks all options for the field, not just the options on that tab. Modify form field properties in Acrobat You can access Acrobat form field properties only when you are in editing mode (by choosing Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat or Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool). You can change the properties for multiple form fields at a time. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 223 User Guide Note: Some basic options can be changed on the Properties toolbar, which you can open or hide by choosing View > Toolbars > Properties Bar. 1 Open the Properties dialog box using one of the following methods: • To edit a single form field, double-click it or right-click/Control-click it and choose Properties. • To edit multiple form fields, select the fields that you want to edit, right-click/Control-click one of the selected fields, and choose Properties. 2 Make changes to the properties on each of the available tabs, as needed. 3 Click Close to apply and save the changed properties to the selected form fields. If you select form fields that have different property values, some options in the Properties dialog box are not available. Otherwise, changes to the available options are applied to all selected form fields. To avoid accidental changes to the form field, select Locked in the lower left corner of the Properties dialog box before you close it. To unlock, click the check box again. See also “Setting action buttons in Acrobat” on page 232 General tab for form field properties The General tab appears for all types of form fields and includes the following options: Name Specifies the unique name of the selected form field. Tooltip Displays text that the hesitant user may find helpful in filling in the form field. Tooltips appear when the pointer hovers briefly over the form field. Form Field Specifies whether the form field can be seen, either on screen or in print. The choices are: Visible, Hidden, Visible But Doesn’t Print, and Hidden But Printable. Orientation Rotates the form field by 0, 90, 180, or 270 Degrees Read Only Prevents the user from changing the form field content. Required Forces the user to fill in the selected form field. If the user attempts to submit the form while a required field is blank, an error message appears and the empty required form field is highlighted. Appearance tab for form field properties Appearance properties determine how the form field looks on the page. The Appearance tab appears for all types of form fields and includes the following options: Border Color Opens a color picker in which you can select a color swatch for the frame surrounding the field. To leave the field without a frame, select No Color. Line Thickness Specifies the width of the frame surrounding the form field: Thin, Medium, or Thick. Fill Color Opens a color picker in which you can select a color swatch for the background behind the field. To leave the field uncolored, select No Color. Note: A Fill Color choice other than No Color will block any images on the PDF page that are behind the form field. Line Style Alters the appearance of the frame. Select Solid, Dashed, Beveled, Inset, or Underline. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 224 User Guide Font Size Sets the size of user-entered text or of the selection marker for radio buttons and check boxes. The choices include Auto, various preset values, and typing in a different value. Text Color Opens a color picker in which you can select a color swatch for the text or selection marker. Font Lists the fonts available on your computer. This option is not available for form fields that do not display text. Note: The Enable Right-To-Left Language Options in the International panel of the Preferences dialog box affects what appears in the Appearance tab of the Properties dialog box. When that preference is selected, the Appearance tab includes options for changing the digit style (Western or Arabic-Indic) and text direction for text fields, combo boxes, and list boxes. Options tab for form field properties The options available on this tab change according to the type of form field selected. The Options tab appears for all form field types except digital signatures. Barcode The Options tab for barcode field properties contains the following: Symbology Includes the PDF417, QR Code, and Data Matrix barcode types. Note: If your organization processes forms by multiple methods, select the method that accommodates the lowest quality barcode images. For example, if forms will be returned by fax and mail, choose Fax Server as the decode condition to ensure high read rates on all forms. Compress Data Before Encoding To Barcode Specifies that data will be compressed before it is encoded. Data is compressed with the Flate compression method. Compressed data usually requires less storage space in the barcode, allowing more data to be stored. In general, select this option if you will use the Acrobat barcode forms decoder to interpret the returned data. Do not select this option if you will use a handheld barcode scanner, because most of these cannot decode compressed data. Decode Condition The preset decode conditions represent recommended starting points that you can adjust by clicking the Custom button. Custom Opens a dialog box in which you can select custom processing parameters that are best for your specific scanning and faxing hardware. (The available options vary according to barcode types.) • X Dimension Width, in mils (1 mil = 0.001 inch or 0.0254mm), of the cell. • Y/X Ratio Height/width ratio of the cell. For example, for a data cell that is twice as high as it is wide, enter 2. (Available only for PDF417 barcodes.) Note: If you are planning to decode the barcode using a handheld laser scanner, avoid creating barcodes wider than 4 inches (10.2 cm). Taller and narrower barcodes generally work better with handheld scanners. Barcode height and width will not be an issue if you are using an Adobe barcode decoder (available separately). • Error Correction Level Corresponds to the level of data redundancy that is added to the barcode to correct any potential decoding errors. Higher levels provide more redundancy and a more robust barcode that will generate more successful decode results. However, higher levels will also result in a larger barcode and a reduced ability to encode user-supplied or form structure data into the barcode. A more robust barcode can reduce problems created by pen marks, poor print quality, degradation caused by fax transmission, or folds in the document. This option is available for PDF417 and QR Code barcodes. Manage Barcode Parameters Enables you to save your custom barcode selections in a file. You can then export the file and make it available to other form authors in your organization. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 225 User Guide Check boxes Check Box Style Specifies the shape of the marker that appears inside the check box when the user selects it: Check (the default), Circle, Cross, Diamond, Square, or Star. This property does not alter the shape of the check box itself. Note: The size of the marker inside the check box is determined by the size of the font you specify in the Appearance tab. Export Value Specifies a value to represent the item if the data will be exported. If left blank, the entry for Name in the General tab is used as the export value. Check Box Is Checked By Default Shows the check box selected unless the user deselects it. Combo box and list box For either combo boxes or list boxes, you use the Options tab to create a list of items from which the user selects. Although most of the properties on this tab are common to both these types of form fields, a few are exclusive to one type or the other. Item Accepts the text that you type for options that you want to appear in the menu for the field. Add Moves the current entry in Item to the Item List. Export Value Where you type in a value to represent the item if the data will be exported. If left blank, the entry for Name in the General tab is used as the export value. Item List Displays the choices that will be available in the list. Note: The highlighted item in the Item List box appears as the default selected item in the combo box field. To change the default item, highlight another item from the list. Up and down arrows Change the order in which the items are listed in the combo-box list. These buttons are not available if Sort Items is selected. Note: The highlighted item in the Item List box appears as the default selected item in the combo box field. To change the default item, highlight another item from the list. Delete Removes the selected item from the list. Sort Items Arranges the listed items numerically and alphabetically. A numerical sort (if applicable) is performed before an alphabetical sort. Allow User To Enter Custom Text (Combo boxes only) Enables users to enter a value other than the ones in the list. Check Spelling (Combo boxes only) Checks the spelling of user-entered text. This option is available only if Allow User To Enter Custom Text is selected. Multiple Selection (List boxes only) Enables users to choose more than one item in the list. Commit Selected Value Immediately Saves the value as soon as the user selects it. If this option is not selected, the value is saved only when the user tabs out of the current field or clicks another form field. For list boxes only, this option is not available if Multiple Selection is selected. Radio buttons Button Style Specifies the shape of the marker that appears inside the button when the user selects it: Check, Circle (the default), Cross, Diamond, Square, or Star. This property does not alter the shape of the radio button itself. Export Value Identifies the radio button and differentiates it from other radio buttons that share the same Name value. Button Is Checked By Default Sets the selection state of the button when the user first opens the form. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 226 User Guide Buttons With The Same Name And Value Are Selected In Unison Allows single-click selection of multiple related radio buttons. For example, if the user selects a radio button that has the same field name and export value as another, both radio buttons are selected. Text Fields Text fields accept user input, which can be alphabetic characters, numbers, or both. Alignment Aligns the text left, right, or center within the field. Default Value Specifies the text that appears until the user overwrites it by typing in the field. Enter the default value by typing in this option. Multi-line Allows more than a single-line entry in the text field. Scroll Long Text Compensates for text that extends beyond the boundaries of the text field. Allow Rich Text Formatting Allows users to apply styling information to the text, such as bold or italic. This might be useful in certain text fields where such styling information is important to the meaning of the text, such as an essay. Limit Of Characters Allows entries of up to the number of characters you specify. Note: If you entered a default value, that value is clipped to this limit. Password Displays the user-entered text as a series of asterisks (*). This option is available only if Check Spelling is deselected. Field Is Used For File Selection Allows the user to enter a file path as the field’s value when a file is submitted along with the form. This option is available only when Scroll Long Text is the only selected option in the Options tab. Check Spelling Checks the spelling of user-entered text. Comb Of Characters Spreads the user-entered text evenly across the width of the text field. If a border color is specified in the Appearance tab, each character entered in the field is separated by lines of that color. This option is available only when no other check box is selected. A B Text fields with and without the Comb property A. Four text fields with a border color, using the Comb property B. Text field without the Comb property Actions tab for form field properties Actions properties specify any actions that you want to associate with the form field, such as jumping to a specific page or playing a media clip. The Actions tab appears for all types of form fields and includes the following options: Select Trigger Specifies the user action that initiates an action: Mouse Up, Mouse Down, Mouse Enter, Mouse Exit, On Focus, or On Blur. Select Action Specifies the event that occurs when the user triggers the action: Execute A Menu Item, Go To A 3D View, Go To A Page View; Import Form Data, Open A File, Open A Web Link, Play A Sound, Play Media (Acrobat 5 Compatible), Play Media (Acrobat 6 And Later Compatible), Read An Article, Reset A Form, Run A JavaScript, Set Layer Visibility, Show/Hide A Field, and Submit A Form. Add Opens a Browse-for-file window. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 227 User Guide Actions Displays the list of triggers and actions that you’ve defined. Up and down arrows Change the order in which the selected action appears listed under the trigger. (Available only when you have defined multiple actions for the same trigger.) Edit Opens a dialog box with specific options for the selected action. Delete Removes the selected action or trigger-action pair. Calculate tab for form field properties The Calculate tab appears in the Properties dialog boxes for only text boxes and combo boxes. Use these options to perform mathematical operations on existing form field entries and display the result. Value Is Not Calculated Select this if you want the user to type. Value Is The Select this to make further options available: • Pop-up Menu Lists the mathematical functions to apply to the selected fields. Choose Sum to add the values entered in the selected fields, Product to multiply them, Average, Minimum, or Maximum. • Pick Opens a dialog box with a list of the available fields in the form that you select to add or deselect to remove from the calculation. Simplified Field Notation Uses JavaScript with field names and simple arithmetic signs. The Edit button opens a dialog box in which you can write, edit, and add scripts. Custom Calculation Script Displays any custom scripts you have added for calculations. The Edit button opens a dialog box in which you can write and add new JavaScripts. Set the calculation order of form fields When you define two or more calculations in a form, the order in which they are carried out is the order in which you defined the calculations. In some cases, you may need to modify the calculation order to obtain correct results. For example, if you wanted to use the result obtained from calculating two form fields to calculate the value of a third form field, the first two form fields must be calculated together first to obtain the correct final results. 1 Choose Forms > Edit Fields > Set Field Calculation Order. The Calculate Fields dialog box displays all calculable fields in your form and the order in which the calculations are performed. 2 To change the field calculation order, select the field from the list, and then click the Up or Down button as needed. Acrobat automatically performs all assigned field calculations when you are creating and testing your form fields. For convenience while you work, you can turn off automatic calculation in the forms preferences. Signed tab for form field properties The Signed tab is available only in the Digital Signature Properties dialog box. Selections made here determine what happens when the user applies a digital signature to the form. Nothing Happens When Signed This is the default. Mark As Read-Only Prevents further changes to the digitally signed form, according to the selection in the pop-up menu: • All Fields Prevents any changes to any form field. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 228 User Guide • All Fields Except These Allows changes only to the form fields you select by clicking the Pick button and selecting check boxes for the fields that you want the user to be able to edit after signing. • Just These Fields Prevents changes in only the form fields you pick. This Script Executes When Field Is Signed Activates a custom JavaScript when the user digitally signs the form. Use the Edit button to change or create a new JavaScript action. See also “Adding JavaScript to forms” on page 214 Format tab for form field properties The Format tab appears in the Properties dialog box for only text form fields or combo box form fields. The options that are available depend on your selection in the Select Format Category pop-up menu. None No additional options are available. The input in a text or combo box with this property does not require any specific formatting. Number Automatically imposes the selected formatting options on numeric data entries. Decimal Places Sets the number of digits that appear to the right of the decimal point. Separator Style Sets the placement of commas and periods. Currency Symbol Sets the type of currency, such as Euros, Dollars, or Yen. Negative Number Style Sets how negative numbers are displayed. You can choose Show Parentheses, Use Red Text, neither, or both. Percentage Automatically imposes the selected formatting options on numeric data expressed as a percentage. Decimal Places Sets the number of digits that appear to the right of the decimal point Separator Style Sets the placement of commas and periods. Date List includes one-, two-, and four-digit variations where d stands for the day, m stands for month, and y stands for year. Time List includes display variations where h stands for the hour on a 12-hour clock, H stands for the hour on a 24-hour clock, MM stands for minutes, ss stands for the seconds, and tt stands for AM or PM. Special Zip Code For a five-digit U.S. postal code. Zip Code + 4 For a nine-digit U.S. postal code. Phone Number For a ten-digit telephone number. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 229 User Guide Social Security Number For a nine-digit U.S. Social Security Number. Hyphens are inserted automatically after the third and fifth digits. Arbitrary Mask Changes the format category to Custom and makes another text box available, in which you can type a custom format. Use this option to specify which types of characters the user can enter in any given position, and how the data displays in the field. • A Accepts only letters (A–Z, a–z). • X Accepts spaces and most printable characters, including all characters available on a standard keyboard and ANSI characters in the ranges of 32–126 and 128–255. • O The letter “O” accepts alphanumeric characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9). • 9 Accepts only numeric characters (0–9). For example, a mask setting of AAA--p#999 accepts the input BOE--p#767. A mask setting of OOOOO@XXX accepts the input vad12@3Up. Example of an Arbitrary Mask entry Custom Makes additional options available to form designers who want to write their own JavaScripts for formatting and keystrokes. For example, a custom script could define a new currency format or limit the user entry to specific keystroke characters. Custom Format Script Displays any custom scripts you have added for formats. The Edit button opens a dialog box in which you can write and add new scripts. Custom Keystroke Script Displays any custom scripts you have added to validate keystrokes. The Edit button opens a dialog box in which you can write and add new scripts. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 230 User Guide To get t he JavaScript for Acrobat API Reference, go to the JavaScript support page (English only) of the Adobe website. Validation tab for form field properties The Validation tab appears only in the Text Field Properties and Combo Box Properties dialog boxes. Validation properties restrict entries to specified ranges, values, or characters, ensuring that users enter the appropriate data for a specified form field. Field Value Is Not Validated Turns off validation. Field Value Is In Range Sets a numeric range for form fields using values you enter in either as a number or a percentage. Run Custom Validation Script Validates by a JavaScript that you create or provide. See also “Adding JavaScript to forms” on page 214 Value tab for form field properties The Value tab appears for barcode form fields only. Encode Using Activates these options: • XML Encodes the data into the barcode in standard XFDF format. JavaScript script is automatically generated. • Tab Delimited Encodes the fields into the barcode as tab-delimited values. JavaScript script is automatically generated. If the form is configured to output the data in individual XFDF or XDP files, the data must be in a tabdelimited format with the field names in the first line. This option is also useful if you want to fit more data into a barcode or if you intend to copy the data into database or spreadsheet tables. • Pick Opens a dialog box in which you select which user data fields will be encoded in the barcode for you to retrieve. • Include Field Names (Available only when Tab Delimited encoding is selected.) Encodes field names as the first line of the barcode contents. The values are encoded under them. Custom Calculation Script Displays the default script. Click the Edit button to open the JavaScript Editor dialog box, in which you can write custom calculation scripts for your barcode. Reference To published Form Shows the path to the PDF form. You can edit this by typing in the URL to the published form. Later, you can re-create a digital version of the completed form by merging the form template with an instance of user-supplied data. You can also maintain the relationship between a specific form template and its related barcode data files. When you encode a barcode using XML values, the URL reference is encoded into the barcode and is displayed on the form, below the barcode. http://www.adobe.com/formscatalog/thisform.pdf A type of barcode, with the URL reference below Manage custom barcode settings You can save, reuse, and share a set of custom settings for barcode parameters, to apply them when you create new barcode form fields. You can make further adjustments to your custom parameter sets after you define them. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 231 User Guide All of these processes begin by opening the barcode form field properties dialog box, which you can do by using the Select Object tool (Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool) to select a barcode form field, and then choosing Forms > Show Field Properties. See also “Create, test, and edit barcode fields” on page 219 “Design tips for barcodes” on page 210 Create a new barcode parameters set 1 In the Barcode Field Properties dialog box, click the Options tab, and then click Manage Barcode Parameters. 2 Select the existing parameter set that you want to use as the basis of the new set, and click New. 3 Type a name in the Name box and a description in the Description box. 4 Select options for Barcode Type, X Dimension, Y/X Ratio, and Error Correction Level, and then click OK. The newly defined parameter set appears in the list in the Manage Barcode Parameters dialog box, and all the buttons on the right side of the dialog box become available. The new definition also appears in the Decode Condition menu in the Options tab of the Barcode Field Properties dialog box. Edit or delete a set of custom barcode parameters 1 In the Barcode Field Properties dialog box, click the Options tab, and then click Manage Barcode Parameters. 2 Select a custom parameter set from the list. 3 Choose the appropriate action: • Click Edit and make the changes to the settings; then click OK. • Click Delete. Confirm the deletion in the message that appears by clicking OK. Export or import a set of custom barcode parameters 1 In the Barcode Field Properties dialog box, click the Options tab, and then click Manage Barcode Parameters. 2 Choose the appropriate action: • Select a barcode parameter set from the list and click Export. Select a location and file name for the file that has the file name extension .bps. • Click Import, and navigate to and select the BPS file that you want to import. Redefine form field property defaults After you change properties for a specific type of form field, you can set those properties as the default set for that type. For example, you can create a check box, change its properties, and then save the properties as the default values. This would not affect the default properties of other types of form fields, such as text boxes or radio buttons. 1 If necessary, do one of the following to go to form-editing mode and to activate the Select Object tool: • Choose Forms > Edit Form In Acrobat so that a check mark appears next to that command in the Forms menu. • Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool. 2 Right-click/Control-click the form field for which you have already changed properties, and choose Use Current Properties As New Defaults. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 232 User Guide Note: Changing the default properties does not change the settings for existing form fields of that type. The new defaults apply only to new fields that you create. Setting action buttons in Acrobat About buttons Buttons are most commonly associated with forms, but you can add them to any document. Buttons can open a file, play a sound or movie clip, submit data to a web server, and much more. When deciding on how to initiate an action, remember that buttons offer the following capabilities that links and bookmarks do not: • A button can activate a single action or a series of actions. • A button can change appearance in response to mouse actions. • A button can be easily copied across many pages. • Mouse actions can activate different button actions. For example, Mouse Down (a click), Mouse Up (releasing after a click), Mouse Enter (moving the pointer over the button), and Mouse Exit (moving the pointer away from the button) can all start a different action for the same button. Buttons are an easy, intuitive way to let users initiate an action in PDF documents. Buttons can have a combination of labels and icons to lead users through a series of actions or events by changing as the mouse is moved. For example, you can create buttons with “Play,” “Pause,” and “Stop” labels and appropriate icons. Then you can set actions for these buttons to play, pause, and stop a movie clip. You can select any combination of mouse behaviors for a button and specify any combination of actions for a mouse behavior. Add a button to an Acrobat PDF form 1 In Acrobat, choose Tools > Forms > Button Tool. 2 Drag the cross hair to create the button area. 3 Click the General tab, and then specify a name, tool tip text, and other common properties. 4 Click the Appearance tab, and then specify options to determine how the button will look on the page. Remember, if you select a background color, you won’t be able to see through to any images behind the button. The text options affect the label you specify in the Options tab, not the button name in the General tab. Note: If Enable Right-To-Left Language Options is selected in the International panel of the Preferences dialog box, the Appearance tab includes options for changing the digit style and text direction for buttons. 5 Click the Options tab, and select options to determine how labels and icons appear on the button. 6 Click the Actions tab, and then specify options to determine what happens when the button is clicked, such as jumping to a different page or playing a media clip. 7 Click Close. If you’re creating a set of buttons, you may want to snap the object to grid lines or guides. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 233 User Guide Add a submit button Forms that will be returned by a network or Internet connection must have a submit button, which users click to send completed forms back to you. 1 Using the Button tool, create a button and set options in the General and Options tabs. 2 In the Appearance tab, choose an option in the Layout menu for the button label, icon image, or both, and then do one or both of the following: • Type text in the Label option to identify the button as a submit button. • Click Choose Icon and either type the path to an image file or click Browse and locate the image file you want to use. 3 In the Actions tab, choose Submit A Form on the Select Action menu, and then click Add. 4 In the Enter A URL For This Link box, do one of the following: • To collect form data on a server, type the location. For example: http://www.[domain]/[folder]/[subfolder]/ for an Internet address or \\[server]\[folder]\[subfolder]\ for a location on a local network. • To collect form data as attachments to email, type mailto: followed by the email address. For example, mailto:nobody@adobe.com. 5 Select options for Export Format, Field Select, and Date Options, and click OK. Note: If the data returns in FDF or XFDF format, the server URL must end with the #FDF suffix—for example, http://myserver/cgi-bin/myscript#FDF. Submit Form Selections options The following options are available in the Submit Forms Selections dialog box: FDF Returns the user input without sending back the underlying PDF file. You can select options to include Comments and Incremental Changes To The PDF. Note: Selecting the option for incremental changes is useful for receiving digital signatures in a way that is easily read and reconstructed by a server. HTML Returns the form in hypertext markup language. XFDF Returns the user input as an XML file. You can include Comments with the field data or just the field data. PDF Returns the entire PDF file with the user input. Field Selection Specifies what fields are returned. To receive only some of the completed field data, select Only These, click Select Fields, and select which fields to include or exclude in the Field Selection dialog box. For example, you might use this to exclude some calculated or duplicate fields that appear in the form for the user’s benefit but which do not add new information. Date Options Standardizes the format for dates that the user enters. Edit a button in Acrobat ? Select the Button tool , and then do any of the following: • To edit the button’s properties, double-click the button. • To change the button’s appearance, click the button, and then specify options using the Properties toolbar. You can also change these appearance options in the Appearance tab of the Properties dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 234 User Guide • To align, center, or distribute the button with other form fields, or to resize or duplicate the button, right-click (Windows) or Control-click (Mac OS) the button, and then choose an option from the context menu. See also “Scale and position buttons in Acrobat” on page 234 Specify Acrobat button display properties 1 Select the Button tool or the Select Object tool . 2 Double-click an existing button, and then click the Options tab in the Button Properties dialog box. 3 For Layout, choose the type of label display you want. (For information on scaling button icons, see the next procedure.) 4 For Behavior, specify the display of the button when clicked. 5 To define the label or icon that appears on the button, do the following: • If a label option is selected from the Layout menu, type the text in the Label box. • If an icon option is selected from the Layout menu, click Choose Icon, and then click Browse. Select the file type from the Objects of Type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS) menu, double-click the file name, and then click OK. (Click Clear to remove the selected icon.) 6 Click Close to accept these display properties. Button Behavior options None Keeps the appearance of the button the same. Push Specifies appearances for the Up, Down, and Rollover states of the mouse. Select an option under State, and then specify a label or icon option: Up Determines what the button looks like when the mouse button isn’t clicked. Down Determines what the button looks like when the mouse is clicked on the button, but before it’s released. Rollover Determines what the button looks like when the pointer is held over the button. Outline Highlights the button border. Invert Reverses the dark and light shades of the button. Scale and position buttons in Acrobat 1 Select the Button tool or the Select Object tool . 2 Double-click an existing button to open the Button Properties dialog box. 3 Click the Options tab, select one of the icon options from the Layout menu, and then click Advanced. Note: The Advanced button isn’t available if you choose Label Only from the Layout menu. 4 Select an option from the When To Scale menu: Always Scales the icon as defined regardless of its size in relation to the button size. Never Preserves the icon’s original size; the button border crops the icon if it doesn’t fit. If Never is selected, scale options aren’t available. Icon Is Too Big Scales the icon as defined only if it is larger than the button. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 235 User Guide Icon Is Too Small Scales the icon as defined only if it is smaller than the button. 5 From the Scale menu, select whether or not to scale the icon proportionally. If the icon is scaled nonpropor­ tionally, it may be skewed. 6 To make sure that either the top and bottom or left and right sides of the icon are flush against the button edges, select Fit To Bounds. 7 To define where the icon is placed inside the button, drag the slider arrows. Icon placement is defined according to the percentage of space preserved between the icon and the left field boundary, and between the icon and the bottom field boundary. The default setting (50, 50) places the icon in the middle of a field. You can click Reset at any time to revert to the default placement setting. 8 Click OK, and then click Close. Hide an Acrobat button except during rollover In some cases, you may want the button area to be invisible until the pointer moves over it. By alternately showing and hiding a button, you can create interesting visual effects in a document. For example, when you move a pointer over a city on a map, a detail map of the city could be displayed, and the detail map could disappear when the pointer moves away from the city. A B C Showing and hiding icons A. Pointer not over button area B. Pointer enters button area C. Pointer exits button area 1 Using the Button tool , drag across the area where you want the pop-up button to appear. For example, if the PDF file contains a map of France, drag across the area where you want a detailed map of Paris to pop up. 2 Double-click the button. 3 Click the Options tab, and choose Icon Only from the Layout menu. 4 Choose Push from the Behavior menu, and then choose Rollover from the State list. 5 Click Choose Icon, and then click Browse. Select the file type from the File Of Type (Windows) or Show (Mac OS) menu, navigate to the location of the image file, and then double-click the file. In this example, you would select a map of Paris. Click OK to accept the previewed image as the button. 6 Click the Appearance tab. If needed, deselect Border Color and Fill Color, and then click Close. 7 Select the Hand tool , and move the pointer across the button. The image field you defined appears as the pointer rolls over the button area and disappears when it exits. If you want the image to be larger than the rollover area, or if you want the image to be in a different location than the image button that pops up, use the Show/Hide A Field action. First, you specify an icon for the button that will be shown and hidden. Next, you create a second button that acts as a hot spot when the mouse rolls over it. You do not assign an icon for the appearance of the second button. Instead, you use the Actions tab to show the first button when the pointer enters the second button, and hide the first button when the pointer exits. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 236 User Guide Distributing forms Distribute a form by email If you want to distribute the form immediately and through your default email application, you can complete the distribution process entirely in the Distribute Form wizard. However, if you want to distribute the form later, or if you want to distribute it through a web-based email account, the process is slightly different. Distribute the form now 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Forms > Distribute Form. • In the Forms toolbar, click the Distribute button . • Choose Tools > Forms > Distribute. • On the Tasks toolbar, choose Distribute Form on the Forms button menu. Note:In order to distribute a form, it must contain a submit button. Otherwise, the Distribute commands and Distribute button may not be available. 2 A series of messages might appear, depending on the conditions Acrobat detects in your form. Respond to the onscreen instructions as needed, to finalize fields, add a submit button, clear any sample data, and save the form. 3 In the form Distribution Options dialog box, select Send Now Via Email. 4 Follow the instructions that appear in the Distribute Form wizard providing all the following information, and clicking Next after each addition: • The email address to which the form data will return. • A location for the data collection file. • Email addresses for all the individuals to whom the form will be sent. • Text for the email subject line and message body text, if you want something other than the default text. Or, you can click Select Text File and browse to select a text file that you have created with content for the message body text. 5 Click Done, and then open the Outbox in your default email application and review the prepared message. Notice that the recipient addresses are automatically listed in the Bcc box, so that the identities of the addressees are hidden from all recipients. Prepare the form for later distribution 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Forms > Distribute Form. • In the Forms toolbar, click the Distribute button • In the Tasks toolbar, choose Distribute Form on the Forms button menu. Note:In order to distribute a form, it must contain a submit button. Otherwise, the Distribute commands and Distribute button may not be available. 2 A series of messages might appear, depending on the conditions Acrobat detects in your form. Respond to the onscreen instructions as needed, to finalize fields, add a submit button, clear any sample data, and save the form. 3 In the form Distribution Options dialog box, select Save And Send Later. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 237 User Guide 4 Follow the instructions that appear in the Distribute Form wizard. The wizard saves two versions of the PDF form. The default name given to one is [original file name]_dataset_0001.pdf, which is where returned data will be collected. The other PDF is the one that is attached to email for distribution. Its default name is [original file name]_pub_0001.pdf. 5 When you are ready to distribute the form, open the email application or web-based email site, create a new message, address it to the people you want to fill in the form, and add Subject line and message text. When you send out a form to more than one person, it’s usually a good idea to place all addresses on the Bcc address line so that the identities of the recipients are hidden from all viewers. 6 Add the [original file name]_pub_0001.pdf as an attachment to the outgoing email message, and click Send. Send secure forms Sending a secure form certifies the form-originator’s identity to form recipients and encrypts the data that the recip­ ients submit when returning a filled-in form. 1 Open the form, and do one of the following: • If the form is open in Acrobat, choose Forms > Distribute Forms. • If the form is open in LiveCycle Designer, choose File > Distribute Forms. 2 In the Form Distribution Options dialog box, specify whether you want to send the form now or save it to send later. 3 In the Distribute Form wizard, enter the email address to which completed forms will be sent, and select Secure Forms On Return. 4 Continue through the Distribute Form wizard, following the on-screen instructions. Requirements • The form must be an Adobe XFA form, which is the format applied by LiveCycle Designer. If you edited the form in Acrobat, you must save it in LiveCycle Designer (available only for Windows) before you can use the sendsecure feature. • The form must contain a submit button that is configured with an email return address, such as mailto:nobody@adobe.com. • The form originator must have a digital ID. See “Creating or obtaining digital IDs” on page 253. Publishing interactive web forms About web forms PDF forms can be useful for submitting and collecting information over the web. This is done by providing several button actions that perform functions similar to some HTML scripting macros. You must have a Common Gateway Interface (CGI) application on the web server to collect and route the data to a database. Any existing CGI appli­ cation that collects data from forms (in HTML, FDF, or XML format) can be used. Before you make your forms web-ready, make sure that your form-field names match those set in the CGI appli­ cation. Important: CGI scripts must be built outside Acrobat, and their creation is not covered by the Adobe Acrobat product. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 238 User Guide Add submit functionality Use the Submit A Form action to send form data to an email address or to a web server by specifying a URL. You can also use the submit button to send other files back to a server or database. For example, you can attach scanned images or files to a form. The files are submitted along with the rest of the form data when you click the submit button. If your PDF form contains an email-based submit button, you can use the Distribute Form workflow to facilitate distributing the form to others. 1 In the Acrobat Forms toolbar, select the Button tool, and create a button. 2 Double-click the button to open the Button Properties dialog box. 3 Click the Actions tab, and select Mouse Up from the Select Trigger menu. 4 Select Submit a Form from the Select Action menu, and then click Add. 5 In the Submit Form Selections dialog box, type an entry in Enter A URL For This Link: • To send the form data to a web server, enter the destination URL. • To send the form data to an email address, enter mailto: followed by the email address. For example, type mailto:nobody@adobe.com. 6 Make additional changes to the available options, and then click OK to close the dialog box. 7 Change settings on other tabs in the Button Properties dialog box as needed, and then click Close. Submit Form Selections options FDF Exports as an FDF file. You can select one or more of the available options: user-entered data, comments, and incremental changes to the PDF file. The Incremental Changes To The PDF option is useful for exporting a digital signature in a way a server can easily read and reconstruct. Note: If the server returns data to the user in FDF or XFDF format, the server’s URL must end with the #FDF suffix— for example, http://myserver/cgi-bin/myscript#FDF. HTML Exports as an HTML file. XFDF Exports as an XML file. You can choose to export the form fields data, comments, or both. PDF The Complete Document Exports the entire PDF file that is your form. Although this creates a larger file than the FDF option, it is useful for preserving digital signatures. Note: If the users that fill in the PDF form are using Adobe Reader, you must choose either FDF or XFDF for the Export Format option. All Fields Exports all form fields even if the form fields do not contain values. Only These Exports only the form fields you specify by clicking Select Fields and indicating which form fields to include and whether you want to include empty fields. Convert Date To Standard Format Exports all form dates in a single format, regardless of how they are entered in the form. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 239 User Guide Add a Reset Form button (in Acrobat) A Reset Form button clears any data a user has already entered in the form. It is similar to the Forms > Clear Form feature, which is available to you when you create and edit Acrobat forms. However, you can set up your reset button so that it clears only specific fields. 1 In the Forms toolbar, select the Button tool, and create a button. 2 Double-click the button to open the Button Properties dialog box. 3 Click the Actions tab, and select Mouse Up from the Select Trigger menu. 4 Select Reset A Form from the Select Action menu, and then click Add. 5 In the Reset A Form dialog box, either click individual check boxes to select or deselect the fields that you want to be reset by the button or select Select All. Then click OK. The list in the Actions tab now shows Reset A Form nested under the Mouse Up action. As needed, you can open other tabs in the Button Properties dialog box and apply other types of properties to the button. See also “Form fields behaviors” on page 222 Add an Import Data button (in Acrobat) You can use the Import Form Data action to enable users to fill out common form fields, such as name and email address, with data imported from another form. Users can also use the Import Data button to populate common form fields with their personal profile information. Only form fields that match are updated. Those that do not match are ignored. Before you create an Import Form Data action, you must have set up a form with common infor­ mation form fields from which the data will be exported. Note: The Import Form Data action searches for the data file from which to import data in different locations in Windows than on Mac OS. In Windows, the Import Form Data action searches the Acrobat or Acrobat Reader folder, the current folder, the System folder, the Windows folder, My Documents\Adobe\Acrobat, and the folders that are in the PATH statement. On Mac OS, the Import Form Data action searches the Acrobat or Acrobat Reader folder and the System Preferences folder. 1 In the Forms toolbar, select the Button tool, and create a button. 2 Double-click the button to open the Button Properties dialog box. 3 Click the Actions tab, and select Mouse Up from the Select Trigger menu. 4 Select Import Form Data from the Select Action menu, and then click Add. 5 Locate and select an FDF file, and click Select. 6 Click OK to accept the selections. 7 Click another tab in the Button Properties dialog box to continue defining properties for the button, or click Close. See also “Import form data” on page 204 “Add a button to an Acrobat PDF form” on page 232 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 240 User Guide CGI export values An export value is the information sent to a CGI application to identify a user-selected form field. You need to define an export value only if both of the following are true: • The data is collected electronically in a database over a company intranet or the web. • The data is different from the item designated by the form field, or the form field is a radio button. When defining export values, keep the following guidelines in mind: • Use the default export value (Yes) to indicate that a check box or radio button has been selected. • Enter an export value for combo boxes or list boxes only if you want the value to be different from the item listed— for example, to match the name of the form field in a database. The item selected in the combo box or list box is used as the export value unless a different export value is explicitly entered in the Properties dialog box. • Related radio buttons must have exactly the same form field name but different export values. This ensures that the radio buttons toggle and that the correct values will be collected in the database. Collecting and managing form data About data set files Data set files are PDF packages that contain individual records submitted for a specific form that you have distributed. You create the data set file during the distribution process, as one of the steps in the Distribute Form wizard. You can also create a data set file after the distribution process and then add individual records to that file. For more information, choose Help > Complete Adobe Acrobat 8 Professional Help, and search for “About PDF packages” and “Distributing forms.” Add completed form data to a data set file 1 In your email application, open an email message with a completed form attached to it. 2 Double-click the returned form icon in the email. 3 In the Add Completed Form To Data Set dialog box, select one of the following: Add To An Existing Data Set Compiles the data in the data set you created when you used the Distribute Form wizard to send out the form. (If necessary, click Browse and locate that data set file.) Create A New Data Set Creates a new data set, using the name and location you specify by typing and clicking the Browse button. The data set opens after you click OK. Each returned form added to the data set appears as a component file of a PDF package. Compile form data 1 In Acrobat, choose Forms > Compile Returned Forms. 2 In the Compile Data dialog box, do one of the following to select a PDF data set file: • Click Browse, and then locate and select the data set file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 241 User Guide • Choose a data set file from the menu. • Type the path to the data set file. 3 Click Add File, and navigate to the returned form. 4 Repeat the previous step as many times as necessary to add more returned forms. After you click OK, the data from the selected forms is added to the data set. Each returned form appears as a component file of a PDF package. Add records to an existing data set 1 In Acrobat, open the data set PDF file. 2 In the data set navigation bar (between the toolbar area and the document pane), click Import Data. 3 In the Add Returned Forms dialog box, click Add File. Then locate and select the returned form data files, and click Open. 4 Repeat the previous step to add any returned forms in other folders. When finished, click OK. When you finish, each added data file appears as a component file of the data set PDF package. Export records from a PDF data set Use this process to save all the entries in a data set PDF package to a spreadsheet or XML file. 1 In Acrobat, open the data set PDF file. 2 In the data set navigation bar (between the toolbar area and the document pane), click Export Data. 3 In the Select Folder To Save File dialog box, specify a name, location, and file format (CSV or XML) for the form data, and click Save. Manage form data files You can move the answers on a PDF form to and from other file formats that preserve all the data in much less space than a full PDF. Import form data In some workflow scenarios, individuals submit filled-in forms as data-only files rather than as complete PDF files. These files are not PDFs, but use another file format, such as FDF or XML. You can view the data submitted by an individual recipient in the context of the PDF by opening the original file and importing the information in the data file. 1 In Acrobat, open the PDF form into which you want to import data. 2 Choose Forms > Clear Form. Note: When you import data from another file into a PDF form, the imported data replaces any information that appeared previously in the individual form fields. However, if the imported data file contains one or more blank form fields, importing will not clear the original data. 3 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Import Data. 4 In the Select File Containing Form Data dialog box, select a format in File Of Type (FDF, XFDF, XML, XDP, XFT, TXT, or All Files) corresponding to the data file you want to import. Then locate and select that file, and click Select. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 242 User Guide Note: Some formats are available only for specific types of PDF forms, depending on the application used to create the form, such as Acrobat or LiveCycle Designer. Data you import from a text file (.txt) must be formatted in tab-delimited rows that form columns. Export file data You can save the information in a completed PDF form as a data file in another file format. Later, you can reuse the data to fill in the form again or another form with the same fields and field names. 1 In Acrobat, open the completed form file. 2 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Export Data. 3 In the Export Form Data As dialog box, select the format in which you want to save the form data (FDF, XFDF, XML, or TXT). Then select a location and filename, and click Save. Note: Some file formats are available only for specific types of PDF forms, depending on how the form was created. Merge exported data files to a spreadsheet If you want to compile data from forms that are not already in a data set, use the following process. 1 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Merge Data Files Into Spreadsheet. 2 In the Export Data From Multiple Forms dialog box, click Add Files. 3 In the Select file Containing Form Data dialog box, select a file format option in File Of Type option (Acrobat Form Data Files or All Files). Then locate the form files that you want to merge into the spreadsheet, select them, and click Select. 4 Repeat the previous step to add form data files that are in other locations, as needed. 5 Click Export. Then select a folder and filename for the spreadsheet, and click Save. 6 In the Export Progress dialog box, click either View File Now to open the spreadsheet file or Close Dialog to return to Acrobat. Note: When returned forms are in a data set, the most efficient way to export the information into a spreadsheet is to use the Export Data button in the navigation bar for the data set PDF package. About Forms Tracker The Forms Tracker is a panel of the same window in which you track PDF reviews and subscriptions. There are several ways to open the Forms Tracker: • Choose Forms > Track Forms. • In the Tasks toolbar, choose Track Forms from the Forms button pop-up menu. • In the Review Tracker window (opened by choosing Comments > Review Tracker), click the Forms Tracker button on the left side of the window. Four buttons appear on the left side of the Forms Tracker. Each one opens a different panel when clicked: To Do, History, Search Results, and Forms Library. These panels can remind you of the status of various forms that are part of your workflow and make it easy to find and reopen those forms. You add a form to the Forms Library panel during the forms-distribution process. At the end of the Distribute Form wizard, a message appears, stating that the form has been sent to your default email application. This message also includes an Add To My Form Library option. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 243 User Guide Search for forms It is not necessary to have any PDF open when you search for forms. 1 Choose Forms > Track Forms. 2 In the Search text box at the top of the Forms Tracker, type all or part of the filename for the forms you want to find, and then click Search. The Search Results panel opens automatically, showing a list of forms that match your search text. 244 Chapter 8: Security Document security is similar to home security. Just as you lock your doors to prevent someone from entering your house without permission, you use security features to lock an Adobe PDF. For example, you can use passwords to restrict users from opening, printing, and editing PDFs. You can use a certificate to encrypt PDFs so that only an approved list of users can open them. If you want to save security settings for later use, you can create a security policy that stores security settings. Note: To apply security features to PDFs, you need Adobe Acrobat 8 Professional, Acrobat 8 Standard, or Acrobat 3D Version 8. Quickstart The following topics provide an overview of some common security tasks. Check security restrictions When you receive a PDF, it may contain restrictions preventing actions such as printing or copying information. 1 Click Security Settings or Signatures to the left of the document window. (The Security Settings button only appears when the PDF contains security restrictions.) 2 View restriction information. In the Security Settings panel, you can click Permission Details to get more infor­ mation. If you cannot open a PDF or are restricted from using certain features, contact the PDF author. See also “Open secured PDFs” on page 247 Examine a PDF for hidden content Before making a PDF available to others, you may wish to remove content that reveals the document history or that contains your personal information, such as metadata that lists your name as the author. 1 Choose Document > Examine Document. 2 Select the items you want removed from the PDF, and click Remove All Checked Items. 3 Save the document with a new name. You can also examine a PDF at the end of a redaction process. See also “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248 Redact sensitive content Use redaction to remove sensitive content from a PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 245 User Guide Important: Save a copy of the PDF before applying redaction markups. 1 Choose View > Toolbars > Redaction. 2 Click Mark For Redaction , and do any of the following: • Double-click a word or an image. • Drag across text. • Ctrl-drag/Control-drag over an area of the page. 3 Click Apply Redactions . Search for and remove hidden content, if desired. Use Search And Redact to remove all instances of a search string. See also “Redact sensitive content” on page 249 Register a digital ID You must register a digital ID in Acrobat before you can use it. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs, and click Add ID. 3 Select Browse For An Existing Digital ID File. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to select the digital ID file, type your password, and register the digital ID. You can create self-signed digital IDs in Acrobat. Or, see the Adobe website for information on acquiring a digital ID from Adobe security partners. See also “Register a digital ID” on page 254 Create a self-signed digital ID A digital ID is required to sign documents and apply certificate security. Self-signed digital IDs created from Acrobat may be adequate for many situations. See the Adobe website for information on acquiring a digital ID from Adobe security partners. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs, and click Add ID. 3 Select Create A Self-Signed Digital ID For Use With Acrobat. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the self-signed digital ID. See also “Create a self-signed digital ID” on page 254 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 246 User Guide . Share your certificate Your digital ID includes a certificate that others require to validate your signature and encrypt documents for you. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left. 3 Select the ID you want to share, and click Export 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to email the certificate or save it to a file. If you use a third-party security method, you usually don’t need to share your certificate with others. See also “Sharing certificates with others” on page 258 Add a document password One way to restrict access to a PDF is to add a Document Open password. Important: There is no way to open the PDF if you forget the password. 1 Click Secure on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Password Encrypt. 2 Select Require A Password To Open The Document, and type a case-sensitive password in the text box. If the PDF already has security applied, you may need to supply the Permissions password that lets you change security settings. See also “Set passwords for PDFs” on page 264 Prevent changes to a PDF Add security restrictions to help prevent others from changing your PDF. 1 Click Secure on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Password Encryption. 2 Select Restrict Editing And Printing Of The Document, and type a Permissions password. 3 Choose an option from the Changes Allowed menu. For information on using other security methods to restrict access, see Help. See also “Set passwords for PDFs” on page 264 Create secure attachments You can add security to both PDF and non-PDF documents by embedding them in an encrypted envelope, called a security envelope, that you can send as an email attachment. 1 Click Secure on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Create Security Envelope. 2 Click Add File To Send, and select the desired documents. 3 Click Next, and follow the on-screen instructions to create the security envelope. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 247 User Guide Recipients can extract and save the encrypted documents. Once saved, the documents are no longer encrypted. See also “Create secure attachments” on page 268 Opening restricted documents Open secured PDFs If you receive a PDF that is protected by security features, you may need a password to open the document. Some protected documents have restrictions that prevent you from printing, editing, or copying content in the document. If a document has restricted features, any tools and menu items related to those features are dimmed. ? If a document is restricted or has a special status, the Security Settings button or the Signatures button appear to the left of the document window. Click the button to discover the protection settings and determine which features are restricted. If you have trouble opening a PDF, or if you’re restricted from using certain features, contact the author of the PDF. Restrict URLs and attachments in PDFs Acrobat warns you any time you try to open a URL (web link) or a file attachment that uses a disallowed file type. URLs and disallowed file types (for example, EXE) are potentially dangerous because they can transfer or run programs, macros, or viruses that can damage your computer. You can allow Acrobat to contact specific websites by adding those URLs to your list of allowed websites in the Trust Manager preferences. Remove any URLs you no longer want to visit. To open file attachments in Acrobat, you must respond to a prompt by indicating that you always allow files of that type. The attachment’s file type is then added to a list stored in the registry. If you want to restrict a file type that you permitted in the past, you can reset this list to its default settings in the Trust Manager preferences. Trust Manager preferences To open the Trust Manager preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Trust Manager on the left. Allow Opening Of Non-PDF File Attachments With External Applications When selected, allows file attachments to start external applications when you open the files. You must have the external applications to open the files. Restore Default List Of Allowed And Disallowed File Attachment Types Removes saved settings you chose for opening attachments. For example, if you chose to always open TMP attachments when prompted, TMP appears on the list of allowed file attachment types. By clicking Restore, you remove TMP from the list. Change Settings When clicked, lets you specify the default behavior for accessing the Internet from PDFs. To restrict access to only the URLs you specify, select Let Me Specify A List Of Allowed And Blocked Web Sites (the default). To allow access to all URLs, select Allow All Web Sites. To restrict access with all URLs in PDFs, select Block All Web Sites. To specify a list of allowed and blocked websites, type each URL in the text box, and click Allow or Block. Then specify the default behavior for Acrobat for websites that aren’t in the list. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 248 User Guide Note: If you open a protected PDF and a security warning dialog box prompts you to allow or block a URL, select Remember My Action For This Site, and the URL is added to this list. Allow External Content Allows Acrobat to read data from stream objects in a PDF. Stream objects are URLs or file specifications identified by flags, as specified in PDF Reference Version Fifth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.6. Use this option if you’re a PDF developer who creates PDF files that contain streams, or if you work with these types of files. Removing sensitive content Preparing PDFs for distribution Before you distribute a PDF, you may want to examine the document for sensitive content or private information that can trace the document to you. Such information may be hidden or not immediately apparent. For example, if you created the PDF, the document metadata likely lists your name as the author. You may also want to remove content that can inadvertently change and modify the document’s appearance. JavaScripts, actions, and form fields are types of content that are subject to change. If your document doesn’t require these items, remove them before you distribute the document. You can use the Examine Document command to find and remove hidden content from a PDF. To remove sensitive images and text that are visible in a PDF, use the Redaction tools. Examine a PDF for hidden content Use the Examine Document feature to find and remove content from a document that you don’t want, such as hidden text, metadata, comments, and attachments. If you want to examine every PDF for hidden content before you close it or send it in email, specify that option in the Documents preferences (choose Edit > Preferences [Windows] or Acrobat > Preferences [Mac OS], and select Documents on the left). 1 Choose Document > Examine Document. If items are found, they are listed in the Examine Document dialog box with a selected check box beside each item. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 249 User Guide 2 Make sure that the check boxes are selected only for the items that you want to remove from the document: Metadata Metadata includes information about the document and its contents, such as the author’s name, keywords, and copyright information, that can be used by search utilities. To view metadata, choose File > Properties. File Attachments Files of any format can be attached to the PDF as an attachment. To view attachments, choose View > Navigation Panel > Attachments. Annotations And Comments This item includes all comments that were added to the PDF using the comment and markup tools, including files attached as comments. To view comments, choose View > Navigation Panel > Comments. Form Field Logic Or Actions This item includes form fields (including signature fields), and all actions and calcula­ tions associated with form fields. If you remove this item, all form fields are flattened and can no longer be filled out, edited, or signed. Hidden Text This item indicates text in the PDF that is either transparent, covered up by other content, or the same color as the background. To view hidden text, click Preview. Click the double-arrow buttons to navigate pages that contain hidden text, and select options to show hidden text, visible text, or both. Hidden Layers PDFs can contain multiple layers that can be shown or hidden. Removing hidden layers removes these layers from the PDF and flattens remaining layers into a single layer. To view layers, choose View > Navigation Panel > Layers. Bookmarks Bookmarks are links with representational text that open specific pages in the PDF. To view bookmarks, choose View > Navigation Panel > Bookmarks. Embedded Search Index An embedded search index speeds up searches in the file. To determine if the PDF contains a search index, choose Advanced > Document Processing > Manage Embedded Index. Removing indexes decreases file size but increases search time for the PDF. Deleted Hidden Page And Image Content PDFs sometimes retain content that has been removed and which is no longer visible, such as cropped or deleted pages, or deleted images. Note: The Examine Document feature doesn’t find or remove links. If you want to remove links, use PDF Optimizer. See “PDF Optimizer” on page 343 3 Click Remove All Checked Items to delete selected items from the file, and click OK. Note: When you remove checked items, additional items are automatically removed from the document: digital signa­ tures; document information added by third-party plug-ins and applications; and special features that enable Adobe Reader users to review, sign, and fill in PDF documents. 4 Choose File > Save, and specify a filename and location. If you don’t want to overwrite the original file, save the file to a different name, location, or both. The selected content is permanently removed when you save the file. If you close the file without saving it, you must repeat this process, making sure to save the file. Redact sensitive content The Redaction tools let you permanently remove (redact) visible text and images from PDFs. In place of the removed items, you can have redaction marks that appear as colored boxes, or you can leave the area blank. You can specify custom text or redaction codes to appear over the redaction marks. Note: If you want to locate and remove specific words or phrases, use the Search And Redact tool instead. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 250 User Guide Text marked for redaction (left), and redacted (right) 1 Choose View > Toolbars > Redaction. 2 (Optional) To set the appearance of redaction marks, click Redaction Properties. 3 Select the Mark For Redaction tool . 4 Mark items you want to remove by doing any of the following: • Double-click to select a word or image. • Press Ctrl/Control as you drag to select a line, a block of text, an object, or an area. Use this method to select areas of a page in a scanned document. To preview how your redaction marks will look, hold the pointer over the marked area. 5 To redact the marked items, click Apply Redactions in the Redaction toolbar. 6 Click OK to remove the items. The items aren’t permanently removed from the document until you save it. 7 If you want to search for and remove hidden information in the document by using the Examine Document feature, click Yes. Otherwise, click No. 8 Choose File > Save, and specify a filename and location. If you don’t want to overwrite the original file, save the file to a different name, location, or both. Search and redact words Use the Search And Redact tool to find and remove words or phrases in one or more PDFs that contain searchable text. Note: The Search And Redact tool doesn’t search secured (encrypted) PDFs. 1 Choose View > Toolbars > Redaction, and select the Search And Redact tool . 2 In the text box, type the word or phrase you want to remove. 3 Specify if you want to search the current PDF or PDFs in another location. 4 Select Whole Words Only and Case-Sensitive if you want to apply these conditions to the search. 5 Click Search And Redact. 6 In the search results, click the plus sign (+) next to the document name to see all occurrences of the word or phrase. Then, select the occurrences you want to mark for redaction: • To select all occurrences in the list, click Check All. • To select individual occurrences, click the check box for each one you want to redact. Click the text next to a check box to view the occurrence on the page. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 251 User Guide • To mark none of the occurrences, close the Search window or click New Search to start over. 7 If you selected occurrences that you want to mark for redaction, click Mark Checked Results For Redaction. The Search window closes, and the items you checked in the list are shown marked for redaction. Note: If you haven’t saved the file, you can select redaction marks in the document and press Delete to remove the redaction mark. The redaction marks become permanent after you save the file. 8 To remove the marked items, click Apply Redactions in the Redaction toolbar, and then click OK. The items aren’t permanently removed from the document until you save it. 9 If you want to search for and remove hidden information in the document by using the Examine Document feature, click Yes. Otherwise, click No. 10 Choose File > Save, and specify a filename and location. If you don’t want to overwrite the original file, save the file to a different name, location, or both. See also “Searching PDFs” on page 373 Change the look of redaction markers By default, black boxes appear in place of redacted images and text. You can set the default appearance of redaction marks before you mark items for redaction, or you can change the look of redaction marks before you apply the redactions. Set the default look of all marks 1 In the Redaction toolbar, click Redaction Properties. 2 On the Appearance tab, select options you want to change, and then click OK: • Click the Redacted Area Fill Color icon and select a fill color from the Color palette for the boxes that replace removed items. Choose No Color to leave the redacted area blank. • Select Use Overlay Text if you want to select the custom text or redaction code options. Select the font, size, and text alignment. • Select Custom Text, and type the text you want to appear in the redacted area. • Select Redaction Code and then either select a code within an existing set, or click Edit to define a new code set or a new code. Change the look of a mark 1 After you apply redactions, right-click/Control-click a redaction mark, and choose Properties. 2 Select the options you want, and then click OK. Properties for redaction text Custom Text Displays text you type into the Custom Text option over the redaction mark. Font Displays custom text in the selected font. Font Size Displays custom text in the selected point size. Auto-Size Text To Fit Redaction Region Resizes custom text to fit within the redacted area. When selected, this option overrides the Font Size setting for the overlay text. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 252 User Guide Font Color Displays custom text in the selected color, which you can change by clicking the color swatch. Repeat Overlay Text Fills the redacted area with as many instances of the custom text as needed, without changing the font size. For example, if you specify the letter x or a hyphen (-) as the custom text, these characters are repeated throughout the redacted area. Text Alignment Sets the text alignment. Create and edit redaction codes Both the Redaction Code and Custom Text options create text that overprints areas that contain redaction markers. The difference is that redaction codes are text entries that you can save, export, and import. One code set can contain multiple codes. Note: Codes don’t save the current attributes for overlay text as part of the code definition, such as colors, font charac­ teristics, and repetition or size of text. Codes only make the overlay text itself reusable in future sessions and by other users with whom you share code sets. You set other attributes for the code in the Redaction Tool Properties dialog box. Create redaction codes and code sets 1 Click Redaction Properties in the Redaction toolbar. 2 Select Use Overlay Text. 3 Select Redaction Code, and then click Edit Codes. 4 In the Redaction Code Editor dialog box, click Add Set. 5 (Optional) Type a new name for the set in the text box below the list of code sets, and then click Rename Set. 6 Click Add Code, and type the text that you want to appear as overlay text in the text box below the list of code entries, and then click Rename Code. 7 Repeat the previous step to add another code entry to that code set, or repeat the previous three steps to create additional code sets and codes. Edit redaction codes and code sets 1 Click Redaction Properties in the Redaction toolbar. 2 Select Use Overlay Text, and then select Redaction Code. 3 Select a code set from the list on the left, and click Edit Codes. 4 In the Redaction Code Editor dialog box, do any of the following: • To remove a code set and all of the code entries within it, select the code set and click Remove Set. • To export a code set to a separate XML file that you can reuse in other PDFs or share with others, select the code set and click Export Set, specify a filename and location, and click Save. • To import a previously saved code set, click Import Set, locate and select that file, and click Open. • To rename a code set, type a new name in the box below the list and click Rename Set. 5 With the code set selected, select the code entry that you want to edit, and do one of the following: • To remove a code entry, click Remove Code. • To rename a code entry, type a new name in the box below the list and click Rename Code. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 253 User Guide Creating or obtaining digital IDs About digital IDs Digital IDs include a private key that you safeguard and a public key (certificate) that you share. A digital ID is like a driver’s license or passport. It proves your identity to people and institutions that you commu­ nicate with electronically. A digital ID usually contains your name and email address, the name of the company that issued your digital ID, a serial number, and an expiration date. Digital IDs operate by using a key pair: the public key locks, or encrypts, data; the private key unlocks, or decrypts, that data. When you sign PDF documents, you use the private key to apply your digital signature. You distribute the certificate that contains your public key and other identifying information to those who need to validate your signature, verify your identity, or encrypt information for you. Only your private key can unlock information that was encrypted using your certificate, so be sure to store your digital ID in a safe place. You must have a digital ID to sign, certify, and apply certificate encryption to PDFs. You can get a digital ID from a third-party provider, or you can create a self-signed digital ID. Self-signed digital IDs may be adequate for many situations. However, to prove your identity in most business transactions, you may need a digital ID from a trusted third-party provider, called a certificate authority. Because the certificate authority is responsible for verifying your identity to others, choose one that is trusted by major companies doing business on the Internet. See the Adobe website for information about Adobe security partners that offer digital IDs and other security solutions. You can have multiple digital IDs that you use for different purposes, particularly if you sign documents in different roles or using different certification methods. Digital IDs are usually password protected and can be stored on your computer in PKCS #12 file format, on a smart card or hardware token, in the Windows certificate store, or on a signing server (for roaming IDs). Acrobat includes a default signature handler that can access digital IDs from any of these following locations. (You must register the digital ID in Acrobat for it to be available for use.) See also “Sharing certificates with others” on page 258 “Smart cards and hardware tokens” on page 255 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 254 User Guide Register a digital ID You must register your digital ID in Acrobat before you can use it. If you obtained or created a digital ID file that doesn’t appear in your list of digital IDs, you can search for the missing digital ID file and add it to the list. You can identify digital ID files by their file extensions. For PKCS #12 files, the extension is .pfx in Windows and .p12 in Mac OS. Digital ID files from some earlier versions of Acrobat have an .apf extension. If you select an .apf digital ID file, you may be prompted to convert it to a supported file type. You may need the password created for the digital ID to complete this task. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left. 3 Click the Add ID button . 4 Select one of the following options: Browse For An Existing Digital ID File Select this option if you obtained a digital ID as an electronic file or if you store it in the Windows certificate store. Follow the prompts to select the digital ID file, type your password, and add the digital ID to the list. Configure A Roaming ID For Use On This Computer Select this option to use a digital ID that’s stored on a signing server. When prompted, type the server name and URL where the roaming ID is located. Create A Self-signed Digital ID For Use With Acrobat Select this option to create a self-signed digital ID. Look For Newly Inserted Hardware Tokens Select this option if you have a security token or hardware token connected to your computer. 5 Click Next, and follow the on-screen instructions to register your digital ID. Create a self-signed digital ID If you’re not using a third-party digital ID, you can create your own self-signed digital ID. When you create a self- signed digital ID, the resulting file stores an encrypted private key used for signing or decrypting documents and a public key contained in a certificate, which is used for validating signatures and encrypting documents. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left, and then click the Add ID button . 3 Select Create A Self-Signed Digital ID For Use With Acrobat, and click Next. 4 Specify where to store the digital ID, and click Next. New PKCS#12 Digital ID File Stores the information in a file that you can send to others. This is a standard encryption format with a .pfx extension in Windows and .p12 in Mac OS. Windows Certificate Store (Windows only) Stores the file where other Windows applications can also retrieve it. 5 Type a name, email address, and other personal information for your digital ID. When you certify or sign a document, the name appears in the Signatures panel and in the signature field. 6 (Optional) To use Unicode values for extended characters, select Enable Unicode Support, and then specify Unicode values in the appropriate boxes. 7 Choose an option from the Key Algorithm menu. 2048-bit RSA offers more security than 1024-bit RSA, but 1024­ bit RSA is more universally compatible. 8 From the Use Digital ID For menu, choose whether you want to use the digital ID for signatures, data encryption, or both. Click Next. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 255 User Guide 9 Specify a filename and location for the digital ID file. 10 Type a password; passwords are case-sensitive, must contain at least six characters, and may not contain double quotation marks or the following characters: ! @ # $ % ^ & * , | \ ; < > _. Type the same password in both the Password and Confirm Password boxes. Click Finish. You can export and send your certificate file to those who need to validate your signature. Important: Make a backup copy of your digital ID file. If your digital ID file is lost or corrupted, or if you forget your password, you cannot use that profile to add or validate signatures. See also “Sharing and managing certificates” on page 258 Set up a roaming ID account A roaming ID is a digital ID that is stored on a server and can be downloaded—at the subscriber’s request—to the roaming subscriber’s location. You must have a working Internet connection to access a roaming ID. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Expand Digital IDs on the left, select Roaming ID Accounts, and click Add Account. 3 Type the name and URL for the roaming ID server, and click Next. 4 Type the user name and password you’ve been assigned or follow the directions to create a new account. Click Next, and then click Finish. 5 If you don’t need to use your roaming ID, select it, and click Logout. When you perform a task that uses your roaming ID, you’re automatically logged in to the roaming ID server if your authentication assertion hasn’t expired. See also “Configure a directory server manually” on page 262 Smart cards and hardware tokens A smart card looks like a credit card and stores your digital ID on an embedded microprocessor chip. You can use the digital ID on a smart card to sign and decrypt documents on devices that include a smart card reader. Similarly, a security hardware token is a small, keychain-sized device that you can use to store digital IDs and authen­ tication data. You can access your digital ID by connecting the token to a USB port on your computer or mobile device. The token may include a keypad that lets you type a personal identification number (PIN). If you store your digital ID on a smart card or hardware token, you must specify that information when you sign or certify documents. See also “Register a digital ID” on page 254 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 256 User Guide Change the signing method You may need to specify a different signing method than the default security method provided in Acrobat. 1 If necessary, install a third-party signature provider. 2 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and click Security on the left. 3 Click Advanced Preferences, and click the Creation tab. 4 From the menu in the Creation tab, choose the default method you want for signing and encrypting documents, and click OK. The menu lists all the security methods installed in the Acrobat plug-ins folder. Specify the default digital ID Before you certify, sign, or encrypt a PDF, you may be prompted to select a digital ID file. To avoid being prompted repeatedly, you can select a digital ID to use every time you sign or certify a document. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Click Digital IDs on the left, and then select the digital ID you want to use as the default. 3 Click the Usage Options button , and choose a task for which you want the digital ID as the default. If you want to specify the digital ID as the default for two tasks, click the Usage Options button again and select a second option. A check mark appears next to selected options. If you select only the signing option, the Pen icon appears next to the digital ID. If you select only the encryption option, the Lock icon appears. If you select only the certifying option, or if you select the signing and certifying options, the Blue Ribbon icon appears. To clear a default digital ID, repeat these steps, and deselect the usage options you selected. Change a digital ID’s password and timeout Passwords and timeouts can be set for PKCS #12 IDs and Windows Personal Certificates. If the PKCS #12 ID contains multiple IDs, you must configure the password and timeout at the file level. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Expand Digital IDs on the left, select Digital ID Files, and then select a digital ID on the right. 3 Click the Change Password button. Type the old password and a new password. Confirm the new password, and then click OK. 4 With the ID still selected, click the Password Timeout button. 5 Specify how often you want to be prompted for a password: Always Prompts you each time you use the digital ID. After Lets you specify an interval. Once Per Session Prompts you once each time you open Acrobat. Never You’re never prompted for a password. 6 Type the password, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 257 User Guide Delete your digital ID When you delete a digital ID in Acrobat, you delete the actual PKCS #12 file that contains both the private key and the certificate. Before you delete your digital ID, make sure that it isn’t in use by other programs or required by any documents for decryption. Note: You can delete only self-signed digital IDs that you created in Acrobat. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left, and then select a digital ID on the right. 3 Click Remove ID, and click OK. See also “Delete a certificate from trusted identities” on page 261 Protecting digital IDs By protecting your digital IDs, you can prevent unauthorized use of your private keys for signing or decrypting confi­ dential documents. Make sure that you have a procedure in place in the event your digital ID is lost or stolen. How to protect your digital IDs When private keys are stored on hardware tokens, smart cards, and other hardware devices that are password- or PIN-protected, be sure to use a strong password or PIN. Never divulge your password to others. You should not write your password down, but if you must, store it in a secure location. Keep your password strong by following these rules: Use eight or more characters; mix uppercase and lowercase letters with numbers and special characters; choose a password that is difficult to guess or hack, but that you can remember without having to write it down; do not use a correctly spelled word in any language, as these are subject to "dictionary attacks" that can crack these passwords in minutes; change your password on a regular basis. Contact your system administrator for guidelines on choosing a strong password. To protect private keys stored in P12/PFX files, use a strong password and set your password timeout options appro­ priately. If using a P12 file to store private keys that you use for signing, set your password timeout option so that your password is always required (this is the default behavior). If using your P12 file to store private keys that are used to decrypt documents, ensure that there is a backup copy of your private key or P12 file so that you can continue to open encrypted documents should you lose your keys. The mechanisms used to protect private keys stored in the Windows certificate store vary depending on what company has provided the storage. Contact the provider to determine how best to protect these keys from unautho­ rized access and for backup purposes. In general, you should use the strongest authentication mechanism available and should seek to require a strong password or PIN when possible. What to do if a digital ID is lost or stolen If your digital ID was issued by a certificate authority, immediately notify the certificate authority and request the revocation of your certificate. You should also stop using your private key. If your digital ID was self-issued, destroy the private key and notify anyone to whom you sent the corresponding public key (certificate). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 258 User Guide Sharing and managing certificates Sharing certificates with others Your digital ID includes a certificate that others require to validate your digital signature and to encrypt documents for you. If you know that others will need your certificate, you can send it in advance to avoid delays when exchanging secure documents. Businesses that use certificates to identify participants in signing and secure workflows often store certificates on a directory server that participants can search to expand their list of trusted identities. If you use a third-party security method, you usually don’t need to share your certificate with others. Third-party providers may validate identities using other methods, or these validation methods may be integrated with Acrobat. See the documentation for the third-party provider. When you receive a certificate from someone, their name is added to your list of trusted identities as a contact. Contacts are usually associated with one or more certificates and can be edited, removed, or reassociated with another certificate. If you trust a contact, you can set your trust settings to trust all digital signatures and certified documents created with their certificate. You can also import certificates from a certificate store, such as the Windows certificate store. A certificate store may contain numerous certificates issued by different certification authorities. Send your certificate to others 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left. 3 Verify that your certificate information is correct: Select the digital ID you want to share, and click the Certificate Details button . Click OK to return to the Security Settings dialog box. 4 With the digital ID selected, click the Export button . 5 Do one of the following: • Select Email The Data To Someone, and click Next to send your certificate as an FDF file to another user. Type the email address, click Email, and then send the email message that appears in the default email application. • Select Save The Data To A File, and click Next. Choose a file type from the menu, specify a name and location for the file, and click Save. Get certificates from other users You keep certificates that you receive from other users in a list of trusted identities. This list is like an address book that stores certificates. It lets you validate the signatures of these users on any documents you receive. You can also use the list to encrypt files. See also “Encrypt a PDF and create a recipient list” on page 266 Request a certificate from another user 1 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. 2 Click Request Contact. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 259 User Guide 3 Type your name, email address, and contact information. 4 To allow other users to add your certificate to their list of trusted identities, select Include My Certificates. 5 Select whether to email the request or save it as a file to email later, and then click Next. 6 Select the digital ID file to use, and then click Select. 7 Do one of the following: • If the Compose Email dialog box appears, type the email address of the person you’re requesting a certificate from, and click Email. Send the email message that appears, with the attached certificate, in the default email application. • If the Export Data As dialog box appears, specify a name and location for the file, click Save, and then click OK. Add a certificate from email 1 After a user sends you certificate information, open the email attachment in Acrobat, and then click Set Contact Trust in the dialog box that appears. 2 Select trust options, click OK, and follow the prompts. Add a Windows certificate (Windows only) This option is recommended if you use the Windows certificate store to organize certificates. 1 In the Security preferences, click Advanced Preferences. 2 Click the Windows Integration tab, and select Enable Searching The Windows Certificate Store For Certificates Other Than Yours. Select the desired options, and click OK twice. 3 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. 4 Click Add Contacts. 5 Do any of the following: • If Windows certificate digital IDs are allowed, select the appropriate directory and group. • If you configured an identity search directory, select the appropriate directory and group. You can then click Search to locate specific certificates. • Click Browse, select the certificate file, and click Open. 6 Select the added certificate in the Contacts list to add it to the Certificates list. Select the certificate in the Certif­ icates list, and click Details. 7 In the Certificate Viewer dialog box, click the Details tab and note the MD5 digest and SHA1 digest values (finger­ print). Contact the certificate’s originator to confirm that the values are correct. The certificate should be trusted only if the values are correct. Click OK. 8 After you verify that the information is correct, click Trust, specify trust options, and click OK. Import certificates using the Windows Certificate Wizard (Windows only) If you use the Windows certificate store to organize your certificates, you can import certificates using a wizard in Windows Explorer. 1 In Windows Explorer, right-click the certificate file and choose Install Certificate. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to add the certificate to the Windows certificate store. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 260 User Guide 3 If you’re prompted to validate the certificate before installing it, note the MD5 digest and SHA1 digest values (fingerprint). Contact the certificate’s originator to confirm that the values are correct. The certificate should be trusted only if the values are correct. Click OK. Add a certificate using a signature in a PDF You can safely add a certificate to your trusted identities from a signed PDF by first verifying the fingerprint with the certificate’s originator. 1 Open the PDF containing the user’s self-signed signature. 2 Click the signature in the document to check whether it’s valid. 3 Click Signature Properties, and then click Show Certificate. 4 In the Certificate Viewer dialog box, click the Details tab and note the MD5 digest and SHA1 digest values (finger­ print). Contact the certificate’s originator to confirm that the values are correct. The certificate should be trusted only if the values are correct. 5 After you verify that the certificate information is correct, click the Trust tab, click Add To Trusted Identities, click OK, specify trust options, and click OK. Associate a certificate with a contact Contacts are typically trusted identities with whom you exchange documents. To exchange encrypted PDFs with a contact, you must associate at least one certificate with that contact. Adding a contact may or may not add a certificate because certificates aren’t necessarily attached to the contact infor­ mation. Add contact information by browsing to the contact file location or search for the file. 1 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. 2 Select the contact, and click Details. 3 Select a name from the list, and click Associate Certificate. 4 Select a certificate, and click OK. Click OK again. Verify information on a certificate The Certificate Viewer dialog box provides user attributes and other information about a certificate. When other users import your certificate, they may ask you to check your fingerprint information against the information they receive with the certificate. (The fingerprint refers to the MD5 digest and SHA1 digest values.) You can check certif­ icate information for your own digital ID files or for ID files that you import. The Certificate Viewer dialog box provides the validation period in which the certificate is valid, the certificate’s intended usage, and certificate data such as a unique serial number and public key method. You can also check if the certificate authority has revoked the certificate. Certificates are typically revoked when an employee leaves the company or when security is compromised in some way. Verify information on your own certificate 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select your digital ID, and then click Certificate Details . Verify information on someone else’s certificate 1 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 261 User Guide 2 Select the contact, and click Details. 3 Select the certificate name, and click Show Certificate. 4 Click the Revocation tab, and then click Check Revocation. The results of the revocation check appear in the Details box. Set the trust level of a certificate You can change the trust settings of certificates. For example, if you have verified the fingerprint in a certificate that you received from someone else, you can change the settings so that you explicitly trust all digital signatures and certified documents created with this certificate. You can even choose to trust the certified document’s dynamic content and embedded JavaScript. A certificate must be explicitly trusted before you can use it to encrypt PDFs for the person associated with that certificate. If you have multiple certificates for a person, set trust levels for at least one of their certificates. You can also trust a certificate by trusting the root certificate. The root certificate is the originating authority in a chain of certificate authorities that issued the certificate. By trusting the root certificate, you trust all certificates issued by that certificate authority. Exercise caution when trusting root certificates. 1 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. 2 Select a contact, and click Details. 3 Select the certificate name, and click Edit Trust. 4 In the Trust tab, select any of the following items to trust this certificate for: Signatures And As a Trusted Root Trusts signatures for this certificate and trusts the certificate as a trusted root so that any other certificates that have this certificate as the root in a certificate chain are also trusted. Certified Documents Trusts documents in which the author has certified the document with an author signature. Dynamic Content Trusts movies, sound files, and other dynamic elements. Embedded High Privilege JavaScript Trusts embedded scripts. 5 Click OK, click OK again, and then click Close. Delete a certificate from trusted identities 1 Choose Advanced > Manage Trusted Identities. 2 Choose Certificates from the Display menu. 3 Select the certificate, and click Delete. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 262 User Guide Directory servers About directory servers Directory servers are commonly used as centralized repositories of identities within an organization. As such, the server acts as an ideal location to store user certificates in enterprises that use certificate encryption. Directories help you locate certificates from network servers, including LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. After you locate a certificate, you can add it to your list of trusted identities so that you don’t have to look it up again. By developing a storage area for trusted certificates, you or a member of your workgroup can facilitate the use of encryption in the workgroup. Configure a directory server manually 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Directory Servers on the left. 3 Click the New button , type the directory name and server settings, and click OK. For more information on server settings, contact your system administrator. Import and export directory server settings Administrators and users can export directory settings as a Form Data Format (FDF) file, and use that file to configure the directory server on another computer. As you export the file, you can choose to send it as a signed email attachment. Export directory server settings 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Directory Servers on the left, and select a server on the right. 3 Click Export. 4 Select a destination, and click Next. 5 If you need to verify the information in the FDF file, click Sign, add your signature, and then click Next. 6 Do one of the following: • If you’re saving the file, specify a name and location for it, and click Save. • If you’re sending the file as an email attachment, type an email address in the To box, click Next, and then click Finish. Import directory server settings 1 Do one of the following: • Double-click the FDF file. • Choose Advanced > Security Settings, select Directory Servers on the left, and then click Import. Select the FDF file, and click Open. 2 If the FDF file is signed, right-click/Control-click the signature and choose options to validate the signature or view signature properties. 3 Click Import Search Directory Settings. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 263 User Guide 4 Click OK if prompted to confirm your choice, and then click Close. The directory server appears in the Security Settings dialog box. Securing PDFs Choosing which type of security to use Acrobat takes advantage of the security features of Windows XP and a number of other security systems. You can secure a PDF by using the following security methods: Note: “Security” is sometimes confused with “accessibility,” which involves making documents easier to read for the visually impaired. Password encryption Add passwords and set security options to restrict opening, editing, and printing PDFs. Certification encryption Encrypt a document so that only a specified set of users has access to it. Certify a document Save the PDF as a certified document. Certifying a PDF adds a (visible or invisible) certifying signature that lets the document author restrict changes to the document. Server-based security policies Apply server-based security policies to PDFs (for example, using Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server). Server-based security policies are especially useful if you want others to have access to PDFs for a limited time. Before you secure a PDF, you may want to remove any sensitive or dynamic page content that can compromise the document’s integrity. If others will be filling in, or signing, form fields in the document, you may want to set the form field properties to read-only to prevent modifications to the form fields. If you want to do this: Do this: Require a password to open a PDF, or copy or print its contents Secure the document by choosing Password Encryption from the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar. If your company is signed up, you can also use Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server to secure documents. Indicate that you approve of the PDF’s content Sign and certify the PDF. You must obtain a digital ID to add digital signatures. For Asian languages, you can add an approval stamp. Prevent forms from being tampered with Use LiveCycle Designer to secure forms and create locking signature fields. See the Adobe LiveCycle Designer Help. Send secure file attachments via email Use security envelopes. Allow only the people you specify to view a PDF Encrypt the document. Choose Certificate Encryption from the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, or apply security using Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server. You must have certificates for those who can view the documents. If you often apply the same security settings to PDFs, consider creating a security policy to simplify your workflow. Both Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server and certificate encryption let you save settings as a policy. If you apply security settings to large collections of PDFs, you can automate the steps by using the Batch Processing command. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 264 User Guide See also “Removing sensitive content” on page 248 “Modify form field properties in Acrobat” on page 222 “Run a predefined batch sequence” on page 368 Securing PDFs in FIPS mode (Windows) Version 8.1 of Acrobat and Reader provides a FIPS mode to restrict data protection to Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 approved algorithms using the RSA BSAFE Crypto-C 2.1 encryption module. The following options aren’t available in FIPS mode: • Applying password-based security policies to documents. You can use public key certificates or Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server to secure the document, but you cannot use password encryption to secure the document. • Creating self-signed certificates. In FIPS mode, you cannot create self-signed certificates. In FIPS mode, you can open and view documents that are protected with non-FIPS compliant algorithms, but you cannot save any changes to the document using password security. To apply security policies to the document, use either public key certificates or LiveCycle Policy Server. Configure FIPS mode (Windows) 1 Exit from Acrobat. 2 Choose Start > Run, and then type regedit in the Open box. 3 Navigate to the following key in the registry: HKEY_CURRENT_USER>SOFTWARE>Adobe>Adobe Acrobat>8.0>AVGeneral. 4 Right-click AVGeneral, and then select New > DWORD Value. 5 Change the name of the new value to bFIPSMode. 6 In the right pane of the Registry Editor, double-click bFIPSMode. 7 Set the value of bFIPSMode to 1 to enable or 0 to disable FIPS mode. Set passwords for PDFs You can limit access to a PDF by setting passwords and by restricting certain features, such as printing and editing. A PDF can have two kinds of passwords: a Document Open password and a Permissions password. When you set a Document Open password (also known as a user password), anyone who tries to open the PDF must type in the password you specify. When you set a Permissions password (also known as a master password), recipients don’t need a password to open the document, but they must type the Permissions password to set or change the restricted features. If the PDF is secured with both types of passwords, it can be opened with either password, but only the Permissions password allows the user to change the restricted features. Because of the added security, setting both types of passwords is preferable to setting just one. All Adobe products enforce the restrictions set by the Permissions password. However, because third-party products may not support or respect these settings, document recipients may be able to bypass some or all of the restrictions you set. Important: If you forget a password, there’s no way to recover it from the PDF. Consider keeping a backup copy of the PDF that isn’t password-protected. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 265 User Guide See also “Secure PDFs using policies” on page 273 Add a password and security 1 Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Password Encrypt. 2 Click Yes to the prompt about changing the security, and if necessary, type the Permissions password that lets you change security settings. If you don’t know the password, contact the author of the PDF. 3 In the Password Security - Settings dialog box, set the security options as desired, confirm the password, click OK, and then click OK again. 4 Save the document to apply the security settings. Note: You can also restrict editing capabilities when you certify a document, or when you apply a policy to a PDF. Remove passwords and security settings You can remove passwords and security policies from an open PDF if you have the permissions to do so. If the PDF is secured with a security policy that resides on a server, the changes can be made only by the author of the policy or by a server administrator. 1 Do one of the following: • Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Remove Security. Type your password, and click Yes to the prompt about removing the security. • In the Security tab of the Document Properties dialog box, choose No Security from the Security Method menu. 2 When prompted, specify the Permissions password, and then click OK. Security options You can set the following options when you create a PDF or when you apply password protection to a PDF. Options vary depending on the Compatibility setting. Security options are not available for PDF/X standards or presets. Compatibility Sets the type of encryption for opening a password-protected document. The Acrobat 3 And Later option uses a low encryption level (40-bit RC4), while the other options use a high encryption level (128-bit RC4 or AES). Acrobat 6 And Later lets you enable metadata for searching. Be aware that anyone using an earlier version of Acrobat cannot open a PDF document with a higher compatibility setting. For example, if you select the Acrobat 7 And Later option, the document cannot be opened in Acrobat 6.0 or earlier. Encrypt All Document Contents Select this option to encrypt the document and the document metadata. If this option is selected, search engines cannot access the document metadata. Encrypt All Document Contents Except Metadata Select this option to encrypt the contents of a document but still allow search engines access to the document metadata. Encrypt Only File Attachments Select this option to require a password for opening file attachments. However, users can open the document without a password. Require A Password To Open The Document Select this option to require users to type the password you specify to open the document. This option is unavailable if Encrypt Only File Attachments is selected. Document Open Password Specify the password that users must type to open the PDF file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 266 User Guide Note: If you forget a password, there is no way to recover it from the document. It’s a good idea to store passwords in a separate secure location in case you forget them. Use A Password To Restrict Editing And Printing Of The Document Restricts access to the PDF file’s security settings. If the file is opened in Adobe Acrobat, the user can view the file but must enter the specified Permissions password in order to change the file’s Security and Permissions settings. If the file is opened in Illustrator, Photoshop, or InDesign, the user must enter the Permissions password, since it is not possible to open the file in a view-only mode. Permissions Password Specify a password that is required to change the permissions settings. This option is available only if the previous option is selected. Printing Allowed Specifies the level of printing that users are allowed for the PDF document. • None Prevents users from printing the document. • Low Resolution (150 dpi) Lets users print at no higher than 150-dpi resolution. Printing may be slower because each page is printed as a bitmap image. This option is available only if the Compatibility option is set to Acrobat 5 (PDF 1.4) or later. • High Resolution Lets users print at any resolution, directing high-quality vector output to PostScript and other printers that support advanced high-quality printing features. Changes Allowed Defines which editing actions are allowed in the PDF document. • None Prevents users from making any changes to the document that are listed in the Changes Allowed menu, such as filling in form fields and adding comments. • Inserting, Deleting, And Rotating Pages Lets users insert, delete, and rotate pages, and create bookmarks and thumbnails. This option is only available for high (128-bit RC4 or AES) encryption. • Filling In Form Fields And Signing Existing Signature Fields Lets users fill in forms and add digital signatures. This option doesn’t allow them to add comments or create form fields. This option is only available for high (128-bit RC4 or AES) encryption. • Commenting, Filling In Form Fields, And Signing Existing Signature Fields Lets users add comments and digital signatures, and fill in forms. This option doesn’t allow users to move page objects or create form fields. • Page Layout, Filling In Form Fields, And Signing Lets users insert, rotate, or delete pages and create bookmarks or thumbnail images, fill out forms, and add digital signatures. This option doesn’t allow them to create form fields. This option is only available for low (40-bit RC4) encryption. • Any Except Extracting Pages Lets users edit the document, create and fill in form fields, and add comments and digital signatures. Enable Copying Of Text, Images, And Other Content Lets users select and copy the contents of a PDF. Enable Text Access For Screen Reader Devices For The Visually Impaired Lets visually impaired users read the document with screen readers, but doesn’t allow users to copy or extract the document’s contents. This option is available only for high (128-bit RC4 or AES) encryption. Encrypt a PDF and create a recipient list To encrypt PDFs, you use public-key cryptography. Public-key cryptography uses two keys: a public key, which is stored inside a certificate that can be shared with other users, and a private key, which you don’t share with others. The public key (certificate) is used to encrypt documents or to verify digital signatures, and the private key is used to decrypt documents or to create digital signatures. Both keys are included in a digital ID. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 267 User Guide The advantage of securing documents with certificates is that authors can specify unique permissions for each group in their company. For example, authors can permit employees to sign and fill forms, and permit managers to edit text or remove pages. When you encrypt a PDF using a certificate, you specify a list of recipients and define each recipient’s level of access to the file—for example, whether the recipient can edit, copy, or print the file. You can specify certificates from your list of trusted identities, from files on disk, from an LDAP server, or from the Windows certificate store (Windows only). Be sure to include your own certificate in the list so that you are later able to open the document. Note: If possible, encrypt documents using certificates from third-party digital IDs. If the certificate is lost or stolen, the issuing authority can replace it. If a self-signed digital ID is deleted, all PDFs that were encrypted using the certificate from that ID are forever inaccessible. If you need to encrypt a large number of PDFs, use the Batch Processing command to apply a predefined sequence, or edit an existing sequence to add the security features you want. You can also save your certificate settings as a security policy and reuse it to encrypt PDFs. 1 Do one of the following: • Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, choose Show Security Properties, and then choose Certificate Security from the Security Method menu. (Use this method if you want to save your settings as a security policy.) • Choose Advanced > Security > Certificate Encryption. • Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Certificate Encryption. 2 In the Certificate Security Settings dialog box, specify whether to save your settings as a policy or discard them after applying (if available). 3 Select which document components to encrypt. 4 From the Encryption Algorithm menu, choose 128-bit AES or 128-bit RC4. If you select 128-bit AES, Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later or Adobe Reader 7.0 or later is required to open the document. Click Next. 5 Select the digital ID you want to use. 6 Create a recipient list for the encrypted PDF: Click Search to locate identities in a directory server or in your list of trusted identities, or click Browse to locate the file that contains certificates. 7 In the Recipients list, select the recipient(s) for whom you wish to set levels of access, click Permissions, and click OK in the Acrobat Security dialog box. Then select the levels of access. If you don’t set permissions, recipients have full access by default. 8 Click OK to implement your settings, and then click Next. Review your settings and then click Finish. When a recipient opens the PDF, the security settings you specified for that person are used. See also “About digital IDs” on page 253 “Get certificates from other users” on page 258 Change or remove encryption from a PDF You can change or remove security settings from PDF files that you’ve encrypted. Change encryption settings 1 Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Show Security Properties. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 268 User Guide 2 Click Change Settings. 3 Do any of the following, and then click Next. • To encrypt different document components, select that option. • To change the encryption algorithm, choose it from the menu. 4 Do any of the following: • To check a recipient’s trusted identity, select the recipient, and then click Details. • To remove recipients, select one or more recipients, and then click Remove. Do not remove your own certificate from this list, or you won’t have access to the file using that certificate. • To change recipients’ permissions, select one or more recipients, and then click Permissions. 5 Click Next, and then click Finish. Click OK to close the Document Properties dialog box, and save the document to apply your changes. Remove encryption settings 1 Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Remove Security. 2 If prompted, type the Permissions password. If you don’t know the Permissions password, contact the author of the PDF. Create secure attachments You can add security to any document by embedding it in an encrypted envelope, called a security envelope (or eEnvelope, in earlier versions) and sending it as an email attachment. This method is especially useful if you want to send a secure file attachment without modifying the attached file. When other users open the security envelope, they can extract the file attachments and save them to disk. The saved files are identical to the original file attachments and are no longer encrypted when saved. For example, suppose that you want to send several documents, including non-PDF documents, to your accountant, but you don’t want anyone else to view the documents. You can embed these documents as file attachments in a security envelope, encrypt the security envelope so that only your accountant can open the attachments, and then email the envelope. Anyone can open the envelope, view its cover page, and even view a list of the contents of that envelope, but only your accountant can view the embedded attachments and extract them to the computer. When you create a secure attachment, you’re prompted to select or create a security policy. Embed file attachments in security envelopes for secure transit. 1 Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Create Security Envelope. 2 Click Add File To Send, select the documents you want to attach, and then click Open. Select any PDFs in the list that you don’t want to include and click Remove Selected Files. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 269 User Guide 3 Click Next. 4 Select an envelope template, and click Next. 5 Select a delivery method, and click Next. 6 Select Show All Policies, and then select a security policy from the list of available policies (or create a new policy if needed). Click Next. 7 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the security envelope. If prompted, provide your identity infor­ mation. 8 Type an email address in the message that appears and click Send, or save the security envelope to send later. See also “Secure PDFs using policies” on page 273 Security policies About security policies If you often apply the same security settings to multiple PDFs, you can save your settings as a policy that you can reuse. Security policies include the type of security encryption, the permission settings, and information about who can open the PDFs or change security settings. There are two kinds of security policies: • A user policy is developed and applied by an individual user. If you apply the same security settings to various documents, you can save time by creating a user policy and then reapplying the user policy to documents without having to specify the security settings each time. User policies for passwords and public key certificates are stored on your local computer. If you have access to Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, you can create a user policy that’s stored on a policy server and is available only to you. • An organizational policy is created by an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server administrator and is stored on a policy server to be shared by a group of users. Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server controls access to PDFs and auditing events as defined by the security policy. You can use Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server if your company has licensed the software and made it available to you. How organizational policies are authenticated In addition to allowing the reuse of the same security settings, policies stored on Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server have the added benefit of letting you expire and revoke documents (no matter how many copies were created or distributed), and maintain accountability by auditing users who open protected documents. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 270 User Guide A B C Security policies A. Policies are stored on server. B. Policies are applied to PDF. C. Users can open, edit, and print document only if permitted by policy. The process of using server-based security policies involves four main stages: Configure the policy server The system administrator of your company or group usually configures Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, manages accounts, and sets up organizational policies. For more information on configuring the policy server, see the Adobe website. Publish a document with a security policy An author creates a PDF and applies a policy stored on Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server to the PDF. The policy server generates a license and unique encryption key for the PDF. Acrobat embeds the license in the PDF and encrypts it using the encryption key. The author or administrator can use this license to track and audit the PDF. View a document with a policy applied When users try to open the secure PDF in Acrobat 8.0 (or Reader 8.0), they must authenticate their identities. If the user is granted access to the PDF, the PDF is decrypted and opens with whatever permissions are specified in the policy. Administer events and modifying access By logging in to an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server account, the author or administrator can track events and change access to policy-secured PDFs. Administrators can view all PDF and system events, modify configuration settings, and change access to policy-secured PDFs. Users may be required to check in the PDF periodically to continue to have access to it. Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server is a server-based security system that provides dynamic control over PDFs. Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server can be configured to run with LDAP, ADS, and other enterprise systems. Policies provided by Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server are stored on the server and can be refreshed from the server. You must connect to Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server to use these server policies. While security policies are stored on a policy server, the PDFs aren’t. However, users may be required to connect to the policy server so that they can open or continue to use PDFs to which a security policy has been applied. For infor­ mation on configuring an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, click Help on the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server website after you log in to your account. Connect to an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Click Adobe LiveCycle Policy Servers on the left. 3 Click the New button . 4 Type a name in the Name box and the URL in the Server Name box. Add the port number and click Connect To This Server. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 271 User Guide 5 Type the user name and password for your account, and click OK. View Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server policies 1 Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, and choose Adobe Policy Server > Manage My Account. The Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server page opens in your web browser. 2 If prompted, type your user name and password, and click Login. 3 Click the Policies link on the page. For more information on using Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, click the Help link in the upper right corner. Create a user security policy You can create three types of security policies: password security (to password-protect documents), certificate security (to encrypt documents for a list of recipients), and Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server policies. Creating policies for password and certificate security lets you reuse the same security settings for a set of PDFs without having to change security settings for each. The policies for password and certificate security are stored on the local computer. When you create a user security policy using Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, the policy is stored on a server, letting you audit actions and change security settings dynamically. You can use Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server if your company has licensed the software and made it available to you. See also “Encrypt a PDF and create a recipient list” on page 266 Create a password policy 1 Choose Advanced > Security > Manage Security Policies. 2 Click New. 3 Select Use Passwords, and then click Next. 4 Type a name and description for the policy, do one of the following, and then click Next: • If you want to specify passwords and restrictions whenever you apply this policy to a document, deselect Save Passwords With The Policy. • If you want to save passwords and restriction settings with the policy, select Save Passwords With The Policy. 5 Specify a compatibility setting and password options. If you selected Save Passwords With The Policy, specify the password and restrictions. Click Next. 6 Review the policy details, and then click Finish. Create a certificate policy 1 Choose Advanced > Security > Manage Security Policies. 2 Click New. 3 Select Use Public Key Certificates, and then click Next. 4 Type a name and description for the policy, and specify the document components to encrypt. 5 If you want to specify recipients whenever you apply this policy to a document, select Ask For Recipients When Applying This Policy, and click Next. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 272 User Guide 6 If Ask For Recipients When Applying This Policy is not selected, specify recipients by selecting the digital IDs you want to use to encrypt the document (including your own digital ID), and click Next. 7 Click Finish. Create a user policy with Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server When you create a user policy using the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, you’re redirected to the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server web page. 1 Choose Advanced > Security > Manage Security Policies. 2 Click New. 3 Select Use The Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, and click Next. 4 On the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server web page, click Policies, and then click New. 5 Type a name and description, set the validity period, and any other options. 6 Select the users or groups, set permissions for them, and click OK. 7 Specify the document components you want to encrypt, and whether you want a watermark. 8 When you’re done, click Save at the top of the page. Manage security policies After you create security policies, you can manage them by copying, editing, and deleting them. You can also set up a list of favorite policies so that they’re easy to access. 1 Choose Advanced > Security > Manage Security Policies. 2 From the Show menu, choose whether you want to display all policies that you have access to, user policies that you’ve created, or organizational policies. 3 Select a policy and do one or more of the following: Note: Options to edit or delete organizational policies aren’t available unless you have administrator rights to the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server. Changes to these policies can be made only on the Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server, which opens automatically when you select an option. • To create a new policy, click New. • To copy an existing policy, click Copy. This option is useful if you want to create a new policy that’s based on the settings of an existing policy. • To edit a policy, click Edit. For password and certificate policies, which are stored on the local computer, editing a policy affects only those documents to which the policy is applied after the policy is edited. For user policies stored on a server, you can edit the permission settings and other options. This option isn’t available for organiza­ tional policies. • To delete the policy, click Delete. This option may not be available for organizational policies. • To make the policy easier to get to, click Favorite. This option adds the selected policy to the Secure menu in the Tasks toolbar, and to the Advanced > Security menu. You can apply the Favorite option to multiple policies. A star appears next to a favorite policy. (To remove a policy from the favorites, click Favorite again.) 4 Click Close. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 273 User Guide Secure PDFs using policies You can apply either an organization policy or a user policy to a PDF. You must be online with a connection to your Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server host to apply an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server policy to a document. Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server security policies must be stored on a policy server, but PDFs to which the policies are applied need not be. You can apply policies to PDFs using Acrobat, server-side batch sequences, or other applications, such as Microsoft Outlook. To remove a policy from a PDF, you must be the one who applied it. Similarly, only the person who created the user policy can edit it. To edit organizational policies, you must be the policy administrator. For details on editing security policies, click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, choose Adobe Policy Server > Manage My Account, and then click Help in the upper right corner. See also “Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server” on page 270 Apply a security policy to a PDF ? Open a PDF, and do one of the following: • Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar and choose Adobe Policy Server > Refresh Security Policies to ensure that you have access to the most up-to-date server policies. Then, click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar and choose a policy. Click OK to any warnings about changing the security for the document. In the Secure menu, you can identify organizational policies by the Enterprise Policy icon , and user policies by the Personal Policy icon . • Choose Advanced > Security > Manage Security Policies. Select a policy, and then click Apply To Document. Apply a policy to attachments in Outlook You can send different types of files as secure PDF attachments in Microsoft Outlook. This option is available only if Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server is set up and available in Acrobat. 1 In Outlook, choose File > New > Mail Message. 2 In the toolbar, click the Attach As Secured Adobe PDF button . 3 Select the file you want to attach by typing the file path or by clicking Browse. 4 Specify how you want to secure the document, and click OK. The file is converted to PDF and encrypted using the security method you choose. 5 Complete the email message, and then click Send. Remove a user security policy from a PDF ? Click the Secure button in the Tasks toolbar, choose Remove Security, and click OK. Revoke a policy-protected PDF If you need to restrict access to a policy-protected PDF that you made available to a group of users, you can revoke the document. 1 Open the PDF to which you applied the policy, and log in to the Adobe LiveCycle Policy server. 2 Choose Advanced > Security > Adobe Policy Server > Revoke Document. 3 From the menu on the web page, choose an option that explains why you’re revoking the document or type a message. If you’re replacing the revoked document, type the URL location of the new document. 4 Click OK to save your changes. 274 Chapter 9: Digital signatures You use a digital signature much like a handwritten signature—to approve documents. A digital signature verifies your identity and may include a photo, an image of your handwritten signature, or other personal details that you choose. Document authors can attest to the contents of their documents by adding a certifying signature. If you receive a signed Adobe PDF, status icons let you know if the signature is valid. If a signature is questionable, you can verify it manually. Quickstart The following topics provide overview steps to some common digital signature tasks. Create a signature appearance You can modify your digital signature appearance. For example, you can include your scanned signature. 1 (Optional) Save the desired image on a page by itself, and convert the page to PDF. 2 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat (Mac OS) > Preferences, and select Security. 3 Click New, and type a title. 4 (Optional) Select Imported Graphic, click File, and select the desired file. 5 Specify options as desired. See also “Create the signature appearance” on page 276 Sign a PDF Use a digital signature to indicate your approval. For best results, change your security preferences to always sign in Preview Document mode, so that you can view and sign the PDF in a secure state. 1 Click the signature field. Or, click Sign , and choose Sign Document. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to apply your digital signature. If the document does not contain an unsigned signature field, click Sign and choose Place Signature to sign the PDF. See also “Sign a PDF” on page 279 Certify a PDF Certifying a PDF indicates that you approve of its content and allows you to specify the types of changes that are permitted for the PDF to remain certified. 1 Click Sign on the Tasks toolbar, choose Certify With Visible Signature or Certify Without Visible Signature, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 275 User Guide 2 If certifying with a visible signature, draw a signature field. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to apply the certifying signature. 4 Save the PDF using a different filename. See also “Certify a PDF” on page 281 Validate signatures When you open a document, a status icon appears next to the signature, indicating if the signature is valid. 1 Click Signatures in the navigation pane, and select the signature. 2 Right-click/Control-click and choose Show Signature Properties. 3 Use the various tabs and options in the Signature Properties dialog box to resolve any signature issues. For example, if the identity is unknown or unverified, click the Signer tab, and click Show Certificate to determine if the certificate is trusted. See also “Validating signatures” on page 282 Digital signatures About digital signatures A digital signature, like a conventional handwritten signature, identifies the person signing a document. Unlike a handwritten signature, a digital signature is difficult to forge because it contains encrypted information that is unique to the signer and easily verified. Most digital signatures are referred to as approval signatures. Signatures that certify a PDF are called certifying signa­ tures. Only the first person to sign a PDF (most often, the author) can add a certifying signature. A certifying signature attests to the contents of the document and allows the signer to specify the types of changes allowed for the document to remain certified. Changes to the document are detected in the Signatures panel. To sign a document, you must obtain a digital ID or create a self-signed digital ID in Acrobat. The digital ID contains a private key that is used to add the digital signature, and it contains a certificate that you share with those who need to validate your signature. Note: You cannot create self-signed digital IDs from within FIPS mode. When you apply a digital signature, Acrobat uses a hashing algorithm to generate a message digest, which it encrypts using your private key. Acrobat embeds the encrypted message digest in the PDF, along with details from your certif­ icate, a visual representation of your signature, and a version of the document at the time it was signed. Note: For the latest information about digital signatures, choose Help > Online Support > Knowledge Base to open the Adobe Acrobat support page on the Adobe website, and then search for “digital signatures.” ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 276 User Guide Valid digital signature in a PDF form See also “About digital IDs” on page 253 Create the signature appearance You can set the appearance of your digital signature by selecting options in the Security Preferences. For example, you can include an image of your handwritten signature, a company logo, or a photograph. You can also create alternate signature appearances that you use for different purposes. For some, you may want to provide a greater level of detail. A signature appearance can also include information that helps others verify your signature, such as certificate revocation status, reasons for signing, contact information, and more. By selecting these preferences, you add options to the Sign Document dialog box that appears each time you sign a PDF. A B Signature formats A. Text signature B. Graphic signature 1 If you want to include an image of your handwritten signature in the digital signature, scan your signature and save it as an image file. Place the image in a document by itself, and convert the document to PDF. 2 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat (Mac OS) > Preferences, select Security on the left, and then click New to create a new signature appearance. 3 In the Configure Signature Appearance dialog box, type a title for the signature appearance. When you sign a document, you select the signature appearance by its title, so use a short, descriptive title. 4 For Configure Graphic, choose an option: No Graphic Displays only the default digital signature icon and other information specified in the Configure Text section. Imported Graphic Displays an image with your digital signature. Select this option to include an image of your handwritten signature. To import the image file, click File, click Browse, select the image file, click Select, and then click OK (Windows) or Select (Mac OS). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 277 User Guide Name Displays only the default digital signature icon and your name as it appears in your digital ID file. 5 For Configure Text, select the options that you want to appear in the signature. Distinguished Name shows the user attributes defined in your digital ID, including your name, organization, and country. Important: To include a reason and a location in your signature, you must select those options both in this dialog box and in the Advanced Preferences. 6 For Text Properties, specify the writing direction and type of digits (Western or Arabic-Indic) used, and then click OK. 7 Click Advanced Preferences, click the Creation tab, select any of the following, click OK, and click OK again: Include Signature’s Revocation Status When Signing Embeds information about whether your certificate is valid or has been revoked (required for signature validation). Selecting this option speeds the validation process by not having to go online to determine whether the certificate has been revoked. Show Reasons When Signing Adds your reason for signing to the signature field. When you sign a PDF, a menu appears in the Sign Document dialog box from which you can select the option that best describes your reason for signing the PDF. Show Location And Contact Information When Signing Adds your location information to the signature field. Contact information appears in the Signer tab of the Signature Properties dialog box. When you sign a PDF, text boxes appear in the Sign Document dialog box where you can type this information. Enable Reviewing Of Document Warnings Analyzes documents in a signing workflow for content that might change the document appearance and then provides an option in the Sign Document dialog box to review this content. Specify Always, Never, or When Certifying A Document. Available options depend on the Prevent Signing Until Document Warnings Are Reviewed setting. Prevent Signing Until Document Warnings Are Reviewed Enable this option to require the signer to review document warnings before signing or certifying a document. Specify Always, Never, or When Certifying A Document. To edit or delete a signature appearance, select it in the Appearance box, and then click Edit or Delete. See also “Enable right-to-left languages” on page 55 Customizing signature properties using seed values Seed values offer additional control to document authors by letting them specify which choices a user can make when signing a document. By applying seed values to signature fields in unsigned PDFs, authors can customize options, automate tasks, and specify signature requirements for items such as certificates and timestamp servers. For more information on this topic, go to Acrobat Developer Center and search for the Acrobat 8.0 Security User Guide. Add a timestamp to signatures You can include the date and time you signed the document as part of your signature. Like signatures, timestamps are easier to verify when they’re associated with a timestamp authority’s trusted certificate. Including a timestamp helps to prove that the document wasn’t changed after you signed it and reduces the chances of an invalid signature. You can obtain a timestamp from a third-party timestamp authority or from the certificate authority that issued your digital ID. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 278 User Guide . Timestamps appear in the signature field and in the Signature Properties dialog box. If a timestamp server is configured, that timestamp appears in the Date/Time tab of the Signature Properties dialog box. If no timestamp server is configured, the signatures field displays the local time of the computer at the moment of signing. Configure a timestamp server To configure a timestamp server, you need the server name and URL or a Forms Data Format (FDF) file that contains the server settings. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Time Stamp Servers on the left. 3 Do one of the following: • If you have an FDF file with the timestamp server settings, click the Import button . Select the FDF file, and click Open. • If you have a URL for the timestamp server, click the New button . Type a name and then type the server URL. Specify whether the server requires a user name and password, and then click OK. Set a timestamp server as the default If you have two or more timestamp servers configured, you can set one of them as the default. Note: Before you set a timestamp server as the default, you may want to check if the timestamp authorities charge a usage fee. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select the timestamp server, and click the Set Default button 3 Click OK to confirm your selection. About graphics tablet signatures You can sign PDFs using graphics tablets and other input devices by using third-party software. Digital signature providers, such as Silanis and the Communication Intelligence Corporation (CIC), provide this capability in an Acrobat supported plug-in. These plug-ins may limit your access of certain encryption features in Acrobat. For more information about third-party providers, visit the Adobe website. Signing PDFs Before you sign a PDF You can expedite the signing process and optimize your results by making the following preparations in advance: • Obtain a digital ID, or create a self-signed digital ID in Acrobat. Note: You cannot create self-signed digital IDs from within FIPS mode. • Set the default signing method. • Create an appearance for your digital signature. • Use Preview Document mode to suppress any dynamic content that may alter the appearance of the document and mislead you into signing something you shouldn’t. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 279 User Guide • Review all the pages in a document before you sign. Documents may contain signature fields on multiple pages. When you sign one field, your signature appears in all occurrences of the field, whether you approve those pages or not. See also “About digital IDs” on page 253 “Change the signing method” on page 256 Sign a PDF You can sign a PDF to indicate your approval. A PDF can be signed more than once and by more than one person. When you sign a document, your digital signature appears in the signature field. The appearance of the signature depends on options you choose. The actual information for your digital signature is embedded in the PDF. The first person to sign a document (typically the document author) has the option of adding a certifying signature, which allows one to restrict changes to the document. Sign a PDF For best results, use Preview Document mode to add your signature. See “Sign in Preview Document mode” on page 280. 1 Click the signature field, or do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Sign & Certify > Sign Document. • Click the Sign button in the Tasks toolbar and choose Sign Document or Place Signature. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 280 User Guide 2 If you chose Place Signature, you’re prompted to draw a signature field for your signature. 3 If you haven’t specified a digital ID, you’re prompted to find or create one. 4 In the Sign Document dialog box, choose the digital ID you want to use. If you defined a personalized signature, choose it from the menu. 5 If you selected advanced digital signature preferences, do any of the following: • Choose a reason for signing the document. • Type your location and contact information. • Review any document warnings about content that may impact signing. 6 If your digital ID requires a password, type it in the Password box. 7 Click Sign, and specify a new name for the document so you can make changes to the original PDF without inval­ idating the signature, and click Save. Sign a PDF in a web browser To sign a PDF on the web, the document must contain an empty signature field. When you sign a document in a browser, only the incremental portion of the file is saved to your hard drive. 1 Click a signature field, and then follow the steps to add your digital signature. 2 To retain a copy of the signed document, click the Save A Copy button in the File toolbar. Sign in Preview Document mode For best results, use the Preview Document feature when you sign documents. This feature analyzes the document for content that may alter the document’s appearance, and then suppresses that content, allowing you to view and sign the document in a static and secure state. When you view a PDF in Preview Document mode, a document message bar lets you know if the PDF complies with the PDF/SigQ Level A and Level B specification. Level A indicates that the document contains no dynamic content that can alter its appearance. Level B indicates that the document contains dynamic content that can be suppressed during signing. If the document doesn’t comply with Level A or B, you may want to refrain from signing the document and contact the document author about the problem. You can also use Preview Document mode outside of a signing workflow to check the integrity of a document. Sign a PDF in Preview Document mode 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Security on the left. 2 Select View Documents In Preview Document Mode When Signing, and click OK. 3 In the PDF, click the signature field, or click the Sign button in the Tasks toolbar and choose Sign Document or Place Signature. The document message bar appears with the compliance status and options. 4 (Optional) Click View Report in the document message bar (if available) and select each item in the list to show details. When you’re done, close the PDF/SigQ Conformance dialog box. 5 If you’re satisfied with the compliance status of the document, click Sign Document in the document message bar, and add your digital signature. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 281 User Guide 6 Save the PDF using a different name than the original, and close the document without making any further changes. If you save the document a second time, your signature must be verified by using the View Signed Version option in the Signatures panel. (See “View previous versions of a signed document” on page 286.) View a PDF in Preview Document mode 1 Choose Advanced > Sign & Certify > Preview Document. 2 In the document message bar, click View Report (if available) and select each item in the list to show details. When you’re done, click Close, and then click Exit. Before you certify a PDF Document authors can improve document integrity and ensure that their documents remain certified by addressing the following issues before they certify PDFs: • Disable or remove content that could modify the document or compromise its integrity, such as JavaScripts, actions, or embedded media. • If you intend for others to sign the document, enable usage rights to let Adobe Reader users add a digital signature (choose Advanced > Enable Usage Rights In Adobe Reader). • Certify or sign a PDF only after you make final changes to it. If you make changes or resave the PDF after you sign it, you may compromise the validity of your signature or the document’s certified status. Document authors can use Adobe LiveCycle Designer (Windows) to create signature fields that lock after signing, preventing changes that may invalidate signatures. For more information, see Adobe LiveCycle Designer Help. See also “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248 Certify a PDF When you certify a PDF, you indicate that you approve of its contents. You also specify the types of changes that are permitted for the document to remain certified. For example, suppose that a government agency creates a form with signature fields. When the form is complete, the agency certifies the document, allowing users to change only form fields and sign the document. Users can fill in the form and sign the document, but if they remove pages or add comments, the document doesn’t retain its certified status. You can apply a certifying signature only if the PDF doesn’t contain any other signatures. Certifying signatures can be visible or invisible, and are indicated by the blue ribbon icon in the Signatures panel (and if visibly signed, in the signature field). A digital ID is required to add digital signatures (see “About digital signatures” on page 275.) 1 Change the default signing method, if needed. 2 Click the Sign button in the Tasks toolbar and choose one of the following options: • Certify With Visible Signature. • Certify Without Visible Signature. If you choose this option, your signature appears only in the Signatures panel. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 282 User Guide Note: If you enabled View Documents In Preview Document Mode When Signing in the Security Preferences, click Sign Document in the document message bar. 3 Click OK in the Save As Certified Document dialog box. 4 If you’re adding a visible signature, draw the signature field on the page. Follow the on-screen instructions to select a digital ID, if prompted. Specify a default ID to avoid being prompted each time you sign a PDF. 5 In the Certify Document dialog box, specify the permitted changes, type your password, and then click Sign. 6 Save the PDF using a different filename than the original file, and then close the document without making additional changes. See also “Change the signing method” on page 256 “Specify the default digital ID” on page 256 “About digital IDs” on page 253 Clear or remove a digital signature ? Do one of the following: • To remove a signature, right-click/Control-click the signature field and choose Clear Signature Field. • To remove all signatures in a PDF, choose Clear All Signature Fields from the Options menu in the Signatures panel. If you want to delete the signature field, choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool, select the signature field, and press the Delete key. Validating signatures Checking the validity of a signature By default, signatures are validated when you open a PDF. An icon appears in the signature field on the document page to indicate the signature status. Further details about the status appear in the Signatures panel and in the Signature Properties dialog box. Third-party signature handlers may provide alternate methods of validating signatures. Check the documentation included with your third-party digital ID. Important: To ensure that signatures are validated when you open a PDF and that all verification details appear with the signature, set your verification preferences in advance (see “Set signature verification preferences” on page 284). • The digital signature icon along with the name of the field in the Signatures panel indicate the presence of an unsigned signature field. • The blue ribbon icon indicates that the PDF is certified—that is, it contains a valid certifying signature. (Certi­ fying signatures can be visible or invisible.) • The check mark icon indicates that the signature is valid. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 283 User Guide • The red x icon indicates that the signature is invalid. • The caution triangle icon indicates that the document was modified after the signature was added. • The question mark icon indicates that the signature couldn’t be validated because the signer’s certificate isn’t in your list of trusted identities. If the signature status is unknown or unverified, or if the document was modified after it was signed, validate the signature manually to determine the problem’s cause and possible solution. If the signature status is invalid (indicated by the red x icon), contact the signer about the problem. See also “Verify information on a certificate” on page 260 “Get certificates from other users” on page 258 What makes a digital signature invalid? A signature can have an invalid status for the following reasons: • The signer’s certificate was revoked. • The signer’s certificate has expired. • The signer’s certificate was removed from the trusted identities list or the trust level changed. • The PDF was modified after it was signed or certified. Validate a signature manually You can assess the validity of a digital signature by checking the signature properties. 1 Set your signature verification preferences. For more information, see “Set signature verification preferences” on page 284. 2 Open the PDF containing the signature, and click the Signatures button on the left to open the Signatures panel. 3 Select the signature in the Signatures panel, and then choose Validate Signature from the Options menu. The Signature Validation Status describes the validity of the signature. 4 Click Signature Properties, and do the following: • If the status is unknown, click the Signer tab, and then click Show Certificate to view the details of the certificate. If you’re working with self-signed digital IDs, confirm that the certificate details are valid. If the certificate isn’t valid, request a valid certificate from the signer. Click OK. • Click the Date/Time tab to verify the timestamp, if needed. • Click the Legal tab to learn more about the legal restrictions of the signature. In the Legal tab, click View Document Integrity Properties to check if the document is PDF/SiqQ-compliant, or if it contains items that could alter its appearance. If the document was modified after it was signed, check the signed version of the document and compare it to the current version. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 284 User Guide See also “Validate a timestamp certificate” on page 285 “Sign in Preview Document mode” on page 280 “View previous versions of a signed document” on page 286 Set signature verification preferences Before you open signed documents, set your preferences to optimize Acrobat for validating signatures. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select Security on the left. 2 To automatically validate all signatures in a PDF when you open the document, select Verify Signatures When The Document Is Opened. This option is enabled by default. 3 Click Advanced Preferences, and then click the Verification tab. 4 Choose the following options: When Verifying These options specify methods that determine which plug-in to choose when verifying a signature. The appropriate plug-in is often selected automatically. Contact your system administrator about specific plug-in requirements for validating signatures. Require That Certificate Revocation Checking Be Done Whenever Possible During Signature Verification Select this option to require certificates to be checked against a list of excluded certificates during validation. If this option isn’t selected, the revocation status for approval signatures is ignored. The revocation status is always checked for certi­ fying signatures. Verify Signatures Using Select an option to determine whether the time that appears in the digital signature reflects the time the signature was validated (Current Time), the time set by the default timestamp server specified in the Security Settings, or the time the signature was created. Hide Signature Field Validity Icon When Signature Is Valid Hides the signature status if the signature is valid, even if the document has changed since it’s been signed (indicated by a green check mark and caution triangle icon). 5 Click the Windows Integration tab, and specify whether you can import identities from the Windows Certificates feature into the list of trusted identities. In addition, specify whether to trust all root certificates in the Windows Certificates feature when validating signatures and when validating certified documents. Be aware that selecting these options might compromise security. Signatures panel overview The Signatures panel lists all the signatures in the current document. Each signature has an icon identifying its verifi­ cation status. Verification details are listed beneath each signature and can be viewed by expanding the signature, or by making selections from the Options menu in the Security panel. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 285 User Guide Verify signatures in the Signatures panel. Display the Signatures panel ? Choose View > Navigation Panels > Signatures, or click the Signatures button in the navigation pane. You can right-click/Control-click a signature field in the Signatures panel to do most signature-related tasks, including adding, clearing, and validating signatures. In some cases, however, the signature field may become locked after you sign it. Expand or collapse a signature ? In the Signatures panel, click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Mac OS) next to the signature to expand it. Click the minus sign (Windows) or the rotated triangle (Mac OS) to collapse it. When collapsed, the signature shows only the name, date, and status. Validate a timestamp certificate If a signature displays the date and time, that time is the local time on the signer’s computer. However, a second date and time may appear in the Signature Properties dialog box, indicating that the signer uses a timestamp server. To validate a signature that contains a timestamp, you must obtain the certificate for the timestamp server and add it to your list of trusted identities. Otherwise, the timestamp appears in the Signatures panel as unverified, and you must validate the timestamp manually. 1 Click the Signatures button in the navigation pane, select the signature, and choose Validate Signature from the Options menu. 2 Click the Signature Properties button in the Signature Validation Status dialog box. 3 In the Signature Properties dialog box, click the Date/Time tab to view the timestamp authority, and then click the Show Certificate button. (This button appears in the Date/Time tab only if the signer used a timestamp server.) 4 In the Certificate Viewer, click the Trust tab to determine if the timestamp certificate is trusted. If it isn’t trusted, click Add To Trusted Identities. If a certificate for the timestamp server isn’t listed, request one from the signer. See also “Sharing and managing certificates” on page 258 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 286 User Guide View previous versions of a signed document Each time a document is signed, a signed version of the PDF is saved with the PDF. Each version is saved as append­ only so that it cannot be modified. All signatures and their corresponding versions can be accessed from the Signa­ tures panel. 1 In the Signatures panel, select the signature, and choose View Signed Version from the Option menu. The previous version opens in a new PDF, with the version information and the name of the signer in the title bar. 2 To return to the original document, choose the document name from the Window menu. Compare versions of a signed document After a document is signed, you can display a list of the changes made to the document after the last version. 1 In the Signatures panel, select the signature. 2 Choose Compare Signed Version To Current Version from the Option menu. 3 When you’re done, close the temporary document. 287 Chapter 10: Accessibility, tags, and reflow Accessibility features assist people with disabilities—such as mobility impairments, blindness, and low vision—in their use of Adobe Acrobat and Adobe PDFs. Accessibility features About accessibility features A document or application is accessible if it can be used by people with disabilities—such as mobility impairments, blindness, and low vision—and not just by people who can see well and use a mouse. Accessibility features in Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader, and Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) make it easier for people with disabilities to use PDF documents and forms, with or without the aid of assistive software and devices such as screen readers, screen magnifiers, and braille printers. Making PDFs accessible tends to benefit all users. For example, the underlying document structure that makes it possible for a screen reader to properly read a PDF out loud also makes it possible for a mobile device to correctly reflow and display the document on a small screen. Similarly, the preset tab order of an accessible PDF form helps all users—not just users with mobility impairments—fill the form more easily. Accessibility features in Acrobat and Reader fall into two broad categories: features to make the reading of PDF documents more accessible and features to create accessible PDF documents. To create accessible PDF documents, you must use Acrobat, not Reader. Features for accessible reading of PDFs • Preferences and commands to optimize output for assistive software and devices, such as saving as accessible text for a braille printer • Preferences and commands to make navigation of PDFs more accessible, such as automatic scrolling and opening PDFs to the last page read • Accessibility Setup Assistant for easy setting of most preferences related to accessibility • Keyboard alternates to mouse actions • Reflow capability to temporarily present the text of a PDF in a single easy-to-read column • Read Out Loud text-to-speech conversion • Support for screen readers and screen magnifiers Features for creating accessible PDFs • Creation of tagged PDFs from authoring applications • Conversion of untagged PDFs to tagged PDFs • Security setting that allows screen readers to access text while preventing users from copying, printing, editing, and extracting text • Ability to add text to scanned pages to improve accessibility • Tools for editing reading order and document structure ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 288 User Guide • Tools for creating accessible PDF forms Though Acrobat Standard provides some functionality for making existing PDFs accessible, you must use Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to perform certain tasks—such as editing reading order or editing document structure tags—that may be necessary to make some PDF documents and forms accessible. For more information about creating accessible PDFs and using accessibility features to read PDFs, see http://www.adobe.com/go/accessibility. About accessible PDFs Accessible PDFs have the following characteristics. Searchable text A document that consists of scanned images of text is inherently inaccessible because the content of the document is images, not searchable text. Assistive software cannot read or extract the words, users cannot select or edit the text, and you cannot manipulate the PDF for accessibility. You must convert the scanned images of text to searchable text using optical character recognition (OCR) before you can use other accessibility features with the document. Alternate text descriptions Document features such as images and interactive form fields can’t be read by a screen reader unless they have associated alternate text. Though web links are read by screen readers, you can provide more meaningful descrip­ tions as alternate text. Alternate text and tool tips can aid many users, including those with learning disabilities. Fonts that allow characters to be extracted to text The fonts in an accessible PDF must contain enough information for Acrobat to correctly extract all of the characters to text for purposes other than displaying text on the screen. Acrobat extracts characters to Unicode text when you read a PDF with a screen reader or the Read Out Loud feature, or when you save as text for a braille printer. This extraction fails if Acrobat cannot determine how to map the font to Unicode characters. Reading order and document structure tags To read a document’s text and present it in a way that makes sense to the user, a screen reader or other text-to-speech tool requires that the document be structured. Document structure tags in a PDF define the reading order and identify headings, paragraphs, sections, tables, and other page elements. Interactive form fields Some PDFs contain forms that a person is to fill out using a computer. To be accessible, form fields must be inter­ active—meaning that a user must be able to enter values into the form fields. Navigational aids Navigational aids in a PDF—such as links, bookmarks, headings, a table of contents, and a preset tab order for form fields—assist all users in using the document without having to read through the entire document, word by word. Bookmarks are especially useful and can be created from document headings. Document language Specifying the document language in a PDF enables some screen readers to switch to the appropriate language. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 289 User Guide Security that doesn’t interfere with assistive software Some authors of PDFs restrict users from printing, copying, extracting, adding comments to, or editing text. The text of an accessible PDF must be available to a screen reader. You can use Acrobat to ensure that security settings don’t interfere with a screen reader’s ability to convert the on-screen text to speech. See also “Recognize text in scanned documents” on page 68 “Check and correct reading order” on page 307 “Workflow for creating accessible PDF forms” on page 304 “Add alternate text and supplementary information to tags” on page 317 “Set the document language” on page 313 “Prevent security settings from interfering with screen readers” on page 313 “Check accessibility with Full Check” on page 291 About tags, accessibility, reading order, and reflow PDF tags are similar in many ways to XML tags. PDF tags indicate document structure: which text is a heading, which content makes up a section, which text is a bookmark, and so on. A logical structure tree of tags represents the organizational structure of the document. Thus tags can indicate the precise reading order and improve navigation—particularly for longer, more complex documents—without changing the appearance of the PDF. For people who are unable to see or interpret the visual appearance of a document, assistive software can determine how to present and interpret the content of the document by using the logical structure tree. Most assistive software depends on document structure tags to determine the appropriate reading order of text and to convey the meaning of images and other content in an alternate format, such as sound. In an untagged document, there is no such structure information, and Acrobat must infer a structure based on the Reading Order preference setting, which often results in page items being read in the wrong order or not at all. Reflowing a document for viewing on the small screen of a mobile device relies on these same document structure tags. Often, Acrobat tags PDFs when you create them. To determine whether a PDF contains tags, choose File > Properties, and look at the Tagged PDF value in the Advanced pane of the Description tab. See also “Reading PDFs with reflow and accessibility features” on page 293 “Creating accessible PDFs” on page 299 “Making existing PDFs accessible” on page 305 “Standard PDF tags” on page 319 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 290 User Guide Checking the accessibility of PDFs About accessibility checkers Of course, the best way to test the accessibility of a document is to attempt to use the document with the tools that your readers will use. However, even if you don’t have a screen reader or braille printer, you can still use any of several methods provided by Acrobat for checking the accessibility of a PDF. • Use Quick Check to check for document structure tags, searchable text, and appropriate security settings for accessibility. This method is often the best way to check for accessibility before attempting to use a PDF. • Use Full Check to perform a more thorough check for many characteristics of accessible PDFs, such as the use of fonts that can be mapped reliably to Unicode text. • Use Reflow view to quickly check reading order. • Use Read Out Loud to experience the document as it will be experienced by readers who use this text-to-speech conversion tool. • Save the document as accessible text and then read the saved text file in a word-processing application to experience the document as it will be experienced by readers who use a braille printer. • Use the TouchUp Reading Order tool, Tags tab, and Content tab to examine the structure, reading order, and contents of a PDF in detail. Note: The accessibility checker tools can help to identify areas of documents that may be in conflict with the Adobe inter­ pretation of the accessibility guidelines referenced in the application and its documentation. However, these tools don’t check documents against all accessibility criteria, including those in such referenced guidelines, and Adobe doesn’t warrant that documents comply with any specific guidelines or regulations. See also “Reading a PDF with a screen reader” on page 298 “Reflow a PDF” on page 297 “Read a PDF with Read Out Loud” on page 298 “Save as accessible text for a braille printer” on page 297 “Check and correct reading order” on page 307 “View tags in the Tags tab” on page 315 Check accessibility with Quick Check Use Quick Check to examine a PDF to see if it has searchable text, document structure tags, and appropriate security settings to make it accessible. ? Press Shift+Ctrl+6/Shift+Command+6. If the document is unstructured, a message may appear, suggesting that you change reading order preferences. See also “Setting accessibility preferences” on page 293 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 291 User Guide Accessibility Quick Check results “This document has logical structure but it is not a Tagged PDF. Some accessibility information may be missing.” Quick Check has found an underlying document structure in the document, so Acrobat will use the available document structure to control the reading order, rather than analyzing the document itself. However, this untagged document structure might be incomplete or unreliable, so assistive software and the accessibility features in Acrobat (such as the Read Out Loud and the Save As Text features) may not read the page properly. If the reading order of the page seems to be wrong, select Override The Reading Order In Tagged Documents in the Reading panel of the Preferences dialog box. “This document is not structured, so the reading order may not be correct. Try different reading orders using the Reading Preferences panel.” Quick Check has found no underlying document structure that Acrobat can use for reading order. Acrobat will analyze the reading order of the document using the current analysis method set in the Reading Order preference, but this PDF might not be read correctly by screen readers. If the reading order seems wrong, select a different option for Reading Order in the Reading panel of the Preferences dialog box. “No accessibility problems were detected in this quick check. Choose the Full Check command to check more thoroughly.” Quick Check has found that the PDF contains searchable text, is tagged, has an underlying document structure, and has no security settings that prohibit access for screen readers. To check for other types of accessibility problems that may be present in the PDF, use Full Check. “This document’s security settings prevent access by screen readers.” Quick Check has found that the PDF has security settings that interfere with screen readers’ ability to extract text for conversion to speech. You may be able to use a screen reader with this document if your assistive technology product is registered with Adobe as a Trusted Agent. Contact your assistive technology product vendor. “This document appears to contain no text. It may be a scanned image.” Quick Check has found that the PDF contains no searchable text, probably because the document consists entirely of one or more scanned images. This means that screen readers, Read Out Loud, Reflow view, and most other accessibility features—which rely on text as input—will not work with this document. Check accessibility with Full Check Use Full Check to check a PDF for many of the characteristics of accessible PDFs. You can choose which kinds of accessibility problems to look for and how you want to view the results. 1 Choose Advanced > Accessibility > Full Check. 2 Select options for how you want to view the results, the page range to check, and which types of accessibility problems to check for. 3 Click Start Checking. Note: A full accessibility check can be time-consuming. You can stop the process by pressing the Esc key. Consider choosing a smaller page range. You can choose to view the results of a full accessibility check as an HTML file or as comments that are placed throughout the document where the accessibility problems are detected. Because the Full Check feature is unable to distinguish between essential and nonessential content types, it may report issues that don’t affect readability. It’s a good idea to review all issues to determine which ones require correction. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 292 User Guide Accessibility Full Check options Create Accessibility Report Creates an HTML report of accessibility issues, which is opened in the navigation pane and saved in the location indicated by the Folder field. Include Repair Hints In Accessibility Report Adds suggestions for fixing accessibility problems to the HTML report or comments. Create Comments In Document Adds comments to the document that indicate accessibility problems. Delete all accessibility comments from the PDF after you repair the accessibility issues. Page Range The range of pages to check. Name The set of accessibility criteria to check. For the Section 508 and W3C guidelines, the options area includes a Browse button that links to the website for the respective guidelines. Select Adobe PDF to choose from options for the Adobe PDF accessibility standard: • Alternative Descriptions Are Provided Checks for tagged figures that are missing alternate text. • Text Language Is Specified Checks for paragraphs that don’t have a language specified for them. Setting the language for an entire document in the Document Properties dialog box corrects all errors related to this option. • Reliable Character Encoding Is Provided Checks for fonts that are inaccessible to screen readers and other assistive software. Fonts must contain enough information for Acrobat to correctly extract all the characters to text. If one or more fonts don’t allow for the correct extraction of all the characters, the PDF is inaccessible. • All Content Is Contained In The Document Structure Checks for page elements that may have been overlooked during tagging. Adding these elements to the tag tree (if necessary) ensures that a screen reader can present the content to a user. • All Form Fields Have Descriptions Checks for form fields that are missing descriptions. • Tab Order Is Consistent With The Structure Order Checks whether tags properly reflect the document’s structure. • List And Table Structure Is Correct Checks whether tags that have been generated for lists and tables meet the requirements of tagged PDF. View Full Check results If you choose Create Accessibility Report in the Accessibility Full Check dialog box, you can specify a folder where you want the report to be saved. When the full check is complete, the accessibility report appears in the navigation pane and is also saved in the folder indicated. The name of the report file is the same as that of the source PDF, except that .pdf is replaced by PDF.html. 1 Choose Advanced > Accessibility > Open Accessibility Report. 2 Select the HTML file, and then click OK. The report appears in the navigation pane. Links in the accessibility report take you to the location of inaccessible elements in the document pane or to proce­ dures that briefly explain how to fix accessibility problems. Note: If you want to reopen the accessibility report with the associated PDF, don’t move or rename either file after running the full check. The HTML file refers to the PDF file with a relative path. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 293 User Guide Reading PDFs with reflow and accessibility features Setting accessibility preferences Acrobat provides several preferences that help make the reading of PDFs more accessible for visually impaired and motion-impaired users, including preferences that control how PDFs appear on the screen and are read by a screen reader. Most preferences related to accessibility are available through the Accessibility Setup Assistant, which provides onscreen instructions for setting these preferences. Some preferences that affect accessibility aren’t available through the Accessibility Setup Assistant; these include preferences in the Reading, Forms, and Multimedia categories. You can set all preferences in the Preferences dialog box. The names shown for some preferences in the Accessibility Setup Assistant are different from the names for the same preferences shown in the Preferences dialog box. Acrobat Help uses the names shown in the Preferences dialog box. For more information about accessibility features in Acrobat and PDF, visit the accessibility page of the Adobe website. Set accessibility preferences with the Accessibility Setup Assistant 1 Start the Accessibility Setup Assistant by doing one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Accessibility > Setup Assistant. • (Windows only) Start Acrobat for the first time while a screen reader or screen magnifier is running. 2 Choose the option that is appropriate for your assistive software and devices. The assistant presents only preferences that are appropriate for your assistive software and devices, according to the option that you choose. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. If you click Cancel at any point, Acrobat uses default settings for the prefer­ ences set by the assistant (not recommended). Set accessibility preferences with the Preferences dialog box 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Set preferences as appropriate for your assistive software and devices in various panels of the Preferences dialog box. Accessibility preferences Accessibility preferences in Accessibility panel Replace Document Colors When this preference is selected, you can choose from a list of contrasting color combi­ nations for text and background, or you can create your own. These settings correspond to the Use High Contrast Colors For Document Text option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Always Use Page Layout Style Corresponds to the Override Page Layout Style option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Always Use Zoom Setting Corresponds to the Override Document Zoom option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Use Document Structure For Tab Order When No Explicit Tab Order Is Specified Improves navigation of form fields and links in documents that don’t specify a tab order. Always Display The Keyboard Selection Cursor Select this option if you use a screen magnifier. This preference corresponds to the Always Display The Keyboard Selection Cursor option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 294 User Guide Accessibility preferences in Documents panel Automatically Save Document Changes To Temporary File When deselected, this preference disables the auto-save action. Each time a PDF is saved, the screen reader or magnifier must reload the document. This preference corre­ sponds to the Disable Document Auto-Save option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Accessibility preferences in Forms panel Fields Highlight Color and Required Fields Highlight Color These preferences specify what colors will be used to highlight fillable form fields. They correspond to the Field Highlight Color and Required Field Highlight Color options in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Auto-Complete Enables Acrobat to automatically offer to complete some entries in form fields so that filling form fields requires fewer keystrokes. This preference doesn’t correspond to an option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Accessibility preferences in Internet panel Display PDF In Browser Causes PDFs linked to from web pages to open in the web browser instead of a separate Acrobat window. Deselect this preference for greater control when navigating a document in a screen reader. This preference corresponds to the Display PDF Documents In The Web Browser option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Accessibility preferences in Multimedia panel • Show Subtitles When Available • Play Dubbed Audio When Available • Show Supplemental Text Captions When Available • Show Audio Description (Or Video Description, Or Descriptive Video) When Available These preferences don’t correspond to any options in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Accessibility preferences in Page Display panel Zoom Sets the on-screen magnification of documents and allows low-vision readers to read reflowed PDFs more easily. This preference corresponds to the Override Document Zoom option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Smooth Text Controls anti-aliasing of text. To disable smoothing of text and make text sharper and easier to read with a screen magnifier, choose None. This preference corresponds to the Disable Text Smoothing option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Accessibility preferences in Reading panel Reading Order Specifies the reading order of documents. The reading order preferences also appear in the Accessi­ bility Setup Assistant. • Infer Reading Order From Document (Recommended) Interprets the reading order of untagged documents by using an advanced method of structure-inference layout analysis. • Left-To-Right, Top-To-Bottom Reading Order Delivers the text according to its placement on the page, reading from left to right and then top to bottom. This method is faster than Infer Reading Order From Document. This method analyzes text only; form fields are ignored and tables aren’t recognized as such. • Use Reading Order In Raw Print Stream Delivers text in the order in which it was recorded in the print stream. This method is faster than Infer Reading Order From Document. This method analyzes text only; form fields are ignored and tables aren’t recognized as such. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 295 User Guide Override The Reading Order In Tagged Documents Uses the reading order specified in the Reading preferences instead of that specified by the tag structure of the document. Use this preference only when you encounter problems in poorly tagged PDFs. This preference corresponds to the Override The Reading Order In Tagged Documents option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Page Vs Document This preference determines how much of a document is delivered to a screen reader at a time. If a PDF isn’t tagged, Acrobat may analyze the document and attempt to infer its structure and reading order, which can take a long time for a long document. You may want to set Acrobat to deliver only the currently visible page so that it analyzes only a small piece of the document at a time. This consideration will vary depending on the size and complexity of the document and on the features of the screen reader. When Acrobat delivers information to a screen reader, screen magnifier, or other assistive software, it loads information into a memory buffer that is directly available to the assistive software. The amount of information that is delivered to the memory buffer can affect how long Acrobat takes to perform tasks, such as opening the document, advancing to the next page, changing views, and carrying out commands. • Only Read The Currently Visible Pages This option is usually best when you use a screen magnifier. It improves performance by eliminating the need for the software to process parts of the document that aren’t visible. When Acrobat sends only the currently visible pages of a PDF to the memory buffer, the assistive technology has access to those pages only. It cannot go to another page until the next page is visible and Acrobat has sent the page information to the memory buffer. Therefore, if this option is selected, you must use the navigation features of Acrobat, not those of the assistive technology, to navigate from page to page in the document. You should also set the Default Page Layout option in preferences to Single Page if you choose to have Acrobat send only the currently visible pages to the assistive technology. Because Acrobat sends page information about all visible pages, the assistive technology receives information about pages that may be only partially visible (such as the bottom of one page or the top of the next), as well as those pages that are completely visible. If you use a page display setting other than Single Page, such as Continuous, and then you display the next page, the technology may not correctly track which portion of a previous page it has already read aloud. For instructions on setting the default page layout to Single Page, see “Prefer­ ences for viewing PDFs” on page 33. This option corresponds to the Only Read The Currently Visible Pages option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. • Read The Entire Document This option can be best if you use a screen reader that has its own navigation and search tools and that is more familiar to you than the tools in Acrobat. This option corresponds to the Read The Entire Document At Once option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. • For Large Documents, Only Read The Currently Visible Pages This option is selected by default and is usually best if you use a screen reader with long or complex PDFs. It allows Acrobat to deliver an entire small document but revert to page-by-page delivery for large documents. This preference corresponds to the For Large Documents, Only Read The Currently Visible Pages option in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. Confirm Before Tagging Documents When selected, lets the user confirm the options that will be used before Acrobat prepares an untagged document for reading. Tagging can be a time-consuming procedure, especially for larger documents. This preference corresponds to the Confirm Before Tagging Documents option in the Accessi­ bility Setup Assistant. Read Out Loud Options Set preferences in this section to control volume, speed, and pitch of the voice used for Read Out Loud. You can choose to use the default voice or any of the voices provided by your operating system. Select Read Form Fields to have Read Out Loud read the contents of form fields. These preferences don’t correspond to options in the Accessibility Setup Assistant. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 296 User Guide Navigate and control the application with the keyboard You can navigate by using the keyboard instead of the mouse. Several keyboard access features are available on Mac OS; see the documentation for your operating system for details. On Windows, some of the keyboard shortcuts used to navigate in Acrobat may differ from those used in other Windows applications. When you open Acrobat within a web browser, keyboard commands are mapped to the web browser first. Conse­ quently, some keyboard shortcuts may not be available for Acrobat or may be available only after you shift the focus to the PDF. For information on accessibility features for navigating Acrobat and PDF documents with the keyboard, visit the accessibility page of the Adobe website. See also “Keys for navigating a PDF” on page 570 “Keys for selecting tools” on page 569 “Keys for editing” on page 569 “Keys for general navigating” on page 571 “Keys for working with navigation panels” on page 573 “Keys for navigating the Help window” on page 574 “Keys for navigating the How To panel” on page 574 Enable single-key accelerators You can select some tools and perform some actions with single-key accelerators. Most keyboard shortcuts in Acrobat don’t require that you enable single-key accelerators. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 2 Select General, and then select Use Single-Key Accelerators To Access Tools. Note: Some screen readers do not work with Acrobat single-key accelerators. Scroll automatically The automatic scrolling feature makes it easier to scan through long PDFs, especially reflowed documents. You can scroll through pages without using keystrokes or mouse actions. 1 Choose View > Automatically Scroll. 2 Do any of the following: • To change the scrolling speed to a specific speed, press a number key (9 for fastest, 0 for slowest). • To increase or decrease the scrolling speed, press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow key, depending on the direction of scrolling. • To reverse the direction of scrolling, press the minus sign (-) key. • To jump to the next or previous page, press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow key. To stop automatic scrolling, press Esc or choose View > Automatically Scroll again. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 297 User Guide Save as accessible text for a braille printer Note: This document uses the term “braille printer” to refer to any device that is used to convert accessible text to a form that can be used by a person with blindness or low vision. You can save a PDF as accessible text to print on a braille printer. Accessible text can be imported and printed out as formatted grade 1 or 2 braille documents by using a braille translation application. See the documentation included with the braille translator for more information. A text version of a PDF contains no images or multimedia objects, although the text version of an accessible PDF contains alternate text descriptions for such objects. 1 Choose File > Save As. 2 Choose Text (Accessible) from the Save As Type (Windows) or Format (Mac OS) menu. Reflow a PDF You can reflow a PDF to temporarily present it as a single column that is the width of the document pane. This reflow view can make the document easier to read on the small screen of a mobile device or on a standard monitor at a large magnification, without the need to scroll horizontally to read each line of text. You cannot save, edit, or print a document while it is in Reflow view. In most cases, only readable text appears in the reflow view. Text that doesn’t reflow includes forms, comments, digital signature fields, and page artifacts, such as page numbers, headers, and footers. Pages that contain both readable text and form or digital signature fields don’t reflow. Vertical text reflows horizontally. Acrobat temporarily tags an untagged document before reflowing it. As an author, you can optimize your PDFs for reflow by tagging them yourself. Tagging ensures that text blocks reflow and that content follows the appropriate sequences, so readers can follow a story that spans different pages and columns without other stories interrupting the flow. A quick way to check the reading order of a document is to view it in Reflow view. If the tagged PDF doesn’t reflow the way you want, the content order or reading order of the PDF file may contain inconsistencies, or the tagging process itself may be the cause. You can use the Content tab or TouchUp Reading Order tool to resolve reflow problems. If the problem is simply that words don’t hyphenate the way you expect them to, then you can insert special characters to resolve the problem. (See “Insert special characters” on page 350.) Headings and columns (left) reflow in a logical reading order (right). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 298 User Guide Reflow a tagged PDF ? Do one of the following: • Choose View > Zoom > Reflow. • Press Ctrl+4/Command+4. If the Page Display setting for the document is Two-Up before you choose Reflow view, the Page Display setting automatically becomes Single Page when the document is reflowed. If the Page Display setting for the document is Two-Up Continuous before you choose Reflow view, the Page Display setting automatically becomes Continuous when the document is reflowed. Return to unreflowed view ? When in Reflow view, do one of the following: • Choose View > Zoom > Reflow. • Press Ctrl+4/Command+4. Reading a PDF with a screen reader Acrobat supports assistive software and devices—such as screen readers and screen magnifiers—that enable visually impaired users to interact with computer applications. When assistive software and devices are in use, Acrobat may add temporary tags to open PDFs to improve their readability. Use the Accessibility Setup Assistant to improve how Acrobat interacts with the types of assistive software and devices that you use. When using a screen reader, you can change your reading settings for the current document by pressing Shift+Ctrl+5 (Windows) or Shift+Command+5 (Mac OS). See the documentation for your assistive software or device, or contact the vendor for more information about system requirements, compatibility requirements, and instructions for using this software or device with Acrobat. Read a PDF with Read Out Loud The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in a PDF, including the text in comments and alternate text descrip­ tions for images and fillable fields. In tagged PDFs, content is read in the order in which it appears in the document’s logical structure tree. In untagged documents, the reading order is inferred, unless a reading order has been specified in the Reading preferences. Read Out Loud uses the available voices installed on your system. If you have SAPI 4 or SAPI 5 voices installed from text-to-speech or language applications, you can choose them to read your PDFs. Note: Read Out Loud isn’t a screen reader, and some operating systems may not support it. Activate or deactivate Read Out Loud You must activate Read Out Loud before you can use it. You can deactivate Read Out Loud to free system resources and improve performance of other operations. ? Do one of the following: • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Activate Read Out Loud or press Shift+Ctrl+Y/Shift+Command+Y. • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Deactivate Read Out Loud or press Shift+Ctrl+Y/Shift+Command+Y. Read a PDF with Read Out Loud 1 Navigate to the page that you want to read. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 299 User Guide 2 Do one of the following: • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Read This Page Only or press Shift+Ctrl+V/Shift+Command+V. • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Read To End Of Document or press Shift+Ctrl+B/Shift+Command+B. Read PDF form fields out loud 1 In the Reading panel of the Preferences dialog box, select Read Form Fields in the Read Out Loud Options section. 2 In the PDF form, press Tab to select the first form field. 3 Make entries and selections as needed, and then press Tab to move to the next field, repeating this step until the form is completed. Acrobat reads the state of selected check boxes and radio buttons. Interrupt reading out loud ? Do one of the following: • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Pause or press Shift+Ctrl+C/Shift+Command+C. • Choose View > Read Out Loud > Stop or press Shift+Ctrl+E/Shift+Command+E. About operating system accessibility tools Accessibility tools in Windows Windows 2000, XP, and Vista operating systems have built-in tools that provide increased or alternate access to infor­ mation on the computer screen. Narrator is a light version of a screen reader. Magnifier is a screen magnification tool. For more information on the accessibility tools in the Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating systems, visit the Microsoft accessibility website at http://www.microsoft.com/enable. Accessibility tools in Mac OS Mac OS X has built-in tools that provide increased or alternate access to information on the computer screen. For more information on the accessibility tools in the Mac OS X operating system, visit the Apple Computer, Inc. accessibility website at http://www.apple.com/accessibility. Creating accessible PDFs Workflow for creating accessible PDFs At a high level, the process of creating accessible PDFs consists of a few basic stages: ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 300 User Guide 1. Consider accessibility before you convert a document to PDF. 2. Add fillable form fields and descriptions, and set the tab order. 3. Tag the PDF. 4. Add other accessibility features to the PDF. 5. Evaluate the PDF and repair tagging problems. Though these stages are presented in an order that suits most needs, you may perform tasks in these stages in a different order or iterate between some of the stages. In all cases, you should first examine the document, determine its intended purpose, and use that analysis to determine the workflow that you apply. 6. Consider accessibility before you convert a document to PDF. Whenever possible, think about accessibility when you create the source files in an authoring application, such as a word-processing or page-layout application. Typical tasks to do in the authoring application include adding alternate text to graphics, optimizing tables, and applying paragraph styles or other document-structure features that can be converted to tags. For more information, see “Creating a tagged PDF from an authoring application” on page 302. Note: If you intend to design PDF forms, Adobe recommends using Adobe LiveCycle Designer, which is dedicated to the design of interactive and static forms. LiveCycle Designer adds structure tags to forms, improving accessibility. 7. Add fillable form fields and descriptions, and set the tab order. If your document includes form fields, you must make form fields interactive (fillable) and include descriptions for the form fields. Use Forms > Run Form Fields Recognition to automatically detect form fields and make them fillable. For more information on detecting form fields and making them fillable, see “Creating new forms” on page 212. Acrobat Professional and Acrobat 3D have a Forms toolbar that provides numerous tools for creating fillable form fields, such as buttons, check boxes, list boxes, and text boxes. When you create a field, you can type a description for it in the Tooltip box in the General tab of the field’s Properties dialog box. Screen readers will read this text aloud to the user. You can also use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to add descriptions to form fields. For information on setting the tab order to use document structure, see “Set form-field tabbing order in Acrobat” on page 221. 8. Tag the PDF. Improve the accessibility of PDFs by adding tags in Acrobat. If a PDF doesn’t contain tags, Acrobat may attempt to tag it automatically when users read or reflow it, and the results may be disappointing. If you provide users with a tagged PDF, the logical structure tree sends the contents to a screen reader or other assistive software or hardware in an appropriate order. For best results, tag a document when converting it to PDF from an authoring application. Alternatively, you can tag a PDF any time in Acrobat. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 301 User Guide Tagging during conversion to PDF requires an authoring application that supports tagging in PDF. Tagging during conversion enables the authoring application to draw from the source document’s paragraph styles or other struc­ tural information to produce a logical structure tree that reflects an accurate reading order and appropriate levels of tags. This tagging can more readily interpret the structure of complex layouts, such as embedded sidebars, closely spaced columns, irregular text alignment, and tables. Tagging during conversion can also properly tag the links, cross-references, bookmarks, and alternate text (when available) that are in the file. To tag a PDF in Acrobat, use the Add Tags To Document command. This command works on any untagged PDF, such as one created with Adobe PDF Printer. Acrobat analyzes the content of the PDF to interpret the individual page elements, their hierarchical structure, and the intended reading order of each page, and then builds a tag tree that reflects that information. It also creates tags for any links, cross-references, and bookmarks that you added to the document in Acrobat. Though the Add Tags To Document command adequately tags most standard layouts, it cannot always correctly interpret the structure and reading order of complex page elements, such as closely spaced columns, irregular text alignment, nonfillable form fields, and tables that don’t have borders. Tagging these pages by using the Add Tags To Document command can result in improperly combined elements or out-of-sequence tags that cause reading order problems in the PDF. For more information, see “Add tags to an existing PDF” on page 305. 9. Add other accessibility features to the PDF. This stage includes setting the document language, making sure that security settings don’t interfere with screen readers, creating accessible links, and adding bookmarks. For more information, see “Set the document language” on page 313, “Prevent security settings from interfering with screen readers” on page 313, “Add accessible links” on page 312, and “About bookmarks” on page 327. 10. Evaluate the PDF and repair tagging problems. Once you have a tagged PDF, you must evaluate the document for reading order problems, tagging errors, and acces­ sibility errors, and then repair them as needed. No matter which method you use to tag the PDF, you’ll probably need to use Acrobat to touch up the tagging and reading order for complex page layouts or unusual page elements. For example, the Add Tags To Document command can’t always distinguish between instructive figures and decorative page elements such as borders, lines, or background elements. It may incorrectly tag all of these as figures. Similarly, the Add Tags To Document command may erroneously tag graphical characters within text—such as drop caps—as figures instead of including them in the tag that represents the rest of the text block. Such errors can clutter the tag tree and complicate the reading order that assistive technology relies on. If you tag a document from within Acrobat, the application generates an error report after it completes the tagging process. You can use this report to guide you as you repair tagging problems. You can identify other tagging, reading order, and accessibility problems for any PDF in Acrobat by using the Full Check tool or the TouchUp Reading Order tool. For more information, see “Check accessibility with Full Check” on page 291 and “Check and correct reading order” on page 307. Create a tagged PDF from a web page A PDF that you create from a web page is only as accessible as the HTML source that it is based on. For example, if the web page relies on tables for its layout design (as many web pages do), the HTML code for the table may not flow in the same logical reading order as a tagged PDF would require, even though the HTML code is sufficiently struc­ tured to display all the elements correctly in a browser. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 302 User Guide Depending on the complexity of the web page, you may need to do extensive repairs by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool or editing the tag tree in Acrobat. To produce the most accessible PDFs from web pages you create, first establish a logical reading order in their HTML code. For best results, employ the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines that are published by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The guidelines are available on the W3C website at www.w3.org. 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From Web Page. 2 For URL, type the address of the web page, or navigate to the web page location. 3 Click Settings. 4 In the General tab, select Create PDF Tags, and then click OK. 5 Select any other options as appropriate, and then click Create. Creating a tagged PDF from an authoring application In most cases, you create tagged PDFs from within an authoring application, such as Adobe FrameMaker®, Adobe InDesign, or Microsoft Word. Creating tags in the authoring application generally provides better results than adding tags in Acrobat. PDFMaker provides conversion settings that let you create tagged PDFs in Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint, and Word. For an in-depth guide to creating accessible PDFs, visit the accessibility page of the Adobe website. For more information, see the documentation for your authoring application. About tags in combined PDFs You can combine multiple files from different applications in one operation to create a single PDF. For example, you can combine word-processing files with slide presentations, spreadsheets, and web pages. During conversion, Acrobat opens each authoring application, creates a tagged PDF, and assembles these PDFs into a single tagged PDF. The conversion process doesn’t always correctly interpret the document structure for the combined PDF, because the files being assembled often use different formats. Because you may need to modify the reading order and tag tree of the combined document, you may need to use Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to create an accessible PDF from multiple documents. When you combine multiple PDFs into one tagged PDF, start with all untagged PDFs or all tagged PDFs. Combining tagged and untagged PDFs results in a partially tagged PDF that isn’t accessible to people with disabilities; some users—such as those using screen readers—will be completely unaware of the pages that don’t have tags. If you start with a mix of tagged and untagged PDFs, tag the untagged files before proceeding. If the PDFs are all untagged, add tags to the combined PDF after you finish inserting, replacing, and deleting pages. Keep in mind that when you insert, replace, or delete pages, Acrobat accepts existing tags into the tag tree of the consolidated PDF in the following manner: • When you insert pages into a PDF, Acrobat adds the tags (if any) for the new pages to the end of the tag tree, even if you insert the new pages at the beginning or the middle of the document. • When you replace pages in a PDF, Acrobat adds the tags (if any) from the incoming pages to the end of the tag tree, even if you replace pages at the beginning or the middle of the document. Acrobat retains the tags (if any) for the replaced pages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 303 User Guide • When you delete pages from a PDF, Acrobat retains the tags (if any) of the deleted pages. Pages whose tags are out of order in the logical structure tree can cause problems for screen readers. Screen readers read tags in sequence down the tree, and therefore they might not reach the tags for an inserted page until the end of the tree. To fix this problem, you’d use Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to rearrange the tag tree to put large groups of tags in the same reading order as the pages themselves. To avoid the need for this advanced step, plan so that you always insert pages to the end of a PDF, building the document from front to back in sequence. For example, if you create a title page PDF separately from the PDF that contains the body of the text, add the body PDF to the title page PDF, even though the body document is much larger to process. This approach puts the tags for the body of the text after the tags for the title page, and eliminates the need for you to rearrange the tags later in Acrobat Profes­ sional or Acrobat 3D. The tags that remain from a deleted or replaced page don’t connect to any content in the document. Essentially, they are large pieces of empty tag tree sections. These unneeded tags increase the file size of the document, slow down screen readers, and can make screen readers present confusing results. You should use Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to delete the tags of deleted pages from the tag tree. For more information, see “Create merged PDFs and PDF packages” on page 121. About tools for creating accessible PDF forms Adobe offers several tools for the creation of accessible PDF forms: Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D Use either application to open untagged or tagged PDF forms (except PDF forms that are created from LiveCycle Designer) to add fillable form fields, such as text boxes, check boxes, and buttons. Then use the application’s other tools to make the form accessible by adding descriptions to form fields, tagging untagged forms, setting the set tab order, manipulating tags, and performing the other PDF accessibility tasks. Adobe PDF Forms Access Use this tool to open and tag untagged PDF forms that you created by using Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D, and to manipulate the tags of these forms. You can then open the tagged PDF in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D and perform other accessibility tasks. If you often process complex untagged PDF forms, consider purchasing Adobe PDF Forms Access. Its tagging feature is optimized for interpreting forms content, and its tags editor is much easier to use than the tags editor in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D for correcting tagging problems in forms. LiveCycle Designer (Available in Acrobat Professional and Acrobat 3D) Use this product to design and build new forms or to import untagged PDF forms and make their form fields fillable and accessible. You can deploy forms in tagged PDF, XML, and other formats from LiveCycle Designer. Once you create or edit an Acrobat form in LiveCycle Designer, it becomes a LiveCycle Designer file—it is no longer a PDF that you can edit or manipulate in Acrobat. Both Acrobat and Reader can open and read PDF forms that you create from LiveCycle Designer. These PDF forms, however, don’t include permissions to modify the file. You should therefore use LiveCycle Designer only for PDFs that are intended to contain only form-based information. Don’t use it to add form fields to a document that combines pages of narrative with an occasional page that has form fields. In this case, you should use Acrobat Profes­ sional or Acrobat 3D to add the form fields and then complete the accessibility tasks for the rest of the document’s content. Authoring applications Most authoring applications that you can use to design forms don’t retain their fillable form fields when you convert the files to PDF. You therefore need to use the forms tools in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to add fillable form fields. Moreover, if you tag the form during conversion to PDF, the authoring application may generate inappropriate tags for the text labels of the form fields. In a complex form, for instance, the text labels for all the fields may run together into a single line that screen readers can’t interpret as individual labels. Such reading order problems can require time-consuming work in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to split the labels apart. In ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 304 User Guide this case, producing an untagged PDF form from the authoring application is sometimes the better course. You can then use the Forms tools in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D to add fillable form fields before you tag the entire document. Some forms, however, are straightforward enough that you can produce a tagged PDF from the authoring application and do only light touchup in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D after you add the fillable form fields. Workflow for creating accessible PDF forms Using Acrobat, you can open untagged and tagged PDF forms, add fillable form fields, add descriptions to the fields, set the tab order, add alternate text to form fields, and tag the forms (if they aren’t already tagged). You can also edit the tags of any tagged PDF form by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool or the tag tree. 1. Design the form for accessibility. Forms tend to have relatively complex layouts compared to documents that have a simple, single-column structure. The success that an application has in analyzing and tagging a form depends largely on the original formatting and layout, and on the types of fields that it uses. When you design a form, include headings, instructions, and fields in which users are to enter data. At a minimum, give each field a label. Also add special instructions for fields that need them. Use graphics tools to draw lines and boxes—don’t use characters, such as underscores and vertical bars, because these text characters can confuse screen readers. Adding descriptions to form fields enables screen readers to identify the fields to users. Users hear the description read aloud when they tab to the field. Write descriptions that are terse but complete. For example, the description “First name” is appropriate for a first-name field. Don’t use instructions (such as “Enter first name”) as a description. 2. Set and test the tab order of a form. The tab order for form fields enables people with disabilities to use a keyboard to move from field to field in a logical order. In PDF forms, you should set the tab order to Use Document Structure. You can test a form’s tab order by using the following keyboard commands: • Tab to move focus to the next field • Shift+Tab to move focus to the previous field • Spacebar to select options • Arrow keys to select radio button options or list items 3. Tag the PDF form and correct tagging issues. If the PDF form is already tagged, use the TouchUp Reading Order tool in Acrobat to tag each form field. This tool also enables you to fix any reading order problems of the text labels for the form fields. For example, you may need to split merged lines of fields into individual fields. See also “Set form-field tabbing order in Acrobat” on page 221 “Edit tags with the TouchUp Reading Order tool” on page 308 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 305 User Guide Making existing PDFs accessible Add tags to an existing PDF Creating a tagged document directly from an authoring application is the best way to make PDFs accessible. However, if a PDF was created without tags, you can add them using Add Tags To Document. 1 Open the PDF. 2 Choose Advanced > Accessibility > Add Tags To Document. After the process is complete, the PDF is tagged and—if any potential problems were encountered—the Add Tags Report appears in the navigation pane. Note: The Add Tags To Document command removes any tags that were in the document before the command was run. About the Add Tags Report If Acrobat encounters potential problems while running the Adds Tags To Document command, the Add Tags Report opens in the navigation pane. The report lists potential problems by page, provides a navigational link to each problem, and offers suggestions for fixing them. You should assess the context of an error before following a particular suggestion for fixing it. For example, the report might state that an element that has been tagged as a figure requires alternate text to make it accessible. When you examine the figure in its context on the page, you may decide that the figure is a background design element, not an illustration that conveys valuable meaning to the user. In the case of a nonessential image, you would change the Figure tag to a Background tag; in the case of an image intended to convey meaning to the reader, you would add the missing alternate text. Note: The Add Tags Report highlights tagging-related problems only, and it is a temporary file that you cannot save. You can assess other tagging, reading order, and accessibility problems by using Full Check. See also “Check accessibility with Full Check” on page 291 TouchUp Reading Order tool overview The TouchUp Reading Order tool provides the easiest and quickest way to fix reading order and basic tagging problems. When you select the TouchUp Reading Order tool, a dialog box opens that lets you see overlay highlights that show the order of page content. Each highlighted region is numbered and highlighted with gray or colored blocks; the number indicates the region’s placement in the page’s reading order. After you check the reading order of the page, you can correct other, more subtle tagging issues as needed. The TouchUp Reading Order tool is intended for repairing PDFs that were tagged using Acrobat, not for repairing PDFs that were tagged during conversion from an authoring application. Whenever possible, you should return to the source file and add accessibility features in the authoring application. Repairing the original file ensures that you don’t have to repeatedly touch up future iterations of the PDF in Acrobat. You use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to perform the following accessibility tasks: • Visually check, and then repair, the reading order of page content • Tag fillable form fields and their labels • Add alternate text to figures and descriptions to form fields ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 306 User Guide • Fix the tagging of simple tables, and prepare complex tables for more advanced manipulation in the logical structure tree • Remove nonessential content, such as ornamental page borders, from the logical structure tree To perform more advanced reading order and tagging tasks—such as fixing complex tables, removing obsolete tags after you delete pages, and adding alternate text to links—you need to use the Tags tab, which contains an alternate set of tools and features for manipulating PDF tags. For more information, see “Edit tags with the Tags tab” on page 316. Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool • Do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Accessibility > TouchUp Reading Order. • Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Reading Order Tool. • Click the TouchUp Reading Order tool button in the Advanced Editing toolbar. Tips for using the TouchUp Reading Order tool • Save the document (or a copy of it) before you use the TouchUp Reading Order tool. You can’t use Undo to reverse changes made with this tool, so reverting to a saved document is the only way to undo such a change. • Choose View > Page Display > Single Page, when using the TouchUp Reading Order tool. When you click the Clear Structure button, Acrobat clears tags from all visible pages—even pages that are only partially visible. TouchUp Reading Order options You can select TouchUp Reading Order options from the dialog box, from the pop-up menu that appears when you right-click/Control-click a highlighted region, or from the Options menu in the Order tab. The TouchUp Reading Order tool includes the following options: Text Tags the selection as text. Figure Tags the selection as a figure. Text contained within a figure tag is defined as part of the image and is not read by screen readers. Form Field Tags the selection as a form field. Figure/Caption Tags a selected figure and caption as a single tag. Any text contained in the tag is defined as a caption. Useful for tagging photos and captions and preventing caption text from being incorrectly added to adjacent text blocks. Figures may require alternate text. Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3 Tags the selection as a first, second, or third level heading tag. You can convert heading tags to bookmarks to help users navigate the document. Table Tags the selection as a table after the selection is analyzed to determine the location of headings, columns, and rows. Cell Tags the selection as a table or header cell. Use this option to merge cells that are incorrectly split. Formula Tags the selection as a formula. Because speech software may handle formula tags differently from normal text, you may want to add a description using alternate text. Background Tags the selection as a background element, or artifact, removing the item from the tag tree so that it doesn’t appear in the reflowed document and isn’t read by screen readers. Table Inspector Automatically analyzes the selected table into cells and applies the appropriate tags. The table must be tagged as a table before you can use the Table Inspector command on it. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 307 User Guide Show Page Content Order Shows content elements as highlighted areas that contain numbers to indicate the reading order. Specify the highlight color by clicking the color swatch. Show Table Cells Highlights the content of individual table cells. Specify the highlight color by clicking the color swatch. Show Tables And Figures Outlines each table and figure with a crossed-out box. The box also indicates whether the element includes alternate text. Specify the box color by clicking the color swatch. Clear Page Structure Removes the tagging structure from the page. Use this option to start over and create a new structure if the existing structure contains too many problems. Show Order Panel Opens the Order tab to allow you to reorder highlighted content. Edit Alternate Text Available in the menu that appears when you right-click/Control-click a highlighted figure. Allows the user to add or edit a text description about the figure properties that is read by a screen reader or other assistive technology. Edit Form Field Text Available in the menu that appears when you right-click/Control-click a form field. Allows the user to add or edit a form field text description that is read by a screen reader or other assistive technology. Edit Table Summary Available in the menu that appears when you right-click/Control-click a highlighted table. Allows the user to add or edit a text description about the table properties that is read by a screen reader or other assistive technology. Check and correct reading order You can quickly check the reading order of tagged PDFs by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool. You can also use this tool to add alternate text to images and correct many types of tagging problems that are outlined in the report that Acrobat generates when you add tags to a PDF. Reading-order problems are readily apparent when you use the TouchUp Reading Order tool. Each section of contiguous page content appears as a separate highlighted region and is numbered according to its placement in the reading order. Within each region, text is ordered left to right and top to bottom. (You can change this order in the TouchUp preferences.) If a single highlighted region contains two columns of text or text that won’t flow normally, divide the region into parts that can be reordered. Because highlighted regions are rectangular, they may overlap somewhat, especially if their page content is irregularly shaped. Unless page content overlaps or is contained within two highlighted regions, no reading order problem is indicated. Page content should belong to no more than one highlighted region. You can change the reading order of the highlighted regions by moving an item in the Order tab or by dragging it on the page in the document pane. By reordering highlighted regions on the page, you can make a figure and caption read at the specific point that they are referenced in the text. By changing the order of a highlighted region, you effec­ tively change the reading order of that item without changing the actual appearance of the PDF. Check reading order with the TouchUp Reading Order tool 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order. Note: If highlighted regions don’t appear in the document pane, the document doesn’t contain tags. 3 Optionally, do any of the following: • To specify a highlight color, click the color swatch, and then click the color you want. • To highlight tables and figures, and to view alternate text for figures, select Show Tables And Figures. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 308 User Guide 4 Check the reading order of text within each highlighted region. Zooming in can make this step easier. 5 Check the numbered order of all highlighted regions. If consecutive, numbered regions don’t follow one another, reorder them in the Order tab. 6 Click Show Order Panel, and then select each content entry (in square brackets [ ]) in the Order tab to highlight that content region in the document pane. Use this method to find numbered regions that you can’t see or locate on the page. Change the reading order in the Order tab 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, click Show Order Panel. 3 In the Order tab, navigate to view a list of highlighted regions that appear in the document pane. 4 In the Order tab, drag the tag for a highlighted region to the location you want. As you drag, a line appears to show potential locations. After you drag an item to a new location, the highlighted regions are renumbered to show the new reading order. You can select and move multiple, adjacent regions. Change the reading order by dragging on the page 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order. 3 In the document pane, place the pointer over the number for the highlighted region you want to move, and drag it to where you want it to be read. The text-insertion pointer shows target locations within the text. When you release the highlighted region, the location of the text-insertion pointer becomes the dividing line as the underlying highlighted region is split into two new highlighted regions. All highlighted regions are renumbered to show the new reading order. Edit tags with the TouchUp Reading Order tool You can use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to create tags in untagged PDFs or to add new tags to an existing structure. However, this manual tagging doesn’t provide the same level of detail to the tagging structure as the Add Tags To Document command, such as paragraphs, bulleted and numbered lists, line breaks, and hyphens. Before you clear the existing structure, make sure that manual tagging is your only recourse. Tag a region 1 Using the TouchUp Reading Order tool, drag within the document pane to select a region of the page that contains one type of content (for example, a text block). 2 Do one of the following: • To add more page content to the current selection, Shift-drag. • To remove page content from the current selection, Ctrl-drag/Command-drag. 3 Click the appropriate button in the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box to specify the tag type. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 309 User Guide Change the tag for a region If Acrobat tags a page element incorrectly, you can change the tag type for the highlighted region. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order. 3 To select a highlighted region, do one of the following: • Drag to select it. • Click the number of a highlighted region. 4 Click the button for the tag type that you want for the highlighted region. Add or remove content from a tagged region The TouchUp Reading Order tool always displays as few highlighted regions as possible. If content within a highlighted region doesn’t flow properly, you may need to split a region to reorder it. Highlighted regions may also contain adjacent page content that is unrelated or that requires a different tag type. Page content may become orphaned from related elements, particularly if the content doesn’t fit within a rectangular shape. Use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to add or remove content from a region, or to split a region to reorder the content. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order. 3 In the document pane, select a highlighted region. 4 Do one of the following: • To add content to the current selection, Shift-click the content you want to add. The pointer changes to include a plus sign (+). • To remove content from the current selection, Ctrl-click/Command-click the content you want to remove. The pointer changes to include a minus sign (-). 5 Click the button for the tag type that you want for the highlighted region. Split a region into two regions 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order. 3 In the document pane, drag to select a small portion of content near the boundary of the first region that you want to create. 4 Click the Background button in the dialog box. The highlighted region splits into two regions, numbered from right to left. 5 If you need to correct the reading order, click Show Order Panel, and drag the new highlighted region to the correct location in the Order tab. 6 Drag to select the first content region you created, including the region you defined as Background, and then set the tag by clicking a button in the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box. Apply a heading tag To help readers navigate a document and find the information they need, make sure that headings are tagged with the appropriate level to indicate their hierarchy in the content. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool, and then select the heading text in the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 310 User Guide 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, click the button corresponding to the appropriate heading tag (for example, Heading 1, Heading 2). After applying heading tags, you can convert the headings to bookmarks to improve navigation. For more infor­ mation, see “Add tagged bookmarks” on page 330. Remove page elements from the tag structure When tagging a PDF, Acrobat can’t always distinguish between instructive figures and decorative page elements. Items that visually enhance page layout, such as decorative borders, lines, or background elements, can add clutter to the structure layout and should be removed. Therefore, Acrobat may incorrectly tag artifacts or page elements as figure tags. You can remove artifacts and irrelevant page elements from the tag structure by redefining them with the Background tag or by deleting their tags. If a tagged image in the document doesn’t contain useful or illustrative information for the user, you can remove the element from the tagging structure so that it isn’t read out loud or reflowed. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, select Show Page Content Order and Show Tables And Figures. 3 Remove the page element by doing one of the following: • In the document pane, select the page element, and then click Background in the dialog box. • In the Order tab, select the page element, and then press Delete. Edit tags for figures and tables You can use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to add and edit tags and alternate text for figures and tables. Apply a figure tag You can select an element and define it as a figure by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool. Once you define it as a figure, you can add alternate text to describe the figure. 1 Using the TouchUp Reading Order tool, select the figure. 2 In the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box, click Figure. 3 In the document pane, right-click/Control-click the region and choose Edit Alternate Text. 4 Enter alternate text, and click OK. Check and correct figure tags You can use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to identify and correct tagging results for figures. Determine whether figures include or require alternate text in order to be read correctly with assistive technologies. Ideally, figure tags should identify image content that is meaningful to the document as a whole, such as graphs or illustrative photo­ graphs. If background elements that shouldn’t be read are tagged as figures, redefine them as background. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool, and then click Show Tables And Figures in the dialog box. 2 Do any of the following: • If a figure isn’t tagged as a figure, select the content region you want, and then click Figure or Figure/Caption in the dialog box. • To remove text that was incorrectly combined with a figure, drag to select the text, and click the Text button in the dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 311 User Guide • To include a caption that is grouped with the figure, select the figure and caption, and click the Figure/Caption button in the dialog box. Check and add alternate text for figures If you want screen readers to describe graphical elements that illustrate important concepts in a document, you must provide the description using alternate text. Figures aren’t recognized or read by a screen reader unless you add alternate text to the tag properties. If you apply alternate text to text elements, only the description, not the actual text, is read. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 Select Show Tables And Figures in the dialog box. 3 Right-click/Control-click the figure, and choose Edit Alternate Text from the pop-up menu. 4 In the Edit Alternate Text dialog box, type a new (or edit an existing) description for the figure, and then click OK. Edit table tags and tag unrecognized tables Tables pose a special challenge for screen readers because they present textual or numerical data to be easily refer­ enced visually. Content within table cells can be complex and might contain lists, paragraphs, form fields, or another table. For best results when tagging tables, use the application that you created the document with to add tags when you create the PDF. If a PDF isn’t tagged, you can add tags by using the Add Tags To Document command. Most tables are properly recognized using this command; however, the command may not recognize a table that lacks clear borders, headings, columns, and rows. Use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to determine if the table has been properly recognized and to correct recognition problems. To add specialized formatting to tables and table cells, use the Tags tab. You can use the Table Inspector to automatically analyze a table into its components and apply the appropriate tags, but you may still need to check and correct some of these tags manually. By viewing table tags, you can determine whether columns, rows, and cells have been correctly identified. Tables that lack well-defined borders and rules are often tagged incorrectly or contain adjacent page elements. You can correct poorly tagged tables by selecting and redefining them; you can split combined cells by creating a tag for each cell. To correct complex tagging problems for tables, you often must use the Tags tab. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool, and then click Show Tables And Figures. 2 If the table isn’t clearly labeled in the document pane, drag to select the entire table, and then click Table in the dialog box. 3 Click Show Table Cells to make sure that all cells in the table are defined as individual elements. 4 If cells don’t appear as separate elements, do one of the following: • If one or more cells are merged, use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to select the area within a single cell, and then click Cell in the dialog box. Repeat for each merged cell. • If cells aren’t highlighted, the table might not use standard table formatting. Re-create the table in the authoring application. 5 If the table contains cells that are intended to span across two or more columns, set ColSpan and RowSpan attributes for these rows in the tag structure. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 312 User Guide Remove or replace document structure tags If adding tags to a PDF in Adobe Acrobat results in a tagging structure that is overly complicated or too problematic to fix, you can use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to remove or replace the current structure. If the document contains mostly text, you can select a page and then remove headings, tables, and other elements to create a cleaner, simpler tagging structure. Acrobat can retag an already tagged document after you first remove all existing tags from the tree. Remove all tags from a PDF 1 Open the Tags tab (View > Navigation Panels > Tags) and select the root (topmost) tag, Tags. 2 In the Tags tab, choose Options > Delete tag. Note: The Clear Page Structure command in the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box removes all tags from the currently visible pages. Replace the existing tag structure This procedure works best in pages that contain a single column of text. If the page contains multiple columns, each column must be selected and tagged individually. 1 Select the TouchUp Reading Order tool. 2 In the document pane, drag to select the entire page. The selection includes both text and nontext elements. 3 Ctrl-drag/Command-drag around nontext page elements—such as figures and captions—to deselect them, until only text is selected on the page. Click Text in the TouchUp Reading Order dialog box. 4 In the document pane, select a nontext page element, such as a figure and caption, and click the appropriate button in the dialog box to tag it. Repeat until all page content is tagged. Add accessible links With thoughtfully provided links, users can quickly move from one part of a document to another, to related infor­ mation in a different document, or to a website that is relevant to the content. For URLs to be accessible to screen readers, you must convert them to active links and make sure that they are correctly tagged in the PDF. Note: If you tagged the Adobe PDF during conversion from an authoring application, the links and URLs in the document are probably already active and included in the tag tree so that they are accessible to screen readers. You probably don’t have to do this task unless you want to add more links. Acrobat provides several ways to create active links for text, objects, and URLs in a PDF. However, the methods differ in how they affect the tag tree. The best way to create accessible links is with the Create Link command. Unlike the other methods for creating links in a tagged PDF (by using the Links tool or the Create From URLs In Document command), the Create Link command adds all three tags that screen readers require in order to recognize a link. The other methods create only one of the three tags, meaning that you must manually edit the tag tree to add the remaining two tags for each link and place these tags in the proper reading order in the tree. Although you must activate links one by one, using the Create Link command provides the fastest results and the least amount of followup work to make the links accessible to screen readers. All that is left to do is optional editing of the tag tree to add alternate text to the new links. Creating links with Acrobat Standard doesn’t generate any tags for the links. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 313 User Guide Do the following to make links active and add them to the tag tree: 1 Select the text or object for which you want to create a link. 2 Right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose Create Link from the context menu. 3 In the Create Link dialog box, select the appropriate options, and then follow the on-screen instructions to specify a URL, page view, or file as the link target. By default, the selected text for each link becomes the link text. After you add all the links, you can edit the tag tree to add alternate text to the links, further improving the accessibility of the PDF. Set the document language Setting the document language in a PDF enables some screen readers to switch to the appropriate language. You can set the document language for an entire document with Acrobat Professional, Acrobat 3D, or Acrobat Standard. You can set the document language for specific portions of a multilanguage document with Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D. • To set the language for an entire document, choose File > Properties, and select a language from the Language menu in the Reading Options area of the Advanced tab. • To set the language for an entire document to a language not in the Language menu, choose File > Properties, and enter the ISO 639 code for the language in the Language field in the Reading Options area of the Advanced tab. For more information, see the ISO Language Codes on http://www.loc.gov/standards. • To set the language for individual sections or words, select the appropriate text element in the Tags tab, and choose Properties from the Options menu. In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, select the Tag tab. Select a language from the Language menu, and click Close. Note: The language that you specify for an element also applies to all elements nested under it in the logical structure tree. Prevent security settings from interfering with screen readers A document author can specify that no part of an accessible PDF is to be copied, printed, extracted, commented on, or edited. This setting could interfere with a screen reader’s ability to read the document, because screen readers must be able to copy or extract the document’s text in order to convert it to speech. To maintain document security while allowing screen readers access to text, use one of the following settings: • For low-encryption-level security, select Enable Copying Of Text, Images, And Other Content in the Password Security - Settings dialog box. • For high-encryption-level security, select Enable Text Access For Screen Reader Devices For The Visually Impaired in the Password Security - Settings dialog box. This option overrides the document’s security settings only for the purpose of giving assistive software, such as screen readers, access to the content. For instructions on how to set document security, see “Set passwords for PDFs” on page 264. If your assistive technology product is registered with Adobe as a Trusted Agent, you can read PDFs that might be inaccessible to another assistive technology product. Acrobat recognizes when a screen reader or other product is a Trusted Agent and overrides security settings that would typically limit access to the content for accessibility purposes. However, the security settings remain in effect for all other purposes, such as to prevent printing, copying, extracting, commenting, or editing text. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 314 User Guide About watermarks and screen readers You can add a watermark to a tagged PDF without also adding it to the tag tree. Not having the watermark appear in the tag tree is helpful for people who are using screen readers, because they won’t hear the watermark read as document content. The best way to add a watermark that doesn’t interfere with screen readers is to insert an untagged PDF of the watermark into a tagged PDF. See also “Add and edit watermarks” on page 131 Editing document structure with the Content and Tags tabs Correct reflow problems with the Content tab Use the Content tab to correct reflow problems in a PDF that can’t be corrected by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool. Because you can damage a PDF by editing content objects, make sure that you’re familiar with PDF structure before you make any changes. For comprehensive information about PDF structure, see the PDF Reference Fifth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.6, on the PDF reference page (English only) of the Adobe website. The Content tab provides a hierarchical view of the objects that make up a PDF, including the PDF object itself. Each document includes one or more pages, a set of annotations (such as comments and links), and the content objects for the page, consisting of containers, text, paths, and images. Objects are listed in the order in which they appear on the page, similar to tags in the logical structure tree. However, PDFs don’t require tags for you to view or change the object structure. 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Content. 2 Click the plus sign (+) (Windows) or the triangle (Mac OS) next to the document name to view pages and objects. 3 Move a container or object by selecting it and doing one of the following: • Drag it to the location you want. • Choose Cut from the Options menu, select the tag above the location you want to paste the cut tag, and choose Paste from the Options menu. Note: Container elements can’t be pasted directly to page elements. To move a container to another page, cut the container you want to move, select a container on the page you want to move the container to, and choose Paste from the Options menu. Then, drag the container out one level to the location that you want. Content tab options In the Content tab, use the Options menu or right-click/Control-click an object to choose from the following options: New Container Adds a new container object at the end of the selected page or container. Edit Container Dictionary Specifies the dictionary for the container. Errors in this dialog box may damage the PDF. Available only for containers that include dictionaries. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 315 User Guide Cut Cuts and copies the selected object (not the related page content). Paste Pastes content directly below the selected object at the same hierarchical level. Paste Child Pastes content into the selected object as a child content item. Delete Removes the object (not the related page content) from the document. Find Content From Selection Searches for the object in the Content tab that contains the object selected in the document pane. Find Searches for unmarked (untagged) artifacts, content, comments, and links. Options allow you to search the page or document, and to add tags to found items. Create Artifact Defines selected objects as artifacts. Artifacts are not read by a screen reader or by the Read Out Loud feature. Page numbers, headers, and footers are often best tagged as artifacts. Remove Artifact Removes the artifact definition from the selected object. Highlight Content When selected, highlights appear in the document pane around content that relates to a selected object in the Content tab. Show Metadata Allows viewing and editing of image or object metadata. Properties Opens the TouchUp Properties dialog box. About the Tags tab The Tags tab allows you to view and edit tags in the logical structure tree, or tags tree, of a PDF. In the Tags tab, tags appear in a hierarchical order that indicates the reading sequence of the document. The first item in this structure is the Tags root. All other items are tags and are children of the Tags root. Tags use coded element types that appear in angle brackets (< >). Each element, including structural elements such as sections and articles, appears in the logical structure order by type, followed by a title and the element’s content or a description of the content. Structural elements are typically listed as container—or parent—tags and include several smaller elements—or child tags— within them. Note: For more information on logical structures, refer to the PDF Reference Fifth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.6, on the PDF reference page (English only) of the Adobe website. Though you can correct most tagging issues by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool, you must use the Tags tab to address detailed tagging of tables and substructure items—such as paragraphs, lists, and sections that require multiple languages. Add tags manually to a document in the Tags tab only as a last resort. First consider using the Add Tags To Document command. Important: Operations performed in the Tags tab cannot be undone with the Undo command. Save a backup copy of a document before you begin work on it in the Tags tab. View tags in the Tags tab 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Tags. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Mac OS) next to the tags root and tags to expand the section you want. • Ctrl-click the plus sign (Windows) or Option-click the triangle (Mac OS) next to the Tags root to show all tags in the logical structure tree. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 316 User Guide Edit tags with the Tags tab You can edit a tag title, change a tag location, or change the tag type for an element. All page content must be tagged, marked as an artifact, or removed from the logical structure tree. Edit a tag title 1 In the Tags tab, expand the section of the logical structure that you want to edit. 2 To edit the title, Select the tag, choose Properties from the Options menu, enter text in the Title box, and click Close. Move a tag 1 In the Tags tab, expand the Tags root to view all tags. 2 Select the Tag icon of the element that you want to move. 3 Do one of the following: • Drag the tag to the location you want. As you drag, a line appears at viable locations. • Choose Cut from the Options menu, and select the tag that appears above the location you want to paste the cut tag. From the Options menu, choose Paste to move the tag to the same level as the selected tag, or choose Paste Child to move the tag within the selected tag. Change the element type 1 In the Tags tab, expand the section of the logical structure that you want to change. 2 Select an element and choose Properties from the Options menu. 3 Choose a new element type from the Type menu, and then click Close. Tags tab options In the Tags tab, use the Options menu or right-click/Control-click a tag in the logical structure tree to choose from the following options: New Tag Creates a new tag in the logical structure tree after the currently selected item. Specify type and title of the new tag. Cut Removes the selected tag from its current location and puts it on the clipboard. Paste Places the tag that’s on the clipboard into the location specified, replacing the selected tag. Paste Child Places the tag that’s on the clipboard into the location specified, as a child of the selected tag. Delete Tag Removes the selected tag. Find Tag From Selection Searches for the tag in the Tags tab that contains the text or object selected in the document pane. Create Tag From Selection Creates a new tag in the logical structure tree after the item selected in the document pane. Specify type and title of the new tag. Find Searches for artifacts, OCR suspects, and unmarked (untagged) content, comments, links, and annotations. Options allow you to search the page or document and add tags to found items. Change Tag To Artifact Changes selected tags to artifacts and removes the tagged content from the structure tree. Copy Contents To Clipboard Copies all content contained within the selected tags. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 317 User Guide Edit Class Map Allows you to add, change, and delete the class map, or style dictionary, for the document. Class maps store attributes that are associated with each element. Edit Role Map Allows you to add, change, and delete role maps for the document. Role maps allow each document to contain a uniquely defined tag set. By mapping these custom tags to predefined tags in Acrobat, custom tags are easier to identify and edit. Tag Annotations When selected, all new comments and form fields are added to the tag tree after the selected tag element; existing comments and form fields aren’t added to the tag tree. Highlight and Underline comments are automatically associated and tagged with the text that they annotate and don’t require this option. Document Is Tagged PDF Flags the PDF as a tagged document. Deselect to remove the flag. Important: This option doesn’t necessarily indicate that the PDF conforms to PDF guidelines and should be used judiciously. Highlight Content When selected, causes highlights to appear around content in the document pane when you select the related tag in the Tags tab. Show Metadata Opens a read-only dialog box that contains reference information about the selected tag. Properties Opens the TouchUp Properties dialog box. Add alternate text and supplementary information to tags Some tagged PDFs might not contain all the information necessary to make the document contents fully accessible. For example, if you want to make a document available to a screen reader, the PDF should contain alternate text for figures, language properties for portions of the text that use a different language than the default language for the document, and expansion text for abbreviations. Designating the appropriate language for different text elements ensures that the correct characters are used when you repurpose the document and that it is spell-checked with the correct dictionary. You can add alternate text and multiple languages to a tag from the Tags tab. (If only one language is required, choose the language with File > Properties instead.) You can also add alternate text by using the TouchUp Reading Order tool. Note: Keep alternate text descriptions as concise as possible. Add alternate text to links Screen readers can read the URLs of web links out loud, but adding meaningful alternate text to links can help users immensely. For example, by adding alternate text you can have a screen reader tell a user to “go to the Acrobat acces­ sibility page of adobe.com” rather than “go to http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/solutionsacc.html.” You add alternate text to the tag of a link. Note: You must add alternate text only to tags that don’t have child tags. Adding alternate text to a parent tag prevents a screen reader from reading any of that tag’s child tags. 1 In the tag tree, select the tag for the link and choose Options > Properties. 2 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, select the Tag tab. 3 Type alternate text for the link, and click Close. Add alternate text for a figure 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Tags. 2 Expand the logical structure tree to find and select the

tag element for the image. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 318 User Guide To find a tag more easily, use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to select the figure—or text near the figure—in the document pane, and then choose Find Tag From Selection from the Options menu in the Tags tab. 3 Choose Highlight Content from the Options menu in the Tags tab to see a highlighted area in the document that corresponds to the tag. 4 Choose Properties from the Options menu in the Tags tab. 5 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, click the Tag tab. 6 For Alternate Text, type text that describes the figure. Add alternate text for an abbreviated term 1 In the Tags panel, locate the abbreviated term by doing one of the following: • Expand the tag tree as needed to see the elements that contain the abbreviation. • Use the TouchUp Text tool or the Select tool to select the abbreviation in the document, and then choose Find Tag From Selection from the Options menu to locate the text in the tag tree. 2 Select the tag for that element, and choose Properties from the Options menu. Note: If the abbreviation includes additional text, cut the additional text and place it in a new child tag within the same parent tag. 3 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, select the Tag tab. 4 For Alternate Text, type the unabbreviated version of the term. 5 Click Close. Create a new child tag 1 In the Tags tab, select the parent node (the icon located at the same level at which you want to create a child tag) in the Tags tree for which you want to create a child tag. 2 Choose New Tag from the Options menu. 3 Select the appropriate tag type from the Type pop-up menu, or type a custom tag type, name the tag (optional), and then click OK. Add tags to comments When you tag a PDF that includes comments, the comments are tagged as well. However, if you add comments to a PDF that’s already tagged, your comments are untagged unless you enable comment tagging first. Note: To Enable comment tagging in a PDF, in the Tags tab, choose Tag Annotations from the Options menu. Comments or markups that you add to the PDF are tagged automatically. If a document contains untagged comments, you can locate them in the logical structure tree and tag them by using the Find command in the Tags tab. 1 In the Tags tab, choose Find from the Options menu. 2 In the Find Element dialog box, choose Unmarked Comments from the Find pop-up menu, and click Find. 3 When the comment type appears in the Type field (for example, Text), click Tag Element, choose Annotation from the Type pop-up menu in the New Tag dialog box, and then click OK. 4 In the Find Element dialog box, click Find Next to locate and tag all comments, and then click Close. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 319 User Guide Correct table tags with the Tags tab Use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to make sure that tables are tagged correctly. If you need to structure figures and text within the cells of your table, you may prefer to re-create the table in the authoring application before you convert it as an accessible PDF. Adding tags on a cell level in Acrobat is a labor-intensive procedure. Before you make any changes to table elements, use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to determine that the table is tagged correctly. Check table elements 1 In the Tags tab, expand the tags root to view a table tag. 2 Select the table tag and verify that it contains one of the following elements: • Table Rows, each of which contains Table Header , , and sections, each of which contains Table Rows. (The Table Rows contain

or Table Data	cells. •
cells,	cells, or both.) 3 Do one or more of the following: • If the tag for the table doesn’t contain these elements, but rows, columns, and cells appear in the table in the document pane, use the TouchUp Reading Order tool to select and define the table or individual cells. • If the table contains rows that span two or more columns, set ColSpan and RowSpan attributes for these rows in the tag structure. • Re-create the table in the authoring application, and then convert it to a tagged PDF. Set ColSpan and RowSpan attributes 1 In the Tags tab, select a	or	element. 2 Choose Properties from the Options menu. 3 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, click the Tag tab, and then click Edit Attribute Objects. 4 Select Attribute Objects, and then click New Item to create a new Attribute Object Dictionary. 5 Expand the new dictionary, select the Layout attribute, and then click Change Item. 6 Change the Layout value to Table. 7 Select the Attribute Object Dictionary, and click New Item. 8 In the Add Key And Value dialog box, type ColSpan or RowSpan in the Key box, enter the number of columns or rows spanned in the Value box, choose Integer from the Value Type pop-up menu, and click OK. Standard PDF tags This section describes the standard tag types that apply to tagged PDFs. These standard tags provide assistive software and devices with a base set of semantic and structural elements to use in interpreting document structure and presenting content to a user in a useful manner. The PDF tags architecture is extensible, so any PDF document can contain any tag set that an authoring application decides to use. For instance, a PDF might have XML tags that came in from an XML schema. Any custom tags that you define (such as tag names that were generated from paragraph styles from an authoring application) should have a role map that matches each custom tag to one of the standard tags here. When assistive software encounters a custom tag, the software can refer to this role map and properly interpret the tags. Tagging PDFs by using one of the methods described in this guide generally produces a correct role map for the document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 320 User Guide Note: You can view and edit the role map of a PDF by choosing Options > Edit Role Map in the Tags tab. The standard Adobe element tag types are available in the New Tag dialog box and in the TouchUp Properties dialog box in Acrobat Professional or Acrobat 3D. Adobe strongly encourages using these tag types, because they provide the best results when tagged content must be converted to a different format, such as HTML, Microsoft Word, or an accessible text format for use by other types of assistive technology. Block-level elements are page elements that consist of text laid out in paragraph-like forms. Block-level elements are part of a document’s logical structure. Such elements are further classified as container elements, heading and paragraph elements, label and list elements, special text elements, and table elements. Container elements Container elements are the highest level of element and provide hierarchical grouping for other block-level elements. Document Document element. The root element of a document’s tag tree. Part Part element. A large division of a document; may group smaller units of content together, such as division elements, article elements, or section elements. Div Division element. A generic block-level element or group of block-level elements. Art Article element. A self-contained body of text considered to be a single narrative. Sect Section element. A general container element type, comparable to Division (DIV Class=“Sect”) in HTML, which is usually a component of a part element or an article element. Heading and paragraph elements Heading and paragraph elements are paragraph-like, block-level elements that include specific level heading and generic paragraph (P ) tags. A heading (H) element should appear as the first child of any higher-level division. Six levels of headings (H1 to H6) are available for applications that don’t hierarchically nest sections. Label and list elements Label and list elements are block-level elements used for structuring lists. L List element. Any sequence of items of similar meaning or other relevance; immediate child elements should be list item elements. LI List item element. Any one member of a list; may have a label element (optional) and a list body element (required) as a child. LBL Label element. A bullet, name, or number that identifies and distinguishes an element from others in the same list. LBody List body element. The descriptive content of a list item. Special text elements Special text elements identify text that isn’t used as a generic paragraph (P). BlockQuote Block quote element. One or more paragraphs of text attributed to someone other than the author of the immediate surrounding text. Caption Caption element. A brief portion of text that describes a table or a figure. Index Index element. A sequence of entries that contain identifying text and reference elements that point out the occurrence of the text in the main body of the document. TOC Table of contents element. An element that contains a structured list of items and labels identifying those items; has its own discrete hierarchy. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 321 User Guide TOCI Table of contents item element. An item contained in a list associated with a table of contents element. Table elements Table elements are special elements for structuring tables. Table Table element. A two-dimensional arrangement of data or text cells that contains table row elements as child elements and may have a caption element as its first or last child element. TR Table row element. One row of headings or data in a table; may contain table header cell elements and table data cell elements. TD Table data cell element. A table cell that contains nonheader data. TH Table header cell element. A table cell that contains header text or data describing one or more rows or columns of a table. Inline-level elements Inline-level elements identify a span of text that has specific formatting or behavior. They are differentiated from block-level elements. Inline-level elements may be contained in or contain block-level elements. BibEntry Bibliography entry element. A description of where some cited information may be found. Quote Quote entry element. An inline portion of text that is attributed to someone other than the author of the text surrounding it; different from a block quote, which is a whole paragraph or multiple paragraphs, as opposed to inline text. Span Span entry element. Any inline segment of text; commonly used to delimit text that is associated with a set of styling properties. Special inline-level elements Similar to inline-level elements, special inline-level elements describe an inline portion of text that has special formatting or behavior. Code Code entry element. Computer program text embedded within a document. Figure Figure entry element. A graphic or graphic representation associated with text. Form Form entry element. A PDF form annotation that can be or has been filled out. Formula Formula entry element. A mathematical formula. Link Link entry element. A hypertext link that is embedded within a document. The target can be in the same document, in another PDF document, or on a website. Note Note entry element. Explanatory text or documentation, such as a footnote or endnote, that is referred to in the main body of text. Reference Reference entry element. A citation to text or data that is found elsewhere in the document. 322 Chapter 11: Editing PDFs It’s a fact that Adobe PDF is unlike other document formats, in which you can freely copy, paste, and move text and images on a page. Instead, consider a PDF as a snapshot of your original file. Use Adobe Acrobat to touch up and enhance the file for readability and distribution, and reserve more substantial revisions for your source application. Quickstart The following topics provide quick steps to some common PDF editing tasks. Add a bookmark You can add navigation to a PDF with bookmarks. 1 Open to the desired page and adjust the view settings. 2 (Optional) To bookmark text, select the desired text. 3 Click the Bookmarks button in the navigation pane, and choose New Bookmark from the Options menu. 4 Type or edit the bookmark name. You can also add bookmarks to specific portions of a page, such as an image or a table, or to another PDF. See also “Create a bookmark” on page 327 Add a link Links take you to other locations in the same document, to other documents, or to websites. They can also trigger actions, such as playing a sound or movie file or submitting a form. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link Tool. 2 Drag a rectangle where you want to create a link. 3 In the Create Link dialog box, choose the desired link appearance and action. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to create the link. See also “Create a link” on page 331 Attach files to a PDF You can attach many types of files to a PDF. 1 Choose Document > Attach A File. 2 Select the file you want to attach, and click Open. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 323 User Guide 3 (Optional) To add a description to distinguish the file from similar attachments, select the file in the Attachment panel, and choose Options > Edit Description. You can also collect files into a PDF package or merge files into a single PDF. See also “Add an attachment” on page 334 Optimize a PDF Reduce file size by removing embedded fonts, compressing images, and removing unneeded items from a PDF. 1 Choose Advanced > PDF Optimizer. 2 Choose an option from the Make Compatible With menu. 3 Select an item on the left, and then specify settings. For example, select Images, and then set compression for color, grayscale, and monochrome images. 4 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. Some compression methods may make images unusable in a print production workflow. See also “PDF Optimizer” on page 343 Edit text You can add or replace small amounts of text in a PDF if the font is installed on the system. Otherwise, you can edit text attributes only. For extensive changes, edit the original document from which the PDF was created. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Text Tool. 2 Select the text you want to edit. 3 Type to replace text, or press Delete to remove text. If you cannot edit text, the document may have security restrictions. See also “Edit text” on page 348 Format text You can change text attributes such as font and font size, color, character and word spacing, baseline offset, and horizontal scaling. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Text Tool. 2 Click in the text you want to edit, and then right-click/Control-click and choose Properties. 3 Change text attributes as desired. If the necessary font is installed on the system, you can also use the TouchUp Text tool to edit the text. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 324 User Guide See also “Edit text” on page 348 Edit an image You can change the size, location, and properties of an image in a PDF. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object Tool. 2 Select the desired image, and do one of the following: • To change image properties or edit the image, right-click/Control-click and choose the relevant command. • To move the image, drag it to a new location on the page. • To resize the image, drag one of the image handles. See also “Move or edit an object” on page 351 View object metadata You can view the metadata information of certain images, tags, and objects. Do one of the following: • For an object, choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object Tool. Right-click/Control-click the object, and choose Show Metadata. (If the command isn’t available, the object has no metadata.) • For a Visio object, choose Tools > Object Data > Object Data Tool. Double-click the object to view its metadata in the Model Tree. See also “View object data and metadata” on page 363 View content on layers To view information stored on different layers of a PDF, use the Layers panel. 1 Click the Layers button in the navigation pane. 2 Click the eye icon to hide a layer’s content. Click the empty box to show a layer’s content. To save a different view of a layered PDF, you must change the default state of the layers in the Layer Properties dialog box. See also “Show or hide layers” on page 364 Page thumbnails and bookmarks About page thumbnails Page thumbnails are miniature previews of the pages in a document. You can use page thumbnails in Acrobat to jump quickly to a selected page or to adjust the view of the page. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 325 User Guide When you move, copy, or delete a page thumbnail, you actually move, copy, or delete the corresponding page. Create page thumbnails Because page thumbnails increase file size, they are not automatically created. After you create page thumbnails, you can embed them in the PDF. Embedding prevents the page thumbnails from redrawing each time you click the Pages button, often a time-consuming process. Embedded page thumbnails won’t reflect changes that you make to document pages until you unembed the page thumbnails. Both Acrobat Distiller and the batch processing feature in Acrobat provide alternate methods of embedding page thumbnails. See also “Run a predefined batch sequence” on page 368 “PostScript options” on page 449 Create page thumbnails ? Click the Pages button on the left. Page thumbnails appear in the navigation pane. This process may require several seconds, particularly in larger documents. The drawing of page thumbnails may pause if you interact with the application during this process. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 326 User Guide Resize page thumbnails ? In the Pages panel, choose Reduce Page Thumbnails or Enlarge Page Thumbnails from the Options menu. Embed or unembed page thumbnails in a PDF ? In the Pages panel, choose Embed All Page Thumbnails or Remove Embedded Page Thumbnails from the Options menu. Embed or unembed page thumbnails in a PDF package 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing. 2 Do one of the following: • To embed page thumbnails, click Embed Page Thumbnails, and then click Run Sequence. Follow the instructions provided. • To unembed page thumbnails, click New Sequence, and set up a new batch processing operation to remove the embedded page thumbnails. Define the tabbing order In the Pages panel, you can set the order in which a user tabs through form fields, links, and comments for each page. 1 Click the Pages button on the left. 2 Select a page thumbnail, and choose Page Properties from the Options menu. 3 In the Page Properties dialog box, click Tab Order, and select the tab order: Use Row Order Moves through rows from left to right, or right to left for pages with a right-to-left binding. Use Column Order Moves through columns from left to right and from top to bottom, or right to left for pages with a right-to-left binding. Use Document Structure Moves in the order specified by the authoring application. Note: For structured documents—PDFs that were created from desktop publishing applications or that contain tags— it’s best to select the Use Document Structure option to match the intention of the authoring application. If the document was created in an earlier version of Acrobat, the tab order is Unspecified by default. With this setting, form fields are tabbed through first, followed by links and then comments ordered by row. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 327 User Guide About bookmarks A bookmark is a type of link with representative text in the Bookmarks panel in the navigation pane. Each bookmark goes to a different view or page in the document. Bookmarks are generated automatically during PDF creation from the table-of-contents entries of documents created by most desktop publishing programs. These bookmarks are often tagged and can be used to make edits in the PDF. Initially, a bookmark displays the page that was in view when the bookmark was created, which is the bookmark’s destination. Although you can set bookmark destinations as you create each bookmark, it is sometimes easier to create a group of bookmarks, and then set the destinations later. You can use bookmarks to mark a place in the PDF to which you want to return, or to jump to a destination in the PDF, another document, or a web page. Bookmarks can also perform actions, such as executing a menu item or submitting a form. Note: A user can add bookmarks to a document only if the security settings allow it. Bookmarks act as a table of contents for some PDFs. See also “About tags, accessibility, reading order, and reflow” on page 289 Create a bookmark 1 Open the page where you want the bookmark to link to, and adjust the view settings. 2 Use the Select tool to create the bookmark: • To bookmark a single image, click in the image, or drag a rectangle around the image. • To bookmark a portion of an image, Ctrl-drag/drag a rectangle around the portion. • To bookmark selected text, drag to select it. The selected text becomes the label of the new bookmark. You can edit the label. 3 Click the Bookmarks button, and select the bookmark under which you want to place the new bookmark. If you don’t select a bookmark, the new bookmark is automatically added at the end of the list. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 328 User Guide 4 Choose New Bookmark from the Options menu, or click the New Bookmark icon at the top of the Bookmarks panel. 5 Type or edit the name of the new bookmark, and press Enter/Return. Edit a bookmark You can change a bookmark’s attributes at any time. See also “Action types” on page 337 Rename a bookmark ? Select the bookmark in the Bookmarks panel, choose Rename Bookmark in the Options menu, and type the new bookmark name. Wrap text in a long bookmark ? Click the Bookmarks button, and choose Wrap Long Bookmarks from the Options menu. All the text of long bookmarks shows regardless of the width of the navigation pane. (This option is on when checked, and off when not checked.) Change the text appearance of a bookmark You can change the appearance of a bookmark to draw attention to it. 1 In the Bookmarks panel, select one or more bookmarks. 2 Change the color and style of the text by doing one of the following: • Choose View > Toolbars > Properties Bar to open the Properties toolbar. • Right-click/Control-click the bookmark, and select Properties. Click the Appearance tab. After you have defined a bookmark’s appearance, you can reuse the appearance settings by selecting the bookmark and choosing the Use Current Appearance As New Default command from the bookmark’s context menu. 3 To change the font size, click the Options menu, and choose Text Size > [size]. Set a bookmark’s appearance in the Bookmark Properties dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 329 User Guide Change a bookmark’s destination 1 Click the Bookmarks button, and select the bookmark. 2 In the document pane, move to the location you want to specify as the new destination. 3 If necessary, adjust the view magnification. 4 Choose Set Bookmark Destination in the Options menu. Add an action to a bookmark 1 Click the Bookmarks button. 2 Right-click/Control-click a bookmark, and choose Properties. 3 In the Bookmark Properties dialog box, click Actions. 4 Choose an action from the Select Action menu, and click Add. Delete a bookmark 1 Click the Bookmarks button, and select the bookmark or range of bookmarks you want to delete. 2 Choose Delete Bookmark(s) in the Options menu. Important: Deleting a bookmark deletes any bookmarks that are subordinate to it. Deleting a bookmark does not delete any document text. Create a bookmark hierarchy You can nest a list of bookmarks to show a relationship between topics. Nesting creates a parent/child relationship. You can expand and collapse this hierarchical list as desired. Nest one or more bookmarks 1 Select the bookmark or range of bookmarks you want to nest. 2 Drag the icon or icons directly underneath the parent bookmark icon. The Line icon shows the position of the icon or icons. The bookmark is nested; however, the actual page remains in its original location in the document. Nesting a bookmark (left), and the result (right) Move bookmarks out of a nested position 1 Select the bookmark or range of bookmarks you want to move. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 330 User Guide 2 Move the selection by doing one of the following: • Drag the icon or icons, positioning the arrow directly under the label of the parent bookmark. • Choose Cut from the Options menu, select the parent bookmark, and then choose Paste Under Selected Bookmark from the Options menu. Moving a bookmark out of its nested position (left), and the result (right) Expand or collapse a bookmark Do one of the following: • Click the plus sign (+) or horizontal triangle next to the bookmark icon to show any children. Click the minus sign (-) or inverted triangle to collapse the list again. • Select the bookmark, and choose Expand Current Bookmark from the Options menu. Expand or collapse all top-level bookmarks ? From the Options menu, choose Expand Top-Level Bookmarks or Collapse Top-Level Bookmarks. Add tagged bookmarks Tagged bookmarks give you greater control over page content than do regular bookmarks. Because tagged bookmarks use the underlying structural information of the document elements (for example, heading levels, paragraphs, table titles), you can use them to edit the document, such as rearranging their corresponding pages in the PDF, or deleting pages. If you move or delete a parent tagged bookmark, its children tagged bookmarks are moved or deleted along with it. Many desktop publishing applications, such as Adobe InDesign and Microsoft Word, create structured documents. When you convert these documents to PDF, the structure is converted to tags, which support the addition of tagged bookmarks. Converted web pages typically include tagged bookmarks. If your document doesn’t include tags, you can always add them in Acrobat. 1 Click the Bookmarks button, and choose New Bookmarks From Structure from the Options menu. (If this option isn’t available, the document isn’t structured.) 2 Select the structure elements you want specified as tagged bookmarks. Ctrl-click/Command-click to add to the selection. The tagged bookmarks are nested under a new, untitled bookmark. See also “Links and bookmarks in web pages” on page 339 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 331 User Guide Links and attachments Create a link Links let you jump to other locations in the same document, to other electronic documents including attachments, or to websites. You can use links to initiate actions or to ensure that your reader has immediate access to related infor­ mation. You can also add actions to play a sound or movie file. Clicking a link jumps to another page, document, or website. See also “Destinations” on page 333 Create a link using the Link tool 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link Tool, or select the Link tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar. The pointer becomes a cross hair (+), and any existing links in the document, including invisible links, are tempo­ rarily visible. 2 Drag a rectangle where you want to create a link. This is the area in which the link is active. 3 In the Create Link dialog box, choose the options you want for the link appearance. 4 Select one of the following link actions: Go To A Page View Click Next to set the page number and view magnification you want in the current document or in another document (such as a file attachment), and then click Set Link. Open A File Select the destination file and click Select. If the file is a PDF, specify how the document should open (for example in a new window or within an existing window), and then click OK. Note: If the filename is too long to fit in the text box, the middle of the name is truncated. Open A Web Page Provide the URL of the destination web page. Custom Link Click Next to open the Link Properties dialog box. In this dialog box, you can set any action, such as reading an article, or executing a menu command, to be associated with the link. Create a link using the Select tool or Snapshot tool 1 Using the Select tool or the Snapshot tool (Tools > Select & Zoom), drag to select the text or image from which you want to create a link. 2 Right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose Create Link. 3 Select the options you want in the Create Link dialog box. Note: The Custom Link option is not available for links created from selected text. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 332 User Guide Edit a link You can edit a link at any time. You can change its hotspot area or associated link action, delete or resize the link rectangle, or change the destination of the link. Changing the properties of an existing link affects only the currently selected link. If a link isn’t selected, the properties will apply to the next link you create. You can change the properties of several links at once if you drag a rectangle to select them using the Link tool or the Select Object tool. Move or resize a link rectangle 1 Select the Link tool or the Select Object tool , and then move the pointer over the link rectangle so that the handles appear. 2 Do one of the following: • To move the link rectangle, drag it. • To resize the link rectangle, drag any corner point. Change the appearance of a link 1 Select the Link tool and double-click the link rectangle. 2 In the Appearance tab of the Link Properties dialog box, choose a color, line thickness, and line style for the link. 3 Select a highlight style for when the link is selected: None Doesn’t change the appearance of the link. Invert Changes the link’s color to its opposite. Outline Changes the link’s outline color to its opposite. Inset Creates the appearance of an embossed rectangle. Note: The Link Type, Color, and Line Style options are not available if Invisible is selected for Appearance. 4 Select Invisible Rectangle for Link Type if you don’t want users to see the link in the PDF. An invisible link is useful if the link is over an image. 5 Select the Locked option if you want to prevent users from accidentally changing your settings. 6 To test the link, select the Hand tool. Note: The link properties in the Create Link dialog box apply to all new links that you create until you change the properties. To reuse the appearance settings for a link, right-click/Control-click the link whose properties you want to use as the default, and choose Use Current Appearance As New Default. Edit a link action 1 Select the Link tool and double-click the link rectangle. 2 In the Actions tab of the Link Properties dialog box, select the listed action you want to change, and click Edit. Delete a link 1 Select the Link tool or the Select Object tool . 2 Select the link rectangle you want to delete. 3 Choose Edit > Delete, or press the Delete key. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 333 User Guide Create web links from URLs You can automatically create links in a PDF from all URLs or from URLs on selected pages. When selected, the Create Links From URLs setting in the General preferences generates active links from text in all PDFs that you open. Create web links 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Create Links From URLs. 2 In the Create Web Links dialog box, select All to create links from all URLs in the document, or select From and enter a page range to create links on selected pages. Remove all web links ? Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Remove All Links. Link to a file attachment You can direct users to a PDF attachment by creating a link in the parent PDF document that jumps to the attachment. Note: Don’t confuse file attachments with files that can be opened from a link. Linked documents may be stored in different locations; file attachments are always saved with the PDF. 1 Open a PDF that contains a PDF file attachment. 2 Go to where you want to create a link. If that location is in the file attachment, click the Attachments button in the navigation pane, select the file attachment, and click Open. 3 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link Tool, or select the Link tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar. 4 Select the area for the link. 5 In the Create Link dialog box, set the link appearance, select Go To A Page View, and then click Next. 6 Set the page number and view magnification you want, either in the parent PDF document or in the file attachment, and then click Set Link. Destinations A destination is the end point of a link and is represented by text in the Destinations panel. Destinations enable you to set navigation paths across a collection of PDFs. Linking to a destination is recommended when linking across documents because, unlike a link to a page, a link to a destination is not affected by the addition or deletion of pages within the target document. View and manage destinations Manage destinations from the Destinations panel in the navigation pane. View destinations ? Choose View > Navigation Panels > Destinations. All destinations are automatically scanned. Sort the destinations list ? Do one of the following: • To sort destination names alphabetically, click the Name label at the top of the Destinations panel. • To sort destinations by page number, click the Page label at the top of the Destinations panel. Use the Attachments panel to add, delete, or view attachments. 1 Add an attachment by doing one of the following: • Choose Document > Attach A File. • Click the Attach A File button in the File toolbar. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 334 User Guide Change or delete a destination ? In the Destinations panel, right-click/Control-click the destination, and choose a command: • To move to the target location, choose Go To Destination. • To delete the destination, choose Delete. • To reset the target of the destination to the page displayed, choose Set Destination. • To give the destination a different name, choose Rename. Create and link a destination You can create a link to a destination in the same or another PDF. 1 In the target document (destination), choose View > Navigation Panels > Destinations. If the document already includes a destination that you want to link to, skip to step 5. 2 Navigate to the location where you want to create a destination, and set the desired view. 3 In the Destinations panel, choose New Destination from the Options menu, and name the destination. 4 Save the target document. 5 In the source document (where you want to create the link), choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link tool , and drag a rectangle to specify a location for the link. 6 In the Create Link dialog box, set the link appearance, select Go To A Page View, and then click Next. 7 In the target document, in the Destinations panel, double-click the destination. 8 Save the source document. Add an attachment You can attach PDFs and other types of files to a PDF. If you move the PDF to a new location, the attachments move with it. Attachments may include links to or from the parent document or to other attachments. Don’t confuse attached comments with file attachments. Attached comments appear in the page with the File Attachment icon or the Speaker icon , and in the Comments List with other comments. (See “Add comments in a file attachment” on page 180.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 335 User Guide Note: The Attach A File button doesn’t appear by default. To add it, right-click/Control-click the toolbar background, choose More Tools, select Attach A File located under File Toolbar, and click OK. 2 In the Add Attachment dialog box, select the file you want to attach, and click Open. Important: If you try to attach certain file formats (such as EXE, VBS, or ZIP), Acrobat warns you that it won’t open the file once attached because the format is associated with malicious programs, macros, and viruses that can damage your computer. To open and save file attachments that you trust, regardless of file format, set your Trust Manager prefer­ ences. See “Restrict URLs and attachments in PDFs” on page 247. 3 To make the attachment viewable in Acrobat 5.0 or earlier, do one of the following: • Click the Attachments button in the navigation pane, and select Show Attachments By Default from the Options menu (selected by default). • Choose File > Properties, click the Initial View tab, choose Attachments Panel And Page from the Show menu, and click OK. 4 Save the PDF. 5 (Optional) To add a description to the attachment that helps differentiate between similar files in the Attachments panel, select the attached file, and choose Options > Edit Description. Edit the text of the description, and then save the file. Open, save, or delete an attachment You can open a PDF attachment and make changes to it—if you have permissions—and your changes are applied to the PDF attachment. For other types of file attachments, you have an option of opening or saving the file. Opening the file starts the appli­ cation that handles the file format of the attachment—you must have that application to open the attachment. Any changes you make are not applied to the attachment. Instead, save changes to the file, and then reattach it to the PDF document. Note: Acrobat requires your approval every time you open or save certain file formats (such as EXE, VBS, or ZIP) because these formats are associated with malicious programs, macros, and viruses that can damage your computer. To open and save trusted file attachments without being prompted, set your Trust Manager preferences. See “Restrict URLs and attachments in PDFs” on page 247. Open an attachment ? In the Attachments panel, select the attachment, and then click Open or choose Open Attachment from the Options menu. Save an attachment 1 In the Attachments panel, select one or more attachments, and click Save or choose Save Attachment from the Options menu. If you selected a single attachment, you have the option to rename the file. 2 Specify a location, and then click Save. Delete an attachment ? In the Attachments panel, select an attachment, and click the Delete button or choose Delete Attachment from the Options menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 336 User Guide Search in attachments When searching for specific words or phrases, you can include PDF attachments in the search. Search results from attachments appear in the Results list beneath the attachment filename and icon. Attachments in other formats are ignored by the search engine. Search PDF attachments from the Attachments panel 1 In the Attachments panel, click the Search Attachment button or choose Search Attachments from the Options menu. The Search PDF window opens. 2 Type the word or phrase that you want to search for, select the results option you want, and then click Search Attachments. Search PDF attachments from the Search PDF window 1 Open the Search PDF window by doing one of the following: • From the Find menu, choose Open Full Acrobat Search. • Choose Edit > Search. 2 Type the word or phrase that you want to search for, and select the results option you want. 3 Click Use Advanced Search Options at the bottom of the window, and then select Include Attachments. Actions and scripting About Actions You can cause an action to occur when a bookmark or link is clicked, or when a page is viewed. For example, you can use links and bookmarks to jump to different locations in a document, execute commands from a menu, and perform other actions. Actions are set in the Properties dialog box. For bookmarks or links, you specify an action that occurs when the bookmark or link is clicked. For other items, such as pages, media clips and form fields, you define a trigger that causes the action to occur and then define the action itself. You can add multiple actions to one trigger. The Locked option prevents the appearance and actions associated with an object from being accidentally changed. Add an action 1 Do one of the following: • Using the Hand tool, right-click/Control-click the bookmark or page thumbnail, and choose Properties. • Using the Select Object tool, double-click the link, media clip, or form field, and choose Properties. 2 Click the Actions tab. 3 From the Select Action menu, select the action type to occur, and then click Add. You can add multiple actions; actions execute in the order that they appear in the Actions list box. 4 (Optional) Select an action in the Actions tab, and use the buttons to reorder, edit, or delete the action. 5 Close the window to accept the actions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 337 User Guide Add actions with page thumbnails To enhance the interactive quality of a document, you can specify actions, such as changing the zoom value, to occur when a page is opened or closed. 1 Click the Pages button on the left. 2 Select the page thumbnail corresponding to the page, and choose Page Properties from the Options menu. 3 Click the Actions tab. 4 From the Select Trigger menu, choose Page Open to set an action when the page opens, or choose Page Close to set an action when the page closes. 5 Choose an action from the Select Action menu, and click Add. 6 Specify the options for the action, and click OK. The options available depend on the action selected. 7 To create a series of actions, choose another action from the menu, and click Add again. Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the actions in the order you want them to occur. Note: If you set an action that switches to Full Screen view on Page Open or Page Close, the next time the same page opens or closes, Full Screen view is turned off. Action types You can assign the following actions to links, bookmarks, pages, media clips, and form fields: Execute A Menu Item Executes a specified menu command as the action. Go To A 3D View Jumps to the specified 3D view. Go To A Page View Jumps to the specified destination in the current document or in another document. Import Form Data Brings in form data from another file, and places it in the active form. Open A File Launches and opens a file. If you are distributing a PDF file with a link to another file, the reader needs the native application of that linked file to open it successfully. (You may need to add opening preferences for the target file.) Open A Web Link Jumps to the specified destination on the Internet. You can use http, ftp, and mailto protocols to define your link. Play A Sound Plays the specified sound file. The sound is embedded into the PDF document in a cross-platform format that plays in Windows and Mac OS. Play Media (Acrobat 5 Compatible) Plays the specified QuickTime or AVI movie that was created as Acrobat 5­ compatible. The specified movie must be embedded in a PDF document. Play Media (Acrobat 6 And Later Compatible) Plays a specified movie that was created as Acrobat 6-compatible. The specified movie must be embedded in a PDF document. Read An Article Follows an article thread in the active document or in another PDF document. Reset A Form Clears previously entered data in a form. You can control the fields that are reset with the Select Fields dialog box. Run A JavaScript Runs the specified JavaScript. Set Layer Visibility Determines which layer settings are active. Before you add this action, specify the appropriate layer settings. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 338 User Guide Show/Hide A Field Toggles between showing and hiding a field in a PDF document. This option is especially useful in form fields. For example, if you want an object to pop up whenever the pointer is over a button, you can set an action that shows a field on the Mouse Enter trigger and hides a field on Mouse Exit. Submit A Form Sends the form data to the specified URL. Trigger types Triggers determine how actions are activated in media clips, pages, and form fields. For example, you can specify a movie or sound clip to play when a page is opened or closed. The available options depend on the specified page element. You can use the following triggers for media clips and form fields (not links or bookmarks): Mouse Up When the mouse button is released after a click. This is the most common button trigger, because it gives the user one last chance to drag the pointer off the button and not activate the action. Page Visible (media clips only) When the page containing the media clip is visible, regardless of whether it is the current page. It’s possible for a page to be visible without being the current page, such as when a continuous page layout displays pages side-by-side. Page Invisible (media clips only) When the page containing the media clip is moved out of view. Page Enter (media clips only) When the page containing the media clip becomes the current page. Page Exit (media clips only) When a user leaves the page that contains the media clip. Mouse Down When the mouse button is clicked (without being released). In most cases, Mouse Up is the preferred trigger. Mouse Enter When the pointer enters the field or play area. Mouse Exit When the pointer exits the field or play area. On Receive Focus (media clips only) When the link area receives focus, either through a mouse action or tabbing. On Lose Focus (media clips only) When the focus moves to a different link area. About JavaScript in Acrobat The JavaScript language was developed by Netscape Communications as a means to create interactive web pages more easily. Adobe has enhanced JavaScript so that you can easily integrate this level of interactivity into your PDF documents. You can invoke JavaScript code using actions associated with bookmarks, links, and pages. The Set Document Actions command lets you create document-level JavaScript actions that apply to the entire document. For example, selecting Document Did Save runs the JavaScript after a document is saved. You can also use JavaScript with PDF forms and batch sequences. The most common uses for JavaScript in forms are formatting data, calculating data, validating data, and assigning an action. Field-level scripts are associated with a specific form field or fields, such as a button.This type of script is executed when an event occurs, such as a Mouse Up action. To learn how to create JavaScript scripts, download the JavaScript manuals from the Adobe website. Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ contains background information and tutorials, and the JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference contains detailed reference information. These and other JavaScript resources are located on the Adobe website. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 339 User Guide Converted web pages Links and bookmarks in web pages You can work with a PDF document created from web pages the same way you work with any other PDF. Depending on how you configured Acrobat, clicking a link on a converted web page adds the page for that link to the end of the PDF, if it isn’t already included. Note: Remember that one web page can become multiple PDF pages. A web page is a single topic (or URL) from a website and is often one continuous HTML page. When you convert a web page to PDF, it may be divided into multiple standard-size PDF pages. When you first create a PDF from web pages, tagged bookmarks are generated if Create Bookmarks is selected in the Web Page Conversion Settings dialog box. A standard (untagged) bookmark representing the web server appears at the top of the Bookmarks tab. Under that bookmark is a tagged bookmark for each web page downloaded; the tagged bookmark’s name comes from the page’s HTML title or the URL, if no title is present. Tagged web bookmarks are initially all at the same level, but you can rearrange them and nest them in family groups to help keep track of the hierarchy of material on the web pages. If Create PDF Tags is selected when you create a PDF from web pages, structure information that corresponds to the HTML structure of the original pages is stored in the PDF. You can use this information to add tagged bookmarks to the file for paragraphs and other items that have HTML elements. See also “About bookmarks” on page 327 Get information on converted web pages You can display a dialog box with the current page’s URL, title, date and time downloaded, and other information. ? Choose Advanced > Web Capture > Page Info. Refresh converted web pages You can refresh web pages in a PDF to retrieve the most up-to-date version from the website. When you refresh, you download the entire website or link again and build a new PDF. The resulting new PDF lists any pages where compo­ nents have changed, including text, web links, embedded filenames, and formatting. New pages are downloaded if they have been added to the site. The changed pages are listed as bookmarks in the Bookmarks panel under a bookmark labeled New And Changed Pages. You can refresh web pages only if Save Refresh Commands was selected when the pages were first downloaded. When you refresh web pages, both the original PDF pages and the refreshed version are retained. To keep an archive of changes made to a website, save both versions. 1 Choose Advanced > Web Capture > Refresh Pages. 2 To view new and changed pages, select Create Bookmarks For New And Changed Pages. Then specify the scope of the updated tagged bookmarks that you want to compare: Compare Only Page Text To Detect Changed Pages Compares only the text on the pages. Compare All Page Components To Detect Changed Pages Compares all page components, including text, images, web links, embedded filenames, and formatting. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 340 User Guide 3 To not resubmit any previously submitted form data, deselect Resubmit Form Data. Be careful if you have Resubmit Form Data selected because it can result in duplicate purchases or other submissions. This option is available only if a form and query results are on the pages. 4 To change which pages are updated by refreshing, select Edit Refresh Commands List, select the URLs you want, and click OK. 5 Click Refresh. Compare converted pages with current web pages ? To open a page or web link, do one of the following: • To open the current page in a web browser, choose Advanced > Web Capture > Open Page In Web Browser. • To open the bookmarked page, right-click/Control-click a tagged bookmark, and choose Open Page In Web Browser. • To open a linked page, right-click/Control-click a link in the PDF version of the web page, and choose Open Web Link In Browser. The browser opens in a new application window to the page you specify. Articles About articles Many traditional print documents, such as magazines and newspapers, arrange text in multiple columns. Stories flow from column to column and sometimes across several pages. While the format is effective for printed material, this type of structure can be difficult to follow on-screen because of the scrolling and zooming required. The article feature enables you to guide readers through material presented in multiple columns and across a series of pages. 1 A 3 A C 2 A B The flow of an article thread. The user reads through text A, skips text B and C, and moves on to text A again. Define articles You create an article by defining a series of boxes around the content in the order in which you want the content read. The navigational path you define for an article is known as the article thread. You create a thread connecting the various boxes, unifying them into a continuous text flow. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 341 User Guide Most desktop publishing programs allow you to generate article threads automatically as you convert the files to Adobe PDF. If the file you’re viewing has articles, you can show the names of the articles on a tab and navigate easily through them. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Article Tool, or select the Article tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar. The pointer appears as a cross-hair pointer in the document window. 2 Drag a rectangle to define the first article box. An article box appears around the enclosed text, and the pointer changes to the article pointer. Each article box you create has a label that consists of the article number and its sequence within the article. For example, the first box for the first article is labeled 1-1, the second box 1-2, and so on. The boxes for the second article in the same document are labeled 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, and so on. 3 Go to the next part of the document you want to include in the article, and draw a rectangle around that text. Repeat until you have defined the entire article. Note: To resize or move an article box, you must first end the article. 4 To end the article, press Enter or Return. 5 In the Article Properties dialog box, enter the article title, subject, author, and any keywords to describe the article, and click OK. View and edit an article Use the Article tool to create, display, and make changes to an article box in the PDF document. View articles on the page ? Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Article Tool. View articles in the PDF 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Articles. Note: The Articles panel is a floating panel; it is not docked in the navigation pane by default. Drag the Articles panel to the navigation pane to dock it with the other panels. 2 To read an article, double-click it, or select the article and choose Read Article from the Options menu in the Articles panel. The first line of the article appears in the upper left corner. 3 To hide the Articles panel after the article opens, select Hide After Use in the Options menu of the Articles panel. Delete an article or article box ? In the Articles panel, do one of the following: • To delete the entire article, select the article in the Articles panel, and press the Delete key. • To delete only one box from an article, right-click/Control-click the box, and choose Delete. In the warning message, select Box. If you select Article, the entire article is deleted. The remaining articles or article boxes are automatically renumbered. Insert an article box into an article thread 1 In the Articles panel, select the article box that you want the new article box to follow. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 342 User Guide 2 Click the plus sign (+) at the bottom of the selected box, and click OK when prompted to drag and create a new article box. An example of selecting an article with the Article tool 3 Draw a new article box. The new box is inserted into the article flow, and all following boxes are renumbered. Move or resize an article box ? Using the Article tool, select the article box, and do one of the following: • To move the box, drag it to the new location. • To resize the box, drag a center handle to change only height or width, or drag a corner handle to change both dimensions. An example of resizing an article box Edit article properties 1 Using the Article tool, select the article box that you want to edit. 2 Right-click/Control-click the box, and choose Properties. 3 Change the information in the Articles Properties dialog box, and click OK. Combine two articles 1 In the document pane, select any article box in the article you want to be read first. 2 Select the plus sign (+) at the bottom of the article box, and click OK to dismiss the prompt to create a new article box. 3 Ctrl-click/Option-click an article box you want to be read next. The second article is appended to the end of the first article. All article boxes in the piece are renumbered automatically. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 343 User Guide Optimizing PDF Optimizer PDF Optimizer provides many settings for reducing the size of PDF files. Some of the PDF Optimizer settings are comparable to the settings that are available when you create a PDF file using Distiller. Whether you use all of these settings or only a few depends on how you intend to use the files and on the essential properties a file must have. In most cases, the default settings are appropriate for maximum efficiency—saving space by removing embedded fonts, compressing images, and removing items from the file that are no longer needed. Before you optimize a file, it’s a good idea to audit the file’s space usage. The space audit results may give you ideas about where best to reduce file size. You can also reduce the size of your PDF by using the Reduce File Size command. Important: Some methods of compression may make images unusable in a print production workflow. You should experiment with various settings before making changes that can’t be discarded. See also “Reduce file size by saving” on page 48 Open the PDF Optimizer ? To open the PDF Optimizer dialog box, do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > PDF Optimizer. • Choose Advanced > Print Production > PDF Optimizer. • Click the PDF Optimizer icon in the Print Production toolbar. Note: PDF Optimizer isn’t available when Reflow is selected in the View menu. Audit the space usage of a PDF Auditing the space usage gives you a report of the total number of bytes used for specific document elements, including fonts, images, bookmarks, forms, named destinations, and comments, as well as the total file size. The results are reported both in bytes and as a percentage of the total file size. 1 Choose Advanced > PDF Optimizer. 2 Click the Audit Space Usage button at the top of the dialog box. Optimize a PDF Note: Optimizing a digitally signed document removes (and invalidates) the digital signatures. 1 Open the PDF Optimizer dialog box. 2 To use the default settings, choose Standard from the Settings menu, and then skip to step 6. If you change any settings in the PDF Optimizer dialog box, the Settings menu automatically switches to Custom. 3 From the Make Compatible With menu, choose Retain Existing to keep the current PDF version of the file, or choose a version of Acrobat that you want the PDF to be compatible with. (The options available in panels vary depending on this choice.) 4 Select the check box next to a panel (for example, Images, Fonts, Transparency), and then select options in that panel. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 344 User Guide 5 (Optional) To save your customized settings, click the Save button and name the settings. (You can delete any saved settings by choosing it in the Settings menu and clicking the Delete button.) 6 When you are finished selecting options, click OK. 7 In the Save Optimized As dialog box, click Save to overwrite the original PDF with the optimized PDF, or select a new name or location. To optimize a number of documents at the same time, use the Output options for the Batch Processing command. See also “Run a predefined batch sequence” on page 368 PDF Optimizer options You can reduce the size of a PDF by selecting options from the panels in the PDF Optimizer dialog box. Images panel The Images panel of the PDF Optimizer lets you set options for color, grayscale, and monochrome image compression. The Images panel of the PDF Optimizer dialog box. You can change the PDF compatibility in this dialog box. In the Images panel, you can select the following options: Downsample Reduces file size by lowering the resolution of images, which involves merging the colors of original pixels into larger pixels. Note: Masked images and images with a size less than 16-by-16 pixels are not downsampled. Compression Reduces file size by eliminating unnecessary pixel data. In general, JPEG and JPEG2000 compression give better results on images like photographs with gradual transitions from color to color. ZIP is the better choice for illustrations with large areas of solid, flat color or patterns made up of flat colors. For monochrome images, JBIG2 compression, which is available in PDF Optimizer but not in Distiller, is superior to CCITT. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 345 User Guide Quality Can be set only for JPEG and JPEG2000 compression. JPEG and JPEG2000 compression methods are typically lossy, a process that permanently removes some pixel data. You can apply lossy JPEG or JPEG2000 compression to color images at various levels (minimum, low, medium, high, maximum). For JPEG2000 compression, you can also specify lossless so that no pixel data is removed. Compression for monochrome images is lossless, except for JBIG2 compression, which provides both lossy and lossless modes of compression. See also “Transparency flattening” on page 480 “Edit a flattener preset in the PDF Optimizer” on page 486 “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248 Fonts panel To ensure an exact match to the source document, you should embed all fonts used in the document. If an exact match is not needed and you prefer a smaller file, you can choose not to embed fonts for roman text and East Asian text (Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese). Text in these languages is replaced with a substitution font when viewed on a system that does not have the original fonts. The Fonts panel of the PDF Optimizer contains two lists for fonts, fonts that are available for unembedding, and fonts to be unembedded. Certain fonts aren’t available for unembedding and don’t appear in the Fonts panel. To unembed fonts in a document, select one or more fonts in the Embedded Fonts list, and click the Unembed button. If you change your mind about unembedding a font, select it in the list on the right and click the Retain button. Transparency panel If your PDF includes artwork that contains transparency, you can use presets in the Transparency panel of PDF Optimizer to flatten transparency and reduce file size. (Flattening incorporates transparency into corresponding artwork by sectioning it into vector-based areas and rasterized areas.) PDF Optimizer applies transparency options to all pages in the document before applying other optimization options. If you select the Acrobat 4.0 And Later compatibility setting, the Transparency panel is enabled and all transparency in the file is flattened during optimization. This ensures compatibility with Acrobat 5.0 and earlier, which doesn’t support transparency. When you create flattening presets, they appear with the default presets in the Transparency panel. Note: Transparency flattening cannot be undone after the file is saved. Discard Objects panel The Discard Objects panel lets you specify objects to remove from the PDF and lets you optimize curved lines in CAD drawings. You can discard objects created in Acrobat and in other applications. Selecting an object removes all occurrences of that object within the PDF. In the Discard Objects area, you can select from these and other options: Discard All Form Submission, Import And Reset Actions Disables all actions related to submitting or importing form data, and resets form fields. This option retains form objects to which actions are linked. Flatten Form Fields Makes form fields unusable with no change to their appearance. Form data is merged with the page to become page content. Discard All JavaScript Actions Removes any actions in the PDF that use JavaScript. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 346 User Guide Discard All Alternate Images Removes all versions of an image except the one destined for on-screen viewing. Some PDFs include multiple versions of the same image for different purposes, such as low-resolution on-screen viewing and high-resolution printing. Discard Embedded Page Thumbnails Removes embedded page thumbnails. This is useful for large documents, which can take a long time to draw page thumbnails after you click the Pages button. Discard Document Tags Removes tags from the document, which also removes the accessibility and reflow capabil­ ities for the text. Convert Smooth Lines To Curves Reduces the number of control points used to build curves in CAD drawings, which results in smaller PDF files and faster on-screen rendering. Detect And Merge Image Fragments Looks for images or masks that are fragmented into thin slices and tries to merge the slices into a single image or mask. Discard Embedded Print Settings Removes embedded print settings, such as page scaling and duplex mode, from the document. Discard Embedded Search Index Removes embedded search indexes, which reduces file size. Discard Bookmarks Removes all bookmarks from the document. Discard User Data panel Use the Discard User Data panel to remove any personal information that you don’t want to distribute or share with others. If you’re unable to find personal information, it may be hidden. You can locate hidden text and user-related information by using the Examine Document command from the Document menu. Discard All Comments, Forms, And Multimedia Removes all comments, forms, and multimedia from the PDF. Discard Document Information And Metadata Removes information in the document information dictionary and all metadata streams. (Use the Save As command to restore metadata streams to a copy of the PDF.) Discard All Object Data Removes all objects from the PDF. Discard File Attachments Removes all file attachments, including attachments added to the PDF as comments. (PDF Optimizer doesn’t optimize attached files.) Discard External Cross References Removes links to other documents. Links that jump to other locations within the PDF are not removed. Discard Private Data Of Other Applications Strips information from a PDF document that is useful only to the appli­ cation that created the document. This does not affect the functionality of the PDF, but it does decrease the file size. Discard Hidden Layer Content And Flatten Visible Layers Decreases file size. The optimized document looks like the original PDF but doesn’t contain layer information. Clean Up panel The options in the Clean Up panel of the PDF Optimizer remove useless items from the document. These items include elements that are obsolete or unnecessary to your intended use of the document. Be aware that removing certain elements may seriously affect the functionality of the PDF. By default, only elements that do not affect functionality are selected. If you are unsure of the implications of removing other options, you should use the default selections. In the Clean Up area, you can select these options: Use Flate To Encode Streams That Are Not Encoded Applies Flate compression to all streams that aren’t encoded. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 347 User Guide In Streams That Use LZW Encoding, Use Flate Instead Applies Flate compression to all content streams and images that use LZW encoding. Remove Invalid Bookmarks Removes bookmarks that point to pages in the document that have been deleted. Remove Invalid Links Removes links that jump to invalid destinations. Remove Unreferenced Named Destinations Removes named destinations that are not being referenced internally from within the PDF document. Because this option does not check for links from other PDF files or websites, it may not fit in some workflows. Optimize The PDF For Fast Web View Restructures a PDF document for page-at-a-time downloading (byte-serving) from web servers. Editing text and objects Choosing a tool A common misconception about PDF documents is that they should behave like any other document that contains images and text, letting you freely move or edit items on a page. A PDF is like a snapshot of your original document. You can perform minor touch-ups, but if your PDF requires substantial revision, it’s easier to make changes to the source document and regenerate the PDF. For editing text and objects, choose from the tools in the Advanced Editing toolbar. To insert editing marks in a PDF to indicate your changes to the original document, see “Mark up text with edits” on page 173. The TouchUp Text tool lets you add to and replace existing text if the fonts used are available on the system. If the fonts aren’t available, you can change only the appearance of existing text. However, you can add new blocks of text using the TouchUp Text tool. The Typewriter tool also lets you create new text, but provides fewer options to modify new text than the TouchUp Text tool. Note: Using the TouchUp Text tool may affect how the document reflows, which can make the document less accessible to the visually impaired. The Select Object tool provides basic editing capabilities for most objects. You can modify the size, page location, and properties of images, links, fields, and multimedia objects. You can make these same changes with the tool used to create the object. To scale, rotate, flip, or clip an image or object (including text blocks), use the TouchUp Object tool. The TouchUp Object tool can also place images and change an object’s color space (see “Convert colors to a different color space” on page 474). If you need to edit the source file for an embedded image or object, the TouchUp Object tool can start an image-editing or object-editing application. Note: Comments—even though they have a graphic appearance—are not considered page elements and therefore cannot be selected or manipulated using the touchup tools. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 348 User Guide Editing text with the TouchUp Text tool Edit text You can add or replace text only if the font used for that text is installed on your system. If the font isn’t installed on your system but is embedded or subsetted in the PDF, you can make changes only to color, word spacing, character spacing, baseline offset, or font size. You can edit text on rotated lines in the same way as on horizontal lines, and you can edit text using vertical fonts in the same way as text using horizontal fonts. The baseline offset or shift for vertical fonts is left and right, instead of up and down for horizontal fonts. Edit text using the TouchUp Text tool 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Text Tool, or select the TouchUp Text tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar. 2 Click in the text you want to edit. A bounding box outlines the selectable text. 3 Select the text you want to edit: • Choose Edit > Select All to select all the text in the bounding box. • Drag to select characters, spaces, words, or a line. 4 Edit the text by doing one of the following: • Type new text to replace the selected text. • Press Delete, or choose Edit > Delete to remove the text. • Choose Edit > Copy to copy the selected text. • Right-click/Control-click the text and choose the appropriate option. Click outside the selection to deselect it and start over. Edit text attributes 1 Select the TouchUp Text tool. 2 Click in the text you want to edit. 3 Right-click/Control-click the text, and choose Properties. 4 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, click the Text tab. You can change any of the following text attributes: Font Changes the font used by the selected text to the font you specify. You can select any font installed on your system or fully embedded in the PDF document. Document fonts are listed at the top; system fonts are listed below. Font Size Changes the font size to the size (in points) that you specify. Character Spacing Inserts uniform spacing between two or more characters in selected text. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 349 User Guide Word Spacing Inserts uniform spacing between two or more words in selected text. Horizontal Scaling Specifies the proportion between the height and the width of the type. Baseline Offset Offsets the text from the baseline. The baseline is the line on which the type rests. Fill Specifies the fill color. Stroke Specifies the stroke color. Stroke Width Specifies the width of the stroke. Note: For legal reasons, you must have purchased a font and have it installed on your system to revise text using that font. Add new text You can add new text to a PDF using any of the fonts installed on the system. 1 Select the TouchUp Text tool. 2 Ctrl-click/Option-click where you want to add text. 3 In the New Font dialog box, select the font and mode you want, and click OK. 4 Type the new text. 5 Do any of the following: • To change the font size and other attributes, select the text, right-click/Control-click, and choose Properties. • To move the text block, use the TouchUp Object tool. Add text using the Typewriter tool Use the Typewriter tool to type text anywhere on a PDF page. Organizations sometimes provide PDF versions of their paper forms without interactive form fields. The Typewriter tool provides a simple solution for filling out such forms. The Typewriter tool is similar to the Text Box tool, but includes a different set of default properties. 1 Choose Tools > Typewriter > Show Typewriter Toolbar, and then click the Typewriter button. 2 Click where you want to type, and then begin typing. Press Enter to add a second line. 3 To change the text size, select the text, and click the Decrease Text Size button or the Increase Text Size button in the Typewriter toolbar. 4 To change the line spacing (leading), select the text, and click the Decrease Line Spacing button or the Increase Line Spacing button. 5 To move or resize Typewriter text block, select the Select tool, click a Typewriter text block, and drag the text block or one of its corners. 6 To edit the text again, select the Typewriter tool, and then double-click in the Typewriter text. Note: To let Reader users type text in a PDF by using the Typewriter tool, open the PDF in Acrobat Professional, choose Tools > Typewriter > Enable Typewriter Tool In Adobe Reader, and save the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 350 User Guide Insert special characters You can insert certain special characters (line breaks, soft hyphens, nonbreaking spaces, and em dashes) in a tagged PDF to improve the way it reflows. You can also insert these special characters in any PDF to improve the way it’s read by a screen reader or simply to edit it for general readability purposes. You do not need to have the font installed in order to insert special characters. 1 Select the TouchUp Text Tool. 2 Click where you want to insert the character, or select text to be replaced by the character. 3 Right-click/Control-click the selected text or location, choose Insert and then select an option. See also “Reflow a PDF” on page 297 Embed fonts using the TouchUp Text tool Embedding fonts ensures that your PDF uses the same fonts as the original document, no matter where you open the PDF or what fonts are installed on that system. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Text Tool, or select the TouchUp Text tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar. 2 Click in the text containing the font embedding or subsetting you want to edit. A paragraph of text is enclosed in a bounding box. You can select text within the paragraph by dragging. 3 Right-click/Control-click the text, and choose Properties. 4 In the TouchUp Properties dialog box, click the Text tab to display the font name and font properties as well as embedding and subset capabilities. 5 To see a list of all the fonts, scroll through the Font menu. Document fonts are listed first. Your system fonts are listed below the document fonts. 6 Choose a font in the Font menu, check the permissions to determine which options are available for that font, and then select an embedding option: Can Embed Font You can select both the embed and subset options. To embed the entire font rather than a subset, make sure that Subset is not selected. Can Embed Font For Print And Preview Only You can only subset-embed the font. You can embed the font for print and preview but not for editing. Cannot Embed Font Neither the embed nor subset option is available. No System Font Available Neither the embed nor subset option is available. See also “Fonts” on page 113 Place an image or object 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object Tool . 2 Right-click/Control-click the page and choose Place Image. 3 Choose one of the following file formats: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PCX, PNG, EPS/PS, or TIFF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 351 User Guide 4 Select an image file, and click Open. A copy of the image file appears in the center of the page, at the same resolution as the original file. Move or edit an object A selected object usually shows a bounding box. Selection handles appear when the pointer is over the object. When the pointer is over a locked object, no selection handles appear. When you select multiple objects, the last object you select becomes the anchor and appears red; the others appear blue. The anchor object remains stationary during alignment operations. To make another object in the selection the anchor object, Ctrl-click/Option-click the new target object twice, once to remove the object from the selection, and once to add it back to the selection. As the last object added to the selection, it becomes the anchor object. When objects of the same type are selected and the selection covers multiple pages, you can change the appearance of the objects but not move them. When you edit a text box, the entire text box is selected; however, the TouchUp Object tool cannot select individual characters that are part of larger text blocks. You must use the TouchUp Text tool to edit individual characters and words. Use the Select Object tool to select and move objects such as form fields and links. Use the TouchUp Object tool to select and move placed images, text blocks, and embedded objects. Select an object 1 Select one or more objects: • Click the object with the TouchUp Object tool (Tools > Advanced Editing). • Click the object with the Select Object tool , or with the tool you used to create the object. • Right-click/Control-click the object and choose Select All from the context menu. If the Select Object tool is active and the document uses single-page layout, all objects on the current page are selected. If the document is in any other page layout, all objects in the document are selected. If a tool in the Advanced Editing toolbar is active, all objects of that type in the document are selected. • Drag to create a rectangle around the desired objects. If the Select Object tool is active, all objects within the rectangle are selected. If an Advanced Editing tool is active, press Ctrl as you drag; all objects of the tool type within the rectangle are selected. 2 (Optional) Add one or more objects to the current selection: • Ctrl-click/Option-click an object. • Shift-click to add a range of objects. (The Select Object tool includes all objects when you Shift-click.) Using Shift selects all items that lie within the rectangular bounding box formed by all items in the selection (including the item that was just added). Move an object 1 Click the object with the TouchUp Object tool , the Select Object tool , or the tool used to create the object. 2 Move the image or object: • Drag the object to the desired location. Objects cannot be dragged to a different page (you can cut and paste them to a new page instead). Shift-drag the object to constrain movement up or down, or right or left. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 352 User Guide . • Right-click/Control-click the image and choose an option to move the image on the page. Resize an object 1 Click the object with the TouchUp Object tool , the Select Object tool , or with the tool used to create it. 2 Drag a handle of the object. Shift-drag the handle to retain the original aspect ratio. Clip an object 1 Select the TouchUp Object tool 2 Right-click/Control-click the object, and choose Set Clip. When you hold the pointer over the selection, the clipping icon appears. 3 Drag a selection handle in the direction you want until the clip rectangle displays the results you want. 4 Click inside the selection to exit the clipping mode. Edit an object using the TouchUp Object tool 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object tool. 2 Select the object, right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose one of the following: Place Image Embeds an image file in the PDF. Set Clip Sets a clipping region for the object, if one exists. Delete Clip Delete Clip deletes objects that are clipping the selected object. For example, if you scale text and the resulting characters are clipped, selecting this option shows you the complete characters. This option appears only if you chose Set Clip. Flip Horizontal, Flip Vertical Flip Horizontal flips the image horizontally, on the vertical axis. Flipping text blocks horizontally creates a mirror effect. Flip Vertical flips the image vertically, on the horizontal axis. Create Artifact Removes the object from the reading order so it isn’t read by a screen reader or the Read Out Loud command. Edit Image, Edit Object Starts the image editor or object editor you specify in the TouchUp preferences. Edit Image is available when a vector image is selected; Edit Object is available when a bitmap image is selected. Selecting these options removes tags from the PDF, potentially changing how the PDF reflows and affecting accessibility. For example, changing the location of an object affects the order in which that object (or its alternate text) is read by a screen reader. Rotate Clockwise, Rotate Counterclockwise, Rotate Selection Rotate Clockwise and Rotate Counterclockwise rotate the selected object ninety degrees in the indicated direction. Rotate Selection lets you rotate the selection incrementally by dragging a selection handle in the direction you choose. You must click inside the selection to exit the rotate mode. TouchUp Properties Lets you edit properties for the content, tag, and text, such as adding alternate text to an image to make it accessible. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 353 User Guide Start an image editor using the TouchUp Object tool By default, the TouchUp Object tool starts Adobe Photoshop (if installed) to edit images and objects. To use a different editing application, specify the application in the TouchUp preferences. Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and select TouchUp on the left side of the Preferences dialog box. Click Image Editor (for bitmap images) or Page/Object Editor, (for vector images) and select the application on your hard drive. 1 Using the TouchUp Object tool, select the image or object or Shift-click to select multiple images or objects. If you change the object selection, the editing session terminates. To edit all the images and objects on the page, right-click/Control-click the page, and choose Edit Page. 2 Right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose Edit Image or Edit Object. (The available command depends on what is selected.) Note:If the image can’t open in Adobe Photoshop, verify that Photoshop is configured correctly. If a message asks whether to convert to ICC profiles, choose Don’t Convert. If the image window displays a checkerboard pattern when it opens, the image data could not be read. 3 Make the desired changes in the external editing application. 4 If you are working in Photoshop, flatten the image. If you change the dimensions of the image in Photoshop, the image may not align correctly in the PDF. Also, trans­ parency information is preserved only for masks that are specified as index values in an indexed color space. Image masks are not supported. If you change image modes while editing the image, you may lose valuable information that can be applied only in the original mode. 5 In the editing application, choose File > Save. The object is automatically updated and displayed in the PDF when you bring Acrobat to the foreground. Important: For Photoshop, if the image is in a format supported by Photoshop 6.0 or later, your edited image is saved back into the PDF. However, if the image is in an unsupported format, Photoshop handles the image as a generic PDF image, and the edited image is saved to disk instead of back into the PDF. Setting up a presentation Defining initial view as Full Screen mode Full Screen mode is a property you can set for PDFs used for presentations. In Full Screen mode, PDF pages fill the entire screen, and the Acrobat menu bar, toolbar, and window controls are hidden. You can also set other opening views, so that your documents or collections of documents open to a consistent view. In either case, you can add page transitions to enhance the visual effect as the viewer pages through the document. To control how you navigate a PDF (for example, advancing pages automatically), use the options in the Full Screen preferences. These preferences are specific to a system—not a PDF document—and affect all PDFs that you open on that system. Therefore, if you set up your presentation on a system you control, you can control these preferences. To set the Full Screen preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS) and select Full Screen on the left. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 354 User Guide Use the Full Screen button (circled) to view and navigate PDFs as a slide show. Define an initial view When a user opens your PDF document or PDF package, they see the initial view of the PDF. You can set the initial view to the magnification level, page, and page layout that you want to have appear. If your PDF is a presentation, you may want to set the initial view to Full Screen mode. After you define the initial view of the PDF, you can add page transitions to selected pages or the entire document. Acrobat supports page transitions and bullet fly-ins from PowerPoint. Define the initial view 1 Choose File > Properties. 2 In the Document Properties dialog box, click Initial View. 3 Select the options you want, and then click OK. You have to save and reopen the file to see the effects. Define the initial view as Full Screen mode When setting the initial view of a PDF to Full Screen mode, you must define how the document opens. 1 Choose File > Properties. 2 In the Document Properties dialog box, select Initial View. 3 For best results, do the following: • Choose Page Only from the Navigation Panel menu. • Choose Single Page from the Page Layout menu. • Set Open To Page to the page on which you want to start the presentation. 4 Select Open In Full Screen Mode to open the document without the menu bar, toolbar, or window controls displayed. Click OK. (You have to save and reopen the file to see the effects.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 355 User Guide Note: Users can exit Full Screen mode by pressing Esc if their preferences are set this way. However, in Full Screen mode, users cannot apply commands and select tools unless they know the keyboard shortcuts. You may want to set up page actions in the document to provide this functionality. Initial View options for document properties The Initial View options in the Document Properties are organized into three areas: Layout And Magnification, Window Options, and User Interface Options. Layout And Magnification Determines the appearance of the document. • Navigation Panel Determines which panels are displayed in the navigation pane. • Page Layout Determines how document pages are arranged. • Magnification Sets the zoom level the document will appear at when opened. Default uses the magnification set by the user. • Open To Page Specifies the page that appears when the document opens. Note: Setting Default for the Magnification and Page Layout options uses the individual users’ settings in the Page Display preferences. Window Options Determine how the window adjusts in the screen area when a user opens the document. These options apply to the document window itself in relationship to the screen area of the user’s monitor. • Resize Window To Initial Page Adjusts the document window to fit snugly around the opening page, according to the options that you selected under Document Options. • Center Window On Screen Positions the window in the center of the screen area. • Open In Full Screen Mode Maximizes the document window and displays the document without the menu bar, toolbar, or window controls. • Show File Name Shows the filename in the title bar of the window. • Show Document Title Shows the document title in the title bar of the window. The document title is obtained from the Description panel of the Document Properties dialog box. User Interface Options Determine which parts of the interface—the menu bar, the toolbars, and the window controls—are hidden. Note: If you hide the menu bar and toolbars, users cannot apply commands and select tools unless they know the keyboard shortcuts. You may want to set up page actions that temporarily hide interface controls while the page is in view. (See “Add actions with page thumbnails” on page 337.) Add page transitions You can create an interesting effect that occurs each time a page advances by using page transitions. You can also set page transitions for a group of documents using the Batch Processing command. 1 Do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Page Transitions. • In the Pages panel, select the page thumbnails you want to apply transitions to, and choose Page Transitions from the Options menu. 2 In the Set Transitions dialog box, choose a transition effect from the Transition menu. These transition effects are the same as those set in the Full Screen preferences. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 356 User Guide 3 Choose the direction in which the transition effect occurs. Available options depend on the transition. 4 Choose the speed of the transition effect. 5 Select Auto Flip, and enter the number of seconds between automatic page turning. If you do not select this option, the user turns pages using keyboard commands or the mouse. 6 Select the Page Range you want to apply transitions to. Note: If users select Ignore All Transitions in the Full Screen preferences, they do not see the page transitions. Adding movies and sounds Add movies or sounds to PDFs You can add movies and sounds to PDFs in Windows if the media is playable in Windows Media Player, Flash Player, RealPlayer, or QuickTime. In Mac OS, you can add QuickTime compatible movies and sounds to PDFs. Before you add a movie or sound clip to a PDF, you must decide if your clip will be compatible—that is, playable— in Acrobat 6 and later, or in earlier versions as well. If you choose the Acrobat 6 Compatible Media option, you have many more choices, such as the option to embed the movie and add multiple renditions. However, users with earlier versions of Acrobat will have to download Adobe Reader to play your clip. You can provide different renditions of the movie that play if the users’ settings vary. For example, you may want to include a low-resolution rendition for users with slow Internet connections. Note: If an alert message tells you that no media handler is available, you must install the appropriate player before you can add clips to the PDF. For example, you must install QuickTime if you want to embed an MOV file in a PDF. See also “View PDFs in Full Screen mode” on page 30 “About Actions” on page 336 Add a movie or sound clip 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing, and select either the Movie tool or the Sound tool . 2 Drag or double-click to select the area on the page where you want the movie or sound to appear. For movies, the play area is the exact size of the movie frame (if Acrobat can read the movie clip’s dimensions). 3 In the dialog box that appears, select a compatibility setting for your clip: Acrobat 6 (And Later) Compatible Media Provides access to all options, but the user must have version 6.0 or later of Acrobat or Adobe Reader to play the clip. Acrobat 5 (And Earlier) Compatible Media Ensures that your clip is available to users who have not yet upgraded from version 5.0 or earlier of Acrobat or Adobe Reader. This option requires that you select media that is playable in the QuickTime player. 4 To specify the clip, type the path or URL in the Location box, or click Browse (Windows) or Choose (Mac OS) and double-click the movie file. 5 If you selected Acrobat 6 (And Later) Compatible Media, you can include the clip with the PDF by selecting Embed Content In Document. This option will increase the file size of the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 357 User Guide 6 To display an image in the play area when the movie isn’t playing, select a poster option, and then click OK. After you add the movie to the PDF, you can specify additional properties that determine how the clip appears and plays. Edit the play area 1 Using the Movie tool , the Sound tool , or the Select Object tool , click the play area to select it. When you move any of these tools over the play area, handles appear on the borders of the play area, even on those with invisible borders. 2 Do any of the following: • Move the clip by dragging its icon to a new location on the page. • Delete the clip by selecting it and pressing Delete. • Resize the clip by dragging one of the corners of the frame until it is the desired size. Hold down Shift to retain the correct proportions for movie clips. Create alternate renditions By default, the movie clip you add to a PDF is the first and only rendition listed in the Multimedia Properties dialog box. You can create alternate renditions or add other renditions to ensure that users can play the movie clip on their systems. For example, you can have a large, high-quality movie file and a smaller, low-quality movie file. You can specify system settings that a rendition requires to play; the rendition that best matches the user’s system is played. Renditions are assigned to the Mouse Up action by default, which means that when the mouse button is clicked and released, the rendition is played. You can assign different renditions to different actions, although (in most cases) the Mouse Up action is best. If the first rendition cannot be played, the next available rendition is played. 1 Using the Sound tool or the Movie tool , double-click the play area. 2 On the Settings tab, click Add Rendition, choose one of the following options, and then click OK: Using A File Double-click the file you want to add to the rendition list (for example, it may be a low-resolution version of the movie clip that contains the same content as the first rendition). The content type is selected automat­ ically. Using A URL Type the URL, and then specify the content type. By Copying An Existing Rendition Select the rendition that you want to copy. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 358 User Guide 3 Select the rendition, and then click Edit Rendition. Specify the minimum system requirements, playback require­ ments, and other settings to differentiate it from other renditions. 4 Add and edit as many renditions as needed. 5 Use the arrow keys on the right side of the list box to arrange the renditions in the appropriate order. Renditions are played in the order listed, provided the rendition meets the requirements you’ve specified. 6 When you’re finished adding and editing renditions, click Close. Rendition settings The Rendition Settings dialog box appears when you click Edit Rendition on the Settings tab of the Multimedia Properties dialog box. Note: Media players have different capabilities. Some rendition settings, such as player controls, are not available for some players. In such cases, you can determine whether the player may be used to play the rendition by changing the requirement settings on the Playback Requirements tab. Media Settings Use this tab to specify general properties for the movie clip: • Rendition Name Enter the name for the rendition, which will appear in the list of renditions. (This name does not determine which media file is played.) • Rendition Is Accessible To JavaScript Use this option if you’re using JavaScript code that makes use of the rendition. • Media Clip Location Specify the clip by typing or navigating to it. (When you specify the clip location, Content Type is set automatically. Changing the Content Type setting may cause problems playing the media.) • Rendition Alternate Text Type a description of the rendition that may be read aloud to visually impaired viewers. • Allow Temp File Specify whether writing a temp file is allowed and when. Some media players write a temp file when they play a movie clip. If you want to prevent users from easily copying the media content in a secure document, you may want to disallow the creation of temp files. However, selecting this setting may prevent the movie from being played by media players that require the use of temp files. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 359 User Guide Playback Settings Use this tab to determine how the movie clip is played. • Keep Player Open Select whether you want the player to close after it plays the movie clip, be left open indefinitely, or be left open for the number of seconds you specify. • Volume Lets you specify how loud the movie is played. • Show Player Controls When selected, displays a controller bar at the bottom of the play area that lets users stop, pause, and play, provided the media player supports player controls. • Repeat Lets you replay a clip two or more times, or continuously. • Player List Click Add to specify a player and the settings that are required, preferred, or disallowed to play the movie clip. Select the name of the player, the minimum version number of the player, and the status. If you set the status of more than one player to Required, only one of the required players may be used to play the rendition. If you set the status of players to Preferred, these players are selected over nonpreferred players (but not over required players). If you set the status of players to Disallowed, they are not used to play the rendition. Playback Location Use this tab to determine whether a movie clip is played in the PDF, remains hidden while played (recommended for sound clips), is played in a floating window, or is played full screen. When Floating Window is selected, you can add a title, set the window position, and let the user resize or close the window. Note that the user’s preference settings may require (or ignore) title bar text for playback. The window position is determined relative to the document window, application window, or, for dual-monitor configurations, the virtual desktop or primary desktop. You may also specify the width and height of the floating window. Click Get From Media to obtain the movie clip’s dimensions, if available, and then edit as necessary. System Requirements Use this tab to choose the minimum settings for systems on which the movie clip is played. For example, you can require that a user have at least a 1024-by-768 screen resolution to play the movie clip. For options such as Play Dubbed Audio, you can select Either, Disabled, or Enabled. If you select Either, you defer to the settings in the user’s Multimedia panel of the Preferences dialog box. If you select Disabled or Enabled, the corre­ sponding setting in Multimedia preferences must allow the rendition to be used. For example, if the Play Dubbed Audio option is enabled, the rendition may be used only if the Play Dubbed Audio preference option is selected. Playback Requirements Use this tab to select which attributes are required for the rendition to be played. The attributes on this tab include settings from the other tabs, letting you indicate which ones are required. For example, if you set the volume to 50% in the Playback Requirements tab, and you don’t want the rendition to be played unless this volume level can be used, select the Required box next to Volume. Set multimedia properties You can specify properties for Acrobat 6.0 compatible multimedia files and Acrobat 5.0 compatible multimedia files. For instance, you can specify the appearance of a movie’s play area, and whether the movie plays once or continu­ ously. The compatibility version you choose determines the features that are available to you. For example, to include alternate renditions with a multimedia file, you must choose Acrobat 6.0 compatibility. Set Acrobat 6.0-compatible properties 1 Select the Movie tool , the Sound tool , or the Select Object tool , and then double-click the play area. 2 Click the Settings tab in the Multimedia Properties dialog box. 3 Type the title of the movie in the Annotation Title box. This title does not determine which media file is played. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 360 User Guide 4 Type a description of the media file in the Alternate Text box. This description may be read aloud for visually impaired viewers. 5 To change media settings, such as showing player controls and setting the volume level, select the media clip rendition, and click Edit Rendition. (For a description of rendition settings, see “Create alternate renditions” on page 357.) Click OK to return to the Multimedia Properties dialog box. 6 To add alternate renditions, such as low-resolution files, click Add Rendition, and specify the file source for the rendition (from file, URL, or existing rendition). 7 Click the Appearance tab to select options to determine the border appearance of the play area and the poster image. 8 Click the Actions tab to define new actions for the various mouse movements, and then click Close. Set Acrobat 5.0-compatible properties 1 Select the Movie tool , the Sound tool , or the Select Object tool , and then double-click the play area. 2 Type a name in the Title box. By default, the name of the media file appears as the title. If you create an action that refers to this media title, changing its name prevents the action from working properly. 3 To specify a different media file on a local drive, select Local File and then click Change Location; to specify a different media file located on the Internet, select URL and then type the web address in the Location box. Click Close. 4 On the Playback tab, select from the following options: Show Player Controls Displays a controller bar at the bottom of the play area. Use Floating Window Plays the media clip in a separate window. Specify the dimensions (using scale factors) of the floating window in the Size menu. Play Determines the play action of the media clip. 5 On the Appearance tab, specify the appearance of the border and poster for the play area. The poster defines the appearance of the play area when the movie isn’t playing. To reduce file size (and possibly the image quality) select 256 Colors. Click Close. Document properties and metadata View document properties When you view a PDF, you can get information about it, such as the title, the fonts used, and security settings. Some of this information is set by the person who created the document, and some is generated automatically. You can change any information that can be set by the document creator, unless the file has been saved with security settings that prevent changes. 1 Choose File > Properties. 2 Click a tab in the Document Properties dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 361 User Guide See also “Securing PDFs” on page 263 “Create print presets” on page 443 Document Properties Description Shows basic information about the document. The title, author, subject, and keywords may have been set by the person who created the document in the source application, such as Word or InDesign, or by the person who created the PDF. You can search for these description items in Acrobat to find particular documents. The Keywords section can be particularly useful for narrowing searches. Note that many search engines use the title to describe the document in their search results list. If a PDF does not have a title, the filename appears in the results list instead. A file’s title is not necessarily the same as its filename. The Advanced area shows the PDF version, the page size, number of pages, whether the document is tagged, and if it’s enabled for Fast Web View. (The size of the first page is reported in PDFs or PDF packages that contain multiple page sizes.) This information is generated automatically and cannot be modified. Security Describes what changes and functionality are allowed within the PDF. If a password, certificate, or security policy has been applied to the PDF, the method is listed here. Fonts Lists the fonts and the font types used in the original document, and the fonts, font types, and encoding used to display the original fonts. If substitute fonts are used and you aren’t satisfied with their appearance, you may want to install the original fonts on your system or ask the document creator to re-create the document with the original fonts embedded in it. Initial View Describes how the PDF appears when it’s opened. This includes the initial window size, the opening page number and magnification level, and whether bookmarks, thumbnails, the toolbar, and the menu bar are displayed. You can change any of these settings to control how the document appears the next time it is opened. Custom Lets you add document properties to your document. Advanced Lists PDF settings, print dialog presets, and reading options for the document. In the PDF settings, you can set a base Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for web links in the document. Specifying a base URL makes it easy for you to manage web links to other websites. If the URL to the other site changes, you can simply edit the base URL and not have to edit each individual web link that refers to that site. The base URL is not used if a link contains a complete URL address. You can also associate a catalog index file (PDX) with the PDF. When the PDF is searched with the Search PDF window, all of the PDFs that are indexed by the specified PDX file are also searched. You can include prepress information, such as trapping, for the document. You can define print presets for a document, which prepopulate the Print dialog box with document-specific values. You can also set reading options that determine how the PDF is read by a screen reader or other assistive device. Add a description to Document Properties You can add keywords to the document properties of a PDF that other people might use in a search utility to locate the PDF. 1 Choose File > Properties. 2 Click the Description tab, and type the author’s name, subject, and keywords. 3 (Optional) Click Additional Metadata to add other descriptive information, such as copyright information. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 362 User Guide Create document properties You can add custom document properties that store specific types of metadata, such as the version number or company name, in a PDF. Properties you create appear in the Document Properties dialog box. Properties you create must have unique names that do not appear in the other tabs in the Document Properties dialog box. 1 Choose File > Properties, and then select Custom. 2 To add a property, type the name and value, and then click Add. 3 To change the properties, do any of the following, and then click OK: • To edit a property, select it, change the Value, and then click Change. • To delete a property, select it and click Delete. To change the name of a custom property, delete the property and create a new custom property with the name you want. Edit document metadata PDF documents created in Acrobat 5.0 or later contain document metadata in XML format. Metadata includes infor­ mation about the document and its contents, such as the author’s name, keywords, and copyright information, that can be used by search utilities. The document metadata contains (but is not limited to) information that also appears in the Description tab of the Document Properties dialog box. Document metadata can be extended and modified using third-party products. The Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP) provides Adobe applications with a common XML framework that standardizes the creation, processing, and interchange of document metadata across publishing workflows. You can save and import the document metadata XML source code in XMP format, making it easy to share metadata among different documents. You can also save document metadata to a metadata template that you can reuse in Acrobat. View document metadata 1 Choose File > Properties, and click the Additional Metadata button in the Description tab. 2 Click Advanced to display all the metadata embedded in the document. (Metadata is displayed by schema—that is, in predefined groups of related information.) Display or hide the information in schemas by clicking the plus or minus sign (Windows) or arrows (Mac OS) next to the schema name. If a schema doesn’t have a recognized name, it is listed as Unknown. The XML name space is contained in parentheses after the schema name. Edit or append document metadata 1 Choose File > Properties, click the Description tab, and then click Additional Metadata. 2 Select Advanced from the list on the left. 3 To edit the metadata, do any of the following, and then click OK. • To add previously saved information, click Append, select an XMP or FFO file, and click Open. • To add new information and replace the current metadata with information stored in an XMP file, click Replace, select a saved XMP or FFO file, and click Open. New properties are added, existing properties that are also specified in the new file are replaced, and existing properties that are not in the replacement file remain in the metadata. • To delete an XML schema, select it and click Delete. • To append the current metadata with metadata from a template, hold down Ctrl/Command (and choose a template name from the dialog box menu in the upper right corner. Note: You must save a metadata template before you can import metadata from a template. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 363 User Guide • To replace the current metadata with a template of metadata, choose a template file (XMP) from the dialog box menu in the upper right corner. Save metadata as a template or file 1 Choose File > Properties, click the Description tab, and then click Additional Metadata. 2 Select Advanced from the list on the left. 3 Save the document metadata, and then click OK: • To save the metadata to an external file, click Save and name the file. The metadata is stored as a file in XMP format. (To use the saved metadata in another PDF, open the document and use these instructions to replace or append metadata in the document.) • To save the metadata as a template, choose Save Metadata Template from the dialog box menu in the upper right corner, and name the file. View object data and metadata You can view the metadata information of certain objects, tags, and images within a PDF. You can edit and export metadata for Visio objects only. Use the Object Data tool to view object grouping and object data. See also “Find text in multiple PDFs” on page 375 View object metadata 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object tool. 2 Select an object, right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose Show Metadata. (If Show Metadata is unavailable, the image has no metadata associated with it.) View and edit Visio object metadata 1 Choose Tools > Object Data > Object Data Tool. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 364 User Guide 2 Double-click an object on the page to show its metadata. The Model Tree opens and shows a hierarchical list of all structural elements. The selected object’s metadata appears as editable properties and values at the bottom of the Model Tree. The selected object is highlighted on the page. Use the Highlight Color menu at the top of the Model Tree to choose a different color. 3 To edit the metadata, type in the boxes at the bottom of the Model Tree. To save your changes, choose Write Back from the Options menu at the top of the Model tree. 4 To export object metadata, choose Export To XML > Whole Tree to export all objects in the Model Tree, or choose Export To XML > Current Node to export only the selected object and its children. Name and save the file. Export Visio object metadata 1 Choose Tools > Object Data > Object Data Tool. 2 Double-click an object on the page to show its metadata. 3 In the Options menu at the top of the Model Tree, do one of the following: • Choose Export As XML > Whole Tree to export all objects. • Choose Export As XML > Current Node to export only the selected object and its children. 4 Name and save the file. Layers About PDF layers Acrobat supports viewing, navigating, and printing layered content in PDFs created from applications such as InDesign, AutoCAD, and Visio. You can control the display of layers using the default and initial state settings. For example, if your document contains a copyright notice, you can easily hide the layer containing that notice whenever the document is displayed on-screen while ensuring that the layer always prints. You can rename and merge layers, change the properties of layers, and add actions to layers. You can also lock layers to prevent them from being hidden. Acrobat does not allow you to author layers that change visibility according to the zoom level. However, you can highlight a portion of a layer that is especially important by creating a bookmark that magnifies or hides the layer using page actions. You can also add links that let users click a visible or invisible link to navigate to or zoom in on a layer. To retain layers when you convert InDesign CS or later documents to PDF, make sure that Compatibility is set to Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) and that Create Acrobat Layers is selected in the Export PDF dialog box. Show or hide layers Information can be stored on different layers of a PDF. The layers that appear in the PDF are based on the layers created in the original application. You cannot create layers in Acrobat; however, you can examine layers and show or hide the content associated with each layer using the Layers panel in the navigation pane. Items on locked layers cannot be hidden. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 365 User Guide Note: A Lock icon in the Layers panel indicates that a layer is for information only. Locked layers can be created from AutoCAD and Visio files. Use the Layer Properties dialog box to change the visibility of a locked layer. A B C Layers panel A. Eye icon indicates a displayed layer B. Locked layer C. Hidden layer 1 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Layers, and then do one of the following: • To hide a layer, click the eye icon. To show a hidden layer, click the empty box. (A layer is visible when the eye icon is present, and hidden when the eye icon is absent. This setting temporarily overrides the settings in the Layer Properties dialog box.) • To show or hide multiple layers, choose an option from the Options menu in the Layers panel. 2 From the Options menu in the Layers panel, choose one of the following: List Layers For All Pages Shows every layer across every page of the document. List Layers For Visible Pages Shows layers only on the currently visible pages. Reset To Initial Visibility Resets layers to their default state. Apply Layer Overrides Displays all layers. This option affects all optional content in the PDF, even layers that are not listed in the Layers panel. All layers are visible, regardless of the settings in the Layer Properties dialog box. You cannot change layer visibility using the eye icon until you deselect this command. You can edit layer properties in the Layer Properties dialog box, but changes (except changes to the layer name) are not effective until you choose Reset To Initial Visibility in the Options menu. Note: You cannot save the view of a layered PDF by using the eye icon in the Layers panel to show and hide layers. When you save the file, the visibility of the layers automatically reverts to the initial visibility state. If you want to save a different view of a layered PDF, you must change the default state of the layers in the Layer Properties dialog box. Edit layer properties You can combine the default state setting, the visibility setting, and the print setting to control when a layer is visible and when it prints. If a layer contains a watermark, for example, you may want the layer to not show on-screen but always to print and always to export to other applications. In this case you can set the default state to on, the initial visibility to never visible (the image doesn’t show on-screen), and the initial print and initial export states to always print and always export. The layer need not be listed in the Layers panel, since all the state changes are handled automatically. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 366 User Guide Note: The settings in the Layer Properties dialog box take effect only if Allow Layer State To Be Set By User Information is selected in the Documents preferences. If it is not selected, Layer Properties dialog box settings, other than Layer Name and Default State, are ignored. 1 Click the Layers button in the navigation pane. 2 Select a layer, and choose Layer Properties from the Options menu. 3 In the Layer Properties dialog box, edit the layer name or any of the following properties, and then click OK: Default State Defines the initial visibility state of the layer when a document is first opened or when the initial visibility is reset. The eye icons for layers are initially shown or hidden based on this value. For example, if this value is set to off, the eye icon for a layer is hidden when the document is first opened or when Reset To Initial Visibility is chosen from the Options menu. Intent Select View to allow the layer to be turned on or off, or select Reference to keep the layer on at all times and permit editing of the properties. When the Reference Intent option is selected, the layer appears in italics. Visibility Defines the on-screen visibility of the PDF layer. You can show a layer when the document is opened, you can hide a layer when the document is opened, or you can let the default state determine whether a layer is shown or hidden when the document is opened. Print Determines whether a layer will print. Export Determines whether the layer appears in the resulting document when the PDF file is exported to an appli­ cation or file format that supports layers. Any additional properties that the creator of the layered PDF has associated with a specific layer are shown in the box at the bottom of the Layer Properties dialog box. Add layer navigation You can add links and destinations to layers, allowing you to change the view of a document when the user clicks a bookmark or link. Note:In general, changes to layer visibility made using the eye icon in the Layers panel are not recorded in the Navigation toolbar. Associate layer visibility with bookmarks 1 Set the required layer properties, visibility, and magnification level for the target PDF layer in the document pane. 2 Click the Bookmarks button, and choose New Bookmark from the Options menu. 3 Select the new bookmark, and choose Properties from the Options menu. 4 In the Bookmark Properties dialog box, click the Actions tab. 5 For Select Action, choose Set Layer Visibility, click Add, and then click OK. 6 Select the bookmark label in the Bookmarks panel, and name the bookmark. Associate layer visibility with a link destination 1 Set the required layer properties for the destination in the document pane. 2 Choose View > Navigation Panels > Destinations. The Destinations panel appears in a floating panel. You can add it to the other panels by dragging it to the navigation pane. If the panel is collapsed, click the Destinations button to expand it. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 367 User Guide 3 Click the Create New Destination button or select New Destination from the Options menu, and name the destination. 4 Select the Link tool , and drag in the document pane to create a link. (Because content is added to all layers, it doesn’t matter that you are apparently creating the link on the target layer. The link works from any layer.) 5 In the Create Link dialog box, select Custom Link and click Next. 6 Click the Appearance tab in the Link Properties dialog box, and set the appearance of the link. 7 Click the Actions tab in the Link Properties dialog box, choose Set Layer Visibility, and click Add. 8 Close the dialog boxes. You can test the link by changing the layer settings, selecting the Hand tool, and clicking the link. Merge or flatten layers Merged layers acquire the properties of the layer into which they are merged (the target layer). Flattening PDF layers hides any content that is not visible when the flattening operation is executed and consolidates all layers. Important: You cannot undo either a merging or a flattening operation. Merge layers 1 Click the Layers button, and select Merge Layers from the Options menu. 2 In the left pane (Layers To Be Merged), select one or more layers to be merged. Ctrl-click/Command-click to select multiple layers, and click Add. Click Add All to merge all layers. 3 To remove a layer from the center panel, select the layer or layers. Ctrl-click/Command-click to select multiple layers. When your selection is complete, click Remove. 4 In the right pane (Layer To Be Merged Into), select the layer into which to merge the selected layers, and click OK. Flatten layers ? Click the Layers button, and select Flatten Layers from the Options menu. Editing layered content You can select or copy content in a layered PDF document using the Select tool or the Snapshot tool. You can edit content using a touchup tool. These tools recognize and select any content that is visible, regardless of whether the content is on a selected layer. If the content that you edit or delete is associated with one layer, the content of the layer reflects the change. If the content that you edit or delete is associated with more than one layer, the content in all the layers reflects the change. For example, if you want to change a title and byline that appear on the same line on the first page of a document, and the title and byline are on two different visible layers, editing the content on one layer changes the content on both layers. You can add content, such as review comments, stamps, or form fields, to layered documents just as you would to any other PDF document. However, the content is not added to a specific layer, even if that layer is selected when the content is added. Rather, the content is added to the entire document. You can use the Create PDF From Multiple Files command to combine PDF documents that contain layers. The layers for each document are grouped under a separate heading in the Layers panel of the navigation pane. You expand and collapse the group by clicking the icon in the title bar for the group. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 368 User Guide See also “Move or edit an object” on page 351 Processing in batches About batch sequences When you apply one or more routine sets of commands to your files, you can save time and keystrokes by using an automated batch sequence—a defined series of commands with specific settings and in a specific order that you apply in a single step. You can apply a sequence to a single document, to several documents, or to an entire collection of documents. You can use the batch sequences provided or define your own. Batch sequences that you define appear (in alpha­ betical order) in the list of predefined sequences so that you can reuse them in later work sessions. Developers can further enhance batch processing and other robust capabilities in Acrobat by using the Acrobat Software Development Kit (SDK) to create scripts and plug-ins for their particular needs. For more information, see the Acrobat Developer Center (English only). Run a predefined batch sequence Acrobat includes a number of simple, predefined batch sequences that you can use to streamline your work. These batch sequences represent common tasks that you routinely need to perform to prepare files for distribution. You do not have to open any of the PDF files before you begin to run these batch sequences. You can avoid password prompts when you run a sequence on PDFs that require passwords by automating password entry, or by specifying a security method for these files in the Batch Processing preferences. If you select Do Not Ask For Password, PDFs that require passwords won’t be processed. To open the Batch Processing preferences, choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing. 2 In the Batch Sequences dialog box, select a batch sequence, and then click the Run Sequence button. 3 In the Run Sequence Confirmation dialog box, verify that the sequence you selected is the one you want, and click OK. To prevent this dialog box from appearing in the future, deselect the Show The Run Sequence Confirmation Dialog option in the Batch Processing preferences after you complete this procedure. 4 In the Select Files To Process dialog box, select the files that you want, and then click Select. (In Windows, these files must be in the same folder.) 5 If a message asks for additional input for a specific command in the sequence, select the options you want and click OK. 6 When the progress bar disappears, click Close. You can click Stop in the Progress dialog box to stop processing. The Progress dialog box expands automatically to show the percentage of completion and any error or warning messages. Any files already processed are saved as defined in the batch sequence. When the Progress dialog box closes, errors are automatically written to the batch- processing error log, depending on the selections in the Batch Preferences dialog box. Predefined batch sequences Embed Page Thumbnails Embeds miniature images of each page for display in the Pages panel. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 369 User Guide Fast Web View Enables users to download long documents incrementally. Open All Opens all the specified files. This batch sequence creates PDFs for any input files if they are a supported file type. Print 1st Page Of All Prints only the first page of each of the PDFs in the batch sequence. The pages print on your default printer, using your current default print settings. Print All Prints all pages of the files included in the batch sequence. The files print on your default printer, using your current default print settings. Remove File Attachments Removes files that have been attached to the PDF files in the batch sequence. Save All As RTF Saves the files in Rich Text Format (RTF). Set Security To No Changes Limits access to a PDF by setting up passwords and restricting certain features, such as editing. Modify a batch sequence You can add, rearrange, and delete commands in the batch sequence definitions to suit your work requirements. You can also edit the options for individual commands in the batch sequence or add interactive pauses at strategic points in the batch processing. Any changes you make to a predefined batch sequence are automatically saved as a part of the sequence. To restore the predefined batch sequence to its default settings, you must manually remove any changes you made to it. If you require a sequence of complex or highly customized commands, consider creating a new batch sequence. Edit a batch sequence 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing, select the batch sequence, and click Edit Sequence. 2 In the Edit Sequence dialog box, click Select Commands. 3 To modify the sequence of commands, do any of the following: • To add a command to the sequence, select it in the list on the left and click Add to move it to the list on the right. • To delete a command from the sequence, select it on the right and click Remove. • To change the order in which the commands are applied, select a command, and click Move Up or Move Down. 4 To change the options for a particular command, select the command from the list on the right, and click Edit. (The Edit button is unavailable if you select a command that has no options.) When you’re done, click OK, and then click OK to return to the Edit Batch Sequence dialog box. Note: To review the command options, click the plus sign (+) to expand the command display. 5 Specify which files you want to process from the Run Commands On menu by navigating to the folder or file, and then clicking Source File Options to make changes as needed. 6 From the Select Output Locations menu, choose a location option for the files that are created by the batch processing. If you choose Specific Folder, navigate to that folder. 7 Click Output Options, and specify the format to name and save the processed files, and then click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 370 User Guide Expanding the command display in the Edit Sequence dialog box Make a batch sequence interactive If your work requires that different documents use slightly different options for the same commands, you can still use batch processing to automate the work. By making a batch sequence interactive, you can set up your batchprocessing definitions to have pauses between specific commands so that you can modify command options before they execute. Note: You can’t add interactivity to commands that don’t have interactive options. 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing, select the batch sequence you want to add inter- activity to, and click Edit Sequence. 2 In the Batch Edit Sequence dialog box, click Select Commands. 3 On the right side of the Edit Sequence dialog box, select the Toggle Interactive Mode option for the commands that you want to provide input to during processing, and then click OK. A B C Toggle Interactive Mode A. Interactive mode is not available. B. Interactive mode is available but not selected. C. Interactive mode is selected. Create a new batch sequence 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Batch Processing. 2 Click New Sequence. 3 Type a descriptive name for your sequence in the Name Sequence dialog box and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 371 User Guide 4 In the Batch Edit Sequence dialog box, click Select Commands. 5 Select a command on the left side of the Edit Sequence dialog box and click Add. 6 Click Edit to change the settings for the selected command. 7 Repeat steps 5–6 to add and edit additional commands. Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to rearrange the commands in the order you want, and then click OK. 8 In the Edit Batch Sequence dialog box, choose the settings you want from the menus. 9 Click Output Options, select the options you want to include, and then click OK. Automate password entry for a batch sequence Before you batch process PDFs that are encrypted or password protected, you can set your digital ID to enter the required password automatically. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs from the left. 3 Select an ID from the list on the right and then select the following: Login Logs in using the specified digital ID. Type the password and click OK. Logout Logs out the specified digital ID when you run a sequence. See also “About digital IDs” on page 253 372 Chapter 12: Searching and indexing You have lots of control and lots of possibilities for running effective and efficient searches in Adobe Acrobat. A search can be broad or narrow, including many different kinds of data and covering multiple Adobe PDFs. If you work with large numbers of related PDFs, you can define them as a catalog, which generates a PDF index for the PDFs. Searching the PDF index—instead of the PDFs themselves—dramatically speeds up searches. Quickstart The following topics provide simple steps to some common searching tasks. Search for text Use Find to search for text in an open PDF. 1 Type search terms in the Find text box on the toolbar. 2 (Optional) Click the arrow next to the Find text box and select any desired options, such as Include Bookmarks. 3 Press Enter. To search all PDFs in a folder, choose Open Full Acrobat Search from the Find pop-up menu, click All PDF Documents In, and then select the folder you want to search. See also “Find text in a PDF” on page 374 Search for text in comments You can search for text in comments, as well as the body of the PDF. 1 Type search terms in the Find text box on the toolbar. 2 Click the arrow next to the Find text box and select Include Comments. 3 Press Enter. To see all search results at once, choose Open Full Acrobat Search from the Find pop-up menu and select In The Current PDF Document and Include Comments. See also “Find text in a PDF” on page 374 Search PDFs in a package You can search all PDFs in an Adobe PDF package or only selected PDFs. 1 Open the package you want to search. 2 Type search terms in the Find text box, and choose Open Full Acrobat Search from the Find pop-up menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 373 User Guide 3 Choose In The Entire PDF Package. Or choose In Selected PDF Documents, and then select the desired PDFs from the list of PDFs included in the package. See also “Find text in multiple PDFs” on page 375 Search attachments You can search for words in single PDF or in multiple PDFs, along with any attached PDFs up to two levels deep. 1 Choose Edit > Search, and click Use Advanced Search Options at the bottom of the window. 2 Type search terms in the text box, and choose how you want to restrict the search results. 3 Choose where you want to search. 4 Select Include Attachments, and then click Search. See also “Advanced Search Options” on page 376 Searching PDFs Search features overview You run searches to find specific items in PDFs. You can run a simple search, looking for a search term within in a single file, or you can run a more complex search, looking for various kinds of data in one or more PDFs. You can run a search using either the Search window or the Find toolbar. In either case, Acrobat searches the PDF body text, layers, form fields, and digital signatures. You can also include bookmarks and comments in the search. The Search window offers more options and more kinds of searches than the Find toolbar. When you use the Search window, object data and image XIF (extended image file format) metadata are also searched. For searches across multiple PDFs, Acrobat also looks at document properties and XMP metadata, and it searches indexed structure tags when searching a PDF index. If some of the PDFs you search have attached PDFs, you can include the attachments in the search. Note: PDFs can have multiple layers. If the search results include an occurrence on a hidden layer, selecting that occur­ rence displays an alert that asks if you want to make that layer visible. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 374 User Guide See also “Show or hide layers” on page 364 “Examine a PDF for hidden content” on page 248 “Search and redact words” on page 250 Access the search features Where you start your search depends on the type of search you want to run. Use the Find toolbar for a quick search of the current PDF. Use the Search window to look for words or document properties across multiple PDFs, use advanced search options, and search PDF indexes. Display the Find toolbar By default, the Find toolbar is already open. Use this procedure to open it if it has been closed. ? Do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Find. • Right-click/Control-click the toolbar area and choose Find on the context menu. • Press Ctrl+F/Command+F. Open the Search window ? Do one of the following: • Choose Edit > Search. • On the Find toolbar, click the arrow and choose Open Full Acrobat Search. Search appears as a separate window that you can move, resize, minimize, or arrange partially or completely behind the PDF window. Arrange the PDF document window and Search window ? In the Search window, click Arrange Windows. Acrobat resizes and arranges the two windows side by side so that together they almost fill the entire screen. Note: Clicking the Arrange Windows button a second time resizes the document window but leaves the Search window unchanged. If you want to make the Search window larger or smaller, drag the corner or edge, as you would to resize any window on your operating system. Find text in a PDF The Find toolbar searches the currently open PDF. 1 Type the text you want to search for in the text box on the Find toolbar. 2 (Optional) Click the arrow next to the text box and choose one or more of the following: Whole Words Only Finds only occurrences of the complete word you type in the text box. For example, if you search for the word stick, the words tick and sticky aren’t found. Case-Sensitive Finds only occurrences of the words that match the capitalization you type. For example, if you search for the word Web, the words web and WEB aren’t found. Include Bookmarks Also searches the text in the Bookmarks panel. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 375 User Guide Include Comments Also searches the text of any comments. 3 Press Enter. Acrobat jumps to the first instance of the search term, which appears highlighted. 4 Press Enter repeatedly to go to the next instances of the search term. Find text in multiple PDFs The Search window enables you to look for search terms in multiple PDFs. For example, you can search across all open PDF documents, all PDFs in a specific location, or an open PDF package. Note: If documents are encrypted (have security applied to them), you cannot search them as part of a multipledocument search. You must open those documents first and search them one at a time. However, documents encrypted as Adobe Digital Editions are an exception and can be searched as part of a multiple-document search. See also “About PDF packages” on page 119 Find text in PDFs in a specific folder 1 Open Acrobat on your desktop (not in a web browser). 2 Do one of the following. • In the Find toolbar, type the text you want to search for, and then choose Open Full Acrobat Search from the pop­ up menu. • In the Search window, type the text you want to search for in the text box. 3 In the Search window, select All PDF Documents In. From the pop-up menu directly below this option, choose Browse For Location. 4 Select the location you want to search, either on your computer or on a network, and click OK. 5 If you want to specify additional search criteria, click Use Advanced Search Options, and select the options you want. 6 Click Search. During a search, you can click a result or use keyboard shortcuts to navigate the results without interrupting the search. Clicking the Stop button under the search-progress bar cancels further searching and limits the results to the occurrences already found. It doesn’t close the Search window or delete the Results list. To see more results, you must run a new search. Search a PDF package 1 Open the PDF in Acrobat on your desktop (not in a web browser). 2 Do one of the following. • In the Find toolbar, type the text you want to search for in the text box and then choose Open Full Acrobat Search from the pop-up menu. • In the Search window, type the text you want to search for in the text box. 3 In the Search window, choose a location to look in: • To search all PDFs in the package, choose In The Entire PDF Package. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 376 User Guide • To search only some PDFs in the package, choose In Selected PDF Documents. Then select the PDFs you want to search in the PDF package navigation area. 4 If you want to specify additional search criteria, click Use Advanced Search Options, and select the options you want. 5 Click Search. Review search results After you run a search from the Search window, the results appear in page order, nested under the names of each searched document. Each item listed includes a few words of context (if applicable) and an icon that indicates the type of occurrence. Jump to a specific instance in the search results 1 If necessary, click the plus sign (+) (Windows) or the triangle (Mac OS) to expand the search results. Then select an instance in the results to view that instance in the PDF. 2 To view other instances, do any of the following: • Click another instance in the results. • Choose Edit > Search Results, and then choose Next Result or Previous Result. Sort instances in the search results ? Select an option from the Sort By menu near the bottom of the Search window. Results can be sorted by Relevance Ranking, Date Modified, Filename, or Location. Icons shown with search results The icon next to an instance of the search results indicates the search area in which the instance appears. Selecting an icon has the following effect: Document icon Makes the PDF active in the document window. Click the plus (+) (Windows) or the triangle (Mac OS) next to the icon to show the list of individual search results within that PDF. (General) Search Result icon Jumps to that instance of the search term, usually in the body text of the PDF. The instance of the search term is highlighted in the document. Bookmark icon Opens the Bookmarks panel and highlights the instances of the search terms. Comments icon Opens the Comments panel and highlights the instances of the search terms. Layer icon May open a message indicating that the layer is hidden and asking if you want to make it visible. Attachment icon Opens a PDF file that is attached to the searched parent PDF and shows the highlighted instances of the search terms. Advanced Search Options By default, the Search window displays basic search options. Click Use Advanced Search Options near the bottom of the window to display additional options. To restore the basic options, click Use Basic Search Options near the bottom of the window. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 377 User Guide You can set a preference so that advanced search options always appear in the Search window. Access preferences by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS). Then select Search under Categories. Return Results Containing Restricts your search results according to the option you choose: • Match Exact Word Or Phrase Searches for the entire string of characters, including spaces, in the same order in which they appear in the text box. • Match Any Of The Words Searches for any instances of at least one of the words typed. For example, if you search for each of, the results include any instances in which one or both of the two words appear: each, of, each of, or of each. • Match All Of The Words Searches for instances that contain all your search words, but not necessarily in the order you type them. Available only for a search of multiple PDFs or index definition files. • Boolean Query Uses the Boolean operators that you type with the search words into the What Word Or Phrase Would You Like To Search For box. Available only for searching multiple PDFs or PDF indexes. Note: You cannot run wildcard searches using asterisks (*) or question marks (?) when searching PDF indexes. Use These Additional Criteria (text options) Includes the basic search options plus four additional options: • Look In Restricts the search to the current PDF, parts or all of a currently open PDF package (if applicable), an index, or a location on your computer. If you choose to search an index, a location, or a PDF package, additional options appear under Use These Additional Criteria. • Proximity Searches for two or more words that are separated by no more than a specified number of words, as set in the Search preferences. Available only for a search of multiple documents or index definition files, and when Match All Of The Words is selected. • Stemming Finds words that contain part (the stem) of the specified search word. For example, a search for opening finds instances of open, opened, opens, and openly. This option applies to single words and phrases when you search the current PDF, a folder, or an index created with Acrobat 6.0 or later. Wildcard characters (*, ?) aren’t permitted in stemming searches. Stemming isn’t available if either Whole Words Only or Case-Sensitive is selected. • Include Bookmarks Searches the text of any bookmarks, as viewed in the Bookmarks panel. • Include Comments Searches the text of any comments added to the PDF, as viewed in the Comments panel. • Include Attachments Searches PDFs that are attached to the current PDF or other attached PDFs (up to two levels deep). Use These Additional Criteria (document properties) Appears only for searches across multiple PDFs or PDF indexes. You can select multiple property-modifier-value combinations and apply them to searches. Note: You can search by document properties alone by using document property options in combination with a search for specific text. • Check box Applies the criteria set in the three connected options to the search. (The check box is selected automatically when you enter information in any of the three options for that set. After you enter options, deselecting the check box doesn’t clear the entries; they just aren’t applied to the search.) • First menu (property) Indicates the document characteristic to search for. The available options include Date Created, Date Modified, Author, Title, Subject, Filename, Keywords, Bookmarks, Comments, JPEG Images, XMP Metadata, and Object Data. • Second menu (modifier) Indicates the level of matching. If the first menu selection is a date, the available options in the second menu are Is Exactly, Is Before, Is After, Is Not. Otherwise, the available options are Contains and Does Not Contain. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 378 User Guide • Third box (value or text) Indicates the information to be matched, which you type in. If the first menu selection is a date, you can click the arrow to open a calendar that you can navigate to find and select the date you want. Boolean operators Commonly used Boolean operators include the following: AND Use between two words to find documents that contain both terms, in any order. For example, type paris AND france to identify documents that contain both paris and france. Searches with AND and no other Boolean operators produce the same results as selecting the All Of The Words option. NOT Use before a search term to exclude any documents that contain that term. For example, type NOT kentucky to find all documents that don’t contain the word kentucky. Or, type paris NOT kentucky to find all documents that contain the word paris but not the word kentucky. OR Use to search for all instances of either term. For example, type email OR e-mail to find all documents with occurrences of either spelling. Searches with OR and no other Boolean operators produce the same results as selecting the Any Of The Words option. ^ (exclusive OR) Use to search for all instances that have either term but not both. For example, type cat ^ dog to find all documents with occurrences of either cat or dog but not both cat and dog. ( ) Use parentheses to specify the order of evaluation of terms. For example, type white AND (whale OR ahab) to find all documents that contain either white and whale or white and ahab. (The query processor performs an OR query on whale and ahab and then performs an AND query on those results with white. To learn more about Boolean queries, syntax, and other Boolean operators that you can use in your searches, refer to any standard text, website, or other resource with complete Boolean information. Search index files of cataloged PDFs A full-text index is created when someone uses Acrobat to define a catalog of PDFs. You can search that index for the words you want to find rather than running a full-text search of each individual PDF in the catalog. An index search produces a results list with links to the occurrences of the indexed documents. Note: To search a PDF index, you must open Acrobat as a standalone application, not within your web browser. In Mac OS, indexes created with some older versions of Acrobat are not compatible with the Acrobat 8 Search feature and must be updated before you can use Acrobat 8 to search them. 1 Open the Search window, type the words you want to find, and then click Use Advanced Search Options (near the bottom of the window). 2 For Look In, choose Select Index. 3 In the Index Selection dialog box, select an index, if the one you want to search is available, or click Add and then locate and select the index to be searched, and click Open. Repeat as needed until all the indexes you want to search are selected. Note: You can read file data about a selected index by clicking Info, and you can exclude indexes from the search either by selecting them and choosing Remove or by clearing the check box for that index. 4 Click OK to close the Index Selection dialog box, and then choose Currently Selected Indexes on the Look In pop­ up menu. 5 Proceed with your search as usual, selecting other options you want to apply, and clicking Search. Note: Selecting the Match Whole Word Only option when searching indexes significantly reduces the time taken to return results. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 379 User Guide See also “Creating PDF indexes” on page 379 Search features preferences Access preferences for search features by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), and then clicking Search under Categories. Ignore Asian Character Width Finds both half-width and full-width instances of the Asian language characters in the search text. Ignore Diacritics And Accents Finds the search terms with any variation of the alphabetical characters. For example, typing cafe finds both cafe and café. Likewise, typing café finds both versions. If this option isn’t selected, typing cafe doesn’t find café, and vice versa. Always Use Advanced Search Options Makes the advanced options available in the Search window, in addition to the basic options. Maximum Number Of Documents Returned In Results Limits the search results in the Search PDF window to a specific number of documents. The default value is 500, but you can enter any number from 1 to 10,000. Range Of Words For Proximity Searches Limits the search results to those in which the number of words between the search terms isn’t greater than the number you specify. Accepts a range from 1 to 10,000. Enable Fast Find Generates a cache of information from any PDF that you search. This cache reduces subsequent search times for that PDF. Maximum Cache Size Limits the temporary cache of search information for the Fast Find option to the specified size in megabytes (between 5 and 10,000). The default setting is 100. Purge Cache Contents Deletes the Fast Find option’s entire temporary cache of search information. If you accidentally close the Search window while reviewing the results of a search, click the Search button to display the results, or choose Edit > Search Results > Next Result or Previous Result. The most recent search results remain until you run another search or close Acrobat. Creating PDF indexes Create and manage an index in a PDF You can reduce the time required to search a long PDF by embedding an index of the words in the document. Acrobat can search the index much faster than it can search the document. The embedded index is included in distributed or shared copies of the PDF. Users search PDFs with embedded indexes exactly as they search those without embedded indexes; no extra steps are required. Add an index to a PDF 1 With the document open in Acrobat, choose Advanced > Document Processing > Manage Embedded Index. 2 In the Manage Embedded Index dialog box, click Embed Index. 3 Read the messages that appear, and click OK. Note: In Outlook and Lotus Notes, you have the option of embedding an index when you convert email messages or folders to PDF. This is especially recommended for folders containing many email messages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 380 User Guide Update or remove the embedded index in a PDF 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Manage Embedded Index. 2 Click either Update Index or Remove Index. 3 Click OK in the confirmation message. About the Catalog feature You can define a specific group of PDFs as a catalog and create a unified index for that entire collection of documents. When users search the cataloged PDFs for specific information, the index makes the search process much faster. When you distribute or publish the collection on a CD or website, you can include the index with the PDFs. You can catalog documents written in Roman, Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. The items you can catalog include the document text, comments, bookmarks, form fields, tags, object and document metadata, attachments, document information, digital signatures, image XIF (extended image file format) metadata, and custom document properties. Preparing PDFs for indexing Begin by creating a folder to contain the PDFs you want to index. All PDFs should be complete in both content and electronic features, such as links, bookmarks, and form fields. If the files to be indexed include scanned documents, make sure that the text is searchable. Break long documents into smaller, chapter-sized files, to improve search performance. You can also add information to a file’s document properties to improve the file’s searchability. Before you index a document collection, it’s essential that you set up the document structure on the disk drive or network server volume and verify cross-platform filenames. Filenames may become truncated and hard to retrieve in a cross-platform search. To prevent this problem, consider these guidelines: • Rename files, folders, and indexes using the MS-DOS file-naming convention (eight characters or fewer followed by a three-character file extension), particularly if you plan to deliver the document collection and index on an ISO 9660-formatted CD-ROM disc. • Remove extended characters, such as accented characters and non-English characters, from file and folder names. (The font used by the Catalog feature does not support character codes 133 through 159.) • Don’t use deeply nested folders or path names that exceed 256 characters for indexes that will be searched by Mac OS users. • If you use Mac OS with an OS/2 LAN server, configure IBM® LAN Server Macintosh (LSM) to enforce MS-DOS file-naming conventions, or index only FAT (File Allocation Table) volumes. (HPFS [High Performance File System] volumes may contain long unretrievable filenames.) If the document structure includes subfolders that you don’t want indexed, you can exclude them during the indexing process. Adding metadata to document properties To make a PDF easier to search, you can add file information, called metadata, to the document properties. (You can see the properties for the currently open PDF by choosing File > Properties, and clicking the Description tab.) (Windows) You can also enter and read the data properties information from the desktop. Right-click the document in Windows Explorer, choose Properties, and click the PDF tab. Any information you type or edit in this dialog box also appears in the Document Properties Description when you open the file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 381 User Guide When adding data for document properties, consider the following recommendations: • Use a good descriptive title in the Title field. The filename of the document should appear in the Search Results dialog box. • Always use the same option (field) for similar information. For example, don’t add an important term to the Subject option for some documents and to the Keywords option for others. • Use a single, consistent term for the same information. For example, don’t use biology for some documents and life sciences for others. • Use the Author option to identify the group responsible for the document. For example, the author of a hiring policy document might be the Human Resources department. • If you use document part numbers, add them as keywords. For example, adding doc#=m234 in Keywords could indicate a specific document in a series of several hundred documents on a particular subject. • Use the Subject or Keywords option, either alone or together, to categorize documents by type. For example, you might use status report as a Subject entry and monthly or weekly as a Keywords entry for a single document. If you already have specialized training in Adobe PDF, you can define custom data fields, such as Document Type, Document Number, and Document Identifier, when you create the index. This is recommended only for advanced users and is not covered in Acrobat Complete Help. Create an index for a collection When you build a new index, Acrobat creates a file with the .pdx extension and a new support folder, which contains one or more files with .idx extensions. The IDX files contain the index entries. All of these files must be available to users who want to search the index. Dialog boxes for the index-creation process 1 Choose Advanced > Document Processing > Full Text Index with Catalog, and then click New Index. 2 In Index Title, type a name for the index file. 3 In Index Description, type a few words about the type of index or its purpose. 4 Click Options, select any advanced options you want to apply to your index, and click OK. 5 Under Include These Directories, click Add, select a folder containing some or all of the PDF files to be indexed, and click OK. To add more folders, repeat this step. Note: Any folder nested under an included folder will also be included in the indexing process. You can add folders from multiple servers or disk drives, as long as you do not plan to move the index or any items in the document collection. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 382 User Guide 6 Under Exclude These Subdirectories, click Add, and select any nested folder that contains PDF files you do not want to be indexed. Click OK and repeat, as needed. 7 Review your selections. To make changes to the list of folders to be included or excluded, select the folder you want to change and click Remove. 8 Click Build, and then specify the location for the index file. Click Save, and then: • Click Close when the indexing finishes. • Click Stop to cancel the indexing process. Note: If you stop the indexing, you cannot resume the same indexing session but you don’t have to redo the work. The options and folder selections remain intact. You can click Open Index select the partially finished index, and revise it. If long path names are truncated in the Include These Directories And Exclude These Subdirectories options, hold the pointer over each ellipsis (...) until a tool tip appears, displaying the complete path of the included or excluded folder. See also “Catalog preferences” on page 383 Indexing Options dialog box Do Not Include Numbers Select this option to exclude all numbers that appear in the document text from the index. Excluding numbers can significantly reduce the size of an index, making searches faster. Add IDs To Adobe PDF v1.0 Files Select this option if your collection includes PDFs created before Acrobat 2.0, which did not automatically add identification numbers. ID numbers are needed when long Mac OS filenames are shortened as they are translated into MS-DOS filenames. Acrobat 2.0 and later versions automatically add identifiers. Do Not Warn For Changed Documents When Searching When this option is not selected, a message appears when you search documents that have changed since the most recent index build. Custom Properties Use this option to include custom document properties in the index; only custom document properties that already exist in the PDFs you index are indexed. Type the property, make a selection from the Type menu, and then click Add. These properties appear as a search option in the Search PDF window's additional criteria pop-up menus when you search the resulting index. For example, if you enter the custom property Document Name and choose the string property from the Type menu, a user searching the index can then search within the custom property by selecting Document Name from the Use These Additional Criteria menu. Note: When you create custom fields in a Microsoft Office application in which the Convert Document Information option is selected in the PDFMaker application, the fields transfer over to any PDFs you create. XMP Fields Use this option to include custom XMP fields. The custom XMP fields are indexed and appear in the additional criteria pop-up menus to be searchable in the selected indexes. Stop Words Use to exclude specific words (500 maximum) from the index search results. Type the word, click Add, and repeat as needed. Excluding words can make the index 10% to 15% smaller. A stop word can contain up to 128 characters and is case sensitive. Certain common words, such as the, and, and to are already excluded from index searching, so it is not necessary to add them yourself. Note: To prevent users from trying to search phrases that contain these words, list words that aren’t indexed in the Catalog Read Me file. Structure Tags Use this option to make specific leaf-element tag nodes searchable in documents that have a tagged logical structure. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 383 User Guide Note: The Custom Properties, Stop Words, and Tags settings apply to the current index only. To apply these settings globally to any index you create, you can change the default settings for custom fields, stop words, and tags in the Catalog panel of the Preferences dialog box. Catalog Readme files It is often a good idea to create a separate Readme file and put it in the folder with the index. This Readme file can give people details about your index, such as: • The kind of documents indexed. • The search options supported. • The person to contact or a phone number to call with questions. • A list of numbers or words that are excluded from the index. • A list of the folders containing documents included in a LAN-based index, or a list of the documents included in a disk-based index. You might also include a brief description of the contents of each folder or document. • A list of the values for each document if you assign Document Info field values. If a catalog has an especially large number of documents, consider including a table that shows the values assigned to each document. The table can be part of your Readme file or a separate document. While you are developing the index, you can use the table to maintain consistency. Revise an index You can update, rebuild, or purge an existing index. 1 Select Advanced > Document Processing > Full Text Index With Catalog, and then click Open Index. 2 Locate and select the index definition file (PDX) for the index, and click Open. 3 If the index was created with Acrobat 5.0 or earlier, select Create Copy to create a new index (without overwriting the earlier version), or select Overwrite Old Index to overwrite the earlier index. 4 In the Index Definition dialog box, make any changes you want, and then click the function you want Acrobat to perform: Build Creates a new IDX file with the existing information, and updates it by adding new entries and marking changed or outdated entries as invalid. If you make a large number of changes, or use this option repeatedly instead of creating a new index, search times may increase. Rebuild Creates a new index, overwriting the existing index folder and its contents (the IDX files). Purge Deletes the index contents (the IDX files) without deleting the index file itself (PDX). Catalog preferences You can set preferences for indexing that apply globally to all subsequent indexes you build. You can override some of these preferences for an individual index by selecting new options during the index-building process. You open catalog preferences by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS) and selecting Catalog under Categories. Many of the options are identical to those described for the index-building process. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 384 User Guide The Force ISO 9660 Compatibility On Folders option is useful when you don’t want to change long PDF filenames to MS-DOS filenames as you prepare documents for indexing. However, you must still use MS-DOS file-naming conventions for the folder names (8 characters or fewer) even though this isn’t necessary for the filenames. Scheduled index updates You can schedule when and how often to automatically build, rebuild, update, and purge an index by using the Catalog feature and a catalog batch PDX file (.bpdx). A BPDX file is a text file that contains a list of platformdependent catalog index file paths and flags. You use a scheduling application, such as Windows Scheduler or Scheduler for Mac OS, to display the BPDX file in Acrobat. Acrobat then re-creates the index according to the flags in the BPDX file. For more detailed information on scheduling an indexing update, search for BPDX on the Support page of the Adobe website. Moving collections and their indexes You can develop and test an indexed document collection on a local hard drive and then move the finished document collection to a network server or disk. An index definition contains relative paths between the index definition file (PDX) and the folders containing the indexed documents. If these relative paths are unchanged, you don’t have to rebuild the index after moving the indexed document collection. If the PDX file and the folders containing the indexed documents are in the same folder, you can maintain the relative path simply by moving that folder. If the relative path changes, you must create a new index after you move the indexed document collection. However, you can still use the original PDX file. To use the original PDX file, first move the indexed documents. Then copy the PDX file to the folder where you want to create the new index, and edit the include and exclude lists of directories and subdirectories, as necessary. If the index resides on a drive or server volume separate from any part of the collection it applies to, moving either the collection or the index breaks the index. If you intend to move a document collection either to another network location or onto a CD, create and build the index in the same location as the collection. 385 Chapter 13: 3D models Create Adobe PDFs from supported 3D and CAD file formats and retain the structure and detail of 3D models in a universally accepted format. Create PDFs from unsupported formats by capturing models in native applications or by opening and saving them in Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit, a separate application that’s included with Acrobat 3D. You can interact with 3D PDFs in a number of ways: rotate, move, and slice a model; isolate and hide individual parts; add comments; and export geometry for reuse in Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) applications. Quickstart Convert a 3D file to PDF Convert any supported 3D file to PDF. (For a list of supported formats, choose Edit > Preferences, and select Convert To PDF on the left.) 1 Click the Create PDF button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose From File. 2 Browse to select the 3D CAD file you want to convert. 3 Select the desired preset or individual settings. See also “Convert 3D files into PDFs” on page 388 Capture a 3D model You can capture a 3D model in its native application, much like you would capture a screen image. 1 Open the 3D model and set the 3D application to use OpenGL. 2 Start Acrobat 3D, and choose File > Create PDF > From 3D Capture. Note: You must restart the 3D application the first time you capture from it. 3 Switch to the 3D application, and press the Print Screen key. 4 Select the desired settings. See also “Capturing 3D models” on page 395 Add a 3D model to a PDF You can embed existing 3D models into a PDF. 1 Open a PDF, and choose Tools > Advanced Editing > 3D Tool. Drag a box where you want to insert the 3D file. 2 Browse to select the 3D file. 3 Browse to select a JavaScript, if desired, specify a poster image option, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 386 User Guide You can also convert a 3D file into a new PDF or insert a model as a new page. See also “Add 3D models to a PDF page” on page 397 Insert a 3D model in an Office file With Acrobat 3D installed, you can insert most types of 3D models in Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files. 1 In the Microsoft application, click the Insert Acrobat 3D Model button on the PDFMaker toolbar. 2 Browse to select the 3D file, and click Open. 3 (Optional) Browse to add a JavaScript to the 3D model. See also “Insert 3D models into Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files” on page 398 “What JavaScripts can do” on page 416 Compress a 3D PDF Save time when you create or open 3D PDFs by applying compression as needed to reduce file size. Compression is lossy and may reduce the overall quality of your rendered 3D model. Note: To apply compression, the PDF must be created using PRC format. 1 Right-click the 3D model and choose Optimize PDF. 2 Specify the type and amount of compression, and click OK. 3 Save the PDF. See also “Convert 3D files into PDFs” on page 388 Interact with a 3D model Interact with models using the 3D toolbar and the Model Tree. 1 Click the 3D model. The 3D toolbar appears. 2 Use the desired 3D tool to manipulate the model. For example, click the Rotate tool and drag across the 3D model to rotate it. 3 Click the Model Tree button . Use the Model Tree to work with parts or views of the model. For example, select a part and then choose Hide from the Options menu. See also “Interacting with 3D models” on page 399 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 387 User Guide . Add comments to a 3D model By adding comments, you create a new view that’s associated with those comments. 1 Select a tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. 2 Click in the 3D model to add a comment and create a new view in the Model Tree. You can add comments to an existing comment view by selecting that view in the Model Tree before you click in the model. See also “Comment on 3D designs” on page 413 Measure a 3D model Use the 3D Measurement tool to measure the distance between two straight edges or two points, the radius of circular edges, or the angle between two edges. 1 Select the 3D model, and then click the 3D Measurement tool 2 Move the pointer over the model to start measuring. For example, click on an edge to measure its length. The 3D Measurement Tool is set to automatically display the most likely measurement, but you can choose a different measurement type. See also “Measure 3D objects” on page 408 View product information for a 3D model You can view Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) in the Model Tree and in the 3D model, if you imported it during PDF conversion. 1 Click the 3D model, and click the Model Tree icon in the 3D toolbar. 2 In the Model Tree, click each view to see the PMI associated with that view. See also “View Product Manufacturing Information (PMI)” on page 406 Export geometry from a 3D model If geometry was retained during conversion, you can export it as IGES, STEP, VRML, or ParaSolid file formats, which most CAE and CAM applications can read. 1 Right-click the 3D model and choose Export Data from the menu. 2 Choose a file type and click Settings to specify options for that file type. See also “Export geometry” on page 414 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 388 User Guide Converting 3D models About supported 3D file formats Acrobat 3D can utilize a variety of file formats, including many types of 3D models. A list of the supported file formats appears in the Preferences dialog box (Edit > Preferences, and select Convert To PDF under Categories). You can bring supported file formats directly into PDFs using the following methods. Converting Uses 3D files to create PDFs that have one or more pages. This method retains the original file structure, including part names and hierarchies. Inserting Brings a 3D file into an existing PDF as a new page. Adding with the 3D tool Places a 3D model on an existing page of a PDF. Converting gives you the most options for representing the 3D model and preserves the original file’s structure. For example, you can reduce the number of polygons, remove small objects and duplicate parts, and decrease the overall file size. Relationships between parts, subparts, and assemblies look the same as in the original 3D file. If a 3D model is in a format that Acrobat 3D doesn’t support, you may be able to open it in Acrobat 3D Toolkit and save it in a supported format, such as U3D or RH. If a 3D model is in a format that Acrobat 3D and Acrobat 3D Toolkit don’t support, and you have access to the original application that created the 3D model, you can open the file in that application and capture it. Capturing does not preserve the file structure of 3D models but lists all parts under a single assembly. Convert 3D files into PDFs You can convert 3D and CAD files in supported formats to PDFs that have one or more pages. The default preset works best for most types of conversion; however, you can change these settings or select a different preset during conversion. (To view 3D conversion settings before you convert a file, choose Edit > Preferences, select Convert To PDF on the left, select a file format, and click Settings.) 3D files are converted as either PRC or U3D data streams and then stored in the resulting PDF file. The file format of the 3D file determines whether PRC or U3D settings (or both) are available in the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, and it determines which entities you can import to the PDF. If your Windows computer uses an integrated video card, upgrade your video card driver to help ensure that the 3D content renders correctly. You can get the latest driver from the video card or computer manufacturer. See also “About PRC and U3D conversion formats” on page 390 “Customize a conversion preset for a 3D file type” on page 394 Convert 3D files 1 Select the 3D CAD files you want to convert: • To create a single-page document, choose File > Create PDF > From File. Select the 3D file, and click Open. • To create a multipage document in which each 3D file is on a separate page, choose File > Create PDF > From Multiple Files. Click the Add Files button to select the 3D files, click Next, review the files, and then click Create. 2 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, select the preset or individual settings you want to use, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 389 User Guide From the desktop, you can drag a 3D file into Acrobat 3D (or onto the application icon) to create a new single-page PDF file. Or, you can right-click the 3D file and choose Convert To Adobe PDF (for a single file), Convert To Adobe PDF And Email, or Combine Supported Files In Acrobat (for the selected file plus additional files that you select in the dialog box that appears). Convert a 3D file using PRC settings Use PRC settings to create a PDF that contains Product Manufacturing Information (PMI), polygon settings or tessellation, and geometry or b-rep (boundary representation). After you create the PDF, you can export geometry to standard file formats that most CAM applications read. 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From File, select the 3D CAD file, and click Open. 2 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, click the Import tab. 3 To import Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) with the 3D model, select 3D PMI (Text, Notes, GD&T). You can import PMI from CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX (Unigraphics), and Pro/ENGINEER files. 4 To replace the fonts used in PMI, click Fonts, select Always Substitute, specify the font, and click OK. If you select Always Substitute, you remove any reference in the PDF to the font used for PMI. If you leave Always Substitute unselected, Acrobat 3D substitutes any missing fonts; if the original fonts become available, they are used to display PMI. 5 Choose a PRC setting from the Format menu: PRC B-rep (Solid) Retains only the 3D model’s geometry information. This option produces the smallest files, but polygons must be regenerated each time the file is opened. See “Exporting geometry from 3D models” on page 414. PRC B-rep + Tessellation Retains the 3D model’s geometry and any saved polygon settings. If the 3D model doesn’t include polygon settings, they’re generated from the geometry during conversion. PRC Tessellation (Faceted) Retains the 3D model’s polygon settings or generates new polygons based on the geometry. 6 (Optional) To apply compression, click the Optimize tab, and select a PRC compression option. If you plan to export geometry, leave Compress B-rep unselected, or set the value to 0.001 millimeter. Compressed PDFs are smaller but take longer to open than uncompressed PDFs. To save time, compress only when you have to—after PDF conversion: Right-click the 3D model, and choose Optimize PDF. This option is available only in PDFs that were converted using PRC settings. Note: When you secure a 3D PDF that contains geometry, avoid settings that restrict editing and printing the PDF— unless you want to disable the option to export geometry. Convert a 3D file using U3D settings 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From File, select the 3D CAD file, and click Open. 2 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, click the Import tab, and choose a U3D conversion setting from the 3D Format In PDF menu: U3D ECMA 3 Ensures compatibility with Acrobat 8.1 and later and Adobe Reader 8.1 and later. U3D ECMA 1 (Reader 7.0 Compatible) Ensures compatibility with Acrobat 7.0 and later and Reader 7.0 and later. 3 (Optional) To apply compression, click the Optimize tab, and specify mesh and texture settings. 4 Specify options on the Enhance and Transform tabs, and click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 390 User Guide About PRC and U3D conversion formats When you create a PDF from a supported 3D file, the PDF stores 3D data as either PRC or U3D (Universal 3D) format, depending on the settings you choose. Whether PRC or U3D settings are available in the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box depends on which 3D application created the file you’re converting. PRC is a 3D format that lets you create different representations of a 3D model. For example, you can save only a visual representation that consists of polygons, or you can save the geometry that the model is based on. You can apply compression during conversion to decrease file size, or afterward in Acrobat 3D. By using PRC, you can create PDFs that are interoperable with Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) and Computer Aided Engineering (CAE) applications. For a complete list of the file formats for which PRC settings are available, see http://www.adobe.com/go/kb401105. U3D is an open standard format adopted by ECMA International used primarily for visualization and publishing purposes. U3D settings are available for most CAD files created in digital content creation applications. These settings are also available for most CAD files created in mechanical engineering applications. Benefits of PRC format • Allows storage of large CAD files in PDFs that are a fraction of the original size. • Supports post-conversion compression by Acrobat 3D. • Can represent Product Manufacturing Information (PMI), also referred to as Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) or Functional Tolerancing and Annotation (FT&A). • Can retain geometry for reuse in CAD, CAM, and CAE applications. Benefits of U3D format • Supports animations. • Editable in Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit. Acrobat 3D conversion settings In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, you can specify settings for converting 3D models for PDFs on various tabs, or you can choose a preset from the menu. Note: Whether or not the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box appears during the 3D conversion or insertion process depends on the selection status of the Don’t Display Dialog During Conversion option at the bottom of this dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 391 User Guide PRC format settings in Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box 3D conversion presets Default Provides optimum settings for the selected file format by balancing quality with PDF file size. Custom Indicates that you’ve selected one or more individual settings. Click the plus sign (+) to save your selections as a custom preset. Visualization/Small File Produces the smallest file size possible by applying compression, which may reduce image quality. Visualization/High Quality Produces detailed, high-quality PDFs, but may increase file size. Collaboration Produces high-quality, uncompressed PDFs. Publishing Produces high-quality, compressed PDFs. Data Exchange Preserves the exact geometry (or geometry compressed at 0.001 millimeter) for reuse with CAE and CAM applications. U3D ECMA Standard Ed 3 Specifies U3D 3rd Edition format and 99% compression. U3D ECMA Standard Ed 1 Specifies U3D 0.0 format and no compression. Large Files Specifies settings to use for converting large assemblies. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 392 User Guide General tab These settings determine how the imported 3D model is presented in Acrobat 3D. Unlike the settings on the other tabs, General settings don’t affect the imported file itself. Default Background Color Specifies the background color that appears behind the 3D model. You can change the background color at any time by choosing an option from the Background Color menu on the 3D toolbar. Default Lighting Changes the default lighting when you select this setting and choose a different lighting style, such as No Lights, Day Lights, or Blue Lights. You can change the lighting at any time by choosing an option from the Lighting menu on the 3D toolbar. For best performance when manipulating 3D models, select the Headlamp option. Default Rendering Style Changes the default rendering style if you select this setting and choose a different rendering style, such as Wireframe or Solid Outline. You can change the rendering style at any time by choosing an option from the Model Render Mode menu on the 3D toolbar. Default Animation Style Sets animation. Add Default Views Adds default views if you select this setting and choose a view style. An orthographic projection effectively removes a dimension, preserving the size ratio between objects but giving the 3D model a less realistic appearance. Orthographic projection is especially useful for viewing certain diagrams, such as 3D mathematical functions plotted on a graph. A perspective projection offers a more realistic scene in which objects in the distance appear smaller than objects of the same size in the foreground. Open Model Tree By Default Causes the Model Tree to appear when the 3D PDF file is opened. Default Script Specifies the JavaScript file that runs if a 3D model is enabled. If the 3D model you’re importing doesn’t include embedded JavaScript, click Browse and specify the JavaScript file you want to run. Preview Image The two-dimensional preview image or poster appears in the 3D model area when the 3D model isn’t activated. You can leave the preview area blank, use the default view of the 3D model, or select and use any JPEG, BMP, PNG, or GIF image. Import tab Options include elements that can be imported with the 3D CAD model and the file format you want to use to convert 3D data. (See “About PRC and U3D conversion formats” on page 390.) Note: In some cases, such as for 3DS file conversions, no import options are available. Format Specific Data To Import Specify the elements that you want to import with the 3D CAD model. Available options are determined by the file format of your 3D model and may include views, hidden objects, wireframe or surface representations, and PMI, among others. 3D Format In PDF Choose between U3D and PRC conversion formats in the Format menu. The file format of your 3D model determines which settings are available. Level Of Detail Specify the accuracy and number of polygons that are created from the geometry and used to display the 3D model. Higher settings produce more accurate results. Optimize tab Adjust the Optimize settings to compress the 3D model and change the balance between 3D quality and file size. The selected format on the Import tab (PRC or U3D) determines the available settings. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 393 User Guide PRC Compress B-rep To The amount (in millimeters) of lossy compression applied to geometry. For best results when exporting geometry, set the amount to 0.001 or leave this option unselected. You can compress the geometry after you convert the 3D file to PDF by right-clicking the 3D model and choosing Optimize PDF. Compress Tessellation Applies lossy compression to polygons. U3D Mesh Quality Controls the quality relative to the percentage of lossy compression applied to the image files. Higher percentages indicate less compression and better image quality. A setting of 100% applies no compression. Texture Quality Specifies the quality for textures. Lower values reduce file size. Reduce Polygon Count To Removes triangles from the model. In 3D objects, parts consist of interconnected polygons. The more polygons, the better the detail and the greater the file size. Remove Parts Smaller Than Eliminates parts that are smaller than the specified percentage of the entire 3D model. Use this option when a reduced file size is more important than visual quality. Collapse Hierarchy To Specifies the number of nested levels. A 3D model can be divided into parts, and those parts can be divided into parts, and so on. Collapsing the hierarchy to a certain number of levels flattens all the parts below the specified level and may reduce file size and complexity. Remove Duplicate Parts Deletes duplicate geometric structures, such as those that overlap. Remove Duplicate And Unused Materials Strips out materials that either have duplicate versions or haven’t been applied to any geometry in the 3D model, including embedded textures associated with those materials. Remove Normals Removes any smoothing normal information. Surface normals are used to store information about the contour of a mesh’s surface. Enhance tab The Enhance settings determine animation options and part colors. These settings are available for U3D format only. Remove Animation Removes the animation associated with the 3D model from the conversion. Create Exploding Parts Animation Sets the number of stages the model should be broken up into. Each resultant stage lasts a second in duration. Export Animation Controls the animation by removing redundant animation keyframe data, reversing the animation sequence, or rescaling the animation to a different length. If you want to rescale the animation, specify the absolute time in seconds or a percentage to determine the length of the animation sequence. Assign Random Colors To Parts Randomly colors each discrete part of a 3D model, emphasizing the individual parts. Transform tab The Transform options specify the position, scale, orientation, and units of the 3D model. Set Custom Scale Embeds a value in the model output describing the proportion between length units (such as inches or centimeters) and the displayed model units. Scale By Changes the scale of the imported 3D file. For example, replacing 1 with 2 for the X, Y, and Z boxes doubles the size of the 3D model. Fit To Changes the scale of the object to conform to the dimensions you specify. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 394 User Guide Rotate Specifies the angle of rotation for each axis. Translate Alters the position of the model in three-dimensional space, relative to the origin. Center Model At Origin Translates the entire model so that the center of its bounding box is at the origin [0,0,0] of the XYZ coordinate system. Customize a conversion preset for a 3D file type You can create your own conversion presets for different types of 3D files, making it easy to reapply all the individual options you use most often for a specific type of 3D file. Presets are tied to the 3D format. For example, if you create a preset for Catia 5 files, that preset appears only when converting Catia 5 files. You can create multiple presets for each 3D format. When you convert or capture a 3D file, the most recently used preset for that file type is selected. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences, and choose Convert To PDF under Categories. 2 In the central panel of the Preferences, select the 3D file format to which the custom preset will apply, and then click Edit Settings. Note: If you select a non-3D file type, the Edit Settings button may not be available or it may open a different dialog box. 3 Using the five tabs in the dialog box, specify the settings you want to include in the preset. 4 Above the tabs, in Description, type something that will help you to recognize the preset, such as its intended purpose or parameters. 5 Click the Add Preset icon . . 6 Type a name for the preset, and click OK. 7 Click OK to close the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, and, if necessary, click OK to close the Preferences dialog box. Note: You can delete a custom preset by reopening the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, selecting the preset from the menu, and then clicking the Delete Preset button Convert large assemblies Converting large assemblies to PDF can be both time-consuming and memory-intensive. For best results, create a tessellated representation of the assembly using PRC conversion settings. If the CAD file includes saved tessellation entities, Acrobat 3D uses these instead of creating a new one. Note: For you to complete this task, PRC settings must be available in the Format menu of the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box. 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From File, and select the 3D file or part. 2 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, click the Import tab. 3 Click Assembly to select the appropriate file path for part files, and click OK. 4 From the Format menu, choose PRC Tessellation (Faceted). 5 From the Level Of Detail menu, select Medium. Select any other options, and then click OK. There is a Large Files conversion preset for large assemblies on the pop-up menu in the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 395 User Guide Convert 2D CAD drawings If a CAD file includes 2D drawings, you can convert them to PDF by using Acrobat Distiller. By using the Print command with the Adobe PDF printer from your application, you can convert the file to PDF in Distiller without manually starting Distiller. Rather than sending a separate 2D drawing to communicate specifications, include Product Manufacturing Infor­ mation (PMI) with your 3D CAD file: In the Acrobat 3D Conversion Settings diaolog box, select 3D PMI (Text, Notes, GD&T) on the Import tab. See also “Create PDFs by printing to file” on page 70 Capturing 3D models Preparing for 3D capture When using Acrobat 3D to capture 3D models from CAD applications, refer to these guidelines to achieve the best possible results: • Make sure that the 3D CAD application is set to use OpenGL. Note that some 3D applications don’t support OpenGL. Most applications support more than one rendering method, but capture works only with OpenGL. • Prepare the 3D model for capture by removing unwanted parts and adding lighting or other effects. Remove any artifacts, such as compasses, product trees, or XYZ coordinates from the 3D model. In some cases, these artifacts are captured. In addition, disable backface culling and use a plain background. • When capturing 3D models in Microsoft Windows, Acrobat 3D creates a preset with the correct settings for tested applications (applications tested by Adobe). When capturing from untested applications, you may need to change OpenGL capture settings. These settings are on the OpenGL tab of the 3D Capture Settings dialog box that appears when you choose Create PDF > From 3D Capture and click Settings. • Similarly, when capturing on a UNIX platform, you may need to change OpenGL capture settings. These settings appear in the Acrobat 3D Capture Utility when you choose Tools > Options and click Edit Settings. For more information about changing settings in 3D CAD applications to get the best capture results, see http://www.adobe.com/go/kb401310. Capture a 3D model in a PDF 1 Open the 3D model in the original application in which the 3D model was created, or in another application. 2 In Acrobat 3D, choose File > Create PDF > From 3D Capture. Note: The first time you capture from a particular CAD application, you must restart the CAD application before you can capture. 3 (Optional) Click the Settings button, click the OpenGL tab, and set the capture units to match the 3D model. Edit other 3D capture settings as necessary, and then click OK. 4 Click the window containing the 3D model to make it active, and then press the Print Screen key. 5 Switch to Acrobat 3D, edit the capture settings in the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box as needed, and then click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 396 User Guide After the initial capture with a CAD application, you can simply start Acrobat 3D, open the 3D file in the CAD application, and press the Print Screen key to capture. 3D capture settings You can change capture settings when capturing a 3D model from a CAD application or when editing capture settings in the Preferences dialog box. The General panel lets you adjust the geometry settings of captured 3D models. The OpenGL panel lets you adjust the settings for unknown or untested 3D applications. OpenGL is a cross-language platform for creating 3D models. Applications can use OpenGL in different ways. Acrobat recognizes how most applications use OpenGL, but for unknown applications, the OpenGL panel lets you change settings to improve the capture. General panel Discard Stray Points And Lines Deletes any orphaned lines and vertices that cannot be meaningfully incorporated into the 3D model. Removes boxes around notations used for geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T). This option may remove points and lines from the 3D model itself. For example, in Revit models, wall textures are drawn using lines and points above the polygons. Discard Textures Removes all textures from the materials in the captured model. Selecting this option can greatly reduce the file size. Group Geometry By Material Combines mesh pieces that have the same color and material. Discard Surface Normals Recomputes the normal data based on the angle between adjacent faces. Surface normals are used for constructing smooth surfaces. Selecting this option reduces the file size and may change the appearance of the 3D model. Toggle Y And Z Axis Allows conversion between y-up and z-up coordinate frames if the native coordinate systems for the model are represented differently than in Acrobat. Create U3D Tesselation Ensures that the screen capture can be opened and viewed in Acrobat 7.0 and Reader 7.0. OpenGL panel Frame Buffer Mode Indicates which OpenGL event—Toggle On Swap, Toggle On Clear, or Toggle On Flush— triggers the beginning and end of a capture frame. If a capture yields undesired results, try different buffer modes to see if the capture quality improves. View Transform Mode Specifies the transformation (First Matrix, Last Matrix, or No Matrix) to represent the camera transform. Use this option if the measurements in Acrobat are incorrect or if the top, left, and front views in Acrobat don’t match these views in the CAD application. Capture Units Specifies the units of measure to be used when using the Distance tool to measure the 3D model. Change 3D Capture preferences After you capture a 3D model, the default settings for the captured file type appear in the 3D Capture Preferences dialog box. You can then edit these settings for future captures of this file type. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences, and then click 3D Capture under Categories. 2 Select Enable Global 3D Capture to allow capture of 3D models from other applications. 3 Select the 3D capture settings for the 3D CAD application you want to edit, and then click Edit Settings. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 397 User Guide 4 Specify settings for the selected file type, and then click OK. Note: You may need to restart the 3D application for your changes to take effect. Acrobat 3D Capture utility on UNIX The capture utility for UNIX lets you capture 3D models on a UNIX system. The capture utility includes a subset of the 3D viewing capabilities that are available in Acrobat 3D for Windows. For information on capturing 3D models with the UNIX capture utility, see the Acrobat 3D UNIX ReadMe file on the application CD. See also “Capture a 3D model in a PDF” on page 395 Adding 3D models to PDFs Create new pages from 3D models You can use 3D models in supported file formats as the basis of new PDFs, or you can bring them directly into existing PDFs. For many supported formats, you can do any of these in Acrobat 3D. Insert a 3D model as a new page 1 Open a PDF, and choose Document > Insert Pages. 2 In the Select File To Insert dialog box, specify the file type from the Files Of Type menu, select the supported 3D file you want to open, and then click Select. 3 Indicate where the inserted page will appear in the existing document, and click OK. 4 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, select the preset or individual settings that you want to use, and then click OK. Insert a 3D model to replace a page 1 Open a PDF, and choose Document > Replace Pages. 2 In the Select File With New Pages dialog box, choose the file type from the Files Of Type menu, select the supported 3D file you want to open, and then click Select. 3 In the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box, select the preset or individual settings that you want to use and specify the page that you want to replace. Then click OK. Add 3D models to a PDF page You can use the 3D tool to place a 3D file on a page of a PDF. During this process, you can select lighting, navigation, and display settings (like those found on the 3D toolbar), and change conversion settings. After you place a 3D file, you can adjust the area or canvas in which the 3D model appears, edit the presentation properties for the 3D toolbar and content, and create additional views. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 398 User Guide See also “3D toolbar overview” on page 400 “Acrobat 3D conversion settings” on page 390 Add a 3D model to a page 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > 3D Tool. 2 Drag a rectangle on the page to define the canvas area for the 3D file. 3 Under 3D Model, click Browse to select the 3D file, and click Open. 4 In the Add 3D Content dialog box, set any Navigation And Display or Preview Image options that you want to change, and then click OK. 5 If the Acrobat 3D Conversion dialog box appears, specify the appropriate settings, and click OK. Move, delete, or resize the 3D canvas 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Select Object Tool . Note: Be careful not to confuse the Select Object tool with the basic Select tool. You must use the Select Object tool to adjust a 3D canvas. 2 Select the 3D canvas and make any changes you want to apply: • To move the canvas, drag it to a new location on the page. • To delete the canvas (and the 3D model), select it and press Delete. • To resize the canvas, drag the frame corners. The 3D content stays proportional within the adjusted frame. Inserting 3D models in Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files Insert 3D models into Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files When you install Acrobat 3D, an additional icon appears in the PDFMaker toolbar (Office 2003) or Acrobat ribbon (Office 2007) in Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft PowerPoint. This icon lets you insert a preview of the 3D file in the application’s document, slide show, or spreadsheet. To get the full 3D effect, create a PDF from the original file. Note: If the Enable Accessibility And Reflow With Tagged PDF option is deselected, PDFMaker does not add the 3D model to the PDF. For Office 2007 applications, choose Acrobat Preferences, and then make sure that this option is selected. For other Office applications, choose Adobe PDF > Conversion Settings to select this option. 1 In the Microsoft application, select the position where you want the 3D image to appear on the document page. 2 Click the Insert Acrobat 3D Model button on the PDFMaker toolbar (Office 2003) or the Embed 3D button on the Acrobat ribbon (Office 2003). 3 In the dialog box that appears, click the Browse For Model button to the right of 3D Model; then locate the 3D file that you want to include, and click Open. Note: (Word 2007) Make sure that Fully Functional PDF is selected . 4 To include a JavaScript with the 3D file, click the button to the right of Script, locate the file, and then click Open. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 399 User Guide 5 Click OK to add the 3D object. Alter or manipulate 3D models (Word and Excel) In Microsoft Office applications, you can adjust the placement, background color, and other properties of inserted 3D models. 1 Select the Exit Design Mode button on the Control Toolbox (Office 2003) or the Developer tab (Office 2007). 2 To rotate the 3D model object, drag within the 3D model area. 3 Right-click the 3D model and do any of the following: Note: To switch 3D navigation tools from within a PowerPoint document, you must be in Slide Show mode: Choose View > Slide Show, and then right-click the embedded 3D model to access the navigation commands and other view options. • To zoom or move the 3D object within the 3D model area, choose Pan, Zoom, or Navigate, and then drag. • To change the background color, choose Background Color. Then select the color you want in the color picker that appears, and click OK. • To show the 3D object as a black silhouette, choose Additional Lighting (to remove the check mark). • To replace the 3D model with a different one, choose Load Model. Browse to select the replacement 3D model, and click Open. • To add or change a script for the 3D model, choose Load Script. Browse to select a script, and click Open. • To add or change a custom poster for the 3D model, choose Load Custom Poster. Browse to select a poster, and click Open. Note: If you convert the Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file to PDF, PDFMaker uses the default view for the 3D model. You can convert the file with a different view by resetting the default view. Set the default view of a 3D model (Word and Excel) ? Right-click the 3D model and do one of the following: • To revert to the default view after manipulating the 3D object, choose Go To Default View. • To set the current view (including zoom level, orientation, position, background color, and lighting) as the default view, choose Set Default View. Note: From within a PowerPoint document, reset the default view by choosing View > Slide Show, and choosing either Set Default View or Go To Default View. Interacting with 3D models Displaying 3D models In Acrobat, you can view and interact with high-quality 3D content created in professional 3D CAD or 3D modeling programs and embedded in PDFs. For example, you can selectively hide and show parts of a 3D model, remove a cover to look inside, and turn parts around as if holding them in your hands. 3D content may initially appear as a two-dimensional preview image. Clicking the 3D model with the Hand or Select tool enables (or activates) the model, opens the 3D toolbar, and plays any animation. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 400 User Guide A Selected 3D object A. Model Tree B. 3D toolbar C. 3D object 3D toolbar overview B C The 3D toolbar appears after you click the 3D model with the Hand tool, which also enables the 3D model and plays any animations associated with it. The 3D toolbar always appears in the area above the upper left corner of the 3D model and cannot be moved. A small blue triangle appears immediately below the 3D toolbar, which you can click to hide and show the toolbar. Note: You can disable or enable the blue triangle toggle by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Prefer­ ences (Mac OS), selecting 3D under Categories, and then clicking the Enable Toggle For 3D Toolbar Control option. You can use the 3D toolbar to zoom in and out, rotate, and pan across the object. Use the Model Tree to hide or isolate parts, or make parts transparent. You manipulate a 3D model by selecting and dragging various 3D navigation tools. When you navigate in 3D, it may help to think of it as viewing the stationary 3D model from a camera’s perspective. You can rotate, pan (move up, down, or side-to-side), and zoom in or out. Note: You can hide the toolbar by right-clicking/Control-clicking the 3D model and choosing Hide Toolbar. To show the toolbar, choose Show Toolbar from the same context menu. 3D navigation tools Rotate Turns 3D objects around relative to the screen. How the objects move depends on the starting view, where you start dragging, and the direction you drag, such as in a straight line or in curves, circles, or loops. Note: You can also use the Hand tool to rotate an object if Enable 3D Selection For The Hand Tool is selected in the 3D panel of the Preferences dialog box. Spin Turns a 3D model in parallel to two fixed axes in the 3D model, the x-axis and the z-axis. Pan Moves the model vertically and horizontally only. You can also pan with the Hand tool: Ctrl­ drag/Command-drag. Zoom Moves you toward, or away from, objects in the scene when you drag vertically. You can also zoom with the Hand tool by holding down Shift as you drag. Walk Pivots horizontally around the scene when you drag horizontally; moves forward or backward in the scene when you drag vertically; maintains a constant elevation level, regardless of how you drag.The Walk tool is especially useful for architectural 3D models. To change the walking speed, change the default display units in the Preferences (3D). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 401 User Guide Note: The Walk tool is available when you select the Preferences setting that consolidates tools or when you right-click /Control-click the 3D model and choose Tools > Walk. 3D Measurement Tool Measures part sizes and distances in the 3D model. (Windows) Use the right mouse button to change the way several of the 3D navigation tools work. For the Rotate and Spin tools, right-click dragging temporarily shifts to the Zoom tool. For the Zoom tool, it makes the tool function like a Marquee Zoom tool, zooming to the area that you define when you drag. For the Walk tool, right-click dragging makes the tool function as the Pan tool. (Mac OS) If you have a one-button mouse, you can Control-drag or Optiondrag to make the Rotate and Spin tools temporarily act as the Pan tool. 3D toolbar view controls Default View Returns to a preset zoom, pan, rotation, and projection mode of the 3D model. You can use the Options menu in the View pane of the Model Tree or the Manage Views command on the 3D toolbar Views menu to set a different view as the default. If an object ever moves out of your view, you have, in essence, turned your camera completely away from the object. Click the Default View icon on the 3D toolbar to move the object back into view. Views menu Lists any views defined for the current 3D model. Toggle Model Tree Opens and hides the Model Tree. Play/Pause Animation Plays or pauses any JavaScript-enabled animation. The Play/Pause Animation pop-up menu opens a slider that you can drag back and forth to move to different times in the animation sequence. Projection Toggles between using perspective and orthographic projection of the 3D object. Model Render Mode menu Determines how the 3D shape appears. For an illustrated guide, see “Examples of model rendering modes” on page 401. Enable Extra Lighting menu Lists the different lighting effects, in which the number, color, orientation, and brightness of the lights, the reflectivity of the surface, and other factors affect the illumination of the 3D object. Experiment to get the visual effects you want. Background Color swatch Opens the color picker, which you can use to select a different color for the space surrounding the 3D object. Toggle Cross Section Shows and hides cross sections of the object. Click the pop-up button to open the Cross Section Properties dialog box. For more information, see “Create cross sections” on page 407. Examples of model rendering modes The model rendering modes include combinations of factors that affect the appearance of the 3D object. The illus­ tration below shows a simple object rendered in each of the available modes. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 402 User Guide A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O Model rendering modes A. Solid B. Transparent Bounding Box C. Transparent D. Solid Wireframe E. Illustration F. Solid Outline G. Shaded Illustration H. Bounding Box I. Transparent Bounding Box Outline J. Wireframe K. Shaded Wireframe L. Transparent Wireframe M. Hidden Wireframe N. Ver t ices O. Shaded Vertices Editing 3D models Use a 3D authoring application to make changes to your 3D source images. Acrobat 3D Toolkit can edit most 3D models in native file formats and in PDFs. This method can be useful if you want to change or remove entities from a 3D model but don’t have the source application installed. When you have a PDF open in Acrobat 3D, you can right-click an embedded 3D model and choose Edit In 3D Toolkit to open that model for editing. Note: The Edit In 3D Toolkit option is available only in 3D models that were converted to PDF using U3D settings. To edit a PRC-formatted 3D model, open it in the 3D authoring application that was used to create it. For information on how to edit 3D models, open Acrobat 3D Toolkit and choose Help > Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit Help. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 403 User Guide About Acrobat 3D Toolkit When you need to create or edit 3D files, you can use Acrobat 3D Toolkit, a separate application that is installed by default at the same time you install Acrobat 3D. You can use Acrobat 3D Toolkit to convert a wide number of file formats, add animation, change lighting and other effects, and manipulate a 3D model in other ways. • To edit a 3D model in an open PDF, right-click the 3D model and choose Edit In 3D Toolkit. • To create a new 3D model, open Acrobat 3D Toolkit by choosing Start > Programs > Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit. For more information about creating and editing 3D models, see Acrobat 3D Toolkit Help, which is separate from Acrobat 3D Help and can be opened from within Acrobat 3D Toolkit by choosing Help > Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit Help. Change rendering mode, lighting, projection, and background The model rendering mode determines the surface appearance of the 3D model. The default rendering mode is usually solid, but you can also choose another rendering mode. You can also change the lighting of the 3D model as well as the background. A B C D Changing the appearance of the 3D model A. Default appearance B. Wireframe rendering mode C. Colored lighting D. Different background color ? Use items on the 3D toolbar to make any of these changes: • To change the rendering mode, choose an option from the Model Render Mode pop-up menu . • To view an orthographic projection, click the Use Orthographic Projection button . An orthographic projection effectively removes a dimension, preserving the size ratio between objects but giving the 3D model a less realistic appearance. Click the button again to use perspective projection. • To turn lighting on or off or to change lighting, choose an option from the Enable Extra Lighting pop-up menu . • To change the background color, click the arrow next to the Background Color swatch and choose a color. Note: Model rendering modes, lighting schemes, and background color options are also available by rightclicking/Control-clicking the 3D model. Model rendering modes also appear under the Options menu on the Model Tree. See also “Examples of model rendering modes” on page 401 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 404 User Guide Model Tree overview The Model Tree appears in the navigation pane on the left side of the work area. You can also open the Model Tree by clicking the Toggle Model Tree button on the 3D toolbar, or by right-clicking/Control-clicking the 3D model and choosing Show Model Tree. The Model Tree has three panes, each of which displays a specific type of information or controls. Structure pane The topmost pane shows the tree structure of the 3D object. For example, a 3D object depicting a car may have separate groups of objects (called nodes) for the chassis, engine, and wheels. In this pane, you can move through the hierarchy and select, isolate, or hide various parts. Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) appears as a group of items on the same hierarchical level as its related object or assembly. View pane The middle pane lists the defined views, which you can add to and edit. For example, after you isolate and rotate a part, you can save that particular view. After making other transformations, you can simply click the view you created to return the 3D model to the view that you saved earlier. See “Set 3D views” on page 410. Object Data pane The lower pane displays other information, including properties and metadata, if any, about the object or part. You cannot edit this information for 3D objects in Acrobat. A B C Model Tree A. 3D object’s hierarchy B. Saved views C. Part or object information Note: You can change the default behavior for the Model Tree by choosing Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS), selecting 3D under Categories, and then choosing an option from the Open Model Tree On 3D Activation menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 405 User Guide In some instances, the author of the PDF can set up a 3D model in the conversion settings so that clicking it automat­ ically displays the Model Tree. Hide, isolate, and change the appearance of parts Some 3D models are composed of individual parts. You can use the Model Tree to hide or isolate parts, zoom in to parts, or make parts transparent. Parts that show in the 3D model appear in the tree with a check mark next to them. A B C D Manipulating parts A. Selected part B. Hidden part C. Isolated part D. Transparent par t 1 In the 3D model, use the Hand tool to click the part you want to manipulate. If a preference setting prevents you from using the Hand tool, use the Object Data tool (Tools > Object Data > Object Data Tool) to select parts. Or, select the part in the Model Tree list. 2 From the Options menu in the top pane of the Model Tree, choose any of the following: Note: The items that appear on the Options menu and the order in which they are listed depend on whether the selected 3D model is composed of just one part or multiple parts. Many of these options are also available by rightclicking/Control-clicking a part in the 3D model. Model Render Mode Changes the surface appearance of the entire 3D model according to the item you choose from the submenu: Transparent Bounding Box, Solid, Transparent, Solid Wireframe, and so on. Show All Parts Displays the entire 3D model. Fit Visible Displays all visible parts and centers them in the view. Display Bounding Box Displays the box that encloses the 3D object or selected parts of the model. Set Bounding Box Color Changes the color of the bounding box. Choose this option, select a color, and then click OK. Hide Displays the model without showing the selected parts. You can also select and deselect check boxes in the top pane of the Model Tree to hide and show different parts. Isolate Displays only the selected part, hiding all others. Zoom To Part Changes the center focus from the entire 3D model to the selected parts. This setting is especially useful for rotating a part, allowing the rotation to occur around the part’s center focus rather than that of the entire model. Transparent Displays a see-through version of the selected part. Export As XML Creates a separate XML file of either Whole Tree or Current Node of the 3D model. Note:If the 3D model was created to include Product Manufacturing Information (PMI), options for showing and hiding the PMI may be available on this menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 406 User Guide View Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) If Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) from the original CAD file was imported during PDF conversion, you can view this information in the 3D model. PMI is a note, or series of notes, that are added to a CAD drawing to communicate manufacturing or inspection requirements and other data for a part or feature. CAD applications may also refer to this information as Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) or Functional Tolerancing and Annotation (FT&A). Designers typically add PMI to one of the six standard views (top, bottom, right, left, back, or front) in the CAD application or create unique views for this information. You can view PMI in the 3D model by selecting these views. Import Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) to view it in the PDF. 1 Click the 3D model to activate it, and then click the Model Tree icon in the 3D toolbar. 2 In the Structure panel (top) of the Model Tree, click the plus sign (+) for 3D PMI. 3 To view PMI, do one of the following: • Select a view associated with PMI (if one is available) in the View panel (middle) of the Model Tree. Only the PMI in the selected view is visible in the 3D model. • Right-click a part and choose Part Options > Isolate to see the PMI for the selected part. Note: PMI text may not appear correctly if it uses a non-Roman font that isn’t currently installed. See also “Acrobat 3D conversion settings” on page 390 “Model Tree overview” on page 404 “Convert 2D CAD drawings” on page 395 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 407 User Guide Create cross sections Displaying a cross section of a 3D model is like cutting it in half and looking inside. Use the Cross Section Controls dialog box to adjust the alignment, offset, and tilt of the cutting plane. Before and after cross section 1 Click the Toggle Cross Section icon on the 3D toolbar to turn on or off the cross section. 2 (Optional) Click the arrow next to the Toggle Cross Section icon, and choose Cross Section Properties, which opens the Cross Section Controls dialog box. Then do any of the following: • Change settings under Alignment, Display Settings, and Position And Orientation. • Click the Save Section View button to save the current cross-sectional view. (The saved view will appear on the Views menu in the 3D toolbar and in the View pane of the Model Tree with a default name, SectionView[n].) Cross Section Controls options Changes you make here are applied immediately. To see these changes, make sure that the Cross Section Controls window does not block your view of the active 3D model. The Cross Section Controls window remains on top if you focus or interact with the underlying PDF. To close it, click the Close button in the upper right corner. Enable Cross Section When selected, makes the other options available. Alignment Determines the axis (x, y, or z) to which the cross section aligns. Align To Face Cuts the cross section on a plane defined by the surface of any face that you then click in the 3D model. Align To 3 Points Cuts the cross section on a plane defined by any three points that you click on the 3D model. Show Intersections Indicates where the cutting plane slices the 3D model by adding a colored outline. Click the color swatch if you want to select a different color. Show Cutting Plane Displays the two-dimensional field that cuts the 3D model. Click the color swatch if you want to select a different color, and enter a different percentage if you want to change the opacity of the plane. Align Camera With Cutting Plane Rotates the 3D model so that it’s level with the cross section’s cutting plane. Offset Determines how much of the 3D model is sliced. Drag the slider left or right, or change the percentage. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 408 User Guide To understand how each axis divides the 3D model, select an axis and then drag the Offset slider back and forth and observe the changes in the embedded 3D model. Flip Reverses the cross section. For example, if the top half of the model is cut off in the cross section, clicking Flip displays the top half and cuts off the bottom half. Tilt sliders Determine the angles between the cutting plane and the axes. Drag the sliders left or right, or change the percentages. Save Section View Adds the current cross-sectional view to the lists in the 3D toolbar and Model Tree, where you can select it to return the model to this view. The saved view is given a default name, SectionView[n]. Measure 3D objects Use the 3D Measurement Tool to measure 3D models. You can create measurements between combinations of points or edges of the 3D model. As you move the pointer over the 3D model, specific points and edges are highlighted. The 3D Measurement Tool supports four types of measurements: perpendicular distance between two straight edges, linear distance between two points, the radius of circular edges, and the angle between two edges (or three points). You can also display comments while taking measurements. However, these comments (also called measurement markups) are not preserved after the document is closed. 3D measurement display 1 Click a 3D model in a PDF to enable it. 2 Click the 3D Measurement Tool icon on the 3D toolbar. (If the 3D toolbar view is set for consolidated tools, the 3D Measurement tool is available on the pop-up menu under the Rotate, Spin, Pan, Zoom, or Walk tool.) 3 Select the options you want in the Snap Enables, Measurement Types, and Units And Markup Settings areas of the 3D Measurement Tool palette. 4 Under Units And Markup Settings, change the options, as needed. Leave the 3D Measurement Tool palette open. 5 Measure the 3D model: • To measure the distance between two positions on the 3D model, click to set a start point and move the pointer to another location or an edge. • To measure the circumference of a round shape, move the pointer to the edge of the shape so that a circle appears, and click once. • To create and set the position of an annotation on the measurement, select Measurement Markup in the 3D Measurement Tool palette and then type a markup message in Annotation. Measure the 3D model as described above, but click to set the end point for the measurement and then click a third time to set the location of the measurement and annotation text. • To discontinue a measurement, right-click/Control-click and choose Cancel Measurement. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 409 User Guide • To delete a measurement markup, click it with the 3D Measurement Tool and press Delete. While you measure, you can Alt-drag/Command-drag to rotate. Hold down Shift and drag to pan. Hold down Alt+Shift/Command+Shift and drag to zoom. Hold down Ctrl to disable snap. Snap Enables options in the 3D Measurement Tool palette 3D Snap To Edge Endpoints Snaps to the entire edge. 3D Snap To Linear Edges Snaps to a straight-line segment of an edge. 3D Snap To Radial Edges Snaps to a circumference. 3D Snap To Silhouettes Snaps to the apparent edge of a part, such as the side of a cylinder. 3D Snap To Planar Faces Snaps to the geometric plane making up a face of the part. Measurement Types options in the 3D Measurement Tool palette 3D Point To Point Measurement Measures the distance between two positions on the 3D model that you click to set a start point and then click another location to set an end point or edge. 3D Perpendicular Dimension Measures the distance between two edges taken at a right angle to the starting edge. 3D Radial Dimension Measures the radius at the location clicked. 3D Angle Measurement Measures the angle between two edges. Units And Markup options in the 3D Measurement Tool palette Note: If you do not see these settings, choose Show Details on the palette’s Options menu. Model Units Scale Ratio Shows the relationship between units in the model and real object measurements. Use the Display Units menu to select a different unit for the real object measurements. Measurement Markup Select to have the measurements appear as comments in the PDF. Label Type text that you want to appear with the measurement, both in the 3D model area and in the Comments panel. (Not available if Measurement Markup is not selected.) 3D Measurement Tool viewing options Use the Options menu in the 3D Measurement tool palette to set viewing options. Note: The 3D Measurement Tool palette changes to the Distance Tool palette after a brief delay when the pointer moves outside the canvas area of the 3D model. Moving the pointer back over the 3D model restores the 3D Measurement Tool options. The Ortho option is available only for the 2D Distance, Perimeter, and Area tools. Show Details Shows or hides the Cursor Location and Units And Markup Settings options in the 3D Measurement Tool palette. Show Rulers Shows or hides vertical and horizontal rulers on the page. (Has the same effect as choosing View > Rulers.) Snap To 2D Content Ensures precise measurement in 2D objects. Snap To 3D Content Ensures precise measurement in 3D objects 3D Measurement Navigation Tips Opens a dialog box with keyboard shortcuts for several 3D features. You can use these shortcuts while you are measuring. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 410 User Guide Measuring preferences Change the 3D Measuring preferences to determine how 3D data is measured. These options appear in the Measuring (3D) panel of the Preferences dialog box. Use Scales And Units From Model (When Present) Displays measurements based on the model units, if present, generated from the original 3D model. Deselect this option to specify the units of measurements manually. This setting can be changed in the 3D Measurement Tool palette. Use Default Display Unit Uses units of measurement that you specify here rather than those in the 3D model. Significant Digits To Display Specifies the maximum number of digits in the measurement number. 3D Measuring Line Color Specifies the color of the line that appears when you click or drag to measure an object. Measure Feedback Size Sets the text size for the measurement display. Angular Measurements Shown In Specifies units as either degrees or radians. Circular Measurements Shown As Designates whether the diameter or radius is measured for circular parts. 3D Snap Settings Turns on snap and specifies whether points, arcs, edges, silhouette edges, or faces are snapped to. Sensitivity indicates how close the pointer needs to be to the item being snapped to. For Snap Hint Color, specify the color of the snap line that appears when you hold the pointer over the 3D object. Set 3D views The default view of a 3D model lets you quickly revert to a starting point at any time as you interact with the model. A default view is different from a preview, which determines what the 3D model looks like when it’s not activated. The list of all available views for the 3D model appears in the Views menu on the 3D toolbar and in the View pane of the Model Tree. You can also create additional views of the 3D model in Acrobat that let you quickly navigate the 3D content as you want (such as top, bottom, left, right, inside, outside, exploded, or assembled). A view can include lighting, camera position, rendering mode, the Model Tree state, and transparency and cross section settings. When you add a comment or markup to the 3D model, Acrobat automatically creates a view. You can link views to bookmarks in the Bookmarks panel, or you can use the Go To 3D View action to link views to buttons and links that you create on the page. Create a new view 1 With the Hand tool, click the 3D model to enable it. 2 Use the Rotate, Pan, and Zoom tools in the 3D toolbar to change the view. 3 In the Model Tree, hide or show parts. 4 In the Model Tree, click the Create View icon . Display a view ? Use these methods to change the view, as appropriate: • From the 3D toolbar, select the view from the Views pop-up menu. • In the Model Tree, click the view name. • Click the Default View icon .ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 411 User Guide Change the default view ? In the View pane of the Model Tree, do one of the following: • Select a view, and then choose Set As Default View from the Options menu. • Right-click/Control-click a view, and then choose Set As Default View. Add a 3D view to a bookmark or link This process requires a 3D model with one or more defined views, which you can create. You can associate the view with an existing bookmark or link, or you can create a new one for this purpose. 1 Do one of the following: • To create a new bookmark, click the New Bookmark button at the top of the Bookmarks panel, and type a new name for the bookmark. Then, right-click/Control-click it and choose Properties. • To create a new link, choose Tools > Advanced Editing > Link Tool, and drag to create a link rectangle anywhere on the page. Then, under Link Action, in the Create Link dialog box, select Custom Link, and click Next. • To link a view to an existing bookmark or link, right-click/Control-click the bookmark or link, and choose Properties. 2 In the Properties dialog box, click the Actions tab. 3 From the Select Action menu, choose Go To A 3D View, and then click Add. 4 In the Select A 3D View dialog box, select the 3D annotation for the 3D model from the list on the left, and then select a view option on the right: Current View Matches the 3D rotation, pan, and zoom characteristics that are active in your document at the time you create the link or bookmark, whether or not this view is listed on the Model Tree as a defined view. First View Changes to the view that appears at the top of the list in the Model Tree. Last View Changes to the view definition that appears at the bottom of the list in the Model Tree. Previous View Moves up the Model Tree list of defined views, one view at a time. Next View Moves down the Model Tree list of defined views, one view at a time. Named View Changes to the defined view that you select from the list appearing below this option. 5 (Optional) To make a bookmark or link also jump to a specific page and page view, choose Go To A Page View on the Selection Action menu, and click Add. Then use the scroll bars and zoom tools to adjust the page view before you click the Set Link button. When finished, click Close in the Properties dialog box. Delete a 3D view ? Do one of the following: • On the 3D toolbar, open the Views pop-up menu and choose Manage Views. Select the views you want to remove, and click Delete View. • In the View pane of the Model Tree panel, select the views you want to remove. From within the View pane, either click the Delete button or click the Options button and choose Delete View. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 412 User Guide 3D preferences In the 3D panel of the Preferences dialog box—Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences (Mac OS)— you can determine whether the 3D toolbar and Model Tree are displayed by default. You can also specify a default renderer and determine whether animations are allowed. Preferred Renderer Specifies the rendering engine used to affect both performance and quality, so it’s important to select the appropriate renderer. Depending on your system, you may want to change your render engine. For Windows XP, you may be able to select DirectX 8, DirectX 9, or Software. For Mac OS 10.3 or later, you can select OpenGL or Software. If you select a DirectX or OpenGL option, all rendering takes place using the graphics chip on the video card. If Software is selected, rendering may take more time, but the performance may be more consistent with that of the model in its originating application. Enable Double-Sided Rendering Some model parts have two sides. To save time and space, you can deselect this option to render only the side facing the user. If the user looks inside a part rendered with only one side, the back side would be invisible. Preferred 3D PMI Rendering Mode Specifies the PMI mode to use for rendering. You can select one of the following options: Use Content Setting—The rendering of the PMI uses the setting of each PMI to decide whether or not it uses the Zbuffer. Always Render 3D PMI In Front Of Model—The rendering of the PMI ignores the Z-buffer regardless of the setting in the file. Always Render 3D PMI Using Z-buffer—The rendering of the PMI always turns on Z-buffer regardless of the setting in the file. Enable Hardware Rendering For Legacy Video Cards Forces the use of a hardware accelerator for even video cards that do not support a pixel shader. Open Model Tree On 3D Activation Determines whether the Model Tree is displayed when the 3D model is activated. Choose Use Annotation’s Setting to use whichever setting the author used when adding the 3D model to the PDF. Default Toolbar State Determines whether the 3D toolbar is shown or hidden when a 3D model is activated. Choose Use Annotation’s Setting to use whichever setting the author used when adding the 3D model to the PDF. Enable Toggle For 3D Toolbar Control Places a triangular button over the selected 3D model that hides or displays the 3D toolbar. Enable 3D Selection For The Hand Tool Lets the user select and highlight parts of the 3D model using the Hand tool. If this option is not selected, use the Object Data tool (Tools > Object Data > Object Data Tool) to select the object. Consolidate 3D Tools On The 3D Toolbar Selecting this option places the manipulation and navigation tools under the Rotate tool, thereby shortening the 3D toolbar. Enable View Transitions Some 3D models include animated transitions between views. Deselect this option if you want to prevent this 3D animation. Optimization Scheme For Low Framerate Specifies what happens to animations of complex models when the framerate becomes low. None does not compromise the visuals and leaves the framerate low. Bounding Box shows the three-dimensional planes enclosing the parts instead of the parts themselves, which keeps the framerate high. Drop Objects does not show some parts of the model in order to keep the framerate high. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 413 User Guide Framerate Threshold Sets the minimum framerate, either by dragging the slider or entering a number in the value box. If the framerate drops below that number of frames per second, the Optimization Scheme For Low Framerate option goes into effect. Comment on 3D designs Comments added to a 3D object are associated with specific views that are defined when the comments are added. If the view is changed—for example, if the 3D object is rotated or moved—the comments are no longer visible. Note: Adding comments to 3D model views requires version 7.0.7 or later of Acrobat or Reader. When the view of a 3D object is changed, any comment associated with that object disappears (right). If you don’t want a comment to be associated with a 3D view, add the comment to another part of the page, outside the 3D object area. See also “Enable commenting for Adobe Reader users” on page 155 “Commenting” on page 168 Add comments to a 3D object Note: Adobe Reader users can add comments to a PDF if the document author enables commenting for that PDF. 1 Select a tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. (The Text Edit tools have no effect on 3D objects.) 2 Click inside the 3D object area to create a new comment and also a new view definition in the Model Tree with a default name such as “CommentView1.” 3 To add more comments, do one of the following: • To create an additional comment in a view, make sure that the commenting view you want is selected in the Model Tree, and click inside the 3D object area. • To create an additional comment in a new commenting view, make sure that no commenting view is selected in the Model Tree, and click inside the 3D object area. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 414 User Guide Note: If you delete one of these automatically generated commenting views, the associated comments are still available. You can view and select them in the Comments panel or in the Model Tree, where they are listed under the views. Selecting a comment switches the 3D model to the same viewing configuration it had when the comment was added. Display comments for a 3D object 1 Do one of the following: • In the Model Tree, select a view that contains comments. • Click the Comments button or choose View > Navigation Panels > Comments. • In the View pane of the Model Tree, click Options and choose List Comments. 2 Double-click a comment to open its comment window. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 as needed to see other comments associated with other views. When you select a comment, the 3D model appears in the same viewing configuration it had when the comment was added, whether or not that view has been deleted from the list. Run a JavaScript If there is a separate JavaScript file associated with the 3D model PDF, you can activate it. 1 Open the PDF in Acrobat. 2 Right-click/Control-click the 3D model in the PDF, and choose Run JavaScript. Exporting geometry from 3D models Export geometry Reuse geometry in other applications by exporting it from the PDF. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 415 User Guide If a 3D model’s geometry was saved to PDF (using a PRC B-rep conversion setting), you can export and use it in CAM and CAE applications. Geometry is translated directly to standard file formats that comply with published specifica­ tions: IGES, ParaSolid, STEP, and VRML. Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) isn’t included in the file. You can modify the exported data by specifying settings. In some situations, Acrobat 3D may modify the exported data to improve the results, while avoiding any changes to the actual geometry. For example, if the source CAD appli­ cation is loose-tolerant and the export format is tight-tolerant, Acrobat 3D may add a tolerance to the exported file. 1 Open the 3D PDF and click the 3D model in the document pane. 2 Right-click the 3D model and choose Export Data. Note: The Export Data option isn’t available if compression or security was applied to the 3D PDF, or if the tolerance was set to 0.01 or higher during PDF conversion. 3 Choose a file format from the Save As Type menu, click Settings to select the options for that format, and click OK. 4 Name and save the file. See also “Acrobat 3D conversion settings” on page 390 Format options Specify the following options for exported geometry by clicking the Settings button in the Save As dialog box. IGES Settings IGES files are saved as version 5.1 and support solid entities. Save Solid To Specifies how to write the geometry. The Surface option provides UV curves and any 3D curves (if present). The Solid option provides UV curves (if present) but calculates 3D curves. Save Faceted To Specifies whether to write polyhedric solids as trimmed surfaces (Faceted) or as lines (Wireframe). Save Analytics To Writes surfaces (cylinders, planes, spheres, cones, torus) and curves (circles, ellipses, parabolas, hyperbolas) as analytic shapes instead of NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline). Write Hidden Objects Specifies that blanked entities in the file will be included. ParaSolid Settings Files are saved as version 11. Specifies whether to save geometry as solids or surfaces. STEP Settings STEP Standard Specifies the Application Protocol (AP) that best suits the intended use (AP 203 or AP 214). Save Faceted To Specifies whether to write polyhedric solids as trimmed surfaces (Faceted) or as lines (Wireframe). Save Analytics To Writes surfaces (cylinders, planes, spheres, cones, torus) and curves (circles, ellipses, parabolas, hyperbolas) as analytic shapes instead of NURBS (Non-Uniform Rational B-Spline). Use Short Names Uses internal coding for STEP entities and reduces file size. VRML Settings Specifies the version, either 1.0 or 2.0. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 416 User Guide Adding functionality to 3D designs with JavaScript What JavaScripts can do You can use JavaScript to do various things: • Create animations that simulate a product in action, demonstrate an assembly and disassembly, illustrate the effects of one component upon another, or simulate camera movements around or through the model. • Let users take pieces out of a model, add pieces to it, or activate overlays, animations, or lighting changes. • Activate other files or modes. For example, you can display a 3D design as a wireframe, as nodes, in 2D, and so on. You can set a JavaScript to start based on any action. For example, you might choose to have it automatically start when a user opens the PDF, to start when a user clicks a button or link in the PDF, or even to start based on another JavaScript file’s instructions. To learn how to work with JavaScript, download JavaScript manuals from the Acrobat JavaScript support page (English only) on the Adobe website. JavaScript for Acrobat 3D Annotations API Reference contains detailed infor­ mation about using JavaScripts to manipulate 3D objects in PDFs. Developing Acrobat Applications Using JavaScript contains background information and tutorials, and JavaScript for Acrobat API Reference provides reference infor­ mation. Add a JavaScript to a PDF When you embed a JavaScript file as part of a 3D model and then save the PDF, the JavaScript file becomes part of the PDF document. 1 Using the Select Object tool from the Advanced Editing toolbar, double-click the 3D design. 2 In the 3D Properties dialog box, select Edit Content. 3 In the Add 3D Content dialog box, click Browse For Default Script, and locate the JavaScript file. By default, the embedded JavaScript runs when you activate the 3D model. You can also set page elements, such as buttons or links, to trigger the JavaScript. Instead of embedding the JavaScript file in the PDF, you can include it as a separate file that users load and run manually. Typically, recipients must save the JavaScript file to their local hard drive. To activate this script, the user right-clicks/Control-clicks the 3D design, chooses Run A JavaScript, and then browses to select the JavaScript file. This approach runs the script but doesn’t save it with the image. 417 Chapter 14: Color management Understanding color management Why colors sometimes don’t match No device in a publishing system is capable of reproducing the full range of colors viewable to the human eye. Each device operates within a specific color space that can produce a certain range, or gamut, of colors. A color model determines the relationship between values, and the color space defines the absolute meaning of those values as colors. Some color models (such as CIE L*a*b) have a fixed color space because they relate directly to the way humans perceive color. These models are described as being device-independent. Other color models (RGB, HSL, HSB, CMYK, and so forth) can have many different color spaces. Because these models vary with each associated color space or device, they are described as being device-dependent. Because of these varying color spaces, colors can shift in appearance as you transfer documents between different devices. Color variations can result from differences in image sources; the way software applications define color; print media (newsprint paper reproduces a smaller gamut than magazine-quality paper); and other natural varia­ tions, such as manufacturing differences in monitors or monitor age. CMYK RGB A B C Color gamuts of various devices and documents A. Lab color space B. Documents (working space) C. Devices What is a color management system? Color-matching problems result from various devices and software using different color spaces. One solution is to have a system that interprets and translates color accurately between devices. A color management system (CMS) compares the color space in which a color was created to the color space in which the same color will be output, and makes the necessary adjustments to represent the color as consistently as possible among different devices. A color management system translates colors with the help of color profiles. A profile is a mathematical description of a device’s color space. For example, a scanner profile tells a color management system how your scanner “sees” colors. Adobe color management uses ICC profiles, a format defined by the International Color Consortium (ICC) as a cross-platform standard. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 418 User Guide Because no single color-translation method is ideal for all types of graphics, a color management system provides a choice of rendering intents, or translation methods, so that you can apply a method appropriate to a particular graphics element. For example, a color translation method that preserves correct relationships among colors in a wildlife photograph may alter the colors in a logo containing flat tints of color. Note: Don’t confuse color management with color correction. A color management system won’t correct an image that was saved with tonal or color balance problems. It provides an environment where you can evaluate images reliably in the context of your final output. See also “About color profiles” on page 429 “About rendering intents” on page 438 Do you need color management? Without a color management system, your color specifications are device-dependent. You might not need color management if your production process is tightly controlled for one medium only. For example, you or your print service provider can tailor CMYK images and specify color values for a known, specific set of printing conditions. The value of color management increases when you have more variables in your production process. Color management is recommended if you anticipate reusing color graphics for print and online media, using various kinds of devices within a single medium (such as different printing presses), or if you manage multiple workstations. You will benefit from a color management system if you need to accomplish any of the following: • Get predictable and consistent color output on multiple output devices including color separations, your desktop printer, and your monitor. Color management is especially useful for adjusting color for devices with a relatively limited gamut, such as a four-color process printing press. • Accurately soft-proof (preview) a color document on your monitor by making it simulate a specific output device. (Soft-proofing is subject to the limitations of monitor display, and other factors such as room lighting conditions.) • Accurately evaluate and consistently incorporate color graphics from many different sources if they also use color management, and even in some cases if they don’t. • Send color documents to different output devices and media without having to manually adjust colors in documents or original graphics. This is valuable when creating images that will eventually be used both in print and online. • Print color correctly to an unknown color output device; for example, you could store a document online for consistently reproducible on-demand color printing anywhere in the world. Creating a viewing environment for color management Your work environment influences how you see color on your monitor and on printed output. For best results, control the colors and light in your work environment by doing the following: • View your documents in an environment that provides a consistent light level and color temperature. For example, the color characteristics of sunlight change throughout the day and alter the way colors appear on your screen, so keep shades closed or work in a windowless room. To eliminate the blue-green cast from fluorescent lighting, you can install D50 (5000° Kelvin) lighting. You can also view printed documents using a D50 lightbox. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 419 User Guide • View your document in a room with neutral-colored walls and ceiling. A room’s color can affect the perception of both monitor color and printed color. The best color for a viewing room is neutral gray. Also, the color of your clothing reflecting off the glass of your monitor may affect the appearance of colors on-screen. • Remove colorful background patterns on your monitor desktop. Busy or bright patterns surrounding a document interfere with accurate color perception. Set your desktop to display neutral grays only. • View document proofs in the real-world conditions under which your audience will see the final piece. For example, you might want to see how a housewares catalog looks under the incandescent light bulbs used in homes, or view an office furniture catalog under the fluorescent lighting used in offices. However, always make final color judgements under the lighting conditions specified by the legal requirements for contract proofs in your country. Keeping colors consistent About color management in Adobe applications Adobe color management helps you maintain the appearance of colors as you bring images in from external sources, edit documents and transfer them between Adobe applications, and output your finished compositions. This system is based on conventions developed by the International Color Consortium, a group responsible for standardizing profile formats and procedures so that consistent and accurate color can be achieved throughout a workflow. By default, color management is turned on in color-managed Adobe applications. If you purchased the Adobe Creative Suite, color settings are synchronized across applications to provide consistent display for RGB and CMYK colors. This means that colors look the same no matter which application you view them in. Color settings for Adobe Creative Suite are synchronized in a central location through Adobe Bridge. If you decide to change the default settings, easy-to-use presets let you configure Adobe color management to match common output conditions. You can also customize color settings to meet the demands of your particular color workflow. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 420 User Guide Keep in mind that the kinds of images you work with and your output requirements influence how you use color management. For example, there are different color-consistency issues for an RGB photo printing workflow, a CMYK commercial printing workflow, a mixed RGB/CMYK digital printing workflow, and an Internet publishing workflow. Basic steps for producing consistent color 1. Consult with your production partners (if you have any) to ensure that all aspects of your color management workflow integrate seamlessly with theirs. Discuss how the color workflow will be integrated with your workgroups and service providers, how software and hardware will be configured for integration into the color management system, and at what level color management will be implemented. (See “Do you need color management?” on page 418.) 2. Calibrate and profile your monitor. A monitor profile is the first profile you should create. Seeing accurate color is essential if you are making creative decisions involving the color you specify in your document. (See “Calibrate and profile your monitor” on page 431.) 3. Add color profiles to your system for any input and output devices you plan to use, such as scanners and printers. The color management system uses profiles to know how a device produces color and what the actual colors in a document are. Device profiles are often installed when a device is added to your system. You can also use third-party software and hardware to create more accurate profiles for specific devices and conditions. If your document will be commercially printed, contact your service provider to determine the profile for the printing device or press condition. (See “About color profiles” on page 429 and “Install a color profile” on page 431.) 4. Set up color management in Adobe applications. The default color settings are sufficient for most users. However, you can change the color settings by doing one of the following: • If you use multiple Adobe applications, use Adobe® Bridge CS3 to choose a standard color management configu­ ration and synchronize color settings across applications before working with documents. (See “Synchronize color settings across Adobe applications” on page 421.) • If you use only one Adobe application, or if you want to customize advanced color management options, you can change color settings for a specific application. (See “Set up color management” on page 421.) 5. (Optional) Preview colors using a soft proof. After you create a document, you can use a soft proof to preview how colors will look when printed or viewed on a specific device. (See “Soft-proofing colors” on page 425.) Note: A soft proof alone doesn’t let you preview how overprinting will look when printed on an offset press. If you work with documents that contain overprinting, turn on Overprint Preview to accurately preview overprints in a soft proof. 6. Use color management when printing and saving files. Keeping the appearance of colors consistent across all of the devices in your workflow is the goal of color management. Leave color management options enabled when printing documents, saving files, and preparing files for online viewing. (See “Printing with color management” on page 427 and “Color-managing documents for online viewing” on page 424.) ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 421 User Guide Synchronize color settings across Adobe applications If you use Adobe Creative Suite, you can use Adobe Bridge to automatically synchronize color settings across appli­ cations. This synchronization ensures that colors look the same in all color-managed Adobe applications. If color settings are not synchronized, a warning message appears at the top of the Color Settings dialog box in each application. Adobe recommends that you synchronize color settings before you work with new or existing documents. 1 Open Bridge. To open Bridge from a Creative Suite application, choose File > Browse. To open Bridge directly, either choose Adobe Bridge from the Start menu (Windows) or double-click the Adobe Bridge icon (Mac OS). 2 Choose Edit > Creative Suite Color Settings. 3 Select a color setting from the list, and click Apply. If none of the default settings meet your requirements, select Show Expanded List Of Color Setting Files to view additional settings. To install a custom settings file, such as a file you received from a print service provider, click Show Saved Color Settings Files. Set up color management 1 Do one of the following: • (Illustrator, InDesign, Photoshop) Choose Edit > Color Settings. • (Acrobat) Select the Color Management category of the Preferences dialog box. 2 Select a color setting from the Settings menu, and click OK. The setting you select determines which color working spaces are used by the application, what happens when you open and import files with embedded profiles, and how the color management system converts colors. To view a description of a setting, select the setting and then position the pointer over the setting name. The description appears at the bottom of the dialog box. Note: Acrobat color settings are a subset of those used in InDesign, Illustrator, and Photoshop. In certain situations, such as if your service provider supplies you with a custom output profile, you may need to customize specific options in the Color Settings dialog box. However, customizing is recommended for advanced users only. Note: If you work with more than one Adobe application, it is highly recommended that you synchronize your color settings across applications. (See “Synchronize color settings across Adobe applications” on page 421.) See also “Customize color settings” on page 434 Change the appearance of CMYK black (Illustrator, InDesign) Pure CMYK black (K=100) appears jet black (or rich black) when viewed on-screen, printed to a non-PostScript desktop printer, or exported to an RGB file format. If you prefer to see the difference between pure black and rich black as it will appear when printed on a commercial press, you can change the Appearance Of Black preferences. These preferences do not change the color values in a document. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Appearance Of Black (Windows) or [application name] > Preferences > Appearance Of Black (Mac OS). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 422 User Guide 2 Choose an option for On Screen: Display All Blacks Accurately Displays pure CMYK black as dark gray. This setting allows you to see the difference between pure black and rich black. Display All Blacks As Rich Black Displays pure CMYK black as jet black (RGB=000). This setting makes pure black and rich black appear the same on-screen. 3 Choose an option for Printing/Exporting: Output All Blacks Accurately When printing to a non-PostScript desktop printer or exporting to an RGB file format, outputs pure CMYK black using the color numbers in the document. This setting allows you to see the difference between pure black and rich black. Output All Blacks As Rich Black When printing to a non-PostScript desktop printer or exporting to an RGB file format, outputs pure CMYK black as jet black (RGB=000). This setting makes pure black and rich black appear the same. Managing process and spot colors When color management is on, any color you apply or create within a color-managed Adobe application automati­ cally uses a color profile that corresponds to the document. If you switch color modes, the color management system uses the appropriate profiles to translate the color to the new color model you choose. Keep in mind the following guidelines for working with process and spot colors: • Choose a CMYK working space that matches your CMYK output conditions to ensure that you can accurately define and view process colors. • Select colors from a color library. Adobe applications come with several standard color libraries, which you can load using the Swatches panel menu. • (Acrobat, Illustrator, and InDesign) Turn on Overprint Preview to get an accurate and consistent preview of spot colors. • (Acrobat, Illustrator, and InDesign) Use Lab values (the default) to display predefined spot colors (such as colors from the TOYO, PANTONE, DIC, and HKS libraries) and convert these colors to process colors. Using Lab values provides the greatest accuracy and guarantees the consistent display of colors across Creative Suite applications. If you want the display and output of these colors to match earlier versions of Illustrator or InDesign, use CMYK equivalent values instead. For instructions on switching between Lab values and CMYK values for spot colors, search Illustrator or InDesign Help. Note: Color-managing spot colors provides a close approximation of a spot color on your proofing device and monitor. However, it is difficult to exactly reproduce a spot color on a monitor or proofing device because many spot color inks exist outside the gamuts of many of those devices. Color-managing imported images Color-managing imported images (Illustrator, InDesign) How imported images are integrated into a document’s color space depends on whether or not the image has an embedded profile: • When you import an image that contains no profile, the Adobe application uses the current document profile to define the colors in the image. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 423 User Guide • When you import an image that contains an embedded profile, color policies in the Color Settings dialog box determine how the Adobe application handles the profile. See also “Color management policy options” on page 436 Using a safe CMYK workflow A safe CMYK workflow ensures that CMYK color numbers are preserved all the way to the final output device, as opposed to being converted by your color management system. This workflow is beneficial if you want to incremen­ tally adopt color management practices. For example, you can use CMYK profiles to soft-proof and hard-proof documents without the possibility of unintended color conversions occurring during final output. Illustrator and InDesign support a safe CMYK workflow by default. As a result, when you open or import a CMYK image with an embedded profile, the application ignores the profile and preserves the raw color numbers. If you want your application to adjust color numbers based on an embedded profile, change the CMYK color policy to Preserve Embedded Profiles in the Color Settings dialog box. You can easily restore the safe CMYK workflow by changing the CMYK color policy back to Preserve Numbers (Ignore Linked Profiles). You can override safe CMYK settings when you print a document or save it to Adobe PDF. However, doing so may cause colors to be reseparated. For example, pure CMYK black objects may be reseparated as rich black. For more information on color management options for printing and saving PDFs, search in Help. See also “Color management policy options” on page 436 Preparing imported graphics for color management Use the following general guidelines to prepare graphics for being color-managed in Adobe applications: • Embed an ICC-compliant profile when you save the file. The file formats that support embedded profiles are JPEG, PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), Photoshop EPS, Large Document Format, and TIFF. • If you plan to reuse a color graphic for multiple final output devices or media, such as for print, video, and the web, prepare the graphic using RGB or Lab colors whenever possible. If you must save in a color model other than RGB or Lab, keep a copy of the original graphic. RGB and Lab color models represent larger color gamuts than most output devices can reproduce, retaining as much color information as possible before being translated to a smaller output color gamut. See also “Embed a color profile” on page 432 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 424 User Guide View or change profiles for imported bitmap images (InDesign) InDesign allows you to view, override, or disable profiles for imported bitmap images. This may be necessary when you are importing an image containing no profile or an incorrectly embedded profile. For example, if the scanner manufacturer’s default profile was embedded but you have since generated a custom profile, you can assign the newer profile. 1 Do one of the following: • If the graphic is already in layout, select it and choose Object > Image Color Settings. • If you’re about to import the graphic, choose File > Place, select Show Import Options, select and open the file, and then select the Color tab. 2 For Profile, choose the source profile to apply to the graphic in your document. If a profile is currently embedded, the profile name appears at the top of the Profile menu. 3 (Optional) Choose a rendering intent, and then click OK. In most cases, it’s best to use the default rendering intent. Note: You can also view or change profiles for objects in Acrobat. See also “Convert document colors to another profile” on page 434 “Convert document colors to another profile (Photoshop)” on page 433 Color-managing documents for online viewing Color-managing documents for online viewing Color management for online viewing is very different from color management for printed media. With printed media, you have far more control over the appearance of the final document. With online media, your document will appear on a wide range of possibly uncalibrated monitors and video display systems, significantly limiting your control over color consistency. When you color-manage documents that will be viewed exclusively on the web, Adobe recommends that you use the sRGB color space. sRGB is the default working space for most Adobe color settings, but you can verify that sRGB is selected in the Color Settings dialog box (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) or the Color Management preferences (Acrobat). With the working space set to sRGB, any RGB graphics you create will use sRGB as the color space. When working with images that have an embedded color profile other than sRGB, you should convert the image’s colors to sRGB before you save the image for use on the web. If you want the application to automatically convert the colors to sRGB when you open the image, select Convert To Working Space as the RGB color management policy. (Make sure that your RGB working space is set to sRGB.) In Photoshop and InDesign, you can also manually convert the colors to sRGB using the Edit > Convert To Profile command. Note: In InDesign, the Convert To Profile command only converts colors for native, not placed, objects in the document. See also “About color working spaces” on page 434 “Color management policy options” on page 436 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 425 User Guide Color-managing PDFs for online viewing When you export PDFs, you can choose to embed profiles. PDFs with embedded profiles reproduce color consis­ tently in Acrobat 4.0 or later running under a properly configured color management system. Keep in mind that embedding color profiles increases the size of PDFs. RGB profiles are usually small (around 3 KB); however, CMYK profiles can range from 0.5 to 2 MB. See also “Printing with color management” on page 427 “Color-managing PDFs for printing” on page 428 Color-managing HTML documents for online viewing Many web browsers do not support color management. Of the browsers that do support color management, not all instances can be considered color-managed because they may be running on systems where the monitors are not calibrated. In addition, few web pages contain images with embedded profiles. If you manage a highly controlled environment, such as the intranet of a design studio, you may be able to achieve some degree of HTML color management for images by equipping everyone with a browser that supports color management and calibrating all monitors. You can approximate how colors will look on uncalibrated monitors by using the sRGB color space. However, because color reproduction varies among uncalibrated monitors, you still won’t be able to anticipate the true range of potential display variations. Proofing colors Soft-proofing colors In a traditional publishing workflow, you print a hard proof of your document to preview how its colors will look when reproduced on a specific output device. In a color-managed workflow, you can use the precision of color profiles to soft-proof your document directly on the monitor. You can display an on-screen preview of how your document’s colors will look when reproduced on a particular output device. Keep in mind that the reliability of the soft proof depends upon the quality of your monitor, the profiles of your monitor and output devices, and the ambient lighting conditions of your work environment. Note: A soft proof alone doesn’t let you preview how overprinting will look when printed on an offset press. If you work with documents that contain overprinting, turn on Overprint Preview to accurately preview overprints in a soft proof. A B C Using a soft proof to preview the final output of a document on your monitor A. Document is created in its working color space. B. Document’s color values are translated to color space of chosen proof profile (usually the output device’s profile). C. Monitor displays proof profile’s interpretation of document’s color values. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 426 User Guide Soft-proof colors 1 Choose View > Proof Setup, and do one of the following: • Choose a preset that corresponds to the output condition you want to simulate. • Choose Custom (Photoshop and InDesign) or Customize (Illustrator) to create a custom proof setup for a specific output condition. This option is recommended for the most accurate preview of your final printed piece. 2 Choose View > Proof Colors to toggle the soft-proof display on and off. When soft proofing is on, a check mark appears next to the Proof Colors command, and the name of the proof preset or profile appears at the top of the document window. To compare the colors in the original image and the colors in the soft proof, open the document in a new window before you set up the soft proof. Soft-proof presets Working CMYK Creates a soft proof of colors using the current CMYK working space as defined in the Color Settings dialog box. Document CMYK (InDesign) Creates a soft proof of colors using the document’s CMYK profile. Working Cyan Plate, Working Magenta Plate, Working Yellow Plate, Working Black Plate, or Working CMY Plates (Photoshop) Creates a soft proof of specific CMYK ink colors using the current CMYK working space. Macintosh RGB or Windows RGB (Photoshop and Illustrator) Creates a soft proof of colors in an image using either a standard Mac OS or Windows monitor as the proof profile space to simulate. Both options assume that the simulated device will display your document without using color management. Neither option is available for Lab or CMYK documents. Monitor RGB (Photoshop and Illustrator) Creates a soft proof of colors in an RGB document using your current monitor color space as the proof profile space. This option assumes that the simulated device will display your document without using color management. This option is unavailable for Lab and CMYK documents. Custom soft-proof options Device To Simulate Specifies the color profile of the device for which you want to create the proof. The usefulness of the chosen profile depends on how accurately it describes the device’s behavior. Often, custom profiles for specific paper and printer combinations create the most accurate soft proof. Preserve CMYK Numbers or Preserve RGB Numbers Simulates how the colors will appear without being converted to the color space of the output device. This option is most useful when you are following a safe CMYK workflow. Rendering Intent (Photoshop and Illustrator) When the Preserve Numbers option is deselected, specifies a rendering intent for converting colors to the device you are trying to simulate. Use Black Point Compensation (Photoshop) Ensures that the shadow detail in the image is preserved by simulating the full dynamic range of the output device. Select this option if you plan to use black point compensation when printing (which is recommended in most situations). Simulate Paper Color Simulates the dingy white of real paper, according to the proof profile. Not all profiles support this option. Simulate Black Ink Simulates the dark gray you really get instead of a solid black on many printers, according to the proof profile. Not all profiles support this option. In Photoshop, if you want the custom proof setup to be the default proof setup for documents, close all document windows before choosing the View > Proof Setup > Custom command. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 427 User Guide Save or load a custom proof setup 1 Choose View > Proof Setup > Custom. 2 Do either of the following: • To save a custom proof setup, click Save. To ensure that the new preset appears in the View > Proof Setup menu, save the preset in the default location. • To load a custom proof setup, click Load. Soft-proof colors (Acrobat) 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview. 2 Choose the color profile of a specific output device from the Simulation Profile menu. 3 Choose a soft-proof option: Simulate Black Ink Simulates the dark gray you really get instead of a solid black on many printers, according to the proof profile. Not all profiles support this option. Simulate Paper Color Simulates the dingy white of real paper, according to the proof profile. Not all profiles support this option. Color-managing documents when printing Printing with color management Color management options for printing let you specify how you want Adobe applications to handle the outgoing image data so the printer will print colors consistent with what you see on your monitor. Your options for printing color-managed documents depend on the Adobe application you use, as well as the output device you select. In general, you have the following choices for handling colors during printing: • Let the printer determine colors. • Let the application determine colors. • (Photoshop and InDesign) Do not use color management. In this workflow, no color conversion occurs. You may also need to turn off color management in your printer driver. This method is useful primarily for printing test targets or generating custom profiles. Letting the printer determine colors when printing In this workflow, the application does no color conversion, but sends all necessary conversion information to the output device. This method is especially convenient when printing to inkjet photo printers, because each combi­ nation of paper type, printing resolution, and additional printing parameters (such as high-speed printing) requires a different profile. Most new inkjet photo printers come with fairly accurate profiles built into the driver, so letting the printer select the right profile saves time and alleviates mistakes. This method is also recommended if you are not familiar with color management. If you choose this method, it is very important that you set up printing options and turn on color management in your printer driver. Search Help for additional instructions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 428 User Guide If you select a PostScript printer, you can take advantage of PostScript color management. PostScript color management makes it possible to perform color composite output or color separations at the raster image processor (RIP)—a process called in-RIP separations—so that a program need only specify parameters for separation and let the device calculate the final color values. PostScript color-managed output workflows require an output device that supports PostScript color management using PostScript Level 2 version 2017 or later, or PostScript Lanuage Level 3. Letting the application determine colors when printing In this workflow, the application does all the color conversion, generating color data specific to one output device. The application uses the assigned color profiles to convert colors to the output device’s gamut, and sends the resulting values to the output device. The accuracy of this method depends on the accuracy of the printer profile you select. Use this workflow when you have custom ICC profiles for each specific printer, ink, and paper combination. If you choose this option, it is very important that you disable color management in your printer driver. Letting the application and the printer driver simultaneously manage colors during printing results in unpredictable color. Search Help for additional instructions. Obtaining custom profiles for desktop printers If the output profiles that come with your printer don’t produce satisfactory results, you obtain custom profiles in the following ways: • Purchase a profile for your type of printer and paper. This is usually the easiest and least expensive method. • Purchase a profile for your specific printer and paper. This method involves printing a profiling target on your printer and paper, and providing that target to a company that will create a specific profile. This is more expensive than purchasing a standard profile, but can provide better results because it compensates for any manufacturing variations in printers. • Create your own profile using a scanner-based system. This method involves using profile-creation software and your own flatbed scanner to scan the profiling target. It can provide excellent results for matte surface papers, but not glossy papers. (Glossy papers tend to have fluorescent brighteners in them that look different to a scanner than they do in room light.) • Create your own profile using a hardware profile-creation tool. This method is expensive but can provide the best results. A good hardware tool can create an accurate profile even with glossy papers. • Tweak a profile created using one of the previous methods with profile-editing software. This software can be complex to use, but it lets you correct problems with a profile or simply adjust a profile to produce results more to your taste. See also “Install a color profile” on page 431 Color-managing PDFs for printing When you create Adobe PDFs for commercial printing, you can specify how color information is represented. The easiest way to do this is using a PDF/X standard; however, you can also specify color-handling options manually in the Output section of the PDF dialog box. For more information about PDF/X and how to create PDFs, search Help. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 429 User Guide In general, you have the following choices for handling colors when creating PDFs: • (PDF/X-3) Does not convert colors. Use this method when creating a document that will be printed or displayed on various or unknown devices. When you select a PDF/X-3 standard, color profiles are automatically embedded in the PDF. • (PDF/X-1a) Converts all colors to the destination CMYK color space. Use this method if you want to create a press-ready file that does not require any further color conversions. When you select a PDF/X-1a standard, no profiles are embedded in the PDF. • (Illustrator and InDesign) Converts colors that have embedded profiles to the destination color space, but preserves the numbers for those colors without embedded profiles. You can manually select this option in the Output section of the PDF dialog box. Use this method if the document contains CMYK images that aren’t colormanaged and you want to make sure that the color numbers are preserved. Note: All spot color information is preserved during color conversion; only the process color equivalents convert to the designated color space. See also “Using a safe CMYK workflow” on page 423 Working with color profiles About color profiles Precise, consistent color management requires accurate ICC-compliant profiles of all of your color devices. For example, without an accurate scanner profile, a perfectly scanned image may appear incorrect in another program, simply due to any difference between the scanner and the program displaying the image. This misleading represen­ tation may cause you to make unnecessary, time-wasting, and potentially damaging “corrections” to an already satis­ factory image. With an accurate profile, a program importing the image can correct for any device differences and display a scan’s actual colors. A color management system uses the following kinds of profiles: Monitor profiles Describe how the monitor is currently reproducing color. This is the first profile you should create because viewing color accurately on your monitor allows for critical color decisions in the design process. If what you see on your monitor is not representative of the actual colors in your document, you will not be able to maintain color consistency. Input device profiles Describe what colors an input device is capable of capturing or scanning. If your digital camera offers a choice of profiles, Adobe recommends that you select Adobe RGB. Otherwise, use sRGB (which is the default for most cameras). Advanced users may also consider using different profiles for different light sources. For scanner profiles, some photographers create separate profiles for each type or brand of film scanned on a scanner. Output device profiles Describe the color space of output devices like desktop printers or a printing press. The color management system uses output device profiles to properly map the colors in a document to the colors within the gamut of an output device’s color space. The output profile should also take into consideration specific printing conditions, such as the type of paper and ink. For example, glossy paper is capable of displaying a different range of colors than matte paper. Most printer drivers come with built-in color profiles. It’s a good idea to try these profiles before you invest in custom profiles. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 430 User Guide Document profiles Define the specific RGB or CMYK color space of a document. By assigning, or tagging, a document with a profile, the application provides a definition of actual color appearances in the document. For example, R=127, G=12, B=107 is just a set of numbers that different devices will display differently. But when tagged with the Adobe RGB color space, these numbers specify an actual color or wavelength of light–in this case, a specific color of purple. When color management is on, Adobe applications automatically assign new documents a profile based on Working Space options in the Color Settings dialog box. Documents without assigned profiles are known as untagged and contain only raw color numbers. When working with untagged documents, Adobe applications use the current working space profile to display and edit colors. A B C D Managing color with profiles A. Profiles describe the color spaces of the input device and the document. B. Using the profiles’ descriptions, the color management system identifies the document’s actual colors. C. The monitor’s profile tells the color management system how to translate the document’s numeric values to the monitor’s color space. D. Using the output device’s profile, the color management system translates the document’s numeric values to the color values of the output device so the correct appearance of colors is printed. See also “Calibrate and profile your monitor” on page 431 “Letting the printer determine colors when printing” on page 427 “Obtaining custom profiles for desktop printers” on page 428 “About color working spaces” on page 434 About monitor calibration and characterization Profiling software can both calibrate and characterize your monitor. Calibrating your monitor brings it into compliance with a predefined standard—for example, adjusting your monitor so that it displays color using the graphics arts standard white point color temperature of 5000° K (Kelvin). Characterizing your monitor simply creates a profile that describes how the monitor is currently reproducing color. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 431 User Guide Monitor calibration involves adjusting the following video settings: Brightness and contrast The overall level and range, respectively, of display intensity. These parameters work just as they do on a television. A monitor calibration utility helps you set an optimum brightness and contrast range for calibration. Gamma The brightness of the midtone values. The values produced by a monitor from black to white are nonlinear—if you graph the values, they form a curve, not a straight line. Gamma defines the value of that curve halfway between black and white. Phosphors The substances that CRT monitors use to emit light. Different phosphors have different color character­ istics. White point The color and intensity of the brightest white the monitor can reproduce. Calibrate and profile your monitor When you calibrate your monitor, you are adjusting it so it conforms to a known specification. Once your monitor is calibrated, the profiling utility lets you save a color profile. The profile describes the color behavior of the monitor—what colors can or cannot be displayed on the monitor and how the numeric color values in an image must be converted so that colors are displayed accurately. 1 Make sure your monitor has been turned on for at least a half hour. This gives it sufficient time to warm up and produce more consistent output. 2 Make sure your monitor is displaying thousands of colors or more. Ideally, make sure it is displaying millions of colors or 24-bit or higher. 3 Remove colorful background patterns on your monitor desktop and set your desktop to display neutral grays. Busy patterns or bright colors surrounding a document interfere with accurate color perception. 4 Do one of the following to calibrate and profile your monitor: • In Windows, install and use a monitor calibration utility. • In Mac OS, use the Calibrate utility, located on the System Preferences/Displays/Color tab. • For the best results, use third-party software and measuring devices. In general, using a measuring device such as a colorimeter along with software can create more accurate profiles because an instrument can measure the colors displayed on a monitor far more accurately than the human eye. Note: Monitor performance changes and declines over time; recalibrate and profile your monitor every month or so. If you find it difficult or impossible to calibrate your monitor to a standard, it may be too old and faded. Most profiling software automatically assigns the new profile as the default monitor profile. For instructions on how to manually assign the monitor profile, refer to the Help system for your operating system. Install a color profile Color profiles are often installed when a device is added to your system. The accuracy of these profiles (often called generic profiles or canned profiles) varies from manufacturer to manufacturer. You can also obtain device profiles from your service provider, download profiles from the web, or create custom profiles using professional profiling equipment. • In Windows, right-click a profile and select Install Profile. Alternatively, copy the profiles into the WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\color folder. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 432 User Guide • In Mac OS, copy profiles into the /Library/ColorSync/Profiles folder or the /Users/[username]/Library/ColorSync/Profiles folder. After installing color profiles, be sure to restart Adobe applications. See also “Obtaining custom profiles for desktop printers” on page 428 Embed a color profile To embed a color profile in a document you created in Illustrator, InDesign, or Photoshop, you must save or export the document in a format that supports ICC profiles. 1 Save or export the document in one of the following file formats: Adobe PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), JPEG, Photoshop EPS, Large Document Format, or TIFF. 2 Select the option for embedding ICC profiles. The exact name and location of this option varies between applica­ tions. Search Adobe Help for additional instructions. Embed a color profile (Acrobat) You can embed a color profile in an object or an entire PDF. Acrobat attaches the appropriate profile, as specified in the Destination Space area of the Convert Colors dialog box, to the selected color space in the PDF. For more infor­ mation, see the color conversion topics in Complete Acrobat Help. Changing the color profile for a document There are very few situations that require you to change the color profile for a document. This is because your appli­ cation automatically assigns the color profile based on the settings you select in the Color Settings dialog box. The only times you should manually change a color profile are when preparing a document for a different output desti­ nation or correcting a policy behavior that you no longer want implemented in the document. Changing the profile is recommended for advanced users only. You can change the color profile for a document in the following ways: • Assign a new profile. The color numbers in the document remain the same, but the new profile may dramatically change the appearance of the colors as displayed on your monitor. • Remove the profile so that the document is no longer color-managed. • (Acrobat, Photoshop and InDesign) Convert the colors in the document to the color space of a different profile. The color numbers are shifted in an effort to preserve the original color appearances. Assign or remove a color profile (Illustrator, Photoshop) 1 Choose Edit > Assign Profile. 2 Select an option, and click OK: Don’t Color Manage This Document Removes the existing profile from the document. Select this option only if you are sure that you do not want to color-manage the document. After you remove the profile from a document, the appearance of colors is defined by the application’s working space profiles. Working [color model: working space] Assigns the working space profile to the document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 433 User Guide Profile Lets you select a different profile. The application assigns the new profile to the document without converting colors to the profile space. This may dramatically change the appearance of the colors as displayed on your monitor. See also “Changing the color profile for a document” on page 432 Assign or remove a color profile (InDesign) 1 Choose Edit > Assign Profiles. 2 For RGB Profile and CMYK Profile, select one of the following: Discard (Use Current Working Space) Removes the existing profile from the document. Select this option only if you are sure that you do not want to color-manage the document. After you remove the profile from a document, the appearance of colors is defined by the application’s working space profiles, and you can no longer embed a profile in the document. Assign Current Working Space [working space] Assigns the working space profile to the document. Assign Profile Lets you select a different profile. The application assigns the new profile to the document without converting colors to the profile space. This may dramatically change the appearance of the colors as displayed on your monitor. 3 Choose a rendering intent for each type of graphic in your document. For each graphic type, you can choose one of the four standard intents, or the Use Color Settings Intent, which uses the rendering intent currently specified in the Color Settings dialog box. For more information on rendering intents, search in Help. The graphic types include the following: Solid Color Intent Sets the rendering intent for all vector art (solid areas of color) in InDesign native objects. Default Image Intent Sets the default rendering intent for bitmap images placed in InDesign. You can still override this setting on an image-by-image basis. After-Blending Intent Sets the rendering intent to the proofing or final color space for colors that result from trans­ parency interactions on the page. Use this option when your document includes transparent objects. 4 To preview the effects of the new profile assignment in the document, select Preview, and then click OK. See also “Changing the color profile for a document” on page 432 “View or change profiles for imported bitmap images (InDesign)” on page 424 Convert document colors to another profile (Photoshop) 1 Choose Edit > Convert To Profile. 2 Under Destination Space, choose the color profile to which you want to convert the document’s colors. The document will be converted to and tagged with this new profile. 3 Under Conversion Options, specify a color management engine, a rendering intent, and black point and dither options (if available). (See “Color conversion options” on page 437.) 4 To flatten all layers of the document onto a single layer upon conversion, select Flatten Image. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 434 User Guide 5 To preview the effects of the conversion in the document, select Preview. See also “Changing the color profile for a document” on page 432 Convert document colors to another profile You convert colors in a PDF using the Convert Colors tool on the Print Production toolbar. For more information, see the color conversion topics in Complete Acrobat Help. Color settings Customize color settings For most color-managed workflows, it is best to use a preset color setting that has been tested by Adobe Systems. Changing specific options is recommended only if you are knowledgeable about color management and very confident about the changes you make. After you customize options, you can save them as a preset. Saving color settings ensures that you can reuse them and share them with other users or applications. • To save color settings as a preset, click Save in the Color Settings dialog box. To ensure that the application displays the setting name in the Color Settings dialog box, save the file in the default location. If you save the file to a different location, you must load the file before you can select the setting. • To load a color settings preset that’s not saved in the standard location, click Load in the Color Settings dialog box, select the file you want to load, and click Open. Note: In Acrobat, you cannot save customized color settings. To share customized color settings with Acrobat, you must create the file in InDesign, Illustrator, or Photoshop, and then save it in the default Settings folder. It will then be available in the Color Management category of the Preferences dialog box. You can also add settings manually to the default Settings folder. About color working spaces A working space is an intermediate color space used to define and edit color in Adobe applications. Each color model has a working space profile associated with it. You can choose working space profiles in the Color Settings dialog box. A working space profile acts as the source profile for newly created documents that use the associated color model. For example, if Adobe RGB (1998) is the current RGB working space profile, each new RGB document that you create will use colors within the Adobe RGB (1998) gamut. Working spaces also determine the appearance of colors in untagged documents. If you open a document embedded with a color profile that doesn’t match the working space profile, the application uses a color management policy to determine how to handle the color data. In most cases, the default policy is to preserve the embedded profile. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 435 User Guide See also “About missing and mismatched color profiles” on page 435 “Color management policy options” on page 436 Working space options To display working space options in Photoshop, Illustrator and InDesign, choose Edit > Color Settings. In Acrobat, select the Color Management category of the Preferences dialog box. To view a description of any profile, select the profile and then position the pointer over the profile name. The description appears at the bottom of the dialog box. RGB Determines the RGB color space of the application. In general, it’s best to choose Adobe RGB or sRGB, rather than the profile for a specific device (such as a monitor profile). sRGB is recommended when you prepare images for the web, because it defines the color space of the standard monitor used to view images on the web. sRGB is also a good choice when you work with images from consumerlevel digital cameras, because most of these cameras use sRGB as their default color space. Adobe RGB is recommended when you prepare documents for print, because Adobe RGB’s gamut includes some printable colors (cyans and blues in particular) that can’t be defined using sRGB. Adobe RGB is also a good choice when working with images from professional-level digital cameras, because most of these cameras use Adobe RGB as their default color space. CMYK Determines the CMYK color space of the application. All CMYK working spaces are device-dependent, meaning that they are based on actual ink and paper combinations. The CMYK working spaces Adobe supplies are based on standard commercial print conditions. Gray (Photoshop) or Grayscale (Acrobat) Determines the grayscale color space of the application. Spot (Photoshop) Specifies the dot gain to use when displaying spot color channels and duotones. Note: In Acrobat, you can use the color space in an embedded output intent instead of a document color space for viewing and printing. Select Output Intent Overrides Working Spaces. For more information on output intents, see Complete Acrobat Help. Adobe applications ship with a standard set of working space profiles that have been recommended and tested by Adobe Systems for most color management workflows. By default, only these profiles appear in the working space menus. To display additional color profiles that you have installed on your system, select Advanced Mode (Illustrator and InDesign) or More Options (Photoshop). A color profile must be bi-directional (that is, contain specifications for translating both into and out of color spaces) in order to appear in the working space menus. Note: In Photoshop, you can create custom working space profiles. However, Adobe recommends that you use a standard working space profile rather than create a custom profile. For more information, see the Photoshop support knowl­ edgebase at www.adobe.com/support/products/photoshop.html. About missing and mismatched color profiles For a newly created document, the color workflow usually operates seamlessly: Unless specified otherwise, the document uses the working space profile associated with its color mode for creating and editing colors. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 436 User Guide However, some existing documents may not use the working space profile that you have specified, and some existing documents may not be color-managed. It is common to encounter the following exceptions to your color-managed workflow: • You might open a document or import color data (for example, by copying and pasting or dragging and dropping) from a document that is not tagged with a profile. This is often the case when you open a document created in an application that either does not support color management or has color management turned off. • You might open a document or import color data from a document that is tagged with a profile different from the current working space. This may be the case when you open a document that was created using different color management settings, or scanned and tagged with a scanner profile. In either case, the application uses a color management policy to decide how to handle the color data in the document. If the profile is missing or does not match the working space, the application may display a warning message, depending on options you set in the Color Settings dialog box. Profile warnings are turned off by default, but you can turn them on to ensure the appropriate color management of documents on a case-by-case basis. The warning messages vary between applications, but in general you have the following options: • (Recommended) Leave the document or imported color data as it is. For example, you can choose to use the embedded profile (if one exists), leave the document without a color profile (if one doesn’t exist), or preserve the numbers in pasted color data. • Adjust the document or imported color data. For example, when opening a document with a missing color profile, you can choose to assign the current working space profile or a different profile. When opening a document with a mismatched color profile, you can choose to discard the profile or convert the colors to the current working space. When importing color data, you can choose to convert the colors to the current working space in order to preserve their appearance. Color management policy options A color management policy determines how the application handles color data when you open a document or import an image. You can choose different policies for RGB and CMYK images, and you can specify when you want warning messages to appear. To display color management policy options, choose Edit > Color Settings. To view a description of a policy, select the policy and then position the pointer over the policy name. The description appears at the bottom of the dialog box. RGB, CMYK, And Gray Specifies a policy to follow when bringing colors into the current working space (either by opening files or importing images into the current document). (The Grayscale option is available for Photoshop only.) Choose from the following options: • Preserve Embedded Profiles Always preserves embedded color profiles when opening files. This is the recom­ mended option for most workflows because it provides consistent color management. One exception is if you’re concerned about preserving CMYK numbers, in which case you should select Preserve Numbers (Ignore Linked Profiles) instead. • Convert To Working Space Converts colors to the current working space profile when opening files and importing images. Select this option if you want to force all colors to use a single profile (the current working space profile). • Preserve Numbers (Ignore Linked Profiles) This option is available in InDesign and Illustrator for CMYK. Preserves color numbers when opening files and importing images, but still allows you to use color management to ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 437 User Guide view colors accurately in Adobe applications. Select this option if you want to use a safe CMYK workflow. In InDesign, you can override this policy on a per-object basis by choosing Object > Image Color Settings. • Off Ignores embedded color profiles when opening files and importing images, and does not assign the working space profile to new documents. Select this option if you want to discard any color metadata provided by the original document creator. Profile Mismatches: Ask When Opening Displays a message whenever you open a document tagged with a profile other than the current working space. You will be given the option to override the policy’s default behavior. Select this option if you want to ensure the appropriate color management of documents on a case-by-case basis. Profile Mismatches: Ask When Pasting Displays a message whenever color profile mismatches occur as colors are imported into a document through pasting or dragging-and-dropping. You will be given the option to override the policy’s default behavior. Select this option if you want to ensure the appropriate color management of pasted colors on a case-by-case basis. Missing Profiles: Ask When Opening Displays a message whenever you open an untagged document. You will be given the option to override the policy’s default behavior. Select this option if you want to ensure the appropriate color management of documents on a case-by-case basis. Color conversion options Color conversion options let you control how the application handles the colors in a document as it moves from one color space to another. Changing these options is recommended only if you are knowledgeable about color management and very confident about the changes you make. To display conversion options, choose Edit > Color Settings, and select Advanced Mode (Illustrator and InDesign) or More Options (Photoshop). In Acrobat, select the Color Management category of the Preferences dialog box. Engine Specifies the Color Management Module (CMM) used to map the gamut of one color space to the gamut of another. For most users, the default Adobe (ACE) engine fulfills all conversion needs. To view a description of an engine or intent option, select the option and then position the pointer over the option name. The description appears at the bottom of the dialog box. Intent (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) Specifies the rendering intent used to translate one color space to another. Differences between rendering intents are apparent only when you print a document or convert it to a different working space. Use Black Point Compensation Ensures that the shadow detail in the image is preserved by simulating the full dynamic range of the output device. Select this option if you plan to use black point compensation when printing (which is recommended in most situations). Use Dither (Photoshop) Controls whether to dither colors when converting 8-bit-per-channel images between color spaces. When the Use Dither option is selected, Photoshop mixes colors in the destination color space to simulate a missing color that existed in the source space. Although dithering helps to reduce the blocky or banded appearance of an image, it may also result in larger file sizes when images are compressed for web use. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 438 User Guide About rendering intents A rendering intent determines how a color management system handles color conversion from one color space to another. Different rendering intents use different rules to determine how the source colors are adjusted; for example, colors that fall inside the destination gamut may remain unchanged, or they may be adjusted to preserve the original range of visual relationships when translated to a smaller destination gamut. The result of choosing a rendering intent depends on the graphical content of documents and on the profiles used to specify color spaces. Some profiles produce identical results for different rendering intents. In general, it is best to use the default rendering intent for the selected color setting, which has been tested by Adobe Systems to meet industry standards. For example, if you choose a color setting for North America or Europe, the default rendering intent is Relative Colorimetric. If you choose a color setting for Japan, the default rendering intent is Perceptual. You can select a rendering intent when you set color conversion options for the color management system, soft-proof colors, and print artwork: Perceptual Aims to preserve the visual relationship between colors so it’s perceived as natural to the human eye, even though the color values themselves may change. This intent is suitable for photographic images with lots of out-of­ gamut colors. This is the standard rendering intent for the Japanese printing industry. Saturation Tries to produce vivid colors in an image at the expense of color accuracy. This rendering intent is suitable for business graphics like graphs or charts, where bright saturated colors are more important than the exact relationship between colors. Relative Colorimetric Compares the extreme highlight of the source color space to that of the destination color space and shifts all colors accordingly. Out-of-gamut colors are shifted to the closest reproducible color in the destination color space. Relative Colorimetric preserves more of the original colors in an image than Perceptual. This is the standard rendering intent for printing in North America and Europe. Absolute Colorimetric Leaves colors that fall inside the destination gamut unchanged. Out-of-gamut colors are clipped. No scaling of colors to destination white point is performed. This intent aims to maintain color accuracy at the expense of preserving relationships between colors and is suitable for proofing to simulate the output of a particular device. This intent is particularly useful for previewing how paper color affects printed colors. Advanced controls in Photoshop In Photoshop you display advanced controls for managing color by choosing Edit > Color Settings and selecting More Options. Desaturate Monitor Colors By Determines whether to desaturate colors by the specified amount when displayed on the monitor. When selected, this option can aid in visualizing the full range of color spaces with gamuts larger than that of the monitor. However, this causes a mismatch between the monitor display and the output. When the option is deselected, distinct colors in the image may display as a single color. Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma Controls how RGB colors blend together to produce composite data (for example, when you blend or paint layers using Normal mode). When the option is selected, RGB colors are blended in the color space corresponding to the specified gamma. A gamma of 1.00 is considered “colorimetrically correct” and should result in the fewest edge artifacts. When the option is deselected, RGB colors are blended directly in the document’s color space. Note: When you select Blend RGB Colors Using Gamma, layered documents will look different when displayed in other applications than they do in Photoshop. 439 Chapter 15: Printing Whether you send a quick draft to an inkjet or laser printer, provide a multicolored document to an outside service provider, or print a complex technical document with custom page sizes, you can set options in the Print dialog box to ensure that the finished document appears as intended. Quickstart The following topics provide overview steps to some more complex printing tasks. Print a booklet When you create a booklet, pages are arranged on sheets of paper so that they are in the correct order when the paper is collated, folded, and stapled. Note: To print booklets, the printer must support duplex printing (printing on both sides of the paper). 1 Choose File > Print and select the printer. 2 Set Print Range to All. 3 Choose Booklet Printing from the Page Scaling menu. 4 Select additional page handling options as desired. See also “About booklets” on page 444 Preview color separations You can preview separation plates and ink coverage to ensure that a document meets your requirements. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview. 2 Choose Separations from the Preview menu, and do one of the following: • To view or hide a separation, select or deselect it in the Separations list. • To check ink coverage, move the pointer over the document. Ink coverage percentages appear next to each ink name. See also “Preview color separations” on page 471 Print color separations You can create separations on the system using Acrobat and the printer driver (host-based separations) or on the output device’s RIP (in-RIP separations). Note: You must use a PostScript printer to print color separations. 1 Choose File > Print. Choose the output device, and then click Advanced. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 440 User Guide 2 Select Output on the left, and then choose Separations or In-RIP Separations from the Color menu. 3 Select a color profile and specify other print options as desired. See also “Print color separations” on page 456 Basic printing tasks Print a PDF If the desired printing option is in the Print dialog box, set it there rather than through the printer driver. 1 Make sure that you’ve installed the correct printer driver and PPD file for your printer. Printing results are generally more predictable with the correct PPD. 2 Choose File > Print Setup (Windows) or File > Page Setup (Mac OS) to choose a paper size, page orientation, and other general printing options. The options vary with different printers and drivers. See your printer driver documentation for details. 3 To print comments, such as sticky notes, in the Preferences dialog box, choose Commenting and select Print Notes And Pop-ups. Note: To open Preferences in Windows, choose Edit > Preferences. In Mac OS, choose Acrobat > Preferences. 4 Click the Print button , or choose File > Print. 5 Choose a printer from the menu at the top of the Print dialog box. 6 (Mac OS) Choose an option from the Presets pop-up menu. 7 In Windows, click Properties to set any additional options available with the printer driver. In Mac OS, set printer driver options in the Print Center. 8 To print comments or forms, select an option from the Comments And Forms pop-up menu. 9 Indicate which pages you want to print, and then click OK. Print over the Internet You can print open PDFs to a FedEx Kinkos office in the United States. Note: This feature is only available in the United States. 1 Save the document, and then choose File > Send To FedEx Kinkos. 2 Click OK to upload the document to the FedEx Kinkos print services website. You will then be guided through placing your print order. Options in the Print dialog box Most of the options in the Acrobat Print dialog box are the same for other applications. Comments And Forms Specifies which visible content prints. • Document Prints the document contents and form fields. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 441 User Guide • Document And Markups Prints document contents, form fields, and comments. • Document And Stamps Prints the document, form fields, and stamps, but no other markups, such as note comments and pencil lines. • Form Fields Only Prints interactive form fields but doesn’t print document contents. Current View/Selected Graphic Prints the page area (including text, comments, and so on) that is visible in the current view. The option name changes depending on whether you have no pages selected (Current View), a page or pages selected (Selected Pages), or an area on a page selected using the Snapshot tool (Selected Graphic). Current Page Prints the page that is visible in the current view. Pages Specifies the range of pages to print in the open PDF. Separate numbers in a range by using a hyphen, and separate multiple pages or ranges by using commas or spaces. If the Use Logical Page Numbers option is selected in Page Display Preferences, you can enter numbers that match the numbering printed on the pages using roman numerals or actual page numbers. For example, if the first page of a document is numbered iii, you can enter iii or 1 to print that page. Selecting Odd Pages Only or Even Pages Only affects which pages in a range print. For example, in a range that includes 2, 7–10 with Even Pages Only selected, only pages 2, 8, and 10 will print. To print from a specific page to the end of the document, enter the page with a hyphen. For example, “11-” prints page 11 to the last page of the document. Subset Choose All Pages In Range, or choose Odd Pages Only or Even Pages Only to print only those pages within the specified range. Reverse Pages Prints pages in reverse order. If page ranges are entered, the pages print opposite of the order in which they were entered. For example, if the Pages box shows 3–5, 7–10, selecting Reverse Pages prints pages 10–7, and then 5–3. Page Scaling Reduces, enlarges, or divides pages when printing. • None Prints the upper left or center of a page (if auto-rotated and centered) without scaling. Pages or selections that don’t fit on the paper are cropped. • Fit To Printable Area Reduces or enlarges each page to fit the printable area of the currently selected paper size. For PostScript® printers, the PPD determines the printable area of the paper. • Shrink To Printable Area Shrinks large pages to fit the currently selected paper size but doesn’t enlarge small pages. If an area is selected and is larger than the printable area of the currently selected paper, it’s scaled to fit the printable area. • Tile Large Pages Applies tiling to pages that are larger than the selected paper size at the specified scale. These pages are mapped to multiple sheets of paper. If this option is selected, you can also specify settings for Tile Scale, Overlap, Cut Marks, and Labels. • Tile All Pages Applies tiling to all pages, regardless of size. However, only the pages that are larger than the selected paper size at the specified scale are mapped to multiple sheets of paper. If this option is selected, you can also specify settings for Tile Scale, Overlap, Cut Marks, and Labels. • Multiple Pages Per Sheet Enables N-up printing, where multiple pages print on the same sheet of paper. If this option is selected, you can also specify settings for Pages Per Sheet, Page Order, Print Page Border, and Auto-Rotate Pages. Note: N-up printing in Acrobat is independent of the N-up printing features of printer drivers. The Acrobat print settings don’t reflect the N-up settings of the printer drivers. Select N-up printing either in Acrobat or in the printer driver, but not both. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 442 User Guide • Booklet Printing Prints multiple pages on the same sheet of paper in the order required to read correctly when folded. The printer must support duplex printing (printing on both sides of the sheet). Acrobat automatically enables duplex printing, if available, for booklet printing. Pages Per Sheet Prints a predefined number of pages, or a custom number (up to 99), horizontally and vertically during N-up printing. If you select a predefined number from the menu, Acrobatautomatically selects the best paper orientation. Page Order Defines how the pages are ordered on paper during N-up printing. Horizontal places pages from left to right, top to bottom. Horizontal Reversed places pages from right to left, top to bottom. Vertical places pages top to bottom, left to right. Vertical Reversed places pages top to bottom, right to left. Both reversed options are suitable for Asian-language documents. Print Page Border Draws the crop box (the page boundary of PDF pages) during N-up printing. Auto-Rotate Pages Adjusts the PDF’s orientation to match the orientation specified in the printer properties during N-up printing. Note: The Shrink To Printable Area option is always active for N-up printing. Therefore, the pages are always shrunk to fit the available imaging area regardless of how the Auto-Rotate And Center option is set. Choose Paper Source By PDF Page Size (Windows) Uses the PDF page size to determine the output tray rather than the page setup option. This option is useful for printing PDFs that contain multiple page sizes on printers that have different-sized output trays. Print To File (Windows) Creates a device-dependent PostScript file of the document. The resulting file contains code for enabling and controlling specific device features, making it less compatible with devices other than the target device. For better results when creating PostScript files, use the Save As PostScript command. Note: You don’t need to have a PostScript printer to create a PostScript file. Print Color As Black (Windows) Forces all nonwhite color to print as black. This option is useful for printing engineering drawings that have lightly colored lines. Printing Tips If you’re connected to the Internet, this option connects to the Adobe website for information on how to troubleshoot printing problems. Advanced Opens one or more panels for setting additional printing options. Summarize Comments Creates a separate, printable PDF of the comments in a document. This option is unavailable when you print from a web browser or print multiple documents in PDF packages. See “Print a comment summary” on page 184. See also “Downloading Asian fonts to a printer” on page 450 “Create print presets” on page 443 Print a portion of a page 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Snapshot Tool. 2 Drag around the area you want to print. Acrobat copies the selected area to the clipboard. 3 Choose File > Print to print the selection. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 443 User Guide Print layers Normally, when you print a PDF that contains layers, just the content that is visible on-screen is printed. However, the creator of a layered PDF can specify that some layered content, such as watermarks or confidential information, must (or must not) print, regardless of its visibility on-screen. If the document is designed to print differently from how it currently appears on-screen, a message may appear in the Print dialog box. The Preview image in the Print dialog box always shows the page as it will print. Note: To work with layers in Acrobat, convert the source document to PDF using a preset that preserves layers, such as Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) or later. View how layers print 1 Click the Layers icon in the navigation panel. 2 Choose Apply Print Overrides from the Options menu. Note: Depending on the visibility settings specified when the PDF was created, Apply Print Overrides may be unavailable in the Options menu. Change print settings for a layer 1 Click the Layers icon in the navigation panel. 2 Expand the layers area, select a layer, and then select Layer Properties from the Options menu. 3 In the Layer Properties dialog box, choose one of the following from the Print pop-up menu: Always Prints Forces the layer to print. Never Prints Forces the layer not to print. Prints When Visible Matches printed output to on-screen visibility. Create print presets A PDF can contain a set of print presets, a group of document-specific values that is used to set basic print options. By creating a print preset for a document, you can avoid manually setting certain options in the Print dialog box each time you print the document. It’s best to define print settings for a PDF at the time that you create it, but print presets provide a means to add basic print settings to a PDF at any time. 1 Choose File > Properties, and click the Advanced tab. 2 In the Print Dialog Presets section, set options and click OK. The next time you open the Print dialog box, the values will be set to the print preset values. These settings are also used when you print individual documents in a PDF package. Note: To retain a print preset for a PDF, you must save the PDF after creating the print preset. Print Dialog Presets Page Scaling Prepopulates the Page Scaling option in the Print dialog box with the option you choose: • Default Uses the application default setting, which is Shrink To Printable Area. • None Prevents automatic scaling to fit the printable area. This setting is useful for preserving the scale of page content in engineering documents, or for ensuring that documents print at a particular point size to be legal. DuplexMode For best results, the selected printer should support duplex printing if you select a duplex option. • Simplex Prints on one side of the paper. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 444 User Guide • Duplex Flip Long Edge Prints on both sides of the paper; the paper flips along the long edge. • Duplex Flip Short Edge Prints on both sides of the paper; the paper flips along the short edge. Paper Source By Page Size Selects the option by the same name in the Print dialog box. Uses the PDF page size to determine the output tray rather than the page setup option. This option is useful for printing PDFs that contain multiple page sizes on printers that have different-sized output trays. Print Page Range Prepopulates the Pages box in the Print Range section of the Print dialog box with the page ranges you enter here. This setting is useful in a workflow where documents include both instruction pages and legal pages. For example, if pages 1–2 represent instructions for filling out a form, and pages 3–5 represent the form, you can set up your print job to print multiple copies of only the form. Number Of Copies Prepopulates the Copies box in the Print dialog box. Choose a number from 2 to 5, or choose Default to use the application default, which is one copy. This limitation prevents multiple unwanted copies from being printed. Other ways to print PDFs About booklets Booklets are documents with multiple pages arranged on sheets of paper that, when folded, present the correct page order. You can create 2-up saddle-stitched booklets, where two side-by-side-pages, printed on both sides, are folded once and fastened along the fold. The first page prints on the same printed sheet as the last page, the second page on the same sheet as the second-to-last page, and so on. Each page is automatically centered on the sheet, and large pages are scaled (shrunk) to fit the printable area. When you collate, fold, and staple the double-sided pages, the result is a single book with correct pagination. To print booklets, your printer must support either automatic or manual duplex printing (printing on both sides of the paper). Manual duplex printing requires two separate printing passes: one to print the front side, and another to print the back side. To find out whether your printer supports duplex printing, check the printer manual, contact the printer manufacturer, or click the Properties button in the Print dialog box and look for options that mention twosided or duplex printing. 1 4 2 3 3 1 1 2 3 4 Pages arranged in PDF (top), pages arranged in booklet layout (bottom), and pages printed and folded into new booklet Print a booklet 1 Choose File > Print and select the printer. 2 Choose Booklet Printing from the Page Scaling menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 445 User Guide 3 In the Print Range area, specify which pages to print: • To print pages from front to back, select All. • To divide a large booklet into smaller groupings, select Pages and specify a page range for the first grouping. Print each page range separately. • To print certain pages on a different paper or paper stock, specify those pages using the Sheets From/To option. Click the Properties button and select the correct paper tray and any other options as necessary. 4 Choose additional page handling options. The Preview image changes as you specify options. Booklet Subset Determines which sides of the paper print. Choose Both Sides to automatically print both sides of the paper (your printer must support automatic duplex printing). Choose Front Side Only to print all pages that appear on the front side of the paper. After these pages print, flip them, choose File > Print again, and choose Back Side Only. Depending on the printer model, you might have to turn and reorder the pages to print the back sides. To prevent others in a shared printing environment from printing on your pages before you print the back side, consider printing the back side pages using a different paper tray. Auto-Rotate Pages Automatically rotates each page for the best fit in the printable area. Sheets From Specifies the first and last sheet to print. Acrobat determines which sheets must print to accommodate the print job. For example, if you have a 16-page document, then sheets 1 through 4 print. Binding Determines the orientation for the binding. Choose Left for text read left-to-right; choose Left (Tall) for paper folded on the long side, where the printable area is long and narrow. Choose Right for text read right-to-left or for Asian-style vertical reading; choose Right (Tall) for paper folded on the long side. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 446 User Guide Compare Right binding with Right (Tall). Print documents in a PDF package A PDF package contains multiple documents wrapped in one PDF. You can print the documents individually or together. 1 Open the PDF package. You can select the cover sheet and print it on a different printer or paper stock. 2 Choose File > Print, and then choose one of the following commands: Print Current Document Prints the open PDF. Print All Documents Prints all the PDFs in the package. Print Selected Documents Prints some of the PDFs in the package. (This option is available only when multiple files are selected in the list of component documents.) 3 Choose applicable printing options, and click OK. Documents are printed in the order they appear in the package. Note: You must use the native application to print any component file that is not a PDF. When a non-PDF component is selected in the PDF package component list, you can click the Open button that appears in the Acrobat document pane to open the file’s native application, if it is installed on your computer. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 447 User Guide See also “About PDF packages” on page 119 Print from the Bookmarks tab You can print the pages associated with bookmarks directly from the Bookmarks tab. Bookmarks appear in a hierarchy, with parent bookmarks and child (dependent) bookmarks. If you print a parent bookmark, all page content associated with child-level bookmarks also print. Not all bookmarks display page content, and therefore cannot be printed. For example, some bookmarks open a file or play a sound. If you select a mix of printable and nonprintable bookmarks, the nonprintable bookmarks are ignored. Note: Bookmarks made from tagged content always display page content because the tagged content represents printable elements in the document structure, such as headings and figures. 1 Open a PDF with bookmarks. If necessary, choose View > Navigation Panels > Bookmarks so the bookmarks appear in the navigation pane. 2 Select one or more bookmarks, and then right-click/Control-click the selection. 3 Choose Print Page(s) from the menu. See also “About bookmarks” on page 327 “Add tagged bookmarks” on page 330 Printing custom sizes Print an oversized document Although you can create a PDF file as large as 15,000,000 inches (38,100,000 cm) in either direction, most desktop printers cannot print such large pages. To print an oversized document on your desktop printer, you can print each page in pieces, called tiles, and then trim and assemble those pieces. You can also increase the scale of a standard-sized document and print it on multiple pages. 1 Choose File > Print. 2 From the Page Scaling menu, choose Tile All Pages if all pages of the document are oversized. If some of the pages are standard-sized, choose Tile Large Pages. 3 (Optional) Set any of these options, referring to the Preview image to check the output results: Tile Scale Adjusts the scaling. The scaling affects how the sections of the PDF page map to the physical sheet. Overlap Specifies the minimum amount of duplicated information you want printed on each tile for ease in assembly. The Overlap option uses the unit of measure specified for the document. The value should be greater than the minimum nonprinting margins for the printer. You can specify up to half the size of the shortest side of the document page to overlap. For example, tiles for a page that measures 11-by-17 inches (279.4mm-by-431.8mm) can overlap up to 5.5 inches (139.7mm). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 448 User Guide Labels Includes the PDF name, date of printing, and tile coordinate on every sheet. For example, Page 1 (1,1) means row 1, column 1 of the first page. Tile coordinates are used for reassembling the tiles. Cut Marks Prints marks on each corner of a tiled page for ease of assembly. Use this option in conjunction with the Overlap option. When you specify an overlapping edge and then superimpose those edges, you can use the cut marks to line up the tiles. Scale a document for printing To print an oversized PDF on paper that has smaller dimensions, you can scale the document’s width and height to fit. 1 Choose File > Print. 2 From the Page Scaling menu, choose Fit To Printable Area or Shrink To Printable Area. Advanced print settings About PPD files A PPD file (PostScript Printer Description file) customizes the behavior of the driver for your specific PostScript printer. It contains information about the output device, including printer-resident fonts, available media sizes and orientation, optimized screen frequencies, screen angles, resolution, and color output capabilities. It’s important to set up the correct PPD before you print. Selecting the PPD that corresponds to your PostScript printer or imagesetter populates the Print dialog box with the available settings for the output device. You can switch to a different one to suit your needs. Applications use the information in the PPD file to determine which PostScript information to send to the printer when printing a document. For best printing results, Adobe recommends that you obtain the latest version of the PPD file for your output device from the manufacturer. Many print service providers and commercial printers have PPDs for the imagesetters they use. Be sure to store PPDs in the location specified by the operating system. For details, consult the documentation for your operating system. Select a PPD file The steps for selecting a PPD file are different for each platform. Select a PPD file in Windows 1 Depending on your version of Windows, do one of the following to open the Add Printer wizard: • In Windows 2000, choose Start > Settings > Printers > Add Printer. • In Windows XP, choose Start, open the Printers And Faxes control panel, and click Add A Printer. 2 Follow the instructions to add a printer and specify a PPD file. Select a PPD file in Mac OS 1 Open the area where you add printers. 2 Click Add in the Printer List window. 3 From the top menu, choose a connection method. 4 Select a printer, or enter the printer’s IP address. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 449 User Guide 5 From the bottom menu, select a printer model. 6 In the list that appears, select a PPD file, and then click Add. About advanced print settings If normal print settings don’t produce the results you expect, you may need to specify options in the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. For example, if your printed output doesn’t match the document’s on-screen appearance, you may need to try printing the document as an image. Or, if a PDF uses fonts that aren’t embedded, you must download the fonts to the printer when you print the document. Other advanced printing options let you add printer marks to your printed output and choose how to handle color. Set advanced print options Print settings are preserved as long as the application is open. To use the settings again, you can save them in a file. 1 In the Print dialog box, click Advanced. 2 If a custom printer settings file exists with the settings you want, choose it from the Settings menu. Otherwise, choose Acrobat Default. To learn more about an option, select it. A description of it appears at the bottom of the dialog box. 3 If normal printing doesn’t produce the desired results, select Print As Image and choose a resolution from the drop-down list. 4 Select any of the panels on the left side of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, and set options for either composite or separations output. • Set color and other output conditions. See “Output options” on page 450. • Set options for printer marks. See “Include marks and bleeds” on page 453. • Set options for PostScript printers. See “PostScript options” on page 449. Note: Acrobat sets the PostScript level automatically, based on the selected printer. 5 To save the settings, click Save As, specify a filename, and click OK. The print settings are saved as an .spf file. 6 Click OK to accept the settings and return to the Print dialog box. PostScript options Use the PostScript Options panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box to set options for a particular PostScript printer, such as how to handle nonresident printer fonts and whether to download Asian fonts. In addition, if a PDF contains device-dependent settings, such as halftones and transfer functions, these settings can be sent in the PostScript output to override the default settings in the printer. To use these options, you must be connected to a PostScript printer or have a PostScript printer driver installed with a PPD file selected. Print Method Specifies the level of PostScript to generate for the pages. Choose the level of PostScript appropriate for your printer. Font And Resource Policy Specifies how fonts and resources in the document are sent to a printer when those fonts and resources aren’t present on the printer. • Send At Start Downloads all fonts and resources at the start of the print job. The fonts and resources remain on the printer until the job has finished printing. This option is the fastest but uses the most printer memory. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 450 User Guide • Send By Range Downloads fonts and resources before printing the first page that uses them, and then discards them when they are no longer needed. This option uses less printer memory. However, if a PostScript processor reorders the pages later in the workflow, it might not reorder the font downloading correctly, resulting in missing fonts. This option may not work with some printers. • Send For Each Page Downloads all fonts and resources for a given page before the page prints, and then discards the fonts when the page has finished printing. This option uses the least printer memory. Download Asian Fonts Prints documents with Asian fonts that aren’t installed on the printer or embedded in the PDF. The Asian fonts must be present on the system. Emit CIDFontType2 As CIDFontType2 (PS Version 2015 And Greater) Preserves hinting information in the original font when printing. If unselected, CIDFontType2 fonts are converted to CIDFontType0 fonts, which are compatible with a wider range of printers. This option is available for PostScript 3 and PostScript Level 2 (PostScript version 2015 and later) output devices. Print As Image Prints pages as bitmap images. Select this option if normal printing doesn’t produce the desired results, and specify a resolution. This option is available only for PostScript printers. Downloading Asian fonts to a printer Select the Download Asian Fonts option in the Advanced Print Setup dialog box if you want to print a PDF with Asian fonts that are not installed on the printer or embedded in the document. (Embedded fonts are downloaded whether or not this option is selected.) You can use this option with a PostScript Level 2 or higher printer. To make Asian fonts available for downloading to a printer, be sure you have downloaded the fonts to your computer using the Custom or Complete installation option during installation of Acrobat. If Download Asian Fonts is not selected, the PDF prints correctly only if the referenced fonts are installed on the printer. If the printer has similar fonts, the printer substitutes those. If there are no suitable fonts on the printer, Courier is used for the text. If Download Asian Fonts does not produce the results you want, print the PDF as a bitmap image. Printing a document as an image may take longer than using a substituted printer font. Note: Some fonts cannot be downloaded to a printer, either because the font is a bitmap or because font embedding is restricted in that document. In these cases, a substitute font is used for printing, and the printed output may not match the screen display. Output options Use the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box to set output options. Color Presents composite and separations options. Other options become available in the Output panel depending on your selection in this menu. Color Profile Determines the profile used for handling colors during printing. • Printer/PostScript Color Management Sends the document’s color data along with the document profile directly to the PostScript printer and lets the printer convert the document to the printer color space. The exact results of the color conversion can vary among printers. To use PostScript color management, you must have a printer that uses PostScript Level 2 or later; it’s not necessary to install an ICC profile for the printer on your system. • Same as Source (No Color Management) Discards all color management information and sends device color to the printer, whether or not the document contains color management information. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 451 User Guide Apply Output Preview Settings Simulates the print space defined by the device identified in the Simulation Profile menu of the Output Preview dialog box (choose Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview). This option allows you to simulate the appearance of one device on another. Simulate Overprinting Simulates the effects of overprinting spot inks in composite output and converts spot colors to process colors for printing; the document itself is unchanged. This option is useful for printing devices that don’t support overprinting and is available only if you choose Composite from the Color menu. If you intend to use a file for separations on a RIP (raster image processor) or for final output, don’t select this option. Important: When printing to a printer that supports overprinting, make sure that this option is unselected, so the printer’s native overprinting capabilities are used. Transparency Flattener Preset Flattens transparent objects according to the preset you choose. Use Maximum Available JPEG2000 Image Resolution Controls how resolution progression information, if present, is used when generating PostScript. When selected, the maximum resolution data contained in the image is used. When unselected, the resolution data is consistent with the resolution settings on the Transparency Flattening panel. Ink Manager Modifies the way inks are treated while the current PDF is open. See also “Ink Manager overview” on page 476 About halftone screen frequency In commercial printing, continuous tone is simulated by dots (called halftone dots) printed in rows (called lines or line screens). Lines are printed at different angles to make the rows less noticeable. The Screening menu in the Output section of the Print dialog box displays the recommended sets of line screens in lines per inch (lpi), and resolution in dots per inch (dpi), based on the currently selected PPD. As you select inks in the ink list, the values in the Frequency and Angle boxes change, showing you the halftone screen frequency and angle for that ink. A high line-screen ruling (for example, 150 lpi) spaces the dots closely together to create a finely rendered image on the press; a low line-screen ruling (60 lpi to 85 lpi) spaces the dots farther apart to create a coarser image. The size of the dots is also determined by the line screen. A high line-screen ruling uses small dots; a low line-screen ruling uses large dots. The most important factor in choosing a line-screen ruling is the type of printing press your job will use. Ask your service provider how fine a line screen its press can hold, and make your choices accordingly. B D A C Line screens A. 65 lpi: Coarse screen for printing newsletters and grocery coupons B. 85 lpi: Average screen for printing newspapers C. 133 lpi: High-quality screen for printing four-color magazines D. 177 lpi: Very fine screen for printing annual reports and images in art books ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 452 User Guide The PPD files for high-resolution imagesetters offer a wide range of possible screen frequencies, paired with various imagesetter resolutions. The PPD files for low-resolution printers typically have only a few choices for line screens, usually coarser screens of between 53 lpi and 85 lpi. The coarser screens, however, give optimum results on low-resolution printers. Using a finer screen of 100 lpi, for example, actually decreases the quality of your image when you use a low-resolution printer for final output. Specify halftone screen frequency ? In the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, do one of the following: • To select one of the preset screen frequencies and printer resolution combinations, choose an option from the Screening menu. • To specify a custom halftone screen frequency, in the ink list, select the plate to be customized, and then enter the lpi value in the Frequency box and a screen angle value in the Angle box. Note: Before creating your own halftone screens, check with your print service provider for the preferred frequencies and angles. Also, be aware that some output devices override the default frequencies and angles. About emulsion and image exposure Depending on the type of printing press used and how information is transferred from the film to the printing plates, you may need to give your service provider film negatives or positives, with emulsion side up or down. Emulsion refers to the photosensitive layer on a piece of film or paper. Typically, print service providers require negative film in the United States and positive film in Europe and Japan. Check with your service provider to determine which emulsion direction they prefer. To tell whether you are looking at the emulsion side or the nonemulsion side (also referred to as the base), examine the final film under a good light. One side appears shinier than the other. The dull side is the emulsion side; the shiny side is the base. A B C Emulsion options A. Positive image B. Negative C. Negative with emulsion side down Important: The emulsion and image exposure settings in the Print dialog box override any conflicting settings in the printer driver. Always specify print settings using the Print dialog box. Specify the emulsion and image exposure 1 Select Output on the left side of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. 2 For Color, choose Separations. 3 For Flip, select one of the following options: None Makes no changes to the orientation of the imageable area. Type that is in the image is readable (that is, “right reading”) when the photosensitive layer is facing you. This is the default. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 453 User Guide Horizontal Mirrors the imageable area across a vertical axis so that it is “wrong reading.” Vertical Mirrors the imageable area across a horizontal axis so that it is upside down. Horizontal And Vertical Mirrors the imageable area across the horizontal and vertical axes so that it is wrong reading. Type is readable when the photosensitive layer is facing away from you. Images printed on film are often printed Horizontal And Vertical. 4 Select the Negative option for negative film; deselect it for positive film. Note: The Negative option is also available if you choose In-RIP Separations from the Color menu. Include marks and bleeds You can place printer marks on the page to indicate the boundaries of document boxes supported by Adobe PDF, such as trim boxes and bleed boxes. These marks are not added as page content; however, they are included in the PostScript output. The options in the Marks And Bleeds panel are unavailable under these circumstances: • The PDF includes printer marks added using a different Acrobat feature, the Add Printer Marks tool. • The crop, bleed, and trim boxes are all the same size. The crop box is defined in the Crop Box dialog box (choose Advanced > Print Production > Crop Pages). If the artwork contains a bleed, make sure that the crop box is big enough to accommodate the bleed box and other printer marks. A D E C B Printer marks A. Trim marks B. Registration marks C. Page information D. Color bars E. Bleed marks 1 Select Marks And Bleeds on the left side of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. 2 Choose the printer marks you want. The marks appear in the preview on the left side of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. See also “Embed printer marks in a PDF” on page 478 Marks And Bleeds options All Marks Creates all printer marks at once. Line Weight Determines the weight of the lines for trim, bleed, and registration marks. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 454 User Guide Style Determines the appearance of the marks. You can choose default InDesign marks, or marks from other appli­ cations as listed. Trim Marks Places a mark at each corner of the trim area to indicate the PDF trim box boundaries. Bleed Marks Places a mark at each corner of the bleed box to indicate the PDF bleed box boundaries. A bleed box defines the amount of extra area to image outside the defined page size. Registration Marks Places marks outside the crop area for aligning the different separations in a color document. Color Bars Adds a small square of color for each grayscale or process color. Spot colors converted to process colors are represented using process colors. Your service provider uses these marks to adjust ink density on the printing press. Page Information Places page information outside the crop area of the page. Page information includes the filename, page number, current date and time, and color separation name. Printing color Preview how colors overprint Overprint Preview mode provides an on-screen simulation that approximates how blending and overprinting will appear in color-separated output. Overprinting effects can also be simulated when you output to a composite printing device. Both of these methods are useful for proofing documents that will be color separated. Compare appearance of artwork on-screen (left) with printed artwork (right). ? With the PDF open, choose Advanced > Print Production > Overprint Preview. The overprint display turns on or off. If overprint previewing is on, a check mark appears next to the Overprint Preview command. Managing color When you print a color-managed RGB or CMYK document, you can specify additional color management options to keep color consistent in the output. For example, suppose the document contains a profile tailored for prepress output, but you want to proof the colors on a desktop printer. In the Output panel of the Advanced Print settings dialog box, you can temporarily convert the document’s colors to the color space of the desktop printer—the printer profile is used instead of the current document profile when printing. In addition, you can send color data as RGB values to printers using various RGB profiles. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 455 User Guide See also “Understanding color management” on page 417 “Keeping colors consistent” on page 419 “Color-managing documents when printing” on page 427 “Working with color profiles” on page 429 About composite printing When you print a color PDF, all of the colors used in the file print on one plate. This process is called composite printing. The options available in the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box depend on the selected printer. Artwork that will be commercially reproduced and that contains more than a single color must be printed on separate master plates, one for each color. This process is called color separation. If you’re creating color separations, you can print a color or grayscale composite proof to check your work. Note: To create color separations, you need Acrobat 8 Professional or Acrobat 3D Version 8. Consider the following issues when printing composites: • Any overprinting options that you select print correctly only on a printer that supports overprinting. Since most desktop printers don’t support overprinting, you can simulate the effects of overprinting by selecting Simulate Overprinting in the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. Be aware that selecting Simulate Overprinting converts spot colors to process colors for printing. If you intend to use a file for final output, do not select this option. • When you print to a black-and-white printer, a grayscale composite version of the pages is produced (unless you select Print Color As Black in the main Print dialog box; this option prints all nonwhite color as black). If the document contains color, visually correct grays are used to simulate that color. For example, the gray that simulates a 20% tint of yellow is lighter than a 20% tint of black, since yellow is visually lighter than black. Note: Remember that, like monitors, color printers vary greatly in color reproduction quality; thus, proofs from your service provider are the best way to verify how the finished piece will look. See also “About separations” on page 456 Print a color composite 1 Choose File > Print, and choose a printer. 2 Specify page handling options. 3 Choose Document And Stamps from the Comments And Forms menu to print all visible content. 4 Click Advanced, and select Output on the left side of the dialog box. 5 Choose a composite option from the Color menu. 6 Specify other color and output settings, and click OK. 7 If the document contains objects with transparency settings, select an option from the Transparency Flattening Preset menu. 8 (PostScript printing only) In the PostScript Options panel, specify options. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 456 User Guide See also “About flattening” on page 480 About separations To produce high-quality separations, it helps to be familiar with the basics of printing, including line screens, resolution, process colors, and spot colors. If you are using a print service provider to produce separations, you’ll want to work closely with its experts before beginning each job and during the process. To reproduce color and continuous-tone images, printers usually separate artwork into four plates—one plate for each of the cyan (C), yellow (Y), magenta (M), and black (K) portions of the image. When inked with the appropriate color and printed in register with one another, these colors combine to reproduce the original artwork. The process of dividing the image into two or more colors is called color separating, and the films from which the plates are created are called the separations. Composite (left) and separations (right) Print color separations Acrobat supports host-based separations and in-RIP separations. The main difference between them is where the separations are created—at the host computer (the system using Acrobat and the printer driver) or at the output device’s RIP. For host-based separations, Acrobat creates PostScript information for each of the separations required for the document and sends that information to the output device. For in-RIP separations, the work of separating a file is performed by the RIP. This method often takes less time than creating host-based separations, but it requires a PostScript 3 output device with in-RIP separation capability. To produce in-RIP separations, you need a PPD file that supports in-RIP separations, and any PostScript 3 output device or a PostScript Level 2 device whose RIP supports in-RIP separations. See also “Previewing output” on page 469 “About preflight inspections” on page 488 Prepare to print separations ? Before you print separations, do the following: • Calibrate your monitor. See “Calibrate and profile your monitor” on page 431. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 457 User Guide • Specify whether the document contains trapping information, if known. See “Declare the presence of trapping information” on page 457. • Preview separations and transparency flattening results. See “Preview color separations” on page 471 and “Preview which areas of artwork will be flattened” on page 482. • Run preflight inspections using desired criteria. See “Preflight profiles” on page 498. Note: If you use a print service provider to produce separations, you’ll want to work closely with its experts before beginning each job and throughout the process. Print separations 1 Choose File > Print, and choose a printer. 2 Choose an option from the Comments And Forms menu. 3 Choose print range and page handling options. 4 Click Advanced. 5 If you created a custom printer settings file with the appropriate separation settings, choose it from the Settings menu at the top of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. 6 Select Output on the left, and choose an option from the Color menu: • Choose Separations if the PPD doesn’t support in-RIP separations. • Choose In-RIP Separations if the PPD supports in-RIP separations. Trapping options appear. From the menu, choose Adobe In-RIP or Off. If you choose Adobe In-RIP, click Trap Presets and select a preset. Click OK. 7 Specify settings for halftone screen frequency and the angle at which the selected ink’s halftone screen is rotated. 8 If the document contains objects with transparency settings, select an option from the Transparency Flattening Preset menu. 9 Under Ink Manager, deselect any color you don’t want to separate. The four process colors (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) always appear at the top of the color plate list, followed by spot colors in alphabetical order. 10 Click the Ink Manager button to modify ink settings for color separations. 11 Click Marks And Bleeds on the left, and select All Marks. 12 Click PostScript Options on the left, and select settings as needed. Click OK to close the dialog box, and then click OK again to print the separations. Declare the presence of trapping information If you are sending your PDF files to a print service provider, you can use the Document Properties dialog box to specify whether a PDF contains trapping information. This detail can help prevent the service provider from adding potentially conflicting trapping commands to the file. Trapping information can either be imported with other PostScript information from the authoring application, or it can be created in Acrobat using trapping presets supported by Adobe In-RIP Trapping. 1 Open the PDF file, and choose File > Properties. 2 Click the Advanced tab. 3 Choose an option from the Trapped menu, and click OK. Ye s The file contains trapping information. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 458 User Guide No The file doesn’t contain trapping information. Unknown You don’t know whether the file contains trapping information. See also “Adobe In-RIP trapping” on page 462 Saving separations as PostScript Depending on the prepress software available, a service provider may be able to perform such prepress activities as trapping, imposition, separating, and OPI replacement at the output device’s RIP. Therefore, your service provider may prefer to receive a composite PostScript file of the document optimized for in-RIP separations rather than a preseparated PostScript file. Saving the file as PostScript preserves the separation settings, the PPD information, and any color conversions you have specified in the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. For best results when generating PostScript for reuse in a print production workflow, use the Save As command rather than the Print To File option available in the Print dialog box. See also “PostScript options” on page 449 459 Chapter 16: Print production tools Whether you’re a designer working on a creative piece or a print service provider preparing an Adobe PDF for final output, you’ll find the print production tools essential to getting your job done. Quickstart The following topics provide overview steps for some common print production tasks. Convert colors to a different space For high-end output, you can convert document colors to a different color space—for example, from RGB to CMYK. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Convert Colors. 2 For each of the document colors listed, select a conversion option from the Action menu. 3 Specify the destination space profile, blending profile, and other conversion options. Use the TouchUp Object tool (Tools > Advanced Editing) to convert the color space of individual objects. See also “Convert colors to a different color space” on page 474 Separate spot colors as process Converting a spot color is useful if the PDF contains more spot colors than are practical to print. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Ink Manager. 2 Do one of the following: • To convert individual colors, click the ink-type icon to the left of the spot color. • To convert all spot colors, click Convert All Spots To Process. Converting all spot colors removes ink aliases and may affect overprinting and trapping settings. See also “Separate spot colors as process” on page 477 Add printer marks Add printer marks to a PDF to aid in prepress file preparation. You can add trim, bleed, and registration marks, as well as color bars and page information. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Add Printer Marks. 2 Specify the desired marks. 3 Specify the pages to mark. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 460 User Guide You can also add marks temporarily to a document using the Advanced Print Setup dialog box. See also “Embed printer marks in a PDF” on page 478 Preview transparency flattening Use the transparency preview options to view objects in a PDF that are transparent, as well as those that will be affected by transparency flattening. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Flattener Preview. 2 Select a preview setting from the Highlight menu and a resolution level from the Preset menu. 3 Set desired options, such as the raster-to-vector balance and the line art, text, gradient, and mesh resolutions. 4 Specify where you want to apply the changes. See also “Transparency flattening” on page 480 Create flattener presets You can automate the flattening process by saving flattening settings in a transparency flattener preset. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Flattener Preview. 2 Choose the preset you want to base your new preset on, and then change the settings as desired. 3 Click Save and name the new preset. If you need to start over, press the Reset button. Custom presets are immediately available from the Preset menu. See also “Create a flattener preset” on page 485 Tools for high-end output Print production tools overview Adobe Acrobat adds sophisticated print production tools that enable a complete PDF workflow for high-end color output. The print production tools are in the Advanced menu and on the Print Production toolbar. A B C D E F G H I J K Print Production toolbar A. Trap Presets B. Output Preview C. Preflight D. Convert Colors E. Ink Manager F. Add Printer Marks G. Crop Pages H. Fix Hairlines I. Flattener Preview J. PDF Optimizer K. JDF Job Definitions ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 461 User Guide Open the Print Production toolbar ? Choose Advanced > Print Production > Show Print Production Toolbar. Print Production tools Trap Presets Allows you to create and apply trap settings for later execution by an Adobe PostScript 3 RIP that licenses Adobe In-RIP Trapping. Output Preview Combines separation preview, soft proofing, color warnings, the full Ink Manager, and more in one convenient dialog box. Preflight Allows you to perform more than 400 predefined checks for all the common output errors that can come with a designer’s file, and then correct all fixable errors. Preflight also checks files for PDF/X compliance, password protection of preflight profiles, PostScript level compatibility, and more. Convert Colors Converts RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale color spaces to the target color space. Convert Colors also allows you to embed PDFs with ICC profiles. Ink Manager Modifies the way inks are treated while the current PDF is open. The Acrobat Ink Manager uses the same options and controls as other Adobe applications. Add Printer Marks Adds standard printer marks to a PDF page for positioning. These marks are embedded in the PDF. Crop Pages Allows you to define the crop, trim, bleed, art, and media boxes on a page. The elements are important for proper page positioning and placement of printer marks, especially for imposition. Fix Hairlines Finds hairlines and replaces them with heavier-weight lines. Flattener Preview Provides flattener presets to control the amount of rasterization that occurs during print output or export to certain file formats, such as EPS. You can save these settings as a preset for future use. This tool also includes a preview for viewing transparent objects and the effects your settings will have on those objects. PDF Optimizer Provides many settings for inspecting, analyzing, and repairing documents, as well as eliminating unneeded content to reduce file size. JDF Job Definitions Allows you to create custom job definitions that can be edited and used in a production environment. The JDF file may also include information necessary for the creation of PDFs appropriate for the production process, including PDF conversion settings and preflight profiles. Trapping color About ink trapping When an offset printed document uses more than one ink on the same page, each ink must be printed in register (perfectly aligned) with any other inks that it abuts, so that there is no gap where the different inks meet. However, it’s impossible to ensure exact registration for every object on every sheet of paper running through a printing press, so misregistration of inks can occur. Misregistration causes an unintended gap between inks. You can compensate for misregistration by slightly expanding one object so that it overlaps an object of a different color—a process known as trapping. By default, placing one ink over another knocks out, or removes, any inks under­ neath to prevent unwanted color mixing; but trapping requires that inks overprint, or print on top of each other, so that at least a partial overlap is achieved. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 462 User Guide Misregistration with no trap (left) and with trap (right) Most traps employ spreading—expanding a light object into a dark object. Because the darker of two adjacent colors defines the visible edge of the object or text, expanding the lighter color slightly into the darker color maintains the visual edge. Adobe In-RIP trapping Acrobat can automatically trap color documents with the Adobe In-RIP Trapping engine, which is available on Adobe PostScript output devices that support Adobe In-RIP Trapping. Adobe In-RIP Trapping can precisely calculate and apply any necessary adjustments to the edges of type and graphics throughout your document. It can apply effective trapping techniques to different parts of a single object, even if the object overlaps several different background colors. Trapping adjustments are made automatically, and you can define trap presets to address the trapping requirements of specific page ranges. The effects of trapping are apparent only on color separations generated by the trapping engine; you cannot see the results on-screen within the program. The trapping engine decides where to trap by detecting contrasting color edges. It then creates traps based on the neutral densities (lightness or darkness) of abutting colors, in most cases by spreading lighter colors into adjacent darker colors. The trapping settings you specify in the Trap Presets palette modify the trapping engine’s results. Requirements Adobe In-RIP Trapping requires the following software and hardware: • A PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file for a printer that supports Adobe In-RIP Trapping. You must select this PPD by using the operating system driver. • An Adobe PostScript Level 2 or later output device that uses a RIP that supports Adobe In-RIP Trapping. To find out if a PostScript output device supports Adobe In-RIP Trapping, contact the manufacturer or your print service provider. See also “About PPD files” on page 448 Trap a PDF Trapping is a complex process that depends on the interaction of various color, ink, and printing factors; the correct settings vary, depending on specific press conditions. Do not change the default trap settings unless you’ve consulted with your print service provider. 1 If necessary, choose Advanced > Print Production > Trap Presets to create a trap preset with custom settings for your document and printing press conditions. 2 Assign the trap preset to a page range. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 463 User Guide 3 Choose File > Print to open the Print dialog box, and then click Advanced. 4 Select Output from the list on the left. 5 For Color, choose In-RIP Separations. 6 For Trapping, choose Adobe In-RIP. Note: This option works only when you target an output device that supports Adobe In-RIP Trapping. 7 Click Ink Manager. As necessary, select an ink, specify the following options (only if your service provider recom­ mends changing the settings), and then click OK: Type Choose an ink type that describes the selected ink. Neutral Density Type a value that differs from the default. Trapping Sequence Type a value to set the order in which inks are printed. 8 Continue specifying other print options, and then click OK to print your document. See also “Adjusting ink neutral density values” on page 468 “Customize trapping for specialty inks” on page 468 “Adjust the trapping sequence” on page 469 Specify settings using trap presets A trap preset is a collection of trap settings you can apply to pages in a PDF. Use the Trap Presets dialog box for entering trap settings and saving a collection of settings as a trap preset. If you don’t apply a trap preset to a trapping page range, that page range will use the [Default] trap preset, a collection of typical trap settings that are applied to all pages of a new document. Note: In Acrobat, trap presets and their assignments apply to the document only while it is open; trap settings are not saved in the PDF. This behavior is different from InDesign, where trap presets and their assignments are saved with the InDesign document. Create or modify a trap preset 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Trap Presets. 2 Select an existing preset as a starting point, and then click Create. 3 Specify the following options, and then click OK: Name Type a name for the preset. You cannot change the name of either of the two built-in presets: [No Trap Preset] and [Default]. Trap Width Type values to specify the amount of overlap for inks. Trap Appearance Specify options for controlling the shape of the traps. Images Specify settings that determine how to trap imported bitmap images. Trap Thresholds Type values to specify the conditions under which trapping occurs. Many variables affect the values you’ll need to enter here. For more information, consult with your print service provider, and see the other trapping topics. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 464 User Guide Delete a trap preset 1 In the Assign Trap Presets dialog box, select the preset(s), and then click the Delete button. 2 Click OK to confirm the deletion. Note: You cannot delete either of the two built-in presets: [No Trap Preset] and [Default]. Assign a trap preset to pages You can assign a trap preset to a document or to a range of pages in a document. Pages with no abutting colors will print faster if you disable trapping on those pages. Trapping doesn’t actually occur until you print the document. Trap assignments list presets you have applied to various pages; trap assignments are updated each time you click Assign. 1 In the Assign Trap Presets dialog box, click Assign. 2 For Trap Preset, choose the preset you want to apply. 3 Select the pages you want to apply the trap preset to. 4 Click Assign, and then click OK. Note: If you click OK without clicking Assign, the dialog box closes without making any changes to the trap assignments. Trap assignments previously made using the Assign button are preserved. Disable trapping on pages 1 In the Trap Presets dialog box, click Assign. 2 Select the pages you want to disable trapping on and choose [No Trap Preset] in the Trap Preset menu. 3 Click Assign, and then click OK. Trap preset options You can change trap preset options whenever you create or edit a trap preset. The same trap preset options are available in Acrobat and InDesign. In Acrobat, you can view trap presets by choosing Tools > Print Production > Trap Presets. In InDesign, choose Window > Output > Trap Presets. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 465 User Guide Trap widths Trap width is the amount of overlap for each trap. Differences in paper characteristics, screen rulings, and printing press conditions require different trap widths. To determine the appropriate trap widths for each job, consult your commercial printer. Default Specifies the trap width in points for trapping all colors except those involving solid black. The default value is 0p0.25. Black Indicates the distance that inks spread into solid black, or the holdback amount—the distance between black edges and underlying inks for trapping rich blacks. The default value is 0p0.5. This value is often set to be 1.5 to 2 times the value of the default trap width. In InDesign, the value you set for Black Color determines the value for a solid black or a rich black, a process black (K) ink mixed with color inks for increased opacity and richer color. Note: (InDesign) If you choose Application Built-In trapping, and you specify a Default trap width or Black trap width larger than 4 points, the resulting trap width is limited to 4 points. However, the value you specified will continue to be displayed, because if you switch to Adobe In-RIP Trapping, traps larger than 4 points are applied as you specified. Trap appearance A join is where two trap edges meet at a common end point. You can control the shape of the outside join of two trap segments and the intersection of three traps. Join Style Controls the shape of the outside join of two trap segments. Choose from Miter, Round, and Bevel. The default is Miter, which matches earlier trapping results to retain compatibility with previous versions of the Adobe Trapping Engine. Trap join examples, left to right: miter join, round join, bevel join End Style Controls the intersection of three-way traps. Miter (the default) shapes the end of the trap to keep it away from the intersecting object. Miter also matches earlier trapping results to retain compatibility with previous versions of the Adobe Trapping Engine. Overlap affects the shape of the trap generated by the lightest neutral density object that intersects with two or more darker objects. The end of the lightest trap is wrapped around the point where the three objects intersect. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 466 User Guide Close-up of trap end examples: miter (left) and overlap (right) Trap thresholds You can adjust trap thresholds, as recommended by your prepress service provider, to correspond to your printing conditions. Step Specifies the color change threshold at which the trapping engine creates a trap. Some jobs need only the most extreme color changes trapped, while others require traps for more subtle color changes. The Step value indicates the degree to which components (such as CMYK values) of abutting colors must vary before trapping occurs. To change how much the component inks in abutting colors can vary before causing those colors to trap, increase or decrease the value for Step. The lower the Step value, the more often traps are created between colors. The default is 10%. For best results, use a value from 8% to 20%. Lower percentages increase sensitivity to color differences and result in more traps. Black Color Indicates the minimum amount of black ink required before the Black trap width setting is applied. The default value is 100%. For best results, use a value no lower than 70%. Black Density Indicates the neutral density value at or above which InDesign considers an ink to be black. For example, if you want a dark spot ink to use the Black trap width setting, enter the neutral density value here. This value is typically set near the default of 1.6. Sliding Trap Indicates the percentage difference (between the neutral densities of abutting colors) at which the trap is moved from the darker side of a color edge toward the centerline, to prevent abrupt shifts in trap placement and create a more elegant trap. During trapping, the trapping engine adjusts (slides) the trap position—from spreading the lighter color into the darker one, to straddling the centerline between them. For example, setting the Sliding Trap value to 70% moves the point at which the trap begins to straddle the centerline to the location where the lighter color exceeds 70% of the darker color in neutral density (lighter color’s neutral density divided by darker color’s neutral density > 0.70). Colors of identical neutral density will always have their traps exactly straddle the centerline, unless the Sliding Trap is set to 100%. Trap Color Reduction Indicates the degree to which components from abutting colors are used to reduce the trap color. This setting is useful for preventing certain abutting colors (such as pastels) from making an unsightly trap that is darker than either color. Specifying a Trap Color Reduction lower than 100% begins to lighten the color of the trap; a Trap Color Reduction value of 0% makes a trap with a neutral density equal to the neutral density of the darker color. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 467 User Guide Trapping imported graphics You can create a trap preset to control traps within images, and to control traps between bitmap images (such as photographs and those saved in raster PDF files) and vector objects (such as those from a drawing program and vector PDF files). Each trapping engine handles imported graphics differently. It’s important to be aware of these differences when setting trapping options. Trap Placement Provides options for determining where the trap falls when you trap vector objects (including objects drawn in InDesign) to bitmap images. All options except Neutral Density create a visually consistent edge. Center creates a trap that straddles the edge between objects and images. Choke causes objects to overlap the abutting image. Neutral Density applies the same trapping rules as used elsewhere in the document. Trapping an object to a photograph with the Neutral Density setting can result in noticeably uneven edges as the trap moves from one side of the edge to another. Spread causes the bitmap image to overlap the abutting object. Trap Objects To Images Ensures that vector objects (such as frames used as keylines) trap to images, using the Trap Placement settings. If vector objects don’t overlap images in a trapping page range, consider turning this option off to speed trapping of that page range. Trap Images To Images Turns on trapping along the boundary of overlapping or abutting bitmap images. This feature is on by default. Trap Images Internally Turns on trapping among colors within each individual bitmap image (not just where they touch vector artwork and text). Use this option only for page ranges containing simple, high-contrast images, such as screen shots or cartoons. Leave it unselected for continuous-tone and other complicated images, as it will create bad traps. Trapping is faster when this option is unselected. Trap 1-Bit Images Ensures that 1-bit images trap to abutting objects. This option doesn’t use the Image Trap Placement settings, because 1-bit images use only one color. In most cases, leave this option selected. In some cases, such as with 1-bit images where pixels are widely spaced, selecting this option may darken the image and slow the trapping. About trapping black When creating or editing presets, the value you type for Black Color determines what is considered solid black and rich black. A rich black is any black color that uses a support screen—additional percentages of one or more process inks to strengthen the black. The Black Color setting is useful when you must compensate for extreme dot gain (as when using low-grade paper stock). These situations cause black percentages lower than 100% to print as solid areas. By screening back blacks or rich blacks (using tints of solid black) and decreasing the Black Color setting from its default of 100%, you can compensate for dot gain and ensure that the trapping engine will apply the proper trap width and placement to black objects. When a color reaches the Black Color value, the Black trap width value is applied to all abutting colors, and keepaway traps are applied to rich black areas using the Black trap width value. If support screens extend all the way to the edge of a black area, any misregistration causes the edges of support screens to become visible, creating an unwanted halo or distorting the edges of objects. The trapping engine uses a keepaway, or a holdback, for rich blacks to keep support screens a specified distance away from edges of reversed-out or light elements in the foreground, so that the light elements retain their sharpness. You control the distance of support screens from the edges of black areas by specifying the Black trap width value. Note: Don’t worry that the Black trap width setting will be too wide for trapping thin elements, such as black keylines around graphics. In those cases, the trapping engine automatically overrides the Black trap width setting and limits the trap to half the width of the thin element. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 468 User Guide Adjusting ink neutral density values By adjusting the ink neutral density (ND) values that the selected trapping engine uses, you can determine the precise placement of traps. The default ND values for process inks are based on the neutral density readings of process ink swatches that conform to industry standards in different parts of the world. The language version deter­ mines which standard it conforms to. For example, the ND values for the U.S. English and Canadian versions conform to the Specifications for Web Offset Publications (SWOP) solid ink density values published by the Graphic Arts Technical Foundation of North America. You can adjust process ink neutral densities to match printing industry standards in other parts of the world. The trapping engine derives the ND values for a spot color from its CMYK equivalent. For most spot colors, the ND values of their CMYK equivalents are accurate enough for proper trap creation. Spot inks that aren’t easily simulated using process inks, such as metallic inks and varnishes, may need their ND values adjusted so that the trapping engine can trap them correctly. By typing new values, you can ensure that an ink that is observably darker or lighter is recognized that way by the trapping engine; the appropriate trap placement is then applied automatically. You can get the appropriate neutral density value for a given ink by asking your commercial printer. The most accurate method of determining an ink’s ND value is by measuring a swatch of the ink with a commercial densito­ meter. Read the “V” or visual density of the ink (don’t use process filters). If the value differs from the default setting, type the new value in the ND text box. Note: Changing the neutral density for a spot color affects only how that color will trap. It doesn’t change the appearance of that color in your document. Follow these guidelines when adjusting ND values: Metallic and opaque inks Metallic inks are usually darker than their CMYK equivalents, while opaque inks obscure any ink beneath them. In general, you should set the ND values for both metallic and opaque spot colors much higher than their default values to ensure that these spot colors won’t spread. Note: Setting an ink to Opaque or Opaque Ignore in the Type menu of the Ink Manager prevents an opaque ink from spreading into other colors, unless another opaque ink has a higher ND value. Pastel inks These inks are normally lighter than their process equivalents. You may want to set the ND value for these inks lower than their default values to ensure that they spread into adjacent darker colors. Other spot inks Some spot colors, such as turquoise or neon orange, are significantly darker or lighter than their CMYK equivalents. You can determine whether this is the case by comparing printed swatches of the actual spot inks to printed swatches of their CMYK equivalents. You can adjust the spot ink’s ND value higher or lower as necessary. Customize trapping for specialty inks Using certain inks involves special trapping considerations. For example, if you are using a varnish on your document, you don’t want the varnish to affect trapping. However, if you’re overprinting certain areas with a completely opaque ink, you don’t need to create traps for items underneath. Ink options are available for these situa­ tions. It’s usually best not to change the default settings, unless your prepress service provider recommends changing them. Note: The speciality inks and varnishes used in the document may have been created by mixing two spot inks or by mixing a spot ink with one or more process inks. 1 Open the Ink Manager and select an ink that requires special treatment. 2 For Type, choose one of the following options, and then click OK: Normal Use for traditional process inks and most spot inks. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 469 User Guide Transparent Use for clear inks to ensure that underlying items trap. Use this option for varnishes and dieline inks. Opaque Use for heavy, nontransparent inks to prevent trapping of underlying colors but allow for trapping along the ink’s edges. Use this option for metallic inks. Opaque Ignore Use for heavy, nontransparent inks to prevent trapping of underlying colors and to prevent trapping along the ink’s edges. Use this option for those inks, such as metallics and varnishes, that have undesirable interac­ tions with other inks. Adjust the trapping sequence The trapping sequence (also called the trapping order) matches the order in which inks are printed at the press, but it doesn’t match the order in which separations are produced at the output device. The trapping sequence is particularly important when you’re printing with multiple opaque colors, such as metallic inks. Opaque inks with lower sequence numbers are spread under opaque inks with higher sequence numbers. This process prevents the last applied ink from being spread, and it still creates good traps. Note: Don’t alter the default trapping sequence without first consulting with your prepress service provider. 1 Open the Ink Manager. The current trapping sequence is displayed in the Sequence column of the inks list. 2 Select an ink, type a new value for Trapping Sequence, and then press Tab. The sequence number of the selected ink changes, and the other sequence numbers change accordingly. 3 Repeat the previous step for as many inks as necessary, and then click OK. Previewing output Output Preview dialog box overview The Output Preview dialog box simulates how your PDF looks in different conditions. The top part of the dialog box has several controls for previewing how your document will look in print. The Preview menu allows you to switch between previewing separations and previewing color warnings. When you select Separations, the bottom half of the dialog box lists information about the inks in the file, as well as ink warning controls and total area coverage controls. When you select Color Warnings, a warnings section replaces the separations section. The preview settings you specify in the Output Preview dialog box are reflected directly in the open document. Output Preview also includes access to the complete Ink Manager (as seen in the rest of Adobe Creative Suite) for remapping spot-color inks in both printing and previewing. Ink mapping for previewing only applies when the Output Preview dialog box is open. Note: If you are using a color management system (CMS) with accurately calibrated ICC profiles and have calibrated your monitor, the on-screen separation preview colors more closely match the final color separation output. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 470 User Guide C A B D F E G Output Preview dialog box with separations selected A. Simulation Profile B. Simulate options C. Show options D. Separations list E. Total Area Coverage options F. Ink percentages G. Color display option See also “About color profiles” on page 429 “About monitor calibration and characterization” on page 430 “Ink Manager overview” on page 476 “Soft-proofing colors” on page 425 Open the Output Preview dialog box ? Do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview. • Select the Output Preview tool on the Print Production toolbar. View colors by source space You can limit which colors are displayed in the preview. When you select a source color space, you see only the objects in that color space. Limiting colors is useful, for example, for seeing whether a page contains any RGB color or where a spot color is used. ? In the Output Preview dialog box, select All or a single source from the Show menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 471 User Guide Output Preview dialog box configured for showing spot colors Preview color separations You can preview separation plates and ink coverage to ensure that the printed piece meets your requirements. Although previewing separations on your monitor can help you detect problems without the expense of printing separations, it does not let you preview trapping, emulsion options, printer marks, and halftone screens and resolution. Those settings are best verified with your print service provider using integral or overlay proofs. Note: Objects on hidden layers are not included in an on-screen preview. 1 In the Output Preview dialog box, choose Separations from the Preview menu. 2 Do any of the following: • To view one or more separations, select the empty box to the left of each separation name. Each separation appears in its assigned color. • To hide one or more separations, deselect the box to the left of each separation name. • To view all process or spot plates at once, select the box for Process Plates or Spot Plates. Note: A single process or spot plate appears as a black plate. This makes objects on a light-colored plate, such as yellow, appear more visible. See also “Separate spot colors as process” on page 477 Check ink coverage Too much ink can saturate paper and cause drying problems or change the expected color characteristics of the document. Total Area Coverage specifies the total percentage of all inks used. For example, 280 means 280% ink coverage, which could be accomplished with 60C, 60M, 60Y, and 100K. Ask your print service provider for the maximum ink coverage of the press you will be printing on. You can then preview the document to identify areas where total ink coverage exceeds the press’s limit. 1 In the Output Preview dialog box, choose Separations from the Preview menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 472 User Guide 2 Do one of the following: • To check for specific area coverage, use the pointer to hover over that area in the document window. Ink coverage percentages appear in the ink list next to each ink name. • To check for total document coverage, select Total Area Coverage, and choose a number from the pop-up menu or type a percentage in the box. You can adjust ink coverage by converting some spot colors to process colors using the Ink Manager. View color warnings Output problems can occur when a document’s colors are not reproducible on a particular press, or when rich black is used unintentionally on type. To diagnose such color problems before handing off a PDF for high-end output, you can use the various color warnings in the Output Preview dialog box. Pixels in areas that trigger the warning are displayed in the warning color, which is identified by the swatch color next to the warning type. Output Preview dialog box configured for viewing color warnings 1 In the Output Preview dialog box, select the profile from the Simulation Profile menu that describes the target output device. 2 Choose Color Warnings from the Preview menu. 3 Select either or both of the following options: Show Overprinting Indicates where on the page overprinting will appear in color-separated output. If you select Simulate Overprinting in the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, you can also see overprinting effects when you output to a composite printing device. This option is useful for proofing color separations. Rich Black Indicates areas that will print as rich black—process black (K) ink mixed with color inks for increased opacity and richer color. Rich-black objects knock out the colors beneath, preventing background objects from showing through. This effect is usually desirable only for large, black, display type. In most cases, rich black is undesirable for body type, and is usually the result of an error, such as using RGB instead of CMYK for the type. To change the warning color used in the preview, select a color from the swatches color picker. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 473 User Guide See also “Soft-proof colors (Acrobat)” on page 427 Color conversion and ink management About color conversion Colors must often be converted when they are displayed on a monitor or sent to a printer. Conversion is necessary when the color models do not match (for example, when CMYK color is displayed on an RGB monitor, or when a document with images in an RGB color space is sent to a printer). Acrobat uses the source color spaces of objects in a PDF to determine what (if any) color conversion is required, for example, from RGB to CMYK. If a PDF contains objects with embedded color profiles, Acrobat manages the colors using the embedded profiles rather than the default color spaces. For images and other objects in the PDF that contain embedded color profiles, Acrobat uses the information in the profile to determine how to handle the appearance of the color. For objects with managed colors (those with embedded color profiles), this conversion is well understood. Unmanaged colors, however, do not use profiles, so one must be temporarily used for the purpose of conversion. The Color Management panel of the Preferences dialog box provides profiles for converting unmanaged colors. You can also select specific profiles based on local press conditions. See also “Why colors sometimes don’t match” on page 417 “Working with color profiles” on page 429 Convert Colors dialog box overview If your PDF will be output to a high-end device or incorporated in a prepress workflow, you can convert color objects in the document to CMYK or another color space. Unlike other Acrobat features that temporarily convert colors during printing or viewing, but leave the document colors unchanged, the Convert Colors feature actually changes the color values in the document. In the Convert Colors dialog box, you can convert the colors of a single page or an entire document. Note: The Convert Colors dialog box converts all colors in the document to the destination color space. To convert only the colors of selected objects, use the TouchUp Object tool. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 474 User Guide A B Convert Colors dialog box A. Document Colors B. Destination Space Profiles Open the Convert Colors dialog box ? Do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Print Production > Convert Colors. • Select the Convert Colors tool on the Print Production toolbar. Convert colors to a different color space Depending on the color spaces you select, color conversion either preserves, converts, or maps color values from the source color space to the specified destination space as follows: • Objects with untagged RGB data (DeviceRGB) convert from the working space RGB profile to the CMYK gamut of the destination space. The same is done with untagged CMYK (DeviceCMYK) and grayscale (DeviceGray) values. • Objects in device-independent color spaces (CalGray, CalRGB, or Lab) can be preserved or converted. If converted, Acrobat uses the device-independent object’s embedded profile information. • Objects set in spot colors (including Separation, DeviceN, and NChannel color spaces) can be preserved, converted, or mapped (aliased) to any other ink present in the document. Spot colors can also be mapped to a CMYK process color, if the process color model of the destination space is CMYK. Spot colors mapped to other inks can be previewed in the Output Preview dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 475 User Guide See also “Working with color profiles” on page 429 “Previewing output” on page 469 “Create an ink alias for a spot color” on page 478 “About rendering intents” on page 438 Convert document colors 1 In the Convert Colors dialog box, select an option from the list of color spaces and colorants used in the document. 2 Select an option from the Action menu: Preserve Keeps objects in the selected color space when the document is output. Convert Uses the destination space profile to convert color objects to a common ICC profile for an output device. Decalibrate Removes embedded profiles from the color objects in that color space (or alternate space, if one is specified for a spot color). Map To Process [color] Maps spot colors to the destination space by way of another ink, called an alias. The Convert Colors dialog box uses the settings in the Ink Manager as a starting point. If an alias is set up in the Ink Manger, it will also be set up in the Convert Colors dialog box. 3 Specify the space to which colors will be converted. The destination profile defines the target output device for the converted color spaces. 4 If the PDF includes groups of transparent objects, specify a blending space for the pages set for conversion. Choose a device space or an ICC profile. The blending space enables objects of multiple color spaces to blend when interacting transparently. If the PDF does not include transparency groups, choose Leave Unchanged. Note: This feature can improve output of legacy PDFs that use transparency but don’t specify a page-level blending space, such as PDFs created from non-Adobe applications, or versions of Illustrator older than Creative Suite. These older PDFs depend on the application or printer to choose the blending space. 5 Specify the pages to convert. 6 Select a conversion option: Embed Profile As Source Color Space Tags all objects with the destination profile selected in the Profile menu. As an example, a document might contain five objects: one in grayscale and two each in the RGB and CMYK color spaces. In this case, you can embed a separate color profile to calibrate the color for each color space, for a total of three profiles. This might be useful if your RIP performs color management of PDFs or if you are sharing PDFs with other users. Embed Profile As OutputIntent Uses the destination profile as the output intent. An output intent describes the color reproduction characteristics of a possible output device or production environment in which the document will be printed. The color spaces in the document will be DeviceGray, DeviceRGB, or DeviceCMYK, depending on the color model of the destination profile. This destination profile replaces any existing output intent. Don’t Embed Profile Does not tag objects with the profile. Preserve Black Objects Preserves the color values of objects drawn in CMYK, RGB, or grayscale during conversion. This option prevents text in RGB black from being converted to rich black when converted to CMYK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 476 User Guide Convert object colors If certain objects in the PDF don’t match the color space of the document, you can use the TouchUp Object tool to correct them. Unlike the Convert Colors tool , which changes the color space of all colors in a PDF, the TouchUp Object tool can change the color space of selected objects. For example, if you place an RGB image in a CMYK document, you can use this tool to change only the RGB image and not affect the colors in the rest of the PDF. You can change the color space temporarily or embed the profile with the object. Note: The TouchUp Object tool doesn’t let you change the output intent, because that affects the entire document. 1 Choose Tools > Advanced Editing > TouchUp Object tool, and select the objects you want to convert. 2 Right-click/Control-click the selection, and choose Properties. 3 Click the Color tab. 4 From the Convert To menu, choose the profile for specifying the color space of the object. The current color space of a single object (or identical color spaces for multiple objects) appears at the top of the Color tab for reference. Different color spaces for multiple objects aren’t shown. 5 From the Rendering Intent menu, choose the translation method appropriate for the object. 6 (Optional) To embed the profile with the object, select Embed Profile. 7 Click Convert Colors. Ink Manager overview The Ink Manager provides control over inks at output time. Changes you make using the Ink Manager affect the output, not how the colors are defined in the document. Ink Manager options are especially useful for print service providers. For example, if a process job includes a spot color, a service provider can open the document and change the spot color to the equivalent CMYK process color. If a document contains two similar spot colors when only one is required, or if the same spot color has two different names, a service provider can map the two to a single alias. In a trapping workflow, the Ink Manager lets you set the ink density for controlling when trapping takes place, and it lets you set the correct number and sequence of inks. Note: InDesign and Acrobat share the same Ink Manager technology. However, only InDesign has the Use Standard Lab Values For Spots option. 477 C ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 User Guide A B Ink Manager A. Process ink B. Aliased Spot ink C. Spot ink Open the Ink Manager in Acrobat Do one of the following: • Choose Advanced > Print Production > Ink Manager. • Select the Ink Manager tool on the Print Production toolbar. • Choose Advanced > Print Production > Output Preview, and click Ink Manager. • Choose File > Print, and click Advanced. In the Output panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, click Ink Manager. • Choose File > Save As, and choose PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript for the file type. Click Settings, and then click Ink Manager. Open the Ink Manager in InDesign Do one of the following: • From the Separations Preview panel menu (Window > Output > Separations Preview), choose Ink Manager. • Choose File > Print, and click Output. In the Output section, click Ink Manager. Separate spot colors as process Using the Ink Manager, you can convert spot colors to process colors. When spot colors are converted to process color equivalents, they are printed as separations rather than on a single plate. Converting a spot color is useful if you’ve accidentally added a spot color to a process color document, or if the document contains more spot colors than are practical to print. 1 In the Ink Manager, do one of the following: • To separate individual spot colors, click the ink-type icon to the left of the spot color or aliased spot color. A process color icon appears. To change the color back to spot, click the icon again. • To separate all spot colors, select Convert All Spots To Process. The icons to the left of the spot colors change to process color icons. To restore the spot colors, deselect Convert All Spots To Process. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 478 User Guide Note: Selecting Convert All Spots To Process removes any ink aliases you’ve set up in the Ink Manager and can also affect overprinting and trapping settings in the document. 2 (InDesign only) To use the Lab values of a spot color rather than CMYK definitions, choose Use Standard Lab Values For Spots. Create an ink alias for a spot color You can map a spot color to a different spot or process color by creating an alias. An alias is useful if a document contains two similar spot colors when only one is required, or if it contains too many spot colors. You can see the effects of ink aliasing in the printed output, and you see the effects on-screen if Overprint Preview mode is on. 1 In the Ink Manager, select the spot color ink you want to create an alias for. 2 Choose an option in the Ink Alias menu. The ink type icon and ink description change accordingly. Printer marks, cropping, and hairlines About printer marks in PDFs When you prepare a document for print production, a number of marks are needed to help the print service provider align separation films for producing proofs, measure film for correct calibration and ink density, trim film to size, and so on. Printer marks indicate the boundaries of document boxes supported by Adobe PDF, such as trim boxes and bleed boxes. You can add printer marks temporarily at print time using the Marks And Bleeds panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, or you can embed printer marks in the file (and optionally in a layer) using the Add Printer Marks dialog box. For information about adding printer marks to just the printed output, see “Include marks and bleeds” on page 453. Note: A PDF created from Adobe InDesign CS and later can include printer marks, either in a separate layer or on the page. You can view these marks using the Layers tab in Acrobat. If the printer marks were exported as a layer, any printer marks you create using the Acrobat Add Printer Marks feature replace the InDesign printer marks. If the printer marks are not in a layer, Acrobat printer marks overlay InDesign printer marks and might not align. Embed printer marks in a PDF 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Add Printer Marks, or select the Add Printer Marks tool on the Print Production toolbar. 2 Specify the pages to mark. 3 Specify the marks and settings. See also “Include marks and bleeds” on page 453 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 479 User Guide Crop Pages dialog box overview Use the Crop Pages dialog box to define boundaries for trim, bleed, and art when preparing your PDF for printing and other output. You can adjust the margins of document boxes supported by Adobe PDF, including the media (page size), trim, bleed, and art boxes. This capability is useful if the printer marks you add using the Add Printer Marks tool (not the Marks And Bleeds panel of the Advanced Print Setup dialog box) would be clipped because the crop box is too small to accommodate the marks. Print service providers can also use this tool to expand the page size for imposition tasks. You can switch between boxes without losing the margins you set for each. As you adjust individual boxes, the preview in the Crop Pages dialog box is redrawn to reflect the new settings. For example, if you expand the crop or media box, the page content “shrinks” in the preview. Note: When the crop box is expanded, the media box adjusts accordingly. See also “Crop pages” on page 133 Display the Crop Pages dialog box Do any of the following: • Choose Advanced > Print Production > Crop Pages. • Select the Crop Pages tool on the Print Production toolbar. • Choose Document > Crop Pages. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 480 User Guide Fix hairlines Very thin lines, called hairlines, are problematic in offset printing. If left as is in PDFs, they might not appear in the final printed piece. The Fix Hairlines tool can find most hairlines and replace them with a heavier-weight line. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Fix Hairlines, or select the Fix Hairlines tool on the Print Production toolbar. 2 Enter a width for the hairline you want to find, and enter a replacement width. Adjust hairline widths using increment arrows. Shift-click arrows to change widths by whole integers. 3 Select the unit of measurement from the Units menu. 4 (Optional) Select Include Type3 Fonts or Include Patterns to replace hairlines in Type 3 characters or patterns with the same replacement width as other hairlines. Font characters and patterns can be used in a variety of contexts in the same document (for example, different magnification values), so changing the line width may produce unexpected results. Check the results if you select these options, and adjust your selections as necessary. 5 Specify the pages to check. Transparency flattening About flattening If your document or artwork contains transparency, to be output it usually needs to undergo a process called flattening. Flattening divides transparent artwork into vector-based areas and rasterized areas. As artwork becomes more complex (mixing images, vectors, type, spot colors, overprinting, and so on), so does the flattening and its results. Flattening may be necessary when you print or when you save or export to other formats that don’t support trans­ parency. To retain transparency without flattening when you create PDF files, save your file as Adobe PDF 1.4 (Acrobat 5.0) or later. You can specify flattening settings and then save and apply them as transparency flattener presets. Transparent objects are flattened according to the settings in the selected flattener preset. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 481 User Guide Note: Transparency flattening cannot be undone after the file is saved. Overlapping art is divided when flattened. For more information on transparency output issues, see the Print Resource Center on the Adobe website. Flattener Preview dialog box overview Use the preview options in the Flattener Preview dialog box to highlight the areas and objects that are transparent, as well as those affected by transparency flattening. Transparent content is highlighted in red, and the rest of the artwork appears in grayscale. You can use this information to adjust the flattener options before you apply the settings, and then save them as flattener presets. You can then apply these presets from other dialog boxes in the application, including PDF Optimizer, the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, and the Settings dialog box for Save As PostScript. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 482 User Guide Flattener Preview dialog box displays a preview of current PDF page using preview and flattener settings. Open the Flattener Preview dialog box ? Choose Advanced > Print Production > Flattener Preview, or select the Flattener Preview button on the Print Production toolbar. Preview which areas of artwork will be flattened Use the preview options in the Flattener Preview to highlight areas that are affected by flattening. You can use this color-coded information to adjust flattening options. Note: The Flattener Preview is not intended for precise previewing of spot colors, overprints, and blending modes. Instead, use Overprint Preview mode for those purposes. 1 Display the Flattener Preview palette (or dialog box): • In Illustrator, choose Window > Flattener Preview. • In Acrobat, choose Advanced > Print Production > Flattener Preview. • In InDesign, choose Window > Output > Flattener Preview. 2 From the Highlight menu, choose the kind of areas you want to highlight. The availability of options depends on the content of the artwork. 3 Select the flattening settings you want to use: Either choose a preset or, if available, set specific options. Note: (Illustrator) If the flattening settings aren’t visible, select Show Options from the palette menu to display them. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 483 User Guide 4 If the artwork contains overprinted objects that interact with transparent objects, in Illustrator, select an option from the Overprints menu. You can preserve, simulate, or discard overprints. In Acrobat, choose Preserve Overprint to blend the color of transparent artwork with the background color to create an overprint effect. 5 At any time, click Refresh to display a fresh preview version based on your settings. Depending on the complexity of the artwork, you may need to wait a few seconds for the preview image to appear. In InDesign, you can also choose Auto Refresh Highlight. In Illustrator and Acrobat, to magnify the preview, click in the preview area. To zoom out, Alt-click/Option-click in the preview area. To pan the preview, hold down the spacebar and drag in the preview area. See also “About flattening” on page 480 Transparency Flattener options You can set Transparency Flattener options when creating, editing, or previewing flattener presets in Illustrator, InDesign, or Acrobat. Highlight (preview) options None (Color Preview) Disables previewing. Rasterized Complex Regions Highlights the areas that will be rasterized for performance reasons (as determined by the Rasters/Vectors slider). Keep in mind that the boundary of the highlight area has a higher probability of producing stitching problems (depending on the printer driver settings and the rasterization resolution). To minimize stitching problems, select Clip Complex Regions. Transparent Objects Highlights the objects that are sources of transparency, such as objects with partial opacity (including images with alpha channels), objects with blending modes, and objects with opacity masks. In addition, note that styles and effects may contain transparency, and overprinted objects may be treated as sources of trans­ parency if they are involved in transparency or if the overprint needs to be flattened. All Affected Objects Highlights all objects that are involved in transparency, including transparent objects and objects that are overlapped by transparent objects. The highlighted objects will be affected by the flattening process— their strokes or patterns will be expanded, portions of them may get rasterized, and so on. Affected Linked EPS Files (Illustrator only) Highlights all linked EPS files that are affected by transparency. Affected Graphics (InDesign only) Highlights all placed content affected by transparency or transparency effects. This option is useful for service providers who need to see graphics that require attention to print properly. Expanded Patterns (Illustrator and Acrobat) Highlights all patterns that will be expanded if involved in trans­ parency. Outlined Strokes Highlights all strokes that will be outlined if involved in transparency or because Convert All Strokes To Outlines is selected. Outlined Text (Illustrator and InDesign) Highlights all text that will be outlined if involved in transparency or because Convert All Text To Outlines is selected. Note: In the final output, outlined strokes and text may appear slightly different from native ones, especially very thin strokes and very small text. However, the Flattener Preview doesn’t highlight this altered appearance. Raster-Fill Text And Strokes (InDesign only) Highlights text and strokes that have rasterized fills as a result of flattening. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 484 User Guide All Rasterized Regions (Illustrator and InDesign) Highlights objects and intersections of objects that will be rasterized because there is no other way of representing them in PostScript or because they are more complex than the threshold specified by the Rasters/Vectors slider. For example, the intersection of two transparent gradients will always be rasterized, even if the Rasters/Vectors value is 100. The All Rasterized Regions option also shows raster graphics (such as Photoshop files) involved in transparency, and raster effects such as drop shadows and feathers. Note that this option takes longer to process than the others. Transparency Flattener Preset options Name/Preset Specifies the name of the preset. Depending on the dialog box, you can type a name in the Name text box or accept the default. You can enter the name of an existing preset to edit that preset. However, you can’t edit the default presets. Raster/Vector balance Specifies the amount of vector information that will be preserved. Higher settings preserve more vector objects, while lower settings rasterize more vector objects; intermediate settings preserve simple areas in vector form and rasterize complex ones. Select the lowest setting to rasterize all the artwork. Note: The amount of rasterization that occurs depends on the complexity of the page and the types of overlapping objects. Line Art And Text Resolution Rasterizes all objects, including images, vector artwork, text, and gradients, to the specified resolution. Acrobat and InDesign allow a maximum of 9600 pixels per inch (ppi) for line art, and 1200 ppi for gradient mesh. Illustrator allows a maximum of 9600 ppi for both line art and gradient mesh. The resolution affects the precision of intersections when flattened. Line Art and Text Resolution should generally be set to 600­ 1200 to provide high-quality rasterization, especially on serif or small point sized type Gradient And Mesh Resolution Specifies the resolution for gradients and Illustrator mesh objects rasterized as a result of flattening, from 72 to 2400 ppi. The resolution affects the precision of intersections when flattened. Gradient and mesh resolution should generally be set between 150 and 300 ppi, because the quality of the gradients, drop shadows, and feathers will not improve with higher resolutions, but printing time and file size will increase. Convert All Text To Outlines Converts all type objects (point type, area type, and path type) to outlines and discards all type glyph information on pages containing transparency. This option ensures that the width of text stays consistent during flattening. Note that enabling this option will cause small fonts to appear slightly thicker when viewed in Acrobat or printed on low-resolution desktop printers. It doesn’t affect the quality of the type printed on high-resolution printers or imagesetters. Convert All Strokes To Outlines Converts all strokes to simple filled paths on pages containing transparency. This option ensures that the width of strokes stays consistent during flattening. Note that enabling this option causes thin strokes to appear slightly thicker and may degrade flattening performance. Clip Complex Regions Ensures that the boundaries between vector artwork and rasterized artwork fall along object paths. This option reduces stitching artifacts that result when part of an object is rasterized while another part of the object remains in vector form. However, selecting this option may result in paths that are too complex for the printer to handle. Stitching, where rasters and vectors meet ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 485 User Guide Note: Some print drivers process raster and vector art differently, sometimes resulting in color stitching. You may be able to minimize stitching problems by disabling some printer-driver-specific color-management settings. These settings vary with each printer, so see the documentation that came with your printer for details. (Illustrator only) Select Preserve Alpha Transparency (Flatten Transparency dialog box only) Preserves the overall opacity of flattened objects. With this option, as when you rasterize artwork using a transparent background, blending modes and overprints are lost but their appearance is retained within the processed artwork, along with the level of alpha transparency. Preserve Alpha Transparency can be useful if you are exporting to SWF or SVG, since both of these formats support alpha transparency. (Illustrator only) Select Preserve Spot Colors And Overprints (Flatten Transparency dialog box only) Generally preserves spot colors. It also preserves overprinting for objects that aren’t involved in transparency. Select this option when printing separations if the document contains spot colors and overprinted objects. Deselect this option when saving files for use in page-layout applications. With this option selected, overprinted areas that interact with trans­ parency are flattened, while overprinting in other areas is preserved. The results are unpredictable when the file is output from a page-layout application. Preserve Overprint (Acrobat only) Blends the color of transparent artwork with the background color to create an overprint effect. About transparency flattener presets If you regularly print or export documents that contain transparency, you can automate the flattening process by saving flattening settings in a transparency flattener preset. You can then apply these settings for print output as well as for saving and exporting files to PDF 1.3 (Acrobat 4.0) and EPS and PostScript formats. In addition, in Illustrator you can apply them when saving files to earlier versions of Illustrator or when copying to the clipboard; in InDesign you can also apply them when exporting to SVG format; in Acrobat, you can also apply them when optimizing PDFs. These settings also control how flattening occurs when you export to formats that don’t support transparency. You can choose a flattener preset in the Advanced panel of the Print dialog box or of the format-specific dialog box that appears after the initial Export or Save As dialog box. You can create your own flattener presets or choose from the default options provided with the software. The settings of each of these defaults are designed to match the quality and speed of the flattening with an appropriate resolution for rasterized transparent areas, depending on the document’s intended use: [High Resolution] For final press output and for high-quality proofs, such as separations-based color proofs. [Medium Resolution] For desktop proofs and print-on-demand documents that will be printed on PostScript color printers. [Low Resolution] For quick proofs that will be printed on black-and-white desktop printers and for documents that will be published on the web or exported to SVG. Create a flattener preset You can save transparency flattener presets in a separate file, making it easy to back them up or to make them available to service providers, clients, or others in your workgroup. Once you create a custom flattener preset, you can edit it in PDF Optimizer. Flattener presets are stored in the same location as printer settings files: (Windows) \Documents and Settings\[current user]\Application Data\Adobe\Acrobat\8.0\Preferences (Mac OS) Users/[current user]/Library/Preferences/Acrobat/8.0 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 486 User Guide Note: Flattener presets created in Acrobat have a different file format from those created in other Adobe applications, so you cannot share them between applications. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > Flattener Preview, or select the Flattener Preview button on the Print Production toolbar. 2 To base a preset on an existing one, select it from the Preset menu. 3 Set flattening options. 4 If necessary, click Reset to return to the original settings. 5 Click Save. 6 Type a name and click OK. Note: To delete a custom preset, choose it from the Preset menu and press Delete. See also “Transparency Flattener options” on page 483 Apply a flattener preset ? Do one of the following: • In the Flattener Preview dialog box, choose a preset from the menu, specify a page range, and click Apply. • In the PDF Optimizer, select Transparency on the left, and then select a preset from the list. • In the Advanced Print Setup dialog box, select the Output panel on the left, and then select a preset from the Transparency Flattener Preset menu. • Choose File > Save As, choose a PostScript file format (EPS or PS), and click Settings. In the Output panel, select a preset from the Transparency Flattener Preset menu. Edit a flattener preset in the PDF Optimizer You can modify custom presets only. 1 Choose Advanced > Print Production > PDF Optimizer. 2 Select Transparency on the left. 3 Double-click the custom preset you want to edit, modify the settings, and click OK. 487 Chapter 17: Preflight To verify that your Adobe PDF contains only the features, fonts, and formatting that you’ve specified, use the Preflight tool to inspect and, in certain cases, correct the document’s contents. Quickstart The following topics provide overview steps for some common preflight tasks. Preflight PDFs Use the Preflight tool to determine a document’s validity for print production or other conditions. When you preflight a document, you validate that the document contains only specific features, fonts, and formatting. 1 Choose Advanced > Preflight. 2 Select a profile from the list. To correct errors, select a profile that includes a fixup. These are denoted by a wrench icon next to the profile. 3 Click Execute. Results appear in the Preflight dialog box. See also “Analyzing documents for print readiness” on page 488 Add fixups to a profile Adding a fixup to a profile allows you to fix errors identified during a preflight inspection. 1 Choose Advanced > Preflight, and click Edit. 2 Select the desired profile, and then choose Unlock from the pop-up menu at the top of the dialog box. 3 Select Fixups from the list under the profile. 4 Select the desired fixup in the right column and click the left arrow . You can add multiple fixups covering different areas to a profile. See also “Add fixups to a profile” on page 508 Create a PDF/X-compliant file You can validate PDF content using PDF/X criteria, and then save the PDF as a PDF/X-compliant file. 1 Choose Advanced > Preflight. 2 Choose Options > Convert Current PDF To PDF/X. 3 Select PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3, or PDF/X-4, and specify other conversion options. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 488 User Guide 4 If the conversion succeeds, save the PDF. If it fails, view the results. Preflight cannot modify conditions that make the conversion invalid. It provides only a list of those conditions. See also “Convert PDFs to PDF/X or PDF/A” on page 512 Analyzing documents for print readiness About preflight inspections The Preflight tool analyzes the contents of a PDF to determine its validity for print production and a variety of other conditions that you can specify. Preflight inspects the file against a set of user-defined values, called preflight profiles. Depending on the profile, the preflight inspection can also correct certain errors. Preflight lists the results in the Preflight dialog box and in the optional reports. Preflight identifies issues with colors, fonts, transparency, image resolution, PDF version compatibility, and more. Preflight also includes tools for examining PDF syntax or the actual PDF structure of a document. Before you use the Preflight tool or create a PDF for print, follow these recommendations: • If you created PDFs using Acrobat Distiller, InDesign, or Illustrator, optimize them for print or press using the predefined settings in Distiller or InDesign PDF styles, or using settings provided by your print service provider. • Use CMYK or DeviceN (the Adobe PostScript 3 color space for representing common elements such as duotones, tritones, and quadtones) in a four-color process job. • Embed all fonts from within the authoring application. Embedding ensures that fonts aren’t substituted. See also “Choose an Adobe PDF preset for converting files” on page 99 “Accessing and embedding fonts using Distiller” on page 113 About the Preflight dialog box Use the Preflight dialog box to control all aspects of the preflight inspection. This box is available from the Advanced menu (Advanced > Preflight or Advanced > Print Production > Preflight) when you have a PDF open. You can also select the Preflight tool from the Print Production toolbar. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 489 User Guide B A C D E G F Preflight dialog box A. Commands B. Preflight profiles C. Profile description D. Preflight options E. PDF/X and PDF/A status F. Display Settings Alert G. Groups Run a preflight inspection You can use or modify an existing profile, or create your own. 1 Open the PDF and select Advanced > Preflight. 2 If the Warning icon appears in the upper right of the Preflight dialog box, click it to see potential problems in viewing the PDF. These might include overprinting elements, or the influence of color management with or without an embedded output intent. Click Adjust to resolve the conflict, or just close the dialog box. 3 Select a profile from the list. Profiles are organized in groups that you can expand and collapse. Profiles with the gray wrench icon include fixups that can correct errors in your file. The text beneath the profile name describes the profile’s purpose. Important: Fixups permanently change the PDF. If you execute a fixup and want to undo the changes, choose Edit > Undo immediately. You will not be prompted to save fixups. 4 For the options with check boxes, do any of the following: • Specify a page range for the inspection. • Specify whether to limit the inspection to visible layers. Selecting this option disables any fixups. • Run the inspection without fixing errors. Select this option if you want to view errors without changing the PDF. 5 Click Execute, or choose Execute Preflight Profile from the Options menu. When the inspection is finished, the results appear in the Preflight dialog box. If you get a message that fixups are disabled, make sure that you have not selected Run Preflight Checks For Visible Layers Only. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 490 User Guide You can also double-click a profile in the list to run the preflight inspection. See also “About preflight profiles” on page 498 “Convert PDFs to PDF/X or PDF/A” on page 512 Preflight preferences Use the Preflight Preferences dialog box to control how results are reported and to specify output intents when creating PDF/X files. A PDF may have an embedded output intent containing an ICC profile. You can copy this profile to your computer and use it just as you would any other ICC profile. Open the Preflight Preferences dialog box by choosing Options > Preflight Preferences. You can then use the tabs to set the preferences you want. See also “Create output intents” on page 516 General tab The General tab includes options for specifying how dialog box elements and preflight results are displayed: Maximum Number Of Results To Be Displayed Per Type Of Check Specifies how many instances of a mismatch appear in the Results list. Use the Per Page (Under “Further Matches”) option to nest additional results under the Further Matches section in the Results list. Degree Of Detail When Displaying Results Specifies how much detail appears in the Preflight Results list. You can specify no details, only important details, or all details. For example, suppose you select Show List Of Results With Most Important Details, and you select the profile “List all objects not 4c.” If your document includes five RGB images, then for each image, one single line entry will be included in the results, indicating such things as size, resolution, and color space. Output intent options You can set the following options on the Output Intents tab of the Preflight Preferences dialog box. For more infor­ mation on using output intents, see “Output intents” on page 515. Name The name of the output intent. Output Intent Profile (ICC Profile) The ICC profile that describes the characterized printing condition for which the document has been prepared and that is required for PDF/X-compliance. Click Browse to select one from the default Profiles folder. Output Condition Identifier The reference name specified by the ICC registry of registered standard printing condi­ tions. Choose from the list of output conditions—the description appears in the Output Condition box—or choose Custom and create your own. Registry The URL giving more information about the output intent profile name. For the standard printing condi­ tions registered with the ICC, this entry must be http://www.color.org/.ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 491 User Guide Output Condition A description of the intended printing condition of the job, including type of printing (for example, offset commercial), paper type, and screen frequency. You can modify this description for output condi­ tions you edit or create from scratch. Locked This option is a safeguard against accidental modification of the output intent. All the text fields are dimmed. Highlighting tab The Highlighting tab includes options for identifying problem objects on a PDF page. The Highlighting preferences control both the appearance of masks in mask reports and the appearance of lines on-screen when you double-click Highlighting in the Preflight Results window. You set highlighting properties for each type of alert: Error, Warning, and Info. Color/Opacity Click Color to choose colors from a color spectrum. Specify the opacity of the color. Draw Border For Bounding Box Draws the same lines in a mask report that you see on-screen when you double-click a result in the Preflight Results window. This is useful for identifying objects in a mask report when an image occupies the entire page. In this case you won’t see the mask, but you will see the lines around objects. Line Style/Thickness Click Line Style to select the line pattern (lines, dots, or dashes). Specify the line width (thickness). Viewing preflight results, objects, and resources About preflight results You can view the results of a preflight inspection as a list, as comments, or individually in the Preflight dialog box. In the Results list, mismatches appear according to their severity, with all errors first, followed by warnings, and then just information. An alert icon appears next to each check that did not meet the criteria specified in the preflight profile. Preflight dialog box with problem objects ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 492 User Guide The icons at the top of the Preflight dialog box indicate that at least one issue of a particular severity has been found: the red error icon , the yellow warning icon , and the blue Info icon for information only (with no errors or warnings). The green check mark means that no problems were found. See also “Preflight alert options” on page 503 View results in a list The Preflight dialog box lists the issues flagged after an inspection that tests against the criteria specified in the selected profile. 1 Run a preflight inspection. 2 When the results appear, do any of the following: • If details are available, expand an area to see details about the problem object. Only the first few problems are listed. Your Preflight preferences determine how additional results, if any, are listed. • To see more information, select Show Detailed Information About Document at the bottom of the dialog box. • To see an object in a separate view, select Show Selected Page Object In Snap View. • If you switched to a different view in the Preflight dialog box, such as the Profiles list, you can get back to the Results list by clicking the Results button at the top of the dialog box, or choosing Show Most Recent Results from the Options menu. • To see an object in context on the PDF page, double-click the item. The object is highlighted with a dotted line for easier identification. This is useful when an object such as a font exists in multiple places in the document. In some cases, the item is an attribute of an object (for example, a color space). In those cases, the inspection finds the objects that use the attribute. You can change the type of line, its thickness, and its color on the Highlighting tab of Preflight preferences. Problem object on the PDF page See also “Preflight preferences” on page 490 “Run a preflight inspection” on page 489 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 493 User Guide Use Snap View to view a problem object Use Snap View to isolate an item when you’re working with pages containing complex, overlapping areas. Some items, such as document information fields or page labels, cannot be displayed. 1 Expand an area to display the problem objects found during the inspection. 2 Select a problem object in the list. 3 Select Show Selected Page Object In Snap View. 4 In the Preflight Snap View window, choose an option from the Background Color menu. All problem objects are displayed on this color in Snap View. Snap view of problem object View resources and general information The Overview section of the Preflight dialog box lists all types of properties and resources for the document, including the color spaces, fonts, patterns, halftone settings, graphic states, and images used. It also lists general information about the analyzed document, such as the application used to create it, the date it was created, and the date it was last modified. The document information also indicates whether the PDF contains notes, forms, hypertext links, metadata, or similar items. 1 In the Preflight dialog box with results showing, select Show Detailed Information About Document. Overview and preflight information appear. 2 Expand the Overview and Preflight Information sections to view details. 3 In the Overview section, expand a property to list the document’s resources. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 494 User Guide Document resources, including color spaces, fonts, and images found in problem objects See also “About additional checks and properties” on page 503 View results as comments You can embed preflight results as comments in the PDF and then view them as you would any PDF comments. For example, you can click Comments in the navigation pane to list each comment (or filtered comment) in a list. See also “View comments” on page 181 Insert and view preflight comments 1 In the Preflight dialog box, click Comments, or choose Insert Preflight Results As Comments from the Options menu. Each problem object is highlighted using the border style specified in Preflight preferences. You can change the type of line, its thickness, and color on the Highlighting tab of Preflight preferences. 2 If prompted, click Embed if you want to embed comments, regardless of how many exist. 3 In the PDF, hold the pointer over a comment to view its contents. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 495 User Guide Sample PDF report with a sticky note Remove preflight comments ? In the Preflight dialog box, choose Remove Preflight Comments from the Options menu. Preflight reports Create a results report You can capture the results of a preflight inspection in various types of reports. You can capture the results in a text file, an XML file, or a single PDF file. A PDF report can include just an overview, or detailed information presented in different ways. A PDF report includes information about the document and problem objects in layers, which you turn on or off in the Layers panel of the navigation pane. Note: You can also create an inventory of all objects and resources used in the PDF. Create a report of preflight results 1 In the Preflight dialog box, click Report, or choose Create Report from the Options menu. 2 Specify a name and location for the report. The suffix “_report” is automatically added to the report name. 3 Select the type of report and click Save. Report types PDF Report Creates a summary of problems accompanied by details that are shown using transparent masks, comments, or layers for each problem object. • Overview Condenses the preflight results into a short document that includes applied fixups, a results summary, and document information. • Details Reports additional information about each problem object—for example, where the object is located on the page. Problems Highlighted By Transparent Masks places a colored mask, similar to a Photoshop mask, over areas to make the problem areas stand out. You can change the mask color using Preflight preferences. Problems Highlighted By Comments inserts preflight results as comments. Problems Highlighted By Layers shows the file ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 496 User Guide separated into layers of mismatches or found objects according to the criteria used in the profile itself. Another layer called Other Objects includes objects that have nothing to do with the profile used. XML Report Produces a structured report for workflow systems that can interpret and process the preflight results. For details, contact your print service provider. Text Report Produces a report in plain text format, with each line indented according to the hierarchy in the Preflight Results dialog box. You can open the report in a text editor. Hide or show layers in a PDF report 1 In the navigation pane, click the Layers button to open the Layers panel. 2 In the Layers panel, expand the report and click the square to the left of a layer name to hide or show the layer. About inventory reports An inventory report shows resources used in a PDF, including color spaces, images, patterns, shadings, metadata, and fonts and glyphs in each font family. Related information is grouped together and arranged on a PDF page so that you can scan and locate items. You can run an inventory report before or after you run a preflight inspection. Unlike a preflight results report, which provides only the information requested by checks in the selected profile, an inventory report does not filter the PDF content. Together, a preflight inspection report and an inventory report can help you identify and fix problems. The information in an inventory report can be useful when you perform tasks such as these: • Exploring files that seem unusual, such as those created by an unknown application, or files with slow screen redraw or copy-and-paste actions that don’t work. • Examining processing issues, such as failure to print correctly, or problems encountered during color conversion, imposition, placement on an InDesign page, and so on. • Identifying aspects of a PDF that are not ideal, such as the inadvertent embedding of a font because of an unnoticed space character on a master page, or cropped images with extraneous image data, or objects that are not of the expected type (such as type or vector objects converted to images or merged with an image). • Providing additional information about an object besides its presence. For example, by locating a spot color in the inventory report, you can determine whether it is used by itself or in combination with other colorants, such as in a duotone image. Or you can determine which glyphs in a font are embedded, what they look like, and which character they are supposed to represent. This information can help you resolve a missing-glyph error. • Exploring XMP metadata embedded with the file, such as its author, resolution, color space, copyright, and keywords applied to it. This information is stored in a standardized way using the Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP) standard. Create an inventory of PDF content 1 In the Preflight dialog box, choose Create Inventory from the Options menu. 2 Select the types of objects and resources you want included in the inventory. In addition to fonts, colors, images, and so on, you can include the following information: Form XObjects Objects that are referenced within a PDF. For example, if a PDF contains many occurrences of the same object, it exists as a single resource that is referenced many times. Include XMP Metadata Includes information embedded in the PDF that can be used by an XMP-enabled application or device in the workflow. This information can include meaningful descriptions and titles, searchable keywords, the ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 497 User Guide author’s name, and copyright information. If you select Include Advanced Fields, you can include the fields and structures used for storing the metadata using namespaces and properties. This advanced information appears as a text-based tree view of all the XMP data in the PDF, both for the document as well as for those images in the PDF for which XMP metadata is present. Note: You can also view the metadata for the PDF document as a whole in the Document Properties dialog box. Choose File > Properties, click the Description tab, and then click Additional Metadata. To see the advanced fields, click Advanced from the list on the left. 3 (Optional) Save the report. Advanced inspections Viewing preflight problems inside the PDF structure If you have advanced knowledge of the PDF file format, you may want to explore the technical reasons for a preflight mismatch by examining the internal structure of the PDF and its fonts. Preflight includes three options for in-depth inspection of a PDF. Technically skilled users can use these tools to analyze the objects and fonts that caused a mismatch. For detailed information on PDF structure, refer to PDF Reference Fifth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.6(English only) on the Adobe website. You should also have intimate knowledge of font internal structures, or have font specifications for Type 1, TrueType, and OpenType fonts at hand. The font specifications are listed in the bibliography of the guide. Note: You can navigate the PDF and fonts in the windows that appear, but you can’t edit the PDF structure or fonts. Browse the internal PDF structure View the structure of a PDF, as defined by content streams and cos objects, in a tree array. (Content streams represent pages, form XObjects, Type 3 font characters, and the appearance of comments and form fields. Cos objects include such items as color space, images, and XObjects.) Check PDF syntax, view the results of a fixup, or determine the cause of a mismatch. Choose between five view modes that organize content streams in different ways. You cannot edit the PDF in the Internal PDF Structure window. Note: Do not confuse the internal structure with the logical structure in tagged PDFs that improves accessibility for lowor non-sighted readers. The internal structure is a superset of all objects in the document, including tags. Before you can browse the internal PDF structure, you must run a preflight check. 1 In the Preflight window, choose Browse Internal Structure from the Options menu. The Internal PDF Structure window opens, showing a tree view of the document information and the document catalog (the root of the document’s object hierarchy). 2 Expand each tree item to view the document structure. 3 Click the Page button to view the structure of each page. 4 To change how content streams appear in the tree view, select a view mode in the toolbar: Classic Displays the content stream as a sequence of page content operators. Expand the subtree for an operator to view its operands. This is the default view. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 498 User Guide Q Groups all operators in the content stream that belong to the same graphic state nesting level within a pair of the q/Q operators. Expand the subtree for a q/Q pair to view the operator and parameters inside. BMC Similar to Q, but arranges content streams by marked content (BMC/EMC) nesting levels. BT/ET Arranges content streams by text blocks, which are enclosed by BT and ET operators. Displays content streams as a series of snippets. A snippet is a contiguous group of objects that share the same graphic state. In this view, each snippet represents a type of drawing operation (for example, paint area) and its graphic state. You can also view content streams as snippets by selecting Show Selected Page Object In Snap View in the Preflight window. Browse the internal font structure View the internal structure of embedded fonts in a PDF in greater detail than the preflight results with a graphical view that shows the outline and coordinates of each glyph. You can determine the source of various preflight problems, such as mismatches caused by inconsistent glyph widths. Before you can browse the internal font structure, you must run a preflight check. 1 In the Preflight window, choose Browse Internal Structure Of All Document Fonts from the Options menu. To view the structure of a single font, expand the Fonts entry in the results, select a font, and choose Browse Internal Font Structure from the Options menu. 2 To view the glyph details, click any of the following buttons: Display Grid Shows the origin of the glyph’s coordinate space, indicated by two green-colored orthogonal lines. Display Boxes Shows the area used by the selected glyph and the maximum area used by all glyphs using blue lines that coincide on the top and bottom. Display Filling Shows the areas of a filled glyph as medium gray. Display Points Shows all the points used to define the glyph’s outline. Black points indicate the outline’s contour. Red points indicate bezier curves and are offset from the outline’s contour. Display Cursor Shows the position of the currently selected point, indicated by two magenta-colored orthogonal lines. This button is available only if Display Points is selected. 3 To adjust the size of the glyph display area, drag the handle between the tree view and the glyph display area up or down. Preflight profiles About preflight profiles The success of a preflight inspection depends on how well you define the criteria for the inspection. The inspection criteria are packaged in a file called a preflight profile. A preflight profile includes one or more checks; each check includes one or more property statements that validate the PDF content. Preflight shows an error only if all the property statements in the check are in error. In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, you can specify which values to use and how to handle mismatches. For example, you can choose a profile that simply reports mismatches, or one that automatically fixes a mismatch according to its specified parameters. A profile with a fixup has the gray wrench icon next to it. Snippet ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 499 User Guide Adobe Acrobat includes several predefined preflight profiles, organized into groups, such as Digital Printing, PDF Analysis, Prepress, and PDF/A or PDF/X Compliance. You can use the predefined profiles as is or modify them to create custom profiles. The checks that make up the profiles (called rules in previous versions of Acrobat) are organized by categories, such as Document, Pages, Images, and so on. Each check in a category governs a particular document property. To help you determine what document properties the preflight profile analyzes—and thus how to set parameters— you can review information about each selected check in the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box. This information describes what criteria the check uses to analyze, and possibly fix, a document property. See also “About additional checks and properties” on page 503 View profiles 1 Do one of the following: • If the Preflight dialog box is not open, choose Advanced > Preflight. • If the Results list or another panel is displayed in the Preflight dialog box, click the Profiles button at the top of the Preflight dialog box, or choose Show Preflight Profiles from the Options menu. 2 Expand the profile groups as desired. The list includes all predefined profiles, and any custom profiles you’ve created. Preflight Edit Profile dialog box overview The Preflight Edit Profile dialog box lists all available profiles and shows which document properties are being analyzed. From this dialog box you can unlock and lock a profile, create a new group for organizing profiles, and specify inspection criteria. You can access additional options and information by expanding the profile. To open the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, expand a profile group in the Preflight dialog box, select a profile, and click Edit (or choose Edit Preflight Profiles from the Options menu). A D B C Preflight Edit Profile dialog box A. Profile B. Predefined set of checks C. More options D. Profiles groups ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 500 User Guide Add and remove profiles You can create your own custom preflight profiles. Before you create a new profile from scratch, review existing profiles for ones that achieve results similar to those you want. If possible, duplicate an existing profile and modify only the relevant portion. A preflight profile must contain at least one check and one property that validate the PDF content. When you build a check from scratch, you can use existing properties or create new properties as you go. For best results when creating and modifying profiles, add only as many checks as you need to validate the PDF content, and keep the checks and properties simple and straightforward. For example, you can use a PDF/X profile to check for certain criteria, and then add checks for non-PDF/X criteria, such as image resolution. See also “Add checks to a profile” on page 506 “Create or modify custom checks” on page 507 “Add fixups to a profile” on page 508 “Create or modify fixups” on page 511 Create a new profile 1 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, do one of the following: • Click the Create icon . • To base the new profile on an existing one, select a profile and click the Duplicate icon 2 Type a name and purpose for the new profile, assign it to a group, and specify other options as desired. By default, newly created profiles appear under the Custom Profiles group, unless you assigned them to a different group. 3 Expand the profile in the column on the left. 4 Modify checks (as provided). 5 Add additional checks and fixups. Create a profile group 1 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, choose New Group from the Group menu. 2 Type a name for the group and click OK. Remove a profile ? In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, select the profile and click Delete Import or export preflight profiles Preflight profiles can be shared with other users. For example, print service providers can provide them to their customers to ensure that jobs pass an inspection defined by those profiles before the jobs are handed off. Users in a workgroup can create their own profiles as a way to check a document before uploading to the web or printing to a special printer, or to check in-house production. To exchange a profile, you package it for import and export. The package includes all checks and properties for the selected profile. . . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 501 User Guide Import a preflight profile 1 Do one of the following: • In the Preflight dialog box, choose Import Preflight Profile from the Options menu. • In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, click the Import icon 2 Locate the preflight package file (.kfp extension), and click Open. The profile appears in the Profiles list under the Imported Profiles group. 3 If the profile is locked, choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu in the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box. 4 If prompted, enter the password. Double-clicking a profile on your computer, or dragging profiles to the Acrobat window or Acrobat application icon installs them in the correct place on your computer. The profile can be edited. Export a preflight profile 1 To lock the profile before you export it, choose Locked from the pop-up menu in the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box. You can also select Password Protected and enter a password. 2 Do one of the following: • In the Preflight dialog box, choose Export Preflight Profile from the Options menu. • In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, click the Export icon 3 Specify a name and location for the package, and click Save. To export a profile from the Preflight dialog box, select the profile and choose Export Preflight Profile from the Options menu. Lock, unlock, and password-protect profiles You can prevent unauthorized changes to preflight profiles by locking profiles and giving them passwords. This may be useful if preflight profiles are shared among several users. You can lock or password-protect preflight profiles when you first create them or any time you save the preflight profiles. By default, all predefined preflight profiles are locked. . . Unlocking a locked preflight profile Lock a profile 1 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, select a profile. 2 Choose Locked from the pop-up menu at the upper left of the dialog box. The options become unavailable. Password protect a profile 1 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, select a profile. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 502 User Guide 2 Choose Password Protected from the pop-up menu at the upper left of the dialog box. 3 Type and reenter the password, and click OK. You can use uppercase and lowercase letters, numerals, or punctu­ ation marks. The options become unavailable. Unlock or unprotect a profile 1 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, select a profile. 2 Choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu at the upper left of the dialog box. 3 If prompted, enter the correct password, and click OK. Change profile settings You can change the settings of a single profile. See also “Preflight Edit Profile dialog box overview” on page 499 “Lock, unlock, and password-protect profiles” on page 501 “Add and remove profiles” on page 500 Change general profile settings 1 Open the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box. 2 Expand the profile group and select a profile. 3 If the profile is locked, choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu. 4 Change any of the following settings: • Enter a new name for the profile, and describe it in the Purpose box. • To apply password protection to the profile, select Password Protected from the pop-up menu. When prompted, type and reenter the password, and click OK. Otherwise, choose Unlocked. • Enter your name and email address. • Assign the profile to a group. Select an existing group from the menu, or select New Group, type a name, and click OK. Groups are sorted alphabetically. 5 When you finish editing a password-protected profile, select Locked from the pop-up menu. You may also want to password-protect it again. 6 Click OK, or click Save to save your changes without closing the dialog box. Modify existing check and alert settings 1 Open the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box. 2 Expand the profile group and select a profile. 3 If the profile is locked, choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu. 4 Expand the profile to view the groups of properties available for the profile. 5 Select a property group. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 503 User Guide 6 Set options to specify the criteria for the inspection. Options vary according to the selected category of properties under the profile. You can select or deselect criteria, edit values, or activate a property. 7 Select an alert option from the pop-up menu to specify how to handle mismatches during the inspection. 8 Click OK, or click Save to save your changes without closing the dialog box. Preflight alert options For each check in a profile, you specify how to handle mismatches during the inspection. You can select from the menu next to each alert icon. The icon for the alert appears next to the check in the Preflight dialog box. Error Generates an error message for this check (or any checks in this category). Choose this option for mismatches that you must correct before proceeding to the next stage in the workflow. Warning Generates a warning message for this check (or any checks in this category). Choose this option for mismatches that you want to know about and may need to correct before final output. Info Generates a simple note for this check (or any checks in this category). Choose this option for mismatches that you want to know about but do not need to correct before final output. Inactive Never generates an alert message for this check (or any checks in this category). Choose this option for mismatches that will not affect the output quality of the PDF document. You must change the state from Inactive to any other state to make the text boxes available. View a profile summary You can view a description of each check and its inspection criteria for a given profile by creating a profile summary. ? In the Preflight dialog box, select a profile, and choose Create Profile Summary from the Options menu. A profile summary is a PDF file. Additional checks About additional checks and properties The Preflight tool includes a collection of additional checks (called rules in previous versions of Acrobat) that you can add to a profile. These checks are available from the Custom Checks section of each profile. You can modify these checks in a variety of ways, depending on the PDF property they describe. Some properties are defined by a simple statement that is either true or false for a given object in a PDF—for example, “Font is not embedded” or “Color managed color used.” Some property statements specify relationships between the actual value of a property (for example, text size or spot color name) and the value you enter in the dialog box (for example, “12” or “Deep blue”). Other statements compare numerical values. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 504 User Guide Relationship between property value and typed value Relationship between numerical values Boolean properties is equal to is not equal to is less than is true contains does not contain is less than or equal to is not true begins with does not begin with is equal to ends with does not end with is not equal to is contained in is not contained in is greater than is greater than or equal to Property groups The properties for defining a check are grouped in categories. You can view a list of all property groups in the Edit Check dialog box. In addition, you can view the individual properties that make up each group, as well as an expla­ nation of how the Preflight tool uses the properties. The following property groups are available: Text Includes information about how text is rendered, whether it is scaled anamorphically or slanted, or whether it can be mapped to Unicode and thus copied or exported correctly. Font Describes all aspects of a font in which text is rendered. Note that text size is a text property, not a font property, because a font can be used at many sizes throughout a PDF document. Text size is included in the Text property group. Image Includes image resolution, bit depth, number of pixels, rendering intent, and more. Colors Includes color characteristics, such as color spaces, alternate color spaces, patterns, and spot colors. Alternate color spaces enable Acrobat to display or print certain spot colors and multicomponent spot colors (DeviceN). For example, to reproduce the color orange on a monitor or printer, the PDF requires an alternate color space (made up of RGB or CMYK colors) that defines what the spot color looks like. ICC Color Spaces Includes properties for accessing the characteristics in the embedded ICC profiles, which define the ICC color spaces. ICC profiles contain data for translating device-dependent color to a device-independent color space, such as Lab. This helps you reproduce color consistently across different platforms, devices, and ICCcompliant applications (such as Adobe Illustrator and Adobe InDesign). A document that contains objects in different color spaces (such as RGB, CMYK, and Grayscale) could have different ICC profiles for calibrating the color for each color space. Graphic State Properties For Fill Includes graphic state information about how areas are filled, particularly the color values of the current color space. Graphic State Properties For Stroke Includes graphic state information about how lines are drawn, particularly the color values of the current color space, as well as line-specific properties, such as thickness. General Graphic State Properties Includes settings that control how text, graphics, or images are displayed in a PDF page. Overprint settings, for example, are included here. Halftone Includes graphic state settings relevant to prepress operations, such as screen angles, frequencies, and spot shapes. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 505 User Guide Page Description Includes general information about objects on a PDF page, such as the type of object (for example, whether it is an image, a piece of text, or a smooth shade) or whether it is inside or outside the viewable area of the page, or how far it is from the trim box. OPI Includes properties for analyzing all existing OPI links (comments), whether from OPI version 1.3 or 2.0. The possible OPI entries in a PDF are the same as in PostScript files. Embedded PostScript Refers to the PostScript code that can be embedded into the PDF. There are three properties: one for a PostScript operator used directly in a page description; one for PostScript code embedded in a PostScript XObject; and one for an early form of a PostScript XObject, a PostScript Form XObject. Object Metadata Includes information embedded with the object, such as its creator, resolution, color space, copyright, and keywords applied to it. For example, if a Photoshop image with metadata is placed in an InDesign document, and the document is converted to PDF, this information can be retrieved and checked by properties in this group. Annotations Includes most characteristics of comments and drawing markups, traps, and printer marks. Form Fields Includes properties for form fields. Layers Checks for optional content, which may affect the appearance of a page. Pages Includes page numbers and page sizes that represent the various document boxes supported by Adobe PDF 1.3 and later technology (media box, bleed box, trim box, and art box). This group also includes plate names for PDF pages that belong to a preseparated PDF. Document Includes all the pieces of information that apply to the PDF as a whole, such as whether the document is encrypted, contains form fields, or contains bookmarks. Document Info Lists all the standard entries that can also be accessed by the Document Info dialog box in Acrobat, and information that has been standardized by the ISO 15930 standard (PDF/X). Document Metadata Includes information embedded within the document, such as its title, author, copyright, and keywords applied to it. This information is also available in the Document Metadata section of the Document Properties dialog box in Acrobat. (Choose File > Properties, click the Description tab, and then click Additional Metadata.) Structured PDF Includes several basic properties for the tagging structure in a tagged PDF, for which the PDF/A standard defines constraints. Output Intents For PDF/X Or PDF/A Defines which output process the PDF has been prepared for. A PDF intended for high-resolution printed output typically contains an output intent with an embedded ICC profile, for use by a proofing device or a device’s RIP (raster image processor). Output Intent For PDF/X Or PDF/A (ICC Profile Properties) Includes properties for accessing information from an ICC profile embedded in the output intent. This group includes the same properties as ICC profiles for objects, such as profile name and type. The ICC profile describes the output condition of the device where the document will be imaged. Efficiency Of PDF Content Stream Helps determine how efficiently page descriptions are encoded. For example, it is possible to include the text Hello as a text operator for the whole word, or as several text operators for each character in the word. The latter is less efficient and reduces the speed of page rendering. The efficiency checks return percentages for several types of operators. A smaller value in most cases is better than a higher value. Errors In PDF Syntax Returns information about specific errors in a PDF’s syntax. For example, if certain keys required by the PDF specification are not included, Acrobat may still be able to render the file. For predictable PDF rendering, however, it is preferable to encode all PDFs in strict compliance with the PDF specification. 506 C ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 User Guide Errors In Structured PDF Returns information about errors in the tag structure of a tagged PDF. For example, an error is returned if the type of a tagged object is not properly specified. The properties in this group help identify errors in tag structure. Errors In PDF Content Stream Returns information about errors in the page descriptions in a PDF. For example, three number operands are required to define RGB color. If there are fewer than three operators, it is not possible to render the page. Properties in this group help determine the reasons why a PDF page isn’t rendered. Preflight Edit Profile dialog box overview (Custom Checks) The Profiles list in the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box contains predefined profiles included with Acrobat, and any custom profiles you’ve created. If you select Custom Checks, you get more options for selecting and modifying items. The buttons at the bottom of the column perform basic editing functions, such as duplicating, removing, and creating. The search box helps you locate a specific check. A B D E F G H I J K L Custom checks A. Search B. Description C. Alerts D. Create New Check And Include in Current Profile E. Duplicate Check And Assign To Current Profile F. Edit Check G. Remove Check From Profile H. Include In Profile I. New Check J. Duplicate Check K. Edit Check L. Delete Check Add checks to a profile Acrobat includes several predefined preflight profiles, which you can use as is or modify to create custom profiles. You can modify a profile that nearly meets your needs by adding one or more checks that analyze the document using different criteria. For example, an existing check might detect all text that is not plain black—that is, text that uses black plus some amount of cyan, magenta, and yellow. Because this could be a problem when you print small text, you could modify the check so that it flags text objects that use more than one color and have a text size equal to or smaller than 12 points. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 507 User Guide You can reuse a check in any profile where it’s needed. Keep in mind, however, that if you modify a check that’s being used in multiple profiles, the check is modified in every profile that uses it. To avoid making unnecessary modifica­ tions, rename the check for a particular profile. Before editing a preflight profile, you must unlock it. 1 In the Preflight dialog box, select a profile, and click the Edit button , or choose Edit Preflight Profiles from the Options menu. 2 Choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu at the upper left. 3 Select Custom Checks from the list of items displayed under the profile name. 4 Work with the panels by doing any of the following: • To quickly find a specific check, type all or part of its name in the search box. Only those items containing the search term are displayed. Removing the name from the search box displays all the checks again. • To add a check to the profile, select the check in the right panel, click the left-facing arrow, and adjust the alert type, if needed, from the pop-up menu at the lower left of the dialog box. The alert type, which is Error by default, specifies what kind of alert the Preflight tool displays if it finds a mismatch. You can add as many checks as needed. • To remove a check from the profile, select it in the left panel, and click the right-facing arrow. • Double-click a check to edit it. See also “About preflight profiles” on page 498 “Lock, unlock, and password-protect profiles” on page 501 “See where a check or property is used” on page 508 “Correcting problem areas” on page 508 Create or modify custom checks Although you can modify any unlocked predefined check, it’s best to leave the predefined checks as they were configured. Instead, you can create a new check or base a check on an existing one. 1 In the Preflight dialog box, select a profile, and click the Edit button , or choose Edit Preflight Profiles from the Options menu. 2 Choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu at the upper left. 3 If necessary, expand the profile to display the categories underneath. 4 Select Custom Checks. 5 (Optional) Choose Info from the alert menu to prevent the Preflight tool from failing objects that don’t match this check. 6 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, do one of the following: • Click the New icon . • To base the new check on an existing one, select a check and click the Duplicate icon . 7 In the Edit/Duplicate Check dialog box, do any of the following, and then click OK: • Type a name and description in the boxes on the left. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 508 User Guide • Type the message you want to display when the check finds a mismatch (fires) and when it doesn’t find a mismatch. For example, if you’re defining a check against the use of spot colors, your message when no mismatch is found could be “Document has no spot colors.” • Select whether to apply the check to page contents, annotations, form fields, or all those objects. • For Group, specify the group from which properties are to be used. • For Property, select properties and specify criteria to be evaluated against. See where a check or property is used ? Double-click a check, and then click Usage in the Edit Check dialog box to see which profiles use the check. Correcting problem areas About preflight fixups You can use the Preflight tool to fix many errors in a document. To do this, you add error corrections, called fixups, to a profile. The fixup automatically corrects the problem, if possible, or provides information so that you can correct the problem in the source file. A profile with a fixup has the gray wrench icon next to it. An outline of a wrench means that no fixups are associated with the profile. Preflight includes several predefined fixups that you can add to a profile. These cover a broad range of errors that affect color, fonts, images, print production, compliance with international standards like PDF/X and PDF/A, and other areas. Preflight also includes a toolkit for creating your own fixups. Note: A fixup permanently changes the document. For example, fixups can perform the following actions to correct errors: • Convert color spaces, just as the Convert Color feature does. • Repair documents and eliminate unneeded content to reduce file size, just as PDF Optimizer does. • Convert the PDF to a different version. • Widen hairlines. • Flatten transparency. • Remove objects outside the trim and bleed boxes. • Prepare the PDF for PDF/X or PDF/A conversions. • Set document information. Add fixups to a profile The Preflight tool includes a collection of fixups that you can add to a profile. These are all available from the Fixups section of each profile. 1 Open the Preflight dialog box, and click Edit. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 509 User Guide 2 Expand the category with the profile you want, and then expand the profile. 3 If necessary, unlock the profile so that you can modify it. Choose Unlock from the pop-up menu at the top. 4 Select Fixups from the items under the profile. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 510 User Guide Fixups are available from the Fixups section of each profile. 5 Select a fixup from the column on the right and click the left-facing arrow to move the fixup to the column on the left. You can add as many fixups as you want. Note: To remove a fixup from a profile, select the fixup from the list on the left and click the right-facing arrow. Edit Fixup dialog box overview The Edit Fixup dialog box lists the types of predefined fixups you can add to a profile, and the values associated with each fixup. You can use the Edit Fixup dialog box to change the values associated with a fixup, or create a custom fixup based on an existing one. Like checks, fixups are organized by categories. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 511 User Guide A B C E G F D Edit Fixup dialog box A. Fixup name B. Fixup categories C. Description D. Fixup criteria E. Button for seeing which profiles use the fixup F. Search G. Areas in the fixup that can be modified Create or modify fixups You may want to create a custom fixup for certain jobs or output devices. The settings you specify determine such things as what output intent is used, what color conversions take place, how images are compressed and sampled, and what PDF compatibility level the PDF must support. Although you can modify any of the predefined fixups, as long as they are unlocked, it is better to duplicate an existing fixup and change its values. This technique is particu­ larly useful if the fixup belongs to multiple locked profiles, and you don’t want to find and unlock all those profiles. A duplicated fixup is unlocked by default because it does not yet belong to a profile. Create a new fixup 1 In the Preflight Profile dialog box, click the Edit button. 2 Select a profile and unlock it. 3 Select the Fixups category on the left, under the profile. 4 Click the Create button . 5 Name the fixup and specify criteria. Create a fixup based on an existing one 1 In the Preflight Profile dialog box, click the Edit button. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 512 User Guide . 2 Select the Fixups category on the left, under the profile. 3 To unlock the fixup so that you can modify it, choose Unlocked from the pop-up menu at the top. 4 In the Preflight Edit Profile dialog box, select the fixup you want to modify, and click the Duplicate button 5 In the Duplicate Fixup dialog box, select a category in the left column, and then select an option in the right column. The options in the right column are the areas you can modify. 6 To see which profiles currently use this fixup, click Usage. You may need to unlock other profiles before you can modify the fixup. 7 Do any of the following, and click OK: • To rename the fixup, type in the Name box at the top. • To change the description of the area you’re modifying, type in the box just below the categories. • To change how an error is handled, specify options or values for each selected fixup option. PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant files About PDF/X and PDF/A standards PDF/X and PDF/A standards are defined by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). PDF/X standards apply to graphic content exchange; PDF/A standards apply to long-term archiving of electronic documents. During PDF conversion, the file that is being processed is checked against the specified standard. If the PDF will not meet the selected ISO standard, a message appears, asking you to choose between canceling the conversion or going ahead with the creation of a non-compliant file. The most widely used standards for a print publishing workflow are several PDF/X formats: PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3, and (in 2007) PDF/X-4. The most widely used standards for PDF archiving are PDF/A-1a and PDF/A-1b (for less stringent requirements). Note: For more information on PDF/X and PDF/A, see the ISO website and the Adobe website. Convert PDFs to PDF/X or PDF/A You can validate PDF content against PDF/X or PDF/A criteria and save a copy of the PDF as PDF/X or PDF/A, provided it complies with the specified requirements. For example, under certain circumstances, an ICC profile that describes the destination device is required for PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3, and PDF/X-4 compliance. If your document doesn’t have an embedded ICC output profile, you can embed one before saving. Note: You can also create PDF/X- and PDF/A-compliant files using Acrobat Distiller. The PDF/X or PDF/A icon at the lower left of the Preflight dialog box indicates the PDF/X or PDF/A status of the current document. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 513 User Guide A B C D E PDF/X buttons (similar PDF/A buttons appear) A. Convert to PDF/X B. Verify PDF/X C. Not a valid PDF/X D. Valid PDF/X E. Remove PDF/X 1 If the PDF/X or PDF/A icon at the lower left of the Preflight dialog box indicates that the PDF is not PDF/X- or PDF/A-compliant, do one of the following: • Click the icon next to the text “Not a PDF/X file” or “Not a PDF/A file.” • Choose Convert Current PDF To PDF/X (or PDF/A) from the Options menu. 2 Select a PDF/X or PDF/A standard. 3 Specify conversion options, and click OK. 4 Do one of the following, depending on the results of the conversion: • If the conversion succeeds, save the PDF. A green check mark appears in the Preflight dialog box. • If the conversion fails, view the results in the Results list, or click Report to see the results. A red X appears in the Preflight dialog box. When prompted, click OK to view the Preflight results. See also “About PDF/X and PDF/A standards” on page 512 “Adobe PDF settings” on page 102 PDF/X and PDF/A conversion options PDF/X and PDF/A versions Select the PDF/X or PDF/A version to convert the PDF to. Trapped Key (PDF/X only) A PDF/X-compliant file requires the Trapped key to be set to True or False. If you know that the document contains trapping information, select Set Trapped Key To “True.” If you don’t know the trapping status or if you know that the document does not contain trapping information, select Set Trapped Key To “False.” Set Output Condition To Indicates the printing condition for which the document has been prepared. Use Embedded Output Intent If Present Uses an output intent that has already been embedded in the PDF. Omit ICC Profile Unless Embedding Is Required An ICC profile is not required for an output intent. PDF/X-1a in many cases does not require embedding the profile. PDF/X-3 does not require embedding the profile unless a device-independent color is used. PDF/X-4 always requires embedding. PDF/A in many cases does not require embedding an ICC profile. Verify a PDF against PDF/X or PDF/A criteria PDF/X and PDF/A files can be created in a variety of ways, such as by using Acrobat Distiller. If you open a PDF/X or PDF/A file created by Distiller or another application and start the Preflight tool, you may see the Verify PDF/X icon or Verify PDF/A icon at the bottom left of the Preflight dialog box. This icon indicates that you need to verify that the file is PDF/X or PDF/A compliant. The PDF/X or PDF/A standard used to create the file and the color settings file associated with the file appear next to the icon. 1 In the Preflight dialog box, click the Verify PDF/X icon or Verify PDF/A icon. Preflight reports whether the PDF complies with the PDF/X or PDF/A standard used to create it. A green check mark appears in the icon if the verifi­ cation succeeds. A red X appears in the icon if the verification fails. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 514 User Guide 2 After verification, view the results in the Results list, or click Results to see them. Remove PDF/X or PDF/A information You can remove all PDF/X- or PDF/A-specific information, such as the output condition or the GTS_PDFX version key. This is useful if a PDF/X- or PDF/A-compliant file has been modified, if you want to start over, or if an ICC profile increases the file size too much. 1 In the Preflight dialog box, click the Remove PDF/X icon or the Remove PDF/A icon . The icon of a PDF/X- or PDF/A-compliant file has a green check mark in the lower right corner. 2 When prompted, click Yes. Automating document analysis About droplets and batch processing If you routinely use the same preflight profile to inspect documents, you can use a droplet or a batch-processing command to process files. A droplet in Preflight is a small application that runs a Preflight inspection on one or more PDFs that you drag onto the Droplet icon . You can save a droplet on the desktop or to another location on your computer. Like droplets, batch processing inspects multiple files at once, separates successful files from problem files, and creates reports in designated locations. In addition, hot folders can convert multiple file types (JPEG, HTML, RTF, and so on) to PDF or to PDF/X using conversion settings you specify; inspect the files using specified profiles; and output them in any format Acrobat supports, including PDF and PostScript. Note: If you are inspecting only files, you probably don’t need to save changes or save copies in output folders. See also “Processing in batches” on page 368 “Create a results report” on page 495 Create and edit a droplet for running a preflight inspection When you inspect files using a droplet, you can separate successful files from problem files, and review results in an optional report. See also “Create a results report” on page 495 Create a droplet 1 Choose Create Preflight Droplet from the Options menu in the Preflight dialog box. 2 Choose a Preflight profile from the pop-up menu. Create a new one if the exact profile you need is not listed. 3 Specify settings for handling the PDFs after the preflight inspection, and then save the droplet. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 515 User Guide Edit droplet settings 1 Double-click the Droplet icon , or choose Edit Preflight Droplet from the Options menu of the Preflight dialog box. 2 Change the settings you want to modify, and then save the droplet. Droplet settings Use the droplet options to specify how the Preflight tool processes PDFs when you drag them onto the Droplet icon. Note: You also specify these options when you run a preflight inspection using batch processing. (See “Processing in batches” on page 368.) Keep Profile [profile] Uses the currently selected profile for the preflight inspection. Capture Inserts the profile being used in the droplet into the profile list under the Imported Profiles category. Change Profile Provides a menu of all available profiles. You can select a different profile for the preflight inspection. Run Preflight Profile Without Applying Fixups Inspects and reports on problems without correcting them. This option is available only if you choose a profile that includes a fixup for correcting problems. Copy PDF File Places a copy of the PDF in the Success or Error folder. Move PDF File Moves the inspected PDF to the Success or Error folder. Save Alias Of PDF File Places a link to the PDF in the Success or Error folder, so that the original file is not moved from its location. Create Report And Save In Success/Error Folder Lets you specify the type of report and amount of detail. This report indicates the results of the preflight inspection. Settings Lets you change report options. Success/Error Folder Lets you specify a folder and location for the files and optional reports. Display A Summary PDF Creates a report of files that generated mismatches during the inspection. The report indicates the location of each file; the path to the file is an active link. Output intents About output intents in PDFs An output intent describes the final destination device you will use to reproduce the color in the PDF, such as the separations printing device. Output intents can override working spaces during viewing and printing, but they do not convert the colors in the PDF. Note: In a PDF/X1-a workflow, the output intent describes the working CMYK space. In a PDF/X-3 workflow, the embedded ICC profile in the output intent is used to convert any objects with color-managed color to the color space of the ICC profile in the output intent. In most cases this will be CMYK, but can also be RGB or Grayscale. There are two kinds of output intents: One includes an embedded device profile that defines the color space of the destination device, such as U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2; the other is a name that defines the destination color space and usually names a standard output condition. Using a named output intent rather than an embedded profile helps reduce the size of a PDF, but this is typically only possible for PDF/X-1a files, or PDF/X-3 files that do not contain color-managed color. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 516 User Guide You include output intents when you create PDF/X (or PDF/A) files, using the Standards panel of the Adobe PDF Settings dialog box. (You access Adobe PDF Settings differently, depending on the application you’re using.) You can also use third-party plug-ins to include output intents. For documents with named output intents rather than embedded profiles, the program looks for the color profile associated with the named intent. See also “Adobe PDF settings” on page 102 Create output intents 1 On the Output Intents tab of Preflight Preferences, do one of the following: • To create a new output intent from scratch, click the Create A New Output Intent icon . • To create an output intent based on an existing one, select an option from the list on the left, and then click the Duplicate Selected Output Intent icon . An integer is appended to the name of the duplicated output intent. 2 Set output intent options. See also “Preflight preferences” on page 490 Extract an output intent for reuse You can extract an embedded output intent from another PDF, and then add it to the list of output intents in Preflight preferences. 1 On the Output Intents tab of Preflight Preferences, click Capture. 2 Locate the file with the embedded output intent you want and open it. The output intent appears at the end of the list, with a name that indicates it was captured from a certain type of file, for example, “Captured Output Intent from PDF/X file.” Export an ICC profile from an output intent 1 On the Output Intents tab of Preflight Preferences, select the output intent and click Export ICC Profile. 2 Specify a name and location, and click Save. The ICC profile appears with the other ICC profiles in the Profiles folder. Delete an output intent 1 On the Output Intents tab of Preflight Preferences, select the output intent and click Delete . 2 Confirm the deletion. 517 Chapter 18: JDF instructions You can create custom product definitions and save them as Job Definition Format (JDF) files. Job definition format (JDF) files About JDF files A Job Definition Format file (JDF file) is based on XML, a nonproprietary information carrier that can link and refer files to multiple production devices. Using JDF, content creators and print service providers can describe the intent of a printed piece, as well as each process step required to achieve that intent. A JDF job definition file is like a selfdirected electronic job ticket that holds not only the job content (InDesign files or PDFs, for example) but also instructions to interact with JDF-enabled production systems. Jobs are automatically routed through each workflow step—from PDF creation, through preflight and correction, to final print production. What does a JDF file include? JDF files include such data as media and ink requirements, production quantities, customer information, and product descriptions. The JDF file also includes references to files that contain pages and describes how those pages should be ordered to make the product. In addition, the JDF file may include certain information necessary for the creation of PDFs appropriate for the production process, including PDF conversion settings and preflight profiles. Depending on the job definition instructions and the results of specified processes, a JDF file may also include a validation stamp, indicating that the print job was built according to the settings and verified. Process validation The ability to embed PDF conversion and preflight settings in a JDF package, and to verify that steps and processes were completed successfully, ensures the integrity of the files before the job enters print production. For example, a print service provider or content originator can use JDF to control PDF creation and preflight inspection automati­ cally. This is done by specifying the PDF conversion settings and preflight profile that a job must conform to before it can enter the workflow production system. If the process is completed successfully, a validation stamp is added to the JDF, and validation text appears on the computer screen. How are JDF job definitions generated? JDF job definitions can be generated directly from within Acrobat 8 software or based on a JDF template supplied by the print provider. These templates typically include Adobe PDF conversion settings, preflight profiles, and sometimes other commonly used job specifications. Because JDF job definitions are based on XML, they can start as high-level definitions describing only a rough outline of a printed piece and be modified later to add more concrete details. Or, they can be completely created in one session. : Jane Shilbey, Production Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated Spot colors: PMS PMS 110-C Service Bureau Negative emulsion up. C=54% M=23% Y=89% K=12% ditor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS ditor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: . . cardst PMS 343-C, vice e emulsion up. K=12% Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS A B C Basic JDF workflow A. PDF file B. New or edited JDF job definitions C. PDF associated with job definitions, ready to be submitted to a JDF device ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 518 User Guide View JDF job definitions A JDF job definition in Acrobat contains references to the files to be printed as well as instructions and information for print service providers at the production site. JDF Job Definitions dialog box Open the JDF Job Definitions dialog box ? Use either of the following methods: • Choose Advanced > Print Production > JDF Job Definitions. • Select the JDF Job Definitions tool on the Print Production toolbar. • You can also double-click a JDF file on your computer to start Acrobat and list the JDF file in the dialog box. View specifications of the print job The components of a print job, their individual specifications, and the order in which they will be printed are listed in a document hierarchy, which appears on the left side of the Edit JDF Job Definition dialog box. 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select an item in the list, and click Edit. 2 In the document hierarchy on the left of the Edit JDF Job Definition dialog box, expand areas to list the compo­ nents of a section, and then do any of the following: • Select the job definition name—the first item in the hierarchy—to view basic print job specifications and customer information. The JDF definition may be labeled “Product.” • Select a section—the second level in the hierarchy—to view page layout, media, and ink specifications. • Select a file to see information specific to that file. 3 Click tabs to view different specifications. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 519 User Guide A B Edit JDF Job Definition dialog box A. Document hierarchy B. JDF job definitions tabs Create JDF job definitions You can create new JDF job definitions in a variety of ways using the JDF Job Definitions dialog box. Each resulting JDF file can be edited and used in a production environment. Commercial printers who routinely print certain types of jobs may find it useful to create several JDF files that match these job types, and use them as templates. Using a template saves time and avoids costly mistakes, but may not be appropriate for every job. Before you construct a new job definition from scratch, review existing job definitions for ones that achieve results similar to what you want. 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, click New. 2 Select a method of creating a new job definition: New Creates a blank job definition. Based On The Document Uses the properties of a currently open PDF, such as size and number of pages. Select a document from the list on the right, which displays the names of files currently open in Acrobat. Based On The Job Definition Creates a copy of an existing job definition with all its properties, including the list of referenced files. Be sure that the page content is changed before you proceed with the rest of your workflow. If you select this option, a list of available job definitions for your selection appears to the right, which shows a list of JDF files present in the JDF Job Definitions dialog box. 3 Specify which version of the JDF specification your job definition will be compatible with. Note: The default is 1.2. This option is not available if Based On The Job Definition is selected in step 2. In this case, the version is the same as that of the selected job definition. 4 Click Browse to specify the name and location, and then click Save. 5 In the Create New Job Definition dialog box, click Create (or Create And Edit to display the specifications for modification). Edit JDF job definitions Job definitions can come from a number of sources, including InDesign CS2 and later, and Acrobat 7.0 Professional and later. You can edit these job definitions using the Edit JDF Job Definitions dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 520 User Guide The Contacts Manager and Media Manager both open dialog boxes for specifying information you can apply to each component in the print job. See also “Adobe PDF presets” on page 100 “Adobe PDF settings” on page 102 “Preflight profiles” on page 498 “Specify contact information for a print job” on page 521 Edit a job definition You can add various types of files to the JDF, including PDFs, InDesign files, Word files, PostScript files, and so on. 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select the job definition, and click Edit. 2 Expand the items on the left, and do any of the following: • To change the order in which the components will be printed, select a component and click the Move Up or Move Down button at the bottom. • To add a second-level element to the hierarchy, click Add Section. • To add a file to the job definition, click Add File, locate the file, and then specify the page range you want to include in the print job using options in the General tab. Add the files in the order in which they will be printed—for example, front cover, body, back cover. • To modify other settings, select a component, click a tab, and modify the settings as desired. 3 When you finish, click OK, or click another tab to edit more options. General tab options Product Name A unique name for the product or print job. Job ID/Job Part ID Job identification or reference code used by people involved with the job. Submit To Lists the available production sites that have been set up using the Submission Manager. Select the production site for the print the job, or leave as Unspecified to postpone this decision until submit time. (See “Create submission site instructions” on page 524.) Preflight Profile Uses the criteria in the selected preflight profile to validate the Adobe PDF files in the print job. The preflight profile is determined by the production site specified in the Submit To option. PDF Conversion Settings Converts non-Adobe PDF files using the settings in the selected Adobe PDF settings file. The conversion settings are determined by the production site specified in the Submit To option. Preflight Status Indicates whether the JDF file and its associated documents have been submitted and inspected using the Preflight tool. This option also indicates whether any issues were identified. This information is embedded in JDF audit, a metadata element that JDF-enabled production systems can read to determine if the PDF is ready to move to the next step of the process. Description Lets you add comments to the job definition for the receiver of the job definition. Use Binding Exposes the Type and Side menus for setting a binding specification. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 521 User Guide Customer Info tab options Use the Customer Info options to identify the customer and others critical to the project. Billing Code A code to bill charges incurred during production. Customer ID Customer identification used to match this job definition to a billing or higher-level MIS (Management Information System). This ID is usually the internal customer number of the MIS that created the job. Customer Job The name that the customer uses to refer to the job. Customer Order ID The internal order number that represents the contract between the commercial printer and the customer. This number is usually provided when the order is placed, and then referenced on any correspondence between the printer and the customer referring to this job, including bills, change orders, deliveries, and so on. Contacts A list of people involved with the job and their roles. Specify contact information for a print job You specify the contact information for your print job using the Contacts Manager. Specify or update contact information 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, click Contacts Manager, and then make a selection: • Click Add to specify a new contact. • Select a contact in the list, and click Edit to update the information. • Select a contact in the list, and click Duplicate to base a new contact on an existing one. 2 In the Contact Information dialog box, fill in the name and address text boxes. 3 Do one of the following to update the Communication Channels section: • Click Add to enter new information. The options change according to the type of communication channel you choose. • Select an item in the list, and click Edit to update the information. • Select an item in the list, and click Remove. Add a contact to a job definition 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select a job definition, and click Edit. 2 Click the Customer Info tab. 3 In the Contacts section, click Add. 4 Choose a name from the Contact pop-up menu. 5 Double-click a job function in the right column, or choose job functions in the right column, and click the Add button. You can choose from the default list or add custom job functions. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 522 User Guide Add Contact dialog box 6 If the contact information isn’t correct, click Edit and update the information. 7 When prompted, choose whether to update the contact in the current job definition, or update the information in the Contacts Manager as well. Add a job function to a job definition 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box or on the Customer Info tab, click Contacts Manager. 2 Click Additional Contact Types. 3 Update the list of job functions and contact types, as needed: • Click Add to enter a new job function. • Select a job function in the list, and click Edit to update the information. • Select a job function in the list, and click Remove. Define media specifications for a print job You specify the media for each component of your print job using the Media Manager. If you know the stock brand, you can specify it. Otherwise, you describe the characteristics of the medium, and a particular stock is matched to those characteristics at the production site. Define media specifications 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, click the Media Manager button. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 523 User Guide Media Manager dialog box 2 Enter the media specifications that you want to apply: • Click Add to enter new information. • Select an item in the list, and click Edit to update the information. • Select an item in the list, and click Remove. Add a media specifications to a job definition 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select a job definition and click Edit. 2 In the document hierarchy, select a section in the second level of the hierarchy. 3 Select an option from the Media pop-up menu. 4 If a media option doesn’t exist, or there is no media appropriate for the job definition, click the Media Manager button. 5 Update the media specifications, as needed: • Click Add to enter new information. • Select an item in the list, and click Edit to update the information. • Select an item in the list, and click Remove. Media options Use Media options to specify paper requirements. Description Unique identifier for the media. Media Type Paper or transparency. User Media Type A description of the type of media. Grade The grade of the paper. The offset printing grades are based on a scale of 1 through 5, where Gloss-Coated is “1” and Uncoated, Yellowish is “5.” Weight The intended weight of the media, measured in grams per square meter (g/m2 ). Thickness The thickness of the chosen medium, measured in microns (m). Opacity The opacity of the media. Use Opaque for two-sided printing when you don’t want the printing on the other side to show through under normal light. Use translucent for back-lit viewing. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 524 User Guide Texture The intended texture of the media. Front/Back Coating The prepress coating applied to the front and back surfaces of the media. Stock Brand The brand name associated with the media. Stock Type Available stock types. Note that Offset includes book stock. Brightness Reflectance percentage. Recycled Amount The percentage, between 0 and 100, of recycled material the media must contain. Color Media color. Shade The color’s shade, light or dark. Clear An option for specifying whether the color is translucent. Add and remove JDF job definitions You can reuse and share JDF job definitions with other users. For example, print service providers can provide them to their customers to ensure that print jobs are specified correctly before the jobs are handed off to production. Add job definitions to the job list 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, click Add. 2 Locate the JDF job definition file (.jdf extension) and click Open, or double-click the job definition file. The job definition appears in the JDF Job Definitions list. Remove job definitions from the job list ? In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select the job definition, and click Remove. Submitting print jobs Create submission site instructions At any time, you can prepare your JDF package (the JDF file and PDF file) for submission using submission site instructions. Any preflight profile or PDF conversion settings file embedded in the job definition is used in the submission process. See also “Adobe PDF presets” on page 100 “Adobe PDF settings” on page 102 “Run a preflight inspection” on page 489 Create submission site instructions 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select the job definition, and click Submission Manager. 2 Click Add, or select an item in the list and click Edit or Duplicate. 3 Set submission site options. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 525 User Guide Note: The options you set are automatically invoked when you submit the job to a JDF-enabled production system. Remove submission site instructions 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select the job definition, and click Submission Manager. 2 Select an item in the list, and click Remove. Submission site options Use options in the Submission Setup dialog box to specify which actions to perform on the print job during the submission process. Name A unique name for the submission site. Default PDF Conversion Settings When the job definition is sent through the submission process, any referenced non-Adobe PDF files are converted to Adobe PDF. The conversion settings come from either the PDF Conversion Settings embedded in the job definition or the Default PDF Conversion Settings pop-up menu in the Submission Site dialog box. Any PDFs referenced by the job definition before submission are not affected by the specified PDF Conversion Settings. Verify That PDF Files Are Consistent With The JDF Job Definition Compares the information in the job definition with the associated files, and verifies that all associated files exist and are linked to the appropriate URL. Any incon­ sistencies in page sizes, inks, and the number of pages available in the associated documents result in an error. For example, an error is reported if the job definition specifies that pages 1 through 12 from document A will be used but document A contains only 8 pages. You can either fix the job definition to match the document, use other features to fix the document, or continue without making changes. Note: Not all errors are fixable. Combine PDF Files Into A Single PDF File Combines PDFs in the document hierarchy into a single PDF. A nonprinting annotation can optionally be added to the corner of each page, indicating the section name and page number of that page within the section. Important: This feature is not recommended for workflows that rely on PDF/X compatibility, because changes to the referenced PDFs may make them noncompliant with the PDF/X specification. Any noncompliance will be tested if the Preflight option is selected with an appropriate PDF/X profile. Insert Blank Pages Inserts blank pages into the combined PDF where no PDF pages are referenced (for example, if a section has been specified to contain 12 pages but no PDF has been referenced). Include Annotations Adds annotations to the submitted PDFs to indicate their position in the job. Preflight PDF Files Runs a preflight inspection of the associated PDFs. The preflight profile used is either the Preflight profile embedded in the job definition or the one selected in the Default Preflight profile pop-up menu in the Submission Site dialog box. Convert To MIME Package And Submit To JMF Device Packages the JDF file and associated PDFs as a single MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) file. MIME is a specification for formatting non-ASCII messages so that they can be sent over the Internet, ensuring they do not get separated from each other. This allows the package to be sent to an output device that supports Job Messaging Format (JMF), at the URL you specify. JMF enables electronic devices to communicate over a network. Submit To Folder Submits the JDF file and associated PDFs to the folder you specify in the Path box. Prompt User For A Folder Location At Submit Time Unlike the Submit To Folder option, this option lets you specify a folder to receive the submitted JDF and associated PDFs when the job is submitted. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 526 User Guide Submit files to a production system When you are ready to hand off the print job to submission, submit the job definition and associated PDFs to a preconfigured JDF-enabled production system. Depending on your selections in the Submission Setup dialog box, inconsistencies between the job definition and the PDF are listed, followed by the results of a preflight inspection. 1 In the JDF Job Definitions dialog box, select the job definition and click Submit. 2 If the Submission Site field is unspecified, choose a submission site from the Submit To menu. Otherwise, the submission site specified in the job will be shown and used. 3 Click Start. 4 If inconsistency errors are listed in the Submit dialog box, select them to see if you can correct them in the job definition. The Update JDF button becomes available if you can. (You can also click Next and Previous to move among the fixable errors.) 5 To update the job definition, select an error and click Update JDF. The job definition is automatically updated, and the error disappears. Some errors cannot be fixed completely. In this case, a warning appears in place of the previous error. 6 When you have corrected all fixable errors, click Continue. 7 If you selected Preflight in the Submission Site dialog box, Acrobat performs a preflight inspection of the PDF and displays the results. 8 Click OK to close the Preflight dialog box and continue the submission. The Submit dialog box indicates the results of the submission process. If the submission fails, an alert describes why it failed. A JDF file isn’t written, and a JDF package isn’t sent to a JDF device. See also “Create submission site instructions” on page 524 “About preflight results” on page 491 527 Chapter 19: Adobe Version Cue Using Adobe Version Cue About Version Cue Adobe Version Cue® is a file-version manager included with Adobe Creative Suite that integrates versioning and asset management into your existing workflows within and across Adobe Creative Suite components, including Adobe Photoshop CS2, Adobe InDesign CS2, Adobe Illustrator CS2, Adobe GoLive CS2, Adobe Acrobat, and Adobe Bridge. Version Cue consists of two components: a server included with Adobe Creative Suite that you can install locally or on a centralized server, and a client that’s automatically installed with Adobe Creative Suite components, Adobe InCopy, and Acrobat. You can use Version Cue in a single Adobe Creative Suite component, such as Photoshop, or across multiple compo­ nents, such as Photoshop and Illustrator, to track changes to a file as you work on it. Use Version Cue to enable efficient workgroup collaboration by way of file sharing, version control, and online reviews. You can use Bridge to access Version Cue Servers, projects, and files, and to quickly view and compare information about Version Cue-managed assets. For more information about using Bridge with Version Cue, see Adobe Creative Suite Help. If you use Adobe Creative Suite, or if you have access to a shared Version Cue project and have been granted appro­ priate privileges by the project’s owner, you can use the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility to create and manage users and groups, projects, and PDF reviews. For more information, see “About the Version Cue Adminis­ tration utility” on page 548 Version Cue streamlines the following tasks: • Creating historical versions of your files. • Maintaining file security. • Organizing files into private or shared projects. • Browsing with file thumbnails, and searching file information and version comments. • Reviewing file information, comments, and file status in private and shared projects while you browse. See also “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Availability of Version Cue features Different Version Cue features are available in different environments: • If you use Acrobat 8 but not Adobe Creative Suite, you can gain access to the full Version Cue feature set by partic­ ipating in a shared project; that is, you can gain access if another user on your network installs Adobe Creative Suite and gives you access to a Version Cue project in a Version Cue Workspace. • If you use Adobe Creative Suite, you have access to the full set of Version Cue features, including Version Cue Administration. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 528 User Guide See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Getting the most out of Version Cue” on page 528 Getting the most out of Version Cue In Version Cue, you create projects that you and other users can access through Adobe Creative Suite components, InCopy, and Acrobat 8. Projects keep related files together in one place. Version Cue manages the files in these projects. Because Version Cue works in all Adobe Creative Suite components, InCopy, and Acrobat 8, your design process isn’t interrupted when you work on individual files within a project. You can use Version Cue in a single application, such as Photoshop CS2, to track changes to a file as you work on it. In addition, workgroups or an individual can use Version Cue across applications. Multiple users can manage projects that contain files from all Adobe Creative Suite components and Acrobat 8. Projects can include non-Adobe files, such as text documents, billing forms, or spreadsheets. When you keep all managed files related to a project in one place, you eliminate the task of tracking down important files. Here’s an example of how you might use Version Cue with Adobe Creative Suite. You start by creating a new project and adding a Photoshop file containing the main image for a printed piece. Then, you add art from Illustrator and text from InDesign. Next, you add GoLive web elements to leverage your printed content for use in a web page. As you and your team work on each piece of the project, Version Cue creates versions to keep track of changes. When it’s time to present the project, you create a PDF of each project file and use the Version Cue Administration utility to set up an online PDF review. Your customers, supervisors, or peer reviewers view and comment on the project using Acrobat. See also “Create and edit projects” on page 532 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 About the Adobe dialog box In Adobe Creative Suite 2.0 components (except for GoLive and Acrobat 7), and in InCopy CS2, you can use the Adobe dialog box when you choose the Open, Import, Export, Place, Save, or Save As commands, even if you don’t use Version Cue. In Acrobat 8, you can use the Adobe dialog box when you choose the Open, Save, or Save As commands, even if you don’t use Version Cue. The Adobe dialog box displays additional information, including thumbnails, which make it easy to identify files. You can use the Adobe dialog box when working with both Adobe and non-Adobe files. By default, when you choose the Open, Save, or Save As commands, the Operating System (OS) dialog box appears. To use the Adobe dialog box instead and set it as the default, click Use Adobe Dialog. Use the View menu options to customize the display. You can change back to the OS dialog box at any time by clicking Use OS Dialog. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 529 User Guide Adobe dialog box A. Favorites panel B. Project Tools menu C. View menu You can use the Adobe dialog box to accomplish these tasks: • Add frequently used files and folders to the Favorites panel for quick access. • View thumbnail images of files. • Determine whether a file is open in Acrobat 8 or another Adobe Creative Suite application on your computer. • Rename or delete files (Mac OS only). • View metadata about files in the Properties panel. Metadata includes author, keyword, and copyright information. • Access Version Cue projects and files as well as non-Version Cue files. • View detailed information about Version Cue projects, such as the status of individual files. • View and work with Version Cue versions. • Search for files in a Version Cue project. • Move Version Cue files to the Project Trash. • Determine which Version Cue files are in use, and who is using them. • Create a new Version Cue project, or connect to an existing Version Cue project. See also “View Version Cue Workspace, project, and file information” on page 531 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Turn Version Cue on or off By default, access to Version Cue is turned off in Acrobat 8. You must manually turn on Version Cue in Acrobat 8 to use it. If you disable Version Cue, you won’t have access to any Version Cue Workspace. For information about turning Version Cue on or off in Adobe Creative Suite components, see Adobe Creative Suite Help. 1 Choose Edit > Preferences > Documents (Windows) or Acrobat > Preferences > Documents (Mac OS). 2 Select or deselect Enable Version Cue File-Version Manager. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 530 User Guide See also “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Working with Version Cue projects About Version Cue projects Version Cue uses projects to store related files and folders. Projects are stored on Version Cue Workspaces. If you work independently, you create a project to gather all the files you need and use Version Cue features, such as versions. In a workgroup, depending on your workflow, you can create one Version Cue project for files that everyone in your workgroup collaborates on, a different project for files that don’t require collaboration, and yet another project restricted to specific users. When you first open a Version Cue project, Version Cue creates a folder named “Version Cue” in your My Documents (Windows) or Documents (Mac OS) folder, and adds a folder for the project to it. When you open a file from that project, Version Cue adds a working copy of the file to the project folder. As you edit and save intermediate changes to your file, you are actually editing in the working copy; the original file on the Version Cue Workspace is protected. After you open a Version Cue project, a shortcut to that project appears in the Open or Save dialog boxes. Remote Version Cue Workspaces also appear in this list after you access them. Version Cue uses a special folder for each project: the documents folder. When you access the project, Version Cue automatically opens the documents folder and temporarily displays the project title as the folder name. You’ll also see the documents folder if you open the working copies folder. See also “About working copies” on page 535 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Open a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. If the button is visible, click Use Adobe Dialog (if you see the Use OS Dialog button, you’re already using the Adobe dialog box). Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 To open a Version Cue Workspace, double-click it. Note: If you don’t see a desired Version Cue Workspace, choose Refresh from the Tools menu. 3 To open a project, double-click it. If the Use Adobe Dialog button doesn’t appear in the Open or Save As dialog boxes, make sure that you’ve turned on the Version Cue preference in Acrobat. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 531 User Guide See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Connect to remote projects” on page 531 “Adding files and folders to a project” on page 537 Connect to remote projects Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. When you need to work on Version Cue projects that are located remotely, on a different subnet, you can use the IP address of the computer to access that Version Cue Workspace. Workspaces on computers within your subnet should be visible automatically. The Version Cue Workspace can communicate with applications that are WebDAV enabled. When Version Cue is running on a server, you can use it as a WebDAV server. However, the native versioning features in Version Cue are more sophisticated than those available through WebDAV. WebDAV capabilities are provided for legacy workflows. See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Log in to and out of the Version Cue Administration utility” on page 550 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Connect to a remote project 1 Choose File > Open. If you are using the OS Dialog box, click Use Adobe Dialog. Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. Choose Connect To from the Project Tools menu 2 In the Connect To dialog box, enter the Version Cue Client URL (the Version Cue IP or DNS address), a colon, and the port number (3703)—for example, http://153.32.235.230:3703. If you have connected to the workspace before, it’s not necessary to enter the port number. You can display the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility login page to identify the Version Cue Client URLs that remote users and WebDAV applications need to access the workspace. 3 Click OK. After you connect to a remote Version Cue Workspace, the dialog box displays all available Version Cue projects in that workspace. A shortcut to the remote workspace is automatically included in your list of available Version Cue Workspaces. Connect to a project using WebDAV ? Refer to your application’s documentation for information on using its WebDAV features, and then use the Version Cue WebDAV Client URL, the port number (3703), “webdav”, and the project name to identify the project you want to work with—for example, http://153.32.235.230:3703/webdav/project_name. View Version Cue Workspace, project, and file information Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 532 User Guide . 2 If the button is available, click Use Adobe Dialog (if you see the Use OS Dialog button instead, you are already using the Adobe dialog box). 3 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. You can resize the Favorites panel to display items with long names: place your cursor over the vertical line to the right of the Favorites panel and drag it to the right. 4 To change the display of Version Cue Workspaces, projects, or files in the dialog box, do any of the following: • To view the properties of a file, click the toggle to display the Properties panel. • To change the display of a project, choose a display option from the View menu • To sort items in a column, while in detail view, click the column heading. Click the column heading again to reverse the order. • To show or hide columns of information while in list view, right-click/Control-click the Name column heading, and choose Show All, Hide All, or a column name. (The Name column can’t be hidden.) Visible columns have a check mark to the left of the column name. • To change the location of a column, drag the column heading to the left or right of another column heading (Windows), or press Command+Option and drag the column heading to the left or right of another column heading (Mac OS). The Name column can’t be moved. • To resize a column of information, drag the vertical dividing line between column headings or double-click the line to automatically resize the column to fit the widest item in it. 5 To display information about a file, project, or Version Cue Workspace, do one of the following: • Place the pointer over the item. A summary of file information appears in a tool tip. • Right-click/Control-click the file and choose Versions to display information about a file’s versions. See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Version Cue file statuses” on page 536 Create and edit projects To begin using Version Cue, you need to create a Version Cue project. When you work with Version Cue, you decide what a project entails. For example, you can create a project to organize files for an entire publishing effort, or you can create a project to manage files for specific aspects of an advertising campaign. You can use a project to organize assets related to a particular customer or use a project to separate private files from files that are worked on collab­ oratively. You can add files to projects at any time. When you create a Version Cue project, you specify a project name, the Version Cue Workspace that hosts the project, and a project description. You specify whether to share the project or keep it private. Shared projects are available to other users; however, you can password-protect shared projects to restrict access to specific users. You can create private projects on a workspace installed on your computer. If you create a project on a computer that is used as a server, it must be shared to be accessible. You can create projects by using an Adobe Creative Suite component, InCopy, Acrobat 8, or the Version Cue Admin­ istration utility. The Version Cue Administration utility provides options for specifying advanced project properties. You create new Version Cue projects with it by importing a folder of files. These files are used as the project starting point. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 533 User Guide Project Tools menu contains frequently used commands. See also “Share or unshare a project” on page 534 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Disconnecting from projects” on page 541 “Delete files and folders” on page 542 “Log in to and out of the Version Cue Administration utility” on page 550 Create a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Choose New Project from the Project Tools menu . 4 Choose a location for the project from the Location menu. 5 Enter a name for the project in the Project Name box and a description in the Project Info box. (The description you enter appears as a tool tip when the pointer is over the project in the list of workspaces.) 6 To make this project and its files available to others, select Share This Project With Others. (If the Version Cue Workspace is on a computer other than your own, the Version Cue project is shared by default.) 7 Click OK. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 534 User Guide Edit the properties of a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. Select the project, and then choose Edit Properties from the Project Tools menu. 2 In the Edit Properties dialog box, do any of the following, and click Save: • To change the project name, enter a name in the Project Name text box. The new name will not be reflected on your (or your workgroup’s) working copies project folder until you disconnect from and reconnect to the project. • To change the description of the project, enter text in the Project Info box. • To make this project and its files available to other users, select Share This Project With Others. (If the Version Cue Workspace is on a computer being used as a server, the Version Cue project is shared by default.) To unshare a shared project, deselect Share This Project With Others. Note, however, that this action does not delete any working copies currently in project folders on the workgroup’s computers. • To view the location of working copies on your computer, expand Local Project Files. To open the folder, choose Show Files In Explorer (Windows) or Show Files In Finder (Mac OS). To change the location of the files, click Change Location and choose the new location for working copies. Note: Make sure that you use the Change Location feature to relocate working copies, rather than moving the project folder manually in the file system. • Click Advanced Administration to enable lock protection, edit or assign users, or require users to log in to the project. When prompted, log in to Version Cue Administration. Depending on your privileges, this option may not be available. 3 Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box (Version Cue saves your settings even though you clicked Cancel). Share or unshare a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. At any time, you can change a project’s shared status. Projects on a Version Cue Workspace that other users can access are shared by default and can’t be made private. Note that unsharing a project does not delete any working copies currently in the working copies project folders of your workgroup. Note: If the Version Cue Workspace is installed on a computer that uses a firewall and you want to share the workspace with others, make sure that TCP ports 3703 and 427 are left open. If you’re using a Windows machine, deselect the Internet Connection Firewall option. (For information on the Internet Connection Firewall option, see Windows Help.) 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS Open dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel, and then double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 3 Select the project, and then do one of the following: • To share the project, choose Share Project from the Project Tools menu . • To unshare the project, choose Unshare Project from the Project Tools menu. • Choose Edit Properties from the Project Tools menu. Select or deselect Share This Project With Others, and click Save. After you edit the project properties, click Cancel to close the Open dialog box (your settings are saved even though you clicked Cancel). ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 535 User Guide See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “View Version Cue Workspace, project, and file information” on page 531 Working with files in Version Cue About working copies Version Cue projects and files reside in the Version Cue Workspace on the host computer. The master copies of files added to the project, including file versions and other file data, such as comments, version dates, and user IDs, are saved on this host computer. When you work in files from a Version Cue project, you’re editing a working copy of the master file on your computer, not the master file on the Version Cue Workspace, which remains protected and untouched. As you work, use the Save command to save changes periodically. This command does not create a new version of the master file but updates your working copy. A new version is created only when you choose the Save A Version command. This command first updates the working copy, and then adds a new version to the master file on the Version Cue Workspace. When the working copy of a file matches (is the same version as) the current version in the workspace, the file is synchronized. Using working copies of master files, several people can work with the most recent version of a master file. For example, if two people need access to the same illustration during overlapping periods of time, Version Cue lets each person work with a working copy of the most recent file version. The second person to access the illustration is informed that the file is already in use. At that time, the second person can decide whether to continue working with the file. Working copies allow you to work on a file even when the host workspace is unavailable, or offline. Though some features, such as versions, can’t be used when you’re working offline, you can edit files and save your work. When the workspace is online again, you can save a version to update the master file. There are times when you may wish to delete the working copies of your project files. For example, you may want to free up space on your hard drive, or are completely finished working on the project. Disconnecting from a project deletes the working copies project folder on your hard drive. You can do this at any time if none of the working copies are In Use by you. If you accidentally disconnect from a project, new working copies are recreated the next time you access the project files. If a project is deleted from either the host workspace or your local computer, you can use working copies to recreate the project with the most current versions of the files. To relocate working copies of a project, edit the project’s properties and use the Change Location feature. For instruc­ tions, see “Create and edit projects” on page 532. See also “Disconnecting from projects” on page 541 “Delete files and folders” on page 542 “Editing and synchronizing offline files” on page 546 “Restore a file or folder deleted from a project” on page 543 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 536 User Guide “Version Cue file statuses” on page 536 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 File protection in Version Cue Version Cue automatically informs others that a file is being edited. Version Cue assigns In Use status to a file when you open and edit a file that isn’t being edited by another user. When you save a version, Version Cue removes the file’s In Use status. At times two people may need to work with a file simultaneously. For example, User A may begin editing a file but be called away before saving a version. If User B works on the file while User A is away, Version Cue ensures that the two files don’t overwrite each other in the project. User A’s working copy won’t reflect the changes made by User B, and vice versa. When finished with the file, both users can save a new version of the file to the Version Cue Workspace. Version Cue alerts all current users of the file about the presence of a new version in the Version Cue Workspace and gives them the option of downloading the latest version or continuing their current edits. (Version Cue alerts users who have the file open or who reopen a file that was previously closed while In Use.) You can use the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility to assign lock protection to a Version Cue project. Only the first user to begin editing an available file in a lock-protected project can save the next version of that file to the Version Cue project. Other users who edit that file simultaneously can’t save changes to a new version of that file, even after the first user saves a version. These other users must save the changes as completely new files with their own version thread. See also “About working copies” on page 535 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Version Cue file statuses Files that are managed by Version Cue are always marked with a status icon that describes the state of the file on the Version Cue Workspace. You can view a file’s status while browsing the files in a Version Cue project. A file can have more than one status at the same time (in some cases only one status is shown). Each file status has a corresponding icon: Open The file is open on your computer. This status lets you make informed decisions about whether it’s appro­ priate, for example, to place a file into a layout while the file is still being edited. The Open status is indicated only for files on your computer. In Use By Me You are editing the file. Version Cue assigns this status to a file when you make an edit to the file that changes its content.You can manually mark a file In Use before you edit it to indicate to others that you intend to make changes to the content. Synchronized The latest known version of the file is available for editing and you have a working copy of it on your computer. Version Cue assigns this status when you save a version of the file you’re editing, or when you manually synchronize a project. No Working Copy No local copy of the file exists. This status indicates that it will take a few moments to create a working copy before you can edit the file. In Use By [user name] Another user is editing the file and has not yet saved a new version. Conflicted Copies There is a version conflict, or both you and another user are editing the file. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 537 User Guide Only Copy The file in the working copies folder is the only copy known to Version Cue and has not been synchronized with the Version Cue Workspace. This scenario can occur when a file has been saved in an existing project for the first time while the workspace is offline. Because the workspace is offline, Version Cue displays the Offline Copy status until the workspace is back online, and then changes the status to Only Copy. Version Cue also displays this status if you drag a file from one folder into the working copies folder using the file system instead of Bridge (not recommended). You can edit the file, but it’s important to synchronize (upload the file to the workspace) after you save your changes. Offline Copy There is a local copy of the file in your working copies folder, but the Version Cue Workspace is offline. There is no way of checking whether the local copy is synchronized with the latest version on the workspace. You can edit an offline copy and save these changes; however, you must save a version or synchronize the file once the workspace comes back online. Outdated Copy A local copy exists, but there is a newer version of the file in the workspace. This status indicates that it will take a few moments to create an up-to-date working copy before you can edit the file. Unavailable The Version Cue Workspace is offline or you don’t have access privileges. There is no way of checking the status of the local copy with the workspace. You can edit the local copy and save these changes; however, you must save a version or synchronize the file once the workspace comes back online. Deleted The file or folder has been deleted from the project, but not yet permanently erased. (You can restore a deleted file or folder). See also “About working copies” on page 535 “Synchronize files” on page 548 “Edit a file in use by another user” on page 539 “Delete files and folders” on page 542 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Adding files and folders to a project To save versions of a file and take advantage of Version Cue file management, you must add or save the file to a Version Cue project. You can add assets such as swatch libraries to projects to share them with your workgroup. You can also add non-Adobe files to Version Cue projects. You can add files using any of the following methods: • Add files one at a time from within InCopy, an Adobe Creative Suite component, or Acrobat 8. • Place files directly in the project’s working copies folder, and then synchronize the project to add the files. For more information, see “About Version Cue projects” on page 530. See also “Create and edit Version Cue projects” on page 553 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Editing and synchronizing offline files” on page 546 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 538 User Guide Add a file to a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Open the file. 2 Choose File > Save As. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 3 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 4 Double-click the project to open it. 5 Enter a comment for the first version in the Version Comments box, and click Save. Add files to a project folder Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. You can add files by dragging them into the documents folder of a Version Cue project. 1 Do one of the following: • Locate the project folder inside the My Documents/Version Cue (Windows) or Documents/Version Cue (Mac OS) folder on your computer. • If the project folder isn’t already in the My Documents/Version Cue (Windows) or Documents/Version Cue (Mac OS) folder on your hard disk, create a new folder inside the Version Cue folder. Give the folder the same name as the existing Version Cue project on the Version Cue Workspace. Inside the new project folder, create a new folder and name it “documents.” Note: These steps work only if the project already exists. You cannot create a new project using this method. 2 Move or copy the items you want to add to the documents folder. 3 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 4 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. Open the Version Cue Workspace, and select the project. 5 Choose Synchronize from the Project Tools menu . Once the synchronization is complete, the files are added to the project. Open a file from a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. After you add or save a file to a Version Cue project, the file is automatically managed by Version Cue. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box, and then click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 2 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 3 Double-click the project that contains the file you want to open. 4 Select the file and click Open. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 539 User Guide See also “Edit a file in use by another user” on page 539 “Update a file with the most recent version” on page 539 “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Search for files in a project” on page 540 Edit a file in use by another user Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. If you don't notice that a file’s status is In Use when you open it, Version Cue displays an In Use By alert to remind you that someone else is already editing a working copy of the file. 1 Open the file, and click one of the following options when the In Use By alert appears: No, Close Document Closes the file without any alterations. Yes, Keep Open Keeps the file open so you can work on the document. 2 If you continue working with the document and make a change to the content, Version Cue displays an alert to remind you that there is the possibility of creating conflicting copies. Click one of the following: Discard Changes Displays the most recent version of the file from the Version Cue Workspace and discards your changes to the working copy. Continue Editing Lets you edit the working copy without overwriting the changes made in another user’s working copy of the same file (Version Cue will prompt each user to save a new version of the file). 3 If the project doesn’t have lock protection applied to it, you can save a new version of your edits. Version Cue displays an alert warning you that conflicting edits will occur if you continue. Click one of the following: Cancel Returns you to the open document without saving a version. Save Version Anyway Updates the master file in the Version Cue Workspace with the new version. (Version Cue displays an alert to the other user to note that a newer version of the file has been created by you.) At any point, you can close the document and discard any changes you’ve made. See also “Update a file with the most recent version” on page 539 Update a file with the most recent version Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 540 User Guide If another user creates a new version of a file that you have open or that is still marked In Use By Me, Version Cue prompts you to update your document with the latest version when you open it or attempt to make changes to it, or when you bring the document window frontmost in a group of documents. ? When the prompt appears, click one of the following: Discard Changes Updates the document with the most recent version from the Version Cue project. You can continue editing the file after it is updated. You lose any changes you’ve made even if you have already saved those changes to the working copy with a Save command. Continue Editing Leaves the document as is. You can continue editing the file without overwriting the changes in the more recent version. Instead, you’re prompted to either save a new version of the file when you close it, or to discard your changes. See also “Edit a file in use by another user” on page 539 Save changes to a file Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. If you want to save changes, but you aren’t ready to save a new version as you edit a file you have opened from a Version Cue project, you can use the File > Save command to save your changes to the working copy on your computer. Until you save a new version to the shared Version Cue Workspace, these changes won’t be available to any other user. You can also close the file once you save changes to a file, and then reopen it and save a version later. ? To save changes to your working copy, choose File > Save. Search for files in a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. Metadata is automatically added to Version Cue project files as you work with them. You can quickly locate files in a Version Cue project by searching for specific information such as titles, authors, copyright data, keywords, dates, and locations. The search feature searches through existing files, as well as files deleted from projects. 1 Choose File > Open. 2 If the button is visible, click Use Adobe Dialog (if you see the Use OS Dialog button instead, you are already using the Adobe dialog box). 3 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 4 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 5 Double-click the project you want to search. 6 Click Project Search . 7 Enter information in Project Search. If you open an older version of a file found as the result of a search, the filename will be prefaced with “Version -”. Note: It is best to treat older versions as view-only when opened as the result of a search. Although you can edit an older version in its native application, do so only if you intend for this version to become a separate asset. To edit a previous version, first promote it to the new, current version, and then make changes. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 541 User Guide See also “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 “Version Cue file statuses” on page 536 “View and compare versions” on page 545 Disconnecting from projects Disconnecting from projects Disconnecting from a project erases the working copies of files on your computer while leaving the master copies on the Version Cue Workspace intact. Disconnecting also removes shortcuts to the project from the Adobe dialog box. You may want to disconnect to free up more space on your hard drive. Or, you might disconnect from a project if someone else in your workgroup deletes a project from the Version Cue Workspace (your working copies are not touched by that deletion). As long as you have saved a version of the working copies there is no harm in discarding them by disconnecting. When you access the project again, new working copies will be created for the current versions of the files you open. If you have working copies with the In Use By Me status, you will not be permitted to disconnect from a project until you have saved a version of those files. When you disconnect from a project, only the working copies and shortcuts on your computer are erased. Leaving the project intact on the workspace allows others, as well as yourself, to access the master files. When you delete a project, all working copies and shortcuts on your own computer, along with the master copies of files and folders in the Version Cue Workspace, are erased. However, any working copies and shortcuts on other computers your co­ workers or you previously used to access the project are not erased. To completely remove the project and erase those working copies and shortcuts, you must select the shortcut or project folder and disconnect, even though the project has already been deleted. See also “Delete files and folders” on page 542 “Disconnect from a project” on page 541 “About working copies” on page 535 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Disconnect from a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. Disconnecting from a project removes the files from your computer but doesn’t delete the project from the host Version Cue Workspace. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Open the Version Cue Workspace and select the project from which you want to disconnect. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 542 User Guide 4 Choose Disconnect from the Project Tools menu. Note: You can select any project icon or shortcut to the project when you want to disconnect. Deleting files, folders, and projects Delete files and folders Deleting a file or folder from Version Cue is a two-step process that safeguards against accidental deletions. The first step is deleting the file or folder and giving it the Deleted status. Deleting hides the file or folder from normal view but does not erase it. The second step is permanently deleting and erasing the file or folder and its previous versions. When you delete a folder, the folder and all folders and files nested inside it are hidden and given a Deleted status. When you permanently delete a folder, its entire contents are erased. Any user with appropriate privileges can delete files and folders unless the files or folders are marked In Use. In a workgroup, if a user is editing a file that you need to delete, you can reset the file’s lock by using the Version Cue Administration utility. You can restore files or folders that have a Deleted status. Restoring reinstates Version Cue management. Restored files and folders appear in their previous location in the project folder hierarchy. (Deleted files and folders maintain their relationship within the project hierarchy until they are permanently deleted.) You can show hidden and deleted files or folders, and view them in search results. Additionally, Version Cue has a Project Trash view from which you can view all deleted files in a project. Use Project Trash to view and handle all deleted files without navigating through the project folder hierarchy. See also “About working copies” on page 535 “Manage Version Cue projects” on page 556 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 “View Version Cue Workspace, project, and file information” on page 531 Delete files or folders from a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 4 Double-click the project that contains the file or folder you want to delete. 5 Select the file or folder you want to delete. 6 Do one of the following: • Choose Delete from the Project Tools menu • Click the Delete icon . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 543 User Guide Note:If Show Deleted Items is not selected in the Project Tools menu, the file will become hidden and removed from view. If Show Deleted Items is selected, the file or folder will remain visible with the status Deleted. Delete a file or folder permanently Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Open the Version Cue Workspace and project that contains the file or folder you want to delete permanently. 4 Choose Show Deleted Items from the Project Tools menu. 5 Select the file or folder you want to permanently delete, and choose Delete Permanent from the Project Tools menu. 6 Click OK. Delete a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. Deleting a project from Version Cue permanently erases all of its master files (including versions) and folders from the Version Cue Workspace. This is a one-step process (with confirmation). Deleting a project automatically deletes the working copies of files on your computer as well as any shortcuts to that project. However, the working copies of files created on other users’ computers are not deleted until they disconnect from the deleted project. You cannot restore deleted projects directly in Version Cue, nor can you delete a project if any user has files that are marked In Use. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Do one of the following: • Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace and select the project. • Click the project shortcut. 4 Choose Delete from the Project Tools menu. 5 Click OK in the confirmation dialog box. You can also delete projects using the Version Cue Administration utility. See also “Manage Version Cue projects” on page 556 “Disconnect from a project” on page 541 “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 Restore a file or folder deleted from a project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 544 User Guide 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 4 Double-click the project that contains the file or folder you want to restore and do one of the following: • Click Project Trash in the Favorites panel, select the file you want to restore, and choose Restore from the Project Tools menu . • Choose Show Deleted Items from the Project Tools menu (deleted file and folder names appear in gray in the dialog box). Select the file or folder you want to restore, and choose Restore from the Project Tools menu. 5 Choose Refresh from the Project Tools menu to update the dialog box. The file or folder is restored to its original location in the Version Cue project. Note: To restore a file in a previously deleted folder, you must first restore the folder. Doing so restores the folder and all its contents. Version Cue versions About Version Cue versions Versions provide a convenient method of retaining work that was performed in different stages. At any point in your design process, you can save a version of the file, which Version Cue saves and tracks. Each version is a snapshot of the file. You can use versions to review ideas or changes with team members or a client before selecting a final version, or to recover from destructive changes. Version Cue prevents users from overwriting each other’s work. With this protection capability, multiple users can work on a file simultaneously. When more than one user is working on a file, Version Cue alerts them all when one user saves a new version, allowing everyone to update the file and work in the latest version. You don’t have to save a version every time you save your changes. Using the File > Save command works the same way in Version Cue-managed files as in non-Version Cue files. You need only save a version when you want to create a snapshot of the file. Instead of choosing File > Save As and saving a new copy of a design, you save a version, which allows you to track changes as they occur. If you want to continue your work using a previous version instead of the current version, promote the previous version to the next current version (do this instead of opening the previous version directly). This process keeps the previous version intact, should you decide to return to it again in the future. If you want a previous version, along with the current version, to be available for use in a project, you can save the previous version as a separate asset. You can view previous versions in their native applications. When you no longer need to keep previous versions of files, you can delete them individually or in batches. See also “View and compare versions” on page 545 “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Save a version Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 545 User Guide To save a new version of a file, you use the Save A Version command, which saves your changes to the Version Cue Wor ks pace. 1 Choose File > Save A Version. 2 In the Save A Version dialog box, enter comments you want to associate with this version. 3 Click Save. View and compare versions Versions are always available for you to view and compare. The Versions dialog box displays thumbnails of all file versions alongside comments, dates, and the login name of the user who created the version. Each version is numbered sequentially. You can view any version at any time. You can also promote a version, that is, make a previous version the current one. You can also delete versions if they are irrelevant or if you need to save disk space. When you delete older versions, the version numbers of the remaining versions remain the same. The commenting features of Version Cue maintain a descriptive history of files. Each time you save or promote a version, you can describe what changes you made. This history helps you track changes made at different stages. Also, your version comments are searchable; you can search for a particular word to find a version quickly. See also “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 “About the Adobe dialog box” on page 528 View versions Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. Double-click the project to open it. 4 Click the name of the file whose versions you want to view. 5 Choose Versions from the Project Tools menu 6 In the Versions dialog box, do any of the following: • To create a new file version from an older version, select the version and click Promote To Current Version. • To open an earlier version in its own window and view details only or create a separate asset from the earlier version, click View Version. The version number appears in the file’s title bar to remind you that you shouldn’t edit it. • To delete a version, select the version and click Delete. View a previous version in its native application Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. ? In the Versions dialog box, click the version you want to open and click View Version. Note: The file status is Never Saved, because the previous version is only a snapshot of a previous stage of a file. . ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 546 User Guide Version Cue opens the previous version in its own window. You can then edit the previous version and save it as a new asset. If you edit the previous version, your changes won’t be reflected in the current version unless you promote the earlier version. Promote a version Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. Promoting a previous version automatically saves a copy of that previous version as the current version. Any changes made between its creation and promotion don’t appear in the new current version. 1 In the Versions dialog box, select the version you want to promote, and click Promote To Current Version. 2 Type a version comment in the Save A Version dialog box. Then click Continue to complete the promotion. Delete a version Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. ? In the Versions dialog box, click the version you want to delete and click Delete. To delete multiple versions, Shiftclick/Control-click the versions and click Delete. When prompted, confirm the deletion. Note that the remaining versions are not renumbered. Using the Version Cue Administration utility, you can delete multiple previous versions of all files in a project simul­ taneously. By using this method, you can retain past versions by date or by number of versions to keep. See “About the Version Cue Administration utility” on page 548. See also “Manage Version Cue projects” on page 556 “Create and edit Version Cue projects” on page 553 Editing and synchronizing offline files Editing and synchronizing offline files When you need to work on files from a Version Cue project while the Version Cue Workspace is unavailable on the network, you can edit working copies on your computer. When the Version Cue Workspace is available again, you must synchronize your files with the workspace to save your latest version to the Version Cue Workspace. You can synchronize an entire project, just a folder in the project, or a selected file. Working copies are normally copied on your computer when you open a project from an online workspace. However, if you haven’t yet edited the file, you can prepare to work offline by synchronizing the entire Version Cue project, or just the files you need, while the workspace is still online to ensure that you have working copies. When you are working offline, you can’t create multiple versions because the Save A Version command is unavailable. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 547 User Guide In Version Cue, if you intend to work on a file offline, you can manually mark the file In Use before you take your work offline. When you mark a file In Use, Version Cue creates a working copy of the file for you. When a file’s status is In Use, Version Cue protects the file. When you synchronize your file, the status of the file returns to Synchronized. See also “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 Manually mark a file as In Use Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel, and then navigate to the file. Select one or more files. Right-click/Control-click a file, and then choose Mark In Use. 2 When you finish editing the file offline and the Version Cue workspace is again available, synchronize the file. Version Cue automatically creates a new version of the file. If the workspace becomes available while you still have the file open, simply save a version. If you haven’t made any changes, you can manually cancel the In Use By Me status, by choosing Cancel Mark In Use from the context menu. See also “Synchronize files” on page 548 Edit working copies of files from an offline project Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Double-click the host Version Cue Workspace. 4 Double-click the Version Cue project that contains the file. It may take Version Cue a few seconds to verify that a Version Cue Workspace or project is unavailable. 5 Double-click a file to open it (the Offline Copy status allows you to open the file). 6 When you finish editing the file, choose File > Save As to save the changes to the working copy. When the Version Cue Workspace becomes available again, synchronize your files. See also “Editing and synchronizing offline files” on page 546 “Synchronize files” on page 548 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 548 User Guide Synchronize files Note: You can perform this task only if you have access to the full Version Cue feature set, available in Adobe Creative Suite or in a shared workspace. See “Availability of Version Cue features” on page 527 for more information. 1 Choose File > Open. Click Use Adobe Dialog if you’re using the OS dialog box. 2 Click Version Cue in the Favorites panel. 3 Select the project that contains the master file, and do one of the following: • To synchronize the entire project, choose Synchronize from the Project Tools menu • To synchronize just a folder or one or more files, open the project, select the folder or files that you want to synchronize, and choose Synchronize from the Project Tools menu. 4 If the master file on the Version Cue Workspace is newer than your working copy and you’ve edited the working copy, a File Conflict dialog box appears. Specify one or more of the following: Apply The Following Action To All Subsequent Conflicts Automatically applies the selected option every time there is a file conflict. Save a Version Saves your working copy as a new file version to the Version Cue Workspace. Skip This File Prevents the most recent version from the Version Cue Workspace from being downloaded. (This option also prevents a version of your working copy from being saved to the workspace.) Choose this option only if you want to keep your edits and disregard the other changes in the master file. The Version Cue Administration utility About the Version Cue Administration utility Using the Version Cue Administration utility, you can do more advanced tasks that affect a specified project or an entire Version Cue Workspace. You have access to the Version Cue Administration utility if you use Adobe Creative Suite or if you have access to a shared project and that project’s owner has granted you access permission to the Administration utility. The following table lists the Version Cue-related tasks that you can accomplish through Adobe Creative Suite components or Acrobat and those that you can accomplish through the Version Cue Administration utility. . Task Acrobat or Adobe Creative Suite component Version Cue Administration Create, edit, and delete Version Cue projects Yes Yes Share a project with anyone who is using Acrobat, Adobe Creative Suite, an Adobe Creative Suite component, or a WebDAV­ enabled application Yes Yes Delete a file version Yes Yes Delete multiple file versions at once Yes Yes ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 549 User Guide Task Acrobat or Adobe Creative Suite component Version Cue Administration Create Version Cue projects from remote files via FTP No Yes Create Version Cue projects from remote files via WebDAV No Yes Import Version Cue 1.0 projects No Yes Back up Version Cue projects and restore backup versions of a project No Yes View the amount of disk space a project uses, its lock protection status, its creator, and its creation date No Yes Duplicate or export Version Cue projects No Yes Edit Version Cue Workspace pref­ erences No Yes Add and edit users, and define their project privileges No Yes Change the properties of a Version Cue project to require users to log in before accessing it No Yes View all users and their privileges for all projects in the Version Cue Workspace No Yes Remove all In Use locks in a project or those created by a specified user No Yes View Version Cue Workspace logs and reports No Yes Add files to an existing project Yes No Create file versions Yes No View file comments and other information Yes No Search for files using file informa­ tion (metadata) Yes No Initiate and manage a web-based review of PDF files in Version Cue projects No Yes ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 550 User Guide Log in to and out of the Version Cue Administration utility When you install Version Cue on your computer, Version Cue automatically creates a default user login ID with administrator privileges. You should change the password for this default user login, as it is publicly available for initial installation and setup. Until you change the default password, the default user login ID can only be used directly from the computer the Version Cue workspace is located on, not across a network. If Version Cue is installed on your computer, you can start using the web-based Version Cue Administration utility with the Version Cue default login ID (system) and password (system). Users working in a group with a login ID and password can log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. The tasks that workgroup users can perform are limited by the privileges assigned to their Version Cue login ID by the administrator. However, users whose access level is set to None can’t log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. You can display the Version Cue Administration login web page in the following ways: • By opening the Version Cue preferences and clicking the Advanced Administration button. • By clicking the Advanced Administration button in an Adobe Creative Suite component or in Acrobat 8. • By typing the IP address of the Version Cue Workspace directly into a web browser. • By selecting Advanced Administration from the Version Cue system tray icon (Windows) or the Version Cue menu (Mac OS). See also “Choosing user privileges” on page 561 Log in to Version Cue Administration from an Adobe Creative Suite component or from Acrobat 8 1 Choose File > Open, and click Use Adobe Dialog. 2 Select the Version Cue Workspace you want to administer. 3 Choose Edit Properties from the Tools menu . 4 Click Advanced Administration in the Edit Properties dialog box. 5 Type your assigned Version Cue login ID and password in the text boxes. (The default for both the ID and password is “system.”) 6 Click Log In. Log in to Version Cue Administration from a web browser 1 In a web browser, type the IP or DNS address of the computer on which the Version Cue Workspace is installed. Precede the address with http:// and follow it with a colon and the port number—for example, http://153.32.235.230:3703 (IP) or http://myserver.mycompany.com:3703 (DNS). The default port number is 3703. Note: If you have Version Cue 1.0 installed on your computer, the default port number for Version Cue 2.0 is 50800. Once Version Cue 1.0 is uninstalled, Version Cue 2.0 defaults to 3703. 2 A browser window displays the Adobe Version Cue Administration login page. Type your assigned Version Cue login ID and password in the text boxes. (The default for both the ID and password is “system.”) 3 Click Log In. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 551 User Guide Log in to Version Cue Administration from the Version Cue Preferences dialog box 1 Do one of the following: • (Windows) Double-click the Version Cue icon in the system tray and click Advanced Administration. • (Windows) Right-click the Version Cue icon in the system tray and then choose Version Cue CS2 Preferences. On Windows, double-click the Version Cue icon to open preferences dialog box. • (Mac OS) Click the Version Cue icon at the top of the screen, and then choose Advanced Administration from the menu. • (Mac OS) Control-click the Version Cue icon and choose Version Cue CS2 Preferences. 2 Type your assigned Version Cue login ID and password in the text boxes. (The default for both the ID and password is “system.”) 3 Click Log In. Log out of Version Cue Administration ? Click Log Off at the top of the page. About Version Cue Administration integrity checks Each time the Version Cue Workspace restarts, it performs an integrity check and performs repairs if necessary. To ensure best performance, restart the Version Cue Workspace periodically so it can perform the integrity check and self-repair. Set Version Cue Workspace Administration preferences 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Advanced tab, and then click Preferences. • On the Home page, click Perform Advanced Tasks, and then click Preferences. 3 Set any of the following options: Workspace Name To change the Version Cue Workspace name, type a name in the text box. This name identifies the Version Cue Workspace in Acrobat or in Adobe Creative Suite components using Version Cue. Make This Version Cue Workspace Visible To Others. When selected, gives other computers access to the Version Cue Workspace. Note: If the Version Cue Workspace is installed on a Windows computer that uses a firewall and you want to share the workspace with others, make sure that TCP ports 3703 and 427 are left open and deselect the Internet Connection Firewall option (see Windows Help). Only Grant Access To Existing Users Specifies whether Version Cue projects are available to a user. Make sure to set access properties for each desired project and to edit the project’s list of assigned users. Log Level Defines the amount of information in reports generated by the Version Cue Workspace system. Choose a log level: Error to list only Version Cue Workspace errors; Warning to list workspace errors and warnings; or Info to list errors, warnings, and information about tasks performed. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 552 User Guide Log Size Sets the maximum size, in kilobytes, for a system report. To reduce the log file size by saving it as a compressed GZ file, select Compress Log File. FTP Proxy Specifies the default FTP Proxy server for users importing projects from or exporting projects to an FTP server, or publishing with GoLive to an FTP server. HTTP Proxy Specifies the default HTTP Proxy server for users importing projects from or exporting projects to a WebDAV server, or publishing with GoLive to a WebDAV server. Color Scheme Sets the background colors of the tabs. 4 Click Save, and then restart Version Cue Administration. Migrate from Version Cue 1.0 to Version Cue 2.0 If you currently use Version Cue 1.0, you need to migrate your projects and user data to Version Cue 2.0. Keep the following in mind: • Version Cue 1.0 and Version Cue 2.0 Workspaces can be installed and function on the same computer (using different ports) simultaneously. • If Version Cue 1.0 and Version Cue 2.0 Workspaces are installed on the same computer, Adobe Creative Suite 1.0 components and Acrobat 7 work only with the Version Cue 1.0 Workspace, because they can communicate only with the port that the Version Cue 1.0 Workspace uses. Note: If you uninstall the Version Cue 1.0 Workspace and then restart the Version Cue 2.0 Workspace, the Version Cue 2.0 Workspace then uses the Version Cue 1.0 Workspace’s port, allowing Adobe Creative Suite 1.0 components, Adobe Creative Suite 2.0 components, and Acrobat 7 and 8 to work with the Version Cue 2.0 Workspace. • If only the Version Cue 2.0 Workspace is installed, Adobe Creative Suite 1.0 components and Acrobat 7 will work with it. • Adobe Creative Suite 2.0 components and Acrobat 8 work only with Version Cue 2.0 Workspaces. • Adobe Creative Suite 1.0 components and Acrobat 7 work with both Version Cue 1.0 and Version Cue 2.0 Workspaces simultaneously as long as the workspaces are not located on the same computer. • You can import Version Cue 1.0 projects and users using the Version Cue Administration utility. 1 After installing Version Cue 2.0, restart the Version Cue 1.0 Workspace. This activates a migration plug-in. 2 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 3 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Import Version Cue 1.0 Data. 4 Select the data you’d like to migrate to Version Cue 2.0: • Projects and users. Click Next. Select the check box next to the names of any projects you want to import, and click Next. Then, select the check box next to the names of any users you want to import, and click Next. • Only projects. Click Next. Then, select the individual projects you want to import, and choose whether to import all the users assigned to those projects (at this point, you cannot select individual users; you must import either all users or no users). Click Next. If you choose to import the users, select the users you want to import, and click Next. • Only users. Click Next, and, in the next page, select the check box next to the names of any users you want to import. 5 When the migration process is complete, verify the information you’re importing, and confirm the migration. 6 Uninstall Version Cue 1.0. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 553 User Guide 7 Restart the Version Cue 2.0 Workspace. This step resets the port to allow access from both Acrobat 7 and 8, Adobe Creative Suite 1.0, and Adobe Creative Suite 2.0 components. Creating, editing, and managing projects in Version Cue Administration Create and edit Version Cue projects You can create a new blank Version Cue project, a project from the files in a folder on the computer where the Version Cue Server is installed, or a project from a WebDAV or FTP server. See also “Back up and restore projects” on page 558 Create a new blank Version Cue project 1 Do one of the following: • On the Home tab, click Create A Project. • Click the Projects tab, and then click New. 2 In the New Project content frame, click Blank Project to create an empty Version Cue project. Click Next to display the Create Blank Project content frame. 3 Type a name for your project in the Project Name box. 4 To specify how to treat the imported content’s URL encoding, choose an option from the URL Encoding menu. 5 Set any of the following options: Share This Project With Others Gives other users access to the project. Users can be on your subnetwork, or they can be given the Version Cue Workspace IP or DNS address and port number to gain access to the Version Cue Wor ks pace. Require Login For This Project Ensures that only users with a Version Cue login ID and password have access to the project. Enable Lock Protection For This Project Restricts file versioning to sequential versions. URL Encoding Specifies how the content’s URL encoding is treated. UTF-8 is the default setting. %HH Escaping Requires that a nonsafe character be encoded as a percent symbol (%) followed by two hexadecimal digits. 6 Click Save. 7 If you chose to require login, do any of the following in the User Privileges content frame, and then click Save: • Choose an option next to each user name in the Privileges column or choose an option from the Set All To menu to define each user’s access. These options won’t work unless you select Require Login For This Project. • To let a user publish the project with GoLive CS2 to a specified FTP or WebDAV server, select the check box in the Publishing Privilege column next to the user name. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 554 User Guide Create a new Version Cue project from a folder You can create a Version Cue project from the files in a folder on the computer where the Version Cue Workspace is installed. 1 Log in to Version Cue Administration. 2 Do one of the following: • On the Home tab, click Create A Project. • Click the Projects tab, and then click New. 3 In the New Project content frame, click Import From Folder. 4 If the content you’re importing is a website, select Import Folder As A Website to import the content to the project’s web-content folder. To specify the folder to import from, click Browse and select any file in the folder; then click Open. Alternatively, you can type the path to the desired Version Cue Workspace folder in the text box. 5 Type a name for your project in the Project Name box. 6 Set any of the following options: Share This Project With Others Gives other users access to the project. Users can be on your subnetwork, or they can be given the Version Cue Workspace IP or DNS address and port number to gain access to the workspace. Require Login For This Project Ensures that only users with a Version Cue login ID and password have access to the project. Note that if you select this option after a user gains access, the user can still gain access without logging in. Make sure that you change privileges as needed in the project’s list of users. Enable Lock Protection For This Project Restricts file versioning to sequential versions. Comments Stores any remarks you type about the project. URL Encoding Specifies how the content’s URL encoding is treated. UTF-8 is the default setting. %HH Escaping Requires that a nonsafe character be encoded as a percent symbol (%) followed by two hexadecimal digits. 7 Do any of the following in the Assigned Users content frame, and then click Save: • To define each user’s access to the project, choose an option next to each user name in the Privileges column or choose an option from the Set All To menu. These options won’t work unless you select Require Login For This Project. • To let a user publish the project with GoLive CS to a specified FTP or WebDAV server, select the check box in the Publishing Privilege column next to the user name. Create a new Version Cue project from a WebDAV server or FTP server 1 Log in to Version Cue Administration. 2 Do one of the following: • On the Home tab, click Create A Project. • Click the Projects tab, and then click New. 3 In the New Project content frame, do one of the following: • Click Import From WebDAV Server. • Click Import From FTP Server. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 555 User Guide 4 If the content you’re importing is a website, select Import FTP/WebDAV As A Website to import the content to the project’s web-content folder. • In the FTP Server or WebDAV Server box, specify the WebDAV server from which to import files, and type the port number in the Port box. • To specify a folder, type its path in the Directory box. • If a user name and password are required to access the server, type that information in the User Name and Password boxes. • To use a proxy server to connect to the server, select Proxy. 5 Type a name for your project in the Project Name box. 6 To specify how to treat the imported content’s URL encoding, choose an option from the URL Encoding menu. 7 To comply with the URL syntax requiring nonsafe characters to be encoded as a percent symbol (%) followed by two hexadecimal digits, select %HH Escaping. 8 Do any of the following and then click Next: • To give other Version Cue or WebDAV users access to the project, select Share This Project With Others. (Users must either be on your subnetwork or be given the Version Cue Workspace IP or DNS address and port number.) • To require users to log in with a Version Cue login ID and password before accessing the project, select Require Login For This Project. If selected, this option ensures that only Version Cue users you specify can log in and access the project. Note: If you select this option after other users have already accessed the project without being authenticated, those users can still access the project without logging into it. Make sure that you change their privileges as needed in the project’s list of assigned users. • To restrict file versioning to sequential versions, select Enable Lock Protection For This Project. • To include remarks regarding the project, type them in the Comments box. 9 Do any of the following in the User Privileges content frame, and then click Save: • To define each user’s access to the project, choose an option next to each user name in the Privileges column or choose an option from the Set All To menu. • To let a user publish the project with GoLive to a specified FTP or WebDAV server, select the check box in the Publishing Privilege column next to the user name. Note: You don’t need to assign users in order to give others access to your Version Cue project. Just make sure to deselect Require Login For This Project in the project properties. Edit Version Cue project properties 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab, and then click a project name. 3 Set any of the following options: Share This Project With Others Gives other users access to the project. Users can be on your subnetwork, or be given the Version Cue Workspace IP or DNS address and port number. Require Login For This Project Ensures that only users with a Version Cue login ID and password have access to the project. Note that if you select this option after a user gains access, the user can still gain access without logging in. Make sure that you change privileges as needed in the project’s list of users. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 556 User Guide Enable Lock Protection For This Project Restricts file versioning to sequential versions. Comments Stores any remarks you type about the project. Backup Configuration Allows you to back up your project or edit backup settings. 4 Click Save, or click Reset to return the properties to their original values. Manage Version Cue projects You can duplicate or delete Version Cue projects in the Version Cue Administration utility, as well as remove file locks and delete file versions. Duplicate a project to start a new project with the same users and privileges. Version Cue duplicates the folder hierarchy within the project structure, and you can use that as a basis for the new project. Delete any files from the duplicated project that are no longer necessary. A user with system administrator privileges or with project-specific administer privileges can remove file locks. Removing file locks forces the removal of the In Use status of files designated by specific project or by users throughout all the projects. Delete file versions to improve performance. Each time you save a file version, the version is stored on the Version Cue Workspace database. This database creates a file version history that lets you quickly return to any former state of the file. Although a version history is useful, an extensive history takes up a lot of disk space and can degrade the performance of the Version Cue Workspace. Duplicate a Version Cue project 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab. 3 Select the check box next to the name of the project, and click Duplicate. 4 In the Duplicate Project content frame, type a unique name for the project. 5 Edit the project properties. 6 Click Duplicate. Delete a Version Cue project in the Version Cue Administration utility 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab, and do one of the following: • To delete one or more projects, select the check box next to the name of each project you want to delete. • To delete all listed projects, select the check box next to the Project Name column label. 3 Click Delete. The Delete Project content frame appears. Click Delete again, or click Cancel to cancel the deletion. Remove file locks from a Version Cue project 1 Log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab , and then click Reset Locks (under Maintenance). 3 Do any of the following: • Choose a project from the Project Name menu. • Choose a user from the User Name menu. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 557 User Guide 4 Click Reset Locks to remove the specified file locks. Delete file versions in a project 1 Log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration page. 2 Click the Advanced tab , and then click Remove Old Versions. 3 Choose a project from the Project Name menu. 4 To delete versions, select Delete All Versions Older Than, and then choose a month, day, and year. 5 To specify the maximum number of versions to remain in the workspace after you click Delete, select Number Of Versions To Keep, and then type a number in the text box. 6 Click Delete. Export Version Cue projects You can export the most recent version of all project files from the Version Cue Workspace. You can use this export to move these files from one host computer (or server) to another or to create a package of the most recent files for output or simply to create an archive of the final versions. Version Cue still manages projects moved between computers. If you want to move a project, you should decide whether to back it up (so that all past versions are also moved) or export (so that only the current versions of project files are moved). For more information about backing up a project, see “Back up and restore projects” on page 558. Export a Version Cue project to your computer 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Projects tab. Select the check box next to the project you want to export, and click Export. • Click the Advanced tab, and then click Export Project. The Export Project content frame appears. Select the project you want to export from the Project Name menu. 3 In the Export Project page, choose the name of the project you want to export, and then choose File from the Protocol menu. 4 Click Browse, and specify the folder to which you want to export the project. Select any file in the folder, and click Open. 5 Click Export. Export a Version Cue project to an FTP or WebDAV server 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Do one of the following: • Click the Projects tab. Select the check box next to the project you want to export, and click Export. • Click the Advanced tab, and then click Export Project. The Export Project content frame appears. Choose the project you want to export from the Project Name menu. 3 In the Export Project page, choose the name of the project you want to export and then choose either FTP or WebDAV from the Protocol menu. 4 Specify the FTP or WebDAV server address in the Server Address text box. You don’t need to precede the address with the chosen protocol. If you want, you can change the default port number in the Port box. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 558 User Guide 5 To specify a folder, type its path in the Directory box. 6 If a user name and password are required to access the server, type that information in the User Name and Password boxes. 7 To use a proxy server to connect to the server, select Proxy. 8 If you are connecting to the server through a firewall, or if you specified a port other than 21, select Use Passive Mode. (This is an option only if you choose FTP in the Protocol menu.) 9 Click Export. Back up and restore projects The Version Cue Administration utility creates backups of all the information in a Version Cue project. Project backups are stored on the Version Cue file system, in the Backups folder. You can then easily restore a backup copy that represents a Version Cue project as it was on a specific date. Restored project backups do not replace the original Version Cue project; restored projects are given different project names. You can use a project backup to move a project from one Version Cue Workspace to another while retaining all the versions of that project. You can customize a backup configuration for your projects. You can back up a project using a new configuration or an existing configuration. A backup configuration includes the ability to schedule a recurring backup for the project. It’s important to back up projects in a Version Cue Workspace from time to time. Rather than doing this project by project, you can instead back up the complete Version Cue Workspace. You can also use this backup to move a complete workspace from one computer to another. If you restore a backup copy of the Version Cue Workspace, all current data on the workspace, including Version Cue projects, files, and versions, is replaced by the backup. Workspace backup files are saved to the default Backups folder in the Version Cue application folder. To replace current projects on a Version Cue Workspace with a previous version, you first restore the backup. When you do this, Version Cue Administration turns off automatically. You must restart Version Cue on the host workspace; it cannot be done remotely. See also “Create and edit Version Cue projects” on page 553 Back up a Version Cue project The backup configuration used to back up a project is set in the Version Cue project preferences. 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab. 3 Select the check box next to the project name, and then click Backup. 4 In the Backup Name text box, accept the name, or type a new name. 5 Choose the project components you want to back up: Files (which is always selected), Project File Versions to back up all versions of the files, Project Metadata to back up embedded information entered in Acrobat or Adobe Creative Suite components, and Users/User Assignments to back up information about the users and their project privileges. 6 Click Backup. When the backup is complete, a status page appears. Restore a Version Cue project backup copy 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 559 User Guide 3 Click Backup List. 4 Click the name of the backup that you want to restore. 5 In the New Project Name box, type a name that is different from those of other projects in the Version Cue Wor ks pace. 6 Do any of the following, and then click Restore: • To retain the list of users that were assigned to the project, select Restore Users. • To retain the same privileges for each assigned user, select Restore User Assignments. • To add remarks, type them in the Comments box. Create a new backup configuration New backup configurations are created in the project’s preferences. When you create a new configuration, it becomes the default for the project. 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Projects tab. 3 Select the name of the project for which you want to create a new backup configuration. 4 Under Backup Configurations on the Edit Properties page, click New. 5 Type a name for the backup configuration in the Configuration Name box. 6 Select what you want to back up in the Include list of options: Files (which is always selected), Project File Versions to back up all the versions of the project, Project Metadata to back up embedded information entered in Acrobat or Adobe Creative Suite components, and Users/User Assignments to back up information about the users and their project privileges. 7 (Optional) Add remarks to the backup file in the Comments box. 8 Choose an option from the Repeat menu if you want backups to occur automatically (choose Don’t Repeat if you want to back up the project manually). 9 Click Save to save the new configuration and to see a list of backup configurations. Back up all data in the Version Cue Workspace 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab , and then click Backup Version Cue Data. 3 To add remarks about the workspace backup, type them in the Comments box. 4 Click Save. After the backup is complete, click OK to view the list of workspace backups. Replace a project with a previous backup 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab, and then click Administer Backups. 3 Click the name of the backup you want to restore. Click Restore. The Version Cue Workspace turns off. Close the browser. (Notice that the Version Cue icon in the system tray indicates that it’s off .) 4 Turn on the Version Cue Workspace. 5 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 560 User Guide Working with users and privileges Create and edit users All users with a Version Cue user name and login (except those whose access level is set to None) can log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility. However, the tasks they can perform are limited by the privileges assigned to their user names. To restrict the Version Cue projects that a user can access, you can edit the project’s existing user names. Or, to restrict access further, you can create new Version Cue user names and assign them to a specific project. Creating new names gives you the most control over a project. Note: Only users who have system administrator privileges can create new user names. If you’ve configured the Version Cue Workspace to be visible to others in the Version Cue Administration utility, you don’t need to create and assign Version Cue user names to let other Adobe Creative Suite, Acrobat, or WebDAV users access your Version Cue projects and the Version Cue Workspace. The users simply need either to be on your subnetwork or be given the Version Cue Workspace IP or DNS address and port number. After a user accesses the Version Cue Workspace without using a Version Cue user name, the user name for the user’s own computer is automatically added to the list of users in the Version Cue Workspace, and the password is left blank. If you’ve configured the Version Cue Workspace so it grants access only to existing users, you’ll need to create Version Cue user names to let other Adobe Creative Suite, Acrobat, or WebDAV users access your Version Cue projects and the Version Cue Workspace. Create new Version Cue user names 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Do one of the following: • From the Home page, click Add A User. • Click the Users tab, and then click New in the content frame. 3 In the New User content frame, choose the level of access to give the user from the Admin Access Level menu: None Denies the user access to the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility; however, the user can access Version Cue projects while working in an Adobe Create Suite component or in Acrobat. User Gives the user access to some administrator privileges, such as viewing other users’ information, creating new projects, and backing up and restoring projects. System Administrator Grants the user all privileges. 4 Type the user’s name in the User Name box. 5 Type a unique login in the Login box. The login is needed in Adobe Creative Suite components or in Acrobat, if a project requires it, to log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility. 6 Type a password for the user in the Password box, and type it again in the Verify Password box. 7 (Optional) Type a phone number, an email address, and comments in the remaining text boxes. Make sure to enter an email address if the user will participate in Version Cue PDF reviews and will receive email invitations. 8 To define the user’s project access, choose the user’s project privileges next to each project name in the Privileges column. To give the user the same privileges for every project, choose an option from the Set All To menu. 9 To let a user publish a project to a specified FTP or WebDAV server, select the check box in the Publishing Privilege column next to the project name. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 561 User Guide 10 Click Save. Edit a Version Cue user name To edit a user’s privileges, you need system administrator privileges. 1 Log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration page. 2 Do one of the following: • Click Edit Users in the Home page. • Click the Users tab. 3 Click the user name you want to edit. 4 Edit the user properties and privileges. 5 Click Save. Duplicate or delete a Version Cue user name You can duplicate a Version Cue user to set up a new user with the same project privileges as the original user. Complete this procedure, and then change the duplicate user name and login as required. 1 Log in to the Version Cue Workspace Administration page. 2 Click the Users tab. 3 Select the check box next to each user name you want to duplicate or delete. To select all listed user names, select the check box next to the User Name column label. 4 Do one of the following: • Click Duplicate. Edit the user’s properties in the Duplicate User content frame and click Save. • Click Delete. To confirm the deletion, click Delete in the Delete User content frame. Choosing user privileges Version Cue user logins are associated with one of three levels of privilege: None, User, or System Administrator. Users with privileges set to None can’t access the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility but can access Version Cue projects while working in an Adobe Creative Suite component, Acrobat, or an application that supports WebDAV. The following table describes the privileges associated with the User and System Administrator levels. Administration utility task User System Administrator Create and update Version Cue user login IDs No Yes Read other Version Cue users’ login information Yes Yes Update own user login information excluding login ID privilege level Yes Yes Duplicate and delete user IDs No Yes Import and export user lists No Yes Create new projects (users must have Project Creation Allowed selected in their privileges) Yes Yes Delete or restore project backups No Yes Perform all tasks listed in the Advanced content frame No Yes ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 562 User Guide Administration utility task User System Administrator Change the Version Cue Administration utility color scheme in the Advanced preferences Yes Yes Reset locks and remove file versions from projects to which the user is assigned and also granted adminis­ trator privileges Yes Yes Back up, delete, and restore all Version Cue Workspace data No Yes View Version Cue Workspace information, logs, and reports; and save reports Yes Yes Delete reports for projects to which the user is assigned and also granted administrator privileges Yes Yes Import and export users If you want to add a set of users to another computer with a Version Cue Workspace, you can export the list and then copy it to the UsersExport folder in the Version Cue application folder of another computer with a Version Cue Wor ks pace. Export a list of users 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Users tab. 3 Select the check box next to each user name you want to export. To select all listed user names, select the check box next to the User Name column label. 4 Click Export List. The Export Users content frame displays the list of users to be exported. 5 Click Next, and type a name for the list in the Name box. If you like, type remarks in the Comments box. 6 Click Save. The Export Users content frame displays the list of exported users. 7 The location of the user list appears under the Export Users heading. To import this list into another Version Cue Workspace, copy this file into the destined workspace’s Data/UsersExport folder in the Version Cue application folder. Note that this folder can be moved and may be in a different location on the workspace. Import users from a list 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Users tab, and then click Import Users. 3 Click the name of the user list you want to import. 4 Select the check box next to each user name you want to import, or select the check box next to the User Name column label to select all listed user names. 5 Click Next. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 563 User Guide Viewing logs, reports, and workspace information Viewing Version Cue Workspace information and reports You can display the Version Cue Workspace version, name, licensee, serial number, Java version, database version, Version Cue client URL (IP or DNS address), WebDAV client URL, copyright, and patent information with the Version Cue Workspace Administration utility. Users who are working in Adobe Creative Suite or Acrobat can use the Version Cue Client URL to connect to Version Cue projects when they’re not on the workspace’s subnetwork. Users who are working in applications that support WebDAV can use the WebDAV Client URL to connect to Version Cue projects. You can also display and manage three kinds of reports (import, export, and publish) and the Version Cue Workspace log file, which tracks all server operations according to the level of detail you specify. Display time varies according to the size of the log file. The default log file size is 1024 KB. If the log file exceeds a specified size limit, the system creates a new log file and saves the old one. Log files are saved in the Logs folder, located in the Version Cue application folder. View Version Cue Workspace information 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Do any of the following: • Click the Home tab. Workspace information is listed under About This Workspace. • Click the Advanced tab, and then select Workspace Info. • Click About at the top of the page to display copyright and patent information. A window opens, listing infor­ mation about the Version Cue Workspace. View the Version Cue Workspace log file 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab, and then select Workspace Log. The Workspace Log content frame displays information about the Version Cue Workspace history. 3 Do any of the following: • To change the number of rows displayed, choose an option from the Rows To Display menu. • To navigate to a different page of the log, click Next, End, Beginning, or Previous, if available. View a Version Cue report 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab, and then select Reports. 3 Choose the type of report you want to view from the Reports menu. 4 To view available reports from a single project, choose the project name from the Filter By menu. To view available reports from all projects on the Version Cue Workspace, choose All. 5 Click the project’s name in the Project Name column. The content frame displays the report. Choose options from the available menus to change how the report appears. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 564 User Guide 6 To save an HTML copy of the report to your computer, click Save, and specify a location. 7 To return to the report list, click Report List. Delete Version Cue reports 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Advanced tab, and then select Reports. 3 Choose the type of report you want to delete from the Reports menu: • To delete all reports from a single project, choose the project name from the Filter By menu. • To delete all reports from two or more projects on the Version Cue Workspace, choose All. 4 Select the check box next to each project whose reports you want to delete. To select all project reports, select the check box next to the Project Name column label. 5 Click Delete. Version Cue PDF reviews About Version Cue PDF reviews Using Version Cue you can set up and conduct web-based reviews of PDF documents that are in a Version Cue Workspace. You can invite selected reviewers by email, create the email message in your email program, and include a direct link to the review document in the message. Invited reviewers only need Adobe Acrobat software and a Version Cue login to access the PDF document using their web browser. As the review progresses, reviewers upload their comments to the Version Cue Workspace. In an open review, all reviewers can see each other’s comments in the PDF document as the review progresses. You can specify when the review ends or stop a review at any time. When a review is complete, you can view all comments either in the context of the original document or as a list in the Version Cue Administration utility. When you view the comments in the context of the PDF document, all of the Acrobat commenting tools are available, including printing. Version Cue PDF reviews are especially useful in the late stages of a project when there isn’t time to arrange a tradi­ tional paper-based review. They are also useful when reviewers are dispersed over a wide geographical area. Aggre­ gated comments make it easy to summarize comments and track the progress of the review. Start a new Version Cue PDF review You use the Version Cue Administration utility to initiate and manage a Version Cue PDF review. From the Version Cue PDF review area in the utility, you can start reviews and invite reviewers, find reviews in which you’re partici­ pating, search for review documents, view review comments (as well as filter the comments by reviewer), stop reviews, and delete finished reviews. You can also reopen completed reviews. Keep in mind the following requirements for using Version Cue PDF review: • To use Version Cue PDF review, reviewers need a Version Cue login name and privileges that allow them to log in to the Version Cue Workspace hosting the review. • To view the PDF and add comments, users need Acrobat 7.0 Professional or later. For more information about commenting in Acrobat, see Acrobat Help. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 565 User Guide • To access a review, users need an Internet connection. You can start a Version Cue PDF review for any version of any PDF document that is in a Version Cue Workspace, provided that you have appropriate privileges to access the Version Cue Administration utility. Only one version of a PDF document may be in active review at any point in time. At any time, to return to the main Version Cue CS2 Review page, click the Home button . To return to Version Cue Administration, click Version Cue CS2 Administration. 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. (For instructions, see “Log in to and out of the Version Cue Administration utility” on page 550.) 2 Click the Version Cue CS2 Review link at the top of the page. 3 Do one of the following: • On the main Version Cue CS2 Review page, click Start A Review. • Click the Documents tab, and choose Not Started from the Review Status menu. 4 In the Document List, click the name of the PDF document you want to review. 5 Choose the version you want to review, and then click Start Review. 6 On the Start Review page, enter review information: • To set an end date for the review, select Deadline, and then choose the end date from the Year, Month, and Day menus. • To let reviewers see each other’s comments, select Open under Review Mode. Select Private if you want reviewers to see only their own comments. • If you want to add a description of the review, type the information in the Description box. • To add reviewers, select the reviewers’ names in the Reviewers section (click the check box next to the Reviewers column label to select or deselect all reviewers). Note: If a reviewer is outside your everyday workgroup and doesn’t have a Version Cue login, you’ll need to set one up in advance. You must also provide network access—typically through a firewall—for outside reviewers. 7 Click Next. 8 To send an email invitation to reviewers, select Send E-Mail Invitation, and then modify the Mail Subject and Mail Message as desired. In the E-Mail Recipients section, choose reviewers you wish to invite by email. 9 Click Start Review to activate the review. 10 If you chose to invite reviewers by email, Version Cue starts your email program and displays an email message addressed to the reviewers. The message includes a direct link to the document being reviewed. Confirm the contents of the message, and send it. Manage PDF reviews After you locate a PDF review, you can open it, view or delete review comments, stop or restart a review, or delete the review from the Version Cue Workspace. When you delete a review, Version Cue permanently removes the review comments. However, review comments for a PDF file are also deleted if you permanently delete the file itself from the Version Cue Workspace. Note that if you delete only a version of a PDF file from the workspace, the review comments for that version are deleted. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 566 User Guide See also “Start a new Version Cue PDF review” on page 564 “Delete files and folders” on page 542 Locate PDF reviews 1 Log in to the Version Cue Administration utility. 2 Click the Version Cue CS2 Review link at the top of the page. 3 Do one of the following: • If you don’t know the name of the PDF document under review, or want to view all active reviews, click Active Reviews on the Home tab. Alternatively, click the Documents tab and choose Active from the Review Status menu. • If you don’t know the name of the PDF document for which a review has been completed, or want to view all completed reviews, click Finished Reviews on the Home tab. Alternatively, click the Documents tab and choose Finished from the Review Status menu. • If you want to search for a PDF document that is under review or for which a review has been completed, click Search Documents on the Home tab, and choose search criteria from the Project Name, Review Status, and List Entries menus. To find a PDF document by its name, enter the name or part of it in the Document Name field. Click Search. Open an active or completed PDF review 1 Locate the active or completed review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List, and then select any of the versions in the Document History list. Stop a PDF review 1 Locate the active review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 In the Document History list, select the active review and click Stop Review. Restart a completed PDF review 1 Locate the completed review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 In the Document History list, select the completed review and click Start Review. Adjust review settings as desired. Note: After you click Start Review, you see a series of screens that refer to starting, rather than restarting, a review. However, this procedure does restart the review of the existing document. Delete a PDF review 1 Locate the active or completed review. 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 In the Document History list, select a version and click Delete Review. 4 When Version Cue prompts you to delete the review, click Delete. Edit review settings 1 Locate the active or completed review. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 567 User Guide 2 Click the PDF document name in the Document List. 3 Select one of the versions in the Document History list, and click Edit Review Settings. 4 Do any of the following: • To set or change an end date for the review, select Deadline, and then choose the end date from the Year, Month, and Day menus. • To let reviewers see each other’s comments, select Open under Review Mode. Select Private if you want reviewers to see only their own comments. • If you want to add or edit a description of the review, type the information in the Description box. • To add or remove reviewers, select or deselect the reviewers’ names in the Reviewers section (click the check box next to the Reviewers column heading to select or deselect all reviewers). 5 Click Next. 6 To send an email invitation to reviewers, select Send E-Mail Invitation, and then modify Mail Subject and Mail Message as desired. In the E-Mail Recipients section, choose reviewers you wish to invite by email. 7 Click Save Review. If you chose to invite reviewers by email, Version Cue starts your email program and displays an email message addressed to the reviewers. This message includes a direct link to the document being reviewed. Confirm the contents of the message, and send it. Set viewing options in the Document List You can filter the Document List on the Documents tab by doing one or more of the following: • To display only PDF documents in a specific project, choose that project from the Project menu. • To limit the number of documents displayed, choose an option from the List Entries menu (use the arrows to the right of the List Entries menu to view additional files). • To limit the list according to document name, enter part of a document name in the Document Name field and press Enter (Windows) or Return (Mac OS). (To view all files again, delete the text in the Document Name field and press Enter or Return.) • To sort the list by the entries in a column, click the column heading. (Click the heading again to reverse the sort order.) View or delete PDF review comments Review comments include, in addition to the text of the comment itself, information about who created the comment and when, what type of comment was created, and what page of the document the comment appears on. Different comment types are distinguished by their icons. You can use any of the Acrobat commenting tools in a Version Cue PDF review. Version Cue stores review comments in the Version Cue Workspace. You can view comments in the Version Cue Administration utility or directly in the PDF document. To view all review comments directly in the document, you must access the document either by using the link from the review invitation or by opening the review document from the Version Cue Administration utility. (If you open the review document from the Open dialog box in Acrobat, the review comments aren’t visible.) For more information about Acrobat commenting tools, search for “commenting” in Acrobat Help. 1 Locate the review (see “Manage PDF reviews” on page 565). 2 Click the PDF document in the Document List. ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 568 User Guide 3 Do one of the following: • To view all review comments directly in the PDF document, click the version name. • To view review comments in the Version Cue Administration utility, select the version in the Document History list and click View Comments. To view any of the comments in the context of the PDF document, select a comment and then click Open In Acrobat. • To delete review comments in the Version Cue Administration utility, select the comment and click Delete Comments. (To select all comments, click the check box next to the Page column heading.) 569 Chapter 20: Keyboard shortcuts This section lists common shortcuts for moving around a document. Keyboard shortcuts Keys for selecting tools To enable single-key shortcuts, choose Edit > Preferences > General, and then select the Use Single-Key Accelerators To Access Tools option. Tool Windows action Mac OS action Hand tool H H Temporarily select Hand tool Spacebar Spacebar Select tool V V Snapshot tool G G Current zoom tool Z Z Temporarily select Dynamic Zoom tool (when Marquee Zoom tool is selected) Shift Shift Temporarily zoom out (when Marquee Zoom tool is selected) Ctrl Option Select Object tool R R Object Data tool O O Article tool A A Crop tool C C Link tool L L Keys for editing Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Select all content Ctrl+A Command+A Deselect all content Ctrl+Shift+A Command+Shift+A Fit page Ctrl+0 Command+0 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 570 User Guide Keys for working with comments To enable single-key shortcuts, select the Use Single-Key Accelerators To Access Tools option in General preferences. Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Sticky Note tool S S Text Edits tool E E Stamp tool K K Current highlighting tool U U Cycle through high­ lighting tools: Highlighter, Cross-Out Text, Underline Text Shift+U Shift+U Arrow tool D D Text Box tool X X Attach file as comment J J Cycle through attach tools: Attach File, Attach Sound, Paste Clipboard Image Shift+J Shift+J Move focus to comment Tab Tab Move focus to next comment Shift+Tab Shift+Tab Open pop-up window for comment that has focus Enter Return Send and receive comments in browser-based review O O Go back online I I Keys for navigating a PDF Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Previous screen Page Up Page Up Next screen Page Down Page Down First page Home or Shift+Ctrl+Page Up or Shift+Ctrl+Up Arrow Home or Shift+Command+Up Arrow ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 571 User Guide Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Last page End or Shift+Ctrl+Page Down or End or Shift+Command+Do wn Arrow Shift+Ctrl+Down Arrow Previous page Left Arrow or Left Arrow or Ctrl+Page Up Command+Page Up Next page Right Arrow or Right Arrow or Ctrl+Page Down Command+Page Down Previous view Alt+Left Arrow Command+Left Arrow Next view Alt+Right Arrow Command+Right Arrow Previous document Alt+Shift+Left Arrow Not available (with multiple PDFs open in a single document window) Next document (with Alt+Shift+Right Not available multiple PDFs open Arrow in a single document window) Scroll up Up Arrow Up Arrow Scroll down Down Arrow Down Arrow Scroll (when Hand tool is selected) Spacebar Spacebar Zoom in Ctrl+equal sign Command+equal sign Zoom out Ctrl+hyphen Command+hyphen Keys for general navigating Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Show/hide menu bar F9 Shift+Command+M Move focus to menus F10 Control+F2 Move focus to toolbar in browser Shift+F8 Shift+F8 Move to next open document (when focus is on document pane) Ctrl+F6 Command+F6 Move to previous open document (when focus is on document pane) Ctrl+Shift+F6 Command+Shift+F6 ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 572 User Guide Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Close current docu­ ment Ctrl+F4 Command+F4 Close all open windows Ctrl+Shift+W Command+Shift+W Move focus to next tabbed page or palette F6 F6 Move focus to previous pane or panel Shift+F6 Shift+F6 Move focus to next comment, link, or form field in the document pane Tab Tab Move focus to docu­ ment pane F5 F5 Move focus to previous comment, link, or form field in the document pane Shift+Tab Shift+Tab Activate selected tool, item (such as a movie or bookmark), or command Spacebar or Enter Spacebar or Enter Open context menu Shift+F10 Control+click Close context menu F10 Esc Return to Hand tool or Select tool Esc Esc Move focus to next tab in a tabbed dialog box Ctrl+Tab Not available Move to next search result and highlight it in the document F3 F3 or Command+G Select text (with Select tool selected) Shift+Arrow keys Shift+Arrow keys Select next word or deselect previous word (with Select tool selected) Ctrl+Right Arrow or Left Arrow Command+Right Arrow or Left Arrow ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 573 User Guide Keys for working with navigation panels Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Show/hide naviga­ tion pane F4 F4 Open and move Ctrl+Shift+F5 Command+Shift+F5 focus to navigation pane Move focus among F6 F6 the document, message bar, and navigation panels Move focus to next Tab Tab element of the active navigation panel: Trash Can, Options menu, Close box, panel contents, or panel button Move to previous or Up Arrow or Down Up Arrow or Down next navigation Arrow Arrow panel and make it active (when focus is on the panel button) Move to next naviga­ Ctrl+Tab Not available tion panel and make it active (when focus is anywhere in the navigation pane) Expand the current Right Arrow or Right Arrow or bookmark (focus on Shift+plus sign Shift+plus sign Bookmarks panel) Collapse the current Left Arrow or minus Left Arrow or minus bookmark (focus on sign sign Bookmarks panel) Expand all book­ marks Shift+* Shift+* Collapse selected bookmark Forward Slash (/) Forward Slash (/) Move focus to next Down Arrow Down Arrow item in a navigation panel Move focus to Up Arrow Up Arrow previous item in a navigation panel ADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 574 User Guide Keys for navigating the Help window Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Open Help window F1 F1 or Command+? Close Help window Ctrl+W or Alt+F4 Command+Q Move focus between navigation pane and topic pane Ctrl+Tab Not available Move focus to the next link within a pane Tab Not available Move focus to the previous link within a pane Shift+Tab Not available Keys for navigating the How To panel Result Windows Action Mac OS Action Open or close How To panel Shift+F4 Shift+F4 Open and move focus to How To panel Shift+F1 Shift+F1 Go to How To home page from a How To topic Home Not available Move focus between the elements of the How To panel and the header of the How To panel Ctrl+Tab or Ctrl+Shift+Tab Not available Move focus down through the elements of the How To panel Tab Tab Move focus up through the elements of the How To panel Shift+Tab Shift+Tab Go forward to next page in How To panel viewing history Right Arrow Right Arrow Go back to previous page in How To panel viewing history Left Arrow Left Arrow 575 Index Symbols 415 Numerics 2D content in CAD files 395 3D content 3D preferences 412 adding to Microsoft Office files 398 bookmarking views 411 capturing 395, 396 commenting 413 conversion settings 390, 394 converting to PDF 388, 390, 394, 397 cross sections 407 defined views 410 editing 402 exporting geometry 415 formats 388, 390 interacting with 399 JavaScripts 414, 416 measuring 408 Model Tree 404 moving and resizing 397 UNIX 397 viewing 401, 403, 405, 410 3D toolbar 399, 400 3D Toolkit 403 A absolute colorimetric intent 106 accelerators, single-key 296 accessibility alternative text 288 automatic scrolling 296 bookmarks 288 checking 290 creating forms 304 creating PDFs 299 elements of 288 fonts 288 forms 213 Full Check 291 keyboard shortcuts 296 language 288, 313 links 312 of Help 3 preferences 293 Quick Check 290 Read Out Loud 298 reading order 289, 307 searchable text 288 security 289, 313 tags 289 web pages 301 Accessibility Setup Assistant 293 accessible text about 297 compared to plain text 145 Acrobat Connect 160 Acrobat Distiller defining document boxes 109 naming files 97 settings 97, 99, 102 watched folders 98 Acrobat Self-Sign Security. See Default Certificate Security Acrobat. See Adobe Acrobat actions adding to links 336 adding to media clips 338 adding to pages 337 mouse 232 opening 337 page opening and closing 337 types of 337 activation of software 1 Actual Size command 39 Add Tags To Document 305 additional usage rights 155 Adobe 3D Toolkit. See Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit 403 comparing versions 109 compatibility with earlier versions 48 new features 9 presets for exporting to 100 version compatibility 103 Adobe Acrobat 3D Toolkit editing 3D models in 402 Adobe Bridge Creative Suite color settings 419, 421 Adobe Design Center 7 Adobe dialog box, in Version Cue 528 Adobe Digital Editions 54 Adobe Help 2 Adobe LiveCycle Designer 206, 212 Adobe PDF conversion settings 100 Adobe PDF options Advanced settings 107 color options 105 Font settings 104 overriding 111 settings 101 watched folders 99 Adobe PDF printer creating custom page sizes 73 creating PDF 70 printing preferences 71 setting properties 72 Adobe PDF settings. See Adobe PDF options Adobe Photoshop as image editor 353 resampling and compressing images with 111 Adobe Policy Server (APS) 270 Adobe PostScript levels 456 Adobe RGB color space 435 Adobe Version Cue connecting to remote projects 531 disconnecting in 541 features, availability of 527 migrating to version 2.0 552 projects folder 530 publishing projects with GoLive 553 INDEX 576 Adobe Version Cue Administration utility about 550 deleting projects in 556 duplicating projects in 556 editing project properties 556 exporting projects 557 setting workspace preferences 551 Adobe Version Cue projects adding files to 537 backup and restoration 558 connecting to remote projects 531 copying 557 creating and editing 532 disconnecting from 541 opening 530 opening files in 538 properties 555 restricting access to 560 synchronizing 546 using lock protection in 555 working copies 530 Adobe Version Cue Workspaces changing the display of 532 creating user IDs in 560 deleting shortcuts 541 displaying information about 563 logs 551, 563 renaming 551 Adobe Video Workshop 4 Advanced Adobe PDF options 107 Advanced Search Options pane 376 Allow Layer State to Be Set by User Information option 33 Allow PostScript File To Override Job Options 107, 111 alt text. See alternative text alternate images, deleting 346 alternate text, in document conversion 145 alternative text about 288 adding 311 adding for abbreviations 318 adding in Tags tab 317 analyzing 3D models. See measuring angles, measuring 408 Annotations property group 505 Apply Print Overrides option 443 approving PDFs about 191 initiating approval workflows 192 signing 279 Arabic language 54, 55 Area tool 44 Arrow tool 177 arrows creating 177 deleting 177 art boxes 36, 133 art, edit original 353 Article tool 341 articles about 340 combining 342 deleting 341 editing 341 navigating 32 reading 337 setting properties 342 Asian fonts, downloading 450 Asian text adding comments in 178 converting to PDF (Windows) 54 converting web pages to PDF 88 embedding 54 printing as bitmap images 54 width only versions 114 aspect ratio, retaining in clips 357 assemblies, converting to PDF 394 Assign Profile command 432, 433 assistive technology, and AutoSave 47 Attach File As Comment tool 180 attaching files to PDFs 180 sound 179 source files 85 attachments searching 373 securing 268 audio clips. See media clips auditing space usage 343 author name on comments 170 searching by 376 AutoCAD creating PDFs from 83 Auto-Complete about 202 preferences 199 automatically inspecting files 514 Automatically Scroll about 296 command 28 autosave about 47 file 47 preferences 33 saving 47 B background adding 129 defining page content as 306 downloading 32 removing 131 background, in 3D models 403 Background Removal option 67 barcodes in Acrobat forms 203 base (nonemulsion side) 452 batch processing overview 368 defining a command sequence 369 hot folders 514 page thumbnails 326 selecting files for 370 stopping 368 batch sequences adding interactive pauses 370 creating 370 editing 369 bicubic downsampling 104 bit depth, images 504 bitmap images print quality of 451 black generation 106 black point compensation 437 black, in composite proofs 455 bleed boxes 36, 133 Bleed Marks option 454 bleeds 109 page size and 73 printer marks and 478 blending space, transparency 473, 475 INDEX 577 booklet printing 444 bookmarks for 3D views 410 accessibility 288 appearance 327 creating for new and changed pages 339 creating from web pages 93 defined 327 deleting 344 destination 327 finding current 26 generating 143 hiding after use 27 in PDF layers 366 managing 327 navigating with 26 printing associated pages 447 searching 373, 376 showing and hiding 26 tagged 330 tagged, organizing web pages 339 Bookmarks tab, opening 26 bookshelf 54 Boolean operators about 376 searching text with 377 braille printers, creating text for 297 breaks, line 350 b-rep. See PRC b-rep Bridge. See Adobe Bridge browser-based reviews about 155 initiating 159 keyboard shortcuts for 570 preferences 156 tracking reviews 165 browsers. See web browsers buttons about 232 forms 211 importing data with 239 labels 22 measuring 44 pop-up effects 235 reset form 239 showing and hiding 22 Submit 238 byte-serving 31 C CAD (Computer Aided Design) converting smooth lines to curves 344 CAD files See also 3D content 2D content 395 large assemblies 394 PMI 406 CalRGB color space 106 Capture command 516 capturing 3D models 395, 396 preferences and settings 396 UNIX utility 397 cascading style sheets 88 Catalog preferences 383 catalogs See also indexes, catalog about 380 CCITT compression filters 111 CD-ROM, publishing PDF files to 380 certificates collecting 258 creating 254 deleting 261 directory servers and 262 managing 260 setting trust levels 261 sharing 258 verifying 260 certifying checklist 281 documents 281 CGI applications 237 export values 240 characters, inserting 350 check boxes, as form elements 211 checks described in Preflight 503 viewing in profiles 506 Chinese text See also Asian text adding comments in 178 choking. See trapping CID fonts Type 2, preserving hinting information 450 Circle tool. See Oval tool circles creating 177 deleting 177 Clean Up panel (PDF Optimizer) 344 CMYK color profiles 106 color space, converting images to 106 collaborating, in Version Cue 532 Collections, organizing PDFs 49 color See also color separations of grid lines 44 in online displays 106 mapping between color spaces 106 options for 105 preventing shifts in text 105 Color Bars option 454 color gamuts 417 color images, resampling and compressing 104 color management See also color profiles, color settings about 417, 418, 419 color settings reference 434 considerations for importing images 422, 423 considerations for printing documents 427 considerations for process and spot colors 422 creating a viewing environment 418 for online graphics 424, 425 for PDFs 425, 428 image files 105 printer-based 450 setting up 420 soft-proofing colors 425, 426, 427 synchronizing color settings 421 when printing 454 color management conversion options JPEG 143 PNG 144 TIFF 145 color model working space 432 color plate list (Ink Manager) 457 INDEX 578 color profiles about 429 assigning and removing 432 assigning and removing from documents 432 converting 433 for desktop printers 428 for imported images 422, 423, 424 for monitors 430, 431 installing 431 managing when converting colors 475 warning messages for 435 color separations about 456 adjusting ink density values 468 dot gain control 467 host-based 456 ink coverage limits 471 previewing on-screen 471 producing 457 saving as PostScript 458 spot and process colors 457 color settings See also color management color conversions 437 color management policies 435 customizing 434 for Adobe applications 421 presets for 434 rendering intents 437, 438 synchronizing with other applications 421 working spaces 434, 435 color spaces converting 105 converting to destination space 473 defining and calibrating 106 colors See also color management, color model viewing by source space 470 Colors property group 504 columns, selecting 147 Combine Files button 52 combining layered PDF files 367 PDF files 525 combo boxes about form elements 211 Calculation options 227 formatting 228 commenting on a PDF 161 rights 155 comments in 3D models 413 appearance 171 checking for 163 connecting lines 170 entering for Version Cue projects 555 expanding in Comments list 181 filtering 182 finding 185 font and font size 170 forms 205 grouping comments 177 indicating text edits 173 keyboard shortcuts for 570 name that appears 170 navigating 181 opening 172 preferences 170 printing 170, 184, 440 publishing for other reviewers 164 saving an archive copy 166 searching 373 searching by 376 sending in email 164 showing and hiding 185 sorting 182 spell checking 186 sticky notes 172 summarizing and printing 184 text boxes compared to notes 178 viewing locked 171 comparing PDF and JDF files 525 versions of signed documents 286 compatibility between versions 103 changing PDF version 142 settings for 103 with earlier versions of Acrobat 48 components of a print job, viewing 518 composite printing 455 compressing about 111 files by image type 111 files in Acrobat Distiller 111 images 143 in PDF Optimizer 344 line art 104 with Adobe Photoshop 111 compression options JPEG 143 lossy and lossless 344 methods 111 PNG 144 reducing file size 344 setting in Acrobat Distiller 103 TIFF 145 Conflicted Copies file status, in Version Cue 536 Connect To command 531 connection speed, setting 32 contact information, specifying for print job 521 Contacts Manager 520 Content tab 314 content, protecting 266 continuous-tone images, compressing 112 conversion settings 3D content 388, 390, 394 Adobe PDF printer 70 converting web pages 93 customizing 101 display 94, 95 for image files 104 presets 100 Convert To Profile command 433 converting See also exporting 3D models 388, 390, 394 AutoCAD files 83, 388 colors in document 473 files to PDF in job definition 525 image files 62 images in web pages 94 JDF files to MIME 525 Microsoft Office files 74, 76 paper forms to PDF forms 212 PDF files to MIME 525 INDEX 579 smooth lines to curves 346 Visio drawings 82 converting web pages about 88 background options 94, 95 dragging and dropping 93 HTML page display options 94, 95 preserving structure 93 showing Bookmarks tab 95 verifying stored images 95 wrapping lines 94, 95 Copy Link Location command 93 copying See also copying and pasting files to clipboard, OLE 125 ICC profiles 490 limiting with Default Certificate Security 267 pages using page thumbnails 136 PDFs 46 prohibited 263 web link URLs 93 copying and pasting exporting PDF images 146 font substitution 146 images from Clipboard 148 prohibited 146 selecting images 148 selecting text 146 Snapshot tool 149 copypage operator, PostScript 107 Create Link 312 Create PDF From Clipboard Image 63 Create PDF From Scanner command 64 Create PDF of Comments Summary command 185 creating accessible forms 304 accessible PDFs 299 backgrounds and watermarks 129, bookmarks for web pages 339 EPS files 142 headers and footers 125 HTML files 143 JPEG files 142 PNG files 144 PostScript files 142 preflight profiles 500, 504 RTF or Word files 145 tagged PDFs 299 TIFF files 145 creating PDFs Adobe PDF printer 70 from AutoCAD files 83 by dragging and dropping 62 in Internet Explorer 89 from Microsoft applications 74, 76 from multiple files 52 PDF/X-compliant files 108 by scanning 64 from screen captures 63 using the Print command 70 from web pages 88 Crop Pages dialog box 479 Crop tool 134 cropping pages 133 cross sections, 3D content 407 cross-out text 173 Cross-Out Text tool 175 curved lines, converting from smooth lines 346 Custom document properties 361 customer information for print job 521 customizing See also preferences PDF conversion settings 101 stamps 175 D dashes, inserting 350 data from applications, deleting 346 date, searching by 376 Default Certificate Security, encrypting files 266 default state, PDF layers 365 defaults 3D views 399, 410 zoom setting 33 Delete command, in Version Cue 543 Delete Pages command 136 Delete Permanent command 543 Deleted file status, in Version Cue 537 deleting articles 341 bookmarks 344 comments 172, 174, 185 data from applications 346 destinations 334 files from Version Cue projects 542, 543 form data 201 headers and footers 127 links 332, 344 markups 174, 177, 185 objects and data 344 output intents 516 page thumbnails 324 pages 136 PDF/A information from files 514 PDF/X information from files 514 projects in Version Cue 543 versions with Version Cue Administration utility 556 Descreen option 67 Design Center 7 Designer See Adobe LiveCycle Designer Deskew option 67 desktop printers, color profiles for 428 Despeckle option 67 destinations about 333 creating 334 deleting 334 in PDF layers 366 listing 333 moving to 334 device-dependent color 105 PostScript files 442 print options 449 DeviceN color space 457, 488 dictionaries adding words to 186 excluding words 186 Digital Editions 54 digital IDs certificates in 258 creating 254 defined 253 deleting 257 hardware tokens 255 protecting 257 roaming IDs 255 131 INDEX 580 selecting default 256 setting a default 256 setting passwords 256 setting timeouts 256 smart cards 255 what to do if lost or stolen 257 digital signatures about 275 about form elements 211 adding 279 adding a handwritten signature to 276 adding in a browser 280 adding time stamps to 277 appearance 277 certifying signatures 281 digital IDs 254, 256 editing fields 227 fields 279 invalid, causes of 283 searching 373 using graphics tablets 278 validating 282 verifying 258 what the icons mean 282 digitally signed documents optimizing 343 dimmed menu items, security 247 disabilities. See accessibility Discard Objects panel (PDF Optimizer) 344 Discard User Data panel (PDF Optimizer) 344 displaying art, trim, and bleed boxes 36 large images 33 low-resolution images 144 Distance tool 3D models 408 about 44 Distiller. See Acrobat Distiller distribution lists, editing for security 268 docking toolbars 21 document boxes, defining in Acrobat Distiller 109 Document Info property group 505 document integrity, checking 280 document message bar in forms 211 review options 162 Document Metadata property group 505 Document Open password 264 document pane, defined 15 document profiles. See color profiles document properties Advanced 361 base URL 361 creating metadata 362 custom 361 description panel 361 embedded data objects 362 fonts 361 including custom in indexes 382 Initial View 354, 355 PDF Information 361 searching 373 security 361 Document Properties command 354, 360, 362 Document property group 505 document structure, deleting 346 Documents preferences 33 dot gain, compensating for 467 double-byte fonts 113 downloading documents from web 32 downloads 8 updates, plug-ins, and tryouts 8 Downsample Images option (scanning) 69 downsampling See also compressing average 104 reducing file size 344 droplet, Preflight 514 DSC comments, retaining 108 duplicating, Version Cue projects 556 Dynamic Zoom tool 38 E eBooks 54 ECMA International. See U3D Edge Shadow Removal option 67 Edit Alternate Text 307 Edit Batch Sequence command 370 Edit Form Field Text, in context menu 307 Edit Properties command 534 editing 3D models 402 articles 341 headers and footers 127 images 347 limiting in PDF files 267 links 332 objects 347 preflight checks 506 preflight profiles 506 prohibiting 263 text 347, 348 Efficiency Of PDF Content Stream property group 505 em dashes, inserting 350 email forms 205, 206 opening PDFs from 25 sending comments in 164 email-based reviews about 154 participating in 161 starting 158 tracking reviews 165 email-based Submit buttons, creating 238 embedded index 379 Embedded PostScript property group 505 embedded thumbnails, deleting 346 embedding all fonts 104 finding font folders 113 fonts with TouchUp Text tool 350 fonts, threshold 105 thumbnails 103 EMF file format 480 emulsion options 452 Enable Right-To-Left Language Options option 55 Enable Unicode Support option 254 encrypted documents creating 264 opening 247 removing encryption 268, 269 searching 375 INDEX 581 encrypting creating digital IDs 254 documents 264 files, security policies 269 encryption, removing 267 engineering documents converting smooth lines to curves 346 thickening thin lines 480 envelopes, sending files in secured 268 epilogue files 108 EPS files 108 Error alert 503 Errors in PDF Content Stream property group 506 Errors in PDF Syntax property group 505 Errors In Structured PDF property group 506 errors, correcting in PDFs 508 Excel documents 3D models, manipulating 399 adding 3D PDFs to 398 default view of 3D models 399 excluding words, spell check 186 Export PDF button 142 exporting See also saving form data 205 form values 240 geometry from 3D models 415 layers 366 PDF images 146 PDF to HTML, XML 143 PDF to JPEG, JPEG2000 142 PDF to PNG 144 PDF to PostScript or EPS 142 PDF to RTF or Word files 145 PDF to text 145 PDF to TIFF 145 PDF to XPDF 142 preflight profiles 500 Version Cue projects 557 Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP) 362 extracting pages 135 Extras 6 F Fast Web View 69, 70 Favorite Places, organizing PDFs 52 FDF (Form Data Format) forms and 205 features, new 9 fields clearing form data 201 filling 204 filling in forms 201 types of 211 figure, defining content as 306 file attachments creating 335 deleting 335 dragging 335 opening 30 searching 336 file conflicts in Adobe Version Cue 548 file formats See also individual formats, exporting, and saving 3D conversion 388, 390 3D export geometry 415 file locks, removing in Version Cue 556 file protection, in Version Cue 536 file size auditing 343 optimizing 48 and page thumbnails 103 reducing 48, 136 file status, in Version Cue 536 file versions. See versions files See also PDFs attaching to documents 180 automatically inspecting 514 combining layered PDF 367 film negatives 452 filtering comments 182 Find All OCR Suspects command 69 Find Comment command 185 Find First OCR Suspect command 69 Find toolbar 373 FIPS mode 264 First Page button 26 Fit In Window command. See Fit Page command Fit Page command 38 Fit Visible command 38 Fit Width button 38 Fix Hairlines tool 480 fixups. See preflight fixups Flash movies. See media clips Flash Player 37 flattening See also Preflight about 480 form fields 344 layers 367 presets for 485 presets, creating and editing 486 previewing 482 transparency 344 floating panels 23 folders Preflight 514 searching for fonts 113 watched 98 font installation 1 Font property group 504 font substitution, in copied text 146 fonts See also Asian text Adobe PDF settings 104 changing 348 default 105 downloading Asian 54 embedding in PDFs 113 embedding with TouchUp Text tool 350 for comments 170 getting information on 361 listed in document properties 361 multiple master 113 PostScript names 115 subsetting 105, 113 substituting 113, 114 viewing preflight results 493 footers adding 125 adding during web conversion 93 deleting 127 editing 127 INDEX 582 form actions resetting 337 showing fields 338 submitting 338 form fields See also forms, signature fields accessibility 213 appearance 222 buttons 232, 239 Calculation options 227 converting paper forms to PDF forms 212 creating multiple 215 creating with Acrobat Forms tools 214 defining content as 306 in digital signatures 279 export values 240 exporting data 205 flattening 345 making interactive 212 measuring distances 44 moving manually 218 pop-up effects 235 positioning with grids 215 properties 231 reading out loud 299 recognition in scanned forms 212 rulers 44 searching 203 securing 266 spanning pages 203 tabbing order of 326 validating 230 Form Fields property group 505 forms See also form fields about types of 198 accessibility 213 Auto-Complete 199, 202 barcodes 203 Calculation options 227 clearing 201 collecting data over the web 237 commenting in 205 creating with Acrobat Forms tools 214 elements of 211 email-based Submit buttons 238 emailing 205, 206 exporting data 205 filling 201, 203, 204 form field recognition 212 highlight colors 199 import data actions and buttons 239 importing data 204 interactive 199, 212 JavaScript, using in 214 non-interactive 199 passwords 199 positioning fields with grids 215 preferences 199 printing 199, 440 Reset Form buttons 239 saving 199 scanning 212 searching 203, 373 security 199 spanning fields 203 spell checking 186, 203 Submit actions and buttons 238 submitting 199, 206 tabbing fields 326 validating 230 web 237 Forms toolbar 215 fragmented images, merging 346 Free Text tool. See Text Box tool FTP server exporting Version Cue projects to 557 publishing Version Cue projects to 554, 555 specifying an FTP proxy server in Version Cue 552 FTP transfer, PostScript files 98 Full Check 291 Full Screen view exiting 30, 33 opening documents in 17 reading documents in 30 slide presentations 353 Functional Tolerancing and Annotation (FT&A) 406 G gamut warnings 472 gamuts 417 General Graphic State property group 504 General preferences 33 generating bookmarks 143 Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) 406 geometry exporting from 3D models 415 geometry, exporting from 3D models 415 Go To, destination 334 going to actions 337 gradients, banding 103 Graphic Arts Technical Foundation of North America (GATF) 468 Graphic State Properties For Fill property group 504 Graphic State Properties For Stroke property group 504 graphics tablets, signing PDFs 278 graphics. See images grayed out menu items, security 247 grayscale images color space profiles 106 resampling and compressing 104 grids about 43 changing units 43 displaying behind transparent objects 36 showing and hiding 43 snap to 43 to position form fields 215 guides changing colors of 44 for positioning form fields 215 ruler 44 H hairlines, replacing 480 halftone screens specifying 451 halftones preserving information 107 property group 504 Halo Removal option 67 Hand tool browsing through documents 17 with Down arrow 32 moving around pages 43 INDEX 583 selecting temporarily 18 text selection 33 handicap. See accessibility handwritten signatures, creating the appearance of 276 hard returns, inserting 350 hardware tokens, signing and 255 headers adding 125 adding during web conversion 93 deleting 127 editing 127 headings, defining content as 306 Hebrew language 54, 55 Help about 2 Help, keyboard shortcuts for 574 hiding bookmarks 26 comments 182 Model Tree 404 parts of 3D models 405 Properties toolbar 22 thumbnails 27 toolbars 21 High Quality Print, PDF preset 100 Highlight Color preferences 199 Highlighter tool 175 highlighting options 491 highlighting text (markup) 173 History (in Organizer) deleting 53 locating PDFs with 49 holdback (trapping) 465, 467 host-based separations 456 hot folders 514 How To pages, keyboard shortcuts for 574 HTML files, converting to PDF 62, 88 HTTP Proxy server, specifying in Version Cue 552 hyphens, inserting 350 ICC Color Spaces property group 504 ICC profiles See also color profiles custom 106 embedding in images 105 exporting from output intents 516 extracting 490 saving locally 490 IDs, in Version Cue 560 IGES settings 415 image compression See also compressing, compression options setting in Acrobat Distiller 104 image editor, selecting 353 Image property group 504 images checking changes in downloaded web pages 95 conversion settings 104 converting to CalRGB 106 converting to PDF 62 converting web pages to PDF 94 copying and pasting 148 deleting versions 346 displaying large 33 downloading from the web 88 downsampling and compressing 111, 344 editing 347 exporting 146 merging fragments 346 placing in PDFs 350 resampling and compressing 103 searching metadata in 373 smoothing jagged edges 104 stamps 175 suppressing display 33 unexpected monochrome viewing results 103 Images panel (PDF Optimizer) 344 imagesetting halftone screens 451 Import Version Cue 1.0 Data command 552 importing data buttons 239 form data 204, 239 form data actions 337 preflight profiles 500 In Use By file status, in Version Cue 536 In Use By alerts in Version Cue 539 In Use By Me file status, in Version Cue 536 Inactive alert 503 index embedded 379 index definition file (PDX) 380 indexes, catalog about 380 automating updates 384 creating 381 cross-platform guidelines 380 document properties guidelines 380 excluding numbers from 382 excluding subfolders 382 excluding words from 382 including custom properties 382 including structure tags 382 including XMP fields 382 moving 384 PDF v1.0 files and 382 preferences 383 preparing PDF files for 380 Readme files 383 reducing size of 382 stopping a build 381 updating 383 Indicate Text Edits tool 173, 174 Info alert 503 Info panel 46 information about documents 360 initial state, layers 365 Initial View, document properties 354, 361 initiating e-mail reviews 158 ink coverage checking 471 limits 471 Ink Manager 463, 476 ink sequence (trapping order) 469 ink warnings 472 inks aliasing 478 printing one at a time 457 screen angle and frequency 451 specialty 468 input device profiles 429, 431 Insert Object command 125 Insert Pages command 124 Insert Text At Cursor tool 174 I INDEX 584 inserting 3D models in PDFs 397 special characters 350 text, text edit comments 173 inspecting PDFs 488 installation 1 installing Adobe Digital Editions 54 interactive forms 199 interactivity adding buttons 232 adding media clips 356 interlacing, in PNG files 144 International Color Consortium (ICC) 419 International Coordinating Committee for Telephony and Telegraphy (CCITT) compression 112 Internet review settings 156 settings 32 uploading PDF files for review 159 Internet Explorer converting web pages 89 opening PDFs 25 inventory report, PDF content 496 ISO standards 512 J Japanese text See also Asian text adding comments in 178 JavaScript with 3D content 414 in forms 214 in media clips 358 running a JavaScript action 337 support, Web Capture 88 with 3D content 416 JDF (Job Definition Format) files associating with PDF files 517 preparing for JDF workflow 524 job definitions adding and removing 524 adding files 519 contact information, adding 521 converting files 525 creating 519 editing 519 preflighting documents 525 submitting to production systems 526 viewing 518 joboptions file, default location 102 JPEG compression 111 JPEG images searching by 376 jumping to pages 337 K keepaway traps 467 keyboard shortcuts exiting Full Screen view 33 in Help 3 single key accelerators 33 keywords, searching by 376 knockouts, colors 461 Korean text See also Asian text adding comments in 178 L Lab spot colors 478 labels, showing and hiding 22 language accessibility 288 right-to-left 55 support 54 Last Page button 26 Layer Properties dialog box 366 Layer Properties option 443 layer state, setting with user information 366 layers about 364 adding content 367 in AutoCAD conversions 83 flattening 367 hiding 365 locked 364 merging 367 navigating 366 printing 364 searching 373 viewing 364 Layers command 443 Layers property group 505 lighting, 3D models 403 line art compressing 104 defined 111 line breaks, inserting 350 Line tool 177 Line Weight option (Marks And Bleeds) 453 Line Weights view 43 lines creating 177 deleting 177 increasing width of 480 lining up objects, guides 44 Link tool 331 linked files color management considerations 422 links to 3D views 410 accessibility 312 adding actions 336 creating 332 deleting 332, 344 editing 332 opening movies and sounds 30 underlining 94 working with 331 list boxes, about form elements 211 LiveDocs 2 loading XMP metadata 363 lock protection, in Version Cue 555, 556 Locked option actions 336 output intents 491 locked PDF documents, passwords 263 locking comments 171 documents for security 264 PDF layers 364 toolbars 21 logins creating in Version Cue Administration utility 560 entering in Version Cue Administration utility 550 privilege levels, in Version Cue 561 logs, in Version Cue 551, 563 585 344 INDEX long dashes, inserting 350 looping media files 359 lossy and lossless compression 112, lost work, recovering 47 Loupe tool 39 M Macromedia Breeze. See Acrobat Connect magnifying views 38 See also zooming managing embedded index 379 Mark In Use command 547 marking up documents grouping markups 177 icons for 172 viewing 172 markups. See marking up documents master files, in Version Cue 535 measurement units grids 43 measuring 3D model dimensions 408 preferences, for 3D models 410 Measuring toolbar 44 media clips Acrobat 5 compatible properties 360 Acrobat 6 compatible properties 359 adding 356 adding actions 338 play mode 359 playback settings 359 playing 30, 37 playing via buttons 232 renditions 357 retaining correct proportions 357 system requirements 359 Media Manager 520, 522 media specifications, defining for print job 522, 523 meetings, initiating 160 menu item actions, executing 337 merging PDF layers 367 metadata 505 creating document properties 362 loading XMP files 363 searching by 376 searching for, in Version Cue 540 viewing 362 metallic inks, trapping 468 Microsoft applications 3D models in documents 398, 399 attaching Excel files to documents 180 converting files to PDF 74, 76 PDF settings for Office files 76 starting email-based reviews 158 Visio 363 Microsoft Word creating PDFs from 76 migrating to Adobe Version Cue 2.0 552 MIME files 525 mobile devices, preparing PDFs for 297 Model Tree 3D models and 399 overview 404 monitor profiles 429, 430, 431 mouse actions about 232 triggers 338 Movie tool 356 movies. See media clips moving 3D models 397 pages, with page thumbnails 136 MP3 files. See media clips MPEG files. See media clips multimedia. See media clips Multiple Pages Per Sheet option 441 multiple windows 42 My Computer, finding PDFs 49, 52 N navigating articles 32 with bookmarks 26 keyboard shortcuts for 571 layers 364, 366 with page thumbnails 27, 324 navigation pane defined 15 showing and hiding 23 navigation shortcuts 3 navigation tabs keyboard shortcuts for 573 ND. See neutral density negatives printing 452 network servers review settings 156 reviewing files 159 neutral density adjusting 468 Black Density and 466 measuring 468 values 468 New features 9 New Project command 533 New Window command 42 No Working Copy file status, in Version Cue 536 nonbreaking spaces, inserting 350 non-compliant PDF/X files 109 None privilege, in Version Cue 561 non-English language support 54 non-interactive forms 199 non-PostScript printers, and paper size 73 note comments about 172 adding to markups 174 printing 184 numbering See also headers and footers logical page numbers 36 pages 139 N-up printing 441 O Object Data tool 363 Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) 125 Object Metadata property group 505 objects clipping 352 deleting 344 editing 352 editing source file 353 flipping 352 moving 351 placing in PDFs 350 rotating 351, 352 scaling 352 INDEX 586 searching data of 373 selecting 351 Office X 76 Offline Copy file status, in Version Cue 537 online comments preferences 156 server settings 156 online resources 6 Only Copy file status, in Version Cue 537 opaque inks, trapping 468 Open cross-document links in the same window 33 Open file status, in Version Cue 536 Open Organizer command 50 OpenGL settings 396 opening actions 337 file attachments 30 in Full Screen view 17, 353, 354 password-protected documents 263 web links 90, 92 web links as new documents 90, 92 web links in a browser 340 opening view, defining 354 OPI (Open Prepress Interface) comments 108 property group 505 Optimizer. See PDF Optimizer optimizing about 48 auditing space usage 343 Fast Web View option 344 improving performance 48 options 344 PDF files 69 PDF Optimizer 343 PDFs 343 organizational policies 269 orientation page layout 41 rotating 41 orthographic projection, 3D models 403 Outdated Copy file status, in Version Cue 537 output device profiles 428, 429, 431 output intent about 515 creating 516 defining in Acrobat Distiller 109 deleting 516 exporting embedded ICC profiles 516 extracting embedded 516 for PDF/A or PDF/X 505 for PDF/A or PDF/X (ICC Profile Properties) 505 options 490 preview 469 preview settings 451 profile name 109 Oval tool 177 ovals creating 177 deleting 177 overprinting See also trapping preserving settings 107 previewing 454 simulating 451, 455 overriding layer print settings 443 Oversized Pages, PDF preset 100 P packages, printing PDF 446 page actions, open and close 337 Page Description property group 505 Page Display preferences 33, 133 Page Info command, converting web pages 339 Page Information option 454 page layout, setting 41 page order, printing multiple pages per sheet 442 Page Setup command (Mac OS) 440 page size, as opposed to paper size 73 page thumbnails creating 324 deleting 324, 326 displaying 27 embedding 103, 326 jumping to pages with 27 moving and copying pages with 136 navigation 324 replacing pages 138 resizing view 40 page transitions for slideshow 353 in Full Screen view 353 setting 355 page triggers 338 page view, defining 354 page-at-a-time downloading 31, 33, 69 pages deleting 136 inserting 3D models as 397 jumping to 337 layout 41 logical 36 moving 136 orienting 41, 135 printing 449 renumbering 138 replacing 136, 138 rotating 135 scaling 441 scanning 64 setting actions for 337 Pages Per Sheet option 442 Pages property group 505 Pan & Zoom Window command 39 paper forms to PDF forms 212 paper size, as opposed to page size 73 paragraph returns, inserting 350 ParaSolid settings 415 participating in email-based reviews 161 passwords and dimmed features 369 forms 199 opening documents 263, 264 preflight profiles 501, 502 removing 265 required to open PDF 247 setting permissions 264 signatures 254 tips for creating 257 Paste Special command 125 pastel inks, trapping 468 pasting images 148 tables 148 INDEX 587 text 146 text as a comment 178 pauses, inserting in batch sequences 370 PDF conversion settings 100 PDF export presets about 100 Acrobat 6 Layered 100 creating 100 PDF images, exporting to other file formats 146 PDF Information, document properties 361 PDF Optimizer about 343 auditing space usage 343 options 344 PDF presets 100 PDF toolbar 74 PDF version capabilities 103, 109 PDF/A removing information from file 514 saving PDFs as 512 verifying files 513 PDF/SigQ compliant PDFs 280 PDF/X about the format 108 compliance in PostScript files 108 converting files to 108 removing information from files 514 saving PDFs as 512 verifying files 513 PDF/X-compliant files color management considerations 428 standards 512 PDFMaker about 74 converting AutoCAD files 83 converting Microsoft Office files 74, 76 converting web pages 88 PDFs approving 279 associating with JDF files 517 certifying 281 color management considerations 425, 428 compliance with PDF/X standard 512 correcting errors 508 creating. See creating PDF files editing signed 284 forms. See forms from scanned pages 64 from web pages 88 getting information on 360 metadata 362 moving 136 navigating 27 preparing for JDF workflow 524 printing 449 recent documents list 33 saving a copy 46, 47 security 263, 369, 501 submitting to production systems 526 transparency in 480 PDX (.pdx) files 380 Pencil Eraser tool 177 Pencil tool 177 perceptual intent 106 performance. See optimization Perimeter tool 44 Permissions password 264 personal information, removing from PDFs 344 photographs, compressing 112 Photoshop. See Adobe Photoshop PICT file format flattening during export 480 pixel warnings 472 placing objects 350 plain text compared to accessible text 145 Play mode 359 playback settings, media clips 359 player controls, media files 37 playing movies 30 sound clips 30 plug-ins in Adobe Store 8 PMI. See Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) policies about 269 applying to document 273 creating 271 encrypting files 269 managing 272 removing from a document 273 revoking PDFs protected by 273 Polygon tool 177 polygons creating 177 deleting 177 pop-up bar, replying to comments 182 pop-ups buttons 235 preference settings 170 PostScript files creating with Print command 98, 442 FTP transfer 98 naming 98 portable job ticket 108 setting options for 449 varying compression with 111 PostScript Language Level compatibility 143 PostScript Printer Description file. See PPD files PowerPoint files, adding 3D PDFs to 398 PPD files about 448 in file conversion 142 selecting in Mac OS 448 trapping and 462 versions 448 PRC b-rep 390, 415 format for 3D files 388, 390 preferences 3D Capture 396 3D content 412 Acrobat Distiller 97 autosaving 47 Catalog indexing 383 converting in Internet Explorer 90 Documents panel 33 forms 199 General panel 33 Measuring, for 3D models 410 Page Display 33 Preflight 490 INDEX 588 Reviewing 156 Search 379 preflight checks adding to profiles 506, 507 creating 500 editing 506 viewing 506 preflight fixups about 508 adding to profiles 508 creating 511 editing 510, 511 preflight profiles about 488, 498 categories of checks 506 categories of rules 499 creating 504 importing and exporting 500 limiting access to 501 locking 501 property categories 504 protecting 501 viewing conditions and rules 506 preflighting documents in job definitions 525 preflight package 500 problem areas 488 viewing results 491 prepress tools 460 prepress, Ink Manager options 476 presentations preferences 33 setting up 353 Preserve Black Objects option 475 preserving black generation settings 106 document information 108 EPS information 108 halftone information 107 Level 2 copypage semantics 107 OPI comments 108 overprint settings 107 transfer functions 106 under color removal settings 106 presets for converting files 100 flattening 485 PDF export 100 transparency flattener 484 presets, for 3D conversions 390, 394 Press Quality, Adobe PDF settings 101 previewing colors. See soft-proofing font substitutions 114 margins or document boxes 479 output conditions 469 separations 471 Print As Image option 449, 450 print jobs contact information, specifying 521 customer information, defining 521 media specifications, defining 522 preparing for submission to production 524 product information, defining 520 specifications, defining 519 specifications, viewing 518 print production converting colors 473 fixing hairlines 480 tools for output 460 print settings advanced options 449 general options 440 marks and bleeds 478 output 454 PostScript 449 Print Setup command (Windows) 440 Print To File command (Windows) 442 printer marks, space required for printing 478 printer-based color management 450 printing See also print settings area on a page 442 Asian text 54 booklets 444 bookmark contents 447 color as grayscale 455 color management considerations 427 comments 170, 184 composites 455 forms 199 general printing options 440 grayscale proofs 455 layers, documents with 366, 443 layers, overrides 443 multiple pages per sheet 441 negatives 452 not allowed, security 263, 267 online services 440 PDF documents 440 PDF packages 446 preferences, Adobe PDF printer 71 properties, Adobe PDF printer 72 transparent artwork 480 using color management 454 process colors about 456 color management considerations 422 printing 456 product information for print job 520 Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) 388, 395, 406 production site instructions, creating and removing 524 projects, sharing using Version Cue Administration utility 555 prologue files 108 Promote To Current Version command 546 Proof Setup command 426 proofreading marks and comments 173 properties Adobe PDF printer 72 groups for preflight checks 503 movies 359, 360 PDF layers 365 Properties Bar command 22 Properties toolbar 22 Proximity (searches) 377 publishing, Version Cue projects with GoLive 553 Q quality of images. See compression Quick Check 290 QuickTime files. See media clips INDEX 589 R radio buttons, in forms 211 read me file 1 Read Mode 30 Read Out Loud 298 reading articles 32, 337 reading order about 289 accessibility 289 checking 307 editing 307 TouchUp Reading Order tool 305 RealOne files. See media clips RealPlayer 37 recent documents, listing 33 recognition of paper form fields 212 recovering lost changes 47 Rectangle tool 177 rectangles creating 177 deleting 177 redact page content 249 Redaction tools 249 reducing file size 48, 136, 343 reflow about 297 correcting with Content tab 314 correcting with TouchUp Reading Order tool 307 Refresh command, in Version Cue 530 registration 1 Registration Marks option 454 registration of software 1 Registry option 490 relative colorimetric intent 106 removing See also deleting hidden content 248 page thumbnails 324 sensitive content. See Redaction tools working copies in Version Cue 541 renaming layers 365 PDFs 47 rendering intents 106, 438 rendering modes for 3D content 401 rendering modes, for 3D 403 renditions about 357 setting system requirements 359 renumbering pages 138 Reopen Documents to Last Viewed Page option 33 repeating media clips 359 replacing hairlines 480 pages 136 reports PDF inventory 496 preflight inspection 495 requirements, system 1 Reset Form button 239 resetting form actions 337 toolbars 21 resizing magnifying and reducing 38 note comments 172 pages 38 placed 3D models 397 using thumbnails 40 resolution See also downsampling and halftone screens images 504 page display 33 setting in Acrobat Distiller 103 Restore command, in Version Cue 544 restoring files 47 toolbars 21 restricted documents 264 restricting attachments 247 URLs 247 restrictions, removing 267 resubmitting form data, refreshing web pages 340 returning review comments 161 Revert command 47 reviewing documents inviting additional reviewers 160 inviting reviewers 158 participating in review 161 preferences 156 rejoining 165 replying to comments 183 reviewing others’ comments 172 saving a copy with comments 166 starting a shared review 157 starting an email-based review 158 tracking reviews 165 viewing a list of comments 181 RGB color space profiles 106 RGB color space, Adobe 435 rich black, preventing 475 Rich Content PDF, Adobe PDF settings 101 right-to-left language options 55 roaming ID, signing PDFs 255 rollovers 235 Rotate Pages command 41 rotating pages 135 changing view 41 RSA security 254 RSS, subscribing to 168 ruler guides, creating 44 Run Length compression 111 Run Sequence command 368 running a JavaScript action 337 S saturation intent 106 Save A Version command 545 Save As command, renaming documents 47 saving See also exporting and saving, formats as accessible text 145 as certified document 281 automatically 33 changes 47 copy of PDF document 46 copy of signed document 280 documents digitally signed in a browser 280 forms 199 images to image format 146 metadata 363 optimizing for Fast Web View 70 PDF compatibility 142 PDF Settings inside file 107 PDFs 47 transparent artwork 480 INDEX 590 saving, formats EPS 142 HTML 143 JPEG, JPEG2000 142 PNG 144 PostScript 142 RTF 145 text 143 TIFF 145 Word 145 XML 143 scaling pages for printing 441 pages for web conversion 94 Scan To PDF command 64 Scanning tips 67 scanning compressing images 69 creating PDF from 64 screen captures, converting to PDF 63 screen magnifiers. See accessibility screen readers. See accessibility scrolling automatic 296 automatically 28 default page layout 33 searching Advanced Search 376 Boolean 377 by document properties 376 comments 185 in Version Cue projects 540 indexes 380 multiple documents 375 preferences 379 results display 361 Section 508 (U.S. government). See accessibility security accessibility 289, 313 assigning user IDs in Version Cue 560 attachments 268 batch processing 369 certifying documents 281 changing in Default Certificate Security 268 distribution lists 268 envelopes 268 FIPS mode 264 for preflight profiles 501 forms 199 limit access to PDFs 264 media clips 358 methods of 263 passwords 71, 97, 263 policies 269 removing restrictions 265, 267 RSA key algorithms 254 watched folders 99 security hardware tokens 255 Select All command 41, 147 selecting images 148 objects 351 tables 148 text 146, 147 Send By Email For Review command 158 Separations option (trapping) 463 separations. See color separations servers, network review settings 156 uploading review files 159 setting layer visibility action 337 Share Project command 534 shared review initiating 157 participating in 161 tracking documents in 165 sharing projects Adobe Creative Suite 534 using Version Cue Administration utility 555 sharing your desktop 160 Show Documents in Windows Taskbar 33 Show Splash Screen option 33 showing bookmarks 26 comments 182 comments on 3D content 413 field actions 338 Model Tree 404 Properties toolbar 22 showpage 107 thumbnails 27 toolbars 21 signature. See digital signature Signatures tab 284 signing checking integrity of PDFs 280 PDFs 279 Simulate Ink Black option 427 Simulate Overprinting option 451, 455 Simulate Paper White option 427 Single Page layout 41 single-key accelerators 296 single-key tool access 33 slide presentations, setting up 353 slide show. See Full Screen sliding traps 466 Smallest File Size, Adobe PDF settings 101 smart cards, signing and 255 Snap To Grid command 43 Snap View, activating 493 Snapshot tool copying text and images 149 selecting print area 442 soft-proofing about 425 in Acrobat 427 in Photoshop, Illustrator and InDesign 426 software activation 1 registration 1 software downloads 8 sorting comments 182 sound clips, adding 356 special characters, inserting 350 special effects buttons 232 Specifications for Web Offset Publications. See SWOP standards Speed Launcher 53 spell checking adding words to dictionary 186 forms and comments 186, 203 while typing 186 SPF (print settings) files 449 split window 42 spot colors CMYK equivalents 476, 477 color management considerations 422 INDEX 591 converting to process 477 specialty inks 468 spreading. See trapping spreadsheets, split view 42 Square tool. See Rectangle tool squares creating 177 deleting 177 sRGB color space 424, 435 stamps adding to documents 175 customizing 175 dynamic 175 editing 175 moving and resizing 175 status, tracking distilled files 98 Stemming (searches) 377 STEP settings 415 sticky notes comments 172 strikethrough, indicating deleted text 173 stroke width, constant 43 Structured PDF property group 505 Style option (Marks and Bleeds) 454 Submission Manager 524 submit-by-email forms 199 submitting comments 162 files to production systems 526 form actions 338 online forms 199 subsampling 104 subscribing to web services 168 subsetting fonts specifying a threshold 105 text editing 350 summarizing comments 184 support screens 467 SWOP standards 468 Synchronized file status, in Version Cue 536 synchronizing files, in Version Cue 548 System Administrator privileges, in Version Cue 561 system requirements 1 system requirements, media clips 30, T tabbing order 326 table of contents. See bookmarks tables copying 148 defining content as 306 fixing tags in 319 tagged bookmarks deleting 137 organizing web pages with 339 updating with 339 tags about 289 accessibility 289 adding alternative text 311 alternative text 317 creating PDFs with 299 deleting 346 editing 308 editing for figures and tables 310 including in indexes 382 reference 319 removing and replacing 312 searching 373 web pages 301 Tags tab 315 temp files, allowing in movies 358 text accessible, converting 145 adding 349 Asian. See Asian text copying and pasting 146 copying, prohibited 146 editing 347, 348 exporting 143 preventing color shifts 105 scanned 146 searching 373 selecting 147 unrecognizable 146 text attributes, editing 348 Text Box tool 178 text edits, commenting adding notes to markups 174 deleting 174, 185 text fields about form elements 211 Calculation options 227 editing 225, 226 formatting 228 text files, converting to PDF 62 Text property group 504 Thai language 54 threaded comments, replying 182 three-dimensional content. See 3D content threshold, font embedding 105 thumbnails. See page thumbnails time stamps in digital signatures 277 validating certificates for 285 tips for scanning 67 toolbars 3D 399, 400 docking 21 Forms 215 locking and unlocking 21 restoring to default 21 selecting buttons 17 showing and hiding 21 showing and hiding labels 22 tools 3D navigation 400 3D tool 397 prepress 460 print production 460 selecting 17 single-key access 33 Total Area Coverage option 471 touch up tools 347 TouchUp Reading Order tool 305 tracked PDF documents, review 161 Tracker, reviewing 165 tracking status of distilled files 98 transfer functions 106 transitions 353 transparency See also flattening blending space 473, 475 flattener presets 484 flattening, about 344 flattening, options for 486 grids, displaying 36 printing and saving 480 Transparency Flattener Presets command 486 Transparency panel (PDF Optimizer) 344 359 INDEX 592 trap appearance end style 465 holdback amount 465 join 465 width 465, 467 trap presets applying to specific pages 464 saving and loading 463 trap styles. See trap presets trapped value, defining in Acrobat Distiller 109 trapping about 461 choking 467 CMYK values and step limit 466 compensating for dot gain 467 controlling ink density 476 dark spot colors as black 466 declaring presence of 457 imported graphics 467 keep away traps 467 keylines to images 467 preventing dark traps 466 sequence or order 469 specific pages in a document 464 spreading 462 thresholds for 466 using black or rich black 467 triggers, action 338 trim boxes 36 Trim Marks option 454 troubleshooting preflight problems 488 trusted identities adding contacts 259 checking 268 for distributing encrypted documents 266 tryouts 8 two-dimensional CAD files 395 Type 1 fonts 114 Type 32 fonts 114 Typewriter tool 349 U U3D conversion settings 389, 390 format for 3D files 388, 390 U3D format for 3D files 388 Unavailable file status, in Version Cue 537 undercolor removal (UCR) 106 Underline Text tool 175 underlining links 94 Undo Headers/Footers command 128 unicode, digital signatures 254 UNIX, 3D capture utility 397 unlocking toolbars 21 Unshare Project command 534 updates 8 updating Adobe application software 53 embedded index 379 uploading files for review 159 Upload for Browser-Based Review command 159 URLs restricting 247 specifying for browser-based reviews 156 usage rights 155 Use Adobe Dialog command 528 Use Current Properties As New Defaults command 231 Use Only Certified Plug-ins option 33 Use Page Cache option 33 user IDs creating in Version Cue Administration utility 560 deleting or duplicating in Version Cue Administration utility 561 user passwords. See passwords user policies 269 users assigning to Version Cue projects 553, 554, 555 privilege levels, in Version Cue 561 V validating form fields 230 signatures 282 time period for signatures 260 time stamp certificates 285 vector graphics 111 verifying consistency in PDF and JDF files 525 PDF/A files 513 PDF/X files 513 version compatibility 103 versions deleting in Version Cue 546 deleting with Version Cue Administration utility 556 in Version Cue 535 promoting, in Version Cue 546 saving, in Version Cue 545 using, in Version Cue 544 viewing and comparing in Version Cue 545 video clips. See media clips Video Workshop 4 videos, playing 30 Vietnamese language 54 View Signed Version command 286 View Web Links command 92 viewing 3D content 399, 401, 403, 410 file attachments 30 job definitions 518 magnification 38 original PMI in 3D CAD files 406 PDF conversion results 76 PDF forms 198 preflight results 491, 492, 493 tables and spreadsheets 42 views comments in 3D models 413 defining for 3D content 399, 410 visibility, layers 365 Visio viewing object data 363 VRML settings 415 W Warning alert 503 warning color 472 watched folders prologue and epilogue files 98 setting up 98 unavailable 97 INDEX 593 watermarks accessibility 314 adding 131 removing 133 WAV files. See media clips web browsers displaying PDFs in 31 opening PDFs from 25 Web Capture converting web pages to PDF 88 display options 94, 95 web forms 237 web graphics color management considerations 424 web graphics, color management considerations 425 web links, opening in new PDF 90, 92 web pages adding headers and footers 93 adding to PDFs 90 appending all linked 92 appending to documents 92 Asian-language, converting to PDF 88 backgrounds 94, 95 conversion settings 93 converted to Adobe PDF 339 converting images in 94 converting in Internet Explorer 89 getting information on 339 refreshing 339 reorganizing converted 339 tags and accessibility 301 updating converted 339 wrapping lines 94, 95 web services, subscribing to 168 WebDAV servers connecting to Version Cue projects 531 exporting Version Cue projects to 557 publishing Version Cue projects to 554, 555 websites organizing multiple PDFs for 380 restricting 247 review settings 156 uploading PDF files for review 159 width-only fonts. See Asian fonts windows multiple 42 split 42 spreadsheet split 42 Windows Built-In player 37 Windows Media Player 37 WMF file format 480 WMV files. See media clips Word documents 3D models, manipulating 399 adding 3D PDFs to 398 adding information from 77 default view of 3D models 399 Word. See Microsoft Word work area, customizing 19 working files editing, in Version Cue 546 using, in Version Cue 535 working spaces, color 434, 435 wrapping lines, converting web pages 94, 95 X XIF format, searching metadata in 373 XML, source code document information 362 XMP format indexing fields 382 metadata 362, 373 Z zero width spaces, inserting 350 ZIP compression 111, 112 zooming changing magnification 38 default setting 33 Dynamic Zoom tool 38 Loupe tool 39 Pan & Zoom Window 39 selecting tools temporarily 18 view 38 3D_ML_GSG.book Page i Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMCopyright © 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 for Windows® If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement, this guide, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by any such license, no part of this guide may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement. The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates or images are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Capture, Acrobat Connect, Breeze, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, GoLive, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, PostScript 3, Reader, and Version Cue are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType, Vista, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark op The Open Group in the US and other countries. Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. The Spelling portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 2004 IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1992 Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Text & Satz Datentechnik © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. Portions of Adobe Acrobat include technology used under license from Autonomy and are copyrighted. This product contains either BISAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Data Security, Inc. e_Db is a licensed product from Simple Software Solutions, Inc. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference. Part Number: 90069961 (04/07) 3D_ML_GSG.book Page ii Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM© 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Tous droits réservés. Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 pour Windows® Lorsque le présent guide est distribué avec un logiciel assujetti à un contrat de licence, le guide et le logiciel qu'il décrit sont régis par la licence et ne peuvent être utilisés ou copiés qu'en conformité avec les conditions de ladite licence. A moins d'une autorisation expresse accordée par cette licence, aucune partie de ce guide ne peut être reproduite, stockée dans un système d'interrogation ou transmise, sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit (électronique, mécanique, par enregistrement ou autre) sans l'autorisation écrite préalable d'Adobe Systems Incorporated. Veuillez noter que le contenu du présent guide est protégé par la loi sur les droits d'auteur, même s'il n'est pas distribué avec un logiciel régi par un contrat de licence utilisateur. Les informations contenues dans ce guide sont fournies à titre purement informatif ; elles sont susceptibles d'être modifiées sans préavis et ne doivent pas être interprétées comme étant un engagement de la part d'Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated n'accepte aucune responsabilité quant aux erreurs ou inexactitudes pouvant être contenues dans le présent guide. Veuillez noter que les illustrations et images existantes que vous souhaiterez éventuellement inclure dans votre projet sont susceptibles d'être protégées par les lois sur les droits d'auteur. L'inclusion non autorisée de tels éléments dans vos nouveaux travaux peut constituer une violation des droits du propriétaire. Veuillez vous assurer de détenir toute autorisation nécessaire auprès du détenteur des droits. Toute référence à des noms de sociétés dans les modèles ou images types n'est utilisée qu'à titre d'exemple et ne fait référence à aucune société réelle. Adobe, le logo Adobe, Acrobat, Acrobat Capture, Acrobat Connect, Breeze, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, GoLive, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, PostScript 3, Reader et Version Cue sont des marques ou des marques déposées d'Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Apple, Mac et Macintosh sont des marques d'Apple, Inc., déposées aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType, Vista et Windows sont des marques ou des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. UNIX est une marque déposée de The Open Group aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays. Helvetica and Times sont des marques déposées de Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, exclusivement cédées sous licence par le biais de Linotype Library GmbH, et peuvent être déposées dans certaines juridictions. Toutes les autres marques citées sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. La partie Orthographe de ce produit est basée sur Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1990. Merriam-Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 2003, 2004. Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991, 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1990. Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1990, 1995. Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1990, 2004. IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1992. Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1991. Text & Satz Datentechnik © Copyright 1991. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 2004. Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 2004. MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, EtatsUnis. © Copyright 1990. William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995. Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995. Tous droits réservés. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey, Etats-Unis. Certains composants d’Adobe Acrobat, protégés par des droits d’auteur, incluent une technologie utilisée sous la licence d’Autonomy, Inc. Ce produit contient les logiciels BISAFE et/ou TIPEM de RSA Data Security, Inc. e_Db est un produit de Simple Software Solutions, Inc., cédé sous licence. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Avis aux utilisateurs du gouvernement des Etats-Unis. Ce logiciel et la documentation attenante font partie des « commercial items », visés à l'article 48 C.F.R., alinéa 2.101, qui se composent des « commercial computer software » et « commercial computer software documentation », visés à l'article 48 C.F.R., alinéa 12.212 ou 48 C.F.R., alinéa 227.7202, selon le cas. Conformément à l'article 48 C.F.R., alinéa 12.212 ou 48 C.F.R., alinéas 227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, selon le cas, la licence des « commercial computer software » et « commercial computer software documentation » est accordée aux utilisateurs finaux faisant partie du gouvernement des Etats-Unis (a) en tant que « commercial items » et (b) uniquement selon les droits accordés à tous les autres utilisateurs selon les conditions mentionnées dans les présentes. Droits non publiés réservés dans le cadre des lois sur les droits d'auteur en vigueur aux Etats-Unis. Adobe s'engage à respecter la législation relative à l'égalité des chances y compris, le cas échéant, les dispositions du décret 11246, tel qu'amendé, à la section 402 de la loi sur l'assistance aux vétérans du Vietnam (Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act) de 1974 (38 USC 4212), et à la section 503 de la loi sur la réadaptation (Rehabilitation Act) de 1973, telle qu'amendée, et la réglementation des articles 41 CFR, alinéas 60-1 à 60-60, 60-250 et 60-741. La clause d'action positive et la réglementation décrites dans la phrase précédente sont incluses par référence. Référence : 90069961 (04/07) 3D_ML_GSG.book Page i Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM© 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 für Windows® Wenn dieses Handbuch mit Software vertrieben wird, zu der eine Endbenutzervereinbarung gehört, unterliegen dieses Handbuch und die darin beschriebene Software einem Lizenzvertrag und dürfen nur in Übereinstimmung mit den Vertragsbestimmungen verwendet oder vervielfältigt werden. Kein Teil dieses Handbuchs darf, sofern nicht per Lizenzvertrag ausdrücklich erlaubt, ohne die vorherige schriftliche Genehmigung von Adobe Systems Incorporated reproduziert, in Datenbanken gespeichert oder in irgendeiner Form – elektronisch, fotomechanisch, auf Tonträgern oder auf irgendeine andere Weise – übertragen werden. Beachten Sie, dass der Inhalt dieses Handbuchs urheberrechtlich geschützt ist, auch wenn es nicht mit der Software geliefert wird, die eine Endbenutzerlizenzvereinbarung enthält. Der Inhalt dieses Handbuchs dient ausschließlich Informationszwecken, kann ohne Vorankündigung verändert werden und ist nicht als Verpflichtung von Adobe Systems Incorporated anzusehen. Adobe Systems Incorporated übernimmt keine Haftung für Fehler oder Ungenauigkeiten, die in den in diesem Handbuch enthaltenen Informationen auftauchen können. Beachten Sie, dass die Grafiken oder Abbildungen, die Sie eventuell in Ihrem Projekt verwenden möchten, urheberrechtlich geschützt sein können. Das Einfügen solchen Materials in Ihre neue Arbeit kann eine Verletzung der Rechte des Inhabers der Urheberrechte darstellen. Holen Sie vorher die Erlaubnis vom Inhaber der Urheberrechte ein. Firmennamen in Beispielvorlagen oder Bildern dienen ausschließlich Demonstrationszwecken und verweisen nicht auf tatsächlich bestehende Organisationen. Adobe, das Adobe-Logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Capture, Acrobat Connect, Breeze, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, GoLive, Illustrator, InCopy, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, PostScript 3, Reader und Version Cue sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken von Adobe Systems Incorporated in den USA und/oder anderen Ländern. Apple, Mac und Macintosh sind Marken von Apple Inc., die in den USA und anderen Ländern eingetragen sind. Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType, Vista und Windows sind Marken oder eingetragene Marken der Microsoft Corporation in den USA und/oder anderen Ländern. UNIX ist eine eingetragene Marke von The Open Group in den USA und anderen Ländern. Helvetica und Times sind Marken (in einigen Ländern bzw. Regionen eingetragene Marken) der Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, exklusiv lizenziert durch die Linotype Library GmbH. Alle anderen Marken sind Eigentum ihrer jeweiligen Inhaber. Die Rechtschreibprüfung dieses Produkts basiert auf der Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 2004 IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1992 Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Text & Satz Datentechnik © Copyright 1991 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995 Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Proximity Technology, eine Division von Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. Teile von Adobe Acrobat beinhalten Technologien, die unter Lizenz von Autonomy verwendet werden und urheberrechtlich geschützt sind. Dieses Produkt enthält BSAFE- und/oder TIPEM-Software von RSA Data Security, Inc. e_Db ist ein lizenziertes Produkt von Simple Software Solutions, Inc. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Hinweis für Endbenutzer in US-Behörden. Die vorliegende Software und die zugehörige Dokumentation sind „Commercial Items“ (Kommerzielle Güter), wie in 48 C.F.R. §2.101 definiert, und umfassen die Bestandteile „Commercial Computer Software“ (Kommerzielle Computersoftware) und „Commercial Computer Software Documentation“ (Kommerzielle Computersoftwaredokumentation), wie in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 bzw. 48 C.F.R. §227.7202 als solche bezeichnet, falls anwendbar. In Übereinstimmung mit 48 C.F.R. §12.212 oder 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 bis 227.7202-4 werden „Commercial Computer Software“ und „Commercial Computer Software Documentation“ für Benutzer in US-Regierungsbehörden (a) lediglich als „Commercial Items“ und (b) nur mit den Rechten lizenziert, die allen anderen Benutzern gemäß den dokumentierten Geschäftsbedingungen eingeräumt werden. Nicht veröffentlichte Rechte sind unter den Urheberrechtsgesetzen der USA vorbehalten. Adobe erklärt hiermit, alle anwendbaren Gesetze zur Chancengleichheit zu beachten, darunter, soweit zutreffend, die Bestimmungen der Executive Order 11246 (geänderte Fassung), Paragraph 402 des Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act von 1974 (38 USC 4212), Paragraph 503 des Rehabilitation Act von 1973 (geänderte Fassung) sowie die Bestimmungen in 41 CFR Abschnitt 60-1 bis 60-60, 60-250 und 60-741. Die Schutzmaßnahmen und die Festsetzungen im vorangegangenen Satz werden per Verweis integriert. Teilenummer: 90069961 (04/07) 3D_ML_GSG.book Page i Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMv Contents Chapter 1: Getting started Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 Using Adobe Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Workflows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8 What’s new. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 3D_ML_GSG.book Page v Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMvi Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Prise en main Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Utilisation de l’aide Adobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 Ressources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4 Flux de production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 Nouveautés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29 3D_ML_GSG.book Page vi Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMvii Inhalt Kapitel 1: Erste Schritte Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Adobe-Hilfe verwenden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 Ressourcen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4 Arbeitsabläufe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 Neuheiten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29 3D_ML_GSG.book Page vii Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM3D_ML_GSG.book Page viii Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-1 Chapter 1: Getting started Installation Requirements To review complete system requirements and recommendations for your Adobe® software, see the Read Me file included with your software. Install the software 1 Close any other Adobe applications open on your computer. 2 Insert the installation disc into the disc drive, and follow the on-screen instructions. Note: For more information, see the Read Me file included with your software. Activate the software Adobe software may include license management technology to ensure compliance with the product license agreement. When present, this technology prompts you to verify the license of your product within 30 days after you first use it. Verification is mandatory. You may be prompted to activate the software. The verification process doesn’t collect, transmit, or use any information about the identity of users. For more information on this topic, see the Read Me file on your installation disc, or visit the Adobe website at www.adobe.com/go/activation. 1 If the Activation dialog box isn’t already open, choose Help > Activation > Activate. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions. Note: If you want to install the software on a different computer, you must first deactivate the software on your computer: Choose Help > Activation > Deactivate. Register Register your product to receive complimentary installation support, notifications of updates, and other services. ? To register, follow the on-screen instructions in the Registration dialog box, which appears after you install and activate the software. If you postpone registration, you can register at any time by choosing Help > Registration. Read Me The inst allat ion disc cont ains t he Read Me file for your software. (This file is also copied to the application folder during product installation.) Open the file to read important information about the following topics: • System requirements • Installation • Registration • Electronic licensing • Legal notices 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 1 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-2 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Using Adobe Help Adobe Help resources Documentation for your Adobe software is available in a variety of formats. In-product and LiveDocs Help In-product Help provides access to all documentation and instructional content available at the time the software ships. It is available through the Help menu in your Adobe software. LiveDocs Help includes all the content from in-product Help, plus updates and links to additional instructional content available on the web. For some products, you can also add comments to the topics in LiveDocs Help. Find LiveDocs Help for your product in the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documentation. Most versions of in-product and LiveDocs Help let you search across the Help systems of multiple products. Topics may also contain links to relevant content on the web or to topics in the Help of another product. Think of Help, both in the product and on the web, as a hub for accessing additional content and communities of users. The most complete and up-to-date version of Help is always on the web. How To topics The How To topics provide a brief overview of the most common tasks. If you need more information, click the link at the bottom of the How To topic to view the related Help topic. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 2 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-3 Getting Started Guide PDF documentation The in-product Help is also available as an Adobe PDF that is optimized for printing. Other documents, such as installation guides and white papers, may also be provided as PDFs. All PDF documentation is available through the Adobe Help Resource Center, at www.adobe.com/go/documentation. To see the PDF document at ion included wit h your software, look in t he Documents folder on the installation or content DVD. Printed documentation Printed editions of the in-product Help may be available for purchase in the Adobe Store, at www.adobe.com/go/store. You can also find books published by Adobe publishing partners in the Adobe Store. A printed workflow guide is included with all Adobe Creative Suite® 3 products, and stand-alone Adobe products may include a printed getting started guide. Using Help in the product In-product Help is available through the Help menu. After you start the Adobe Help Viewer, you can access Help for additional Adobe products installed on your computer. Topics may contain links to additional content on the web. If you search for a phrase, such as “shape tool,” enclose it in quotation marks to see only those topics that include all the words in the phrase. Accessibility features Adobe Help content is accessible to people with disabilities—such as mobility impairments, blindness, and low vision. In-product Help supports these standard accessibility features: • The user can change text size with standard context menu commands (Microsoft® Windows®) and standard menu commands (Apple Mac OS). • Links are underlined for easy recognition. • If link text doesn’t match the title of the destination, the title is referenced in the Title attribute of the Anchor tag. For example, the Previous and Next links include the titles of the previous and next topics. • Content supports high-contrast mode. • Images without captions include alternate text. • Each frame has a title to indicate its purpose. • Standard HTML tags define content structure for screen reading or text-to-speech tools. • Style sheets control formatting, so there are no embedded fonts. Keyboard shortcuts for Help toolbar controls (Windows) Back button Alt+Left Arrow Forward button Alt+Right Arrow Print Ctrl+P About button Ctrl+I Help For menu Alt+Down Arrow or Alt+Up Arrow to view Help for another application 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 3 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-4 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Keyboard shortcuts for Help navigation (Windows) • To move between panes, press Ctrl+Tab (forward) and Shift+Ctrl+Tab (backward). • To move through and outline links in a pane, press Tab (forward) or Shift+Tab (backward). • To activate an outlined link, press Enter. • To change text size, press Ctrl/Command+plus sign (+) or Ctrl/Command+minus sign (-). Resources Adobe Video Workshop The Adobe Creative Suite 3 Video Workshop offers over 200 training videos covering a wide range of subjects for print, web, and video professionals. You can use the Adobe Video Workshop to learn about any Creative Suite 3 product. Many videos show you how to use Adobe applications together. When you start the Adobe Video Workshop, you choose the products you want to learn and the subjects you want to view. You can see details about each video to focus and direct your learning. Community of presenters With this release, Adobe Systems invited the community of its users to share their expertise and insights. Adobe and lynda.com present tutorials, tips, and tricks from leading designers and developers such as Joseph Lowery, Katrin Eismann, and Chris Georgenes. You can see and hear Adobe experts such as Lynn Grillo, Greg Rewis, and Russell Brown. In all, over 30 product experts share their knowledge. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 4 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-5 Getting Started Guide Tutorials and source files The Adobe Video Workshop includes training for novices and experienced users. You’ll also find videos on new features and key techniques. Each video covers a single subject and typically runs about 3-5 minutes. Most videos come with an illustrated tutorial and source files, so you can print detailed steps and try the tutorial on your own. Using Adobe Video Workshop You can access Adobe Video Workshop using the DVD included with your Creative Suite 3 product. It’s also available online at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials. Adobe will regularly add new videos to the online Video Workshop, so check in to see what’s new. Acrobat videos Adobe Video Workshop covers a wide range of subjects for Adobe Acrobat®, including these: • Setting up the workspace and taskbars • Combining files into a PDF • Converting PDFs • Modifying PDFs • Adding comments to PDFs • Working wit h shared reviews • Reviewing and summarizing comments • Adding security to forms • Collaborating in real time with Adobe Acrobat Connect™ • Preflighting files • Printing documents 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 5 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-6 CHAPTER 1 Getting started To access Adobe Creative Suite 3 video tutorials, visit Adobe Video Workshop at www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials. Extras You have access to a wide variety of resources that will help you make the most of your Adobe software. Some of these resources are installed on your computer during the setup process; additional content is included on the installation or content disc, if applicable. Unique extras are also offered online by the Adobe Exchange community, at www.adobe.com/go/exchange. Installed resources During software installation, a number of resources are placed in your application folder. To view those files, navigate to the application folder on your computer. Disc content The disc included with your product may contain additional resources for use with the software, such as presets, plug-ins, a PDF version of the Help, technical information, and other documents. Adobe Exchange For more free content, visit www.adobe.com/go/exchange, an online community where users download and share thousands of free actions, extensions, plug-ins, and other content for use with Adobe products. Adobe Design Center Adobe Design Center offers articles, inspiration, and instruction from industry experts, top designers, and Adobe publishing partners. New content is added monthly. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 6 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-7 Getting Started Guide You can find hundreds of tutorials for design products and learn tips and techniques through videos, HTML tutorials, and sample book chapters. New ideas are the heart of Think Tank, Dialog Box, and Gallery: • Think Tank articles consider how today’s designers engage with technology and what their experiences mean for design, design tools, and society. • In Dialog Box, experts share new ideas in motion graphics and digital design. • The Gallery showcases how artists communicate design in motion. Visit Adobe Design Center at www.adobe.com/designcenter. Adobe Developer Center Adobe Developer Center provides samples, tutorials, articles, and community resources for developers who build rich Internet applications, websites, mobile content, and other projects using Adobe products. The Developer Center also contains resources for developers who develop plug-ins for Adobe products. In addition to sample code and tutorials, you'll find RSS feeds, online seminars, SDKs, scripting guides, and other technical resources. Visit Adobe Developer Center at www.adobe.com/go/developer. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 7 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-8 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Customer support Visit the Adobe Support website, at www.adobe.com/support, to find troubleshooting information for your product and to learn about free and paid technical support options. Follow the Training link for access to Adobe Press books, a variety of training resources, Adobe software certification programs, and more. Downloads Visit www.adobe.com/go/downloads to find free updates, tryouts, and other useful software. In addition, the Adobe Store (at www.adobe.com/go/store) provides access to thousands of plug-ins from third-party developers, helping you to automate tasks, customize workflows, create specialized professional effects, and more. Adobe Labs Adobe Labs gives you the opportunity to experience and evaluate new and emerging technologies and products from Adobe. At Adobe Labs, you have access to resources such as these: • Prerelease software and technologies • Code samples and best practices to accelerate your learning • Early versions of product and technical documentation • Forums, wiki-based content, and other collaborative resources to help you interact with like-minded developers Adobe Labs fosters a collaborative software development process. In this environment, customers quickly become productive with new products and technologies. Adobe Labs is also a forum for early feedback, which the Adobe development teams use to create software that meets the needs and expectations of the community. Visit Adobe Labs at www.adobe.com/go/labs. User communities User communities feature forums, blogs, and other avenues for users to share technologies, tools, and information. Users can ask questions and find out how others are getting the most out of their software. User-to-user forums are available in English, French, German, and Japanese; blogs are posted in a wide range of languages. To participate in forums or blogs, visit www.adobe.com/communities. Workflows Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 software offers robust tools to support many aspects of your document processes. • Create Adobe PDFs from many different applications. • Assemble files from multiple sources into a PDF package. • Convert PDFs to other formats, such as Word, HTML, or JPG. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 8 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-9 Getting Started Guide • Restrict access to your PDFs using various security features. • Approve a PDF by digitally signing and certifying it. • Conduct reviews using numerous commenting and review tools. • Create fillable forms, distribute them securely, and collect the form data. Browse through the following Quickstart topics to get an overview of Acrobat 3D capabilities. For more information on a topic, see Help. Create PDFs PDFs retain the appearance of your original documents, so you don’t need to worry about losing document quality. And because PDFs can be viewed on Windows, Mac OS, or UNIX by using free Adobe Reader® software, anyone can view and print PDFs without having the source applications. You can create PDFs from within Acrobat 3D, or from various source applications. For example, you can convert an Outlook email message discussing project issues to a PDF and then attach it to a PDF containing the project specification and schedule. Or you may have personnel documents that are currently only on paper. You can easily create PDFs from each of these paper documents as part of the process of creating an online human resources package. Convert your original document (left) to Adobe PDF (center), and then add bookmarks, comments, and so on in Acrobat (right). Create from a file To create a PDF from within Acrobat, the application that created the original file must be installed on the system in most cases. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From File. 2 Select the file you want to convert, and click Open. The authoring application opens automatically or a progress dialog box appears. If the file is in an unsupported format, a message appears, telling you that the file cannot be converted to a PDF. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 9 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-10 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Create from a paper document You can create a PDF directly from a paper document using Acrobat 3D and your scanner. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From Scanner. 2 Select the input, output, and document options in the Acrobat Scan dialog box, and then click Scan. 3 If creating a new PDF, specify a filename and location, and click Save. 4 Select Scan More Pages or Scanning Complete. Create from a web page You can download and convert web pages from the top level, or any number of subordinate levels, of a URL. 1 Click the Create PDF button and choose From Web Page. 2 Type the URL into the text box. (Click Browse to convert a web page you have already downloaded.) 3 Specify the number of levels to download and where to download files from, and then click Create. Create from scratch You can create small PDFs that can be edited in Acrobat 3D. 1 Choose File > Create PDF > From Blank Page. 2 Click in the document and begin typing. Use options on the New Document toolbar to change text attributes. 3 Save the document. 4 To continue editing, choose Document > Resume Editing. To convert the PDF so that it cannot be re-edited, choose Document > Prevent Further Edits. Create from Word After you install Acrobat 3D, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to Word. In Word 2007 for Windows instead of the toolbar, you need to access the PDFMaker options from the Acrobat Ribbon. 1 In Word, open the file you want to convert. 2 Do one of the following: • (Word 2007 for Windows) Click Acrobat and then click the Create PDF button . • (Other versions of Word) Click the Convert To Adobe PDF button . 3 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. 4 (Mac OS only) Click View File or Done. You can also convert a file to PDF and then email it for review by clicking Create and Send For Review (Office 2007) or Send For Review (Other versions of Office). Create from Outlook (Windows) After you install Acrobat 3D, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to Outlook. 1 Select the desired email messages and click Create Adobe PDF From Selected Messages . 2 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. The selected messages are converted to a PDF package or a merged PDF, depending upon conversion settings. To convert email folders, select the desired folders and click Create Adobe PDF From Folders . You can also automatically archive email messages and folders. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 10 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-11 Getting Started Guide Create from Lotus Notes (Windows) After you install Acrobat 3D, an Acrobat PDFMaker toolbar is added to Lotus Notes and commands are added to the Actions menu. 1 Select the desired email messages and click Convert Selected Messages To Adobe PDF . 2 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. The messages are converted to a merged PDF or a PDF package, depending upon conversion settings. You can convert an entire folder to PDF by clicking Convert Selected Folder to Adobe PDF . Create from Internet Explorer (Windows) You can convert an entire web page or a selected portion of it to PDF. 1 In Internet Explorer, open the web page you want to convert. 2 (Optional) Drag to select the text and images you want to convert. 3 Click Convert Web Page To PDF . 4 Specify a filename and location, and click Save. You can also convert one or more web pages, and even entire websites, from within Acrobat 3D. Create using Adobe PDF printer In many applications, you can use the Print command with the Adobe PDF printer to convert a file to PDF. 1 Open the file you want to convert, and choose File > Print. 2 Choose Adobe PDF from the list of printers, and print the file. 3 If prompted, specify a filename and location, and click Save. You can also choose a different default Adobe PDF printer setting or create a customized setting. Collaborate on 3D designs Share and collaborate on your 3D design ideas by converting them to secure PDF files that others can comment on in free Adobe Reader. Start an email-based review to solicit feedback from your collaborators. The email-based review wizard enables commenting for Reader users by default. Or, you can start an Acrobat Connect meeting that lets you demonstrate and discuss 3D designs on your desktop in real time. Note: If you want to secure your 3D PDF, do so before you start a review. You can’t change security properties in a Reader-enabled PDF. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 11 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-12 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Collaborators can explore all aspects of the 3D model, from hidden internal structures to exploded animations. They can rotate, cross-section, and measure parts while adding their comments in notes, drawings, and other markups. Convert a 3D file to PDF Convert any supported 3D file to PDF. (For a list of supported formats, choose Edit > Preferences, and select Convert To PDF on the left.) 1 Click the Create PDF button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose From File. 2 Browse to select the 3D CAD file you want to convert. 3 Select the desired preset or individual settings. Add comments to a 3D model By adding comments, you create a new view that’s associated with those comments. 1 Select a tool from the Comment & Markup toolbar. 2 Click in the 3D model to add a comment and create a new view in the Model Tree. You can add comments to an existing comment view by selecting that view in the Model Tree before you click in the model. Start a meeting If you have an Adobe Acrobat Connect account, you can start a meeting to review PDFs in a web browser. You can also create a trial account to start a meeting. Note: Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages. 1 Click Start Meeting in the Tasks toolbar. 2 Click Log In, and then type your Meeting URL, login, and password. (Or click Create Trial Account and follow the on-screen instructions.) 3 Click Send An E-mail Invitation or Share My Screen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 12 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-13 Getting Started Guide CAD, CAM, CAE interoperability From drawing board to manufacturing plant, PDF can ease the flow of Computer Aided Design, Manufacturing, and Engineering (CAD, CAM, CAE) information. For example, you can quickly convert an entire assembly to a PDF that’s a fraction of the original file size while retaining geometric dimensioning and tolerancing and other product specifications. By using Acrobat 3D, manufacturers and suppliers can open virtually any 3D CAD file without installing the original CAD application or a CAD translator. Import and view Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) from CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX, and Pro/ENGINEER files. Once the design is finalized, export geometry to a standard file format that can be reused in CAM applications to cut, build, and assemble the parts. View product information for a 3D model You can view Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) in the Model Tree and in the 3D model, if you imported it during PDF conversion. 1 Click the 3D model, and click the Model Tree icon in the 3D toolbar. 2 In the Model Tree, click each view to see the PMI associated with that view. Export geometry from a 3D model If geometry was retained during conversion, you can export it as IGES, STEP, VRML, or ParaSolid file formats, which most CAE and CAM applications can read. 1 Right-click the 3D model and choose Export Data from the menu. 2 Choose a file type and click Settings to specify options for that file type. Combine files Combine files from various sources into a single, merged PDF or an assembled PDF package of related files. For example, you might collect brochures, presentations, spreadsheets, and contracts into a cohesive sales proposal. If you merge files into a single PDF, you can then add unifying elements to help tie the document together. For example, you can add a header or footer to the new file. Or renumber pages so that the page numbers that appear in the Page Navigation toolbar are consecutive across the merged files. You can also rotate, delete, and replace pages as necessary to create a cohesive look and keep the PDF up-to-date. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 13 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-14 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Merge documents from different applications into one Adobe PDF. Create a PDF from multiple files You can easily merge files of different types into a single PDF. 1 Click Combine Files , and then click Add Files. 2 Select the files you want to combine, and click Add Files. 3 Adjust the order of files as desired, and then choose a file size and conversion setting. 4 Click Next, select Merge Files Into A Single PDF, and click Create. Rather than merging files, you can also create a PDF package of files. Assemble PDFs in a package A PDF package lets you assemble related information into a single PDF while maintaining individual PDFs within it. 1 Click Combine Files , and then click Add Files. 2 Select the files you want to combine, and click Add Files. 3 Adjust the order of files as desired, and then choose a file size and conversion setting. 4 Click Next, select Assemble Files Into A PDF Package, and click Create. Modify a list of files to combine When combining files, you have several options for adjusting the set of files. 1 Click Combine Files , click Add Files, and add the desired files. 2 To modify the list of files or remove a file from the list, select a file, and then do any of the following: • Click Move Up or Move Down or drag the file to a new location. • Click Choose Pages to include a subset of pages. (Button name might change based on file type.) • Click Remove or press Delete. Add headers and footers You can add a single header and footer throughout a PDF or apply different headers and footers selectively to various pages. 1 Choose Document > Header & Footer > Add. If a message appears, click Add New. 2 Specify font and margin settings. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 14 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-15 Getting Started Guide 3 In the header and footer text boxes, type the desired text. Click the buttons below the boxes to insert a page number or date. You can save header and footer settings for easy reuse. Renumber pages When you renumber pages, only the numbers that appear in the Pages panel and the toolbar are affected. To change the numbers that appear on the document pages, add a header or footer. 1 Click the Pages button , and choose Number Pages from the Options menu. 2 Specify which pages the numbering will be applied to. 3 Specify the numbering style, prefix (if any), and starting number. You can also continue the numbering style of the previous section. Rotate pages You can rotate all or selected pages in a PDF. 1 Choose Document > Rotate Pages. 2 Specify the direction of the rotation and the page range. 3 Choose the desired options from the Rotate menus. To temporarily rotate a page, choose View > Rotate View > Clockwis e or Count erclockwis e. Delete pages After combining files, you can delete unwanted or blank pages. 1 (Optional) Click the Pages button in the navigation pane and select the pages you want to delete. 2 Choose Document > Delete Pages. 3 Click Selected to delete selected pages or click From and specify a range. If you want to retain a copy of the original PDF, make sure that you save the new document using Save As rather than Save. Replace pages To quickly update a PDF, you can replace individual pages. 1 Choose Document > Replace Pages. 2 Select the document that contains the replacement pages, and click Select. 3 Under Original, specify the pages you want to replace. Under Replacement, specify the beginning replacement page. Interactive elements, such as links and bookmarks, associated with the original pages aren’t deleted. Export If you don’t have access to the original source file for a PDF, you can convert the PDF to an editable format. You can also copy selected text and images to reuse in other documents. Or extract pages and save them as a new PDF. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 15 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-16 CHAPTER 1 Getting started For example, you might save a brochure in HTML format for use on your company’s website. Or extract a few relevant pages from a large in-house document to share with clients. You could easily repurpose images and text from a design specification by copying them into a Word, Photoshop, or InDesign document. Export as Word If you don’t have the original file from which a PDF was created, you can save the PDF as a Word document that you can then edit in Word. 1 Click Export on the Tasks toolbar, and then choose Word Document. 2 Click Settings to set conversion options. Note: When you save a PDF to Word format, the resulting file isn’t equivalent to a file created in Word; some coding information may be lost. Export as HTML or XML To easily use the content of a PDF on the web, simply convert the PDF to HTML or XML format. 1 Click Export on the Tasks toolbar, and then choose HTML Web Page or XML 1.0. 2 Click Settings to set conversion options. You can save a PDF in HTML 3.2 format by clicking Export, and choosing More Formats > HTML 3.2. Export as text You can save a PDF in Rich Text Format (RTF), as accessible text, or as plain text. RTF preserves the most formatting. Accessible text preserves such items as comments, form fields, and alternate text. 1 Click Export on the Tasks toolbar, choose More Formats, and then choose the desired text format. 2 If saving to RTF or plain text, click Settings to adjust the conversion settings. Select and copy text You can copy words, lines, or columns of text from a PDF. 1 Using the Select tool , do any of the following: • Drag across text. • Double-click or triple-click to select a word or a line of text. 2 Move the pointer over the icon that appears next to the selected text, and then choose an option from the menu. If you cannot select text, it may be part of an image or from a scanned document. Select and copy an image You can copy an image from a PDF to the clipboard or to another application, or you can save it to a file. 1 Using the Select tool , click an image or drag to select a portion of it after the pointer changes to a crosshairs icon. 2 Do any of the following: • Drag the image into an open document in another application. • Right-click/Control-click the image and choose Copy Image or Save Image As. Take a snapshot of a page Use the Snapshot tool to copy all selected content. Text and images are both copied as an image. 1 Choose Tools > Select & Zoom > Snapshot tool. 2 Drag on the page to select content, or click to copy the entire page. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 16 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-17 Getting Started Guide The selected content is copied to the clipboard when you release the mouse button. Extract pages When you extract pages, they are saved in a new PDF. 1 Choose Document > Extract Pages. 2 Specify the range of pages to extract. 3 Choose whether you want to delete the pages after extracting them. 4 To save the extracted pages as individual files, rather than a single PDF, select Extract Pages As Separate Files. All links, comments, and form fields on the extracted pages are also extracted, but bookmarks and articles are not. Secure You can use password or certificate encryption, as well as server-based policies, to help control access to your PDFs. These security features allow you to restrict what others can do and see in the PDFs you create. For example, you can create read-only files for web distribution. Or limit access in files that you send out for review so that only commenting is allowed. You can redact sensitive content in a legal brief or examine a PDF for personal information before making it available to the public. Examine a PDF for hidden content Before making a PDF available to others, you may wish to remove content that reveals the document history or that contains your personal information, such as metadata that lists your name as the author. 1 Choose Document > Examine Document. 2 Select the items you want removed from the PDF, and click Remove All Checked Items. 3 Save the document with a new name. You can also examine a PDF at the end of a redaction process. Redact sensitive content Use redaction to remove sensitive content from a PDF. Important: Save a copy of the PDF before applying redaction markups. 1 Choose View > Toolbars > Redaction. 2 Click Mark For Redaction , and do any of the following: • Double-click a word or an image. • Drag across text. • Ctrl/Control-drag over an area of the page. 3 Click Apply Redactions . Search for and remove hidden content, if desired. Use Search And Redact to remove all instances of a search string. Add a document password One way to restrict access to a PDF is to add a Document Open password. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 17 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-18 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Important: There is no way to open the PDF if you forget the password. 1 Click Secure on the toolbar, and choose Password Encryption. 2 Select Require A Password To Open The Document, and type a case-sensitive password in the text box. If the PDF already has security applied, you may need to supply the Permissions password that lets you change security settings. Prevent changes to a PDF Add security restrictions to help prevent others from changing your PDF. 1 Click Secure on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Password Encryption. 2 Select Restrict Editing And Printing Of The Document, and type a Permissions password. 3 Choose an option from the Changes Allowed menu. For information on using other security methods to restrict access, see Help. Create secure attachments You can add security to both PDF and non-PDF documents by embedding them in an encrypted envelope, called a security envelope, and sending the envelope as an email attachment. 1 Click Secure , and choose Create Security Envelope. 2 Click Add File To Send, and select the desired documents. 3 Click Next, and follow the on-screen instructions to create the security envelope. Recipients can extract and save the encrypted documents. Once saved, the documents are no longer encrypted. Secure PDFs using policies You can quickly apply security options by using either a user policy that you create or an organizational policy created by an Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server administrator and shared by a group of users. Two user policies come with Acrobat 3D. 1 Click Secure on the toolbar, and choose one of the policies listed at the top of the menu. 2 Click Yes, and then change the security settings as desired. Create a user security policy Security policies provide an easy way for you to apply the same security settings to multiple PDFs. Security policies include encryption, permission settings, and information about who can open the PDFs or change security settings. 1 Click Secure on the toolbar, and choose Manage Security Policies. 2 Click New, and select the type of security you want. 3 Click Next, and follow the on-screen instructions to set up the policy and choose the desired security settings. Sign Digitally signing a PDF is much like signing a paper document. For example, you can use a digital signature to indicate that you approve of the contents, that you have reviewed the contents, or that you agree to the terms outlined in the document. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 18 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-19 Getting Started Guide Adding a digital signature also allows you to track any changes made to the PDF. For added security, you can certify a PDF so that recipients can be assured that the PDF has not been altered. Finally, you can check digital signatures to ensure that they are valid. Sign a PDF to indicate you’ve read it or to certify its contents. A. Certifying signature B. Digital signature Create a self-signed digital ID A digital ID is required to sign documents and apply certificate security. Self-signed digital IDs created from Acrobat 3D may be adequate for many situations. See the Adobe website for information on acquiring a digital ID from Adobe security partners. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs, and click Add ID. 3 Select Create A Self-Signed Digital ID For Use With Acrobat. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set up the selfsigned digital ID. Register a digital ID You must register a digital ID in Acrobat 3D before you can use it. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs, and click Add ID. 3 Select Browse For An Existing Digital ID File. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to select the digital ID file, type your password, and register the digital ID. You can create self-signed digital IDs in Acrobat 3D. Or, see the Adobe website for information on acquiring a digital ID from Adobe security partners. Share your certificate Your digital ID includes a certificate that others require to validate your signature and encrypt documents for you. 1 Choose Advanced > Security Settings. 2 Select Digital IDs on the left. 3 Select the ID you want to share, and click Export . 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to email the certificate or save it to a file. If you use a third-party security method, you usually don’t need to share your certificate with others. A B 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 19 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-20 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Create a signature appearance You can modify your digital signature appearance. For example, you can include your scanned signature. 1 (Optional) Save the desired image on a page by itself, and convert the page to PDF. 2 Choose Edit > Preferences (Windows) or Acrobat 3D (Mac OS) > Preferences, and select Security. 3 Click New, and type a title. 4 (Optional) Select Imported Graphic, click File, and select the desired file. 5 Specify options as desired. Sign a PDF Use a digital signature to indicate your approval. For best results, change your security preferences to always sign in Preview Document mode, so that you can view and sign the PDF in a secure state. 1 Click the signature field. Or, click Sign , and choose Sign Document. 2 Follow the on-screen instructions to apply your digital signature. If the document does not contain an unsigned signature field, click Sign and choose Place Signature to sign the PDF. Certify a PDF Certifying a PDF indicates that you approve of its content and allows you to specify the types of changes that are permitted for the PDF to remain certified. 1 Click Sign on the Tasks toolbar, choose Certify Wit h Visible Signature or Cer t ify Wit hout Visible Signature, and click OK. 2 If certifying with a visible signature, draw a signature field. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to apply the certifying signature. 4 Save the PDF using a different filename. Validate signatures When you open a document, a status icon appears next to the signature, indicating if the signature is valid. 1 Click Signatures in the navigation pane, and select the signature. 2 Right-click/Control-click and choose Show Signature Properties. 3 Use the various tabs and options in the Signature Properties dialog box to resolve any signature issues. For example, if the identity is unknown or unverified, click the Signer tab, and click Show Certificate to determine if the certificate is trusted. Review & Comment Start an automated email or shared review to simplify the reviewing process. When you review a PDF using Acrobat 3D, all users can comment on a single, unchanging document using a wide variety of commenting tools, from sticky notes and stamps to text edits, highlights, and drawing markups. If you set up a shared review, reviewers can see and respond to others reviewer’s comments. Using the Review Tracker, you can invite additional reviewers, rejoin a review, and track the progress of shared reviews. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 20 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-21 Getting Started Guide For example, suppose you have a specification that needs to be reviewed by your project team, which includes people in several locations. Set up a shared review to send the PDF to all the review participants. When the participants (including Adobe Reader 8.0 users if you have enabled commenting for Adobe Reader) open the email attachment, Acrobat opens the Commenting toolbar and instructions on how to complete the review. Add different kinds of comments to your PDF. They also appear in the Comments list. A. Note B. Drawing markup C. Stamp D. Replaced Text E. File attachment F. Highlighted text Start an email review An email-based review lets you track review status and merge received comments into the PDF. 1 Click Review & Comment and choose Attach For Email Review. 2 If prompted, enter your identity information to create a reviewer profile. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to select the PDF, invite reviewers, and send the email invitation. If your email application doesn’t send email automatically, you may need to answer alert messages and switch to your email application to finish sending the message. Start a shared review A shared review allows reviewers, including those using Adobe Reader, to see and respond to others’ comments during the review. Important: To conduct a shared review, you and your reviewers need write access to a shared comment server. 1 Click Review & Comment and choose Send For Shared Review. 2 If prompted, enter your identity information to create a reviewer profile. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to select (or add) a server, select the PDF, invite reviewers, and send the email invitation. Track and manage reviews The Review Tracker provides information for all documents that you’ve sent and received for review. Use the Review Tracker to rejoin a review, send a reminder, or invite additional reviewers. 1 Click Review & Comment , and choose Review Tracker. 2 Select the desired PDF on the left. 3 Do any of the following: • To rejoin a review, double-click the PDF. • To send a message, click Email All Reviewers or Email Initiator. • To invite additional reviewers, click Add Reviewers. A B C D F E 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 21 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-22 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Invite additional reviewers If you initiated a review, you can invite more reviewers. If you are a reviewer, ask the initiator to add reviewers so the initiator can track all reviewers and receive notification when comments are received. 1 Click Review & Comment , and choose Review Tracker. 2 Select the desired PDF under Reviews I’ve Sent, and click Add Reviewers on the right. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to add email addresses, change the message as needed, and send the invitation. Participate in an email review When you open the PDF attachment in an email review, a tracked copy of the PDF opens with a document message bar, a Send Comments button, and a Comment & Markup toolbar. Important: If you’re prompted to connect to a server when you open the PDF, you’ve been invited to a shared review. 1 Open the PDF attachment from your email application. 2 Use commenting tools to add comments. 3 Save the PDF, and then click Send Comments. Participate in a shared review When you open the shared PDF, commenting tools and a document message bar with instructions also open. 1 Open the PDF attachment or link. 2 Click Connect, and type your login name and password, if prompted. 3 Type your name, email address, and job title to create a reviewer profile, if prompted. 4 Add comments. 5 When you want to share your comments, click Publish Comments. In a shared review, you can see all reviewers’ comments that have been published. Create drawing markups You can add lines, arrows, and shapes to a PDF by using the drawing markup tools. 1 Choose Tools > Comment & Markup, and choose the desired tool. 2 Draw in the PDF. For example, click and drag to form a line, arrow, or rectangle. 3 (Optional) Using the Select tool, double-click the markup, and then type a comment in the pop-up note. To change properties, such as line color and width, right-click/Control-click the markup and choose Properties. Forms You can create a PDF form with interactive form fields from many different sources—an existing electronic document such as a Word document or a spreadsheet, a scanned paper document, or a template. You can then distribute the form through email or a shared server and track the forms that have been returned to you. Finally, you can easily collect and review form data and export it to other applications. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 22 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-23 Getting Started Guide For example, you could convert all of your human resources forms to PDF and post them for easy access on a shared server. You could then track a specific form, such as a yearly benefits enrollment form, and know who has filled out and returned the form. After you have collected the returned data, you could then export it to a spreadsheet or a personnel database. Interactive form fields make it easy to collect data. A. Check box B. Radio button C. Combo box D. Text box E. Button Create a form The Create New Form wizard guides you through creating a PDF form from a template (Windows only), an electronic document, spreadsheet data, or a scanned paper document. 1 Click Forms on the toolbar, and choose Create New Form. 2 Select the source for the PDF form, and click Continue. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions. Forms created with the wizard are LiveCycle Designer forms. To create an Acrobat form instead, choose Forms > Run Form Field Recognition. Edit a form Depending upon how a PDF form was created, you can edit it in either Acrobat 3D or Adobe LiveCycle Designer (Windows only). Note: (Windows) PDF forms created in Acrobat 3D can be edited in LiveCycle Designer, but those created or edited in LiveCycle Designer cannot be edited in Acrobat 3D. 1 Open a PDF form. 2 Choose Forms > Edit Form In Designer or Edit Form In Acrobat. 3 Add or modify form fields and field properties as desired. Distribute a form After you create a PDF form, you can distribute it by using the Distribute Form wizard. E D A B C 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 23 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-24 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Note: To use the wizard, the form must contain a submit button. 1 Open the desired form. 2 Click the Forms button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Distribute Form. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to prepare the form for distribution. 4 Specify if you want to email the form or save and send it later. 5 Follow the on-screen instructions to distribute the form. Track and manage forms The Forms Tracker helps you manage forms you’ve distributed. 1 Click the Forms button on the Tasks toolbar, and choose Track Forms. 2 Select an icon on the left to see forms in that category: • To Do dis plays for ms you’ve received. • History displays forms you’ve distributed. • Search Results allows you to search for specific forms. • Forms Library displays forms you’ve saved in the library for future distribution. Compile data received by email As users return their form data, you can compile it into a data set. 1 Open the email attachment containing the returned form. 2 In the dialog box that appears, select an existing data set or create a new set for the form data. The new data is added and the data set opens, allowing you to review all responses. You can also compile data by clicking Forms on the Tasks toolbar, and choosing Compile Returned Forms. Review form responses After you’ve compiled returned form data into a data set, the PDF automatically opens for you to review the responses. ? With the desired data set PDF open, do any of the following: • To review an individual response, select a line in the response list. • To sort the response list, click the desired column heading. • To add data, click Import Data . • To delete data, select a record and press Delete. Export form data to a spreadsheet Once you’ve collected PDF form data in FDF or XML format, you can organize the form data into a commadelimited spreadsheet (CSV) file. 1 Choose Forms > Manage Form Data > Merge Data Files Into Spreadsheet. 2 Click Add Files, and then select the desired data files. 3 Click Export, choose a location for the CSV file, and click Save. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 24 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-25 Getting Started Guide What’s new Viewing, navigating, searching Getting Started window At a glance, see the main features of Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 and click links to start tasks or learn more about features. See “Start in the Getting Started window” in Acrobat Help. Maximized work area View PDFs in a new visual design for the work area, navigation pane, and toolbars. User interface elements have been removed to maximize space. See “View the work area” in Acrobat 3D Help. Customizable toolbars Easily hide or show individual tools by right-clicking/Control-clicking a toolbar, or use the More Tools dialog box to customize toolbars. See “Display and arrange toolbars” in Acrobat 3D Help. Search enhancements Find words or use advanced search tools, all from the same integrated toolbar. View search results in a floating, resizable window. Search documents in a PDF package. See “Search features overview” in Acrobat 3D Help. Embedded PDF search index Embed a search index for a specific file directly within the PDF to speed up searching. See “Create and manage an index in a PDF” in Acrobat Help. PDF creation, assembly, and editing PDF from a blank page Create a blank PDF page and type text onto the page. Format text using formatting controls. Lock the document so that it can’t be edited. See “Create a PDF from a blank page” in Acrobat Help. PDF packages Assemble PDF files (including PDF forms) and non-PDF files into a single package. Files aren’t modified when packaged, so signatures and security options stay intact. Documents within a package are viewed in the same window. Easily add, delete, or extract documents from the package. Search and print the current or selected document, or all documents within the package. See “About PDF packages” in Acrobat Help. Combined files user interface Combine files into a single PDF with concatenated pages, or assemble files into a PDF package. Choose simple options to control the size of the resulting PDF. See “Combining different types of files” in Acrobat Help. Mail merge to PDF within Word Convert Word mail merge documents to PDF and send them out by email. See “Create PDFs from Word mail merges” in Acrobat Help. Excel worksheet enhancements (Windows) Select and order worksheets for conversion. Convert all links and bookmarks. Create PDF/A-compliant files. See “Application-specific PDFMaker settings” in Acrobat Help. PowerPoint presentation enhancements (Windows) Convert overlapping shapes and graphics, action buttons, action settings, and speaker notes. Convert backgrounds to a separate, nonprinting layer. Create PDF/A-compliant files. See “Application-specific PDFMaker settings” in Acrobat Help. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 25 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-26 CHAPTER 1 Getting started Email conversion enhancements Convert an email message or a complete mail folder to PDF from Lotus Notes. Create PDF packages of email from both Outlook and Lotus Notes. In Outlook on Windows, convert email archives to PDF packages, and automatically archive email on a schedule. See “Convert email messages to PDFs (Windows)”, “Migrate Outlook PDF archives to PDF packages (Windows)” and “Set up automatic email archiving (Windows)” in Acrobat Help. Scanning enhancements Scan to PDF or PDF/A from a broader range of scanners. Add metadata while scanning. Optimize a scanned PDF. See “Scan a paper document to PDF” in Acrobat Help. PDF/A-compliant files Create PDF/A-compliant files when scanning paper documents and when creating PDFs from Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Acrobat Distiller, and the Acrobat Preflight tool. Bates numbering Apply identifying labels to a batch of related documents—typically legal documents associated with a court case. Bates numbering appears as a header or footer on each page of each PDF in the batch. See “Add a Bates numbering header or footer” in Acrobat Help. Document examination Inspect PDFs for metadata, annotations, attachments, hidden data, form fields, hidden layers, or bookmarks. Remove some or all of the information. See “Examine a PDF for hidden content” in Acrobat Help. Headers, footers, watermarks, and backgrounds Save header, footer, watermark, and background options as named settings for reuse. Remove or update existing headers, footers, watermarks, and backgrounds. Shrink content to accommodate headers and footers. Preview changes in real time. Set underline text. See “Add and edit headers and footers” in Acrobat Help. Review and commenting Acrobat Connect meetings Access the real-time, webbased collaboration capabilities of Acrobat Connect (sold separately). Click the Start Meeting button to escalate from a document review to real-time communication with others over the Internet. Acrobat Connect uses Flash and a personal meeting room for screen sharing, audio and video conferencing, whiteboarding, and more. When you first click the Start Meeting button, you can create a free trial account. Each subsequent time, you go directly to your Acrobat Connect personal meeting room. (Acrobat Connect is not available in all languages.) See “Meetings” in Acrobat 3D Help. Shared reviews Initiate a review where comments are stored on a central server, allowing all participants to see comments in real time. No extra server software is needed. Shared reviews work with a folder on a network server, a Windows SharePoint workspace, or a web folder on a web server. Comments are automatically retrieved, even if Reader isn’t running and could be added even when you are disconnected from the network. Notifications alert users that there are new comments. Comments from reviewers outside the firewall can be merged into the shared review. Enable Reader users to participate. See “Start a shared review” in Acrobat Help. Review Tracker Provides details about all active reviews. For shared reviews, details include the number of comments from a reviewer, the review deadline, server status, unread reviews, and a summary of updated shared reviews. See “Tracking PDF reviews” in Acrobat 3D Help. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 26 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-27 Getting Started Guide Commenting and markup enhancements View and accurately place callout and cloud markups as you apply them. The callout leader automatically moves as you position the callout. Selected comments are highlighted for easier visibility when zoomed out. Rotate stamps, and select all tools from a single, integrated toolbar. See “Commenting” in Acrobat 3D Help. Forms Simple forms creation (Windows) Use a wizard to create PDF forms from templates, existing electronic documents, paper forms, or spreadsheet data. Customize forms with contact information and logos. Edit in Adobe LiveCycle Designer. See “Creating and editing forms” in Acrobat Help. PDF background artwork Import a PDF as background artwork on a form in LiveCycle Designer. Add form fields on top of the background. See LiveCycle Designer Help. Forms Tracker Track the forms you initiate or fill out. See “About Forms Tracker” in Acrobat Help. Export and compile form data Aggregate returned forms into a PDF package. Export the form data to a spreadsheet. See “Submitting forms” and “Export records from a PDF data set” in Acrobat Help. Form field recognition Automatically recognize form fields on non-interactive PDF documents and convert them to interactive fields that can be filled electronically. See “Creating new forms” in Acrobat Help. Reader-enabled rights Enable Reader 7.0 and 8.0 users to fill in, digitally sign, and locally save forms and other PDFs. See “Enable Reader users to save form data” in Acrobat Help. Digital signatures Roaming IDs Enroll in a signing service where the server holds your private key. Authenticate to the server from Acrobat and allow the document to be signed with your credentials stored on the server. See “Set up a roaming ID” in Acrobat 3D Help. Signature preview mode and conformance checker Before signing, view the document content as it will appear after eliminating transparency, scripts, fonts, and other dynamic content that can alter a document’s appearance. Acrobat 3Dautomatically runs the Document Integrity Checker, which now includes checking for Qualified Signatures conformance before entering signature preview mode. See “Sign in Preview Document mode” in Acrobat 3D Help. Certificate enhancements Predetermine the signing certificate. Configure the chain model for certificate validation. See “Sharing and managing certificates” in Acrobat 3D Help. Seed values Specify which choices a user can make when signing a document. See “Customizing signature properties using seed values” in Acrobat Help. Signatures in Reader Allow Reader users to draw a signature field. See “Before you certify a PDF” in Acrobat Help. Architecture, Engineering, and Construction Batch conversion/Direct conversion From AutoCAD, convert multiple AutoCAD files to multiple PDFs. Convert AutoCAD files to PDF with improved speed. See “Convert AutoCAD files to PDF (Windows)” in Acrobat Help. DWG/DWF support Convert AutoCAD DWF and DWG format files without installing AutoCAD. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 27 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMA-28 CHAPTER 1 Getting started 2D Measurement tool enhancements Measurement is recalculated if start or end points move. Measurements snap to lines, intersections, or corners. See “Measure the height, width, or area of objects” in Acrobat Help. 3D Computer Aided Design (CAD) Produce compact PDFs Adjust 3D conversion sett ings to create highly compressed, universally-accessible PDF files that are a fraction of the size of the original CAD file or assembly. See “About PRC and U3D conversion formats” in Acrobat Help. Import PMI Import and view geometric dimensioning and tolerancing specifications in the 3D model as Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) instead of sending a separate 2D drawing. Supported file formats include CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX, Pro/ENGINEER. See “View Product Manufacturing Information (PMI)” in Acrobat Help. Export geometry Export geometry to standard formats (IGES, STEP, ParaSolid, and VRML) for interoperability with Computer Aided Manufacturing (CAM) applications. See “Exporting geometry from 3D models” in Acrobat Help. Support for latest CAD applications Open the latest versions of most CAD file formats without installing the CAD application. See “About supported 3D file formats” in Acrobat Help. Legal Redaction tools Mark text, images, and sensitive areas for redaction. Permanently apply redaction. Modify the appearance of redaction marks, including color and codes. See “Redact sensitive content” in Acrobat Help. Search and redact From within the Search feature, mark some or all search results for redaction. See “Search and redact words” in Acrobat Help. Bates numbering Apply identifying labels to a batch of related documents—typically legal documents associated with a court case. Bates numbering appears as a header or footer on each page of each PDF in the batch. See “Add a Bates numbering header or footer” in Acrobat Help. Creative professional Color management improvements In Adobe Creative Suite, synchronize settings for on-screen color across the applications with a single click. See “Synchronize color settings across Adobe applications” in Acrobat Help. Shared transparency flattener presets Define flattener presets in one Adobe application, such as Acrobat, and then easily share those swatches with other applications, such as Illustrator and InDesign. See “Create a flattener preset” in Acrobat Help. Preflight Locate, modify, or remove PDF elements using customizable fixup profiles. Create an inventory of PDF content, including XMP metadata. Perform advanced inspections on Cos objects and fonts. Convert to and validate PDF/X-4 and PDF/A files. Edit droplet settings for automated preflight inspections. See “Correcting problem areas” and “Advanced inspections” in Acrobat Help. Booklet printing Print pages as a simple booklet, for example, 2-up, saddle-stitched. See “Print a booklet” in Acrobat Help. Metadata in documents and objects Maintain and access document and object-level metadata. See “Document properties and metadata” in Acrobat 3D Help. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 28 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 A-29 Getting Started Guide TouchUp Object tool enhancement See and change the color space of a selected object. Scale, rotate, or clip an object. See “Move or edit an object” in Acrobat Help. Additional new features FIPS mode Version 8.1 of Acrobat 3D provides a FIPS mode to restrict data protection to Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 approved algorithms using the RSABSAFE Crypto-C 2.0 encryption module with FIPS 140-2 validation certificate 608. See “Securing PDFs in FIPS mode” in Acrobat Help. Microsoft Windows Vista support Version 8.1 of Acrobat 3D supports Microsoft Windows Vista. Installing Acrobat on 64-bit versions of Microsoft Windows Version 8.1 of Acrobat 3D supports the 64- bit versions of Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows Vist a. Version Cue 2.0 Manage files and versions as a single user or in a small workgroup. Integrate with Adobe Bridge to manage files for your Creative Suite projects. See “Adobe Version Cue” in Acrobat Help. Digital Editions Read and organize eBooks and other publications with Adobe Digital Editions (a separate product). When you first click the Digital Editions menu item, you can download and install the Adobe Digital Editions software. After installation, choose Digital Editions to go directly to your Adobe Digital Editions bookshelf. See “Adobe Digital Editions” in Acrobat 3D Help. Printing over the Internet Print documents to a FedEx Kinko’s office in the United States. See “Print over the Internet” in Acrobat 3D Help. 2D Measurement tool enhancements Measurement is recalculated if start or end points move. Measurements snap to lines, intersections, or corners. See “Measure the height, width, or area of objects” in Acrobat 3D Help. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 29 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM3D_ML_GSG.book Page 30 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-1 Chapitre 1 : Prise en main Installation Configuration requise Pour connaître toutes les conditions système requises et les recommandations relatives à votre logiciel Adobe®, reportez-vous au fichier Lisez-moi fourni avec le logiciel. Installation du logiciel 1 Fermez toute autre application Adobe en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur. 2 Introduisez le disque d’installation dans le lecteur, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Remarque : Pour plus de détails, reportez-vous au fichier Lisez-moi accompagnant le logiciel. Activation du logiciel Les logiciels Adobe peuvent exploiter la technologie de gestion des licences afin de garantir le respect des conditions du contrat de licence. Le cas échéant, cette fonction vous invite à vérifier la licence de votre produit dans les 30 jours suivants sa première utilisation. Cette vérification est obligatoire. Vous serez peut-être invité à activer le logiciel. Le processus de vérification n’induit en aucun cas le recueil, la transmission ou l’utilisation d’informations relatives à l’identité des utilisateurs. Pour plus d’informations sur ce sujet, reportez-vous au fichier Lisez-moi de votre DVD d’installation ou visitez le site Web d’Adobe à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/activation_fr. 1 Si la boîte de dialogue d’activation n’est pas ouverte, choisissez Aide > Activation > Activer. 2 Suivez les instructions à l’écran. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez installer le logiciel sur un ordinateur différent, vous devez au préalable désactiver le logiciel sur votre ordinateur : choisissez pour ce faire Aide > Activation > Désactiver. Enregistrement Enregistrez votre produit afin de bénéficier, gratuitement, d’une aide à l’installation, de notifications de mises à jour, ainsi que d’autres services. Pour vous enregistrer, suivez les instructions affichées dans la boîte de dialogue d’enregistrement qui apparaît après l’installation et l’activation du logiciel. Si vous reportez l’enregistrement, vous pourrez effectuer cette procédure ultérieurement en sélectionnant Aide > Enregistrement. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 1 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-2 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Lisez-moi Le DVD d’installation contient le fichier Lisez-moi pour le logiciel. Ce fichier est aussi copié dans le dossier de l’application pendant l’installation du produit. Ouvrez le fichier pour prendre connaissance d’informations très importantes sur les sujets suivants : • Configuration système • Installation • Repérage • Licence électronique • Informations juridiques Utilisation de l’aide Adobe Ressources d’assistance d’Adobe La documentation de vos logiciels Adobe est disponible dans plusieurs formats. Aide en ligne et LiveDocs L’aide en ligne vous donne accès à l’ensemble de la documentation et du matériel didactique disponible au moment de la distribution du logiciel. Elle est disponible à partir du menu d’aide du logiciel Adobe. L’aide LiveDocs contient l’intégralité de l’aide en ligne, plus des mises à jour et des liens vers du matériel didactique supplémentaire disponible sur le Web. Pour certains produits, vous pouvez également ajouter des commentaires aux rubriques dans l’aide LiveDocs. L’aide au format LiveDocs est disponible dans le Centre de ressources d’aide d’Adobe à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/documentation_fr. La plupart des versions de l’aide en ligne et LiveDocs vous permettent d’effectuer une recherche dans les systèmes d’aide de plusieurs produits. Certaines rubriques peuvent également proposer des liens vers du contenu connexe sur le Web ou vers des rubriques d’aide d’un autre produit. Vous devez considérer le module d’aide comme une plate-forme d’accès vers du contenu supplémentaire et des communautés d’utilisateurs. La version la plus récente et la plus complète de l’aide est toujours disponible sur le Web. Rubriques Procédures Les rubriques Procédures offrent un aperçu des tâches les plus courantes. Pour obtenir plus de détails, cliquez sur le lien situé au bas de la rubrique Procédures afin d’afficher la rubrique d’aide correspondante. Documentation au format PDF L’aide intégrée au produit est également disponible au format Adobe PDF, qui convient parfaitement à l’impression. D’autres documents, tels que des guides d’installation et des livres blancs, peuvent également être fournis au format PDF. Tous les documents au format PDF sont disponibles par le biais du Centre de ressources d’aide d’Adobe à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/documentation_fr. Pour consulter la documentation PDF incluse avec le logiciel, accédez au dossier Documents sur le DVD d’installation ou de contenu. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 2 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-3 Guide de prise en main Documentation papier Des versions papier de l’aide intégrée au produit sont disponibles à l’achat sur Adobe Store, à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/store_fr. Vous y trouverez également des ouvrages édités par des partenaires d’Adobe. Un guide de l’utilisateur imprimé est livré avec tous les produits Adobe Creative Suite® 3, les produits Adobe autonomes étant quant à eux fournis avec un guide de prise en main imprimé. Utilisation du module d’aide du produit L’aide en ligne est accessible par le biais du menu Aide. Après avoir ouvert Adobe Help Viewer, vous pouvez accéder à l’aide des autres produits Adobe installés sur votre ordinateur. Les rubriques peuvent contenir des liens vers un contenu supplémentaire sur le Web. Si vous recherchez une expression, telle que « outil forme », placez-la entre guillemets afin de n’afficher que les rubriques contenant tous les mots de l’expression en question. Fonctions d’accessibilité L’aide d’Adobe est accessible aux personnes souffrant d’un handicap (mobilité réduite, cécité ou déficience visuelle). L’aide intégrée au produit prend en charge les fonctions d’accessibilité standard suivantes : • L’utilisateur peut modifier la taille du texte avec les commandes de menu contextuel standard (Microsoft® Windows®) et les commandes de menu standard (Apple Mac OS). • Les liens sont soulignés pour une identification aisée. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 3 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-4 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main • Si le texte d’un lien ne correspond pas au titre cible, ce dernier est indiqué dans l’attribut Titre de la balise d’ancrage. Par exemple, les liens Précédent et Suivant incluent le titre des rubriques précédente et suivante. • Le contenu prend en charge le mode à forts contrastes. • Les images sans légende présentent un texte de remplacement. • Chaque cadre est doté d’un titre indiquant son utilité. • Les balises HTML standard définissent la structure du contenu pour les outils de lecture d’écran ou de synthèse de la parole à partir du texte. • Les feuilles de st yle cont rôlent la mise en forme, d’où une absence totale de polices incorporées. Raccourcis clavier pour les commandes de barre d’outils de l’aide (Windows) Bouton Précédent Alt + Flèche Gauche Bouton Page suivante Alt + Flèche Droite Imprimer Ctrl+P Bouton A propos de Ctrl+I Menu Aide de Alt+touche Bas ou Alt+touche Haut pour consulter l’aide d’une autre application Raccourcis clavier de navigation dans l’aide (Windows) • Pour passer d’un panneau à un autre, appuyez sur Ctrl+Tab (vers l’avant) ou Maj+Ctrl+Tab (vers l’arrière). • Pour parcourir les liens soulignés dans un panneau, appuyez sur Tab (vers l’avant) ou Maj+Tab (vers l’arrière). • Pour activer un lien souligné, appuyez sur Entrée. • Pour modifier la taille du texte, appuyez sur Ctrl/Command + signe plus (+) ou Ctrl/Command + signe moins (-). Ressources Atelier vidéo Adobe L’atelier vidéo Adobe Creative Suite 3 propose plus de 200 vidéos de formation pour Adobe Creative Suite 3. Ces ateliers couvrent un large éventail de sujets à l’intention des professionnels de l’impression, du Web et de la vidéo. Vous pouvez utiliser l’atelier vidéo Adobe pour en apprendre davantage sur le produit Creative Suite 3. De nombreuses vidéos vous expliquent comment utiliser les applications Adobe de manière combinée. Lorsque vous lancez l’atelier vidéo Adobe, vous choisissez les produits que vous voulez apprendre et les sujets que vous voulez voir. Des informations détaillées sont disponibles pour chaque vidéo afin de vous aider et diriger votre apprentissage. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 4 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-5 Guide de prise en main Communauté de présentateurs Avec cette nouvelle version, Adobe Systems invite les membres de la communauté Adobe à partager leurs compétences et leurs connaissances. Adobe et Lynda.com mettent à votre disposition des didacticiels, trucs et astuces proposés par des concepteurs et développeurs de renom parmi lesquels Joseph Lowery, Katrin Eismann et Chris Georgenes. Des experts Adobe, tels que Lynn Grillo, Greg Rewis et Russell Brown, vous prodigueront également de précieux conseils. Au total, pas moins de 30 experts partageront leurs connaissances avec vous ! 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 5 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-6 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Didacticiels et fichiers source L’Atelier vidéo Adobe propose des formations pour les utilisateurs débutants et expérimentés. Vous y trouverez également des vidéos concernant les nouvelles fonctions et les techniques essentielles. Chaque vidéo porte sur un seul sujet et dure généralement entre 3 et 5 minutes. La plupart des vidéos s’accompagnent d’un didacticiel illustré et de fichiers source. Vous pourrez ainsi imprimer les procédures détaillées et exécuter seul le didacticiel. Utilisation de l’atelier vidéo Adobe Pour accéder à l’Atelier vidéo Adobe, utilisez le DVD inclus dans votre produit Creative Suite 3. Il est également disponible en ligne à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials_fr. Adobe s’engage à ajouter régulièrement de nouvelles vidéos à son atelier vidéo en ligne. Nous vous invitons donc à vous enregistrer pour découvrir toutes les nouveautés. Vidéos Acrobat L’atelier vidéo Adobe couvre un large éventail de sujets concernant Adobe Acrobat®. En voici un aperçu : • Définition de l’espace de travail et des barres de tâches • Combinaison de fichiers en documents PDF • Conversion de fichiers PDF • Modification de fichiers PDF • Insertion de commentaires dans les fichiers PDF • Travail dans le cadre de révisions partagées • Révision et résumé de commentaires • Ajout de protection aux formulaires • Collaboration en temps réel avec Acrobat Connect™ • Contrôle en amont des fichiers • Impression de documents Pour accéder aux dictaticiels vidéo d’Adobe Creative Suite 3, visitez l’atelier vidéo Adobe à l’adresse suivante : www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials_fr. Extras Vous avez accès à de très nombreuses ressources afin de vous aider à tirer le meilleur parti possible de votre logiciel Adobe. Certaines des ressources sont installées sur votre ordinateur pendant l’installation ; le cas échéant, le contenu supplémentaire est inclus sur le DVD d’installation ou de contenu. Des suppléments particulièrement intéressants sont également proposés en ligne par la communauté Adobe Exchange, à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/exchange_fr. Ressources installées Lors de l’installation du logiciel, plusieurs ressources sont placées dans votre dossier d’application. Pour visualiser ces fichiers, accédez au dossier correspondant sur votre ordinateur. Contenu du disque Le DVD fourni avec le produit peut contenir des ressources supplémentaires à utiliser avec le logiciel, par exemple des paramètres prédéfinis, des modules externes, une version PDF de l’aide, des informations techniques et d’autres documents. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 6 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-7 Guide de prise en main Adobe Exchange Vous en voulez plus ? Dans ce cas, rendez-vous sur www.adobe.com/go/exchange_fr, une communauté en ligne où les utilisateurs téléchargent et échangent, à titre gracieux, des milliers d’actions, extensions, plug-ins et autres éléments utilisables avec les produits Adobe. Adobe Design Center Adobe Design Center met à votre disposition des articles, modèles et instructions proposés par des experts de l’industrie, des concepteurs de renom et des partenaires d’édition d’Adobe. Du nouveau contenu est ajouté tous les mois. Outre des centaines de didacticiels axés sur les logiciels de conception, vous y trouverez des conseils et techniques sous la forme de vidéos, de didacticiels HTML et d’extraits de chapitres de livre. Les idées nouvelles sont au cœur même de Think Tank, Dialog Box et Gallery : • Les articles Think Tank analysent la façon dont les concepteurs contemporains embrassent la technologie et ce que leurs expériences signifient pour la création, les outils de création et la société en général. • Dans Dialog Box, des experts partagent leurs idées nouvelles en termes d’animations et de création numérique. • Dans Gallery, vous découvrirez ce que les artistes entendent par conception en mouvement. Rendez-vous sur Adobe Design Center à l’adresse www.adobe.com/fr/designcenter. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 7 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-8 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Centre des développeurs Adobe Le Centre des développeurs Adobe propose des échantillons, des didacticiels, des articles et diverses ressources à l’usage des développeurs qui utilisent des produits Adobe pour élaborer, entre autres projets, du contenu mobile, des applications Internet et des sites Web sophistiqués. Ce centre contient également des ressources à l’intention des développeurs de plug-ins pour produits Adobe. Outre des échantillons de code et des didacticiels, vous y trouverez des flux RSS, des séminaires en ligne, des kits SDK, des guides de création de scripts, ainsi que bien d’autres ressources techniques. Rendez-vous sur le Centre des développeurs Adobe à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/developer_fr. Support technique Consultez le site Web d’assistance technique d’Adobe (www.adobe.com/fr/support) pour obtenir des informations de dépannage pour votre produit et en savoir plus sur les options d’assistance technique gratuites et payantes. Suivez le lien Formation pour accéder à des manuels Adobe Press, à un éventail de ressources de formation, à des programmes de certification de logiciels d’Adobe, etc. Téléchargements Rendez-vous à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/downloads_fr pour obtenir gratuitement des mises à jour, des versions d’essai et d’autres logiciels utiles. Adobe Store (www.adobe.com/go/store_fr) vous donne également accès à des milliers de plug-ins de développeurs tiers, ce 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 8 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-9 Guide de prise en main qui vous aide à automatiser des tâches, personnaliser des flux de production, créer des effets spéciaux de qualité professionnelle et bien d’autres choses encore. Adobe Labs Adobe Labs vous permet d’utiliser et d’évaluer des technologies nouvelles et émergentes, ainsi que des produits Adobe. Adobe Labs vous donne accès à un éventail de ressources : • Préversions de logiciels et technologies à venir • Echantillons de code et méthodes conseillées pour accélérer votre apprentissage • Préversions de la documentation technique et produit • Forums, contenu Wikipédia et autres ressources de collaboration pour vous aider à interagir avec des développeurs qui partagent vos opinions Adobe Labs favorise la mise en place d’un processus de développement de logiciels axé sur la collaboration. Dans cet environnement, les clients utilisant de nouveaux produits et technologies deviennent rapidement productifs. Adobe Labs est également un forum de commentaires, que l’équipe de développement Adobe utilise pour créer des logiciels correspondant aux besoins et aux attentes de la communauté. Visitez Adobe Labs à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/labs_fr. Communautés d’utilisateurs Les communautés d’utilisateurs comprennent des forums, des blogs et d’autres moyens leur permettant de partager des technologies, des outils et des informations. Les utilisateurs peuvent poser des questions afin de savoir comment les autres utilisateurs exploitent au mieux leur logiciel. Les forums utilisateur sont disponibles en anglais, français, allemand et japonais ; les blogs sont rédigés dans un large éventail de langues. Pour participer à des forums ou à des blogs, rendezvous à l’adresse www.adobe.com/fr/communities. Flux de production Le logiciel Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 propose de puissants outils capables de prendre en charge de nombreux aspects de vos processus de documentation. • Créez des fichiers Adobe PDF à partir de différentes applications. • Assemblez des fichiers provenant de diverses sources en un lot PDF. • Convertissez des fichiers PDF en d’autres formats, tels que Word, HTML ou JPG. • Restreignez l’accès à vos documents PDF à l’aide de diverses fonctions de protection. • Approuvez un document PDF en lui apposant une signature numérique ou un certificat. • Organisez des révisions à l’aide des nombreux outils de révision et de commentaire. • Créez des formulaires à remplir, diffusez-les en toute sécurité et recueillez les données indiquées dans les champs. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 9 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-10 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Les rubriques Mise en route suivantes vous offriront une vue d’ensemble des possibilités qu’offre Acrobat 3D. Pour plus de détails sur une rubrique, consultez l’Aide. Création de fichiers PDF Les documents PDF conservent l’aspect des originaux ; leur qualité n’est pas altérée au cours de la conversion. En outre, étant donné que les documents PDF peuvent être visualisés sous Windows, Mac OS ou UNIX à l’aide du logiciel gratuit Adobe Reader®, il est inutile de disposer de l’application source pour afficher et imprimer ces documents. Vous pouvez créer un document PDF au sein d’Acrobat 3D ou à partir de diverses applications de création. Par exemple, convertissez au format PDF un message électronique Outlook traitant des contraintes d’un projet, puis joignez-le à un document PDF présentant les caractéristiques et le planning de ce projet. Il se peut également que vos documents personnels soient uniquement disponibles sur papier. Vous pouvez facilement créer un fichier PDF à partir de chacun de ces documents imprimés en vue de créer un système de ressources humaines en ligne. Convertissez votre document original (à gauche) au format Adobe PDF (au centre), puis ajoutez des signets, des commentaires ou autres dans Acrobat (à droite). Création à partir d’un fichier Dans la plupart des cas, pour créer un fichier PDF dans Acrobat, l’application qui a servi à créer le fichier d’origine doit être installée sur le système. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF , puis choisissez A partir d’un fichier. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier à convertir, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 10 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-11 Guide de prise en main L’application de création s’ouvre automatiquement ou une boîte de dialogue de progression s’affiche. Si le format du fichier n’est pas pris en charge, un message s’affiche pour vous indiquer que la conversion au format PDF est impossible. Création à partir d’un document papier A l’aide d’Acrobat 3D et d’un scanner, vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF directement à partir d’un document papier. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF , puis choisissez A partir d’un scanner. 2 Sélectionnez l’entrée et la sortie, et les options de document dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat Scan, puis cliquez sur Numériser. 3 Si vous créez un nouveau fichier PDF, précisez son nom et son emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 4 Sélectionnez Numériser davantage de pages ou Numérisation terminée. Création à partir d’une page Web Vous pouvez télécharger et convertir des pages Web à partir du premier niveau spécifié par un URL, ou du nombre de niveaux inférieurs de votre choix. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF , puis choisissez A partir d’une page Web. 2 Saisissez l’URL dans la zone de texte. (Cliquez sur Parcourir pour convertir une page Web que vous avez déjà téléchargée.) 3 Spécifiez le nombre de niveaux à télécharger et l’emplacement source, puis cliquez sur Créer. Création de A à Z Vous avez la possibilité de créer de petits fichiers PDF modifiables dans Acrobat 3D. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d’une page vierge. 2 Cliquez dans le document et commencez la saisie. Modifiez les attributs de texte à l’aide des options de la barre d’outils Nouveau document. 3 Enregistrez le document. 4 Pour poursuivre la modification, choisissez Document > Reprendre la modification. Pour convertir le fichier PDF de manière à empêcher toute modification ultérieure, choisissez Document > Empêcher les modifications ultérieures. Création à partir de Word Une fois que vous avez installé Acrobat 3D, la barre d’outils Acrobat PDFMaker est ajoutée à Word. Dans Word 2007 pour Windows, accédez aux options PDFMaker via le ruban Acrobat. 1 Dans Word, ouvrez le fichier à convertir. 2 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • (Word 2007 pour Windows) Cliquez sur Acrobat, puis cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF . • (Autres versions de Word) Cliquez sur Convertir au format Adobe PDF . 3 Précisez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 4 (Mac OS uniquement) Cliquez sur Afficher le fichier ou Terminer. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 11 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-12 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Vous pouvez également convertir un fichier au format PDF, puis l’envoyer par messagerie en cliquant sur le bouton Créer et envoyer en révision (Office 2007) ou Envoyer en révision (autres versions d’Office). Création à partir d’Outlook (Windows) Une fois que vous avez installé Acrobat 3D, la barre d’outils Acrobat PDFMaker est ajoutée à Outlook. 1 Sélectionnez les messages électroniques voulus et cliquez sur Créer un fichier PDF à partir des messages sélectionnés . 2 Précisez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Les messages sélectionnés sont convertis en un lot PDF ou un fichier PDF fusionné, selon les paramètres de conversion choisis. Pour convertir des dossiers de messages électroniques, sélectionnez les dossiers en question et cliquez sur Créer un fichier Adobe PDF à partir des dossiers . Vous pouvez également archiver automatiquement les messages et dossiers de messagerie. Création à partir de Lotus Notes (Windows) Une fois que vous avez installé Acrobat 3D, la barre d’outils Acrobat PDFMaker est ajoutée à Lotus Notes et de nouvelles commandes apparaissent dans le menu Actions. 1 Sélectionnez les messages électroniques voulus et cliquez sur Convertir les messages sélectionnés au format Adobe PDF . 2 Précisez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Les messages sont convertis en un lot PDF ou un fichier PDF fusionné, selon les paramètres de conversion choisis. Vous pouvez convertir un dossier entier en un lot PDF en cliquant sur Convertir le dossier sélectionné en Adobe PDF . Création à partir d’Internet Explorer (Windows) Vous p ouvez conver t ir au for mat PDF une page Web entière ou une sélection effectuée sur la page. 1 Dans Internet Explorer, ouvrez la page Web à convertir. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur pour sélectionner le texte et les images à convertir. 3 Cliquez sur Convertir la page Web au format PDF . 4 Précisez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez également convertir une ou plusieurs pages Web, voire des sites Web entiers, à partir d’Acrobat 3D. Création à l’aide de l’imprimante Adobe PDF Dans de nombreuses applications, vous pouvez utiliser la commande d’impression et l’imprimante Adobe PDF pour convertir un fichier au format PDF. 1 Ouvrez le fichier à convertir, puis choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF dans la liste des imprimantes, puis imprimez le fichier. 3 Si vous y êtes invité, indiquez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez également modifier le paramétrage par défaut de l’imprimante Adobe PDF ou créer des paramètres personnalisés. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 12 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-13 Guide de prise en main Collaboration sur des conceptions 3D Partagez vos idées de conception 3D en les convertissant en fichiers PDF sécurisés pouvant être commentés par d’autres utilisateurs dans la version gratuite d’Adobe Reader. Lancez une révision par courrier électronique pour obtenir des commentaires de vos collaborateurs. L’assistant de révision par messagerie électronique permet aux utilisateurs de Reader d’effectuer des commentaires par défaut. Vous pouvez également lancer une réunion Acrobat Connect qui vous permet d’effectuer des démonstrations de conceptions 3D et de les commenter sur votre bureau en temps réel. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez protéger votre fichier PDF 3D, effectuez cette opération avant de commencer la révision. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier les propriétés de sécurité dans un fichier PDF Reader. Les collaborateurs peuvent explorer tous les aspects du modèle 3D, des structures internes masquées aux animations décomposées. Ils peuvent faire tourner, couper et mesurer les pièces tout en ajoutant leurs commentaires dans des notes, des dessins et d’autres annotations. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 13 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-14 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Conversion d’un fichier 3D au format PDF Convertissez tout fichier 3D pris en charge au format PDF. (Pour obtenir une liste des formats pris en charge, sélectionnez Edition > Préférences, puis sélectionnez Conversion au format PDF à gauche dans la colonne Catégories.) 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF de la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez A partir d’un fichier. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier de CAO 3D que vous souhaitez convertir. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres prédéfinis ou spécifiez les paramètres de votre choix. Ajout de commentaires à un modèle 3D En ajoutant des commentaires, vous créez une nouvelle vue associée à ces commentaires. 1 Sélectionnez un outil sur la barre d’outils Commentaires et annotations. 2 Cliquez sur le modèle 3D pour ajouter un commentaire et créer une nouvelle vue dans l’arborescence du modèle. Pour ajouter des commentaires à une vue de commentaire, sélectionnez cette vue dans l’arborescence du modèle, puis cliquez sur le modèle. Démarrage d’une réunion Si vous avez un compte Adobe Acrobat Connect, vous pouvez démarrer une réunion pour réviser des documents PDF dans un navigateur Web. Vous pouvez également créer un compte d’évaluation dans ce but. Remarque : Acrobat Connect n’est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer la réunion sur la barre d’outils Tâches. 2 Cliquez sur Connexion, puis saisissez l’URL, votre identifiant et votre mot de passe pour la réunion. (Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Créer un compte d’évaluation et suivre les instructions affichées.) 3 Cliquez sur Envoyer une invitation par messagerie électronique ou sur Partager mon écran. Intéropérabilité CAO, FAO et IAO De la planche à dessin à l’usine de fabrication, le document PDF peut simplifier la gestion du flux des informations de conception CAO, la fabrication et l’ingéniérie (CAO, FAO et IAO). Par exemple, vous pouvez rapidement convertir tout un assemblage en fichier PDF à une fraction de la taille du fichier d’origine tout en conservant la tolérance et le dimensionnement géométrique ainsi que les autre spécifications relatives au produit. En utilisant Acrobat 3D, les fabricants et les fournisseurs peuvent ouvrir virtuellement tout fichier de CAO 3D sans installer l’application CAO d’origine ou un convertisseur CAO. Vous pouvez importer et visualiser les informations PMI (Import and view Product Manufacturing Information) à partir des fichiers CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX et Pro/ENGINEER. Lorsque la conception est finalisée, exportez la 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 14 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-15 Guide de prise en main géométrie dans un format de fichier standard qui peut être réutilisé dans des applications FAO pour couper, contruire et assembler les pièces. Affichage des informations de produit pour un modèle 3D Vous pouvez afficher les informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) dans l’arborescence du modèle et dans le modèle 3D si vous l’avez importé au cours de la conversion au format PDF. 1 Cliquez sur le modèle 3D, puis cliquez sur l’icône d’arborescence du modèle dans la barre d’outils 3D. 2 Dans l’arborescence du modèle, cliquez sur chacune des vues pour visualiser les informations PMI associées à une vue en particulier. Exportation de la géométrie à partir d’un modèle 3D Si la géométrie a été retenue au cours de la conversion, vous pouvez l’exporter aux formats IGES, STEP, VRML ou ParaSolid, pouvant être lus par la plupart des applications CAE et CAM. 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle 3D et sélectionnez Exporter les données. 2 Sélectionnez un type de fichier et cliquez sur Paramètres pour spécifier les options concernant ce type de fichier. Combinaison de fichiers Combinez des fichiers issus de sources diverses en un seul document PDF fusionné ou en un lot PDF assemblé de fichiers apparentés. Vous pouvez par exemple réunir des brochures, des présentations, des feuilles de calcul et des contrats en une seule proposition commerciale cohérente. Si vous fusionnez des fichiers en un seul fichier PDF, vous pouvez ensuite y insérer des éléments unificateurs visant à homogénéiser le document résultant. Ajoutez par exemple un en-tête ou un pied de page au fichier créé. Renumérotez les pages de manière que la numérotation indiquée sur la barre de navigation soit logique sur l’ensemble des fichiers fusionnés. Autre possibilité, vous pouvez faire pivoter, supprimer et remplacer des pages selon vos besoins afin de donner un aspect homogène au document et de tenir celui-ci à jour. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 15 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-16 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Fusionnez des documents issus de diverses applications en un seul document Adobe PDF. Création d’un fichier PDF à partir de plusieurs fichiers Vous pouvez facilement fusionner différents types de fichiers en un seul document PDF. 1 Cliquez sur Combiner des fichiers , puis sur Ajouter les fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à combiner, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers. 3 Organisez les fichiers dans l’ordre souhaité, puis choisissez une option de taille de fichier et paramètre de conversion. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant, sélectionnez Fusionner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Créer. Au lieu de fusionner des fichiers, vous pouvez créer un lot PDF à partir de fichiers. Assemblage de fichiers PDF dans un lot Un lot PDF permet d’assembler des informations connexes dans un seul document PDF tout en conservant l’intégralité de chacun des fichiers PDF qui le composent. 1 Cliquez sur Combiner des fichiers , puis sur Ajouter les fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez les fichiers à combiner, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers. 3 Organisez les fichiers dans l’ordre souhaité, puis choisissez une option de taille de fichier et paramètre de conversion. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant, sélectionnez Assembler les fichiers dans un lot PDF, puis cliquez sur Créer. Modification de la liste des fichiers à combiner Lorsque vous combinez des fichiers, vous pouvez organiser le jeu de fichiers de différentes manières. 1 Cliquez sur Combiner des fichiers puis sur Ajouter des fichiers, et ajoutez les fichiers voulus. 2 Pour modifier la liste des fichiers ou supprimer un fichier de cette liste, sélectionnez un fichier et effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Monter ou sur Descendre ou faites glisser le fichier vers une autre position dans la liste. • Cliquez sur Sélectionner les pages pour inclure un sous-groupe de pages. (Le nom du bouton varie selon le type de fichier.) • Cliquez sur Supprimer ou appuyez sur la touche Suppr. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 16 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-17 Guide de prise en main Ajout d’en-têtes et de pieds de page Il est possible d’ajouter un même en-tête et un même pied de page à toutes les pages d’un document PDF ou d’appliquer des en-têtes et pieds de page différents à certaines pages. 1 Choisissez Document > En-tête et pied de page > Ajouter. Si un message s’affiche, cliquez sur Ajouter. 2 Définissez les paramètres de police et de marge. 3 Dans les zones de texte de l’en-tête et du pied de page, saisissez le texte souhaité. Cliquez sur les boutons situés sous ces zones pour insérer un numéro de page ou une date. Vous pouvez enregistrer les paramètres d’en-tête et de pied de page pour les réutiliser ultérieurement. Renumérotation des pages Lorsque vous renumérotez les pages, seuls les numéros qui apparaissent sur le panneau Pages et sur la barre d’outils sont pris en compte. Pour modifier les numéros de page qui apparaissent sur le document, ajoutez un en-tête ou un pied de page. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages , puis choisissez Numéroter des pages dans le menu Options. 2 Spécifiez les pages auxquelles la numérotation doit s’appliquer. 3 Spécifiez le style de numérotation, le préfixe, s’il y a lieu, et le numéro de début. Vous pouvez également reprendre le type de numérotation de la section précédente. Rotation des pages Vous avez la possibilité de faire pivoter la totalité ou une partie des pages d’un document PDF. 1 Choisissez Document > Pivoter des pages. 2 Précisez le sens de rotation et l’étendue des pages. 3 Choisissez les options souhaitées dans les menus de rotation. Pour appliquer une rotation temporaire à une page, choisissez Affichage > Rotation > Horaire ou Antihoraire. Suppression de pages Après avoir combiné des fichiers, vous pouvez supprimer les pages non souhaitées ou vierges. 1 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le bouton Pages du navigateur et sélectionnez les pages à supprimer. 2 Choisissez Document > Supprimer des pages. 3 Cliquez sur Sélectionnées pour supprimer les pages sélectionnées, ou sur De et précisez une étendue. Pour conserver une copie du document PDF d’origine, veillez à enregistrer le nouveau document à l’aide de l’option Enregistrer sous plutôt qu’avec l’option Enregistrer. Remplacement de pages Pour mettre rapidement à jour un document PDF, il est possible de remplacer des pages précises. 1 Choisissez Document > Remplacer des pages. 2 Sélectionnez le document qui contient les pages de remplacement, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 17 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-18 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main 3 Sous Pages d’origine, indiquez les pages à remplacer. Sous Pages de remplacement, indiquez la première page de remplacement. Les éléments interactifs, tels que les liens et les signets, associés aux pages d’origine sont conservés. Exportation Si vous n’avez pas accès au fichier qui a servi à créer un document PDF, vous pouvez convertir ce dernier en un format autorisant les modifications. Vous pouvez également sélectionner du texte et des images pour les réutiliser dans d’autres documents. Vous avez aussi la possibilité d’extraire des pages et de les enregistrer dans un nouveau document PDF. Par exemple, enregistrez une brochure au format HTML pour la mettre à disposition sur le site Web de votre société. A partir d’un document interne volumineux, extrayez les quelques pages que vous souhaitez remettre à des clients. Il est très facile de recycler des images et du texte issus tirés de spécifications de conception en les copiant simplement dans un document Word, Photoshop ou InDesign. Exportation vers Word Si vous n’avez pas le fichier à partir duquel un document PDF a été créé, vous pouvez enregistrer ce dernier en tant que document Word, puis le modifier dans cette application. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Exporter sur la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Document Word. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour définir les options de conversion. Remarque : L’e n r e g i s t r e m e n t d ’u n f i c h i e r P D F a u format Word ne produit pas un fichier équivalent à un document créé dans Word, certaines informations de codage risquent en effet d’être perdues. Exportation au format HTML ou XML Pour faciliter l’utilisation d’un fichier PDF sur le Web, il vous suffit de convertir le fichier au format HTML ou XML. 1 Cliquez sur Exporter sur la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Page Web HTML ou XML 1.0. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour définir les options de conversion. Pour enregistrer un fichier PDF au format HTML 3.2, cliquez sur Exporter et choisissez Autres formats > HTML 3.2. Exportation au format texte Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier PDF en texte enrichi (RTF), accessible ou brut. Le format RTF permet de conserver la plus grande partie du formatage. Le texte accessible préserve les éléments tels que les commentaires, les champs de formulaire ou le texte de remplacement. 1 Cliquez sur Exporter sur la barre d’outils Tâches, choisissez Autres formats, puis choisissez le format texte voulu 2 Si vous enregistrez en RTF ou texte brut, cliquez sur Paramètres pour régler les paramètres de conversion. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 18 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-19 Guide de prise en main Sélection et copie de texte Il est possible de copier des mots, des lignes ou des colonnes de texte à partir d’un fichier PDF. 1 A l’aide de l’outil Sélection , effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur sur le texte à sélectionner. • Cliquez deux fois pour sélectionner un mot, trois fois pour sélectionner une ligne de texte. 2 Placez le pointeur sur l’icône qui s’affiche en regard du texte sélectionné, puis choisissez une option dans le menu contextuel. Si la sélection de texte est impossible, il s’agit sans doute d’une image ou d’un document numérisé. Sélection et copie d’une image Vous pouvez copier une image dans le Presse-papiers ou dans une autre application à partir d’un fichier PDF, ou enregistrer cette image dans un fichier. 1 A l’aide de l’outil Sélection , cliquez sur une image, ou faites glisser une partie de l’image une fois que le pointeur s’est transformé en une icône de viseur. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser l’image dans un document ouvert dans l’application cible. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris ou en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, puis choisissez Copier l’image ou Enregistrer l’image sous. Instantané d’une page L’outil Instantané permet de copier l’ensemble du contenu sélectionné. Le texte et les images sont tous deux copiés sous la forme d’une image. 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Instantané. 2 Faites glisser sur la page afin de sélectionner le contenu ou cliquez pour copier toute la page. Celui-ci est copié dans le Presse-papiers lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris. Extraction d’une page Les pages extraites sont enregistrées dans un nouveau fichier PDF. 1 Choisissez Document > Extraire des pages. 2 Spécifiez l’intervalle de pages à extraire. 3 Indiquez si vous souhaitez supprimer les pages après leur extraction. 4 Pour enregistrer les pages extraites dans des fichiers distincts plutôt qu’au sein d’un même fichier PDF, choisissez Extraire les pages sous forme de fichiers distincts. Tous les liens, commentaires et champs de formulaires des pages extraites le sont également, mais pas les signets ni les articles. Protection Vous pouvez utiliser le chiffrement par mot de passe ou par certificat, de même que des stratégies serveur, pour renforcer le contrôle d’accès à vos documents PDF. Ces fonctions de protection vous permettent de restreindre les actions que des tiers peuvent exécuter et visualiser dans les fichiers PDF dont vous êtes l’auteur. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 19 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-20 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Créez par exemple des fichiers en lecture seule, pour une diffusion sur le Web. Limitez l’accès aux fichiers que vous envoyez en révision de manière que seul l’ajout de commentaires soit permis. Vous avez la possibilité de biffer du contenu confidentiel dans un condensé juridique ou de supprimer des informations personnelles d’un document PDF avant de le mettre à la disposition du public. Recherche d’informations masquées dans un fichier PDF Avant de mettre un fichier PDF à disposition d’autres utilisateurs, il peut être utile de supprimer des informations relatives à l’historique du document ou des éléments personnels, tels que les métadonnées qui vous identifient comme l’auteur. 1 Choisissez Document > Examiner le document. 2 Sélectionnez les éléments à supprimer du fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Supprimer tous les éléments sélectionnés. 3 Enregistrez le document sous un nouveau nom. Vous pouvez également effectuer cette recherche d’informations à la fin du processus de biffure. Biffure du contenu confidentiel L’outil Biffure permet de supprimer le contenu confidentiel d’un fichier PDF. Important : Enregistrez une copie du fichier PDF avant d’appliquer les biffures. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d’outils > Biffure. 2 Cliquez sur Repérer les biffures , puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez deux fois sur un mot ou une image. • Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur sur le texte à sélectionner. • Cliquez puis sélectionnez une zone de la page en maintenant la touche Ctrl/Contrôle enfoncée. 3 Cliquez sur Appliquer les biffures . Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez rechercher des informations masquées et les supprimer. L’option Rechercher et biffer permet de supprimer toutes les instances d’une chaîne recherchée. Ajout d’un mot de passe à un document Il est possible de restreindre l’accès à un document PDF en lui ajoutant un mot de passe d’ouverture. Important : Il est impossible d’ouvrir le fichier PDF si vous oubliez le mot de passe. 1 Cliquez sur Protection sur la barre d’outils, puis choisissez Chiffrement par mot de passe. 2 Sélectionnez Exiger un mot de passe pour l’ouverture du document, puis saisissez le mot de passe (en tenant compte des minuscules et majuscules) dans la zone de texte. Si le fichier PDF est déjà protégé, il peut être nécessaire de fournir le mot de passe d’accès aux droits afin de modifier les paramètres de protection. Prévention de la modification d’un fichier PDF Les restrictions de protection vous permettent d’empêcher d’autres utilisateurs de modifier le fichier PDF. 1 Cliquez sur Protection sur la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Chiffrement par mot de passe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 20 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-21 Guide de prise en main 2 Sélectionnez Restreindre la modification et l’impression du document, puis saisissez le mot de passe d’accès aux droits. 3 Choisissez une option dans le menu Modifications autorisées. Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation d’autres méthodes de protection pour restreindre l’accès au fichier, reportez-vous à l’aide. Création de pièces jointes protégées Pour ajouter une protection à un fichier PDF, vous pouvez l’incorporer dans une enveloppe chiffrée, ou enveloppe sécurisée, et l’envoyer en pièce jointe à un message électronique. 1 Cliquez sur Protection et choisissez Créer une enveloppe sécurisée. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter le fichier à envoyer et sélectionnez les documents voulus. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les instructions à l’écran pour créer l’enveloppe sécurisée. Les destinataires peuvent extraire les documents chiffrés puis les enregistrer. Une fois enregistrés, les documents ne sont plus chiffrés. Protection d’un fichier PDF à l’aide d’une stratégie Pour appliquer rapidement les options de sécurité, utilisez soit une stratégie utilisateur que vous créez, soit une stratégie d’entreprise créée par un administrateur d’Adobe LiveCycle Policy Server partagée et par un groupe d’utilisateurs. Deux stratégies sont proposées dans Acrobat 3D. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d’outils Tâches et choisissez l’une des stratégies répertoriées en haut du menu. 2 Cliquez sur Oui et modifiez les paramètres de protection selon vos besoins. Création d’une stratégie de protection utilisateur Les stratégies de protection facilitent l’application d’options de protection identiques à plusieurs documents PDF. Les stratégies de protection concernent le chiffrement, les paramètres de protection et des informations relatives aux utilisateurs autorisés à ouvrir les fichiers PDF ou à modifier les paramètres de protection. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d’outils, puis choisissez Gérer les stratégies de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Créer, puis sélectionnez le type de protection souhaité. 3 Cliquez sur Suivant, puis suivez les instructions à l’écran pour configurer la stratégie, et choisissez les options de protection appropriées. Signer L’apposition d’une signature numérique sur un document PDF est très semblable à la signature d’un document papier. Une signature numérique vous permet par exemple d’indiquer que vous approuvez le contenu d’un document, que vous avez révisé le document ou que vous êtes en accord avec les points qu’il présente. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 21 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-22 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main En outre, l’apposition d’une signature numérique rend possible le suivi des modifications apportées au document PDF. Pour renforcer la protection d’un document PDF, vous pouvez certifier ce fichier ; les destinataires sont alors assurés que le document n’a pas été modifié. Enfin, il est possible de vérifier la validité des signatures numériques. Apposez une signature au document PDF pour indiquer que vous l’avez lu ou pour en certifier le contenu. A. Signature de certification B. Signature numérique Création d’une identification numérique autosignée Une identification numérique est indispensable si vous souhaitez signer des documents et mettre en place une protection par certificat. Les identifications numériques autosignées créées dans Acrobat 3D peuvent s’avérer intéressantes dans de nombreuses situations. Pour plus de détails sur l’acquisition d’une identification numérique auprès des partenaires en sécurité d’Adobe, visitez le site Web d’Adobe. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Options de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques et cliquez sur Ajouter une identification numérique. 3 Sélectionnez Créer une ID numérique autosignée à utiliser avec Acrobat. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour configurer votre identification numérique autosignée. Enregistrement d’une identification numérique Vous devez enregistrer votre identification numérique dans Acrobat 3D avant de pouvoir l’utiliser. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Options de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques et cliquez sur Ajouter une identification numérique. 3 Sélectionnez Rechercher un fichier d’ID numérique existant. 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour sélectionner le fichier d’identification numérique, saisir votre mot de passe et enregistrer l’identification. Vous pouvez créer des identifications numériques autosignées dans Acrobat 3D. Ou, pour plus de détails sur l’acquisition d’une identification numérique auprès des partenaires en sécurité d’Adobe, visitez le site Web d’Adobe. A B 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 22 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-23 Guide de prise en main Partage d’un certificat L’identification numérique comprend un certificat qui permet aux autres utilisateurs de valider votre signature et de chiffrer des documents pour vous. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Options de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. 3 Sélectionnez l’identification à partager, puis cliquez sur Exporter . 4 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour envoyer le certificat par messagerie électronique ou l’enregistrer dans un fichier. Si vous faites appel à une méthode de protection tierce, il n’est généralement pas nécessaire de partager votre certificat avec d’autres utilisateurs. Création d’un aspect de signature Vous pouvez modifier l’apparence de votre signature numérique. Il est notamment possible d’y inclure votre signature manuscrite numérisée. 1 (Facultatif) Enregistrez l’image souhaitée sur une page indépendante, puis convertissez cette page au format PDF. 2 Choisissez Edition > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat 3D (Mac OS) > Préférences, puis sélectionnez Protection. 3 Cliquez sur Créer et entrez un titre. 4 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Image importée, cliquez sur Fichier et choisissez le fichier désiré. 5 Spécifiez les options voulues. Signature d’un fichier PDF Indiquez votre approbation au moyen d’une signature numérique. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, modifiez vos préférences de sécurité de manière à toujours apposer une signature en mode d’aperçu. Vous pourrez ainsi consulter et signer le fichier PDF en toute sécurité. 1 Cliquez dans le champ de signature. Vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur Signature et choisir Signer le document. 2 Pour apposer une signature numérique, suivez les instructions à l’écran. Si le document ne contient aucun champ de signature vide, cliquez sur Signature et choisissez Apposer une signature pour signer le fichier PDF. Certification d’un fichier PDF Certifier un document PDF revient à approuver son contenu. Cela vous permet également d’indiquer les types de modifications autorisées pour que ce document reste certifié. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signature de la barre d’outils Tâches, choisissez Certifier par une signature visible ou Certifier par une signature invisible, puis cliquez sur OK. 2 Si vous certifiez le document par une signature visible, délimitez un champ de signature. 3 Pour apposer une signature de certification, suivez les instructions à l’écran. 4 Enregistrez le fichier PDF sous un nom différent. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 23 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-24 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Validation de signatures Lorsque vous ouvrez un document, une icône d’état s’affiche à côté de la signature, pour indiquer sa validité. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signatures du navigateur, puis sélectionnez la signature. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris ou en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, puis choisissez Afficher les propriétés de la signature. 3 Utilisez les différents onglets et options de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés afin de résoudre tout problème de signature. Par exemple, si l’identité est indéterminée ou non vérifiée, cliquez sur l’onglet Signataire, puis sur Certificat pour savoir si le certificat est approuvé ou non. Révisions et commentaires Pour simplifier le processus de révision, optez pour une révision automatisée par messagerie électronique ou une révision partagée. La révision d’un document PDF à l’aide d’Acrobat 3D permet à tous les utilisateurs de commenter une version unique du document, sans la modifier, grâce à un large éventail d’outils de commentaire : notes, tampons, modifications de texte, surlignement et annotations de dessin. Si vous configurez une révision partagée, les réviseurs peuvent visualiser les commentaires des uns et des autres et y répondre. Grâce à la fonction de suivi des révisions, vous pouvez inviter des réviseurs supplémentaires, rejoindre une révision et suivre l’évolution des révisions partagées. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez faire réviser une spécification de projet par une équipe composée de collaborateurs dispersés géographiquement, configurez une révision partagée pour faire parvenir le document PDF à tous les participants. Lorsque les participants (y compris les utilisateurs d’Adobe Reader 8.0 si vous avez activé la fonction de commentaire pour les utilisateurs de cette application) ouvrent la pièce jointe au message électronique, Acrobat affiche la barre d’outils Commentaires, ainsi que des instructions sur la procédure de révision. Ajoutez différents types de commentaires à votre document PDF. Ces commentaires sont également répertoriés dans une liste. A. Note B. Annotation de dessin C. Tampon D. Text e remplacé E. Pièce jointe F. Text e s urligné Initiation d’une révision par messagerie électronique La révision par messagerie électronique permet de suivre l’état de la révision et de fusionner les commentaires reçus dans le fichier PDF d’origine. 1 Cliquez sur Révisions et commentaires , puis choisissez Joindre pour une révision par messagerie. 2 Le cas échéant, indiquez votre identité afin de créer un profil de réviseur. A B C D F E 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 24 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-25 Guide de prise en main 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour sélectionner le fichier PDF, inviter des réviseurs et envoyer une invitation électronique. Si votre application de messagerie n’envoie pas automatiquement les messages, vous devrez peut-être répondre aux messages d’alerte et ouvrir l’application pour achever l’envoi du message. Initiation d’une révision partagée La révision partagée permet aux réviseurs, y compris aux utilisateurs d’Adobe Reader, de voir les commentaires des autres réviseurs et d’y répondre pendant le processus de révision. Important : Pour mener une révision partagée, les réviseurs et vous-même devez disposer d’un accès en écriture à un serveur de commentaires partagé. 1 Cliquez sur Révisions et commentaires puis choisissez Envoyer en révision partagée. 2 Le cas échéant, indiquez votre identité afin de créer un profil de réviseur. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour sélectionner le serveur (ou en ajouter un), sélectionner le fichier PDF, inviter des réviseurs et envoyer une invitation électronique. Suivi et gestion d’une révision Le Suivi des révisions fournit toutes les informations relatives aux documents que vous avez envoyés en révision ou reçus. Utilisez-le pour reprendre une révision, envoyer un rappel ou inviter d’autres réviseurs. 1 Cliquez sur Révisions et commentaires et choisissez Suivi des révisions. 2 Sélectionnez le document PDF souhaité dans le panneau de gauche. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour reprendre une révision, cliquez deux fois sur le fichier PDF. • Pour envoyer un message, cliquez sur Envoyer un message aux réviseurs ou Envoyer un message à l’initiateur. • Pour inviter d’autres réviseurs, cliquez sur Ajouter des réviseurs. Invitation de réviseurs supplémentaires Si vous avez initié une révision, vous pouvez inviter d’autres réviseurs à y participer. Si vous êtes un réviseur, demandez à l’initiateur de convier d’autres réviseurs. Il pourra ainsi effectuer le suivi de tous les réviseurs et être averti de la réception des commentaires. 1 Cliquez sur Révisions et commentaires et choisissez Suivi des révisions. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier PDF voulu dans la zone Révisions que j’ai envoyées, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des réviseurs dans la partie droite. 3 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour ajouter les adresses électroniques, modifier le message si nécessaire et envoyer l’invitation électronique. Participer à une révision par messagerie électronique Lorsque vous ouvrez une pièce jointe PDF reçue dans le cadre d’une révision par messagerie, une version suivie du fichier PDF s’ouvre, assortie de la barre de message du document, du bouton Envoyer les commentaires et de la barre d’outils Commentaires et annotations. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 25 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-26 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Important : Si vous êtes invité à vous connecter à un serveur à l’ouverture du fichier PDF, il s’agit alors d’une révision partagée. 1 Ouvrez la pièce jointe PDF à partir de votre application de messagerie. 2 Ajoutez des commentaires à l’aide des outils de commentaire. 3 Enregistrez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Envoyer les commentaires. Participation à une révision partagée Lorsque vous ouvrez un fichier PDF partagé, des outils de commentaires s’affichent ainsi que des instructions sur la barre de message du document. 1 Ouvrez la pièce jointe PDF ou cliquez sur le lien. 2 Cliquez sur Se connecter et saisissez votre identifiant et votre mot de passe, le cas échéant. 3 Entrez vos nom, adresse électronique et fonction afin de créer un profil de réviseur, le cas échéant. 4 Ajoutez des commentaires. 5 Lorsque vous êtes prêt à partager vos commentaires, cliquez sur Publier les commentaires. Dans une révision partagée, vous pouvez voir les commentaires que tous les réviseurs ont publiés. Création d’une annotation de dessin Grâce aux outils d’annotation de dessin, vous pouvez ajouter des lignes, des flèches et d’autres formes à un fichier PDF. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations, puis choisissez l’outil voulu. 2 Dessinez sur le fichier PDF. Par exemple, cliquez et faites glisser la souris de manière à tracer une ligne, une flèche ou un rectangle. 3 (Facultatif) A l’aide de l’outil Sélection, cliquez deux fois sur l’annotation, puis entrez un commentaire dans la note contextuelle. Pour modifier les propriétés telles que la couleur et l’épaisseur de trait, cliquez sur l’annotation avec le bouton droit de la souris ou en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, puis choisissez Propriétés. Formulaires Vous pouvez créer un formulaire au format PDF contenant des champs interactifs provenant de diverses sources : un fichier électronique existant tel qu’un document Word, une feuille de calcul, un document papier numérisé ou un modèle. Vous pouvez ensuite diffuser le formulaire par messagerie électronique ou via un serveur partagé, et effectuer le suivi des formulaires qui vous sont renvoyés. Pour finir, recueillez et examinez les données des formulaires, et exportez-les vers d’autres applications en toute simplicité. Vous pourriez par exemple convertir tous vos formulaires de ressources humaines au format PDF et les publier sur un serveur partagé, pour en faciliter l’accès. Vous pourriez ensuite effectuer le suivi d’un formulaire donné, par exemple un formulaire d’adhésion à un programme annuel d’avantages sociaux, afin de savoir qui a rempli et renvoyé le formulaire. Une fois les données renvoyées recueillies, vous pouvez alors les exporter vers une feuille de calcul ou une base de données du personnel. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 26 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-27 Guide de prise en main Les champs de formulaire interactifs facilitent la collecte des données. A. Case à cocher B. Bouton radio C. Combo box D. Text box E. Button Création d’un formulaire L’assistant Créer un formulaire vous aide à créer un formulaire PDF à partir d’un modèle (sous Windows seulement), d’un document électronique, d’une feuille de calcul ou d’un document papier numérisé. 1 Cliquez sur Formulaires sur la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Créer un formulaire. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier source du formulaire PDF, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Les formulaire créés à l’aide de l’assistant constituent des formulaires LiveCycle Designer. Pour créer plutôt un formulaire Acrobat, choisissez Formulaires > Exécuter la reconnaissance des champs de formulaire. Modification d’un formulaire Selon la méthode de création du formulaire PDF, vous pouvez le modifier dans Acrobat 3D ou dans Adobe LiveCycle Designer (sous Windows seulement). Remarque : (Windows) Les formulaires PDF créés dans Acrobat 3D peuvent être modifiés dans LiveCycle Designer. Cependant, les formulaires créés dans LiveCycle Designer ne peuvent pas être modifiés dans Acrobat 3D. 1 Ouvrez le formulaire PDF. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Modifier le formulaire dans Designer ou Modifier le formulaire dans Acrobat. 3 Ajoutez ou modifiez les propriétés de champ et de champ de formulaire selon vos besoins. Diffusion d’un formulaire Après l’avoir créé, vous pouvez diffuser un formulaire PDF à l’aide de l’assistant Diffuser le formulaire. Remarque : Pour que vous puissiez utiliser l’assistant, le formulaire doit contenir un bouton d’envoi. 1 Ouvrez le formulaire souhaité. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Formulaires de la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Diffuser le formulaire. 3 Suivez les instructions affichées pour préparer le formulaire à la diffusion. E D A B C 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 27 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-28 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main 4 Indiquez si vous souhaitez envoyer le formulaire par messagerie électronique, ou l’enregistrer et l’envoyer ultérieurement. 5 Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour diffuser le formulaire. Suivi et gestion des formulaires Le dispositif de suivi des formulaires vous aide à gérer les formulaires que vous avez diffusés. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Formulaires de la barre d’outils Tâches, puis choisissez Suivi des formulaires. 2 Sélectionnez une icône de catégorie dans le panneau de gauche pour afficher les formulaires correspondants : • Tâches à effectuer affiche les formulaires que vous avez reçus. • Historique affiche les formulaires que vous avez diffusés. • Résultats de la recherche vous permet de rechercher des formulaires spécifiques. • Bibliothèque de formulaires affiche les formulaires que vous avez enregistrés en vue d’une diffusion ultérieure. Compilation des données reçues par messagerie Vous pouvez compiler les données de formulaire des utilisateurs en un jeu de données au fur et à mesure qu’ils les renvoient. 1 Ouvrez la pièce jointe qui contient le formulaire renvoyé. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s’affiche, sélectionnez un jeu de données ou créez-en un pour les données de formulaire. Les nouvelles données sont ajoutées et le jeu de données s’ouvre. Vous pouvez alors réviser toutes les réponses. Pour compiler les données, vous pouvez également cliquer sur Formulaires sur la barre d’outils Tâches, puis sélectionner Compiler les formulaires renvoyés. Consultation des réponses de formulaire Une fois que vous avez compilé les données de formulaire renvoyées en un jeu de données, le fichier PDF s’ouvre automatiquement pour que vous puissiez réviser les réponses. Le jeu de données PDF souhaité étant ouvert, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour réviser une réponse précise, sélectionnez la ligne correspondante dans la liste des réponses. • Pour trier la liste des réponses, cliquez sur l’en-tête de colonne souhaité. • Pour ajouter des données, cliquez sur Importer les données . • Pour supprimer des données, sélectionnez un enregistrement puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Exportation des données de formulaire vers une feuille de calcul Une fois que vous avez recueilli des données de formulaire PDF au format FDF ou XML, vous pouvez organiser ces données dans un fichier de feuille de calcul délimité par des virgules (CSV). 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Fusionner les fichiers de données dans une feuille de calcul. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers de données souhaités. 3 Cliquez sur Exporter, choisissez l’emplacement du fichier CSV, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 28 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-29 Guide de prise en main Nouveautés Affichage, navigation, recherche Fenêtre Mise en route Découvrez, d’un simple coup d’œil, les principales fonctions d’Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 et cliquez sur les liens pour lancer des tâches ou en savoir plus sur ces fonctions. Reportez-vous à la section « Démarrage à partir de la fenêtre Mise en route » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Zone de travail maximisée Les documents PDF s’affichent dans une nouvelle présentation visuelle de la zone de travail, du navigateur et des barres d’outils. Les éléments de l’interface utilisateur ont été supprimés pour maximiser l’espace. Reportez-vous à la section « Affichage de la zone de travail » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Barres d’outils personnalisables Vous pouvez facilement masquer ou afficher les outils individuels en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une barre d’outils ou en utilisant la boîte de dialogue Plus d’outils pour personnaliser les barres d’outils. Reportez-vous à la section « Affichage et organisation des barres d’outils » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Améliorations de la fonction de recherche Recherchez des mots ou profitez des outils de recherche avancée à partir d’une seule et même barre d’outils intégrée. Consultez les résultats de la recherche dans une fenêtre flottante redimensionnable. Recherchez des documents dans un lot PDF. Reportez-vous à la section « Présentation des fonctions de recherche » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Index de recherche incorporé PDF Incorporez un index de recherche pour un fichier spécifique dans le document PDF pour une recherche optimisée. Reportez-vous à la section « Création et gestion d’un index dans un document PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Création, assemblage et modification d’un fichier PDF Document PDF à partir d’une page blanche Créez une page blanche au format PDF et saisissez-y du texte. Mettez le texte en forme à l’aide des commandes de formatage. Verrouillez le document pour empêcher toute modification. Reportez-vous à la section « Création d’un fichier PDF à partir d’une page vierge » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Lots PDF Assemblez des fichiers PDF ou autre (y compris des formulaires PDF) dans un lot unique. Les fichiers ne sont pas modifiés lors de leur mise en lot, les signatures et options de protection restent donc inchangées. Les documents dans un lot s’affichent dans la même fenêtre. Ajoutez, supprimez ou extrayez aisément des documents. Effectuez des recherches dans le document actif ou sélectionné, ou dans tous les documents du lot. Imprimez le document actif ou sélectionné, ou tous les documents du lot. Reportezvous à la section « Présentation des lots PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Interface utilisateur pour les fichiers combinés Combinez des fichiers en un seul document PDF avec des pages concaténées ou assemblez des fichiers en un lot PDF. De simples options permettent le contrôle de la taille du fichier PDF résultant. Reportez-vous à la section « Combinaison de différents types de fichiers » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Fusion et publipostage au format PDF à partir de Word Convertissez au format PDF des documents Word par fusion et publipostage, puis envoyez-les par messagerie électronique. Reportez-vous à la section « Création d’un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion et publipostage Word » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 29 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-30 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Améliorations de la manipulation des feuilles de calcul Excel (Windows) Sélectionnez et triez les feuilles de calcul à convertir. Convertissez tous les liens et signets. Créez des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/A. Reportez-vous à la section « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Améliorations de la manipulation des présentations PowerPoint (Windows) Convertissez les formes se chevauchant, les graphiques, boutons d’action, paramètres des actions et commentaires du présentateur. Convertissez les arrière-plans en un calque distinct, non imprimable. Créez des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/A. Reportez-vous à la section « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Améliorations de la conversion de messages électroniques Convertissez un message électronique ou l’intégralité d’un dossier de messages au format PDF dans Lotus Notes. Créez des lots PDF de messages électroniques, dans Outlook et Lotus Notes. Dans Outlook sous Windows, convertissez des archives de messages électroniques en lots PDF et configurez l’archivage automatique et planifié des messages. Reportez-vous à la section « Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF (Windows) », « Migration d’archives PDF Outlook PDF en lots PDF (Windows) » et « Configuration de l’archivage automatique du courrier électronique (Windows) » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Améliorations de la fonction de numérisation Numérisez au format PDF ou PDF/A à partir d’un éventail de scanners. Ajoutez des métadonnées pendant la numérisation. Optimisez un document PDF numérisé. Reportez-vous à la section « Numérisation d’un document papier au format PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/A Créez des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/A lors de la numérisation de documents papier et lors de la création de fichiers PDF à partir de Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Acrobat Distiller et de l’utilisation de l’outil Contrôle en amont d’Acrobat. Numérotation Bates Appliquez des libellés d’identification à un lot de documents rattachés, par exemple des documents juridiques concernant le même procès. Un numéro Bates s’affiche sous la forme d’un en-tête ou d’un pied de page sur toutes les pages d’un document PDF compris dans le lot. Reportezvous à la section « Ajout d’un en-tête ou d’un pied de page Bates » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Examen de document Vérifiez la présence dans le fichier PDF de métadonnées, d’annotations, de pièces jointes, de données masquées, de champs de formulaire ou de signets. Supprimez l’ensemble ou une partie de ces informations. Reportez-vous à la section « Recherche d’informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. En-têtes, pieds de page, filigrane et arrière-plan Enregistrez les options d’en-tête, de pied de page, de filigrane et d’arrière-plan sous forme de paramètres réutilisables. Supprimez ou mettez à jour des en-têtes, pieds de page, filigranes et arrière-plans existants. Ajustez le contenu pour inclure les en-têtes et pieds de page. Visualisez les modifications en temps réel. Définissez le texte souligné. Reportez-vous à la section « Ajout et modification d’un en-tête et d’un pied de page » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 30 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-31 Guide de prise en main Révisions et commentaires Réunions Acrobat Connect Bénéficiez des capacités de collaboration Web en temps réel d’Acrobat Connect (vendu séparément). Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer la réunion pour passer d’une révision de document à une communication en temps réel sur Internet avec d’autres utilisateurs. Acrobat Connect utilise Flash et une salle de réunion personnelle permettant de partager votre l’écran, d’organiser des audioconférences et visioconférences, d’utiliser un tableau blanc, etc. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer la réunion pour la première fois, vous pouvez créer un compte d’évaluation gratuit. Lors des connexions suivantes, vous accéderez directement à votre salle de réunion personnelle d’Acrobat Connect. (Acrobat Connect n’est pas disponible dans toutes les langues.) Reportez-vous à la section « Réunions » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Révision partagée Initiez une révision dans laquelle les commentaires sont stockés sur un serveur central, permettant à tous les participants d’afficher les commentaires en temps réel. Aucun logiciel de serveur supplémentaire n’est requis. Les révisions partagées fonctionnent avec un dossier sur un serveur réseau, un espace de travail SharePoint Windows ou un dossier Web sur un serveur Web. Les commentaires sont automatiquement récupérés, même si Reader n’est pas en cours d’exécution, et sont ajoutés même lorsque vous êtes déconnecté du réseau. Des notifications indiquent aux utilisateurs s’il existe de nouveaux commentaires. Les commentaires des réviseurs hors du pare-feu peuvent être fusionnés dans la révision partagée. Permettez aux utilisateurs Reader de participer à la révision. Reportez-vous à la section « Initiation d’une révision partagée » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Suivi des révisions Propose des détails sur toutes les révisions actives. Pour des révisions partagées, cela inclut le nombre de commentaires d’un réviseur, la date limite de révision, l’état du serveur, les révisions non lues et un résumé des révisions partagées mises à jour. Reportez-vous à la section « Suivi des fichiers PDF révisés » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Améliorations des fonctions de commentaires et annotations Affichez et positionnez précisément les annotations de légende et de nuage pendant leur application. Les points de conduite de la légende se déplacent automatiquement au fur et à mesure que vous positionnez la légende. Les commentaires sélectionnés sont mis en surbrillance pour une meilleure visibilité lors d’un zoom arrière. Faites pivoter des tampons et sélectionnez tous les outils dans une seule barre d’outils intégrée. Reportez-vous à la section « Commentaires » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Formulaires Simple création de formulaires (Windows) Utilisez un assistant pour créer des formulaires PDF à partir de modèles, de documents électroniques existants, de formulaires papier ou de données de feuille de calcul. Personnalisez des formulaires avec vos coordonnées et logos. Modifiez les formulaires dans Adobe LiveCycle Designer. Reportez-vous à la section « Création et modification de formulaires » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Fichier PDF en illustration d’arrière-plan Importez un fichier PDF comme illustration d’arrière-plan dans un formulaire dans LiveCycle Designer. Ajoutez des champs de formulaires par-dessus cet arrière-plan. Consultez l’aide de LiveCycle Designer. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 31 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-32 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Suivi des formulaires Effectuez un suivi des formulaires que vous créez ou remplissez. Reportezvous à la section « A propos du suivi des formulaires » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Exportation et compilation des données de formulaire Réunissez les formulaires renvoyés dans un lot PDF. Exportez les données de formulaire vers une feuille de calcul. Reportez-vous à la section « Soumission de formulaires » et « Exportation d’enregistrements depuis un jeu de données PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Reconnaissance des champs de formulaire Reconnaissez automatiquement les champs de formulaire dans des documents PDF non interactifs et convertissez-les en champs interactifs pouvant être remplis automatiquement. Reportez-vous à la section « Création de formulaires » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Droits activés dans Reader Autorisez les utilisateurs de Reader 7.0 et 8.0 à remplir des formulaires, à apposer des signatures numériques et à enregistrer des formulaires ou d’autres documents PDF. Reportezvous à la section « Autorisation d’enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader » dans l’aide d’Acrobat Signatures numériques ID d’itinérance Inscrivez-vous à un service de signature qui permet de conserver votre clé privé sur un serveur. Identifiez-vous sur le serveur à partir d’Acrobat et autorisez la signature du document avec vos informations d’identité stockées sur le serveur. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d’une identification d’itinérance » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Mode d’aperçu avant signature et vérification de la conformité Avant d’apposer votre signature, visualisez le contenu du document tel qu’il s’affiche après la suppression de la transparence, des scripts, des polices et de tout contenu dynamique pouvant modifier l’aspect du document. Acrobat 3D procède automatiquement à la vérification de l’intégrité du document, qui permet désormais de vérifier la conformité des signatures avant de lancer le mode d’aperçu. Reportez-vous à la section « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Améliorations de la manipulation des certificats Prédéterminez le certificat pour la signature. Configurez le modèle de chaîne pour la validation du certificat. Reportez-vous à la section « Partage et gestion des certificats » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Valeurs de base Spécifiez les choix proposés à l’utilisateur lors de la signature d’un document. Reportez-vous à la section « Personnalisation des propriétés de signature à l’aide de valeurs de base » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Signatures dans Reader Permettre aux utilisateurs de Reader de placer un champ de signature. Reportezvous à la section « Avant de certifier un fichier PDF » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Architecture, ingénierie et construction Conversion par lots/Conversion directe A partir d’AutoCAD, convertissez plusieurs fichiers AutoCAD en plusieurs fichiers PDF. Convertissez les fichiers AutoCAD au format PDF à vitesse accélérée. Reportez-vous à la section « Conversion d’un fichier AutoCAD au format PDF (Windows) » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 32 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-33 Guide de prise en main Prise en charge des formats DWG/DWF Vous p ouvez convertir les fichiers au format DWF et DWG d’AutoCAD sans installer AutoCAD. Améliorations des outils de mesures 2D Les mesures sont recalculées si le point de départ ou de fin est déplacé. Mesures accrochées aux lignes, intersections ou coins. Reportez-vous à la section « Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l’aire d’un objet » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Conception 3D assistée par ordinateur (CAO) Conception de documents PDF compacts Réglez les paramètres de conversion 3D pour créer des fichiers PDF accessibles de manière universelle et très compressés qui sont seulement une fraction de la taille de l’assemblage ou du fichier CAD d’origine. Reportezvous à la section « A propos des formats de conversion PRC et U3D » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Importer les informations PMI Vous p ouvez imp or t er et afficher les spécifications de tolérance et de dimensionnement géométriques dans le modèle 3D en tant qu’informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) au lieu d’envoyer un dessin en 2D. Les formats de fichiers pris en charge sont les suivants : CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX et Pro/ENGINEER. Reportez-vous à la section « Affichage des informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Exportation de la géométrie Exportez la géométrie aux formats standard (IGES, STEP, ParaSolid, and VRML) pour permettre l’interopérabilité avec les applications de FAO. Reportez-vous à la section « Exportation de la géométrie à partir des modèles 3D » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Prise en charge des dernières applications de CAO Ouvrez la plupart des derniers types de formats de fichiers de CAO sans avoir à installer une application de CAO. Reportez-vous à la section « A propos des formats de fichiers 3D pris en charge » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Copyright Outils de biffure Ident ifiez le texte, les images et zones sensibles à biffer. Appliquez les biffures de façon irréversible. Modifiez l’aspect des marques de biffures, notamment la couleur et les codes. Reportez-vous à la section « Biffure du contenu confidentiel » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Recherche et biffure Dans le panneau de recherche, sélectionnez certains ou tous les résultats à biffer. Reportez-vous à la section « Recherche et biffure de mots » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Numérotation Bates Appliquez des libellés d’identification à un lot de documents rattachés, par exemple des documents juridiques concernant le même procès. Un numéro Bates s’affiche sous la forme d’un en-tête ou d’un pied de page sur toutes les pages d’un document PDF compris dans le lot. Reportezvous à la section « Ajout d’un en-tête ou d’un pied de page Bates » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Professionnel de la création Amélioration de la gestion des couleurs Dans la suite Adobe Creative Suite, synchronisez en un seul clic les paramètres d’affichage des couleurs à l’écran dans les différentes applications Reportez-vous à la section « Synchroniser les paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 33 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMB-34 CHAPITRE 1 Prise en main Paramètres d’aplatissement des transparences prédéfinis partagés Définissez des paramètres prédéfinis d’aplatissement des transparences dans une application Adobe (par exemple dans Acrobat), puis partagez-les facilement avec d’autres applications telles qu’Illustrator ou InDesign. Reportez-vous à la section « Création d’un nouveau paramètre d’aplatissement prédéfini » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Contrôle en amont Localisez, modifiez ou supprimez des éléments PDF à l’aide de profils de correction personnalisables. Créez un inventaire du contenu PDF, y compris les métadonnées XMP. Effectuez des contrôles avancés des objets Cos et des polices. Convertissez au format PDF/X-4 et PDF/A et validez les fichiers qui sont déjà dans ces formats. Modifiez les paramètres de droplet pour les contrôles en amont automatisés. Reportez-vous à la section « Correction des zones problématiques » et « Contrôles avancés » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Impression en livret Imprimez des pages juxtaposées pour constituer un livret relié. Reportez-vous à la section « Impression en livret » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Inclusion de métadonnées dans les documents et objets Maintenez les métadonnées de document et d’objet et accédez-y. Reportez-vous à la section « Propriétés et métadonnées de document » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Améliorations de l’outil Retouche d’objet Affichez et modifiez l’espace colorimétrique d’un objet sélectionné. Mettez à l’échelle, faites pivoter ou découpez un objet. Reportez-vous à la section « Déplacement ou modification d’un objet » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Nouvelles fonctions supplémentaires Mode FIPS La version 8.1 fournit un mode FIPS permettant de restreindre la protection des données aux algorithmes approuvés 140-2 FIPS (Federal Information Processing Standard) à l’aide d’un module de chiffrement RSABSAFE Crypto-C 2.0 avec une validation FIPS 140-2, certificatAcrobat 3D 608. Reportez-vous à la section « Protection des documents PDF en mode FIPS » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Prise en charge de Microsoft Windows Vista La version 8.1 d’Acrobat 3D prend en charge Microsoft Windows Vista. Installation d’Acrobat sur des versions à 64 bits de Microsoft Windows La version 8.1 d’Acrobat 3D prend en charge les versions à 64 bits de Microsoft Windows XP et Micros oft Windows Vist a. Version Cue 2.0 Gérez les fichiers et les versions en tant qu’utilisateur unique ou dans un petit groupe de travail. Intégrez Adobe Bridge pour gérer les fichiers de vos projets Creative Suite. Reportez-vous à la section « Adobe Version Cue » dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Publications numériques Lisez et organisez des livres électroniques ou autres publications dans Adobe Digital Editions (produit distinct). Lorsque vous cliquez sur l’élément de menu Digital Editions pour la première fois, vous pouvez télécharger et installer le logiciel Adobe Digital Editions. Une fois l’installation effectuée, sélectionnez les publications numériques pour passer directement à votre bibliorom des publications numériques d’Adobe. Reportez-vous à la section « Adobe Digital Editions » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 34 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 B-35 Guide de prise en main Impression via Internet Imprimez des documents vers un bureau FedEx Kinko aux Etats-Unis. Reportez-vous à la section « Impression sur Internet » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. Améliorations des outils de mesures 2D Les mesures sont recalculées si le point de départ ou de fin est déplacé. Mesures accrochées aux lignes, intersections ou coins. Reportez-vous à la section « Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l’aire d’un objet » dans l’aide d’Acrobat 3D. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 35 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM3D_ML_GSG.book Page 36 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-1 Kapitel 1: Erste Schritte Installation Anforderungen Die vollständigen Systemanforderungen und Konfigurationsempfehlungen zu Ihrer Adobe®-Software sind in der Datei „Bitte lesen“ aufgeführt, die mit der Software geliefert wird. Software installieren 1 Schließen Sie alle Adobe-Anwendungen, die auf dem Computer ausgeführt werden. 2 Legen Sie den Installationsdatenträger in das Laufwerk ein und befolgen Sie die angezeigten Anweisungen. Hinweis: Weitere Informationen finden Sie in der Datei „Bitte lesen“, die mit der Software geliefert wird. Software aktivieren Adobe-Software kann Technologie zur Lizenzverwaltung enthalten, mit der die Einhaltung des Lizenzvertrags für das Produkt gesichert wird. Wenn diese Technologie vorhanden ist, werden Sie aufgefordert, die Lizenz für Ihr Produkt innerhalb von 30 Tagen nach der ersten Verwendung des Produkts zu verifizieren. Die Verifizierung ist obligatorisch. Unter Umständen werden Sie aufgefordert, die Software zu aktivieren. Beim Verifizierungsverfahren werden keinerlei Informationen zur Identität der Benutzer erfasst, übermittelt oder verwendet. Weitere Informationen zur Produktaktivierung finden Sie in der „Bitte lesen“-Datei auf der Installations-DVD oder auf der Adobe-Website www.adobe.com/go/activation_de. 1 Wenn das Aktivierungsfenster nicht geöffnet ist, wählen Sie „Hilfe“ > „Aktivierung“ > „Aktivieren“. 2 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm. Hinweis: Wenn Sie die Software auf einem anderen Computer installieren möchten, müssen Sie sie zunächst auf Ihrem Computer deaktivieren: Wählen Sie „Hilfe“ > „Aktivierung“ > „Deaktivieren“. Registrieren Registrieren Sie das Produkt, damit Sie Installationssupport und andere Dienste nutzen können sowie über Updates benachrichtigt werden. Befolgen Sie zum Registrieren die Anweisungen im Fenster „Registrierung“, das nach dem Installieren und Aktivieren der Software angezeigt wird. Wenn Sie die Registrierung verschieben, können Sie sie später jederzeit mit „Hilfe“ > „Registrierung“ durchführen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 1 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-2 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Bitte lesen Die Installations-DVD enthält die „Bitte lesen“-Datei für Ihre Software. (Die Datei wird bei der Produktinstallation auch in den Anwendungsordner kopiert.) In der Datei sind wichtige Informationen zu den folgenden Themen zusammengefasst: • Systemanforderungen • Installation • Passermarken • Elektronische Lizenzierung • Rechtliche Hinweise Adobe-Hilfe verwenden Adobe-Hilfequellen Die Dokumentation zur Adobe-Software ist in verschiedenen Formaten verfügbar. Integrierte und LiveDocs-Hilfe Die integrierte Hilfe bietet Zugriff auf alle Dokumentationen und Schulungsmaterialien, die zum Zeitpunkt der Auslieferung der Software verfügbar waren. Sie können über das Menü „Hilfe“ in Ihrer Adobe-Software darauf zugreifen. Die LiveDocs-Hilfe umfasst die gesamte integrierte Hilfe des Produkts und zusätzlich Updates sowie Verknüpfungen zu Schulungsmaterialien, die im Web verfügbar sind. Bei einigen Produkten können Sie Kommentare zu den Themen der LiveDocs-Hilfe einfügen. Die LiveDocs-Hilfe für Ihr Produkt finden Sie im Adobe-Hilfe Resource Center unter www.adobe.com/go/documentation_de. Die meisten Versionen der integrierten und der LiveDocs-Hilfe unterstützen das Durchsuchen der Hilfesysteme mehrerer Produkte. Themen können Verknüpfungen zu relevanten Inhalten im Web oder Hilfethemen anderer Produkte enthalten. Insgesamt repräsentiert die im Produkt und im Web verfügbare Hilfe einen Ausgangspunkt für den Zugriff auf weiterführende Informationen sowie Informationen von Benutzercommunitys. Die aktuelle und umfassendste Version der Hilfe ist immer im Web verfügbar. Verfahren-Themen Die Verfahren-Themen bieten einen Überblick über häufig ausgeführte Aufgaben. Wenn Sie zusätzliche Informationen benötigen, klicken Sie einfach auf die Verknüpfung unter dem Verfahren-Thema, um das zugehörige Thema in der Hilfe anzuzeigen. PDF-Dokumentation Die integrierte Hilfe ist zusätzlich als für die Druckausgabe optimiertes Adobe PDF-Dokument verfügbar. Andere Dokumente – Installationshandbücher, White Paper usw. – werden ggf. auch als PDF-Dateien bereitgestellt. Alle PDF-Dokumentationen sind im Adobe Help Resource Center unter www.adobe.com/go/documentation_de verfügbar. Die mit der Software gelieferte PDF-Dokumentation finden Sie im Ordner „Documents“ auf der Installations- bzw. Inhalts-DVD. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 2 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-3 Erste Schritte Gedruckte Dokumentation Gedruckte Ausgaben der im Produkt enthaltenen Hilfe können im Adobe Store erworben werden (www.adobe.com/go/store_de). Im Adobe Store finden Sie zudem Bücher, die von Partnerverlagen von Adobe veröffentlicht wurden. In allen Adobe Creative Suite® 3-Produkten ist ein gedrucktes Workflow-Handbuch enthalten. Eigenständige Adobe-Produkte enthalten unter Umständen auch ein gedrucktes Handbuch „Erste Schritte“. Hilfe im Produkt verwenden Die integrierte Hilfe wird mit dem Menü „Hilfe“ aufgerufen. Nach dem Öffnen des AdobeHilfefensters können Sie die Hilfe zu weiteren auf Ihrem Computer installierten Adobe-Produkte anzeigen. Die Hilfethemen enthalten möglicherweise Links zu ergänzenden Inhalten im Internet. Geben Sie gesuchte Wortfolgen wie „ursprüngliche Form“ in Anführungszeichen an, damit nur die Themen angezeigt werden, die alle Wörter in der Wortfolge enthalten. Eingabehilfen Die Adobe-Hilfe ist so konzipiert, dass sie auch von Menschen mit Behinderungen wie eingeschränktem Seh- oder Bewegungsvermögen genutzt werden kann. In der Produkt-Hilfe werden die folgenden standardmäßigen Ausgabehilfen unterstützt: • Benutzer können die Textgröße mit gängigen Kontextmenübefehlen (Microsoft® Windows®) bzw. Menübefehlen (Apple Mac OS) ändern. • Verknüpfungen werden zur Her vorhebung unterstrichen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 3 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-4 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte • Wenn Verknüpfungstext nicht dem Titel des Zielinhalts entspricht, wird der Titel im TitleAttribut des Anker-Tags referenziert. Beispielsweise wird bei den Links „Zurück“ und „Weiter“ der Titel des vorherigen bzw. nächsten Themas einbezogen. • Die Inhalte unterstützen den High-ContrastModus (Anzeige mit hohem Kontrastverhältnis). • Bilder ohne Beschriftung enthalten alternativen Text. • Jeder Frame hat einen Titel zur Kennzeichnung des Einsatzzwecks. • Mit Standard-HTML-Tags wird die Inhaltsstruktur für das Lesen am Bildschirm und für Text-zuSprache-Umwandlungen definiert. • Formatvorlagen steuern die Formatierung, es gibt also keine eingebetteten Schriften. Tastaturbefehle für Steuerelemente in der Symbolleiste der Hilfe (Windows) Schaltfläche „Zurück“ Alt + Nach-links-Taste Schaltfläche „Weiter“ Alt + Nach-rechts-Taste Drucken Strg+P Schaltfläche „Info“ Strg+I Menü „Produkthilfe für“ Alt+Nach-unten-Taste oder Alt+Nach-oben-Taste, um die Hilfe für eine andere Anwendung anzuzeigen Tastaturbefehle für die Navigation in der Hilfe (Windows) • Mit Strg+Tab (vorwärts) und Umschalt+Strg+Tab (rückwärts) navigieren Sie zu den verschiedenen Fensterbereichen. • Mit Tab (vorwärts) und Umschalt + Tab (rückwärts) navigieren Sie zu den verschiedenen Verknüpfungen in einem Fensterbereich. • Drücken Sie die Eingabetaste, um eine hervorgehobene Verknüpfung aufzurufen. • Drücken Sie zum Ändern der Textgröße bei gedrückter Strg- bzw. Befehlstaste die PlusTaste (+) oder Minus-Taste (-). Ressourcen Adobe Video Workshop Adobe Creative Suite 3 Video Workshop umfasst über 200 Schulungsvideos zu verschiedenen Themenbereichen für Druck-, Web- und Videoprofis. Mit Adobe Video Workshop können Sie die Benutzung jedes Creative Suite 3-Produkts erlernen. In zahlreichen Videos wird die parallele Verwendung mehrerer Adobe-Anwendungen demonstriert. Wenn Sie Adobe Video Workshop starten, können Sie auswählen, an welchen Produkten und Themen Sie interessiert sind. Dank der Details zu den einzelnen Videos können Sie Ihr Schulungsprogramm nach Bedarf zusammenstellen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 4 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-5 Erste Schritte Moderatoren-Community Bei dieser Produktversion hat Adobe Systems die Benutzercommunity dazu aufgefordert, in einem Forum eigene Erfahrungen und Erkenntnisse mit anderen auszutauschen. Adobe und lynda.com präsentieren Tutorials, Tipps und Tricks von führenden Designern und Entwicklern wie Joseph Lowery, Katrin Eismann und Chris Georgenes. Sehen und hören Sie Adobe-Experten wie Lynn Grillo, Greg Rewis und Russell Brown. Mehr als 30 Produktexperten teilen ihr Fachwissen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 5 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-6 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Tutorials und Quelldateien Adobe Video Workshop enthält Schulungen für Anfänger und erfahrene Benutzer. Es gibt außerdem Videos zu neuen Funktionen und Techniken. Jedes Video befasst sich mit einem einzelnen Gegenstand und besitzt eine Laufzeit von 3–5 Minuten. Zu den meisten Videos gehört ein illustriertes Tutorial sowie Quelldateien, so dass Sie die einzelnen Arbeitsschritte ausdrucken und selbstständig nachvollziehen können. Adobe Video Workshop verwenden Über die in Ihrem Creative Suite 3-Produkt enthaltene DVD können Sie auf Adobe Video Workshop zugreifen. Adobe Video Workshop ist auch online unter www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials_de verfügbar. Adobe wird regelmäßig neue Videos online in Video Workshop bereitstellen, achten Sie also auf Neuigkeiten. Acrobat-Videos Adobe Video Workshop deckt eine breite Palette von Themen zu Adobe Acrobat® ab: • Einrichten von Arbeitsbereich und Taskleisten • Zusammenführen von Dateien in ein PDFDokument • Konvertieren von PDF-Dateien • Ändern von PDF-Dateien • Einfügen von Kommentaren in PDF-Dokumente • Durchführen von gemeinsamen Überprüfungen • Überprüfen und Zusammenfassen von Kommentaren • Schützen von Formularen • Echtzeit-Zusammenarbeit unter Verwendung von Adobe Acrobat Connect™ • Preflight-Überprüfung von Dateien • Drucken von Dokumenten Zugriff auf die Adobe Creative Suite 3-Videotutorials erhalten Sie über den Adobe Video Workshop unter www.adobe.com/go/learn_videotutorials_de. Extras Es stehen zahlreiche Ressourcen zur Verfügung, die Sie bei der Arbeit mit Ihrer Adobe-Software unterstützten. Einige dieser Ressourcen werden im Verlauf des Setupvorgangs auf Ihrem Computer installiert; zusätzliche Inhalte sind ggf. auf der Installations- bzw. Informationsdisk enthalten. Die Adobe Exchange-Community bietet besondere Extras online unter folgender Adresse an: www.adobe.com/go/exchange_de. Installierte Ressourcen Während der Installation werden verschiedene Ressourcen in den Anwendungsordner kopiert. Um diese Dateien anzuzeigen, navigieren Sie auf dem Computer zum Anwendungsordner. Datenträgerinhalt Die mit Ihrem Produkt gelieferte Disk enthält u. U. weitere Ressourcen zum Einsatz mit der Software, beispielsweise Vorgaben, Zusatzmodule, eine PDFVersion der Hilfe, technische Informationen und andere Dokumente. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 6 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-7 Erste Schritte Adobe Exchange Weitere kostenlose Inhalte finden Sie unter www.adobe.com/go/exchange_de. Diese Website stellt eine Onlinecommunity dar, in der Benutzer tausende kostenloser Aktionen, Erweiterungen, Zusatzmodule usw. für Adobe-Produkte bereitstellen bzw. herunterladen können. Adobe Design Center Adobe Design Center bietet Artikel, Inspiration und Instruktionen von Branchenexperten, Topdesignern und Adobe-Partnerverlagen. Monatlich werden neue Inhalte hinzugefügt. Hier gibt es hunderte Tutorials zum Entwerfen von Produkten sowie Tipps und Techniken in Videos, dazu HTML-Tutorials und Beispielkapitel. Neue Ideen bilden das Herz der Kategorien „Denkfabrik“, „Dialogfeld“ und „Galerie“: • Die Artikel in der Kategorie „Denkfabrik“ erläutern den Einsatz moderner Techniken auf Seiten der Designer und untersuchen, was ihre Erfahrungen für Design, Designwerkzeuge und die Gesellschaft insgesamt bedeuten. • In der Kategorie „Dialogfeld“ veröffentlichen Experten neue Ideen in den Bereichen animierte Grafik und digitales Design. • Die „Galerie“ demonstriert, wie Künstler animierte Grafik umsetzen. Adobe Design Center ist auch online unter www.adobe.com/de/designcenter verfügbar. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 7 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-8 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Adobe Developer Center Adobe Developer Center stellt Beispiele, Tutorials, Artikel und Community-Ressourcen für Entwickler bereit, die komplexe Internetanwendungen, Websites, Inhalte für Mobilfunkgeräte und andere Projekte mit Adobe-Produkten umsetzen. Das Developer Center enthält außerdem Ressourcen für Entwickler, die Zusatzmodule für Adobe-Produkte programmieren. Außer Beispielcode und Tutorials gibt es RSS-Feeds, Onlineseminare, SDKs, Handbücher zur Skripterstellung und weitere technische Ressourcen. Adobe Developer Center ist online unter www.adobe.com/go/developer_de verfügbar. Kundendienst Besuchen Sie die Adobe Support-Website unter www.adobe.com/de/support, wenn Sie produktspezifische Informationen zur Fehlerbehebung bzw. Informationen zu kostenlosen und kostenpflichtigen Supportoptionen suchen. Über den Link „Schulung“ haben Sie Zugriff auf Bücher von Adobe Press, verschiedene Schulungsressourcen, Adobe-SoftwareZertifizierungsprogramme und vieles mehr. Downloads Besuchen Sie www.adobe.com/go/downloads_de, wenn Sie kostenlose Updates, Probeversionen und andere nützliche Software suchen. Zudem erhalten Sie im Adobe Store (unter www.adobe.com/go/store_de) Zugriff auf tausende von Zusatzmodulen von Drittanbietern, mit denen Sie typische Arbeiten automatisieren, Workflows konfigurieren, spezielle Effekte in Profiqualität erstellen können usw. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 8 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-9 Erste Schritte Adobe Labs Adobe Labs bietet Ihnen die Möglichkeit, neue und in der Entwicklung befindliche Technologien und Produkte von Adobe auszuprobieren und zu bewerten. In Adobe Labs sind z. B. die folgenden Ressourcen verfügbar: • Prerelease-Software und -Technologien • Codebeispiele und bewährte Verfahren, die die Einarbeitung beschleunigen • Frühe Versionen von Produkt- und technischen Dokumentationen • Foren, Inhalte auf Wiki-Basis und andere Ressourcen unterstützen die Interaktion mit gleichgesinnten Entwicklern Adobe Labs begünstigt eine kollaborative SoftwareEntwicklung. Durch diese Unterstützung sind Kunden schnell in der Lage, neue Produkte und Technologie produktiv einzusetzen. Adobe Labs ist außerdem ein Forum für frühzeitige Rückmeldungen. Sie helfen den Adobe-Teams, Software zu entwickeln, die den Bedürfnissen und Erwartungen der Nutzer gerecht wird. Besuchen Sie Adobe Labs unter www.adobe.com/go/labs_de. Benutzercommunitys Den Benutzern stehen Foren, Blogs und andere Möglichkeiten zum Austauschen von Technologien, Tools und Informationen zur Verfügung. Benutzer können Fragen stellen und erfahren, wie andere ihre Software bestmöglich einsetzen. Benutzerforen stehen in deutscher, englischer, französischer und japanischer Sprache zur Verfügung; Blogs werden in zahlreichen Sprachen verfasst. Besuchen Sie www.adobe.com/de/communities, um an Foren oder Blogs teilzunehmen. Arbeitsabläufe Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 bietet zuverlässige Werkzeuge, die viele Aspekte Ihrer Dokumentenabläufe unterstützen. • Erstellen Sie Adobe PDFs in vielen verschiedenen Anwendungen. • Führen Sie Dateien aus mehreren Quellen in einem PDF-Paket zusammen. • Konvertieren Sie PDFs in andere Formate, wie Word, HTML oder JPG. • Beschränken Sie den Zugriff auf Ihre PDFs anhand verschiedener Sicherheitsfunktionen. • Genehmigen Sie Dokumente durch digitale Unterschriften und Zertifikate. • Führen Sie Überprüfungen mit Hilfe verschiedener Kommentierungs- und Überprüfungswerkzeuge durch. • Erstellen Sie ausfüllbare Formulare, verteilen Sie diese und erfassen Sie die Formulardaten. Die folgenden Themen zum Schnelleinstieg geben einen Überblick über die Funktionen von Acrobat 3D. Weitere Informationen zu einem Thema finden Sie in der Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 9 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-10 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte PDF-Dokumente erstellen PDF-Dokumente behalten das Erscheinungsbild des Ausgangsdokuments bei, so dass Sie sich nicht um eine Beeinträchtigung der Dokumentqualität sorgen müssen. Und da PDFs auf den Plattformen Windows, Mac OS und UNIX mit der kostenlosen Adobe Reader®-Software angezeigt werden können, sind alle Personen in der Lage, PDF-Dokumente auch ohne die Ausgangsanwendung anzuzeigen oder zu drucken. Sie können PDFs in Acrobat 3D oder in verschiedenen anderen Quellanwendungen erstellen. Sie haben Sie z. B. die Möglichkeit, eine E-MailNachricht mit Projektthemen in Outlook oder Lotus Notes in PDF zu konvertieren und diese Datei dann an ein PDF-Dokument anzuhängen, das die Projektdetails und den Zeitplan enthält. Oder Ihnen liegen beispielsweise Personalbögen nur auf Papier vor. Dann können Sie diese Papierdokumente problemlos in PDF-Dokumente umwandeln und so ein Online-Personalpaket erstellen. Konvertieren Sie Ihr Originaldokument (links) in Adobe PDF (Mitte) und fügen Sie anschließend Lesezeichen, Kommentare usw. in Acrobat ein (rechts). Aus Datei erstellen Zum Erstellen von PDF-Dokumenten in Acrobat ist es in der Regel erforderlich, dass die Ausgangsanwendung, mit der die Originaldatei erstellt wurde, auf dem System installiert ist. 1 Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „PDF erstellen“ und wählen Sie „Aus Datei“. 2 Wählen Sie die zu konvertierende Datei aus und klicken Sie auf „Öffnen“. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 10 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-11 Erste Schritte Die Ausgangsanwendung wird automatisch geöffnet oder ein Statusdialogfeld wird angezeigt. Wenn die Datei ein nicht unterstütztes Format aufweist, wird eine Meldung angezeigt, dass die Datei nicht in PDF konvertiert werden kann. Aus Papierdokument erstellen Mit Acrobat 3D und einem Scanner können Sie eine PDF-Datei direkt aus einem Papierdokument erstellen. 1 Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „PDF erstellen“ und wählen Sie „Über den Scanner“. 2 Wählen Sie im Dialogfeld „Acrobat Scan“ die Eingabe-, Ausgabe- und Dokumentoptionen aus und klicken Sie dann auf „Scannen“. 3 Wenn Sie eine neue PDF-Datei erstellen, geben Sie Dateinamen und Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. 4 Wählen Sie „Weitere Seiten scannen“ oder „Scanvorgang abgeschlossen“ aus. Aus einer Webseite erstellen Sie können Webseiten von der obersten Ebene oder einer beliebigen Unterebene einer URL-Adresse herunterladen und konvertieren. 1 Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „PDF erstellen“ und wählen Sie „Aus Webseite“. 2 Geben Sie die URL in das Feld „URL“ ein. (Klicken Sie auf „Durchsuchen“, um eine bereits heruntergeladene Webseite zu konvertieren.) 3 Geben Sie die Anzahl der Ebenen für den Download sowie den Speicherort der herunterzuladenden Dateien an und klicken Sie dann auf „Erstellen“. Nach eigenen Vorstellungen erstellen Sie können kleine PDF-Dokumente erstellen, die in Acrobat 3D bearbeitet werden können. 1 Wählen Sie „Datei“ > „PDF erstellen“ > „Aus leerer Seite“. 2 Klicken Sie auf das Dokument und geben Sie Text ein. Mit Hilfe der Optionen auf der Werkzeugleiste „Neues Dokument“ können Sie Textattribute ändern. 3 Speichern Sie das Dokument. 4 Um die Bearbeitung fortzusetzen wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Bearbeitung fortsetzen“. Um das PDF-Dokument zu konvertieren, so dass es nicht erneut bearbeitet werden kann, wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Keine weitere Bearbeitung“. Aus Word erstellen Nach der Installation von Acrobat 3D wird Word eine Acrobat PDFMaker-Werkzeugleiste hinzugefügt. In Word 2007 für Windows erfolgt der Zugriff auf PDFMaker-Optionen nicht über die Werkzeugleiste, sondern über die Acrobat-Multifunktionsleiste. 1 Öffnen Sie die zu konvertierende Datei in Word. 2 Führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • (Word 2007 für Windows:) Klicken Sie auf „Acrobat“ und anschließend auf die Schaltfläche „PDF erstellen“ . • (Andere Versionen von Word:) Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „In Adobe PDF konvertieren“ . 3 Geben Sie einen Dateinamen und einen Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. 4 (Nur Mac OS) Klicken Sie auf „Datei anzeigen“ oder auf „Fertig“. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 11 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-12 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Sie können eine Datei auch in das PDF-Format konvertieren und anschließend per E-Mail zur Überprüfung senden, indem Sie auf „Erstellen und zur Überprüfung senden“ (Office 2007) bzw. auf „Zur Überprüfung senden“ (andere OfficeVersionen) klicken. Aus Outlook erstellen (Windows) Nach der Installation von Acrobat 3D wird Outlook eine Acrobat PDFMaker-Werkzeugleiste hinzugefügt. 1 Wählen Sie die gewünschten E-Mail-Nachrichten aus und klicken Sie auf „Adobe PDF aus ausgewählten Meldungen erstellen“ . 2 Geben Sie einen Dateinamen und einen Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. Je nach Konvertierungseinstellungen werden die ausgewählten Nachrichten in ein PDF-Paket gepackt oder in einem PDF-Dokument zusammengeführt. Zum Konvertieren von E-Mail-Ordnern wählen Sie die gewünschten Ordner aus und klicken auf „Adobe PDF aus Ordnern erstellen“ . Außerdem können Sie automatisches Archivieren von E-Mail-Nachrichten und -Ordnern möglich. Aus Lotus Notes erstellen (Windows) Nach der Installation von Acrobat 3D werden Lotus Notes eine Acrobat PDFMaker-Werkzeugleiste und dem Menü „Aktionen“ Befehle hinzugefügt. 1 Wählen Sie die gewünschten E-Mail-Nachrichten aus und klicken Sie auf „Ausgewählte Nachrichten in Adobe PDF konvertieren“ . 2 Geben Sie einen Dateinamen und einen Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. Je nach Konvertierungseinstellungen werden die ausgewählten Nachrichten in ein PDF-Paket gepackt oder in einem PDF-Dokument zusammengeführt. Sie können einen ganzen Ordner in PDF konvertieren, indem Sie auf „Ausgewählten Ordner in Adobe PDF konvertieren“ klicken. Aus Internet Explorer erstellen (Windows) Sie können eine gesamte Webseite oder einen bestimmten Teil in das PDF-Format konvertieren. 1 Öffnen Sie in Internet Explorer die zu konvertierende Webseite. 2 (Optional) Ziehen Sie mit der Maus, um den Text und die Bilder auszuwählen, die Sie konvertieren möchten. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Webseite in PDF konvertieren“ . 4 Geben Sie einen Dateinamen und einen Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. Außerdem können Sie eine oder mehrere Webseiten und sogar ganze Websites aus Acrobat 3D konvertieren. Über Adobe PDF-Drucker erstellen In vielen Anwendungen können Sie den Befehl „Drucken“ mit dem Adobe PDF-Drucker verwenden, um eine Datei in das PDF-Format zu konvertieren. 1 Öffnen Sie die zu konvertierende Datei und wählen Sie „Datei“ > „Drucken“. 2 Wählen Sie den Adobe PDF-Drucker in der Druckerliste aus und drucken Sie dann die Datei. 3 Geben Sie bei Anzeige einer entsprechenden Meldung einen Dateinamen und einen Speicherort an und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 12 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-13 Erste Schritte Sie können auch eine andere standardmäßige Adobe PDF-Druckereinstellung wählen oder eine benutzerdefinierte Einstellung erstellen. Gemeinsam an 3D-Entwürfen arbeiten Tauschen Sie Ihre 3D-Konstruktionsideen aus und arbeiten Sie an ihnen mit anderen zusammen, indem Sie sie in sichere PDF-Dateien konvertieren, denen andere im kostenlosen Adobe Reader Kommentare hinzufügen können. Starten Sie eine E-Mail-basierte Überprüfung, um ein Feedback von Ihren Mitarbeitern zu erhalten. Der E-Mail-basierte Assistent aktiviert standardmäßig das Kommentieren für ReaderBenutzer. Oder starten Sie ein Acrobat ConnectMeeting, in dem Sie 3D-Entwürfe auf Ihrem Desktop in Echtzeit anzeigen und diese besprechen können. Hinweis: Schützen Sie Ihre 3D PDF-Datei, bevor Sie mit der Überprüfung beginnen. Sie können die Sicherheitseigenschaften in einem Reader-aktiviertem PDF nicht ändern. Mitarbeiter können sich alle Aspekte des 3D-Modells ansehen, von ausgeblendeten internen Strukturen bis hin zu Explosionsansichten. Sie können Teile drehen, messen und Querschnitte erstellen und dabei ihre Kommentare in Notizen, Zeichnungen oder mit Hilfe anderer Markierungen hinzufügen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 13 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-14 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte 3D-Dateien in PDF konvertieren Sie können jedes unterstützte 3D-Dateiformat in PDF konvertieren. (Eine Liste unterstützter Dateiformate erhalten Sie unter „Bearbeiten“ > „Grundeinstellungen“ durch Auswahl der Option „In PDF konvertieren“ im linken Abschnitt.) 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf die Schaltfläche „PDF erstellen“ und wählen Sie „Aus Datei“. 2 Suchen Sie nach der zu konvertierenden 3D-CADDatei. 3 Wählen Sie die gewünschte Vorgabe oder individuelle Einstellungen. Kommentare zu einem 3D-Modell hinzufügen Durch Hinzufügen von Kommentaren erstellen Sie eine neue, diesen Kommentaren zugeordnete Ansicht. 1 Wählen Sie ein Werkzeug aus der Werkzeugleiste „Kommentieren und markieren“ aus. 2 Klicken Sie auf das 3D-Modell, um einen Kommentar hinzuzufügen und in der Modellhierarchie eine neue Ansicht zu erstellen. Sie können einer vorhandenen Kommentaransicht Kommentare hinzufügen, indem Sie vor dem Klicken auf das Modell in der Modellhierarchie die entsprechende Ansicht auswählen. Meeting eröffnen Wenn Sie über ein Adobe Acrobat Connect-Konto verfügen, können Sie ein Meeting beginnen, um PDFDokumente in einem Webbrowser zu überprüfen. Zum Starten eines Meetings können Sie auch ein Testkonto erstellen. Hinweis: Acrobat Connect steht nicht in allen Sprachen zur Verfügung. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Meeting eröffnen“ . 2 Klicken Sie auf „Anmelden“ und geben Sie Ihre Meeting-URL, Ihren Benutzernamen und Ihr Kennwort ein. (Oder klicken Sie auf „Testkonto anlegen“ und befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm.) 3 Klicken Sie auf „E-Mail-Einladungen senden“ oder „Meinen Bildschirm freigeben“. Interoperabilität von CAD, CAM und CAE Vom Zeichenbrett bis zur Produktionsanlage kann PDF den Übertragung von CAD-, CAM- und CAEInformationen erleichtern. So können Sie schnell eine gesamte Baugruppe in eine PDF-Datei konvertieren, die erheblich kleiner als die Originaldatei ist, wobei geometrischen Abmessungen und Toleranzen sowie weitere Produktspezifikationen beibehalten werden. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 14 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-15 Erste Schritte Mit Acrobat 3D können Hersteller und Lieferanten jede 3D CAD-Datei virtuell öffnen, ohne die originale CAD-Anwendung oder einen CAD-Translator zu installieren. Importieren Sie PMI aus CATIA V5-, I-DEAS-, JT-, NX- und Pro/ENGINEER-Dateien und zeigen Sie diese an. Bei Fertigstellung der Konstruktion exportieren Sie Geometrie in ein Standarddateiformat, das in CAM-Anwendungen wieder verwendet werden kann, um Teile auszuschneiden, zu generieren und zusammenzusetzen. Produktinformationen für ein 3D-Modell anzeigen Wurden PMI-Daten bei der PDF-Konvertierung importiert, können diese sowohl in der Modellhierarchie als auch im 3D-Modell angezeigt werden. 1 Klicken Sie auf das 3D-Modell und anschließend auf das Symbol für die Modellhierarchie in der 3D-Werkzeugleiste. 2 Klicken Sie in der Modellhierarchie auf die einzelnen Ansichten, um festzustellen, welche die PMI-Daten enthält. Geometrie aus einem 3D-Modell exportieren Wenn die Geometrie bei der Konvertierung beibehalten wurde, können Sie Exporte im IGES-, STEP-, VRML- oder ParaSolid-Dateiformat erstellen. Diese Formate können von den meisten CAE und CAM-Anwendungen gelesen werden. 1 Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste auf das 3DModell und wählen Sie aus dem Kontextmenü die Option „Daten exportieren“ aus. 2 Wählen Sie einen Dateityp aus und legen Sie über die Schaltfläche „Einstellungen“ entsprechende Option dafür fest. Dateien zusammenführen Führen Sie verwandte Dateien aus verschiedenen Quellen in einem PDF-Dokument oder in einem PDF-Paket zusammen. Sie können z. B. Broschüren, Präsentationen, Tabellenkalkulationen und Verträge zu einem Angebot zusammenfassen. Wenn Sie Dateien in einem PDF-Dokument zusammenführen, können Sie anschließend Elemente hinzufügen, die das Dokument logisch verknüpfen. Sie können dazu in die neue Datei z. B. eine Kopf- oder Fußzeile einfügen. Oder Sie nummerieren die Seiten neu, so dass in der Werkzeugleiste „Seitennavigation“ fortlaufende Seitenzahlen für die zusammengeführten Dateien angezeigt werden. Sie können Seiten ggf. auch drehen, löschen oder ersetzen, um dem Dokument ein zusammenhängendes Aussehen zu geben und den Inhalt auf dem neuesten Stand zu halten. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 15 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-16 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Führen Sie Dokumente aus verschiedenen Anwendungen in einem Adobe PDF-Dokument zusammen. PDF-Dokument aus mehreren Dateien erstellen Verschiedene Dateitypen lassen sich problemlos zu einer PDF-Datei zusammenführen. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Dateien zusammenführen“ und anschließend auf „Hinzufügen“. 2 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Dateien für die Zusammenführung aus und klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“. 3 Passen Sie die Reihenfolge der Dateien wie gewünscht an und wählen Sie eine Dateigröße sowie eine Konvertierungseinstellung. 4 Klicken Sie auf „Weiter“, wählen Sie „Dateien in einem einzigen PDF-Dokument zusammenführen“ und klicken Sie auf „Erstellen“. Statt Dateien zusammenzuführen, können Sie auch ein PDF-Paket aus Dateien erstellen. PDF-Dokumente in einem Paket zusammenfassen Mit Hilfe von PDF-Paketen können Sie zusammengehörige Informationen in einer PDF-Datei bündeln. Die einzelnen PDFs bleiben dabei als eigenständige Dateien erhalten. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Dateien zusammenführen“ und anschließend auf „Hinzufügen“. 2 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Dateien für die Zusammenführung aus und klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“. 3 Passen Sie die Reihenfolge der Dateien wie gewünscht an und wählen Sie eine Dateigröße sowie eine Konvertierungseinstellung. 4 Klicken Sie auf „Weiter“, wählen Sie „Dateien in ein PDF-Paket packen“ und klicken Sie auf „Erstellen“. Liste zusammenzuführender Dateien bearbeiten Beim Zusammenführen von Dateien stehen Ihnen verschiedene Optionen zum Anpassen des Dateiensatzes zur Verfügung. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Dateien zusammenführen“ , klicken Sie auf „Hinzufügen“ und fügen Sie die gewünschten Dateien hinzu. 2 Wenn Sie die Dateiliste ändern bzw. eine Datei aus der Liste entfernen möchten, wählen Sie eine Datei aus und führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Klicken Sie auf „Nach oben“ bzw. „Nach unten“ oder ziehen Sie die Datei an eine neue Position. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 16 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-17 Erste Schritte • Klicken Sie auf „Seiten wählen“, um eine Untergruppe von Seiten einzuschließen. (Der Name der Schaltfläche kann je nach Dateityp unterschiedlich sein.) • Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „Entfernen“ oder drücken Sie die Entf-Taste. Kopf- und Fußzeilen hinzufügen Sie können eine einzige Kopf- und Fußzeile für das gesamte PDF-Dokument einfügen oder verschiedene Kopf- und Fußzeilen auf bestimmte Seiten anwenden. 1 Wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Kopf- und Fußzeile“ > „Hinzufügen“. Wenn eine Meldung angezeigt wird, klicken Sie auf „Neue hinzufügen“. 2 Legen Sie die Schrift und die Randeinstellungen fest. 3 Geben Sie in die Textfelder für die Kopf- und Fußzeile den gewünschten Text ein. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltflächen unter den Feldern, um eine Seitenzahl oder ein Datum einzufügen. Sie können die Einstellungen für die Kopf- und Fußzeilen zur Wiederverwendung speichern. Seiten neu nummerieren Eine Neunummerierung von Seiten betrifft nur die Seitenzahlen, die im Fenster „Seiten“ und in der Werkzeugleiste angezeigt werden. Zum Ändern der Seitenzahlen, die auf den Dokumentseiten angezeigt werden, fügen Sie eine Kopf- oder Fußzeileein. 1 Klicken Sie auf die Seiten-Schaltfläche und wählen Sie im Menü „Optionen“ den Befehl „Seiten nummerieren“. 2 Legen Sie die Seiten fest, auf die Sie die Nummerierung anwenden möchten. 3 Wählen Sie den Nummerierungsstil, geben Sie bei Bedarf ein Präfix ein und legen Sie die Seitenzahl der Startseite fest. Sie können auch den Nummerierungsstil des vorherigen Abschnitts übernehmen. Seiten drehen Sie können alle oder einige ausgewählte Seiten in einem PDF-Dokument drehen. 1 Wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Seiten drehen“. 2 Legen Sie die Richtung der Drehung und den Seitenbereich fest. 3 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen in den Drehen-Menüs. Zum vorübergehenden Drehen einer Seite wählen Sie „Anzeige“ > „Ansicht drehen“ > „Im UZS“ oder „Gegen UZS“. Seiten löschen Nach dem Zusammenführen von Dateien können Sie unerwünschte oder leere Seiten löschen. 1 (Optional) Klicken Sie im Navigationsfenster auf die Schaltfläche „Seiten“ und wählen Sie die zu löschenden Seiten aus. 2 Wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Seiten löschen“. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Ausgewählte“, um die ausgewählten Seiten zu löschen, oder klicken Sie auf „Von“ und geben Sie einen Seitenbereich an. Wenn Sie eine Kopie des Original-PDF-Dokuments bewahren möchten, sollten Sie das neue Dokument mit dem Befehl „Speichern unter“ (nicht „Speichern“) speichern. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 17 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-18 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Seiten ersetzen Um ein PDF-Dokument schnell zu aktualisieren, können Sie einzelne Seiten ersetzen. 1 Wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Seiten ersetzen“. 2 Wählen Sie die Datei aus, die die neuen Seiten enthält, und klicken Sie auf „Auswählen“. 3 Geben Sie unter „Original“ die zu ersetzenden Seiten an. Geben Sie unter „Ersetzen“ die erste zu ersetzende Seite ein. Zu den Originalseiten gehörende interaktive Elemente wie Verknüpfungen und Lesezeichen werden nicht gelöscht. Exportieren Wenn Sie keinen Zugriff auf die ursprüngliche Quelldatei eines PDF-Dokuments haben, können Sie das PDF in ein bearbeitbares Format konvertieren. Darüber hinaus können Sie ausgewählten Text und Bilder kopieren und in anderen Dokumenten wiederverwenden. Oder extrahieren Sie Seiten und speichern Sie sie als neues PDF-Dokument. Sie können z. B. eine Broschüre im HTML-Format speichern, um sie auf Ihrer Firmen-Website zu verwenden. Sie können auch einige relevante Seiten aus einem umfangreichen internen Dokument extrahieren und an Kunden weiterleiten. Bilder und Text aus Konstruktionsspezifikationen können problemlos wiederverwendet werden. Kopieren Sie diese dazu einfach in ein Word-, Photoshop- oder InDesign-Dokument. Als Word-Dokument exportieren Wenn Sie nicht über die ursprüngliche Datei verfügen, aus der das PDF-Dokument erstellt wurde, können Sie die PDF-Datei als in Word bearbeitbares WordDokument speichern. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Exportieren“ und wählen Sie „Word-Dokument“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Einstellungen“, um Konvertierungseinstellungen festzulegen. Hinweis: Wenn Sie eine PDF- Dat ei im Word- For mat speichern, entspricht die so entstandene Datei nicht einer tatsächlich in Word erstellten Datei. Kodierungsinformationen können verloren gehen. Als HTML oder XML exportieren Wenn Sie den Inhalt eines PDF-Dokuments im Internet verwenden möchten, können Sie die PDFDatei einfach in das HTML- oder XML-Format umwandeln. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Exportieren“ und wählen Sie „HTML-Webseite“ oder „XML 1.0“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Einstellungen“, um Konvertierungseinstellungen festzulegen. Sie können PDF-Dokumente im Format „HTML 3.2“ speichern, indem Sie auf „Exportieren“ klicken und dann „Weitere Formate“ > „HTML 3.2“ wählen. Als Text exportieren Sie können PDFs als RTF-Dateien (Rich Text Format), als verfügbare und als normale Textdateien speichern. Im RTF-Format bleiben die meisten 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 18 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-19 Erste Schritte Formatierungseinstellungen erhalten. Bei verfügbarem Text werden Elemente wie Kommentare, Formularfelder und alternativer Text übernommen. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Exportieren“ , wählen Sie „Weitere Formate“ und dann das gewünschte Textformat. 2 Wenn Sie eine Datei als RTF oder normale Textdatei speichern, können Sie über die Schaltfläche „Einstellungen“ die Konvertierungseinstellungen anpassen. Text auswählen und kopieren Sie können in PDF-Dokumenten Wörter, Zeilen und Spalten mit Text kopieren. 1 Führen Sie mit dem Auswahl-Werkzeug einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Ziehen Sie die Maus über den gewünschten Text. • Doppel- oder Dreifachklicken Sie, um ein Wort bzw. eine Textzeile auszuwählen. 2 Zeigen Sie mit der Maus auf das Symbol, das neben dem ausgewählten Text zu sehen ist, und wählen Sie eine Option im Menü aus. Falls Sie bestimmten Text nicht auswählen können, ist er unter Umständen Teil eines Bildes oder gescannten Dokuments. Bilder auswählen und kopieren Sie können ein Bild aus einer PDF-Datei in die Zwischenablage bzw. in eine andere Anwendung kopieren oder in einer Datei speichern. 1 Klicken Sie mit dem Auswahl-Werkzeug auf ein Bild oder ziehen Sie - nachdem sich der Mauszeiger in ein Fadenkreuz verwandelt hat - mit der Maus, um einen Teil des Bildes auszuwählen. 2 Führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Ziehen Sie das Bild in ein geöffnetes Dokument einer anderen Anwendung. • Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste bzw. bei gedrückter Ctrl-Taste auf das Bild und wählen Sie „Bild kopieren“ bzw. „Bild speichern unter“. Schnappschüsse erstellen Mit dem Schnappschuss-Werkzeug können Sie den gesamten ausgewählten Inhalt kopieren. Sowohl Text als auch Grafiken werden dabei als Bild kopiert. 1 Wählen Sie „Werkzeuge“ > „Auswählen und zoomen“ > „Schnappschuss-Werkzeug“. 2 Wählen Sie durch Ziehen mit der Maus Inhalt auf der Seite aus bzw. klicken Sie, um die gesamte Seite zu kopieren. Beim Loslassen der Maustaste wird der ausgewählte Inhalt in die Zwischenablage kopiert. Seiten entnehmen Entnommene Seiten werden in einer neuen PDFDatei gespeichert. 1 Wählen Sie „Dokument“> „Seiten entnehmen“. 2 Geben Sie den Bereich der zu entnehmenden Seiten an. 3 Legen Sie fest, ob die Seiten nach der Entnahme gelöscht werden sollen. 4 Um entnommene Seiten nicht zusammen in einem Dokument, sondern in separaten Dateien zu speichern, aktivieren Sie das Kontrollkästchen „Seiten als einzelne Dateien entnehmen“. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 19 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-20 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Es werden alle Verknüpfungen, Kommentare und Formularfelder, nicht jedoch Lesezeichen und Artikel entnommen. Sicher Den Zugriff auf Ihre PDF-Dokumente können Sie mit Hilfe von Kennwörtern, Zertifikaten und serverbasierten Richtlinien steuern. Anhand dieser Sicherheitsfunktionen können Sie bestimmten, was andere Personen mit Ihren PDFs tun und welche Inhalte sie anzeigen können. Erstellen Sie z. B. schreibgeschützte Dateien für die Verteilung im Internet. Oder schränken Sie den Zugriff auf Dateien ein, die Sie zur Überprüfung senden, so dass nur das Kommentieren erlaubt ist. Sie können vertrauliche Informationen in einem juristischen Dokument schwärzen oder persönlichen Daten in einer PDF suchen und entfernen, bevor Sie das Dokument der Öffentlichkeit zugänglich machen. PDF-Datei auf ausgeblendeten Inhalt überprüfen Bevor Sie ein PDF-Dokument an andere Personen weitergeben, möchten Sie vielleicht Informationen zur Geschichte des Dokuments oder persönliche Details wie Metadaten mit Ihrem Namen als Verfasser entfernen. 1 Wählen Sie „Dokument“ > „Dokument untersuchen“. 2 Wählen Sie die Elemente aus, die aus dem PDFDokument entfernt werden sollen, und klicken Sie auf „Alle ausgewählten Elemente entfernen“. 3 Speichern Sie das Dokument unter einem neuen Namen. Sie können ein PDF-Dokument auch im Anschluss an die Schwärzung. Vertraulichen Inhalt schwärzen Mit der Funktion zum Schwärzen von Text können Sie vertrauliche Inhalte aus einem PDF-Dokument entfernen. Wichtig: Speichern Sie eine Kopie der PDF-Datei, bevor Sie Text schwärzen. 1 Wählen Sie „Anzeige“ > „Werkzeugleisten“ > „Schwärzung“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Zum Schwärzen markieren“ und führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Doppelklicken Sie auf ein Wort oder Bild. • Ziehen Sie die Maus über den gewünschten Text. • Ziehen Sie die Maus bei gedrückter Strg- bzw. CtrlTaste über einen Seitenbereich. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Schwärzungen anwenden“ . Suchen Sie ggf. nach ausgeblendetem Inhalt und entfernen Sie diesen. Entfernen Sie mit „Suchen und schwärzen“ alle Exemplare einer Suchzeichenfolge. Dokumente mit einem Kennwort versehen Eine Möglichkeit, den Zugriff auf ein PDF-Dokument einzuschränken ist, ein Kennwort zum Öffnen der Datei festzulegen. Wichtig: Falls Sie das Kennwort vergessen, kann die PDF-Datei nicht mehr geöffnet werden. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Schützen“ und wählen Sie „Verschlüsselung mit Kennwort“. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 20 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-21 Erste Schritte 2 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Kennwort zum Öffnen des Dokuments erforderlich“ und geben Sie das Kennwort in das Textfeld ein. Bei diesem Kennwort wird die Groß-/Kleinschreibung beachtet. Sollte die PDF-Datei bereits geschützt sein, müssen Sie möglicherweise das Berechtigungskennwort eingeben, um die Sicherheitseinstellungen ändern zu können. PDFs vor Änderungen schützen Sie können Sicherheitsbeschränkungen festlegen, um andere Personen daran zu hindern, Ihr PDFDokument zu ändern. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Schützen“ und wählen Sie „Verschlüsselung mit Kennwort“. 2 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Einschränkung für Bearbeitung und Drucken des Dokuments“ und geben Sie das Berechtigungskennwort ein. 3 Wählen Sie eine Option im Menü „Zulässige Änderungen“ aus. Weitere Informationen zu den übrigen Schutzoptionen im Dropdown-Menü „Sicherheitssystem“ finden Sie in der Hilfe. Geschützte Anlagen erstellen Sie können PDF-Dateien und Dateien anderen Formats schützen, indem Sie sie in einen verschlüsselten Sicherheitsumschlag einbetten und als E-Mail-Anlage versenden. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Schützen“ und wählen Sie „Sicherheitsumschlag erstellen“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Zu sendende Datei hinzufügen“ und wählen Sie die gewünschten Dokumente aus. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Weiter“ und folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um den Sicherheitsumschlag zu erstellen. Die Empfänger können die verschlüsselten Dokumente entnehmen und speichern. Durch das Speichern wird die Verschlüsselung aufgehoben. PDFs mit Richtlinien schützen Durch Verwenden einer von Ihnen erstellten Benutzerrichtlinie oder einer von einem Adobe Policy ServerVerwalter eingerichteten und für ganze Benutzergruppen geltenden Firmenrichtlinie können Sie einfach und schnell Sicherheitseinstellungen anwenden. Acrobat 3D wird mit zwei Benutzerrichtlinien geliefert. 1 Klicken Sie in der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Schützen“ und wählen Sie oben im Menü eine der Richtlinien aus. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Ja“ und passen Sie die Sicherheitseinstellungen wie gewünscht an. Benutzersicherheitsrichtlinien erstellen Sicherheit Richtlinien sind eine einfache Methode, mehreren PDF-Dokumenten dieselben Sicherheitseinstellungen zuzuweisen. Sicherheitsrichtlinien beinhalten eine Verschlüsselung, Berechtigungseinstellungen sowie Informationen über Anwender, die die PDFs öffnen oder Sicherheitseinstellungen ändern dürfen. 1 Klicken Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Schützen“ und wählen Sie „Sicherheitsrichtlinien verwalten“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Neu“ und wählen Sie die gewünschte Schutzmethode. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 21 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-22 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte 3 Klicken Sie auf „Weiter“ und folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um die Richtlinie zu definieren und die gewünschten Sicherheitseinstellungen festzulegen. Unterschreiben Das digitale Unterschreiben eines PDF-Dokuments entspricht im Grunde dem Unterschreiben eines Papierdokuments. Sie können mit einer digitalen Unterschrift z. B. Inhalt genehmigen oder angeben, dass Sie den Inhalt überprüft haben oder den im Dokument dargelegten Bedingungen zustimmen. Durch Hinzufügen einer digitalen Unterschrift können Sie außerdem am PDF-Dokument vorgenommene Änderungen zurückverfolgen. Zur zusätzlichen Sicherheit können Sie ein PDFDokument zertifizieren, damit die Empfänger sicher sein können, dass das Dokument nicht verändert wurde. Und zuletzt können Sie digitale Unterschriften überprüfen, um sicherzustellen, dass sie gültig sind. Bestätigen Sie durch Ihre Unterschrift, dass Sie ein Dokument gelesen haben und mit dem Inhalt einverstanden sind. A. Zertifizierungsunterschrift B. Digitale Unterschrift Selbst signierte digitale ID erstellen Zum Unterzeichnen von Dokumenten und zum Einsatz von Zertifikaten ist eine digitale ID erforderlich. Hierfür sind in vielen Fällen selbst signierte digitale IDs, die in Acrobat 3D erstellt wurden, geeignet. Informationen zum Erwerb einer digitalen ID über einen Adobe-Sicherheitspartner finden Sie auf der Adobe-Website. 1 Wählen Sie „Erweitert“ > „Sicherheitseinstellungen“. 2 Wählen Sie „Digitale IDs“ aus und klicken Sie auf „ID hinzufügen“. A B 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 22 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-23 Erste Schritte 3 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Selbst signierte digitale ID zur Verwendung mit Acrobat erstellen“. 4 Folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um eine selbst signierte digitale ID anzulegen. Digitale IDs registrieren Sie müssen digitale IDs in Acrobat 3D registrieren, bevor Sie sie verwenden können. 1 Wählen Sie „Erweitert“ > „Sicherheitseinstellungen“. 2 Wählen Sie „Digitale IDs“ aus und klicken Sie auf „ID hinzufügen“. 3 Aktivieren Sie die Option „Vorhandene digitale ID-Datei suchen“. 4 Folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, wählen Sie die digitale ID-Datei aus, geben Sie Ihr Kennwort ein und registrieren Sie die digitale ID. Sie haben die Möglichkeit, selbst signierte digitale IDs in Acrobat 3D zu erstellen. Informationen zum Erwerb einer digitalen ID über einen AdobeSicherheitspartner finden Sie auf der Adobe-Website. Zertifikate freigeben Zu Ihrer digitalen ID gehört ein Zertifikat, mit dem Dritte Ihre Unterschrift prüfen und Dokumente für Sie verschlüsseln können. 1 Wählen Sie „Erweitert“ > „Sicherheitseinstellungen“. 2 Wählen Sie links „Digitale IDs“. 3 Wählen Sie die freizugebende ID aus und klicken Sie auf „Exportieren“ . 4 Folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um das Zertifikat per E-Mail zu versenden oder als Datei zu speichern. Wenn Sie ein Sicherheitssystem eines Drittanbieters verwenden, müssen Sie Ihr Zertifikat normalerweise nicht an andere übermitteln. Erscheinungsbild für Unterschrift erstellen Sie können das Erscheinungsbild der digitalen Unterschrift ändern. Sie können z. B. Ihre gescannte Unterschrift einschließen. 1 (Optional) Speichern Sie das gewünschte Bild auf einer eigenen Seite und konvertieren Sie die Seite in PDF. 2 Wählen Sie „Bearbeiten“ > „Grundeinstellungen“ (Windows) bzw. „Acrobat 3D“ > „Grundeinstellungen“ (Mac OS), und wählen Sie „Sicherheit“. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Neu“ und geben Sie einen Titel ein. 4 (Optional) Wählen Sie „Importierte Grafik“, klicken Sie auf „Datei“ und wählen Sie die gewünschte Datei aus. 5 Wählen Sie die gewünschten Optionen aus. PDF-Dateien unterschreiben Mit einer digitalen Unterschrift genehmigen Sie eine PDF-Datei. Das beste Ergebnis erzielen Sie, wenn Sie Ihre Sicherheitseinstellungen so ändern, dass Sie beim Unterschreiben immer der DokumentvorschauModus aktiviert ist. Auf deise Weise können Sie das PDF-Dokument in einem sicheren Status anzeigen und unterschreiben. 1 Klicken Sie auf das Unterschriftsfeld. Oder klicken Sie auf „Unterschreiben“ und wählen Sie „Dokument unterschreiben“. 2 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm zum Anwenden Ihrer digitalen Unterschrift. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 23 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-24 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Enthält das Dokument kein nicht unterschriebenes Unterschriftsfeld, kicken Sie auf „Unterschreiben“ und wählen Sie „Unterschrift platzieren“, um das PDF zu unterschreiben. PDF-Dateien zertifizieren Durch die Zertifizierung eines PDF-Dokuments genehmigen Sie seinen Inhalt. Außerdem können Sie festlegen, welche Arten von Änderungen vorgenommen werden dürfen, damit die Zertifizierung des PDF-Dokuments gültig bleibt. 1 Klicken Sie in der Werkzeugleiste auf „Unterschreiben“ , wählen Sie „Mit sichtbarer Unterschrift zertifizieren“ oder „Ohne sichtbare Unterschrift zertifizieren“ und klicken Sie auf „OK“. 2 Wenn Sie die Zertifizierung mit sichtbarer Unterschrift gewählt haben, zeichnen Sie ein Unterschriftsfeld. 3 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm zum Anwenden Ihrer Zertifizierungsunterschrift. 4 Speichern Sie das PDF-Dokument unter einem anderen Dateinamen. Unterschriften prüfen Wenn Sie ein Dokument öffnen, wird neben der Unterschrift ein Statussymbol angezeigt, das angibt, ob die Unterschrift gültig ist. 1 Klicken Sie im Navigationsfenster auf die Schaltfläche „Unterschriften“ und wählen Sie die Unterschrift aus. 2 Klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste bzw. bei gedrückter Ctrl-Taste und wählen Sie „Unterschriftseigenschaften einblenden“. 3 Lösen Sie mit Hilfe der verschiedenen Registerkarten und Optionen des Dialogfeld „Unterschriftseigenschaften“ mögliche Probleme mit der Unterschrift. Wenn z. B. die Identität unbekannt ist oder nicht bestätigt wurde, klicken Sie auf die Registerkarte „Unterzeichner“ und dann auf „Zertifikat anzeigen“, um festzustellen, ob das Zertifikat vertrauenswürdig ist. Überarbeiten und kommentieren Starten Sie eine automatische E-Mail-basierte oder gemeinsame Überprüfung, um den Überprüfungsprozess zu vereinfachen. Wenn Sie ein PDF-Dokument mit Acrobat 3D überprüfen, können alle Benutzer mit Hilfe vieler verschiedener Kommentierungswerkzeuge Kommentare wie Notizen und Stempel, Textänderungen, Hervorhebungen und Grafikmarkierungen in ein einziges, unveränderliches Dokument einfügen. Bei einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung können die Überprüfer die Kommentare der anderen Überprüfer sehen und darauf antworten. Anhand des Überprüfungsprotokolls können Sie weitere Überprüfer einladen, erneut an einer Überprüfung teilnehmen und den Fortschritt gemeinsamer Überprüfungen verfolgen. Ihr Projektteam soll z. B. ein Datenblatt überprüfen, allerdings befinden sich die Beteiligten an verschiedenen Orten. Sie richten eine gemeinsame Überprüfung ein, um die PDF an alle Teilnehmer zu schicken. Öffnen die Teilnehmer (einschließlich Benutzer von Adobe Reader 8.0, wenn Sie zusätzliche Verwendungsrechte hinzugefügt haben) die E-MailAnlage, zeigt Acrobat die Werkzeugleiste zum Kommentieren sowie Überprüfungsanweisungen an. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 24 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-25 Erste Schritte Fügen Sie Ihrer PDF verschiedene Arten von Kommentaren hinzu. Diese werden auch in der Kommentarliste angezeigt. A. Hinweis B. Grafikmarkierungen C. Stempel D. Ersetzter Text E. Dateianlage F. Markierter Text E-Mail-basierte Überprüfung starten Bei einer E-Mail-basierten Überprüfung können Sie den Überprüfungsstatus protokollieren und erhaltene Kommentare in die PDF-Datei einfügen. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Überprüfen und kommentieren“ und wählen Sie „Zur E-Mail- Überprüfung anhängen“. 2 Geben Sie bei entsprechender Aufforderung Ihre persönlichen Informationen ein, um ein Überprüferprofil zu erstellen. 3 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um die PDF-Datei auszuwählen, Überprüfer einzuladen und die E-Mail-Einladung zu senden. Wenn Ihre E-Mail-Anwendung die E-Mails nicht automatisch sendet, müssen Sie vor dem Senden der Nachricht möglicherweise Warnmeldungen beantworten und zur E-Mail-Anwendung wechseln. Gemeinsame Überprüfung starten Bei einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung können Überprüfer (auch jene, die Adobe Reader verwenden) die Kommentare anderer Personen während der Überprüfung anzeigen und beantworten. Wichtig: Für die Durchführung einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung benötigen Sie und Ihre Überprüfer Schreibzugriff auf einen gemeinsamen Kommentarserver. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Überprüfen und kommentieren“ und wählen Sie „Zur gemeinsamen Überprüfung senden“. 2 Geben Sie bei entsprechender Aufforderung Ihre persönlichen Informationen ein, um ein Überprüferprofil zu erstellen. 3 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, einen Server auszuwählen (oder hinzuzufügen), das PDF-Dokument auszuwählen, Überprüfer einzuladen und die E-Mail-Einladung zu senden. Überprüfungen protokollieren und verwalten Das Überprüfungsprotokoll enthält Informationen für alle Dokumente, die Sie zur Überprüfung gesendet und erhalten haben. Mit dem Überprüfungsprotokoll können Sie erneut an einer Überprüfung teilnehmen, eine Erinnerung senden oder weitere Überprüfer einladen. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Kommentieren und markieren“ und wählen Sie „Überprüfungsprotokoll“. 2 Wählen Sie das gewünschte PDF links aus. 3 Führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Um erneut an einer Überprüfung teilzunehmen, doppelklicken Sie auf die entsprechende PDFDatei. A B C D F E 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 25 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-26 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte • Um eine Nachricht zu senden, klicken Sie auf „E-Mail an alle Überprüfer“ oder auf „E-MailInitiator“. • Um weitere Überprüfer einzuladen, klicken Sie auf „Überprüfer hinzufügen“. Weitere Korrektoren einladen Wenn Sie eine Überprüfung initiiert haben, können Sie zusätzliche Korrektoren zur Teilnahme einladen. Wenn Sie ein Überprüfer sind, können Sie den Initiator bitten, weitere Überprüfer hinzuzufügen, so dass der Initiator alle Überprüfer überwachen kann und benachrichtigt wird, wenn Kommentare gesendet werden. 1 Klicken Sie auf „Kommentieren und markieren“ und wählen Sie „Überprüfungsprotokoll“. 2 Wählen Sie das gewünschte PDF-Dokument unter „Von mir gesendete Überprüfungen“ aus und klicken Sie rechts auf „Überprüfer hinzufügen“. 3 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um E-Mail-Adressen hinzuzufügen, die Nachricht je nach Bedarf zu ändern und die Einladung zu senden. An E-Mail-Überprüfung teilnehmen Wenn Sie die PDF-Anlage in einer E-Mail- Überprüfung öffnen, wird eine protokollierte Kopie der PDF-Datei mit einer Dokumentmeldungsleiste, der Schaltfläche „Kommentare senden“ und der Werkzeugleiste „Kommentieren und markieren“ geöffnet. Wichtig: Wenn Sie beim Öffnen der PDF-Datei dazu aufgefordert werden, eine Verbindung zu einem Server herzustellen, haben Sie eine Einladung zu einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung erhalten. 1 Öffnen Sie die PDF-Anlage in der E-MailAnwendung. 2 Fügen Sie mit Hilfe von Kommentierungswerkzeugen Kommentare hinzu. 3 Speichern Sie die PDF-Datei und klicken Sie anschließend auf „Kommentare senden“. An einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung teilnehmen Wenn Sie das freigegebene PDF-Dokument öffnen, werden Kommentierungswerkzeuge und eine Dokumentmeldungsleiste mit Anweisungen angezeigt. 1 Öffnen Sie die PDF-Anlage oder die Verknüpfung. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Verbinden“ und geben Sie bei entsprechender Aufforderung Ihren Anmeldenamen und Ihr Kennwort ein. 3 Geben Sie bei Aufforderung Ihren Namen, Ihre E-Mail-Adresse und Ihre Berufsbezeichnung ein, um ein Überprüferprofil zu erstellen. 4 Fügen Sie Kommentare hinzu. 5 Wenn Sie Ihre Kommentare freigeben möchten, klicken Sie auf „Kommentare veröffentlichen“. Bei einer gemeinsamen Überprüfung können Sie die veröffentlichten Kommentare aller Überprüfer anzeigen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 26 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-27 Erste Schritte Grafikmarkierungen erstellen Mit den Grafikmarkierungswerkzeugen können Sie Zeilen, Pfeile und Formen in eine PDF-Datei einfügen. 1 Wählen Sie „Werkzeuge“ > „Kommentieren und mar kieren“ und wählen Sie das ge wüns cht e Wer kzeug. 2 Zeichnen Sie in der PDF-Datei. Sie können beispielsweise durch Klicken und Ziehen eine Linie, einen Pfeil oder ein Rechteck zeichnen. 3 (Optional) Doppelklicken Sie mit dem AuswahlWerkzeug auf die Markierung und geben Sie einen Kommentar in die Popup-Notiz ein. Zum Ändern der Eigenschaften, wie Linienfarbe und -breite, klicken Sie mit der rechten Maustaste bzw. bei gedrückter Ctrl-Taste auf die Markierung und wählen „Eigenschaften“. Formulare Sie können ein PDF-Formular mit interaktiven Formularfeldern aus vielen verschiedenen Quellen erstellen - aus einem vorhandenen elektronischen Dokument, z. B. einem Word-Dokument oder einer Tabellenkalkulation, einem gescannten Papierdokument oder einer Vorlage. Sie können das Formular dann per E-Mail oder über einen freigegebenen Server verteilen und die an Sie zurückgesendeten Formulare zurückverfolgen. Die Formulardaten können Sie anschließend problemlos erfassen, überprüfen und in andere Anwendungen exportieren. Sie können z. B. alle Personalbögen in PDF konvertieren und diese dann auf einem freigegebenen Server zugänglich machen. Sie können dann ein bestimmtes Formular zurückverfolgen, z. B. ein jährlich auszufüllendes Versicherungsformular. Auf diese Weise können Sie feststellen, wer das Formular bereits ausgefüllt und zurückgesendet hat. Nachdem Sie die zurückgesendeten Daten erfasst haben, können Sie sie in eine persönliche Datenbank oder Tabelle exportieren. Interaktive Formularfelder vereinfachen die Datenerfassung. A. Kontrollkästchen B. Optionsfeld C. Kombinationsfeld D. Text feld E. Schaltfläche E D A B C 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 27 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-28 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Formulare erstellen Der Assistent für neue Formulare unterstützt Sie bei der Erstellung eines PDF-Formulars aus einer Vorlage (nur Windows), einem elektronischen Dokument, aus Tabellenkalkulationsdaten oder einem gescannten Papierdokument. 1 Klicken Sie in der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf „Formulare“ und wählen Sie „Neues Formular erstellen“. 2 Wählen Sie eine Quelle für das PDF-Formular und klicken Sie auf „Weiter“. 3 Befolgen Sie die auf dem Bildschirm angezeigten Anweisungen. Formulare, die mit dem Assistenten erstellt wurden, sind LiveCycle Designer-Formulare. Wenn Sie stattdessen ein Acrobat-Formular erstellen möchten, wählen Sie „Formulare“ > „Formularfelderkennung ausführen“. Formulare bearbeiten Abhängig davon, wie ein PDF-Formular erstellt wurde, können Sie es in Acrobat 3D oder Adobe LiveCycle Designer (nur Windows) bearbeiten. Hinweis: (Windows) PDF-Formulare, die in Acrobat 3D erstellt wurden, können in LiveCycle Designer bearbeitet werden. In LiveCycle Designer erstellte oder bearbeitete Formulare können jedoch nicht in Acrobat 3D bearbeitet werden. 1 Öffnen Sie ein PDF-Formular. 2 Wählen Sie „Formulare“ > „Formular in Designer bearbeiten“ bzw. „Formular in Acrobat bearbeiten“. 3 Fügen Sie nach Wunsch Formularfelder und Feldeigenschaften hinzu und bearbeiten Sie diese. Formulare verteilen Nach der Erstellung eines PDF-Formulars können Sie es mit dem Assistenten zur Verteilung von Formularen verteilen. Hinweis: Um den Assistenten verwenden zu können, muss das Formular eine Senden-Schaltfläche enthalten. 1 Öffnen Sie das gewünschte Formular. 2 Klicken Sie in der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf die Schaltfläche „Formulare“ und wählen Sie „Formular verteilen“. 3 Befolgen Sie die Anweisungen auf dem Bildschirm, um das Formular für die Verteilung vorzubereiten. 4 Geben Sie an, ob Sie das Formular per E-Mail senden oder speichern und später senden möchten. 5 Befolgen Sie die Bildschirmanweisungen zum Verteilen des Formulars. Formulare protokollieren und verwalten Mit dem Formularprotokoll lassen sich von Ihnen verteilte Formulare einfacher verwalten. 1 Klicken Sie in der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf die Schaltfläche „Formulare“ und wählen Sie „Formulare zurückverfolgen“. 2 Wählen Sie im linken Fensterbereich ein Symbol, um die Formulare in dieser Kategorie anzuzeigen: • Bei „Verfahren“ werden Formulare angezeigt, die Sie erhalten haben. • Bei „Verlauf“ werden Formulare angezeigt, die Sie verteilt haben. • Über „Suchergebnisse“ können Sie bestimmte Formulare suchen. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 28 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-29 Erste Schritte • Unter „Formularbibliothek“ werden Formulare angezeigt, die Sie für eine künftige Verteilung in der Bibliothek gespeichert haben. Per E-Mail erhaltene Daten kompilieren Zurückgesendete Formulardaten können Sie in einem Datensatz kompilieren. 1 Öffnen Sie die E-Mail-Anlage mit dem zurückgesendeten Formular. 2 Wählen Sie im angezeigten Dialogfeld einen bestehenden Datensatz aus oder erstellen Sie für die Formulardaten einen neuen Datensatz. Die neuen Daten werden hinzugefügt und der Datensatz wird geöffnet. Hier können Sie alle Antworten überprüfen. Sie können Daten auch kompilieren, indem Sie auf der Aufgaben-Werkzeugleiste auf die Schaltfläche „Formulare“ klicken und „Zurückgesendete Formulare kompilieren“ wählen. Formularantworten überprüfen Wenn Sie die zurückgesendeten Formulardaten in einem Datensatz kompiliert haben, wird das PDFDokument automatisch zur Überprüfung der Antworten geöffnet. Öffnen Sie die gewünschte Datensatz-PDF-Datei und führen Sie einen der folgenden Schritte aus: • Zum Anzeigen einer einzelnen Antwort wählen Sie in der Antwortliste eine Zeile aus. • Zum Sortieren der Antwortliste klicken Sie auf die gewünschte Spaltenüberschrift. • Zum Hinzufügen von Daten klicken Sie auf „Daten importieren“ . • Zum Löschen von Daten wählen Sie einen Datensatz aus und drücken die Entf-Taste. Formulardaten in eine Kalkulationstabelle exportieren Nachdem Sie die PDF-Formulardaten im FDF- oder XML-Format erfasst haben, können Sie sie in einer kommagetrennten Tabellenkalkulationsdatei (CSV) anordnen. 1 Wählen Sie „Formulare“ > „Formulardaten verwalten“ > „Datendateien in Tabelle zusammenführen“. 2 Klicken Sie auf „Dateien hinzufügen“ und wählen Sie die gewünschten Datendateien aus. 3 Klicken Sie auf „Exportieren“, wählen Sie einen Speicherort für die CSV-Datei und klicken Sie auf „Speichern“. Neuheiten Anzeigen, navigieren, suchen Fenster „Erste Schritte“ Sehen Sie die Hauptfunktionen von Adobe® Acrobat® 3D Version 8 im Überblick. Klicken Sie auf Verknüpfungen, um Arbeitsschritte zu starten oder detailliertere Informationen zu Funktionen abzurufen. Siehe „Fenster „Erste Schritte“ verwenden“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Optimale Arbeitsbereichsgröße PDF-Dateien werden nun in neuem visuellem Design für Arbeitsbereich, Navigationsfenster und Werkzeugleisten angezeigt. Die Benutzeroberfläche wurde für eine größtmögliche Anzeigefläche umgestaltet. Siehe „Arbeitsbereich anzeigen“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 29 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-30 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Anpassbare Werkzeugleisten Durch Klicken mit der rechten Maustaste auf eine Werkzeugleiste können Sie einzelne Werkzeuge einfach ein- und ausblenden. Zudem können Sie im Dialogfeld „Weitere Werkzeuge“ Werkzeugleisten individuell anpassen. Siehe „Werkzeugleisten anzeigen und anordnen“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Verbesserte Suchfunktion Suchen Sie Wörter oder verwenden Sie die erweiterten Suchfunktionen – alles von einer integrierten Werkzeugleiste aus. Sehen Sie sich die Suchergebnisse in einem schwebenden Fenster an, das Sie verschieben und in der Größe verändern können. Suchen Sie Dokumente in einem PDF-Paket. Siehe „Suchfunktionen – Übersicht“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Eingebetteter PDF-Suchindex Betten Sie einen Suchindex für eine bestimmte Datei direkt in das PDF-Dokument zur schnelleren Suche ein. Siehe „PDF-Index erstellen und verwalten“ in der AcrobatHilfe. PDF-Erstellung, -Bündelung und -Bearbeitung PDF-Erstellung auf Grundlage einer leeren Seite Erstellen Sie eine leere PDF-Seite und geben Sie den gewünschten Text einfach auf der Seite ein. Der Text kann mit den Formatierungswerkzeugen angepasst werden. Sperren Sie das Dokument für weitere Bearbeitungen. Siehe „PDFs auf Grundlage einer leeren Seite erstellen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. PDF-Pakete Führen Sie PDF-Dateien (einschließlich PDF-Formulare) und Dateien anderer Formate in einem einzelnen PDF-Paket zusammen. Die Dateien werden bei der Paketerstellung nicht verändert; Unterschriften und Sicherheitseinstellungen bleiben erhalten. Dokumente eines Pakets werden in einem einzelnen Fenster angezeigt. In Paketen können Sie Dokumente problemlos hinzufügen, löschen oder entnehmen. Ferner können Sie das aktuell angezeigte oder ausgewählte Dokumente drucken, aber auch alle im Paket enthaltenen Dokumente. Siehe „PDFPakete“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Benutzeroberfläche für zusammengeführte Dateien Sie können Dateien in ein einzelnes PDF-Dokument oder in ein PDF-Paket zusammenführen. Die Größe der erstellten PDF-Datei lässt sich einfach regulieren. Siehe „Unterschiedliche Dateitypen zusammenführen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Serienbrieferstellung in Adobe PDF aus Word Konvertieren Sie Word-Dokumente für den Seriendruck in das PDF-Format und versenden Sie sie per E-Mail. Siehe „PDFs anhand von WordSeriendruckvorlagen erstellen“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für Excel-Arbeitsblätter (Windows) Wählen Sie zu konvertierende Arbeitsblätter aus und ordnen Sie sie in gewünschter Reihenfolge an. Konvertieren Sie alle Verknüpfungen in Lesezeichen. Erstellen Sie PDF/A-kompatible Dateien. Siehe „Anwendungsspezifische PDFMaker-Einstellungen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für PowerPoint-Präsentationen (Windows) Konvertieren Sie überlappende Formen und Grafiken, Aktionsschaltflächen, Aktionseinstellungen und Sprecherkommentare. Konvertieren Sie Hintergründe in separate, nicht druckbare Ebenen. Erstellen Sie PDF/A-kompatible Dateien. Siehe „Anwendungsspezifische PDFMakerEinstellungen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für E-Mail-Konvertierungen Lotus Notes: Konvertieren Sie E-Mail-Nachrichten oder ganze E-Mail-Ordner in das PDF-Format. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 30 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-31 Erste Schritte Outlook/Lotus Notes: Erstellen Sie PDF-Pakete aus E-Mail-Nachrichten. Outlook (Windows): Konvertieren Sie E-Mail-Archive in PDF-Pakete und veranlassen Sie automatisches terminliches Archivieren von E-Mails. Siehe , „E-Mail-Nachrichten in PDF konvertieren (Windows)“, „Outlook-PDFArchive in PDF-Pakete migrieren (Windows)“ und „Automatische E-Mail-Archivierung einrichten (Windows)“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für das Scannen Nutzen Sie die erweiterte Geräteauswahl beim Scannen von PDF- oder PDF/A-Formaten. Fügen Sie Metadaten beim Scanvorgang hinzu. Optimieren Sie gescannte PDFs. Siehe „Gedruckte Dokumente durch Scannen in PDF konvertieren“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. PDF/A-kompatible Dateien Erstellen Sie PDF/Akompatibel Dateien aus gescannten Dokumenten sowie bei der PDF-Erstellung in Word, Excel, PowerPoint, Acrobat Distiller und Acrobat Preflight. Bates-Nummerierung Versehen Sie einen Satz themenverwandter Dokumente – etwa juristische Schriftstücke zu einem Gerichtsprozess – mit einer Kennzeichnung. In einer Kopf- oder Fußzeile wird auf jeder Seite in jedem PDF-Dokument eines Stapels eine Bates-Nummerierung aufgeführt. Siehe „Kopf- oder Fußzeile eine Bates-Nummerierung hinzufügen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Dokumentuntersuchung Überprüfen Sie PDFDateien auf Metadaten, Anmerkungen, Anlagen, nicht sichtbare Daten, Formularfelder, ausgeblendete Ebenen oder Lesezeichen. Entfernen Sie die Informationen ganz oder teilweise. Siehe „PDF-Datei auf ausgeblendeten Inhalt überprüfen“ in der AcrobatHilfe. Kopfzeilen, Fußzeilen, Wasserzeichen und Hintergrund Speichern Sie Optionen für Kopfzeilen, Fußzeilen, Wasserzeichen und Hintergrund zur Wiederverwendung als benannte Einstellungen. Löschen oder aktualisieren Sie vorhandene Kopfzeilen, Fußzeilen, Wasserzeichen und Hintergründe. Verkleinern Sie Inhalt zum Einpassen von Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Zeigen Sie eine Vorschau von PDF in Echtzeit an. Unterstreichen Sie ausgewählten Text. Siehe „Kopf- und Fußzeilen hinzufügen und bearbeiten“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Überprüfen und kommentieren Acrobat Connect-Meetings Nutzen Sie die webbasierten Echtzeit-Funktionen von Acrobat Connect zur professionellen Zusammenarbeit (separat erhältlich). Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche „Meeting eröffnen“, um von einer Dokumentüberprüfung zu einer Echtzeitkommunikation mit anderen Teilnehmern im Internet zu wechseln. Acrobat Connect verwendet Flash sowie einen persönlichen Meetingraum zur gemeinsamen Verwendung eines Bildschirms, Audio- und Videokonferenzen, Dokumentkonferenzen usw. Beim erstmaligen Klicken auf die Schaltfläche „Meeting eröffnen“ können Sie ein kostenloses Testkonto erstellen. Danach werden Sie direkt auf den persönlichen Meetingraum von Acrobat Connect umgeleitet. (Acrobat Connect ist nicht in allen Sprachen verfügbar.) Siehe „Meetings“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Gemeinsame Überprüfungen Initiieren Sie eine Überprüfung, bei der Kommentare auf einem zentralen Server gespeichert werden, so dass alle Teilnehmer diese in Echtzeit einsehen können. Es ist keine weitere Serversoftware erforderlich. Für gemeinsame Überprüfungen können Ordner auf 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 31 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-32 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte einem Netzwerkserver, ein Windows SharePointArbeitsbereich oder Webordner auf einem Webserver verwendet werden. Kommentare werden automatisch abgerufen, auch wenn Reader nicht ausgeführt wird. Kommentare lassen sich auch dann einfügen, wenn keine Verbindung zum Netzwerk besteht. Benutzer werden mit einer Nachricht über neue Kommentare informiert. Kommentare von Überprüfern außerhalb einer Firewall können in eine gemeinsame Überprüfung eingefügt werden. Teilnahme von Reader-Benutzern aktivieren Siehe „Gemeinsame Überprüfungen starten“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Überarbeitungsprotokoll Zeigt detaillierte Informationen zu allen laufenden Überprüfungen an. Bei gemeinsamen Überprüfungen werden im Überprüfungsprotokoll Überprüferkommentare, Überprüfungsablaufdatum, Serverstatus, ungelesene Überprüfungen und eine Übersicht aktualisierter gemeinsamer Überprüfungen angezeigt. Siehe „Protokollieren von PDF-Überprüfungen“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für das Kommentieren und Markieren Sie können Kommentarwolken und Legenden nun direkt beim Anwenden anzeigen und exakt platzieren. Die Beschriftungslinie wird automatisch beim Positionieren der Legende mit verschoben. Ausgewählte Kommentare werden beim Verkleinern der Seite zur besseren Anzeige hervorgehoben. Sie können Stempel drehen und alle Werkzeuge auf einer einzelnen, integrierten Wer kzeugleis t e aus wählen. Siehe „Komment ieren“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Formulare Einfache Formulare erstellen (Windows) Erstellen Sie mit dem Assistenten PDF-Formulare anhand von Vorlagen, elektronischen Dokumenten, Papierformularen oder Tabellenkalkulationen. Richten Sie Formulare mit entsprechenden Kontaktinformationen und Logos individuell ein. Bearbeiten Sie Formulare in Adobe LiveCycle Designer. Siehe „Formulare erstellen und bearbeiten“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. PDF-Hintergrundgrafik Importieren Sie ein PDFDokument als Hintergrundgrafik für ein Formular in LiveCycle Designer. Fügen Sie über dem Hintergrund Formularfelder hinzu. Informationen erhalten Sie in der Hilfe von LiveCycle Designer. Formularprotokoll Protokollieren Sie Formulare, die Sie initiiert oder ausgefüllt haben. Siehe „Formularprotokoll“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Formulardaten exportieren und kompilieren Sammeln Sie ausgefüllte Formulare in einem PDFPaket. Exportieren Sie Formulardaten in eine Tabellenkalkulation. Siehe „Formulare senden“ und „Datensätze aus einem PDF-Datensatz exportieren“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Formularfelderkennung Führen Sie eine automatische Felderkennung für nicht interaktive PDF-Dokumente aus und konvertieren Sie sie in interaktive, elektronisch ausfüllbare Felder. Siehe „Neue Formulare erstellen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Für Reader aktivierte Rechte Ermöglichen Sie Benutzern von Reader 7.0 und 8.0 das Ausfüllen, das digitale Unterschreiben und das lokale Speichern von Formularen und anderen PDF-Dokumenten. Siehe „Reader-Benutzern das Speichern von Formulardaten ermöglichen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 32 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-33 Erste Schritte Digitale Unterschriften Roaming-IDs Lassen Sie sich bei einem Unterschriftsservice registrieren, um Ihren privaten Schlüssel auf dem Server abzulegen. Führen Sie von Acrobat aus die Authentifizierung beim Server durch und geben Sie die Freigabe dafür, das Dokument unter Verwendung Ihrer auf dem Server gespeicherten Anmeldedaten (auch als Referenzen oder Credentials bezeichnet) zu unterschreiben. Siehe „Digitale Roaming-ID einrichten“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Unterschriftsvorschau-Modus und Konformitätsprüfung Zeigen Sie den Dokumentinhalt vor dem Unterschreiben so an, wie er nach dem Entfernen von Transparenz, JavaScripts, Schriften und anderen dynamischen Elementen dargestellt wird, die das Erscheinungsbild beeinflussen können. In Acrobat 3D wird automatisch eine Prüfung der Dokumentintegrität durchgeführt, zu der jetzt eine Konformitätsprüfung für qualifizierte Unterschriften vor dem Start des Unterschriftsvorschau-Modus gehört. Siehe „Unterschreiben im DokumentvorschauModus“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Verbesserungen für Zertifikate Legen Sie ein Unterschriftzertifikat fest. Konfigurieren Sie das Modell zur Zertifikatsprüfung. Siehe „Zertifikate gemeinsam verwenden und verwalten“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Seed-Werte Geben Sie an, welche Auswahl ein Benutzer beim Unterschreiben eines Dokuments treffen kann. Siehe „Unterschriftseigenschaften mit Seed-Werten anpassen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Unterschriften in Reader Aktivieren Sie die Unterschriftserstellung für Reader-Benutzer. Siehe „Vor dem Zertifizieren eines PDF-Dokuments“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Architektur, Konstruktions- und Bauwesen Stapelverarbeitung/direkte Konvertierung Konvertieren Sie in AutoCAD mehrere AutoCADDateien in mehrere PDFs. Konvertieren Sie AutoCAD-Dateien in eine PDF-Datei mit verbesserter Geschwindigkeit. Siehe „AutoCAD-Dateien in PDF konvertieren (Windows)“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. DWG/DWF-Unterstützung Konvertieren Sie Dateien im AutoCAD DWF- und DWG-Format, ohne AutoCAD zu installieren. Verbesserungen für 2D-Messwerkzeuge Wenn s ich Anfangs- oder Endpunkte verschieben, wird die Messung neu berechnet. Messungen werden an Linien, Schnittpunkten oder Kanten ausgerichtet. Siehe „Höhe, Breite und Fläche von Objekten messen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. 3D-CAD (Computer Aided Design) Kompakte PDFs erstellen Passen Sie 3DKonvertierungseinstellungen an, um stark komprimierte, barrierefreie PDF-Dateien zu erstellen, die nur einen Bruchteil so groß sind wie die OriginalCAD-Datei oder -Baugruppe. Siehe „PRC- und U3D-Konvertierungsformate“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. PMI importieren Importieren Sie Spezifikationen für geometrische Abmessungen und Toleranzen in das 3D-Modell als Produktinformationen (PMI) und zeigen Sie diese an, anstatt eine separate 2DZeichnung zu schicken. Unterstützte Dateiformate: CATIA V5, I-DEAS, JT, NX, Pro/ENGINEER. Siehe „PMI anzeigen“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 33 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMC-34 KAPITEL 1 Erste Schritte Geometrie exportieren Exportieren Sie zur Interoperabilität mit CAM-Anwendungen Geometrie in Standardformate (IGES, STEP, ParaSolid und VRML). Siehe „Geometrie aus 3D-Modellen exportieren“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. Unterstützung für aktuelle CAD-Anwendungen Öffnen Sie die letzte Version der meisten CADDateiformate, ohne die CAD-Anwendung zu installieren. Siehe „Unterstützte 3D-Dateiformate - Einführung“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. US-Legal Schwärzen-Werkzeuge Markieren Sie Text, Bilder und vertrauliche Informationen zum Schwärzen. Die Schwärzung ist endgültig und irreversibel. Ändern Sie das Erscheinungsbild der Schwärzungsmarkierung wie Farbe und Codes. Siehe „Vertraulichen Inhalt schwärzen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Suchen und schwärzen Sie können in der Suchfunktion einige oder alle Suchergebnisse zum Schwärzen markieren. Siehe „Wörter suchen und schwärzen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Bates-Nummerierung Versehen Sie einen Satz themenverwandter Dokumente – etwa juristische Schriftstücke zu einem Gerichtsprozess – mit einer Kennzeichnung. In einer Kopf- oder Fußzeile wird auf jeder Seite in jedem PDF-Dokument eines Stapels eine Bates-Nummerierung aufgeführt. Siehe „Kopf- oder Fußzeile eine Bates-Nummerierung hinzufügen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Grafikdesign Verbessertes Farbmanagement Synchronisieren Sie in der Adobe Creative Suite Einstellungen für Bildschirmfarben für alle Anwendungen mit einem Klick. Siehe „Farbeinstellungen für mehrere AdobeAnwendungen synchronisieren“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Gemeinsam verwendete Transparenzreduzierungsvorgaben Definieren Sie Transparenzreduzierungsvorgaben in einer AdobeAnwendung, z. B. in Acrobat, und verwenden Sie diese Vorgaben dann auch in anderen Anwendungen wie Illustrator und InDesign. Siehe „Reduzierungsvorgabe erstellen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Preflight Suchen, ändern oder entfernen Sie PDF-Elemente mit Hilfe von anpassbaren Korrekturprofilen. Erstellen Sie einen Inhaltsbericht eines PDF-Dokuments einschließlich XMPMetadaten. Führen Sie erweiterte Überprüfungen von Cos-Objekten und -Schriften durch. Konvertieren Sie PDF/X-4- und PDF/A-Dateien und prüfen Sie diese. Bearbeiten Sie Droplet-Einstellungen für automatisierte Preflight-Überprüfungen. Siehe „Problembereiche berichtigen“ und „Erweiterte Überprüfungen“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Broschürendruck Drucken Sie Seiten als einfache Broschüre oder mit Sattelheftung. Siehe „Broschüre drucken“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Metadaten in Dokumenten und Objekten Ver walt en und verwenden Sie Metadaten auf Dokument- und Objektebene. Siehe „Dokumenteigenschaften und Metadaten“ in der Acrobat 3D Hilfe. Verbesserungen für das TouchUp-Objektwerkzeug Sie können den Farbraum ausgewählter Objekte anzeigen und ändern. Skalieren, drehen oder schneiden Sie Objekte zu. Siehe „Objekt verschieben oder bearbeiten“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 34 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AMADOBE ACROBAT 3D VERSION 8 C-35 Erste Schritte Weitere neue Funktionen FIPS-Modus Version 8.1 von Acrobat 3D bietet einen FIPS-Modus, um den Datenschutz auf Algorithmen zu beschränken, die gemäß Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2 zugelassen sind (Verwendung des Verschlüsselungsmoduls RSABSAFE Crypto-C 2.0 mit FIPS 140-2 Validierungszertifikat Nr. 608). Siehe „PDFs im FIPS-Modus sichern“ in der vollständigen Acrobat-Hilfe. Unterstützung von Microsoft Windows Vista Version 8.1 von Acrobat 3D unterstützt Microsoft Windows Vist a. Installieren von Acrobat unter 64-Bit-Versionen von Microsoft Windows Version 8.1 von Acrobat 3D unterstützt die 64-Bit-Versionen von Microsoft Windows XP und Micros oft Windows Vist a. Version Cue 2.0 Verwalten Sie Dateien und Versionen als Einzelanwender oder in einer kleinen Arbeitsgruppe. Integrieren Sie Ihre Dateien in Adobe Bridge, um sie für Ihre Creative Suite-Projekte zu verwalten. Siehe „Adobe Version Cue“ in der Acrobat-Hilfe. Digitale Ausgaben Lesen und verwalten Sie eBooks und andere Veröffentlichungen mit dem Modul für digitale Ausgaben von Adobe (separat erhältlich). Beim erstmaligen Klicken auf einen Menüeintrag unter „Digitale Ausgaben“ können Sie die entsprechende Adobe-Software installieren. Wählen Sie nach der Installation „Digitale Ausgaben“, um direkt zu Adobe Digital Editions zu gelangen. Siehe „Adobe Digital Editions“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. Drucken über das Internet Drucken Sie Dokumente in einer Niederlassung von FedEx Kinko in den USA. Siehe „Drucken über das Internet“ in der Acrobat 3DHilfe. Verbesserungen für 2D-Messwerkzeuge Wenn s ich Anfangs- oder Endpunkte verschieben, wird die Messung neu berechnet. Messungen werden an Linien, Schnittpunkten oder Kanten ausgerichtet. Siehe „Höhe, Breite und Fläche von Objekten messen“ in der Acrobat 3D-Hilfe. 3D_ML_GSG.book Page 35 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM3D_ML_GSG.book Page 36 Thursday, April 12, 2007 11:10 AM Migration, installation et coniguration d'ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO SERVER 7.5Copyright © 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Migration, installation et configuration d'Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Server 7.5 pour Windows® This guide is licensed for use under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. This License allows users to copy, distribute, and transmit the guide for noncommercial purposes only so long as (1) proper attribution to Adobe is given as the owner of the guide; and (2) any reuse or distribution of the guide contains a notice that use of the guide is governed by these terms. The best way to provide notice is to include the following link. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Adobe Connect, Adobe Press, Breeze, Flash, and JRun are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. iii Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Nouveautés d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Configuration requise pour l'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Configurations prises en charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Préparation de la migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Préparation de l'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Chapitre 2 : Installation de Connect Pro Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Vérification de l'installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Désinstallation des serveurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Chapitre 3 : Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Intégration dans un service d'annuaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Utilisation d'adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Configuration du stockage partagé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Configuration des paramètres de notification de compte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Conversion PDF-SWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Intégration à Microsoft Live Communications Server 2005 et Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Configuration de l'authentification unique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Configuration d'un proxy inverse devant Connect Pro Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Hébergement d'Acrobat Connect Add-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Chapitre 4 : Stratégies Protocole SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Sécurisation de l'infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Ressources et conseils en matière de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Chapitre 5 : Administration de Connect Pro Server Démarrage et arrêt des serveurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Gestion et contrôle des fichiers journaux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Gestion de l'espace disque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Sauvegarde de données . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Elaboration de rapports personnalisés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031 Chapitre 1 : Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Passez en revue la configuration requise pour l'installation, les configurations prises en charge et la présentation technique lorsque vous vous préparez la conception et l'installation d'un système Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Server 7.5. Si vous effectuez une migration vers Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5, suivez les instructions de sauvegarde des fichiers. Nouveautés d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 Les fonctionnalités suivantes sont nouvelles ou ont été modifiées dans Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 : VMWare Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 ajoute une assistance technique pour l'installation dans un environnement VMWare. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au livre blanc relatif à la configuration VMWare et à la configuration système du serveur Connect Pro. Universal Voice La solution Universal Voice d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 vous permet de diffuser par VoIP une conférence audio en direct pour des participants à une réunion. Vous pouvez également enregistrer la conférence audio en direct avec la réunion Connect Pro. Pour déployer la solution Universal Voice, installez et configurez Adobe Flash Media Gateway avec votre installation Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Flash Media Gateway est intégré dans le programme d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Flash Media Gateway permet d'établir la communication entre Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 et votre infrastructure SIP. Vous pouvez installer Flash Media Gateway sur le même serveur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 ou sur un autre ordinateur. Reportez-vous à la section « Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 38. Remarque : outre Universal Voice, Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 prend également en charge les adaptateurs de téléphonie entièrement intégrés avec le contrôle d'appel avancé et les commentaires des participants. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Options de conférence audio Connect Pro » à la page 14. Partage des fichiers PDF Adobe® Partagez des fichiers PDF dans des salles de réunion. Dans une salle de réunion, sélectionnez dans la bibliothèque de contenu Connect Pro Central ou dans votre ordinateur les fichiers PDF que vous souhaitez partager. Dans la bibliothèque de contenu, les fichiers PDF sont stockés sous forme de fichiers PDF. Pour être affichés dans la salle de réunion, les fichiers PDF sont convertis en fichiers SWF. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à Partage d'un document. Assistance améliorée Microsoft® PowerPoint Partagez des documents PPTX qui contiennent des graphiques intelligents, des tableaux, du texte et des effets de forme dans des salles de réunion haute fidélité. Les présentateurs peuvent télécharger des documents PPTX dans des salles de réunion haute fidélité depuis des systèmes d'exploitation Windows ou Mac. Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Add-in pour IBM Lotus Notes Planifiez et gérez les réunions Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro depuis Lotus Notes. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au manuel d'installation et de déploiement d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Add-in pour IBM Lotus Notes et à la section Utilisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Add-in pour IBM Lotus Notes.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 2 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Liens Prise en charge et Etat du menu d'aide de la salle de réunion Utilisez les paramètres de configuration du fichier custom.ini pour ajouter les options Prise en charge et Etat au menu d'aide de la salle de réunion. Indiquez les URL qui permettent aux utilisateurs de la réunion de consulter les informations relatives aux options de prise en charge et d'état du système. Vous pouvez utiliser les services Web d'Acrobat Connect Pro pour créer une page contenant des informations dynamiques sur l'état du système. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Ajout de liens Prise en charge et Etat au menu d'aide » à la page 49. Configuration requise pour l'installation Configuration matérielle, logicielle et utilisateur Pour connaître la configuration requise pour Acrobat Adobe Connect Pro Server et Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server, visitez le site www.adobe.com/go/connect_sysreqs_fr. Configuration des ports Le tableau suivant décrit les ports sur lesquels les utilisateurs doivent pouvoir établir des connexions TCP. Remarque : RTMP (Real-Time Messaging Protocol) est un protocole Adobe. Le tableau suivant décrit les ports ouverts à l'intérieur d'un cluster. Chaque serveur Acrobat Connect Pro d'un cluster doit pouvoir établir des connexions TCP vers tous les autres serveurs du cluster sur ces ports. Remarque : ces ports ne doivent pas être ouverts au public, même si vous n'utilisez pas de cluster. Chaque serveur Acrobat Connect Pro d'un cluster doit pouvoir établir une connexion TCP vers le serveur de base de données sur le port suivant : Le tableau suivant décrit les ports serveur utilisés par Acrobat Connect Pro pour communiquer en interne. Ces ports ne doivent pas être utilisés sur un serveur hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro, sinon ce dernier risque de ne pas démarrer. Chiffre Adresse de liaison Accès Protocole 80 */Adaptateur quelconque Public HTTP, RTMP 443 */Adaptateur quelconque Public HTTPS, RTMPS 1935 */Adaptateur quelconque Public RTMP Chiffre Port source Adresse de liaison Accès Protocole 8506 Valeur quelconque */Adaptateur quelconque Privé RTMP 8507 Valeur quelconque */Adaptateur quelconque Privé HTTP Chiffre Port source Accès Protocole 1433 Valeur quelconque Privé TSQLMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 3 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Pour plus d'informations sur les ports Flash Media Gateway, reportez-vous à la section « Ports et protocoles Flash Media Gateway » à la page 39. Configurations prises en charge Configurations de bases de données/serveur prises en charge Acrobat Connect Pro stocke les informations sur les utilisateurs et le contenu dans une base de données. Configurations d'Acrobat Connect Pro et de bases de données prises en charge : Serveur unique avec moteur de base de données intégré Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un ordinateur et installez le moteur de base de données intégré (inclus dans le programme d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro) sur ce même ordinateur. Le moteur de base de données intégré est Microsoft® SQL Server® 2005 Express Edition. Remarque : cette configuration ne peut être utilisée que dans des environnements de test, pas dans des environnements de production. Serveur unique avec la base de données SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un seul ordinateur et installez Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur le même ordinateur. Serveur unique avec la base de données externe SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un seul ordinateur et installez SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur un autre ordinateur. Serveur unique avec les bases de données externes multiples SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un seul ordinateur et installez SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur plusieurs ordinateurs (autrement dit un cluster) externes à Acrobat Connect Pro. Acrobat Connect Pro prend en charge la copie miroir et la mise en clusters des bases de données SQL Server. Serveurs multiples avec la base de données externe SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur plusieurs ordinateurs (autrement dit un cluster) et installez SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur un autre ordinateur. Serveurs multiples avec les bases de données externes multiples SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur plusieurs ordinateurs (autrement dit un cluster) et installez SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition dans un cluster distinct. Acrobat Connect Pro prend en charge la copie miroir et la mise en clusters des bases de données SQL Server. Remarque : Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition n'est pas fourni avec Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 et doit être acheté séparément. Chiffre Adresse de liaison Accès Protocole 1111 127.0.0.1 Interne RTMP 1434 127.0.0.1 Ce port n'est actif que si vous utilisez la base de données intégrée. Interne TSQL 2909 127.0.0.1 Interne RMI 4111 */Adaptateur quelconque Interne JMX 8510 127.0.0.1 Interne HTTPMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 4 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Voir aussi « Préparation de l'installation » à la page 7 « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15 Déploiements de Flash Media Gateway pris en charge Déployez Flash Media Gateway pour activer Universal Voice. La liste suivante répertorie les déploiements pris en charge : Un seul ordinateur Installez Connect Pro Server, Flash Media Gateway et SQL Server sur le même ordinateur. Deux ordinateurs Installez Connect Pro Server et Flash Media Gateway sur le même ordinateur et SQL Server sur un autre ordinateur. Cluster d'ordinateurs Installez chaque instance de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway sur son propre ordinateur. Voir aussi « Options de conférence audio Connect Pro » à la page 14 « Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 38 Serveurs d'annuaire LDAP pris en charge Vous pouvez configurer l'authentification utilisateur sur le serveur d'annuaire LDAP de votre société et en importer les informations d'annuaire dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous trouverez la liste des serveurs d'annuaire LDAP pris en charge à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_sysreqs_fr. Remarque : tout serveur de répertoire LDAP v.3 peut s'intégrer avec Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Toutefois, seuls les serveurs de répertoire qui ont été testés par Adobe sont pris en charge. Voir aussi « Intégration dans un service d'annuaire » à la page 31 Périphériques de stockage de contenu pris en charge Vous pouvez configurer votre système Acrobat Connect Pro pour qu'il stocke le contenu sur des périphériques NAS (Network Attached Storage) et SAN (Storage Area Network). Vous trouverez la liste des périphériques NAS et SAN pris en charge à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_sysreqs_fr. Voir aussi « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 5 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Préparation de la migration Voies de migration Exécutez le programme d'installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 pour effectuer la mise à niveau d'Adobe Connect Pro Server 7.x vers Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 ; c'est le seul chemin de mise à niveau. Le programme d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server et la Console de gestion des applications fournissent des interfaces utilisateur graphiques qui vous guident dans la mise à niveau. Pour plus d'informations sur la mise à niveau, contactez l'assistance d'Adobe : www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Migration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.x vers Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 Suivez ce processus pour effectuer la migration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.x vers Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. 1. Testez la migration dans un environnement non destiné à la production. Il est généralement conseillé de prendre un instantané de l'environnement de production actuel et de tester la migration dans un environnement de test avant de migrer l'environnement de production. Lorsque vous avez réussi la migration dans l'environnement test, passez à l'étape 2. 2. Informez les utilisateurs quant à la migration. Reportez-vous à la section « Information des utilisateurs quant à la migration » à la page 6. 3. (Facultatif) Sauvegardez le contenu et les fichiers de configuration. Reportez-vous à la section « Sauvegarde des fichiers » à la page 6. 4. Sauvegardez la base de données. Reportez-vous à la section « Sauvegarde de la base de données » à la page 102. 5. Exécutez le programme d'installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Reportez-vous à la section « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15. Le programme d'installation arrête les services Acrobat Connect Pro Server et sauvegarde les fichiers existants, y compris le fichier custom.ini. 6. Configurez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d'Acrobat Connect Pro avec l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications » à la page 16. 7. Vérifiez votre installation. Reportez-vous à la section « Vérification de l'installation » à la page 19.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 6 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Information des utilisateurs quant à la migration Comme pour toute mise à niveau logicielle, et en particulier si elle affecte un groupe de travail, la communication et la planification sont importantes. Avant de démarrer la migration ou l'ajout de modules à Acrobat Connect Pro, Adobe vous suggère d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Prévoyez suffisamment de temps pour assurer une migration réussie. Il est préférable d'effectuer la mise à niveau pendant la période de maintenance habituelle. • Signalez à vos utilisateurs qu’ils ne pourront pas utiliser Acrobat Connect Pro pendant la migration. • Informez-les également des types de changements auxquels ils doivent s’attendre (nouvelles fonctionnalités ou meilleures performances, par exemple) après la migration. Pour plus d'informations sur les nouvelles fonctionnalités, visitez le site www.adobe.com/go/learn_cnn_whatsnew_fr. Sauvegarde des fichiers Le programme d'installation crée des copies de sauvegarde des répertoires appserv et comserv, ainsi que du fichier custom.ini, et installe les nouvelles versions. Le répertoire de contenu n'est ni effacé ni écrasé par le programme d'installation. Vous pouvez choisir de créer des copies de sauvegarde de ces répertoires et fichiers. Mise à niveau depuis SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Procédez comme suit pour migrer de l'utilisation de la base de données intégrée à celle de SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur un autre ordinateur. Remarque : vous pouvez effectuer cette migration lorsque vous migrez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.x vers Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5, et également à tout moment après avoir installé Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. 1. Installez SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur un ordinateur différent de celui hébergeant Connect Pro Server. Suivez les instructions fournies par Microsoft pour installer SQL Server. 2. Sauvegardez SQL Server 2005 Express Edition. Reportez-vous à la section « Sauvegarde de la base de données » à la page 102. 3. Copiez le fichier .bak depuis l'ordinateur hébergeant Connect Pro Server sur l'ordinateur qui héberge SQL Server. Lorsque vous sauvegardez SQL Server Express Edition, un fichier nommé breeze.bak est créé (où breeze correspond au nom de la base de données). 4. Rétablissez la base de données sur l'ordinateur qui héberge SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition. Pour plus d'informations sur le rétablissement de SQL Server, consultez Microsoft TechNet. 5. Entrez les informations relatives à la base de données SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition dans la Console de gestion des applications sur le serveur qui héberge Connect Pro. Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Configurer Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 7 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Préparation de l'installation Présentation technique d'Acrobat Connect Pro Une installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro se compose de plusieurs éléments : Connect Pro Central Application Server, Adobe® Flash® Media Server, Connect Pro Presence Service, Flash Media Gateway, ainsi qu'une base de données. Connect Pro Central Application Server est une version J2EE qui utilise des composants de Macromedia® JRun™ d'Adobe. Egalement appelé serveur d'application, il gère les utilisateurs, les groupes, le contenu à la demande et les sessions des clients. Parmi les tâches du serveur d'applications, on retrouve le contrôle d'accès, la sécurité, les quotas, les licences et les fonctions d'audit et de gestion, telles que la mise en cluster, le basculement et la réplication. Il transcode également les supports, en convertissant notamment les éléments Microsoft® PowerPoint et le son au format Adobe® Flash®. Le serveur d'applications gère les requêtes de réunion et de transfert de contenu (diapositives, pages HTTP, fichiers SWF et contenu du module Partage de fichiers) sur une connexion HTTP ou HTTPS. Flash Media Server, également appelé serveur de réunions, est installé avec Acrobat Connect Pro pour gérer la diffusion audio et vidéo en temps réel, la synchronisation des données et la diffusion des contenus multimédia, ainsi que les interactions avec Acrobat Connect Pro. Certaines tâches de Flash Media Server consistent à enregistrer et lire des réunions, à synchroniser le contenu audio et vidéo et à faire le transcodage (conversion et compression des données pour le partage d'écran en temps réel et les interactions). Flash Media Server réduit également la charge et les délais d'attente du serveur en mettant en cache les pages Web fréquemment visitées, les flux continus et les données partagées. Flash Media Server diffuse le son, la vidéo et les données de réunions associées via le protocole à haute performance RTMP ou RTMPS d'Adobe. Connect Pro Presence Service intègre Acrobat Connect Pro avec Microsoft® Live Communication Server 2005 et Microsoft® Office Communication Server pour afficher leur présence IM dans les salles de réunion Acrobat Connect Pro. Flash Media Gateway intègre Acrobat Connect Pro avec votre infrastructure SIP/RTP. Flash Media Gateway reçoit le son d'un serveur SIP et l'envoie aux salles de réunion Connect Pro. Cette solution s'appelle la voix universelle. Acrobat Connect Pro requiert une base de données pour le stockage permanent des métadonnées transactionnelles et d'application, dont les informations sur les utilisateurs, les groupes, le contenu et les rapports. Vous pouvez utiliser le moteur de la base de données intégrée (SQL Server 2005 Express Edition) inclus dans le programme d'installation Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 ou vous pouvez acheter et installer Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 8 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Flux de données Le diagramme suivant illustre la circulation des données entre une application cliente et Acrobat Connect Pro. Les données peuvent circuler sur une connexion chiffrée ou non chiffrée. Connexion non chiffrée Les connexions non chiffrées passent par HTTP et RTMP et empruntent les chemins décrits dans le tableau. Dans le tableau, les numéros correspondent à ceux du diagramme de flux des données. Chiffre Description 1 Le navigateur Web du client demande une réunion ou l'URL d'un contenu sur HTTP:80. 2 Le serveur Web répond et transfert le contenu ou fournit au client les informations nécessaires pour qu'il se connecte à la réunion. 3 Le Flash Player du client demande une connexion à la réunion sur RTMP:1935. 3a Le Flash Player du client demande une connexion à la réunion, mais ne peut se connecter que sur RTMP:80. 4 Flash Media Server répond et ouvre une connexion permanente pour le trafic des flux continus d'Acrobat Connect. 4a Flash Media Server répond et ouvre une connexion par tunnel pour le trafic des flux continus d'Acrobat Connect. HTTP:80 HTTP:2222 HTTPS:443 RTMPS:443 RTMP:1935 RTMP:8506 RTMPT:80 SIP:5060 RTP:5000~5500 1 2 A C 3 3a 4a 4 D B Application cliente Serveur de base Acrobat Connect Pro de données SQL API de services Web Serveur Web/ d’applications Flash Media Gateway Serveur SIP PSTN Participants à la conférence audio Service de conférence audio Flash Media Server Flash Player Navigateur WebMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 9 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Connexion chiffrée Les connexions chiffrées passent par HTTPS et RTMPS et empruntent les chemins décrits dans le tableau. Dans le tableau, les lettres correspondent à celles du diagramme de flux des données. Déroulement de l'installation La procédure suivante vous aide à concevoir, installer et configurer un système Acrobat Connect Pro. Certaines étapes vous invitent à prendre des décisions, d'autres requièrent une tâche complète. Chaque étape vous renvoie vers des informations générales sur la décision ou la tâche. 1. Choisissez la base de données que vous souhaitez utiliser. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Choix d'une base de données » à la page 11. 2. Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un seul serveur. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15. Si vous choisissez d'utiliser le moteur de base de données intégré à l'étape 1, installez-le également. Le moteur de base de données intégré fait partie du programme d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro. 3. Si vous choisissez d'utiliser SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition à l'étape 1, installez-le. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation de SQL Server. 4. Déployez Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server » à la page 24. 5. Assurez-vous qu'Acrobat Connect Pro est correctement installé. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Vérification de l'installation » à la page 19. 6. (Facultatif) Intégrez Acrobat Connect Pro à votre infrastructure. De nombreuses possibilités permettent d'intégrer Acrobat Connect Pro à l'infrastructure existante de votre société. Il est généralement préférable de vérifier le bon fonctionnement d'Acrobat Connect Pro après la configuration de chacune de ces fonctionnalités. Intégration avec un fournisseur SIP Intégrez Acrobat Connect Pro au fournisseur SIP de votre organisation (également appelé fournisseur VOIP) qui fournira une fonctionnalité d'organisation de conférences audio sans heurts. Reportez-vous à la section « Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 38. Intégration à un annuaire LDAP Intégrez Acrobat Connect Pro au serveur d'annuaire LDAP de votre société pour éviter de devoir gérer plusieurs annuaires d'utilisateurs. Reportez-vous à la section « Intégration dans un service d'annuaire » à la page 31. Lettre Description A Le navigateur Web du client requiert une réunion ou l'URL d'un contenu via une connexion sécurisée sur HTTPS:443. B Le serveur Web répond et transfert le contenu sur une connexion sécurisée ou fournit au client les informations nécessaires pour qu'il se connecte à la réunion de manière sécurisée. C Le Flash Player du client demande une connexion sécurisée à Flash Media Server sur RTMPS:443. D Flash Media Server répond et ouvre une connexion permanente et sécurisée pour le trafic des flux continus d'Acrobat Connect Pro.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 10 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Configuration d'un protocole de communication sécurisé (SSL) Sécurisez l'ensemble des communications d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Reportez-vous à la section « Protocole SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) » à la page 66. Stockage du contenu sur des périphériques NAS/SAN Utilisez des périphériques réseau pour partager les tâches de stockage du contenu. Voir la section « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46. Intégration à Live Communication Server et Office Communication Server L'intégration à un serveur de communication permet aux hôtes de réunion de voir la présence IM des invités dans les salles de réunion. Les hôtes de réunion peuvent également envoyer des messages aux utilisateurs IM depuis la salle de réunion. Consultez la section « Intégration à Microsoft Live Communications Server 2005 et Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007 » à la page 52. Configuration d'une infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) Si vous avez intégré Acrobat Connect Pro à un serveur d'annuaire LDAP, renforcez la sécurité en demandant des certificats clients. Reportez-vous à la section « Infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) » à la page 80. Hébergement d'Acrobat Connect Add-in Les utilisateurs peuvent très facilement télécharger Acrobat Connect Add-in depuis les serveurs Adobe. Toutefois, si la stratégie de sécurité de votre société n'autorise pas les téléchargements externes, hébergez l'Add-in sur votre propre serveur pour améliorer le confort de vos utilisateurs. Voir la section « Hébergement d'Acrobat Connect Add-in » à la page 64. 7. (Facultatif) Choisissez d'installer ou non Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5 dans un cluster. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections « Choix du déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro dans un cluster » à la page 10 et « Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 24. 8. (Facultatif) Choisissez d'installer ou non des serveurs Edge. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux sections « Choix du déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 12 et « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 29. Choix du déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro dans un cluster Il est possible d'installer tous les composants Acrobat Connect Pro Server , y compris la base de données, sur un seul serveur, mais cette configuration convient mieux à un environnement de test que de production. Un groupe de serveurs connectés, chacun faisant le même travail, est généralement appelé cluster. Dans un cluster Acrobat Connect Pro Server , vous installez une copie identique d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server sur chacun de ses serveurs. Remarque : lorsque vous installez Acrobat Connect Pro Server dans un cluster, vous devez utiliser SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition et l'installer sur un ordinateur distinct. Lorsqu'un hôte du cluster échoue, un autre prend le relais et peut héberger la même réunion. Pour assurer l'équilibrage de charge du cluster, vous devez utiliser un logiciel ou un matériel tiers. Très souvent, le matériel d'équilibrage de charge peut également fonctionner comme un accélérateur SSL. Remarque : dans la console de gestion des applications, vous pouvez configurer un stockage partagé pour que le contenu soit stocké sur des périphériques externes et mis en mémoire cache sur Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Les systèmes réseau fiables sont conçus avec des composants redondants : si l'un échoue, un autre composant identique (redondant) prend en charge le même travail. Lorsqu'un composant échoue et qu'un autre prend le relais, un basculement intervient. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 11 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Idéalement, chaque composant d'un système doit être redondant, pas seulement Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Par exemple, vous pourriez utiliser plusieurs périphériques matériels d'équilibrage de charge (BIG-IP de F5 Networks par exemple), un cluster de serveurs hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro Server, ainsi que des bases de données SQL Server sur plusieurs ordinateurs externes. Concevez votre système avec autant de redondances que possible et ajoutez-les progressivement à votre système. Trois options de mise en cluster A. Un cluster avec logiciel d'équilibrage NLB et deux bases de données externes B. Des périphériques d'équilibrage matériel BIG-IP, un cluster et deux bases de données externes C. Deux périphériques d'équilibrage BIG-IP, un cluster et deux bases de données externes Voir aussi « Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 24 « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46 Choix d'une base de données Acrobat Connect Pro Server stocke les informations sur les utilisateurs, le contenu, les cours, les réunions et les rapports dans une base de données. Vous pouvez utiliser le moteur de base de données intégré (inclus avec le programme d'installation) ou installer Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition (vendu séparément). Remarque : le moteur de base de données intégré est Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Express Edition. Base de données intégrée Le moteur de base de données intégré est recommandé pour les phases de test et de développement. Il utilise les mêmes structures de données que SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition, mais n'est pas aussi puissant. Cluster Connect Pro Cluster SQL Server Logiciel Microsoft d'équilibrage de la charge réseau clients clients clients Cluster SQL Server Cluster SQL Server Routeur Dispositifs d’équilibrage de la charge Cluster Connect Pro Cluster Connect Pro A B CMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 12 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Le moteur de base de données intégré présente les limites suivantes : • En raison des restrictions de licence, vous devez installer le moteur de base de données intégré sur le même ordinateur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Cet ordinateur doit être mono-processeur. • La taille maximale de la base de données est de 2 Go. • Le moteur de base de données intégré possède une interface de ligne de commande, et non une interface utilisateur graphique. Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition Il est généralement préférable d'utiliser le moteur Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition dans les environnements de production, car SQL Server est un système de gestion de bases de données évolutif (SGBDR) conçu pour prendre en charge un grand nombre d'utilisateurs simultanés. SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition fournit également des interfaces utilisateur graphiques pour la gestion et les interrogations de la base de données. Vous pouvez installer SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur le même ordinateur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro Server ou sur un autre ordinateur. Si vous les installez sur des ordinateurs différents, synchronisez ces machines sur la même source horaire. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la TechNote suivante : www.adobe.com/go/2e86ea67. Installez SQL Server en mode de connexion mixte afin de pouvoir utiliser l'authentification SQL. Définissez la base de données pour respecter la casse. Utilisez SQL Server dans les scénarios de déploiement suivants : • Vous souhaitez installer la base de données sur un ordinateur sur lequel Acrobat Connect Pro Server n'est pas installé. • Acrobat Connect Pro Server est déployé dans un cluster. • Acrobat Connect Pro Server est installé sur des ordinateurs multi-processeurs avec Hyper-Threading. Voir aussi « Configurations de bases de données/serveur prises en charge » à la page 3 « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15 Choix du déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Lorsque vous déployez Acrobat Connect Edge Server sur votre réseau, les clients se connectent au serveur Edge qui, à son tour, se connecte à Acrobat Connect Pro (également appelé serveur d'origine). Cette connexion est transparente : les utilisateurs ont l'impression de se connecter directement au serveur d'origine qui héberge la réunion. Les serveurs Edge présentent les avantages suivants : Latence réseau réduite Les serveurs Edge mettent le contenu en cache à la demande (par exemple les réunions et les présentations enregistrées) et divisent les flux en direct, entraînant moins de trafic vers l'origine. Les serveurs Edge rapprochent les ressources des clients. Stratégies Les serveurs Edge constituent une couche supplémentaire entre la connexion Internet cliente et l'origine. Si votre licence l'autorise, vous pouvez installer et configurer un cluster de serveurs Edge. Le déploiement des serveurs Edge dans un cluster présente les avantages suivants : Basculement Lorsqu'un serveur Edge échoue, les clients sont dirigés vers un autre serveur Edge.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 13 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Prise en charge pour des événements importants S'il vous faut plus de 500 connexions simultanées pour la même réunion, un seul serveur Edge n'aura plus assez de sockets. Un cluster autorise davantage de connexions à la même réunion. Equilibrage de charge S'il vous faut plus de 100 réunions simultanées, un seul serveur Edge peut manquer de mémoire. Les serveurs Edge peuvent être placés en cluster derrière un équilibreur de charge. Fonctionnement des serveurs Edge Les serveurs Edge authentifient les utilisateurs et autorisent leurs requêtes de services Web, telles qu'Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting, au lieu de transmettre chaque requête au serveur d'origine et de consommer les ressources de ce dernier pour ces tâches. Si les données demandées sont détectées dans le cache du serveur Edge, ce dernier les envoie au client sans appeler Acrobat Connect Pro. Si les données demandées ne sont pas dans le cache du serveur Edge, ce dernier transmet la requête du client au serveur d'origine, où l'utilisateur est authentifié et la demande de services autorisée. Le serveur d'origine renvoie les résultats au serveur Edge, qui les transmet à son tour au client. Le serveur Edge stocke également ces informations dans sa mémoire cache, permettant ainsi à d'autres utilisateurs authentifiés d'y accéder. Exemple de déploiement de serveur Edge Considérez l'exemple de déploiement de serveur Edge suivant : Les clients du site de Chicago utilisent le serveur d'origine situé dans un centre de données de Chicago. Les serveurs Edge de Boston et San Francisco réunissent les requêtes des clients locaux et les transmettent à l'origine. Les serveurs Edge reçoivent les réponses de l'origine à Chicago et les transmettent aux clients de leur régions. Voir aussi « Installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 21 « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28 Réunion X Réunion X Réunion X BOSTON Connect Pro Edge Server Serveur Connect Pro d’origine Connect Pro Edge Server SAN FRANCISCO CHICAGOMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 14 Préparation de la migration, de l'installation et de la configuration Création et optimisation d'un environnement VMWare L'installation de Connect Pro Server sur VMWare ne diffère pas de l'installation sur un ordinateur physique. Pour plus d'informations sur le matériel, les logiciels et la configuration minimum requise, consultez le document technique sur l'exécution de Connect Pro Server dans un environnement virtuel. Options de conférence audio Connect Pro Connect Pro prend en charge deux méthodes de connexion à des fournisseurs de conférences audio : la fonctionnalité de voix universelle et les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. Chaque solution présente des avantages différents. Vous pouvez configurer une solution ou les deux solutions pour un seul fournisseur de conférences audio. Vous pouvez configurer n'importe quel nombre de fournisseurs de conférences audio pour un compte Connect Pro. La fonctionnalité de voix universelle permet à Connect Pro de recevoir du son à partir de n'importe quel fournisseur de conférences audio. Vous pouvez enregistrer le son de votre conférence Web et le transmettre aux participants VoIP uniquement. La solution de voix universelle utilise un composant appelé Flash Media Gateway qui s'installe avec Connect Pro Server. Flash Media Gateway reçoit le son d'un serveur SIP et l'envoie à Connect Pro via RTMP. Pour utiliser la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, vous devez héberger votre propre serveur SIP ou disposer d'un compte avec un fournisseur SIP. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de Flash Media Gateway, consultez la section « Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 38. Après le déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, les administrateurs de compte peuvent utiliser Connect Pro Central pour configurer les informations relatives aux conférences audio. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la page www.adobe.com/go/learn_cnn_uvconfig_fr. Les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés sont des extensions Java qui fournissent une communication entre Connect Pro et des fournisseurs de conférences audio spécifiques. Les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés fournissent un contrôle des appels amélioré. Adobe fournit plusieurs adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés à la page www.adobe.com/go/learn_cnn_adaptors_fr. Vous pouvez également utiliser l'API de téléphonie Java Connect Pro Telephony pour développer un adaptateur de téléphonie intégré pour n'importe quel fournisseur de conférences audio. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section Utilisation de la téléphonie avec Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous pouvez configurer la fonctionnalité de voix universelle pour des adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. Consultez la section « Configuration de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle pour des adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. » à la page 44. Le tableau suivant décrit les caractéristiques des deux solutions : Fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Adaptateur de téléphonie intégré Diffusion de son aux participants VoIP uniquement Oui Non (à moins que l'adaptateur soit configuré pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle) Contrôle d'appel amélioré. Par exemple, mise en silence, mise en attente, etc. Non Oui Enregistrement du son avec une réunion Connect Pro Oui Oui Nécessite Flash Media Gateway (intégré dans le programme d'installation de Connect Pro) Oui Non (à moins que l'adaptateur soit configuré pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle)15 Chapitre 2 : Installation de Connect Pro Pour installer Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5, Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7.5 et Flash Media Gateway, exécutez le programme d'installation et suivez les étapes de l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications. Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway Exécution du programme d'installation 1 Connectez-vous à l'ordinateur en tant qu'administrateur. 2 Fermez toutes les applications. 3 Insérez le DVD d'installation dans votre lecteur. Dans l'écran de démarrage, cliquez sur le bouton Installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7.5. Si l'installation ne démarre pas automatiquement, double-cliquez sur le fichier install.exe situé à l'emplacement Connect\7.5\Disk1\InstData\VM\install.exe. 4 Sélectionnez une langue et cliquez sur OK pour continuer. 5 Dans l'écran d'introduction, cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer. 6 Parmi les produits suivants, sélectionnez ceux que vous souhaiteriez installer et cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer : • Connect Pro Server • Flash Media Gateway Remarque : si vous n'avez pas de fournisseur de SIP/VOIP en amont, n'installez pas Flash Media Gateway. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Options de conférence audio Connect Pro » à la page 14. 7 Dans l'écran d'accord de licence qui apparaît, lisez le contrat, sélectionnez J’accepte les termes de ce contrat, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Pour sélectionner l'emplacement d'installation de Connect Pro Server, faites l'une des actions suivantes puis cliquez sur Suivant : • Cliquez sur Suivant pour accepter l'emplacement d'installation par défaut de Connect Pro Server (c:\breeze) ou cliquez sur Choisir pour sélectionner un autre emplacement. • Si vous avez choisi un emplacement différent et que vous avez décidé d'utiliser l'emplacement par défaut à la place, cliquez sur Restaurer le dossier par défaut. • Si Acrobat Connect Pro est déjà installé sur cet ordinateur, la fenêtre de mise à jour de l'installation apparaît. Activez la case à cocher qui confirme que vous avez bien sauvegardé votre base de données et le répertoire racine de Connect Pro. 9 Pour sélectionner l'emplacement d'installation de Flash Media Gateway, faites l'une des actions suivantes puis cliquez sur Suivant : • Cliquez sur Suivant pour accepter l'emplacement d'installation par défaut (C:\Program Files\Adobe\Flash Media Gateway) ou cliquez sur Choisir pour sélectionner un autre emplacement. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 16 Installation de Connect Pro • Si vous avez choisi un emplacement différent et que vous avez décidé d'utiliser l'emplacement par défaut à la place, cliquez sur Restaurer le dossier par défaut. • Si Flash Media Gateway est déjà installé sur cet ordinateur, l'écran d'installation de mise à jour de la version de Flash Media Gateway existante apparaît. 10 Saisissez votre numéro de série puis cliquez sur Suivant. Remarque : Adobe vous a envoyé un message électronique contenant un lien vers le site de licences d'Adobe. Suivez ce lien pour récupérer votre numéro de série. 11 Si l'écran du moteur de la base de données intégrée apparaît, faites l'une des actions suivantes : • Si vous prévoyez d'installer une base de données sur un autre ordinateur, sélectionnez Ne pas installer le moteur de la base de données intégrée. • Pour installer la base de données intégrée, sélectionnez Installer le moteur de la base de données intégrée à l'emplacement suivant. Pour installer à l'emplacement par défaut (c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server), cliquez sur Suivant. Pour sélectionner un autre emplacement, cliquez sur Choisir. Remarque : si le programme d'installation détecte que Microsoft SQL Server est déjà installé sur cet ordinateur, le programme d'installation n'installe pas la base de données. Si vous migrez et que vous utilisez déjà la base de données intégrée, Connect Pro utilise la base de données existante. Cependant, parfois le programme d'installation détecte une ancienne version de SQL Server qui ne fonctionne pas avec Connect Pro. Suivez les étapes indiquées dans « Désinstallation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server » à la page 22 et relancez l'installation. 12 Si vous avez installé le moteur de la base de données intégrée, saisissez un mot de passe fort et cliquez sur Suivant. 13 Passez en revue le résumé de pré-installation. Cliquez sur Précédent pour modifier ces paramètres. Cliquez sur Installer pour installer le logiciel. 14 Dans l'écran Initialisation du service Connect Pro, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, puis cliquez sur Suivant : • Sélectionnez Start Connect Pro... (recommandé). • Sélectionnez Ne pas démarrer Connect Pro maintenant... Si vous choisissez de démarrer Connect Pro après le redémarrage suivant, configurez Connect Pro avant de le lancer pour la première fois. Pour ouvrir la console de gestion des applications afin de configurer Connect Pro, sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Configurer Connect Pro Enterprise Server. 15 Si vous avez choisi de démarrer Connect Pro, un message vous signale que le service démarre. Acrobat Connect Pro Server exécute quatre services Windows : Adobe Connect Enterprise Service, Flash Media Server (FMS), Flash Media Administration Server et Acrobat Connect Pro Presence Server. Flash Media Gateway s'exécute comme service Flash Media Gateway. Voir « Démarrage et arrêt des serveurs » à la page 88. 16 Cliquez sur Terminer pour quitter le Programme d'installation. Si vous avez choisi de démarrer Connect Pro, l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications s'ouvre dans une fenêtre de navigateur pour vous guider tout au long des tâches de configuration. Configuration d'Acrobat Connect Pro avec l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications Après l'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro, le programme d'installation lance l'Assistant de gestion des applications. L'assistant vous guide lors de la configuration de la base de données et des paramètres du serveur, pour le téléchargement de votre fichier de licence et pour la création d'un administrateur. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 17 Installation de Connect Pro Remarque : si une autre application s'exécute sur le port 80, la Console de gestion des applications ne s'ouvre pas. Arrêtez l'application qui occupe le port 80 et rouvrez la Console de gestion des applications. Pour accéder à la Console de gestion des applications, choisissez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Configurer Adobe Connect Pro Enterprise Server , ou utilisez l'URL suivante : http://localhost:8510/console. 1. Lisez l'écran de bienvenue. L'écran de bienvenue présente l'Assistant. 2. Entrez les paramètres de la base de données. Définissez les valeurs des paramètres énumérés ci-dessous. Cliquez sur Suivant pour vous connecter à la base de données et vérifier vos paramètres. Hôte de base de données Nom d'hôte de l'ordinateur sur lequel la base de données est installée. Si vous installez la base de données intégrée, la valeur est localhost. Nom de la base de données Nom de la base de données. La valeur par défaut est breeze. Port de base de données Port que la base de données utilise pour communiquer avec Acrobat Connect Pro. La valeur par défaut est 1433. (Si vous utilisez le moteur de base de données intégré, sélectionnez la valeur 1434.) Utilisateur de base de données Nom de l'utilisateur de la base de données. Si vous avez installé la base de données intégrée, la valeur par défaut est « sa ». Mot de passe de l'utilisateur de base de données Mot de passe de l'utilisateur de la base de données. Si vous avez installé la base de données intégrée, définissez le mot de passe dans le programme d'installation. 3. Entrez les paramètres du serveur. Nom du compte Nom qui identifie le compte Acrobat Connect Pro, par exemple « Compte Acrobat Connect Pro 7 ». Hôte Connect Pro Nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) que les clients utilisent pour se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Par exemple, avec l'URL de compte http://connect.exemple.com, la valeur de l'hôte Connect Pro serait connect.exemple.com. Port HTTP Port utilisé par Acrobat Connect Pro pour communiquer via le protocole HTTP. La valeur par défaut est 80. Si vous entrez une autre valeur que 80, les clients doivent ajouter ce numéro de port au nom d'hôte dans l'URL lorsqu'ils accèdent au compte Acrobat Connect Pro. Mappages d'hôtes Nom correspond au nom d'hôte de l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. Nom externe correspond au nom de domaine pleinement qualifié que les clients utilisent pour se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Remarque : n'ajoutez pas de port au nom FQDN dans la zone Nom externe. Hôte SMTP Nom d'hôte de l'ordinateur hébergeant le serveur de messagerie SMTP. Nom d'utilisateur SMTP Nom d'utilisateur servant à s'authentifier auprès de l'hôte SMTP. Si ce champ reste vide, Connect Pro essaie d'envoyer des messages électroniques sans authentification avec le serveur SMTP. Mot de passe SMTP Le mot de passe du nom d'utilisateur SMTP. Adresse de messagerie système Adresse de messagerie depuis laquelle les messages électroniques administratifs sont envoyés. Adresse de messagerie de l'Assistance Adresse de messagerie de l'Assistance destinée aux utilisateurs d'Acrobat Connect Pro.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 18 Installation de Connect Pro Adresse de messagerie Cci Adresse de messagerie en copie cachée à laquelle toutes les notifications destinées aux utilisateurs sont également envoyées. Cette variable autorise un suivi administratif des messages électroniques envoyés via Acrobat Connect Pro sans que l'adresse de messagerie interne ne soit exposée. Stockage partagé Volume et répertoire d'un serveur externe où le contenu est stocké, par exemple, \\volume\répertoire. Pour stocker du contenu sur plusieurs volumes, séparez-les par des points virgules (;). Avant de configurer cette fonction, consultez la section « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46. Taille du contenu mis en cache Nombre entier compris entre 1 et 100 définissant le pourcentage d'espace disque à utiliser pour stocker le contenu sur Acrobat Connect Pro. Le cache pouvant grossir au-delà du pourcentage spécifié, dès lors il est préférable de choisir une valeur comprise entre 15 et 50. Si vous ne renseignez pas ce champ ou si vous entrez 0, aucun cache n'est utilisé et le contenu est copié en miroir sur Acrobat Connect Pro et tous les volumes externes. Avant de configurer cette fonction, consultez la section « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46. 4. Saisissez les paramètres Flash Media Gateway. Saisissez les noms d'ordinateur et les noms externes des serveurs Flash Media Gateway. Les paramètres ne sont pas pris en compte instantanément. En cliquant sur OK pour confirmer les paramètres, il se peut que Connect Pro redémarre tous les serveurs Flash Media Gateway. Les paramètres sont envoyés à chaque serveur Flash Media Gateway dans un groupe. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter les serveurs Flash Media Gateway. Saisissez les paramètres suivants : Nom Le nom de l'ordinateur hébergeant Flash Media Gateway, par exemple janedoe-pc. Nom externe Le nom de domaine complet du serveur hébergeant Flash Media Gateway, par exemple janedoepc.example.com. Remarque : n'ajoutez pas de port au nom FQDN dans la zone Nom externe. L'état indique si Connect Pro Server peut ou non se connecter au serveur Flash Media Gateway. Le serveur Flash Media Gateway peut prendre quelques secondes pour devenir actif. Un état « Actif » ne signifie pas que les paramètres SIP ont été envoyés au serveur Flash Media Gateway. Si Connect Pro Server ne peut pas se connecter à Flash Media Gateway, l'état est « Inactif ». Cliquez sur Suivant et saisissez les paramètres suivants : Nom d'utilisateur Le nom d'utilisateur du profil SIP utilisé par le serveur Flash Media Gateway pour créer des sessions SIP, par exemple sipUN1. Mot de passe Le mot de passe du profil SIP utilisé par le serveur Flash Media Gateway pour créer des sessions SIP. AVérification de votre installationdresse SIP L'adresse du serveur SIP pour le profil SIP utilisé par le serveur Flash Media Gateway pour créer des sessions SIP, par exemple 10.12.13.14:12345. Hôte par défaut L'hôte par défaut du profil SIP. Ce paramètre est l'adresse du serveur SIP à utiliser si l'inscription avec le serveur SIP échoue. Ce paramètre est généralement défini sur la même adresse que l'adresse SIP. Inscription Décidez si un serveur Flash Media Gateway doit s'inscrire sur le serveur SIP. Port SIP Le port sur lequel le serveur Flash Media Gateway écoute des requêtes SIP, par exemple 5060. Limite inférieure de port Le plus petit numéro de port pouvant servir aux données audio RTP. La valeur par défaut est 5000. Limite supérieure de port Le numéro de port le plus élevé pouvant servir aux données audio RTP. La valeur par défaut est 6000. Expiration de l'enregistrement L'intervalle, en secondes, auquel Flash Media Gateway renouvelle son enregistrement avec le serveur SIP. La valeur par défaut est 2400 secondes.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 19 Installation de Connect Pro 5. Chargez le fichier de licence. Pour activer Acrobat Connect Pro, vous devez télécharger un fichier de licence d'Adobe et l'installer sur l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. Cliquez sur le lien pour télécharger votre fichier de licence depuis Adobe. Puis recherchez le fichier de licence téléchargé pour le copier dans l'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro. 6. Créez un administrateur de compte. Chaque compte Acrobat Connect Pro doit disposer d'au moins un administrateur chargé d'effectuer des tâches dans l'application Web Connect Pro Central. Les comptes mis à niveau possèdent déjà un administrateur, mais vous pouvez en ajouter un autre ici. 7. Continuez à utiliser Connect Pro. A partir de là, vous pouvez vous connecter à Connect Pro Central (l'application Web qui vous permet de gérer votre compte, de créer des réunions, des événements, etc., et de gérer le contenu sur l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro), revenir dans la Console de gestion des applications (pour modifier ou vérifier vos paramètres) ou consulter la documentation pour en savoir plus sur Connect Pro. Vérification de l'installation Vérification de la connectivité de la base de données Si vous pouvez vous connecter à Connect Pro Central (application Web située dans Acrobat Connect Pro), la base de données et Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent fonctionner ensemble. 1 Accédez à l'adresse URL suivante : http://[nomhôte] . Remarque : dans cette URL, [nomhôte] correspond à la valeur définie pour Hôte Connect Pro dans la Console de gestion des applications. 2 Entrez l'identifiant de connexion et le mot de passe définis dans la Console de gestion des applications. Si vous pouvez vous connecter, l'onglet d'accueil de Connect Pro Central apparaît. Vérification du bon fonctionnement des notifications électroniques Si vous n'avez pas saisi de valeur dans le champ hôte SMTP dans la Console de gestion des applications, Acrobat Connect Pro ne peut pas envoyer de notifications électroniques. Si vous avez saisi un hôte SMTP, procédez comme suit pour vérifier que Connect Pro peut bien envoyer des notifications électroniques : 1 Dans l'onglet d'accueil de Connect Pro, cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 2 Ouvrez l'onglet Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Nouvel utilisateur. 4 Dans la page Informations sur le nouvel utilisateur, entrez les informations requises. Voici une liste partielle des options : Adresse de messagerie Utilisez l'adresse électronique du nouvel utilisateur. Assurez-vous que l'option Envoyer par message électronique les informations sur le nouveau compte, nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe est activée. Nouveau mot de passe Créez un mot de passe de 4 à 16 caractères. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 20 Installation de Connect Pro 6 Sous l'en-tête Modifier l'appartenance à un groupe, sélectionnez un groupe, affectez l'utilisateur au groupe et cliquez sur Terminer. 7 Laissez suffisamment de temps à l'utilisateur pour vérifier sa notification électronique. Si l'utilisateur a reçu la notification, Acrobat Connect Pro fonctionne et vous pouvez envoyer des messages électroniques à l'aide du serveur de messagerie. 8 Si le message électronique n'arrive pas, procédez comme suit : a Vérifiez la validité de l'adresse de messagerie. b Assurez-vous que le message n'ait pas été filtré en tant que courrier indésirable. c Assurez-vous d'avoir configuré Acrobat Connect Pro avec un hôte SMTP valide et que le service SMTP fonctionne en dehors d'Acrobat Connect Pro. d Contactez l'Assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Vérification du bon fonctionnement d'Adobe Presenter Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement d'Adobe Presenter, envoyez une présentation Microsoft PowerPoint à Acrobat Connect Pro pour sa compilation en présentation Flash, puis affichez-la. Avant de pouvoir envoyer une présentation PowerPoint à Acrobat Connect Pro, installez Adobe Presenter sur un ordinateur sur lequel PowerPoint est déjà installé. 1 Lancez un navigateur et ouvrez Connect Pro Central (http://localhost:8510 ou le nom de domaine complet de Connect Pro Server). 2 Cliquez sur Ressources > Prise en main. 3 Sur la page Prise en main, cliquez sur Publier des présentations > Installer Adobe Presenter. 4 Exécution du programme d'installation. 5 Si vous n'avez pas de présentation PowerPoint, créez et enregistrez une présentation constituez d'une ou deux diapositives. 6 Ouvrez l'Assistant de publication de Connect Pro en choisissant Publier dans le menu Adobe Presenter de PowerPoint. 7 Sélectionnez Connect Pro et entrez les informations sur votre serveur. 8 Connectez-vous avec votre adresse de messagerie et votre mot de passe et suivez les étapes dans l'assistant de publication. Assurez-vous de faire partie du groupe Auteurs (Administration > Utilisateurs et Groupes dans Connect Pro Central). Lorsque vous avez terminé les étapes de l'Assistant de publication, Adobe Presenter charge votre présentation PowerPoint sur Connect Pro qui la compile en présentation Flash. 9 A la fin de la compilation, ouvrez l'onglet Contenu dans Connect Pro Central et recherchez votre présentation. 10 Ouvrez votre présentation pour l'afficher. Vérification du bon fonctionnement du module Formation Remarque : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training est une fonctionnalité optionnelle qui doit être activée dans votre licence. ? Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation de Connect Pro Central. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 21 Installation de Connect Pro Si vous pouvez afficher et accéder à l'onglet Formation, Connect Training fonctionne correctement. Assurez-vous de faire partie du groupe Directeurs de formation (Administration > Utilisateurs et Groupes). Vérification du bon fonctionnement du module Réunion Remarque : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting est une fonctionnalité optionnelle qui doit être activée dans votre licence. Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting, vous devez faire partie du groupe Hôtes de réunions ou du groupe Administrateurs. 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central en tant qu'utilisateur membre du groupe Hôtes de réunions ou Administrateurs. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions et sélectionnez Nouvelle réunion. 3 Dans la page Entrer les informations sur la réunion, entrez les informations requises. Pour l'option Accès à la réunion, choisissez Seuls les utilisateurs inscrits et les visiteurs acceptés sont admis à la réunion. Cliquez sur Terminer pour créer la réunion. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Entrer dans la salle de réunion. 5 Identifiez-vous pour participer à la réunion en tant qu'utilisateur inscrit. 6 Si la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Add-in apparaît, suivez les instructions pour l'installer. Si la salle de réunion s'ouvre, Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting fonctionne correctement. Vérification du bon fonctionnement du module Evénements Remarque : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events est une fonctionnalité optionnelle qui doit être activée dans votre licence. 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central en tant qu'utilisateur membre du groupe Gestionnaires d'événements ou Administrateurs. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Evénements de Connect Pro Central. Si vous pouvez afficher et accéder à cet onglet, Connect Pro Events fonctionne correctement. Installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Exécution du programme d'installation 1 Fermez toutes les autres applications. 2 Insérez le DVD d'installation dans votre lecteur. Dans l'écran de démarrage, cliquez sur le bouton Installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Si le programme d'installation ne démarre pas automatiquement, double-cliquez sur le fichier edgesetup.exe dans le dossier racine d'installation du DVD. 3 Sélectionnez une langue dans la boîte de dialogue prévue à cet effet. Cliquez sur OK pour continuer. 4 Dans l'écran de configuration, cliquez sur Suivant pour continuer.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 22 Installation de Connect Pro 5 Dans l'écran d'accord de licence qui apparaît, lisez le contrat, sélectionnez J’accepte les termes de ce contrat, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Suivant pour accepter le répertoire d'installation par défaut (c:\breeze), ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour choisir un autre emplacement, puis cliquez sur Suivant. • Si Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server est déjà installé sur cet ordinateur, la fenêtre de mise à jour de l'installation existante d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server apparaît. Cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Dans l'écran Sélectionnez un groupe de programmes, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Suivant pour accepter l'emplacement par défaut des raccourcis du menu Démarrer. • Cliquez sur Parcourir pour sélectionner un autre emplacement. 8 Dans la boîte de dialogue Prêt pour l'installation, vérifiez les emplacements d'installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server et du dossier du menu de démarrage. Cliquez sur Précédent pour vérifier ou modifier ces paramètres, ou cliquez sur Installer. 9 Cliquez sur Terminer pour quitter l'installation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7. Voir aussi « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28 Désinstallation des serveurs Désinstallation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server Remarque : la désinstallation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server ne désinstalle pas SQL Server. 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Désinstaller Connect Pro Server. 2 Supprimez le dossier Acrobat Connect Pro racine. Par défaut, l'emplacement est C:\breeze. Lorsque vous désinstallez Acrobat Connect Pro, les fichiers custom.ini et config.ini et les fichiers de contenu ne sont pas supprimés. Ces fichiers sont supprimés en même temps que le répertoire racine. Important : le dossier racine contient le dossier de contenu. Si vous désirez conserver le contenu, copiez-le dans un autre emplacement. 3 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Exécuter. Saisissez regedit et cliquez sur OK pour ouvrir l'Editeur de registres. a Allez dans Mon poste de travail -> HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE -> SOFTWARE -> MICROSOFT -> WINDOWS -> CurrentVersion -> Désinstaller. b Sélectionnez et supprimez les touches d'Acrobat Connect Pro (les titres peuvent contenir une chaîne de version). 4 (En option) Si le moteur de la base de données intégrée a été installé, supprimez les touches de registres suivantes : • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server • HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\MSSQLSERVERMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 23 Installation de Connect Pro Désinstallation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Ajout/Suppression de programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server > Supprimer. 2 Supprimez le dossier Acrobat Connect Pro racine. Par défaut, l'emplacement est C:\breeze. Désinstallation de Flash Media Gateway Flash Media Gateway est désinstallé lorsque vous désinstallez le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous pouvez également exécuter le programme suivant pour désinstaller Flash Media Gateway : Program Files\Adobe\Flash Media Gateway\Uninstall_Flash Media Gateway\ Uninstall Flash Media Gateway.exe.24 Chapitre 3 : Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Après avoir installé Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server, Flash Media Gateway ou Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server et terminé la première phase de configuration avec la console de gestion des applications, configurez l'une de ces fonctions facultatives et déployez le serveur. Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server Déploiement du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro 1 Sur votre serveur DNS, définissez un nom de domaine pleinement qualifié pour Acrobat Connect Pro (par exemple, connect.masociété.com). Mappez ce nom de domaine sur l'adresse IP statique de l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. 2 Si vous souhaitez qu'Acrobat Connect Pro soit disponible hors de votre réseau, configurez les ports suivants dans un pare-feu : 80 Port associé par défaut au serveur d'applications Acrobat Connect Pro. Port tertiaire du serveur de réunions (Flash Media Server). 1935 Port par défaut du serveur de réunions (Flash Media Server). 443 Port par défaut pour SSL. Port secondaire du serveur de réunions (Flash Media Server). Remarque : si le trafic d'Acrobat Connect Pro passe par une passerelle (avec une adresse IP différente), assurez-vous que les pare-feu soient configurés pour accepter les requêtes provenant de l'adresse IP de cette passerelle. Pour obtenir de l'aide pour le déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro, contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Voir aussi « Configuration des ports » à la page 2 Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro Avant de déployer un cluster, les éléments suivants sont nécessaires : • Une licence prenant en charge le nombre de nœuds que compte votre cluster. Pour plus d'informations, contactez votre représentant Adobe. • Chaque ordinateur du cluster doit posséder une adresse IP statique et une entrée DNS. • Un serveur de messagerie. • Une installation SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition sur un ordinateur dédié disposant d'une adresse IP statique. Si vous installez Acrobat Connect Pro dans un cluster, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser le moteur de base de données intégré. Chaque serveur hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro se connecte à la base de données, mais les restrictions liées à la licence n'autorisent la connexion que d'un seul serveur au moteur de base de données intégré.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 25 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro • Une solution d'équilibrage de charge matérielle ou logicielle. Une solution d'équilibrage de charge matérielle nécessite un ordinateur distinct avec une adresse IP statique et une entrée DNS. Une solution logicielle peut être installée sur l'un des nœuds du cluster. • Un ou plusieurs volumes de stockage partagé. Cette configuration n'est pas obligatoire, mais recommandée. Avant de pouvoir déployer Acrobat Connect Pro dans un cluster, installez-le sur un seul ordinateur. Configurez également les fonctionnalités supplémentaires (par exemple, SSL, une intégration de service d'annuaire, une authentification unique, un stockage de contenu partagé, etc.) et vérifiez qu'elles fonctionnent correctement sur ce serveur. 1 Installez et configurez Acrobat Connect Pro sur un serveur dédié. Utilisez les mêmes numéro de série et fichier de licence pour chaque installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro. N'installez pas le moteur de base de données intégré et, si votre solution de stockage partagé requiert la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un mot de passe, ne démarrez pas Acrobat Connect Pro à partir du programme d'installation. 2 Si votre solution de stockage partagé requiert la saisie d'un nom d'utilisateur et d'un mot de passe, procédez comme suit pour les ajouter à Adobe Connect Enterprise Service : a Ouvrez le panneau de configuration Services. b Double-cliquez sur Adobe Connect Enterprise Service. c Cliquez sur l'onglet Connexion. d Cliquez sur la case d'option Ce compte et entrez le nom d'utilisateur du stockage partagé dans le champ. La syntaxe du nom d'utilisateur est [sous-domaine\]nom d'utilisateur. e Entrez et confirmez le mot de passe du stockage partagé. f Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. 3 Procédez comme suit pour démarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : a Dans le panneau de configuration Services, sélectionnez Flash Media Server (FMS) et cliquez ensuite sur Démarrer le service. b Dans le panneau de configuration Services, sélectionnez Adobe Connect Enterprise Service et cliquez ensuite sur Démarrer le service. 4 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7 pour ouvrir l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans l'écran Paramètres de la base de données, entrez les informations relatives à la base de données SQL Server, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si Acrobat Connect Pro est parvenu à se connecter à la base de données, un message de confirmation s'affiche et la fenêtre Paramètres de la base de données s'ouvre. Cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans l'écran Paramètres du serveur, procédez comme suit et cliquez sur Suivant : a Entrez un nom de compte. b Dans le champ Hôte Connect Pro, entrez le nom de l'ordinateur qui exécute l'équilibreur de charge. c Entrez un numéro de port HTTP. Ce numéro peut être 80 ou 8080 selon l'équilibreur de charge utilisé. d Entrez le nom externe du nœud de cluster. e Entrez le nom de domaine de l'hôte SMTP et du système, ainsi que les adresses électroniques d'assistance. f Si vous utilisez un stockage partagé, entrez le chemin d'accès au(x) volume(s) (séparez les volumes à l'aide d'un point-virgule).MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 26 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro g Entrez le pourcentage du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro que vous souhaitez utiliser comme cache local. Remarque : le contenu est écrit dans le cache local et le volume de stockage partagé. Le contenu est conservé dans le cache local pendant 24 heures après sa dernière utilisation. Si le pourcentage de cache a été dépassé a l'issue de cette période, le contenu est vidé. 7 Transférez le fichier de licence, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 8 Créez un administrateur et cliquez sur Terminer. 9 Répétez les étapes 1 à 8 pour chaque serveur du cluster. 10 Pour configurer l'équilibreur de charge, procédez comme suit : a Configurez l'équilibreur de charge de sorte qu'il écoute sur le port 80. b Ajoutez tous les noms des nœuds de cluster au fichier de configuration de l'équilibreur de charge. Remarque : pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de l'équilibreur de charge, consultez la documentation du fabricant. 11 Ouvrez un navigateur Web et entrez le nom de domaine de l'équilibreur de charge ; par exemple, http://connect.exemple.com. Pour obtenir de l'aide sur le déploiement d'un cluster, contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Voir aussi « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15 « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46 Vérification des opérations au sein d'un cluster Si un ordinateur d'un cluster s'arrête, l'équilibreur de charge achemine toutes les requêtes HTTP vers un ordinateur opérationnel du cluster. Lorsqu'une réunion commence, le serveur d'applications affecte un hôte principal et un hôte de secours à la salle de réunion en fonction de la charge rencontrée. Lorsque l'hôte principal s'arrête, les clients se reconnectent à l'hôte de secours. Il est préférable de vérifier que le contenu chargé sur un serveur d'un cluster est bien répliqué sur les autres ordinateurs du cluster. Dans les procédures suivantes, le cluster contient deux ordinateurs : Ordinateur1 et Ordinateur2. Vérification de l'équilibrage de charge et du basculement de réunion 1 Démarrez Acrobat Connect Pro sur les deux ordinateurs. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 2 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central à partir de l'URL suivante : http://[nomhôte] Pour nomhôte, utilisez la valeur Hôte Connect Pro que vous avez saisie dans la Console de gestion des applications.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 27 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 3 Sélectionnez l'onglet Réunions et cliquez sur le lien d'une réunion pour accéder à une salle de réunion. Au besoin, créez une nouvelle réunion. 4 Arrêtez Acrobat Connect Pro sur Ordinateur2. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server. Si le basculement de réunion a bien fonctionné, le témoin de connexion de la réunion doit toujours être vert. 5 Dans Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur un onglet ou un lien quelconque. Si l'équilibreur de charge fonctionne, vous devriez encore être en mesure d'envoyer des requêtes à Connect Pro Central et de recevoir des réponses. Si le cluster contient plusieurs ordinateurs, testez cette procédure de démarrage-arrêt sur chacun d'eux. Vérification de la réplication de contenu 1 Démarrez Acrobat Connect Pro sur Ordinateur1. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 2 Arrêtez Acrobat Connect Pro sur Ordinateur2. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter·Connect Pro Meeting Server. 3 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central à partir de l'URL suivante : http://[nomhôte] Pour nomhôte, entrez la valeur Hôte Connect Pro que vous avez saisie dans la Console de gestion des applications. 4 Transférez une image JPEG ou un autre contenu vers Acrobat Connect Pro sur Ordinateur1 : • Pour ce faire, vous devez être membre du groupe Auteurs. (Si vous êtes Administrateur de compte, vous pouvez vous ajouter vous-même au groupe Auteurs dans Connect Pro Central.) • Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu. • Cliquez sur Nouveau contenu et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent dans votre navigateur pour ajouter du contenu. Lorsque le transfert de votre contenu test est terminé, la page Contenu utilisateurs s'ouvre et présente la liste des fichiers qui vous appartenaient. 5 Cliquez sur le lien pointant vers le contenu test que vous venez de transférer. Une page d'informations sur les contenus contenant l'adresse URL qui permet d'afficher ce contenu apparaît. 6 Notez l'adresse URL pour l'utiliser à l'étape 10. 7 Cliquez sur l'URL.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 28 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 8 Démarrez Ordinateur2, attendez que le démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro soit terminé, puis arrêtez Ordinateur1. Si vous avez configuré un périphérique de stockage externe, il n'est pas nécessaire d'attendre que Ordinateur2 s'arrête ; le contenu requis est copié à partir du périphérique externe. 9 Fermez la fenêtre du navigateur dans laquelle le contenu test est affiché. 10 Ouvrez une nouvelle fenêtre de navigateur et entrez l'URL permettant d'afficher votre contenu test. Si ce contenu apparaît, la réplication vers Ordinateur2 fonctionne. Une fenêtre vide ou un message d'erreur signifie que la réplication n'a pas fonctionné. Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Procédure d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 1. Créez les régions des serveurs Edge. Vous pouvez configurer des serveurs Edge ou des clusters de serveurs Edge dans différents sites, ou régions, afin d'affecter et d'équilibrer l'accès à Acrobat Connect Pro. Par exemple, vous pouvez configurer un serveur Edge à San Francisco pour les utilisateurs de la côte ouest des Etats-unis et un autre serveur Edge à Boston pour ceux de la côte est. 2. Installez Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server. Installez Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server sur chaque ordinateur de chaque région. Par exemple, si vous avez un cluster de serveurs Edge dans une région, installez Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server sur chaque ordinateur du cluster. Reportez-vous à la section « Installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 21. 3. Modifiez le serveur DNS de chaque région. Mappez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro d'origine sur l'adresse IP statique du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro Edge de chaque région. Reportez-vous à la section « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28. 4. Configurez le serveur Edge. Vous devez ajouter les paramètres de configuration dans le fichier custom.ini de chaque serveur Acrobat Connect Pro Edge. Reportez-vous à la section « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28. 5. Configurez le serveur d'origine. Vous devez ajouter les paramètres de configuration dans le fichier custom.ini de chaque serveur Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous devez également définir le Nom externe du serveur Edge dans la Console de gestion des applications du serveur d'origine. Reportez-vous à la section « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28. 6. Configurez l'équilibreur de charge. Si vous configurez plusieurs serveurs Edge dans une région, vous devez utiliser un équilibreur pour équilibrer la charge entre les serveurs Edge et les configurer pour qu'ils écoutent le port 80. Les serveurs Edge écoutent le port 8080. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la documentation fournie par le fabricant de l'équilibreur de charge.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 29 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Avant de déployer des serveurs Edge, il est préférable de vérifier le bon fonctionnement d'Acrobat Connect Pro et de toute fonctionnalité supplémentaire (par exemple : SSL, une intégration de service d'annuaire, l'authentification unique, un stockage de contenu partagé, etc.). 1 Dans votre serveur DNS, mappez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) du serveur d'origine avec l'adresse IP statique du serveur Edge. Si vous installez des serveurs Edge dans plusieurs régions, répétez cette étape pour chacune d'elles. Remarque : vous pouvez également utiliser un fichier d'hôtes. Dans ce cas, chaque client doit disposer d'un fichier d'hôtes dont l'adresse IP statique du serveur Edge pointe sur le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'origine. 2 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server, ouvrez le fichier [rép_install_racine] \edgeserver\win32\conf\HttpCache.xml et remplacez le nom de l'ordinateur indiqué dans la balise HostName par le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) du serveur Edge ; edge1.exemple.com, par exemple. edge1.yourcompany.com 3 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server, créez un nouveau fichier [rép_install_racine]\edgeserver\custom.ini et saisissez les valeurs et paramètres suivants : FCS_EDGE_HOST Nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur Edge, par exemple, FCS_EDGE_HOST=edge1.yourcompany.com. FCS_EDGE_REGISTER_HOST Nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) du serveur d'origine Acrobat Connect Pro ; par exemple, FCS_EDGE_REGISTER_HOST=connect.votresociété.com. FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID Nom du cluster. Chaque cluster de serveurs Edge doit disposer d'un ID unique. Chaque ordinateur du cluster doit avoir le même identifiant. Le format recommandé est nomsociété-nomcluster ; par exemple, FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=votresociété-us. Remarque : vous devez configurer ce paramètre même si vous ne déployez qu'un seul serveur Acrobat Connect Pro Edge. FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT Adresse IP ou nom de domaine et numéro de port de l'ordinateur sur lequel est installé Acrobat Connect Pro ; par exemple, FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.votresociete.com:80. Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server se connecte au serveur d'origine d'Acrobat Connect Pro à cet emplacement. FCS_EDGE_PASSWORD (Facultatif) Mot de passe du serveur Edge. Si vous définissez une valeur pour ce paramètre, vous devez définir la même valeur pour chaque serveur Edge et pour le serveur d'origine. FCS_EDGE_EXPIRY_TIME (Facultatif) Nombre de millisecondes accordées au serveur Edge pour s'enregistrer sur le serveur d'origine avant son expiration dans le cluster et le basculement du système sur un autre serveur Edge. Commencez par la valeur par défaut FCS_EDGE_EXPIRY_TIME=60000. FCS_EDGE_REG_INTERVAL (Facultatif) Intervalle, en millisecondes, durant lequel le serveur Edge tente de s'enregistrer auprès du serveur d'origine. Ce paramètre détermine la fréquence à laquelle le serveur Edge se met à la disposition du serveur d'origine. Commencez par la valeur par défaut FCS_EDGE_REG_INTERVAL=30000. DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT (Facultatif) Pour configurer les ports du serveur Edge, ajoutez la ligne suivante : DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT=:1935,80,-443 Le signe moins (-) placé devant 443 désigne le port 443 comme port sécurisé recevant uniquement des connexions RTMPS. Si vous tentez une demande de connexion RTMPS au port 1935 ou 80, la connexion échouera. De même, une demande de connexion RTMP non sécurisée envoyée au port 443 échoue également. Remarque : si votre serveur Edge utilise un accélérateur matériel externe, il n'est pas nécessaire de configurer le port 443 comme port sécurisé.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 30 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Vous trouverez, ci-dessous, des exemples de valeurs pour le fichier config.ini : FCS_EDGE_HOST=edge.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_REGISTER_HOST=connect.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=yourcompany-us FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:80 4 Redémarrez le serveur Edge. 5 Sur le serveur d'origine Acrobat Connect Pro, ouvrez le fichier [rép_install_racine] \custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte et mappez la valeur du paramètre FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID sur un ID de région ; la syntaxe est Edge.FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID = zone-id. Même si vous ne déployez qu'un seul serveur Edge, vous devez mapper l'identifiant du cluster sur un identifiant de région. Chaque cluster de serveurs Edge doit disposer d'un identifiant de région. L'identifiant de région peut être tout entier positif supérieur à 0. Par exemple, vous pouvez avoir trois clusters mappés sur les régions 1 à 3 : edge.yourcompany-us=1 edge.yourcompany-apac=2 edge.yourcompany-emea=3 Ce qui suit est un exemple de fichier custom.ini pour le serveur d'origine : DB_HOST=localhost DB_PORT=1433 DB_NAME=breeze DB_USER=sa DB_PASSWORD=#V1#4cUsRJ6oeFwZLnQPpS4f0w== # DEBUG LOGGING SETTINGS HTTP_TRACE=yes DB_LOG_ALL_QUERIES=yes # EDGE SERVER SETTINGS edge.yourcompany-us=1 Remarque : si vous définissez un paramètre FCS_EDGE_PASSWORD dans le fichier config.ini du serveur Edge, définissez le même mot de passe dans le fichier custom.ini du serveur d'origine. 6 Redémarrez le serveur d'origine. 7 Sur le serveur d'origine, ouvrez la console de gestion des applications (Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7). Ouvrez l'onglet Paramètres de l'application, puis choisissez Paramètres du serveur et, dans la section Mappages de l'hôte, entrez le Nom externe du serveur Edge. Le nom externe doit être identique à la valeur définie pour le paramètre FCS_EDGE_HOST sur le serveur Edge. 8 Sur le serveur d'origine, configurez le pare-feu Windows de sorte que les serveurs Edge puissent accéder au port 8506. 9 Répétez les étapes 2 à 4 pour chaque serveur Edge de chaque région. 10 Répétez les étapes 5 à 7 pour chaque serveur d'origine de chaque région. Pour obtenir de l'aide sur le déploiement des serveurs Edge, contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr.. Voir aussi « Choix du déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 12MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 31 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Intégration dans un service d'annuaire Présentation de l'intégration du service d'annuaire Vous pouvez intégrer Acrobat Connect Pro à un service d'annuaire afin d'authentifier les utilisateurs par rapport à l'annuaire LDAP et d'éviter d'ajouter manuellement des groupes et des utilisateurs individuels. Les comptes d'utilisateur sont créés automatiquement dans Acrobat Connect Pro par le biais de synchronisations manuelles ou planifiées avec l'annuaire de la société. Pour être intégré à Acrobat Connect Pro, votre serveur d'annuaire doit utiliser le protocole LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) ou LDAPS (secure Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). Le protocole LDAP est un protocole Internet client-serveur qui permet de rechercher les coordonnées des utilisateurs dans un serveur d'annuaire compatible LDAP. Acrobat Connect Pro se connecte à un annuaire LDAP en tant que client LDAP. Il importe les utilisateurs et les groupes et synchronise les informations de ceux-ci avec un annuaire LDAP. Vous pouvez également configurer Acrobat Connect Pro pour authentifier les utilisateurs par rapport à l'annuaire LDAP. Tout service d'annuaire compatible LDAP peut s'intégrer à Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous trouverez la liste des annuaires LDAP certifiés à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_sysreqs_fr. Présentation de la structure d'annuaire LDAP Les annuaires LDAP organisent les informations selon la norme X.500. Dans un annuaire LDAP, un utilisateur ou un groupe est appelé une entrée. Une entrée est un ensemble d'attributs. Un attribut se compose d'un type et d'une ou plusieurs valeurs. Les types utilisent des chaînes mnémoniques comme « ou »pour une entité organisationnelle ou « cn » pour un nom commun. Les valeurs des attributs sont des informations, telles qu'un numéro de téléphone, une adresse de messagerie et une photo. Pour connaître la structure d'annuaire LDAP de votre société, contactez votre administrateur LDAP. Chaque entrée présente un nom unique qui décrit le chemin de l'entrée par l'intermédiaire d'une structure en arborescence allant de l'entrée jusqu'à la racine. Le nom unique d'une entrée dans l'annuaire LDAP est une concaténation du nom de l'entrée (appelé nom unique relatif, RDN) et des noms de ses entrées parentes dans la structure d'arborescence. L'arborescence peut refléter des emplacements géographiques ou les limites des services d'une société. Par exemple, si Alicia Solis est un utilisateur du service QA d'Acme, Inc. en France, le nom unique de cet utilisateur peut être : cn=Alicia Solis, ou=QA, c=France, dc=Acme, dc=com Importation des branches d'annuaire Lors de l'importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes depuis un annuaire LDAP vers Acrobat Connect Pro, vous indiquez le chemin vers une section de l'arborescence LDAP à l'aide du nom unique de cette section. L'opération spécifie l'étendue de la recherche. Par exemple, vous pouvez n'importer que les utilisateurs d'un groupe particulier de votre société. Pour ce faire, vous devez savoir où sont situées les entrées de ce groupe dans l'arborescence de l'annuaire. Une technique courante consiste à utiliser le domaine Internet de la société en tant que racine de l'arborescence. Par exemple, Acme, Inc. pourrait utiliser dc=com pour spécifier l'élément racine de l'arborescence. Un nom unique qui spécifie le bureau d'Acme, Inc. à Singapour pourrait être ou=Singapour , ou=Marketing , ou=Employés , dc=Acme , dc=com. (Dans cet exemple, « ou » est l'abréviation de « entité organisationnelle » et « dc »l'abréviation de « composant de domaine ».)MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 32 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Remarque : tous les annuaires LDAP n'ont pas de racine unique. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez importer des branches distinctes. Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes Il existe deux moyens de structurer les entrées d'utilisateurs et de groupes dans un annuaire LDAP : sous le même nœud d'une branche ou sous des branches différentes. Si les utilisateurs et les groupes sont sous le même nœud d'une branche LDAP, les paramètres d'utilisateurs et de groupes liés à l'importation des entrées contiennent le même nom unique de branche. Cela signifie que vous devez utiliser un filtre pour ne sélectionner que les utilisateurs lorsque vous importez des utilisateurs, et un filtre pour ne sélectionner que les groupes lorsque vous importez des groupes. Si les utilisateurs et les groupes sont placés sous des branches différentes de l'arborescence, utilisez un nom unique de branche qui sélectionne la branche d'utilisateurs lorsque vous importez les utilisateurs et la branche de groupes lorsque vous importez les groupes. Vous pouvez également importer des sous-branches pour importer les utilisateurs de toutes les branches au-dessous d'un certain niveau. Par exemple, pour importer tous les employés du service commercial, vous pouvez utiliser le nom unique de la branche suivante : ou=Sales, dc=Acme, dc=com Le personnel commercial peut, cependant, être stocké dans des sous-branches. Dans ce cas, dans l'écran Mappage du profil utilisateur, définissez le paramètre Recherche de sous-arborescence sur « true » pour vous assurer que les utilisateurs sont importés depuis les sous-branches situées sous ce niveau dans l'arborescence. Filtrage des entrées sélectionnées Un filtre précise la condition que doit remplir une entrée pour être sélectionnée. Les sélections d'entrée au sein d'une partie de l'arborescence sont ainsi limitées. Par exemple, si le filtre spécifie (objectClass=organizationalPerson), seules les entrées dont l'attribut est organizationalPerson sont sélectionnées pour l'importation. Remarque : l'attribut objectClass doit être présent dans toutes les entrées d'un annuaire LDAP. Utilisateurs et groupes internes et externes Les utilisateurs et les groupes créés directement dans Acrobat Connect Pro et non importés depuis un annuaire LDAP sont appelés utilisateurs et groupes internes. Les utilisateurs et les groupes importés dans la base de données Acrobat Connect Pro depuis un annuaire LDAP sont appelés utilisateurs et groupes externes. Pour que les groupes importés restent synchronisés avec l'annuaire LDAP externe, vous ne pouvez pas ajouter d'utilisateurs et de groupes internes dans les groupes externes. Vous pouvez, en revanche, ajouter des utilisateurs et des groupes externes dans les groupes internes. Si la valeur de l'identifiant ou du nom d'une entrée de groupe ou d'utilisateur importée correspond à celle d'un groupe ou d'un utilisateur interne existant, la synchronisation des annuaires transforme le groupe ou l'utilisateur importé d'interne en externe et place un avertissement dans le journal de synchronisation. Intégration d'Acrobat Connect Pro à un annuaire LDAP L'intégration du service d'annuaire a lieu dans l'onglet Paramètres du service d'annuaire de la Console de gestion des applications. Utilisez un compte d'administrateur. Vous pouvez configurer un serveur d'annuaire pour l'authentification des utilisateurs et la synchronisation LDAP. La configuration peut pointer vers une ou plusieurs branches du service d'annuaire.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 33 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 1. Ouvrez la Console de gestion des applications. Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7. 2. Entrez les paramètres de connexion du serveur LDAP. Ouvrez l'onglet Paramètres du service d'annuaire. Entrez des valeurs dans l'écran Paramètres LDAP > Paramètres de connexion, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Lorsque vous cliquez sur Enregistrer, Acrobat Connect Pro teste la connexion LDAP. Si le test échoue, le message suivant s'affiche : « Vos paramètres ont bien été enregistrés, mais la connectivité LDAP n'a pu être vérifiée. » Vérifiez l'URL et le port LDAP. Voici un exemple de syntaxe LDAP pour les paramètres de connexion : URL:ldap://ldapserver.mycompany.com UserName:MYCOMPANY\jdoe Password:password123 Query timeout:120 Authentication mechanism:Simple Query page size:100 Champ Valeur par défaut Description Adresse URL du serveur LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. La forme habituelle est ldap:// [nomduserveur:numérodeport] . Si votre société utilise un serveur LDAP sécurisé, utilisez ldaps://. Si vous ne spécifiez pas de port, Acrobat Connect Pro utilise le port LDAP standard (389) ou le port LDAPS (636). Le protocole LDAPS requiert des certificats SSL. Si vous configurez Acrobat Connect Pro pour travailler dans une forêt Microsoft Active Directory où le catalogue global est activé, utilisez ce dernier (port standard : 3268). Méthode d'authentification de connexion LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. Mécanisme d'authentification des informations d'identification de connexion (nom d'utilisateur LDAP, mot de passe LDAP) du compte de service LDAP pour Acrobat Connect Pro (droits d'administrateur). Simple (authentification standard - recommandée). Anonyme (sans mot de passe - votre serveur LDAP doit être configuré pour autoriser la connexion anonyme). Résumé MD5 (configurez votre serveur LDAP pour autoriser l'authentification résumée). Nom d'utilisateur de connexion LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. Identifiant de connexion d'administrateur sur le serveur LDAP. Mot de passe de connexion LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. Mot de passe d'administrateur sur le serveur LDAP. Expiration de la requête LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. Délai pouvant s'écouler avant que la requête ne soit annulée, en secondes. Si vous ne renseignez pas ce champ, il n'y a pas de délai. Définissez cette valeur sur 120. Limite de taille de la page de requête d'entrée LDAP Aucune valeur par défaut. Taille de la page de résultats renvoyée par le serveur LDAP. Si ce champ est vide ou égal à 0, aucune taille de page n'est utilisée. Utilisez ce champ lorsqu'une taille de résultats maximale a été configurée pour les serveurs LDAP. Définissez une taille de page inférieure à la taille de résultats maximale de sorte que l'ensemble des résultats soit récupéré sur le serveur en plusieurs pages. Ainsi, si vous tentez d'intégrer un important annuaire LDAP qui ne peut afficher que 1 000 utilisateurs alors qu'il y en a 2 000 à importer, l'intégration échoue. Si vous définissez la taille de la page de requête sur 100, les résultats sont renvoyés sur 20 pages et tous les utilisateurs sont importés.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 34 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 3. Mappez les profils utilisateurs de l'annuaire LDAP avec Acrobat Connect Pro. Ouvrez l'onglet Mappage du profil utilisateur, entrez les valeurs, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Si vous avez défini des champs personnalisés, ils apparaissent dans la fenêtre Mappage du profil utilisateur. Cet exemple mappe un profil d'utilisateur Acrobat Connect Pro sur un profil d'utilisateur LDAP Active Directory. Connexion réseau est un champ personnalisé. Login:mail FirstName:givenName LastName:sn Email:userPrincipalName NetworkLogin:mail 4. (Facultatif) Ajoutez une branche d'utilisateur. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter des informations sur un utilisateur d'une branche donnée de votre société. Entrez les valeurs dans les champs Branche et Filtre, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour importer des utilisateurs à partir de sous-branches, sélectionnez True dans le menu Recherche de sousarborescence, sinon sélectionnez False. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Présentation de la structure d'annuaire LDAP » à la page 31. 5. Mappez les profils de groupes de l'annuaire LDAP avec Acrobat Connect Pro. Ouvrez l'onglet Mappage du profil de groupe, entrez des valeurs, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : les profils de groupes d'Acrobat Connect Pro ne prennent pas en charge les champs personnalisés. Voici un mappage entre les attributs d'entrée de groupes LDAP et un profil de groupe Acrobat Connect Pro : Name:cn Membership:member Champ Valeur par défaut Description Nom de connexion Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut de connexion dans le service d'annuaire. Prénom Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut du prénom dans le service d'annuaire. Nom Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut du nom dans le service d'annuaire. Adresse de messagerie Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut d'adresse de messagerie dans le service d'annuaire. Champ Valeur par défaut Attribut/notes LDAP Nom unique de la branche Aucune valeur par défaut. Nom unique du nœud racine de la branche. Un lien vers la branche sélectionnée s'affiche. Filtre Aucune valeur par défaut. Chaîne du filtre de requête. Recherche de sousarborescence True True ou False. La valeur True déclenche une recherche récursive dans toutes les sous-arborescences de la branche. Champ Valeur par défaut Attribut/notes LDAP Nom du groupe Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut du nom du groupe dans le service d'annuaire. Membre du groupe Aucune valeur par défaut. Attribut du membre du groupe dans le service d'annuaire.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 35 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 6. (Facultatif) Ajoutez une branche de groupe. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter des informations sur un groupe d'une branche donnée de votre société. Entrez les valeurs dans les champs Branche et Filtre, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour importer des groupes à partir de sous-branches, sélectionnez True dans le menu Recherche de sousarborescence, sinon sélectionnez False. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Présentation de la structure d'annuaire LDAP » à la page 31. L'exemple suivant indique une syntaxe LDAP illustrant comment ajouter une branche de la société et définir ses groupes : DN:cn=USERS,DC=myteam,DC=mycompany,DC=com Filter:(objectClass=group) Subtree search:True 7. Entrez les paramètres d'authentification. Sélectionnez l'onglet Paramètres d'authentification. Pour authentifier les utilisateurs Acrobat Connect Pro à l'aide du service d'annuaire de votre société, sélectionnez « Activer l'authentification de l'annuaire LDAP ». Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, Acrobat Connect Pro utilise l'authentification native (informations de connexion de l'utilisateur stockées dans la base de données Acrobat Connect Pro). Si vous activez la case à cocher « Activer la reprise de Connect Pro en cas d'échec d'authentification de l'annuaire LDAP », Acrobat Connect Pro utilise l'authentification native. Remarque : cette option peut être utile en cas de panne de connexion LDAP momentanée sur le réseau. Il se peut, toutefois, que les informations de connexion LDAP soient différentes des celles de la base de données Acrobat Connect Pro. Activez la case à cocher « Créer un compte d'utilisateur Connect Pro en cas d'authentification réussie à l'annuaire LDAP » pour permettre aux nouveaux utilisateurs d'accéder au serveur Acrobat Connect Pro si l'authentification LDAP a réussi. Si un utilisateur de votre service d'annuaire est autorisé à utiliser Acrobat Connect Pro, laissez cette option cochée et sélectionnez « Interne » comme type de compte d'utilisateur. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Utilisateurs et groupes internes et externes » à la page 32. Activez la case à cocher « Activer l'inscription de groupe lors de la connexion initiale uniquement » pour créer un identifiant dans Acrobat Connect Pro et placer les utilisateurs dans des groupes spécifiques lorsqu'ils se connectent à Acrobat Connect Pro pour la première fois. Entrez les groupes dans la zone Noms des groupes. 8. Planifiez la synchronisation. Ouvrez l'onglet Paramètres de synchronisation. Dans l'écran Paramètres de planification, cochez la case Activer la synchronisation planifiée pour programmer des synchronisations régulières, quotidiennes, hebdomadaires ou mensuelles, à une heure donnée. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Recommandations relatives à la synchronisation » à la page 36. Vous pouvez également effectuer une synchronisation manuelle dans la fenêtre Actions de synchronisation. Champ Valeur par défaut Attribut/notes LDAP Nom unique de la branche Aucune valeur par défaut. Nom unique du nœud racine de la branche. Chaque branche de la société possède son propre attribut de nom unique LDAP. Un lien vers la branche sélectionnée s'affiche. Filtre Aucune valeur par défaut. Chaîne du filtre de requête. Recherche de sousarborescence True Valeur booléenne true ou false. La valeur true lance une recherche récursive dans toutes les sous-arborescences de la branche. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 36 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 9. Définissez une stratégie de mot de passe et une stratégie de suppression. Ouvrez l'onglet Paramètres de la stratégie, choisissez une stratégie de configuration des mots de passe et une stratégie de suppression, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour plus d'informations sur la stratégie de mot de passe, consultez la section « Gestion des mots de passe » à la page 36. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez l'option Supprimer des utilisateurs et des groupes, durant la synchronisation, tous les utilisateurs externes qui ont été supprimés du serveur LDAP sont également supprimés du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro. 10. Consultez un aperçu de la synchronisation. Ouvrez l'onglet Synchroniser les actions. Dans la section Aperçu de la synchronisation des annuaires, cliquez sur Aperçu. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Recommandations relatives à la synchronisation » à la page 36. Gestion des mots de passe Si vous n'activez pas l'authentification LDAP, vous devez choisir comment Acrobat Connect Pro authentifie les utilisateurs. Lorsqu'Acrobat Connect Pro importe les informations d'utilisateurs à partir d'un annuaire externe, il n'importe pas les mots de passe réseau. Vous devez donc implémenter une autre méthode de gestion des mots de passe pour les utilisateurs importés dans l'annuaire Acrobat Connect Pro. Notification des utilisateurs pour définir leur mot de passe Dans l'écran Paramètres de la stratégie de l'onglet Paramètres de synchronisation, vous pouvez opter pour l'envoi d'un message électronique aux utilisateurs importés avec un lien qui leur permettra de définir leur mot de passe. Définition du mot de passe sur un attribut LDAP Vous pouvez choisir de définir le premier mot de passe d'un utilisateur importé sur la valeur d'un attribut d'entrée d'annuaire de cet utilisateur. Par exemple, si l'annuaire LDAP contient un champ de numéro ID d'employé, vous pouvez faire de cette valeur le mot de passe initial des utilisateurs. Lorsque les utilisateurs se connectent à l'aide de ce mot de passe, ils peuvent alors le modifier. Recommandations relatives à la synchronisation En tant qu'administrateur, deux méthodes vous permettent de synchroniser Acrobat Connect Pro avec un annuaire LDAP externe : • Vous pouvez planifier la synchronisation pour qu'elle ait lieu à intervalles réguliers. • Vous pouvez effectuer une synchronisation manuelle qui synchronise immédiatement l'annuaire d'Acrobat Connect Pro et l'annuaire LDAP de la société. Avant d'importer les utilisateurs et les groupes dans une première synchronisation, il est préférable de vérifier les paramètres de connexion à l'aide d'un navigateur LDAP. Les navigateurs suivants sont disponibles en ligne : Navigateur/Editeur LDAP et Administrateur LDAP. Important : pendant la synchronisation, ne relancez pas votre serveur LDAP et n'exécutez aucune tâche parallèle. En effet, cela entraînerait la suppression d'utilisateurs ou de groupes dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Synchronisations planifiées Les synchronisations planifiées sont recommandées, car elles garantissent qu'Acrobat Connect Pro dispose d'une image à jour des utilisateurs et groupes importés depuis le répertoire LDAP de l'organisation.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 37 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Si vous importez un grand nombre d'utilisateurs et de groupes, il se peut que la synchronisation initiale exploite une grande quantité de ressources. Si c'est le cas, il est recommandé de planifier cette synchronisation initiale pendant une période creuse, la nuit par exemple. (Vous pouvez également effectuer la première synchronisation manuellement.) Pour configurer une synchronisation planifiée, utilisez la fenêtre Paramètres de synchronisation > Paramètres de planification de la Console de gestion des applications. Lorsqu'une synchronisation a lieu, Acrobat Connect Pro compare les entrées de l'annuaire LDAP à celles de son annuaire et importe uniquement celles comportant au moins un champ modifié. Aperçu de la synchronisation Avant l'importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes dans la première synchronisation, Adobe vous recommande de tester vos mappages en affichant un aperçu de la synchronisation. Dans un aperçu, les utilisateurs et groupes ne sont pas à proprement parler importés, mais les erreurs sont enregistrées dans un journal. Vous pouvez alors examiner ces erreurs afin de diagnostiquer les problèmes éventuels. Pour accéder aux journaux de synchronisation, utilisez la fenêtre Journaux de synchronisation. Chaque ligne du journal présente un événement de synchronisation et la synchronisation produit au moins un événement par utilisateur ou groupe traité. Si des avertissements ou des erreurs sont générés pendant l'aperçu, ils sont inscrits dans une liste dans un second journal d'avertissements. Valeurs des fichiers journaux Les journaux de synchronisation stockent les valeurs dans un format séparé par des virgules. Dans les tableaux suivants, le terme principal (mandant) fait référence aux entrées d'utilisateur et de groupe. Les valeurs suivantes sont incluses dans les entrées des journaux : Le tableau suivant présente les différents types d'événements pouvant apparaître dans les fichiers journaux de synchronisation. Champ Description Date Valeur de date et d'heure, cette dernière allant jusqu'aux millisecondes. Le format est aaaaMMjj’T’HHmmss.SSS. ID mandant Nom de connexion ou nom du groupe. Type de mandant Caractère unique : U pour utilisateur, G pour groupe. Evénement L'action entreprise ou la condition rencontrée. Détail Informations détaillées sur l'événement.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 38 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro A propos du protocole LDAPS Acrobat Connect Pro prend nativement en charge le protocole LDAPS (protocole LDAP sécurisé). Le serveur d'annuaire LDAP doit fournir une connexion SSL. Pour établir une connexion sécurisée à un serveur d'annuaire LDAP, utilisez le protocole LDAPS dans l'URL de connexion, comme dans l'exemple suivant : ldaps:// ServeurAnnuaireExemple : NumeroPort. Déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle Flux de travaux pour le déploiement de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle Remarque : pour obtenir une comparaison de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle et des adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés, consultez la section « Options de conférence audio Connect Pro » à la page 14. Evénement Description Détail add Le mandant a été ajouté dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Paquet XML abrégé décrivant les champs mis à jour à l'aide d'une série de paires de balises au format valeur (par exemple, Joe). Le nœud parent et les champs non mis à jour sont omis. update Le mandant est un utilisateur externe et certains champs ont été mis à jour. update-members Le mandant est un groupe externe et des mandants ont été ajoutés ou supprimés dans le groupe. Paquet XML abrégé décrivant les membres supprimés et ajoutés. Le nœud parent est omis : ID list ID list La liste d'ID est une série de paquets principal ID où principal ID est un ID répertorié dans la colonne ID mandant, tel qu'un nom d'utilisateur ou un nom de groupe. S'il n'existe aucun membre d'une liste d'ID, le nœud parent est généré comme ou . delete Le mandant a été supprimé d'Acrobat Connect Pro. up-to-date Le mandant est un mandant externe dans Acrobat Connect Pro et est déjà synchronisé avec l'annuaire externe. Aucun changement n'a été effectué. Un utilisateur ou un groupe créé dans Acrobat Connect Pro est considéré comme un mandant interne. Un utilisateur ou un groupe créé par le processus de synchronisation est considéré comme un mandant externe. make-external Le mandant est un mandant interne d'Acrobat Connect Pro et a été converti en mandant externe. Cet événement permet à la synchronisation de modifier ou de supprimer le mandant et est généralement suivi d'un autre événement qui fait l'un ou l'autre. Cet événement est consigné dans le journal d'avertissement. warning Un événement de niveau avertissement est survenu. Message d'avertissement. error Une erreur s'est produite. Message d'exception Java.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 39 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro La fonctionnalité de voix universelle utilise un composant appelé Flash Media Gateway pour recevoir du son d'un serveur SIP. Le son est transmis dans une direction, depuis un serveur SIP vers les salles de réunion Connect Pro. Installez Flash Media Gateway et configurez-le pour communiquer avec un serveur SIP. Le serveur SIP peut être hébergé par un tiers ou une partie de l'infrastructure de l'entreprise. (Les fournisseurs SIP sont également appelés fournisseurs VoIP.) Le son est émis depuis un téléphone, passe par un serveur de conférence audio (non représenté), par un serveur SIP puis par Flash Media Gateway, pour arriver à une salle de réunion Connect Pro. Suivez ce flux de travaux pour implémenter la solution de voix universelle : 1 Pour installer et configurer la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, vous devez être en possession des éléments suivants : • Connect Pro Server 7.5 • Informations de connexion du fournisseur SIP 2 Installez Flash Media Gateway. Vous pouvez installer Flash Media Gateway sur le même ordinateur que Connect Pro Server ou sur un ordinateur dédié. Vous pouvez déployer Flash Media Gateway sur un seul ordinateur ou sur un cluster de serveurs. Le programme d'installation de Flash Media Gateway fait partie du programme d'installation de Connect Pro Server. Consultez la section « Exécution du programme d'installation » à la page 15. 3 Configurez Flash Media Gateway pour vous connecter à un serveur SIP. Une fois l'installation terminée, la Console de gestion des applications se lance. (Vous pouvez également accéder à la Console de gestion des applications à l'adresse http://localhost:8510/console.) Utilisez la console pour configurer Flash Media Gateway afin de vous connecter à un serveur SIP. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d'Acrobat Connect Pro avec l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications » à la page 16. 4 Ouvrez les ports. Consultez la section « Ports et protocoles Flash Media Gateway » à la page 39. Si un pare-feu utilise un système NAT, reportez-vous à la section « Configuration de Flash Media Gateway afin d'établir la communication derrière un pare-feu utilisant un système NAT » à la page 40. 5 Pour installer Flash Media Gateway sur un cluster d'ordinateurs, consultez « Déploiement de Flash Media Gateway sur un cluster de serveurs » à la page 43. 6 Pour créer une séquence de connexion et tester la connexion audio, consultez la page www.adobe.com/go/learn_cnn_uvconfig_fr. 7 Si vous n'entendez pas le son dans une réunion Connect Pro, reportez-vous à la section « Résolution des problèmes liés à la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 44. Ports et protocoles Flash Media Gateway Remarque : pour afficher le schéma de flux de données entre un fournisseur SIP, Flash Media Gateway et Connect Pro Server, consultez la section « Flux de données » à la page 8. SIP/RTP RTMP RTMP Acrobat Connect Pro Server SIP Server Serveur Flash Media GatewayMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 40 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Flash Media Gateway écoute les requêtes du serveur d'application Connect Pro Central sur le port suivant : Flash Media Gateway lance une connexion avec Flash Media Server comme un client RTMP régulier. Flash Media Server écoute Flash Media Gateway sur le port suivant : Flash Media Gateway communique avec le fournisseur de conférences audio via les protocoles SIP et RTP sur les ports suivants : Remarque : ANY_HIGH_END implique tous les ports supérieurs à 1024. La gamme de ports par défaut s'étend de 5000 à 6000. Vous pouvez modifier ces valeurs dans la Console de gestion des applications. Configuration de Flash Media Gateway afin d'établir la communication derrière un pare-feu utilisant un système NAT Remarque : Vous n'avez pas besoin d'effectuer cette tâche si votre pare-feu est compatible SIP. De la même manière, dans certains cas, la passerelle de niveau application pour SIP dans un pare-feu peut provoquer des problèmes. Si vous ne parvenez pas à établir de communication par l'intermédiaire de la passerelle de niveau application, désactiver cette passerelle pour SIP dans le pare-feu et utilisez la technique décrite dans cette section. Le décodage d'adresses réseau (NAT) est un processus qui permet aux réseaux d'utiliser moins d'adresses IP externes et de masquer les adresses IP internes. NAT modifie l'adresse IP et le numéro de port des paquets émanant d'un réseau. Les adresses IP internes sont modifiées en adresse IP externe. NAT essaie également de diriger les réponses envoyées vers l'adresse IP externe vers les adresses IP internes correctes. Si Flash Media Gateway se trouve derrière un pare-feu qui utilise NAT, il se peut qu'il ne puisse pas recevoir de paquets depuis le serveur SIP. NAT modifie l'adresse IP locale et l'adresse IP de l'en-tête UDP (source du paquet) pour qu'elle corresponde à l'adresse IP externe. L'adresse IP de l'en-tête UDP est identique à l'adresse IP de Flash Media Gateway. Par conséquent, si le serveur SIP utilise l'adresse IP de l'en-tête UDP pour envoyer une réponse, la réponse trouve Flash Media Gateway. L'adresse IP de l'en-tête de contact est identique à l'adresse IP de Flash Media Gateway. Par conséquent, si le serveur SIP utilise l'adresse IP de l'en-tête de contact pour envoyer une réponse, la réponse ne peut pas trouver Flash Media Gateway. L'adresse IP locale se cache derrière le pare-feu et n'est pas visible sur le serveur SIP. L'image suivante montre comment NAT modifie les adresses IP sur le pare-feu : Numéro de port Adresse de liaison Protocole 2222 */Adaptateur quelconque HTTP Numéro de port Adresse de liaison Protocole 8506 */Adaptateur quelconque RTMP Sens Règle Flash Media Gateway vers Internet SRC-IP=, SRC-PORT=5060, DST-IP=ANY, DST-PORT=5060 Internet vers Flash Media Gateway SRC-IP=ANY, SRC-PORT=5060, DST-IP=, DST-PORT=5060 Flash Media Gateway vers Internet SRC-IP=, SRC-PORT=5000_TO_6000, DST-IP=ANY, DST-PORT=ANY_HIGH_END Internet vers Flash Media Gateway SRC-IP=ANY, SRC-PORT=ANY_HIGH_END, DST-IP=, DST-PORT=5000_TO_6000MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 41 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro NAT modifie l'adresse IP 1 Flash Media Gateway (interface interne). L'en-tête UDP (adresse IP de la source du paquet) et l'adresse IP de l'entête de contact SIP sont identiques à l'adresse IP locale. 2 Flash Media Gateway (interface externe). NAT modifie l'adresse IP de l'en-tête UDP en adresse IP globale. 3 Serveur SIP (interface externe). Le paquet atteint l'interface globale sur le serveur SIP. Pour atteindre l'interface interne, transférez le port directement. Si le port n'est pas transféré, le paquet est perdu et la communication échoue. 4 Serveur SIP (interface interne). Le paquet est traité quand il atteint cette interface. Si le serveur SIP utilise l'adresse IP de l'en-tête UDP pour envoyer une réponse, la réponse atteint avec succès Flash Media Gateway. Si le serveur SIP utilise l'adresse IP de l'en-tête de contact, la réponse ne peut pas atteindre Flash Media Gateway. L'image suivante montre une configuration réussie dans laquelle l'adresse IP de l'en-tête de contact SIP est identique à l'adresse IP externe de Flash Media Gateway. Cette modification permet de diriger les paquets vers Flash Media Gateway depuis le serveur SIP. 1 2 3 4 Serveur Flash Media Gateway SIP Server Le système NAT intervient au niveau du pare-feu Flash Media Gateway (interface interne) Adresses IP Locale : 10.40.60.70:5060 En-tête UDP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête de contact SIP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête SDP : 10.40.60.70 Flash Media Gateway (interface externe) Adresses IP Globale : 1.2.3.4:5678 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête SDP : 10.40.60.70 Serveur SIP (interface externe) Adresses IP Globale : 3.4.5.6:5060 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête SDP : 10.40.60.70 Serveur SIP (interface interne) Adresses IP Locale : 10.40.60.80:5060 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête SDP : 10.40.60.70MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 42 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Configuration permettant une communication réussie Pour vérifier que Flash Media Gateway peut bien recevoir des paquets depuis un serveur SIP, procédez comme suit : 1 Sur Flash Media Gateway, ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder/conf/sip.xml dans un éditeur de texte. (Le dossier d'installation racine par défaut est C:\Program Files\Adobe\Flash Media Gateway.) a Créez une balise sous la balise . Saisissez l'adresse IP externe de Flash Media Gateway, comme suit : 1 2 3 4 Serveur Flash Media Gateway SIP Server Le système NAT intervient au niveau du pare-feu Flash Media Gateway (interface interne) Adresses IP Locale : 10.40.60.70:5060 En-tête UDP : 10.40.60.70 En-tête de contact SIP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête SDP : 1.2.3.4 Flash Media Gateway (interface externe) Adresses IP Globale : 1.2.3.4:5678 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête SDP : 1.2.3.4 Serveur SIP (interface externe) Adresses IP Globale : 3.4.5.6:5060 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête SDP : 1.2.3.4 Serveur SIP (interface interne) Adresses IP Locale : 10.40.60.80:5060 En-tête UDP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête de contact SIP : 1.2.3.4 En-tête SDP : 1.2.3.4MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 43 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro ... s ipGateway 141583220 00 sipGateway 8.15.247.100:5060 0 8.15.247.100:5060 0 sipGatewayContext 8.15.247.49 G711u speex ... Dans un cluster, chaque serveur Flash Media Gateway doit avoir une adresse IP externe unique. Important : si l'adresse IP externe est dynamique, vous devrez reconfigurer Flash Media Gateway à chaque fois que l'adresse IP externe change. b Redémarrez le service Flash Media Gateway. Voir « Démarrage et arrêt de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 90. 2 Sur le pare-feu situé entre le serveur Flash Media Gateway et le serveur SIP, transférez directement le port SIP (5060 par défaut) et tous les ports voix RTP (5000 - 6000 par défaut) vers le serveur Flash Media Gateway. Les ports ouverts sur le pare-feu doivent être identiques à ceux ouverts sur le serveur Flash Media Gateway. Remarque : Les serveurs peuvent communiquer sans transfert des ports. Toutefois, sans transfert des ports, les appels risquent de se déconnecter inopinément, notamment après des durées prolongées. Déploiement de Flash Media Gateway sur un cluster de serveurs Pour déployer un cluster de serveurs, installez Flash Media Gateway sur ses propres ordinateurs et Connect Pro Server sur ses ordinateurs également. N'installez pas Connect Pro Server et Flash Media Gateway sur les mêmes ordinateurs. Lorsque vous déployez Flash Media Gateway sur un cluster de serveurs, Connect Pro Server traite l'équilibrage des charges et la reprise. La connexion à Pro Edge Server ne nécessite pas de configuration supplémentaire. 1 Exécutez le programme d'installation sur chaque serveur du cluster et choisissez d'installer Flash Media Gateway. Consultez la section « Exécution du programme d'installation » à la page 15. Remarque : pour plus d'informations sur le déploiement de Connect Pro Server dans un cluster, consultez la section « Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 24. 2 Sur un serveur Connect Pro, ouvrez la console de gestion des applications à l'adresse http://localhost:8510/console. 3 Sélectionnez Paramètres Flash Media Gateway > Paramètres de l'hôte FMG et cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter et configurer des serveurs supplémentaires Flash Media Gateway. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration d'Acrobat Connect Pro avec l'Assistant de la Console de gestion des applications » à la page 16. Remarque : utilisez la Console de gestion des applications sur un serveur pour saisir les paramètres de configuration de tous les serveurs du cluster. La Console de gestion des applications envoie les paramètres de configuration à chaque serveur du cluster. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 44 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Options avancées de configuration Flash Media Gateway Pour les options de configuration avancées, consultez la Documentation Flash Media Gateway. Résolution des problèmes liés à la fonctionnalité de voix universelle Si vous n'entendez pas le son d'une conférence audio Universal Voice dans une salle de réunion, effectuez les opérations suivantes : 1 Vérifiez que le volume est activé sur l'ordinateur. Si vous utilisez des écouteurs, vérifiez qu'ils sont branchés correctement dans la prise de sortie audio. 2 Testez la séquence de numérotation. Reportez-vous à Test d'une séquence de numérotation. 3 Assurez-vous que Flash Media Gateway est correctement configuré : a Ouvrez la console de gestion des applications (http://localhost:8510/console) sur Connect Pro Server et cliquez sur Paramètres de Flash Media Gateway > Paramètres d'hôte FMG. Chaque instance Flash Media Gateway doit avoir l'état Actif. b Si l'état n'est pas Actif, ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder/custom.ini. Vérifiez que les entrées suivantes y figurent : FMG_ADMIN_USER=sa FMG_ADMIN_PASSWORD=breeze Si vous ne voyez pas ces entrées, saisissez-les et redémarrez le serveur d'application de Connect Pro Central. 4 Contactez l'Assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Utilisation d'adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés Installation d'adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés Les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés sont des extensions Java qui permettent à Connect Pro de se connecter à un pont audio. Vous pouvez installer n'importe quelle quantité d'adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. Le guide d'installation est disponible à l'adresse Centre d'aide et d'assistance Connect Pro. Des adaptateurs de téléphonie sont disponibles à l'adresse adobe.com. Configuration de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle pour des adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. Vous pouvez configurer la fonctionnalité de voix universelle pour n'importe quel adaptateur de téléphonie intégré installé sur Connect Pro Server. Quand un adaptateur de téléphonie intégré est configuré pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, vous pouvez diffuser la conférence audio auprès de participants VoIP uniquement dans une salle de réunion. 1 Ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder\appserv\conf\telephony-settings.xml dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Dans le fichier XML, définissez la séquence de connexion au fournisseur de conférences audio. L'exemple suivant utilise la séquence de numérotation de l'adaptateur Premiere : Remarque : Vous fournissez les valeurs des paramètres entre crochets ([]). L'adaptateur fournit les valeurs des paramètres entre accolades ({}). MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 45 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro CSAXIS.PREMCONF .C OM 443 [123456] [aVerySecurePassword] 120 [login] [aVerySecurePassword] 60 https://ww7.premconf.com/audio/ {x-tel-premiere-conference-number} 6000 {x-tel-premiere-participant-code} # 2000 *# 5000 L'exemple suivant utilise la séquence de numérotation de l'adaptateur InterCall : https://iccapi.audiocontrols.net:8443/axis2/services/CCAPI https://iccapi.audiocontrols.net:8443/axis2/services/Author ization https://[externalhostname]:8443/services/CCAPICallbackSOAP [appTokenProvidedByIntercall] C:\breeze {x-tel-intercall-conference-number} 6000{x-tel-intercall-participant-code}# 4000#8000# 3 Validez et enregistrez le fichier XML. 4 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server. Elément XML Description conf-num Numéro de téléphone de la conférence audio. Cet élément doit être le premier de la séquence de numérotation. Vous ne pouvez avoir qu'un seul élément . La valeur entre accolades ({}) est fournie par l'adaptateur. délai Délai dans la séquence de composition, en millisecondes. dtmf Tonalité DTMF (modulation de fréquence en double tonalité). Une valeur DTMF peut être un nombre ou une lettre sur un clavier téléphonique, y compris * et #. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 46 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration d'adaptateurs de téléphonie, consultez la section Utilisation d'adaptateurs de téléphonie à l'adresse Centre d'aide et d'assistance Connect Pro. Masquer l'utilisateur de Flash Media Gateway dans la liste Participants Remarque : Cette section ne s'applique qu'aux adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés qui ont été configurés pour Universal Voice. Quand une salle de réunion se connecte à Flash Media Gateway, la connexion apparaît sous la forme d'un utilisateur dans la liste Participants. Pour masquer l'utilisateur de Flash Media Gateway dans la liste Participants, configurez le numéro de conférence audio dans le fichier custom.ini. Utilisez le même numéro pour tous les ordinateurs du cluster. Vous pouvez obtenir le numéro de conférence audio par votre fournisseur SIP. Ou bien, si l'administrateur de votre compte a configuré un fournisseur audio dans Connect Pro Central, vous pouvez trouver le numéro dans la salle de réunion. 1 Ouvrez le fichier \breeze\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Ajoutez le paramètre suivant : UV_NUMBER={audio_conference_telephone_number} // Example: UV_NUMBER=4155551212 3 Enregistrez et fermez le fichier custom.ini. 4 Procédez comme suit pour redémarrer le serveur : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Configuration du stockage partagé A propos du stockage partagé Vous pouvez utiliser la Console de gestion des applications pour configurer Acrobat Connect Pro afin qu'il gère le stockage de contenu avec des périphériques NAS et SAN. Le terme « contenu » désigne tout fichier publié dans Acrobat Connect Pro, tel que des cours, des fichiers SWF, PPT ou PDF et des enregistrements archivés. Configurations de stockage partagé possibles : • Le contenu est copié sur les principaux périphériques de stockage externes et extrait vers le dossier de contenu de chaque serveur Acrobat Connect Pro lorsque cela s'avère nécessaire. L'ancien contenu est purgé du dossier de contenu de chaque serveur afin de libérer de la place pour le nouveau contenu lorsque cela s'avère nécessaire. Cette configuration libère des ressources sur le serveur d'applications, ce qui se révèle particulièrement utile dans le cas d'un cluster volumineux. (Entrez une valeur dans les champs Stockage partagé et Taille du contenu mis en cache.) • Le contenu est copié sur tous les serveurs et sur le principal périphérique de stockage externe. Cette configuration est recommandée pour les petits clusters, sauf si vous disposez d'une grande quantité de contenu dont l'accès est aléatoire. (Entrez une valeur dans le champ Stockage partagé ; ne renseignez pas le champ Taille du contenu mis en cache.) MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 47 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Remarque : si vous utilisez un cluster Acrobat Connect Pro et que vous ne configurez pas les périphériques de stockage partagé, le cluster fonctionne en mode miroir complet (le contenu publié dans Acrobat Connect Pro est copié sur tous les serveurs) et le contenu n'est jamais supprimé automatiquement d'aucun serveur. C*onfiguration du stockage partagé Si vous configurez un stockage partagé pour un seul serveur Acrobat Connect Pro, suivez les instructions de la première tâche. Si vous configurez un stockage partagé pour un cluster, suivez les instructions de la première tâche pour un ordinateur du cluster, puis les instructions de la seconde tâche pour tous ses autres ordinateurs. Voir aussi « Périphériques de stockage de contenu pris en charge » à la page 4 « Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 24 Configuration du stockage partagé Avant de commencer, Acrobat Connect Pro doit être configuré sans stockage partagé et s'exécuter sur un serveur. 1 Configurez un volume partagé sur un périphérique de stockage externe. Si le volume partagé présente un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, tous les volumes partagés doivent utiliser le même nom d'utilisateur et le même mot de passe. 2 (Facultatif) Si vous actualisez un serveur Acrobat Connect Pro existant afin d'utiliser des volumes de stockage partagés, vous devez copier le contenu de l'un de ces serveurs sur le volume partagé. a Arrêtez le serveur (Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server et Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server). b Copiez le dossier [rép_install_racine]\content\7 dans le volume partagé créé à l'étape 1. Il se peut que certains ordinateurs d'un cluster présentent du contenu supplémentaire. Acrobat Connect Pro ne peut pas utiliser ces fichiers, mais si vous souhaitez les copier sur le volume partagé pour les archiver, vous pouvez rédiger et exécuter un script qui compare le contenu de chaque ordinateur avec celui du volume partagé. c Démarrez Acrobat Connect Pro (Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server et Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server). 3 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro, choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services, sélectionnez Adobe Connect Enterprise Service, puis procédez comme suit : a Cliquez avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez Propriétés. b Sélectionnez l'onglet Connexion. c Sélectionnez Ce compte et, si le volume partagé possède un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, entrez-les, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 4 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro (serveur d'applications uniquement). a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 5 Ouvrez la Console de gestion des applications (Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7). MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 48 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 6 Dans l'onglet Paramètres de l'application, ouvrez l'onglet Paramètres du serveur, localisez la section Paramètres du stockage partagé et entrez un chemin de dossier dans le champ Stockage partagé (par exemple, \\stockage). Si le périphérique de stockage principal est plein, vous pouvez ajouter un autre périphérique à l'emplacement principal. Séparez les chemins par des points-virgules (;) : \\nouveau-stockage;\\stockage. Remarque : l'écriture (copie dans le dossier de stockage) s'effectue uniquement dans le premier dossier. La lecture (copie depuis le dossier de stockage) s'effectue en séquence, en commençant par le premier dossier jusqu'à ce que le fichier soit localisé. 7 (Facultatif) Pour configurer le dossier de contenu sur Acrobat Connect Pro pour faire office de cache (des ressources sont supprimées automatiquement lorsque de l'espace est nécessaire et rétablies sur demande), entrez une valeur dans la zone Taille du contenu mis en cache. La taille du cache du contenu correspond à un pourcentage de l'espace disque devant être utilisé comme cache. Adobe recommande de définir une valeur comprise entre 15 et 50, car le cache peut grossir bien au-delà de la taille définie. Le cache n'est purgé que lorsque le contenu affiché a expiré (24 heures après sa dernière consultation). 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer et fermez la Console de gestion des applications. 9 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro (serveur d'applications uniquement). a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Configuration du stockage partagé pour d'autres serveurs d'un cluster 1 Installez Acrobat Connect Pro sans le démarrer. Si Acrobat Connect Pro est installé et déjà en cours d'exécution, arrêtez-le. 2 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro, choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services, sélectionnez Adobe Connect Enterprise Service, puis procédez comme suit : a Cliquez avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez Propriétés. b Sélectionnez l'onglet Connexion. c Sélectionnez Ce compte et, si le volume partagé possède un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, entrez-les, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 3 Démarrez Acrobat Connect Pro. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Server 7 > Démarrer Adobe Connect Meeting Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous installez Acrobat Connect Pro pour la première fois, suivez les étapes indiquées à la section « Déploiement d'un cluster de serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 24. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer et fermez la Console de gestion des applications. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 49 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Configuration des paramètres de notification de compte Ajout de liens Prise en charge et Etat au menu d'aide Les administrateurs de compte peuvent ajouter un lien de page Etat et un lien de page Prise en charge au menu d'aide dans les salles de réunion. Les liens mènent vers des pages HTML que vous concevez. La page Etat peut fournir des informations sur l'état actuel du système Acrobat Connect Pro. La page Prise en charge peut fournir des informations sur l'obtention d'assistance concernant l'utilisation d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Si vous ne définissez pas ces liens, ils ne sont pas disponibles dans le menu Aide. 1 Ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Pour modifier le lien de page Etat, configurez STATUS_PAGE = "http://connect.mycompany.com/status.html". 3 Pour modifier le lien de page Prise en charge, configurez SUPPORT_PAGE="http://connect.mycompany.com/support.html". Les URL peuvent être absolues ou relatives au domaine du serveur de réunions. Commencez les URL absolues par « http:// » ou « https:// ». Commencez les URL relatives par « / ». 4 Procédez comme suit pour redémarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Définition de l'heure d'envoi des rapports mensuels Acrobat Connect Pro vous envoie chaque mois un courrier électronique concernant la capacité de votre compte. Par défaut, les rapports mensuels de capacité de compte sont envoyés à 15h00 UTC. Pour qu'Acrobat Connect Pro envoie le courrier électronique à une autre heure, vous pouvez ajouter des paramètres au fichier custom.ini et définir les valeurs souhaitées. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des notifications de compte dans Connect Pro Central, reportez-vous au chapitre « Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro » du document Utilisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 disponible en ligne à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_documentation_fr. 1 Ouvrez le fichier Rép_Install_Racine\custom.ini et ajoutez les paramètres suivants au fichier avec les valeurs souhaitées : THRESHOLD_MAIL_TIME_OF_DAY_HOURS Heure UTC à laquelle sont envoyés les rapports mensuels de notification de capacité. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 0 et 23. Ce paramètre doit être défini dans le fichier custom.ini ; il ne peut pas être défini dans Connect Pro Central. THRESHOLD_MAIL_TIME_OF_DAY_MINUTES Minute à laquelle sont envoyés les rapports mensuels de notification de capacité. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 0 et 59. Ce paramètre doit être défini dans le fichier custom.ini ; il ne peut pas être défini dans Connect Pro Central. Remarque : si l'un des paramètres précédents n'est pas spécifié ou est erroné, le courrier électronique est envoyé à 15h00 (UTC). Exemples de valeurs ajoutées au fichier custom.ini :MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 50 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro THRESHOLD_MAIL_TIME_OF_DAY = 5 THRESHOLD_MAIL_TIME_OF_MINUTES = 30 2 Procédez comme suit pour redémarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Définition de seuils de capacité Les administrateurs de compte Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent définir des seuils de capacité dans Connect Pro Central. Le dépassement de ces seuils par un compte déclenche l'envoi d'une notification. Vous pouvez ajouter au fichier custom.ini des paramètres qui définissent les seuils de capacité par défaut dans Connect Pro Central. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration des notifications de compte dans Connect Pro Central, reportez-vous au chapitre « Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro » du document Utilisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 disponible en ligne à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_documentation_fr. 1 Ouvrez le fichier Rép_Install_Racine \custom.ini et ajoutez l'un des paramètres suivants au fichier avec les valeurs souhaitées : THRESHOLD_NUM_OF_MEMBERS Pourcentage de seuil par défaut du quota d'auteurs et d'hôtes de réunion. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 10 et 100 et divisible par 10. Si aucune valeur n'est spécifiée ou qu'elle est erronée, c'est la valeur 80 qui est utilisée. THRESHOLD_CONC_USERS_PER_MEETING Pourcentage de seuil par défaut du quota d'utilisateurs simultanés par réunion. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 10 et 100 et divisible par 10. Si aucune valeur n'est spécifiée ou qu'elle est erronée, c'est la valeur 80 qui est utilisée. THRESHOLD_CONC_MEETING_USERS_PER_ACCOUNT Pourcentage de seuil par défaut du quota de participants à la réunion à l'échelle du compte. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 10 et 100 et divisible par 10. Si aucune valeur n'est spécifiée ou qu'elle est erronée, c'est la valeur 80 qui est utilisée. THRESHOLD_CONC_TRAINING_USERS Pourcentage de seuil par défaut du quota de stagiaires simultanés. Cette valeur doit être un entier compris entre 10 et 100 et divisible par 10. Si aucune valeur n'est spécifiée ou qu'elle est erronée, c'est la valeur 80 qui est utilisée. Exemples de valeurs ajoutées au fichier custom.ini : THRESHOLD_NUM_OF_MEMBERS = 90 THRESHOLD_CONC_USERS_PER_MEETING = 90 THRESHOLD_CONC_MEETING_USERS_PER_ACCOUNT = 90 THRESHOLD_CONC_TRAINING_USERS = 75 2 Procédez comme suit pour redémarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 51 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Conversion PDF-SWF A propos de la conversion de PDF Vous pouvez utiliser le pod Share dans une salle de réunion Connect Pro pour partager des documents PDF. Les hôtes et les présentateurs peuvent synchroniser la navigation de tous les participants et utiliser le tableau blanc pour collaborer. Vous pouvez charger les documents PDF dans le pod Share depuis le bureau ou depuis la bibliothèque de contenu Connect Pro. Le partage de documents dans le pod Share offre les avantages suivants par rapport au partage d'écran : • Les hôtes et les présentateurs peuvent précharger et organiser des documents dans la salle de réunion. • Un affichage de meilleure qualité pour tous les participants. • Exigence de bande passante inférieure pour les participants et les présentateurs. • Collaboration facilitée pour les présentateurs multiples. • Collaboration facilitée avec le tableau blanc. Quand les documents PDF sont partagés dans un pod Share, Connect Pro les convertit au format Flash. Connect Pro Server propose des paramètres de configuration pour contrôler la conversion des PDF. Configuration de la conversion PDF-SWF 1 Ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Modifiez l'un des paramètres de configuration suivants : Paramètre Valeur par défaut Description ENABLE_PDF2SWF true Valeur booléenne spécifiant si la conversion PDF-SWF est activée ou non pour le serveur. Définissez ce paramètre sur false pour désactiver la conversion en raison de problèmes de performance. PDF2SWF_PAGE_TIMEOUT 5 La valeur du délai d'attente par page, en secondes. PDF2SWF_CONVERTER_PORTS_START 4000 La plus petite valeur de la gamme de ports utilisés pour les conversions des PDF en SWF. PDF2SWF_CONVERTER_PORTS_END 4030 La plus grande valeur de la gamme de ports utilisés pour les conversions des PDF en SWF. PDF2SWF_CONCURRENCY_LIMIT 3 Le nombre maximal de conversions simultanées de PDF en SWF pouvant avoir lieur sur un serveur d'application. Si un serveur d'application reçoit plus de requêtes, les requêtes sont placées dans la file d'attente. PDF2SWF_QUEUE_LIMIT 5 Le nombre maximal de conversions de PDF en SWF pouvant attendre dans une file d'attente en même temps. Si un serveur d'application reçoit plus de requêtes, un utilisateur voit le message suivant apparaître : « Connect Pro n'a pas pu convertir le fichier à afficher, veuillez réessayer ultérieurement. » Un administrateur voit s'afficher dans les journaux : java.lang.Exception: Conversion Load too much on server. PDF2SWF_TIMEOUT_NUMBER_OF_PAGES 3 Le nombre maximal de pages autorisées dans le délai d'attente avant l'arrêt de la conversion. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 52 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 3 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server. Consultez la section « Démarrage et arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server » à la page 88. Intégration à Microsoft Live Communications Server 2005 et Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007 Procédure de configuration de l'intégration de présence Intégrez Acrobat Connect Pro à un serveur de communications en temps réel Microsoft de manière à ce que les hôtes de réunion puissent voir la présence LCS ou OCS des participants à la réunion enregistrés dans la liste des invités et initier des conversations texte avec des utilisateurs en ligne. Pour plus d'informations sur la liste des invités, reportez-vous au document Utilisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 disponible en ligne à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_documentation_fr. 1. Acrobat Connect Pro Server et un serveur de communications doivent être installés. Installez et vérifiez l'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server et d'un serveur de communications. Acrobat Connect Pro Server prend en charge l'intégration à Microsoft Live Communications Server 2005 et Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007. Reportez-vous à la section « Installation de Connect Pro Server et de Flash Media Gateway » à la page 15 et à la documentation du serveur de communications. 2. Configurez le serveur de communication. Configurez le serveur de communications pour échanger des données avec Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Reportezvous à la section « Configuration de Live Communications Server 2005 ou d'Office Communications Server 2007 » à la page 53. 3. Arrêtez Connect Pro Presence Service. Acrobat Connect Pro Presence Service fait partie de Connect Pro Server Arrêtez le service avant de configurer Acrobat Connect Pro. Reportez-vous à la section « Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service » à la page 57. 4. Configurez Connect Pro Presence Service. Configurez Acrobat Connect Pro pour échanger des données avec le serveur de communications. Le serveur de présence est installé sur RootInstallationFolder\presserv. Reportez-vous à la section « Configuration de Connect Pro Presence Service » à la page 54. 5. Démarrez Connect Pro Presence Service. Reportez-vous à la section « Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service » à la page 57. 6. Activez la liste des invités et le module Conversation dans Connect Pro Central. Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central en tant qu'administrateur. Sélectionnez Administration > Conformité et contrôle > Gestion des modules. Décochez l'option pour désactiver la liste des invités et le module Conversation.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 53 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Configuration de Live Communications Server 2005 ou d'Office Communications Server 2007 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Outils d'administration > Live Communications Server 2005 ou Office Communications Server 2007 pour ouvrir la Console de configuration. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la forêt, sélectionnez Propriétés, et procédez comme suit : a Sélectionnez l'onglet Fédération. b Activez la case à cocher Activer la connectivité IM publique et de fédération. c Entrez l'adresse réseau d'Acrobat Connect Pro. d Entrez le port 5072. 5072 est le numéro de port par défaut de Connect Pro Presence Service dans le fichier \presserv\conf\lcsgw.xml. e Cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans le volet gauche de la Console de configuration, développez Domaines, développez votre domaine, puis développez les serveurs et les pools Live Communications. 4 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le nom d'hôte de votre pool et sélectionnez Propriétés. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du serveur, procédez comme suit : a Sélectionnez l'onglet Autorisation d'hôte. Ajoutez l'adresse IP d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Vérifiez que Sortant uniquement a la valeur Non, que Accélérer comme serveur a la valeur Oui, et que Traiter comme authentification a la valeur Oui. b Si un équilibreur de charge est installé devant votre serveur Acrobat Connect Pro, ajoutez son adresse IP. c Cliquez sur OK. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 54 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 6 Dans le volet gauche de la Console de configuration, développez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié (FQDN) de votre serveur et sélectionnez Applications. 7 Effectuez les opérations suivantes : a Cliquez sur Paramétrage de l'application de filtre URL IM. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés, désactivez l'option Activer. Si cette option est activée, les hôtes de réunion ne peuvent pas envoyer d'URL dans des messages instantanés. 8 Fermez la Console de configuration. Configuration des clients du serveur de communication L'intégration d'Acrobat Connect Pro à des serveurs de communications Microsoft fonctionne avec des clients Microsoft Office Communicator 2005 (MOC 2005) standard. Les clients ne nécessitent aucune configuration particulière. Toutefois, pour pouvoir cliquer sur les URL Connect Meeting dans MOC 2005, modifiez la propriété « Autoriser les liens hypertexte dans les messages instantanés » du modèle Administration du communicateur. Pour plus d'informations, visitez http://technet.microsoft.com/fr-fr/library/bb963959.aspx. 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Exécuter. 2 Entrez gpedit.msc dans la zone Ouvrir pour ouvrir la fenêtre Stratégie de groupe. 3 Cliquez pour développer Configuration de l'ordinateur. 4 Cliquez pour développer Modèles d'administration. 5 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Paramètres de la stratégie de Microsoft Office Communicator et choisissez Propriétés. Remarque : si le modèle Paramètres de la stratégie de Microsoft Office Communicator n'apparaît pas dans le dossier Modèles d'administration, ajoutez-le. Localisez Communicator.adm dans le package client Microsoft Office Communicator 2005 et copiez-le sous C:\WINDOWS\inf\. Dans la fenêtre Stratégie de groupe, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur Modèles d'administration, cliquez sur Ajouter/Supprimer des modèles, puis sur Ajouter, accédez au fichier, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Configuration de Connect Pro Presence Service Effectuez les quatre procédures suivantes pour configurer Connect Pro Presence Service pour échanger des données avec un serveur de communication. Une fois la configuration terminée, redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server. Définition de la connexion de passerelle entre Connect Pro Presence Service et le serveur de communication 1 Ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\lcsgw.xml dans un éditeur XML. 2 Modifiez le fichier comme suit en remplaçant vos valeurs par celles en gras :MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 55 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro lcs.adobe.com 5072 10.59.72.86 lcs.adobe.com Configuration du fichier custom.ini. 1 Ouvrez RootInstallationFolder\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Entrez les paramètres et valeurs ci-dessous : Exemples de paramètres : Paramètre Description Domaine SIP des utilisateurs LCS ou OCS Adresse IP du serveur LCS ou OCS (ou de l'équilibreur de charge Domaine SIP des utilisateurs LCS ou OCS Paramètre Valeur OPN_ADAPTOR com.macromedia.breeze.opn.OPNGateway Cette valeur respecte la casse. OPN_HOST Adresse réseau de Connect Pro Presence Service (par exemple, localhost). OPN_PORT Port interne utilisé entre Acrobat Connect Pro et Connect Pro Presence Service. La valeur par défaut (10020) doit correspondre à la valeur du fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\router.xml. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur. OPN_PASSWORD Jeton interne utilisé entre Acrobat Connect Pro et Connect Pro Presence Service. La valeur par défaut (secrète) doit correspondre à la valeur du fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\router.xml. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur. OPN_DOMAIN Nom de domaine du serveur Acrobat Connect Pro (serveur d'applications). Connect Pro Presence Service utilise ce nom pour identifier le serveur d'applications. Dans un cluster, chaque serveur d'applications doit avoir son propre nom de domaine. MEETING_PRESENCE_POLL_INTERVAL Les clients hôtes interrogent régulièrement le serveur de présence pour récupérer l'état des invités. Ce paramètre définit le nombre de secondes entre des requêtes d'interrogation. La valeur par défaut est 30. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 56 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro OPN_ADAPTOR=com.macromedia.breeze.opn.OPNGateway OPN_HOST=localhost OPN_PORT=10020 OPN_PASSWORD=secret OPN_DOMAIN=breeze01.com Définition de la passerelle SIP vers Connect Pro Presence Service 1 Ouvrez le fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\router.xml dans un éditeur XML. 2 Modifiez le fichier comme suit en remplaçant vos valeurs par celles en gras : ... 10.133.192.75 Dans la balise , entrez l'adresse IP de l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. Si plusieurs adresses IP sont renvoyées, sélectionnez l'adresse IP interne ou externe que le serveur LCS ou OCS distant peut résoudre pour se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. 3 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server. Configuration de Connect Pro Presence Service dans un cluster Si vous exécutez Connect Pro dans un cluster, exécutez Connect Pro Presence Service sur un seul ordinateur du cluster. Veillez cependant à configurer Connect Pro Presence Service sur tous les ordinateurs du cluster de manière à permettre l'échange du trafic de présence. 1 Ouvrez rép_install_racine\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Entrez les paramètres et valeurs ci-dessous : Exemples de paramètres : Paramètre Valeur OPN_ADAPTOR com.macromedia.breeze.opn.OPNGateway Cette valeur respecte la casse. OPN_HOST Nom de domaine pleinement qualifié de l'ordinateur qui exécute Connect Pro Presence Service. La valeur du paramètre OPN_HOST est la même sur chaque ordinateur d'un cluster. OPN_PORT Port interne utilisé entre Acrobat Connect Pro et Connect Pro Presence Service. La valeur par défaut (10020) doit correspondre à la valeur du fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\router.xml. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur. OPN_PASSWORD Jeton interne utilisé entre Acrobat Connect Pro et Connect Pro Presence Service. La valeur par défaut (secrète) doit correspondre à la valeur du fichier RootInstallationFolder\presserv\conf\router.xml. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur. OPN_DOMAIN Domaine qu'utilise Connect Pro Presence Service pour identifier un serveur Connect Pro dans un cluster. Chaque ordinateur d'un cluster doit avoir une valeur unique. Le paramètre OPN_DOMAIN peut avoir une valeur quelconque (par exemple, presence.connect1, presence.connect2, connect3) pour autant qu'elle soit unique dans le cluster. MEETING_PRESENCE_POLL_INTERVAL Les clients hôtes interrogent régulièrement le serveur de présence pour récupérer l'état des invités. Ce paramètre définit le nombre de secondes entre des requêtes d'interrogation. La valeur par défaut est 30. Ne modifiez pas cette valeur.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 57 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro OPN_ADAPTOR=com.macromedia.breeze.opn.OPNGateway OPN_HOST=localhost OPN_PORT=10020 OPN_PASSWORD=secret OPN_DOMAIN=presence.connect1 3 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server. Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service Vous pouvez arrêter et démarrer Connect Pro Presence Service dans le menu Démarrer ou dans la fenêtre Services. Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service via le menu Démarrer ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Presence Service. • Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Presence Service. Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Sélectionnez Acrobat Connect Pro Presence Service et cliquez sur Démarrer le service, Arrêter le service ou Redémarrer le service. Configuration de l'authentification unique A propos de l'authentification unique L'authentification unique est un mécanisme qui authentifie les utilisateurs pour toutes les applications pour lesquelles ils disposent de droits d'accès sur un réseau. L'authentification unique utilise un serveur proxy pour authentifier les utilisateurs afin qu'ils ne doivent pas ouvrir de session dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Acrobat Connect Pro prend en charge les mécanismes d'authentification uniques suivants : Authentification des en-têtes HTTP Configurez un proxy d'authentification pour intercepter la requête HTTP, analysez les informations de connexion de l'utilisateur dans l'en-tête et transmettez-les à Acrobat Connect Pro. Authentification NTLM (Microsoft NT LAN Manager) Configurez Connect Pro pour qu'il tente d'authentifier automatiquement la connexion des clients par rapport à un contrôleur de domaine Windows utilisant le protocole NTLMv1. Microsoft Internet Explorer sous Microsoft Windows peut négocier une authentification NTLM sans demander ses informations de connexion à l'utilisateur. Remarque : il se peut que les clients Mozilla Firefox puissent négocier une authentification NTLM sans la demander. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration, consultez ce document Firefox. Vous pouvez également écrire votre propre filtre d'authentification. Pour plus d'informations, contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 58 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Configuration de l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP Lorsque l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP est configurée, les requêtes de connexion à Acrobat Connect Pro sont acheminées vers un agent placé entre le client et Acrobat Connect Pro. Cet agent peut être un proxy d'authentification ou une application logicielle qui authentifie l'utilisateur, ajoute un autre en-tête dans la requête HTTP et envoie celleci à Acrobat Connect Pro. Sur Acrobat Connect Pro, vous devez retirer le commentaire d'un filtre Java et configurer un paramètre du fichier custom.ini qui indique le nom de l'en-tête HTTP supplémentaire. Voir aussi « Démarrage et arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server » à la page 88 Configuration d'une authentification des en-têtes HTTP sur Acrobat Connect Pro Pour activer l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP, configurez le mappage d'un filtre Java et un paramètre d'en-tête sur l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. 1 Ouvrez le fichier [rép_install_racine]\appserv\conf\WEB-INF\web.xml et procédez comme suit : a Retirez les commentaires du mappage du filtre Java HeaderAuthenticationFilter. HeaderAuthenticationFilter /* b Appliquez un commentaire au mappage du filtre Java NtlmAuthenticationFilter. 2 Arrêtez Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Server 7 > Arrêter Adobe Connect Meeting Server. 3 Ajoutez la ligne suivante dans le fichier custom.ini : HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=header_field_name Votre agent d'authentification doit ajouter un en-tête à la requête HTTP envoyée à Acrobat Connect Pro. Le nom de l'en-tête doit être header_field_name. 4 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini et redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Server 7 > Démarrer Adobe Connect Meeting Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 59 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Rédaction du code d'authentification Le code d'authentification doit authentifier l'utilisateur, ajouter un champ dans l'en-tête HTTP contenant le nom d'utilisateur et envoyer une requête à Acrobat Connect Pro. 1 Sélectionnez la valeur du champ d'en-tête nom_champ_en-tête pour une connexion utilisateur à Acrobat Connect Pro. 2 Envoyez une requête HTTP à Acrobat Connect Pro à l'adresse URL suivante : http://connectURL/system/login Le filtre Java sur Acrobat Connect Pro intercepte la requête, recherche l'en-tête nom_champ_en-tête, puis recherche un utilisateur avec l'ID transmis dans l'en-tête. Si l'utilisateur est localisé, il est authentifié et une réponse est envoyée. 3 Dans le contenu HTTP de la réponse d'Acrobat Connect Pro, recherchez la chaîne « OK » qui indique une authentification réussie. 4 Dans la réponse d'Acrobat Connect Pro, recherchez le cookie BREEZESESSION. 5 Redirigez l'utilisateur vers l'URL requise sur Acrobat Connect Pro et transmettez le cookie BREEZESESSION représentant la valeur du paramètre session, comme suit : http://connectURL?session=BREEZESESSION Remarque : vous devez transmettre le cookie BREEZESESSION dans toute requête ultérieure à Acrobat Connect Pro au cours de la session client. Configuration de l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP avec Apache La procédure suivante décrit un exemple d'implémentation de l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP qui utilise Apache comme agent d'authentification. 1 Installez Apache en tant que proxy inverse sur un autre ordinateur que celui qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. 2 Choisissez Démarrer > Programmes > Apache HTTP Server > Configure Apache Server > Edit the Apache httpd.conf Configuration file. Effectuez ensuite les opérations suivantes : a Retirez les commentaires de la ligne suivante : LoadModule headers_module modules/mod_headers.so b Retirez les commentaires des trois lignes suivantes : LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so c Ajoutez les lignes suivantes à la fin du fichier : RequestHeader append custom-auth "ext-login" ProxyRequests Off Order deny,allow Allow from all ProxyPass / http://hostname:[port]/ ProxyPassReverse / http://hostname:[port]/ ProxyPreserveHost On 3 Arrêtez Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 60 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Server 7 > Arrêter Adobe Connect Meeting Server. 4 Sur l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro, ajoutez les lignes de code suivantes dans le fichier custom.ini (situé dans le répertoire racine d'installation, c:\breeze par défaut) : HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=custom-auth Le paramètre HTTP_AUTH_HEADER doit correspondre au nom configuré sur le serveur proxy. (Dans cet exemple, il a été configuré à la ligne 1 de l'étape 2c.) Le paramètre correspond à l'en-tête HTTP supplémentaire. 5 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini et redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Server 7 > Démarrer Adobe Connect Meeting Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 6 Ouvrez le fichier [rép_install_racine]\appserv\conf\WEB-INF\web.xml et procédez comme suit : a Retirez les commentaires du mappage du filtre Java HeaderAuthenticationFilter. HeaderAuthenticationFilter /* b Appliquez un commentaire au mappage du filtre Java NtlmAuthenticationFilter. Configuration de l'authentification NTLM NTLMv1 est un protocole d'authentification utilisé avec le protocole de réseau SMB sur les réseaux Microsoft Windows. Vous pouvez utiliser NTLM pour permettre à un utilisateur de prouver son identité sur un domaine Windows une fois puis l'autoriser à accéder à une autre ressource de réseau, comme Connect Pro. Pour créer les informations de connexion de l'utilisateur, le navigateur Web de l'utilisateur exécute automatiquement une authentification de défi et de réponse avec le contrôleur de domaine via Connect Pro. Si ce mécanisme échoue, l'utilisateur peut se connecter directement à Connect Pro. Seul Internet Explorer sur Windows prend en charge la connexion unique avec une authentification NTLMv1. Remarque : par défaut, les contrôleurs de domaine Windows Server 2003 nécessitent une fonction de sécurité appelée signatures SMB. Les signatures SMB ne sont pas prises en charge par la configuration par défaut du filtre d'authentification NTLM. Vous pouvez configurer le filtre pour fonctionner sous cette condition. Pour plus d'informations sur cette option et sur d'autres options de configuration avancées, consultez la documentation d'authentification JCIFS NTLM HTTP. Ajout de paramètres de configuration Procédez comme suit pour chaque hôte du cluster Connect Pro : 1 Ouvrez le fichier root_install_dir\custom.ini dans un éditeur de texte et ajoutez les paramètres suivants :MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 61 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro NTLM_DOMAIN=[domain] NTLM_SERVER=[WINS_server_IP_address] La valeur [domain] correspond au nom du domaine Windows dont les utilisateurs sont des membres et avec lequel ils s'authentifient, par exemple, CORPNET. Vous devrez peut-être paramétrer cette valeur sur la version du nom de domaine compatible avec les versions antérieures à Windows 2000. Pour plus d'informations, consultez TechNote 27e73404. Cette valeur est mappée sur la propriété de filtre jcifs.smb.client.domain. Définir directement la valeur dans le fichier web.xml remplace la valeur figurant dans le fichier custom.ini. La valeur [WINS_server_IP_address] est l'adresse IP ou une liste d'adresses IP de serveurs WINS séparées par des virgules. Utilisez l'adresse IP, le nom d'hôte ne fonctionne pas. Les serveurs WINS sont interrogés dans l'ordre spécifié pour résoudre l'adresse IP d'un contrôleur de domaine pour le domaine spécifié dans le paramètre NTLM_DOMAIN. (Le contrôleur de domaine authentifie ses utilisateurs.) Vous pouvez également spécifier l'adresse IP du contrôleur de domaine lui-même, par exemple, 10.169.10.77, 10.169.10.66. Cette valeur est mappée vers la propriété de filtre jcifs.netbios.wins. Définir la valeur dans le fichier web.xml remplace la valeur figurant dans le fichier custom.ini. 2 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini. 3 Ouvrez le fichier root_install_dir\appserv\conf\WEB-INF\web.xml dans un éditeur de texte et procédez comme suit : a Supprimez les commentaires du mappage NtlmAuthenticationFilter mapping pour qu'il prenne l'aspect suivant : NtlmAuthenticationFilter /* b Commentez le mappage de filtre HeaderAuthenticationFilter pour qu'il prenne l'aspect suivant : 4 Enregistrez le fichier web.xml. 5 Redémarrez Connect Pro. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Arrêter Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server > Démarrer Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Rapprochement des stratégies de connexion Les stratégies de connexion de Connect Pro et NTLM diffèrent quant à l'authentification des utilisateurs. Conciliez ces stratégies avant que les utilisateurs puissent employer une seule connexion. L'identifiant de connexion utilisé par le protocole NTLM peut être un nom d'utilisateur (jdoe), un numéro d'employé (1234) ou un nom codé, selon la stratégie ou l'organisation. Par défaut, Connect Pro utilise une adresse électronique (jdoe@masociete.com) comme identifiant de connexion. Modifiez la stratégie de connexion à Connect Pro pour que Connect Pro partage un identifiant unique avec NTLM. 1 Ouvrez Connect Pro Central.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 62 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Pour ouvrir Connect Pro Central, ouvrez une fenêtre de navigateur, puis entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié de l'hôte Connect Pro (ex. : http://connect.societe.com). Entrez la valeur de l'hôte Connect Pro dans l'écran Paramètres du serveur de la Console de gestion des applications. 2 Sélectionnez l’onglet Administration. Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. Cliquez sur Modifier les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. 3 Dans la section Stratégie de connexion, sélectionnez Non pour Utiliser l'adresse de messagerie comme identifiant de connexion. Configuration d'un proxy inverse devant Connect Pro Server Utilisation d'un proxy inverse Vous pouvez configurer un proxy inverse devant Connect Pro Server. Le trafic circule via le proxy inverse avant d'atteindre Connect Pro Server. Procédez comme suit à l'aide de cette configuration : • Laissez Connect Pro Server à l'extérieur du DMZ. Placez le proxy inverse dans le DMZ et placez Connect Pro Server derrière le pare-feu de votre organisation. • Authentifiez les utilisateurs avant qu'ils atteignent Connect Pro Server. Le proxy inverse authentifie les utilisateurs avec un autre système et les autorise à se connecter à Connect Pro Server. Le trafic HTTP est diffusé via Apache HTTP Server pour rejoindre Connect Pro Server. Configuration d'un proxy inverse Cet exemple est basé sur l'installation Windows (32 bits) d'Apache HTTP Server. La configuration est identique sur tous les systèmes d'exploitation pris en charge par Apache. Cet exemple n'utilise pas SSL : le trafic vers le serveur d'application Connect Pro n'est pas codé. Procédez comme suit pour forcer le trafic HTTP à circuler via Apache HTTP Server avant d'atteindre Connect Pro : Remarque : le trafic RTMP ne circule pas via Apache HTTP Server dans cette configuration. 1 Installez Apache HTTP Server. Par défaut, les fichiers de configuration Apache sont situés dans le dossier c:\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\conf\. 2 Configurez Apache pour qu'il écoute l'ensemble du trafic sur le port 80. Vhost:80 Acrobat Connect Pro Server Serveur HTTP Apache Client HTTP 80 HTTP 80 RTMP 1935MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 63 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Ouvrez le fichier c:\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\conf\httpd.conf dans un éditeur de texte et ajoutez ce qui suit : # # Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and # ports, instead of the default. See also the # directive. # # Change this to Listen on specific IP addresses as shown below to # prevent Apache from glomming onto all bound IP addresses. # #Listen 12.34.56.78:80 Listen 80 # # 3 Chargez les modules requis pour le fonctionnement en tant que proxy inverse. Dans le même fichier (httpd.conf), supprimez les commentaires des lignes suivantes : LoadModule proxy_module modules/mod_proxy.so LoadModule proxy_http_module modules/mod_proxy_http.so LoadModule proxy_connect_module modules/mod_proxy_connect.so 4 Liez le fichier httpd.conf au fichier de configuration qui dirige les connexions vers Connect Pro. Ajoutez la ligne suivante à la dernière ligne du fichier httpd.conf : Include conf/extra/httpd-connect.conf 5 Créez un fichier texte appelé httpd-connect.conf et enregistrez-le sur le chemin d'accès suivant : c:\Program Files\Apache Software Foundation\Apache2.2\conf\extra. 6 Ajoutez les lignes suivantes au fichier httpd-connect.conf (insérez vos adresses IP et les ports à l'endroit demandé) : #vhost for application server ProxyRequests Off ProxyPreserveHost On ProxyPass / http://:80/ ProxyPassReverse / http://:80/ ServerName 7 Enregistrez le fichier et relancez le service Apache. 8 Sur Connect Pro Server, ouvrez la Console de gestion des applications dans un navigateur : http://localhost:8510/console/ 9 Sur l'écran des paramètres du serveur, procédez comme suit : • Paramétrez l'hôte Connect Pro sur le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié d'Apache HTTP Server. • Paramétrez le nom externe sur le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié de l'ordinateur hébergeant Connect Meeting Server. 10 Relancez le service Adobe Connect Pro (le serveur d'application) et le service Flash Media Server (FMS) (le serveur de réunion). Voir « Démarrage et arrêt des serveurs » à la page 88. RTMP est dirigé vers Connect Pro et HTTP est dirigé via Apache. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 64 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro Hébergement d'Acrobat Connect Add-in Présentation d'Acrobat Connect Add-in Adobe Acrobat Connect Add-in est une version de Flash Player qui comprend des fonctionnalités avancées pour les réunions Acrobat Connect Pro. Lorsqu'Acrobat Connect Add-in est nécessaire, il est téléchargé depuis un serveur Adobe par un processus transparent que l'utilisateur ne voit pas. Toutefois, si votre société n'autorise pas ses employés à télécharger des logiciels à partir de serveurs externes, vous pouvez héberger Acrobat Connect Add-in sur votre propre serveur. Les invités aux réunions, les utilisateurs inscrits et les présentateurs sont invités à télécharger Acrobat Connect Addin lorsqu'une ancienne version est installée sur leur ordinateur et qu'ils sont promus hôte ou présentateur ou que des droits étendus leur sont accordés pour le module Partage. Les hôtes de réunion doivent obligatoirement télécharger Acrobat Connect Add-in lorsqu'il n'est pas installé ou pour remplacer une ancienne version. Personnalisation de l'emplacement de téléchargement d'Acrobat Connect Add-in Vous pouvez héberger Acrobat Connect Add-in sur votre serveur et envoyer directement les utilisateurs vers les fichiers exécutables. Vous pouvez également diriger les utilisateurs vers une page d'instructions de téléchargement contenant des liens vers les fichiers exécutables. Vous pouvez créer votre propre page d'instructions de téléchargement ou utiliser celle fournie par Adobe. La page d'Adobe est traduite dans toutes les langues prises en charge. Envoyez directement les utilisateurs vers les fichiers exécutables. 1 Recherchez les fichiers de langue XML Acrobat Connect Pro sur le serveur hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro. Les fichiers XML se trouvent dans les deux répertoires suivants :[rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\intro\lang et [rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\meeting\lang\. 2 Entrez un chemin aux fichiers exécutable pour chaque plate-forme dans la section addInLocation de chaque plate-forme dans chaque fichier de langue : /common/addin/AcrobatConnectAddin.z /common/addin/setup.exe Remarque : il s'agit là des emplacements par défaut des fichiers exécutables de l'Add-in. Vous pouvez modifier les emplacements sur le serveur et changer en conséquence les chemins d'accès dans la section addInLocation. Envoyez les utilisateurs vers les pages d'instructions de téléchargement fournies par Adobe. 1 Recherchez les fichiers de langue XML Acrobat Connect Pro sur le serveur hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro. Les fichiers XML se trouvent dans les deux répertoires suivants :[rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\intro\lang et [rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\meeting\lang\. 2 Entrez le chemin à la page d'instructions de téléchargement dans la section addInLocation de chaque plate-forme dans chaque fichier de langue : /common/help/#lang#/support/addindownload.htm /common/help/#lang#/support/addindownload.htm Remarque : le chemin comprend une chaîne #lang# qu'Acrobat Connect Pro traduit dans la langue de la réunion au moment de l'exécution.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 65 Déploiement et configuration de Connect Pro 3 Le fichier addindownload.htm comprend des liens vers les emplacements par défaut des fichiers exécutables de l'Add-in sur Acrobat Connect Pro (/common/addin/setup.exe et /common/addin/AcrobatConnectAddin.z). Si vous modifiez l'emplacement des fichiers exécutables, actualisez les liens de la page addindownload.htm pour chaque langue. Envoyez les utilisateurs vers vos propres pages d'instructions de téléchargement. 1 Recherchez les fichiers de langue XML Acrobat Connect Pro sur le serveur hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro. Les fichiers XML se trouvent dans les deux répertoires suivants :[rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\intro\lang et [rép_install_racine]\appserv\web\common\meeting\lang\. 2 Dans la section addInLocation de chaque plate-forme dans chaque fichier de langue, entrez le chemin à la page d'instructions que vous avez créée : common/help/#lang#/support/addin_install_instructions.html common/help/#lang#/support/addin_install_instructions.html Remarque : vous pouvez créer des pages d'instructions distinctes pour chaque plate-forme. 3 Créez une page d'instruction pour chaque langue que vous désirez prendre en charge. Dans la page d'instructions, ajoutez des liens vers les fichiers exécutables de l'Add-in pour chaque plate-forme.66 Chapitre 4 : Stratégies La sécurisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server protège votre société contre les pertes de biens et les actes de malveillance. Il est important de sécuriser l'infrastructure de votre société, Acrobat Connect Pro Server et le serveur de base de données utilisé par Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Protocole SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) A propos de la prise en charge SSL Acrobat Connect Pro Server est constitué de deux serveurs : Adobe® Flash® Media Server et le serveur d'applications Acrobat Connect Pro. Flash Media Server est appelé « serveur de réunions » car il permet au client d'accéder aux réunions via une connexion RTMP en temps réel. Le serveur d'applications Acrobat Connect Pro gère la connexion HTTP entre le client et la logique applicative d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Remarque : dans le menu Démarrer, le serveur de réunions est appelé « Connect Pro Meeting Server » et le serveur d'applications « Connect Pro Central Application Server ». Dans la fenêtre Services, le serveur de réunions est appelé « Flash Media Server (FMS) » et le serveur d'applications « Adobe Connect Enterprise Service ». Vous pouvez configurer SSL pour le serveur d'applications, pour le serveur de réunions, ou pour les deux : Solution matérielle Pour obtenir une configuration SSL la plus fiable possible, utilisez un accélérateur SSL. Achetez un accélérateur SSL séparément. Adobe a vérifié le fonctionnement d'Acrobat Connect Pro avec les accélérateurs matériels SSL suivants : F5 Big-IP 1000, Cisco Catalyst 6590 Switch et Radware T100. Solution logicielle Utilisez la prise en charge native de SSL dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Remarque : SSL n'est pas pris en charge sous Microsoft® Windows® 98. Acrobat Connect Pro utilise la méthode HTTP CONNECT pour demander une connexion SSL. Les serveurs proxy doivent autoriser les clients à utiliser la méthode CONNECT . Si les clients ne peuvent pas utiliser la méthode CONNECT, les connexions RTMP passent par HTTP/HTTPS. Pour obtenir de l'aide sur la configuration de SSL, contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_licensed_programs_fr. Utilisation de certificats Un certificat SSL vérifie l'identité du serveur sur le client. Pour sécuriser les connexions des serveurs de réunions (RTMP) et d'applications (HTTP), vous devez disposer de deux certificats SSL, un pour chaque connexion. Pour configurer SSL pour un cluster d'ordinateurs qui hébergent Acrobat Connect Pro, vous devez avoir un certificat SSL pour chaque serveur de réunions. Tous les serveurs d'applications d'un cluster peuvent partager un même certificat SSL. Par exemple, pour sécuriser la connexion à un serveur de réunions et à des serveurs d'applications sur un serveur, vous avez besoin au total de deux certificats SSL. Pour sécuriser la connexion aux serveurs de réunions et aux serveurs d'applications sur un cluster de trois serveurs, vous avez besoin d'un total de quatre certificats SSL : un partagé par les serveurs d'applications et trois pour les serveurs de réunions.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 67 Stratégies Obtention de certificats ? Contactez une autorité de certification, organisme tiers approuvé qui vérifie l'identité du demandeur. (Les certificats auto-signés ne fonctionnent pas avec Acrobat Connect Pro.) L'autorité de certification vous invite à générer un fichier CSR (Certificate Signing Request) SSL. Envoyez-le à l'autorité de certification qui le convertira en certificat SSL. Il contient des informations sur votre société et le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié associé au certificat SSL. Pour des instructions précises sur la création d'un fichier CSR, contactez votre autorité de certification. Important : conservez les mots de passe de vos certificats SSL dans un endroit sécurisé et accessible. Installation des certificats ? Installez les certificats SSL et les fichiers de clé privée au format PEM dans le dossier racine Acrobat Connect Pro (c:\breeze, par défaut). Si vous recevez un fichier CRT d'une autorité de certification, vous pouvez le renommer en lui donnant l'extension .pem. Remarque : vous devez avoir deux fichiers pour chaque connexion sécurisée, un fichier pour le certificat public et un fichier pour la clé privée. Le serveur envoie le certificat public au client. La clé privée reste sur le serveur. Configuration d'un protocole SSL logiciel Lorsque vous configurez un protocole SSL logiciel, vous pouvez sécuriser le serveur d'applications (HTTP), le serveur de réunions (RTMP) ou les deux. Quelle que soit la configuration que vous choisissez, vous devez d'abord configurer le serveur DNS. Configuration du serveur DNS ? Créez des entrées DNS qui définissent un nom de domaine pleinement qualifié pour chaque connexion sécurisée. Le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'applications est l'URL avec laquelle les utilisateurs finaux se connectent à Acrobat Connect Pro. Entez ce nom de domaine pleinement qualifié pour la valeur Hôte Connect Pro dans la page Paramètres du serveur de la Console de gestion des applications. « Connect » est un exemple de valeur valide. votresociété .com Les utilisateurs finaux ne voient pas le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur de réunions. Il est cependant indispensable d'en définir un pour le serveur de réunions si vous souhaitez tenir des réunions via une connexion sécurisée. Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié dans la zone Nom externe de la page Paramètres du serveur de la Console de gestion des applications. Valeur possible : fms.votresociété.com. Remarque : dans un cluster de serveurs, tous les serveurs d'applications peuvent partager un certificat SSL, mais chaque serveur de réunions doit avoir son propre certificat SSL. Sur un même serveur, pour sécuriser à la fois les connexions HTTP (serveurs d'applications) et RTMP (serveur de réunions), vous devez avoir un total de deux noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et deux certificats SSL (un pour chaque protocole). Sécurisation du serveur de réunions et du serveur d'applications 1 Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml situé dans le dossier [rép_install_racine]\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_ et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 2 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier Adaptor.xml d'origine, à l'intérieur des balises (remplacez le code en italique par vos propres valeurs) :MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 68 Stratégies [root_install_dir]\sslMeetingPublicCert.pem [root_install_dir]\sslMeetingPrivateKey.pem mypassphrase ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 [root_install_dir]\sslAppServerPublicCert.pem [root_install_dir]\sslAppServerPrivateKey.pem mypassphrase ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 Vous devez avoir deux fichiers pour chaque connexion sécurisée : un pour le certificat SSL public et un pour la clé privée appartenant au certificat. Indiquez l'emplacement du certificat SSL public dans la balise . Indiquez l'emplacement de la clé privée dans la balise . Le serveur envoie le certificat SSL public aux clients. La clé privée reste sur le serveur. 3 Localisez la ligne suivante dans le fichier Adaptor.xml : ${DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT} 4 Remplacez le code de l'étape 3 par : meetingServerIP:-443 appServerIP:-443 5 Enregistrez le fichier Adaptor.xml. 6 (Facultatif) Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml dans un navigateur Web pour valider sa syntaxe. Si le navigateur signale une erreur, corrigez-la, puis rouvrez le fichier dans un navigateur Web. Répétez ce processus jusqu'à ce que le fichier soit valide. 7 Ouvrez le fichier custom.ini situé dans le répertoire d'installation racine (c:\breeze, par défaut) et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 8 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier custom.ini, sans remplacer ni supprimer le texte existant : ADMIN_PROTOCOL=https:// SSL_ONLY=yes HTTPS_PORT=8443 RTMP_SEQUENCE=rtmps://external-host:443/?rtmp://localhost:8506/ Remarque : le fichier custom.ini respecte la casse ; utilisez des majuscules pour les noms de paramètre et des minuscules pour les valeurs. 9 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 69 Stratégies 10 Ouvrez le fichier VHost.xml situé dans le dossier [rép_install_racine]\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_\_defaultVHost_ et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 11 Localisez la ligne suivante dans le fichier VHost.xml : 12 Remplacez la ligne de l'étape 11 par le code suivant : *:*;*:${ORIGIN_PORT} 13 Enregistrez le fichier VHost.xml. 14 (Facultatif) Ouvrez le fichier VHost.xml dans un navigateur Web pour valider sa syntaxe. 15 Redémarrez Adobe Connect Pro Server 7 : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server. c Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. d Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. 16 Ouvrez la Console de gestion des applications ((http://localhost:8510/console ou Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7). 17 Dans l'écran Paramètres de l'application, sélectionnez Paramètres du serveur et procédez comme suit : a Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié de votre compte Connect Acrobat Pro dans la zone Hôte Connect Pro. Ce nom de domaine pleinement qualifié est l'URL avec laquelle les utilisateurs finaux se connectent à Acrobat Connect Pro. b Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur de réunions Acrobat Connect Pro dans la zone Nom externe sous Mappages de l'hôte. Le serveur utilise cette valeur en interne. Sécurisation du serveur d'applications uniquement 1 Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml situé dans le dossier [rép_install_racine]\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_ et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 2 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier Adaptor.xml d'origine, à l'intérieur des balises (remplacez le code en italique par vos propres valeurs) : [root_install_dir]\sslAppServerPublicCert.pem [root_install_dir]\sslAppServerPrivateKey.pem mypassphrase ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 70 Stratégies Vous devez avoir deux fichiers : un pour le certificat SSL public et un pour la clé privée appartenant au certificat. Indiquez l'emplacement du certificat SSL public dans la balise . Indiquez l'emplacement de la clé privée dans la balise . Le serveur envoie le certificat SSL public aux clients. La clé privée reste sur le serveur. 3 Localisez la ligne suivante dans le fichier Adaptor.xml : ${DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT} 4 Insérez le code suivant sous la ligne ajoutée à l'étape 3 : :-443 5 Enregistrez le fichier Adaptor.xml. 6 (Facultatif) Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml dans un navigateur Web pour valider sa syntaxe. Si le navigateur signale une erreur, corrigez-la, puis rouvrez le fichier dans un navigateur Web. Répétez ce processus jusqu'à ce que le fichier soit valide. 7 Ouvrez le fichier custom.ini situé dans le répertoire d'installation racine (c:\breeze, par défaut) et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 8 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier custom.ini, sans remplacer ni supprimer le texte existant : ADMIN_PROTOCOL=https:// SSL_ONLY=yes HTTPS_PORT=8443 Remarque : le fichier custom.ini respecte la casse ; utilisez des majuscules pour les noms de paramètre et des minuscules pour les valeurs. 9 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini. 10 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server. c Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. d Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Sécurisation du serveur de réunions uniquement 1 Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml situé dans le dossier [rép_install_racine]\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_ et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 2 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier Adaptor.xml d'origine, à l'intérieur des balises (remplacez le code en italique par vos propres valeurs) :MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 71 Stratégies [root_install_dir]\sslMeetingServerPublicCert.pem [root_install_dir]\sslMeetingServerPrivateKey.pem mypassphrase ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 Vous devez avoir deux fichiers : un pour le certificat SSL public et un pour la clé privée appartenant au certificat. Indiquez l'emplacement du certificat SSL public dans la balise . Indiquez l'emplacement de la clé privée dans la balise . Le serveur envoie le certificat SSL public aux clients. La clé privée reste sur le serveur. 3 Localisez la ligne suivante dans le fichier Adaptor.xml : ${DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT} 4 Remplacez le code de l'étape 3 par : :-443 5 Enregistrez le fichier Adaptor.xml. 6 (Facultatif) Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml dans un navigateur Web pour valider sa syntaxe. Si le navigateur signale une erreur, corrigez-la, puis rouvrez le fichier dans un navigateur Web. Répétez ce processus jusqu'à ce que le fichier soit valide. 7 Ouvrez le fichier VHost.xml situé dans le dossier [rép_install_racine]\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_\_defaultVHost_ et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 8 Localisez la ligne suivante dans le fichier VHost.xml : 9 Remplacez la ligne de l'étape 8 par le code suivant : *:*;*:${ORIGIN_PORT} 10 Enregistrez le fichier VHost.xml. 11 (Facultatif) Ouvrez le fichier VHost.xml dans un navigateur Web pour valider sa syntaxe. 12 Ouvrez le fichier custom.ini situé dans le répertoire d'installation racine (c:\breeze, par défaut) et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 13 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier custom.ini, sans remplacer ni supprimer le texte existant : RTMP_SEQUENCE=rtmps://external-host:443/?rtmp://localhost:8506/ 14 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini. 15 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 72 Stratégies b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server. c Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. d Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Test de la configuration 1 Si vous avez sécurisé le serveur d'applications, connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. Un cadenas apparaît dans votre navigateur. 2 Si vous sécurisez le serveur de réunions, accédez à une salle de réunion Acrobat Connect Pro. Un cadenas apparaît dans le témoin de connexion. Configuration d'un protocole SSL matériel Lorsque vous configurez un protocole SSL matériel, vous pouvez sécuriser le serveur d'applications (HTTP), le serveur de réunions (RTMP) ou les deux. Quelle que soit la configuration que vous choisissez, vous devez d'abord configurer le serveur DNS. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de l'accélérateur matériel, consultez la documentation du fournisseur. Configuration du serveur DNS ? Créez des entrées DNS pour tous les serveurs que vous planifiez de sécuriser. Définissez un nom de domaine pleinement qualifié pour chaque serveur sécurisé (par exemple, application.exemple.com et réunion1.exemple.com). Remarque : dans un cluster de serveurs, tous les serveurs d'applications peuvent partager un certificat SSL, mais chaque serveur de réunions doit avoir son propre certificat SSL. Sur un même serveur, pour sécuriser à la fois les connexions HTTP (serveurs d'applications) et RTMP (serveur de réunions), vous devez avoir un total de deux noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et deux certificats SSL (un pour chaque protocole). Configuration de SSL pour les serveurs de réunions et d'application 1 Configurez le périphérique matériel dans les objectifs suivants : a Ecoutez le port 443 en externe pour application.exemple.com. b Transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur d'applications sur le port 8443. c Ecoutez le port 443 en externe pour reunion1.exemple.com. d Transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur de réunions sur le port 1935. e (Facultatif) Ecoutez le port 80 en externe pour application.exemple.com et transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur d'applications sur le port 80. Le serveur d'applications redirige les utilisateurs vers le port 443. 2 Configurez le pare-feu dans les objectifs suivants : a Autorisez le trafic vers le serveur d'applications sur le port 443 (et sur le port 80 si vous avez terminé l'étape 1e). b Autorisez le trafic vers le serveur de réunions sur le port 443.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 73 Stratégies 3 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7 pour ouvrir la Console de gestion des applications. Dans l'écran Paramètres de l'application, sélectionnez Paramètres du serveur et procédez comme suit : a Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'applications (par exemple, connect.exemple.com) dans la zone Hôte Connect Pro. Ce nom de domaine pleinement qualifié est l'URL avec laquelle les utilisateurs finaux se connectent à Acrobat Connect Pro. b Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur de réunions (par exemple, fms.exemple.com) dans la zone Nom externe sous Mappages de l'hôte. Le serveur utilise cette valeur en interne. 4 Ouvrez le fichier custom.ini situé dans le répertoire d'installation racine (c:\breeze, par défaut) et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 5 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier custom.ini, sans remplacer ni supprimer le texte existant : ADMIN_PROTOCOL=https:// SSL_ONLY=yes HTTPS_PORT=8443 RTMP_SEQUENCE=rtmps://external-host:443/?rtmp://localhost:8506/ Remarque : le fichier custom.ini respecte la casse ; utilisez des majuscules pour les noms de paramètre et des minuscules pour les valeurs. 6 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini. 7 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Configuration de SSL pour le serveur de réunions uniquement 1 Configurez le périphérique matériel dans les objectifs suivants : a Ecoutez le port 443 en externe pour reunion1.exemple.com. b Transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur de réunions sur le port 1935. 2 Configurez le pare-feu pour autoriser le trafic vers le serveur de réunions sur le port 443. 3 Ouvrez le fichier custom.ini situé dans le répertoire d'installation racine (c:\breeze, par défaut) et enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde dans un autre emplacement. 4 Insérez le code suivant dans le fichier custom.ini, sans remplacer ni supprimer le texte existant : RTMP_SEQUENCE=rtmps://external-host:443/?rtmp://localhost:8506/ 5 Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini. Configuration de SSL pour le serveur d'applications uniquement 1 Configurez le périphérique matériel dans les objectifs suivants : a Ecoutez le port 443 en externe pour application.exemple.com. b Transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur d'applications sur le port 8443. c (Facultatif) Ecoutez le port 80 en externe pour application.exemple.com et transmettez les données non chiffrées au serveur d'applications sur le port 80. Le serveur d'applications redirige les utilisateurs vers le port 443.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 74 Stratégies 2 Configurez le pare-feu de manière à autoriser le trafic vers le serveur d'applications sur le port 443 (et sur le port 80 si vous avez terminé l'étape 1c). 3 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro, ajoutez le fichier custom.ini suivant dans le répertoire racine d'installation (C:\breeze, par défaut) : ADMIN_PROTOCOL=https:// SSL_ONLY=yes HTTPS_PORT=8443 Remarque : le fichier custom.ini respecte la casse ; utilisez des majuscules pour les noms de paramètre et des minuscules pour les valeurs. 4 Redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7. a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Test de la configuration 1 Si vous avez sécurisé le serveur d'applications, connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. Un cadenas apparaît dans votre navigateur. 2 Si vous sécurisez le serveur de réunions, accédez à une salle de réunion Acrobat Connect Pro. Un cadenas apparaît dans le témoin de connexion. Configuration du protocole SSL logiciel pour un serveur Edge Si le protocole SSL logiciel est configuré sur le serveur d'origine, configurez l'authentification SSL logicielle pour chaque serveur Edge à sécuriser. A l'instar d'un serveur d'origine, un serveur Edge comprend deux services : un service de réunion et un service d'application. Pour configurer SSL pour le service de réunion et le service d'application, il vous faut deux noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et deux adresses IP. Vous pouvez partager le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du service d'application avec le serveur d'origine, mais le service de réunion, en revanche, doit avoir son propre nom de domaine pleinement qualifié. Le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du service d'application est l'URL avec laquelle les utilisateurs se connectent à leurs comptes Acrobat Connect Pro. Par exemple, si vous avez un serveur Edge et un serveur d'origine, il vous faut trois noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et trois certificats SSL : un pour chaque service de réunion et un pour les services d'application à partager. Il vous faut également quatre adresses IP : une pour chaque service de réunion et une pour chaque service d'application. Dans cet exemple de configuration, le serveur d'origine a les adresses IP et les noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés suivants : 10.192.37.11 = connect.yourcompany.com 10.192.37.10 = meeting1.yourcompany.com Le serveur Edge a les adresses IP et les noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés suivants : 10.192.37.100 = connect.yourcompany.com 10.192.37.101 = edge1.yourcompany.com Remarque : si vous installez le serveur Edge et le serveur d'origine pour la première fois, configurez les deux serveurs sans SSL et vérifiez qu'ils parviennent à communiquer ensemble. Une fois que la communication est établie, vous pouvez configurer SSL pour les deux serveurs.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 75 Stratégies Voir aussi « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28 « A propos de la prise en charge SSL » à la page 66 Configuration du serveur Edge 1 Sur le serveur d'origine, ouvrez le fichier c:\breeze\comserv\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_\Adaptor.xml et copiez toute la section , comme suit : C:\breeze\connect.yourcompany.com.pem C:\breeze\connect.yourcompany.comKEY.pem ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 C:\breeze\meetingPublicCert.pem C:\breeze\meetingPrivateKey.pem ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 Remarque : votre code peut contenir différentes valeurs, mais il doit contenir les mêmes éléments XML. 2 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier c:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_\Adaptor.xml et collez le bloc de code du serveur d'origine après la balise . 3 Procédez comme suit pour configurer le service d'application et le service de réunion sur le serveur Edge : a Le service d'application est la balise dans le bloc . Le service d'application utilise le même nom de domaine pleinement qualifié que le service d'application sur le serveur d'origine. Copiez les fichiers .pem du certificat et de la clé du serveur d'origine vers le même emplacement sur le serveur Edge. Dans cet exemple, le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié est connect.votresociété.com. C:\breeze\connect.yourcompany.com.pem C:\breeze\connect.yourcompany.comKEY.pem ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 b Le service de réunion est la balise dans le bloc . Modifiez le code XML pour que le service de réunion pointe vers des fichiers de certificat et de clé uniques pour son nom de domaine pleinement qualifié unique. Dans cet exemple, le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié est edge1.votresociété.com.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 76 Stratégies C:\breeze\edge1.yourcompany.com.pem C:\breeze\edge1.yourcompany.comKEY.pem ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH 5 4 Dans le fichier Adaptor.xml sur le serveur Edge, localisez la ligne ${FCS.HOST_PORT} . Ajoutez les deux lignes ci-dessous à la suite : 206.192.37.100:-443 206.192.37.101:-443 Ce code relie les adresses IP internes du serveur Edge pour sécuriser le port 443. Cet exemple utilise les adresses IP internes 206.192.37.100 et 206.192.37.101. Dans votre code, remplacez les adresses IP internes de votre serveur Edge. 5 Enregistrez le fichier Adaptor.xml. 6 Ouvrez le fichier Adaptor.xml dans un navigateur Web pour vérifier que le code XML est valide. S'il contient des erreurs de syntaxe, le navigateur Web affiche un message d'erreur. Corrigez les erreurs de code XML et revérifiez le fichier. 7 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier c:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\conf\_defaultRoot_\_defaultVHost_\Vhost.xml. Localisez la balise et remplacez-la par ce qui suit : *:*;10.192.37.11:8506 Ce code a pour effet que le serveur Edge dirige les connexions RTMP des adresses IP et des ports vers le serveur d'origine via le port 8506. Cet exemple utilise l'adresse IP 10.192.37.11. Dans votre code, remplacez l'adresse IP du service d'application sur le serveur d'origine. 8 Enregistrez le fichier VHost.xml. 9 Ouvrez le fichier Vhost.xml dans un navigateur Web pour vérifier que le code XML est valide. S'il contient des erreurs de syntaxe, le navigateur Web affiche un message d'erreur. Corrigez les erreurs de code XML et revérifiez le fichier. 10 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier c:\breeze\edgeserver\custom.ini. 11 Entrez le paramètre FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_SECURE_PORT et définissez-le sur l'adresse IP ou le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'origine, comme dans l'exemple suivant : FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_SECURE_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:443 FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:80 FCS_EDGE_HOST=edge1.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_REGISTER_HOST=connect.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=sanfran FCS_EDGE_EXPIRY_TIME=60000 FCS_EDGE_REG_INTERVAL=30000 Si vous souhaitez configurer votre système pour se connecter via SSL uniquement, commentez le paramètre FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT comme suit : # FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:80MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 77 Stratégies Remarque : si le serveur Edge a des difficultés à résoudre le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'origine, utilisez l'adresse IP. 12 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier C:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\conf\HttpCache.xml et mettez à jour la balise comme suit : ${FCS_EDGE_HOST} 13 Enregistrez le fichier HttpCache.xml. 14 Ouvrez le fichier HttpCache.xml dans un navigateur Web pour vérifier que le code XML est valide. S'il contient des erreurs de syntaxe, le navigateur Web affiche un message d'erreur. Corrigez les erreurs de code XML et revérifiez. Configuration du serveur d'origine 1 Configurez le serveur d'origine pour SSL. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Protocole SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) » à la page 66. 2 Sur le serveur d'origine, ouvrez le fichier c\breeze\custom.ini et entrez ce qui suit pour lier le serveur Edge au serveur d'origine : edge.FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=1 Utilisez la valeur du paramètre FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID défini dans le fichier custom.ini sur le serveur Edge. Dans cet exemple, la valeur est sanfran , le code est donc edge.sanfran=1 . Remarque : la valeur 0 est réservée et ne peut pas être utilisée. 3 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server et Connect Pro Meeting Server. 4 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7 pour ouvrir la Console de gestion des applications. Effectuez les opérations suivantes : a Cliquez sur Paramètres du serveur. b La zone Nom externe contient le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur Edge et une zone vide à droite. Si le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié n'apparaît pas, patientez quelques minutes et actualisez le navigateur. c Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur Edge dans la zone vide, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le serveur Edge est alors enregistré sur le serveur d'origine. 5 Configurez le serveur DNS local pour diriger les utilisateurs vers le serveur Edge lorsqu'ils demandent une URL Acrobat Connect Pro. Configuration du protocole SSL matériel pour un serveur Edge Si le protocole SSL matériel est configuré sur le serveur d'origine, configurez l'authentification SSL matérielle pour chaque serveur Edge à sécuriser. A l'instar d'un serveur d'origine, un serveur Edge comprend deux services : un service de réunion et un service d'application. Pour configurer SSL pour le service de réunion et le service d'application, il vous faut deux noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et deux adresses IP. Vous pouvez partager le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du service d'application avec le serveur d'origine, mais le service de réunion, en revanche, doit avoir son propre nom de domaine pleinement qualifié. Le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du service d'application est l'URL avec laquelle les utilisateurs se connectent à leurs comptes Acrobat Connect Pro. Par exemple, si vous avez un serveur Edge et un serveur d'origine, il vous faut trois noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés et trois certificats SSL : un pour chaque service de réunion et un pour les services d'application à partager. Il vous faut également quatre adresses IP : une pour chaque service de réunion et une pour chaque service d'application.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 78 Stratégies Dans cet exemple de configuration, le serveur d'origine a les adresses IP et les noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés suivants : 10.192.37.11 = connect.yourcompany.com 10.192.37.10 = meeting1.yourcompany.com Le serveur Edge a les adresses IP et les noms de domaine pleinement qualifiés suivants : 10.192.37.100 = connect.yourcompany.com 10.192.37.101 = edge1.yourcompany.com Remarque : si vous installez le serveur Edge et le serveur d'origine pour la première fois, configurez les deux serveurs sans SSL et vérifiez qu'ils parviennent à communiquer ensemble. Une fois que la communication est établie, vous pouvez configurer SSL pour les deux serveurs. Voir aussi « Déploiement d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server » à la page 28 « A propos de la prise en charge SSL » à la page 66 Configuration du serveur Edge 1 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier c:\breeze\edgeserver\custom.ini. 2 Entrez le paramètre FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_SECURE_PORT et définissez-le sur l'adresse IP ou le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'origine, comme dans l'exemple suivant : FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_SECURE_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:443 FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:80 FCS_EDGE_HOST=edge1.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_REGISTER_HOST=connect.yourcompany.com FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=sanfran FCS_EDGE_EXPIRY_TIME=60000 FCS_EDGE_REG_INTERVAL=30000 Si vous souhaitez configurer votre système pour se connecter via SSL uniquement, commentez le paramètre FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT comme suit : # FCS.HTTPCACHE_BREEZE_SERVER_NORMAL_PORT=connect.yourcompany.com:80 Remarque : si le serveur Edge a des difficultés à résoudre le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur d'origine, utilisez l'adresse IP. 3 Sur le serveur Edge, ouvrez le fichier C:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\conf\HttpCache.xml et mettez à jour la balise comme suit : ${FCS_EDGE_HOST} 4 Enregistrez le fichier HttpCache.xml. 5 Ouvrez le fichier HttpCache.xml dans un navigateur Web pour vérifier que le code XML est valide. S'il contient des erreurs de syntaxe, le navigateur Web affiche un message d'erreur. Corrigez les erreurs de code XML et revérifiez. Configuration du serveur d'origine 1 Configurez le serveur d'origine pour SSL. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section « Protocole SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) » à la page 66.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 79 Stratégies 2 Sur le serveur d'origine, ouvrez le fichier c\breeze\custom.ini et entrez ce qui suit pour lier le serveur Edge au serveur d'origine : edge.FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID=1 Utilisez la valeur du paramètre FCS_EDGE_CLUSTER_ID défini dans le fichier custom.ini sur le serveur Edge. Dans cet exemple, la valeur est sanfran , le code est donc edge.sanfran=1 . Remarque : la valeur 0 est réservée et ne peut pas être utilisée. 3 Redémarrez Connect Pro Central Application Server et Connect Pro Meeting Server. 4 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Configurer Connect Pro Server 7 pour ouvrir la Console de gestion des applications. Effectuez les opérations suivantes : a Cliquez sur Paramètres du serveur. b La zone Nom externe contient le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur Edge et une zone vide à droite. Si le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié n'apparaît pas, patientez quelques minutes et actualisez le navigateur. c Entrez le nom de domaine pleinement qualifié du serveur Edge dans la zone vide, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le serveur Edge est alors enregistré sur le serveur d'origine. 5 Configurez le serveur DNS local pour diriger les utilisateurs vers le serveur Edge lorsqu'ils demandent une URL Acrobat Connect Pro. Balises XML SSL Balise Valeur par défaut Description SSLCertificateFile Aucune valeur par défaut. Emplacement du fichier de certificat à envoyer au client. Lorsque aucun chemin absolu n'est spécifié, le certificat est supposé être situé dans le répertoire Adaptor. SSLCertificateKeyFile Aucune valeur par défaut. Emplacement du fichier de la clé privée du certificat. Lorsque aucun chemin absolu n'est spécifié, le fichier de la clé est supposé être situé dans le répertoire Adaptor. Si le fichier de la clé est crypté, la phrase secrète doit être spécifiée dans la balise SSLPassPhrase. L'attribut type indique le type de codage utilisé pour le fichier de clé du certificat. Il peut s'agir de PEM ou de ASN1 . SSLCipherSuite Voir la description. Algorithme de chiffrement. L'algorithme est composé d'éléments séparés par des signes deux-points (:). Il peut s'agir d'algorithmes d'échange, de méthodes d'authentification, de méthodes de chiffrement, de types de résumés ou d'un nombre d'alias sélectionnés pour des regroupements courants. Pour obtenir la liste des composants, consultez la documentation de Flash Media Server. Cette balise présente le paramètre par défaut suivant : ALL:!ADH:!LOW:!EXP:!MD5:@STRENGTH Contactez l'assistance technique d'Adobe avant de modifier les paramètres par défaut. SSLPassPhrase Aucune valeur par défaut. Phrase secrète à utiliser pour déchiffrer le fichier de la clé privée. Si le fichier de la clé privée n'est pas chiffré, laissez cette balise vide. SSLSessionTimeout 5 Délai, en minutes, pendant lequel la session SSL demeure valide.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 80 Stratégies Paramètres de configuration SSL Infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) A propos de l'infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) Vous pouvez configurer une infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) pour gérer les informations d'identification dans le cadre de l'architecture de sécurité Acrobat Connect Pro de vos clients. Dans le protocole SSL plus répandu, l'identité du serveur est vérifiée auprès du client ; dans une infrastructure à clé publique, l'identité du client est vérifiée auprès du serveur. Une tierce partie approuvée, appelée autorité de certification, vérifie l'identité d'un client et lui associe un certificat. Le certificat (également appelé clé publique) est au format X.509. Lorsque le client se connecte à Acrobat Connect Pro, un proxy négocie sa connexion pour l'infrastructure à clé publique. Si le client dispose d'un cookie issu d'une session précédente ou d'un certificat valide, il est connecté à Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations sur l'infrastructure à clé publique, consultez le Centre de technologie ICP de Microsoft. Configuration requise ICP Les utilisateurs doivent exécuter Windows XP ou Windows 2003 et avoir installé sur leur ordinateur local un certificat de client valide avant d'accéder à une réunion requérant une authentification ICP. Lorsque l'utilisateur accède à une réunion, une boîte de dialogue lui demande de choisir un certificat de client valide parmi ceux qui sont installés sur son ordinateur. Adobe recommande que les clients utilisent Adobe Acrobat Connect Add-in pour participer aux réunions requérant des authentifications avec clé publique. Les clients doivent installer l'Add-in à l'aide de son programme d'installation autonome avant d'accéder à la réunion. Les clients peuvent également utiliser la dernière version de Flash Player dans le navigateur pour accéder aux réunions, mais la prise en charge des clés publiques par Flash Player n'est pas aussi étendue que celle de l'Add-in. Cependant, pour afficher les archives de réunions, les clients doivent avoir installé la dernière version de Flash Player. Paramètre Valeur par défaut Description ADMIN_PROTOCOL http:// Protocole utilisé par le serveur d'application. Défini sur https:// pour configurer SSL. DEFAULT_FCS_HOSTPORT :1935 Port utilisé par Flash Media Server pour communiquer via le protocole RTMP. Défini sur :-443,1935 pour configurer SSL. HTTPS_PORT Pas de valeur par défaut. Port sur lequel le serveur d'application écoute les requêtes HTTPS. Ce paramètre est généralement défini sur 443 ou sur 8443 pour configurer SSL. SSL_ONLY no Défini sur yes si le serveur ne prend en charge que les connexions sécurisées. Ce paramètre implique que toutes les URL Acrobat Connect Pro utilisent le protocole HTTPS. RTMP_SEQUENCE Pas de valeur par défaut. Ports et points d'origine et d'extrémité utilisés pour se connecter au Flash Media Server (serveur de réunions).MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 81 Stratégies Vous pouvez concevoir un système ICP qui ne requiert que l'authentification des connexions HTTP ou des connexions HTTP et RTMP. Si vous exigez des certificats côté client pour les connexions HTTP et RTMP, le système interroge les utilisateurs à chaque nouvelle connexion au serveur. Par exemple, ils devront répondre à deux invites pour se connecter à une réunion, l'une pour HTTP et l'autre pour RTMP. La connexion RTMP ne pouvant pas être établie sans authentification HTTP, vous pouvez choisir d'exiger une authentification côté client uniquement pour la connexion HTTP. Mise en œuvre de l'infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) La procédure suivante vous guide tout au long de l'implémentation de l'infrastructure à clé publique (ICP) configurée avec un routeur F5 BIG-IP LTM 9.1.2 (version 40.2) comme proxy. Servez-vous des sections sensibles pour concevoir votre propre solution, avec un routeur F5 ou un autre périphérique. Cette implémentation de référence respectent des normes de sécurité rigoureuses, par exemple, elle exige un certificat côté client pour les connexions HTTP (serveur d'applications) et RTMP (serveur de réunions). Remarque : Adobe vous recommande vivement d'adopter une stratégie de sécurité avant d'implémenter l'infrastructure à clé publique. Celle-ci exploite, en effet, un grand nombre de technologies différentes et le maintien de la sécurité est essentiel lors des interactions entre ces systèmes. Flux des données dans une infrastructure de clé publique Cet exemple suppose la présence des éléments suivants : • Acrobat Connect Pro est installé. • Acrobat Connect Pro est intégré dans un service d'annuaire LDAP. • Un utilisateur importé depuis le service d'annuaire LDAP peut accéder à une réunion d'Acrobat Connect Pro. • Un routeur F5 est installé. 1. Configurez le serveur d'annuaire LDAP. Un attribut LDAP email doit être spécifié pour chaque utilisateur. Cet attribut est ajouté dans le champ objet du certificat du client. F5 iRule recherche l'adresse électronique dans X.509::objet et ajoute la valeur dans l'en-tête HTTP. Acrobat Connect Pro utilise l'en-tête HTTP pour authentifier l'utilisateur. Remarque : cet exemple utilise l'attribut email . Vous pouvez utiliser un identifiant unique quelconque au format X.509, d'une longueur maximale de 254 caractères et partagé par le service d'annuaire LDAP et Acrobat Connect Pro. Routeur F5 BIG-IP Client Serveur Connect Pro Server Serveur SQL Serveur d’annuaire LDAP Serveur de certiicatsMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 82 Stratégies 2. Définissez la stratégie de connexion d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Acrobat Connect Pro doit utiliser une adresse électronique comme identifiant de connexion de l'utilisateur. Dans Connect Pro Central, ouvrez l'onglet Administration, cliquez sur Utilisateurs et Groupes, puis sur Modifier les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. 3. Configurez un serveur d'autorité de certification. Le serveur CA (Autorité de certification) traite les demandes de certificats, vérifie l'identité des clients, publie les certificats et gère la liste CRL (certificats révoqués). Dans cette implémentation, le serveur CA s'adresse au serveur d'annuaire LDAP pour obtenir un certificat de client. Le serveur CA demande les informations du client au serveur LDAP et, si le client existe et n'a pas été révoqué, les met en forme dans un certificat. Assurez-vous que le certificat du client soit installé et opérationnel en examinant le champ d'objet. Il doit se présenter comme suit : E = adavis@asp.sflab.macromedia.com CN = Andrew Davis CN = Users DC = asp DC = sflab DC = macromedia DC = com 4. Configurez Acrobat Connect Pro pour qu'il utilise l'authentification des en-têtes HTTP. Dans le fichier [rép_install_racine]\appserv\conf\WEB-INF\web.xml, retirez les commentaires du code suivant : HeaderAuthenticationFilter /* Arrêtez le serveur de réunions et le serveur d'applications. Dans le fichier custom.ini du répertoire racine de l'installation, ajoutez la ligne suivante : HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=hah_login Enregistrez le fichier custom.ini et redémarrez Acrobat Connect Pro. 5. Configurez la logique applicative du routeur F5. La logique applicative de F5 recherche l'adresse électronique dans le champ Objet du certificat du client. Elle transfère ensuite l'adresse électronique à Acrobat Connect Pro dans un en-tête HTTP supplémentaire. Les clients qui ne possèdent pas de certificat sont rejetés. Lorsqu'un client possède un certificat, celui-ci doit être authentifié. OCSP (Online Certification Status Protocol) et la recherche LDAP sont des exemples de mécanismes d'authentification. Une fois le certificat authentifié, recherchez-y un identifiant unique connu d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Dans cet exemple, une adresse électronique est recherchée dans un certificat valide. Une requête qui inclut la chaîne session ou qui contient un cookie BREEZESESSION peut être transmise sans authentification car le client a déjà été authentifié. (Acrobat Connect Pro vérifie ces arguments par une requête à la base de données.)MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 83 Stratégies Si la requête n'inclut pas la chaîne session ou le cookie BREEZESESSION, l'utilisateur doit se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour connecter un utilisateur, placez l'identifiant unique (dans ce cas, l'adresse électronique) dans le champ HTTP_AUTH_HEADER et redirigez la requête vers la page de connexion de Connect Pro. Le code suivant est un routeur F5 iRule placé dans le profil HTTPS qui gère les requêtes : set id [SSL::sessionid] set the_cert [session lookup ssl $id] set uname [X509::subject $the_cert] set emailAddr [getfield $uname "emailAddress=" 2] if { [HTTP::cookie exists BREEZESESSION] } { set cookie_payload [HTTP::cookie value BREEZESESSION] } elseif { [HTTP::uri] contains "/system/login" } { # Connection has been redirected to the "login page" # The email address has been parsed from the certificate # HTTP::header insert hah_login $emailAddr } elseif { [HTTP::uri] contains "session" } { #do nothing, Acrobat Connect Pro verifies the token found in session=$token } else { # URI encode the current request, and pass it to # the Acrobat Connect Pro system login page because the client # does not have a session yet. HTTP::redirect https://[HTTP::host]/system/login/ok?next=[URI::encode https://[HTTP::host][HTTP::uri]] } Voir aussi « Démarrage et arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server » à la page 88 Sécurisation de l'infrastructure Sécurité du réseau Pour ses communications, Acrobat Connect Pro s'appuie sur plusieurs services TCP/IP privés. Ces services ouvrent plusieurs ports et canaux qui doivent être protégés des utilisateurs extérieurs. Acrobat Connect Pro exige que vous placiez les ports sensibles derrière un pare-feu. Le pare-feu doit prendre en charge l'inspection de paquets avec état (pas seulement le filtrage des paquets). Une option du pare-feu doit permettre de « refuser tous les services par défaut à l'exception des services autorisés explicitement ». Le pare-feu doit être au moins un pare-feu à double interface (au moins deux interfaces réseau). Cette architecture permet d'éviter que des utilisateurs non autorisés ne contournent la sécurité du pare-feu. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 84 Stratégies La solution la plus simple pour sécuriser Acrobat Connect Pro consiste à bloquer tous les ports du serveur à l'exception des ports 80, 1935 et 443. Un pare-feu matériel externe offre un niveau de protection pour pallier les défectuosités du système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez configurer plusieurs couches de pare-feu matériel pour former des zones démilitarisées (DMZ). Si votre service informatique applique scrupuleusement tous les patchs de sécurité de Microsoft au serveur, il est possible de configurer un pare-feu logiciel pour assurer une sécurité supplémentaire. Accès Intranet Si certains de vos utilisateurs doivent accéder à Acrobat Connect Pro sur votre réseau Intranet, il est préférable de placer les serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro et leur base de données sur un sous-réseau distinct, isolé par un pare-feu. Le segment de réseau interne sur lequel est installé Acrobat Connect Pro doit utiliser des adresses IP privées (10.0.0.0/8, 172.16.0.0/12 ou 192.168.0.0/16) afin qu'il soit encore plus difficile pour un attaquant éventuel d'acheminer le trafic vers une adresse IP publique et depuis l'adresse IP réseau traduite en adresse IP interne. Pour plus d'informations, voir la rubrique RFC 1918. La configuration de ce pare-feu doit tenir compte de tous les ports d'Acrobat Connect Pro et de leur paramétrage pour un trafic entrant ou sortant. Sécurité du serveur de base de données Que vous hébergiez ou non votre base de données sur le même serveur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro, vous devez la protéger. Les ordinateurs hébergeant une base de données doivent être physiquement placés en un lieu protégé. Vous devez prendre les précautions supplémentaires suivantes : • Installez la base de données dans la zone sécurisée de l'Intranet de votre société. • Ne connectez jamais directement la base de données à Internet. • Sauvegardez régulièrement toutes les données et stockez les copies dans un emplacement protégé hors site. • Installez les derniers patchs publiés pour votre serveur de base de données. • Utilisez des connexions SQL fiables. Pour plus d'informations sur la sécurisation de SQL Server, rendez-vous sur le site Web consacré à la sécurité de Microsoft SQL. Création de comptes de service La création d'un compte de service pour Acrobat Connect Pro vous permet d'exécuter Acrobat Connect Pro de façon plus sécurisée. Adobe recommande la création d'un compte de service et d'un compte de service SQL Server 2005 Express Edition pour Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations, consultez les articles de Microsoft « Comment faire pour modifier le compte de service de SQL Server ou de l'Agent SQL Server sans utiliser SQL Enterprise Manager dans SQL Server 2000 ou le Gestionnaire de configuration SQL Server dans SQL Server 2005 » et « Le guide de la planification de la sécurité des services et des comptes de service ». Création d'un compte de service 1 Créez un compte local appelé ConnectService et ne comprenant aucun groupe par défaut. 2 Définissez les services Adobe Connect Enterprise Server, Flash Media Administration Server et Flash Media Server (FMS) sur ce nouveau compte. 3 Définissez un « Contrôle total » pour la clé de registre suivante : HKLM\SYSTEM\ControlSet001\Control\MediaProperties\PrivateProperties\Joystick\Winmm 4 Définissez un « Contrôle total » sur les dossiers NTFS du chemin du dossier racine d'Acrobat Connect Pro (C:\breeze, par défaut). MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 85 Stratégies Les sous-dossiers et les fichiers doivent disposer des mêmes autorisations. Dans le cas de clusters, modifiez les chemins correspondants sur chaque nœud d'ordinateur. 5 Définissez les droits de connexion suivants pour le compte ConnectService : Ouvrir une session en tant que service—SeServiceLogonRight Création d'un compte de service SQL Server 2005 Express Edition 1 Créez un compte local appelé ConnectSqlService et ne comprenant aucun groupe par défaut. 2 Remplacez le compte de service SQL Server 2005 Express Edition Service Account de LocalSystem à ConnectSqlService. 3 Définissez un « Contrôle total » de ConnectSqlService pour les clés de registre suivantes : HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Clients\Mail HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server\80 HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server\[databaseInstanceName] Pour les clusters, suivez cette procédure pour chaque nœud du cluster. L'autorisation Contrôle total s'applique à toutes les clés enfants d'une instance de base de données nommée. 4 Définissez un « Contrôle total » de ConnectSqlService pour les dossiers de la base de données. Les sous-dossiers et les fichiers doivent également disposer des mêmes autorisations. Dans le cas de clusters, modifiez les chemins correspondants sur chaque nœud d'ordinateur. 5 Définissez les droits d'utilisateur suivants pour le service ConnectSqlService : Agir comme faisant partie du système d'exploitation—SeTcbPrivilege Outrepasser le contrôle de parcours— SeChangeNotify Verrouiller les pages en mémoire—SeLockMemory Ouvrir une session en tant que tâche— SeBatchLogonRight Ouvrir une session en tant que service—SeServiceLogonRight Remplacer un jeton au niveau du processus—SeAssignPrimaryTokenPrivilege Sécurisation des installations à serveur unique La procédure suivante résume le processus de configuration et de sécurisation d'Acrobat Connect Pro sur un ordinateur unique. Elle part du principe que la base de données est installée sur le même ordinateur et que les utilisateurs accèdent à Acrobat Connect Pro via Internet. 1. Installez un pare-feu. Si vous autorisez les utilisateurs à se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro via Internet, le serveur est à la merci des pirates informatiques. Un pare-feu vous permettra de bloquer l'accès au serveur et de contrôler les communications entre celui-ci et Internet. 2. Configurez le pare-feu. Après avoir installé votre pare-feu, configurez-le comme suit : • Ports d’entrée (depuis Internet) : 80, 443, 1935. • Ports de sortie (vers le serveur de messagerie) : 25. • Utilisez le protocole TCP/IP uniquement. La base de données étant située sur le même serveur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro, il n'est pas nécessaire d'ouvrir le port 1434 sur le pare-feu.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 86 Stratégies 3. Installez Acrobat Connect Pro. 4. Vérifiez le bon fonctionnement des applications Acrobat Connect Pro. Après avoir installé Acrobat Connect Pro, vérifiez qu'il fonctionne correctement depuis Internet et depuis votre réseau local. 5. Testez le pare-feu. Une fois que vous avez installé et configuré le pare-feu, vérifiez qu'il fonctionne correctement. Testez le pare-feu en tentant d'utiliser les ports bloqués. Sécurisation des clusters Les systèmes de clusters (multi-serveurs) sont par nature plus complexes que les configurations à serveur unique. Un cluster Acrobat Connect Pro peut être situé dans un centre de données ou réparti géographiquement dans plusieurs centres d'exploitation du réseau. Vous pouvez installer et configurer les serveurs qui hébergent Connect Pro dans plusieurs sites et les synchroniser par l'intermédiaire d'une réplication de la base de données. Remarque : les clusters doivent utiliser Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition, et non le moteur de base de données intégré. Conseils importants pour la sécurisation des clusters : Réseaux privés La solution la plus simple pour les clusters situés sur le même site consiste à créer un sous-réseau supplémentaire pour le système Acrobat Connect Pro. Cette méthode offre un haut niveau de sécurité. Pare-feux logiciels locaux Pour les serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro situés dans un cluster, mais partageant un réseau public avec d'autres serveurs, un pare-feu logiciel installé sur chaque serveur peut être approprié. Systèmes VPN Dans les installations multi-serveurs hébergeant Acrobat Connect Pro dans des sites différents, vous pouvez envisager d'utiliser un canal chiffré pour communiquer avec les serveurs distants. De nombreux fournisseurs proposent des technologies VPN permettant de sécuriser les communications avec les serveurs distants. Si le trafic des données doit être chiffré, Acrobat Connect Pro s'appuie sur cette sécurité externe. Ressources et conseils en matière de sécurité Recommandations en matière de sécurité La liste de contrôle suivante propose des recommandations pour la sécurisation de votre système Acrobat Connect Pro. Protéger le trafic réseau par SSL Vous pouvez sécuriser la connexion avec le serveur de réunions, le serveur d'applications ou les deux. Exécuter les services nécessaires uniquement N’exécutez pas d’applications, telles qu’un contrôleur de domaine, un serveur Web ou un serveur FTP, sur le même ordinateur qu'Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour minimiser les risques qu'une autre application soit utilisée pour compromettre le serveur, réduisez le nombre d'applications et de services exécutés sur l'ordinateur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro. Mettre à jour la sécurité du système d'exploitation Vérifiez régulièrement la publication de mises à jour critiques corrigeant des failles de sécurité et appliquez les correctifs requis. Un pare-feu élimine certains de ces problèmes de sécurité. De façon générale, il est préférable d'appliquer à vos serveurs tous les correctifs de sécurité publiés et approuvés par Microsoft et les fournisseurs des autres plates-formes concernées. MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 87 Stratégies Sécuriser les systèmes hôtes Si vous stockez des informations « sensibles » sur vos serveurs, veillez à la protection physique de vos systèmes. Acrobat Connect Pro dépend de la sécurisation de l’ordinateur hôte. Les serveurs doivent donc être protégés contre les intrusions s’ils contiennent des données personnelles et confidentielles. Acrobat Connect Pro est conçu pour tirer parti des fonctionnalités natives de l’environnement, telles que le chiffrement du système de fichiers. Utiliser des mots de passe difficiles à déchiffrer Des mots de passe difficiles à déchiffrer protègent les données. Les administrateurs d'Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent définir des stratégies de mot de passe et de connexion dans Connect Pro Central. Les installations Acrobat Connect Pro utilisent souvent Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition, qui requiert également une protection par des mots de passe difficiles à déchiffrer. Utilisation d'une connexion LDAP ou d'une connexion unique pour l'authentification Il est recommandé d'utiliser une connexion LDAP ou une connexion unique pour l'authentification de Connect Pro. Si vous n'utilisez pas de connexion LDAP ni de connexion unique, assurez-vous que les utilisateurs finaux n'utilisent pas le même mot de passe pour Connect Pro que pour d'autres systèmes d'entreprise. Effectuer des audits de la sécurité réguliers Il est recommandé d’effectuer régulièrement des audits des systèmes informatiques pour vérifier que toutes les mesures de sécurité prises fonctionnent comme prévu. Vous pouvez par exemple tester un pare-feu à l'aide d'un scanner de ports. Références et ressources sur la sécurité Les ressources suivantes peuvent vous aider à sécuriser vos serveurs. Sécurisation du réseau L'Institut SANS (System Administration, Networking, and Security) est une organisation de coopération à vocation de recherche et de formation, constituée d’administrateurs système, de professionnels de la sécurité et d'administrateurs réseau. Cet institut propose des cours sur la sécurité des réseaux, ainsi qu’une certification en sécurité réseau. Sécurisation de SQL Server La page relative aux ressources de sécurité Microsoft SQL du site Web de Microsoft fournit des informations sur la sécurisation de SQL Server. Outils NMap est une puissante application de scanner qui signale tous les ports ouverts sur un ordinateur. Il est disponible gratuitement au titre de la licence publique GNU (GPL). Remarque : l’efficacité de toute mesure de sécurité dépend de nombreux facteurs, tels que les fonctions de sécurité assurées par le serveur et les logiciels de sécurité que vous avez installés. Le logiciel Acrobat Connect Pro n'est pas conçu pour assurer la sécurité de votre serveur et des informations qu'il renferme. Pour plus d'informations, consultez l'avis d'exonération de responsabilité de garantie, dans le contrat de licence applicable fourni avec Acrobat Connect Pro.88 Chapitre 5 : Administration de Connect Pro Server L'administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server comprend les opérations suivantes : • Gestion et surveillance de fichiers journaux pour gérer le temps de disponibilité du système • Gestion de l'espace disque • Sauvegarde de données • Elaboration et génération de rapports sur l'utilisation Démarrage et arrêt des serveurs Démarrage et arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Server Vous pouvez démarrer ou arrêter Acrobat Connect Pro via le menu Démarrer, la fenêtre Services ou la ligne de commande. Vérifiez que la base de données est en cours d'exécution avant de démarrer Connect Pro Server. Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro via le menu Démarrer 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Central Application Server. 2 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Meeting Server. Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro via le menu Démarrer 1 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Meeting Server. 2 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Central Application Server. Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Arrêtez le service Adobe Connect Enterprise Service. 3 Arrêtez le service Flash Media Server (FMS). 4 Arrêtez le service Flash Media Administration Server. Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Démarrez le service Flash Media Server (FMS).MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 89 Administration de Connect Pro Server 3 Démarrez le service Flash Media Server Administration Server. 4 Démarrez le service Adobe Connect Enterprise Service. Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro via la ligne de commande 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Exécuter pour ouvrir la fenêtre Exécuter. Entrez cmd pour ouvrir une invite de commande. 2 Allez dans le répertoire breeze\appserv\win32. 3 Entrez la commande suivante pour arrêter Acrobat Connect Pro : net stop ConnectPro 4 Pour arrêter Flash Media Server, tapez : net stop FMS 5 Pour arrêter Flash Media Server Administration Server, tapez : net stop FMSAdmin Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro via la ligne de commande 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Exécuter pour ouvrir la fenêtre Exécuter. Entrez cmd pour ouvrir une invite de commande. 2 Allez dans le répertoire breeze\appserv\win32. 3 Pour démarrer Flash Media Server, tapez : net start FMS 4 Pour démarrer Flash Media Server Administration Server, tapez : net start FMSAdmin 5 Entrez la commande suivante pour démarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : net start ConnectPro Démarrage et arrêt de Connect Pro Presence Service Vous pouvez arrêter et démarrer Connect Pro Presence Service dans le menu Démarrer ou dans la fenêtre Services. Ne démarrez Connect Pro Presence Service que si votre système Acrobat Connect Pro est intégré à Microsoft Live Communications Server ou à Office Communications Server. Voir aussi « Intégration à Microsoft Live Communications Server 2005 et Microsoft Office Communications Server 2007 » à la page 52 Arrêt du service de présence via le menu Démarrer ? Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Presence Service. Lancement du service de présence via le menu Démarrer ? Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Presence Service.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 90 Administration de Connect Pro Server Arrêt, démarrage ou redémarrage du service de présence via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Sélectionnez Connect Pro Presence Service. 3 Sélectionnez Démarrer, Arrêter ou Redémarrer le service. Démarrage et arrêt de Flash Media Gateway Vous pouvez démarrer et arrêter Flash Media Gateway depuis la fenêtre Services ou depuis la ligne de commande. Vérifiez que Connect Pro Server est exécuté avant de lancer Flash Media Gateway. Démarrage et arrêt de Flash Media Gateway depuis la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Sélectionnez le service Flash Media Gateway. 3 Sélectionnez Démarrer, Arrêter ou Redémarrer le service Démarrage et arrêt de Flash Media Gateway depuis la ligne de commande 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Exécuter pour ouvrir la fenêtre Exécuter. Entrez cmd pour ouvrir une invite de commande. 2 Pour démarrer Flash Media Gateway, tapez : net start fmg 3 Pour arrêter Flash Media Gateway, tapez : net stop fmg Démarrage et arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server Vous pouvez démarrer ou arrêter Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7 via le menu Démarrer, la fenêtre Services ou la ligne de commande. Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7 via le menu Démarrer ? Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Edge Server. Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7 via le menu Démarrer ? Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Edge Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Edge Server. Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server 7 via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Arrêtez le service Flash Media Server (FMS). 3 Arrêtez le service Flash Media Server Administration Server.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 91 Administration de Connect Pro Server Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server via la fenêtre Services 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Outils d'administration > Services pour ouvrir la fenêtre Services. 2 Démarrez le service Flash Media Server Administration Server. 3 Démarrez le service Flash Media Server (FMS). Arrêt d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server via la ligne de commande 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Exécuter pour ouvrir la fenêtre Exécuter. Entrez cmd pour ouvrir une invite de commande. 2 Pour arrêter Flash Media Server, tapez : net stop FMS 3 Pour arrêter Flash Media Server Administrator Server, tapez : net stop FMSAdmin Démarrage d'Acrobat Connect Pro Edge Server via la ligne de commande 1 Choisissez Démarrer > Exécuter pour ouvrir la fenêtre Exécuter. Entrez cmd pour ouvrir une invite de commande. 2 Pour démarrer Flash Media Server Administrator Server, tapez : net start FMSAdmin 3 Pour démarrer Flash Media Server, tapez : net start FMS Gestion et contrôle des fichiers journaux A propos des fichiers journaux Utilisez les fichiers journaux Acrobat Connect Pro Server pour consulter les informations sur les événements qui se produisent pendant le fonctionnement. Vous pouvez utiliser ces informations pour créer des mécanismes de surveillance et des rapports, et pour résoudre des problèmes. Les fichiers journaux donnent des informations sur les activités des utilisateurs et sur les performances du serveur. Par exemple, les fichiers journaux peuvent indiquer pourquoi un utilisateur s'est vu refuser l'accès alors qu'il tentait de se connecter, ou les raisons de l'interruption des communications téléphoniques. Acrobat Connect Pro Server compte 5 fichiers journaux stockés dans le dossier RootInstallationFolder\logs. Pour surveiller Acrobat Connect Pro, utilisez les fichiers access.log et error.log. Les trois autres fichiers journaux sont des fichiers internes qui n'ont pas d'impact sur le fonctionnement du système. access.log Contient des informations sur les tentatives de connexion au serveur. breeze.log Contient des informations sur le lancement, ou non, de l'application ConnectPro.exe. error.log Contient des informations sur les problèmes liés au système. service-err.log Contient les erreurs de démarrage et d'application. service-out.log Contient les messages STDOUT et STDERR générés par la machine virtuelle Java (JVM).MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 92 Administration de Connect Pro Server Exemple d'entrée de fichier journal L'exemple d'entrée ci-après, issu du fichier journal access.log, comprend un en-tête, une liste des champs utilisés dans l'entrée et des données spécifiques à cette entrée : #Version: 1.0 #Start-Date: 2006-10-30 17:09:24 PDT #Software: Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 #Date: 2006-04-30 #Fields: date time x-comment x-module x-status x-severity x-category x-user x-access-request time-taken db-logical-io db-transaction-update-count 2006-10-30 18:12:50 Not logged in. PRINCIPAL NO_ACCESS_NO_LOGIN W A PUBLIC {cookie=breezxnb5pqusyshfgttt, ip=138.1.21.100} GET http://joeuser.macromedia.com&mode=xml 0 20/5 0 Le tableau suivant explique cet exemple. Rotation de fichiers journaux Il est possible d'utiliser les fichiers journaux access.log et error.log en rotation. Modifiez les valeurs par défaut des paramètres suivants dans le fichier custom.ini (chemin d'accès par défaut : RootInstallationFolder\custom.ini) \custom.ini) afin de spécifier la fréquence de rotation des fichiers journaux : ACCESS_LOG_ROTATE_DAYS=1.0 ACCESS_LOG_ROTATE_KEEP=7 ERROR_LOG_ROTATE_DAYS=1.0 ERROR_LOG_ROTATE_KEEP=7 Les paramètres *_DAYS déterminent la fréquence de rotation en jours des fichiers journaux. Pour une demi-journée, utilisez la valeur 0.5. Les paramètres *_KEEP indiquent pendant combien de jours les fichiers journaux sont conservés avant leur suppression. Par défaut, les fichiers journaux sont conservés une semaine. Champ Données Description date 2006-10-30 La date à laquelle l'événement consigné s'est produit. time 18:12:50 L'heure à laquelle l'événement consigné s'est produit. x-comment Not logged in. Indique qu'un utilisateur n'a pas pu se connecter au serveur d'application. x-module PRINCIPAL L'événement s'est produit dans le module Principal du serveur d'application. x-status NO_ACCESS_NO_LOGIN Indique que l'utilisateur n'a pas pu se connecter. x-severity W Indique que l'événement est un avertissement (W pour « warning »). x-category A Indique que l'événement représente un problème d'accès (A) (et qu'il apparaît donc dans le fichier journal access.log). x-user PUBLIC L'utilisateur actuel ; dans ce cas, un invité non identifié ou un utilisateur public. x-access-request http://joeuser.macromedia. com&mode=xml La source de la requête. time-taken 0 La durée de traitement de cette requête est nulle. db-logical-io 20/5 La requête a nécessité 20 consultations dans la base de données et 5 lignes de données ont été renvoyées. db-transaction-updatecount 0 Aucune ligne de données n'a été mise à jour pendant le traitement de la requête.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 93 Administration de Connect Pro Server Une fois le fichier custom.ini modifié, redémarrez le serveur d'application de Connect Pro Central. Format des fichiers journaux Les fichiers journaux utilisent le format de fichier journal W3CExtended qui est lisible dans n'importe quel éditeur de texte. Champs des fichiers journaux access.log et error.log Chaque entrée de fichier journal contient 11 champs qui fournissent des informations sur le type de l'événement consigné, l'endroit où il s'est produit, son degré de sévérité et d'autres données pertinentes. Entrées du champ Module Un module est un composant du serveur qui gère un certain nombre d'opérations connexes. Chaque module appartient soit au serveur d'applications, soit au serveur de réunions. Le champ x-module indique l'endroit où s'est produit l'événement consigné. Champ Format Description date AAAA/MM/JJ La date à laquelle la transaction s'est terminée. time HH:MM:SS L'heure du système local à laquelle la transaction s'est terminée. x-comment Chaîne Contient des informations intelligibles concernant l'entrée du fichier journal. Ce champ est toujours situé le plus à gauche possible. x-module Chaîne Indique l'endroit où s'est produite l'erreur. x-status Chaîne Indique le type d'événement qui est survenu. x-severity Texte (un caractère) Indique si le degré de sévérité de l'événement consigné : C pour « Critical » (critique), E pour « Error » (erreur), W pour « Warning » (avertissement) ou I pour « Information ». x-category Texte (un caractère) Indique si l'entrée du fichier journal représente un problème d'accès (A) ou système (S). x-user Chaîne Indique l'utilisateur actuel. S'applique uniquement si la valeur de x-category est (A) ; autrement, la valeur de ce champ est un tiret (-), pour indiquer qu'il est inutilisé. x-access-request Chaîne Indique la requête d'accès. Cette chaîne peut être une adresse URL ou le nom d'une API et un jeu de paramètres. S'applique uniquement si la valeur de x-category est (A) ; autrement, la valeur de ce champ est un tiret (-), pour indiquer qu'il est inutilisé. time-taken Chiffre La durée de traitement de la requête (en secondes). S'applique uniquement si la valeur de xcategory est (A) ; autrement, la valeur de ce champ est un tiret (-), pour indiquer qu'il est inutilisé. db-logical-io Chaîne Le nombre de consultations de la base de données nécessaires au traitement de la requête et le nombre de lignes renvoyées, présentés sous la forme /. db-transactionupdate-count Chaîne Le nombre de lignes mises à jour dans les transactions pendant le traitement de la requête. Si la requête comprend plusieurs transactions, cette valeur est la somme de toutes les lignes mises à jour. Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ x-module Description Serveur ACCESS_KEY Gère les clés d'accès. Serveur d'application ACCOUNT Gère les opérations liées aux comptes. Serveur d'application ACL Gère les opérations liées à la liste de contrôle d'accès. Serveur d'applicationMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 94 Administration de Connect Pro Server Entrées des champs Comment et Status Les champs x-comment et x-status indiquent le type de l'événement consigné. Le champ x-status fournit un code pour chaque événement du fichier journal. Le champ x-comment fournit une description intelligible de l'événement. Le tableau suivant répertorie les codes d'état, les commentaires associés à chaque code et une explication de chaque événement consigné. AICC Gère toutes les communications AICC entre le serveur et les contenus. Serveur d'application BUILDER Effectue les créations SCO. Serveur d'application Client Méthodes client. Serveur de réunions CLUSTER Gère toutes les opérations liées aux clusters. Serveur d'application CONSOLE Gère toutes les opérations liées à la console. Serveur d'application Content Module Partage. Serveur de réunions DB Représente la base de données. Serveur d'application EVENT Gère toutes les opérations liées aux événements. Serveur d'application HOSTED_MANAGER Gère les comptes système (création, mise à jour, suppression, paramétrage, etc.). Serveur d'application MEETING Gère toutes les opérations liées aux réunions. Serveur d'application Misc Module d'opérations diverses. Serveur de réunions NOTIFICATION Gère toutes les opérations liées aux e-mails. Serveur d'application PERMISSION Gère toutes les opérations liées aux autorisations. Serveur d'application Poll Module Sondage. Serveur de réunions PLATFORM_FRAMEWORK Représente le cadre d'application de la plateforme. Serveur d'application PRINCIPAL Gère toutes les opérations liées au module Principal. Serveur d'application REPORT Représente les rapports. Serveur d'application Room Gère le lancement et l'arrêt des salles de réunion. Serveur de réunions RTMP Représente le gestionnaire RTMPHandler. Serveur d'application SCO Gère toutes les opérations liées aux objets SCO. Serveur d'application SEARCH Gère toutes les opérations de recherche. Serveur d'application START_UP Représente le composant de démarrage. Serveur d'application TELEPHONY Gère toutes les opérations de téléphonie. Serveur d'application TRACKING Gère toutes les opérations liées aux transcriptions. Serveur d'application TRAINING Gère toutes les opérations liées aux formations. Serveur d'application Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ x-module Description ServeurMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 95 Administration de Connect Pro Server Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xstatus Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xcomment Description ACCESS_DENIED Client trying to access protected method. Access is denied. {1} Consigné lorsqu'une machine client tente d'accéder à une méthode protégée. BECAME_MASTER Server {1} has been designated the master. Consigné lorsque le planificateur se ferme et que le serveur considéré devient le planificateur. CLUSTER_CON_BROKEN Server {1} unable to reach {2} on port {3} to perform cluster operations. Consigné lorsqu'Acrobat Connect Pro est incapable de joindre un autre serveur du cluster. CLUSTER_FILE_TRANSFER_ERROR Unable to transfer {1} from server {2}. Consigné lorsqu'une erreur est renvoyée lors du transfert d'un fichier. CONNECT New client connecting: {1} Consigné lorsqu'une nouvelle machine client se connecte. CONNECT_WHILE_GC Connecting while the app is shutting down - forcing shutdown. Consigné lorsqu'une machine client tente de se connecter pendant la fermeture de l'application. DB_CONNECTION_ERROR Unable to connect to database {1}. Consigné lorsque Acrobat Connect ne parvient pas à établir une connexion à la base de données. DB_CONNECTION_TIME_OUT Timed out waiting for database connection. Consigné lorsque l'établissement de la connexion à la base de données prend trop de temps. DB_VERSION_ERROR Database {1} is incompatible with the current version of Acrobat Connect Pro. Consigné lorsque la base de données est obsolète. DISCONNECT A client is leaving. Details: {1} Consigné lorsqu'une machine client se déconnecte. EXT_ERROR External error thrown by a third party. Consigné lorsqu'un code externe renvoie une erreur. FMS_CON_BROKEN Health check failed due to broken FMS service connection. Consigné lorsqu'une connexion de service est rompue. FMS_NOT_FOUND Unable to connect to FMS at startup. Consigné lorsque Acrobat Connect ne peut établir de connexion de service au démarrage. INTERNAL_ERROR Internal error occurred. Consigné lorsqu'une erreur interne est renvoyée. INVALID - Consigné en cas de tentative d'opération non valide. INVALID_DUPLICATE Value {1} is a duplicate in the system. Consigné lorsque la valeur entrée est identique à une valeur présente dans le système. INVALID_FORMAT Field {1} of type {2} is invalid. La valeur spécifiée n'est pas valable pour ce champ. INVALID_ILLEGAL_OPERATION Illegal operation performed. L'opération requise est illégale.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 96 Administration de Connect Pro Server INVALID_ILLEGAL_PARENT - Consigné lorsqu'une liste de contrôle d'accès présente un parent non valide. Par exemple, si le dossier A se trouve à l'intérieur du dossier B, le dossier B ne peut se trouver dans le dossier A. INVALID_MISSING Field {1} of type {2} is missing. Il manque une valeur obligatoire pour ce champ. INVALID_NO_SUCH_ITEM Value {1} is an unknown in the system. L'élément requis n'existe pas. INVALID_RANGE The specified value must be between {1} and {2}. Consigné lorsque la valeur entrée est hors plage. INVALID_TELEPHONY_FIELD Telephony authentication values were not validated by the service provider. Le fournisseur de service n'est pas en mesure de valider le compte de téléphonie. INVALID_VALUE_GTE The specified value must be greater than or equal to {1}. Consigné lorsque la valeur entrée est hors plage. INVALID_VALUE_LTE The specified value must be less than or equal to {1}. Consigné lorsque la valeur entrée est hors plage. KILLING_LONG_CONNECTION Client has been in the room for 12 hours, disconnecting. Consigné lorsque la connexion à la machine client a été interrompue suite à l'expiration du délai défini. LICENSE_EXPIRED Your license has expired and your account will be disabled on {1}. Please upload a new license file through the console manager to continue using Acrobat Connect Pro. Consigné lorsque la licence Acrobat Connect Pro d'une machine client arrive à expiration et que l'accès est sur le point d'être coupé. LICENSE_EXPIRY_WARNING Your license will expire on {1}. Please upload a new license file through the console manager to continue using Acrobat Connect Pro. Consigné lorsque la période de validité de la licence est de 15 jours ou moins. MASTER_THREAD_TIMED_OUT Master thread has not reported progress in {1} milliseconds. Le thread du planificateur ne s'exécute pas. MEETING_BACKUP_END Server {1} is no longer the backup for room {2}. La sauvegarde de la réunion est arrivée à terme. MEETING_BACKUP_START Server {1} is now the backup for room {2}. La sauvegarde de la réunion a débuté. MEETING_FAILOVER Meeting {1} failed over to {2}. Consigné lorsqu'une réunion est reprise par ce serveur suite à un dysfonctionnement. MEETING_TMP_READ Meeting template {1} read for room {2}. Lecture du modèle à partir de la réunion. MEETING_TMP_WRITTEN Meeting template {1} written to room {2}. Ecriture du modèle pour la réunion. NO_ACCESS_ACCOUNT_EXPIRED Your account has expired. Le compte d'accès a expiré. NO_ACCESS_DENIED Permission check failed. Erreur de vérification des autorisations. NO_ACCESS_LEARNER No permission to take courses. L'utilisateur doit faire partie du groupe des stagiaires pour participer à un cours. NO_ACCESS_LEARNING_PATH_BLOCKED You have not fulfilled a prerequisite or preassessment. Erreur liée aux conditions ou évaluations préalables. NO_ACCESS_NO_EXTERNAL_USER_MODIFIC ATION External users cannot be modified. L'utilisateur n'est pas autorisé à modifier les utilisateurs LDAP. Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xstatus Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xcomment DescriptionMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 97 Administration de Connect Pro Server NO_ACCESS_NO_LICENSE_FILE Your license file has not been uploaded. Fichier de licence introuvable. NO_ACCESS_NO_LOGIN Not logged in. Erreur renvoyée lorsque l'utilisateur n'est pas connecté. NO_ACCESS_NO_QUOTA A {1} quota error occurred for account {2} with limit {3}. Quota dépassé. NO_ACCESS_NO_RETRY You have reached the max limit and can not take the course again. L'utilisateur a dépassé le nombre maximal de cours. NO_ACCESS_NO_SERVER Server not available Le serveur requis est indisponible. NO_ACCESS_NOT_AVAILABLE The requested resource is unavailable. Consigné lorsque la ressource requise est indisponible. NO_ACCESS_NOT_SECURE SSL request made on a non-SSL server. Une requête sécurisée a été effectuée sur un serveur non sécurisé. NO_ACCESS_PASSWORD_EXPIRED Your password has expired. Consigné lorsque le mot de passe utilisateur a expiré. NO_ACCESS_PENDING_ACTIVATION Your account has not been activated yet. Le compte n'est pas encore activé. NO_ACCESS_PENDING_LICENSE Your account activation is pending a license agreement. Le compte est inutilisable tant que le contrat de licence n'a pas été lu. NO_ACCESS_SCO_EXPIRED The course you tried to access is no longer available. La date de fin du cours est dépassée. NO_ACCESS_SCO_NOT_STARTED Course is not open yet. La date de début du cours n'est pas encore atteinte. NO_ACCESS_WRONG_ZONE Content accessed from wrong zone. Renvoyé lorsque l'accès au serveur s'effectue à partir d'une zone incorrecte. NO_DATA Permission check failed. La requête n'a renvoyé aucune donnée. NO_DISKSPACE Health check failed due to lack of disk space. Consigné lorsque l'espace disque réservé au compte est saturé. NOT_AVAILABLE Requested resource is not available. Erreur renvoyée lorsque la ressource est indisponible. OK - Requête traitée avec succès. OPERATION_SIZE_ERROR Operation too large to complete. Consigné lorsque l'opération ne peut aboutir en raison de sa taille. REQUEST_RETRY Unable to process request. Please try again. La requête a échoué. RESPONSE_ABORTED Client that made request is not available to receive response. Consigné lorsque l'utilisateur ferme le navigateur avant que le serveur ait pu renvoyer une réponse. RTMP_SVC_BLOCKED Acrobat Connect Pro service request blocked from {1} because the server has not fully started up yet. Une connexion de service a été requise à partir du module SCO mais le serveur est toujours en cours de démarrage. RTMP_SVC_CLOSED Acrobat Connect Pro service connection closed for {1}. La connexion de service a été fermée pour le module SCO. RTMP_SVC_REQUEST Acrobat Connect Pro service request received from {1}. Une connexion de service a été requise à partir du module SCO. Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xstatus Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xcomment DescriptionMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 98 Administration de Connect Pro Server Remarque : dans le tableau ci-dessus, {1} et {2} représentent des variables remplacées par une valeur dans l'entrée du fichier journal. Entrées du champ Severity Le champ x-severity indique le degré de sévérité d'une condition, ce qui vous aide à déterminer le niveau de réponse approprié. RTMP_SVC_START Acrobat Connect Pro service connection established with {1}. Une connexion de service a été établie avec le module SCO. SCRIPT_ERROR Run-Time Script Error. Details: {1} Consigné lorsqu'une erreur de script est détectée. SERVER_EXPIRED Health check failed due to server expiry (expiry date={1}, current time={2}). Consigné lorsque le contrôle de santé du serveur n'aboutit pas avant l'expiration du délai. SOME_ERRORS_TERMINATED Some actions terminated with an error. Consigné lorsqu'une erreur entraîne l'arrêt de certaines opérations. START_UP_ERROR Start up error: {1}. Consigné lorsqu'une exception est renvoyée lors du démarrage. START_UP_ERROR_UNKNOWN Unable to start up server. Acrobat Connect Pro might already be running. Consigné lorsqu'une erreur est renvoyée lors du démarrage. JRUN imprime l'erreur. TEL_CONNECTION_BROKEN Telephony connection {1} was unexpectedly broken. Consigné lorsque la connexion de téléphonie est rompue. TEL_CONNECTION_RECOVERY Telephony connection {1} was reattached to conference {2}. Consigné lorsque Acrobat Connect rétablit une connexion à la conférence. TEL_DOWNLOAD_FAILED Unable to download {1} for archive {2}. Consigné en cas d'expiration du délai pendant le téléchargement de fichier audio de téléphonie. TOO_MUCH_DATA Multiple rows unexpectedly returned. Consigné lorsqu'une opération renvoie plus de données que prévu. UNKNOWN_TYPE {1} Consigné lorsque le type de variable est inconnu. Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xstatus Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ xcomment DescriptionMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 99 Administration de Connect Pro Server Entrées du champ Category Le champ x-category indique si l'événement correspond à un problème d'accès (A) ou un problème système d'ordre général (S). Toutes les entrées de catégorie A apparaissent dans le fichier journal access.log et toutes les entrées de catégorie S dans le fichier journal error.log. Gestion de l'espace disque A propos de la gestion de l'espace disque Le système Acrobat Connect Pro doit avoir un minimum d'1 Go d'espace disponible. Acrobat Connect Pro n'intègre aucun outil de gestion de l'espace disque. Il appartient donc à l'administrateur d'utiliser des utilitaires du système d'exploitation ou des outils tiers pour surveiller l'espace disque disponible. Le contenu peut être stocké sur le serveur qui héberge Acrobat Connect Pro, sur des volumes de stockage externes, voire sur les deux. Voir aussi « Configuration du stockage partagé » à la page 46 Entrée de fichier journal pour x-severity Signification Action suggérée Exemple C Critique Configurez des outils de surveillance tiers afin d'activer des systèmes d'alerte lorsque survient une entrée de fichier journal présentant ce degré de sévérité. Impossible de joindre la base de données. Impossible de démarrer ou d'achever un processus. Le système connaît un dysfonctionnement. E Erreur Configurez des outils de surveillance tiers afin d'envoyer un message électronique lorsque survient une entrée de fichier journal présentant ce degré de sévérité. Impossible de joindre Adobe® Premiere®. Echec de la conversion. Un dysfonctionnement concerne un utilisateur ou un compte, mais pas l'intégralité du système. W Avertissement Générez et consultez des rapports périodiques afin d'identifier les améliorations du produit ou des fonctions à envisager. L'utilisation du disque ou de la mémoire dépasse le seuil spécifié. I Infos Consultez les entrées des fichiers journaux à des fins d'audit et de contrôle RCA. Serveur démarré, arrêté ou redémarré. Entrée de fichier journal pour le champ x-category Signification Description A accès Le code d'état correspond à un problème d'accès. Consigné dans le fichier journal access.log. S système Le code d'état correspond à un problème système. Consigné dans le fichier journal error.log.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 100 Administration de Connect Pro Server Gestion de l'espace disque sur des serveurs Acrobat Connect Pro ? Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Utilisez Connect Pro Central pour supprimer du contenu inutilisé. Reportez-vous à Suppression d'un fichier ou d'un dossier. • Remplacez votre disque serveur par un disque de plus grande capacité. Remarque : si l'espace disque disponible sur le serveur passe sous la barre de 1 Go, le serveur cesse de fonctionner. Gestion de l'espace disque sur des périphériques de stockage partagé ? Vérifiez si le périphérique de stockage partagé principal dispose de suffisamment d'espace libre et de nœuds de système de fichiers. Si l'une de ces deux valeurs passe sous la barre des 10 %, augmentez l'espace de stockage du périphérique ou ajoutez un autre périphérique de stockage partagé. Remarque : la valeur recommandée est de 10 %. Si vous utilisez un stockage partagé, veuillez également définir une valeur de taille de cache maximale dans la console de gestion des applications, sans quoi le cache risque d'occuper tout l'espace disque. Effacement du cache Edge Server Adobe recommande de créer une tâche planifiée hebdomadaire pour effacer la mémoire cache des serveurs Edge. Il est judicieux d'exécuter cette tâche pendant les heures non travaillées, par exemple le dimanche matin. 1 Créez un fichier cache.bat afin de supprimer le répertoire de cache. L'entrée de ce fichier doit respecter la syntaxe suivante : del /Q /S [cache directory]\*.* Le répertoire cache par défaut se trouve à l'emplacement C:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\cache\http. Pour effacer le cache, utilisez la commande suivante : del /Q /S c:\breeze\edgeserver\win32\cache\http\*.* 2 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Connect Pro Edge Server 7 > Arrêter Connect Pro Edge Server. 3 Exécutez le fichier cache.bat et vérifiez qu'il permet la suppression des fichiers présents dans le répertoire cache. Remarque : la structure du répertoire est conservée et tout fichier verrouillé par le Edge Server n'est pas effacé. 4 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Connect Pro Edge Server 7 > Démarrer Connect Pro Edge Server. 5 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Tâches planifiées > Ajouter une tâche planifiée. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier cache.bat en tant que nouveau fichier à exécuter. 7 Recommencez la procédure pour chaque Edge Server. Sauvegarde de données A propos de la sauvegarde de données Il y a trois catégories de données que vous devez sauvegarder régulièrement : le contenu (tout fichier stocké dans les bibliothèques), les paramètres de configuration et les données de base de données.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 101 Administration de Connect Pro Server Si vous n'utilisez pas de périphériques de stockage partagé, tout le contenu des bibliothèques est stocké dans le dossier DossierInstallationRacine\content (C:\breeze\content, par défaut). Les paramètres de configuration sont stockés dans le fichier custom.ini situé dans le dossier d'installation racine (C:\breeze, par défaut). L'exécution d'une copie de sauvegarde de la base de données crée une copie des données stockées dans la base de données. La planification de sauvegardes régulières de la base de données vous permet de récupérer à la suite de nombreuses pannes, dont des défaillances de support, des erreurs utilisateur et la perte définitive d'un serveur. Sauvegardez quotidiennement la base de données. Vous pouvez également utiliser des sauvegardes pour copier une base de données d'un serveur sur un autre. Vous pouvez recréer la base de données complète à partir d'une sauvegarde en une seule étape, en restaurant la base de données. Le processus de restauration écrase la base de données existante ou crée la base de données si elle n'existe pas. La base de données rétablie correspond à l'état de la base de données au moment où la copie de sauvegarde a été effectuée, sans compter les transactions libres. Vous créez des copies de sauvegarde sur des périphériques prévus à cet effet (disque ou bande). Vous pouvez utiliser un utilitaire SQL Server pour configurer vos sauvegardes. Par exemple, vous pouvez écraser des sauvegardes obsolètes ou annexer de nouvelles copies de sauvegarde au support. Suivez les recommandations d'usage en ce qui concerne la sauvegarde de la base de données : • Planifier une sauvegarde pendant la nuit. • Conserver les sauvegardes dans un endroit sûr, de préférence dans un endroit différent du site où se trouvent les données. • Conserver les anciennes sauvegardes pendant un certain temps au cas où la sauvegarde la plus récente serait endommagée, détruite ou perdue. • Etablir un système pour écraser les sauvegardes en réutilisant les plus anciennes en premier. Utiliser des dates d'expiration sur les sauvegardes pour éviter l'écrasement prématuré. • Etiqueter les supports de sauvegarde afin d'identifier les données et d'empêcher l'effacement de sauvegardes essentielles. Utilisez des utilitaires SQL Server pour sauvegarder la base de données : • Transact-SQL • SQL Distributed Management Objects (DMO) • Assistant de création d'une sauvegarde de base de données • SQL Server Management Studio Sauvegarde de fichiers serveur Sauvegardez et protégez les données système de la même manière que toutes les données de valeur de votre société. Il est judicieux de planifier cette opération pendant la nuit. 1 Procédez comme suit pour arrêter Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter le service Connect Pro Central. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Arrêter le service de réunion Connect Pro. 2 Sauvegardez le répertoire de contenu. L'emplacement par défaut est C:\breeze.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 102 Administration de Connect Pro Server 3 Sauvegardez le fichier custom.ini. L'emplacement par défaut est C:\breeze\. 4 Procédez comme suit pour démarrer Acrobat Connect Pro : a Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer le service de réunion Connect Pro. b Sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 > Démarrer le service Connect Pro Central. Sauvegarde de la base de données Pour sauvegarder une édition de Microsoft SQL Server, vous pouvez utiliser Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio ou la fenêtre d'invite de commande. L'édition de SQL Server qui s'installe avec Connect Pro Server ne comprend pas SQL Server Management Studio. Vous pouvez toutefois télécharger Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express de Microsoft. Utilisation de SQL Server Management Studio pour sauvegarder SQL Server Important : ne désinstallez pas la base de données. 1 Sous Windows, sélectionnez Démarrer > Programmes > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > SQL Server Management Studio. 2 Dans l'arborescence de la fenêtre de l'explorateur d'objets, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris (nommé « breeze », par défaut) et choisissez Tâches > Sauvegarder... Remarque : pour des instructions complètes sur la sauvegarde et le rétablissement de la base de données SQL Server, consultez le site du support technique de Microsoft. Utilisation de la fenêtre d'invite de commande pour sauvegarder SQL Server Pour accéder aux informations d'aide sur les commandes de base de données, tapez osql ? à l'invite DOS, puis appuyez sur Entrée. Important : ne désinstallez pas la base de données. 1 Connectez-vous au serveur hébergeant Connect Pro Server. 2 Créez un dossier pour stocker les fichiers de sauvegarde de la base de données. Cet exemple utilise le dossier C:\Connect_Database. 3 Sélectionnez Démarrer > Exécuter, tapez cmd dans la zone Ouvrir, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 A l'invite, indiquez le répertoire dans lequel vous avez installé la base de données. Le répertoire par défaut est c:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\90\Tools\Binn. 5 A l'invite , entrez osql -E pour vous connecter au moteur de base de données et appuyez ensuite sur Entrée. 6 Entrez BACKUP DATABASE nom de la base de données TO DISK = 'C:\Connect_Database\Nom_base de données.bak' pour exécuter un utilitaire Microsoft SQL qui sauvegarde la base de données Connect, puis appuyez sur Entrée. Le nom de la base de données par défaut est breeze . 7 A l'invite, tapez go et appuyez sur Entrée. Le fenêtre de commande affiche des messages relatifs à la sauvegarde.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 103 Administration de Connect Pro Server 8 A l'invite, tapez quit et appuyez sur Entrée. 9 Pour vérifier que la sauvegarde a réussi, assurez-vous que le fichier breeze.bak est bien présent dans le répertoire C:\Connect_Database. 10 Pour redémarrer votre base de données, depuis le bureau de Windows, choisissez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Outils d’administration > Services. Dans la fenêtre Services, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur SQL Server (MSSQLSERVER) et choisissez Démarrer dans le menu contextuel. Elaboration de rapports personnalisés Elaboration de rapports personnalisés à l'aide de schémas en étoile Acrobat Connect Pro stocke les informations sur les utilisateurs, le contenu, les cours et les réunions dans une base de données. L'activité des utilisateurs fournit les données de la base. Vous pouvez utiliser des outils tels que Adobe® ColdFusion® Studio et Business Objects Crystal Reports pour interroger des schémas en étoile et afficher les données correspondantes. D'autres outils de type SQL sont également utilisables, tel SQL Query Analyser. Les applications Acrobat Connect Pro suivantes permettent de produire des rapports à partir des données disponibles : Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Participation, durée et contenu des réunions. Adobe Presenter Affichage de contenus, de diapositives et de présentations. Acrobat Connect Pro Training Informations destinées à la gestion des cours, telles que des statistiques sur les participants, sur l'affichage des contenus et les résultats des questionnaires. Remarque : vous pouvez en outre exécuter des rapports à partir de l'interface Web Connect Pro Central, puis les consulter en ligne ou les télécharger au format CSV. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la section Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central. Fait SCO Colonne Description dim_sco_details_sco_id Identifiant SCO dim_sco_details_sco_version Version SCO max_retries Nombre maximal de tentatives owner_user_id Identifiant utilisateur du propriétaire SCO disk_usage_kb Utilisation du disque en kilo-octets passing_score Note de césure max_possible_score Note maximale possible views Nombre de visualisations unique_viewers Nombre d'utilisateurs ayant visionné le SCO au moins une fois slides Nombre de diapositives questions Nombre de questions max_score Note maximaleMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 104 Administration de Connect Pro Server Détails SCO min_score Note minimale average_score Note moyenne average_passing_score Note de césure moyenne total_registered Note d'échec moyenne total_participants Nombre total d'utilisateurs inscrits account_id Nombre total de participants Colonne Description sco_id Identifiant SCO sco_version Version SCO sco_name Nom sco_description Description sco_type Type SCO sco_int_type Type d'entier is_content Le SCO est-il un SCO de contenu ? url URL parent_name Nom du SCO parent parent_sco_id Identifiant du SCO parent parent_type Type du SCO parent date_sco_created Date de création date_sco_modified Date de modification sco_start_date Date de début sco_end_date Date de fin version_start_date Date de début de la version version_end_date Date de fin de la version sco_tag_id Identifiant de balise passing_score Note de césure max_possible_score Note maximale possible linked_sco_id Identifiant du SCO lié linked_type Type de SCO lié owner_user_id Identifiant de l'utilisateur propriétaire storage_bytes_kb Volume de stockage en kilo-octets account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne DescriptionMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 105 Administration de Connect Pro Server Fait d'activité Détails d'activité Colonne Description dim_activity_details_activity_id Identifiant d'activité score Note passed Réussi completed Achevé peak_session_users Pic d'utilisation de la session number_correct Nombre de réponses correctes number_incorrect Nombre de réponses incorrectes number_of_questions Nombre de questions number_of_responses Nombre de réponses account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description activity_id Identifiant d'activité dim_sco_details_sco_id Identifiant SCO dim_sco_details_sco_version Version SCO dim_users_user_id Identifiant utilisateur dim_sco_details_parent_sco_id Identifiant du SCO parent score Note passed Réussi completed Achevé activity_type Type d'activité role Rôle date_activity_started Date de début d'activité date_activity_finished Date de fin d'activité dim_cost_center_id Identifiant du centre de coûts cost_center_audit_id Identifiant d'audit session_start_date Date de début de la session session_end_date Date de fin de la session attendance_activity Est une activité de participation ? session_id Identifiant de session account_id Identifiant de compteMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 106 Administration de Connect Pro Server Examens de curriculums Conditions préalables du curriculum Conditions d'accomplissement requises pour le curriculum Fait d'affichage en diapositives Colonne Description dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_id Identifiant du curriculum dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_version Version du curriculum test_out_subject_sco_id Identifiant du SCO objet test_out_target_sco_id Identifiant du SCO cible test_out_type Type d'examen account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_id Identifiant du curriculum dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_version Version du curriculum pre_requisite_subject_sco_id Identifiant du SCO objet pre_requisite_target_sco_id Identifiant du SCO cible pre_requisite_type Type de la condition préalable account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_id Identifiant du curriculum dim_sco_details_curriculum_sco_version Version du curriculum completion_subject_sco_id Identifiant du SCO objet completion_target_sco_id Identifiant du SCO cible completion_requirement_type Type de conditions d'accomplissement requises account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_slide_view_details_slide_view_id Identifiant de l'affichage en diapositives dim_activity_details_activity_id Identifiant d'activité slide_view_display_sequence Séquence d'affichage account_id Identifiant de compteMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 107 Administration de Connect Pro Server Détails d'affichage en diapositives Fait de réponses Détails de réponse Fait de question Colonne Description slide_view_id Identifiant de l'affichage en diapositives date_slide_viewed Date d'affichage de la diapositive slide_name Nom de la diapositive slide_description Description de la diapositive account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_answer_details_answer_id Identifiant de réponse dim_activity_details_activity_id Identifiant d'activité dim_question_details_question_id Identifiant de question answer_display_sequence Séquence d'affichage answer_score Note ? answer_correct Est correcte ? account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description answer_id Identifiant de réponse date_answered Date de la réponse response Réponse account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_sco_details_sco_id Identifiant SCO dim_sco_details_sco_version Version SCO dim_question_details_question_id Identifiant de question number_correct Nombre de réponses correctes number_incorrect Nombre de réponses incorrectes total_responses Nombre total de réponses high_score Note élevée low_score Note faible average_score Note moyenneMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 108 Administration de Connect Pro Server Détails des questions Réponses aux questions Groupes Groupes d'utilisateurs account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description question_id Identifiant de question question_display_sequence Séquence d'affichage question_description Description question_type Type de question account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description dim_question_details_question_id Identifiant de question response_display_sequence Séquence d'affichage des réponses response_value Valeur response_description Description account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description group_id Identifiant du groupe group_name Nom du groupe group_description Description du groupe group_type Type de groupe account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description user_id Identifiant utilisateur group_id Identifiant du groupe group_name Nom du groupe account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne DescriptionMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 109 Administration de Connect Pro Server Utilisateur Noms de champs personnalisés Centres de coûts Colonne Description user_id Identifiant utilisateur login Nom de connexion first_name Prénom last_name Nom email Adresse de messagerie user_description Description de l'utilisateur user_type Type d'utilisateur most_recent_session Date de la session la plus récente session_status Etat de la session manager_name Nom du gestionnaire disabled Désactivé account_id Identifiant de compte custom_field_1 Valeur du champ personnalisé 1 custom_field_2 Valeur du champ personnalisé 2 custom_field_3 Valeur du champ personnalisé 3 custom_field_4 Valeur du champ personnalisé 4 custom_field_5 Valeur du champ personnalisé 5 custom_field_6 Valeur du champ personnalisé 6 custom_field_7 Valeur du champ personnalisé 7 custom_field_8 Valeur du champ personnalisé 8 custom_field_9 Valeur du champ personnalisé 9 custom_field_10 Valeur du champ personnalisé 10 Colonne Description dim_column_name Nom de colonne du champ personnalisé custom_field_name Nom du champ personnalisé account_id Identifiant de compte Colonne Description cost_center_id Identifiant du centre de coûts cost_center_name Nom du centre de coûts cost_center_description Description du centre de coûtsMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 110 Administration de Connect Pro Server Création de rapports personnalisés à partir de vues de base de données héritées Remarque : pour la première fois dans Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7, des schémas en étoile vous permettent d'élaborer des rapports personnalisés. Les vues de base de données existantes sont toujours prises en charge, mais les schémas en étoile constituent une solution normalisée plus robuste. Acrobat Connect Pro stocke les informations sur les utilisateurs, le contenu, les cours et les réunions dans une base de données. L'activité des utilisateurs fournit les données de la base. Vous pouvez utiliser des outils tels que Adobe® ColdFusion® Studio et Business Objects Crystal Reports pour interroger la base de données et afficher les données correspondantes. D'autres outils de type SQL sont également utilisables, tel SQL Query Analyser. Les applications Acrobat Connect Pro suivantes permettent de produire des rapports à partir des données disponibles : Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Participation, durée et contenu des réunions. Adobe Presenter Affichage de contenus, de diapositives et de présentations. Acrobat Connect Pro Training Informations destinées à la gestion des cours, telles que des statistiques sur les participants, sur l'affichage des contenus et les résultats des questionnaires. Affichage des relations entre les vues de la base de données Les flèches illustrent les relations d'entité existant entre les sept vues de rapport. Remarque : éléments ou opérations non pris en charge : les vues non identifiées dans ce document, la modification des vues identifiées dans ce document ou l'accès direct au schéma de la base de données sous-jacente. ? A l'aide d'un outil de schématisation se connectant à la base de données, vous pouvez afficher les relations existant entre les vues de la base de données. EXT_TRANSACTIONS Un identifiant de transaction unique est généré chaque fois qu'un utilisateur interagit avec un objet. La vue EXT_TRANSACTIONS renvoie les données répertoriées dans le tableau suivant. dbo.EXT_TRANSACTION_DETAILS TRANSACTION_ID int QUESTION nvarchar (2048) RESPONSE nvarchar (2048) SCORE loat (53) dbo.EXT_TRANSACTIONS TRANSACTION_ID int LOGIN nvarchar (64) URL nvarchar (254) STATUS nvarchar (12) SCORE loat (53) DATE_VISITED datetime dbo.EXT_TRANSACTION_VIEWS TRANSACTION_ID int PAGE nvarchar (2048) DATE_VIEWED datetime dbo.EXT_USER_FIELDS LOGIN nvarchar (64) NAME nvarchar (64) VALUE nvarchar (254) dbo.EXT_USER LOGIN nvarchar (64) NAME nvarchar (64) EMAIL nvarchar (64) MANAGER nvarchar (64) TYPE nvarchar (6) dbo.EXT_USER_GROUPS LOGIN nvarchar (64) NAME nvarchar (64) dbo.EXT_OBJECTS URL nvarchar (254) TYPE nvarchar (16) NAME nvarchar (254) DATE_BEGIN datetime DATE_END datetime DATE_MODIFIED datetime DESCRIPTION nvarchar (1024)MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 111 Administration de Connect Pro Server Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ci-après. select * from ext_transactions where url = '/p63725398/' order by login, date_visited asc; Remarques relatives à la requête La vue EXT_TRANSACTIONS renvoie toutes les transactions existantes pour l'utilisateur et la session de formation donnés. Pour afficher la dernière transaction, vérifiez la valeur maximale de DATE_VISITED. Vous pouvez filtrer les données en fonction des champs STATUS (Etat) et URL, afin d'obtenir une liste des utilisateurs ayant réussi la session de formation considérée, par exemple : select * from ext_transactions where url = '/p31102136/' and status = 'user-passed' order by login, date_visited asc; Génération de données Actions de l'utilisateur permettant de générer des données dans cette vue : • Participation à une réunion • Affichage d'un élément de contenu • Participation à une session de formation (cours ou curriculum) Données exclues •Le numéro de certificat, qui n'existe pas dans la base de données • La note maximale qui est le plus souvent indisponible EXT_TRANSACTIONS_VIEWS La vue EXT_TRANSACTIONS_VIEWS extrait les données concernant les diapositives ou les pages que les utilisateurs consultent. Colonne Type de données Description TRANSACTION_ID INT Identifiant unique de la transaction. LOGIN NVARCHAR Nom de l'utilisateur ayant effectué cette transaction. URL NVARCHAR Objet avec lequel l'utilisateur a interagi. STATUS NVARCHAR Valeurs possibles : passed (réussi), failed (échoué), complete (terminé) ou in-progress (en cours). SCORE FLOAT La note obtenue par l'utilisateur. DATE_VISITED DATETIME Date de création ou de consultation de cette transaction. TRANSACTION_ID LOGIN URL STATUS SCORE DATE_VISITED 10687 test1-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 0.0 2006-12-15 00:56:16.500 10688 test1-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 0.0 2006-12-15 00:56:16.500 10693 test1-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 0.0 2006-12-15 00:58:23.920 10714 test1-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 10.0 2006-12-15 01:09:20.810 10698 test2-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 10.0 2006-12-15 01:00:49.483 10723 test3-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ in-progress 10.0 2006-12-15 01:11:32.153 10729 test3-lnagaraj@test.enang.com /p63725398/ completed 20.0 2006-12-15 01:12:09.700MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 112 Administration de Connect Pro Server Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ci-après. select * from ext_transaction_views where transaction_id = 10702 order by page asc; Génération de données Les données sont générées dans cette vue chaque fois qu'un utilisateur consulte du contenu ou une session de formation. EXT_USERS La vue EXT_USERS répertorie les utilisateurs et les attributs de profil associés : Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ci-après. select * from ext_users; Génération de données Les données sont mises à jour dans la vue dès qu'un invité ou un utilisateur est créé, mis à jour ou supprimé. Données exclues •Le mot de passe, qui n'est pas enregistré en texte standard. • Le fuseau horaire et la langue, qui ne sont pas disponibles en version lisible ; par exemple, PST correspond à 323. • La dernière connexion, trop lourde à calculer. Pour obtenir ce type de données, utilisez la requête max(date_visited) dans la vue EXT_TRANSACTION. Colonne Type de données Description TRANSACTION_ID INT Identifiant unique de cette transaction (peut être fusionné avec TRANSACTION_DETAILS pour résumer par URL) PAGE NVARCHAR Numéro de la diapositive ou de la page consultée. DATE_VIEWED DATETIME Date de création de cette vue. TRANSACTION_ID PAGE DATE_VISITED 10702 0 2006-12-15 01:01:13.153 10702 1 2006-12-15 01:01:18.233 10702 2 2006-12-15 01:01:59.840 10702 3 2006-12-15 01:02:20.717 Colonne Type de données Description LOGIN NVARCHAR Identificateur d'utilisateur unique. NAME NVARCHAR Nom d'utilisateur unique. EMAIL NVARCHAR Adresse de messagerie unique. MANAGER NVARCHAR Le nom de connexion du gestionnaire. Le gestionnaire est toujours défini sur NULL dans Breeze 5.1. TYPE NVARCHAR Utilisateur ou invité. Le type est toujours défini sur user dans la version 5.1. LOGIN NAME EMAIL MANAGER TYPE test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com test4 laxmi test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com NULL user test7-lnagaraj@test.enang.com TEST7 laxmi test7-lnagaraj@test.enang.com NULL userMIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 113 Administration de Connect Pro Server • La session active, c'est-à-dire les données issues de la vue EXT_TRANSACTIONS. Pour obtenir ce type de données, utilisez la requête STATUS='IN-PROGRESS' . • Les utilisateurs supprimés n'apparaissent pas dans la vue EXT_USERS. Ils apparaissent en revanche dans la vue EXT_TRANSACTION. • Les données relatives aux groupes ne sont pas incluses dans la vue. • Les données relatives aux champs personnalisés créés ou prédéfinis. Pour chaque utilisateur, ces informations sont disponibles dans la vue EXT_USER_FIELDS. EXT_USER_FIELDS La vue EXT_USER_FIELDS répertorie pour chaque utilisateur les champs personnalisés créés ou prédéfinis. Elle comprend également les champs personnalisés des utilisateurs convertis en invités. Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ci-après. select * from ext_user_fields where login = 'test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com'; Génération de données Actions permettant de générer des données dans cette vue : ajout, création ou mise à jour de champs personnalisés créés ou prédéfinis pour un ou plusieurs utilisateurs. EXT_USER_GROUPS La vue EXT_USER_GROUPS répertorie les données relatives aux groupes et aux membres associés. La vue EXT_USER_GROUPS utilise les données répertoriées dans le tableau suivant. Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ci-après. select * from ext_user_groups where login = 'lnagaraj@adobe.com'; Colonne Type de données Description LOGIN NVARCHAR Identificateur d'utilisateur unique. NAME NVARCHAR Nom du champ, ex. numéro tél. VALUE NVARCHAR Valeur du champ, ex. 07 66 77 99 57. LOGIN NAME VALUE test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {email} test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {first-name} test4 test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {last-name} laxmi test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {x-job-title} sw engr 4 test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {x-direct-phone} NULL test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com {x-direct-phone-key} NULL test4-lnagaraj@test.enang.com SSN 777 Colonne Type de données Description LOGIN NVARCHAR Nom de l'utilisateur. NAME NVARCHAR Nom du groupe.MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 114 Administration de Connect Pro Server Remarques relatives à la requête L'imbrication de plusieurs groupes est prise en charge à partir de la version 5.1. Par exemple, si le groupe A contient le groupe B et que vous appartenez au groupe B, vous comptez aussi parmi les membres du groupe A. Les groupes prédéfinis, tel le groupe Administrateurs, utilisent des noms de code dans le schéma, comme dans la requête SQL suivante : SELECT * FROM EXT_USER_GROUPS where group='{admins} . Le nom de code permet de distinguer les groupes prédéfinis des groupes créés par les utilisateurs. Génération de données Actions de l'utilisateur permettant de générer des données dans cette vue : • Création, mise à jour ou suppression d'un groupe • Modification des membres d'un groupe EXT_OBJECTS La vue EXT_OBJECTS répertorie tous les objets du système (par exemple, les réunions, le contenu, les cours, etc.) et leurs attributs. Exemple de requête et données obtenues La requête SQL suivante renvoie les données présentées dans le tableau ciaprès : select * from ext_objects order by type asc; LOGIN NAME lnagaraj@adobe.com {admins} lnagaraj@adobe.com {authors} lnagaraj@adobe.com {everyone} lnagaraj@adobe.com Laxmi Nagarajan Colonne Type de données Description URL NVARCHAR Identificateur unique de l'objet. TYPE NVARCHAR Une présentation, un cours, un fichier FLV, un fichier SWF, une image, une archive, une réunion, un curriculum, un dossier ou un événement au choix. NAME NVARCHAR Le nom de l'objet tel qu'affiché dans la liste de contenu. DATE_BEGIN DATETIME La date de début prévue pour l'objet. DATE_END DATETIME La date de fin prévue pour l'objet. DATE_MODIFIED DATETIME La date de modification de l'objet. DESCRIPTION NVARCHAR Les informations récapitulatives sur l'objet entré lors de la création d'une réunion, d'un contenu, d'un cours ou d'un autre type d'objet. URL TYPE NAME DATE_BEGIN DATE_END DATE_MODIFIED DESCRIPTION /p79616987/ cours test api 2006-12-08 23:30:00.000 NULL 2006-12-08 23:36:55.483 NULL MIGRATION, INSTALLATION ET CONFIGURATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO SERVER 7.5 115 Administration de Connect Pro Server Remarques relatives à la requête Vous pouvez obtenir tous les objets d'un type spécifique en filtrant les données selon le champ TYPE. Par exemple, la requête SQL suivante permet de filtrer les données pour afficher les cours et les curriculums. select * from ext_objects where type in ('course', 'curriculum'); Pour obtenir la liste des types de systèmes disponibles, utilisez la requête SQL suivante : select DISTINCT (type) from ext_objects; Génération de données Actions de l'utilisateur permettant de générer des données dans cette vue : • Création ou mise à jour d'une réunion, d'un cours ou d'un curriculum • Transfert ou mise à jour de contenus Données exclues •La durée, que vous pouvez calculer à l'aide de date_end - date_begin . • La taille du disque, qui dévoilent les règles d'entreprise concernant l'opposition copies/originaux. • L'identifiant du dossier. • Les objets supprimés n'apparaissent pas dans la vue EXT_OBJECTS. Ils apparaissent en revanche dans la vue EXT_TRANSACTION. /p47273753/ curriculum test review curric 2006-12-14 21:00:00.000 NULL 2006-12-14 21:00:30.060 NULL /tz1/ réunion {default-template} 2006-12-12 19:15:00.000 2006-12-12 20:15:00.000 2006-12-12 19:25:07.750 présentation de version /p59795005/ présentation ln-QUIZ-TEST1 NULL NULL 2006-12-15 00:43:19.797 réunion de gestionnaires URL TYPE NAME DATE_BEGIN DATE_END DATE_MODIFIED DESCRIPTION ADOBE ® CONNECT ™ VISUAL QUICK START GUIDE Sharing your screen 1. Click the Share My Screen button in the Share pod. 2. In the Start Screen Sharing dialog, choose how you would like to share your screen. Desktop: Share all applications on your desktop. Windows: Choose specific, already open windows to share. Applications: Share one or more applications along with related windows. After selecting your desired option, click Share. 3. An Adobe Connect icon appears in your system tray (Windows) or your toolbar (Mac & Linux) while you are sharing your screen. Click on this icon to view a menu where you can stop sharing or access other available options. Sharing PowerPoint content 1. Click the right arrow beside Share My Screen and select Share Document. 2. Click Browse My Computer to select a file from your system. In the Browse dialog, locate the PowerPoint (PPT or PPTX) presentation you would like to share and click Open. The file is automatically uploaded and converted. 3. Once the file has been converted, it will appear in the Share pod. Use the Next and Previous controls to navigate through your presentation. Getting started with Adobe Connect meetings Create and Access Your Meetings 1. Navigate to __________________________________ in your favorite web browser. 2. Log in with your Adobe Connect username and password. If you don’t know your password, click the Forgot your password? link. 3. Once authenticated, you are taken to the Adobe Connect Central home page. Click the Create New Meeting button to begin the Meeting Wizard. 4. Enter a meeting name and an easy to remember custom URL such as your first name or username. 5. Optionally, fill in the additional fields and click Finish. Your meeting room has been created. 6. Enter your meeting room by clicking on the meeting room URL on the confirmation page or by typing the URL into your web browser. Install the Adobe Connect Add-in 1. If you have never hosted an Adobe Connect meeting before, you will be prompted to install the Adobe Connect Add-In. Click Install and follow the instructions. Tip: Tip: 2 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 5 6 1 Tip: Tip:ADOBE ® CONNECT ™ VISUAL QUICK START GUIDE Inviting attendees 1. You can invite attendees to your meeting by sharing the meeting URL in an email, chat message, or even verbally over the phone. From within a meeting, you can invite attendees by selecting Meeting > Manage Access & Entry > Invite Participants. 2. In the Invite Participants dialog, click Compose e-mail. An e-mail appears in your default e-mail client with meeting information pre-populated. Simply add attendees by entering their e-mail addresses in your e-mail client and send the invitation. 3. When attendees arrive to the meeting, a notification window may appear asking you to accept or decline their request to enter. Click the checkmark to accept the request. You can also accept multiple requests by choosing Allow Everyone. Managing attendees 1. Meeting attendees fall into three roles: Host: Organizes and facilitates the meeting. Presenter: May assist in meeting facilitation, presenting content, or sharing their screen. Participant: Largely a spectator in the meeting who can chat, respond to polls, and change their status. 2. There are two easy ways to change any participant’s role. Hovering over a participant’s name will bring up a hover menu with several options giving you the ability to choose a role for the individual. 3. Additionally, the Attendees pod supports drag and drop functionality. Click and drag users from one role to another. Using voice-over-IP (VoIP) for audio communications 1. Voice-over-IP allows you to communicate with meeting attendees using your computers microphone and speakers. If you intend to use this feature, it is recommended that you first run through the Audio Setup Wizard. To do this, begin by selecting Meeting > Audio Setup Wizard... 2. The wizard guides you through four steps in which you are asked to test your speakers, select a microphone, and optimize the audio. If you’ve never used Adobe Connect before, you may see a Flash Player settings box asking for permission to use your camera and mic. Selecting Remember will skip this prompt in the future. 3. To begin using VoIP, locate the Microphone button near the top of the application. Click the button once to activate VoIP. You can use the arrow beside the icon to mute your mic or adjust your volume. Sharing webcam video 1. You can easily share webcam video with meeting attendees. To do this, make sure your webcam is plugged in and click either the webcam button or the Start My Webcam button on a Video pod. 2. The webcam will give you a preview of what will be shared. If you are happy with the preview, you can click Start Sharing to broadcast your webcam to all participants. The Video pod will accommodate multiple webcams and scale the images appropriately; you don’t need to open a separate pod for each presenter. 3. If you’d like to adjust the settings for your webcam to increase or decrease the quality based on available bandwidth, click Preferences from the Video pod options menu, or select Meeting > Preferences > Video. Tip: Tip: Learn more You can find additional resources by visiting the Adobe Connect User Community at www.connectusers.com Utilisation d'ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO 7.5Copyright © 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors. All rights reserved. Utilisation d'Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro 7.5 This user guide is protected under copyright law, furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. This user guide is licensed for use under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. This License allows users to copy, distribute, and transmit the user guide for noncommercial purposes only so long as (1) proper attribution to Adobe is given as the owner of the user guide; and (2) any reuse or distribution of the user guide contains a notice that use of the user guide is governed by these terms. The best way to provide notice is to include the following link. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Presenter, Adobe Captivate, Acrobat, Acrobat Connect, Authorware, Breeze, ColdFusion, Contribute, Flash, JRun, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty/ Portions include software under the following terms: This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RealDuplex™ Acoustic Echo Cancellation is Copyright © 1995-2004 SPIRIT. This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security, Inc. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (www.apache.org/). Portions © 1995-2005 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler. This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly (jloup@gzip.org) Mark Adler (madler@alumni.caltech.edu) Notice to U.S. Government End Users: The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA.iii Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Ressources Aide et assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Nouveautés d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapitre 2 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Rubriques Procédures pour Acrobat Connect Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Notions de base de Meeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Création et participation aux réunions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mise à jour des réunions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Affichage des données relatives aux réunions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Partage de contenu pendant une réunion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Gestion des participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Enregistrement et lecture des réunions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Création et gestion de séminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Webcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Chapitre 3 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Création de cours de formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Création de curriculums de formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Création de classes virtuelles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Contrôle de la formation avec des rapports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Animation d'une formation avec Acrobat Connect Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Participation aux réunions et sessions de formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Chapitre 4 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Création et modification des événements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Gestion des événements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Participation aux événements Connect Pro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Chapitre 5 : Conférence audio et visioconférence Options de conférence audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Utilisation d'adaptateurs intégrés sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Module Caméra et Voix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Chapitre 6 : Gestion du contenu Utilisation des fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Affichage des données relatives au contenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 iv Sommaire Chapitre 7 : Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Prise en main - Administration de comptes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Rubriques Procédures pour Connect Pro Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Configuration des fournisseurs audio pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Création et importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2171 Chapitre 1 : Ressources Avant de commencer à utiliser votre logiciel, prenez quelques instants pour lire la présentation des nombreuses ressources disponibles. Aide et assistance Aide communautaire L'aide communautaire est un environnement intégré sur adobe.com offrant un accès au contenu créé par la communauté et géré par Adobe et les experts du secteur. L'aide communautaire s'appuie sur un certain nombre de ressources, notamment : • Vidéos, didacticiels, conseils et techniques, blogs, articles et exemples à l'intention des développeurs et des ingénieurs. • Tout le reste du contenu se trouve sur Adobe.com, notamment les articles de la base de connaissances, les téléchargements et les mises à jour, Developer Connection, et bien plus encore. Rendez-vous sur www.adobe.com/support/connect/ pour accéder à la page Aide et assistance du produit, le portail menant à tous les contenus d'aide communautaire de votre logiciel. Les sites que le moteur de recherche de l'aide communautaire permet d'explorer sont spécifiquement choisis et leur qualité est vérifiée par Adobe et les experts de la communauté Adobe. Ces experts veillent également à ce que les premiers résultats d'une recherche renvoient à différents types de contenus, dont des références à l'aide en ligne du produit. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'aide communautaire, voir http://help.adobe.com/en_US/CommunityHelp/. Une vidéo présentant l'aide communautaire est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4117_xp_fr. Pour accéder aux questions fréquentes sur l'aide communautaire, reportez-vous à www.adobe.com/go/comm_help_faq_en. Remarque : certaines fonctions web, telles que le commentaire utilisateur, ne sont pas disponibles pour l'aide Acrobat Connect Pro. Aide du produit Adobe fournit un guide de l'utilisateur complet pour Acrobat Connect Pro à la fois sous forme d'aide en ligne sur le produit et de fichier PDF. Le menu Aide du produit ouvre l'aide de ce produit. Si vous êtes connecté à Internet, vous pouvez accéder à l'aide communautaire et au PDF depuis la page Aide et assistance du produit à l'adresse suivante : www.adobe.com/support/connect. (Le lien vers le PDF se trouve sous Aide supplémentaire.) Lorsque vous effectuez une recherche dans l'aide communautaire, les résultats répertorient les informations sur le produit. Remarque : Dans les environnements où de nombreux utilisateurs ne sont pas connectés à Internet, un administrateur système peut télécharger la documentation et la mettre à la disposition de ces utilisateurs sur l'intranet de l'entreprise.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 2 Ressources Ressources d'assistance Consultez la page Aide et assistance du produit, à l’adresse www.adobe.com/support/connect, pour en savoir plus sur les options d’assistance technique gratuites et payantes. Centre de ressources Visitez le Centre de ressources Acrobat Connect Pro à l'adresse www.adobe.com/resources/acrobatconnect/ pour accéder aux didacticiels d'apprentissage personnalisé, aux recommandations d'usage et aux conseils et astuces concernant tous les modules Connect Pro. Nouveautés d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 Les fonctionnalités suivantes sont nouvelles ou ont été modifiées dans Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 : Voix universelle La solution de voix universelle d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5 vous permet de diffuser par VoIP une conférence audio en direct pour des participants à une réunion. Vous pouvez également enregistrer la conférence audio en direct avec la réunion Connect Pro. Partagez les fichiers PDF Adobe® Partagez des fichiers PDF dans des salles de réunion. Dans une salle de réunion, sélectionnez dans la bibliothèque de contenu Connect Pro Central ou dans votre ordinateur les fichiers PDF que vous souhaitez partager. Dans la bibliothèque de contenu, les fichiers PDF sont stockés sous forme de fichiers PDF. Pour être affichés dans la salle de réunion, les fichiers PDF sont convertis en fichiers SWF. Partage de bureau sécurisé Empêche les utilisateurs de partager des applications ou des processus non autorisés en créant une liste blanche répertoriant les applications et processus autorisés. Créez des listes blanches distinctes pour Windows et pour Mac OS. Prise en charge améliorée de Microsoft® PowerPoint Utilisez moins de bande passante pour afficher du contenu PowerPoint de meilleure qualité. La présentation est simplifiée car vous pouvez précharger du contenu PowerPoint dans une salle de réunion pour l'organiser. Au cours d'une réunion, la zone latérale Adobe Presenter propose des options de navigation supplémentaires. Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Add-in pour IBM Lotus Notes Planifiez et gérez les réunions Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro depuis Lotus Notes. Pour plus d'informations, consultez les documents sur le déploiement et l'utilisation d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Add-in pour IBM Lotus Notes. Les liens vers ces documents sont disponibles depuis la page Aide et assistance du produit à l'adresse suivante : www.adobe.com/support/connect (sous Aide supplémentaire). Liens Prise en charge et Etat du menu d'aide de la salle de réunion Les administrateurs de compte peuvent ajouter un lien vers la page Prise en charge et un autre vers la page Etat au menu d'aide de la salle de réunion. Les URL permettent aux utilisateurs de la réunion de consulter les informations relatives aux options de prise en charge et d'état du système. 3 Chapitre 2 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Rubriques Procédures pour Acrobat Connect Pro Rubriques Procédures pour Hôtes et Présentateurs • « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9 • « Création de réunions » à la page 8 • « Démarrage de réunions » à la page 14 • « Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 147 • « Diffusion du son avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 147 • « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 • « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 • « Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio » à la page 148 • « Partage d'un écran » à la page 29 • « Partage d'un document ou d'un fichier PDF » à la page 33 • « Partage d'une présentation » à la page 31 • « Affichage ou modification du rôle d'un participant » à la page 57 • « Prise de notes pendant une réunion » à la page 40 • « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42 • « Suspension ou clôture d'une réunion » à la page 18 Rubriques Procédures pour Participants • « Participation à une réunion » à la page 18 • « Mise en silence du son avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 148 • « Participation à une conférence audio (sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle) » à la page 151 • « Configuration de la diffusion audio » à la page 152 • « Configuration de la diffusion vidéo » à la page 154 • « Partage d'un écran » à la page 29 • « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42 • « Poser une question ou y répondre au cours d'une session de formation ou réunion » à la page 120 • « Lecture d'une réunion enregistrée » à la page 63UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 4 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Notions de base de Meeting A propos des réunions Une réunion Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro est une conférence en ligne et en direct pour plusieurs utilisateurs. La salle de réunion est une application en ligne que vous utilisez pour diriger une réunion. Cette salle de réunion est constituée de divers volets d'affichage (modules) et composants. Vous pouvez choisir parmi plusieurs modes d’affichage prédéfinis ou personnaliser un affichage en fonction de vos besoins. La salle de réunion permet à plusieurs utilisateurs, ou participants à la réunion, de partager des fichiers ou des écrans d'ordinateur, de converser, de diffuser du contenu audio et vidéo en direct et de prendre part à d'autres activités interactives en ligne. Dès qu'une salle de réunion est créée, elle existe jusqu'à ce que vous la supprimiez. L'emplacement de la salle de réunion correspond à une URL attribuée par le système au moment de la création de la réunion. Lorsque vous cliquez sur cette URL, vous entrez dans la salle de réunion virtuelle. Vous pouvez utiliser la même salle de réunion autant de fois que nécessaire pour la même réunion hebdomadaire. L'hôte peut laisser la salle de réunion ouverte ou fermée entre les réunions prévues. Si une salle de réunion reste ouverte entre des réunions, des participants sont libres d'y entrer à tout moment pour en consulter le contenu. Pour participer à une réunion, vous devez disposer d'un navigateur, d'une copie de Flash® Player 8 ou version ultérieure et d'une connexion Internet. Vos capacités d'action au sein de la réunion dépendent du rôle et des autorisations qui vous ont été affectés. Voir aussi « Création et participation aux réunions » à la page 8 « Création et utilisation de modèles de salles de réunion » à la page 12 Disposition d'une salle de réunion Le contenu d'une salle de réunion est affiché dans des modules ; il s'agit de volets qui peuvent contenir divers types de supports. Les différents modules contiennent la liste des personnes qui assistent à la réunion, des notes, des conversations, des fichiers et du contenu vidéo. L'hôte peut transférer des participants de la salle de réunion principale vers des ateliers (sous-réunions) afin de collaborer au sein d'un petit groupe. Une seconde zone d'affichage, réservée aux seuls présentateurs, est visible par les hôtes et les présentateurs, et non par les participants. Ces derniers peuvent l'utiliser pour préparer le contenu à partager avec les participants ou pour afficher un contenu confidentiel ne devant pas être partagé avec les participants. La barre de menus contient plusieurs menus : un hôte peut afficher les menus Réunion, Présentation, Modes d'affichage, Modules et Aide ; un présentateur ou un participant peut afficher uniquement les menus Réunion et Aide. Dans le coin droit de la barre de menus, la barre de couleur indique l'état de connexion de la salle de réunion. Les messages et les avertissements apparaissent également à cet endroit. Un cercle rouge dans la barre de menus indique que l'hôte enregistre la réunion. Le verrou Secure Sockets (SSL) indique que la réunion est connectée via un socket sécurisé (qui vérifie l'identité du serveur de l'hôte) La barre de navigation des modes d'affichage, située au bas de la fenêtre de la salle de réunion, est visible par les hôtes uniquement. Les modes d'affichage par défaut sont Partage, Discussion et Collaboration. Lorsque l'hôte clique sur un autre affichage dans la barre de navigation, la nouvelle disposition s'affiche sur l'écran de tous les participants. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 5 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Voir aussi « Création et participation aux réunions » à la page 8 Rôles et autorisations de réunion Votre rôle détermine vos capacités de partage, de diffusion et d'autres activités dans une réunion Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour les personnes présentes dans une salle de réunion, ces rôles sont au nombre de trois : hôte, présentateur et participant. Par défaut, le créateur d'une réunion est désigné comme hôte. L'hôte peut spécifier le rôle de chaque participant, y compris désigner d'autres participants comme hôtes de la réunion. Pour chaque rôle, les autorisations sont les suivantes : Hôte Les hôtes peuvent organiser une réunion, faire participer des invités, ajouter du contenu dans la bibliothèque, partager du contenu et ajouter ou modifier des modes d'affichage dans une salle de réunion. Ils peuvent promouvoir d'autres participants au rôle d'hôte ou de présentateur de salle de réunion, ou accorder des autorisations supérieures à un participant sans le promouvoir. Les hôtes peuvent démarrer, arrêter, rejoindre et quitter des conférences audio. Ils peuvent également démarrer et arrêter la diffusion du son dans une salle de réunion. Les hôtes peuvent créer et gérer de petits ateliers au sein d'une réunion. Ils peuvent également effectuer toutes les tâches réalisées par un présentateur ou un participant. Présentateur Les présentateurs peuvent partager du contenu qui est déjà chargé dans la salle de réunion depuis la bibliothèque et partager du contenu de leur ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de présentation Adobe® Presenter (PPT), les fichiers d'application Flash® (SWF), les fichiers d'image (JPEG), les fichiers PDF Adobe, les fichiers MP3 et les fichiers FLV. Ils peuvent partager leur écran avec tous les participants, converser et diffuser des données audio et vidéo en direct. Les présentateurs peuvent mettre en silence et annuler la mise en silence des diffusions du son sur leur ordinateur. Participant Les participants peuvent afficher le contenu partagé par le présentateur, écouter et regarder le contenu audio et vidéo que le présentateur diffuse et utiliser la conversation textuelle. Les participants peuvent mettre en silence et annuler la mise en silence des diffusions du son sur leur ordinateur. Voir aussi « Affectation de droits de participation supérieurs » à la page 58 A propos de la bibliothèque de réunions L'onglet Réunions d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central contient trois volets destinés à l'accès aux réunions : Réunions partagées, Réunions utilisateurs et Mes réunions. Chaque volet contient des dossiers et des fichiers comportant des enregistrements et du contenu de réunion. Les utilisateurs peuvent créer et gérer du contenu dans le volet Mes réunions qui s'affiche lorsqu'ils sont connectés à Acrobat Connect Pro Central. L'accès au contenu dans les autres volets dépend des autorisations de la bibliothèque des réunions définies pour chaque utilisateur par l'administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Le contenu placé dans la bibliothèque des réunions ne peut être utilisé que dans les réunions. Si vous souhaitez que ce contenu soit disponible pour d'autres activités lancées dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central (des événements, des séminaires ou des formations, par exemple), transférez-le vers la bibliothèque de contenu ou déplacez-le de la bibliothèque des réunions vers la bibliothèque de contenu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 6 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Types de fichiers pris en charge dans la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Fonctions d'accessibilité Un document ou une application est dit accessible lorsqu'une personne souffrant d'un handicap (mobilité réduite, cécité ou déficience visuelle) peut l'utiliser. Les fonctions d'accessibilité d'Acrobat Connect Pro permettent aux personnes souffrant d'un handicap d'utiliser la fonctionnalité Réunion autant que possible sans la souris. Navigation dans les menus Il est possible de parcourir les menus situés dans la partie supérieure du client de réunion (menus de la barre d'application) et de les exécuter intégralement depuis le clavier. • Appuyez sur Ctrl+ Espace pour activer le menu Réunion. • Les touches fléchées gauche et droite activent les menus adjacents de la barre d'application. • La touche fléchée vers le bas active le menu en cours. Pour sélectionner une option du menu, utilisez les touches fléchées vers le bas, le haut, la gauche et la droite. • La touche Entrée sélectionne l'option du menu en cours. • La touche Echap ferme le menu en cours. Navigation dans les modules Vous pouvez parcourir les modules visibles entièrement depuis le clavier. • Appuyez sur la touche Tab pour accéder au module suivant de la séquence des modules visibles. • Appuyez sur les touches Maj+Tab pour accéder au module précédent de la séquence des modules visibles. • Lorsque vous accédez à un module, un rectangle de sélection entoure le module pour indiquer qu'il est sélectionné. Vous pouvez indiquer la couleur de ce rectangle pour toutes les réunions d'un compte. Cliquez sur Administration > Personnalisation > Personnaliser la réunion > Survol des boutons. Lorsqu'ils sont sélectionnés avec la touche Tab, certains modules ont un champ qui est sélectionné par défaut. Par exemple : Module Conversation L'application active par défaut le nouveau champ de message. Module Note L'application active par défaut la note qui vous permet de modifier le message. Module Liste des participants L'application active par défaut les utilisateurs sélectionnés dans la liste ou le premier utilisateur de la liste si aucun utilisateur n'est sélectionné. Lorsque le client Acrobat Connect Pro démarre,·l'application active par défaut la zone de saisie des messages du module Conversation visible. Si le client Acrobat Connect Pro perd cette activation (par exemple, si vous passez à une autre application) et la récupère ensuite, tout élément précédemment activé dans un module sélectionné est perdu et l'application Meeting active de nouveau la zone de saisie de message du module Conversation qui est visible. Raccourcis clavier Les raccourcis clavier suivants améliorent l'accessibilité pour que le client Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting puisse être utilisé autant que possible sans souris. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 7 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Raccourcis relatifs au contenu du présentateur dans le module Partage Les raccourcis clavier suivants offrent une meilleure accessibilité aux présentateurs qui utilisent le module Partage. Raccourcis du tableau blanc Les raccourcis clavier suivants offrent une meilleure accessibilité aux présentateurs qui utilisent le tableau blanc. Résultat Windows Macintosh Active le microphone (verrouillé) ou le désactive. Ctrl+M Contrôle+M Active ou désactive l'état de main levée. Ctrl+Flèche vers le haut Contrôle+Flèche vers le haut Active ou désactive le mode Plein écran. S'applique au module Partage sélectionné. Ctrl+. Contrôle+. Promeut en hôte. Nécessite la sélection d'un ou de plusieurs éléments dans la liste des participants. Ctrl+' Contrôle+' Rétrograde en participant. Nécessite la sélection d'un utilisateur dans la liste des participants. Ctrl+] Contrôle+] Promeut en présentateur. Nécessite la sélection d'un utilisateur dans la liste des participants. Ctrl+/ Contrôle+/ Démarre/Arrête l'enregistrement. Pour le démarrage, affiche la boîte de dialogue Démarrer l'enregistrement. Ctrl+, Contrôle+, Termine la réunion. Affiche la boîte de dialogue Arrêter la réunion. Ctrl+\ Contrôle+\ Démarre/Arrête le partage de bureau. S'applique au module Partage activé. Ctrl+[ Contrôle+[ Affiche le premier menu de la barre d'application pour la navigation au clavier. Ctrl+Espace Contrôle+Espace Active/Met en pause la lecture des réunions enregistrées. P P Résultat Windows et Macintosh Page/Diapositive suivante Page Haut ou touche fléchée vers la droite Page/Diapositive précédente Page Bas ou touche fléchée vers la gauche Lecture/Pause P Arrêter S Mise en silence M Changement de vue F Résultat Windows Macintosh Effacer Ctrl-D Contrôle-D Imprimer Ctrl-P Contrôle-P Annuler Ctrl-Z Contrôle-Z Répéter Ctrl-Y Contrôle-Y Supprime les éléments sélectionnés Suppr Supprimer Déplace les éléments sélectionnés dans une direction définie Touches fléchées Touches fléchéesUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 8 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Raccourcis du module Conversation Les raccourcis clavier suivants offrent une meilleure accessibilité lors de l'utilisation du module Conversation. Raccourcis des boîtes de dialogue Les raccourcis clavier suivants offrent une meilleure accessibilité lors de l'accès aux boîtes de dialogue. Création et participation aux réunions Création de réunions Vous créez des réunions dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Pour intégrer l'enregistrement dans votre réunion, vous devez accéder à l'onglet Evénements. Reportez-vous à la section « A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events » à la page 123. Pour votre usage personnel, vous pouvez créer des salles de réunion dans lesquelles vous revenez régulièrement, et y laisser du contenu permanent. 1. Création d'un profil audio (pour les conférences audio) Utilisez la fenêtre Mes profils audio (Mon profil > Mes profils audio) pour configurer un profil audio à utiliser avec une conférence audio. Les profils audio utilisent les paramètres de conférence associés au fournisseur audio sélectionné pour démarrer la conférence audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9. 2. Ouverture de l'Assistant de création de réunion Deux méthodes vous permettent de lancer cet Assistant. Pour créer une réunion dans votre dossier Mes réunions personnel, naviguez jusqu'à la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, localisez la barre de menus Nouveau et cliquez sur Réunion. Pour créer votre réunion dans un autre dossier pour lequel vous disposez de l'autorisation de gestion, naviguez jusqu'à ce dossier dans la bibliothèque des réunions, puis cliquez sur le bouton Nouvelle réunion. Résultat Windows Macintosh Lorsque le curseur se trouve dans la zone de saisie du message, envoie le message Entrée Retour Résultat Windows Macintosh Ferme ou annule une boîte de dialogue Echap Echap Exécute l'action par défaut (définie par boîte de dialogue). Entrée RenvoiUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 9 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3. Saisie des informations sur la réunion Dans la première page de l'Assistant de création de réunion, saisissez les informations détaillées relatives à la réunion. Ces informations sont les suivantes : nom, adresse URL personnalisée, résumé, date, modèle, langue, restrictions d'accès et paramètres de conférence audio. (Seuls le nom et la langue sont obligatoires.) S'il est disponible, vous pouvez sélectionner un profil audio dans le menu contextuel au lieu de saisir manuellement les paramètres de conférence audio. Pour plus d'informations sur les profils audio, reportez-vous à la section « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9. 4. Sélection des participants à une réunion Utilisez la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles pour ajouter des participants. Vous pouvez les rechercher par leur nom et développer des groupes pour sélectionner des membres individuellement. Au besoin, vous pouvez leur attribuer des rôles en sélectionnant des noms de participants et en cliquant sur Autorisations au bas de la liste des participants. Passez ensuite à la dernière étape et envoyez des invitations ou quittez l'Assistant pour envoyer des invitations ultérieurement. 5. Envoi d'invitations L'Assistant vous guide tout au long de deux processus distincts, selon que la réunion est publique ou réservée aux utilisateurs inscrits. Dans le premier cas, sélectionnez Envoyer des invitations et un groupe à inviter (par exemple, hôtes uniquement), puis modifiez le texte du message. Vous avez la possibilité d'inclure un rendez-vous de calendrier Microsoft Outlook. Dans le second cas, cliquez sur Envoyer des invitations par e-mail pour ouvrir votre client de messagerie et ajouter des invités à la liste de distribution de votre message électronique. Voir aussi « Modification des informations sur les réunions » à la page 23 « Affichage des données relatives aux réunions avec le tableau de bord » à la page 26 Création et utilisation de profils audio Un profil audio est un ensemble de paramètres de conférence audio qui correspond à un fournisseur audio. Vous utilisez des profils dès que vous utilisez un fournisseur audio avec une réunion Connect Pro. Les fournisseurs audio sont des entreprises qui proposent des services de conférence audio fonctionnant avec Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations sur les fournisseurs audio, consultez la section « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144. Création d'un profil audio Tous les profils audio comprennent le fournisseur audio et le nom du profil. Les autres informations répertoriées sont les numéros et les codes d'accès que fournissent les hôtes pour les réunions. Les zones de texte qui apparaissent pour la saisie de ces informations dépendent du fournisseur. Pour les fournisseurs intégrés, les informations demandées sont issues de leur code de configuration. Pour les fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur, les informations demandées sont issues des étapes définies par l'hôte dans la séquence de numérotation. Reportez-vous à la section « Définition d'une séquence de numérotation » à la page 193. Remarque : Vous pouvez vérifier que les paramètres de conférence audio et les autres informations de profil démarrent correctement une conférence audio. Exécutez le test de la page Entrer les informations sur le fournisseur (Administration > Fournisseurs audio ou Mon profil > Mes profils audio, puis sélectionnez un fournisseur et cliquez sur Modifier). Reportez-vous à la section « Test d'une séquence de numérotation » à la page 195. Les hôtes de réunion, les administrateurs limités et les administrateurs peuvent créer des profils audio 1 Cliquez sur Mon profil > Mes profils audio.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 10 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 2 Cliquez sur Nouveau profil. 3 Sélectionnez un fournisseur audio et donnez un nom au profil. Fournisseur Fournisseurs audio configurés pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle par un administrateur de compte ou un hôte. La sélection d'un fournisseur relie le profil audio aux informations configurées pour le fournisseur. Nom du profil Nom unique ayant un sens particulier pour vous. Il peut s'agir par exemple de l'objectif du profil audio. Si l'administrateur de compte ou l'hôte a ajouté l'adresse URL du fournisseur, cette dernière apparaît dans la fenêtre Informations sur le profil. Cette adresse URL permet d'établir le lien à une page d'informations comportant la procédure détaillée de création du profil audio. 4 Complétez les autres informations et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Lorsque le profil est enregistré, il est automatiquement disponible. Fenêtre Nouveau profil audio avec informations propres au fournisseur Pour activer ou désactiver un profil audio existant, sélectionnez-le dans Mes profils audio, cliquez sur Modifier, modifiez le menu Etat du profil et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification ou suppression d'un profil audio Vous pouvez changer le nom du profil et activer/désactiver un profil audio existant. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le fournisseur audio. Vous ne spécifiez un fournisseur que lorsque vous créez un profil. 1 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro, cliquez sur Mon profil > Mes profils audio. 2 Sélectionnez un profil et cliquez sur Modifier. 3 Modifiez le nom ou l'état du profil, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 4 Pour supprimer un profil audio, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Association d'un profil audio à une réunion Lorsque vous associez un profil audio à une réunion, vous incluez les paramètres de conférence audio définis pour le fournisseur audio. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Créez une réunion et saisissez les informations nécessaires (cliquez sur Réunions > Nouvelle réunion).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 11 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • Ouvrez une réunion existante et cliquez sur l'onglet Modifier les infos. 2 Dans la section Paramètres de conférence audio, sélectionnez Inclure cette conférence audio dans cette réunion. Sélectionnez le profil dans le menu et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Tous les profils que vous avez créés apparaissent dans le menu. Remarque : Si vous modifiez le profil audio après avoir commencé la réunion, les nouveaux paramètres de conférence n'entrent en vigueur que lorsque vous avez mis fin à la réunion et l'avez redémarrée. Patientez quelques minutes pour voir les changements. Sélection d'un profil audio pour une réunion Démarrage d'une conférence audio à l'aide d'un profil audio Vérifiez que vous avez créé un profil audio et que vous l'avez associé à la réunion. Acrobat Connect Pro utilise les étapes de connexion du fournisseur figurant dans le profil pour établir la connexion au fournisseur audio et commencer la réunion automatiquement. 1 Naviguez jusqu'à la page Informations sur la réunion qui vous intéresse. 2 Cliquez sur Entrer dans la salle de réunion. 3 Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants. 4 Pour qu'Acrobat Connect Pro rejoigne la conférence audio, sélectionnez Rejoindre la conférence audio ou Commencer la conférence audio dans le menu. Remarque : le type de fournisseur audio que vous avez sélectionné pour votre profil audio détermine l'option qui apparaît. 5 Pour commencer la diffusion du son dans la salle de réunion, sélectionnez Démarrage de la diffusion audio dans le menu Options de conférence audio. Voir aussi « Affichage de fournisseurs audio » à la page 190 « Utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 145UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 12 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Création et utilisation de modèles de salles de réunion Un modèle est simplement une salle de réunion qui a déjà été conçue. Il peut contenir plusieurs modes d'affichage dotés de différents volets (ou modules), contenus et configurations. Les modes d'affichage peuvent être optimisés pour une tâche spécifique, telle que la présentation d'un diaporama ou la possibilité de collaborer avec les autres intervenants. Vous pouvez récupérer des modes d'affichage et du contenu, ce qui vous évite certaines tâches de personnalisation répétitives chaque fois que vous créez une réunion. Créez vos propres modèles ou utilisez les modèles par défaut inclus dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Acrobat Connect Pro propose trois modèles intégrés qui permettent de créer rapidement une salle de réunion : Réunion par défaut, Formation par défaut et Evénement par défaut. Lorsque vous créez une réunion à l'aide de l'Assistant Nouvelle réunion d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, il vous suffit de sélectionner l'un de ces trois modèles pour votre salle de réunion, d'ajouter le contenu, puis de commencer la réunion. Lorsque vous créez une salle de réunion à partir d'un modèle, la toute dernière version du contenu est ajoutée à la salle. La modification du fichier source du contenu incorporé n'altère pas le contenu de la salle de réunion. Pour mettre à jour le contenu, transférez le fichier modifié sur le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro, puis remplacez le contenu actuel par celui situé sur le serveur. Modèle de réunion par défaut Modèle général de réunion. Il contient trois modes d'affichage : Partage, Discussion et Collaboration. La disposition Partage est optimisée pour le partage de contenu (présentations Microsoft PowerPoint, vidéo, Adobe PDF, etc.). L'affichage Discussion est optimisé pour des discussions interactives et pour la prise de notes. L'affichage Collaboration est optimisé pour l'annotation du contenu et l'ajout de dessins sur ce dernier. Affichages du modèle de réunion par défaut Modèle de formation par défaut Utilisé pour les classes virtuelles et les instructions de collaboration en ligne. Il contient trois modes d'affichage : Salle d'attente, Salle de cours et Etude. La disposition Salle d'attente·est l'endroit où vous pouvez exposer une présentation autonome ou d'autres contenus préliminaires. Laissez cet affichage ouvert pour que les personnes présentes puissent consulter le contenu avant le début de la réunion. L'affichage Présentation vous permet de lancer une présentation PowerPoint ou encore de partager votre écran ou un tableau blanc. La disposition Etude vous permet de collaborer avec les étudiants, de fournir des fichiers à télécharger et des liens à visiter, ainsi que d'utiliser un tableau blanc pour donner des instructions. Modèle d'événement par défaut Modèle destiné aux réunions ou aux séminaires susceptibles de rassembler un large public. Il contient trois modes d'affichage : Salle d'attente, Présentation et Questions et réponses. La disposition Salle d'attente·est l'endroit où vous pouvez écouter de la musique, exposer une présentation autonome ou afficher d'autres contenus préliminaires. Laissez cet affichage ouvert pour que les personnes présentes puissent consulter le contenu avant le début de la réunion. Dans l'affichage Présentation vous pouvez lancer une présentation PowerPoint, partager votre écran ou afficher un tableau blanc. L'affichage Questions et réponses autorise une session Q & R ouverte avec les participants.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 13 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Informations conservées dans un modèle Une salle de réunion convertie en modèle est un double de l'original. Les affichages, les modules, les informations sur la salle et la plupart des types de contenu sont préservés dans le modèle, notamment les éléments suivants : • Des affichages avec le nom, l'ordre et l'état de départ (sélectionné) • Des modules avec le nom, la taille, la position et les paramètres de sélection de l'affichage Plein écran • Le contenu du module • Numéro de page dans les fichiers PDF et position de la barre de recherche dans les fichiers FLV • Les contenus superposés dans le tableau blanc • L'état du sondage (Préparer, Ouvrir et Fermer), les questions, les réponses et la diffusion des résultats • Les questions et les réponses, le lien du module Conversation et l'état (Ouvertes, Résolues et Toutes) • Texte dans le module Note • Les paramètres Caméra et Voix • La mise en attente de la salle (Oui ou Non) • La valeur de l'entrée invité • Les messages présentés aux utilisateurs lorsqu'une réunion est mise en attente ou interrompue • L'arrière-plan de la salle, la résolution de l'écran et la bande passante • L'état de la zone réservée aux présentateurs • La description des invités Certaines informations ne sont pas enregistrées dans le modèle. Les paramètres de conférence audio, les paramètres de l'Assistant Configuration audio et le contenu d'un module Conversation ne sont pas enregistrés dans le modèle. Remarque : ne convertissez pas en modèles les réunions contenant des ateliers. Application d'un modèle à une nouvelle réunion 1 Dans la barre de menus Nouveau de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur Réunion. 2 Sur la page Entrer les informations sur la réunion, à proximité de l'option Sélectionner un modèle, cliquez sur le menu et faites votre sélection. (La valeur par défaut est Modèles partagés\Modèle de réunion par défaut.) Conversion d'une salle de réunion en modèle En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez créer un modèle de salle de réunion. Pour ajouter une salle de réunion au dossier Modèles partagés, vous devez disposer des autorisations de gestionnaire sur ce dossier. Par défaut, vous disposez des autorisations complètes sur les réunions et les modèles situés dans votre dossier de réunions utilisateur. 1 Dans l'onglet Réunions d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, accédez à la salle de réunion à convertir. 2 Cochez la case en regard de la salle de réunion. 3 Cliquez sur Déplacer dans la barre de navigation. Deux colonnes sont affichées dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Celle de gauche indique le nom de la salle de réunion. Dans la colonne de droite, sous l'en-tête Déplacer dans ce dossier, le dossier Réunions utilisateurs > [votre compte] est sélectionné par défaut. Si vous souhaitez utiliser ce dossier, allez à l'étape 5. 4 Localisez et sélectionnez un dossier de modèles, par exemple le dossier Modèles partagés. 5 Cliquez sur Déplacer en bas de la colonne.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 14 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting La salle de réunion se trouve désormais dans le dossier de modèles sélectionné. Le modèle est ajouté à la liste dans le dossier approprié. Lorsque vous créez une réunion à l'aide de l'Assistant, vous pouvez sélectionner un modèle que vous venez de créer dans le menu Sélectionnez un modèle. Vous pouvez personnaliser cette salle de la même manière que les autres en fonction de vos besoins. Une fois la réunion ouverte, il est impossible d'y appliquer un nouveau modèle. Pour cela, créez d'abord une réunion à l'aide du nouveau modèle. Démarrage de réunions Si vous êtes un hôte, il vous suffit, pour démarrer une réunion, de vous connecter à votre salle de réunion et d'inviter d'autres personnes par courrier électronique ou messagerie instantanée. Les réunions peuvent être spontanées ou prédéfinies. Une fois dans la salle de réunion, vous pouvez effectuer différentes tâches afin de configurer la réunion pour les participants. Vous pouvez par exemple définir des informations sur la conférence, accepter ou refuser des demandes de participation à la réunion, réorganiser les modules ou encore prendre des notes. Voir aussi « Suspension ou clôture d'une réunion » à la page 18 « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9 Entrée dans une salle de réunion ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur Mes réunions, puis sur le bouton Ouvrir correspondant à la réunion de votre choix. • Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central, naviguez jusqu'à la page d'informations de la réunion qui vous intéresse, puis cliquez sur Entrer dans la salle. • Cliquez sur l'URL de la réunion dans le message électronique d'invitation que vous avez reçu. Tapez votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe Acrobat Connect Pro, puis cliquez sur Entrez dans la salle. • Entrez l'URL de la réunion dans votre navigateur. Tapez votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe Acrobat Connect Pro, puis cliquez sur Entrez dans la salle. La première fois que vous vous rendez dans une salle de réunion, marquez-la d'un signet afin d'y accéder plus rapidement les prochaines fois. Démarrage d'une réunion à l'aide du bouton Démarrer la réunion Le bouton Démarrer la réunion est inclus dans les applications logicielles telles qu'Adobe Acrobat ® 8, Adobe Reader® 8 et certaines applications Microsoft Office. En tant qu'hôte de la réunion, utilisez le bouton Démarrer la réunion pour accéder à l'écran de connexion de votre salle de réunion ou pour configurer un nouveau compte Acrobat Connect Pro. Remarque : Dans Acrobat 9 et Reader 9, vous pouvez utiliser pour les réunions en ligne Adobe ConnectNow, l'outil personnel de conférence Internet. 1 Cliquez sur Démarrer la réunion . 2 Si la page de bienvenue à la réunion apparaît, cliquez sur Créer un compte d'essai pour configurer un nouveau compte ou cliquez sur Connexion si vous en possédez déjà un. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue de connexion à la réunion, tapez l'URL de votre réunion, votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Connexion.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 15 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Remarque : dans Acrobat 8 ou Reader 8, vos préférences de réunion déterminent les informations de connexion que vous devez saisir avant l'ouverture de la salle de réunion. Pour changer vos préférences de réunion pour Acrobat ou Reader, sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat > Préférences ou Reader > Préférences (Mac OS), puis sélectionnez Réunion à gauche. Voir aussi « Suspension ou clôture d'une réunion » à la page 18 Définition de la bande passante d'une salle de réunion L'hôte définit la bande passante réservée à la salle de réunion afin de déterminer le débit (kbits/seconde) auquel sont envoyées les données de la réunion aux participants. L'hôte doit choisir de préférence une bande passante adaptée au débit de la connexion des participants. Si les participants utilisent des vitesses de connexion différentes, choisissez le débit le plus faible. Par exemple, si certains participants utilisent des modems, choisissez la bande passante Modem afin d'être certain que tous les participants disposent d'une bonne connexion et que les machines client ne sont pas surchargées. Voici quelques recommandations générales concernant les paramètres de bande passante des salles de réunion. La vitesse réelle peut varier avec chaque environnement réseau : • Modem : un présentateur peut générer environ 26 kbit/s de données. Pour une bonne connexion, les participants ont besoin d'environ 29 kbit/s. Il est déconseillé d'utiliser le paramètre Modem en présence de plusieurs présentateurs. Le partage d'écran est également déconseillé avec le paramètre Modem. • DSL : un présentateur peut générer environ 125 kbit/s de données. Pour une bonne connexion, les participants ont besoin d'environ 128 kbit/s. Si vous utilisez le partage d'écran, les participants doivent disposer d'un débit de 200 kbit/s. • RLE : un présentateur peut générer environ 250 kbit/s de données. Les participants ont besoin d'environ 255 kbit/s. Si vous utilisez le partage d'écran, les participants doivent disposer d'un débit de 400 kbit/s. 1 Dans une salle de réunion, sélectionnez Réunion > Performances et apparence de la salle > Optimiser la bande passante réservée pour la salle. 2 Sélectionnez Modem, DSL/Câble ou RLE. Pour consulter un article sur la gestion et la surveillance de la bande passante réservée aux réunions, reportez-vous à http://connectusers.com/tutorials/2009/03/connection_status/index.php. Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès Pendant qu'ils sont dans la salle de réunion, les hôtes peuvent inviter des personnes à participer à une réunion. Un hôte peut choisir de bloquer l'accès à une réunion et accepter ou refuser les demandes d'accès à une réunion bloquée. Remarque : les noms des invités sont visibles seulement si l'administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro a activé la fonction Liste des invités. (Les administrateurs peuvent également utiliser la fonction de conformité pour désactiver la liste des invités. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184.) Voir aussi « Affichage et modification d'une liste de participants » à la page 20UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 16 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Contact d'invités à partir d'une réunion Après avoir démarré une réunion, vous pouvez ouvrir le module Invités pour voir quelles sont les personnes invitées et, le cas échéant, communiquer avec elles. Cela s'avère particulièrement utile si les invités sont en retard et si vous souhaitez les contacter pour savoir s'ils ont l'intention d'assister à la réunion. Remarque : Les noms des invités sont visibles seulement si l'administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro a activé la fonction Liste des invités. 1 Démarrez une réunion. 2 Cliquez sur Contacter les invités . 3 Dans le module Invités, sélectionnez un seul invité dans la liste, sélectionnez-en plusieurs en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée, ou cliquez sur Tout sélectionner. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur MI. Tapez votre message dans le module Converser avec des invités, cliquez sur , sélectionnez Coller l'URL de la réunion, puis cliquez sur Envoyer . • Cliquez sur Courrier électronique. Cliquez sur Rédiger un courrier électronique. Le cas échéant, modifiez l'objet ou le message dans votre client de messagerie par défaut, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. 5 Pour fermer les modules Invités et Converser avec des invités, cliquez sur Masquer la liste des invités . Invitation de participants en cours de réunion Les hôtes peuvent inviter des utilisateurs à participer à une réunion depuis la salle de réunion Acrobat Connect Pro. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer l'accès et l'entrée > Inviter des participants. • Dans le module Liste des participants, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit et sélectionnez Inviter des participants. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Inviter des participants, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Rédiger un courrier électronique pour ouvrir votre client de messagerie par défaut et envoyer aux invités un courrier électronique généré automatiquement et contenant l'URL de la réunion. • Copiez l'URL de la réunion de la boîte de dialogue Inviter des participants dans un message électronique ou un message instantané et envoyez celui-ci aux invités. Revenez dans la salle de réunion et cliquez sur Annuler pour fermer la boîte de dialogue. Blocage des participants entrants 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer l'accès et l'entrée > Bloquer l'entrée des participants. 2 Pour que les personnes qui arrivent puissent demander l'accès à la réunion, sélectionnez Les nouveaux participants peuvent demander l'accès. Désactivez cette option pour interdire les demandes d'accès à la réunion. 3 (Facultatif) Dans la zone de texte, modifiez le message destiné aux participants qui rejoignent la réunion. Pour enregistrer le message pour une future utilisation, sélectionnez Enregistrer le message. 4 Cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 17 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Utilisation des modules Les hôtes peuvent afficher, masquer, ajouter, supprimer et réorganiser les modules. Plusieurs instances d'un module peuvent être affichées simultanément dans une réunion (à l'exception des modules Liste des participants et Caméra et Voix). Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Partage d'un écran » à la page 29 « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28 Affichage ou dissimulation d'un module 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Modules, puis le nom du module à afficher. Une coche s'affiche à côté du nom des modules actuellement visibles dans la réunion. Pour masquer un module, sélectionnez de nouveau son nom ou cliquez sur le bouton Masquer (signe moins) situé à droite de la barre de titre du module. 2 Pour les modules qui peuvent avoir plusieurs instances (tous les modules à l'exception des modules Liste des participants et Caméra et Voix), sélectionnez le nom de l'instance dans le sous-menu des modules pour afficher ou masquer une instance spécifique. Ajout d'un module 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Modules, puis le nom d'un module. 2 Dans le sous-menu du module, sélectionnez Nouveau [nom du module] . Déplacement et redimensionnement des modules 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Modules > Déplacer et redimensionner les modules. Une coche apparaît à côté de l'option lorsqu'elle est activée. 2 Pour déplacer un module, faites-le glisser par sa barre de titre. Pour redimensionner un module, faites glisser son coin inférieur droit. Affichage d'un module en mode Plein écran 1 A droite de la barre de titre du module, cliquez sur le bouton Agrandir le module (l'icône représentant un écran). 2 Pour rétablir la taille d'origine du module, cliquez de nouveau sur ce bouton. Organisation des modules 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Modules > Organiser les modules. 2 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour supprimer des modules, sélectionnez-les dans le volet gauche et cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour renommer un module, sélectionnez-le dans le volet gauche et cliquez sur Renommer. Saisissez le nouveau nom dans la boîte de dialogue Renommer le module, puis cliquez sur OK. • Pour localiser tous les modules non utilisés, cliquez sur Sélectionner les éléments inutilisés. Tous les modules inutilisés sont mis en surbrillance dans la liste située à gauche. Cliquez sur Supprimer si vous souhaitez supprimer les modules inutilisés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 18 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3 Cliquez sur Terminé. Participation à une réunion Les participants peuvent accéder à la réunion en tant qu'invités ou en tant qu'utilisateurs enregistrés, selon les paramètres choisis par l'hôte de la réunion. Avant de participer à une réunion, vérifiez sa date et son heure pour savoir si elle a déjà commencé. (Si la date est dépassée, la réunion apparaît dans votre liste des réunions expirées.) Si votre connexion au serveur échoue, Acrobat Connect Pro Central affiche un message d'erreur et propose un lien vers l'Assistant de test d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, qui vous guide tout au long de la procédure de test de l'état de votre connexion. Remarque : si l'administrateur de votre réunion a activé les certificats côté client, la boîte de dialogue de sélection de certificat s'affiche lorsque vous tentez d'accéder à une réunion et vous invite à sélectionner un certificat pour contrôler votre identité. En outre, un administrateur peut avoir activé un avis de conditions générales d'utilisation qui, pour des raisons de conformité, doit être accepté avant d'entrer en réunion. (Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184.) 1 Utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Si vous avez été invité à une réunion par une personne de votre société, sélectionnez Mes réunions dans l'onglet Accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Dans la liste des réunions de gauche, recherchez la réunion à laquelle vous souhaitez participer et cliquez sur Entrer. • Cliquez sur l'adresse URL de la réunion (reçue généralement par courrier électronique ou messagerie instantanée). 2 Connectez-vous à la salle de réunion en tant qu'invité ou en tant qu'utilisateur Acrobat Connect Pro : • Sélectionnez Entrer en tant qu'invité. Tapez le nom qui vous identifiera pendant la réunion, puis cliquez sur Entrez dans la salle. • Sélectionnez Entrer avec votre nom de connexion et votre mot de passe. Entrez votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe. Cliquez sur Entrez dans la salle. Si la réunion a commencé, votre navigateur affiche immédiatement la salle de réunion. Si elle n'a pas commencé, vous recevez le message suivant : « La réunion n'a pas encore commencé. Vous pourrez y accéder dès que l'hôte sera arrivé. Merci de patienter. » Suspension ou clôture d'une réunion Pour bloquer temporairement l'accès à une salle de réunion, l'hôte peut placer les participants en attente. Les hôtes et les présentateurs ont toujours la possibilité d'entrer dans la salle de réunion et de mener à bien leurs activités pendant que les participants demeurent en attente. Les téléconférences audio sont suspendues. L'hôte peut placer une réunion en attente pour permettre aux présentateurs d'entrer dans la salle de réunion pendant que la réunion n'est pas en session et de préparer des documents. Lorsqu'une réunion est en pause, une icône Arrêter la réunion s'affiche à droite de la barre de menus. Pour empêcher quiconque d'accéder à la salle de réunion, y compris les hôtes, les présentateurs et les participants, l'hôte peut retirer tous les participants d'une réunion et y mettre fin. Les téléconférences sont déconnectées. Si le compte Acrobat Connect Pro est facturé à la minute, les hôtes peuvent mettre fin à la réunion pour arrêter les frais lorsque la réunion n'est pas en session. Lorsqu'un hôte a mis fin à une réunion, un message s'affiche pour signaler que la réunion est terminée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 19 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Un bouton permettant de redémarrer la réunion apparaît pour les hôtes. Une fenêtre de notification indique à l'hôte le nombre de participants qui attendent d'entrer dans la salle de réunion. Les participants qui se connectent à une réunion en attente y accèdent automatiquement dès qu'elle reprend. Pour signaler l'état de la réunion aux personnes présentes, les hôtes peuvent envoyer des messages de réunion en attente ou de fin de réunion. Mise en attente des participants 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer l'accès et l'entrée > Mettre les participants en attente. 2 Au besoin, modifiez le message pour les participants, puis cliquez sur OK pour suspendre la réunion et envoyer le message aux participants. Pour connaître le nombre de participants qui attendent pour accéder à une réunion interrompue, placez le pointeur sur l'icône Arrêter la réunion, à droite de la barre de menus de la salle de réunion. Clôture d'une réunion 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Arrêter la réunion. 2 Au besoin, modifiez le message, puis cliquez sur OK pour arrêter la réunion et envoyer le message aux participants. Composition d'un message En attente ou Arrêter la réunion Vous pouvez rédiger un message de mise en attente ou de fin de réunion sans interrompre la réunion. Cela vous permet de rédiger le message pendant la réunion, puis de l'envoyer au moment opportun. 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer l'accès et l'entrée > Mettre les participants en attente. 2 Relisez le message affiché dans la zone de texte. 3 Cliquez ensuite sur Enregistrer le message afin de le conserver pour une utilisation ultérieure et de reprendre la réunion. Reprise d'une réunion mise en attente ou arrêtée ? Dans le coin supérieur droit de la salle de réunion, placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'icône de suspension de la réunion et dans la fenêtre de notification, cliquez sur Démarrer la réunion. Mise à jour des réunions Après avoir créé une réunion, vous pouvez mettre à jour les informations à son sujet, modifier la liste des participants et gérer le contenu qui y est associé. Obtention d'informations sur une réunion Vous pouvez obtenir, à tout moment, des informations sur une réunion. 1 Cliquez sur Mes réunions dans l'onglet Accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion sous Mes réunions. Cette page s'affiche dans la partie droite de l'écran. Elle présente les renseignements suivants : Nom Titre de la réunion. URL Adresse Web de la réunion (emplacement virtuel de la salle de réunion).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 20 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Résumé Brève description de la réunion. Date de début Date et heure auxquelles la réunion commence. Durée Durée prévue de la réunion. Langue Langue dans laquelle se tiendra la réunion. Informations téléphoniques Numéro de téléphone que les participants doivent composer pour se joindre à la réunion et code à saisir (nécessaire uniquement lorsque la réunion a déjà commencé). 3 A partir de là, cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir en regard du nom de la réunion pour y participer. Voir aussi « Affichage des données relatives aux réunions avec le tableau de bord » à la page 26 « Rapports sur les réunions » à la page 26 Affichage et modification d'une liste de participants Si vous disposez d'autorisations de gestion pour une réunion, vous pouvez afficher la liste de tous les participants invités pour chaque salle de réunion. Toutefois, si cette réunion est présentée en tant qu'événement, vous devez afficher et gérer ses participants dans l'onglet Gestion des événements. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events » à la page 123. En tant qu'administrateur ou utilisateur disposant d'autorisations de gestion pour ce dossier de réunions, vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des participants à une réunion et modifier le paramètre d'autorisation du participant (hôte, présentateur ou participant). Les participants supprimés ne reçoivent aucune notification et ne peuvent accéder à la réunion à moins que le paramètre d'accès soit modifié de manière à laisser entrer toute personne disposant de l'URL de la réunion. Voir aussi « Procédure de création et d'importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes » à la page 195 « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 Affichage de la liste des participants à une réunion 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants dans la barre de navigation. Ajout de participants à une réunion 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants de la barre de navigation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 21 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 5 Pour sélectionner des utilisateurs ou des groupes, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur leur entrée en maintenant sur la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée (Windows) ou sur Commande (Macintosh). • Pour développer un groupe et y sélectionner des individus, double-cliquez sur son nom. Lorsque la sélection des membres est terminée, double-cliquez sur Dossier parent dans la liste pour rétablir la liste originale. • Pour rechercher un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher dans la partie inférieure de la fenêtre, entrez le nom à afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter. 7 Pour chaque nouveau groupe ou utilisateur participant ajouté, sélectionnez le type d'autorisation approprié (participant, présentateur, hôte ou refusé) dans le menu Définir le rôle de l'utilisateur en bas de la liste des participants actuels. Suppression de participants à la réunion 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants dans la barre de navigation. 5 Pour sélectionner des utilisateurs ou des groupes, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des participants actuels : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur leur entrée en maintenant sur la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée (Windows) ou sur Commande (Macintosh). • Pour rechercher un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher dans la partie inférieure de la fenêtre, entrez le nom à afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. 6 Cliquez sur Supprimer. Modification de l'autorisation de réunion d'un participant 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants de la barre de navigation. 5 Dans la liste des participants actuels, sélectionnez les utilisateurs ou groupes pour lesquels vous souhaitez·modifier les autorisations par l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur leur entrée en maintenant sur la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée (Windows) ou sur Commande (Macintosh). • Pour rechercher un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher dans la partie inférieure de la fenêtre, entrez le nom à afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. 6 Pour chaque nom, sélectionnez le nouveau rôle d'utilisateur (participant, présentateur, hôte ou refusé) dans le menu Définir le rôle de l'utilisateur situé au bas de la liste des participants actuels.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 22 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Affichage et gestion du contenu transféré Vous pouvez à tout moment afficher le contenu transféré, déplacer le contenu dans la bibliothèque de contenu ou encore supprimer le contenu transféré. Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28 « Partage de contenu pendant une réunion » à la page 27 Affichage de la liste du contenu transféré Si vous disposez d'autorisations de gestion pour un dossier de réunions, vous pouvez afficher la liste du contenu déjà transféré sur le serveur depuis une salle de réunion dans ce dossier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Contenu transféré dans la barre de navigation. 5 La liste de tous les contenus transférés s'affiche. A partir de là, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour consulter des informations sur un élément spécifique de la liste, cliquez sur son nom. • Déplacez le contenu transféré dans la bibliothèque de contenu. • Supprimez le contenu transféré. • Pour déterminer si le contenu est toujours utilisé dans la salle de réunion, consultez la colonne Référencé. Un Oui indique qu'il est toujours utilisé. Une colonne vide indique qu'il ne l'est pas. Déplacement du contenu transféré dans la bibliothèque de contenu Pour déplacer du contenu transféré dans la biblothèque de contenu, vous devez assumer la fonction d'administrateur ou d'utilisateur autorisé à gérer le dossier spécifique de la bibliothèque des réunions contenant cette réunion. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Contenu transféré dans la barre de navigation. 5 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche de chaque fichier à déplacer. 6 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le bouton Déplacer dans un dossier. 7 Au choix, cliquez sur les titres des dossiers ou sur le bouton Dossier parent pour parcourir les dossiers de la bibliothèque de contenu jusqu'au nouvel emplacement voulu et y placer le fichier de contenu. 8 Cliquez sur Déplacer. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Suppression du contenu transféré 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 23 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Contenu transféré dans la barre de navigation. 5 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche de chaque fichier à supprimer. 6 Cliquez sur Supprimer. 7 Sur la page de confirmation, cliquez sur Supprimer pour effacer définitivement le contenu sélectionné. Modification des informations sur les réunions Si vous êtes un administrateur ou un utilisateur disposant d'autorisations de gestion pour ce dossier de réunions, vous pouvez modifier les propriétés de réunion dans la page d'informations sur la réunion. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos dans la barre de navigation. 5 Modifiez toute information sur la réunion, telle que l'heure de début ou la durée. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Voir aussi « Obtention d'informations sur une réunion » à la page 19 « Rapports sur les réunions » à la page 26 « Affectation de minutes de réunion à des centres de coûts » à la page 183 Options de la page d'informations sur la réunion Nom Ce champ doit obligatoirement être renseigné car sa valeur apparaît dans la liste des réunions, dans la page de connexion à la réunion et dans les rapports. Résumé Description de la réunion qui apparaît dans la page Informations sur la réunion et est incluse par défaut dans vos invitations à la réunion. La longueur du résumé est limitée à 1 000 caractères. Date de début Mois, jour, année et heure retenus pour le début de la réunion. Remarque : certains modèles de tarification d'Acrobat Connect Pro ignorent les dates de début des réunions et permettent aux participants d'accéder à celles-ci avant la date de début désignée. Selon le modèle de tarification choisi par votre société, il se peut que, si vous repoussez le début de la réunion à une date ultérieure après la création de la réunion, les participants et les présentateurs aient malgré tout accès à la salle de réunion. Connectez-vous à la salle de réunion pour en interdire l'accès aux participants entre deux réunions. Durée Durée de la réunion en heures et minutes. Langue Langue principale utilisée dans la réunion. Remarque : Si vous créez une réunion dans une langue, puis changez de langue sur la page de modification des informations, les noms des modules de la salle de réunion restent dans la langue initiale. Il est donc préférable de définir la langue lors de la création d'une réunion et de ne pas en changer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 24 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Accès Il existe trois options : • Seuls les utilisateurs enregistrés sont admis à la réunion (l'accès des invités est bloqué) Cette option autorise les participants et utilisateurs enregistrés à entrer dans la salle en utilisant leurs nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe. L'accès est bloqué pour les invités. • Seuls les utilisateurs enregistrés et les visiteurs acceptés sont admis à la réunion Avec cette option, la salle de réunion n'est accessible qu'aux personnes qui ont été invitées en tant qu'utilisateurs enregistrés et aux invités qui sont acceptés dans la salle par l'hôte. Les utilisateurs enregistrés doivent fournir leur nom d'utilisateur et leur mot de passe pour pénétrer dans la salle de réunion. Les invités sont acceptés dans la salle par l'hôte. Acrobat Connect Pro peut générer un rapport de participation individuel pour chaque utilisateur enregistré pour la réunion. Les invités acceptés sont ajoutés au nombre total de participants dans les rapports de la réunion, mais aucun rapport de participation individuel n'est disponible. Remarque : pour certains comptes Acrobat Connect Pro, un hôte doit être présent dans la salle de réunion pour que des participants puissent y pénétrer. • Toute personne en possession de l'adresse URL de la réunion peut entrer dans la salle. Toute personne recevant l'adresse URL de la réunion. Pour créer une invitation électronique dans votre propre client de messagerie, cliquez sur Envoyer des invitations par e-mail. Ce nouveau message présente un objet prédéfini (Invitation Connect Pro) et un texte déjà rédigé (contenant la date, l'heure, la durée, le lieu et le résumé de la réunion) modifiable à votre convenance. Centre de coûts Détermine le mode d'allocation des coûts des minutes des salles de réunion. Utilisez le menu pour sélectionner une option et facturer les coûts à des utilisateurs individuels, à votre centre de coûts ou à un centre de coûts spécifié. Paramètres de conférence audio Vous pouvez choisir de ne pas inclure de son dans la réunion ou sélectionner l'une de ces options de conférence : • Inclure cette conférence audio dans cette réunion Profils audio avec paramètres de conférence audio préconfigurés. Sélectionnez un profil à associer à la réunion. Acrobat Connect Pro utilise le profil pour établir la connexion à la salle de réunion et commencer la conférence audio automatiquement. • Inclure une autre conférence audio dans cette réunion Numéros de téléphone et autres paramètres permettant de rejoindre une conférence audio lorsque le fournisseur audio n'a pas été configuré avec une séquence de numérotation. Les paramètres sont destinés uniquement à être affichés, par exemple dans l'invitation et la salle de réunion. Vous devez disposer d'un compte avec le fournisseur. Remarque : si vous n'avez pas ajouté de paramètres de conférence audio lors de la création de la réunion, vous pouvez les ajouter au cours de la réunion. Demandez à tous les utilisateurs de se déconnecter de la réunion pendant que vous ajoutez des paramètres de conférence, puis de se reconnecter. Actualiser les informations de tous les éléments liés à cet élément Activez cette case à cocher pour mettre à jour tous les éléments associés à la réunion avec les nouvelles informations sur cette réunion. Envoi d'invitations pour une réunion existante Vous pouvez envoyer des invitations pour une réunion déjà créée si vous en êtes l'hôte, un administrateur ou un utilisateur disposant d'autorisations de gestion pour le dossier de cette réunion. Il s'agit d'invitations électroniques transmises aux participants pour les informer de la date, de l'heure, de la durée, du résumé, de l'URL et des renseignements sur la conférence audio. Vous pouvez également choisir de joindre un événement de calendrier Microsoft Outlook au message électronique. Cela permet aux participants d'ajouter la réunion à leur calendrier Outlook. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 25 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Le type de réunion définit le mode d'envoi des invitations : Utilisateurs enregistrés seulement Si votre réunion est réservée uniquement aux utilisateurs enregistrés, créez un message électronique personnalisé à partir d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Envoyez une invitation par courrier électronique à tous les hôtes, participants et présentateurs ou seulement aux présentateurs ou aux participants. Vous pouvez modifier l'objet et le corps du message. Tout le monde Si l'accès à votre réunion est libre et que toute personne recevant l'adresse URL peut y accéder, cliquez sur Envoyer des invitations par e-mail pour créer une invitation électronique dans votre propre client de messagerie. Ce nouveau message contient un objet (le nom de la réunion) et un texte (contenant la date, l'heure, la durée, l'URL et le résumé de la réunion) que vous êtes libre de modifier. Voir aussi « Modification des informations sur les réunions » à la page 23 Envoi d'invitations aux invités enregistrés uniquement 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Invitations dans la barre de navigation. 5 Dans le menu A, sélectionnez le groupe à inviter : Tous les hôtes, présentateurs et participants ; Hôtes seulement ; Présentateurs seulement ; ou Participants. 6 Au besoin, modifiez l'objet et le contenu du message. 7 Pour joindre un événement de calendrier Outlook au message électronique, cochez la case en regard de l'option Joindre un événement de calendrier Microsoft Outlook (iCal) au message. Dans le cas contraire, désactivez cette case à cocher. 8 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Envoi d'invitations à une réunion à accès illimité 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Le cas échéant, naviguez jusqu'au dossier contenant la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Invitations dans la barre de navigation. 5 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Envoyer des invitations par e-mail pour afficher automatiquement un nouveau message vierge dans votre client de messagerie. • Créez manuellement un nouveau message électronique, puis copiez et collez l'adresse URL de la réunion (affichée dans les détails relatifs à la réunion) dans le message. 6 Saisissez les adresses électroniques des personnes invitées ou sélectionnez-les dans votre carnet d'adresses. 7 Saisissez ou modifiez l'objet et le texte du message électronique. 8 Envoyez l'invitation électronique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 26 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Affichage des données relatives aux réunions Affichage des données relatives aux réunions avec le tableau de bord Le tableau de bord des réunions fournit une représentation graphique des données statistiques relatives à vos réunions. Pour afficher le tableau de bord, cliquez sur Réunions dans l'onglet Accueil, puis sur Tableau de bord des réunions. Les données de toutes les réunions créées sont affichées dans trois graphiques à barres. Pour ouvrir le rapport de synthèse de la réunion, cliquez dans l'un de ces graphiques. Réunions les plus actives ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de sessions. Réunions les plus fréquentées ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de participants. Cette fonctionnalité compte uniquement les participants enregistrés ; les participants invités ne sont pas repris dans le décompte. Ces derniers sont toutefois inclus dans les données figurant dans le rapport de synthèse de chaque réunion. Enregistrements les plus consultés ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de consultations (nombre de fois où chaque réunion archivée a été consultée). Les graphiques à barres s'affichent dans l'onglet Réunions d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Cliquez sur Version imprimable pour exporter le tableau de bord dans une fenêtre du navigateur en vue de l'imprimer. Voir aussi « Obtention d'informations sur une réunion » à la page 19 Rapports sur les réunions La fonctionnalité Rapports d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central vous permet de créer des rapports présentant une réunion donnée sous différentes perspectives. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, accédez à la page d'informations d'une réunion, puis cliquez sur le lien Rapports. Cela a pour effet d'afficher des liens qui vous permettent de définir les informations suivantes sur la réunion : Résumé Premier type de rapport qui s'affiche lorsque vous accédez à la fonctionnalité Rapports. Le résumé vous présente des informations consolidées sur la réunion : nom, URL d'affichage, sessions uniques (instance au cours de laquelle un utilisateur donné a rejoint, puis quitté la réunion), date de la dernière entrée d'un invité dans la salle de réunion (session la plus récente), nombre de personnes invitées, nombre de participants, nombre maximum de personnes présentes dans la salle de réunion en même temps (nombre maximal d'utilisateurs). Par participants Liste des noms et adresses de messagerie de tous les participants à la réunion, avec leurs dates et heures d'entrée et de sortie. Par sessions Liste des heures de début et de fin de chaque session, le numéro de la session et le nombre de participants. Un clic sur le numéro de la session affiche la liste des participants de cette session, ainsi que leur nom et les heures d'entrée et de sortie. Par questions Liste des sondages par session, nombre et question. Sélectionnez une vue en cliquant sur l'une des options suivantes dans la colonne Rapport : • « Voir la distribution des réponses » affiche un graphique circulaire dans lequel chaque réponse est codée par une couleur. • « Voir les réponses des utilisateurs » fournit une clé de réponse énumérant chaque réponse de ce sondage et son numéro correspondant. Ces numéros se retrouvent sur le graphique circulaire. Cette option présente la liste de tous les participants ayant répondu à ce sondage et le numéro de la réponse qu'ils ont sélectionnée (si la question autorisait plusieurs réponses, elles apparaissent toutes pour l'utilisateur).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 27 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Voir aussi « Obtention d'informations sur une réunion » à la page 19 « A propos des rapports Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 Partage de contenu pendant une réunion Partage d'un écran d'ordinateur, d'un document ou d'un tableau blanc Les hôtes et présentateurs (ainsi que les participants qui se sont vu accorder les droits appropriés) utilisent le module Partage pour afficher les éléments de contenu suivants à l'intention des personnes présentes : • Elément sélectionnés sur votre écran d'ordinateur, une ou plusieurs fenêtres ou applications ouvertes ou l'ensemble du bureau. Reportez-vous à la section « Partage d'un écran » à la page 29. • Un document, par exemple une présentation, un fichier Adobe PDF, FLV, JPEG ou d'un autre format. Reportezvous à la section « Partage d'un document ou d'un fichier PDF » à la page 33. • Un tableau blanc avec divers outils de rédaction et de dessin. Vous pouvez partager un tableau blanc autonome ou une superposition de tableau blanc s'affichant sur un autre contenu partagé. Voir la section « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35. Les participants peuvent afficher tous les documents partagés dans le module Partage, à l'exception des fichiers PDF, mais ils ne peuvent pas les télécharger. Pour permettre aux participants de télécharger d'autres documents que les fichiers PDF, l'hôte ou le présentateur doit les transférer dans le module Partage de fichiers. Lorsque vous partagez du contenu dans le module Partage, les participants voient les mouvements de votre pointeur dans la fenêtre du module Partage. Les participants peuvent voir toutes les actions effectuées dans une fenêtre, une application ou un document partagé. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Lors de leur première tentative de transfert de contenu ou de partage d'écran, les présentateurs et les hôtes d'une réunion doivent installer l'extension. Il s'agit d'une version spéciale de Flash Player dotée de fonctionnalités supplémentaires destinées aux hôtes et aux présentateurs. L'Add-in assure le chargement de fichiers sur le serveur et du partage des écrans au cours d'une réunion. Elle assure également la prise en charge des fonctions audio. Remarque : si un bloqueur de fenêtres publicitaires intempestives est activé dans votre navigateur, la boîte de dialogue de téléchargement de l'extension ne s'affichera pas. Pour résoudre ce problème, désactivez temporairement le bloqueur. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Désactivation de la synchronisation de l'affichage des documents » à la page 35UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 28 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Partage de contenu dans le module Partage Les commandes du module Partage permettent aux hôtes et aux présentateurs de partager du contenu de diverses façons. Vous pouvez afficher le module en Plein écran ou agrandir son contenu. Vous pouvez permettre aux participants de basculer entre un affichage Plein écran et un affichage Normal. Vous pouvez choisir d'afficher les modifications apportées au module du présentateur à tous les participants, de manière que le présentateur puisse contrôler la taille du module des participants. Vous pouvez partager du contenu qui est déjà chargé dans la salle de réunion, mais pas affiché actuellement. Lorsque que du contenu est affiché dans le module Partage, vous pouvez utiliser un pointeur pour attirer l'attention sur certaines zones spécifiques. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35 Modification du contenu affiché dans un module Partage 1 Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Partager. 2 Sélectionnez Mon écran, Documents ou Tableaux blancs, puis choisissez l'élément à partager dans le sous-menu pour Documents et Tableaux blancs. Affichage et activation du mode Plein écran 1 Pour afficher le module Partage en mode Plein écran, cliquez sur le bouton Plein écran de la barre de commandes du module Partage. Cliquez de nouveau sur ce bouton pour repasser en mode normal. 2 Pour que l'affichage du module Partage des participants change en même temps que le vôtre, cliquez sur le triangle accolé au bouton Plein écran et sélectionnez Activer la permutation d'affichage Plein écran pour les participants. (Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les participants contrôlent eux-mêmes la taille de leur module Partage.) Remarque : Lorsque vous activez le mode Plein écran, utilisez la combinaison de touches Alt + Tab pour atteindre la fenêtre à partager. Affichage des modifications apportées au module Partage du présentateur à tous les participants ? Cliquez sur le triangle accolé au bouton Plein écran et sélectionnez « Les modifications du présentateur affectent tout le monde » dans le sous-menu. Désactivation du partage sans fermer le module Partage ? Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, cliquez sur Arrêter le partage. Réaffichage du contenu du module Partage qui avait été fermé ? Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Sélectionnez Partage > Documents ou Partage > Tableau blanc dans la barre de commandes située au bas du module Partage, et sélectionnez le document partagé ou le tableau blanc par son nom dans le sous-menu. • Sélectionnez Modules > Partage et sélectionnez le module Partage par son nom dans le sous-menu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 29 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Utilisation d'un pointeur dans un module Partage ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, cliquez sur Pointeur . • Dans les options du module Partage, choisissez Afficher le pointeur. Partage d'un écran En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur d'une réunion, vous pouvez partager des fenêtres, des applications ou l'ensemble de votre bureau. L'administrateur de compte peut limiter les applications et les processus que vous pouvez partager. En tant que participant à une réunion, si vous souhaitez partager votre écran, un hôte doit vous en donner l'autorisation ou vous promouvoir en présentateur ou en hôte. Lorsque vous partagez un élément quelconque de votre écran, tous les participants à la réunion peuvent voir toutes les actions que vous y effectuez. Les participants suivent la progression de votre pointeur à mesure que vous le déplacez sur l'écran. La ou les zones que vous partagez doivent être affichées sur votre bureau pour apparaître dans le module Partage des autres participants. Les fenêtres qui se chevauchent sur le bureau prennent la forme d'une trame bleue dans le module Partage. Voir aussi « Partage d'un écran d'ordinateur, d'un document ou d'un tableau blanc » à la page 27 « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35 « Partage d'un document ou d'un fichier PDF » à la page 33 « Indication des applications à partager (Windows) » à la page 186 « Indication des applications à partager (Mac OS) » à la page 187 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Partage de votre écran (hôte ou présentateur) 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour ouvrir un module Partage : • Sélectionnez Affichages > Partage. • Sélectionnez Modules > Partager > Nouveau module Partage vierge. 2 Dans la salle de réunion, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Mon écran. • Cliquez sur le bouton Partager de la barre de commandes du module Partage et sélectionnez Mon écran dans le menu contextuel. Remarque : Si le module Partage est vide, vous êtes participant et n'êtes pas autorisé à partager. 3 Dans la fenêtre Démarrer le partage d'écran, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Bureau (ou Partage du Bureau sécurisé) pour partager le contenu de votre bureau. L'option Partage du Bureau sécurisé n'apparaît que si l'administrateur de compte a limité les applications et processus que vous pouvez partager. L'option Bureau vous permet de partager le contenu autorisé de votre bureau. Si plusieurs écrans sont connectés à votre ordinateur, un bureau s'affiche pour chacun d'eux. Choisissez le bureau à partager.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 30 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • Sélectionnez Fenêtres pour partager une ou plusieurs fenêtres autorisées qui sont ouvertes et en cours d'exécution sur votre ordinateur. Choisissez la ou les fenêtres à partager. • Sélectionnez Applications pour partager une application autorisée et toutes les fenêtres associées ouvertes et en cours d'exécution sur votre ordinateur. Choisissez la ou les applications à partager. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Partager situé au bas de la fenêtre Démarrer le partage d'écran pour commencer le partage. Partage de votre écran (participant) 1 Pour partager votre écran, demandez à votre hôte de sélectionner votre nom dans le module Liste des participants, puis cliquez sur Demander le partage d'écran. 2 Le message d'alerte suivant apparaît : Commencer le partage du Bureau ? Cliquez sur Commencer. 3 Dans la fenêtre Démarrer le partage d'écran, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Bureau (ou Partage du Bureau sécurisé) pour partager le contenu de votre bureau. L'option Partage du Bureau sécurisé n'apparaît que si l'administrateur de compte a limité les applications et processus que vous pouvez partager. L'option Bureau vous permet de partager le contenu autorisé de votre bureau. Si plusieurs écrans sont connectés à votre ordinateur, un bureau s'affiche pour chacun d'eux. Choisissez le bureau à partager. • Sélectionnez Fenêtres pour partager une ou plusieurs fenêtres autorisées qui sont ouvertes et en cours d'exécution sur votre ordinateur. Choisissez la ou les fenêtres à partager. • Sélectionnez Applications pour partager une application autorisée et toutes les fenêtres associées ouvertes et en cours d'exécution sur votre ordinateur. Choisissez la ou les applications à partager. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Partager situé au bas de la fenêtre Démarrer le partage d'écran pour commencer le partage. Partage du contrôle de votre écran En mode partage d'écran, vous pouvez laisser le contrôle d'une fenêtre, d'une application ou d'un bureau partagé à un autre hôte ou un autre présentateur. 1 Commencez le partage de votre écran. 2 Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, un hôte ou un présentateur clique sur le bouton Demande de contrôle. 3 Vous voyez un message de demande dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de la salle de réunion. Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Accepter pour confier le contrôle de votre écran. • Cliquez sur Refuser pour refuser le contrôle de votre écran. Demande du contrôle d'un écran partagé Les hôtes et présentateurs peuvent demander le contrôle de l'écran, mais cette demande doit être accordée. Toute prise de contrôle s'avère impossible en l'absence d'autorisation. ? Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Demande de contrôle. Si la demande est acceptée, un message de confirmation s'affiche sur votre écran. Le bouton Demande de contrôle devient Libérer le contrôle. Vous pouvez désormais prendre le contrôle de l'écran partagé. Abandon du contrôle d'un écran partagé ? Dans la barre de commandes (ou dans la fenêtre de notification) du module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Libérer le contrôle pour rendre le contrôle de l'écran partagé au présentateur ou à l'hôte d'origine. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 31 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Aperçu de votre écran partagé tel qu'il apparaît dans la salle de réunion Lors du partage d'une application, d'une fenêtre ou d'un bureau sur votre ordinateur, sélectionnez l'option Aperçu pour visualiser votre écran tel qu'il apparaît dans le module Partage des participants. ? Dans le module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module et sélectionnez Aperçu dans le module pendant le partage d'écran ou cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu . (Quand vous avez terminé, cliquez à nouveau sur Aperçu .) Partage d'une présentation Pour les hôtes ou les présentateurs qui partagent une présentation dans le module Partage, des commandes spéciales permettent de parcourir et d'afficher la présentation. L'affichage d'une présentation présente les zones suivantes : Présentation Partie principale de la fenêtre dans laquelle s'affichent les diapositives. Zone latérale de la présentation Zone située dans la partie droite (emplacement par défaut) de la fenêtre du navigateur dans laquelle s'affichent le nom de la présentation, les informations sur le présentateur et les onglets Plan, Miniature, Commentaires et Recherche (si ces onglets ont été inclus dans le thème de la présentation). Si l'encadré n'est pas visible, cliquez sur Afficher/Masquer l'encadré dans la barre d'outils Présentation. Barre d'outils de la présentation Barre située en bas de la présentation. Elle permet de contrôler la lecture, le contenu audio, les pièces jointes et la taille d'écran de la présentation. Cette barre n'est visible que pour les hôtes, sauf lorsqu'un hôte choisit de l'afficher pour les participants. (Pour afficher toutes les options de la barre d'outils de présentation, le fichier de présentation doit être chargé dans la bibliothèque de contenu à partir d'Adobe Presenter. Si vous chargez le fichier PPT PowerPoint directement dans le module Partage à partir de votre ordinateur, les options de la barre d'outils de présentation ne seront pas toutes visibles. Il se peut que vous deviez également cliquer sur Sync.) Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35 Utilisation de l'onglet Plan de la présentation La plupart des présentations comportent un onglet Plan dans la zone latérale. Ce volet Plan indique le titre et la durée de chaque diapositive. Vous pouvez l'utiliser pour afficher des informations et pour déplacer une diapositive donnée dans la présentation. La diapositive en cours apparaît en surbrillance avec une couleur vive, dont vous pouvez modifier le thème. Vous pouvez choisir entre afficher le plan en surbrillance à tous les participants ou uniquement aux hôtes et aux présentateurs. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Plan dans la zone latérale située à droite. 2 Pour accéder à une diapositive spécifique de la présentation, cliquez sur son titre dans l'onglet Plan. 3 Pour afficher tout le titre de la diapositive, placez le pointeur sur son titre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 32 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Utilisation de l'onglet Miniature de la présentation Un onglet Miniature peut apparaître dans la zone latérale des présentations. Cet onglet Miniature affiche une petite image de chaque diapositive, son titre et sa durée. La diapositive en cours apparaît en surbrillance avec une couleur vive, dont vous pouvez modifier le thème. Vous pouvez utiliser l'onglet Miniature pour afficher rapidement le contenu de chaque diapositive et pour en sélectionner une dans la présentation. Remarque : si vous transférez vos présentations directement depuis votre ordinateur dans une réunion, l'onglet Miniature ne s'affiche pas. Adobe recommande d'ajouter des présentations dans une réunion depuis la bibliothèque de contenu. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Miniature dans la zone latérale située à droite. 2 Pour accéder à une diapositive, cliquez sur son titre dans l'onglet Miniature. 3 Pour afficher le titre de la diapositive, placez le pointeur sur son titre. Affichage des commentaires des diapositives de la présentation Lorsque vous créez une présentation dans PowerPoint, vous pouvez entrer des commentaires pour chaque diapositive. Si de tels commentaires existent, vous pouvez les afficher dans la présentation. Les commentaires apparaissent à droite de la fenêtre de la présentation. La taille de l'onglet Commentaires ne peut pas être modifiée. ? Cliquez sur l'onglet Commentaires dans la zone latérale à droite. Le texte des commentaires complet est affiché. Le texte n'est pas mis en forme et ne peut pas être directement modifié dans l'onglet. Recherche de texte dans une présentation 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Recherche dans la zone latérale à droite. 2 Tapez le texte à rechercher directement dans la zone prévue à cet effet. 3 Cliquez sur Rechercher . 4 Les résultats de la recherche sont affichés sous la zone de texte. Cliquez sur le titre d'une diapositive dans la liste des résultats pour afficher cette diapositive. Options de la barre d'outils de la présentation La barre d'outils située au bas de la présentation permet de contrôler l'aspect et la lecture. (Pour afficher toutes les options de la barre d'outils de présentation, le fichier de présentation doit être chargé dans la bibliothèque de contenu à partir d'Adobe Presenter. Si vous chargez le fichier PPT PowerPoint directement dans le module Partage à partir de votre ordinateur, les options de la barre d'outils de présentation ne seront pas toutes visibles. Il se peut que vous deviez également cliquer sur Sync.) Lecture/Pause Interrompt et reprend la lecture de la diapositive en cours. Précédent Revient à la diapositive précédente de la présentation. Suivant Passe à la diapositive suivante de la présentation. Barre de progression des diapositives Indique et contrôle la position de la lecture dans la diapositive en cours. Le repère de position se déplace au fur et à mesure de la lecture de la diapositive. Pour déplacer le point de lecture, vous pouvez faire glisser la flèche vers l'avant ou l'arrière. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur un emplacement spécifique de la barre de progression pour déplacer le repère et reprendre la lecture à cet endroit. Numéro de diapositive Indique le numéro de la diapositive affichée et le nombre total de diapositives (par exemple, 2/10).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 33 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Etat Indique l'état de la diapositive affichée (Lecture en cours, Arrêté, Pas d'audio ou Présentation terminée, par exemple). Durée Indique la durée déjà lue de la diapositive affichée et sa durée totale au fur et à mesure de la lecture (par exemple, 00.02/00.05). Volume audio Indique le niveau sonore défini pour la diapositive. Pièces jointes Affiche une petite fenêtre avec les pièces jointes (par exemple, documents, feuilles de calcul, images, adresses URL, etc.) éventuellement ajoutées. Afficher/Masquer l'encadré Affiche ou masque la zone latérale. Partage d'un document ou d'un fichier PDF En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, vous pouvez partager les documents transférés dans la bibliothèque de contenu ou partager directement ceux de votre ordinateur. Le partage de documents depuis la bibliothèque de contenu présente les avantages suivants par rapport au partage de votre écran : • Meilleure qualité de l'affichage pour les participants. • Bande passante nécessaire moins importante pour les présentateurs et les participants. • Options de navigation plus nombreuses avec l'encadré Adobe Presenter. • Préchargement et organisation des documents dans la salle de réunion. • Présentation simplifiée lors de l'intervention de plusieurs présentateurs. Si vous désactivez le partage, modifiez le contenu d'un module Partage ou fermez ce dernier, le document demeure dans la salle de réunion et peut être affiché de nouveau. Lorsque vous supprimez un module Partage, le document est également supprimé de la salle de réunion. (Si vous l'avez transféré précédemment dans la bibliothèque de contenu, il reste disponible à cet emplacement.) Pour modifier un document partagé, vous devez modifier son fichier source, puis le charger à nouveau dans la réunion. Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35 Fichiers PDF dans Acrobat Connect Pro Dans la bibliothèque de contenu, les PDF sont stockés sous forme de fichiers PDF. Lorsqu'ils sont partagés dans une salle de réunion, les PDF sont convertis en fichiers SWF pour que les fonctionnalités de navigation synchronisée et de tableau blanc soient activées. Les hôtes et présentateurs peuvent télécharger des PDF depuis le module Partage. Les participants peuvent télécharger des PDF si les hôtes et les présentateurs cliquent sur le bouton Sync. afin de désactiver la synchronisation de l'affichage. Les portefeuilles PDF et les fichiers PDF qui sont protégés par mot de passe ne peuvent pas être convertis en fichiers SWF, ce qui empêche leur partage dans Connect Pro. Par ailleurs, certaines fonctionnalités de PDF ne sont pas prises en charge lors du partage des PDF dans Connect Pro. Dans certains cas, les objets du PDF sont soit supprimés, soit remplacés par un aperçu. Les objets suivants sont supprimés dans Connect Pro : • Texte de commentaire (seule l'icône de note est affichée)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 34 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • Pièces jointes • Signets • Clips audio (seule l'icône du bouton de lecture est affichée) Les objets suivants sont remplacés par un simple aperçu d'image (une image représentant l'objet) dans Connect Pro : • Formulaires • Objets 3D • Objets multimédia (fichiers audio, vidéo et SWF) Partage des documents depuis la bibliothèque de contenu L'hôte ou le présentateur peuvent charger des présentations, des fichiers Adobe PDF, SWF, JPEG, MP3 ou FLV de la bibliothèque de contenu vers un module Partage d'une réunion. Dans la bibliothèque de contenu, vous pouvez sélectionner des documents dans un dossier de contenu partagé ou dans un dossier utilisateur, qu'il s'agisse de votre propre dossier ou de celui de quelqu'un d'autre. La bibliothèque de contenu est accessible dans l'application Acrobat Connect Pro Central. (Pour pouvoir accéder au dossier d'un autre utilisateur, ce dernier doit vous accorder une autorisation d'affichage). Si vous partagez une présentation, le module Partage affiche des commandes qui vous permettent de la parcourir. Remarque : pour créer des présentations à partir de fichiers PowerPoint, utilisez Adobe Presenter. Acrobat Connect Pro ne prend pas en charge les images JPEG Progressive Scan. 1 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans le module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Documents. • Sélectionnez Modules > Partager dans la barre de menus. • Sélectionnez Partage > Documentation dans la barre de commandes située en bas du module Partage. 2 Sélectionnez Choisir dans une bibliothèque de contenu dans le menu contextuel. 3 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Contenu partagé présente le contenu transféré et mis à la disposition de tous les détenteurs d'un compte avec les autorisations appropriées. • Contenu utilisateurs présente le contenu transféré dans des dossiers utilisateurs individuels. Pour afficher le contenu du dossier d'un autre utilisateur, vous devez disposer d'une autorisation d'affichage pour ce dossier. • Mon contenu présente le contenu transféré dans votre propre dossier utilisateur. • Contenu transféré présente le contenu transféré pour la réunion en cours. 4 Sélectionnez le document à partager, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le document sélectionné apparaît dans le module Partage. Son nom s’affiche dans la barre de titre du module. Partage des documents de votre ordinateur Vous pouvez charger des fichiers PPT, Adobe PDF, SWF, JPEG, MP3 ou FLV depuis votre ordinateur dans un module Partage. Les fichiers sont transférés sur le serveur. Les fichiers PPT sont convertis en présentations. 1 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans le module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Documents. • Sélectionnez Modules > Partager dans la barre de menus. • Sélectionnez Partage dans la barre de commandes située en bas du module. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 35 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 2 Sélectionnez Choisir sur mon ordinateur dans le menu déroulant. 3 Sélectionnez le document à partager, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le document sélectionné apparaît dans le module Partage. Son nom s’affiche dans la barre de titre du module. Le document est ajouté dans le dossier Contenu transféré associé à la salle de réunion dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Un administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro Central peut déplacer ce document vers le dossier Contenu partagé de la bibliothèque de contenu pour le mettre à la disposition des autres réunions. Désactivation de la synchronisation de l'affichage des documents Par défaut, Acrobat Connect Pro synchronise l'affichage des documents de sorte que les participants puissent voir la même image que le présentateur. Un hôte ou un présentateur peut utiliser le bouton Sync. pour désactiver la synchronisation de manière à ce que les participants puissent parcourir les présentations ou les documents PDF à leur propre rythme. Remarque : Le bouton Sync n'apparaît que lorsqu'un contenu multi-trame est chargé dans le module Partage. ? Dans la fenêtre du module Partage présentant le contenu chargé, cliquez sur le bouton Sync (par défaut, cette option est activée). Les commandes de lecture de la présentation s'affichent à droite du module Partage. Cliquez une nouvelle fois sur le bouton Sync pour désactiver la synchronisation. Partage d'un tableau blanc Un hôte ou un présentateur (ou un participant qui s'est vu accorder les droits appropriés) peut utiliser un tableau blanc pour travailler de manière collaborative à la création de texte, de dessins et d'autres annotations pendant une réunion. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28 « Partage d'une présentation » à la page 31 Création et affichage d'un tableau blanc Un tableau blanc permet aux hôtes et aux présentateurs de taper du texte et de tracer librement des lignes, des cercles ou des carrés et tout tracé à main levée en temps réel pendant une réunion. Vous pouvez utiliser un tableau blanc de deux manières différentes dans un module Partage : • Un tableau blanc autonome permet aux présentateurs de créer du contenu sur un fond blanc. • Une superposition de tableau blanc permet aux présentateurs de créer du contenu sur un document existant du module Partage, en l'annotant ou en y dessinant. Vous pouvez placer un tableau blanc sur les présentations, ainsi que sur les documents JPG, SWF, FLV et PDF. Si vous désactivez le partage, modifiez le contenu d'un module Partage ou fermez ce dernier, le tableau blanc demeure dans la salle de réunion et peut être affiché de nouveau. Lorsque vous supprimez un module Partage, le tableau blanc est également supprimé.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 36 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Superposition du tableau blanc A. Pointeur B. Afficher/Masquer la superposition du tableau blanc C. Annotation ajoutée à l'aide de l'outil Crayon D. Options de l'outil Tableau blanc E. Afficher/Masquer les outils du tableau blanc Création d'un tableau blanc autonome dans un module Partage vierge 1 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans le module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Tableau blanc. • Choisissez Modules > Partager. • Cliquez sur Partage dans la barre de commandes située en bas du module. 2 Sélectionnez Nouveau tableau blanc dans le menu contextuel. Ajout d'une superposition de tableau blanc dans un module Partage ? Une fois le document affiché dans le module Partage, choisissez l'une des actions suivantes : • Dans la barre de commandes du module Partage, cliquez sur le bouton Tableau blanc. • Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Partage, puis sélectionnez Superposition du tableau blanc. • Si vous partagez une application, cliquez sur la flèche en regard du bouton rouge Arrêter le partage et sélectionnez Pause et annotation dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. • Si vous partagez l'intégralité de votre bureau, cliquez sur l'icône Acrobat Connect Add-in dans la zone de notification (Windows) ou dans la barre d'icônes (Macintosh) et sélectionnez Pause, puis Annoter. Affichage d'un tableau blanc existant ? Sélectionnez Modules > Partage > [nom du tableau blanc]. A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 37 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Effacement d'un tableau blanc ? Appuyez sur Ctrl+D ou sur le bouton Effacer de la barre d'outils Tableau blanc. Navigation entre les différentes pages d'un tableau blanc Un tableau blanc autonome comporte plusieurs pages. Si vous souhaitez présenter plusieurs pages d'un tableau blanc pendant une réunion, utilisez les touches fléchées avant/arrière pour passer d'une page à l'autre. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Barre d'outils du tableau blanc. 2 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la droite pour afficher la page suivante. • Cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la gauche pour afficher la page précédente. Outils de dessin des tableaux blancs Les outils indiqués ci-dessous sont à votre disposition pour créer du texte et des dessins sur le tableau blanc. Remarque : si votre module Partage est très petit, il se peut que tous les outils du tableau blanc ne soient pas visibles. Pour afficher tous les outils, agrandissez le module dans le sens de la hauteur. Outil Sélection Permet de sélectionner une forme ou une zone du tableau blanc. Cliquez sur une forme pour la sélectionner. Pour créer un rectangle de sélection afin de sélectionner toutes les formes incluses dans ce rectangle, cliquez dans le tableau blanc ou le contenu et déplacez le curseur en maintenant le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé. Le rectangle de sélection comporte huit points de contrôle qui permettent de redimensionner les formes sélectionnées. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée tout en faisant glisser un point de contrôle d'angle pour conserver les mêmes proportions lors du redimensionnement. Sélectionnez et faites glisser une forme pour la déplacer. Pour ajouter une forme à la sélection en cours, cliquez sur cette forme en maintenant la touche Maj appuyée. Outil Crayon Permet de créer une ligne de forme libre. Pour modifier la couleur et l’épaisseur du trait, utilisez le sélecteur de couleurs et le menu déroulant d’épaisseur de tracé, dans la partie inférieure du module Tableau blanc. Outil Marqueur Permet de créer une ligne de marqueur épaisse et de forme libre. Pour modifier la couleur et l’épaisseur du trait, utilisez le sélecteur de couleurs et le menu déroulant d’épaisseur de tracé, dans la partie inférieure du module Tableau blanc. Outil Ligne Permet de tracer une ligne droite entre deux points. Pour modifier la couleur et l’épaisseur du trait, utilisez le sélecteur de couleurs et le menu déroulant de largeur de ligne, dans la partie inférieure du module Tableau blanc. Pour créer des flèches, utilisez les boutons fléchés dans la partie inférieure du module Tableau blanc. Pour que la ligne soit alignée tous les 45 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pendant que vous tracez la ligne. Outil Rectangle Crée des formes rectangulaires et carrées. Vous avez la possibilité de personnaliser la couleur et l'épaisseur du contour, et la couleur du fond à l'aide du sélecteur de couleurs et du menu déroulant d'épaisseur de contour. Vous pouvez appliquer le paramètre Aucune couleur au contour ou au fond ; cependant, vous ne pouvez pas l'utiliser pour les deux couleurs en même temps. Faites glisser le curseur de la souris pour modifier la taille d'une forme. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pendant que vous tracez la forme pour transformer le rectangle en carré. Outil Ellipse Permet de créer des cercles ou des ellipses. Pour modifier la couleur de fond, ainsi que la couleur et l’épaisseur du trait, utilisez le sélecteur de couleurs et le menu déroulant d’épaisseur de tracé. Faites glisser le curseur de la souris pour modifier la taille d'une forme. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pendant que vous tracez la forme pour transformer l'ellipse en cercle. Outil Texte Permet de créer un champ de texte flottant sur plusieurs lignes. Pour modifier la couleur de fond, la police et sa taille, utilisez le sélecteur de couleurs et les menus déroulants des polices et des tailles de police. Pour créer la zone de texte, faites glisser le curseur de la souris sans relâcher le bouton.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 38 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Outil Tampon encreur Permet de placer divers symboles (une coche, une flèche, une étoile ou une croix) sur l'écran. Le tampon par défaut est une flèche. Vous pouvez modifier l'image du tampon en cliquant sur les boutons en forme de flèche, d'étoile, de coche et de croix. La couleur et la taille du tampon peuvent être modifiées à l’aide du sélecteur de couleurs et du menu déroulant. Si votre société possède un compte Acrobat Connect Pro avec licence, vous pouvez utiliser une image personnalisée pour le tampon encreur. Consultez l'article Creating Custom Whiteboard Stamps (« Création de tampons de tableau blanc personnalisés ») sur le Centre des développeurs Adobe Acrobat Connect à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/devnet_connect_stamps_fr. Annuler Annule l’action précédente. Vous pouvez annuler les actions suivantes : traçage d’une forme, déplacement d’une forme, redimensionnement d’une forme, effacement du tableau blanc et modification de la propriété d’une forme. Le nombre d’annulations possibles est illimité. Répéter Répète l'action précédente. Effacer Efface tout le contenu du tableau blanc. Imprimer Imprime le contenu d'un tableau blanc. Transfert et gestion de fichiers à l'aide du module Partage de fichiers Les hôtes et présentateurs (ainsi que les participants qui se sont vu accorder les droits appropriés) peuvent transférer des fichiers à partager avec des participants à la réunion à partir de leur ordinateur ou de la bibliothèque de contenu. Les participants de la réunion ne peuvent pas transférer des fichiers, mais l'hôte peut modifier leur état pour leur permettre de le faire. Les participants qui souhaitent transférer des fichiers doivent demander à l'hôte de modifier leur rôle ou de leur octroyer des droits supplémentaires pour le module Partage de fichiers. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28 Transfert d'un fichier 1 Si votre salle de réunion ne contient pas de module Partage de fichiers, cliquez sur Modules > Partage de fichiers > Nouveau module Partage de fichiers. 2 Cliquez sur Transférer le fichier. 3 Utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Cliquez sur Choisir dans une bibliothèque de contenu et accédez au dossier où est stocké le fichier. • Cliquez sur Choisir sur mon ordinateur, puis accédez au dossier où est stocké le fichier à partir de la fenêtre Parcourir le contenu. 4 Sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Téléchargement d'un fichier Les participants à la réunion peuvent télécharger les fichiers du module Partage de fichiers vers leurs ordinateurs. 1 Dans le module Partage de fichiers, sélectionnez le fichier à télécharger. 2 Sélectionnez Enregistrer sur mon ordinateur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 39 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Une fenêtre de navigateur apparaît et présente la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sur mon ordinateur. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Cliquer pour télécharger. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 5 Accédez à l'emplacement de votre choix et cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Une fois la procédure de téléchargement terminée, cliquez sur Fermer. 7 Fermez la fenêtre de navigateur que vous avez ouverte à l'étape 2. Modification du nom d'un fichier Cette opération change uniquement l'étiquette qui apparaît dans le module Partage de fichiers ; elle ne modifie pas le nom réel du fichier. 1 Dans le module Partage de fichiers, sélectionnez le fichier à renommer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez Renommer la sélection. 4 Indiquez le nouveau nom dans la zone de texte, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression d'un fichier 1 Dans le module Partage de fichiers, sélectionnez le fichier à supprimer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez Supprimer la sélection. Affichage des pages Web aux participants Pendant une réunion, l'hôte ou le présentateur peut demander aux participants de visiter des sites Web. Pour faire en sorte que le navigateur des participants ouvre l'URL désignée, vous pouvez utiliser le module Liens Web. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Ajout d'un nouveau lien Web 1 Si votre salle de réunion ne contient pas de module Liens Web, cliquez sur Modules > Liens Web > Nouveau module Liens Web. (Il n'est pas nécessaire de saisir du texte dans la zone Parcourir ; ce texte n'est pas reporté dans les zones de nom et d'URL à l'étape suivante.) 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Sélectionnez Ajouter un lien. 4 Saisissez le nom et l’adresse URL dans les zones de texte. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Affichage d'un lien Web à tous les participants 1 Sélectionnez un lien dans le module Liens Web ou entrez une URL dans la zone Parcourir.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 40 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 2 Cliquez sur Parcourir. L'URL ouvre une nouvelle instance du navigateur Web sur votre écran, ainsi que sur celui de chaque participant. Modification du nom d'un lien Web 1 Sélectionnez un nom d'URL dans le module Liens Web. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Sélectionnez Renommer le lien sélectionné dans le menu contextuel. 4 Entrez le nouveau nom dans la zone Nom de l'URL. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Suppression d'un lien Web 1 Sélectionnez un lien dans le module Liens Web. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Sélectionnez Retirer la sélection dans le menu contextuel. Prise de notes pendant une réunion Les hôtes et les présentateurs utilisent un module Note pour prendre des notes de réunion visibles par tous les participants. Chaque message reste visible dans le module Note tout au long de la réunion ou jusqu'à ce qu'un présentateur la modifie ou en affiche un autre. L'hôte peut retirer le module Note de l'affichage ou basculer vers un autre affichage ne contenant pas de module Note. Une nouvelle réunion créée depuis le Modèle de réunion par défaut contient trois modes d'affichage. Chaque disposition contient une instance du même module Note. Lorsque vous tapez un message dans le module Note d'un mode d'affichage, le même texte apparaît dans les trois modes d'affichage. La nouvelle option du module Note vous permet de créer une seule instance d'un module Note qui apparaît dans un seul mode d'affichage. Vous pouvez utiliser le module Note de plusieurs manières : • Créer une note unique et persistante que toutes les personnes présentes peuvent voir pendant la réunion. • Créer plusieurs notes dans un même module. • Créer plusieurs modules Note pour afficher différentes notes. Vous pouvez également envoyer le contenu d'un module Note par courrier électronique. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 41 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Création d'un module Note L'hôte peut créer et afficher plusieurs modules Note contenant chacun son propre texte. Il est possible d’utiliser différents modules Note pour des dispositions et des réunions différentes. Lorsque vous créez un module Note, un nom par défaut lui est attribué, comme Note 1, Note 2, etc. Vous pouvez renommer, déplacer et redimensionner le module Note après l'avoir créé. ? Dans la barre de menus située en haut de la scène, sélectionnez Modules > Note > Nouveau module Note, ou choisissez Nouvelle note dans les options du module Note. Ajout d'une note dans un module Note 1 En tant qu'hôte ou que présentateur, cliquez n'importe où dans le module Note. 2 Tapez le texte qui doit apparaître dans le module Note. Création de plusieurs notes dans un module Note L'hôte ou le présentateur peut créer plusieurs notes dans un module Note, puis choisir celle qu'il désire afficher. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 2 Sélectionnez Nouvelle note dans le menu contextuel. 3 Tapez le texte de la note. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module . 5 Cliquez sur l’option Choisir note. 6 Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez le nom de la note à afficher. Modification du texte de la note L'hôte ou le présentateur peut modifier le texte dans un module Note (les participants pourront visualiser immédiatement toutes les modifications qui ont été effectuées). Tout le texte d'un module utilise le même formatage. 1 Cliquez en n’importe quel point du module Note contenant le texte à modifier. 2 Modifiez le texte. 3 Pour modifier la taille du texte, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Note, puis sélectionnez Taille du texte. Sélectionnez une taille de texte. 4 Pour modifier l'alignement du texte, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Note, sélectionnez une option d'alignement : à gauche, au centre ou à droite. Modification du nom d'une note Lorsqu'un hôte ou un présentateur crée une note, un nom par défaut lui est attribué, comme Note 1 ou Note 2. En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez la renommer. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Double-cliquez sur le nom de la note dans le module et entrez-en un nouveau. • Dans la barre de menus, cliquez sur Modules > Organiser les modules. Sélectionnez le nom du module Note que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur Renommer, puis entrez un nouveau nom. Suppression d'une note 1 Cliquez sur Modules > Organiser les modules. 2 Sélectionnez le nom de la note à supprimer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 42 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur Terminé. Envoi du contenu d'un module Note par courrier électronique Les hôtes peuvent envoyer le contenu d'un module Note par message électronique. (Cette option nécessite l'installation du module Acrobat Connect.) 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 2 Choisissez Envoyer la note par courrier électronique. Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions Utilisez le module Conversation pour communiquer avec les participants pendant une réunion. Si vous avez une question, mais que vous ne souhaitez pas interrompre la réunion pour autant, ou que le son n'est pas activé sur votre ordinateur, il est possible d'envoyer un message de conversation aux présentateurs ou à un autre participant de la réunion. Par exemple, lorsque vous rejoignez une réunion, présentez-vous en adressant un message de conversation à tous les participants. En tant que présentateur, vous pouvez utiliser plusieurs modules Conversation simultanément. Les modules Conversation peuvent être configurés de manière à afficher le contenu à tout le monde ou uniquement aux présentateurs (et hôtes). Dans le module Conversation, les messages s'affichent de manière séquentielle, à mesure que vous les envoyez. Les questions et les réponses n'étant pas reliées entre elles, la réponse à une question peut apparaître ailleurs dans la liste du module Conversation. Les présentateurs peuvent autoriser les participants à avoir une conversation privée, à effacer une conversation et à désactiver les notifications de conversation. Le contenu du module Conversation est persistant et reste dans la salle de réunion jusqu'à ce qu'il soit supprimé. Si vous souhaitez conserver le contenu d'un module Conversation pour l'utiliser ultérieurement, vous pouvez l'envoyer par courrier électronique. Vous pouvez utiliser un module Q & R pour répondre aux questions posées par les participants. Le module Q & R est associé au module Conversation. Lorsqu'un participant pose une question dans le module Conversation, un présentateur peut répondre dans le module Q & R associé. Lorsqu'un présentateur répond à une question, la question et la réponse apparaissent associées dans le module Conversation. Un hôte ou un présentateur relie le module Q & R au module Conversation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 43 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Un participant pose une question dans le module Conversation (Q & R). Le présentateur sélectionne une question et y répond à partir du module Q & R associé. La question et sa réponse apparaissent associées dans le module Conversation. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Prise de notes pendant une réunion » à la page 40 Envoi d'un message de conversation Utilisez le module Conversation pour rédiger un message de conversation et l'envoyer à un seul participant, à tous les présentateurs de la réunion ou encore à toutes les personnes présentes. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 44 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Lorsque vous recevez un message d'un autre participant, votre module Conversation affiche le nom de l'expéditeur et le message. Si celui-ci a été adressé à tout le monde, le nom de l'expéditeur est directement suivi du message. Si le message vous a été spécifiquement adressé, le nom de l'expéditeur est suivi de l'indication « (en privé) ». Si le message a été adressé aux présentateurs uniquement, le nom de l'expéditeur est suivi de l'indication « (présentateurs) ». 1 Dans le menu contextuel en bas du module Conversation, choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Le nom du participant destinataire • Présentateurs • Tout le monde • Poser une question (disponible si un module Q & R est associé au module Conversation) 2 Cliquez dans la zone de texte du module Conversation. 3 Saisissez votre message. 4 Utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Cliquez sur Envoyer le message en regard de la zone de texte. • Appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou Retour. Votre nom, celui du destinataire et votre message apparaissent dans le module Conversation. Désactivation d'une conversation privée entre participants Par défaut, deux participants peuvent converser en privé. En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez désactiver cette option et empêcher toute conversation privée. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Conversation. 2 Cliquez sur Activer les conversations privées pour les participants pour désactiver cette option. Une coche indique que l'option est activée. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible si le module Conversation est associé à un module Q & R. Effacement des messages d'un module Conversation Si le module Conversation d'une réunion doit être vide, l'hôte ou le présentateur peut effacer la totalité des messages adressés aux personnes présentes. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Conversation. 2 Choisissez Effacer la conversation. Notifications de conversation En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, si vous utilisez Acrobat Connect Add-in, les notifications de conversation vous permettent de communiquer avec votre public au cours de votre présentation ; la fenêtre de la réunion est alors réduite ou agrandie en mode Plein écran, dissimulant ainsi le module Conversation. Si un participant vous envoie un message lors d'une présentation en mode Plein écran ou partage d'écran, une notification apparaît dans l'angle inférieur droit de votre écran. Le nom de d'expéditeur ainsi que les premiers mots du message apparaissent dans la fenêtre de notification. Les notifications de conversation sont activées par défaut. Vous pouvez les désactiver si vous ne souhaitez pas qu'elles apparaissent au cours de votre présentation. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Conversation. 2 Sélectionnez Options de notification de conversation > Désactiver. Remarque : cette option n'est pas disponible si le module Conversation est associé à un module Q & R.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 45 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Modération des questions à l'aide du module Q & R En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, le module Q & R vous offre un contrôle supplémentaire pour gérer les questions et les réponses au cours d'une réunion. Il est ainsi possible de transférer une question au présentateur concerné et de mettre les questions en file d'attente avant de pouvoir y répondre. Pour gérer les questions en file d'attente, vous pouvez appliquer un filtre de façon à n'afficher que certaines questions. Vous pouvez sélectionner et modifier une question, saisir votre réponse puis l'envoyer à tous les participants ou uniquement à l'expéditeur. Les questions et les réponses sont associées dans le module Conversation (Q & R). A. Options de filtre B. Personne qui répond C. Suivant D. Liste des présentateurs E. Supprimer la question F. Liste des messages entrants G. Champ de saisie de la réponse H. Volet de prévisualisation I. Répondre à tout le monde J. Répondre uniquement à l'expéditeur K. Options du module Vous trouverez ci-après des exemples illustrant l'utilité du module Q & R. • Au cours d'une réunion impliquant de nombreux participants, des questions sont ajoutées dans une liste d'attente du module Q & R pendant la présentation. A la fin de la présentation, l'intervenant consulte les messages et peut utiliser un filtre avant de répondre aux questions. • Le modérateur de la réunion répond aux questions de logistique et transfère les questions techniques à un présentateur ingénieur. • Le modérateur de réunion peut envoyer certaines réponses uniquement à l'expéditeur. Les réponses présentant un intérêt pour tout le monde sont envoyées à toutes les personnes présentes à la réunion. Ajout d'un module Q & R et création d'un lien vers un module Conversation En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, vous pouvez ajouter un module Q & R à une salle de réunion disposant déjà d'un module Conversation. Vous devez alors créer un lien entre les deux modules. Une fois les deux modules reliés, la mention « (Q & R) » est ajoutée au nom du module Conversation. En mode Q & R, les participants peuvent envoyer des messages uniquement aux présentateurs. Il ne peut y avoir qu'un seul module Q & R par salle de réunion. 1 Si la zone réservée aux présentateurs n'apparaît pas à l'écran, cliquez sur Présenter > Afficher la zone réservée aux présentateurs. 2 Cliquez sur Modules > Q & R. 3 Dans le module Q & R, sélectionnez dans le menu contextuel le nom du module Conversation que vous souhaitez associer. 4 Cliquez sur Lien. Le module Conversation est associé au module Q & R et (Q & R) s'affiche dans le nom du module Conversation. H I J K A B C D E F GUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 46 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Envoi d'une question dans le module Conversation 1 Dans le menu contextuel au bas du module Conversation, sélectionnez Poser une question (cette option est disponible uniquement si un module Q & R est associé au module Conversation). 2 Entrez votre message dans la zone de texte, puis cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer un message (flèche) ou appuyez sur la touche Entrée. Réponse aux questions à l'aide du module Q & R 1 Sélectionnez une question dans la liste des messages entrants. La question est mise en surbrillance et apparaît également dans le volet de prévisualisation afin que vous puissiez la modifier si nécessaire. 2 Modifiez si nécessaire la question dans le volet de prévisualisation. 3 Tapez la réponse dans le champ situé en bas du module. 4 Cliquez sur l'un des boutons suivants dans le coin inférieur droit du module Q & R : Répondre à tout le monde Envoie la réponse à tous les participants à la réunion. Répondre uniquement à l'expéditeur Répond uniquement à la personne qui a posé la question. Lorsqu'une question est envoyée, elle est supprimée de la liste Messages entrants, puis apparaît dans la liste « Questions résolues » du module Conversation. Application de filtres aux questions En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, vous pouvez ajouter un filtre à la file d'attente de questions dans un module Q & R, afin d'afficher certaines questions et d'en masquer d'autres. Vous pouvez également transférer une question à un présentateur plus compétent sur le sujet. 1 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant dans le coin supérieur gauche du module Q & R. 2 Sélectionnez un filtre parmi les options suivantes : Afficher toutes les questions Affiche toutes les questions que vous avez reçues depuis un nouveau module ou depuis la dernière fois que les questions ont été effacées. Afficher mes questions N'affiche que les questions qui vous ont été affectées. Afficher les questions ouvertes Affiche toutes les questions sans réponse qui n'ont été affectées à personne. Afficher les questions résolues Affiche toutes les questions auxquelles une réponse a été fournie. Transfert d'une question vers un autre présentateur Vous pouvez transférer une question à un autre présentateur plus compétent sur le sujet. 1 Sélectionnez la question dans la liste des messages entrants. La question est mise en surbrillance et apparaît également dans le volet de prévisualisation. 2 Sélectionnez le nom d'un présentateur dans le menu contextuel. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer la question au présentateur sélectionné. Marquage d'une question comme étant ouverte 1 Sélectionnez une question sans réponse dans la liste Messages entrants du module Q & R. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 47 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3 Sélectionnez Spécifier comme ouverte. Suppression de questions 1 Sélectionnez une question dans la liste Messages entrants du module Q & R. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options de module dans le coin inférieur droit. 3 Sélectionnez Supprimer la question ou Supprimer toutes les questions. Affichage du nom de l'expéditeur ou du présentateur en regard de la question ou de la réponse 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Q & R. 2 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Afficher le nom de l'expéditeur en face de la réponse. • Afficher le nom du présentateur en face de la réponse. Envoi par courrier électronique du contenu d'un module Conversation ou Q & R ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le module Conversation, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit et sélectionnez Envoyer l'historique des conversations par courrier électronique. • Dans le module Q & R, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module en bas à droite, puis choisissez Envoyer toutes les questions par courrier électronique. Sondage des participants Les hôtes peuvent utiliser le module Sondage pour créer des questionnaires ou des sondages destinés aux participants, et en consulter les résultats. Seuls les hôtes peuvent contrôler la gestion des sondages et leur affichage sur l'écran des participants de la réunion. Les hôtes peuvent également voter. Les sondages constituent un outil précieux en cours de réunion si vous souhaitez obtenir un retour d'informations instantané sur le contenu présenté. Les sondages peuvent également être utilisés en fin de réunion afin de connaître l'opinion des participants quant à la qualité de la réunion, du contenu et des présentateurs. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42 Invitation des participants à répondre à un sondage 1 Si le module Sondage n'est pas affiché, cliquez sur le menu Modules et sélectionnez Sondage > Nouveau module Sondage. 2 Tapez une question dans le module Sondage et cliquez sur Ouvrir un sondage.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 48 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Clôture du délai de réponse à un sondage ? Cliquez sur Fermer le sondage au bas du module Sondage. (Les résultats sont envoyés au serveur d'applications.) Modification d'un sondage 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Préparer dans le coin inférieur gauche du module Sondage. 2 Modifiez le texte. 3 Cliquez sur Ouvrir un sondage. Consultation des résultats du sondage En tant qu'hôte ou présentateur, vous pouvez consulter les résultats du sondage. Ces résultats sont actualisés en temps réel, au fur et à mesure que les participants continuent à voter ou à modifier leurs votes. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Sondage. 2 Sélectionnez Paramètres des résultats et choisissez une option. Les noms et réponses des participants s'affichent dans le module Sondage. Vous seul, en tant qu'hôte, pouvez consulter les résultats. Affichage des résultats du sondage aux participants ? Utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Sondage et sélectionnez Diffuser les résultats dans le menu contextuel. • Faites défiler jusqu'au bas de la zone principale et cochez la case en regard de l'option Diffuser les résultats. Les réponses du module apparaissent sur l'écran de tous les participants de la réunion. Remarque : cette option apparaît uniquement lorsque vous ne modifiez pas le module. Navigation entre plusieurs sondages Vous pouvez créer plusieurs sondages et naviguer entre eux rapidement et aisément. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Sondage. 2 Cliquez sur Choisir sondage et sélectionnez le nom d'un sondage. Suppression des réponses du sondage 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module situé dans le coin inférieur droit du module Sondage. 2 Sélectionnez Effacer toutes les réponses dans le menu contextuel. Création et gestion d'ateliers Les ateliers sont des salles secondaires créées au sein d'une réunion ou d'une session de formation. Elles permettent de diviser un grand groupe en groupes plus petits, dans lesquels les discussions et la collaboration sont plus faciles. Les ateliers peuvent être créés par les hôtes pour les réunions et sessions de formation comptant jusqu'à 50 personnes, à raison de 5 ateliers maximum par réunion ou session.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 49 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Par exemple, si votre session comprend 20 personnes, vous pouvez créer 4 ateliers et répartir 5 personnes dans chacun d'eux. Dans les ateliers, les participants peuvent discuter (selon la configuration audio), utiliser le module Conversation, collaborer sur un tableau blanc ou partager leurs écrans. L'hôte peut visiter tous les ateliers pour apporter ses conseils et répondre aux questions. Lorsque le travail en atelier est terminé, l'hôte peut mettre fin à la session d'atelier et replacer les participants dans la salle de réunion. Les hôtes ont la possibilité de partager ce qui s'est passé dans les ateliers avec tous les participants. Le cas échéant, l'hôte peut ensuite renvoyer les participants dans les mêmes ateliers. Si vous réutilisez un atelier, vous pouvez également en reprendre la disposition et le contenu. (Toutefois, la répartition des participants dans les ateliers n'est pas conservée.) Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Création de réunions » à la page 8 « Démarrage de réunions » à la page 14 « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 Configuration audio des ateliers Remarque : les ateliers de conférences audio qui utilisent la fonctionnalité de voix universelle ne disposent pas de leur propre son. Les participants aux ateliers entendent le son provenant de la salle de réunion principale. Si un fournisseur de téléphonie intégré prend en charge les ateliers Acrobat Connect Pro, la conférence audio téléphonique est automatiquement répartie dans les ateliers que vous créez. Chaque atelier dispose de son propre système audio et il n'est pas nécessaire de les configurer un par un dans le pont audio. Lors de la fermeture des ateliers, tous les participants reviennent automatiquement sur la ligne audio de conférence principale. Si l'opérateur que vous utilisez ne prend pas en charge la répartition audio des ateliers, vous pouvez demander aux utilisateurs de couper le son de leur téléphone et d'utiliser le protocole VoIP à l'aide d'un microphone lorsqu'ils se trouvent dans les ateliers. (Si cette solution est impossible, les participants peuvent utiliser le module Conversation pour communiquer dans les ateliers.) Si vous utilisez la téléphonie non intégrée sans prise en charge des ateliers, effectuez une configuration manuelle (à l'aide de ponts audio privés) afin de respecter la configuration des ateliers en ligne. Si vous utilisez le protocole VoIP, une voie audio VoIP distincte doit être créée pour chaque atelier afin de permettre aux utilisateurs de tenir des conversations privées au sein de leur atelier. Dans les ateliers, les participants reçoivent automatiquement le rôle de présentateur, ce qui leur confère l'ensemble des droits VoIP. Ils peuvent parler et être entendus, et utiliser les commandes VoIP. Lorsque l'hôte met fin à la session d'atelier, tous les participants retournent à la salle de réunion principale et utilisent à nouveau la même voie audio VoIP. A propos des modes d'affichage des ateliers Les hôtes peuvent utiliser l'affichage par défaut des ateliers ou concevoir une disposition spécifique pour les ateliers. Créez un affichage personnalisé pour les ateliers si vous souhaitez effectuer des préparatifs avant de répartir les contenus et les personnes dans les différents ateliers. Cette méthode permet d'optimiser le déroulement et l'organisation des réunions. L'affichage utilisé dans la réunion ou la session de formation au moment où vous cliquez sur le bouton Début ateliers est reproduit dans tous les ateliers. Par exemple, si l'affichage 1 est actif et si vous lancez 3 ateliers, chacun d'eux utilise l'affichage 1. Si vous modifiez la disposition de la réunion ou de la session de formation pour utiliser l'affichage 2, puis créez un quatrième atelier, ce dernier utilise l'affichage 2.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 50 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Il peut s'avérer utile, dans certains cas, d'utiliser différents affichages pour différents ateliers. C'est le cas par exemple si vous souhaitez que les participants des différents ateliers effectuent divers exercices pour lesquels une disposition spécifique est nécessaire, ou si vous avez prévu des contenus différents pour chaque atelier. Il convient alors de créer des affichages différents pour les ateliers et de veiller à activer l'affichage approprié lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Début ateliers. Si vous souhaitez uniquement exploiter des contenus différents dans chaque atelier, sans utiliser d'affichages différents, vous pouvez préparer les salles avant que les participants rejoignent la réunion ou la session de formation. Débutez la réunion ou la session de formation et configurez le nombre d'ateliers nécessaires. Cliquez sur Début ateliers et passez de salle en salle pour charger le contenu requis dans chaque module de partage. Ensuite, mettez fin aux ateliers. Lorsque les participants sont présents et que vous cliquez à nouveau sur Début ateliers (après avoir réparti les participants dans les différentes salles), le contenu est prêt. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez aussi modifier l'affichage et ajouter du contenu dans les ateliers en cours de réunion. Une fois la réunion ou la session de formation commencée, cliquez sur Début ateliers et passez de salle en salle pour modifier la disposition et ajouter le contenu. Les participants des différents ateliers voient vos modifications à mesure que vous les effectuez. Définition d'ateliers et affectation de membres En cours de réunion ou de session de formation, les hôtes peuvent créer des ateliers et y répartir les participants. 1 Dans une réunion ou une session de formation, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Créer des éclatements dans le coin inférieur droit de la salle de réunion. • Cliquez sur Créer des éclatements dans le module Liste des participants. • Dans la barre de menus située dans la partie supérieure de la salle de réunion, choisissez Réunion > Créer des éclatements. Le module Ateliers s'affiche sur l'écran de l'hôte ayant créé les ateliers. Ce module n'est pas visible pour les autres hôtes, les présentateurs et les participants. 2 Dans le module Ateliers, trois ateliers sont disponibles par défaut. Cliquez sur Ajouter un éclatement autant de fois que nécessaire pour créer le nombre d'ateliers voulu (5 au maximum). Par exemple, si vous réunissez 20 participants, vous pouvez créer quatre ateliers pouvant chacun accueillir 5 participants. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Répartissez manuellement les participants dans les ateliers. Sélectionnez le nom du participant dans la liste (pour en sélectionner plusieurs, cliquez sur chaque nom en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée), cliquez sur Affect., puis sélectionnez l'un des ateliers créés à l'étape 2. • Répartissez automatiquement les participants dans les ateliers. Cliquez sur Affect. et sélectionnez Répartir uniformément à partir de la réunion principale. Tous les participants à la réunion principale sont répartis de manière uniforme dans les ateliers disponibles. Les participants déjà affectés à des ateliers restent où ils se trouvent. 4 (Facultatif) Pour déplacer un participant après l'avoir affecté à un atelier, sélectionnez son nom dans la liste, cliquez sur Affect., puis choisissez un atelier différent. 5 (Facultatif) Pour créer un autre atelier, cliquez sur Ajouter un éclatement. 6 (Facultatif) Pour supprimer un atelier, cliquez sur l'icône correspondante dans le module Ateliers. (Tous les modules et contenus de l'atelier sont également supprimés.) La numérotation de tous les ateliers suivants est ajustée pour conserver la continuité de la séquence. 7 (Facultatif) Pour supprimer tous les ateliers et enregistrer les modules (ex. Conversation ou Tableau blanc) créés dans ces salles, cliquez sur le bouton des options de module et sélectionnez Effacer toutes les salles. Les modules sont enregistrés et apparaissent dans le menu Modules d'éclatement. La numérotation des salles créées par la suite reprend après le numéro de la dernière salle créée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 51 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 8 (Facultatif) Pour supprimer tous les ateliers, les modules correspondants et les modules enregistrés dans le menu Modules d'éclatement, cliquez sur le bouton Options du module et choisissez Réinitialiser les salles. La numérotation des salles est également réinitialisée. Remarque : Pour masquer les modules d'atelier, cliquez sur Masquer le configurateur d'éclatements . Lancement d'un atelier Après avoir créé des ateliers et réparti les participants dans ces salles, vous pouvez commencer la session d'atelier. Si vous enregistrez une réunion ou une session de formation et que vous envoyez des participants à des ateliers, l'enregistrement se poursuit mais concerne uniquement la salle principale. Par exemple, si les participants sont envoyés pour cinq minutes dans des ateliers, l'enregistrement de la salle principale se poursuit, même si elle ne présente aucune activité. A la fermeture des ateliers et au retour des participants dans la salle principale, l'enregistrement capture à nouveau toutes les activités qui se tiennent dans la salle principale. (Pour modifier l'enregistrement de manière que les invités n'aient pas à regarder une salle vide, voir « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60.) Remarque : si vous utilisez les paramètres de conformité et de contrôle pour forcer l'enregistrement de toutes les réunions, rappelez-vous que seule la réunion est enregistrée : les activités des ateliers ne le sont pas. S'il est impératif pour votre société d'enregistrer l'ensemble des conversations et activités en ligne, envisagez de désactiver l'utilisation des ateliers dans les paramètres de conformité et de contrôle. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. 1 Dans une réunion ou une session de formation, définissez des ateliers et répartissez les participants dans chaque salle. 2 Cliquez sur Début ateliers. Les participants sont placés dans l'atelier où ils ont été affectés. Le bouton Début ateliers change : de couleur verte, il s'intitule désormais Ateliers actifs. Lorsque les participants sont placés dans un atelier, ils reçoivent automatiquement le rôle de présentateur. Ils disposent alors des droits correspondants, à savoir partage de la voix, partage du contenu dans le module de partage, modification des tableaux blancs et ajout de texte dans le module Note. Lorsqu'ils reviennent dans la salle principale, ils retrouvent leur état initial. Remarque : tous les participants, y compris ceux qui se sont connectés en tant qu'invités, peuvent télécharger du contenu partagé dans les ateliers. Visite d'ateliers Lorsque les ateliers sont en cours d'utilisation, les hôtes peuvent se rendre dans différentes salles, y compris la salle principale. Le nom de la salle où vous vous trouvez est mis en évidence en vert dans le module Ateliers ou indiqué au bas de l'écran, au centre. ? Pour visiter un autre atelier ou la salle principale, cliquez sur son nom dans le module Ateliers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 52 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Envoi d'un message à toutes les personnes présentes dans les ateliers Lorsque les participants se trouvent dans les ateliers, vous pouvez envoyer à chacun d'eux une notification en une seule opération. Cela peut s'avérer utile lorsque la même question est posée dans plusieurs ateliers. Il est également judicieux d'envoyer un message d'avertissement aux participants quelques minutes avant de mettre fin aux ateliers et de les faire revenir dans la salle principale. Ainsi, ils peuvent terminer leur conversation, charger des fichiers et commenter les notes du tableau blanc avant la fin de l'atelier. 1 Dans la salle principale ou l'un des ateliers, saisissez un message dans la zone de texte située à côté du portevoix . 2 Pour envoyer ce message, cliquez sur le porte-voix . Dans toutes les salles, tous les participants voient s'afficher le message dans une boîte de dialogue de couleur, en haut à droite de la salle de réunion. Communication dans des ateliers à l'aide de la liste des participants Il s'agit, par exemple, de poser une question et de demander aux participants de répondre à l'aide de l'option Accepter ou Refuser. En présence ou non de l'hôte, utilisez les options et les émoticônes de la liste des participants pour communiquer avec les autres. Il s'agit, par exemple, de poser une question et de demander aux participants de répondre à l'aide de l'option Accepter ou Refuser. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Poser une question ou y répondre au cours d'une session de formation ou réunion » à la page 120. Réalisation d'un sondage dans les ateliers Les hôtes peuvent mener des sondages dans chaque atelier en se plaçant dans la salle voulue, puis en ouvrant le module de sondage. Un nouveau module de sondage doit être ouvert dans chaque atelier. Pour des informations générales sur les sondages, voir « Sondage des participants » à la page 47. Poser des questions et y répondre dans des ateliers Les participants se trouvant dans les ateliers peuvent poser des questions à l'hôte à tout moment, que celui-ci se trouve ou non dans la même salle. ? Les participants effectuent l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si l'hôte se trouve dans l'atelier et que le module Conversation est disponible, envoyez un message à l'hôte uniquement. L'hôte peut alors utiliser le module Conversation pour répondre au participant seulement ou à tous. • Si l'hôte se trouve dans l'atelier, utilisez le système audio fourni (VoIP ou téléphonie) pour lui poser une question. • Si l'hôte ne se trouve pas dans l'atelier, saisissez un message dans la zone de texte à côté de l'option Contacter hôte , puis cliquez sur Contact hôte . La question s'affiche sur l'écran de l'hôte dans une petite boîte de dialogue de message, accompagnée du nom du participant. Pour y répondre, il peut cliquer sur le nom de l'atelier dans la boîte de dialogue, accéder à l'atelier et utiliser le module Conversation. Remarque : les messages envoyés par le biais de la fonction Contact hôte parviennent à tous les hôtes de la réunion ou de la salle de classe virtuelle. Conversation dans les ateliers Si le module Conversation est disponible dans l'atelier, utilisez-le pour communiquer avec les autres participants se trouvant dans cette même salle. Il ne permet pas de discuter avec les participants des autres ateliers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 53 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Pour des questions d'ordre général sur l'utilisation du module Conversation, voir « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42. Fermeture d'un atelier Seuls les hôtes peuvent mettre fin aux ateliers. A la fermeture d'un atelier, les participants reviennent à la salle de réunion principale. ? Cliquez sur Ateliers actifs. Le module Ateliers se ferme. Remarque : si vous cliquez sur Ateliers actifs pour mettre fin aux ateliers, la répartition des participants dans les différentes salles est conservée. Ainsi, en cliquant à nouveau sur Début ateliers dans la même réunion ou session de formation, vous pouvez renvoyer les participants vers les ateliers dans lesquels ils se trouvaient auparavant. Si vous utilisez l'option Faire revenir tous les utilisateurs à la réunion principale, toutes les informations relatives à la répartition des participants dans les ateliers sont perdues. Partage du contenu des ateliers dans la salle principale Une fois la session d'atelier terminée et les participants revenus dans la salle principale, les hôtes peuvent partager le contenu d'un atelier donné avec toutes les personnes présentes dans la salle principale. 1 Dans la salle principale, cliquez sur Modules >Modules d'éclatement. 2 Sélectionnez le nom de l'un des ateliers, puis sélectionnez l'option Liste des participants, Conversation, Partage ou Tableau blanc. Le contenu sélectionné s'affiche dans un nouveau module flottant. Disponible en lecture seule, ce contenu n'est pas modifiable. 3 (Facultatif) Elargissez le nouveau module en cliquant sur Plein écran ou en faisant glisser les bordures de la fenêtre. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous partagez un tableau blanc, vous pouvez cliquer sur Pointeur pour afficher un petit pointeur que vous commandez avec la souris. (Pour désactiver le pointeur, cliquez à nouveau sur .) Réouverture d'ateliers fermés Même après la fin d'une session d'atelier, il est possible de renvoyer les participants dans les ateliers. La configuration des salles et la répartition des utilisateurs sont conservées pendant toute la durée de la réunion. Remarque : les modules d'atelier restent toujours accessibles via le menu des modules (à l'instar de tous les modules), sauf si vous choisissez l'option Réinitialiser les salles. 1 Cliquez sur Créer des éclatements . 2 (Facultatif) Effectuez des modifications, par exemple ajoutez ou supprimez une salle, ou retirez certains participants dans les différents ateliers. 3 Cliquez sur Début ateliers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 54 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Gestion des participants Communication avec les participants par le biais du module Liste des participants Dans le module Liste des participants, chaque utilisateur peut rapidement voir qui est connecté à une réunion. Les hôtes et les présentateurs peuvent contrôler les noms, les rôles et les états. Si la conférence audio est activée, les participants peuvent vérifier l'état de la conférence téléphonique et composer un numéro pour s'y joindre. Le module Liste des participants fournit en outre différentes options de communication. Les participants peuvent communiquer à l'aide d'émoticônes pour lever la main, exprimer leur accord ou leur désaccord vis à vis d'une question posée par le conférencier, et même lui demander de parler plus ou moins fort. Par ailleurs, toujours dans le module Liste des participants, les hôtes peuvent autoriser les participants à utiliser un microphone pour parler ou demander le contrôle de l'écran d'un autre participant. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des émoticônes du module Liste des participants, voir « Communication avec les participants à la réunion ou formation » à la page 117. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière dont les hôtes peuvent exploiter le module Liste des participants et la barre d'outils VoIP pour gérer les questions des participants, voir « Poser des questions aux étudiants et accepter leurs questions » à la page 119. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du module Liste des participants pour accorder des droits audio temporaires aux participants de manière qu'ils puissent répondre aux questions, consultez la section « Poser une question à l'aide de la fonction audio » à la page 120. Pour plus d'informations sur la manière dont les participants peuvent communiquer à l'aide du module Liste des participants, voir « Participation aux réunions et sessions de formation » à la page 120. Surveillance des noms, rôles et état des téléconférences à l'aide du module Liste des participants Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 55 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting A propos du nom des participants Les utilisateurs d'Acrobat Connect Pro connectés avec un mot de passe sont répertoriés dans le module Liste des participants sous leur nom complet, tel qu'il est enregistré dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Si une personne présente est connectée à une réunion en tant qu'invité, le nom qui apparaît dans le module Liste des participants est celui qu'elle a entré lors de la connexion. Dans un groupe de rôles (hôtes, présentateurs et participants), les noms des personnes présentes sont classés par ordre alphabétique. Voir aussi « Rôles et autorisations de réunion » à la page 5 « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Modification de l'état d'un participant Dans le module Liste des participants, l'état des participants reste par défaut vierge. Toutefois, les participants peuvent modifier leur propre état. Lorsqu'un participant sélectionne un état, une icône apparaît à droite de son nom. Les participants peuvent effacer leur état à n'importe quel moment pendant une réunion. Le tableau suivant indique l'état, l'icône et la durée. Voir aussi « Rôles et autorisations de réunion » à la page 5 « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Etat de la personne présente Icône Durée Lever la main Reste affiché jusqu'à ce que le participant ou l'hôte l'efface Accepter Reste affiché jusqu'à ce que le participant ou l'hôte l'efface Refuser Reste affiché jusqu'à ce que le participant ou l'hôte l'efface Pas devant l'écran Reste affiché jusqu'à ce que le participant l'efface Parler plus fort 10 secondes Parler moins fort 10 secondes Accélérer 10 secondes Ralentir 10 secondes Rires 10 secondes Applaudir 10 secondesUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 56 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Modification de votre état (participant) Lorsque vous sélectionnez les états Parler plus fort, Parler moins fort, Accélérer, Ralentir, Rires et Applaudir, l'icône de l'état s'affiche dans le module Liste des participants pendant dix secondes. Les icônes d'état Lever la main, Accepter et Refuser restent visibles jusqu'à ce que vous ou l'hôte les supprimiez manuellement. Les icônes d'état Pas devant l'écran et Muet ne peuvent être supprimées que par les participants. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la barre Mon état dans la partie supérieure du module Liste des participants. • Cliquez sur le menu Options d'état dans le coin inférieur gauche de la session de formation ou de réunion. 2 Sélectionnez l'état que vous souhaitez afficher à tous les participants. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez l'état Lever la main, puis en choisissez un autre, le second se superpose au premier, le rendant ainsi invisible. Effacement de l'état d'un participant (hôte et présentateur) 1 Sélectionnez le nom d'un participant. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Liste des participants. 3 Sélectionnez Effacer l'état de l'utilisateur. Effacement de tous les états 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Liste des participants. 2 Sélectionnez Effacer l'état de tous les participants. Affichage de l'état de la connexion des participants Un groupe de barres, semblables à celles qui indiquent la puissance du signal sur un téléphone portable, peut s'afficher en regard du nom du participant dans le module Liste des participants pour indiquer l'état de sa connexion. (Cette option est désactivée par défaut.) Lorsque la connexion des participants est inférieure à la bande passante réservée à la salle de réunion et indiquée par l'hôte, le nombre de barres de l'icône diminue. Pendant une réunion, les hôtes peuvent, à tout moment, configurer les indicateurs d'état de connexion réseau pour qu'ils soient visibles ou masqués. 1 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Performances et apparence de la salle > Optimiser la bande passante réservée pour la salle. 2 Sélectionnez , DSL/Câble ou RLE. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Liste des participants. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher l’état de la connexion dans le menu contextuel. L'état de la connexion réseau s'affiche pour tous les participants dont la bande passante est inférieure à la valeur de bande passante de la salle sélectionnée à l'étape 2. Par exemple, si la bande passante de la salle est définie sur DSL/Câble, l'état de la connexion s'affiche pour les participants dont la vitesse de connexion est définie sur Modem. (Les participants peuvent définir leur vitesse de connexion en cliquant sur Réunion > Gérer mes paramètres > Ma vitesse de connexion.) Voir aussi « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 57 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Affichage ou modification du rôle d'un participant L'hôte peut modifier le rôle de chaque participant dans le module Liste des participants, et donc étendre ou restreindre ses droits en fonction des besoins. En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez également modifier votre propre rôle. Vous pouvez vous rétrograder à un rôle de présentateur ou de participant de façon à pouvoir visualiser ce que les personnes présentes ayant d'autres rôles visualisent dans la salle de réunion. Vous pouvez vous rétrograder dans le module Liste des participants mais pas vous promouvoir. Vous devez pour cela utiliser le menu Présenter. (Le menu Présenter est visible uniquement par un participant ou présentateur rétrogradé s'il s'est connecté initialement à la réunion en tant qu'hôte.) Voir aussi « Rôles et autorisations de réunion » à la page 5 « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Affichage des informations sur un participant En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez obtenir des informations sur un participant, comme son nom, son rôle dans la réunion, son état de conférence audio, son état de connexion et ses droits supplémentaires, et ce, directement depuis le menu Liste des participants. 1 Positionnez le pointeur sur le nom d'un participant dans le module Liste des participants. 2 Dans le menu qui s'affiche, placez le pointeur sur le nom du participant. Modification du rôle d'un participant 1 Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant dont vous souhaitez changer le rôle. 2 Cliquez sur Définir le rôle de l'utilisateur dans le coin inférieur gauche du module Liste des participants. 3 Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez le rôle à donner à la personne sélectionnée : Participant, Présentateur ou Hôte. L'icône du participant change sur les écrans de tous les participants et la liste des noms est retriée en fonction du rôle. Modification de votre propre rôle (hôte) 1 Si vous êtes un hôte, cliquez sur le menu Présenter dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre de la salle de réunion. 2 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Me nommer Participant. • Me nommer Présentateur. • Me nommer Hôte. Exclusion d'un participant d'une réunion 1 Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom de la personne à exclure. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le coin inférieur droit du module Liste des participants. 3 Sélectionnez Exclure l'utilisateur sélectionné dans le menu contextuel.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 58 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Voir aussi « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Affectation de droits de participation supérieurs Les hôtes peuvent modifier les droits d'un participant pour lui donner le contrôle de certains modules. Cette opération permet d'étendre les droits d'un participant sans le promouvoir au rôle de présentateur ou d'hôte. 1 Sélectionnez le nom d'un participant dans le module Liste des participants. Pour modifier les droits de plusieurs participants, sélectionnez plusieurs noms. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le module Liste des participants. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier les droits supplémentaires des participants. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez les modules que le participant pourra contrôler. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Voir aussi « Rôles et autorisations de réunion » à la page 5 « Utilisation des modules » à la page 17 Enregistrement et lecture des réunions A propos de l'enregistrement d'une réunion Un hôte peut enregistrer une réunion ou une session de formation. Lorsque vous visionnez l'enregistrement, il reproduit fidèlement ce que les participants ont vu et entendu. Tout ce qui se passe dans la salle est enregistré, à l'exception de la zone réservée aux présentateurs et des ateliers. Vous pouvez démarrer et arrêter l'enregistrement à tout moment. Cela vous permet de contrôler le contenu à enregistrer. Un hôte peut créer une archive de référence des réunions et mettre les enregistrements à la disposition des participants qui veulent les consulter. Lorsque vous enregistrez une réunion, prenez en compte les éléments suivants : • Si vous utilisez les modules Conversation vocale et Caméra et Voix pour diffuser des sons aux participants de la réunion, tout le contenu audio est enregistré automatiquement. • Si vous utilisez la solution de voix universelle, vous enregistrez le son avec la réunion. Tout le son provenant des téléphones est enregistré et peut être lu avec la conférence audio. L'option Enregistrement du son : téléphone mains libres n'est pas disponible pour les conférences audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle. • Si vous n'utilisez pas la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, vous pouvez utiliser votre haut-parleur et le microphone de votre ordinateur en guise d'appareils d'enregistrement. Tous les sons qui pénètrent dans votre ordinateur sont capturés et enregistrés, mais pas diffusés aux participants. (Le son n'étant pas intégré directement dans la réunion, la qualité peut être inférieure à ce qu'elle est généralement avec la méthode directe.) • Si vous utilisez un adaptateur de téléphonie intégré, commencez votre enregistrement depuis Acrobat Connect Pro ; n'utilisez pas la touche de commande de votre téléphone.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 59 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • L'enregistrement de la réunion reçoit une URL et est ajouté à la page Enregistrements associée à la salle de cette réunion dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Pour lire un enregistrement, vous devez disposer d'une connexion Internet, de son URL et être autorisé à le visionner. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'enregistrement afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur le mode d'enregistrement des réunions et des sessions de formation, et sur les éléments enregistrés. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Modification d'enregistrements de réunion ou de formation » à la page 60 « Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion » à la page 62 Enregistrement d'une réunion Démarrage de l'enregistrement d'une réunion 1 Si vous avez associé à la réunion un profil audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle, rejoignez la conférence audio avant de commencer l'enregistrement. (Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants et sélectionnez Rejoindre la conférence audio.) 2 Dans la barre de menus, sélectionnez Réunion > Enregistrer la réunion. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer la réunion, saisissez le nom et le résumé de l'enregistrement de la réunion. 4 Pour les conférences audio qui utilisent un téléphone à haut-parleur et un microphone d'ordinateur en tant qu'appareils d'enregistrement, sélectionnez l'option Enregistrement du son : téléphone mains libres. Cliquez sur OK. Les conférences audio qui utilisent la fonctionnalité de voix universelle ne disposent pas de cette option. Une icône d'enregistrement (cercle rouge) apparaît dans la barre de menus pour indiquer que la réunion est en cours d'enregistrement. Si un problème survient pendant l'enregistrement, un message d'erreur apparaît dans l'angle supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Vous pouvez essayer de vous reconnecter au son de la conférence, enregistrer la réunion sans son ou arrêter l'enregistrement de la réunion. Arrêt de l’enregistrement d’une réunion Pour arrêter l'enregistrement d'une réunion, exécutez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Placez le pointeur sur le cercle rouge dans la barre de menus et cliquez sur le lien pour arrêter l'enregistrement depuis le menu contextuel. • Sélectionnez Réunion > Enregistrer la réunion pour supprimer la coche de la barre de menus. L’enregistrement de la réunion est sauvegardé pour pouvoir être consulté à tout moment. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 60 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Modification d'enregistrements de réunion ou de formation Après avoir enregistré une réunion ou une session de formation, vous pouvez utiliser l'éditeur intégré pour supprimer certaines parties de l'enregistrement. Cette fonction est utile lorsque l'enregistrement contient des silences ou des informations non pertinentes. Voici quelques conseils relatifs à la modification des enregistrements : • Pour modifier l'enregistrement d'une réunion ou d'une salle de classe virtuelle dans la bibliothèque de contenu, vous devez au moins disposer des autorisations de gestion sur l'enregistrement. (Si vous avez créé la réunion ou la classe virtuelle, ses autorisations vous reviennent par défaut.) Pour modifier un enregistrement via l'option Réunion > Enregistrements ou Formation > Enregistrements, vous devez disposer des autorisations d'hôte. • Après avoir modifié l'enregistrement, la dernière version modifiée est enregistrée et contient toutes les informations relatives aux sessions de modification précédentes. Le lien utilisé pour diffuser l'enregistrement n'est pas modifié. Les utilisateurs qui reçoivent ce lien et les droits d'accès à l'enregistrement peuvent consulter la version la plus récente et toutes les modifications apportées. • Plusieurs utilisateurs peuvent simultanément ouvrir un enregistrement en mode d'édition. Aucun avertissement ne s'affiche pour indiquer que l'enregistrement est en cours de modification par un autre utilisateur. Toutefois, lorsqu'un utilisateur enregistre ses modifications, les autres utilisateurs susceptibles d'effectuer des modifications reçoivent un message d'erreur s'ils essaient d'enregistrer ces changements. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'enregistrement afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur le mode d'enregistrement des réunions et des sessions de formation, et sur les éléments enregistrés. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion » à la page 62 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle Il est utile de modifier un enregistrement lorsque celui-ci contient des silences ou des informations non pertinentes que vous souhaitez supprimer avant sa diffusion. 1 Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Réunions, puis sur le nom de la réunion qui contient l'enregistrement. • Cliquez sur Formation, puis sur le nom de la classe virtuelle qui contient l'enregistrement. 2 Cliquez sur l'option Enregistrements. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier en regard de l'enregistrement qui vous intéresse. Le lecteur/éditeur s'affiche et la lecture de l'enregistrement commence. 4 Regardez l'enregistrement pour localiser les séquences à modifier ou faites glisser le curseur de lecture jusqu'à un point spécifique de l'enregistrement. 5 Utilisez les marqueurs de sélection pour identifier les zones de l'enregistrement à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Recadrage.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 61 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 6 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Options avancées pour rechercher des informations spécifiques au sein du fichier d'enregistrement ou pour filtrer le type de contenu. 7 (Facultatif) Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Annuler pour annuler la dernière action. L'option Annuler est disponible après que vous avez effectué au moins une modification au cours de la session de modification actuelle et jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez sur Enregistrer. Les modifications effectuées depuis le dernier enregistrement sont annulées une à une en ordre inverse. Vous ne pouvez pas annuler les modifications que vous avez effectuées avant de cliquer sur Enregistrer. 8 (Facultatif) Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Revenir à l'original. Cette option supprime toutes les modifications effectuées et rétablit l'état d'origine de l'enregistrement. 9 Continuez à marquer les sections à supprimer. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'enregistrement afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur le mode d'enregistrement des réunions et des sessions de formation, et sur les éléments enregistrés. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion » à la page 62 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 A propos des enregistrements hors connexion Si vous souhaitez rendre un enregistrement accessible à des personnes n'ayant pas accès à un serveur Acrobat Connect Pro, vous pouvez créer une version hors connexion. Cet enregistrement est stocké dans un fichier FLV unique. Voici quelques conseils relatifs aux enregistrements hors connexion. • Choisissez une résolution d'écran suffisamment élevée pour inclure toutes les activités réalisées dans la réunion originale. Adobe recommande une résolution de 1024 x 768. • Conservez la barre d'outils d'enregistrement réduite. Si elle est visible, elle est également enregistrée. • Evitez toute activité particulièrement intensive pour le système ou le réseau au cours de l'enregistrement (ex. installation de logiciel ou téléchargement de fichiers). • Désactivez l'écran de veille et vérifiez les paramètres d'alimentation avant de commencer. • La création d'un enregistrement hors connexion prend à peu près autant de temps que l'enregistrement de la réunion originale. • Pendant la création de l'enregistrement hors connexion, vous pouvez réduire la fenêtre d'enregistrement et afficher d'autres fenêtres au premier plan sans interférer avec l'enregistrement lui-même. • Vérifiez que Acrobat Connect Add-in est installé avant de commencer l'enregistrement hors connexion. (Pour vérifier qu'il est installé, entrez dans une salle de réunion ou de classe virtuelle ; si Acrobat Connect Add-in n'est pas installé, vous êtes invité à le faire.) • Le fichier FLV terminé peut être affiché dans un lecteur FLV (Adobe® Media Player par exemple) ou placé sur un CD ou sur un serveur pouvant lire les fichiers FLV. Il peut également être intégré dans une présentation, envoyé par messagerie aux utilisateurs pour qu'ils le lisent dans leur propre lecteur FLV local ou téléchargé dans la bibliothèque de contenu d'Acrobat Connect Pro (les utilisateurs peuvent télécharger le fichier depuis la bibliothèque).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 62 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • Pour suspendre la création d'un enregistrement hors connexion, cliquez sur le bouton Pause/Reprendre, selon les besoins. Cela peut s'avérer utile si vous devez télécharger un fichier volumineux et ne souhaitez pas épuiser les ressources du système, ou si vous devez rejoindre une réunion en ligne. Lorsque vous cliquez sur Reprendre, l'enregistrement redémarre à l'endroit où vous l'aviez arrêté. L'enregistrement terminé constitue un seul fichier continu, quel que soit le nombre de pauses effectuées. • Le bouton Arrêter et sauvegarder met fin à la création de l'enregistrement. Cela peut s'avérer utile lorsque vous souhaitez uniquement enregistrer une partie de la réunion ou de la classe virtuelle, par exemple les dix premières minutes. Utilisez également le bouton Arrêter et sauvegarder pour diviser une longue réunion ou classe virtuelle en plusieurs enregistrements. Par exemple, si la classe virtuelle dure deux heures, vous pouvez créer quatre enregistrements d'une demi-heure. Dans ce cas, vous commencez l'enregistrement, puis cliquez sur Arrêter et sauvegarder après 30 minutes. Cliquez ensuite sur Démarrer nouveau pour reprendre l'enregistrement où vous l'avez quitté. (L'option Démarrer nouveau n'est accessible qu'après avoir cliqué sur Arrêter et sauvegarder.) Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'enregistrement afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur le mode d'enregistrement des réunions et des sessions de formation, et sur les éléments enregistrés. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion 1 Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Réunions, puis sur le nom de la réunion que vous souhaitez enregistrer hors connexion. • Cliquez sur Formation, puis sur le nom de la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez enregistrer hors connexion. • Cliquez sur la bibliothèque de contenu, puis sur le nom de la réunion ou de la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez enregistrer hors connexion. 2 Cliquez sur Enregistrements. 3 A côté de l'enregistrement qui vous intéresse, cliquez sur Rendre disponible hors connexion. 4 Dans l'outil d'enregistrement hors connexion, spécifiez l'emplacement du fichier FLV terminé. (Si un message d'aide s'affiche, cliquez sur Procéder à l'enregistrement hors connexion.) La lecture de la réunion commence, ainsi que la création de l'archive hors connexion. 5 Utilisez les commandes Démarrer nouveau, Arrêter et sauvegarder et Pause/Reprendre selon les besoins au cours de l'enregistrement. (Si ces commandes sont invisibles, cliquez sur Afficher la barre d'outils .) La barre d'outils sera visible dans l'enregistrement à chaque fois que vous l'afficherez. Il convient donc de l'afficher aussi peu que possible et de la laisser à l'état réduit. 6 Un message de confirmation s'affiche à la fin de la procédure d'enregistrement. Le cas échéant, fermez l'outil d'enregistrement hors connexion en cliquant sur le bouton de fermeture . (Si la fenêtre est réduite, elle se ferme automatiquement.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 63 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 7 (Facultatif) Pour localiser le fichier FLV obtenu, naviguez dans l'Explorateur Windows jusqu'à l'emplacement que vous avez sélectionné à l'étape 4. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'enregistrement afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur le mode d'enregistrement des réunions et des sessions de formation, et sur les éléments enregistrés. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Lecture d'une réunion enregistrée Un hôte ou un présentateur met l'URL de l'enregistrement à la disposition des participants, qui peuvent le lire. Chaque enregistrement reçoit automatiquement une URL unique et est stocké dans l'onglet Enregistrements de la salle de réunion dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Lorsque vous lisez un enregistrement, une barre de contrôles de lecture apparaît dans un espace situé sous la salle de réunion. Pour des performances optimales, une connexion Internet haut débit est conseillée pour la lecture des enregistrements. Barre de commandes de lecture A. Masquer la barre d'outils B. Afficher/Masquer les options avancées C. Pause/Lecture D. Barre d’état E. Temps écoulé Vous pouvez contrôler l'accès des utilisateurs à l'enregistrement. Tout utilisateur invité à la réunion ou à la classe virtuelle en tant qu'hôte et autorisé à parcourir l'application Acrobat Connect Pro Central jusqu'à l'emplacement de l'enregistrement peut visionner l'enregistrement et consulter les informations connexes, telles que les autorisations. Tout utilisateur invité à la réunion ou à la classe virtuelle par le biais des onglets Invités ou Inscrits d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central peut visionner l'enregistrement s'il reçoit l'URL correspondante. Il est possible d'accorder l'accès à d'autres utilisateurs par le biais de l'option d'enregistrement public/privé (privé par défaut). Si l'option d'enregistrement public est activée, toute personne disposant de l'URL et d'un accès au serveur (si ce dernier est accessible sur Internet, cela signifie tout le monde) peut consulter l'enregistrement. Une autre solution consiste à placer l'enregistrement dans la bibliothèque de contenu et de définir des autorisations utilisateur spécifiques (le placement de l'enregistrement dans la bibliothèque de contenu est irréversible). Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60 A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 64 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting « Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion » à la page 62 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Utilisation d'Adobe Media Player pour afficher une réunion enregistrée Adobe Media Player permet aux utilisateurs de visionner des vidéos téléchargées ou en flux continu (streaming). Cette application peut également servir à visionner une réunion enregistrée. Pour plus d'informations sur Adobe Media Player, voir www.adobe.com/go/mediaplayerinfo_fr. Lecture d'un enregistrement à partir d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central (hôtes et présentateurs) 1 Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Réunions, puis sur le nom de la réunion qui contient l'enregistrement. • Cliquez sur Formation, puis sur le nom de la classe virtuelle qui contient l'enregistrement. 2 Cliquez sur l'option Enregistrements. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de l'enregistrement 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour consulter la dernière version modifiée de l'enregistrement, cliquez sur le lien Adresse URL d'affichage. • Pour afficher la version initiale, complète et non modifiée de l'enregistrement, cliquez sur Afficher l'original. Vous pouvez consulter l'affichage de la version initiale de l'enregistrement ou de la dernière version modifiée ; une seule version modifiée de l'enregistrement est en effet conservée. (Si l'enregistrement n'a jamais été modifié, le lien Adresse URL d'affichage affiche la même version que l'option Afficher l'original.) Lecture d'un enregistrement depuis une adresse URL (participants) Les hôtes et présentateurs informent généralement les participants de l'existence d'un enregistrement en leur envoyant un courrier électronique contenant un lien vers l'URL de l'enregistrement. ? Cliquez sur l'URL de l'enregistrement que le présentateur vous a envoyée. L'enregistrement s'ouvre dans votre navigateur. Vous pouvez démarrer la lecture. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ouvrir l'enregistrement, il se peut que les droits d'accès appropriés ne vous aient pas été accordés. Navigation dans les réunions enregistrées Certains événements sont indexés pour chaque enregistrement de réunion. Un nouvel événement indexé est créé pour chaque message de conversation, changement de mode d'affichage, modification de diapositive et démarrage/arrêt de la caméra. Chaque événement est représenté par un élément dans l’index de l'enregistrement, suivi de la date et de l’heure. Vous pouvez parcourir l'index des enregistrements pour filtrer et rechercher des réunions enregistrées. 1 Lors de l'affichage d'un enregistrement de réunion, cliquez sur Afficher les options avancées dans la barre de navigation de l'enregistrement. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le menu contextuel Filtre pour sélectionner les événements à afficher. Vous pouvez afficher tous les événements, un seul événement, certains types d'événements ou toute combinaison d'événements pouvant être indexés. Les événements qui peuvent être filtrés comprennent les changements de mode d'affichage, les messages de conversation, les changements de diapositives et l'accès ou la sortie d'utilisateurs du module Liste des participants ou Caméra et Voix.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 65 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3 (Facultatif) Pour rechercher des événements spécifiques, tapez des mots-clés dans la zone de recherche et cliquez sur Rechercher. Tous les événements contenant une correspondance sont mis en surbrillance. Vous pouvez rechercher les termes suivants dans une archive : noms des participants à une réunion, texte dans tous les modules Note, texte dans tous les modules Conversation et texte indiqué sur les diapositives affichées lors de la réunion. Voir aussi « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60 Gestion des réunions enregistrées Vous pouvez afficher tous les enregistrements d'une réunion donnée, modifier les autorisations, renommer ou déplacer un enregistrement ou afficher un rapport d'enregistrement. Une réunion enregistrée peut, en outre, être utilisée comme contenu pour une autre réunion. (Lorsque l'enregistrement est modifié, les modifications sont conservées si l'enregistrement est placé dans la bibliothèque de contenu.) Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 « Modification d'une session enregistrée de réunion ou de classe virtuelle » à la page 60 « Création d'un enregistrement hors connexion » à la page 62 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Affichage de la liste des réunions enregistrées Si vous êtes administrateur ou disposez d'autorisations de gestion pour un dossier de réunion, vous pouvez consulter la liste de tous les enregistrements déjà créés depuis une salle de réunion. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 S'il existe plusieurs dossiers de réunion, accédez à celui qui contient la réunion. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Enregistrements dans la barre de navigation. Navigation jusqu'au lien EnregistrementsUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 66 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Déplacement d'enregistrements dans la bibliothèque de contenu Pour déplacer des enregistrements de réunion (associés à une réunion d'un dossier de la bibliothèque des réunions) vers la bibliothèque de contenu, vous devez assumer la fonction d'administrateur ou d'utilisateur autorisé à gérer le dossier concerné dans la bibliothèque des réunions. Déplacer un enregistrement de réunion dans la bibliothèque de contenu s'avère particulièrement utile si vous souhaitez accorder des autorisations d'accès à un groupe composé de personnes différentes de celles invitées initialement à la réunion. Remarque : pour mettre un enregistrement à la disposition de toute personne disposant de son URL, reportez-vous à la section « A propos des enregistrements hors connexion » à la page 61. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez la réunion dont vous voulez déplacer les enregistrements. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Enregistrements dans la barre de navigation. 5 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche de chaque enregistrement à déplacer. 6 Cliquez sur Déplacer vers le dossier dans la barre de navigation. 7 Au choix, cliquez sur les titres des dossiers ou sur le bouton Dossier parent pour parcourir les dossiers de la bibliothèque de contenu jusqu'au nouvel emplacement voulu et y placer l'enregistrement. (Au fur et à mesure que vous naviguez, la nouvelle destination s'affiche dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central.) 8 Cliquez sur Déplacer. Suppression d'un enregistrement de réunion En tant qu'administrateur ou utilisateur bénéficiant des autorisations de gestion pour le dossier concerné dans la bibliothèque de réunions, vous pouvez supprimer un enregistrement de réunion associé à une réunion du dossier. Lorsque vous supprimez un enregistrement, vous l'effacez dans la bibliothèque des réunions. (Cette opération ne supprime pas l'enregistrement dans la bibliothèque de contenu si vous l'y avez déplacé précédemment. Pour supprimer un enregistrement de réunion que vous avez déplacé dans la bibliothèque de contenu, consultez la section « Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier » à la page 161.) 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Réunions dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez la réunion dont vous voulez supprimer les enregistrements. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de la réunion dans la liste. 4 Dans la page Informations sur la réunion, cliquez sur le lien Enregistrements dans la barre de navigation. 5 Dans la page Enregistrements, activez la case à cocher située à gauche de chaque enregistrement à supprimer. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer situé au-dessus de la liste. 7 Cliquez sur Supprimer dans la page de confirmation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 67 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Création et gestion de séminaires A propos des séminaires Utilisez Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Seminar pour créer un type de réunion particulier. Les séminaires rassemblent des participants dans une salle de réunion à une date spécifique, entre les heures de début et de fin qui ont été définies. Le séminaire ne dure que le temps prévu pour son déroulement. (A l'inverse, la salle de réunion dans laquelle se tient le séminaire peut être utilisée avant, pendant et après ce dernier.) Contrairement à une réunion qui rassemble généralement une dizaine de personnes au maximum et peut se reproduire, un séminaire compte au minimum 50 participants et constitue la plupart du temps un événement ponctuel ou occasionnel, n'impliquant qu'une faible participation du public. Au moins un hôte ou présentateur de séminaire doit se trouver dans la salle pour que les autres personnes puissent y entrer, même si le séminaire est public. Un séminaire prend fin si tous les hôtes et présentateurs quittent la salle. La salle de séminaire par défaut est différente de la salle de réunion par défaut. De même, les séminaires ne peuvent être créés que dans un dossier de séminaires partagé, alors que les réunions peuvent l'être aussi bien dans un dossier partagé que dans un dossier d'utilisateur. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de séminaires et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « A propos des réunions » à la page 4 « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59 Tâches préalables à un séminaire Une préparation minutieuse avant le séminaire permet à celui-ci de se dérouler sans problème et de rationaliser les activités de suivi. 1. Déterminez le nombre de licences de séminaire en votre possession. Si votre société a acheté l'application Séminaires, elle a obtenu un nombre spécifique de licences de séminaires. Le nombre de participants aux séminaires ne doit jamais excéder le nombre d'utilisateurs simultanés autorisés par votre licence. L'administrateur de vos séminaires dispose d'informations sur le nombre de licences que votre société a achetées, ainsi que sur le nombre de séminaires que vous pouvez diriger simultanément. Si vous pensez avoir besoin de davantage de licences, signalez-le à l'avance à l'administrateur. 2. Accédez à la bibliothèque des séminaires. Les fichiers et dossiers des séminaires sont stockés dans la bibliothèque des séminaires. Les utilisateurs bénéficiant des autorisations appropriées peuvent gérer et organiser ces fichiers et dossiers. Pour accéder à la bibliothèque des séminaires, allez dans l'onglet Salles de séminaire. Remarque : les séminaires auxquels vous devez assister s'affichent dans l'onglet Accueil de votre application Acrobat Connect Pro Central sous « Mes réunions », et non dans l'onglet Salles de séminaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 68 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 3. Affectez les autorisations. Les autorisations de participation permettent de définir les rôles des personnes présentes à un séminaire, tels que participant, présentateur ou hôte. Ces autorisations sont attribuées lors de la création du séminaire. L'hôte du séminaire peut également les modifier pendant le séminaire et une fois le séminaire terminé en modifiant la liste des participants. Les autorisations associées à la bibliothèque des séminaires déterminent les utilisateurs habilités à gérer les dossiers de la bibliothèque. Des six groupes prédéfinis, seuls les administrateurs ont l'autorisation de gestion du dossier Séminaire partagé. Une autorisation d'accès Refusé est attribuée par défaut aux groupes Auteurs, Gestionnaires de formation, Hôtes de réunion, Hôtes de séminaire et Gestionnaires d'événement. L'administrateur peut annuler ces autorisations par défaut et accorder à d'autres groupes l'accès au dossier Séminaire partagé. (Il n'existe aucune autorisation d'affichage ou de publication comme pour la bibliothèque de contenu.) Pour gérer des dossiers autres que le dossier Séminaire partagé, vous devez bénéficier d'autorisations de gestion pour ce dossier dans la bibliothèque des séminaires. 4. Inscrivez et approuvez des participants. Selon le type et l'objet d'un séminaire donné, l'hôte du séminaire peut réclamer l'inscription des invités. Le cas échéant, l'application Acrobat Connect Pro Central de l'hôte doit disposer du module Acrobat Connect Pro Events ; l'inscription à toute réunion, formation, présentation ou séminaire ne peut s'effectuer que dans l'onglet Gestion des événements. Si cet onglet est disponible, l'hôte doit tout d'abord créer le séminaire à partir de l'onglet Salles de séminaire au moyen de l'Assistant Séminaire. Il doit ensuite créer un événement, puis sélectionner le séminaire créé comme étant cet événement. Voir aussi « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Création d'un séminaire Après avoir obtenu les autorisations appropriées, créez des séminaires à l'aide de l'Assistant Séminaire. 1. Démarrage de l'Assistant Séminaire Dans la bibliothèque des séminaires, créez un dossier ou recherchez celui qui contiendra le séminaire (vous devez disposer de l'autorisation requise pour accéder à ce dossier). Lorsque vous déterminez un emplacement, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau séminaire pour ouvrir l'Assistant. 2. Saisie d'informations sur le séminaire Dans la première page de l'Assistant de création de séminaires, entrez des informations générales sur le séminaire, telles que son nom et son résumé, et sélectionnez le modèle à utiliser. (Seuls le nom du séminaire et la langue sont obligatoires ; tous les autres champs sont facultatifs.) Ces informations peuvent être modifiées après la création du séminaire. 3. Sélection des participants au séminaire Si seuls des invités autorisés peuvent participer à votre séminaire, l'étape suivante consiste à sélectionner les participants au séminaire. Pour un séminaire réservé aux utilisateurs enregistrés et aux invités autorisés, sélectionnez des participants et des présentateurs parmi les utilisateurs et les groupes. Ces utilisateurs pourront se connecter directement au séminaire. Les utilisateurs non conviés qui possèdent l'URL de la salle de réunion du séminaire peuvent tenter de se connecter comme visiteurs. Dans ce cas, en tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez les accepter individuellement en qualité d'invités.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 69 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 4. Envoi des invitations La dernière étape consiste à envoyer des invitations électroniques aux participants afin de les informer de la date, de l'heure, de la durée et du lieu du séminaire. Envoyez des invitations lors de la création du séminaire ou créez et envoyez les invitations ultérieurement. Voir aussi « Tâches préalables à un séminaire » à la page 67 Envoi d'invitations au séminaire Envoyez des invitations lors de la création d'un séminaire ou créez et envoyez les invitations ultérieurement. Une fois le séminaire commencé, vous pouvez contacter des invités en leur envoyant un courrier électronique ou un message instantané à partir du séminaire. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Contact d'invités à partir d'une réunion » sous « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15. 1 Dans la page d'informations sur le séminaire, sélectionnez Invitations. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si votre séminaire s'adresse aux seuls utilisateurs enregistrés ou aux invités et utilisateurs enregistrés, sélectionnez une catégorie d'invités dans le menu contextuel A, modifiez au besoin l'objet et le texte du message, puis joignez un événement de calendrier Outlook au courrier électronique, si nécessaire. • Si votre séminaire est destiné à toute personne disposant de l'adresse URL, cliquez sur Envoyer des invitations par e-mail, entrez les adresses électroniques dans la zone de texte A et, au besoin, modifiez l'objet et le texte du message. 3 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Remarque : le système peut générer un rapport individuel de participation pour les utilisateurs enregistrés. Les invités acceptés sont compris dans le nombre total de participants, mais aucun rapport individuel de participation n'est disponible. Affichage des informations sur un séminaire Pour afficher ou modifier un séminaire existant, vous devez bénéficier des deux types d'autorisation suivants : Autorisations de gestion de fichiers Vous devez bénéficier des autorisations de gestion du dossier ou du fichier du séminaire, car toute modification apportée à un séminaire créé entraîne la modification du fichier ou dossier dans la bibliothèque des séminaires. Autorisations de participation Vous devez jouer le rôle d'hôte du séminaire car vous modifiez également les paramètres du séminaire. Consultation du profil d'un séminaire 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. Affichage de la liste des participants à un séminaire Si vous bénéficiez d'autorisations de gestion pour un séminaire, vous pouvez afficher la liste de tous les participants invités pour chaque salle de séminaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 70 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Remarque : si ce séminaire est présenté comme un événement, vous devez afficher les informations dans l'onglet Gestion des événements. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events » à la page 123. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants. Affichage de la liste du contenu transféré d'un séminaire Si vous bénéficiez des autorisations de gestion pour un dossier de séminaire, vous pouvez consulter la liste de tout le contenu transféré depuis la salle de séminaire sur le serveur dans ce dossier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Contenu transféré. La liste des contenus transférés s'affiche. 4 Pour afficher des informations sur un élément, cliquez sur son nom. 5 Pour modifier le titre ou le résumé d'un élément du contenu transféré, cliquez sur Modifier, apportez vos modifications dans la page d'édition, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Pour revenir à la liste de contenus transférés, cliquez sur Retour à la page du contenu transféré. Affichage de la liste des enregistrements d'un séminaire Vous pouvez afficher la liste de tous les séminaires enregistrés. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Enregistrements. 4 Pour afficher des informations sur un élément, cliquez sur son nom. 5 Pour modifier le titre ou le résumé d'un enregistrement spécifique, cliquez sur Modifier, effectuez vos modifications dans la page Modifier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Affichage des informations de licence sur un dossier de séminaire Vous pouvez afficher le nombre de licences que votre société a acheté. Cela peut être utile pour prévoir le nombre d'invités à un séminaire. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur Informations sur la licence. Remarque : si vous créez un séminaire dans un dossier de licence de séminaire dont la date de début est située ultérieurement, personne ne pourra pénétrer dans la salle de séminaire. Modification des séminaires En tant qu'administrateur ou utilisateur bénéficiant des autorisations de gestion pour un dossier de séminaire, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des participants et modifier leur rôle (hôte, présentateur ou participant). Modification des informations sur les séminaires 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 71 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 4 Modifiez les options suivant les besoins. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Modification des informations sur les réunions » à la page 23. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout ou suppression de participants à un séminaire Vous pouvez, à tout moment, ajouter ou supprimer des participants à un séminaire. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les participants. 4 Pour ajouter des participants, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles. Pour supprimer des participants, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste Participants actuels : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. • Pour développer un groupe afin de pouvoir sélectionner des membres individuels, double-cliquez sur son nom. • Pour rechercher un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher dans la partie inférieure de la fenêtre, entrez le nom à afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou Supprimer suivant les besoins. (Si vous avez développé un groupe pour y sélectionner des individus, vous pouvez double-cliquer sur le Dossier parent dans la liste pour rétablir la liste initiale). 6 (Facultatif) Si vous avez ajouté des participants, définissez à présent des autorisations. Dans le menu Définir les rôles des utilisateurs situé au·bas de la liste Participants actuels, attribuez un type d'autorisation (participant, hôte ou présentateur) à chaque utilisateur ou groupe ajouté. Modification du rôle d'un participant à un séminaire Les rôles suivants peuvent être attribués aux participants du séminaire : présentateur, participant ou hôte. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le séminaire et sélectionnez le nom du séminaire. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier les participants. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste Participants actuels. • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. • Pour rechercher un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher en bas de la fenêtre, entrez le nom pour l'afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. 5 Pour chaque nom, sélectionnez le nouveau rôle de l'utilisateur (présentateur, participant, hôte ou refusé) dans le menu contextuel Définir un rôle utilisateur au bas de la liste Participants actuels. 6 Cliquez sur un lien dans la barre de navigation pour effectuer une autre tâche ou cliquez sur Informations relatives au séminaire pour afficher les détails du séminaire. Affichage des données relatives aux séminaires Ce tableau de bord fournit une représentation graphique des données statistiques relatives à vos séminaires. Cliquez sur le lien Tableau de bord du séminaire sous la touche de tabulation, en haut de la fenêtre Séminaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 72 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting Les données de tous les séminaires créés sont affichées dans trois graphiques à barres. Pour ouvrir le Rapport résumé de ce séminaire, cliquez dans l'un de ces graphiques. Séminaires les plus actifs ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de sessions. Séminaires les plus fréquentés ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de participants. Enregistrements les plus consultés ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le nombre de consultations (nombre de fois où chaque séminaire archivé a été consulté). Vous pouvez cliquer sur tous les séminaires individuels dans les trois graphiques à barres pour obtenir des informations plus détaillées sur le séminaire. Rapports de séminaires La fonctionnalité Rapports d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central vous permet de créer des rapports qui résument les informations relatives à un séminaire de différents points de vue. Les rapports sont créés à partir du lien Rapports situé sur la page d'informations du séminaire. Voir aussi « Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 Participation à un séminaire depuis Acrobat Connect Pro Central Si vous devez participer à un séminaire, le nom de celui-ci s'affiche dans la liste Mes réunions de l'onglet Accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Par ailleurs, si vous possédez Outlook et avez accepté l'invitation à ce séminaire, ce dernier apparaît dans votre calendrier Outlook. (Les séminaires que vous créez sont répertoriés sous l'onglet Salles de séminaire.) Vous pouvez déterminer si le séminaire auquel vous prenez part est déjà en cours en consultant la date et l'heure indiquées pour ce séminaire. Si la date est déjà dépassée, le séminaire apparaît dans les réunions expirées de votre liste de réunions. Cependant, vous avez toujours la possibilité de pénétrer dans sa salle pour afficher le contenu du séminaire. 1 Cliquez sur Mes réunions. 2 Cliquez sur Ouvrir en regard du séminaire auquel vous souhaitez participer. Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Webcast Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Webcast est conçu pour prendre en charge la communication un à plusieurs et quelquesuns à plusieurs avec des publics nombreux et répartis. Ces événements peuvent être menés pour des programmes marketing, des initiatives de communication interne et externe, ainsi que des applications de formation continue. Chaque événement peut être personnalisé en fonction des particularités et des exigences de la politique de la marque de l'hôte ou du sponsor de l'événement. L'interface d'Acrobat Connect Pro Webcast permet d'accéder à l'événement en direct, notamment au flux continu audio ou vidéo et au contenu des présentations. L'accès à la diffusion web s'effectue généralement par une URL d'inscription. Les participants enregistrés ont accès à l'événement en direct et à la lecture en différé à la demande (cette lecture reste associée à l'URL de l'événement en direct). Les diffusions web comprennent généralement les fonctionnalités suivantes destinées aux participants : • Zone de soumission de questionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 73 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting • Utilisation d'hyperliens permettant d'informer un ami • Options supplémentaires de téléchargement de contenu • Questions et sondage • Possibilité de participer par téléconférence La communication audio et vidéo dans Acrobat Connect Pro Webcast est généralement unidirectionnelle. Les hôtes et les modérateurs présentent le contenu audio ou vidéo au public. Les fonctionnalités de soumission de question et de réponse aux sondages permettent aux participants de fournir des commentaires sur le contenu de l'événement. Ces événements constituent également pour les hôtes de la diffusion web des fonctions intéressantes de génération de rapports. Ils indiquent en effet le degré d'implication des participants et signalent si certaines questions soumises au cours d'un événement attendent une suite. Chaque diffusion web peut avoir une apparence différente, en fonction de la nature de l'événement et des besoins du client. Pour accéder à une diffusion web Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro, les participants doivent disposer d'Adobe Flash Player 9 ou d'une version ultérieure, d'un navigateur et d'une connexion Internet. Pour plus d'informations, consultez www.adobe.com/go/learn_on24_webcast_fr.74 Chapitre 3 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training A propos du contenu, des cours et des curriculums Remarque : Vous ne pouvez utiliser l'application Training que si elle a été activée pour votre compte Acrobat Connect Pro L'application Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training est constituée de contenus, de cours, de curriculums et de classes virtuelles. Le contenu correspond à des fichiers stockés dans la bibliothèque de contenu d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Le contenu peut correspondre à tous les types de fichiers suivants : PPT, PPTX, FLV, SWF, PDF, GIF, JPG, PNG, MP3, HTML ou ZIP. Aucune information individuelle sur les utilisateurs n'est stockée avec le contenu. Des rapports consolidés, spécifiques au contenu, sont cependant créés, en fonction de l'accès. Si du contenu est créé avec Adobe Presenter et que la présentation contient des questionnaires, vous ne pouvez pas définir le nombre de tentatives autorisées aux utilisateurs pour passer les questionnaires avec succès. (En revanche, vous pouvez définir un nombre de tentatives pour des cours.) Par ailleurs, aucune fonctionnalité de reprise n'est disponible pour le contenu ; par exemple, si un utilisateur quitte un élément de contenu à la moitié de son exécution, il sera ramené au début du contenu à la prochaine ouverture de l'élément. Un cours contient un élément quelconque de la bibliothèque de contenu. Un cours est associé à un ensemble donné de stagiaires inscrits et n'inclut aucun suivi individuel. Le cours peut être affiché et administré indépendamment ou en tant que partie intégrante d'un curriculum ou d'une classe virtuelle. Si vous utilisez des cours, les notes peuvent être récupérées en tant qu'objets compatibles AICC et vous pouvez imposer le nombre de tentatives accordées aux utilisateurs pour achever le cours. Les cours contiennent également une fonctionnalité de reprise, de sorte que les utilisateurs puissent consulter la moitié d'un cours, le fermer, puis le rouvrir ultérieurement à l'endroit où ils l'avaient quitté. Une classe virtuelle peut être utilisée pour une session de formation. Les classes virtuelles sont ajoutées à un curriculum, de la même manière qu'un cours. Il existe trois niveaux d'accès aux classes virtuelles : étudiants inscrits uniquement, étudiants inscrits et invités acceptés, et toute personne disposant de l'URL de la classe virtuelle. Un curriculum est un groupe de cours, de réunions et de classes virtuelles qui accompagne les étudiants dans leur cursus de formation. Un curriculum se compose essentiellement de cours , mais il peut aussi inclure d'autres éléments, tels que des sessions de formation en direct. Les curriculums permettent d'affecter des conditions préalables, des examens et des conditions de terminaison afin d'imposer un cursus de formation spécifique. De même que pour les cours, vous pouvez générer des rapports pour effectuer le suivi des inscrits au fur et à mesure qu'ils avancent dans le curriculum, afin de vous assurer qu'ils ont satisfait aux exigences des objectifs pédagogiques. Trois autorisations de participation sont attribuées aux curriculums et cours de formation : Inscrit, Refusé et En attente d'autorisation. « Inscrit » désigne un stagiaire placé dans un cours ou un curriculum par un gestionnaire de formation. « Refusé » fait référence à un utilisateur qui s'est vu refuser l'accès à un cours ou un curriculum. Le gestionnaire de formation utilise généralement l'autorisation Refusé pour exclure un utilisateur d'un cours de groupe (par exemple, lorsqu'il a déjà suivi le cours). « Autorisation en attente » indique qu'un utilisateur attend l'autorisation du gestionnaire de formation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 75 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les classes virtuelles et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 « Création d'une classe virtuelle » à la page 102 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Accès à la bibliothèque des formations L'ensemble des cours, curriculums et classes virtuelles Acrobat Connect Pro Training est stocké et classé dans un répertoire de dossiers appelé Bibliothèque des formations. Pour accéder à la bibliothèque des formations, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation situé en haut de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Au fur et à mesure que vous parcourez la bibliothèque, les noms des dossiers s'affichent les uns derrière les autres pour former un chemin de navigation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre du navigateur. Pour créer des cours et des curriculums, vous devez être gestionnaire de formation. Pour gérer un dossier de bibliothèque des formations, il n'est pas nécessaire que vous soyez gestionnaire de formation, mais vous devez disposer des autorisations de gestion requises pour ce dossier dans la bibliothèque des formations. Voir aussi « Utilisation des fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 159 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 A propos des autorisations de la Bibliothèque des formations Tenez compte des aspects des autorisations suivants lorsque vous utilisez la bibliothèque des formations. Autorisations des inscrits définit l'accès accordé aux stagiaires pour un cours ou curriculum donné. Les trois autorisations possibles pour les inscrits sont : Inscrit, Refusé et Autorisation en attente. Les personnes disposant d'une autorisation Inscrit peuvent afficher un cours ou curriculum. Les personnes disposant d'une autorisation Refusé ne peuvent pas accéder au cours ou curriculum. Les personnes en attente d'autorisation doivent recevoir l'autorisation du gestionnaire de formation. Les autorisations accordées aux inscrits sont affectées à la création du cours ou du curriculum. Les autorisations peuvent également être modifiées après la création du cours ou du curriculum. Pour modifier les autorisations, le gestionnaire de formation doit ouvrir le cours ou curriculum et modifier la liste des participants pour ajouter ou supprimer des inscrits. Le gestionnaire de formation doit également disposer des autorisations de gestion pour le dossier dans lequel se trouve ce cours ou curriculum. Autorisations de gestion de la bibliothèque des formations définit les utilisateurs pouvant exécuter les différentes tâches associées aux fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque des formations, comme par exemple l'ajout et la suppression de fichiers, la recherche d'archives dans la bibliothèque, etc. La capacité à créer, supprimer et modifier des cours et des curriculums dans les divers dossiers de la bibliothèque des formations dépend des groupes auxquels un utilisateur appartient et des autorisations individuelles qui lui sont accordées pour des fichiers et dossiers spécifiques. La bibliothèque des formations n'a que deux types d'autorisation : Gérer et Accès refusé. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 76 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Les membres du groupe Administrateur peuvent gérer tous les fichiers et dossiers contenus dans la bibliothèque des formations. Par défaut, les gestionnaires de formation disposent d'autorisations de gestion uniquement pour leur dossier individuel placé dans le dossier Formation de l'utilisateur. Autrement dit, les gestionnaires de formation peuvent ajouter, supprimer, modifier ou affecter des autorisations uniquement dans leurs propres dossiers. Toutes les autres autorisations de gestion sont affectées à une seule personne ou à un groupe par l'administrateur. Autorisations de la bibliothèque des formations accordées aux groupes prédéfinis Acrobat Connect Pro reconnaît six groupes d'autorisation par défaut appelés groupes prédéfinis. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier les autorisations de ces groupes, mais vous pouvez les étendre en affectant des individus ou des groupes à plusieurs groupes prédéfinis. Le module Formation s'applique au groupe Gestionnaires de formation. Ce groupe est associé à la bibliothèque des formations. Chaque gestionnaire de formation dispose d'un dossier individuel dans le dossier Formation de l'utilisateur de la bibliothèque des formations. Ils peuvent créer et administrer leurs cours et curriculums dans ce dossier. Chaque gestionnaire de formation dispose également d'un dossier de contenu. L'administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro peut également affecter des autorisations de gestion pour certains dossiers de la bibliothèque des formations à des utilisateurs qui ne sont pas des responsables de formation. Cependant, seuls les gestionnaires de formation peuvent créer de nouveaux cours ou curriculums. Voir aussi « Utilisation des fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 159 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Ordre de priorité des autorisations multiples » à la page 215 Inscription aux cours et curriculum En fonction du type et de l'objet d'un cours ou curriculum donné, le gestionnaire de formation peut vouloir inscrire les invités. Le cas échéant, l'application Acrobat Connect Pro Central du responsable doit comporter l'onglet Gestion des événements vu que l'inscription à une formation ne peut s'effectuer que dans ce dernier. Le responsable de formation qui dispose de cet onglet doit tout d'abord lancer l'Assistant Cours ou Curriculum pour créer le cours ou le curriculum dans l'onglet Formation, mais ignorer les étapes de sélection des participants et d'envoi des invitations. Il crée ensuite un événement à l'aide de l'Assistant Evénement, sélectionne l'option Présenter un curriculum ou un cours Connect Pro Training, puis choisit le cours ou le curriculum à utiliser comme événement. L'Assistant Evénement permet au responsable de formation de sélectionner et d'inviter des inscrits, de sélectionner et de personnaliser des questions d'inscription et d'envoyer des invitations, même à des listes de diffusion volumineuses. Si la formation est présentée comme un événement, tous les inscrits, qu'ils possèdent ou non un compte Acrobat Connect Pro ou que l'URL soit publique ou privée, doivent fournir des informations d'inscription avant le début de la formation. Dans ce cas, le gestionnaire de formation peut vérifier les demandes d'inscription avant le début de la formation et approuver ou refuser l'admission de chaque personne inscrite. Voir aussi « Présentation des événements » à la page 123 Contenu AICC pour les cours Lorsque vous utilisez un contenu AICC (Aviation Industry CBT Committee) dans vos cours, Acrobat Connect Pro applique certaines règles spécifiques. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 77 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Affichage des données relatives à la formation Le tableau de bord des formations contient deux graphiques à barres, l'un dédié aux cours et l'autre aux curriculums : Résumé des cours des 30 derniers jours Affiche les cours des 30 derniers jours, avec le nombre maximal d'inscrits ayant réussi ; cliquez sur le graphique de votre choix pour afficher plus de détails. Résumé des curriculums des 30 derniers jours Affiche les curriculums des 30 derniers jours, avec le nombre maximal d'inscrits ayant terminé le curriculum ; cliquez sur le graphique de votre choix pour afficher plus de détails. Les graphiques à barres s'affichent dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Cependant, vous pouvez également exporter le tableau de bord dans une fenêtre du navigateur que vous pourrez imprimer. Pour exporter le tableau de bord, cliquez sur Version imprimable à gauche, au-dessus de l'affichage. Voir aussi « Affichage des données relatives au contenu » à la page 168 « Contrôle de la formation avec des rapports » à la page 107 Création et gestion de groupes de formation Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, les responsables de formation, les administrateurs et les administrateurs limités peuvent créer, modifier et supprimer des groupes de stagiaires, aussi appelés groupes de formation. Les gestionnaires de formation peuvent modifier les groupes de formation, même s'ils ont été créés par d'autres gestionnaires de formation. Remarque : Les gestionnaires de formation ne peuvent pas effectuer les opérations suivantes : créer des utilisateurs, modifier des informations sur des utilisateurs existants, supprimer des utilisateurs, supprimer des groupes qu'ils n'ont pas créés et affecter des utilisateurs à des groupes système. Voir aussi « Gestion des inscrits au curriculum » à la page 100 « Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes » à la page 204 Création d'un groupe de formation Il est impossible de donner à un groupe de formation le même nom qu'un groupe système ou un groupe d'administration. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Nouveau groupe. 4 Attribuez un nom au nouveau groupe. 5 (Facultatif) Tapez une description du groupe. 6 Cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Dans la liste Membres éventuels du groupe, sélectionnez un utilisateur ou un groupe, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur le bouton Rechercher pour rechercher un utilisateur ou un groupe non répertorié. A mesure que vous ajoutez des utilisateurs et des groupes, la liste Membres actuels du groupe située à droite se met à jour et fait état de vos modifications. 8 Lorsque vous avez fini, cliquez sur Terminer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 78 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Ajout de stagiaires à un groupe de formation existant 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes, sélectionnez le groupe que vous souhaitez modifier et cliquez ensuite sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Afficher les membres du groupe. 5 Dans la liste Membres éventuels du groupe, sélectionnez l'utilisateur ou le groupe que vous souhaitez inclure, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Suppression de stagiaires d'un groupe de formation 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes, sélectionnez le groupe que vous souhaitez modifier et cliquez ensuite sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Afficher les membres du groupe. 5 Dans la liste Membres actuels du groupe, sélectionnez le(s) membre(s) que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Utilisation de fichiers CSV pour ajouter des stagiaires Si vous disposez d'un fichier au format CSV, vous pouvez l'utiliser pour ajouter des stagiaires. Trois méthodes d'importation sont possibles. Avant d'effectuer une quelconque importation, vous devez créer un fichier CSV. Vous pouvez également utiliser ou modifier un fichier CSV existant. Le fichier CSV créé doit comprendre les informations correctes. Pour ajouter des groupes de formation, chaque ligne du fichier CSV utilisé doit contenir un nom et une description, comme indiqué ci-dessous. Pour ajouter des utilisateurs à un groupe sélectionné, chaque ligne du fichier CSV utilisé doit contenir le nom de connexion, comme indiqué ci-dessous. nom, description groupe 1, FormationRH, groupe 2, FormationFinance groupe 3, FormationVentes groupe 4, FormationProduits groupe 5, FormationMarketing nom de connexion rblatt2@masociété.com rbloom3@masociété.com cbond4@masociété.com pdavis5@masociété.comUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 79 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Pour ajouter des stagiaires à un groupe de formation, chaque ligne du fichier CSV utilisé doit contenir un nom de connexion et un nom, comme indiqué ci-dessous. Nous attirons votre attention sur le fait que, dans le troisième exemple, vous pouvez ajouter le même utilisateur à plusieurs groupes dans le même fichier CSV ; l'utilisateur cbond4@masociété.com a ainsi été ajouté aux groupes 1 et 2 en utilisant deux entrées distinctes. Voici des astuces liées à l'utilisation des fichiers CSV : • Les capacités des navigateurs étant limitées, Adobe conseille, si vous avez un grand nombre d'utilisateurs à ajouter, de créer plusieurs petits fichiers au lieu d'un seul volumineux. • Les noms qui contiennent une virgule doivent être placés entre guillemets. Par exemple, le nom John Doe, Jr., doit apparaître dans le fichier CSV sous la forme “John Doe, Jr.” pour que le fichier soit correctement importé. Ajout de stagiaires à l'aide d'un fichier CSV 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Importer. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Cliquez sur Créer de nouveaux groupes pour que les groupes figurant dans le fichier CSV importé (celui dont les lignes contiennent un nom et une description) deviennent leur propre nouveau groupe de formation. Cette option permet de créer les groupes de formation. • Sélectionnez Ajouter des utilisateurs existants à un groupe pour que les utilisateurs figurant dans le fichier CSV importé (celui dont les lignes contiennent des informations sur l'identifiant de connexion) soient ajoutés au groupe indiqué dans le menu déroulant. • Sélectionnez Ajouter des utilisateurs existants à des groupes de formation nouveaux/existants pour que les utilisateurs figurant dans le fichier CSV importé (celui dont les lignes contiennent des informations sur le nom de groupe et l'identifiant de connexion) soient ajoutés au groupe de formation indiqué comme valeur de nom dans chaque ligne du fichier CSV. Sélectionnez l'option Créer des groupes de formation à partir du fichier CSV afin de créer des groupes de formation pour chaque groupe figurant dans le fichier CSV et ne constituant pas un groupe de formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Une fois les groupes de formation créés, les utilisateurs y sont ajoutés si leur nom de connexion apparaît sur la même ligne que le nouveau groupe dans le fichier CSV. (Si l'option Créer des groupes de formation à partir du fichier CSV n'est pas sélectionnée, chaque ligne du fichier CSV contenant un nom de groupe de formation qui n'existe pas encore générera une erreur.) 5 Cliquez sur Parcourir pour naviguer vers le dossier CSV désiré. 6 Cliquez sur Transférer. nom de connexion, nom du groupe mbetts1@masociété.com, groupe 1 rblatt2@masociété.com, groupe 1 rbloom3@masociété.com, groupe 1 cbond4@masociété.com, groupe 1 cbond4@masociété.com, groupe 2UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 80 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Une fois le transfert terminé, un message de confirmation apparaît pour indiquer si la procédure d'importation a réussi. Des informations sont également fournies sur les utilisateurs et les groupes importés. Un rapport d'erreurs est généré lorsque des entrées ne sont pas importées. Conseils pour la création de curriculums et de cours de formation Vous trouverez, ci-après, quelques conseils pour la création de curriculums et de cours de formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Training. • Utilisez Adobe Presenter et Adobe Captivate® pour créer du contenu pour les cours. Presenter convient à la création de contenu de formation en ligne rapide à l'aide de Microsoft PowerPoint, tandis qu'Adobe Captivate permet de créer du matériel de formation devant contenir des ramifications·et des simulations complexes. • Au niveau du cours, définissez le nombre maximal de tentatives côté client sur un et le nombre maximal de tentatives côté serveur sur un nombre quelconque. (Définissez le nombre maximal de tentatives côté serveur sur une valeur illimitée pour que les stagiaires disposent d'autant de tentatives que nécessaire pour réussir.) • Ajoutez des éléments de curriculum directement dans les curriculums, et non dans des dossiers. • Si vous ajoutez du contenu depuis la bibliothèque de contenu directement dans un curriculum, ce contenu est automatiquement converti en cours et le suivi est activé. Par exemple, lorsque vous ajoutez un fichier PDF à un curriculum, ce fichier devient un cours et un suivi peut être effectué jusqu'au niveau de la page (vous pouvez ainsi voir si les stagiaires ont consulté 7 pages sur les 10 disponibles ou bien les 10 pages du fichier). En outre, un dossier de ressources du curriculum est automatiquement créé et tous les cours spécifiques à ce curriculum (c'est-à-dire le contenu automatiquement converti en cours pour ce curriculum) sont placés dans ce dossier. • Indiquez à vos stagiaires comment suivre des cours et des curriculums, particulièrement tous les paramètres spécifiques que vous avez utilisés. Par exemple, signalez-leur le nombre de tentatives dont ils disposent pour réussir un questionnaire. Si vous apportez des modifications à un curriculum après l'avoir rendu disponible, notamment en ajoutant ou supprimant des éléments, informez-en également vos stagiaires. • Invitez les stagiaires à ouvrir un élément ou un cours dans une seule fenêtre de navigateur et à la fermer lorsqu'ils ont terminé. • Si vous vous apprêtez à rendre disponible un curriculum volumineux, effectuez d'abord un test. Par exemple, vérifiez que votre système Acrobat Connect Pro (réseau, serveurs, base de données, etc.) est correctement configuré et dispose des ressources suffisantes pour pouvoir gérer le volume de stagiaires devant s'inscrire au curriculum. • Limitez les modifications apportées à vos cours et curriculums après les avoir rendus accessibles aux stagiaires. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les classes virtuelles et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 « A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours » à la page 84 « Ajout et suppression d'éléments dans un curriculum » à la page 92UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 81 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Création de cours de formation Création d'un cours Un cours correspond à du contenu destiné à un ensemble de stagiaires inscrits et associé à leur suivi individuel. Il peut, par exemple, s'agir d'une présentation autonome proposée dans le cadre d'un curriculum ou affichée dans une classe virtuelle. Remarque : La documentation sur les cours s'applique uniquement aux comptes comprenant l'application Acrobat Connect Pro Training. La procédure de création d'un cours implique les tâches suivantes. 1. Création de contenu et ajout à la bibliothèque de contenu Un cours se base sur du contenu existant. Votre bibliothèque de contenu doit donc inclure des éléments tels que des présentations, des fichiers PDF ou des fichiers image. Le contenu peut correspondre à tous les types de fichiers suivants : PPT, PPTX, FLV, SWF, PDF, GIF, JPG, PNG, MP3, HTML ou ZIP. Reportez-vous à la section « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163. 2. Démarrage de l'Assistant Cours Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, localisez la barre de menus Créer nouveau, puis cliquez sur Cours. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer sur Formation > Cours. 3. Informations sur le cours Dans la première page de l'Assistant de création de cours, saisissez les informations générales relatives au cours, telles que son nom et son résumé. (Seul le nom du cours est obligatoire ; tous les autres champs sont facultatifs.) Une fois le cours créé, ces informations peuvent être modifiées. Remarque : Par défaut, l'option Actualiser les informations de tous les éléments liés à cet élément est sélectionnée. Le cours étant actuellement en cours de création, aucun élément ne doit encore lui être associé. Cependant, ne désactivez pas cet élément si vous pensez lui associer des éléments ultérieurement. 4. Sélection du contenu du cours Au cours de cette étape de l'Assistant Cours, Acrobat Connect Pro vous dirige vers la bibliothèque de contenu, dans laquelle vous pouvez accéder au fichier de contenu à utiliser. Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'un seul fichier dans la bibliothèque, et vous devez disposer des autorisations d'affichage ou de gestion pour ce fichier. Après avoir ajouté du contenu, poursuivez la procédure de l'Assistant pour inscrire des stagiaires ou enregistrer le curriculum et quitter l'Assistant. (Pour inscrire des stagiaires, configurer des notifications de cours ou activer des rappels électroniques ultérieurement, vous pouvez modifier le cours.) 5. Inscription de stagiaires Seuls les utilisateurs inscrits pourront accéder à l'adresse URL du cours et s'identifier pour l'afficher. Pour inscrire de très nombreux utilisateurs, il vous suffit de présenter le cours en tant qu'événement si vous disposez de l'application Gestion des événements. Après la création du cours, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des stagiaires, si besoin est. 6. Configuration de notifications Une notification de cours est un message électronique qui explique aux inscrits comment accéder au cours.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 82 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Lorsque vous effectuez la mise en forme de votre notification, vous pouvez utiliser les champs à insertion automatique dans la ligne d'objet et dans le corps du message. Ces champs sont des variables d'informations renseignées automatiquement lors de l'envoi de la notification par courrier électronique. Vous pouvez modifier les notifications après la création du cours. 7. Configuration des rappels Les rappels sont facultatifs. Un rappel de cours est un message électronique envoyé à tous les inscrits au cours, ou à une partie d'entre eux, une fois le cours configuré. Vous pouvez utiliser des rappels, par exemple pour rappeler aux inscrits qu'ils doivent suivre le cours ou pour signaler à des utilisateurs spécifiques qu'ils sont tenus d'achever le cours. Voir aussi « A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours » à la page 84 « Modification des cours » à la page 85 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Affichage des informations sur un cours et de la liste des inscrits Une fois un cours créé, vous pouvez afficher les informations sur le cours, ainsi qu'une liste des inscrits. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Modification des cours » à la page 85 Affichage d'informations sur le cours Vous pouvez afficher ou modifier les informations relatives à un cours dans la page d'informations sur les cours, qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur le nom du cours dans la liste du dossier de formation. Sur cette page, vous pouvez consulter ou modifier les informations relatives à un cours spécifique, y compris le résumé du cours, son contenu, les personnes qui y sont inscrites et les paramètres de notifications et de rappels. Chacune de ces fonctionnalités est accessible en cliquant sur le lien de navigation. Chaque cours dispose d'une page d'informations qui lui est dédiée. Il s'agit d'un récapitulatif contenant les informations affichées dans l'illustration suivante.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 83 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training La page d'informations sur les cours contient des renseignements importants sur les différents cours. Informations sur le cours Nom du cours, ID, résumé, date d'ouverture, date de clôture, URL du cours, nombre de diapositives ou de pages, durée, nombre maximum de tentatives (nombre maximum de tentatives accordées à un inscrit jusqu'à la réussite de ce cours), note maximale possible et langue. Paramètres du catalogue des formations Informations détaillées sur les options du catalogue des formations qui ont été sélectionnées lors de la création du cours, telles que les notifications et les procédures d'auto-inscription. Stratégie de rappels Champ indiquant si une stratégie de rappels est implémentée, le nom des personnes qui reçoivent les rappels, la date d'envoi du prochain rappel et leur fréquence d'envoi. Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Localisez le dossier contenant le cours désiré. Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse pour le sélectionner. Affichage de la liste des inscrits à un cours 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez au dossier contenant le cours. 3 Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse. 4 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des inscrits. La liste des utilisateurs et des groupes inscrits s'affiche dans la fenêtre Inscrits actuels, sur le côté droit. A propos des notifications et des rappels Les notifications sont mises en file d'attente, puis envoyées comme suit : • Les notifications définies pour un envoi immédiat sont envoyées dès que vous cliquez sur Envoyer. • Les notifications configurées pour un envoi à une date ultérieure sont traitées chaque soir à minuit. Le jour dit, elles sont envoyées en quelques minutes ou quelques heures, selon la longueur de la file d'attente, après 00:00 PST (heure normale du Pacifique).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 84 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Les notifications reçues semblent provenir de l'auteur du cours, car elles utilisent l'adresse électronique définie dans son compte Acrobat Connect Pro Les éventuelles notifications d'échec de remise sont également envoyées à cette adresse. Toutes les notifications sont envoyées individuellement. Aucun des lecteurs du message ne peut voir la liste de tous les destinataires car elle n'apparaît pas dans l'en-tête. Les rappels sont mis en file d'attente, puis envoyés comme suit : • Les rappels configurés pour un envoi immédiat sont expédiés très rapidement après la création du cours. • Acrobat Connect Pro envoie les rappels de la part de l'auteur du cours en utilisant l'adresse électronique indiquée dans le compte Acrobat Connect Pro de l'auteur du curriculum. Les rappels électroniques sont envoyés individuellement ; aucun des lecteurs du message ne peut voir la liste de tous les destinataires car elle n'apparaît pas dans l'en-tête. (Les éventuelles notifications d'échec de remise sont également envoyées à l'adresse électronique de l'auteur du cours.) • Les rappels configurés pour un envoi ultérieur sont traités chaque soir à minuit. Le jour dit, ils sont envoyés en quelques minutes ou en quelques heures, selon la longueur de la file d'attente, après 00:00 PST (Heure normale du Pacifique). Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Modification des cours » à la page 85 A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours Points à prendre en compte lors de la modification du contenu d'un cours : • Lorsque vous ajoutez du contenu à un cours, ce contenu est copié dans le cours. Si vous modifiez le fichier de contenu d'origine, la modification n'est pas appliquée au cours. (Pour plus d'informations, voir « Modification des cours » à la page 85.) • Lorsque vous ajoutez un cours à un curriculum, il s'agit d'un lien vers le cours et non d'une copie. Si vous apportez une modification à un cours, cette dernière est appliquée au cours au sein d'un curriculum. • Limitez au maximum les modifications apportées au contenu d'un cours si ce dernier comprend un questionnaire auquel certains utilisateurs ont déjà répondu. Limiter les modifications permet de réduire le nombre de versions existantes. Cela réduit également le nombre de rapports pour les utilisateurs ayant participé·aux versions précédentes. Voir aussi « Conseils pour la création de curriculums et de cours de formation » à la page 80 « Ajout et suppression d'éléments dans un curriculum » à la page 92 A propos des modes de révision Acrobat Connect Pro Training propose deux modes de révision : côté serveur et côté client. Il est important de bien saisir le fonctionnement de ces modes de révision, particulièrement si vos cours contiennent des questionnaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 85 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Le mode de révision côté serveur est utilisé uniquement avec les cours Acrobat Connect Pro Training. Pour les cours, un responsable de formation peut indiquer le nombre maximal de tentatives dont dispose un stagiaire pour achever ou réussir le cours. Un stagiaire est verrouillé en mode de révision dans les cas suivants : • Il a réussi ou terminé le cours dans le nombre de tentatives imparties. • Il a dépassé le nombre de tentatives imparties pour réussir ou terminer le cours. Il existe deux manières pour les stagiaires de savoir s'ils sont verrouillés en mode de révision : • Le texte « [Mode de révision] » est affiché dans la barre de titre du navigateur lorsqu'un cours est ouvert. • Ce message s'affiche en haut de l'écran : « Vous avez épuisé toutes vos tentatives et êtes maintenant en mode Révision. Les choix sélectionnés ne seront pas suivis. » (Le message s'affiche le plus souvent lorsqu'un cours est en mode de révision dans une classe virtuelle.) Lorsque les stagiaires sont en mode de révision et qu'ils répondent à des questionnaires inclus dans le cours, leurs notes et leurs états ne sont pas communiqués à Acrobat Connect Pro. Ceci permet d'empêcher les stagiaires d'améliorer leur note après avoir réussi un cours. Important : Les stagiaires doivent toujours ouvrir un cours ou un élément dans une seule fenêtre de navigateur à la fois et fermer cette dernière lorsqu'ils ont terminé. Il est possible que des stagiaires se retrouvent verrouillés en mode de révision par erreur s'ils ouvrent le même élément ou cours simultanément dans plusieurs fenêtres. Le paramètre relatif au nombre de tentatives imparties côté serveur pour un cours est transféré à tous les éléments du curriculum reliés à ce cours. Ce paramètre étant par ailleurs le seul à être imposé, nous vous conseillons de ne pas vous en occuper pour les curriculums. Le mode de révision côté client est imposé par le paramètre relatif au nombre de tentatives maximales dans les présentations créées à l'aide d'Adobe Presenter et d'Adobe Captivate. Le mode de révision côté client ne s'applique qu'aux tentatives effectuées dans la même session de navigateur. Toutefois, le mode de révision côté client peut persister pendant plusieurs sessions si l'utilisateur quitte la présentation avant d'avoir terminé, provoquant ainsi l'envoi des données de synthèse au serveur. Dans Adobe Presenter, le paramètre de tentatives est défini dans les options de réussite ou d'échec du Gestionnaire de questionnaires. Par exemple, si vous définissez l'option « En cas d'échec, autoriser X tentatives » sur 1, les utilisateurs ne disposent que d'une seule opportunité de réussite. Supposons qu'un utilisateur commence le questionnaire, puis le quitte pour consulter une diapositive qui n'en fait pas partie ou commence un second questionnaire dans la présentation. En quittant le premier questionnaire et en laissant la présentation ouverte (une seule session de navigateur), l'utilisateur épuise sa seule tentative autorisée et ne peut plus accéder au questionnaire. Supposons maintenant qu'un utilisateur ouvre un questionnaire, réponde à une ou deux questions (mais pas suffisamment pour réussir l'examen), puis ferme son navigateur. Dans ce second cas, l'utilisateur a quitté la présentation mais pas le questionnaire. Ceci provoque l'envoi des données de synthèse à Acrobat Connect Pro et, si l'utilisateur dispose d'une autre tentative côté serveur (définie dans le cours), il peut rouvrir la présentation et reprendre la première tentative côté client (bien que cela soit la seconde tentative côté serveur). Pour éviter tout conflit entre l'état et la note, Adobe recommande de définir le nombre de tentatives imparties côté client sur 1. (Dans Adobe Presenter et Adobe Captivate, le paramètre par défaut est 1.) Le réglage sur 1 côté client ne signifie pas que l'utilisateur n'a qu'une seule chance de terminer ou réussir le cours ; le paramètre défini au niveau du cours règle le nombre maximum de tentatives. Modification des cours Si vous êtes administrateur ou un utilisateur autorisé à gérer un dossier spécifique de la bibliothèque des formations, vous pouvez gérer des cours.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 86 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Voir aussi « A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours » à la page 84 « A propos des notifications et des rappels » à la page 83 « A propos des modes de révision » à la page 84 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Modification des informations sur les cours Vous pouvez modifier les informations sur les cours, par exemple leur nom, leur ID, leur résumé et leurs dates de début et de clôture. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours. 3 Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse. 4 Dans la liste de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 5 Modifiez les informations sur le cours. Vous pouvez modifier les informations suivantes : Nom du cours (Obligatoire) Nom du cours ; ce champ s'affiche dans la liste des cours et dans les rapports. ID du cours Le numéro ou l'ID du cours : par exemple, 100, CS100, etc. Résumé (Résumé) Description du cours s'affichant dans la page d'informations sur le cours. Date de début du cours Date à partir de laquelle les utilisateurs peuvent accéder au cours. Si vous repoussez une date de début de cours existante, plus aucun utilisateur ne pourra·accéder au cours jusqu'à la nouvelle date (pas même ceux qui, éventuellement, avaient commencé à le suivre). Si certains inscrits ont déjà commencé ce cours, les informations de leur suivi et leurs réponses aux questionnaires sont préservées dans les rapports. Date de fin du cours Date à partir de laquelle les utilisateurs ne peuvent plus accéder au cours. Nombre maximal de tentatives Nombre de tentatives dont dispose un inscrit pour réussir ce cours. Si vous ne remplissez pas ce champ, vous autorisez un nombre de tentatives illimité. Note maximale possible Note maximale qu'un utilisateur peut se voir attribuer. Utilisez cette option pour du contenu de cours qui n'est pas encore noté, tel qu'un fichier PDF, ou qui envoie une note partielle, tel que du contenu Captivate (la note maximale dépend du contenu utilisé). Remarque : S'agissant du contenu qui contient plusieurs questionnaires notés, la note maximale possible pour l'ensemble du contenu n'est pas automatiquement détectée lorsque celui-ci est ajouté à un cours. Par exemple, si une présentation qui contient deux questionnaires, l'un avec une note maximale possible de 50 et un autre avec une note de 40, la note maximale possible indiquée est celle du dernier questionnaire effectué, à savoir 40. Pour obtenir un score total plus précis, pensez à créer un seul questionnaire et à répartir les questions tout au long de la présentation, plutôt que de créer plusieurs questionnaires. Par exemple, créez un questionnaire de 10 questions. Dans la présentation, présentez quatre diapositives de contenu, les questions 1 à 5, puis huit diapositives de contenu, et enfin les questions 6 à 10. 6 Par défaut, l'option Actualiser les informations de tous les éléments liés à cet élément est sélectionnée. Conservezla ainsi si vous pensez lier des éléments au cours. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. La modification du titre ou du résumé du cours ne modifie pas les informations apparaissant sur la diapositive de résumé de la présentation. Cette diapositive utilise les informations spécifiées lors de la première publication de la présentation. Pour modifier ces informations, publiez à nouveau le contenu, puis sélectionnez le contenu utilisé par le cours. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 87 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Modification ou mise à jour du contenu d'un cours Vous pouvez modifier ou mettre à jour le contenu d'un cours. Pour mettre le contenu à jour, commencez par publier les fichiers mis à jour dans la bibliothèque de contenu. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours dont vous souhaitez modifier le contenu. Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse pour le sélectionner. 3 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Sélectionner du contenu. 4 Localisez le dossier dont vous souhaitez utiliser le contenu pour le cours. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton situé en regard du contenu que vous souhaitez utiliser pour le cours. Vous pouvez sélectionner de nouveaux contenus ou une version à jour de contenus existants. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 7 Un message d'avertissement s'affiche. Pour mettre à jour le contenu, cliquez sur Oui, modifier mon contenu. Ajout ou suppression d'utilisateurs inscrits à un cours Si vous ajoutez des inscrits à un cours, informez-les. Vous pouvez également configurer des rappels à leur intention. Si vous supprimez des inscrits, ils ne reçoivent plus de notification et ne peuvent plus accéder au cours. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours. 3 Dans la liste, cliquez sur le nom du cours qui vous intéresse. 4 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des inscrits. 5 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs inscrits dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur chacun d'eux en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. Pour développer un groupe afin de pouvoir sélectionner des membres individuels, double-cliquez sur son nom. Sélectionnez ensuite les utilisateurs individuels.) • Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs inscrits dans la liste Inscrits actuels, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Modification des paramètres de notification d'un cours ou rappels Les notifications et les rappels vous permettent de communiquer avec les inscrits à un cours. Vous pouvez, à tout moment, modifier les paramètres des rappels et des notifications en attente. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours. 3 Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse. 4 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Notifications. 5 Cliquez sur Notifications en attente. 6 Sous Objet, cliquez sur le nom de la notification ou du rappel à modifier. (Les notifications apparaissent dans la liste des objets avec l'icône de notification , tandis que les rappels sont indiqués à l'aide de l'icône .) 7 Cliquez sur Modifier au bas de la page. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 88 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 8 Apportez des modifications au minutage, aux destinataires et au texte du message, par exemple. (Si vous saisissez plusieurs adresses électroniques, séparez-les par des virgules.) Pour modifier l'objet et le contenu du message électronique à l'aide d'un champ à insertion automatique, copiez le nom du champ dans la liste Champs à insertion automatique et collez-le dans l'objet ou le corps du message. Ne modifiez pas le texte du champ à insertion automatique placé entre accolades. 9 Cliquez sur Envoyer pour appliquer les modifications. Suppression d'un cours Avant de supprimer un cours, sachez que : • Le cours sera retiré de la bibliothèque des formations. • Les inscrits n'y auront plus accès. • Les·rapports du cours ne sont plus disponibles. (Pour interdire l'accès à un cours tout en conservant les informations de ses rapports, définissez une date de clôture pour le cours, mais ne le supprimez pas.) • Les rappels de cours ne sont plus envoyés, ni les notifications de retard. • Le contenu utilisé par le cours est toujours stocké dans la bibliothèque de contenu. • Le cours est supprimé de la liste des éléments de tous les curriculums dont il fait partie. Les rapports sur les curriculums en sont affectés. Lorsque vous supprimez des cours inclus dans des curriculums, faites très attention. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours. 3 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche du cours à supprimer. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur Supprimer sur la page de confirmation. Création de curriculums de formation A propos des curriculums Un curriculum peut inclure des cours, des présentations et des réunions. Vous pouvez définir des conditions requises pour un curriculum et concevoir votre programme de manière à ce que les utilisateurs puissent évaluer leurs connaissances sur certains éléments du curriculum. Au fur et à mesure que les utilisateurs achèvent les éléments du curriculum, vous pouvez effectuer le suivi de leur progression et générer des rapports afin de vous assurer que le curriculum satisfait aux exigences des objectifs pédagogiques. Les principales fonctionnalités des curriculums vous permettent d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Organiser des éléments, tels que les cours et les présentations, en groupes logiques prenant en charge un chemin d'apprentissage. • Définir des conditions préalables et des « examens » pour les éléments, évitant ainsi aux inscrits de suivre certains éléments de curriculum s'ils ont réussi l'examen de l'élément correspondant. • Spécifier des éléments/conditions d'accomplissement comme étant obligatoires pour achever le curriculum avec succès. • Envoyer aux utilisateurs des notifications et des rappels électroniques concernant le curriculum.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 89 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training • Générer des rapports incluant les statistiques du curriculum. • Afficher une représentation visuelle des données du rapport à l'aide du tableau de bord des formations. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 Création d'un curriculum Un Assistant vous guide lors des principales étapes de création d'un curriculum, telles que la saisie des informations et la sélection des cours. Après avoir créé un curriculum, vous pouvez effectuer des tâches supplémentaires comme, par exemple, ajouter des inscrits et envoyer des rappels. La procédure de création d'un curriculum implique les tâches suivantes. 1. Recherche de l'emplacement d'un curriculum Vous pouvez créer ou rechercher un dossier dans la bibliothèque des formations qui contiendra le curriculum (vous devez disposer de l'autorisation requise pour accéder au dossier). Lorsque vous déterminez un emplacement, vous cliquez sur Nouveau curriculum pour ouvrir l'Assistant Nouveau curriculum qui permet de créer votre curriculum à l'emplacement sélectionné. Navigation dans la bibliothèque des formations A. Déterminez un emplacement. B. Créez un autre dossier ou ajoutez un nouveau curriculum. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez enregistrer votre curriculum dans votre dossier Formation de l'utilisateur, vous pouvez ignorer cette procédure. Pour ce faire, il vous suffit de cliquer sur le lien Nouveau curriculum dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central et de suivre les étapes pour saisir les informations sur le curriculum. 2. Saisie des informations sur le curriculum La première page de l'Assistant Nouveau curriculum vous permet d'entrer les détails, telles que les informations récapitulatives et descriptives, ainsi que les dates de début et de fin, sur le curriculum. (Vous devez saisir le nom du curriculum, mais tous les autres champs sont facultatifs). Les informations saisies dans l'Assistant s'affichent ultérieurement sur la page Informations sur le curriculum, ainsi que sur la page à laquelle les inscrits accèdent depuis leur lien Ma formation. La zone de texte URL personnalisée affiche la première partie de l'URL sur laquelle les utilisateurs cliquent pour accéder au curriculum. Vous pouvez soit laisser la zone de texte vide pour qu'Acrobat Connect Pro génère une URL système, soit entrer une URL personnalisée. Vous pouvez, par exemple, saisir un mot qui décrit le curriculum. Remarque : Les dates de début et de fin sélectionnées remplacent celles des éléments individuels de votre curriculum. Par exemple, si vous ajoutez une réunion dont la date de fin est déjà écoulée, et que la date de fin de votre curriculum est à venir, la réunion tient compte de la date de fin du curriculum. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 90 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Utilisez la page d'informations sur le curriculum pour ajouter un nom et des détails sur un curriculum. 3. Ajout d'éléments au curriculum Après avoir saisi les informations sur le curriculum dans l'Assistant Nouveau curriculum et cliqué sur Suivant, une page vous permettant d'ajouter des éléments au curriculum apparaît. Ajouter un élément à un curriculum permet d'ajouter un lien vers l'élément, et non de le copier dans un nouvel emplacement dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous pouvez ajouter à un curriculum du contenu provenant de la bibliothèque de contenu, d'une réunion de la bibliothèque de réunions, d'une classe virtuelle ou de tout cours existant. Le contenu ajouté à un curriculum est désormais automatiquement converti en cours, vous pouvez ainsi en assurer efficacement le suivi. Le nouveau cours est ajouté au dossier de ressources du curriculum créé automatiquement. (Ce dossier se trouve au même emplacement que le curriculum et possède le même nom que le curriculum, le terme « Ressources » étant ajouté à la fin.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 91 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Après avoir créé un nouveau curriculum, ajoutez-lui des cours pour le composer. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez grouper les éléments dans des dossiers, ne les ajoutez pas à l'aide de l'Assistant Nouveau curriculum. Quittez plutôt l'Assistant, ouvrez la page d'informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur Ajouter un élément, cliquez sur Nouveau dossier, tapez un nom de dossier, cliquez sur Enregistrer, sélectionnez le nouveau dossier (vous pouvez aussi sélectionner le dossier racine ou un autre dossier), cliquez sur Ajouter un élément, puis ajoutez des éléments à ce dossier. Les nouveaux éléments sont toujours créés au niveau racine et vous pouvez les réorganiser en cliquant sur le bouton Déplacer. Les dossiers ne peuvent pas être imbriqués dans d'autres. 4. Modification de l'ordre ou suppression des éléments, si nécessaire Après avoir ajouté du contenu et des cours, vous pouvez modifier l'ordre des éléments afin de modifier le cursus de formation. Vous avez également la possibilité de supprimer des éléments. Remarque : Bien que vous puissiez déplacer des éléments dans un dossier, vous ne pouvez pas les insérer dans des dossiers ou les en extraire. 5. Sélection d'options supplémentaires La dernière étape de la procédure de création d'un curriculum consiste à sélectionner toute option dont vous avez besoin dans la page Options supplémentaires, comme par exemple ajouter des inscrits, définir des conditions préalables et envoyer une notification. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Modification des conditions préalables, des examens et des conditions de terminaison » à la page 98 « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Affichage des informations et de l'état du curriculum Après la création d'un curriculum, les détails qui le concernent peuvent être affichés et modifiés sur la page Informations sur le curriculum.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 92 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Voir aussi « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 « A propos des notifications et des rappels » à la page 83 Affichage des informations sur le curriculum 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant le curriculum. 3 Dans la liste des cours, sélectionnez le nom du curriculum. Affichage des informations d'état sur le curriculum L'affichage de l'état du curriculum permet d'afficher un rapport de synthèse différemment. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez afficher, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la zone Etat du curriculum, cliquez sur le bouton Voir. L'onglet Rapports s'ouvre sur une page Résumé. Outre les informations qui apparaissent également dans la zone Informations sur le curriculum de la page correspondante, la page Résumé inclut les informations suivantes : Utilisateurs inscrits Nombre d'utilisateurs inscrits dans le curriculum. Utilisateurs ayant terminé Nombre d'utilisateurs qui ont accédé au curriculum et ont réussi tous les éléments obligatoires. Cela comprend également tous les utilisateurs qui ont été inscrits à ce curriculum, qu'ils soient actuellement inscrits ou non. Utilisateurs en cours Nombre d'utilisateurs qui ont accédé au curriculum, mais qui n'ont pas encore terminé tous les éléments obligatoires. Cela comprend également tous les utilisateurs qui ont été inscrits à ce curriculum, qu'ils soient actuellement inscrits ou non. Remarque : Deux types d'utilisateurs ne sont pas inclus dans les chiffres relatifs à l'état du curriculum : les utilisateurs inscrits au curriculum mais qui n'y ont pas encore accédé et ceux qui y ont été inscrits dans le passé mais qui ont ensuite été supprimés d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Ajout et suppression d'éléments dans un curriculum Vous pouvez ajouter et retirer du contenu et des cours d'un curriculum après la création de ce dernier. Vous pouvez, par exemple, ajouter à un curriculum un cours quelconque dans votre bibliothèque des formations. Voici quelques astuces : • Minimisez au maximum l'ajout et la suppression de cours et de contenu après la mise à disposition d'un curriculum aux stagiaires. • Communiquez avec les stagiaires inscrits au curriculum. Signalez-leur l'ajout ou la suppression de contenu ou de cours et invitez-les à se connecter au curriculum pour mettre leur état à jour. • Il faut distinguer entre inclure un cours existant à un curriculum et créer un nouveau cours pour un curriculum. Lorsque vous ajoutez un cours à un curriculum et que ce cours existe déjà, il n'est pas ajouté au dossier Ressources de ce curriculum. Seuls les éléments créés automatiquement pour la première fois en tant que cours sont ajoutés au dossier Ressources du curriculum. Vous pouvez cependant déplacer ou copier des éléments dans le dossier Ressources.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 93 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training • L'ajout d'un cours à un curriculum permet simplement d'ajouter un lien vers ce cours dans la bibliothèque de contenu. Le cours est ainsi mis au crédit des stagiaires, même s'ils ne l'ont pas suivi dans le cadre du curriculum. Pour que le cours soit mis à son crédit, le stagiaire doit s'être connecté au curriculum au moins une fois. (Nous conseillons aux stagiaires suivant les curriculums de toujours se connecter aux éléments depuis le curriculum.) • Si vous supprimez un élément obligatoire d'un curriculum, l'état des stagiaires qui ont déjà terminé tous les autres éléments obligatoires devient Achevé. • Après la modification d'un curriculum (lorsque des éléments obligatoires ont été ajoutés ou supprimés, par exemple), invitez les stagiaires à se reconnecter au curriculum pour que leur état et leurs notes soient mis à jour. • Il arrive parfois qu'un stagiaire puisse suivre un cours et que ce cours soit ensuite ajouté à un curriculum auquel il est inscrit. Pour que ce cours soit mis à son crédit, invitez-le à se connecter au curriculum. Son état dans le curriculum est alors automatiquement mis à jour. Voir aussi « A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours » à la page 84 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Ajout de dossiers et d'éléments à un curriculum Après la création d'un curriculum, vous pouvez à tout moment y ajouter des dossiers ou des éléments. Remarque : L'ajout ou la suppression d'éléments d'un curriculum peut affecter les relevés de notes des stagiaires. Dans la mesure du possible, ne modifiez pas les curriculums après y avoir inscrit des stagiaires. En cas d'ajout ou de suppression d'éléments, informez les stagiaires des modifications apportées au curriculum et invitez-les à se connecter au curriculum pour mettre leur état à jour. Voir aussi « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 « A propos de la modification du contenu d'un cours » à la page 84 « Modification du champ d'état de l'utilisateur dans un rapport de curriculum » à la page 111 Ajout d'un dossier à un curriculum Après la création d'un curriculum, vous pouvez grouper les éléments dans les dossiers pour les organiser. Vous pouvez, par exemple, grouper un ensemble d'éléments dans un dossier Sujets pour débutants et un autre ensemble dans un dossier Sujets intermédiaires. Les nouveaux dossiers s'ajoutent toujours au niveau racine. Les dossiers ne peuvent pas être imbriqués dans d'autres. Remarque : Il est préférable d'ajouter des éléments dans un dossier de curriculum plutôt que de déplacer des éléments déjà contenus dans votre curriculum vers un dossier. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un élément. 3 Cliquez sur Nouveau dossier. 4 Dans la page Nouveau dossier, entrez le nom du dossier dans la zone de texte Nom du dossier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 94 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 5 Dans la liste des curriculums, vous pouvez sélectionner le dossier que vous avez créé et y ajouter des éléments. Ajout de contenu à un curriculum Après avoir créé un curriculum, vous pouvez ajouter du contenu, si nécessaire. Le contenu ajouté à un curriculum est désormais automatiquement converti en cours, vous pouvez ainsi en assurer efficacement le suivi. Le nouveau cours est ajouté au dossier de ressources du curriculum créé automatiquement. Tout contenu supplémentaire ajouté au curriculum est également automatiquement converti et placé dans le dossier de ressources. Ce dossier se trouve au même emplacement que le curriculum et possède le même nom que lui, le terme « Ressources » étant ajouté à la fin. (Si vous ajoutez des cours déjà créés à un curriculum, ces derniers ne sont pas placés dans le dossier des ressources.) 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un élément. 3 Cliquez sur Ajouter du contenu. 4 Si nécessaire, accédez au dossier contenant le contenu. 5 Cochez la case du contenu que vous souhaitez ajouter au curriculum, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Cliquez à nouveau sur Ajouter. Ajout d'un cours, d'une classe virtuelle ou d'une réunion à un curriculum Les cours disponibles dans votre bibliothèque des formations sont accessibles de manière à ce que vous puissiez les inclure dans un curriculum. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un élément. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Ajouter un cours. Remarque : Les invitations, les inscriptions et les rappels créés pour un cours ne sont pas transférés lorsque vous ajoutez un cours à un curriculum. Les options de notification d'un curriculum s'appliquent à tous les cours contenus dans le curriculum ; vous ne pouvez pas définir de paramètres de notification individuels pour les cours d'un curriculum. (Cependant, si un cours ne fait pas partie d'un curriculum, les paramètres relatifs à l'invitation, à l'inscription et au rappel du cours sont tous valides pour le cours.) • Cliquez sur Ajouter une classe virtuelle. • Cliquez sur Ajouter une réunion. Remarque : Pour envoyer un événement de calendrier Outlook, qui permet aux utilisateurs d'ajouter la réunion dans leurs calendriers Outlook, sélectionnez l'option iCal lorsque vous envoyez des rappels de réunion, et non lorsque vous ajoutez la réunion à votre curriculum. 4 Si nécessaire, accédez au dossier contenant le cours, la salle de cours ou la réunion. 5 Cochez la case du cours, de la salle de cours ou de la réunion que vous souhaitez ajouter au curriculum, puis cliquez sur Ajouter.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 95 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Ajout de contenu externe à un curriculum Un curriculum n'est pas exclusivement composé d'éléments Acrobat Connect Pro. Vous pouvez y inclure une formation externe. Par exemple, vous pouvez y ajouter une conférence à laquelle les inscrits doivent participer. Une conférence étant un événement en direct, vous pouvez créer un événement externe pour la représenter. Grâce à la fonction de remplacement de l'état, vous pouvez ensuite ajouter des inscrits et leur attribuer l'état Complet. Remarque : Lorsque l'état de l'utilisateur change pour une formation externe, mettez à jour l'état d'achèvement de l'utilisateur manuellement. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un élément. 3 Cliquez sur Nouvelle formation externe. 4 Dans la zone Titre, entrez le nom de la formation externe. 5 (Facultatif) Dans la zone ID, entrez l'identifiant (texte ou nombre). 6 Si l'élément de formation externe consiste à afficher un site Web, entrez une adresse URL complète, y compris http, dans la zone URL. Par exemple, http://www.adobe.com. 7 Dans la zone Note maximale possible, tapez le nombre maximum de points à obtenir pour achever la formation externe. Remarque : Si vous envisagez d'utiliser du contenu externe sous la forme d'un cours dans un curriculum, il peut s'avérer nécessaire de définir la note maximale. Définissez une note maximale à cet emplacement lorsque le contenu n'est pas noté·ou lorsqu'il envoie une note partielle. Par exemple, le contenu Captivate envoie uniquement la note obtenue, 8 par exemple, et non la note obtenue et la note maximale possible, comme par exemple 8/10. Lorsque le contenu utilisé pour créer un cours contient une note complète, telle que 8/10, la note maximale qu'il est possible d'obtenir définie dans le contenu s'applique et toute note définie est ignorée. 8 (Facultatif) Dans la zone de texte Résumé, entrez une description de la formation externe. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, la formation externe s'affiche dans votre liste d'éléments. Modification de curriculums Vous pouvez modifier les informations d'un curriculum, notamment changer l'ordre des éléments ou supprimer des éléments. Vous pouvez également supprimer la totalité d'un curriculum Remarque : L'ajout ou la suppression d'éléments d'un curriculum peut affecter les relevés de notes des stagiaires. Dans la mesure du possible, ne modifiez pas les curriculums après y avoir inscrit des stagiaires. En cas d'ajout ou de suppression d'éléments, informez les stagiaires des modifications apportées au curriculum et invitez-les à se connecter au curriculum pour mettre leur état à jour. Voir aussi « Ajout et suppression d'éléments dans un curriculum » à la page 92 « Conseils pour la création de curriculums et de cours de formation » à la page 80 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 96 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Modification des informations d'un curriculum 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la zone Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur Modifier pour changer les informations suivantes : Nom Nom attribué au curriculum. Identifiant Numéro d'identification du curriculum. (Vous pouvez lui attribuer un code quelconque, tel qu'un numéro de catalogue.) Résumé Description du curriculum. Date de début du curriculum Date à laquelle le curriculum commence. Les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas accéder au curriculum avant cette date Remarque : Les dates de début et de fin sélectionnées remplacent celles des éléments individuels de votre curriculum. Par exemple, si vous ajoutez une réunion dont la date de fin est déjà écoulée, et que la date de fin de votre curriculum est à venir, la réunion tient compte de la date de fin du curriculum. Date de clôture du curriculum Date à laquelle le curriculum se termine ; sélectionnez cette option dans le menu contextuel ou sélectionnez Pas de date de clôture. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé de modifier les informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification des informations sur le contenu externe Pour modifier des informations sur une formation externe, il faut que vous les ayez déjà ajoutées au curriculum. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la liste des éléments, cliquez sur le nom de l'élément de formation externe. 3 Dans la zone Informations sur la formation externe, cliquez sur Modifier. 4 Dans la zone Informations sur l'élément, modifiez le nom, l'ID, l'URL, la note maximale possible ou les informations récapitulatives, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification de l'ordre des éléments dans un curriculum 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cochez la case située en regard de l'élément que vous souhaitez déplacer, puis cliquez sur la flèche vers le haut ou vers le bas pour le déplacer dans la liste. Suppression d'éléments dans un curriculum Si vous ne souhaitez plus inclure un élément dans un curriculum, vous pouvez le supprimer sans affecter l'élément d'origine existant dans la bibliothèque correspondante. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 97 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 2 Dans la liste des éléments, cochez la case située en regard des éléments que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer l'élément. 3 Assurez-vous de bien vouloir supprimer les éléments sélectionnés, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Envoi de notifications ou de rappels aux personnes inscrites à un curriculum Vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité de notifications pour envoyer un message électronique aux inscrits. Un message type indique aux inscrits que le curriculum est disponible, fournit des informations détaillées sur le curriculum, ainsi qu'un lien pour y accéder. Le message peut être envoyé à tous les inscrits ou à un sous-ensemble spécifique d'inscrits, par exemple à ceux qui n'ont pas terminé le curriculum. La fonctionnalité de rappel, semblable à la fonctionnalité de notification, vous permet d'envoyer des messages électroniques aux inscrits. Cependant, la différence principale entre les notifications et les rappels réside dans le fait que la page Rappels vous permet d'envoyer des messages à des intervalles spécifiés. Le message peut être envoyé à tous les inscrits ou à un sous-ensemble d'inscrits. Remarque : Des rappels peuvent être définis annuellement pour les utilisateurs qui doivent respecter des normes de conformité. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur Notifications. 3 Cliquez sur Nouvelle notification ou Nouveau rappel. (Les notifications apparaissent dans la liste des objets avec l'icône de notification , tandis que les rappels sont indiqués à l'aide de l'icône .) 4 Sélectionnez une option de minutage. Dans le cas des rappels, vous pouvez définir une option de récurrence, de manière à envoyer automatiquement plusieurs rappels. 5 Sélectionnez une option de destinataires. Si vous entrez plusieurs adresses électroniques, séparez-les par des virgules. 6 (Facultatif) Modifiez l'objet et le texte du message électronique. Pour effectuer des modifications à l'aide de champs à insertion automatique, copiez le nom du champ à partir de la liste Champs à insertion automatique et collez-le dans l'objet ou le corps du message. Ne modifiez pas le texte du champ à insertion automatique placé entre accolades. 7 Cliquez sur Envoyer ou sur Enregistrer. Annulation de notifications ou de rappels 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur Notifications. 3 Cliquez sur Notifications en attente. 4 Sous Sujet, cochez la case en regard du nom de la notification ou du rappel que vous souhaitez annuler. (Les notifications apparaissent dans la liste des objets avec l'icône de notification , tandis que les rappels sont indiqués à l'aide de l'icône .) 5 Cliquez sur Annuler les notifications. 6 Cliquez sur Annuler les notifications sur la page de confirmation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 98 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Suppression d'un curriculum Avant de supprimer un curriculum, sachez que : • Le curriculum est retiré de la bibliothèque des formations. • Les inscrits n'y ont plus accès. • Ses rapports ne sont plus disponibles. (Pour interdire l'accès à un curriculum tout en conservant les informations de génération de rapports, définissez une date de clôture pour le curriculum, mais ne le supprimez pas.) • Les rappels de curriculum ne sont plus envoyés, ni les notifications de retard. • La suppression d'un curriculum est définitive. Un curriculum supprimé ne peut être récupéré. Vous pouvez supprimer un curriculum de la bibliothèque des formations sans affecter les éléments de la bibliothèque qui composent ce curriculum. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. 2 Cochez la case accolée au curriculum que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 3 Après avoir vérifié la sélection des éléments à supprimer, cliquez sur Supprimer. Modification des conditions préalables, des examens et des conditions de terminaison Après avoir créé un curriculum, vous pouvez lui apporter de nombreuses modifications ; par exemple, ajouter des conditions préalables et des examens, modifier des conditions d'accomplissement, etc. Adobe recommande d'utiliser soit des examens, soit des conditions préalables, mais pas les deux, pour créer des cursus de formation. Il est possible d'utiliser les deux, mais cela risque de prendre du temps et de compliquer les tests à réaliser sur toutes les éventuelles procédures que peuvent rencontrer les stagiaires. Voir aussi « Modification de curriculums » à la page 95 Affectation de conditions préalables à un élément Affecter des conditions préalables impose aux stagiaires d'accéder aux éléments dans un ordre spécifique. Un dossier ne peut pas être défini en tant que condition préalable. Acrobat Connect Pro ne pouvant pas assurer automatiquement le suivi des éléments de formation externes, ceux-ci ne doivent pas être définis comme étant obligatoires. Remarque : Evitez les conditions préalables redondantes ; elles constituent une source de confusion pour les stagiaires et peuvent entraîner des problèmes de performances sur le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la liste des éléments du curriculum, cliquez sur le nom de l'élément ou du dossier nécessitant une condition préalable. Cette procédure fait référence à cet élément en tant qu'élément sélectionné. 3 Dans la zone Conditions préalables, cliquez sur Modifier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 99 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Dans la zone Conditions préalables relatives aux informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur Modifier pour créer un cursus de formation spécifique. 4 La zone Sélectionner les conditions préalables répertorie les éléments contenus dans le curriculum. A l'aide du menu Options situé à côté d'un élément, spécifiez le type de condition préalable : Suggestion Indique que la condition préalable est facultative. Les utilisateurs reçoivent un message leur demandant de choisir la condition préalable avant l'élément sélectionné. Obligatoire Indique que les exigences relatives à la condition préalable doivent être remplies avec succès, et pas simplement remplies, avant de choisir l'élément sélectionné. N'affectez pas l'état Obligatoire à un contenu externe. Acrobat Connect Pro ne peut pas vérifier si ce type de contenu, par exemple l'URL d'un site Web, a bien été exécuté. Masqué Indique que l'élément sélectionné ne s'affiche pas sur la page d'inscription tant que l'utilisateur n'a pas satisfait aux exigences de la condition préalable. 5 Une fois la sélection des conditions préalables terminée, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Affectation d'examens à un élément Vous pouvez concevoir le curriculum de sorte que les inscrits ne soient pas obligés de suivre un élément s'ils réussissent un examen apparenté. Les dossiers ne peuvent pas être configurés comme des examens, ni liés comme des éléments sélectionnés. Utilisez toujours un cours ou une réunion spécifique, et non un dossier, comme un examen ou élément sélectionné pour tout autre objet d'apprentissage. Voici deux conseils de création d'examens : • Choisissez bien entre les options Facultatif, Bloqué et Masqué. Il peut y avoir une grande différence de cheminement et d'expérience pédagogiques pour les stagiaires selon l'option que vous sélectionnez pour un examen. • Vous ne pouvez pas affecter un examen au premier élément d'un curriculum.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 100 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training • N'utilisez pas d'examens enchaînés. Un exemple d'examens enchaînés consiste à définir un élément 1 en tant qu'examen d'un élément 2, puis à définir l'élément 2 en tant qu'examen d'un élément 3. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la liste des éléments, cliquez sur le nom de l'élément nécessitant un élément d'examen. Cette procédure fait référence à cet élément en tant qu'élément sélectionné. 3 Dans la zone Examens, cliquez sur Modifier. 4 La zone Sélectionner les examens répertorie les éléments contenus dans le curriculum. Utilisez le menu déroulant d'un élément pour le désigner en tant qu'examen de l'élément sélectionné, à l'aide des critères suivants : Bloqué Indique que si l'inscrit réussit l'examen apparenté, l'élément sélectionné n'est pas disponible pour lui. Si l'inscrit échoue à l'examen apparenté, l'élément sélectionné devient disponible. Facultatif Indique que si l'inscrit réussit l'examen apparenté, l'élément sélectionné peut être retiré du curriculum. Masqué Indique que si l'inscrit réussit l'examen apparenté, il ne peut pas voir l'élément sélectionné. Si l'inscrit échoue à l'examen apparenté, ce dernier est visible et peut être sélectionné par l'inscrit. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé de spécifier des examens apparentés, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification des conditions de terminaison Vous pouvez désigner un élément comme étant obligatoire, spécifiant ainsi qu'un inscrit doit terminer l'élément avec succès pour achever le curriculum. Tous les éléments sont obligatoires par défaut, mais vous pouvez en définir certains comme facultatifs ou obligatoires sans que cela n'affecte les autres. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas sur la page d'informations du curriculum que vous souhaitez modifier, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation et accédez au curriculum. Sélectionnez le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Dans la zone Accomplissement requis, cliquez sur Modifier. 3 Pour chaque élément que vous voulez rendre obligatoire, sélectionnez Obligatoire dans le menu contextuel. 4 Dès que vous avez terminé de spécifier des éléments obligatoires, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Gestion des inscrits au curriculum Acrobat Connect Pro Central vous permet d'afficher et d'ajouter des inscrits dans un curriculum, mais aussi de définir les autorisations d'accès pour ces derniers. Voir aussi « A propos des notifications et des rappels » à la page 83 « Modification de curriculums » à la page 95 Affichage et ajout d'inscrits à un curriculum 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur Gestion des inscrits.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 101 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 3 Pour ajouter des inscrits, sélectionnez le nom ou le groupe dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles. • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur leur entrée en appuyant sur la touche Ctrl ou Maj. • Pour développer un groupe afin de pouvoir sélectionner des membres individuels, double-cliquez sur son nom. Sélectionnez ensuite chaque utilisateur. • Pour localiser un nom dans la liste, cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre, entrez le nom pour l'afficher dans la liste, puis sélectionnez-le. (Cliquez sur Effacer pour revenir à la liste d'origine.) 4 Après avoir sélectionné les inscrits, cliquez sur Ajouter. Remarque : Après avoir ajouté des inscrits, vous devez leur envoyer une notification afin de les avertir de la disponibilité du curriculum. Définition des autorisations des inscrits à un curriculum Après avoir ajouté des inscrits à un curriculum, vous pouvez déterminer les autorisations pour les utilisateurs et groupes inscrits. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur Gestion des inscrits. 3 Sélectionnez l'inscrit ou le groupe d'inscrits dans la colonne Inscrits actuels, puis cliquez sur Autorisations. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des autorisations suivantes : • « Refusé » empêche l'inscrit d'accéder au curriculum. • « Inscrit » permet à l'inscrit d'accéder au curriculum. • « En attente d'autorisation » permet à l'inscrit d'accéder au curriculum après avoir été approuvé. Suppression d'inscrits à un curriculum Vous pouvez, à tout moment, supprimer un inscrit à un curriculum ou un groupe d'inscrits. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur Gestion des inscrits. 3 Sélectionnez l'inscrit ou le groupe inscrit dans la colonne Inscrits actuels, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Création de classes virtuelles A propos des classes virtuelles Lorsque les fonctions Réunion et Formation sont installées, les utilisateurs peuvent créer des classes virtuelles. Pour ce faire, ils doivent être gestionnaires de formation et hôtes de réunion. Les classes virtuelles permettent de réaliser des sessions de formation. A l'instar d'une réunion, des classes virtuelles peuvent être ajoutées à un curriculum. Mais contrairement aux réunions, il est possible d'ajouter aux classes virtuelles un cours Presenter qui aura un impact sur les conditions d'accomplissement. (Les relevés de note des cours ne sont pas générés pour les étudiants accédant à une classe virtuelle en tant qu'invités.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 102 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Remarque : Les conditions d'accomplissement ne peuvent plus être configurées par l'utilisateur ; l'accomplissement est désormais basé sur la participation. Un stagiaire est marqué comme ayant terminé s'il a participé à tous les cours et se voit affecter l'état inachevé s'il s'est absenté. Comme pour les réunions, il existe trois niveaux d'accès aux classes virtuelles : les étudiants inscrits uniquement, les étudiants inscrits et les invités acceptés, ainsi que toute personne disposant de l'URL de la classe virtuelle peuvent entrer dans la salle. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les classes virtuelles et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « A propos du contenu, des cours et des curriculums » à la page 74 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 Création d'une classe virtuelle La procédure de création d'une classe virtuelle implique les tâches suivantes. 1. Démarrage de l'Assistant Classe virtuelle Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, localisez la barre de menus Créer nouveau, puis cliquez sur Classe virtuelle. 2. Informations sur les classes virtuelles La première page de l'Assistant Classe virtuelle permet de saisir des informations générales sur la classe virtuelle, par exemple un nom et un résumé. (Seuls le nom de la classe virtuelle et la langue sont obligatoires ; tous les autres champs sont facultatifs.) Une fois la classe virtuelle créée, ces informations peuvent être modifiées. Remarque : Par défaut, l'option Actualiser les informations de tous les éléments liés à cet élément est sélectionnée. La classe virtuelle étant actuellement en cours de création, aucun élément ne doit encore lui être lié, mais ne désactivez pas cet élément si vous pensez lui en associer ultérieurement. 3. Inscription de stagiaires Seuls les utilisateurs inscrits peuvent accéder à l'adresse URL de la classe virtuelle et se connecter pour l'afficher. Pour inscrire un très grand nombre d'utilisateurs, il vous suffit de présenter la classe virtuelle en tant qu'événement si vous disposez de l'application Gestion des événements. Une fois la classe virtuelle créée, vous pouvez, au besoin, ajouter ou supprimer des stagiaires. 4. Configuration de notifications Une notification de classe virtuelle est un message électronique qui explique aux inscrits comment accéder à la classe virtuelle. Lorsque vous effectuez la mise en forme de votre notification, vous pouvez utiliser les champs à insertion automatique dans la ligne d'objet et dans le corps du message. Ces champs sont des variables d'informations renseignées automatiquement lors de l'envoi de la notification par courrier électronique. Une fois la classe virtuelle créée, vous pouvez modifier les notifications la concernant. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 103 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 5. Configuration des rappels Les rappels sont facultatifs. Un rappel de classe virtuelle est un message électronique envoyé à tous les inscrits à la classe virtuelle, ou à une partie d'entre eux, une fois la classe virtuelle configurée. Vous pouvez utiliser des rappels, par exemple pour rappeler aux inscrits qu'ils doivent accéder à la classe virtuelle ou pour signaler à des utilisateurs spécifiques qu'ils sont tenus d'y accéder. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 Affichage d'informations sur les classes virtuelles Vous pouvez afficher des informations sur une classe virtuelle à partir de la page Informations sur les classes virtuelles. Cette page s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur le nom de la classe virtuelle dans la liste des dossiers de formation. Elle vous permet d'afficher ou de modifier les informations relatives à une classe virtuelle spécifique, telles que son nom, son résumé, son adresse URL, ses coordonnées d'accès et ses informations téléphoniques. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant la classe virtuelle. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de la classe virtuelle. Modèles de classes virtuelles Si les fonctions Réunion et Formation sont installées, un dossier de modèles de classe virtuelle est automatiquement installé sous le dossier Formations partagées. Pour plus d'informations sur les modèles, voir « Création et utilisation de modèles de salles de réunion » à la page 12. Application d'un modèle à une nouvelle classe virtuelle ? Lorsque vous créez une classe virtuelle, choisissez un modèle dans le menu Sélectionner un modèle de la page Informations sur les classes virtuelles. Le modèle de classe virtuelle par défaut est sélectionné par défaut. Conversion d'une classe virtuelle en modèle En tant que gestionnaire de formation ou hôte de réunion, vous pouvez créer un modèle de classe virtuelle. Déplacez la classe virtuelle dans l'un des deux dossiers de modèles : Modèles partagés (dans le dossier Formations partagées) si vous souhaitez que d'autres utilisateurs puissent accéder au modèle ou Mes modèles (dans votre propre dossier de formations) si vous en êtes le seul utilisateur. Remarque : Pour ajouter une classe virtuelle au dossier Modèles partagés, vous devez disposer des autorisations de gestionnaire sur ce dossier. Par défaut, vous disposez des autorisations complètes sur les classes virtuelles et les modèles situés dans votre dossier de formation utilisateur. 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez le dossier contenant la classe virtuelle à convertir. 2 Dans la liste Nom, cochez la case en regard de la classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Déplacer dans la barre de navigation. Celle de gauche indique le nom de la classe virtuelle.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 104 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 4 Localisez, puis sélectionnez un dossier. (Sélectionnez Formations partagées > Modèles partagés si vous souhaitez partager le modèle avec d'autres personnes.) 5 Cliquez sur Déplacer. La classe virtuelle se trouve désormais dans le dossier de modèles sélectionné. Le modèle est ajouté à la liste dans le dossier approprié : Modèles partagés ou Mes modèles. Lorsque vous créez une classe virtuelle à l'aide de l'Assistant Nouvelle classe virtuelle, vous pouvez sélectionner le nouveau modèle dans le menu contextuel Sélectionner un modèle. Vous pouvez personnaliser cette classe virtuelle de la même manière que les autres en fonction de vos besoins. Une fois la classe virtuelle créée, il est impossible d'y appliquer un nouveau modèle. Pour cela, vous devez d'abord créer une classe virtuelle à l'aide du nouveau modèle. Modification de classes virtuelles Un large éventail de tâches vous permet de gérer les classes virtuelles que vous avez créées. Voir aussi « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 « Affichage de rapports sur la classe virtuelle » à la page 106 « Association d'un profil audio à une réunion » à la page 10 Modification des informations de classe virtuelle et de téléphonie 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur Modifier les infos. 4 Modifiez les informations de classe virtuelle et les paramètres de conférence audio selon vos besoins. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification des cours d'une classe virtuelle 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Gérer les cours. 4 Ajoutez ou supprimez des cours suivant les besoins. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification des participants à une classe virtuelle 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Gestion des inscrits. 4 Ajoutez et supprimez des inscrits ou des groupes d'inscrits suivant les besoins.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 105 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Modification des notifications et rappels de classe virtuelle Vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité de notification pour envoyer un message électronique contenant des détails à l'intention des personnes inscrites à la classe virtuelle, y compris un lien vers la classe virtuelle. Le message peut être envoyé à tous les inscrits ou à un sous-ensemble d'inscrits. Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central, la fonctionnalité de rappel, semblable à celle de notification, vous permet d'envoyer des messages électroniques aux inscrits. Cependant, la différence principale entre les notifications et les rappels réside dans le fait que la page Rappels vous permet d'envoyer des messages à des intervalles spécifiés. Le message peut être envoyé à tous les inscrits ou à un sous-ensemble d'inscrits. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les classes virtuelles et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Notifications. 4 Cliquez sur une notification ou un rappel dans la liste. (Les notifications apparaissent dans la liste des objets avec l'icône de notification , tandis que les rappels sont indiqués à l'aide de l'icône .) 5 Cliquez sur Modifier. 6 Modifiez la notification ou le rappel suivant les besoins. Par exemple : • Modifiez l'option de minutage. (Dans le cas des rappels, vous pouvez définir une option de récurrence, de manière à envoyer automatiquement plusieurs rappels.) • Modifiez les destinataires. Si vous entrez plusieurs adresses électroniques, séparez-les par des virgules. • Modifiez l'objet et le texte du message électronique. Pour effectuer des modifications à l'aide de champs à insertion automatique, copiez le nom du champ à partir de la liste Champs à insertion automatique et collez-le dans l'objet ou le corps du message. Ne modifiez pas le texte du champ à insertion automatique placé entre accolades. 7 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Modification du contenu d'une classe virtuelle 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Contenu transféré. 4 Ajoutez, supprimez et déplacez du contenu suivant les besoins. Affichage et modification des enregistrements d'une classe virtuelle Pour déterminer les personnes habilitées à visualiser un enregistrement de classe virtuelle, définissez ce dernier comme étant public ou privé. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Lecture d'une réunion enregistrée » à la page 63. 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur une classe virtuelle. 3 Cliquez sur Enregistrements. 4 Affichez et modifiez les informations suivant les besoins.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 106 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Affichage de rapports sur la classe virtuelle La fonctionnalité Rapports d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central vous permet de créer des rapports présentant une classe virtuelle donnée sous différentes perspectives. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page des informations sur la classe virtuelle, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez à la salle de cours. Cliquez sur le nom de la salle de cours pour ouvrir la page des informations sur la classe virtuelle. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Le rapport de synthèse par défaut vous présente des informations sur la classe virtuelle et des informations consolidées sur l'utilisateur, telles que les instances uniques au cours desquelles un utilisateur donné a rejoint, puis quitté la salle de cours (sessions uniques), la date de la dernière entrée d'un invité dans la salle de cours (session la plus récente), le nombre de personnes invitées, le nombre de participants, le nombre maximum de personnes présentes simultanément dans la salle de cours (nombre maximal d'utilisateurs). 4 Pour obtenir d'autres informations, sélectionnez un autre type de rapport : • Le rapport « Par participants » affiche la liste des noms et adresses électroniques de tous les participants à la classe virtuelle, avec leurs dates et heures d'entrée et de sortie. • Le rapport « Par cours » affiche la liste de tous les cours intégrés dans la classe virtuelle. Cliquez sur les différents cours intégrés pour afficher la liste des stagiaires qui les ont suivis. Si des cours ont fait l'objet de mises à jour et que les stagiaires en ont consulté plusieurs versions, les rapports affichent la version consultée par chacun d'eux. • Le rapport « Par sessions » affiche la liste des heures de début et de fin de chaque session, le numéro de session et le nombre de participants. Un clic sur le nombre de sessions affiche la liste des participants à·cette session, ainsi que leur nom et les heures d'entrée et de sortie. • Le rapport « Par Questions » présente chaque sondage par numéro de session, numéro et question. Vous pouvez faire un zoom avant sur deux vues distinctes en cliquant sur le lien approprié sous la colonne Rapport : « Voir la distribution des réponses » affiche un graphique circulaire dans lequel chaque réponse est codée par une couleur. « Voir les réponses des utilisateurs » fournit une clé de réponse énumérant chaque réponse de ce sondage et son numéro correspondant. Ces numéros se retrouvent sur le graphique circulaire. Cette option présente la liste de tous les participants ayant répondu à ce sondage et le numéro de la réponse qu'ils ont sélectionnée (si la question autorisait plusieurs réponses, elles apparaissent toutes pour l'utilisateur). Voir aussi « Affichage et gestion de rapports sur les curriculums » à la page 109 Définition des options d'auto-inscription Les options d'auto-inscription sont définies au moyen du catalogue des formations. Si vous souhaitez utiliser la fonction d'auto-inscription, vous devez ajouter des cours, des curriculums et des classes virtuelles au catalogue. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Gestion du catalogue des formations » à la page 114. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'auto-inscription et de catalogue de formations afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page des informations sur le cours, le curriculum ou la classe virtuelle, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez à l'élément. Cliquez sur le nom du cours, du curriculum ou de la classe virtuelle pour ouvrir la page des informations. 2 Cliquez sur Paramètres du catalogue des formations.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 107 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 3 Sélectionnez Lister dans le catalogue des formations pour l'auto-inscription des stagiaires. Cela permet aux utilisateurs enregistrés de s'ajouter à la liste des autorisations pour le cours, le curriculum ou la classe virtuelle dans le catalogue des formations. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez l'option « L'inscription requiert l'approbation du directeur de cours » pour exiger l'approbation préalable des stagiaires avant qu'ils puissent accéder au cours, au curriculum ou à la classe virtuelle dans le catalogue des formations. Sélectionnez l'option Informer le ou les directeurs de cours des demandes d'approbation par courrier électronique pour recevoir un message électronique chaque fois qu'un utilisateur souhaite s'auto-inscrire. (Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, vous devrez rechercher dans le catalogue des formations les stagiaires dont l'état est défini sur En attente.) • Sélectionnez l'option « L'inscription est ouverte » pour accorder à tous les utilisateurs l'accès au cours, au curriculum ou à la classe virtuelle. 5 Sélectionnez Afficher dans le catalogue des formations. 6 Choisissez un emplacement d'enregistrement dans le catalogue des formations et cliquez sur OK. (Pour rappel, le contenu doit se trouver dans le catalogue des formations pour qu'il soit possible d'utiliser la fonction d'autoinscription.) 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Contrôle de la formation avec des rapports Acrobat Connect Pro Central offre un large éventail d'options de rapports. Concernant les fonctions de formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, différents rapports peuvent être générés pour les cours, les curriculums et les classes virtuelles. Voir aussi « Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 Utilisation de filtres de rapport Comme pour d'autres applications dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central, vous pouvez définir les informations affichées dans un rapport spécifique en configurant des filtres de rapport. N'oubliez pas que les filtres que vous définissez s'appliquent à tous les rapports créés, à la fois pour les curriculums et pour toute autre application Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Définition de filtres de rapport » dans « Affichage de rapports sur chaque élément de contenu » à la page 169. Affichage des rapports sur les cours La fonctionnalité Rapports d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central vous permet de créer des rapports présentant une réunion donnée sous différentes perspectives. Les rapports sur les cours permettent également d'assurer le suivi des performances de stagiaires spécifiques. (Lorsque des stagiaires accèdent à un cours, soit directement depuis une URL de cours soit depuis l'URL du cours dans le cadre d'un curriculum, un rapport sur le cours est créé.) Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, ouvrez la page d'informations sur les cours, puis cliquez sur le lien Rapports. D'autres liens s'affichent et vous permettent de définir les types d'informations de rapport que vous pouvez voir pour ce cours.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 108 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Les rapports sur le contenu et sur les cours sont distincts, car un cours est associé à une version de contenu spécifique. (En revanche, les rapports sur les cours et les curriculums sont partagés, car un curriculum représente simplement un lien vers un cours.) Remarque : Lorsque vous effectuez une mise à niveau d'Acrobat Connect Pro 6 vers Acrobat Connect Pro 7, le matériel de formation existant fait l'objet d'une migration, mais les données prises en charge dans la fonction de génération de rapports améliorée d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7 sont vierges pour le matériel Acrobat Connect Pro 6. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Accédez à un cours. 3 Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports. 5 Pour générer un rapport, cliquez sur l'un des liens suivants : • Le résumé affiche les informations sur les cours (nom, ID, date d'ouverture, date de clôture et URL) et l'état des cours (utilisateurs inscrits, utilisateurs ayant terminé les cours, utilisateurs ayant réussi et utilisateurs ayant échoué). • « Par diapositives/pages » affiche un graphique à barres répertoriant toutes les diapositives du cours et leur nombre de consultations. Un tableau indique la dernière consultation de chaque diapositive. • « Par utilisateurs » affiche les utilisateurs ayant accès au cours, leur état (En cours, Achevé, Réussi ou Echoué), leur note, la date (de la dernière tentative de l'utilisateur), la durée (de la dernière tentative), le nombre de tentatives, la version du cours et le numéro de certificat, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur le nom d'un utilisateur pour afficher un graphique à barres et un tableau contenant l'ensemble des questions et ses réponses correctes ou incorrectes, ainsi que la note obtenue pour la question. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur le lien Afficher les réponses pour chaque question et afficher la distribution des réponses. • « Par questions » affiche un tableau répertoriant les numéros des questions, les questions, le nombre de réponses correctes à la question, le nombre de réponses incorrectes à la question, le pourcentage de réponses correctes à la question et la note accordée à la question. • « Par réponses » affiche un tableau répertoriant la note maximale possible, la note moyenne, la note la plus élevée et la note la plus faible obtenue pour le questionnaire. Pour chaque question, le tableau indique également le numéro de la question, la question elle-même et la distribution de la réponse ; c'est-à-dire les réponses obtenues pour chaque question, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur le lien Afficher les réponses pour afficher un graphique à secteurs, ainsi qu'un tableau contenant la clé et la distribution de réponse. La clé de réponse affiche toutes les réponses possibles à la question et la lettre ou le numéro de réponse correspondant(e) ; la distribution de réponse affiche toutes les réponses sélectionnées pour cette question, indique la réponse correcte et le nombre d'utilisateurs ayant sélectionné chaque réponse, ainsi que le pourcentage qu'ils représentent par rapport au nombre d'utilisateurs total. Enfin, le graphique répertorie tous les utilisateurs par nombre et pourcentage. (Le bouton Masquer la distribution des réponses/Afficher la distribution des réponses est un bouton bascule qui vous permet de masquer la distribution des réponses pour chaque question, puis de les afficher à nouveau.) Voir aussi « Affichage et gestion de rapports sur les curriculums » à la page 109 « A propos des rapports Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 Téléchargement et impression de rapports sur les cours A l'exception du rapport de résumé, vous pouvez exporter tous les rapports sur les cours vers le fichier CSV (valeurs séparées par des virgules) en cliquant sur Télécharger les données sous les liens des types de rapports.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 109 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Vous pouvez également exporter le rapport Par diapositives/pages ou Par questions dans la fenêtre d'un navigateur en cliquant sur Version imprimable à gauche, au-dessus de l'affichage. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours. 3 Dans la liste des cours, cliquez sur le nom de celui qui vous intéresse. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports. 5 Sélectionnez un type de rapport (Par diapositives, Par utilisateurs, Par questions ou Par réponses). 6 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Télécharger les données. • Cliquez sur Version imprimable. Voir aussi « Affichage des rapports sur les cours » à la page 107 Affichage et gestion de rapports sur les curriculums Vous pouvez afficher les rapports qui contiennent des résumés, des statistiques et des informations d'état sur un curriculum. Vous pouvez afficher les données relatives à l'ensemble du curriculum, à des utilisateurs individuels et à chaque élément. Les rapports sur les cours et les curriculums sont partagés, car un curriculum représente simplement un lien vers un cours. (En revanche, les rapports sur le contenu et sur les cours sont distincts, car un cours est associé à une version de contenu spécifique.) Les rapports sur les curriculums n'affichent pas la version spécifique d'un curriculum terminée par un stagiaire. Remarque : Lorsque vous effectuez une mise à niveau d'Acrobat Connect 6 vers Acrobat Connect Pro 7, le matériel de formation existant fait l'objet d'une migration, mais les données prises en charge dans la fonction de génération de rapports améliorée d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7 sont vierges pour le matériel Acrobat Connect 6. Les rapports sur les curriculums indiquent l'état des stagiaires de plusieurs manières : • Dans une présentation ne contenant pas de questionnaires, l'état Complet est obtenu lorsque 100 % des diapositives de la présentation ont été consultées. • Dans une présentation contenant un ou plusieurs questionnaires, l'état En cours est affiché si une réponse n'a pas été fournie à toutes les questions de l'ensemble des questionnaires avec une valeur en points (non nulle et pondérée). Si une réponse a été donnée pour toutes les questions avec une valeur en points, Acrobat Connect Pro affiche une liste Réussi ou Echoué, selon que la note du stagiaire est égale/supérieure ou inférieure à la note d'admissibilité. Remarque : Si le cours d'un curriculum est rendu accessible aux utilisateurs avant d'être ajouté au curriculum, toutes les données existantes concernant ce cours individuel apparaissent dans le rapport sur le curriculum. Si vous ne voulez pas que les données antérieures apparaissent dans le rapport sur le curriculum, vous pouvez recréer des cours qui existaient avant la création du curriculum. Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113 « Modification du champ d'état de l'utilisateur dans un rapport de curriculum » à la page 111UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 110 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Affichage du rapport sur l'état du curriculum Un rapport d'état contient des informations générales sur un curriculum, y compris le nombre d'inscrits et d'utilisateurs ayant terminé ce curriculum. Vous pouvez filtrer le rapport en fonction des dates de début ou de fin, des groupes ou des utilisateurs, ains que des personnes gérées directement ou indirectement. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports. Par défaut, Acrobat Connect Pro Central ouvre la page du rapport de synthèse. Outre les informations qui apparaissent dans la zone Informations sur le curriculum de la page correspondante (telles que le nom du curriculum, l'ID du curriculum, l'adresse URL, ainsi que les dates de début et de clôture), le rapport contient les informations suivantes : Utilisateurs inscrits Nombre d'utilisateurs inscrits dans le curriculum. Utilisateurs ayant terminé Nombre d'utilisateurs qui ont accédé au curriculum et ont réussi tous les éléments obligatoires. Cela comprend également tous les utilisateurs qui ont été inscrits à ce curriculum, qu'ils soient actuellement inscrits ou non. Utilisateurs en cours Le nombre d'utilisateurs ayant accès au curriculum et qui ne satisfont pas aux conditions d'accomplissement. Cela comprend également tous les utilisateurs qui ont été inscrits à ce curriculum, qu'ils soient actuellement inscrits ou non. Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113 « Modification du champ d'état de l'utilisateur dans un rapport de curriculum » à la page 111 Affichage d'un rapport sur le curriculum par utilisateurs Vous pouvez afficher les données d'un rapport général sur les inscrits au curriculum, comme par exemple la date à laquelle l'utilisateur a terminé le curriculum. Vous pouvez filtrer le rapport en fonction des dates de début et de fin, des groupes ou des utilisateurs, et des personnes gérées directement ou indirectement. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Cliquez sur Par utilisateurs pour afficher les informations suivantes pour chaque inscrit : Nom Nom de l'inscrit. Cliquez sur un nom pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur l'inscrit, telles que son état, le total de ses notes et le nombre de tentatives effectuées pour terminer les éléments du curriculum. Etat Situation de l'utilisateur par rapport à l'élément. Date de participation Date et heure auxquelles l'élément a été suivi par l'inscrit. Nbre de certificats Nombre généré par le système qui atteste que l'utilisateur a achevé le curriculum et attribuant à l'utilisateur un identifiant qui lui est propre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 111 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 4 Pour modifier le nombre d'utilisateurs apparaissant dans la liste, sélectionnez un nombre différent dans le menu déroulant Affichage. Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113 Modification du champ d'état de l'utilisateur dans un rapport de curriculum Lorsque vous affichez un rapport sur le curriculum par utilisateur, l'option de remplacement vous permet de modifier l'état d'un utilisateur. Par exemple, vous pouvez modifier l'état d'un utilisateur de En cours à Achevé. Vous pouvez modifier l'état de cours indépendants et celui de cours suivis dans le cadre de curriculums. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas remplacer l'état d'un utilisateur d'un curriculum dans son ensemble. En règle générale, l'utilisation des remplacements est prévue pour rétablir une situation dont le contrôle ne dépend pas des utilisateurs. Par exemple, lorsqu'une erreur dans le contenu de la formation aurait entraîné l'échec d'un utilisateur. Les remplacements sont également utiles lorsque vous souhaitez définir manuellement un état pour des sessions de formation externe, par exemple des ateliers de travail en direct, une participation à une sortie éducative ou la visite d'un site Web. Le champ Etat est mis à jour à chaque modification de l'état de l'utilisateur pour les éléments suivis par Acrobat Connect Pro Central. En cas de modification de l'état de l'utilisateur pour une formation externe, vous pouvez modifier manuellement l'état. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Cliquez sur Par utilisateurs. 4 Dans la colonne Nom, cliquez sur le nom de l'inscrit dont vous souhaitez modifier l'état. La liste des éléments affectés à l'inscrit apparaît. La colonne d'état indique l'état de chaque élément. 5 Pour modifier l'état d'un élément, cliquez sur Remplacer et utilisez le menu contextuel Etat pour sélectionner l'une des options suivantes : Réussi L'utilisateur a réussi l'élément. Echoué L'utilisateur n'a pas réussi à l'élément. Achevé L'utilisateur a achevé l'élément avec succès. En cours L'utilisateur a cliqué au moins une fois sur l'élément. 6 Saisissez la note de l'utilisateur dans la zone Note. (Pour les éléments auxquels aucune note de réussite ou d'échec n'est associée, vous pouvez entrer 0.) 7 (Facultatif) Pour modifier la Note maximale possible, accédez à la page d'informations sur le cours et modifiez-y la note. 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. L'état mis à jour apparaît sur le rapport Utilisateurs. Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 112 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Affichage d'un rapport sur le curriculum par élément Vous pouvez afficher un rapport sur un curriculum par élément. Pour ce faire, il vous suffit de sélectionner l'élément et le type de rapport que vous souhaitez afficher. Vous pouvez filtrer le rapport par résumé, par utilisateurs, par diapositives/pages, par questions ou par réponses. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Cliquez sur Par élément. La liste de tous les éléments contenus dans le curriculum apparaît. La colonne Rapports indique le type de rapport que vous pouvez générer pour chaque élément. 4 Cliquez sur le lien du type de rapport que vous souhaitez afficher. Les étapes permettant d'afficher, de télécharger et de définir des filtres de rapport pour chaque élément sont identiques aux procédures relatives à l'affichage des rapports dans chaque bibliothèque. Toutefois, la formation externe constitue une exception, dans la mesure où elle n'apparaît pas dans une bibliothèque Acrobat Connect Pro Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113 Affichage du rapport de synthèse d'une formation externe Avant de générer un rapport de synthèse pour une formation externe, mettez à jour l'état de l'utilisateur ou la note des utilisateurs ayant terminé la formation. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Cliquez sur Par élément. Type d'élément Type de rapport Cours Résumé Par utilisateurs Par diapositives/Pages Par questions Par réponses Réunion Résumé Par participants Par sessions Par questions Formation externe Résumé Par utilisateursUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 113 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training La liste de tous les éléments contenus dans le curriculum apparaît. La colonne Rapports indique le type de rapport que vous pouvez générer pour chaque élément. 4 Dans la colonne Noms, recherchez l'élément de formation externe et cliquez sur Résumé dans la colonne Rapports. Voir aussi « Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum » à la page 113 « Modification du champ d'état de l'utilisateur dans un rapport de curriculum » à la page 111 Affichage du rapport sur un curriculum de formation externe par utilisateurs Avant de générer un rapport pour une formation externe par utilisateurs, mettez à jour l'état de l'utilisateur ou la note des utilisateurs ayant terminé la formation. 1 Si vous ne vous trouvez pas déjà dans la page Informations sur le curriculum, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central et accédez au curriculum. Cliquez sur le nom du curriculum pour ouvrir la page Informations sur le curriculum. 2 Cliquez sur le lien Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 3 Cliquez sur Par élément. La liste de tous les éléments contenus dans le curriculum apparaît. La colonne Rapports indique le type de rapport que vous pouvez générer pour chaque élément. 4 Dans la colonne Noms, recherchez l'élément de formation externe et cliquez sur Par utilisateurs dans la colonne Rapports pour afficher les informations suivantes sur chaque inscrit : Nom Nom de l'inscrit. Cliquez sur un nom spécifique pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur l'inscrit, telles que son état, le total de ses notes et le nombre de tentatives effectuées pour terminer l'élément de formation externe. Etat Situation de l'utilisateur par rapport à l'élément. Note Note que l'utilisateur a obtenue pour la formation externe. Date et heure de participation Date et heure auxquelles l'élément a été suivi par l'inscrit. Tentatives Nombre de tentatives effectuées par l'utilisateur pour accéder à la formation externe. Nbre de certificats Nombre généré par le système qui atteste que l'utilisateur a achevé la formation externe et attribuant à l'utilisateur un identifiant (ID) qui lui est propre. Version La version de l'élément de formation externe que l'utilisateur a utilisée. Exportation de rapports sur le curriculum Vous pouvez exporter les rapports sur un curriculum Par élément dans un fichier Excel en cliquant sur le bouton Télécharger les données de la page Rapports. Vous avez la possibilité d'enregistrer ou d'ouvrir le rapport. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant le curriculum. 3 Dans la liste des cours, sélectionnez le nom du curriculum. 4 Cliquez sur Rapports. 5 Cliquez sur Par élément.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 114 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Dans la liste des types de rapport pour chaque élément, vous pouvez télécharger les données des rapports pour tous les rapports de la liste, à l'exception du rapport Résumé. 6 Cliquez sur le type de rapport dont vous souhaitez télécharger les données. 7 Effectuez l'une des étapes suivantes : • Pour télécharger le rapport, cliquez sur Télécharger les données, puis enregistrez ou ouvrez le fichier. • Pour afficher et imprimer un rapport par diapositives/pages ou par questions dans une fenêtre de navigateur, cliquez sur Version imprimable. Animation d'une formation avec Acrobat Connect Pro Gestion du catalogue des formations Le catalogue des formations offre aux gestionnaires de formation une autre méthode d'organisation des cours et des curriculums. Par exemple, un gestionnaire de formation peut rendre un grand nombre de cours disponibles par le biais du catalogue des formations, sans placer tous les cours dans des curriculums. Autre exemple : un gestionnaire de formation peut créer un curriculum, puis diriger les stagiaires vers un ensemble d'informations complémentaires dans le catalogue des formations. Remarque : Lors de l'utilisation du catalogue des formations, ajoutez tous les stagiaires concernés dans le groupe d'autorisations Stagiaires. Ainsi, ils pourront consulter toutes les options de formation présentes dans le catalogue. Si vous souhaitez limiter l'accès à certaines options de formation du catalogue, organisez les documents de formation en dossiers et personnalisez les autorisations au niveau des dossiers. La définition des autorisations dans le catalogue des formations revient aux administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Configuration du catalogue des formations » à la page 188. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres d'auto-inscription et de catalogue de formations afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Création d'un cours » à la page 81 « Création d'un curriculum » à la page 89 Ouverture du catalogue des formations Lorsque vous commencez à utiliser le catalogue des formations, il peut s'avérer utile de créer des dossiers pour organiser les informations. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer des dossiers pour les différents services (Comptabilité, Ressources humaines, Services généraux, etc.) ou pour les différents types de formation (Débutant, Intermédiaire, Confirmé, etc.). 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Catalogue des formations. 3 Cliquez sur Nouveau dossier pour commencer la création des dossiers et l'organisation du catalogue. Vous pouvez créer une arborescence en ajoutant des sous-dossiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 115 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Définition d'autorisations dans le catalogue des formations Vous pouvez définir des autorisations pour des dossiers et des éléments du catalogue de formations. Ceci peut être utile si votre catalogue de formations comporte une structure de dossiers et que vous souhaitez contrôler les personnes autorisées à gérer et à publier dans chaque dossier. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Catalogue des formations. 3 Activez la case à cocher située en regard d'un dossier ou d'un élément. 4 Cliquez sur Définir autorisations. 5 Dans la liste Autorisations actuelles de, sélectionnez un utilisateur ou un groupe, cliquez sur Autorisations, puis choisissez le niveau d'autorisation (Refusé, Voir, Publier ou Gérer). Remarque : Par défaut, le groupe Stagiaires dispose d'autorisations Voir pour le niveau racine du catalogue des formations. Ce paramètre par défaut permet à toute personne du groupe Stagiaires de parcourir le niveau racine du catalogue des formations. Vous pouvez modifier les autorisations pour contrôler qui peut consulter le catalogue des formations. Ajout d'éléments au catalogue des formations Seuls les cours, les curriculums et les classes virtuelles peuvent être ajoutés au catalogue des formations. Pour utiliser un contenu du catalogue des formations, convertissez ce contenu en cours. Lorsque vous ajoutez un cours ou un curriculum au catalogue des formations, vous indiquez aussi si les stagiaires peuvent s'inscrire eux-mêmes. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Formation dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le cours/curriculum que vous voulez ajouter au catalogue des formations, puis cliquez dessus. 3 Cliquez sur Paramètres du catalogue des formations. 4 Sélectionnez Lister dans le catalogue des formations pour l'auto-inscription des stagiaires. Cela permet aux utilisateurs enregistrés de s'ajouter à la liste des autorisations pour le cours ou le curriculum dans le catalogue des formations. 5 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez l'option « L'inscription requiert l'approbation du directeur de cours » pour exiger l'approbation préalable des stagiaires avant qu'ils puissent accéder au cours ou curriculum dans le catalogue des formations. Sélectionnez l'option Informer le ou les directeurs de cours des demandes d'approbation par courrier électronique pour recevoir un message électronique chaque fois qu'un utilisateur souhaite s'auto-inscrire. (Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, vous devrez rechercher dans le catalogue des formations les stagiaires dont l'état est défini sur En attente.) • Sélectionnez l'option « L'inscription est ouverte » pour accorder à tous les utilisateurs l'accès au cours ou curriculum. 6 Sélectionnez Afficher dans le catalogue des formations. 7 Choisissez l'emplacement du cours ou curriculum au sein du catalogue des formations, puis cliquez sur OK. 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : Les informations relatives à l'auto-inscription ne sont pas incluses dans les rapports de formations. Information des stagiaires au sujet du catalogue des formations Une fois que vous avez organisé et ajouté du contenu au catalogue des formations, informez-en les stagiaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 116 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Remarque : Si vous avisez les stagiaires par message électronique et que des informations supplémentaires sur le curriculum sont disponibles dans le catalogue des formations, modifiez simplement le texte de la notification de manière à inclure un lien vers le catalogue. Ainsi, les stagiaires disposent de toutes les informations nécessaires à partir d'un seul message. ? Pour informer les stagiaires au sujet du catalogue des formations, procédez comme suit : • Indiquez-leur qu'un nouvel onglet Catalogue des formations est désormais disponible dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro. • Envoyez-leur un message électronique contenant un lien vers le catalogue des formations. • Placez un lien vers le catalogue des formations sur votre portail Web. Remarque : Un lien placé dans un message électronique ou sur un portail Web peut également pointer directement vers un cours du catalogue des formations. Approbation des personnes inscrites à la formation Si vous sélectionnez l'option d'acceptation lors de l'ajout d'un cours, d'un curriculum ou d'une classe virtuelle au catalogue des formations, vous devrez gérer et accepter les stagiaires lorsque ceux-ci souhaiteront consulter les éléments du catalogue. Cette méthode vous permet, ainsi qu'aux autres gestionnaires de formation, d'échelonner les acceptations et de limiter le nombre de stagiaires pouvant accéder simultanément à un cours, un curriculum ou une classe virtuelle. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous avez choisi d'être averti par message électronique lorsqu'un stagiaire demande à être accepté à un cours, un curriculum ou une classe virtuelle du catalogue des formations, cliquez sur lien se trouvant dans le message électronique. • Si vous n'avez pas choisi cette option de notification, cliquez sur l'onglet Formation, localisez le cours, le curriculum ou la classe virtuelle dont vous souhaitez accepter les stagiaires, puis cliquez dessus. 2 Cliquez sur Gestion des inscrits. 3 Dans la liste Inscrits actuels à, sélectionnez un individu dont l'état est En attente d'autorisation. 4 Cliquez sur Autorisation, puis choisissez Inscrit. (Les autres options d'autorisation attribuables aux stagiaires sont Refusé et En attente d'autorisation.) 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, sélectionnez Oui si vous souhaitez aviser le stagiaire de son inscription. Réalisation d'une classe virtuelle La disposition d'une classe virtuelle est flexible et vous offre plusieurs manières de présenter les informations et d'interagir avec les participants. Remarque : Un administrateur peut avoir activé un avis de conditions générales d'utilisation qui, pour des raisons de conformité, doit être accepté avant d'entrer dans la classe virtuelle. (Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184.) 1 Dans l'onglet Formation d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, sélectionnez la classe virtuelle dans laquelle vous souhaitez entrer. 2 Cliquez sur le nom de la classe virtuelle dans la liste située sous la barre de navigation. 3 Cliquez sur Accéder à la classe virtuelle ou cliquez sur l'URL de la classe.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 117 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training 4 Gérez les participants qui arrivent en approuvant ou en refusant leur demande d'accès. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15. 5 Réalisez la formation pour les participants. Voici quelques suggestions : • Passez d'un mode d'affichage de classe virtuelle à l'autre : Salle d'attente, Salle de cours et Etude. Vous pouvez commencer par la disposition Salle d'attente, qui comprend un grand module Conversation grâce auquel les participants peuvent se présenter les uns aux autres. Passez ensuite à la Salle de classe lorsqu'il s'agit de partager des cours. Enfin, terminez la formation avec la disposition Etude ; elle offre un module de sondage dans lequel les participants peuvent évaluer la session qu'ils viennent de suivre. • Lancez des cours dans le module de partage des cours. Effectuez et annulez la synchronisation du cours selon vos besoins. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Invitation de participants et accord ou refus d'accès » à la page 15. • Collaborez avec les participants par le biais de la liste des participants. Posez des questions aux participants, auxquelles ils peuvent répondre à l'aide d'émoticônes, et encouragez-les à poser des questions en levant virtuellement la main. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Communication avec les participants à la réunion ou formation » à la page 117 et « Poser une question ou y répondre au cours d'une session de formation ou réunion » à la page 120. • Utilisez le module Caméra et Voix pour diffuser votre image et votre voix, ou celles d'un participant. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Autorisation des participants à diffuser du contenu vidéo et audio par microphone » à la page 158. • Placez les participants dans différentes salles secondaires pour qu'ils puissent travailler en petits groupes. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Création et gestion d'ateliers » à la page 48. • Utilisez le tableau blanc pour collaborer avec les participants ou leur permettre de travailler ensemble pour répondre à une question ou trouver des idées. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35. • Utilisez le module Conversation pour communiquer avec les participants ou répondre à des questions. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42. • Prenez des notes, par exemple sur des points à approfondir, des informations à ajouter au cours ou des améliorations de la classe virtuelle, grâce au module Note. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Prise de notes pendant une réunion » à la page 40. 6 Pour fermer la classe virtuelle, sélectionnez Réunion >Arrêter la réunion. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les classes virtuelles et ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « A propos des classes virtuelles » à la page 101 « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 Communication avec les participants à la réunion ou formation Il est essentiel de créer un esprit de groupe au sein d'une réunion ou d'une session de formation, et d'encourager les participants à intervenir. Les hôtes et les présentateurs définissent le ton des réunions et sessions de formation ; ils peuvent montrer aux utilisateurs comment participer activement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 118 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Les émoticônes proposées dans la liste des participants sont une méthode d'expression simple pour les participants. Elles permettent de faire passer des émotions (rires, applaudissements), de formuler des demandes à l'hôte (parler plus fort ou moins vite) et d'agir (lever la main ou exprimer son accord). Pour les utiliser, il suffit de cliquer dessus. A l'attention des participants qui utilisent pour la première fois les émoticônes dans une réunion ou une session de formation, les hôtes et les présentateurs peuvent saisir quelques instructions simples dans le module Note. Une autre solution consiste, pour les hôtes et les présentateurs, à utiliser la fonction audio pour expliquer aux participants comment utiliser les émoticônes. Vous trouverez ci-après quelques conseils supplémentaires relatifs à la communication avec les participants : • Expliquez aux participants comment combiner les émoticônes et la fonction audio, puis soyez à leur disposition lorsqu'ils essaient d'utiliser ces fonctions. Si les participants lèvent la main, prenez leur question et répondez-leur pour qu'ils puissent comprendre comment fonctionne le flux de communication. • Utilisez activement les émoticônes. Lorsqu'un participant fait un commentaire, ayez recours aux émoticônes pour rire ou applaudir. Si vous êtes très pris par votre présentation, demandez le concours d'un autre hôte ou présentateur qui se chargera d'utiliser les émoticônes et de gérer la liste des participants. • Pour facilement impliquer les participants, vous pouvez poser des questions simples auxquelles ils peuvent répondre en cours de réunion ou de formation à l'aide des émoticônes Accepter ou Refuser. (Aucun délai n'est associé à ces émoticônes et elles ne s'effacent pas automatiquement. Si vous pensez que la majorité des participants a répondu, cliquez sur Options et sélectionnez Effacer l'état de tous les participants.) • Au début d'une réunion ou d'une session de formation, vérifiez le niveau sonore de votre microphone et demander aux participants de vous indiquer grâce aux émoticônes si vous parlez trop ou pas assez fort. • Si vous avez répondu à la main levée d'un participant en lui attribuant des droits voix, vous pouvez également lui permettre de partager son écran (placez le pointeur de la souris sur son nom dans la liste des participants et sélectionnez Demander le partage d'écran ). Cette méthode peut s'avérer utile pour clarifier une question ou fournir des informations. C'est également un bon moyen d'impliquer les participants dans le déroulement de la réunion ou de la session de formation. • Dans la liste des participants, placez le curseur de la souris sur le nom d'un participant afin de mettre en silence ou de rétablir le son de son microphone, selon les besoins de la conférence audio en cours. • Lorsqu'un hôte autorise un participant à partager son écran, la fenêtre de notification s'affiche pendant 10 secondes seulement. Si le participant ne clique pas sur Accepter dans cette fenêtre pendant ce délai, l'autorisation de partage lui est retirée. • Si le présentateur ou l'hôte ne parle pas mais a laissé le bouton Parler activé dans sa barre d'outils VoIP, un autre hôte peut placer le pointeur sur son nom dans la liste des participants et sélectionner Mettre en silence le microphone pour réduire le bruit de fond. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les modules, le partage et d'autres paramètres afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Ces paramètres ont un impact sur les salles de réunion et les salles de classes virtuelles, et sur ce qu'il est possible d'y faire. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 119 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Poser des questions aux étudiants et accepter leurs questions Acrobat Connect Pro autorise les participants à lever la main à l'écran (à l'aide des émoticônes), à poser une question via le module Conversation ou la fonction audio (téléphonie ou VoIP) et à obtenir une réponse de l'hôte. Les participants peuvent utiliser les émoticônes pour lever la main à tout moment ; les hôtes et présentateurs peuvent choisir d'accepter ou de refuser leur demande. 1 Au cours d'une réunion ou d'une session de formation, effectuez l'un des opérations suivantes ou les deux : • A l'aide de la fonction audio (téléphonie ou VoIP) ou du module Conversation, posez une question aux participants. • Indiquez aux participants, à l'aide de la fonction audio ou du module Conversation, comment poser leurs propres questions. 2 Les participants lèvent la main à l'aide des émoticônes du module Liste des participants, avec les conséquences suivantes : • Toutes les personnes présentes dans la salle de réunion ou de formation voient les émoticônes de main levée en face du nom des participants concernés dans la liste des participants. Si plusieurs participants lèvent la main, la personne qui l'a levée en premier apparaît en haut de la liste, puis la suivante apparaît en dessous, et ainsi de suite. • Vous recevez une notification dans la partie supérieure droite de la classe virtuelle ou la salle de réunion et êtes invité à accepter ou refuser la demande. (Si vous avez utilisé l'Add-in pour ouvrir la salle et si vous partagez votre écran, la notification s'affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de votre écran.) Si plusieurs participants lèvent la main simultanément, chaque notification indique le nombre de participants ayant levé la main et la position de ce participant dans la file d'attente. Par exemple, 4/10 indique que le participant était le quatrième sur dix participants à lever la main. 3 Gérez les mains levées en procédant ainsi : • Acceptez une main levée en cliquant sur Accepter dans l'un des deux messages de notification. (Pour accepter toutes les mains levées en même temps, sélectionnez tous les participants dans la liste des participants, placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'un d'eux, puis sélectionnez Accorder les droits d'utilisation du microphone .) Dans la liste des participants, à côté du nom du participant, l'émoticône de main levée est remplacée par l'émoticône d'affectation des droits d'utilisation du microphone , et le nom du participant est placé dans la liste par ordre alphabétique. Le participant reçoit une notification pour l'avertir qu'il dispose des droits voix et qu'il peut cliquer sur Parlez maintenant pour poser une question ou répondre. Si le participant doit partager son écran, placez le pointeur de la souris sur son nom dans la liste des participants, puis sélectionnez Partage d'écran. Lorsqu'un participant a fini de parler, placez le pointeur de la souris sur son nom dans la liste des participants et cliquez sur Révoquer les droits d'utilisation du microphone pour annuler ses droits voix. • Pour rejeter la main levée d'un présentateur, cliquez sur Refuser dans l'un des deux messages de notification ou placez le pointeur de la souris sur le nom du présentateur dans la liste des participants et sélectionnez Refuser la main . 4 (Facultatif) Pour effacer toutes les émoticônes de la liste des participants (à l'exception de Pas devant l'écran), cliquez sur le bouton d'options de la liste et sélectionnez Effacer l'état de tous les participants. Voir aussi « Animation d'une formation avec Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 114UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 120 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Poser une question à l'aide de la fonction audio Comme dans une salle de réunion ou de classe normale, vous pouvez poser une question directe à un participant. Pour ce faire, posez la question, attribuez au participant des droits d'utilisation temporaire du microphone pour qu'il y répondre, puis révoquez ces droits. 1 En cours de session, placez le pointeur de la souris sur un nom de la liste des participants. 2 Sélectionnez Accorder les droits d'utilisation du microphone . 3 Le participant reçoit une notification dans la partie supérieure droite de l'écran ; il peut cliquer sur Parlez maintenant pour prendre la parole. Lorsqu'il a fini de parler, placez le pointeur de la souris sur son nom dans la liste des participants et cliquez sur Révoquer les droits d'utilisation du microphone pour annuler ses droits voix. Voir aussi « Animation d'une formation avec Acrobat Connect Pro » à la page 114 Participation aux réunions et sessions de formation Communication pendant les réunions et sessions de formation Dans Acrobat Connect Pro, les participants peuvent communiquer entre eux au sein d'une classe virtuelle, attirer l'attention de l'instructeur et participer activement à la réunion ou session de formation grâce aux émoticônes (icônes exprimant une émotion ou une action). 1 Dans la session de formation, cliquez sur l'outil de main levée et sélectionnez une option. L'émoticône correspondant à votre sélection s'affiche alors en regard de votre nom dans la liste des participants. Tous les participants à la session peuvent la voir. 2 Toutes les émoticônes, à l'exception de Lever la main, Pas devant l'écran, Accepter et Refuser, disparaissent après 10 s. Pour supprimer l'une des émoticônes qui ne s'effacent pas automatiquement, cliquez sur l'outil Lever la main et sélectionnez à nouveau l'option. Par exemple, si vous aviez sélectionné Accepter à l'étape 1, sélectionnez Effacer Accepter en face de l'émoticône. (L'émoticône Pas devant l'écran s'efface automatiquement si vous en sélectionnez une autre, par exemple Lever la main ou Rire.) Pour désactiver toute émoticône, vous pouvez cliquer sur l'outil Lever la main et sélectionner Effacer mon état. Remarque : Si vous choisissez l'état Pas devant l'écran alors que le mode Mains libres est actif, le bouton Parler est automatiquement déverrouillé pour éliminer les bruits parasites. Voir aussi « Partage de contenu dans le module Partage » à la page 28 Poser une question ou y répondre au cours d'une session de formation ou réunion Certains hôtes et présentateurs utilisent les émoticônes et la fonction audio (téléphonie ou VoIP) d'Acrobat Connect Pro pour poser des questions aux participants d'une session de formation ou d'une réunion. Par exemple : un hôte pose une question ; plusieurs participants lèvent la main à l'aide d'émoticônes, l'hôte accorde des droits voix au premier participant ayant la main levée dans la liste des participants, et celui-ci répond par VoIP. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 121 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'émoticône Lever la main, votre nom est placé en haut de la liste des participants. Si plusieurs participants lèvent la main à peu près en même temps, la personne qui lève la main le premier est placée au sommet de la liste, puis la deuxième personne à lever la main en second, etc. 1 Dans une session de formation ou une réunion, cliquez sur Lever la main dans la barre d'outils. L'émoticône correspondante s'affiche en regard de votre nom dans la liste des participants. Tous les participants peuvent la voir. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez un autre état, par exemple Accepter, l'émoticône correspondante recouvre la main levée dans la liste des participants. 2 (Facultatif) Avant qu'un hôte ou un présentateur accepte ou refuse votre main levée, vous pouvez baisser la main vous-même en cliquant à nouveau sur Lever la main . Cela peut s'avérer utile dans le cas suivant, par exemple : une question est posée, vous levez la main pour répondre mais un autre participant est choisi pour répondre à la question. 3 L'une des actions suivantes se produit : • L'hôte ou le présentateur refuse votre main levée et vous recevez un message en conséquence. • L'hôte ou le présentateur accepte votre main levée et vous êtes autorisé à prendre la parole. La barre d'outils VoIP s'affiche à côté de l'outil Lever la main et vous pouvez l'utiliser pour parler. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer sur Parlez maintenant dans le message de notification reçu de l'hôte. Vous pouvez ainsi parler via la fonction de téléphonie ou VoIP. (Si vous déclinez le message de notification ou ne l'acceptez pas dans un délai de 8 s, le message de notification disparaît.) Lorsque vous avez fini de parler, l'hôte ou le présentateur peut révoquer vos droits voix. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous avez la parole et souhaitez partager l'écran de votre ordinateur, demandez à l'hôte ou au présentateur de vous accorder les droits de partage d'écran. Vous pouvez ainsi clarifier la question que vous posez ou fournir des informations supplémentaires au groupe. Lorsque vous n'avez plus besoin de partager votre écran, cliquez sur Arrêter le partage. Voir aussi « Participation à une formation en salle de classe virtuelle » à la page 121 Participation à une formation en salle de classe virtuelle La participation à une classe virtuelle est une excellente occasion de recueillir des informations tout en participant interactivement au déroulement de la session. 1 Cliquez sur l'URL de classe virtuelle que vous avez reçue (par courrier électronique ou messagerie instantanée) de l'hôte de la session. 2 Entrez vos informations de connexion. 3 Participez à la classe virtuelle. Voici quelques suggestions : • Examinez la disposition de la salle et lisez les noms de chaque module, c'est-à-dire les sous-sections de la disposition, par exemple Liste des participants, Partage, Caméra et Voix, et Conversation. Si les participants utilisent le module Conversation pour se présenter, ajoutez votre nom et éventuellement votre emplacement pour vous joindre à la conversation. L'hôte peut modifier la disposition en cours de réunion. La session reste ouverte et se poursuit, seuls l'agencement des modules change. • Le module de partage du cours permet à l'hôte de partager son écran ou du contenu, tel qu'une présentation ou un document. Le module Partage est sans doute celui sur lequel vous vous concentrerez le plus pendant la classe virtuelle. Si une présentation contient un questionnaire, l'hôte peut désynchroniser la présentation pour que chaque participant puisse y répondre de son côté.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 122 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training • Utilisez la liste des participants pour interagir avec l'hôte et d'autres participants. A l'aide des émoticônes, vous pouvez lever la main virtuellement pour attirer l'attention de l'hôte, exprimer votre accord ou votre désaccord avec une affirmation ou une question et même prévenir l'hôte s'il parle trop ou pas assez fort. Les émoticônes sont une manière facile de commencer à participer à une classe virtuelle. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Poser une question ou y répondre au cours d'une session de formation ou réunion » à la page 120. • Levez la main et, si l'hôte accepte votre demande, utilisez la barre d'outils VoIP pour faire entendre votre voix. Cette fonction est pratique si vous avez une question précise et détaillée à poser ou si vous souhaitez fournir des informations au reste de la classe. • Si l'hôte ouvre le tableau blanc, collaborez avec les autres participants sur la tâche à effectuer. Les tableaux blancs permettent aux participants de répondre en groupe à une question. Ils s'avèrent aussi très utiles pour échanger des idées. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Partage d'un tableau blanc » à la page 35. • Tout au long de la session, utilisez le module Conversation pour communiquer avec les participants ou répondre à des questions. Les hôtes peuvent autoriser les conversations privées entre participants ou désactiver complètement cette fonction. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Conversation et Q & R dans des réunions » à la page 42. • A la fin de la session, l'hôte peut effectuer un sondage. Il suffit de lire la question et de voter à l'aide des cases d'option proposées. 4 Lorsque la session est terminée, l'hôte ferme la classe virtuelle. Voir aussi « Communication pendant les réunions et sessions de formation » à la page 120 Auto-inscription à des cours de formation Si les responsables de formation mettent des cours, des curriculums et d'autres éléments de formation à la disposition des utilisateurs par le biais du catalogue des formations, vous pouvez vous inscrire vous-même. 1 Dans la page d'accueil d'Acrobat Connect Pro, cliquez sur Catalogue des formations. 2 Dans la liste des cours, sélectionnez un cours, puis cliquez sur Inscrire. Votre état pour ce cours devient En attente. Un message électronique vous est envoyé pour vous confirmer votre demande d'inscription ; un autre message parvient au directeur de formation pour qu'il approuve votre demande. 3 Si le directeur de formation approuve votre demande d'inscription, vous recevez un message électronique indiquant votre nouvel état et un lien vers le cours. De En attente, votre état passe à Inscrit. Lorsque vous êtes prêt, cliquez sur le lien du cours dans le message électronique et suivez le cours. Voir aussi « Communication pendant les réunions et sessions de formation » à la page 120 « Participation à une formation en salle de classe virtuelle » à la page 121123 Chapitre 4 : Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Events permet aux utilisateurs de gérer l'intégralité du cycle de vie des événements, courts ou longs, tels que l'inscription, les invitations, les rappels et les rapports. Le module Connect Pro Events peut être utilisé pour des réunions, des séminaires, des présentations ou des formations. Les événements incluant généralement de nombreux participants, une attention toute particulière doit être apportée à leur gestion, préalable comme postérieure. A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Présentation des événements Un événement est une réunion, un séminaire, une présentation, un cours, un curriculum ou une salle de classe virtuelle comportant des fonctions de gestion d'avant-événement et d'après-événement. Les fonctions de gestion des événements comprennent l'inscription, les rappels, ainsi que les questionnaires de suivi d'événement et les rapports. Vous pouvez créer un événement dans les situations suivantes : • Vous voulez que les participants s'inscrivent. Vous voulez également avoir la possibilité de sélectionner les participants pour l'événement en fonction des informations relatives à leur inscription. • Vous voulez concevoir des pages d'événements à votre marque, par exemple des listes et des descriptions qui assurent la promotion de cet événement, ainsi que des pages d'inscription et de connexion. • Vous souhaitez personnaliser les données recueillies auprès des participants pour vos rapports. Ces données dépendant des informations d'inscription, elles complètent les rapports liés au contenu de l'événement, par exemple les réponses à des questionnaires données dans un cours ou des sondages pour une réunion. • Vous voulez que des personnes extérieures à votre société puissent participer. La liste des événements étant souvent publiée sur des sites Web publics, de nombreux participants pourront les consulter et s'y inscrire. • Vous voulez envoyer des messages générés automatiquement, par exemple des invitations, des rappels, des confirmations d'inscription et des notes de remerciement. • Vous voulez effectuer le suivi de campagnes individuelles, telles que des offres électroniques, des campagnes de moteurs de recherche ou des campagnes de bandeaux publicitaires. Un événement comprend trois phases : • Les tâches préalables à l'événement comprennent la détermination du nombre de licences disponibles, la création du contenu, la définition des autorisations et l'envoi des invitations, l'inscription, et le rappel des participants. • La phase correspondant au déroulement de l'événement requiert des participants et parfois des présentateurs (pour les événements qui incluent une réunion ou un séminaire). • Les tâches ultérieures à l'événement comprennent le renvoi du navigateur des participants vers une URL spécifique, la réponse aux questions en suspens des participants et la gestion des différentes activités de suivi des événements par le biais d'enquêtes et de rapports.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 124 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Voir aussi « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 Tâches préalables à l'événement Une planification soigneuse de la préparation de l'événement, associée à une bonne gestion des tâches, permet de garantir le bon déroulement des événements et une exécution rapide de leurs activités postérieures. 1. Déterminez le nombre de licences en votre possession. Avant de configurer un événement, évaluez le nombre de licences que vous possédez. Si vous ne disposez pas de suffisamment de licences pour le nombre de personnes inscrites, certains participants ne pourront pas accéder à l'événement lors de leur tentative de connexion. Vérifiez le nombre de licences disponibles auprès de votre administrateur Connect Pro Central. 2. Définissez le contenu de l'événement. Pour que vous puissiez créer un événement, son contenu doit déjà exister dans Connect Pro Central. (Lors de la configuration de l'événement à l'aide de l'Assistant de création, vous devez désigner le contenu, la réunion, le cours, le curriculum, la classe virtuelle ou le séminaire qui constitue l'événement.) La liste suivante fournit plusieurs exemples : • Pour créer un événement de formation à partir d'un cours ou d'un curriculum, ces derniers doivent exister dans la bibliothèque des formations. • Pour présenter du contenu comme événement, vous devez stocker ce contenu dans la bibliothèque de contenu. • Pour utiliser une réunion ou un séminaire comme événement, ces deux éléments doivent exister dans la bibliothèque de réunions ou de séminaires. 3. Affectez les autorisations relatives à l'événement. Les autorisations jouent un rôle important car elles désignent les utilisateurs pouvant participer, consulter et gérer les événements. Les autorisations de participation déterminent les rôles et fonctions des participants. Le gestionnaire d'événement attribue les rôles des participants lors de la configuration de l'événement. Remarque : Les rôles des participants apparaissent dans la colonne Rôle de la liste Mon planning d'événements du gestionnaire. Les rôles et autorisations suivants peuvent être attribués aux participants : Invité Personnes ayant reçu une invitation à l'événement et qui sont invités à s'inscrire. Refusé Toute personne s'étant inscrite, mais à laquelle l'hôte a refusé l'accès à l'événement. En attente d'autorisation Personne dont l'inscription n'a pas encore été approuvée par le gestionnaire d'événements. Participant Personnes assistant à l'événement comme invités ou utilisateurs enregistrés de votre société. Leurs autorisations sont limitées. Présentateur Individu présentant le contenu aux personnes présentes. Les présentateurs se voient attribuer des autorisations Présentateur. Hôte Personne disposant d'un contrôle complet sur la salle de réunion ou de séminaire utilisée pour l'événement. L'hôte bénéficie de toutes les autorisations Présentateur et Gestion et peut attribuer des autorisations aux autres. Remarque : Les rôles Présentateur et Hôte ne sont utilisés que pour des événements qui ont lieu en direct (réunions et séminaires). Pour tous les autres événements, seuls les rôles Participant, Invité et Accès refusé sont utilisés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 125 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Les autorisations associées à la bibliothèque d'événements permettent de désigner les utilisateurs habilités à créer et modifier les événements et exécuter les tâches associées aux fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque d'événements, comme par exemple l'ajout et la suppression de fichiers. Les autorisations de gestion des fichiers sont Gérer et Accès refusé. 4. Inscrivez et approuvez des participants. Une inscription est requise pour tous les événements, mais pas nécessairement une autorisation. Par défaut, un événement ne requiert aucune autorisation mais vous pouvez modifier ce paramètre au moment de sa création. Si aucune autorisation n'est requise, toute personne s'inscrivant est automatiquement autorisée à assister à l'événement, sous réserve que vous possédiez le nombre de licences suffisant. (En tant qu'hôte d'événement, vous avez toujours la possibilité de refuser l'autorisation à toute personne avant le début de l'événement.) Exiger une autorisation vous permet de contrôler les personnes assistant à l'événement. Voir aussi « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 Tâches intra-événement Les principales tâches qu'implique la création d'un événement sont exécutées lors de la création du contenu et des étapes préalables à l'événement. Si le contenu approprié existe et que vous avez accompli toutes les tâches préparatoires, l'événement devrait se dérouler sans problèmes. Cependant, certaines tâches doivent être complétées pendant un événement, en particulier si ce dernier se déroule en direct. Evénements à la demande en différé Evénements qui ne se déroulent pas en temps réel. Les participants cliquent sur un lien pour consulter une présentation ou bien un cours ou un curriculum adapté au rythme de chacun. Pour avertir les participants potentiels de l'événement, envoyez-leur une invitation par message électronique ou publiez l'événement dans la page contenant la liste des événements publics, sur le site Web de votre société. Ces deux méthodes d'information contiennent un lien qui ouvre un formulaire d'inscription pour l'événement. Dans la plupart des cas, les événements qui ne se produisent pas en direct ne demandent aucune tâche pendant leur déroulement. Evénements en direct Evénements planifiés et se déroulant en temps réel. Pendant l'événement, vous devrez peut-être assurer la coordination des différents présentateurs ou accepter des participants. Voir aussi « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 Tâches postérieures à l'événement Au terme d'un événement, plusieurs tâches et activités administratives doivent être menées à bien. Remercier les participants Envoyez un message de remerciement aux participants. Envisagez également d'envoyer un message électronique aux personnes qui n'ont pu participer. Créer une URL d'après-événement Dirigez les navigateurs des personnes présentes vers une URL d'après-événement où ils pourront consulter les informations relatives au produit et répondre à des enquêtes. Vous pouvez personnaliser les messages de relance des absents et de remerciement de manière à y inclure cette URL.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 126 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Lire les rapports Consultez les rapports d'événement afin d'obtenir des données statistiques et des informations sur les participants. Ces rapports vous permettent d'évaluer le succès d'un événement et d'apporter les améliorations nécessaires pour les futurs événements. Afficher le tableau de bord des événements Examinez le tableau de bord des événements afin d'obtenir une représentation graphique des données statistiques relatives à tous vos événements. Les données du tableau reflètent tous les événements de votre dossier Mes événements. Vérifier la bibliothèque Classez les fichiers d'événement dans votre bibliothèque. Voir aussi « Tâches préalables à l'événement » à la page 124 « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 Recommandations relatives aux événements Voici quelques conseils et astuces que vous pouvez utiliser pour vos propres événements : • Créez une salle d'attente. Cette salle d'attente peut être un module de conversation où les participants se rencontrent et s'accueillent les uns les autres avant le début de l'événement. • Utilisez des animations PowerPoint. L'utilisation adéquate d'animations PowerPoint peut donner vie à un événement grâce à des images et du son. Cependant, n'en abusez pas car les animations peuvent devenir une distraction. • Intégrez des sondages dans votre événement. Grâce à ces commentaires instantanés, vous saurez si votre message est passé tout en donnant l'occasion à votre public de participer activement à l'événement. • Tirez parti des vidéos. Si vous disposez de fichiers vidéo appropriés, ajoutez-les à vos événements. • Coordonnez soigneusement les différents présentateurs. Vous pouvez créer une zone réservée aux présentateurs, en incluant des éléments tels qu'un ordre du jour avec notes et Q & R modérées, sans conversation parmi les participants. Envisagez d'accorder aux présentateurs des « droits de participant améliorés » plutôt que des « droits de présentateur ». • Lorsque le contenu est pré-chargé, faites un essai avant l'événement, à l'heure même à laquelle l'événement est prévu (le trafic réseau varie selon les moments de la journée). Servez-vous exactement des mêmes connexions réseau et du matériel que vous envisagez d'utiliser pour le véritable événement. Voir aussi « Présentation des événements » à la page 123 « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 Création et modification des événements Création d'un événement Pour créer un événement, utilisez l'Assistant de création d'événements qui vous guidera tout au long des différentes tâches : création d'un nom et d'un résumé, sélection d'une image à associer à votre événement, choix du contenu, identification des participants et définition des différentes phases de votre événement au cours desquelles des messages électroniques sont envoyés aux participants.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 127 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Les événements se composent de contenu, par exemple d'un cours ou d'un curriculum, d'une réunion ou d'un séminaire. Autrement dit, le contenu doit déjà exister dans la bibliothèque appropriée avant la création de l'événement ; vous ne pouvez pas le créer au moment de la création de l'événement. Vous pouvez utiliser tout fichier stocké dans vos bibliothèques de contenu, de réunions, de formations ou de séminaires. 1. Ouverture de l'Assistant de création d'événements Pour lancer l'Assistant Événement, cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements dans Connect Pro Central, localisez le dossier contenant l'événement, puis cliquez sur Nouvel événement. 2. Saisie des informations sur l'événement La première page de l'Assistant de création d'événements permet de saisir des informations sur l'événement, par exemple un nom et des informations détaillés. (Le nom de l'événement, le fuseau horaire et la langue sont obligatoires ; les autres champs sont facultatifs.) Ces informations peuvent être modifiées après la création de l'événement. Remarque : Si vous repoussez le début de l'événement à une date ultérieure, les participants et les présentateurs auront malgré tout accès à la salle de réunion. 3. Sélection du contenu Le contenu d'un événement doit exister avant la création de l'événement. Une fois le type de contenu sélectionné, vous ne pouvez plus le modifier. Vous pouvez cependant le remplacer par un contenu du même type. Par exemple, si vous créez un événement à partir d'un séminaire, vous pouvez ensuite remplacer le séminaire choisi à la création de l'événement par un autre. 4. Création d'une inscription Vous choisissez les questions auxquelles les participants doivent répondre dans le formulaire d'inscription. Ces informations permettent de créer un profil d'invité et de suivre le participant. Quatre champs, présélectionnés sur le formulaire Créer une inscription, sont obligatoires : Adresse de messagerie, Mot de passe, Confirmer le mot de passe et Nom. Vous pouvez sélectionner les autres questions à votre convenance. Lorsque des événements incluent des invités externes (par exemple, des personnes ayant trouvé votre liste d'événements sur le site Web public de la société), il est conseillé d'obtenir le nom et l'URL de la société à des fins de vérification. Par exemple, si le candidat travaille pour un concurrent, vous pouvez lui refuser l'accès à l'événement. Sélectionnez l'option Activer le suivi de campagne pour faire état des inscriptions par source de campagne. 5. Configuration de l'inscription Pour concevoir une page d'inscription à un événement, un grand nombre de possibilités s'offrent à vous, y compris des questions personnalisées de type choix multiples, réponse abrégée ou oui/non. Vous pouvez également modifier l'ordre des questions et en supprimer à tout moment. 6. Sélection des participants à un événement Dans le cas d'un événement réservé aux invités enregistrés et aux utilisateurs autorisés, sélectionnez les participants et les présentateurs parmi les utilisateurs et les groupes. Ces utilisateurs pourront se connecter directement à l'événement. Les utilisateurs non conviés qui possèdent l'URL de la salle de réunion de l'événement peuvent tenter de se connecter comme visiteurs. Dans ce cas, en tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez les accepter individuellement en qualité d'invités. 7. Options de messagerie La dernière étape de l'Assistant de création d'événements consiste à envoyer des invitations électroniques aux participants afin de les informer de la date, de l'heure, de la durée et de l'URL de l'événement. Vous pouvez envoyer des invitations lorsque vous créez l'événement ou créer les invitations et les envoyer ultérieurement. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 128 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 « Utilisation du suivi de campagne avec un événement » à la page 139 Aperçu et modification des pages d'inscription et d'événement Vous pouvez prévisualiser les pages d'inscription et d'événement, les modifier (par exemple, en changeant leurs logos) et les rendre publiques. Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 Aperçu d'une page d'inscription ou d'événement 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez l'événement et cliquez sur son nom dans la liste. 3 A côté de Affichage des participants, sélectionnez la page dont vous souhaitez un aperçu : • Cliquez sur Prévisualiser les informations d'événement, pages de connexion et d'inscription. • Cliquez sur Prévisualiser la page de la liste des événements. 4 Cliquez sur l'élément voulu. Rendre publics un dossier et une page de liste d'événements La page de liste d'événements, qui peut être spécialement conçue à l'image de votre société, présente la liste de tous les événements à venir en indiquant les éléments suivants pour chacun d'eux : • Logo de l'événement • Nom de l'événement • Description (contenu des informations sur l'événement) • Un bouton S'inscrire maintenant, qui dirige l'utilisateur vers un formulaire d'inscription • Un bouton Plus d'infos..., qui dirige l'utilisateur vers la page d'informations sur l'événement ; elle comporte le contenu des informations détaillées Tous les événements d'un même dossier s'affichent dans une seule page de liste. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les événements hébergés par votre société, puis rendre ce dossier public pour permettre aux utilisateurs de parcourir les listes d'événements et découvrir les séminaires à venir. Pour créer plusieurs pages de liste d'événements, il vous suffit de créer plusieurs dossiers. Vous pouvez créer des dossiers publics ou privés contenant des événements. Lorsqu'une page de liste d'événements est publique, tout le monde peut la consulter depuis les pages publiques hébergées. Une page de liste d'événements privée ne peut être consultée publiquement ; l'utilisateur doit posséder des autorisations de connexion pour ce faire. Par défaut, les pages de liste d'événements sont privées, mais vous pouvez les rendre publiques. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 129 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 3 Cliquez sur Rendre ce dossier public. Le dossier est désormais public et une URL est indiquée. Vous pouvez rendre l'URL accessible et permettre ainsi à tout le monde de consulter la page de liste d'événements depuis les pages publiques hébergées. Aperçu de la page de liste d'événements d'un dossier spécifique 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant les événements dont vous souhaitez consulter la page de liste. 3 Au besoin, rendez le dossier public. Le bouton situé au-dessus de la liste des dossiers et des événements permet de basculer entre une définition privée et publique. Si le bouton indique Rendre ce dossier public, cliquez sur son entrée. 4 Cliquez sur l'URL de la liste des événements publics de ce dossier. Les informations sur l'événement s'affichent exactement telles qu'elles apparaîtront sur la page de liste d'événements. 5 Pour fermer la fenêtre d'aperçu, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer dans le coin supérieur droit. Remarque : Après avoir prévisualisé la page, n'oubliez pas de rendre ce dossier à nouveau privé si vous voulez qu'il ne soit plus public. Aperçu de la liste d'événements pour un événement unique 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez l'événement et cliquez sur son nom. 3 Cliquez sur Prévisualiser la page de la liste des événements en regard de l'option Affichage des participants. Les informations sur l'événement s'affichent exactement telles qu'elles apparaîtront sur la page de liste d'événements. 4 Pour fermer la fenêtre d'aperçu, cliquez sur le bouton Fermer dans le coin supérieur droit. Modification du logo associé à l'événement 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez l'événement et cliquez sur son nom. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos situé au-dessus de la barre de titre. • Cliquez sur le lien Modifier dans la barre de titre. 4 Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver un nouveau fichier image pour l'événement. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier image et cliquez sur Ouvrir. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Publication des événements La publication d'un événement entraîne les conséquences suivantes : • Toutes les options de messagerie électronique sélectionnées deviennent actives. Par exemple, si vous avez sélectionné la première option, Envoyer des invitations par email, ces dernières sont envoyées automatiquement et vous n'avez plus la possibilité de les personnaliser. Vous pouvez cependant toujours personnaliser tous les autres messages électroniques sélectionnés. Vous pouvez également modifier le texte de l'invitation et inviter d'autres personnes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 130 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events • Le formulaire d'inscription, ainsi que l'URL qui lui est associée, deviennent disponibles et les éventuels participants peuvent commencer à s'inscrire à votre événement. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez l'événement et cliquez sur son nom dans la liste. La page d'informations sur l'événement s'affiche. Le message suivant apparaît à côté de l'Etat : « Cet événement n'a pas été publié et n'apparaît pas dans votre site. Les courriers électroniques n'ont pas été envoyés. » 3 Cliquez sur Publier. Un message de confirmation s'affiche : « La publication de cet événement va entraîner l'envoi d'un e-mail en fonction de vos options e-mails sélectionnées ». 4 Cliquez de nouveau sur Publier. La page d'informations sur l'événement présente le message d'état suivant : « Cet événement a été publié. Les options e-mails sont actives. » Le bouton Publier disparaît. Voir aussi « Envoi d'invitations à un événement » à la page 138 « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 Modification d'un événement existant Avant qu'un événement ait lieu, vous pouvez modifier son heure de début, les autorisations des participants ou apporter d'autres modifications. Vérifiez régulièrement la liste des Participants actuels afin de vous assurer que vous disposez de suffisamment de licences pour le nombre de participants prévus et qu'ils répondent tous aux critères d'autorisation. Vérifiez également les rapports d'enregistrement les plus récents qui vous donnent des informations sur vos participants et vos invités. Si vous avez sélectionné ou personnalisé des questions pour identifier des participants potentiels, vous pouvez également consulter leurs réponses. Voir aussi « Affichage des informations sur un événement » à la page 141 « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 Notification d'une modification aux utilisateurs Si vous modifiez un événement existant, par exemple son heure de début, vous pouvez aisément avertir les utilisateurs par message électronique. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de l'événement à modifier. 4 Ouvrez la page Options de messagerie et activez l'option Afficher un rappel lorsqu'une mise à jour doit être envoyée. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Ouvrez la page d'informations sur l'événement et faites-la défiler jusqu'au champ Etat. 7 Cliquez sur Modifier/Envoyer des notifications, effectuez les modifications nécessaires puis cliquez sur Envoyer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 131 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Modification des informations sur l'événement Vous pouvez modifier le texte de la page d'informations sur l'événement destinée aux participants. Si vous sélectionnez l'option de messagerie « Informer les utilisateurs de la mise à jour d'un événement », tous les invités précédemment informés de l'événement reçoivent automatiquement les informations mises à jour. Remarque : Si vous avez envoyé des invitations sans sélectionner l'option « Informer les utilisateurs de la mise à jour d'un événement », vous devriez le faire avant de modifier les informations du profil, de sorte que les éventuels participants soient informés de vos changements. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur le nom de l'événement à modifier. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le lien Modifier accolé aux informations relatives à l'événement. • Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 5 Effectuez l'une des modifications suivantes : • Modifiez le nom de l'événement. Le nom s'affiche dans la liste des événements et dans les rapports. Ce champ est obligatoire. • Modifiez les informations sur l'événement. Ces informations peuvent compter jusqu'à 750 caractères. Elles apparaissent sur la page Informations sur l'événement et dans les rapports d'événements. • Modifiez les informations détaillées relatives à l'événement (1 000 caractères maximum). • Modifiez l'heure de début ou de fin de l'événement. • Modifiez le fuseau horaire de l'événement. • Modifiez les informations du logo. Le fichier du logo peut être au format BMP, GIF, JPG ou PNG. La taille la plus appropriée est 100x135 pixels. • Modifiez la langue de l'événement. La langue sélectionnée correspond généralement à celle du présentateur ou de la majorité des participants. • Modifiez la stratégie d'événements utilisateur pour ajouter de nouveaux utilisateurs en tant qu'invités ou utilisateurs Connect Pro complets. • Modifiez l'option d'approbation des participants après leur inscription à l'événement. (Il est en général préférable de conserver cette option sélectionnée, car elle vous permet de contrôler l'accès des utilisateurs à l'événement.) 6 Enregistrez vos modifications de l'une des manières suivantes : • Cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Cliquez sur Enregistrer et recréer. (Cette option reconstruit les pages HTML si vous utilisez Adobe Contribute® pour créer les pages.) Modification des questions d'inscription Vous pouvez modifier toutes les questions d'inscription, excepté les questions obligatoires (nom, prénom, adresse électronique et mot de passe) que le système utilise pour valider un utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement à modifier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 132 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 4 Cliquez sur Questions relatives à l'inscription. 5 Modifiez les questions d'inscription : • Pour ajouter une question à la page d'inscription, activez la case à cocher située à sa gauche, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour retirer une question de la page d'inscription, désactivez la case à cocher située à sa gauche, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Pour modifier, supprimer ou ajouter des questions personnalisées, cliquez sur Personnaliser. • Pour modifier l'ordre des questions dans la liste, activez la case à cocher située à gauche de la question, puis cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. • Pour supprimer une question, activez la case à cocher située à sa gauche, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour modifier une question personnalisée, cliquez sur son texte dans la fenêtre Personnaliser. • Pour ajouter une question, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant au type de question personnalisée à ajouter : Nouveau choix multiple, Nouvelle réponse abrégée ou Nouveau Oui/Non. 7 Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Retour au menu Inscription. Ajout d'une question à choix multiples 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement à modifier. 4 Cliquez sur Questions relatives à l'inscription. 5 Cliquez sur Personnaliser. 6 Cliquez sur Nouveau choix multiple. 7 Dans la fenêtre Question, saisissez une question dans la zone de texte. 8 Indiquez une réponse éventuelle pour Réponse 1. A tout moment, vous pouvez supprimer une réponse en cliquant sur le bouton Supprimer qui lui est accolé. 9 Cliquez sur les boutons Ajouter au-dessus ou Ajouter en-dessous pour ajouter une autre réponse au-dessus ou endessous de la Réponse 1 ; si vous cliquez sur Ajouter au-dessus, la Réponse 1 devient la Réponse 2. 10 Indiquez une autre réponse possible. 11 Recommencez la procédure pour 4 réponses maximum. 12 Pour obliger les utilisateurs à répondre, sélectionnez l'option Réponse obligatoire. 13 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. La fenêtre Personnaliser l'inscription qui s'affiche contient votre nouvelle question. Ajout d'une question à réponse abrégée 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement à modifier. 4 Cliquez sur Questions relatives à l'inscription. 5 Cliquez sur Personnaliser. 6 Cliquez sur Nouvelle réponse abrégée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 133 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 7 Saisissez une question dans la zone de texte. 8 Pour obliger les utilisateurs à répondre, sélectionnez l'option Réponse obligatoire. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. La fenêtre Personnaliser l'inscription qui s'affiche contient votre nouvelle question. Ajout d'une question Oui/Non 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement à modifier. 4 Cliquez sur Questions relatives à l'inscription. 5 Cliquez sur Personnaliser. 6 Cliquez sur Nouveau Oui/Non. 7 Saisissez une question dans la zone de texte. 8 Pour obliger les utilisateurs à répondre, sélectionnez l'option Réponse obligatoire. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. La fenêtre Personnaliser l'inscription qui s'affiche contient votre nouvelle question. Modification du contenu d'un événement Vous pouvez uniquement remplacer le contenu d'un événement par un contenu de même type, par exemple remplacer une réunion par une autre réunion. Vous ne pouvez pas ajouter de nouveau contenu dans la bibliothèque de contenu depuis cet emplacement, mais uniquement sélectionner du contenu existant pour votre événement. Par ailleurs, si vous avez acheté Adobe Presenter, vous pouvez publier des présentations depuis PowerPoint dans la bibliothèque de contenu pour votre événement. Si vous prévoyez d'utiliser une présentation existante pour un événement, publiez à nouveau la présentation PowerPoint dans un dossier de la bibliothèque de contenu différent du dossier qui contient la présentation d'origine. Dans le cas contraire, les informations des rapports pour la présentation d'origine sont fusionnées avec les données de rapport spécifiques aux événements, et toutes les données spécifiques aux événements sont transférées vers les rapports ultérieurs de la présentation d'origine. Remarque : Pour tout contenu autre que les cours et les curriculums, le système ne recherche que la consultation de l'événement par l'utilisateur. Par exemple, les utilisateurs qui n'ont affiché que la première diapositive d'une présentation sont considérés comme ayant tout de même assisté à l'événement. A l'inverse, les utilisateurs qui n'affichent que quelques diapositives d'un cours ou d'un curriculum ne sont pas considérés comme y ayant assisté. Les utilisateurs doivent terminer et renvoyer le cours pour apparaître dans le rapport comme participants. (Vous pouvez également voir les informations d'heures d'entrée et de sortie en affichant le rapport Par participant.) 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement à modifier. 4 Dans la partie supérieure de la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur le lien Sélectionner le contenu. 5 Si le contenu désiré ne figure pas dans la liste, naviguez jusqu'au fichier ou dossier qui le contient : • Cliquez sur le lien approprié dans la partie supérieure de l'onglet (par exemple, Contenu utilisateur partagé si vous remplacez du contenu). • Localisez le dossier ou fichier qui vous intéresse, puis sélectionnez la case située à sa gauche ou cliquez dessus. Si vous vous trouvez dans la bibliothèque de contenu, cliquez sur Monter d'un niveau pour passer au répertoire supérieur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 134 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modification des options de messagerie d'un événement Vous pouvez modifier les options de messagerie de toutes les notifications, rappels ou messages de suivi électroniques avant de les envoyer. (Certains messages sont sélectionnés par défaut.) Vous pouvez personnaliser un message. Plusieurs types de messages vous permettent de joindre une entrée de calendrier Microsoft Outlook (iCal) pour mettre à jour le calendrier Outlook du destinataire. Si vous personnalisez un formulaire de message électronique, vous pouvez constater que le corps du message contient plusieurs champs entre accolades ({}). Dans la mesure du possible, évitez de modifier ces champs, sauf si vous avez une bonne raison de le faire. Les accolades contiennent des variables que le système remplace par des valeurs réelles, spécifiques à votre événement. Par exemple, le champ event-time affichera l'heure de début que vous aurez indiquée. Si vous souhaitez modifier cette heure dans le message électronique, par exemple l'avancer de 15 minutes pour être certain que le véritable événement commence à l'heure, entrez manuellement une nouvelle heure dans le champ de rapport événement/heure. Remarque : Si vous choisissez d'ajouter l'un des champs à insertion automatique supplémentaires au message électronique, notez que {adresse messagerie_utilisateur} correspond à l'adresse de messagerie du responsable de l'événement, pas des participants invités. Pour l'ID de connexion du destinataire dans la notification d'événement, utilisez le champ {connexion}. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Options e-mail dans la partie supérieure de l'onglet Evénements. Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Activez la case à cocher située à gauche des messages à envoyer. • Désélectionnez tous les messages électroniques que vous ne souhaitez pas envoyer. • Cliquez sur Personnaliser en regard de tous les messages à modifier. Par exemple, vous pouvez remplacer le nom de l'auteur par le nom de l'hôte, ou l'heure par l'heure GMT (méridien de Greenwich). (Vous pouvez modifier les messages, mais aucun des éléments entre accolades ({}) dans la page Modifier e-mail). 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos modifications ou sur Annuler pour fermer le formulaire. Modification de la liste de diffusion Vous pouvez ajouter et supprimer des utilisateurs, des groupes et des invités de la liste de diffusion. Remarque : Chaque fois que vous créez un événement, le système crée un groupe nommé d'après cet événement et y place les utilisateurs invités. Il est ainsi très simple d'inviter les mêmes personnes à un événement de suivi : sélectionnez simplement le groupe de l'événement précédent dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’au dossier désiré. 3 Cliquez sur l'événement. 4 Cliquez sur Gestion des participants. 5 Modifiez les utilisateurs ou les invités : • Cliquez sur Ajouter un invité et saisissez ou collez les adresses de messagerie de tous vos invités ; séparez les différentes adresses par des virgules.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 135 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events • Cliquez sur Ajouter un utilisateur/groupe et, dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles, sélectionnez les utilisateurs et/ou les groupes que vous souhaitez inviter. • Cliquez sur Groupes d'inscription et, dans la liste des Groupes potentiels, sélectionnez les groupes que vous souhaitez inviter. (Pour sélectionner des groupes d'inscription à un événement, vous devez être administrateur du compte). • Cliquez sur Importer/Exporter la liste, puis sur Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu'à un fichier CSV (valeurs séparées par des virgules). • Cliquez sur Modifier/Envoyer des invitations pour personnaliser et envoyer l'invitation à l'événement. (Vous pouvez modifier l'invitation, mais ne touchez pas aux éléments placés entre accolades ({}) dans le corps du message.) Remarque : Si vous choisissez d'ajouter l'un des champs à insertion automatique supplémentaires au message électronique, notez que {adresse messagerie_utilisateur} correspond à l'adresse de messagerie du responsable de l'événement, pas des participants invités. Pour l'ID de connexion du destinataire dans la notification d'événement, utilisez le champ {connexion}. Conseils pour la création de listes de diffusion d'un événement Lorsque vous créez des listes de diffusion, tenez compte des remarques suivantes : • Un invité est un utilisateur Connect Pro disposant d'un accès limité. Les invités ne peuvent participer aux événements que s'ils y ont été acceptés. De même, les invités ne peuvent pas se connecter à Connect Pro Central. • Un utilisateur est un utilisateur Connect Pro qui possède un compte Connect Pro dans votre société. Remarque : Avant d'envoyer des invitations, vérifiez le nombre de licences disponibles auprès de votre administrateur Connect Pro Central. Si vous ne disposez pas de suffisamment de licences pour le nombre de personnes inscrites à l'événement, certains participants ne pourront pas y accéder lors de leur tentative de connexion. Pour un nombre d'invités limité, vous pouvez saisir ou copier/coller leur adresses de messagerie à l'aide de la fonction Ajouter un invité. Pour un nombre d'invités plus important, de l'ordre d'une centaine ou d'un millier, vous pouvez importer un fichier CSV d'utilisateurs. Si vous invitez des utilisateurs Connect Pro, vous pouvez utiliser la page Sélectionner les participants pour ajouter des utilisateurs à la liste d'invitations de l'événement et leur attribuer des autorisations. Enfin, une fois la liste créée, vous pouvez envoyer les invitations contenant un message par défaut ou bien des invitations personnalisées. Voir aussi « Ajout de participants à un événement à l'aide d'un fichier CSV » à la page 137 « Recommandations relatives aux événements » à la page 126 Ajout et gestion des participants à l'événement L'administrateur ou le présentateur de l'événement peut ajouter ou supprimer des participants à l'événement ; ils sont également en mesure de modifier les paramètres d'autorisation des participants ou des présentateurs. Vous pouvez ajouter des participants à un événement à tout moment après sa création. Les participants peuvent être ajoutés comme invités, utilisateurs ou groupes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 136 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Affichage des informations sur un événement » à la page 141 Ajout d'invités 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation. 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter un invité. 5 Dans la zone de texte, entrez ou collez les adresses de messagerie des personnes à inviter. (Adresses électroniques séparées par des virgules.) 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout de participants 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation. 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter un utilisateur/groupe. 5 Dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles, sélectionnez un utilisateur ou un groupe et cliquez sur Ajouter. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur le bouton Rechercher pour rechercher un utilisateur ou un groupe non affiché. A mesure que vous ajoutez des utilisateurs et des groupes, la liste Participants actuels située à droite se met à jour et reflète vos modifications. Remarque : Chaque fois que vous créez un événement, le système crée un groupe nommé d'après cet événement et y place les utilisateurs invités. Il est ainsi très simple d'inviter les mêmes personnes à un événement de suivi : sélectionnez simplement le groupe de l'événement précédent dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 6 Une fois terminé, cliquez sur OK. Retrait de participants à un événement 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation. 4 Sélectionnez les groupes ou les utilisateurs à supprimer dans la liste des participants. 5 Cliquez sur Supprimer. Remarque : Les participants retirés de l'événement ne reçoivent pas d'invitation et ne peuvent accéder à l'événement, sauf si l'accès à l'événement est modifié et défini sur l'option Tout le monde. Modification des autorisations d'accès des participants à l'événement 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 137 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 4 Dans la liste des Utilisateurs et Groupes, sélectionnez l'utilisateur ou le groupe dont vous souhaitez modifier l'autorisation. 5 Cliquez sur Définir un rôle utilisateur et, dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez le nouveau type d'autorisation à affecter. Les types d'autorisations disponibles sont : Refusé, Invité, Autorisation en attente, Participant, Présentateur et Hôte. (Présentateur et Hôte ne sont disponibles que si l'événement est une réunion ou un séminaire.) Désignation d'un groupe pour les personnes inscrites approuvées Vous pouvez désigner un groupe auquel les personnes inscrites sont automatiquement affectées lorsqu'elles sont acceptées pour l'événement. Cette option est très utile si vous souhaitez créer un événement de suivi car tous les participants enregistrés sont réunis dans un seul groupe. Remarque : Pour sélectionner des groupes d'inscription à un événement, vous devez être administrateur du compte. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des participants. 4 Cliquez sur Groupes d'inscription. 5 Dans la liste Groupes potentiels, sélectionnez un groupe et cliquez sur Ajouter. Les noms des groupe sélectionnés apparaissent dans la liste Appartenance actuelle aux groupes. Conversion d'invités en utilisateurs complets Si vous êtes Administrateur, vous pouvez convertir les invités existants en utilisateurs complets. Cette distinction est importante car seuls les utilisateurs complets peuvent se connecter au site d'administration de Connect Pro Central, et non les invités. Les utilisateurs complets apparaissent également dans les listes d'autorisation et d'inscription. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans Connect Pro Central. 2 Sélectionnez Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Gérer les invités. 4 Dans la liste Invités actuels, sélectionnez un invité. 5 Cliquez sur Convertir en utilisateur. A l'inverse, si vous souhaitez transformer un utilisateur complet en invité, sélectionnez-le dans la liste Utilisateurs actuels, puis cliquez sur Convertir en invité. Ajout de participants à un événement à l'aide d'un fichier CSV Si vous disposez d'un fichier CSV contenant des noms et des adresses de messagerie, vous pouvez l'importer pour ajouter des participants à un événement. Lorsque vous importez un fichier CSV, tenez compte des conseils suivants : • Le fichier ne doit pas contenir de lignes vides. Si le fichier CSV contient des lignes vides, l'importation échoue. • Les noms qui contiennent une virgule doivent être placés entre guillemets. Par exemple, le nom John Doe, Jr., doit apparaître dans le fichier CSV sous la forme “John Doe, Jr.” pour que le fichier soit correctement importé. • N'insérez pas de ligne d'en-tête dans le fichier CSV. • Le fichier CSV doit contenir, au minimum, des colonnes pour le prénom, le nom et l'adresse électronique. Par exemple :UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 138 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Remarque : Les utilisateurs invités qui ont été importés dans un fichier CSV dans Connect Enterprise 5.1 (Breeze 5.1) ne présentent pas de colonnes de nom et prénom, mais une seule colonne de nom et sont donc exportés avec le nom complet dans la colonne prénom ; la colonne du nom reste vide. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation. 4 Cliquez sur Importer/Exporter la liste. 5 Cliquez sur Parcourir pour naviguer vers le dossier CSV désiré. 6 Cliquez sur Transférer. Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 Envoi d'invitations à un événement En tant qu'administrateur, hôte d'événements ou utilisateur autorisé à gérer le dossier concerné dans la bibliothèque d'événements, vous pouvez envoyer des invitations à un événement. Ces invitations sont des messages électroniques transmis aux participants à l'événement pour les informer de la date, de l'heure, de la durée et de l'URL de l'événement. Le type d'événement définit la méthode d'envoi des invitations. Réservé exclusivement aux invités Si votre événement est réservé aux utilisateurs enregistrés, il vous suffit de créer un message électronique personnalisé dans Connect Pro Central. Vous avez le choix entre envoyer un message électronique à tous les participants et présentateurs inscrits ou l'envoyer à une seule de ces catégories : les présentateurs ou les participants. L'objet et le contenu du message sont tous les deux personnalisables. Vous pouvez également y joindre un fichier Microsoft Outlook Calendar iCal pour que les participants puissent ajouter l'événement dans leur calendrier Outlook. Tout le monde Si l'accès à votre événement est libre à toutes les personnes recevant l'URL pour s'y rendre, vous pouvez créer un nouveau courrier dans votre client de messagerie électronique par défaut. Ce message comporte un objet prédéfini et un texte déjà rédigé (contenant la date, l'heure, la durée, l'emplacement et le résumé de l'événement) modifiables à votre convenance. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des participants dans la barre de navigation. 4 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur Modifier/Envoyer des invitations. 5 (Facultatif) Pour envoyer une copie cachée de l'invitation à d'autres personnes, ajoutez leurs adresses de messagerie dans la zone de texte Destinataires Cci. Cela peut se révéler très utile si, par exemple, vous souhaitez que vos collègues sachent que vous avez envoyé l'invitation. Michael Betts mbetts@masociété.com Rachel Blatt rblatt@masociété.com Rebecca Bloom rbloom@masociété.com Charles Bond cbond@masociété.com Paul Davis pdavis@masociété.comUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 139 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 6 Modifiez l'objet et le contenu du message. Si vous modifiez le texte, notez la présence de plusieurs champs avec accolades ({}). Dans la mesure du possible, évitez de modifier ces champs, sauf si vous avez une bonne raison de le faire. Les accolades contiennent des variables que le système remplace par des valeurs réelles, spécifiques à votre événement. Remarque : Si vous choisissez d'ajouter l'un des champs à insertion automatique supplémentaires au message électronique, notez que {adresse messagerie_utilisateur} correspond à l'adresse de messagerie du responsable de l'événement, pas des participants invités. Pour l'ID de connexion du destinataire dans la notification d'événement, utilisez le champ {connexion}. 7 Pour joindre un fichier iCal, activez la case à cocher en regard de l'option Joindre un événement de calendrier Microsoft Outlook (iCal) au message. 8 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Aperçu et modification des pages d'inscription et d'événement » à la page 128 Utilisation du suivi de campagne avec un événement L'option de suivi de campagne permet d'effectuer le suivi des utilisateurs enregistrés en fonction de la source de campagne. Les rapports sur la participation et les inscriptions aux événements énumèrent les sources de campagne et les noms d'utilisateurs. Les campagnes courantes incluent des offres par messages électroniques, des campagnes de moteurs de recherche ou des campagnes de bannières publicitaires. Pour effectuer le suivi des campagnes, modifiez manuellement l'URL d'inscription fournie automatiquement. Une méthode d'ajout de suivi de campagne consiste à activer l'option de suivi dans la page Créer une inscription lors de la création d'un nouvel événement. Vous pouvez également ajouter un suivi de campagne à un événement existant si vous n'avez pas encore publié l'événement ni envoyé d'invitations. (Si vous activez l'option de suivi de campagne après la publication de l'événement et l'envoi des invitations, tous les invités déjà inscrits via l'URL d'inscription envoyée dans votre première invitation ne seront pas inclus dans le suivi.) Remarque : Pour effectuer le suivi d'une campagne, modifiez l'URL d'inscription à l'événement. Gardez à l'esprit que vous ne pouvez pas modifier cette URL pour la page de la liste des événements et pour la page Informations sur l'événement. Si vous souhaitez utiliser la page de la liste des événements ou la page Informations sur l'événement, vous ne pouvez pas effectuer le suivi d'une campagne. Voir aussi « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Aperçu et modification des pages d'inscription et d'événement » à la page 128 Ajout d'un suivi de campagne à un événement existant 1 Ouvrez Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements. 2 Sélectionnez l'événement. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Questions relatives à l'inscription. 4 Sélectionnez l'option Activer le suivi de campagne.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 140 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout d'un paramètre d'ID de campagne et d'un identifiant 1 Ouvrez Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements. 2 Sélectionnez l'événement pour afficher la page Informations sur l'événement. 3 Cliquez sur le lien « Prévisualiser les informations d'événement, pages de connexion et d'inscription ». 4 Sélectionnez et copiez l'URL d'inscription accolée au « Formulaire d'inscription ». Par exemple, http://nom.serveur.com/primetimeevent/event/registration.html. 5 Ouvrez une application de traitement de texte, par exemple le Bloc-notes ou Wordpad, et collez l'URL d'inscription. 6 Dans l'application de traitement de texte, placez le curseur à la fin de l'URL et tapez ?campaign-id= (par exemple, http://nom.serveur.com/primetimeevent/event/registration.html?campaign-id=). 7 A la fin de la nouvelle URL d'inscription à l'événement, ajoutez un ID de suivi de campagne. L'ID est un identifiant unique associé à votre campagne et peut correspondre à n'importe quelle valeur alphanumérique. Par exemple, http://nom.serveur.com/primetimeevent/event/registration.html?campaign-id=email1234 contient l'ID de suivi de campagne valide « email1234 ». 8 Enregistrez le fichier texte et laissez-le ouvert dans l'application de traitement de texte. Test de l'URL avec l'ID de suivi de campagne Pour tester la nouvelle URL, désactivez les invitations électroniques, publiez l'événement, enregistrez-vous à l'événement, puis vérifiez le rapport d'inscription. 1 Ouvrez Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements. 2 Sélectionnez l'événement pour afficher la page Informations sur l'événement. 3 Sélectionnez Options de messagerie. 4 Désactivez l'option Envoyer des invitations à un événement. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Au bas de la page Informations sur l'événement, le message d'état indique « Cet événement n'a pas été publié et n'apparaît pas dans votre site. Les e-mails n'ont pas été envoyés. » Cliquez sur Publier. 7 Un message de confirmation s'affiche. Cliquez de nouveau sur Publier. La page Evénement apparaît et le message d'état indique désormais : « Cet événement a été publié. Les options e-mails sont actives. » 8 Pour tester l'URL d'inscription modifiée, inscrivez-vous à l'événement. Ouvrez un navigateur Web dans une nouvelle fenêtre. 9 Dans l'application de traitement de texte, copiez l'URL d'inscription modifiée (le paramètre d'ID de campagne et l'ID de campagne personnalisé ayant été ajoutés). Collez l'URL dans la nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur Web et appuyez sur Entrée. 10 Dans le formulaire d'inscription, renseignez les champs obligatoires à l'aide de votre nom et de votre adresse de messagerie. 11 Cliquez sur Envoyer. 12 Vérifiez l'arrivée d'un message de confirmation de l'événement dans votre programme de messagerie. 13 Maintenant que vous êtes inscrit(e) à l'événement, votre nom et l'ID de suivi de campagne apparaissent dans les rapports sur les inscriptions. Ouvrez Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements. 14 Sélectionnez l'événement pour afficher la page Informations sur l'événement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 141 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events 15 Sélectionnez Rapports. 16 Cliquez sur Par inscrits. 17 Dans le Rapport sur les inscriptions, cliquez sur Télécharger les données. Dans la feuille de calcul Excel qui s'affiche, vérifiez que le bon numéro d'ID apparaisse dans la colonne ID de suivi de la campagne, à côté de votre nom. Envoi d'invitations aux événements avec l'URL d'inscription appropriée Si vous envoyez les invitations via Connect Pro Central, remplacez manuellement l'URL d'inscription générée automatiquement dans Connect Pro Central par l'URL modifiée. Remarque : Si vous envoyez vos invitations électroniques à l'aide d'un logiciel tiers, assurez-vous d'envoyer à vos invités la nouvelle URL d'inscription modifiée. 1 Ouvrez Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements. 2 Sélectionnez l'événement pour afficher la page Informations sur l'événement. 3 Sélectionnez Options de messagerie. 4 Sélectionnez Envoyer des invitations à un événement. 5 A côté de Envoyer des invitations à un événement, cliquez sur Configurer. 6 Dans le corps du message, remplacez les mots « event-registration-url » du champ à insertion automatique {event-registration-url} par l'URL d'inscription modifiée que vous avez créée. (Vous pouvez couper et coller l'URL dans le logiciel de traitement de texte utilisé pour la modifier.) 7 Indiquez la date et l'heure d'envoi de l'invitation électronique à l'événement. 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 9 Si vous utilisez également l'option Envoyer un rappel aux participants à l'approche de l'événement, cliquez sur Personnaliser à côté de l'option et suivez les instructions de l'étape 6 précédente pour remplacer l'URL d'inscription dans le corps du message. Gestion des événements Affichage des informations sur un événement En tant qu'administrateur, hôte d'événements ou utilisateur autorisé à gérer un dossier spécifique de la bibliothèque d'événements, vous pouvez consulter différents types d'informations sur un événement à partir de l'application Connect Pro Central. Voir aussi « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 « Ajout et gestion des participants à l'événement » à la page 135 Affichage de la liste des participants 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Dans la page Informations sur l'événement, cliquez sur le lien Gestion des participants. Les noms des groupes et des participants inscrits sont affichés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 142 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Affichage de la liste du contenu transféré Vous pouvez afficher la liste de tout le contenu qui a été transféré sur Connect Pro Server. Pour consulter la liste du contenu, vous devez assumer la fonction d'administrateur, d'hôte d'événements ou d'utilisateur autorisé à gérer le dossier concerné dans la bibliothèque d'événements. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le dossier contenant l'événement désiré et sélectionnez-le. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Sélectionner du contenu. La liste de tous les contenus transférés s'affiche. Affichage des données relatives aux événements Le tableau de bord d'événement fournit une représentation graphique des données statistiques relatives aux événements. Pour consulter le tableau de bord, cliquez sur le lien Tableau de bord des événements sous la barre de séparation, en haut de la fenêtre Evénement. Les données reflètent tous les événements contenus dans votre dossier Mes événements et apparaissent dans un graphique à barres montrant les événements les plus actifs ces six derniers mois (déterminés par le nombre de sessions). Vous pouvez cliquer sur tous les événements individuels du graphique pour obtenir des informations plus détaillées sur l'événement. Rapports sur les événements La fonctionnalité Rapports de Connect Pro Central vous permet de créer des rapports présentant des statistiques d'événement sous différentes perspectives. Les rapports d'événements utilisent les définitions suivantes : Invité Nombre de personnes conviées à l'événement. Enregistré Nombre de personnes ayant rempli le formulaire d'inscription et ayant été acceptées par l'hôte de l'événement. En attente Nombre de personnes en attente d'une autorisation à assister à l'événement. Autorisé Nombre de personnes autorisées à assister à l'événement. Ce nombre inclut les personnes ayant rempli le formulaire d'inscription et dont l'inscription a été acceptée. Il inclut également les personnes directement autorisées, comme par exemple les présentateurs d'événement qui n'ont pas besoin de s'inscrire. Refusé Nombre de personnes ayant rempli le formulaire d'inscription mais dont l'inscription a été refusée. Par exemple, cela peut être le cas si l'URL d'inscription est rendue publique sur un site Web ou par courrier électronique et que les personnes s'inscrivent à l'événement par erreur. Présents Nombre de personnes ayant participé à l'événement. Voir aussi « A propos des rapports Connect Pro Central » à la page 217UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 143 Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Events Participation aux événements Connect Pro La participation à un événement Connect Pro est semblable à la participation à une réunion, un séminaire ou une session de formation Connect Pro. La principale différence réside dans le fait que les participants doivent s'inscrire avant de prendre part à l'événement. Participation à des événements Tous les événements Connect Enterprise auxquels vous êtes autorisé(e) à assister sont affichés dans la liste des événements. (Pour consulter la liste des événements, naviguez jusqu'à l'onglet Accueil de Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Mon planning d'événements.) Tous les événements Connect Enterprise exigent une inscription, mais tous ne nécessitent pas une autorisation. Il existe deux façons de s'inscrire à un événement : • A partir d'un lien figurant dans l'invitation électronique, ce qui n'est le cas que si vous êtes invité par l'hôte de l'événement. • A partir d'un lien figurant dans la liste des événements sur les pages publiques d'un site Web, si l'événement est accessible au public. Après avoir cliqué sur le lien d'inscription, un formulaire s'affiche. Utilisez ce formulaire pour vous inscrire à l'événement. (Les utilisateurs Connect Pro enregistrés doivent se connecter avant de s'inscrire à l'événement.) Lors de l'inscription, la saisie d'un mot de passe et la réponse à certaines questions permettent de créer un profil d'invité. Ensuite, en fonction de la manière dont l'événement a été créé, vous pouvez recevoir un message électronique de notification vous indiquant votre état (en attente, autorisé ou accès refusé). Si votre état est autorisé, le message électronique contient les informations suivantes : • URL • Le numéro de téléphone et le code de participant utilisés pour se connecter par téléphone, le cas échéant Par ailleurs, si vous avez reçu une invitation électronique accompagnée d'un fichier iCal et que vous possédez Microsoft Outlook, vous pouvez ajouter l'événement à votre calendrier Outlook. Si vous êtes un utilisateur Connect Pro et que l'événement a été créé dans le même compte Connect Pro que le vôtre, l'événement s'affiche également dans Connect Pro Central, sous Mon planning d'événements. Remarque : Le formulaire d'inscription à un événement ne peut pas servir à la création d'un nouvel utilisateur si vous êtes déjà connecté en tant qu'utilisateur. Par exemple, si vous avez ouvert une session Connect Pro, vous ne pouvez pas vous inscrire à un événement sous le nom d'un autre utilisateur. Saisie d'un événement planifié à partir de Connect Pro Central 1 Dans l'onglet Accueil, cliquez sur Mon calendrier. 2 Dans le calendrier, naviguez jusqu'à la date de l'événement. 3 Dans le calendrier, cliquez sur le nom de l'événement. 4 Sous Détails, recherchez l'événement à entrer, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Si vous n'êtes pas encore inscrit(e) ou si vous devez obtenir une autorisation, vous devrez peut-être indiquer votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis remplir le formulaire d'inscription.144 Chapitre 5 : Conférence audio et visioconférence Options de conférence audio Acrobat Connect Pro prend en charge les solutions suivantes pour l'ajout de son à des réunions et à des sessions de formation. Contactez l'administrateur pour connaître les options de conférence disponibles pour votre compte. VoIP bidirectionnel intégré (module Caméra et Voix) Le module Caméra et Voix diffuse du son dans les réunions ou les sessions de formation à l'aide du protocole VoIP et des microphones présents sur les systèmes informatiques des participants. Reportez-vous à la section « Module Caméra et Voix » à la page 152. Adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle Ces adaptateurs sont des extensions de Connect Pro en langage Java. Ils permettent d'établir la communication entre Connect Pro et des fournisseurs spécifiques de conférence audio. Les adaptateurs intégrés proposent des fonctionnalités d'appel avancées qui permettent aux hôtes et aux présentateurs de contrôler la conférence audio depuis la réunion. Adobe fournit plusieurs adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés pour les installations hébergées. Par exemple, MeetingOne, Premiere et InterCall sont des adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés. Les adaptateurs intégrés dans des installations sous licence peuvent également être configurés pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation d'adaptateurs intégrés sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 148. Fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Les fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle permettent à Connect Pro de diffuser par VoIP tout le son provenant des téléphones d'une salle de réunion. Le son est diffusé de manière unidirectionnelle dans la réunion et peut être enregistré avec la conférence Web. Les administrateurs de compte comme les hôtes peuvent configurer des fournisseurs audio pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Reportez-vous à la section « Utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 145. Le tableau suivant compare les solutions intégrées de voix universelle et de téléphonie. Voir aussi « Création et participation aux réunions » à la page 8 « Modification des informations sur les réunions » à la page 23 Fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Adaptateur de téléphonie intégré Diffusion du son par VoIP dans une réunion Connect Pro Oui Oui, s'il est activé pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle Contrôle d'appel amélioré. Par exemple, mise en silence, mise en attente, etc. Non Oui Enregistrement du son avec une réunion Connect Pro Oui Oui Nécessite Flash Media Gateway (intégré dans le programme d'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro) Oui NonUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 145 Conférence audio et visioconférence « Création de curriculums de formation » à la page 88 « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 Utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle Procédures d'utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle La solution de voix universelle vous permet de diffuser par VoIP une conférence audio en direct pour les participants à une réunion. Les participants entendent le son provenant des téléphones par les haut-parleurs de leur ordinateur. Les hôtes peuvent également enregistrer la conférence audio en direct avec la réunion Connect Pro. Les procédures classiques comprennent la configuration d'un fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle (administrateurs et hôtes), la création d'une réunion à l'aide d'un profil audio (hôtes) et le démarrage d'une conférence audio (hôtes). Configuration d'un fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle (administrateurs/hôtes) Les administrateurs configurent des fournisseurs audio pour tous les utilisateurs d'un compte. Les hôtes configurent les fournisseurs audio pour leur usage personnel dans les conférences audio. 1. Ajout ou modification d'un fournisseur audio. Vous pouvez configurer presque tous les fournisseurs audio pour qu'ils utilisent la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, à condition qu'un compte existe avec le fournisseur. La première étape consiste à configurer les détails d'identification, notamment le nom du fournisseur et les numéros de téléphone permettant d'accéder à la réunion. Reportez-vous à la section « Création ou modification de fournisseurs audio » à la page 191. 2. Ajout d'une séquence de numérotation. Pour les comptes hébergés, le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro utilise la séquence de numérotation pour se connecter en arrière-plan à la conférence audio lorsque l'hôte rejoint la conférence dans la salle de réunion. A cette étape, vous configurez le numéro de la conférence, les tonalités DTMF et les pauses dans la numérotation du numéro de connexion à une conférence audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Définition d'une séquence de numérotation » à la page 193. 3. Test de la séquence de numérotation. Pour vérifier que la séquence de numérotation fonctionne comme prévu, vous pouvez exécuter les différentes étapes, y compris celles définies par l'utilisateur, puis ajuster la séquence de numérotation en conséquence. Reportez-vous à la section « Test d'une séquence de numérotation » à la page 195. Création et utilisation d'un profil audio (administrateurs/hôtes) 1. Création d'un profil audio. Pour tout fournisseur audio de votre compte, vous pouvez créer un ou plusieurs profils audio afin de configurer les conférences audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9..UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 146 Conférence audio et visioconférence 2. Création d'une réunion et sélection d'un profil audio. Vous créez une réunion à l'aide de l'Assistant de création de réunion mais au lieu de saisir les paramètres de la conférence audio manuellement, vous sélectionnez l'un de vos profils audio. Ces profils audio comprennent les paramètres de conférence du fournisseur audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Association d'un profil audio à une réunion » à la page 10. Démarrage d'une conférence audio (hôtes) 1. Connexion à la salle de la réunion. Les hôtes commencent la réunion et les participants reçoivent un e-mail ou un message instantané les invitant à participer à la réunion. Reportez-vous à la section « Participation à une réunion » à la page 18. 2. Démarrage de la conférence audio. Depuis la salle de réunion, les hôtes démarrent la conférence audio de manière à ce que Connect Pro puisse participer à la conférence. Reportez-vous à la section « Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 147. 3. Diffusion de l'audio. La fonctionnalité de voix universelle diffuse le son provenant des téléphones dans la salle de réunion, auprès de tous les participants, par l'intermédiaire des haut-parleurs de leur ordinateur. Pour diffuser le son, les hôtes utilisent la fonctionnalité de diffusion. Les participants entendent le son de la conférence lorsqu'ils entrent dans la salle de réunion. Les participants n'ont pas besoin de se connecter à la réunion pour écouter le son. Cependant, pour être entendus par les autres participants à la conférence audio, les participants doivent se connecter à la conférence par téléphone. Reportez-vous à la section « Diffusion du son avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 147. 4. Enregistrement de la conférence audio. Les hôtes peuvent enregistrer les sons provenant des téléphones avec la conférence Web. Le son est lu avec la conférence audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Enregistrement d'une réunion » à la page 59. Recommandations concernant le démarrage d'une conférence audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Si un hôte commence une conférence audio en tant que modérateur et quitte la salle de réunion ou est déconnecté, la conférence se termine et tous les participants sont déconnectés. En revanche, si un hôte commence la conférence audio en tant que participant puis quitte la salle de réunion, la conférence se poursuit pour les autres participants. Pour éviter de mettre fin à la conférence audio et de déconnecter tous les participants si vous quittez la salle de réunion, effectuez les opérations suivantes : 1 Créez un profil audio utilisant un code de participant pour démarrer la conférence audio. Reportez-vous à la section « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9. Pour les fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur, veillez à ce que la séquence de numérotation comprenne une zone de texte pour les participants. Cette zone de texte apparaît lorsque vous créez un profil audio fondé sur ce fournisseur. 2 Entrez dans la salle de réunion Connect Pro et démarrez la conférence audio. 3 Diffusion du son dans la conférence. 4 Utilisez un téléphone pour composer le numéro de la réunion.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 147 Conférence audio et visioconférence Connect Pro compose le numéro permettant de se connecter à la conférence audio en tant que participant. Si vous mettez fin à l'appel, les autres participants et la conférence audio restent connectés. Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Connect Pro compose le numéro de connexion à la conférence audio indiqué dans les étapes de numérotation du fournisseur audio. Remarque : le fait de commencer la conférence ne démarre pas automatiquement la diffusion du son dans la réunion. Vous devez sélectionner la commande correspondante pour diffuser le son. 1 Vérifiez que Connect Pro se connecte à la conférence audio en tant que participant. Reportez-vous à la section « Recommandations concernant le démarrage d'une conférence audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 146. 2 Cliquez sur l'icône Options de conférence audio située au bas du module Liste des participants et effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes en fonction du type de fournisseur audio : • Pour les fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur, sélectionnez Rejoindre la conférence audio. • Pour les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés, sélectionnez Commencer la conférence audio. 3 Pour arrêter une conférence audio, cliquez sur l'icône Options de conférence audio et effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes en fonction du type de fournisseur audio : • Pour les fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur, sélectionnez Quitter la conférence audio. • Pour les adaptateurs de téléphonie intégrés configurés pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle, sélectionnez Arrêter la conférence audio. Voir aussi « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144 « Définition d'une séquence de numérotation » à la page 193 Diffusion du son avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Pour activer tout le son de la conférence audio provenant des téléphones, commencez la diffusion du son. Tous les participants qui entrent dans la salle de réunion entendent le son par les haut-parleurs de leur ordinateur. Le son est diffusé de manière unidirectionnelle dans la réunion. Vous pouvez entendre le son sans vous connecter par téléphone. En revanche, pour que les autres participants puissent vous entendre, vous devez vous connecter à la conférence audio par téléphone. Les hôtes peuvent arrêter une diffusion pour tous les participants, mais pas pour un participant spécifique. Le module Caméra et Voix n'est pas utilisé avec la fonctionnalité de voix universelle pour la diffusion du son. 1 Vérifiez que vous avez démarré la conférence audio. (Options de conférence audio > Rejoindre la conférence audio ou Commencer la conférence audio.) 2 Cliquez sur Options de conférence téléphonique au bas du module Liste des participants et sélectionnez Démarrage de la diffusion audio. 3 Pour arrêter la diffusion du son, cliquez sur Options de conférence audio et sélectionnez Arrêt de la diffusion audio.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 148 Conférence audio et visioconférence Mise en silence du son avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Les participants peuvent mettre en silence le son diffusé par les haut-parleurs de leur ordinateur pour pouvoir entendre les sons système tels que les alertes. Les participants peuvent continuer à écouter le son avec leur casque. ? Cliquez sur Options de conférence téléphonique au bas du module Liste des participants et sélectionnez Mettre en silence la diffusion audio. Utilisation d'adaptateurs intégrés sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle Ces informations s'appliquent uniquement lorsqu'un adaptateur de téléphonie intégré ne prenant pas en charge la fonctionnalité de voix universelle est utilisé dans une réunion ou une session de formation. Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio Une fois la conférence audio initialisée dans la réunion ou la session de formation, vous pouvez soit effectuer un appel sortant vers vous-même à partir du module Liste des participants, soit effectuer un appel entrant. Une boîte de dialogue s'ouvre alors pour inviter tous les participants à se joindre à la téléconférence. Voir aussi « Attribution groupée de droits caméra et voix » à la page 155 « Affichage de fournisseurs audio » à la page 190 Démarrage d'une téléconférence audio 1 Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants. 2 Cliquez sur Commencer la conférence audio. Lorsque la conférence audio commence, le ou les numéros à composer s'affichent sur le côté droit de la fenêtre de la réunion ou session de formation. (Ils sont également visibles lorsque vous passez le pointeur de la souris sur l'icône de téléphone située dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de réunion ou de session de formation.) Arrêt d'un appel de conférence audio 1 Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants. 2 Sélectionnez Arrêter la conférence audio dans le menu contextuel.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 149 Conférence audio et visioconférence Inclusion de participants à une téléconférence audio Les hôtes disposent de plusieurs options de numérotation sortante pour inclure des participants dans une conférence audio. Vous pouvez effectuer un appel sortant vers un participant enregistré en utilisant le numéro de téléphone mémorisé dans son profil ou en entrant un nouveau numéro. Pour inclure un participant non enregistré dans la conférence audio uniquement, vous pouvez entrer un nouveau nom et un nouveau numéro. Vous pouvez créer une entrée hors ligne pour une numérotation ultérieure, ainsi qu'une liste d'entrées hors ligne à numéroter simultanément. Voir aussi « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144 « Création et participation aux réunions » à la page 8 « Création de curriculums de formation » à la page 88 « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 Appel sortant vers un nouvel utilisateur de téléphone 1 Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants. 2 Sélectionnez Appeler un nouvel utilisateur au téléphone dans le menu contextuel. 3 Entrez le nom et le numéro de téléphone du participant. 4 Sélectionnez Appeler pour composer immédiatement le numéro de téléphone du participant. Le participant est appelé au téléphone et l'icône Numérotation en cours s'affiche à droite de son nom. Création d'une liste de participants à appeler ultérieurement 1 Cliquez sur Options de conférence audio au bas du module Liste des participants. 2 Sélectionnez Appeler un nouvel utilisateur au téléphone dans le menu contextuel. 3 Entrez le nom et le numéro de téléphone du participant. 4 Sélectionnez Appeler plus tard. Le participant est ajouté au module Liste des participants comme personne présente hors ligne (icône de participant grise sans icône de téléphone). Appel sortant vers un participant connecté à Adobe Connect Pro 1 Dans le module Liste participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant à ajouter à la conférence audio. (Sélectionnez plusieurs noms pour appeler plusieurs personnes.) 2 Sélectionnez Appeler l'utilisateur sélectionné dans le menu contextuel. La boîte de dialogue Effectuer un appel sortant s'affiche. Vous pouvez soit entrer un nouveau numéro de téléphone, soit sélectionner un numéro dans la liste des numéros associés au participant. 3 Cliquez sur Appeler. A propos de l'état de la conférence audio Remarque : les icônes de liste des participants et d'état apparaissent dans toutes les conférences audio utilisant des fournisseurs de téléphonie intégrés, avec ou sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Les icônes d'état n'apparaissent pas pour les fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 150 Conférence audio et visioconférence Si un hôte active une conférence audio dans une réunion ou session de formation et qu'un participant appelle ou est appelé, une icône d'état de conférence audio apparaît en regard du nom du participant. Lorsqu'un participant effectue un appel entrant ou qu'un hôte effectue un appel sortant, une icône d'état de téléconférence apparaît à droite du nom du participant. Remarque : certains fournisseurs de conférence audio ne prennent pas en charge la fonction En attente. Voir aussi « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144 « Attribution groupée de droits caméra et voix » à la page 155 Fusion de deux entrées d'un même appelant dans une téléconférence Si un participant se connecte à une réunion ou session de formation, puis est joint par téléphone à la conférence audio, les deux entrées sont automatiquement fusionnées et un seul nom apparaît pour l'utilisateur. Cependant, si le numéro de téléphone du participant n'est pas reconnu, ce dernier peut apparaître deux fois dans la liste : sous Acrobat Connect Pro avec un nom et sous Numérotation inconnue, sans nom. Si l'hôte sait qu'un participant est répertorié deux fois, il peut utiliser la fonction de fusion des ID appelant pour combiner les entrées en une seule. 1 Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Ctrl et cliquez sur le nom d'un participant Numérotation inconnue. 3 Cliquez sur Fusionner les utilisateurs dans la partie inférieure du module. Remarque : pour que les fonctionnalités de conférence fonctionnent dans votre réunion ou session de formation, l'adaptateur de conférence audio doit être activé. Voir aussi « Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio » à la page 148 Modification du volume d'un participant ou mise en silence d'un téléphone Les hôtes peuvent mettre en silence la diffusion audio d'un participant ou en modifier le volume. Le réglage du volume est utile lorsque le volume d'un participant est particulièrement fort ou faible. La mise en silence est utile en cas de bruit de fond excessif. Modification du volume audio d'un participant 1 Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant. Etat de la personne présente Icône Au téléphone En cours de conversation Numérotation en cours En attente MuetUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 151 Conférence audio et visioconférence 2 Cliquez sur Volume utilisateur . 3 Dans le menu déroulant, cliquez sur Volume du participant et sélectionnez un niveau (élevé, normal ou bas). Mise en silence de la diffusion audio d'un participant ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant. Cliquez sur Volume utilisateur . Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez Mettre en silence l'élément sélectionné. • Dans le module Liste des participants, placez le pointeur de la souris sur le nom du participant, puis choisissez Mettre en silence le téléphone dans le menu qui s'affiche. L'icône de mise en silence s'affiche en regard du nom du participant dans la liste. Annulation de la mise en silence de la diffusion audio d'un participant ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant. Cliquez sur Volume utilisateur . Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez Annuler la mise en silence de l'élément sélectionné. • Dans le module Liste des participants, placez le pointeur de la souris sur le nom du participant, puis choisissez Annuler la mise en silence du téléphone dans le menu qui s'affiche. L'icône de mise en silence est retirée de la liste des participants. Mise en silence et annulation de la mise en silence de votre propre téléphone Ces options sont disponibles pour tous les participants. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Hôtes) Dans le module Liste des participants, cliquez sur Volume utilisateur , à côté de votre nom. Dans le menu contextuel, sélectionnez l'option de mise en silence ou d'annulation de la mise en silence de votre téléphone. • (Présentateurs/Participants) Dans le module Liste des participants, cliquez sur l'icône Me mettre en silence située à côté de votre nom, puis sélectionnez l'option de mise en silence ou d'annulation de la mise en silence de votre téléphone. Participation à une conférence audio (sans fonctionnalité de voix universelle) Dès qu'une conférence audio commence dans une réunion ou une session de formation, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour vous inviter à vous y joindre. Voir aussi « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144 « Démarrage ou arrêt d'une conférence audio » à la page 148UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 152 Conférence audio et visioconférence Accès à la téléconférence 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Rejoindre la conférence audio. 2 Si vous utilisez un fournisseur audio intégré, saisissez votre numéro de téléphone et cliquez sur Appeler mon téléphone. Cette étape n'est pas nécessaire pour les fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Remarque : si la boîte de dialogue Participer à la conférence est invisible, placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'icône de téléphone située dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de réunion ou de session de formation afin d'afficher le numéro de conférence à appeler. Affichage de la liste des numéros à composer pendant une réunion ou session de formation Remarque : ces informations s'appliquent aux fournisseurs audio intégrés, mais pas aux fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Si la réunion ou session de formation que vous rejoignez présente plusieurs numéros de connexion (par exemple, un numéro d'appel local pour les sites internationaux), vous pouvez afficher la liste de ces numéros. Cette liste s'affiche automatiquement pendant cinq secondes après votre connexion à la réunion ou session de formation. Une fois la connexion établie, vous pouvez également l'afficher à tout moment. ? Placez le pointeur de la souris sur l'icône du téléphone située dans le coin supérieur droit de la salle de réunion ou de formation pour afficher les numéros de connexion à la conférence audio. Module Caméra et Voix Pour diffuser du son, le diffuseur doit connecter un microphone à son ordinateur. Pour diffuser de la vidéo, il doit raccorder une caméra vidéo ou une webcam à son ordinateur. Configuration de la diffusion audio Pour paramétrer et utiliser rapidement vos périphériques audio, utilisez l'Assistant Configuration audio. Utilisez les Paramètres avancés pour affiner davantage le traitement des données audio par Acrobat Connect Pro. (L'utilisation des Paramètres avancés n'est recommandée que si vous connaissez parfaitement la technologie du son.) Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres de modules, de vidéo et d'audio afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Test des périphériques audio et configuration des paramètres 1 Sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer mes paramètres > Assistant Configuration audio. 2 Cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Dans la page Tester la sortie audio, cliquez sur Test. Un échantillon de son est émis dans vos haut-parleurs ou dans vos écouteurs. Si vous ne l'avez pas entendu, cliquez sur Aide pour plus d'informations. 4 Cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Sur la page Sélection du microphone, sélectionnez votre type de microphone dans le menu contextuel. 6 Cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Dans la page Tester le microphone, cliquez sur Enregistrer pour tester votre microphone. (Si un message s'affiche concernant l'accès à votre caméra et votre microphone, cliquez sur Autoriser.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 153 Conférence audio et visioconférence 8 Cliquez sur Suivant. 9 Ignorez la page Régler le niveau de silence. La détection du silence n'est disponible que si l'administrateur de votre compte l'active. 10 Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Terminer. Configuration des paramètres avancés dans l'Assistant Configuration audio (Windows uniquement) 1 Sélectionnez Réunion > Gérer mes paramètres > Assistant Configuration audio. La page d'accueil de l'Assistant Configuration audio apparaît. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Suivant pour passer à l'étape 5 sur 5 de l'Assistant Configuration audio. 3 Cliquez sur Paramètres avancés. L'option Utilisation des données audio étendues active le contrôle automatique du son, notamment l'annulation de l'écho, le contrôle du volume du microphone et la suppression des bruits. Vous pouvez désélectionner cette option si vous avez des problèmes de qualité du son. 4 Pour le mode d'annulation de l'écho, sélectionnez une option afin de régler l'annulation de l'écho (Adobe Acrobat Connect Add-in doit être installé pour utiliser cette option) : Duplex intégral Permet à plusieurs utilisateurs de parler en même temps. Si cette option produit un écho, sélectionnez-en une autre (cette option convient à la plupart des systèmes). Semi-duplex Les utilisateurs doivent parler chacun à leur tour, un seul à la fois. Choisissez cette option lorsque les microphones de votre système sont particulièrement sensibles (transmission indésirable de bruits de fond) ou si l'annulation de l'écho est faible. Casques Optimise les paramètres audio pour une utilisation avec un casque. Cette option utilise le mode Duplex intégral, dans lequel plusieurs utilisateurs peuvent parler simultanément. Désactivé Désactive l'annulation de l'écho. 5 Pour que le volume du microphone se règle automatiquement en fonction des changements de volume de la voix, sélectionnez Contrôle automatique du gain. Désactivez cette option si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec le volume sonore et que celui-ci fluctue de façon imprévisible. 6 Pour la qualité audio, sélectionnez une option combinant tous les paramètres audio, y compris l'annulation de l'écho et le contrôle du gain, afin d'améliorer les performances. Une qualité plus élevée consomme davantage de ressources processeur, donc ralentit les performances, mais offre une meilleure qualité sonore. Il est préférable d'utiliser le plus haut niveau de qualité possible n'entraînant pas de dégradation sonore perceptible dans votre système. Sélectionnez l’un des quatre paramètres suivants : Rapide Assure les meilleures performances en termes de rapidité, mais une faible qualité sonore. (Cette option utilisant le moins de ressources processeur, elle est conseillée dans le cas de systèmes équipés de processeurs faiblement cadencés.) Normale Offre des performances moindres mais une meilleure qualité sonore. (Ce paramètre est activé par défaut et convient à la plupart des systèmes.) Supérieure Réduit les performances, mais assure la meilleure qualité sonore. (Choisissez cette option dans le cas de systèmes équipés de processeurs rapides.) Personnaliser Permet de sélectionner ses propres paramètres de qualité audio. Utilisez cette option lorsque les paramètres standard ne donnent pas de résultats suffisants.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 154 Conférence audio et visioconférence 7 Si vous avez choisi Rapide, Normale ou Supérieure, passez à l'étape 8. Si vous avez sélectionné Personnaliser, choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Pour le Chemin de l'écho, sélectionnez 128 (paramètre par défaut) ou 256. Plus ce paramètre est élevé, plus l'écho est atténué. Ce paramètre consomme davantage de ressources processeur et est recommandé dans le cas de systèmes n'utilisant pas de casque. • Sélectionnez Suppression du bruit (sélectionné par défaut) pour réduire la quantité de bruit reçue par le microphone. Désactivez cette option pour augmenter la sensibilité du microphone. • Pour l'annulation de l'écho, sélectionnez Rapide afin d'obtenir de meilleures performances mais une moins bonne qualité, Normale pour de moins bonnes performances et une meilleure qualité ou Supérieure pour de faibles performances mais une meilleure qualité. • Sélectionnez l'option Traitement non linéaire (sélectionnée par défaut) pour utiliser un traitement non linéaire des données audio. Désactivez cette option pour utiliser le traitement standard (et consommer moins de ressources). 8 Pour annuler vos sélections et rétablir les paramètres avancés par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser les valeurs par défaut. 9 Pour appliquer les paramètres avancés et revenir dans l'Assistant Configuration audio, cliquez sur OK. L'étape 5 de l'Assistant Configuration audio apparaît. 10 Cliquez sur Terminé pour quitter l'Assistant. Configuration de la diffusion vidéo Les hôtes et présentateurs ont la possibilité de partager leur caméra. 1 Dans la barre de menus, choisissez Réunion > Gérer mes paramètres > Sélectionner une caméra. Une fenêtre Paramètres Flash Player s'ouvre. 2 dans le menu déroulant Caméra, sélectionnez la caméra à utiliser. Remarque : Si aucune caméra n’est connectée, un message vous en informe et le menu déroulant Caméra n’apparaît pas. 3 Cliquez sur Fermer. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres de modules, de vidéo et d'audio afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Configuration des paramètres de diffusion vidéo pour tous les participants » à la page 157 Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo Vous pouvez démarrer, suspendre et arrêter la diffusion de votre caméra et de votre voix à tout moment au cours d'une réunion ou d'une session de formation. Remarque : Les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres de modules, de vidéo et d'audio afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Démarrage de la diffusion audio et vidéo ? Dans le module Caméra et Voix, cliquez sur Démarrer mon module Caméra et Voix UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 155 Conférence audio et visioconférence Diffusion de votre voix Les hôtes et présentateurs utilisent généralement l'option Mains libres, tandis que les participants font usage du microphone. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour parler, maintenez le bouton Parler enfoncé. Lorsque vous avez fini de parler, relâchez le bouton. • Cliquez sur Mains libres . Lorsqu'il est activé, le bouton Mains libres vous permet de parler à tout moment pendant la réunion ou session de formation. Cliquez de nouveau sur ce bouton pour désactiver la diffusion audio en mode Mains libres. 2 Le niveau sonore peut varier sensiblement d'un microphone à un autre. Vous êtes donc invité à régler le volume de votre microphone dans la barre d'outils VoIP (cliquez sur le menu Options vocales et sélectionnez ensuite Elevé, Moyen ou Bas). Ce réglage s'avère particulièrement utile si d'autres participants à la réunion ou session de formation vous font remarquer que vous parlez trop fort ou qu'ils ne vous entendent pas. Pause de la diffusion vidéo Lorsque la diffusion vidéo est interrompue, la dernière image diffusée par votre caméra demeure sous la forme d'une image fixe dans le module Caméra et Voix. ? Cliquez sur Caméra en pause dans le module Caméra et Voix. Cliquez de nouveau sur ce bouton pour reprendre la diffusion. Arrêt de la diffusion de votre vidéo et de votre voix ? Dans le module Caméra et Voix, cliquez sur Arrêter mon module Caméra et Voix . Attribution groupée de droits caméra et voix Au début d'une réunion ou session de formation, seuls les hôtes et présentateurs peuvent utiliser la diffusion audio (par VoIP) et vidéo. Les hôtes ont la possibilité d'attribuer des droits caméra et voix aux participants en étendant leurs privilèges. Vous trouverez ci-après quelques conseils concernant l'attribution groupée de droits caméra et voix. • Lorsqu'ils reçoivent des droits caméra et voix, les participants ont accès à la barre d'outils VoIP et aux commandes du module Caméra et voix. • Lorsque des droits caméra et voix sont attribués, le participant peut activer sa caméra. A l'activation de la caméra, le microphone s'allume par défaut, sauf si l'hôte a défini le mode vocal (via la barre d'outils VoIP) sur Voix activée - Un seul conférencier. En outre, si le mode vocal est défini sur Voix désactivée, les commandes vocales sont désactivées et le microphone ne s'allume pas lorsqu'un participant active sa caméra. • Si un participant reçoit des droits caméra et voix, active sa caméra puis arrête la diffusion vidéo, il conserve l'ensemble de ses droits (et peut utiliser les droits Voix uniquement, s'il le souhaite) sauf si un hôte ou présentateur les modifie.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 156 Conférence audio et visioconférence • Si un participant reçoit à la fois des droits caméra et voix, puis qu'un hôte ou un présentateur supprime les droits caméra, les droits voix sont également retirés. Toutefois, si un participant a reçu des droits voix avant de recevoir les droits caméra, le retrait des droits caméra n'entraîne pas le retrait des droits voix. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres de modules, de vidéo et d'audio afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154 « Configuration des paramètres de diffusion vidéo pour tous les participants » à la page 157 Affectation de droits voix aux participants En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez activer et désactiver la diffusion audio de tous les participants et permettre à un ou plusieurs d'entre eux de parler en même temps. 1 Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant. 2 Dans la barre d'outils VoIP, cliquez sur le menu et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Voix désactivée : la diffusion audio est coupée pour tous. • Voix activée - Plusieurs conférenciers : la diffusion audio est activée de manière que les participants disposant des autorisations appropriées soient en mesure de diffuser des sons au cours de la réunion ou session de formation. Les personnes présentes peuvent parler en maintenant le bouton Parler enfoncé. • Voix activée - Un seul conférencier : la diffusion audio est activée de manière que les participants disposant des autorisations appropriées soient en mesure de diffuser des sons au cours de la réunion ou session de formation. Lorsqu'un conférencier maintient le bouton Parler enfoncé, ce dernier est désactivé pour les autres utilisateurs. Si vous choisissez l'une des options Voix activée, le microphone s'affiche en regard du nom du participant dans la liste des participants, un court message apparaît dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de réunion ou de session de formation du participant pour lui indiquer qu'il a reçu des droits voix, et la barre d'outils VoIP s'affiche dans le coin inférieur gauche de cette même fenêtre pour lui présenter les options de microphone. (Si le mode vocal change, les microphones de tous les utilisateurs actifs sont désactivés et réinitialisés.) Les participants peuvent à nouveau bloquer le bouton Parler pour prendre la parole et être entendus.) 3 Après avoir reçu des droits voix, les participants peuvent cliquer sur l'option Mains libres pour verrouiller leur microphone en transmission VoIP continue et mode Mains libres. Pour de courtes périodes, par exemple pour poser une question, les participants peuvent cliquer sur le bouton Parler et le maintenir enfoncé, puis le relâcher quand ils ont fini de parler. Lorsqu'un participant parle, l'icône de microphone s'affiche en regard de son nom dans la liste des participants. 4 (Facultatif) Les participants ont la possibilité de modifier le volume de leur microphone en cliquant sur le menu de la barre d'outils VoIP et en sélectionnant un niveau sonore : Volume élevé, Volume moyen ou Faible volume. (Cette option est uniquement disponible si Acrobat Connect Add-in est installé.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 157 Conférence audio et visioconférence Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154 Configuration des paramètres de diffusion vidéo pour tous les participants En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez activer ou désactiver la diffusion vidéo pour tous les participants et indiquer une qualité d'image. Remarque : si vous modifiez un paramètre pendant la diffusion de la vidéo, des boutons de commande multimédia peuvent apparaître ou disparaître dans le module Caméra et Voix. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le module Caméra et Voix. 2 Choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Caméra désactivée : la diffusion de la vidéo est coupée. • Images lentes : l’échantillonnage et la transmission des images de la caméra s’effectuent moins fréquemment qu’avec les autres paramétrages de diffusion vidéo. Les images risquent d’être saccadées et de qualité médiocre. Ce paramétrage est à réserver aux réunions dans lesquelles la plupart des participants ne disposent que d'une connexion à bas débit, ou lorsque la qualité de l'image n'est pas importante. • Images rapides (paramètre par défaut) donne des images fluides, mais de qualité moyenne. Utilisez ce paramètre si les participants sont connectés à des débits différents. • Images en haute qualité : donne des images de très bonne qualité. Utilisez ce paramètre si tous les participants sont connectés à grande vitesse. • L'option Bande passante élevée offre la meilleure qualité d'image ; elle convient pour les connexions à haut débit, de type DSL et RLE. Modification des proportions des vidéos En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez choisir un affichage vidéo en mode Portrait (mode par défaut), Standard ou Paysage. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module dans le module Caméra et Voix. 2 Sélectionnez le paramètre de rapport hauteur/largeur souhaité dans le menu qui s'affiche : • Portrait affiche la vidéo avec un rapport hauteur/largeur carré. • Standard affiche la vidéo avec un rapport hauteur/largeur d'environ 4/3. • Paysage affiche la vidéo avec un rapport hauteur/largeur d'environ 9/5. Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154 « Configuration des paramètres de diffusion vidéo pour tous les participants » à la page 157UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 158 Conférence audio et visioconférence Autorisation des participants à diffuser du contenu vidéo et audio par microphone Les hôtes peuvent autoriser un participant à diffuser de la vidéo et du son par microphone en le nommant Présentateur ou en modifiant ses autorisations uniquement pour le module Caméra et Voix. ? Dans le module Liste des participants, sélectionnez le nom du participant et effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Définir le rôle de l'utilisateur dans le coin inférieur gauche et sélectionnez Définir comme Présentateur. • Cliquez sur le bouton Options du module et sélectionnez Modifier les droits supplémentaires des participants. Dans la boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez le module Caméra et Voix et cliquez sur OK. • Cliquez sur le nom d'un participant dans la liste des participants, puis sélectionnez Accorder les droits d'utilisation du microphone dans le menu. Remarque : les administrateurs Acrobat Connect Pro peuvent modifier les paramètres de modules, de vidéo et d'audio afin de se conformer aux normes réglementaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154 Arrêt de la diffusion d'un participant Le cas échéant, un hôte a la possibilité d'empêcher un participant de diffuser des images ou des sons. 1 Placez le pointeur de la souris sur le nom du participant dans le module Caméra et Voix. 2 Cliquez sur l'icône de fermeture (X) à droite du nom du participant pour interrompre la diffusion. Le nom et l'image du participant disparaissent de tous les modules Caméra et Voix. Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154 Sélection des diffusions à recevoir En tant qu'hôte, vous pouvez recevoir ou bloquer la diffusion vidéo ou audio d'un participant. Dans le module Caméra et Voix, une ligne rouge sur l'icône Microphone ou Caméra d'un participant indique que la diffusion est bloquée pour cet utilisateur. Si aucune ligne rouge n'apparaît, les diffusions provenant de ce participant sont autorisées. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes ou les deux selon vos besoins : • Pour bloquer ou débloquer des diffusions audio en provenance d'un participant, placez le curseur sur le nom du participant dans le module Caméra et Voix, puis cliquez sur l'icône Microphone en regard du nom. • Pour bloquer ou débloquer des diffusions vidéo en provenance d'un participant, placez le curseur sur le nom du participant dans le module Caméra et Voix, puis cliquez sur l'icône Microphone en regard du nom. Voir aussi « Contrôle de votre diffusion audio et vidéo » à la page 154159 Chapitre 6 : Gestion du contenu Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Central comprend quatre bibliothèques : Contenu, Formations, Réunions et Gestion des événements. La bibliothèque de contenu comprend les contenus utilisés dans les salles de réunion et les classes virtuelles. Il s'agit notamment de fichiers de présentation, SWF, image, audio et vidéo, entre autres. La bibliothèque des formations contient des curriculums, des cours et des classes virtuelles. La bibliothèque des réunions contient les salles de réunion. La bibliothèque de gestion des événements contient des événements. Utilisation des fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque L'administrateur, les administrateurs limités et les utilisateurs disposant d'autorisations de gestion peuvent créer et explorer des hiérarchies de dossier dans des bibliothèques. Utilisez ces hiérarchies pour organiser le contenu dans les bibliothèques. Les administrateurs, administrateurs limités et utilisateurs disposant d'autorisations de gestion peuvent également définir des autorisations afin de déterminer les tâches que chaque utilisateur peut exécuter dans les bibliothèques. Un gestionnaire peut, par exemple, configurer un dossier pour chaque service dont il est responsable et attribuer des autorisations de gestion à chaque directeur de service. Voir aussi « Bibliothèques » à la page 209 « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 208 Création d'un dossier Les administrateurs, administrateurs limités et utilisateurs disposant d'une autorisation de gestion sur un dossier spécifique peuvent y créer des sous-dossiers. Remarque : Les administrateurs définissent des autorisations pour les administrateurs limités dans la section Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Par défaut, les administrateurs limités peuvent définir des autorisations pour le contenu ; cependant, un administrateur peut, s'il le souhaite, leur refuser cette possibilité. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu, Formations, Réunions ou Gestion des événements dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Remarque : Personne ne peut créer de dossier dans la bibliothèque Séminaires. 2 Localisez l'emplacement où vous souhaitez ajouter le nouveau dossier. 3 Dans la barre de menu située au-dessus de la liste des dossiers, cliquez sur Nouveau dossier. 4 Entrez le nom du nouveau dossier sur la nouvelle page qui s'affiche. 5 (Facultatif) Sous Résumé, entrez des informations sur le nouveau dossier. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour créer le dossier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 160 Gestion du contenu Voir aussi « Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier » à la page 161 « Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier » à la page 162 Ouverture d'un dossier 1 Cliquez sur Contenu, Formations, Réunions, Salle de séminaire ou Gestion des événements dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur le nom du dossier. Les dossiers et fichiers contenus dans ce dossier s'affichent ; le nom du répertoire sélectionné est indiqué dans le chemin de navigation, en haut de la fenêtre du navigateur. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier » à la page 161 « Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier » à la page 162 Déplacement d'un fichier ou d'un dossier Vous pouvez déplacer un dossier ou un fichier dans une bibliothèque. Lorsque vous déplacez un tel dossier, tout son contenu est également transféré vers le nouvel emplacement. Utilisez le bouton Déplacer pour transférer des dossiers et des fichiers dans les bibliothèques de contenu, de formation, de réunions ou d'événements. Utilisez le bouton Dossier parent pour déplacer des dossiers et des fichiers dans ces bibliothèques et dans les bibliothèques de salles de séminaires. Dans les bibliothèques de salles de séminaire, vous pouvez choisir de déplacer du contenu transféré ou des enregistrements sauvegardés avec un séminaire. 1 Cliquez sur Contenu, Formations, Réunions, Salle de séminaire ou Gestion des événements dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Localisez le fichier ou dossier à déplacer. 3 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche de l'élément à déplacer. Pour un séminaire, sélectionnez Contenu transféré ou Enregistrements si vous souhaitez déplacer l'un de ces deux types d'éléments sauvegardés avec le séminaire. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Dossier parent pour déplacer l'élément d'un niveau vers le haut dans le répertoire de la bibliothèque. • Cliquez sur Déplacer (cette option n'est pas disponible dans l'onglet Salles de séminaire). Sélectionnez un dossier dans l'arborescence de dossiers, ou cliquez sur Dossier parent. Cliquez sur Déplacer puis sur OK pour appliquer la modification. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier » à la page 161 « Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier » à la page 162 Déplacement d'un niveau vers le haut dans la hiérarchie des dossiers ? Dans la barre de navigation de la liste des dossiers, cliquez sur le bouton Dossier parent. Les dossiers et les fichiers contenus dans le dossier parent s'affichent. Le nom et l'emplacement du dossier parent s'affichent dans la liste des liens de navigation, située dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre du navigateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 161 Gestion du contenu Voir aussi « Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier » à la page 161 « Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier » à la page 162 Retour à un dossier La liste des liens de navigation affichée au-dessus des liens fonctionnels s'appelle le chemin de navigation et indique votre emplacement actuel dans la structure de répertoires. Vous pouvez accéder à tout dossier parent (de niveau supérieur) présent dans le chemin de navigation. ? Cliquez sur le nom d'un dossier parent dans le chemin de navigation. Les dossiers et fichiers du répertoire parent s'affichent. Le nom et l'emplacement du dossier parent s'affichent dans les liens de navigation, situés dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre du navigateur. Voir aussi « Déplacement d'un fichier ou d'un dossier » à la page 160 « Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier » à la page 162 Suppression d'un fichier ou dossier Lorsque vous supprimez un fichier ou un dossier de bibliothèque, il est supprimé définitivement de la bibliothèque et ne peut pas être récupéré. Veillez donc à ne supprimer que les éléments dont vous n'avez plus besoin. Si vous supprimez des éléments liés à des réunions, des événements, des séminaires ou des cours de la bibliothèque de contenu, vous ne pouvez pas accéder au contenu supprimé depuis ces derniers. Lorsque vous supprimez un élément, Acrobat Connect Pro Central indique s'il est lié et vous autorise à annuler sa suppression. Dans les bibliothèques de salles de séminaire, vous pouvez choisir de supprimer du contenu transféré ou des enregistrements sauvegardés avec un séminaire. Remarque : Pour la bibliothèque des formations, si vous supprimez un dossier de formation contenant un cours faisant partie d'un curriculum, le cours supprimé est toujours cité comme élément de cours dans la page d'informations sur le curriculum. Cependant, le cours n'est plus disponible. 1 Cliquez sur Contenu, Formations, Réunions, Salle de séminaire ou Gestion des événements dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez le fichier ou le dossier. 3 Activez la case à cocher située à gauche de l'élément à supprimer. Pour un séminaire, sélectionnez Contenu transféré ou Enregistrements si vous souhaitez supprimer l'un de ces deux types d'éléments sauvegardés avec le séminaire. 4 Dans la barre de menu située au-dessus de la liste de contenu, cliquez sur Supprimer. 5 Cliquez à nouveau sur Supprimer pour effacer définitivement les éléments sélectionnés, ou cliquez sur Annuler pour annuler la suppression. Voir aussi « Déplacement d'un fichier ou d'un dossier » à la page 160UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 162 Gestion du contenu Modification des informations sur un fichier ou dossier Le bouton Modifier les infos vous permet de modifier le titre ou le nom d'un élément de bibliothèque et d'autres informations. Remarque : Si vous modifiez un dossier de la bibliothèque des séminaires, vous pouvez consulter les informations sur la licence de séminaire correspondant à ce dossier afin de vérifier le nombre d'utilisateurs et de réunions disponibles. Dans la barre de navigation accolée au lien Editeur d'infos, cliquez sur Informations de licence. Les informations qui s'affichent incluent le titre, le résumé, la date de début, la date de fin, le nombre d'utilisateurs simultanés et le nombre de réunions simultanées. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu, Formations, Réunions, Salle de séminaire ou Gestion des événements dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez le fichier ou le dossier. 3 Cliquez sur le dossier ou fichier. 4 Dans la barre de navigation située sous le chemin de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 5 Modifiez le titre, le nom ou toutes les autres propriétés à modifier. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Voir aussi « Ouverture d'un dossier » à la page 160 « Déplacement d'un fichier ou d'un dossier » à la page 160 Modification des descriptions ou des noms de dossiers de séminaires 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Salles de séminaire dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez le dossier et cliquez sur son nom. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos, situé au-dessus de la liste des séminaires. 4 Saisissez un nom pour le dossier et éventuellement une description dans la zone de texte Résumé. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Voir aussi « A propos des séminaires » à la page 67 « Création et gestion de séminaires » à la page 67 Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu Types de fichiers pris en charge dans la bibliothèque de contenu Le contenu de la bibliothèque doit correspondre à l'un des types d'élément suivants : • Un fichier PDF unique • Un fichier PPT unique • Un fichier SWF uniqueUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 163 Gestion du contenu • Un fichier HTML unique • Un fichier SWF Adobe Captivate unique • Contenu Acrobat Captivate publié via l'application Adobe Captivate • Contenu Adobe Presenter publié via le plug-in Presenter • Contenu Presenter compressé en tant que fichier ZIP • Une ancienne présentation Macromedia Breeze 4.1 compressée en tant que fichier ZIP (téléchargée pour un serveur 4.1) (Breeze s'appelle désormais Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro.) • Un fichier ZIP qui contient plusieurs fichiers SWF et des fichiers supplémentaires (images, fichiers XML, etc.), ainsi qu'un fichier index.swf chargé en premier • Un fichier ZIP qui contient du contenu Authorware® simple (un fichier HTM, un fichier AAM et des fichiers Authorware supplémentaires) • Un fichier ZIP qui contient plusieurs fichiers HTM ou HTML et des fichiers supplémentaires (images, SWF, etc.) et un fichier index.htm ou index.html • Un fichier ZIP contenant un seul fichier PDF • Un fichier FLV • Une image unique (JPEG, GIF ou PNG) • Un fichier audio unique (mp3) Voir aussi « Affichage du contenu » à la page 167 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168 Transfert du contenu Seuls les membres du groupe prédéfini Auteurs disposant des autorisations de publication requises pour un dossier spécifique de la bibliothèque de contenu peuvent transférer des fichiers dans ce dossier. Vous pouvez transférer de nouvelles versions du contenu figurant dans la bibliothèque de contenu. Remarque : Si les applications Adobe Presenter ou Adobe Captivate sont installées sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez également utiliser l'option Publier disponibles dans ces applications pour transférer du contenu dans la bibliothèque de contenu. Vous pouvez également transférer du contenu à partir d'une salle de réunion. Voir aussi « Affichage du contenu » à la page 167 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168 Transfert de fichiers vers la bibliothèque de contenu 1 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans l'onglet Accueil, sélectionnez Contenu dans le menu Nouveau. • Dans l'onglet Contenu, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau contenu. 2 Sous Sélectionner le fichier de contenu, cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher le fichier, cliquez sur son nom, puis sur Ouvrir.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 164 Gestion du contenu 3 Entrez un titre pour le nouveau fichier (requis) et un résumé (facultatif) dans les zones de texte Informations sur contenu. 4 (Facultatif) Entrez une URL personnalisée (si vous n'attribuez pas une URL personnalisée, le système en attribue une automatiquement). 5 (Facultatif) Sous Résumé, entrez des informations sur le nouveau contenu. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le fichier est transféré dans le serveur et apparaît dans le dossier de contenu. Remarque : Si vous tentez de transférer un type de fichier non pris en charge, la page Entrer du contenu apparaît à nouveau et affiche le message « Format de fichier sélectionné invalide ». Transfert d'une nouvelle version d'un fichier vers la bibliothèque de contenu 1 Dans l'onglet Accueil, cliquez sur Contenu. 2 Dans la liste Contenu, cliquez sur le fichier de contenu à modifier. 3 Cliquez sur Transférer le contenu. 4 Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher un fichier au format spécifié dans le message, cliquez sur son nom, puis sur Ouvrir. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. La nouvelle version du contenu est transférée dans la bibliothèque de contenu. Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement du processus, recherchez le fichier dans la liste du contenu et contrôlez la date de modification. Vous pouvez également consulter la page Informations sur le contenu, cliquer sur l'URL et afficher la nouvelle version du contenu. Transfert de contenu AICC Pour qu'Acrobat Connect Pro puisse effectuer le suivi des notes de questionnaires et des données, le contenu doit être au format AICC. Pour transférer du contenu AICC dans la bibliothèque de contenu, stockez les fichiers dans une archive ZIP et transférez celle-ci à partir de d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central, et non de la salle de réunion. Tenez compte des points suivants lors de la création de transfert AICC : • Le package de contenu doit comprendre un fichier index.htm ou index.html, à partir duquel le serveur peut lancer le contenu. • Le message « Incomplet » doit pouvoir être transmis par le contenu dans toutes ses communications jusqu'à ce que l'utilisateur ait fini d'interagir avec le contenu. • Le message « terminé » ou « réussi » doit pouvoir être transmis par le contenu, de manière à indiquer que l'utilisateur a fini d'interagir avec le contenu. Téléchargement de fichiers depuis la bibliothèque de contenu Les utilisateurs autorisés peuvent télécharger des fichiers de la bibliothèque de contenu sur leurs ordinateurs. Si le contenu se compose de plusieurs fichiers, il est compressé en un fichier ZIP. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu. 2 Localisez le fichier de contenu à télécharger. 3 Cliquez sur son nom. 4 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Télécharger contenu. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 165 Gestion du contenu Le lien Télécharger contenu se trouve sur la page d'information de l'élément. 5 Sous Télécharger le(s) fichier(s) de sortie, cliquez sur le nom du fichier de contenu. Les utilisateurs disposant d'une autorisation de gestion peuvent télécharger une présentation afin de la diffuser sur Internet ou de la distribuer sur un CD. Pour une présentation, vous pouvez télécharger les fichiers sources PPT ou les fichiers de sortie. Pour déployer une présentation, téléchargez les fichiers de sortie et extrayez-les. 6 Enregistrez le fichier sur votre disque. Voir aussi « Affichage du contenu » à la page 167 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168 Téléchargement des fichiers sources d'une présentation depuis la bibliothèque de contenu Télécharger les fichiers sources peut être utile si vous ne disposez plus des fichiers sources d'une présentation Adobe Presenter. (Il est impératif de ne pas remplacer l'extension de fichier PPT par l'extension de fichier PPC ; sinon, le fichier peut devenir inutilisable.) Remarque : Les seuls fichiers sources disponibles pour le téléchargement sont ceux qui ont été transférés. Par exemple, Adobe Presenter et Adobe Captivate disposent d'une option permettant aux utilisateurs de transférer ou non des fichiers sources. Si l'option de transfert de fichiers sources n'est pas sélectionnée, les fichiers ne seront pas disponibles pour un téléchargement ultérieur. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu. 2 Recherchez la présentation et cliquez sur son nom. 3 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur le lien Télécharger contenu. 4 Sous Télécharger le(s) fichier(s) source, cliquez sur un fichier. 5 Enregistrez le fichier sur votre disque. 6 (Facultatif) Sous Télécharger le(s) fichier(s) de sortie, cliquez sur le fichier zip et enregistrez-le sur votre disque. Voir aussi « Affichage du contenu » à la page 167 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 166 Gestion du contenu Création d'URL personnalisées Lorsque vous ajoutez un nouvel élément de contenu, une nouvelle réunion, un nouveau cours ou curriculum, un nouveau séminaire ou un nouvel événement, vous pouvez créer une URL personnalisée pour le contenu. Cette URL est unique dans tout le compte Acrobat Connect Pro et doit identifier le contenu. Ajout d'une URL personnalisée A. Partie non modifiable de l'URL définie par votre administrateur B. Partie personnalisable de l'URL Une adresse URL personnalisée peut être utilisée avec un élément de contenu à la fois. Par exemple, si vous affectez l'URL personnalisée /votrenom à un élément de contenu, vous ne pouvez pas l'affecter à un autre élément de contenu ou à une réunion, de même qu'un autre utilisateur partageant votre compte ne pourra pas affecter cette URL à un élément quelconque. Si vous supprimez le contenu qui utilise l'URL personnalisée, celle-ci devient réutilisable. Si l'URL personnalisée est déjà utilisée par un autre utilisateur, vous recevez un message d'erreur lorsque vous la tapez. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez contacter votre administrateur pour savoir qui utilise cette URL. Règles relatives aux URL personnalisées : • Vous ne pouvez pas modifier une URL personnalisée une fois créée. • Une URL personnalisée ne peut pas commencer par un chiffre (0 à 9). • Une URL personnalisée ne peut pas contenir de signes de ponctuation, d'espaces ou de codes de contrôle. • Si vous tapez des lettres majuscules, elles sont automatiquement converties en lettres minuscules pour respecter les conventions de casse appliquées aux URL. • N'utilisez jamais l'un des mots clés réservés suivants dans votre URL personnalisée. account content idle report acrobat course info sco adobe cs input search admin cs2 livecycle seminar administrator curriculum macromedia send api data meeting service app default metadata servlet archives download monitor soap breeze event open source builder fcs output src close flash photoshop stream com gateway presenter systemsUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 167 Gestion du contenu Voir aussi « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168 Affichage du contenu Vous pouvez ouvrir le contenu à visualiser à partir de la bibliothèque de contenu. Si vous connaissez son adresse URL, vous pouvez y accéder directement à l'aide d'un navigateur. Voir aussi « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163 « Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu » à la page 168 Affichage du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez dans la bibliothèque de contenu, et cliquez sur un nom de fichier pour afficher la page Informations sur le contenu associée. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Adresse URL d'affichage. Une nouvelle fenêtre de navigateur affiche le fichier ou la présentation sélectionné. Affichage du contenu dans un navigateur Web 1 Ouvrez une fenêtre de navigateur. 2 Entrez l'adresse URL du contenu dans le champ d'adresse du navigateur ou cliquez sur un lien contenu dans un message électronique. Envoi de l'URL d'un contenu par courrier électronique Chaque fichier de la bibliothèque de contenu possède une adresse URL unique qui permet aux utilisateurs d'afficher son contenu. Vous pouvez envoyer cette URL à d'autres personnes par courrier électronique à partir d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Acrobat Connect Pro crée une version unique de l'URL pour chaque destinataire du message. Par rapport au copiercoller de l'URL dans un message, cette fonction d'Acrobat Connect Pro Central présente les avantages suivants : • Acrobat Connect Pro peut vous envoyer un accusé de réception lorsque l'un des destinataires clique sur le lien. Vous pouvez suivre les utilisateurs qui ont consulté le contenu puisqu'une URL unique a été créée pour chaque destinataire. • Les destinataires peuvent consulter le contenu sans se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Et ceci, même si les autorisations associées au fichier de contenu dans la bibliothèque de contenu ne prévoient pas un affichage public. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez le fichier de contenu et cliquez sur son nom. common go producer formation connect home public user console hosted publish xmlUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 168 Gestion du contenu 3 Dans la barre de navigation, cliquez sur Envoyer le lien par message électronique. 4 Dans la page Envoyer le lien par message électronique, entrez les adresses de messagerie de tous les destinataires dans le champ A. Si nécessaire, séparez les adresses de messagerie par des virgules pour créer une adresse URL unique pour chaque destinataire de courrier électronique. 5 Modifiez les champs Objet et Corps du message selon vos besoins. Remarque : Ne supprimez pas les informations placées entre accolades (« {tracking-url} ») dans le corps du message. Il s'agit d'un espace réservé remplacé automatiquement par l'adresse URL du contenu dans le message électronique généré. 6 Sélectionnez Envoyer un accusé de réception à l'ouverture du message pour recevoir une notification par courrier électronique lorsqu'un destinataire consulte le fichier de contenu ; sinon, désactivez cette case à cocher. 7 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Voir aussi « Création d'URL personnalisées » à la page 166 « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163 Affichage des données relatives au contenu Affichage des données relatives à tout le contenu 1 Dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur Contenu > Tableau de bord du contenu. Le tableau de bord de contenu fournit une représentation graphique des données statistiques relatives à votre contenu. Les données reflètent l'ensemble du contenu de votre dossier Mon contenu et elles sont générées dans les catégories suivantes : Contenu le plus consulté ces 30 derniers jours Nombre de consultations. Présentations les plus efficaces ces 30 derniers jours Déterminé par le pourcentage de diapositives consultées par tous les participants. Contenu affiché le plus récemment ces 30 derniers jours Sous forme de liste, affiche le nom, le type de contenu, le nombre de consultations et la date de la dernière consultation du contenu. Le contenu affiché le plus récemment est listé en premier. Classement chronologique du contenu Sous forme de liste, affiche le nom, le type de contenu et la date de la dernière consultation du contenu. Le contenu affiché le plus récemment est listé en dernier. Cliquez sur un élément quelconque pour afficher la page Informations sur les contenus correspondante. 2 Pour imprimer les données, cliquez sur Version imprimable. Voir aussi « Types de fichiers pris en charge dans la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 169 Gestion du contenu Affichage de rapports sur chaque élément de contenu Remarque : Dans Acrobat Connect Pro 7 et ultérieur, vous pouvez recueillir des données sur différents éléments de contenu à partir du nouvel Assistant Rapports (dans Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur Rapports > Contenu). Cette section de la documentation décrit une ancienne version de l'interface permettant de consulter les données relatives aux différents éléments de contenu. Cette interface demeure dans le produit pour permettre la compatibilité avec les versions antérieures. Le nouvel Assistant Rapports est un outil plus performant. Vous pouvez télécharger des rapports lorsque cela s'avère nécessaire pour analyser des informations sur le mode d'utilisation du contenu. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez limiter les informations à afficher dans un rapport particulier en lui affectant des filtres. Lorsque les filtres sont appliqués à un rapport donné, le lien Filtres de rapport apparaît au-dessus de l'affichage du rapport. Les filtres que vous définissez s'appliquent à tous les rapports créés, tant au rapport en question qu'à toute autre fonctionnalité d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Par exemple, si vous créez un rapport de formation après avoir défini des filtres destinés à un rapport de contenu, ces filtres s'appliquent également au rapport de formation. Cette règle s'applique à toutes les plages de dates spécifiées. Si vous n'effacez pas un filtre de date défini pour un rapport, il s'applique à tous les rapports. Remarque : Les filtres de rapport ne sont enregistrés que pour la session en cours. Si vous avez défini des filtres de rapport, cliquez sur Enregistrer, puis déconnectez-vous d'Acrobat Connect Pro ; lors de votre prochaine connexion, les filtres de rapport précédemment définis ne sont pas conservés. En revanche, l'Assistant Rapports permet d'enregistrer les filtres d'une session à l'autre. Voir aussi « A propos des rapports Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 « Types de fichiers pris en charge dans la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163 Définition de filtres de rapport 1 Accédez à la page d'informations (par exemple, la page d'informations sur le contenu, sur les réunions ou sur les cours) du fichier pour lequel vous souhaitez définir des filtres de rapport. 2 Dans la page d'informations, cliquez sur le lien Rapports situé au-dessus de la barre de titre Informations sur le contenu. Un ensemble de liens de rapports apparaît au-dessus de la barre de titre. Résumé est mis en surbrillance et le rapport de synthèse de cette réunion apparaît sous l'en-tête Informations. 3 Cliquez sur le type de rapport pour lequel vous souhaitez définir des filtres. Les données du type de rapport que vous avez sélectionné apparaissent dans la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Filtres de rapport, situé à droite de l'étiquette Aucun filtre n'a été défini. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 170 Gestion du contenu Options Définir des filtres pour les rapports pour un curriculum 5 Définissez un ou plusieurs des filtres suivants : • Pour définir les filtres de plage de dates, cochez les cases Du et Au, et les dates et heures de début et de fin. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez une plage de dates pour le rapport Par diapositives, il affiche uniquement les diapositives visualisées au cours des dates spécifiées. • Pour définir des filtres pour des groupes, cliquez sur le lien Ajouter/Supprimer des groupes et cochez la case des groupes dont vous souhaitez assurer le suivi dans votre rapport. Les données contenues dans le rapport concernent uniquement les membres d'un groupe spécifique ayant participé à un événement. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs groupes, puis désélectionner n'importe quel groupe. • Pour sélectionner des membres de l'équipe (gestionnaires uniquement), cliquez soit sur Afficher les données des personnes que je gère directement, soit sur Afficher les données des personnes que je gère directement et indirectement. Pour supprimer les filtres que vous avez définis, cliquez sur Réinitialiser sur la page Définir des filtres pour les rapports. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer au bas de la page Définir des filtres pour les rapports. La page des rapports s'affiche à nouveau et contient les filtres définis, au-dessus de la barre d'affichage. Téléchargement de rapports 1 Accédez à la page d'informations (par exemple, la page d'informations sur le contenu, sur les réunions ou sur les cours) du fichier dont vous souhaitez télécharger le rapport. 2 Dans la page d'informations, cliquez sur le lien Rapports situé au-dessus de la barre de titre Informations sur le contenu. 3 Cliquez sur un type de rapport, par exemple Par diapositives ou Par questions. Résumé Le résumé fournit le nom du contenu, la date de dernière modification du contenu et le nombre de consultations de ce contenu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 171 Gestion du contenu Par diapositives ou Par pages (PDF) S'applique aux présentations uniquement. Un graphique à barres répertorie chaque diapositive de la présentation par son numéro et son nombre de consultations. Un tableau contenant les mêmes informations est affiché sous le graphique et inclut également la date de la dernière consultation de chaque diapositive. Par questions Un graphique à barres présente chaque question, codifiée par couleur comme correcte ou incorrecte, et le nombre de personnes y ayant répondu. Cliquez sur une question dans la barre pour afficher un graphique à secteurs accompagné d'un tableau contenant la clé et la distribution de réponse. La clé de réponse répertorie toutes les réponses possibles pour la question sélectionnée et leur numéro ou lettre de réponse correspondant(e). La distribution des réponses répertorie tous les choix de réponses sélectionnés pour cette question, signale la bonne réponse et indique le nombre d'utilisateurs qui ont sélectionné chaque réponse, ainsi que le pourcentage qu'ils représentent par rapport au nombre total d'utilisateurs. Enfin, le graphique répertorie tous les utilisateurs par leur nombre et leur pourcentage. Un tableau fournissant un aperçu de toutes les questions est affiché sous le graphique et répertorie chaque question par numéro, nom, nombre de réponses correctes, nombre de réponses incorrectes, pourcentage de réponses correctes, pourcentage de réponses incorrectes, ainsi que la note. Par réponses Un tableau présente la note maximale possible, la note d'admissibilité, la note moyenne et la note la plus élevée pour le questionnaire. Pour chaque question, le tableau indique également le numéro de la question, la question elle-même et la distribution de la réponse ; c'est-à-dire les réponses obtenues pour chaque question, le cas échéant. Cliquez sur le lien Afficher les réponses pour afficher un graphique à secteurs accompagné d'un tableau contenant la clé et la distribution de réponse. La clé de réponse répertorie toutes les réponses possibles pour la question sélectionnée et leur numéro ou lettre de réponse correspondant(e). La distribution des réponses répertorie tous les choix de réponses sélectionnés pour cette question, signale la bonne réponse et indique le nombre d'utilisateurs qui ont sélectionné chaque réponse, ainsi que le pourcentage qu'ils représentent par rapport au nombre total d'utilisateurs. Enfin, le graphique répertorie tous les utilisateurs par leur nombre et leur pourcentage. Remarque : Acrobat Connect Pro réinitialise les notes des questionnaires et des sondages chaque fois que l'utilisateur extrait le contenu. Cela signifie que si un utilisateur ferme le questionnaire sans l'avoir terminé, puis y revient ultérieurement, toutes les réponses précédentes seront perdues. Si vous ne souhaitez pas réinitialiser la note, et si vous avez accès à l'onglet Formation, vous pouvez créer un autre cours et sélectionner le contenu en question comme contenu du cours. Ainsi, vous avez transformé le contenu en un cours. Le bouton Masquer la distribution de réponse/Afficher la distribution de réponse est une option de permutation permettant d'afficher ou de masquer la distribution des réponses pour chaque question. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Télécharger les données. Il permet d'exporter toutes les données de rapport dans un fichier CSV. Vous pouvez enregistrer ou ouvrir le rapport. Si vous exécutez Acrobat Connect Pro Central dans le navigateur Internet Explorer et que vous choisissez d'ouvrir le rapport, Windows l'ouvre automatiquement dans Microsoft Excel. Dans ce cas, double-cliquez dans chaque cellule pour afficher ses informations. Une autre possibilité consiste à enregistrer le fichier CSV sur votre bureau, à sélectionner le Bloc-notes dans le menu Accessoires et à ouvrir le fichier dans ce dernier, facilitant ainsi sa lecture. En outre, si le bouton Version imprimable apparaît pour un rapport, vous pouvez cliquer sur son entrée pour exporter le rapport dans une fenêtre de navigateur et l'imprimer. Suppression de filtres de rapport 1 Accédez à la page d'informations (par exemple, la page d'informations sur le contenu, sur les réunions, sur les cours, etc.) du fichier dont vous souhaitez supprimer le filtre de rapport.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 172 Gestion du contenu 2 Dans la page d'informations, cliquez sur le lien Rapports situé au-dessus de la barre de titre Informations sur le contenu.. 3 Cliquez sur un type de rapport, soit Par diapositives, Par questions ou Par réponses. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Filtres de rapport. 5 Dans la page Définir les filtres, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour supprimer tous les filtres, cliquez sur Réinitialiser. • Pour supprimer un filtre spécifique, décochez la case et cliquez sur Enregistrer ; s'il s'agit d'un groupe, cliquez sur Ajouter/Supprimer des groupes, décochez la case du groupe concerné, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer.173 Chapitre 7 : Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Prise en main - Administration de comptes Utilisation de Connect Pro Central Connect Pro Central est une application Web qui permet d'utiliser des comptes Acrobat Connect Pro. Les administrateurs utilisent Connect Pro Central pour gérer un compte et les utilisateurs associés. Les hôtes de réunion l'utilisent quant à eux pour créer et planifier des réunions. Pour les gestionnaires de formation, Connect Pro Central sert à créer des cours et y inscrire des participants. Connexion à Connect Pro Central 1 Dans une fenêtre de navigateur, entrez l'adresse URL du compte indiquée dans le courrier de bienvenue. 2 Dans la page de connexion, entrez votre nom d'utilisateur et votre mot de passe. 3 Cliquez sur Connexion. Modification de votre profil 1 Cliquez sur Mon profil dans Connect Pro Central. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Mon profil pour afficher les informations utilisateur qui vous concernent. • Cliquez sur Changer mon mot de passe pour modifier le mot de passe que vous utilisez. • Cliquez sur Modifier mes préférences pour modifier le fuseau horaire et la langue que vous utilisez. • Cliquez sur Mes profils audio pour sélectionner ou créer un profil audio pour une conférence audio. • Cliquez sur Mes fournisseurs audio pour sélectionner ou créer vos propres fournisseurs audio. Ces fournisseurs ne sont pas disponibles pour les autres utilisateurs du compte. • Cliquez sur Appartenance au groupe pour consulter vos appartenances aux groupes. • Cliquez sur Organisation pour afficher le directeur dont vous dépendez et les informations relatives aux membres de l'équipe. Détermination du numéro de version d'Acrobat Connect Pro Connaître votre numéro de version peut s'avérer utile, en particulier si vous contactez l'équipe d'assistance Acrobat Connect Pro ou si vous signalez des problèmes avec une application. ? Utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • A la page de connexion de Connect Pro Central, placez le curseur sur le lien Aide. Le numéro de version apparaît. • Dans le champ d'adresse du navigateur, tapez http:///version.txt et cliquez ensuite sur Aller à. Recherche de contenu 1 Démarrez Connect Pro Central.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 174 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour rechercher du contenu auquel vous êtes autorisé à accéder : • Tapez directement les mots-clés dans la zone de texte Rechercher de la page d'accueil pour effectuer une recherche dans le contenu. • Cliquez sur le bouton de recherche avancée. 3 Si vous avez sélectionné Recherche avancée à l'étape 2, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Rechercher dans le contenu pour effectuer une recherche dans les enregistrements, les cours, les présentations ou dans tous ces éléments. Si nécessaire, utilisez le menu Afficher pour préciser votre recherche. • Sélectionnez Rechercher dans les titres et les descriptions pour effectuer une recherche dans le contenu, les réunions, les séminaires, le dossier ou dans tous ces éléments. Si nécessaire, utilisez le menu Afficher, le menu Champ et les champs Date de création pour affiner davantage votre recherche. 4 Tapez des mots-clés dans le champ de recherche et cliquez sur Aller à. Des résultats détaillés apparaissent dans le volet inférieur. Cliquez sur un en-tête de colonne pour trier les résultats. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le nom d'un élément pour afficher ce dernier. Cliquez sur un dossier parent pour ouvrir le dossier contenant l'élément. Remarque : Il est possible d'avoir accès à un objet, mais pas au dossier dans lequel il se trouve. Icônes Connect Pro Central Connect Pro Central utilise des icônes pour représenter les réunions, séminaires, présentations, cours et curriculums. Cours Présentation associée à un groupe de stagiaires inscrits et pour lequel un suivi individuel est assuré. Le cours peut être utilisé indépendamment ou en tant que partie intégrante d'un curriculum. Curriculum Groupe de cours et autre contenu pédagogique qui accompagne les étudiants dans leur propre cursus de formation. Un curriculum peut inclure du contenu, des présentations, des réunions, des séminaires Acrobat Connect Pro et du contenu externe, comme des sessions en salle et des listes d'ouvrages recommandés. Formation externe Dans un curriculum, formation se déroulant à l'extérieur d'Acrobat Connect Pro ; une formation en salle, par exemple. Evénement Un événement Acrobat Connect Pro inclut l'inscription, les invitations, les rappels et la création de rapports. Les événements impliquent généralement de nombreux participants et sont basés sur une réunion, un séminaire, une présentation ou une formation Acrobat Connect Pro. Réunion Réunion se déroulant en ligne et en temps réel, au sein de laquelle un présentateur ou un hôte peut montrer des diapositives ou des présentations multimédia, partager son écran, converser et diffuser du contenu audio et vidéo en direct. Salle de cours virtuelle Classe en ligne avec dispositions personnalisables et contenu archivé réutilisable. Les salles de cours virtuelles ont des fonctions audio et vidéo, ainsi que des ateliers destinés à l'apprentissage en collaboration. Séminaire Réunion planifiée concernant au moins 50 participants, dont l'interaction et la participation restent minimales. Archive Enregistrement d'une réunion ou d'un séminaire que les utilisateurs peuvent consulter à leur convenance.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 175 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Contenu Authorware Fichiers créés dans Macromedia Authorware, un produit Adobe. Authorware est un outil visuel permettant de créer des applications d'e-learning. Présentation Présentation créée avec Adobe Presenter, un module externe pour Microsoft PowerPoint qui permet aux utilisateurs d'ajouter des fichiers audio, des questionnaires et des fonctionnalités visuelles à une présentation PowerPoint. Les fichiers PPT et PPTX sont convertis en présentations lors de leur transfert dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Fichier Image (JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP) Les fichiers Image peuvent être des dessins, des photographies, des diagrammes, des graphiques, des icônes ou tout autre type de graphiques. Fichier FLV Fichier vidéo. Fichier HTML Fichier définissant la structure et la disposition d'un document Web à l'aide de différentes balises. Fichier MP3 Fichier audio. Fichier PDF Un fichier PDF Adobe. Fichier SWF Fichier multimédia lisible dans Flash Player. Création d'administrateurs Les administrateurs sont des utilisateurs chargés de gérer Acrobat Connect Pro à l'échelle de l'entreprise. Les administrateurs créent, suppriment et gèrent les comptes d'utilisateurs. Les administrateurs gèrent également les autorisations attribuées aux utilisateurs et aux groupes. Les administrateurs effectuent ces tâches à l'aide d'une application Web appelée Connect Pro Central. Il existe deux niveaux d'administrateur Acrobat Connect Pro, à savoir : administrateur et administrateur limité. Les administrateurs disposent de tous les privilèges d'administration, tandis que les administrateurs limités ne bénéficient que de certains privilèges. Les administrateurs ont la possibilité de définir les autorisations des administrateurs limités. Le premier administrateur est créé lors de l'installation d'Acrobat Connect Pro ou lors de la création du compte. L'administrateur peut à son tour créer d'autres administrateurs et administrateurs limités. Ainsi, un administrateur peut créer des comptes d'administrateurs limités destinés aux employés de l'assistance technique, qui viennent en aide aux utilisateurs d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Création d'un administrateur 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez un utilisateur et cliquez sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier l'appartenance à un groupe. 5 Sélectionnez le groupe Administrateurs et cliquez sur Ajouter. Création d'un administrateur limité 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez un utilisateur et cliquez sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier l'appartenance à un groupe. 5 Sélectionnez le groupe Administrateurs - Limités et cliquez sur Ajouter.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 176 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Définition d'autorisations pour le groupe des administrateurs limités 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez Administrateurs – Limités et cliquez sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier les autorisations d'administrateurs limités. 5 Cochez les cases en regard des autorisations que vous souhaitez accorder dans les sections suivantes, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisateurs et groupes L'option Afficher les données d'utilisateurs permet aux administrateurs limités d'afficher et d'utiliser les informations de l'onglet Administrateur > Utilisateurs et groupes. L'option Réinitialiser le mot de passe permet aux administrateurs limités de créer un mot de passe temporaire pour un utilisateur. Voir « Modification des informations sur l'utilisateur » à la page 204. L'option Modifier les utilisateurs et groupes actuels permet aux administrateurs limités de modifier les informations relatives aux utilisateurs et aux groupes. Voir « Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes » à la page 204. L'option Ajouter des utilisateurs et des groupes à l'aide de l'interface Web permet aux administrateurs limités d'utiliser l'interface Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes. L'option Ajouter des utilisateurs et des groupes à l'aide de la méthode d'importation CSV permet aux administrateurs limités d'importer des utilisateurs et des groupes à partir d'un fichier CSV (valeurs séparées par des virgules). Voir « Création et importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes » à la page 195. L'option Supprimer des utilisateurs et des groupes permet aux administrateurs limités de supprimer des utilisateurs et des groupes. Voir « Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes » à la page 204. L'option Modifier les champs du profil d'utilisateur permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administrateur > Utilisateurs et groupes > Personnaliser le profil utilisateur. Voir « Personnalisation des champs du profil utilisateur » à la page 197. L'option Modifier les stratégies de nom de connexion et de mot de passe permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes > Modifier les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. Voir « Définition des stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe » à la page 198. L'option Centres de coûts permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administrateur > Utilisateurs et groupes > Centres de coûts. Voir « Affectation de minutes de réunion à des centres de coûts » à la page 183. Gestion des comptes L'option Modifier les informations sur le compte permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administration > Compte > Modifier les infos dans le but de modifier la langue, le fuseau horaire et la stratégie d'événements utilisateur par défaut d'un compte. Les administrateurs limités peuvent également modifier les informations de contact principales d'un compte. L'option Recevoir des notifications sur la capacité et l'expiration du compte permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administration > Compte > Notifications. Voir « Modification des paramètres de notification » à la page 179. Personnalisation Permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administration > Personnalisation si la fonction de personnalisation est activée pour leur compte. Voir « Personnalisation de la conception d'un compte » à la page 179. Rapports L'option Afficher l'utilisation du disque et les rapports permet aux administrateurs limités d'afficher des rapports dans les sections suivantes de Connect Pro Central : Administration > Compte > Utilisation du disque ; Administration > Compte > Rapports ; Administration > Tableau de bord administratif.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 177 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro L'option Afficher les rapports sur l'utilisation du système permet aux administrateurs limités de consulter des rapports sur l'utilisation du système dans l'Assistant Rapports (cliquez sur l'onglet Rapports de Connect Pro Central). Voir « Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central » à la page 217. Conformité et contrôle Permet aux administrateurs limités d'accéder à l'onglet Administration > Conformité et contrôle afin de s'assurer que le compte respecte bien les normes gouvernementales en matière de confidentialité, de communication et d'archivage. Voir « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184. Autorisations Permet aux administrateurs limités de définir des autorisations relatives au contenu dans les bibliothèques Contenu, Formation, Réunions, Salles de séminaire et Gestion des événements de Connect Pro Central. Sélectionnez Définir autorisations dans la bibliothèque. Voir « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de contenu » à la page 215. 6 Cliquez sur Rétablir les valeurs par défaut pour rétablir les autorisations par défaut des administrateurs limités. Affichage et modification d'informations sur le compte La page Résumé du compte s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. Elle décrit les applications et les produits activés pour le compte en question. La plupart des informations de compte de la page Résumé du compte ne peuvent pas être modifiées via Connect Pro Central. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de compte suivants dans Connect Pro Central : fuseau horaire par défaut, langue par défaut, stratégie d'événements utilisateur (si votre compte comprend la fonction Evénements) et informations du contact principal. Les informations modifiées ici s'appliquent à tout le compte. (Pour modifier les informations de votre propre profil de compte utilisateur, cliquez sur Mon profil dans le coin supérieur droit et utilisez l'option Modifier mes préférences.) Affichage des informations sur le compte 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. Le résumé du compte affiche des informations détaillées sur votre compte et ses fonctionnalités. Les informations relatives à votre compte sont affichées sous les en-têtes Fonctions et Fonctions avancées. La coche en regard du nom de l'application signifie que celle-ci est activée. Fonctionnalités du système L'option Bande passante mensuelle indique le volume mensuel de données transitant par votre compte par rapport à la bande passante que vous êtes autorisé à utiliser. Utilisation disque (Mo) indique l'espace disque utilisé pour votre compte par rapport à l'espace disque que vous êtes autorisé à utiliser. Présentation Nombre d'auteurs que possède actuellement votre installation par rapport au nombre autorisé. Formation Modèle de tarification utilisé par votre société pour les formations. Gestionnaires de formation indique le nombre de gestionnaires que possède actuellement votre installation par rapport au nombre autorisé. Formation des stagiaires indique le nombre de stagiaires placés dans le groupe de stagiaires par rapport au nombre autorisé. (Seuls les membres de ce groupe peuvent afficher le contenu des formations.) Limite de licences d’apprentissage simultanées indique le nombre d'utilisateurs pouvant afficher le contenu de la formation simultanément. Réunion Modèle de tarification utilisé par votre société pour les participants. Hôtes de réunions indique le nombre d'hôtes que possède actuellement votre installation par rapport au nombre autorisé. Nbre max. de participants à une réunion indique le nombre d'utilisateurs pouvant participer à des réunions simultanément. (La Limite logicielle correspond au quota acheté et la Limite matérielle au quota imposé.) Utilisateurs simultanés par réunion correspond au nombre d'utilisateurs pouvant participer simultanément à une même réunion. Minutes Burst Pack correspond au nombre moyen de minutes prépayées. Un Burst Pack contient 5 000 minutes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 178 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Salles de séminaire Nombre d'hôtes de séminaire que compte actuellement votre installation par rapport au nombre autorisé. Gestion des événements Nombre de responsables d'événement que compte actuellement votre installation par rapport au nombre autorisé. Activation de FlashPaper Ce produit Adobe permet de convertir des fichiers HTML, Microsoft Word et PowerPoint en documents Flash pour le Web. Adobe a arrêté le développement de nouvelles fonctionnalités pour FlashPaper. Adobe recommande l'utilisation d'un fichier PDF pour présenter et partager les documents dans Acrobat Connect Pro. Personnalisation et changement de conception Cette fonctionnalité permet de personnaliser votre compte et d'y appliquer votre marque. Connexion SSL requise Cette fonctionnalité permet de déterminer si votre compte utilise ou non le protocole SSL pour crypter toutes les communications entre le serveur et les utilisateurs connectés. Rapports Fonctionnalité qui vous donne accès à l'Assistant Rapports. Modification des informations du compte 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier les infos. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour changer la langue par défaut, sélectionnez la langue voulue dans le menu déroulant Langue par défaut. • Pour modifier le fuseau horaire par défaut, sélectionnez celui qui convient dans le menu contextuel Fuseau horaire par défaut. • Pour modifier les règles d'inscription aux événements, sélectionnez une option dans le menu contextuel Stratégie d'événements utilisateur. • Pour modifier les informations de contact, indiquez un prénom, un nom et une adresse de messagerie dans les zones de texte Contact principal. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Modèles de tarification Le modèle de tarification détermine le montant payé par votre société pour son utilisation. Il est associé aux informations de quotas et d'utilisation affichées sous Fonctionnalités du système. Il existe plusieurs modèles pour les formations et les réunions. Il existe un modèle de tarification pour la formation : Modèle de tarification des stagiaires simultanés Ce modèle limite le nombre de stagiaires pouvant être actifs dans tous les cours ou curriculums au même moment. Il existe deux modèles de tarification distincts pour les réunions ; consultez les informations appropriées concernant le modèle acheté par votre société. Modèle de tarification de l'organisateur Ce modèle limite le nombre d'utilisateurs qui peuvent démarrer des réunions. Chaque organisateur peut démarrer une seule réunion active à la fois. Chaque réunion peut compter le nombre de participants défini dans le fichier de licence. Un organisateur doit être présent pour lancer la réunion, et celle-ci se termine lorsque tous les organisateurs la quittent. Modèle de tarification des participants Ce modèle limite le nombre de participants pouvant être actifs dans une réunion au même moment. Cette limite ne s'applique pas aux personnes participant aux séminaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 179 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas avoir de quotas pour les organisateurs nommés et les participants simultanés en même temps. Les quotas des salles de séminaire n'ont aucune incidence sur les autres quotas. La limite de participation à un séminaire permet de déterminer le nombre simultané de participants actifs à un séminaire. Cette limite s'applique à chaque salle de séminaire. Les modèles de tarification d'organisateur nommé et de participants simultanés affichent les mêmes champs. Toutefois, selon le modèle de tarification dont votre société a fait l'acquisition, certains champs ne sont pas pertinents : • Si votre société utilise le modèle de participants simultanés, le champ Utilisateurs simultanés par réunion n'est pas pertinent car le compte est lié aux informations du champ Nbre max. de participants à une réunion. Si le champ Utilisateurs simultanés par réunion affiche la valeur Illimité, cela signifie que Connect Pro ne limite pas la taille de la salle. Il existe néanmoins une limite supérieure indiquant le nombre d'utilisateurs simultanés que le compte peut prendre en charge. • Si votre société utilise le modèle d'organisateur nommé, Connect Pro indique la capacité maximale de la salle. Cette information apparaît dans le champ Utilisateurs simultanés par réunion. Le champ Nbre max. de participants à une réunion n'est pas pertinent lors de l'utilisation du modèle d'organisateur nommé car Connect Pro utilise le champ Utilisateurs simultanés par réunion pour limiter le nombre d'organisateurs. Cette limite est généralement définie sur 100 utilisateurs. Modification des paramètres de notification Acrobat Connect Pro avise l'administrateur des comptes (et d'autres utilisateurs éventuellement) lorsque la licence d'un compte arrive à expiration et lorsque qu'un compte atteint ses limites de capacité. 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 L'option Compte étant sélectionnée, cliquez sur Notifications, puis choisissez les paramètres voulus. Affichage des informations sur l'utilisation du compte 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central et cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 2 Cliquez sur Tableau de bord administratif pour afficher la représentation graphique de l'utilisation de votre quota dans le système. 3 Placez le pointeur sur n'importe quelle barre pour afficher la valeur maximale correspondante. La barre grise représente votre utilisation actuelle et la barre vert foncé votre limite. 4 Cliquez sur n'importe quelle barre d'un graphique de quota de groupe pour afficher une page d'informations sur le groupe. La page d'informations sur le groupe indique le nom et la description du groupe. Cliquez sur le bouton Voir les membres du groupe pour afficher les membres actuels du groupe et ajouter de nouveaux membres. Personnalisation de la conception d'un compte Si votre société a acheté les fonctionnalités de personnalisation, le lien Personnalisation de l'onglet Administration est activé. Cette fonction vous permet de mettre Acrobat Connect Pro aux couleurs de votre société. Pour visualiser l'effet de la personnalisation, déconnectez-vous de Connect Pro Central, reconnectez-vous, puis actualisez l'affichage du navigateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 180 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Personnalisation de l'interface utilisateur de Connect Pro Central Le lien de personnalisation de la bannière vous permet de personnaliser les éléments suivants de l'interface utilisateur de Connect Pro Central : • la couleur d'arrière-plan ; • la couleur du texte des liens situés en haut (dans le cas des liens Mon profil, Aide et Déconnexion, dans le coin supérieur droit) ; • la couleur du texte de navigation (pour les liens situés sous la barre d'onglet) ; • la couleur de surbrillance de la sélection ; • la couleur des en-têtes de tableau (pour les barres qui identifient les titres des pages ou les colonnes dans les pages de liste) ; • le logo de la bannière, l'image qui apparaît dans le coin supérieur gauche de Connect Pro Central. L'utilisateur peut cliquer sur cette image pour accéder à l'adresse Web que vous définissez. Cette image doit être un fichier JPEG, PNG, GIF ou BMP et sa taille doit être de 360 x 50 pixels. Paramètres de l'onglet Personnaliser Central A. Logo de la bannière B. Texte de navigation C. Mise en surbrillance de la sélection D. En-tête des tableaux 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 2 Cliquez sur Personnalisation. 3 Dans la liste située à droite de la palette de couleurs, cliquez sur l'élément dont vous souhaitez modifier la couleur. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur l'une des couleurs de la palette. • Entrez le code de la couleur, par exemple #33CC66 dans la zone de texte. 5 Pour rétablir la nuance d'origine, cliquez sur Effacer. Pour rétablir toutes les couleurs et le logo de la bannière par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser avec les valeurs par défaut. A C B DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 181 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 6 Pour sélectionner un logo de bannière, cliquez sur Parcourir sous Logo de bannière et localisez l'image voulue (fichier JPEG, PNG, GIF ou BMP). Si vous ne sélectionnez aucun logo, c'est celui d'Acrobat Connect Pro qui apparaît dans la bannière. 7 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. L'affichage des modifications demande 5 à 10 secondes. Si rien ne se passe, actualisez la page. Remarque : Une fois le logo de bannière sélectionné, il apparaît dans la zone d'aperçu. Lorsque vous cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les changements, la zone d'aperçu de la bannière affiche parfois l'ancienne bannière. En revanche, le nouveau logo s'affiche bien pour les utilisateurs. Pour voir la bannière correcte, vous devez vous déconnecter de Connect Pro Central, vous reconnecter et actualiser le navigateur. Personnalisation de la page de connexion Le lien Personnaliser la connexion permet de personnaliser la page de connexion. Vous pouvez modifier l'un des attributs suivants : • Couleur du titre de la réunion • Couleur du nom de connexion • Couleur d'arrière-plan (couleur de la zone de connexion) • Image du logo principal ; il doit s'agir d'un fichier JPEG, PNG, GIF ou BMP et sa taille doit être de 410 x 310 pixels. Paramètres de l'onglet Personnaliser la connexion A. Logo principal B. Titre de la réunion C. Texte pour l'identifiant D. Arrière-plan 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 2 Cliquez sur Personnalisation. 3 Cliquez sur Personnaliser la connexion.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 182 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 4 Dans la liste située à droite de la palette de couleurs, cliquez sur l'élément dont vous souhaitez modifier la couleur. 5 Cliquez sur l'une des couleurs de la palette. 6 Pour rétablir les précédents paramètres de l'échantillon, cliquez sur Effacer. Pour rétablir le réglage d'origine, cliquez sur Réinitialiser avec les valeurs par défaut. 7 Pour sélectionner un logo principal, cliquez sur Parcourir sous l'en-tête Logo principal et localisez l'image désirée (fichier JPEG, PNG, GIF ou BMP). Si vous ne sélectionnez aucun logo, c'est celui d'Acrobat Connect Pro qui apparaît comme logo principal. 8 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. L'affichage des modifications demande 5 à 10 secondes. Si rien ne se passe, actualisez la page. Remarque : Une fois le logo sélectionné, il apparaît dans la zone d'aperçu. Lorsque vous cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les changements, la zone d'aperçu de la bannière affiche parfois l'ancien logo. En revanche, le nouveau logo s'affiche bien pour les utilisateurs. Pour voir le logo correct, vous devez vous déconnecter de Connect Pro Central, vous reconnecter et actualiser le navigateur. Personnalisation de l'aspect des réunions Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting L'option Personnaliser la réunion permet de modifier l'aspect des réunions Acrobat Connect Pro Meeting. Les paramètres définis ici s'appliquent à chaque réunion créée à partir de votre compte. (Ces paramètres ne concernent pas la disposition des réunions.) L'option Personnaliser la réunion vous permet de modifier les éléments suivants : • Couleur de surbrillance de l'élément sélectionné dans les principaux écrans • Couleur de surbrillance de l'élément sélectionné dans les écrans secondaires (sous-menu apparaissant lorsque l'utilisateur sélectionne un élément dans le menu principal) • Couleur de survol des boutons (couleur du contour d'un bouton lorsque vous le survolez avec la souris) • Couleur d'arrière-plan • Couleur de la barre de titre (couleur du titre du module) • Logo de réunion (fichier de 50 x 20 pixels au format JPG, PNG, BMP ou GIF) • URL du logo (site Web vers lequel sont dirigés les utilisateurs lorsqu'ils cliquent sur le logo de la réunion)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 183 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Paramètres de l'onglet Personnaliser la réunion A. Logo de la réunion B. Mise en surbrillance des menus 1 C. Mise en surbrillance des menus 2 D. Barre de titres E. Arrière-plan 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 2 Cliquez sur Personnalisation. 3 Cliquez sur Personnaliser la réunion. 4 Dans la liste située à droite de la palette de couleurs, cliquez sur l'élément dont vous souhaitez modifier la couleur. 5 Cliquez sur l'une des couleurs de la palette. 6 Pour rétablir les précédents paramètres de l'échantillon, cliquez sur Effacer. Pour rétablir le réglage d'origine, cliquez sur Réinitialiser avec les valeurs par défaut. 7 Pour sélectionner un logo de réunion, cliquez sur Parcourir sous l'en-tête Logo de la réunion et localisez l'image désirée (fichier JPEG, PNG, GIF ou BMP). Si vous ne sélectionnez aucun logo, c'est celui d'Acrobat Connect Pro qui apparaît par défaut. 8 Entrez une URL dans la zone de texte Adresse URL du logo afin d'indiquer l'adresse associée au logo de réunion. (Cette URL constitue le lien dont le logo est l'origine.) 9 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les modifications. L'affichage des modifications demande 5 à 10 secondes. Si rien ne se passe, actualisez la page. Affectation de minutes de réunion à des centres de coûts Lorsque vous importez des utilisateurs dans Acrobat Connect Pro, vous pouvez associer chacun d'eux à un centre de coûts. Si des utilisateurs sont associés à des centres de coûts, vous pouvez activer la génération de rapports du centre de coûts afin de déterminer dans quelle proportion chaque centre de coûts utilise Acrobat Connect Pro. La méthode la plus simple pour associer des utilisateurs à des centres de coûts consiste à importer les utilisateurs dans un fichier CSV ou à effectuer une synchronisation avec un service d'annuaire LDAP. Si vous n'utilisez aucune de ces méthodes, vous pouvez également associer manuellement un utilisateur à un centre de coûts.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 184 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Si la génération de rapports du centre de coûts est désactivée, aucun suivi des réunions n'est effectué à des fins de rapport. Si les utilisateurs ne sont pas affectés à des centres de coûts et si les réunions sont facturées par participant, Acrobat Connect Pro n'effectue pas le suivi des données pour ces utilisateurs. Voir aussi « Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à partir de fichiers CSV » à la page 198 Association manuelle d'utilisateurs à des centres de coûts 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration, puis sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez un utilisateur dans la liste et cliquez sur Informations. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier les infos. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Choisir en regard de la zone Centre de coûts. 6 Sélectionnez un centre de coûts dans la liste. Si le centre de coûts ne figure pas dans la liste, cliquez sur le signe plus (+) pour l'ajouter. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Activation de la génération de rapports du centre de coûts 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes, puis sur Centres de coûts. 4 Sélectionnez une case d'option pour déterminer le mode d'affectation des minutes. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Autoriser chaque hôte de réunion à définir le mode d'affectation des minutes, l'hôte pourra faire son choix dans un menu déroulant Centre de coûts lors de la création d'une réunion. 5 Pour rechercher, ajouter ou modifier un centre de coûts, cliquez sur Gérer les centres de coûts. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Désactivation de la génération de rapports du centre de coûts 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes, puis sur Centres de coûts. 4 Désactivez l'option Activer la génération de rapports du centre de coûts. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle Dans certains secteurs réglementés, les sociétés doivent se conformer à des normes gouvernementales. Ces normes indiquent quand et comment les employés sont autorisés à communiquer et si la société est tenue de consigner et d'archiver les communications. Par exemple, certaines sociétés doivent consigner toutes les communications effectuées sur leurs réseaux. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 185 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Les sociétés peuvent aussi choisir de conserver les communications au sein du personnel et celles effectuées entre les employés et les utilisateurs externes afin de répondre aux normes de contrôle interne. Les paramètres de conformité et de contrôle permettent de se conformer aux normes et de contrôler le déroulement général des réunions. Les paramètres de conformité et de contrôle s'appliquent globalement à l'ensemble du compte Acrobat Connect Pro. Les valeurs définies s'appliquent immédiatement à toutes les réunions commençant après l'enregistrement des paramètres. Les paramètres ne s'appliquent pas aux réunions en cours au moment de l'enregistrement. Ils s'appliquent aux réunions récentes, jusqu'à 10 minutes après la fin de la réunion. Remarque : Certaines fonctions de conformité ne s'appliquent pas aux clients hébergés. Voir aussi « Partage d'un écran » à la page 29 Personnalisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 Cliquez sur Conformité et contrôle. 4 Cliquez sur Gestion des modules et effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez les modules que vous souhaitez désactiver dans les salles de réunion et les classes virtuelles. Si vous désactivez un module, ce module et toutes les informations qu'il contient sont effacés dans chaque salle de réunion à laquelle le module était associé. La désactivation de modules permet de libérer de l'espace dans les dispositions de salles de réunion. Créez de nouveaux modèles de réunion ou les hôtes de réunion peuvent également redimensionner les modules dans les salles de réunion afin de combler l'espace libéré. • Indiquez si vous souhaitez effacer l'historique du module lorsqu'une nouvelle réunion débute. • Indiquez si vous souhaitez désactiver les conversations privées. 5 Cliquez sur Partager les paramètres et effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez les paramètres qui limiteront les modalités de partage des informations entre les utilisateurs. • Pour empêcher les utilisateurs de partager des contenus non autorisés, sélectionnez les options suivantes : Désactiver le partage du Bureau, Désactiver le partage de Windows et Désactiver le partage d'applications. Ces paramètres constituent différents types de partage d'écran. Sélectionnez également l'option Autoriser uniquement le partage de documents à partir de la bibliothèque de contenu et de la bibliothèque des cours. Ce paramètre empêche les utilisateurs de transférer du contenu directement dans la salle de réunion. Un hôte ou un présentateur peut uniquement partager des contenus préalablement transférés dans Connect Pro Central. • Pour empêcher les utilisateurs de partager des applications ou processus non autorisés, sélectionnez Limiter le partage de fenêtres, d'applications et de Bureaux uniquement aux processus sélectionnés. Indiquez dans les zones de texte des applications Windows et Mac OS distinctes. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration du paramètre, cliquez sur les liens Exemple à côté des zones de texte. La liste des éléments disponibles apparaît lorsque les utilisateurs sélectionnent Windows ou Applications dans la fenêtre Démarrer le partage d'écran. • Si vous sélectionnez l'option Autoriser le transfert de documents uniquement à partir des groupes sélectionnés cidessous, seuls les membres des groupes sélectionnés peuvent transférer des documents dans les salles de réunion. Le groupe Auteurs est ajouté automatiquement à la sélection lorsque vous enregistrez les modifications. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrement et avis, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes :UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 186 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Remarque : Seul le paramètre Activer l'avis de conformité est accessible aux clients hébergés. Les clients hébergés ne peuvent ni forcer les paramètres d'enregistrement, ni activer les transcriptions de conversation. • Sélectionnez Activer l'avis de conformité et entrez un texte contraignant tous les utilisateurs à accepter les conditions stipulées avant de rejoindre la salle de réunion. Chaque acceptation est consignée dans le journal du serveur. Par exemple, les clients bénéficiaires d'une licence peuvent utiliser cet avis pour informer les utilisateurs que la réunion est enregistrée ou non. • Pour enregistrer toutes les réunions, sélectionnez les options Verrouiller les paramètres d'enregistrement pour toutes les réunions et Toujours enregistrer toutes les réunions (activé). Personne ne peut alors arrêter l'enregistrement, pas même l'hôte de la réunion. Seuls les administrateurs peuvent accéder aux enregistrements forcés, sauf si vous sélectionnez l'option Publier des liens d'enregistrement dans des dossiers de réunion. Dans ce cas, l'hôte de la réunion peut accéder à l'enregistrement grâce au lien proposé dans le dossier de la réunion. L'hôte de la réunion peut modifier l'enregistrement forcé, mais les administrateurs conservent un accès à l'enregistrement original, si nécessaire. La zone réservée aux présentateurs et les ateliers ne font l'objet d'aucun enregistrement. Si vous devez enregistrer toutes les activités de réunion, sélectionnez Désactiver les ateliers sur la page Partager les paramètres. • Sélectionnez Ne jamais enregistrer de réunion (désactivé) afin de désactiver la commande Réunion > Enregistrer la réunion dans toutes les salles de réunion. • Sélectionnez Activer les transcriptions de conversation pour consigner tous les messages de conversation sur le serveur. Les transcriptions contiennent le nom de la salle, le nom de l'expéditeur, le nom du destinataire, la date, l'heure et le corps de chaque message de la conversation. Les transcriptions sont stockées sur le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro à l'emplacement suivant : dossier d'installation\content\id_compte\id-sco-version\output\ (par exemple, C:\breeze\content\7\21838-1\output). Le nom du fichier se présente comme suit : nomsalle _ date _ heure .xml. Les transcriptions de conversion ne permettent pas de consigner le texte saisi dans le module Note ni les conversations tenues dans les ateliers. Pour enregistrer l'intégralité du texte des conversations, désactivez le module Note et les ateliers. 7 Cliquez sur Paramètres de formation et indiquez si vous souhaitez activer l'inscription ouverte. 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos changements. Indication des applications à partager (Windows) Pour empêcher les utilisateurs de partager des applications ou des processus non autorisés, vous pouvez créer une liste blanche répertoriant les applications autorisées. La liste blanche répertorie les applications ou les processus auxquels les utilisateurs Connect Pro ont accès et qu'ils peuvent partager. 1 Sélectionnez Limiter le partage de fenêtres, d'applications et de Bureaux uniquement aux processus sélectionnés. 2 Recherchez le nom de l'application exécutable en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Accédez au dossier des applications (il s'agit en général du dossier de programmes C:\Program Files\) et lisez le nom du fichier exécutable de l'application. Par exemple, le nom du fichier exécutable de Microsoft Office PowerPoint est POWERPNT.EXE. • Démarrez le Gestionnaire des tâches Windows (cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une zone vide de la barre des tâches Windows et sélectionnez Gestionnaire des tâches dans le menu contextuel). Sélectionnez ensuite l'onglet Processus pour afficher la liste de tous les processus en cours d'exécution. 3 Saisissez les noms des différents exécutables dans le champ de texte des applications Windows. Séparez les noms des différentes applications à l'aide du signe deux-points.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 187 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Indication des applications à partager (Mac OS) Pour empêcher les utilisateurs de partager des applications ou des processus non autorisés, vous pouvez créer une liste blanche répertoriant les applications autorisées. La liste blanche répertorie les applications ou les processus auxquels les utilisateurs Connect Pro ont accès et qu'ils peuvent partager. 1 Sélectionnez Limiter le partage de fenêtres, d'applications et de Bureaux uniquement aux processus sélectionnés. 2 Recherchez le nom de l'application exécutable en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Accédez au dossier des applications et lisez le nom du fichier exécutable de l'application. • Ouvrez le Moniteur d'activité (Mac OS X 10.3 ou versions ultérieures) ou le Visualiseur de processus (Mac OS X 10.0 et 10.2). Dans le menu contextuel Afficher, sélectionnez Toutes les opérations pour répertorier tous les processus en cours d'exécution. 3 Saisissez les noms des différents exécutables dans le champ de texte des applications Mac OS. Séparez les noms des différentes applications à l'aide du signe deux-points. Affichage des enregistrements forcés 1 Dans Connect Pro Central, les administrateurs peuvent cliquer sur Contenu > Enregistrements forcés pour afficher tous les enregistrements forcés liés à un compte. 2 Cliquez sur le nom d'un enregistrement pour en afficher les détails. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Modifier afin de modifier le titre, le résumé ou la langue de l'enregistrement. • Cliquez sur Adresse URL d'affichage pour afficher l'enregistrement. Création d'un lien vers un enregistrement forcé Les liens pointent vers la plus récente version de l'enregistrement. Si l'enregistrement est modifié d'une quelconque manière (soit directement, soit par le biais d'un lien), les modifications se répercutent dans tous les liens menant à l'enregistrement. 1 Dans Connect Pro Central, les administrateurs peuvent cliquer sur Contenu > Enregistrements forcés pour afficher tous les enregistrements forcés liés à un compte. 2 Sélectionnez la case correspondant à la réunion pour laquelle vous souhaitez créer un lien. 3 Cliquez sur Créer un lien. 4 Localisez le dossier de contenu dans lequel vous souhaitez ajouter le lien. 5 Cliquez sur Créer un lien. Suppression d'un enregistrement forcé Seuls les administrateurs sont en mesure de supprimer des enregistrements forcés. 1 Dans Connect Pro Central, cliquez sur Contenu > Enregistrements forcés afin d'afficher tous les enregistrements forcés d'un compte. 2 Sélectionnez la case correspondant à la réunion pour laquelle vous souhaitez effectuer la suppression. 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 188 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Configuration du catalogue des formations Par défaut, seuls les administrateurs ont accès au catalogue des formations. Un administrateur doit définir les autorisations concernant le catalogue des formations pour que les gestionnaires de formation puissent l'utiliser. Les administrateurs sont en mesure de créer tout type de structure de dossiers et d'autorisations. Par exemple, un administrateur peut accorder à l'ensemble du groupe des gestionnaires de formation l'autorisation de gérer le dossier racine du catalogue des formations. Autre exemple : un administrateur pourrait créer des dossiers pour chaque gestionnaire de formation. Création d'un nom et d'une URL personnalisés pour le catalogue des formations La création d'une URL personnalisée est facultative. Si vous n'en créez pas, le système en génère une, mais il est cependant plus simple d'utiliser une URL que vous créez. 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Formation > Catalogue des formations > Modifier les informations. 3 Entrez le nom du dossier de niveau supérieur. 4 Entrez une adresse URL personnalisée. Tous les signets de contenu définis dans le catalogue des formations utilise cette URL personnalisée. Si vous modifiez l'URL personnalisée, les signets existants sont rompus. 5 (Facultatif) Entrez la description du dossier dans le champ Résumé. Création d'une structure de dossiers et définition d'autorisations 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Formation > Catalogue des formations. 3 Si vous souhaitez que les gestionnaires de formation créent leurs propres dossiers et définissent les autorisations correspondantes, ouvrez le dossier racine, puis cliquez sur Définir autorisations. 4 Sélectionnez Directeurs de formation, puis cliquez sur Ajouter pour leur attribuer les autorisations concernant le dossier racine. 5 Si vous souhaitez créer une structure de dossiers, placez-vous dans le dossier racine, cliquez sur Nouveau dossier, puis attribuez-lui un nom et, éventuellement, une description. 6 Cliquez sur Définir autorisations afin de configurer les autorisations du nouveau dossier. 7 Sélectionnez tous les groupes et utilisateurs auxquels vous souhaitez attribuer les autorisations, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 8 Vous pouvez recommencer cette procédure pour créer toutes les structures de dossier et les autorisations nécessaires. Rubriques Procédures pour Connect Pro Central Contenu • « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 • « Transfert du contenu » à la page 163 • « Affichage des données relatives au contenu » à la page 168UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 189 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Formation • « A propos d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Training » à la page 74 • « Création de cours de formation » à la page 81 • « Création de curriculums de formation » à la page 88 • « Création de classes virtuelles » à la page 101 • « Contrôle de la formation avec des rapports » à la page 107 • « Gestion du catalogue des formations » à la page 114 Réunions • « Notions de base de Meeting » à la page 4 • « Création de réunions » à la page 8 • « Démarrage de réunions » à la page 14 • « Démarrage d'une conférence audio à l'aide d'un profil audio » à la page 11 • « Création et utilisation de modèles de salles de réunion » à la page 12 • « Partage d'un document ou d'un fichier PDF » à la page 33 • « Partage d'une présentation » à la page 31 • « Transfert et gestion de fichiers à l'aide du module Partage de fichiers » à la page 38 • « Mise à jour des réunions » à la page 19 • « Affichage des données relatives aux réunions » à la page 26 Salles de séminaire • « A propos des séminaires » à la page 67 • « Création d'un séminaire » à la page 68 • « Rapports de séminaires » à la page 72 Gestion des événements • « Création d'un événement » à la page 126 • « Modification d'un événement existant » à la page 130 Rapports • « Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 • « Affichage des données relatives aux réunions » à la page 26 Administration • « Affichage et modification d'informations sur le compte » à la page 177 • « Modification des paramètres de notification » à la page 179 • « Utilisation des paramètres de conformité et de contrôle » à la page 184UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 190 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro • « Configuration des fournisseurs audio pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 190 • « Affectation de minutes de réunion à des centres de coûts » à la page 183 • « Création d'administrateurs » à la page 175 • « Création et importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes » à la page 195 • « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 208 • « Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes » à la page 204 • « Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central » à la page 217 Configuration des fournisseurs audio pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle A propos des fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle Les fournisseurs audio sont des entreprises qui fournissent des services de conférence audio fonctionnant avec Connect Pro. Les administrateurs configurent les fournisseurs audio que peuvent utiliser tous les utilisateurs d'un compte. Les hôtes configurent les fournisseurs pour une utilisation particulière, une réunion par exemple. Les administrateurs de compte comme les hôtes peuvent configurer un fournisseur audio pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle. La configuration d'un fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle comprend les détails nécessaires pour que les hôtes et les participants rejoignent une conférence audio. Il s'agit notamment des numéros de téléphone et des étapes nécessaires à la connexion à la conférence audio. La configuration indique également les options définies par l'hôte. Par exemple, les administrateurs configurent les tonalités et les pauses de la numérotation de connexion à une réunion. Les hôtes fournissent l'ID de réunion et les mots de passe qu'utilisent les participants pour se joindre à la configuration audio. Lorsque vous configurez un fournisseur audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle, les hôtes de la réunion peuvent créer des profils audio qui correspondent au fournisseur. Les profils audio contiennent les paramètres de conférence audio utilisés pour démarrer une conférence audio. Les fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle comprennent les types suivants : • Fournisseurs de téléphonie intégrés qui ont été activés pour la fonctionnalité de voix universelle. • Fournisseurs configurés par l'utilisateur, par l'hôte d'une réunion ou l'administrateur de compte. Pour plus d'informations sur les fournisseurs Connect Pro, consultez la section « Options de conférence audio » à la page 144. Affichage de fournisseurs audio Tous les fournisseurs audio disponibles pour un compte apparaissent dans la fenêtre Informations sur le fournisseur. Chaque fournisseur audio est configuré à l'aide d'informations descriptives et d'une séquence de numérotation permettant d'établir la connexion à une conférence audio. Vous pouvez afficher les informations associées à un fournisseur audio sur le compte. Seuls les fournisseurs activés peuvent être modifiés. Remarque : Les administrateurs, les administrateurs limités et les hôtes peuvent accéder à cette fenêtre. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour afficher la liste des fournisseurs : • (Administrateurs) Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Fournisseurs audio.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 191 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro • (Hôtes) Cliquez sur Mon profil dans l'angle supérieur droit de la fenêtre Connect Pro, puis cliquez sur Mes fournisseurs audio. 2 Pour afficher les informations concernant un fournisseur, sélectionnez le fournisseur dans la liste. Fournisseurs audio disponibles et informations sur les conférences audio d'un fournisseur Voir aussi « Utilisation de la fonctionnalité de voix universelle » à la page 145 « Création et utilisation de profils audio » à la page 9 Création ou modification de fournisseurs audio Utilisez la fenêtre Nouveau fournisseur audio/Modifier le fournisseur audio pour configurer les fournisseurs audio avec fonctionnalité de voix universelle. Les champs de la boîte de dialogue Nouveau fournisseur audio/Modifier le fournisseur audio comportant un astérisque rouge sont obligatoires. Lorsque vous ajoutez un fournisseur audio à un compte, le fournisseur apparaît dans la fenêtre Informations sur le fournisseur (Administration > Fournisseurs audio ou Mon profil > Mes fournisseurs audio). UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 192 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Fenêtre Nouveau fournisseur audio 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour afficher la liste des fournisseurs : • (Administrateurs) Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Acrobat Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Fournisseurs audio. • (Hôtes) Cliquez sur Mon profil dans l'angle supérieur droit de la fenêtre Connect Pro, puis cliquez sur Mes fournisseurs audio. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour ajouter des détails sur la conférence pour un fournisseur : • Pour ajouter un fournisseur, cliquez sur Nouveau fournisseur. • Pour modifier un fournisseur configuré par l'utilisateur, sélectionnez le fournisseur dans le volet de gauche et cliquez sur Modifier. 3 Ajoutez ou modifiez les informations détaillées d'identification de la conférence, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Nom du fournisseur Nom du fournisseur audio, Premiere par exemple. Etat du fournisseur (Activé/Désactivé) Seuls les fournisseurs activés peuvent être modifiés. Lorsque les hôtes configurent un profil audio pour une conférence audio, ils ne voient que les fournisseurs activés. Vous pouvez activer plusieurs fournisseurs pour un compte. Important : La désactivation d'un fournisseur désactive également tous les profils audio en cours pour ce fournisseur et dissocie les profils des réunions. URL Lien vers une page d'informations. Par exemple, cette page peut contenir des informations détaillées sur le compte de la conférence que les hôtes peuvent utiliser lorsqu'ils configurent leur profil audio. La page d'informations peut également être une page d'inscription pour l'achat d'un compte de conférence auprès d'un fournisseur audio. Les administrateurs de compte se chargent généralement de la création de ces pages d'informations. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 193 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Numéros de connexion Numéros permettant d'établir la connexion à une réunion. Pour ajouter des numéros de connexion, cliquez sur Ajouter numéro, sélectionnez le mot Emplacement, puis saisissez un nom, par exemple Interne ou le nom du pays. Cliquez sur le mot Numéro et saisissez le numéro de connexion. Les numéros de connexion apparaissent dans le coin supérieur droit de la salle de réunion. Etapes de connexion Séquence de tonalités DTMF et de pauses qui permet d'établir la connexion à une conférence audio. La séquence de numérotation comprend également le numéro de conférence en tant que première étape. Définition d'une séquence de numérotation La séquence de numérotation, ou étapes de numérotation, est une série de tonalités DTMF et de pauses qui permet d'établir la connexion à une conférence audio. Dans les comptes hébergés, le serveur Acrobat Connect Pro utilise la séquence de numérotation pour se connecter en arrière-plan à la conférence audio lorsque l'hôte rejoint la conférence dans la salle de réunion. Certaines tonalités DTMF peuvent être des options définies par l'hôte, des codes de participant par exemple. Vous élaborez une séquence de numérotation pour un fournisseur en plaçant ces éléments dans l'ordre dans un tableau. Une séquence de numérotation correctement définie peut nécessiter des réglages plus ou moins importants des étapes de numérotation. Vous pouvez créer la série des étapes en vous connectant au service de conférence audio avec un téléphone, puis en la notant. Par exemple, vous pouvez vous connecter en tant que modérateur et commencer la conférence audio. Utilisez un autre téléphone pour vous connecter en tant que participant, puis notez les étapes permettant d'entrer dans la conférence. Exemple de séquence de numérotation A. Numéro de téléphone permettant de rejoindre la conférence audio B. Tonalités DTMF et pauses entre les actions C. Nom de l'étape D. Valeurs saisies pour programmer l'étape E. Informations affichées dans la réunion F. Informations non affichées dans la réunion G. Affiche les informations sous forme de zone de texte La plupart des options apparaissent dans les menus contextuels. Pour afficher un menu contextuel, cliquez sur les informations de chaque ligne. A B C D E F GUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 194 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Options disponibles dans la colonne Afficher lors de la réunion 1 Dans la section Etapes de connexion de la fenêtre Nouveau fournisseur audio/Modifier le fournisseur audio, cliquez sur Ajouter étape. 2 Dans la colonne Action, cliquez sur les informations de la première ligne et sélectionnez Numéro de la conférence dans le menu contextuel. Saisissez le numéro de connexion à la salle de réunion et indiquez les autres informations de cette étape. 3 Pour chaque étape restante de la séquence de numérotation, indiquez les tonalités DTMF et les pauses. 4 Pour déplacer une étape vers le haut ou vers le bas de la séquence, sélectionnez l'étape et utilisez les flèches vers le haut ou vers le bas. 5 Pour supprimer une étape, sélectionnez-la, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Options de séquence de numérotation Colonne Action Numéro de la conférence Numéro de téléphone permettant de rejoindre la conférence audio. Le numéro de conférence doit être la première étape de la séquence de numérotation. Les comptes hébergés, pour lesquels Adobe fournit le serveur du compte, nécessitent un numéro de téléphone gratuit aux Etats-Unis pour que les utilisateurs puissent rejoindre une conférence audio. Les comptes internes ou sous licence peuvent utiliser n'importe quel numéro. Un seul numéro de conférence est autorisé. DTMF Touches d'un clavier téléphonique, touche dièse (#) par exemple. Retard (ms) Durée en millisecondes entre chaque action. Ces durées déterminent des pauses avant lesquelles le participant à une réunion saisit des informations. Par exemple, les utilisateurs attendent un message de bienvenue avant de saisir un code de participant. Vous indiquez cette durée dans la colonne Clé/Numéro. Colonne Intitulé Intitulé Identifiant de l'action. Par exemple, pour programmer une action DTMF demandant la saisie de l'identifiant d'une réunion, remplacez le mot Intitulé dans la colonne par l'identifiant de la réunion. Seuls les intitulés des actions Défini par l'hôte apparaissent dans le programme. Dans l'exemple ID réunion, une zone de texte intitulée ID réunion apparaît lorsque les hôtes créent un profil audio pour ce fournisseur. Colonne Clé/Numéro Dans cette colonne, vous sélectionnez les étapes que doit définir un hôte. Les étapes définies par l'hôte apparaissent lorsque l'hôte d'une réunion configure un profil audio pour une conférence audio. (vierge) Numéros ou symboles d'un clavier de téléphone nécessaires à la réalisation de l'étape. Par exemple, pour programmer une pause de 5 000 millisecondes pendant laquelle les utilisateurs attendent un message de bienvenue, cliquez sur l'option vierge et saisissez 5 000.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 195 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Défini par l'hôte Les administrateurs de compte choisissent cette option lorsqu'ils souhaitent que les hôtes saisissent des informations lors de la configuration d'un profil audio pour une conférence audio. Par exemple, pour une action DTMF définie par l'hôte avec le libellé ID réunion, l'hôte doit saisir l'ID de la réunion lors de la configuration du profil audio. Colonne Afficher lors de la réunion Le menu contextuel de cette colonne n'est disponible que pour les étapes Défini par l'hôte. False/True Détermine si les informations de cette action apparaissent dans l'invitation à la réunion et dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de la salle de réunion. Colonne Type de saisie Le menu contextuel de cette colonne n'est disponible que pour les étapes Défini par l'hôte. Les options définissent la façon dont les informations apparaissent lorsque les hôtes configurent leur profil audio. Ces options déterminent également la façon dont les informations apparaissent dans les pages en lecture seule, par exemple dans la section Informations sur la conférence audio d'une salle de réunion. Texte Affiche une zone de texte d'une seule ligne dans le profil audio et une seule ligne d'informations dans les pages en lecture seule. Mot de passe Affiche les informations sous forme d'astérisques (*). Test d'une séquence de numérotation Il est recommandé de tester la séquence de numérotation avant de l'utiliser pour démarrer une conférence audio. Avec ce test, vous pouvez vous assurer d'avoir effectué toutes les étapes nécessaires et défini des durées suffisantes entre les étapes. Si vous avez ajouté à la séquence de numérotation des étapes définies par l'hôte, vous allez saisir ces informations dans la boîte de dialogue Tester les étapes de connexion. Par exemple, pour que Connect Pro se connecte à la conférence audio en tant que participant, saisissez le code de participant dans la boîte de dialogue. 1 Cliquez sur l'option Tester les étapes de connexion située au bas de la séquence de numérotation. 2 Complétez les zones de texte définies par l'hôte. 3 Cliquez sur Connecter dans la boîte de dialogue Tester les étapes de connexion. Dès que l'appel reçoit une réponse, vous pouvez entendre si le son est diffusé. 4 Ecoutez le son et ajustez la séquence de numérotation si nécessaire. Suppression d'un fournisseur audio 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Fournisseurs audio. 3 Sélectionnez le fournisseur dans la liste Fournisseurs audio et cliquez sur Supprimer. Création et importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes Procédure de création et d'importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes La présentation suivante résume l'ensemble des tâches impliquées dans la configuration des comptes d'utilisateurs.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 196 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 1. (Facultatif) Personnalisez les champs de profil utilisateur. Un champ de profil utilisateur est un attribut du profil utilisateur Acrobat Connect Pro de votre société. Les champs Prénom, Nom et E-mail sont obligatoires et ne peuvent pas être modifiés. Vous pouvez cependant ajouter des champs prédéfinis, créer des champs et modifier l'ordre des champs dans le profil utilisateur. Voir « Personnalisation des champs du profil utilisateur » à la page 197. 2. (Facultatif) Définissez les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. Vous pouvez définir des stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe, l'expiration, le format et la longueur du mot de passe. Voir « Définition des stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe » à la page 198. 3. Créez des groupes personnalisés. Acrobat Connect Pro comprend plusieurs groupes prédéfinis ; reportez-vous à « Groupes d'autorisations prédéfinis » à la page 211. Vous pouvez également importer des groupes. Si vous avez besoin de groupes supplémentaires, vous pouvez créer des groupes personnalisés dans Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Il est judicieux de commencer par créer des groupes personnalisés de manière à y ajouter des utilisateurs à mesure que vous les importez dans le compte. Voir « Création manuelle d'un groupe personnalisé » à la page 202. 4. Ajoutez des utilisateurs et des groupes. Pour ajouter des utilisateurs et des groupes dans Acrobat Connect Pro, utilisez le protocole LDAP, un fichier CSV (valeurs séparées par des virgules) ou procédez manuellement. Utilisation des Utilisateurs et groupes acquis par le biais du protocole LDAP Dans les sociétés utilisant le protocole LDAP, Acrobat Connect Pro peut acquérir toutes les données utilisateur directement depuis l'annuaire d'utilisateurs de la société. Ces données incluent des informations telles que l'identifiant de connexion, le nom et le numéro de téléphone. Vous ne serez sans doute pas chargé d'ajouter des utilisateurs ou des groupes au système car ce processus s'effectue en dehors de Connect Pro Central. Une fois l'intégration LDAP configurée, assignez manuellement les utilisateurs et les groupes acquis par le biais de ce protocole au groupe prédéfini correspondant à leur fonction dans l'entreprise. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au document Migration, installation, et configuration d'Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 , disponible en ligne à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/connect_documentation_fr. Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à l'aide de fichiers CSV Vous pouvez importer un grand nombre d'utilisateurs et de groupes par l'intermédiaire d'un fichier CSV. L'annuaire de la société peut disposer d'un utilitaire d'exportation d'utilisateurs et de groupes au format CSV. A défaut, vous pouvez vous-même créer un fichier CSV. Les fichiers CSV que vous créez doivent respecter un format spécifique. Vous pouvez modifier les utilisateurs et les groupes importés de la même manière que tout utilisateur ou groupe créé manuellement. Voir « Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à partir de fichiers CSV » à la page 198. Ajout manuel d'utilisateurs et de groupes Vous pouvez affecter de nouveaux utilisateurs à un groupe prédéfini ou créer des groupes personnalisés spécifiques à votre société. Il est préférable de créer ces groupes avant de créer les utilisateurs manuellement. Voir « Création manuelle d'un utilisateur » à la page 202 et « Création manuelle d'un groupe personnalisé » à la page 202. 5. Affectez des utilisateurs aux groupes. Une fois que vous avez importé ou créé les utilisateurs et les groupes, définissez les autorisations nécessaires pour que les utilisateurs puissent accéder au contenu et créer des réunions, des formations, des événements ou des séminaires. Des autorisations par défaut sont associées aux groupes prédéfinis. L'assignation d'utilisateurs et de groupes aux groupes prédéfinis est donc une méthode simple de définir des autorisations. L'administration des comptes d'utilisateurs est également plus simple lorsque vous gérez des groupes plutôt que des utilisateurs individuels. Voir « Ajout ou retrait de membres dans un groupe » à la page 207.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 197 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Personnalisation des champs du profil utilisateur Ajoutez des champs de profil utilisateur afin de respecter les champs de profil utilisés dans le répertoire de votre société. Lorsque vous personnalisez les champs de profils utilisateurs, vous pouvez ajouter des champs prédéfinis, créer des champs personnalisés et supprimer des champs. Pour modifier un champ, vous pouvez changer n'importe lequel de ses attributs. Vous pouvez également désigner des champs obligatoires ou ajouter un commentaire décrivant le champ. Remarque : Ne créez pas plusieurs champs personnalisés du même nom. Insertion de champs de profil utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Personnaliser le profil utilisateur situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. La liste des champs du profil utilisateur s'affiche ; les champs Prénom, Nom et E-mail comportent des astérisques rouges (*) indiquant qu'ils sont obligatoires. 4 Cochez tous les champs de cette page que vous voulez inclure dans le profil utilisateur du compte. 5 Pour déplacer un élément vers le haut ou le bas de la liste, activez sa case à cocher, puis cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. Les informations contenues dans les champs du profil utilisateur sont reprises dans les rapports. Les rapports affichent les champs obligatoires ainsi que les dix premiers champs répertoriés à l'écran Personnaliser le profil utilisateur. A l'aide des boutons Monter et Descendre, placez les champs dans l'ordre voulu. Ajout de champs prédéfinis 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Personnaliser le profil utilisateur situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un champ prédéfini. 5 Activez la case à cocher de tous les champs à ajouter. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 7 Pour déplacer un élément vers le haut ou le bas de la liste, activez sa case à cocher, puis cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. Création de champs personnalisés 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Personnaliser le profil utilisateur situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau champ. 5 Indiquez un nom pour ce champ. Si vous le souhaitez, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire dans la zone de saisie de texte Commentaire. Vous pouvez également cocher la case Obligatoire pour le Type de champ si vous souhaitez que ce champ soit obligatoire. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 198 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Pour déplacer un élément vers le haut ou le bas de la liste, activez sa case à cocher, puis cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. Modification de champs de profil utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Personnaliser le profil utilisateur situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 4 Cliquez sur le nom du champ à modifier pour l'ouvrir. 5 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Changer le nom du champ. (Vous pouvez le modifier, mais pas le supprimer.) • Inscrire, modifier ou supprimer un commentaire dans la zone de saisie de texte Commentaire. • Activer ou désactiver la case à cocher Obligatoire pour le Type de champ. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Suppression de champs de profil utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Personnaliser le profil utilisateur situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 4 Activez les cases à cocher des champs à supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur Supprimer. 6 Dans la page de confirmation, cliquez sur Supprimer pour retirer ces champs, ou sur Annuler pour abandonner l'opération. Définition des stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe Adaptez les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe d'Acrobat Connect Pro en fonction des stratégies propres à votre société. Toutes les stratégies que vous définissez s'appliquent à l'ensemble des applications Acrobat Connect Pro. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à partir de fichiers CSV Avant d'importer des utilisateurs, créez un fichier CSV contenant les utilisateurs que vous souhaitez ajouter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Le fichier CSV que vous créez doit inclure les informations sur les utilisateurs au format suivant. prénom, nom, identifiant, adresse électronique, mot de passe Mary, Betts, mbetts1@masociété.com, mbetts1@masociété.com, private1 Robert, Blatt, rblatt2@masociété.com, rblatt2@masociété.com, private1UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 199 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Voici des astuces liées à l'utilisation des fichiers CSV : • Les capacités des navigateurs étant limitées, il est conseillé, si vous avez un grand nombre d'utilisateurs à ajouter, de créer plusieurs petits fichiers CSV au lieu d'un seul volumineux. • Si le fichier contient des lignes vides, l'importation échoue. • Les noms qui contiennent une virgule doivent être placés entre guillemets. Par exemple, le nom John Doe, Jr., doit apparaître dans le fichier CSV sous la forme « John Doe, Jr. ». • Pour les champs personnalisés, le format d'en-tête est le suivant : x- id-champ (par exemple, x-45704960). Pour déterminer l'ID d'un champ : dans Connect Pro Central, choisissez Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes > Personnaliser le profil utilisateur. Cliquez sur le nom du champ. Dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur, localisez le paramètre filter-field-id au sein de l'URL. La valeur de filter-field-id correspond à id-champ . Par exemple, pour le champ personnalisé Centre de coûts, filter-field-id=centre-coûts ; le format de l'en-tête est donc x-centre-coûts. Remarque : Vous pouvez également obtenir l'ID de champ à partir des appels d'API XML custom-fields ou acl-field-list. • Les informations sur les utilisateurs du fichier CSV doivent prendre en considération les stratégies de nom d'utilisateur et de mot de passe. Par exemple, si une adresse électronique est utilisée comme nom d'utilisateur, les valeurs Nom d'utilisateur et Adresse électronique doivent être identiques dans le fichier CSV. Par ailleurs, s'il existe des stratégies de mot de passe (longueur définie, format, caractères spéciaux, etc.), le fichier CSV doit également les respecter. Voir aussi « Création manuelle d'un groupe personnalisé » à la page 202 « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 208 Création d'utilisateurs 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes, puis sur Importer. 3 Sélectionnez Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs. 4 Sous la barre Sélectionnez le fichier à importer, localisez le fichier CSV que vous souhaitez importer. 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer. En cas d'erreurs, les dix premières erreurs sont affichées en rouge. (Les erreurs portant sur les doublons de nom d'utilisateur ou d'adresse électronique ne sont pas signalées.) Effectuez les corrections nécessaires, réimportez le fichier, puis reprenez les étapes de cette procédure. Ron, Bloom, rbloom3@masociété.com, rbloom3@masociété.com, private1 Charles, Bond, cbond4,@masociété.com, cbond4@masociété.com, private1 Jennifer, Cau, jcau5@masociété.com, jcau5@masociété.com, private1 prénom, nom, identifiant, adresse électronique, mot de passeUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 200 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Importation d'utilisateurs d'un fichier CSV non codé au format UTF-8 Vous pouvez importer des utilisateurs d'un fichier CSV qui n'est pas codé au format UTF-8. Dans ce cas, ajoutez le paramètre de codage approprié à l'URL d'importation. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes, puis sur Importer. 3 Vérifiez l'URL dans la ligne d'adresse de votre navigateur. Elle est du type http:///admin/administration/user/import. 4 Cliquez à la fin de l'URL dans la barre d'adresse du navigateur, puis ajoutez « ?encoding= » à l'adresse. Elle se présente alors ainsi : http:///admin/administration/user/import?encoding=. Voici quelques exemples spécifiques : • http:///admin/administration/user/import?encoding=sjis • http:///admin/administration/user/import?encoding=euc_kr 5 Après la modification de l'adresse URL, cliquez sur Entrer. 6 Sélectionnez Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs. 7 Sous la barre Sélectionnez le fichier à importer, localisez le fichier CSV que vous souhaitez importer. 8 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer. En cas d'erreurs, les dix premières erreurs sont affichées en rouge. (Les erreurs portant sur les doublons de nom d'utilisateur ou d'adresse électronique ne sont pas signalées.) Procédez aux corrections nécessaires, puis réimportez le fichier. Importation de groupes d'un fichier CSV Utilisez l'option d'importation de groupes pour importer des groupes dans la base de données d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Une fois le fichier CSV de groupes importé, vous pouvez affecter de nouveaux utilisateurs à ces groupes. Lorsque vous créez le fichier CSV, veillez à utiliser un format compatible avec Acrobat Connect Pro. Les en-têtes de colonne obligatoires dans le fichier CSV sont le nom et la description. Voici un exemple de fichier CSV de groupes adapté à Acrobat Connect Pro : name, description group1, test1 group2, test2 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer situé au-dessus de la liste. 4 Dans la barre Sélectionner le type d'importation, sélectionnez l'option Créer de nouveaux groupes. 5 Sous la barre Sélectionnez le fichier à importer, localisez le fichier CSV que vous souhaitez importer. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer. En cas d'erreurs, les dix premières erreurs sont affichées en rouge. Effectuez les corrections nécessaires, réimportez le fichier, puis reprenez les étapes 3 à 6. 7 Si vous affectez des utilisateurs à des groupes personnalisés, définissez des autorisations de bibliothèque pour ces groupes. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 208.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 201 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Importation d'utilisateurs et ajout à un groupe Utilisez cette option pour importer de nouveaux utilisateurs et les ajouter à un groupe prédéfini ou déjà créé. Les noms des groupes prédéfinis s'affichent dans le menu permettant de sélectionner les groupes par défaut. Lorsque vous créez un groupe manuellement, son nom s'affiche aussi dans le menu de sélection des groupes. L'option d'importation vous permet d'assigner un grand nombre d'utilisateurs à plusieurs groupes. Vous ne pouvez sélectionner qu'un seul groupe pour les utilisateurs que vous importez à partir d'un même fichier CSV. Créez un fichier CSV pour chaque série d'utilisateurs que vous souhaitez importer vers un groupe particulier. Une fois ces utilisateurs importés, vous pouvez les assigner un à un à d'autres groupes ou assigner le groupe entier à un autre groupe. L'exemple suivant présente les informations indispensables que doit contenir le fichier CSV d'utilisateurs. Vous pouvez y ajouter d'autres informations afin de prérenseigner d'autres propriétés d'utilisateurs. Le fichier CSV que vous créez doit inclure les informations sur les utilisateurs au format suivant. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Importer situé au-dessus de la liste Utilisateurs et groupes. 4 Sous la barre Sélectionner un type d'importation, choisissez Créer de nouveaux utilisateurs et les ajouter à un groupe. 5 Sous la barre Sélectionnez le fichier à importer, localisez le fichier CSV que vous souhaitez importer. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer. Acrobat Connect Pro consigne un message si les groupes du fichier CSV existent déjà dans l'application. 7 Ajoutez de nouveaux utilisateurs à un groupe. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Ajout ou retrait de membres dans un groupe » à la page 207. 8 Définissez les autorisations de ces utilisateurs. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 208. Ajout d'utilisateurs existants à un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Importer situé au-dessus de la liste. 4 Sous Sélectionner un type d'importation, cliquez sur Ajouter des utilisateurs existants à un groupe. 5 Sélectionnez un groupe dans le menu déroulant accolé à l'option Ajouter des utilisateurs existants à un groupe. 6 Sous la barre Sélectionnez le fichier à importer, localisez le fichier CSV que vous souhaitez importer. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Transférer. prénom, nom, identifiant, adresse électronique, mot de passe Mary, Betts, mbetts1@masociété.com, mbetts1@masociété.com, private1 Robert, Blatt, rblatt2@masociété.com, rblatt2@masociété.com, private1 Ron, Bloom, rbloom3@masociété.com, rbloom3@masociété.com, private1 Charles, Bond, cbond4,@masociété.com, cbond4@masociété.com, private1 Jennifer, Cau, jcau5@masociété.com, jcau5@masociété.com, private1UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 202 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Création manuelle d'un groupe personnalisé Les groupes créés manuellement sont appelés groupes personnalisés. Un groupe peut contenir des utilisateurs, ainsi que d'autres groupes. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 (Facultatif) Pour vérifier que ce groupe n'existe pas déjà, tapez son nom dans la zone de texte Rechercher au bas de la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau groupe en bas de la liste. 5 Entrez le nom et la description du nouveau groupe. 6 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter ce groupe sans ajouter de membres, cliquez sur Terminer. • Pour ajouter des membres, cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Dans la liste Membres potentiels du groupe, sélectionnez chaque utilisateur et groupe que vous voulez assigner à ce groupe en procédant comme suit : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, cliquez sur chaque nom en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. • Pour sélectionner des noms spécifiques, double-cliquez sur le nom du groupe. Double-cliquez sur Monter d'un niveau dans la liste pour revenir à la liste d'origine. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la liste et entrez ce nom. 8 Cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour retirer un nom ajouté, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 9 Recommencez les étapes 3 à 8 pour chaque groupe à ajouter. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer. 11 Cliquez sur le bouton Voir les membres du groupe pour contrôler les membres du groupe et procéder aux réglages nécessaires. Voir aussi « Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à partir de fichiers CSV » à la page 198 Création manuelle d'un utilisateur Lorsque vous ajoutez de nouveaux utilisateurs, entrez le nouveau mot de passe qu'ils pourront utiliser pour se connecter à Acrobat Connect Pro. Ce mot de passe est envoyé à l'utilisateur par message électronique. (Une option vous permet d'inviter l'utilisateur à modifier son mot de passe lors de sa première connexion.) Vous pouvez également ajouter des paramètres de conférence audio pour les utilisateurs. Après avoir créé un utilisateur, vous pouvez choisir un gestionnaire pour lui. (Chaque utilisateur ne peut posséder qu'un seul gestionnaire.) Si l'utilisateur ajouté est un directeur, vous pouvez lui assigner une équipe d'utilisateurs. Le gestionnaire peut alors consulter les données du rapport des membres de l'équipe via l'option Rapports pour les responsables de l'onglet Accueil.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 203 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Voir aussi « Importation d'utilisateurs et de groupes à partir de fichiers CSV » à la page 198 Création d'un utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Nouvel utilisateur en bas de la liste. 4 Entrez le nom, le prénom et l'adresse électronique de l'utilisateur. Ajoutez éventuellement des renseignements facultatifs, tels que le nom ou l'adresse de sa société. 5 Dans la zone de texte Nouveau mot de passe, tapez le nouveau mot de passe pour l'envoyer par email à son utilisateur, puis retapez-le pour confirmation. Si l'utilisateur possède une adresse électronique, laissez la case à cocher Envoyer par messagerie électronique les informations sur le compte, le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe activée. Si l'utilisateur ne possède pas d'adresse électronique, désactivez cette case à cocher. 6 (Facultatif) A l'étape 5, vous fournissez un mot de passe aux utilisateurs qui se connectent pour la première fois. Pour que les utilisateurs changent obligatoirement leur mot de passe après leur première connexion, activez l'option Inviter l'utilisateur à modifier son mot de passe à sa prochaine connexion. 7 (Facultatif) Saisissez les paramètres de conférence audio dans les zones de texte appropriées. 8 Pour affecter cet utilisateur à un ou plusieurs groupes, cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous ne souhaitez affecter cet utilisateur à aucun groupe, passez à l'étape 11. 9 Dans la liste Groupes possibles, sélectionnez chaque groupe auquel vous voulez affecter cet utilisateur en procédant de l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs entrées. • Pour sélectionner des noms spécifiques, double-cliquez sur le nom du groupe. Double-cliquez sur Dossier parent pour revenir à la liste d'origine. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 10 Cliquez sur Ajouter. 11 Cliquez sur Terminer. Ajout de membres à l'équipe d'un utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les membres de l'équipe pour sélectionner des membres d'équipe pour cet utilisateur. 5 Dans la liste Utilisateurs possibles, sélectionnez chaque membre à affecter à cet utilisateur en procédant de l'une des manières suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs entrées. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 204 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Pour retirer un membre ajouté, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour ajouter davantage de membres, répétez les étapes 5 et 6. Gestion des utilisateurs et des groupes Modification des informations sur l'utilisateur En tant qu'administrateur, vous pouvez modifier les composants d'un compte d'utilisateur. Vous pouvez modifier toutes les informations que vous avez ajoutées dans les champs de profil utilisateur personnalisés. Il est toutefois impossible de modifier le mot de passe d'un utilisateur. Vous pouvez affecter un mot de passe temporaire à un nouvel utilisateur lors de la création de son compte ; cependant, vous ne pourrez pas le modifier par la suite. Même si un utilisateur oublie son mot de passe, vous ne pourrez pas le modifier. L'utilisateur doit cliquer sur le lien « Avez-vous oublié votre mot de passe ? Cliquez ici » lors de la connexion à Acrobat Connect Pro. Nul ne peut modifier le mot de passe d'un autre utilisateur. Vous pouvez uniquement changer le vôtre. Modification des informations sur l'utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Dans la zone Nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe, vous pouvez utiliser ces options : • Pour envoyer un lien permettant à l'utilisateur de redéfinir son mot de passe, cliquez sur le lien « Envoyer un lien pour réinitialiser le mot de passe de cet utilisateur ». Un message s'affiche, vous informant que le message électronique a été envoyé. Cliquez sur OK pour revenir à la page Informations sur l'utilisateur. • Pour définir un mot de passe utilisateur temporaire que vous pouvez fournir directement (par exemple par téléphone), cliquez sur l'option Définir un mot de passe temporaire pour cet utilisateur. La page des mots de passe temporaires qui s'affiche contient un mot de passe généré par le système pour l'utilisateur. Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour revenir à la page Informations sur l'utilisateur. 5 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 6 Modifiez tous les champs à modifier. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Assignation d'un directeur à un utilisateur 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Sélectionner un responsable. 5 Dans la liste Gestionnaires possibles, sélectionnez le gestionnaire auquel vous voulez affecter cet utilisateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 205 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Définir le gestionnaire. Pour retirer ce responsable de la liste, sélectionnez son nom, puis cliquez sur Supprimer le responsable. Pour remplacer le responsable, répétez les étapes 5 et 6. Affectation d'un utilisateur à un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier l'appartenance à un groupe. 5 Dans la liste Groupes possibles, sélectionnez chaque groupe auquel vous voulez affecter cet utilisateur en procédant de l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs entrées. • Pour développer un groupe et y sélectionner des membres individuels, double-cliquez sur son nom. Double-cliquez sur Monter d'un niveau dans la liste pour revenir à la liste d'origine. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour retirer un nom de cette fenêtre, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Retrait d'un utilisateur d'un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier l'appartenance à un groupe. 5 Dans la fenêtre Appartenance actuelle à un groupe, sélectionnez le groupe duquel vous voulez retirer cet utilisateur en procédant de l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs entrées. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur Supprimer. Conversion d'invités en utilisateurs complets ou d'utilisateurs complets en invités Vous pouvez convertir des invités en utilisateurs complets ou des utilisateurs complets en invités. Les utilisateurs complets peuvent se connecter à Connect Pro Central, contrairement aux invités. Les utilisateurs complets apparaissent également dans les listes d'autorisation et d'inscription. Il peut s'avérer utile de convertir les invités en utilisateurs complets si, par exemple, vous avez organisé un événement auquel de nombreux invités se sont inscrits et que vous aimeriez en faire des utilisateurs complets. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans Connect Pro Central.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 206 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 2 Sélectionnez Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Cliquez sur Gérer les invités. 4 Sélectionnez un invité dans la liste des invités actuels ou un utilisateur dans la liste des utilisateurs actuels. 5 Cliquez sur Convertir en utilisateur ou sur Convertir en invité. Suppression d'un compte d'utilisateur En tant qu'administrateur, vous pouvez supprimer tous les comptes d'utilisateurs. Après la suppression de son compte, l'utilisateur est définitivement retiré du système avec les conséquences suivantes : • Cet utilisateur est retiré de toutes les listes de groupe. • Il est retiré de toutes les listes d'inscription à tous les cours. • Il ne peut plus accéder aux rapports. • Si l'utilisateur supprimé était un directeur, le champ Directeur des utilisateurs qui dépendait de lui est vide. • Si l'utilisateur supprimé avait créé des contenus, désignez un autre utilisateur pour la gestion de ces contenus. Si l'utilisateur est membre d'un groupe prédéfini, ce dernier est crédité d'une possibilité de membre supplémentaire. Par exemple, si l'utilisateur supprimé appartenait au groupe des auteurs, ce groupe peut maintenant accueillir un nouveau membre. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom de l'utilisateur dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Sélectionnez le nom de l'utilisateur. (Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj. enfoncée pour tous les supprimer simultanément.) 5 Cliquez sur Supprimer en bas de la liste. 6 Dans la page de confirmation, cliquez sur Supprimer pour retirer l'utilisateur, ou cliquez sur Annuler pour abandonner l'opération. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un groupe » à la page 208 Affichage des informations sur un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du groupe, puis cliquez sur Informations en bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom du groupe dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour le repérer dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les membres du groupe. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 207 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Voir aussi « Modification du nom ou de la description d'un groupe » à la page 207 « Ajout ou retrait de membres dans un groupe » à la page 207 Modification du nom ou de la description d'un groupe En tant qu'administrateur, vous pouvez modifier le nom ou la description de tous les groupes, y compris les groupes prédéfinis, même si Adobe le déconseille. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du groupe, puis cliquez sur Informations au bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher et entrez le nom du groupe dans la zone de texte de recherche. 4 Cliquez sur le lien Modifier les infos. 5 Modifiez les champs appropriés. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer. Ajout ou retrait de membres dans un groupe En tant qu'administrateur, vous pouvez ajouter des utilisateurs et des groupes à un groupe. Vous pouvez également les supprimer. Ajout de membres à un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du groupe, puis cliquez sur Informations au bas de la liste. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom du groupe dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les membres du groupe. 5 Dans la liste Membres éventuels du groupe, sélectionnez chaque utilisateur ou groupe à affecter à ce groupe en procédant comme suit : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs entrées. • Pour développer un groupe et y sélectionner des membres individuels, double-cliquez sur son nom. Double-cliquez sur Monter d'un niveau dans la liste pour revenir à la liste d'origine. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un utilisateur ou un groupe de cette fenêtre, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Supprimer. Suppression des membres d'un groupe 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du groupe, puis cliquez sur Informations au bas de la liste.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 208 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom du groupe dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les membres du groupe. 5 Dans la fenêtre Appartenance actuelle à un groupe, sélectionnez chaque utilisateur et groupe à retirer de ce groupe en procédant de l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour sélectionner plusieurs utilisateurs ou groupes, maintenez la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée tout en cliquant sur leurs noms. • Pour trouver un nom particulier dans la liste, cliquez sur Rechercher au bas de la fenêtre et entrez ce nom. 6 Cliquez sur Supprimer. Suppression d'un groupe En tant qu'administrateur, vous pouvez supprimer tous les groupes, à l'exception des prédéfinis. La suppression d'un groupe n'entraîne pas la suppression des membres qui le constituent. Avant de supprimer un groupe, tenez compte des conséquences de cette opération sur les autorisations des membres et des autres groupes. Si le groupe bénéficiait de l'autorisation d'accès aux fichiers ou dossiers d'une bibliothèque, les membres de ce groupe ne peuvent plus accéder à ces fichiers et dossiers (à moins qu'ils appartiennent à d'autres groupes autorisés à y accéder). 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisateurs et groupes. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du groupe. (Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs groupes en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj. enfoncée pour tous les supprimer simultanément.) Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Rechercher, puis indiquez le nom du groupe dans la zone de texte Rechercher pour trouver ce nom dans la liste. 4 Cliquez sur Supprimer en bas de la liste. 5 Dans la page de confirmation, cliquez sur Supprimer pour retirer le groupe, ou cliquez sur Annuler pour abandonner l'opération. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un compte d'utilisateur » à la page 206 Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque Les administrateurs, les administrateurs limités et les utilisateurs bénéficiant d'autorisations de gestion sur un dossier peuvent définir des autorisations d'utilisation du contenu des bibliothèques d'Acrobat Connect Pro. C'est à l'administrateur qu'il revient de concevoir la structure d'autorisations d'un compte. Une fois cette structure créée, les utilisateurs bénéficiant des autorisations de gestion sur les dossiers de la bibliothèque peuvent définir les autorisations concernant ces dossiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 209 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Voir aussi « Utilisation des fichiers et dossiers de la bibliothèque » à la page 159 « Utilisation du contenu de la bibliothèque de contenu » à la page 162 Procédure de définition d'autorisations Pour éviter la gestion et l'énumération de très nombreux utilisateurs dans le profil d'autorisations d'un fichier ou d'un dossier, privilégiez l'affectation des autorisations au niveau des groupes. Créez votre système de la manière suivante : 1. Concevez un système d'autorisations utilisant les groupes. Vous pouvez autoriser l'accès de certains groupes à des parties du système, selon vos besoins. Pour concevoir ce système, il convient de se familiariser avec les bibliothèques, les groupes et les priorités d'autorisations. Voir « Bibliothèques » à la page 209, « Groupes d'autorisations prédéfinis » à la page 211 et « Ordre de priorité des autorisations multiples » à la page 215. 2. Créez des dossiers au nom évocateur. Choisissez des noms qui décrivent clairement le contenu des dossiers, par exemple Contenu ressources humaines, Contenu assistance produit, etc. Voir « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de contenu » à la page 215. 3. Créez des groupes personnalisés au nom évocateur. Choisissez des noms qui décrivent clairement les autorisations du groupe, par exemple Gestionnaires du contenu des ressources humaines, Utilisateurs du contenu partagé, etc. Voir « Création manuelle d'un groupe personnalisé » à la page 202. 4. Affectez les autorisation pour certains dossiers ou fichiers. Par exemple, autorisez le groupe Gestionnaires du contenu des ressources humaines à gérer le dossier Ressources humaines situé dans le dossier Contenu partagé. Voir « Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de contenu » à la page 215. 5. Ajoutez des utilisateurs aux groupes. Il est plus facile de commencer par créer des groupes, puis d'y ajouter des utilisateurs afin de leur accorder les autorisations nécessaires. Voir « Ajout ou retrait de membres dans un groupe » à la page 207. Les autorisations attribuées aux utilisateurs ont priorité sur les autorisations accordées aux groupes. Si vous souhaitez refuser l'accès d'un utilisateur à certains dossiers, vous pouvez définir des autorisations au cas par cas. Bibliothèques Les onglets Contenu, Formation, Réunions, Séminaires et Evénements de Connect Pro Central contiennent chacun une bibliothèque de fichiers organisée en dossiers. Les fichiers stockés dans les bibliothèques des formations, réunions, séminaires et événements sont uniquement utilisables avec les activités présentées sous les onglets respectifs. Les fichiers de la bibliothèque de contenu sont accessibles depuis tous les onglets de Connect Pro Central. Les administrateurs, administrateurs limités et utilisateurs disposant d'autorisations de gestion peuvent définir des autorisations déterminant les tâches que chaque utilisateur peut exécuter dans les bibliothèques. Remarque : Les administrateurs définissent des autorisations pour les administrateurs limités dans la section Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes de Connect Pro Central. Par défaut, les administrateurs limités peuvent définir des autorisations pour le contenu ; un administrateur peut toutefois, s'il le souhaite, leur refuser cette possibilité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 210 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro A l'exception de la bibliothèque des séminaires, chaque bibliothèque présente les deux dossiers supérieurs suivants : Contenu partagé Lorsqu'Acrobat Connect Pro est installé, seul l'administrateur possède les privilèges d'accès aux dossiers partagés. Les administrateurs peuvent attribuer toutes les autorisations requises pour les dossiers partagés. Seuls les membres du groupe prédéfini associé à cette bibliothèque peuvent créer de nouvelles fonctions (réunions, événements, etc.) dans ce dossier. Toutefois, les autorisations de gestion d'un dossier partagé peuvent être attribuées à tout utilisateur. Par exemple, dans la bibliothèque des réunions, tout utilisateur disposant des autorisations de gestion sur un dossier peut gérer le dossier en question. Seuls les hôtes de réunion peuvent créer des réunions dans un dossier. Contenu utilisateurs Dès qu'un utilisateur est affecté à un groupe prédéfini, Acrobat Connect Pro crée un dossier pour cet utilisateur dans la bibliothèque associée. Ainsi, tout utilisateur affecté au groupe Hôtes de réunion dispose automatiquement de son dossier personnel dans le dossier Réunions utilisateurs de la bibliothèque des réunions. C'est le contenu de ce dossier que voit l'utilisateur lorsqu'il active l'onglet Réunions. Les utilisateurs peuvent gérer leurs propres dossiers utilisateur, ainsi que les autorisations correspondantes pour offrir à d'autres utilisateurs un accès à ces dossiers. Bibliothèques A. Partagées B. Utilisateur C. Mes éléments D. Tableau de bord UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 211 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro La structure des dossiers de la bibliothèque des séminaires est différente. Cette bibliothèque ne contient pas de dossiers utilisateur ; en revanche, chaque dossier correspond à une licence de séminaire différente achetée par votre société. Les utilisateurs assignés au groupe Hôtes de séminaires disposent des autorisations de gestion pour tous les dossiers Séminaires. Les hôtes de séminaire peuvent ajouter et supprimer des séminaires, attribuer des autorisations de gestion à d'autres utilisateurs et créer des séminaires. Groupes d'autorisations prédéfinis Acrobat Connect Pro comprend huit groupes d'autorisations prédéfinis, chacun associé à une bibliothèque différente. Chaque membre d'un groupe prédéfini dispose d'un dossier utilisateur dans la bibliothèque correspondante. Pour les groupes Hôtes de réunions et Gestionnaires de formation, chaque membre bénéficie en outre d'un dossier utilisateur dans la bibliothèque de contenu, et peut y créer des contenus. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier les autorisations de ces groupes, mais vous pouvez les étendre en affectant des individus ou des groupes à plusieurs groupes prédéfinis. En outre, l'administrateur peut créer des groupes personnalisés et leur affecter les autorisations d'accès à des dossiers de bibliothèque spécifiques. Il existe huit groupes prédéfinis : • Administrateurs • Administrateurs - Limités • Hôtes de réunions • Gestionnaires de formation • Hôtes de séminaires • Gestionnaires d'événements • Auteurs • Stagiaires Chacun de ces groupes correspond à un ensemble spécifique d'accès dans toutes les bibliothèques. Il existe des groupes pour chaque fonction de compte achetée. Par exemple, le groupe Gestionnaires d'événement n'existe que si la fonction Evénements est comprise dans votre compte. Les administrateurs assignent les utilisateurs et les groupes aux groupes prédéfinis appropriés. Les membres d'un groupe prédéfini peut créer des instances de la fonction associée à la bibliothèque. Par exemple, si vous assumez la fonction d'hôte de réunion, vous pouvez créer des réunions. Les membres des groupes prédéfinis ne peuvent pas accéder au dossier partagé de la bibliothèque du groupe, sauf si vous leur attribuez les autorisations de gestion. Vous pouvez également attribuer des autorisations de gestion pour un sous-dossier du répertoire de dossier partagé à des utilisateurs ne faisant pas partie du groupe prédéfini. Toutefois, s'ils sont en mesure de créer des dossiers, ils ne peuvent rien créer dans la bibliothèque correspondante parce qu'ils ne font pas partie du groupe prédéfini. Le tableau ci-après récapitule les autorisations dont dispose chaque groupe prédéfini pour chaque bibliothèque.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 212 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Groupe Administrateurs Les administrateurs ont un contrôle total sur l'ensemble du système Acrobat Connect Pro. Lorsque vous ajoutez un utilisateur quelconque à ce groupe, il devient lui-même administrateur. Les autorisations accordées aux membres du groupe Administrateurs ne peuvent pas être remplacées par des autorisations individuelles ou provenant d'autres groupes. Les administrateurs peuvent exécuter les actions suivantes : • Gérer les utilisateurs et les groupes du compte, c'est-à-dire les créer, les supprimer et les modifier. • Gérer les bibliothèques de contenu, c'est-à-dire afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier les fichiers ou dossiers. Afficher des rapports sur les fichiers. Définir les autorisations liées aux fichiers ou dossiers. Créer des sous-dossiers. • Gérer la bibliothèque de formation, c'est-à-dire afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier les fichiers ou dossiers. Afficher des rapports sur les fichiers. Définir les autorisations liées aux fichiers ou dossiers. Créer des sous-dossiers. Inscrire des utilisateurs, envoyer des notifications aux utilisateurs réalisant les inscriptions et définir des rappels concernant les cours et les curriculums. • Gérer la bibliothèque des réunions, c'est-à-dire afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier les fichiers ou dossiers. Afficher des rapports sur les fichiers. Définir les autorisations liées aux fichiers ou dossiers. Créer des sous-dossiers. • Gérer la bibliothèque des événements, c'est-à-dire afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier les fichiers ou dossiers. Afficher des rapports sur les fichiers. Définir les autorisations liées aux fichiers ou dossiers. Créer des sous-dossiers. Envoyer des invitations et modifier les options de contenu et de message électronique. • Gérer la bibliothèque des séminaires, c'est-à-dire afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier les fichiers ou dossiers. Afficher des rapports sur les fichiers. Définir les autorisations liées aux fichiers ou dossiers. Créer des sous-dossiers. • Afficher les informations sur le compte et les fonctions, quotas et rapports du compte. Si votre société a acheté l'option nécessaire, personnaliser la présentation d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Groupe prédéfini Bibliothèque de contenu Bibliothèque des formations Bibliothèque de réunions Bibliothèque des séminaires Bibliothèque d'événements Autorisations supplémentaires Administrateur Toutes, sauf la publication Gérer Gérer Gérer Gérer Gérer les utilisateurs, les groupes, les comptes d'utilisateurs ; consulter les dossiers de contenu de tous les utilisateurs Auteur Publication/Gesti on Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Stagiaire Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Gestionnaire de formation Publier/Gérer un dossier personnel Gérer Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Hôte de réunions Publier/Gérer un dossier personnel Aucune Gérer Aucune Aucune Aucune Gestionnaire d'événements Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune Gérer Aucune Hôte de séminaires Aucune Aucune Aucune Gérer Aucune AucuneUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 213 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Groupes Administrateurs - Limités Les administrateurs limités ont des capacités de contrôle limitées sur le système Acrobat Connect Pro. Tout utilisateur peut devenir un administrateur limité ; il suffit pour cela de l'ajouter à ce groupe. Les administrateurs peuvent déterminer les autorisations dont bénéficient les administrateurs limités. Groupe Auteurs Si vous affectez un utilisateur à ce groupe, Acrobat Connect Pro crée automatiquement un dossier correspondant dans le dossier Utilisateurs de la bibliothèque de contenu. (Le raccourci Mon contenu pointe vers ce dossier.) Par défaut, chaque membre du groupe Auteurs bénéficie des autorisations de publication et de gestion uniquement sur le dossier Mon contenu. Votre compte restreint le nombre d'utilisateurs pouvant être ajoutés au groupe Auteurs. Les membres du groupe Auteurs autorisés à publier dans le dossier spécifié peuvent exécuter toutes les opérations suivantes : • Afficher les fichiers et les dossiers de contenu. • Publier et mettre à jour le contenu. • Envoyer des messages électroniques contenant des liens qui renvoient une notification à l'auteur dès que le destinataire y accède. Groupe Gestionnaires de formation Les membres du groupe Gestionnaires de formation sont chargés d'organiser et de coordonner les formations. Si vous affectez un utilisateur à ce groupe, Acrobat Connect Pro crée automatiquement un dossier correspondant dans le dossier Utilisateurs de la bibliothèque des formations. (Le raccourci Ma formation pointe vers ce dossier.) Par défaut, les gestionnaires de formation disposent d'autorisations de gestion uniquement pour leur dossier individuel placé dans le dossier Formation de l'utilisateur. Un gestionnaire de formation peut exécuter les actions suivantes : • Gérer son propre dossier utilisateur dans la bibliothèque des formations en assurant toutes les fonctions de gestion des fichiers, mais aussi créer et gérer des cours et des curriculums, inscrire des utilisateurs, envoyer des notifications d'inscription et configurer des rappels. • Accéder aux dossiers de la bibliothèque de contenu. • Afficher les rapports de formation pour les cours ou curriculums qu'il a créés. Groupe Gestionnaires d'événements Les membres du groupe Gestionnaires d'événements peuvent créer des événements et gérer leurs dossiers personnels dans la bibliothèque des événements. Si vous affectez un utilisateur à ce groupe, Acrobat Connect Pro crée automatiquement un dossier correspondant dans le dossier Utilisateurs de la bibliothèque des événements. Les gestionnaires d'événements ne peuvent gérer que leurs dossiers personnels Mes événements dans le dossier Evénements utilisateur. Ils peuvent également gérer les événements des dossiers partagés s'ils sont hôte de l'événement et s'ils bénéficient des autorisations de gestion pour le dossier contenant cet événement. Un gestionnaire d'événements peut exécuter les actions suivantes : • Gérer son propre dossier d'utilisateur dans la bibliothèque des événements en assurant toutes les fonctions de gestion de fichiers, mais aussi créer et gérer tous les aspects d'un événement figurant dans ce dossier. • Afficher les rapports sur les événements.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 214 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Groupe Hôtes de réunions Les membres du groupe Hôtes de réunions créent les réunions. Si vous affectez un utilisateur à ce groupe, Acrobat Connect Pro crée automatiquement un dossier correspondant dans le dossier Utilisateurs de la bibliothèque des réunions. Les hôtes de réunions ne peuvent gérer que leur dossier Mes réunions dans le dossier Réunions utilisateurs. Ils peuvent également gérer les réunions des dossiers partagés s'ils sont hôte de la réunion et s'ils bénéficient des autorisations de gestion pour le dossier contenant cette réunion. Un hôte de réunion peut exécuter les actions suivantes : • Gérer son propre dossier Réunions utilisateurs en assurant toutes les fonctions de gestion des fichiers, mais aussi créer et gérer des réunions, c'est-à-dire ajouter, supprimer et attribuer des autorisations de participation aux présentateurs et aux participants. Créer et organiser les salles de réunion. Modifier une réunion ou la liste des participants à une réunion. • Afficher des rapports sur les réunions. • Créer du contenu. • Afficher les fichiers et dossiers de contenu auxquels il est autorisé à accéder. • Publier et mettre à jour le contenu. Groupe Hôtes de séminaires La manière dont les licences de séminaire sont accordées implique que les autorisations des hôtes de séminaires sont différentes des autres groupes. Contrairement aux autres bibliothèques, la bibliothèque des séminaires ne contient pas de dossier utilisateur. Elle comprend uniquement le dossier partagé, dont chaque sous-dossier correspond à une licence de séminaire achetée par votre société. Seuls les hôtes de séminaires et les administrateurs peuvent gérer ces dossiers. Un hôte de séminaire peut gérer tous les dossiers de la bibliothèque des séminaires. Les hôtes de séminaires peuvent exécuter les actions suivantes : • Gérer tous les dossiers de la bibliothèque des séminaires, y compris les fonctions de gestion de fichiers, ainsi que la création et la gestion de séminaires (ajout, suppression et affectation des autorisations de participation aux présentateurs et aux participants ; création et organisation des salles de séminaire et modification d'un séminaire ou de la liste des participants. • Afficher des rapports sur les séminaires. Présentation des groupes personnalisés Les groupes personnalisés sont des groupes que vous créez vous-même. Vous pouvez définir des autorisations de fichiers et de dossiers spécifiques pour ce groupe dans les différentes bibliothèques. Pour attribuer des autorisations à un groupe personnalisé, vous pouvez assigner ce groupe au groupe prédéfini approprié. Vous pouvez par exemple créer un groupe intitulé Monde, qui contiendra un groupe pour chaque pays dans lequel votre société possède une filiale (par exemple, Etats-unis, Allemagne, etc.). Chaque groupe de pays peut à son tour contenir un groupe pour chaque agence du pays (San Francisco, Boston, etc.). Dans chacun de ces bureaux, vous pouvez définir des groupes supplémentaires par poste de travail, puis affecter à chacun d'eux les groupes prédéfinis appropriés. Dans cet exemple, vous avez créé un ensemble hiérarchique de groupes, appelé groupes imbriqués, chaque groupe faisant partie du groupe situé au-dessus de lui dans la hiérarchie. Par défaut, les groupes imbriqués bénéficient des autorisations du groupe parent. Vous pouvez étendre ou restreindre ces autorisations en personnalisant les autorisations des groupes dans les bibliothèques concernées. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 215 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Ordre de priorité des autorisations multiples Si un utilisateur appartient à plusieurs groupes, il est possible qu'il dispose de nombreuses autorisations différentes pour un même fichier ou dossier. Dans ce cas, les conflits entre ces autorisations sont résolus de la manière suivante (entre deux niveaux, la priorité est donnée au niveau supérieur). Niveau 1 Si l'utilisateur a obtenu des droits de gestion, de publication et d'affichage par l'intermédiaire d'autorisations de groupe, il bénéficie de l'accès le plus large possible aux fonctionnalités. Ces trois autorisations de groupe sont cumulables. Niveau 2 Si l'utilisateur a obtenu un refus d'accès quelconque par l'intermédiaire d'autorisations de groupe, toutes ses autorisations de gestion, publication et affichage acquises par le biais du groupe sont supprimées et l'accès ne lui est plus autorisé. Niveau 3 Si l'utilisateur dispose de droits de gestion, de publication et d'affichage par le biais d'autorisations individuelles, ces autorisations sont cumulables et viennent s'ajouter à celles acquises au niveau du groupe. En outre, elles annulent tous les refus d'accès définis au niveau du groupe. Niveau 4 Si l'utilisateur a personnellement reçu un paramètre d'accès refusé par l'intermédiaire d'autorisations individuelles, il sera interdit d'accès quels que soient les droits qu'il a obtenus au niveau des groupes. Niveau 5 Si l'utilisateur est membre du groupe Administrateur, toutes les autorisations accordées automatiquement aux administrateurs s'appliquent, quels que soient les autres paramètres individuels ou de groupe. Niveau 6 Si aucune autorisation n'est appliquée par le biais de l'utilisateur ou du groupe (et aucune n'est héritée d'un dossier parent), l'utilisateur ne peut ni accéder au dossier ou au fichier, ni exécuter la moindre opération. Le tableau suivant présente l'application des autorisations de groupe et d'utilisateur. Définition d'autorisations pour les fichiers et dossiers de contenu Pour personnaliser la liste des autorisations d'un fichier ou d'un dossier, vous devez être administrateur, administrateur limité ou utilisateur bénéficiant des autorisations de gestion pour le fichier ou dossier concerné de la bibliothèque. Remarque : Les administrateurs définissent des autorisations pour les administrateurs limités dans la section Administration > Utilisateurs et groupes de Connect Pro Central. Par défaut, les administrateurs limités peuvent définir des autorisations pour le contenu ; cependant, un administrateur peut, s'il le souhaite, leur refuser cette possibilité. 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Contenu, Formation, Réunions, Séminaires ou Evénements de Connect Pro Central. 2 Recherchez le dossier ou le fichier et cliquez sur son nom pour l'ouvrir. 3 Cliquez sur Configurer les autorisations dans la barre de navigation. Autorisations du groupe G1 Autorisations du groupe G2 Autorisations des membres des groupes G1 et G2 Autorisations individuelles Autorisations obtenues Afficher Publier Publier Gérer Publier+Gérer Gérer Aucune Gérer Publier Publier+Gérer Refusé Publier Refusé Gérer Gérer Afficher Gérer Gérer Afficher Gérer Gérer Aucune Gérer Refusé Refusé Aucune Aucune Aucune Aucune AucuneUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 216 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 4 Cliquez sur Personnalisation. (Si les autorisations de cet élément ont été modifiées auparavant, le bouton Personnalisation ne s'affiche pas. Passez à l'étape suivante.) Le volet Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles affiche les utilisateurs et groupes pour lesquels vous pouvez définir des autorisations pour l'élément concerné dans la bibliothèque. Le volet Autorisations actuelles affiche les utilisateurs et groupes bénéficiant déjà des autorisations requises pour l'élément concerné dans la bibliothèque. Vous pouvez modifier les autorisations existantes, si vous le désirez. 5 Pour ajouter un utilisateur ou un groupe au volet Autorisations actuelles, sélectionnez le nom dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Définition des autorisations et de la navigation dans la liste Utilisateurs et groupes disponibles A. Cliquez ici pour appliquer les mêmes autorisations de fichiers ou de dossiers que celles du dossier parent B. Choisissez une autorisation d'affichage C. Double-cliquez sur le nom d'un groupe pour afficher ses utilisateurs D. Double-cliquez sur cette icône pour accéder au dossier du niveau supérieur E. Utilisateurs F. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir une zone de texte pour la recherche G. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour déplacer un utilisateur ou un groupe dans la liste des Autorisations actuelles 6 Pour définir des autorisations pour un utilisateur ou un groupe, sélectionnez son nom dans la liste Autorisations actuelles, puis cliquez sur Autorisations. 7 Sélectionnez l'une des autorisations suivantes dans le menu déroulant : Gérer Les utilisateurs et les groupes bénéficiant de cette autorisation pour un dossier ou un fichier peuvent afficher, supprimer, déplacer et modifier le fichier ou le dossier, afficher des rapports sur les fichiers du dossier, configurer des autorisations pour le fichier ou le dossier et créer des dossiers. Cependant, ils ne peuvent pas publier dans ce dossier. A B C D E F GUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 217 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Refusé Les utilisateurs ou les groupes dont l'accès à un dossier ou un fichier a été refusé ne peuvent ni le consulter, ni y publier du contenu, ni le gérer. Publier Les utilisateurs et les groupes bénéficiant de cette autorisation pour un dossier ou une présentation peuvent publier, mettre à jour et consulter les présentations, et afficher des rapports concernant les fichiers de ce dossier. Toutefois, ces utilisateurs doivent être également membres du groupe Auteurs prédéfini, et disposer de l'autorisation de publication pour publier du contenu dans ce dossier. Voir Les utilisateurs ou les groupes bénéficiant de cette autorisation pour un dossier ou un fichier peuvent consulter tout le contenu de ce dossier, ou consulter le fichier individuel. Paramètres d'autorisation actuels A. Nom sélectionné B. Cliquez sur le bouton Autorisations pour sélectionner un paramètre d'autorisation. Le paramètre est affiché en regard du nom. 8 Pour supprimer un utilisateur ou un groupe de la liste Autorisations actuelles, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Supprimer. 9 Pour rétablir les autorisations du dossier parent pour tout le dossier ou le fichier de bibliothèque, cliquez sur Redéfinir sur parent. 10 Pour la bibliothèque de contenu uniquement : sélectionnez Oui pour l'option Visionnage public afin de rendre ce dossier public même si son dossier parent ne l'est pas. Sélectionnez Non pour rendre ce dossier inaccessible au public. Seuls les utilisateurs Acrobat Connect Pro bénéficiant des autorisations Afficher, Gérer ou Publier peuvent consulter du contenu privé. Pour cela, ils doivent d'abord se connecter en entrant leur nom d'utilisateur et leur mot de passe Acrobat Connect Pro. Génération de rapports dans Connect Pro Central A propos des rapports Connect Pro Central La fonction de création de rapports dans Connect Pro vous permet d'obtenir facilement et rapidement un large éventail de données utiles sur votre installation Connect Pro. L'interface de l'assistant vous permet de sélectionner un type de rapport général, puis de faire des choix pour préciser exactement les informations dont vous avez besoin. Par exemple, supposons que vous choisissiez de créer un rapport sur le cours. Après avoir sélectionné un cours, vous affichez les informations sur l'inscription en cours ou tout l'historique de l'inscription au cours. Autre exemple : lors de la création d'un rapport sur les réunions, vous affichez le résumé d'activité d'une salle au cours d'une période. A l'inverse, vous pouvez afficher les informations d'une réunion précise.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 218 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Les informations fournies dans les rapports sur l'utilisation du système vous permettent d'adapter l'installation et les coûts de Connect Pro. Par exemple, vous pouvez obtenir des informations sur l'activité du système d'un centre de coûts particulier. Informations générales essentielles sur les rapports • Si vous avez des personnes sous votre responsabilité, vous pouvez cliquer sur Rapports pour les responsables afin d'afficher les données concernant les formations que chacun de vos subordonnés a terminées, et les réunions et évènements auxquels il a participé. Cliquez sur le nom d'un subordonné pour afficher la liste de ses propres subordonnés. • Les groupes ne peuvent pas être utilisés comme option de tri. La colonne des groupes contient plusieurs valeurs si un utilisateur est membre de plusieurs groupes. Quand un utilisateur appartient à plusieurs groupes et que vous triez par groupe, le tri utilise uniquement le premier groupe de la liste. Pour les informations rassemblées par groupe, utilisez l'option de Rapport de groupe quand elle est disponible, par exemple, dans les rapports Stagiaire et utilisateur. • L'ordre de tri par défaut de tous les rapports contenant des noms d'utilisateur se fait par nom de famille. • Triez les informations de la colonne par ordre croissant ou décroissant en cliquant sur les en-têtes de colonne (à l'exception de l'en-tête de la colonne des groupes). • Ajoutez ou supprimez des en-têtes de colonne de manière dynamique en activant ou désactivant la case « Sélectionner les champs » dans l'Assistant Rapport. Remarque : En cas de mise à niveau de la version Adobe Connect Entreprise Server 6 vers la version Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7, les documents de formation existants migrent vers le nouveau serveur. Toutefois, l'Assistant Rapports de Connect Pro Server 7 prend en charge de nouveaux champs de données qui ne sont pas renseignés pour les documents de formation existants. Ces nouveaux champs apparaissent donc vides. De plus, les définitions de certains champs dans les nouveaux rapports peuvent être légèrement différentes des champs proposés dans les anciens rapports. Par exemple, dans les nouveaux rapports, le champ « inscrit » comprend tous les utilisateurs inscrits mais dans les anciens rapports, il comprend uniquement les utilisateurs inscrits actifs. Pour obtenir des informations sur les champs des rapports, consultez les descriptions des rapports dans ce document. Travailler avec des rapports Après avoir créé un rapport, utilisez l'Assistant Rapports pour réaliser l'une des actions suivantes : • Cliquez sur Nouveau ou Annuler pour revenir à la page d'accueil de l'Assistant Rapports. • Cliquez sur Modifier la requête ou sur Précédent pour modifier les paramètres de filtre et de champs. • Cliquez sur Enregistrer le rapport, puis attribuez-lui un nom évocateur de manière à pouvoir y accéder à partir du module Requêtes enregistrées. • Cliquez sur Imprimer pour imprimer le rapport. • Cliquez sur Télécharger le rapport pour enregistrer le rapport au format CSV. Accéder aux rapports Votre accès aux rapports dépend des groupes auxquels vous appartenez.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 219 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Création de champs personnalisés dans les rapports Connect Pro vous offre la possibilité de personnaliser des rapports. Grâce à la personnalisation, vous créez des rapports qui affichent uniquement les informations que vous désirez voir. Vous pouvez supprimer les colonnes contenant des informations dont vous n'avez pas besoin et ajouter des colonnes qui vous donnent les données dont vous avez besoin. Peaufiner les rapports réduit la taille de vos rapports et les rend plus utiles. Lorsque vous personnalisez un profil utilisateur, les 20 premiers champs apparaissent et vous pouvez attribuer des priorités aux champs personnalisés. Il est essentiel de classer les champs personnalisés par ordre d'importance ; les rapports comprennent uniquement les 10 premiers champs, notamment le champ personnalisé de courrier électronique. Pour obtenir des informations sur la création de champs personnalisés, consultez « Personnalisation des champs du profil utilisateur » à la page 197 Analyser un exemple de rapport Pour créer l'exemple de rapport, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1 Cliquez sur l'onglet Rapports dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre de Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur Curriculum. 3 Naviguez vers un curriculum spécifique, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans la partie gauche, cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. 5 Sélectionnez Filtrer à l'aide d'une plage de dates et saisissez des dates. 6 Sélectionnez Filtrer par groupe(s) d'utilisateurs et sélectionnez un groupe. 7 Dans la partie gauche, sélectionnez Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. 8 Sélectionnez d'autres champs au besoin. 9 Dans la partie gauche, cliquez sur Options. 10 Sous Choisir les options du rapport, sélectionnez Rapport sur le curriculum. 11 Cliquez sur Créer le rapport. Groupe prédéfini Autorisations de module de rapport Administrateur Toutes. Administrateur limité Utilisation du système, Requêtes enregistrées Toutefois, les administrateurs peuvent refuser l'accès. Voir « Création d'administrateurs » à la page 175. Auteurs Contenu, Requêtes enregistrées. Gestionnaires de formation Contenu, Cours, Curriculum, Salle de classe virtuelle, Stagiaire, Requêtes enregistrées. Gestionnaires d'événements Aucune. Stagiaires Aucune. Hôtes de réunions Réunion, Requêtes enregistrées. Hôtes de séminaires Aucune.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 220 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Exemple de rapport A. Section Résumé B. Nom du curriculum C. Filtre Date D. Filtre Groupe E. Options du rapport F. Informations détaillées sur les membres du groupe spécifié L'exemple de rapport affiche les informations suivantes : • Le nom du curriculum est Curriculum ABC. • Un filtre a été appliqué au rapport pour qu'il affiche uniquement les données entre le 1er septembre 2006 et le 1er octobre 2008. • Un filtre a été appliqué au rapport pour qu'il affiche uniquement les membres du groupe intitulé Groupe Alphabet. • Les informations suivantes s'affichent dans la Section Résumé : • Dans le groupe sélectionné, 26 stagiaires sont inscrits au curriculum. • Sur les 26 stagiaires inscrits, 4 ont fini le curriculum. • Sur les 26 stagiaires inscrits, 10 ont fini une partie du curriculum. Ils sont indiqués dans le champ « Nombre en cours ». • Sur les 26 stagiaires inscrits, 12 n'ont pas commencé le curriculum. Ils sont indiqués dans le champ « Nombre non démarré ». • Les informations détaillées suivantes s'affichent sous la Section Résumé : • Le nom de famille de chaque stagiaire du groupe spécifié inscrit au curriculum. • Prénom du stagiaire. • Etat du stagiaire, comme Non suivi, En cours ou Achevé. • Le numéro de certificat du stagiaire le cas échéant. (Le numéro de certificat est un numéro généré par le système et un ID unique qui prouve que le stagiaire a terminé le curriculum.) • La version du curriculum que le stagiaire a utilisée. (Mettez à jour les curriculums en apportant des modifications comme l'ajout de stagiaires ou la modification du contenu. Certains créateurs ne mettent jamais à jour leurs curriculums, il n'existe donc qu'une seule version.) • La date et l'heure auxquelles le stagiaire a accédé au curriculum pour la dernière fois. • Le nom du groupe auquel le stagiaire est affecté. Pour notre rapport, nous avons indiqué que nous désirions uniquement afficher les informations sur les stagiaires du Groupe Alphabet. Nous n'avons donc vu qu'un nom de groupe dans la liste. B C D E F AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 221 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Après avoir affiché le rapport, plusieurs options sont disponibles : Pour trier les informations de manières différentes, cliquez sur les en-têtes de colonne. Par exemple, dans l'exemple de rapport, cliquez sur Dernier accès pour voir les stagiaires ayant récemment accédé au curriculum. Vous pouvez également enregistrer, imprimer ou télécharger le rapport. Utilisation des rapports sur les cours Les rapports sur les cours fournissent des informations sur les cours individuels que vous avez créés et les stagiaires inscrits au cours. Le rapport sur le cours présente l'utilisation d'un cours. Le rapport montre si le cours est suivi, à quelle fréquence et si les utilisateurs réussissent, ne réussissent pas ou finissent le cours. Les rapports sur les cours affichant des stagiaires individuels qui suivent un cours spécifique vous permettent de voir qui a suivi le cours, le statut des stagiaires et leur note. Le rapport historique sur les cours comprend les informations sur les utilisateurs non inscrits et supprimés. Afficher les données sur les stagiaires non inscrits et supprimés vous permet d'analyser comment le cours a été utilisé au cours d'une période. Par exemple, vous pouvez voir combien de stagiaires n'ont pas fini le cours et si ce nombre augmente ou diminue. Créer des rapports sur les cours 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Cours. 3 Sélectionnez un cours dans la Bibliothèque des formations et cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates et/ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs Groupes d'utilisateurs spécifiques. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 6 Cliquez sur Options. Sélectionnez le rapport sur le cours à créer : le Rapport sur le cours ou le Rapport historique sur les cours qui comprend tous les utilisateurs non inscrits et supprimés 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. Consulter les rapports sur les cours Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur les cours. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur les cours. En-tête de colonne Description Tentatives Le nombre de tentatives réalisées pour réussir le cours par rapport au nombre de tentatives autorisées. Par exemple, 1 sur 3 signifie que le stagiaire a réalisé 1 tentative et qu'un total de 3 tentatives est disponible. Nbre de certificats Nombre généré par le système qui atteste que le stagiaire a achevé le cours et attribuant à celui-ci un identifiant qui lui est propre. (L'état du cours d'un stagiaire doit être sur terminé ou réussi pour recevoir un nombre de certificat.) Date supprimée Là où cela s'applique, la date à laquelle le stagiaire a été supprimé du système Connect Enterprise. Date d'inscription Date à laquelle le stagiaire a été ajouté à la liste d'inscription au cours. Date de désinscription Date à laquelle le stagiaire a été supprimé de la liste d'inscription au cours. Prénom Prénom du stagiaire inscrit au cours. Groupe Tous les groupes desquels ce stagiaire est membre s'affichent ici : Cette colonne ne trie pas. Dernier accès La dernière fois où le stagiaire a accédé au cours précisé.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 222 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Utilisation de rapports sur les curriculums Les rapports sur les curriculums affichent comment les stagiaires utilisent un curriculum ainsi que les cours et les classes virtuelles du curriculum. Le rapport sur le curriculum affiche les informations récapitulatives, comme le nombre de stagiaires inscrits et le nombre de stagiaires en cours. Le rapport affiche également les informations sur les stagiaires inscrits au curriculum, avec leur nom, leur état et la dernière fois où ils ont accédé au curriculum. Le rapport des objets du curriculum affiche les informations par objet de formation, généralement un cours ou une classe virtuelle. Vous pouvez voir des informations comme le nom de l'objet de formation, la note moyenne du stagiaire pour l'objet et vous pouvez voir si des prérequis sont définis. Afficher les données sur les objets du curriculum vous permet d'analyser comment les stagiaires utilisent les objets spécifiques à un curriculum. Créer des rapports sur les curriculums 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Curriculum. 3 Sélectionnez un curriculum dans la Bibliothèque de formation et cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates et/ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs Groupes d'utilisateurs spécifiques. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 6 Cliquez sur Options. Sélectionnez le rapport sur le curriculum à créer : Rapport sur le curriculum ou Rapport sur le curriculum contenant des objets du curriculum. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. 8 (Facultatif) Si vous avez sélectionné Rapport sur le curriculum contenant des objets du curriculum lors de l'étape 6, cliquez sur le nom d'un objet de formation dans le rapport généré. Cliquer sur un nom crée un rapport sur l'objet de formation spécifique. Consulter des rapports sur les curriculums Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur les curriculums. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur les curriculums. Nom Nom de famille du stagiaire inscrit au cours. Gestionnaire Prénom et nom de famille du responsable de cet utilisateur. Nombre de cours terminés Nombre de stagiaires qui ont terminé le cours. Nombre d'inscrits Nombre total de stagiaires déjà inscrits au cours. Les données des archives sont incluses. Nombre d'échecs Les stagiaires qui ont échoué au cours. Nombre en cours Les stagiaires qui ont commencé, mais qui n'ont pas encore terminé le cours. Nombre non commencés Les stagiaires qui n'ont pas commencé le cours. Nombre de réussites Les stagiaires qui ont réussi le cours. Note Note pour le cours reçue par le stagiaire. Etat Position du stagiaire dans le déroulement du cours. Par exemple, le stagiaire n'a pas ouvert le cours (Pas commencé), l'a ouvert mais ne l'a pas terminé (En cours) ou a fini le cours (Terminé). Version Si plusieurs versions du cours ont été téléchargées, cette colonne indique la version utilisée par le stagiaire. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 223 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Utilisation des rapports du stagiaire Les rapports sur les stagiaires affichent toute l'activité de cours, des classes virtuelles et de curriculum d'une personne ou d'un groupe. Le rapport sur le stagiaire individuel vous permet de voir la progression d'un stagiaire tout au long d'une formation. Les informations détaillées du rapport incluent le nombre de tâches attribuées au stagiaire, le nombre de tâches qui sont terminés, le nombre de tâches en cours et le nombre de tâches non commencées. Le rapport sur le groupe de stagiaires affiche des informations similaires, mais pour un groupe entier au lieu d'un seul stagiaire. Les rapports sur les stagiaires sont utiles car ils donnent des informations sur la façon dont les personnes et les groupes utilisent vos cours et vos curriculums. Vous pouvez déterminer si les stagiaires suivent et terminent leurs tâches de formation, la vitesse à laquelle ils travaillent et les notes qu'ils obtiennent. Créer des rapports sur les stagiaires 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Stagiaire. En-tête de colonne Description Version active S'il existe plusieurs versions de l'objet du curriculum, la dernière version s'affiche ici. Note moyenne La note moyenne d'un stagiaire pour l'objet du curriculum. Nbre de certificats Nombre généré par le système qui atteste que le stagiaire a achevé le curriculum et attribuant à celuici un identifiant qui lui est propre. (L'état du curriculum d'un stagiaire doit être sur terminé ou réussi pour recevoir un nombre de certificat.) Sommaire Description d'un objet du curriculum, comme un fichier de présentation ou d'animation Flash. Prénom Prénom du stagiaire inscrit au curriculum. Groupe Tous les groupes dont ce stagiaire est membre s'affichent ici. Cette colonne ne trie pas. Dernier accès La dernière fois que le stagiaire a ouvert le curriculum. Nom Nom de famille du stagiaire inscrit au curriculum. Objet de formation Nom de l'objet de formation Nombre de cours terminés Les stagiaires qui ont terminé le curriculum. Nombre d'inscrits Les stagiaires qui sont inscrits au curriculum. Nombre en cours Les stagiaires qui ont commencé, mais qui n'ont pas encore terminé le curriculum. Nombre non commencés Les stagiaires qui n'ont pas commencé le curriculum. Pourcentage ayant terminé Pourcentage de stagiaires pour lesquels l'état est « Terminé » pour l'objet du curriculum. Prérequis Les objets du curriculum qui doivent être terminés avant de tenter l'objet du curriculum figurant sur cette ligne. Requis ou Facultatif Indique si un stagiaire doit terminer l'objet du curriculum pour terminer le curriculum ou si l'objet est facultatif. Etat Position du stagiaire dans le déroulement du curriculum. Par exemple, le stagiaire a ouvert le cours (Pas commencé), l'a ouvert mais ne l'a pas terminé (En cours) ou a fini le cours (Terminé). Essais Objets du curriculum pouvant être terminés à la place de l'objet figurant sur cette ligne. Type Description de l'objet du curriculum. Version Si plusieurs versions du curriculum ont été téléchargées, cette colonne indique la version utilisée par le stagiaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 224 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 3 Dans le menu, sélectionnez un type de rapport sur le stagiaire : Stagiaire individuel ou Groupe. 4 Sélectionnez un stagiaire individuel ou un groupe puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. 8 (Facultatif) Si vous avez sélectionné le rapport Stagiaire individuel à l'étape 3, cliquez sur le nom d'un objet de formation dans le rapport généré. Cliquer sur un nom crée un rapport sur l'objet de formation spécifique. Consulter les rapports sur les stagiaires Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur les stagiaires. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur les stagiaires. Utilisation des rapports sur le contenu Les rapports sur le contenu fournissent des informations détaillées sur le contenu que vous avez envoyé sur Connect Pro. (Le contenu peut correspondre à tous les types de fichiers suivants : PPT, PPTX, FLX, SWF, PDF, GIF, JPG, PNG, mp3, HTML ou ZIP.) Par exemple, un rapport sur le contenu sur un PDF affiche le nom de la page, le nombre de fois où chaque page a été consultée et la dernière date de consultation de chaque page. En-tête de colonne Description Tentatives Nombre de fois où le stagiaire a essayé de terminer l'objet de formation. (Les tentatives sont uniquement suivies au niveau de l'objet de formation). Nbre de certificats Nombre généré par le système qui atteste que le stagiaire a achevé le cours, la classe virtuelle ou le curriculum et attribuant à ce stagiaire un identifiant qui lui est propre. (L'état du cours ou du curriculum d'un stagiaire doit être défini sur terminé ou réussi pour recevoir un nombre de certificat.) Sommaire Si l'objet de formation est un cours, le type de contenu du cours s'affiche, comme une présentation ou une image. Dernier accès Dans le cas d'un curriculum, la date à laquelle un stagiaire a accédé à un objet du curriculum pour la dernière fois. Objet de formation Nom de l'objet de formation Nombre de cours terminés Les stagiaires ayant terminé l'objet de formation. Nombre en cours Les stagiaires qui sont encore en train de suivre l'objet de formation. Nombre non commencés Les stagiaires qui n'ont pas commencé l'objet de formation. Nombre de tâches de formation Nombre total de tâches. Si le stagiaire est inscrit à un cours ne faisant pas partie d'un curriculum et si le cours existe aussi dans le curriculum, l'élément est comptabilisé deux fois. Note Note obtenue pour les objets de formation tentés jusqu'à aujourd'hui. Etat Position du stagiaire dans le déroulement du curriculum/cours. Par exemple, le stagiaire a ouvert le cours/curriculum (Pas commencé), l'a ouvert mais ne l'a pas terminé (En cours) ou a fini le cours/curriculum (Terminé). Type Description de l'objet de formation. Par exemple, cours, curriculum ou classe. Version accédée Si plusieurs versions de l'objet de formation ont été téléchargées, cette colonne indique la version utilisée par le stagiaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 225 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Un rapport sur le contenu affichant des informations sur les questions vous permet d'afficher des informations sur les questions d'une présentation (fichier PPT ou PPTX). Par exemple, vous pouvez sélectionner une présentation contenant une question à cinq choix multiples. Lancer un rapport sur le contenu affichant des informations sur les questions vous permet de voir le nombre de stagiaires ayant choisi l'une des cinq réponses possibles. Ce rapport permet d'affiner les questions de vos présentations. Si vous pensez que trop de stagiaires réussissent ou ratent une présentation, utilisez ce rapport pour déterminer les questions à retravailler. Créer des rapports sur le contenu 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Contenu. 3 Sélectionnez un contenu dans la bibliothèque et cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates et/ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs Groupes d'utilisateurs spécifiques. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 6 Cliquez sur Options. Sélectionnez le type de rapport sur le contenu à créer : Rapport sur le contenu ou Rapport sur le contenu indiquant des détails sur les questions. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. Consulter des rapports sur le contenu Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur le contenu. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur le contenu. En-tête de colonne Description Note moyenne La note moyenne d'un stagiaire pour le contenu. Type de contenu Description du contenu. Par exemple, un fichier de présentation, image ou SWF. Utilisation actuelle du disque Taille actuelle, en Ko, du fichier de contenu. Dernière date de modification La dernière date à laquelle des modifications ont été apportées au fichier de contenu. Dernière date de consultation La dernière date à laquelle un utilisateur a affiché le fichier de contenu. Note maximale Note maximale qu'un stagiaire a obtenu sur le fichier de contenu. Note minimale Note minimale qu'un stagiaire a obtenu sur le fichier de contenu. Nombre de questions Nombre total de questions que le fichier de contenu contient. Nombre sélectionné Nombre de stagiaires qui ont sélectionné cette option. Nom de la page Nom complet de la page. (Pour du contenu PDF uniquement.) Page n° Numéro correspondant au numéro de page dans le fichier de contenu. (Pour du contenu PDF uniquement.) Pourcentage sélectionné Pourcentage de stagiaires qui ont sélectionné cette option. Description de la question La vraie question figurant sur la diapositive. Pour une question à choix multiples, chaque choix possible s'affiche sur sa propre ligne. Question n° Numéro correspondant au numéro de la question dans la présentation. Réponses Différentes réponses possibles à la question. Nom de la diapositive Nom complet de la diapositive.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 226 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Utilisation de rapports sur la classe virtuelle Les rapports sur les classes virtuelles fournissent des informations sur l'utilisation des classes virtuelles au cours d'une période. Utilisez le Rapport sur la classe virtuelle pour voir les noms, les dates d'inscription et l'état d'accomplissement des stagiaires de la classe. Servez-vous du Rapport sur la participation à la session de classe virtuelle pour afficher les données d'une session spécifique de classe virtuelle. Vous pouvez afficher des informations comme la durée de la session, le nombre total de participants, le nom des participants et les heures auxquelles les participants sont arrivés et sont partis. Les informations contenues dans ce rapport vous permettent de déterminer si ce sont les bonnes personnes qui ont participé à une session et combien de temps elles sont restées dans la classe. Vous pouvez aussi comparer des sessions différentes. Par exemple, supposez que le même cours de formation est proposé dans la même classe virtuelle à deux heures distinctes. En exécutant un rapport de session à chaque fois, vous pouvez déterminer laquelle a détenu une participation plus élevée. Créer des rapports sur la classe virtuelle 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Classe virtuelle. 3 Dans le menu, sélectionnez un type de rapport sur la classe virtuelle : Rapport sur les cours de la classe virtuelle ou Rapport sur la participation à la session de classe virtuelle. 4 Sélectionnez une classe virtuelle dans la Bibliothèque des formations et cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates et/ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs Groupes d'utilisateurs spécifiques. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. Consulter des rapports sur la classe virtuelle Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur la classe virtuelle. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur la classe virtuelle. Diapositive n° Numéro correspondant au numéro de la diapositive dans la présentation. Durée totale Pour un fichier vidéo ou audio, la durée totale de ce fichier en heures/minutes/secondes. Total des pages Dans un PDF, le nombre total de pages du fichier. Total des diapositives Dans une présentation, le nombre total de diapositives dans ce fichier. Total des consultations Le nombre total de fois où ce contenu a été consulté. Consultations uniques Le nombre d'utilisateurs identifiés une seule fois qui ont accédé à ce contenu . En-tête de colonne Description Rôle attribué Rôle attribué sur la page Gérer les inscrits. (Ne s'affiche pas si le rôle a été modifié pendant la classe virtuelle.) Date supprimée Date à laquelle le stagiaire a été supprimé de la classe virtuelle. Date d'inscription Date à laquelle le stagiaire a été inscrit à la classe virtuelle. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 227 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Utilisation des rapports sur les réunions Les rapports sur les salles de réunion montrent comment les salles de réunion sont utilisées. Le rapport de synthèse sur les salles de réunion vous permet d'obtenir des données sur une salle de réunion individuelle au cours d'une période et au cours de plusieurs sessions. Vous pouvez obtenir des informations comme le nombre unique total de participants, le nombre de sessions uniques et la durée moyenne d'une réunion. Ces informations vous permettent de déterminer si l'activité d'une salle de réunion est faible. A l'inverse, si le rapport indique qu'une salle de réunion est très prise, vous pouvez créer plus de salles de réunion pour mieux gérer la charge de travail. Date de désinscription Date à laquelle le stagiaire a été supprimé de la liste d'inscription à la classe virtuelle. Durée Durée de la session de classe virtuelle sélectionnée. Adresse de messagerie Adresse de messagerie du stagiaire inscrit à la classe virtuelle ou du stagiaire indiqué pour la session de classe virtuelle sélectionnée. Heure de la première entrée L'heure à laquelle le stagiaire a été admis dans la classe virtuelle pour la première fois. Prénom Prénom du stagiaire inscrit à la classe virtuelle. Dernier accès La date à laquelle le stagiaire a intégré la classe virtuelle pour la dernière fois. Dernière sortie Affiche la date à laquelle le stagiaire a quitté la classe virtuelle pour la dernière fois. (Le stagiaire peut avoir intégré et quitté la classe plusieurs fois.) Modifier son état sur « Pause » n'est pas considéré comme une sortie. Seules la perte de connexion ou la fermeture volontaire de la fenêtre de la classe correspondent à une sortie. Nom Nom de famille du stagiaire inscrit à la classe virtuelle. Journalisation de plusieurs entrées Indique si le stagiaire est entré et a quitté plusieurs fois la classe pendant cette session. Nombre de cours terminés Les stagiaires qui ont obtenu les matières obligatoires de la classe virtuelle. Nombre en cours Les stagiaires qui se sont connectés, mais qui n'ont pas encore obtenu les matières obligatoires de la classe virtuelle. Nombre non commencés Les stagiaires qui ne se sont pas connectés à la classe virtuelle. Participants effectifs Nombre total de stagiaires ayant au moins intégré la classe. Ne comprend pas les stagiaires ayant le rôle préattribué d'Hôte ou de Présentateur. Participants inscrits Nombre total de participants inscrits dans la classe virtuelle. Ce nombre n'inclut pas les participants ayant un rôle d'hôte ou de présentateur. Date de début Heure à laquelle la session de classe virtuelle spécifiée et sélectionnée a commencé. Etat Position du stagiaire dans le déroulement de la classe. Par exemple, si le stagiaire n'a pas encore intégré la classe, son statut est défini sur Non suivi. Quand un stagiaire quitte une classe virtuelle, son statut devient Terminé. Participation totale Nombre total de stagiaires ayant intégré la session de classe virtuelle spécifiée. Durée totale de participation Durée totale (somme du temps entre chaque entrée et chaque sortie) de présence du stagiaire dans la classe virtuelle. Si un participant était présent de 11h45 à 12h00 puis de 12h10 à 12h15, sa durée de participation totale serait de 00:20:00. Total des inscriptions Nombre total de stagiaires inscrits dans la session de classe virtuelle spécifiée. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 228 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Le rapport de session d'une réunion individuelle vous permet d'afficher des informations sur une session spécifique ayant eu lieu dans une salle de réunion. Vous voyez des informations comme le nombre total de participants, le nombre total d'invités et les noms de tous les participants. En comparant la durée planifiée à la durée réelle de la session, vous déterminez si une réunion s'est terminée plus tôt ou plus tard que prévu. Les informations contenues dans ce rapport vous permettent de déterminer si ce sont les bonnes personnes qui ont participé à une réunion précise et combien de temps elles sont restées dans la salle. Créer des rapports sur les réunions 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Réunion. 3 Dans le menu, sélectionnez un type de rapport sur les réunions : Rapport sommaire sur la salle ou Rapport sur une session de réunion. 4 Sélectionnez une réunion dans la Bibliothèque et cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates et/ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs Groupes d'utilisateurs spécifiques. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. Consulter des rapports sur les réunions Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur les réunions. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports sur les réunions. En-tête de colonne Description Durée moyenne La durée moyenne des sessions de réunion qui ont eu lieu dans cette salle de réunion. Durée moyenne de participation par session La durée moyenne qu'un participant précis passe en réunion dans cette salle de réunion. Utilisateurs moyens Le nombre moyen de participants à une session pendant toutes les sessions d'une salle de réunion. Utilisation actuelle du disque (ko) Quantité d'espace, en Ko, utilisée actuellement dans cette salle de réunion. Date de la session La date à laquelle la session d'une réunion spécifique a eu lieu. Heure de la première entrée Heure à laquelle le premier participant est entré dans la salle de réunion pour cette session de réunion spécifique. Prénom Prénom du participant à la réunion. Première session Date à laquelle la première session de la réunion a eu lieu dans cette salle de réunion. Première session suivie La date à laquelle le participant en question a participé pour la première fois à une session de réunion dans cette salle de réunion. Activité intermittente Indique si le participant est entré et a quitté plusieurs fois la classe pendant cette session de réunion. Dernière sortie Affiche l'heure à laquelle le participant a quitté la réunion pour la dernière fois. (Le participant peut avoir intégré et quitté la classe plusieurs fois.) Modifier son état sur « Pause » n'est pas considéré comme une sortie. Seule la perte de connexion ou la fermeture volontaire de la fenêtre de la réunion correspond à une sortie. Nom Nom de famille du participant à la réunion. Gestionnaire Prénom et nom de famille du responsable de cet utilisateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 229 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Utilisation de rapports sur l'utilisation du système Les rapports sur l'utilisation du système présentent, à partir de différents points de vue, l'utilisation de Connect Pro par votre entreprise. Tous les rapports peuvent être filtrés par étendue de dates. Normalement, les administrateurs système de Connect Pro créent et utilisent des rapports système. Les rapports système sont tous différents et fournissent des données distinctes. Sélectionnez d'abord un type de rapport système : Utilisation individuelle, Utilisation du groupe, Utilisation du centre de coûts, Utilisation complète du système ou Utilisation de paquet. Vous recevez ensuite des options propres au rapport que vous avez sélectionné. Le rapport Utilisation individuelle fournit des informations sur l'interaction d'un seul utilisateur avec Connect Pro. Le rapport indique le nombre de minutes total de la réunion, le nombre total de formations réalisées et la consommation de stockage totale. Le rapport vous permet de déterminer le nombre de réunions et de sessions de formation auxquelles un utilisateur a participé. Le numéro de la consommation de stockage vous indique les personnes ayant envoyé le plus de contenu. Le rapport Utilisation du groupe affiche de nombreuses informations sur un groupe d'utilisateurs. La partie supérieure du rapport affiche des informations récapitulatives sur le groupe, comme le nombre total de membres, le nombre de minutes total de la réunion et la consommation totale. La deuxième partie du rapport affiche les membres individuels et les données concernant chacun d'entre eux, comme le nombre de minutes total, l'état de connexion et le nom du responsable. Lancez des rapports Utilisation du groupe pour comparer différents groupes et voir, par exemple, lesquels utilisent le plus et le moins Connect Pro. Session la plus récente Date à laquelle la dernière session de la réunion a eu lieu dans cette salle de réunion. Session la plus récente suivie Date à laquelle le participant en question a assisté à une session de réunion pour la dernière fois dans cette salle de réunion. Nombre maximal d'utilisateurs Au cours de l'ensemble des sessions, le nombre maximal de participants simultanés dans la salle de réunion. Durée prévue Durée prévue pour la session de réunion en question. (Une réunion peut être prévue pour une heure, mais ne pas durer toute l'heure.) Rôle lors de l'entrée Le rôle attribué à un participant lorsqu'il intègre la réunion. Durée totale de participation Ajoute toutes les durées entre chaque entrée/sortie et compile la durée totale de présence d'un participant à la réunion. Si un participant était présent de 11h:45 à 12h:00 puis de 12h:10 à 12h:15, sa durée de participation totale serait de 00:20:00. Total des invités Nombre total d'invités entrés. (Ne peut pas déterminer les invités uniques.) Total des hôtes attribués Nombre total de participants ayant intégré la réunion avec le statut d'hôte. Total des présentateurs attribués Nombre total de participants ayant intégré la réunion avec le statut de participant. Durée totale dans la salle de réunion Durée totale (somme du temps entre chaque entrée et chaque sortie) de présence du participant dans la salle de réunion. Si un participant était présent de 11h45 à 12h00 puis de 12h10 à 12h15, sa durée de participation totale serait de 00:20:00. Total des participants uniques Nombre total de participants distincts dans la salle de réunion/session. Total des participants uniques enregistrés Nombre total de participants enregistrés distincts dans la salle de réunion/session. Sessions uniques Nombre total de réunions distinctes ayant eu lieu dans cette salle de réunion. Sessions uniques suivies Nombre total de sessions distinctes suivies par cette personne. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 230 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Le Rapport d'utilisation du centre de coûts montre l'utilisation d'un centre de coûts spécifique par les membres utilisant Connect Pro. Une section du rapport affiche les membres individuels du centre de coûts et leur utilisation du système. Une autre section répertorie les réunions facturées au centre de coûts et leurs informations, comme le nombre total de participants et le nom de l'administrateur de la réunion. Le Rapport d'utilisation du centre de coûts vous permet de suivre les comptes rendus et les coûts de Connect Pro. Créez des rapports différents pour des centres de coûts distincts afin de comparer leurs statistiques. Le rapport sur l'utilisation complète du système fournit une synthèse de haut niveau sur l'utilisation de Connect Pro. (Facultatif) Filtrez le rapport par groupe et/ou par étendue de date. Les résumés du système, des réunions et des formations s'affichent sur une seule page. Ce rapport sert à indiquer à la direction et aux autres services comment votre entreprise utilise Connect Pro. Le rapport de synthèse d'utilisation des paquets indique le nombre de minutes de paquet utilisé par votre entreprise. (Les entreprises achètent des minutes par paquet lorsqu'elles requièrent plus de minutes au cours d'une période précise.) Le rapport affiche également le nombre de salles actives et le nombre maximal d'utilisateurs. Utilisez ce rapport pour contrôler l'utilisation et les coûts de Connect Pro. Créer des rapports sur l'utilisation du système 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central, puis cliquez sur Rapports. 2 Cliquez sur Utilisation du système. 3 Dans le menu, sélectionnez un type de rapport d'utilisation : Utilisation individuelle, Utilisation du groupe, Utilisation du centre de coûts, Utilisation complète du système ou Utilisation par paquet. 4 Sélectionnez une personne, un groupe ou un centre de coûts et cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Cliquez sur Spécifier les filtres du rapport. (Facultatif) Saisissez une étendue de dates. 6 Dans le cas de rapports Utilisation individuelle, Utilisation du groupe ou Utilisation du centre de coûts, cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des champs. Sélectionnez et désélectionnez les champs à afficher dans le rapport. 7 Cliquez sur Créer un rapport. 8 (Facultatif) Si vous avez sélectionné l'utilisation du centre de coûts à l'étape 3, cliquez sur Télécharger le rapport et choisissez un rapport à télécharger comme feuille de calcul. 9 (Facultatif) Si vous avez sélectionné l'utilisation par paquet à l'étape 3, vous pouvez afficher le rapport par heure ou par jour. Consulter les rapports sur l'utilisation du système Le tableau affiche les informations spécifiques qui apparaissent dans les colonnes au sein des rapports sur l'utilisation du système. Les en-têtes de colonne n'apparaissent pas tous dans tous les rapports système. En-tête de colonne Description Utilisateurs actifs connectés Nombre d'utilisateurs dans ce groupe, centre de coûts ou système complet actuellement connectés au système. Salle(s) active(s) Salle(s) où des minutes supplémentaires ont été utilisées. Salles de réunion distinctes Nombre de salles de réunion distinctes administrées par une personne, un groupe, un centre de coût ou le système complet. Si une personne n'a aucun privilège d'hôte, ce nombre est de zéro. Date de fin Heure et date auxquelles la session de réunion suivie dans le rapport a pris fin. Prénom Prénom d'un utilisateur individuel. Groupe Le nom du groupe sélectionné. Cette colonne ne trie pas.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 231 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Dernière date de connexion Date et heure auxquelles la personne, le membre du groupe ou le membre du centre de coûts s'est connecté pour la dernière fois à Connect Pro. Nom Nom de famille d'un utilisateur individuel. Etat de connexion Etat actuel de l'utilisateur. Par exemple, si l'utilisateur n'est actuellement pas connecté à Connect Pro, son statut est inactif. Gestionnaire Le prénom et le nom de famille du responsable de cet utilisateur. Nom de la réunion Nom d'une réunion facturée auprès du centre de coûts sélectionné. Adresse électronique de l'administrateur de la réunion Adresse électronique de la personne qui a créé la réunion. Prénom de l'administrateur de la réunion Prénom de la personne qui a créé la réunion. Nom de famille de l'administrateur de la réunion Nom de famille de la personne qui a créé la réunion. Nombre maximal d'utilisateurs simultanés en réunion Nombre maximal de personnes en salles de réunion en même temps pour le système complet. Par exemple, si ce nombre est de 100, 100 personnes au maximum se trouvaient dans des salles de réunion en même temps. Nombre maximal d'utilisateurs Plus grand nombre d'utilisateurs arrivés dans une ou plusieurs salles où des minutes supplémentaires ont été utilisées. Date de début Heure et date auxquelles la session de réunion suivie dans le rapport a commencé. Espace de stockage utilisé (Ko) Quantité actuelle d'espace, en Ko, utilisé par la personne, le groupe ou le centre de coûts. Dans le rapport système complet, les numéros de la consommation de stockage sont indiqués pour tout le système et pour les réunions. Nombre total de participants Nombre total de participants lorsque tous les participants de toutes les sessions sont additionnés. Si la même personne a assisté à deux sessions, elle est comptabilisée deux fois dans le nombre total de participants. Nombre total de minutes par paquet Dans le rapport d'utilisation du centre de coûts, le total des minutes par paquet utilisé par le centre de coûts en entier et par les réunions individuelles facturées auprès du centre de coûts. Dans le rapport des minutes par paquet, c'est le nombre total de minutes issues de paquet du système complet qui est indiqué. Nombre total de minutes de l'hôte (hh:mm:ss) Nombre total de minutes qu'une personne, un groupe, un membre du groupe, un centre de coûts ou un membre du centre de coûts a passées en salle de réunion en tant qu'hôte prédéfini. N'inclut pas les minutes de l'hôte quand l'utilisateur a été temporairement promu au rôle d'hôte. Dans le rapport d'utilisation du système complet, c'est le nombre total des minutes de l'hôte de toute l'installation de Connect Pro qui s'affiche. Nombre total d'hôtes Nombre total d'utilisateurs ayant un statut d'hôte dans le groupe, le centre de coûts et le système complet. Nombre total d'accomplissements de formation des stagiaires Nombre total de stagiaires ayant fini les cours et les curriculums dans le système complet. Nombre total de minutes de réunion (hh:mm:ss) Nombre total de minutes, dans tous les rôles et dans toutes les sessions, passé dans les salles de réunion par une personne, un groupe, un membre de groupe, un centre de coûts ou un membre de centre de coûts. Le rapport d'utilisation du système complet affiche le nombre total de minutes de réunion pour tous les utilisateurs du système. Nombre total de sessions de réunion Nombre total de réunions individuelles facturées au centre de coût sélectionné. Nombre total de directeurs de formation Nombre total des personnes du système Connect Pro ayant des permissions de responsables de formation. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 232 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Affichage et téléchargement de rapports sommaires sur les comptes La page Résumé du compte s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. Sur cette page, vous pouvez cliquer sur le lien Rapports afin d'accéder aux nombreux rapports qui récapitulent les informations relatives au compte. Certains de ces rapports sont téléchargeables, d'autres non. Affichage de rapports sur les formations 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 L'option Compte étant sélectionnée, choisissez Rapports. 4 Cliquez sur Voir les rapports sur les formations. Ce rapport résume les informations relatives aux quotas des stagiaires (nombre effectif de stagiaires comparé au nombre autorisé). Affichage de rapports sur les réunions 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 L'option Compte étant sélectionnée, choisissez Rapports. 4 Cliquez sur Voir les rapports sur les réunions. Ce rapport affiche le nombre maximal de participants acceptés à un moment donné (le pic de participation simultanée) pour le mois courant comparé au quota autorisé. Il indique aussi le nombre d'utilisateurs participant actuellement à des réunions, qu'elles soient en direct ou enregistrées. Cette liste vous permet de surveiller les réunions et d'intervenir en cliquant sur le nom de l'une d'elles. Par exemple, pour libérer de l'espace pour une autre réunion, rejoignez une réunion active et envoyez un message à l'hôte de la réunion pour demander que des participants se retirent. Affichage de rapports sur les événements 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. Espace de stockage total utilisé par la formation Quantité totale de stockage (en Ko) utilisé pour les objets de formation, comme les cours, les curriculums et les classes virtuelles. Nombre total de formations terminées Nombre total de formations (cours, curriculum et classes virtuelles) terminées par une personne, un groupe, un membre de groupe, un centre de coûts ou un membre de centre de coûts. Nombre total d'objets de formation uniques Nombre total des objets de formation (cours, curriculum et classes virtuelles) dans le système complet. Nombre total d'utilisateurs Nombre total d'utilisateurs dans le groupe, le centre de coûts ou le système complet. Type Type de réunion (classe ou réunion) facturé au centre de coût. Espace de stockage de l'utilisateur (Ko) Quantité totale d'espace de stockage (en Ko) utilisée par le membre individuel du centre de coûts. Nombre total de minutes de l'utilisateur (hh:mm:ss) Durée totale (en minutes) de participation à des réunions du membre individuel du centre de coûts. En-tête de colonne DescriptionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 233 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro 3 L'option Compte étant sélectionnée, choisissez Rapports. 4 Cliquez sur Voir les rapports sur les événements. Ce rapport indique le nombre et la liste des événements actifs (en cours) du compte. Pour chacun d'eux, le rapport indique le nom de l'événement, le nombre d'utilisateurs enregistrés, les dates de début et de fin de l'événement. Vous pouvez cliquer sur le nom d'un événement spécifique pour ouvrir la page Informations sur l'événement et obtenir davantage d'informations. Certains rapports sur les événements, tels que les rapports des personnes présentes/absentes, sont téléchargeables. Affichage et téléchargement de rapports disponibles en téléchargement 1 Connectez-vous à Connect Pro Central. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Administration. 3 L'option Compte étant sélectionnée, choisissez Rapports. 4 Cliquez sur Afficher les rapports disponibles en téléchargement. 5 Cliquez sur Filtres des rapports et choisissez la méthode de filtrage des données que le rapport doit renvoyer. 6 Cliquez sur l'un des boutons Télécharger les données. Vous pouvez télécharger au format CSV cinq types de rapport différents, à exporter vers des systèmes externes. Remarque : Chaque rapport téléchargé que vous enregistrez est nommé par défaut « data.csv ». Lorsque vous enregistrez le fichier, attribuez-lui un nom d'identification unique ; par exemple, « interactionsMars06.csv ». Données du rapport téléchargeable sur les interactions Ce rapport résume les accès des utilisateurs. Un ID de transaction unique est généré chaque fois qu'un utilisateur participe à une réunion ou à un séminaire, affiche du contenu, suit un cours ou accède à un curriculum. Le rapport sur les interactions présente les données suivantes. Le rapport sur les interactions n'indique pas les numéros de certification ni les notes maximales. Nom de la colonne Description transaction-id ID unique de la transaction. sco-id Identifiant unique utilisé par le système LMS pour identifier différents objets de contenus partageables (Shareable Content Objects, ou SCO). type Type d'objet accédé, par exemple contenu, réunion ou événement. nom Nom de l'objet tel qu'affiché dans la liste de contenu. url Objet auquel l'utilisateur a accédé. principal-id ID unique de l'utilisateur. login Nom de l'utilisateur ayant accédé à cette transaction. user-name Nom d'utilisateur unique. score Note de l'utilisateur status Etat de la transaction : acceptée, non aboutie, terminée ou en cours. date-created Date à laquelle cette transaction a été effectuée. date-closed Date à laquelle cette transaction s'est terminée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 234 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Données du rapport téléchargeable sur les utilisateurs Ce rapport téléchargeable répertorie les utilisateurs et les attributs de profil associés en utilisant les données du tableau suivant. Les données sont générées dans cette vue chaque fois qu'un utilisateur est créé, mis à jour ou supprimé. Si vous activez l'option Inclure les champs personnalisés, les informations personnalisées des profils des utilisateurs sont ajoutées au rapport. En cas de personnalisation des profils utilisateur, trois champs sont obligatoires (prénom, nom et adresse électronique) ; vous pouvez ajouter jusqu'à huit champs personnalisés. Pour personnaliser les profils utilisateur, choisissez Administration > Utilisateurs et Groupes > Personnaliser le profil utilisateur. Placez en tête de la liste les huit champs que vous souhaitez ajouter. Le rapport sur les utilisateurs exclut les renseignements suivants : • Mot de passe, qui n'est pas enregistré en texte standard. • Fuseau horaire et langue, qui ne sont pas disponibles en clair ; par exemple, PST correspond à 323. Remarque : Les utilisateurs supprimés ne sont pas affichés dans le rapport sur les utilisateurs, mais figurent toujours dans le rapport sur les interactions. Données du rapport téléchargeable sur les ressources Des données sont générées dans un rapport sur les ressources chaque fois qu'un utilisateur crée une réunion, un événement, un séminaire, un curriculum ou un cours ou charge du contenu. Le rapport répertorie les données suivantes sur les objets du système (comme les réunions, le contenu, les cours, etc.). Nom de la colonne Description principal-id ID unique de l'utilisateur. login Identificateur d'utilisateur unique. nom Nom d'utilisateur unique. email Adresse électronique de l'utilisateur. manager L'identifiant du responsable de l'utilisateur (le responsable est toujours défini sur NULL). type Utilisateur ou invité (le type est toujours défini sur utilisateur). Nom de la colonne Description sco-id Identifiant unique utilisé par le système LMS pour identifier différents objets de contenus partageables (Shareable Content Objects, ou SCO). url Identificateur unique de l'objet. type Une présentation, un cours, un fichier FLV, un fichier SWF, une image, une archive, une réunion, un curriculum, un dossier ou un événement au choix. nom Nom de l'objet tel qu'affiché dans la liste de contenu. date-created Date de début prévue pour l'objet. date-end Date de fin prévue pour l'objet. date-modified Date de modification de cet objet. description Informations de synthèse sur l'objet saisies lors de la création d'une nouvelle réunion, d'un nouveau contenu, cours ou de tout autre type d'objet.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 235 Administration d'Acrobat Connect Pro Données du rapport téléchargeable sur les questions Le rapport sur les questions répertorie les réponses apportées aux questions et questionnaires de toutes les applications Acrobat Connect Pro. Les données sont générées dans ce rapport chaque fois qu'un utilisateur répond à un questionnaire dans un cours ou un curriculum, répond à une question d'inscription, répond à un sondage dans le cadre d'une réunion ou d'un séminaire ou ajoute un formulaire personnalisé à une réunion, un séminaire, un cours ou un curriculum. Le rapport fournit les renseignements suivants. Lorsqu'une question présente plusieurs réponses, chacune apparaît sur sa propre ligne. Le rapport sur les questions exclut les renseignements suivants : • Correct ou Incorrect, qui peut être déterminé en vérifiant que la note est non nulle. • Date de réponse, qui n'existe pas dans le schéma de la version 410. Données du rapport téléchargeable sur l'affichage des diapositives Le rapport sur l'affichage des diapositives décrit les diapositives ou les pages consultées par les utilisateurs d'Acrobat Connect Pro. Les données du rapport sont générées chaque fois qu'un utilisateur consulte du contenu, un cours ou un curriculum. Le rapport fournit les données suivantes. Nom de la colonne Description transaction-id ID unique de la transaction. question Texte de la question. response Réponse à la question. score Nombre de points attribués pour la réponse. principal-id ID unique de l'utilisateur. date-created Date de création de l'enregistrement. Nom de la colonne Description transaction-id ID unique de la transaction. page Numéro de la diapositive ou de la page consultée. date-created Date de la consultation. principal-id ID unique de l'utilisateur. Using ADOBE ® ACROBAT ® CONNECT ™ PRO 7.5 Web ServicesCopyright © 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Using Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro 7.5 Web Services This user guide is protected under copyright law, furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. This user guide is licensed for use under the terms of the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. This License allows users to copy, distribute, and transmit the user guide for noncommercial purposes only so long as (1) proper attribution to Adobe is given as the owner of the user guide; and (2) any reuse or distribution of the user guide contains a notice that use of the user guide is governed by these terms. The best way to provide notice is to include the following link. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Connect, Adobe Captivate, Acrobat Connect, Authorware, Breeze, and Flash, are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty/ RealDuplex™ Acoustic Echo Cancellation is Copyright © 1995-2004 SPIRIT. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/) This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security, Inc. Flash video compression and decompression is powered by On2 TrueMotion video technology. © 1992-2005 On2 Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://www.on2.com. This product includes software developed by the OpenSymphony Group (http://www.opensymphony.com/). Portions licensed from Nellymoser (www.nellymoser.com). MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology licensed by Fraunhofer IIS and THOMSON multimedia (http://www.iis.fhg.de/amm/). Sorenson Spark™ video compression and decompression technology licensed from Sorenson Media, Inc. Thomson: Licensee shall not use the MP3 compressed audio within the Software for real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable or other media), or broadcasting via Internet or other networks, such as but not limited to intranets, etc., or in pay-audio or audio on demand applications to any non-PC device (i.e., mobile phones or set-top boxes). Licensee acknowledges that use of the Software for non-PC devices, as described herein, may require the payment of licensing royalties or other amounts to third parties who may hold intellectual property rights related to the MP3 technology and that Adobe has not paid any royalties or other amounts on account of third party intellectual property rights for such use. If Licensee requires an MP3 decoder for such non-PC use, Licensee is responsible for obtaining the necessary MP3 technology license. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704, USA. For U.S. Government End Users, Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference.iii Contents Chapter 1: Before you begin Development environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Additional resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapter 2: Architecture Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Making your first API call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Chapter 3: Login and requests Log in from an application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Send a request in an XML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parse a response with XPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Parse an error response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Log a user out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chapter 4: Basics Find a principal-id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 List principals or guests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Create users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Update users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Create custom fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Create groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Find SCOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Download files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Check permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Chapter 5: Meetings Using web services with Connect Pro meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Find meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Display meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Create meeting room URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Create meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Create customized meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Invite users to meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Remove users from meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Calculate meeting usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Check meeting quotas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Get meeting archives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Get meeting poll results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Launch meetings with external authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Configure compliance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES iv Contents Chapter 6: Training Using web services with Connect Pro Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Training library permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Find courses and curriculums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Create a course . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 View a user’s training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Enroll one user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Enroll a large number of users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 View curriculum information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Report scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 7: Action reference New actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Sample action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Chapter 8: Filter and sort reference filter-definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 sort-definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Chapter 9: Common reference Common XML elements and attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Chapter 10: Sample application Getting started with the sample application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Build an adapter class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Log the user in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Send XML requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Parse XML responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Display user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 List a user’s meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Create and update meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Display meeting detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2371 Chapter 1: Before you begin Adobe® Acrobat® Connect Pro and Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server expose web services that clients can call to exchange data with Acrobat Connect Pro accounts. This guide explains how an application calls Acrobat Connect Pro web services and interprets the XML response. It is intended for developers who want to build custom applications for Acrobat Connect Pro or integrate it with another system such as a learning management system or LDAP directory service. Before you use this guide, you should understand the basics of XML and of using HTTP to communicate with a server from a client application. This guide includes some Java™ code samples, but it does not presume that you are using one specific language or environment. Development environment Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services allows you to use any language or platform that can send and receive XML over HTTP to develop custom applications. For example, you can use Java and the J2EE platform, C#.NET, PHP, a portal server, or any web development platform. Most custom applications are web applications or portals. In general, you may find these types of tools useful: • An XML parser code library, if your programming language supports XML parsing. • A cookie management code library, to help you manage the session cookies Acrobat Connect Pro returns. • A tool for viewing HTTP request and response headers in a browser. Many such tools are available on the Internet. Additional resources You can find many useful resources on the Internet that provide information about Acrobat Connect Pro, web services and XML, and other technologies that Acrobat Connect Pro uses. Acrobat Connect Pro Acrobat Connect Pro Resource Center The resource center, on the Adobe website, is updated regularly with tutorials, simulations, best practices information, and links to procedures. Acrobat Connect Pro Developer Center Developers will find the Developer Center useful. It is updated regularly with tutorials and articles about building applications for Acrobat Connect Pro. Acrobat Connect Pro Documentation Center The Documentation Center makes all Acrobat Connect Pro product documentation available for download or product viewing. Acrobat Connect Pro Support Center When you need technical support, the Support Center has current information, including technical notes, Acrobat Connect Pro presentations, and details of the support program. You can also check the Support Forums for peer-to-peer discussions on technical issues. Acrobat Connect Pro Licensed Support Center The Licensed Support Center has documentation and other resources for customers who license Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 2 Before you begin XML and web services The Web Services Primer at the Xml.com website (xml.com) is a good introduction to web services. The XML Tutorial at the W3Schools website (w3schools.com) can help you get started with XML. The XPath Tutorial also at the W3Schools website (w3schools.com), describes XPath, which parses an XML document so that you can use it in an application. The XSLT Tutorial, a third tutorial at the W3Schools website (w3schools.com), teaches you XSL Transformations, which you use to convert XML data to other formats. The XSL Transformations (XSLT) specification at the W3C website (w3.org) is the official definition of XSLT, from the standards committee who created it. Numeric Representation of Dates and Time, at the International Organization for Standardization website (iso.org), provides information about how to use the ISO 8601 standard date and time format. Date and Time Formats at the W3C website (w3.org) is the official definition of the ISO 8601 date and time format. Other technologies Flash Player Developer Center and Flash Media Server Developer Center, both available from the Adobe Developer Center, offer articles, samples, and insights to developing applications that use Adobe Flash Player and Adobe Flash Media Server. SCORM Concepts, at the Eduworks Corporation website (eduworks.com), is a tutorial about the Shareable Content Object Reference Model and describes Shareable Content Objects (SCOs) and Learning Management Systems (LMSs). An LDAP Roadmap at the Kings Mountain Systems website (www.kingsmountain.com), provides a useful overview of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP). This site might provide good background material or links for developers integrating an LDAP directory with Acrobat Connect Pro. Microsoft SQL Server Acrobat Connect Pro uses a Microsoft SQL Server database, which your custom applications retrieve data from and write data to. You may find useful resources at the Microsoft SQL Server Developer Center (msdn.microsoft.com) including references, community, support, and other information. Conventions This guide uses industry standard conventions for displaying code that you are already familiar with. However, API reference is a formal definition of the API contract between a calling application and the server. As such, the syntax definitions of request URLs should be described. We have placed distinct sections of a request URL on separate lines for readability, like this: http://server_name/api/xml ?action=custom-fields &filter-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue When you enter a request URL in the address bar of a browser or construct it in an application, enter it or construct it as a single line: https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-fields&filter-name=location Syntax elements in blue code font represent definitions that you construct, with a hyperlink to the syntax of the definition.3 Chapter 2: Architecture Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Web Services is the web service layer over the Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 suite of applications. Web services allow you to build portals or web applications that integrate Acrobat Connect Pro functionality and reporting information with third-party systems such as portals, customer relationship management systems, and enterprise resource planning systems. Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services provides meeting, training, and events functionality to your applications through its XML API. As an example, you might have a central user management system, such as an LDAP directory, Microsoft Active Directory, or another third-party system, that is an integral part of your business processes. Using web services, you can write an application that synchronizes users between your system and Acrobat Connect Pro. The application can use the J2EE platform or another technology of your choice to pull a list of users from the directory, compare it against a list of Acrobat Connect Pro users, and then perform requested updates within the Acrobat Connect Pro user repository, such as adding or deleting users or groups. This is just one example of a custom application. For more examples, see the Acrobat Connect Pro Developer Center. Data flow The data flows between client applications and Acrobat Connect Pro are shown in the following diagram. Custom applications that you write use paths 1 to 2 and A to B. Acrobat Connect Pro applications (such as Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro, Acrobat Connect Pro Training, or Acrobat Connect Pro Events) can use any of the data flow paths. Managed Services Hosted On Premise Deployment Models Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Extensibility Training Training Events Webcast XML API SDK Authoring tools Adobe Presenter Adobe Captivate eLearning Suite Adobe AcrobatUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 4 Architecture The data flow between Acrobat Connect Pro and client applications The data flow can be encrypted with SSL or unencrypted. Unencrypted If the data flow is unencrypted, connections are made over HTTP and Adobe Real Time Messaging Protocol (RTMP) and follow the paths described in the following table. Encrypted If the data flow is encrypted, connections are made securely over HTTPS and RTMPS (Real Time Messaging Protocol over SSL), as follows. 1 The client web browser requests an Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro meeting or content URL over port HTTP:80 (connection paths may vary). 2 The web server responds with content transfer or provides the client browser with information to enter Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro. 3 Adobe Flash® Player requests a connection to Adobe Flash Media Server over RTMP:1935 and HTTP:80. 4 Flash Media Server responds, and a persistent connection is opened to stream meeting traffic to the browser. 3a (alternate) In some cases, Flash Player requests a connection to the Flash Media Server, but can only obtain a tunneled connection over RTMPT:80. 4a (alternate) Flash Media Server responds, and a tunneled connection is opened to stream meeting traffic to the browser. A The client web browser requests a secure meeting or content URL over an encrypted connection on HTTPS:443 (connection paths may vary). B The web/application server responds with an encrypted content transfer or provides the client with information to make an encrypted connection to Acrobat Connect Pro. C Flash Player requests an encrypted connection to Flash Media Server over RTMPS:443. D Flash Media Server responds, and a persistent connection is opened to stream meeting traffic to the browser. HTTP:80 HTTPS:443 RTMPS:443 RTMP:1935 RTMPT:80 1 2 A C 3 3a 4a 4 D B Client application Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services API Web/application server Flash Media Server SQL database Flash Player Web browserUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 5 Architecture Custom applications Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services provides an XML API, so your application must be able to communicate with Acrobat Connect Pro using XML over HTTP or XML over HTTPS. Your application calls the API by building a request URL and passing it one or more parameters, either as name/value pairs or as an XML document. Web Services returns an XML response, from which you can extract values. Custom applications retrieve metadata from the Acrobat Connect Pro database. Metadata includes meeting or course names and times, meeting room URLs, content URLs, and report information. The data flow for a custom application retrieving metadata from the database is from a client web browser, to the client web application server, to the XML API, the Acrobat Connect Pro web application server, and the SQL database—and then back again. The data flow between a custom application and Acrobat Connect Pro works like this: 1 A user accesses your custom application from a web browser. 2 The application calls the XML API over HTTP:80 or HTTPS:443. 3 The Acrobat Connect Pro web application server authorizes the application and its users, retrieves metadata from the SQL database, and returns the metadata. 4 On the client side, your web or application server, XML parser, and software libraries handle the response and return it to your application. 5 The user continues to work in your custom application, and clicks a meeting or content URL. At this point, the user accesses a Acrobat Connect Pro application to enter a meeting room, and the typical data flow between a Acrobat Connect Pro application and the server begins. Acrobat Connect Pro applications Acrobat Connect Pro applications call the server using the same Web Services XML API that you use from a custom application. In general, content is transported over HTTP port 80 or HTTPS port 443. Content includes slides, HTTP pages, SWF files, and files transferred through the FileShare pod. These are default port numbers that you can configure (see Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide for details). Streamed, real-time communications from Flash Media Server are transported over RTMP port 1935. Streamed communications include audio, video (webcam and FLV), file share, and chat. Meeting state is also maintained over RTMP port 1935. Components of Acrobat Connect Pro Acrobat Connect Pro is architected with two server components, and each server uses a SQL database. The web application server The web application server is the brains of Acrobat Connect Pro. It contains and executes all of the business logic needed to deliver content to users. It handles access control, security, quotas, and licensing, as well as management functions such as clustering, failover, and replication. The web application server also handles Acrobat Connect Pro Central, the application through which you view and manage your organization’s content and users—when you are not using a custom application or integrated third-party system. The metadata describing content and users can be stored in either single or multiple replicated SQL databases. The web application server is stateless, which means that scaling is near linear. USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 6 Architecture Flash Media Server Flash Media Server is the muscle of Acrobat Connect Pro. Flash Media Server streams audio, video, and rich media content using RTMP. When a meeting is recorded and played back, audio and video are synchronized, or content is converted and packaged for real-time screen sharing, Flash Media Server does the job. Flash Media Server also plays a vital role in reducing server load by caching frequently accessed web pages, streams, and shared data. The SQL database Acrobat Connect Pro uses the Microsoft SQL Server database for persistent storage of transactional and application metadata, including users, groups, content, and reporting information. The XML API retrieves metadata stored in the database. The database can be implemented with either the Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine (MSDE) or the full version of Microsoft SQL Server 2005. Making your first API call Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services uses a servlet framework to handle XML API requests. In the data flow diagram, the servlet framework is represented by the API component. The API servlet receives XML requests from clients and returns XML responses from the web application server and the database. A request to the XML API is formatted as an HTTP request URL that the API servlet handles. A request URL has an action name and parameters in name/value pairs, like this: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006334909 If you have access to a Acrobat Connect Pro account in which you can test API calls, you can experiment. In fact, Adobe recommends testing API calls in the browser while you learn the API and write applications. Before you begin, it’s useful to install a tool that allows you to view HTTP request and response headers in your browser. Call common-info in a browser 1 (Optional) Enable a tool for viewing HTTP headers in your browser. 2 Open a browser and navigate to your Acrobat Connect Pro login page. 3 Without logging in, delete the part of the URL after the domain name and add a call to common-info: https://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info The response from common-info gives you information about your session with the server, especially the cookie that identifies your session:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 7 Architecture breezbryf9ur23mbokzs8 2008-03-13T01:21:13.190+00:00 https://example.com abc123def789 /api/xml?action=common-info connect_700_r641 Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 6.0; Windows NT 5.1; SV1; .NET CLR 1.1.4322) When you log a user in from an application, you need to send the cookie value back to the server to identify the user’s session (see Log in from an application). Call principal-list in a browser Once you have the BREEZESESSION cookie value from common-info, the browser adds it to the request header on your next request. 1 In a web browser, log in to Acrobat Connect Pro. Change the browser URL to call principal-list: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list 2 Check the request header. This time it sends the BREEZESESSION cookie value back to the server: GET /api/xml?action=principal-list HTTP/1.1 Accept: */* Accept-Language: en-us Accept-Encoding: gzip, deflate User-Agent: Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 6.0; Windows NT 5.1; SV1; .NET CLR 1.1.4322) Host: example.com Connection: Keep-Alive Cookie: BREEZESESSION=breezbryf9ur23mbokzs8 3 Check the response, which lists all principals on the server, each in its own principal element.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 8 Architecture joe harrison jharrison@example.com jharrison@example.com bob jones bjones@example.com bjones@example.com ... Add filters and sorts Many actions in the API allow you to add a filter to return only certain response elements or a sort to display response elements in a certain order. A filter is a special parameter that starts with the keyword filter, followed by an optional modifier, then a field name and a value. These are all examples of filters: • filter-name=jazz doe (which matches results with the exact name jazz doe) • filter-like-name=jazz (which matches any results that contain jazz in the name) • filter-out-type=user (which returns any results that do not have a type of user) These are just a few filter types, and you can find more in filter-definition. Check an action in the reference (at “Action reference” on page 57) to see whether its response can be filtered. In general, if an action allows filters, you can use them on any response element or attribute. A sort is another special parameter that starts with the keyword sort (or sort1 or sort2), followed by a field name and then one of the keywords asc or desc, for example: • sort-name=asc (to sort in ascending order by name) • sort-group-id=desc (to sort in descending order by group-id) These are just a few sort examples. You can test sorts in the browser or see sort-definition for more. Make a call with a filter and sort 1 Call principal-list again, displaying only groups and sorting them alphabetically by name: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=group &sort-name=asc 2 To tighten the response, choose a group from the list and filter on its name: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-name=developers This time, only one group is returned:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 9 Architecture developers developers Where to go from here At this point, you can continue to test calls in the browser and observe how they work. It’s the best and easiest way to learn the XML API. When you need more information, turn to any of these sources: • The API reference in “Action reference” on page 57 • “Login and requests” on page 10 for information on how to log users in from applications • “Basics” on page 18 to learn the three basic concepts underlying the API • “Meetings” on page 30 if you want to create and manage meetings from an application • “Training” on page 46 if you are building a training application10 Chapter 3: Login and requests This chapter explains how to log a user in from your application, make requests, handle responses, and log the user out. There are several ways to accomplish most of these tasks, depending on your development environment, server configuration, and application design. Log in from an application Any custom application you write that uses Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Web Services functionality or integrates with a third-party system needs to log in a user to Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Server or to an Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. In its simplest form, the process of logging in calls the login action. However, the technique for logging in varies according to whether you use cookie management, have a licensed server or a hosted account, and authenticate directly to Acrobat Connect Pro or use external authentication. Depending on your environment and server configuration, you might also use combinations of these options. Cookie management When a user logs in, Acrobat Connect Pro returns a cookie that identifies the user’s session. You need to pass the cookie back to the server on all calls made to the server during the user’s session. Then, when the user logs out, the server makes the cookie expire and you should invalidate it. In your development environment, you can use a code library that manages cookies for you. The process of logging in and managing a user’s session varies according to whether you use a cookie management library or manage the user’s session yourself. Licensed server or hosted account Your organization might have a licensed Acrobat Connect Pro Server within your firewall, or you may have a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account at Adobe. Either way, you send XML requests over HTTP or HTTPS, but security requirements and the login process vary. If you are a hosted customer, you can use certain parameters with the login action to avoid sending user IDs and passwords over the Internet. Direct or external authentication Whether you are a hosted or licensed customer, your application might authenticate directly to Acrobat Connect Pro, or you might authenticate users on your own network, set an identifier in an HTTP request header, and send it to Acrobat Connect Pro. The login process varies according to whether you use direct or external authentication. Log in to Acrobat Connect Pro Server The standard technique for logging a user in to Acrobat Connect Pro Server uses the login action, passing the user’s login ID and password. This technique works with both HTTP GET and POST requests. You also need to manage the BREEZESESSION cookie the server returns for each user session. If you use a client-side cookie management library, it is much easier to allow it to manage cookies for you than to manage the cookies yourself. If you do not have such a library, call login with the session parameter, as it is easier and more reliable than setting HTTP header values. Note: If you send user passwords to Acrobat Connect Pro Server, use SSL so passwords are encrypted in transit, even if you have a licensed Acrobat Connect Pro Server within your own firewall. Log in with cookie management 1 Call the login action, passing it the user’s login ID and password, but no session parameter:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 11 Login and requests http://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=bobs@acme.com &password=football 2 Parse the response for a status code of ok. If the login is successful, the server returns the BREEZESESSION cookie in the response header: Set-Cookie: BREEZESESSION=breezbryf9ur23mbokzs8;domain=.macromedia.com;path=/ 3 Allow your cookie management library to manage the BREEZESESSION cookie. Your client-side library passes the cookie back to the server in a request header on subsequent calls for the remainder of the user’s session. You do not need to set the cookie in the request header explicitly. When the user logs out, the cookie expires. Log in using the session parameter 1 Before you log the user in, call common-info to get the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie: http://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info 2 Extract the cookie value from the response: breezxq66rt43poai3if8 3 Log the user in, specifying the cookie value: http://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=bobs@acme.com &password=football&session=breezxq66rt43poai3if8 4 Parse the response for a status code of ok. 5 Use the session parameter with the same cookie value on subsequent calls for the user, until the user’s session ends: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list &session=breezxq66rt43poai3if8 6 When the user logs out or the user’s session ends, do not reuse the cookie value. Log in to a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account If you want to log in directly to a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account or multiple hosted accounts, you still use the login action, but you need to specify an account ID or domain name, in addition to the user’s login ID and password. You can specify a domain name if you want to avoid sending an account ID over the Internet. With a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, you cannot use single sign-on or external authentication. You must pass the user’s authentication credentials on the Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, not the credentials for an external network. Note: It is important to have SSL enabled on your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, because you are sending user IDs, passwords, and account information over the Internet to your Acrobat Connect Pro account hosted at Adobe. Log in to a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account with an account ID 1 Before you log the user in, call common-info with the domain name of your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account in either the request URL or the domain parameter: http://acme.adobe.com/api/xml?action=common-info http://adobe.com/api/xml?action=common-info&domain=acme.adobe.com 2 Parse the response for the values of cookie and account-id:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 12 Login and requests Sbreezzd2dfr2ua5gscogv ... 3 Collect the user’s login ID and password in your application. 4 Call the login action, adding the user’s credentials and the account-id and session parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=joy@acme.com &password=happy&account-id=295153&session=Sbreezzd2dfr2ua5gscogv 5 Parse the response for a status code of ok. 6 (Optional) If you prefer, you can call login before common-info, extract the cookie value from the response header, and manage it yourself or using a cookie management library. Log in to a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account with a domain name 1 Before you log the user in, call common-info with the domain name of your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account in either the request URL or the domain parameter: http://acme.adobe.com/api/xml?action=common-info http://adobe.com/api/xml?action=common-info&domain=acme.adobe.com 2 Parse the response for the values of cookie and host: breezxq66rt43poai3if8 ... https://acme.adobe.com 3 Extract the domain name from the value of host: acme.adobe.com 4 In your application, collect the user’s login ID and password. Be sure the login ID is the user’s Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account login ID, not an external one. 5 Call login, adding the user’s credentials and the domain and session parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=joe &password=smith99&domain=acme.adobe.com&session=breezxq66rt43poai3if8 The domain is equivalent to the account-id, but by using it you can avoid sending an account ID over the Internet, especially if you use a non-encrypted connection. 6 Parse the response for a status code of ok. 7 (Optional) If you prefer, you can call login before common-info, extract the cookie value from the response header, and manage it yourself or using a cookie management code library. Log in using HTTP header authentication Note: The instructions in this section apply only to Acrobat Connect Pro Server. Your application can use a trusted central server to authenticate users with single sign-on and pass your network’s (here called external) authentication to Acrobat Connect Pro Server, without explicitly passing a Acrobat Connect Pro Server user ID and password. (For detailed instructions on how to set up and configure HTTP header authentication, see Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 13 Login and requests With HTTP header authentication, a user logs in to your authentication server. Once the user is authenticated, you add an HTTP request header that identifies the user, or configure a proxy server to add the header. The authentication filter on Acrobat Connect Pro (named HeaderAuthenticationFilter) converts your user identifier to a Acrobat Connect Pro login ID and authenticates the user. Authentication filters convert external authentication credentials to Acrobat Connect Pro credentials. External authentication works in addition to standard Acrobat Connect Pro authentication. Each user who needs to access Acrobat Connect Pro Server needs a valid Acrobat Connect Pro Server login and password. When you send a login request to Acrobat Connect Pro Server with an external authentication credential: • The authentication filter intercepts the request and checks for a user on Acrobat Connect Pro Server with an extlogin field that matches your external credential. • If a match exists, the filter passes your external authentication to Acrobat Connect Pro Server, and the server logs the user in. • If no match exists, the filter passes the login request to the server, which displays its login page. The user must then log in to Acrobat Connect Pro Server. • If the user logs in successfully, Acrobat Connect Pro Server updates the ext-login field in the user’s profile with the external credential from your request. The next time you send a request with the user’s external credential, Acrobat Connect Pro Server finds a match in ext-login, and the user does not need to log in to Acrobat Connect Pro. • If the user does not log in successfully, the user is not allowed access to Acrobat Connect Pro Server applications, content, or meetings. The steps that follow describe how to call login when you use HTTP header authentication. Log in to Acrobat Connect Pro Server using HTTP header authentication 1 Configure your network servers and Acrobat Connect Pro Server for HTTP header authentication using the instructions in Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide. 2 In [your server directory]/appserv/conf/WEB-INF/web.xml, remove comment tags around the filter-mapping element for HeaderAuthenticationFilter and add comment tags around any other filter-mapping elements: HeaderAuthenticationFilter /* Authentication Server Proxy Server Authentication Filter Acrobat Connect Pro Server SQL databaseUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 14 Login and requests 3 In the filter element for HeaderAuthenticationFilter, enable the /api/ pattern for request URLs. You have two choices for how to do this: If your application uses the XML API and any Acrobat Connect Pro applications In the filter element for HeaderAuthenticationFilter, use comment tags to disable the init-param element with a param-value of/api/: If your application uses only the XML API Change the filter-mapping element for your filter type to use the URL pattern /api/* instead of /*: HeaderAuthenticationFilter /api/* Then, in the filter element for your filter type, add comment tags around all init-param elements with a paramname of ignore-pattern-x: HeaderAuthenticationFilter com.macromedia.airspeed.servlet.filter.HeaderAuthenticationFilter 4 Configure Acrobat Connect Pro Server so that users are created with the field ext-login set to the external user ID you send (see Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide for details). By default, ext-login has the same value as login, the Acrobat Connect Pro Server login ID. 5 Once your system authenticates the user, create a login request. Add the parameter external-auth=use, but no login or password parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&external-auth=use 6 Add your authenticated user ID to the HTTP request header. By default, use the header name x-user-id: x-user-id: joesmith You can specify a different header name by setting a value for HTTP_AUTH_HEADER in the custom.ini file. You can also configure a proxy server to set the HTTP header value. See Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide for details of either.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 15 Login and requests 7 Parse the response for a status code of ok. 8 Handle the BREEZESESSION cookie value returned in the response header. You have two choices for how to do this: If you use a client library that manages cookies Allow your library to extract the cookie value, store it, and pass it back to the server on subsequent requests for the user. If you manage cookies yourself Extract the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie from the response header. Store it and pass it back to the server in the session parameter of all subsequent actions you call for the same user, as long as the user’s session is valid: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal=list&session=breezs7zuepmy9wh2tseu Be sure not to reuse the cookie value when the user’s session ends. Send a request in an XML document At times, you may prefer to send an HTTP POST request to the server to make sure the data is secure and not visible in transit. In that case, specify the action name and parameters in an XML document. Make an XML document request 1 Create an XML document with the root element params and param child elements for the action name and each parameter: login jon@doe.com foobar • You can only send one action in the params root element. You cannot batch multiple actions to be executed sequentially. • The XML document you send must be valid and well-formed. Try validating the document in an XML editor before you send it. 2 Write code that sends an HTTP POST request to Acrobat Connect Pro and receives an XML response. The specific code will vary according to your programming language and development environment. 3 In your code, send the XML document to Acrobat Connect Pro in the body of the HTTP POST request. • Read the XML document into the request. • Be sure to set a content-type header of text/xml or application/xml. Parse a response with XPath When you receive an XML response from Acrobat Connect Pro, you need to be able to parse it to extract the XML elements you need. If you are working in a language such as Java™, with an XML parser (such as Xerces or JDOM) installed, you can parse through an XML response, select values from nodes, and then use those values.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 16 Login and requests Use XPath to parse a response ? Write a method that calls one or more actions. Create an instance of the XPath class so that you can use the XPath expressions. Call the actions, read the XML response, and use XPath syntax to select the values you need: public String scoUrl(String scoId) throws XMLApiException { try { Element e = request("sco-info", "sco-id=" + scoId); if(!(codePath.valueOf(e).equalsIgnoreCase("ok"))) return ""; XPath xpath = XPath.newInstance("//url-path/text()"); String path = ((Text) xpath.selectSingleNode(e)).getText(); e = request("sco-shortcuts", null); xpath = XPath.newInstance("//domain-name/text()"); String url = ((Text) xpath.selectSingleNode(e)).getText(); return url + "/" + path.substring(1) + "?session=" + breezesession; } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } You can also use string pattern matching to check for a status code of ok. A successful action always returns this response: You can check the response for the pattern ok or code="ok" . Parse an error response When an API action completes successfully, it returns a status code of ok. If the call is not successful, it can also return any of the following status codes: invalid Indicates that the call is invalid in some way, usually invalid syntax. no-access Shows that the current user does not have permission to call the action, and includes a subcode attribute with more information. no-data Indicates that there is no data available for the action to return, when the action would ordinarily return data. too-much-data Means that the action should have returned a single result but is actually returning multiple results. When the status code is invalid, the response also has an invalid element that shows which request parameter is incorrect or missing: When the status code is no-access, the subcode explains why:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 17 Login and requests All valid values for code, subcode, and invalid are described in status, in the API reference. Your application needs to read and handle status codes and subcodes. Handle status codes 1 Write a method that parses an XML API response for the status code and subcode. This is an example in Java: private String getStatus(Element el) throws JDOMException { String code = codePath.valueOf(el); String subcode = subcodePath.valueOf(el); StringBuffer status = new StringBuffer(); if(null != code && code.length() > 0) status.append(code); if(null != subcode && subcode.length() > 0) status.append(" - " + subcode); return status.toString(); } 2 When you call an action, parse the response for the status. 3 If the status is not ok, return a null value, display the error status code for debugging, or throw an application exception. The action to take depends on which call you are making and how your application is designed. Log a user out When a user logs out, the user’s session ends, and Acrobat Connect Pro invalidates the BREEZESESSION cookie by setting it to null and using an expiration date that has passed. For example, if you call logout on August 29, 2006, you see this Set-Cookie method in the response header, setting an empty cookie value and an expiration date a year earlier: Set-Cookie: BREEZESESSION=;domain=.macromedia.com;expires=Mon, 29-Aug-2005 22:26:15 GMT;path=/ If you are managing the BREEZESESSION cookie, invalidate the value so it is not reused after a user logs out. Log a user out and invalidate the session cookie 1 Call logout to log the user out: https://example.com/api/xml?action=logout 2 Parse for a status code of ok to make sure the logout was successful. 3 Set the cookie value to null or otherwise invalidate it. For example, in this Java code snippet, the breezesession variable stores the cookie value and is set to null: public void logout() throws XMLApiException { request("logout", null); this.breezesession = null; }18 Chapter 4: Basics To get started with Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services, you need to understand three key concepts: • Principals, who are users and groups • SCOs, which are Shareable Content Objects and represent meetings, courses, and just about any content that can be created on Acrobat Connect Pro. SCOs (pronounced sko, which rhymes with snow) are compatible with the industry standard Shareable Content Object Reference Model (SCORM) specification and can be used with a Learning Management System (LMS). • Permissions, which define how principals can act on objects This chapter describes basic tasks you can do with Web Services, regardless of which Acrobat Connect Pro applications you have licensed. Many tasks are described as if you are running them in a browser. If you want to make the call from an application, translate the XML request to the language you are working in (for an example of how to do this in Java™, see “Send XML requests” on page 231). Find a principal-id A principal is a user or group that has a defined permission to interact with a SCO on the server. You can create users and groups for your organization and modify their permissions. Acrobat Connect Pro also has built-in groups: Administrators, Limited Administrators, Authors, Training Managers, Event Managers, Learners, Meeting Hosts, and Seminar Hosts. You can add users and groups to built-in groups, but you can’t modify the permissions of built-in groups. Note: The built-in groups that are available depend on your account. Each Acrobat Connect Pro user and group has a principal-id. In some API calls, the principal-id is called a group-id or user-id to distinguish it from other values. The value of the ID that identifies a user or group is always the same, regardless of its name. You can check the syntax of any action in “Action reference” on page 57 Get the principal-id of a user or group 1 Call principal-list with a filter: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-name=jazz doe It is best to use filter-name, filter-login, or filter-email for an exact match. Be careful with filter-likename, as it may affect server performance. 2 Parse the principal elements in the response for the principal-id: jazz doe jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@newcompany.com Get the principal-id of the current user 1 Call common-info after the user is logged in:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 19 Basics https://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info 2 Parse the user elements in the response for the user-id: jazz doe jazz@doe.com Here, the principal-id is called user-id, because it always represents a user who is authenticated to Acrobat Connect Pro. A group cannot log in to the server. You can pass the user-id value as a principal-id in other actions. List principals or guests A principal with a type of user is a registered Acrobat Connect Pro user, while a user with a type of guest has entered a meeting room as a guest. The server captures information about the guest and gives the guest a principal-id. List all principals on the server 1 Call principal-list with no parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list This call returns all Acrobat Connect Pro users, so be prepared for a large response. 2 Parse the principal elements in the response for the values you want: jazz doe jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@newcompany.com List all guests on the server 1 Call <> report-bulk-users, filtering for a type of guest: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-users&filter-type=guest 2 Parse the row elements in the response: joy@acme.com joy@acme.com joy@acme.com guest List all users who report to a specific manager When you call principal-info with a principal-id, the response shows the principal. If the principal is a user who has a manager assigned in Acrobat Connect Pro, the response also shows data about the principal’s manager in a manager element:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 20 Basics jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@example.com jazz doe joy@example.com jazz doe 23456 chicago You can use the manager’s principal-id with principal-list to list all users who are assigned to the manager. 1 Call principal-list, filtering on manager-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-manager-id=2006282569 2 Parse the response for the principal elements: Pat Lee plee@mycompany.com plee@mycompany.com Create users To create a new user, you need Administrator privilege. Adobe recommends that you create a user who belongs to the admins group for your application to use to make API calls that require Administrator privilege. Create a new user and send a welcome e-mail 1 In your application, log in as an Administrator user. See Log in from an application for various ways to log in. 2 Call <> principal-update with at least these parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update &first-name=jazz&last-name=doe&login=jazz99@doe.com&password=hello &type=user&send-email=true&has-children=0&email=jazz99@doe.com The type must be user, has-children must be 0 or false, send-email must be true, and email must have a valid e-mail address. The server sends a welcome e-mail with login information to the user’s e-mail address. 3 Parse the principal element in the response for the user’s principal-id: jammdoe@example.com jammdoe@example.com jamm doe USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 21 Basics Create a new user without using an e-mail address as a login ID 1 In Acrobat Connect Pro Central, navigate to Administration > Users and Groups > Edit Login and Password Policies. Make sure that Use E-mail Address as the Login is set to No. 2 In your application, log in as an Administrator user. 3 Call <> principal-update to create the new user, passing both login and email parameters: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update&first-name=jazz &last-name=doe&login=jazz&email=jazzdoe@company.com &password=nothing&type=user&has-children=0 4 Parse the response for the principal-id of the new user: jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@example.com jazz doe In the response, ext-login has the same value as login by default, until the user logs in successfully using external authentication (see Log in using HTTP header authentication). Update users Once you create users, you often need to update their information. You can update standard fields that Acrobat Connect Pro defines for users by calling principal-update with the user’s principal-id. The standard fields include email, login, first-name, and last-name. If you have defined custom fields for the principal, use acl-field-update to update them. You need Administrator privilege to update users, so your application must first log in as a user in the admins group. You cannot log in as the user and then have the user update his or her own profile. Update standard user information 1 Log in as an Administrator user. 2 Call principal-list with a filter to get the user’s principal-id (see Find a principal-id). 3 Call <> principal-update to update the user: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update &principal-id=2006282569&email=jazzdoe@newcompany.com 4 Parse the response for a status code of ok. Update custom field values for a user 1 Log in as an Administrator user. 2 Call custom-fields to get the field-id of the custom field: https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-fields 3 Get the principal-id, sco-id, or account-id you want to update. This value is the acl-id you pass to acl-field-update.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 22 Basics 4 Call acl-field-update to update the value of the custom field: https://example.com/api/xml?action=acl-field-update&field-id=x-2007396975&aclid=2006258745&value=44444 Create custom fields Custom fields are additional data fields that you define. You can define up to eight custom fields on a principal or SCO using custom-field-update. Once you define the custom field, by default you can set its value either by editing the value in Acrobat Connect Pro Central or by calling custom-field-update. To specify that the value can only be updated through the API, call custom-field-update with the parameter object-type=object-type-read-only. Define a custom field and set it on a user 1 First, create the field with custom-field-update: https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-field-update &object-type=object-type-principal&permission-id=manage &account-id=624520&name=Location&comments=adobe%20location &field-type=text&is-required=true&is-primary=false&display-seq=9 The name field defines the field name as your application displays it, so use appropriate spelling and capitalization. The custom field in this example is defined for all Acrobat Connect Pro principals. 2 Parse the field element in the response for the field-id: test Country 3 Get the principal-id of the user (see Find a principal-id). 4 Call acl-field-update to set the value of the field, passing a field-id, the user’s principal-id as acl-id, and a value: https://example.com/api/xml?action=acl-field-update &acl-id=2006258745&field-id=2007017474&value=San%20Francisco 5 Parse the response for a status code of ok. Create groups To add users to groups, you need to call principal-update as your application’s Administrator user. Add a user to a group 1 Log in as your application’s Administrator user. 2 (Optional) If the user does not yet exist, create the user with <> principal-update:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 23 Basics https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update &first-name=jazzwayjazz&last-name=doe&login=jazz@doe.com &password=nothing&type=user&has-children=0 3 (Optional) Parse the response for the new user’s principal-id. 4 If the user already exists, call principal-list to get the user’s principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=user 5 Parse the response for the principal-id: Joy Black joy@acme.com joy@acme.com 6 Call principal-list again to get the group’s principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=group 7 Call group-membership-update with is-member=true to add the user to the group: https://example.com/api/xml?action=group-membership-update &group-id=4930296&principal-id=2006258745&is-member=true • The principal-id is the user’s principal-id. • The group-id is the group’s principal-id. • The parameter is-member must be true. Check whether a specific user is in a group 1 Call principal-list with a group-id, filter-is-member, and a filter that identifies the principal: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&group-id=624523 &filter-is-member=true&filter-like-name=bob 2 Parse for a principal element in the response. A successful response looks like this: Bill Jones bjones@acme.com bjones@acme.com true If the user is not a group member, the principal-list element is empty: Check which users are in a group 1 To get the group’s principal-id, call principal-list with filters:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 24 Basics https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=group &filter-name=developers With filter-type and filter-name, principal-list should return a unique match. 2 Parse the response for the principal-id: developers developers false 3 Call principal-list again, with the principal-id as a group-id and filter-is-member=true: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&group-id=2007105030 &filter-is-member=true 4 Parse the response for the principal elements: Bob Jones bobjones@acme.com true List all groups a user belongs to 1 Call principal-list with the user’s principal-id and filter-is-member=true: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list &principal-id=2006258745&filter-is-member=true 2 Parse the response for the principal elements: Bob Jones bobjones@acme.com true Find SCOs All objects on Acrobat Connect Pro are Shareable Content Objects, or SCOs. The word Shareable comes from learning management systems in which content is combined into courses or curriculums and shared among them. On the server, a SCO can be any content object that is combined with other content objects into a course or curriculum. Courses, curriculums, presentations, and other types of content are SCOs. Meetings, events, folders, trees, links, graphics files, or any other object are also SCOs. Each SCO has a unique integer identifier called a sco-id. The sco-id is unique across the entire server. On a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, the sco-id is unique across all accounts. Each SCO also has a type, such as content, course, meeting, and so on. You can see the sco-id and type values in the response from sco-info or other actions:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 25 Basics Characteristics of SCOs When you study the XML responses of various calls, you notice more characteristics of SCOs: • A SCO’s identifier is called a sco-id in some actions, but can also be called folder-id, acl-id, or another name in other actions. It’s the same unique ID. • Each SCO can be accessed by various principals, either users or groups. The specific principals who can access a SCO are defined in access control lists, or ACLs. • Each SCO has a unique URL, with two parts: a domain name (like http://example.com) and an URL path (like /f2006123456/). You can concatenate these to form the full URL that accesses the SCO. • Each SCO has a navigation path that describes where it resides in the folder hierarchy. • Each SCO has a permission defined for each principal who can access it. • Some SCOs have description fields, which are text strings that give you information about the SCO. Often you need to find the ID of a SCO or some information about it. SCOs are arranged in a specific folder hierarchy where folders have names that indicate whether they are at the top level, contain shared content or templates, or hold user content and templates. When you call sco-shortcuts, it returns a list of folders. Notice that folders have different types: http://example.com http://example.com http://example.com http://example.com ... The folders shown in this example happen to be for meetings, but folders for other types of SCOs follow a similar pattern. Each folder type stores certain types of objects, with certain access privileges, as follows: content, courses, meetings, events, seminars These are shared folders, such as Shared Meetings, Shared Training, and so on. The Acrobat Connect Pro Administrator has access to this folder. The Administrator can assign Manage permission to any user, but only members of the built-in group associated with the folder can create new content or meetings within it. user-content, user-meetings, user-courses, user-events These folders each contain a folder for each user who can create content within it (for example, one folder for each meeting host or training developer). USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 26 Basics my-courses, my-events, my-meetings, my-meeting-templates, my-content Users create their own content in these folders and have Manage permission on the content. For example, meeting hosts create meetings in their mymeetings folder and have Manage permission on those meetings. shared-meeting-templates This folder is within the Shared Meetings folder, contains meeting templates, and inherits permissions from Shared Meetings. You can list the contents of any folder to get information about a specific SCO. When you need to search for a SCO but do not have a sco-id, move through folders using sco-shortcuts and sco-expanded-contents. Do not use sco-search, as it returns only certain types of SCOs. Find a SCO when you do not know the sco-id 1 Call <> sco-shortcuts to get a list of root folders on Acrobat Connect Pro: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 2 Parse the response for a type of the root folder that would logically contain the SCO, for example, my-courses for a course the user has created. 3 Parse the resulting sco element for a sco-id: http://example.com 4 Create a call to <> sco-expanded-contents to list the contents of the folder, adding an exact match filter, if possible: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-expanded-contents &sco-id=2006258748&filter-name=All About Web Communities You have several choices of filters: • An exact match filter on name or url-path (like filter-name or filter-url-path), if you know the name or URL of the SCO. • A greater-than or less-than date filter (filter-gt-date or filter-lt-date) on date-begin, date-created, or date-modified, if you know one of those dates. • A partial name filter (like filter-like-name), if you do not know the exact SCO name. However, using this filter might affect system performance. 5 Parse the response for the sco-id: A Day in the Life Resources /f28435879/ 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 Get information about a SCO 1 Call sco-info with the sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006745669 2 Parse the response for name, url-path, or any other value:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 27 Basics 2006-06-12T14:45:00.000-07:00 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 A Day in the Life /day/ Construct the URL to a SCO 1 Call sco-shortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 2 Parse the response for the domain-name value in any sco element: http://example.com 3 Call sco-info with the sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006334909 4 Parse the response for the url-path: 2006-05-11T12:00:02.000-07:00 2006-05-16T15:22:25.703-07:00 Test Quiz /quiz/ 10 15100.0 6 The url-path has both leading and trailing slashes. You can take the url-path from report-my-meetings, report-my-training, or any call that returns it. 5 Concatenate the url-path with the domain-name: http://example.com/f2006258748/ Download files You can download zip files from Acrobat Connect Pro to a user’s local computer. A zip file is a SCO. To download it, you need to construct a download URL to the zip file, which looks like this: http://server-domain/url-path/output/url-path.zip?download=zip You probably already know the domain name of your server (such as example.com). If you do not, you can get it by calling sco-shortcuts.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 28 Basics Download a zip file from the server 1 Call sco-shortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 2 Extract any domain-name value from the response: http://example.com 3 Call sco-info with the sco-id of the zip file: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006258747 The SCO is the entire zip file. 4 Parse the response for the url-path element: 2006-04-18T10:21:47.020-07:00 2006-04-18T10:21:47.020-07:00 joy@acme.com /f124567890/ 5 Construct the download URL, for example: https://example.com/quiz/output/quiz.zip?download=zip Be sure to remove the trailing slash from the url-path value before adding .zip to it (so you have a value like /quiz.zip, not /quiz/.zip). Check permissions Permissions define the ways in which a principal can interact with a SCO. A permission mapping, indicating what permissions a principal has for a particular SCO, is called an access control list or ACL. An ACL consists of three pieces of information: • The ID of a principal (a principal-id). • The ID of a SCO, account, or principal being acted on. In permission calls, it’s called an acl-id. In other calls, the ID might be called a sco-id, account-id, or principal-id. • A keyword that indicates the permission level the principal has, which is one of the valid values in permission-id. Check the permission a principal has on a SCO 1 Call permissions-info with both an acl-id and principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2006334909 &principal-id=2006258745 To check for permissions on a SCO, the acl-id is a sco-id. The acl-id can also be a principal-id or account-id. 2 Parse the response for a permission-id:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 29 Basics If a principal does not have an explicit permission to the SCO (in other words, if permission-id=""), the principal’s permissions on the SCO’s parent object apply. Check all principals’ permissions on a SCO 1 Call permissions-info with an acl-id, but no principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2006293572 2 Iterate through the principal elements and parse them for permission-id values: Jay Arnold jay@example.com The valid permission values are listed in permission-id. 30 Chapter 5: Meetings Custom applications can display, create, and delete Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro meetings in a web application, portal, or other environment. Using web services with Connect Pro meetings Custom applications can display, create, and delete Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro meetings in a web application, portal, or other environment. When users click a meeting room URL, they enter Acrobat Connect Pro, which hosts the meeting room. Acrobat Connect Pro Server then streams audio, video, and rich media content to the meeting room users. Adobe recommends the following actions for meeting applications: report-my-meetings To display a user’s meetings. sco-update To create a meeting room or update information about it. permissions-update To add a host, presenter, and participants to a meeting. report-bulk-consolidated-transactions To calculate meeting usage, especially the amount of time each user has spent in the meeting. report-quiz-interactions To get the results of a meeting poll. Some actions that handle meetings require Administrator privilege, as noted in the task instructions. Create a Acrobat Connect Pro user who is a member of the admins group for your application to use to make these calls. Find meetings You often need to locate the sco-id of a meeting so that you can invite users, get report information about it, or update it in some other way. You should understand the structure of folders in which meetings can be stored. By default, meetings are stored in the host’s My Meetings folder (called my-meetings in the API). For more details on the folder structure, see Characteristics of SCOs. Find the sco-id of a meeting 1 Call sco-shortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 2 Parse the response for the sco-id of a meetings folder that is likely to contain the meeting: http://example.com The folder name should be meetings, user-meetings, or my-meetings. Use a folder as far down the tree as you can. 3 Call sco-contents on the folder, adding a filter or two to reduce the response:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 31 Meetings https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=2006258750 &filter-type=meeting&filter-name=Intro to Film • The more specific you can make the filters, the better. Good filters to use are filter-name, filter-url-path, or a date filter. Be careful with using filter-like-name, as it might affect system performance. • You can also call sco-expanded-contents to list subfolders and their contents. However, sco-contents is better for server performance, if you know the sco-id of the folder that contains the meeting. 4 Parse the response for the sco-id of the meeting: Intro to Film /film/ 2006-06-09T14:00:00.000-07:00 2006-06-09T20:00:00.000-07:00 2006-06-09T14:07:13.767-07:00 06:00:00.000 List all meetings on the server ? Call report-bulk-objects with type=meeting: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-objects&filter-type=meeting The response has a row element for each meeting, showing the meeting URL, name, and dates: /monday/ Monday Staff Meeting 2006-12-18T14:15:00.000-08:00 2006-12-19T02:15:00.000-08:00 2006-12-18T17:38:11.660-08:00 Display meetings In your application, you might want to lists of Acrobat Connect Pro meetings, such as a user’s present or future scheduled meetings. An application workflow might log a user in and display the user’s meetings, or it might add the user to a meeting and then display meetings. Displaying the user’s meetings means listing the contents of the my-meetings folder. Display a user’s meetings 1 Log the user in (see Log in from an application). 2 Call report-my-meetings to list the user’s meetings: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings You can add a filter to reduce the response. For example, you can exclude meetings that have ended: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings &filter-expired=false 3 Parse the response for values from the meeting elements:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 32 Meetings September All Hands Meeting example.com /sept15/ 2006-09-15T09:00:00.000-07:00 2006-09-15T18:00:00.000-07:00 false 09:00:00.000 4 Create the URL to the meeting room by concatenating http:// or https://, domain-name, and url-path. Add a user to a meeting and display meetings 1 Log in as your application’s Administrator user. 2 Get the user’s principal-id (see Find a principal-id). 3 Get the sco-id of the meeting (see Find meetings). 4 Call permissions-update to add the user to the meeting: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2006258765&principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=view Use a permission-id of view for a participant, mini-host for presenter, or host for a meeting host. 5 Log out as the Administrator user, and log in as the user you just added to the meeting. 6 Display the user’s current meetings: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings &filter-expired=false Create meeting room URLs You have several choices of how to construct the URL to a meeting room. The best action to call depends on how your application is logged in and where you are in your application workflow. By default, the meeting room is created in the host’s my-meetings folder. Create the URL to a meeting room for which the user is host 1 If you are logged in as a user, and you want to create a URL to a meeting in the user’s my-meetings folder, call report-my-meetings: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings 2 Parse the response for the values of domain-name and url-path:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 33 Meetings September All Hands Meeting example.com /sept15/ 2006-09-15T09:00:00.000-07:00 2006-09-15T18:00:00.000-07:00 false 09:00:00.000 3 Concatenate the two values and add http:// or https:// at the beginning: https://example.com/online/ If you are using HTTPS and you do not explicitly add https://, the URL defaults to http://, and the user might not be able to access the meeting room. Create the URL to a meeting room for which the user is not host 1 Get the sco-id of the meeting (see Find meetings). 2 Call sco-info with the sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006258750 3 Parse the response for the url-path: 2006-04-18T10:21:47.020-07:00 2006-04-18T10:21:47.020-07:00 joy@acme.com /f1234567890/ 4 (Optional) If you know the domain name of your Acrobat Connect Pro Server account, create the URL using http:// or https://, then the domain-name, then the url-path. 5 If you do not know the domain name, call common-info: https://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info 6 Parse the response for the value of the host element. Create meetings A user must be an Administrator to create a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting, which means the user is a member of the Meeting Hosts group. In the response from principal-list, this group has type=live-admins. A meeting can be public, protected, or private, and to create each, you need to set a specific combination of principalid and permission-id: • Public, equivalent to Anyone who has the URL for the meeting can enter the room principal-id=public-access&permission-id=view-hidden • Protected, equivalent to Only registered users and accepted guests can enter the room principal-id=public-access&permission-id=removeUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 34 Meetings If a meeting is protected, registered users invited as meeting participants can enter by clicking the meeting room URL and logging in. Users who are not invited can log in as guests. The meeting host receives a guest’s request to enter (known as knocking) and can accept or decline. • Private, which is equivalent to Only registered users and participants can enter. The login page does not allow guests to log in. principal-id=public-access&permission-id=denied Create a public meeting and add host, presenter, and participants 1 Call principal-list to check that the user creating the Acrobat Connect Pro meeting is a member of the liveadmins group: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&group-id=624523 &filter-is-member=true&filter-like-name=bob 2 Call sco-shortcuts to obtain the sco-id of the user’s my-meetings folder: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 3 Parse the response for the sco element with type=my-meetings: http://example.com 4 Call sco-update to create the meeting room: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update &type=meeting&name=October All Hands Meeting &folder-id=2006258750&date-begin=2006-10-01T09:00 &date-end=2006-10-01T17:00&url-path=october The folder-id is the sco-id of the user’s my-meetings folder. 5 Parse the response for the sco-id of the new meeting: 2006-10-01T09:00 2006-10-01T17:00 /october/ October All Hands Meeting You might want to store the url-path to the meeting, if you plan to create a URL to the meeting room later. 6 Call permissions-update to make the meeting public. Use the sco-id of the meeting as the acl-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update&acl-id=2007018414 &principal-id=public-access&permission-id=view-hidden 7 Call permissions-update to add a host, a presenter, and participants: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &principal-id=2006258745&acl-id=2007018414&permission-id=host • Use a permission-id of host for the meeting host. • Use mini-host for the presenter. • Use view for meeting participants.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 35 Meetings • You can specify multiple trios of principal-id, acl-id, and permission-id on one call to permissionsupdate. 8 Create the URL to the meeting room (see Create meeting room URLs). Create a private meeting and add host, presenter, and participants 1 Log in as your application’s Administrator user. 2 Follow the steps for creating a public meeting, but set the meeting permission to private: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update&acl-id=2007018414 &principal-id=public-access&permission-id=denied 3 Call permissions-update again to add a host, a presenter, and guests. 4 Create the URL to the meeting room (see Create meeting room URLs). Create customized meetings When you create a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting, you can assign it a meeting room template that creates a custom layout for the meeting room. If you don’t assign a template, the meeting room is created with the default meeting template. To edit a meeting room template, launch Acrobat Connect Pro Central and click the template’s URL. You can edit the template while it is in a meeting templates folder (either My Templates or Shared Templates), if you have edit privileges on the folder. Create a meeting room using a template 1 Log in as your application’s Administrator user. 2 Call sco-shortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 3 Parse the response for the sco-id of a folder that contains meeting templates: http://example.com http://example.com 4 Call sco-contents, passing it the sco-id of the meeting templates folder: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=2006258751 5 Parse the response for the sco-id of the meeting template you want. 6 Create the meeting using sco-update. Pass it the sco-id of the meeting template as a source-sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update&type=meeting &name=August%20All%20Hands%20Meeting&folder-id=2006258750 &date-begin=2006-08-01T09:00&date-end=2006-08-01T17:00 &url-path=august&source-sco-id=2006349744 7 Continue to set permissions for the meeting and add participants, host, and presenter (see Create meetings). 8 Create the URL to the meeting room (see Create meeting room URLs).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 36 Meetings Invite users to meetings Once you create a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting and add participants and presenters, you may want to send invitations by e-mail. To send a meeting invitation, you need information about the meeting, including the meeting name, the host’s name and e-mail address, the meeting room URL, the date and time of the meeting, and the participant’s (or presenter’s) name and e-mail address. You can construct an e-mail message using any technique that works with your user interface. Extract specific information about the meeting using the following steps. Send an e-mail to meeting participants 1 Call sco-info with the meeting sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006334033 2 Parse the response for the meeting name, date, or other values: 2006-08-15T09:00:00.000-07:00 2006-07-27T15:30:43.220-07:00 2006-08-15T18:00:00.000-07:00 2006-07-27T15:30:43.220-07:00 August All Hands Meeting /august/ 3 Construct the URL to the meeting room (see Create meeting room URLs). 4 Call permissions-info to get the principal-id values of the presenters or participants, filtering on permission-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info &acl-id=2007018414&filter-permission-id=mini-host • For a list of presenters, use permission-id=mini-host. • For participants, use permission-id=view. 5 Parse the response for the principal-id values you want: jazz doe jazzdoe@example.com 6 Call principal-info with the principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-info &principal-id=2006282569 7 Extract the name and email values from the response:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 37 Meetings jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@example.com jazz doe jazzdoe@newcompany.com jazz doe E3612 San Francisco 8 Call permissions-info again, filtering on a permission-id of host: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2007018414 &filter-permission-id=host 9 Parse the response for the principal-id: jazz doe jazzdoe@example.com 10 Call principal-info, using the principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-info &principal-id=2006258745 11 Parse the principal element of the response for the name and login (or name and email): jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@example.com jazz doe jazzdoe@newcompany.com jazz doe E3612 San Francisco These are for the sender of the e-mail, who is the meeting host. Remove users from meetings Occasionally a user is invited to a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting as participant or presenter but later needs to be removed from the participant list. Removing the user has various results, depending on whether the meeting is public or private: • For a public meeting: The user’s permission (participant, presenter, or host) is removed, but the user can still enter the meeting as a guest.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 38 Meetings • For a private meeting: The user’s permission is removed, and the user can enter only as a guest and with approval from the meeting host. To remove a user’s permission to enter, call permissions-update with a special permission value, permissionid=remove. If the meeting is in progress and the user has already entered the room, the user is not removed from the meeting. However, when the user’s session times out, the user cannot reenter. Remove a user’s permission to access a meeting 1 (Optional) Call permissions-info- to check the principal’s permission to enter the meeting: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2007018414 However, you do not need to know the specific permission the principal has before you remove the permission. 2 Get the meeting’s sco-id (see Find meetings). 3 Get the user’s principal-id (see Find a principal-id). 4 Call permissions-update, using the meeting’s sco-id as the acl-id and permission-id=remove: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007018414&principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=remove Calculate meeting usage Once you create users and Acrobat Connect Pro meetings, you may need to calculate meeting usage. Meeting usage is often calculated in one of these ways: • The time each user spends in a specific meeting, in minutes per user • The number of concurrent meeting participants The time a user spends in a meeting is measured by a transaction, which is the interaction between a principal and a SCO (in this case, between a user and a meeting). The date and time a transaction begins and ends are returned by report-bulk-consolidated-transactions. Calculate time spent in meetings per user 1 Call report-bulk-consolidated-transactions, filtering for meetings and another value to identify the meeting, such as a date: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-consolidated-transactions &filter-type=meeting&filter-gt-date-created=2006-07-01 • The second filter can be for the date the transaction began or ended, the principal-id of the user, the sco-id of a specific meeting, or another valid filter that meets your needs. • This call returns all transactions that meet the filter criteria. Be prepared for a large response. • The call also returns only users who logged in to the meeting as participants, not users who entered as guests. 2 Parse the row elements in the response for date-created and date-closed:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 39 Meetings Thursday Meeting /thursday/ jazz@doe.com jazzwayjazz doe completed 2006-08-03T12:33:48.547-07:00 2006-08-03T12:34:04.093-07:00 3 In your application, calculate the time difference between the two dates. One way to do this (in Java™) is to write a utility method that converts the ISO 8601 datetime values returned in the response to a GregorianCalendar object. Then, convert each GregorianCalendar date to milliseconds, calculate the difference between the creation and closing times, and convert the difference to minutes. 4 Repeat for all the meeting transactions that meet your criteria, and total the meeting usage times. Check meeting quotas The number of concurrent meeting participants you can have is determined by your Acrobat Connect Pro license. To check your quota for the number of concurrent meeting participants, call report-quotas and look for the quota named concurrent-user-per-meeting-quota in the response: 2004-03-09T09:45:02.297-08:00 2999-12-31T16:00:00.000-08:00 The quota has both a limit and a soft limit. The soft limit is the concurrency limit purchased for the account. It is the same as the limit, unless you purchase a Burst Pack for meetings, which allows additional participants to join past the limit, on an overage basis. Without a Burst Pack, Acrobat Connect Pro enforces the concurrency limit and participants who try to enter after the quota is reached are rejected. If your limit is 20 attendees, attendee 21 receives a notice that the meeting room is full. All accounts enforce the quotas that are set when the account is created. Accounts do not allow overages, unless you have a Burst Pack. Furthermore, Burst Packs are only for meetings, not for training or seminars. Check your meeting concurrency quota and usage 1 Call report-quotas to check your quota for concurrent meeting users: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quotas 2 Parse the response for the quota element with a quota-id value of concurrent-user-per-meeting-quota. 3 Extract the value of soft-limit, the limit defined by your Acrobat Connect Pro license. 4 Call report-meeting-concurrent-users to check the peak number of concurrent meeting participants on your server or in your account: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-meeting-concurrent-users 5 Parse the response for the report-meeting-concurrent-users element. Read the value of the max-users attribute and compare it to the value of soft-limit:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 40 Meetings Get meeting archives A Acrobat Connect Pro meeting can have one or more recorded archives. If the meeting recurs weekly, for example, it might have an archive for each session. A meeting archive is identified with type=content and icon=archive. The icon value works as a subcategory of type, to identify the type of content. List archives for a meeting room 1 Get the sco-id of the meeting (see Find meetings). 2 Call sco-expanded-contents with the sco-id and filter-icon=archive to list all archives associated with the meeting: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=2007018414 &filter-icon=archive 3 Parse the response for the sco element and extract the information you want, such as name, date-created, or url-path: EN - Monday Night Football_0 /p71144063/ 2004-05-17T15:51:54.670-07:00 2004-05-17T15:54:52.920-07:00 2004-05-17T15:55:00.733-07:00 00:02:58.250 Get meeting poll results To access the results of a poll used during a meeting, use report-quiz-interactions. This action returns all poll results, but you can use a filter to reduce the response. Each multiple-choice response in the poll has an integer identifier, with the first response in the displayed list numbered 0, the second 1, and so on.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 41 Meetings A. response 0 B. response 1 Get the results of a meeting poll 1 Be sure that the meeting host has closed the poll. The poll results are cached in the meeting until the poll is closed. 2 Get the sco-id of the meeting (see Find meetings). 3 Call report-quiz-interactions, using the meeting’s sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-interactions &sco-id=2007071193 4 (Optional) Add a filter to reduce the response, for example: • filter-response=1 to check all users who made a specific response • filter-interaction-id=2007027923 to check all responses to a poll (a meeting might have several polls) 5 Parse the response for response, name, or any other values: jazz doe Thursday Meeting 2006-08-03T12:29:09.687-07:00 What is your favorite color? 4 Launch meetings with external authentication Once a user logs in to your network and you authenticate the user to the Acrobat Connect Pro Server using an external authentication credential, you may want to allow the user to enter a meeting as participant or guest without having to log in a second time to Acrobat Connect Pro. Launch a meeting and let the user enter as participant 1 Once the user is authenticated on your network, log the user in to Acrobat Connect Pro (see Log in using HTTP header authentication for details). 2 Get the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie for the user’s session, in one of two ways: • Call common-info and retrieve the value of cookie from the response: breezma6zor9rdfps8h6a A BUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 42 Meetings • Retrieve the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie from the response header: Set-Cookie: BREEZESESSION=breezqw4vtfarqxvf9pk2; domain=.macromedia.com;path=/ 3 Create a meeting room URL (see Create meeting room URLs for details). 4 Append a session parameter and the BREEZESESSION cookie value to the meeting room URL: http://example.com/employeeMeeting/?session=breezbityp829r9ozv5rd 5 Open the meeting room URL that has session appended. One way to do this is with a JavaScript onClick command: http://example.com/employeeMeeting/ Launch a meeting and let the user enter as guest 1 Once the user is authenticated on your network, log the user in to Acrobat Connect Pro (see Log in using HTTP header authentication for details). 2 Get the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie for the user’s session, in one of two ways: • Call common-info and retrieve the value of cookie from the response: breezma6zor9rdfps8h6a • Retrieve the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie from the response header after calling login: Set-Cookie: BREEZESESSION=breezqw4vtfarqxvf9pk2; domain=.macromedia.com;path=/ 3 In your application, create a meeting room URL (see Create meeting room URLs). 4 Append a guestname parameter and the user’s guest display name to the meeting room URL: http://example.com/employeeMeeting/?guestName=joy 5 Open the meeting room URL that has the guestname parameter. One way to do this is with a JavaScript onClick command: http://example.com/employeeMeeting/ Configure compliance settings Depending on your organization, you might need to configure your system to ensure compliance with governmental regulations and industry standards regarding communication. You can use Acrobat Connect Pro to monitor communication data in many ways. For example, you can disable the use of pods, set Acrobat Connect Pro to always or never record meetings, generate transcripts of chat sessions, create a notice that recording is taking place, and more. You can also control user access in several ways. For example, you can distinguish between authenticated and nonauthenticated users, restrict access to meetings rooms based on roles, and block guest access to rooms. For more information, see Adobe Acrobat Acrobat Connect Pro User Guide. USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 43 Meetings When you change the settings for these features, the changes take effect when a new meeting is started or when the server is refreshed. The typical refresh interval is 10 minutes. The next meeting that starts after the server is refreshed reflects any new settings. Changing certain settings through the XML API can affect the use of other features. For example, when the attendee list is disabled (meeting-feature-update), users cannot create breakout rooms. Therefore, to prevent user confusion, disable the breakout rooms feature at the same time. Disabling pods When you disable pods, the layout of a meeting room is affected and may have more empty white space than you want. Administrators can either resize remaining pods to occupy the empty space (the recommended approach), or create new meeting room templates. Otherwise, after a meeting starts, the host can manually resize pods as they see fit. If a pod with persistent data, such a Chat pod, is disabled and then re-enabled between different sessions of the same meeting, the contents of the old pod are lost. Disable the Chat and Note pods 1 Get the account ID for the account under which the meeting exists. 2 Log in using the administrative account. 3 Call meeting-feature-update, passing fid-meeting-chat and fid-meeting-note as arguments to the feature-id parameter, and setting the enable attribute for both parameters to false. 4 Refresh the server or start a new meeting to see the change. The following code disables the Chat and Note pods: http://localhost/api/xml?action=meeting-feature-update&account-id=7&feature-id=fidmeeting-chat&enable=false&feature-id=fid-meeting-note&enable=false Managing chat transcripts To configure Acrobat Connect Pro to generate chat transcripts, select Generate chat transcripts for all meetings in Acrobat Connect Pro Central or call meeting-feature-update with the feature-idfid-chat-transcripts. To get a chat transcript, you need the sco-id of the chat session. Use a combination of XML APIs to get the sco-id of a specific transcript. You can then get the transcript from the following Acrobat Connect Pro directory: [RootInstall]/content/account-id/transcript-sco-id/output/. Get chat transcripts 1 Get the sco-id of the chat transcripts tree by calling sco-shortcuts: [http://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts&account-id=7] 2 Parse the response for the chat transcripts tree-id: http://example.com ... USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 44 Meetings 3 Get the list of chat transcripts for a particular meeting by calling sco-contents with the chat transcripts tree-id and the filter source-sco-id: [http://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=10026&filter-source-sco-id=10458] In the example above, 10026 is the sco-id of the chat transcripts tree and 10458 is the sco-id of the meeting. (You can get the sco-id of the meeting from the URL of the meeting information page.) The list of SCOs that is returned represents the chat transcripts for the meeting. 4 Find the chat transcript in the Acrobat Connect Pro directory [RootInstall]/content/account-id/transcript-scoid/output/. Forcing meetings to be recorded You can set up Acrobat Connect Pro to record all meetings. Adobe recommends that when meetings are recorded, you show a disclaimer to notify users that the meeting is being recorded. Force meetings to be recorded 1 Disable the setting that lets hosts control recording (fid-archive) and enable automatic recording (fidarchive-force) by calling meeting-feature-update. Pass the two feature-id arguments: https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-feature-update&account-id=7&feature-id=fidarchive&enable=false&feature-id=fid-archive-force&enable=true 2 See “Setting up disclaimer notices” on page 44. 3 Refresh the server or start a new meeting to see the change. Setting up disclaimer notices You can set up a disclaimer notice to appear when a user enters a meeting. A disclaimer notice typically displays boilerplate information for your organization. It advises users of the status of the meeting and the terms of use for the meeting. For example, a disclaimer notice could advise users that the meeting is being recorded, and that users cannot join the meeting unless they accept the notice. By default, this option is disabled. Set up a disclaimer notice 1 Call meeting-disclaimer-update and set the text for the disclaimer notice: https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-disclaimer-update&accountid=7&disclaimer=Please note that this meeting is being recorded. 2 Call meeting-feature-update to activate the disclaimer: https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-feature-update&account-id=7&feature-id=fidmeeting-disclaimer&enable=true 3 Refresh the server or start a new meeting to see the change. Controlling share settings You can control settings related to the information that a user can share with other users during a meeting. Call meeting-feature-update and pass the appropriate feature ID or multiple feature IDs to enable or disable a share setting. For example, to disable screen sharing, call the following code: https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-feature-update&account-id=7&feature-id=fidmeeting-desktop-sharing&enable=falseUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 45 Meetings The following table lists the feature IDs for share settings. For a full list of feature IDs, see feature-id. Share setting Feature ID Share a computer screen or control of the screen; share a document or white board fid-meeting-desktop-sharing Upload a document to the Share pod fid-meeting-shared-upload Upload and manage files using the File Share pod fid-meeting-file-share Share a white board fid-meeting-white-board Display web pages to attendees fid-meeting-web-links46 Chapter 6: Training A custom training application or portal can access Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Training to display training courses that are available, enroll users or allow them to self-enroll, list all courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in, and generate various reports. Using web services with Connect Pro Training A custom training application or portal can access Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Training to display training courses that are available, enroll users or allow them to self-enroll, list all courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in, and generate various reports. Acrobat Connect Pro Training has two types of training modules: courses and curriculums. A course is content (for example, a presentation) that has a set of enrolled learners with usage tracking for each individual. The course can be delivered and administered independently or as part of a curriculum. A curriculum is a group of courses and other learning content that moves students along a learning path. A curriculum contains primarily Acrobat Connect Pro Training courses, but may include other items such as content and meetings. As with courses, you can generate reports to track the progress of enrolled learners as they move through the curriculum. This way, you can ensure that enrollees meet the learning objectives. Courses and content can both be modules within a curriculum, and a content object can be used in any number of courses and curriculums. In Acrobat Connect Pro Training, content objects, courses, and curriculums are all SCOs, and each has a unique sco-id. Content objects and courses are combinable and reusable, according to the SCORM standard. As you develop training applications, Adobe recommends that you use the following XML API actions: permissions-update To enroll users in courses and make sure they have the appropriate permissions to access the course. group-membership-update To add users to groups if you want to enroll a group. report-my-training To list all courses and curriculums the current user is enrolled in, including the URL to access the course or curriculum. report-curriculum-taker To get details of a user’s progress within a curriculum. report-user-trainings-taken To view the latest status of all of a user’s courses and curriculums. report-user-training-transcripts To list all of a user’s transcripts and scores. These actions work on courses, curriculums, and training folders and use the permissions allowed for objects in the Training library. Training library permissions The Shared Training folder that you see in Acrobat Connect Pro Central is also called the Training library. Shared Training is called courses in the response from sco-shortcuts:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 47 Training example.com Each folder, course, and curriculum in the library is a SCO. As you navigate the Training library, you see the sco-id of the current course or curriculum in the browser URL. You can also retrieve the sco-id by calling sco-contents or sco-expanded-contents on a folder in the Training library. Each course, curriculum, or content object in the Training library has permissions that define which users can access it. As you design your application, be aware of these permission levels: Enrollee permissions Courses and curriculums have permissions that define which users are enrolled and can access them. The two permissions available are Enrolled and Denied. Training library permissions Courses, curriculums, and folders in the Training library have either Manage or Denied permission. Manage permission means a user can create, delete, edit, or assign permissions. By default, users have Manage permission on their own training folders, and Administrators have Manage permission on any folder in the training library. An Administrator can assign a user Manage permission on an individual course, curriculum, or folder with permissions-update or check the permissions a user has with permissions-info. In XML API calls, you read, use, or set values of permission-id as you work with the Training library. These values of permission-id apply to courses and curriculums: view The user has access to the course or curriculum, and permission is Enrolled. denied The user is not allowed access, and permission is Denied. You should also be aware of the permission a user has on a folder before executing an API call. Log in as a user with appropriate permission, or when needed, as your application’s Administrator user. These values of permission-id apply to training folders: manage The user can add, delete, change, or assign permissions to courses, curriculums, and content in a folder. The user can also list the contents of the folder with sco-contents or sco-expanded-contents. denied The user cannot add, delete, change, or assign permissions to anything in the folder, but can list the contents of the folder. Find courses and curriculums Most XML API actions that work with courses and curriculums require the sco-id of the course or curriculum. You often need to locate the sco-id dynamically, before you call another action, without knowing the exact name of the SCO. Use these best practices to make searching for training SCOs efficient: • Create specialized folders within the Shared Training folder for storing courses and curriculums. You can do this in Acrobat Connect Pro Central, or you can use the XML API, in which the Shared Training folder is named courses. • Use these folders to store various categories of courses and curriculums, such as Marketing Training or Sales Training. • Use a flat structure in the specialized folders, storing courses and curriculums one level deep.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 48 Training This directory structure is also recommended when you want to display a list of all courses and curriculums (or all those in a subject area) and allow users to enroll themselves. If you are working in Acrobat Connect Pro Central, you can find the sco-id of a course or curriculum by navigating to it, clicking its URL, and taking the value of sco-id from the browser URL. You can also locate the sco-id from an application, using the XML API. Find the sco-id of a course or curriculum 1 Call sco-shortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts 2 Parse the response for the sco-id of the courses folder: http://example.com You cannot use a filter with sco-shortcuts, but you can parse the response for the sco element that has type=courses. 3 Call sco-contents, passing the sco-id of the courses folder and filtering for your specialized training folders: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=624528 &filter-name=Sales Training • You can use filter-name, filter-url-path, another exact match filter, or a date filter. However, be careful when using filter-like-name, as it might affect server performance. • You can also get the sco-id of your specialized training folder from the browser URL in Acrobat Connect Pro Central and pass it to sco-contents. 4 Parse the response for the sco-id of your specialized training folder: 5 Call sco-contents, passing it the sco-id of the specialized training folder and adding a filter that identifies the course or curriculum: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents &sco-id=2007122244&filter-name=Java 201 • You can call sco-contents, rather than sco-expanded-contents, if all courses and curriculums are stored at the top level of your specialized training folder. This improves performance. • You can define custom fields for SCOs if it helps you identify them in searches (see “Create custom fields” on page 22). 6 Parse the sco elements in the response for the sco-id of the course or curriculum: All About Web Communities /p33096345/ Web 2.0 course 2006-06-12T14:48:25.870-07:00 2006-06-12T14:48:25.870-07:00 USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 49 Training List all courses or curriculums available 1 Get the sco-id of a specialized training folder you have created. You can also get the sco-id by navigating to the folder in Acrobat Connect Pro Central, clicking its URL, and reading the sco-id in the browser URL. 2 Call sco-contents, passing the folder’s sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=2006258748 The best practice is to create the specialized training folders one level deep. By doing so, you can call sco-contents rather than sco-expanded-contents. This gives better performance. 3 Parse the response for name, url-path, or any values you want to display: Java 101 /java101/ 2006-07-20T17:15:00.000-07:00 2006-07-20T17:21:38.860-07:00 Create a course You can use either Acrobat Connect Pro Central or Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services to create a course. If you use Web Services, first create an empty SCO and then add content to it. 1 Call sco-update to create a new SCO for the course: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update&name=salescourse&folderid=12345&icon=course&type=content 2 Parse the response for the sco-id value of the new course. 3 Add content to the new SCO, using the sco-id returned by sco-update: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update&sco-id=77711&source-sco-id=33444 4 Enroll users in the course (see Enroll one user and Enroll a large number of users). View a user’s training Once a user is logged in, you can list all courses the user is enrolled in with report-my-courses, or all of the user’s courses and curriculums with report-my-training. This lists only the courses (or courses and curriculums) the user is enrolled in, not all courses available. View a user’s courses and curriculums 1 Log the user in (see Log in from an application). 2 Call report-my-training to list all courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-training 3 Parse the response for name, url, or any other values you want to display:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 50 Training Java 101 example.com/java101/ 2006-07-20T17:21:11.940-07:00 2006-07-20T17:21:38.860-07:00 2006-07-20T17:15:00.000-07:00 /java101/ false false View the status of all of the user’s courses and curriculums 1 Get the principal-id of the user (see Find a principal-id). 2 Call report-user-trainings-taken: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-user-trainings-taken &principal-id=2006258745 3 Parse the response for status: Programming in Perl Info about Perl /p57283193/ 2006-05-01T17:10:56.400-07:00 false A course can have many allowed values for status, but a curriculum can only have a status of completed or incomplete. The allowed values of status are described in status attribute in the reference. Enroll one user To give users access to training, Adobe recommends that you enroll them in courses. This gives the users appropriate permission to launch and complete the course, and it gives you usage tracking and access to various report actions. Courses differ from content. Courses are resumable and offer server-side review mode (for detailed information, see Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro User Guide). Your application might allow users to self-enroll in courses, which involves calling permissions-update to enroll one user at a time. You may also want to write a workflow, which is a sequence of API calls, that creates a new user and enrolls the user in a course. Enrolling users in training using the XML API (specifically, a call to permissions-update) does not send a notification. To send enrollment notifications, use Acrobat Connect Pro Central to enroll users. Enroll one user in a course or curriculum 1 Get the sco-id of the course (see Find courses and curriculums). 2 Get the principal-id of the user (see List principals or guests).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 51 Training 3 To enroll the user in the course, call permissions-update. Use the course sco-id as the acl-id, with a permission-id of view: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007035246&principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=view 4 Call report-my-training to list all courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-training 5 Parse the row elements in the response for values you want to display: Java 101 example.com/java101/ 2006-07-20T17:21:11.940-07:00 2006-07-20T17:21:38.860-07:00 2006-07-20T17:15:00.000-07:00 /java101/ false false Enroll a new user by workflow 1 Call principal-update to create the new user and send a welcome e-mail: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update&first-name=jazz &last-name=doe&login=jazz@doe.com&password=hello&type=user &send-email=true&has-children=0&email=jazz@doe.com To send the e-mail, make sure send-email=true. 2 Log the user in to the server: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=jazz@doe.com &password=hello&session=breezma6zor9rdfps8h6a See Log in from an application for other ways to call login. 3 Call group-membership-update with is-member=true to add the user to the group: https://example.com/api/xml?action=group-membership-update &group-id=4930296&principal-id=2006258745&is-member=true 4 Call permissions-update to enroll the user in a curriculum: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2006745669&principal-id=2007124930&permission-id=view Use a permission-id of view. 5 Call report-my-training to list courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-training 6 Parse the row elements in the response for values you want to display:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 52 Training A Day in the Life example.com/day/ 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:45:00.000-07:00 /day/ false false Enroll a large number of users When you enroll a large number of users in a course, first decide whether to enroll the users directly or create a group and enroll it. Adobe recommends these best practices for enrolling users in courses: • Enroll users directly in courses using permissions-update, which allows you to enroll 1000, 10,000, or more users with a single API call. • Add the users to a group and enroll it only if you plan to reuse the group (for example, to enroll it in multiple courses). In this case, you can add only 200 users at a time. Enroll a large number of users (1000+) directly in a course 1 Get the sco-id of the course (see Find courses and curriculums). 2 Get the principal-id of each user you want to enroll. To do this, you can: • Call principal-list with filters to list the users you want to enroll: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=user &filter-type=sales • Read the values from a file. 3 Write a method that calls permissions-update with multiple trios of acl-id, principal-id, and permission-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007064258&principal-id=2007105030&permission-id=view&aclid=2007064258&principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=view ... • The acl-id is the sco-id of the course. • The permission-id is view to enroll users. • The principal-id is unique in each trio. If any trios have incorrect information, permissions-update returns an ok status, executes the correct trios, and does not execute the invalid ones. 4 Call permissions-info to check that the users have been enrolled: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info &acl-id=2007064258&filter-permission-id=view Without a principal-id, this call returns a list of all principals enrolled in the course.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 53 Training Unenroll a large number of users (1000+) from a course 1 Get the sco-id of the course (see Find courses and curriculums). 2 Get the principal-id of each user you want to remove. You can: • Call principal-list with filters to list the users you want to unenroll: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=user &filter-account-id=624520 • Read the values from a file. 3 Write a method that calls permissions-update with multiple trios of acl-id, principal-id, and permission-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007064258&principal-id=2007105030&permission-id=denied&aclid=2007064258&principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=denied ... The permission-id is denied to unenroll users from the course. 4 Call permissions-info to check that the users have been removed: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info &acl-id=2007064258&filter-permission-id=denied Enroll a large group (1000+) in a course 1 Create a group. With the XML API Call principal-update and parse the response for the principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update&type=group &has-children=1&name=developersc5 With Acrobat Connect Pro Central Create the group at Administration > Users and Groups > New Group. Take the principal-id of the new group from the browser URL. 2 Add the users you want to enroll to the group. You can use an API call or Acrobat Connect Pro Central, but you can add only 200 users at a time. With the XML API Call group-membership-update, using multiple trios of group-id, principal-id, and ismember=true: https://example.com/api/xml?action=group-membership-update &group-id=4930296&principal-id=2006258745&is-member=true &group-id=4930296&principal-id=2007343711&is-member=true If any trios have incorrect information, group-membership-update returns an ok status, but the user in the incorrect trio is not added to the group. With Acrobat Connect Pro Central Navigate to Administration > Users and Groups > Import. You can import users from a CSV (comma-delimited) file with at least a login ID for each user. 3 Get the sco-id of the course (see Find courses and curriculums) using the sco-id of the specialized training folder that contains the course. 4 Call permissions-update to enroll the group in the course: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007064258&principal-id=2007105030&permission-id=view Unenroll a large group (1000+) from a course 1 Call permissions-info- on the course, filtering for a permission-id of view:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 54 Training https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info &acl-id=2007064258&filter-permission-id=view&filter-type=group 2 Parse the response for the principal-id of the group: developers developers@acme.com 3 Call permissions-update with a permission-id of denied to remove the group’s access to the course: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update &acl-id=2007064258&principal-id=2007105030&permission-id=denied View curriculum information As training managers create curriculums and users take courses, you need to retrieve information about them to display in your application. Often you can make just a single call to get the information you need, once you have the sco-id of the curriculum or course and the user’s principal-id. You may, for example, want to display all users enrolled in a curriculum or all courses a curriculum has. Another common task is to display the courses in a curriculum the user has completed so far, and then display the remaining courses. Display all users enrolled in a course or curriculum 1 Call permissions-info, filtering for a permission-id of view: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info &acl-id=2006298444&filter-permission-id=view • The acl-id is the sco-id of the course or curriculum. • The permission-id of view means the user is enrolled. 2 Parse the response for principal-id, name, and any other values you need: Joy Smith joy@acme.com Display a list of all training modules in a curriculum A curriculum is a type of folder, and you can list its contents with sco-contents or sco-expanded-contents. 1 Get the sco-id of the curriculum (see Find courses and curriculums). 2 Call sco-expanded-contents, passing it the sco-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-expanded-contents &sco-id=2006745669 3 Parse the response for the sco-id, folder-id, and depth:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 55 Training All About Web Communities /l80422078/ test 2006-06-12T14:48:25.980-07:00 2006-06-12T14:48:25.980-07:00 The response returns a flat list of sco elements, including the curriculum and each SCO it contains. You can build a hierarchy using the sco-id, folder-id, and depth values. The SCO with type=curriculum is the curriculum that contains the courses. View a user’s completed and remaining work in a curriculum 1 Get the sco-id of the curriculum (see Find courses and curriculums). 2 Get the principal-id of the user (Find a principal-id). 3 Call report-curriculum-taker, passing the principal-id as a user-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-curriculum-taker &user-id=2006258745&sco-id=2006745669 4 Parse the response for the status attribute of each sco element and any other values you want to display in your application: access-open true All About Web Communities /l80422078/ test 2006-06-12T15:06:02.947-07:00 2006-06-12T14:48:25.980-07:00 2006-06-12T15:06:02.947-07:00 false • A status of user-passed or completed indicates a module the user has completed. • A status of not-attempted or incomplete shows the user has not completed the module. • The curriculum itself can only have a status of completed or incomplete. Report scores Many courses offer learners a certain number of retries. If you use server-side review mode, a training manager can specify the maximum attempts the learner has to complete or pass the course successfully (see Acrobat Connect Pro User Guide for details of how course retry works in both server-side and client-side review mode). This means that a learner can attempt a course multiple times and have multiple scores. In your application, you may want to display only the learner’s highest score.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 56 Training Report a user’s highest score on a course or quiz 1 Get the user’s principal-id (see List principals or guests). 2 Get the sco-id of the course or quiz (see Find courses and curriculums). 3 Call report-user-training-transcripts, filtering on the sco-id and sorting on the score: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-user-training-transcripts &principal-id=2006258745&filter-sco-id=2006334909&sort-score=desc 4 Parse the response for the highest score, which should be in the first row element in the list: Java Data Type Quiz /quiz/ bob@acme.com 2006-05-12T11:55:24.940-07:00 Bob Smith 57 Chapter 7: Action reference This section provides a reference for each action in the Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Web Services XML API. All action, parameter, element, and attribute names are case sensitive. In other words, name is not the same as Name, and sco-id is not equivalent to sco-ID. You must enter them exactly as shown in this reference, unless a specific entry indicates an item is not case sensitive. New actions There are no new actions in Connect Pro 7.5. The following actions were new in Connect Pro 7: New actions for compliance allow you to enable or disable functionality in meeting rooms: meeting-feature-update meeting-disclaimer-info meeting-disclaimer-update New actions for permissions vary the scope of administrator abilities: limited-administrator-permissions info limited-administrator-permissions-update New search action allows you to search by field: sco-search-by-field New actions for managing system capacity allows administrators to manage users and licenses: account-expiry-info expiry-settings-update expiry-settings-info quota-threshold-update quota-threshold-info quota-threshold-exceeded Enhanced enrollment action allows users to self-enroll in training: acl-field-updateUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 58 Action reference Sample action action name Availability The first version of Acrobat Connect Pro to support the action. Unless stated, the action is supported in all subsequent versions of Connect Pro. Possible values are Breeze 4, Breeze 5, Connect Enterprise 6, Acrobat Connect Pro 7, and Acrobat Connect Pro 7.5. Description A description of what the action does and when to use it. Request URL The syntax of an HTTP request URL. Parameters A detailed desription of the parameters in the request. Filters Specifies whether or not results can be filtered or sorted. For more information about filtering and sorting, see “Filter and sort reference” on page 211. Response structure The structure of an XML response. Response values A detailed description of the XML elements in a response. Sample request A sample HTTP request URL. Sample response A sample XML response. See also Links to related actions. Actions account-expiry-info Availability Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 59 Action reference Description Returns the expiration date of an account. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=account-expiry-info &account-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Response structure String Datetime Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=acount-expiry-info&account-id=7 Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account for which you want expiration information. If you don’t provide an account ID, the expiration date for the current user is returned. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Account Container Information about all fields describing the account. account-id Integer The ID of the account. name String The name of the account. date-expired Datetime The date the account expired.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 60 Action reference Sample response Enterprise Account 2009-09-11T18:15:00.000+05:30 See also expiry-settings-info, expiry-settings-update acl-field-info Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about a principal, account, or SCO, as defined in an access control list (ACL). The returned information includes fields and their values. Each field has an ID—a name that describes the field. To call acl-field-info, you must have view permission for the principal, account, or object. You must also specify a value for acl-id, which is the object the principal has access to. The acl-id can be a sco-id, an account-id, or a principal-id. You can call principal-list to determine the account-id or principal-id, or sco-shortcuts or sco-contents to get a sco-id. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=acl-field-info &acl-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of the SCO, account, or principal for which you want field information. Can be a valid sco-id, account-id, or principal-id. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 61 Action reference Response structure string ... Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=acl-field-info&acl-id=2006258745 Sample response joy@acme.com Joy Smith See also acl-field-list, acl-field-update Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). acl-fields Container Information about all fields describing the principal, account, or object. field Container One field describing the principal, account, or object. acl-id Integer The acl-id specified in the request, which is a sco-id, principal-id, or account-id. field-id String The name of the field. value String The value of the field.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 62 Action reference acl-field-list Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns a list of values for all instances of a field name on your Acrobat Connect Pro Server account. For example, to list the first names of all users in the account, call acl-field-list with field-id=first-name. You can call acl-field-info first to get a list of field names. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=acl-field-list &field-id=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string ... Response values Name Type Required Description field-id String Y The name of a field in the access control list for which you want values and IDs. Only one field name is allowed. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). acl-field-list Container Information about all of the values in the account for the specified field.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 63 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=acl-field-list&field-id=first-name Sample response John Daryl Mary See also acl-field-info, acl-field-update acl-field-update Availability Breeze 5 Description Updates the value of an ACL field that belongs to a SCO or an account. Note: To update a standard field for a principal (a user or a group), use the principal-update action. To update a custom field for a principal, use the acl-field-update action. Each SCO or account belongs to at least one access control list (ACL). The ACL lists the principals that have permission to access the SCO or account. Call acl-field-info to determine the fields in the ACL for a SCO or account. The response contains the field-id you need for the request to acl-field-update: acl Container Information about one value for the specified field. acl-id Integer The ID of the principal, SCO, or account the field belongs to. value String The value of the field. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 64 Action reference joy@acme.com ... You can specify multiple trios of acl-id, field-id, and value. If you do, use an HTTP POST method, rather than a GET, to make the request. The GET method has limitations that might cause the request to be truncated. With a POST, you can add about 50 trios to the request. To call acl-field-update, you need modify permission on the SCO or account. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=acl-field-update &acl-id=integer &field-id=string &value=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of the SCO or account. Can be a valid sco-id or account-id. field-id String Y The name of the field for which you want to update value. The field can be a server-defined field or a custom field. A custom field has a field-id starting with x-, such as x-12056. value String Y The value to set. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 65 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=acl-field-update&acl-id=2007035246 &field-id=name&value=Java 101 Sample response See also acl-field-list acl-preference-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Updates a user profile with new language and time zone settings. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=acl-preference-update &acl-id=integer &lang=allowedValue &time-zone-id=allowedValue &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of the user whose preferences will be updated. Can be a valid principal-id. lang Allowed value N An abbreviation for the new language (see lang for valid values). time-zone-id Allowed value N An integer setting for the new time zone (see time-zone-id for values). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 66 Action reference Response values Sample request https://server.com/api/xml?action=acl-preference-update&acl-id=12345 &lang=fr&time-zone-id=0 Sample response common-info Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns basic information about the current user and the Acrobat Connect Pro server or Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, including the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. If you call common-info without logging in, the response does not contain user and account elements, because the server cannot identify a user. However, even without logging in, common-info returns a BREEZESESSION cookie value. The response also contains host, local-host, and admin-host elements. If Acrobat Connect Pro is hosted on a cluster, host is the cluster name; local-host is the name of the server in the cluster that executes the call to commoninfo; and admin-host is the name of the secure host on a cluster that supports SSL. Your application can use the value of admin-host to convert HTTP URLs to more secure HTTPS URLs. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=common-info &domain=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Name Type Required Description domain String N A domain name identifying a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. Use to get information about your hosted account. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 67 Action reference Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string datetime url hostname hostname /api/xml?action=common-info string string string string Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). common Container Common information about your connection to the server. locale Allowed value A setting that defines how Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays information to a user (see lang for values). time-zone-id Allowed value A code that defines the user’s time zone (see time-zone-id for values). cookie String The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie (a string the server returns identifying this user for this login session). date Datetime The date and time the call to common-info was made, in ISO 8601 format. host String If Acrobat Connect Pro runs on a server, the URL of the fully qualified host name of the server. If a cluster, the name that identifies the cluster. local-host String The name of the computer that executed the action (on a single server, the same as host; on a cluster, the name of the server that executed the action). admin-host String The name of the secure host on a cluster that supports SSL. url String The part of the URL making this call that identifies the action name. version String The server version name and number.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 68 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info Sample response breezsi4dundh5srw2fq6 2006-09-08T11:17:04.470-07:00 https:example.com localserver17 securehost.com /api/xml?action=common-info connect_6000 Joy Smith joy@acme.com Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 6.0; Windows NT 5.1; SV1; .NET CLR 1.1.4322) curriculum-contents Availability Connect Pro 7 Description Lists all of the SCOs in a curriculum, including the contents of subfolders. account Empty, with attribute Information about the account the user belongs to. Returned if you are logged in to Acrobat Connect Pro or are making the call on a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. account-id Integer The ID of the account the user belongs to. user Container Information about the user who established a session with the server. Returned only if the user making the call is logged in. user-id Integer The ID of the user who established a session with the server. type Allowed value The type of principal who has a session (usually user; see allowed values for principals at type). name String The full name of the user who established a session with the server. login String The login name of the user who is logged in to the server, often the user’s e-mail address. user-agent String The identifier of the web browser or client that established a session with the server. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 69 Action reference Note: To list the contents of a curriculum, use this action instead of sco-expanded-contents To find a sco-id to pass in the request URL, call sco-shortcuts. For more information, see “Find SCOs” on page 24. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=curriculum-contents &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You cannot sort or filter the response to this API call. Response structure string string string datetime datetime ...more sco elements... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a curriculum. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). curriculumcontents Container The list of all SCOs the curriculum contains. sco Container Details about one SCO. This SCO can be a folder or any other type of object.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 70 Action reference Sample request http://example.com/api/xml?action=curriculum-contents&scoid=11697&session=breezq7dyhc7m3de8dksr depth Integer The depth in the content tree at which this object appears, with toplevel objects at 1. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. If the SCO is a folder, same as folder-id. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder the SCO belongs to. type Allowed value The type of this content object (see type). icon Allowed value The name of the icon that visually identifies this object. lang Allowed value The language in which information about the SCO is displayed (see lang for values). source-sco-id Integer The ID of a SCO from which this SCO was created, such as a meeting template or course content. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central (or your application, if you use this value) displays a list of SCOs. Values are not necessarily unique, so multiple SCOs can have the same display-seq value. In that case, the application must define the display sequence. The default is 0. source-scotype Integer An integer indicating the type of SCO from which this SCO was created. source-scoicon Integer An integer indicating the type of icon from which this icon was created. contentsource-scoicon Integer An integrer indicating the type of content from which this icon was created. name String The name of the contained SCO. url-path String The URL of the SCO within the curriculum. description String The summary in the UI. If a SCO has a summary, this field exists, otherwise, the field does not exist. date-created Datetime The date and time the principal began interacting with the SCO and the transaction was created. date-modified Datetime The date the SCO was last updated. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 71 Action reference Sample response FlashBelt09 /l66176109/ 2009-05-27T03:48:54.277+05:30 2009-05-27T03:48:54.277+05:30 Backyard Cooking /cooking/ Learn how to cook with things you can find in most urban backyards. 2009-05-27T03:45:00.000+05:30 2009-05-27T03:48:40.383+05:30 2009-05-27T03:48:40.383+05:30 custom-fields Availability Breeze 4 Description Lists all custom fields defined in an account and details about the fields. Custom fields provide information about objects (SCOs) or principals that is not already defined in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. You can create custom fields, or update their value, using custom-field-update. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=custom-fields &filter-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 72 Action reference Filters You can filter the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-fields&filter-like-name=name Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). custom-fields Container The list of custom fields that match the query. field Container Details about one custom field. permission-id Allowed value The permission the current user has to access the custom field (see permission-id for values). object-type Allowed value The type of object the custom field describes (see permission-id field-id String The name of the field, as identified on the server. account-id Integer The ID of the account in which the custom field is defined. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the custom field, relative to other custom fields. field-type Allowed value The type of data the custom field accepts. Allowed values are text, textarea, and password. is-primary Boolean Whether the custom field can be deleted (true if no, and false if yes). is-required Boolean Whether this custom field is required. true if a value must be specified for this field in each object that uses it. Otherwise, false. name String The name of the custom field as Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays it.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 73 Action reference Sample response First Name Last Name See also custom-field-update custom-fields-delete Availability Breeze 4 Description Deletes a custom field. The value of is-primary for a custom field must be false before the field can be deleted. If is-primary is true and you want to change its value, call custom-field-update. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=custom-fields-delete &field-id=string &object-type=allowedValue &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Name Type Required Description field-id String Y The ID of the field to be deleted. Call custom-fields-delete to obtain the ID, which is returned in the field-id attribute of the field element. object-type String Y The type of SCO for which the field is defined (for values, see type). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 74 Action reference Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-fields-delete&field-id=2006338719&objecttype=object-type-principal Sample response See also custom-field-update custom-field-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Creates a new custom field or updates the value of an existing one. You can define up to eight custom fields on a principal or SCO. To create a custom field, call custom-field-update with at least the following fields: object-type, permission-id, name, field-type, is-required, and is-primary. If custom-field-update is successful, it returns a field-id. To update a custom field, specify the field-id, an object-type, and a name for each field that has a value you want to change. Be careful when defining custom fields, as retrieving those fields in a report (for example, by calling report-bulkusers) can affect the performance of the server and the database. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 75 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=custom-field-update &account-id=integer &object-type=object-type-allowedValue &permission-id=allowedValue &name=string &comments=string &field-type=allowedValue &is-required=boolean &is-primary=boolean &display-seq=integer &field-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The account ID in which the field is created. object-type String Y The type of SCO this field applies to. Required to create and update fields. Allowed values: • object-type-principal • object-type-meeting • object-type-sco • object-type-event • object-type-read-only Example: object-type=object-type-principal The value object-type-read-only means that Acrobat Connect Pro Central displays the value but a user cannot set it using Acrobat Connect Pro Central. You can also use this value in custom applications. permission-id String Y The permission a principal needs on the object to set or view the field’s value. The only allowed value is manage. Required to create a field. name String Y The label for the field in the user interface. Required to create a field. comments String N Any comments you define for the custom field, displayed as hint text in your user interface. Can be up to 60 characters long. field-type String Y The type of field. Allowed values are text, textarea, and password. Required to create a field. is-required Boolean Y Whether this custom field is required. Use true if a value must be specified for this field in each object that uses it. Otherwise, use false. Required to create a field. is-primary Boolean Y Whether this custom field can be deleted through the user interface (true if it cannot be deleted, and false if it can).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 76 Action reference Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string string Response values display-seq Integer N The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the custom field, relative to other custom fields. field-id Integer Y The name of a field that has a value you want to update. Required to update a field. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). field Empty, with attributes Information about the custom field. field-id Integer A numeric identifier for the field. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the field. object-type Allowed value The type of object the field describes (see type for allowed values). account-id Integer For customers on Acrobat Connect Pro hosted accounts, the ID of the account in which the field is defined. is-primary Boolean Whether this custom field can be deleted (true if no, false if yes). permission-id Allowed value The permission needed to access the custom field (see permission-id is-required Boolean Whether a value for this custom field is required (true if yes and false if no). Name Type Required DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 77 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=custom-field-update &object-type=object-type-principal&permission-id=manage &account-id=624520&name=jobtitle&comments=test&field-type=text &is-required=true&is-primary=false&display-seq=1 Sample response test jobtitle See also report-bulk-users expiry-settings-info Availability Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 Description Returns information about the current settings for account-expiration notifications (the warnings given to users before an account expires). A user is notified x number of days before their account expires. This action simply returns the value of x. Request URL https://example.com/api/xml ?action=expiry-settings-info &account-id=Integer &session=String field-type Allowed value The type of data the field accepts. Allowed values are text, textarea, and password. comments String The comment entered in comments in the request. name String The name of the field entered in name in the request. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 78 Action reference Parameters Response structure 30 Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=expiry-settings-info&account-id=7 Sample response 30 See also expiry-settings-update expiry-settings-update Availability Acrobat Connect Pro Server 7 Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account. If you don’t provide an account ID, the information for the current account is returned. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). expiry-num-of-days Container Information about the current settings for account-expiration notifications. value Integer The user is notified this many days before their account expires. The default value is 30. For example, if a user’s account expires on December 31, the user is notified on December 1.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 79 Action reference Description Updates information about the settings for account-expiration notification (the notification given to users before an account expires). A user is notified x number of days before their account expires. This action simply updates the value of x. Request URL https://example.com/api/xml ?action=expiry-settings-update &account-id=Integer &session=String Parameters Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=expiry-settings-update&account-id=7&expiry-num-of-days=30 Sample response See also account-expiry-info, expiry-settings-info Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account. If you don’t provide an account ID, the information for the current account is updated. expiry-num-of-days Integer Y A user is notified this many days before their account expires. The default value is 30; possible values are 30, 60, and 90. For example, if the value of this parameter is 30, a user is notified 30 days before their account is due to expire. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 80 Action reference group-membership-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Adds one or more principals to a group, or removes one or more principals from a group. To update multiple principals and groups, specify multiple trios of group-id, principal-id, and is-member parameters. You can obtain a group-id by calling principal-list and filtering the response with filter-type=group or another filter value such as filter-type=admins. The built-in groups have distinctive types other than group (see type for a list of values). Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=group-membership-update &group-id=integer &principal-id=integer &is-member=boolean &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description group-id Integer Y The ID of the group in which you want to add or change members. principal-id Integer Y The ID of the principal whose membership status you want to update. Returned by principal-info. is-member Boolean Y Whether the principal is added to (true) or deleted from (false) the group. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container Top-level element for the response. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 81 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=group-membership-update&group-id=632398 &principal-id=2006258745&is-member=true Sample response learning-path-info Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns a list of learning paths for a learning object that belongs to a curriculum. A learning object is any SCO that has been added to a curriculum. A learning path is determined by rules that establish whether a learner can proceed to the next learning object. You can create a learning path by establishing prerequisite requirements, completion requirements, or preassessment requirements. For example, a learning path might be the rule that the class Welcome to AcmeCo must be completed before Managing Projects at AcmeCo. A call to learning-path-info lists modules within a curriculum and their paths to each other. To see the complete contents of a curriculum, including content, meetings, and so on, call sco-expanded-contents. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=learning-path-info &curriculum-id=integer &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Name Type Required Description curriculum-id Integer Y The ID of the curriculum the learning object belongs to. sco-id Integer Y The ID of the curriculum module (course, presentation, or similar) for which you want a learning path. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 82 Action reference Response structure string Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=learning-path-info&sco-id=2006334909 &curriculum-id=2006298444 Sample response Security at AcmeCo See also learning-path-update Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). learning-paths Container Information about learning paths in a curriculum. curriculum-id Integer The numeric ID of the curriculum. current-scoid Integer The learning object for which you want a path. target-sco-id Integer The ID of the learning object that restricts access to the current learning object (for example, a prerequisite learning object). path-type Allowed value The type of path between the target and current learning objects (for example, whether completion of the target is required as a prerequisite). See path-type for allowed values. name String The name of the target learning object.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 83 Action reference learning-path-update Availability Breeze 5 Description Updates the learning path for a single learning object in a curriculum. A learning object is any SCO that is added to a curriculum. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=learning-path-update &curriculum-id=integer ¤t-sco-id=integer &target-sco-id=integer &path-type=allowedValue &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description curriculum-id Integer Y The ID of the curriculum to which this learning object belongs. current-sco-id Integer N The ID of the learning object that has the access you want to update. target-sco-id Integer N The ID of the learning object that restricts access to the current learning object (for example, a prerequisite course). path-type Allowed value Y The type of path between the target learning object and the current learning object (see path-type for allowed values). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container Top-level element for the response. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 84 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=learning-path-update &curriculum-id=2006298444¤t-sco-id=2007064258 &target-sco-id=2007035246&path-type=completion-required Sample response See also learning-path-info limited-administrator-permissions info Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Returns a list of permissions that can be enabled or disabled for the Limited Administrators group and whether or not that permission is currently enabled. For more information on Limited Administrators, see limitedadministrator-permissions-update. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=limited-administrator-permissions-info &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Boolean string Name Type Required Description session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 85 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=limited-administrator-permissions-info &session=breeze6qdeheiso93efb5 Sample response true edit-account-info false view-disk-usage-and-reports true reset-password true view-user-data true add-users-groups-webui false add-users-groups-csv true set-content-meeting-permissions true user-profile-fields Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). permissions Container A list of permissions. permission Container A list of information about the permission. enabled Boolean A value indicating whether the permission is enabled (true) or not (false). name String The name of the permission.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 86 Action reference true change-login-pw-policy false delete-users-groups true modify-current-users-groups false customization false compliance false chargebacks false view-system-usage-reports false quota-threshold-notifications limited-administrator-permissions-update Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Updates the permissions that can be enabled for Limited Administrators. With Limited Administrators, your organization can have finer control over administrators and what types of things they can access. Your organization can separate system administrators who control all aspects of the system from Limited Administrators, who can access and control a subset of the system. Each Acrobat Connect Pro installation has one Limited Administrators group. Users in the Administrators group can edit the permissions of Limited Administrators. USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 87 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=limited-administrator-permissions-update &view-disk-usage-and-reports=boolean &reset-password=boolean &view-user-data=boolean &add-users-groups-webui=boolean &add-users-groups-csv=boolean &user-profile-fields=boolean &change-login-pw-policy=boolean &delete-users-groups=boolean &modify-current-users-groups=boolean &customization=boolean &edit-account-info=boolean &set-content-meeting-permissions=boolean &compliance=boolean &chargebacks=boolean &view-training-reports=boolean &reset-to-default=value Parameters When you use this command, pass at least one parameter. The descriptions that follow indicate if the permission is set to true by default. Name Type Required Description view-disk-usage-and-reports Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to view disk usage and reports. The default value is true. reset-password Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to reset the password of a user. Part of the view-user-data set. The default value is true. view-user-data Boolean N Superset; a value of true allows limited administrators to view user data. By setting this parameter to enable, you enable all parameters in this set. (See all parameters that are part of the view-user-data set.) The default value is true. add-users-groups-webui Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to add users and groups by using the management console. Part of the view-user-data set. The default value is true. add-users-groups-csv Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to add users or groups by importing a CSV file. Part of the view-user-data set user-profile-fields Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to modify user profile fields. change-login-pw-policy Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to change the login and password policies. delete-users-groups Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to delete users or groups. Part of the view-user-data set modify-current-users-groups Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to modify currents users and groups. Part of the view-user-data set. The default value is true. customization Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to customize the colors of the account web pages, meetings, and the login page. edit-account-info Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to edit account information.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 88 Action reference Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request The example shows set-content-meeting-permissions Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to set the permissions for content or meetings. The default value is true. compliance Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to change compliance settings (settings for enabling pods, sharing, and recording, and for training settings). chargebacks Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to access the cost-center settings for this account. view-training-reports Boolean N A value of true allows limited administrators to view training reports. reset-to-default Boolean N A value of true resets all permissions to the default permissions set by Adobe. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Name Type Required DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 89 Action reference https://admin.ibreeze.macromedia.com/api/xml?action=limited-administrator-permissions-update &session=breezghd9nxdhh768vpob &view-user-data=true &view-user-data=false &reset-password=true &reset-password=false &modify-current-users-groups=true &modify-current-users-groups=false &add-users-groups-webui=true &add-users-groups-webui=false &add-users-groups-csv=false &delete-users-groups=false &user-profile-fields=true &user-profile-fields=false &change-login-pw-policy=true &change-login-pw-policy=false &chargebacks=false &edit-account-info=true &edit-account-info=false "a-threshold-notifications=false &customization=false &view-disk-usage-and-reports=false &view-system-usage-reports=false &compliance=false &set-content-meeting-permissions=true &set-content-meeting-permissions=false Sample response login Availability Breeze 4 Description Logs a user in to Acrobat Connect Pro Server. In a client application, after logging in a user, you must read and store the cookie called BREEZESESSION, which can be found in the HTTP headers of the response from login. You must then include the value of that cookie in every subsequent request that you make for that user. If you cannot retrieve cookie values from HTTP response headers, you can call common-info to get the cookie value before the user logs in. Then, pass the value to login using the session request parameter: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=loginId&password=password &session=value You can also use the session parameter on any API call you make after login. For example, to call principal-list after logging in, you can enter: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&session=valueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 90 Action reference The BREEZESESSION value is valid for only one login session. Your application must store a new cookie value each time the user logs in. When you call the login action, you are sending a login ID and password across a network, unless you use external authentication. Use SSL or another appropriate security method to protect passwords in transit. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=login &login=string &password=string &account-id=integer &external-auth=use &domain=string Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. If your organization is running a licensed Acrobat Connect Pro Server, do not use account-id. external-auth Allowed value N A value indicating whether you send an external network login ID to represent the user to Acrobat Connect Pro. If so, use externalauth=use. login String Y/N The user’s login name. Do not use if you use external or HTTP header authentication. password String Y/N The user’s password. Do not use if you use external or HTTP header authentication. domain String N The domain name of your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. If your organization is running a licensed of Acrobat Connect Pro Server, do not use domain. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 91 Action reference Sample request http://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=joy@acme.com&password=happy &session=breeztg8mz53r93vebwur Sample response See also logout logout Availability Breeze 4 Description Ends a user’s login session, invalidating the cookie value associated with the user’s session. After calling logout, set the BREEZESESSION cookie value to null. Do not reuse the cookie value after your user logs out. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=logout &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Name Type Required Description session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 92 Action reference Response values Sample request http://example.com/api/xml?action=logout Sample response See also login meeting-disclaimer-info Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Provides information about the disclaimer text that is shown when a user enters a meeting. For more information about the disclaimer, see meeting-disclaimer-update. Request URL https://servername/api/xml ?action=meeting-disclaimer-info &account-id=integer &session=string Parameters Filters Filters cannot be used with this action. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account for which the disclaimer text is retrieved. If not used, the account that you are currently logged in to is updated. session String N A string; the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 93 Action reference Response structure string Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-disclaimer-info&account-id=7 Sample response This meeting may be recorded for compliance purpose. By clicking OK you agree to the terms of meeting. meeting-disclaimer-update Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Updates the disclaimer text that is shown when a user enters a meeting. To comply with communications regulations or standards, you can set up a disclaimer notice to appear when a user enters a meeting. The disclaimer notice typically displays boilerplate information for your organization. It advises users of the status of the meeting and the terms of use for the meeting. For example, a disclaimer notice could advise users that the meeting is being recorded, and that users cannot join the meeting unless they accept the notice. If the disclaimer is activated, the notice is shown in all meetings. Activate the disclaimer either through the management console or by using the meeting-feature-update action with the fid-meeting-disclaimer parameter set to enabled. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). disclaimer String The text of the disclaimer notice.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 94 Action reference Request URL https://servername/api/xml ?action=meeting-disclaimer-update &account-id=integer &disclaimer=string &session=string Parameters Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-disclaimer-update&disclaimer=Please note that this meeting is being recorded. Sample response meeting-feature-update Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Value Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account for which the disclaimer text is updated. If not used, the account that you are currently logged into is updated. disclaimer String Y The disclaimer text that is shown when a user starts a meeting. The disclaimer can, for example, notify users that a meeting is being recorded. The limit is 1500 characters. The disclaimer text can contain XML-compliant HTML tags. For example: This meeting is being recorded. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 95 Action reference Description Enables or disables features in a meeting. This action is used to manage features such as recording of meetings and control of pods. For more information on usage, see “Configure compliance settings” on page 42. You can append multiple feature-id and enable pairs to the end of the request URL. Request URL http://server name/api/xml ?action=meeting-feature-update &account-id=integer &feature-id=value &enable=value Parameters Response structure Response values Sample request The following sample disables the Chat pod. https://example.com/api/xml?action=meeting-feature-update&account-id=7&feature-id=fidmeeting-chat&enable=false Sample response Name Type Required Description account-id Integer Y The ID of your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. For enterprise installations, the ID is 7. For licensed installations, use common-info to get the ID. feature-id Integer Y The ID of the feature to enable or disable. For available IDs, see feature-id. enable Boolean Y Whether to enable the specified feature (true) or not (false). Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 96 Action reference permissions-info Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns the list of principals (users or groups) who have permissions to act on a SCO, principal, or account. To call permissions-info, you must specify an acl-id, which is the ID of a SCO, principal, or account that can be acted on. ACL stands for access control list, and means the list of entities who have permission. With just an acl-id, permissions-info returns a list of all principals in the account, showing each principal’s permission on the principal or SCO specified in the acl-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2006258745 To check the permissions a specific principal has on a principal or SCO within an account, call permissions-info with an acl-id and a filter on principal-id: http://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=7&filter-principal-id=10022 To check the permissions a principal has on an account, call permissions-info with both an acl-id (specifying an account-id) and a principal-id: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=624520&principal-id=624523 Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=permissions-info &acl-id=integer &principal-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of a SCO, account, or principal that a principal has permission to act on. The acl-id is a sco-id, principal-id, or account-id in other calls. principal-id Integer N The ID of a principal who has a permission (even if denied) to act on an object. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 97 Action reference Response structure string string ... Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). permissions Container A list of principals showing their permission to access the SCO, account, or principal. principal Container Information about one principal showing the principal’s permission level on the SCO, account, or principal. principal-id Integer The ID of a principal who has permission on a SCO, account, or principal. is-primary Boolean A value indicating whether the principal is a primary group (same as a built-in group). type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for allowed values). has-children Boolean A value indicating whether the principal has children. Groups have children and users don’t, so if true, the principal is a group. permission-id Allowed value The permission the principal has on the SCO, account, or principal (see permission-id for values). acl-id Integer The ID of the SCO on which the permission is defined. name String The name of the principal who has permission to access the SCO. login String The login name of the principal who has permission to access the SCO. permission Empty, with attributes Information about the permission one principal has on a SCO, account, or principal. If empty, no permission is defined. acl-id Integer The ID of the object on which the principal has permission. permission-id Allowed value The permission the principal has to act on the object (see permission-id for values). principal-id Integer The ID of the principal who has permission to act on the object. traininggroup-id Integer The ID of the training group.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 98 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-info&acl-id=2006334033 Sample response Joy Smith joy@acme.com ... See also permissions-reset, permissions-update permissions-reset Availability Breeze 4 Description Resets all permissions any principals have on a SCO to the permissions of its parent SCO. If the parent has no permissions set, the child SCO will also have no permissions. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=permissions-reset &acl-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of a SCO that has permissions you want to reset. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 99 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-reset&acl-id=2006334033 Sample response See also permissions-info-, permissions-update permissions-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Updates the permissions a principal has to access a SCO, using a trio of principal-id, acl-id, and permission-id. To update permissions for multiple principals or objects, specify multiple trios. You can update more than 200 permissions in a single call to permissions-update. Call permissions-update to give a user access to a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting, course, curriculum, or other SCO. For example, you can use permissions-update to: • Invite a user to a meeting as participant, presenter, or host (with a permission-id of view, mini-host, or host, respectively) • Remove a user’s participant, presenter, or host access to a meeting (with a permission-id of remove) • Enroll users in courses (with a permission-id of view) If you use multiple trios and any of them have invalid information (for example, an incorrect acl-id or principalid), permissions-update returns an ok status, the correct trios execute, and the invalid ones do not. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=permissions-update &acl-id=integer &principal-id=integer &permission-id=allowedValue &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 100 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update&acl-id=2006334033 &principal-id=2006258745&permission-id=host Sample response See also permissions-info, permissions-reset principal-info Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about one principal, either a user or a group. Name Type Required Description acl-id Integer Y The ID of a SCO (a sco-id) for which you want to update permissions. principal-id Integer Y The ID of a principal, either a user or group. permission-id String Y The permission to assign (see permission-id for values). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 101 Action reference You must specify a principal-id. To find the principal-id, call principal-list, using a filter if necessary to limit the response. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=principal-info &principal-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Name Type Required Description principal-id Integer Y The ID of a user or group you want information about. You can get the ID by calling principal-list. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 102 Action reference Response structure string string string string string string string string string string string ... string string string string string string string string string ... Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container Top-level element for the response. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). contact Container Information about the contact person for a principal. If the principal is a user, usually the same as information in principal. email String The e-mail address of the contact person. first-name String The first name of the contact person. last-name String The last name of the contact person.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 103 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-info&principal-id=2006258745 manager Container Information describing a user’s manager, who is also a principal. principal Container Information describing the principal. account-id Integer The ID of the account the principal belongs to. disabled Datetime If the principal’s account is valid, a null value returned as "". If the account is disabled, the date it was disabled. has-children Boolean Whether the principal has children. Groups have children and users don’t, so this attribute indicates whether the principal is a group. is-hidden Boolean Whether the principal is hidden (true) or not (false) in Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application. is-primary Boolean Whether the principal is a built-in group (true) or not (false). principal-id Integer The ID of the principal. type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for values). description String For a group, the group name. ext-login String For a user, the login ID sent from an external network. By default, the same value as login, so change it if you use external authentication. login String The principal’s login ID on Acrobat Connect Pro. Can be the same as an e-mail address. name String For a user, the full name, concatenated from first-name and last-name. email String For a user, the e-mail address. first-name String For a user, the first name. last-name String For a user, the last name. x-customfield String A custom field defined for the user or group. preferences Empty, with attributes Information about the principal’s preferences. acl-id Integer The principal’s ID. lang Allowed value The language setting the principal has chosen for Acrobat Connect Pro applications. time-zone-id Allowed value The time zone setting the principal has chosen for Acrobat Connect Pro applications. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 104 Action reference Sample response bob@acme.com Bob Jones jazzdoe@example.com jazzdoe@example.com jazz doe jazzdoe@example.com Jazz Doe San Francisco joy@acme.com joy@acme.com Joy Smith joy@acme.com Joy Smith San Francisco See also principal-list, principal-list-by-field, principal-update principal-list Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides a complete list of users and groups, including primary groups. This call is useful for getting a principal-id when you don’t have one. However, be aware that it returns a list of all principals on your Acrobat Connect Pro Server or Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, unless you use a filter to limit the response. You can also use principal-list to get a list of groups in an account by filtering on the type and is-member fields: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list&filter-type=group &filter-is-member=trueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 105 Action reference However, filter-type=group returns groups you have created, not built-in groups predefined on the server. Builtin groups have type values other than group, such as admins and authors (see type for a list of the values). You can filter the response with a filter-type parameter set to the type of group you want, then parse the response for a principal-id, then pass the principal-id as a group-id on another request to principal-list. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=principal-list &group-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Note: Filtering on the login element is useful but slow, and reduced performance is unavoidable. You can also filter on a special field name, manager-id, to return a list of principals who report to a given manager, for example: https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list &filter-manager-id=2006282569 When you use filter-manager-id, each principal element in the response has a manager-id attribute: Pat Lee plee@mycompany.com plee@mycompany.com Name Type Required Description group-id Integer N The ID of a group. Same as the principal-id of a principal that has a type value of group. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 106 Action reference Response structure string string string Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). principal-list Container The entire list of principals. principal Container Details about one principal. principal-id Integer The ID of the principal. account-id Integer The ID of the account the principal belongs to. type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for values). has-children Boolean Indicates whether the principal has children. Groups have children and users do not, so when has-children is true, the principal is a group. is-primary Boolean Whether the principal is a built-in group (true) or not (false). is-hidden Boolean Whether Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the principal (true for not displayed and false for displayed). manager-id Integer The principal-id of the manager the principal reports to. Returned only if you use filter-manager-id in the request. training-group-id= Integer The ID of the training group. name String The principal’s full name. login String The principal’s login ID, often an e-mail address. email String The principal’s e-mail address. principal-customfield-values Container The entire list of custom field values defined for the principal. field Container Details about one custom field defined for the principal (see field for contents).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 107 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list Sample response ned mack nmack@acme.com nmack@acme.com amelie jones amelie@example.com amelie@example.com ... See also principal-info, principal-update, principal-list-by-field principal-list-by-field Availability Breeze 5 Description Lists principals that have a specified value in a custom field. Use this action to query custom fields for principals. Use principal-list to get a list of custom fields that are defined for the principal. In the value parameter, enter the value of a custom database field. The name element returned by principal-list, for example, is a full name concatenated from the first-name (bob) and last-name (jones) database fields. If you search on bob jones, principal-list-by-field does not return a value, unless the full name is defined as a database field (in this case, a custom field defined on principals). The search is case insensitive, and the query string can contain spaces. Wildcards are not allowed in the query string. For example, if you enter t*, principal-list-by-field searches for the exact string t*. The principal-list-by-field action searches in all custom database fields defined for the principal; it does not search principal fields.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 108 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=principal-list-by-field &value=string &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string Response values Name Type Required Description value String Y The value for which you want to search all fields. You do not need to enter a field name. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). principal-list Container The entire list of principals that match the value in one or more custom fields. principal Container One principal that matches the value. principal-id Integer The ID of the principal. account-id Integer The ID of the account the principal belongs to. type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for values).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 109 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-list-by-field&value=inactive Sample response Bob Jones bjones@acme.com See also principal-info, principal-list, principal-update principals-delete Availability Breeze 4 Description Removes one or more principals, either users or groups. To delete principals, you must have Administrator privilege. To delete multiple principals, specify multiple principal-id parameters. All of the principals you specify will be deleted. The principal-id can identify either a user or group. If you specify a user, the user is removed from any groups the user belongs to. If you specify a group, the group is deleted, but the users who belong to it are not. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=principals-delete &principal-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue has-children Boolean Indicates whether the principal has children. Groups have children and users don’t, so this attribute indicates whether the principal is a group. is-primary Boolean Whether the principal is a built-in group (true) or not (false). is-hidden Boolean Whether the principal is hidden in the user interface (true) or not (false). name String The principal’s full name, concatenated from the first-name and last-name fields. login String The principal’s login ID, often an e-mail address. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 110 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=principals-delete &principal-id=2006339311&principal-id=2006339323 Sample response See also principal-info, principal-list, principal-list-by-field, principal-update principal-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Creates a principal (a user or group) or updates a standard field for a principal. The principal is created or updated in the same account as the user making the call. To create a new principal, call principal-update without specifying a principal-id. To update, add the principal-id. Before you update metadata about a principal, call principal-info to get the existing version. If a principal has custom fields, use acl-field-update to update them, rather than principal-update. Name Type Required Description principal-id Integer Y The ID of a user or group you want to delete. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 111 Action reference You need Administrator privileges to create or update a principal. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=principal-update &description=string &email=string &first-name=string &has-children=boolean &last-name=string &login=string &name=string &password=string &principal-id=integer &send-email=boolean &type=allowedValue &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Name Type Required Description description String N The new group’s description. Use only when creating a new group. email String N The user’s e-mail address. Can be different from the login. Be sure to specify a value if you use send-email=true. first-name String Y/N The user’s new first name. Use only with users, not with groups. Required to create a user. has-children Boolean Y Whether the principal has children. If the principal is a group, use 1 or true. If the principal is a user, use 0 or false. last-name String Y/N The new last name to assign to the user. Required to create a user. Do not use with groups. login String Y/N The principal’s new login name, usually the principal’s e-mail address. Must be unique on the server. Required to create or update a user. Do not use with groups. name String Y/N The new group’s name. Use only when creating a new group. Required to create a group. password String N The new user’s password. Use only when creating a new user. principal-id String Y/N The ID of the principal that has information you want to update. Required to update a user or group, but do not use to create either. send-email Boolean N A flag indicating whether the server should send an e-mail to the principal with account and login information. type String Y/N The type of principal. Use only when creating a new principal (see type for values). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 112 Action reference Response structure string string string Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=principal-update&first-name=jake &last-name=doe&has-children=0&login=jakedoe@example.com&type=user Sample response jakedoe@example.com jakedoe@example.com jake doe Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). principal Container Information about the newly created principal. principal-id Integer The ID of the newly created user. account-id Integer The ID of the account the new user belongs to. Same as the account of the current user. has-children Boolean Whether the principal has children, which indicates whether the principal is a user or group (1 if a group, or 0 if a user). type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for values). login String The principal’s login ID, often an e-mail address. ext-login String The principal’s external authentication ID. By default, the value is the same as login, unless you explicitly set the value to an authentication ID from your network. name String The principal’s name. If the principal is a user, concatenated from the first-name and last-name parameters in the request.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 113 Action reference See also principal-info, principal-list, principal-list-by-field, acl-field-update quota-threshold-info Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Provides the list of quotas for which capacity notifications are provided, along with their current threshold settings. Each Acrobat Connect Pro account has system quotas that determine, for example, how many seats are available for Meeting Hosts, Learners, and so on. Each quota has a threshold; when the threshold is crossed, the system notifies administrators that the quota is in danger of being reached. The settings for the threshold and the notifications vary depending on the quota. Request URL https://example.com/api/xml ?action=quota-threshold-info &account-id=integer &session=integer Parameters Response structure Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account for which you want quota threshold information. If you don’t specify an ID, the current account to which the user is logged in is used. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 114 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=quota-threshold-info&account-id=7 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Principals Container Lists the principals specifying the groups for which system capacity notifications are provided. Principal Container Information about the principal for which system capacity notification is provided. principal-id Integer The principal ID specifying the group. type String The group type. Depending on the license, this value can be one of the following: • authors • live-admins, which specifies that the group is Meeting Hosts Quotas Container Lists the quotas. Quota Container Information about the quota and its settings. acl-id Integer ACL ID of the quota. quota-id Integer The ID of the quota. For possible values, see quota-ID. threshold-pct Integer The percent value of the threshold. login-notif Boolean Whether administrators are notified upon logging in that a threshold is exceeded (true) or not (false). email-notif Boolean Whether administrators are notified through e-mail that a threshold is exceeded (true) or not (false). monthly-emails Boolean Whether administrators are sent monthly threshold reports through e-mail (true) or not (false). limit Integer The limit of member seats. used Integer Number of member seats used. Trees Container Provides information about the tree type quotas (the quota for the number of concurrent users per meeting). Tree Container Information about the tree. tree-id Integer The tree ID. type String The tree type, which is one of the following values: • meetings • user-meetingsUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 115 Action reference Sample response quota-threshold-exceeded Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Returns information about system quota thresholds that have been exceeded. Each Acrobat Connect Pro account has system quotas that determine, for example, how many seats are available for Meeting Hosts, Learners, and so on. Each quota has a threshold; when the threshold is crossed, the system notifies administrators that the quota is in danger of being reached. The threshold varies depending on the quota. For more information about automatic notification, see Acrobat Connect Pro User Guide. Request URL https://example.com/api/xml ?action=quota-threshold-exceeded &account-id=Integer &acl-id=Integer "a-id=String &num-of-days=Integer &session=StringUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 116 Action reference Parameters Response structure Date Response values Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account. Specify either account-id or acl-id (not both). If you do not specify either account-id or acl-id, results are returned for the account which the current user is logged into. If you specify account-ID, results are returned for all quota thresholds that have been reached in the account. acl-id Integer N The ID of the SCO, account, or principal for which you want threshold information. Can be a valid sco-id, account-id, or principal-id. If you do not specify a value for acl-id, the value for account-id is used. The value to use for acl-id depends on the quota ID used; for more information, see “quota-ID” on page 220 quota-id String N The ID of the system quota for which you want information. For available values, see “quota-ID” on page 220. num-of-days Integer N Number of days from the current day for which records are retrieved. If you do not specify a value, all the previous records for the specified quotas are retrieved. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). Records Container Lists the records returned. Record Container Lists information about the record returned. acl-id Integer The ID of the ACL returned. quota-id String The ID of the quota returned. For available values, see quota-ID. peak-used Integer The peak value of quota used on the specified date. This attribute is null for training and group quotas. count Integer Number of times the threshold was crossed for the quota on the specified date. This attribute is null for training and group quotas.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 117 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=quota-threshold-exceeded&acl-id=20013"a-id=num-ofmembers-quota&num-of-days=30 Sample response 11/20/2007 quota-threshold-update Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Updates the threshold settings of the specified quotas. Each Acrobat Connect Pro account has system quotas that determine, for example, how many seats are available for meeting hosts, trainers, training managers, and so on. Each quota has a threshold; when the threshold is crossed, the system notifies administrators that the quota is in danger of being reached. The settings for the thresholds and notifications vary depending on the quota, and you can configure the settings using this action. Request URL https://example.com/api/xml ?action=quota-threshold-update &account-id=integer &acl-id=integer "a-id=string &threshold-pct=integer &login-notif=Boolean &email-notif=Boolean &monthly-emails=Boolean threshold-pct Integer Percentage threshold when the threshold was crossed. sco-id Integer The ID of the meeting for which the threshold was crossed. This attribute is applicable only for the quota ID concurrent-usersper-meeting; for other quotas, it is null. Record-date Date Date when the threshold was crossed (UTC), in MM/DD/YYYY format. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 118 Action reference Parameters Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=quota-threshold-update&account-id=7&acl-id=7"aid=training-user&threshold-pct=90&login-notif=false&email-notif=true&monthly-emails=true Sample response See also quota-threshold-info, quota-threshold-exceededquota-threshold-exceeded Name Type Required Description account-id Integer N The ID of the account for which quota settings are updated. acl-id Integer Y The ID of the SCO, account, or principal for which you want threshold information. Can be a valid sco-id, account-id, or principal-id. If you do not specify a value for acl-id, the value for account-id is used. The value to use for acl-id depends on the quota ID used; for more information, see quota-ID. quota-id String Y The ID of the quota whose settings are updated. For available values, see quota-ID. threshold-pct Integer Y The percent threshold for the quota. The lower the value, the more frequently administrators are notified when the threshold is exceeded (if notifications are enabled). login-notif Boolean Y Specifies whether to notify administrators upon logging in that a threshold is exceeded (true) or not (false). email-notif Boolean Y Specifies whether to notify administrators through e-mail that a threshold is exceeded (true) or not (false). monthly-emails Boolean Y Specifies whether to send administrators monthly threshold reports through e-mail (true) or not (false). session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 119 Action reference report-active-meetings Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns a list of Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro meetings that are currently in progress, including the number of minutes the meeting has been active. For report-active-meetings to return results, at least one user must be present in at least one meeting room. If meetings are scheduled at present, but no users are attending those meetings, report-active-meetings returns an empty response. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-active-meetings &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string string datetime Response values Name Type Required Description session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-active-meetings Container The list of all meetings currently in progress. sco Container Information about one meeting in progress.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 120 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-active-meetings Sample response Designing Online Courses /online/ 2006-06-28T14:35:21.307-07:00 report-bulk-consolidated-transactions Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about principal-to-SCO transactions on your Acrobat Connect Pro server or in your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. A transaction is an instance of one principal visiting one SCO. The SCO can be a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting, course, document, or any content on the server. These are all examples of transactions: • If a principal attends a meeting twice, two transactions exist: one for each time the principal attended the meeting. • If five people attend a meeting, five transactions exist: one for each user who attended the meeting. • If a principal takes two courses three times each and passes each only on the third try, six transactions exist: one for each attempt on each course. This call returns all transactions, so consider using a filter to reduce the volume of the response. For example, if you use filter-type=meeting, the call returns all meeting transactions: sco-id Integer The unique ID of a meeting in progress. activeparticipants Integer The number of users attending the meeting in progress, including hosts and presenters. length-minutes Integer The number of minutes the meeting has been active. name String The name of the meeting, defined when the meeting was created. url-path String The part of the meeting URL that comes after the domain and is unique to this meeting. date-begin Datetime The date and time the meeting began. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 121 Action reference https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-consolidated-transactions &filter-type=meeting From the response, you can calculate Acrobat Connect Pro meeting usage by comparing times in date-created and date-closed (see “ “Calculate meeting usage” on page 38”). However, this call to report-bulk-consolidatedtransactions, with filter-type=meeting, returns only users who logged in to the meeting as participants, not users who entered the meeting as guests. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-bulk-consolidated-transactions &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string relativeUrl string string allowedValue datetime datetime ... Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 122 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-consolidated-transactions &filter-type=meeting Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-bulk-consolidated-transactions Container The entire list of transactions that matches the request. row Container Details of one transaction that matches the request. transactionid Integer The ID of the transaction. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the object (SCO) the user interacted with. type Allowed value The type of the SCO (see type for allowed values). principal-id Integer The ID of the principal involved in the transaction. score Integer If the transaction (such as a quiz) assigned a score, the actual score. Otherwise, 0. name String The name assigned to the SCO involved in the transaction. url String The file name portion of the URL to the SCO involved in the transaction. login String The principal’s login ID. user-name String The full name of the user involved in the transaction (concatenated from firstname and last-name). status Allowed value The status of the transaction. Allowed values are completed, in-progress, user-passed, and user-failed. date-created Datetime The date and time the principal began interacting with the SCO and the transaction was created. date-closed Datetime The date and time the principal finished interacting with the SCO and the transaction was complete.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 123 Action reference Sample response Celebrate End of June Meeting /endjune/ joy@acme.com Joy Smith completed 2006-06-30T11:10:37.003-07:00 2006-06-30T11:45:21.397-07:00 Celebrate End of June Meeting /endjune/ joy@acme.com Joy Smith completed 2006-06-30T17:58:29.060-07:00 2006-06-30T17:59:09.970-07:00 ... See also report-bulk-objects, report-bulk-questions, report-bulk-slide-views, report-bulk-users report-bulk-objects Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about all objects (SCOs) on a licensed Acrobat Connect Pro Server or in a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. The object types returned include archive, attachment, authorware, captivate, course, curriculum, external-event, flv, image, meeting, presentation, and swf. Because the response is likely to be large, use filters to limit it. For example, to return a list of all meetings on the server, filter on the type field: http://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-objects&filter-type=meeting Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-bulk-objects &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 124 Action reference Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime datetime datetime datetime ... Response values Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-bulk-objects Container The entire list of SCOs on the server; or, if a filter is used, the entire list of SCOs that matches the filter. row Container Details about one SCO. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. type Allowed value The type of SCO (see type). url String The unique identifier of the training SCO, placed in the URL after the domain name. name String The name assigned to the SCO. date-created Datetime The date the SCO was created. For a meeting, the date and time the meeting starts.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 125 Action reference Sample request http://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-objects&filter-type=meeting &filter-gt-date-created=2006-06-01 Sample response /online/ Designing Online Courses 2006-06-28T14:15:00.000-07:00 2006-06-28T14:30:00.000-07:00 2006-07-13T14:57:54.150-07:00 ... See also report-bulk-consolidated-transactions, report-bulk-questions, report-bulk-slide-views, reportbulk-users report-bulk-questions Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about every quiz question in the account you are logged in to. The response includes a combination of the quiz question, the answer, the ID of the user who answered, and the ID of the transaction. This action returns all question-and-answer combinations in the account, unless you use a filter to limit the size of the response. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-bulk-questions &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue date-end Datetime If the SCO is a meeting or event, the date it ended. date-modified Datetime The date the SCO was last updated. description String The description of the SCO. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 126 Action reference Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime ... Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-questions Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-bulk-questions Container The entire list of question-and-answer combinations that match the request. row Container Details about one question-and-answer combination. transactionid Integer The ID of the interaction between a user and a quiz. score Integer The score assigned to the question. principal-id Integer The ID of the user who answered or viewed the question. question String The text of the question, which might be phrased as a statement. response String The response the user chose or entered. date-created Datetime The date and time the user answered the question.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 127 Action reference Sample response The capital of California is<1> Sacramento 2006-05-11T15:50:23.643-07:00 The capital of California is<1> san francisco 2006-05-11T17:32:53.970-07:00 See also report-bulk-objects, report-bulk-consolidated-transactions, report-bulk-slide-views, reportbulk-users report-bulk-slide-views Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about each occasion on which a principal views a slide. The slide can be in any presentation in the account the current user belongs to. Each slide view is a transaction. A transaction is an interaction between a user and any SCO on Acrobat Connect Pro. In this case, the transaction is between a user and a slide. This action returns all occurrences of principals viewing slides in the account, unless you filter the response. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-bulk-slide-views &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 128 Action reference Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure integer datetime ... Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-slide-views &filter-principal-id=123456 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-bulk-slide-views Container The entire list of slide views that match the request. row Container Details about one slide view. transactionid Integer The ID of the interaction between the user and the slide. principal-id Integer The ID of the user who viewed the slide. page Integer The page number of the slide in the presentation. date-created Datetime The date and time the user viewed the slide.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 129 Action reference Sample response 0 2006-05-11T12:02:01.470-07:00 0 2006-05-11T12:02:01.487-07:00 ... See also report-bulk-objects, report-bulk-questions, report-bulk-consolidated-transactions, report-bulkusers report-bulk-users Availability Breeze 5 Description Returns information about all users in an account. The difference between this call and principal-list is that principal-list returns both users and groups, while report-bulk-users returns only users. The response from report-bulk-users can be quite large, especially if you use custom fields, so remember that you can filter and sort it. For example, the following call returns a list of all users who have the letters Jo in their name, in ascending order by name: http://myserver.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-users&sort-name=asc &filter-like-name=Jo If you pass custom-fields=true, by default report-bulk-users returns up to eight custom fields defined for users. If you have defined more than eight custom fields for users, report-bulk-users returns the first eight in the list in the Customize User Profile screen in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (at Administration > Users and Groups > Customize User Profile). If you use Acrobat Connect Pro Server, you can set a value for REPORT_MAX_CUSTOM_FIELDS in the custom.ini file to have report-bulk-users return more than eight custom fields (for more information, see Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Installation and Configuration Guide). You can use any value, but higher values risk a greater impact to database performance. You cannot change this setting on a Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 130 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-bulk-users &custom-fields=boolean &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. You can use filter-type with report-bulk-users to filter the type of users returned (user or guest). Response structure string string string string .. any custom fields .. ... Response values Name Type Required Description custom-fields Boolean N Whether to return custom fields in the response. Returns up to eight custom fields. If true, the manager field is not returned in the response. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container Top-level element for the response. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-bulk-users Container The entire list of users in the account. row Container Details about one user in the account.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 131 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-bulk-users&filter-like-name=john Sample response john@example.com John Owens john@example.com jsmith@example.com John Smith jsmith@example.com ... See also report-bulk-objects, report-bulk-questions, report-bulk-slide-views, report-bulk-consolidatedtransactions report-course-status Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns summary information about a course, including the number of users who have passed, failed, and completed the course, as well as the current number of enrollees. The request requires the sco-id of a course. Acrobat Connect Pro Central uses this call to display Course Status in the Summary report. This report is available at Training > Shared Training > [course name] > Reports > Summary. principal-id Integer The ID of the user. type String The type of user, either user or guest. login String The user’s login ID, often an e-mail address. name String The full name of the user, concatenated from the user’s first name and last name. email String The user’s e-mail address. manager String The user’s manager, also a registered user. Returned if a manager has been set for the user. Not returned if custom-fields is true in the request. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 132 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-course-status &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure datetime Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of the course for which you want summary information. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-course-status Container Summary information about a course. total-course-completions Integer The total number of times users have completed the course, including passing scores, failing scores, and multiple attempts by the same user. total-unique-course-completions Integer The number of distinct users who have completed the course, including passing and failing scores but not multiple attempts by the same user. num-completed Integer The number of users who have completed the course, for courses that do not have a passing score.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 133 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-course-status&sco-id=123456 Sample response 2006-10-10T13:55:24.480-07:00 report-curriculum-taker Availability Connect Enterprise 6 Description Returns information about a user’s progress in a curriculum. The response includes a row element for each course in the curriculum, which has information such as access to the course, whether credit was granted, the user’s score, the unique url-path to the course, and so on. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-curriculum-taker &user-id=integer &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue num-passed Integer The number of users who have passed the course, for courses that have a passing score. num-failed Integer The number of users who have failed the course, for courses that have a passing score. num-enrollees Integer The number of users presently enrolled in the course. date-last-taken Datetime The last time any user attempted the course but was not in server-side review mode. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 134 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure allowedValue boolean string string datetime boolean Response values Name Type Required Description user-id Integer Y The ID of the user whose scores you want to check. sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of the curriculum for which you want a summary. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-curriculum-taker Container Information about the user’s performance in the entire curriculum. sco Container Information about the user’s work with one course or curriculum. transcript-id Integer The ID of the user’s transcript for the course or curriculum. path-type Allowed value The learning path a user must take before attempting this course or curriculum (see path-type for allowed values).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 135 Action reference asset-id Integer The version of the course or curriculum the user attempted to complete. The asset-id is incremented each time the course or curriculum has new content uploaded. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the course or curriculum. depth Integer A course’s level below the curriculum in the navigation hierarchy. For a curriculum, 0; for a course one level below the curriculum, 1. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder that contains the course or curriculum. For a course, the ID of a curriculum; for a curriculum, the ID of a user. type Integer The type of the course or curriculum (see type for allowed values). icon Allowed value The type of icon that identifies the course or curriculum in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (see icon for values). lang Allowed value The language associated with the course or curriculum (see lang for values). max-retries Integer The maximum number of times a user can retake the course or curriculum. If a user can take the course 3 times, max-retries is 2. source-sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO used as a template for the course or curriculum. source-sco-type Integer The type of SCO used as a template for the course or curriculum (see type for values). status Allowed value The status of the user’s attempt to use the course or curriculum. For courses, allowed values are completed, incomplete, user-passed, user-failed, and not-attempted. For curriculums and folders, allowed values are completed and incomplete. score Integer The score the user earned on the course or curriculum. certificate Integer The ID of the user’s certificate. max-score Integer The maximum score possible for the course or curriculum. attempts Integer The number of times the user has attempted the course or curriculum. access Allowed value The level of access the user has to the course or curriculum (see access for allowed values). credit-granted Boolean A value indicating whether credit was granted for the course or curriculum. name String The name of the learning object or curriculum. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 136 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-curriculum-taker &user-id=2006258748&sco-id=2006298444 Sample response access-open false Test Quiz /quiz/ 2006-06-30T15:24:34.897-07:00 2006-05-16T15:22:25.703-07:00 2006-06-30T15:24:34.897-07:00 false report-meeting-attendance Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns a list of users who attended a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. The data is returned in row elements, one for each person who attended. If the meeting hasn’t started or had no attendees, the response contains no rows.The response does not include meeting hosts or users who were invited but did not attend. To call report-meeting-attendance, you must have publish, mini-host, or host permission on the meeting (see permission-id for details). url-path String The part of the URL after the domain name that uniquely identifies the object on the server. date-modified Datetime The date and time the SCO was last modified, in ISO 8601 format. override Boolean A value indicating whether the transcript for the SCO has been adjusted. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 137 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-meeting-attendance &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string string datetime datetime string ... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a meeting. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-meeting-attendance Container The entire list of attendees for the meeting. row Container Data about one meeting attendee. transcript-id Integer The ID of the meeting transcript.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 138 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-meeting-attendance &sco-id=2006778715 Sample response joy@acme.com Joy Smith Designing Online Courses 2006-06-28T14:35:21.307-07:00 2006-06-28T15:09:05.447-07:00 Joy Smith report-meeting-concurrent-users Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns the maximum number of users in Acrobat Connect Pro meetings concurrently in the last 30 days, and the number of times the maximum has been reached. The maximum is the peak number of users in any meetings at a single moment, whether one meeting, multiple concurrent meetings, or multiple overlapping meetings. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the meeting. principal-id Integer The ID of the principal who attended the meeting. answered-survey Boolean Whether the meeting participant responded to a meeting poll. If 0 or false, the meeting did not have a poll or the participant did not respond (if 1 or true, the opposite). This value is updated when the poll is closed. login String The meeting attendee’s login name. session-name String The name of the user who entered the meeting room, creating a session. sco-name String The name of the meeting. date-created Datetime The date the meeting was created. date-end Datetime The date the meeting ended. participant-name String The name of the meeting attendee as registered with the server. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 139 Action reference You can change the time period to a period greater than 30 days by adding a length parameter, for example, length=120. The maximum number of users (max-users) is determined by the account license and applies to the server overall, not to a specific meeting. This action also returns the number of times in the current month the maximum has been reached (max-participants-freq). Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-meeting-concurrent-users &length=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description length Integer N The number of days in the time period to check for concurrent meeting usage. Use a value greater than 30. The default value is 30. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-meeting-concurrent-users Empty, with attributes Information about the peak number of users in meetings at the same moment. max-users Integer The peak number of users in meetings at the same moment (either a single meeting or concurrent meetings) during the time period. max-participants-freq Integer The number of times the maximum has been reached in the time period.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 140 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-meeting-concurrent-users Sample response report-meeting-sessions Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about all the sessions of a Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. A session is created when a participant enters an empty meeting. As more participants join the meeting, they join the session. The session ends when all attendees leave the meeting. When a new participant enters the now-empty meeting, a new session starts. For example, a recurring weekly meeting has a session each week when the meeting is held. You can call report-meeting-sessions on past meetings, active meetings, or future meetings, but future meetings are not likely to have sessions. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-meeting-sessions &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The ID of a meeting for which you want session information. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 141 Action reference Response structure datetime datetime ... Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-meeting-sessions &sco-id=2006811328 Sample response 2006-06-29T11:46:52.210-07:00 2006-06-29T13:34:43.410-07:00 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-meeting-sessions Container The entire list of sessions for the meeting. row Container Information about one session. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the meeting. asset-id Integer The unique ID of the session. version Integer A sequential ID for the session, starting at 1. num-participants Integer The number of participants in the meeting, other than the host. date-created Datetime The date and time the session was created, when the participant entered the meeting room. date-end Datetime The date and time the session ended, when the participant left the meeting room.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 142 Action reference report-meeting-summary Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns summary information about a specific Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. The results indicate how many users were invited, how many invited participants and guests attended, and other information about the meeting. To use report-meeting-summary, you need publish, host, or mini-host permission on the meeting. With one of these permissions, you can run report-meeting-summary on a current, completed, or future meeting. The results are most useful for a completed meeting. A meeting might be recurring (for example, a weekly staff meeting) and have an occurrence each time the meeting is held. If the meeting is recurring, the statistics returned by report-meeting-summary are cumulative, applying to all occurrences of the meeting, not just the latest one. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-meeting-summary &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Returned XML elements Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a meeting for which you have publish or host permission. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 143 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-meeting-summary&sco-id=2006334033 Sample response 2006-06-28T15:11:15.133-07:00 report-my-courses Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about each course the current user is or was enrolled in. The returned courses include future courses, past courses, and courses the user is presently taking. The list of courses can be quite large, so remember to use a filter to reduce the response. Each course has a permission-id that shows the level of access the user has to the course. For example, the access might be view, publish, or manage. report-meeting-summary Empty, with attributes Details about the meeting or meeting series. num-unique-meetings Integer The number of occurrences of a recurring meeting. peak-users Integer The highest number of participants in the meeting room at one time, during any one meeting occurrence. num-invitees Integer The number of users who were invited. num-invitees-attended Integer The number of invited users who attended. ispublic Boolean Whether the meeting is public and guests can enter automatically (if 1 or true), or private and must wait for permission (if 0 or false). num-guests-attended Integer The number of participants who entered the meeting room as guests rather than as registered attendees. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 144 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-my-courses &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string string datetime datetime datetime string boolean boolean ... Response values Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). my-courses Container Information about all courses the user is enrolled in. course Container Information about one course the user is enrolled in. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the course. type Allowed value The type of the course (for allowed values, see type).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 145 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-courses Sample response Test Course example.com/test/ 2006-05-03T10:21:46.810-07:00 2006-05-03T10:22:30.803-07:00 2006-05-03T10:15:00.000-07:00 /test/ false false report-my-events Availability Breeze 5 icon Allowed value The type of icon that identifies the course in the user interface. For a course, always course. permission-id Allowed value The level of permission the user has on the course (see permissionid for values). name String The name of the course. url String The URL at which a user can reach the course on the server. Includes the domain name and the course identifier. date-created Datetime The date and time the course was created. date-modified Datetime The date and time the course was last modified. date-begin Datetime The date and time the course is available for users to start. date-end Datetime The date and time the course closes. url-path String The part of the course URL that is the course identifier, after the domain name. expired Boolean Whether the course has expired (true if it has, false if it has not). completed Boolean Whether the user has completed the course (true if yes, false if no). Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 146 Action reference Description Provides information about each event the current user has attended or is scheduled to attend. The user can be either a host or a participant in the event. The events returned are those in the user’s my-events folder. To obtain information about all events on your Acrobat Connect Pro Server or in your Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account, call sco-shortcuts to get the sco-id of the events folder. Then, call sco-contents with the sco-id to list all events. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-my-events &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string string datetime datetime boolean datetime/duration> ... Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 147 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-events Sample response Meet the Famous Author example.com /author/ 2006-05-12T18:00:00.000-07:00 2006-05-12T20:00:00.000-07:00 true 02:00:00.000 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). my-events Container The entire list of events the user is or has been registered for. event Container Information about one event. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the event. type Allowed value The type of the object. For an event, always event. icon Allowed value An icon identifying the object. For an event, always event. permission-id Allowed value The permission the user has for the event (see permission-id for values). name String The name of the event. domain-name String The domain name of the Acrobat Connect Pro server, which comes after http:// (or https://) and before the unique event name in the event URL. url-path String The unique event name, which comes after the domain name in the event URL. date-begin Date The date the event begins, in ISO 8601 format. date-end Date The date the event ends, in ISO 8601 format. expired Boolean A value indicating whether the event has ended. If the event is currently underway, the value is false. duration Time The amount of time the event is scheduled to last. Uses the time portion of an ISO 8601 date format.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 148 Action reference report-my-meetings Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about all Acrobat Connect Pro meetings for which the user is a host, invited participant, or registered guest. The meeting can be scheduled in the past, present, or future. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-my-meetings &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string domain url date date boolean time ... Name Type Required Description filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 149 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). my-meetings Container Information about all meetings the user is, or has been, invited to. meeting Container Details about one of the user’s meetings. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the meeting. type Allowed value The type of the object returned (for this call, always meeting). icon Allowed value The icon that visually identifies the meeting in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (for this call, always meeting). permission-id Allowed value The level of permission the user has to the meeting (see permission-id for values). active-participants Integer The number of participants the meeting currently has, including hosts and presenters. name String The name of the meeting. domain-name String The domain name portion of the URL to the meeting room. url-path String The part of the meeting room URL that identifies the meeting and comes after the domain name. date-begin Datetime The date and time the meeting begins (or has begun). date-end Datetime The date and time the meeting ends (or has ended). expired Boolean Whether the meeting has ended (true if it has, false if it has not). duration Time The actual length of time of the meeting. This may be longer or shorter than the time the meeting was scheduled for.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 150 Action reference Sample response How to Write a Novel example.com /novel/ 2006-05-11T11:30:00.000-07:00 2006-05-11T12:30:00.000-07:00 true 01:00:00.000 Intro to Film example.com /film/ 2006-06-09T14:00:00.000-07:00 2006-06-09T20:00:00.000-07:00 true 06:00:00.000 report-my-training Availability Connect Enterprise 6 Description Returns a list of all courses and curriculums a user or group is enrolled in. If you do not use a principal-id, the list is for the current user. If you add a principal-id, the list is for the principal you specify. The response contains a list of row elements. In the list, courses have the attributes type=content and icon=course, while curriculums have type=curriculum and icon=curriculum. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-my-training &principal-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 151 Action reference Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime datetime datetime string boolean boolean ... Response values Name Type Required Description principal-id Integer N The unique ID of a user or group whose courses and curriculums you want to list. If you do not specify a value, the response is for the current user. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-my-training Container The entire list of courses and curriculums the user is enrolled in. row Container Information about one course or curriculum the user is enrolled in. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the course or curriculum. type Allowed value The type of the object (see type for allowed values). icon Allowed value The icon that identifies the object in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (see icon for allowed values). If type is content, the icon value describes the content.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 152 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-training &principal-id=2006258745 max-retries Integer The allowed number of attempts that the course can be retaken. permission-id Allowed value The permission the principal has on the object (see permission-id for allowed values). transcript-id Integer The ID of the course transcript. attempts Integer The number of times the user has tried to complete the course. name String The name of the course or curriculum. description String The course or curriculum description. url String The part of the URL to the course or curriculum that includes the domain name and unique name, without http:// or https://. date-created Datetime The date and time the course or curriculum was created. date-modified Datetime The date and time the course or curriculum was last modified. date-begin Datetime The start date and time of the course or curriculum, either past or future. date-end Datetime The end date or time of the course or curriculum, either past or future. sco-tag String A non-unique identifier for the course or curriculum as shown in the user interface, for example, ECON101. url-path String The unique name of the course or curriculum in its URL. expired Boolean A value indicating whether the end date of the course or curriculum has passed (true if it has, false if not). completed Boolean A value indicating whether the user or group has completed the course. tr-status String Whether the user has attempted to take the course (attempted)or not (not-attempted). Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 153 Action reference Sample response Intro to Psychology example.com/psychology/ 2006-05-03T10:21:46.810-07:00 2006-05-03T10:22:30.803-07:00 2006-05-03T10:15:00.000-07:00 /psychology/ false true A Day in the Life example.com/day/ 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:47:59.903-07:00 2006-06-12T14:45:00.000-07:00 /day/ false false not-attempted report-quiz-interactions Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about all the interactions users have had with a certain quiz. An interaction identifies all answers one user makes to one quiz question. If a user answers the same question more than once, all answers are part of the same interaction and have the same interaction-id. This report provides information about every answer that any user has ever given to questions on a quiz. You can filter the response to make it more meaningful, using any allowed filters. For example, you can request all answers a certain user has given: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-interactions &sco-id=2006334909&filter-like-name=Joy%20Smith Or, you can request only a certain user’s answers to a specific question: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-interactions &sco-id=2006334909&filter-name=Joy%20Smith &filter-like-description=What is the capital of CaliforniaUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 154 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-interactions &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime string integer ... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation or course that contains a quiz. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-quiz-interactions Container Information about all interactions all users have had with the quiz. row Container Information about one user, one quiz question, and one answer. Multiple row elements can be part of the same interaction. display-seq Integer The sequence number of this question in the quiz.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 155 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-interactions &sco-id=2006334909&filter-name=Joy Smith &filter-like-description=governor transcript-id Integer The ID of one user’s attempt to take a quiz, with one user, one attempt at a quiz, and multiple questions and answers. Each time the user takes the quiz, the transcript-id changes. interaction-id Integer The ID of all answers one user makes to one quiz question. sco-id Integer The unique ID of a presentation or course that contains the quiz. score Integer The user’s score for this question. name String The name of the user. sco-name Integer The name of the presentation or course that contains the quiz. date-created Datetime The date the presentation or course was created. description String The quiz question the user answered. response String The response the user gave. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 156 Action reference Sample request Joy Smith California Quiz 2006-05-11T15:50:23.643-07:00 The governor of California is a former actor. true Joy Smith California Quiz 2006-05-11T17:32:53.970-07:00 The governor of California is a former actor. false Joy Smith California Quiz/sco-name> 2006-05-12T11:55:24.940-07:00 The governor of California is a former actor. true report-quiz-question-answer-distribution Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns information about the number of users who chose a specific answer to a quiz question. The combination of one quiz question and all of one user’s answers to it is called an interaction. If the user answers the question more than once, all answers are part of the same interaction and have the same interaction-id. Call report-quiz-interactions to determine an interaction-id to specify in the request. The interaction-id does not correspond to the question number in the quiz (for example, question 1, question 2, and so on).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 157 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-question-answer-distribution &interaction-id=integer &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string ... Response values Name Type Required Description interaction-id Integer N The ID that describes all of one user’s responses to one quiz question. sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation or course that contains a quiz. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-quiz-question-answer-distribution Container The list of questions and answers. row Container Information about one user, one question, and one answer. display-seq Integer The sequence number of the question in the quiz.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 158 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-question-answer-distribution&sco-id=2006334909 Sample response san francisco Sacramento false ... report-quiz-question-distribution Availability Breeze 4 interaction-id Integer The ID of all of one user’s responses to one quiz question. If the user answers the question multiple times, all answers have the same interaction-id. score Integer The score the user earned on the question. asset-id Integer The ID of the version of the quiz in which the user answered the question. The asset-id changes when you upload a new content version. num-selected Integer In multiple choice or true/false quiz questions, the sequence number of the answer selected. response String The response the user gave to the question. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 159 Action reference Description Returns information about the number of correct and incorrect answers to the questions on a quiz. This call can help you determine how a group responded to a quiz question overall. Because this call returns information about all the questions on a quiz, you may want to filter the results for a specific question or group of questions. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-question-distribution &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string ... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation that contains a quiz. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 160 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-question-distribution &sco-id=2006334909&filter-like-description=The capital of California Sample response The capital of California is<1> The capital of California is<1> report-quiz-question-response Availability Breeze 4 report-quiz-question-distribution Container Information about all the questions on a quiz. row Container Information about one question on the quiz. display-seq Integer The sequence in the quiz in which this question falls. interaction-id Integer The ID of the quiz question. num-correct Integer The number of correct answers to this question. num-incorrect Integer The number of incorrect answers to this question. total-responses Integer The total number of responses to this question. percentage-correct Integer The percentage of the total responses that were correct. score Integer The score assigned to the quiz question. name String The name of the quiz question, defined when the question was created in Quiz Manager. description String The definition of the quiz question, defined when the question was created in Quiz Manager. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 161 Action reference Description Provides a list of answers that users have given to questions on a quiz. Without filtering, this action returns all answers from any user to any question on the quiz. However, you can filter the response for a specific user, interaction, or answer (see the filter syntax at filter-definition). An interaction is a combination of one user and one question. If the user answers the same question more than once, all answers are part of the same interaction and have the same interaction-id. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-question-response &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation that contains a quiz. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 162 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-question-response &sco-id=2006334909&filter-interaction-id=2006334913 Sample response Joy Smith Sacramento 2006-05-11T15:50:23.643-07:00 Joy Smith san francisco 2006-05-11T17:32:53.970-07:00 Sacramento 2006-05-12T11:55:24.940-07:00 report-quiz-summary Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides a summary of data about a quiz, including the number of times the quiz has been taken; average, high, and low scores; and other information. report-quiz-question-response Container Information about all responses to all questions on the quiz. row Container Information about one response. principal-id Integer The ID of the user who answered the quiz question. interaction-id Integer The ID of one response to one question. user-name String The name of the user as registered on the server. response String The user’s response to the question, including a word or phrase, true, false, or a letter choice. date-created Datetime The date and time the user responded. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 163 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-summary &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation that contains a quiz. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-quiz-summary Container Contains information about the quiz. row Empty, with attributes Summary information about the quiz. Can return more than one row element if the maxpossiblescore is different for different transcripts. num-questions Integer The number of questions on the quiz. average-score Integer The average score, across all users who have taken the quiz. low-score Integer The lowest score a user has received on the quiz. high-score Integer The highest score a user has received on the quiz. numtaken Integer The total number of times the quiz has been taken.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 164 Action reference Sample request https://server.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-summary&sco-id=2006123456 Sample response report-quiz-takers Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about all users who have taken a quiz in a training. Use a sco-id to identify the quiz. To reduce the volume of the response, use any allowed filter or pass a type parameter to return information about just one type of SCO (courses, presentations, or meetings). Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quiz-takers &sco-id=integer &principal-id=integer &type=allowedValue &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue numdistincttaken Integer The number of times the quiz has been taken by distinct principals. If a principal takes the quiz more than once, only one time is counted. maxpossiblescore Integer The highest possible score on the quiz. asset-id Integer The ID of the latest version of the SCO uploaded to the server. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 165 Action reference Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime string boolean Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation or course that contains a quiz. principal-id Integer N The ID of a principal for whom you want quiz results. type Allowed value N The type of content for which you want results. Allowed values are course, presentation, and meeting. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-quiz-takers Container Information about all users who have taken the quiz. row Container Information about one user who has taken the quiz. transcript-id Integer The ID of the transcript on which the user’s quiz score is recorded. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the presentation, course, or meeting that has the quiz. principal-id Integer The ID of the user who took the quiz.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 166 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quiz-takers&sco-id=2006334909 Sample response California State Quiz joy@acme.com 2006-05-16T11:14:47.000-07:00 Joy Smith false status Allowed value Whether the user passed or failed the most recent attempt at the quiz. Allowed values are user-passed and user-failed. score Integer The user’s score on the most recent attempt at the quiz. asset-id Integer The ID of the version of the quiz the user attempted. permission-id Allowed value The level of permission the user has to access the quiz (see permission-id for values). attempts Integer The number of times the user has taken the quiz. time-taken Integer The amount of time the user spent taking the quiz, in milliseconds. certificate Integer The unique ID of a user’s transcript. answeredsurvey Boolean Whether the learner completed a quiz. If 0 or false, the training does not have a quiz or the learner did not complete it. If 1 or true, the learner completed the quiz. version Integer The revision number of the quiz. name String The name of the quiz. login String The user’s login name on the server. date-created Datetime The date and time of the user’s most recent quiz attempt. principal-name String The full name of the user taking the quiz. override Boolean A setting indicating whether a training manager can change the user’s score on the quiz. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 167 Action reference report-quotas Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns information about the quotas that apply to your Acrobat Connect Pro license or Acrobat Connect Pro hosted account. Acrobat Connect Pro enforces various quotas, for example, the number of concurrent users in training, the number of downloads, the number of authors, and so on. Although your server license determines certain quotas, you can scale your license beyond your limit. In the response from report-quotas, the soft-limit is the number defined by your license. The soft-limit is the same as the limit, unless you purchase a Burst Pack for meetings, which allows additional participants to join past the limit, on an overage basis. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-quotas &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure datetime datetime Response values Name Type Required Description session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 168 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-quotas Sample response 2004-03-09T09:45:41.047-08:00 3000-01-01T00:00:00.000-08:00 2006-05-31T17:00:00.943-07:00 2006-06-30T17:00:00.943-07:00 ... report-sco-slides Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns information about the slides in a presentation. The information includes how many times, and how recently, each slide has been viewed. report-quotas Container Information about all of the quotas set for the account. quota Container Information about one quota. acl-id Integer The ID of the account on which the quota is defined. quota-id Allowed value The name of the quota defined by the server, ending in -quota. used Integer The number of uses that count toward this quota. limit Integer The limit at which the server does not allow access. Has the same value as soft-limit, unless you have purchased a Burst Pack to allow for overage. The value is either an integer or unlimited. soft-limit Integer The limit determined by your server license. date-begin Datetime The date and time the quota was effective on the server. date-end Datetime The date the quota expires. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 169 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-sco-slides &sco-id=integer &asset-id=integer &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure datetime ... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a presentation. asset-id Integer N The version number of a presentation, incremented each time a presentation is uploaded. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-sco-slides Container Information about all of the slides in a presentation, indicating how many times and how recently a slide has been viewed. row Container Information about one slide in the presentation. slide Integer The number of the slide within the presentation. name Integer The name of the slide in the presentation.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 170 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-sco-slides&sco-id=2006334909 Sample response 2006-05-16T11:14:54.453-07:00 2006-05-16T11:14:59.593-07:00 2006-05-12T11:55:52.330-07:00 2006-05-12T11:55:55.487-07:00 2006-05-12T11:56:00.233-07:00 See also report-sco-views report-sco-views Availability Breeze 4 Description Indicates how many times, and how recently, a SCO was viewed. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-sco-views &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue asset-id Integer The version number of the presentation. Each time a presentation is published, it has a new asset-id. views Integer The number of times the slide has been viewed. date-created Datetime The date and time the slide was last viewed. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 171 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string string Response values Sample request https://server.com/api/xml?action=report-sco-views&sco-id=2006334909 Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a SCO to check for views. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-sco-views Container Information about how many times, and how recently, the presentation was viewed. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the presentation. type Allowed value The type of content object (SCO). Allowed values are content, curriculum, event, folder, link, meeting, and tree. is-folder Boolean A value indicating whether the SCO is a folder (if 1) or another type of object (if 0). views Integer The number of times users have viewed the SCO. name String The name of the SCO. last-viewed-date Datetime The date and time the SCO was last viewed.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 172 Action reference Sample response Quiz on California 2006-05-12T11:55:24.940-07:00 report-user-trainings-taken Availability Connect Enterprise 6 Description Returns a list of all courses and curriculums a user has taken, whether or not the user has completed the training. Each course or curriculum is returned in a separate row element and has the most recent transcript of the user’s scores. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-user-trainings-taken &principal-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Name Type Required Description principal-id Integer Y The ID of a user for whom you want a list of trainings. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 173 Action reference Response structure string string string datetime boolean ... Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). type Allowed value The type of the SCO. Allowed values are usercontent, content, and my-content. report-user-trainings-taken Container A list of all trainings the user has attempted. row Container Information about one course or curriculum the user has taken, whether or not passed. transcript-id Integer The ID of the record of the user’s most recent score on this training. max-retries Integer The maximum number of times the user can repeat the training. sco-id Integer The ID of the training SCO. type Allowed value The type of the training SCO (see allowed values at type). icon Allowed value The type of icon that identifies the course or curriculum in Connect Pro Central. Provides information about the course or curriculum in addition to its type (see allowed values at icon). status Allowed value The status of the user’s work with the SCO. Allowed values for a course or presentation are user-passed, user-failed, completed, incomplete, notattempted, and review. A curriculum or folder can only be completed or incomplete. certificate Integer The ID of the record that shows the user passed or completed the training.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 174 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-user-trainings-taken &principal-id=2006258745&principal-id=4797406 Sample response All About Web Communities test /p33096345/ 2006-06-12T15:06:02.947-07:00 false ... report-user-training-transcripts Availability Connect Enterprise 6 Description Returns a list of transcripts for trainings a user has taken. A transcript is the record of one score a user obtained from one attempt at taking one training. A training can be a course, curriculum, meeting, or event. score Integer The score the user earned on the most recent attempt at the training. permission-id Allowed value The permission the user has been assigned to access the course or curriculum (see permission-id for allowed values). attempts Integer The number of attempts the user has made at this training. name String The name of the training SCO. description String The description of the training SCO. url-path String The unique identifier of the SCO that appears in its URL after the domain name. date-taken Datetime The date the user interacted with the training SCO (viewed a presentation, took a quiz, and so on). from-curriculum Boolean A value indicating whether this course was taken as part of a curriculum. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 175 Action reference The response can include more than one transcript for a training SCO, if the user has attempted the training more than once. A user can fail a training the first time and then pass on the second attempt. Each attempt has its own transcript, and both transcripts are included in the report. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=report-user-training-transcripts &principal-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter or sort the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string string datetime string string ... Response values Name Type Required Description principal-id Integer Y The ID of a user whose transcripts you want. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). report-user-training-transcripts Container Information about all transcripts for the specified user.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 176 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-user-training-transcripts &principal-id=2006258745 row Container Information about one attempt the user made on the training. transcript-id Integer The ID of the transcript on which the user’s score is recorded. A distinct transcript exists for each of the user’s attempts at taking the SCO. sco-id Integer The ID of the SCO, which can be a meeting, content, course, curriculum, event, or seminar. principal-id Integer The ID of the user. status Allowed value The status of the user’s work with the SCO (see status attribute for allowed values). score Integer The score the user earned on the SCO. If the SCO does not have a score, as with a meeting, the value of score is 0. max-score Integer The maximum score possible on the course or curriculum. certificate Integer The ID of the record of the courses and curriculums the user has passed or completed. type Allowed value The type of the SCO. Allowed values are usercontent, content, and my-content. icon Allowed value The name of the icon that identifies the course or curriculum in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. name String The name of the course or curriculum. url-path String The unique identifier of the course or curriculum that appears in its URL after the domain name. login String The user’s login ID on Acrobat Connect Pro Server. date-taken Datetime The date the user interacted with the course or curriculum (viewed a presentation, took a quiz, and so on). principal-name String The name of the user interacting with the SCO. sco-tag String A descriptive label for the SCO, in addition to the name (for example, a short course name). Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 177 Action reference Sample response Test Course /test/ joy@acme.com 2006-06-30T15:23:55.070-07:00 Joy Smith Test Course /test/ joy@acme.com 2006-07-14T16:55:28.440-07:00 Joy Smith sco-by-url Availability Connect Pro 7 Description Returns information about a SCO at a specified URL path. The URL path is the unique identifier after the domain name in the URL to the SCO. For example, if you have a meeting with the custom URL http://example.acrobat.com/teammeeting, the URL path is /teammeeting. If you pass the full URL path, Connect Pro returns the status code "no data". Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-by-url &url-path=url Parameters Filters You cannot filter or sort the response. Name Required Description url-path Y The unique identifier after the domain name in the URL to the SCO.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 178 Action reference Response structure - Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). owner-principal Container Contains information about a principal. type Allowed value The type of principal (see type for values). principal-id Integer The ID of the principal. account-id Integer The ID of the account the principal belongs to. has-children Boolean Whether the principal has children. Groups have children and users don’t, so this attribute indicates whether the principal is a group. is-hidden Boolean Whether the principal is hidden (true) or not (false) in Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application. is-primary Boolean Whether the principal is a built-in group (true) or not (false). ext-login String The login ID sent from an external network. By default, the same value as login. login String The login name of the user who is logged in to the server, often the user’s e-mail address. name String The name of the user who is logged in to the server. e-mail String The e-mail address of the user who is logged in to the server. sco Container One object within the folder. sco-id Integer The unique ID of an object.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 179 Action reference Sample request http://example.acrobat.com/api/xml?action=sco-by-url&url-path=/p18656190/ Sample response jdoe@adobe.com jdoe@adobe.com Jane Doe jdoe@adobe.com - /p18656190/ 2009-09-15T13:30:00.000-07:00 2009-09-15T13:32:45.683-07:00 2009-09-15T13:32:45.683-07:00 Test Curriculum account-id Integer The unique ID of an account. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the field. folder-id Integer The ID of a folder. icon Allowed value The name of the icon that visually identifies this object. lang String The language in which information about the SCO is displayed (see lang for values). max-retries Integer The maximum number of times a user can retake the course or curriculum. If a user can take the course 3 times, max-retries is 2. source-sco-id Integer The unique ID of a content SCO used in a course or curriculum. type Allowed value The type of the object (see type for values). version Integer A sequential ID for the session, starting at 1. url-path String The unique identifier after the domain name in the URL to the SCO. date-begin Datetime The beginning date of a course or meeting (returned for a course or meeting only). date-created Datetime The date a course or meeting was created (returned for a course or meeting only). date-modified Datetime The date the object was last modified. name String The name of the object on the server. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 180 Action reference sco-contents Availability Breeze 4 Description Returns a list of SCOs within another SCO. The enclosing SCO can be a folder, meeting, or curriculum. In general, the contained SCOs can be of any type—meetings, courses, curriculums, content, events, folders, trees, or links (see the list in type). However, the type of the contained SCO needs to be valid for the enclosing SCO. For example, courses are contained within curriculums, and meeting content is contained within meetings. Because folders are SCOs, the returned list includes SCOs and subfolders at the next hierarchical level, but not the contents of the subfolders. To include the subfolder contents, call sco-expanded-contents. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-contents &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=value Parameters Filters You can filter the response on any element or attribute, with these exceptions: • You cannot filter on duration. • If you use filter-date-begin, filter-date-end, or filter-date-modified, specify a time without a time zone, for example: filter-date-modified=2005-01-05T10:44:03 You can use filter-gt or filter-lt with a date field and a full date, including the time zone. You can sort the response on any element or attribute. Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a folder for which you want to list contents. You can get the sco-id by calling sco-shortcuts. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 181 Action reference Response structure string string string string datetime string string Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). scos Container The list of objects within the folder. sco Container One object within the folder. sco-id Integer The unique ID of one object within the folder. source-sco-id Integer The unique ID of a content SCO used in a course or curriculum. folder-id Integer The ID of a folder, passed as sco-id in the request. type Allowed value The type of the object (see type for values). SCOs that represent content have a type of content, rather than a more specific type, such as presentation. icon Allowed value The name of the icon that identifies the object. Provides more detail on the type of object in type. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays the object. is-folder Boolean Integer A value indicating whether the object is a folder (1) or not (0). byte-count Integer The size of the content. For folders, this value will be 0. ref-count Integer The number of SCOs that reference this SCO. name String The name of the object on the server. url-path String The unique identifier after the domain name in the URL to the SCO. description String The description of the object. date-modified Datetime The date the object was last modified.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 182 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-contents&sco-id=2006258748 Sample response Java 101 /java101/ 2006-07-20T17:15:00.000-07:00 2006-07-20T17:21:38.860-07:00 See also sco-expanded-contents, sco-shortcuts sco-delete Availability Breeze 4 Description Deletes one or more objects (SCOs). If the sco-id you specify is for a folder, all the contents of the specified folder are deleted. To delete multiple SCOs, specify multiple sco-id parameters. You can use a call such as sco-contents to check the ref-count of the SCO, which is the number of other SCOs that reference this SCO. If the SCO has no references, you can safely remove it, and the server reclaims the space. If the SCO has references, removing it can cause the SCOs that reference it to stop working, or the server not to reclaim the space, or both. For example, if a course references a quiz presentation, removing the presentation might make the course stop working. date-begin Datetime The beginning date of a course or meeting (returned for a course or meeting only). date-end Datetime The end date of a course or meeting (returned for a course or meeting only). domain-name String The domain name at which you can access a meeting or event (returned for meetings and events only). duration Datetime The length of time a course or meeting lasted (returned for a course or meeting only). sco-tag String A brief description of the SCO. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 183 Action reference As another example, if a meeting has used a content SCO (such as a presentation or video), there is a reference from the meeting to the SCO. Deleting the content SCO does not free disk space, because the meeting still references it. To delete a SCO, you need at least manage permission (see permission-id for details). Users who belong to the builtin authors group have manage permission on their own content folder, so they can delete content within it. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-delete &sco-id=integer &session=value Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-delete&sco-id=2007171127 Sample response See also sco-info, sco-move, sco-nav, sco-expanded-contents Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a SCO. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 184 Action reference sco-expanded-contents Availability Breeze 5 To list the contents of a curriculum in Connect Pro 7 and later, use curriculum-contents. Description Lists all of the SCOs in a folder, including the contents of subfolders, curriculums, and any type of enclosing SCO. Note: If you call this command on a large folder—such as the root meeting folder for a large account—the amount of data returned is very large. If you do not use a filter, the list of SCOs is returned in the same order as it appears in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. If you use a filter or a sort, the list is returned according to the filter or sort you use. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-expanded-contents &sco-id=integer &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter the response on any element or attribute, with these exceptions: • You cannot filter on duration. • If you use filter-date-begin, filter-date-end, or filter-date-modified, specify a date in ISO 8601 format but without a time zone, for example: filter-date-modified=2005-01-05T10:44:03 However, you can use filter-gt-datefield or filter-lt-datefield with a full date that includes a time zone. • Do not use partial match filters constructed with filter-like (such as filter-like-name), as they might affect server performance. You can sort the response on any element or attribute except date-begin, date-created, date-modified, and url-path. Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a folder. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 185 Action reference Response structure string string datetime datetime ... more sco elements ... Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-expanded-contents&sco-id=624529 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). expanded-scos Container The list of all SCOs the folder contains. sco Container Details about one SCO in the folder. This SCO can be a folder or any other type of object. depth Integer The depth in the content tree at which this object appears, with toplevel objects at 1. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. If the SCO is a folder, same as folder-id. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder the SCO belongs to. type Allowed value The type of this content object (see type). icon Allowed value The name of the icon that visually identifies this object. lang Allowed value The language in which information about the SCO is displayed (see lang for values). source-sco-id Integer The ID of a SCO from which this SCO was created, such as a meeting template or course content. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central (or your application, if you use this value) displays a list of SCOs. Values are not necessarily unique, so multiple SCOs can have the same display-seq value. In that case, the application must define the display sequence. The default is 0. source-scotype Integer An integer indicating the type of the SCO from which this SCO was created.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 186 Action reference Sample response Shared Meetings /f624529/ 2004-03-09T09:45:41.060-08:00 2005-03-18T10:19:38.950-08:00 Monday Night Football /r68075204/ Monday Night Football 2004-05-17T15:30:00.000-07:00 2004-05-18T00:15:00.000-07:00 2004-05-17T15:50:39.733-07:00 2006-08-16T00:34:52.930-07:00 sco-info Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about a SCO on Acrobat Connect Pro. The object can have any valid SCO type. See type for a list of the allowed SCO types. The response includes the account the SCO belongs to, the dates it was created and last modified, the owner, the URL that reaches it, and other data. For some types of SCOs, the response also includes information about a template from which this SCO was created. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-info &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a SCO on the server. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 187 Action reference Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure datetime datetime datetime datetime string string string integer datetime integer datetime datetime string string Response values Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). sco Container Information about the SCO. account-id Integer The ID of the account the SCO belongs to. disabled Datetime An empty value if the SCO has not been disabled. If it has, the date and time it was disabled. display-seq Integer The sequence in which Acrobat Connect Pro Central (or your application, if you use this value) displays a list of SCOs. Values are not necessarily unique, so multiple SCOs can have the same display-seq value. In that case, the application must define the display sequence. The default is 0.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 188 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006320683 folder-id Integer The ID of the folder the SCO belongs to. icon Allowed value The type of icon used as a visual identifier for the SCO (see icon). lang Allowed value An abbreviation for the new language (see type for values). max-retries Integer The number of times the user is allowed to attempt to take the SCO. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. source-sco-id Integer The unique ID of a template from which the SCO is derived. type Allowed value The content type of the SCO (see type for values). type is a high-level category. icon provides more detail on the type of content. version Integer The version number of the SCO, incremented when the object is modified or uploaded to the server. date-begin Datetime If the SCO is a meeting, the date and time the meeting starts. date-created Datetime The date and time the SCO was created (or, for content, uploaded). date-end Datetime If the SCO is a meeting, the date and time the meeting ends. date-modified Datetime The date and time the SCO was last modified. description String The description of the SCO entered when the SCO was created. name String The name of the SCO. url-path String The path to the SCO on the server. passing-score Integer The minimum score that a user must have to pass a training course. duration Integer The length of time needed to view or play the SCO, in milliseconds. section-count Integer The number of sections in the course content, including the number of slides, pages, chapters, interactions, or other content divisions. source-sco Container Information about any SCOs that are templates for, or provide content to, the SCO you are interested in. The SCOs that can have a source are meetings, courses, or events. source-sco Container Details about one SCO that is a template for, or provides source content to, the SCO you are interested in. Has additional elements and attributes, the same as the sco element. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 189 Action reference Sample response 2006-05-04T11:15:00.000-07:00 2006-05-04T11:27:47.087-07:00 2006-05-04T12:15:00.000-07:00 2006-05-04T11:27:47.087-07:00 Technology and Law Review Meeting /tlawreview/ 2004-10-05T00:49:30.217-07:00 2005-01-04T15:03:25.937-08:00 Default Meeting Template /defaultMeetingTemplate/ sco-move Availability Breeze 4 Description Moves a SCO from one folder to another. To move a SCO to a folder, the current user must have permission to create content in the target folder. In general, users have permission on their own folders (such as my-meetings, my-courses, my-events, my-content, and mymeeting-templates) by default. To move SCOs to a shared folder such as content, courses, and meetings, a user must have Manage permission or be an Administrator. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-move &folder-id=integer &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 190 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-move&sco-id=2006744233 &folder-id=2006258748 Sample response See also sco-nav sco-nav Availability Breeze 4 Description Describes the folder hierarchy that contains a SCO. Name Type Required Description folder-id Integer Y The ID of the destination folder. sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of the SCO to move. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 191 Action reference The sco-nav call is useful for creating a navigation tree, breadcrumb trail, or any other type of user interface hierarchy. The response contains a list of sco elements, one for the SCO you are querying and one for each of its enclosing folders up to the top-level folder. The top-level folder is one of the list of folders returned by sco-shortcuts. In each sco element, the depth attribute indicates how many hierarchical levels the SCO is from the SCO you specify in the request. A depth of 0 indicates the SCO you are querying, a depth of 1 indicates the folder that contains the SCO, and so on. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-nav &sco-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string ... Response values Name Type Required Description sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a SCO for which you want a folder hierarchy up to the root level. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). sco-nav Container The entire navigation tree from the top-level folder to the SCO. sco Container Information about one SCO in the hierarchy. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. type Allowed value The type of SCO (see type for values).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 192 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-nav&sco-id=2006334909 Sample response User Content joy@acme.com Test Quiz See also sco-move sco-search Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides a list of all SCOs that have content matching the search text. The sco-search action searches the content of some types of SCOs for the query string. The types of SCOs searched include presentation archives, meeting archives, and the presentation components of a course or curriculum. A presentation that is included in a course returns two sets of results, one for the actual presentation and one for the course. The search does not include the SCO name or any metadata about the SCO stored in the database. The query is not case-sensitive and allows wildcards at the end of a query string. The allowed wildcards are: • An asterisk (*) to match any character or characters • A question mark (?) to match any one character For example, you can use the query strings quiz, qu*, or qui? . However, you cannot use a wildcard at the beginning or within a query string. icon Allowed value The icon that visually represents the SCO (see icon for values). depth Integer A number representing the level of a SCO in the folder hierarchy relative to the SCO passed in the request (0 for the passed SCO, 1 for one level above, and so on). Values increase as you move up the hierarchy toward the top-level folder. name String The name of the SCO. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 193 Action reference You can also use the operators and and or to return multiple matches, with spaces separating the operator and the search terms, like this: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-search&query=quiz or test If you search on quizortest, for example, the server interprets it as a literal string and returns only exact matches. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-search &query=querystring &filter-definition=value &sort-definition=value &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters You can filter the response on any element or attribute it contains. Response structure string string datetime datetime integer allowedValue string Name Type Required Description query Query string Y A string to search for. To use any of these special characters in the query string, escape them with a backslash before the character: + - && || ! ( ) { } [ ] ^ " ~ * ? : \ The query string is not case-sensitive and allows wildcard characters * and ? at the end of the query string. filter-definition Filter definition N A filter to reduce the volume of the response. sort-definition Sort definition N A sort to return results in a certain sequence. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 194 Action reference Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-search&query=quiz Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). sco-search-info Container The list of objects (SCOs) that match the search query. sco Container Details about one object that matches the search. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder in which the SCO is stored. type Allowed value The content type assigned to the SCO (see type for values). icon Allowed value The icon that visually identifies the SCO in a user interface. byte-count Integer The size of the SCO, in bytes. tree-type Integer The tree type. name String The file name of the SCO. url-path String The unique identifier that comes after the domain name in the SCO URL. date-created Datetime The date the SCO was created. date-modified Datetime The date the SCO was modified. hit Integer The sequence number of this occurrence of the query string in the SCO. hit-type Allowed value The type of content in which the search term was found. Allowed values are metadata and slide. hit-url String A relative URL to the position where the search term was found in the content, for example, to a specific slide. Must be appended to the urlpath. thumbnail-path String A relative URL to an image of the SCO that contains the search term.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 195 Action reference Sample response Final Quiz /p46125962/ 2005-05-09T14:24:36.390-07:00 2005-05-09T14:24:36.390-07:00 0 metadata Final Quiz /p46125962/ 2005-05-09T14:24:36.390-07:00 2005-05-09T14:24:36.390-07:00 7 slide slide=7 ... sco-search-by-field Availability Acrobat Connect Pro 7 Description Provides a list of all SCOs matching the search text within the specified field. This action allows you to search for objects in the database based on the SCO’s name, description, or author, or all three of those fields. The sco-search-by-field action searches the content of some types of SCOs for the query string. The search includes folders, training courses, curriculums, meetings, content, and archives. To search for multi-word terms with spaces between the words, search only on the first word in the term and use a wildcard at the end. For example, to search for Sales Presentation, use the following string: query=sales* Note: The sco-search-by-field command does not support the and/or operators. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-search-by-field &query=SearchTerm &field=allowedValueUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 196 Action reference Parameters Filters Filters are supported on any field that can be returned. For example, you can use &filter-gt-date-created=2007-09-12T08:00:00.000 if you want to show only results created after 8:00 AM on September 12, 2007. Response structure string string datetime datetime string string Response value Name Type Required Description query String Y The term to search for within the specified field. The query is caseinsensitive. field String N The field to search. Accepts four possible values: name, description, author, or allfields: • name searches only the name field for SCOs. • description searches only the description field for SCOs. • author matches the full name field (not the first-name or lastname fields) of the principal that created the SCOs. • allfields searches the name, description, and author fields. If this parameter is omitted, the name field is searched. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). sco-search-by-field-info Container The list of objects (SCOs) that match the search query. sco Container Details about one object that matches the search.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 197 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-search-by-field&query=Marketing*&field=description Sample response virt1 /r72655596/ 2007-10-10T16:41:31.643-07:00 2007-10-10T16:41:31.643-07:00 Piet Pompies ppompies@adobe.com test1 /f13818712/ 2007-10-10T18:00:31.083-07:00 2007-10-10T18:00:31.083-07:00 trainer two trainer@two.com sco-id Integer The unique ID of the SCO. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder in which the SCO is stored. type Allowed value The content type assigned to the SCO (see type for values). icon Allowed value The icon that visually identifies the SCO in a user interface. name String The file name of the SCO. url-path String The unique identifier that comes after the domain name in the SCO URL. date-created Datetime The date the SCO was created. date-modified Datetime The date the SCO was last modified. principal-name String The author of the SCO. folder-name String The name of the folder in which the SCO is stored. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 198 Action reference sco-shortcuts Availability Breeze 4 Description Provides information about the folders relevant to the current user. These include a folder for the user’s current meetings, a folder for the user’s content, as well as folders above them in the navigation hierarchy. To determine the URL of a SCO, concatenate the url-path returned by sco-info, sco-contents, or scoexpanded-contents with the domain-name returned by sco-shortcuts. For example, you can concatenate these two strings: • http://test.server.com (the domain-name returned by sco-shortcuts) • /f2006123456/ (the url-path returned by sco-info, sco-contents, or sco-expanded-contents) The result is this URL: http://test.server.com/f2006123456/ You can also call sco-contents with the sco-id of a folder returned by sco-shortcuts to see the contents of the folder. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-shortcuts &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string ... Name Type Required Description session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 199 Action reference Response values The values that can be returned in the type attribute of the sco element (for this call only, sco-shortcuts) identify Acrobat Connect Pro folders. Each folder type maps to a folder in Acrobat Connect Pro Central and requires certain permission levels to access, described in the following table. Sample request http://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). shortcuts Container Information about all of the folders that relate to the current user. sco Container Information about one of the current user’s folders. tree-id Integer The ID of the navigation tree that contains the folder. Several folders might have the same tree-id. sco-id Integer The unique ID of the folder. type Allowed value The type of the folder. Allowed values are shown in the following table. domain-name String The domain name of the folder. Value of type Description account-custom Customized content for an account, such as a customized login page, banner, and so on. content The Shared Content folder. Requires Administrator privilege or Manage permission. courses The Shared Training folder. Requires Administrator privilege or Manage permission. events The Shared Events folder. Requires Administrator privilege or Manage permission. meetings The Shared Meetings folder. Requires Administrator privilege or Manage permission. my-courses The My Training folder. By default, the individual user has Manage permission. my-content The My Content folder. By default, the individual user has Manage permission. my-events The My Events folder. By default, the individual user has Manage permission. my-meetings The My Meetings folder. By default, the individual user has Manage permission. my-meeting-templates The My Templates folder. By default, the individual user has Manage permission. seminars The Shared Seminars folder. Requires Administrator privilege or Manage permission. shared-meeting-templates The Shared Templates folder. Inherits permissions from Shared Meetings. user-content Contain the user content folders. user-courses Contain the user courses folders. user-events Contain the user events folders. user-meetings Contain the user meeting folders.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 200 Action reference Sample response http://example.com http://example.com ... See also sco-info, sco-expanded-contents sco-update Availability Breeze 4 Description Creates metadata for a SCO, or updates existing metadata describing a SCO. Call sco-update to create metadata only for SCOs that represent content, including meetings. You also need to upload content files with either sco-upload or Acrobat Connect Pro Central. You must provide a folder-id or a sco-id, but not both. If you pass a folder-id, sco-update creates a new SCO and returns a sco-id. If the SCO already exists and you pass a sco-id, sco-update updates the metadata describing the SCO. To create a course, pass type=content&icon=course, as in the following: https://example.com/api/xml?action=scoupdate&name=AutomatedCourse&type=content&icon=course&folder-id=20002&source-sco-id=23510 After you create a new SCO with sco-update, call permissions-update to specify which users and groups can access it. USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 201 Action reference Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-update &author-info-1=string &author-info-2=string &author-info-3=string &date-begin=datetime &date-end=datetime &description=string &email=string &first-name=string &folder-id=integer &icon=allowedValue &lang=allowedValue &last-name=string &name=string &sco-id=integer &sco-tag=string &source-sco-id=integer &type=allowedValue &url-path=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Name Type Required Description author-info-1 String N Information about the author. Used only with presentations. Can be used for the author’s name or any other information. author-info-2 String N Additional information about the author. Used only with presentations. Can be used for the author’s professional title or any other information. author-info-3 String N Additional information about the author. Used only with presentations. Can be used for the author’s company name or any other information. date-begin Datetime N The scheduled beginning date and time, in ISO 8601 format. Used only for meetings and courses. date-end Datetime N The scheduled ending date and time, in ISO 8601 format. Used only for meetings and courses. description String N A description of the SCO to be displayed in the user interface. email String N The e-mail address of the contact person for a presentation (used only with presentation SCOs). first-name String N The first name of the contact person for a presentation (used only with presentation SCOs). folder-id Integer Y/N The ID of the folder in which a new SCO will be stored. Required for a new SCO, but do not use for an existing SCO. lang Allowed value N An abbreviation for the language associated with the SCO (see lang for values). If not specified, the default value for the folder in which the SCO is created is used. icon Allowed value N The visual symbol used to identify a SCO in Acrobat Connect Pro Central; also provides information about the SCO in addition to its type. last-name String N The last name of the contact person for a presentation (used only with presentations).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 202 Action reference Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure string string string Response values name String Y/N The name of the SCO, with or without spaces. Required to create a SCO. sco-id Integer Y/N The unique ID of a SCO to update. Use sco-id or folder-id, but not both. Required to update an existing SCO. sco-tag String N A label for any information you want to record about a course. Use only with courses. source-sco-id Integer N The unique ID of a template you can use to create a meeting or a piece of content from which you can build a course. type Allowed value N The type of the new SCO (for allowed values, see type). The default value is content. url-path String N The custom part of the URL to the meeting room that comes after the domain name. The url-path must be unique within the folder. If not specified, the server assigns a value. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). sco Container Information about a new SCO just created, including the sco-id. Returned only if you create a SCO. folder-id Integer The ID of the folder in which the new SCO is stored. lang Allowed value A code for the language associated with the SCO (see lang for values). type Allowed value The type of the new SCO (see type for values). sco-id Allowed value The unique ID of the new SCO. version Integer The version number of the new SCO. When the SCO is first created, the version is 0. Name Type Required DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 203 Action reference Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update&folder-id=2006258747 &description=test&name=More About Web Communities&type=content &lang=en Sample response /p53884157/ test More About Web Communities See also sco-upload sco-upload Availability Breeze 4 Description Uploads a file to the server and then builds the file, if necessary. If you are adding a new file, call sco-update first and pass the sco-id returned to sco-upload. If you are updating the content of a file that already exists on the server, you can call sco-upload directly. You must call sco-upload within an HTML form element. The form element must have an encoding type of multipart/form-data. The HTML form must also have an input element with name=file, as this example shows: account-id Integer The ID of the account in which the new SCO is created. icon Integer The type of icon that identifies a new SCO in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (see icon for values). url-path String The part of the SCO URL that comes after the domain name and uniquely identifies the SCO. description String A text description of the SCO. name String The name of the SCO. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 204 Action reference What files are you sending? This form uploads a single file. To upload multiple files (for example, a PPT and a PPC file), you must use additional input elements with name=file, for example: PPT files you are sending PPC files you are sending After the upload, call sco-info to get the status of the SCO. The status is initially in-progress, which means that the content is being built. When the status becomes active, the content build is finished, and users can access the content. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=sco-upload &file=formElementName &sco-id=integer &summary=string &title=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Name Type Required Description file Form element name Y The file to upload, sent from an input element with name=file in an HTML form. The HTML form must also have an encoding type of multipart/form-data defined in the form element. sco-id Integer Y The ID of the SCO you want to upload, returned by sco-update. summary String N A brief description of the SCO that Acrobat Connect Pro Central or your application displays. title String N The title of the SCO. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 205 Action reference Response structure string Response values Sample request This request is created by uploading a file through an HTML form: http://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-upload&sco-id=2006768386 Sample response 624520/2006768386-10/input/WhatMakesAGreatFilm.ppt See also sco-update user-accounts Availability Breeze 4 Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). files Container Information about all of the uploaded files. Deprecated and may be removed in a future release. file Container Information about one file. Deprecated and may be removed in a future release. path String The path to the newly uploaded file. For Adobe internal use only. Deprecated and may be removed in a future release.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 206 Action reference Description Provides a list of the accounts a user belongs to. The user-accounts action is only used when a user belongs to more than one account on the server and uses the same login ID and password for each. In that case, a user’s login is likely to fail with a status message of too-much-data. This action is useful when you want to retrieve a list of a user’s accounts and give the user a choice of which account to log in to. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=user-accounts &login=string &password=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. The default sort is by account-name. Response structure string datetime ... Response values Name Type Required Description login String Y The user’s login name, which may be the user’s e-mail address. password String Y The user’s password. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status). users Container Information about the accounts the user belongs to. user Container Information about a user and an account. user-id Integer The ID of the user on the server.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 207 Action reference Sample request https://sample.com/api/xml?action=user-accounts&login=joy@acme.com &password=bigdog Sample response Test Account 2999-12-31T16:00:00.000-08:00 user-transcript-update Availability Breeze 5 Description Overrides the score on an item within a curriculum. For example, you can use user-transcript-update to give a user a score for an external training. This action works only for items within a curriculum, and you need manage permission for the curriculum. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=user-transcript-update &curriculum-id=integer &sco-id=integer &status=allowedValue &score=integer &principal-id=integer &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue account-id Integer The ID of the account the user belongs to. name String The name of the account the user belongs to. date-expired Datetime The date and time the user’s login expires. Element Attribute Type DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 208 Action reference Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Response values Sample request https://example.com/api/xml?action=user-transcript-update &curriculum-id=2006298444&sco-id=2006298445&status=user-passed &principal-id=2006258745&score=100 Sample response See also learning-path-info, learning-path-update Name Type Required Description curriculum-id Integer N The ID of the curriculum. sco-id Integer Y The unique ID of a SCO with a score you want to override. status Allowed value Y A value showing the status of the user’s attempt to use this SCO. Allowed values are completed, incomplete, user-passed, user-failed, and not-attempted. score Integer Y An integer value that represents the score the user has attained on this SCO. principal-id Integer Y The ID of the user whose transcript will be overridden. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library. Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 209 Action reference user-update-pwd Availability Breeze 4 Description Changes a user’s password. A password can be changed in either of these cases: • By an Administrator logged in to the account, with or without the user’s old password • By any Acrobat Connect Pro Server user, with the user’s principal-id number, login name, and old password An Administrator can create rules for valid passwords on the server. These rules might include, for example, the number and types of characters a password must contain. If a user submits a new password that does not adhere to the rules, Acrobat Connect Pro would throw an error showing that the new password is invalid. When you call user-update-pwd, the password is sent over HTTP or HTTPS in hashed form. Request URL http://server_name/api/xml ?action=user-update-pwd &user-id=integer &password-old=string &password=string &password-verify=string &session=BreezeSessionCookieValue Parameters Filters Results cannot be filtered or sorted. Response structure Name Type Required Description user-id Integer Y The ID of the user. password-old String Y/N The user’s current password. Required for regular users, but not for Administrator users. password String Y The new password. password-verify String Y A second copy of the new password, for verification. session String N The value of the BREEZESESSION cookie. Use this parameter if you do not use a client-side cookie management library.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 210 Action reference Response values Sample request This request can be used by an Administrator to change a user’s password without knowing the old password: https://example.com/api/xml?action=user-update-pwd&user-id=12345&password=newone&passwordverify=newone Sample response This response shows that the change was successful: Element Attribute Type Description results Container All results the action returns. status Empty, with attributes The status of the response. code Allowed value A code indicating the response status (see status).211 Chapter 8: Filter and sort reference This chapter is a reference for filters and sort values you use to reduce the volume of the response from XML actions in Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Web Services. filter-definition Description A filter is a special type of parameter that reduces the volume of the response. When you see filter-definition in a request URL syntax, substitute a filter definition. To create a filter definition, start with the keyword filter, add an modifier (if desired), then a field name (if allowed), and then a value, using this syntax: filter-modifier-field=value The modifiers you can add are listed in the following table. The value is case insensitive. For example, either of these filters matches a meeting with the name August All Hands Meeting: &filter-name=August All Hands Meeting &filter-name=august all hands meeting Some modifiers require a field name on which to filter results, for example, name. Other filters do not take a field name. For those filters that accept field names, the allowed fields vary for different actions. Check a specific action in “Action reference” on page 57 to learn which field names you can use in filters. Filter Description filter-field=value Returns all items for which the data in field exactly matches value. filter-like-field=value Returns all items with the string value within field, even if field is not an exact match. filter-out-field=value Filters out or excludes any items with value in field. filter-rows=value Limits the results to the number of rows specified in value. filter-start=value Starts the results at the index number specified in value. filter-gt-datefield=value Selects all items with a date after value. Works only with date fields. The value must be a date in ISO 8601 format. filter-lt-datefield=value Selects all items with a date earlier than value. Works only with date fields. The value must be a date in ISO 8601 format. filter-gte-datefield=value Selects all items with a value infield greater than or equal to value. Works only with date fields. The value must be a date in ISO 8601 format. filter-lte-datefield=value Selects all items with a value in field less than or equal to value. Works only with dates. The date uses ISO 8601 format. filter-ismember=value Selects all principals that are members of a group, specified in a separate parameter. Takes a Boolean value of true or false.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 212 Filter and sort reference Exact match filter filter-name=Goals Review Matches items with Goals Review (or any mixed case pattern of the same string) in the name. Similar match filter filter-like-name=Goals Matches any item that includes Goals (or any mixed case pattern of the same string) in the name, including Goals Review and Quarterly Goals. Exclude items filter filter-out-name=Status Excludes all items with Status (or any mixed case pattern of the same string) in the name. Match and exclude items filter-like-name=Goals&filter-out-status=active Matches any item with Goals (or any mixed case pattern of the same string) in the name that is no longer active. Match a start date filter-gt-date-begin=2005-05-01&sort-name=asc Matches any item with a start date of May 1, 2005, sorting the items in ascending order by name. Match a date range filter-gt-date-begin=2005-05-01&filter-lt-date-begin=2005-05-31 Returns all items with a start date after May 1, 2005 and before May 31, 2005. See also sort-definition sort-definition When you see sort-definition in a request URL in this reference, create a sort filter with a field name and a value describing how you want the results sorted, in this syntax: sort-field=value Replace sort with any of these exact values: sort (for a single sort), sort1 (for the primary sort of two), or sort2 (for a secondary sort on the results returned by sort1). The field variable defines the field you are sorting on. The fields you can use vary by call, so check the API reference for the call you are making. The value is always asc (for ascending) or desc (for descending), defining the sequence of the results. Putting this all together, the parts of a sort filter are shown in the following table:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 213 Filter and sort reference Simple examples of sort-field=value, with one level of sort, look like this: sort-name=asc sort-date=desc The following table gives you more detail on how the sort values asc and desc work: Your results may call for using both primary and secondary sorts with sort1 and sort2. For example, when calling principal-list to list principals, you can do a primary sort on the type field, and then a secondary sort on the name field (this way, all principals of a specific type are grouped together and then sorted by name in each group). You would specify two levels of sort like this: sort1-type=asc&sort2-name=desc See also filter-definition Sort Type Field Value Description sort Vary by call. asc or desc Sort results by the specified field, in either ascending or descending order. sort1 Vary by call. asc or desc Sort results by a field, either ascending or descending, and then pass the results to the next sort. sort2 Vary by call. asc or desc When results returned by the primary sort are equal, such as same name or group, do a secondary sort by the specified field in either ascending or descending order. Value Description asc Ascending order. For alphabetical lists, begin with A and end with Z. For lists ordered by number or date, start with lowest number or earliest date. desc Descending order. For alphabetical lists, begin with Z and end with A. For lists ordered by number or date, start with highest number or most recent date.214 Chapter 9: Common reference This reference section describes XML elements and attributes that are used by more than one action in Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Pro Web Services. The elements described here are referenced from the request and response tables describing actions in the Web Services XML API. All parameter, element, and attribute names and values are case sensitive. For example, name is not the same as Name, and sco-id is not equivalent to sco-ID. You must enter them exactly as shown in this reference. Common XML elements and attributes access Description An attribute describing the level of access a user has to a course or curriculum. Values feature-id Description An attribute describing a feature that either users can use or things that can occur during a meeting. Use feature-id with the meeting-feature-update action. For more information on the pods that can be enabled or disabled, see the Acrobat Connect Pro User Guide. Value Description access-blocked The course or curriculum is restricted and users cannot take it. access-hidden The course or curriculum is restricted, users cannot take it, and it is hidden in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (or the user interface of a custom application, if you use this value). access-open The course or curriculum is open and users can take it. access-optional The course or curriculum is optional. access-pass The user has already taken the course or curriculum and passed it.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 215 Common reference Values Value Description of functionality when value is enabled fid-archive Lets a host start and stop the recording of a meeting. Disabling this setting means that recording settings are not controllable by the host. To set Connect to automatically record all meetings, you must both disable fid-archive and enable fid-archive-force. fid-archive-force Sets all meetings to be recorded upon the start of the meeting. Recorded meetings appear in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. fid-archive-publish-link When meetings are set to be automatically recorded (by enabling fid-archive-force), lets host create a link to the recording in the meeting folder. fid-chat-transcripts Creates a transcript file (one per meeting session) of all text messages exchanged in Chat, Q&A, and IM Pods. fid-meeting-app-sharing Lets host request control of attendee's input device (mouse or keyboard) when attendee is sharing their screen, desktop, or application. fid-meeting-auto-promote Lets hosts enable the option to automatically promote participants to presenters. fid-meeting-breakout Allows users to create breakout meetings. fid-meeting-chat Enables the Chat pod. fid-meeting-chat-clear Automatically clears Chat pod history when a new session of an existing meeting is started. fid-meeting-chat-presenter Lets users send chat messages only to the presenter. fid-meeting-chat-private Lets users send chat messages to specific attendees. fid-meeting-chat-public Lets users send chat messages to all attendees. fid-meeting-desktop-sharing Lets users share their screen (both the complete desktop and individual applications). fid-meeting-dialout Lets users use Call Out and Call Me features. fid-meeting-disclaimer Shows a disclaimer (for example, explaining that the meeting is being recorded) when a user starts or attends any meeting in this account. To proceed with the meeting, the host or attendees must first accept the disclaimer. If a user does not accept, the disclaimer user is returned to the Connect home page. To set the text of the disclaimer, use the meeting-disclaimer-update action. fid-meeting-enhanced-rights Lets host change the access of attendees to specific subfeatures. fid-meeting-file-share Enables the File Share pod. fid-meeting-flv Lets users use FLV files and mp3 files in the meeting. fid-meeting-full-screenaffects-all Enables "Presenter Changes affect everyone" for full-screen mode. Note: this feature does not enable or disable users’ ability to enter full-screen mode. fid-meeting-hold Lets hosts place participants on hold. fid-meeting-host-cursors Lets a host change the display of the host’s cursor. fid-meeting-im Enables the Instant Messages pod. This feature is part of the Acrobat Connect Pro integration with supported Microsoft real-time communication servers. Disable this feature when you want to show the Invitee List pod (fid-meeting-inviteepresence=true) but hide the associated Instant Messages pod. fid-meeting-inviteepresence Enables the Invitee List pod and the associated Instant Messages pod. This feature is part of the Acrobat Connect Pro integration with supported Microsoft real-time communication servers. fid-meeting-manage-link Enables the "Manage Room with Web Manager" link in the meeting menu.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 216 Common reference field Description An element containing information about a custom field defined for an object or principal. fid-meeting-note Enables the Notes pod. fid-meeting-notes-clear Automatically clears Notes pod history when a new session of an existing meeting is started. fid-meeting-pause-annotate Lets users pause during screen sharing and annotate on an overlay white board. fid-meeting-people-list Enables the Attendee List pod. fid-meeting-poll Enables the Poll pod. fid-meeting-pres-only Enables the use of the Presenter-Only area. fid-meeting-pr-mode Enables Preparing Mode, which lets hosts change the meeting layout without affecting other users’ layouts. When the layout is ready, disable this mode to show the layout to all users. fid-meeting-qa-clear Automatically clears Q & A pod history when a new session of an existing meeting is started. fid-meeting-questions Enables the Q & A pod. fid-meeting-room-bg Lets a host change a meeting room background. Backgrounds are typically set in the meeting template. fid-meetings-custom-pods Enables custom pods. fid-meeting-shared-library Lets users select documents from the Content Library while in the Share pod. (This setting doesn't affect the File Share pod.) fid-meeting-shared-upload Lets users upload documents to the Content Library while in the Share pod. (This setting doesn't affect the File Share pod.) fid-meeting-show-talker Lets hosts enable or disable the "Who’s Speaking" area in a meeting. fid-meeting-show-talkerarea Enables the "Who’s Speaking" area. fid-meeting-video Enables the Camera pod. fid-meeting-voip Enables voice controls within the meeting user interface, such as the ability to broadcast audio using VoIP. fid-meeting-web-links Enables the Web Links pod. fid-meeting-white-board Enables use of the white board in the Share pod. fid-start-meeting-button Lets a user start the meeting again after the host ends the meeting. fid-training-openenroll Enables open enrollment, which lets users enroll themselves in a course without approval from the Training Manager. Disabling this feature for an account means that a training manager cannot change the settings of a course in Acrobat Connect Pro Central to let learners enroll without approval. Value Description of functionality when value is enabledUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 217 Common reference Attributes icon Description The symbol used to identify a SCO in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. Values Attribute Type Description permission-id Allowed value The permission needed to access the custom field. See permission-id for valid values. object-type Allowed value A definition for a valid object on the server (see type for values). field-id String A piece of text that identifies the custom field. Acrobat Connect Pro Central does not display the field-id, but various actions return it. account-id Integer An ID for the user who is presently logged in, assigned by the server. display-seq Integer The order in which the custom field is displayed in the user interface or returned by the action. field-type String The type of data the field accepts. Allowed values are text, textarea, and password. is-primary Boolean Whether the custom field can be deleted. true means the field cannot be deleted. false means it can. is-required Boolean Whether the custom field is required. true means a value must be specified for this field in each principal or SCO that uses it. false means values for this field are not required. acl-id Integer The custom field’s ID in an access control list (ACL). custom-seq Integer The sequence number assigned to the custom field in UI display. type String The type of custom field (see type for values). principal-id Integer The ID of the principal for whom the custom field is defined. Value Description archive An archive of an Adobe Acrobat Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. attachment A piece of content uploaded as an attachment. authorware A piece of multimedia content created with Macromedia® Authorware® from Adobe. captivate A demo or movie created with Adobe Captivate™ . course A training course. curriculum A curriculum. external-event An external training that can be added to a curriculum. flv A media file in the FLV file format. html An HTML file. image An image.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 218 Common reference lang Description A two-letter or three-letter code describing a language according to the ISO 639 specifications. ISO 639-1 describes two-letter codes, and ISO 639-2 describes three-letter codes. The language code affects a Acrobat Connect Pro application display, for example, a meeting room or a Acrobat Connect Pro Central display. Values object-type Description An attribute describing the type of a Acrobat Connect Pro object. Values lms-plugin A piece of content from an external learning management system. logos A custom logo used in a meeting room or Acrobat Connect Pro Central. meeting-template A custom look and feel for a meeting. mp3 An MP3 file. pdf An Adobe Portable Document Format file. pod A visual box that provides functionality in a meeting room layout. presentation A presentation created with an earlier version of Adobe Breeze® software. producer A presentation created with Adobe Presenter. seminar A seminar created with Adobe Acrobat Connect Pro Seminars. session One occurrence of a recurring Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. swf A SWF file. Two-Letter Value Three-Letter Value Language en eng English fr fre French (do not use fra) de ger German (do not use deu) ja jpn Japanese ko kor Korean Value Meaning object-type-account An account that contains principals and SCOs. object-type-action An action in the Web Services XML API. object-type-event An Acrobat Connect Pro event. Value DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 219 Common reference path-type Description The path-type attribute describes a type of learning path between two objects in a curriculum, for example, whether one must be completed as a prerequisite to the next. Values permission-id Description The permission-id parameter (or attribute) defines a permission. Depending on the context of the action or response, the permission might be one a principal has on a SCO, or a permission that is needed in order to execute an action. object-type-hidden A SCO that is not visible in Acrobat Connect Pro Central (or in your application, if you use this value). object-type-meeting An Acrobat Connect Pro meeting. object-type-principal A user or group. object-type-readonly A setting indicating that Acrobat Connect Pro Central displays some data, but a user cannot set the data in Acrobat Connect Pro Central. object-type-sco A SCO representing a meeting, course, curriculum, piece of content, folder, or any other object on the server. Value Meaning completion-none The current SCO is not a completion requirement for the curriculum. completion-required The current SCO is a completion requirement. prereq-none The current learning object has no prerequisites. prereq-required The current SCO has a prerequisite that must be completed. prereq-hidden The target learning object is required as a prerequisite. The current learning object is hidden until the target learning object is completed. prereq-suggested The current SCO has a prerequisite that is recommended, not required. preass-blocked The current SCO has a test-out. If the enrollee passes, this item is locked. If the enrollee fails, this item is available. preass-none The current SCO has no test-outs. preass-hidden The current SCO has a test-out. If the user passes, the current SCO can be hidden from the user. If the user fails, the current SCO is visible and the user can enroll. preass-optional The current SCO has a test-out. If the user passes, the current SCO is no longer required to complete the curriculum. Value MeaningUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 220 Common reference Values Special permissions The server defines a special principal, public-access, which combines with values of permission-id to create special access permissions to meetings: • principal-id=public-access and permission-id=view-hidden means the Acrobat Connect meeting is public, and anyone who has the URL for the meeting can enter the room. • principal-id=public-access and permission-id=remove means the meeting is protected, and only registered users and accepted guests can enter the room. • principal-id=public-access and permission-id=denied means the meeting is private, and only registered users and participants can enter the room. quota-ID Description The quota-ID parameter defines a quota in the system. The quota type you specify determines the value of acl-id to use. Values Permission Description view The principal can view, but cannot modify, the SCO. The principal can take a course, attend a meeting as participant, or view a folder’s content. host Available for meetings only. The principal is host of a meeting and can create the meeting or act as presenter, even without view permission on the meeting’s parent folder. mini-host Available for meetings only. The principal is presenter of a meeting and can present content, share a screen, send text messages, moderate questions, create text notes, broadcast audio and video, and push content from web links. remove Available for meetings only. The principal does not have participant, presenter or host permission to attend the meeting. If a user is already attending a live meeting, the user is not removed from the meeting until the session times out. publish Available for SCOs other than meetings. The principal can publish or update the SCO. The publish permission includes view and allows the principal to view reports related to the SCO. On a folder, publish does not allow the principal to create new subfolders or set permissions. manage Available for SCOs other than meetings or courses. The principal can view, delete, move, edit, or set permissions on the SCO. On a folder, the principal can create subfolders or view reports on folder content. denied Available for SCOs other than meetings. The principal cannot view, access, or manage the SCO. Quota type Quota description Corresponding acl-id to use live-user-quota The number of account-wide Meeting Attendees. The account-id of the account. concurrent-user-per-meetingquota The number of concurrent users in one meeting. The tree-id of the user-meetings tree or meetings tree. training-user The number of concurrent Learners for one account. The account-id of the account. num-of-members-quota The number of Authors or Meeting Hosts. The principal-id for either the Authors group or the Meeting Hosts (live-admins), depending on which quota you want to specify.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 221 Common reference status Description A status code returned by Acrobat Connect Pro in the response to all actions in the Web Services XML API. Response structure or Attributes code The status of the response. subcode If present, provides more detail describing the status of the response. For example, subcode values are used to differentiate between different situations in which code is set to noaccess-. Value Description invalid Indicates that a call is invalid in some way. The invalid element provides more detail. no-access Indicates that you don’t have permission to call the action. The subcode attribute provides more details. no-data Indicates that there is no data available (in response to an action that would normally result in returning data). Usually indicates that there is no item with the ID you specified. To resolve the error, change the specified ID to that of an item that exists. ok Indicates that the action has completed successfully. too-much-data Indicates that the action should have returned a single result but is actually returning multiple results. For example, if there are multiple users with the same user name and password, and you call the login action using that user name and password as parameters, the system cannot determine which user to log you in as, so it returns a too-much-data error. Value Description account-expired The customer account has expired. denied Based on the supplied credentials, you don’t have permission to call the action. no-login The user is not logged in. To resolve the error, log in (using the login action) before you make the call. For more information, see login. no-quota The account limits have been reached or exceeded. not-available The required resource is unavailable. not-secure You must use SSL to call this action. pending-activation The account is not yet activated.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 222 Common reference The invalid element An element that gives information describing a status code of invalid. The following table shows the allowed values for subcode when code is invalid. Returned by All actions in the Acrobat Connect Pro Web Services XML API. Samples This is a successful response: This is an invalid response: status attribute Description An attribute that describes a user’s progress with a course or curriculum SCO. It is returned by actions that provide training reports. pending-license The account’s license agreement has not been settled. sco-expired The course or tracking content has expired. sco-not-started The meeting or course has not started. Element Attribute Type Description invalid Empty, with attributes Information about why the call was invalid. field String The name of the request parameter that was incorrect or missing. type Allowed value The type of the incorrect or missing field. subcode Allowed value A code explaining why the request was invalid (see the following table for values). Value Description duplicate The call attempted to add a duplicate item in a context where uniqueness is required. format A passed parameter had the wrong format. illegal-operation The requested operation violates integrity rules (for example, moving a folder into itself). missing A required parameter is missing. no-such-item The requested information does not exist. range The value is outside the permitted range of values. Value DescriptionUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 223 Common reference A curriculum or folder can only have a status of completed or incomplete. The following table shows the allowed values for status when returned in a row element describing a course. Sample Test Course /test/ joy@acme.com 2006-06-30T15:23:55.070-07:00 Joy Smith <% ... breeze = new XMLApiAdapter(breezeBase, login, password, breezesession); breeze.getBreezesession(); session.setAttribute("breezesession", breeze); ... %> Log the user in Note: See the sample files XMLApiAdapter.java and login.jsp. Your application needs a method that logs users in to Acrobat Connect Pro. A login method needs to open a connection to the server, call the login action, and get the XML response. The method also needs to read the value of the BREEZESESSION cookie from the response header and store the value. The simplest form of the login action is: https://example.com/api/xml?action=login&login=joy@example.com &password=jazz You might also need to add session, account-id, or domain parameters to the login action (see Log in from an application for more ways to call login). A successful login returns this response, with a status code of ok: USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 230 Sample application Build the base request URL The login method should first build the base request URL to send to the server. In the sample, the breezeUrl method builds a URL like this: http://example.com/api/xml?action= The method also adds an action name and query string that you pass to it. This is the full method: protected URL breezeUrl(String action, String queryString) throws MalformedURLException { return new URL(getBaseUrl() + "/api/xml?" + "action=" + action + (queryString != null ? ('&' + queryString) : "")); } Send the user’s login information The login method calls the login action, opens the connection to the server, reads the BREEZESESSION cookie from the response header, and then checks for a status code of ok in the response: protected void login() throws XMLApiException { try { if (breezesession != null) logout(); URL loginUrl = breezeUrl("login", "login=" + getLogin() + "&password=" + getPassword()); URLConnection conn = loginUrl.openConnection(); conn.connect(); InputStream resultStream = conn.getInputStream(); Document doc = new SAXBuilder(false).build(resultStream); String breezesessionString = (String) (conn .getHeaderField("Set-Cookie")); StringTokenizer st = new StringTokenizer(breezesessionString, "="); String sessionName = null; USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 231 Sample application if (st.countTokens() > 1) sessionName = st.nextToken(); if (sessionName != null&& sessionName.equals("BREEZESESSION")) { String breezesessionNext = st.nextToken(); int semiIndex = breezesessionNext.indexOf(';'); breezesession = breezesessionNext.substring(0, semiIndex); } Element root = doc.getRootElement(); String status = getStatus(root); if (breezesession == null || !"ok".equalsIgnoreCase(status)) throw new XMLApiException("Could not log into Acrobat Connect Pro."); } catch (IOException ioe) { throw new XMLApiException(IO_ERROR, ioe); } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } Send XML requests Note: See the sample files XMLApiAdapter.java and createmeeting.jsp. Once a user is logged in, it’s useful to have a generic request method that sends a request to the server when you provide an action name and query string. The request method in the sample takes an action and a query string and sends the BREEZESESSION cookie value back to the server in the request header: protected Element request(String action, String queryString) throws XMLApiException { try { if (breezesession == null) login(); URL url = breezeUrl(action, queryString); URLConnection conn = url.openConnection(); conn.setRequestProperty("Cookie", "BREEZESESSION=" + breezesession); conn.connect(); InputStream resultStream = conn.getInputStream(); Document doc = new SAXBuilder(false).build(resultStream); return doc.getRootElement(); } catch (IOException ioe) { throw new XMLApiException("A communication error occurred", ioe); } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException("A parsing error occurred", jde); } } USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 232 Sample application Parse XML responses Note: See the sample file XMLApiAdapter.java. When you send an XML request to Acrobat Connect Pro, the server returns an XML response. You need to parse the response and extract values, including status codes. One way to parse the response is to use XPath to traverse XML elements (see the XPath tutorial at w3schools.com for more information). As an example, this is the response from sco-shortcuts: http://example.com http://example.com ... Extract values The getShortcuts method calls sco-shortcuts and parses the response using XPath. This is an example of how to extract a list of sco elements and the sco-id of each: public List getShortcuts() throws XMLApiException { try { Element e = request("sco-shortcuts", null); List scosXml = XPath.selectNodes(e, "//sco"); List scos = new ArrayList(); XPath id = XPath.newInstance("./@sco-id"); for (Iterator i = scosXml.iterator(); i.hasNext();) { Element s = (Element) i.next(); SCO sco = getSco(id.valueOf(s)); if(null != sco) scos.add(sco); } return scos; } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } Extract a status code Your application also needs to parse both successful and unsuccessful responses for status codes. For example, when a user calls an action without sufficient permission, the error response has a status element with both code and subcode attributes:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 233 Sample application These lines in the createXPaths method parse for the values of code and subcode: codePath = XPath.newInstance("//status/@code"); subcodePath = XPath.newInstance("//status/@subcode"); In the sample, the createXPaths method is called when you create an instance of XMLApiAdapter. The getStatus method then uses codePath and subcodePath to return the code and subcode values, separated by a hyphen: private String getStatus(Element el) throws JDOMException { String code = codePath.valueOf(el); String subcode = subcodePath.valueOf(el); StringBuffer status = new StringBuffer(); if(null != code && code.length() > 0) status.append(code); if(null != subcode && subcode.length() > 0) status.append(" - " + subcode); return status.toString(); } Display user information Note: See the sample files XMLApiAdapter.java, UserInfo.java, and header.jsp. In your user interface, you might want to display information about a user, such as a name, during the user’s login session. You can retrieve simple information about the user by calling common-info after the user logs in, like this: https://example.com/api/xml?action=common-info The response has a user element with information you can display or store in variables to use later: Joy Smith joy@acme.com If you call common-info before the user logs in, the response does not have a user element. Get information about the user In the sample, the getUserInfo method calls common-info and parses the response for the values of name, login, and user-id. The method then stores information about the user in an instance of the UserInfo class, which is a standard bean class with getter and setter methods.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 234 Sample application public UserInfo getUserInfo(String login, String password) throws XMLApiException { try { Element e = request("common-info", "login=" + login + "&password=" + password); XPath name = XPath.newInstance("//user/name"); XPath log = XPath.newInstance("//user/login"); XPath id = XPath.newInstance("//user/@user-id"); UserInfo user = new UserInfo(); user.setLogin(log.valueOf(e)); user.setName(name.valueOf(e)); user.setUserId(id.valueOf(e)); return user; } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } List a user’s meetings You may want to list a user’s meetings in your application. You can choose the meetings to list and the information to display based on your application design. This illustration shows one example of a meeting list: To list a user’s meetings using the XML API, call report-my-meetings with or without a filter. Without a filter, report-my-meetings returns all of a user’s meetings: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings You can add filter-expired=false to return only meetings that are currently in progress and scheduled in the future: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetings&filter-expired=falseUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 235 Sample application Even with a filter, the response is likely to have multiple meeting elements that you need to iterate through and extract data from. A meeting element looks like this: September All Hands Meeting For all company employees example.com /sept15/ 2006-09-15T09:00:00.000-07:00 2006-09-15T18:00:00.000-07:00 false 09:00:00.000 Get the meeting list To get the meeting list in Java, write a method like getMyMeetings, which lists a user’s meetings with a filter as an argument. If you don’t want to use a filter, you can pass null as the filter argument. A meeting is a SCO, so getMyMeetings calls the getSco method to extract values from the response and store them in an instance of SCO.java. public List getMyMeetings(String filter) throws XMLApiException { try { Element meetingDoc = request("report-my-meetings", filter); List list = XPath.selectNodes(meetingDoc, "//meeting"); Iterator meetings = list.iterator(); List result = new ArrayList(); while (meetings.hasNext()) { Element m = (Element) meetings.next(); SCO meeting = getSco(m); result.add(meeting); } return result; } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } The SCO object encapsulates data about the SCO so you can easily retrieve it from a web page (for example, HTML or JSP) in your application. Create and update meetings Note: See the sample files XMLApiAdapter.java and SCO.java. You might also want to allow users to create meetings in your application. To create a meeting, call sco-update with the folder-id of a meetings folder and type=meeting: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update &folder-id=2006258750&description=For all company employees &name=Company All Hands Meeting&type=meeting&lang=en &date-begin=2006-06-16T23:00&date-end=2006-06-16T23:30 The response returns the sco-id of the meeting, which you can extract and store:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 236 Sample application The difference between calling sco-update to create or update a meeting is: • Pass a folder-id to create a meeting. • Pass a sco-id to update an existing meeting. A meeting only has a sco-id if it already exists. Create a meeting In an application, you first need to collect from the user the information needed to create or update the meeting, such as the meeting name, date, time, and so on. With that information, use a method such as updateSco that calls the scoupdate action. In sco-update, be sure to set the type of the SCO to meeting. As an option, you can also set a language code for the meeting room, such as lang=en, for example: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-update&folder-id=2006258750 &description=nov&name=Nov%20All%20Hands%20Meeting&type=meeting&lang=en &date-begin=2006-11-11T09:00&date-end=2006-11-11T17:00 The updateSCO method shows how to implement the sco-update call in Java, once you collect information about the meeting from the user:USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 237 Sample application public String updateSCO(String action, SCO sco) throws XMLApiException { try { StringBuffer sb = new StringBuffer(); Map data = sco.getUpdateFields(); if (CREATE.equals(action)) sb.append("folder-id=" + sco.getFolderId()); else sb.append("sco-id=" + sco.getId()); Iterator iter = data.keySet().iterator(); while (iter.hasNext()) { String key = (String) iter.next(); if (key.indexOf("sco-id") != -1) continue; if (key.indexOf("folder-id") != -1) continue; String value = (String) data.get(key); sb.append("&" + key + "=" + value); } if (null == data.get("type")) throw new XMLApiException("SCO type not defined"); Element e = request("sco-update", sb.toString()); XPath scoId = XPath.newInstance("//results/sco/@sco-id"); if (scoId.valueOf(e) == null) return null; else return scoId.valueOf(e); } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } catch (ParseException pe) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, pe); } } Set meeting access Once you have a sco-id, a meeting needs access. The user who creates the meeting is the host by default and chooses whether the meeting is public or private, set by a combination of permission-id and principal-id in permissions-update. For example, this call makes a meeting public: https://example.com/api/xml?action=permissions-update&acl-id=2006334033 &principal-id=public-access&permission-id=view-hidden Once a user chooses these values, the setPermissions method calls permissions-update to set the meeting access: public void setPermissions(String aclId, String principalId, String permissionId) throws XMLApiException { request("permissions-update", "acl-id=" + aclId + "&principal-id=" + principalId + "&permission-id=" + permissionId); } Display meeting detail Note: See the sample files XMLApiAdapter.java, SCO.java, mymeetings.jsp, and showmeeting.jsp.USING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 238 Sample application Most of the information you want to display about a meeting comes from sco-info: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006334909 The response has many values that you can display, for example: 2006-05-11T12:00:02.000-07:00 2006-05-16T15:22:25.703-07:00 Test Quiz /quiz/ 10 15100.0 6 Get information about a SCO The getSco Java method makes the call to sco-info and parses the result, storing values in variables so that you can display them in a user interface: public SCO getSco(String scoId) throws XMLApiException { try { Element e = scoInfo(scoId); if(!"ok".equalsIgnoreCase(codePath.valueOf(e))) return null; Element sco = (Element) XPath.selectSingleNode(e, "//sco"); ... Construct the URL to the meeting room You also need to create the URL to the meeting room. You can do this with a call to sco-info and another to scoshortcuts: https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-info&sco-id=2006258750 https://example.com/api/xml?action=sco-shortcuts Extract the url-path from the sco-info response. Then, extract the domain-name from the sco-shortcuts response and concatenate the two values: http://example.com .. You can also use a single call to report-my-meetings if the user is logged in and the meeting is in the user’s mymeetings folder: https://example.com/api/xml?action=report-my-meetingsUSING ACROBAT CONNECT PRO 7.5 WEB SERVICES 239 Sample application In this case, extract both the domain-name and url-path from the report-my-meetings response. The scoUrl Java method constructs the URL by calling sco-info to retrieve the url-path and then sco-shortcuts to retrieve the domain-name. In this case, two calls are used so that you do not need to make the assumption that the meeting is in the current user’s my-meetings folder: public String scoUrl(String scoId) throws XMLApiException { try { Element e = request("sco-info", "sco-id=" + scoId); if(!(codePath.valueOf(e).equalsIgnoreCase("ok"))) return ""; XPath xpath = XPath.newInstance("//url-path/text()"); String path = ((Text) xpath.selectSingleNode(e)).getText(); e = request("sco-shortcuts", null); xpath = XPath.newInstance("//domain-name/text()"); String url = ((Text) xpath.selectSingleNode(e)).getText(); return url + "/" + path.substring(1) + "?session=" + breezesession; } catch (JDOMException jde) { throw new XMLApiException(PARSE_ERROR, jde); } } UTILISATION D’ADOBE ACROBAT 9 PRO ® ®Copyright © 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Utilisation d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional pour Windows® et Mac OS If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement, this guide, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by any such license, no part of this guide may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement. The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates or images are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Garamond, the Adobe PDF logo, Acrobat, ActionScript, Buzzword, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, Illustrator, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, MS-DOS, OpenType, OS/2, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries. Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. ITC Zapf Dingbats is a registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. This Work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ The Spelling portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Merriam – Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 2004 IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1992 Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security, Inc. Portions include technology used under license from Autonomy, and are copyrighted. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/). Portions © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Incorporated 1967, 1988. Flash CS3 video compression and decompression is powered by On2 TrueMotion video technology. © 1992-2005 On2 Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://www.on2.com. This product includes software developed by the OpenSymphony Group (http://www.opensymphony.com/). Speech compression and decompression technology licensed from Nellymoser, Inc. (www.nellymoser.com). Sorenson Spark™ video compression and decompression technology licensed from Sorenson Media, Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Portions copyright Focoltone Colour System. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference.iii Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Mise en route Activation et enregistrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Aide et assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Services, téléchargements et extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Nouveautés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Didacticiels de mise en route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Chapitre 2 : Espace de travail Notions de base sur la zone de travail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Personnalisation de la zone de travail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Affichage des pages PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Ajustement de l'affichage des documents PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Grilles, repères et mesures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Organiseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Maintenance du logiciel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Langues non anglo-saxonnes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Acrobat sous Mac OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Chapitre 3 : Création d'un fichier PDF Présentation de la création d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Création d'un fichier PDF simple avec Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Utilisation de l'imprimante Adobe PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Conversion de pages Web au format PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Création d'un fichier PDF avec Acrobat Distiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Polices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Chapitre 4 : Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Combinaison de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Autres options de combinaison de fichiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Réorganisation des pages d'un document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Chapitre 5 : Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Enregistrement d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Exportation d'un fichier PDF vers un autre format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Réutilisation de contenu PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapitre 6 : Collaboration Partage de fichiers et collaboration en temps réel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Préparation d'une révision de fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Lancement d'une révision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Participation à une révision de document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO iv Sommaire Suivi et gestion des révisions de fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Gestion des commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Importation et exportation de commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Flux de tâches d'approbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Chapitre 7 : Formulaires Formulaires - Concepts de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Création et diffusion de formulaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Comportement des champs de formulaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Définition des boutons d'action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Publication interactive de formulaires Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Utilisation des données QuickBooks dans les formulaires (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Chapitre 8 : Protection Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Sélection d'une méthode de protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Protection par mot de passe d'un document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Protection par certificat d'un document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Configuration d'une stratégie de protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Création ou obtention d'une identification numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Suppression du contenu confidentiel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Chapitre 9 : Signatures numériques Signatures numériques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Signature d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Authentification d’une signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Chapitre 10 : Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Fonctions d'accessibilité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Vérification de l'accessibilité d'un document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Création d'un fichier PDF accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Modification de la structure d'un document à l'aide des panneaux Contenu et Balises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Chapitre 11 : Modification d'un document PDF Vignettes et signets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Liens et pièces jointes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Actions et écriture de scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Conversion de pages Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Modification de texte et d'objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Configuration d'une présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO v Sommaire Propriétés et métadonnées de document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Calques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Traitement par lot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Utilisation d'un document PDF géographique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Chapitre 12 : Recherche et indexation Recherche dans des fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Création d'un index PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chapitre 13 : Multimédia et modèles 3D Multimédia et fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Ajout d'un modèle 3D à un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Manipulation de modèles 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Chapitre 14 : Gestion des couleurs Définition de la gestion des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Homogénéité des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Gestion des couleurs des images importées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Vérification des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour l’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Utilisation des profils colorimétriques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Paramètres de couleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 Chapitre 15 : Impression Tâches d’impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Autres méthodes d'impression d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Impression d'impression personnalisés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Paramètres d'impression avancés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Impression Couleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Chapitre 16 : Outils d'impression professionnelle Outils pour une impression de qualité supérieure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Recouvrement des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Aperçu de la sortie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Conversion des couleurs et gestion des encres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Repères d'impression et filets maigres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Aplatissement de la transparence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Chapitre 17 : Contrôle en amont Analyse du document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Affichage des résultats du contrôle en amont, des objets et des ressources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 Rapports de contrôle en amont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514 Contrôles avancés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Profils de contrôle en amont . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Vérifications supplémentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Correction des zones problématiques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Fichiers conformes aux normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO vi Sommaire Automatisation de l'analyse d'un document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Modes de sortie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 Chapitre 18 : Format JDF A propos des fichiers JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Affichage des définitions de travaux JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Création d'une définition de travail JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Modification d'une définition de travail JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Définition des informations de contact d'un travail d'impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543 Définition des spécifications du support d'un travail d'impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Ajout et suppression de définitions de travaux JDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Conversion d'un fichier de définition de travail au format HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Envoi d'un travail d'impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 Chapitre 19 : Raccourcis clavier Raccourcis clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5541 Chapitre 1 : Mise en route Avant de commencer à vous servir de votre logiciel, prenez le temps de lire la présentation relative à l'activation et aux nombreuses ressources à votre disposition. Vous avez accès à des vidéos d'explication, des modules externes, des modèles, des communautés d'utilisateurs, des séminaires, des didacticiels, des flux RSS, et bien plus encore. Activation et enregistrement Activation de la licence (Windows) Lors du processus d'installation, votre logiciel Adobe peut tenter de contacter Adobe afin d'achever le processus d'activation de la licence. Lors de cette opération, aucune donnée personnelle ne sera transmise. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation du produit, consultez le site Web d'Adobe à l'adresse http://www.adobe.com/go/activation_fr. L'activation d'une licence monoutilisateur prend en charge deux ordinateurs. Par exemple, vous pouvez installer le produit sur un ordinateur de bureau de votre lieu de travail et sur un ordinateur portable utilisé à votre domicile. Si vous souhaitez installer le logiciel sur un troisième ordinateur, vous devez le désactiver au préalable sur l'un des deux autres ordinateurs. Sélectionnez Aide > Désactiver. Enregistrement Enregistrez votre produit afin de bénéficier, gratuitement, d'une aide à l'installation, de notifications de mises à jour, ainsi que d'autres services. ? Pour procéder à l'enregistrement, suivez les instructions affichées dans la boîte de dialogue d'enregistrement qui s'affiche après l'installation et l'activation du logiciel. Si vous n'enregistrez pas votre produit immédiatement, vous pouvez le faire à tout moment en sélectionnant Aide > Enregistrement. Programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe (Windows) Après un certain nombre d'utilisations de votre logiciel Adobe, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour vous inviter à participer au programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe. Si vous accepter d'y participer, des données relatives à votre utilisation du logiciel seront envoyées à Adobe. Aucune information personnelle n'est enregistrée ou transmise. Le programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe a pour unique objectif de recueillir des informations sur les fonctions et les outils du logiciel que vous utilisez et selon quelle fréquence. Vous pouvez rejoindre ou quitter le programme d'amélioration à tout moment : • Pour participer, choisissez Aide > Options du programme d'amélioration, puis cliquez sur Oui. • Pour mettre fin à votre participation, choisissez Aide > Options du programme d'amélioration, puis cliquez sur Non, je ne souhaite pas participer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 2 Mise en route Assistant de personnalisation Adobe L'assistant de personnalisation d'Adobe 9 aide les professionnels de l'informatique à mieux contrôler le déploiement d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional et d'Adobe Reader®. Grâce à lui, vous pouvez personnaliser le programme d'installation et les fonctions de l'application avant son déploiement. L'assistant de personnalisation est un utilitaire téléchargeable gratuitement. Grâce son interface graphique avec le programme d'installation Windows pour Acrobat, l'assistant de personnalisation permet aux administrateurs informatiques d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Optimiser le comportement du programme d'installation :installation silencieuse, prédéfinition des numéros de série, redémarrage, installation multilingue et choix de configurations personnalisées • Personnaliser les préférences clés de l'application : désactivation des mises à jour automatiques, ajout et définition d'options de travail par défaut et personnalisation des paramètres de collaboration et de sécurité • Empêcher la modification de certaines préférences par l'utilisateur Lisez-moi Le disque d'installation peut contenir un fichier Lisezmoi (Windows) ou Ouvrez-moi (Mac OS) relatif au logiciel. Ouvrez le fichier pour consulter des informations importantes sur des rubriques telles que les suivantes : • Configuration système • Installation (dont la désinstallation du logiciel) • Activation et enregistrement • Support technique • Informations juridiques Aide et assistance Aide communautaire L'aide communautaire est un environnement intégré sur adobe.com offrant un accès au contenu créé par la communauté et géré par Adobe et les experts du secteur. Les utilisateurs y fournissent des commentaires et des évaluations qui peuvent vous orienter vers les réponses souhaitées. L'aide communautaire s'appuie sur un certain nombre de ressources, notamment : • Vidéos, didacticiels, conseils et techniques, blogs, articles et exemples à l'intention des développeurs et des ingénieurs. • L'aide en ligne complète du produit, mise à jour régulièrement par l'équipe Adobe chargée de la documentation. • Tout le reste du contenu se trouve sur Adobe.com, notamment les articles de la base de connaissances, les téléchargements et les mises à jour, Developer Connection, et bien plus encore. Utilisez le champ de recherche dans l'aide de votre produit pour accéder directement à l'aide communautaire ou rendez-vous sur www.adobe.fr/support/acrobat pour accéder à la page d'aide et de support du produit, un portail menant à tous les contenus d'aide concernant votre logiciel. Les sites que le moteur de recherche de l'aide communautaire permet d'explorer sont spécifiquement choisis et leur qualité est vérifiée par Adobe et les experts de la communauté Adobe. Ces experts veillent également à ce que les premiers résultats d'une recherche renvoient à différents types de contenus, dont des références à l'aide en ligne du produit.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 3 Mise en route Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'aide communautaire, voir http://help.adobe.com/en_US/CommunityHelp/. Une vidéo présentant l'aide communautaire est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4117_xp_fr. Aide du produit Adobe fournit un guide complet sur l'utilisation d'Acrobat sous la forme d'une aide en ligne et d'un document PDF. Lorsque vous effectuez une recherche dans l'aide communautaire, les rubriques de l'aide en ligne sont répertoriés dans les résultats. Si vous souhaitez consulter ou effectuer une recherche dans l'aide en ligne du produit uniquement, vous pouvez y accéder en cliquant sur le lien Aide du produit situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la page d'aide et d'assistance. Veillez à sélectionner l'option Ce système d'aide uniquement sur la page d'aide avant de lancer votre recherche. Le menu Aide au sein du produit ouvre une aide locale, sous-ensemble du contenu disponible dans l'aide en ligne du produit. Comme cette aide locale n'est pas aussi complète et à jour que l'aide en ligne, Adobe recommande d'utiliser la version PDF de cette dernière si vous souhaitez la consulter hors connexion. Vous pouvez télécharger la version PDF de l'aide en ligne complète en deux endroits : • La page d'aide et d'assistance du produit (dans le coin supérieur droit de la page) • L'aide sur le Web (en haut de l'interface d'aide) Pour plus d'informations sur l'accès à l'aide du produit, http://help.adobe.com/en_US/CommunityHelp/. Ressources d'assistance Consultez le site Web d’assistance technique d’Adobe, à l’adresse www.adobe.com/fr/support, pour en savoir plus sur les options d’assistance technique gratuites et payantes. Services, téléchargements et extras Vous pouvez optimiser votre produit en y intégrant divers services, modules externes et extensions. Vous pouvez également télécharger des exemples et autres éléments qui vous aideront dans votre travail. Services créatifs en ligne Adobe Adobe® Creative Suite® 4 s’enrichit de nouvelles fonctionnalités en ligne qui vous permettent d’exploiter toute la puissance du Web à partir de votre Bureau. Vous pourrez utiliser ces fonctionnalités pour vous mettre en contact et collaborer avec des membres de la communauté, tout en tirant le meilleur parti de vos outils Adobe. Extrêmement puissants, les services créatifs en ligne vous permettent de réaliser un vaste éventail de tâches, de la mise en correspondance de couleurs à l’échange de données en direct. Ces services s’intègrent de manière transparente aux applications bureautiques afin que vous puissiez rapidement améliorer les flux de production existants. Certains services offrent des fonctionnalités complètes ou partielles même lorsque vous êtes hors ligne. Consultez le site adobe.com pour en savoir plus sur les services disponibles. Certaines applications de la suite Creative Suite 4 intègrent les fonctions suivantes : Panneau Kuler™ Créez, partagez et découvrez des thèmes de couleurs en ligne. Adobe® ConnectNow Travaillez en étroite collaboration avec des groupes de travail dispersés sur le Web, et partagez voix, données et contenu multimédia.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 4 Mise en route Resource Central Accédez instantanément à des didacticiels, des fichiers d’exemple et des extensions pour les applications vidéo numériques Adobe. Adobe Exchange Visitez le site Adobe Exchange à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/exchange_fr pour télécharger des exemples, ainsi que des milliers de modules externes et d’extensions fournis par Adobe et des développeurs tiers. Ces modules externes et extensions peuvent vous aider à automatiser des tâches, à personnaliser des processus et à créer des effets professionnels spécifiques, entre autres. Téléchargements Adobe Rendez-vous sur le site www.adobe.com/go/downloads_fr pour bénéficier gratuitement des mises à jour, des versions d'essai et d'autres logiciels utiles. Adobe Labs Le site Adobe Labs à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/labs_fr vous permet de découvrir et d'évaluer les nouveaux produits et technologies développés par Adobe. Adobe Labs vous donne accès à un éventail de ressources : • Préversions de logiciels et technologies à venir • Echantillons de code et méthodes conseillées pour accélérer votre apprentissage • Préversions de la documentation technique et produit • forums, contenu Wiki et autres ressources de collaboration pour vous aider à interagir avec des développeurs qui partagent vos opinions. Adobe Labs favorise la mise en place d'un processus de développement de logiciels axé sur la collaboration. Dans cet environnement, les clients utilisant de nouveaux produits et technologies deviennent rapidement productifs. Adobe Labs comprend également un forum permettant de recueillir les premiers commentaires. L’équipe de développement Adobe s’appuie sur ces commentaires pour créer des logiciels répondant aux besoins et aux attentes de la communauté. Adobe TV Le canal Adobe TV disponible à l’adresse http://tv.adobe.com/fr propose des vidéos permettant de parfaire ses connaissances ou de trouver une source d’inspiration. Suppléments Le disque d’installation contient divers extras qui vous permettront de profiter pleinement des fonctionnalités de votre logiciel Adobe. Certains extras sont installés sur votre ordinateur au cours du processus d’installation, tandis que d’autres sont disponibles sur le disque. Pour afficher les extras installés avec le logiciel, accédez au dossier de l’application sur votre ordinateur. • Windows® : [disque de démarrage]\Program Files\Adobe\[application Adobe] • Mac OS® : [disque de démarrage]/Applications/[application Adobe] Pour afficher les extras disponibles sur le disque, accédez au dossier Goodies pour la langue de votre choix sur le disque. Exemple: • /English/Goodies/UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 5 Mise en route Nouveautés Création de fichiers PDF, modification et recherche Unification d'une large gamme de contenus dans un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez combiner des documents, des dessins, des messages électroniques et des feuilles de calcul en un porte-documents PDF unique et compressé. Utilisez des modèles de conception professionnels, personnalisables pour y intégrer votre logo, et comprenant des descriptions qui aideront les destinataires à parcourir le contenu du document. Conversion de documents papier au format PDF La nouvelle technologie de reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) et la prise en charge d'une gamme plus étendue de scanners améliorent les possibilités de recherche et l'aspect des documents numérisés. Voir « Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF » à la page 69. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF La méthode de capture Web améliorée vous permet de convertir des pages Web complètes ou seulement les sections qui vous intéressent, et d'y inclure ou non les supports multimédia interactifs. Les versions PDF de pages Web sont faciles à imprimer, à archiver, à annoter et à partager. Voir « Conversion de pages Web au format PDF » à la page 98 Conversion de documents à partir des nouvelles versions de Lotus Notes et d'AutoCAD Acrobat prend désormais en charge Lotus Note 8.5 ; Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended prennent en charge AutoCAD 2009. Comparaison de documents PDF Acrobat Met automatiquement en surbrillance les différences de texte et d’images entre deux versions d’un document PDF. Cela permet d’identifier rapidement les modifications apportées à la nouvelle version. Voir « Comparaison d'un fichier PDF révisé à une version antérieure » à la page 40. Recherche dans plusieurs fichiers PDF Grâce à aux améliorations apportées à la fonction de recherche, vous pouvez parcourir plusieurs fichiers PDF stockés dans un même dossier afin de trouver rapidement les informations dont vous avez besoin. Collaboration Révisions partagées sur Acrobat.com Les participants téléchargent le fichier à partir d'Acrobat.com, puis y ajoutent des commentaires et des données dans Acrobat ou Adobe Reader. Lorsqu'ils ont terminé, ils publient les commentaires ou envoient leur réponse sur le site Acrobat.com. Si vous utilisez Acrobat.com pour les révisions partagées, vous pouvez aussi autoriser les réviseurs à ouvrir et partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. Voir « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 167. Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne Adobe ConnectNow, outil personnel de conférence sur le Web, permet de mener des réunions en temps réel à partir de votre ordinateur. Les participants rejoignent la réunion en se connectant à l'espace de réunion sur le Web, à partir de leur propre ordinateur. Au cours d'une réunion en ligne ConnectNow, vous pouvez partager votre PC, mener des conversations en direct, partager des tableaux blancs en ligne et utiliser de nombreuses fonctions de collaboration. Voir « Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne » à la page 162. Téléchargement et partage de documents volumineux via Acrobat.com A partir d'Acrobat ou de Reader, vous pouvez créer votre propre compte utilisateur sur Acrobat.com. Acrobat.com permet de télécharger et de partager la plupart des types de document, mais aussi de partager des fichiers PDF ou votre PC dans le cadre de réunions en ligne. Voir « Partage de documents » à la page 160. Synchronisation des vues d'un document Assurez-vous que vos collègues, clients et partenaires consultent la même page au même moment grâce à la fonction de conavigation des documents. Utilisez la collaboration en direct pour clarifier des points, enrichir la discussion et guider en temps réel les participants dans un document. Voir « Collaboration sur un document PDF » à la page 161.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 6 Mise en route Formulaires Création et modification simplifiée de formulaires électroniques (Windows) Utilisez le nouvel assistant de création de formulaires pour convertir des fichiers Microsoft® Word et Excel ou des documents papier numérisés en formulaires PDF. Les champs de formulaire sont automatiquement reconnus et convertis en champs à remplir. Ajoutez rapidement des champs de formulaires, modifiez-les et nommez-les. Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour vérifier quels formulaires ont été remplis et par qui. Voir « Création d'un formulaire » à la page 208. Recueil et exportation des données de formulaire Recueillez facilement les données des utilisateurs et exportez-les vers une feuille de calcul pour les analyser et créer un rapport. Voir « Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire » à la page 240. Suivi des formulaires Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour vérifier quels formulaires ont été remplis et par qui. Voir « A propos du suivi des formulaires » à la page 243. Utilisation de données QuickBooks dans les formulaires (Windows en anglais uniquement) Importez et exportez des données Intuit QuickBooks à l'aide de modèles personnalisés. Voir « Utilisation des données QuickBooks dans les formulaires (Windows) » à la page 239. Multimédia et modèles 3D Isoler les pièces d'un assemblage Afficher les valeurs géométriques, données PMI et affichage des données PMI d'une pièce isolée et masquer ou déselectionner les éléments de toutes les autres pièces Voir « Masquage, isolement et modification de l'aspect des pièces » à la page 419 Insertion de contenu Flash dans un fichier PDF Insérez des vidéos et des animations Flash® dans vos documents PDF. La prise en charge native de Flash permet de lire ces contenus sur toutes les plates-formes. Aucun lecteur multimédia supplémentaire n'est nécessaire. Voir « Ajout d'un fichier multimédia à un document PDF » à la page 403. Ajout de commentaires à une vidéo Ajoutez des commentaires à une vidéo en cours de lecture. Chacun de ces commentaires est joint à une image précise. Ainsi, lorsque vous consultez les commentaires, ils apparaissent en contexte. Vous pouvez aussi activer la fonction de commentaires dans les vidéos pour les utilisateurs d'Acrobat Standard et d'Adobe Reader. Voir « Ajout de commentaires à une vidéo » à la page 407. Affichage et interaction avec des cartes au format PDF Effectuez des recherches et des mesures dans des cartes géographiques au format PDF et insérez des annotations. Identifiez la longitude et la latitude d'un lieu en positionnant le curseur à l'endroit voulu. Effectuez des mesures en kilomètres ou en miles. Voir « Utilisation d'un document PDF géographique » à la page 384. Signatures numériques Amélioration de la validation des signatures à long terme Incorporez la chaîne de certificat, l'état de révocation et l'horodatage après la création de la signature. Autorisez l'utilisation de tampons temporels valables même s'ils sont obsolètes. Voir « Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme » à la page 294. Création d'une encre signature Ajoutez une simple signature manuscrite sur une page. Voir « Signature d'un fichier PDF » à la page 289 Copyright Recherche et biffure Effectuez des recherches et biffez une liste de mots, des expressions ou une suite particulière de caractères (par exemple, des numéros de téléphone, des numéros de cartes bancaires, des adresses électroniques ou des dates). Voir « Recherche et biffure de mots » à la page 280.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 7 Mise en route Numérotation Bates dans un porte-documents PDF Lors de la désignation des documents pour la numérotation Bates, vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers PDF, des porte-documents et tout fichier d'un format autre convertible au format PDF. Le processus est alors le suivant : les fichiers d'un autre format sont convertis au format PDF, puis la numérotation Bates est appliquée au fichier PDF ainsi obtenu. Si vous appliquez la numérotation Bates au portedocuments, tous les fichiers du porte-documents qui ne sont pas au format PDF sont remplacés par leur version PDF numérotée. Voir « Ajout d'un en-tête ou d'un pied de page Bates » à la page 136. Professionnel de la création Améliorations de l'aperçu de la sortie Utilisez l'inspecteur de l'objet pour examiner rapidement le contenu d'un document. Les informations affichées concernent l'ensemble du contenu se trouvant à l'endroit où vous cliquez. Améliorations du contrôle en amont Vérifiez la conformité à la norme PDF/E et enregistrez des documents dans ce format. Effectuez des vérifications et des corrections sur une sélection d'objets. Affichez des rapports améliorés. Améliorations de la conversion des couleurs Définissez l'espace de fusion de la transparence. Mettez à jour le mappage des couleurs à l'aide de la bibliothèque Pantone. Convertissez facilement les couleurs grâce à la nouvelle conception. Didacticiels de mise en route Les didacticiels de cette rubrique vous guident pas à pas dans la prise en main d'Acrobat 9. Vous pouvez ainsi vous familiariser avec les fonctionnalités de l'application : création de documents PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker, partage de documents avec des collègues à des fins de révision et de discussion, création de formulaires électroniques interactifs, assemblage de documents de formats variés dans un porte-documents et apposition de signatures numériques sécurisées sur les documents. Pour découvrir d'autres didacticiels et vidéos présentant toutes les possibilités qu'offre Acrobat, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Exploration des fonctions clés d'Acrobat 9: www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_portfolio_pro_fr • A quoi sert Acrobat ?: www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4200_a9_fr • Présentation d'Acrobat 9: www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4081_a9_fr • Utilisation de plusieurs applications dans un processus créatif : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4205_a9_fr • Utilisation de plusieurs applications dans un processus professionnel : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4204_a9_fr Création d'un fichier PDF Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat PDFMaker (Windows) Convertissez vos documents d'entreprise en fichiers Adobe PDF en un seul clic. Acrobat PDFMaker simplifie la conversion des documents au format PDF dans plusieurs applications de bureautique, telles que la suite Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes. PDFMaker, installé en même temps qu'Acrobat, a pour fonction de gérer automatiquement les applications compatibles. 1 Créez votre document. Concevez et finalisez le document dans une application source prenant en charge PDFMaker. Enregistrez le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 8 Mise en route Document dans une application pouvant être converti au format Adobe PDF 2 Sélectionnez les paramètres de conversion PDF. Dans l'application source, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. Si vous utilisez Lotus Notes, choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. Si vous utilisez une application Microsoft Office 2007, cliquez sur Préférences dans le ruban Acrobat. Dans la zone Paramètres PDFMaker de la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sélectionnez le paramètre PDF prédéfini qui convient dans le menu Paramètres de conversion. Le paramètre PDF prédéfini détermine le taux de compression du fichier, la résolution d'image, l'incorporation ou non des polices et différentes autres valeurs de conversion PDF. Si vous préparez un document à des fins d'impression professionnelle, optez pour le paramètre prédéfini Impression de qualité supérieure ou Qualité optimale. Si le document que vous préparez est destiné uniquement à être consulté en ligne, choisissez Taille de fichier minimale. Le paramètre par défaut Qualité standard convient dans de nombreux cas d'utilisation en entreprise ou lors de la sortie des documents sur une imprimante de bureau. Paramètres de création des fichiers PDFUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 9 Mise en route Après avoir sélectionné les paramètres de conversion, ceux-ci seront appliqués chaque fois que vous créerez un fichier PDF à partir de cette application et tant que vous ne les modifierez pas. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres de l'application. Dans la zone Configuration de l'application de la boîte de dialogue, indiquez si vous souhaitez inclure les signets, les liens hypertexte, les fonctions d'accessibilité et d'autres options. Cliquez sur l'onglet de l'application (onglet Word, par exemple) pour afficher les options propres à votre application. Dans Word, par exemple, il est possible de convertir les notes de bas de page et les liens. Dans Visio (pris en charge dans Acrobat 9 Professional Extended et Acrobat 9 Professional), il est possible de configurer l'aplatissement des calques. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker. Paramètres spécifiques à l'application pour la création des fichiers PDF 4 Créez le fichier PDF. Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF dans la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou, dans Microsoft Office 2007, cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF sur le ruban Acrobat. Vous pouvez transmettre automatiquement le fichier PDF par voie électronique ou l'envoyer pour révision, en utilisant les autres commandes disponibles dans le menu Adobe PDF. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez un nom et spécifiez un emplacement pour le fichier PDF. Selon l'application utilisée et les paramètres définis, il est possible que vous soyez invité à sélectionner d'autres options au cours de la création du fichier PDF. Vous pouvez également convertir des pages Web au format PDF directement depuis Internet Explorer. Pour ce faire, visitez un site Web à l'aide du navigateur Internet Explorer, puis cliquez sur le bouton Convertir dans la barre d'outils.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 10 Mise en route Collaboration Initiation d'une révision partagée Dans une révision partagée, tous les participants ont la possibilité de consulter les commentaires et d'y répondre. Cela permet aux réviseurs de résoudre les éventuels conflits d'opinion, d'identifier les idées qui méritent d'être approfondies et de développer des solutions créatives pendant la phase de révision. Vous pouvez héberger une révision partagée sur un dossier du réseau, un serveur WebDAV, un espace de travail SharePoint ou Acrobat.com (un nouveau service Web sécurisé). Tout ce dont vous avez besoin est Acrobat, un fichier PDF et un ID Adobe disponible gratuitement. 1 Préparez le document PDF. Enregistrez le document PDF à faire réviser par les participants. Si vous souhaitez attirer l'attention des participants sur des questions ou des sujets spécifiques, n'hésitez pas à ajouter des commentaires dans le document PDF. 2 Envoyez le document PDF en révision partagée. Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer en révision partagée. Acrobat ouvre l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Vous pouvez partager tout document susceptible d'être complété par des commentaires. Si les paramètres de protection du document empêchent la saisie de commentaires, Acrobat vous le signale. 3 Sélectionnez la façon dont vous souhaitez recueillir les commentaires. Indiquez comment vous comptez publier le fichier PDF et recueillir les commentaires des réviseurs. Choisissez Télécharger et suivre automatiquement les commentaires via Acrobat.com si vous préférez utiliser Acrobat.com pour partager la révision. Choisissez Recueillir automatiquement les commentaires sur le serveur interne pour utiliser un serveur réseau, un serveur WebDAV ou un espace de travail SharePoint. Pour gérer les commentaires, laissez-vous guider par l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Si vous hébergez le fichier PDF sur votre propre serveur, sélectionnez le type du serveur et précisez son chemin d'accès. Si vous hébergez le fichier PDF sur Acrobat.com, saisissez votre ID Adobe. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID Adobe, cliquez sur Créer un ID Adobe pour en définir un dans Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 11 Mise en route 4 Invitez les réviseurs. Saisissez les adresses électroniques des personnes que vous souhaitez mettre à contribution ou sélectionnez-les dans votre carnet d'adresses électroniques. Personnalisez à présent le message destiné aux réviseurs. Fixez une échéance pour la révision. Une fois la date limite atteinte, les outils de commentaire ne seront plus disponibles sur le serveur de la révision partagée. Si vous utilisez Acrobat 9 Professional Extended ou Acrobat 9 Professional, les utilisateurs Adobe Reader peuvent participer à la révision partagée. Préparation de l'invitation à la révision 5 Envoyez le fichier PDF. Cliquez sur Envoyer pour publier le fichier PDF sur le serveur et transmettre les invitations électroniques aux participants. Acrobat enregistre une copie du fichier en révision partagée (portant le suffixe “_révision”) au même emplacement. Une fois la procédure de révision partagée commencée, vous pouvez lire les commentaires et y répondre sur le serveur de révision partagée. Vous êtes libre, cependant, de consulter tous les commentaires à la fin de la révision. Servez-vous de la fonction Suivi des révisions, dans Acrobat, pour identifier les auteurs des commentaires, envoyer des rappels aux réviseurs par voie électronique ou changer l'échéance. Activation de la collaboration en direct Il est possible de réviser un document PDF en direct avec un ou plusieurs collègues via Acrobat.com. La fonction de collaboration en direct permet de partager des pages de façon à présenter le même contenu simultanément à tous les réviseurs. Servez-vous de la fenêtre de conversation en direct pour parler du document présenté avec vos collègues. Vous êtes libre d'inviter tout utilisateur disposant d'Acrobat 9 ou de Reader 9 à participer à une discussion en direct.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 12 Mise en route Remarque : La fonction de collaboration en direct n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. 1 Préparez le document. Créez et enregistrez le document qui sera le sujet de la discussion en direct. S'il n'est pas encore au format PDF, convertissez-le à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF, d'Acrobat PDFMaker (Windows) ou des commandes de création de fichier PDF dans Acrobat. Ouvrez le document PDF dont vous souhaitez discuter dans Acrobat. 2 Démarrez la collaboration. Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Envoyer et collaborer en direct. Connectez-vous à Acrobat.com, si vous y êtes invité. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID Adobe, créez-en un. Exécutez l'assistant Envoyer et collaborer en direct pour ouvrir une session de conversation en direct. 3 Invitez les participants. Saisissez les adresses électroniques des collègues avec lesquels vous souhaitez collaborer, en séparant chaque adresse par un point-virgule ou un retour chariot. Vous pouvez également ajouter les adresses électroniques à partir du carnet d'adresses électroniques de votre programme de messagerie (Microsoft Outlook, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 13 Mise en route Préparation de l'invitation à la collaboration Modifiez l'objet et le contenu du message pour personnaliser l'invitation électronique en fonction de la collaboration envisagée. Pour publier le document sur Acrobat.com, choisissez Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.com et envoyer un lien aux destinataires. Sélectionnez un niveau d'accès pour déterminer les personnes habilitées à accéder au document depuis Acrobat.com. Si vous omettez de sélectionner Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.com, Acrobat envoie le document aux participants sous forme de pièce jointe. Le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche dans le document. 4 Attendez que les autres participants rejoignent la session en cours. Pour partager des pages ou discuter en ligne, une autre personne au moins doit être présente. A l'aide d'Acrobat 9 ou de Reader 9, il suffit aux participants de cliquer sur la pièce jointe ou de cliquer sur l'URL dans l'invitation pour rejoindre la session de collaboration. Après avoir ouvert la session avec leurs ID Adobe et mot de passe respectifs ou rejoint la session en tant qu'invités, les participants doivent cliquer deux fois sur le document PDF pour l'ouvrir. Participants rejoignant la session 5 Partagez les pages. Dès qu'une autre personne au moins participe à la session de collaboration en direct, vous pouvez synchroniser les vues de la page de façon à ce que la même page soit visible par tous. Pour mettre des pages en commun, cliquez sur le bouton Commencer le partage de page. Pour interrompre la mise en commun des pages, cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter le partage de page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 14 Mise en route 6 Discutez en ligne. Pour discuter du document, saisissez les messages de conversation dans la zone prévue à cet effet en bas du navigateur Collaboration en direct. Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour sélectionner la couleur de votre texte de conversation. Pour conserver un historique des conversations, choisissez Enregistrer la conversation dans le menu Options du navigateur. Envoyez des messages instantanés aux participants. Formulaires Création d'un formulaire interactif Vous pouvez convertir n'importe quel formulaire en un formulaire interactif que les utilisateurs doivent remplir et renvoyer sous forme électronique. Commencez par numériser un formulaire papier ou créez un document de formulaire. 1 Créez le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez numériser directement un document papier dans Acrobat (choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner). Vous pouvez également convertir un document électronique au format PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat PDFMaker, de l'imprimante Adobe PDF ou de la commande Créer un fichier PDF d'Acrobat. 2 Utilisez l'assistant de création de formulaire pour générer automatiquement les champs du formulaire. Choisissez Formulaires > Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire. Suivez les instructions de l'assistant et cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Bienvenue dans le mode de modification de formulaire. Lorsque vous exécutez l'assistant, Acrobat analyse le document et crée automatiquement les champs du formulaire électronique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 15 Mise en route L'assistant de création ou de modification de formulaire génère automatiquement les champs du formulaire. 3 Vérifiez les champs du formulaire créés par Acrobat. Acrobat répertorie les champs de formulaire générés dans le panneau Champs. Passez en revue le document pour déterminer si Acrobat a oublié des champs ou créé des champs en trop. Pour supprimer un champ, sélectionnez-le dans le panneau Champs et appuyez sur Supprimer. Acrobat a omis les boutons radio Oui et Non. 4 Ajoutez les champs de formulaire et modifiez-les à votre guise.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 16 Mise en route Ajoutez les champs de formulaire aux endroit désirés. Dans le document PDF, vous pouvez insérer des champs de texte, des cases à cocher, des zones de liste, des listes déroulantes, des boutons radio, des boutons d'action, des champs de signature numérique et même des codes à barres. Sélectionnez le type de champ de formulaire dans la liste Ajouter un champ située dans la barre d'outils Formulaires, puis cliquez à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le champ. Attribuez au nouveau champ un nom unique et évocateur. Ce nom n'est pas visible par les utilisateurs du formulaire, mais sert à identifier le champ si vous manipulez les données au sein de bases de données ou de feuilles de calcul. Cliquez sur Afficher toutes les propriétés dans la boîte de dialogue du nom de champ pour apporter d'autres modifications. Vous êtes libre de modifier l'aspect d'un champ, de configurer un champ de texte afin d'autoriser plusieurs lignes de texte, de créer un libellé pour les utilisateurs ou de définir d'autres propriétés. Pour modifier un champ, assurez-vous que vous êtes en mode d'édition du formulaire, puis cliquez deux fois sur le champ. Pour passer en mode d'édition du formulaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. Pour prévisualiser le formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu dans la barre d'outils Formulaires. Edition des champs de formulaire 5 Enregistrez le formulaire. Prenez soin d'enregistrer le formulaire avec tous les champs que vous avez inclus. Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous pour enregistrer le formulaire sous un nom différent de manière à conserver le document statique original.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 17 Mise en route Porte-documents PDF Création d'un porte-documents PDF Cette opération permet d'organiser rapidement tous les fichiers relatifs à un projet dans un porte-documents PDF cohérent. Il peut s'agir de documents de texte, de messages électroniques, de feuilles de calcul, de dessins de CAO, de présentations PowerPoint, de vidéos, de documents PDF ou bien d'autres types de fichier. Il est inutile de convertir les documents composant le lot au format PDF ; vous pouvez modifier chaque composant séparément sans que cela n'ait d'impact sur le porte-document PDF. 1 Créez le porte-documents PDF. Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF. La barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF s'affiche sous la barre de menus ; Acrobat affiche cette barre d'outils dès que vous ouvrez un porte-documents PDF. Dans Acrobat Professional 9 et Acrobat Professional Extended 9, le panneau de modification du porte-documents figure à droite de la fenêtre. 2 Ajoutez des fichiers au porte-documents PDF. Dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents, choisissez Modifier > Ajouter des fichiers. Affichez les fichiers à inclure. Sélectionnez un fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner une série de fichiers contigus ou appuyez sur la touche Ctrl pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers dans n'importe quel ordre. Sélection de fichiers d'un porte-documents PDF Lorsque vous ajoutez un fichier dans le porte-documents PDF, une copie de l'original est insérée. Si le document n'est pas au format PDF, tout destinataire du porte-documents PDF devra installer l'application native pour être en mesure de prévisualiser le document en question. Si, par exemple, vous insérez une présentation PowerPoint, l'utilisateur qui consulte le porte-documents PDF devra avoir installé Office pour visualiser ce composant. 3 Sélectionnez une disposition. Dans le panneau de modification du porte-documents, cliquez sur Choix d'une disposition. Sélectionnez une catégorie (Dispositions standard, par exemple) dans le menu déroulant, puis sélectionnez une disposition.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 18 Mise en route Options Disposition La disposition fournit des outils d'aide à la navigation et détermine les documents composant qui s'affichent dans la page d'accueil du porte-documents PDF. Par défaut, la disposition Grille de base est appliquée à la création d'un porte-documents PDF, mais vous pouvez utiliser la disposition de votre choix. 4 Ajoutez un en-tête. Il est possible de donner un aspect homogène à un porte-documents PDF en définissant un en-tête en haut de page. Un en-tête peut inclure du texte et des images (le logo, le nom de la société ou toute autre coordonnée). Pour ajouter un en-tête, cliquez sur Ajout d'une introduction et d'un en-tête dans le panneau de modification du porte-documents, cliquez sur En-tête, puis sélectionnez un modèle. Chaque modèle contient une balise d'emplacement d'image et/ou une balise d'emplacement de texte. Cliquez sur une balise d'emplacement d'image pour la remplacer par un fichier GIF, JPEG ou PNG. Cliquez sur une balise d'emplacement de texte pour saisir et mettre en forme le texte.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 19 Mise en route Un en-tête confère une certaine unité au contenu du porte-document PDF. 5 Ajoutez une page d'introduction. La page d'introduction s'affiche lors de l'ouverture du porte-documents PDF. Elle peut inclure du texte, des images ou une animation Flash (fichier SWF ou FLV). Comme son nom l'indique, une page d'introduction permet de présenter le porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 20 Mise en route Pour ajouter une page d'introduction, cliquez sur Page d'introduction dans le panneau de modification du portedocuments. Sélectionnez un modèle, puis cliquez sur une balise d'emplacement pour la remplacer par le texte, l'image ou le fichier SWF qui convient. 6 Sélectionnez un modèle de couleurs. Vous pouvez personnaliser davantage un porte-documents PDF en sélectionnant les couleurs à appliquer au texte, à l'arrière-plan et aux fiches présentant les données du composant. Dans le panneau de modification du portedocuments, cliquez sur Choix d'un modèle de couleurs. Cliquez sur le nuancier représentant le modèle à utiliser ou cliquez sur Personnaliser un modèle de couleurs pour élaborer le vôtre. Pour produire un modèle de couleurs personnalisé, sélectionnez une couleur dans chacune des catégories (Couleur du texte principal, par exemple). Options des modèles de couleurs 7 Publiez le porte-documents PDF. Lorsque vous avez terminé le porte-documents PDF, vous pouvez le partager en l'envoyant dans un courrier électronique ou en le publiant sur Acrobat.com, un service Web sécurisé. Il est possible de le graver sur un CD ou un DVD ou encore de le distribuer comme vous le faites pour tout autre document PDF. En premier lieu, choisissez choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer le porte-documents. Dans le menu de partage qui se trouve sur la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Envoyer par messagerie pour transmettre le porte-documents sous forme de pièce jointe à un courrier électronique. Vous pouvez également le partager sur Acrobat.com ; cette solution est particulièrement adaptée pour les porte-documents PDF trop volumineux pour transiter par les serveurs de messagerie électronique. Dans le menu de partage, choisissez Partager le portedocuments sur Acrobat.com, puis connectez-vous au site Acrobat.com.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 21 Mise en route Protection Apposition d'une signature sur un document A l'instar d'une signature manuscrite, une signature numérique est personnelle. Acrobat offre des fonctions permettant d'assurer la protection de votre signature numérique. A la différence des signatures classiques, les signatures numériques contiennent des informations supplémentaires, telles que la date et l'heure de la signature ainsi que le motif de la signature. Tout comme vous avez défini le style de votre signature, il est possible de donner un aspect personnel à votre signature numérique. 1 Procurez-vous une identification numérique. Si vous n'avez pas d'identification numérique, créez une identification numérique autosignée dans Acrobat. Celleci stocke une clé privée chiffrée utilisée pour la signature ou le déchiffrement des documents. Elle comporte également une clé publique dans un certificat servant à authentifier les signatures et chiffrer les documents. Pour créer une ID numérique autosignée, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID dans la barre d'outils. Sélectionnez Nouvelle ID à créer maintenant, puis continuez de suivre les instructions de l'assistant. Saisissez les informations personnelles à inclure dans votre identification numérique, notamment votre nom. Lorsque vous certifiez ou signez un document, ce nom s'affiche dans le panneau Signatures et dans le champ de signature. Attribuez un nom à votre identification numérique et définissez le mot de passe associé. Ce dernier doit contenir au moins six caractères, à l'exclusion des signes de ponctuation et des caractères spéciaux. Cliquez sur Terminer. Effectuez une copie de sauvegarde de votre fichier d'identification numérique pour pallier l'éventuelle perte ou corruption de l'original. informations personnelles de l'identification numérique 2 Créez l'aspect de votre signature numérique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 22 Mise en route Votre signature numérique peut être simple ou complexe. Elle peut prendre l'apparence d'une signature manuscrite ou d'un nom saisi électroniquement. Elle peut contenir le logo de la société, la date et l'heure à laquelle vous avez signé et la raison pour laquelle vous l'avez fait. Il est possible de créer plusieurs aspects de signature pour répondre à différentes fins et de sélectionner celui qui convient à la signature d'un document. Si vous souhaitez inclure l'image de votre signature, numérisez-la puis enregistrez-la sous forme de document PDF. Pour créer un aspect, choisissez Edition > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat > Préférences (Mac OS). Sélectionnez Protection dans le panneau gauche, puis cliquez sur Créer dans la section Signatures numériques. Donnez à l'aspect de signature un titre court et descriptif facilement reconnaissable à la signature du document. Sélectionnez les options appropriées et précisez notamment si vous voulez inclure une image importée telle qu'une signature numérisée. Au fur et à mesure que vous apportez des modifications, la signature mise à jour s'affiche dans la fenêtre de prévisualisation. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisez les préférences de protection pour personnaliser le mode d'affichage de votre signature. Si vous avez sélectionné Motif, cliquez sur Préférences avancées et, dans le panneau de création, sélectionnez Afficher les motifs lors de la signature. Si vous avez sélectionné Lieu, sélectionnez Afficher le lieu et les coordonnées lors de la signature. 3 Lisez attentivement le document. Avant de signer un document, que ce soit physiquement ou électroniquement, veillez à en prendre pleinement connaissance et à localiser tous les champs de signature. Etant donné que le contenu dynamique peut modifier l'aspect du document PDF et vous induire en erreur, consultez le document en mode Aperçu du document avant de signer. Pour activer ce mode, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et sélectionnez Protection dans le panneau gauche, puis sélectionnez Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature. Recherchez les champs de signature dans chacune des pages du document. Vous pouvez être amené à signer un document à plusieurs endroits. Chaque champ de signature est unique, aussi votre signature ne sera pas automatiquement copiée d'un champ à l'autre dans le document. 4 Signez le fichier PDF. Pour signer le document, cliquez sur le champ de signature. En l'absence de champ de signature, choisissez Signer > Placer une signature dans la barre d'outils des tâches et tracez un champ de signature dans la page. Si vous avez configuré Acrobat comme programme de visualisation de documents en mode Aperçu du document avant de signer, une barre de message du document signale si un contenu dynamique figure dans le document. Après examen du document, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document pour continuer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 23 Mise en route Choisissez l'aspect de la signature qui convient au moment de signer le document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Apposer une signature, sélectionnez un aspect, puis ajoutez les informations requises tels que le lieu ou le motif de la signature. Saisissez le mot de passe d'ouverture si votre identification numérique l'exige. Cliquer sur Signer. Indiquez le nouveau nom du document (vous pourrez ainsi modifier le fichier PDF d'origine sans invalider la signature), puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Lorsque vous apposez une signature numérique, Acrobat intègre un condensé chiffré dans le fichier PDF. Acrobat incorpore également les détails provenant de votre certificat et de la version du document à l'heure à laquelle vous l'avez signé. 5 Distribuez votre certificat. Pour vérifier votre identification numérique, d'autres personnes doivent posséder le certificat public associé à votre identification. Pour envoyer votre certificat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection, puis sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. Développez la liste, sélectionnez l'identification numérique à partager, puis cliquez sur Exporter. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour transmettre par courrier électronique votre certificat au format PDF à une personne ou enregistrer le certificat sous un autre format de fichier.24 Chapitre 2 : Espace de travail A mesure que vous vous familiarisez avec votre produit, la configuration de votre environnement de travail doit être une priorité. Plus vous en apprendrez sur le produit, plus vous pourrez tirer parti de ses fonctions, outils et options. Cette application est bien plus perfectionnée qu'il n'y paraît au premier abord. Vous disposez de plusieurs outils masqués, préférences et options pour optimiser l'utilisation de l'application et mieux gérer la présentation et l'affichage de la zone de travail. Notions de base sur la zone de travail Affichage de la zone de travail Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional s'ouvre de deux manières distinctes : en tant qu'application autonome et à partir d'un navigateur Web. Les zones de travail associées diffèrent peu certes, mais de manière conséquente. La zone de travail de l'application autonome comporte un panneau de visualisation et un navigateur. Le panneau de visualisation sert à afficher les documents Adobe® PDF. Le navigateur, présenté sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail, permet quant à lui de parcourir les documents PDF. Les barres d'outils proches du haut de la fenêtre proposent d'autres commandes de manipulation des documents PDF. Zone de travail telle qu'elle apparaît dans Acrobat A. Barre de menus B. Barres d'outils C. Navigateur (panneau Signets affiché) D. Panneau de visualisation Lorsque vous ouvrez un document PDF à partir d'un navigateur Web, les barres d'outils, le navigateur et le panneau de visualisation sont tous disponibles. Remarque : Une barre de message du document accompagne la plupart des documents PDF (mais pas tous). Les portedocuments PDF comportent leur propre zone de travail. A D B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 25 Espace de travail Voir aussi « Barre de message du document » à la page 26 Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF La zone de travail des porte-documents PDF contient les éléments suivants : Barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF Elle figure juste en dessous du menu. C'est ici que se trouvent les options de visualisation du porte-documents, les options de publication, un outil de recherche ainsi qu'un menu Modifier proposant différentes commandes d'édition. Liste des documents et des dossiers composant Elle est située juste en dessous de la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF. Les liste des documents et des dossiers peut être présentées dans différentes dispositions ainsi que dans la vue Détails des fichiers. Zone de travail du porte-documents PDF A. Barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF B. Documents et dossiers composant Voir aussi « Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 390 Ouverture d'un document PDF Il existe plusieurs méthodes pour ouvrir un document PDF, à savoir à partir : de l'application Acrobat, de votre application de messagerie, du système de fichiers ou via un réseau accessible à partir d'un navigateur Web. L'affichage initial du document PDF dépend de la façon dont son auteur en a configuré les propriétés. Par exemple, un document peut s'ouvrir sur une page ou avec un facteur de zoom spécifique. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 26 Espace de travail L'accès à certains documents PDF étant restreint, il nécessite la saisie d'un mot de passe d''ouverture, lequel vous est fourni par le propriétaire du fichier PDF. Si un document est chiffré, vous aurez peut-être besoin de l'autorisation de l'auteur pour l'ouvrir. Il se peut également que des documents protégés ou certifiés n'autorisent pas l'impression d'un fichier ou la copie d'informations dans une autre application. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ouvrir un document PDF ou à utiliser certaines fonctions, contactez l'auteur ou le propriétaire du document. Lorsqu'un document est configuré pour s'ouvrir en mode plein écran, la barre d'outils, la barre de commandes, la barre de menus, ainsi que les boutons et commandes de la fenêtre, sont masqués. Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur Ctrl+L. Voir aussi « Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran » à la page 368 « Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF » à la page 25 « Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé » à la page 247 Sélection d'un autre outil Par défaut, l'outil Sélection est actif lorsqu'Acrobat s'ouvre, car il s'agit de l'outil le plus polyvalent. Les outils spécialisés, tels que ceux permettant d'effectuer un zoom avant ou d'ajouter des commentaires de révision, sont disponibles sur les barres d'outils et dans le menu Outils. Voir aussi « Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils » à la page 549 Sélection d'un outil ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez un outil sur la barre d'outils. • Choisissez Outils > [nom de la barre d'outils] > [outil]. Basculement temporaire sur l'outil Zoom avant ou Main Vous avez la possibilité d'utiliser ces outils de manière temporaire, sans pour autant désélectionner l'outil activé. • Pour sélectionner temporairement l'outil Main, appuyez sur la barre d'espacement. • Pour sélectionner temporairement l'outil Zoom avant, maintenez enfoncées les touches Ctrl+barre d'espacement. Lorsque vous relâchez les touches, Acrobat revient à l'outil précédemment actif. Barre de message du document La barre de message du document s'affiche pour certains types de documents PDF seulement. En général, vous voyez cette zone à l'ouverture d'un formulaire PDF, d'un document PDF qui vous a été envoyé pour révision, d'un document PDF doté de droits spéciaux ou de mesures de protection ou encore d'un document PDF conforme aux normes PDF/A, PDF/E ou PDF/X. La barre de message du document s'affiche immédiatement en dessous de la zone des barres d'outils. Pour afficher ou masquer la barre de message du document, cliquez sur son bouton situé du côté gauche de la zone de travail.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 27 Espace de travail La barre de message du document contient les instructions à suivre et un descriptif des éventuels boutons spéciaux associés à la tâche à effectuer. La barre suit un code de couleurs : violet pour les formulaires, jaune pour les révisions et bleu pour les documents PDF certifiés ou protégés. Barre de message du document d'un formulaire Voir aussi « Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF » à la page 243 « Commentaires » à la page 177 Configuration des préférences La boîte de dialogue Préférences contient de nombreux paramètres du programme permettant notamment de configurer l'affichage, les outils, la conversion et les performances. Une fois que vous avez configuré les préférences, elles restent en vigueur tant que vous ne les modifiez pas. 1 Choisissez Edition > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat > Préférences (Mac OS). 2 Dans le panneau Catégories, sélectionnez le type de préférence à modifier. Personnalisation de la zone de travail Affichage des menus En général, il est conseillé de conserver les menus d'Acrobat visibles, afin que vous puissiez les utiliser pendant vos manipulations. Il est possible de les masquer à l'aide de la commande Affichage > Barre des menus. Cependant, la seule manière de les afficher et de les utiliser à nouveau consiste à appuyer sur F9/Maj+Commande+M. Acrobat dispose également de nombreux menus contextuels. Pour y accéder, vous cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un élément de la zone de travail ou du document PDF auquel est associé un tel menu. Un menu contextuel affiche les commandes relatives à l'élément ou à la zone activé(e). Par exemple, lorsque vous cliquez sur la zone des barres d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, le menu contextuel correspondant affiche les mêmes commandes que le menu Affichage > Barres d'outils. Remarque : La barre des menus s'affiche uniquement lorsque Acrobat est ouvert en tant qu'application autonome. Si Acrobat est ouvert à partir d'un navigateur, seul le menu de l'application de navigation est visible en haut de la fenêtre. Toutefois, les menus contextuels sont disponibles dans les deux cas de figure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 28 Espace de travail A propos des barres d'outils Les barres d'outils évitent de voir votre zone de travail trop encombrée en organisant les outils sous forme de groupes liés aux tâches. C'est ainsi que la barre d'outils Affichage des pages comprend des boutons permettant de modifier le nombre de pages pouvant être affichées simultanément dans la fenêtre du document. La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations contient des outils permettant de réviser et d'annoter un fichier PDF. Toutes les barres d'outils peuvent flotter ou être ancrées. Les barres d'outils ancrées figurent dans la zone des barres d'outils. Les barres flottantes s'affichent sous forme de panneaux autonomes que vous pouvez déplacer n'importe où dans la zone de travail. Chaque barre d'outils comporte une barre d'accroche, laquelle correspond à une bande grise verticale placée le long du bord gauche de la barre d'outils. • Lorsque vous placez le pointeur sur une barre d'accroche, une info-bulle affiche le nom de la barre d'outils associée. • Lorsque vous faites glisser une barre d'accroche, la barre d'outils est déplacée en conséquence. Vous pouvez faire glisser des barres d'outils hors de la zone des barres d'outils (de manière à les rendre flottantes), les ancrer dans la zone des barres d'outils ou encore les réorganiser au sein de cette zone. Certaines barres d'outils sont affichées par défaut et d'autres, masquées. Barres d'outils ouvertes par défaut A. Barre d'outils Tâches B. Barre d'outils Fichier C. Barre d'outils Navigation de pages D. Barre d'outils Sélection et zoom E. Barre d'outils Affichage de page F. Barre d'outils Recherche Chacun des boutons de la barre d'outils Tâches est associé à un menu de commandes. Cliquez sur la flèche située à droite du nom du bouton pour ouvrir le menu. Par exemple, cliquez sur la flèche associée au bouton Collaborer pour afficher un menu proposant des commandes liées aux tâches de collaboration. Placez le pointeur sur un outil pour voir apparaître sa description. Placez le pointeur sur la barre d'accroche disponible sur le bord gauche d'une barre d'outils pour afficher le nom de cette dernière. Tous les outils sont identifiés par leur nom dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils (Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils). Voir aussi « Personnalisation de la zone de travail » à la page 27 « Affichage des menus » à la page 27 Affichage et organisation des barres d'outils Lorsque la tâche que vous effectuez n'implique pas l'utilisation des outils d'une barre spécialisée, vous pouvez fermer la barre d'outils afin de ne pas trop encombrer la zone de travail. Par exemple, si vous n'ajoutez pas de commentaires de révision à un document PDF, il est inutile de laisser affichée la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Lorsque vous souhaitez faciliter l'accès à une barre d'outils masquée par défaut, vous pouvez ouvrir la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche alors sous forme de panneau flottant que vous pouvez déplacer ou ancrer dans la zone des barres d'outils. B A C D E FUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 29 Espace de travail Remarque : Si plusieurs documents PDF sont ouverts, vous pouvez entièrement personnaliser les barres d'outils pour chacun d'eux. Les différents états personnalisés sont conservés lorsque vous passez d'un fichier PDF à un autre. Voir aussi « Ouverture ou fermeture du mode de lecture » à la page 37 Affichage ou masquage des barres d'outils • Pour ouvrir une barre d'outils, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > [nom de la barre d'outils]. Les barres d'outils affichées sont signalées par une coche placée en regard de leur nom. • Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Masquer les barres d'outils pour masquer toutes les barres d'outils. • Pour modifier l'état d'une barre d'outils visible ou non, cliquez sur la zone des barres d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez la barre d'outils à afficher ou à masquer. • Pour modifier la visibilité de plusieurs barres d'outils, choisissez Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils ou Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ajouter des outils. Ensuite, sélectionnez et désélectionnez les barres d'outils. (Les barres d'outils visibles sont signalées par une coche placée à gauche de leur nom.) Remarque : L'ouverture d'une nouvelle barre d'outils sous forme flottante ou ancrée dans la zone des barres d'outils dépend de la position par défaut de la barre d'outils ou, le cas échéant, de son emplacement dans la configuration antérieure de la zone de travail. Déplacement des barres d'outils • Pour réorganiser les barres d'outils ancrées, servez-vous de leurs barres d'accroche et faites-les glisser d'une position à l'autre. • Pour déplacer une barre d'outils flottante dans la zone de travail, faites-la glisser par sa barre de titre ou sa barre d'accroche. • Pour rendre flottante une barre d'outils ancrée, faites-la glisser par sa barre d'accroche à partir de la zone des barres d'outils. Déplacement d'une série d'outils à partir de la zone des barres d'outils à l'aide de la barre de titre. • Pour ancrer une barre d'outils flottante, déplacez-la vers la zone des barres d'outils en la faisant glisser par sa barre de titre ou par sa barre d'accroche. • Pour déplacer toutes les barres d'outils flottantes vers la zone des barres d'outils, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ancrer les barres d'outils.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 30 Espace de travail Lors du déplacement des barres d'outils, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des lignes dans la zone des barres d'outils. Rétablissement de la configuration par défaut des barres d'outils ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Réinitialiser les barres d'outils. Verrouillage ou déverrouillage de la zone des barres d'outils Le verrouillage des barres d'outils interdit toute réorganisation au sein de la zone des barres d'outils. De ce fait, les barres d'accroche disparaissent des barres d'outils lorsque celles-ci sont verrouillées. En revanche, le verrouillage n'a aucune incidence sur l'emplacement des barres d'outils flottantes. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Verrouiller les barres d'outils. Sélectionnez une seconde fois la commande pour déverrouiller la zone des barres d'outils. Remarque : Lorsque la zone des barres d'outils est verrouillée, cela ne vous empêche pas de déplacer les barres d'outils flottantes en les faisant glisser par leur barre de titre. Toutefois, vous ne pouvez pas les ancrer à moins de déverrouiller la zone des barres d'outils. Affichage et masquage d'éléments de la barre d'outils Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage d'une barre d'outils donnée de manière à masquer les outils dont vous n'avez pas besoin et à minimiser ainsi l'espace perdu. Vous pouvez également afficher et masquer le libellé des outils. Affichage ou masquage d'outils individuels Acrobat comprend davantage d'outils et de barres d'outils que ceux que vous voyez par défaut. Vous pouvez personnaliser les barres d'outils de sorte que les outils les plus souvent utilisés apparaissent dans la zone des barres d'outils. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez un outil que vous souhaitez afficher ou désélectionnez un outil qui est déjà affiché si vous souhaitez le masquer. • Cliquez sur une barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter des outils. Sélectionnez ensuite des outils et des barres d'outils individuels que vous souhaitez rendre visibles, et désélectionnez ceux qui doivent être masqués. Remarque : Un outil sélectionné figure dans la zone des barres d'outils seulement si la barre d'outils à laquelle il appartient est également cochée dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils. Affichage ou masquage des libellés d'outils L'affichage par défaut montre les libellés de certains boutons de barre d'outils. Vous pouvez afficher les libellés de tous les boutons afin de vous familiariser plus facilement avec Acrobat ou, au contraire, masquer tous les libellés de boutons pour gagner de l'espace dans la zone des barres d'outils. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Afficher les libellés des boutons > [option]. Remarque : Lorsque l'espace commence à manquer dans la zone des barres d'outils, les libellés d'outils sont désactivés de manière sélective.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 31 Espace de travail Vérification des propriétés d'outils et d'objets La barre des propriétés facilite l'accès aux propriétés de nombreux outils et objets, tels que des liens, commentaires, champs de formulaire, clips multimédia et signets. Si, par exemple, vous activez l'outil Note, la barre d'outils des propriétés affiche les propriétés par défaut actuelles correspondantes. Si vous sélectionnez une note dans le document, la barre des propriétés affiche les propriétés appliquées à la note en question. La barre des propriétés vous permet de modifier la plupart des paramètres affichés à cet emplacement. Certains éléments n'apparaissent qu'à titre d'information et ne peuvent pas être modifiés. A l'instar des barres d'outils, la barre des propriétés peut flotter ou être ancrée dans la zone des barres d'outils. En revanche, elle ne contient pas d'outils et ne peut pas être personnalisée pour masquer des options. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. 2 Sélectionnez l'objet ou l'outil que vous souhaitez réviser. 3 Modifiez les propriétés de l'élément sélectionné selon vos besoins. Si vous voulez modifier des propriétés d'objet autres que celles répertoriées sur la barre d'outils des propriétés, cliquez sur l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. Affichage ou masquage du navigateur Le navigateur est une zone de l'espace de travail qui peut afficher plusieurs panneaux de navigation. En général, ces panneaux jouent le rôle de table des matières, avec des éléments sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour accéder à une partie spécifique du document. Par exemple, le panneau Pages contient des vignettes de chaque page. Le fait de cliquer sur une vignette ouvre la page correspondante dans le document. Lorsque vous ouvrez un fichier PDF, le navigateur est fermé par défaut, mais les boutons situés le long du côté gauche de la zone de travail permettent d'accéder facilement aux différents panneaux, tels que le bouton du panneau Pages et le bouton du panneau Signets . Lorsqu'Acrobat est ouvert mais vide (sans document PDF affiché), le navigateur n'est pas disponible. 1 Pour ouvrir le navigateur, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ouvrir un panneau, cliquez sur le bouton du panneau voulu sur le bord gauche de la zone de travail. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Afficher le navigateur. 2 Pour fermer le navigateur, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton relatif au panneau affiché dans le navigateur. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Masquer le navigateur. Remarque : L'auteur du fichier PDF peut contrôler le contenu de certains panneaux de navigation et les vider. Ajustement des panneaux de navigation A l'instar des barres d'outils, les panneaux de navigation peuvent être ancrés dans le navigateur ou flotter dans la zone de travail. Vous pouvez masquer ou fermer les panneaux inutiles et ouvrir ceux dont vous avez besoin. De même, vous avez la possibilité d'ajuster la largeur du navigateur. Modification de la zone d'affichage des panneaux de navigation • Pour modifier la largeur du navigateur, faites glisser son bord droit. • Pour réduire un panneau flottant sans le fermer, cliquez sur le nom de l'onglet en haut de la fenêtre. Cliquez de nouveau sur le nom de l'onglet pour rétablir la taille réelle du panneau.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 32 Espace de travail Modification de l'orientation d'un panneau de navigation ancré Par défaut, certains panneaux, tels que le panneau Signets, s'affichent sous forme de colonne du côté gauche de la zone de travail. D'autres, comme le panneau Commentaires, s'affichent horizontalement au bas du panneau de visualisation. Vous pouvez modifier l'orientation de n'importe quel panneau pour l'afficher verticalement ou horizontalement en faisant glisser le bouton associé à ce panneau, qui apparaît sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail. • Pour orienter le panneau à la verticale, faites glisser le bouton vers la partie supérieure du navigateur, à proximité des boutons d'autres panneaux verticaux. • Pour orienter le panneau à l'horizontale, faites glisser le bouton vers la partie inférieure du navigateur, à proximité des boutons d'autres panneaux horizontaux. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, un cadre gris met en surbrillance toute la zone de boutons du panneau. Si vous relâchez le bouton de la souris avant que la zone soit mise en surbrillance, le panneau flotte au-dessus de la zone de travail. Si cela se produit, recommencez en faisant glisser l'onglet du panneau vers la partie supérieure ou inférieure de la zone des boutons. Affichage d'un autre panneau dans le navigateur Par défaut, un jeu sélectif de boutons du panneau est visible sur le bord gauche de la zone de travail. D'autres panneaux sont disponibles dans le menu Affichage et peuvent s'ouvrir sous forme de panneaux flottants au lieu de s'afficher dans le navigateur. Cependant, rien ne vous empêche d'ancrer le panneau dans le navigateur par la suite. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la partie gauche du navigateur, sélectionnez le bouton du panneau. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > [nom du panneau]. Ancrage ou flottement des panneaux de navigation • Pour faire flotter un panneau ancré dans le navigateur, faites glisser le bouton du panneau vers le panneau de visualisation. • Pour ancrer un panneau flottant, faites glisser l'onglet du panneau vers le navigateur. • Pour regrouper deux panneaux flottants, faites glisser l'onglet d'un panneau vers l'autre panneau flottant. Options disponibles dans un panneau de navigation Tous les panneaux de navigation disposent d'un menu d'options dans le coin supérieur gauche. Les commandes disponibles dans ces menus varient d'un panneau à l'autre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 33 Espace de travail Certains panneaux contiennent également d'autres boutons ayant une incidence sur les éléments du panneau. Une fois encore, cela varie d'un panneau à l'autre et certains panneaux ne comportent aucun bouton de ce genre. Affichage des pages PDF Ouverture d'un document PDF Vous pouvez ouvrir un document PDF à partir de l'application Acrobat, du bureau ou d'autres applications spécifiques. Ouverture d'un document PDF depuis l'application ? Lancez Acrobat, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir ou cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir de la barre d'outils. Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs noms de fichiers, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Les documents PDF portent habituellement l'extension .pdf. • Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > [nom de la collection] > [nom du fichier PDF]. • Choisissez Fichier > Historique > [période] > [nom du fichier PDF]. Si plusieurs documents sont ouverts, vous pouvez basculer entre eux en sélectionnant le nom du document voulu dans le menu Fenêtre. Sous Windows, un bouton s'affiche pour chaque document ouvert sur la barre des tâches de Windows. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour naviguer parmi les documents ouverts. Ouverture d'un document PDF à partir du bureau ou d'une autre application ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF joint à un message électronique, ouvrez le message et cliquez deux fois sur l'icône de la pièce jointe PDF. • Pour ouvrir un document PDF lié à une page Web affichée, cliquez sur le lien du fichier PDF. Le document PDF s'ouvre généralement dans le navigateur Web.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 34 Espace de travail • Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône du fichier PDF voulu dans le système de fichiers. Remarque : Sous Mac OS, il peut arriver qu'un document PDF créé sous Windows ne s'ouvre pas lorsque vous cliquez deux fois sur son icône. Si tel est le cas, choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir avec > Acrobat. Ouverture des pages d'un document PDF Selon le document PDF que vous ouvrez, vous devrez peut-être parcourir de nombreuses pages, consulter différentes sections de la page ou changer de facteur de zoom. Il existe plusieurs moyens de naviguer, mais les éléments suivants sont le plus souvent utilisés : Remarque : Si ces éléments ne sont pas visibles, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Réinitialiser les barres d'outils. Page suivante et Page précédente Les boutons Page suivante et Page précédente sont disponibles sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. La zone de texte située en regard de ces boutons est également interactive : il vous suffit de taper un numéro de page et d'appuyer sur Entrée pour atteindre directement la page voulue. Barres de défilement Les barres de défilement verticale et horizontale se trouvent à droite et en dessous du panneau de visualisation lorsque le document n'est pas affiché en entier dans la vue. Cliquez sur les flèches ou faites glisser le pointeur pour afficher d'autres pages ou des zones différentes de la page. Barre d'outils Sélection et zoom Cette barre d'outils contient des boutons et des commandes permettant de changer le facteur de zoom de la page. Panneau Pages Le bouton Pages situé sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail ouvre le navigateur avec le panneau Pages au premier plan. Ce panneau affiche les vignettes des pages du document. En cliquant sur une vignette, vous ouvrez la page correspondante dans le panneau de visualisation. Voir aussi « Retour en arrière dans les documents visualisés » à la page 36 « Ajustement du facteur de zoom » à la page 45 Parcours d'un document Il existe de nombreuses façons de feuilleter des pages dans un document PDF. La plupart des utilisateurs utilisent les boutons de la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, mais vous pouvez également vous servir des touches fléchées, des barres de défilement et d'autres fonctions pour avancer et reculer dans un document PDF comptant plusieurs pages. Par défaut, la barre d'outils Navigation de pages s'ouvre. La barre d'outils par défaut contient des outils fréquemment utilisés : Page suivante , Page précédente et Numéro de page. A l'instar des autres barres d'outils, vous pouvez masquer et rouvrir la barre d'outils Navigation de pages en choisissant son nom dans le menu Barres d'outils du menu Affichage. Vous pouvez afficher d'autres outils sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages en cliquant sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant un outil spécifique, Afficher tous les outils ou Ajouter des outils et en sélectionnant ou en désélectionnant des outils dans la boîte de dialogue. Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 340 « A propos des vignettes » à la page 338 « Configuration de la mise en page et de l'orientation des pages » à la page 49UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 35 Espace de travail Déplacement au sein d'un document PDF ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Page précédente ou Page suivante de la barre d'outils. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > [emplacement]. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Page, saisissez le numéro de la page dans la boîte de dialogue Atteindre la page, puis cliquez sur OK. • Appuyez sur les touches au clavier Pg. suiv et Pg. préc. Passage à une page spécifique ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • En mode d'affichage Une seule page ou Deux pages, faites glisser la barre de défilement verticale jusqu'à ce que la page voulue s'affiche dans la zone contextuelle. • Tapez le numéro de page de remplacement dans la zone prévue à cet effet sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, puis appuyez sur Entrée. Remarque : Si les numéros de page du document diffèrent de la position réelle de la page dans le fichier PDF, cette position est signalée entre parenthèses après le numéro de page assigné sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. Si, par exemple, vous définissez la numérotation des pages d'un fichier constitué d'un chapitre de 18 pages qui doit commencer par 223, le numéro de la première page active sera le 223 (1 sur 18). Vous avez la possibilité de désactiver les numéros de page logiques dans les préférences d'affichage des pages. Voir les sections « Renumérotation des pages » à la page 148 (Acrobat uniquement) et « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 41. Passage à des pages marquées par des signets Les signets constituent une table des matières qui divise généralement les documents en chapitres et en sections. Ils sont affichés dans le navigateur. Panneau Signets A. Bouton Signets B. Cliquez ici pour afficher le menu Options du panneau Signets. C. Signet développé 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets. C B AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 36 Espace de travail 2 Pour accéder à une rubrique, cliquez sur le signet correspondant. Développez ou réduisez le contenu du signet selon vos besoins. Remarque : Selon la manière dont le signet a été défini, il se peut qu'une toute autre action soit exécutée lorsque vous cliquez dessus, alors que vous vouliez accéder à cet emplacement. Si la liste des signets disparaît lorsque vous cliquez sur un signet, cliquez sur le bouton Signets pour l'afficher à nouveau. Si vous souhaitez masquer le bouton Signets après avoir cliqué sur un signet, choisissez Réduire après utilisation dans le menu Options. Passage à une page spécifique à l'aide de sa vignette Les vignettes correspondent à des représentations miniatures des pages d'un document. Elles sont situées dans le panneau Pages et permettent de changer le mode d'affichage du document et d'atteindre des pages spécifiques. La vignette active comporte un cadre rouge indiquant la zone de la page qui apparaît. Vous pouvez redimensionner cette zone pour modifier le facteur de zoom. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour ouvrir le panneau Pages. 2 Pour aller à une autre page, cliquez sur son signet. Défilement automatique d'un document Le défilement automatique vous permet de parcourir un document PDF à vitesse constante, en procédant de haut en bas. Si vous interrompez l'opération à l'aide des barres de défilement pour avancer ou reculer d'une page ou d'une section, le défilement automatique reprend à cet emplacement. Parvenu à la fin du document PDF, le défilement automatique s'arrête et ne reprend pas au début à moins que vous n'activiez à nouveau cette commande. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement. 2 Appuyez sur Echap pour arrêter le défilement. Retour en arrière dans les documents visualisés Vous avez la possibilité de rechercher des pages PDF que vous avez visualisées auparavant en revenant en arrière dans votre parcours de visualisation. Il est utile de comprendre la différence entre le concept de pages précédente/suivante et celui de vues précédente/suivante. Dans le cas de pages, les adjectifs précédent et suivant font référence à deux pages consécutives, placées avant et après la page active. Dans le cas de vues, il s'agit de l'historique de visualisation des pages. Si, par exemple, vous avancez et reculez dans un document, l'historique de visualisation revient en arrière, affichant les pages que vous avez vues dans l'ordre inverse de l'affichage initial. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Vue précédente. 2 Pour continuer à visualiser la suite de votre parcours de visualisation, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Recommencez l'étape 1. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Vue suivante. Remarque : Vous pouvez afficher les boutons Vue précédente et Vue suivante dans la zone des barres d'outils en cliquant sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant ces options dans le menu contextuel ou en activant la commande Afficher tous les outils. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 37 Espace de travail Changement de mode d'affichage PDF/A La norme PDF/A est une norme ISO portant sur les documents PDF. Les documents que vous numérisez au format PDF sont conformes à la norme PDF/A. Vous pouvez indiquer si vous voulez voir les documents dans ce mode d'affichage. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Choisissez une option pour Afficher les documents en mode PDF/A : Jamais ou Uniquement pour les documents PDF/A. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le mode d'affichage PDF/A en modifiant de nouveau ce paramètre de préférence. Navigation à l'aide des liens Les liens vous permettent d'accéder à un autre emplacement du document actif, à d'autres documents PDF ou à des sites Web. Cliquer sur un lien permet également d'ouvrir des pièces jointes et de lire un contenu 3D, une séquence vidéo ou audio. Pour pouvoir lire des clips multimédia, vous devez disposer d'un équipement matériel et logiciel approprié. L'auteur du document PDF décide de l'aspect des liens dans le document PDF. Remarque : Pour qu'un lien fonctionne correctement, vous devez sélectionner l'option Créer des liens à partir des URL dans les préférences générales, à moins que le lien n'ait été créé dans Acrobat à l'aide de l'outil Lien. 1 Activez l'outil Sélection . 2 Pointez sur la zone du lien sur la page, jusqu'à ce que le pointeur se transforme en main pointant avec le doigt. Un signe plus (+) ou un w s'affiche sur la main lorsque le lien pointe vers un site Web. Cliquez ensuite sur le lien. Voir aussi « Liens et pièces jointes » à la page 343 « Préférences multimédia » à la page 401 Fichiers PDF dotés de pièces jointes Si vous ouvrez un document PDF contenant une ou plusieurs pièces jointes, le panneau Pièces jointes s'ouvre automatiquement, affichant les fichiers joints. Vous pouvez afficher ces fichiers, les modifier et enregistrer vos modifications sous réserve que l'auteur des documents vous y autorise. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, les pièces jointes le suivent automatiquement. Voir aussi « Ouverture, enregistrement ou suppression d'une pièce jointe » à la page 348 Ouverture ou fermeture du mode de lecture Le mode de lecture masque le contenu intégral de la zone de travail à l'exception du document et de la barre des menus. ? Choisissez Affichage > Mode de lecture. Choisissez à nouveau Mode de lecture pour restaurer le mode d'affichage antérieur de la zone de travail, avec les boutons de navigation et les mêmes barres d'outils affichées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 38 Espace de travail Affichage d'un document PDF en mode plein écran En mode plein écran, les pages PDF occupent la totalité de l'écran. La barre des menus, les barre d'outils, ainsi que les boutons et options de la fenêtre sont masqués. L'auteur peut configurer un document PDF pour qu'il s'ouvre en mode plein écran. Vous pouvez également définir l'affichage vous-même. Ce mode d'affichage est fréquemment utilisé pour les présentations, éventuellement associé au défilement automatique des pages et à des transitions. Le pointeur reste actif en mode plein écran pour que vous puissiez cliquer sur les liens et ouvrir les notes. Il existe deux manières de progresser dans un document PDF en mode plein écran : vous pouvez utiliser les raccourcis clavier des commandes de navigation et de facteur de zoom ou vous pouvez configurer une préférence de mode plein écran permettant d'afficher des boutons de navigation sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour changer de page ou quitter le mode plein écran. Voir aussi « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 41 « Configuration d'une présentation » à la page 368 Configuration de la préférence de barre de navigation du mode plein écran 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Plein écran. 2 Cochez la case Afficher la barre de navigation, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Choisissez Affichage > Mode plein écran. La barre de navigation du mode plein écran contient les boutons Page précédente , Page suivante et Fermer le mode plein écran . Ces boutons s'affichent dans le coin inférieur gauche de la zone de travail. Lecture d'un document en mode plein écran Si la barre de navigation du mode plein écran n'est pas visible, vous pouvez utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour parcourir le document PDF. Remarque : Si vous disposez de deux moniteurs, il se peut que l'affichage d'une page en mode plein écran soit disponible uniquement sur l'un d'entre eux. Pour feuilleter le document, cliquez sur l'écran affichant la page en mode plein écran. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Mode plein écran. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour passer à la page suivante, appuyez sur la touche Entrée, Page suivante ou Droite. • Pour passer à la page précédente, appuyez sur Maj+Entrée, Page suivante ou Gauche. 3 Pour fermer le mode plein écran, appuyez sur Ctrl+L ou Echap. Vous devez activer l'option Touche Echap pour quitter dans les préférences du mode plein écran. Pour afficher un outil Plein écran sur la barre d'outils Affichage de page, cliquez sur cette dernière avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Mode plein écran. Cliquez ensuite sur l'outil Plein écran pour basculer dans ce mode. Affichage de fichiers PDF dans un navigateur Web Vous pouvez visualiser les documents PDF dans un navigateur Web pris en charge ou définir les préférences Internet de manière à ouvrir les fichiers PDF liés ou téléchargés dans une fenêtre Acrobat distincte. Si vous ouvrez des documents PDF dans Acrobat en dehors du navigateur, il est impossible d'utiliser l'option d'affichage rapide des pages Web, l'envoi de formulaires dans un navigateur ou la mise en surbrillance des résultats de recherche sur le Web.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 39 Espace de travail Dans la mesure où les commandes clavier peuvent être mappées au navigateur Web, certains raccourcis Acrobat risquent de ne pas être disponibles. De la même manière, vous pouvez être amené à faire appel aux outils et commandes de la barre d'outils d'Acrobat plutôt qu'à ceux des barres d'outils et des menus du navigateur. Par exemple, pour imprimer un document PDF, vous devez utiliser le bouton Imprimer de la barre d'outils d'Acrobat au lieu de la commande Imprimer du navigateur Web. (Dans Microsoft Internet Explorer, vous pouvez choisir Fichier > Imprimer, Edition > Copier et Edition > Rechercher sur la barre d'outils d'Internet Explorer.) Préférences Internet Afficher dans le navigateur Affiche tout document PDF ouvert à partir d'Internet dans la fenêtre du navigateur. Si cette option n'est pas activée, les documents PDF s'ouvrent dans une fenêtre Acrobat distincte. Sous Mac OS, si vous disposez à la fois de Reader et d'Acrobat, vous pouvez sélectionner l'application et la version à utiliser. Remarque : Si Reader est installé sur votre système et que vous installez ensuite Acrobat, Safari continue à utiliser Reader pour ouvrir les documents PDF dans votre navigateur. Configurez Safari de façon à ce qu'il utilise Acrobat. Autoriser l'affichage rapide des pages Web Télécharge les documents PDF à afficher sur Internet page par page. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le fichier PDF est entièrement téléchargé avant d'être affiché. Si vous voulez que le téléchargement du document PDF continue à l'arrière-plan pendant que vous consultez la première page d'information demandée, activez aussi l'option Autoriser le téléchargement spéculatif à l'arrière-plan. Autoriser le téléchargement spéculatif à l'arrière-plan Permet de continuer le téléchargement d'un document PDF depuis le Web, une fois la première page demandée affichée. Le téléchargement en arrière-plan s'arrête lorsque une nouvelle tâche est lancée dans Acrobat (le fait de feuilleter le document, par exemple). Vitesse de connexion Choisissez la vitesse de connexion dans la liste déroulante. Ce paramètre est également utilisé par le module externe Multimédia. Propriétés Internet [ou Paramètres réseau] Cliquez pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue ou le panneau de connexion Internet ou réseau de votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'aide de votre système d'exploitation, votre prestataire de services Internet ou l'administrateur réseau local. Lecture d'articles Dans les documents PDF, les articles sont des divisions électroniques que l'auteur peut définir au sein du document PDF. Les articles guident le lecteur à travers le contenu du document PDF en sautant les pages ou les zones de la page exclues de l'article, de la même manière que vous filtrez un journal ou un magazine classique, en suivant le fil d'un article et en ignorant le reste. Lorsque vous lisez un article, le contenu de la page peut être agrandi ou réduit de manière à remplir l'écran avec la section d'article en cours de lecture. Voir aussi « Articles » à la page 353 Ouverture et parcours d'une division d'article 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Main ou cliquez sur l'outil Main de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom. 2 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Articles pour ouvrir le panneau Articles. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir le panneau Articles lorsque vous visualisez un document PDF dans un navigateur. Pour l'afficher, vous devez ouvrir le document dans Acrobat. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône de l'article pour atteindre le début de l'article. L'icône prend la forme spécifique suivante . Remarque : Si le panneau Articles est vide, cela signifie que l'auteur n'a pas défini de divisions d'article pour ce document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 40 Espace de travail 4 La division d'article souhaitée étant ouverte, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour parcourir l'article panneau par panneau, appuyez sur Entrée ou cliquez dans l'article. • Pour revenir en arrière dans l'article, panneau par panneau, cliquez sur l'article en appuyant sur la touche Maj ou appuyez sur Maj+Entrée. • Pour revenir au début, cliquez dans l'article en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. 5 A la fin de l'article, cliquez à nouveau dedans. La vue précédente est restaurée et le pointeur prend la forme de fin d'article . Sortie d'une division avant le terme de l'article 1 Assurez-vous que l'outil Main est activé. 2 Cliquez sur la page en maintenant les touches Maj+Ctrl enfoncées. La vue précédente est restaurée. Comparaison d'un fichier PDF révisé à une version antérieure La fonction de comparaison de documents permet d'afficher les différences entre deux versions d'un document PDF. De nombreuses options sont personnalisables pour afficher les résultats de la comparaison. 1 Choisissez Document > Comparer des documents. 2 Indiquez les deux documents que vous avez l'intention de comparer. Si l'un ou l'autre des documents (ou même les deux) fait partie d'un lot PDF, sélectionnez le lot, puis sélectionnez le composant PDF sous Elément du lot. Remarque : La fonction de comparaison de documents ne s'applique pas aux porte-documents PDF créés dans Acrobat 9. 3 Si besoin est, spécifiez les étendues de pages que vous désirez comparer dans les documents en remplissant les champs Première page et Dernière page. 4 Choisissez la description de document qui convient et cliquez sur OK. Une fois l'analyse des deux documents terminée, un document de synthèse est présenté et le panneau de comparaison est ouvert. Le nouveau document contient diverses annotations relatives aux changements. La première page propose un résumé des résultats de la comparaison. 5 Dans le panneau de comparaison, effectuez les opérations qui conviennent : • Pour masquer les annotations relatives aux changements, cliquez sur Masquer les résultats. • Pour définir les options d'affichage des résultats de la comparaison, cliquez sur Afficher les options. Vous pouvez spécifier le type de modification à afficher, ainsi que le modèle de couleurs et le degré d'opacité des annotations. Pour revenir aux vignettes de page, cliquez sur Masquer les options. • Pour afficher chacun des documents dans sa propre fenêtre, ouvrez le menu Options et choisissez Afficher les documents en mosaïque ou Afficher les documents juxtaposés. Pour synchroniser les pages correspondantes tout en affichant les documents dans leurs propres fenêtres, ouvrez le menu Options et choisissez Synchroniser les pages. • Cliquez sur une vignette de page pour accéder directement à cette page. Pour modifier le corps des vignettes de page, ouvrez le menu Options et choisissez Taille des vignettes > [option]. • Faites glisser la barre de fractionnement vers le haut en bas du panneau de comparaison afin d'afficher les vignettes de l'ancien document. Cliquez sur une vignette de l'ancien document pour l'ouvrir dans une nouvelle fenêtre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 41 Espace de travail Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF La boîte de dialogue Préférences définit la disposition par défaut des pages et personnalise l'application de biens d'autres manières. Concernant l'affichage des documents PDF, examinez les options disponibles dans les préférences de documents, générales, multimédia et d'affichage. Les paramètres des préférences contrôlent le fonctionnement de l'application ; ils ne sont pas associés à un document PDF spécifique. Remarque : Si vous installez des modules externes tiers, configurez ces préférences par le biais de l'option de menu Préférences de tiers. Voir aussi « Préférences de contenu 3D » à la page 427 « Préférences multimédia » à la page 401 « Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 305 Préférences de documents Paramètres d'ouverture Restaurer les derniers paramètres affichés lors de la réouverture du document Détermine si les documents s'ouvrent automatiquement à la dernière page affichée lors d'une session de travail. Ouvrir les liens interdocument dans la même fenêtre Ferme le document actif et ouvre le document lié dans la même fenêtre, limitant ainsi le nombre de fenêtres ouvertes. Si le document lié est déjà ouvert dans une autre fenêtre, le document actif n'est pas fermé lorsque vous cliquez sur le lien pour ouvrir l'autre document. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvre chaque fois que vous cliquez sur un lien pointant vers un document distinct. Autoriser la définition de l'état des calques selon les informations utilisateur Permet à l'auteur d'un document PDF doté de calques de spécifier la visibilité des calques en fonction des informations utilisateur. Permettre aux documents de masquer la barre de menu, les barres d'outils et les commandes Windows Permet de déterminer si la barre de menu, les barres d'outils et les commandes Windows sont masquées lors de l'ouverture du document. Documents dans la liste la plus récente Définit le nombre maximal de documents affichés dans le menu Fichier. Conserver les fichiers dans l'historique de l'organiseur pendant Indique la durée de conservation des fichiers PDF dans l'historique. Paramètres d'enregistrement Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications de document dans un fichier temporaire toutes les _ minutes Détermine la fréquence à laquelle Acrobat enregistre automatiquement les modifications d'un document ouvert. Enregistrement optimisé pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web Restructure le document Adobe PDF en vue du téléchargement individuel des pages à partir de serveurs Web. Mode d'affichage PDF/A Afficher les documents en mode PDF/A Indique les cas dans lesquels ce mode d'affichage s'applique : Jamais ou Uniquement pour les documents PDF/A.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 42 Espace de travail Examiner le document Examiner le document Recherche dans le fichier PDF les éléments qui ne sont pas nécessairement visibles, tels que les métadonnées, les pièces jointes, les commentaires ainsi que les calques et textes masqués. Les résultats de cet examen apparaissent dans une boîte de dialogue. Vous pouvez supprimer n'importe quel type d'élément affiché à cet endroit. • Examiner le document lors de sa fermeture (Option désactivée par défaut.) • Examiner le document lors de son envoi par messagerie (Option désactivée par défaut.) Ajuster le nom du fichier lors de l'enregistrement des biffures appliquées Indique un préfixe ou un suffixe à utiliser lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier auquel des biffures ont été appliquées. Préférences de plein écran Configuration du mode plein écran Appliquer au document actif uniquement Indique si l'affichage se limite à un document PDF. Occuper l'écran avec une page à la fois Définit l'affichage des pages selon la couverture d'écran maximum possible pour une page. Afficher un avertissement lorsque le document nécessite le mode plein écran Affiche un message avant de passer en mode plein écran. Si elle est activée, cette option a priorité sur l'option Ne plus afficher ce message sélectionnée précédemment dans ce message. Moniteur à utiliser Indique le moniteur sur lequel le mode plein écran est activé (pour les utilisateurs disposant de configurations à plusieurs moniteurs). Navigation en mode plein écran Touche Echap pour quitter (Windows/Mac OS) Permet de quitter le mode plein écran à l'aide de la touche Echap. Lorsque cette option n'est pas activée, vous pouvez quitter le mode plein écran en appuyant sur les touches Ctrl+L. Afficher la barre de navigation Affiche la barre d'outils de navigation minimale quelles soient les paramètres du document. Clic avec le bouton gauche pour avancer d'une page et avec le bouton droit pour reculer d'une page Permet de feuilleter le document Adobe PDF page par page à l'aide de la souris. Vous pouvez également feuilleter un document en appuyant sur Entrée, sur Maj+Entrée (pour revenir en arrière) ou en utilisant les touches fléchées. Boucle après la dernière page Permet de feuilleter un document PDF en continu, renvoyant le lecteur à la première page une fois la fin du document atteinte. Cette option est habituellement utilisée pour configurer l'affichage sur une borne. Avancer toutes les _ secondes Permet de passer automatiquement d'une page à l'autre après l'intervalle défini (en secondes). Vous pouvez parcourir un document en utilisant la souris ou le clavier et ce, même si le défilement automatique est activé. Aspect Couleur d'arrière-plan Spécifie la couleur d'arrière-plan de la fenêtre en mode plein écran. Vous pouvez sélectionner une couleur dans la palette de couleurs afin de personnaliser la couleur d'arrière-plan. Curseur de la souris Indique si le pointeur doit être visible ou masqué en mode plein écran. Transitions du mode plein écran Ignorer toutes les transitions Supprime les effets de transition des présentations affichées en mode plein écran.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 43 Espace de travail Transition par défaut Spécifie l'effet de transition à afficher lorsque vous changez de page en mode plein écran et qu'aucun effet de transition n'a été défini pour le document. Sens Détermine le flux de la transition par défaut sélectionnée à l'écran (vers le bas, à gauche, horizontal, etc.). Les options disponibles varient en fonction de la transition. Si aucune option de sens n'a d'incidence sur la transition par défaut sélectionnée, cette option n'est pas disponible. Sens en fonction de la navigation Imite la progression de l'utilisateur dans la présentation, telle que la transition de haut en bas lorsque l'utilisateur passe à la page suivante et de bas en haut lorsque l'utilisateur revient à la page précédente. Paramètre uniquement disponible pour les transitions comportant des options de sens. Préférences générales Outils de base Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils Permet de sélectionner des outils en appuyant sur une seule touche. Cette option est désactivée par défaut. Créer des liens à partir des URL Spécifie si les liens qui n'ont pas été créés dans Acrobat sont identifiés automatiquement dans le document PDF et peuvent être suivis en cliquant dessus. Sélectionner du texte et des images avec l'outil Main Permet à l'outil Main, lorsqu'il se trouve sur du texte dans un document Adobe PDF, de fonctionner de la même manière que l'outil Sélection. Lire des articles avec l'outil Main Change l'aspect du pointeur de l'outil Main lorsqu'il est sur une division d'un article. Lors du premier clic, l'article effectue un zoom pour occuper le panneau de visualisation dans le sens horizontal ; les clics suivants suivent la division de l'article. Activer le zoom de la molette de la souris avec l'outil Main Applique le zoom de la molette de la souris à la place du défilement. Sélectionner les images avant le texte avec l'outil Sélection Modifie l'ordre de sélection appliqué par l'outil Sélection. Utiliser la résolution fixe pour les images d'instantanés Définit la résolution utilisée pour copier une image capturée avec l'outil Instantané. Avertissements Ne pas afficher les avertissements d'édition Désactive les messages d'avertissement s'affichant habituellement lors de la suppression d'éléments tels que des liens, des pages, des vignettes ou des signets. Réinitialiser les avertissements Restaure les paramètres par défaut des avertissements. Imprimer Afficher les vignettes dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression Gère l'affichage de l'aperçu montrant le mode d'impression dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. La désactivation de cette option accélère l'aperçu. Transmettre un PostScript direct lors de l'impression Active l'émission des XObjects Adobe® PostScript® du fichier PDF lorsque ce dernier est imprimé sur une imprimante PostScript. Lancement de l'application Afficher l'écran d'introduction Détermine si l'écran d'introduction de l'application apparaît lors de chaque démarrage. Utiliser uniquement des modules externes certifiés Permet de vérifier que seuls des modules externes tiers certifiés par Adobe sont chargés. La notation Mode certifié actif indique Oui ou Non en fonction de son état. Rechercher les mises à jour Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, le programme vérifie les nouvelles mises à jour en fonction de l'intervalle défini dans les préférences de mise à jour d'Adobe.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 44 Espace de travail Vérifier l'accélérateur graphique 2D (Windows uniquement) (Apparaît uniquement si votre matériel informatique prend en charge l'accélération graphique 2D.) Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, permet d'utiliser l'accélération matérielle dès l'ouverture du premier document. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, l'accélération matérielle prend effet après l'ouverture du premier document. Comme la procédure de démarrage risque d'être plus longue avec cette option, elle est désactivée par défaut. Remarque : Elle est disponible à condition d'avoir sélectionné l'option Utiliser l'accélération graphique 2D dans les préférences d'affichage des pages. Voir aussi « Modification des préférences de mise à jour » à la page 60 Préférences d'affichage Mise en page et zoom par défaut Mise en page Définit la mise en page utilisée pour le défilement lors de la première ouverture d'un document. La valeur par défaut est Automatique. Le réglage de disposition de la page dans Fichier > Propriétés > Vue initiale a priorité sur le réglage correspondant dans les préférences. Zoom Définit le facteur de zoom utilisé à l'ouverture initiale des documents PDF. Cette valeur écrase celle définie pour le document. La valeur par défaut est Automatique. Résolution Utiliser les paramètres système Définit la résolution du moniteur en fonction des paramètres du système. Résolution personnalisée Définit la résolution du moniteur. Rendu Texte arrondi Indique le type de lissage de texte à appliquer. Dessins au trait Applique le lissage en vue d'éliminer les angles aigus des lignes. Images Applique le lissage en vue de réduire les changements abrupts dans les images. Utiliser les polices locales Indique si l'application utilise ou ignore les polices locales installées sur le système. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, des polices de substitution remplacent les polices non incorporées dans le document PDF. S'il est impossible de substituer une police spécifique, le texte est converti en puces et un message d'erreur s'affiche à l'écran. Optimiser les traits fins Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, les traits fins sont tracés de façon plus précise pour une meilleure visibilité. Mettre la page suivante en antémémoire Place la page suivante dans un tampon avant l'affichage de la page active, afin de réduire le temps de passage d'une page à l'autre dans un document. Utiliser l'accélération graphique 2D (Windows uniquement) (Apparaît uniquement si votre matériel informatique prend en charge l'accélération graphique 2D.) Accélère le zoom, le défilement et le retraçage du contenu des pages, ainsi que le rendu et la manipulation d'un contenu PDF 2D. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Remarque : Si cette option n'est pas disponible dans les préférences d'affichage des pages, vous devrez peut-être mettre à jour votre pilote de carte GPU pour activer cette fonction matérielle. Contactez votre distributeur de carte ou le fabricant de l'ordinateur pour obtenir le dernier pilote disponible.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 45 Espace de travail Contenu des pages et informations associées Afficher les images de grande taille Affiche les images volumineuses. Si votre système est trop lent pour afficher les pages contenant de nombreuses images, désactivez cette option. Utiliser le zoom progressif (Windows uniquement) Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, les effets d'animation sont désactivés, ce qui améliore les performances. Zones graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu Affiche toute zone définie d'un document : zone graphique, zone de rognage ou de fond perdu. Damier de transparence Affiche une grille derrière les objets transparents. Utiliser les numéros de page logiques Active la commande de numérotation des pages pour faire correspondre la position de la page dans le fichier PDF avec le numéro imprimé sur la page. Un numéro de page suivi de la position de la page entre parenthèses apparaît sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, ainsi que dans les boîtes de dialogue Atteindre la page et Imprimer. Par exemple, i (1 sur 1) si le numéro imprimé de la première page est i. Si cette option n'est pas sélectionnée, les numéros de pages sont calculés en utilisant les chiffres arabes et en commençant à 1. Sélectionner cette option permet d'éviter tout comportement inattendu lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Précédent ou Reculer du navigateur Web. Toujours afficher le format de page du document Affiche les dimensions de la page à côté de la barre de défilement horizontal. Utiliser l'aperçu de la surimpression Permet d'activer automatiquement ou systématiquement le mode Aperçu de la surimpression ou uniquement pour les fichiers PDF/X, ou au contraire, de ne jamais l'activer. Si vous choisissez Automatique, le mode Aperçu de la surimpression est activé si le document contient des surimpressions. Le mode Aperçu de la surimpression vous permet d'observer les effets (à l'écran) du pseudonyme d'encre sur la sortie imprimée. Un imprimeur ou un prestataire de service de prépresse peut, par exemple, créer un pseudonyme d'encre lorsque le document contient deux tons directs similaires alors qu'un seul est nécessaire. Mode d'affichage des XObjects de référence Afficher les cibles des XObjects de référence Indique le type de document dans lequel il est possible d'afficher les XObjects de référence. Emplacement des fichiers référencés (Facultatif) Indique l'emplacement des documents référencés. Ajustement de l'affichage des documents PDF Ajustement du facteur de zoom Les outils de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom peuvent modifier le facteur de zoom des documents PDF. Tous ces outils ne sont pas visibles par défaut sur la barre d'outils. Pour tous les afficher, cliquez sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez des outils individuels, l'option Afficher tous les outils ou encore Ajouter des outils, puis sélectionnez des outils spécifiques.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 46 Espace de travail Tous les outils de zoom A. Outil Zoom dynamique B. Outil Zoom dynamique C. Bouton Zoom arrière D. Bouton Zoom avant E. Bouton de menu Valeur de zoom F. Bouton Taille réelle G. Bouton Pleine largeur H. Bouton Page entière I. Panoramique et zoom outil J. Outil Loupe • L'outil Zoom de sélection peut être utilisé de différentes manières. Vous pouvez l'utiliser pour tracer un rectangle autour d'une partie de la page qui remplira la zone d'affichage. Vous pouvez aussi simplement cliquer sur l'outil Zoom de sélection pour augmenter le facteur de zoom selon un niveau prédéfini, qui centrera le point sur lequel vous avez cliqué. Pour réduire le facteur de zoom selon un niveau prédéfini, cliquez sur l'outil Zoom de sélection en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • L'outil Zoom dynamique permet d'effectuer un zoom avant lorsque vous le faites glisser vers le haut de la page et un zoom arrière lorsque vous le faites glisser vers le bas. Si votre souris est équipée d'une molette, l'outil effectue un zoom avant lorsque vous faites avancer la molette et un zoom arrière lorsque vous déplacez la molette dans le sens inverse. • Les outils Zoom avant et Zoom arrière changent le facteur d'agrandissement du document selon des niveaux prédéfinis. • L'option Valeurs du zoom modifie l'affichage de la page selon un pourcentage que vous tapez ou sélectionnez dans un menu déroulant. • L'outil Taille réelle affiche la page selon un facteur de zoom de 100 %. • L'outil Pleine largeur ajuste le facteur de zoom de sorte que le fichier PDF occupe la totalité du panneau de visualisation dans le sens horizontal. • L'outil Page entière ajuste le facteur de zoom, de sorte qu'une page occupe la totalité du panneau de visualisation dans le sens vertical. • La fenêtre Panoramique et zoom ajuste le facteur de zoom et la position de la zone d'affichage en fonction de la zone délimitée par un rectangle réglable visible dans la vue miniature de la page dans la fenêtre Panoramique et zoom. • La fenêtre de l'outil Loupe affiche une zone agrandie du document PDF correspondant à la zone définie par un rectangle réglable dans le panneau de visualisation. Redimensionnement d'une page en fonction de la taille de la fenêtre • Pour faire tenir la totalité de la page dans le panneau de visualisation, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Page entière. • Pour que la page occupe toute la largeur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Pleine largeur. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. • Pour que la page occupe toute la hauteur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Pleine hauteur. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. • Pour redimensionner la page de sorte que le texte et les images occupent toute la largeur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Contenu. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. Pour connaître les raccourcis clavier permettant de redimensionner le document, déroulez le menu Affichage. Affichage d'une page à sa taille réelle ? Choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Taille réelle. A B C D E F G H I JUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 47 Espace de travail La taille réelle d'une page PDF est habituellement 100 %. Cependant, le document peut avoir été défini sur un autre niveau de zoom lors de sa création. Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide des outils de zoom ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez le bouton Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière de la barre d'outils. • Indiquez un pourcentage d'agrandissement sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom, soit en tapant la valeur soit en choisissant une option dans le menu déroulant. • Faites glisser l'outil Zoom de sélection sur la zone de la page devant occuper le panneau de visualisation. • Faites glisser l'outil Zoom dynamique vers le haut pour augmenter le facteur de zoom et vers le bas pour le réduire. Lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est sélectionné, vous pouvez cliquer tout en appuyant sur la touche Ctrl ou maintenir la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant le glissement afin d'effectuer un zoom arrière. Si vous maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée, vous passez temporairement de l'outil Zoom de sélection à l'outil Zoom dynamique. Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide de l'outil Panoramique et zoom 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Panoramique et zoom ou sélectionnez l'outil Panoramique et zoom sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser les poignées du cadre situé à l'intérieur de la fenêtre Panoramique et zoom pour changer le facteur de zoom du document. • Faites glisser le centre du rectangle pour sélectionner la zone à afficher. • Cliquez sur les boutons de navigation pour changer de page. • Tapez une valeur dans la zone de texte de zoom ou cliquez sur les boutons plus ou moins pour changer de facteur d'agrandissement selon des niveaux prédéfinis. Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide de l'outil Loupe 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Loupe ou activez l'outil Loupe sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom (s'il est affiché). 2 Cliquez dans la zone du document que vous voulez agrandir. Un rectangle apparaît dans le document ; il correspond à la zone affichée dans la fenêtre Loupe. Vous pouvez faire glisser ou redimensionner le rectangle pour changer l'affichage de l'outil Loupe. 3 Pour changer le facteur de zoom de l'outil Loupe, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser le curseur. • Cliquez sur le bouton plus ou moins. • Saisissez une valeur dans la zone de texte Zoom.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 48 Espace de travail L'outil Loupe permet d'afficher une zone agrandie du document. Remarque : Pour modifier la couleur du rectangle de l'outil Loupe, déroulez le menu Couleur de trait situé dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre et sélectionnez une autre couleur. Changement du facteur de zoom à l'aide d'une vignette 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre pour afficher les vignettes. 2 Localisez la vignette associée à la page active. Placez ensuite le pointeur sur le coin inférieur droit du cadre indiquant la zone de la page jusqu'à ce que le pointeur prenne la forme d'une double flèche. 3 Faites glisser le coin du cadre afin de réduire ou d'agrandir la taille d'affichage de la page. 4 Le cas échéant, placez le pointeur sur le cadre de la zone de zoom de la vignette jusqu'à ce qu'il prenne la forme de l'icône Main. Faites ensuite glisser le cadre pour visualiser une autre partie de la page dans le panneau de visualisation du document. Le cadre figurant sur la vignette représente la zone de la page actuellement affichée dans le panneau de visualisation. Modification de l'affichage par défaut 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage. 2 Ouvrez le menu déroulant Zoom, puis choisissez un niveau de zoom par défaut. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 49 Espace de travail Affichage des zones hors écran d'une page agrandie Lorsque vous effectuez un zoom avant selon un facteur d'agrandissement élevé, vous verrez sans doute une partie seulement de la page. Vous pouvez décaler la vue afin de voir d'autres zones de la page sans changer de facteur de zoom. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Servez-vous des barres de défilement verticales pour passer aux pages précédente et suivante et utilisez les barres de défilement horizontales pour vous déplacer latéralement. • Sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom, sélectionnez l'outil Main ou choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Main, puis déplacez la page en la faisant glisser, comme si vous déplaciez une feuille sur une table. Voir aussi « A propos des calques PDF » à la page 375 Configuration de la mise en page et de l'orientation des pages La modification de la mise en page s'avère particulièrement utile lorsque vous voulez effectuer un zoom arrière afin d'avoir une vue d'ensemble de la disposition d'un document. Les types de mises en page suivants sont disponibles pour la visualisation des documents PDF : Une seule page Affiche une seule page à la fois, sans montrer aucune partie des pages adjacentes. Continue Affiche les pages selon une colonne verticale ininterrompue occupant la largeur d'une page. Deux pages Affiche chaque double page sans montrer aucune partie des pages adjacentes. Deux colonnes Affiche les pages du document côte à côte, selon une colonne verticale ininterrompue. Options de mise en page Une seule page, Une seule page en continu, Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu Définition de la mise en page • Pour visualiser une page à la fois, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Une seule page. • Pour visualiser deux pages à la fois, côte à côte, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Deux pages. • Pour faire défiler le document de manière ininterrompue une page après l'autre, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Une seule page en continu. • Pour faire défiler le document de manière ininterrompue deux pages à la fois, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Deux pages en continu. • Pour un document multipage, si vous souhaitez afficher la première page seule sur le côté droit, choisissez l'option Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu. Ensuite, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Afficher la page de couverture (option Deux pages). Vous pouvez également afficher des boutons pour chacune de ces options sur la barre d'outils d'affichage des pages en choisissant Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ajouter des outils et en les sélectionnant dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 50 Espace de travail Remarque : En mode Une seule page, choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner le texte complet sur la page active. Dans les autres mises en page, cette commande permet de sélectionner la totalité du texte du document PDF. Rotation de l'affichage d'une page Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage d'une page par incrément de 90 °. Cette opération modifie l'affichage de la page sans modifier son orientation réelle. Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer cette modification. ? Choisissez Affichage > Rotation > Horaire ou Antihoraire, ou cliquez sur le bouton Rotation horaire ou Rotation antihoraire de la barre d'outils. Remarque : Pour enregistrer la rotation avec le document, choisissez Document > Rotation de pages. Changement de mise en page par défaut 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage. 2 Ouvrez le menu Mise en page, puis choisissez Automatique, Une seule page, Une seule page en continu, Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu. Remarque : Le fichier PDF s'ouvre selon la disposition spécifiée dans les préférences, sauf si une disposition différente a été définie dans les propriétés du document (Fichier > Propriétés > Vue initiale). Le paramètre des propriétés du document a priorité sur le paramètre des préférences. Si vous utilisez les propriétés du document, veillez à enregistrer et à fermer le document pour que les modifications prennent effet. Les utilisateurs d'Acrobat peuvent modifier la vue initiale, sauf si les paramètres de sécurité le leur interdisent. Les utilisateurs de Reader ne peuvent pas modifier la vue initiale. Voir aussi « Ouverture d'un document PDF » à la page 25 Affichage du document dans une fenêtre fractionnée Vous pouvez afficher un document PDF avec le panneau de visualisation fractionné en deux (commande Fractionner) ou en quatre (commande Fractionner la feuille de calcul). La vue fractionnée vous permet de faire défiler le document, de changer son facteur de zoom ou d'afficher une autre page dans le panneau actif sans toutefois que cela ait une incidence sur l'affichage de l'autre panneau. La vue obtenue avec l'option Fractionner la feuille de calcul se révèle utile si vous voulez conserver l'affichage des entêtes de colonne et des libellés de rangée lorsque vous parcourez une feuille de calcul ou un tableau volumineux. Sous ce mode, lorsque vous modifiez le facteur d'agrandissement d'un panneau, le même facteur est appliqué à tous les panneaux. En outre, le défilement est coordonné entre les panneaux : le défilement à l'horizontale d'un panneau fait également défiler le panneau situé au-dessus ou en dessous ; le défilement à la verticale d'un panneau fait également défiler le panneau situé à sa gauche ou à sa droite. 1 Commencez à créer le type de vue fractionnée de votre choix : • Pour fractionner la vue en deux panneaux, choisissez Fenêtre > Fractionner ou faites glisser la zone grise située audessus de la barre de défilement verticale. • Pour fractionner la vue en quatre panneaux avec des niveaux de zoom et un défilement synchronisés, choisissez Fenêtre > Fractionner la feuille de calcul. 2 Faites glisser la barre de fractionnement vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite pour redimensionner les panneaux de manière appropriée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 51 Espace de travail 3 Ajustez le niveau de zoom comme vous le souhaitez : • Dans la vue fractionnée, cliquez sur un panneau pour l'activer et modifiez le niveau de zoom de ce panneau uniquement. • Dans la vue fractionnée de feuille de calcul, ajustez le niveau de zoom de manière à obtenir un affichage composé de quatre panneaux. 4 Effectuez un défilement de manière appropriée : • Dans la vue fractionnée, cliquez sur un panneau pour l'activer et effectuez un défilement pour modifier ce panneau uniquement. • Dans la vue fractionnée de feuille de calcul, cliquez sur un panneau et effectuez un défilement à la verticale pour modifier les vues dans le panneau actif et le panneau situé à côté. Effectuez un défilement à l'horizontale pour modifier les vues dans le panneau actif et le panneau situé au-dessous ou en dessous. 5 Choisissez Fenêtre > Supprimer le fractionnement pour revenir à un seul panneau. Affichage d'un document dans plusieurs fenêtres Vous pouvez créer plusieurs fenêtres pour un même document grâce à la commande Nouvelle fenêtre. Les nouvelles fenêtres ont les mêmes taille, facteur de zoom et disposition que la fenêtre d'origine. Elles s'ouvrent à la même page, en haut de la fenêtre d'origine. Lorsque vous ouvrez une nouvelle fenêtre, Acrobat ajoute le suffixe 1 au nom de fichier d'origine et affecte le suffixe 2 à la nouvelle fenêtre. Vous pouvez ouvrir plusieurs fenêtres. Le suffixe augmente pour chaque nouvelle fenêtre. La fermeture d'une fenêtre entraîne la renumérotation séquentielle des fenêtres encore ouvertes. En d'autres termes, si cinq fenêtres sont ouvertes et que vous fermez la troisième, les fenêtres sont renumérotées avec les suffixes 1 à 4. Remarque : Cette fonction n'est pas disponible lorsque les documents PDF sont affichées dans un navigateur. Ouverture d'une nouvelle fenêtre ? Choisissez Fenêtre > Nouvelle fenêtre. Fermeture d'une fenêtre ? Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la fenêtre. Le système vous invite à enregistrer les modifications. La fermeture d'une fenêtre ne ferme pas le document si plusieurs fenêtres sont ouvertes. Fermeture de toutes les fenêtres d'un document ? Choisissez Fichier > Fermer. Vous êtes invité à enregistrer les modifications avant la fermeture de chaque fenêtre. Affichage d'un document PDF en mode Epaisseurs de trait La vue Epaisseurs de trait affiche les traits contenant les épaisseurs définies dans le document PDF. La vue Epaisseurs de trait applique une épaisseur de contour constante (d'un pixel) aux traits, quel que soit le facteur de zoom appliqué. Lorsque vous imprimez le document, l'épaisseur de contour correspond à l'épaisseur réelle. ? Choisissez Affichage > Epaisseurs de trait. Pour désactiver le mode Epaisseurs de trait, choisissez à nouveau Affichage > Epaisseurs de trait. Remarque : Si vous affichez des documents PDF dans un navigateur Web, vous ne pourrez pas désactiver le mode Epaisseurs de trait.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 52 Espace de travail Grilles, repères et mesures Affichage des grilles Les grilles permettent d'aligner avec précision le texte et les objets d'un document. Lorsque la grille est activée, elle apparaît sur le document. L'option Aligner sur la grille aligne un objet sur la ligne de grille la plus proche lorsque vous le déplacez. Affichage ou masquage de la grille ? Choisissez Affichage > Grille. Une coche précède le nom de la commande lorsque la grille est affichée. Activation ou désactivation de l'option Accrocher à la grille ? Choisissez Affichage > Aligner sur la grille. Une coche apparaît en regard du nom de la commande lorsqu'elle est activée. Modification de l'aspect de la grille 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Pour modifier les paramètres de la grille, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier l'espacement entre les lignes de la grille, saisissez des valeurs pour les options Largeur des cellules et Hauteur des cellules. • Pour modifier l'origine de la grille, saisissez des valeurs pour les options Décalage par rapport au bord gauche et Décalage par rapport au bord supérieur. • Pour modifier le nombre de subdivisions de quadrillage, saisissez une valeur pour l'option Subdivisions. Les lignes de subdivision sont plus claires que celles de la grille. • Pour modifier la couleur des lignes de la grille, cliquez sur la nuance de couleur et choisissez une couleur dans la palette qui s'affiche. Création de repères de règle Les règles horizontales et verticales vous permettent de vérifier la taille des objets contenus dans des documents. Vous pouvez également créer des repères dans votre document. Ils se révèlent particulièrement utiles pour aligner des objets, tels que les champs de formulaire. Vous avez la possibilité de changer les unités de mesure et les couleurs utilisées dans les règles. Création de repères de règle 1 Choisissez Affichage > Règles. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser la règle horizontale vers le bas pour créer un repère horizontal ou la règle verticale vers la droite pour créer un repère vertical. • Cliquez deux fois sur un emplacement de la règle horizontale pour créer un repère vertical ou inversement. Affichage ou masquage des repères ? Choisissez Affichage > Repères.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 53 Espace de travail Déplacement ou suppression d'un repère de règle ? Cliquez sur un repère pour le sélectionner, puis faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement ou appuyez sur la touche de suppression. Pour supprimer tous les repères, cliquez dans la zone de la règle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Effacer tous les repères ou Effacer les repères de la page. Changement des couleurs de repères 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur des repères et choisissez une nouvelle couleur dans la palette qui s'affiche. Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l'aire d'un objet Servez-vous des outils de mesure pour mesurer l'aire des objets contenus dans des documents PDF ou la distance qui les sépare. Les outils de mesure sont très pratiques pour calculer les distances et les aires des objets d'un formulaire ou d'un dessin de CAO. Vous pouvez également les utiliser pour mesurer certaines zones d'un document avant d'envoyer celui-ci sur une imprimante professionnelle. Les outils de mesure sont uniquement disponibles si l'auteur du fichier PDF a activé cette fonctionnalité pour les utilisateurs de Reader. Lorsque vous utilisez un outil de mesure, la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures contient diverses informations au sujet de la mesure (opération en cours, valeurs delta et rapport d'échelle appliqué, par exemple). Outils de mesure A. Barre d'outils Mesures B. Objet mesuré C. Fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Mesures. 2 Pour mesurer des zones de vos documents PDF, procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : • Activez l'outil Distance pour mesurer la distance entre deux points. Cliquez sur le premier point, déplacez le pointeur sur le second point et cliquez de nouveau. • Activez l'outil Périmètre pour mesurer une série de distances entre plusieurs points. Cliquez sur chaque point à mesurer. Cliquez ensuite deux fois sur le dernier point. • Activez l'outil Aire pour mesurer l'aire des segments de ligne que vous tracez. Cliquez sur chaque point à mesurer. Après avoir cliqué sur les deux derniers points, cliquez de nouveau sur le premier pour valider la mesure. 3 Lorsque vous mesurez des objets, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour accrocher la mesure à une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux tracés . • Pour accrocher la mesure à l'extrémité d'une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux extrémités . A C BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 54 Espace de travail • Pour accrocher la mesure au milieu d'une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux points centraux . • Pour accrocher la mesure à l'intersection de plusieurs lignes, choisissez Accrocher aux intersections . • Pour déplacer les traits de mesure par incrément de 45º, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. • Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler la mesure. • Pour supprimer une annotation de mesure, cliquez dessus avec l'outil Mesures et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Voir aussi « Modification de l'aspect des commentaires » à la page 180 Options de l'outil de mesure Servez-vous du menu contextuel pour définir les options de l'outil de mesure. Modifier le rapport d'échelle Permet de changer le facteur d'échelle (3:2, par exemple) et l'unité de mesure sur des zones de dessin. Modifier le libellé de l'annotation Permet d'ajouter ou de changer le texte associé à la mesure. Activer/Désactiver les annotations de mesure Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont activées, les traits de mesure que vous tracez sont ajoutés au document PDF. Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont désactivées, les traits de mesure disparaissent dès que vous mesurez un autre objet ou sélectionnez un autre outil. Activer/Désactiver ortho Si vous choisissez Activer ortho, les traits de mesure sont des traits orthographiques uniquement. Afficher/Masquer les règles Affiche ou masque les règles verticales et horizontales sur la page. (A le même effet que la commande Affichage > Règles.) Accrocher au contenu de la page/Ne pas accrocher au contenu de la page Active ou désactive toutes les fonctions d'accrochage à la page. Annotation de mesure Enregistre, dans un fichier CSV, les données relatives à toutes les mesures effectuées dans votre document PDF. Préférences Donne accès aux préférences de mesure 2D. Préférences de mesure Les préférences de mesure 2D déterminent le mode de mesure des données 2D. Remarque : Dans Reader, les préférences de mesure s'appliquent aux fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaire est activée. Utiliser l'échelle et les unités du document (le cas échéant) Lorsque cette option est activée, ce sont les mesures basées sur les unités provenant du document d'origine qui sont utilisées. Désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement les unités de mesure. Utiliser les traits orthographiques Si vous choisissez Activer ortho, les traits de mesure sont des traits orthographiques uniquement. Couleur du trait de mesure Indique la couleur du trait affiché. Activer les annotations de mesure Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont activées, les traits de mesure que vous tracez sont ajoutés au document PDF. Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont désactivées, les traits de mesure disparaissent dès que vous mesurez un autre objet ou sélectionnez un autre outil. Vous pouvez utiliser les libellés de mesure par défaut ou spécifier vos propres libellés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 55 Espace de travail Utiliser la longueur de la ligne de repère par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Lorsque cette option est désactivée, chaque fois que vous mesurez une distance, il est nécessaire de déplacer la souris pour déterminer la longueur de la ligne de repère. Extrémité de trait par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Indique l'aspect des extrémités de la ligne lors des mesures des distances. Légende (outil Distance uniquement) Indique si la légende de la mesure de la distance doit figurer au niveau ou audessus du trait de mesure. Longueur de la ligne de repère par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la longueur de la ligne de repère affichée de l'un des côtés des points de mesure. Ligne d'attache par défaut au-dessus du trait (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la longueur de la ligne d'attache affichée au-dessus du trait de mesure. Décalage de la ligne de repère par défaut à partir des points (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la quantité d'espace comprise entre les points de mesure et la ligne de repère. Paramètres d'accrochage 2D Ces paramètres permettent de définir le comportement d'accrochage. L'option Sensibilité indique la distance à laquelle le pointeur doit se trouver de l'élément d'accrochage. L'option Couleur du conseil d'accrochage permet de choisir la couleur de la ligne d'accrochage visible lorsque le pointeur est placé sur l'objet Affichage des coordonnées du curseur L'option Coordonnées du curseur permet d'afficher la position du pointeur dans le panneau de visualisation. La numérotation de la position commence à partir du coin supérieur gauche du document. L'option Coordonnées du curseur indique également la largeur et la hauteur d'un objet sélectionné à mesure que vous le redimensionnez. Affichage des coordonnées X et Y 1 Choisissez Affichage > Coordonnées du curseur. 2 Déplacez le pointeur de la souris de manière à voir les coordonnées X et Y. Changement des unités de mesure de l'outil Coordonnées du curseur 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Dans le menu Unités de page et de règle, choisissez une unité de mesure différente. Organiseur Présentation de la fenêtre de l'organiseur L'organiseur vous aide à rechercher des fichiers PDF que vous avez déjà ouverts et d'autres que vous avez organisés en collections et favoris. Grâce à l'organiseur, vous pouvez visualiser les vignettes des pages PDF afin d'identifier rapidement les fichiers. Utilisez l'organiseur pour classer des fichiers PDF apparentés sans les déplacer dans la structure de fichiers. Il vous permet également de rechercher, de localiser et de trier rapidement des documents PDF consultés récemment. L'organiseur et les commandes associées sont disponibles à partir du menu Fichier. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers au sein de l'organiseur, vous pouvez lancer une des nombreuses tâches par l'intermédiaire des boutons situés au-dessus de la liste des fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 56 Espace de travail Fenêtre Organiseur sous Windows A. Panneau des catégories B. Panneau des fichiers C. Panneau des pages Panneau des catégories Le panneau des catégories de la fenêtre de l'organiseur est divisé en sections verticales comptant plusieurs catégories. Ces éléments ont pour objectif de faciliter l'identification et l'organisation de fichiers stockés sur votre ordinateur, sur le réseau et sur Internet. Historique Contient des sous-catégories qui répertorient tous les fichiers PDF ouverts pendant la période spécifiée. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le nom des sous-catégories ni ajouter manuellement de fichiers PDF à l'historique. Ce dernier est mis à jour automatiquement à chaque fois que vous ouvrez un fichier PDF et en fonction du temps qui passe. Vous pouvez, cependant, effacer tout l'historique par le biais du bouton Effacer l'historique du panneau des fichiers. Vous avez également la possibilité de spécifier la longueur maximale de l'historique des fichiers ou de désactiver cette fonction. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et, sous Documents, sélectionnez une valeur pour l'option Conserver les fichiers dans l'historique de l'organiseur pendant. Poste de travail Recense les disques durs et les dossiers figurant dans l'arborescence actuelle. Cette catégorie se révèle particulièrement utile si vous savez où se trouve un fichier PDF particulier. Emplacements favoris Recense les dossiers, emplacements réseau et répertoires Web définis en tant que destinations favorites. Cette catégorie fonctionne comme les signets et destinations favorites utilisés pour accéder plus rapidement à un emplacement à partir d'un navigateur Web. Dans ce cas, cependant, les destinations sont des dossiers ou des disques durs contenant des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des destinations dans la liste Emplacements favoris, mais vous ne pouvez pas modifier les noms de destination. Collections Contiennent des dossiers de collection qui répertorient tous les fichiers PDF que vous avez associés à chacun de ces dossiers. Chaque dossier de collection peut pointer vers plusieurs fichiers PDF, quel que soit leur emplacement. Par exemple, un seul dossier de collection peut répertorier des fichiers PDF situés dans différents dossiers sur votre ordinateur, sur un réseau et sur Internet. Vous pouvez modifier le nom de chaque dossier de collection, en ajouter de nouveaux et insérer des fichiers PDF dans chaque dossier de collection. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 57 Espace de travail Remarque : Les collections et les porte-documents PDF contiennent tous plusieurs documents PDF, mais de manières différentes. Un porte-documents PDF est lui-même un fichier PDF pouvant se composer de plusieurs fichiers PDF ; il est situé dans un dossier stocké sur votre ordinateur. Il est ainsi tout à fait possible de joindre un porte-documents PDF à un message électronique. Les collections s'apparentent aux mémos facilitant la recherche de fichiers connexes pouvant être disséminés sur votre ordinateur. Panneau des fichiers Le panneau des fichiers de la fenêtre Organiseur répertorie les fichiers PDF inclus dans la sous-catégorie ou le dossier sélectionné(s) dans le panneau des catégories. Chaque liste inclut le nom du fichier, la date de modification, le nombre de pages, la taille du fichier et l'emplacement correspondants, ainsi qu'une vignette de la première page. Vous pouvez trier la liste par nom de fichier, métadonnées, nombre de pages, taille du fichier, date de modification et date de la dernière ouverture. Les boutons situés en haut de la fenêtre de l'organiseur permettent d'ouvrir, d'imprimer, d'envoyer par messagerie ou de combiner un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF sélectionnés. En outre, vous pouvez envoyer un fichier PDF à des fins de révision ou d'approbation. Panneau des pages Le panneau des pages de la fenêtre Organiseur affiche des vignettes pour chaque page de tous les fichiers PDF sélectionnés dans le panneau des fichiers. Le curseur et les boutons de zoom situés au bas du panneau des pages vous permet d'ajuster la taille des vignettes de page. La sélection d'un document PDF (à gauche) entraîne l'affichage d'une vignette par page dans le panneau des pages (à droite). Ajustement de la fenêtre Organiseur Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage de l'organiseur. Voir aussi « Autres options de combinaison de fichiers » à la page 132 « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 167 Affichage de la fenêtre Organiseur ? Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > Ouvrir l'organiseur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 58 Espace de travail Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF faisant partie d'une collection, créer une collection, ajouter un document PDF ouvert à une collection ou ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir de l'historique des fichiers PDF ouverts, vous n'avez pas nécessairement à ouvrir la fenêtre Organiseur. Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur ou Fichier > Historique pour accéder aux commandes permettant d'exécuter ces opérations. Redimensionnement de la fenêtre Organiseur et de ses panneaux • Pour redimensionner un panneau par rapport aux autres, faites glisser la ligne verticale qui sépare deux panneaux. • Pour redimensionner la fenêtre Organiseur, faites glisser le bord gauche, droit ou inférieur de la fenêtre. Tri de la liste du panneau des fichiers 1 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier du panneau des catégories pour afficher les documents PDF dans le panneau des fichiers. 2 Dans le panneau des fichiers , effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour trier la liste des fichiers PDF en fonction d'une propriété précise, choisissez celle-ci dans le menu Trier par. • Pour modifier l'ordre de tri, cliquez sur le bouton Ordre de tri croissant ou Ordre de tri décroissant à droite du menu Trier par. • Pour afficher l'emplacement des fichiers PDF sélectionnés, cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Afficher dans l'Explorateur. Organisation des collections PDF Vous pouvez gérer les collections PDF dans la fenêtre Organiseur. Ajout d'un document PDF à une collection ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la collection avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. • Cliquez sur le fichier PDF dans le panneau des fichiers avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter à une collection > [nom de la collection]. • Faites glisser un fichier PDF à partir du bureau ou d'un dossier vers la collection voulue affichée dans le panneau des catégories. • Après avoir sélectionné une sous-catégorie dans la catégorie Historique, Poste de travail ou Emplacements favoris, faites glisser un fichier PDF à partir du panneau des fichiers vers la collection voulue. • Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le document PDF, puis choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > Ajouter à une collection. Sélectionnez ensuite la collection à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter le document PDF ou cliquez sur Créer une collection, saisissez un nom, puis cliquez sur Créer. Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir d'une collection, utilisez le bouton Ouvrir dans la fenêtre Organiseur ou choisissez tout simplement le nom du fichier PDF dans un sous-menu, directement dans Acrobat. Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir d'une collection dans Acrobat, choisissez Collections > [nom de collection] > [nom du fichier PDF] dans le sous-menu Fichier > Organiseur ou dans le menu Organiseur de la barre d'outils Fichier. Modification des dossiers de collections • Pour renommer une collection, cliquez sur son nom avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Renommer la collection, puis saisissez le nouveau nom.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 59 Espace de travail • Pour supprimer une collection, cliquez sur son nom avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Supprimer la collection, puis cliquez sur Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation. Les fichiers PDF inclus dans la collection ne sont pas supprimés de leur emplacement d'origine. • Pour créer une collection, cliquez sur le bouton Créer une collection dans la fenêtre Organiseur. Une autre solution consiste, dans Acrobat, à choisir Fichier > Organiseur > Créer une collection. Attribuez un nom à la collection. Déplacement d'un document PDF vers une autre collection ? Pour transférer le fichier PDF d'une collection à une autre, sélectionnez la collection où il se trouve, cliquez sur le fichier PDF en question avec le bouton droit de la souris dans le panneau des fichiers, puis choisissez Déplacer vers la collection > [nom de la collection]. Suppression d'un fichier PDF d'une collection ? Pour supprimer un document PDF d'une collection, sélectionnez la collection, cliquez sur le fichier PDF dans le panneau des fichiers, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Organisation de documents PDF à l'aide de la catégorie Emplacements favoris 1 Pour ajouter un dossier ou un disque dur existant à la catégorie, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un emplacement favori , sélectionnez un dossier ou un disque dur, puis cliquez sur OK. 2 Pour supprimer un dossier ou un disque dur de la liste des emplacements favoris, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer [nom du dossier] des emplacements favoris. Développement de vues dans le panneau des catégories Vous pouvez développer ou réduire les éléments du panneau des catégories de manière à voir plus clairement la structure. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une catégorie de dates, un dossier ou une collection, tous les fichiers PDF associés sont répertoriés dans le panneau des pages. Développement d'une catégorie de l'organiseur 1 Cliquez sur l'icône située à gauche de la catégorie ou du dossier. 2 Sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier sous une catégorie principale. Développement de la structure de fichiers ? Sélectionnez un dossier dans la catégorie Poste de travail. Tous les fichiers PDF inclus dans ce dossier sont répertoriés dans le panneau des fichiers. Lancement d'une tâche à partir du panneau des fichiers de l'organiseur 1 Dans le panneau des catégories, sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier dans une catégorie principale afin d'afficher les fichiers PDF dans ce panneau. 2 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers. 3 Pour effectuer une action sur les fichiers PDF sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'un des boutons de tâche situés en haut de la fenêtre de l'organiseur : • Pour ouvrir, imprimer ou envoyer par messagerie des fichiers PDF, utilisez les boutons au-dessus du panneau des fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 60 Espace de travail • Pour combiner des fichiers PDF en un seul fichier PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Combiner des fichiers, puis suivez les instructions de l'assistant. • Pour lancer une révision, sélectionnez le document PDF, puis choisissez le menu Envoyer en révision > Envoyer en révision partagée ou Envoyer en révision > Envoyer par messagerie pour révision. Voir aussi « Autres options de combinaison de fichiers » à la page 132 « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 167 Effacement de l'historique des fichiers PDF ouverts 1 Sélectionnez une sous-catégorie d'historique dans le panneau des catégories. 2 Cliquez sur Effacer l'historique dans le panneau des fichiers. Maintenance du logiciel A propos des mises à jour Il existe diverses méthodes pour mettre à jour les fichiers d'application et composants d'Acrobat. Certaines mises à jour sont disponibles à l'ouverture d'un document PDF, laquelle déclenche l'opération. Par exemple, si vous ouvrez un formulaire utilisant des polices asiatiques, vous êtes invité à télécharger ces polices. D'autres mises à jour sont uniquement disponibles à partir du menu Aide et doivent être installées manuellement. Certaines mises à jour sont disponibles à la fois automatiquement et manuellement. Selon la configuration des préférences, le téléchargement des mises à jour peut être effectué à l'arrière-plan. Mise à jour du logiciel ? Choisissez Aide > Vérifier les mises à jour et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Modification des préférences de mise à jour 1 Choisissez Aide > Rechercher les mises à jour. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue de mise à jour Adobe, cliquez sur Préférences. 3 Sélectionnez la vérification automatique des mises à jour d'Adobe. Ensuite, indiquez si la vérification automatique doit être hebdomadaire ou mensuelle et si vous souhaitez ou non confirmer à chaque fois le téléchargement des mises à jour. 4 Assurez-vous que l'application en cours d'exécution (Adobe Reader ou Adobe Acrobat) est sélectionnée comme le logiciel à mettre à jour. 5 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Parcourir pour accéder à l'emplacement où vous souhaitez stocker les mises à jour.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 61 Espace de travail Gestion des paramètres de sécurité Si votre société utilise des stratégies de protection serveur, vous pouvez configurer Acrobat de façon à vérifier régulièrement si ces stratégies ont fait l'objet de mises à jour. La protection serveur est mise en place par l'administrateur qui fournit l'adresse URL à partir de laquelle les mises à jour sont obtenues. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Protection. 2 Dans la section Paramètres de protection, sélectionnez Charger les paramètres de protection à partir d'un serveur. 3 Saisissez l'adresse du serveur dans le champ URL. 4 Choisissez la fréquence à laquelle vous souhaitez vérifier les mises à jour de la fonction de protection. 5 Choisissez Demander avant d'installer pour recevoir une notification avant chaque vérification. Gestion des modules externes Les modules externes ajoutent des fonctionnalités mais exigent davantage de mémoire que l'application seule. Afin de limiter le volume de mémoire nécessaire, installez seulement les modules externes que vous comptez utiliser. Pour un chargement correct, ils doivent se trouver dans le dossier Plug-ins. Il est également possible de désactiver temporairement les modules externes lorsque vous lancez le logiciel. Désactivation d'un module externe 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Windows) Ouvrez le dossier plug_ins (Program Files\Adobe\Acrobat 9.0\Acrobat\plug_ins). • (Mac OS) Cliquez sur l'icône de l'application en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, puis choisissez Afficher le contenu du progiciel. Ensuite, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier de contenu et ouvrez le dossier des modules externes. • (UNIX) Déplacez le module externe hors de [emplacement d'installation]/Adobe/Reader9.0/Reader/plug_ins. 2 Sélectionnez les modules externes que vous ne voulez pas charger, puis retirez-les du dossier. Certains d'entre eux peuvent se trouver dans des sous-dossiers du dossier Plug-ins. Désactivation temporaire de tous les modules externes ? Appuyez sur la touche Maj immédiatement après le lancement d'Acrobat. Adobe Digital Editions Utilisez le logiciel gratuit Adobe ® Digital Editions pour lire et organiser des livres électroniques ou autres publications. Digital Editions est une application RIA (Rich Internet Application) Internet autonome remplaçant les fonctions de livre électronique (eBook) des versions antérieures d'Acrobat. Lorsque vous installez Digital Editions, les éléments de votre bibliorom existant sont automatiquement importés et mis à disposition au sein du nouvel univers du bibliorom de Digital Editions. Vous pouvez également importer manuellement des documents PDF dans votre bibliorom Digital Editions. Remarque : Le logiciel Adobe Digital Editions est automatiquement installé sur votre ordinateur la première fois que vous ouvrez un livre électronique (eBook). Pour plus de détails sur Adobe Digital Editions et sur le téléchargement du logiciel, consultez le site Web d'Adobe à la page www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_digital_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 62 Espace de travail Langues non anglo-saxonnes Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques Acrobat permet d'afficher, de rechercher et d'imprimer des documents PDF contenant du texte en langues asiatiques (chinois traditionnel, chinois simplifié, japonais ou coréen). Vous pouvez également utiliser ces langues lorsque vous remplissez des formulaires, ajoutez des commentaires et apposez des signatures numériques. Presque toutes les fonctions Acrobat sont prises en charge pour du texte chinois traditionnel ou simplifié, japonais et coréen si vous installez les polices asiatiques. Dans Acrobat sous Windows, installez les fichiers de prise en charge des langues asiatiques via l'installation personnalisée et les options correspondantes disponibles sous Créer un fichier Adobe PDF et Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu. Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF, PDFMaker et l'imprimante Adobe PDF incorporent automatiquement la plupart des polices asiatiques dans le fichier. Vous pouvez spécifier si vous voulez incorporer des polices asiatiques. Sous Windows, vous pouvez afficher et imprimer les fichiers contenant du texte asiatique même si la prise en charge de ces langues n'est pas installée sur votre système. Si vous essayez d'ouvrir un fichier PDF nécessitant la prise en charge d'une langue, vous êtes automatiquement invité à installer les polices requises. Fichiers PDF en cyrillique, en langues d'Europe centrale et d'Europe de l'Est Vous pouvez utiliser des fichiers Adobe PDF contenant du texte cyrillique (y compris bulgare et russe), d'Europe centrale et d'Europe de l'Est (y compris tchèque, hongrois et polonais) si les polices sont incorporées dans les fichiers PDF. Il est alors possible de les afficher et de les imprimer sur n'importe quel système. L'incorporation des polices n'est pas nécessaire pour utiliser la fonction de recherche. Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans lequel des champs de formulaire ou des zones de texte contiennent ces langues, mais que les polices ne sont pas incorporées ni installées sur le système, choisissez Aide > Rechercher les mises à jour maintenant. Vous êtes automatiquement invité à télécharger et à installer les polices nécessaires. Fichiers PDF en hébreu, en arabe, en thaï et en vietnamien Acrobat prend en charge la saisie et l'affichage de textes en thaï et en vietnamien. Sous Windows uniquement, l'arabe et l'hébreu sont également pris en charge. L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est activée par défaut si vous utilisez les paramètres régionaux correspondant à l'arabe ou à l'hébreu (sous Windows). Activation des langues se lisant de droite à gauche L'activation des options de langues se lisant de droite à gauche permet d'afficher les éléments de l'interface utilisateur définissant le sens de lecture des paragraphes, le style des chiffres et la ligature. Si cette option est activée, vous pouvez spécifier le sens de l'écriture (de gauche à droite ou de droite à gauche) et le type des chiffres (occidental ou arabe) utilisé pour créer et remplir certains champs de formulaire, apposer des signatures numériques et créer des annotations de type zone de texte. L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est activée par défaut si vous utilisez les paramètres régionaux correspondant à l'arabe ou à l'hébreu. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Internationales. 2 Cochez la case Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 63 Espace de travail Acrobat sous Mac OS Acrobat fonctionne, en principe, de la même manière sous Windows et sous Mac OS. Les quelques exceptions sont signalées dans l'aide. Voici, en outre, la liste des principales différences à connaître : Raccourcis-clavier et fonctionnalités classiques Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences Pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Préférences sous Mac OS, choisissez Acrobat > Préférences. Développement d'une liste imbriquée Certains articles, tels que les signets, figurent parfois dans des listes imbriquées que vous pouvez développer ou réduire. Pour développer une liste sous Mac OS, cliquez sur le triangle pointant vers la droite à gauche de l'icône. Cliquez sur le triangle pointant vers le bas pour réduire la liste. Pour développer ou réduire tous les articles dans une liste constituée de plusieurs sous-niveaux, cliquez sur le triangle en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée. PDFMaker PDFMaker n'est pas disponible sous Mac OS. Il est possible, malgré tout, de créer un fichier PDF depuis de nombreuses applications de bureautique à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Imprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression, choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu Imprimante. Voir aussi « Raccourcis clavier » à la page 549 Windows Mac OS Cliquer avec le bouton droit Cliquer en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée Alt Option Ctrl+[caractère] Commande+[caractère] Cliquer en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée Cliquer en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée Faire glisser le pointeur en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée Faire glisser le pointeur en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée Poste de travail [nom du disque] Explorateur Windows Finder64 Chapitre 3 : Création d'un fichier PDF Le format Adobe® PDF est la solution idéale pour la capture d'informations à partir de n'importe quelle application et quel que soit le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir de pages vierges, de fichiers document, de sites Web, de documents papier numérisés et du contenu du Presse-papiers. Présentation de la création d'un fichier PDF Quelle est la meilleure manière de créer un fichier PDF ? La création d'un fichier PDF consiste à convertir des documents et des ressources d'un autre type au format PDF (Portable Document Format). Vous pouvez normalement choisir entre plusieurs méthodes de création, selon le type de fichier source et vos exigences concernant le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir de documents imprimés sur papier, de documents Microsoft Word, de fichiers InDesign® et d'images numériques, pour ne citer que quelques exemples. En fonction du type de la source, différents outils sont disponibles pour la conversion au format PDF. Dans la majorité des applications, vous créez un document PDF en sélectionnant l'imprimante Adobe PDF dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Si un fichier est ouvert dans l'application de création (par exemple, une feuille de calcul dans Excel), vous pouvez normalement le convertir au format PDF sans ouvrir Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional. De même, si Acrobat est déjà ouvert, il n'est pas nécessaire d'ouvrir l'application de création du fichier à convertir. Chaque fichier PDF établit un juste équilibre entre efficacité (taille de fichier réduite) et qualité (par exemple, résolution et couleurs). Si cet équilibre est essentiel dans votre cas, vous opterez pour une méthode permettant l'accès à divers paramètres de conversion. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF par un glisser-déposer de fichiers sur l'icône Acrobat. Dans ce cas, Acrobat applique les derniers paramètres de conversion utilisés sans vous y donner accès. Si vous souhaitez maîtriser davantage le processus de conversion, une autre méthode s'avère plus appropriée. Pour plus d'informations au sujet de la création de fichiers PDF, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Forums de la communauté d'utilisateurs Acrobat : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Création de fichiers PDF cohérents : www.adobe.com/cfusion/designcenter/search.cfm?product=Acrobat&go=Go • Création de fichiers PDF sur un Mac ou sous Windows : www.performancegraphics.com/Pages/howtof.html Voir aussi « Création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge » à la page 68 Méthodes de création d'un fichier PDF par type de fichier Reportez-vous aux listes suivantes afin de connaître les méthodes disponibles pour les différentes types de fichier. Principaux fichiers Ces méthodes s'appliquent aux documents et aux images présentés dans presque tous les formats de fichier. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 65 Création d'un fichier PDF Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans la plupart des applications, dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier. Menu contextuel Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Documents papier Nécessite un scanner et une copie papier du document. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un scanner. Ou, pour les documents papier déjà numérisés, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier. Menu Document Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande Numériser au format PDF. Documents Microsoft Office PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) Dans l'application de création, via la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et le menu Adobe PDF. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, sur le ruban Acrobat. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application d'origine, à partir de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer (Windows uniquement) Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier. Menu contextuel (Windows uniquement) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Messages électroniques PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) A partir de Microsoft Outlook ou de Lotus Notes, par un clic sur les boutons de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker. Autre solution : choisir les commandes disponibles dans le menu Adobe PDF (Outlook) ou Actions (Lotus Notes). Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application de messagerie, à partir de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Crée un fichier PDF (et non un porte-documents PDF). Menu contextuel (Outlook 2007 uniquement) Disponible pour un dossier de messages électroniques ou une sélection de messages, par un clic droit. Pages Web Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'une page Web. PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) Dans Internet Explorer ou en cours de modification dans l'application de création Web prenant en charge PDFMaker (telle que Word). Egalement sur la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou dans le menu Adobe PDF. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans Internet Explorer ou en cours de modification dans l'application de création Web (par exemple Word), dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier, en faisant glisser le fichier HTML. Menu contextuel (fichiers HTML) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic sur le fichier HTML avec le bouton droit de la souris. Contenu copié dans le Presse-papiers Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, en choisissant A partir du Presse-papiers (Windows, tout contenu) ou A partir de l'image du Presse-papiers (Mac OS, capture d'écran uniquement). Fichiers AutoCAD (Windows uniquement) Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 66 Création d'un fichier PDF PDFMaker Dans AutoCAD, sur la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou dans le menu Adobe PDF. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans AutoCAD, dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier. Menu contextuel Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Fichiers PostScript et EPS Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier, par glisser-déposer sur l'icône d'Acrobat Distiller ou dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller®. Double-clic (Fichiers PostScript® uniquement) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier. Ouvrir, commande Dans Acrobat Distiller, dans le menu Fichier. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application d'origine, à partir de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Menu contextuel Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Compromis entre la qualité et la taille des fichiers PDF Vous avez à disposition divers paramètres permettant de garantir le juste équilibre entre taille de fichier, résolution et conformité à des normes spécifiques, entre autres facteurs, pour votre fichier PDF. La sélection dépend de la destination prévue du fichier PDF. Par exemple, un fichier PDF destiné à une impression commerciale de haute qualité utilisera des paramètres différents d'un fichier PDF voué à l'affichage à l'écran ou au téléchargement sur Internet. Une fois sélectionnés, les paramètres s'appliquent à la fois à PDFMaker, Acrobat et Acrobat Distiller. Cependant, certains paramètres sont limités à des contextes ou types de fichiers particuliers. Par exemple, les options PDFMaker peuvent varier d'une application Microsoft Office à l'autre. Par souci de simplicité, Acrobat propose des jeux prédéfinis de paramètres de conversion. Vous pouvez en outre créer, définir, enregistrer et réutiliser des jeux personnalisés, spécialement adaptés à vos besoins. Pour les documents numérisés, vous disposez de plusieurs paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation optimisés pour la numérisation de documents et d'images en couleurs ou en noir et blanc. Vous pouvez modifier ces paramètres prédéfinis ou créer les vôtres. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 Création d'un fichier PDF simple avec Acrobat Conversion d'un fichier au format PDF 1 Dans Acrobat, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un fichier. • Sur la barre d'outils, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et choisissez A partir d'un fichier. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, sélectionnez le fichier. Vous pouvez parcourir tous les types de fichiers ou en sélectionner un particulier dans le menu Fichiers de type.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 67 Création d'un fichier PDF 3 Cliquez éventuellement sur Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de conversion. Les options disponibles varient selon le type de fichier. Remarque : Le bouton Paramètres est indisponibles si vous choisissez Tous les fichiers comme type de fichier ou si aucun paramètre de conversion n'est disponible pour le type sélectionné. 4 Cliquez sur Ouvrir pour convertir le fichier au format PDF. Selon le type de fichier choisi, l'application de création s'ouvre automatiquement et une boîte de dialogue de progression s'affiche. Si le format du fichier n'est pas pris en charge, un message s'affiche pour vous indiquer que la conversion au format PDF est impossible. 5 Lorsque le nouveau fichier PDF s'ouvre, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer ou Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. S'il est destiné à une diffusion électronique, limitez le nom de fichier à huit caractères (sans espace) et adjoignez-lui l'extension .pdf. De cette manière, les programmes de messagerie électronique et les serveurs réseau ne tronqueront pas le nom du fichier PDF, qui s'ouvrira comme prévu. Voir aussi « Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker » à la page 83 « Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF » à la page 125 Création d'un fichier PDF par glisser-déposer Pour une plus grande efficacité, il est préférable de réserver cette méthode aux petits fichiers simples, tels que les fichiers image et les fichiers texte brut, lorsque l'équilibre entre taille de fichier et qualité de sortie n'est pas primordial. Cette technique applicable à de nombreux types de fichiers ne vous permet cependant pas d'ajuster les paramètres de conversion en cours de processus. 1 Sélectionnez les icônes d'un ou de plusieurs fichiers. 2 Faites-les glisser vers l'icône de l'application Acrobat. Autre solution possible (sous Windows uniquement), faites glisser les icônes dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat ouverte. Si un message s'affiche indiquant que le fichier ne peut être ouvert dans Acrobat, cela signifie que ce type de fichier ne permet pas la conversion au format PDF par glisser-déposer. Utilisez une autre des méthodes de conversion disponibles pour ce fichier. Remarque : Vous pouvez également convertir des fichier PostScript et EPS au format PDF en les faisant glisser dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller ou sur l'icône de cette application. 3 Enregistrez le document PDF. (Windows uniquement) Vous pouvez également cliquer sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris dans l'Explorateur Windows et choisir Créer un fichier PDF. Conversion du contenu du Presse-papiers au format PDF (Windows) Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir du texte et d'images que vous copiez depuis n'importe quelle application. 1 Capturez le contenu du Presse-papiers, soit en utilisant la commande Copier de l'application source, soit en appuyant sur la touche Impr. Ecran. 2 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir du Presse-papiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 68 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : La commande A partir du Presse-Papiers s'affiche uniquement lorsqu'un contenu a été copié dans le Pressepapiers. Si le Presse-papiers est vide, la commande est grisée. Conversion de captures d'écran au format PDF (Mac OS) Sous Mac OS, vous avez la possibilité de créer des fichiers PDF à partir de captures d'écran. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > [A partir de la capture d'écran, A partir de la capture de fenêtre ou A partir de la capture de sélection]. • Servez-vous de l'utilitaire Capture (disponible via Applications > Utilitaires > Capture) afin de capturer une image d'écran, puis choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier l'image dans le Presse-papiers. Lancez ensuite Acrobat, puis choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir de l'image du Presse-Papiers. Remarque : La commande A partir de l'image du Presse-Papiers s'affiche uniquement lorsqu'une image a été copiée dans le Presse-papiers. Si le Presse-papiers est vide ou s'il contient du texte, la commande n'apparaît pas. Création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge Grâce à la fonction d'éditeur PDF, vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge (plutôt que d'un fichier), d'une image du Presse-papiers ou d'une numérisation. Cette méthode peut s'avérer utile lors de la création de fichiers PDF relativement petits, d'une vingtaine de pages au maximum. Dans le cas de documents plus longs, plus complexes ou au formatage conséquent, il est en général plus indiqué de créer le document source dans une application qui offrira davantage d'options de mise en page et de formatage, par exemple Adobe InDesign ou Microsoft Word. Remarque : L'éditeur PDF permet uniquement d'effectuer des modifications de texte dans les fichiers PDF créés à partir de pages vierges. Pour insérer une page vierge dans un document PDF créé d'une autre manière, créez un document vierge dans une autre application, puis convertissez ce fichier au format PDF. Importez ensuite le fichier vide dans le document PDF existant. Création d'un fichier PDF vierge et ajout de texte 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page vierge. 2 Commencez à saisir le texte à ajouter à la page. 3 Pour formater le texte, sélectionnez-le puis choisissez les options qui vous intéressent sur la barre d'outils Nouveau document. 4 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez d'autres outils et options. 5 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. Remarque : Dès que la page est remplie de texte, l'éditeur PDF ajoute automatiquement une nouvelle page au document. Modification du texte dans un fichier PDF créé à partir d'une page vierge 1 Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir, puis localisez et sélectionnez un fichier PDF créé à l'aide de l'éditeur PDF (c'est-à-dire créé à partir d'une page vierge). 2 Choisissez Document > Reprendre la modification. 3 Ajoutez du texte et formatez-le comme vous le souhaitez. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 69 Création d'un fichier PDF Prévention des modifications dans l'éditeur PDF Vous pouvez geler le texte que vous avez ajouté à un fichier PDF créé à partir d'une page vierge. Ainsi, personne ne peut en ajouter ou le modifier. Cette opération ne peut être annulée. 1 Choisissez Document > Interdire toute modification supplémentaire. 2 Dans le message qui apparaît, cliquez sur Interdire toute modification supplémentaire. Ou cliquez sur Conserver le texte modifiable si vous souhaitez continuer à ajouter du texte ou à le modifier dans l'éditeur PDF. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier ou conservez le nom et l'emplacement existant afin de remplacer le fichier d'origine par la version non modifiable. Préférences de l'éditeur PDF Les préférences de l'éditeur PDF sont disponibles via la boîte de dialogue Préférences, dans la catégorie Nouveau document. Police Indique la famille de polices utilisée par défaut lors de la saisie sur une nouvelle page vierge. Corps Indique le corps de la police par défaut. Marges par défaut Spécifie la distance de décalage par rapport au bord de la page : Gauche, Droite, En haut, En bas. Format (dans la zone Page par défaut) Spécifie le format de papier standard, par exemple Lettre, Tabloïd, A4, etc. Orientation Indique si le bord long de la feuille est à l'horizontale (Paysage) ou à la verticale (Portrait). Création de plusieurs fichiers PDF à partir de plusieurs fichiers Vous avez la possibilité de créer plusieurs fichiers PDF à partir de multiples fichiers natifs, notamment des fichiers de différents formats pris en charge, au cours d'une seule opération. Cette méthode s'avère pratique dans le cadre d'opérations de conversion de nombreux fichiers au format PDF. Remarque : Dans ce cas, Acrobat applique les derniers paramètres de conversion utilisés sans vous y donner accès. Si vous souhaitez ajuster les paramètres de conversion, faites-le avant d'utiliser cette méthode. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > Créer plusieurs fichiers par lot. 2 Choisissez Ajouter des fichiers > Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter des dossiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers ou dossiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de fichiers cible, puis cliquez sur OK. Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF Vous pouvez créer directement un fichier PDF à partir d'un document papier numérisé à l'aide d'un scanner et d'Acrobat. Sous Windows XP et Windows Vista, Acrobat prend en charge les pilotes de scanner TWAIN et WIA (Windows Image Acquisition). Remarque : Il est en outre possible de numériser des formulaires papier de manière à les convertir en formulaires PDF interactifs. Voir « Création et diffusion de formulaires » à la page 207. Sous Windows, lors de la création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner, vous pouvez choisir le paramètre prédéfini de numérisation le plus adapté au type de document en cours de conversion. (Les paramètres prédéfinis mis à disposition sont les suivants : Document en noir et blanc, Document en niveaux de gris, Document en couleurs et Image en couleurs). Autre solution possible, vous numérisez des documents à l'aide de paramètres personnalisés que vous pouvez ajuster dans les paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 70 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : La numérisation prédéfinie est uniquement disponible pour les pilotes de scanner prenant en charge le mode Masquer l'interface native du scanner. Les paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation ne sont pas disponibles sous Mac OS. Sous Windows, si un pilote WIA est installé pour votre scanner, vous pouvez également utiliser le bouton Numériser de votre appareil afin de créer un document PDF. Appuyez sur le bouton Numériser, puis sous Windows, choisissez Adobe Acrobat dans la liste des applications enregistrées. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat Scan, sélectionnez un scanner et un paramètre prédéfini de document ou l'option Numérisation personnalisée. Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF à l'aide d'un paramètre prédéfini (Windows) 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > [ paramètre prédéfini de document]. 2 Si vous êtes invité à numériser d'autres pages, sélectionnez Numériser davantage de pages ou Numérisation terminée, puis cliquez sur OK. Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF sans recourir à des paramètres prédéfinis 1 Dans Acrobat, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Windows) Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > Numérisation personnalisée. • (Mac OS) Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner. 2 Sélectionnez les options de numérisation pertinentes dans la boîte de dialogue Numérisation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur Numériser. Remarque : Si vous spécifiez préférer utiliser l'interface utilisateur native du scanner plutôt que celle d'Acrobat, d'autres fenêtres ou boîtes de dialogue s'affichent. Pour plus de détails sur les options disponibles, consultez la documentation du scanner. Sous Mac OS, l'interface utilisateur du scanner est toujours visible. 3 Si vous êtes invité à numériser d'autres pages, sélectionnez Numériser davantage de pages ou Numérisation terminée, puis cliquez sur OK. Optimisation d'un document PDF numérisé 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF créé à partir d'un document numérisé. 2 Choisissez Document > Optimiser le fichier PDF numérisé. 3 Sélectionnez les options voulues dans la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK. Les options disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Optimiser le fichier PDF numérisé sont les mêmes que celles de la boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation, décrites à la section du même nom dans cette rubrique. Configuration de paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation (Windows) 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres prédéfinis : Document en noir et blanc, Document en niveaux de gris, Document en couleurs ou Image en couleurs. 3 Configurez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder le paramètre prédéfini, puis sur OK. Options de numérisation Scanner Sélectionnez un scanner installé. Le logiciel de numérisation du fabricant doit être installé sur l'ordinateur. Sous Windows uniquement, cliquez sur le bouton Options afin de spécifier les options du scanner.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 71 Création d'un fichier PDF Faces Spécifiez s'il s'agit d'une numérisation recto seul ou recto verso. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Recto verso alors que le scanner est configuré pour la numérisation recto seul, les paramètres du scanner prennent le pas sur ceux d'Acrobat. Remarque : Vous pouvez numériser le recto et le verso, même sur les scanners qui ne prennent pas en charge la numérisation recto verso. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Recto verso, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche après numérisation des rectos. Vous pouvez ensuite inverser les documents originaux dans le bac, sélectionnez Numériser le verso (recto de la feuille) dans la boîte de dialogue. Cette méthode génère un fichier PDF respectant l'ordre des pages. Mode colorimétrique (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez un mode colorimétrique de base (Couleur, Noir et blanc ou Niveaux de gris) pris en charge par le scanner. Cette option est activée si, dans les options de scanner, vous avez défini l'utilisation de la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat à la place de celle du scanner. Résolution (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez une résolution prise en charge par le scanner. Cette option est activée si, dans les options de scanner, vous avez défini l'utilisation de la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat à la place de celle du scanner. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez un mode colorimétrique ou une résolution non pris en charge par le scanner, un message s'affiche et la fenêtre de l'application du scanner s'ouvre. Sélectionnez les options appropriées dans la fenêtre de l'application du scanner. Format de papier (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez un format de papier ou définissez une largeur et une hauteur personnalisées. Inviter à numériser d'autres pages Lorsque cette case est cochée, une boîte de dialogue vous invitant à numériser d'autres pages s'affiche après la numérisation de chaque page. Créer un document PDF Crée un fichier PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Fichiers multiples Crée plusieurs fichiers à partir de multiples documents papier. Cliquez sur Options, puis indiquez si un porte-documents des fichiers doit être créé, précisez le nombre de pages de chaque fichier et tapez le préfixe de nom de fichier à utiliser. Ces options ne sont pas disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Ajouter à un fichier ou à un porte-documents existant Ajoute les pages numérisées à un fichier ou porte-documents PDF existant. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Petite taille/Qualité supérieure Utilisez le curseur afin d'équilibrer la taille de fichier et la qualité d'image. Cliquez sur Options pour personnaliser l'optimisation à l'aide de paramètres spécifiques de compression de fichier et de filtrage. Indexation (ROC) Activez cette option afin de convertir les images texte présentes dans le fichier PDF en texte indexable et sélectionnable. Cette option applique aux images de texte la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC), la reconnaissance des polices et celle des pages, puis les convertit en texte normal. Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option ajoute également des balises au document, afin de le rendre plus accessible aux personnes handicapées. Cliquez sur Options pour configurer des paramètres spécifiques dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Voir « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 74. Rendre compatible avec la norme PDF/A Sélectionnez cette option pour rendre le document PDF conforme aux normes ISO relatives à PDF/A-1b. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, seule la valeur Image indexable (exacte) du paramètre Style de sortie PDF est disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Ajouter des métadonnées Si cette option est sélectionnée, la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du document s'ouvre après la numérisation. Dans cette boîte de dialogue, vous pouvez ajouter au fichier PDF des métadonnées ou des informations relatives au document numérisé. Si vous créez plusieurs fichiers, vous avez la possibilité de définir des métadonnées communes à tous les fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 72 Création d'un fichier PDF Boîte de dialogue Options de scanner Méthode de transfert des données Mode natif effectue le transfert selon le mode par défaut du scanner. Mode de mémoire est automatiquement sélectionné pour la numérisation à des résolutions supérieures à 600 ppp (points par pouce). Interface utilisateur L'option Masquer l'interface native du scanner permet de contourner les fenêtres et boîtes de dialogue fournies par le fabricant du scanner. Acrobat les remplace par la boîte de dialogue Numérisation personnalisée. Inverser les images en noir et blanc Cette option crée des images positives à partir de négatifs en noir et blanc, par exemple. Boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation La boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation permet de gérer le filtrage et la compression des images numérisées pour créer le fichier PDF. Les paramètres par défaut conviennent à un large éventail de documents, mais vous pouvez les personnaliser afin d'accroître la qualité des images, de réduire la taille des fichiers ou de remédier à des problèmes de numérisation. Automatique Applique les paramètres par défaut pour équilibrer la taille du fichier et la qualité d'image. • Optimisation importante Applique des paramètres qui réduisent la taille du fichier. Dans certains cas, la sélection de cette option a un effet négatif visible sur la qualité du fichier PDF numérisé. Paramètres personnalisés Affiche des paramètres supplémentaires sous Compression et Filtrage, et désactive l'option Agressive sous Automatique. Si vous sélectionnez Paramètres personnalisées, vous disposez des paramètres Couleur/Niveaux de gris et Monochrome, selon l'option choisie dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat Scan. Couleur/Niveaux de gris Lors de la numérisation de pages en couleurs ou en niveaux de gris, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Sans perte N'applique pas la compression ou les filtres, tels que Redressement, Suppression de l'arrière-plan, etc., aux pages numérisées. • Adaptative Divise la page en zones noir et blanc, niveaux de gris et couleur, puis choisit la méthode qui permet de compresser au maximum le contenu de chaque zone tout en préservant l'aspect de la page. Les résolutions de numérisation recommandées sont les suivantes : 300 ppp (points par pouce) en niveaux de gris et en couleurs RVB, et 600 ppp en noir et blanc. • JPEG Applique la compression JPEG à toutes les zones en niveaux de gris ou RVB de la page. Remarque : Le scanner utilise soit l'option Couleur/Niveaux de gris sélectionnée, soit l'option Monochrome. L'option utilisée dépend des paramètres sélectionnés dans la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat ou dans l'interface TWAIN du scanner, qui peut s'ouvrir lorsque vous cliquez sur Numériser dans la boîte de dialogue d'Acrobat. (Par défaut, la boîte de dialogue de l'application du scanner ne s'ouvre pas.) Monochrome Lors de la numérisation d'images en noir et blanc ou monochrome, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • JBIG2 Applique la méthode de compression JBIG2 aux pages en noir et blanc. Un paramètre de 0,95 ou plus correspond à la méthode sans perte ; en deçà, la compression du texte est élevée. La taille des pages de texte est en général inférieure de 60 % à celle des pages compressées en CCITT - Groupe 4, mais le traitement est plus long. Compatible avec Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) ou version ultérieure. Remarque : Pour assurer la compatibilité avec Acrobat 4.0, utilisez une méthode de compression autre que JBIG2. • Adaptative (Comme décrit à la section Couleur/Niveaux de gris.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 73 Création d'un fichier PDF • CCITT - Groupe 4 Applique la compression CCITT - Groupe 4 aux pages en noir et blanc. Cette méthode de compression rapide et avec un minimum de pertes est compatible avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) et version ultérieure. Redressement Fait pivoter toute page qui ne suit pas parfaitement les côtés du scanner afin d'aligner la page PDF verticalement. Choisissez Automatique ou Désactivé(e). Suppression de l'arrière-plan Blanchit les zones presque blanches des numérisations en couleurs ou niveaux de gris (mais pas en noir et blanc). Pour des résultats optimaux, étalonnez votre scanner à l'aide des paramètres de contraste et de luminosité afin que la numérisation d'une page en noir et blanc normale produise une page avec du texte gris ou noir et un arrière-plan blanc. Les options Désactivé(e) ou Faible doivent alors donner les meilleurs résultats. En cas de numérisation de papier blanc cassé ou de papier journal, utilisez l'option Moyen(ne) ou Elevé(e) pour nettoyer la page. Suppression des ombres sur les contours Supprime les raies noires qui peuvent apparaître sur les contours des pages numérisées, là où la lampe du scanner est obscurcie par le bord du papier. Choisissez Désactivé(e), Modérée ou Agressive. Flou intérieur Supprime les tâches noires qui peuvent apparaître à différents endroits d'une page en noir et blanc. L'option Faible utilise un microfiltre de base alors que les options Moyen(ne) et Elevé(e) utilisent à la fois un microfiltre et un filtre plus large pour supprimer les tâches plus importantes situées plus loin des éléments à conserver. Détramage Supprime la trame formée par les points en demi-teinte, qui peut réduire la compression JPEG, créer des effets moirés ou rendre la reconnaissance de texte plus difficile. Convient aux numérisations RVB ou niveaux de gris de 200 à 400 points par pouce ou, avec la compression adaptative, aux numérisations en noir et blanc de 400 à 600 ppp. Le paramètre Automatique (recommandé) applique le filtre aux numérisations RVB et niveaux de gris de 300 ppp ou plus. Choisissez l'option Désactivé(e) lorsque vous numérisez une page sans image ni zones remplies ou si la résolution de numérisation est en dehors de la plage d'efficacité du filtre. Suppression du halo Si cette option est définie sur Activé(e) (recommandé), elle supprime l'excès de couleurs sur les contours à forts contrastes. Cet excès de couleur peut survenir lors de la numérisation comme de l'impression. Ce filtre ne s'applique qu'aux images en couleurs. Conseils relatifs à la numérisation • Acrobat peut numériser des images dont la résolution est comprise entre 10 et 3000 points par pouce. Si vous sélectionnez l'option de style de sortie PDF Image indexable ou ClearScan, la résolution d'entrée doit être supérieure ou égale à 72 points par pouce mais pas supérieure à 600 ppp (dans ce cas, elle est sous-échantillonnée pour obtenir une résolution inférieure ou égale à 600 ppp). • Pour appliquer la compression sans perte à une image numérisée, sélectionnez l'une de ces options dans la section Compression de la boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation : CCITT - Groupe 4 pour les images monochromes ou Sans perte pour les images en couleur ou niveaux de gris. Si cette image est jointe à un document PDF et que le fichier est sauvegardé à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer, l'image numérisée reste non compressée. Si le document PDF est sauvegardé à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer sous, il se peut que l'image numérisée soit compressée. • Dans la plupart des cas, la numérisation de pages en noir et blanc à 300 ppp produit le résultat le plus adapté à une conversion. A 150 ppp, la précision de la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) est légèrement inférieure et un plus grand nombre d'erreurs peut survenir dans la reconnaissance des polices. A 400 ppp et au-delà, le traitement est ralenti et la compression des pages moindre. Lorsque le document contient des termes non reconnus ou des caractères de petite taille (9 points ou moins), essayez de numériser à une résolution supérieure. Numérisez autant que possible vos documents en noir et blanc. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 74 Création d'un fichier PDF • Lorsque l'option Reconnaître du texte par ROC est désactivée, un éventail complet de résolutions (comprises entre 10 et 3 000 points par pouce) est disponible, mais la résolution recommandée demeure 72 ppp (ou plus). Dans le cas d'une compression adaptative, il est recommandé de choisir une résolution de 300 ppp pour les pages en niveaux de gris et RVB et de 600 ppp pour les pages en noir et blanc. • La numérisation de pages en couleurs 24 bits, à 300 ppp et au format 21,59 x 27,94 cm entraîne la création d'images volumineuses (25 Mo) avant la compression. Il est possible que votre système nécessite 50 Mo de mémoire virtuelle (ou plus) pour effectuer la numérisation. Avec une résolution de 600 ppp, la numérisation et le traitement sont en général quatre fois plus lents qu'avec une résolution de 300 ppp. • Evitez d'utiliser les options de simulation et de demi-teintes du scanner. Ces paramètres peuvent améliorer l'aspect des photographies, mais empêchent la bonne reconnaissance du texte. • Si vous souhaitez numériser un texte imprimé sur du papier couleur, augmentez la luminosité et le contraste d'environ 10 %. Si le scanner reconnaît le filtrage des couleurs, pensez à utiliser un filtre ou un éclairage qui élimine la couleur d'arrière-plan. Si le texte n'est pas suffisamment net, essayez de régler le contraste et la luminosité du scanner afin d'obtenir une numérisation plus précise. • Si votre scanner permet de régler manuelle la luminosité, réglez-le de manière que les caractères soient plus nets et mieux formés. Si les caractères sont accolés, augmentez la valeur de luminosité ; s'ils sont trop éloignés, réduisez-la. Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé Vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat pour reconnaître le texte d'un document numérisé au préalable et converti au format PDF. Le logiciel de reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) vous permet d'indexer, de corriger et de copier le texte d'un document PDF numérisé. Pour que la reconnaissance optique des caractères soit applicable au fichier PDF, la résolution d'origine doit être de 72 ppp ou plus. Remarque : Une numérisation effectuée à 300 ppp génère le texte le plus adapté à la conversion. Avec une résolution de 150 ppp, la précision de la ROC est légèrement inférieure. Voir aussi « Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page » à la page 134 Reconnaissance du texte d'un document unique 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF numérisé. 2 Choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte > Reconnaissance du texte par OCR. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte, sélectionnez une option dans la zone Pages. 4 Cliquez éventuellement sur Modifier pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, puis spécifiez les options selon vos besoins. Reconnaissance du texte de plusieurs documents 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte par ROC > Reconnaître le texte de plusieurs fichiers par ROC. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paper Capture - Traitement de plusieurs fichiers, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez ensuite les fichiers ou le dossier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez un dossier cible pour les fichiers de sortie, les préférences de nom de fichier et un format de sortie. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 75 Création d'un fichier PDF Reconnaissance de texte dans les fichiers PDF composants d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF numérisés dans un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte > Reconnaissance du texte par OCR. 3 Réglez les options de la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, boîte de dialogue Langue de ROC principale Détermine la langue que le moteur de ROC doit utiliser pour identifier les caractères. Style de sortie PDF Détermine le type de fichier PDF à générer. Toutes les options nécessitent une résolution d'entrée de 72 ppp ou plus (recommandé). Tous les formats appliquent aux images de texte la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC), la reconnaissance des polices et celle des pages, puis les convertissent en texte normal. • Image indexable Rend le texte compatible avec la recherche et sélectionnable. Cette option conserve l'image d'origine, applique un redressement selon les besoins et insère un calque de texte invisible. L'option choisie pour le paramètre Sous-échantillonner les images dans cette même boîte de dialogue indique si l'image est sous- échantillonnée et le niveau de sous-échantillonnage. • Image indexable (exacte) Rend le texte compatible avec la recherche et sélectionnable. Cette option conserve l'image d'origine et insère un calque de texte invisible (recommandée lorsque l'image doit être la plus fidèle possible à l'image d'origine). • ClearScan Synthétise une nouvelle police Type 3 qui simule approximativement l'originale et conserve l'arrièreplan des pages dans une copie basse résolution. Sous-échantillonner les images Réduit le nombre de pixels des images en couleurs, en niveaux de gris et monochromes suite à la reconnaissance optique des caractères. Choisissez le degré de sous-échantillonnage à appliquer. Les options les plus élevées produisent un sous-échantillonnage moindre, et donc des fichiers PDF de résolution supérieure. Activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web dans un fichier PDF L'affichage rapide des pages Web consiste en la restructuration du document PDF en vue du téléchargement individuel des pages (utilisation optimale des octets) à partir de serveurs Web. Grâce à l'affichage Web rapide, le serveur Web envoie la seule page demandée, et non l'ensemble du document PDF. Cette option s'avère particulièrement utile pour les documents volumineux dont le téléchargement à partir d'un serveur requiert un temps considérable. Vérifiez auprès de votre webmestre que le logiciel de serveur Web que vous utilisez prend en charge le téléchargement page par page. Pour garantir l'affichage des documents PDF de votre site Web dans les navigateurs plus anciens, vous pouvez également créer des liens HTML vers les documents en question (plutôt que des scripts ASP ou la méthode POST) et utiliser des chemins d'accès relativement courts (256 caractères ou moins). Vérifiez que l'affichage rapide des pages Web est activé pour le fichier PDF existant ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Vérifiez le réglage (Oui ou Non) du paramètre d'affichage rapide des pages Web dans la partie inférieure droite du panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue. • (Windows uniquement) Cliquez sur l'icône du fichier PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. Cliquez sur l'onglet PDF et vérifiez le réglage (Oui ou Non) du paramètre d'affichage rapide des pages Web au bas du panneau.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 76 Création d'un fichier PDF Vérification des préférences d'affichage rapide des pages Web Suivez cette procédure pour vérifier que la configuration d'Acrobat permet l'activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web lors du processus de création d'un fichier PDF. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Dans la partie droite de la boîte de dialogue, sous Paramètres d'enregistrement, vérifiez que l'option Enregistrement optimisé pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web est activée, puis cliquez sur OK. Activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web dans un fichier PDF existant Suivez cette procédure après avoir vérifié les préférences d'affichage rapide des pages Web et contrôlé dans les propriétés du fichier PDF que cette fonction n'était pas déjà activée. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. Indiquez le même nom de fichier et le même emplacement. 3 Lorsqu'un message apparaît pour vous demander de confirmer l'écrasement du fichier existant, cliquez sur OK. Il est par ailleurs possible d'activer l'affichage rapide des pages Web pour des dossiers entiers de fichiers Adobe PDF grâce à une séquence par lot. Voir « Exécution d'une séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie » à la page 381. Utilisation de l'imprimante Adobe PDF Création d'un document PDF par impression dans un fichier Dans de nombreuses applications de création, vous pouvez utiliser la commande d'impression et l'imprimante Adobe PDF pour convertir le fichier ouvert au format PDF. Votre document source est converti au format PostScript et envoyé directement à Distiller pour conversion au format PDF sans que vous ayez à démarrer manuellement Distiller. Les paramètres actifs de préférence de Distiller et d'Adobe PDF sont utilisés pour la conversion du fichier. Si vous utilisez un format de page non standard, créez un format de page personnalisé. Remarque : (Windows) Pour les documents Microsoft Office, l'imprimante Adobe PDF ne comprend pas toutes les fonctions disponibles à partir de PDFMaker. Vous ne pouvez pas, par exemple, créer de signets et de liens hypertexte à partir de l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Si vous créez un fichier PDF à partir d'un document Microsoft Office et que vous souhaitez inclure ces fonctions, utilisez PDFMaker. Remarque : L'imprimante Adobe PDF crée des fichiers PDF non balisés. Une structure balisée est requise pour la redistribution du contenu vers un ordinateur de poche et est préférable pour l'obtention de bons résultats avec un lecteur d'écran. Voir aussi « Création d'un fichier PDF accessible » à la page 312 « Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) » à la page 80 Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande d'impression (Windows) 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application de création, puis choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu des imprimantes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 77 Création d'un fichier PDF 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés (ou Préférences) si vous souhaitez personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF. (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Mise en page dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences.) 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Par défaut, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans le dossier spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue. L'emplacement par défaut est Mes documents. Le nom et l'emplacement du fichier sont gérés par le paramètre Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF dans la boîte de dialogue. Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande d'impression (Mac OS) 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application de création, puis choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu des imprimantes. 3 Choisissez les options PDF dans le menu déroulant sous les zones des paramètres prédéfinis (qui affichent peut- être les copies et les pages par défaut). 4 Choisissez l'un des paramètres Adobe PDF proposés par défaut ou personnalisez les paramètres à l'aide de Distiller. Tous les paramètres personnalisés que vous avez définis sont répertoriés dans cette liste. La plupart des utilisateurs se contenteront des paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF par défaut. 5 Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ou non ouvrir le fichier PDF après sa création. 6 Cliquez sur Imprimer. 7 Sélectionnez un nom et un emplacement pour le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : Par défaut, le fichier PDF est doté du même nom que le fichier d'origine, suivi de l'extension .pdf. Préférences d'impression d'Adobe PDF (Windows) Les préférences d'impression sont appliquées à toutes les applications qui utilisent l'imprimante Adobe PDF, à moins que vous n'ayez configuré autrement l'application de création via le menu Mise en page, Configuration du document ou Imprimer. Remarque : La boîte de dialogue de configuration des préférences d'impression peut porter différents noms selon la manière dont vous y accédez (Options d'impression, Propriétés ou Préférences d'impression d'Adobe PDF, par exemple). Pour accéder aux préférences d'impression : • Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Options d'impression. • Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF et cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés (ou Préférences). (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Configuration dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences pour personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF.) Des options propres au format PDF s'affichent sous l'onglet Paramètres Adobe PDF. Les onglets Papier/qualité et Disposition proposent des options courantes relatives à la source papier, à l'encre de l'imprimante, à l'orientation des pages et au nombre de pages par feuille. Remarque : Les préférences d'impression diffèrent des propriétés de l'imprimante. Les préférences comprennent des options spécifiques pour le processus de conversion au format Adobe PDF. La boîte de dialogue des propriétés contient des panneaux avec des options pour tout type d'imprimante. Paramètres Adobe PDF Dans le menu Paramètres par défaut, sélectionnez un jeu d'options prédéfini ou cliquez sur le bouton Modifier afin d'afficher ou de modifier les paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 78 Création d'un fichier PDF Protection Adobe PDF Pour protéger le fichier PDF, choisissez l'une des options suivantes ou cliquez sur Modifier pour afficher ou changer les paramètres de protection : • Reconfirmer chaque fois la protection Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Adobe PDF - Protection chaque fois que vous créez un fichier PDF avec l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Spécifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue. • Dernières options de protection connues Utilise les mêmes paramètres de protection que ceux utilisés lors de la dernière création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF sur cet ordinateur. Sortie Adobe PDF Choisissez le dossier de sortie du fichier converti au format PDF ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour ajouter un dossier de sortie ou en changer. Sélectionnez l'option Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF pour spécifier un emplacement et un nom de fichier au moment de la conversion. Menu Format de page PDF Sélectionnez un format de page personnalisé que vous avez défini. Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu Lance automatiquement Acrobat pour afficher immédiatement le document converti. Ajouter les informations sur le document Inclut des informations telles que le nom du fichier et la date et l'heure de création. Se limiter aux polices système ; ne pas utiliser les polices du document Désactivez cette option pour télécharger les polices lors de la création du fichier PDF. Toutes les polices seront disponibles dans le fichier PDF, mais sa création sera plus lente. Conservez cette option activée si vous travaillez sur documents en langue asiatique. Supprimer les fichiers journaux des travaux effectués Supprime automatiquement les fichiers journaux, sauf si le travail échoue. Confirmer le remplacement d'un fichier PDF Vous avertit lorsque vous êtes sur le point d'écraser un fichier PDF existant avec un fichier du même nom. Voir aussi « Création et utilisation d'un format de page personnalisé » à la page 80 Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF (Windows) Sous Windows, la configuration par défaut des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF est généralement satisfaisante, à moins que vous n'ayez défini le partage d'imprimante ou activé les paramètres de sécurité. Remarque : Les propriétés d'impression diffèrent des préférences de l'imprimante. La boîte de dialogue des propriétés contient des panneaux d'options applicables à tout type d'imprimante ; les préférences proposent des options de conversion spécifiques à l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 1 Ouvrez le panneau Imprimantes et télécopieurs depuis le menu Démarrer, puis cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris. 2 Choisissez Propriétés dans le menu contextuel. 3 Cliquez sur les onglets et sélectionnez les options comme vous le souhaitez. Redéfinition du port utilisé par l'imprimante Adobe PDF 1 Le cas échéant, quittez Distiller et attendez que tous les travaux placés dans la file d'attente de l'imprimante Adobe PDF soient achevés. 2 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 79 Création d'un fichier PDF 3 Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports, puis sur le bouton Ajouter un port. 5 Dans la liste Types de ports disponibles, sélectionnez le port Adobe PDF, puis cliquez sur Ajouter un port. 6 Sélectionnez un dossier local destiné aux fichiers de sortie PDF, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Cliquez ensuite sur Fermer pour quitter la boîte de dialogue. 7 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés d'Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. Pour optimiser les résultats, sélectionnez un dossier situé sur le système sur lequel Distiller est installé. Bien que les dossiers distants ou réseau soient pris en charge, ils connaissent des problèmes d'accès utilisateur et de protection. Suppression d'un dossier et redéfinition de l'imprimante Adobe PDF au port par défaut 1 Le cas échéant, quittez Distiller et attendez quelques minutes que tous les travaux placés dans la file d'attente d'Adobe PDF soient achevés. 2 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer. 3 Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports. 5 Sélectionnez le port par défaut, Mes documents, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 6 Sélectionnez le port à supprimer, cliquez sur Supprimer le port, puis choisissez Oui pour confirmer la suppression. 7 Sélectionnez à nouveau le port Mes documents, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Configuration de l'imprimante Adobe PDF (Mac OS) Sous Mac OS, vous devez configurer l'imprimante Adobe PDF dans Distiller, dans le menu Format d'impression de votre application de création et dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression de votre application de création. 1 Dans Distiller, spécifiez les paramètres Adobe PDF, l'emplacement des polices et la protection. 2 Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Format d'impression. 3 Sélectionnez Adobe PDF 9.0 dans le menu Pour. 4 Le cas échéant, spécifiez le format de papier, l'orientation et l'échelle. 5 Dans l'application de création, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Adobe PDF 9.0 dans le menu Imprimante. 6 Dans le menu déroulant sous le menu Paramètres prédéfinis, choisissez Options PDF, puis définissez l'une des options suivantes : • Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres de conversion prédéfinis dans le menu Paramètres Adobe PDF si vous souhaitez écraser les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres par défaut sont les paramètres actuellement définis dans Distiller. • Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ouvrir les fichiers convertis dans Acrobat depuis le menu Après la création du fichier PDF. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres d'impression comme vous le souhaitez dans les autres menus disponibles sous le menu Paramètres prédéfinis.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 80 Création d'un fichier PDF Création et utilisation d'un format de page personnalisé Il est important de faire la distinction entre le format de page (tel qu'il est défini dans la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression de l'application source de votre document) et le format de papier (la feuille de papier, le morceau de film, une zone de plaque d'impression sur lesquels l'impression est réalisée). Le format de page peut être Lettre US (21,59 par 27,94 cm) mais l'impression doit s'effectuer sur une feuille de papier ou un film plus grand pour inclure les repères d'impression ou le fond perdu. Pour garantir l'impression correcte du document, configurez le format de page dans l'application source et dans l'imprimante. La liste des formats de papier disponibles dans Acrobat provient du fichier PPD (imprimantes PostScript) ou du pilote d'imprimante (imprimantes non-PostScript). Si l'imprimante et le fichier PPD que vous avez choisis pour l'impression PostScript prennent en charge les formats de papier personnalisés, une option personnalisée s'affiche dans le menu Papier. Pour les imprimantes capables de produire des zones d'impression très larges, Acrobat prend en charge les pages mesurant jusqu'à 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces) par 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces). Création d'un format de page personnalisé (Windows) 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs à partir du menu Démarrer. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Options d'impression. • Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF et cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés. (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Configuration dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences pour personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF.) 2 Sous l'onglet Paramètres Adobe PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter en regard du menu Format de page d'Adobe PDF. 3 Spécifiez le nom, la largeur, la hauteur et l'unité de mesure. Cliquez sur Ajouter/Modifier pour ajouter au menu déroulant des formats de page Adobe PDF celui que vous venez de créer. Création d'un format de page personnalisé (Mac OS) 1 Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Format d'impression. 2 Dans le menu déroulant Format du papier, sélectionnez Gérer les formats personnalisés. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton +. 4 Spécifiez le nom, la hauteur, la largeur et les marges. L'unité de mesure dépend de la langue du système. Utilisation du format de papier personnalisé 1 Choisissez Fichier > Configuration de l'impression. 2 Sélectionnez le nouveau format de page personnalisé dans le menu Papier. Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) A propos d'Acrobat PDFMaker La fonction PDFMaker d'Acrobat s'exécute au sein de nombreuses applications de bureautique, telles que la suite Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes. Après installation d'Acrobat, les commandes PDFMaker apparaissent dans la zone de travail de l'application de création. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 81 Création d'un fichier PDF L'utilisation de PDFMaker dans une application de création est une procédure simple qui ne requiert qu'un seul clic. Vous devez cliquer sur un bouton de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou choisir une commande dans le menu Adobe PDF. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'ouvrir Acrobat. Conversion d'un fichier à l'aide de PDFMaker Sous Windows, l'installation d'Acrobat insère la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et le menu Adobe PDF dans de nombreuses applications de création. Pour créer un fichier PDF, vous pouvez utiliser soit les boutons de la barre d'outils, soit le menu Adobe PDF (le menu Actions dans Lotus Notes). Le menu permet cependant d'accéder aux paramètres de conversion. Bien que la plupart des paramètres de conversion soient communs à toutes les applications de création, certaines applications présentent des options spécifiques. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, les options de création de fichiers PDF sont disponibles à partir du ruban Acrobat. Remarque : Si la barre d'outils PDF n'est pas visible dans une application, affichez-la ou activez-la. Voir aussi « Personnalisation des paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 110 « Création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion et publipostage Word » à la page 88 Affichage ou activation de PDFMaker dans les applications Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes Si les boutons de la barre d'outils PDF ne sont pas visibles dans les applications Microsoft Office ou Lotus Notes, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour afficher ou activer PDFMaker. Dans Lotus Notes 7 ou version antérieure, choisissez Fichier > Préférences > Préférences de la barre d'outils. Cliquez sur Barres d'outils, puis activez l'option Visible en regard d'Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0. Dans Lotus Notes 8 ou version ultérieure, choisissez Fichier > Préférences. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, choisissez Barre d'outils > Barres d'outils, puis activez l'option Visible en regard d'Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0. Dans les applications Office 2003 ou antérieures, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0. Dans les applications Office 2007, effectuez les opérations suivantes : 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Outils > Trust Center. • (Autres applications Office) Cliquez sur le bouton Office, puis sur le bouton Options d'[application], où [Application] désigne l'application Office qui vous intéresse. Par exemple, dans Word, le nom du bouton Options Word. 2 Cliquez sur Compléments dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si le complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook n'apparaît pas dans la liste, sélectionnez Complément COM dans le menu déroulant Gérer, puis cliquez sur Atteindre. • Si le complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook figure dans la liste des compléments désactivés, sélectionnez Eléments désactivés dans le menu déroulant Gérer, puis cliquez sur Atteindre. 4 Sélectionnez Complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Relancez l'application Office.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 82 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion d'un fichier au format PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF sur le ruban Acrobat. 3 Indiquez un nom et un emplacement pour le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Création d'un fichier PDF comme pièce jointe à un message électronique 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007 telles que Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et joindre à un message du ruban Acrobat. Lorsque la conversion est terminée, un message vide s'ouvre automatiquement dans l'application de messagerie par défaut avec, en pièce jointe, le nouveau fichier PDF. Vous pouvez adresser et remplir le message, puis l'envoyer ou l'enregistrer comme brouillon. Attachement d'un fichier au format PDF (Outlook) 1 Dans fenêtre Message de Outlook, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF. Remarque : Si le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF n'est pas visible, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion, puis cochez l'option Afficher les boutons Joindre au format Adobe PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Outlook 2007. 2 Sélectionnez un fichier à attacher et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Conversion de fichiers en fichier PDF protégé à joindre à un message électronique (Outlook) 1 Dans la fenêtre de message d'Outlook, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé . Remarque : Le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé apparaît uniquement après que vous avez configuré un serveur Adobe Live Cycle® Right Management Server à l'aide du menu Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Parcourir, sélectionnez un fichier à convertir, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Spécifiez les utilisateurs qui peuvent ouvrir le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur OK : • Pour spécifier uniquement les destinataires du fichier PDF, sélectionnez Restreindre l'accès aux personnes des listes A, Cc: et Bcc: de ce message. Dans ce cas, le fichier PDF n'est protégé qu'une fois que vous avez envoyé le message électronique. • Pour spécifier uniquement les utilisateurs définis par une stratégie de protection, sélectionnez Restreindre l'accès en appliquant la stratégie de protection suivante, puis sélectionnez une stratégie dans la liste. Dans ce cas, le fichier PDF est sécurisé avant d'être joint au message électronique. 4 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe afin de vous connecter à Adobe Live Cycle Right Management Server. Création d'un fichier PDF à envoyer en révision 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer pour révision de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker, ou (le cas échéant) choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer pour révision. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 83 Création d'un fichier PDF Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et envoyer en révision du ruban Acrobat. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité qui s'affiche, entrez les informations qui vous concernent, puis cliquez sur Terminer. 4 Suivez les indications de l'assistant qui s'affiche, comme décrit à la section « Lancement d'une révision par messagerie électronique » à la page 168. Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker Les paramètres de conversion PDFMaker varient en fonction des types de fichier. Par exemple, les options disponibles pour un fichier PowerPoint ne sont pas identiques à celles proposées pour les fichiers Outlook. Une fois que vous avez sélectionné les paramètres de conversion, vos choix s'appliquent désormais à tous les fichiers PDF créés à partir de ce type de fichier. Il est conseillé de revoir les paramètres de temps à autre. 1 Ouvrez une application compatible avec PDFMaker (par exemple, Word ou Excel). 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. • (Applications Office 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, cliquez sur Préférences. • (Toute autre application) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. 3 (Facultatif) Pour revenir aux paramètres d'origine par défaut, cliquez sur Rétablir les valeurs par défaut sous l'onglet Paramètres. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 94 Onglet Paramètres des paramètres de conversion Les paramètres disponibles de PDFMaker dépendent de l'application dans laquelle vous utilisez cet outil. Paramètres de conversion Spécifie la norme d'optimisation du fichier PDF. Lorsque vous effectuez une sélection dans le menu, une description de l'élément choisi s'affiche immédiatement en dessous. Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu Ouvre le document converti directement dans Acrobat. (Exception : lorsque vous choisissez Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie.) Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF Permet d'entrer un nom de fichier personnalisé pour le fichier PDF obtenu. Désactivez cette option pour enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF dans le même dossier que le fichier source en utilisant le même nom, suivi de l'extension .pdf. Convertir les informations sur le document Ajoute les informations relatives au document issues de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du fichier source. Ce paramètre remplace les préférences de l'imprimante et les paramètres du panneau Avancés de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Remarque : Le bouton Paramètres avancés ouvre la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF, qui contient d'autres paramètres de conversion. Ces paramètres de conversion s'appliquent à toutes les fonctions Acrobat de création de fichiers PDF, telles que Acrobat Distiller, PDFMaker et à l'application Acrobat elle-même. Créer un fichier PDF conforme à la norme PDF/A Crée le fichier PDF dans le respect de la norme ISO relative à la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. (Dans l'application Microsoft Publisher uniquement, PDFMaker ne prend pas en charge la norme PDF/A.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 84 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Si vous accédez aux paramètres de conversion à partir de Word, Excel ou PowerPoint, cette option indique PDF/A 1-a:2005. Si vous y accédez à partir de Microsoft Visio, Access, Microsoft Project ou AutoCAD, elle indique PDF/A 1-b:2005. Onglet Protection des paramètres de conversion Les paramètres disponibles de PDFMaker dépendent de l'application dans laquelle vous utilisez cet outil. Exiger un mot de passe pour l'ouverture du document La sélection de cette option active la zone Mot de passe d'ouverture, dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir le mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent indiquer pour pouvoir ouvrir le document. Restreindre la modification et l'impression du document L'activation de cette option rend les autres options disponibles. Mot de passe de modifications des droits d'accès Permet de définir le mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent indiquer pour effectuer une impression ou des modifications autorisées. Impression autorisée Spécifie si les utilisateurs qui utilisent le mot de passe d'accès aux droits peuvent imprimer le document et à quelle résolution. Modifications autorisées Spécifie les types de modification autorisées pour les utilisateurs détenant le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Autoriser la copie de texte, d'images et d'autre contenu Empêche ou autorise les utilisateurs à copier des éléments du fichier PDF. Activer l'accès au texte pour les lecteurs d'écran destinés aux malvoyants Empêche ou autorise l'accès au texte par les lecteurs d'écran. (Option activée par défaut.) Autoriser les métadonnées en texte brut Indique si le moteur de recherche peut lire les métadonnées du document. Disponible uniquement si le paramètre de compatibilité PDF est Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) ou version ultérieure. Conversion de fichiers Microsoft Word, PowerPoint et Excel au format PDF Lors de la création d'un document PDF à partir de Microsoft Word, PowerPoint ou Excel, vous pouvez définir les options de conversion du fichier actif. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'étendue du contenu du fichier à convertir. Les options de conversion que vous pouvez configurer dans les étapes suivantes comptent parmi les paramètres les plus fréquemment utilisés de la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker. Toutes les modifications que vous apportez aux options de conversion s'appliquent uniquement à la conversion active. Voir aussi « Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker » à la page 83 « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 94 Conversion de fichiers Excel au format PDF 1 Ouvrez un fichier dans Excel. 2 Sélectionnez éventuellement les cellules à convertir. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Office 2003 ou version antérieure) Dans le menu Adobe PDF, sélectionnez l'une des options de conversion au format Adobe PDF. • (Office 2007) A partir du ruban Acrobat, sélectionnez l'une des options de création.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 85 Création d'un fichier PDF 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sélectionnez l'étendue de la conversion, puis cliquez sur Convertir au format PDF. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, spécifiez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. 6 Cliquez éventuellement sur le bouton Options afin de modifier les paramètres de conversion. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour générer le fichier PDF. Conversion de fichiers Word et PowerPoint au format PDF 1 Ouvrez un fichier dans Word ou PowerPoint. 2 Sélectionnez éventuellement des objets et du texte (Word) ou des diapositives (PowerPoint), selon les besoins. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Office 2003 ou version antérieure) Dans le menu Adobe PDF, sélectionnez l'une des options de conversion au format Adobe PDF. • (Office 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, sélectionnez Créer un fichier PDF, Créer et joindre à un message ou Créer et envoyer en révision. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, spécifiez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. 5 Cliquez éventuellement sur le bouton Options afin de modifier les paramètres de conversion. 6 Sélectionnez une étendue de pages (Word) ou une étendue de diapositives (PowerPoint). L'option Sélection est uniquement disponible lorsque vous avez sélectionné au préalable des éléments dans le fichier. 7 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Enregistrer pour générer le fichier PDF. Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF Vous pouvez utiliser PDFMaker pour convertir un ou plusieurs messages électroniques de Microsoft Outlook ou Lotus Notes, ou des dossiers complets de messages en porte-documents PDF ou en fichier PDF fusionné. Au sein d'un portedocuments, chaque message électronique constitue un fichier PDF distinct. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion d'Acrobat PDFMaker contient l'option qui détermine si les messages électroniques sont fusionnés en un seul fichier PDF ou combinés dans un porte-documents PDF. Dans l'application de messagerie, les commandes qui activent la conversion au format PDF de messages électroniques sont disponibles en deux endroits : sur la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et dans un menu. Dans Outlook, le menu s'intitule Adobe PDF et apparaît à droite du menu d'aide d'Outlook. Dans Lotus Notes, les commandes PDF s'affichent dans le menu Actions. Pour convertir un message électronique actuellement ouvert au format PDF (et non dans un porte-documents PDF), choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Les paramètres de conversion PDFMaker n'ont aucun impact sur ce processus. Une vidéo sur l'archivage des courriers électroniques au format PDF au sein d'un porte-documents PDF est disponible à l'adresse http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook. Voir aussi « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 94 « Création et gestion d'un index dans un document PDF » à la page 395UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 86 Création d'un fichier PDF Indiquez si les messages électroniques sont à fusionner en fichiers PDF ou à combiner en porte-documents PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour convertir au format PDF et fusionner des messages électroniques en une série de pages consécutives au sein du même document, désactivez l'option Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF. • Pour assembler des messages électroniques convertis en tant que composants d'un porte-documents PDF, activez l'option Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF. Conversion d'un message électronique ouvert au format PDF (Outlook) ? Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF Vous pouvez également convertir un fichier différent au format PDF depuis un message électronique Outlook ouvert, si la barre d'outils Joindre au format Adobe PDF s'affiche. Vous accédez ainsi à une série de boîtes de dialogue permettant la sélection et l'enregistrement du nouveau document PDF et lancez également Acrobat, s'il n'est pas déjà en cours d'exécution. Le document PDF résultant est joint au message électronique ouvert. Conversion de messages électroniques en nouveau fichier PDF 1 Dans Outlook ou Lotus Notes, sélectionnez les messages électroniques individuels. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les messages sélectionnés > Créer un fichier PDF. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Convertir les messages sélectionnés au format Adobe PDF. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, sélectionnez un emplacement, indiquez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout de messages électroniques ou de dossiers à un fichier PDF existant 1 Dans Outlook ou Lotus Notes, sélectionnez les messages électroniques individuels ou les dossiers. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les messages sélectionnés > Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant ou Adobe PDF > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés > Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. Remarque : Si vous avez déjà créé un ou plusieurs porte-documents, vous pouvez faire votre choix parmi les portedocuments récemment créés en plus de l'option Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Ajouter les messages sélectionnés à un fichier Adobe PDF existant ou Actions > Ajouter les dossiers sélectionnés à un fichier Adobe PDF existant. 3 Localisez et sélectionnez le fichier ou le porte-documents PDF auquel vous souhaitez ajouter les messages convertis, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Important : N'entrez pas de nouveau nom pour le fichier PDF. Si vous le faites, un message d'avertissement s'affiche pour vous indiquer que le fichier PDF est introuvable. Cliquez sur OK et sélectionnez un fichier PDF sans modifier son nom.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 87 Création d'un fichier PDF 4 (Outlook uniquement) Si un message s'affiche afin de vous signaler que le fichier PDF existant a été créé à l'aide d'une version antérieure de PDFMaker, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un porte-documents PDF à partir de l'archive PDF d'origine, cliquez sur Oui et sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement de la nouvelle archive. (Le nom par défaut ajoute _Porte-documents au nom du fichier PDF d'origine.) Une fois la conversion terminée et la boîte de dialogue de création du fichier Adobe PDF fermée, la nouvelle archive s'ouvre dans Acrobat. • Cliquez sur Non et annulez le processus. Remarque : Dans le cas des porte-documents PDF de messages électroniques convertis à partir d'Acrobat 8 ou migrés vers cette version (ou une version ultérieure), seuls les nouveaux messages (autrement dit, les messages ne faisant pas déjà partie du porte-documents PDF) sont ajoutés. Conversion de dossiers de messages électroniques au format PDF PDFMaker peut convertir plusieurs dossiers au format PDF en une seule fois. Il est inutile de sélectionner ces dossiers au début de la procédure, car une boîte de dialogue vous le proposera ultérieurement. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés > Créer un fichier PDF. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés au format Adobe PDF. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les dossiers au format PDF, sélectionnez les dossiers à convertir. Activez ou désactivez ensuite l'option Convertir ce dossier et tous ses sous-dossiers. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, indiquez l'emplacement et le nom du portedocuments PDF. Une fois l'opération terminée, le nouveau fichier PDF s'ouvre dans Acrobat. Migration d'anciennes archives Outlook PDF vers des porte-documents PDF Il est judicieux de migrer les anciennes archives de messagerie PDF vers des porte-documents PDF pour deux raisons : faciliter le tri et d'autres fonctions, et permettre l'ajout de nouveaux messages électroniques à ces archives. Dans les porte-documents PDF, chaque message électronique est converti en composant PDF. Vous pouvez trier les messages par dossier de messages, expéditeur, ligne d'objet, date, taille ou pièces jointes. Vous avez également la possibilité de créer des catégories personnalisées, qui vous serviront de critères de tri. Si vous ouvrez des archives de messages électroniques créées avec Acrobat 7.0 ou version antérieure, vous devez créer une archive et ajouter les messages sélectionnés à cette dernière. Un assistant vous guide tout au long du processus. 1 Ouvrez Outlook. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF > Mettre à niveau l'archive PDF Acrobat 7. 3 Si un message s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui pour continuer l'opération de migration. 4 Localisez et sélectionnez l'ancienne archive PDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 5 Sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement du porte-documents PDF migré, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. (Par défaut, le suffixe _Porte-documents s'ajoute au nom de fichier existant : une archive intitulée Boîte de réception.pdf devient Boîte de réception_Porte-documents.pdf.) Une fois la conversion terminée et la boîte de dialogue de création du fichier Adobe PDF fermée, la nouvelle archive s'ouvre dans Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 88 Création d'un fichier PDF Configuration de l'archivage automatique du courrier électronique 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Configurer l'archivage automatique. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Configurer l'archivage automatique. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sous l'onglet Archivage automatique, sélectionnez Activer l'archivage automatique. Sélectionnez ensuite les options de fréquence et l'heure d'exécution des opérations d'archivage automatique. 3 Sélectionnez d'autres options en fonction de vos besoins : Garder un journal d'archivage Crée un enregistrement de chaque session d'archivage. Fichier journal Indique le nom et l'emplacement du journal d'archivage. Incorporer l'index pour une recherche plus rapide Crée un index à l'aide duquel vous pouvez rechercher des mots ou des caractères au lieu de parcourir en entier chaque document. 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sélectionnez les dossiers et les sous-dossiers de messages électroniques. Activez ou désactivez ensuite (selon votre préférence) l'option Convertir ce dossier et tous ses sous-dossiers, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier d'archive PDF sous, sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF de courrier électronique archivé. Cliquez ensuite sur Ouvrir. 6 Passez en revue les paramètres et les noms des dossiers d'archive figurant dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter à la liste des dossiers de courrier électronique supplémentaires, cliquez sur Ajouter et sélectionnez le dossier. • Pour supprimer des dossiers de la liste, sélectionnez-les puis cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour apporter des modifications à un fichier d'archive, sélectionnez un nom de dossier dans la liste, cliquez sur Modifier le fichier d'archive et indiquez un nom et un emplacement. • Pour commencer immédiatement l'archivage du courrier électronique, cliquez sur Exécuter l'archivage. Création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion et publipostage Word La fonction de fusion et publipostage dans Word permet de créer des lettres formulaires (l'exemple le plus répandu) dans lesquelles des informations sont personnalisées, telles que le nom et l'adresse des destinataires. Acrobat PDFMaker facilite la procédure grâce à l'utilisation d'un modèle Word spécifique et d'un fichier de données correspondant pour générer des fusions et publipostages directement au format PDF. Vous pouvez même configurer PDFMaker pour qu'il joigne ces fichiers PDF aux messages électroniques qu'il génère pendant la création de fichiers PDF. Remarque : Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de fichiers en vue de l'utilisation de la fonction de fusion et de publipostage Word, consultez l'aide de Microsoft Office Word. 1 Dans Microsoft Word, ouvrez le modèle créé pour la fusion et le publipostage, ou créez-le à l'aide de la barre d'outils Fusion et publipostage de Word et de l'assistant correspondant, selon vos besoins. Important : Ne terminez pas la procédure de fusion et publipostage dans Word. Configurez l'opération comme d'habitude et affichez-en un aperçu pour vérifier que la fusion fonctionnera correctement. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Fusion et publipostage au format Adobe PDF. • Cliquez sur le bouton Fusion et publipostage au format Adobe PDF dans la barre d'outils Fusion et publipostage (Affichage > Barres d'outils > Fusion et publipostage).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 89 Création d'un fichier PDF • (Word 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, cliquez sur Fusion et publipostage. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker - Fusion et publipostage, sélectionnez les options voulues : • Pour spécifier les données du fichier qui seront importées dans les fichiers fusionnés, sélectionnez Toutes les pages, Page active ou indiquez une étendue de pages dans les champs De la page et à. • Pour nommer le fichier PDF qui sera créé, entrez un nom dans la zone de nom de fichier PDF. Remarque : Ce nom, auquel une série de numéros sera ajoutée, sera attribué au fichier PDF. Par exemple, si vous entrez Lettrejuillet dans la zone de nom de fichier PDF, les fichiers de fusion et publipostage seront Lettrejuillet_0000123, Lettrejuillet_0000124, Lettrejuillet_0000125, etc. 4 Quant à l'option Envoyer automatiquement les fichiers Adobe PDF par messagerie, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer et enregistrer des fichiers PDF fusionnés à imprimer ou à envoyer par messagerie, laissez cette option désélectionnée, puis cliquez sur OK. • Pour créer des fichiers PDF fusionnés et les joindre à un message électronique pour le destinataire adéquat, cochez cette case et remplissez les autres options de messagerie. 5 Lorsque la boîte de dialogue de recherche de dossier s'affiche, repérez l'emplacement voulu et cliquez sur OK. Des indicateurs d'état s'affichent à mesure que PDFMaker génère des fichiers PDF. La durée de cette opération est fonction de la complexité de la fusion et au nombre de fichiers PDF créés. 6 Si vous avez sélectionné Envoyer automatiquement les fichiers Adobe PDF par messagerie, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche et demande votre profil de messagerie. Saisissez les informations appropriées et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la tâche terminée, un message s'affiche pour vous annoncer la réussite de la procédure. Options de messagerie pour les fusions et publipostage en PDF Pour Utilisez le menu déroulant pour sélectionner le champ ou la colonne du fichier de données associé contenant les adresses électroniques. Objet Saisissez le texte qui doit s'afficher dans la ligne d'objet de chaque message électronique. Message Ajoutez ou modifiez le corps des messages électroniques. Fichiers PDF créés à partir de Microsoft Project, Publisher et Access Dans les applications ci-après, des différences spécifiques s'appliquent à la création de documents PDF : Microsoft Project Vous pouvez uniquement créer un fichier PDF de la vue active. Les vues désignées comme non imprimables dans Project ne peuvent être converties en PDF. Remarque : La conversion de fichiers Project nécessite Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Microsoft Publisher Les fichiers PDF convertis à partir de Microsoft Publisher prennent en charge les traits de coupe, les liens, les signets, les tons directs, la transparence, les repères de fonds perdus et les couleurs CMJN. Microsoft Access La création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers Access peut impliquer deux étapes supplémentaires : • Vous devez sélectionner l'objet du fichier Access à convertir au format PDF avant de cliquer sur le bouton ou la commande PDFMaker. • Vous pouvez choisir Adobe PDF > Convertir plusieurs états en un seul fichier Adobe PDF. Pour Access 2007, cliquez sur Acrobat, puis sur Convertir plusieurs états. Vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner les états qui vous intéressent avant de cliquer sur Ajouter les états. Lorsque tous les états que vous souhaitez convertir figurent dans la liste Etats au format Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Convertir pour lancer la création du fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 90 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier Access au format PDF, les tables, requêtes, formulaires et états Access sont convertis. Conversion d'un fichier Visio au format PDF Les formats de page, calques, textes indexables, propriétés personnalisées, liens, signets et commentaires inclus dans les fichiers Visio sont conservés lors de la conversion au format PDF, selon les choix effectués dans les paramètres de conversion. (Le cas échéant, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion afin de les vérifier.) Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier Visio, seuls les repères et les formes imprimables et visibles dans le dessin Visio sont convertis et s'affichent dans le fichier PDF. Les formes sont converties quel que soit leur protection ou comportement. Les propriétés personnalisées de forme peuvent être converties en données d'objet PDF. Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier Visio au format PDF, vous pouvez choisir d'en conserver tous les calques, un certain nombre, ou encore d'aplatir l'ensemble des calques. Si vous optez pour l'aplatissement des calques, le document PDF aura le même aspect que le dessin d'origine, mais sera dépourvu d'informations de calques. Après aplatissement des calques, seul le contenu des calques visibles et imprimables s'affiche dans le fichier PDF converti. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 Conversion d'un fichier Visio 1 Pour modifier les paramètres de conversion de PDFMaker, ouvrez Visio et choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. (Pour plus de détails sur un paramètre, pointez dessus afin d'afficher une info-bulle.) 2 Pour convertir chaque page du fichier Visio en page avec signets dans le fichier PDF, choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir toutes les pages du dessin. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, seule la page active est convertie. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF. • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie. Le fichier PDF est joint à un nouveau message électronique dans votre application de messagerie par défaut. • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer en révision. Le fichier est converti en fichier Adobe PDF et le processus de révision par messagerie commence. 4 Pour inclure les propriétés de forme personnalisées, sélectionnez cette option. 5 Cliquez sur Continuer. 6 Sélectionnez une option de calque pour conserver ou aplatir les calques dans le fichier PDF résultant, puis cliquez sur Continuer. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Conserver certains calques de la page sélectionnée, vous serez invité à choisir les calques Visio à inclure. 7 Cliquez sur Convertir au format Adobe PDF, indiquez le nom du fichier et son emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 91 Création d'un fichier PDF Sélection des calques Visio à convertir Vous pouvez convertir en fichier PDF un dessin Visio contenant des calques et conserver une partie des calques ou tous les calques dans le document PDF obtenu, ou encore aplatir les calques. Vous avez également la possibilité d'organiser les calques Visio en groupes de calques, c'est-à-dire en dossiers s'affichant dans le panneau des calques Acrobat. 1 Ouvrez le fichier à plusieurs calques dans Visio, cliquez sur un bouton de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF et sélectionnez Conserver certains calques de la page sélectionnée. Remarque : Si l'option Conserver certains calques de la page sélectionnée est indisponible, désélectionnez Convertir toutes les pages du dessin. 2 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs calques dans la liste Calques dans le dessin Visio. 3 Pour ajouter les calques Visio sélectionnés à la liste des calques à convertir en fichier PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour convertir les calques Visio sélectionnés en calques PDF distincts au sein d'un groupe, cliquez sur Créer un groupe de calques, puis saisissez un nom de calque (facultatif). • Pour convertir les calques Visio sélectionnés en calques distincts (sans créer de groupe de calques), cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter des calques. Remarque : Le nom d'un calque n'est pas disponible dans la liste Calques dans le dessin Visio si ce calque est inclus dans la liste Calques au format PDF. Lorsque vous sélectionnez ce calque dans la liste Calques au format PDF, une puce apparaît en regard du nom du calque dans la liste Calques dans le dessin Visio. 4 Procédez de l'une des manières suivantes (facultatif) : • Pour réorganiser les calques de la liste Calques au format PDF, faites-les glisser vers le haut ou vers le bas. • Pour inclure une propriété de visibilité qui peut être activée ou désactivée dans Acrobat, désactivez la case Verrouillé(s) en regard du calque PDF. Pour verrouiller l'activation du calque PDF obtenu, cochez la case Verrouillé(s). • Pour enregistrer les paramètres actifs des calques Visio sélectionnés, cliquez sur Enregistrer les paramètres PDF, puis sur OK. Ces paramètres seront utilisés la prochaine fois que vous convertirez le fichier Visio actif en fichier PDF. 5 Cliquez sur Convertir au format PDF, spécifiez un dossier où enregistrer le fichier PDF dans la zone Enregistrer dans, saisissez un nom de fichier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : Les calques Visio sélectionnés en vue de la conversion et pour lesquels des paramètres Visio sont définis pour les calques visibles, imprimables et verrouillés, sont convertis en calques PDF. Les propriétés d'affichage et d'impression sont incluses dans les calques PDF obtenus. Si le fichier Visio contient une page d'arrière-plan, un en-tête ou un pied de page, le fichier PDF comporte automatiquement des calques PDF portant le nom de ces éléments. Conversion d'un fichier AutoCAD au format PDF (Windows) Utilisez PDFMaker pour convertir des fichiers depuis l'application AutoCAD. La fonction Conversion par lot vous permet également de convertir simultanément de nombreux fichiers AutoCAD. Même si AutoCAD n'est pas installé sur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez convertir des fichiers AutoCAD au format PDF à partir d'Acrobat. Acrobat PDFMaker vous permet de conserver les présentations et les calques sélectionnés lors de la conversion de fichiers AutoCAD au format PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 92 Création d'un fichier PDF Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 « Quelle est la meilleure manière de créer un fichier PDF ? » à la page 64 « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 94 Conversion de fichiers AutoCAD lorsqu'AutoCAD n'est pas installé Par défaut, des filtres Autodesk sont installés en même temps qu'Acrobat. Ces filtres vous permettent de convertir des fichiers DWG, DWF, DST, DWT ou DXF au format PDF sans que l'application d'origine soit présente sur l'ordinateur. 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un fichier. 2 (Facultatif) Dans le menu Fichiers de type, sélectionnez Autodesk AutoCAD, puis cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et modifiez les paramètres de conversion pertinents. Ces paramètres sont identiques aux paramètres d'Acrobat PDFMaker spécifiques à l'application AutoCAD, avec les suivants en plus : Préférences de configuration Cliquez sur ce bouton pour spécifier les répertoires de ressources des fichiers de polices SHX, des fichiers de configuration du tracé et des tables de styles de tracé des dessins AutoCAD. Si aucun chemin de recherche de fichier de polices SHX n'est spécifié, toutes les polices SHX sont remplacées par des polices MyriadCAD dans les fichiers PDF convertis. Toujours afficher cette boîte de dialogue lors de la conversion Lorsque cette case est cochée, la boîte de dialogue s'affiche lors de chaque opération de conversion. 3 Localisez et sélectionnez le fichier AutoCAD. 4 Si la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF pour les documents Autodesk AutoCAD s'affiche, configurez les paramètres pertinents, puis cliquez sur OK. Conversion de fichier AutoCAD après installation de l'application Lors de la conversion de fichiers AutoCAD individuels, il n'est généralement pas nécessaire de modifier le format de page et les paramètres de tracé. PDFMaker utilise le format de mise en page et les informations de tracé appropriés pour créer un fichier PDF de la bonne taille. 1 Pour modifier les paramètres de conversion au format PDF, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion dans AutoCAD. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur l'un des boutons de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF : Convertir au format Adobe PDF ou Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer en révision . • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie. • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer en révision. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue de sélection des présentations, ajoutez ou supprimez les entrées voulues. Pour réorganiser les présentations, sélectionnez-en une dans la liste Présentations dans le PDF, puis cliquez sur Monter ou sur Descendre. 4 Pour déterminer le mode de conversion des calques AutoCAD, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes, puis cliquez sur Continuer : • Aplatir les calques. Lorsque les calques sont aplatis, seules les entités faisant partie des calques non gelés et imprimables sont visibles dans le fichier PDF converti.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 93 Création d'un fichier PDF • Conserver certains ou tous les calques. Dans la boîte de dialogue suivante, indiquez les calques à inclure dans le document PDF résultant. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Sélection des calques AutoCAD à convertir Si vous choisissez de conserver l'ensemble ou une partie des calques AutoCAD lors de la conversion au format PDF, vous pouvez préciser les calques qui vous intéressent. 1 Dans AutoCAD, lancez la conversion d'un fichier AutoCAD et activez l'option Conserver certains ou tous les calques. 2 Pour afficher des calques AutoCAD spécifiques dans la liste des calques du dessin, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez une option dans le menu Filtres de calques existants pour répertorier tous les calques qui correspondent à ce critère. • Sélectionnez l'option Vidéo inverse pour répertorier tous les calques, sauf ceux qui sont décrits par l'option sélectionnée dans le menu Filtres de calques existants. • Pour modifier l'ordre des calques, servez-vous des en-têtes. Remarque : Pour modifier la propriété Activés, Gelés ou Traçage d'un calque, cliquez sur Annuler, modifiez les propriétés dans le dessin AutoCAD, puis recommencez la procédure. 3 Pour sélectionner les calques AutoCAD à convertir, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez un jeu de calques précédemment enregistré à partir du menu Paramètres de calques du fichier PDF. • Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs calques dans la liste Calques du dessin. • Pour convertir tous les calques contenus dans le dessin, cliquez sur Ajouter tous les calques, puis passez à l'étape 5. 4 Pour ajouter les calques AutoCAD sélectionnés à la liste Calques du fichier PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour convertir les calques AutoCAD sélectionnés en calques individuels dans un jeu de calques PDF, cliquez sur Créer un groupe de calques. Cette action entraîne la création d'un dossier de calques dans le panneau Calques d'Acrobat. • Pour convertir les calques AutoCAD sélectionnés en calques distincts, cliquez sur Ajouter des calques. 5 (Facultatif) Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des calques du fichier PDF : • Pour réorganiser les calques, faites glisser l'élément qui vous intéresse vers le haut ou vers le bas de la liste. • Pour inclure une propriété de visibilité qui peut être activée ou désactivée dans Acrobat, désactivez la case Verrouillé(s) associée au calque PDF approprié. Pour verrouiller l'activation du calque PDF obtenu, cochez la case Verrouillé(s). • Pour enregistrer la liste actuelle de calques AutoCAD sélectionnés, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un paramètre PDF. Vous pourrez récupérer cette liste ultérieurement à partir du menu Paramètres de calques du fichier PDF. 6 Cliquez sur Convertir, indiquez un nom de fichier et un emplacement, puis choisissez Enregistrer. Conversion par lot de fichiers AutoCAD 1 Choisissez Adobe PDF > Conversion par lot. 2 Configurez vos préférences de calques, de format de page, de style de tracé et de fichiers PDF de sortie. Cliquez sur Paramètres de conversion afin de spécifier les paramètres Acrobat PDFMaker.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 94 Création d'un fichier PDF 3 Dans la liste des fichiers DWG, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Ajouter un dossier ou Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez le dossier ou les fichiers voulus. • Pour charger une liste de fichiers enregistrée précédemment, cliquez sur Ajouter une liste, puis sélectionnez la liste voulue. • Le cas échéant, développez les fichiers individuels et activez/désactivez les éléments souhaités (espace objet, présentations, etc.). Pour exclure ou inclure le contenu intégral de l'espace objet, cliquez sur les boutons associés. • Pour exclure un fichier de la conversion, désactivez la case correspondante. Selon vos besoins, sélectionnez ou désélectionnez tous les fichiers figurant dans la liste, modifiez l'ordre des fichiers, supprimez-en ou effacez toute la liste. • Pour afficher les chemins d'accès complets aux fichiers, activez l'option Développer les noms de fichier. • Pour enregistrer la liste DWG à des fins de réutilisation ultérieure, cliquez sur Enregistrer la liste. Cette action entraîne l'enregistrement de la liste dans son état actif, ordre et sélection des fichiers compris. Vous pouvez récupérer cette liste à tout moment en cliquant sur Ajouter une liste. 4 Cliquez sur Convertir. 5 Une fois la conversion terminée, vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer les détails afin d'enregistrer un fichier journal de la conversion. Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications Les paramètres de conversion disponibles dans une application disposant de PDFMaker peuvent différer de ceux d'une autre application. Certains paramètres PDFMaker sont communs à plusieurs applications ; d'autres sont exclusivement réservées à une application donnée. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 « Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Internet Explorer (Windows) » à la page 98 « Conversion de fichiers Microsoft Word, PowerPoint et Excel au format PDF » à la page 84 Options de l'onglet Paramètres disponibles dans la plupart des applications Les paramètres suivants figurent sous l'onglet Paramètres, accessible à partir de la plupart des applications disposant de PDFMaker. Joindre le fichier source Inclut le document en cours de conversion sous forme de pièce jointe au fichier PDF. Créer les signets Convertit certains éléments des documents Office d'origine en signets PDF : titres dans Word et PowerPoint, noms de feuille de calcul dans Excel. La sélection de cette option remplace tout autre paramètre défini dans le panneau Signets de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion. Remarque : Pour les documents Microsoft Publisher 2003, PDFMaker inclut les titres sous forme de signets dans le fichier PDF. PDFMaker ne prend pas en charge la conversion des signets, des liens, de la transparence ni des traits de coupe ou des repères de fond perdus de Publisher 2002. Ajouter des liens Inclut les liens et hyperliens dans le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 95 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Lorsque cette option est désactivée mais que la préférence Créer des liens à partir des URL est activée dans l'application Acrobat du destinataire du fichier PDF, les URL du fichier PDF restent actives. Pour plus de détails, voir « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 41. Activer l'accessibilité et la redistribution avec les fichiers Adobe PDF balisés Intègre des balises dans le formulaire PDF. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à Excel Convertir les commentaires Convertit les commentaires Excel créés par l'utilisateur en notes et les répertorie dans le panneau des commentaires d'Acrobat. Ajuster la feuille de calcul à la taille d'une page Ajuste la taille de chaque feuille de calcul de manière que toutes les entrées qu'elle contient soient incluses dans la même page du fichier PDF.. Ajuster à la largeur du papier Ajuste la taille de chaque feuille de calcul de manière que toutes les colonnes qu'elle contient soient incluses dans la même page du fichier PDF. Inviter à sélectionner les feuilles Excel Ouvre une boîte de dialogue au début du processus de conversion. Celle-ci vous permet de spécifier les feuilles de calcul à inclure dans le fichier PDF, ainsi que l'ordre dans lequel elles doivent apparaître. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à PowerPoint Convertir les éléments multimédias Convertit tout fichier audio-vidéo lié en un fichier FLV et incorpore celui-ci dans le fichier PDF. Conserver l'animation (PowerPoint 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Convertit tous les effets d'animation du fichier PowerPoint en animations équivalentes dans le fichier PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans PowerPoint 2007. Conserver les transitions entre diapositives Convertit les effets de transition des diapositives PowerPoint en effets de transition PDF. Convertir les diapositives masquées en pages PDF Convertit en pages PDF les diapositives PowerPoint qui ne s'affichent pas lors de la lecture normale de la présentation. Convertir les notes du présentateur Convertit les notes du présentateur insérées dans la présentation PowerPoint en notes textuelles dans le fichier PDF. Utiliser les paramètres d'impression de PowerPoint (PowerPoint 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Utilise dans le fichier PDF les mêmes paramètres d'imprimante que dans le fichier d'origine. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans PowerPoint 2007. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à la messagerie électronique Les options suivantes s'affichent lorsque vous accédez aux paramètres PDFMaker depuis Microsoft Outlook ou Lotus Notes. Compatibilité Définit le niveau de compatibilité du fichier PDF. Utilisez la version la plus récente (dans ce cas, la version 1.7 ADBE-3) pour prendre en compte les fonctions les plus récentes. Si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier PDF créé à un grand nombre d'utilisateurs, choisissez une version antérieure pour vous assurer qu'ils pourront tous afficher et imprimer ce document. Pièces jointes Indique si tous les fichiers joints à des messages électroniques sont inclus dans le fichier PDF. Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option convertit toujours les messages individuels en fichiers composants d'un porte-documents PDF. Si elle est désactivée, les messages individuels sont fusionnés au sein du même fichier PDF, sur des pages distinctes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 96 Création d'un fichier PDF Ne pas inclure les informations sur le nom de dossier Lorsque cette option est activée, les noms des dossiers de messagerie sont exclus des fichiers PDF. Incorporer l'index pour une recherche plus rapide Crée un index incorporé qui accélère les recherches, notamment lorsque vous convertissez un grand nombre de messages électroniques ou de dossiers de message. Bloquer le téléchargement de contenus externes Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option interdit le téléchargement de tout contenu Internet externe (images, feuilles de style CSS, scripts JavaScript, etc.). Options de mise en page Indiquent les propriétés de page, à l'instar des propriétés disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer : format de page, orientation et marges. Nombre d'archives récentes à afficher (Outlook uniquement) Lors de la conversion de dossiers et de messages électroniques, les menus Adobe PDF > [Convertir les messages sélectionnés et Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés] présentent les fichiers PDF créés récemment que vous pouvez ajouter. Cette option indique le nombre maximum de fichiers PDF pouvant figurer dans les menus. Afficher les boutons "Joindre au format Adobe PDF" Si cette option est sélectionnée, le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF apparaît dans la fenêtre Message de Outlook. Options du panneau Paramètres spécifiques à AutoCAD Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue des paramètres PDFMaker disponible à partir d'Autodesk AutoCAD. Norme à respecter Indiquez la norme de mise en conformité PDF/A ou PDF/E (ou aucune). Ouvrir le panneau Calques dans Acrobat Affiche la structure des calques lorsque le fichier PDF est ouvert dans Acrobat. Incorporer les informations d'échelle Préserve les informations d'échelle du dessin, exploitables avec les outils de mesure Acrobat. Sélectionner une option de présentation Indique s'il faut inclure dans le fichier PDF la disposition active, l'ensemble des dispositions ou les dispositions sélectionnées. Exclure l'espace objet (Disponible uniquement lorsque le paramètre Convertir automatiquement toutes les présentations est activé via l'option Sélectionner une option de présentation.) Lorsque cette option est activée, toutes les présentations, à l'exception de l'espace objet, sont incluses dans le fichier PDF. Sélectionner une option de calque Indique s'il faut inclure dans le fichier PDF tous les calques, une sélection de calques ou aucun calque. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à Visio Les options suivantes apparaissent lorsque vous ouvrez les paramètres PDFMaker dans Microsoft Visio. Inclure les propriétés personnalisées Visio comme données d'objet dans le PDF Indique si les propriétés personnalisées de l'image Visio sont incluses comme données d'objet dans le nouveau document PDF. Exclure les objets Visio sans propriétés personnalisées Indique si le nouveau document PDF exclut les objets Visio sans propriétés personnalisées. Convertir les commentaires en commentaires Adobe PDF Commentaires Indique si les commentaires du fichier Visio sont convertis en commentaires PDF dans le nouveau document PDF. Toujours aplatir les calques dans le PDF Indique si les calques sont aplatis. Si vous optez pour l'aplatissement des calques, le document PDF aura le même aspect que le dessin d'origine, mais sera dépourvu d'informations de calques. Toutes les formes d'un dessin Visio sont converties, quel que soit leur protection ou leur comportement. En outre, vous pouvez convertir les propriétés de forme personnalisées en données d'objet PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 97 Création d'un fichier PDF Ouvrir le panneau Calques dans Acrobat Affiche la structure des calques lorsque le fichier PDF est ouvert dans Acrobat. Paramètres de l'onglet Word (Microsoft Word) Convertir les commentaires affichés en notes dans le fichier Adobe PDF Convertit tous les commentaires entrés dans Word en commentaires PDF. Si le document Word ouvert contient des commentaires, d'autres options s'affichent dans la zone Commentaires de cet onglet : • Réviseur Répertorie les noms des réviseurs qui ont entré des commentaires dans le document Word actuel. • Inclure Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les commentaires ne sont pas inclus dans le fichier PDF. • Notes ouvertes Détermine si les fenêtres de commentaires dans le fichier PDF s'ouvrent automatiquement ou si elles restent fermées pour les commentaires de ce réviseur. • Couleur Indique la couleur d'icône des commentaires de ce réviseur. Si vous cliquez de façon répétée sur l'icône de couleur, un nombre limité de couleurs s'affiche en boucle. • Nbre de commentaires Affiche le nombre de commentaires apportés par le réviseur. Convertir les références croisées et la table des matières en liens (Word 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Active la navigation en un clic à partir de ces éléments dans le nouveau document PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Word 2007. Convertir les liens de notes de bas et de fin de page Intègre ces éléments dans le fichier PDF. Activer le balisage avancé Intègre le balisage dans le fichier PDF. Paramètres de l'onglet Signets (Microsoft Word) Les options spécifiées sous cet onglet déterminent les éléments à convertir en signets dans le document PDF. Important : Pour inclure les signets dans l'opération de conversion, assurez-vous que l'option Ajouter des signets au fichier Adobe PDF disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres est activée. Si vous désactivez cette option, elle prend le pas sur toutes les options que vous pouvez sélectionner sous cet onglet et aucun signet n'est créé. Convertir les titres en signets Sélectionnez tous les titres de la liste d'éléments afin de les convertir en signets PDF. Convertir les styles en signets Sélectionnez tous les styles de texte de la liste d'éléments afin de les convertir en signets PDF. (option désactivée par défaut) Convertir les signets Word Convertit tous les signets créés dans Word par l'utilisateur en signets PDF. Liste d'éléments Spécifie les titres et styles Word à convertir en signets PDF. • Elément Répertorie les normes de tous les titres et styles Word. Les icônes Titres et Styles indiquent le type d'élément. • Type Indique également si l'élément est un titre ou un style dans le document Word. • Signet Une coche indique si l'élément en question est converti ou non en signet PDF. Cliquez sur l'option Signet d'un élément pour sélectionner/désélectionner ce dernier. • Niveau Spécifie l'emplacement de l'élément dans l'arborescence du panneau Signets du fichier PDF. Cliquez sur un numéro de niveau pour ouvrir un menu qui vous permet de modifier la valeur. Remarque : Si seulement certains titres et styles Word disponibles sont sélectionnés pour la conversion en signets PDF, des indicateurs le signalent en haut de l'onglet. Si tous les éléments du même type sont sélectionnés, une coche s'affiche. Si seulement certains éléments d'un type donné sont sélectionnés, un carré de couleur s'affiche. Autrement, la zone est vide.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 98 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion de pages Web au format PDF Pages Web et fichiers PDF La structure d'une page Web repose avant tout sur un fichier écrit en langage HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). En général, le fichier HTML comprend des associations à d'autres fichiers, qui s'affichent au sein de la page ou régissent son apparence ou son fonctionnement. Lorsque vous convertissez une page Web au format PDF, le fichier HTML et tous les fichiers associés (images JPEG, fichiers Adobe FLA, feuilles de styles CSS, fichiers texte, mappages d'image, formulaires, par exemple) sont inclus dans le processus de conversion. Le document PDF obtenu fonctionne de façon très similaire à la page Web d'origine. Par exemple, les images, liens, mappages d'images ou encore la plupart des fichiers multimédia s'affichent et fonctionnent normalement au sein du document PDF. (Les fichiers GIF animés se présentent comme des images fixes et affichent la dernière image de l'animation.) En outre, le fichier PDF fonctionne comme tout autre document PDF. Vous pouvez par exemple parcourir le fichier par défilement ou à l'aide des signets, d'autres utilisateurs peuvent y ajouter des commentaires, vous pouvez le protéger ou y insérer des champs de formulaires ou d'autres fonctions d'amélioration. Dans la préparation à la conversion de pages Web au format PDF, vous devez prendre des décisions qui auront un impact sur le processus de conversion : • Quels éléments souhaitez-vous convertir ? Si vous souhaitez uniquement convertir une zone sélectionnée sur la page Web ouverte, utilisez PDFMaker à partir d'Internet Explorer. Si vous voulez convertir plusieurs niveaux ou l'ensemble d'un site Web multipage, travaillez depuis Acrobat. • Souhaitez-vous créer un nouveau fichier PDF à partir de pages Web ou ajouter les pages converties à un fichier PDF existant ? Cette opération s'effectue aussi bien dans Acrobat que dans Internet Explorer ; vous devez cependant choisir des commandes ou des boutons différents. Remarque : Sur un système Windows occidental, la conversion au format PDF de pages en langue chinoise, japonaise ou coréenne (CJK) nécessite l'installation des fichiers de prise en charge des langues CJK en même tant qu'Acrobat. Il est également préférable de choisir un codage approprié lors de la configuration de la conversion HTML. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Internet Explorer (Windows) Lorsque vous installez Acrobat, une barre d'outils Adobe PDF s'ajoute à Internet Explorer (version 6.0 ou ultérieure). Les commandes de cette barre d'outils vous permettent de convertir au format PDF la page Web active de différentes façons : vous pouvez convertir la page entière ou des portions de celle-ci ; vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF ou ajouter la page convertie à un fichier PDF existant. Le menu de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF contient en outre des commandes qui lancent des actions complémentaires après la conversion, par exemple joindre le nouveau PDF à un message électronique ou l'imprimer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 99 Création d'un fichier PDF Menu de la barre d'outils PDF fournissant des commandes simples de conversion et d'impression Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion des pages Web » à la page 102 Conversion d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Dans Internet Explorer, affichez la page Web voulue. 2 A l'aide du menu Convertir de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : Remarque : Si la barre d'outils PDF n'est pas visible dans Internet Explorer, choisissez Affichage > Barre d'outils > Adobe PDF. • Pour créer un nouveau fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active, choisissez Convertir la page Web au format PDF. Sélectionnez ensuite un emplacement, saisissez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour ajouter une version PDF de la page active à un autre fichier PDF, choisissez Ajouter la page Web à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF existant et sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour créer et imprimer un fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active, choisissez Imprimer la page Web. Lorsque la conversion est terminée et que la boîte de dialogue d'impression s'ouvre, spécifiez les options nécessaires et cliquez sur OK. • Pour créer un fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active et le joindre à un message électronique vide, choisissez Convertir la page Web et envoyer par messagerie. Choisissez ensuite un emplacement et saisissez le nom du fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Après conversion, saisissez les informations nécessaires dans le message électronique qui s'ouvre. • Pour toutes ces options, choisissez Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu afin d'ouvrir le fichier PDF généré. Conversion d'une section d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Cliquez et faites glisser la souris pour sélectionner le texte et les images d'une page Web. 2 Cliquez sur le contenu sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Pour créer un fichier PDF, choisissez Convertir la sélection en Adobe PDF. Indiquez ensuite le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. • Pour ajouter le contenu sélectionné à un autre fichier PDF, choisissez Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF auquel doit s'ajouter la sélection, puis sélectionnez-le. Conversion au format PDF de zones sélectionnées sur une page Web L'option Sélectionner vous permet de choisir les éléments d'une page Web à convertir. Vous pouvez ainsi convertir des contenus pertinents et omettre les éléments superflus ou indésirables tels que les publicités. 1 Sur la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Sélectionner .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 100 Création d'un fichier PDF 2 A mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur sur la page Web, une ligne en pointillé rouge indique les zones sélectionnées de la page Web. Cliquez sur les zones à convertir. Les zones sélectionnées sont délimitées en bleu. Pour désélectionner une zone, cliquez à nouveau dessus. 3 Effectuez l'opération de conversion comme à l'accoutumée. 4 Pour désélectionner toutes les zones et quitter le mode de sélection, cliquez à nouveau sur Sélectionner. Conversion d'une page Web liée au format PDF ? Dans la page Web active, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte d'un lien, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Pour ajouter la page Web liée à un fichier PDF existant, choisissez Ajouter la cible du lien à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF existant et sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour convertir la page Web liée en un nouveau fichier PDF, choisissez Convertir la cible du lien en Adobe PDF. Remarque : Le menu contextuel comprend également les options Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant et Convertir au format Adobe PDF. Si vous choisissez l'une ou l'autre de ces options, la page Web active (et non le lien sélectionné) sera convertie. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Acrobat Bien qu'il soit possible de convertir au format PDF une page Web ouverte dans Internet Explorer, des options supplémentaires vous sont proposées si vous effectuez la conversion depuis Acrobat. Par exemple, vous pouvez inclure l'intégralité d'un site Web dans le document PDF ou uniquement certains de ses niveaux. Voir aussi « Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques » à la page 62 « Paramètres de conversion des pages Web » à la page 102 Conversion d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web. 2 Entrez le chemin d'accès complet à la page Web, ou cliquez sur Parcourir et localisez le fichier HTML. 3 Pour modifier le nombre de niveaux du site Web à convertir, développez l'option Capturer plusieurs niveaux. Indiquez le nombre de niveaux à inclure ou sélectionnez l'option Télécharger le site entier afin d'inclure tous les niveaux du site Web. Remarque : Certains sites Web peuvent contenir des centaines, voire des milliers, de pages. La conversion d'un site Web volumineux peut ralentir ou bloquer le système, voire même saturer l'espace disponible sur le disque dur et la mémoire et ainsi provoquer un blocage complet du système. Il est préférable de commencer par télécharger un niveau de pages, puis de parcourir celles-ci afin de télécharger uniquement les pages liées qui vous intéressent. 4 Si l'option Télécharger seulement n niveau(x) est sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'une ou les deux options suivantes : Utiliser un seul chemin Télécharge uniquement les pages Web subordonnées à l'URL spécifié. Utiliser un seul serveur Télécharge uniquement les pages Web stockées sur le même serveur. 5 Cliquez sur Paramètres, modifiez le cas échéant les options sélectionnées dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètre de conversion des pages Web. 6 Cliquez sur Créer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 101 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Vous pouvez visualiser les pages PDF pendant leur téléchargement, mais vous devez attendre la fin de l'opération pour pouvoir les modifier. 7 Si vous fermez la boîte de dialogue d'état du téléchargement, choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Afficher l'état au premier plan. Ajout d'une page Web non liée à un fichier PDF existant Cette procédure permet d'ajouter des pages à un fichier PDF modifiable. Si le fichier PDF d'origine est en lecture seule, vous obtenez un nouveau fichier PDF plutôt que de nouvelles pages dans le fichier existant. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF existant dans Acrobat (celui auquel vous souhaitez ajouter une page Web). 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Créer un fichier PDF à partir de/Ajouter une page Web. 3 Entrez l'URL de la page à ajouter et sélectionnez les options nécessaires, comme expliqué pour la conversion de pages Web en fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Créer. Ajout d'une page Web liée à un fichier PDF existant 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Si nécessaire, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant les liens vers les pages que vous souhaitez ajouter. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le lien avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter au document. • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Afficher la liste des pages liées. Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche, répertoriant tous les liens détectés sur la page active ou sur les pages référencées par le signet balisé. Sélectionnez les pages liées à ajouter. Cliquez sur Propriétés pour définir les options de téléchargement, si nécessaire, puis cliquez sur Télécharger. • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Ajouter toutes les pages liées. Remarque : Une fois les pages téléchargées, les liens permettant d'y accéder sont convertis en liens internes : lorsque vous activez un lien, la page PDF correspondante s'affiche, et non la page HTML d'origine sur le Web. Conversion d'une page Web liée en un nouveau fichier PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Le cas échéant, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant le lien Web à convertir. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir dans un nouveau document. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez également convertir une page liée à partir d'une page Web affichée dans Internet Explorer, à l'aide de la même commande du menu contextuel. Copie de l'URL d'un lien Web Cette procédure vous permet de copier le chemin d'accès d'un lien dans le Presse-papiers afin de l'utiliser ailleurs. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Si nécessaire, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant les liens vers les pages que vous souhaitez copier. 2 Cliquez sur le lien avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Copier l'adresse du lien.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 102 Création d'un fichier PDF Modification des paramètres de conversion des pages Web Les paramètres de conversion des pages Web au format PDF s'appliquent au processus de conversion. Ils n'ont pas d'impact sur les fichiers PDF existants. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Internet Explorer, affichez le menu de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, puis choisissez Convertir > Préférences. • A partir d'Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web, puis cliquez sur Paramètres. 2 Sous l'onglet Généraux, configurez le cas échéant les options disponibles sous Paramètres de conversion et Paramètres PDF. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour afficher des options supplémentaires pour le type de fichier sélectionné. 3 Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez les options de format de page, d'orientation et de mise à l'échelle. Paramètres de conversion des pages Web La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web est uniquement disponible à partir d'Internet Explorer et d'Acrobat. Onglet Générales Paramètres de conversion Indiquent les paramètres de conversion des fichiers HTML et texte. Choisissez un type de fichier, puis cliquez sur Paramètres afin de sélectionner les propriétés de police et autres attributs associés. Créer les signets Crée un signet balisé pour chaque page Web convertie ; le titre de la page (élément HTML Title) détermine le nom du signet. Si aucun titre n'est défini pour la page, son URL est utilisé pour nommer le signet. Créer les balises PDF Stocke une structure dans le document PDF correspondant à la structure HTML des pages Web. Cette structure vous permet de créer des signets balisés pour les paragraphes, les entrées de liste et d'autres éléments faisant appel à des éléments HTML. Placer les en-têtes et pieds de page sur une nouvelle page Place un en-tête et un pied de page sur chaque page. Les entêtes indiquent le titre de la page Web ou, en l'absence de titre, l'URL ou le chemin de fichier de la page. Les pieds de page présentent l'URL ou le chemin de fichier de la page Web, ainsi que la date et l'heure du téléchargement. Onglet Mise en page Les options de mise en page indiquent une sélection de formats de page, d'options de mesures (largeur, hauteur, marges) et d'orientation. Les options de mise à l'échelle sont les suivantes : Ajuster le contenu à la largeur de la page Ajuste le contenu de la page, le cas échéant, à la largeur définie. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le format de la page s'ajuste à son contenu (le cas échéant). Passer au mode Paysage au-dessous de (%) Oriente la page en mode Paysage si la nouvelle version de la page est inférieure au pourcentage de taille originale spécifié. Uniquement disponible si vous avez sélectionné l'orientation Portrait.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 103 Création d'un fichier PDF Paramètres de conversion des fichiers HTML Cette boîte de dialogue s'ouvre lorsque vous sélectionnez HTML sous l'onglet Généraux de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web, puis que vous cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. Codage d'entrée Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Codage par défaut Codage Définit le codage d'entrée du texte du fichier à partir d'un menu de systèmes d'exploitation et d'alphabets. • Toujours Ignore tout codage spécifié dans le fichier HTML source et utilise la sélection qui apparaît sous l'option Codage par défaut. • Lorsque la page ne spécifie pas le codage Utilise la sélection de l'option Codage par défaut uniquement si le fichier HTML source ne spécifie aucun type de codage. Paramètres des polices spécifiques à la langue Ces paramètres permettent de changer de script de langue, de texte du corps et de corps de police de base. Couleurs par défaut Définit les couleurs par défaut du texte, des arrière-plans de pages et des liens Web. Cliquez sur le bouton de couleur pour ouvrir une palette et y effectuer une sélection. Pour appliquer ces couleurs au document PDF, cochez la case Appliquer ces paramètres à toutes les pages. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les couleurs par défaut sont uniquement appliquées aux pages sans modèle de couleurs défini. Contenu multimédia Permet de désactiver la capture multimédia, d'incorporer les fichiers multimédia lorsque cela est possible ou encore de créer des liens vers un contenu multimédia (fichier SWF, par exemple) par URL. Conserver l'arrière-plan des pages Spécifient l'utilisation de couleurs et de mosaïque d'images comme arrière-plan pour les pages, et de cellules de couleur pour les tableaux. Si les options sont désactivées, les pages converties semblent parfois différentes des pages dans le navigateur Web mais sont plus faciles à lire une fois imprimées. Convertir les images Inclut les images dans le processus de conversion au format PDF. Souligner les liens Souligne le texte des liens Web sur les pages. Paramètres de conversion des fichiers texte Codage d'entrée Définit le codage d'entrée du texte d'un fichier. Paramètres des polices spécifiques à la langue Ces paramètres permettent de changer de script de langue, de texte du corps et de corps de police de base. Couleurs par défaut Définit les couleurs par défaut du texte et des arrière-plans de pages. Cliquez sur le bouton de couleur pour ouvrir une palette et y effectuer une sélection. Au niveau des marges Insère un retour à la ligne lorsque le texte atteint le bord de la zone de texte de la page. Création d'un fichier PDF avec Acrobat Distiller Présentation d'Acrobat Distiller Acrobat Distiller vous permet de sélectionner des paramètres de conversion de documents au format PDF, des options de protection et des informations relatives aux polices. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller pour surveiller les travaux de conversion mis en file d'attente.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 104 Création d'un fichier PDF Fenêtre principale d'Acrobat Distiller (Windows) A. Menus B. Fichiers de paramètres Adobe PDF personnalisés C. Fichiers dans la file d'attente D. Fichier non converti E. Menu contextuel F. Fenêtre d'état Pour convertir des fichiers PostScript de manière automatique, configurez dans Distiller un dossier de contrôle. Pour lancer Acrobat Distiller à partir d'Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Acrobat Distiller. Gestion de la file d'attente de conversion Distiller vous permet de mettre en file d'attente des fichiers PostScript créés dans d'autres applications, et de suivre l'intégralité du processus de conversion au format PDF. Mise en file d'attente d'un fichier PostScript 1 Sélectionnez un fichier de paramètres Adobe PDF dans la liste déroulante Paramètres par défaut de Distiller. 2 (Facultatif) Choisissez Paramètres > Protection, puis sélectionnez le niveau de chiffrement. 3 Ouvrez le fichier PostScript et lancez le processus de conversion de l'une des manières suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir, sélectionnez un fichier PostScript, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Faites glisser un ou plusieurs fichiers PostScript du Bureau vers la fenêtre Acrobat Distiller. Cliquez sur Pause avant l'étape 3 si vous souhaitez vérifier la file d'attente avant de lancer la conversion des fichiers dans Distiller. Modification de la file d'attente en cours de traitement Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour arrêter temporairement le traitement d'un travail en cours, cliquez sur Pause. • Pour relancer le traitement du travail en cours, cliquez sur Reprise. A C D F B EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 105 Création d'un fichier PDF • Pour supprimer des fichiers de la file d'attente, cliquez sur Annuler le travail. Annuler le travail supprime tous les fichiers de la file d'attente dont la conversion n'est pas encore terminée. (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez des fichiers et cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler les travaux. Seuls les fichiers sélectionnés sont supprimés. • (Windows uniquement) Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel se trouvent les fichiers sélectionnés, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Explorer. • (Windows uniquement) Pour ouvrir le fichier PDF sélectionné dans Acrobat, un navigateur ou Adobe Reader, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Afficher. Vous pouvez également cliquer deux fois sur le fichier PDF pour l'ouvrir dans Acrobat. Conservation d'un historique de la file d'attente (Windows) ? Cliquez sur la file d'attente avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Enregistrer la liste. Distiller procède à l'enregistrement et ouvre l'historique dans un fichier PDF. Effacement de la file d'attente Pour supprimer de la liste tous les fichiers en pause et convertis : • (Windows) Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Effacer l'historique. • (Mac OS) Cliquez sur le bouton Effacer la liste situé au-dessus de la file d'attente. Préférences de Distiller Les préférences de Distiller permettent de spécifier les paramètres généraux de Distiller. Vous pouvez accéder aux préférences de Distiller en choisissant Fichier > Préférences (Windows) ou Distiller > Préférences (Mac OS). Avertir lorsqu'un dossier de contrôle n'est pas disponible Renvoie un message lorsqu'un dossier de contrôle est indisponible ou introuvable. (Windows) Avertir lorsque le dossier TEMP de Windows est presque saturé Vous avertit si l'espace disque disponible est inférieur à 1 Mo. L'espace disque requis est souvent le double de la taille du fichier PostScript en cours de traitement. Confirmer la destination du fichier PDF Vous permet de spécifier le nom et l'emplacement des fichiers lorsque vous utilisez le glisser-déposer ou la commande Imprimer. Confirmer le remplacement d'un fichier PDF Vous avertit si vous êtes sur le point d'écraser un fichier PDF existant. Visualiser le fichier PDF généré à l'aide de Distiller Ouvre automatiquement le fichier PDF converti. Supprimer les fichiers journaux des travaux effectués Crée un fichier journal (intitulé messages.log) uniquement lorsqu'il existe des messages d'interprétation du fichier PostScript ou qu'une erreur PostScript se produit. (En cas d'échec d'un travail, un fichier journal est toujours créé.) Recommandations relatives à la création d'un fichier PostScript Si vous souhaitez affiner le processus de création des fichiers PDF à l'aide des paramètres Distiller ou des opérateurs pdfmark, commencez par créer un fichier PostScript, puis convertissez-le au format PDF. Pour plus de détails sur le kit SDK d'Adobe Acrobat 9, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 106 Création d'un fichier PDF Dans les applications de création telles qu'Adobe InDesign, utilisez la commande d'impression, puis sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF pour convertir le fichier au format PostScript. La boîte de dialogue d'impression varie d'une application à l'autre. Pour obtenir des instructions sur la création d'un fichier PostScript à partir d'une application particulière, consultez la documentation de cette application. Gardez à l'esprit les recommandations suivantes lors de la création d'un fichier PostScript : • Utilisez le langage PostScript niveau 3 dès que possible pour profiter des fonctions PostScript les plus avancées. • Utilisez l'imprimante Adobe PDF comme imprimante PostScript. • (Windows) Envoyez les polices utilisées dans le document. • Donnez au fichier PostScript le même nom que le document d'origine, en lui adjoignant l'extension .ps. (Certaines applications utilisent l'extension .prn.) • Utilisez les couleurs et formats de page personnalisés disponibles dans le fichier PPD d'Acrobat Distiller. D'autres fichiers PPD peuvent introduire dans le fichier PDF des couleurs, polices ou formats de pages inadaptés. • Si vous transférez des fichiers PostScript entre ordinateurs via FTP, notamment dans le cas de plates-formes différentes, envoyez-les sous forme de données binaires 8 bits. Cela empêchera la conversion des sauts de ligne en retour chariot et inversement. A propos des dossiers de contrôle Distiller peut être configuré de façon à rechercher les fichiers PostScript dans des dossiers spécifiques appelés dossiers de contrôle. Distiller peut surveiller jusqu'à 100 dossiers de contrôle. Lorsqu'il détecte un fichier PostScript dans le dossier In du dossier de contrôle, Distiller convertit ce fichier au format PDF puis place le document PDF résultant (et, en général, le fichier PostScript et tout fichier journal associé) dans le dossier Out. Un dossier de contrôle peut être doté de ses propres paramètres Adobe PDF et de protection de document. Ces options s'appliquent à tous les fichiers convertis à partir de ce dossier. Les options de protection d'un dossier de contrôle ont priorité sur celles de Distiller. Par exemple, Distiller ne convertit pas un fichier PostScript placé dans un dossier de contrôle si ce fichier est en lecture seule. (Windows) Chaque utilisateur dispose de ses propres paramètres et préférences. Dans le cas des systèmes non NFTS, les fichiers de paramètres personnalisés stockés dans le dossier Settings sont accessibles en lecture et en écriture à tous les utilisateurs du système. Sur un système NTFS, les seuls fichiers accessibles en lecture et en écriture sont ceux que chaque utilisateur a créés. Les fichiers de paramètres créés par d'autres sont en lecture seule. (Les fichiers de paramètres par défaut installés avec Adobe Acrobat Distiller sont en lecture seule et cachés.) (Mac OS) Les paramètres et préférences de Distiller associés à chaque utilisateur ne sont généralement pas accessibles aux autres. Pour partager un dossier de contrôle avec des tiers, l'auteur du dossier de contrôle doit définir les droits appropriés concernant les dossiers In et Out. Les utilisateurs sont alors en mesure de copier des fichiers dans le dossier In et d'en chercher dans le dossier Out. Pour ce faire, l'auteur doit préalablement ouvrir une session sur le système et exécuter Distiller. Les autres utilisateurs doivent ouvrir une session à distance afin d'accéder au dossier de contrôle en direct et de traiter leurs fichiers. Important : Il est impossible de configurer des dossiers de contrôle comme service réseau pour plusieurs utilisateurs. Chaque utilisateur qui crée des fichiers PDF doit disposer d'une licence Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Configuration des dossiers de contrôle 1 Dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez Configuration > Dossiers de contrôle.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 107 Création d'un fichier PDF 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter un dossier, puis sélectionnez le dossier de destination. Distiller ajoute automatiquement à ce dossier un dossier In et un dossier Out. Il est possible de placer des dossiers In et Out à tous les niveaux du disque dur. 3 Pour associer des options de protection à un dossier, sélectionnez ce dernier, puis cliquez sur Modifier la protection. Cliquez sur OK pour revenir à la boîte de dialogue Dossiers de contrôle. Remarque : Chaque dossier doté d'options de protection est indiqué par une icône spéciale. Pour rétablir les options de dossier d'origine sélectionnées dans la fenêtre de Distiller, sélectionnez le dossier voulu et cliquez sur Effacer la protection. 4 Configurez les paramètres Adobe PDF pour les dossiers : • Pour modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF d'un dossier, sélectionnez ce dossier, choisissez Modifier les paramètres, puis apportez les changements voulus. Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer le fichier dans le dossier de contrôle sous le nom folder.joboptions. • Pour utiliser un ensemble de paramètres Adobe PDF existants, sélectionnez le dossier voulu puis cliquez sur Charger les paramètres. Choisissez les paramètres que vous avez définis, nommés et enregistrés, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Définissez des options afin de gérer le traitement des fichiers : • Indiquez un nombre de secondes pour déterminer la fréquence de vérification des dossiers. Vous pouvez entrer une valeur jusqu'à 9999. (Par exemple, 120 équivaut à 2 minutes et 9999 à 2 h 45.) • Choisissez ce qu'il doit advenir du fichier PostScript après son traitement. Il est possible de placer ce fichier dans le dossier Out, avec le fichier PDF, ou de le supprimer. Tous les fichiers journaux éventuellement créés sont également placés dans le dossier Out. • Pour supprimer des fichiers PDF après un certain délai, entrez le nombre de jours voulu, jusqu'à 999. Cette option supprime également les fichiers PostScript et journaux, si vous avez choisi de le faire. 6 Pour supprimer un dossier, sélectionnez-le puis cliquez sur Supprimer le dossier. Avant de supprimer un dossier, assurez-vous que le traitement de tous les fichiers contenus dans ce dossier est achevé. Remarque : Lorsque vous retirez un dossier de contrôle, Distiller ne supprime pas les dossiers In et Out, leur contenu, ni le fichier folder.joboptions. Vous pouvez les supprimer manuellement quand il vous convient. Voir aussi « Personnalisation des paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 110 Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF Choix de paramètres Adobe PDF prédéfinis pour la conversion des fichiers 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Lancez Acrobat Distiller. • Dans une application Adobe Creative Suite®, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante cible et cliquez sur Propriétés. • (Windows) Dans les applications Office 2007, sélectionnez Acrobat > Préférences. • (Windows) Dans une autre application de création ou dans un utilitaire, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. 2 Choisissez des paramètres prédéfinis dan le menu Paramètres par défaut (ou Paramètres de conversion).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 108 Création d'un fichier PDF Paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF Un paramètre prédéfini PDF est un groupe de paramètres ayant un impact sur le processus de création d’un fichier PDF. Ces paramètres sont conçus pour équilibrer la taille et la qualité du fichier, en fonction de l’utilisation du fichier PDF envisagée. La plupart des paramètres prédéfinis sont partagés dans les applications d’Adobe Creative Suite, y compris InDesign, Illustrator, Photoshop et Acrobat. Vous avez également la possibilité de créer et de partager des paramètres prédéfinis personnalisés pour vos exigences particulières en matière de sortie. Un fichier de paramètres prédéfinis PDF est doté de l’extension .joboptions. Certains des paramètres prédéfinis répertoriés ci-dessous ne sont disponibles qu’une fois déplacés, selon vos besoins, du dossier Extras (où ils sont installés par défaut) vers le dossier Settings destiné aux paramètres personnalisés. De manière générale, les dossiers Extras et Settings sont disponibles dans Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF (Windows), dans ProgramData/Adobe/Adobe PDF (Windows Vista) ou dans Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe PDF (Mac OS). Les fichiers de paramètres installés par défaut avec Distiller sont en lecture seule et cachés. Les paramètres personnalisés sont enregistrés à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/[nom utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), Users/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Vista) ou Users/[nom utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS). Quelques paramètres prédéfinis ne sont pas disponibles dans certaines applications Creative Suite. Passez régulièrement en revue les paramètres PDF. Les options par défaut ne sont pas rétablies automatiquement. Les applications et utilitaires de création de fichiers PDF utilisent toujours le jeu de paramètres PDF défini et sélectionné en dernier. Impression haute qualité Crée des fichiers PDF pour la qualité d’impression sur les imprimantes de bureau et les périphériques d’épreuves. Ce paramètre prédéfini utilise PDF 1.4, sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore également les jeux partiels de toutes les polices, ne modifie pas les couleurs et n’aplatit pas la transparence (pour les types de fichiers ayant la capacité de transparence). Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier de paramètres peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 5.0, Adobe Reader 5.0 toute autre version ultérieure. Pages hors format Crée des fichiers PDF adaptés à l’affichage et à l’impression de dessins d’ingénierie dont la taille est supérieure à 200 x 200 po (508 x 508 cm). Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier d’options peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat, Reader 7.0 et toute autre version ultérieure. PDF/A-1b: 2005 (CMJN et RVB) Utilisé pour la préservation (l’archivage) durable des documents électroniques. Le format PDF/A-1b utilise PDF 1.4 et convertit l’ensemble des couleurs en CMJN ou RVB en fonction de la norme sélectionnée. Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier d’options peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat et Reader version 5.0 et ultérieures. PDF/X-1a (2001 et 2003) PDF/X-1a requiert l’incorporation de toutes les polices, la spécification des cadres de sélection PDF appropriés et l’affichage des couleurs en tant que CMJN et/ou couleurs avec tons directs. Les fichiers conformes doivent contenir des informations relatives aux conditions d’impression pour lesquelles ils ont été préparés. Les fichiers PDF créés avec la compatibilité PDF/X-1a peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Le paramètre PDF/X-1a utilise PDF 1.3, sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore les jeux partiels de toutes les polices, crée des fichiers PDF non balisés et aplatit la transparence à l’aide du paramètre Haute résolution.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 109 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Les paramètres prédéfinis PDF/X1-a:2003 et PDF/X-3 (2003) sont importés sur votre ordinateur lors de l’installation. Cependant, ils ne sont pas disponibles avant que vous ne les déplaciez du dossier Extras vers le dossier Settings. PDF/X-4 (2007) Ce paramètre est basé sur PDF 1.4, incluant la prise en charge de la transparence non aplatie. PDF/X- 4 et PDF/X-3 possèdent une gestion des couleurs et des spécifications de couleurs ICC (International Color Consortium) identiques. Vous avez la possibilité de créer des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X-4 directement avec les trois applications Creative Suite 3 (Illustrator, InDesign et Photoshop). Dans Acrobat 9, utilisez la fonction de contrôle en amont afin de convertir les fichiers PDF en PDF/X-4 PRELIMINAIRE. Les fichiers PDF créés avec la conformité à la norme PDF/X-4 peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 7.0, Reader 7.0 et versions ultérieures. Qualité optimale Crée des fichiers PDF pour la production d'impression de haute qualité (par exemple, pour l'impression numérique ou pour les séparations sur photocomposeuse ou imageuse de plaques). Cependant, il ne crée pas de fichiers compatibles PDF/X. Dans ce cas, la qualité du contenu est prioritaire. Le but est de conserver dans un fichier PDF toutes les informations nécessaires à un imprimeur ou un prestataire de services d’impression afin de garantir la précision de l’impression du document. Ce jeu d'options utilise le format PDF 1.4, convertit les couleurs en CMJN et sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore les jeux partiels de toutes les polices et conserve la transparence (pour les types de fichiers ayant la capacité de transparence). Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 5.0 et Acrobat Reader 5.0 et versions ultérieures. Remarque : Avant de créer un fichier PDF destiné à un imprimeur professionnel ou un service de prépresse, demandezlui de vous indiquer la résolution de sortie et les autres paramètres requis. Vous pouvez aussi demander le fichier .joboptions accompagné des paramètres recommandés. Vous devrez dans certains cas modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF en fonction des recommandations du prestataire de services, puis lui fournir votre propre fichier .joboptions. PDF avec contenu enrichi Permet de créer des fichiers PDF accessibles comprenant des balises, des hyperliens, des signets, des éléments interactifs et des calques. Lorsque ce groupe d’options est sélectionné, le format utilisé est PDF 1.6 et des jeux partiels de toutes les polices sont incorporés. Il optimise également les fichiers pour le téléchargement page à page. Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans et Acrobat Reader 7.0 et versions ultérieures. (Le paramètre prédéfini du fichier PDF avec contenu enrichi se situe dans le dossier Extras.) Remarque : le paramètre prédéfini s’appelait eBook dans les versions précédentes de certaines applications. Taille de fichier minimale Permet de créer des fichiers PDF destinés à être affichés sur le Web ou un réseau intranet, ou à être distribués par messagerie. Cet ensemble d’options utilise la compression, le sous-échantillonnage et une résolution d’image relativement basse. Il convertit toutes les couleurs en sRVB et n’incorpore pas les polices (pour les conversions à l’aide d’Adobe Acrobat Distiller). Il optimise également les fichiers pour le téléchargement page à page. Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans et Acrobat Reader 6.0 et versions ultérieures. Standard Crée des fichiers PDF destinés à l’impression sur des imprimantes de bureau ou numériques, à l’édition sur CD-ROM ou à l’envoi à un client comme épreuve d’impression. Cet ensemble d’options utilise la compression et le sous-échantillonnage pour maintenir une taille de fichier réduite. Cependant, il incorpore également des jeux partiels de toutes les polices (autorisées) utilisées dans le fichier, convertit toutes les couleurs en sRVB et imprime selon une résolution moyenne. Les jeux partiels de polices Windows ne sont pas incorporés par défaut. Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier de paramètres peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat Reader 6.0 et versions ultérieures.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 110 Création d'un fichier PDF Personnalisation des paramètres Adobe PDF Il peut s'avérer pratique de créer des options de conversion personnalisées pour certains travaux ou périphériques de sortie. Via vos sélections, vous pouvez déterminer l'incorporation des polices et la création de jeux partiels, la compression et/ou l'échantillonnage des objets vectoriels et des images, ainsi que l'inclusion éventuelle d'informations d'impression professionnelles, telles que des commentaires OPI (Open Prepress Interface), dans les fichiers PDF résultants. Il est impossible de modifier les fichiers d'options par défaut mais vous pouvez les dupliquer pour créer plus facilement d'autres fichiers d'options. Remarque : Si le fichier PDF est destiné à l'impression professionnelle, demandez à votre prestataire de services qu'il vous fournisse un fichier .joboptions personnalisé contenant la résolution et l'ensemble des paramètres nécessaires. Ainsi, les caractéristiques du fichier PDF que vous créerez seront optimisées pour le processus d'impression. Création d'un fichier personnalisé de paramètres Adobe PDF 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat Distiller, sélectionnez dans le menu Options par défaut un jeu d'options prédéfini à utiliser comme base, puis choisissez Configuration > Modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF. • Dans les applications de création ou autres utilitaires, sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante cible (en général dans les boîtes de dialogue Mise en page ou Imprimer) et cliquez sur Propriétés. • (Windows) Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres avancées sous l'onglet Paramètres. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez changer de jeu de paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez Afficher tous les paramètres en bas à gauche, puis sélectionnez un jeu prédéfini dans la liste de gauche. Boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF (Windows) A. Paramètres Adobe PDF prédéfinis B. Panneau des options 2 Sélectionnez un panneau à la fois et effectuez les modifications nécessaires. 3 Enregistrez les paramètres personnalisés de l'une des manières suivantes : • Cliquez sur OK pour dupliquer le fichier personnalisé, qui est automatiquement renommé. Par exemple, si vous modifiez les paramètres prédéfinis Qualité optimale, la première version personnalisée est nommée Qualité optimale (1). • Cliquez sur Enregistrer sous, entrez un nom de fichier évocateur et cliquez sur Enregistrer. B AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 111 Création d'un fichier PDF Le fichier personnalisé est enregistré à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/[nom de l'utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), User/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Vista) ou Users/[nom de l'utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS).. Suppression des fichiers de paramètres Adobe PDF personnalisés 1 Dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez Configuration > Modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier personnalisé et cliquez sur Supprimer. 3 Recommencez l'étape 2 autant de fois que nécessaire, puis cliquez sur Annuler pour fermer la boîte de dialogue de suppression des paramètres Adobe PDF. Paramètres Adobe PDF La boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF d'Acrobat Distiller contient des panneaux d'options qui vous permettent de personnaliser la sortie PDF. Voir aussi « Fichiers conformes aux normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A » à la page 533 « Recherche des noms de polices PostScript » à la page 124 Panneau Généraux Dans ce panneau, sélectionnez la version d'Acrobat avec laquelle le fichier doit être compatible, ainsi que d'autres paramètres de fichier et de périphérique. Compatibilité Définit le niveau de compatibilité du fichier PDF. Utilisez la version la plus récente (dans ce cas, la version 1.7 E) pour prendre en compte les fonctions les plus récentes. Si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier PDF créé à un grand nombre d'utilisateurs, choisissez une version antérieure pour vous assurer qu'ils pourront tous afficher et imprimer ce document. Compression de niveau objet Compresse les informations structurelles (signets, fonctions d'accessibilité et objets incompressibles) ; ces informations sont alors invisibles ou inutilisables dans Acrobat 5.0 ou Reader 5.0. L'option Balises uniquement compresse les informations structurelles ; sa désactivation empêche toute compression. Rotation auto. des pages Fait automatiquement pivoter les pages en fonction de l'orientation du texte. • Collective par fichier Fait pivoter toutes les pages pour respecter l'orientation de la majorité du texte du document. • Individuelle Fait pivoter chaque page en fonction de l'orientation de son contenu. • Désactivé Empêche la rotation des pages. Remarque : Si l'option Traiter les commentaires DSC est sélectionnée dans le panneau Avancées et que des commentaires d'orientation d'affichage existent, ces commentaires ont priorité lors de la détermination de l'orientation de la page. Liaison Spécifie si le fichier PDF doit être affiché avec une reliure située à droite ou à gauche. Ce paramètre s'applique à l'aspect des pages selon la disposition Deux pages en continu et à celui des vignettes côte à côte. Résolution Utilisez cette option avec les fichiers PostScript de manière à simuler les résolutions en fonction de l'imprimante de destination. La valeur peut être comprise entre 72 et 4000. Utilisez le paramètre par défaut, à moins que vous souhaitiez imprimer le fichier PDF sur une imprimante particulière tout en simulant la résolution définie dans le fichier PostScript d'origine. Remarque : L'augmentation de la résolution accroît la taille du fichier obtenu et éventuellement le temps nécessaire au traitement de certains fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 112 Création d'un fichier PDF Pages Spécifient les pages à convertir au format PDF. Incorporer les vignettes Permet d'incorporer une vignette d'aperçu pour chaque page du fichier PDF, ce qui accroît la taille du fichier. Désactivez cette option pour les utilisateurs d'Acrobat 5.0 ou version ultérieure ; ces versions génèrent les vignettes de manière dynamique, à chaque fois que l'utilisateur active le panneau Pages du fichier PDF. Optimiser pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web Restructure le fichier page par page lors du téléchargement à partir d'un serveur Web (utilisation optimale des octets) pour un accès plus rapide. Cette option compresse le texte et les dessins au trait, sans tenir compte des paramètres de compression définis dans le panneau Images. Format de page par défaut Spécifie le format de page à utiliser lorsque aucun format n'est indiqué dans le fichier d'origine. Les fichiers EPS indiquent la taille du cadre de sélection, et non le format de page. Panneau Images Les options du panneau Images définissent la compression et le rééchantillonnage des images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes. Vous pouvez essayer d'ajuster ces options afin d'obtenir le meilleur équilibre entre taille de fichier et qualité d'image. La résolution définie pour les images couleur et en niveaux de gris doit être 1,5 à 2 fois supérieure à la linéature d'impression du fichier. La résolution des images monochromes doit être identique à celle du périphérique de sortie. Sachez cependant que l'enregistrement d'une image monochrome à une résolution supérieure à 1500 ppp fait augmenter la taille du fichier sans améliorer notablement la qualité de l'image. Les images susceptibles d'être agrandies, telles que les cartes, peuvent nécessiter des résolutions supérieures. Remarque : Le rééchantillonnage des images peut provoquer des résultats inattendus en terme d'affichage, par exemple, l'absence totale d'image. Le cas échéant, désactivez le rééchantillonnage et convertissez à nouveau le fichier. Ce problème est plus susceptible de se produire avec l'option d'échantillonnage qu'avec l'interpolation. Le tableau ci-après répertorie des types courants d'imprimante et indique pour chacune la résolution en points par pouces, la linéature par défaut en lignes par pouce et une résolution de rééchantillonnage des images mesurée en pixels par pouce. Par exemple, si vous utilisez une imprimante laser à 600 ppp, vous devez entrer une résolution de rééchantillonnage des images de 170. Sous-échantillonnage (désactivé) Si la résolution de l'image dépasse la valeur de la zone Pour les images au-dessus de, cette option la réduit à la résolution du périphérique de sortie en combinant les pixels d'une zone échantillon de l'image en un seul pixel plus grand. Interpolation à Calcule la couleur moyenne des pixels d'une zone échantillon, puis remplace toute la zone par cette couleur à la résolution indiquée. Echantillonnage à Remplace une zone complète par un pixel sélectionné dans cette zone échantillon, selon la résolution spécifiée. Le temps de conversion est moins long qu'avec le sous-échantillonnage, mais les images obtenues sont moins lisses et homogènes. Résolution d'imprimante Linéature par défaut Résolution de l'image 300 ppp (imprimante laser) 60 lpp 120 ppp 600 ppp (imprimante laser) 85 lpp 170 ppp 1200 ppp (photocomposeuse) 120 lpp 240 ppp 2400 ppp (photocomposeuse) 150 lpp 300 pppUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 113 Création d'un fichier PDF Sous-échantillonnage bicubique à Détermine la couleur de pixel à l'aide d'une moyenne pondérée, au lieu d'une moyenne simple (comme pour le sous-échantillonnage). Cette méthode est la plus lente mais produit les dégradés de tons les plus lisses. Compression/Qualité de l'image Applique la compression aux images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes. Dans le cas des images couleur et en niveaux de gris, il est également possible de spécifier la qualité de l'image. Lissage des gris Lisse les contours inégaux des images monochromes. Choisissez 2 bits, 4 bits ou 8 bits pour spécifier 4, 16 ou 256 niveaux de gris. (Le lissage des gris peut rendre flous les petits caractères et les lignes fines.) Remarque : La compression du texte et des dessins au trait est toujours active. Pour la désactiver, modifiez le paramètre correspondant dans Distiller. Pour plus de détails sur ce kit SDK, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement). Règle Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Règles, dans laquelle vous pouvez définir les options de traitement des images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes dont la résolution est inférieure à celles que vous spécifiez. Pour chaque type d'image, entrez une résolution, puis choisissez Ignorer, Avertir et continuer ou Annuler le travail. Panneau Polices Les options de polices permettent de spécifier les polices à incorporer au fichier PDF et éventuellement d'incorporer des jeux partiels de caractères utilisés dans le fichier. Vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer des polices OpenType®, TrueType et PostScript. Les polices soumises à licence sont répertoriées avec un icône en forme de verrou . Si vous sélectionnez une telle police, la nature des restrictions est indiquée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Remarque : Lorsque vous associez des fichiers PDF contenant le même jeu partiel de polices, Acrobat essaie de combiner ces jeux. Incorporer toutes les polices Incorpore l'ensemble des polices du fichier. L'incorporation des polices est requise pour satisfaire à la norme PDF/X. Incorporer les polices OpenType Incorpore toutes les polices OpenType utilisées dans le fichier et conserve les informations relatives à ces polices pour la disposition des lignes. Cette option est uniquement disponible si vous sélectionnez Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6) ou Acrobat 8 (PDF 1.7) dans le menu déroulant Compatibilité du panneau Généraux. Jeux partiels de polices lorsque le pourcentage de caractères est inférieur à Spécifie un pourcentage seuil pour n'incorporer que des jeux partiels de polices. Par exemple, si le seuil est réglé à 35, et que moins de 35 % des caractères sont utilisés, Distiller n'incorpore que ces caractères. Si l'incorporation échoue Indique le mode d'action de Distiller quand aucune police à incorporer n'est détectée dans le fichier traité. Toujours incorporer Pour incorporer certaines polices, placez-les dans la liste Toujours incorporer. Assurez-vous que l'option Incorporer toutes les polices n'est pas sélectionnée. Ne jamais incorporer Placez dans cette liste les polices qui ne doivent jamais être incorporées. Si nécessaire, choisissez dans le menu déroulant un dossier différent pour afficher les polices qu'il contient dans la liste. Remarque : Les polices soumises à licence sont répertoriées avec une icône en forme de verrou. Si vous sélectionnez une telle police, la nature des restrictions est indiquée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Ajouter une police Si la police qui vous intéresse ne se trouve pas dans un dossier de polices, cliquez sur Ajouter une police. Saisissez le nom de la police, sélectionnez Toujours incorporer (ou Ne jamais incorporer), puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Remarque : Une police TrueType peut contenir un paramètre ajouté par son créateur, qui empêche son incorporation dans un fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 114 Création d'un fichier PDF Supprimer Supprime une police de la liste Toujours incorporer ou Ne jamais incorporer. Cette action ne supprime pas la police de votre système, mais retire de la liste toute référence à cette police. Remarque : Acrobat ne contient pas les polices Times, Helvetica et ZapfDingbats. Si vous voulez que les destinataires du fichier PDF puissent afficher et imprimer ces polices dans les fichiers PDF que vous créez, incorporez les polices. Panneau Couleur Que vous utilisiez les informations de gestion des couleurs du fichier PostScript, des fichiers de Distiller ou des paramètres personnalisés, la gestion des couleurs de Distiller est entièrement définie dans le panneau Couleur de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Fichier de paramètres Répertorie les paramètres de couleur, y compris ceux utilisés dans les applications graphiques. Le paramètre Aucun vous permet de modifier la gestion des couleurs et les paramètres d'espaces de travail. Gestion des couleurs Spécifie la manière dont Distiller convertit les couleurs non gérées par le fichier PostScript, lorsque vous n'utilisez pas de fichier de paramètres de couleur dans Distiller. Ce menu est disponible lorsque Aucun est sélectionné dans le menu Fichier de paramètres. Remarque : Les valeurs de règles de gestion des couleurs peuvent avoir différents effets sur un fichier PDF, selon le paramètre de compatibilité choisi dans le panneau Généraux. • Reproduire les couleurs Laisse les couleurs dépendantes du périphérique inchangées et conserve les couleurs dépendantes du périphérique sous leur forme équivalente la plus proche. Cette option est très utile aux ateliers d'imprimerie qui ont étalonné leurs machines et utilisé ces informations pour spécifier les couleurs du fichier, et qui n'effectuent qu'une simple sortie sur ces périphériques. • Référencer (ou Convertir) les couleurs Référence les objets couleur à l'aide d'un profil ICC et étalonne les couleurs pour les rendre indépendantes du périphérique dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3). Convertit les espaces colorimétriques dépendants du périphérique en images (RVB, niveaux de gris et CMJN) en espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique (CalRVB, CalGray et Cie L*a*b) dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). • Référencer (ou Convertir) les images uniquement Référence les profils ICC dans les images uniquement (et non dans le texte ou les objets vectoriels) afin d'éviter que le texte en noir subissent des changements de couleur lors de la conversion des fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3). Convertit les espaces colorimétriques dépendants du périphérique en images (RVB, niveaux de gris et CMJN) en espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique (CalRVB, CalGray et Lab) dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). • Convertir toutes les couleurs en sRVB (ou Convertir toutes les couleurs en CalRVB) Etalonne les couleurs pour les rendre indépendantes du périphérique. Convertit les images CMJN et RVB en sRVB dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) et version ultérieure. Convertit les images CMJN et RVB en CalRVB dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). Cette option est recommandée pour les PDF destinés à un affichage à l'écran ou à l'impression sur des imprimantes basse résolution. • Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN Convertit les espaces colorimétriques en DeviceGray ou DeviceCMJN selon les options définies dans la zone Espaces de travail. Toutes les options d'espace de travail doivent être spécifiées. Mode de rendu du document Choisissez une méthode de mappage des couleurs des espaces colorimétriques. Le résultat de chaque méthode dépend des profils des espaces colorimétriques. Par exemple, certains profils produisent des résultats identiques avec différentes méthodes. Acrobat partage quatre modes de rendu (Perception, Saturation, Colorimétrie relative et Colorimétrie absolue) avec les autres applications Creative Suite. Acrobat comprend également l'option Conserver, qui indique que le mode de rendu est spécifié sur le périphérique de sortie, plutôt que dans le fichier PDF. Dans la plupart des périphériques, le rendu par défaut est Colorimétrie absolue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 115 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Tous les modes de rendu peuvent être ignorés ou remplacés par les opérations de gestion des couleurs résultant de la création du fichier PDF. Espaces de travail Pour toutes les valeurs de gestion des couleurs autres que Reproduire les couleurs, sélectionnez un espace de travail afin de spécifier les profils ICC à utiliser pour la définition et l'étalonnage des espaces colorimétriques niveaux de gris, RVB et CMJN des fichier convertis au format PDF. • Gris Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images en niveaux de gris des fichiers. Le profil ICC par défaut des images en niveaux de gris est Dot Gain 20%. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images en niveaux de gris. • RVB Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images RVB des fichiers. Le profil par défaut sRGB IEC61966-2.1 est reconnu par de nombreux périphériques. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images RVB. • CMJN Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images CMJN des fichiers. La valeur par défaut est U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images CMJN. Remarque : La sélection de la valeur Aucun pour chacun des trois espaces de travail produit les mêmes résultats que l'option Reproduire les couleurs. Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des profils ICC (tels que ceux fournis par votre service d'impression) en les plaçant dans le dossier ICCProfiles du dossier Common, dans le dossier Windows\System\Color (Windows) ou au sein du Dossier Système/Bibliothèque/ColorSync (Mac OS). Conserver les valeurs CMJN pour les espaces colorimétriques CMJN étalonnés Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les valeurs CMJN indépendantes du périphérique sont traitées comme les valeurs dépendantes (DeviceCMJN), les espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique sont ignorés et les fichiers PDF/X-1a utilisent l'option Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN. Si vous la désactivez, les espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique sont convertis en CMJN, à condition que la règle de gestion des couleurs soit Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN. Conserver les paramètres UCR/densité de noir Tient compte de ces paramètres s'ils existent dans le fichier PostScript. Le paramètre de densité de noir permet de calculer la quantité de noir à utiliser pour reproduire une couleur. Les paramètres UCR permettent de réduire la quantité de cyan, magenta et jaune pour compenser la densité de noir. Cette méthode, qui utilise moins d'encre, convient au papier non couché. En présence des fonctions de transfert Spécifie la méthode de traitement des fonctions de transfert dans les fichiers PDF. Les fonctions de transfert servent à produire des effets artistiques et à corriger les caractéristiques d'un périphérique de sortie donné. • Supprimer Elimine les fonctions de transfert appliquées au fichier. Les fonctions de transfert doivent être supprimées, à moins que le fichier PDF soit destiné au même périphérique de sortie que le fichier PostScript d'origine. • Conserver Conserve les fonctions de transfert, habituellement utilisées pour compenser l'engraissement ou la perte de points pouvant se produire lorsqu'une image est transférée sur film. L'engraissement ou la perte de points survient lorsque les points d'encre qui composent l'image sont plus grands ou plus petits que la trame de demi-teintes. • Appliquer Applique la fonction de transfert, en modifiant les couleurs du fichier, mais sans les conserver. Cette méthode est utile pour créer des effets de couleur dans un fichier. Conserver les informations sur les trames de demi-teintes Conserve toutes les informations de demi-teintes dans le fichier. Les informations de trames de demi-teintes sont destinées à un périphérique de sortie particulier. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 116 Création d'un fichier PDF Panneau Avancés Les paramètres avancés permettent de spécifier les commentaires DSC (Document Structuring Conventions) à intégrer au fichier PDF et de définir d'autres options relatives à la conversion à partir du format PostScript. Un fichier PostScript inclut des commentaires DSC qui contiennent des informations relatives au fichier (telles que l'application d'origine, la date de création et l'orientation des pages) et décrivent la structure des pages (par exemple, les arguments de début et de fin d'un prologue). Les commentaires DSC peuvent s'avérer utiles si le document est destiné à une imprimante ou une presse. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation du site Web Adobe PDF Technology Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_pdftechnology_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Remarque : L'option Format ASCII a été enlevée de Distiller, mais reste disponible en tant que paramètre Distiller. Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF Utilise les options stockées dans le fichier PostScript au lieu du fichier d'options PDF actuellement sélectionné. Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation des paramètres PDF, voir les informations relatives au kit SDK sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Autoriser les XObjects au format PostScript Les XObjects PostScript stockent des fragments de code PostScript à utiliser lors de l'impression d'un fichier PDF sur une imprimante PostScript. Utilisez cette option dans les flux de travail contrôlés, lorsqu'il n'existe aucune autre solution. Cette option est disponible lorsque la sélection du menu Paramètres par défaut est Standard ou Taille de fichier minimale. Convertir les dégradés en ombres lissées Convertit les dégradés en ombres lissées pour Acrobat 4.0 et versions ultérieures, afin d'améliorer la qualité des fichiers PDF tout en réduisant leur taille. Distiller convertit les dégradés provenant des applications Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe FreeHand®, CorelDraw, QuarkXPress et Microsoft PowerPoint. Convertir les traits lissés en courbes Réduit la quantité de points de contrôle servant à construire les courbes des dessins de CAO et produit ainsi des fichiers PDF moins volumineux et plus rapides à afficher. Conserver la sémantique copypage Niveau 2 Utilise l'opérateur copypage PostScript Niveau 2 et non celui de Niveau 3. Si vous disposez d'un fichier PostScript et que vous sélectionnez cette option, un opérateur copypage copie la page. Si cette option n'est pas activée, une opération showpage équivalente est effectuée mais l'état des graphiques n'est pas réinitialisé. Conserver les options de surimpression Conserve les options de surimpression dans les fichiers convertis au format PDF. La surimpression crée des couleurs en superposant les encres. Surimpression des objets non nuls par défaut Empêche les objets surimprimés dotés de valeurs CMJN nulles de masquer les objets CMJN situés sous eux. Enregistrer les paramètres Adobe PDF dans le fichier PDF Incorpore au fichier PDF, sous forme de pièce jointe, le fichier de paramètres (.joboptions) utilisé pour la conversion. (Pour consulter le fichier de paramètres dans Acrobat, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes.) Enregistrer les images au format JPEG dans le fichier PDF (si possible) Traite les images JPEG compressées (les images déjà compressées à l'aide de le codage DCT) sans les compresser à nouveau. La désactivation de cette option améliore les performances car seule la décompression a lieu, pas la recompression. Enregistrer le dossier de correspondance dans le fichier PDF Conserve un dossier de correspondance PostScript au sein d'un fichier PDF. Les dossiers de correspondance décrivent le fichier PostScript ; ils peuvent servir ultérieurement dans le flux de travail ou lors de l'impression du fichier PDF. Utiliser les fichiers Prologue.ps/Epilogue.ps Envoie des fichiers prologue et épilogue avec chaque travail. Le fichier Epilogue.ps permet de définir une séquence personnalisée de code PostScript à exécuter au début ou à la fin de chaque conversion d'un fichier PostScript. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 117 Création d'un fichier PDF Les fichiers exemple Prologue.ps et Epilogue.ps sont situés à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Windows), /Users/All Users/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Vista) ou /Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Mac OS). Dans l'Explorateur Windows, le dossier Application Data est en général caché. Pour l'afficher, choisissez Outils > Options des dossiers, cliquez sur l'onglet Affichage et sélectionnez Afficher les fichiers et dossiers cachés. Vous pouvez taper le chemin dans la zone de texte Adresse. Remarque : Distiller ne tient compte des fichiers Prologue et Epilogue que si les deux fichiers sont présents et situés au bon emplacement. Ces deux fichiers sont obligatoirement utilisés ensemble. Si des fichiers Prologue et Epilogue se trouvent au même niveau que les dossiers In et Out d'un dossier de contrôle, ils sont utilisés à la place des fichier situés dans le dossier Distiller. Traiter les commentaires DSC Conserve les informations DSC d'un fichier PostScript. • Consigner les avertissements DSC Affiche des messages d'avertissement relatifs aux commentaires DSC présentant des problèmes au cours du traitement et les consigne dans un fichier journal. • Préserver les informations EPS des commentaires DSC Conserve les informations relatives au fichier EPS, telles que l'application et la date de création. • Conserver les commentaires OPI Conserve les informations nécessaires au remplacement d'une image ou d'un commentaire FPO (For Placement Only) par une image haute résolution située sur un serveur prenant en charge l'interface OPI (Open Prepress Interface) versions 1.3 et 2.0. Pour plus de détails, consultez la spécification OPI 2.0 à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_opi2spec_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). • Préserver les informations sur le document des commentaires DSC Conserve dans le fichier PDF les propriétés du document, telles que le titre, la date et l'heure de création. • Redimensionner la page et centrer les illustrations des fichiers EPS Centre l'image EPS et redimensionne la page pour l'ajuster au plus près à l'image. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le format et le positionnement de la page sont établis par rapport au coin supérieur gauche de l'objet situé en haut à gauche de la page, et du coin inférieur droit de l'objet situé en bas à droite. Cette option s'applique uniquement aux travaux constitués d'un fichier EPS. Panneau Normes Les options du panneau Normes vous permettent de vérifier que le contenu du fichier PostScript est conforme aux normes PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3 ou PDF/A avant de créer le fichier PDF. Dans le cas de la norme PDF/X, vous pouvez soumettre les fichiers à des critères de conformité supplémentaires à définir dans le panneau Normes. La disponibilité des options dépend de la norme choisie. Vous pouvez également créer un fichier PDF/X à partir d'un fichier PDF conforme à l'aide de la fonction de contrôle en amont d'Acrobat. Normes PDF/X Etablit la conformité à la norme PDF/X pour la production d'impression haute résolution. Remarque : PDFMaker, qui constitue la méthode de conversion au format PDF des fichiers Microsoft Word et des fichiers issus d'autres applications, ne crée pas de fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X. Norme PDF/A Etablit la conformité avec la norme PDF/A pour les documents d'archive. Remarque : Si vous avez configuré un dossier de contrôle lors de la création des fichiers compatibles PDF/A, n'ajoutez aucune fonction de protection au dossier. La norme PDF/A interdit le chiffrement. Norme à respecter Produit un rapport indiquant si le fichier est conforme à la norme choisie et, à défaut, les problèmes rencontrés. Le fichier .log s'affiche au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Remarque : Les fichiers PDF qui étaient conformes aux normes PDF/X-1a et PDF/X-3 dans Acrobat 6.0 seront par défaut conformes à la norme PDF/X-1a dans Acrobat 9.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 118 Création d'un fichier PDF Si non conforme Détermine si le fichier PDF doit être créé ou non lorsque le fichier PostScript ne satisfait pas aux exigences de la norme. • Continuer Crée un fichier PDF même si le fichier PostScript ne respecte pas les exigences PDF/X et inscrit ces problèmes dans le rapport. • Annuler le travail Crée un fichier PDF uniquement si le fichier PostScript est conforme à la norme PDF/X sélectionné et s'il est par ailleurs correct. Signaler comme erreur Identifie le fichier PostScript comme non conforme si l'une des options de rapport est sélectionné et une zone de rognage ou une zone graphique manque sur une page. Définir la zone de rognage selon celle de support, décalages Calcule les valeurs de la zone de rognage à partir des décalages de la zone de support de chaque page lorsque aucune zone de rognage ou graphique n'est spécifiée. La zone de rognage est toujours équivalente ou inférieure à la zone de support qui l'entoure. Définir la zone de fond perdu selon la zone de support Utilise la zone de support comme zone de fond perdu si cette dernière n'est pas définie. Définir la zone de fond perdu selon celle de rognage, décalages Calcule les valeurs de la zone de fond perdu à partir des décalages de la zone de rognage de chaque page lorsque la zone de fond perdu n'est pas spécifiée. La zone de fond perdu est toujours équivalente ou supérieure à la zone de rognage correspondante. Cette option utilise les unités spécifiées dans le panneau Générales de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Nom du profil de mode de sortie Indique les conditions d'impression particulières pour lesquelles le document a été préparé et détermine la conformité à la norme PDF/X. Si le document ne contient aucun profil de mode de sortie, Distiller utilise la valeur sélectionnée dans ce menu. Si le flux de travail requiert la spécification d'un mode de sortie dans le document, choisissez Aucun. Identifiant de condition de sortie Indique le nom de référence spécifié par le registre du nom de profil de mode de sortie. Pour plus de détails, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation à côté de l'option. Condition de sortie Décrit la condition d'impression prévue. Cette entrée peut s'avérer utile au destinataire du document PDF. Pour plus de détails, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation à côté de l'option. Nom du registre (URL) Indique l'adresse Web d'un document permettant d'obtenir plus d'informations sur le profil de mode de sortie. L'URL des noms de registre ICC est automatiquement spécifié. Le nom de registre n'est pas obligatoire, mais il est recommandé de le préciser. Pour plus de détails, cliquez sur le point d'interrogation à côté de l'option. Recouvrement Indique l'état de recouvrement du document. La norme PDF/X requiert une valeur vraie ou fausse. Si le document ne spécifie aucun état de recouvrement, la valeur indiquée ici est utilisée. Si votre flux de travail requiert la spécification d'un état de recouvrement dans le document, choisissez Ne pas définir. Niveaux de compatibilité PDF Lors de la création d’un fichier PDF, vous devez décider de la version de PDF à utiliser. Vous pouvez modifier la version de PDF en sélectionnant un paramètre prédéfini différent ou en choisissant une option de compatibilité lors de l’enregistrement au format PDF ou de la modification du paramètre prédéfini PDF. A moins que la compatibilité avec des versions antérieures ne soit nécessaire, il est en général recommandé d’utiliser la version la plus récente (dans le cas présent, la version 1.7). La dernière version comprend les toutes dernières fonctions et fonctionnalités. Cependant, si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier créé à un grand nombre d’utilisateurs, envisagez de choisir Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) ou Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6). L'utilisation de l'une de ces versions permettra de vous assurer que tous les utilisateurs peuvent visualiser et imprimer le document. Le tableau ci-après offre un comparatif de certaines fonctionnalités des fichiers PDF créés avec différents paramètres de compatibilité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 119 Création d'un fichier PDF Partage de paramètres PDF personnalisés Vous pouvez enregistrer et réutiliser vos propres définitions de paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF. Vous pouvez également partager un paramètre prédéfini en envoyant une copie du fichier obtenu à d’autres utilisateurs. Ces derniers peuvent ensuite l’ajouter aux applications Distiller installées sur leur propre ordinateur. Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6) et Acrobat 8 et Acrobat 9 (PDF 1.7) Ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat Reader 3.0 et versions ultérieures. Ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat Reader 3.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. La plupart de ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. La plupart de ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. Illustrations utilisant des effets de transparence dynamiques. Veillez à aplatir toute option de transparence préalablement à la conversion au format PDF 1.3. Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Calques non pris en charge. Calques non pris en charge. Conserve les calques lors de la création des fichiers PDF à partir d’applications prenant en charge la génération de documents PDF avec des calques, telles que Illustrator CS ou InDesign CS et versions ultérieures. Conserve les calques lors de la création des fichiers PDF à partir d’applications prenant en charge la génération de documents PDF avec des calques, telles que Illustrator CS ou InDesign CS et versions ultérieures. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec huit colorants pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec huit colorants pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec 31 colorants au maximum pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec 31 colorants au maximum pris en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. (Distiller convertit les polices lors de leur incorporation.) L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 40 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits et AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) 128 bits prise en charge.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 120 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Les fichiers de paramètres PDF sont dotés de l’extension .joboptions. Les fichiers de paramètres prédéfinis personnalisés sont enregistrés sous Documents and Settings/[nom utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), Users/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows Vista) ou User/[nom utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS). ? Pour ajouter les fichiers de paramètres PDF personnalisés au menu, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser le fichier .joboptions jusqu’à la fenêtre de Distiller. • Dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez la commande Paramètres > Ajouter des options Adobe PDF, accédez au fichier .joboptions copié, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. Le fichier de paramètres apparaît comme l’option sélectionnée dans le menu Paramètres par défaut. Compression et sous-échantillonnage des images Lors de la conversion des fichiers PostScript au format PDF, vous pouvez compresser les objets vectoriels (tels que le texte ou les dessins au trait), et compresser et sous-échantillonner les images. Les dessins au trait reposent sur une équation mathématique et se créent en général dans un programme d'illustration tel qu'Adobe Illustrator. Les images (en couleurs, en niveaux de gris ou monochromes) sont définies par des pixels et créées dans des applications telles qu'Adobe Photoshop ou par numérisation. Les images monochromes correspondent à la plupart des illustrations en noir et blanc réalisées dans des programmes de dessin ou à partir d'images numérisées avec une profondeur de 1 bit. Lorsque vous sous-échantillonnez une image, c'est-à-dire que vous en réduisez le nombre de pixels, certaines informations sont effacées. Avec Distiller, vous pouvez spécifier une méthode d'interpolation (interpolation, sous- échantillonnage bicubique ou échantillonnage) afin de déterminer la méthode de suppression des pixels. Selon les options choisies, la compression et le sous-échantillonnage peuvent réduire de manière significative la taille d'un fichier PDF, avec une perte minimale de détails et de précision. Lors de la conversion d'un fichier, Distiller applique normalement les paramètres de compression définis à toutes les images du fichier. Vous pouvez cependant adopter différentes méthodes de compression et de sous-échantillonnage pour chaque image. Variation des méthodes de compression et de sous-échantillonnage au sein d'un fichier PDF Avant de créer un fichier PDF, vous pouvez envisager différentes méthodes d'application des options de compression et de sous-échantillonnage aux diverses images qui composeront ce fichier PDF. • A l'aide d'Adobe Photoshop, rééchantillonnez et compressez les fichiers image existants avant de convertir le fichier dans Distiller. Lorsque vous êtes prêt à créer le fichier PDF dans Distiller, veillez à désélectionner les options de compression et de sous-échantillonnage/échantillonnage. • Créez un fichier PostScript distinct pour chaque section du document à convertir différemment et définissez des paramètres de compression différents pour chaque section. A l'aide de Distiller, fusionnez ensuite les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. • Si vous créez des images couleur, en niveaux de gris ou monochromes dans une application de dessin (telle qu'Adobe Photoshop), sélectionnez les paramètres de compression et de sous-échantillonnage voulus lorsque vous enregistrez chaque image au sein de l'application. • Insérez des paramètres Distiller avant les images d'un fichier PostScript. Cette méthode vous permet de traiter chaque image d'un document de manière différente. C'est également la solution la plus compliquée car elle requiert des connaissances en programmation PostScript. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des paramètres, voir la documentation relative au kit SDK sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 121 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Pour appliquer les paramètres Distiller insérés, sélectionnez l'option Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF dans le panneau Avancés de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF de Distiller. Cette option permet d'ignorer les paramètres activés dans la boîte de dialogue Adobe PDF. Méthodes de compression Distiller applique la compression ZIP aux textes et dessins au trait, la compression ZIP ou JPEG aux images couleur ou en niveaux de gris et la compression ZIP, CCITT - Groupe 3/4 ou RLE aux images monochromes. Méthodes de compression adaptées à différents types d'illustrations A. ZIP B. JPEG C. CCITT D. RLE Vous pouvez choisir l'une des méthodes de compression suivantes : ZIP Convient aux images qui présentent des zones étendues de couleurs unies ou des motifs récurrents, ainsi qu'aux images en noir et blanc aux textures répétées. Acrobat prend uniquement en charge la compression ZIP 8 bits. Cette compression est sans perte, c'est-à-dire que la réduction de la taille du fichier n'est pas obtenue par suppression de données. La qualité des images est donc conservée. Remarque : La mise en œuvre du filtre ZIP par Adobe dérive de la librairie de compression zlib créée par Jean-loup Gailly et Mark Adler, que nous souhaitons remercier ici pour leur aide précieuse. JPEG Adaptée aux images couleur ou en niveaux de gris, telles que les photographies en ton continu. La compression JPEG génère une perte de données : pour réduire la taille du fichier, elle retire certaines données de l'image et risque donc d'amoindrir la qualité de l'image. Cependant, elle tente de réduire la taille du fichier, avec une perte minimale A C D Sales Plan Kahili Mountain Coffee BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 122 Création d'un fichier PDF d'information. Etant donné que la compression JPEG supprime des données, elle permet d'obtenir des fichiers beaucoup plus petits qu'avec la compression ZIP. CCITT Uniquement disponible pour les images bitmap monochromes. La compression CCITT (Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony) convient aux images noir et blanc ou aux images numérisées avec une profondeur de 1 bit. Groupe 4 est une méthode générale qui produit une bonne compression pour la plupart des images monochromes. Groupe 3, utilisé par la plupart des télécopieurs, compresse les images monochromes rangée par rangée. RLE Produit les meilleurs résultats avec les images présentant de grandes zones unies en noir ou en blanc. Polices Incorporation et substitution de polices Une police ne peut être incorporée que si son auteur a ajouté un paramètre permettant de le faire. L’incorporation permet d’empêcher la substitution des polices lors de l’affichage ou l’impression du fichier et garantit que les lecteurs visualisent les polices d’origine. L’incorporation accroît la taille des fichiers dans une faible mesure, à moins que le document ne contienne des polices CID, format généralement utilisé pour les polices asiatiques. Vous pouvez incorporer ou substituer des polices dans Acrobat ou lors de l’exportation d’un document InDesign au format PDF. Il est possible d’incorporer la police complète ou uniquement le jeu de caractères utilisés dans le fichier. Le recours à un jeu partiel permet de s’assurer que les polices et la force de corps de ses caractères seront utilisées à l’impression par la création d’un nom de police personnalisé. De cette manière, par exemple, votre version de la police Adobe Garamond® (et non celle du prestataire de services) est disponible à tout moment pour l’affichage et l’impression du document par le prestataire de services. Il est possible d’incorporer les polices Type 1 et TrueType à condition qu’elles soient incluses dans le fichier PostScript ou disponibles dans l’un des dossiers de polices contrôlés par Distiller et qu’elles ne présentent aucune restriction d’incorporation. Remarque : (Acrobat) dans certains cas, vous ne pouvez pas indexer, copier, couper ou coller les polices TrueType ayant été traitées par un pilote PostScript. Pour remédier à ce problème, utilisez Acrobat sur le système où le fichier PostScript a été créé. Assurez-vous ensuite que les polices TrueType utilisées dans le fichier sont disponibles sur le système. Si la configuration choisie par l’auteur d’une police empêche l’incorporation de cette dernière, une police de caractères Multiple Master lui est temporairement substituée lors de l’affichage et de l’impression du fichier PDF sur un système ne disposant pas de la police d’origine. AdobeSerifMM remplace les polices sérif et AdobeSansMM se substitue aux polices sans sérif. Les caractères Multiple Master peuvent être étirés ou condensés pour occuper le même espace que le caractère d’origine et préserver les sauts de ligne et de page du document d’origine. Cependant, il peut arriver que la forme du caractère de substitution ne corresponde pas à celle du caractère original, notamment lorsque les caractères ne sont pas courants (les caractères d’écriture, par exemple). Remarque : (Acrobat) pour les textes asiatiques, Acrobat fait appel aux polices provenant du kit de langues asiatiques installé sur le système de l’utilisateur ou de polices similaires. Des polices correspondant à certaines langues à des codages inconnus ne peuvent être substituées. Le cas échéant, le texte est remplacé par des puces dans le fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 123 Création d'un fichier PDF Si les caractères ne sont pas standard (à gauche), la police de substitution ne correspondra pas (à droite). Accès à une police et incorporation d'une police dans Distiller Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier PostScript au format PDF, Distiller doit avoir accès aux polices du fichier pour insérer les informations appropriées dans le fichier PDF. Distiller commence par rechercher dans le fichier PostScript les polices Type 1, TrueType et OpenType. Si la police n'est pas incorporée dans le fichier PostScript, Distiller effectue une recherche dans des dossiers de polices complémentaires. Sous Windows, Distiller effectue une recherche dans les dossiers suivants : • /Resource/Font dans le dossier d'Acrobat • /Windows/Fonts Sous Mac OS, Distiller effectue une recherche dans les dossiers suivants : • /Resource/Font dans le dossier d'Acrobat • /Users/[nom d'utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Fonts • /Bibliothèque/Fonts • /Système/Bibliothèque/Fonts L'installation d'Acrobat inclut des versions longueur seulement de la plupart des polices chinoises, japonaises et coréennes les plus répandues. Distiller peut donc accéder à ces polices dans Acrobat. Assurez-vous que les polices sont présentes sur votre ordinateur. (Sous Windows, choisissez l'option Installation complète lors de l'installation d'Acrobat ou choisissez l'option Installation personnalisée puis sélectionnez Prise en charge des langues asiatiques. Sous Mac OS, ces polices sont installées automatiquement.) Pour plus de détails sur l'inclusion de polices dans le fichier PostScript, voir la documentation associée à l'application ou au pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez pour créer ce fichier. Remarque : Distiller ne prend pas en charge les polices Type 32. Pour inclure d'autres dossiers de police pour la recherche Distiller, dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez Paramètres > Dossiers de police. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter un dossier de polices. Cochez la case Ignorer les versions TrueType des polices PostScript standard pour exclure les polices TrueType portant le même nom que des polices faisant partie du jeu de polices PostScript 3. Remarque : Pour permettre à Distiller d'accéder à un dossier de polices qui a été déplacé, utilisez cette boîte de dialogue pour supprimer de la liste la référence à l'ancien dossier et ajouter une référence au nouveau. Aperçu d'un fichier PDF sans polices locales Vous pouvez créer un aperçu imprimable du document dans lequel des polices par défaut sont substituées aux polices disponibles sur l'ordinateur local mais non incorporées dans le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez alors décider d'incorporer ou non les polices locales dans les fichiers PDF, pour garantir l'aspect du document. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage, puis désélectionnez Utiliser les polices locales.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 124 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : S'il est impossible de substituer une police spécifique, le texte est converti en puces et Acrobat affiche un message d'erreur. Recherche des noms de polices PostScript Lorsque vous devez saisir un nom de police manuellement dans le panneau Polices de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF, vous pouvez utiliser un fichier PDF pour retrouver l'orthographe exacte de la police. 1 Créez à l'aide de l'application de votre choix un document d'une page contenant la police voulue. 2 Créez un fichier PDF à partir de ce document. 3 Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Fichier > Propriétés > Polices. 4 Notez le nom de la police tel qu'il apparaît dans la boîte de dialogue des polices du document, en prenant garde de respecter son orthographe, la casse et la césure.125 Chapitre 4 : Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional vous permet de créer facilement des documents Adobe PDF comprenant différents types de fichiers. Vous pouvez rassembler plusieurs fichiers de type différent dans un porte-documents PDF, dans lequel chaque fichier est présenté séparément, avec sa propre pagination. Vous pouvez également convertir et fusionner plusieurs fichiers en un seul fichier PDF, dans lequel les documents convertis sont agencés de manière séquentielle, les uns à la suite des autres. Il est tout aussi facile de modifier un fichier PDF complexe de manière à ce qu'il ne contienne que les informations qui vous intéressent. Vous pouvez apporter vos modifications dans un document ordonné et unifié, qui répond avec efficacité à vos besoins. Combinaison de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF A propos des porte-documents PDF Un porte-document PDF contient plusieurs fichiers assemblés au sein d'un fichier PDF intégré. Les fichiers constituant un porte-documents PDF peuvent être de formats différents et provenir d'applications diverses. Imaginons par exemple que le projet sur lequel vous travaillez inclut des documents texte, des messages électroniques, des feuilles de calcul, des dessins de CAO et des présentations PowerPoint. Vous pouvez combiner tous ces documents en un seul porte-documents PDF. Les fichiers d'origine conservent leur identité propre tout en faisant encore partie du même porte-documents PDF. Chaque fichier composant peut être ouvert, lu, modifié et formaté indépendamment des autres fichiers composant du porte-documents PDF. Créez un porte-documents PDF à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Créer un porte-documents PDF. Sous Windows, dans les applications Outlook et Lotus Notes, Acrobat PDFMaker permet de créer des porte-documents PDF lors de la conversion de messages électroniques. Remarque : Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader® ne peuvent pas créer de porte-documents PDF ou modifier la disposition, les couleurs, les en-têtes, etc. En fonction des circonstances, les porte-documents PDF présentent plusieurs avantages par rapport à la fusion de fichiers multiples dans un fichier PDF unique : Ajout et suppression Vous pouvez facilement ajouter ou supprimer des fichiers, sans avoir à rechercher et à sélectionner toutes les pages provenant du fichier concerné. Prévisualisation Prévisualisez rapidement les fichiers composant, sans nécessairement les ouvrir dans leurs applications natives. Modification Modifiez des fichiers individuels au sein d'un porte-documents PDF sans qu'il n'y ait aucune incidence sur les autres fichiers. Par exemple, vous pouvez renuméroter les pages d'un seul document du porte-documents PDF sans renuméroter les autres. Vous pouvez également modifier des fichiers au format autre que PDF dans leurs applications à partir d'un porte-documents PDF, dans lequel les modifications seront enregistrées. Diffusion Partagez un porte-documents PDF avec d'autres personnes et assurez-vous de leur fournir tous les éléments.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 126 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Tri Classez les fichiers composant par catégorie que vous pouvez ajouter, supprimer, masquer ou personnaliser. Pour trier la liste, cliquez sur l'en-tête d'une colonne. Impression Imprimez tous les documents ou les composants PDF sélectionnés dans un porte-documents. Recherche Recherchez tous les fichiers d'un porte-documents ou un seul d'entre eux. Vous pouvez même rechercher des fichiers composant qui ne sont pas au format PDF. Incorporation d'autres formats Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des fichiers non PDF à un porte-documents PDF existant, sans les convertir au format PDF. Autonomie par rapport aux fichiers source Les fichiers source d'un porte-documents PDF (même les fichiers PDF existants ajoutés à celui-ci) ne sont pas modifiés lors de la création d'un document PDF. Les fichiers source d'un portedocuments PDF (même les fichiers PDF existants ajoutés à celui-ci) ne sont pas modifiés lors de la création d'un portedocuments PDF. Vous pouvez déplacer un porte-documents PDF n'importe où sur l'ordinateur local ou le réseau, sans risquer de perdre ou de déconnecter ses composants. Réutilisation Vous pouvez insérer le même fichier dans plusieurs porte-documents PDF. Remarque : Les porte-documents PDF sont complètement différents des collections créées dans l'organiseur d'Acrobat. En effet, les collections de l'organiseur sont de simples outils destinés à faciliter la recherche de fichiers PDF apparentés, qu'ils soient ou non stockés dans l'arborescence de dossiers de votre ordinateur. En revanche, les porte-documents PDF sont de véritables fichiers PDF stockés à un emplacement unique sur votre ordinateur. De plus, les fichiers PDF joints à d'autres documents PDF n'offrent pas les mêmes avantages que les porte-documents PDF. Pour des vidéos sur les porte-documents PDF, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Création et sécurisation des porte-documents PDF : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4201_a9_fr • Création d'un porte-document PDF professionnel : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4204_a9_fr • Articles, didacticiels et conseils sur les porte-documents PDF : http://acrobatusers.com/ • Galerie de porte-documents PDF : www.acrobatusers.com/gallery/pdf_portfolio_gallery/ • Filtrage des fichiers réponse : http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker • Filtrage des messages Outlook : http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook Voir aussi « Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF » à la page 25 « Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 462 « Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 390 Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez trier et afficher des fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF ou également les ouvrir, les modifier et les enregistrer dans leurs applications natives. Certains types de fichier nécessitent l'installation de leur application native sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez ouvrir les porte-documents créés à l'aide d'Acrobat 9 dans les applications Acrobat 8 et Rader 8. Cependant, elles n'incluent pas les fonctions des porte-documents PDF suivantes : • Page d'introduction • En-têteUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 127 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Disposition • Modèles de couleurs • Personnalisation des colonnes dans la vue des informations détaillées sur un fichier • Dossiers. Tous les fichiers contenus dans les dossiers sont disponibles, mais les dossiers ne s'affichent pas. • Aperçu des fichiers Affichage des informations détaillées sur un fichier Lorsque vous ouvrez un porte-documents PDF, les fichiers composant sont organisés dans une disposition indiquée par l'auteur du porte-documents. Pour afficher une liste détaillée des fichiers composant, dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Informations sur le fichier . Pour revenir à la vue initiale, cliquez sur le bouton Racine . Tri et filtrage des fichiers composant d'un porte-documents PDF 1 Dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Informations sur le fichier , le cas échéant. 2 Cliquez sur un nom de colonne. Cliquez à nouveau dessus pour inverser l’ordre de tri (Croissant ou Décroissant). L'ordre de tri reste en vigueur uniquement pendant la session active ou tant que vous ne les modifiez pas. Lors de la prochaine ouverture du porte-documents PDF, l'ordre de tri d'origine est à nouveau appliqué. Pour changer l'ordre des colonnes dans la vue Informations sur le fichier, faites glisser le nom des colonnes vers un emplacement différent. Si le porte-document PDF contient des fichiers de réponse aux formulaires ou des messages Outlook, vous pouvez filtrer son contenu selon différents critères. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux vidéos suivantes : • http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker • http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook Voir aussi « Définition des informations sur un fichier » à la page 129 Aperçu des fichiers composant d'un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez obtenir un aperçu de différents types de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF. L'aperçu s'avère utile lorsque que vous souhaitez visualiser le contenu d'un fichier, mais pas le modifier. 1 Dans la vue Informations sur le fichier ou Racine du porte-documents PDF, cliquez deux fois sur un fichier. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu 2 Pour afficher les fichiers composant un par un, cliquez sur les boutons Fichier suivant et Fichier précédent . Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier composant dans l'aperçu des porte-documents PDF, une autre barre d'outils d'aperçu s'ouvre sous celle des porte-documents. Le type de fichier dont l'aperçu est actif détermine quels outils sont disponibles.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 128 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Ouverture, modification et enregistrement d'un fichier composant Tant que l'application est installée sur votre ordinateur, vous avez la possibilité d'ouvrir, de modifier et d'enregistrer un fichier composant dans son application native. Les modifications appliquées aux fichiers composants n'ont aucune incidence sur les fichiers originaux qui ne se trouvent pas dans le porte-documents PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la vue Racine du porte-documents PDF ou Informations sur le fichier, cliquez sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Ouvrir le fichier dans l'application native (pour les fichiers non PDF) ou Ouvrir le fichier (pour les fichiers PDF). • Dans le mode aperçu, cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir situé sur la barre d'outils. 2 Si une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s'affiche, sélectionnez Ouvrir ce fichier ou Autoriser l'ouverture de fichiers de ce type, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Appliquez les modifications souhaitées au document, puis enregistrez le fichier. Création et modification d'un porte-documents PDF La création d'un porte-documents PDF et l'ajout de fichiers sont des opérations simples à réaliser. Vous pouvez créer des dossiers au sein d'un porte-documents PD, supprimer des dossiers et des fichiers composant, modifier leur nom et leur description ou en ajouter une. Le volet de modification des porte-documents PDF vous permet de personnaliser la disposition, la page d'introduction, l'en-tête ou le modèle de couleurs. Vous pouvez également personnaliser la vue Informations sur le fichier avec des colonnes que vous choisissez ou créez vous-même. Voir aussi « Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF » à la page 85 « Enregistrement d'un document PDF » à la page 149 « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 Création d'un porte-documents PDF ? Choisissez Fichier > Créer un porte-documents PDF. Ajout de fichiers à un porte-documents PDF ? Ouvrez un porte-documents PDF et effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Ajouter des fichiers. • Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Ajouter un dossier existant, puis sélectionnez le dossier. • A partir du bureau ou d'un dossier, faites glisser les fichiers ou dossiers dans la zone de travail du porte-documents PD. Création d'un dossier dans un porte-documents PDF ? Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Créer un dossier. Conversion de fichiers multimédia dans un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez convertir des fichiers multimédia composant, de type MOV ou AVI et des fichiers WMV au format PDF, SWF ou FLV dans un porte-documents PDF. 1 Dans la vue Racine ou Informations sur le fichier, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers multimédia dans le portedocuments.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 129 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents, choisissez Modifier > Convertir au format PDF. 3 Si une boîte de dialogue s'affiche, indiquez les options dont vous avez besoin, puis cliquez sur OK. Sélection d'une disposition Les options de disposition des porte-documents PDF vous permettent de présenter des fichiers composant dans la disposition qui convient le mieux à vos besoins. Par exemple, la disposition Rotation permet aux lecteurs de feuilleter les vignettes du document une par une. Vous pouvez également créer vos propres dispositions personnalisées. Pour de plus amples détails, reportez-vous au document relatif à la personnalisation des navigateurs : www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_custom_layout_fr. 1 Dans un porte-documents PDF ouvert, choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Modifier le portedocuments. 2 Dans le volet de modification du porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez Choix d'une disposition. 3 Le cas échéant, choisissez une catégorie dans le menu déroulant. 4 Cliquez sur la disposition souhaitée. Ajout d'une page d'introduction et d'un en-tête Vous pouvez insérer une page d'introduction et un en-tête dans un porte-documents PDF. La page d'introduction, qui s'affiche lorsque les destinataires ouvrent le fichier du porte-documents, peut fournir des informations ou des instructions relatives à l'utilisation du porte-documents. Pour ouvrir ou fermer la page d'introduction, cliquez sur le bouton de la page d'introduction dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF. L'en-tête s'affiche en haut de la disposition et peut contenir des informations importantes, comme un logo, un nom de société et des coordonnées. La page d'introduction et l'en-tête peuvent comprendre du texte, des images ou les deux et peuvent être organisés de diverses façons. Vous pouvez même ajouter une animation Flash (fichier SWF ou FLV) à votre page d'introduction. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Modifier le porte-documents. 2 Dans le volet de modification du porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez Ajout d'une introduction et d'un en-tête. 3 Sélectionnez soit une page d'introduction soit un en-tête, puis choisissez un modèle dans la liste. 4 Cliquez dans les zones pour ajouter du contenu. 5 Sélectionnez une zone de texte ou d'image et indiquez la taille, la couleur de l'arrière-plan et d'autres propriétés. Sélection d'un modèle de couleurs 1 Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Modifier le porte-documents. 2 Dans le panneau de modification du porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez Choix d'un modèle de couleurs. 3 Cliquez sur les boutons de couleur pour afficher les modèles ou sur Personnaliser un modèle de couleurs et indiquez les couleurs désirées. Définition des informations sur un fichier La vue Informations sur le fichier dresse la liste des fichiers composant sous forme de tableau, avec des colonnes affichant leur description, taille ou dates de modification. Vous avez la possibilité de personnaliser ces colonnes. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Modifier le porte-documents. 2 Dans le volet de modification du porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez Informations sur le fichier. 3 Sous cette option, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher ou masquer une colonne dans la liste, il suffit de la sélectionner ou de la déselectionner. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 130 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Pour ajouter une colonne, entrez son nom dans la zone Ajouter une colonne, sélectionnez un type de données dans le menu, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter . • Pour supprimer une colonne, sélectionnez-la et cliquez sur Supprimer . Les colonnes prédéfinies ne peuvent être supprimées. • Pour changer l'ordre d'une colonne, sélectionnez-la, puis cliquez sur la flèche vers le haut ou vers le bas. • Pour définir l'ordre dans lequel les fichiers apparaîtront lors de la première ouverture du porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez un nom de colonne dans le menu de tri d'origine. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton d'ordre ascendant ou descendant. Le tri d'origine a une incidence sur les vues Racine et Informations sur le fichier. Pour créer un ordre de tri personnalisé, ajoutez une nouvelle colonne, indiquez un type de données et saisissez une valeur pour chaque document. (Par exemple, créez une colonne intitulée Mon tri et indiquez Nom comme type de données. Puis tapez 1 pour le premier document, 2 pour le deuxième et ainsi de suite.) Vous pouvez ensuite définir ces données en tant qu'ordre de tri d'origine. Suppression de fichiers et de dossiers dans un porte-documents PDF ? Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers ou dossiers dans le porte-documents et appuyez sur Supprimer. En cas de suppression d'un dossier, l'intégralité des fichiers qui s'y trouvent sera supprimée du porte-documents. Modification du nom et de la description de fichiers composant dans un portedocuments PDF • Pour modifier le nom d'un fichier composant, cliquez sur celui-ci pour le sélectionner, puis cliquez dans le nom du fichier pour afficher le point d'insertion. Saisissez ensuite un nouveau nom de fichier. • Pour modifier la description d'un fichier composant, sélectionnez le fichier en question, puis cliquez sur la zone de description. (Dans la vue Racine, la zone de description se trouve sous le nom de fichier ; dans la vue Informations sur le fichier, elle apparaît dans une colonne dans la liste des fichiers.) Saisissez ensuite une description. Voir aussi « Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 126 Extraction de fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF ? Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers, puis choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer des fichiers du porte-documents. Partage d'un porte-documents PDF Partagez un porte-documents PDF avec d'autres personnes en l'envoyant par messagerie électronique ou en le téléchargeant sur Acrobat.com, qui est un service web gratuit et sûr. Envoi d'un porte-documents PDF par messagerie ? Dans le menu de partage qui se trouve sur la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Envoyer par messagerie Partage d'un porte-documents PDF sur Acrobat.com 1 Dans le menu de partage de la boîte d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Partager le porte-documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 131 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 3 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Partager d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. Vous pouvez partager de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 4 Dans l'écran relatif à la messagerie électronique, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques des destinataires. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie (Lotus Notes ou Microsoft Outlook, par exemple). Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. • Personnalisez l'objet et le texte du message électronique, comme vous le souhaitez. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger et à ouvrir le fichier. Acrobat télécharge le fichier indiqué vers Acrobat.com et envoie un message aux destinataires comprenant un lien vers les fichiers. Autres fonctions activées dans un porte-documents PDF Ces commandes destinées aux fichiers composant sont disponibles dans les porte-documents PDF : Extension des fonctions d'Adobe Reader Cette option permet aux utilisateurs d'enregistrer des données de formulaire, d'utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire et d'apposer une signature numérique sur des fichiers composant PDF. Pour de plus amples renseignements, voir « Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader » à la page 209. Réduction de la taille du fichier Permet de réduire la taille des composants PDF. Pour plus d'informations, voir la section « Réduction de la taille des fichiers par enregistrement » à la page 151. Protection par mot de passe Cette option permet de sécuriser un porte-documents ou un composant PDF à l'intérieur d'un porte-documents. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 254. Remarque : D'autres fonctions de sécurité sont également disponibles pour les porte-documents et les fichiers composant dans les porte-documents PD. Pour plus de détails, voir la rubrique « Protection » à la page 247. OCR Cette option vous permet de rechercher, corriger et copier du texte numérisé dans des fichiers composant PDF scannés. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 74. Optimisation PDF Permet d'obtenir des paramètres étendus pour réduire la taille de fichiers composant PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir« Optimisation » à la page 356. Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page Ajoutez, mettez à jour et supprimez des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numéros Bates, des arrière-plans et des filigranes dans des fichiers composant PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page » à la page 134. Conversion au format PDF Conversion de fichiers multimédia au format PDF. Pour plus d'informations, voir la section « Conversion de fichiers multimédia dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 128. Impression Impression de documents composant. Pour plus d'informations, voir la section « Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 462.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 132 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Autres options de combinaison de fichiers Création de fichiers PDF fusionnés Dans un fichier PDF fusionné, les documents convertis sont réunis les uns à la suite des autres dans un seul document PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Combiner > Fusionner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. Si un document PDF est ouvert, il figure dans la liste des fichiers inclus. 2 Dans le coin supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue Combiner des fichiers, vérifiez que l'option Fichier PDF unique est activée. 3 A partir du menu Ajouter des fichiers, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter des fichiers individuels, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez-les. • Pour ajouter tous les fichiers d'un dossier, choisissez Ajouter des dossiers, puis sélectionnez le dossier. Remarque : Si le dossier contient des fichiers non pris en charge par Acrobat pour la conversion au format PDF, ces fichiers ne sont pas ajoutés. • Pour ajouter des fichiers combinés dans des fichiers PDF au cours d'autres sessions, choisissez Réutiliser les fichiers. Sélectionnez ensuite un fichier PDF créé précédemment dans la liste de gauche et, dans la liste de droite, les documents composant. (Si vous n'avez encore jamais utilisé la boîte de dialogue Combiner des fichiers, cette option n'est pas disponible.) • Pour ajouter les fichiers PDF actuellement ouverts, choisissez Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Sous Windows, vous pouvez aussi faire glisser les fichiers ou dossiers à partir du bureau ou d'un dossier dans la boîte de dialogue Combiner les fichiers. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur les éléments sélectionnés et à choisir Combiner les fichiers pris en charge dans Acrobat. Si certains fichiers sont protégés par mot de passe, un ou plusieurs messages s'affichent, vous demandant de saisir le mot de passe approprié. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs fois un même fichier. Par exemple, un fichier peut jouer le rôle de page de transition entre les autres fichiers ou un fichier vide peut servir à ajouter des pages vierges. 4 Le cas échéant, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des fichiers : • Pour changer l'ordre des fichiers dans la liste, sélectionnez un fichier et faites-le glisser, ou cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. • Pour trier la liste, cliquez sur le nom de la colonne à utiliser comme critère de tri. Cliquez à nouveau pour inverser l'ordre de tri. • Pour convertir une partie seulement d'un fichier source contenant plusieurs pages, cliquez deux fois sur le fichier ou sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner les pages (voir la remarque). Dans la zone Aperçu, vérifiez et sélectionnez les pages si nécessaire, suivez les instructions présentées dans la boîte de dialogue, lesquelles varient en fonction du type de fichier choisi, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Le libellé du bouton Sélectionner varie en fonction du type de fichier. Dans le cas de documents PDF et Word, ce bouton s'intitule Sélectionner les pages ; dans le cas de fichiers PowerPoint, il s'appelle Sélectionner les diapositives ; dans le cas de fichiers Excel, Sélectionner les feuilles ; dans le cas de fichiers AutoCAD, Sélectionner les dispositions ; dans le cas de fichiers Visio, Sélectionner les feuilles. 5 Cliquez sur Options pour définir les paramètres de conversion. 6 Spécifiez la taille de fichier, puis cliquez sur Combiner les fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 133 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Une boîte de dialogue d'état indique la progression de la conversion de fichiers. Certaines applications source s'ouvrent et se ferment automatiquement. Voir aussi « Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF » à la page 85 « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 107 Paramètres de taille de fichier Taille de fichier minimale Réduit les images volumineuses selon la résolution d'écran et procède à leur compression au format JPEG qualité inférieure. Idéal pour l'affichage à l'écran, la messagerie électronique et Internet. Remarque : Si certains fichiers source sont déjà au format PDF, l'option Taille de fichier minimale leur applique la fonction Réduire la taille du fichier. La fonction Réduire la taille du fichier ne s'applique pas si l'option Taille de fichier par défaut ou Taille de fichier maximale est sélectionnée. Taille de fichier par défaut Crée des fichiers PDF adaptés à la visualisation et l'impression de documents professionnels. Taille de fichier maximale Applique le paramètre prédéfini de conversion Qualité supérieure. Insertion d'un fichier PDF dans un autre fichier PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF qui doit servir de base au fichier combiné. 2 Choisissez Document > Insérer des pages > A partir d'un fichier (Windows) ou Document > Insérer des pages (Mac OS). 3 Sélectionnez le fichier PDF. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Insérer des pages, spécifiez l'emplacement d'insertion dans le document (avant ou après la première ou la dernière page, ou une page désignée). Cliquez sur OK. 5 Pour conserver intact le document PDF dans un fichier distinct, choisissez Enregistrer sous et donnez un nouveau nom au fichier PDF fusionné. Vous pouvez également ajouter un fichier existant à un fichier PDF en faisant glisser l'icône du fichier directement dans le panneau Pages du fichier PDF ouvert. Insertion d'une sélection de Presse-papiers dans un fichier PDF (Windows) Vous pouvez insérer une ou plusieurs pages de contenu sélectionnées et copiées à partir d'une application dans un fichier PDF existant. 1 Ouvrez le document contenant les éléments à ajouter. Sélectionnez le contenu, puis copiez la sélection (dans la plupart des applications, choisissez Edition > Copier). 2 Ouvrez le fichier PDF devant servir de base au fichier combiné, puis choisissez Document > Insérer des pages > A partir du Presse-papiers. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Insérer des pages, spécifiez l'emplacement d'insertion dans le document (avant ou après la première ou la dernière page, ou une page désignée). Cliquez sur OK. 4 Pour conserver intact le document PDF dans un fichier distinct, choisissez Enregistrer sous et donnez un nouveau nom au fichier PDF fusionné.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 134 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Placement d'un document PDF en tant que fichier lié dans un autre document Vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer des documents PDF dans d'autres types de fichiers prenant en charge la liaison et l'incorporation d'objets (OLE, Object Linking and Embedding) tels que les fichiers InDesign® ou Word. Ces fichiers sont appelés documents conteneur OLE. Si, par la suite, vous apportez des modifications au document PDF d'origine, les fonctions OLE de l'application conteneur sont en mesure de mettre à jour le fichier incorporé dans le document conteneur de manière à refléter les changements effectués dans le fichier PDF initial. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez la commande d'insertion d'un objet ou d'un hyperlien de l'application conteneur OLE. • (Windows) Dans Acrobat, choisissez Edition > Copier le fichier dans le Presse-papiers, puis la commande Collage spécial dans l'application conteneur. Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page Ajout et modification d'un en-tête et d'un pied de page Un en-tête et un pied de page présentent des informations homogènes sur les marges des pages de tout le document PDF. Ces informations peuvent ainsi correspondre à une date, à une numérotation de pages automatique, au titre général du document ou encore au nom de l'auteur. Vous pouvez ajouter des en-têtes et des pieds de page à un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF, y compris aux composants d'un porte-documents PDF. Vous pouvez modifier les en-têtes et les pieds de page au sein d'un document PDF. Par exemple, vous pouvez ajouter un en-tête qui affiche le numéro de page dans le coin droit des pages impaires et un autre qui indique le numéro de page du côté gauche des pages paires. Vous pouvez définir et enregistrer les en-têtes et les pieds de page que vous créez à des fins de réutilisation ou simplement les appliquer sans les enregistrer. Après avoir appliqué un en-tête et un pied de page, vous pouvez les modifier, les remplacer ou les supprimer dans le document PDF. Vous pouvez également afficher un aperçu des entêtes et des pieds de page avant leur application et ajuster leurs marges de sorte qu'elles ne chevauchent pas le contenu restant des pages. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page avec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter. 2 Le cas échéant, spécifiez les valeurs Polices et Marge. Les propriétés de texte s'appliquent à toutes les entrées d'en-tête et de pied de page faisant partie de la définition de ce paramètre. Il est impossible d'appliquer différents paramètres à des zones de texte d'en-tête et de pied de page individuelles au cours de la même session de la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un en-tête et un pied de page Pour éviter le chevauchement, cliquez sur le lien Options d'aspect et cocher la case Réduire le document pour éviter d'écraser le texte et les images. Pour éviter le redimensionnement ou le repositionnement lors de l'impression du document PDF dans un grand format, cochez la case Conserver la même position et la même taille d'en-tête et de pied de page lors de l'impression des différents formats de page. 3 Saisissez le texte dans l'une des zones de texte d'en-tête et de pied de page. Pour insérer des numéros de page ou la date du jour, cliquez sur une zone, puis sur les boutons appropriés. Pour sélectionner le formatage des saisies automatiques, cliquez sur Format de folio et de date. Remarque : Vous pouvez combiner du texte, des dates et des numéros de page. Rien ne vous empêche d'ajouter plusieurs lignes de texte à une entrée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 135 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 4 Pour spécifier les pages sur lesquelles l'en-tête et le pied de page doivent apparaître, cliquez sur le bouton Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 5 Examinez les résultats dans la zone d'aperçu à l'aide de l'option Aperçu de page afin de visualiser différentes pages du document PDF. 6 (Facultatif) Pour enregistrer les paramètres d'en-tête et de pied de page pour une utilisation ultérieure, cliquez sur Enregistrer les paramètres. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Suivez les étapes 2 à 6 de la procédure d'ajout d'en-tête et de pied de page avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir les en-têtes et pied de page, cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page aux fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez la procédure d'ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page avec un document ouvert. Mise à jour des en-têtes et pieds de page La mise à jour s'applique au dernier jeu d'en-têtes et de pieds de page ajouté. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Mettre à jour. 3 Modifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Ajout d'un autre en-tête ou pied de page 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou sélectionnez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter, puis cliquez sur Ajouter dans le message qui s'affiche. L'aperçu affiche les en-têtes et pieds de page existants. 3 Saisissez un texte dans les zones prévues à cet effet afin d'ajouter des en-têtes et des pieds de page supplémentaires. A mesure que vous tapez, l'aperçu met à jour l'aspect de l'ensemble de ces éléments sur la page. 4 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez de nouvelles options de formatage en vérifiant la mise à jour de la page dans l'aperçu. Remplacement de tous les en-têtes et pieds de page 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 136 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter, puis cliquez sur Remplacer dans le message qui s'affiche. 3 Configurez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux en-têtes et pieds de page ajoutés dans Acrobat version 7.0 ou ultérieure. Suppression de tous les en-têtes et pieds de page ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou sélectionnez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. Choisissez ensuite Document > En-tête et pied de page > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer les en-têtes et pieds de page dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les documents ouverts, puis choisissez Document > En-tête et pied de page > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux en-têtes et pieds de page ajoutés dans Acrobat version 7.0 ou ultérieure. Ajout d'un en-tête ou d'un pied de page Bates La numérotation Bates est une méthode d'indexation de documents juridiques destinée à faciliter l'identification et la récupération d'informations. Chaque page de chaque document se voit attribuer un numéro Bates unique indiquant également son lien à d'autres documents numérotés selon cette méthode. Les numéros Bates s'affichent sous la forme d'en-têtes ou de pieds de page sur les pages de chaque document PDF du lot. L'identificateur Bates est désigné comme numéro bien qu'il puisse inclure un préfixe et un suffixe alphanumériques. Grâce à ces affixes, il est plus facile de reconnaître le sujet central des fichiers. Remarque : La numérotation Bates est indisponible dans les fichiers protégés et chiffrés, ainsi que dans certains formulaires. Une vidéo sur l'utilisation de la numérotation Bates dans un porte-documents PDF est disponible à l'adresse http://blogs.adobe.com/acrolaw/. Numérotation Bates Lors de la désignation des documents pour la numérotation Bates, vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers PDF, des portedocuments et tout fichier d'un format autre convertible au format PDF. Le processus est alors le suivant : les fichiers d'un autre format sont convertis au format PDF, puis la numérotation Bates est appliquée au fichier PDF ainsi obtenu. Si vous appliquez la numérotation Bates au porte-documents, tous les fichiers du porte-documents qui ne sont pas au format PDF sont remplacés par leur version PDF numérotée. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Numérotation Bates > Ajouter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Numérotation Bates, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez ensuite les fichiers ou le dossier. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez un dossier contenant des fichiers non pris en charge par Acrobat pour la conversion au format PDF, ces fichiers ne sont pas ajoutés. Si certains fichiers sont protégés par mot de passe, un ou plusieurs messages s'affichent, vous demandant de saisir le mot de passe approprié.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 137 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 3 Le cas échéant, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des fichiers : • Pour modifier l'ordre d'attribution des numéros Bates, sélectionnez un fichier, puis faites-le glisser ou cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. • Pour trier la liste, cliquez sur le nom d'une colonne. Cliquez à nouveau pour inverser l'ordre de tri. 4 Pour spécifier le dossier de destination des fichiers de sortie et les préférences de dénomination des fichiers, cliquez sur Options de sortie. Définissez les options selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Une fois les fichiers ajoutés et organisés, cliquez sur OK. Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un en-tête et un pied de page, cliquez dans la zone voulue pour y placer le point d'insertion. 6 Cliquez sur Insérer un numéro Bates. Entrez ensuite les informations suivantes : • Dans la zone Nombre de chiffres, indiquez le nombre de chiffres devant constituer le numéro Bates en saisissant une valeur comprise entre 6 et 15. Le nombre par défaut est de 6, ce qui génère des numéros Bates tels que 000001, 000002 et ainsi de suite. • Dans la zone Premier folio, indiquez le numéro à attribuer au premier document PDF de la liste. La version 1 est définie par défaut. • Dans la zone Préfixe, saisissez le texte devant précéder le numéro Bates. • Dans la zone Suffixe, saisissez le texte devant suivre le numéro Bates. Remarque : Dans le cas de dossiers juridiques comprenant un très grand nombre de pages, saisissez une valeur plus élevée dans la zone Nombre de chiffres. N'utilisez pas le caractère dièse (#) dans le texte du préfixe ou du suffixe. 7 Cliquez sur OK, puis apportez les modifications nécessaires aux différents paramètres, comme vous le feriez pour tout autre en-tête ou pied de page. Ajout de documents supplémentaires à une série de numérotation Bates Avant de commencer, vérifiez le dernier numéro Bates appliqué à la série de documents. 1 Suivez la procédure décrite dans la rubrique précédente pour débuter le processus de numérotation Bates et sélectionnez les fichiers à ajouter à la série. 2 Après avoir cliqué sur Insérer un numéro Bates, entrez le numéro suivant de la série dans la zone Premier folio. Entrez le suffixe et le préfixe à ajouter pour le reste de la série. 3 Modifiez le reste des paramètres, puis cliquez sur OK. Recherche de fichiers PDF numérotés selon la méthode Bates 1 Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. 2 Comme mot ou expression à rechercher, tapez l'intégralité ou une partie du numéro Bates. Par exemple, pour trouver un document spécifique dont vous connaissez le numéro Bates, saisissez le numéro complet comme texte de la recherche. Pour rechercher des documents dans une série dotée de la numérotation Bates, saisissez une partie significative de la série Bates, telle que le préfixe ou le suffixe. 3 Sous Où voulez-vous effectuer la recherche ?, sélectionnez le bouton radio Dans tous les documents PDF dans. 4 Cliquez sur Rechercher l'emplacement et indiquez l'emplacement voulu. 5 Cliquez sur Rechercher. Remarque : Pour rechercher des fichiers PDF numérotés selon la méthode Bates dans un porte-documents, ouvrez ce dernier, puis tapez l'intégralité ou une partie du numéro Bates dans la zone de recherche de la barre d'outils du portedocuments.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 138 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Suppression de la numérotation Bates 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Numérotation Bates > Supprimer. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez ensuite les fichiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK. Ajout et modification d'un arrière-plan Un arrière-plan apparaît sous le texte ou les images d'une page. Il peut s'agir d'une couleur unie toute simple comme d'une image. Vous pouvez seulement appliquer un arrière-plan de manière sélective à des pages individuelles ou à des étendues de pages d'un ou de plusieurs documents PDF. Un document PDF prend en charge un seul arrière-plan par page, mais les pages peuvent disposer d'arrière-plans différents. Avant et après l’ajout d’un arrière-plan Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer. Remarque : Si un message s'affiche pour vous informer de la présence d'un arrière-plan existant dans le document ouvert, cliquez sur Remplacer l'arrière-plan. Si vous appliquez le nouvel arrière-plan à des pages spécifiques, l'ancien arrière-plan est conservé tel quel sur les pages ne faisant pas partie de l'étendue définie pour le nouvel arrière-plan. 2 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer l'arrière-plan à une sélection de pages, cliquez sur Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 3 Définissez l'arrière-plan : • Pour réutiliser un autre arrière-plan et les options associées enregistrées lors d'une session antérieure, sélectionnez l'élément voulu dans le menu Paramètres enregistrés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 139 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Pour appliquer un arrière-plan de couleur unie, sélectionnez Couleur. Sélectionnez ensuite une nuance ou une couleur personnalisée dans le sélecteur de couleur . • Pour utiliser une image, choisissez Fichier, puis sélectionnez le fichier image voulu. Pour sélectionner une image spécifique dans un fichier de plusieurs pages, indiquez-la dans la zone Numéro de page. Remarque : Seuls les fichiers PDF, JPEG et BMP peuvent servir d'images d'arrière-plan. 4 Ajustez l'aspect et la position de l'arrière-plan selon vos besoins. 5 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le même arrière-plan à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un arrière-plan. 4 Suivez les étapes 2 à 4 de la procédure d'ajout, de remplacement ou de modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir l'arrière-plan, cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan pour les fichiers PDF d'un portedocuments 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez les étapes de la procédure d'ajout, de remplacement ou de modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert. Mise à jour d'une image d'arrière-plan récemment retouchée Si le fichier image d'origine servant d'arrière-plan est modifié, vous pouvez mettre à jour le fichier PDF afin qu'il reflète la nouvelle version de l'image plutôt que de supprimer l'ancienne version et d'ajouter la version plus récente. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Mettre à jour. 3 Cliquez sur OK ou modifiez les autres options d'arrière-plan au préalable. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux arrières-plan ajoutés dans Acrobat 7.0 ou version ultérieure. Suppression d'un arrière-plan sur une sélection de pages 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer. 3 Cliquez sur Options d'étendue, puis indiquez l'étendue de page et choisissez une option de sélection, selon les besoins.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 140 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Suppression d'un arrière-plan sur toutes les pages ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. Choisissez ensuite Document > Arrière-plan > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer l'arrière-plan de plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les fichiers PDF ouverts, puis choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Ajout et modification d'un filigrane Un filigrane est, à l'instar d'un tampon, un texte ou une image figurant sur ou sous le contenu existant d'un document. Vous pouvez, par exemple, appliquer un filigrane intitulé « Confidentiel » à des pages contenant des informations sensibles. Vous pouvez insérer plusieurs filigranes dans un ou plusieurs documents PDF, à condition de procéder filigrane par filigrane. Vous pouvez spécifier la page ou l'étendue de pages sur laquelle le filigrane doit apparaître. Remarque : Contrairement à un tampon, un filigrane s'intègre aux pages PDF en tant qu'élément fixe. Un tampon est un type de commentaire PDF que les lecteurs du document PDF peuvent ouvrir afin d'afficher une annotation de texte ou qu'ils peuvent déplacer, modifier ou supprimer. Avant et après l'ajout d'un filigrane Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigraneavec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Ajouter.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 141 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le filigrane à une sélection de pages, cliquez sur Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 3 Spécifiez le filigrane : • Pour réutiliser un filigrane et les options associées enregistrés lors d'une session antérieure, sélectionnez l'élément voulu dans le menu Paramètres enregistrés. • Pour créer un filigrane de texte, sélectionnez Texte, puis effectuez la saisie dans la zone correspondante. Réglez les options de mise en forme du texte selon vos besoins. • Pour utiliser une image comme filigrane, sélectionnez Fichier. Cliquez ensuite sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier image. Si le fichier comprend plusieurs pages dotées d'une image, spécifiez le numéro de la page qui vous intéresse. Remarque : Seules les images PDF, JPEG et BMP peuvent servir de filigranes. 4 Pour modifier la taille d'un filigrane d'image, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour redimensionner le filigrane par rapport à la taille d'origine du fichier image, saisissez un pourcentage pour l'option Echelle absolue (dans la zone Source de la boîte de dialogue). • Pour redimensionner le filigrane par rapport aux dimensions de la page PDF, saisissez une valeur (exprimée en pourcentage) pour l'option Echelle proportionnelle à la page cible (dans la zone Aspect de la boîte de dialogue). 5 Ajustez l'aspect et la position de le filigrane selon vos besoins. 6 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Options d'aspect et spécifiez les options suivantes : • Pour indiquer à quel moment le filigrane doit apparaître, sélectionnez ou désélectionnez Afficher à l'impression et Afficher à l'écran. • Pour contrôler les variations dans les fichiers PDF de pages au format non homogène, activez ou désactivez l'option Conserver la même position et la même taille de texte du filigrane lors de l’impression sur différents formats de page. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigrane sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Ajouter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un filigrane. 4 Suivez les étapes 2 à 6 de la procédure d'ajout ou de remplacement d'un filigrane avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir le filigrane, cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigrane dans les fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez les étapes de la procédure d'ajout ou de remplacement d'un filigrane avec un document ouvert.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 142 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Mise à jour d'un filigrane 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Mettre à jour. 3 Apportez les modifications voulues au filigrane, puis cliquez sur OK. Important : Si votre document PDF compte plusieurs filigranes, cette procédure met seulement à jour le premier d'entre eux et ignore les suivants. Si vous changez d'avis à propos de la mise à jour des filigranes une fois l'opération effectuée, choisissez immédiatement Edition > Annuler le filigrane. Suppression d'un filigrane ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. Choisissez ensuite Document > Filigrane > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer des filigranes de plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les fichiers PDF ouverts, puis choisissez Document > Filigrane > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Recadrage des pages La boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages permet d'ajuster la zone de page visible. Vous pouvez ainsi conserver une plus grande homogénéité au sein d'un document PDF composé de pages de format différent. Le recadrage n'entraîne pas la réduction de la taille du fichier, car les informations sont cachées mais pas écartées. Lors de la préparation d'un document PDF destiné à l'impression, vous pouvez modifier les zones graphique, de rognage de fond perdu d'une page via la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages. Si vous souhaitez afficher des indicateurs de ces zones dans le panneau de visualisation, cochez la case Zones graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu dans les préférences d’affichage. (Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage.) Recadrage des zones vides entourant le contenu de la page 1 Choisissez Document > Recadrer des pages. 2 Sous Commandes de marge, cochez la case Supprimer les marges. Recadrage d'une ou de plusieurs pages 1 Choisissez Document > Recadrer des pages. 2 Dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin supérieur gauche, laissez le paramètre Zone de recadrage sélectionné, puis ajustez les valeurs des options de la zone Commandes de marge : Haut, Bas, Gauche et Droite. Un rectangle noir s'affiche dans la vignette de la page ; il illustre les nouvelles limites de la page recadrée. 3 (Facultatif) En procédant paramètre par paramètre, sélectionnez Zone graphique, Zone de rognage et Zone de fond perdu dans le menu déroulant, puis ajustez à chaque fois les valeurs des options de la zone Commandes de marge. Dans l'affichage de la vignette de page, les limites ajustées sont représentées sous forme de rectangles de couleur rouge, verte et bleue. 4 Sous Modification du format de page, sélectionnez d'autres options en fonction du document PDF ouvert. 5 Le cas échéant, configurez les paramètres d'étendue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 143 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Etant donné que la propriété Recadrage est sélectionnée par défaut, les valeurs de marge spécifiées déterminent la limite définitive du recadrage. La boîte de dialogue affiche chaque propriété sélectionnée sous forme de zone colorée dans la zone d'aperçu. Cochez la case Afficher toutes les zones afin d'afficher toutes les propriétés en même temps. Sélectionnez les propriétés à ajuster. Recadrage d'une page à l'aide de l'outil Recadrer 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Recadrer. 2 Tracez un rectangle sur la page à recadrer. Le cas échéant, faites glisser les poignées des angles du rectangle de recadrage jusqu'à obtention du format de page souhaité. 3 Cliquez deux fois dans le rectangle de recadrage. La boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages s'affiche, indiquant les mesures de marge du rectangle de recadrage et la page à recadrer. Vous pouvez écraser ces paramètres ou appliquer d'autres options en effectuant de nouvelles sélections dans la boîte de dialogue avant de cliquer sur OK. Paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages Les options de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages définissent une sélection d'options de recadrage des pages. Les options disponibles dans les zones Marges et Commandes de marge sont les suivantes : Afficher toutes les zones Affiche les rectangles noir, rouge, vert et bleu indiquant les zones de recadrage, graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu sur les vignettes de page. Lorsque plusieurs marges coïncident, seule une ligne de couleur est visible. Zone de recadrage (CropBox) Définit la limite du contenu d'une page lors de l’affichage ou de l’impression de cette dernière. Sauf indication contraire (dans les options JDF, par exemple), la limite du recadrage détermine le positionnement du contenu de page sur le dispositif de sortie. Zone graphique (ArtBox) Définit le contenu de la page, espaces blancs compris. Zone de rognage (TrimBox) Définit les dimensions finales de la page après rognage. Zone de fond perdu (BleedBox) Définit le masque lors de l'impression professionnelle de la page pour pallier le rognage et le pliage du papier. Les repères d'impression risquent de se situer hors de la zone de fond perdu. Conserver les proportions Verrouille les proportions de recadrage de sorte que toutes les marges soient de distance égale. Supprimer les marges Recadre la page selon les limites de l'illustration. Cette option s'avère pratique lorsque vous ajustez les bords de diapositives de présentation enregistrées au format PDF. Remettre à zéro Remet à zéro les marges de recadrage. Revenir à la sélection Rétablit la marge de recadrage sélectionnée à l'aide de l'outil Recadrer. Annulation du recadrage Le recadrage d'un document PDF n'entraîne pas la réduction de la taille du fichier, car les informations sont cachées mais pas écartées. En réinitialisant le format d'une page, vous pouvez restaurer l'état initial de la page et de son contenu. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages en choisissant l'une des options suivantes : • Document > Recadrer des pages. • Recadrer des pages dans le menu Options du panneau Pages. 2 Réinitialisez les marges selon les dimensions initiales. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 144 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Réorganisation des pages d'un document PDF Rotation d'une page Vous avez la possibilité de faire pivoter la totalité ou une partie des pages d'un document. La rotation est basée sur des incréments de 90°. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Rotation de pages en procédant de l'une des manières suivantes : • Choisissez Document > Pivoter des pages. • Dans le panneau Pages, déroulez le menu Options et choisissez Rotation de pages. 2 Dans le menu Sens, sélectionnez le degré et le sens de la rotation : 90 degrés sens antihoraire, 90 degrés sens horaire ou 180 degrés. 3 Dans la zone Pages, indiquez les pages auxquelles la rotation s'applique : toutes les pages, une sélection de pages ou une série de pages. 4 Dans le menu Rotation, spécifiez les pages paires, impaires ou les deux, puis sélectionnez l'orientation des pages à faire pivoter. Pour changer temporairement de mode d'affichage, choisissez Affichage > Rotation > Horaire ou Antihoraire. L'orientation initiale de la page est restaurée lors de la prochaine ouverture du document PDF. Extraction de pages d'un document PDF L'extraction consiste à réutiliser dans un document PDF des pages sélectionnées dans un autre fichier PDF. Les pages extraites comprennent non seulement le contenu mais aussi tous les champs de formulaire, commentaires et liens associés au contenu initial des pages. Vous pouvez conserver les pages extraites dans le document d'origine ou les en supprimer lors de l'extraction, opération comparable aux opérations classiques de couper-coller ou de copier-coller, à ceci près que la commande agit au niveau de la page. Remarque : Quant aux signets et divisions d'article associés aux pages extraites, ils ne sont pas inclus dans l'opération. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Document > Extraire des pages. 2 Spécifiez l'intervalle de pages à extraire. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Extraire des pages, effectuez une ou plusieurs des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Pour supprimer les pages extraites du document initial, cochez la case Supprimer les pages après extraction. • Pour créer un document PDF pour chaque page extraite, cochez la case Extraire les pages sous forme de fichiers distincts. • Pour conserver les pages d'origine dans le document et créer un seul fichier PDF contenant toutes les pages extraites, désactivez les deux cases à cocher. Les pages extraites sont placées dans un nouveau document sous l'intitulé Pages de [nom du document d'origine]-[n]. Remarque : L'auteur du document PDF peut définir les options de protection afin d'empêcher toute extraction de pages. Pour afficher les paramètres de protection appliqués à un document, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés et activez l'onglet Protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 145 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Voir aussi « Extraction de fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 130 Fractionnement de fichiers PDF en plusieurs documents Il est possible de fractionner un ou plusieurs documents en un jeu de fichiers plus petits. Vous pouvez définir le fractionnement d'un document selon le maximum de nombre de pages ou de taille de fichier, ou en fonction des signets de premier niveau. Fractionnement d'un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF avec un document ouvert 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF et choisissez Document > Fractionner le document. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Fractionner le document, spécifiez les critères de division : Nombre de pages Spécifiez le nombre maximum de pages de chaque fraction du document. Taille du fichier Spécifiez la taille de fichier maximale de chaque fraction du document. Signets de niveau supérieur Si le document comprend des signets, permet de créer un document pour chaque signet de niveau supérieur. 3 Pour spécifier le dossier de destination des fichiers fractionnés et les préférences de dénomination des fichiers, cliquez sur Options de sortie. Définissez les options selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le même fractionnement à plusieurs documents, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez les fichiers ou le dossier, puis cliquez sur OK. Fractionnement d'un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Fractionner le document. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers. Sélectionnez les fichiers ou le dossier, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Suivez les étapes 2 et 3 de la procédure de fractionnement de documents avec un document ouvert. Déplacement ou copie d'une page Les vignettes de page permettent de copier ou de déplacer des pages au sein d'un document et de copier des pages d'un document à un autre. Lorsque vous faites glisser une vignette de page dans un panneau Pages, une barre apparaît à proximité des autres vignettes, indiquant l'emplacement où la page s'affichera dans le document PDF. Cette barre s'affiche en bas ou en haut lorsque les vignettes sont disposées dans une colonne ou à gauche ou à droite en affichage multicolonne. Remarque : Les signets balisés ont une incidence sur l'ordre suivi par les dispositifs de lecture, notamment ceux dont se servent les utilisateurs malvoyants. Les signets balisés ne modifient pas l'ordre des pages dans un document PDF. Voir aussi « Insertion d'un fichier PDF dans un autre fichier PDF » à la page 133 « A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution » à la page 301 Déplacement ou copie d'une page de document PDF à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages afin d'afficher le panneau Pages, puis sélectionnez une ou plusieurs vignettes de page. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 146 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer une page, faites glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité la boîte de numéro de page de la vignette correspondante ou la vignette elle-même. Une barre indique la nouvelle position de la vignette. Les pages sont renumérotées en conséquence. • Pour copier une page, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en faisant glisser la vignette de page vers un autre emplacement. Copie d'une page d'un document PDF vers un autre à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Ouvrez les deux documents PDF et affichez-les côte à côte. 2 Ouvrez le panneau Pages de chaque fichier PDF. 3 Faites glisser la vignette de la page dans le panneau Pages du fichier PDF cible. La page est copiée dans le document et les pages sont renumérotées en conséquence. Suppression ou remplacement d'une page Vous pouvez remplacer une page PDF complète par une autre page. Seuls le texte et les images contenus sur la page initiale sont remplacés. Les éléments interactifs associés à la page initiale, tels que les liens et les signets, ne sont pas affectés par l'opération. De la même façon, les signets et les liens associés à la page de remplacement ne sont pas transposés après la substitution de page. En revanche, les commentaires sont conservés et sont combinés aux commentaires existants du document. Après une suppression ou un remplacement de pages, il est conseillé d'utiliser la commande Réduire la taille du fichier afin de renommer et d'enregistrer le document restructuré selon une taille de fichier minimale. Exemple de page avant et après son remplacement. Les signets et les liens de la page restent au même endroit. Suppression d'une page à l'aide de la commande de suppression Remarque : L'opération de suppression est irréversible. 1 Choisissez Document > Supprimer des pages. 2 Spécifiez l'intervalle de pages à supprimer, puis cliquez sur OK. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 147 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer toutes les pages ; une page au moins doit rester dans le document. Dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences, si vous avez activé l'option Utiliser les numéros de page LPN du panneau Affichage, vous pouvez saisir un numéro de page entre parenthèses afin de supprimer l'équivalent logique du numéro de page. Par exemple, si la première page d'un document est numérotée i, saisissez (1) dans la boîte de dialogue Supprimer des pages et la page i est supprimée. Suppression d'une page à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Dans le panneau Pages, sélectionnez une page ou un groupe de pages. 2 Choisissez Supprimer des pages dans le menu Options du panneau Pages, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression des éléments associés à un signet balisé 1 Dans le panneau Signets, cliquez sur le signet balisé associé à l’élément que vous souhaitez supprimer. Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner plusieurs signets. 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Supprimer des pages. Le signet balisé et la page associée sont supprimés du document. Remplacement du contenu d'une page 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant les pages à remplacer. 2 Choisissez Document > Remplacer les pages. 3 Sélectionnez le document contenant les plages de remplacement, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 4 Dans la zone Pages d'origine, saisissez les numéros des pages à remplacer dans le document. 5 Dans la zone Pages de remplacement, saisissez le numéro de la première page de la série à remplacer. La dernière page est déterminée en fonction du nombre de pages qui doivent être remplacées dans le document d'origine. Remplacement d'une page à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant les pages à remplacer, puis celui comprenant les pages de substitution. 2 Dans le panneau Pages du document PDF contenant les pages de remplacement, sélectionnez une page ou un groupe de pages : • Sélectionnez les boîtes de numéro de page des vignettes à utiliser comme pages de remplacement. • Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner une série de vignettes. Cliquez sur les autres vignettes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour les ajouter à la sélection. • Tracez un rectangle autour d'un groupe de vignettes de pages. 3 Maintenez les touches Ctrl et Alt enfoncées et faites glisser les vignettes de page sélectionnées vers le panneau Pages du document cible. Relâchez le bouton de la souris lorsque le pointeur se trouve exactement sur la boîte de numéro de page de la première vignette à remplacer de façon à mettre les pages en surbrillance. Les pages sélectionnées dans le premier document remplacent un nombre équivalent de pages dans le document cible, en commençant par le numéro de page sur lequel était positionné votre curseur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 148 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Renumérotation des pages Les numéros de page du document ne correspondent pas toujours aux numéros affichés sous les vignettes de page et sur la barre d’outils Navigation de pages. Les pages sont numérotées à l'aide de nombres entiers, commençant par 1 pour la première page du document. Etant donné que certains documents PDF comportent des informations supplémentaires en début de document (une page de droits d'auteur ou une table des matières, par exemple), il peut arriver que les pages du corps du texte proprement dit ne suivent pas la même numérotation que celle affichée sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. Numérotation de pages imprimées (en haut) comparée à celle de pages logiques (en bas) La numérotation de pages d'un document comporte plusieurs variantes. Vous pouvez adopter un style de numérotation différent par groupe de pages (1, 2, 3 ou i, ii, iii ou encore a, b, c, par exemple) et personnaliser le système de numérotation en ajoutant un préfixe. Par exemple, la numérotation du chapitre 1 peut suivre le format 1- 1, 1-2, 1-3, etc. et celle du chapitre 2 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, etc. L'utilisation de la commande Numéroter des pages a uniquement une incidence sur les vignettes de page affichées dans le panneau Pages. Il est possible d'insérer manuellement des numéros de page dans un document PDF à l'aide de la fonction d'en-têtes et de pieds de page. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages afin d'ouvrir le panneau Pages et choisissez Numéroter des pages dans le menu Options. 2 Spécifiez une sélection de pages. (L'option Sélection renvoie aux pages sélectionnées dans le panneau Pages.) 3 Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes, puis cliquez sur OK : Commencer une nouvelle section Commence une nouvelle séquence de numérotation. Choisissez un style dans le menu déroulant et entrez le numéro de la première page de la section. Spécifiez un préfixe, le cas échéant. Etendre la numérotation de la section précédente aux pages sélectionnées Continue la séquence de numérotation à partir des pages précédentes sans interruption. Voir aussi « Ajout et modification d'un en-tête et d'un pied de page » à la page 134149 Chapitre 5 : Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez enregistrer les modifications dans un fichier Adobe® PDF ou dans un porte-documents PDF ou encore dans une copie du fichier. Vous avez par ailleurs la possibilité d'enregistrer des fichiers PDF individuels sous d'autres formats (texte, XML, HTML, Microsoft Word et d'autres encore). L'enregistrement d'un document PDF au format texte vous permet de lire son contenu au moyen d'un lecteur d'écran, d'une loupe ou de toute autre technologie d'assistance. Si vous n'avez pas accès aux fichiers source ayant permis de créer un document Adobe PDF, vous pouvez tout de même copier des images et du texte provenant de ce document PDF à des fins de réutilisation ultérieure. Vous pouvez aussi exporter le document PDF vers un format réutilisable ou en exporter les images dans un document PDF enregistré sous un autre format. Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader® peuvent enregistrer une copie d'un fichier ou d'un porte-documents PDF si l'auteur du document en question a activé les droits d'utilisation. Si les droits d'utilisation sont activés, ces utilisateurs ont également la possibilité d'enregistrer les commentaires, les données des champs de formulaire ou les signatures numériques qu'ils auront insérés dans le document. Si un document contient des droits d'utilisation restreints ou supplémentaires, la barre de message du document figurant sous la zone des barres d'outils décrit les restrictions ou les privilèges en vigueur. Enregistrement d'un fichier PDF Enregistrement d'un document PDF Cette méthode vous permet d'enregistrer des documents PDF, notamment des porte-documents et des fichiers PDF dans lesquels vous avez inséré des commentaires, des données de champs de formulaire et des signatures numériques. Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent enregistrer les porte-documents PDF, les commentaires et les formulaires remplis, et utiliser les signatures numériques uniquement si l'auteur du document PDF leur a octroyé des droits d'utilisation supplémentaires. Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent enregistrer des fichiers au format PDF ou .txt. Remarque : L'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement est possible mais invalide la signature. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour enregistrer les modifications apportées au document actif, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer. • Pour enregistrer une copie d'un document PDF, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. • Dans Reader, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer une copie ou Enregistrer au format texte. • Pour enregistrer une copie d'un porte-documents PDF, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer le porte-documents sous. Si vous visualisez un document PDF au sein d'un navigateur Web, le menu Fichier d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional n'est pas disponible. Utilisez le bouton Enregistrer de la barre d'outils Acrobat pour enregistrer le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 150 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Voir aussi « Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF » à la page 243 « Participation à une révision de document PDF » à la page 169 Récupération de la dernière version enregistrée ? Choisissez Fichier > Rétablir, puis cliquez sur le bouton du même nom. A propos de la fonction d'enregistrement automatique La fonction d'enregistrement automatique permet de parer à la perte de données en cas de coupure d'alimentation. Elle enregistre de manière incrémentielle et régulière les modifications apportées au fichier et les stocke à un emplacement particulier. Le fichier d'origine n'est pas modifié. Acrobat crée en fait un fichier d'enregistrement automatique des changements, qui inclut toutes les modifications apportées au fichier ouvert depuis le dernier enregistrement automatique. La quantité d'informations nouvelles ajoutées au fichier d'enregistrement automatique dépend de la fréquence à laquelle Acrobat enregistre ce fichier. Si vous définissez un intervalle de 15 minutes, les modifications perdues sont celles effectuées dans les 14 dernières minutes avant la survenue du problème. Des enregistrements automatiques fréquents permettent de parer à la perte de données et s'avèrent pratiques lorsque vous effectuez de nombreuses modifications, par exemple lors de l'ajout de commentaires. Vous pouvez appliquer les modifications enregistrées automatiquement au fichier d'origine lorsque vous relancez Acrobat. Lorsque vous fermez ou enregistrez un fichier, ou rétablissez la dernière version enregistrée, le fichier d'enregistrement automatique est supprimé. Remarque : Si vous utilisez un dispositif d’assistance, tel qu’un lecteur d’écran, il est préférable de désactiver la fonction d’enregistrement automatique afin de ne pas perdre l'emplacement lors du rechargement du fichier. La fonction d'enregistrement automatique ne fonctionne pas dans les cas suivants : • La protection du document est modifiée. Vous devez enregistrer le document afin de réactiver la fonction d'enregistrement automatique. • Le document a été créé à l'aide de la fonction Capture Web ou extrait d'un autre document PDF (Document > Extraire des pages). Vous devez enregistrer le document afin d'activer la fonction d'enregistrement automatique. • Le document est affiché dans un navigateur Web ou incorporé à un document conteneur prenant en charge la fonction OLE (liaison et incorporation d'objets). Ce document ne fait pas partie du système de fichiers par défaut et ne peut prendre en charge l'enregistrement automatique. Récupération des modifications perdues Pour empêcher la perte des modifications après une interruption inattendue, vous devez activer la fonction d'enregistrement automatique, qui est le paramètre par défaut. Configuration de l'enregistrement automatique 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Activer l'option Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications dans un fichier temporaire toutes les xx minutes (1-99) et indiquez le nombre de minutes. Récupération de modifications perdues après un arrêt inattendu du système 1 Lancez Acrobat ou ouvrez le fichier sur lequel vous travailliez.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 151 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF 2 Cliquez sur Oui lorsque vous êtes invité à ouvrir le(s) fichier(s) d'enregistrement automatique. Si plusieurs fichiers étaient ouverts, Acrobat les ouvre tous. 3 Enregistrez le ou les fichiers sous le même nom que les fichiers sur lesquels vous travailliez à l'origine. Réduction de la taille des fichiers par enregistrement Dans certains cas, il suffit d'utiliser la commande Enregistrer sous pour réduire la taille d'un fichier PDF. La réduction de la taille des fichiers PDF permet d’améliorer les performances des fichiers (en particulier ceux mis à disposition sur le Web) sans modifier leur aspect. La commande Réduire la taille du fichier rééchantillonne et compresse les images, désincorpore les 14 polices de base et incorpore les jeux partiels de polices laissées incorporées. Elle compresse également la structure du document et nettoie les éléments tels que les signets incorrects. Si la taille du fichier est déjà réduite au minimum, cette commande n'a aucun effet. Remarque : Si vous réduisez la taille d'un fichier signé numériquement, la signature numérique disparaît du document. 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Réduire la taille du fichier. 3 Sélectionnez le niveau de compatibilité de version requis. Si vous êtes certain que tous les utilisateurs disposent d'Acrobat 9 ou d'Adobe Reader 9, vous pouvez limiter la compatibilité à la version la plus récente afin de réduire la taille du fichier. Remarque : Si vous avez sélectionné Acrobat 4.0 et versions ultérieures alors que le fichier contient des effets de transparence, ces derniers sont aplatis. 4 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à plusieurs fichiers, cliquez sur Application multiple et ajoutez les fichiers voulus. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Remarque : Le bouton Application multiple n'est pas disponible dans les porte-documents PDF. Pour gérer les modifications et le niveau de qualité, utilisez la fonction d'optimisation PDF, qui propose des options supplémentaires. Voir aussi « Optimisation PDF » à la page 356 Exportation d'un fichier PDF vers un autre format Exportation d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez enregistrer un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF vers différents formats, puis ouvrir le fichier obtenu dans d'autres applications. Des formats texte et image sont disponibles. Pour rendre un fichier PDF compatible avec des versions antérieures d'Adobe Acrobat et Reader, réenregistrez ce fichier sous une version PDF antérieure. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans un format image, chacune des pages est enregistrée dans un fichier distinct. Remarque : Il est impossible d'exporter des porte-documents PDF (ou les fichiers PDF qu'ils contiennent) vers d'autres formats de fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 152 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Exportation d'un fichier PDF unique 1 Le document PDF étant ouvert, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Exporter, puis sélectionnez un format de fichier. • Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis choisissez un format de fichier dans le menu Type. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour définir les options de conversion. (Si le bouton Paramètres n'est pas disponible, cela signifie que le format sélectionné ne comporte pas d'options associées.) Cliquez sur OK pour valider les options. Vous pouvez également modifier les paramètres de conversion disponibles dans le panneau Conversion du format PDF de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Remarque : Ces paramètres de conversion sont stockés séparément de ceux utilisés par la commande Exporter toutes les images. 3 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour exporter le fichier PDF au format sélectionné. Par défaut, le nom du fichier source est utilisé, suivi de la nouvelle extension, et le fichier exporté est enregistré dans le même dossier que le fichier source. Exportation de plusieurs fichiers PDF Remarque : Les paramètres de conversion ne sont pas disponibles lors de la procédure d'exportation de plusieurs fichiers PDF. Avant d'exporter plusieurs documents PDF, vous pouvez définir les paramètres de conversion via le panneau Conversion du format PDF disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans la catégorie Conversion du format PDF, sélectionnez Document Microsoft Word, puis cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Exporter > Exporter plusieurs fichiers. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des fichiers. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez un dossier, les préférences de nom de fichier et un format de sortie de fichier. Options de format de fichier Lorsque vous exportez des fichiers PDF vers différents formats à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer sous, chacun de ces formats propose des paramètres de conversion qui lui sont propres. Si vous souhaitez utiliser les mêmes paramètres pour chaque conversion de documents PDF dans un format particulier, configurez-les dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans le panneau Conversion du format PDF, sélectionnez un format de fichier dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. (Cliquez à tout moment sur le bouton Par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres par défaut.) Adobe PDF, options Vous pouvez réenregistrer des documents PDF en tant que fichiers PDF optimisés en appliquant des paramètres disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF. L'optimisation PDF permet de changer la compatibilité des fichiers PDF pour pouvoir les consulter dans des versions plus anciennes d'Acrobat ou de Reader. Lorsque vous modifiez les paramètres de compatibilité, les fonctions les plus récentes ne sont plus disponibles dans le fichier PDF. Pour obtenir la description de chacun des paramètres de compatibilité, voir la section « Niveaux de compatibilité PDF » à la page 118.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 153 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Options PostScript ou Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) Vous pouvez exporter un fichier PDF au format PostScript® à des fins d'utilisation dans des applications d'impression et de prépresse. Le fichier PostScript inclut des commentaires DSC (Document Structuring Conventions) complets et d'autres informations avancées conservées par Adobe Acrobat Distiller®. Il est également possible de créer à partir de tout document PDF un fichier EPS à placer ou à ouvrir dans une autre application. Les options disponibles varient selon que vous avez choisi de convertir le document au format PostScript ou EPS. Remarque : Si vous créez des fichiers EPS pour effectuer des séparations, tous les espaces colorimétriques de l'image doivent être CMJN. Fichier de description de l’imprimante Le fichier de description de l'imprimante (PostScript Printer Description, PPD) offre toutes les informations nécessaires pour formater un fichier PostScript en vue de son utilisation sur un périphérique de sortie donné. L'option Indépendante du périphérique permet uniquement de créer des fichiers PostScript ou EPS composites (sans séparation des couleurs). L'option Valeurs Acrobat par défaut sert de point de départ et de référence pour la création de tous les types de fichiers PostScript. Elle restaure également tous les paramètres de conversion par défaut. Adobe PDF 7.0 est compatible avec la plupart des périphériques. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec le format PostScript (PS). ASCII ou Binaire Indique le format de sortie des données image. Une sortie binaire produit des fichiers plus petits. Notez cependant que tous les flux de tâches ne sont pas compatibles avec ce type de sortie. PostScript Indique le niveau de compatibilité PostScript. Utilisez le niveau de langage 3 uniquement si le périphérique de sortie cible le prend en charge. Le niveau de langage 2 convient aux fichiers EPS à insérer dans un autre document avec séparation des couleurs. Utilisez le niveau de langage 2 avec les fichiers EPS que vous importez dans les applications Microsoft. Etendue Indique les pages à exporter. Lorsque vous exportez des fichiers au format EPS, chaque page de l'étendue spécifiée est enregistrée dans un fichier EPS distinct. Voir aussi « Options PostScript » à la page 465 Options HTML et XML Lorsque vous exportez un fichier PDF au format HTML ou XML, les images incluses dans le fichier PDF sont converties au format JPEG. Codage Fait référence aux règles binaires, établies à partir de normes internationales, utilisées pour représenter les caractères de texte. UTF-8 est une représentation Unicode des caractères utilisant un ou plusieurs octets 8 bits par caractère. UTF-16 représente les caractères à l'aide d'octets 16 bits. ISO-Latin-1, une représentation de caractères en 8 bits, est un surensemble de ASCII. UCS-4 est un jeu universel de caractères codés sur 4 octets. HTML/ASCII est une représentation de caractères en 7 bits développé par ANSI. L'option Utiliser la configuration par défaut de la table de mappage permet d'utiliser le codage de caractères par défaut défini dans les tables de mappages, stockées dans le dossier Plug-ins/SaveAsXML/MappingTables. Ces tables de mappage déterminent les attributs de sortie des données, notamment les codages par défaut suivants : UTF-8 (Enregistrer sous XML ou HTML 4.0.1) et HTML/ASCII (Enregistrer sous HTML 3.2). Générer les signets Génère des signets renvoyant au contenu des documents HTML ou XML. Des liens sont placés au début de chaque document HTML ou XML résultant de la conversion. Générer des balises pour les fichiers non balisés Génère des balises pour les fichiers qui en sont dépourvus. C'est notamment le cas des fichiers PDF créés à l'aide des versions 4.0 et antérieures d'Acrobat. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les fichiers non balisés ne sont pas convertis.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 154 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Les balises sont appliquées uniquement pendant la conversion et sont supprimées une fois la procédure terminée. Il ne s'agit pas d'une méthode de création de fichiers PDF balisés à partir de fichiers existants. Générer les images Contrôle la manière dont les images sont converties. Les fichiers image convertis sont référencés dans les documents XML et HTML. Utiliser le sous-dossier Désigne le dossier où sont stockées les images générées. Par défaut, il s'agit du dossier Images. Utiliser le préfixe Désigne le préfixe ajouté aux noms de fichier image si vous disposez de plusieurs versions d'un même fichier. Les noms de fichier attribués aux images ont le format nom_de_fichier_img_#. Format de sortie Détermine le format final. Le format par défaut est JPG. Sous-échantillonner à Sous-échantillonne les fichiers image à la résolution indiquée. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les fichiers image sont créés à la même résolution que le fichier source. Ces fichiers ne sont jamais suréchantillonnés. Options JPEG et JPEG2000 Si le document PDF contient une série d'images, vous pouvez les exporter une à une en tant que fichiers JPEG, PNG ou TIFF en choisissant Options avancées > Traitement du document > Exporter toutes les images. Les options disponibles sont différentes selon que le document est exporté au format JPEG ou JPEG2000. Niveaux de gris/Couleur Indique un paramètre de compression qui équilibre la taille de fichier et la qualité d'image. Plus la taille du fichier est réduite, moins l'image est de qualité. Taille du carreau Divise l'image compressée en plusieurs carreaux de la taille spécifiée. (Si la hauteur ou la largeur de l'image n'est pas un multiple de la taille du carreau, du carreau partiel sont utilisés sur les bords.) Les données image de chaque carreau sont compressées séparément et peuvent être décompressées carreau par carreau. Il est recommandé d'utiliser la valeur par défaut de 256. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour le format JPEG2000. Format : Détermine l'affichage du fichier. Disponible uniquement au format JPEG. • Ligne de base (standard) Affiche l'image dès qu'elle est entièrement téléchargée. Ce format JPEG est pris en charge par la plupart des navigateurs Web. • Ligne de base (optimisée) Optimise la qualité des couleurs de l'image et produit des fichiers de plus petite taille. Cette option n'est cependant pas prise en charge par tous les navigateurs Web. • Progressif (3-5 numérisations) Affiche dans un premier temps une image à basse résolution dont la qualité s'améliore à mesure du téléchargement. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris Indique le type de gestion des couleurs à appliquer au fichier de sortie et permet de préciser si un profil ICC doit être incorporé. Remarque : Si vous exécutez la commande Enregistrer sous ou Exporter toutes les images sur un document PDF contenant des images JPEG et JPEG2000, puis que vous exportez son contenu au format JPEG ou JPEG2000, l'image obtenue risque de présenter un aspect différent dans Acrobat. Ceci peut survenir lorsque des images sont dotées d'un profil couleur incorporé au niveau de la page et non des données image. Dans ce cas, Acrobat ne parvient pas à importer le profil couleur de la page dans l'image enregistrée résultante. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laissez Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 pouces par pouce (ppp), ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces ou 173 380 millimètres maximum).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 155 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Options PNG Le format PNG s'avère pratique pour les images destinées à être publiées sur le Web. Entrelacement Indique si l'image est entrelacée. L'option Non permet de créer une image qui s'affiche dans un navigateur Web lorsqu'elle est entièrement téléchargée. L'option Adam7 permet de créer une image qui affiche des versions à basse résolution dans un navigateur pendant le téléchargement du fichier image. Avec l'option Adam7, le téléchargement semble plus rapide et un message indique aux utilisateurs que l'opération est en cours. Toutefois, la taille du fichier téléchargé est supérieure. Filtre Permet de sélectionner un algorithme de filtrage. • Aucun Compresse l'image sans utiliser de filtre. Recommandée pour les images à couleurs indexées et les images en mode bitmap. • Différentiel horizontal Optimise la compression des images comprenant des motifs horizontaux réguliers ou des fusions. • Relâché Optimise la compression des images comprenant des motifs verticaux réguliers. • Différentiel par moyenne Optimise la compression du bruit à faible niveau en calculant la moyenne des valeurs colorimétriques des pixels adjacents. • Filtre de Paeth Optimise la compression du bruit à faible niveau en réattribuant les valeurs colorimétriques adjacentes. • Adaptatif Applique l'algorithme de filtrage (Différentiel horizontal, Différentiel vertical, Différentiel par moyenne ou Filtre de Paeth) le plus adapté à l'image. Sélectionnez Adaptatif si vous n'êtes pas sûr du filtre à utiliser. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris Indique le type de gestion des couleurs du fichier de sortie et si un profil ICC doit être incorporé. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laisser Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 ppp, ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces maximum ou 173 380 millimètres). Options TIFF Le format TIFF est un format d’image bitmap flexible, pris en charge par la plupart des applications de dessin, de retouche d’image et de mise en page. La résolution est définie automatiquement. Monochrome Indique un format de compression. Le format CCITT - Groupe 4, qui est activé par défaut, produit généralement les fichiers les moins volumineux. La compression ZIP génère également des fichiers de petite taille. Remarque : Certaines applications ne peuvent pas ouvrir les fichiers TIFF enregistrés avec une compression JPEG ou ZIP. Par conséquent, nous vous conseillons d'opter pour la compression LZW. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris/Autre Spécifie le type de gestion des couleurs à appliquer au fichier de sortie. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laissez Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 ppp, ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces maximum ou 173 380 millimètres).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 156 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Exportation d'un fichier PDF au format texte Si vous disposez de la version PDF d'un document et non du fichier de l'application d'origine, vous pouvez exporter le texte au format Microsoft Word ou au format RTF (Rich Text Format). Ce dernier format constitue la norme pour les échanges de contenu entre applications de retouche de texte. Par défaut, les images contenues dans le document PDF sont enregistrées au format JPEG. Il convient de souligner que le fichier texte résultant de l'exportation d'un fichier PDF au format RTF ou Word n'est pas en tous points identique au fichier source issu de l'application de création. Il se peut que certaines informations de codage se soient perdues au cours de la conversion. Vous pouvez également exporter un fichier PDF au format texte standard ou texte accessible. Le texte accessible respecte les préférences d’ordre de lecture définies dans les préférences de lecture et comprend en sortie des commentaires et des champs de formulaire. Le texte accessible comprend également des éléments de mise en forme tels que des retours à la ligne. Le texte de remplacement inclus dans les balises du document est utilisé à la place des images et des fichiers. Le texte standard suit la structure du texte du document et ignore au cours de la conversion tous les artefacts et éléments de figure. Les traits d'union insécables sont conservés et les traits d'union normaux retirés. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Exporter, puis choisissez un format de texte : Document Microsoft Word, Format RTF, Texte (accessible) ou Texte (normal). 2 Cliquez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez les options de votre choix, cliquez sur OK, puis sur Enregistrer. Options Word et RTF (Pour une liste des options de texte standard, voir les options des formats HTML et XML.) Options de mise en page Indique le mode d'interprétation de la mise en page du document à utiliser. L'option Conserver le texte redistribuable permet de conserver le flux du texte, mais pas forcément la mise en page. Ce paramètre s'avère pratique lorsque vous exportez un document doté d'une mise en page complexe (sur plusieurs colonnes, par exemple) et que vous souhaitez maintenir le flux du texte afin d'en faciliter la modification. L'option Conserver la disposition des pages permet de maintenir la disposition du document, mais le fichier résultant contient parfois davantage de zones de texte. Régénérer les balises afin d'optimiser la disposition si le document est déjà balisé Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document PDF au format Word ou RTF, Acrobat utilise les balises existantes afin de générer la disposition de sortie. Si les balises d'un document PDF ne reflètent pas la structure logique du document, la disposition résultante n'est pas forcément optimale. Lorsque cette option est activée, Acrobat supprime les balises existantes du document puis en ajoute de nouvelles avant d'exporter le document. Inclure les commentaires Conserve les commentaires PDF. Inclure les images Inclut les images dans la sortie finale. Le format d'image par défaut est JPEG. Format de sortie Indique le format d'image. Sélectionnez JPEG ou PNG, puis l'espace colorimétrique et les options de résolution. Espace colorimétrique à utiliser Désigne l'espace colorimétrique. Choisissez Couleur ou Niveaux de gris, ou conservez l'espace colorimétrique déterminé automatiquement. Modifier la résolution Sous-échantillonne les images. Si vous ne cochez pas cette option, les images sont créées selon la même résolution que le fichier PDF. Sous-échantillonner à Indique la résolution pour le sous-échantillonnage des images. Les images ne sont jamais suréchantillonnées. Il est possible d'exporter plusieurs documents PDF au format RTF à l'aide de la commande Options avancées > Traitement du document > Traitement par lot.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 157 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Exportation d'une image vers un autre format Outre la conversion de chaque page (le texte, les images et les objets vectoriels sur une page) dans un format image à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Enregistrer sous, il est possible d'exporter chacune des images d'un fichier PDF au format image de votre choix. Remarque : Vous pouvez exporter des images pixellisées mais pas les objets vectoriels. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Exporter toutes les images. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les images sous, choisissez un format de fichier pour les images. Par défaut, les fichiers image exportés portent le nom du fichier source. 3 Cliquez sur Paramètres. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue des paramètres d'exportation, sélectionnez les options de fichier, de gestion des couleurs et de conversion liées au type de fichier. 5 Dans la zone Exclure les images inférieures à, spécifiez la taille minimale des images à extraire. Sélectionnez l'option Sans restriction pour extraire toutes les images. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les images sous, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou sur OK. Réutilisation de contenu PDF Sélection et copie de texte L'outil Sélection permet de sélectionner du texte horizontal ou vertical ou des colonnes de texte dans un document PDF. Vous pouvez utiliser les commandes Copier et Coller afin de copier la sélection dans une autre application. Prenez note des remarques suivantes : • Si vous ne parvenez pas à sélectionner du texte, il se peut qu'il fasse partie d'une image. Dans Acrobat, pour exporter le texte des images en texte sélectionnable, choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte par ROC > Reconnaître du texte par ROC. • Si les commandes Couper, Copier et Coller ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous sélectionnez du texte, l'auteur du document PDF a certainement défini des restrictions concernant la copie du contenu. • Si la police du texte que vous copiez n'est pas disponible sur le système, cette police est remplacée par une police proche ou par la police par défaut. Sélectionnez le texte voulu en faisant glisser le curseur du point d'insertion vers le point final (à gauche) ou en déplaçant le curseur en biais sur le texte (à droite). Voir aussi « Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé » à la page 248UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 158 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Sélection d'une colonne de texte 1 Activez l'outil Sélection , puis déplacez le pointeur sur une colonne de texte. Lorsque le pointeur prend la forme d'une case superposée sur une barre verticale, cela signifie que l'outil Sélection est en mode de sélection de colonne. Vous pouvez forcer l'activation du mode de sélection des colonnes en appuyant sur la touche Alt tout en traçant un rectangle avec la souris sur la colonne de texte. 2 Tracez un rectangle autour d'une colonne de texte. Pour sélectionner le contenu de plusieurs colonnes, faites glisser le curseur depuis le début du texte de la première colonne jusqu'à la fin du texte à sélectionner. Sélection de l'intégralité du texte d'une page 1 Choisissez Affichage > Affichage de pages > Une seule page. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout. • Cliquez quatre fois dans le texte. Cette méthode permet de sélectionner tout le texte de la page quelle que soit la mise en page choisie. Remarque : Si vous choisissez une autre mise en page, l'intégralité du texte du document est sélectionnée. Copie du texte sélectionné 1 Utilisez l'outil Sélection afin de sélectionner un segment de texte sur la page. 2 Copiez le texte : • Choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier la sélection dans une autre application. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte sélectionné, puis choisissez Copier. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte sélectionné, puis choisissez Copier avec formatage. Cette commande, qui conserve la disposition des colonnes, s'affiche uniquement lorsque le document est correctement balisé. Vous pouvez coller le texte copié dans des commentaires et des signets de même que dans des documents créés dans des applications tierces. Copie d'un tableau et d'un diagramme 1 S'il n'est pas déjà sélectionné, cliquez sur l'outil Sélection . 2 Mettez en surbrillance la totalité du tableau ou les rangées et colonnes que vous souhaitez copier. Pour forcer l'activation du mode de sélection des colonnes, appuyez sur la touche Alt tout en traçant un rectangle avec la souris sur la colonne de texte. 3 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Copier sous la forme d'un tableau Conserve le formatage lorsque le tableau est copié dans Excel. Dans Excel, utilisez la commande Collage spécial et choisissez Feuille de calcul XML. Enregistrer sous la forme d'un tableau Permet de coller le tableau dans un nouveau fichier. Ouvrir le tableau dans une feuille de calcul Ouvre le tableau dans une application compatible CSV, telle qu'Excel. Pour copier un tableau au format RTF, faites glisser le tableau sélectionné vers un document ouvert dans l'application cible.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 159 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Copie d'une image A l'aide de l'outil Sélection, copiez et collez des images spécifiques d'un document PDF vers le Presse-papiers (Windows uniquement), une application tierce ou un fichier. Si vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner une image en raison du texte qui la chevauche, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Générales sous Catégories. Activez ensuite l'option Sélectionner les images avant le texte avec l'outil Sélection. 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection , effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur une image ou tracez un rectangle autour de celle-ci pour la sélectionner en entier. • Pour sélectionner une partie de l'image, immobilisez le pointeur sur l'image jusqu'à ce que l'icône en forme de croix s'affiche, puis tracez un rectangle autour de la zone de votre choix. Remarque : Cliquez en dehors d'une image pour la désélectionner et recommencer. 2 Copiez l'image : • Choisissez Edition > Copier, puis Edition > Coller pour coller l'image dans un document ouvert dans une autre application. • Cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option afin de copier l'image dans le Pressepapiers ou dans un nouveau fichier. • Faites glisser l'image dans un document ouvert dans l'application cible. Voir aussi « Exportation d'une image vers un autre format » à la page 157 Instantané d'une page Utilisez l'outil Instantané pour copier l'intégralité du contenu sélectionné (texte, images ou les deux) dans le Pressepapiers ou dans une autre application. Le texte et les images sont tous deux copiés sous la forme d'une image. 1 Activez l'outil Instantané en choisissant Outils > Sélection et zoom. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez n'importe où dans la page afin de capturer le contenu intégral affiché à l'écran. • Tracez un rectangle autour du texte ou des images (ou des deux). • Tracez un rectangle au sein d'une image afin de copier la zone qui vous intéresse. Les couleurs de la zone sélectionnée sont inversées momentanément afin de mettre la sélection en surbrillance. Celleci est copiée automatiquement dans le Presse-papiers lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris. Si un document est ouvert dans une autre application, vous pouvez choisir Edition > Coller afin d'insérer directement la sélection dans le document cible. Vous avez la possibilité d'enregistrer toutes les images d'un document PDF. Consultez la section « Exportation d'une image vers un autre format » à la page 157.. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Reader.160 Chapitre 6 : Collaboration Vous pouvez organiser des révisions pour de nombreux types de contenus en diffusant une version Adobe® PDF du document source que d'autres utilisateurs commentent. Les réviseurs ajoutent leurs commentaires au fichier PDF au moyen des outils de commentaires et d'annotations. Dans le cadre des révisions partagées, les réviseurs peuvent publier leurs commentaires dans un espace de travail partagé, puis visualiser et répondre aux commentaires d'autres réviseurs. A partir d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional, vous pouvez créer votre propre compte d'utilisateur sur Acrobat.COM. Acrobat.com permet de télécharger et de partager la plupart des types de document, mais aussi de partager des fichiers PDF ou votre PC dans le cadre de réunions en ligne. Les services Acrobat.COM sont disponibles directement depuis Acrobat. Remarque : Acrobat.com n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. Partage de fichiers et collaboration en temps réel Téléchargement de documents sur Acrobat.com Vous pouvez télécharger de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Télécharger les documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Le cas échéant, entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Cliquez sur Télécharger d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. 4 Cliquez sur Transférer. Partage de documents Vous pouvez partager de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Partager des documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Partager d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, effectuez les opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques de personnes à inviter. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. • Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Votre message personnalisé est enregistré ; il s'affichera lors du prochain partage de document. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger le fichier. Acrobat télécharge les fichiers et envoie aux destinataires choisis un message électronique contenant le lien vers les fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 161 Collaboration Création et modification d'un document collaboratif Adobe Buzzword permet de créer des documents et de les modifier en même temps que d'autres utilisateurs. Grâce à Buzzword, vous pouvez créer un document à partir de tout ordinateur connecté à Internet, partager le document avec des collaborateurs, le relire et le réviser en équipe. Buzzword s'exécute sur des serveurs Adobe sécurisés, sur lesquels sont également stockés vos commentaires ; ceux-ci sont donc toujours disponibles sur le Web. Remarque : Buzzword n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Créer un document Buzzword. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Choisissez Document > Créer. Une fois le document créé, vous pouvez inviter d'autres utilisateurs à collaborer, en tant qu'auteurs, réviseurs ou lecteurs. Pour plus de détails, dans Buzzword, choisissez Aide > Aide de Buzzword. Collaboration sur un document PDF Utilisez la collaboration en direct pour réviser un fichier PDF avec un ou plusieurs utilisateurs distants dans une session en ligne. Dans une session de collaboration en direct, les participants visualisent un document dans une fenêtre de conversation en direct. Les pages étant partagées, la section du document affichée et le facteur de zoom sont communs à tous les participants ; tous consultent la même partie du document en même temps. Acrobat 9 est indispensable pour lancer une session de collaboration en direct. Acrobat 9 ou Adobe Reader® 9 est nécessaire pour participer à une session de collaboration en direct. Une vidéo sur la collaboration en direct est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr. Ouverture d'une session de collaboration en direct 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Envoyer et collaborer en direct. 2 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez ou localisez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, effectuez les opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques de personnes à inviter. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. • Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Pour mener la session de collaboration sur Acrobat.com, sélectionnez Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.COM et Envoyer le lien aux destinataires. Pour envoyer le fichier aux destinataires sous forme de pièce jointe, laissez cette option désactivée. • Si vous menez la session de collaboration sur Acrobat.com, choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger le fichier. Le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche dans le document. Dès qu'un participant (au moins) se joint à la session, vous pouvez partager les pages et converser en direct.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 162 Collaboration Participation à une session de collaboration en direct 1 Dans le courrier électronique d'invitation à la collaboration en direct, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si le courrier électronique contient une pièce jointe au format PDF, cliquez deux fois sur ce fichier. • Si le message électronique contient un URL, cliquez dessus ou saisissez-le dans la barre d'adresse d'un navigateur. Le cas échéant, connectez-vous à l'aide de votre ID Adobe et de votre mot de passe. Le fichier PDF s'ouvre et le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche. 2 Le cas échéant, connectez-vous en tant qu'invité ou entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe. 3 Au cours de la session de collaboration en direct, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, le cas échéant : • Saisissez des messages dans la zone de conversation, dans la partie inférieure du panneau. Cliquez sur la zone de couleur pour changer la couleur du texte de la conversation. • Pour partager vos pages de manière à ce que tous les participants disposent de la même vue, cliquez sur le bouton Commencer le partage de page. En mode Partage de page, le libellé du bouton devient Arrêter le partage de page ; il vous permet de mettre fin au partage à tout moment. • Pour partager votre écran dans le cadre d'une réunion Adobe ConnectNow, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Partager mon écran. • Pour enregistrer l'historique de la conversation, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Enregistrer la conversation. • Pour désactiver la collaboration en direct dans un document, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Désactiver la conversation et le partage de pages dans ma copie ou (initiateur uniquement) Désactiver la conversation et le partage de pages dans toutes les copies. Si vous désactivez la collaboration en direct dans toutes les copies, les utilisateurs sont dans l'incapacité de se connecter à une session de collaboration, quelle que soit la copie du document utilisée. Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne Adobe ConnectNow est un outil personnel de conférence sur le Web qui permet de mener des réunions en temps réel depuis votre PC. Les participants rejoignent la réunion en se connectant à l'espace de réunion sur le Web, à partir de leur propre ordinateur. Au cours d'une réunion en ligne ConnectNow, vous pouvez partager votre PC, mener des conversations en direct, partager des tableaux blancs en ligne et utiliser de nombreuses fonctions de collaboration. Remarque : Adobe ConnectNow n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. Démarrage d'une réunion 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Partager mon écran. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. A partir du moment où vous vous trouvez dans la salle de réunion, vous pouvez y inviter des participants. Lorsque d'autres utilisateurs ont rejoint la salle de réunion, vous pouvez partager votre écran, converser avec les participants, prendre des notes et utiliser les autres fonctions de réunion. Pour plus de détails, dans la salle de réunion, choisissez Aide > Aide d'Adobe ConnectNow. Participation à une réunion 1 Cliquez sur l'URL de la réunion dans le courrier électronique d'invitation, ou saisissez-le dans la barre d'adresse d'un navigateur. 2 Entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe ou connectez-vous en tant qu'invité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 163 Collaboration Une fois que vous vous trouvez dans la salle de réunion, vous pouvez converser avec les participants, prendre des notes et utiliser les nombreuses fonctions de réunion. Pour plus de détails, dans la salle de réunion, choisissez Aide > Aide d'Adobe ConnectNow. Préférences d'Acrobat.com Pour modifier les paramètres de votre compte Acrobat.com, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis choisissez Acrobat.com sous Catégories. Adresse électronique, Mot de passe Indique votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe. Pour enregistrer votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe dans les préférences, cliquez sur Mémoriser les informations. Gérer le compte Cliquez pour afficher et gérer les paramètres de votre compte. Changer de mot de passe Cliquez pour effacer le mot de passe actuellement enregistré et en définir un nouveau. Se connecter à l'ouverture des documents dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée Si cette option et l'option Mémoriser les informations sont toutes deux activées, vous êtes automatiquement connecté à l'ouverture d'un fichier PDF dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée. Si cette option est désactivée, vous êtes invité à vous connecter lorsque vous ouvrez un document dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée. Me mettre en copie lors de l'envoi d'une invitation électronique via Acrobat.com Activée, cette option vous permet de recevoir une copie de votre courrier électronique d'invitation au partage de document, aux sessions de collaboration en direct, aux révisions partagées et à la diffusion des formulaires. Préparation d'une révision de fichier PDF A propos des révisions PDF gérées Lors d'une révision gérée, un assistant vous permet de configurer la révision, de spécifier l'emplacement du document et d'inviter des participants. Vous n'avez pas à importer des commentaires, à activer la fonction de commentaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader, ni à effectuer un suivi manuel des réponses des réviseurs. Remarque : Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended est nécessaire pour activer la fonction de commentaires pour les utilisateurs Reader dans le cadre des révisions gérées. Acrobat propose deux types de révisions gérées : les révisions partagées et les révisions par messagerie électronique. Chacun des types de révision est associé à un assistant qui vous aide à diffuser un fichier PDF accompagné d'outils spéciaux et d'instructions aux réviseurs. Le dispositif de suivi permet de suivre toutes les révisions gérées. Il permet d'accéder au fichier PDF et aux informations relatives à la révision et à ses participants. Grâce au dispositif de suivi, l'initiateur d'une révision peut modifier l'échéance de la révision, ajouter des réviseurs et mettre fin à la révision. Les participants sont avertis de la disponibilité de nouveaux commentaires, de la modification de l'échéance et de l'ajout de réviseurs, même si Acrobat est fermé. Le dispositif de suivi fournit également des informations sur l'état des erreurs de serveur. Remarque : Il est impossible d'effectuer une révision gérée sur un porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 164 Collaboration Révision partagée Les révisions partagées constituent la meilleure forme de collaboration puisque les participants peuvent lire les commentaires des autres et y répondre. Les commentaires des participants sont stockés dans un référentiel sur Acrobat.com ou sur un serveur interne. Acrobat synchronise les commentaires à intervalles réguliers afin de télécharger les toutes dernières modifications. Les réviseurs sont avisés des nouveaux commentaires dès leur ajout, et peuvent consulter les commentaires des autres réviseurs et y répondre. Grâce à la révision partagée, les destinataires peuvent facilement rejoindre la révision, partager leurs commentaires, suivre les révisions et obtenir des mises à jour régulières. Remarque : Acrobat 9 est indispensable pour initier des révisions partagées sur Acrobat.com. Acrobat 9 ou Reader 9 est nécessaire pour participer à une révision partagée sur Acrobat.com. Pour les révisions partagées non disponibles sur Acrobat.com, Acrobat version 8 ou ultérieure, ou Reader version 8 ou ultérieure est nécessaire pour consulter les commentaires des autres réviseurs. Les réviseurs utilisant des versions antérieures d'Acrobat doivent envoyer leurs commentaires par messagerie électronique. Révision par messagerie électronique Les révisions par messagerie électronique sont idéales lorsque les réviseurs n'ont pas accès à un serveur commun ou lorsqu'une approche de révision collaborative des documents n'est pas indispensable. Lors d'une révision par messagerie électronique, l'initiateur envoie un fichier PDF aux réviseurs sous la forme d'une pièce jointe. Les réviseurs ajoutent leurs commentaires et renvoient le document en cliquant sur le bouton Envoyer les commentaires de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations ou en utilisant la barre de message du document. Une fois qu'il a reçu ces commentaires, l'initiateur peut les fusionner dans sa propre version du fichier PDF. Le principal inconvénient des révisions par messagerie est que les participants n'ont pas accès aux commentaires des autres pendant la révision. Les initiateurs ne peuvent consulter les commentaires qu'après les avoir reçus. Remarque : Pour participer à une révision par messagerie électronique, vous devez disposer d'Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure ou de Reader 7.0 ou version ultérieure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 165 Collaboration Lors d'une révision par messagerie électronique, les participants envoient leur commentaires à l'initiateur, qui les fusionne dans la version principale du document PDF. Choix d'une option de diffusion Acrobat offre plusieurs options de diffusion dans l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée et Diffuser le formulaire. Lors de votre choix, tenez compte des points suivants : quelles mesures de sécurité faut-il appliquer au fichier, quels serveurs ou sites Web les destinataires pourront utiliser pour télécharger le fichier et comment souhaitez-vous recevoir les commentaires ou données de formulaire. Acrobat.com Acrobat.COM est un service Web sécurisé entièrement gratuit, qui fonctionne avec Acrobat. Les participants téléchargent un fichier à partir d'Acrobat.com, puis ajoutent des commentaires et des données à l'aide de Acrobat. Lorsqu'ils ont terminé, ils publient les commentaires ou envoient les réponses de leur formulaire de manière sécurisée sur le site Acrobat.com. Les réponses de formulaire sont stockées sur votre disque dur à mesure qu'elles sont renvoyées. Si vous utilisez Acrobat.com, vous pouvez aussi autoriser les réviseurs ou les personnes qui remplissent les formulaires à ouvrir et partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. Serveur interne Vous pouvez utiliser un emplacement de serveur interne si les destinataires travaillent à l'abri d'un pare-feu et bénéficient tous d'un accès à un serveur commun. Le serveur peut correspondre à un dossier réseau, à un espace de travail Microsoft SharePoint (Windows uniquement) ou à un dossier situé sur un serveur Web. Vous avez la possibilité d'inclure un lien dans le fichier PDF que vous diffusez ou de l'envoyer en pièce jointe à un message électronique. Dans le cas des révisions, les commentaires publiés sont téléchargés sur le serveur. Pour les formulaires, les réponses sont stockées sur votre disque dur à mesure qu'elles sont renvoyées. Remarque : Les dossiers de serveur Web ne peuvent pas servir à la diffusion de formulaires. Lorsque vous définissez votre propre serveur, l'assistant vous invite à enregistrer un profil réunissant l'emplacement serveur et les options de diffusion de votre choix. Lors de la diffusion suivante, l'assistant vous propose de choisir le profil enregistré. Adresse de messagerie L'assistant de diffusion de formulaires offre une option permettant d'envoyer le formulaire sous forme de pièce jointe. Vous pouvez envoyer le formulaire à partir de votre client de messagerie habituel ou utiliser l'assistant pour créer un message électronique avec le fichier de formulaire en pièce jointe. Une fois que les destinataires ont rempli et renvoyé le formulaire, les réponses reviennent dans votre boîte de réception. Chaque réponse est copiée dans un fichier réponse principal.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 166 Collaboration L'option de pièce jointe n'est pas disponible dans l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Pour ouvrir l'assistant de révision par messagerie, choisissez Commentaires > Joindre pour une révision par messagerie électronique. Activation de la saisie de commentaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader Lorsque vous attribuez des droits de saisie de commentaires sur un fichier PDF, les utilisateurs de Reader 8 peuvent participer aux révisions de ce fichier PDF. Lorsqu'un tel fichier PDF s'ouvre dans Reader, il comprend une barre de message du document et des outils de commentaires qui sont autrement indisponibles. Lorsque vous initiez une révision gérée, les droits de commentaires sont automatiquement activés. Si vous ne choisissez pas la révision gérée (par exemple, si vous envoyez directement le fichier PDF par courrier électronique), vous pouvez tout de même activer ces droits : ouvrez le fichier PDF, puis choisissez Commentaires > Activer la fonction de commentaires et d'analyse dans Adobe Reader. Remarque : Si vous activez la fonction de commentaires dans Reader pour un document signé numériquement, la signature est invalidée. Voir aussi « Lancement d'une révision partagée » à la page 167 « Lancement d'une révision par messagerie électronique » à la page 168 Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions Les révisions par messagerie électronique et l'envoi de commentaires nécessitent une application de messagerie électronique et une connexion à un serveur de messagerie. Acrobat prend en charge la plupart des applications de messagerie. Si plusieurs applications de messagerie sont installées sur le système, Acrobat peut ne pas lancer votre application favorite lorsqu'il envoie un fichier PDF en tant que pièce jointe. Pour préciser l'application à lancer, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sous Windows, cliquez deux fois sur Options Internet dans le panneau de configuration. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Internet, cliquez sur l'onglet Programmes, puis sélectionnez votre application de messagerie favorite. Redémarrez Acrobat pour appliquer les modifications. • (Windows) Modifiez les options MAPI dans l'application de messagerie. Acrobat et Reader utilisent l'interface MAPI (Messaging Application Program Interface) pour communiquer avec l'application de messagerie. La plupart des applications de messagerie sont dotées d'options MAPI qui gèrent ces communications. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de l’application de messagerie, voir l’aide qui s’y rapporte. • Sous Mac OS, dans Messagerie, choisissez Messagerie > Préférences, sélectionnez Général, puis choisissez votre application de messagerie favorite dans le menu Logiciel de courrier par défaut. Redémarrez Acrobat pour appliquer les modifications. Si l'application voulue n'est pas proposée, cliquez sur Sélectionner dans le menu déroulant et parcourez l'arborescence pour la localiser. Si vous sélectionnez une application qui ne figure pas dans le menu Logiciel de courrier par défaut, il se peut qu'Acrobat ne la prenne pas en charge. Configuration d'un serveur Si vous diffusez un fichier PDF à partir d'un emplacement serveur personnalisé, vous pouvez utiliser un dossier réseau, un serveur Windows dotés des services Microsoft SharePoint ou un dossier de serveur Web. Les participants doivent disposer d'un accès en lecture et en écriture au serveur spécifié. Demandez à l'administrateur réseau de fournir un emplacement approprié au stockage des commentaires sur le serveur. Aucun logiciel supplémentaire n'est nécessaire pour configurer le serveur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 167 Collaboration Remarque : Les dossiers de serveur Web ne peuvent pas servir à la diffusion de formulaires. Si tous les destinataires font partie d'un réseau local, les dossiers réseau et les serveurs SharePoint sont les plus adaptés pour constituer un serveur de commentaires. Les dossiers réseau représente généralement la solution la plus économique et la plus fiable. Pour initier une révision sur un serveur SharePoint, l'initiateur doit utiliser Windows ; les participants ont toutefois la possibilité de travailler sous Windows ou Mac OS. Tous les participants doivent disposer de droits d'accès en lecture et en écriture au dossier Bibliothèque de documents, dans l'espace de travail indiqué. Il est préférable de réserver les serveurs WebDAV (serveurs Web utilisant le protocole WebDAV) aux situations où les réviseurs se trouvent à l'extérieur d'un pare-feu ou d'un réseau local. Lancement d'une révision Lancement d'une révision partagée Le fichier PDF partagé que vous envoyez inclut la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations et des instructions sur la barre de message du document. 1 Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer en révision partagée. Vous pouvez également initier une révision partagée directement depuis d’autres applications qui utilisent PDFMaker, notamment Microsoft Word. Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer en révision. Pour les applications Office 2007, sélectionnez Acrobat > Créer et envoyer en révision. 2 Le cas échéant, spécifiez un fichier PDF. 3 Choisissez la méthode de diffusion et de recueil des données : vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat.COM, votre propre serveur interne ou un profil de serveur, si vous en avez déjà créé un. (Pour plus d'informations, voir « Choix d'une option de diffusion » à la page 165.) Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l'écran. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, spécifiez les paramètres suivants, le cas échéant : Mode de livraison Cliquez pour spécifier un autre mode de livraison et de recueil des données que celui actuellement défini. A, Cc Entrez les adresses électroniques des réviseurs. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur le bouton A ou Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. Objet, Message Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Toutes vos modifications sont enregistrées ; elles s'afficheront la prochaine fois que vous envoyez un document en révision. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. Niveau d'accès (Acrobat.com uniquement) Indiquez qui est autorisé à télécharger le fichier à partir d'Acrobat.COM. Vous pouvez limiter l'accès aux seuls destinataires de votre message électronique ou accorder l'accès à toute personne disposant de l'URL. Echéance de la révision Cliquez pour définir une date différente ou supprimer l'échéance. Une fois la révision échue, les réviseurs ne peuvent plus publier leurs commentaires. Remarque : Si un réviseur travaille sur le document dans Acrobat à l'échéance de la révision, il est autorisé à publier ses commentaires avant de fermer le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 168 Collaboration Autoriser le partage de vues de page et la conversation pour ce document (Acrobat.com uniquement) Sélectionnée, cette option permet aux réviseurs d'utiliser la fonction de collaboration en direct et de partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. 5 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Une copie du fichier en révision partagée, nommée [nom du fichier d'origine]_révision.pdf, est créée dans le même dossier que le fichier d'origine. Une vidéo sur la mise en place d'une révision partagée est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 174 « Préférences d'Acrobat.com » à la page 163 Lancement d'une révision par messagerie électronique Lorsque vous initiez une révision par messagerie électronique, vous envoyez une version suivie du document PDF, ce qui vous permet de fusionner facilement les commentaires que vous recevez. (Les champs de formulaire d'un document PDF ne sont pas disponibles pour le remplissage en cours de révision.) Après avoir initié une révision partagée, vous pouvez aussi lancer une révision par messagerie électronique portant sur le même fichier PDF. Lancement d'une révision Avant d'initier une révision par messagerie électronique, assurez-vous que l'application de messagerie est configurée pour fonctionner avec Acrobat. (Voir la section « Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions » à la page 166.) 1 Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer par messagerie pour révision. 2 Si un message vous y invite, saisissez les informations dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité. 3 Si aucun document PDF n'est ouvert, sélectionnez-en un, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Le document PDF que vous indiquez devient le fichier principal. Vous fusionnerez les commentaires envoyés par les réviseurs dans ce fichier. 4 Spécifiez les réviseurs en entrant leur adresse électronique. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur Carnet d'adresses pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques voulues dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie électronique. 5 Affichez un aperçu de l'invitation électronique et modifiez le message le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer l'invitation. Une copie du document PDF est envoyée aux réviseurs en pièce jointe. Lorsque la pièce jointe au format PDF est ouverte, les outils de commentaires et des instructions s'affichent. Fusion de commentaires Une fois les commentaires des réviseurs reçus, vous pouvez les fusionner dans le document PDF principal pour que tous les commentaires soient affichés au même endroit. 1 Lorsqu'un réviseur vous a envoyé des commentaires, ouvrez le fichier joint dans l'application de messagerie. Si cette application ne parvient pas à trouver la version d'origine du document PDF, elle vous invite à la rechercher. Remarque : Si vous n'avez pas lancé la révision et que vous recevez des commentaires que vous souhaitez transmettre à l'initiateur, fusionnez-les dans votre copie du document PDF, puis envoyez-les (voir « Envoi de commentaires par messagerie électronique » à la page 171). Si vous avez déjà envoyé vos commentaires, l'initiateur ne reçoit que les nouveaux commentaires. Les commentaires fusionnés conservent le nom de l'auteur d'origine.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 169 Collaboration 2 Si vous avez initié la révision, la boîte de dialogue Fusionner les commentaires apparaît. Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Oui Ouvre la version principale du document PDF et fusionne tous les commentaires dans cette version. Une fois tous les commentaires fusionnés, enregistrez la version principale du PDF. Non, ouvrir uniquement cette copie Ouvre la copie du réviseur du document PDF contenant des commentaires. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez malgré tout fusionner des commentaires en choisissant Commentaires > Fusionner les commentaires dans le fichier PDF principal. Annuler Ferme le fichier PDF du réviseur qui contient des commentaires. Pour masquer les commentaires que vous ne souhaitez pas fusionner, utilisez le menu Afficher de la liste des commentaires. Enregistrez et rouvrez le fichier PDF, puis sélectionnez Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de fusion de PDF. Participation à une révision de document PDF Révision d'un document PDF Lorsque vous recevez une invitation électronique pour participer à la révision d'un document PDF, l'invitation contient habituellement le fichier PDF en pièce jointe ou une URL permettant d'accéder au fichier PDF. Il est aussi possible que vous receviez une pièce jointe au format FDF (Form Data Format). Lorsque vous ouvrez le fichier FDF, ce dernier configure les paramètres de révision et ouvre le fichier PDF dans Acrobat. Les fichiers PDF à réviser sont dotés de fonctions spéciales, notamment d'outils de commentaire et d'une barre de message contenant des instructions. Utilisez les outils de commentaire pour ajouter des commentaires au fichier PDF et pour les envoyer, soit en les publiant sur un serveur de commentaires où d'autres personnes pourront les consulter, soit en les envoyant sous la forme d'une pièce jointe à l'initiateur de la révision. Remarque : Si vous recevez un fichier PDF qui ne comporte aucune fonction spéciale, ajoutez vos commentaires à l'aide des outils de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, enregistrez le fichier PDF, puis renvoyez-le. (Voir la section « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 177.) Pour réviser le document PDF ultérieurement, rouvrez-le à partir du dispositif de suivi afin de vérifier que vos commentaires ont bien été ajoutés à la copie suivie du fichier PDF et que l'initiateur a reçu vos commentaires. Si vous n'envoyez pas ou ne publiez pas vos commentaires immédiatement, enregistrez le document PDF avant de le fermer pour éviter toute perte de données. Tant que l'initiateur n'a pas reçu vos commentaires, ceux-ci n'apparaissent que dans votre copie locale du fichier PDF. Les autres réviseurs ne peuvent pas les consulter. Si vous révisez un fichier PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat version 8 ou antérieure, ou de Reader version 8 ou antérieure, certaines fonctions peuvent s'avérer indisponibles. Voir aussi « Réponse aux commentaires » à la page 193 « Rejoindre une révision » à la page 172 « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 174 Participation à une révision 1 Dans votre application de messagerie, ouvrez le fichier PDF en cliquant une fois sur l'URL ou deux fois sur la pièce jointe (PDF ou FDF).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 170 Collaboration 2 Effectuez une ou plusieurs des opérations suivantes, le cas échéant : • Connectez-vous à Acrobat.COM à l'aide de votre ID et de votre mot de passe Adobe. • Cliquez sur Connexion dans la boîte de dialogue Révision partagée. • Cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Bienvenue dans cette révision partagée. Cette fenêtre indique l'échéance de la révision, les participants, les commentaires éventuellement émis par chaque réviseur et l'emplacement du serveur de commentaires. • Saisissez votre nom, votre adresse électronique, le nom de votre société et votre fonction. 3 Enregistrez le fichier à un emplacement auquel vous le retrouverez facilement, par exemple le bureau. 4 Ajoutez des commentaires au fichier PDF à l'aide des outils de la barre Commentaires et annotations. Pour supprimer un commentaire, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. (Vous pouvez uniquement supprimer les commentaires dont vous êtes l'auteur.) 5 Effectuez les opérations suivantes, selon le cas : • Si vous êtes averti que de nouveaux commentaires envoyés par d'autres réviseurs sont disponibles, cliquez sur le message. Ces commentaires s'affichent dans le fichier PDF. • Pour vérifier si d'autres réviseurs ont formulé de nouveaux commentaires, cliquez sur Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires . 6 Pour envoyer vos nouveaux commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Publier les commentaires ou Envoyer les commentaires à l'initiateur de la révision. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Publier les commentaires ou Envoyer les commentaires à l'initiateur de la révision. Lorsque vous envoyez vos commentaires, ceux-ci sont réunis dans un fichier PDF et envoyés en pièce jointe à l'initiateur de la révision. En cas de publication, vos commentaires sont enregistrés sur le serveur de commentaires. Options de la barre de message du document Les options disponibles sur la barre de message du document dépendent de la manière dont l'initiateur a configuré la révision et de votre accès ou non au serveur de commentaires. Des options similaires peuvent également se trouver sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Pour plus de détails sur les différents types de révisions, voir la section « A propos des révisions PDF gérées » à la page 163. Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires Invite Acrobat à synchroniser les commentaires entre le serveur de commentaires et le disque dur local. Si vous ne cliquez pas sur ce bouton, Acrobat recherche les nouveaux commentaires toutes les 10 minutes. Fusionner les commentaires Copie les commentaires du fichier PDF ouvert dans votre copie. Cette option n'est disponible que pour les fichiers PDF que vous recevez des réviseurs dans le cadre des révisions par messagerie. Publier les commentaires Disponible uniquement lors des révisions partagées Télécharge vos nouveaux commentaires sur le serveur de commentaires. Ce bouton est désactivé lorsque la révision est achevée. Enregistrer une version d'archive Disponible uniquement lors des révisions partagées, lorsque la révision est achevée. Enregistre sur le disque dur une copie du document contenant les commentaires de révision. Envoyer les commentaires Crée un message électronique destiné à l'initiateur de la révision. Ce message contient le fichier PDF commenté en tant que pièce jointe. Cette option est également disponible pour les participants à une UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 171 Collaboration révision par messagerie électronique. Elle s'affiche dans les révisions partagées si le réviseur a choisi de travailler hors connexion ou en cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur de commentaires. Etat Icône indiquant l'état de la connexion au serveur de commentaires. L'icône peut prendre trois formes : dernière tentative réussie , dernière tentative infructueuse ou tentative de connexion en cours . Si vous cliquez dessus, un menu contenant d'autres options apparaît. La fonction Suivi des révisions ouvre le dispositif de suivi. L'option Enregistrer sous version d'archive enregistre une copie du fichier PDF qui n'est plus connectée à la révision. L'option Travailler hors connexion vous permet d'effectuer des commentaires hors connexion, que vous ne pourrez publier qu'une fois revenu au mode en ligne. Pour passer au mode en ligne, cliquez sur Se reconnecter au serveur. Recherche des commentaires publiés récemment Lorsque vous participez à une révision partagée, les commentaires publiés sur le disque dur local sont synchronisés avec les commentaires présents sur le serveur. Vous êtes averti lorsque de nouveaux commentaires sont disponibles. Comme le processus de synchronisation se poursuit après la fermeture du fichier PDF, vous continuerez à recevoir des notifications. Les messages affichés dans la zone de notification vous informent lorsque de nouveaux réviseurs se joignent à la révision, lorsque des mises à jour sont effectuées (plusieurs révisions), lorsque l'échéance change ou lorsque les tentatives de synchronisation échouent. Ils vous avertissent également lorsqu'un nouvel abonnement à une liste de diffusion est ajouté au dispositif de suivi. Vous pouvez modifier la fréquence d'affichage des messages et de synchronisation des commentaires, et déclencher manuellement le processus de synchronisation. Pour consulter les nouveaux commentaires d'une révision partagée, vous devez avoir accès à Acrobat.com ou la possibilité de vous connecter au réseau auquel appartient le serveur de commentaires Si vous ne pouvez pas vous y connecter, vérifiez l'état du serveur dans le dispositif de suivi pour déterminer la cause du problème. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires. • Cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires de la barre de message du document. Envoi de commentaires par messagerie électronique Si vous révisez un document PDF hors ligne ou en dehors de la zone de protection d'un pare-feu ou si vous êtes déconnecté temporairement du serveur de commentaires, vous devrez peut-être envoyer vos commentaires par messagerie électronique. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Joindre à un message électronique. 2 Entrez l'adresse de l'initiateur, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Remarque : Si le fichier PDF dépasse la taille de fichier maximale de 5 Mo, vous êtes invité à envoyer vos commentaires dans un fichier FDF (Forms Data Format) de plus petite taille, que l'initiateur importera. Pour régler la limite, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Révision, puis tapez la valeur souhaitée dans la zone de texte Envoyer les commentaires sous forme de FDF pour les fichiers de plus de [x] Mo.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 172 Collaboration Publication de commentaires émis par d'autres réviseurs Si vous participez à une révision, vous êtes susceptible de recevoir les commentaires d'autres réviseurs. Si l'un d'eux ne peut accéder au serveur de commentaires, il se peut qu'il vous envoie ses commentaires. Si vous avez demandé l'avis de personnes qui n'ont pas été invitées à la révision, il se peut qu'elles vous renvoient une copie du fichier PDF assortie de leurs commentaires. Si vous prenez ces commentaires à votre compte, vous pouvez les partager avec tous les participants à la révision. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF qui contient les commentaires. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur OK si vous êtes invité à publier les commentaires de ce réviseur. Les commentaires publiés s'affichent dans le fichier PDF. Votre nom s'affiche sur la barre de titre et celui de l'auteur dans le corps des commentaires, précédé de la mention « Pour le compte de ». • Cliquez sur Oui lorsque vous êtes invité à fusionner les commentaires ou cliquez sur Fusionner les commentaires sur la barre de message du document, puis sur Envoyer les commentaires. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Dans Acrobat, ouvrez une copie du fichier PDF, choisissez Commentaires > Importer des commentaires, puis sélectionnez un fichier contenant les commentaires de réviseurs. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Dans Reader, ouvrez une copie du fichier PDF, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Importer des commentaires, puis sélectionnez un fichier contant les commentaires de réviseurs. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Seuls les nouveaux commentaires et les commentaires modifiés sont publiés ou envoyés. Rejoindre une révision Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour rouvrir les fichiers PDF dans une révision active. Si vous avez reçu une pièce jointe PDF dans un message électronique et que vous ne l'avez pas enregistrée lors de sa première ouverture, ouvrezla à nouveau à partir de l'application de messagerie. Seuls les fichiers PDF que vous avez enregistrés figurent dans le dispositif de suivi. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Suivi des révisions. • Dans Reader, choisissez Affichage > Dispositif de suivi. 2 Dans le dispositif de suivi, cliquez deux fois sur le fichier PDF. 3 Ajoutez de nouveaux commentaires ou modifiez des commentaires existants. Pour supprimer un commentaire, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur Suppr. (Vous pouvez uniquement supprimer les commentaires dont vous êtes l'auteur.) Les commentaires supprimés sont éliminés du document PDF en ligne lors de la prochaine synchronisation des commentaires. Si vous supprimez des commentaires que vous aviez précédemment envoyés par messagerie électronique, ils sont toujours visibles dans le document de l'initiateur. 4 Pour soumettre vos nouveaux commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Publier les commentaires sur la barre de message du document. • Cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer les commentaires ou Envoyer et recevoir des commentaires de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Seuls les nouveaux commentaires et les commentaires modifiés sont publiés ou envoyés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 173 Collaboration Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 174 Suivi et gestion des révisions de fichiers PDF Présentation du dispositif de suivi Le dispositif de suivi permet de gérer les révisions de documents et les formulaires diffusés, d'afficher l'état des serveurs de révisions et de formulaires et de contrôler les abonnements de diffusion Web (également appelés flux RSS). Pour ouvrir le dispositif de suivi dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Suivi des révisions. Pour ouvrir le dispositif de suivi dans Reader, choisissez Affichage > Dispositif de suivi. Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour gérer les révisions, les formulaires et les abonnements de diffusion Web (flux RSS). Le panneau de gauche contient des liens vers les fichiers, les formulaires, les messages d'état du serveur et les flux RSS. Le panneau de droit affiche des informations détaillées sur l'élément sélectionné à gauche. Dernières mises à jour Le panneau Dernières mises à jour fournit un récapitulatif des dernières modifications apportées aux révisions partagées, aux fichiers de formulaires et aux serveurs. Si aucun formulaire ou fichier en révision n'est actif, ce panneau fournit des informations et des liens relatifs à l'initiation de révisions gérées, à la création de formulaires et à leur diffusion. Dans le panneau Dernières mises à jour, vous pouvez également activer ou désactiver les notifications de suivi au sein d'Acrobat et, sous Windows uniquement, dans la barre d'état du système. Révisions Le dispositif de suivi indique qui participe à la révision partagée et combien de commentaires ont été publiés. A partir du dispositif de suivi, vous pouvez rejoindre une révision et envoyer des messages électroniques aux participants. Si vous êtes l'initiateur d'une révision, vous pouvez ajouter ou modifier les échéances, ajouter des réviseurs, mettre fin à une révision et commencez une nouvelle révision avec des réviseurs existants.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 174 Collaboration Le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi affiche tous les documents PDF faisant l'objet d'une révision gérée. Le panneau d'information, à droite, indique la date et l'heure d'envoi du fichier PDF et la liste des réviseurs invités. Les liens vers les fichiers PDF partagés fournissent d'autres informations, notamment l'échéance (si elle est définie) et le nombre de commentaires soumis par réviseur. La suppression d'un lien dans le dispositif de suivi ne supprime pas le fichier PDF correspondant. Formulaires Utilisez la fonction de suivi pour gérer les formulaires que vous avez diffusés ou reçus. Le dispositif de suivi vous permet d'afficher et de modifier l'emplacement du fichier réponse et d'effectuer un suivi des réponses remises par les destinataires. Vous pouvez également ajouter d'autres destinataires, contacter les participants par courrier électronique et afficher les réponses obtenues pour un formulaire. Pour plus de détails, voir « A propos du suivi des formulaires » à la page 243. Etat du serveur Cette section indique l'état de tous les serveurs utilisés pour les révisions et la diffusion des formulaires. L'icône de coche en regard du nom du serveur indique que la dernière tentative de synchronisation a réussi. L'icône d'avertissement indique que la dernière tentative de synchronisation a échoué. Cet icône signale par exemple que le serveur est déconnecté du réseau, qu'il présente des problèmes d'écriture sur le disque, etc. Contactez l'administrateur réseau pour obtenir de l'aide. RSS Vous pouvez utiliser le dispositif de suivi pour vous abonner à des flux RSS, par exemple pour la diffusion d'actualités ou de chaînes musicales. Le format RSS est compatible avec les formats XML et RDF. Suivi de fichiers PDF révisés 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, développez le dossier approprié : Envoyées Répertorie les fichiers PDF concernés par les révisions que vous avez initiées. (Non disponible dans Reader.) Participé Contient les fichiers PDF concernés par les révisions que vous avez reçues. Les fichiers PDF ne figurent dans cette liste qu'après leur ouverture. Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF joint à un message électronique sans l'enregistrer, l'entrée correspondante est supprimée du dispositif de suivi lorsque vous fermez le fichier. Remarque : Les fichiers PDF répertoriés en gras indiquent une ou plusieurs des mises à jour suivantes : des commentaires que vous n'avez pas encore lus, la modification de l'échéance par l'initiateur de la révision ou l'ajout de nouveaux réviseurs. 2 Sélectionnez un fichier PDF. Les informations propres à la révision du fichier PDF sélectionné apparaissent dans le panneau de droite. Pour les révisions partagées, il s'agit des informations d'échéance, des réviseurs ayant rejoint la révision et du nombre de commentaires. Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires Vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier PDF en cours de révision contenant tous les commentaires publiés par les réviseurs ou tous les commentaires que vous avez importés (fusionnés). Si le fichier PDF fait l'objet d'une révision partagée, vous pouvez en enregistrer une version d'archive. Cette copie n'est plus connectée au serveur de révisions ; vous pouvez donc en modifier les contenus et y ajouter des commentaires. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 175 Collaboration Pour créer une copie d'un fichier PDF partagé afin de la diffuser à d'autres personnes, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous. Le fichier résultant inclut tous les commentaires publiés jusqu'à cet instant. Vous pouvez le déplacer, le copier ou le renommer sans que cela influe sur sa connexion à la révision ou au serveur de commentaires. ? Pour enregistrer une copie d'un fichier PDF en révision avec tous les commentaires, ouvrez le fichier, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • S'il s'agit d'une révision partagée, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous version d'archive ou cliquez sur le bouton Etat de la barre de message du document et choisissez Enregistrer sous version d'archive. • S'il s'agit d'une révision par messagerie électronique, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous pour enregistrer une nouvelle copie du fichier PDF. Cette dernière version enregistrée devient alors le fichier PDF suivi. L'ancienne version devient la version d'archive. Invitation de réviseurs supplémentaires Si vous êtes l'initiateur de la révision, vous avez la possibilité d'inviter d'autres utilisateurs à la révision. Si vous êtes vous-même réviseur et souhaitez convier d'autres participants à la révision, demandez à l'initiateur de les inviter. Ainsi, l'initiateur peut effectuer un suivi automatique de tous les participants et être averti lorsque leurs commentaires reviennent. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF concerné, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des réviseurs dans le panneau de droite. 2 Spécifiez l'adresse électronique des réviseurs à ajouter, effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans le message, puis envoyez ce dernier. Les réviseurs supplémentaires apparaissent dans le panneau de droite du dispositif de suivi, avec les autres participants. Ajout ou modification d'une échéance L'initiateur peut ajouter ou modifier l'échéance d'une révision existante. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la révision ne présente aucune échéance, cliquez sur Ajouter une échéance. • Si la révision présente une échéance, cliquez sur Modifier l'échéance. 2 Cliquez sur Echéance de la révision, modifiez l'échéance si nécessaire, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Modifiez le cas échéant les destinataires du message électronique, l'objet et le message, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Fin d'une révision L'initiateur peut mettre fin à une révision existante. Lorsque la révision est terminée, les participants ne peuvent plus publier de commentaires sur le serveur. Vous pouvez par la suite modifier l'échéance de la révision afin de relancer le processus. ? Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Terminer la révision. Initiation d'une révision partagée à partir d'une révision existante avec les mêmes réviseurs 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez un fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Initier une nouvelle révision avec les mêmes réviseurs. 2 Suivez la procédure d'initiation d'une révision partagée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 176 Collaboration Voir aussi « Lancement d'une révision partagée » à la page 167 Envoi d'un message Lors d'une révision, vous pouvez être amené à contacter d'autres réviseurs ou à leur envoyer un rappel d'échéance. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Envoyer un message aux réviseurs. 2 Le cas échéant, modifiez les zones A et Objet ainsi que le corps du message électronique, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Mise à jour d'un profil Vos commentaires vous identifient en tant qu'auteur en affichant votre nom (le nom que vous avez fourni lorsque vous avez rejoint la session de révision ou que vous l'avez lancée, ou votre nom d'utilisateur système). Vous pouvez modifier le nom de l'auteur et les autres informations de profil à tout moment. Dans ce cas, votre profil actualisé apparaît uniquement dans les nouveaux commentaires. Les commentaires existants ne sont pas modifiés. Mise à jour d'un profil de révision 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Commentaires. 2 Désactivez l'option Toujours utiliser l'identifiant de l'utilisateur dans le champ Auteur. 3 Sélectionnez Identité dans la liste de gauche. 4 Modifiez votre profil en vous assurant d'y inclure l'adresse électronique que vous utiliserez lors des révisions. Cliquez sur OK. Mise à jour d'un profil en vue d'une révision partagée 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Identité. 2 Modifiez votre profil en veillant à inclure une adresse électronique correcte, puis cliquez sur OK. Abonnement à des services de diffusion Internet 1 Cliquez sur le bouton RSS situé dans le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi. Remarque : Si le bouton RSS n'apparaît pas dans le dispositif de suivi, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'Acrobat, puis sélectionnez Dispositif de suivi. Activez l'option Activer les flux RSS dans le dispositif de suivi, puis cliquez sur OK. Fermez, puis rouvrez le dispositif de suivi. 2 Cliquez sur S'abonner à un flux RSS, puis entrez une adresse Web dans la zone prévue à cet effet. Préférences du dispositif de suivi Pour spécifiez les paramètres du dispositif de suivi, affichez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Dispositif de suivi sous Catégorie. Rechercher automatiquement les nouveaux commentaires et données de formulaire Spécifie la fréquence de synchronisation des commentaires. Pour désactiver la synchronisation automatique, faites glisser le curseur vers l'extrémité droite, jusqu'à ce que la valeur Jamais s'affiche. Suspendre la recherche de nouveaux commentaires et données de formulaire Spécifie le délai d'inactivité de la révision ou du formulaire après lequel la recherche de commentaires et de données doit être arrêtée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 177 Collaboration Supprimer des emplacements serveur personnalisés Pour supprimer un profil de serveur, sélectionnez-le dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Supprimer le profil du serveur. Notifications Spécifie à quels endroits les notifications de suivi s'affichent. Activer les flux RSS dans le dispositif de suivi Si cette option est activée, la catégorie RSS apparaît dans le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi et vous permet de vous abonner à des flux RSS. Commentaires Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Utilisez les outils de commentaire et d'annotation (Affichage > Barres d'outils > Commentaires et annotations) pour ajouter des commentaires. Les commentaires sont des notes et des dessins qui transmettent des idées ou un retour sur des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez saisir un texte dans une note ou utiliser un outil de dessin pour ajouter une ligne, un cercle ou toute autre forme, puis saisir du texte dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée. Les outils de modification de texte permettent d'ajouter des annotations de révision qui signalent les modifications à apporter au document source. La plupart des outils de commentaire et d'annotation n'apparaissent sur la barre d'outils qu'une fois que vous les y avez ajoutés. Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans un navigateur alors que la révision partagée est achevée, les outils de commentaires sont indisponibles. La plupart des commentaires comportent deux parties : l'icône (ou annotation) affichée sur la page et le message de texte figurant dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note lorsque vous cliquez une ou deux fois sur l'icône ou que vous placez le pointeur dessus. Lorsque vous avez ajouté un commentaire, il reste sélectionné jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez en un autre point sur la page. Le commentaire sélectionné est mis en évidence par un cadre bleu, qui vous aide à repérer l'annotation sur la page. Un objet filaire doté de poignées de sélection vous permet d'ajuster la taille et la forme du commentaire. Vous pouvez baliser vos commentaires afin que les lecteurs ayant des déficiences visuelles ou une mobilité réduite puissent les lire à l'aide des technologies d'assistance. Barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations A. Note B. Modifications de texte C. Outil et menu Tampon D. Outil Surligneur E. Outil Légende F. Zone de texte G. Outil Nuage H. Outil Flèche I. Outil Droite J. Outil Rectangle K. Outil Ellipse L. Outil Crayon M. Menu Afficher A B C D E F G H I J K L MUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 178 Collaboration Types de commentaires dans un fichier PDF A. Tampon B. Modification de texte C. Info-bulle de commentaire D. Note Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des outils de commentaire d'Acrobat, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Outils de commentaire : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-comments.html • Forum sur la collaboration et l'ajout de commentaires : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Vidéos sur l'utilisation des outils de commentaire : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr • Annotation d'un fichier PDF : www.uwec.edu/Help/acrobat8.htm Voir aussi « Affichage et masquage d'éléments de la barre d'outils » à la page 30 « Ajout de balises à des commentaires » à la page 334 « Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D » à la page 428 Affichage de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations n'est pas affichée par défaut, sauf si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une révision gérée. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Commentaires et annotations. Pour ajouter des outils à cette barre ou en supprimer, choisissez Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils. Sélection d'un outil de commentaire ou d'annotation ? Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > [outil]. Remarque : Lorsque vous avez saisi votre premier commentaire, l'outil est remplacé par l'outil Sélection. Ce dernier vous permet de déplacer, de redimensionner ou de modifier votre commentaire. (Les outils Crayon, Texte surligné et Ligne restent sélectionnés.) A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 179 Collaboration Conservation de la sélection d'un outil de commentaire Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs commentaires sans devoir sélectionner à nouveau l’outil. 1 Sélectionnez l'outil à utiliser (mais ne vous en servez pas tout de suite). 2 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. 3 Cochez la case Maintenir l’outil activé disponible. Préférences des commentaires Les préférences de commentaire ont un impact sur l'aspect des commentaires et des annotations dans les fichiers PDF, et sur la manière dont vous les consultez. Remarque : Puisque vous pouvez placer des commentaires à un endroit quelconque du cadre du document, vous devez parfois utiliser les fonctions de défilement ou de zoom arrière pour afficher les commentaires se trouvant en dehors de la page. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Commentaires. Police, Corps Sous Windows, vous pouvez définir la police et le corps du texte des fenêtres contextuelles de notes. Sous Mac OS, vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner l'une des options de police suivantes : Grande, Moyenne ou Petite. Ces options s'appliquent à tous les commentaires, nouveaux ou existants. Opacité de la fenêtre Détermine l'opacité de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note à l'aide d'une valeur comprise entre 1 et 100. Lorsque la fenêtre est ouverte sans être sélectionnée, une valeur d'opacité de 100 la rend opaque. Plus cette valeur baisse, plus la fenêtre est transparente. Activer les indicateurs de texte et les info-bulles Affiche une info-bulle indiquant le nom de l'auteur, l'état du commentaire et deux lignes de texte lorsque vous immobilisez le pointeur sur un commentaire assorti d'une note. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Imprimer les fenêtres et les notes Imprime les fenêtres contextuelles de note associées aux commentaires ainsi que les icônes de note et de pièces jointes (audio ou non) telles qu'elles apparaissent sur la page. Plutôt que de sélectionner cette option, vous pouvez imprimer le texte des commentaires selon différentes dispositions. Pour ce faire, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis cliquez sur Résumer les commentaires. Afficher avec la souris les droites reliant les bulles de commentaire aux fenêtres associées Lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur une bulle de commentaire (texte surligné ou icône de note, par exemple), le connecteur ombré reliant le commentaire à la fenêtre associée s'affiche. Option sélectionnée par défaut. S'assurer que les fenêtres sont visibles lors du défilement du document Lorsque vous faites défiler un document PDF, les fenêtres contextuelles de note situées sur chaque page se déplacent de manière à rester visibles dans le panneau de visualisation. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Ouvrir automatiquement la fenêtre des commentaires pour les commentaires autres que les notes Affiche la fenêtre contextuelle de la note lorsque vous créez un commentaire à l'aide d'un outil de dessin, ou de l'outil Tampon ou Crayon. Masquer les fenêtres de commentaire lorsque la liste est affichée Permet de dégager l'écran lorsqu'une page comprend de nombreux commentaires. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Ouvrir automatiquement les fenêtres sur lesquelles le pointeur est placé Lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur tout commentaire (y compris les dessins et les tampons), la fenêtre contextuelle de la note s’ouvre. Toujours utiliser l’identifiant de l’utilisateur dans le champ Auteur Détermine le nom qui s'affiche dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note que vous créez. Lorsque cette option est activée, le nom utilisé est celui qui correspond à Identifiant dans le panneau Identité des préférences. Lorsqu'elle est désactivée, le nom utilisé par défaut est celui qui a UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 180 Collaboration été spécifié dans le champ Auteur de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de commentaire. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Créer des fenêtres alignées sur le bord du document Aligne les fenêtres de commentaire sur le bord droit de la fenêtre de document, indépendamment de l'emplacement des bulles de commentaire (icône de note ou texte surligné, par exemple). Si cette option est désactivée, la fenêtre contextuelle de la note s'affiche à côté de la bulle de commentaire. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Copier le texte entouré dans les fenêtres de dessin Copie le texte que vous encerclez à l'aide d'un outil de dessin dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée à l'annotation de dessin. Copier le texte sélectionné dans les fenêtres de texte surligné, de texte barré et de texte souligné Copie le texte sélectionné dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée à des commentaires de modification de texte, par exemple ceux créés avec l'outil Texte surligné. Modification de l'aspect des commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur et l'aspect des commentaires ou des annotations avant ou après les avoir créés. Vous pouvez ensuite définir cet aspect comme l'aspect par défaut pour cet outil. Remarque : Pour modifier l'apparence de votre nom dans les commentaires, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Commentaires, puis désactivez l'option Toujours utiliser l'identifiant de l'utilisateur dans le champ Auteur. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Barre des propriétés A. Icône de note sélectionnée B. Texte contextuel sélectionné Modification de l'aspect d'un commentaire et définition du nouvel aspect en tant qu'aspect par défaut 1 Une fois que vous avez créé un commentaire, choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options de la fenêtre contextuelle de note. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Fermer : • Modifiez des options telles que la couleur et le type d'icône utilisé dans le panneau Aspect. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de commentaire sélectionné. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 181 Collaboration • Modifiez le nom de l'auteur et le sujet du commentaire dans le panneau Générales. • Cliquez sur l'onglet Historique des révisions pour afficher les modifications apportées à un commentaire au cours d'une révision. • Activez l'option Verrouillage au bas de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés pour empêcher la modification ou la suppression du commentaire. • Activez l'option Par défaut située au bas de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés afin d'appliquer ces propriétés à tous les commentaires du même type créés par la suite. Définition du verrou par défaut pour un outil 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur l'outil voulu avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés d'outils par défaut. Remarque : Si cet outil ne figure pas sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'outil. 2 Définissez les propriétés voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Tous les commentaires que vous créez à l'aide de cet outil utilisent les propriétés que vous avez définies. Les commentaires existants et l'aspect du texte dans les fenêtres contextuelles de note ne sont pas modifiés. Ajout d'une note Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Le type de commentaire le plus courant se présente sous forme de note. Une note est accompagnée d'une icône qui apparaît sur la page et d'une fenêtre contextuelle contenant le texte de la note. Vous pouvez ajouter une note en tout point de la page ou de la zone de document. L'outil Note vous permet d'ajouter un message dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. A. Barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations B. Note C. Case de fermeture D. Menu Options E. Message Ajout d'un commentaire sous forme de note 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Ajouter une note. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Ajouter une note. • Sélectionnez l'outil Note de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, puis cliquez à l'emplacement où vous voulez insérer la note ou tracez une fenêtre de la taille voulue à l'aide de la souris. A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 182 Collaboration 2 Saisissez le texte voulu dans la fenêtre contextuelle de note. Il est également possible d'utiliser l'outil Sélection pour copier et coller dans la note du texte provenant d'un autre document PDF. Remarque : Si vous fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, votre texte y est conservé. Modification d'un commentaire sous forme de note 1 Cliquez une ou deux fois sur l'icône de la note. 2 Apportez les modifications requises : • Pour redimensionner la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, faites-en glisser le coin inférieur gauche ou droit. • Pour modifier le formatage du texte, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, sélectionnez le texte, puis définissez la propriété voulue sur la barre d'outils. Utilisez le panneau Commentaires de la boîte de dialogue Préférences pour modifier le corps de police, le comportement par défaut de la fenêtre et d'autres paramètres de création et d'affichage des commentaires. Le panneau Commentaires n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur le bouton de réduction situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note ou cliquez hors de cette fenêtre. Suppression d'une note 1 Sélectionnez l'outil Note , l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de la note, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer deux fois sur l'icône de note, puis à choisir Supprimer dans le menu Options de la fenêtre contextuelle. Annotation du texte pour modification Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez utiliser les commentaires de modification de texte dans un document PDF afin d'indiquer les endroits du fichier source où le texte doit être modifié. Les commentaires de modification de texte ne modifient pas le texte en tant que tel dans le fichier PDF. Ils indiquent plutôt le texte qui doit être supprimé, inséré ou remplacé dans le fichier source à partir duquel le document PDF a été créé. Vous pouvez ajouter la plupart des types de modifications de texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte. Sélectionnez du texte avec l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris pour afficher le menu contenant les options de modification disponibles. Dans Acrobat pour Windows, vous pouvez exporter des modifications de texte directement vers le document Microsoft Word dont le fichier PDF est issu pour réviser le document source. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez créer le document PDF depuis Word à l'aide de PDFMaker. Avant d'exporter des modifications de texte, vérifiez que les commentaires d'insertion comportent le texte exact, y compris les espaces et les retours chariot, que vous souhaitez ajouter. Si l'annotation contient des indications supplémentaires (par exemple, « Ajouter le texte suivant : »), il faudra les supprimer manuellement du document Word. Sous Windows, vous pouvez exporter les commentaires de modifications de texte directement dans le document Autodesk AutoCAD ayant servi à la création du fichier PDF afin d'y insérer vos changements. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez créer le document PDF depuis AutoCAD à l'aide de PDFMaker.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 183 Collaboration Option Remplacer le texte A. Le texte sélectionné est barré. B. Le nouveau texte est inséré dans une fenêtre contextuelle liée. Voir aussi « Exportation de commentaires vers Word (Windows) » à la page 198 « Exportation de commentaires vers AutoCAD (Windows) » à la page 199 Remplacement de texte 1 Utilisez l'outil Sélection ou sélectionnez l'outil Modifications de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. 2 Sélectionnez le texte. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Remplacer le texte, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte à insérer ou à ajouter. Il s'affiche dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. Tout texte sélectionné est barré. Un signe d’insertion s'affiche. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'une nouvelle marque de paragraphe, fermez la fenêtre sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion de paragraphe s'affiche. Ajout d'une note à une modification de texte 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une modification de texte. 2 Choisissez Ouvrir la fenêtre de note dans le menu contextuel. 3 Saisissez la note dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Affichage du texte inséré 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, sélectionnez l'outil Modifications de texte . 2 Cliquez entre les mots ou les caractères où vous voulez insérer du texte. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte à insérer. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'une nouvelle marque de paragraphe, appuyez sur Entrée, puis fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion de paragraphe s’affiche. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'un espace, appuyez sur la barre d'espacement, puis fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion d’espace s’affiche. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 184 Collaboration Pour indiquer des modifications de texte, vous pouvez également sélectionner du texte au moyen de l'outil Sélection , cliquer sur le texte sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisir Remplacer le texte (commentaire). Suppression de texte inséré 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, choisissez l'outil Modifications de texte . 2 Sélectionnez le texte et appuyez sur Retour arrière ou Suppr, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Barrer le texte dans le menu contextuel. Suppression d'une annotation de texte Si les annotations de texte sont empilées, effectuez la suppression à l'aide de la liste des commentaires. Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires dans le navigateur afin d'ouvrir la liste des commentaires, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. ? Sélectionnez l'annotation et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Surlignage, barrage ou soulignage du texte Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez vous servir des outils Texte surligné, Texte barré et Texte souligné pour ajouter des commentaires seuls ou des commentaires et des notes. Les outils Texte barré et Texte souligné ne figurent pas par défaut sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Pour ajouter une note associée à un surlignage ou barrer du texte en sélectionnant ce texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez l'option voulue dans le menu qui s'affiche. Cependant, si le texte à marquer est important, il est plus facile et plus rapide d'utiliser les outils spécialisés. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations, puis sélectionnez l'outil Texte surligné , Texte barré ou Texte surligné . Remarque : Pour appliquer plusieurs commentaires à l'aide de l'outil Texte barré ou Texte souligné, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés et sélectionnez Maintenir l'outil activé sur la barre des propriétés après avoir sélectionné l'outil. L'outil Texte surligné reste sélectionné après que vous avez saisi le premier commentaire. 2 Faites glisser la souris à partir du début du texte à annoter. Faites glisser la souris en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour tracer un rectangle autour du texte. Cette fonction est particulièrement pratique pour annoter le texte d'une colonne. 3 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter une note, cliquez deux fois sur l'annotation pour ajouter du texte dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. Apposition d'un tampon sur un document Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L'application d'un tampon sur un document PDF est très similaire à l'application d'un tampon sur un document papier. Vous pouvez choisir un tampon prédéfini ou créer vos propres tampons. Les tampons dynamiques récupèrent sur votre système et dans le panneau Identité de la boîte de dialogue Préférences les informations permettant au tampon d'indiquer votre nom, la date et l'heure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 185 Collaboration L'outil Tampon apparaît par défaut sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Catégories de l'outil Tampon A. Tampon dynamique B. Tampon Signature C. Tampon standard D. Tampon personnalisé Ouvrez la palette Tampons ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. • Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'outil Tampon, puis choisissez Afficher la palette Tampons. Application d'un tampon 1 Sélectionnez un tampon en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur l'outil Tampon. Le tampon utilisé en dernier est activé. • Dans la palette Tampons, choisissez une catégorie dans le menu, puis sélectionnez un tampon. 2 Cliquez sur la page du document où vous voulez placer le tampon, ou tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille et son emplacement. 3 Si vous n’avez spécifié aucun nom dans les préférences d’identité, la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l’identité vous invite à le faire. Modification de l'emplacement ou de l'aspect d'un tampon ? A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Main, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer un tampon, faites-le glisser vers le nouvel emplacement. • Pour redimensionner un tampon, cliquez dessus, puis faites glisser une poignée d'angle. • Pour faire pivoter un tampon, cliquez dessus, déplacez le pointeur sur la poignée en haut du tampon, puis faites glisser l'outil lorsque l'icône de tampon en rotation s'affiche. • Pour supprimer un tampon, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Supprimer. • Pour modifier l'opacité du tampon ou la couleur de sa fenêtre contextuelle de note, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu contextuel. Sous l'onglet Aspect, définissez l'opacité ou la couleur. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 186 Collaboration Déplacement d'un tampon vers la liste des favoris 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Main, sélectionnez une annotation de tampon sur la page. 2 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur l'outil Tampon et choisissez Favoris > Ajouter le tampon actif aux Favoris. Création d'un tampon personnalisé Il est possible de créer des tampons personnalisés à partir de divers formats de fichiers, notamment PDF, JPEG, bitmap, Adobe® Illustrator® (AI), Adobe® Photoshop® (PSD) et AutoDesk AutoCAD (DWT, DXG). Dans Reader, la création d'un tampon personnalisé admet uniquement le format PDF. Remarque : Pour ajouter une seule occurrence d'une image à un fichier PDF, collez l'image dans le document. Les images collées présentent les mêmes caractéristiques que les autres commentaires Tampon ; chacune d'elles comporte une fenêtre contextuelle de note et des propriétés modifiables. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Cliquez sur Importer, puis sélectionnez le fichier. 3 Si le fichier comporte plusieurs pages, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page voulue, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Choisissez une catégorie dans le menu ou saisissez un nouveau nom de catégorie, attribuez un nom au tampon personnalisé, puis cliquez sur OK. Modification du nom ou de la catégorie d'un tampon personnalisé 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Choisissez la catégorie de tampon, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier. 3 Modifiez la catégorie ou le nom du tampon, ou remplacez l’image, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression d'un tampon personnalisé Vous pouvez supprimer les tampons personnalisés que vous avez créés, mais pas les tampons prédéfinis. Lors de la suppression d'un tampon, celui-ci est retiré du menu de l'outil Tampon, mais le fichier correspondant n'est pas supprimé. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Choisissez la catégorie de tampon dans le menu, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer. Suppression d'une catégorie de tampon personnalisée 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Gérer les tampons. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Remarque : La suppression de tous les tampons d'une catégorie de tampon personnalisée supprime la catégorie. Ajout d'une ligne, d'une flèche ou d'une forme Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de dessin sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 187 Collaboration Sélectionnez un outil de dessin en fonction de l'effet recherché. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations, puis sélectionnez un outil de dessin : • Les outils Rectangle , Ellipse , Flèche et Ligne permettent de créer des formes simples. • Les outils Nuage et Polygone permettent de créer des figures fermées à plusieurs côtés. L'outil Polyligne permet de créer des figures ouvertes à plusieurs côtés. • L'outil Crayon permet de tracer des dessins libres et l'outil Gomme , d'effacer les annotations faites au crayon. Pour préciser la largeur de trait, la couleur et d'autres propriétés avant le tracé, cliquez sur l'outil de dessin avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Propriétés, puis définissez les options souhaitées dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés. 2 Dessinez sur le fichier PDF : • Pour créer une forme de nuage ou de polygone, cliquez à l'emplacement du point de départ, déplacez le pointeur, puis cliquez en un autre point afin de créer chacun des côtés. Pour terminer le dessin de la figure, cliquez sur le point de départ ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Terminer dans le menu. Cliquez deux fois pour terminer une polyligne. • Pour tracer une ligne, une flèche ou un rectangle, faites glisser le pointeur sur la zone où l'annotation apparaîtra, ou cliquez à deux reprises : l'une pour créer le point de départ et la seconde pour créer le point de fin. • Pour tracer un carré ou un cercle, ou une ligne horizontale, verticale ou inclinée à 45 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pendant l'opération. • Pour tracer des formes libres à l'aide de l'outil Crayon , faites glisser le curseur jusqu'au point de début du tracé. Vous pouvez relâcher le bouton de la souris, déplacer le pointeur, puis continuer le dessin. Pour effacer des parties du dessin, sélectionnez l'outil Gomme et faites-le glisser sur les zones du dessin à supprimer. 3 Pour modifier ou redimensionner l'annotation, sélectionnez-la et faites glisser l'une des poignées. 4 Pour ajouter à l'annotation une fenêtre contextuelle de note, sélectionnez l'outil Main puis cliquez deux fois sur l'annotation. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note. Une icône de note apparaît à droite de l'annotation pour signaler la présence de texte dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Remarque : Pour supprimer une annotation de dessin, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Association et dissociation d'annotations Vous avez la possibilité d'associer des annotations afin que vos commentaires ne constituent qu'un seul commentaire. L'association des annotations peut être temporaire, le temps de toutes les déplacer ou de modifier leurs propriétés, au lieu de procéder note par note. L’association permet également de distinguer vos annotations de celles des autres réviseurs dans le cadre de la révision d’un document. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas associer les annotations Modifications de texte. Association d'annotations 1 Sélectionnez une annotation avec l'outil Sélection ou Main. 2 Cliquez sur les annotations à associer tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Commande enfoncée. 3 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Associer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 188 Collaboration Dissociation d'annotations ? Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Dissocier. Ajout de commentaires dans une zone de texte ou une légende Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Zone de texte pour créer une zone qui contient du texte. Vous pouvez le positionner en n'importe quel point de la page et ajuster sa taille. Contrairement à une fenêtre contextuelle de note, une zone de texte ne se ferme pas et reste donc visible sur la page du document. Pour ajouter une zone de texte, vous pouvez également coller du texte copié dans le document PDF. La police et la taille du texte dépendent des paramètres par défaut du système. Remarque : Il est possible d'annoter du texte japonais, chinois et coréen à l'aide de l'outil Zone de texte, mais les fichiers de ressources des langues asiatiques doivent être installés sur l'ordinateur. Les zones de texte acceptent uniquement le texte horizontal. Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Légende pour créer une zone de texte de légende. Les légendes s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque vous voulez isoler (sans la masquer) une zone particulière du document. Les zones de légende se composent de trois parties : une zone de texte, une ligne coudée et une fin de ligne. Vous pouvez redimensionner chaque partie en faisant glisser une poignée. La ligne coudée ne peut être redimensionnée que dans une seule direction : les lignes coudées horizontales ne peuvent être redimensionnées qu'à l'horizontale et les lignes coudées verticales qu'à la verticale. La zone de texte s'étend à la verticale au fur et à mesure de la saisie de telle manière que tout le texte soit visible. Vous pouvez déplacer la barre de la zone de texte seule ou la déplacer avec la fin de ligne. La zone de texte se déplace autour d'un point d'ancrage fixe (la flèche à l'extrémité de la fin de ligne) créé lorsque vous cliquez pour la première fois dans le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur et l'aspect de la zone de texte, et ajouter des flèches ou des filets de conduite à la fin de ligne.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 189 Collaboration Ajout d'une zone de texte 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Zone de texte . 2 Cliquez dans le document PDF. 3 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, puis sélectionnez les attributs de couleur, d'alignement et de police du texte. 4 Saisissez le texte. Le texte revient automatiquement à la ligne lorsqu'il atteint le bord droit de la zone. 5 (Facultatif) Pour apporter des modifications supplémentaires à la zone de texte de légende : • A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Zone de texte, cliquez sur un bord de la zone de texte pour la sélectionner, puis faites glisser un coin pour la redimensionner. Utilisez la barre des propriétés pour modifier les options de contour et de fond. • Cliquez deux fois sur la zone de texte pour modifier le texte ou ses propriétés. Faites glisser le pointeur pour sélectionner du texte, puis activez des options de la barre des propriétés. 6 Pour supprimer la zone de texte, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également coller un bloc de texte en le sélectionnant et en le copiant dans n'importe quelle application, en activant l'outil Main dans Acrobat, puis en choisissant Edition > Coller. Ajout d'une légende 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Outil Légende . 2 Cliquez une fois pour définir l'emplacement du point de fin, puis cliquez à nouveau pour définir l'emplacement de la zone de texte. 3 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, puis sélectionnez les attributs de couleur, d'alignement et de police du texte. 4 Saisissez le texte. Le texte revient automatiquement à la ligne lorsqu'il atteint le bord droit de la zone. 5 (Facultatif) Pour apporter des modifications supplémentaires à la zone de texte de légende : • Pour redimensionner la légende, sélectionnez-la, puis faites glisser l'une des poignées qui s'affichent. • Pour déplacer la zone de texte, cliquez à l'intérieur, puis faites-la glisser. • Pour déplacer toute la légende, cliquez sur la fin de ligne ou sur un bord de la zone de texte, puis faites-la glisser. • Pour modifier la couleur, l'opacité ou les caractéristiques de la ligne, activez l'outil Sélection et cliquez sur la légende avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Propriétés, puis sélectionnez les options de votre choix. Ajout d'un commentaire audio Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L’outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio permet d’ajouter un son au format WAV ou AIFF préenregistré en tant que commentaire, ou d’enregistrer et de placer un commentaire sonore dans un document. Les pièces jointes audio figurent dans la liste des commentaires et peuvent être lues sur toutes les plates-formes. Cependant, le matériel et les logiciels de lecture appropriés doivent être installés. Par défaut, l'outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio ne figure pas sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Cependant, vous pouvez l'ajouter en choisissant Outils > Personnaliser les outils. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 190 Collaboration Voir aussi « Modification de l'aspect des commentaires » à la page 180 « Ajout d'un fichier multimédia à un document PDF » à la page 403 Ajout d'un commentaire audio préenregistré 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Enregistrer le commentaire audio, puis cliquez sur le fichier PDF où vous souhaitez insérer le commentaire audio. 2 Cliquez sur Parcourir (Windows) ou Sélectionner (Mac OS) et sélectionnez le fichier à ajouter. 3 (Facultatif) Pour écouter le commentaire audio, cliquez sur le bouton Lire . Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Arrêter, puis sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Enregistrement d'un commentaire audio 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio puis cliquez sur le fichier PDF où vous souhaitez insérer le commentaire audio. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer puis parlez dans le micro. Lorsque vous avez terminé l'enregistrement, cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter , puis sur OK. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout de commentaires dans une pièce jointe Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L'outil Fichier joint comme commentaire permet d'incorporer un fichier à un emplacement précis d'un document PDF afin que le destinataire puisse l'ouvrir et le visualiser. L'ajout d'un fichier joint comme commentaire permet de faire référence à des documents trop longs pour être collés dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note ou une zone de texte. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, le fichier incorporé le suit automatiquement. Pour afficher une pièce jointe, l'application nécessaire à son ouverture doit être installée sur l'ordinateur du lecteur. Important : Pour joindre un fichier à des fins de révision, veillez à utiliser l'outil Fichier joint comme commentaire disponible sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Les pièces jointes au niveau du document à l'aide de l'icône en forme de trombone (outil Joindre un fichier) de la barre d'outils Fichier ne font pas partie du suivi des commentaires dans une procédure de révision. Vous risquez donc de perdre les commentaires insérés de cette façon. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Fichier joint comme commentaire . 2 Cliquez dans le document PDF à l'endroit où vous voulez placer la pièce jointe. 3 Sélectionnez le fichier à joindre, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Si vous joignez un fichier PDF, vous pouvez mettre en évidence les zones d'intérêt dans ce fichier à l'aide des commentaires. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du fichier joint, sélectionnez les paramètres s'appliquant à l'icône du fichier figurant dans le document PDF. Les commentaires joints apparaissent dans le panneau Pièces jointes. Un numéro de page indique leur emplacement. Remarque : Pour supprimer la pièce jointe, cliquez sur l'icône du commentaire joint avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Supprimer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 191 Collaboration Collage d'images en tant que commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Il est possible d'ajouter une image à un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon. Vous pouvez copier la plupart des format d'image à partir d'applications de dessin et de retouche d'image, telles qu'Adobe Photoshop ou Adobe Illustrator. Pour ajouter plusieurs exemplaires de l'image à des documents PDF, créez un tampon personnalisé à l'aide de cette image. Remarque : L'outil Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon n'est disponible qu'après avoir copié une image. 1 Copiez l'image en utilisant l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Outils > Outils de base > Instantané , puis sélectionnez une image dans un fichier PDF. • Dans une autre application, sélectionnez une image et choisissez Edition > Copier. 2 Ouvrez un document PDF. 3 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon. 4 Cliquez dans le document PDF à l'emplacement où doit apparaître l'image. 5 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer l'image, faites-la glisser. • Pour redimensionner l'image, sélectionnez-la puis faites glisser une de ses poignées. Appuyez sur la touche Maj pour redimensionner l'image tout en conservant ses proportions d'origine. • Pour modifier les propriétés de l'image, cliquez avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Propriétés. • Pour supprimer les propriétés de l'image, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Supprimer. Voir aussi « Copie d'une image » à la page 159 Gestion des commentaires Affichage des commentaires La liste des commentaires présente l'ensemble des commentaires ajoutés au fichier PDF, ainsi qu'une barre d'outils assurant des fonctions communes telles que le tri, le filtrage, la suppression et la réponse aux commentaires. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 192 Collaboration Le bouton Commentaires du navigateur permet d'ouvrir la liste des commentaires. Affichage de la liste des commentaires 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Afficher la liste des commentaires. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Afficher la liste des commentaires. • Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires . 2 A l'aide des options situées dans la partie supérieure de la liste des commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Développez ou réduisez les commentaires. Cliquez sur Développer tout ou Réduire tout dans la barre d'outils de la liste des commentaires. Pour développer ou réduire un commentaire, cliquez sur le signe plus ou moins qui le précède. • Parcourez les commentaires. Cliquez sur un commentaire dans la liste ou cliquez sur le bouton Suivant ou Précédent pour passer au commentaire suivant ou précédent. (Ces boutons ne sont disponibles que si un commentaire est sélectionné.) La page sur laquelle se trouve le commentaire sélectionné s'affiche dans le panneau de visualisation et le commentaire sélectionné apparaît. Pour atteindre une page contenant un autre commentaire, il vous suffit de cliquer sur ce commentaire dans la liste. Tri des commentaires Vous pouvez trier les commentaires de la liste par auteur, page, type, date, couleur, état activé ou désactivé, ou état par auteur. Dans la série des réponses, seul le premier message est trié. Les messages de réponse sont répertoriés dans la même catégorie que le premier message de la série. 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires. 2 Choisissez une option dans le menu de tri de la liste des commentaires. Affichage ou masquage de commentaires Vous pouvez choisir de masquer ou d'afficher les commentaires suivant leur type, le réviseur (auteur), leur état ou la présence d'une coche. Le masquage des commentaires s'appelle également filtrage. Le filtrage a une incidence sur l'affichage des commentaires aussi bien dans la fenêtre du document que dans la liste des commentaires. Lorsque vous répertoriez ou imprimez les commentaires, vous pouvez décider d'inclure ou non les commentaires masqués. Lorsque vous masquez un commentaire de note accompagné d'une réponse, toutes les autres réponses de la série sont également masquées. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 193 Collaboration Remarque : Dans le cadre d'une révision par messagerie électronique, les commentaires masqués ne sont pas inclus lors de l'envoi des commentaires à l'initiateur. ? Dans le menu Afficher de la liste des commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher tous les commentaires, choisissez Afficher tous les commentaires. • Pour masquer tous les commentaires, choisissez Masquer tous les commentaires. • Pour filtrer les commentaires, choisissez les catégories à afficher. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez uniquement afficher les notes que vous n'avez pas cochées, choisissez Afficher par type > Notes pour que seules les notes apparaissent, puis choisissez Afficher par état coché > Non coché afin que seules les notes non cochées s'affichent. • Pour inverser un filtre, choisissez l'option Tous les pour chaque catégorie masquée. Par exemple, si vous avez affiché uniquement les commentaires d'un réviseur spécifique, choisissez Affichage > Afficher par réviseur > Tous les réviseurs. Réponse aux commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. La fonction de réponse aux commentaires est particulièrement utile dans les révisions partagées, lorsque les participants peuvent lire les commentaires des uns et des autres. L'initiateur de la révision peut aussi s'en servir pour tenir les réviseurs informés du traitement de leurs suggestions. Si un ou plusieurs réviseurs répondent à un message, le lot de réponses est appelé série. Tous les messages d'une série apparaissent dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note et dans la liste des commentaires. Les réponses sont décalées sous le commentaire d'origine. Le nombre de réponses reçues pour un commentaire s'affiche dans un cadre lorsque vous pointez sur le commentaire. Les réponses figurent directement sous le commentaire, dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note et dans la liste des commentaires. A. En-tête de la réponse B. Menu Options C. Option de réponse dans le menu Options Réponse dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note du commentaire. 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Répondre. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 194 Collaboration 3 Saisissez votre réponse dans la zone affichée. Réponse dans la liste des commentaires 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires . 2 Sélectionnez un commentaire dans la liste des commentaires. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Répondre . 4 Saisissez votre réponse dans la zone affichée. Suppression d'une réponse Si vous supprimez un commentaire accompagné d’une réponse, seul le commentaire est supprimé. Toutes les réponses demeurent dans le fichier PDF, mais ne font plus partie d'aucune série. Il peut s'avérer difficile de les consulter au sein du fichier, car elles sont empilées. Affichez-les dans la liste des commentaires. ? Dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, cliquez sur la réponse avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Supprimer cette réponse. Définition d'un état ou d'une coche Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Les états et les coches sont utiles pour effectuer le suivi des commentaires que vous avez lus ou sur lesquels une intervention est requise. Sous Windows, l'état ou la coche permet de désigner les commentaires à exporter vers un document Word. En configurant l'état de la révision, vous pouvez afficher ou masquer un groupe de commentaires et laisser les participants à la révision libres de leur traitement du commentaire. Une fois l'état de la révision spécifié, vous ne pouvez pas le masquer dans le commentaire, dans la liste des commentaires, même si vous définissez l'état de la révision sur Aucun. Les coches servent uniquement à votre usage personnel et ne s'affichent pas lorsque d'autres utilisateurs affichent le document PDF, à moins que vous ne modifiiez l'état des commentaires. Définition d'un état 1 Sélectionnez le commentaire voulu dans la liste, cliquez sur Définir l'état , puis choisissez une option. L'état de la révision apparaît sous le commentaire, avec le nom de la personne qui a défini cet état. Si un autre réviseur définit l'état de révision du même commentaire, les deux états ainsi que le nom des deux réviseurs s'affichent dans la liste. 2 Pour afficher l'historique des modifications d'un commentaire, cliquez sur l'icône de la note, l'annotation ou la barre de titre d'une fenêtre contextuelle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. Cliquez sur l'onglet Historique des révisions. Marquage des commentaires à l'aide d'une coche ? Dans la liste des commentaires, cliquez sur la case située en regard d'un commentaire pour y apposer une coche . Impression d'un résumé des commentaires Le résumé de commentaires permet de répertorier de façon pratique tous les commentaires associés à un document PDF. Lorsque vous résumez des commentaires, vous pouvez soit créer un document PDF imprimable contenant les commentaires, soit imprimer directement le résumé. Ce résumé n'est ni associé, ni lié au document PDF dont les commentaires sont issus.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 195 Collaboration Options de mise en page pour résumés de commentaires A. Document et commentaires avec connecteurs sur page unique B. Document et commentaires avec connecteurs sur pages distinctes C. Commentaires seuls D. Document et commentaires avec numéros d'ordre Par défaut, Acrobat imprime les documents PDF ainsi que tous les tampons qui y ont été apposés, le cas échéant. Pour maîtriser au maximum l'impression des commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Imprimer avec le résumé des commentaires. 1 Filtrez les commentaires pour afficher ceux qui vous intéressent dans le résumé. (Dans la liste des commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Afficher et choisissez les catégories de commentaires voulues.) 2 Pour maîtriser au maximum l'impression des commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Imprimer avec le résumé des commentaires. Une autre solution consiste à créer un fichier PDF des commentaires distinct. Pour ce faire, choisissez Commentaires > Résumer les commentaires. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de résumé, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez la disposition du document et des commentaires. Les options disponibles dépendent de la disposition. • Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez trier les commentaires. • Indiquez une étendue et précisez si les pages sans commentaires doivent être incluses. • Indiquez si vous souhaitez inclure tous les commentaires dans le résumé ou uniquement les commentaires actuellement visibles. 4 Cliquez sur Imprimer le résumé des commentaires ou sur Créer un fichier PDF du résumé. Recherche d'un commentaire Localisez un commentaire dans la liste en recherchant un mot ou une expression spécifique. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires du navigateur afin d'afficher la liste des commentaires. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher dans les commentaires de la barre d'outils de la liste des commentaires. 3 Dans la fenêtre Recherche, spécifiez le terme ou l'expression que vous souhaitez rechercher, puis cliquez sur Rechercher dans les commentaires. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 196 Collaboration Voir aussi « Présentation des fonctions de recherche » à la page 388 Suppression d'un commentaire Vous ne pouvez supprimer ni les commentaires des autres réviseurs dans le cadre d'une révision partagée ni les commentaires verrouillés. Si vous ajoutez des commentaires à un fichier PDF, puis publiez ces commentaires, vous ne pouvez plus les supprimer. Pour supprimer tous les commentaires d'un document PDF, utilisez la fonction Examiner le document. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Voir aussi « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 278 Suppression d'un commentaire ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez le commentaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. • Dans la liste des commentaires, sélectionnez les commentaires à supprimer, puis cliquez sur l'icône de la corbeille . Remarque : Avant d'appuyer sur la touche Suppr, assurez-vous que le commentaire est sélectionné. Déverrouillage d'un commentaire 1 Cliquez sur le commentaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Désactivez l'option Verrouillage. Vérification orthographique de l'ensemble du texte des commentaires Vous avez la possibilité de vérifier l’orthographe du texte saisi dans une fenêtre de commentaire ou dans un champ de formulaire. En revanche, il est impossible de vérifier l'orthographe du texte sous-jacent du document PDF. 1 Choisissez Edition > Vérifier l'orthographe > Dans les commentaires, champs et texte modifiable. Si le document PDF est ouvert dans un navigateur Web, assurez-vous que la barre d’outils de modification soit ouverte et cliquez sur le bouton Orthographe des commentaires et des champs de formulaire . 2 Cliquez sur Commencer. 3 Pour modifier un mot, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Modifiez le mot sélectionné. Pour annuler la modification, cliquez sur le bouton d'annulation et pour l'accepter, cliquez sur Modifier. • Cliquez deux fois sur l'une des suggestions. • Sélectionnez une suggestion, puis cliquez sur Remplacer. Cliquez sur Remplacer tout pour remplacer chaque occurrence du mot non reconnu par la suggestion sélectionnée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 197 Collaboration Importation et exportation de commentaires Importer les commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Les commentaires peuvent être importés depuis un document PDF. Vous pouvez également importer des commentaires provenant d'un fichier FDF (Form Data Format) ou XFDF, ce dernier étant un fichier FDF XML. Il est impossible d'ouvrir et d'afficher des fichiers FDF ou XFDF tels quels. 1 Dans le document devant recevoir les commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Importer les commentaires. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Importer les commentaires. 2 Choisissez Tous les fichiers (*.*) dans le menu. Si vous connaissez le format de fichier des commentaires que vous souhaitez importer, sélectionnez-le. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur le nom du document contenant les commentaires. Les commentaires sont importés au même emplacement que dans le fichier d'origine. Si les commentaires ne s'affichent pas à leur place, il est probable que les documents PDF source et cible diffèrent. Par exemple, si vous importez des commentaires à partir d'un document de 10 pages dans un document qui n'en contient que deux, seuls les commentaires des deux premières pages sont importés. Exportation de commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Si vous ajoutez des commentaires à un fichier PDF qui n'est pas concerné par une révision gérée, vous devrez exporter vos commentaires pour les envoyer ou importer ceux que vous avez reçus. (Les fichiers PDF concernés par une procédure de révision gérée incluent des options particulières qui permettent d'envoyer ou de publier vos commentaires au lieu de les exporter.) Lorsque vous exportez des commentaires, vous créez un fichier FDF (Form Data Format) contenant uniquement les commentaires. La taille du fichier FDF est donc inférieure à celle du fichier PDF. Vous ou un autre réviseur pouvez alors importer les commentaires du fichier FDF dans le document PDF d'origine. Exportation de commentaires vers un fichier de données 1 Dans le fichier PDF, procédez de l'une des manières suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. 2 Attribuez un nom au fichier et choisissez Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) ou Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) en tant que type de fichier. 3 Indiquez l'emplacement du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 198 Collaboration Exportation des commentaires sélectionnés Remarque : L'exportation de commentaires sélectionnés n'est pas disponible dans Reader. 1 Dans la liste des commentaires, sélectionnez les commentaires que vous souhaitez exporter. 2 Dans le menu Options de la liste des commentaires, choisissez Exporter des commentaires. 3 Attribuez un nom au fichier et choisissez Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) ou Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) en tant que type de fichier. 4 Indiquez l'emplacement du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Exportation de commentaires vers Word (Windows) Dans certains cas, les réviseurs insèrent des commentaires dans un document PDF créé à partir d'un document Microsoft Word. Vous pouvez réviser le document Word d'origine en exportant ces commentaires à partir du PDF. Par exemple, le texte inséré, barré ou remplacé à l'aide des outils de modification de texte dans le document PDF peut être supprimé ou transféré directement dans le document Word source. Le formatage des commentaires (par exemple, texte en gras) n'est pas conservé pendant ce processus. Vous devez l'ajouter manuellement au document Word. Pour réviser un document Word à l'aide de commentaires, créez un fichier PDF balisé à partir du document Word. Avant de transférer les modifications de texte du fichier PDF, supprimez tous les mots ou les informations supplémentaires et fusionnez-les en un seul PDF (si vous avez des commentaires de plusieurs réviseurs). Si vous prévoyez d'importer des commentaires plusieurs fois, faites une copie du document Word au préalable. Dans le cas contraire, l'importation des commentaires pourrait échouer. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers Word. • Dans Word, ouvrez le document source, puis choisissez Commentaires d'Acrobat > Importer les commentaires d'Acrobat. Dans Word 2007, cliquez sur Acrobat, puis sélectionnez Commentaires Acrobat > Importer des commentaires d'Acrobat. 2 Lisez les instructions et cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer des commentaires d'Acrobat, sélectionnez les fichiers PDF et Word, choisissez les options souhaitées parmi les suivantes, puis cliquez sur Continuer : Tous les commentaires Permet d'importer tous les commentaires. Commentaires signalés par une coche Importe uniquement les commentaires signalés par une coche. Modifications de texte uniquement : Insertions, suppressions et remplacements Importe uniquement les commentaires que vous avez ajoutés en utilisant les commandes de modification de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Appliquer des filtres personnalisés aux commentaires Importe uniquement les commentaires que vous désignez par leur auteur, leur type ou leur état. Activer le suivi des modifications avant l'importation Affiche les modifications apportées par les commentaires importés dans Word. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous importez des modifications de texte, cliquez sur Intégrer les modifications de texte dans la boîte de dialogue Importation réussie afin d'examiner et d'appliquer chaque modification individuellement. Dans chacune des modifications, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Appliquer Apporte la modification dans le document et supprimer la bulle de commentaire. Si un commentaire semble vide, intégrez-le au cas où il s'agirait d'un espace ou d'un saut de paragraphe.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 199 Collaboration Ignorer Rejette la modification et supprime la bulle de commentaire. Suivant Passe directement à la modification de texte suivante. Les modifications de texte ignorées ou non intégrées apparaissent sous forme de bulles dans le document Word. Appliquer partout Restant(s) Intègre toutes les modifications de texte restantes et supprime les bulles de commentaire. Rétablir Annule la dernière modification de texte, notamment les modifications manuelles. 5 Pour supprimer les bulles de commentaires du document Word : • Cliquez sur la bulle de commentaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer le commentaire. • Choisissez Commentaires d'Acrobat > Supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Dans Word 2007, cette option se trouve sur le ruban Acrobat. Importation de commentaires dans un fichier PDF révisé Pour importer de nouveaux commentaires ou des commentaires non résolus dans un document PDF après révision du document, utilisez la fonction de migration des commentaires. Cette fonction tente de placer les commentaires à l'emplacement correct en cherchant des groupes de mots et des éléments structurels précis dans le fichier PDF révisé. Remarque : Les résultats peuvent être moins fiables dans les documents PDF non balisés, lesquels ne disposent pas de la structure interne requise pour placer correctement les commentaires importés dans un document révisé. Les commentaires de texte faisant référence à des mots particuliers (surlignement, texte barré et signe d'insertion) s'affiche à l'intérieur du groupe de mots dans lequel ils ont été placés à l'origine. Les annotations de dessin et les notes apparaissent au même emplacement structurel que dans le document original. Les commentaires de type Cercle, Polygone, Rectangle et Tampon apparaissent toujours sur la même page que le document d'origine. Si le document PDF révisé ne contient plus les groupes de mots ni l'ordre logique de structure auxquels fait référence le commentaire, le commentaire migré s'affiche sur la même page que dans le document d'origine ou, si elle n'existe pas, sur la dernière page. Dans ce cas, les modifications de texte sont converties en commentaires sous forme de note. Migration de commentaires dans un fichier PDF révisé 1 Ouvrez le document PDF d'origine et le fichier PDF révisé. 2 Dans le fichier PDF révisé, choisissez Commentaires > Migrer les commentaires. 3 Choisissez le document PDF d'origine dans le menu De, puis cliquez sur OK. Définition de l'état de migration d'un commentaire ? Dans la liste des commentaires, sélectionnez celui qui vous intéresse, cliquez sur le bouton Définir l'état , puis choisissez Migration > [état]. Exportation de commentaires vers AutoCAD (Windows) Des réviseurs peuvent ajouter des commentaires à un document PDF créé à partir d'un dessin AutoCAD. Si vous créez un fichier PDF à l'aide d'AutoCAD PDFMaker, vous pouvez importer des commentaires dans le dessin AutoCAD, au lieu de passer d'AutoCAD à Acrobat. Vous pouvez importer la plupart des types de commentaires, y compris les annotations de dessin, les notes, les tampons et les modifications de texte. 1 Enregistrez le fichier PDF pour inclure les commentaires récemment ajoutés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 200 Collaboration 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers AutoCAD, puis indiquez le fichier PDF et le fichier AutoCAD dans la boîte de dialogue Importer les commentaires. • Dans AutoCAD, choisissez Annotations Acrobat > Importer les commentaires à partir d’Acrobat. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer des commentaires, spécifiez le fichier PDF qui contient les commentaires, indiquez ceux que vous souhaitez exporter, puis cliquez sur Continuer. Si vous importez un jeu de commentaires personnalisé, spécifiez de quel jeu il s'agit en sélectionnant uniquement les caractéristiques qui vous intéressent. Vous devez sélectionner au moins une option dans chacune des catégories. Afficher par réviseur Importe les commentaires par réviseur individuel. Afficher par type Importe les commentaires par type, tel que modifications de texte ou notes. Afficher par état Importe les commentaires par état de révision. Afficher par état coché Importe les commentaires cochés. Tous les commentaires importés figurent dans le calque des annotations Adobe Acrobat en tant qu'objets personnalisés que vous pouvez modifier, filtrer ou supprimer. 4 Pour modifier un commentaire importé (changer d'état, ajouter une coche ou modifier le texte), cliquez sur le commentaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Commentaires d'Acrobat, puis une option. Flux de tâches d'approbation A propos des flux de tâches d'approbation Acrobat (pour le Chinois traditionnel, Chinois simplifié, japonais ou coréen uniquement), vous offre la possibilité d'adresser à des tiers des documents PDF à des fins d'approbation en les envoyant sous forme de pièces jointes à un message électronique. Lorsque les participants à la révision ouvrent une demande d'approbation d'un document PDF dans Acrobat (toutes les langues), ils peuvent l'approuver en y apposant un tampon d'identité numérique. Ils peuvent ensuite transmettre ce document à d'autres approbateurs ou le renvoyer à l'initiateur et à d'autres participants si nécessaire. L'initiateur de la procédure peut assurer le suivi en choisissant d'être notifié chaque fois que le document PDF est approuvé. Le flux de tâches s'achève dès lors que le dernier participant a émis son approbation finale. En cas de rejet d'un document PDF, le flux de tâches d'approbation doit être relancé. Remarque : Si vous utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour initier le flux de tâches, vous pouvez inviter des utilisateurs de Reader 9 (ou version ultérieure) à participer en activant la fonction de commentaires dans le document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 201 Collaboration L'assistant configure des flux de tâches d'approbation (à gauche) tandis que la palette Tampons propose des tampons conçus pour approuver les documents (à droite). Envoi d'un fichier PDF pour approbation Lorsque vous envoyez un fichier PDF par courrier électronique (chinois traditionnel, chinois simplifié, japonais et coréen uniquement), les destinataires reçoivent le fichier PDF en tant que pièce jointe. Lorsque ces personnes ouvrent le fichier PDF joint, elles peuvent y apposer l'un des tampons d'identité numériques de la palette Tampons, puis effectuer la sélection appropriée sur la barre de message du document. Pour envoyer un document PDF pour approbation, utilisez l'assistant approprié dans Acrobat. Cet assistant présente des instructions à l'écran qui facilitent la procédure : invitation des approbateurs, personnalisation des instructions et envoi du document PDF. L'assistant active la fonction de commentaires dans le document PDF de sorte que les utilisateurs de Reader puissent participer au flux de tâches d'approbation. Avant de lancer un flux de tâches d'approbation, assurez-vous que votre application de messagerie est configurée pour fonctionner avec Acrobat. 1 Pour initier un flux de tâches d'approbation, choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer par messagerie pour approbation. 2 Si un message vous y invite, saisissez votre adresse électronique dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité. 3 Indiquez un fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans la zone A, indiquez l'adresse électronique du premier approbateur. 5 Pour permettre à des utilisateurs de Reader de participer au flux de tâches ou pour être tenu informé de l'état d'approbation de chaque participant, configurez ces options. 6 (Facultatif) Tapez des instructions supplémentaires destinées au premier approbateur en haut de votre message électronique. Seuls le message et les instructions par défaut seront adressés aux approbateurs suivants. Remarque : Le message d'invitation contient les instructions visant à aider les participants à suivre le processus d'approbation. Evitez de modifier ou de supprimer du texte. 7 Cliquez sur Envoyer une invitation. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 202 Collaboration Participation au flux de tâches d'approbation Si vous êtes invité à participer à un flux de tâches d'approbation, un message électronique contenant des instructions détaillées concernant l'approbation du document PDF joint vous sera envoyé. Lorsque vous ouvrez le document PDF, la palette Tampons et la barre de message du document s'affichent en haut du document PDF. Si votre version d'Acrobat est antérieure à la version 7.0, vous êtes invité à télécharger la dernière version de Reader. Pour approuver le document, vous sélectionnez ensuite le tampon d'identité numérique de votre choix parmi ceux que vous propose la palette Tampons. Un tampon d'identité numérique contient les informations d'identité que vous fournissez (nom, titre, société, adresse électronique, etc.). Il peut tenir lieu de signature. Lorsque vous appliquez un tampon, il fait partie intégrante du contenu de la page du document. Bien que vous puissiez supprimer l'un des tampons que vous avez apposés pendant la procédure d'approbation, vous ne pouvez plus le faire une fois la procédure terminée (le tampon est verrouillé). Vous ne pouvez ni déplacer ni supprimer des tampons appliqués par les autres participants à la procédure. Vous pouvez également rejeter des documents non conformes aux normes que vous avez fixées. Outre l'ajout de tampons numériques, vous pouvez apposer d'autres types de commentaires sur un document PDF, notamment des notes, des modifications de texte, des tampons personnalisés et des pièces jointes. Voir aussi « Création d'un tampon personnalisé » à la page 186 « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 177 « Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions » à la page 166 Approbation d'un document PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF joint au message électronique de l'invitation à la procédure d'approbation. Remarque : Si vous n’avez pas ajouté vos informations d’identité au tampon, vous y êtes invité. 2 Sélectionnez un tampon dans la palette Tampons. (Pour afficher tous les tampons, faites défiler la liste ou redimensionnez la fenêtre en faisant glisser l'un de ses coins.) 3 Cliquez sur le document pour apposer votre tampon d'approbation. Remarque : Pour supprimer un tampon d'identité numérique que vous venez d'apposer, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur Suppr. Si vous sélectionnez Imprimer, Enregistrer une copie ou Envoyer par messagerie lors de la procédure d'approbation, vous ne pouvez pas supprimer le tampon. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour envoyer le document à l'approbateur suivant, cliquez sur le bouton Approuver sur la barre de message du document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer à l'approbateur suivant, saisissez l'adresse électronique de la personne dans la zone A, ajoutez les adresses des autres destinataires, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Pour achever la procédure d'approbation, cliquez sur le bouton Approbation finale sur la barre de message du document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'approbation finale, indiquez si une notification d'approbation doit être envoyée à partir du menu Méthode d'approbation finale. Si vous envoyez une notification, saisissez une adresse électronique dans la zone A, ajoutez les adresses des autres destinataires, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Si vous n'envoyez pas de notification, cliquez sur Terminer. Si l'option Avertir l'initiateur de l'état de l'approbation par messagerie électronique est sélectionnée, une notification par messagerie distincte s'affiche, adressée à l'initiateur. Cliquez sur Envoyer pour transmettre la notification.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 203 Collaboration Les documents PDF intégrés à un flux de tâches d'approbation sont accompagnés d'instructions et d'outils. 5 Enregistrez le document PDF. Important : Si vous utilisez le bouton de barre d'outils Envoyer par messagerie afin d'envoyer le document PDF, ce dernier cesse de faire partie du flux de tâches. Conséquence : Le destinataire du message ne bénéficiera plus des options d'approbation. Rejet d'un document PDF Si le document PDF reçu dans le cadre d'une demande d'approbation ne répond pas aux conditions requises pour l'approbation, servez-vous des options disponibles sur la barre de message du document pour rejeter le document et le renvoyer à l'initiateur. En cas de rejet d'un document PDF, le flux de tâches d'approbation doit être relancé. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF joint au message électronique de l'invitation à la procédure d'approbation. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter sur la barre de message du document. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Rejeter le document et envoyer une notification, saisissez l'adresse électronique de l'initiateur dans la zone A. Si l'option Avertir l'initiateur de l'état de l'approbation par messagerie électronique est activée, un message distinct est adressé à l'initiateur. Cliquez sur Envoyer. 4 Cliquez sur Envoyer lorsque le message s'affiche. Ajout ou modification d'informations d'identité pour un tampon numérique 1 Dans le menu Tampons, choisissez Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Dans la palette Tampons, sélectionnez Tampons d'identité numériques, cliquez sur votre tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier l'identité. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité, renseignez ou modifiez les champs Nom, Titre, Société, Service et Adresse électronique, puis cliquez sur Terminer. Vous pouvez également modifier vos informations d'identité à partir de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Sous Catégories, sélectionnez Identité.204 Chapitre 7 : Formulaires Le remplissage de formulaires est possible à partir d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional ou du logiciel gratuit Adobe Reader®. Vous pouvez créer des formulaires statiques ou interactifs dans Acrobat ou Adobe LiveCycle® Designer ES (fournis avec Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour Microsoft® Windows®). Les formulaires interactifs rationalisent la procédure de remplissage de formulaires et de recueil d'informations. Formulaires - Concepts de base A propos des formulaires Vous pouvez créer des formulaires de deux façons différentes dans Acrobat : • En convertissant un document électronique existant (Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word ou Excel, par exemple) au format de formulaire PDF. Remarque : Sous Mac OS, la seule façon de créer un formulaire est d'utiliser un fichier PDF existant. • En numérisant un document papier en vue de le convertir au format PDF. • Création d'un formulaire entièrement nouveau ou d'après un modèle à l'aide de LiveCycle Designer ES. Cela est possible uniquement si vous disposez de Designer ES, d'Acrobat Professional ou d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows. Remarque : Vous pouvez créer ou modifier des formulaires XML dans Adobe Designer, mais pas dans Acrobat. Après avoir converti un document existant au format PDF, vous pouvez ajouter des champs pour en faire un formulaire interactif. Un formulaire interactif peut être rempli sur un ordinateur et envoyé via une connexion Internet ou un réseau local. Pour plus d'informations sur les formulaires, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Mode de disposition des champs de formulaire sur une grille : acrobat.timhuff.net/ • Aide générale sur les formulaires PDF : www.uwec.edu/Help/acrobat8.htm • Conversion d'un document PDF en formulaire remplissable : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-pdf-documentform.html • Articles, didacticiels et conseils sur les formulaires : http://acrobatusers.com/ • Galerie de formulaires : http://acrobatusers.com/gallery/forms_gallery/UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 205 Formulaires A propos de LiveCycle Designer ES Designer ES est une interface graphique de conception de formulaires reposant sur un ensemble de fonctions et de commandes avancées. Une application autonome, Designer ES, est fournie avec Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows. Il est possible également de l'acheter séparément. Designer ES est très pratique pour créer des formulaires dynamiques prévus pour contenir des quantités variables de données ou pour autoriser des interactions avec les utilisateurs. Vous pourriez, par exemple, concevoir un formulaire dans le but de calculer le prix de vente des actions. Au fur et à mesure que les utilisateurs indiqueraient les noms et les quantités des actions dans le champ Vente, celui-ci s'ajusterait automatiquement de façon à accepter toutes les entrées utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur entre la quantité à vendre, le champ Montant est automatiquement mis à jour. Designer ES vous permet également de créer des formulaires prenant en charge des données et schémas propres à un secteur d'activité au format XML . Si vous disposez d'Acrobat 8 ou d'une version ultérieure, vous pouvez envoyer des formulaires PDF à plusieurs destinataires à l'aide de l'assistant de diffusion de Designer ES. Cet assistant est accessible à partir du menu Fichier dans Designer ES. Il certifie l'identité de l'émetteur du formulaire et chiffre les données que les destinataires transmettent. Des droits d'utilisation sont, en outre, ajoutés au formulaire pour que les utilisateurs puissent enregistrer ce dernier dans Adobe Reader. Designer ES permet d'étendre les fonctionnalités de base proposées dans Acrobat. Un formulaire conçu avec Designer ES peut contenir, par exemple, des champs Objet d'image qui facilitent l'ajout d'illustrations. Faites appel à Designer ES lorsque vous envisagez d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Créer des formulaires entièrement nouveaux ou basés sur les présentations prédéfinies (des modèles proposés) à modifier et à personnaliser. • Créer des formulaires dynamiques. • Ajouter des illustrations telles que des photographies. • Ajouter des collections de codes à barres. • Créer des formulaires dans des formats susceptibles d'être convertis par Designer au format HTML, notamment si vous souhaitez publier le formulaire interactif sur un site Web pour permettre aux utilisateurs de le remplir et de le renvoyer depuis un navigateur. • Intégrer des formulaires PDF à des flux de production existants en établissant une liaison entre ces formulaires et des schémas XML, des fichiers de données XML, des bases de données et des services Web. • Utiliser des objets de script. Vous devez utiliser Designer pour modifier tout formulaire ayant été ouvert et enregistré dans Designer, même si le formulaire a été à l'origine créé dans Acrobat. Préférences de formulaires Pour garder le contrôle des divers aspects de votre interaction avec les champs de formulaire, définissez les préférences de formulaires. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Formulaires dans le panneau gauche. Les préférences de formulaires sont divisées en trois sections : Générales, Couleur de surbrillance et Remplissage automatique.. Remarque : Les préférences de formulaires permettent de déterminer la façon dont l'application gère les formulaires que vous manipulez. Ces préférences ne sont pas enregistrées avec les formulaires PDF. Voir aussi « Remplissage automatique d'un formulaire » à la page 246UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 206 Formulaires Générales Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs Effectue automatiquement tous les calculs des valeurs de champs lors de la saisie par l'utilisateur. Remarque : Le paramètre de cette option s'applique uniquement à votre session en cours. Afficher le rectangle de mise au point Indique le champ de formulaire actif. Afficher l'indicateur de dépassement des champs de texte Affiche un signe plus (+) dans les champs de texte qui dépassent les limites spécifiées lors de la création du champ. Toujours masquer la barre de message des documents de formulaires Masque par défaut la barre de message du document à chaque ouverture d'un formulaire PDF dans Adobe Reader à moins qu'elle ne contienne un bouton d'envoi du formulaire. Dans ce cas, il est impossible de masquer la barre de message. Afficher un aperçu des champs lors de la création ou de la modification Affiche l'aspect d'un champ de formulaire lorsque vous créez ou modifiez un formulaire. Gérer les paramètres de code à barres Ouvre une boîte de dialogue présentant une liste d'éléments de code à barres (notamment Nom du jeu de paramètres, Symbologie et l'état d'intégration pour chaque élément). Inclut les boutons Créer, Modifier, Supprimer, Importer et Exporter pour la manipulation de jeux de paramètres nouveaux ou sélectionnés. Couleur de surbrillance Afficher la couleur lors du passage sur les champs Affiche un contour noir autour d'un champ lorsque vous immobilisez le pointeur dessus. Couleur de sélection des champs Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur permettant de choisir la couleur des champs de formulaire mis en surbrillance. La mise en surbrillance est visible lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance sur la barre de message du document. Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur permettant de choisir la couleur du contour des champs de formulaire à remplir obligatoirement. La bordure des champs de formulaire obligatoires apparaît seulement lorsque le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance est activé ou après que vous avez essayé d'envoyer le formulaire. Remplissage automatique Menu Remplissage automatique Affiche trois options pour le remplissage automatique : Désactivé, Standard ou Avancé. Mémoriser les données numériques Propose les valeurs numériques préalablement saisies dès que vous saisissez le premier caractère identique dans un champ similaire. Lorsqu'elle est désélectionnée, l'option de remplissage automatique n'effectue des propositions que pour les entrées de texte. (Disponible uniquement avec la sélection Standard ou Avancé.) Modifier la liste Affiche les entrées actuelles stockées dans la mémoire du remplissage automatique. Vous pouvez sélectionner et supprimer les entrées que vous ne souhaitez pas conserver pour d'autres formulaires. (Cette option n'est pas disponible si aucune entrée n'est en mémoire.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 207 Formulaires Création et diffusion de formulaires A propos des éléments de formulaire Une fois que vous avez déterminé les informations que vous souhaitez obtenir des utilisateurs, vous pouvez associer les types d'informations aux éléments de formulaire appropriés. • Pour les données numériques et de texte devant être saisies par l'utilisateur, choisissez d'utiliser des champs de texte ou des listes déroulantes. • Pour un choix unique parmi un nombre limité d'options, utilisez les boutons radio, une zone de liste ou une liste déroulante. • Pour un nombre limité d'options parmi lesquelles l'utilisateur peut sélectionner aucun, un ou plusieurs éléments, utilisez les cases à cocher, ou une zone de liste et définissez les propriétés de champs de formulaire pour autoriser les sélections multiples. • Pour des actions, notamment l'ouverture d'un fichier, la lecture d'un son ou d'une vidéo, l'envoi de données de formulaire et autres, utilisez des boutons. • Pour renforcer la protection du document, ajoutez un champ de signature numérique permettant de vérifier l'identité de l'utilisateur. Vous pouvez également effectuer des modifications de propriétés de champs de formulaire individuelles, afin que les utilisateurs puissent remplir le formulaire PDF sans difficulté et sans erreur. Un formulaire PDF créé dans Acrobat peut contenir les types d'éléments suivants : Codes à barres Codez les données de champs sélectionnés et affichez-les sous forme de motif visuel pouvant être interprété par un logiciel ou un matériel de décodage (disponible séparément). Boutons Ils permettent d'apporter des modifications depuis l'ordinateur de l'utilisateur : ouverture d'un fichier, lecture d'un fichier son ou envoi de données à un serveur Web. Ils peuvent être personnalisés avec des images, du texte et des modifications visuelles déclenchées par des actions de souris. Remarque : Les boutons d'actions sont différents des boutons radio qui représentent des choix de données effectués par l'utilisateur. Cases à cocher Elles proposent de sélectionner ou de désélectionner des éléments individuels. Si le formulaire contient plusieurs cases à cocher, l'utilisateur peut en général en sélectionner autant qu'il le souhaite. Listes déroulantes Elles permettent à l'utilisateur de choisir un élément dans un menu déroulant ou de saisir une valeur. Champ de signature numérique Il permet d'apposer une signature électronique numérique sur un document PDF. Barre de message du document Elle affiche des informations générées automatiquement relatives au formulaire PDF et, le cas échéant, des boutons d'action et d'autres options. Elle indique aux utilisateurs Reader les droits d'utilisation dont ils disposent pour le formulaire. Elle précise également si un formulaire est certifié ou comporte des champs de signature et permet aux utilisateurs de mettre les champs en surbrillance. Si le formulaire ne contient pas de bouton d’envoi, un bouton Envoyer le formulaire est ajouté à la barre de message du document pour que les utilisateurs soient en mesure de transmettre le formulaire. Remarque : Si les destinataires du formulaire utilisent des versions antérieures d'Acrobat ou de Reader, la barre de message du document risque de ne pas être visible ou de contenir d'autres informations. Zones de liste Elle affichent une liste d'options que l'utilisateur peut sélectionner. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 208 Formulaires Remarque : Vous pouvez définir une propriété de champ de formulaire permettant à l'utilisateur de sélectionner plusieurs éléments dans la liste en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Boutons radio Ils présentent un groupe de choix parmi lesquels l'utilisateur peut sélectionner un seul élément. Tous les boutons radio portant le même nom fonctionnent comme un groupe. Champs de texte Ils permettent de saisir du texte (nom, adresse, numéro de téléphone, etc.). Formulaire Adobe Acrobat PDF A. Champ de signature numérique B. Liste déroulante C. Champs de texte D. Barre de message du document de formulaire E. Cases à cocher F. Boutons radio G. Zone de liste H. Boutons Voir aussi « Définition des boutons d'action » à la page 231 « Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader » à la page 209 Création d'un formulaire Vous pouvez convertir un document électronique existant (un document Word, Excel ou PDF, par exemple) ou numériser un document papier au format PDF, puis ajouter des champs interactifs au formulaire. G F E D H A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 209 Formulaires Remarque : Lorsque vous convertissez un document en formulaire Acrobat, Acrobat détecte automatiquement les champs de formulaire du document. Examinez attentivement le document pour vérifier si Acrobat a repéré correctement les champs. Vous êtes libre de créer des formulaires en vous basant sur un document électronique existant (un document Word, Excel ou PDF, par exemple) ou de numériser un formulaire papier au format PDF. Pour créer un formulaire entièrement nouveau ou d'après un modèle, vous devez disposer d'Acrobat Professional, d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows ou de Designer ES. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations ci-après, puis suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran. • Pour convertir un document électronique existant (Word ou PDF, par exemple) au format PDF, choisissez Document électronique existant. Remarque : Si vous ne souhaitez pas utiliser l'assistant, il suffit d'ouvrir le fichier et de choisir Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire pour convertir un document PDF au format Acrobat. • Pour numériser un document papier au format PDF, choisissez Formulaire papier. • (Windows) Pour créer avec Designer ES un formulaire entièrement nouveau ou basé sur l'un des modèles disponibles, choisissez Nouveau formulaire. Remarque : Pour créer un formulaire Acrobat entièrement nouveau, commencez par créer un fichier PDF vierge en choisissant Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page vierge, puis sélectionnez Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire pour convertir le document PDF en formulaire Acrobat. Pour des didacticiels et des vidéos sur la création de formulaires, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Simplification de la création de formulaire : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4203_a9_fr • Conversion d'un document PDF en formulaire remplissable : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-pdf-documentform.html • Création de formulaires Acrobat : http://movielibrary.lynda.com/html/modPage.asp?id=540 • Formulaires – Processus intégral : http://tv.adobe.com/#vi+f1495v1626 Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader En général, les utilisateurs de Reader ne peuvent pas enregistrer les formulaires remplis. Toutefois, vous pouvez étendre les droits aux utilisateurs de Reader à cet effet. Ces droits supplémentaires comprennent également la possibilité d'ajouter des commentaires, d'utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire et de signer numériquement le document PDF. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou prévisualisez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader. Ces droits étendus s'appliquent uniquement au formulaire PDF actif. Si vous créez un autre formulaire PDF, vous devez renouveler cette opération si vous souhaitez autoriser les utilisateurs de Reader d'enregistrer des copies remplies du formulaire PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 210 Formulaires Accessibilité des formulaires Adobe PDF Vous pouvez rendre les champs de formulaire accessibles aux utilisateurs atteints de déficiences visuelles ou motrices en ajoutant au fichier PDF des balises et une structure appropriée. En outre, vous pouvez utiliser la propriété d’infobulle des champs de formulaire pour fournir à l’utilisateur des informations ou instructions relatives au champ. Par exemple, utilisez cette fonction pour qu’un lecteur d’écran annonce « Votre nom ». En cas d'absence d'info-bulle, le lecteur d'écran annonce uniquement le type du champ de formulaire. 1 Le cas échéant, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire et assurez-vous que l'outil Objet est sélectionné. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un champ de formulaire sélectionné pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. 3 Dans le panneau Général, entrez une description dans la zone réservée à l'info-bulle. Remarque : Si vous créez votre formulaire à l'aide de Designer ES, vous devez exécuter le lecteur d'écran avant d'ouvrir le formulaire dans Acrobat afin d'afficher des balises d'accessibilité avec une disposition souple dans Acrobat. Voir aussi « Fonctions d'accessibilité » à la page 298 Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires Le langage JavaScript permet de créer des pages Web interactives. Adobe a amélioré les fonctionnalités JavaScript de sorte que vous puissiez intégrer plus facilement des fonctions interactives dans les formulaires PDF. Parmi les utilisations répandues des scripts JavaScript dans les formulaires Acrobat, citons le formatage, le calcul et la validation de données, ainsi que l'attribution d'une action. Vous pouvez également configurer des formulaires Adobe PDF de sorte qu’ils se connectent directement à des bases de données via ODBC (sous Windows uniquement). Pour plus de détails, consultez le manuel JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Remarque : Lors de la création de formulaires dynamiques, gardez à l'esprit qu'Adobe Reader ne prend pas en charge les scripts JavaScript personnalisé. Pour que le formulaire fonctionne correctement dans Reader, il faut ajouter au document PDF des droits d'utilisation supplémentaires. Vous pouvez utiliser le kit SDK d'Acrobat pour personnaliser l'application. Pour plus de détails sur ce kit SDK, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement). Création de champs de formulaire Dans Acrobat, vous créez un champ de formulaire en choisissant un des outils prévus à cet effet. Pour chaque type de champ, vous pouvez définir une série d'options à partir de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du champ de formulaire. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez utiliser Designer ES pour modifier les formulaires créés dans Acrobat. Cependant, Acrobat ne peut pas modifier les champs de formulaire qui ont été ouverts et enregistrés dans Designer ES. Voir aussi « Comportement des champs de formulaire » à la page 220 Création d'un champ de formulaire 1 Après avoir converti votre document au format PDF, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 211 Formulaires 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Ajouter un champ, puis sélectionnez un outil. • Choisissez Formulaires > Outils de formulaire, puis sélectionnez un outil de formulaire. • Cliquez sur la page à l'aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez un outil. Votre curseur prend la forme d'un viseur. 3 Sur la page, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter le champ afin de créer un champ aux dimensions par défaut. Pour créer un champ de dimensions personnalisées, tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille. 4 Dans la zone Nom du champ, saisissez le nom du champ et indiquez si ce champ doit être obligatoirement renseigné ou non. Choisissez un nom pertinent pour faciliter le tri et la collecte des données. 5 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue des propriétés et modifier les autres propriétés du champ, cliquez sur Afficher toutes les propriétés. Remarque : Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Maintenir l'outil activé sur la barre d'outils Formulaires (visible après que vous avez choisi Ajouter un champ > Afficher les outils sur la barre), la zone Nom du champ n'est pas visible après l'ajout du champ. Il suffit alors de cliquer sur la page pour ajouter un nouveau champ au formulaire. Pour quitter ce mode, appuyez sur la touche Echap ou cliquez sur le bouton Objet . Pour changer les propriétés du champ, cliquez deux fois sur le champ. 6 Pour tester votre formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu . La prévisualisation du formulaire permet non seulement de vérifier votre formulaire, mais aussi de savoir exactement comment il se présente aux yeux des destinataires du formulaire. Lorsque vous êtes en mode d'aperçu, vous pouvez cliquer sur le bouton Modifier la disposition pour revenir en mode d'édition. Disposition des champs de formulaire sur une grille Utilisez les grilles pour vous aider à positionner avec précision les champs de formulaire sur une page. Il est possible de définir l'espacement, la couleur et la position d'une grille. Vous avez également la possibilité d'aligner le contour d'un champ de formulaire sur la grille lorsque vous modifiez le champ. Les lignes de la grille ne s'impriment pas. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Grille. 2 Pour accrocher les champs de formulaire aux lignes de la grille les plus proches lors de leur création ou de leur déplacement, choisissez Affichage > Accrocher à la grille. Copie d'un champ de formulaire Vous pouvez créer des copies d'un champ sur une seule page d'un formulaire PDF. Rien ne vous empêche également de copier et coller le champ sur d'autres pages. Lorsque vous créez des doublons de champs de formulaire, les duplicatas du champ d'origine sont insérés sur une ou plusieurs pages. Ils figurent toujours au même emplacement sur chaque page, comme l'original. Vous pouvez faire glisser les copies et duplicatas à différents emplacements d'une page, mais non d'une page à une autre. Les copies et les duplicatas créés reprennent le même nom que le champ de formulaire d'origine. Un numéro s'ajoute au nom des champs copiés ou dupliqués à l'aide de la commande Insérer plusieurs champs. Tous les champs de formulaire dotés du même nom de base partagent les mêmes données utilisateur et propriétés d'action. Par conséquent, lorsqu'un utilisateur ajoute ou modifie une réponse dans une copie ou un duplicata, cette réponse s'affiche dans tous les champs portant le même nom de base. Si vous changez les propriétés d'une des multiples versions d'un champ de formulaire dont le nom de base est identique, ces modifications n'ont un impact que sur cette copie du champ. La seule exception à cette règle est la modification d'une liste d'actions lorsque le déclencheur n'est pas la souris.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 212 Formulaires Si vous souhaitez éviter que les modifications d'une copie ou d'un duplicata de champ de formulaire ne se répercutent sur l'ensemble des champs dotés du même nom de base, changez le nom des nouveaux champs de formulaire. Création d'une copie de champ de formulaire ? Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour copier le champ de formulaire au centre de l'affichage actuel, choisissez Edition > Copier, puis Edition > Coller. • Pour copier le champ de formulaire et le déplacer ailleurs sur la page, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant que vous le faites glisser. Pour limiter le mouvement à un déplacement vertical ou horizontal, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj en même temps. Création de multiples copies d'un champ de formulaire sur une page 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le champ du formulaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Insérer plusieurs champs. • Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire, puis choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Insérer plusieurs champs. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer plusieurs copies de champs, sélectionnez Aperçu, puis déplacez la boîte de dialogue de manière à pouvoir visualiser le champ d'origine et les copies sur la page du formulaire. 3 Effectuez les sélections voulues : • Pour modifier le nombre de copies à créer, saisissez des valeurs différentes pour les options Copier les champs verticalement et Copier les champs horizontalement. • Pour modifier les dimensions du champ initial et de toutes les copies, saisissez des valeurs différentes pour les options Modifier la largeur et Modifier la hauteur. • Pour déplacer le champ initial et toutes les copies, cliquez sur les boutons En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite. Duplication d'un champ de formulaire sur plusieurs pages 1 Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire à dupliquer. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Dupliquer. Remarque : La commande Dupliquer n'est pas disponible pour les formulaires ne contenant qu'une seule page. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour dupliquer le champ de formulaire sur toutes les pages, sélectionnez l'option Tout, puis cliquez sur OK. • Pour dupliquer le champ de formulaire sur une étendue de pages, cliquez sur le bouton De, puis indiquez les pages de début et de fin sur lesquelles le champ doit apparaître. Remarque : L'inclusion ou l'exclusion de la page sur laquelle le champ d'origine apparaît n'a aucune incidence sur la procédure de duplication. L'inclusion de cette page ne crée pas une deuxième copie du champ sur l'original et son exclusion ne supprime pas le champ d'origine.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 213 Formulaires Sélection de plusieurs champs de formulaire La sélection de plusieurs champs de formulaire est la première étape à effectuer avant d'envisager toute autre tâche (création de copies, alignement et ajustement de l'espace entre les champs de formulaire, etc.). ? Si besoin est, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour sélectionner tous les champs de formulaire quel que soit leur type, choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout. • Pour sélectionner une plage de champs de formulaire, cliquez sur le premier champ, puis cliquez sur le dernier en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Vous sélectionnez ainsi tous les champs situés entre les deux champs choisis. • Pour sélectionner des champs de formulaire individuels dans différentes parties de la page PDF, cliquez sur chaque champ en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • Pour sélectionner tous les champs de formulaire dans une zone de la page, utilisez l'outil Objet pour dessiner un cadre de sélection autour de la zone. • Pour désélectionner un champ de formulaire individuel, cliquez dessus en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. Le champ mis en surbrillance (en bleu foncé) et dont les poignées apparaissent autour de sa bordure représente l'ancrage. Lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs champs de formulaire en cliquant dessus, le dernier champ sélectionné est l'ancrage. Lorsque vous utilisez un cadre de sélection, le premier champ de formulaire créé constitue l'ancrage. Si vous cliquez sur un champ en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour désélectionner l'ancrage, le champ de formulaire en haut à gauche de la sélection devient le nouvel ancrage. Redimensionnement et organisation de champs de formulaire Une fois que vous avez créé des champs de formulaire, vous pouvez changer leur position, les redimensionner ou les déplacer pour donner à la page un aspect plus professionnel. Pour ajuster la disposition des champs de formulaire, assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition (choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire). Redimensionnement d'un champ de formulaire 1 Activez l'outil Objet. 2 Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire à redimensionner. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour redimensionner le champ manuellement, sélectionnez-le en cliquant dessus, puis faites glisser une poignée de la bordure. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser une poignée d'angle pour conserver les proportions du champ de formulaire. • Pour redimensionner le champ d'un pixel, appuyez sur Ctrl+touche fléchée. Pour le redimensionner de 10 pixels, appuyez sur Ctrl+Maj+touche fléchée. Redimensionnement de plusieurs champs en fonction du champ sélectionné 1 Sélectionnez tous les champs de formulaire à redimensionner. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ de formulaire auquel doivent correspondre les autres champs de formulaire sélectionnés. Choisissez Définir la même taille pour tous les champs, puis sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Hauteur Permet d'ajuster les valeurs de hauteur sans changer celles de largeur. Largeur Permet d'ajuster les valeurs de largeur sans changer celles de hauteur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 214 Formulaires Les deux Permet d'ajuster les largeurs et hauteurs. Déplacement de champs de formulaire individuels Vous pouvez déplacer des champs de formulaire par un simple glissement. Pour une plus grande précision obtenue en moins de temps, vous pouvez utiliser des fonctions spéciales qui permettent d'aligner les champs les uns avec les autres, d'ajuster l'espace entre les champs et de les centrer sur la page. 1 L'outil Objet vous permet de sélectionner un ou plusieurs champs de formulaire à déplacer. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer les champs vers un emplacement approximatif, faites glisser les champs de formulaire sélectionnés vers le nouvel emplacement. Pour limiter le mouvement à un déplacement vertical ou horizontal, commencez à faire glisser le champ, puis appuyez sur la touche Maj tout en continuant à faire glisser la sélection. • Pour déplacer les champs horizontalement ou verticalement par petits incréments, appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour déplacer lentement le champ vers la position voulue. • Pour déplacer le champ de formulaire vers le centre exact d'une page, choisissez Edition > Couper, accédez à la page voulue, puis choisissez Edition > Coller. Remarque : Les champs sont placés au centre de la page lors du premier collage uniquement. Tout champ collé par la suite est décalé par rapport au champ précédemment collé. Alignement et centrage de multiples champs de formulaire 1 Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire à aligner. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ par rapport auquel aligner les autres. Choisissez Alignement, répartition ou centrage, puis procédez de la façon suivante : • Pour aligner une colonne de champs, choisissez Aligner à gauche, Aligner à droite ou Aligner verticalement. Cela permet d'aligner respectivement les champs par rapport au bord gauche, au bord droit ou à l'axe vertical (centre) du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. • Pour aligner une rangée de champs, choisissez Aligner en haut, Aligner en bas ou Aligner horizontalement. Cela permet d'aligner respectivement les champs par rapport au bord supérieur, au bord inférieur ou à l'axe horizontal (centre) du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. • Pour centrer les champs, choisissez Centrer verticalement, Centrer horizontalement ou Centrer dans les deux sens. Remarque : Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'un des champs sélectionnés avec le bouton droit de la souris, les poignées apparaissent sur le contour du champ pour indiquer qu'il s'agit du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. Les commandes du menu Aligner servent à déplacer les autres champs de formulaire sélectionnés afin de les aligner sur les bords du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. Ajustement de l'espace entre les champs de formulaire Dans le contexte de la disposition des champs de formulaire sur une page, la répartition a pour effet de donner à un groupe de champs de formulaire un espacement uniforme, mesuré à partir du centre des champs adjacents. Les options de répartition ont priorité sur l'option Accrocher à la grille. 1 Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire à ajuster. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 215 Formulaires 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'un des champs sélectionnés, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour répartir les champs uniformément entre le champ supérieur et le champ inférieur, choisissez Aligner, Répartir ou Centrer > Répartir verticalement. • Pour répartir les champs uniformément entre le champ le plus à gauche et celui le plus à droite, choisissez Aligner, Répartir ou Centrer > Répartir horizontalement. Remarque : Le bouton Diffuser le formulaire sur la barre d'outils Formulaires a une fonction toute autre : utilisez ce bouton pour envoyer votre formulaire à des tiers, qui le rempliront et vous renverront les données. Suppression d'un champ de formulaire 1 Dans le panneau Champs ou la vue de la page, sélectionnez les champs de formulaire que vous souhaitez supprimer. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Suppr ou choisissez Edition > Supprimer. A propos des codes à barres Les champs de code à barres convertissent les entrées de formulaire utilisateur en format visuel pouvant être numérisé, interprété et incorporé dans une base de données. Les codes à barres s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque les utilisateurs envoient le formulaire par courrier ou par télécopie. Dans ces cas de figure, les codes à barres permettent de gagner du temps, évitant les erreurs de saisie pouvant survenir lorsque les réponses sont lues et enregistrées manuellement. Le flux de production type à suivre pour créer un code à barres comprend les phases suivantes : • L'auteur du formulaire vérifie que l'option Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs est activée dans les préférences de formulaires, puis il crée le formulaire dans Acrobat en configurant tous les autres champs comme à l'ordinaire. • L'auteur du formulaire ajoute le champ de code à barres au formulaire, en configurant le code à barres de manière à capturer les données souhaitées. • L'auteur du formulaire active le formulaire à l'attention des utilisateurs de Reader (en autorisant ou non ces derniers à enregistrer une copie du document rempli ou en définissant des champs de codes à barres). • L'auteur du formulaire diffuse le formulaire aux utilisateurs. • Les utilisateurs remplissent le formulaire sur leur ordinateur, puis ils l'envoient par voie électronique ou en impriment un exemplaire qu'ils transmettent à l'expéditeur. • Les données de codes à barres reçues sont interprétées de l'une des manières suivantes avant d'être éventuellement vérifiées, triées et utilisées par le destinataire du formulaire : Formulaires envoyés par télécopie à un serveur Le destinataire de l'envoi peut utiliser Adobe Acrobat Capture® pour recueillir les images TIFF du serveur de télécopie et les placer dans un dossier de contrôle du décodeur Adobe LiveCycle Barcoded Forms s'il possède ces produits. Formulaires envoyés sur papier Le destinataire de l'envoi peut numériser des formulaires papier, puis utiliser une application telle que le décodeur LiveCycle Barcoded Forms afin de décoder les codes à barres inclus dans les formulaires. Remarque : Acrobat Capture et le décodeur Adobe LiveCycle Barcoded Forms sont des produits autonomes destinés aux flux de production des entreprises ; ils ne sont pas vendus avec Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 216 Formulaires Conseils pour la conception de codes à barres L'utilisation des codes à barres et l'espace nécessaire peuvent avoir un impact sur leur conception et leur placement. A titre d'exemple, la taille du code à barres peut limiter la quantité de données susceptibles d'être codées. Pour optimiser les résultats, suivez ces recommandations. • Placez le code à barres sur la page en veillant à ce qu'il ne soit pas plié lorsque le formulaire est inséré dans une enveloppe. En outre, éloignez-le suffisamment des bords de la page pour qu'il ne soit pas coupé au cours de l'impression ou de l'envoi par télécopie. • Placez-le à un endroit facilement identifiable et numérisable. Avec un scanner à main, évitez d'utiliser des codes à barres d'une taille supérieure à dix cm (quatre pouces). Il est préférable de créer des codes à barres étroits en hauteur dans ce cas. Evitez également de compresser le contenu du code à barres si vous utilisez un scanner à main. • Assurez-vous que le code à barres est suffisant grand pour contenir les données à coder. Si tel n'est pas le cas, la zone du code à barres prend une couleur grise unie. Veillez à tester un formulaire rempli avant de le diffuser, cela en vue de vérifier la taille de la zone du code à barres. Création, test et modification des champs de codes à barres Il est possible d'améliorer les codes à barres dans les formulaires PDF en créant des scripts personnalisés. La rédaction de scripts nécessite des connaissances de base en matière de langage JavaScript et des compétences en code JavaScript spécifique à Acrobat. Pour plus d'informations, voir le manuel Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Pour plus de détails sur le code JavaScript de base, reportez-vous aux nombreuses ressources disponibles sur le sujet. Après l'insertion d’un code à barres de taille maximale, si vous modifiez la taille de cellule ou la condition de décodage, le code à barres risque de dépasser les limites de la page. Pour éviter ce problème, sélectionnez une taille de cellule et des conditions de décodage appropriées pour le code à barres. Voir aussi « Gestion des paramètres personnalisés de code à barres » à la page 230 « Onglet Valeur des propriétés de champ de formulaire » à la page 229 « Onglet Options des propriétés de champ de formulaire » à la page 222 Ajout d'un champ de code à barres 1 Ouvrez le formulaire dans Acrobat, affichez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Formulaires dans le panneau de gauche. Activez ensuite l'option Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. 3 Cliquez sur l'outil Code à barres de la barre d'outils Formulaires ou choisissez Formulaires > Outils de formulaire > Code à barres. 4 Tracez un rectangle pour définir la zone de code à barres, puis cliquez deux fois sur le champ du code à barres pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. 5 Dans le panneau Valeur, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Coder avec le format, puis sélectionnez un format (XML ou Délimité par tabulation). Cliquez sur le bouton Choisir et sélectionnez les champs à coder dans le champ de code à barres. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure les noms des champs dans les données de code à barres, désélectionnez l'option Inclure les noms de champ. • Sélectionnez Script de calcul personnalisé, cliquez sur Modifier, puis entrez le code JavaScript personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur de scripts JavaScript.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 217 Formulaires 6 Dans le panneau Options, effectuez toutes les opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une option de symbologie : PDF417, QR Code ou Data Matrix. • Sélectionnez Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres si vous souhaitez appliquer cette compression. Ne sélectionnez pas cette option si vous envisagez d'utiliser un scanner à main pour capturer les données renvoyées par les utilisateurs. • Dans la liste Condition de décodage, sélectionnez le type de matériel utilisé pour traiter les formulaires renvoyés : Scanner de code à barres à main, Serveur de télécopies, Scanner de document ou Personnalisée. • Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Personnalisée, puis entrez les valeurs Dimension X, Rapport Y/X et Niveau de correction de l'erreur. 7 Effectuez toutes les autres modifications nécessaires dans les panneaux Général et Actions. Fermez ensuite la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres. Le code JavaScript est généré automatiquement pour coder les champs sélectionnés au format XML ou Délimité par tabulation. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres se ferme et le code à barres pour lequel vous avez spécifié les valeurs s’affiche sur le formulaire. Remarque : Si vous ajoutez un nouveau champ à un formulaire après avoir créé le code à barres, il n'est pas automatiquement inclus dans les données des codes à barres existants. Toutefois, vous pouvez manuellement inclure les champs de données supplémentaires dans le code à barres Test d'un champ de code à barres 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Fermer la fenêtre de modification ou cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu de la barre d'outils Formulaires. 2 Remplissez le formulaire. Servez-vous des données d'exemple représentant la quantité maximale d'informations prévues dans chaque champ ou susceptibles d'être saisies par les utilisateurs. 3 Si le champ de code à barres est grisé, suivez la procédure de redimensionnement du champ ou la procédure d'ajustement des données. (Voir les tâches suivantes.) 4 Assurez-vous que la zone de champ de code à barres est suffisamment grande pour accueillir toutes les données nécessaires. Choisissez Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire pour supprimer les données d'exemple. 5 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer. Le formulaire à codes à barres est prêt à être diffusé. Inclusion de champs de données supplémentaires dans le code à barres 1 Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres. 3 Dans le panneau Valeur, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si l'option Coder avec le format est sélectionnée, cliquez sur Choisir et sélectionnez les champs de formulaire supplémentaires à coder. • Si l'option Script de calcul personnalisé est sélectionnée, cliquez sur Modifier et créez le code JavaScript pour inclure les champs supplémentaires. Une fois les nouveaux champs de données inclus dans le code à barres, vérifiez si la zone de code à barres est suffisamment grande en testant des exemples de données. Si la zone du code à barres est grisée, ajustez la taille du code à barres ou les propriétés du champ de texte de sorte que le contenu tienne dans la zone.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 218 Formulaires Ajustement des données du contenu à insérer dans un champ de code à barres 1 Pour modifier les propriétés d'un code à barres afin de pouvoir y insérer davantage de données, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le panneau Options, cliquez sur le bouton Personnalisées et saisissez des valeurs inférieures dans les champs Niveau de correction de l'erreur et Rapport Y/X. • Dans le panneau Options, activez Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres, sous réserve que vous utilisiez un logiciel décodeur Adobe (disponible séparément). • Dans l'onglet Valeur, sélectionnez Délimité par tabulation et non XML comme format de codage des données. Pour coder les informations, le format XML exige une zone de code à barres plus grande que le format Délimité par tabulation. • Dans le panneau Options, sélectionnez une autre option de symbologie. • Dans le panneau Valeur, cliquez sur le bouton Choisir et désélectionnez les champs qui n'ont pas besoin d'être codés. Par exemple, n'incluez pas les champs contenant des informations redondantes.. • Dans le panneau Valeur, entrez un script personnalisé qui convertit tout le texte utilisateur en caractères minuscules ou majuscules pendant le codage. Remarque : Les directives NACTP (National Association of Computerized Tax Processors), utilisées par l'administration fiscale américaine et les organismes d'imposition d'état, recommandent l'utilisation des majuscules pour les données de codes à barres 2D.. 2 Pour minimiser la zone de code à barres réservée aux données, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres, puis, dans le panneau Valeur, tapez un script personnalisé qui limite les données aux caractères alphanumériques et à une casse unique. (Un texte entièrement en minuscules ou en majuscules nécessite moins d'espace qu'un texte identique comportant les deux types de casse.) Envisagez la création de champs de code à barres supplémentaires et le mappage de données différentes à chacun d'entre eux. Définition du mode de navigation dans les champs de formulaire Si aucun ordre de tabulation particulier n'a été prévu pour un document PDF, l'ordre de tabulation par défaut dépend de la structure du document à moins que l’utilisateur ait désactivé l’option proposée sous Ordre de tabulation dans les préférences d’accessibilité. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre de tabulation après avoir créé les champs. Si vous êtes en mode d'édition du formulaire, vous pouvez organiser les tabulations par structure du document (paramètre par défaut), rangée ou colonne. Il est possible également de définir manuellement l'ordre de tabulation en faisant glisser les champs dans le panneau Champs. Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition, vous pouvez changer les propriétés des pages de façon à classer les tabulations par rangée ou colonne. Il est impossible, en revanche, de personnaliser l'ordre de tabulation de façon manuelle. Voir aussi « Création d'un formulaire » à la page 208 « Accessibilité des formulaires Adobe PDF » à la page 210 Définition de l'ordre de tabulation en mode de modification 1 Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition du formulaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 219 Formulaires 2 Dans le navigateur Champs à gauche, assurez-vous d'avoir choisi Trier par > Ordre de tabulation. 3 (Facultatif) Pour afficher l'ordre de tabulation des champs, choisissez Formulaires > Modifier des champs > Afficher les numéros de tabulation. 4 Sélectionnez une option d'ordre de tabulation : Par défaut L'ordre de tabulation repose sur la structure du document et suit celui défini par les balises. Par rangée L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, rangée par rangée. Par colonne L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de haut en bas et de gauche à droite, colonne par colonne. Manuel Cette option permet de faire glisser un champ et de le déposer à l'endroit voulu dans le navigateur Champs. Vous ne pouvez déplacer qu'un seul champ à la fois. Il n'est pas possible de transférer un champ vers une autre page, un bouton radio vers un autre groupe ou un champ vers un bouton radio. Définition de l'ordre de tabulation dans les propriétés de la page 1 Si vous êtes en mode d'édition, cliquez sur Fermer la fenêtre de modification pour quitter le mode. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour ouvrir le panneau Pages. 3 Sélectionnez une ou plusieurs icônes de page, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options du panneau Pages. 4 Sélectionnez une option d'ordre de tabulation : Utiliser l'ordre des rangées L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, rangée par rangée. Utiliser l'ordre des colonnes L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de haut en bas et de gauche à droite, colonne par colonne. Utiliser la structure du document Dans le cas d'un formulaire dont les champs sont balisés, l'ordre de tabulation suit celui définit par les balises. Non spécifié L'ordre de tabulation suit la séquence existante. Diffusion du formulaire Après avoir créé un formulaire, vous pouvez procéder de l'une des façons suivantes pour le diffuser : • Héberger votre formulaire sur Acrobat.com et envoyer un lien sécurisé vers le formulaire auquel toute personne ou seulement les destinataires peuvent accéder. • Envoyer le formulaire sous forme de pièce jointe via Acrobat ou votre application de messagerie. Il suffit ensuite de recueillir manuellement les réponses dans votre boîte de réception. Vous pouvez télécharger et organiser automatiquement les réponses via Acrobat.com. • Transmettre le formulaire par l'intermédiaire d'un dossier réseau ou d'un serveur Windows exécutant les services Microsoft SharePoint. Vous avez alors la possibilité de recueillir automatiquement les réponses sur le serveur interne. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Diffuser le formulaire. 2 Une série de messages peut s'afficher, en fonction des conditions détectées dans le formulaire par Acrobat. Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran et enregistrez le formulaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 220 Formulaires 3 Si vous envisagez d'utiliser votre propre emplacement sur le serveur, spécifiez un dossier réseau ou un serveur Windows exécutant l'espace de travail Microsoft SharePoint. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Configuration d'un serveur » à la page 166. 4 Sélectionnez l'option qui convient dans l'assistant de diffusion de formulaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Choix d'une option de diffusion » à la page 165. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant et respectez les instructions à l'écran pour diffuser le formulaire. 6 Si vous choisissez de recueillir les réponses dans votre boîte de réception de messagerie électronique, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez l'option Recueillir le nom et l'adresse électronique des destinataires pour assurer un suivi optimal. Le système invite les destinataires à indiquer leur nom et leur adresse électronique lorsqu'ils renvoient le formulaire. Cela garantit que le suivi des révisions vous indique les personnes qui ont répondu ou non et la date des réponses. • Désactivez l'option si vous souhaitez recevoir des réponses anonymes ou si ce niveau de suivi ne vous intéresse pas. Remarque : Si vous ne connaissez pas l'adresse électronique des destinataires, entrez la vôtre. Le système vous envoie un lien menant au formulaire, lien que vous pouvez transférer aux destinataires voulus. Une vidéo sur la création et la distribution de formulaires est disponible à l'adresse http://tv.adobe.com/#vi+f1495v1626. Comportement des champs de formulaire A propos des propriétés de champs de formulaire Le comportement d'un champ de formulaire est déterminé par les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés pour ce champ spécifique. Vous pouvez définir les propriétés qui s'appliquent au formatage, déterminent la relation entre les informations de différents champs de formulaire, imposent des restrictions sur ce que l'utilisateur peut saisir dans le champ de formulaire, déclenchent des scripts personnalisés, etc. L'éventail de propriétés applicables à un champ de formulaire Acrobat varie en fonction du type de champ choisi. Les propriétés relatives à chaque type de champ de formulaire sont sélectionnées sous une série d'onglets. Lorsque vous modifiez une propriété, elle est appliquée dès que vous en sélectionnez une autre ou que vous appuyez sur Entrée. Tous les types de champ de formulaire disposent des onglets Général et Actions. D'autres onglets s'affichent selon les types de champs de formulaire spécifiques. L'onglet Options s'affiche pour la plupart des types de champs mais les options disponibles varient pour chaque type. Deux éléments sont disponibles sur tous les panneaux. Si vous en sélectionnez un sur n'importe lequel des panneaux, l'option sera cochée et activée sur tous les panneaux. Ces options sont : Verrouillage Lorsqu'elle est sélectionnée, l'option permet d'empêcher toute modification aux propriétés du champ de formulaire. Fermer Ferme la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du champ de formulaire. Si vous modifiez les propriétés de plusieurs champs de formulaire, vous pouvez laisser ouverte la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Cliquez sur chaque champ pour en modifier les propriétés. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Verrouillage sur un panneau, toutes les options sont verrouillées pour ce champ, et pas seulement celles disponibles sur ce panneau.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 221 Formulaires Modification des propriétés de champs de formulaire Vous pouvez accéder aux propriétés de champ de formulaire d'Acrobat uniquement en mode d'édition (en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire). Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés de plusieurs champs de formulaire à la fois. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'une des manières suivantes : • Pour modifier un seul champ de formulaire, cliquez deux fois dessus, ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. • Pour modifier plusieurs champs de formulaire, sélectionnez les champs qui vous intéressent, cliquez sur l'un des champs sélectionnés avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Apportez les modifications nécessaires aux propriétés sous chaque onglet disponible. La modification prend effet dès que vous sélectionnez une autre propriété ou appuyez sur Entrée. 3 Cliquez sur Fermer pour fermer la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Si vous sélectionnez des champs dont les valeurs de propriétés divergent, certaines options de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés ne sont pas disponibles. Sinon, les modifications apportées aux options disponibles s'appliquent à tous les champs de formulaire sélectionnés. Pour éviter que le champ de formulaire soit accidentellement modifié, cochez la case Verrouillage située dans le coin inférieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés avant de la fermer. Pour déverrouiller le champ, cliquez à nouveau sur la case à cocher. Voir aussi « Définition des boutons d'action » à la page 231 Onglet Général des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Général s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire et propose les options suivantes : Nom Spécifie le nom unique du champ de formulaire sélectionné. Info-bulle Affiche le texte qui peut aider l'utilisateur incertain à remplir le champ de formulaire. Les info-bulles s'affichent quand le pointeur survole quelques instants le champ de formulaire. Champ de formulaire Spécifie l'affichage du champ de formulaire, à l'écran et à l'impression. Les options sont : Visible, Masqué, Visible à l'écran, invisible à l'impression et Invisible à l'écran, visible à l'impression. Orientation Permet de faire pivoter le champ de formulaire de 0, 90, 180 ou 270 degrés. Lecture seule Empêche l'utilisateur de modifier le contenu du champ de formulaire. Obligatoire Exige que l'utilisateur remplisse le champ de formulaire sélectionné. Si l'utilisateur tente d'envoyer le formulaire avant de remplir un champ obligatoire, un message d'erreur s'affiche et le champ de formulaire obligatoire vide est mis en surbrillance. Onglet Aspect des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les propriétés d'aspect déterminent l'apparence du champ de formulaire sur la page. L'onglet Aspect s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire à l'exception des codes à barres et propose les options suivantes : Couleur de la bordure Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour le cadre autour du champ. Pour ne pas insérer de cadre autour du champ, sélectionnez Aucune couleur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 222 Formulaires Epaisseur de trait Spécifie la largeur du cadre autour du champ de formulaire : Fin, Moyen ou Epais. Couleur de fond Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour l'arrièreplan du champ. Pour ne pas colorer le champ, sélectionnez Aucune couleur. Remarque : Si vous choisissez une couleur de fond autre qu'Aucune couleur, toutes les images sur la page PDF qui se trouvent derrière le champ de formulaire seront masquées. Style de trait Permet de modifier l'aspect du cadre. Choisissez Plein, Discontinu, Biseauté, Enchâssé ou Souligné. Corps Définit le corps du texte saisi par l'utilisateur ou de la marque de sélection pour les boutons radio et les cases à cocher. Vous pouvez choisir entre Auto, des valeurs prédéfinies et la saisie d'une valeur différente. Si vous sélectionnez Auto pour un champ de texte, les caractères saisis par l'utilisateur voient leur corps de police changer en fonction de la taille du champ. Couleur du texte Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour le texte ou la marque de sélection. Police Répertorie les polices disponibles sur votre ordinateur. Cette option n'est pas disponible pour les champs de formulaire qui n'affichent pas de texte. Remarque : L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche du panneau Internationales de la boîte de dialogue Préférences a une incidence sur le contenu du panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Lorsque cette préférence est activée, l'onglet Aspect propose des options pour la modification du style de chiffres et le sens du texte pour les champs de texte, les listes déroulantes et les zones de liste. Onglet Options des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les options disponibles sous cet onglet varient en fonction du type de champ de formulaire sélectionné. L'onglet Options s'affiche pour tous les types de champ de formulaire, à l'exception des signatures numériques. Code à barres L'onglet Options pour les propriétés de champ de code à barres propose les options suivantes : Symbologie Comprend les types PDF417, Code QR et Matrice de données. Remarque : Si votre entreprise utilise plusieurs méthodes de traitement des formulaires, sélectionnez la méthode qui prend en charge les images de code à barres de moindre qualité. Par exemple, si les formulaires sont renvoyés par télécopie ou courrier, choisissez Serveur de télécopies comme condition de décodage afin d'assurer un taux de lecture élevé pour tous les formulaires. Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres Spécifie les données à compresser avant le codage. Les données sont compressées à l’aide de la méthode de compression Flate. Les données compressées nécessitent en général moins d'espace de stockage dans le code à barres, augmentant ainsi la quantité de données de formulaire pouvant être stockée. Sélectionnez cette option si vous utilisez le décodeur de formulaires de code à barres d'Acrobat pour interpréter les données renvoyées. Ne cochez pas cette option si vous utilisez un scanner portable, car la plupart de ces scanners ne peuvent pas décoder de données compressées. Condition de décodage Les conditions de décodage prédéfinies représentent les points de départ conseillés que vous pouvez ajuster en cliquant sur le bouton Personnaliser. Personnalisé Ouvre une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner des paramètres de traitement personnalisés qui conviennent le mieux au matériel de numérisation et de télécopie à votre disposition. (Les options disponibles varient en fonction des types de code à barres.) • Dimension X Largeur de la cellule en millièmes de pouce (1 mil = 0,001 pouce ou 0,025 mm).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 223 Formulaires • Rapport Y/X Rapport hauteur/largeur de la cellule. Par exemple, pour une cellule de données qui est deux fois plus haute que large, entrez 2. (Disponible uniquement pour les codes à barres PDF417.) Remarque : Si vous projetez de décoder le code à barres à l'aide d'un scanner portable, évitez de créer des codes à barres dont la largeur est supérieure à quatre pouces (10,2 cm). Les codes à barres longs et étroits sont généralement plus indiqués pour les scanners à main. Les hauteur et largeur du code à barres ne présentent pas de problème si vous utilisez un décodeur de codes à barres Adobe (vendu séparément). • Niveau de correction de l'erreur Correspond au niveau de répétition des données qui est ajouté au code à barres pour prévenir toute erreur de décodage. Un niveau élevé admet davantage de redondance et un code à barres plus puissant qui entraînera de meilleurs résultats de décodage. Les niveaux plus élevés risquent toutefois de donner un code à barres plus volumineux et une capacité d’encodage réduite des données fournies par l’utilisateur ou de structure du formulaire. Un code à barres plus solide peut limiter les problèmes créés par des marques de crayons, une mauvaise qualité d’impression, une dégradation due à la transmission par télécopie ou des plis dans un document. Cette option est disponible pour les codes à barres PDF417 et QR. Gérer les paramètres de code à barres Permet d'enregistrer vos sélections de code à barres personnalisées dans un fichier. Vous pouvez exporter le fichier et le rendre accessible à d'autres auteurs de formulaire dans votre entreprise. Cases à cocher Style de case Spécifie la forme de la marque qui s'affiche dans la case à cocher lorsqu'elle est sélectionnée : Coche (par défaut), Rond, Croix, Losange, Carré ou Etoile. Cette propriété n'a pas d'incidence sur la forme de la case à cocher. Remarque : La taille de la marque dans la case à cocher dépend du corps de police spécifié dans l'onglet Aspect. Valeur d'exportation Spécifie une valeur pour représenter l'élément si les données sont exportées. Si vous ne saisissez pas de valeur, celle saisie pour Nom sous l'onglet Général est utilisée. Case cochée par défaut Affiche la case cochée sauf si l'utilisateur la désélectionne. Liste déroulante et Zone de liste Pour les listes déroulantes ou les zones de liste, utilisez l'onglet Options pour créer une liste d'éléments parmi lesquels l'utilisateur peut faire son choix. Bien que la plupart des propriétés sous cet onglet soient communes à ces deux types de champs de formulaire, certaines sont spécifiques à un type ou à l'autre. Elément Accepte le texte saisi pour les options qui doivent s'afficher dans le menu contextuel du champ. Ajouter Déplace l'entrée active dans l'élément vers la liste d'éléments. Valeur d'exportation L'emplacement de saisie d'une valeur pour représenter l'élément si les données sont exportées. Si vous ne saisissez pas de valeur, celle saisie pour Nom sous l'onglet Général est utilisée. Liste d'éléments Affiche les choix disponibles dans la liste. Remarque : L'élément affiché en surbrillance dans la zone Liste d'éléments constitue la valeur par défaut du champ de la liste déroulante ou de la zone de liste. Pour changer d'élément par défaut, mettez en surbrillance un autre élément de la liste. Boutons Monter et Descendre Changent l'ordre dans lequel les éléments sont répertoriés dans la liste déroulante. Ces boutons ne sont disponibles que si l'option Trier les éléments est activée. Supprimer Supprime l'élément sélectionné de la liste. Trier les éléments Tri les éléments répertoriés par ordre numérique et alphabétique. Le tri numérique intervient, s'il y a lieu, avant le tri alphabétique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 224 Formulaires Autoriser l’utilisateur à saisir un texte personnalisé (Listes déroulantes uniquement) Permet aux utilisateurs de saisir une autre valeur que les valeurs répertoriées. Vérifier l'orthographe (Listes déroulantes uniquement) Vérifie l'orthographe du texte saisi par l'utilisateur. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Autoriser l’utilisateur à saisir un texte personnalisé est activée. Sélection multiple (Zones de liste uniquement) Permet aux utilisateurs de choisir plus d'un élément dans la liste. Valider la valeur sélectionnée immédiatement Enregistre la valeur dès que l'utilisateur l'a sélectionnée. Si cette option est désactivée, la valeur est uniquement enregistrée lorsque l'utilisateur passe à un champ de formulaire différent (à l'aide du clavier ou de la souris). Pour les zones de liste uniquement, cette option n'est pas disponible si l'option Sélection multiple est sélectionnée. Boutons radio Créez un groupe de boutons radio pour demander à l'utilisateur de choisir une seule option parmi toutes celles proposées. Tous les boutons radio du groupe partagent le même nom, mais chaque bouton possède une valeur différente. Style de bouton Spécifie la forme de la marque qui s'affiche dans le bouton lorsqu'il est sélectionné : Coche, Rond (par défaut), Croix, Losange, Carré ou Etoile. Cette propriété n'a pas d'incidence sur la forme du bouton. Valeur du bouton Identifie le bouton radio et le différencie des autres boutons radio dotés de la même valeur Nom. Bouton activé par défaut Définit l'état de sélection du bouton lorsque l'utilisateur ouvre le formulaire pour la première fois. Les boutons aux noms et valeurs identiques sont sélectionnés simultanément. Permet la sélection de plusieurs boutons radio associés en un seul clic. Si, par exemple, l'utilisateur sélectionne un bouton radio portant le même nom de champ et la même valeur d'exportation qu'un autre, les deux boutons radio sont activés simultanément. Champs de texte Les champs de texte acceptent la saisie utilisateur, qui peut contenir des caractères alphabétiques, numériques ou les deux. Alignement Permet d'aligner le texte à gauche, à droite ou au centre d'un champ. Valeur par défaut Spécifie le texte qui s'affiche avant que l'utilisateur ne le remplace par un texte personnalisé. Saisissez la valeur par défaut dans cette option. Lignes multiples Autorise des entrées de plus d'une ligne dans le champ de texte. Faire défiler les longs textes Permet d'afficher le texte qui dépasse les limites du champ de texte. Autoriser le format RTF Permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer des informations de style au texte, notamment de le mettre en gras ou italique. Cette propriété est utile lorsque le formatage de certains champs de texte détermine la signification du texte, comme dans le cas d'un article. Limité à _ caractères Autorise des entrées contenant au maximum le nombre de caractères spécifié. Remarque : Si vous avez tapé un texte par défaut, il respecte cette limite. Mot de passe Affiche le texte saisi par l'utilisateur sous forme d'une série d'astérisques (*). Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Vérifier l'orthographe est désélectionnée. Champ utilisé pour la sélection de fichier Permet à l'utilisateur de saisir un chemin de fichier comme valeur du champ lorsqu'un fichier accompagne le formulaire. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Faire défiler les longs textes est la seule option sélectionnée sous l'onglet Options. Vérifier l'orthographe Vérifie l'orthographe du texte saisi par l'utilisateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 225 Formulaires Bande de _ caractères Répartit les caractères uniformément en occupant toute la largeur du champ. Si une couleur de bordure est spécifiée sous l'onglet Aspect, chaque caractère saisi dans le champ est séparé par des lignes de cette couleur. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsqu'aucune autre case n'est cochée. Champs de texte avec ou sans la propriété Bande A. Quatre champs de texte dotés d'une bordure de couleur et définis avec la propriétés Bande. B. Champ de texte sans la propriété Bande Onglet Actions des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les propriétés d'actions permettent de spécifier les actions que vous souhaitez associer au champ de formulaire comme, par exemple, atteindre une page spécifique ou lire un clip multimédia. L'onglet Actions s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire et propose les options suivantes : Sélectionner le déclencheur Spécifie l'action utilisateur à l'origine d'une action : Souris relâchée, Souris enfoncée, Souris entrée, Souris sortie, Champ activé ou Champ désactivé. Sélectionner l'action Spécifie l'événement qui se produit lorsque l'utilisateur déclenche l'action : Exécuter une commande de menu, Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia, Atteindre une vue de page, Importer les données d'un formulaire, Opération multimédia (Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures), Ouvrir un fichier, Ouvrir un lien Web, Lire un son, Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 5), Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 6 et versions ultérieures), Lire un article, Réinitialiser un formulaire, Lancer un script JavaScript, Définir la visibilité du calque, Afficher/Masquer un champ et Envoyer un formulaire. Ajouter Ouvre une fenêtre pour l'action sélectionnée. Actions Affiche la liste des déclencheurs et actions définis. Boutons Monter et Descendre Changent l'ordre dans lequel l'action sélectionnée est répertoriée sous le déclencheur. (Disponibles uniquement lorsque vous avez défini plusieurs actions pour le même déclencheur.) Modifier Ouvre une boîte de dialogue avec des options spécifiques pour l'action sélectionnée. Supprimer Supprime l'action ou la paire déclencheur-action sélectionnée. Onglet Calcul des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Calcul s'affiche dans les boîtes de dialogue Propriétés uniquement pour les champs de texte et les listes déroulantes. Ces options permettent d'effectuer des opérations mathématiques sur des entrées de champs de formulaire existantes, puis d'afficher les résultats. Valeur non calculée Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez que l'utilisateur saisissez une valeur. La valeur correspond à/au Sélectionnez cette option pour accéder à des options supplémentaires : • Menu déroulant Répertorie les fonctions mathématiques à appliquer aux champs sélectionnés. Choisissez « somme (+) » pour ajouter les valeurs saisies dans les champs sélectionnés, « produit (x) » pour les multiplier, « moyenne », « minimum » ou « maximum ». • Choisir Ouvre une boîte de dialogue contenant une liste de champs disponibles dans le formulaire. Vous pouvez les sélectionner pour les ajouter au calcul ou les désélectionner pour qu'ils ne soient pas pris en compte. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 226 Formulaires Notation simplifiée du champ Utilise un script JavaScript avec des noms de champ et de simples symboles arithmétiques. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire, modifier ou ajouter des scripts. Script de calcul personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour effectuer les calculs. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez rédiger et ajouter des scripts JavaScript. Définition de l'ordre de calcul entre les champs de formulaire Lorsque vous définissez plusieurs opérations mathématiques dans un formulaire, l'ordre dans lequel ces dernières sont effectuées correspond à l'ordre de définition des opérations. Dans certains cas, il se peut que vous deviez modifier l'ordre de calcul pour obtenir les résultats corrects. Si, par exemple, vous voulez utiliser le résultat obtenu par le calcul de deux champs de formulaire afin d'obtenir la valeur du troisième, vous devez d'abord calculer les deux premiers champs pour obtenir le résultat final correct. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Définir l'ordre de calcul. La boîte de dialogue Champs calculés affiche tous les champs calculables du formulaire ainsi que l'ordre dans lequel ces opérations seront exécutées. 2 Pour changer l'ordre de calcul, sélectionnez le champ dans la liste, puis cliquez sur le bouton Monter ou Descendre, selon les besoins. Acrobat effectue automatiquement tous les calculs associés lorsque vous créez et testez les champs de formulaire. Pour faciliter votre tâche, désactivez la fonction de calcul automatique dans les préférences de formulaires. Onglet Signature des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Signature est disponible uniquement dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature numérique. Les sélections que vous effectuez ici permettent de déterminer le comportement du formulaire lorsque l'utilisateur y appose une signature numérique. Rien ne se passe lorsque la signature est apposée Il s'agit de la valeur par défaut. Mention lecture seule pour Empêche d'apporter des modifications supplémentaires au formulaire signé, en fonction de la sélection dans le menu déroulant : • Tous les champs Empêche d'apporter des modifications à tous les champs. • Tous les champs, excepté Autorise les modifications uniquement pour les champs de formulaire sélectionnés en cliquant sur le bouton Choisir et en sélectionnant les cases à cocher pour les champs qui restent modifiables après signature. • Seulement les champs suivants Empêche d'apporter des modifications aux champs de formulaire sélectionnés uniquement. Le script est exécuté lorsque le champ est signé Permet d'activer un script JavaScript lorsque l'utilisateur appose une signature au formulaire. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier pour changer une action JavaScript ou en créer une. Voir aussi « Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires » à la page 210UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 227 Formulaires Onglet Format des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Format s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés des champs de formulaire de texte et de liste déroulante uniquement. Les options disponibles dépendent de votre sélection dans le menu déroulant Catégorie de format. Non Aucune option supplémentaire n'est disponible. La saisie dans un texte ou une liste déroulante avec cette propriété ne requiert aucun formatage spécifique. N° (numéro) Impose automatiquement les options de formatage sélectionnées aux entrées de données numériques. Positions décimales Définit le nombre de décimales. Type de séparateur Définit le placement des virgules et points. Symbole monétaire Définit le type de devise, par exemple Euro, Dollar ou Yen. Style des nombres négatifs Définit l'affichage des nombres négatifs. Vous pouvez choisir entre Afficher les parenthèses, Texte en rouge, aucune de ces options ou les deux. Pourcentage Impose automatiquement les options de formatage sélectionnées aux entrées de données numériques exprimées en pourcentage. Positions décimales Définit le nombre de décimales. Type de séparateur Définit le placement des virgules et points. Date La liste comprend des variations à un, deux ou quatre chiffres où j indique le jour, m le mois et a l'année. Durée La liste comprend des variations d'affichage où h représente l'heure sur un cadran de 12 heures, H l'heure sur un cadran de 24 heures, MM les minutes, ss les secondes et tt AM ou PM. Spéciale Code postal Pour un code postal à 5 chiffres. Code postal + 4 Pour un code postal à 9 chiffres. N° de téléphone Pour un numéro de téléphone à 10 chiffres. N° de sécurité sociale Pour un numéro d'assuré social à 9 chiffres. Des tirets sont automatiquement ajoutés après les troisième et cinquième chiffres. Masque arbitraire Définit la catégorie de format sur Personnalisée et rend accessible un autre champ de texte, dans lequel vous pouvez saisir un format personnalisé. Utilisez cette option afin de définir les types de caractères que l'utilisateur peut saisir aux différents emplacements ainsi que le mode d'affichage des données dans le champ. • A. Accepte uniquement les lettres (A à Z, a à z). • X Accepte les espaces et la plupart des caractères imprimables, notamment les caractères disponibles sur un clavier standard et les caractères ANSI compris dans les plages suivantes : 32 à 126 et 128 à 255.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 228 Formulaires • O La lettre O accepte les caractères alphanumériques (A à Z, a à z et 0 à 9). • 9 Accepte uniquement les caractères numériques (0 à 9). Par exemple, un paramètre de masque AAA--p#999 accepte la saisie BOE--p#767. Un paramètre de masque OOOOO@XXX accepte la saisie vad12@3Up. Exemple d'entrée de masque arbitraire Personnalisé Permet aux concepteurs de formulaire qui souhaitent écrire leurs propres scripts JavaScript d'accéder à d'autres options pour le formatage et l'utilisation des touches. Un script personnalisé permet, par exemple, de définir un nouveau format monétaire ou de restreindre l'entrée à des caractères de touches spécifiques. Script de format personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour pour le formatage. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire et ajouter des scripts. Script de touches personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour valider des touches d'accès rapide. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire et ajouter des scripts. Vous pouvez obtenir le manuel JavaScript for Acrobat API Reference sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center, à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 229 Formulaires Onglet Validation des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Validation s'affiche uniquement dans les boîtes de dialogue des propriétés de champ de texte et de liste déroulante. Les propriétés de validation limitent les entrées à des plages, valeurs ou caractères spécifiques, afin de garantir que les utilisateurs saisissent les données appropriées pour un champ de formulaire spécifié. Valeur du champ non validée Désactive la validation. Fourchette de valeurs pour le champ Définit une fourchette numérique pour les champs de formulaire à l'aide de valeurs que vous saisissez en chiffres ou pourcentage. Exécuter le script de validation personnalisé Permet de valider un script JavaScript que vous créez ou fournissez. Voir aussi « Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires » à la page 210 Onglet Valeur des propriétés de champ de formulaire Le panneau Valeur s'affiche uniquement pour les formulaires à codes à barres. Coder avec le format Permet d'activer les options suivantes : • XML Code les données dans le code à barres au format XFDF standard. Le script JavaScript est automatiquement généré. • Délimité par tabulation Code les champs dans le code à barres sous la forme de valeurs délimitées par tabulation. Le script JavaScript est automatiquement généré. Si le formulaire est configuré pour que les données sorties soient des fichiers XFDF ou XDP distincts, les données contenues dans chaque code à barres doivent suivre un format délimité par tabulation, les noms des champs étant indiqués sur la première ligne. Cette option permet également d’entrer davantage de données dans un code à barres, ou de copier les données dans une base de données ou des tableaux de feuille de calcul. • Choisir Ouvre une boîte de dialogue permettant de sélectionner les champs de données utilisateur qui seront codés dans le code à barres. • Inclure les noms de champ (Disponible uniquement lorsque l'option Délimité par tabulation est sélectionnée.) Code les noms de champ comme première ligne du contenu du code à barres. Les valeurs sont codées en dessous. Script de calcul personnalisé Affiche le script par défaut. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Editeur de scripts JavaScript, qui permet d'entrer des scripts de calcul personnalisés de code à barres. Référence au formulaire publié Affiche le chemin du formulaire PDF. Vous pouvez modifier ce chemin en tapant l'URL du formulaire publié. Cela vous permet ultérieurement de recréer une version numérique du formulaire rempli en fusionnant le modèle de formulaire avec une instance de données utilisateur. Il permet également de conserver la relation entre un modèle de formulaire spécifique et les fichiers de données de code à barres associés. Lorsque vous codez un code à barres avec l’option XML, la référence URL est codée dans le code à barres et s’affiche dans le formulaire sous le code à barres. Type de code à barres, accompagné de la référence URL en dessous http://www.adobe.com/formscatalog/thisform.pdfUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 230 Formulaires Gestion des paramètres personnalisés de code à barres Vous pouvez enregistrer, réutiliser et partager un jeu de paramètres personnalisés de code à barres afin de les appliquer lorsque vous créez des formulaires à codes à barres. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres personnalisés après les avoir définis. Vous commencez par ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du champ de code à barres. Pour ce faire, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres. Voir aussi « Création, test et modification des champs de codes à barres » à la page 216 « A propos des codes à barres » à la page 215 Création de jeux de paramètres de code à barres 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Sélectionnez le paramètre existant à utiliser comme point de départ d'un nouveau jeu, et cliquez sur Créer. 3 Saisissez un nom et une description dans les zones correspondantes. 4 Sélectionnez les valeurs des paramètres Symbologie, Dimension X, Rapport Y/X et Niveau de correction de l'erreur, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Le nouveau jeu de paramètres figure dans la liste de la boîte de dialogue Gérer les paramètres de code à barres ; tous les boutons situés dans la partie droite de cette boîte de dialogue deviennent disponibles. La nouvelle définition apparaît également dans le menu déroulant Condition de décodage du panneau Options de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres. Modification ou suppression d'un jeu de paramètres de code à barres personnalisé 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres personnalisés dans la liste. 3 Choisissez l'action appropriée : • Cliquez sur Modifier et apportez les changements voulus aux paramètres, puis cliquez sur Fermer. • Cliquez sur Supprimer. Confirmez la suppression dans le message qui s'affiche en cliquant sur OK. Exportation ou importation d'un jeu de paramètres personnalisés de code à barres 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Choisissez l'action appropriée : • Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres de code à barres dans la liste et cliquez sur Exporter. Sélectionnez un emplacement et un nom pour le fichier doté de l'extension .bps. • Cliquez sur Importer, puis accédez au fichier .BPS et sélectionnez-le.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 231 Formulaires Redéfinition des valeurs par défaut pour des propriétés de champs de formulaire Une fois que vous avez modifié les propriétés pour un type spécifique de champ de formulaire, définissez les propriétés comme valeurs par défaut pour ce type de champ. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer une case à cocher, modifier ses propriétés, puis les enregistrer comme valeurs par défaut. 1 Si cela est nécessaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire pour passer en mode d'édition du formulaire. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ de formulaire dont vous avez déjà modifier les propriétés, puis choisissez Utiliser ces propriétés par défaut. Remarque : La modification des propriétés par défaut n'entraîne pas la modification des paramètres pour les champs de formulaire existants de ce type. Les nouveaux paramètres par défaut s'appliquent uniquement aux nouveaux champs créés. Définition des boutons d'action A propos des boutons Les boutons constituent l’élément le plus fréquemment associé aux formulaires, mais ils peuvent également être insérés dans tout document. Ils permettent aussi bien d'ouvrir un fichier, de lire un fichier son ou un clip multimédia, que d'envoyer des données à un serveur Web, etc. Lorsque vous configurez l'exécution d'un type d'action, gardez à l'esprit que les boutons présentent des fonctionnalités que les liens et les signets ne possèdent pas : • Un bouton peut activer une seule action ou une série d'actions. • Un bouton peut changer d'aspect en réponse à des actions de souris. • Ils peuvent être copiés sur plusieurs pages en toute simplicité. • Les actions impliquant la souris peuvent déclencher différents types d’opérations. Par exemple, les actions Souris enfoncée (un clic), Souris relâchée (relâchement après un clic), Souris entrée (placement du pointeur sur un bouton) et Souris sortie (éloignement du bouton) peuvent toutes déclencher une action différente pour un même bouton. Les boutons constituent un moyen facile et intuitif de permettre à l'utilisateur de lancer une action dans un document PDF. Ils peuvent comprendre une combinaison d'intitulés et d'icônes visant à guider l'utilisateur dans une séquence d'actions ou d'événements et changent d'aspect lors du déplacement de la souris. Vous pouvez, par exemple, créer des boutons intitulés Lecture, Pause et Arrêt et dotés des icônes appropriées. Vous définissez ensuite des actions associées à ces boutons afin de lancer, d'interrompre et d'arrêter une séquence vidéo. Vous pouvez sélectionner la combinaison de comportements de la souris de votre choix pour le bouton et spécifier une série d'actions liées au comportement de la souris. Ajout d'un bouton à un formulaire PDF d'Acrobat 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ. Votre curseur prend la forme d'un viseur. 2 Sur la page, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter le bouton afin de créer un bouton aux dimensions par défaut. Pour créer un bouton de dimensions personnalisées, tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur le champ du bouton, puis spécifiez un nom, le texte de l'info-bulle et les autres propriétés générales.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 232 Formulaires 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Aspect, puis configurez les options servant à déterminer l'aspect du bouton sur la page. Veuillez noter que si vous utilisez le noir comme couleur d'arrière-plan, vous ne verrez pas les images placées sous le bouton. Les options de texte concernent l'intitulé défini dans le panneau Options et non le nom du bouton indiqué dans le panneau Général. Remarque : Si l'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est cochée dans le panneau Internationales de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, le panneau Aspect propose des options de changement du style des chiffres et de sens du texte pour les boutons. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sélectionnez les options déterminant l'aspect des libellés et des icônes sur le bouton. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. Configurez les options déterminant l'opération déclenchée par l'activation du bouton (le renvoi à une autre page ou la lecture d'une séquence vidéo, par exemple). 7 Cliquez sur Fermer. Dans le cas d’un jeu de boutons, il est possible d’accrocher l’objet à des lignes de la grille ou à des repères. Ajout d'un bouton d'envoi Lorsque vous diffusez un formulaire, Acrobat procède à une vérification automatique du formulaire. S'il ne détecte aucun bouton d’envoi, il ajoute un bouton Envoyer le formulaire à la barre de message du document. Il suffira aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur ce bouton pour vous renvoyer le formulaire rempli. Si vous n'avez pas l'intention d'utiliser le bouton Envoyer le formulaire créé par Acrobat, vous pouvez ajouter un bouton d'envoi personnalisé à votre formulaire. 1 Sélectionnez l'outil Bouton et créez un bouton. Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton et définissez les options appropriées dans les panneaux Général et Options. 2 Dans l'onglet Options, choisissez une option de libellé du bouton, une image d'icône ou les deux dans le menu Disposition. Effectuez l'une ou les deux opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte du libellé du bouton qui permettra d'envoyer le formulaire. • Cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, et entrez le chemin d'un fichier image ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le fichier image à utiliser. 3 Dans le panneau Actions, choisissez Envoyer un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l’action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Dans la zone Saisissez un URL pour ce lien, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour recueillir les données de formulaire sur un serveur, entrez son chemin. Par exemple, une adresse Internet telle que http://www. [domaine] / [dossier] / [sous-dossier] / ou un chemin sur un réseau local tel que \\ [serveur] \ [dossier] \ [sous-dossier] \. • Pour recueillir des données de formulaire en tant que pièces jointes à envoyer par messagerie, tapez mailto: suivi de l’adresse en question. Par exemple, mailto:personne@adobe.com. 5 Sélectionnez les valeurs des options de format d'exportation, de sélection de champ et de date, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si les données reviennent au format FDF ou XFDF, l’URL du serveur doit se terminer par le suffixe #FDF (http://serveur/cgi-bin/script#FDF, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 233 Formulaires Options d'envoi des sélections du formulaire Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer les sélections du formulaire : Inclure FDF Renvoie les entrées utilisateur sans le fichier PDF sous-jacent. Vous pouvez choisir d'inclure les données des champs, les commentaires et les modifications incrémentielles dans le document PDF. Remarque : L’option Modifications incrémentielles du PDF s’avère pratique pour recevoir une signature numérique qui sera facilement lue et reconstituée par un serveur. HTML Renvoie le formulaire dans le langage HTML (HyperText Markup Language). Inclure XFDF Renvoie les entrées utilisateur dans un fichier XML. Vous pouvez envoyer les données de champ seules ou inclure également des commentaires. PDF Renvoie l'intégralité du fichier PDF avec les entrées utilisateur. Sélection des champs Spécifie les champs à renvoyer. Pour ne recevoir que certains champs de données remplis, sélectionnez Seulement ceux-ci, cliquez sur Sélectionner les champs et sélectionnez les champs à inclure ou exclure dans la boîte de dialogue Sélection des champs. Par exemple, vous pouvez exclure certains champs de calcul ou en double qui apparaissent sur le formulaire à l'intention de l'utilisateur mais qui n'apportent pas d'informations supplémentaires. Options de date Normalise le format des dates entrées par l'utilisateur. Modification de l'aspect des boutons Un bouton peut s'accompagner d'un libellé, d'une icône ou des deux. L'aspect d'un bouton peut changer selon l'état de la souris (relâchée, enfoncée ou effleurée). Par exemple, vous pouvez créer un bouton intitulé « Accueil » tant que le pointeur de la souris n'est pas placé dessus et qui devient « Cliquez pour revenir à la page d'accueil » lorsque le pointeur s'immobilise dessus. Disposition du bouton A. Libellé uniquement B. Icône seule C. Icône en haut, libellé en bas D. Libellé en haut, icône en bas E. Icône à gauche, libellé à droite F. Libellé à gauche, icône à droite G. Libellé sur l'icône Vous pouvez créer des icônes de bouton à partir de tout format de fichier pris en charge par Acrobat, y compris les formats image PDF, JPEG et GIF. Quel que soit le format choisi, la page entière est utilisée. Autrement dit, si vous n'avez besoin que d'une partie de la page, vous devez recadrer l'image ou la page avant de vous en servir comme icône. Le format de page PDF minimal est de 2,54 x 2,54 cm (1 x 1 pouce). Pour afficher une icône de taille inférieure, mettezla à l'échelle de manière à la faire tenir dans la zone tracée à l'aide de l'outil Bouton. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton, cliquez sur le bouton Avancées dans le panneau Options afin de choisir la mise à l'échelle de l'icône par rapport à la taille du bouton. Modification d'un bouton ? Sélectionnez le champ Bouton, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier les propriétés du champ de bouton, cliquez deux fois sur le bouton en question. • Pour changer l'apparence des boutons, utilisez les options prévues à cet effet dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. A B C D E F G Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili KKahili ahiliUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 234 Formulaires • Pour aligner, centrer ou répartir le bouton par rapport à d'autres champs de formulaire, ou encore pour le redimensionner ou le dupliquer, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option dans le menu contextuel. Voir aussi « Mise à l'échelle et positionnement des boutons » à la page 234 Spécification des propriétés d'affichage d’un bouton dans Acrobat 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis cliquez sur l'outil Objet . 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un bouton existant, puis activez l'onglet Options dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Dans le menu Disposition, choisissez un type d'affichage pour l'intitulé du bouton. (Pour plus de détails sur la mise à l'échelle des icônes de bouton, voir la prochaine procédure.) 4 Dans le menu déroulant Comportement, choisissez un type d'affichage pour l'activation du bouton. 5 Pour définir le libellé ou l'icône figurant sur le bouton, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Si vous choisissez une option de libellé dans le menu déroulant Disposition, complétez ensuite la zone Libellé. • Si vous choisissez une option d'icône dans le menu déroulant Disposition, cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, puis sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier voulu. (Cliquez sur Effacer afin de supprimer l'icône sélectionnée.) Options de comportement d'un bouton Non Conserve l'aspect du bouton inchangé. Enfoncé Spécifie l'aspect du bouton pour les états de souris relâchée, enfoncée et survol. Sous Etat, sélectionnez une option, puis configurez les options Libellé et Icône : Relâché Détermine l’aspect du bouton lorsque l’utilisateur ne clique pas sur le bouton de la souris. Enfoncé Détermine l’aspect du bouton pendant que l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton de la souris et avant qu’il ne relâche la pression. Effleuré Détermine l'aspect du bouton pendant que l'utilisateur immobilise le pointeur sur le bouton. Contour Met en surbrillance le contour du bouton. Inversé Permute les tons foncés et les tons clairs du bouton. Mise à l'échelle et positionnement des boutons 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis cliquez sur l'outil Objet . 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un bouton existant afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, sélectionnez une option d'icône dans le menu Disposition, puis cliquez sur Avancées. Remarque : Le bouton Avancées n'est pas disponible si vous choisissez Libellé uniquement dans le menu Disposition. 4 Sélectionnez une option dans le menu Cas de mise à l’échelle : Toujours Met à l'échelle l'icône, quel que soit le rapport entre sa taille et celle du bouton.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 235 Formulaires Jamais Conserve la taille initiale de l’icône et recadre le contour du bouton si l’icône ne tient pas sur le bouton. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Jamais, les options de mise à l’échelle ne sont pas disponibles. Icône trop grande Met à l'échelle l'icône uniquement si sa taille est supérieure à celle du bouton. Icône trop petite Met à l'échelle l'icône uniquement si sa taille est inférieure à celle du bouton. 5 Dans le menu Echelle, spécifiez si l'icône doit être mise à l'échelle de manière proportionnelle. Si ce n'est pas le cas, elle risque d'être étirée. 6 Pour vous assurer que les bords supérieur et inférieur, ou gauche et droit de l'icône sont ajustés aux côtés du bouton, cochez la case Ajuster au contour. 7 Faites glisser les curseurs afin de définir l'emplacement de l'icône sur le bouton. Le placement de l'icône est calculé par rapport au pourcentage d'espace séparant l'icône des bords gauche et inférieur du bouton. Le paramètre défini par défaut (50, 50) place l'icône au centre du champ. Vous pouvez à tout moment rétablir l'emplacement par défaut de l'icône en cliquant sur Réinitialiser. 8 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Fermer. Masquage d'un bouton Acrobat sauf lorsqu'il est effleuré Dans certains cas, il peut être nécessaire de rendre la zone du bouton invisible lorsque le pointeur se trouve au-dessus. En définissant un bouton à affichage alternatif, vous pouvez créer des effets visuels intéressants au sein d'un document. Par exemple, sur une carte, quand vous placez le pointeur sur une ville, une carte détaillée peut s'afficher puis disparaître lorsque le pointeur s'éloigne de cet emplacement. Affichage et masquage d'icônes A. Pointeur hors de la zone du bouton B. Pointeur entrant dans la zone du bouton C. Pointeur quittant la zone du bouton 1 Activez l’outil Bouton , puis faites glisser le curseur sur la zone d’affichage du bouton. Si, par exemple, le fichier PDF contient une carte de France, faites glisser le curseur sur la zone qui affichera une carte détaillée de Paris. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis choisissez Icône seule dans le menu Disposition. 4 Dans le menu Comportement, choisissez Enfoncé, puis sélectionnez Effleuré dans la liste Etat. 5 Cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, puis sur Parcourir. Sélectionnez un type de fichier dans le menu Type de fichiers, recherchez l'emplacement du fichier image, puis cliquez deux fois sur le fichier. Dans notre exemple, nous sélectionnerions une carte de Paris. Cliquez sur OK pour valider l'image prévisualisée. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Aspect. Le cas échéant, désactivez les options Couleur de la bordure et Couleur de fond, puis cliquez sur Fermer. 7 Si vous êtes en mode d'édition, cliquez sur Aperçu. Le champ image défini s'affiche à l'écran lorsque le pointeur passe sur la zone du bouton et disparaît lorsqu'il la quitte. Si vous souhaitez que l'image soit plus grande que la zone d'effleurement ou qu'elle soit placée ailleurs que sur le bouton image qui apparaît, utilisez l'action Afficher/Masquer un champ. Commencez par associer une icône au bouton à masquer et à afficher. Créez ensuite un second bouton jouant le rôle de zone sensible lorsque la souris effleure le bouton. N'affectez pas d'icône d'aspect à ce bouton, mais utilisez l'onglet Actions afin d'afficher le premier bouton lorsque le pointeur entre dans la zone et de le masquer lorsque le pointeur quitte la zone. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 236 Formulaires Publication interactive de formulaires Web A propos des formulaires Web Il est pratique d’utiliser des formulaires PDF pour envoyer et recueillir des informations sur le Web. En effet, les formulaires proposent des actions attribuées à des boutons dont les fonctions sont similaires aux macros de programmation HTML. Vous devez disposer d'un serveur Web sur lequel est installée une application CGI (Common Gateway Interface) destinée à recueillir et à router les informations vers une base de données. Vous pouvez utiliser toute application CGI existante permettant d'extraire des données à partir de formulaires (au format HTML, FDF ou XML). Avant de préparer un formulaire pour le Web, assurez-vous que les noms des champs du formulaire correspondent à ceux définis dans l'application CGI. Important : Vous devez concevoir les scripts CGI en dehors d'Acrobat ; sachez qu'Adobe Acrobat ne permet pas leur création. Ajout de fonctionnalités d'envoi Faites appel à l'action Envoyer un formulaire pour transmettre les données d'un formulaire à une adresse électronique ou à un serveur Web à l'aide d'un URL. Le bouton Envoyer permet également de transmettre d’autres fichiers à un serveur ou à une base de données. Il est possible, par exemple, de joindre à un formulaire des images numérisées ou des fichiers. Les pièces jointes sont envoyées avec les autres données du formulaire lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton d'envoi. Si le formulaire PDF contient un bouton d'envoi par messagerie, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Diffuser le formulaire afin de faciliter la diffusion de ce formulaire. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Envoyer un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer les sélections du formulaire, saisissez un URL pour la zone Saisissez un URL pour ce lien : • Pour envoyer les données du formulaire à un serveur Web, entrez l'URL de destination. • Pour envoyer les données du formulaire à une adresse électronique, entrez mailto: suivi de l’adresse en question. Saisissez, par exemple, mailto:personne@adobe.com. 6 Apportez toute modification supplémentaire aux options disponibles, puis cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue. 7 Le cas échéant, modifiez les paramètres sous d'autres onglets dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Options d'envoi des sélections du formulaire Inclure FDF Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier FDF. Vous pouvez sélectionner une ou plusieurs des options disponibles : données saisies par l'utilisateur, commentaires et modifications incrémentielles apportées au fichier PDF. L’option Modifications incrémentielles du PDF s’avère pratique pour exporter une signature numérique qui sera facilement lue et reconstituée par un serveur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 237 Formulaires Remarque : Si le serveur renvoie à l'utilisateur des données au format FDF ou XFDF, l'URL du serveur doit se terminer par le suffixe #FDF (http://serveur/cgi-bin/script#FDF, par exemple). HTML Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier HTML. Inclure XFDF Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier XML. Vous pouvez choisir d'exporter les données des champs, les commentaires ou les deux. Document intégral (PDF) Exporte la totalité du fichier PDF constituant votre formulaire. Bien que cette option génère un fichier plus volumineux que l'option Inclure FDF, elle s'avère pratique pour la conservation des signatures numériques. Remarque : Si les personnes qui remplissent le formulaire PDF utilise Adobe Reader, vous devez choisir FDF ou XFDF comme option de format d'exportation. Tous les champs Exporte la totalité des champs de formulaire (même ceux qui ne comportent pas de valeurs). Seulement ceux-ci Exporte uniquement les champs de formulaire spécifiés en cliquant sur Sélectionner les champs et en indiquant les champs à inclure (y compris les éventuels champs vides). Convertir les dates au format standard Exporte toutes les dates de formulaire en un format unique, quel que soit leur format de saisie. Ajout d'un bouton de réinitialisation du formulaire Un bouton de réinitialisation du formulaire permet d'effacer toutes les données saisies par un utilisateur dans le formulaire. Cela revient à utiliser la fonction Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire, disponible lorsque vous créez et modifiez des formulaires Acrobat. Vous pouvez toutefois définir le bouton de réinitialisation afin qu'il n'efface que certains champs. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez l'outil Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Réinitialiser un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Réinitialiser un formulaire, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Cliquez sur des cases à cocher individuelles pour sélectionner ou désélectionner des champs à réinitialiser via le bouton.. • Choisissez Sélectionner tout. La liste du panneau Actions affiche maintenant une option Réinitialiser un formulaire sous l'action Souris relâchée. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ouvrir les autres onglets dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton et appliquer les autres types de propriétés au bouton. Voir aussi « Comportement des champs de formulaire » à la page 220UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 238 Formulaires Ajout d'un bouton d'importation des données Faites appel à l'action Importer les données d'un formulaire afin de permettre aux utilisateurs de remplir des champs de formulaire classiques (tels que le nom et l'adresse électronique) à partir de données importées d'un autre formulaire. Les utilisateurs peuvent également utiliser le bouton d'importation de données afin de remplir les champs de formulaire standard avec les informations figurant dans leur profil personnel. Seuls les champs de formulaire correspondants sont mis à jour. Les autres sont ignorés. Avant de créer une action Importer les données d'un formulaire, configurez un formulaire avec des champs contenant des informations de base à partir desquels des données seront exportées. Remarque : L'action Importer les données d'un formulaire recherche le fichier source des données à importer à des emplacements différents sous Windows et Mac OS. Sous Windows, cette action entraîne la recherche du fichier dans le dossier d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Acrobat Reader, le dossier en cours, le dossier système, le dossier Windows, le dossier Mes documents\Adobe\Acrobat ainsi que les dossiers indiqués dans l'instruction PATH. Sous Mac OS, cette recherche s'effectue dans le dossier d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Acrobat Reader, ainsi que dans le dossier Préférences au sein du Dossier Système. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Importer les données d'un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Localisez et sélectionnez un fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 6 Activez un autre onglet de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton pour définir d'autres propriétés du bouton ou cliquez sur Fermer. Voir aussi « Gestion des fichiers de données de formulaire » à la page 242 « Ajout d'un bouton à un formulaire PDF d'Acrobat » à la page 231 Valeurs d'exportation CGI Une valeur d'exportation correspond aux données envoyées à une application CGI afin d'identifier un champ de formulaire sélectionné par l'utilisateur. Vous devez définir une valeur d'exportation lorsque les deux conditions suivantes se vérifient : • Les données sont recueillies électroniquement dans une base de données au moyen de l'intranet d'une société ou du Web. • Les données ne correspondent pas à l'élément désigné par le champ de formulaire ou le champ est un bouton radio. Lorsque vous définissez les valeurs d'exportation, gardez à l'esprit les recommandations suivantes : • Utilisez la valeur d'exportation par défaut Oui afin d'indiquer qu'une case à cocher ou qu'un bouton radio a été activé(e). • Définissez une valeur d’exportation pour les listes déroulantes ou les zones de liste uniquement si vous voulez qu’elle soit différente de l’élément figurant dans la liste et qu’elle corresponde, par exemple, au nom d’un champ de formulaire dans une base de données. L'élément sélectionné dans la liste déroulante ou la zone de liste sert de valeur d'exportation tant qu'aucune autre valeur n'a été explicitement saisie dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 239 Formulaires • Les boutons radio associés en groupe doivent porter le même nom de champ, mais contenir des valeurs d'exportation différentes. Cela permet d'activer et de désactiver les boutons radio et de recueillir les valeurs appropriées dans la base de données. Utilisation des données QuickBooks dans les formulaires (Windows) Préparation d'un modèle QuickBooks à la diffusion Vous pouvez ajouter des données depuis votre fichier de compagnie Intuit QuickBooks vers un formulaire compatible avec QuickBooks, appelé modèle QuickBooks. Les destinataires peuvent remplir le formulaire en utilisant Acrobat 7.05 ou Reader 7.05 ou leurs versions ultérieures, même s'ils ne disposent pas de QuickBooks. Vous pouvez recueillir les données des formulaires envoyés et les importer dans votre fichier de compagnie QuickBooks. Adobe teste et prend en charge les fonctions de QuickBooks dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour les produits QuickBooks suivants : QuickBooks Pro 2007 et 2008 et QuickBooks Premier Edition 2007 et 2008. Remarque : Les modèles QuickBooks sont installés uniquement dans la version anglaise d'Acrobat. 1 Lancez QuickBooks et ouvrez votre fichier de compagnie. 2 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Formulaires > QuickBooks > Préparer un modèle QuickBooks à la diffusion. 3 Suivez les instructions de l'assistant pour créer et diffuser le formulaire. Remarque : Pour remplir un modèle QuickBooks sans le diffuser, ouvrez-le et choisissez Formulaires > QuickBooks > Remplir le modèle avec des données QuickBooks. Pour effacer des données QuickBooks d'un modèle rempli, choisissez Formulaires > QuickBooks > Effacer le modèle. Voir aussi « Diffusion du formulaire » à la page 219 « Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire » à la page 240 Synchronisation et gestion des données de réponse 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Formulaires > Suivi des formulaires. 2 Dans le panneau gauche du suivi, développez Formulaires. Sous Diffusé, sélectionnez le formulaire souhaité. 3 Dans le panneau de droite, cliquez sur Afficher les réponses. Acrobat ouvre la liste des réponses. 4 Le cas échéant, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des réponses : • Pour synchroniser l'ensemble des données dans votre fichier de compagnie QuickBooks, choisissez Formulaires > QuickBooks > Synchroniser vers QuickBooks. • Pour afficher des réponses spécifiques, cliquez sur Filtre et indiquez une colonne et les critères de filtrage. • Pour ajouter de nouvelles réponses envoyées, cliquez sur Mettre à jour. • Pour obtenir un aperçu d'un fichier de réponses, cliquez deux fois sur celui-ci. Pour revenir à la liste de réponses, cliquez sur le bouton Origine .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 240 Formulaires • Pour enregistrer des réponses au formulaire vers un fichier XML ou CSV (valeurs séparées par des virgules), sélectionnez les fichiers voulus et cliquez sur Exporter. • Pour archiver les données de réponses vers un nouveau fichier PDF, sélectionnez les fichiers souhaités et cliquez sur Archiver. • Pour ajouter des formulaires renvoyés à la liste de réponses, cliquez sur Ajouter. Personnalisation des modèles QuickBooks Vous pouvez personnaliser tous les modèles compatibles avec QuickBooks à l'aide de LiveCycle Designer ES. Vous pouvez par exemple modifier les couleurs, ajouter un logo d'entreprise et des coordonnées ou encore déplacer et modifier les propriétés des champs de formulaire. Vous pouvez utiliser la personnalisation de formulaires de la version JavaScript pour utilisateurs expérimentés. Vous avez par exemple la possibilité, en ce qui concerne les données, d'ajouter des champs, de modifier leur type et de choisir lesquelles afficher. Pour plus d'informations, voir Création de formulaires PDF pour Intuit QuickBooks à l'aide d'Acrobat 9 (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_lc_qbtempl_customize_fr. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > QuickBooks > Modifier un modèle QuickBooks. 2 Sélectionnez un modèle de formulaire QuickBooks. Par défaut, l'installation Acrobat ajoute les modèles QuickBooks dans \Program Files\Adobe\Acrobat 9.0\Acrobat\QuickBooksTemplates\ENU. 3 Designer ES vous permet de modifier le formulaire comme vous le souhaitez. Pour ouvrir l'aide de LiveCycle Designer ES, choisissez Aide > Aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Designer. Cliquez sur les liens suivants pour obtenir des informations sur les tâches de modification de base : Ajouter un logo d'entreprise Déplacer des champs Ajouter des bordures Modifier les tailles de police Changer la couleur du texte Concevoir des formulaires Voir aussi « A propos de LiveCycle Designer ES » à la page 205 Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire Lorsque vous diffusez un formulaire, Acrobat crée automatiquement un porte-documents PDF afin de recueillir les données envoyées par les utilisateurs. Par défaut, ce fichier est enregistré dans le même dossier que le formulaire d'origine et est nommé de la façon suivante : nom du fichier _responses. Vous pouvez vous servir de ce fichier pour compiler les formulaires renvoyés. Collecte des données utilisateur 1 Lorsqu'un utilisateur vous renvoie un formulaire, ouvrez le formulaire en question.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 241 Formulaires 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter le formulaire rempli à un fichier réponse, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Ajouter à un fichier réponse existant Permet de compiler les données du fichier réponse créé dans l'assistant de diffusion de formulaires lors de l'envoi du formulaire. (Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Parcourir et accédez au fichier réponse.) Créer un fichier réponse Permet de créer un fichier réponse qui porte le nom saisi et se trouve à l'emplacement choisi. Le fichier réponse s'ouvre dès que vous cliquez sur OK. Chaque formulaire renvoyé ajouté au fichier réponse s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans un porte-documents PDF. Compilation des données de formulaire 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Formulaires > Compiler les formulaires renvoyés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Compiler les données, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour sélectionner un fichier réponse PDF : • Cliquez sur Parcourir, accédez au fichier réponse, puis sélectionnez-le. • Saisissez le chemin d'accès au fichier réponse. 3 Cliquez sur Ajouter un fichier, puis accédez au formulaire renvoyé. 4 Recommencez l'étape précédente aussi souvent que nécessaire pour ajouter d'autres formulaires renvoyés. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, les données des formulaires sélectionnées sont ajoutées au fichier réponse. Chaque formulaire renvoyé s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans un porte-documents PDF. Ajout des données utilisateur à un fichier réponse existant 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le fichier réponse. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation de gauche, cliquez sur Ajouter. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter les formulaires renvoyés, cliquez sur Ajouter un fichier. Accédez aux formulaires renvoyés et sélectionnez-les, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 4 Recommencez l'étape précédente pour ajouter tout autre formulaire renvoyé dans d'autres dossiers. Cliquez ensuite sur OK. Lorsque vous avez terminé, chaque formulaire PDF ajouté s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans le portedocuments PDF. Exportation des données utilisateur à partir d'un fichier réponse Procédez de cette façon pour enregistrer toutes les entrées du fichier réponse d'un porte-documents PDF dans une feuille de calcul ou un fichier XML. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le fichier de réponse et sélectionnez les données à exporter. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation de gauche, cliquez sur Exporter. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner le dossier d'enregistrement du fichier, spécifiez les nom, emplacement et format de fichier (CSV ou XML) pour les données de formulaire, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 242 Formulaires Gestion des fichiers de données de formulaire Vous pouvez convertir les réponses sur un formulaire PDF vers d'autres formats de fichier (et vice-versa). Ces formats permettent de conserver toutes les données et sont nettement moins volumineux que le format PDF. Importation de données de formulaire Il peut arriver que certaines personnes renvoient des formulaires remplis sous la forme de fichiers données uniquement, plutôt que de fichiers PDF complets. Ces fichiers ne sont pas au format PDF mais dans d'autres formats, notamment FDF ou XML. Vous pouvez afficher les données renvoyées par une personne dans le contexte du document PDF en ouvrant le fichier d'origine et en important les informations du fichier de données. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le formulaire PDF dans lequel vous souhaitez importer les données. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire. Remarque : Lorsque vous importez les données à partir d'un autre fichier dans un formulaire PDF, les données importées remplace toutes les informations qui s'affichaient préalablement dans les champs de formulaire individuels. Toutefois, si le fichier de données importé contient un ou plusieurs champs non remplis, l'importation ne permettra pas d'effacer les données d'origine. 3 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Importer des données. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de sélection du fichier contenant les données de formulaire, choisissez un format dans le menu Type de fichier correspondant au fichier de données à importer. Localisez et sélectionnez ce fichier, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Remarque : Certains formats sont disponibles uniquement pour des types spécifiques de formulaires PDF, selon l'application utilisée pour créer le formulaire, par exemple Acrobat ou Designer ES. Les données importées d'un fichier texte (.txt) doivent être placées dans des rangées délimitées par tabulation afin de créer des colonnes. Exportation de fichier de données Vous pouvez enregistrer les informations dans un formulaire PDF rempli sous la forme d'un fichier de données dans un autre format de fichier. Vous pouvez par la suite réutiliser les données pour remplir à nouveau le formulaire ou un autre formulaire doté des mêmes champs et des mêmes noms de champs. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le formulaire rempli. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Exporter les données. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données du formulaire, sélectionnez le formulaire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer les données (FDF, XFDF, XML ou TXT). Sélectionnez ensuite un emplacement, saisissez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : Certains formats sont disponibles uniquement pour des types spécifiques de formulaires PDF, selon la méthode de création du formulaire. Fusion des fichiers de données exportés vers une feuille de calcul Si vous voulez compiler les données de formulaires qui ne se trouvent pas encore dans un jeu de données, procédez comme suit : 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Fusionner les fichiers de données dans une feuille de calcul. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données provenant de plusieurs formulaires, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 243 Formulaires 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue de sélection du fichier contenant les données de formulaire, choisissez un format dans le menu Type de fichier (Acrobat Form Data Format ou Tous les fichiers). Accédez ensuite aux formulaires à fusionner dans la feuille de calcul, sélectionnez-les, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 4 Le cas échéant, recommencez l'opération pour ajouter des fichiers de données de formulaire placés ailleurs. 5 Cliquez sur Exporter. Sélectionnez ensuite un dossier et saisissez le nom du fichier pour la feuille de calcul, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Progression de l'exportation, cliquez sur Afficher le fichier maintenant pour ouvrir le fichier de feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur Fermer la boîte de dialogue pour revenir à Acrobat. Remarque : Lorsque les formulaires renvoyés se trouvent dans un fichier réponse, la méthode la plus efficace pour exporter les informations vers une feuille de calcul est d'utiliser le bouton Exporter les données dans le panneau de navigation de gauche pour le fichier réponse du porte-documents PDF. A propos du suivi des formulaires Utilisez la fonction de suivi pour gérer les formulaires que vous avez diffusés ou reçus. Le dispositif de suivi permet d'afficher et de modifier l'emplacement du fichier réponse, d'identifier les destinataires ayant répondu, d'ajouter d'autres destinataires, d'envoyer un message à tous les destinataires et d'examiner les réponses à un formulaire. Suivi des formulaires 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Suivi des formulaires. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation gauche, développez l'élément Formulaires. 3 Sélectionnez un formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher toutes les réponses au formulaire, cliquez sur Afficher les réponses. • Pour modifier l'emplacement d'un fichier réponse, cliquez sur Modifier l'emplacement du fichier dans la zone Emplacement du fichier réponse. • Pour afficher le formulaire d'origine, cliquez sur Ouvrir le formulaire d'origine. • Pour envoyer le formulaire à d'autres destinataires, cliquez sur Ajouter des destinataires. Une vidéo sur l'utilisation du suivi des formulaires pour le recueil et la gestion des réponses est disponible à l'adresse http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker. Voir aussi « Présentation du dispositif de suivi » à la page 173 Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF Remplissage et effacement des données d'un formulaire Si un formulaire PDF contient des champs de formulaire interactifs, vous pouvez remplir le formulaire avec l'un des outils de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom : l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . Lorsque vous placez le pointeur sur un champ de formulaire interactif, l'icône du pointeur change comme suit : • L'icône de doigt qui pointe ou l'icône de la main qui pointe avec le doigt dotée d'un signe plus . S'affiche lorsque le pointeur se trouve au-dessus d'un bouton, un bouton radio, une case à cocher ou un élément de liste. • L'outil Flèche . S'affiche lorsque vous sélectionnez un élément dans une liste d'options.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 244 Formulaires • L'icône de pointeur en I . S'affiche lorsque vous saisissez du texte dans le champ de formulaire. Si les champs de formulaire ne sont pas interactifs , l'icône du pointeur standard ne change pas. Les formulaires PDF non interactifs peuvent être imprimés et remplis à la main. Vous pouvez également choisir Outils > Machine à écrire et utilisez cet outil pour saisir des informations dans les champs de formulaire vierges, puis imprimez une copie du formulaire rempli. Dans Reader, l'outil Machine à écrire est uniquement disponible si l'auteur de document l'a activé pour les utilisateurs de Reader. Remarque : Certains champs de texte sont dynamiques. Cela signifie que leur taille s'adapte automatiquement à la quantité de données saisie et qu'ils peuvent s'étendre sur plusieurs pages. Voir aussi « Préférences de formulaires » à la page 205 Remplissage d'un formulaire interactif 1 Le cas échéant, choisissez l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . 2 (Facultatif) Pour faciliter l'identification des champs de formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance de la barre de message du document. Les champs de formulaire s'affichent avec un arrière-plan coloré (la couleur par défaut est bleu clair). L'arrière-plan des champs de formulaire obligatoires s'affichent dans une autre couleur (rouge par défaut). 3 Cliquez sur le premier champ de formulaire à remplir afin de sélectionner cette option ou de placer le pointeur en I dans le champ pour la saisie. 4 Une fois le texte saisi ou la sélection effectuée, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Appuyez sur Tab ou Maj+Tab pour valider les modifications apportées au champ et passer au champ suivant ou précédent. • Appuyez sur la touche fléchée Haut ou Gauche pour sélectionner le bouton radio précédent dans un groupe de boutons radios, ou appuyez sur la touche fléchée Bas ou Droite pour sélectionner le bouton radio suivant. • Appuyez sur Echap pour rejeter la modification du champ de formulaire et désactiver le champ de formulaire actif. Si vous visualisez le formulaire en mode plein écran, une seconde pression sur la touche Echap désactive ce mode d'affichage. Remarque : Si le champ de formulaire actif est un champ de texte à une seule ligne, appuyez sur Entrée pour valider la saisie et désélectionner le champ. S'il s'agit d'une case à cocher, appuyez sur Entrée ou sur Retour afin de cocher ou de désactiver la case. Dans un champ à lignes multiples, la touche Entrée ou Retour permet de créer un saut de paragraphe. Dans tous les cas, vous pouvez appuyer sur Entrée pour valider la modification et désélectionner le champ de formulaire actif. 5 Une fois les champs de formulaire remplis, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton d'envoi du formulaire. Vous envoyez ainsi les données du formulaire à une base de données via le Web ou l'intranet de votre société. • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis renommez le fichier afin d'enregistrer le formulaire avec les données saisies. • Dans Reader, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer une copie, puis indiquez l'emplacement de la copie. Remarque : Si l'auteur du formulaire a octroyé des droits supplémentaires aux utilisateurs de Reader, la copie enregistrée comprend les entrées que vous avez effectuées. Dans le cas contraire, la copie enregistrée est vide. • Exportez les données du formulaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 245 Formulaires • Imprimez le formulaire. Effacement des données d'un formulaire dans un navigateur ? Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Le cas échéant, cliquez sur le bouton Réinitialiser le formulaire. Cette action est irréversible. • Quittez le navigateur Web et recommencez l'opération. Remarque : Vous risquez de ne pas effacer entièrement le contenu d'un formulaire en cliquant sur le bouton Recharger, Actualiser, Précédent ou Reculer d'un navigateur Web ou en activant un lien pointant vers une autre page. Effacement des entrées de formulaire non enregistrées ? Choisissez Fichier > Rétablir. Remplissage des formulaires – Conseils de dépannage Si vous rencontrez des problèmes lors du remplissage ou de l'envoi de formulaires, vérifiez les éléments suivants. Vérifications rapides à effectuer en premier lieu • Vérifiez que les paramètres de protection autorisent le remplissage des formulaires. (Voir Fichier > Propriétés > Protection.) • Vérifiez que le fichier PDF comprend des champs de formulaire interactifs ou remplissables. Il arrive que les auteurs de formulaires omettent de convertir les fichiers PDF en formulaires interactifs ou qu'ils conçoivent intentionnellement des formulaires qui ne peuvent être remplis qu'à la main. Si vous ne pouvez effectuer aucune saisie dans les champs de formulaire, il est probable que ceux-ci ne soient pas interactifs. • Vérifiez l'existence de restrictions et de fonctionnalités supplémentaires dans la barre de message du document (de couleur violette) située juste en dessous de la zone des outils. Autres conseils relatifs aux formulaires pour les utilisateurs d'Acrobat • Si le formulaire ne contient aucun champ interactif, ouvrez-le dans Acrobat 9 (toute version) et choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs. Vérifiez si le message suivant s'affiche : "Ce document PDF ne contient pas de champs de formulaire pour l'instant. Voulez-vous qu'Acrobat les détecte ?" Vous pouvez cliquer sur Oui pour lancer l'outil de reconnaissance des champs de formulaire ou utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire pour créer des champs. • Si le message "Cette opération n'est pas autorisée" apparaît lorsque les utilisateurs de Reader ouvrent ou envoient le formulaire, vérifiez s'il contient des polices non incorporées ou des objets masqués. Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés > Police pour vérifier la présence de polices non incorporées. Choisissez Document > Examiner le document pour détecter et supprimer le contenu indésirable. Pour plus d'informations, voir http://www.acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/viewtopic.php?pid=35535#p35535. • Si vous avez vérifié tous ces éléments sans résoudre le problème de remplissage ou d'envoi du formulaire, postez une question sur le forum Acrobat à l'adresse : http://www.adobeforums.com/cgi-bin/webx/.3bbeda8b/. Autres conseils relatifs aux formulaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader • Si le formulaire ne contient aucun champ interactif, vous pouvez demander à l'auteur du document d'y insérer des champs de formulaire. Vous pouvez également télécharger gratuitement la version d'essai d'Acrobat 9, valable 30 jours (Windows uniquement). Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire ou la reconnaissance des champs de formulaire pour créer de tel champ.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 246 Formulaires • Si l'auteur du formulaire a activé d'autres fonctionnalités, le panneau Extensions de document (Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Extensions de document) est disponible. Ce panneau indique toutes les opérations possibles avec le formulaire. Par exemple, il peut s'avérer possible d'enregistrer et d'imprimer les données, d'ajouter des commentaires et d'apposer une signature numérique au document. D'autres fonctions, telles que la modification du contenu du document ou l'insertion et la suppression de pages, sont restreintes. • Si vous avez vérifié tous ces éléments sans résoudre le problème de remplissage ou d'envoi du formulaire, postez une question sur le forum Reader à l'adresse : http://www.adobeforums.com/cgi-bin/webx/.3bbeda8a/. Remplissage automatique d'un formulaire La fonction de remplissage automatique permet de stocker les entrées saisies dans des champs de formulaire PDF, puis de proposer ou de saisir automatiquement des réponses en fonction de ce que vous avez saisi dans d'autres champs. Les suggestions s'affichent dans un menu contextuel, à partir duquel vous pouvez effectuer votre sélection. Par défaut, la fonction de remplissage automatique est désactivée. Le cas échéant, activez-la à partir des préférences de formulaires. Si vous souhaitez supprimer un entrée de la mémoire de remplissage automatique (par exemple en entrée contenant une erreur de frappe), vous pouvez modifier la liste dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Activation de l'option de remplissage automatique 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez Formulaires dans la liste de gauche. 3 Sous Remplissage automatique, choisissez Standard ou Avancé dans le menu. 4 Cochez la case Mémoriser les données numériques si vous souhaitez que la mémoire de remplissage automatique stocke les valeurs saisies dans les formulaires. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une option dans le menu Remplissage automatique, une description de son impact sur le comportement de la fonction s'affiche dans la zone de texte placée dessous. Suppression d'une entrée dans la mémoire de remplissage automatique 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez Formulaires dans la liste de gauche. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier la liste. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Remplir automatiquement la liste, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, puis cliquez sur Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation : • Pour supprimer toutes les entrées, cliquez sur Supprimer tout. • Pour ne supprimer que certaines entrées, sélectionnez-les et cliquez sur Supprimer. (Pour sélectionner plusieurs entrées contiguës, appuyez sur Maj et cliquez sur les entrées. Pour sélectionner plusieurs entrées non adjacentes, cliquez dessus en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée.)247 Chapitre 8 : Protection Vous pouvez utiliser des mots de passe visant à restreindre l'ouverture, l'impression et la modification de documents PDF. Les certificats permettent le chiffrement de documents PDF afin qu'ils ne puissent être ouverts que par les utilisateurs autorisés. Si vous souhaitez enregistrer les options de protection pour une utilisation ultérieure, créez une stratégie de protection qui enregistre les options de protection. Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé Avertissements de protection Acrobat® et Reader ® affichent des avertissements de sécurité lorsqu'une action liée aux fichiers PDF représente un danger éventuel pour vos données et votre ordinateur. Les avertissements de sécurité sont affichés dans les cas suivants : Remarque : Si le fichier PDF est certifié et que le certificat est authentifié pour des exploitations de système privilégiées (mise en réseau, impression ou accès aux fichiers), les avertissements de sécurité ne seront pas affichés. Mise à jour des paramètres de protection Adobe télécharge régulièrement des certificats de protection pour des sources authentifiées. Ces téléchargements sont importants car ils servent à garantir que les fichiers PDF signés numériquement et provenant de sources authentifiées conservent leur statut fiable. Avant d'accepter une mise à jour provenant d'une source inconnue, assurez-vous que cette source provienne d'une adresse Web que vous considérez comme fiable. Des mises à jour effectuées depuis des sites Web non-authentifiés peuvent créer des dégâts sur votre ordinateur. Connexion à un site Web inconnu ou non-authentifié Cet avertissement permet d'empêcher les fichiers PDF de se connecter à des sites Internet malveillants. L'avertissement s'affiche lorsqu'un fichier PDF tente de se connecter à un site dans les cas suivants : • le site ne se trouve pas dans la liste de vos sites authentifiés qui se trouve dans le gestionnaire des approbations. • Le fichier PDF ou le site Web n'est pas répertorié en tant qu'emplacement privilégié dans les préférences de protection (renforcée). Avant d'autoriser la connexion, vérifiez attentivement l'URL afin de vous assurer qu'il s'agit bien d'un lien approprié. Afin de comprendre pour quelle raison le fichier PDF tente de se connecter au réseau Internet, veuillez contacter l'administrateur système ou l'auteur du fichier PDF. Impression silencieuse L'impression silencieuse se produit sans confirmation nécessaire de votre part. Ce genre d'impression représente un risque de protection car un fichier malveillant peut, à votre insu, imprimer silencieusement un document à plusieurs reprises, gaspillant ainsi les ressources de l'imprimante. En maintenant l'imprimante active, l'impression silencieuse peut également bloquer l'impression d'autres documents. Elle n'est donc permise que dans les cas suivants : • Le site qui tente de lancer une impression se trouve dans la liste des sites authentifiés du gestionnaire des approbations. • Le fichier PDF actif est répertorié en tant qu'emplacement privilégié dans les préférences de protection (renforcée).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 248 Protection Contactez votre administrateur système afin d'établir quand vous avez l'autorisation d'utiliser l'impression silencieuse. Avertissements de protection renforcée Une fois la protection renforcée activée, Acrobat et Reader vous avertissent lorsqu'un document tente l'une des actions suivantes : Télécharger des données d'un site non authentifié Cet avertissement contribue à empêcher les documents malveillants d'obtenir des données à partir de sites Internet. Cette action est uniquement autorisée pour les documents situés dans des emplacements privilégiés dans la protection renforcée. Si le document vous semble fiable, vous pouvez l'ajouter à vos emplacements privilégiés en ouvrant la boîte de dialogue des préférences et en sélectionnant, à gauche, Protection (renforcée). Insertion des données dans des formulaires Une fois que la protection renforcée est activée, Acrobat et Reader vous avertissent lorsqu'une une source non authentifiée tente d'ajouter des données à un fichier PDF. Par exemple, un fichier FDF peut tenter d'ajouter des données dans un formulaire PDF. Votre entreprise peut utiliser cet objet pour rationaliser les flux de production. Cependant, il peut également être utilisé pour ajouter des données malveillantes dans un fichier PDF. Si vous approuvez le fichier source, ajoutez-le à vos emplacements privilégiés dans Protection renforcée. Cette action autorise l'ajout des données dan un fichier au format PDF ou FDF. Chargement ou exécution d'un script Acrobat et Reader empêchent le chargement ou l'exécution des scripts dans un fichier PDF lorsque les ces derniers proviennent d'une source externe. Par exemple, un fichier FDF peut tenter de charger un script Java script dans un formulaire PDF. Cet objet peut servir à ajouter un script malveillant dans un fichier PDF. Si vous approuvez le fichier source, ajoutez-le dans les emplacements privilégiés de Protection renforcée, afin d'autoriser l'exécution des scripts dans le fichier PDF. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Protection (renforcée) dans le panneau gauche. Voir aussi « A propos de la protection renforcée » à la page 251 « Activez la protection renforcée et définissez des emplacements privilégiés. » à la page 251 Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé Les documents peuvent être sécurisés de plusieurs façons. Pour visualiser les paramètres de protection d'un document, ouvrez l'onglet Protection de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ouvrir un document PDF ou à utiliser certaines fonctions, contactez l’auteur du document. Protection par mot de passe Un fichier PDF protégé par un mot de passe requiert un mot de passe, soit pour ouvrir le fichier, soit pour modifier ou supprimer des opérations restreintes. Lorsqu'un document est doté de fonctions sous restriction, les options de menu et outils associés à ces fonctions sont grisés. Restriction Si un document est chiffré, qu'il dispose de restrictions ou d'un statut spécifique, l'icône Paramètres de protection apparaît à gauche du document. Cliquez sur l'icône pour afficher le panneau Paramètres de protection et vérifier quelles fonctions sont restreintes. Signature numérique Lorsqu'un document est signé numériquement, le statut de la signature numérique apparaît dans la barre de message du document située au-dessus du document. Une signature numérique garantit au destinataire que le contenu du document est valide. certifiés Par la certification d'un document, les destinataires sont assurés que le document est authentique. Les signatures de certification comprennent également des informations autorisant ou interdisant des actions spécifiques, telles que le remplissage de formulaires et la modification du document. Un document doté d'un certificat affiche une UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 249 Protection icône de ruban bleu . Lorsque vous envoyez un formulaire certifié, vous avez la garantie que ce dernier sera renvoyé à l'auteur qui convient. Voir aussi « Signatures numériques » à la page 284 « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 254 « Protection par certificat » à la page 257 Apposition d'une signature sur un document Lorsqu'un document qui vous est envoyé nécessite votre signature, vous pouvez le signer à l'aide d' une identification numérique existante. Ou créer une identification numérique pour ce document. 1 Ouvrez le formulaire, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si le document contient un champ de signature, cliquez sur le champ et passez à l'étape 4. • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils , appuyez ensuite sur Signer le document. 2 Lisez les informations reprises dans la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Faites glisser la souris pour créer un espace suffisant à la signature. 4 Pour créer une ID numérique pour ce document, sélectionnez Créer une ID à partir du menu Signature. Pour obtenir de l'aide, consultez les informations relatives à la création d'une ID. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, signez de la manière suivante : Mot de passe Saisissez le mot de passe associé à l'ID numérique. Aspect Choisissez les informations à modifier et à afficher dans la signature (ex : la date ou l'heure). Verrouiller le document après la signature Si cette option est disponible, choisissez-la uniquement si vous êtes le dernier destinataire à signer le document. La sélection de cette option verrouille tous les champs y compris le champ de signature. Voir aussi « Création d'une identification numérique » à la page 274 Certification d’un document En signant un document, vous permettez aux destinataires de vérifier que le document signé a bien été envoyé par vous. Votre ID numérique, qui établit votre identité, fait partie de la signature. Vous pouvez créer votre propre ID numérique ( nommée ID autosignée) ou demander un certificat à une autorité de certification ( une organisation délivrant des certificats). Vous pouvez certifier un document avec ou sans signature visible. Les destinataires du document voient apparaître une icône de ruban bleu au-dessus du document, ce qui signifie que le document est certifié. 1 Ouvrez le document que vous désirez certifier par une signature numérique. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Certifier par une signature visible ou Certifier par une signature invisible. Ou cliquez sur l'icône Signer dans la barre des tâches, puis sur Certifier par une signature visible ou Certifier par une signature invisible. 3 Lisez les informations reprises dans les boîtes de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK pour chacune d'entre elles. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 250 Protection 4 Si vous sélectionnez Certifier par une signature visible, faites glisser le pointeur de la souris pour créer un champ de signature comme indiqué dans la boîte de dialogue précédente. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID numérique, la boîte de dialogue Ajouter une ID numérique s'affiche. Le cas échéant, la boîte de dialogue de certification du document s'affiche. Mot de passe Saisissez le mot de passe associé à l'ID numérique. Aspect Sélectionnez un aspect de signature existant ou sélectionnez Créer un aspect, afin de choisir les informations à afficher dans le champ de la signature. Actions autorisées après certification Choisissez des actions spécifiques à autoriser dans le document. 5 Cliquez sur Signer, puis sauvegardez le document. Lorsque les destinataires ouvrent le document, ils peuvent ouvrir le panneau des signatures pour afficher la signature ainsi que ses propriétés. Mesures de protection relatives aux URL et pièces jointes dans des documents PDF Acrobat vous avertit chaque fois que vous tentez d'ouvrir un URL (site Web) ou une pièce jointe utilisant un type de fichier interdit. Les URL et les types de fichiers interdits (EXE, par exemple) sont potentiellement dangereux, car ils risquent de transférer ou d'exécuter des programmes, des macros ou des virus qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez autoriser Acrobat à contacter des sites Web spécifiques en ajoutant les URL correspondants à la liste de sites Web autorisés figurant dans les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. Supprimez tous les URL que vous ne souhaitez plus consulter. Pour ouvrir des pièces jointes dans Acrobat, répondez au message qui s'affiche en indiquant que vous autorisez toujours les fichiers de ce type. Le type de fichier est alors ajouté à une liste se trouvant dans le registre. Pour interdire un type de fichier autorisé auparavant, réinitialisez cette liste selon ses paramètres par défaut dans les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. Gestionnaire des approbations, préférences Pour ouvrir les préférences du gestionnaire des approbations, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez le gestionnaire des approbations à gauche du document. Autoriser l'ouverture de pièces jointes non PDF dans des applications externes Lorsque cette option est activée, les pièces jointes sont autorisées à démarrer des applications externes à l'ouverture des fichiers. Vous devez disposer des applications externes nécessaires afin d'ouvrir les fichiers. Rétablir la liste par défaut des types de pièce jointe autorisés et interdits Supprime les paramètres enregistrés que vous avez choisis pour ouvrir les pièces jointes. Par exemple, si vous choisissez de toujours ouvrir les pièces jointes TMP lorsque vous y êtes invité, l'extension TMP figure dans la liste des types de pièce jointe autorisés. En cliquant sur Restaurer, vous supprimez l'extension TMP de la liste. Modifier les paramètres Lorsque vous cliquez sur ce bouton, vous pouvez spécifier le comportement par défaut du mode d'accès à Internet à partir des fichiers PDF. Pour restreindre l'accès aux URL spécifiés, sélectionnez Spécifier une liste de sites Web autorisés et bloqués (option définie par défaut). Pour autoriser l'accès à tous les URL, sélectionnez Autoriser tous les sites Web. Pour interdire l'accès à tous les URL inclus dans des documents PDF, sélectionnez Bloquer tous les sites Web. Pour définir une liste de sites Web autorisés et bloqués, saisissez chaque URL dans la zone de texte, puis cliquez sur Autoriser ou Bloquer. Indiquez ensuite le comportement par défaut d'Acrobat pour les sites Web ne figurant pas dans la liste.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 251 Protection Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF protégé et êtes invité à autoriser ou à bloquer un URL, sélectionnez Mémoriser mon action pour ce site. Cette action ajoutera l'URL à la liste. Charger les certificats racine approuvés à partir d'un serveur Adobe Permet Acrobat de charger automatiquement les paramètres d'approbation depuis un serveur Adobe. Demander avant d'installer Lorsque cette option est activée, une notification est envoyée à l'utilisateur lorsque de nouveaux certificats racine sont téléchargés depuis Adobe. Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour détecter de nouveaux certificats racine et les installer instantanément. A propos de la protection renforcée De même que les autres formats de fichiers, il arrive qu'un script malveillant, pouvant causer des dégâts sur l'ordinateur ou voler des données lorsqu'il est lancé, soit incorporé au fichier PDF. La protection renforcée d' Acrobat empêche un script d'effectuer des téléchargements depuis des sources inconnues. Grâce à cette option, seul un script provenant du même domaine de serveurs est autorisé. Par exemple, s' il s'avère que le script incorporé au fichier PDF provient de votre entreprise, il sera téléchargé. Acrobat et Reader proposent deux manières de bloquer des fichiers PDF potentiellement dangereux. • Un administrateur système peut ajouter des noms de domaines de l'Internet au fichier crossdomain.xml du serveur. Seuls les fichiers provenant des emplacements répertoriés dans le fichier crossdomain.xml peuvent être téléchargés vers des ordinateurs privés. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du fichier crossdomain.xml, reportezvous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr ou au document Enhanced security in Adobe Acrobat 9 and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/devnet/reader/articles/reader_compatibility.html. • Les fichiers, les répertoires ou les URL spécifiques peuvent être identifiés en tant qu'emplacements privilégiés dans la boîte de dialogue Protection renforcée. Un fichier PDF résidant sur un emplacement privilégié est alors approuvé. Toutes les actions telles que le chargement de données depuis Internet ou l'exécution d'un script sont autorisées. Par exemple, la protection renforcée bloque le chargement de données depuis des sites Web inconnus par les fichiers PDF. Si vous ajoutez le fichier PDF à votre liste d'emplacements privilégiés, Acrobat autorisera le chargement des données. L'utilisation des emplacements privilégiés vous permet de contourner les restrictions de protection renforcée habituelles. Activez la protection renforcée et définissez des emplacements privilégiés. Configurez les emplacements privilégiés, de sorte à autoriser les fichiers PDF sauvegardés dans les emplacements spécifiques à exécuter des actions qui sont normalement soumises à des restrictions. Par exemple, un fichier PDF stocké sur un site Web à emplacement privilégié peut charger des donnés d'une source externe. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Protection (renforcée) dans le panneau des catégories, à gauche. 2 Sélectionnez l'option Activer la protection renforcée. 3 Choisissez le type d'emplacement à ajouter: • Sélectionnez l'optionFichier si vous désirez ajouter un ou deux fichiers d'un emplacement. Si, par contre, vous disposez d'un nombre plus important de fichiers approuvés, il est conseillé de les classer dans un seul dossier privilégié PDF. • Dossiers Si vous disposez d'un nombre plus important de fichiers approuvés, il est conseillé de les classer dans un seul répertoire privilégié PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 252 Protection • Hôte Saisissez uniquement le nom de la racine de l'' URL. Par exemple, saisissez www.adobe.com et non pas www.adobe.com/products. Afin d'uniquement distribuer davantage de droits aux fichiers consultés depuis des connexions sécurisées, sélectionnez l'option Connexions sécurisées uniquement (https:). 4 Cliquez sur OK pour terminer la tâche. Sélection d'une méthode de protection Type de protection à utiliser Par l'ajout de fonctions de protection, vous pouvez autoriser uniquement les utilisateurs indiqués à effectuer les opérations ayant trait aux documents (visualisation, modification, impression, etc.). Vous pouvez déterminer les conditions d'accès des utilisateurs (mot de passe, ID numérique ou accès à Adobe LiveCycle® Rights Management ES). Acrobat fournit différentes méthodes de protection servant à spécifier l'authenticité, le chiffrement et les paramètres de droits du document. Vous pouvez chiffrer une partie ou l'ensemble d'un document et restreindre les actions de l'utilisateur. Il peut être intéressant, par exemple, d'autoriser seulement certains utilisateurs à remplir les champs du formulaire ou d'éviter que certains d'entre-eux impriment un document PDF. Il est très facile de partager une partie ou l'intégralité de vos paramètres de sécurité avec d'autres utilisateurs en exportant et en important les paramètres. Dans les environnements d'entreprise, vous avez la possibilité d'enregistrer les paramètres de sécurité sur un serveur, puis de les charger en spécifiant l'URL du serveur. Vous pouvez également tirer parti des paramètres exportés pour sauvegarder et restaurer votre configuration, si besoin est. Acrobat utilise les fonctions de protection de Windows XP et un certain nombre d'autres systèmes de protection. Servez-vous de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document pour sélectionner l'une des méthodes de protection suivantes : Remarque : La notion de protection est quelquefois assimilée à la notion d'accessibilité, fonctionnalité facilitant l'accès aux documents pour les utilisateurs malvoyants. Protection par mot de passe Utilisez des mots de passe pour restreindre l'ouverture, la modification et l'impression des fichiers PDF. La protection par mot de passe offre un moyen simple de partager des documents entre les utilisateurs s'il est possible de partager des mots de passe ou si un haut niveau de compatibilité avec des versions antérieures s'avère nécessaire. Dans le cas d'une stratégie par mot de passe, il n'est pas nécessaire de spécifier les destinataires du document. La protection par mot de passe s''applique soit à tout le contenu du document soit uniquement aux pièces jointes. Des enveloppes PDF vous permettent de joindre des fichiers chiffrés à une enveloppe PDF déchiffrée. Protection par certificat La protection par certificat fournit un niveau élevé de protection et évite d'avoir recours au partage de mot de passe. La protection par certificat permet également d'accorder des droits différents à différents utilisateurs dont l'identité peut être vérifiée et gérée. Protection Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Utilisez le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour appliquer une stratégie aux documents, sans avoir recours aux signatures numériques et aux certificats. La stratégie contient une liste des destinataires qui définit les droits individuels de ceux-ci. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 253 Protection Stratégies de protection Si vous appliquez souvent les mêmes paramètres de protection à des documents PDF, envisagez de créer une stratégie de protection afin de rationaliser votre flux de production. Des stratégies différentes sont utiles à la prise en charge de diverses exigences. Stratégie d'enveloppe Vous pouvez sécuriser plusieurs documents en les incorporant à une enveloppe PDF. Les enveloppes peuvent être chiffrées afin d'empêcher des utilisateurs non autorisés d'accéder aux contenus des documents et également certifiées afin de fournir la preuve d'origine. Les destinataires autorisés peuvent ouvrir l'enveloppe et extraire les fichiers dans le but de les visualiser. Stratégie LiveCycle Rights Management ES Les stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, auquel les utilisateurs doivent avoir accès pour pouvoir les utiliser. Pour créer ces stratégies, il est nécessaire de désigner les destinataires des documents à partir d'une liste dans Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Stratégies de mots de passe et de certificats Enregistrez les paramètres de votre mot de passe ou certificat et réutilisezles pour chiffrer des fichiers PDF sans devoir configurer le mot de passe et le certificat pour chaque instance. Si vous appliquez des paramètres de protection à de grandes quantités de documents PDF, vous pouvez automatiser la procédure en exécutant la commande Traitement par lot. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de sécurité, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Juristes : http://blogs.adobe.com/acrolaw/ • Porte-documents PDF : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4201_a9_fr Protection obligatoire: Action: Demandez un mot de passe pour l'ouverture, la copie ou l'impression du contenu d'un fichier PD. Choisissez Protection par mot de passe en appuyant sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches. Dans un porte-documents PDF ouvert, choisissez Fichier > Modifier un porte-documents PDF > Protéger le portedocuments. Si votre entreprise est inscrite, vous pouvez également utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES afin de protéger vos documents. Lorsque vous employez la commande du traitement par lot pour protéger les porte-documents PDF, les documents en question sont sécurisés, mais pas la page de couverture. Indiquer que le contenu d'un document PDF est approuvé Signez et certifiez le document PDF. Vous devez obtenir une identification numérique pour pouvoir apposer une signature numérique. Pour les langues asiatiques, vous pouvez appliquer un tampon d'approbation. Eviter que les formulaires ne soient falsifiés Utilisez LiveCycle Designer pour protéger les formulaires et créer des champs de signature verrouillables. Consultez l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Designer. Envoyer des pièces jointes sécurisées par messagerie Utilisez des enveloppes sécurisées. Autoriser la visualisation d'un document PDF aux utilisateurs spécifiés uniquement Choisissez Protection par certificat dans le menu du bouton Protection sur la barre d'outils Tâches ou appliquez les paramètres de protection à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Vous devez disposez de certificats pour vous-même et pour les utilisateurs autorisés à afficher le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 254 Protection Voir aussi « Suppression du contenu confidentiel » à la page 278 « Configuration d'une stratégie de protection » à la page 266 « Modification des propriétés de champs de formulaire » à la page 221 « Exécution d'une séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie » à la page 381 Choisir des méthodes de protection en mode FIPS (Windows) Acrobat et Reader fournissent un mode FIPS servant à limiter la protection de données aux normes fédérales de traitement de l'information (FIPS). Le mode FIPS utilise des algorithmes FIPS 140-2 approuvés qui se servent du module cryptographique RSA BSAFE Crypto Micro Edition (ME) 2.1.0.3. Les options de protection suivantes ne sont pas disponibles en mode FIPS : • Application aux documents des stratégies de protection basées sur un mot de passe. Vous pouvez utiliser les certificats à clé publique ou Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour sécuriser le document, mais vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la protection par mot de passe. • Création de certificats autosignés. Pour créer une identification numérique autosignée, celle-ci doit être enregistrée dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Vous ne pouvez pas en créer une en l'enregistrant dans un fichier. • Chiffrement RC4. Un fichier PDF peut uniquement être chiffré au moyen de l'algorithme de chiffrement AES en mode FIPS. • Méthodes de prétraitement MD5 ou RIPEMD160. En mode FIPS, seules les familles SHA-1 et SHA-2 d'algorithmes digest peuvent être utilisées lors de la création d'une signature numérique. En mode FIPS, vous pouvez ouvrir et afficher des documents qui sont protégés par des algorithmes non conformes aux normes FIPS. Il est toutefois impossible de sauvegarder des modifications dans le document si vous utilisez une protection par mot de passe. Pour appliquer des stratégies de sécurité au document, utilisez les certificats de clé publique ou Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Le mode FIPS est configuré dans le registre Windows par un administrateur système. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Protection par mot de passe d'un document Ajout d'une protection par mot de passe Vous pouvez limiter l'accès à un document PDF en définissant des mots de passe et en verrouillant certaines fonctions, telles que l'impression et la modification. Il est impossible d'ajouter des mots de passe à un document déjà signé et certifié. Il existe deux types de mots de passe : Mot de passe d'ouverture du document Lorsque vous définissez un mot de passe d'ouverture pour un document (ou mot de passe utilisateur), les utilisateurs doivent saisir le mot de passe que vous avez spécifié pour pouvoir ouvrir le document. Mot de passe d'accès aux droits Lorsque vous définissez uniquement un mot de passe d'accès aux droits (ou mot de passe principal ), les destinataires n'ont pas besoin de mot de passe pour ouvrir le document. En revanche, il leur faudra saisir le mot de passe d'accès aux droits pour installer ou modifier les fonctions verrouillées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 255 Protection Si le fichier PDF est sécurisé par les deux types de mot de passe, il pourra être ouvert avec n'importe lequel des deux. En revanche, seul le mot de passe d'accès aux droits autorise l''utilisateur à modifier les fonctions verrouillées. Dû à la protection ajoutée, il est souvent recommandé d'installer les deux types de mot de passe. Tous les produits Adobe appliquent les restrictions définies par le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Toutefois, il se peut que les produits tiers ne prennent pas en charge ces paramètres ou ne les appliquent pas. Les destinataires du document risquent donc de contourner une partie ou l'ensemble des restrictions d'accès. Important : Si vous oubliez le mot de passe associé à un document PDF, il n'existe aucun moyen de le retrouver à partir de ce document. Il est donc recommandé d'en conserver une copie de sauvegarde non protégée par un mot de passe. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier PDF ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF et choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Chiffrement par mot de passe. • Dans un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le porte-documents et choisissez Fichier > Modifier un porte-documents PDF > Protéger le porte-documents. Dans le menu Méthode de protection, choisissez Protection par mot de passe. 2 Si vous recevez une notification, cliquez sur Oui pour modifier la protection. 3 Choisissez un niveau de compatibilité. Cette option définit le niveau de chiffrement et la taille de la clé. L'algorithme de chiffrement et la taille de la clé sont spécifiques à une version. Assurez-vous que votre niveau de chiffrement soit égal ou inférieur à la version Acrobat ou Adobe Reader des destinataires. 4 Sélectionnez les composants de document à chiffrer. Pour autoriser la recherche dans le contenu du document, laissez les métadonnées déchiffrées. Pour créer des enveloppes de protection, utilisez Chiffrer les pièces jointes. 5 Choisissez le type de mot de passe à ajouter, puis saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ correspondant. Si vous définissez un mot de passe d'accès aux droits, établissez le niveau d'accès. 6 Pour permettre aux destinataires de copier le contenu d'un document PDF dans un autre document, sélectionnez Autoriser la copie de texte, d'images et d'autre contenu. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Lorsque vous êtes invité à confirmer le mot de passe, saisissez à nouveau le mot de passe approprié dans la zone appropriée et cliquez sur OK. Paramètres de protection par mot de passe Vous pouvez configurer les options suivantes lors de la création d’un fichier PDF ou lors de la protection d’un fichier PDF par mot de passe. La disponibilité et les valeurs proposées pour chacune des options dépendent du paramètre Compatibilité. Les options de sécurité ne sont pas disponibles pour les normes ou paramètres prédéfinis PDF/X. Compatibilité Définit le type de chiffrement utilisé pour l’ouverture d’un document protégé par mot de passe. L’option Acrobat 3 et versions ultérieures utilise un niveau de chiffrement peu élevé (RC4 à 40 bits). Les autres options utilisent un niveau supérieur (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). Acrobat 6.0 et versions ultérieures vous permettent d'activer les métadonnées en vue de l'indexation. L'option Acrobat 9.0 et versions ultérieures permet de chiffrer le document à l'aide de l'algorithme de chiffrement AES avec une taille de clé de 256 bits. Toute personne disposant d’une version d’Acrobat antérieure ne pourra pas ouvrir un document PDF doté d’un paramètre de compatibilité ultérieur. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures, le document ne peut pas être ouvert dans Acrobat version 8.0 ou antérieure. Chiffrer l’ensemble du contenu du document Sélectionnez cette option pour chiffrer le document et les métadonnées associées. Si cette option est activée, les moteurs de recherche ne peuvent accéder aux métadonnées du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 256 Protection Chiffrer l’ensemble du contenu du document excepté les métadonnées Sélectionnez cette option pour chiffrer le contenu d’un document tout en permettant aux moteurs de recherche d’accéder aux métadonnées qui y sont associées. Cette option est disponible si l'option de compatibilité sélectionnée correspond à Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure. Chiffrer les pièces jointes Sélectionnez cette option pour demander la saisie d’un mot de passe afin d’ouvrir les pièces jointes. Ils pourront cependant ouvrir le fichier PDF sans mot de passe. Utilisez ce paramètre pour les enveloppes sécurisées. Cette option est disponible si l'option de compatibilité sélectionnée correspond à Acrobat 7.0 ou version ultérieure. Exiger un mot de passe pour l’ouverture du document Sélectionnez cette option pour obliger les utilisateurs à saisir le mot de passe indiqué pour l’ouverture du document. Cette option est indisponible si l’option Chiffrer les pièces jointes est sélectionnée. Mot de passe d’ouverture du document Indiquez le mot de passe nécessaire aux utilisateurs pour ouvrir le fichier PDF. Remarque : Si vous avez oublié un mot de passe, il est impossible de le récupérer à partir du document. Par conséquent, il est conseillé de noter les mots de passe et de les conserver en lieu sûr. Restreindre la modification et l'impression du document Restreint l’accès aux paramètres de sécurité du fichier PDF. Si le fichier est ouvert dans Acrobat, l’utilisateur peut le visualiser, mais il doit indiquer le mot de passe des droits d’accès pour modifier les paramètres de protection et de droits d'accès. Si le fichier est ouvert dans Illustrator®, Photoshop® ou InDesign®, l'utilisateur devra entre le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Il est impossible d''ouvrir un fichier en mode affichage uniquement. Modifier le mot de passe d'accès aux droits Indiquez le mot de passe requis pour modifier les paramètres de droits. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l’option précédente est sélectionnée. Impression autorisée Indique le niveau d’impression autorisé aux utilisateurs pour le document PDF. • Non Empêche l’utilisateur d’imprimer le document. • Faible résolution (150 ppp) Permet aux utilisateurs d’imprimer à une résolution maximale de 150 ppp. L’impression risque d’être plus lente, chaque page étant imprimée comme image bitmap. Cette option est uniquement disponible si l’option de compatibilité est définie sur Acrobat 5.0 () ou version ultérieure. • Haute résolution Permet aux utilisateurs d’imprimer en utilisant la résolution de leur choix, en transférant une sortie vectorielle de haute qualité à des imprimantes PostScript ou dotées de fonctionnalités avancées pour l’impression de haute qualité. Modifications autorisées Définit les opérations de modification autorisées dans le document PDF. • Non Empêche les utilisateurs d’apporter au document toutes les modifications répertoriées dans le menu Modifications autorisées, telles que le remplissage de champs de formulaire ou l’ajout de commentaires. • Insertion, suppression et rotation des pages Permet aux utilisateurs d’insérer, de supprimer et de faire pivoter des pages, mais aussi de créer des signets et des vignettes. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). • Remplir les champs de formulaire et signer les champs existants Permet aux utilisateurs de remplir des formulaires et d’apposer des signatures numériques. Cette option ne les autorise pas à insérer des commentaires, ni à créer des champs de formulaire. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). • Commentaire, remplir les champs de formulaire et signer les champs existants Permet aux utilisateurs d’ajouter des commentaires, d’apposer des signatures numériques et de remplir des formulaires. Cette option n’autorise pas les utilisateurs à déplacer des objets de page ni à créer des champs de formulaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 257 Protection • Tout sauf l’extraction des pages Permet aux utilisateurs de modifier le document, de créer et de remplir les champs de formulaire, ainsi que d’ajouter des commentaires et d’apposer des signatures numériques. Autoriser la copie de texte, d’images et d’autre contenu Permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner et de copier le contenu d’un document PDF. Activer l’accès au texte pour les lecteurs d’écran destinés aux malvoyants Permet aux utilisateurs malvoyants de lire le document à l’aide de lecteurs d’écran, mais n’autorise pas les utilisateurs à copier ni à extraire le contenu. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). Suppression de la protection par mot de passe Si vous en avez reçu les droits, vous pouvez supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF ouvert. Si le document PDF est sécurisé à l'aide d'une stratégie de protection basée sur un serveur, seul l'auteur de la stratégie ou l'administrateur système pourront la modifier. 1 Dans le fichier PDF ouvert, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. • Dans le panneau Protection de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du document, choisissez Aucune protection dans le menu Méthode de protection. 2 Vos options varient en fonction du type de protection par mot de passe joint au document : • Si le document ne possède qu'un mot de passe d'ouverture du document, cliquez sur OK pour le supprimer du document. • Si le document est doté d'un mot de passe d'accès aux droits, entrez-le dans la zone de saisie de mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Cliquez sur OK pour confirmer l'action. Protection par certificat d'un document Protection par certificat Utilisez des certificats pour chiffrer des documents et pour vérifier la signature numérique. Une signature numérique garantit aux destinataires que le document vient de vous. Le chiffrement permet de s'assurer que seul le destinataire prévu peut visualiser le contenu du document. Un certificat conserve le composant à clé publique d'une ID numérique. Lorsque vous sécurisez un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat, vous spécifiez les destinataires et définissez les niveaux d'accès au fichier pour chaque destinataire ou pour chaque groupe. Par exemple, vous pouvez autoriser un groupe à signer et à remplir des formulaires, et permettre à un autre de modifier le texte ou de supprimer des pages. Vous pouvez spécifier des certificats à partir de la liste d'identités approuvées, de fichiers situés sur le disque dur, d'un serveur LDAP ou du magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement). N'oubliez jamais d'inclure votre propre certificat dans la liste des destinataires de sorte à pouvoir ouvrir le document plus tard. Remarque : Dans la mesure du possible, chiffrez les documents à l'aide de certificats d'identifications numériques tierces. En cas de perte ou de vol d'un certificat, l'autorité l'ayant délivré peut le remplacer. Si une identification numérique autosignée est supprimée, tous les fichiers PDF chiffrés à l'aide du certificat de cette identification numérique sont définitivement inaccessibles.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 258 Protection Chiffrer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat Pour chiffrer un nombre important de documents PDF, utilisez la commande Traitement par lot pour appliquer une séquence prédéfinie. La commande du traitement par lot protège les documents des porte-documents PDF mais pas leur page de couverture. Modifiez une séquence afin d'ajouter les fonctions de protection voulues. Vous avez également la possibilité d'enregistrer les paramètres de certificat en tant que stratégie de protection et de réutiliser cette dernière pour chiffrer des documents PDF. 1 Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Protection par certificat ou cliquez sur le bouton Protection dans la barre d'outils Tâches, puis sélectionnez Chiffrement par certificat. 3 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de protection par certificat, sélectionnez les composants du document à chiffrer. 5 Dans le menu Algorithme de chiffrement, choisissez un taux de chiffrement, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'algorithme de chiffrement et la taille de la clé sont spécifiques à une version. Les destinataires doivent disposer de la version Acrobat ou Adobe Reader correspondante ( ou version ultérieure) afin de déchiffrer et lire le document. • Si vous sélectionnez AES à 128 bits, les destinataires doivent disposer de la version 7.0 ou ultérieure d'Adobe Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader pour ouvrir le document. • Si vous sélectionnez AES à 256 bits, vous devez ouvrir le document dans la version 9 ou ultérieure d'Adobe Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader. 6 Créez la liste des destinataires du document PDF chiffré : N'oubliez jamais d'inclure votre propre certificat dans la liste des destinataires de sorte à pouvoir ouvrir le document plus tard. • Cliquez sur Rechercher pour localiser les identités sur un serveur de répertoires ou dans la liste des identités approuvées.. • Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher le fichier contenant les certificats des identités approuvées. • Pour définir les restrictions de modification et d'impression du document, sélectionnez les destinataires depuis la liste, puis cliquez sur Droits. 7 Vérifiez vos paramètres en cliquant sur Suivant, puis cliquez sur Terminer. Lorsqu'un destinataire de la liste ouvre le document PDF, les paramètres de protection qui lui sont associés sont appliqués. Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 272 « Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur » à la page 260 « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 125 Modification ou suppression du chiffrement d'un document PDF Vous pouvez modifier ou supprimer les paramètres de protection des fichiers PDF que vous avez chiffrés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 259 Protection Modification des paramètres de chiffrement 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Afficher les paramètres de protection. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, puis cliquez sur Suivant. • Pour chiffrer des composants de document différents, sélectionnez cette option. • Pour modifier l'algorithme de chiffrement, choisissez-le dans le menu. 5 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour vérifier l'identité approuvée d'un destinataire, sélectionnez ce dernier, puis cliquez sur Détails. • Pour supprimer des destinataires, sélectionnez-les et cliquez sur Supprimer. Ne supprimez pas votre certificat à moins que vous ne désiriez plus accéder au document à l'aide de celui-ci. • Pour modifier les droits des destinataires, sélectionnez ces derniers, puis choisissez Droits. 6 Cliquez sur Suivant puis sur Terminer. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document et enregistrez le document pour appliquer les modifications. Suppression des paramètres de chiffrement 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. 3 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Si vous ne le connaissez pas, contactez l'auteur du document PDF. Partage d'un certificat avec d'autres utilisateurs Les entreprises qui utilisent des certificats pour sécuriser les flux de production stockent souvent les certificats sur un serveur de répertoires dont ces personnes se servent pour développer leur liste d'identités approuvées. Lorsque vous recevez un certificat d'une personne, vous pouvez l'ajouter à votre liste d'identités approuvées. Vous pouvez définir les paramètres d'approbation de sorte que toutes les signatures numériques et documents certifiés créés à l'aide d'un certificat spécifique soient approuvés. Vous pouvez également importer des certificats d'un magasin de certificats, tel que celui de Windows. Un magasin de certificats contient généralement de nombreux certificats délivrés par différentes autorités de certification. Pour des informations complètes sur le partage des certificats, reportez-vous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Remarque : Les fournisseurs tiers de protection valident généralement les identités par l'utilisation de méthodes propriétaires. Ou ils intègrent leur méthode de validation à l'aide deAcrobat. Si vous utilisez un fournisseur de protection tiers, consultez la documentation du fournisseur tiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 260 Protection Voir aussi « Exporter les paramètres de protection » à la page 271 Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur Les certificats que vous recevez d'autres personnes sont conservés dans la liste des identités approuvées. Celle-ci est comparable à un carnet d'adresses et vous permet d'authentifier les signatures de ces utilisateurs sur tous les documents qu'ils vous envoient. Voir aussi « Chiffrer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat » à la page 258 Envoi d'une requête de certificat à un autre utilisateur 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Cliquez sur Requête de contact. 3 Saisissez vos nom, adresse électronique et coordonnées. 4 Pour permettre aux autres utilisateurs d'ajouter votre certificat à leur liste d'identités approuvées, cochez l'option Inclure mes certificats. 5 Sélectionnez Envoyer la requête par messagerie ou Enregistrer la requête. Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier d'identification numérique à utiliser et cliquez sur Sélectionner. 7 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la boîte de dialogue Ecrire le message apparaît, saisissez l'adresse électronique de la personne à laquelle vous demandez un certificat, puis cliquez sur Envoyer par messagerie. Envoyez le message qui s'affiche, avec le certificat en pièce jointe, via l'application de messagerie par défaut. • Si la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données sous s'affiche, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier, cliquez sur Enregistrer, puis sur OK. Ajout d'un certificat à partir d'un message électronique Lorsqu'un contact vous envoie un certificat par messagerie électronique, celui-ci s'affiche en pièce jointe sous format PDF. 1 Cliquez deux fois sur la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Définir l'approbation des contacts dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez les options d'approbation qui se trouvent dans l'onglet Approbation de la boîte de dialogue Importer les paramètres de contact. • Sélectionnez Signatures et certificat racine approuvé uniquement si cela est nécessaire à la validation d'une signature numérique. Si vous définissez un certificat en tant qu'ancre d'approbation, vous empêchez sa vérification de révocation (ou celle de tout autre certificat faisant partie de la chaîne). • Pour autoriser des actions potentiellement dangereuses, cliquez sur Protection par certification de document puis sélectionnez les options voulues. Contenu dynamique Inclut les fichiers FLV et SWF ainsi que les liens externes. Scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés Permet d'approuver les scripts incorporés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 261 Protection Exploitations de système privilégiées Inclut la mise en réseau, impression ou l'accès aux fichiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour afficher les détails d'importation, puis cliquez à nouveau sur OK. Ajout d'un certificat à partir d'une signature numérique dans un document PDF Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter un certificat à la liste des identités approuvées à partir d'un document PDF signé en commençant par authentifier l'empreinte auprès de l'émetteur ou du certificat. 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant la signature autosignée. 2 Ouvrez le panneau des signatures et sélectionnez le certificat. 3 Dans le menu Options, cliquez sur Afficher les propriétés de la signature, puis sur Certificat. 4 Si le certificat est autosigné, contactez l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs d'empreinte de l'onglet Détails sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs correspondent aux valeurs de l'émetteur. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet Approbation, sur Ajouter aux identités approuvées, puis sur OK. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer les paramètres de contact, spécifiez les options d'approbation, puis cliquez sur OK. Importation d'un certificat Si vous détenez un certificat qui est déjà présent dans votre système de fichier, vous pouvez l'importer dans Acrobat pour l'utiliser avec des fichiers PDF. Pour importer des certificats, trouvez leur lieu de stockage (nom du fichier et nom du chemin). 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Dans le menu Affichage, sélectionnez Contacts, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des contacts. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si les identifications numériques de certificats Windows sont autorisées, sélectionnez le répertoire et le groupe appropriés. • Si votre entreprise a configuré un répertoire de recherche d'identités, cliquez sur Rechercher pour localiser les certificats. • Cliquez sur Parcourir, sélectionnez le fichier certificat, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 4 Sélectionnez le certificat que vous venez d'ajouter à la liste des contacts afin de l'ajouter à celle des certificats. Sélectionnez le certificat dans la liste des certificats, puis cliquez sur Détails. 5 Si le certificat est autosigné, contactez l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs d'empreinte de l'onglet Détails sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs correspondent aux valeurs de l'émetteur. 6 Cliquez sur Approbation pour spécifier les options d'approbation et cliquez ensuite sur OK. Configurez Acrobat pour effectuer une recherche dans le magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement). 1 Dans les préférences de protection, cliquez sur Préférences avancées. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Intégration à Windows, puis cochez la case Autoriser la recherche d'autres certificats dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Sélectionnez les options voulues, puis cliquez deux fois sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 262 Protection Les certificats d'approbation du magasin de certificats Windows ne sont pas recommandés. Importation d'un certificat à l'aide de l'assistant d'importation de certificat de Windows (Windows) Si vous utilisez le magasin de certificats Windows pour organiser les certificats, vous pouvez importer ces derniers à l'aide d'un assistant disponible à partir de l'Explorateur Windows. Pour importer des certificats, trouvez leur lieu de stockage (nom du fichier et nom du chemin). 1 Dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le fichier certificat avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Installer le fichier PFX. 2 Suivez les invites affichées à l'écran afin d'ajouter le certificat au magasin de certificats Windows. 3 Si vous êtes invité à valider le certificat avant de l'installer, prenez note des valeurs de prétraitement (des empreintes) MD5 et SHA-1. Contactez ensuite l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs sont correctes. Cliquez sur OK. Association d'un certificat à un contact Si vous avez un contact qui n' est pas associé à un certificat ou si vous désirez modifier le certificat associé à un contact, suivez les étapes suivantes : Un contact doit posséder au minimum un certificat valable pour échanger des fichiers PDF chiffrés. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Sélectionnez le contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Cliquez sur Associer un certificat. 4 Sélectionnez un certificat, puis cliquez sur OK. Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Authentification des informations d'un certificat La boîte de dialogue Programme de visualisation des certificats fournit des attributs utilisateur, ainsi que d'autres informations relatives au certificat. Lorsque des utilisateurs tiers importeront votre certificat, ils vous demanderont probablement de comparer vos informations d'empreinte avec celles qui accompagnent le certificat. (L'empreinte désigne les valeurs de prétraitement MD5 et SHA1.) Vous avez la possibilité de vérifier les informations associées à vos fichiers d'identification numérique ou à ceux que vous avez importés. Pour plus d'informations sur la vérification des certificats, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. La boîte de dialogue Programme de visualisation des certificats fournit les informations suivantes: • La période de validité du certificat • L'utilisation prévue du certificat • Les données du certificat, telles que le numéro de série et la méthode de clé publique. Vous pouvez également vérifier si l'autorité de certification n'a pas révoqué le certificat. Les certificats sont en général révoqués lorsqu'un employé quitte l'entreprise ou que la protection n'est plus optimale.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 263 Protection Authentifiez votre certificat 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez votre identification numérique, puis cliquez sur Détails du certificat . Authentifiez les informations reprises dans le certificat d'un contact 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Sélectionnez le contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du certificat, puis cliquez sur Certificat. Définition du niveau d'approbation d'un certificat Dans Acrobat ou Adobe Reader, la signature d'un document certifié ou signé n'est valable que si vous approuvez la relation avec le signataire. Le niveau d'approbation du certificat indique pour quelles actions vous approuvez le signataire. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres d'approbation des certificats afin d'autoriser ou d'interdire des actions spécifiques. Par exemple, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres pour activer le contenu dynamique ainsi que le script Java script incorporé au document certifié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Sélectionnez un contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du certificat, puis cliquez sur Modifier l'approbation. 4 Dans l'onglet Approbation, sélectionnez l'un des éléments suivants pour lequel ce certificat doit être approuvé : Signatures et certificat racine approuvé Permet d'approuver les signatures créées instantanément par le certificat en question. Le certificat racine constitue l'autorité d'origine dans une chaîne d'autorités de certificats ayant délivré le certificat. L'approbation du certificat racine indique que vous approuvez tous les certificats délivrés par l'autorité de certification correspondante. Documents ou données signées Reconnaît l'identité du signataire Documents certifiés Permet d'approuver les documents que l'auteur a certifiés par une signature. Vous approuvez le signataire pour la certification de documents et vous acceptez les actions liées au document certifié. Lorsque la fonction Documents certifiés est sélectionnée, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Contenu dynamique Permet de lancer les films, les fichiers son ou tout autre élément dynamique dans un document certifié..UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 264 Protection Scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés Permet d'exécuter un script Java script privilégié incorporé à des fichiers PDF. Les fichiers Java script peuvent être utilisés à des fins malveillantes. Il est recommandé de sélectionner uniquement cette option en cas de besoin sur des certificats que vous avez approuvés. Exploitations de système privilégiées Permet d'utiliser des opérations système (mise en réseau, impression ou accès aux fichiers) dans des documents. Remarque : Autorisez uniquement les scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés et les opérations système privilégiées pour des sources que vous approuvez et avec lesquelles vous travaillez en étroite collaboration (ex: votre employeur ou le prestataire de services). 5 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Fermer. Suppression d'un certificat des identités approuvées 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Dans le menu Afficher, choisissez Certificats. 3 Sélectionnez le certificat et cliquez sur Supprimer. Stockage de certificats utilisateur sur des serveurs de répertoires Les serveurs de répertoires sont en général utilisés comme référentiels d'identités centralisés au sein d'une organisation. Ils constituent donc un emplacement idéal pour le stockage de certificats utilisateur dans les entreprises se servant de certificats de chiffrement. Les serveurs de répertoires vous permettent de repérer des certificats sur des serveurs réseau, tels que des serveurs LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). Une fois le certificat repéré, ajoutez-le à votre liste d’identités approuvées pour ne plus avoir à le rechercher. Agrandissez la zone de stockage des certificats approuvés pour faciliter l'utilisation du chiffrement dans votre groupe de travail. Cette opération peut être effectuée par tous les membres du groupe de travail. Pour plus d'informations sur les serveurs de répertoires, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l 'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Importation d'une configuration de serveur de répertoires (Windows uniquement) Vous importez les paramètres de serveurs de répertoires depuis un fichier FDF. Avant d'ouvrir le fichier FDF, assurezvous que vous approuvez le fournisseur du fichier en question. 1 Pour ouvrir le fichier FDF, cliquez deux fois sur celui-ci et effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Serveurs de répertoires dans le panneau de gauche, puis cliquez sur Importer. Sélectionnez le fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Si le fichier FDF est signé, cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés de la signature pour vérifier le statut actuel de la signature. 4 Cliquez sur Importer pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Importer une configuration de répertoires. 5 Cliquez sur OK lorsque, le cas échéant, vous êtes invité à confirmer votre choix. Le serveur de répertoires s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 265 Protection Importation d'une configuration de serveur de répertoires (Windows uniquement) Bien qu'il soit recommandé d'exporter les paramètres de protection, vous pouvez exporter des paramètres de répertoire dans un fichier FDF (Form Data Format). Utilisez le fichier FDF pour configurer le serveur de répertoires sur un autre ordinateur. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Identité, puis indiquez votre nom, votre entreprise et votre adresse électronique afin de créer votre profil. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 3 Sélectionnez Serveurs de répertoires dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur un ou plusieurs serveurs dans la liste de droite. 4 Cliquez sur Exporter, sélectionnez un emplacement cible, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Pour prouver que le fichier vient de votre part, cliquez sur Signer, apposez votre signature et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour sauvegarder le fichier, indiquez son nom et son emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour envoyer le fichier en tant que pièce jointe, tapez une adresse électronique dans la zone A, cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Terminer. Voir aussi « Exporter les paramètres de protection » à la page 271 Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES est un système de protection serveur qui permet de contrôler dynamiquement des documents PDF. Il est possible de configurer et d'utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES avec des systèmes d'entreprise du type LDAP et ADS, entre autres. Les stratégies fournies par Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur le serveur et peuvent être mises à jour à partir de ce dernier. Pour exploiter ces stratégies, les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Les stratégies de protection sont stockées sur un serveur exécutant Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, mais pas les fichiers PDF. Dans certains cas, les utilisateurs peuvent avoir à se connecter au serveur, afin d'ouvrir ou de continuer à utiliser des documents PDF protégés par une stratégie. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration d'un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur Aide sur le site Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, après vous être connecté à votre compte. Connexion à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur les serveurs Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management dans le panneau gauche.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 266 Protection 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer . 4 Saisissez un nom dans le champ Nom et un URL dans la zone Nom du serveur. Ajoutez le numéro de port et cliquez sur Connexion à ce serveur. 5 Saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe de votre compte, puis cliquez sur OK. Affichage des stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Gérer mon compte. La page Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management s'ouvre dans votre navigateur Web. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, indiquez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Connexion. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Stratégies sur la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur le lien d'aide situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Configuration d'une stratégie de protection Les types de stratégie de protection Si vous appliquez souvent les mêmes paramètres de protection à de nombreux documents PDF, vous pouvez les enregistrer en tant que stratégie à réutiliser. Protection Les stratégies sont un moyen de gagner du temps et d'établir un flux de production qui est plus sécurisé et homogène. La création de stratégies par mot de passe et certificat permet de réutiliser des paramètres de protection pour autant de documents PDF que vous souhaitez. Il existe deux types de stratégie de protection: • Les stratégies d'entreprise s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque vous voulez accorder l'accès à des documents PDF à des tiers pendant une période limitée. Les stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, auquel les utilisateurs doivent avoir accès pour pouvoir les utiliser. Pour créer ces stratégies, il est nécessaire de désigner les destinataires des documents à partir d'une liste dans Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES surveille l'accès aux documents PDF et aux événements de contrôle en fonction de la stratégie de protection définie. Vous ne pouvez utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES que si votre entreprise a acquis la licence logicielle et vous l'a attribuée. • Les stratégies utilisateur sont des stratégies créées et appliquées par les utilisateurs. Si vous appliquez les mêmes options de protection à plusieurs documents, vous pouvez gagner du temps en créant une stratégie utilisateur. Appliquez ensuite cette stratégie utilisateur aux documents. Les stratégies utilisateur relatives aux mots de passe et aux certificats de clé publique sont stockées sur l'ordinateur local. En accédant à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, vous pouvez également créer une stratégie utilisateur stockée sur un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Vous seul pourrez accéder à cette stratégie. Authentification d'une stratégie d'entreprise Outre la réutilisation de paramètres de protection, les stratégies stockées sur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES permettent d'attribuer une date d'échéance aux documents et de les révoquer, quel que soit le nombre de copies créées ou diffusées. Vous pouvez également surveiller la gestion des documents protégés grâce au suivi des utilisateurs qui les ouvrent. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 267 Protection Stratégies de protection A. Les stratégies sont stockées sur le serveur. B. Les stratégies sont appliquées au document PDF. C. Les utilisateurs ne peuvent ouvrir, modifier et imprimer le document que si la stratégie les y autorise. La configuration des stratégies de protection serveur comprend quatre étapes principales : Configuration du serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management L'administrateur système de la société ou du groupe est la personne qui s'occupe en général de la configuration d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, de la gestion des comptes et de la mise en place des stratégies d'entreprise. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, voir le site Web d'Adobe. Publication d'un document doté d'une stratégie de protection Un auteur crée un document PDF et lui applique une stratégie stockée sur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Le serveur génère une licence et une clé de chiffrement unique pour le document PDF. Acrobat incorpore la licence au document PDF et chiffre celui-ci à l'aide de la clé de chiffrement. L'auteur ou l'administrateur peuvent se servir de cette licence pour effectuer le suivi du document. Affichage d'un document doté d'une stratégie de protection Lorsque des utilisateurs essaient d'ouvrir un document PDF protégé dans Acrobat 9 (ou Reader 9), ils doivent impérativement s'identifier. Si l'utilisateur obtient l'accès au document PDF, ce document est déchiffré et ouvert en fonction des droits spécifiés dans la stratégie. Gestion des événements et modification des droits d'accès En se connectant à un compte Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, l'auteur ou l'administrateur peut suivre les événements et modifier les droits d'accès aux documents PDF protégés par stratégie. L'administrateur peut afficher tous les événements système et liés au document PDF, ainsi que modifier les paramètres de configuration et les droits d'accès aux documents PDF protégés par stratégie. Création d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur Les stratégies utilisateur comprennent des mots de passe utilisateur, des certificats ou le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour authentifier des documents. Les stratégies par mot de passe et certificat peuvent être stockées sur un ordinateur local. Les stratégies de protection créées à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, ce qui permet de surveiller les actions et de modifier les paramètres de protection de manière dynamique. Vous ne pouvez utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES que si votre entreprise a acquis la licence logicielle et vous l'a attribuée. Voir aussi « Protection par certificat d'un document » à la page 257 « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 254 « Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES » à la page 265 Création d'une stratégie par mot de passe 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 268 Protection 2 Cliquez sur Créer. 3 Sélectionnez Mots de passe puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez un nom et une description pour la stratégie, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes et cliquez sur Suivant : • Si vous souhaitez définir des mots de passe et des restrictions chaque fois que vous appliquez cette stratégie à un document, désactivez la case à cocher Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie. • Si vous souhaitez enregistrer des mots de passe et des paramètres de restriction avec la stratégie, cochez la case Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie. 5 Indiquez un paramètre de compatibilité et configurez les options de mot de passe. Si vous avez activé l'option Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie, spécifiez le mot de passe et les restrictions. Cliquez sur OK. 6 Vérifiez les détails de la stratégie, cliquez sur Terminer, puis sur Fermer. Création d'une stratégie par certificat 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Créer. 3 Sélectionnez Certificats à clé publique, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez un nom et une description pour la stratégie, puis spécifiez les composants document à chiffrer. Les certificats doivent être actuels et avoir accès à une clé autorisant le chiffrement. 5 Définir la façon dont il faut appliquer la stratégie: • Ne sélectionnez pas l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée pour créer une stratégie associée à des destinataires. • Sélectionnez l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée pour créer une stratégie associée à des documents. 6 A partir du menu, sélectionnez un algorithme de chiffrement compatible avec la version Acrobat des destinataires, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous avez sélectionné Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie, vérifiez les paramètres de protection et cliquez ensuite sur Terminer. • Si l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée, spécifiez les destinataires en sélectionnant les ID numériques (y compris votre propre ID numérique). Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. La création de stratégies pour sécuriser des pièces jointes. Il est possible d'ajouter un ou plusieurs documents en les incorporant à une enveloppe de protection puis en envoyant cette enveloppe en pièce jointe. Cette méthode s'avère particulièrement utile pour l'envoi de pièces jointes protégées sans chiffrer les fichiers. Vous pouvez incorporer les documents à une enveloppe sécurisée en tant que pièces jointes, chiffrer cette enveloppe et l'envoyer aux destinataires. Les destinataires qui ouvrent l'enveloppe protégée peuvent extraire les pièces jointes et les enregistrer. Les fichiers enregistrés sont identiques aux pièces jointes d'origine et ne sont plus chiffrés après leur enregistrement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 269 Protection Par exemple, lorsque vous envoyez des documents confidentiels, dont certains ne sont pas au format PDF, vous souhaitez que les documents soient lus uniquement par le destinataire. Vous pouvez incorporer ces documents à une enveloppe sécurisée en tant que pièces jointes, chiffrer cette enveloppe et l'envoyer par courrier électronique. L'enveloppe, sa page de garde et la liste des éléments qu'elle contient sont accessibles à tout utilisateur. Cependant, seul le destinataire pourra afficher et extraire les pièces jointes incorporées afin de les lire. Incorporez les pièces jointes dans des enveloppes sécurisées pour leur assurer un transit sûr. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Créer une enveloppe sécurisée. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter le fichier à envoyer, sélectionnez les documents à joindre puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Sélectionnez un modèle d'enveloppe, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Sélectionnez un mode de livraison, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Si une stratégie d'enveloppe a été créée, sélectionnez-la ou sélectionnez Nouvelle stratégie, puis suivez les étapes suivantes afin de créer la stratégie. 6 Vérifiez les informations, puis cliquez sur Terminer. 7 Pour certaines stratégies, vous devrez saisir les informations que vous souhaitez ajouter à l'enveloppe. Pour permettre aux destinataires de reconnaître l'expéditeur de l'enveloppe, saisissez des informations en quantité suffisante. 8 Remplissez les informations de protection ( mot de passe, certificat, ou stratégie). 9 Lorsque l'enveloppe s'affiche, saisissez les noms des destinataires, puis cliquez sur les icônes d'enregistrement ou de messagerie dans la barre d'outils. Si vous cliquez sur l'icône de messagerie, votre application de messagerie s'ouvre par défaut avec l'enveloppe de protection en tant que pièce jointe. Indiquez les adresses électroniques des destinataires, puis envoyez le courrier électronique. Voir aussi « Application d'une stratégie de protection à des fichiers PDF » à la page 270 Création d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Si vous disposez d'un accès à un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, vous pouvez restreindre les droits et l'accès à un document des personnes enregistrées sur ce serveur. Lorsque vous créez une stratégie utilisateur à l'aide du serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, vous êtes redirigé vers la page Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 270 Protection • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 3 Cliquez sur Créer. 4 Sélectionnez Utiliser le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Sur la page Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur l'option de stratégies, puis sur l'option de création. 6 Saisissez un nom et une description, définissez la période de validité et d'autres options le cas échéant. 7 Sélectionnez des utilisateurs ou des groupes, définissez les droits associés et cliquez sur OK. 8 Indiquez les composants document à chiffrer et si vous souhaitez utiliser un filigrane. 9 Une fois l'opération terminée, cliquez sur Enregistrer en haut de la page. Application d'une stratégie de protection à des fichiers PDF Il est possible d'appliquer à un document PDF soit une stratégie d'entreprise, soit une stratégie utilisateur. Pour appliquer une stratégie de serveur à un document, connectez-vous au serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Il est impératif de stocker les stratégies de protection Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management sur un serveur, ce qui n'est pas le cas pour les documents PDF auxquels elles s'appliquent . Pour appliquer des stratégies à des documents PDF, vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat, des séquences de traitement par lot sur un serveur ou d'autres applications, telles que Microsoft Outlook. Seul l'administrateur des stratégies peut modifier ou supprimer des stratégies d'entreprise. Pour plus de détails sur la modification de stratégies de protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Gérer mon compte. puis cliquez sur Aide dans le coin supérieur gauche. Voir aussi « Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES » à la page 265 Application d'une stratégie de protection à un document PDF 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Si vous utilisez une stratégie serveur, cliquez sur le bouton Protection dans la barre d'outils Tâches. Choisissez ensuite Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Actualiser les stratégies de protection. L'actualisation des stratégies vous assure d' avoir accès aux stratégies serveur les plus récentes. 3 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. Sélectionnez une stratégie, puis cliquez sur Appliquer au document. Dans le menu Protection, vous pouvez distinguer les stratégies d'entreprise des stratégies utilisateur grâce à leurs icônes respectives.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 271 Protection Application d'une stratégie à une pièce jointe dans Outlook Vous pouvez envoyer différents types de fichier en tant que pièces jointes protégées dans Microsoft Outlook. Cette option peut être activée uniquement si Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES est installé et disponible dans Acrobat. 1 Dans Outlook, choisissez Fichier > Nouveau > Message. 2 Sur la barre d'outils, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé . 3 Sélectionnez le fichier à joindre en entrant le chemin ou en cliquant sur Parcourir. 4 Spécifiez la méthode de protection de document voulue, puis cliquez sur OK. Le fichier est converti au format PDF, puis chiffré à l'aide de la méthode de protection choisie. 5 Rédigez le contenu du message, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Suppression d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur d'un document PDF Si vous en avez reçu les droits, vous pouvez supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF. En général, l'auteur du document a le droit de supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. Exporter les paramètres de protection 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection> Exporter les paramètres de protection. 2 Choisissez le groupe de paramètres que vous souhaitez partager et cliquez sur OK. 3 Vérifiez et modifiez les paramètres de protection selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur Exporter. 4 Sélectionnez la méthode à utiliser pour le chiffrement des paramètres de protection, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Certifiez le fichier. Copiez, modifiez ou supprimez une stratégie. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 2 Dans le menu Affichage, indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher l'ensemble des stratégies auxquelles vous avez accès, les stratégies utilisateur que vous avez créées ou les stratégies d’entreprise. 3 Sélectionnez une stratégie et utilisez ensuite les options que vous désirez : Remarque : Les options de modification ou de suppression des stratégies d'entreprise ne sont disponibles que si vous disposez de droits d'administrateur pour le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. La modification de ces stratégies ne peut s'effectuer que sur le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, qui s'ouvre automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une option. Copier Crée une stratégie qui est basée sur les paramètres d'une stratégie existante. Modifier La modification d'une stratégie utilisateur stockée sur l'ordinateur local n'a d'effet que sur les documents auxquels cette stratégie est appliquée après la modification en question. Dans le cas des stratégies utilisateur stockées UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 272 Protection sur le serveur, il est possible de modifier les droits d'accès et d'autres options. Cette option n’est pas disponible pour les stratégies d’entreprise. Supprimer Il est possible que cette option soit indisponible pour les stratégies d'entreprise. Favori Cette option permet d'ajouter la stratégie sélectionnée au menu Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches et au menu Options avancées > Protection. Vous pouvez appliquer l'option Favoris à plusieurs stratégies. Faites usage de cette option pour faciliter l'accès à une stratégie Une étoile s'affiche en regard d'une stratégie favorite. (Pour supprimer une stratégie des favoris, cliquez à nouveau sur Favoris.) Révocation d'un fichier PDF protégé par une stratégie Si vous devez restreindre l'accès à un document PDF protégé par stratégie que vous avez rendu accessible à un groupe d'utilisateurs, vous avez la possibilité de révoquer ce document. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le document PDF et connectez-vous à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. • Dans un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents, connectez-vous à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, puis choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Adobe Rights Management > Révoquer le document. 3 Dans le menu de la page Web, choisissez une option décrivant le motif de la révocation du document ou rédigez un message. Si vous remplacez le document révoqué, saisissez l'adresse URL du nouveau document. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer vos modifications. Création ou obtention d'une identification numérique A propos des identifications numériques Les identifications (ID) numériques contiennent une clé privée que vous protégez et une clé publique (un certificat) que vous partagez avec des tiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 273 Protection Une identification numérique est comparable à un permis de conduire ou un passeport. Elle constitue une preuve de votre identité pour les personnes et les institutions avec lesquelles vous communiquez électroniquement. Une identification numérique contient en général votre nom et votre adresse électronique, le nom de la société émettrice, un numéro de série et une date d'expiration. Les identifications numériques contiennent deux clés : la clé publique verrouille ou chiffre les données, et la clé privée déverrouille ou déchiffre les données. Lorsque vous signez des documents PDF, vous utilisez la clé privée pour apposer votre signature numérique. Vous diffusez le certificat contenant la clé publique et d'autres informations d'identification aux personnes devant valider votre signature, authentifier votre identité ou chiffrer des informations pour vous. Seule la clé privée déverrouille des informations chiffrées à l'aide de votre certificat. Veillez donc à la stocker en lieu sûr. Vous devez posséder une identification numérique pour signer et certifier des documents PDF, ainsi que pour les chiffrer à l'aide d'un certificat. Vous pouvez vous procurer une identification numérique auprès d'un fournisseur tiers ou en créer une autosignée. Les identifications numériques autosignées s'avèrent intéressantes dans de nombreuses situations. Toutefois, pour prouver votre identité dans la plupart des transactions commerciales, vous avez besoin d'une identification numérique émise par un fournisseur tiers approuvé appelé autorité de certification. Etant donné que l'autorité de certification est responsable de l'authentification de votre identité, choisissez-en une approuvée par les principales entreprises de commerce sur Internet. Visitez le site Web d'Adobe pour plus de détails sur les partenaires de sécurité d'Adobe qui proposent des identifications numériques et d'autres solutions de protection. S'il vous arrive de signer des documents dans différents contextes ou selon différentes méthodes de certification, vous pouvez obtenir plusieurs identifications numériques correspondant chacune à une tâche spécifique. Les identifications numériques sont habituellement protégées par un mot de passe et peuvent être stockées sur votre ordinateur sous la forme d'un fichier PKCS #12, sur une carte à puce ou un jeton matériel, dans le magasin de certificats Windows ou sur un serveur d'identifications d'itinérance. Acrobat inclut un gestionnaire de signatures par défaut qui peut accéder aux identifications numériques se trouvant à l'un de ces emplacements. (Vous devez enregistrer l'identification numérique dans Acrobat pour pouvoir l'utiliser.) Voir aussi « Partage d'un certificat avec d'autres utilisateurs » à la page 259 « Cartes à puce et jetons matériels » à la page 275 Enregistrement d'une identification numérique Vous devez enregistrer votre identification numérique dans Acrobat avant de pouvoir l'utiliser. Si vous avez créé un fichier d'identification numérique et qu'il n'apparaît pas dans la liste des identifications numériques, recherchez-le Ajoutez-le ensuite à la liste. Vous pouvez reconnaître les fichiers d'identification numérique grâce à leur extension. Pour les fichiers PKCS #12, l'extension est .pfx sous Windows et .p12 sous Mac OS. Afin de terminer cette tâche, vous avez besoin du mot de passe (le cas échéant) créé pour l'identification numérique. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 274 Protection 4 Sélectionnez ID numérique personnelle existante provenant et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : d'un fichier Sélectionnez cette option si vous avez obtenu une identification numérique sous forme de fichier électronique. Suivez les invites permettant de sélectionner le fichier d'identification numérique, tapez le mot de passe, puis ajoutez l'identification numérique à la liste. D'une ID numérique d'itinérance stockée sur un serveur Sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une ID numérique stockée sur un serveur de signatures. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, tapez le nom du serveur et l'URL où se trouve l'identification d'itinérance. D'un périphérique connecté à cet ordinateur Sélectionnez cette option si un jeton matériel ou de protection est connecté à l'ordinateur. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les instructions à l'écran pour enregistrer votre ID numérique. Création d'une identification numérique Si vous n'utilisez pas d'identification numérique de fournisseur tiers, vous pouvez créer une identification numérique autosignée. Lorsque vous créez une identification numérique, celle-ci stocke une clé privée chiffrée utilisée pour la signature ou le déchiffrement des documents, ainsi qu’une clé publique incluse dans un certificat. Utilisez le certificat pour valider les signatures et chiffrer les documents. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID . 3 Sélectionnez Nouvelle ID à créer maintenant, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Spécifiez l'emplacement de stockage de l'ID numérique, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Nouveau fichier d'ID numériques PKCS#12 Stocke les informations dans un fichier que vous pouvez envoyer à des tiers. Les extensions de fichier PKCS#12 sont .pfx sous Windows et .p12 sous Mac OS. Les fichiers peuvent être utilisés en alternance par les systèmes d'exploitation. Si vous déplacez un fichier d'un système d'exploitation vers un autre, Acrobat le reconnaîtra systématiquement. Magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement) Stocke l'identification numérique à un emplacement également accessible pour les applications Windows. 5 Tapez le nom, l'adresse électronique et les autres informations personnelles relatives à votre ID numérique. Lorsque vous certifiez ou signez un document, le nom s'affiche dans le panneau Signatures et dans le champ de signature. 6 (Facultatif) Pour représenter les caractères étendus à l'aide de valeurs Unicode, sélectionnez Activer la prise en charge Unicode, puis spécifiez des valeurs Unicode dans les champs appropriés. 7 Choisissez une option dans le menu Algorithme de la clé. L’algorithme RSA à 2 048 bits offre une meilleure protection que celui à 1 024 bits. Ce dernier, en revanche, bénéficie d'une compatibilité plus étendue. 8 Dans le menu Utiliser l'ID numérique pour, précisez si vous voulez utiliser l'identification numérique pour les signatures, le chiffrement des données ou les deux. Cliquez sur Terminer. Vous pouvez exporter et envoyer votre fichier de certificat aux personnes susceptibles d'être amenées à authentifier votre signature. Important : Effectuez une copie de sauvegarde de votre fichier d'identification numérique. En effet, si ce fichier est perdu ou endommagé, ou si vous ne vous souvenez plus du mot de passe associé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour apposer ou authentifier des signatures.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 275 Protection Configuration d'un compte d'identification d'itinérance Une identification d'itinérance est une identification numérique stockée sur un serveur et pouvant être téléchargée vers le dossier d'itinérance de l'abonné à la demande de ce dernier. Pour accéder à une ID d'itinérance, vous devez disposer d'une connexion Internet active et un compte d'une entreprise qui fournit des ID numérique d'itinérance. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Identifications numériques, choisissez Comptes d'ID d'itinérance, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un compte. 3 Saisissez le nom et l'URL du serveur d'identifications d'itinérance, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe qui vous ont été assignés ou suivez les instructions de création d'un compte. Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Terminer. 5 Sélectionnez votre identification d'itinérance ou cliquez sur Déconnexion. Lorsque vous utilisez une identification d'itinérance pour une tâche, vous êtes automatiquement connecté au serveur d'identifications d'itinérance si votre déclaration d'authentification n'est pas arrivée à échéance. Cartes à puce et jetons matériels Une carte à puce ressemble à une carte de crédit et stocke votre identification numérique sur une puce de microprocesseur incorporée. Vous pouvez utiliser l'identification numérique résidant sur une carte à puce pour signer et déchiffrer des documents sur des périphériques dotés d'un lecteur de carte à puce. De même, un jeton matériel de protection est un périphérique de la taille d'une clé USB qui permet de stocker des identifications numériques et des données d'authentification. Vous pouvez accéder à votre identification numérique en connectant le jeton au port USB de l'ordinateur ou du périphérique portable. Certains lecteurs de cartes à puce comprennent un clavier destiné à saisir un numéro d'identification personnel (PIN). Si vous stockez votre identification numérique sur une carte à puce ou un jeton matériel, vous devez le spécifier lorsque vous signez ou certifiez des documents. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une identification numérique » à la page 273 Spécification de l'identification numérique par défaut Pour éviter l'affichage répété de ces invites, sélectionnez une identification numérique à utiliser systématiquement pour la signature ou la certification des documents. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Identifications numériques dans le panneau de gauche, puis sélectionnez l'identification numérique à utiliser par défaut. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Options d'utilisation , puis choisissez une tâche pour laquelle vous souhaitez définir l'ID numérique par défaut. Si vous souhaitez configurer l'ID numérique comme ID par défaut pour deux tâches, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Options d'utilisation et sélectionnez une seconde option.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 276 Protection Les options sélectionnées sont signalées par une coche. Si vous sélectionnez uniquement l'option de signature, une icône de signature s'affiche en regard de l'ID numérique. Si vous sélectionnez seulement l'option de chiffrement, une icône de verrou s'affiche. Si vous sélectionnez l'option de certification seule ou avec l'option de signature, une icône de ruban bleu s'affiche. Pour effacer une ID numérique par défaut, recommencez ces étapes et désélectionnez les options d'utilisation activées. Modifiez le mot de passe et le délai d'expiration d'une identification numérique Les mots de passe et délais d'expiration peuvent être définis pour des identifications PKCS#12. Si l'identification PKCS#12 contient plusieurs identifications, vous devez configurer le mot de passe et le délai d'expiration au niveau du fichier. Remarque : Les identifications numériques autosignées sont valables 5 ans. Passée la date d'expiration, vous pouvez utiliser une telle identification pour ouvrir un document, mais pas pour le signer ni le chiffrer. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Développez l'entrée Identifications numériques, puis Fichiers d'ID numériques dans la liste de gauche. Cliquez ensuite sur une identification numérique dans la liste de droite. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Changer le mot de passe. Saisissez l'ancien et le nouveau mot de passe. Confirmez le nouveau mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Avec l'ID toujours active, cliquez sur le bouton Délai d'expiration du mot de passe. 5 Spécifiez la fréquence des invites de mot de passe : Toujours Affiche une invite chaque fois que vous utilisez l'identification numérique. Après Permet de définit un intervalle. Une fois par session Affiche une invite une fois à chaque ouverture d'Acrobat. Jamais Vous n'êtes jamais invité à saisir de mot de passe. 6 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Veillez à sauvegarder votre mot de passe dans un endroit sûr. Si vous perdez le mot de passe, créez une nouvelle identification numérique autosignée ou achetez une identification auprès d'un fournisseur tiers. Suppression d'une identification numérique Lorsque vous supprimez une identification numérique dans Acrobat, vous supprimez également le fichier PKCS #12 contenant la clé privée et le certificat. Avant de procéder à cette opération, assurez-vous que l'identification numérique n'est pas utilisée par d'autres programmes ou requise pour le déchiffrement de certains documents. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez supprimer que les identifications numériques autosignées créées dans Acrobat. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 277 Protection 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis sélectionnez l'identification numérique à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer l'ID, puis sur OK. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un certificat des identités approuvées » à la page 264 Protection d'une identification numérique En protégeant vos ID numériques, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation non autorisée de vos clés privées pour la signature ou le déchiffrement de documents confidentiels. Assurez-vous qu'une procédure est en place au cas où votre identification numérique viendrait à être perdue ou volée. Comment protéger une identification numérique Lorsque des clés privées sont stockées sur des jetons matériels, des cartes à puce ou d'autres périphériques matériels protégés par un mot de passe ou par un code PIN, veillez à utiliser un mot de passe ou un code PIN sécurisé. Ne révélez jamais votre mot de passe. Si vous devez garder une trace écrite de votre mot de passe, conservez-la en lieu sûr. Contactez votre administrateur système pour qu'il vous guide dans le choix d'un mot de passe sécurisé. Observez les règles suivantes pour créer un mot de passe sécurisé : utilisez au moins huit caractères en combinant des minuscules et des majuscules à des chiffres et des caractères spéciaux. Choisissez un mot de passe difficile à deviner ou à pirater, mais que vous pouvez mémoriser sans avoir à le noter. N’utilisez pas de mots bien orthographiés dans quelque langue que ce soit, car ils sont vulnérables à une « attaque de dictionnaire » qui permet de trouver les mots de passe en quelques minutes. Enfin, modifiez votre mot de passe régulièrement et contactez l'administrateur système pour qu'il vous aide dans le choix d'un mot de passe sécurisé. Afin de protéger vos clés privées dans les fichiers P12/PFX, utilisez un mot de passe sécurisé et définissez correctement les options d'expiration du mot de passe. Si vous utilisez un fichier P12 pour stocker des clés privées pour la signature, définissez l'expiration de votre mot de passe afin qu'il soit toujours exigé (option par défaut). Si vous utilisez le fichier P12 pour stocker des clés privées pour le déchiffrement de documents, assurez-vous de disposer d'une copie de sauvegarde de ces clés ou du fichier P12. Vous pourrez ainsi continuer à ouvrir des documents chiffrés, même si vous perdez les clés privées. Les mécanismes utilisés pour la protection des clés privées stockées dans le magasin de certificats Windows varient en fonction de la société de stockage. Contactez le fournisseur afin de déterminer comment protéger au mieux ces clés de tout accès non autorisé et comment les sauvegarder. En général, utilisez le mécanisme d'authentification disponible le plus sûr et, le cas échéant, exigez un mot de passe ou code PIN sécurisé. En cas de perte ou de vol d'une ID numérique Si votre ID numérique a été fournie par une autorité de certification, contactez-la immédiatement et demandez la révocation du certificat actif. Cessez également d'utiliser la clé privée. Si vous avez généré votre propre ID numérique, détruisez-la et contactez toute personne à qui vous aviez envoyé la clé publique correspondante (certificat). UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 278 Protection Suppression du contenu confidentiel Préparation d'un document PDF pour la diffusion Avant de diffuser un document PDF, il est conseillé de vérifier s'il contient des informations à caractère confidentiel ou privé permettant de remonter jusqu'à vous. De telles informations peuvent être masquées ou ne pas être apparentes à première vue. Par exemple, si vous avez créé un fichier PDF, il est probable que ses métadonnées indiquent le nom de l'auteur, c'est-à-dire le vôtre. Vous souhaiterez peut-être également supprimer le contenu risquant de modifier accidentellement l'aspect du document. Les scripts JavaScript, les actions et les champs de formulaire sont des types de contenu sujets à modification. Si le document ne nécessite pas ces éléments, supprimez-les avant de le diffuser. La commande Examiner le document permet de rechercher et de supprimer le contenu masqué d'un document PDF. Pour supprimer des images et du texte confidentiels visibles dans un document PDF, utilisez les outils de biffure. Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF Servez-vous de la fonction Examiner le document pour rechercher et supprimer des informations indésirables dans un document, telles que le texte masqué, les métadonnées, les commentaires et les pièces jointes. Si vous souhaitez vérifier la présence d'informations masquées dans chaque document PDF avant de le fermer ou de l'envoyer par messagerie, configurez l'option adéquate dans les préférences de documents via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 1 Choisissez Document > Examiner le document. Si des éléments sont détectés, ils sont répertoriés dans le panneau Examiner le document et signalés par une coche placée en regard de leur nom. 2 Assurez-vous que les cases sont cochées pour les seuls éléments à supprimer du document: Métadonnées Ces métadonnées fournissent des informations sur le document et sur son contenu, telles que le nom de l'auteur, les mots-clés et les informations sur les droits d'auteur, qui peuvent être utilisées par des utilitaires de recherche. Pour afficher les métadonnées, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Pièces jointes Il est possible de joindre au document PDF des fichiers de n'importe quel format sous forme de pièce jointe. Pour visualiser les pièces jointes, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes. Annotations et commentaires Cet élément comprend tous les commentaires ajoutés au document PDF à l'aide des outils de commentaire et d'annotation, notamment les fichiers joints sous forme de commentaires. Pour visualiser les commentaires, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Commentaires. Zones de formulaire Cet élément comprend les champs de formulaire (champs de signature inclus), et les actions et calculs associés. Si vous supprimez cet élément, tous les champs de formulaire sont aplatis et ne peuvent plus être remplis, modifiés ou signés. Texte masqué sur les pages Cet élément indique le texte contenu dans le document PDF qui est soit transparent, soit dissimulé par d'autres informations ou encore de la même couleur que l'arrière-plan. Pour afficher le texte masqué, cliquez sur Aperçu. Cliquez sur les boutons de flèche double pour parcourir les pages contenant du texte masqué, puis UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 279 Protection sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : Afficher le texte masqué, Afficher le texte visible ou Afficher le texte masqué et le texte visible. Calques masqués Les documents PDF peuvent contenir plusieurs calques que vous choisissez d'afficher ou de masquer. La suppression des calques masqués élimine ces calques du document PDF et aplatit les calques restants en un seul calque. Pour visualiser les calques, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Calques. Signets Les signets sont des liens dotés d'un texte de présentation ouvrant des pages spécifiques du document PDF. Pour visualiser les signets, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets. Index de recherche incorporé Un index de recherche incorporé accélère les recherches dans le fichier. Pour savoir si le document PDF contient un index de recherche, choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. La suppression des index diminue la taille du fichier mais augmente le temps de recherche dans le document PDF. Page masquée et contenu d'image supprimés Les documents PDF conservent quelquefois le contenu qui a été supprimé et qui n'est plus visible (pages recadrées ou pages/images supprimées, par exemple). Remarque : La fonction Examiner le document ne permet pas de détecter ou de supprimer les liens. Si vous souhaitez supprimer des liens, utilisez Optimisation PDF. Voir « Optimisation PDF » à la page 356. 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer afin de supprimer tous les éléments sélectionnés du fichier, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Lorsque vous supprimez des éléments sélectionnés, les éléments supplémentaires sont automatiquement éliminés du document : signatures numériques ; informations sur le document ajoutées par des applications et des modules externes tiers ; et des fonctions spéciales permettant aux utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader de réviser, de signer et de remplir les documents PDF. 4 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier. Si vous souhaitez conserver le fichier d'origine, enregistrez le fichier sous un autre nom et/ou à un autre emplacement. Le contenu sélectionné est supprimé de manière définitive lors de l'enregistrement du fichier. Si vous fermez le fichier sans l'enregistrer, vous devez recommencer cette procédure en vous assurant d'enregistrer le fichier. Biffure du contenu confidentiel Les outils de biffure permettent de supprimer (biffer) de manière permanente le texte et les images visibles d'un document PDF. A la place des éléments supprimés, vous pouvez définir les biffures sous forme de zones colorées ou laisser l'emplacement vide. Vous avez la possibilité de superposer du texte ou des codes de biffure aux biffures. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez localiser et supprimer des mots ou expressions spécifiques, utilisez plutôt l'outil Rechercher et biffer . Texte à biffer (à gauche) et texte biffé (à droite) 1 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Biffure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 280 Protection 2 (Facultatif) Pour définir l'aspect des biffures, cliquez sur Propriétés de biffure. 3 Activez l'outil Repérer les biffures . 4 Biffez les éléments à supprimer en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez deux fois sur un mot ou une image pour le (la) sélectionner. • Appuyez sur la touche Ctrl à mesure que vous faites glisser le pointeur pour sélectionner une ligne, un bloc de texte, un objet ou une zone. Utilisez cette méthode pour sélectionner des zones sur une page de document numérisé. Pour afficher un aperçu de l'aspect des biffures, immobilisez le pointeur sur la zone marquée. 5 Pour biffer les éléments marqués, cliquez sur l'outil Appliquer les biffures sur la barre d'outils Biffure. 6 Cliquez sur OK pour supprimer les éléments. Les éléments ne sont définitivement supprimés du document qu'après l'enregistrement de ce dernier. 7 Si vous souhaitez rechercher et supprimer des informations masquées dans le document à l'aide de la fonction Examiner le document, cliquez sur Oui. Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur Non. 8 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier. Si vous souhaitez conserver le fichier d'origine, enregistrez le fichier sous un autre nom et/ou à un autre emplacement. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des outils de biffure à des fins juridiques, voir http://blogs.adobe.com/acrolaw/. Recherche et biffure de mots Faites appel à l'outil Rechercher et biffer afin d'identifier et de supprimer des mots ou expressions dans un ou plusieurs documents PDF contenant du texte disponible pour la recherche. Remarque : L'outil Rechercher et biffer ne fonctionne pas dans les fichiers PDF protégés (chiffrés). 1 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Biffure, puis activez l'outil Rechercher et biffer . 2 Indiquez si vous souhaitez effectuer des recherches dans le document PDF actif ou dans des documents PDF situés ailleurs. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour identifier un seul mot ou une seule expression, choisissez Un mot ou une expression et saisissez le mot ou l'expression dans la zone de texte. • Pour rechercher plusieurs mots, choisissez Plusieurs mots ou une expression, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner des mots. Saisissez chaque mot dans la zone de texte Nouveau mot ou expression, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Il est également possible d'importer un fichier texte dans la liste de mots ou d'expressions à chercher. • Pour effectuer des recherches concernant un modèle (par exemple, des numéros de téléphone, des numéros de cartes bancaires, des adresses électroniques, des numéros de sécurité sociale ou des dates), cliquez sur Modèles. Optez pour l'un des modèles suivants : (En anglais uniquement) 4 Cliquez sur Rechercher et biffer. 5 Dans les résultats de la recherche, cliquez sur le signe plus (+) en regard du nom du document pour obtenir la liste de toutes les occurrences du mot ou de l'expression. Sélectionnez ensuite les occurrences à marquer pour la biffure : • Pour sélectionner l'ensemble des occurrences de la liste, cliquez sur Sélectionner tout. • Pour sélectionner des occurrences individuelles, cochez la case située en regard du nom de l'élément à biffer. Cliquez sur le texte situé en regard d'une case à cocher pour afficher l'occurrence sur la page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 281 Protection • Pour ne marquer aucune occurrence, fermez la fenêtre Recherche avancée ou cliquez sur Nouvelle recherche pour recommencer. 6 Si vous avez sélectionné des occurrences à marquer pour la biffure, cliquez sur Marquer les occurrences sélectionnées pour biffure. Les éléments que vous avez cochés dans la liste sont marqués pour la biffure. Remarque : Si le fichier n'est pas encore enregistré, vous pouvez sélectionner des biffures dans le document et les supprimer en appuyant sur la touche Suppr. Les biffures sont conservées dans le document une fois le fichier enregistré. 7 Pour supprimer les éléments marqués, cliquez sur l'outil Appliquer les biffures de la barre d'outils Biffure, puis sur OK. Les éléments ne sont définitivement supprimés du document qu'après l'enregistrement de ce dernier. 8 Si vous souhaitez rechercher et supprimer des informations masquées dans le document à l'aide de la fonction Examiner le document, cliquez sur Oui. Dans le cas contraire, cliquez sur Non. 9 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier. Si vous souhaitez conserver le fichier d'origine, enregistrez le fichier sous un autre nom et/ou à un autre emplacement. Voir aussi « Recherche dans des fichiers PDF » à la page 388 Modification de l'aspect des marques de biffure Par défaut, les images et le texte biffés sont remplacés par des zones noires. Vous pouvez définir l'aspect par défaut des biffures avant de marquer des éléments à biffer ou changer l'aspect des biffures avant de les appliquer au document. Définition de l'aspect par défaut des biffures 1 Sur la barre d'outils Biffure, cliquez sur Propriétés de biffure. 2 Sous l'onglet Aspect, sélectionnez les options à modifier, puis cliquez sur OK : • Cliquez sur l'icône Couleur de la zone de biffure et sélectionnez une couleur de remplissage dans la palette Couleur afin de combler les zones remplaçant les éléments supprimés. Choisissez Aucune couleur pour laisser vide la zone de biffure. • Cochez la case Utiliser une incrustation afin de sélectionner le texte personnalisé ou les options de code de biffure. Sélectionnez la police, le corps et l'alignement du texte. • Sélectionnez l'option Texte personnalisé, puis tapez le texte devant figurer dans la zone de biffure. • Sélectionnez l'option Code de biffure, puis choisissez un code dans un jeu existant ou définissez un nouveau jeu ou un nouveau code en cliquant sur Modifier les codes. Propriétés du texte de biffure Texte personnalisé Affiche le texte saisi dans la zone Texte personnalisé sur la biffure. Police Affiche le texte personnalisé dans la police sélectionnée. Corps Affiche le texte personnalisé dans le corps de police sélectionné (en points). Ajuster automatiquement le texte à la zone de biffure Redimensionne le texte personnalisé pour qu'il tienne dans la zone biffée. Si elle est cochée, cette option écrase le paramètre Corps du texte d'incrustation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 282 Protection Couleur de police Affiche le texte personnalisé dans la couleur sélectionnée, laquelle est modifiable par un clic sur la nuance de couleur. Répéter le texte d'incrustation Remplit la zone biffée avec autant d'occurrences du texte personnalisé que nécessaire, sans changer la taille de la police. Si, par exemple, vous spécifiez la lettre x ou un tiret (-) comme texte personnalisé, ces caractères sont répétés tout au long de la zone biffée. Alignement Définit l'alignement du texte. Création et modification des codes de biffure Les options Code de biffure et Texte personnalisé permettent de créer des surimpressions de texte sur des zones contenant des marques de biffure. Les codes de biffure se distinguent par le fait qu'il s'agit d'entrées de texte que vous pouvez enregistrer, exporter et importer. Un jeu de codes peut contenir plusieurs codes. Remarque : Les codes n'enregistrent pas les attributs actifs de texte d'incrustation dans la définition de code, comme les couleurs, les attributs de la police, la répétition du texte ou la taille du texte. Ils rendent uniquement le texte d'incrustation réutilisable lors de sessions ultérieures et par d'autres utilisateurs avec lesquels vous pouvez partager les jeux de codes. Vous définissez les autres attributs de code dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de biffure. Création d'un code de biffure et d'un jeu de codes 1 Activez l'outil Propriétés de biffure sur la barre d'outils Biffure. 2 Cochez la case Utiliser une incrustation. 3 Sélectionnez l'option Code de biffure, puis cliquez sur Modifier les codes. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur de code de biffure, cliquez sur Ajouter un jeu. 5 (Facultatif) Saisissez un nouveau nom de jeu dans la zone de texte sous la liste des jeux de codes, puis cliquez sur Renommer le jeu. 6 Cliquez sur Ajouter un code, tapez le texte devant servir de texte d'incrustation dans la zone placée sous la liste des entrées de code, puis cliquez sur Renommer le code. 7 Recommencez l'étape ci-avant pour ajouter une autre entrée de code à ce jeu de codes, ou les trois étapes précédentes pour créer d'autres jeux de codes et codes. Modification d'un code de biffure et d'un jeu de codes 1 Activez l'outil Propriétés de biffure sur la barre d'outils Biffure. 2 Cochez la case Utiliser une incrustation, puis sélectionnez Code de biffure. 3 Sélectionnez un jeu de codes dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur Modifier les codes. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur de code de biffure, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour supprimer un jeu de codes et toutes les entrées de codes sous-jacentes, sélectionnez le jeu voulu et cliquez sur Supprimer le jeu. • Pour exporter un jeu de codes vers un fichier XML à réutiliser dans d'autres fichiers PDF ou à partager avec d'autres utilisateurs, cliquez sur Exporter un jeu, sélectionnez un emplacement et un nom de fichier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour importer un jeu de codes précédemment enregistré, cliquez sur Importer un jeu, localisez le fichier et sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 283 Protection • Pour renommer un jeu de codes, tapez un nouveau nom dans la zone de texte placée sous la liste et cliquez sur Renommer le jeu. 5 Avec le jeu de codes actif, sélectionnez l'entrée de code à modifier, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes :: • Pour supprimer une entrée de code, cliquez sur Supprimer le code. • Pour renommer une entrée de code, tapez un nouveau nom dans la zone de texte placée sous la liste et cliquez sur Renommer le code.284 Chapitre 9 : Signatures numériques Une signature numérique s'utilise de la même manière qu'une signature à la main, afin d'approuver des documents. Elle permet de vérifier votre identité et peut comprendre une photo, l'image de votre signature manuscrite ou toute information personnelle de votre choix. L'auteur d'un document peut en authentifier le contenu en y apposant une signature de certification. Signatures numériques A propos des signatures numériques A l'instar d'une signature manuscrite classique, une signature numérique permet d'identifier le signataire d'un document. Contrairement à une signature manuscrite, une signature numérique est très difficile à imiter parce qu'elle contient des informations chiffrées exclusivement utilisées par le signataire et se vérifie facilement. La plupart des signatures numériques constituent ce que l'on appelle des signatures d'approbation. Les signatures qui permettent de certifier un document Adobe® PDF sont des signatures de certification. Seul le premier signataire d'un fichier PDF (en général, l'auteur) peut y ajouter une signature de certification. Une signature de certification atteste de l'authenticité du contenu d'un document. Elle permet aussi au signataire de spécifier les types de modifications autorisés, qui n'invalideront pas la certification. Toutes les modifications apportées au document sont répertoriées dans le panneau Signatures. Pour signer un document, vous devez obtenir une identification numérique ou en créer une autosignée dans Adobe Acrobat®. L'identification numérique contient une clé privée et un certificat (ou clé publique). La clé privée permet d'ajouter une signature numérique tandis que le certificat est destiné à être partagé avec des tiers qui s'en servent pour valider votre signature. Lors de l'apposition d'une signature numérique, Acrobat utilise un algorithme de hachage afin de générer un condensé de message qu'il chiffre ensuite avec votre clé privée. Acrobat incorpore ce condensé chiffré dans le fichier PDF, ainsi que les informations relatives à votre certificat, une image de votre signature et la version du document au moment de la signature. Remarque : Pour obtenir des informations actualisées concernant les signatures numériques, choisissez Aide > Support en ligne > Base de connaissances, afin d'ouvrir la page de support d'Adobe Acrobat disponible (en anglais) sur le site Web d'Adobe. Recherchez ensuite « digital signatures » (signatures numériques). Signature numérique dans un formulaire PDF Pour des articles sur les signatures numériques, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Signatures numériques dans les documents PDF et Acrobat : www.acrobatusers.com/articles/2006/07/digital_signatures/index.phpUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 285 Signatures numériques • Migration et partage des paramètres de sécurité : www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/sharing_security_settings_90.pdf • Signatures numériques dans Adobe Acrobat 9, modifications et améliorations (PDF) : www.adobe.com/devnet/reader/articles/reader_compatibility.html Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 272 Création d'un aspect de signature Vous pouvez définir l'aspect de votre signature numérique en sélectionnant les options appropriées dans la section Protection de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Par exemple, vous pouvez inclure une image de votre signature manuscrite, le logo d'une société ou une photographie. Vous pouvez également créer différents aspects pour une même signature, que vous utiliserez à différentes fins. Dans certains cas, vous avez la possibilité de fournir un plus grand nombre de détails. L'aspect d'une signature peut, en outre, inclure des informations qui faciliteront son authentification par d'autres utilisateurs, telles que le motif de la signature, les coordonnées de contact, etc. Configurez ces options via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. En sélectionnant ces préférences, vous ajoutez des options à la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, qui s'affiche chaque fois que vous signez un fichier PDF : Formats de signature A. Signature textuelle B. Signature graphique 1 (Facultatif) Si vous souhaitez inclure l'image de votre signature manuscrite dans la signature numérique, numérisez-la puis enregistrez-la sous forme d'image. Placez cette seule image sur une page, puis convertissez le document au format PDF. 2 Cliquez sur le champ de signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Signer le document ou Certifier par une signature visible. Vous pouvez également définir l'aspect de votre signature numérique à partir de la section Protection de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans la section Aspect, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles ou cliquez sur Créer afin de définir un nouvel aspect. 3 Dans le menu Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Signer, choisissez Créer un aspect. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'aspect de la signature, saisissez le titre de l'aspect de la signature. Pour apposer une signature sur un document, vous devez la sélectionner par son titre. Il est donc recommandé de choisir une formule courte et évocatrice. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 286 Signatures numériques 5 Pour la configuration de l'image, choisissez une option : Aucune image Affiche uniquement l'icône de signature numérique par défaut et toute autre information spécifiée dans la zone de configuration du texte. Image importée Affiche une image comportant votre signature numérique. Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure une image de votre signature manuscrite. Pour importer le fichier image, cliquez sur Fichier, puis sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier en question. Nom Affiche uniquement l'icône de la signature numérique par défaut et votre nom tel qu'il figure dans votre fichier d'identification numérique. 6 Dans la zone de configuration du texte, sélectionnez les options que vous souhaitez appliquer à la signature. Cochez la case Identifiant afin d'afficher les attributs utilisateur définis dans votre ID numérique, notamment votre nom, celui de votre société et le pays où vous résidez. 7 Dans Propriétés du texte, définissez le sens d'écriture et le type de chiffres utilisés, puis cliquez sur OK. 8 (Facultatif) Si la boîte de dialogue contient la section Informations supplémentaires sur la signature, indiquez la raison pour laquelle vous signez le document, le lieu de signature et les coordonnées du contact. Ces options sont disponibles à condition de les avoir sélectionnées dans la section Préférences avancées de la boîte de dialogue Préférences (Protection > Préférences avancées > onglet Création). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au document Adobe Acrobat 9 Digital Signature Appearances (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Voir aussi « Activation des langues se lisant de droite à gauche » à la page 62 Définition des préférences de signature 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. 2 Cliquez sur Préférences avancées, puis sur l'onglet Création. 3 (Facultatif) Si vous avez l'intention d'utiliser un module externe tiers comme méthode de signature par défaut, assurez-vous qu'il est bien installé. Choisissez la méthode par défaut de signature des documents. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Inclure l'état de révocation de la signature Incorpore les informations relatives à la validité du certificat ou à sa révocation (nécessaires à la validation de la signature). Cette option accélère le processus de validation puisqu'il n'est pas nécessaire de vérifier en ligne si le certificat a été révoqué ou non. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Afficher les motifs lors de la signature Permet d'ajouter la raison qui a motivé l'apposition de votre signature dans le champ prévu à cet effet. Lors de la signature d'un fichier PDF, un menu s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document. Ce menu permet de sélectionner l'option qui décrit le mieux vos raisons de signer le fichier PDF. Afficher le lieu et les coordonnées lors de la signature Permet d'ajouter au champ de signature les informations relatives à votre situation géographique. Les coordonnées s'affichent dans l'onglet Signataire de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de signature. Lors de la signature d'un fichier PDF, la boîte de dialogue Signer le document présente des zones de texte dans lesquelles vous pouvez entrer ce type d'informations. Activer la révision des avertissements de document Analyse les documents inclus dans le processus de signature à la recherche du contenu susceptible de modifier l'aspect des documents. Le cas échéant, affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document une option permettant d'examiner ce contenu. Choisissez Toujours, Jamais ou Lors de la certification d'un document. Les options disponibles dépendent du paramètre Empêcher la signature jusqu'à la révision des avertissements de document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 287 Signatures numériques Empêcher la signature jusqu'à la révision des avertissements de document Activez cette option pour obliger le signataire à examiner les avertissements liés au document avant de le signer ou de le certifier. Choisissez Toujours, Jamais ou Lors de la certification d'un document. Ajout d'un tampon temporel à une signature Vous pouvez inclure dans votre signature la date et l'heure à laquelle vous signez le document. Les tampons temporels sont plus faciles à vérifier s'ils sont associés à un certificat approuvé par une autorité. L'inclusion d'un tampon temporel permet de prouver à quel moment précis vous avez signé le document et réduit les risques de non-validité de la signature. Vous pouvez obtenir un tampon temporel d'une autorité tierce ou de l'autorité de certification qui vous a remis votre identification numérique. Les tampons temporels s'affichent dans le champ de signature, ainsi que dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de la signature. Si un serveur de tampons temporels est configuré, le tampon apparaît sous l'onglet Date/Heure de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de la signature. En l'absence d'un serveur de tampons temporels, le champ de signature affiche l'heure locale de l'ordinateur au moment de l'apposition de la signature. Remarque : Si vous n'avez pas incorporé de tampon temporel lors de la signature du document, vous pouvez en ajouter un ultérieurement à votre signature. (Voir « Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme » à la page 294.) Si le tampon temporel est ajouté après la signature du document, l'heure utilisée est celle du serveur de tampons temporels. Configuration d'un serveur de tampons temporels Pour configurer un serveur de tampons temporels, vous devez disposer du nom et de l'URL du serveur, du fichier FDF (Forms Data Format) contenant les paramètres serveur ou d'un fichier de paramètres de protection contenant les informations relatives au serveur de tampons temporels. Si vous disposez d'un fichier de paramètres de protection, installez-le et ne suivez pas les instructions de configuration d'un serveur données ci-dessous. Assurez-vous que le fichier de paramètres de protection provient d'une source approuvée. Avant de l'installer, demandez la permission à votre administrateur système ou au service informatique. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Serveurs de tampons temporels dans le panneau gauche. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous disposez d'un fichier FDF contenant les paramètres du serveur de tampons temporels, cliquez sur le bouton Importer . Sélectionnez le fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Si vous disposez de l'URL du serveur de tampons temporels, cliquez sur le bouton Créer . Indiquez un nom, puis l'URL du serveur. Indiquez si le serveur requiert un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Définition d'un serveur de tampons temporels par défaut Si vous avez configuré plusieurs serveurs de tampons temporels, définissez-en un par défaut. Remarque : Avant de définir un serveur de tampons temporels par défaut, il peut s'avérer utile de vérifier si l'autorité concernée facture des frais d'utilisation. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 288 Signatures numériques • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez le serveur de tampons temporels, puis cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut . 3 Cliquez sur OK pour confirmer votre sélection. Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 296 A propos des signatures sur tablette graphique Vous avez la possibilité de signer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'une tablette graphique ou d'un autre dispositif de saisie. Vous pouvez alors appliquer une encre signature au sein d'Acrobat ou utiliser un logiciel tiers qui offrira des possibilités supplémentaires. Les fournisseurs de signatures numériques, tels que Silanis et CIC (Communication Intelligence Corporation), proposent cette fonctionnalité par le biais d'un module externe pris en charge par Acrobat. Ce type de module externe peut restreindre votre accès à certaines fonctions de cryptage d'Acrobat. Pour plus d'informations sur les fournisseurs tiers, rendez-vous sur le site Web d'Adobe. Signature d'un fichier PDF Avant de signer un fichier PDF Vous pouvez accélérer le processus de signature et optimiser les résultats en effectuant à l'avance les préparations suivantes : Remarque : Il faut parfois utiliser une identification numérique particulière pour signer. Par exemple, une société ou un service administratif peut exiger des utilisateurs qu'ils se servent exclusivement des identifications numériques émises dans son service pour signer des documents officiels. Prenez connaissance des stratégies appliquées en matière de signatures numériques dans votre organisation afin de déterminer la source appropriée pour votre identification numérique. • Obtenez une identification numérique ou créez-en une autosignée dans Acrobat. Remarque : Il est impossible de créer une identification numérique autosignée en mode FIPS. • Définissez la méthode de signature par défaut. • Créez l'aspect de votre signature numérique. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir « Création d'un aspect de signature » à la page 285. • Utilisez le mode Aperçu du document afin de supprimer tout contenu dynamique qui pourrait modifier l'aspect du document et vous inciter à apposer votre signature sur un document inapproprié. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du mode Aperçu du document, voir « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 290. • Examinez toutes les pages du document avant de le signer. Le document peut contenir des champs de signature sur plusieurs pages. Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 272UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 289 Signatures numériques Signature d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez approuver un document PDF en y apposant une signature numérique ou une encre signature. La signature numérique permet à plusieurs personnes d'apposer plusieurs signatures au fichier PDF. Lorsque vous signez un document, votre signature numérique s'affiche dans le champ de signature. Son aspect dépend des options que vous avez choisies. Les informations qui constituent votre signature numérique sont incorporées au fichier PDF. Dans Acrobat, le premier signataire du document (en général l'auteur) peut y ajouter une signature de certification lui permettant de limiter les modifications du document. Une encre signature correspond à une marque apposée à la main sur la page, semblable à un dessin libre réalisé avec l'outil Crayon de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. L'encre signature n'offre pas la fonctionnalité avancée de la signature numérique. Contrairement à cette dernière, une encre signature ne fait pas appel à une identification numérique ; il est donc impossible de vérifier l'identité du signataire. La validité d'une signature numérique est vérifiable et prend fin en cas de modification du document, alors que l'encre signature ne comporte aucun état de validité et ne peut indiquer que le document a été modifié. Les encres signatures n'apparaissent pas dans le panneau Signatures du document. Remarque : Pour permettre aux utilisateurs de Reader de signer des documents avec différents types de signatures, choisissez Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader. Apposition d'une signature numérique dans un fichier PDF Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, apposez votre signature en mode Aperçu du document. Reportez-vous à la rubrique « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 290. 1 Cliquez sur le champ de signature ou effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Signer le document. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Signer > Signer le document. • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Signer le document. 2 Si le document ne contient aucun champ de signature, vous êtes invité à en tracer un pour y insérer votre signature. 3 Si vous n'avez spécifié aucune identification numérique, vous êtes invité à le faire ou à créer une identification numérique autosignée. il est déconseillé d'utiliser des certificats autosignés pour les activités exigeant un haut niveau d'intégrité sur l'identité du signataire. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, choisissez une identification numérique à partir du menu Signature. Pour définir une nouvelle identification numérique, choisissez Créer une ID. 5 Pour créer l'aspect de votre signature ou pour tirer parti d'un aspect déjà défini, utilisez le menu Aspect. Si vous n'avez pas encore défini d'aspect ou si vous souhaitez en prévoir un spécialement pour cette signature, choisissez Créer un aspect. 6 Si la valeur de départ et les règles relatives au document vous y autorisent, vous pouvez choisir de verrouiller le document après la signature en activant l'option correspondante. Cette option empêche d'apporter des modifications supplémentaires aux champs de formulaire ou d'ajouter des signatures visibles. Remarque : L'option Verrouiller le document après la signature n'est pas disponible s'il existe d'autres champs de signature non signés ou si le document est géré par le serveur Adobe LiveCycle® Workflow. 7 Si vous avez sélectionné des préférences avancées de signatures numériques, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes en fonction des options choisies dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences : UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 290 Signatures numériques Pour plus d'informations au sujet des préférences avancées de signatures numériques, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Création d'un aspect de signature » à la page 285. • Choisissez le motif de la signature du document. • Entrez votre situation géographique et vos coordonnées. • Consultez les avertissements liés au document, relatifs au contenu pouvant avoir un impact sur la signature. 8 Si votre identification numérique nécessite un mot de passe, saisissez-le dans la zone Mot de passe. Remarque : Certaines identifications numériques sont configurées pour demander un mot de passe ou un autre moyen d'identification de l'utilisateur dès que vous cliquez sur le bouton Signer. 9 Cliquez sur Signer, indiquez le nom de fichier sous lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le document signé, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Choisissez un nom de fichier différent du document non signé original afin de conserver une copie de celui-ci. Si vous signez à partir d'Adobe Reader, utilisez le bouton d'envoi pour soumettre le document signé au serveur après signature. Apposition d'une encre signature dans un fichier PDF L' encre signature reprend la couleur par défaut de l'outil d'annotation Crayon. Pour modifier la couleur de la signature, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'outil Crayon de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Choisissez ensuite Propriétés d'outils par défaut et modifiez la couleur sous l'onglet Aspect. 1 Pour apposer une encre signature dans un fichier PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Appliquer l'encre signature. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Signer > Appliquer l'encre signature. (Cette commande est uniquement disponible si l'auteur du fichier PDF a activé les droits de signature numérique et de commentaire.) • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer dans la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Appliquer l'encre signature. Le curseur prend la forme d'un réticule. 2 Cliquez à l'endroit où vous voulez signer et dessinez votre signature. 3 Pour inclure la signature dans le document, enregistrez le fichier PDF. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas ajouter d'encre signature dans un fichier PDF créé dans LiveCycle Designer ES ou sur le serveur de formulaires LiveCycle. Les fichiers PDF ainsi créés n'acceptent aucun commentaire ni aucune annotation. Signature en mode Aperçu du document Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, utilisez la fonction Aperçu du document lors la signature de documents. Cette fonction analyse le document à la recherche de contenus qui pourraient altérer son aspect. Elle supprime ensuite ces éléments, ce qui vous permet de consulter et de signer le fichier dans un état statique et protégé. La fonction Aperçu du document est très pratique pour vérifier si le document inclut un contenu dynamique ou des dépendances externes. Elle vous aide également à déterminer si le document contient des éléments tels que des champs de formulaire, des objets multimédia ou des scripts JavaScript pouvant avoir une incidence sur son aspect. Après avoir analysé le rapport, vous pouvez contacter l'auteur du document pour lui signaler les éventuels problèmes répertoriés dans le rapport. Par ailleurs, le mode Aperçu du document peut être utilisé en dehors du processus de signature afin de vérifier l'intégrité d'un document. Signature d'un fichier PDF en mode Aperçu du document 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 291 Signatures numériques 2 Sélectionnez l'option Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans le fichier PDF, cliquez sur le champ de signature ou sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Signer le document. La barre de message du document s'affiche et indique l'état et les options de conformité. 4 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Afficher le rapport sur la barre de message du document (le cas échéant) et sélectionnez chaque élément de la liste pour en afficher les détails. Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez la boîte de dialogue de rapport sur les signatures PDF. 5 Après examen de l'état de conformité du document, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document et apposez votre signature numérique. 6 Enregistrez le fichier PDF sous un nom différent du fichier d'origine, puis fermez le document sans effectuer d'autres changements. Avant de certifier un fichier PDF L'auteur d'un document peut accroître l'intégrité du fichier et s'assurer du maintien de sa certification en se préoccupant des points ci-après avant de certifier le fichier PDF : • Désactiver ou supprimer les éléments qui pourraient altérer le document certifié ou amoindrir son intégrité, par exemple les scripts JavaScript, les actions ou les éléments multimédia incorporés. • Si le document doit être signé par d'autres personnes à l'aide d'Adobe Reader, activez les droits d'utilisation pour permettre aux utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader d'apposer une signature numérique (choisissez Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader). • Certifiez ou signez un fichier PDF uniquement après toutes les modifications finales. Si vous effectuez des modifications ou que vous enregistrez à nouveau le document PDF après l'avoir signé, vous risquez de compromettre la validité de votre signature ou l'état de certification du document. L'auteur d'un document peut utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Designer (Windows) pour créer des champs de signature qui se verrouillent après signature et empêchent toute modification pouvant invalider la signature. Pour plus de détails, voir l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Designer. L'auteur d'un formulaire Acrobat a la possibilité de désigner les champs à verrouiller après signature en sélectionnant l'option prévue à cet effet pour le champ de signature. Voir aussi « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 278 Certification d'un fichier PDF Si vous certifiez un fichier PDF, vous indiquez que vous approuvez son contenu. Vous pouvez également indiquer les types de modifications autorisées pour que le document reste certifié. Supposons, par exemple, qu'un service administratif émette un formulaire doté de champs de signature. Une fois le formulaire créé, celui-ci certifie le document, autorisant uniquement les utilisateurs à modifier les champs du formulaire et à signer le document. Les utilisateurs peuvent donc remplir le formulaire et signer le document, mais s'ils suppriment des pages ou ajoutent des commentaires, l'état de certification du document n'est pas conservé. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 292 Signatures numériques Vous pouvez apposer une signature de certification uniquement si le fichier PDF ne contient aucune autre signature. Les signatures de certification peuvent être visibles ou invisibles. Une icône de ruban bleu figurant dans le panneau Signatures indique la présence d'une signature de certification valide. Une identification numérique est nécessaire pour l'ajout de la signature numérique de certification. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signer sur la barre d'outils Tâches et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Certifier par une signature visible. • Certifier par une signature invisible. Si vous choisissez cette option, votre signature apparaît uniquement sur le panneau Signatures. 2 Cliquez sur OK dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous document certifié. Si vous utilisez l'option Certifier par une signature visible, vous pouvez placer la signature dans un champ existant ou définir un nouveau champ pour la signature. Suivez les instructions données dans ces messages pour sélectionner l'emplacement. 3 Si vous apposez une signature visible, tracez le champ à cet effet sur la page. Remarque : Si vous avez activé dans les préférences de protection l'option Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document. 4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour sélectionner une identification numérique, le cas échéant. Spécifiez une identification par défaut pour éviter d'avoir à en choisir une à chaque signature d'un fichier PDF. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de certification du document, spécifiez les modifications autorisées, saisissez votre mot de passe ou code PIN pour votre identification numérique, puis cliquez sur Signer. Remarque : Certaines identifications numériques sont configurées pour demander un mot de passe ou un autre moyen d'identification de l'utilisateur dès que vous cliquez sur le bouton Signer. 6 Enregistrez le fichier PDF sous un nom différent du fichier d'origine, puis fermez le document sans effectuer d'autres changements. Choisissez un nom de fichier différent du document non signé original afin de conserver une copie de celui-ci. Voir aussi « Spécification de l'identification numérique par défaut » à la page 275 « A propos des signatures numériques » à la page 284 Effacement ou suppression d'une signature numérique ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour supprimer une signature, cliquez sur le champ de la signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Effacer la signature. • Pour retirer toutes les signatures d'un document PDF, choisissez Effacer le contenu de tous les champs de signature dans le menu Options du panneau Signatures. Vous pouvez supprimer une signature à condition de l'avoir insérée et d'avoir installé l'identification numérique qui permet de signer. Pour supprimer le champ de signature dans Acrobat, choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet, sélectionnez le champ de signature, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 293 Signatures numériques Personnalisation des propriétés de signature à l'aide de valeurs de base Les valeurs de base offrent un contrôle supplémentaire aux auteurs du document. Elles leur permettent de déterminer les choix que peut effectuer un utilisateur lors de la signature d'un document. En appliquant ces valeurs de base aux champs de signature dans des documents PDF non signés, les auteurs ont la possibilité de personnaliser les options et d'automatiser les tâches. Ils peuvent également spécifier des exigences de signatures pour des éléments tels que les certificats et les serveurs de tampons temporels. Pour plus d'informations à propos de la personnalisation des propriétés de signature à l'aide de valeurs de base, reportez-vous au Digital Signature User Guide (Guide de signature numérique) (PDF) disponible sur www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Authentification d’une signature Authentification d'une signature Une fois les signatures validées, une icône s'affiche dans la barre de message du document pour indiquer l'état de la signature. Des informations complémentaires sur cet état s'affichent dans le panneau Signatures et dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de signature. Les gestionnaires de signatures tiers peuvent fournir d'autres méthodes de validation des signatures. Vérifiez la documentation qui accompagne votre identification numérique tiers. Important : Pour garantir la validation des signatures à l'ouverture d'un document PDF et l'affichage des informations d'authentification avec la signature, définissez vos préférences d'authentification à l'avance. (Voir « Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures » à la page 295.) Si l'état de signature est indéterminé ou non vérifié, validez la signature manuellement pour identifier le problème et la solution éventuelle. Si la signature est non valide, contactez le signataire pour lui signaler le problème. Pour plus d'informations à propos des avertissements liés aux signatures et au sujet des signatures valides et non valides, reportez-vous au Digital Signature User Guide (Guide de signature numérique) (PDF) disponible sur www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Voir aussi « Authentification des informations d'un certificat » à la page 262 « Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur » à la page 260 Validation manuelle d'une signature Vous pouvez évaluer la validité d'une signature numérique en vérifiant ses propriétés. 1 Définissez vos préférences d'authentification des signatures. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique « Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures » à la page 295. 2 Ouvrez le fichier PDF contenant la signature, cliquez sur la signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Valider la signature. La boîte de dialogue Etat de validation de la signature s'affiche, indiquant la validité de cette signature. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés de signature et procédez comme suit : • Si l'état est indéterminé, cliquez sur l'onglet Signataire, puis sur Certificat pour afficher les détails du certificat. Si vous utilisez des identifications numériques autosignées, vérifiez l'exactitude des détails du certificat. Si le certificat n'est pas valide, demandez un certificat valide au signataire. Cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 294 Signatures numériques • Cliquez sur l'onglet Date/Heure afin de vérifier le tampon temporel, le cas échéant. • Cliquez sur l'onglet Informations juridiques pour en savoir plus sur les restrictions juridiques auxquelles est soumise la signature. Dans le panneau Informations juridiques, cliquez sur Afficher les propriétés de l'intégrité du document pour vérifier si le document contient des éléments susceptibles de modifier son aspect. Si le document a été modifié après apposition de la signature, vérifiez la version signée du document et comparez-la à cette version-ci. Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 296 « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 290 « Affichage de versions antérieures d'un document signé » à la page 297 Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme La validation des signatures à long terme permet de vérifier la validité d'une signature bien après que le document a été signé. Pour ce faire, tous les éléments nécessaires à la validation de la signature doivent être incorporés dans le fichier PDF signé. Cette incorporation peut avoir lieu au moment de la signature du document ou après la création de la signature. Sans l'ajout d'informations spécifiques au fichier PDF, la signature qu'il contient ne peut être validée que pendant une période limitée. Cette limitation s'explique par le fait que les certificats liés à la signature finissent par expirer ou sont révoqués. Lorsqu'un certificat expire, l'autorité qui l'a émis n'est plus tenue d'indiquer l'état de révocation du certificat. Si l'état de révocation n'est pas confirmé, il est impossible de valider la signature. Les éléments nécessaires à la validation d'une signature incluent la chaîne du certificat de signature, l'état de révocation du certificat et, éventuellement, un tampon temporel. Si tous les éléments sont disponibles et incorporés lors de l'apposition de la signature, cette dernière peut être validée sans demander de plus amples informations à des ressources externes. Acrobat et Reader permettent d'incorporer tous les éléments nécessaires, à condition que ces éléments soient disponibles. L'auteur du fichier PDF doit activer les droits d'utilisation pour Reader (Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader). Remarque : L'incorporation des informations de tampon temporel nécessite la mise en place d'un serveur de tampons temporels correctement configuré. En outre, l'heure de validation de la signature doit être réglée sur Heure sécurisée (Préférences > Protection > Préférences avancées > Onglet Authentification. Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 296 « Configuration d'un serveur de tampons temporels » à la page 287 « Définition des préférences de signature » à la page 286 Ajout des informations d'authentification lors de la signature 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur que vous utilisez peut se connecter aux ressources réseau appropriées. 2 Vérifiez que la préférence Inclure l'état de révocation de la signature est bien activée. (Préférences > Protection > Préférences avancées > Onglet Création.) Cette préférence est sélectionnée par défaut. 3 Signez le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 295 Signatures numériques Si tous les éléments de la chaîne de certificat sont disponibles, les informations sont automatiquement ajoutées au fichier PDF. Si un serveur de tampons temporels a été configuré, le tampon temporel est également ajouté. Ajout des informations d'authentification après la signature Dans certains cas, les informations de validation de la signature sont indisponibles au moment de la signature, mais peuvent être réunies par la suite. Supposons par exemple qu'un représentant légal d'une entreprise signe un contrat sur son ordinateur portable alors qu'il se déplace en avion. L'ordinateur ne peut se connecter à Internet pour obtenir les informations de tampon temporel et de révocation à ajouter à la signature. Lorsque l'accès à Internet devient possible, tout utilisateur qui valide la signature peut ajouter ces informations au fichier PDF. En outre, toutes les validations de signature ultérieures peuvent reprendre ces informations. 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur peut se connecter aux ressources réseau appropriées, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la signature dans le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Ajouter les informations d'authentification. Cette commande est indisponible si la signature n'est pas valable ou si le certificat utilisé est autosigné. Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. 2 Pour valider automatiquement toutes les signatures d'un fichier PDF à l'ouverture, sélectionnez Authentifier les signatures à l'ouverture d'un document. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. 3 Choisissez Préférences avancées, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Authentification. 4 Sélectionnez les options d'authentification. 5 (Windows uniquement) Cliquez sur l'onglet Intégration à Windows et spécifiez si l'importation d'identités dans la liste d'approbation est possible à partir de la fonction de certificats Windows. Déterminez également si tous les certificats racine situés dans la fonction de certificats Windows doivent être approuvés lors de la validation des signatures et de la certification des documents. Sachez toutefois que la sélection de ces options risque de compromettre la protection. Remarque : Il est déconseillé d'approuver tous les certificats racine situés dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Nombre des certificats distribués avec Windows ont été conçus sans intention d'établir des identités approuvées. Options d'authentification Méthode à utiliser lors de l'authentification Ces options spécifient les méthodes permettant de déterminer le module externe à utiliser lors de la vérification d'une signature. Le module externe adapté est souvent sélectionné automatiquement. Contactez l'administrateur système au sujet des modules externes requis pour la validation des signatures. Exiger la vérification de révocation des certificats lors de l'authentification des signatures Vérifie si les certificats apparaissent dans une liste de certificats exclus au cours de la validation. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Si vous la désactivez, l'état de révocation des signatures d'approbation est ignoré. L'état de révocation est toujours vérifié dans le cas des signatures de certification. Authentifier les signatures avec Sélectionnez une option afin d'indiquer le mode de vérification de la validité de la signature numérique. Vous pouvez vérifier en fonction de l'heure actuelle, en fonction de l'heure définie par un serveur de tampons temporels au moment de l'apposition de la signature (option par défaut) ou encore d'après l'heure de création de la signature.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 296 Signatures numériques Utilisation de tampon temporel obsolète Le processus de validation utilise l'heure sécurisée fournie par le tampon temporel ou incorporée dans la signature, même si le certificat de la signature a expiré. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Si elle est désactivée, il devient possible de rejeter les tampons temporels obsolètes. Présentation du panneau Signatures Le panneau Signatures affiche des informations au sujet de chaque signature dans le document actif et présente un historique des modifications apportées au document depuis la première signature. Chaque signature est dotée d'une icône indiquant l'état actuel d'authentification. Les détails d'authentification sont répertoriés en dessous de chaque signature ; pour les afficher, développez la signature. Le panneau Signatures indique également à quel moment le document a été signé et vous renseigne sur la source d'approbation et le signataire. Authentifiez les signatures dans le panneau Signatures. Affichage du panneau Signatures ? Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signatures ou cliquez sur le panneau Signatures dans la barre de message du document. Dans le panneau Signatures, vous pouvez cliquer sur un champ de signature avec le bouton droit de la souris pour effectuer la plupart des tâches associées, telles que l'apposition, l'effacement ou la validation d'une signature. Il se peut néanmoins, dans certains cas, que le champ de signature soit verrouillé après l'apposition d'une signature. Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel Vérifiez l'état de validité d'un certificat de tampons temporels dans la section Résumé de la validité de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature. Voici les messages susceptibles d'être affichés dans le résumé : La date et l'heure de la signature sont celles de l'ordinateur du signataire Il s'agit de l'heure locale de l'ordinateur du signataire. La signature est horodatée Le signataire a utilisé un serveur de tampons temporels et vos paramètres indiquent que vous avez établi une relation de confiance avec ce serveur. La signature est horodatée, mais cet horodatage n'a pu être vérifié Vous devrez éventuellement établir une relation de confiance avec le serveur de tampons temporels. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez procéder comme indiqué ci-après, mais il convient d'abord de vérifier si le serveur de tampons temporels vous est familier et si vous lui faites confiance. Renseignez-vous auprès de votre administrateur système.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 297 Signatures numériques Pour valider une signature contenant un tampon temporel, vous devez obtenir le certificat du serveur de tampons temporels et l'ajouter à votre liste d'identités approuvées. A défaut, le tampon temporel s'affiche avec l'état Non authentifié, et vous devez le valider manuellement. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signature du navigateur, sélectionnez la signature et choisissez Valider la signature dans le menu Options . 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés de la signature dans la boîte de dialogue Etat de validation de la signature. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature, cliquez sur l'onglet Date/Heure pour afficher l'autorité de certification du tampon temporel, puis sur le bouton Certificat. (Ce bouton apparaît dans l'onglet Date/Heure uniquement si le signataire a utilisé un serveur de tampons temporels.) 4 Dans le Programme de visualisation des certificats, cliquez sur l'onglet Approbation afin de déterminer si le certificat de tampons temporels est approuvé. S'il ne l'est pas, mais que vous lui faites confiance, cliquez sur Ajouter aux identités approuvées. Si aucun certificat n'est répertorié pour le serveur de tampons temporels, demandez-en un au signataire. Voir aussi « Protection par certificat d'un document » à la page 257 Affichage de versions antérieures d'un document signé A chaque signature apposée sur un document, une version signée de ce dernier est enregistrée au sein du fichier PDF. Chaque version est enregistrée dans un fichier n'autorisant que l'ajout d'informations. Il est impossible, en outre, de modifier l'original. Vous pouvez accéder à toutes les signatures et versions associées dans le panneau Signatures. 1 Sélectionnez et développez la signature dans le panneau Signatures et choisissez Afficher la version signée dans le menu Options . La version antérieure du document s'ouvre dans un nouveau fichier PDF, le numéro de la version et le nom du signataire étant indiqués sur la barre de titre du fichier. 2 Pour revenir au document original, choisissez son nom dans le menu Fenêtre. Comparaison des différentes versions d'un document signé Lorsqu'un document a été signé, vous pouvez afficher la liste des modifications apportées au document depuis la dernière version. 1 Dans le panneau Signatures, sélectionnez la signature. 2 Choisissez Comparer la version signée à la version active dans le menu Options . 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez le document temporaire.298 Chapitre 10 : Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Les fonctions d'accessibilité assistent les personnes atteintes de déficiences (mobilité réduite, cécité, malvoyance, par exemple) dans leur utilisation d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional et des documents Adobe PDF. Fonctions d'accessibilité A propos des fonctions d'accessibilité Un document ou une application est dit accessible lorsqu'une personne souffrant d'un handicap (mobilité réduite, cécité ou déficience visuelle) peut l'utiliser. Les fonctions d'accessibilité d'Adobe Acrobat, d'Adobe Reader® et du format Adobe Portable Document (PDF) permettent aux personnes handicapées d'utiliser des documents PDF avec ou sans l'aide de lecteurs ou d'agrandisseurs d'écran, et d'imprimantes en braille. La création de documents PDF accessibles tend à profiter à l'ensemble des utilisateurs. Par exemple, la structure du document, grâce à laquelle un lecteur d'écran effectue la lecture audio d'un fichier PDF, permet également de redistribuer le document pour l'adapter à l'écran réduit d'un appareil mobile. De la même manière, l'ordre de tabulation prédéfini d'un formulaire PDF accessible s'avère pratique pour tous les utilisateurs (et pas seulement pour les personnes à mobilité réduite) en facilitant le renseignement des champs de formulaire. Les fonctions d'accessibilité disponibles dans Acrobat et Reader se divisent en deux grandes catégories : les fonctions rendant la lecture des documents PDF plus accessible et celles permettant de créer de tels documents. Pour créer des documents PDF accessibles, utilisez Acrobat, et non Reader. Fonctions rendant la lecture des PDF accessible • Préférences et commandes permettant d'optimiser la sortie pour les logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance telles que l'enregistrement du document sous forme de texte accessible sur une imprimante en braille • Préférences et commandes rendant plus accessible la navigation dans les documents PDF (avec l'automatisation du défilement et de l'ouverture des fichiers PDF jusqu'à la dernière page à lire, par exemple) • Assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité facilitant la configuration de la plupart des préférences relatives à l'accessibilité • Combinaisons de touches remplaçant les actions effectuées à l'aide de la souris • Fonction de redistribution permettant d'afficher un texte PDF avec des caractères de grande taille et de présenter les multiples colonnes d'un fichier PDF en une seule colonne, plus lisible • Conversion du texte en voix avec la fonction Lecture audio • Prise en charge des lecteurs et des agrandisseurs d'écran Fonctions de création de documents PDF accessibles • Création de documents PDF balisés à partir des applications d'origine • Conversion de documents PDF non balisés en PDF balisésUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 299 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution • Paramètre de protection permettant aux lecteurs d'écran d'accéder au texte tout en empêchant les utilisateurs de copier, d'imprimer, de modifier et d'extraire du texte • Possibilité d'ajouter du texte à des pages numérisées en vue d'améliorer l'accessibilité du document • Outils de modification de l'ordre de lecture et de la structure du document • Outils de création de formulaires PDF accessibles Les fonctions d'Acrobat Standard permettent de rendre accessibles des documents PDF existants. Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended offrent des fonctions spécifiques (modification de l'ordre de lecture ou des balises de structure du document) indispensable à l'accessibilité de certaines documents et formulaires PDF. Pour plus d'informations au sujet des fonctions d'accessibilité, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Accessibilité dans Acrobat 9 – présentation, nouvelles fonctions et FAQ : www.adobe.com/accessibility/products/acrobat/ • Informations et actualités relatives à l'accessibilité des produits Adobe : blogs.adobe.com/accessibility/pdf/ • Création d'un document PDF accessible : www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility • Conseils généraux en matière d'accessibilité : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ A propos des documents PDF accessibles Les documents PDF accessibles présentent les caractéristiques suivantes. Texte disponible pour la recherche Un document se composant d'images de texte numérisées est, par essence, inaccessible, car le contenu du document correspond à des images et pas à du texte disponible pour la recherche. Les logiciels d'assistance ne sont pas capables de lire ou d'extraire les mots, les utilisateurs ne sont pas en mesure de sélectionner ou de modifier le texte et vous ne pouvez pas manipuler le document PDF à des fins d'accessibilité. Convertissez les images numérisées du texte en texte disponible pour la recherche à l'aide de la fonction de reconnaissance optique des caractères avant d'appliquer les autres fonctions d'accessibilité au document. Textes descriptifs de remplacement Les lecteurs d'écran ne peuvent pas lire certaines fonctions de document, telles que les images ou les champs de formulaire interactifs, si aucun texte de remplacement n'y est associé. Bien que les lecteurs d'écran puissent lire les liens Web, vous pouvez en fournir une description plus évocatrice au travers du texte de remplacement. Les info-bulles et le texte de remplacement peuvent aider de nombreux utilisateurs, notamment les personnes ayant des difficultés d'apprentissage. Polices autorisant l'extraction de caractères sous forme de texte Les polices utilisées dans un document PDF accessible doivent contenir suffisamment d'informations pour qu'Acrobat puisse extraire tous les caractères sous forme de texte à des fins autres que le simple affichage du texte à l'écran. Acrobat extrait les caractères sous forme de texte Unicode lors de la lecture du document PDF par le biais d'un lecteur d'écran ou de la fonction de lecture audio. Acrobat extrait également les caractères au format Unicode lorsque vous enregistrez le document sous forme de texte pour une imprimante en braille. Cette extraction échoue si Acrobat ne parvient pas à déterminer comment mapper la police aux caractères unicode.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 300 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Ordre de lecture et balises de la structure du document Pour lire le texte d'un document et le présenter sous une forme compréhensible, un lecteur d'écran ou tout autre outil de conversion de texte en voix nécessite l'utilisation d'un document structuré. Les balises de la structure du document PDF définissent l'ordre de lecture et permettent d'identifier les en-têtes, les paragraphes, les sections, les tableaux et d'autres éléments de page. Champs de formulaire interactifs Certains documents PDF contiennent des formulaires à remplir à l'aide d'un ordinateur. Afin d'être accessibles, les champs de formulaire doivent être interactifs. Autrement dit, un utilisateur doit pouvoir saisir des valeurs dans les champs. Outils d'aide à la navigation Les outils d'aide à la navigation contenus dans un document PDF (tels que les liens, les signets, les en-têtes, une table des matières et un ordre de tabulation prédéfini des champs de formulaire) facilitent la compréhension du document pour tout un chacun sans forcément lire l'intégralité du document. Les signets s'avèrent particulièrement utiles et peuvent être créés à partir des titres d'un document. Langue d’un document L'indication de la langue du document dans le fichier PDF permet à certains modèles de lecteurs d'écran de basculer vers la langue appropriée. Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des logiciels d'assistance Certains auteurs de documents PDF empêchent les utilisateurs de se servir des options d’impression, de copie, d’extraction, de commentaire ou de modification du texte. Le texte d'un document PDF accessible doit être disponible pour le lecteur d'écran. Grâce à Acrobat, vous pouvez vous assurer que les paramètres de protection n'ont aucun impact sur la capacité d'un lecteur d'écran à convertir en voix le texte affiché à l'écran. Pour plus d'informations sur l'accessibilité des documents PDF, voir www.webaim.org/techniques/acrobat/. Voir aussi « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 74 « Vérification et correction de l'ordre de lecture » à la page 321 « Flux de production de création de formulaires PDF accessibles » à la page 317 « Ajout d'un texte de remplacement et d'informations complémentaires aux balises » à la page 332 « Définition de la langue d'un document » à la page 328 « Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran » à la page 328 « Vérification complète de l'accessibilité » à la page 303 « Touches d'accessibilité » à la page 553UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 301 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution Les balises PDF présentent de nombreuses similitudes avec les balises XML. Les balises PDF reflètent la structure du document : texte correspondant à un en-tête, contenu représentant une section, texte constituant un signet, et ainsi de suite. Une arborescence de balises logique représente la structure organisationnelle du document. Les balises indiquent ainsi un ordre de lecture précis et facilitent la navigation, notamment dans le cas de documents longs et complexes, sans changer leur aspect. Les logiciels d'assistance déterminent la présentation et l'interprétation du contenu du document à partir de l'arborescence logique. La plupart des logiciels d'assistance s'appuient sur les balises structurelles du document pour identifier l'ordre de lecture correct du texte et traduire la signification des images et d'autres éléments de contenu sous une autre forme comme le son. Un document non balisé ne contenant aucune information de structure, Acrobat doit déduire une structure à partir des paramètres de préférence d'ordre de lecture. Dans un tel cas, les éléments de page sont souvent lus dans le mauvais ordre ou restent non lus. La redistribution du contenu d'un document à des fins d'affichage sur le petit écran d'un ordinateur de poche dépend également de ces balises de structure du document. Il arrive souvent qu'Acrobat ajoute des balises au moment de la création du document PDF. Pour savoir si un document PDF contient des balises, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis repérez la valeur de l'option PDF balisé dans la section Description avancée du panneau Description. L'arborescence logique figure dans le panneau Balises et affiche le contenu du document sous forme d'éléments de page imbriqués à différents niveaux. Voir aussi « Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité » à la page 305 « Préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 305 « Création d'un fichier PDF accessible » à la page 312 « Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant » à la page 318 « Balises PDF standard » à la page 335 Vérification de l'accessibilité d'un document PDF A propos des vérificateurs d'accessibilité Bien évidemment, la meilleure façon de tester l'accessibilité d'un document consiste à utiliser le document en vous servant des outils dont dispose votre audience. Cependant, même si vous ne possédez pas de lecteur d'écran ni d'imprimante en braille, vous pouvez faire appel à l'une des méthodes fournies par Acrobat pour vérifier l'accessibilité d'un document PDF. • La fonction Vérification rapide permet d'examiner un document afin d'identifier s'il contient des balises de structure du document, du texte disponible pour la recherche et des paramètres de protection n'interdisant pas l'accessibilité. Cette méthode constitue souvent le meilleur moyen de vérifier l'accessibilité d'un document PDF avant son utilisation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 302 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution • Servez-vous de la fonction Vérification complète pour effectuer une vérification plus en profondeur de nombreux attributs de documents PDF accessibles, notamment l'utilisation de polices pouvant être mappées de manière fiable à du texte unicode. • Utilisez la fonction Redistribuer pour vérifier rapidement l'ordre de lecture. • Faites appel à la fonction Lecture audio pour tester le document dans les conditions d'utilisation des personnes se servant de cet outil de conversion du texte en voix. • Enregistrez le document en tant que texte accessible, puis lisez le fichier texte enregistré dans une application de traitement de texte afin de le tester tel qu'il sera utilisé par les personnes disposant d'une imprimante en braille. • Servez-vous des outils Retouche de l'ordre de lecture et des panneaux Balises et Contenu pour tester en détail la structure, l'ordre de lecture et le contenu du document PDF. Remarque : Les outils du vérificateur d'accessibilité facilitent l'identification des zones de documents pouvant créer des conflits avec l'interprétation des directives d'accessibilité référencées dans l'application et la documentation afférente d'Adobe. Cependant, ces outils ne vérifient pas les documents par rapport aux critères d'accessibilité, y compris ceux mentionnés dans les directives indiquées, et Adobe ne garantit pas la conformité de ces documents à des directives ou des réglementations spécifiques. Voir aussi « Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un lecteur d'écran » à la page 311 « Redistribution d'un document PDF » à la page 309 « Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio » à la page 311 « Enregistrement sous forme de texte accessible pour une imprimante en braille » à la page 309 « Vérification et correction de l'ordre de lecture » à la page 321 « Affichage des balises dans le panneau Balises » à la page 330 Vérification rapide de l'accessibilité La fonction Vérification rapide permet d'examiner un document PDF afin d'identifier s'il contient du texte disponible pour la recherche, des balises de structure du document et des paramètres de protection n'interdisant pas l'accessibilité. ? Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Vérification rapide. Si le document n'est pas structuré, un message est susceptible de s'afficher, vous suggérant de modifier les préférences d'ordre de lecture. Voir aussi « Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 305 Résultats de la vérification rapide de l'accessibilité « Ce document est doté d'une structure logique, mais il ne s'agit pas d'un fichier PDF balisé. Il risque donc de manquer certaines informations d'accessibilité. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté une structure sous-jacente dans le document, dont Acrobat se servira pour contrôler l'ordre de lecture au lieu d'analyser le document par lui-même. Toutefois, la structure de ce document non balisé risque d'être incomplète ou peu fiable. Il se peut donc que les logiciels d'assistance et les fonctions d'accessibilité d'Acrobat (telles que la fonction Lecture audio et la fonction d'enregistrement sous le format texte) lisent la page de manière incorrecte. Si l'ordre de lecture de la page semble erroné, cochez la case Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 303 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution « Ce document n'étant pas structuré, son ordre de lecture risque d'être incorrect. Essayez différents ordres de lecture dans le panneau des préférences de lecture. » La fonction de vérification rapide n'a pas détecté de structure sousjacente au document qu'Acrobat peut utiliser pour déterminer l'ordre de lecture. Acrobat analysera l'ordre de lecture du document à l'aide de la méthode d'analyse active définie dans le panneau des préférences d'ordre de lecture. Cependant, les lecteurs d'écran risquent de ne pas lire correctement ce document PDF. Si l'ordre de lecture semble erroné, sélectionnez une option différente dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. « Aucun problème d'accessibilité n'a été détecté lors de cette vérification rapide. Effectuez une vérification plus approfondie à l'aide de la commande Vérification complète. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF contient du texte disponible pour la recherche, qu'il est balisé, qu'il dispose d'une structure sousjacente et qu'aucun paramètre de protection n'interdit l'accès à son contenu aux lecteurs d'écran. Pour vérifier l'absence d'autres types de problèmes d'accessibilité dans le document PDF, faites appel à la fonction Vérification complète. « L'accès est refusé aux lecteurs d'écran en raison de la configuration des paramètres de protection. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF dispose de paramètres de protection empêchant les lecteurs d'écran d'extraire le texte à des fins de conversion en voix. Vous pourrez peut-être utiliser un lecteur d'écran avec ce document si ce produit de technologie d'assistance est enregistré auprès d'Adobe en tant qu'agent de confiance. Renseignez-vous auprès de votre fournisseur de produits de technologies d'assistance. « Le document ne semble pas contenir de texte. Il s'agit peut-être d'une image numérisée. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF ne contient pas de texte disponible pour la recherche. Il est probable qu'il se compose uniquement d'images numérisées. Autrement dit, les lecteurs d'écran, la fonction Lecture audio, le mode de redistribution et la plupart des autres fonctions d'accessibilité (reposant sur le texte comme données d'entrée) ne pourront pas être appliqués à ce document. Vérification complète de l'accessibilité Servez-vous de la fonction Vérification complète pour tester un document PDF par rapport à de nombreux attributs de documents PDF accessibles. Vous pouvez choisir les types de problèmes d'accessibilité à rechercher et le mode d'affichage des résultats. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Vérification complète. 2 Dans la section Options de rapport et commentaires, sélectionnez les options qui vous intéressent pour l'affichage des résultats. Vous pouvez enregistrer les résultats dans un fichier HTML ou sous forme de commentaires insérés là où sont détectés les problèmes d'accessibilité. 3 Sélectionnez une étendue de page pour effectuer une vérification complète sur une partie spécifique d'un document. Si le document est volumineux, il est plus efficace d'effectuer la vérification section par section. 4 Choisissez une norme d'accessibilité (Adobe PDF, Section 508 (loi américaine) ou W3C) dans le menu Nom, puis sélectionnez les options d'accessibilité à vérifier. Les options d'accessibilité disponibles varient selon la norme sélectionnée dans le menu Nom. 5 Cliquez sur Vérifier. Les résultats s'affichent dans le panneau de gauche, qui propose également des liens utiles et des conseils pour corriger les problèmes. Si vous avez créé un rapport à l'étape 2, les résultats sont disponibles dans le dossier sélectionné.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 304 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Etant donné que la fonction Vérification complète ne permet pas de faire la distinction entre les types de contenu essentiels et secondaires, certains problèmes signalés n'ont aucune incidence sur la lisibilité du document. Il est donc judicieux d’analyser tous les problèmes afin de déterminer ceux qui doivent être résolus. Options de vérification complète de l'accessibilité Créer un rapport d'accessibilité Crée un rapport HTML des problèmes d'accessibilité, lequel s'ouvre dans le navigateur et est enregistré à l'emplacement indiqué dans le champ Dossier. Inclure les astuces de dépannage dans le rapport Ajoute des suggestions de correction des problèmes d'accessibilité dans les rapports HTML ou les commentaires. Créer des commentaires dans le document Insère dans le document des commentaires signalant les problèmes d'accessibilité. Une fois les problèmes d'accessibilité résolus, supprimez tous les commentaires d'accessibilité du document PDF. Pour ce faire, choisissez Document > Examiner le document. Vérifiez que l'option Commentaires et annotations est sélectionnée, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Etendue Etendue de pages à vérifier. Nom Jeu de critères d'accessibilité à vérifier. Pour la section 508 et les directives W3C, la zone des options comprend un bouton de consultation lié au site Web des directives appropriées. Sélectionnez Adobe PDF pour choisir des options associées à la norme d'accessibilité Adobe PDF : • Descriptions de remplacement fournies Vérifie que les illustrations balisées disposent d'un texte de remplacement. • Langue du texte spécifiée Vérifie qu'une langue est associée à chaque paragraphe. La configuration d'une langue pour l'ensemble du document via la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document permet de corriger toutes les erreurs définies par cette option. • Codage de caractères fiable fourni Vérifie la présence de polices inaccessibles aux lecteurs d'écran et autres logiciels d'assistance. Les polices doivent contenir suffisamment d'informations pour qu'Acrobat puisse extraire correctement tous les caractères en texte. Si une ou plusieurs polices ne permettent pas d'extraire correctement tous les caractères, le document PDF est inaccessible. • Contenu intégralement compris dans la structure du document Recherche les éléments de page omis lors du balisage. L'ajout de ces éléments à l'arborescence des balises (le cas échéant) permet de s'assurer que le lecteur d'écran présente correctement le contenu à l'utilisateur. • Champs de formulaire dotés de descriptions Vérifie la présence de champs de formulaire auxquels il manque la description correspondante. • Cohérence de l'ordre de tabulation et de l'ordre de structure Vérifie que les balises reflètent correctement la structure du document. • Structure correcte des listes et des tableaux Vérifie que les balises générées pour les listes et les tableaux sont conformes aux exigences des documents PDF balisés. Affichage des résultats d'une vérification complète Si vous cochez la case Créer un rapport d’accessibilité dans la boîte de dialogue Vérification complète de l'accessibilité, vous pouvez définir un dossier d'enregistrement pour le rapport. Une fois la vérification complète terminée, le rapport d'accessibilité s'affiche dans le navigateur et est enregistré dans le dossier spécifié. Le nom du fichier rapport est identique à celui du fichier PDF source, à ceci près que l'extension .pdf est remplacée par PDF.html. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Ouvrir le rapport d'accessibilité. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier HTML, puis cliquez sur OK. Le rapport s'affiche dans le navigateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 305 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Les liens figurant dans le rapport d'accessibilité vous redirigent vers l'emplacement d'éléments inaccessibles dans le panneau de visualisation ou vers des procédures décrivant brièvement comment corriger les problèmes d'accessibilité. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez rouvrir le rapport avec le fichier PDF associé, ne déplacez ni ne renommez l'un ou l'autre fichier après avoir exécuté la vérification complète. Le fichier HTML renvoie au fichier PDF au moyen d'un chemin d'accès relatif. Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité Acrobat offre plusieurs options de préférence qui facilitent la lecture des documents PDF pour les personnes à mobilité réduite ou malvoyantes. Ces préférences contrôlent l'affichage des fichiers PDF, ainsi que le mode de lecture dans un lecteur d'écran. La plupart des préférences liées à l'accessibilité sont disponibles par le biais de l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité, lequel affiche des instructions de configuration de ces préférences. Certaines préférences ayant une incidence sur l'accessibilité ne sont pas disponibles par l'intermédiaire de cet assistant, notamment celles des catégories Lecture, Formulaires et Multimédia. Vous pouvez définir l'ensemble des préférences via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Les noms indiqués pour certaines préférences dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité sont différents des mêmes préférences disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. L'aide d'Acrobat fait référence aux noms des options utilisés dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'accessibilité, voir http://www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility/. Configuration des préférences d’accessibilité dans l’assistant 1 Lancez l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Assistant de configuration. • (Windows uniquement) Lancez Acrobat lors de la première exécution d’un lecteur ou d’un agrandisseur d’écran. 2 Choisissez l'option adaptée à vos logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance. L'assistant présente uniquement les préférences correspondant à vos logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance en fonction de l'option choisie. 3 Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran. Si vous cliquez sur Annuler à un moment donné, Acrobat utilise les paramètres par défaut pour les préférences configurées par l'assistant (non recommandé). Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité via la boîte de dialogue Préférences ? Configurez les préférences en fonction des logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance installés en passant en revue les différents panneaux de la boîte de dialogue. Préférences d'accessibilité Préférences disponibles dans le panneau Accessibilité Remplacer les couleurs du document Lorsque cette case est cochée, vous pouvez choisir dans une liste une association de couleurs à contraste élevé pour le texte et l'arrière-plan, ou créer votre propre association. Ces paramètres UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 306 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution correspondent à l'option Utiliser des couleurs à contraste élevé pour le texte des documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser le style de mise en page Correspond à l'option Ignorer le style de mise en page disponible l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser le paramètre de zoom Correspond à l'option Ignorer le facteur de zoom du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Utiliser la structure du document comme ordre de tabulation en l'absence de toute spécification Améliore la navigation dans les champs de formulaire et les liens de documents dont l'ordre de tabulation n'est pas indiqué. Toujours afficher le curseur de sélection Sélectionnez cette option si vous utilisez un agrandisseur d'écran. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Toujours afficher le curseur de sélection, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser la couleur de sélection du système Lorsque cette option est activée, la couleur de sélection par défaut (le bleu) est remplacée par la couleur définie sur le système. Toujours afficher les porte-documents sous le contrôle de la plate-forme Lorsque cette option est activée, les composants du porte-feuille PDF sont présentés selon la configuration de contrôle de la plate-forme, laquelle est plus accessible. Préférences disponibles dans le panneau Documents Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications de document dans un fichier temporaire toutes les... minutes Lorsque cette case est désactivée, la préférence désactive l'action d'enregistrement automatique. Le lecteur ou l'agrandisseur d'écran doit recharger le document chaque fois que ce dernier est enregistré. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Formulaires Couleur de sélection des champs et Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires Ces préférences définissent les couleurs qui seront utilisées pour mettre en surbrillance les champs de formulaire à remplir. Elles correspondent aux options Couleur de sélection des champs et Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires disponibles dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Remplissage automatique Permet à Acrobat de proposer le remplissage automatique de certaines entrées de champs de formulaire de manière à éviter à l'utilisateur de taper beaucoup de caractères. Cette préférence n'a pas d'équivalent dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Internet Afficher dans le navigateur Entraîne l'ouverture de documents PDF liés à partir de pages Web dans le navigateur Internet au lieu d'une fenêtre distincte d'Acrobat. Désactivez cette préférence pour améliorer la navigation dans un document avec un lecteur d'écran. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Afficher les documents PDF dans le navigateur Web, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Multimédia • Afficher les sous-titres lorsque disponibles • Lire le doublage audio lorsque disponible • Afficher les légendes de texte supplémentaires lorsque disponibles • Afficher la description audio (ou la description vidéo ou la vidéo descriptive) lorsque disponible Ces préférences n'ont pas d'équivalents dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 307 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Affichage Zoom Configure le facteur d'agrandissement des documents à l'écran et permet aux utilisateurs malvoyants de lire plus facilement les documents PDF redistribués. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Ignorer le facteur de zoom du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Texte arrondi Contrôle le lissage du texte. Pour désactiver le lissage du texte et rendre le texte plus net et plus facile à lire à l'aide d'un agrandisseur d'écran, choisissez Aucun. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Désactiver le lissage de texte, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Lecture ordre de lecture Indique l’ordre de lecture des documents. Les préférences d'ordre de lecture sont également disponibles dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document (conseillé) Interprète l'ordre de lecture des documents non balisés à l'aide d'une méthode avancée d'analyse de la mise en page déduisant la structure du document. • Lire de gauche à droite, de haut en bas Génère le texte d'après sa position sur la page, en lisant de gauche à droite puis de haut en bas. Cette méthode s'avère plus rapide que l'option Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document. En effet, elle analyse uniquement le texte ; les champs de formulaire ne sont pas pris en compte et les tableaux ne sont pas reconnus en tant que tels. • Utiliser l'ordre de lecture dans les flux d'impression bruts Génère le texte selon l'ordre dans lequel il a été enregistré dans le flux d'impression. Cette méthode s'avère plus rapide que l'option Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document. En effet, elle analyse uniquement le texte ; les champs de formulaire ne sont pas pris en compte et les tableaux ne sont pas reconnus en tant que tels. Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés Utilise l'ordre de lecture défini dans les préférences de lecture au lieu de l'ordre spécifié par la structure de balises du document. Choisissez cette préférence uniquement lorsque vous rencontrez des problèmes dans les documents PDF mal balisés. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Page et document Cette préférence détermine la proportion d'un document transmise ponctuellement à un lecteur d'écran. Si le document PDF n'est pas balisé, Acrobat peut l'analyser et tenter de déduire sa structure et son ordre de lecture, ce qui peut prendre du temps dans le cas d'un document long. Il est parfois préférable de configurer Acrobat de manière à transmettre uniquement la page actuellement visible à l'écran afin d'analyser le document par petites tranches. Ce point varie en fonction de la taille et de la complexité du document ainsi que des fonctions proposées par le lecteur d'écran. Lorsqu'Acrobat transmet les informations à un lecteur ou un agrandisseur d'écran (ou tout autre dispositif d'assistance), il charge les informations dans la mémoire tampon mise directement à disposition du logiciel d'assistance. La quantité d'informations transmise au tampon peut avoir une incidence sur le temps que met Acrobat à effectuer certaines tâches telles que l'ouverture du document, le passage à la page suivante, le changement d'affichage et l'exécution des commandes. • Lire les pages actuellement visibles Cette option est généralement conseillée avec les agrandisseurs d'écran. Elle améliore les performances en évitant au logiciel de traiter les parties du document qui ne sont pas visibles. Lorsque Acrobat envoie uniquement les pages actuellement visibles d'un document PDF à la mémoire tampon, la technologie d'assistance n'a accès qu'à ces pages-là. Elle peut passer à une autre page seulement quand la page suivante est visible et qu'Acrobat a transmis les informations à la mémoire tampon. Par conséquent, si vous activez cette option, vous devez utiliser les fonctions de navigation d'Acrobat (pas celles de la technologie d'assistance) afin de parcourir le document d'une page à l'autre. Il est par ailleurs conseillé de définir l'option Mise en page par défaut des préférences sur le paramètre Une seule page si, en fonction de votre choix, Acrobat doit uniquement envoyer les pages visibles à la technologie d'assistance. Etant donné que Acrobat transmet les informations relatives à toutes les pages visibles, la technologie d'assistance peut recevoir des informations concernant des pages partiellement visibles (le bas d'une page ou le haut de la suivante, par exemple) ou des pages l'étant entièrement. Si vous utilisez un paramètre d'affichage des pages autre que Une seule page (Une seule page en continu, par exemple), puis que vous affichez la page suivante, la UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 308 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution technologie d'assistance risque de ne pas identifier correctement la partie d'une page antérieure qu'elle a déjà lue à haute voix. Pour des instructions sur la définition de la disposition par défaut des pages sur Une seule page, voir la section « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 41. Cette option correspond à l'option Lire les pages actuellement visibles, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Lire l'intégralité du document Cette option est optimale lorsque vous utilisez un lecteur d'écran disposant de ses propres outils de navigation et de recherche et que vous connaissez mieux que les outils d'Acrobat. Cette option correspond à l'option Lire immédiatement l'intégralité du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Dans les documents volumineux, lire les pages actuellement visibles Cette option est activée par défaut et s'avère optimale lorsque vous utilisez un lecteur d'écran pour lire des documents PDF longs ou complexes. Elle permet à Acrobat de transmettre la totalité d'un petit document tout en revenant au mode page par page pour les documents volumineux. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Dans les documents volumineux, lire les pages actuellement visibles, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Confirmer avant de baliser les documents Permet à l'utilisateur de valider les options à utiliser avant qu'Acrobat ne prépare un document non balisé afin d'être lu. Le balisage peut prendre beaucoup de temps, en particulier dans les documents volumineux. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Confirmer avant de baliser les documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Options vocales Configurez les préférences de cette section afin de régler le volume, la vitesse et le ton de la voix utilisée pour lire à haute voix. Vous pouvez utiliser la voix par défaut ou l'une des voix fournies par votre système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les flèches Haut et Bas pour lire des blocs de texte. Ces préférences n'ont pas d'équivalents dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Navigation et contrôle de l'application à l'aide du clavier Vous pouvez naviguer à l’aide du clavier au lieu d’utiliser la souris. Plusieurs fonctions d'accès clavier sont disponibles sous Mac OS. Pour plus de détails, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation. Sous Windows, certains raccourcis clavier de navigation d'Acrobat sont différents des raccourcis utilisés dans d'autres applications Windows. Lors de l'ouverture d'Acrobat dans un navigateur Web, les commandes clavier sont d'abord mappées au navigateur. En conséquence, certains raccourcis ne sont pas disponibles dans Acrobat ou du moins pas avant l'activation du document PDF. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'accessibilité, voir www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility. Voir aussi « Touches de navigation dans un document PDF » à la page 550 « Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils » à la page 549 « Touches de commentaire » à la page 550 « Touches de navigation générale » à la page 551 « Touches des panneaux de navigation » à la page 552 « Touches de navigation dans la fenêtre d’aide » à la page 553 « Touches d'accessibilité » à la page 553UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 309 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Activation des touches uniques Les touches d'accès rapide uniques permettent de sélectionner des outils et d'effectuer certaines actions. La plupart des raccourcis clavier disponibles dans Acrobat ne nécessitent pas l'activation de touches d'accès rapide uniques. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Générales, puis activez l'option Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils. Remarque : Tous les lecteurs d'écran ne sont pas compatibles avec les touches uniques d'Acrobat. Défilement automatique La fonction de défilement automatique permet de parcourir plus facilement un long document PDF, notamment dans le cas de documents redistribués. Vous pouvez faire défiler les pages sans avoir recours à la souris ou au clavier. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier la vitesse de défilement, appuyez sur une touche numérique (9 pour une vitesse très élevée, 0 pour une vitesse lente). • Pour augmenter ou réduire la vitesse de défilement, appuyez sur les touches fléchées Haut ou Bas, selon le sens du défilement. • Pour inverser le sens de défilement, appuyez sur la touche de signe moins (-). • Pour passer à la page suivante ou précédente, appuyez sur la touche fléchée Gauche ou Droite. Pour arrêter le défilement automatique, appuyez sur la touche Echap ou choisissez à nouveau Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement. Enregistrement sous forme de texte accessible pour une imprimante en braille Remarque : L'expression « imprimante en braille » est utilisée dans ce document pour faire référence à tout dispositif servant à convertir un texte accessible en formulaire utilisable par une personne aveugle ou malvoyante. Vous avez la possibilité d’enregistrer un document PDF sous forme de texte accessible afin de l’imprimer en braille. Le texte accessible peut être importé et imprimé comme document de niveau 1 ou 2 formaté en braille à l'aide d'une application de conversion en braille. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation accompagnant l'application de conversion en braille. Une version texte d'un document PDF ne contient pas d'images ni d'objets multimédia ; toutefois, la version texte d'un document PDF accessible comprend des descriptions de remplacement pour de tels objets, si elles ont été définies. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. 2 Choisissez Texte (accessible) dans le menu Type (Windows) ou Format (Mac OS). Dans Acrobat, si vous enregistrez le fichier en vue d'un traitement en braille, vous pouvez aussi choisir .doc ou .rtf. Redistribution d'un document PDF Vous avez la possibilité de redistribuer le contenu d'un PDF afin de le présenter temporairement sous la forme d'une colonne occupant toute la largeur du panneau de visualisation. Cette redistribution permet d'améliorer la lisibilité du document sur des appareils mobiles ou d'agrandir l'affichage sur un moniteur standard, sans qu'il soit nécessaire de faire défiler le texte horizontalement. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 310 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Il est impossible d'enregistrer, de modifier ou d'imprimer un document en mode de redistribution. Dans la plupart des cas, seul le texte lisible est visible dans l'affichage redistribué. Le texte non redistribué inclut les formulaires, les commentaires, les champs de signature numérique et les artefacts de page, tels que les numéros de page, les en-têtes et les pieds de page. Les pages contenant à la fois du texte lisible et des formulaires ou des champs de signature numérique ne sont pas redistribués. Un texte vertical est redistribué horizontalement. Acrobat balise temporairement un document non balisé avant de le redistribuer. Vous pouvez optimiser pour la redistribution des documents PDF que vous créez en les balisant vous-même. Le balisage garantit que les blocs de texte sont redistribués et que le contenu suit les séquences appropriées afin que l'utilisateur puisse lire un article couvrant plusieurs pages et colonnes sans que d'autres sujets interrompent le flux du texte. Pour vérifier rapidement l'ordre de lecture d'un document, affichez-le en mode Redistribution. Si la redistribution du document PDF balisé ne vous convient pas, vérifiez si l'ordre du contenu ou l'ordre de lecture du fichier présente des incohérences. Vérifiez également le balisage. Ces problèmes de redistribution peuvent être résolus au moyen du panneau Contenu ou de l'outil Retouche de l’ordre de lecture. S’il s’agit d’un problème de césure, vous avez la possibilité d’insérer des caractères spéciaux pour corriger le problème. (Voir « Insertion de caractères spéciaux » à la page 364.) Les titres et les colonnes (à gauche) sont redistribués selon un ordre de lecture logique (à droite). Redistribution d'un document PDF balisé ? Choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Redistribuer. Si le paramètre Mise en page est défini sur Deux pages avant que vous ne choisissiez le mode de redistribution, il devient automatiquement Une seule page lors de la redistribution du document. Si le paramètre Mise en page est défini sur Deux pages en continu avant que vous ne choisissiez le mode de redistribution, il devient automatiquement Continu lors de la redistribution du document. Retour à l'affichage non redistribué ? En mode Redistribution, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Redistribuer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 311 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un lecteur d'écran Acrobat prend en charge des logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance (tels que les lecteurs et les agrandisseurs d'écran) permettant aux utilisateurs malvoyants d'interagir avec des applications informatiques. Lorsque vous utilisez de tels dispositifs, Acrobat ajoute des balises temporaires aux documents PDF ouverts afin d’améliorer leur lisibilité. Utilisez l’assistant de configuration de l’accessibilité pour améliorer l’interaction entre Acrobat et les types de logiciels et de dispositifs d’assistance dont vous vous servez. Lors de l'utilisation d'un lecteur d'écran, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de lecture du document actif en choisissant Options avancées > Accessibilité > Modifier les options de lecture. Consultez la documentation de votre logiciel ou dispositif d'assistance. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration requise, la compatibilité et les instructions d'utilisation du logiciel ou dispositif d'assistance avec Acrobat, contactez votre revendeur. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des lecteurs d'écran, voir www.adobe.com/accessibility/pdfs/accessing-pdfsr.pdf. Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio La fonction Lecture audio permet de lire à haute voix le texte contenu dans un document PDF, y compris les commentaires et descriptions de remplacement des images et des champs de formulaire à remplir. Dans les documents PDF balisés, le contenu est lu selon l'ordre dans lequel il apparaît dans l'arborescence logique du document. Dans les documents non balisés, l'ordre de lecture est déduit, à moins qu'il n'ait été configuré dans les préférences de lecture. La fonction Lecture audio utilise les voix disponibles installées sur votre système. Si les voix SAPI 4 ou SAPI 5 ont été installées à partir d'applications vocales ou de langue, vous avez la possibilité de les sélectionner pour la lecture de documents PDF. Remarque : La fonction Lecture audio n'est pas un lecteur d'écran et n'est pas reconnue par tous les systèmes d'exploitation. Activation ou désactivation de la fonction Lecture audio Vous devez activer la fonction Lecture audio avant de pouvoir l'utiliser. Vous pouvez la désactiver afin de libérer des ressources système et d'accroître les performances d'autres opérations. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Activer la lecture audio. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Désactiver la lecture audio. Vous pouvez également localiser le texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection. Activez la fonction de lecture audio, puis choisissez Outils > Sélection. Naviguez dans le document à l'aide des flèches haut/bas et gauche/droite. Vous entendez l'élément situé à l'emplacement de l'outil Sélection, par exemple un titre ou un paragraphe. Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio 1 Affichez la page à lire. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Lire seulement cette page. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Lire jusqu'à la fin du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 312 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Lecture à haute voix des champs de formulaire 1 Dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cochez la case Lire les champs de formulaire dans la section Options de lecture audio. 2 Dans le formulaire PDF, appuyez sur la touche de tabulation pour sélectionner le premier champ de formulaire. 3 Remplissez les champs et définissez les sélections selon vos besoins, puis appuyez sur la touche Tab pour passer au champ suivant en répétant cette étape jusqu'à ce que le formulaire soit entièrement rempli. Acrobat lit l'état des cases à cocher et des boutons radio sélectionnés. Remarque : La fonction de lecture audio ne reproduit pas ce que vous saisissez au clavier. Pour écouter votre saisie, utilisez un lecteur d'écran. Interruption de la lecture à haute voix ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Pause. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Reprise. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Arrêt. A propos des outils d'accessibilité du système d'exploitation Outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous Windows Les systèmes d'exploitation Windows 2000, XP et Vista intègrent des outils proposant un accès amélioré ou alternatif aux informations affichées sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Narrator est une version allégée de lecteur d'écran tandis que Magnifier est un outil d'agrandissement de l'écran. Pour plus de détails sur les outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous le système d'exploitation Windows 2000, XP ou Vista, consultez le site Web d'accessibilité de Microsoft. Outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous Mac OS Mac OS X intègre des outils offrant un accès amélioré ou alternatif aux informations affichées sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur les outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous le système d'exploitation Max OS X, consultez le site Web d'accessibilité d'Apple® Inc. Création d'un fichier PDF accessible Flux de production de création de formulaires PDF accessibles A un niveau supérieur, la procédure de création de fichiers PDF accessibles se divise en quelques étapes simples : 1 Envisagez d'intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dans un document avant de le convertir au format PDF. 2 Le cas échéant, ajoutez des descriptions et des champs de formulaire à remplir, et pensez à définir l'ordre de tabulation. 3 Intégrez d'autres fonctions d'accessibilité dans le document PDF. 4 Balisez le document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 313 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 5 Procédez à une évaluation du PDF et réparez les problèmes de balisage. L'ordre des étapes de cette procédure convient à la plupart des besoins. Vous pouvez toutefois effectuer les tâches dans un ordre différent ou répéter certaines étapes. Dans tous les cas, commencez par examiner le document, déterminez l'objectif qu'il sert et utilisez cette analyse pour identifier le flux de production à appliquer. Pour plus d'informations sur la création de documents PDF accessibles, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Guide de création de documents PDF accessibles, Administration des services généraux (en anglais) : www.section508.gov/docs/PDFGuidanceForGovernment.pdf • Module externe Acrobat pour la création de documents PDF conformes à la Section 508 : www.commonlook.com/documents/english/cl_adobe_home.asp • Meilleures pratiques : amp.ssbbartgroup.com Envisagez d'intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dans un document avant de le convertir au format PDF Dans la mesure du possible, pensez à intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dès la phase de création des fichiers source dans l'application d'origine (application de traitement de texte ou de mise en page, par exemple). Parmi les tâches standard à effectuer dans l'application de création, citons l'ajout d'un texte de remplacement pour les images, l'optimisation des tableaux et l'application de styles de paragraphe ou d'autres fonctions de structure de document pouvant être converties en balises. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une application source » à la page 315. Remarque : Si vous projetez de créer des formulaires PDF, utilisez Adobe LiveCycle® Designer, application dédiée à la conception de formulaires interactifs et statiques. LiveCycle Designer ajoute des balises de structure aux formulaires, ce qui améliore l'accessibilité. Ajoutez des descriptions et des champs de formulaire à remplir, et pensez à définir l'ordre de tabulation Si le document PDF comprend des champs de formulaire, choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Exécuter la reconnaissance des champs de formulaire afin de détecter les champs et de les rendre interactifs (disponibles pour le remplissage). Utilisez les outils de formulaire pour créer des champs à remplir, tels que des boutons, des cases à cocher, des menus déroulants et des zones de texte. Lors de la création d'un champ, tapez une description dans la zone Info-bulle de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de ce champ. Les lecteurs d'écran lisent ce texte à haute voix à l'utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir « Création de champs de formulaire » à la page 210. L'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture permet lui aussi d'ajouter des descriptions aux champs de formulaire. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de l'ordre de tabulation sur la structure du document, voir la section « Définition du mode de navigation dans les champs de formulaire » à la page 218. Intégrez d'autres fonctions d'accessibilité dans le document PDF Cette étape comprend plusieurs tâches : définir la langue du document, vérifier que les paramètres de protection n'ont pas d'incidence sur les lecteurs d'écran, créer des liens accessibles et ajouter des signets. Pour plus de détails, voir les sections « Définition de la langue d'un document » à la page 328, « Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran » à la page 328, « Ajout de liens accessibles » à la page 327 et « A propos des signets » à la page 340.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 314 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Balisez le document PDF Vous pouvez améliorer l'accessibilité d'un fichier PDF en lui ajoutant des balises dans Acrobat. Si le document PDF ne contient pas de balises, Acrobat tente de le baliser automatiquement lorsque l’utilisateur lit ou redistribue son contenu, mais les résultats peuvent se révéler décevants. Dans le cas d'un document PDF balisé, l'arborescence logique envoie le contenu à un lecteur d'écran ou à un logiciel ou matériel d'assistance dans l'ordre approprié. Afin d'optimiser les résultats, balisez les documents au moment de leur conversion au format PDF à partir de l'application de création. Il s'agit par exemple des applications Adobe FrameMaker®, Adobe InDesign®, Microsoft Word ou encore OpenOffice Writer. Si vous n'avez pas accès à l'application de création qui permettrait de générer un fichier PDF balisé, vous pouvez baliser le fichier à tout moment dans Acrobat. Le balisage d'un document lors de sa conversion au format PDF nécessite une application de création prenant en charge cette fonction. A partir des styles de paragraphe et autres informations structurelles contenues dans le document source, l'application de création peut alors produire une arborescence logique. L'arborescence logique détermine un ordre de lecture précis et les niveaux de balises appropriés. Ce balisage est capable de mieux interpréter la structure de mises en page complexes (barres latérales incorporées, colonnes rapprochées, alignement de texte irrégulier, tableaux, etc.). Cette méthode de balisage permet également de baliser correctement les liens, les références croisées, les signets et le texte de remplacement (si disponible) inclus dans le fichier. Pour baliser un document PDF dans Acrobat, servez-vous de la commande Ajouter des balises au document. Celle-ci fonctionne avec n'importe quel document PDF non balisé (un document créé à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF, par exemple). Acrobat analyse le contenu du fichier PDF afin d'interpréter, pour chaque page, ses éléments, leur organisation hiérarchique et l'ordre de lecture souhaité. Il construit ensuite une arborescence de balises reflétant ces informations. Enfin, le logiciel crée des balises pour tous les liens, références croisées et signets ajoutés au document dans Acrobat. La commande Ajouter des balises au document permet de baliser de manière appropriée la plupart des mises en page standard. Elle n'est toutefois pas toujours en mesure d'interpréter correctement la structure et l'ordre de lecture des éléments de page complexes. Ces éléments incluent les colonnes rapprochées, les textes alignés de manière irrégulière, les champs de formulaire à ne pas remplir et les tableaux sans bordure. L'utilisation de la commande Ajouter des balises au document pour baliser ce type de page peut entraîner une mauvaise combinaison des éléments ou la désorganisation des balises. De telles irrégularités provoquent des problèmes d'ordre de lecture dans le fichier PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Ajout de balises à un document PDF existant » à la page 318. Procédez à une évaluation du PDF et réparez les problèmes de balisage Une fois le document PDF balisé créé, évaluez-le afin de détecter les éventuels problèmes d'ordre de lecture et erreurs de balisage ou d'accessibilité, que vous devez ensuite réparer. Quelle que soit la méthode choisie pour baliser le fichier PDF, utilisez Acrobat pour retoucher le balisage et l'ordre de lecture des mises en page complexes ou des éléments de page inhabituels. Par exemple, la commande Ajouter des balises au document ne permet pas toujours de différencier les diagrammes d'instructions des éléments de page décoratifs tels que les bordures, les lignes ou les éléments d'arrière-plan. Elle peut, dans certains cas, baliser de manière erronée ces types d'éléments comme des illustrations. Elle est en outre susceptible de baliser par erreur les caractères graphiques insérés dans le texte (telles les lettrines) comme des illustrations, au lieu de les inclure dans la balise représentant le reste du bloc de texte. De telles erreurs peuvent encombrer l'arborescence et compliquer l'ordre de lecture dont dépend la technologie d'assistance. Si vous balisez un document à partir d'Acrobat, l'application génère un rapport d'erreurs une fois l'opération de balisage terminée. Ce rapport vous servira de guide dans la résolution des problèmes de balisage. Les outils Vérification complète ou Retouche de l'ordre de lecture vous permettent de détecter d'autres problèmes de balisage, d'ordre de lecture et d'accessibilité dans tout fichier PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir les sections « Vérification complète de l'accessibilité » à la page 303 et « Vérification et correction de l'ordre de lecture » à la page 321.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 315 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une page Web L'accessibilité d'un document PDF que vous créez à partir d'une page Web dépend de celle de la source HTML sur laquelle il repose. Si, par exemple, la mise en page de la page Web repose sur des tableaux, le code HTML du tableau risque de ne pas être distribué selon l'ordre logique exigé par un document PDF balisé, même si le code HTML est suffisamment structuré pour afficher correctement tous les éléments dans un navigateur. Selon la complexité de la page Web, vous pouvez apporter de nombreuses corrections à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture ou en modifiant l'arborescence dans Acrobat. Pour obtenir les fichiers PDF les plus accessibles possibles à partir des pages Web que vous créez, commencez par définir un ordre de lecture logique dans leur code HTML. Pour optimiser les résultats, servez-vous des Directives d'accessibilité des contenus Web publiées par le consortium W3C (World Wide Web Consortium). Pour plus de détails, consultez les recommandations du site Web du W3C. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web, saisissez l'adresse de la page Web, puis cliquez sur Paramètres. • Dans Microsoft Internet Explorer, sur la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers le bas du bouton Convertir et choisissez Préférences. 2 Dans le panneau Générales, activez l'option Créer les balises PDF et cliquez sur OK. 3 Le cas échéant, configurez d'autres options, puis cliquez sur Créer. Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une application source Dans la plupart des cas, vous créez des fichiers PDF balisés dans une application de création (Adobe FrameMaker ®, Adobe InDesign ou Microsoft Word, par exemple). La création de balises dans l'application source entraîne, en général, de meilleurs résultats que l'ajout de balises dans Acrobat. PDFMaker propose des paramètres de conversion permettant de créer des documents PDF balisés dans Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint et Word. Pour plus de détails sur la création de fichiers PDF accessible, voir http://www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility/. Pour plus de détails, consultez la documentation relative à l'application de création. A propos des balises utilisées dans les fichiers PDF combinés Vous avez la possibilité de combiner plusieurs fichiers provenant de diverses applications en une opération afin de créer un seul fichier PDF. Par exemple, vous pouvez combiner des fichiers de traitement de texte avec des présentations de diapositives, des feuilles de calcul et des pages Web. Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > Fusionner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. Lors de la conversion, Acrobat ouvre chaque application de création, crée un fichier PDF balisé et assemble ces PDF dans un PDF balisé. La procédure de conversion n'interprète pas toujours correctement la structure du document pour le fichier PDF combiné, car les fichiers source utilisent généralement des formats différents. Utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour créer un fichier PDF accessible à partir de plusieurs documents. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 316 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Lorsque vous combinez plusieurs fichiers PDF en un seul fichier PDF balisé, il est judicieux de baliser à nouveau le document combiné. La combinaison de fichiers PDF balisés et non balisés produit un fichier PDF partiellement balisé, inaccessible pour les personnes souffrant de handicap. Certains utilisateurs, notamment ceux utilisant un lecteur d'écran, ne peuvent pas détecter les pages non balisées. Si vous souhaitez combiner une série de fichiers PDF mixtes (balisés et non balisés), balisez les fichiers non balisés avant de continuer. Si les documents PDF sont tous non balisés, ajoutez des balises au fichier PDF combiné après avoir inséré, remplacé et supprimé des pages. Lors de la combinaison de pages par insertion, remplacement et suppression de pages, Acrobat accepte les balises existantes dans l'arborescence du fichier PDF consolidé de la manière suivante : • Lorsque vous insérez des pages dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat ajoute des balises (s'il y a lieu) pour les nouvelles pages à la fin de l'arborescence. Cet ordre est respecté même si vous insérez les nouvelles pages au début ou au milieu du document. • Lorsque vous remplacez des pages dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat ajoute des balises (s'il y a lieu) pour les pages d'éntrée à la fin de l'arborescence. Cet ordre est respecté même si vous remplacez des pages au début ou au milieu du document. Acrobat conserve les balises (le cas échéant) des pages remplacées. • Lors de la suppression de pages d'un fichier PDF, Acrobat conserve les balises (le cas échéant) des pages supprimées. Les pages dont les balises sont mal classées dans l'arborescence logique peuvent poser des problèmes aux lecteurs d'écran. En effet, ces dispositifs lisent les balises dans l'ordre descendant de l'arborescence et, de ce fait, risquent de ne pas atteindre les balises d'une page insérée avant la fin de l'arborescence. Pour corriger ce problème, réorganisez l'arborescence à l'aide d'Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Placez les grands groupes de balises dans le même ordre de lecture que les pages elles-mêmes. Pour éviter cette étape, pensez à insérer les pages à la fin du fichier PDF, en constituant le document du début à la fin en séquence. Par exemple, si vous créez la page de titre au format PDF séparément du contenu, ajoutez le fichier PDF du contenu au fichier PDF de la page de titre, même si le fichier du contenu est plus volumineux. Cette méthode permet de placer les balises du contenu à la suite des balises de la page de titre. Il n'est donc pas nécessaire de réorganiser ultérieurement les balises dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Les balises d'une page supprimée ou remplacée ne sont connectées à aucun contenu dans le document. Pour l'essentiel, elles constituent de grandes sections de balises vides dans l'arborescence. Ces balises superflues augmentent la taille de fichier du document, ralentissent les lecteurs d'écran et peuvent entraîner l'affichage de résultats confus par ces dispositifs d'accessibilité. Pour des résultats optimaux, réservez le balisage pour la fin du processus de conversion. Pour retirer de l'arborescence les balises correspondant aux pages supprimées, utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Pour plus de détails, voir « Création de fichiers PDF fusionnés » à la page 132. A propos des outils de création de formulaires PDF accessibles Adobe propose plusieurs outils de création de formulaires PDF accessibles : Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended Chacune de ces applications vous permet d'ouvrir des formulaires PDF balisés ou non (à l'exception des formulaires PDF créés à partir de LiveCycle Designer) afin d'y insérer des champs tels que des zones de texte, des cases à cocher et des boutons. Utilisez les autres outils de l'application pour rendre les formulaires accessibles. Ajoutez des descriptions pour les champs de formulaires, balisez les formulaires non balisés, manipulez les balises et effectuez d'autres tâches d'accessibilité PDF. LiveCycle Designer (Disponible dans Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended) Ce produit permet de concevoir et de créer des formulaires entièrement nouveaux ou d'importer des formulaires PDF non balisés existants et de rendre leurs champs disponibles et accessibles. Vous avez la possibilité de déployer des formulaires dans divers formats (PDF balisé, XML et autres) à partir de LiveCycle Designer. Une fois que vous avez créé ou modifié un formulaire Acrobat dans LiveCycle Designer, vous obtenez un fichier LiveCycle Designer. Il ne s'agit plus d'un fichier UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 317 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution PDF que vous pouvez modifier ou manipuler dans Acrobat. Les applications Acrobat et Reader peuvent toutes deux ouvrir et lire les formulaires PDF créés dans LiveCycle Designer. Ces formulaires PDF ne contiennent pas néanmoins de droits de modification du fichier. Par conséquent, utilisez LiveCycle Designer uniquement pour manipuler des documents PDF conçus pour contenir des données de formulaire. Ne l'utilisez pas pour insérer des champs de formulaire dans un document comprenant à la fois des pages de texte et quelques pages dotées de champs de formulaire. Dans ce cas, utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour ajouter les champs de formulaire. Effectuez ensuite les tâches d'accessibilité applicables au reste du contenu du document. Applications de création La plupart des applications de création permettant de concevoir des formulaires ne conservent pas les champs disponibles pour le remplissage après la conversion du fichier au format PDF. Utilisez les outils de formulaire d'Acrobat Professional ou d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour ajouter les champs de formulaire à remplir. De plus, si vous balisez le formulaire lors de la conversion au format PDF, l'application de création peut générer des balises inappropriées pour les libellés des champs. Dans un formulaire complexe, par exemple, les libellés de tous les champs peuvent être réunis sur une seule ligne. Les lecteurs d'écran ne sont pas en mesure d'interpréter ces champs en tant que libellés individuels. Les problèmes d'ordre de lecture de ce type peuvent nécessiter un temps de correction considérable dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Dans ce cas, il est parfois plus judicieux de générer un formulaire PDF non balisé à partir de l'application de création. Vous pouvez alors utiliser l'outil Formulaires d'Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour insérer des champs à remplir avant de baliser le document complet. Certains formulaires sont suffisamment simples pour vous permettre de produire un fichier PDF balisé à partir de l'application de création. Dans ce cas, effectuez quelques retouches dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended après avoir ajouté des formulaires à remplir. Flux de production de création de formulaires PDF accessibles Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez ouvrir des formulaires PDF balisés et non balisés, insérer des champs à remplir, ajouter des descriptions de champs et du texte de remplacement, définir l'ordre de tabulation et baliser les formulaires (si cela n'est pas encore fait). Vous avez par ailleurs la possibilité de modifier les balises d'un formulaire PDF balisé à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture ou de l'arborescence des balises. 1. Concevez le formulaire pour l'accessibilité. Les formulaires sont souvent dotés d'une mise en page relativement complexe par rapport aux documents conçus selon une structure simple, avec disposition du contenu sur une colonne. Le taux de réussite d'une application dans l'analyse et le balisage d'un formulaire dépend largement du formatage et de la disposition d'origine du document, ainsi que des types de champs utilisés. Lors de la conception d'un formulaire, pensez à y inclure des en-têtes, des instructions et des champs dans lesquels les utilisateurs pourront saisir des données. Vous devez au moins attribuer un libellé à chaque champ. Prévoyez également de fournir des instructions pour les champs qui en ont besoin. Faites appel aux outils de dessin pour tracer des lignes et des zones plutôt que d'insérer des caractères (tels que les traits de soulignement et les barres verticales), car ces caractères textuels peuvent être source de confusions pour les lecteurs d'écran. L'ajout de descriptions aux champs de formulaire permet aux lecteurs d'écran d'identifier les champs pour les utilisateurs. Les utilisateurs entendent la description du champ lue à haute voix lorsqu'ils sélectionnent un champ par tabulation. Rédigez des descriptions courtes mais complètes. Par exemple, la description « Prénom » convient parfaitement pour un champ de prénom. N'utilisez pas d'instructions (telles que « Tapez votre prénom » comme description.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 318 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 2. Définissez et testez l'ordre de tabulation d'un formulaire. L'ordre de tabulation des champs de formulaire permet aux personnes atteintes de déficiences de se servir d'un clavier pour passer d'un champ à l'autre selon un ordre logique. Dans les formulaires PDF, définissez l'ordre de tabulation sur Utiliser la structure du document. Vous pouvez tester l'ordre de tabulation d'un formulaire à l'aide des commandes clavier suivantes : • Tabulation pour activer le champ suivant • Maj+Tabulation pour activer le champ précédent • Barre d'espacement pour sélectionner des options • Touches fléchées pour sélectionner des options sous forme de boutons radio ou d'éléments dans une liste 3. Balisez le formulaire PDF et corrigez les problèmes afférents. Si le formulaire PDF est déjà balisé, activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture d'Acrobat pour baliser un champ. Cet outil vous permet également de corriger les problèmes d'ordre de lecture des libellés de texte des champs de formulaire. Par exemple, il se peut que vous deviez fractionner en champs individuels des lignes de champs fusionnées. Voir aussi « Définition du mode de navigation dans les champs de formulaire » à la page 218 « Modification des balises à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture » à la page 322 Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant Ajout de balises à un document PDF existant La création directe d'un document balisé à partir d'une application source constitue la meilleure façon de concevoir des documents PDF accessibles. Toutefois, si un document PDF a été créé sans balises, vous pouvez ajouter celles-ci à l'aide de la commande Ajouter des balises au document. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Ajouter des balises au document. Une fois la procédure terminée, le document PDF est balisé et (en cas de détection de problèmes) le navigateur affiche le rapport sur l'ajout de balises. Remarque : La commande Ajouter des balises au document supprime les balises incluses dans le document avant son exécution. A propos du rapport sur l'ajout de balises Si Acrobat détecte d'éventuels problèmes lors de l'exécution de la commande Ajouter des balises au document, le rapport sur l'ajout de balises s'ouvre dans le navigateur. Le rapport dresse la liste des problèmes potentiels par page, inclut un lien de navigation vers chaque problème identifié et propose des suggestions de correction. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 319 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Vous devez évaluer le contexte d'un erreur avant de suivre une suggestion de correction donnée. Par exemple, le rapport peut indiquer qu'un élément balisé en tant qu'illustration (figure) nécessite un texte de remplacement pour le rendre accessible. Lorsque vous examinez l'illustration dans son contexte sur la page, vous pouvez très bien décider qu'il s'agit d'un élément de conception d'arrière-plan et pas d'une illustration d'une importance significative pour l'utilisateur. Dans le cas d'une image triviale, vous pouvez alors remplacer la balise Figure par une balise d'arrière-plan (Background) ; dans le cas d'une image significative pour le lecteur, vous ajoutez le texte de remplacement manquant. Remarque : Le rapport sur l'ajout de balises met uniquement en surbrillance les problèmes de balisage ; il s'agit d'un fichier temporaire que vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer. Vous pouvez évaluer d'autres problèmes de balisage, d'ordre de lecture et d'accessibilité au moyen de la fonction Vérification complète. Voir aussi « Vérification complète de l'accessibilité » à la page 303 Présentation de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture L'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture offre le moyen le plus simple et le plus rapide de corriger des problèmes d'ordre de lecture et de balise standard. Lorsque vous activez l'outil Retouche d’ordre de lecture, une boîte de dialogue vous permettant de visualiser les sélections représentant l’ordre de lecture du contenu de la page s'affiche. Chaque zone sélectionnée est numérotée et désignée par un bloc gris ou coloré. Le numéro indique le positionnement de la zone dans l’ordre de lecture de la page. Une fois l'ordre de lecture de la page vérifié, vous pouvez corriger d'autres erreurs de balisage plus subtiles. L'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture est destiné à réparer les documents PDF balisés à l'aide d'Acrobat et non ceux qui ont été balisés au moment de leur conversion à partir d'une application de création. Dans la mesure du possible, il est préférable de revenir au fichier source et d'y insérer les fonctions d'accessibilité à partir de l'application source. La réparation du fichier d'origine vous évitera de retoucher chaque future version de ce document PDF dans Acrobat. L'utilisation de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture est indiquée pour l'exécution des tâches d'accessibilité suivantes : • Vérification visuelle, puis réparation, de l'ordre de lecture du contenu des pages • Balisage des champs de formulaire à remplir et de leur libellé • Ajout d'un texte de remplacement aux illustrations et d'une description aux champs • Correction des tableaux simples et préparation des tableaux complexes en vue d'une manipulation plus poussée dans l'arborescence logique • Suppression du contenu superflu (bordures de page décoratives, par exemple) de l'arborescence logique Pour effectuer des tâches de modification de l'ordre de lecture et de balisage plus poussées (correction de tableaux complexes, suppression de balises obsolètes après la suppression de certaines pages, ajout d'un texte de remplacement aux liens, etc.), vous devez activer le panneau Balises, lequel comprend un jeu d'outils et de fonctions spécifiquement conçu pour la manipulation des balises PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Modification d'une balise dans le panneau Balises » à la page 331. Sélection de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture • Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. • Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. • Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 320 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Conseils d'utilisation de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture • Enregistrez le document (une copie de celui-ci) avant d'utiliser l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Vous ne pouvez pas faire appel à la fonction Annuler pour annuler des modifications apportées à l'aide de cet outil. Le rétablissement d'une version antérieure (enregistrée) du document est donc la seule manière d'annuler ce type de modification. • Choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Une seule page lors de l'utilisation de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Effacer la structure de page, Acrobat efface les balises sur toutes les pages visibles ou partiellement visibles. Options de Retouche de l’ordre de lecture Vous pouvez sélectionner les options de retouche de l'ordre de lecture dans la boîte de dialogue, dans le menu déroulant qui s’affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur une zone sélectionnée avec le bouton droit de la souris, ou à partir du menu Options du panneau Ordre. L'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture comprend les options suivantes : Texte Balise la sélection sous forme de texte. Illustration Balise la sélection sous forme d'illustration. Si une balise d’illustration contient du texte, ce dernier est défini comme faisant partie de l'image et n'est pas lu par les lecteurs d’écran. Champ de formulaire Balise la sélection sous forme de champ de formulaire. Illustration/Légende Balise une illustration et une légende sélectionnées en tant que balise unique. Tout texte inclus dans la balise est défini comme légende. Cette option s'avère utile pour le balisage des photos et des légendes, et pour éviter que le texte des légendes ne soit ajouté aux blocs de texte adjacents de manière erronée. Les illustrations nécessitent parfois un texte de remplacement. En-tête 1, En-tête 2, En-tête 3 Balise la sélection sous forme de titre de premier, deuxième ou troisième niveau. Vous pouvez convertir les balises de titre en signets pour faciliter la navigation dans le document. Tableau Balise la sélection sous forme de tableau après l’avoir analysée afin de déterminer l’emplacement des en-têtes, des colonnes et des rangées. Cellule Balise la sélection sous forme de tableau ou de cellule d’en-tête. Utilisez cette option pour fusionner des cellules qui ont été divisées de manière incorrecte. Formule Balise la sélection sous forme de formule. Etant donné que les logiciels pilotés par la voix risquent de traiter les balises de formule différemment du texte normal, vous pouvez ajouter une description à l'aide d'un texte de remplacement. Arrière-plan Balise la sélection sous forme d'élément d'arrière-plan ou d'artefact. L’élément est alors supprimé de l’arborescence des balises afin de ne plus figurer dans le document redistribué et de ne plus être lu par les lecteurs d'écran. Editeur de tableau Analyse automatiquement le tableau sélectionné en cellules et applique les balises appropriées. Le tableau doit être balisé sous forme de tableau pour que vous puissiez exécuter la commande Editeur de tableau. Afficher l’ordre du contenu de la page Affiche les éléments de contenu en tant que zones mises en surbrillance désignées par des numéros qui indiquent l'ordre de lecture. Indiquez la couleur de surbrillance en cliquant sur la nuance de couleur. Afficher les cellules du tableau Met en surbrillance le contenu des cellules de tableau. Indiquez la couleur de surbrillance en cliquant sur la nuance de couleur. Afficher les tableaux et les figures Délimite chaque tableau et illustration par une zone barrée. La zone indique également si l’élément comprend un texte de remplacement. Indiquez la couleur de la zone en cliquant sur la nuance de couleur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 321 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Effacer la structure de page Supprime la structure de balises de la page. Utilisez cette option pour créer une structure entièrement nouvelle lorsque la structure existante génère un nombre d'erreurs trop important. Afficher le panneau Ordre Ouvre le panneau Ordre vous permettant de réorganiser le contenu mis en surbrillance. Modifier le texte de remplacement Disponible dans le menu qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur une illustration sélectionnée avec le bouton droit de la souris. Permet à l'utilisateur d'ajouter ou de modifier une description de texte relative aux propriétés de l'illustration, lue par un lecteur d'écran ou tout autre dispositif d'assistance. Modifier le texte du champ de formulaire Disponible dans le menu qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur un champ de formulaire avec le bouton droit de la souris. Permet à l'utilisateur d’ajouter ou de modifier une description de texte de champ de formulaire lue par un lecteur d’écran ou tout autre dispositif d’assistance. Modifier le résumé de tableau Disponible dans le menu qui s'affiche lorsque vous cliquez sur un tableau sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris. Permet à l'utilisateur d'ajouter ou de modifier une description de texte sur les propriétés du tableau, lue par un lecteur d'écran ou tout autre dispositif d'assistance. Vérification et correction de l'ordre de lecture Vous pouvez vérifier rapidement l’ordre de lecture des documents PDF balisés à l’aide de l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Vous avez également la possibilité d'utiliser cet outil pour ajouter du texte de remplacement à des images et corriger de nombreux types de problèmes de balisage indiqués dans le rapport généré par Acrobat lors de l'ajout de balises à un document PDF. Les problèmes d'ordre de lecture sont visibles lorsque vous utilisez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Chaque section de contenu de page continu s'affiche en tant que zone mise en surbrillance distincte et est numérotée en fonction de son positionnement dans l'ordre de lecture. Le texte de chaque zone est organisé de gauche à droite et de haut en bas. (Vous pouvez modifier cet ordre dans les préférences de retouche.) Lorsqu’une zone sélectionnée contient deux colonnes de texte ou un texte discontinu, divisez-la en plusieurs parties pouvant être réorganisées. Etant donné que les zones mises en surbrillance sont rectangulaires, elles risquent de se chevaucher, notamment lorsque le contenu de page est de forme irrégulière. Aucun problème d'ordre de lecture n'est signalé à moins que le contenu de page se chevauche ou se trouve dans deux zones mises en surbrillance. Le contenu de page doit être inclus dans une seule zone mise en surbrillance. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre de lecture des zones mises en surbrillance en déplaçant un élément du panneau Ordre ou en le faisant glisser sur la page du panneau de visualisation. Réorganisez les zones mises en surbrillance de la page afin de lire une illustration et une légende à l'emplacement précis où elles sont référencées dans le texte. En modifiant l’ordre de lecture d’une zone sélectionnée, vous changez l’ordre de lecture de cet élément sans modifier l’aspect du document PDF. Vérification de l'ordre de lecture à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans cette boîte de dialogue, cochez la case Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page. Remarque : Si les zones mises en surbrillance ne s’affichent pas dans le panneau de visualisation, ceci signifie que le document ne contient pas de balises. 3 Procédez de l'une des manières suivantes (facultatif) : • Pour spécifier une couleur de mise en surbrillance, cliquez sur la nuance de couleur, puis choisissez la couleur voulue. • Pour mettre les tableaux et les illustrations en surbrillance et afficher les textes de remplacement des illustrations, cochez la case Afficher les tableaux et les figures. 4 Vérifiez l'ordre de lecture du texte de chaque zone mise en surbrillance.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 322 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Un zoom avant peut simplifier cette opération. 5 Vérifiez la numérotation de toutes les zones mises en surbrillance. Si des zones consécutives ne se suivent pas, réorganisez-les dans le panneau Ordre. 6 Cliquez sur Afficher le panneau Ordre, puis sélectionnez chaque entrée de contenu (entre crochets [ ]) dans le panneau Ordre afin de mettre en surbrillance la zone de contenu dans le panneau de visualisation. Utilisez cette méthode pour chercher des zones numérotées que vous ne pouvez pas visualiser ou localiser sur la page. Modification de l'ordre de lecture via le panneau Ordre 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, cliquez sur le bouton Afficher le panneau Ordre. 3 Dans le panneau Ordre, naviguez dans la liste des zones mises en surbrillance qui s'affiche dans le panneau de visualisation. 4 Dans le panneau Ordre, faites glisser la balise d'une zone en surbrillance vers l'emplacement souhaité. Pendant cette opération, une ligne s'affiche pour indiquer les emplacements possibles. Après avoir déplacé l’élément, les zones sélectionnées sont renumérotées afin d’afficher le nouvel ordre de lecture. Vous pouvez sélectionner et déplacer plusieurs zones adjacentes. Modification de l'ordre de lecture par glissement sur la page 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans cette boîte de dialogue, cochez la case Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page. 3 Dans le panneau de visualisation, placez le pointeur sur le numéro de la zone mise en surbrillance à déplacer, puis faites glisser celle-ci vers son emplacement de lecture. Le pointeur d'insertion de texte affiche les emplacements cible dans le texte. Lorsque vous relâchez la zone sélectionnée, l’emplacement du pointeur d’insertion de texte se transforme en ligne de division quand la zone sous-jacente se divise en deux nouvelles zones sélectionnées. Toutes les zones mises en surbrillance sont renumérotées pour afficher le nouvel ordre de lecture. Modification des balises à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture Vous pouvez utiliser l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour créer des balises dans des documents PDF non balisés ou pour ajouter des balises à une structure existante. Toutefois, la création manuelle de balises ne permet pas de générer une structure aussi détaillée que la commande Ajouter des balises au document (paragraphes, listes numérotées ou à puces, sauts de lignes et tirets, par exemple). Avant d'effacer la structure existante, assurez-vous que le balisage manuel est l'unique solution possible. Balisage d'une zone 1 Pour sélectionner une zone de la page contenant une type de contenu (un bloc de texte, par exemple), faites glisser cette zone dans le panneau de visualisation à l’aide de l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter du contenu de page à la zone sélectionnée, faites glisser ce contenu en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. • Pour supprimer du contenu de page de la zone sélectionnée, faites glisser ce contenu en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 323 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 3 Cliquez sur le bouton approprié dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture afin de spécifier le type de balise. Modification du balisage d’une zone Si Acrobat crée une balise d'élément de page incorrecte, vous pouvez modifier le type de balise de la zone mise en surbrillance. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans cette boîte de dialogue, cochez la case Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page. 3 Pour mettre une zone en surbrillance, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faite-la glisser pour la mettre en surbrillance. • Cliquez sur le numéro de cette zone. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton du type de balise souhaité pour la zone sélectionnée. Ajout ou suppression de contenu d’une zone balisée L'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture affiche toujours le moins de zones mises en surbrillance possible. Si le contenu d’une zone sélectionnée n'est pas réparti correctement, vous devrez peut-être diviser la zone afin de la réorganiser. Les zones mises en surbrillance peuvent également contenir du contenu de pages adjacentes qui n'a aucun rapport avec ces zones ou qui requiert un autre type de balise. Un contenu de page risque aussi d’être séparé des éléments auxquels il est associé, notamment lorsqu’il ne contient pas dans une forme rectangulaire. Utilisez l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour ajouter ou supprimer du contenu d’une zone sélectionné ou pour diviser cette zone afin d’en réorganiser le contenu. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans cette boîte de dialogue, cochez la case Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page. 3 Dans le panneau de visualisation, sélectionnez une zone en surbrillance. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter du contenu à la sélection active, cliquez sur le contenu en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Le pointeur se transforme en signe plus (+). • Pour supprimer du contenu de la zone sélectionnée, cliquez sur le contenu en question en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. Le pointeur se transforme en signe moins (-). 5 Cliquez sur le bouton du type de balise souhaité pour la zone sélectionnée. Division d'une zone en deux 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans cette boîte de dialogue, cochez la case Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page. 3 Dans le panneau de visualisation, faites glisser une petite partie du contenu près de la bordure de la première zone à créer. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Arrière-plan de la boîte de dialogue. La zone mise en surbrillance se divise en deux zones distinctes numérotées de droite à gauche. 5 Pour modifier l’ordre de lecture, cliquez sur Afficher le panneau Ordre et faites glisser la nouvelle zone sélectionnée vers l’emplacement correct dans le panneau Ordre. 6 Faites glisser la souris pour sélectionner la première zone de contenu créée, y compris l’arrière-plan, puis définissez la balise en cliquant sur un bouton de la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 324 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Application d'une balise d'en-tête Pour aider les lecteurs à naviguer dans le document et à trouver les informations dont ils ont besoin, assurez-vous que les titres sont balisés au niveau approprié afin que leur position dans l’arborescence du contenu soit indiquée. 1 Activez l’outil Retouche de l’ordre de lecture et sélectionnez le texte de titre dans le document PDF. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l’ordre de lecture, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant à la balise d'en-tête adéquate (par exemple, En-tête 1, En-tête 2). Une fois les balises d'en-tête appliquées, vous pouvez convertir les en-têtes en signets en vue d'améliorer la navigation. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Ajout d'un signet balisé » à la page 343. Suppression d'éléments de page de la structure de balises Lors du balisage d’un document PDF, Acrobat ne fait pas toujours la distinction entre les illustrations d’instructions et les éléments décoratifs d’une page. Les éléments qui décorent une mise en page, tels que des bordures, des lignes ou des arrière-plans, peuvent encombrer la structure et doivent être supprimés. Par conséquent, Acrobat risque de baliser de manière erronée des artefacts ou des éléments de page en tant qu'illustrations. Vous pouvez supprimer des artefacts et des éléments de page superflus de la structure des balises en les redéfinissant à l'aide de la balise d'arrière-plan ou en supprimant leurs balises. Lorsqu’une image balisée d’un document ne contient pas d’informations utiles ou décrivant l’illustration, vous pouvez supprimer l’élément correspondant dans la structure des balises pour qu’il ne soit pas lu à haute voix ou redistribué. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, cochez les cases Afficher l'ordre du contenu de la page et Afficher les tableaux et les figures. 3 Supprimez l'élément de page en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le panneau de visualisation, sélectionnez l'élément de page et cliquez sur Arrière-plan dans la boîte de dialogue. • Dans le panneau Ordre, sélectionnez l'élément de page et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Modification des balises d'illustrations et de tableaux Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour ajouter et modifier les balises et le texte de remplacement des illustrations et des tableaux. Application d'une balise d'illustration Vous pouvez sélectionner un élément et le définir comme illustration à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Une fois l'élément défini comme illustration, vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter un texte de remplacement décrivant l'illustration. 1 A l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, sélectionnez l'illustration. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, cliquez sur Illustration. 3 Dans le panneau de visualisation, cliquez sur la zone avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier le texte de remplacement. 4 Saisissez le texte de remplacement, puis cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 325 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Vérification et correction de balises d'illustration Vous pouvez utiliser l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour identifier et corriger les résultats du balisage des illustrations. Indiquez si les illustrations comprennent ou nécessitent un texte de remplacement afin que les dispositifs d’assistance puissent les lire correctement. Les balises d'illustration devraient identifier le contenu d'image important pour l'ensemble du document, les graphiques ou les photographies par exemple. Si des éléments d’arrière-plan ne devant pas être lus sont balisés en tant qu’illustrations, redéfinissez-les comme arrière-plan. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, puis cliquez sur Afficher les tableaux et les figures dans la boîte de dialogue. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si une illustration n’est pas balisée en tant que telle, sélectionnez la zone de contenu voulue, puis cliquez sur Figure ou Figure/Légende dans la boîte de dialogue. • Pour supprimer un texte associé par erreur à une illustration, faites glisser le texte pour le sélectionner et cliquez sur le bouton Texte de la boîte de dialogue. • Pour inclure une légende associée à une illustration, sélectionnez l'illustration et la légende et cliquez sur le bouton Figure/Légende dans la boîte de dialogue. Vérification et ajout d'un texte de remplacement pour les illustrations Pour que les lecteurs d'écran puissent décrire les éléments graphiques qui illustrent des concepts importants d'un document, vous devez en fournir une description sous forme de texte de remplacement. Les lecteurs d'écran ne lisent pas ou ne reconnaissent pas les illustrations, à moins que vous n'ajoutiez un texte de remplacement aux propriétés des balises. Si vous ajoutez un texte de remplacement à des éléments de texte, seule la description est lue (et non le texte même). 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Cochez la case Afficher les tableaux et les figures dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur l'illustration avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier le texte de remplacement dans le menu contextuel. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier le texte de remplacement, saisissez une nouvelle description ou modifiez une description existante de l'illustration, puis cliquez sur OK. Modification de balises de tableau et balisage de tableaux non reconnus Les tableaux constituent un défi particulier pour les lecteurs d'écran car l'organisation du texte et des données numériques y est facile à repérer visuellement. Le contenu des cellules de tableau peut se révéler complexe et comprendre des listes, des paragraphes, des champs de formulaire ou un autre tableau. Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats possibles lors du balisage d’un tableau, utilisez l’application de création du document afin d'ajouter des balises lorsque vous créez le document PDF. Si le document PDF n’est pas balisé, vous avez la possibilité de lui ajouter des balises à l’aide de la commande Ajouter des balises au document. La plupart des tableaux sont bien reconnus par cette commande. Toutefois, celle-ci peut ne pas reconnaître les tableaux ne possédant pas de bords, de titres, de colonnes ou de rangées clairement définis. Utilisez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour déterminer si le tableau est correctement reconnu et pour corriger les problèmes de reconnaissance. Pour appliquer un formatage particulier à des tableaux et des cellules de tableau, utilisez le panneau Balises.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 326 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Vous pouvez utiliser l'éditeur de tableau pour analyser automatiquement les composants d'un tableau et appliquer les balises appropriées, mais vous devrez peut-être vérifier et corriger certaines balises manuellement. En affichant les balises de tableau, vous pouvez identifier les colonnes, les rangées et les cellules qui ont été correctement balisées. Les tableaux dont les bords et les règles ne sont pas définis correctement sont souvent balisés de manière inexacte ou contiennent des éléments de pages adjacentes. Vous avez la possibilité de corriger les tableaux mal balisés en les sélectionnant et en les redéfinissant, ou de diviser des cellules combinées en créant une balise pour chaque cellule. Pour corriger des problèmes de balisage complexes pour les tableaux, vous devez souvent faire appel au panneau Balises. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, puis cliquez sur Afficher les tableaux et les figures. 2 Si le tableau n’est pas clairement libellé comme tel dans le panneau de visualisation, faites-le glisser pour le sélectionner, puis cliquez sur Tableau dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur Afficher les cellules du tableau pour vérifier que toutes les cellules du tableau sont définies comme des éléments distincts. 4 Si les cellules n’apparaissent pas comme éléments distincts, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Lorsqu'une ou plusieurs cellules ont fusionné, utilisez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour sélectionner la zone d'une seule cellule et cliquez sur Cellule dans la boîte de dialogue. Recommencez cette opération pour chaque cellule fusionnée. • Lorsque des cellules ne sont pas mises en surbrillance, le tableau risque de ne pas pouvoir utiliser un formatage standard. Générez à nouveau le tableau dans l'application de création. 5 Lorsque le tableau contient des cellules qui doivent s'étendre sur plusieurs colonnes, définissez les attributs ColSpan et RowSpan de ces rangées dans la structure des balises. Suppression ou remplacement des balises de structure du document Lorsque le balisage d'un document PDF dans Adobe Acrobat crée une structure de balises trop complexe ou trop difficile à corriger, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour supprimer ou remplacer la structure actuelle. Si le document contient essentiellement du texte, vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner une page et supprimer les titres, les tableaux et d'autres éléments afin de simplifier et de clarifier la structure des balises. Acrobat est en mesure de baliser un document déjà balisé après la suppression initiale des balises existantes de l'arborescence. Suppression de toutes les balises d'un document PDF 1 Ouvrez le panneau Balises (Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Balises) et sélectionnez la balise racine (située en haut de l'arborescence), intitulée Balises. 2 Dans le panneau Balises, choisissez Options > Supprimer la balise. Remarque : La commande Effacer la structure de page de la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l'ordre de lecture supprime toutes les balises des pages actuellement visibles. Remplacement de la structure de balises existante Cette procédure convient particulièrement aux pages contenant une seule colonne de texte. Lorsque la page contient plusieurs colonnes, chacune doit être sélectionnée et balisée séparément. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. 2 Dans le panneau de visualisation, faites glisser la page entière pour la sélectionner. La sélection comprend le texte et les autres éléments.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 327 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 3 Faites glisser le pointeur autour des éléments de page non textuels (tels que les illustrations et les légendes) en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour les désélectionner (jusqu'à ce que le texte soit le seul élément sélectionné sur la page). Cliquez sur Texte dans la boîte de dialogue Retouche de l’ordre de lecture. 4 Dans le panneau de visualisation, sélectionnez un élément autre que le texte, une illustration ou une légende par exemple, puis créez une balise en cliquant sur le bouton approprié dans la boîte de dialogue. Recommencez cette opération jusqu'à ce que l'ensemble du contenu de page soit balisé. Ajout de liens accessibles Grâce à des liens bien pensés, les utilisateurs sont en mesure de passer d'une partie du document à une autre, ou d'être dirigés vers des informations connexes dans un document tiers ou un site Web pertinent. Pour que les lecteurs d'écran puissent accéder aux URL, vous devez convertir les URL afin d'activer les liens et vous assurer qu'ils sont balisés correctement dans le document PDF. Remarque : Si vous avez balisé le document Adobe PDF lors de la conversion à partir d'une application de création, les liens et les URL du document sont probablement déjà actifs et inclus dans l'arborescence des balises, et donc accessibles aux lecteurs d'écran. Il est certainement inutile d'effectuer cette tâche à moins que vous ne souhaitiez ajouter des liens supplémentaires. Acrobat offre plusieurs méthodes de création de liens actifs pour le texte, les objets et les URL d'un document PDF. Toutefois, les méthodes diffèrent dans leur impact sur l'arborescence des balises. La meilleure façon de créer des liens accessibles est d'utiliser la commande Créer un lien. Contrairement aux autres méthodes de création de liens dans un document PDF balisé (l'utilisation de l'outil Lien ou de la commande Créer à partir des URL du document), la commande Créer un lien ajoute les trois types de balises requis par les lecteurs d'écran pour reconnaître un lien. Les autres méthodes créent une seule des trois balises, ce qui signifie que vous devez modifier manuellement l'arborescence des balises pour ajouter les deux balises restantes pour chaque lien et placer ces balises dans l'ordre de lecture approprié dans l'arborescence. Bien que vous deviez activer les liens un après l'autre, l'utilisation de la commande Créer un lien fournit les résultats les plus rapides et nécessite le moins de suivi pour rendre les liens accessibles aux lecteurs d'écran. Pour finir, modifiez éventuellement l'arborescence des balises afin d'ajouter un texte de remplacement aux nouveaux liens. La création de liens à l'aide d'Acrobat Standard ne génère pas de balises pour les liens. Pour activer les liens et les ajouter à l'arborescence des balises, effectuez les opérations suivantes : 1 Sélectionnez le texte ou l'objet pour lequel vous souhaitez créer un lien. 2 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Créer un lien tout dans le menu contextuel. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, sélectionnez les options appropriées, puis suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran pour définir un URL, une vue de page ou un fichier comme cible du lien. Par défaut, le texte sélectionné pour chaque lien devient le texte du lien. Une fois tous les liens insérés, vous pouvez modifier l'arborescence des balises en vue d'ajouter un texte de remplacement aux liens, ce qui améliore encore l'accessibilité du document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 328 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Définition de la langue d'un document L'indication de la langue du document dans le fichier PDF permet à certains modèles de lecteurs d'écran de basculer vers la langue appropriée. Vous pouvez définir la langue d'un document entier à l'aide d'Acrobat Professional, d'Acrobat Professional Extended ou d'Acrobat Standard. De même, il est possible de configurer la langue de parties spécifiques d'un document multilingue dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. • Pour définir la langue de l'ensemble du document, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Sélectionnez ensuite une langue dans le menu approprié de la zone Options de lecture du panneau Avancées. • Pour appliquer à l'ensemble du document une langue qui ne se trouve pas dans le menu Langue, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Entrez ensuite le code ISO 639 de la langue voulue dans le champ Langue de la zone Options de lecture du panneau Avancées. Pour plus de détails sur la norme ISO 639, voir www.loc.gov/standards. • Pour définir la langue de sections ou de mots spécifiques, sélectionnez l'élément de texte approprié dans le panneau Balises, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Balise. Sélectionnez la langue de votre choix dans le menu déroulant Langue, puis choisissez Fermer. Remarque : La langue définie pour un élément s'applique également aux éléments imbriqués sous-jacents dans l'arborescence logique. Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran L'auteur d'un document peut configurer un document PDF accessible de manière à interdire la copie, l'impression, l'extraction, le commentaire ou la modification du contenu. Ce paramètre risque de perturber la capacité d'un lecteur d'écran à lire le document, car celui-ci doit être en mesure de copier ou d'extraire le texte du document en vue de le convertir en voix. Pour conserver la protection du document tout en autorisant les lecteurs d'écran à accéder au texte, utilisez l'un des paramètres suivants : • Pour bénéficier d'une protection à niveau de chiffrement faible, sélectionnez l'option Activer la copie de texte, d’images et d’autre contenu dans la boîte de dialogue Protection par mot de passe - Paramètres. • Si vous choisissez un niveau de chiffrement élevé, sélectionnez l'option Activer l'accès au texte pour les lecteurs d'écran destinés aux malvoyants dans la boîte de dialogue Protection par mot de passe - Paramètres. Cette option a priorité sur les paramètres de protection du document dans le seul objectif de donner accès au contenu aux logiciels d'assistance tels que les lecteurs d'écran. Si votre produit de technologie d'assistance est enregistré auprès d'Adobe en tant qu'agent de confiance, vous pouvez lire des fichiers PDF pouvant être inaccessibles avec d'autres solutions d'assistance. Acrobat identifie les lecteurs d'écran et autres produits considérés comme agents de confiance. A des fins d'accessibilité, l'application ignore alors les paramètres de protection du document qui devraient restreindre l'accès au contenu. Cependant, les paramètres de protection restent en vigueur pour toutes les autres fonctions, notamment l'interdiction d'imprimer, de copier, d'extraire, de commenter ou de modifier le texte. Voir aussi « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 254 A propos des filigranes et des lecteurs d'écran Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter un filigrane à un document PDF balisé sans l'inclure dans l'arborescence des balises. Cela peut s'avérer pratique pour les personnes se servant de lecteurs d'écran, car elles n'entendront pas la lecture du texte du filigrane en tant que contenu du document. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 329 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution La méthode la plus pratique pour ajouter un filigrane qui ne gêne pas les lecteurs d'écran consiste à insérer un document PDF non balisé contenant le filigrane dans un PDF balisé. Voir aussi « Ajout et modification d'un filigrane » à la page 140 Modification de la structure d'un document à l'aide des panneaux Contenu et Balises Correction de problèmes de redistribution à l'aide du panneau Contenu Utilisez le panneau Contenu pour corriger dans un document PDF les erreurs de redistribution ne pouvant être résolues avec l’outil Retouche de l’ordre de lecture. Etant donné que vous pouvez endommager un document PDF lorsque vous modifiez des objets de contenu, familiarisez-vous avec la structure PDF avant toute modification. Pour plus de détails sur la structure d'un fichier PDF, voir le document « PDF Reference Sixth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.7 », disponible sur la page de référence PDF (en anglais uniquement) du site Web d'Adobe. Le panneau Contenu fournit une vue hiérarchique des objets constituant le document PDF, y compris l'objet PDF luimême. Chaque document inclut une ou plusieurs pages, une série d'annotations (par exemple des commentaires et des liens) et les objets de contenu de la page. Les objets de contenu sont des conteneurs, du texte, des chemins et des images. Les objets sont répertoriés selon leur ordre d'affichage sur la page, à l'instar des balises de l'arborescence logique. Toutefois, il n’est pas nécessaire que les documents PDF soient balisés pour afficher ou modifier la structure des objets. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Contenu. 2 Développez le nom du document pour afficher les pages et les objets. 3 Déplacez un conteneur ou un objet après l'avoir sélectionné en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites-le glisser vers l'emplacement voulu. • Dans le menu Options, choisissez Couper, puis sélectionnez la balise située au-dessus de l'emplacement où vous souhaitez coller la balise coupée, puis choisissez Coller dans le menu Options. Remarque : Les éléments conteneur ne peuvent être collés directement dans des éléments de page. Pour déplacer un conteneur vers une autre page, coupez le conteneur. Sélectionnez ensuite un conteneur sur la page où vous souhaitez placer le conteneur coupé, puis choisissez Coller dans le menu Options. Ensuite, faites glisser le conteneur d'un niveau vers l'emplacement voulu. Options du panneau Contenu Dans le panneau Contenu, faites appel au menu Options ou cliquez sur un objet avec le bouton droit de la souris pour choisir l'une des options suivantes : Nouveau conteneur Ajoute un nouvel objet conteneur à la fin de la page ou du conteneur sélectionné(e). Modifier un dictionnaire conteneur Spécifie le dictionnaire du conteneur. Vous risquez d'endommager le document PDF si vous sélectionnez des options dans cette boîte de dialogue de manière incorrecte. Cette option est disponible uniquement pour les conteneurs comprenant des dictionnaires. Couper Coupe et copie l'objet sélectionné (et non le contenu de page associé). Coller Colle directement le contenu sous l'objet sélectionné au même niveau hiérarchique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 330 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Coller enfant Colle le contenu en tant qu'élément de contenu enfant de l'objet sélectionné. Supprimer Supprime l'objet du document (et non le contenu de page associé). Rechercher un contenu à partir de la sélection Recherche l'objet dans le panneau Contenu comprenant l'objet sélectionné dans le panneau de visualisation. Rechercher Recherche des artefacts, du contenu, des commentaires et des liens non marqués (non balisés). Des options vous permettent de lancer une recherche sur la page ou dans le document, et d'ajouter des balises aux éléments trouvés. Créer un artefact Définit les objets sélectionnés comme artefacts. Les artefacts ne peuvent être lus par un lecteur d'écran ou par la fonction Lecture audio. Il est souvent préférable de baliser les numéros de page, les en-têtes et les pieds de page sous forme d'artefacts. Supprimer l'artefact Supprime la définition d'artefact de l'objet sélectionné. Mettre le contenu en surbrillance Sélectionne le contour du contenu et le met en surbrillance dans le panneau de visualisation lorsque vous sélectionnez l'objet associé dans le panneau Contenu. Afficher les métadonnées Permet d'afficher et de modifier des métadonnées d'image ou d'objet. Propriétés Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche. A propos du panneau Balises Le panneau Balises vous permet d'afficher et de modifier des balises de l'arborescence logique ou de l'arborescence des balises d'un document PDF. Dans le panneau Balises, les balises apparaissent selon une hiérarchie qui reflète l'ordre de lecture du document. Le premier élément de cette structure est la racine des balises. Tous les autres éléments constituent des balises enfant de la racine des balises. Les balises utilisent des types d'éléments codés qui apparaissent sous la forme de signes inférieur et supérieur (< >). Chaque élément, y compris les éléments structurels tels que les sections et les articles, s’affichent dans l’arborescence logique par type, suivis d’un titre ainsi que du contenu de l’élément ou de la description du contenu. Les éléments structurels sont généralement répertoriés en tant que balises conteneur (ou parent) et comprennent plusieurs éléments plus petits (ou balises enfant). Remarque : Pour plus de détails sur les structures logiques, consultez le document « PDF Reference Sixth Edition: Adobe Portable Document Format Version 1.7 », disponible sur la page de référence PDF (en anglais uniquement) du site Web d'Adobe. Bien que vous puissiez résoudre la plupart des problèmes de balisage à l’aide de l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, vous devez utiliser le panneau Balises pour le balisage détaillé des tableaux et des éléments de sous-structure (tels que les paragraphes, les listes et les sections utilisant plusieurs langues). Insérez des balises manuellement dans un document via le panneau Balises en dernier ressort. Envisagez d'abord d'utiliser la commande Ajouter des balises au document. Important : Les opérations effectuées à partir du panneau Balises sont irréversibles ; la commande Annuler est sans effet sur elles. Enregistrez une copie de sauvegarde d'un document avant de commencer à la manipuler via le panneau Balises. Affichage des balises dans le panneau Balises 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Balises. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Développez la balise correspondant à la section qui vous intéresse. • Maintenez la touche Ctrl (Windows) ou la touche Option (Mac OS) enfoncée pendant que vous cliquez sur le signe plus ou le triangle placé en regard de la racine des balises pour afficher toutes les balises de l'arborescence logique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 331 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Modification d'une balise dans le panneau Balises Vous pouvez modifier le titre, l’emplacement et le type d’une balise d’élément. Tout contenu de page doit être balisé, marqué comme artefact ou supprimé de l'arborescence logique. Modification d'un titre de balise 1 Dans le panneau Balises, développez la section de l'arborescence logique que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Pour modifier le titre, sélectionnez la balise, choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options, saisissez le texte voulu dans la zone Titre, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Déplacement d'une balise 1 Dans le panneau Balises, développez la racine des balises afin d'afficher toutes les balises. 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de balise de l'élément à déplacer. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser la balise vers l'emplacement voulu. Pendant cette opération, une ligne s'affiche pour indiquer les emplacements possibles. • Dans le menu Options, choisissez Couper, puis sélectionnez la balise figurant au-dessus de l'emplacement où vous souhaitez coller la balise coupée. Dans le menu Options, choisissez Coller pour déplacer la balise au même niveau que la balise sélectionnée ou choisissez Coller enfant pour déplacer la balise au sein de la balise sélectionnée. Changement de type d'élément 1 Dans le panneau Balises, développez la section de l'arborescence logique que vous souhaitez modifier. 2 Sélectionnez un élément, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options. 3 Choisissez un nouveau type d'élément dans le menu Type, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Options du panneau Balises Dans le panneau Balises, passez par le menu Options ou cliquez sur une balise dans l'arborescence logique avec le bouton droit de la souris pour choisir l'une des options suivantes : Nouvelle balise Crée une nouvelle balise dans l'arborescence logique sous l'élément sélectionné. Spécifiez le type et le titre de cette nouvelle balise. Couper Supprime la balise sélectionnée de son emplacement actuel et la place dans le Presse-papiers. Coller Place la balise stockée dans le Presse-papiers à l'endroit voulu, en remplacement de la balise sélectionnée. Coller enfant Place la balise stockée dans le Presse-papiers à l'endroit voulu, en tant qu'enfant de la balise sélectionnée. Supprimer la balise Supprime la balise sélectionnée. Rechercher une balise à partir de la sélection Recherche la balise dans le panneau Balises contenant le texte ou l'objet sélectionné dans le panneau de visualisation. Créer une balise à partir de la sélection Crée une nouvelle balise dans l'arborescence logique sous l'élément sélectionné dans le panneau de visualisation. Spécifiez le type et le titre de cette nouvelle balise. Rechercher Recherche les artefacts, les suspects de la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) ainsi que le contenu (non balisé) non marqué, les commentaires, les liens et les annotations. Des options vous permettent d'effectuer la recherche dans la page ou dans le document, et d'ajouter des balises aux éléments trouvés. Transformer la balise en artefact Transforme les balises sélectionnées en artefacts et supprime le contenu balisé de l'arborescence logique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 332 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Copier le contenu dans le Presse-papiers Copie l'intégralité du contenu des balises sélectionnées. Modifier le mappage de catégorie Permet d'ajouter, de modifier et de supprimer le mappage de catégorie, le dictionnaire de style, du document. Les mappages de catégorie stockent des attribuent associés à chaque élément. Modifier le mappage de rôle Permet d'ajouter, de modifier et de supprimer le mappage de rôle du document. Grâce aux mappages de rôle, chaque document peut contenir un jeu de balises unique. Mappez ces balises personnalisées à des balises prédéfinies dans Acrobat afin de les identifier et de les modifier plus facilement. Annotations de balise Ajoute tous les nouveaux commentaires et champs de formulaire à l’arborescence des balises sous l’élément de balise sélectionné. Les commentaires et champs de formulaire existants ne sont pas intégrés à l’arborescence des balises. Les commentaires de mise en surbrillance et de soulignement sont automatiquement associés et balisés avec le texte auxquels ils se rapportent. Vous n'avez donc pas besoin d'utiliser cette option. Document PDF balisé Marque le PDF comme document balisé. Désélectionnez cette option pour supprimer l'indicateur. Important : Cette option n'indique pas obligatoirement que le document PDF est conforme aux instructions PDF et doit donc être utilisée judicieusement. Mettre le contenu en surbrillance Met le contour du contenu en surbrillance dans le panneau de visualisation lorsque vous sélectionnez la balise associée dans le panneau Balises. Afficher les métadonnées Ouvre une boîte de dialogue en lecture seule contenant des informations de référence sur la balise sélectionnée. Propriétés Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche. Ajout d'un texte de remplacement et d'informations complémentaires aux balises Certains documents PDF balisés ne contiennent pas nécessairement toutes les informations permettant de garantir une accessibilité complète. Si, par exemple, vous souhaitez rendre un document accessible pour un lecteur d'écran, le document PDF doit inclure des textes de remplacement pour les illustrations, des propriétés de langue pour les parties de texte données dans une autre langue que la langue par défaut du document, ainsi qu'une version complète du texte abrégé. L'attribution de la langue appropriée aux différents éléments de texte est essentielle. En effet, elle permet de garantir que les caractères adaptés sont utilisés lorsque vous rouvrez le document à d'autres fins et que la vérification orthographique s'effectue avec le bon dictionnaire. Vous pouvez ajouter un texte de remplacement et plusieurs langues à une balise dans le panneau Balises. (Si vous ne devez indiquer qu'une seule langue, choisissez celle-ci via Fichier > Propriétés.) Vous avez également la possibilité d'ajouter un texte de remplacement à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture. Remarque : Les descriptions de texte de remplacement doivent être aussi concises que possible. Ajout d'un texte de remplacement à un lien Les lecteurs d'écran peuvent lire les URL de liens Web à haute voix, mais l'ajout d'un texte de remplacement évocateur aux liens peut être d'une utilité considérable pour les utilisateurs. Par exemple, en ajoutant un texte de remplacement, le lecteur d'écran peut indiquer à l'utilisateur « atteindre la page d'accessibilité d'Acrobat sur adobe.com » plutôt que « atteindre http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/solutionsacc.html ». Vous ajoutez un texte de remplacement à la balise d'un lien.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 333 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Remarque : Vous devez ajouter un texte de remplacement uniquement aux balises sans balises enfant. L'ajout d'un texte de remplacement à une balise parent empêche un lecteur d'écran de lire les balises enfant sous-jacentes. 1 Dans l'arborescence des balises, sélectionnez la balise associée au lien, puis choisissez Options > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Balise. 3 Saisissez le texte de remplacement du lien, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Ajout d'un texte de remplacement à une illustration 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Balises. 2 Développez l'arborescence logique afin de rechercher et de sélectionner l'élément de balise élément de balise pour l'image. Pour faciliter la recherche, utilisez l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture afin de sélectionner l’illustration (ou le texte situé près de celle-ci) dans le panneau de visualisation, puis choisissez Rechercher une balise à partir de la sélection dans le menu Options du panneau Balises. 3 Choisissez Mettre le contenu en surbrillance dans le menu Options du panneau Balises pour afficher dans le document une zone en surbrillance correspondant à la balise. 4 Choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options du panneau Balises. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Balise. 6 Dans la zone Texte de remplacement, saisissez le texte descriptif de l'illustration. Ajout d'un texte de remplacement à un terme abrégé 1 Dans le panneau Balises, recherchez le terme abrégé en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Développez l'arborescence des balises pour afficher les éléments abrégés. • Utilisez l'outil Retouche d'ordre de lecture ou l'outil Sélectionner pour sélectionner le terme abrégé dans le document, puis choisissez Rechercher une balise à partir de la sélection dans le menu Options pour rechercher le texte dans l'arborescence des balises. 2 Sélectionnez la balise de cet élément et choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options. Remarque : Si l'abréviation contient du texte supplémentaire, coupez ce dernier et placez-le dans une nouvelle balise enfant au sein de la même balise parent . 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Balise. 4 Dans la zone Texte de remplacement, saisissez la version non abrégée du terme. 5 Cliquez sur Fermer. Création d'une nouvelle balise enfant 1 Dans le panneau Balises, sélectionnez dans l'arborescence des balises concernée le noeud parent (icône située au même niveau que celui de la balise enfant que vous voulez créer) . 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Nouvelle balise. 3 Sélectionnez le type de balise adéquat dans le menu déroulant Type ou indiquez un type de balise personnalisé auquel vous attribuez un nom (facultatif). Cliquez ensuite sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 334 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Ajout de balises à des commentaires Lorsque vous balisez un document PDF contenant des commentaires, ces derniers sont également balisés. Toutefois, si vous ajoutez des commentaires à un document PDF déjà balisé, ceux-ci ne sont pas balisés à moins que vous ne commenciez par activer le balisage des commentaires. Remarque : Pour activer le balisage des commentaires dans un document PDF, choisissez Annotations de balise dans le menu Options du panneau Balises. Les commentaires ou les annotations ajoutés au document PDF sont balisés automatiquement. Lorsqu'un document contient des commentaires non balisés, vous pouvez les identifier dans l'arborescence logique et les baliser à l'aide de la commande Rechercher du panneau Balises. 1 Dans le menu Options du panneau Balises, choisissez Rechercher. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Rechercher un élément, choisissez Commentaires non marqués dans le menu déroulant Rechercher, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. 3 Lorsque le type de commentaire s'affiche dans le champ Type (par exemple, Texte), cliquez sur Baliser, choisissez Annotation dans le menu déroulant Type de la boîte de dialogue Nouvelle balise, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Rechercher un élément, cliquez sur Suivant pour rechercher et baliser tous les commentaires, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Correction des balises d'un tableau dans le panneau Balises Utilisez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour vous assurer que les tableaux sont correctement balisés. Si vous devez structurer des illustrations et du texte dans les cellules du tableau, il est préférable de générer à nouveau le tableau à l'aide de l'application de création, puis de le convertir en document PDF accessible. La procédure d'ajout de balises dans des cellules est une tâche laborieuse dans Acrobat. Utilisez l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour déterminer si le tableau est correctement balisé avant d'apporter des modifications à des éléments de tableau. Vérification des éléments de tableau 1 Dans le panneau Balises, développez la racine des balises afin d'afficher une balise de tableau. 2 Sélectionnez la balise et vérifiez qu'elle contient l'un des éléments suivants : • Chacune des rangées de tableau contient une en-tête de tableau , et contiennent les rangées de tableau. (Les rangées de tableau contiennent des cellules ou des cellules de données de tableau . • Les sections , des cellules ou les deux.) 3 Effectuez une ou plusieurs des opérations suivantes : • Si la balise du tableau ne contient pas ces éléments, mais comprend des rangées et des colonnes et que les cellules figurent dans le tableau affiché dans le panneau de visualisation, utilisez l’outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture pour sélectionner et définir le tableau ou des cellules. • Lorsque le tableau contient des rangées s'étendant sur plusieurs colonnes, définissez les attributs ColSpan et RowSpan de ces rangées dans la structure des balises. • Générez à nouveau le tableau à l'aide de l'application de création, puis convertissez-le en document PDF balisé. Définition des attributs ColSpan et RowSpan 1 Dans le panneau Balises, sélectionnez un élément Element ou . 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Propriétés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 335 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Balise, puis sur Modifier les objets d'attribut. 4 Sélectionnez les objets d'attribut, puis cliquez sur Ajouter un élément pour créer un dictionnaire d'objets d'attribut. 5 Développez le nouveau dictionnaire, sélectionnez l'attribut Layout et cliquez sur Modifier un élément. 6 Changez la valeur Layout en Table. 7 Sélectionnez le dictionnaire d'objets d'attribut, puis cliquez sur Ajouter un élément. 8 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter une clé et une valeur, saisissez ColSpan ou RowSpan dans la zone Clé. Indiquez le nombre de colonnes ou de rangées étendues dans la zone Valeur. Choisissez Nombre entier dans le menu déroulant Type de valeur, puis cliquez sur OK. Balises PDF standard Cette section décrit les types de balises standard s'appliquant aux documents PDF balisés. Ces balises standard fournissent aux logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance les éléments sémantiques et structurels à utiliser pour interpréter la structure du document et présenter le contenu de manière utile. L'architecture des balises PDF n'est pas restreinte. Par conséquent, tout document PDF peut contenir n'importe quel jeu de balises défini par une application de création. Par exemple, un document PDF peut comprendre des balises XML provenant d'un schéma XML. Les balises personnalisées que vous définissez (par exemple, les noms de balise générées à partir des styles de paragraphe de l'application de création) nécessitent un mappage de rôle. Ce mappage permet d'associer chaque balise personnalisée à une balise standard. Lorsqu'un logiciel d'assistance détecte une balise personnalisée, il peut vérifier ce mappage de rôle afin d'interpréter correctement les balises. Le balisage de documents PDF conformément à l'une des méthodes décrites ici produit généralement un mappage de rôle correct pour le document. Remarque : Pour visualiser et modifier le mappage de rôle d'un document PDF, choisissez Options > Modifier le mappage de rôle dans le panneau Balises. Les types standard de balises d'élément Adobe sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Nouvelle balise. Ils se trouvent également dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Adobe recommande vivement l'utilisation de ces types de balise car ils permettent d'obtenir un résultat optimal lors de la conversion du contenu balisé dans un autre format. Il s'agit notamment des formats HTML ou Microsoft Word, ou un format de texte accessible destiné à d'autres technologies d'assistance. Les éléments situés au niveau du bloc sont des éléments de page composés de texte mis en page sous forme de paragraphes ou sections semblables. Les éléments situés au niveau du bloc font partie de la structure logique d'un document. Ces éléments sont ensuite classifiés comme éléments de type conteneur, en-tête et paragraphe, libellé et liste, texte spécial et tableau. Eléments conteneur Les éléments conteneur correspondent au niveau supérieur et proposent un regroupement hiérarchique d'autres éléments situés au niveau du bloc. Document Elément de type document. Elément racine de l'arborescence de balises du document. Partie Elément de type partie. Division importante du document pouvant regrouper des unités de contenu plus petites telles que des éléments de type division, article ou section. Div Elément de type division. Elément générique situé au niveau du bloc ou groupe d'éléments situé au niveau du bloc. Art Elément de type article. Corps de texte autonome considéré comme une narration unique. Sect Elément de type section. Type d'élément conteneur général, comparable à l'élément Division (DIV Class="Sect") dans HTML, correspond normalement à un composant d'élément de pièce ou d'article.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 336 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Eléments de type en-tête et paragraphe Les éléments de type en-tête et paragraphe s'apparentent aux éléments situés au niveau du bloc, similaires aux paragraphes, à ceci près qu'ils contiennent des en-têtes spécifiques et des paragraphes génériques (balises P). Un élément d'en-tête (H) doit apparaître en tant que premier enfant d'une division de niveau supérieur. Six niveaux d'entêtes (H1 à H6) sont disponibles pour les applications qui n'imbriquent pas les sections de manière hiérarchique. Eléments de type libellé et liste Les éléments de type libellé et liste se situent au niveau du bloc et servent à structurer les listes. L Elément de type liste. N'importe quelle séquence d'éléments de signification similaire ou ayant un autre point commun ; les éléments enfant directs doivent correspondre à des éléments de type membre de liste. LI Elément de type membre de liste. N'importe quel membre d'une liste ; il peut comprendre un élément de type libellé (facultatif) et un élément de corps de liste (obligatoire) en tant qu'enfant. LBL Elément de type libellé. Puce, nom ou nombre permettant d'identifier et de différencier un élément des autres de la même liste. LBody Elément de type corps d'article de liste. Contenu descriptif d'un membre de liste. Eléments de type texte spécial Les éléments de type texte spécial servent à identifier le texte ne servant pas dans un paragraphe générique (P). BlockQuote Elément de type bloc en retrait. Un ou plusieurs paragraphes de texte attribués à une personne différente de l'auteur du texte environnant. Légende Elément de type légende. Brève portion de texte décrivant un tableau ou une illustration. Index Elément de type index. Séquence d'entrées contenant un texte d'identification et des éléments de référence indiquant l'occurrence de texte dans le corps principal du document. TOC Elément de type table des matières. Elément contenant une liste structurée de membres et de libellés identifiant ces membres. Dispose de sa propre arborescence. TOCI Elément de type article de table des matières. Membre contenu dans une liste associée à un élément de type table des matières. Eléments de type tableau Les éléments de type tableau sont des éléments spéciaux servant à structurer les tableaux. Tableau Elément de type tableau. Organisation bidimensionnelle de cellules de données ou de texte contenant des éléments de rangées de tableau sous forme d'éléments enfant et pouvant contenir un élément de type légende comme premier ou dernier élément enfant. TR Elément de type rangée de tableau. Une rangée d'en-têtes ou de données dans un tableau ; peut contenir des éléments de cellules d'en-tête de tableau et des éléments de cellules de données de tableau. TD Elément de type cellule de données de tableau. Cellule de tableau contenant des données autres que l'en-tête. TH Elément de type cellule d'en-tête de tableau. Cellule de tableau contenant le texte ou les données d'en-tête décrivant une ou plusieurs rangées ou colonnes de tableau.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 337 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Eléments de type intégré Eléments de type intégré servant à identifier une étendue de texte de formatage ou de comportement spécifique. Ils se distinguent des éléments situés au niveau du bloc. Ils peuvent être contenus dans des éléments situés au niveau du bloc ou contenir ce type d'élément. BibEntry Elément de type entrée bibliographique. Description de l'emplacement de certaines informations citées. Citation Elément de type citation. Partie de texte intégrée attribuée à une autre personne que l'auteur du texte environnant ; une citation se distingue d'un bloc en retrait, lequel correspond à un ou plusieurs paragraphes entiers par opposition au texte intégré. Etendue Elément de type bloc. Segment de texte intégré ; couramment utilisé pour délimiter un texte associé à un jeu de propriétés stylistiques. Eléments spéciaux de type intégré Comparables aux éléments de type intégré, ils décrivent une partie de texte intégrée dotée d'un formatage ou d'un comportement spécifique. Code Elément de type code. Texte de programme informatique incorporé dans un document. Illustration Elément de type illustration. Image ou représentation graphique associée à un texte. Formulaire Elément de type formulaire. Annotation de formulaire PDF pouvant ou étant remplie. Formule Elément de type formule. Formule mathématique. Lien Elément de type lien. Lien hypertexte incorporé dans un document. La cible du lien peut se trouver au sein du même document, dans un autre document PDF ou sur un site Web. Note Elément de type remarque. Texte explicatif ou de référence, tel qu'un pied de page ou une note de fin de page, auquel il est fait référence dans le corps du texte. Référence Elément de type référence. Citation d'un texte ou de données situés ailleurs dans le document.338 Chapitre 11 : Modification d'un document PDF Le format Adobe® PDF se distingue des autres formats de documents qui vous permettent de copier, coller et déplacer librement du texte et des images sur une page. On peut le considérer comme un instantané du fichier d'origine. Faites appel à Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional afin de retoucher et d'optimiser un fichier à des fins de lisibilité et de diffusion, et intégrez les révisions plus conséquentes directement dans l'application source. Vignettes et signets A propos des vignettes Les vignettes correspondent aux vues miniatures des pages d’un document. Vous pouvez utiliser les vignettes pour atteindre rapidement une page ou en ajuster l'affichage. Dans Adobe Reader®, le déplacement d'une vignette entraîne celui de la page correspondante. Dans Acrobat, le déplacement, la copie ou la suppression d'une vignette entraîne le déplacement, la copie ou la suppression de la page correspondante. Si aucune vignette de page ne s'affiche dans le navigateur, essayez d'appuyer sur la touche F4 pour ouvrir le navigateur. Vous pouvez aussi choisir Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour afficher les vignettes de page. Création d'une vignette Les vignettes de page accroissent la taille du fichier. C'est la raison pour laquelle Acrobat ne les crée pas automatiquement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 339 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : Acrobat ne prend plus en charge l'incorporation ni la désincorporation des vignettes de page. Toutefois, Acrobat Distiller® offre une solution de remplacement pour l'incorporation des vignettes de page. Voir aussi « Options PostScript » à la page 465 Création d'une vignette ? Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. Les vignettes sont affichées dans le navigateur. Cette opération peut prendre plusieurs secondes, en particulier si le document est volumineux. La création des vignettes peut s'interrompre si vous effectuez d'autres tâches dans l'application au cours de cette opération. Redimensionnement d'une vignette ? Dans le menu Options du panneau Pages, choisissez Réduire les vignettes ou Agrandir les vignettes . Les vignettes de page reviennent à la taille par défaut lorsque vous fermez puis rouvrez le document PDF. Définition de l'ordre de tabulation Dans le panneau Pages, vous pouvez définir l'ordre selon lequel un utilisateur passe d'un champ de formulaire à l'autre, d'un commentaire à l'autre et d'un lien à l'autre à l'aide de la touche de tabulation. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. 2 Sélectionnez une vignette, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options . 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la page, cliquez sur Ordre de tabulation et sélectionnez l'ordre voulu : Utiliser l'ordre des rangées Parcourt les rangées de gauche à droite ou de droite à gauche si les pages sont reliées de droite à gauche. Utiliser l'ordre des colonnes Parcourt les colonnes de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, ou de droite à gauche si les pages sont reliées de droite à gauche. Utiliser la structure du document Parcourt les pages dans l'ordre indiqué par l'application de création. Remarque : Dans les documents structurés (documents PDF créés à partir d'applications de PAO ou contenant des balises), il est recommandé de sélectionner l'option Utiliser la structure du document pour conserver la structure de l'application de création.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 340 Modification d'un document PDF Si le document a été conçu dans une version antérieure d'Acrobat, l'ordre de tabulation défini par défaut est Non spécifié. Avec ce paramètre, la tabulation commence par les champs de formulaire, suivis des liens puis des commentaires triés par rangée. A propos des signets Un signet est un type de lien accompagné d'un texte représentatif dans le panneau Signets du navigateur. Chaque signet atteint une vue ou une page différente du document. Lors de la création des fichiers PDF, les signets sont générés automatiquement à partir des entrées de table des matières des documents créés dans la plupart des programmes de PAO. Ces signets sont souvent balisés et permettent d'apporter des modifications dans le fichier PDF. Un signet affiche la page qui était à l'écran au moment de la création du signet et qui constitue la destination de celuici. Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez définir la destination du signet au moment de sa création. Dans certains cas toutefois, il s'avère plus pratique de créer un groupe de signets, puis d'en définir les destinations ultérieurement. Dans Acrobat, les signets permettent de marquer un point du fichier PDF où vous souhaitez revenir, ou d'accéder directement à une destination au sein du fichier PDF, d'un autre document ou d'une page Web. Enfin, les signets peuvent déclencher des actions, telles que l'activation d'une commande de menu ou l'envoi d'un formulaire. Pour plus d'informations au sujet de la création des signets, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Signets dans Acrobat : www.adobepress.com/articles/index.asp?st=41891 • Utilisation des signets Acrobat : www.abanet.org/lpm/lpt/articles/att10051.html • Options relatives aux signets PDF : www.acrobatusers.com/articles/2007/02/bookmark_options/index.php Remarque : Dans Acrobat, l'ajout de signets à un document dépend de la configuration des options de protection. Les signets font office de table des matières dans certains documents PDF. Voir aussi « A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution » à la page 301 Création d'un signet 1 Ouvrez la page à laquelle le lien doit renvoyer, puis modifiez les options d'affichage. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 341 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Pour créer le signet, activez l'outil de sélection : • Pour associer un signet à une seule image, cliquez sur l’image voulue ou tracez un rectangle autour d'elle. • Tracez un rectangle autour d'une partie d'une image pour lui associer un signet. • Pour associer un signet au texte sélectionné, faites glisser la souris afin de mettre ce dernier en surbrillance. Le texte sélectionné devient l'intitulé du nouveau signet. Il est possible de modifier cet intitulé. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis sélectionnez le signet sous lequel vous souhaitez placer le nouveau signet. Si vous n’effectuez aucune sélection, le nouveau signet est automatiquement ajouté à la fin de la liste. 4 Choisissez Nouveau signet dans le menu Options . 5 Saisissez ou modifiez le nom du nouveau signet. Modification d'un signet Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez modifier les attributs d'un signet à tout moment. Voir aussi « Types d'actions » à la page 350 Pour renommer un signet ? Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez le signet, choisissez Renommer le signet dans le menu Options et saisissez le nouveau nom du signet. Renvoi automatique à la ligne dans un signet long ? Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis choisissez Retour à la ligne automatique des signets trop longs dans le menu Options . La totalité du texte des signets longs s'affiche quelle que soit la largeur du navigateur. (Cette option est activée lorsqu'une coche précède son nom.) Modification de l'aspect du texte d'un signet Vous avez la possibilité de modifier l'aspect d'un signet afin d'attirer l'attention sur lui. 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs signets. 2 (Acrobat uniquement) Pour changer la couleur et le style du texte, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. Une fois l'aspect du signet défini, vous pouvez réutiliser les paramètres d'aspect choisis. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez le signet et choisissez Utiliser cet aspect par défaut dans le menu Options . 3 Pour modifier le corps de la police, ouvrez le menu Options et choisissez Corps du texte > [corps]. Modification de la destination d'un signet 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet. 2 Dans le panneau de visualisation, choisissez l'emplacement que vous souhaitez définir comme nouvelle destination. 3 Le cas échéant, ajustez le facteur de zoom. 4 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Définir la destination .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 342 Modification d'un document PDF Ajout d'une action à un signet 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet. 2 Dans le menu Options , choisissez Propriétés. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du signet, cliquez sur Actions. 4 Choisissez une action dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un signet ? Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet ou une série de signets, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Important : La suppression d'un signet entraîne l'effacement de ses signets enfants. En revanche, cette opération n'a aucune incidence sur le texte du document. Création d'une arborescence de signets Vous avez la possibilité d'imbriquer une liste de signets pour indiquer un rapport hiérarchique entre les rubriques d'un document. Cette opération permet de créer un rapport parent/enfant. Vous pouvez développer ou réduire cette liste au gré de vos besoins. Imbrication d'un ou de plusieurs signets 1 Sélectionnez le(s) signet(s) à imbriquer. 2 Faites glisser l'icône (ou les icônes) directement sous l'icône du signet parent. L'icône de trait indique sa (leur) position. Le(s) signet(s) est (sont) imbriqué(s), mais la page elle-même demeure à son emplacement d'origine dans le document. Imbrication d'un signet (à gauche) et résultat de l'opération (à droite) Déplacement d'un signet hors d'une position imbriquée 1 Sélectionnez le(s) signet(s) à déplacer. 2 Déplacez la sélection en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser l'icône (les icônes) en positionnant la flèche directement sous l'intitulé du signet parent. • Dans le menu Options , choisissez Couper et sélectionnez le signet parent. Choisissez ensuite Coller sous le signet sélectionné dans le menu Options.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 343 Modification d'un document PDF Désimbrication d'un signet (à gauche) et résultat de l'opération (à droite) Développement ou réduction de tous les signets principaux ? Dans le menu Options , choisissez Développer les signets principaux ou Réduire les signets principaux. Ajout d'un signet balisé Les signets balisés permettent de mieux gérer le contenu des pages que les signets classiques. Etant donné que les signets balisés reprennent les informations structurelles sous-jacentes des éléments du document (par exemple, niveaux de titre, paragraphes, titres de tableau), ils vous permettent de modifier le document, par exemple de réorganiser les pages correspondantes dans le fichier PDF ou de supprimer des pages. Ainsi, si vous déplacez ou supprimez un signet balisé de niveau supérieur, les signets balisés de niveau inférieur qui lui sont subordonnés sont également déplacés ou supprimés. De nombreuses applications de PAO, telles qu'Adobe InDesign® et Microsoft Word, créent des documents structurés. Lorsque vous convertissez ces documents en PDF, la structure est convertie en balises qui permettent d'ajouter des signets balisés. Les pages Web converties comprennent habituellement des signets balisés. Si le document n'inclut aucune balise, vous pouvez en ajouter dans Acrobat. 1 Dans le panneau Signets, choisissez Nouveau signet structuré dans le menu Options . (Si cette option n'est pas disponible, cela signifie que le document n'est pas structuré.) 2 Sélectionnez les éléments de structure que vous souhaitez définir comme des signets balisés. Cliquez sur les autres signets en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour les ajouter à la sélection. Les signets balisés sont imbriqués sous un nouveau signet sans titre. Voir aussi « Modification d'une balise dans le panneau Balises » à la page 331 « Liens et signets dans les pages Web » à la page 352 Liens et pièces jointes Création d'un lien Les liens permettent d'atteindre facilement des emplacements spécifiques dans le même document, dans d'autres documents électroniques, y compris des pièces jointes, ou sur des sites Web. Vous pouvez utiliser les liens pour lancer des actions ou pour garantir à votre lecteur un accès immédiat aux informations associées. Enfin, vous pouvez ajouter des actions destinées à lancer la lecture d'un fichier son ou d'un film.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 344 Modification d'un document PDF Voir aussi « Ajout d'un fichier multimédia à un document PDF » à la page 403 « Destinations » à la page 346 Création d'un lien à l'aide de l'outil Lien 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien ou activez l'outil Lien sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Le pointeur se transforme en croix et tous les liens du document deviennent temporairement visibles, y compris les liens invisibles. 2 Tracez un rectangle autour de la zone où vous souhaitez créer un lien. Il s'agit de la zone dans laquelle le lien sera actif. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, choisissez les options d'aspect du lien. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des actions de lien suivantes : Atteindre une vue de page Cliquez sur Suivant pour définir le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom pour le document actif ou un autre document (tel qu'une pièce jointe), puis cliquez sur Définir le lien. Ouvrir un fichier Sélectionnez le fichier cible, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Si le fichier est un fichier PDF, spécifiez la méthode d'ouverture du document (par exemple dans une nouvelle fenêtre ou dans une fenêtre existante), puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si le nom du fichier ne tient pas dans la zone de texte, il est tronqué en son milieu. Ouvrir une page Web Indiquez l'URL de la page Web cible. Lien personnalisé Cliquez sur Suivant pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien. Dans cette boîte de dialogue, vous pouvez définir les actions, par exemple la lecture d'un article ou l'exécution d'une commande de menu, à associer au lien. Création d'un lien à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Instantané 1 Activez l'outil Sélection ou l'outil Instantané (via le menu Outils > Sélection et zoom), puis faites glisser le curseur pour sélectionner le texte ou l'image à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer un lien. 2 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Créer un lien. 3 Sélectionnez les options de votre choix dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien. Remarque : L'option Lien personnalisé n'est pas disponible pour les liens créés à partir d'un texte sélectionné. Modification d'un lien Vous avez la possibilité de modifier un lien à tout moment. Vous pouvez changer sa destination, la zone sensible ou l'action qui lui est associée, ou encore supprimer ou redimensionner le rectangle qui le définit. La modification des propriétés d'un lien existant s'applique uniquement au lien sélectionné. Si aucun lien n'est sélectionné, les propriétés s'appliqueront au prochain lien créé. Il est possible de modifier les propriétés de plusieurs liens simultanément. Pour ce faire, vous devez tracer un rectangle pour les sélectionner à l'aide de l'outil Lien ou Objet. Déplacement ou redimensionnement du rectangle d'un lien 1 Activez les outils Lien ou Sélectionnez un objet , puis déplacez le pointeur sur le rectangle du lien de manière à afficher les poignées. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 345 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer le rectangle du lien, faites-le glisser. • Pour redimensionner le rectangle du lien, faites glisser un des ses coins. Modification de l'aspect d'un lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien et cliquez deux fois sur le rectangle du lien. 2 Dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, choisissez une couleur, une épaisseur de trait et un style de trait pour le lien. 3 Sélectionnez un style de mise en surbrillance qui signalera l'activation du lien : Aucun Ne modifie pas l'aspect du lien. Inversé Remplace la couleur du lien par la couleur inverse. Contour Remplace la couleur de contour du lien par la couleur inverse. Hors-texte Donne l'aspect d'un rectangle en relief. Remarque : Les options Type de lien, Couleur et Style de trait ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l'option d'aspect Rectangle invisible est sélectionnée. 4 Si vous préférez que les utilisateurs ne voient pas le lien dans le document PDF, choisissez Rectangle invisible comme type de lien. Un lien invisible s'avère utile lorsqu'il se trouve sur une image. 5 Cochez la case Verrouillage afin d'empêcher les utilisateurs de modifier les paramètres par inadvertance. 6 Pour tester le lien, activez l'outil Main. Remarque : Les propriétés de lien de la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien s'appliquent à tous les nouveaux liens jusqu'à ce que vous modifiiez ces propriétés. Pour réutiliser les paramètres d'aspect d'un lien, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le lien dont les propriétés seront utilisées par défaut, puis choisissez Utiliser cet aspect par défaut. Modification d'une action de lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien et cliquez deux fois sur le rectangle du lien. 2 Dans le panneau Actions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, sélectionnez dans la liste l'action à modifier, puis cliquez sur Modifier. Suppression d'un lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien ou l'outil Objet . 2 Sélectionnez le rectangle du lien que vous souhaitez supprimer. 3 Choisissez Edition > Supprimer ou appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Création d'un lien Web à partir d'un URL Vous avez la possibilité de créer automatiquement des liens à partir de toutes les adresses URL contenues dans un document PDF ou des adresses URL situées sur les pages sélectionnées. Lorsqu'il est sélectionné, le paramètre Créer des liens à partir des URL disponible dans les préférences générales permet de générer des liens actifs à partir du texte contenu dans tous les fichiers PDF que vous ouvrez. Création d'un lien Web 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Créer des liens à partir des URL.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 346 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer des liens Web, sélectionnez Toutes afin de définir des liens à partir de tous les URL du document ou choisissez De et indiquez l'étendue sur laquelle des liens seront créés. Suppression de tous les liens Web ? Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Supprimer tous les liens. Lien vers une pièce jointe Pour orienter les utilisateurs vers une pièce jointe PDF, créez un lien dans le document PDF parent pointant vers la pièce jointe. Remarque : Ne confondez pas pièces jointes et fichiers pouvant être ouverts à partir d'un lien. Les documents liés peuvent être stockés dans des emplacements différents alors que les pièces jointes sont toujours enregistrées au même endroit que le document PDF. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF contenant une pièce jointe au format PDF. 2 Affichez l'emplacement où vous souhaitez créer un lien. Si cet emplacement se trouve dans la pièce jointe, cliquez sur le bouton Pièces jointes dans le navigateur, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien ou activez l'outil Lien sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. 4 Sélectionnez la zone du lien. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, définissez l'aspect du lien, sélectionnez l'option Atteindre une vue de page, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Définissez le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom voulus dans le document PDF parent ou dans la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Définir le lien. Destinations Une destination correspond à la cible d'un lien. Elle est représentée par du texte dans le panneau Destinations. Les destinations permettent de définir des chemins de navigation entre différents documents PDF. Il est préférable d'utiliser les destinations lorsque vous manipulez une série de documents. En effet, contrairement à un lien renvoyant à une page, un lien renvoyant à une destination n'est pas modifié en cas d'ajout ou de suppression de pages dans le document cible. Affichage et gestion des destinations Gérez les destinations à partir du panneau Destinations du navigateur. Affichage des destinations ? Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Toutes les destinations sont numérisées automatiquement. Tri de la liste des destinations ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour trier les noms de destination par ordre alphabétique, cliquez sur le libellé Nom situé en haut du panneau Destinations. • Pour trier les destinations par numéro de page, cliquez sur le libellé Page situé en haut du panneau Destinations.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 347 Modification d'un document PDF Modification ou suppression d'une destination ? Dans le panneau Destinations, cliquez sur la destination avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une commande : • Pour afficher l'emplacement cible, choisissez Atteindre la destination. • Pour supprimer la destination, choisissez Supprimer. • Pour définir la page affichée à l'écran comme nouvelle destination, choisissez Définir la destination. • Pour attribuer un nouveau nom à la destination, choisissez Renommer. Création et liaison d'une destination Vous pouvez créer un lien vers une destination au sein du même document PDF ou d'un autre document PDF. 1 Dans le document cible (de destination), choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Si le document contient déjà une destination vers laquelle vous souhaitez créer un lien, passez directement à l'étape 5. 2 Identifiez l'emplacement où vous souhaitez créer une destination, puis définissez l'affichage souhaité. 3 Dans le panneau Destinations, choisissez Nouvelle destination dans le menu Options , puis attribuez un nom à la destination. 4 Enregistrez le document cible. 5 Dans le document source (où vous souhaitez créer le lien), choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Outil Lien , puis tracez un rectangle afin de spécifier l'emplacement du lien. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, définissez l'aspect du lien, sélectionnez l'option Atteindre une vue de page, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Le document cible étant ouvert, dans le panneau Destinations, cliquez deux fois sur la destination. 8 Enregistrez le document source. Ajout d'une pièce jointe Vous pouvez joindre des documents PDF et d'autres types de fichiers à un PDF. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, les pièces jointes le suivent. Les pièces jointes peuvent contenir des liens pointant vers le document parent ou vers d'autres pièces jointes ou des liens qui en sont issus. Ne confondez pas les commentaires joints et les pièces jointes. Un fichier joint comme commentaire est signalé sur la page par une icône de pièce jointe ou de fichier son joint et apparaît dans la liste des commentaires avec tous les autres commentaires. (Voir la section « Ajout de commentaires dans une pièce jointe » à la page 190.) Le panneau Pièces jointes permet d'ajouter, de supprimer ou d'afficher des pièces jointes. 1 Choisissez Document > Joindre un fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 348 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des fichiers, sélectionnez le fichier à joindre, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Important : Si vous joignez un fichier au format EXE, VBS ou ZIP, Acrobat vous avertit que le fichier joint ne sera pas ouvert, car son format est associé à des programmes malveillants, des macros et des virus potentiellement dangereux qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. 3 Pour pouvoir afficher la pièce jointe dans Acrobat 5.0 ou une version antérieure, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes, puis sélectionnez Afficher les pièces jointes par défaut dans le menu Options (option activée par défaut). • Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Vue initiale, choisissez Panneau Pièces jointes et page dans le menu Onglet de navigation, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez le document PDF. 5 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter une description à la pièce jointe et la différencier plus facilement des fichiers similaires dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis choisissez Modifier la description dans le menu Options . Modifiez le texte de la description, puis enregistrez le fichier. Ouverture, enregistrement ou suppression d'une pièce jointe Vous pouvez ouvrir une pièce jointe PDF et la modifier (si vous y êtes autorisé). Vos modifications sont appliquées à la pièce jointe PDF. Vous pouvez ouvrir et enregistrer les autres types de pièces jointes. Lorsque vous ouvrez le fichier, l'application prenant en charge le format de la pièce jointe s'ouvre (pour que vous puissiez ouvrir la pièce jointe, cette application doit être installée sur l'ordinateur). Les modifications apportées ne sont pas répercutées dans la pièce jointe. Vous devez enregistrer les modifications du fichier, puis le joindre de nouveau au document PDF. Remarque : Acrobat n'ouvre pas les fichiers au format EXE, VBS ou ZIP, car ceux-ci sont associés à des programmes malveillants, des macros ou des virus qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. Ouverture d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis choisissez Ouvrir la pièce jointe dans le menu Options . Enregistrement d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez une ou plusieurs pièces jointes, puis choisissez Enregistrer la pièce jointe dans le menu Options . Si vous n'avez sélectionné qu'une seule pièce jointe, vous pouvez la renommer. Suppression d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez une pièce jointe, puis choisissez Supprimer la pièce jointe dans le menu Options .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 349 Modification d'un document PDF Recherche dans les pièces jointes Lors de la recherche de mots ou de phrases spécifiques, vous pouvez inclure des fichiers PDF joints, de même que divers autres types de fichier. Les utilisateurs de Windows peuvent parcourir des documents Microsoft Office (.doc, .xls et .ppt, par exemple), des fichiers dessin AutoCAD (.dwg et .dwf), des fichiers HTML et des fichiers Rich Text Format (.rtf). Quant aux utilisateurs de Mac OS, ils peuvent effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft Word (.doc), HTML et .rtf. Les résultats de la recherche dans les pièces jointes figurent dans une liste placée sous le nom de fichier et l'icône de la pièce jointe. Les pièces jointes d'un autre format ne sont pas prises en compte par le moteur de recherche. Remarque : Pour effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft et AutoCAD, assurez-vous d'avoir installé les filtres IFilter correspondant aux types de fichiers concernés. Ces filtres sont généralement installés avec les applications associées, mais ils sont également téléchargeables à partir des sites Web des produits. Recherche dans les pièces jointes à partir du panneau Pièces jointes 1 Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, choisissez Rechercher dans les pièces jointes dans le menu Options . 2 Dans la fenêtre de recherche avancée, saisissez le mot ou l'expression à rechercher, sélectionnez les options de résultats voulues, puis cliquez sur Rechercher dans les pièces jointes. Recherche dans les pièces jointes à partir de la fenêtre Recherche avancée 1 Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. 2 Saisissez le mot ou l'expression à rechercher, puis sélectionnez les options de résultats voulues. 3 Cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées au bas de la fenêtre, puis cochez la case Inclure les pièces jointes. Actions et écriture de scripts A propos des actions Vous pouvez lier l'exécution d'une action donnée à l'activation d'un signet ou d'un lien, ou encore à l'affichage d'une page. Les liens et les signets permettent par exemple d'atteindre des emplacements spécifiques dans un document, mais également d'exécuter des commandes de menu ou d'autres types d'actions. Les actions sont à définir dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Pour les signets et les liens, vous spécifiez une action qui se produit lorsqu'un signet ou un lien est activé. Pour les autres éléments, tels que les pages, clips multimédia et champs de formulaire, vous définissez un déclencheur qui provoque l'action, puis vous spécifiez l'action même. Il est possible d'ajouter plusieurs actions à un seul déclencheur. L'option Verrouillage empêche la modification accidentelle de l'aspect et des actions associées à un objet. Ajout d'une action 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez l'outil Main et cliquez ensuite sur le signet ou la vignette avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. • A l'aide de l'outil Objet, cliquez deux fois sur un lien, un clip multimédia ou un champ de formulaire, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 350 Modification d'un document PDF 3 Dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, sélectionnez le type d'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs actions. Les actions sont exécutées selon leur ordre d'apparition dans la zone de liste Actions. 4 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez une action dans le panneau Actions, puis utilisez les boutons pour réorganiser, modifier ou supprimer l'action. 5 Fermez la fenêtre pour valider l'action. Ajout d'une action à l'aide de vignettes Pour optimiser la fonctionnalité interactive d'un document, vous pouvez définir des actions (telles que le changement de facteur de zoom à l'ouverture ou à la fermeture d'une page). 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. 2 Sélectionnez la vignette associée à la page qui vous intéresse, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options . 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 4 Dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur, choisissez Ouverture de la page pour définir une action à l'ouverture de la page ou choisissez Fermeture de la page pour définir une action à la fermeture de la page. 5 Choisissez une action dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Définissez les options relatives à l'action, puis cliquez sur OK. Les options disponibles varient en fonction de l'action sélectionnée. 7 Pour créer une série d'actions, choisissez une autre action dans le menu, puis cliquez à nouveau sur Ajouter. Les boutons Monter et Descendre vous permettent de classer les actions dans l'ordre d'exécution voulu. Remarque : Si vous définissez une action qui active le mode plein écran à l'ouverture ou à la fermeture d'une page, la prochaine fois que la même page s'ouvrira ou se fermera, le mode plein écran sera activé. Types d'actions Vous pouvez attribuer les actions suivantes aux liens, aux signets, aux pages, aux clips multimédia et aux champs de formulaire : Exécuter une commande de menu Permet d'exécuter une commande de menu en tant qu'action. Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia Atteint la vue 3D indiquée. Atteindre une vue de page Permet d'atteindre la destination spécifiée dans le document actif ou dans un autre document. Importer les données d'un formulaire Permet d'insérer dans le formulaire actif des données de formulaire provenant d'un autre fichier. Opération multimédia (Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures) Applique une action spécifique à un objet multimédia du fichier (lecture d'un fichier son, par exemple). L'objet multimédia doit être inséré dans le fichier préalablement à la configuration de l'action associée. Ouvrir un fichier Lance et ouvre un fichier. Si vous diffusez un document PDF doté d'un lien renvoyant à un autre fichier, sachez que le lecteur devra disposer de l'application dans laquelle ce fichier a été créée pour pouvoir l'ouvrir. (Il se peut que vous deviez définir des préférences d'ouverture pour le fichier cible.) Ouvrir un lien Web Permet d'atteindre la destination spécifiée sur Internet. Vous pouvez définir le lien à l'aide des protocoles http, ftp et mailto.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 351 Modification d'un document PDF Lire un son Permet de lire un fichier son spécifique. Le son est incorporé au document PDF sous un format multiplateforme. Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 5) Permet de lire un film QuickTime ou AVI compatible avec Acrobat 5. Le film spécifié doit être incorporé dans un document PDF. Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 6 et versions ultérieures) Permet de lire une séquence donnée compatible avec Acrobat 6. Le film spécifié doit être incorporé dans un document PDF. Lire un article Permet de suivre les divisions d'un article, que celui-ci soit situé dans le document actif ou dans un autre fichier PDF. Réinitialiser un formulaire Permet d'effacer le contenu d'un formulaire. Vous pouvez déterminer les champs réinitialisés à l'aide de la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner les champs. Lancer un script JavaScript Exécute le script JavaScript spécifié. Définir la visibilité du calque Détermine les paramètres de calque actifs. Avant d'ajouter cette action, définissez les paramètres de calque appropriés. Afficher/Masquer un champ Affiche ou masque un champ dans un document PDF. Cette option s'avère particulièrement utile dans les champs de formulaire. Si, par exemple, vous souhaitez qu'un objet apparaisse chaque fois que le pointeur se trouve sur un bouton, définissez une action qui affiche un champ en présence du déclencheur Souris entrée et qui le masque en présence du déclencheur Souris sortie. Envoyer un formulaire Permet d'envoyer les données d'un formulaire à un URL spécifique. Types de déclencheurs Les déclencheurs déterminent le mode d'activation des actions dans les clips multimédia, les pages et les champs de formulaire. Par exemple, vous pouvez indiquer le film ou la séquence audio à lire à l'ouverture et à la fermeture d'une page. Les options disponibles varient en fonction de l'élément de page spécifié. Les déclencheurs suivants sont disponibles pour les clips multimédia et les champs de formulaire (et non pour les liens et les signets) : Souris relâchée Déclenche le comportement lorsque l'utilisateur relâche le bouton de la souris après avoir cliqué. Il s'agit du déclencheur le plus fréquent, car il donne à l'utilisateur une dernière chance d'éloigner le pointeur du bouton et de ne pas activer l'action. Page visible (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsque la page contenant le clip multimédia est visible, qu'il s'agisse de la page active ou non. Il se peut qu'une page soit visible sans être active, dans le cas d'une mise en page continue présentant les pages côte à côte, par exemple. Page invisible (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsque la page contenant le clip multimédia est déplacée hors champ. Page entrée (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsque la page contenant le clip multimédia devient la page active. Page sortie (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsqu'un utilisateur quitte la page contenant le clip multimédia. Souris enfoncée Déclenche le comportement dès que l'utilisateur clique à l'aide du bouton de la souris (sans le relâcher). Dans la plupart des cas, c'est le déclencheur Souris relâchée qui est choisi. Souris entrée Action survenant lorsque le pointeur pénètre dans le champ ou dans la zone de lecture. Souris sortie Action survenant lorsque le pointeur quitte le champ ou la zone de lecture.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 352 Modification d'un document PDF Zone activée (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsque la zone du lien est activée, par le biais d'une action de la souris ou de la touche de tabulation. Zone désactivée (clips multimédia uniquement) Action survenant lorsque la zone d'activation passe à une autre zone de lien. A propos des scripts JavaScript dans Acrobat Le langage JavaScript a été développé par Netscape Communications en vue de faciliter la création de pages Web interactives. Adobe a amélioré ce langage afin de simplifier l'intégration de ce niveau d'interactivité dans vos documents PDF. Vous pouvez exécuter du code JavaScript à l'aide d'actions associées aux signets, aux liens et aux pages. La commande Définir des actions de scripts permet de créer des actions JavaScript au niveau du document entier. La sélection du déclencheur Le document a été enregistré, par exemple, entraîne l'exécution du script JavaScript après l'enregistrement du document. Vous pouvez également utiliser le langage JavaScript dans les formulaires PDF et les séquences de traitement par lot. Parmi les utilisations répandues des scripts JavaScript dans les formulaires, citons le formatage, le calcul et la validation de données, ainsi que l'attribution d'une action. Les scripts exécutés au niveau des champs sont associés à un ou plusieurs champs de formulaire spécifiques, tels qu'un bouton. Ce type de script se déclenche suite à un événement, tel qu'une action de type Souris relâchée. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de création de scripts JavaScript, téléchargez les manuels JavaScript à disposition sur le site Web d'Adobe. Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ contient des informations de base et des didacticiels, et JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference contient des informations de référence détaillées. Ces ressources JavaScript (entre autres) sont situées sur le site Web d'Adobe. Conversion de pages Web Liens et signets dans les pages Web Vous manipulez les documents PDF créés à partir de pages Web de la même manière que tous les autres types de documents PDF. Suivant la configuration d'Acrobat, il suffit d'activer un lien sur une page Web convertie pour ajouter la page liée à la fin du document PDF (si celle-ci ne figure pas déjà dans le document). Remarque : N'oubliez pas qu'une page Web peut être convertie en plusieurs pages PDF. Une page Web constitue la seule rubrique (ou le seul URL) d'un site Web et correspond généralement à une page HTML continue volumineuse. Lorsque vous convertissez une page Web en document PDF, cette dernière risque d'être divisée en plusieurs pages PDF de taille standard. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF à partir de pages Web, des signets balisés sont générés si l'option Créer les signets est activée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web. Un signet standard (non balisé) représentant le serveur Web s'affiche en haut du panneau Signets. Sous ce signet viennent se placer les signets balisés des pages Web téléchargées. Le nom de chaque signet balisé est dérivé du titre de la page HTML ou de son URL si aucun titre n'est défini. A l'origine, les signets Web balisés sont tous placés au même niveau. Toutefois, vous pouvez les agencer et les imbriquer dans des groupes afin de suivre l'arborescence du contenu des pages Web. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Créer des balises PDF lorsque vous créez un document PDF à partir de pages Web, les informations de structure qui correspondent à la structure HTML des pages d'origine sont stockées dans le PDF. Vous pouvez utiliser ces informations pour ajouter au fichier des signets balisés renvoyant aux paragraphes et autres éléments HTML. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 353 Modification d'un document PDF Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 340 Affichage des informations relatives aux pages Web converties Vous pouvez afficher une boîte de dialogue contenant l'URL, le titre et la date et l'heure de téléchargement de la page active, ainsi que d'autres informations. ? Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Informations sur la page. Comparaison des pages converties et des pages Web en cours ? Pour ouvrir une page ou un lien Web, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Ouvrir la page dans un navigateur Web afin d'ouvrir la page active dans un navigateur Web. • Pour ouvrir la page marquée d'un signet, cliquez sur un signet balisé avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir la page dans un navigateur Web. • Pour ouvrir une page liée, cliquez sur un lien de la version PDF de la page Web avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir dans un navigateur Web. Le navigateur ouvre la page spécifiée dans une nouvelle fenêtre d'application. Articles A propos des articles Dans de nombreux documents imprimés traditionnels, tels que les magazines et les journaux, le texte est agencé sous forme de colonnes ; il peut occuper plusieurs colonnes, voire plusieurs pages. Si ce format est tout à fait adapté à la documentation imprimée, il peut s'avérer difficile à suivre à l'écran dans la mesure où il faut continuellement faire défiler ou agrandir les pages. La fonction d'article vous permet de guider les lecteurs dans un document se présentant sous forme de colonnes multiples qui s'étendent sur plusieurs pages. Il s'agit de la répartition de la division d'un article. L'utilisateur parcourt le texte A, ignore les textes B et C, puis revient au texte A. 1 A 3 A C 2 A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 354 Modification d'un document PDF Définition d'un article Pour créer un article, vous devez définir une série de cadres qui délimitent son contenu selon l'ordre de lecture souhaité. Le chemin de lecture que vous définissez pour un article s'appelle la division d'article. Vous créez une division associant les diverses zones pour créer un flux de texte continu. La plupart des programmes de PAO vous permettent de générer automatiquement des divisions d'article lorsque vous convertissez les fichiers en documents Adobe PDF. Si le fichier que vous consultez contient des articles, vous pouvez afficher le nom de ces derniers dans un panneau et les parcourir facilement. 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Article ou activez l'outil Article sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Le pointeur prend la forme d'une croix dans le panneau de visualisation. 2 Tracez un rectangle destiné à définir la première division d'article. Une division d'article s'affiche autour du texte sélectionné et le pointeur prend la forme du pointeur d'article. Chacune des divisions d'article que vous créez dispose d'un libellé portant le numéro de division et sa place au sein de l'article. Par exemple, la première division du premier article est libellée 1-1, la deuxième division 1-2, etc. Les divisions du deuxième article dans le même document sont intitulées 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, et ainsi de suite. 3 Placez-vous sur la partie suivante du document que vous souhaitez inclure dans l'article, puis tracez un rectangle autour du texte. Recommencez cette opération jusqu'à ce que la totalité de l'article soit définie. Remarque : Pour redimensionner ou déplacer une division d'article, assurez-vous que l'article est entièrement défini au préalable. 4 Pour terminer un article, appuyez sur Entrée. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l'article, saisissez le titre, le sujet, l'auteur et les mots-clés de l'article, puis cliquez sur OK. Affichage et modification d'un article L'outil Article vous permet de créer, d'afficher et de modifier une division d'article dans le document PDF. Affichage des articles de la page ? Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Article. Affichage des articles dans le document PDF 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Articles. Remarque : Par défaut, le panneau Articles est un panneau flottant ; il n'est pas ancré au navigateur. Si vous souhaitez ancrer ce panneau aux autres, faites glisser le panneau Articles sur le navigateur. 2 Pour lire un article, cliquez deux fois dessus ou sélectionnez-le et choisissez Lire l'article dans le menu Options du panneau Articles. La première ligne de l'article apparaît dans le coin supérieur gauche. 3 Pour masquer le panneau Articles pendant l'affichage de l'article, choisissez Réduire après utilisation dans le menu Options du panneau Articles. Suppression d'un article ou d'une division d'article ? Dans le panneau Articles, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour supprimer l'intégralité d'un article, sélectionnez l'article concerné dans le panneau Articles, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 355 Modification d'un document PDF • Pour supprimer une seule division d'article, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer dans le menu contextuel. Dans le message d'avertissement qui s'affiche à l'écran, sélectionnez Division. Si vous cliquez sur Article, la totalité de l'article est supprimée. Les articles ou les divisions d'article restants sont automatiquement renumérotés. Insertion d'une division d'article dans une division existante 1 Dans la fenêtre du document, sélectionnez la division d'article après laquelle la nouvelle division doit se placer. 2 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé au bas de la division sélectionnée, puis sur OK lorsque vous êtes invité à tracer et à créer une nouvelle division d'article. Exemple de sélection d'un article avec l'outil Article 3 Tracez une nouvelle division d'article. La nouvelle division est insérée dans l'article et les divisions sont renumérotées en conséquence. Déplacement ou redimensionnement d'une division d'article ? A l'aide de l'outil Article, sélectionnez la division d'article, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer une division, faites-la glisser vers le nouvel emplacement. • Pour redimensionner la division, faites glisser une poignée centrale pour ne modifier que la hauteur ou la largeur ou faites glisser un coin pour modifier les deux dimensions. Exemple de redimensionnement d'une division d'article Modification des propriétés d'article 1 A l'aide de l'outil Article, sélectionnez la division d'article à modifier. 2 Cliquez sur la division avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 3 Modifiez les informations de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l'article, puis cliquez sur OK. Combinaison de deux articles 1 Dans le panneau de visualisation, sélectionnez la division d'article à lire en premier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 356 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé au bas de la division d'article, puis sur OK pour ignorer l'invite de création d'une nouvelle division d'article. 3 Cliquez en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée sur la division d'article que vous souhaitez lire ensuite. La deuxième division s'ajoute à la fin de la première. Toutes les divisions d'article sont renumérotées automatiquement dans le document. Optimisation Optimisation PDF La fonction Optimisation PDF propose plusieurs paramètres permettant de réduire la taille des fichiers PDF. Certains paramètres d'optimisation PDF sont comparables aux paramètres disponibles lors de la création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de Distiller. Selon l'utilisation que vous comptez faire des fichiers et selon les propriétés essentielles dont dispose un fichier, vous pouvez décider d'utiliser l'intégralité des paramètres ou une partie uniquement. Dans la plupart des cas, les paramètres par défaut permettent une efficacité maximale (gain d'espace grâce à la suppression de polices incorporées, à la compression d'images et à la suppression des éléments obsolètes du fichier). Avant d'optimiser un fichier, il est recommandé de contrôler l'espace que ce fichier utilise. Ces résultats peuvent vous renseigner sur la possibilité de réduire la taille du fichier. Vous pouvez également réduire la taille du fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande Réduire la taille du fichier. Important : Certaines méthodes de compression risquent de rendre des images inutilisables dans le cadre d'une impression professionnelle. Essayez différents paramètres avant d'apporter des modifications qui ne peuvent pas être annulées. Voir aussi « Réduction de la taille des fichiers par enregistrement » à la page 151 Ouverture de la fonction d'optimisation PDF ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier PDF autonome, choisissez Options avancées > Optimisation PDF. • Dans un porte-documents PDF, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF, puis choisissez Options avancées > Optimisation PDF. • Si vous modifiez une séquence de traitement par lot, cliquez sur Options de sortie. Dans la boîte de dialogue correspondante, sélectionnez Optimisation PDF, puis cliquez sur Paramètres. Remarque : L’option Optimisation PDF n’est pas disponible lorsque l’option Redistribuer est sélectionnée dans le menu Affichage. Contrôle de l'espace utilisé par un fichier PDF Le contrôle de l'espace utilisé génère un rapport sur le nombre total d'octets utilisés par certains éléments précis d'un document, parmi lesquels les polices, les images, les signets, les formulaires, les destinations existantes et les commentaires, ainsi que la taille totale du fichier. Les résultats sont exprimés en octets, ainsi qu'en pourcentage de la taille totale du fichier. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Optimisation PDF. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Contrôler l'utilisation de l'espace situé en haut de la boîte de dialogue. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 357 Modification d'un document PDF Optimisation d'un fichier PDF Remarque : L'optimisation d'un document signé numériquement supprime et invalide les signatures numériques. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF. 2 Pour utiliser les paramètres par défaut, choisissez Standard dans le menu Paramètres, puis passez directement à l'étape 6. Si vous modifiez des paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF, l'option Personnalisés est automatiquement sélectionnée dans le menu Paramètres. 3 Dans le menu Rendre compatible avec, choisissez Conserver l'existante afin de conserver la version PDF actuelle, ou choisissez une version d'Acrobat. (Les options disponibles dans les panneaux varient selon votre choix.) 4 Cochez la case en regard d'un panneau (par exemple, Images, Polices, Transparence), puis sélectionnez des options dans ce panneau. Pour empêcher l'exécution de toutes les options d'un panneau pendant l'optimisation, désactivez la case correspondant à ce panneau. 5 (Facultatif) Pour enregistrer les paramètres personnalisés, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer et attribuez un nom au jeu de paramètres. (Pour supprimer un paramètre enregistré, choisissez-le dans le menu Paramètres, puis cliquez sur Supprimer.) 6 Une fois les options sélectionnées, cliquez sur OK. 7 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier optimisé sous, cliquez sur Enregistrer afin d'écraser le fichier PDF d'origine avec le fichier PDF optimisé ou sélectionnez un autre nom ou un autre emplacement. Pour optimiser plusieurs documents en même temps, utilisez les options de sortie de la commande Traitement par lot. Voir aussi « Exécution d'une séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie » à la page 381 Options d'optimisation PDF Les options des différents panneaux de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF permettent de réduire la taille d'un fichier PDF. Voir aussi « Aplatissement de la transparence » à la page 498 « Modification d'un paramètre prédéfini d'aplatissement dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF » à la page 505 « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 278 Panneau Images Le panneau Images de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF vous permet de définir les options de compression des images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes, ainsi que le sous-échantillonnage des images.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 358 Modification d'un document PDF Modifiez la compatibilité PDF dans le panneau Images de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF. Spécifiez les options suivantes, le cas échéant : Sous-échantillonnage Permet de réduire la taille d'un fichier en diminuant la résolution des images, opération impliquant la fusion des couleurs des pixels initiaux dans des pixels plus grands. Remarque : Les images masquées et les images d'une dimension inférieure à 16 x 16 pixels ne peuvent pas être sous- échantillonnées. Compression Réduit la taille d'un fichier en éliminant les données de pixels superflues. En général, les compressions de type JPEG et JPEG2000 sont préférables pour les images telles que des photographies comportant des transitions progressives d'une couleur à l'autre. La compression ZIP constitue le choix idéal pour les illustrations comportant des zones étendues de couleurs unies ou avec aplats, ou encore des motifs constitués de couleurs avec aplats. Dans le cas des images monochromes, la compression JBIG2, disponible dans l'optimisation PDF mais pas dans Distiller, est supérieure à la compression CCITT. Qualité Uniquement disponible pour les formats JPEG et JPEG2000. Ces méthodes de compression génèrent automatiquement des pertes en supprimant de manière permanente certaines données de pixels. Il est également possible d'appliquer la compression JPEG ou JPEG2000 avec perte à des images en couleurs selon différents niveaux de qualité (minimale, faible, moyenne, élevée, maximale). Pour la compression JPEG2000, vous avez également la possibilité de choisir l'option Sans perte de données afin que toutes les données de pixels soient conservées. La compression pour les images monochromes se fait sans perte de données, à l'exception de la compression JBIG2, qui propose des modes de compression avec et sans perte de données. Taille du carreau Disponible uniquement au format JPEG2000. Divise l'image compressée en plusieurs carreaux de la taille spécifiée. (Si la hauteur ou la largeur de l'image n'est pas un multiple de la taille du carreau, du carreau partiel sont utilisés sur les bords.) Les données image de chaque carreau sont compressées séparément et peuvent être décompressées carreau par carreau. Il est recommandé d'utiliser la valeur par défaut de 256. Optimiser les images en cas de réduction de taille uniquement Si cette option est sélectionnée, lorsque les paramètres d'image entraînent l'accroissement de la taille du fichier, l'optimisation de cette image est annulée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 359 Modification d'un document PDF Panneau Polices Pour garantir une correspondance exacte avec le document source, il est recommandé d'incorporer toutes les polices utilisées dans le document. Si la correspondance exacte n'est pas indispensable et si vous préférez un fichier de petite taille, choisissez de ne pas incorporer les polices occidentales ou asiatiques (chinois traditionnel, chinois simplifié, coréen et japonais). La police du texte écrit dans ces langues est remplacée par une police de substitution lorsque vous l'affichez sur un ordinateur où les polices d'origine ne sont pas installées. Le panneau Polices de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF contient deux listes de polices : les polices disponibles pour la désincorporation et les polices à désincorporer. Certaines polices ne peuvent pas être désincorporées et ne sont pas répertoriées dans le panneau Polices. Pour désincorporer les polices d'un document, sélectionnez une ou plusieurs polices dans la liste Polices incorporées puis cliquez sur le bouton Désincorporer. Si vous ne souhaitez pas incorporer les jeux partiels de polices incorporées, désactivez l'option Créer des jeux partiels de toutes les polices incorporées. Pour empêcher la désincorporation de toutes les polices du document, sélectionnez Ne désincorporer aucune police. Panneau Transparence Si le document PDF comprend des illustrations faisant appel à la transparence, vous pouvez utiliser les paramètres prédéfinis dans le panneau Transparence de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF pour aplatir la transparence et réduire la taille du fichier. (L'aplatissement incorpore la transparence dans l'illustration correspondante en la fractionnant en zones vectorielles et en zones pixellisées.) La fonction Optimisation PDF applique les options de transparence à toutes les pages du document avant d'appliquer les autres options d'optimisation. Si vous sélectionnez le paramètre de compatibilité Acrobat 4.0 et versions ultérieures, le panneau Transparence est activé et tous les degrés de transparence du fichier sont aplatis au cours de l'optimisation. Cela garantit la compatibilité avec Acrobat version 4.0 et versions antérieures, lesquelles ne prennent pas en charge la transparence. Lorsque vous créez des paramètres prédéfinis d'aplatissement, ils apparaissent avec les paramètres prédéfinis par défaut, dans le panneau Transparence. Remarque : L'aplatissement de la transparence ne peut pas être annulé après enregistrement du fichier. Panneau Objets à ignorer Le panneau Objets à ignorer vous permet de désigner les objets à supprimer du document PDF et d'optimiser les courbes dans les dessins de CAO. Vous pouvez ignorer les objets créés dans Acrobat et dans d'autres applications. La sélection d'un objet supprime toutes les occurrences de cet objet dans le document PDF. Dans la zone Objets à ignorer, vous pouvez effectuer une sélection parmi, entre autres, ces options : Ignorer les actions d'envoi, d'importation et de réinitialisation de formulaire Désactive toutes les actions liées à l'envoi ou à l'importation de données de formulaire, et réinitialise les champs. Cette option conserve les objets de formulaire auxquels les actions sont liées. Aplatissement des champs de formulaire Rend les champs de formulaire inutilisables sans modifier leur aspect. Les données de formulaire sont fusionnées dans la page et font partie de son contenu. Ignorer tous les scripts JavaScript Supprime les actions qui utilisent le script JavaScript du document PDF. Ignorer les images de remplacement Supprime toutes les versions d'une image, sauf celle destinée à l'affichage. Certains documents PDF comprennent plusieurs versions de la même image à des fins différentes, par exemple, basse résolution en vue d'un affichage à l'écran ou haute résolution en vue d'une impression. Ignorer les vignettes incorporées Supprime les vignettes incorporées d'une page. Par exemple, dans les documents volumineux, lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Pages, la création des vignettes de page risque d'être très lente. Ignorer les balises de document Supprime les balises du document, ce qui entraîne la suppression des fonctionnalités d'accessibilité et de redistribution du texte.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 360 Modification d'un document PDF Convertir les traits lissés en courbes Permet de réduire la quantité de points de contrôle servant à construire les courbes des dessins de CAO et ainsi de produire des fichiers PDF moins volumineux et plus rapides à afficher. Détecter et fusionner les fragments d'image Recherche les images ou les masques fragmentés en fines tranches et tente de fusionner ces morceaux dans une image ou un masque unique. Ignorer les paramètres d'impression incorporés Supprime les paramètres d'impression incorporés (tels que la mise à l'échelle des pages et le mode recto-verso) du document. Ignorer l'index de recherche incorporé Supprime les index de recherche incorporés, ce qui réduit la taille du fichier. Ignorer les signets Supprime tous les signets du document. Panneau Ignorer les données utilisateur Le panneau Ignorer les données utilisateur permet de supprimer les informations personnelles que vous ne souhaitez pas diffuser à d'autres personnes ou partager. Si vous ne trouvez pas ces informations, il se peut qu'elles soient masquées. Vous pouvez localiser du texte et des informations utilisateur masqués à l'aide de la commande Examiner le document du menu Document. Ignorer tous les commentaires, les formulaires et les fichiers multimédia Supprime tous les commentaires, formulaires, champs de formulaire et fichiers multimédia du fichier PDF. Ignorer les métadonnées et les informations sur le document Supprime les informations du dictionnaire d'informations sur le document et tous les flux de métadonnées. (Restaurez les flux de métadonnées dans une version du fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer sous.) Ignorer toutes les données d'objet Supprime tous les objets du fichier PDF. Ignorer les pièces jointes Supprime toutes les pièces jointes, y compris celles qui ont été ajoutées en tant que commentaires au fichier PDF. (La fonction Optimisation PDF ne s'applique pas aux pièces jointes.) Ignorer les références croisées externes Supprime les liens vers d'autres documents. Les liens qui permettent d'accéder à d'autres emplacements dans le même document PDF sont conservés. Ignorer les données privées des autres applications Supprime d'un document PDF les informations utilisées uniquement par l'application de création. Cette option n'a aucune incidence sur la fonctionnalité du document PDF, mais elle réduit la taille du fichier. Ignorer le contenu du calque masqué et aplatir les calques visibles Réduit la taille du fichier. Le document optimisé ressemble au document PDF d'origine mais ne contient pas d'informations sur les calques. Panneau Nettoyage Les options disponibles dans le panneau Nettoyage de la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF suppriment les éléments superflus du document. Ces éléments sont notamment les éléments obsolètes ou superflus par rapport à l'utilisation que vous réservez au document. La suppression de certains éléments peut avoir de graves conséquences sur la fonctionnalité du fichier PDF. Par défaut, seuls les éléments sans incidence sur la fonctionnalité sont sélectionnés. Si les implications de la suppression d'autres options ne vous sont pas familières, conservez la configuration par défaut. Options de compression d'objets Spécifie les modalités d'application de la compression Flate dans le fichier. Utiliser Flate pour coder les flux non codés Applique la compression Flate à tous les flux non codés. Utiliser Flate dans les flux en codage LZW Applique la compression Flate à tous les flux de contenu et toutes les images utilisant le codage LZW. Ignorer les signets incorrects Supprime les signets renvoyant à des pages retirées du document. Ignorer les liens incorrects Supprimer les liens renvoyant à des destinations incorrectes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 361 Modification d'un document PDF Ignorer les destinations existantes non référencées Supprime les destinations existantes qui ne sont pas référencées en interne dans le document PDF. Cette option n'effectuant pas de vérification des liens dans les autres fichiers PDF ou sites Web, elle n'est pas appropriée à tout travail. Optimiser le contenu des pages Convertit tous les caractères de fin de ligne en espaces, ce qui améliore la compression Flate. Optimiser le fichier PDF pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web Restructure le document PDF en vue du téléchargement (utilisation optimale des octets) individuel des pages à partir de serveurs Web. Modification de texte et d'objets Choix d'un outil Une idée fausse que l'on se fait souvent des documents PDF est que leur comportement doit être similaire à celui de tout autre document comportant des images et du texte, vous permettant de déplacer ou de modifier les éléments sur une page. Un document PDF est similaire à un instantané du document d'origine. Vous pouvez y apporter des rectifications mineures, mais si une révision importante est nécessaire, il est plus simple d'apporter ces modifications dans le document source et de régénérer le document PDF. Pour modifier le texte et les objets, choisissez les outils nécessaires sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Pour insérer des annotations de révision dans un document PDF afin de signaler les modifications à apporter au document d'origine, voir la section « Annotation du texte pour modification » à la page 182. L'outil Retouche de texte vous permet d'ajouter du texte et de remplacer du texte si les polices utilisées sont installées sur le système. Si les polices ne sont pas installées, vous pouvez seulement modifier l'aspect du texte existant. Cependant, vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux blocs de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte. Pour appliquer un retour à la ligne du texte pendant la modification, sélectionnez Activer le champ retour à la ligne dans les textes dans les préférences de retouche. L'outil Machine à écrire permet de créer du texte mais offre moins d'options de modification de texte que l'outil Retouche de texte. Remarque : L'utilisation de l'outil Retouche de texte risque d'influer sur la redistribution du document, ce qui peut rendre ce dernier moins accessible aux malvoyants. L'outil Objet offre des fonctions de modification de base pour la plupart des objets. Vous pouvez modifier la taille, l'emplacement sur la page et les propriétés des images, des liens, des champs et des objets multimédia. Vous pouvez apporter ces modifications avec l'outil qui a servi à créer l'objet. Pour mettre à l'échelle, faire pivoter, basculer ou découper une image ou un objet (y compris les blocs de texte), utilisez l'outil Retouche d'objet. L'outil Retouche d'objet permet également de positionner les images et de modifier l'espace colorimétrique d'un objet. Si vous devez modifier le fichier source d'une image ou d'un objet incorporé, servez-vous de l'outil Retouche d'objet pour lancer une application de retouche d'images ou d'objets. Remarque : Bien que d'aspect graphique, les commentaires ne sont pas considérés comme des éléments de page et ne peuvent donc ni être sélectionnés ni être modifiés à l'aide des outils de retouche. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 362 Modification d'un document PDF Modification de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte Voir aussi « Conversion des couleurs en espace colorimétrique différent » à la page 492 Modification de texte Vous ne pouvez ajouter ou remplacer du texte que si la police utilisée est installée sur le système. Si la police n'est pas installée sur le système mais que cette police est incorporée ou qu'un jeu partiel est disponible dans le document PDF, vous ne pouvez modifier que la couleur, l'intermots, l'interlettrage, le décalage de la ligne de base et le corps de police. Un texte placé sur des lignes pivotées se modifie de la même façon qu'un texte situé sur des lignes horizontales ; de plus, vous pouvez utiliser des polices verticales à l'instar de polices horizontales. Le décalage de la ligne de base se fait à gauche ou à droite pour les polices verticales tandis qu'il se pratique vers le haut ou vers le bas pour les polices horizontales. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Modification de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche de texte ou activez l'outil Retouche de texte sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. 2 Cliquez dans le texte à modifier. Un cadre de sélection encadre le texte sélectionnable. 3 Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez modifier : • Choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout afin de sélectionner l'ensemble du texte inclus dans le cadre de sélection. • Faites glisser le curseur afin de sélectionner des caractères, des espaces, des mots ou une ligne. 4 Modifiez le texte en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte de remplacement de la sélection. • Appuyez sur la touche Suppr ou choisissez Edition > Supprimer afin de supprimer le texte. • Choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier la sélection. • Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez l'option appropriée. Cliquez à l'extérieur de la sélection pour la désélectionner et recommencer. Modification d'attributs de texte 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez dans le texte à modifier. 3 Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 363 Modification d'un document PDF 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Texte. Vous pouvez modifier les attributs de texte suivants : Police Remplace la police du texte sélectionné par la police que vous indiquez. Vous pouvez sélectionner une police parmi celles installées sur le système ou parmi celles entièrement incorporées dans le document PDF. Les polices du document sont répertoriées en premier, tandis que les polices système figurent au-dessous. Corps Remplace le corps de police par le corps (en points) indiqué. Interlettrage Insère un espacement uniforme entre les caractères du texte sélectionné. Intermots Insère un espacement uniforme entre les mots du texte sélectionné. Mise à l'échelle horizontale Détermine le rapport entre la hauteur et la chasse du caractère. Décalage de la ligne de base Décale le texte par rapport à la ligne de base. La ligne de base correspond à la ligne sur laquelle reposent les caractères. Fond Indique la couleur de fond. Contour Indique la couleur du contour. Epaisseur du contour Définit la largeur du contour. Remarque : Pour des raisons juridiques, si vous souhaitez modifier un texte utilisant une police donnée, vous devez avoir acheté et installé cette dernière. Ajout de texte Vous pouvez ajouter du texte à un document PDF dans n'importe laquelle des polices installées sur le système. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée à l'emplacement où vous voulez insérer du texte. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, sélectionnez la police et le mode voulu, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Saisissez le nouveau texte. 5 Pour modifier le corps de police et d'autres attributs, sélectionnez le texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 6 Déplacez le bloc de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Ajout de texte à l'aide de l'outil Machine à écrire L'outil Machine à écrire permet de saisir du texte n'importe où sur une page de document PDF. Les entreprises proposent souvent des versions PDF de leurs formulaires papier sans champs interactifs. L'outil Machine à écrire offre une solution simple pour remplir ce type de formulaire. Il s'agit d'un outil proche de l'outil Zone de texte mais avec des propriétés par défaut différentes. Remarque : Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent se servir de l'outil Machine à écrire si l'auteur du document a activé l'utilisation de cet outil dans le fichier PDF. Pour activer l'utilisation de l'outil Machine à écrire, ouvrez le fichier PDF, choisissez Outils > Machine à écrire > Activer l'outil Machine à écrire dans Adobe Reader. 1 Choisissez Outils > Machine à écrire > Afficher la barre d'outils Machine à écrire. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton Machine à écrire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 364 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer du texte, puis commencez à le saisir. Appuyez sur Entrée pour ajouter une deuxième ligne. 3 Pour modifier les propriétés du texte, sélectionnez-le, puis utilisez l'un des outils suivantes de la barre d'outils Machine à écrire. • Pour modifier la taille du texte, cliquez sur le bouton Réduire la taille du texte ou Accroître la taille du texte. Vous pouvez également choisir un corps de police différent dans le menu déroulant approprié. • Pour modifier l'espacement des lignes du texte, sélectionnez le texte et cliquez sur le bouton Réduire l'interligne ou Accroître l'interligne. • Choisissez une couleur dans le menu Couleur de texte. • Choisissez un corps de police dans le menu déroulant approprié. 4 Pour déplacer ou redimensionner le bloc de texte tapé à la machine à écrire, activez l'outil Sélection, cliquez sur un bloc de texte tapé à la machine à écrire et faites-le glisser ou déplacez l'un de ses coins. 5 Pour modifier à nouveau le texte, activez l'outil Machine à écrire, puis cliquez deux fois sur le texte tapé à la machine à écrire. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'outil Machine à écrire, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Utilisation de l'outil Machine à écrire avec des formulaires PDF non remplissables : blogs.adobe.com/bowman/acrobat/ • Présentation de l'outil Machine à écrire : www.abanet.org/lpm/lpt/articles/att04061.shtml Insertion de caractères spéciaux Vous avez la possibilité d'insérer des caractères spéciaux (sauts de ligne, tirets conditionnels, espaces insécables et tirets cadratins) dans un document PDF balisé afin d'améliorer la répartition du texte. Il est également possible d'insérer ces caractères spéciaux dans tout document PDF pour en améliorer la lecture de manière générale ou plus spécialement sur un lecteur d'écran. Il n'est pas nécessaire que la police soit installée sur le système pour insérer des caractères spéciaux. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez à l'emplacement où vous souhaitez insérer le caractère ou sélectionnez le texte à remplacer par ce caractère. 3 Cliquez sur le texte ou sur l'emplacement sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Insertion, puis sélectionnez une option. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Voir aussi « Redistribution d'un document PDF » à la page 309 Incorporation d'une police à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte L'incorporation de polices permet de garantir que le document PDF utilise les mêmes polices que le document d'origine, quels que soient les systèmes où vous ouvrez le document et les polices installées. 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche de texte.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 365 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Cliquez dans le texte contenant les polices incorporées ou les jeux partiels de polices à modifier. Un paragraphe du texte est encadré dans un cadre de sélection. Pour sélectionner du texte dans le paragraphe, cliquez puis faites glisser le pointeur dessus. 3 Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Texte afin d'afficher le nom et les propriétés de la police de même que les caractéristiques d'incorporation et de création de jeux partiels. 5 Pour afficher la liste de toutes les polices, faites défiler le menu Police. Les polices du document sont affichées en tête de liste. Les polices système sont répertoriées sous les polices du document. 6 Choisissez une police dans le menu Police, vérifiez les droits afin de déterminer les options disponibles pour cette police, puis sélectionnez une option d'incorporation. Les droits déterminent les options disponibles : Incorporation autorisée de la police Vous pouvez sélectionner à la fois les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel. Pour incorporer le jeu de polices entier au lieu d'un jeu partiel, assurez-vous que l'option Jeu partiel est désactivée. Possibilité d'incorporer une police uniquement pour l'impression et l'aperçu Vous pouvez uniquement créer un jeu partiel de cette police. Vous pouvez intégrer la police pour l'impression et la prévisualisation mais pas pour effectuer des modifications. Incorporation de la police impossible Les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel sont indisponibles. Aucune police système disponible Les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel sont indisponibles. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Voir aussi « Polices » à la page 122 Positionnement d'une image ou d'un objet 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche d'objet . 2 Cliquez sur la page avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Placer l'image. 3 Choisissez l'un des formats de fichier suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, PCX, PNG ou TIFF. 4 Sélectionnez un fichier image, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Une copie du fichier image apparaît au centre de la page, à la même résolution que le fichier d'origine. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Déplacement ou modification d'un objet L'objet sélectionné est habituellement accompagné d'un cadre de sélection. Des poignées de sélection apparaissent lorsque vous pointez sur l'objet. Lorsqu'il s'agit d'un objet verrouillé, les poignées de sélection restent invisibles. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs objets, le dernier objet sélectionné sert d'ancre et apparaît en rouge. Les autres objets sont affichés en bleu. L'objet ancre reste fixe pendant les opérations d'alignement. Pour changer d'ancre, cliquez deux fois sur le nouvel objet cible avec la touche Ctrl enfoncée (la première fois pour le désélectionner et la seconde pour le rajouter à la sélection). En tant que dernier objet ajouté à la sélection, il devient l'objet ancre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 366 Modification d'un document PDF Lorsque la sélection est constituée d'objets de même type et qu'elle s'étend sur plusieurs pages, vous pouvez modifier l'aspect des objets mais non leur emplacement. Lors de la modification d'une zone de texte, la zone entière est sélectionnée. Si vous souhaitez modifier certains caractères ou mots spécifiques, faites appel à l'outil Retouche de texte. Faites appel à l'outil Objet pour sélectionner et déplacer des objets tels que des champs de formulaire et des liens. Faites appel à l'outil Retouche d'objet pour sélectionner et déplacer des images placées, des blocs de texte et des objets incorporés. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Sélection d'un objet 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs objets : • Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet (via Outils > Modifications avancées). • Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. • Cliquez sur l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Sélectionner tout dans le menu contextuel. Si l'outil Objet est activé et que le document est en mode Une seule page, tous les objets de la page active sont sélectionnés. Si le document utilise une autre mise en page, tous ses objets sont sélectionnés. Lorsqu'un bouton de la barre d'outils Modifications avancées est activé, tous les objets du type de cet outil situés dans le document sont sélectionnés. • Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur afin de tracer un rectangle autour des objets voulus. Si l'outil Objet est actif, tous les objets englobés dans le rectangle sont sélectionnés. Lorsqu'un bouton de la barre d'outils Modifications avancées est activé, faites glisser le pointeur tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. Tous les objets du même type englobés dans le rectangle sont sélectionnés. 2 (Facultatif) Ajoutez un ou plusieurs objets à la sélection active : • Cliquez sur un objet en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin d'ajouter une série d'objets. (L'outil Objet inclut tous les objets lorsque la touche Maj est enfoncée pendant que vous cliquez sur l'élément.) L'utilisation de la touche Maj permet de sélectionner tous les éléments inclus dans le cadre de sélection rectangulaire formée par la sélection (y compris l'élément que vous venez d'ajouter). Déplacement d'un objet 1 Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet , de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. 2 Déplacez l'image ou l'objet : • Cliquez et faites glisser l'objet jusqu'à l'emplacement souhaité. Il est impossible de faire glisser un objet vers une autre page (mais rien ne vous empêche de le couper afin de le coller ailleurs). Pour contraindre le mouvement dans le sens vertical ou horizontal, faites glisser l'objet en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. • Cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option pour déplacer l'image sur la page. Redimensionnement d'un objet 1 Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet , de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. 2 Faites glisser une poignée de l'objet. Faites glisser la poignée tout en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée pour conserver les proportions d'origine.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 367 Modification d'un document PDF Découpe d'un objet 1 Activez l'outil Retouche d'objet . 2 Cliquez sur l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Point de découpe. Lorsque vous maintenez le pointeur sur la sélection, l'icône de découpe apparaît. 3 Faites glisser une poignée de sélection dans la direction souhaitée, jusqu'à ce que le rectangle de découpe affiche les résultats voulus. 4 Cliquez à l'intérieur de la sélection pour quitter le mode de découpe. Modification d'un objet à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche d'objet. 2 Sélectionnez l'objet, cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Placer l'image Incorpore un fichier image dans le document PDF. Point de découpe Le cas échéant, définit la zone de découpe de l'objet. Supprimer l'écrêtage L'option Supprimer l'écrêtage entraîne la suppression des objets qui se superposent à l'objet sélectionné. Il se peut, par exemple, que suite à une mise à l'échelle, certains caractères soient rognés. Si vous activez cette option, vous pouvez visualiser tous les caractères. Cette option s'affiche seulement si vous avez choisi Point de découpe. Symétrie sur l'axe vertical, Symétrie sur l'axe horizontal L'option Symétrie sur l'axe vertical retourne l'image à l'horizontale, sur l'axe vertical. Le retournement des blocs de texte à l'horizontale crée un effet de miroir. L'option Symétrie sur l'axe horizontal retourne l'image à la verticale, sur l'axe horizontal. Créer un artefact Supprime l'objet de l'ordre de lecture afin qu'il ne soit pas lu par un lecteur d'écran ou par la commande Lecture audio. Modifier une image, Modifier un objet Lance l'éditeur d'images ou d'objets défini dans les préférences de retouche. L'option Modifier une image est disponible lorsqu'une image vectorielle est sélectionnée, et l'option Modifier un objet lorsqu'une image Bitmap est sélectionnée. La sélection de ces options supprime des balises du document PDF, ce qui est susceptible de modifier la redistribution du contenu du document PDF et d'avoir un impact sur l'accessibilité. Par exemple, si vous changez l'emplacement d'un objet, vous risquez de modifier l'ordre de lecture de cet objet (ou de son texte de remplacement) sur le lecteur d'écran. Rotation horaire, Rotation antihoraire, Rotation de la sélection Les options Rotation horaire et Rotation antihoraire font tourner l'objet sélectionné de 90 degrés dans la direction indiquée. L'option Rotation de la sélection permet de faire tourner la sélection par paliers en faisant glisser une poignée de sélection dans la direction voulue. Pour quitter le mode de rotation, cliquez dans la sélection. Propriétés Permet de modifier les propriétés de contenu, de balise et de texte, telles que l'ajout de texte de remplacement à une image pour rendre celle-ci accessible. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 368 Modification d'un document PDF Lancement d'un éditeur d'images à l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet Par défaut, l'outil Retouche d'objet lance Adobe Photoshop® (si l'application est installée) pour vous permettre de retoucher des images et des objets. Pour utiliser une autre application, précisez l'application dans les préférences de retouche. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Retouche, cliquez sur Sélectionner un éditeur d'images (pour les images bitmap) ou sur Sélectionner un éditeur de pages/objets (pour les images vectorielles), puis localisez l'application souhaitée sur le disque dur. 1 A l'aide de l'outil Retouche d'objet, sélectionnez l'image ou l'objet. Pour sélectionner plusieurs images ou objets, cliquez dessus tout en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Si vous sélectionnez un nouvel objet, la session de retouche s'arrête. Pour modifier tous les objets et images sur la page, cliquez sur la page avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier une page. 2 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier une image ou Modifier un objet. (La commande disponible dépend de l'élément sélectionné.) Remarque : Si l'image ne s'ouvre pas dans Adobe Photoshop, vérifiez la configuration de cette application. Si un message vous invite à convertir l'élément en profil ICC, ne procédez pas à la conversion. Si la fenêtre de l'image affiche un motif en damier à l'ouverture du document, cela signifie que l'application n'a pas pu lire les données image. 3 Apportez les corrections voulues dans l'application de retouche externe. 4 Dans Photoshop, aplatissez l'image. Si vous modifiez les dimensions de l'image dans Photoshop, elle risque de ne pas s'aligner correctement dans le document PDF. En outre, les informations de transparence sont conservées uniquement dans le cas de masques utilisés comme valeurs d'index pour les couleurs indexées. Les masques d'image ne sont pas pris en charge. Si vous changez le mode des images pendant les retouches, vous risquez de perdre des informations importantes appliquées dans le mode initial. 5 Dans l'application de retouche, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer. L'objet est automatiquement mis à jour et affiché dans le document PDF lorsque Acrobat est placé au premier plan. Important : Dans Photoshop, si le format de l'image est pris en charge par Photoshop 6.0 ou version ultérieure, l'image retouchée est réenregistrée dans le document PDF. Toutefois, si le format de l'image n'est pas pris en charge, Photoshop traite l'image comme une image PDF générique et l'enregistre sur le disque au lieu de l'insérer dans le document PDF. Configuration d'une présentation Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran L'affichage en plein écran est une propriété des documents PDF utilisés dans les présentations. En mode plein écran, les pages PDF occupent la totalité de l'écran. La barre de menus d'Acrobat, la barre d'outils, ainsi que les boutons et options de la fenêtre sont masqués. Vous avez la possibilité de définir d'autres modes d'ouverture de telle façon que vos documents ou jeux de documents s'ouvrent toujours de la même manière. Dans les deux cas, il est possible d'insérer des transitions entre les pages afin d'améliorer l'aspect visuel du document pour l'utilisateur. Pour contrôler la navigation dans un document PDF (le défilement automatique des pages, par exemple), configurez les options du panneau Plein écran de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Ces préférences sont propres au système et non au document PDF. Elles déterminent le mode d'ouverture de tous les documents PDF sur un système donné. Par conséquent, si vous configurez une présentation sur un système que vous gérez, vous pouvez définir ces préférences.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 369 Modification d'un document PDF Cliquez sur le bouton Plein écran (entouré) pour afficher et parcourir des documents PDF en mode diaporama. Définition d'une vue initiale Lorsqu'un utilisateur ouvre votre document PDF ou un porte-documents PDF, la vue initiale du document s'affiche. Vous pouvez préciser le facteur de zoom, la page et la disposition à afficher initialement. Si le document PDF est une présentation, vous pouvez définir une vue initiale en plein écran. Après avoir défini l'affichage initial du document PDF, vous pouvez ajouter des transitions entre les pages sélectionnées ou entre toutes les pages du document. Acrobat prend en charge les transitions de pages et les passages de PowerPoint. Définition de la vue initiale 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, cliquez sur Vue initiale. 3 Sélectionnez les options de votre choix, puis cliquez sur OK. Pour constater les effets, enregistrez puis rouvrez le fichier. Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran Si vous paramétrez la vue initiale d'un document PDF en mode plein écran, vous devez définir le mode d'ouverture du document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, sélectionnez Vue initiale. 3 Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Dans le menu Onglet de navigation, choisissez Page seule. • Dans le menu Disposition des pages, choisissez Une seule page. • Définissez l'option Ouvrir à la page sur la page à laquelle vous souhaitez commencer la présentation. 4 Cochez la case Ouvrir en mode plein écran afin d'ouvrir le document sans afficher la barre de menus, la barre d'outils et les options de la fenêtre. Cliquez sur OK. (Pour constater les effets, enregistrez puis rouvrez le fichier.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 370 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : Vous pouvez quitter le mode plein écran en appuyant sur Echap si l'option correspondante est activée dans les préférences de plein écran. Cependant, en mode plein écran, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas exécuter de commandes ni sélectionner d'outils à moins de connaître les raccourcis clavier correspondants. Vous pouvez définir des actions liées à une page dans le document pour offrir aux utilisateurs cette possibilité. Options de vue initiale dans les propriétés du document Les options de vue initiale dans les propriétés du document sont organisées en trois zones : Disposition et facteur de zoom, Fenêtre et Interface utilisateur. Disposition et facteur de zoom Détermine l'aspect du document. • Onglet de navigation Détermine les panneaux affichés dans le navigateur. • Mise en page Détermine le mode d'organisation des pages du document. • Zoom Définit le facteur de zoom utilisé à l'ouverture du document. L'option Par défaut applique le facteur de zoom défini par l'utilisateur. • Ouvrir à la page Indique la page affichée à l'ouverture du document. Remarque : La configuration des options Par défaut pour le zoom et Mise en page renvoie à la configuration des préférences d’affichage des pages définie dans l’application de l’utilisateur. Fenêtre Détermine le mode d'ajustement de la fenêtre dans la zone de visualisation lors de l'ouverture du document. Ces options s'appliquent à la fenêtre du document par rapport à la zone de visualisation disponible sur le moniteur de l'utilisateur. • Redimensionner selon la page initiale Ajuste la fenêtre du document selon la page d'ouverture, conformément à la configuration des options du document. • Centrer à l'écran Place la fenêtre au centre de l'écran. • Ouvrir en mode plein écran Agrandit au maximum la fenêtre de document et affiche le document sans barre de menus, barre d'outils et commandes. • Nom du fichier Affiche le nom de fichier sur la barre de titre de la fenêtre. • Titre du document Affiche le titre du document sur la barre de titre de la fenêtre. Le titre du document provient du panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Interface utilisateur Détermine les zones de l'interface (la barre de menus, les barres d'outils et les options de la fenêtre) qui sont masquées. Remarque : Si vous masquez la barre de menus et les barres d'outils, les utilisateurs ne peuvent ni exécuter de commandes, ni sélectionner d'outils, à moins qu'ils ne connaissent les raccourcis clavier correspondants. Vous pouvez définir des actions de page qui masquent temporairement les commandes d'interface pendant que la page est affichée. (Voir la section « Ajout d'une action à l'aide de vignettes » à la page 350.) Ajout de transitions de page Vous pouvez créer un effet de transition intéressant qui se produira chaque fois que vous passerez d'une page à une autre dans une série de pages. Il est également possible de définir des transitions de page s'appliquant à un groupe de documents au moyen de la commande Traitement par lot. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Transitions de page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 371 Modification d'un document PDF • Dans le panneau Pages, sélectionnez les vignettes auxquelles vous souhaitez appliquer des transitions, puis choisissez Transitions de page dans le menu Options . 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définir les transitions, choisissez un effet de transition dans le menu Transition. Ces effets de transition sont identiques à ceux définis dans les préférences de plein écran. 3 Choisissez la direction de l'effet de transition. Les options disponibles dépendent de la transition. 4 Choisissez la vitesse de l'effet de transition. 5 Cochez la case Changer de page et saisissez le nombre de secondes devant s'écouler entre les changements de page automatiques. Si cette option est désactivée, l'utilisateur feuillette les pages à l'aide des commandes du clavier ou de la souris. 6 Sélectionnez l'étendue à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer des transitions. Remarque : Si l'utilisateur active l'option Ignorer toutes les transitions dans les préférences de plein écran, il ne verra pas les transitions de page. Propriétés et métadonnées de document Affichage des propriétés de document Vous avez la possibilité de consulter des informations concernant un document PDF affiché à l'écran, notamment son titre, ainsi que les polices et les options de protection utilisées. Certaines de ces informations sont fournies par l'auteur du document tandis que d'autres sont générées automatiquement. Dans Acrobat, il est possible de modifier les données définissables par l'auteur (sous réserve que le fichier n'ait pas été protégé lors de son enregistrement, sans quoi aucune modification ne peut lui être apportée). 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, cliquez sur un onglet. Voir aussi « Sélection d'une méthode de protection » à la page 252 « Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis » à la page 459 Propriétés du document Description Affiche les informations de base sur le document. Certaines informations, telles que le titre, l'auteur, le sujet et les mots-clés, peuvent avoir été définies par l'auteur du document source dans son application de création (Word ou InDesign, par exemple) ou par l'auteur du document PDF. Vous pouvez rechercher des documents à partir de ces informations. La zone Mots-clés peut se révéler particulièrement utile pour restreindre le champ de la recherche. De nombreux moteurs de recherche utilisent le titre pour décrire le document dans leur liste de résultats. Si un document PDF n'a pas de titre, la liste des résultats indique son nom de fichier. Le titre d’un document et le nom du fichier ne sont pas nécessairement identiques. La zone Description avancée indique la version du document PDF, le format de page, le nombre de pages, si le document est balisé et s'il est activé pour l'affichage Web rapide. (Le format de la première page est indiqué lorsque le document PDF ou le porte-documents PDF contient plusieurs formats de page.) Ces informations sont générées automatiquement et ne sont pas modifiables. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 372 Modification d'un document PDF Les stratégies Décrit les modifications et les fonctionnalités autorisées dans le document PDF. Si un mot de passe, un certificat ou une stratégie de protection a été appliqué au document PDF, cette méthode est indiquée ici. Polices Dresse la liste des polices et des types de polices utilisés dans le document original, ainsi que les polices, types de polices et codages utilisés pour restituer les polices d'origine. Si le programme a parfois fait appel à des polices de substitution qui ne vous conviennent pas, vous pouvez installer les polices d'origine sur le système ou demander à l'auteur du document de régénérer le document en y incorporant les polices d'origine. Vue initiale (Acrobat uniquement) Décrit le mode d'affichage du document PDF à l'ouverture (notamment la taille initiale de la fenêtre, le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom de départ) et précise si les signets, les vignettes, la barre d'outils et la barre de menus sont visibles. Vous pouvez modifier ces paramètres afin de changer le mode d'ouverture du document pour la suite. Personnalisée (Acrobat uniquement) Permet d'ajouter des propriétés au document. Avancé Dresse la liste des paramètres PDF, des paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression et des options de lecture du document. Dans les paramètres PDF, vous pouvez définir un URL de base pour les liens Web du document. Un URL de base facilite la gestion des liens Web renvoyant à des sites Web tiers. Si l'URL lié à un site externe change, il vous suffit de modifier l'URL de base au lieu de rechercher chaque lien Web renvoyant au site. L'URL de base n'est pas utilisé pour les liens spécifiant une adresse URL complète. Vous pouvez également associer un fichier d'index de catalogue (PDX) au document PDF. Lorsque la fonction de recherche parcourt le fichier PDF à partir de la fenêtre Recherche avancée, tous les fichiers PDF indexés par le fichier PDX spécifié sont également analysés. Vous pouvez inclure dans le document des informations de prépresse, telles que le recouvrement. Vous pouvez définir des paramètres d'impression prédéfinis pour un document, lesquels préremplissent la boîte de dialogue Imprimer à l'aide de valeurs se rapportant spécifiquement à ce document. Vous pouvez également définir les options de lecture qui déterminent la manière dont le document PDF est lu par un lecteur d'écran ou par un autre dispositif d'assistance. Ajout d'une description aux propriétés du document Vous pouvez ajouter des mots-clés aux propriétés d'un document PDF que d'autres personnes pourront rechercher à l'aide d'un utilitaire pour localiser ce document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Activez le panneau Description, puis saisissez le nom de l'auteur, le sujet et des mots-clés. 3 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires pour ajouter d'autres informations descriptives, telles que les informations sur les droits d'auteur. Création d'une propriété de document Vous pouvez ajouter des propriétés de document personnalisées pour stocker des types spécifiques de métadonnées, notamment le numéro de la version ou le nom de la société émettrice d'un document PDF. Les propriétés que vous créez figurent dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Les propriétés créées doivent être dotées de noms uniques qui n'apparaissent pas dans les autres panneaux de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis sélectionnez Personnalisées. 2 Pour ajouter une propriété, saisissez son nom et une valeur, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 373 Modification d'un document PDF 3 Pour modifier les propriétés, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Pour modifier une propriété, sélectionnez-la, changez sa valeur, puis cliquez sur Modifier. • Pour supprimer une propriété, sélectionnez-la, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour renommer une propriété personnalisée, supprimez la propriété et créez une propriété personnalisée portant le nom voulu. Modification des métadonnées de document Les documents PDF créés dans les versions 5.0 et ultérieures d'Acrobat comportent des métadonnées de document au format XML. Ces métadonnées fournissent des informations sur le document et sur son contenu, telles que le nom de l'auteur, les mots-clés et les informations sur les droits d'auteur, qui peuvent être utilisées par des utilitaires de recherche. Les métadonnées de document contiennent (mais ne sont pas limitées à) des informations figurant également dans le panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Il est possible d'étendre et de modifier des métadonnées de document à l'aide de produits tiers. Le format XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) fournit aux applications Adobe un environnement XML commun afin de normaliser la création, le traitement et l'échange de métadonnées de document entre flux de publication. Il est possible d'enregistrer et d'importer au format XMP le code source XML des métadonnées d'un document, ce qui facilite le partage des métadonnées entre différents documents. Vous pouvez également enregistrer les métadonnées du document dans un modèle, que vous pourrez réutiliser dans Acrobat. Consultation des métadonnées de document 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis cliquez sur le bouton Métadonnées supplémentaires dans le panneau Description. 2 Cliquez sur Avancé pour afficher les métadonnées incorporées dans le document. (Celles-ci sont présentées dans un schéma, c'est-à-dire sous forme de groupes prédéfinis d'informations liées.) Pour afficher ou masquer les informations sur les schémas, cliquez sur le nom de schéma. Si un schéma n'est pas identifié par un nom reconnu, il est répertorié comme Inconnu. L'espace du nom XML est présenté entre parenthèses après le nom du schéma. Modification ou ajout de métadonnées de document 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires. 2 Sélectionnez Avancées dans la liste de gauche. 3 Pour modifier les métadonnées, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK. • Pour ajouter des informations préalablement enregistrées, cliquez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez un fichier XMP ou FFO, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Pour ajouter des informations et remplacer les métadonnées actives par les informations stockées dans un fichier XMP, cliquez sur Remplacer, sélectionnez un fichier XMP ou FFO enregistré, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Les nouvelles propriétés sont ajoutées, les propriétés existantes également spécifiées dans le nouveau fichier sont remplacées et les propriétés existantes ne figurant pas dans le fichier de substitution sont conservées dans les métadonnées. • Pour supprimer un schéma XML, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour ajouter les métadonnées d'un modèle à la fin des métadonnées actives, maintenez la touche Ctrl (Windows) ou Commande (Mac OS) enfoncée et choisissez le nom du modèle dans le menu de la boîte de dialogue, dans le coin supérieur droit. Remarque : Pour pouvoir importer des métadonnées à partir d'un modèle, vous devez enregistrer le modèle de métadonnées au préalable.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 374 Modification d'un document PDF • Pour remplacer les métadonnées existantes par un modèle de métadonnées, choisissez le fichier de modèle (XMP) voulu dans le menu contextuel de la boîte de dialogue, dans le coin supérieur droit. Enregistrement de métadonnées en tant que modèle ou fichier 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires. 2 Sélectionnez Avancées dans la liste de gauche. 3 Enregistrez les métadonnées du document, puis cliquez sur OK : • Pour enregistrer les métadonnées dans un fichier externe, cliquez sur Enregistrer et attribuez un nom au fichier. Les métadonnées sont enregistrées en tant que fichier au format XMP. (Pour utiliser les métadonnées enregistrées dans un autre document PDF, ouvrez ce document et utilisez ces instructions pour remplacer des métadonnées dans le document ou en ajouter à la fin du document.) • Pour enregistrer les métadonnées sous forme de modèle, choisissez Enregistrer le modèle de métadonnées dans le menu situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue, puis attribuez un nom au fichier. Affichage de données d'objet et de métadonnées Vous pouvez afficher les métadonnées de certains objets, balises et images dans un document PDF. Vous pouvez uniquement modifier et exporter les métadonnées des objets Visio. Activez l'outil Données d'objet pour afficher le regroupement d'objets et les données d'objet. Voir aussi « Recherche de texte dans plusieurs fichiers PDF » à la page 390 Affichage des métadonnées d'objet 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche d'objet. 2 Sélectionnez un objet, cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Afficher les métadonnées. (Si la commande Afficher les métadonnées n'est pas disponible, cela signifie que l'image n'est pas associée à des métadonnées.) Affichage et modification des métadonnées d'objet Visio 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 375 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un objet de la page pour afficher les métadonnées correspondantes. L'arborescence des modèles s'ouvre : elle contient la liste de tous les élément structuraux. Les métadonnées de l'objet sélectionné apparaissent en tant que propriétés et valeurs modifiables au bas de l'arborescence des modèles. L'objet sélectionné apparaît en surbrillance sur la page. Vous pouvez changer de couleur en la choisissant dans le menu Couleur de surbrillance dans le menu situé en haut de l'arborescence des modèles. 3 Pour modifier les métadonnées, saisissez les nouvelles valeurs dans les zones situées au bas de l'arborescence des modèles. 4 Pour exporter les métadonnées d'objet, dans le menu Options, choisissez Exporter au format XML > Arborescence complète afin d'exporter tous les objets figurant dans l'arborescence des modèles ou choisissez Exporter au format XML > Noeud actif pour exporter uniquement l'objet sélectionné et ses enfants. Donnez un nom au fichier et enregistrez-le. Exportation des métadonnées d'objet Visio 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un objet de la page pour afficher les métadonnées correspondantes. 3 Dans le menu Options , choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Choisissez Exporter au format XML > Arborescence complète pour exporter tous les objets. • Choisissez Exporter au format XML > Noeud actif pour exporter uniquement l'objet sélectionné et ses enfants. 4 Donnez un nom au fichier et enregistrez-le. Calques A propos des calques PDF Vous pouvez afficher, parcourir et imprimer le contenu doté de calques dans les documents PDF créés à partir d'applications telles que InDesign, AutoCAD et Visio. Les paramètres d'état initial et d'état par défaut vous permettent de gérer l'affichage des calques. Par exemple, vous pouvez masquer un calque contenant un avis de copyright lorsque le document est affiché à l'écran mais inclure ce calque lors de l'impression du document. Vous avez la possibilité de renommer, d'aplatir et de fusionner des calques, de modifier leurs propriétés et de leur associer des actions. Il est également possible de réordonner les calques, d'importer des calques à partir d'un fichier image ou d'un autre fichier PDF et de verrouiller les calques pour éviter qu'ils soient masqués. Acrobat ne permet pas de créer des calques qui changent de visibilité en fonction du niveau de zoom. Cependant, vous pouvez mettre en surbrillance la partie d'un calque qui vous intéresse en créant un signet qui agrandit ou masque ce calque à l'aide d'actions de page. De même, il est possible d'ajouter des liens de telle façon que les utilisateurs puissent cliquer sur un lien visible ou non afin de parcourir les calques ou de leur appliquer un zoom. Pour conserver les calques lors de la conversion de documents InDesign CS au format PDF, veillez à définir la compatibilité Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) ou supérieure. En outre, vérifiez que l'option de création de calques Acrobat est sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue d'exporation au format Adobe PDF. Une vidéo sur l'utilisation des calques est disponible à l'adresse http://www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4082_a9_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 376 Modification d'un document PDF Affichage ou masquage d'un calque Les informations peuvent être stockées sur différents calques d'un document PDF. Les calques qui apparaissent dans le document PDF sont fondés sur les calques créés dans l'application d'origine. Le panneau Calques permet d'examiner les calques et d'afficher ou de masquer le contenu de chacun. Il est impossible de masquer les éléments situés sur les calques verrouillées. Certains calques peuvent être imbriqués en groupes dans un calque parent. D'autres calques peuvent être regroupés, sans calque parent. Remarque : Une icône de verrou dans le panneau Calques indique que ce calque est fourni à titre de référence uniquement. Les calques verrouillés peuvent être créés à partir de fichiers AutoCAD et Visio. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque pour modifier la visibilité d'un calque verrouillé. Panneau calques A. L'icône représentant un œil indique que le calque est visible B. Calque verrouillé C. Calque masqué D. Groupe de calques imbriqués E. Groupe de calques 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Calques. 2 Pour masquer un calque, cliquez sur l'icône en forme d'œil. Pour afficher un calque masqué, cliquez dans la zone vide. (Les calques visibles sont signalés par une icône représentant un œil. Lorsque cette icône est absente, le calque est masqué. Ce paramètre a temporairement priorité sur les paramètres définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque.) Remarque : Dans un groupe de calques imbriqués, si le calque parent est masqué, les calques imbriqués sont eux-aussi masqués automatiquement. Si le calque parent est visible, les calques imbriqués peuvent être visibles ou masqués. 3 Dans le menu Options , choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Répertorier les calques pour toutes les pages Affiche chaque calque sur chaque page du document. Répertorier les calques des pages visibles Affiche uniquement les calques des pages visibles. Rétablir la visibilité initiale Rétablit l'état par défaut des calques. Appliquer les priorités d'impression Affiche les calques d'après les paramètres d'impression définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque (Imprimer lorsque visible, Ne jamais imprimer, Toujours imprimer). Appliquer les priorités d'exportation Affiche les calques d'après les paramètres d'exportation définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque (Exporter lorsque visible, Ne jamais Exporter, Toujours Exporter). Appliquer les priorités de calque Affiche tous les calques. Cette option concerne le contenu facultatif du document PDF, y compris les calques non répertoriés dans le panneau Calques. Tous les calques sont visibles, quels que soient les paramètres définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque. Il n'est pas possible de modifier la visibilité des calques par le biais de l'icône représentant un œil tant que cette commande est activée. Lorsque vous effectuez des modifications dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calques, ces changements restent ineffectifs jusqu'à A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 377 Modification d'un document PDF ce que vous choisissiez Rétablir la visibilité initiale dans le menu Options. (Seule exception : la modification du nom du calque prend effet immédiatement.) Remarque : Il est impossible d'enregistrer la vue d'un fichier PDF doté de calques en utilisant l'icône d'œil du panneau Calques destinée à afficher et à masquer les calques. Lors de l'enregistrement, la visibilité d'origine des calques est automatiquement rétablie. Pour enregistrer une vue différente d'un fichier PDF doté de calques, vous devez modifier l'état par défaut des calques dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque. Modification des propriétés du calque En combinant les paramètres d'état par défaut, de visibilité et d'impression, vous pouvez gérer les modes de visibilité et d'impression d'un calque. Si un calque est doté d'un filigrane, par exemple, vous voudrez certainement masquer le calque à l'écran mais l'imprimer sur le document et l'exporter dans les applications tierces. Dans ce cas, vous activez l'état par défaut, désactivez la visibilité initiale (l'image ne se voit pas à l'écran) et activez les états d'impression et d'exportation initiaux. Le calque ne doit pas obligatoirement figurer dans le panneau Calques, étant donné que les modifications d'état sont gérées automatiquement. Remarque : Les paramètres définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque entrent en vigueur à condition que l'option Autoriser la définition de l'état des calques selon les informations utilisateur soit activée dans les préférences de documents. Si ce n'est pas le cas, les paramètres de la boîte de dialogue (à l'exception des options Nom du calque et Etat par défaut) ne sont pas pris en compte. 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques. 2 Sélectionnez un calque, puis choisissez Propriétés du calque dans le menu Options . 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque, renommez le calque ou modifiez l'une des propriétés suivantes, puis cliquez sur OK : Mode Sélectionnez Afficher pour permettre l'activation ou la désactivation du calque ou Référence pour laisser le calque constamment activé et autoriser la modification des propriétés. Lorsque l'option Référence est sélectionnée, le calque s'affiche en italique. Etat par défaut Définit l'état de visibilité initial du calque lors de la première ouverture du document ou après réinitialisation de la visibilité initiale. Cette valeur détermine l'affichage ou le masquage initial de l'icône représentant un œil associée à chaque calque. Par exemple, si cette valeur est désactivée, l'icône d'oeil associée à un calque est masquée lors de la première ouverture du document ou lorsque l'utilisateur choisit Rétablir la visibilité initiale dans le menu d'options. Visibilité Définit la visibilité à l'écran du calque PDF. Vous pouvez afficher un calque et en masquer un autre à l'ouverture du document, ou laisser l'état par défaut déterminer si un calque est visible ou non lorsque le document est ouvert. Impression Détermine si un calque est imprimé. Exportation Détermine l'affichage du calque dans le document résultant après exportation du fichier PDF vers une application ou un format de fichier prenant en charge les calques. Les éventuelles propriétés que l'auteur du document PDF a associées à un calque spécifique sont présentées au bas de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque. Réorganisation des calques Le panneau Calques vous permet de réorganiser individuellement les calques. Cette opération s'avère utile si vous souhaitez modifier l'ordre des calques dans la liste ou déplacer un calque d'un groupe à un autre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 378 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : Vous ne pouvez cependant pas réorganiser des calques verrouillés ou des calques faisant partie de groupes imbriqués. 1 Dans le panneau de navigation Calques, sélectionnez un calque. 2 Tout en maintenant la touche Alt enfoncée, faites glisser le calque jusqu'à l'emplacement voulu. Suppression d'un groupe de calques vide ? Dans le panneau de navigation Calques, sélectionnez un calque vide et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout d'une navigation de calques Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des liens et des destinations aux calques, ce qui vous permet de modifier l'affichage d'un document lorsque l'utilisateur clique sur un signet ou sur un lien. Remarque : En général, les modifications apportées à la visibilité des calques à l'aide de l'icône représentant un œil (disponible dans le panneau Calques) ne sont pas mémorisées sur la barre d'outils Navigation. Association d'une visibilité de calque à des signets 1 Définissez les propriétés du calque, l'option de visibilité et le facteur de zoom du calque PDF cible dans le panneau de visualisation. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis choisissez Nouveau signet dans le menu Options . 3 Sélectionnez le signet que vous venez de créer, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options . 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du signet, cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 5 Dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner l'action, choisissez Définir la visibilité du calque, cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sur OK. 6 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez le libellé du signet et choisissez un nom. Association de la visibilité d'un calque à une destination de lien 1 Dans le panneau de visualisation, définissez les propriétés du calque associées à la destination. 2 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Le panneau Destinations s'affiche sous forme de fenêtre flottante. Vous pouvez l'ancrer aux autres panneaux en le faisant glisser vers le navigateur. Si le panneau est réduit, cliquez sur le bouton Destinations pour le développer. 3 Choisissez Nouvelle destination dans le menu Options , puis attribuez un nom à la destination. 4 Activez l'outil Lien , puis tracez le lien dans le panneau de visualisation. (Comme le contenu est ajouté à tous les calques, cela n'a pas d'importance si vous semblez créer le lien sur le calque cible. Le lien fonctionne indépendamment du calque sur lequel vous le créez.) 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, sélectionnez Lien personnalisé et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, définissez l'aspect du lien. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, choisissez Définir la visibilité du calque puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 8 Fermez les boîtes de dialogue. Vous pouvez tester le lien. Pour ce faire, modifiez les paramètres de calque, sélectionnez l'outil Main et activez le lien.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 379 Modification d'un document PDF Importation de calques Vous pouvez importer dans un fichier PDF des calques issus d'un autre fichier PDF ou d'un fichier image. Les formats de fichiers image pris en charge sont les suivants : BMP, GIF, JPEG, JPEG2000, PCX, PNG et TIFF. 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques. 2 Dans le menu Options , choisissez Importer sous forme de calque. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer sous forme de calques, cliquez sur Parcourir et localisez le fichier à importer. Si le fichier source est un document de plusieurs pages, entrez le numéro de la page à importer dans la zone Numéro de page. Si le fichier cible comprend plusieurs pages, entrez le numéro de la page cible dans la zone Numéro de la cible de la section Aperçu de la boîte de dialogue. 4 Sélectionnez l’une des options d'importation suivantes : Créer un calque Crée un seul calque autonome à partir du document source. Attribuez un nom au nouveau calque. Ajouter au groupe Permet d'indiquer le groupe de calques existant auquel doit être ajouté le calque importé. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque le fichier PDF cible contient déjà un ou plusieurs groupes de calques et que l'option Créer un calque est sélectionnée. Ajouter au calque existant Ajoute le contenu issu du document source à un calque existant dans le document cible. Sélectionnez un calque du document cible. Le contenu importé présentera les mêmes propriétés de calque que le calque existant du document cible. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque le document cible contient des calques. Copier les calques de la source Importe les calques du document source. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque le document source contient des calques. 5 Réglez les paramètres de positionnement et d'aspect selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur OK. Fusion ou aplatissement d'un calque Les calques obtenus héritent des propriétés du calque dans lequel ils sont fusionnés (autrement dit, le calque cible). L'aplatissement de calques PDF masque tout contenu non visible lors de l'opération d'aplatissement et associe tous les calques. Important : Vous ne pouvez annuler ni une opération de fusion, ni une opération d'aplatissement. Fusion de calques 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Calques, puis choisissez Fusionner les calques dans le menu Options . 2 Dans le panneau Calques à fusionner, sélectionnez les calques à fusionner, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 3 Pour retirer des calques du panneau central, sélectionnez-les et cliquez sur Supprimer. 4 Dans le panneau Calque de destination de la fusion, sélectionnez le calque dans lequel se retrouveront tous les calques fusionnés. Aplatissement des calques ? Cliquez sur le bouton Calques, puis choisissez Aplatir les calques dans le menu Options .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 380 Modification d'un document PDF Modification d'un contenu doté de calques L'outil Sélection ou Instantané permet de sélectionner ou de copier le contenu d'un document PDF doté de calques. (Dans Reader, le fichier PDF doit inclure les droits d'utilisation.) Dans Acrobat, les outils de retouche permettent de modifier le contenu. Ces outils sont en mesure d'identifier et de sélectionner tout contenu visible, que celui-ci soit situé sur un calque sélectionné ou non. Dans Acrobat, si le contenu que vous modifiez ou que vous supprimez est associé à un calque, le contenu du calque reflète la modification apportée. Si le contenu que vous modifiez ou que vous supprimez est associé à plusieurs calques, le contenu de tous les calques reflète le changement apporté. Si, par exemple, vous souhaitez modifier un titre et une signature figurant sur la même ligne de la page d'ouverture d'un document tout en étant situés sur des calques visibles distincts, la modification du contenu placé sur un calque est répercutée sur les deux. Vous pouvez ajouter un contenu, notamment des commentaires de révision, des tampons ou encore des champs de formulaire, à des documents conçus avec des calques en procédant de la même façon que dans le cas d'un document PDF. Le contenu n'est cependant pas ajouté à un calque spécifique, même si un calque est sélectionné au moment de l'ajout du contenu. En réalité, le contenu est ajouté à tout le document. Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser la commande Combiner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF afin de combiner les documents PDF contenant des calques. Les calques contenus dans chacun des documents sont groupés sous un entête spécifique dans le panneau Calques du navigateur. Pour développer et réduire le groupe, cliquez sur l'icône figurant sur la barre de titre du groupe. Voir aussi « Déplacement ou modification d'un objet » à la page 365 Traitement par lot A propos de séquences de traitement par lot Lorsque vous appliquez un ou plusieurs jeux de routine de commandes à vos fichiers, vous économisez du temps et des opérations clavier en utilisant une séquence de traitement par lot automatisée, c'est-à-dire une série de commandes définie avec des paramètres particuliers, selon un ordre d'exécution donné et appliquée en une seule opération. Une telle séquence peut très bien s'appliquer à un ou plusieurs documents, et même à un jeu complet de fichiers. Vous pouvez utiliser les séquences de traitement par lot fournies ou définir les vôtres. Les séquences de traitement par lot que vous définissez s'affichent (par ordre alphabétique) dans la liste des séquences prédéfinies à des fins de réutilisation dans des sessions de travail ultérieures. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation du traitement par lot, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Reconnaissance optique des caractères (OCR) par lot avec Acrobat Pro : www.abanet.org/lpm/lpt/articles/att03061.shtml • Conversion par lot des fichiers texte en fichiers PDF : blogs.adobe.com/acrobatforlifesciences/batch_processing/ Les développeurs peuvent optimiser le traitement par lot et d'autres fonctionnalités puissantes dans Acrobat à l'aide du kit SDK (Software Development Kit) d'Acrobat, lequel permet de créer des scripts et des modules externes en fonction de leurs besoins spécifiques. Pour plus de détails sur le kit SDK d'Acrobat, voir www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_sdk_doc_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 381 Modification d'un document PDF Exécution d'une séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie Acrobat comprend plusieurs séquences de traitement par lot prédéfinies simples permettant de rationaliser votre travail. Ces séquences correspondent à des tâches courantes que vous effectuez régulièrement afin de préparer des fichiers en vue de leur diffusion. Il est inutile d'ouvrir un des fichiers PDF avant de lancer l'exécution d'une séquence de traitement par lot. Vous pouvez annuler l'affichage des invites de mot de passe lors de l'exécution d'une séquence sur des documents PDF exigeant des mots de passe. Pour ce faire, automatisez la saisie des mots de passe demandés ou configurez une méthode de protection pour ces fichiers dans le panneau Traitement par lot de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Si vous sélectionnez Ne pas demander de mot de passe, les documents PDF pour lesquels un mot de passe est obligatoire ne sont pas traités. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Traitement par lot. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Séquences à traiter, sélectionnez une séquence, puis cliquez sur le bouton Exécuter. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Confirmation de l'exécution de la séquence, assurez-vous que la séquence sélectionnée est correcte, puis cliquez sur OK. Pour éviter que cette boîte de dialogue ne s'affiche à nouveau : dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Traitement par lot, désactivez l'option Afficher la boîte de dialogue de confirmation de l'exécution de la séquence. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner les fichiers à traiter, sélectionnez les fichiers voulus, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. (Sous Windows, ces fichiers doivent se trouver dans le même dossier.) 5 Si un message vous demande des informations supplémentaires concernant une commande de la séquence, sélectionnez les options appropriées et cliquez sur OK. 6 Lorsque la barre de progression disparaît, cliquez sur Fermer. Dans la boîte de dialogue Progression, cliquez sur Arrêter pour arrêter le traitement. La boîte de dialogue s'agrandit pour indiquer l'évolution du traitement en pourcentage ainsi que les éventuels messages d'erreur ou d'avertissement. Tout fichier déjà traité est enregistré selon les indications de la séquence de traitement par lot. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue de progression se ferme, les erreurs détectées sont automatiquement consignées dans le journal des erreurs du traitement par lot, en fonction des sélections effectuées dans le panneau Traitement par lot de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Séquences de traitement par lot prédéfinies Incorporer vignettes Incorpore des images miniatures de chaque page qui s'affichent ensuite dans le panneau Pages. Affichage Web rapide Permet de télécharger des documents volumineux de manière incrémentielle. Ouvrir tout Ouvre tous les fichiers spécifiés. Cette séquence de traitement par lot crée des fichiers PDF pour tout fichier d'entrée dont le type est pris en charge. Imprimer la 1ere page Imprime uniquement la première page de chaque fichier PDF dans la séquence. Les pages sont envoyées sur l'imprimante définie par défaut en respectant les paramètres d'impression en vigueur. Imprimer tout Imprime toutes les pages des fichiers inclus dans la séquence. Les fichiers sont envoyés sur l'imprimante définie par défaut en respectant les paramètres d'impression en vigueur. Supprimer les fichiers joints Supprime les pièces jointes aux fichiers PDF de la séquence. Enregistrer tout sous RTF Enregistre les fichiers au format RTF (Rich Text Format). Définir la protection sur aucune modification Limite l'accès à un document PDF en configurant des mots de passe et en verrouillant certaines fonctions, telles que la modification.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 382 Modification d'un document PDF Modification d'une séquence de traitement par lot Vous pouvez ajouter, réorganiser et supprimer des commandes dans les définitions de la séquence en fonction de vos besoins. Il est également possible de modifier les options de commandes spécifiques de la séquence ou d'ajouter des pauses interactives à des moments stratégiques du traitement par lot. Les modifications apportées à une séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie sont enregistrées automatiquement avec la séquence. Pour restaurer les paramètres par défaut de la séquence de traitement par lot prédéfinie, vous devez supprimer manuellement toutes les modifications que vous leur avez apportés. Si vous avez besoin d'une séquence de commandes complexes ou fortement personnalisées, créez un séquence de traitement par lot. Changement d'une séquence de traitement par lot 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Traitement par lot, sélectionnez la séquence et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence, cliquez sur Commandes. 3 Pour modifier la séquence de commandes, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter une commande à la séquence, sélectionnez-la dans la liste du panneau gauche puis cliquez sur Ajouter afin de la placer dans la liste de droite. • Pour supprimer une commande de la séquence, sélectionnez-la dans la liste de droite et cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour changer l'ordre d'exécution des commandes, sélectionnez une commande, puis cliquez sur Monter ou sur Descendre. 4 Pour modifier les options d'une commande donnée, sélectionnez-la dans la liste de droite, puis cliquez sur Modifier. (Le bouton Modifier n'est pas disponible si vous sélectionnez une commande qui ne dispose pas d'options.) Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez deux fois sur OK afin de revenir à la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence. Remarque : Pour revoir les options des commandes, développez l'affichage des commandes. 5 Dans le menu Exécutez les commandes, sélectionnez les fichiers à traiter : accédez au dossier ou au fichier, puis cliquez sur Options du fichier source pour apporter les modifications souhaitées. 6 Dans le menu Sélectionnez l'emplacement de sortie, choisissez une option d'emplacement pour les fichiers créés lors du traitement par lot. Si vous choisissez Dossier spécifique, localisez l'emplacement en question. 7 Cliquez sur Options de sortie, indiquez le format pour l'attribution d'un nom et l'enregistrement des fichiers traités, puis cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 383 Modification d'un document PDF Développement des commandes dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence Rendre interactive une séquence de traitement par lot Si vous avez besoin de disposer de documents utilisant des options légèrement différentes pour les mêmes commandes, vous pouvez néanmoins faire appel au traitement par lot afin d'automatiser les tâches. En rendant interactive une séquence de traitement par lot, vous configurez les définitions de traitement par lot de manière à ménager des pauses entre des commandes particulières afin de pouvoir modifier les options des commandes avant leur exécution. Remarque : Il est impossible d'ajouter de l'interactivité à des commandes sans options d'interactivité. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Traitement par lot, sélectionnez la séquence qui vous intéresse et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence, cliquez sur Commandes. 3 Dans le panneau droit de la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur la case Activer/Désactiver le mode interactif précédant le nom des commandes auxquelles vous souhaitez ajouter des informations lors du traitement, puis cliquez sur OK. Activer/Désactiver le mode interactif A. Mode interactif non disponible. B. Mode interactif disponible mais désactivé. C. Mode interactif activé. Création d'une séquence de traitement par lot 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Traitement par lot. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Nom de la séquence, saisissez un nom descriptif et cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence, cliquez sur Commandes. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 384 Modification d'un document PDF 5 Sélectionnez une commande dans le panneau de gauche de la boîte de dialogue Modifier, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Cliquez sur Modifier pour modifier les paramètres de la commande sélectionnée. 7 Répétez les étapes 5 et 6 pour ajouter et modifier d'autres commandes. Utilisez les boutons Monter et Descendre pour réorganiser les commandes dans l'ordre souhaité, puis cliquez sur OK. 8 Dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier la séquence, choisissez les paramètres souhaités dans les menus. 9 Cliquez sur Options de sortie, sélectionnez les options à inclure et cliquez sur OK. Automatisation de la saisie du mot de passe d'une séquence de traitement par lot Avant de traiter par lot des documents PDF chiffrés ou protégés par mot de passe, vous pouvez définir votre ID numérique de manière à automatiser la saisie du mot de passe exigé. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. 3 Sélectionnez une ID dans la liste de droite, puis l'une des options suivantes : Ouvrir une session Ouvre une session à l'aide de l'ID numérique spécifiée. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Déconnexion Ferme la session d'ID numérique spécifiée lors de l'exécution d'une séquence. Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 272 Utilisation d'un document PDF géographique A propos des documents PDF géographiques Un fichier géographique PDF contient les informations requises pour les données de lieu de référence géographique. Lors de l'importation de données géographiques dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat conserve les coordonnées géographiques. Celles-ci vous permettent de visualiser et d'interagir dans le document PDF afin de trouver et de marquer les données du lieu. Les données géographiques peuvent être vectorielles ou pixellisées ou bien les deux à la fois. Une fois les données géographiques importées dans Acrobat, vous pouvez les exploiter de différentes façons, soit pour : • Trouver et indiquer les coordonnées du lieu. • Mesurer une distance, un périmètre ou une aire sur une carte. • Changer les unités de mesure et le système de coordonnées. • Copier les coordonnées du lieu dans le Presse-papiers, puis les utiliser pour afficher des emplacements dans plusieurs utilitaires Web de mappage. • Enregistrer une image pixellisée pour créer un fichier PDF à données géographiques.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 385 Modification d'un document PDF Interaction avec un fichier PDF géographique Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier PDF géographiquement activé, vous pouvez repérez des lieux, mesurer des distances et ajouter des marqueurs d'emplacement. Vous pouvez également copier des coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers pour les utiliser dans un service Web de cartographie. Affichez les outils de mesure géographique en choisissant Outils > Analyse > Afficher la barre d'outils Analyse. L'outil Lieu géographique permet d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Afficher la latitude et la longitude pendant que le curseur est sur une zone contenant des informations géographiques. • Marquer un lieu avec une annotation géographique. • Rechercher un lieu dans un document. Voir aussi « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 177 « Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l'aire d'un objet » à la page 53 Recherche d'un lieu sur une carte 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF géographique et choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique . 2 Cliquez sur la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis cliquez sur Rechercher un lieu. 3 Entrez les valeurs de latitude et de longitude (degrés, minutes, secondes ou décimales) dans les deux zones de texte, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. Si au moins un lieu est disponible, celui-ci est surligné avec un carré bleu et la page est centrée sur le lieu en question. 4 Si le fichier PDF comporte plusieurs cartes, cliquez sur les boutons Suivant et Précédent pour afficher, le cas échéant, les résultats supplémentaires. Des lieux multiples sont disponibles dans plusieurs cas : • Lorsqu’un document contient plusieurs cartes - si un fichier PDF contient, par exemple, une carte à l'intérieur d'une plus grande carte (telle qu'une ville sur une carte d'un Etat ou d'un pays). Lors de la recherche d'un lieu situé dans une ville, Acrobat trouve ce lieu à la fois dans la carte de la ville et dans la plus grande carte. • Lorsqu'un document contient plusieurs pages d'une carte (si, par exemple, la page un représente un pays et la page deux représente un Etat ou une ville du pays). 5 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter un commentaire (tel qu'un toponyme ou une adresse), cliquez sur le marqueur du lieu, puis ajoutez les informations dans la zone de commentaires. 6 Pour terminer la recherche, cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris. Sélectionnez ensuite Masquer la recherche de lieu pour faire disparaître les zones de recherche. Repérage d'un lieu géographique 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF géographique et choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique . 2 Déplacez le pointeur de la souris sur le document pour afficher la longitude et la latitude des zones contenant des informations géographiques. Cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour rechercher un lieu, cliquez sur Rechercher un lieu. Entrez les valeurs de latitude et de longitude, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. • Pour marquer un lieu avec des informations géographiques, cliquez sur Marquer le lieu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 386 Modification d'un document PDF 3 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter un commentaire (tel qu'un toponyme ou une adresse), cliquez sur le marqueur du lieu, puis ajoutez les informations dans la zone de commentaires. Mesure d'une distance, d'un périmètre ou d'une aire sur une carte Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier géographique PDF, les outils de mesure d'Acrobat lisent les informations géographiques et mesurent la surface et la distance, plutôt que les dimensions d'objet ou de page. Les outils de mesure permettent de calculer la distance, le périmètre et la surface de tout fichier PDF géographiquement activé. Au fur et à mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur de la souris sur le contenu du document, des marqueurs d'accrochage s'affichent et indiquent que vous vous trouvez sur un chemin ou sur une extrémité de chemin. Vous pouvez également afficher la latitude et la longitude de l'emplacement de votre curseur lorsque le pointeur de la souris se trouve sur du contenu géographique. 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Mesures . 2 Dans l'affichage de l'outil de mesure, sélectionnez un type de mesure : Distance , Surface ou Périmètre . 3 Sélectionnez une option d'accrochage : • Accrocher aux tracés • Accrocher aux extrémités • Accrocher aux points centraux • Accrocher aux intersections 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous utilisez l'outil Distance, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez commencer la mesure, puis faites glisser le pointeur sur l'extrémité et cliquez encore une fois. La distance s'affiche dans le coin en bas à droite. • Si vous utilisez l'outil Périmètre, cliquez sur la carte dans un coin du périmètre, puis faites glisser le pointeur de la souris sur chaque coin. Cliquez sur chaque coin, puis cliquez deux fois sur l'extrémité. La fenêtre d'information affiche la taille du périmètre. • Si vous utilisez l'outil Zone, cliquez sur la carte dans un coin de la zone, puis faites glisser le pointeur de la souris sur un autre coin. Cliquez avant de changer de direction. Cliquez deux fois à la fin pour afficher la surface totale. 5 Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Terminer la mesure. Ou sélectionnez Annuler la mesure. Vous pouvez également copier des coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers pour les utiliser dans un service Web de cartographie. Après avoir trouvé un lieu dans un fichier géographique PDF, vous pouvez copier ses coordonnées dans le Pressepapiers. Dans le Presse-papiers, vous pouvez coller les données dans un service Web de cartographie capable de lire les coordonnées de latitude et de longitude. 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique , puis cliquez sur le lieu avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la carte. 2 Cliquez sur Copier les coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers Acrobat copie les données dans ce format : latitude, puis longitude, séparées par un espace. Collez les données dans la barre d'adresse d'un service Web de cartographie capable d'interpréter les données du lieu. Modification des unités de mesure au sein d'un document Pour modifier le type d'unité de mesure, cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris à l'aide de l'outil Mesure et choisissez Unité de distance ou Unité d'aire. Sélectionnez ensuite un type de mesure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 387 Modification d'un document PDF Modification des préférences de mesures géographiques Vous pouvez changer les unités de mesure de tous les fichiers géographiques PDF dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences. Dans la section catégories, cliquez sur Mesures (géographiques). Activer les annotations de mesure Ajoute un libellé à une mesure géographique. Lorsque l'option Activer les annotations de mesure est sélectionnée, choisissez Utiliser le libellé, puis entrez un libellé pour les mesures. Paramètres d'accrochage Sélectionnez les parties de chemin sur lesquelles vous souhaitez accrocher vos mesures. Affichage des valeurs Détermine le mode de calcul des valeurs de latitude et de longitude. Choisissez une décimale pour afficher ces valeurs en fraction décimale. Choisissez Degrés, minutes, secondes pour diviser chaque degré de longitude en 60 minutes, elles-mêmes divisées en 60 secondes. Affichage de la direction Choisissez entre Signé et Nommé. La direction nommée affiche un N (nord) ou un S (sud) à côté de la latitude et un E (est) ou un O (ouest) pour la longitude. Toujours afficher la latitude et la longitude au format WGS 1984 Cette option permet de garantir que la latitude et la longitude utilisent la norme actuelle de cadre de référence pour la terre (World Geodetic System 1984). Pour les cartes plus anciennes qui ont été réalisées avec une grille antérieure (telle que NAD 1927), vous pouvez désélectionner cette option afin d'afficher les valeurs originales. Lorsqu'une carte plus ancienne est enregistrée dans ses coordonnées natives, celles-ci peuvent différer des normes actuelles utilisées par les appareils GPS et les services Web de cartographie. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure voulue. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut La surface peut se mesurer avec une unité de mesure différente de celle utilisée pour la distance. Ne pas afficher le calque de transparence dans les images au format GeoTIFF et JPEG Les formats d'images pixellisées comprennent un calque de transparence que vous pouvez supprimer. Exportation d'annotations d'emplacement et de mesure Vous pouvez exporter des données géographiques et de mesure vers un fichier PDF. A chaque annotation géographique correspond une entrée GPTS. Celle-ci représente la latitude et la longitude de chaque point d'annotation. Parmi les types d'information exportables figurent les suivants : • Lieux marqués saisis dans l'outil Lieu géographique • Mesures de distance, de périmètre (distance composée) et de surface entrées en utilisant l'outil Mesures sur le contenu géographique Vous pouvez exporter les données géographiques à l'aide du menu Commentaires ou du panneau Commentaires. • Dans le menu Commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données.. • Dans le panneau Commentaires, choisissez Options > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. Pour exporter un sous-ensemble des commentaires, sélectionnez-les, puis choisissez Options > Exporter les commentaires. Saisissez ensuite le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le fichier PDF est enregistré.388 Chapitre 12 : Recherche et indexation Vous disposez de nombreux modes et moyens pour effectuer des recherches à la fois efficaces et concluantes dans Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Professional. Une recherche peut être globale ou limitée, porter sur des types de données variés et s'appliquer à de multiples fichiers Adobe PDF. Si vous manipulez de grandes quantités de fichiers PDF apparentés, définissez-les sous forme de catalogues, lesquels génèrent un index PDF des documents PDF associés. La recherche dans un index PDF (et non dans les documents eux-mêmes) réduit considérablement la durée de l'opération. Recherche dans des fichiers PDF Présentation des fonctions de recherche Vous effectuez des recherches pour trouver des éléments spécifiques dans les fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche simple (en recherchant un terme dans un seul fichier) ou une recherche plus complexe (en recherchant des données de différents types dans un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF). Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée ou via la barre d'outils Recherche. Dans les deux cas, Acrobat effectue la recherche dans le texte, les calques, les champs de formulaire et les signatures numériques des documents PDF. Vous pouvez également inclure les signets et les commentaires. La fenêtre Recherche avancée propose plus d'options et de types de recherches que la barre d'outils Recherche. Lorsque vous utilisez la fenêtre Recherche avancée, les données d'objet et les métadonnées d'images au format XIF font également partie de la recherche. Pour des recherches dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, Acrobat inclut également les propriétés de document et les métadonnées XMP, et les balises de structure indexées lors de la recherche dans un index PDF. Si certains fichiers PDF disposent de pièces jointes au format PDF, ces dernières sont également incluses dans la recherche. Remarque : Les documents PDF peuvent comprendre plusieurs calques. Si les résultats de la recherche contiennent une occurrence située sur un calque masqué, un message d'avertissement vous demande si vous voulez rendre le calque visible lorsque vous sélectionnez cette occurrence. Voir aussi « Affichage ou masquage d'un calque » à la page 376 « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 278 « Recherche et biffure de mots » à la page 280UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 389 Recherche et indexation Accès aux fonctions de recherche avancée Le point de départ de la recherche dépend du type de recherche à effectuer. Utilisez la barre d'outils Recherche pour lancer une recherche rapide dans le fichier PDF actif. Faites appel à la fenêtre Recherche avancée pour rechercher des mots ou des propriétés de document dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, appliquer les options de recherche avancée et opérer sur Internet ou dans des index PDF. Affichage de la barre d'outils Recherche ? Par défaut, la barre d'outils Recherche est ouverte. Si elle est fermée, ouvrez-la en choisissant Edition > Rechercher. Ouverture de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. • Sur la barre d'outils Recherche, cliquez sur la flèche , puis choisissez Ouvrir la recherche avancée d'Acrobat. Une fenêtre distincte s'ouvre. Vous pouvez la déplacer, la redimensionner, la réduire ou la disposer derrière la fenêtre du fichier PDF (en partie ou complètement). Disposition de la fenêtre du document PDF et de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ? Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, cliquez sur Réorganiser les fenêtres. Acrobat redimensionne et dispose les deux fenêtres côte à côte de manière à occuper tout l'écran. Remarque : Un second clic sur le bouton Réorganiser les fenêtres redimensionne la fenêtre du document mais laisse la fenêtre Recherche avancée inchangée. Si vous souhaitez réduire ou agrandir la fenêtre Recherche avancée, faites glisser l'un des coins ou un bord, comme vous procéderiez pour n'importe quelle autre fenêtre sur votre système d'exploitation. Recherche de texte dans un fichier PDF La barre d'outils Recherche permet d'effectuer une recherche dans le document PDF actif. 1 Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans la zone de texte de la barre d'outils Recherche. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de la zone de texte, puis choisissez une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : Mots entiers Recherche uniquement les occurrences du mot complet que vous saisissez dans la zone de texte. Par exemple, si vous recherchez le mot classeur, les mots classe et classeurs ne sont pas recherchés. Respect de la casse Recherche uniquement les occurrences des mots avec la même casse. Par exemple, si vous recherchez le mot Web, les mots web et WEB ne sont pas recherchés. Inclure les signets Inclut le texte du panneau Signets dans la recherche. Commentaires inclus Etend la recherche aux commentaires. 3 Appuyez sur Entrée. Acrobat affiche la première occurrence du terme recherché, qui est mise en surbrillance. 4 Appuyez sur Entrée de manière répétée pour atteindre les occurrences suivantes du terme recherché.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 390 Recherche et indexation Recherche de texte dans plusieurs fichiers PDF La fenêtre Recherche avancée vous permet de rechercher les termes voulus dans plusieurs fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez ainsi effectuer des recherches dans tous les fichiers PDF situés à un emplacement donné ou contenus dans un portedocuments PDF ouvert. Remarque : Si les documents sont chiffrés (c’est-à-dire, s’ils sont dotés de options de protection), ils sont exclus de toute recherche portant sur de multiples documents. Commencez par ouvrir ces documents et recherchez les termes voulus, fichier par fichier. Cependant, les documents chiffrés en tant que publications numériques Adobe font exception et sont disponibles pour la recherche portant sur plusieurs documents. 1 Ouvrez Acrobat depuis votre bureau (et pas depuis un navigateur Web). 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes. • Sur la barre d'outils Recherche, tapez les termes voulus, puis choisissez Ouvrir la recherche avancée d'Acrobat dans le menu déroulant. • Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, tapez le texte à rechercher. 3 Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, sélectionnez Dans tous les documents PDF dans. Dans le menu situé directement sous cette option, choisissez Rechercher l'emplacement. 4 Sélectionnez l'emplacement, sur votre ordinateur ou sur un réseau, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Pour définir des critères de recherche supplémentaires, cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées et désignez les options voulues. 6 Cliquez sur Rechercher. Au cours d'une recherche, cliquez sur un résultat ou utilisez les touches de raccourci afin de passer en revue les résultats sans interrompre la recherche. Cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter sous la barre de progression de la recherche pour interrompre la recherche et limiter les résultats aux occurrences déjà trouvées. Cette action n'entraîne ni la fermeture de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ni la suppression de la liste des résultats. Pour afficher davantage de résultats, lancez une nouvelle recherche. Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF Dans un porte-documents PDF, vous pouvez effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers PDF composant de même que dans d'autres types de fichiers. Les utilisateurs de Windows peuvent parcourir des documents Microsoft Office (.doc, .xls et .ppt, par exemple), des fichiers dessin AutoCAD (.dwg et .dwf), des fichiers HTML et des fichiers Rich Text Format (.rtf). Quant aux utilisateurs de Mac OS, ils peuvent effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft Word (.doc), HTML et .rtf. Remarque : Pour effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft et AutoCAD, assurez-vous d'avoir installé les filtres IFilter correspondant aux types de fichiers concernés. Ces filtres sont généralement installés avec les applications associées, mais ils sont également téléchargeables à partir des sites Web des produits. 1 Ouvrez le porte-documents PDF dans Acrobat depuis votre bureau (et pas depuis un navigateur Web). 2 Dans la zone de recherche de la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, tapez le texte à rechercher. 3 Pour définir des critères de recherche supplémentaires, ouvrez le menu déroulant et désignez les options voulues. Les résultats de la recherche indiquent tous les fichiers contenant le texte recherché. Dans le cas des fichiers PDF, pensez à développer la liste afin d'afficher les résultats dans leur contexte. Cliquez sur un résultat pour accéder directement à l'emplacement du texte dans le document PDF. S'il s'agit d'un autre type de fichier, cliquez sur Ouvrir pour ouvrir le fichier, puis recherchez le texte en question.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 391 Recherche et indexation Voir aussi « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 125 « Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 126 Vérification des résultats de la recherche Une fois la recherche lancée depuis la fenêtre Recherche avancée, les résultats s'affichent selon l'ordre des pages, imbriqués sous le nom de chaque document analysé. Chaque élément répertorié comprend quelques mots de contexte (le cas échéant) et une icône indique le type de l'occurrence. Saut à une occurrence spécifique dans les résultats de la recherche (seulement pour les fichiers PDF uniques) 1 Le cas échéant, développez les résultats de la recherche. Sélectionnez ensuite une occurrence dans les résultats afin de l'afficher dans le document PDF. 2 Pour afficher d'autres occurrences, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur une autre occurrence dans les résultats. • Choisissez Edition > Résultats de la recherche, puis Résultat suivant ou Résultat précédent. Tri des occurrences dans les résultats de la recherche ? Sélectionnez une option dans le menu Tri par situé au bas de la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Vous pouvez les trier selon les critères suivants : Classement par pertinence, Date de modification, Nom du fichier ou Emplacement. Icônes affichées avec les résultats de la recherche L'icône placée en regard d'une occurrence des résultats indique la zone de recherche dans laquelle figure l'occurrence en question. La sélection d'une icône produit l'effet suivant : Icône de document Active le document dans la fenêtre du document. Développez la liste pour afficher les différents résultats de la recherche au sein de ce document. Icône (générale) des résultats de la recherche Dans les fichiers PDF, atteint cette occurrence particulière du terme recherché, généralement située dans le corps du texte du document PDF. L'occurrence est mise en surbrillance dans le document. Icône des résultats de la recherche de fichier non PDF [ ] Dans le cas des documents non PDF, ouvre le fichier ou, si l'ouverture de ce type de fichier est limitée, affiche une boîte de dialogue de message. Icône de signet Ouvre le panneau Signets et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes recherchés. Icône de commentaire Ouvre le panneau Commentaires et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes recherchés. Icône de calque Peut afficher un message indiquant que le calque est masqué et que vous pouvez l'afficher si vous le souhaitez. Icône de pièce jointe Ouvre un fichier joint au document PDF parent sur lequel porte la recherche et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes trouvés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 392 Recherche et indexation Options de recherche avancées Par défaut, la fenêtre Recherche avancée affiche les options de recherche de base. Cliquez sur le lien Options de recherche avancées situé au bas de la fenêtre pour afficher des options supplémentaires. Pour restaurer les options de base, cliquez sur le lien Options de recherche de base situé au bas de la fenêtre. Vous pouvez configurer une préférence permettant d'afficher en permanence les options de recherche avancées dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Recherche. Donner les résultats contenant Limite les résultats de la recherche à l'option choisie : • Mot ou expression exacts Recherche la chaîne de caractères complète, en respectant notamment les espaces et l’ordre des mots dans la zone de texte. • Un des mots Recherche toute occurrence d’au moins un des termes indiqués. Si, par exemple, vous recherchez petit homme, les résultats incluent toute occurrence de l’un des deux termes ou des deux ensembles : petit, homme, petit homme ou homme petit. • Tous les mots Recherche des occurrences contenant tous les mots de la recherche, mais pas nécessairement dans l’ordre de la frappe. Option disponible seulement pour une recherche portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des fichiers de définition d'index. • Recherche par opérateurs booléens Fait appel aux opérateurs booléens que vous indiquez avec les mots à rechercher dans la zone Quel terme ou quelle expression recherchez-vous ?. Option disponible uniquement pour les recherches portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des index PDF. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas effectuer de recherches génériques à l'aide d'astérisques (*) ou de points d'interrogation (?) lorsque l'opération de recherche s'applique à des index PDF. Rechercher dans Limite la recherche au document PDF actif, à l'ensemble d'un porte-documents PDF ouvert (le cas échéant), à un index ou un emplacement de votre ordinateur. Si vous choisissez d'effectuer une recherche portant sur un index, un emplacement ou un porte-documents PDF, des options supplémentaires s'affichent sous Critères supplémentaires. Critères supplémentaires (options de texte) Comprend les options de recherche de base plus quatre autres options : • Proximité Recherche plusieurs mots séparés par un nombre défini d'autres mots, conformément à l'option spécifiée dans les préférences de recherche. Option disponible seulement pour une recherche portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des fichiers de définition d'index, et lorsque l'option Tous les mots est sélectionnée. • Racine identique Recherche les mots contenant une partie (la racine) du terme indiqué. Par exemple, une recherche portant sur ouverture trouve des occurrences des termes ouvert, ouverte, ouvertes et ouvertement. Cette option s'applique à des mots individuels et à des expressions lors de recherches portant sur le document PDF actif, un dossier ou un index créé dans Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure. Les caractères génériques (*, ?) ne sont pas autorisés dans les recherches de racine identique. Cette option n'est pas disponible si la case Mots entiers ou Respect de la casse est cochée. • Inclure les signets Etend la recherche au texte des signets, tels qu'ils apparaissent dans le panneau Signets. • Inclure les commentaires Etend la recherche au texte des commentaires ajoutés au document PDF, tels qu'ils apparaissent dans le panneau Commentaires. • Inclure les pièces jointes Etend la recherche aux documents joints au document PDF actif ou à d'autres fichiers PDF joints (jusqu'à deux niveaux d'imbrication). Critères supplémentaires (propriétés du document) Option disponible uniquement pour les recherches portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des index PDF. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs combinaisons propriété- modificateur-valeur et les appliquer aux recherches. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas aux fichiers non PDF contenus dans des porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 393 Recherche et indexation Remarque : Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche par propriétés de document uniquement à l'aide des options correspondantes associées à une recherche de texte spécifique. • Case à cocher Applique à la recherche les critères définis dans les trois options apparentées. (La case est automatiquement cochée lorsque vous saisissez des informations dans l'une des trois options d'un jeu. Une fois les options définies, la désactivation de la case à cocher n'efface pas les entrées, mais les écartent simplement de la recherche.) • Premier menu (la propriété) Indique l'attribut du document à rechercher. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Date de création, Date de modification, Auteur, Titre, Sujet, Nom du fichier, Mots-clés, Signets, Commentaires, Images JPEG, Métadonnées XMP et Données d'objet. • Deuxième menu (le modificateur) Indique le niveau de correspondance. Si la sélection dans le premier menu est une date, les options disponibles dans ce menu sont : Est exactement le, Est antérieure au, Est postérieure au et N'est pas le. Pour les autres sélections, les options disponibles sont Contient et Ne contient pas. • Troisième zone (la valeur ou le texte) Indique les informations de référence, que vous devez taper. Si la sélection dans le premier menu est une date, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche pour ouvrir un calendrier permettant de localiser et de sélectionner la date voulue. Opérateurs booléens Les opérateurs booléens communément utilisés sont les suivants : ET Utilisez cet opérateur entre deux mots afin de rechercher des documents les contenant tous les deux, quel que soit l'ordre. Par exemple, saisissez paris ET france afin d’identifier les documents comprenant à la fois paris et france. Les recherches à l'aide de l'opérateur ET et aucun autre opérateur booléen aboutissent aux mêmes résultats que lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Tous les mots. PAS Utilisez cet opérateur devant le terme à exclure de la recherche dans des documents qui le contiennent. Par exemple, tapez NON texas afin de trouver tous les documents ne contenant pas le terme texas. Vous pouvez aussi saisir paris PAS texas afin de trouver tous les documents contenant le terme paris sans inclure texas en même temps. OU Utilisez cet opérateur afin de rechercher toutes les occurrences d'un des termes de la chaîne à rechercher. Par exemple, tapez email OU e-mail afin de rechercher tous les documents contenant des occurrences des deux orthographes. Les recherches à l'aide de l'opérateur OU et aucun autre opérateur booléen aboutissent aux mêmes résultats que lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Un des mots. ^ (OU exclusif) Utilisez cet opérateur pour rechercher toutes les occurrences comprenant l'un des deux termes, mais pas les deux. Par exemple, tapez chat ^ chien afin de rechercher tous les documents contenant des occurrences soit de chat soit de chien, mais pas des deux termes à la fois (chat et chien). ( ) Utilisez les parenthèses pour définir l'ordre d'évaluation des termes. Par exemple, tapez blanche ET (baleine OU achab) pour trouver tous les documents contenant soit blanche et baleine ou blanche et achab. (Le moteur de recherche effectue alors la requête OU portant sur baleine et achab, puis une requête ET à partir de ces résultats sur blanche. Pour plus de détails sur les requêtes, la syntaxe et les opérateurs booléens disponibles pour affiner les recherches, voir tout document standard, site Web ou autre source d'information sur le sujet. Recherche dans des fichiers d'index de documents PDF catalogués Un index de texte intégral est créé lorsqu'un utilisateur se sert d'Acrobat pour définir un catalogue de documents PDF. Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche dans cet index plutôt que d'exécuter une recherche de texte intégral analysant tous les documents PDF inclus dans le catalogue. Une recherche dans un index génère une liste de résultats comprenant des liens renvoyant aux occurrences des documents indexés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 394 Recherche et indexation Remarque : Pour effectuer une recherche dans un index PDF, vous devez ouvrir Acrobat en tant qu'application autonome (et non dans un navigateur Web). Sous Mac OS, les index créés dans d'anciennes versions d'Acrobat ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction de recherche avancée d'Acrobat 9. Si vous venez de procéder à une mise à niveau de l'application, mettez à jour les index avant d'utiliser la fonction de recherche avancée d'Acrobat 9. 1 Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. 2 Saisissez le texte à rechercher, puis cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées. 3 Dans le menu Rechercher dans, choisissez Sélectionner un index. 4 Sélectionnez un index dans la liste ou cliquez sur Ajouter pour insérer l'index. Recommencez cette opération autant de fois que cela est nécessaire. Remarque : Pour lire des informations relatives au fichier index sélectionné, cliquez sur Informations. Pour exclure un index de la recherche, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner un index, puis choisissez Index sélectionnés dans le menu Rechercher dans. 6 Effectuez l'opération de recherche comme à l'accoutumée. Remarque : Afin de réduire de manière significative le délai d'affichage des résultats, activez l'option Mot entier lors de recherches menées dans des index. Voir aussi « Création d'un index PDF » à la page 395 Préférences de la fonction de recherche Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Recherche. Ignorer la chasse des caractères asiatiques Permet de rechercher les occurrences de caractères en langues asiatiques de différentes chasses dans le texte à parcourir. Ignorer les signes diacritiques et les accents Recherche les termes quelles que soient les variantes des caractères alphabétiques. Par exemple, la saisie de cafe permet de trouver à la fois cafe et café. De même, la recherche de café permet de trouver les deux versions. Si cette option est désactivée, la recherche de cafe ne détecte pas les occurrences de café et vice versa. Toujours utiliser les options de recherche avancées Affiche en permanence les options avancées en plus des options de base dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Afficher le titre du document dans les résultats de la recherche Affiche les titres des documents dans les résultats de la recherche. Si un document n'a pas de titre, le nom du fichier s'affiche à sa place. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les noms des fichiers s'affichent dans les résultats de la recherche. Activer la mise en surbrillance dans les recherches à partir d'un serveur externe Met les résultats de la recherche en surbrillance lors de l'utilisation d'un serveur externe, tel qu'un moteur de recherche Internet. Nombre maximal de documents affichés dans les résultats Limite les résultats de la recherche dans la fenêtre Recherche PDF à un nombre donné de documents. La valeur par défaut est 500, mais vous pouvez saisir tout nombre compris entre 1 et 10 000. Plage de mots pour les recherches de proximité Limite les résultats de la recherche aux occurrences dont le nombre de mots entre les mots recherchés est inférieur au nombre indiqué. Admet une plage comprise entre 1 et 10 000.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 395 Recherche et indexation Activer la recherche rapide Génère automatiquement une mise en antémémoire des informations contenues dans tout fichier Adobe PDF utilisé pour une recherche. Cette mise en antémémoire réduit la durée des recherches ultérieures portant sur ce document PDF. Taille maximale de l'antémémoire Limite l'antémémoire temporaire réservée aux informations de recherche rapide à la valeur spécifiée en mégaoctets (entre 5 et 100 000). La valeur par défaut est 100. Vider le contenu de l'antémémoire Supprime l’intégralité de l’antémémoire de recherche rapide. Création d'un index PDF Création et gestion d'un index dans un document PDF Vous pouvez réduire le temps nécessaire à effectuer les recherches dans un long document PDF en incorporant dans celui-ci un index des mots. Acrobat met beaucoup moins de temps à rechercher des mots dans un index que dans un document complet. L'index incorporé est fourni dans les exemplaires diffusés ou partagés du document PDF. Les utilisateurs procèdent de la même façon pour effectuer des recherches dans des documents PDF dotés d'un index incorporé ou non ; aucune étape supplémentaire n'est requise. Pour savoir comment accélérer les recherches dans des documents PDF à l'aide des index, consultez les conseils et la formation de Seneca en matière de conception à l'adresse Web suivante : w.ww.senecadesign.com/designgeek/acrobat.html. Ajout d'un index à un document PDF 1 Le document étant ouvert dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Gérer l'index incorporé, cliquez sur Incorporer l'index. 3 Lisez les messages qui s'affichent, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Dans Outlook et Lotus Notes, vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer un index au moment de la conversion des messages électroniques ou des dossiers de courrier au format PDF. Cette option est particulièrement recommandée dans le cas de dossiers contenant de nombreux messages électroniques. Mise à jour ou suppression de l'index incorporé dans un document PDF 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. 2 Cliquez sur Mettre à jour l'index ou Supprimer l'index. A propos de la fonction Catalog Vous pouvez définir un groupe spécifique de documents PDF sous forme de catalogue et créer un index unifié pour la série complète de documents. Lorsqu'un utilisateur recherche des informations spécifiques dans les fichiers PDF catalogués, l'index accélère considérablement l'opération. Lorsque vous diffusez ou publiez la série de documents sur un CD ou un site Web, vous pouvez ajouter l'index aux fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez cataloguer des documents écrits en caractères romains, chinois, japonais ou coréens. Les éléments pouvant être catalogués incluent le texte, les commentaires, les signets, les champs de formulaire et les balises d'un document, les métadonnées de document et d'objet, les pièces jointes, les informations sur le document, les signatures numériques, les métadonnées d'image au format XIF et les propriétés personnalisées du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 396 Recherche et indexation Préparation d'un document PDF pour l’indexation Commencez par créer un dossier contenant les fichiers PDF à indexer. Tous les fichiers PDF doivent être complets au niveau du contenu comme des fonctions électroniques telles que les liens, les signets et les champs de formulaire. Si les fichiers à indexer comprennent des documents numérisés, assurez-vous que le texte est disponible pour la recherche. Fractionnez les documents volumineux en fichiers plus petits, par chapitres, pour optimiser les performances de recherche. Vous pouvez également ajouter des informations aux propriétés du document d'un fichier afin d'améliorer les possibilités de recherche dans le fichier. Avant d'indexer une série de documents, il est essentiel que vous configuriez la structure des documents sur le lecteur de disque ou sur le volume du serveur réseau et que vous vérifiiez les noms de fichiers multiplates-formes. Les noms de fichiers risquent d'être tronqués et difficilement récupérables lors d'une recherche multiplate-forme. Pour éviter ce problème, tenez compte des recommandations suivantes : • Renommez les fichiers, les dossiers et les index conformément à la convention de dénomination de fichiers MSDOS (huit caractères ou moins suivis d'une extension de trois caractères) et ce, tout particulièrement si vous projetez de diffuser la série de documents et l'index sur un disque CD-ROM formaté ISO 9660. • Supprimez des noms de fichiers et de dossiers les caractères étendus, tels que les caractères accentués et non anglais. (La police utilisée par la fonction Catalog ne prend pas en charge les codes de caractères compris entre 133 et 159.) • Abstenez-vous d'imbriquer trop profondément les dossiers ou d'utiliser des noms de chemins dépassant 256 caractères pour les index qui seront utilisés sous Mac OS. • Si vous utilisez Mac OS avec un serveur de réseau local (LAN) OS/2, configurez IBM® LAN Server Macintosh (LSM) de manière à appliquer les conventions de dénomination de fichiers MS-DOS ou indexez seulement les volumes FAT (File Allocation Table). (Les volumes HPFS (High Performance File System) peuvent contenir des noms de fichiers irrécupérables.) Si la structure du document comprend des sous-dossiers à ne pas indexer, vous pouvez exclure ces derniers au cours de l'indexation. Ajout de métadonnées aux propriétés du document Pour faciliter la recherche dans un fichier PDF, vous pouvez insérer des informations sur le fichier dans les propriétés du document (informations appelées métadonnées). (Pour afficher les propriétés du fichier PDF actif, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Description.) (Windows) Vous avez également la possibilité de saisir et de lire ces informations depuis le bureau. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le document dans l'Explorateur Windows, choisissez Propriétés et cliquez sur l'onglet PDF. Toutes les informations que vous saisissez ou que vous modifiez dans cette boîte de dialogue figurent également dans le panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document lorsque vous ouvrez le fichier. Lorsque vous complétez les propriétés du document, tenez compte des recommandations suivantes : • Choisissez un titre représentatif. Le nom de fichier du document devrait figurer dans la boîte de dialogue des résultats de la recherche. • Utilisez toujours la même option (champ) pour les informations similaires. Par exemple, ne choisissez pas le champ Sujet afin d’ajouter un terme important pour certains documents et le champ Mots-clés pour d’autres. • Utilisez systématiquement le même terme pour désigner une information donnée. Par exemple, n’utilisez pas biologie pour certains documents et sciences de la vie pour d’autres. • Utilisez le champ Auteur pour identifier le groupe responsable du document. Par exemple, l'auteur d'un document relatif au recrutement du personnel pourrait être le service des ressources humaines.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 397 Recherche et indexation • Si vous identifiez vos documents par des numéros de référence, ajoutez-les dans l'option Mots-clés. Par exemple, l'ajout de doc#=m234 à l’option Mots-clés référence un document spécifique dans une série de plusieurs centaines de documents relatifs à un sujet particulier. • Pour classer les documents par type, utilisez l'option Sujet ou Mots-clés. Par exemple, indiquez rapport comme sujet et mensuel ou hebdomadaire comme mot-clé d'un document. Si vous êtes expérimenté dans l'utilisation du format Adobe PDF, vous pouvez définir des champs de données personnalisés (tels que Type de document, Numéro du document et Identifiant du document) lors de la création de l'index. Cette méthode s'adresse uniquement aux utilisateurs chevronnés et n'est pas traitée dans l'aide complète d'Acrobat. Création d'un index pour une série de documents Lorsque vous constituez un nouvel index, Acrobat crée un fichier doté de l'extension .pdx et un nouveau dossier de support, lequel contient un ou plusieurs fichiers dotés de l'extension .idx. Les fichiers IDX contiennent les entrées d'index. Ces fichiers doivent tous être accessibles pour les utilisateurs souhaitant parcourir l'index. Boîtes de dialogue relatives à la création d'index 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Index de texte intégral avec Catalog, puis cliquez sur Nouvel index. 2 Dans le champ Titre, indiquez le nom du fichier index. 3 Dans la zone Description, saisissez quelques mots concernant le type ou la fonction de l'index. 4 Choisissez Options, sélectionnez les options avancées à appliquer à l'index, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Sous Dossiers à inclure, cliquez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez un dossier contenant une partie ou la totalité des fichiers PDF à indexer, puis choisissez OK. Pour ajouter d'autres dossiers, recommencez cette étape. Remarque : Tout dossier imbriqué sous un dossier inclus dans l'opération d'indexation est également compris dans la procédure. Vous pouvez ajouter des dossiers situés sur différents serveurs ou lecteurs de disque, à condition que vous ne projetiez pas de déplacer l'index ou tout élément contenu dans la série de documents. 6 Sous Dossiers à exclure, cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sélectionnez tout dossier imbriqué contenant des fichiers PDF à ne pas indexer. Cliquez sur OK et, le cas échéant, recommencez cette étape. 7 Vérifiez les sélections effectuées. Pour apporter des changements aux listes de dossiers à inclure ou à exclure, sélectionnez le dossier à modifier et cliquez sur Supprimer. 8 Cliquez sur Constituer, puis spécifiez l'emplacement du fichier index. Cliquez sur Enregistrer, puis : • Cliquez sur Fermer une fois l'indexation terminée. • Cliquez sur Arrêter pour annuler la procédure d'indexation. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 398 Recherche et indexation Remarque : Si vous arrêtez l'opération, vous ne pouvez pas reprendre la même session d'indexation, mais vous n'avez pas besoin de recommencer à zéro. En effet, les options et les sélections restent intactes. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Ouvrir un index, sélectionnez l'index partiellement créé et en vérifier le contenu. Si les noms de chemins longs sont tronqués dans les zones Dossiers à inclure et Dossiers à exclure, maintenez le pointeur enfoncé sur les points de suspension (...) jusqu'à ce qu'une info-bulle affiche le chemin d'accès complet. Voir aussi « Catalog, préférences » à la page 399 Boîte de dialogue des options d'indexation Exclure les nombres Cochez cette case si vous souhaitez exclure de l’index tous les nombres figurant dans le texte du document. L'exclusion de nombres peut réduire considérablement la taille d'un index, accélérant les recherches. Ajouter un identifiant aux fichiers Adobe PDF créés dans Acrobat 1.0 Cochez cette option si la série de documents comprend des fichiers PDF créés avant Acrobat 2.0, lesquels n'ajoutent pas automatiquement des numéros d'identification. Ces identifiants sont nécessaires lorsque les noms de fichiers Mac OS longs sont raccourcis lors de leur conversion en noms de fichiers MS-DOS. Les versions 2.0 et ultérieures d'Acrobat ajoutent automatiquement des identifiants. Ne pas signaler les documents modifiés lors des recherches Lorsque cette option n'est pas activée, un message s'affiche pendant la recherche dans les documents modifiés depuis la dernière constitution de l'index. Propriétés personnalisées Utilisez cette option pour inclure les propriétés de document personnalisées dans l'index. Seules les propriétés de document personnalisées qui se trouvent déjà dans les documents PDF inclus dans l'index sont indexées. Indiquez la propriété, sélectionnez un élément dans le menu Type, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Ces propriétés s'affichent comme option de recherche dans les menus déroulants de critères supplémentaires de la fenêtre Recherche avancée lorsque vous effectuez une recherche dans l'index résultant. Si, par exemple, vous saisissez la propriété personnalisée Nom du document et choisissez la propriété Chaîne dans le menu Type, un utilisateur parcourant l'index peut ensuite effectuer la recherche dans la propriété personnalisée en sélectionnant Nom du document dans le menu Critères supplémentaires. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez des champs personnalisés dans une application Microsoft Office dont l'option Convertir les informations sur le document est activée dans l'application PDFMaker, les champs sont conservés dans tout fichier Adobe PDF que vous créez par la suite. Champs XMP Utilisez cette option pour inclure des champs XMP personnalisés. Les champs XMP personnalisés sont indexés et s'affichent dans les menus de critères supplémentaires. Ils font partie des éléments dans lesquels la recherche s'effectue. Mots éliminés Permet d'exclure des mots spécifiques (500 au maximum) des résultats de la recherche dans l'index. Saisissez le mot, cliquez sur Ajouter et recommencez l'étape le cas échéant. L’exclusion de mots de l’index permet de réduire la taille de l’index, de l’ordre de 10 à 15 %. Les mots éliminés de l'indexation ne doivent pas dépasser 128 caractères et respectent la casse. Remarque : Pour empêcher les utilisateurs de tenter de rechercher des expressions contenant ces mots, dressez la liste des mots qui ne sont pas indexés dans le fichier Lisezmoi ou Ouvrez-moi de Catalog. Balises structurelles Ce bouton permet de rendre disponibles pour la recherche des noeuds de balises élément contenus dans des documents dotés d'une structure logique balisée. Remarque : Les options Propriétés personnalisées, Mots éliminés et Balises s'appliquent uniquement à l'index actif. Pour appliquer ces paramètres de manière globale à tout index créé, modifiez les paramètres par défaut des champs personnalisés, des mots éliminés de l'indexation et des balises dans le panneau Catalog de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 399 Recherche et indexation Fichiers Lisezmoi ou Ouvrez-moi de Catalog Il est souvent judicieux de créer un fichier Lisezmoi ou Ouvrez-moi distinct que vous incluez dans le dossier avec l'index. Ce fichier peut fournir aux lecteurs des détails sur votre index, par exemple : • Type de documents indexés • Options de recherche prises en charge • Personne à contacter ou un numéro de téléphone à appeler en cas de questions • Liste des nombres ou termes exclus de l'indexation • Liste des dossiers contenant les documents inclus dans un index de réseau local ou la liste des documents inclus dans un index pour disque. Vous pouvez également inclure une brève description du contenu de chaque dossier ou document. • Liste des valeurs associées à chaque document si vous attribuez des valeurs de champs dans les informations sur le document. Si un catalogue contient un nombre particulièrement important de documents, envisagez d'inclure un tableau indiquant les valeurs attribuées à chaque document. Ce tableau peut faire partie de votre fichier Lisezmoi ou Ouvrez-moi, ou faire l'objet d'un document distinct. Lors de la mise en place de l'index, consultez ce tableau afin de conserver une certaine cohérence entre les documents. Vérification d'un index Vous pouvez mettre à jour, reconstituer ou vider un index existant. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Index de texte intégral avec Catalog, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir un index. 2 Localisez et sélectionnez le fichier de définition d'index (fichier PDX) correspondant à l'index, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Si l’index a été créé dans Acrobat 5.0 ou version antérieure, cliquez sur Créer une copie pour définir un nouvel index (sans écraser l'ancienne version) ou sur Ecraser l'ancien index pour écraser l'index précédent. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définition de l’index, apportez les modifications voulues, puis sélectionnez la fonction qu'Acrobat doit effectuer : Constituer... Crée un nouveau fichier IDX contenant les informations existantes et les met à jour en ajoutant des entrées et en signalant les entrées modifiées ou obsolètes comme incorrectes. Si vous apportez de nombreuses modifications ou utilisez plusieurs fois cette option au lieu de créer un nouvel index, la durée des opérations de recherche peut augmenter. Reconstituer Crée un nouvel index, écrasant le dossier d'index existant et son contenu (les fichiers IDX). Vider Supprime le contenu de l'index (les fichiers IDX) sans supprimer le fichier index lui-même (PDX). Catalog, préférences Vous pouvez configurer les préférences d'indexation s'appliquant de manière globale à tous vos futurs index. Vous avez la possibilité d'annuler ces préférences pour un index particulier en sélectionnant d'autres options lors de la constitution de l'index. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Catalog. La plupart des options sont identiques à celles décrites dans la procédure de constitution d'index.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 400 Recherche et indexation L'option Appliquer la norme ISO 9660 aux dossiers s’avère utile pour éviter de remplacer des noms de fichiers PDF longs par des noms de fichiers MS-DOS lors de la préparation des documents pour l’indexation. Cependant, vous devez toujours appliquer les conventions de dénomination de fichiers MS-DOS aux noms de dossiers (8 caractères au maximum), même si cela est inutile pour les noms de fichiers. Mises à jour d'index planifiées Il est possible de planifier le moment et la fréquence de la constitution, la reconstitution, la mise à jour et le vidage automatiques d'un index à l'aide de la fonction Catalog et d'un fichier PDX de lot Catalog (.bpdx). Un fichier BPDX est un fichier texte contenant une liste de chemins d'accès aux fichiers index Catalog en fonction de la plate-forme et les indicateurs associés. Vous pouvez utiliser une application de planification (le Planificateur de tâches pour Windows, par exemple) afin d'afficher le fichier BPDX dans Acrobat. Acrobat régénère alors l'index en fonction des indicateurs contenus dans le fichier BPDX. Pour plus de détails sur la planification d'une mise à jour d'index, recherchez BPDX sur la page www.adobe.com/go/support_fr. Remarque : Pour utiliser des fichiers BPDX, dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catalog, activez l'option Autoriser l'exécution de fichiers de lot Catalog (.bpdx). Déplacement de séries de documents et des index associés Vous pouvez ouvrir et tester une série de documents indexés sur un lecteur de disque local, puis la placer sur un serveur réseau ou sur un disque. Une définition d'index contient des chemins relatifs entre le fichier de définition de l'index (PDX) et les dossiers contenant les documents indexés. Si ces chemins relatifs restent inchangés, il est inutile de reconstituer l’index après le déplacement de la série de documents indexée. Si le fichier PDX et les dossiers contenant les documents indexés se trouvent dans le même dossier, il vous suffit de déplacer le dossier pour conserver le même chemin relatif. Si le chemin d'accès relatif change, vous devez créer un nouvel index après avoir déplacé la série de documents indexés. Vous pouvez toutefois continuer à utiliser le fichier PDF d'origine. Pour cela, vous devez d'abord déplacer les documents indexés, puis copier le fichier PDX dans le dossier dans lequel vous voulez créer l'index. Le cas échéant, modifiez les listes de répertoires et de sous-répertoires dans les zones Dossiers à inclure et Dossiers à exclure. Si l'index ne se trouve pas sur le même lecteur ou sur le même volume de serveur que n'importe lequel des documents de la série à laquelle il est associé, vous romprez l'index en déplaçant les documents ou l'index. Si vous projetez de déplacer une série de documents vers un autre lecteur du serveur ou sur un CD-ROM, créez et constituez l'index à l'emplacement où se trouvent les documents.401 Chapitre 13 : Multimédia et modèles 3D Les possibilités offertes par les documents Adobe PDF s'étendent à la richesse des communications multimédia. Les documents PDF peuvent comprendre des clips vidéo, du son numérisé, des contenus interactifs et des modèles 3D que les lecteurs ont la possibilité de déplacer, de faire pivoter, d'agrandir et d'examiner un par un. Multimédia et fichiers PDF Lecture de fichiers multimédia Les documents PDF peuvent inclure de nombreux types de fichiers multimédia, notamment (mais non exclusivement) des fichiers Flash®, QuickTime, mp3, MPEG et Windows® Media. Vous pouvez lire ces fichiers sur une page ou les activer à partir d'un lien, d'un signet, d'un champ de formulaire ou d'une action de page. Chaque fichier multimédia comprend une zone de lecture à partir de laquelle le support peut être activé. La zone de lecture figure généralement sur la page PDF sous forme d'image ou de rectangle, mais elle peut très bien être invisible aussi. Ces fichiers sont lisibles sur tout ordinateur équipé d'Adobe Reader®. • Fichiers multimédia créés dans Flash (format FLV) • Fichiers multimédia conformes à la norme de compression vidéo H.264 Les fichiers multimédia enregistrés sous d'autres formats nécessitent des composants matériels et logiciels spécifiques. Pour protéger votre ordinateur contre les virus, Acrobat vous invite à confirmer la lecture des fichiers multimédia issus de sources non vérifiées. Vous pouvez modifier ce comportement par défaut à partir des préférences de fiabilité des contenus multimédia. ? A l'aide de l'outil Main ou de l'outil de sélection, cliquez dans la zone de lecture du fichier vidéo ou du fichier son. Lorsque le pointeur se trouve sur la zone de lecture, il prend la forme de l'icône de mode de lecture . Préférences multimédia Deux types de fichiers PDF vous obligent à définir des préférences multimédia : • Les fichiers PDF créés dans Acrobat version 8 ou antérieure • Les fichiers PDF créés dans Acrobat version 9 ou ultérieure et dans lesquels des fichiers multimédia ont été ajoutés par la méthode d'importation par héritage Ces fichiers vous obligent à identifier un lecteur supplémentaire qui servira à la lecture du contenu multimédia. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Multimédia (existant) dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Options du lecteur Choisissez le format d'exécution des contenus multimédia existants : QuickTime, Flash, Windows Media ou le lecteur intégré de Windows. Options d'accessibilité Indiquez les fonctions spéciales (le cas échéant) à exécuter pendant la lecture du contenu multimédia comme, par exemple, les sous-titres et le doublage audio. Spécifiez la langue favorite à sélectionner sur le support lorsque le contenu est disponible en plusieurs versions linguistiques.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 402 Multimédia et modèles 3D Préférences de fiabilité des contenus multimédia La lecture des fichiers multimédia placés dans les documents PDF requiert parfois des ressources complémentaires. Par exemple, certains fichiers font appel à des ressources sur Internet, tel un lecteur multimédia. Les paramètres d'approbation vous permettent de définir si les contenus multimédia sont autorisés à utiliser des ressources externes. • Pour définir des paramètres d'approbation concernant la lecture du contenu créé avec Acrobat 9, utilisez les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. • Pour définir des paramètres de lecture du contenu créé dans des versions antérieures d'Acrobat, utilisez les préférences Fiabilité multimédia (existant). Tous ces paramètres sont accessibles à partir de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Voir aussi « Mesures de protection relatives aux URL et pièces jointes dans des documents PDF » à la page 250 Fiabilité multimédia (existant) Les préférences de fiabilité multimédia vous permettent de configurer la lecture des fichiers multimédia incorporés dans les documents PDF approuvés ou non. Un document est approuvé par vous-même ou un auteur en qui vous avez confiance. En configurant les droits de manière à lire exclusivement le contenu multimédia de documents approuvés, vous protégez votre ordinateur contre les dégâts que pourraient causer des programmes, des macros et des virus. La liste des auteurs et documents approuvés est stockée en interne et n'est pas visualisable. Si vous ajoutez un document certifié à la liste, le document et le certificat de son auteur sont tous deux ajoutés à la liste des documents approuvés. Tous les documents certifiés par cet auteur sont approuvés. (Les documents approuvés comprennent également les fichiers PDF créés par des personnes figurant dans la liste des identités approuvées.) Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Fiabilité multimédia (existant) sous Catégories. Afficher les droits pour Indiquez si vous souhaitez définir des droits pour les documents approuvés ou non. Autoriser les opérations multimédia Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser la lecture des clips multimédia. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de droits d'un lecteur spécifique et activer les options déterminant l'aspect du support pendant la lecture. Redéfinir les droits pour le lecteur multimédia sélectionné sur Sélectionnez un lecteur dans la liste, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes dans le menu : • Toujours Autorise le lecteur sans demander confirmation. • Jamais Interdit l'utilisation du lecteur. • Invite Demande à l'utilisateur de confirmer l'utilisation du lecteur. Si vous sélectionnez cette option et autorisez le lecteur à exécuter le support contenu dans un document spécifique, ce dernier devient alors un document approuvé. Options Autoriser la lecture Trois options de lecture vous permettent de définir le mode d'affichage de la vidéo. • Autoriser la lecture dans les fenêtres flottantes exemptes de barres de titre Sélectionnez cette option pour lire la vidéo sans barre de titre. Dans ce cas, la fenêtre de lecture n'affiche aucun titre ni aucun bouton de fermeture. • Autoriser la définition du texte de titre dans une fenêtre de lecture flottante Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher une barre de titre en cas de lecture de la vidéo dans une fenêtre flottante. Pour modifier le texte de la barre de titre, cliquez deux fois sur la vidéo avec l'outil Objet (Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet). Sélectionnez Modifier le rendu, puis, dans le panneau Emplacement de lecture, sélectionnez Afficher la barre de titre. Ajoutez le texte du titre dans la zone prévue à cet effet.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 403 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Autoriser la lecture en plein écran Cette option permet d'activer automatiquement le mode plein écran lorsque la vidéo est lue. Ce mode peut provoquer des conflits avec les paramètres de sécurité de l'utilisateur final. Effacer la liste des documents approuvés Supprime la liste actuelle des documents et auteurs approuvés. Cette option permet d'interdire la lecture de supports contenus dans des documents faisant auparavant partie des documents approuvés ou ayant été créés par des auteurs approuvés. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque le document PDF contenant un support multimédia est ouvert. Ajout d'un fichier multimédia à un document PDF L'ajout de séquences vidéo ou audio et de contenus interactifs à un fichier PDF permet d'en faire un véritable outil de communication multidimensionnel et d'accroître l'attractivité de vos documents. Tout contenu multimédia développé dans Flash® ou conforme à la norme H.264 peut être lu dans Adobe Reader® version 9 ou ultérieure. (La norme H.264, également appelée MPEG-4 section 10 est une norme de compression vidéo qui produit des séquences de grande qualité sans accroître outre mesure la taille des fichiers.) De nombreux formats et extensions de fichiers permettent de produire des fichiers vidéo conformes à H.264. Les fichiers multimédia utilisant un autre format peuvent être lus dans les versions antérieures d'Adobe Reader. Toutefois, il est impératif d'installer l'application appropriée (par exemple QuickTime ou Windows Media Player) pour lire ces fichiers.. Il est également possible d'ajouter un contenu multimédia en insérant une URL faisant référence à un fichier vidéo ou multimédia. Trois types d'URL sont utilisables : RTMP, HTTP et HTTPS. Les serveurs FMS (Flash Media Server) utilisent le protocole RTMP pour l'hébergement des fichiers FLV ou fichiers multimédia conformes à la norme H.264. Les serveurs HTTP et HTTPS prennent en charge les fichiers FLV et les fichiers MOV et MP4 compatibles H.264. Le contenu interactif développé dans Flash et produit au format SWF (.swf) peut être ajouté aux fichiers PDF afin d'offrir des outils textuels gratuits. Quelques exemples d'applications développées dans Flash : lecteur de flux RSS, calculatrice ou cartes en ligne. Pour plus de détails sur les applications interactives téléchargeables depuis le site d'Adobe, voir www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_interactive_fr. Pour plus d'informations sur l'ajout d'éléments multimédia à des fichiers PDF, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Vidéo sur l'ajout d'éléments multimédia :www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4201_a9_fr • Forums de la communauté d'utilisateurs Acrobat : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Articles, conseils et exemples :blogs.adobe.com/pdfdevjunkie/ • Documents PDF multimédia : www.createmagazine.com/file/pic/articles/pdfs/38.pdf • Création de vidéos dans Acrobat 9 :http://www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr • Ajout de films PDF aux leçons : steveadler.net/AcroCast/AcroCast.html • Ajout d'un fichier multimédia à un document PDF accessible : www.accessiblecontent.com/online/v1n2/index.php?view=multimedia Remarque : Les fichiers vidéo FLV et les fichiers MOV et MP4 compatibles H.264 sont pris en charge par Flash Media Server version 3.0.1. Les versions antérieures prennent uniquement en charge les fichiers FLV. Voir aussi « Affichage d'un document PDF en mode plein écran » à la page 38 « A propos des actions » à la page 349UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 404 Multimédia et modèles 3D Insertion d'un fichier multimédia dans un document PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Outils > Multimédia, puis sélectionnez l'outil Vidéo , Son ou Flash . 3 Faites glisser le curseur ou cliquez deux fois pour sélectionner sur la page la zone d'affichage de la vidéo ou du son. Si vous cliquez deux fois sur la page, Acrobat place le coin supérieur gauche de la vidéo à l'endroit où vous avez cliqué. Si vous tracez une zone sur la page en cliquant puis en faisant glisser la souris, le fichier multimédia est placé dans cette zone. La taille de la zone de lecture de la vidéo est identique à la taille de l'image vidéo (si Acrobat est en mesure de lire les dimensions du clip). 4 Ajoutez un URL dans le champ Nom ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le fichier multimédia, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Utilisez l'adresse complète du fichier vidéo, y compris son extension, par exemple .flv ou .mp4. 5 Le cas échéant, modifiez le fichier multimédia à l'aide des options de la boîte de dialogue d'insertion, puis cliquez sur OK. Certaines options seront indisponibles en fonction du type de fichier multimédia. Conserver le codage H.264 d'origine Si le fichier est conforme à la norme H.264, cette option est automatiquement sélectionnée. Désactivez cette option pour accéder à des options spécifiques uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers FLV. Vous pouvez également le faire si vous souhaitez créer un fichier de taille réduite à envoyer par courrier électronique. Accrocher aux proportions du contenu Garantit que la zone de lecture conserve le rapport hauteur/largeur de la vidéo ou du contenu interactif d'origine. Aperçu et rognage Pour réduire la taille de la vidéo ou supprimer des images superflues, faites glisser les curseurs de début et de fin jusqu'à l'endroit désiré. Définir l'affiche à partir de l'image active Pour les fichiers vidéo, l'affiche est affichée lorsque la vidéo n'est pas en cours de lecture. Déplacez le marqueur situé au-dessus de la barre du curseur jusqu'à l'image à utiliser, puis cliquez sur Définir l'affiche à partir de l'image active. Options avancées Ouvre une boîte de dialogue proposant des paramètres supplémentaires, telles que la qualité vidéo, les commandes de lecture ou les options d'affichage. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du format du fichier multimédia que vous insérez et de la version d'Acrobat utilisée (Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended). Créer un contenu multimédia existant Ouvre une boîte de dialogue permettant de définir un fichier multimédia compatible avec les versions précedents d'Acrobat. Les contenus multimédia existants peuvent être plus volumineux que les fichiers convertis et leur affichage requiert l'utilisation de lecteurs supplémentaires. Adobe recommande de convertir les fichiers vidéo et audio de manière qu'ils soient lisibles sur toutes les plates-formes sans utiliser de lecteur multimédia supplémentaire. Les contenus multimédia convertis sont lisibles dans Adobe Reader 9 ou Acrobat 9 uniquement. Si l'utilisateur tente de lire un contenu multimédia converti dans une version antérieure d'Adobe Reader ou d'Acrobat, il est invité à mettre à niveau son application à la version 9. Pour insérer des fichiers développés dans Flash, suivez les instructions ci-après qui décrivent l'ajout de fichiers multimédia existants ou autre à un document PDF. Faites de même pour ajouter des fichiers non conformes à la norme H.264.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 405 Multimédia et modèles 3D Insertion de fichiers multimédia existants et autres dans un fichier PDF Cette procédure s'applique aux fichiers multimédia autres que les fichiers FLV ou SWF et non conformes à la norme H.264. 1 Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 de la section Insertion d'un fichier multimédia dans un document PDF. 2 Dans le coin inférieur droit de la boîte de dialogue Insérer une vidéo, cliquez sur Créer un contenu multimédia existant. 3 Sélectionnez la version d'Acrobat ou de Reader avec laquelle le contenu multimedia doit être compatible. Support compatible avec Acrobat 6.0 (et versions ultérieures) Permet d'accéder à toutes les options, mais l'utilisateur doit disposer de la version 6 ou ultérieure d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader pour lire le clip. Si vous sélectionnez Support compatible avec Acrobat 6.0 (et versions ultérieures), vous disposez de bien plus d'options, notamment la possibilité d'incorporer la vidéo et d'ajouter plusieurs rendus. Toutefois, les utilisateurs possédant une version antérieure d'Acrobat seront tenus de télécharger Adobe Reader pour lire votre clip. Support compatible avec Acrobat 5.0 (et versions antérieures) Garantit que le clip est disponible pour les utilisateurs Acrobat ou Adobe Reader version 5 ou antérieure. Cette option nécessite la sélection d'un support compatible avec le lecteur QuickTime. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Support compatible avec Acrobat 6.0 (et versions ultérieures), insérez le clip dans le fichier PDF en choisissant Incorporer le contenu dans le document. Cette option accroît la taille du fichier PDF. 5 Pour afficher une image dans la zone de lecture lorsque le fichier vidéo ou son n'est pas en cours de lecture, sélectionnez une option d'affiche, puis cliquez sur OK. Une fois la vidéo insérée dans le document PDF, vous pouvez configurer des propriétés supplémentaires définissant les modes d'affichage et de lecture du clip. Remarque : Si un message vous informe qu’aucun gestionnaire multimédia n'est disponible, installez le lecteur approprié avant d'ajouter des clips au document PDF. Par exemple, installez QuickTime si vous souhaitez incorporer un fichier MOV dans le document PDF. Options multimédia avancées Pour afficher les options multimédia avancées lors de l'insertion d'une vidéo, d'un fichier son ou d'un contenu interactif, cliquez sur Afficher les options avancées dans la boîte de dialogue d'insertion. Ces options sont également modifiables après l'insertion du contenu multimédia dans le fichier PDF. Cliquez deux fois sur le fichier multimédia avec l'outil Objet (Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet). Remarque : Les paramètres de qualité vidéo et son peuvent uniquement être modifiés au moment de l'insertion d'un fichier multimédia dans un document PDF. Ces fonctions sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers FLV et SWF. Acrobat Professional Extended vous permet de convertir des fichiers dans ces formats. La boîte de dialogue propose des options différentes selon le format du fichier. Panneau Flash S'affiche lorsque vous insérez des fichiers SWF. • FlashVars Les développeurs Flash peuvent utiliser le champ FlashVars pour ajouter des variables ActionScript™ au fichier sélectionné. • Passer le clic sur le menu contextuel à l'animation Flash Les développeurs de fichiers SWF peuvent sélectionner cette option pour remplacer le menu contextuel d'Acrobat par celui du fichier SWF d'origine. Lorsque l'utilisateur clique sur le fichier SWF avec le bouton droit de la souris, les options proposées sont celles du fichier d'origine.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 406 Multimédia et modèles 3D Panneau Paramètres de lancement Ces paramètres permettent de déterminer le mode de lancement et d'arrêt du contenu multimédia, son emplacement et l'élément affiché lorsque le contenu n'est pas en cours de lecture. • Paramètres d'activation Sélectionnez les options pour déterminer à quel moment la lecture du contenu multimédia débute et s'arrête. Dans le menu Style de lecture, sélectionnez Lecture du contenu dans une fenêtre flottante pour que le fichier vidéo ou le contenu interactif soit lu en dehors de la page. Cette option permet aux utilisateurs de lire la page et de visualiser la vidéo ou l'application en même temps. • Largeur du contour Crée une bordure noire autour de la vidéo ou du contenu interactif. Pour un fichier son, la bordure encadre l'affiche. • Affiche Pour utiliser une image qui ne provient pas du fichier que vous ajoutez, sélectionnez Créer l'affiche à partir d'un fichier. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser l'image que vous souhaitez afficher lorsque la vidéo, le fichier son ou le contenu interactif n'est pas en cours de lecture. Panneau Ressources Ce panneau permet de répertorier tous les fichiers nécessaires à la lecture d'un fichier SWF. Vous avez la possibilité de cliquer sur un fichier de cette liste pour définir les propriétés du fichier. • Propriétés Lorsque vous cliquez sur le nom d'un fichier dans la liste Ressources, le nom de fichier et le chemin d'accès s'affichent dans le champ Nom. Vous pouvez renommer les ressources afin de garantir l'exécution correcte des scripts. Panneau Commandes Permet de définir les commandes de lecture (habillages) disponibles. • Habillage Sélectionnez le jeu de commandes de lecture (habillages) que vous souhaitez afficher sur la vidéo. • Couleur Cliquez pour ouvrir la palette et choisir la couleur des commandes. • Opacité Définissez le degré de transparence des commandes de lecture. • Masquer automatiquement les commandes Sélectionnée, cette option masque les commandes de lecture lorsque le pointeur de la souris ne se trouve pas sur le contenu multimédia. Panneau Vidéo Disponible lorsque vous ajoutez une vidéo qui n'est pas au format FLV. • Aperçu et rognage Faites glisser les marqueurs de début et de fin sous la barre du curseur afin de supprimer les images superflues du clip. Cette option est uniquement disponible une fois que le clip vidéo est inséré dans le fichier PDF. • Définir l'affiche à partir de l'image active L'affiche est présentée à l'utilisateur lorsque la vidéo n'est pas en cours de lecture. Faites glisser le marqueur situé au-dessus de la barre du curseur jusqu'à l'image à utiliser, puis cliquez sur Définir l'affiche à partir de l'image active. • Points de chapitre Utilisez cette option pour créer des marqueurs dans la vidéo à partir desquels une action particulière est lancée. Dans une vidéo de formation, par exemple, les points de chapitre peuvent mener à des informations complémentaires situées dans un fichier ou sur le Web. Pour créer un point de chapitre, déplacez le curseur jusqu'à l'image à utiliser. Dans la zone Points de chapitre, cliquez sur le signe Plus. Pour ajouter une action, mettez le point de chapitre en surbrillance dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Actions. Remarque : En règle générale, l'ajout d'actions de point de chapitre ne peut se faire qu'après création du contenu multimédia. Vous pouvez alors modifier la zone de lecture et ajouter de telles actions. Modification de la zone de lecture 1 Sélectionnez un outil selon l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Sélectionnez l'outil Vidéo, Son ou Flash dans la barre d'outils multimédia. • Choisissez Outils > Multimédia, puis choisissez l'outil approprié.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 407 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet . Lorsque vous déplacez ces outils sur la zone de lecture, des poignées se matérialisent sur les bordures de la zone de lecture, même lorsque les bordures sont invisibles. 2 Cliquez sur la zone de lecture pour la sélectionner, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Déplacez le clip en faisant glisser son icône vers un nouvel emplacement sur la page. • Supprimez la séquence en la sélectionnant et en appuyant sur Suppr. • Redimensionnez le clip en faisant glisser l'un des coins du cadre jusqu'à obtention de la taille voulue. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée afin de conserver les bonnes proportions des clips vidéo. Ajout de commentaires à une vidéo Lorsque vous visualisez une vidéo, vous pouvez ajouter des commentaires à chaque image. Chacun de ces commentaires est joint à une image précise. Ainsi, lorsque vous consultez les commentaires, ils apparaissent en contexte. 1 Alors que la vidéo est ouverte, choisissez Commentaires > Afficher la barre d'outils Commentaires et Annotations. 2 Lancez la vidéo et cliquez sur Pause lorsque vous voulez ajouter un commentaire. 3 Sélectionnez l'outil de commentaire qui vous intéresse dans la barre d'outils, puis cliquez sur l'image de la vidéo pour insérer le commentaire. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton de lecture pour poursuivre la vidéo. Pour consulter les commentaires ajoutés, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires du navigateur. Voir aussi « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 177 « Affichage des commentaires » à la page 191 Création d'un rendu de remplacement Le contenu multimédia développé dans Flash peut être lu sur tout ordinateur équipé d'Adobe Reader 9. Dans le cas de contenu multimédia enregistrés sous d'autres formats de fichier, créez des rendus de remplacement ou ajoutez des rendus supplémentaires afin de vous assurer que tous les utilisateurs pourront lire le clip vidéo sur leur système. Par exemple, il est possible de créer différents rendus pour un contenu multimédia inséré par le biais de l'option Créer un contenu multimédia existant de la boîte de dialogue Insérer une vidéo. Définissez un rendu produisant un fichier vidéo de bonne qualité et donc volumineux, puis un rendu de moindre qualité, mais plus léger, pour les systèmes plus lents. Spécifiez les paramètres système nécessaires à la lecture de chaque rendu. Les utilisateurs peuvent alors sélectionner ceux qui correspondent le mieux à leur système. Par défaut, les rendus sont associés à l'action Souris relâchée. Lorsque l'utilisateur clique, la lecture du rendu commence dans Acrobat. Vous pouvez attribuer des rendus différents selon l'action déclenchée bien que, dans la plupart des cas, l'action Souris relâchée soit préférable. 1 Activez l'outil Son ou l'outil Vidéo , puis cliquez deux fois sur la zone de lecture. 2 Activez l’onglet Paramètres, cliquez sur Ajouter un rendu, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : A partir d'un fichier Cliquez deux fois sur le fichier que vous souhaitez ajouter à la liste des rendus. Par exemple, ajoutez une version basse résolution du clip vidéo, qui présentera le même contenu que le premier rendu. Le type de contenu est sélectionné automatiquement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 408 Multimédia et modèles 3D A partir d'un URL Saisissez l'URL, puis indiquez le type de contenu. En copiant un rendu existant Sélectionnez le rendu à copier. 3 Sélectionnez le rendu, puis cliquez sur Modifier le rendu. Spécifiez la configuration minimale requise pour le système, la lecture et les autres paramètres afin de différencier ce rendu des autres. 4 Ajoutez et modifiez autant de rendus que nécessaire. 5 Utilisez les touches fléchées situées à droite du menu déroulant pour classer les rendus dans l'ordre approprié. Les rendus sont lus dans l'ordre affiché, sous réserve de répondre aux conditions que vous avez définies. 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé d'ajouter et de modifier les rendus, cliquez sur Fermer. Paramètres de rendu La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de rendu s'affiche à l'écran lorsque vous cliquez sur Modifier le rendu dans le panneau Paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés multimédia. Remarque : Les lecteurs multimédia disposent de fonctionnalités différentes. Certains paramètres de rendu, tels que les boutons du lecteur, ne sont pas toujours disponibles. Dans ce cas, vous pouvez décider si le lecteur peut exécuter le rendu en modifiant la configuration requise dans le panneau Config. lecture. Paramètres multimédia Ce panneau permet de configurer les propriétés générales du clip vidéo : • Nom du rendu Saisissez le nom du rendu, lequel figurera dans la liste des rendus. (Il ne détermine pas le fichier multimédia lu.) • Rendu accessible à JavaScript Utilisez cette option si vous disposez de code JavaScript faisant appel au rendu. • Emplacement du clip multimédia Indiquez le clip en tapant son nom ou en parcourant le système à sa recherche. (Lorsque vous indiquez l'emplacement du clip, le paramètre Type de contenu est défini automatiquement. La modification de ce paramètre peut entraîner des problèmes lors de la lecture du support.) • Texte de remplacement Donnez une description du rendu pouvant être lue à voix haute à l'intention des utilisateurs malvoyants. • Autoriser un fichier temporaire Indiquez si l'écriture d'un fichier temporaire est autorisée et dans quelles conditions. Certains lecteurs multimédia écrivent un fichier temporaire lors de l'exécution d'un clip vidéo. Si vous souhaitez empêcher les utilisateurs de copier facilement le contenu du support d'un document sécurisé, n'autorisez pas UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 409 Multimédia et modèles 3D la création de fichiers temporaires. L'activation de ce paramètre risque néanmoins d'empêcher l'exécution de la vidéo sur des lecteurs multimédia exigeant l'utilisation de ce type de fichier. Paramètres de lecture Ce panneau vous permet de déterminer le mode de lecture du clip vidéo. • Laisser le lecteur ouvert Indiquez le comportement du lecteur après la lecture du clip vidéo (il peut se fermer, rester ouvert indéfiniment ou pendant un laps de temps précis). • Volume Permet de définir le volume sonore de la vidéo. • Afficher les options du lecteur Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option affiche au bas de la zone de lecture une barre de contrôle permettant aux utilisateurs d'arrêter, d'interrompre et de lire le contenu multimédia, à condition que le lecteur du support prenne en charge ces options. • En boucle Permet de lire un clip en boucle plusieurs fois ou en continu. • Liste des lecteurs Cliquez sur Ajouter afin de spécifier un lecteur et les paramètres obligatoires, favoris ou non autorisés pour la lecture du clip vidéo. Sélectionnez le nom, le numéro de version minimal et l'état du lecteur. Si vous définissez l'état de plusieurs lecteurs comme étant obligatoire, le rendu ne pourra être exécuté que par l'un de ces lecteurs obligatoires. Si vous configurez l'état favori pour des lecteurs, ceux-ci seront utilisés en priorité par rapport aux autres (à l'exception des lecteurs obligatoires). Si vous définissez l'état de certains lecteurs comme non autorisé, ces lecteurs ne seront pas utilisés pour exécuter le rendu. Empl. de lecture Ce panneau permet de déterminer si le clip vidéo est exécuté depuis le document PDF, s'il reste masqué pendant la lecture (recommandé dans le cas des clips audio), s'il est exécuté dans une fenêtre flottante ou en mode plein écran. Lorsque l'option Fenêtre flottante est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un titre, définir la position de la fenêtre et laisser l'utilisateur redimensionner ou fermer la fenêtre. Sachez que la configuration des préférences de l'utilisateur est susceptible de nécessiter ou d’annuler l’affichage du texte sur la barre de titre pendant la lecture. La position de la fenêtre est définie par rapport à la fenêtre de document, à la fenêtre d'application ou, dans les configurations à double moniteurs, au bureau virtuel ou principal. Vous pouvez également spécifier la largeur et la hauteur de la fenêtre flottante. Cliquez sur Dimensions du support afin d’obtenir la taille de la vidéo (si disponible), puis modifiez-la le cas échéant. Config. système Ce panneau permet de choisir la configuration minimale des systèmes sur lesquels le clip vidéo sera exécuté. Par exemple, vous pouvez exiger une résolution d'écran de 1 024 x 768 pour lire le clip vidéo. Pour les options telles que Lire le doublage audio, vous avez le choix entre Indifférent, Désactivé et Activé. Si vous sélectionnez Indifférent, vous vous en remettez à la configuration des paramètres du panneau Multimédia de la boîte de dialogue Préférences de l'utilisateur. Si vous sélectionnez l'une des deux autres options, le paramètre correspondant dans les préférences multimédia doit autoriser l'utilisation du rendu. Si, par exemple, l'option Lire le doublage audio est activée, le rendu peut s'utiliser uniquement si l'option Lire le doublage audio lorsque disponible est activée dans les préférences. Config. lecture Ce panneau permet de sélectionner les attributs obligatoires pour exécuter le rendu. Les attributs de ce panneau comprennent des paramètres issus d'autres panneaux vous permettant d'indiquer ceux qui sont obligatoires. Par exemple, si vous définissez le volume sur 50 % dans le panneau Config. lecture et que vous ne souhaitez pas que le rendu soit lu sauf si vous pouvez accéder à ce niveau de volume, vérifiez que la case Obligatoire en regard de Volume est sélectionnée. Configuration des propriétés multimédia pour les contenus multimédia existants Vous pouvez définir les propriétés des fichiers multimédia compatibles avec Acrobat 6.0 et Acrobat 5.0. Par exemple, vous avez la possibilité de spécifier l'aspect de la zone de lecture d'une vidéo et le mode de lecture (unique ou en continu). UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 410 Multimédia et modèles 3D La version de compatibilité choisie détermine les fonctions mises à votre disposition. Par exemple, pour inclure des rendus de remplacement dans un fichier multimédia, choisissez le niveau de compatibilité Acrobat 6.0. Configuration des propriétés des supports compatibles avec Acrobat 6.0 1 Activez l'outil Vidéo , l'outil Son ou l'outil Objet , puis cliquez deux fois sur la zone de lecture. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés multimédia. 3 Indiquez le titre de la vidéo dans la zone Titre de l'annotation. Il ne détermine pas le fichier multimédia lu. 4 Saisissez la description du fichier multimédia dans la zone Texte de remplacement. Cette description peut être lue à voix haute à l'intention des utilisateurs malvoyants. 5 Pour modifier les paramètres multimédia, notamment l’affichage des options du lecteur et le réglage du volume, sélectionnez le rendu du clip multimédia, puis cliquez sur Modifier le rendu. (Pour une description des paramètres de rendu, voir la section « Création d'un rendu de remplacement » à la page 407.) Cliquez sur OK pour revenir à la boîte de dialogue Propriétés multimédia. 6 Pour ajouter des rendus de remplacement, tels que des fichiers de basse résolution, cliquez sur Ajouter un rendu. Indiquez ensuite la source du fichier pour le rendu (à partir d'un fichier, d'un URL ou d'un rendu existant). 7 Cliquez sur l’onglet Aspect, puis sélectionnez les options déterminant l’aspect du contour de la zone de lecture et l'image de l'affiche. 8 Cliquez sur l’onglet Actions afin de définir de nouvelles actions à lier aux divers mouvements de la souris, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Configuration des propriétés des supports compatibles avec Acrobat 5.0 1 Activez l'outil Son ou l'outil Objet , puis cliquez deux fois sur la zone de lecture. 2 Saisissez un nom dans la zone Titre. Par défaut, le nom du fichier multimédia s'affiche comme titre. Si vous avez créé une action renvoyant au titre du support, la modification du nom empêche le fonctionnement normal de l'action. 3 Pour spécifier un autre fichier multimédia sur un lecteur local, sélectionnez Fichier local, puis cliquez sur le bouton de changement d'emplacement. Pour spécifier un autre fichier multimédia situé sur Internet, sélectionnez un URL, puis tapez l'adresse Web dans la zone prévue à cet effet. Cliquez sur Fermer. 4 Activez l'onglet Lecture, puis sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Afficher les options du lecteur Affiche une barre de contrôle au bas de la zone de lecture. Utiliser la fenêtre flottante Lance la lecture du clip multimédia dans une fenêtre distincte. Spécifiez ensuite les dimensions de la fenêtre flottante (à l'aide des facteurs d'échelle) dans le menu Taille. Lecture Détermine l'action de lecture du clip multimédia. 5 Activez l'onglet Aspect, spécifiez l'aspect de la bordure et de l'affiche de la zone de lecture. L'affiche définit l'aspect de la zone de lecture lorsque la vidéo est en cours de lecture. Pour réduire la taille du fichier (et éventuellement la qualité de l'image), sélectionnez 256 couleurs. Cliquez sur Fermer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 411 Multimédia et modèles 3D Ajout d'un modèle 3D à un fichier PDF Ajout de modèle 3D à une page PDF Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil 3D pour placer un fichier 3D (au format U3D édition 3) sur une page PDF. Acrobat Professional permet de créer des fichiers PDF 3D à partir de fichiers ECMA U3D version 1 seulement. Une fois le fichier 3D placé, vous pouvez ajuster la zone de travail dans laquelle le modèle 3D s'affiche, modifier les propriétés de présentation associées à la barre d'outils 3D et à son contenu, et créer des vues supplémentaires. Pour bénéficier de fonctions 3D supplémentaires, comme la possibilité de convertir des fichiers 3D au format PDF ou d'ajouter des scripts JavaScript à des objets 3D, envisagez de mettre à niveau votre version vers Acrobat Professional Extended. Voir aussi « Présentation de la barre d'outils 3D » à la page 414 « Propriétés 3D » à la page 411 Ajout d'un modèle 3D à une page 1 Choisissez Outils > Multimédia > Contenu 3D. 2 Tracez un rectangle sur la page pour définir la zone de travail du fichier 3D. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Insérer un contenu 3D, cliquez sur Sélectionner afin de sélectionner le fichier 3D voulu, puis choisissez Ouvrir. Déplacement, suppression ou redimensionnement de la zone de travail 3D 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet . Remarque : Veillez à ne pas confondre l'outil de sélection Objet avec l'outil de sélection de base. Définissez une zone de travail 3D à l'aide de l'outil Objet. 2 Sélectionnez la zone de travail 3D et effectuez les modifications nécessaires : • Pour déplacer la zone de travail, faites-la glisser ailleurs sur la page. • Pour supprimer la zone de travail (et le modèle 3D), sélectionnez la zone et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. • Pour redimensionner la zone de travail, faites glisser les coins du cadre. Le contenu 3D conserve ses proportions dans le cadre ajusté. Propriétés 3D Pour afficher les propriétés 3D, activez l'outil Objet (Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet) et cliquez deux fois dans un modèle activé. Voir aussi « Définition des vues 3D » à la page 425 « Présentation de la barre d'outils 3D » à la page 414UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 412 Multimédia et modèles 3D Panneau Contenu 3D Les options de l'onglet Contenu 3D détermine le mode de présentation du modèle 3D. Contrairement aux options des autres panneaux, celles figurant ici n'ont aucun impact sur le fichier importé lui-même. Les options du panneau Contenu 3D sont semblables à celles de la barre d'outils 3D, à l'exception des suivantes : Style d'animation Pour les modèles créés avec une animation, ce paramètre détermine le mode d'exécution par défaut de l'animation dans Acrobat. Ajouter des vues par défaut Permet d'utiliser différentes vues du modèle. Une projection orthographique (ortho) supprime réellement une cote, en conservant les proportions entre les objets mais en donnant un aspect moins réaliste au modèle 3D. Une projection orthographique s'avère particulièrement utile pour visualiser certains diagrammes, notamment ceux représentant des fonctions mathématiques en 3D tracées sur un graphe. Une projection en perspective présente une scène plus réaliste dans laquelle les objets situés au loin semblent plus petits que ceux de la même taille placés au premier plan. Afficher la barre d'outils Affiche la barre d'outils 3D avec l'image. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, cliquez sur l'image 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris afin d'afficher la barre d'outils 3D. Script Spécifie le fichier JavaScript exécuté lorsqu'un modèle 3D est activé. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour ajouter un fichier JavaScript au document PDF. Panneau Paramètres de lancement Activer lorsque Spécifie à quel moment le modèle 3D est activé. Lorsque le modèle 3D est activé, vous pouvez, par exemple, le manipuler à l'aide des outils de navigation 3D. Désactiver lorsque Indique les conditions de désactivation du modèle 3D. Lorsqu'un modèle 3D est désactivé, l'affiche ou l'image d'aperçu 2D est visible dans la zone de travail. Style de lecture Permet d'afficher le modèle 3D dans une fenêtre flottante en dehors de la page. Si vous sélectionnez Lecture du contenu dans une fenêtre flottante, vous pouvez sélectionner la taille de la fenêtre (en pixels) grâce aux menus Hauteur et Largeur. Largeur du contour Activez cette option pour créer un contour autour de l'objet 3D. Arrière-plan transparent Supprime la couleur de l'arrière-plan. Affiche Pour remplacer la vue par défaut du modèle 3D non activé, sélectionnez l'une des options d'affiche. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser l'image à utiliser. Panneau Ressources Activez l'onglet Ressources afin d'insérer des fichiers développés dans Flash® dans un modèle 3D à des fins d'animation, d'effets et de textures. Pour lier une ressource Flash, sélectionnez-la dans la liste des ressources, puis choisissez un type de liaison (Premier plan, Arrière-plan ou Matière). Pour lier une matière, entrez également son nom pour la ou les pièces où vous souhaitez l'afficher. Ajouter Permet d'ajouter des fichiers SWF d'animation et d'arrière-plan au modèle 3D. Ajouter un répertoire Permet d'ajouter un repertoire de fichiers ressource à l'objet 3D. Supprimer Sélectionnez un fichier dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Supprimer pour le supprimer du modèle. Nom Affiche le nom du fichier sélectionné dans la liste. Vous pouvez aussi renommer la ressource, ce qui s'avère utile en cas d'utilisation de scripts. Par exemple, vous pouvez remplacer le nom de la ressource par un nom utilisé dans un script.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 413 Multimédia et modèles 3D Liaison Lorsque vous ajoutez des fichiers développés dans Flash comme ressources d'un modèle 3D, la liaison détermine l'interaction de ces fichiers. Par exemple, une ressource peut être lue en arrière-plan et une autre au premier plan. Une fois que vous avez ajouté les fichiers à la liste, sélectionnez-en un, puis, dans la zone Liaison, sélectionnez Arrière-plan, Premier plan ou Matière. Matière Les développeurs 3D peuvent se servir du champ Matière pour définir la matière à utiliser dans un modèle. Il est possible d'associer le nom de la matière à une ressource en sélectionnant Matière dans la zone Liaison. FlashVars Les développeurs Flash peuvent utiliser le champ FlashVars pour ajouter des variables ActionScript™ au fichier sélectionné. Manipulation de modèles 3D Affichage d'un modèle 3D Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez afficher et manipuler un contenu 3D de qualité supérieure, créé dans une application de CAO 3D ou de modélisation 3D professionnelle de même que des fichiers PDF incorporés. Ainsi, vous pouvez afficher et masquer certaines pièces d'un modèle 3D, supprimer un couvercle pour voir le contenu du modèle et faire tourner des pièces comme si vous les teniez dans vos mains. Un modèle 3D s'affiche d'abord comme image d'aperçu en deux dimensions. L'activation du modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main ou Sélection sélectionne (ou active) le modèle, affiche la barre d'outils 3D et lance la lecture de l'animation. Objet 3D sélectionné A. Arborescence du modèle B. 3D, barre d'outils C. Objet 3D Remarque : La création et la modification de documents PDF à partir de modèles 3D nécessitent Acrobat Professional Extended. Les utilisateurs d'Acrobat Professional peuvent insérer des modèles 3D dans des fichiers PDF. B C AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 414 Multimédia et modèles 3D Présentation de la barre d'outils 3D La barre d'outils 3D s'affiche une fois que vous avez cliqué sur le modèle 3D avec l'outil Main. Cette action active le modèle 3D et lance la lecture des animations configurées pour être lues à l'activation du fichier. La barre d'outils 3D s'affiche toujours dans la zone située au-dessus du coin supérieur gauche du modèle 3D ; son emplacement est fixe. Une petite flèche s'affiche à droite de l'outil Rotation, laquelle vous permet de masquer ou de développer la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils 3D permet d'effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, une rotation ou encore un panoramique sur l'objet. L’arborescence du modèle permet de masquer ou d’isoler des pièces, ou de rendre des pièces transparentes. Vous manipulez un modèle 3D en sélectionnant et en faisant glisser divers outils de navigation 3D. Lors d'une navigation en 3D, la visualisation du modèle 3D stationnaire se trouve facilitée si vous prenez la perspective d'une caméra. Vous pouvez alors utiliser différentes fonctions : rotation, panoramique (déplacement vers le haut, vers le bas ou latéral) et zoom avant ou arrière. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer la barre d'outils en cliquant sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant Outils > Masquer la barre d'outils. Pour afficher la barre d'outils, choisissez Afficher la barre d’outils dans le même menu contextuel. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader. Outils de navigation 3D Rotation Permet de faire tourner les objets 3D par rapport à l'écran. Le déplacement des objets dépend de la vue de départ, du point à partir duquel vous faites glisser la souris et de la direction que vous choisissez. Remarque : L'outil Main permet aussi de faire pivoter un objet. Assurez-vous que l'option Activer la sélection 3D pour l'outil Main est activée dans le panneau 3D de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Toupie Permet de faire tourner un modèle 3D parallèlement à deux axes fixes du modèle 3D, les axes x et z. Panoramique Déplace le modèle dans le sens vertical et le sens horizontal uniquement. Vous pouvez également effectuer un panoramique à l'aide de l'outil Main : maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant le glissement. Zoom Permet de vous rapprocher ou de vous éloigner des objets de la scène lorsque vous déplacez le pointeur à la verticale. Une autre solution pour effectuer un zoom consiste à activer l'outil Main et à maintenir la touche Maj enfoncée pendant l'opération. Parcours Tourne à l'horizontale autour de la scène lors d'un glissement horizontal. Déplace l'objet vers l'avant ou vers l'arrière dans la scène lorsque vous le faites glisser à la verticale ; conserve un niveau d'élévation constant quel que soit le mode de déplacement. L'outil Parcours s'avère particulièrement utile avec les modèles 3D architecturaux. Pour modifier la vitesse d'exécution, modifiez les unités d'affichage par défaut dans les préférences (3D). Remarque : L'outil Parcours est disponible lorsque l'option Consolider les outils de la barre d'outils 3D est activée dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences ou lorsque vous cliquez sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et que vous choisissez Outils > Parcours. Survol Parcourt un modèle tout en conservant l'orientation de la surface. Cliquez avec le bouton droit et faites glisser la souris dans la fenêtre 3D. L'outil Survol se déplace plus lentement à mesure que vous approchez de l'objet. Faites glisser la souris vers la droite ou la gauche pour faire tourner l'objet. Pour faire pivoter la vue de caméra, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris à l'intérieur de la fenêtre 3D et faites glisser la souris. Pour rétablir l'orientation de départ de la caméra, repositionnez la souris à l'endroit où vous avez cliqué. Utilisez la molette de la souris pour effectuer un mouvement rapide en arrière ou en avant en suivant l'orientation de la vue de caméra. Cette méthode s'avère pratique lorsque vous vous perdez dans le modèle ou faites aboutir le survol sur une surface.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 415 Multimédia et modèles 3D Propriétés de la caméra Configurent l'angle de la caméra, l'alignement ainsi que d'autres propriétés définissant l'objectif à travers lequel un modèle 3D est visualisé. Les propriétés de la caméra sont des composants des vues définis indépendamment de ces dernières. Mesures 3D Mesure les dimensions et les distances des pièces du modèle 3D. Commandes d'affichage de la barre d'outils 3D Vue par défaut Rétablit un mode de zoom, de panoramique, de rotation et de projection prédéfini du modèle 3D. Utilisez le menu Options de la Section centrale de l'arborescence du modèle pour définir une autre vue comme vue par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande Gérer les vues du menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D. Si un objet se retrouve hors champ, cela signifie que vous avez détourné la caméra de l'objet. Cliquez sur l'icône Vue par défaut de la barre d'outils 3D pour replacer l'objet dans votre champ de vision. Menu Vues Dresse la liste des vues définies pour le modèle 3D actif. Activer/Désactiver l'arborescence du modèle Affiche et masque l'arborescence du modèle. Lire/Suspendre l'animation Lit ou interrompt l'animation activée par le script JavaScript. Le menu déroulant Lire/Suspendre l'animation ouvre un curseur que vous pouvez faire glisser et placer à divers moments de la séquence d'animation. Utiliser la projection orthographique/en perspective Permet d'alterner entre l'affichage d'une projection en perspective et celui d'une projection orthographique de l'objet 3D. Menu Mode de rendu du modèle Définit le mode d'affichage de la forme 3D. Pour un guide illustré, voir la section « Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle » à la page 415. Menu Activer un éclairage supplémentaire Répertorie les différents effets disponibles pour améliorer l'éclairage de l'objet 3D. Faites des essais pour obtenir les effets visuels que vous souhaitez. Couleur d'arrière-plan Ouvre le sélecteur de couleur, lequel permet de choisir une couleur différente pour l'espace entourant l'objet 3D. Activer/Désactiver la coupe Affiche et masque les coupes de l'objet. Cliquez sur le menu contextuel pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la coupe. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Création de coupes » à la page 420. Ajouter un commentaire 3D/multimédia Permet d'associer une note à n'importe quelle pièce du modèle 3D. La note est liée à la vue. Voir « Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D » à la page 428. Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle Les modes de rendu du modèle comprennent des combinaisons de facteurs modifiant l'aspect de l'objet 3D. L'illustration ci-dessous montre un objet simple présenté dans les différents modes de rendu disponibles.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 416 Multimédia et modèles 3D Modes de rendu du modèle A. Solide B. Cadre de sélection transparent C. Transparent D. Filaire solide E. Illustration F. Contour solide G. Illustration ombrée H. Cadre de sélection I. Cadre de sélection transparent contouré J. Filaire K. Filaire ombré L. Filaire transparent M. Filaire masqué N. Sommets O. Sommets ombrés Changement de mode de rendu, d'éclairage, de projection ou d'arrière-plan Le mode de rendu du modèle définit l'aspect de la surface du modèle 3D. Le mode de rendu par défaut est généralement solide, mais d'autres modes sont à votre disposition. Vous pouvez également changer l'éclairage ainsi que l'arrière-plan du modèle 3D. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N OUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 417 Multimédia et modèles 3D Changement d'aspect du modèle 3D A. Aspect par défaut B. Mode de rendu filaire C. Eclairage de couleur D. Couleur d'arrière-plan différente ? Les boutons de la barre d'outils 3D vous permettent d'apporter les modifications suivantes : • Pour changer de mode de rendu, choisissez une option dans le menu déroulant Mode de rendu du modèle . • Pour visualiser une projection orthographique, cliquez sur le bouton Utiliser la projection orthographique . Une projection orthographique supprime réellement une cote, en conservant les proportions entre les objets mais en donnant un aspect moins réaliste au modèle 3D. Cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton afin d'appliquer la projection en perspective. • Pour activer ou désactiver l'éclairage ou pour en changer, choisissez une option dans le menu déroulant Activer un éclairage supplémentaire . • Pour changer de couleur d'arrière-plan, cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de la nuance Couleur d'arrière-plan et choisissez une couleur. Remarque : Les options Mode de rendu du modèle, Systèmes d'éclairage et Couleur d'arrière-plan sont également disponibles en cliquant sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis en choisissant Options d'affichage. Les modes de rendu du modèle figurent également sous le menu Options de l'arborescence du modèle. Voir aussi « Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle » à la page 415 Présentation de l'arborescence du modèle Le panneau Arborescence du modèle figure dans le navigateur, sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail. Vous pouvez également ouvrir le panneau Arborescence du modèle en cliquant sur le bouton Activer/désactiver l'arborescence du modèle de la barre d'outils 3D. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle 3D et à choisir Afficher l'arborescence du modèle. Remarque : L'arborescence du modèle nécessite l'utilisation de la version 7.0.7 ou ultérieure d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader. Les utilisateurs disposant de versions antérieures peuvent certes manipuler les modèles 3D, mais sans l'arborescence associée. L'arborescence du modèle se divise en trois panneaux, chacun présentant un type spécifique d'informations ou d'options. Panneau Structure Le panneau du haut affiche la structure arborescente de l'objet 3D. Par exemple, un objet 3D représentant une voiture comprend des groupes d’objets distincts (appelés noeuds) pour le châssis, le moteur et les A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 418 Multimédia et modèles 3D roues. Dans ce panneau, vous pouvez naviguer dans l'arborescence et sélectionner, isoler ou masquer les différentes pièces. Les informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) s'affichent sous la forme d'un groupe d'éléments au même niveau hiérarchique que l'objet ou l'assemblage associé. Panneau Vue Le panneau central répertorie les vues définies pour l'objet 3D. Lorsque vous modifiez une vue, cliquez sur l'une des vues répertoriées pour rétablir la version enregistrée du modèle 3D. Voir la section « Définition des vues 3D » à la page 425. Le panneau Vue permet également d'ajouter et de modifier des vues. Par exemple, une fois que vous avez isolé et fait pivoter une pièce, vous pouvez enregistrer la vue obtenue, y compris l'angle de caméra, l'arrière-plan, l'éclairage et d'autres attributs. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader. Panneau Données d'objet Le panneau inférieur affiche d'autres informations, notamment des propriétés et métadonnées sur l'objet ou la pièce. Ces informations ne sont pas modifiables pour les objets 3D dans Acrobat. Arborescence du modèle A. Arborescence d'objets 3D B. Vues enregistrées C. Informations sur l'objet ou la pièce Remarque : Pour modifier le comportement par défaut de l'arborescence du modèle, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Contenu 3D et multimédia. Choisissez ensuite une option dans le menu Ouvrir l'arborescence du modèle lors de l'activation du mode 3D. L'auteur du document PDF peut configurer un modèle 3D dans les paramètres de conversion de sorte que son activation entraîne l'affichage automatique de l'arborescence du modèle. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 419 Multimédia et modèles 3D Masquage, isolement et modification de l'aspect des pièces Certains modèles 3D se composent de pièces individuelles. L'arborescence du modèle permet de masquer ou d'isoler des pièces, d'effectuer un zoom dessus ou de les rendre transparentes. Les pièces qui s'affichent dans le modèle 3D apparaissent avec une case à cocher dans l'arborescence. Manipulation de pièces A. Pièce sélectionnée B. Pièce masquée C. Pièce isolée D. Pièce transparente 1 Dans le modèle 3D, l'outil Main permet de cliquer sur la pièce à manipuler. Si un paramètre de préférence vous empêche d'utiliser l'outil Main, sélectionnez la pièce dans l'arborescence du modèle. 2 Dans le menu Options de la partie supérieure de l'arborescence du modèle, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : Remarque : Le contenu du menu Options varie selon que le modèle 3D contient plusieurs pièces ou une seule. La plupart de ces options sont également disponibles en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une pièce dans le modèle 3D. Mode de rendu du modèle Modifie l'aspect de la surface de l'intégralité du modèle 3D selon l'élément que vous choisissez dans le sous-menu : Cadre de sélection transparent, Solide, Transparent, Filaire solide, etc. Afficher toutes les pièces Affiche la totalité du modèle 3D. Contenu Affiche toutes les pièces visibles et les centre dans la vue. Afficher les propriétés physiques Affiche la surface et le volume (le cas échéant) dans le panneau des données de l'objet de l'arborescence du modèle. Afficher le cadre de sélection Affiche la zone comprenant l'objet ou les pièces sélectionnées 3D du modèle. Définir la couleur du cadre de sélection Permet de changer la couleur du cadre de sélection. Choisissez cette option, sélectionnez une couleur et cliquez sur OK. Masquer Affiche le modèle sans montrer les pièces sélectionnées. Vous pouvez également activer et désactiver des cases à cocher dans le panneau supérieur de l'arborescence du modèle pour masquer et afficher différentes pièces. Isoler Affiche uniquement la pièce sélectionnée en masquant les autres. Isoler la pièce Affiche la géométrie, les informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) et toutes les vues (y compris les vues PMI) de la pièce isolée uniquement. Les vues et informations associées à toutes les autres pièces sont masquées ou désélectionnées. Les modifications s'appliquent également à l'arborescence du modèle. Dans le panneau Structure (en haut), seule la pièce isolée est sélectionnée. La structure des autres pièces est disponible mais désélectionnée. Le panneau Vue (section centrale) répertorie uniquement les vues définies pour la pièce isolée, notamment les vues PMI. Si vous cliquez sur une vue, seules les informations PMI correspondantes s'affichent dans le panneau de visualisation. (Pour afficher les informations PMI de la pièce isolée, assurez-vous que l'option Données PMI 3D est activée dans le panneau Structure.) Le panneau Vue masque les vues associées à l'ensemble ou aux autres pièces, y compris les vues personnalisées créées dans Acrobat. Pour ajouter des pièces à la vue, sélectionnez-les dans l'arborescence du modèle. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les commandes Afficher/Masquer du menu d'options de l'arborescence du modèle. Pour annuler la pièce isolée, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une autre pièce à l'aide de la commande Isoler la pièce. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 420 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Sélectionnez l'ensemble racine dans l'arborescence du modèle. • Sélectionnez le bouton Racine. Effectuer un zoom sur une pièce Change de point de vue en passant du modèle 3D aux pièces sélectionnées. Cette option s’avère particulièrement utile lors de la rotation de la pièce, en vous permettant de la faire pivoter autour de son propre point de centre plutôt que de celui du modèle entier. Mode de rendu des pièces Affiche l'ensemble des modes de rendu disponibles pour la pièce. Le mode de rendu modifie l'apparence du modèle 3D en fonction de votre sélection. Transparent Affiche une version transparente de la pièce sélectionnée. Exporter au format HTML Crée un fichier XML distinct de l'arborescence complète ou du noeud actif du modèle 3D. Exporter au format CSV Crée un fichier au format CSV contenant l'ensemble des données du modèle. Vous pouvez exporter les données à partir de l'arborescence du modèle complète ou du noeud sélectionné. Le fichier s'ouvre dans n'importe quelle application prenant en charge le format CSV comme, par exemple, Microsoft Excel. Remarque : Si le modèle 3D comprend des données PMI (Product Manufacturing Information), les options d'affichage et de masquage de ces données sont disponibles à partir de ce menu. Création de coupes L'affichage d'une coupe d'un modèle 3D revient à découper le modèle en deux afin d'observer l'intérieur. La boîte de dialogue Options de coupe permet d'ajuster l'alignement, le décalage et l'inclinaison du plan de coupe. Avant et après une coupe 1 Cliquez sur l'icône Activer/Désactiver la coupe de la barre d'outils 3D pour activer ou désactiver la coupe. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'icône Activer/désactiver la coupe, puis choisissez l'option Propriétés de la coupe, laquelle ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la coupe. Effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Modifiez les paramètres disponibles sous Alignement, Paramètres d'affichage et Position et orientation. • Cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer la vue en coupe afin d'enregistrer la vue en coupe active. (La vue enregistrée apparaît dans le menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D et dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle avec un nom par défaut, Vue en coupe[n].)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 421 Multimédia et modèles 3D Propriétés de la coupe Toute modification apportée ici est immédiatement appliquée. Pour les visualiser, assurez-vous que la fenêtre Propriété de la coupe n'obstrue pas la vue du modèle 3D actif. La fenêtre Propriétés de la coupe reste au premier plan si vous activez ou manipulez le document PDF sous-jacent. Pour la fermer, cliquez sur la case de fermeture située dans le coin supérieur droit. Activer la coupe L'activation de cette option rend les autres options disponibles. Alignement Définit l'axe (x, y, ou z) sur lequel la coupe s'aligne. Aligner sur la face Effectue la coupe selon un plan défini par la surface de toute face sur laquelle vous cliquez dans le modèle 3D. (La boîte de dialogue est grisée tant que vous ne cliquez pas sur la face d'une pièce du modèle.) Aligner sur 3 points Effectue la coupe selon un plan défini par trois points que vous sélectionnez en cliquant dans le modèle 3D. (La boîte de dialogue est grisée tant que vous ne cliquez pas sur trois points d'un modèle.) Afficher les intersections Indique la ligne suivant laquelle le plan sécant coupe le modèle 3D en lui donnant un contour en couleurs. Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur si vous souhaitez changer de couleur. Afficher le plan sécant Affiche le champ bidimensionnel qui coupe le modèle 3D. Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur pour choisir une autre couleur et spécifiez une valeur différente (en pourcentage) pour modifier le degré d'opacité du plan. Ignorer les pièces sélectionnées Elimine les pièces sélectionnées de la vue en coupe. Afficher la transparence Affiche les pièces ne faisant pas partie de la coupe. Opacité du plan sécant Définit le niveau de transparence du plan sécant.. Aligner la caméra sur le plan sécant Fait pivoter le modèle 3D de manière à ce qu'il se trouve au même niveau que le plan sécant. Décalage Détermine la proportion du modèle 3D à couper. Faites glisser le curseur de la gauche vers la droite ou modifiez le pourcentage. Pour comprendre comment chaque axe divise le modèle 3D, sélectionnez un axe, puis faites glisser le curseur de décalage dans les deux directions. Observez les modifications produites dans le modèle 3D incorporé. Retourner Inverse la coupe. Par exemple, si la moitié supérieure du modèle est enlevée de la coupe, cliquez sur Retourner pour afficher la moitié supérieure et couper la moitié inférieure. Curseurs des options Inclinaison 1 et Inclinaison 2 Définissent les angles compris entre le plan de coupe et les axes. Faites glisser les curseurs vers la gauche ou la droite, ou modifiez les valeurs exprimées en pourcentage. Enregistrer la vue en coupe Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Afficher les propriétés dans laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner les propriétés d'affichage à enregistrer avec la vue. Une fois ces propriétés sélectionnées, la vue en coupe est ajoutée à la liste des vues figurant sur la barre d'outils 3D et dans l'arborescence du modèle. La vue enregistrée se voit attribuée un nom par défaut, Vue en coupe[n]. Les propriétés d'affichage que vous choisissez de ne pas enregistrer reprennent la configuration de la vue précédente. Par exemple, si vous n'enregistrez pas la couleur d'arrière-plan, la vue de coupe conserve la couleur d'arrière-plan de la vue précédemment affichée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 422 Multimédia et modèles 3D Mesure d'un objet 3D L'outil Mesures 3D permet de mesurer les modèles 3D. Vous pouvez établir des mesures entre différentes combinaisons de points ou d'arêtes d'un modèle 3D. A mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur sur le modèle 3D, des points et des arêtes sont mis en surbrillance. L'outil Mesures 3D prend en charge quatre types de mesure : la distance perpendiculaire entre deux arêtes droites, la distance linéaire entre deux points, le rayon d'arêtes circulaires et l'angle formé par deux arêtes (ou trois points). Vous pouvez associer des mesures 3D à des vues spécifiques. Si la vue par défaut est active au moment de l'ajout de la mesure, une vue de mesure est créée. Cette vue s'ajoute à la liste des vues dans l'arborescence du modèle. La mesure est uniquement associée à cette vue. Une mesure s'affiche sous la forme d'une entrée enfant de la vue. Vous avez également la possibilité d'afficher des commentaires pendant la prise de mesure. Ces commentaires (également appelés annotations de mesure) sont conservés après la fermeture du document. Affichage de la mesure 3D 1 Cliquez sur un modèle 3D dans un document PDF afin de l’activer. 2 Cliquez sur l'icône Mesures 3D de la barre d'outils 3D. (Si la barre d'outils 3D présente les outils consolidés, sélectionnez l'outil Mesure 3D dans le menu déroulant situé à côté de l'outil de navigation.) 3 Sélectionnez les options voulues dans les zones Accrochage activé et Types de mesures de la palette Mesures 3D. 4 Cliquez sur l'arrière-plan du modèle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis modifiez les options le cas échéant. Laissez la palette Mesures 3D ouverte. 5 Mesurez le modèle 3D : • Pour mesurer la distance entre deux points du modèle 3D, cliquez pour définir le point de départ. Déplacez ensuite le pointeur vers un autre point ou une arête. • Pour mesurer la circonférence d'une forme ronde, déplacez le pointeur sur l'arête de la forme jusqu'à l'apparition d'un cercle, puis cliquez une fois. • Pour créer et définir une annotation sur la mesure, cliquez sur l'arrière-plan de l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Modifier le libellé de l'annotation. Saisissez le texte du libellé. Mesurez le modèle 3D comme décrit précédemment. Cliquez pour définir l'extrémité de la mesure, puis une fois encore pour spécifier l'emplacement de la mesure et du libellé. • Pour enregistrer une mesure sous forme de commentaire, activez l'outil Main, cliquez sur la mesure avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Convertir en commentaire. • Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler la mesure. • Pour supprimer une annotation de mesure, cliquez dessus avec l'outil Mesures 3D et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Remarque : Pour savoir comment utiliser les outils Rotation, Panoramique, Zoom et Accrochage tout en effectuant des mesures, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle et choisissez Conseils de navigation dans les mesures 3D. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 423 Multimédia et modèles 3D Options Accrochage activé dans la palette Mesures 3D Accrochage 3D aux points d'extrémité d'arête Effectue un accrochage sur toute l'arête. Accrochage 3D aux arêtes linéaires Effectue un accrochage sur un segment de ligne droite d'une arête. Accrochage 3D aux arêtes radiales Effectue un accrochage à une circonférence. Accrochage 3D aux silhouettes Effectue un accrochage sur l'arête apparente d'une pièce, le côté d'un cylindre par exemple. Accrochage 3D aux facettes planaires Effectue un accrochage sur le plan géométrique créant une face de la pièce. Options Types de mesures dans la palette Mesures 3D Mesure point à point 3D Mesure la distance entre deux points du modèle 3D. Cliquez pour définir le point de départ, puis cliquez à un autre endroit pour définir le point ou l'arrête formant l'autre extrémité. Dimension perpendiculaire 3D Mesure la distance entre deux arêtes prises à angle droit pour l'arête de départ. Dimension radiale 3D Mesure le rayon à l'emplacement sur lequel vous avez cliqué. Mesure d'angle 3D Mesure l'angle entre deux arêtes. Options des annotations et des unités Pour utiliser les outils de mesure Unités et Annotation, sélectionnez l'outil de mesure 3D, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle. Définir les unités du modèle Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier les unités de mesure. Activer l'affichage des coordonnées Affiche ou masque les coordonnées du pointeur de la souris dans la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures. Modifier le libellé de l'annotation Tapez le texte devant accompagner la mesure et qui s'affichera dans la zone du modèle 3D et dans le panneau des commentaires. (Option non disponible si la case Annotation de mesure n'est pas cochée.) Désactiver les annotations de mesure Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous souhaitez effectuer des mesures dans le modèle sans les ajouter au document. Les mesures sont uniquement visibles pendant l'opération de mesure. Si vous effectuez une autre mesure ou changez d'outils, l'annotation disparaît. Ne pas accrocher au contenu 3D Désactive la fonction d'accrochage du point d'insertion à une cible probable. Sélectionnez cette option pour améliorer les performances de l'application lorsque vous travaillez sur un modèle volumineux. Réactivez l'option Accrocher au contenu 3D pour garantir la précision des mesures réalisées sur des objets 3D. Conseils de navigation dans les mesures 3D Ouvre une boîte de dialogue répertoriant les raccourcis clavier de navigation. Ces raccourcis peuvent vous être utiles lors de la prise de mesures. Préférences Ouvre le panneau Mesures (3D) de la boîte de dialogue des préférences. Afficher/masquer la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures La fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures affiche les paramètres d'unités et d'annotation du modèle. Sélectionnez cette option pour retirer la fenêtre d'infos de la fenêtre du modèle. Afficher/masquer la barre d'outils Mesures Afficher/masquer la palette Mesures 3D. Préférences de mesure Les préférences de mesure 3D déterminent le mode de mesure des données 3D. Ces options sont disponibles dans le panneau Mesures (3D) de la boîte de dialogue Préférences.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 424 Multimédia et modèles 3D Remarque : Dans Adobe Reader, ces préférences s'appliquent aux fichiers PDF dans laquelle la fonction de commentaire est activée. Utiliser l'échelle et les unités du document (le cas échéant) Affiche les mesures en fonction des unités du modèle (le cas échéant), générées à partir du modèle 3D initial. Désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement les unités de mesure. Vous pouvez la modifier via la palette Mesures 3D. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut Utilise les unités de mesure spécifiées ici plutôt que celles appliquées au modèle 3D. Chiffres significatifs à afficher Ils permettent de spécifier le nombre maximal de chiffres dans le nombre de mesure. Couleur du trait de mesure 3D Indique la couleur du trait visible lorsque vous cliquez ou faites glisser la souris pour mesurer un objet. Mesure de la taille après informations Définit la taille du texte pour l'affichage des mesures. Mesures d'angle affichées dans Indique les unités en degrés ou en radians. Mesures circulaires affichées comme Indique si le diamètre ou le rayon est mesuré pour des pièces circulaires. Afficher le cercle des mesures radiales Affiche la circonférence associée à la mesure radiale. Paramètres d'accrochage 3D Active le mode d'accrochage et indique l'emplacement d'accrochage des éléments suivants : points, arcs, arêtes ou arêtes de silhouette. L'option Sensibilité indique la distance à laquelle le pointeur doit se trouver de l'élément d'accrochage. Pour l'option Couleur du conseil d'accrochage, indiquez la couleur de la ligne d'accrochage visible lorsque le pointeur est placé sur l'objet 3D. Modification des propriétés de la caméra Les propriétés de la caméra définissent avec précision l'angle et le positionnement de l'objet dans une vue. Elles constituent une vue de caméra, qui peut servir d'une vue à une autre mais également d'un fichier à un autre. 1 Dans la barre d'outils 3D, cliquez sur l'icône Propriétés de la caméra . Si vous ne voyez pas cette icône, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'outil de navigation dans la partie gauche de la barre d'outils 3D. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous pour nommer la vue de caméra, ou sélectionnez une vue existante dans le menu. 3 Positionnez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra de manière que le modèle 3D soit bien visible. Sélectionnez l'alignement de la caméra : • Choisissez Cible pour aligner les propriétés de la caméra uniquement sur la position cible. • Choisissez Caméra et cible pour aligner les propriétés à la fois sur l'orientation de la caméra et la position cible. 4 Sélectionner le type d'alignement : Sélectionner un modèle Une fois que vous avez sélectionné cette option, cliquez sur le modèle 3D dans le document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre du modèle sélectionné. • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la position de la cible de la caméra est le centre du modèle sélectionné. La caméra est alignée sur le modèle sélectionné. Sélectionner une face Une fois que vous avez sélectionné cette option, cliquez sur une face du modèle 3D dans le document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre de la face sélectionnée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 425 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la position de la cible de la caméra est le centre de la face sélectionnée. La caméra est alignée sur cette face. Sélectionner 3 points Une fois que vous avez sélectionnée cette option, sélectionnez trois points sur le même modèle ou sur un autre modèle du document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre des trois points sélectionnés. • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la cible de la caméra est le centre des trois points sélectionnés. La position de la caméra est alignée sur le plan constitué par les trois points sélectionnés. 5 Dans la zone Position, sélectionnez Unités angulaires pour modifier les valeurs X, Y et Z des options Azimuth, Altitude et Distance. Ces valeurs vous permettent de manipuler la caméra selon l'azimuth (distance) et l'altitude (axe X), mais aussi d'effectuer un zoom en reprenant la valeur Distance. 6 Placez les curseurs de position de la caméra et de la cible à l'endroit voulu. 7 Pour modifier l'angle focal de la caméra, faites glisser le curseur Champ de visée jusqu'au degré voulu. 8 Pour modifier l'angle d'utilisation de la caméra, faites glisser le curseur Bobine jusqu'au degré voulu. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer la vue de la caméra pour enregistrer les paramètres et ajouter la vue à l'arborescence du modèle. La vue est ajoutée à l'arborescence du modèle avec le nom par défaut VueCaméra[n], [n] représentant un nombre séquentiel. Vous pouvez renommer la vue de la caméra dans la liste des vues. Définition des vues 3D La vue par défaut d'un modèle 3D permet de revenir à tout moment à un point de départ lorsque vous manipulez le modèle. Une vue par défaut est différente d'un aperçu, lequel définit ce à quoi ressemble le modèle 3D lorsqu'il est désactivé. La liste de toutes les vues disponibles pour le modèle 3D apparaît dans le menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D et dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle. Vous pouvez également créer des vues supplémentaires du modèle 3D dans Acrobat. L'application vous permet de parcourir rapidement le contenu 3D comme vous le désirez (en utilisant une vue du dessus, d'en dessous, de gauche, de droite, intérieure, extérieure, décomposée ou assemblée). Une vue comprend les options suivantes : éclairage, position de la caméra, mode de rendu, état de l’arborescence du modèle, transparence et coupe. Les vues personnalisées peuvent comprendre des propriétés de caméra précises. Vous avez la possibilité de lier des vues à des signets via le panneau Signets, ou encore d'utiliser l'action Atteindre une vue 3D pour lier une vue à un bouton et à un lien définis sur une page. Création d'une vue personnalisée 1 Avec l'outil Main activé, cliquez sur le modèle 3D afin de le sélectionner. 2 Servez-vous des outils Rotation, Panoramique et Zoom de la barre d'outils 3D pour modifier la vue. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Afficher les propriétés, sélectionnez les paramètres d'affichage à inclure dans la vue. Les propriétés non sélectionnées appliquent les paramètres d'affichage utilisés en dernier lieu. Si, par exemple, l'option Couleur d'arrière-plan n'est pas activée, celle de la vue est identique à celle qui a été affichée précédemment. La vue est indiquée sous le nom NouvelleVue dans le panneau Vue de l'arborescence du modèle. Sélectionnez le libellé afin de le renommer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 426 Multimédia et modèles 3D Affichage d'une vue ? Faites appel aux méthodes suivantes pour modifier la vue : • Sur la barre d'outils 3D, sélectionnez une vue dans le menu déroulant Vues. • Dans l'arborescence du modèle, cliquez sur le nom de la vue. • Cliquez sur l'icône Vue par défaut . Modification de la vue par défaut ? Dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une vue, puis sélectionnez Définir comme vue par défaut dans le menu Options. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une vue, puis sélectionnez Définir comme vue par défaut. Ajout d'une vue 3D à un signet ou un lien Cette procédure nécessite un modèle 3D comportant une ou plusieurs vues définies (que vous pouvez créer). Vous pouvez associer la vue à un signet ou un lien existant, ou créer un signet ou un lien à cet effet. 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un signet, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau signet situé en haut du panneau Signets, puis saisissez un nom pour ce signet. Cliquez ensuite avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. • Pour créer un lien, choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien, puis faites glisser le curseur pour tracer le rectangle du lien à l'endroit voulu sur la page. Puis, dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, sous Lier une action, sélectionnez Lien personnalisé et cliquez sur Suivant. • Pour associer une vue à un signet ou un lien existant, cliquez sur ce dernier avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 3 Dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, choisissez Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner une vue 3D, choisissez l'annotation 3D du modèle 3D dans la liste de gauche, puis sélectionnez une option de vue à droite : Vue active Reflète les attributs de rotation 3D, de panoramique et de zoom actifs dans le document au moment de la création du lien ou du signet, que cette vue figure ou non dans l'arborescence du modèle en tant que vue définie. Première vue Change la vue figurant en haut de la liste du panneau Arborescence du modèle. Dernière vue Change la vue figurant au bas de la liste du panneau Arborescence du modèle. Vue précédente Déplace vers le haut la liste de vues définies affichée dans le panneau Arborescence du modèle en procédant vue par vue. Vue suivante Déplace vers le bas la liste de vues définies affichée dans le panneau Arborescence du modèle en procédant vue par vue. Vue existante Change la vue définie sélectionnée dans la liste figurant sous cette option. 5 (Facultatif) Pour qu'un signet ou un lien atteigne également une page et une vue page spécifiques, choisissez Atteindre une vue de page dans le menu Sélectionner l'action. Cliquez ensuite sur Ajouter. Servez-vous ensuite des barres de défilement et des outils de zoom pour ajuster la vue de la page avant de cliquer sur le bouton Définir le lien. L'opération terminée, cliquez sur Fermer dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 427 Multimédia et modèles 3D Suppression d'une vue 3D ? Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sur la barre d'outils 3D, ouvrez le menu déroulant Vues, puis choisissez Gérer les vues. Sélectionnez les vues que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la vue. • Dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle, sélectionnez les vues que vous souhaitez supprimer. Dans la Section centrale, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou cliquez sur le bouton Options et sélectionnez Supprimer la vue. Préférences de contenu 3D Le panneau Contenu 3D et multimédia de la boîte de dialogue Préférences permet de définir si la barre d'outils 3D et l'arborescence du modèle sont affichés par défaut ou non. Vous avez également la possibilité de spécifier un moteur de rendu (convertisseur) par défaut et d'indiquer si les animations sont autorisées. Convertisseur préféré Indique le moteur de rendu utilisé pour déterminer les performances et la qualité. Il est donc important de sélectionner celui qui convient. Vous pouvez changer de moteur de rendu en fonction du système utilisé. Si vous sélectionnez une option DirectX® ou OpenGL, tous les rendus sont effectués à l'aide de la puce graphique de l'adaptateur vidéo. Si Logiciel est sélectionné, le rendu prend plus de temps mais les performances sont normalement semblables à celles du mode de rendu de l'application d'origine. Activer le rendu matériel pour les cartes vidéo existantes Force l'utilisation d'un accélérateur matériel pour les adaptateurs vidéo qui ne prennent pas en charge un pixel shader. Activer le rendu double face Certaines pièces d'un modèle présentent deux faces. Pour économiser du temps et de l'espace, vous pouvez désactiver cette option afin de ne générer que le rendu du côté visible par l'utilisateur. Quand l'utilisateur observe l'intérieur d'une pièce dont un seul côté est rendu, la face arrière est invisible. Mode de rendu PMI 3D préféré Spécifie le mode PMI à utiliser pour le rendu. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'une des options suivantes : Utiliser les paramètres de contenu : lors du rendu des données PMI, les paramètres des données PMI sont utilisés pour décider de se servir ou non du logiciel Z-Buffer. Toujours effectuer le rendu des données PMI 3D devant le modèle : le rendu des données PMI ignore le logiciel ZBuffer quel que soit le paramètre contenu dans le fichier. Toujours effectuer le rendu des données PMI 3D à l'aide de Z-buffer : le rendu des informations PMI active toujours le logiciel Z-Buffer quel que soit le paramètre contenu dans le fichier. Ouvrir l'arborescence du modèle lors de l'activation du mode 3D Indique si l'arborescence du modèle est visible lorsque le modèle 3D est activé. Choisissez Utiliser le paramètre d'annotation pour utiliser le paramètre défini par l'auteur lors de l'insertion du modèle 3D dans le document PDF. Etat par défaut de la barre d'outils Indique si la barre d'outils 3D est affichée ou masquée lors de l'activation du modèle 3D. Choisissez Utiliser le paramètre d'annotation pour utiliser le paramètre défini par l'auteur lors de l'insertion du modèle 3D dans le document PDF. Activer la sélection pour l'outil Main Permet à l'utilisateur de sélectionner et de mettre en surbrillance les pièces d'un modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main. Si cette option est désactivée, utilisez l'outil Données d'objet (Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet) pour sélectionner l'objet. Consolider les outils de la barre d'outils L'activation de cette option place les outils de manipulation et de navigation sous l'outil Rotation, réduisant ainsi la longueur de la barre d'outils 3D. Activer les transitions entre les vues Certains modèles 3D incluent des transitions animées entre les vues. Désélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez empêcher l'animation 3D.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 428 Multimédia et modèles 3D Afficher l'axe d'orientation 3D Active ou désactive l'affichage en contexte d'un axe qui indique l'orientation actuelle de la scène 3D. Méthodes d'optimisation pour une faible fréquence d'images Indique ce qui se produit pour les animations de modèles complexes lorsque la fréquence d'image devient basse. L'option Aucune ne compromet pas les propriétés visuelles et laisse la fréquence d'image basse. L'option Cadre de sélection affiche les plans tridimensionnels englobant les pièces au lieu des pièces proprement dites, ce qui permet de conserver une fréquence d'image élevée. L'option Abandonner les objets n'affiche pas certaines parties du modèle afin de conserver une fréquence d'image élevée. Seuil de fréquence d'images Définit la fréquence minimale en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant un nombre dans la zone de valeur. Si la fréquence d'image descend sous ce nombre d'images par seconde, l'option Méthodes d'optimisation pour une faible fréquence d'images est activée. Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D Les commentaires ajoutés à un objet 3D sont associés à des vues spécifiques, définies lors de l'ajout des commentaires. Si la vue est modifiée (suite à la rotation ou au déplacement de l'objet 3D, par exemple), les commentaires ne sont plus visibles. Trois méthodes vous permettent d'ajouter des commentaires à un objet 3D : • L'outil de commentaires de la barre d'outils 3D permet d'ajouter des commentaires à des pièces spécifiques d'un modèle 3D. • La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations permet d'ajouter différents types de commentaires à une vue 3D. • Une mesure 3D peut être convertie en commentaire. Remarque : L'insertion de commentaires dans une vue de modèle 3D nécessite la version 7.0.7 (ou ultérieure) d'Acrobat ou de Reader. Lorsque vous modifiez la vue d'un objet 3D, tout commentaire associé à cet objet disparaît (à droite). Si vous préférez ne pas associer de commentaire à une vue 3D, ajoutez-le en dehors de la zone de l'objet 3D. Voir aussi « Activation de la saisie de commentaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader » à la page 166 « Commentaires » à la page 177UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 429 Multimédia et modèles 3D Ajout d'un commentaire 3D à un objet Les commentaires créés à l'aide de l'outil Commentaire 3D sont semblables aux mesures car ils sont associés à une pièce spécifique de la géométrie 3D. Lorsque vous ajoutez des commentaires 3D à la vue par défaut d'un modèle, une vue nommée VueCommentaire3D est créée. Les commentaires 3D ajoutés à d'autres vues sont listés dans l'arborescence du modèle en tant que composants de la vue en question. Vous pouvez modifier et supprimer des commentaires 3D de la même manière que les mesures. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un commentaire 3D dans la barre d'outils 3D. 2 Sélectionnez la pièce du modèle pour laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter un commentaire. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Saisir une chaîne de commentaire, entrez votre commentaire. Ajout de commentaires à partir de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations Lorsque vous ajoutez des commentaires à l'aide des outils de la barre Commentaires et annotations, une vue nommée VueCommentaire est créée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Remarque : Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader peuvent insérer des commentaires dans un document PDF si l'auteur de ce dernier active l'option prévue à cet effet dans le PDF. 1 Affichez la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations (Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Afficher la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations). 2 Sélectionnez un outil de commentaire, puis cliquez dans la zone de l'objet 3D. 3 Cliquez à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D pour créer un commentaire. Une nouvelle définition de vue est ajoutée à l'arborescence du modèle, sous un nom du type VueCommentaire1. 4 Pour ajouter d'autres commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un autre commentaire dans une vue, vérifiez que la vue en question est sélectionnée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Cliquez ensuite à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D. • Pour créer un commentaire dans une nouvelle vue, vérifiez qu'aucune vue n'est sélectionnée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Cliquez ensuite à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D. Remarque : Si vous supprimez l'une des vues de commentaire générées automatiquement, les commentaires associés sont encore disponibles. Vous pouvez les visualiser et les sélectionner dans le panneau Commentaires ou l'arborescence du modèle, qui les recense sous les vues. La sélection d'un commentaire bascule le modèle 3D sur la même configuration d'affichage que celle définie lors de l'ajout du commentaire. Conversion de mesures 3D en commentaires Il est possible de convertir des mesures individuelles en commentaires de manière qu'elles puissent être revues et annotées comme d'autres types de commentaires. 1 Dans le panneau des vues de l'arborescence du modèle, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le signe Plus à côté de la vue de mesure voulue afin d'afficher la liste des mesures. 2 Cliquez sur le nom d'une mesure avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Convertir en commentaire. Affichage des commentaires relatifs à un objet 3D 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans l'arborescence du modèle, sélectionnez une vue contenant des commentaires. • Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Commentaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 430 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Dans la Section centrale du panneau Arborescence du modèle, cliquez sur options, puis choisissez Répertorier les commentaires. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un commentaire pour ouvrir sa fenêtre. 3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour afficher d'autres commentaires associés à des vues. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un commentaire, la vue du modèle 3D dans laquelle le commentaire a été ajouté s'affiche. Exécution d'un script JavaScript Si un fichier JavaScript distinct est associé au fichier PDF du modèle 3D, vous pouvez l'activer. 1 Ouvrez le document PDF dans Acrobat. 2 Cliquez sur le modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main afin de l'activer, puis cliquez sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Lancer un script JavaScript. 3 Localisez le fichier JavaScript à ajouter, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir.431 Chapitre 14 : Gestion des couleurs Définition de la gestion des couleurs Pourquoi les couleurs ne concordent pas toujours ? Aucun module d’édition n’est capable de reproduire la totalité des couleurs perceptibles à l’œil humain. Chaque périphérique utilise son propre espace colorimétrique, qui produit un ensemble (ou gamme) de couleurs spécifique. Un modèle de couleur détermine la relation qui existe entre les valeurs, tandis que l’espace colorimétrique définit les couleurs absolues désignées par ces valeurs. Certains modèles de couleur (CIE L*a*b, par exemple) se caractérisent par un espace colorimétrique fixe, car ils sont directement liés à la manière dont l’être humain perçoit les couleurs. Ces modèles sont dits indépendants du périphérique. Les autres modèles de couleur (RVB, TSI, TSL, CMJN, etc.) peuvent porter sur plusieurs espaces colorimétriques. Etant donné que ces modèles varient selon l’espace colorimétrique ou le périphérique qui leur est associé, ils sont dits dépendants du périphérique. Du fait de la variation de ces espaces colorimétriques, il est possible que l’aspect des couleurs diffère en cas de transfert de documents d’un périphérique à l’autre. Les variations chromatiques peuvent avoir des origines diverses : différences dans les sources d’images, méthode de définition des couleurs utilisée par les applications logicielles, supports d’impression (le papier journal reproduit une gamme plus réduite que le papier pour magazines et revues), ainsi que d’autres variations naturelles, telles que les différences de fabrication des moniteurs ou l’ancienneté de ces derniers. Gamme de couleurs de divers périphériques et documents A. Espace colorimétrique Lab B. Documents (espace de travail) C. Périphériques Définition d’un système de gestion des couleurs Les problèmes de correspondance des couleurs sont liés à l’utilisation d’espaces colorimétriques différents par plusieurs périphériques et logiciels. Pour y remédier, vous pouvez utiliser un système qui interprète et convertit fidèlement les couleurs d’un périphérique à l’autre. Un système de gestion des couleurs (SGC) compare l’espace colorimétrique de création d’une couleur avec son espace colorimétrique de reproduction et procède aux réglages nécessaires pour représenter cette couleur le plus uniformément possible sur plusieurs périphériques. CMYK RGB A B C UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 432 Gestion des couleurs Un système de gestion des couleurs convertit les couleurs grâce aux profils colorimétriques. Un profil désigne une description mathématique de l’espace colorimétrique d’un périphérique. Par exemple, un profil de scanner indique à un système de gestion des couleurs comment le scanner « perçoit » les couleurs. Le système de gestion des couleurs d’Adobe fait appel aux profils ICC, format multiplate-forme normalisé, défini par l’International Color Consortium (ICC). Aucune méthode de conversion chromatique ne pouvant convenir à tous les types d’images, un système de gestion des couleurs propose divers modes de rendu (ou méthodes de conversion) pour vous permettre d’appliquer le mode approprié à un élément graphique particulier. Ainsi, une méthode de conversion chromatique reproduisant les relations exactes entre les couleurs d’une photo de safari peut toutefois dénaturer les couleurs d’un logo comportant des teintes en aplat. Remarque : ne confondez pas la gestion des couleurs avec la correction des couleurs. Un système de gestion des couleurs ne corrige pas une image enregistrée avec des problèmes de tons ou d’équilibre des couleurs. Il fournit un environnement vous permettant d’évaluer en toute fiabilité les images dans l’optique de la sortie finale. Voir aussi « A propos des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 « A propos des modes de rendu » à la page 454 Avez-vous besoin d’une gestion des couleurs ? Sans un système de gestion des couleurs, vos spécifications chromatiques dépendent du périphérique de sortie. La gestion des couleurs n’est pas nécessaire lorsque le processus de production est rigoureusement orienté vers un seul support. Par exemple, vous pouvez préférer, de même que votre prestataire de service d’impression, retoucher des images CMJN et spécifier les valeurs chromatiques appropriées à un environnement d’impression spécifique bien établi. L’importance de la gestion des couleurs augmente avec l’accroissement du nombre de variables dans le processus de production. La gestion des couleurs est recommandée si vous prévoyez de réutiliser des images en couleurs sur des supports d’impression ou en ligne et d’utiliser divers types de périphériques pour un seul support (différentes presses d’imprimerie, par exemple) ou si vous gérez plusieurs postes de travail. Vous pourrez bénéficier de tous les avantages d’un système de gestion des couleurs si vous devez réaliser l’une des tâches suivantes : • Obtenir une sortie couleur prévisible et homogène sur plusieurs périphériques de sortie utilisant la séparation de couleurs, votre imprimante de bureau et votre moniteur. La gestion des couleurs est particulièrement utile pour procéder à des réglages chromatiques sur des périphériques dont la gamme est peu étendue, comme une presse à imprimer en quadrichromie. • Vérifier minutieusement (prévisualiser) l’épreuve d’un document en couleurs sur le moniteur par simulation d’un périphérique de sortie spécifique. (Les limites d’affichage du moniteur, ainsi que d’autres facteurs comme les conditions d’éclairage, ont une influence sur les épreuves-écran.) • Evaluer avec précision et incorporer de façon homogène des images couleur provenant de diverses sources si elles utilisent aussi la gestion des couleurs, et même, dans certains cas, si elles ne l’utilisent pas. • Envoyer des documents en couleurs vers différents périphériques et supports de sortie sans avoir à ajuster manuellement les couleurs des documents ou des images d’origine. Cette méthode est idéale lorsque vous créez des images destinées à l’impression et à l’affichage en ligne. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 433 Gestion des couleurs • Imprimer correctement des couleurs sur un périphérique de sortie inconnu ; par exemple, vous pouvez stocker un document en ligne afin de reproduire de façon homogène les impressions couleur à la demande dans le monde entier. Création d’un environnement de visualisation pour la gestion des couleurs Votre environnement de travail détermine votre perception visuelle de la couleur sur un moniteur et sur une impression. Afin d’obtenir les meilleurs résultats, exploitez la couleur et la lumière de votre lieu de travail comme suit : • Consultez vos documents dans un endroit où le niveau d’éclairage et la température de la couleur sont constants. Par exemple, l’évolution des caractéristiques chromatiques de la lumière du soleil au cours de la journée se répercute sur l’affichage des couleurs à l’écran. Il est donc préférable d’abaisser les stores ou de travailler dans une pièce sans fenêtres. Pour éliminer la dominante bleu-vert d’un éclairage fluorescent, vous pouvez installer un éclairage D50 (5 000 °Kelvin). Vous pouvez également visualiser des documents imprimés à l’aide d’une table lumineuse D50. • Consultez vos documents dans une pièce dont la couleur des murs et du plafond est neutre. La couleur d’une salle peut agir sur la perception de la couleur affichée et imprimée. Le gris neutre est la couleur idéale d’une salle de lecture. En outre, la couleur de vos vêtements qui se reflète dans le moniteur peut avoir une incidence sur l’aspect des couleurs affichées. • Supprimez les motifs d’arrière-plan colorés du bureau de votre ordinateur. Les motifs clairs et chargés autour d’un document faussent la perception de la couleur. Configurez votre bureau de sorte qu’il n’affiche que des gris neutres. • Examinez vos épreuves dans les mêmes conditions que le public. Par exemple, feuilletez les pages d’un catalogue d’articles ménagers sous les lumières incandescentes de votre domicile ou un catalogue de mobilier de bureau sous l’éclairage fluorescent de votre bureau. Néanmoins, décidez toujours de vos dernières retouches chromatiques sous l’éclairage spécifié par le règlement en matière de bons à tirer en vigueur dans votre pays. Homogénéité des couleurs A propos de la gestion des couleurs dans les applications Adobe La gestion des couleurs d’Adobe a pour fonction de préserver l’aspect des couleurs lorsque vous importez des images à partir de sources externes, modifiez des documents et les transférez entre différentes applications Adobe, puis que vous imprimez vos compositions finies. Ce système repose sur des conventions développées par l’organisme International Color Consortium, un groupe chargé de la normalisation des formats de profil et des procédures visant à garantir l’homogénéisation et la précision des couleurs tout au long d’un flux de production. Par défaut, la gestion des couleurs est activée dans les applications Adobe faisant appel à la gestion des couleurs. Si vous avez acheté Adobe Creative Suite, les paramètres de couleur sont synchronisés entre toutes les applications pour offrir un affichage homogène des couleurs RVB et CMJN. Cela signifie que les couleurs ont le même aspect dans toutes les applications de la suite.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 434 Gestion des couleurs Les paramètres de couleur d’Adobe Creative Suite sont synchronisés dans un emplacement central via Adobe Bridge. Si vous décidez de modifier les paramètres par défaut, des paramètres prédéfinis simples d’utilisation vous permettent de configurer la gestion des couleurs d’Adobe en fonction des conditions d’impression courantes. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de couleur pour qu’ils correspondent aux besoins d’un flux de couleur spécifique. Gardez à l’esprit que les types d’images utilisés ainsi que vos besoins en matière de sortie influencent votre manière d’utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Par exemple, les problèmes liés à l’homogénéité des couleurs sont différents pour un flux d’impression photo RVB, d’impression commerciale CMJN, d’impression numérique RVB/CMJN et d’édition via Internet. Procédures élémentaires pour la production de couleurs homogènes 1. Consultez vos partenaires de production (le cas échéant) pour vous assurer que tous les aspects de votre flux de gestion des couleurs s’intègrent au leur en toute transparence. Discutez du mode d’intégration du flux de couleur avec vos groupes de travail et prestataires de services, de la configuration matérielle et logicielle en vue de son intégration au système de gestion des couleurs et du niveau d’implémentation de la gestion des couleurs (voir la section « Avez-vous besoin d’une gestion des couleurs ? » à la page 432). 2. Etalonnez le moniteur, et créez son profil. Le profil de moniteur est le premier profil à créer. La précision des couleurs est essentielle si vous prenez des décisions créatives impliquant la couleur spécifiée dans votre document (voir la section « Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant » à la page 447).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 435 Gestion des couleurs 3. Ajoutez des profils colorimétriques à votre système pour les périphériques d’entrée et de sortie que vous prévoyez d’utiliser, comme les scanners et les imprimantes. Le système de gestion des couleurs utilise des profils pour déterminer comment les périphériques produisent les couleurs et connaître les couleurs réelles d’un document. Lorsque vous installez un nouveau périphérique, le profil correspondant est généralement ajouté sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également utiliser un logiciel et du matériel tiers pour créer des profils plus précis pour des périphériques et des conditions spécifiques. Si vous prévoyez d’imprimer votre document à des fins commerciales, contactez votre prestataire de services pour déterminer le profil de votre document pour le périphérique ou les conditions d’impression (voir les sections « A propos des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 et « Installation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 447). 4. Configurez la gestion des couleurs dans les applications Adobe. Les paramètres de couleur par défaut conviennent à la plupart des utilisateurs. Cependant, vous pouvez les modifier en suivant l’une des procédures ci-dessous. • Si vous utilisez plusieurs applications Adobe, servez-vous de l’application Adobe® Bridge CS3 pour choisir une configuration de gestion des couleurs standard et synchroniser les paramètres de couleur dans toutes les applications avant d’utiliser des documents (voir la section « Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe » à la page 435). • Si vous utilisez une seule application Adobe ou si vous souhaitez personnaliser les options avancées de gestion des couleurs, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de couleur d’une application spécifique (voir la section « Configuration de la gestion des couleurs » à la page 436). 5. (Facultatif) Prévisualisez les couleurs sur une épreuve-écran. Après avoir créé un document, vous pouvez utiliser une épreuve-écran pour prévisualiser les couleurs et savoir comment elles apparaîtront une fois imprimées ou visualisées sur un périphérique spécifique (voir la section « Vérification des couleurs sur épreuves-écran » à la page 440). Remarque : une épreuve-écran seule ne permet pas d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect des surimpressions imprimées sur une presse offset. Si vous utilisez des documents contenant des surimpressions, activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour prévisualiser avec précision les surimpressions sur une épreuve-écran. 6. Utilisez la gestion des couleurs lorsque vous imprimez et enregistrez des fichiers. L’objectif de la gestion des couleurs est de garantir l’homogénéité des couleurs sur tous les périphériques du flux de production. Laissez les options de gestion des couleurs activées lorsque vous imprimez des documents, enregistrez des fichiers et préparez des fichiers pour les afficher en ligne (voir les sections « Impression avec la gestion des couleurs » à la page 442 et « Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne » à la page 439). Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe Si vous utilisez Adobe Creative Suite, Adobe Bridge vous permet de synchroniser automatiquement les paramètres de couleur entre les applications. Ainsi, les couleurs sont identiques dans toutes les applications Adobe faisant appel à la gestion des couleurs. Si les paramètres de couleur ne sont pas synchronisés, un message d’avertissement apparaît en haut de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs de chaque application. Adobe vous recommande de synchroniser les paramètres de couleur avant d’utiliser des documents existants ou de nouveaux documents. 1 Ouvrez l’application Bridge. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 436 Gestion des couleurs Pour ouvrir Bridge depuis une application Creative Suite, choisissez Fichier > Parcourir. Pour ouvrir Bridge directement, choisissez Adobe Bridge à partir du menu Démarrer (Windows) ou cliquez deux fois sur l’icône Adobe Bridge (Mac OS). 2 Choisissez Edition > Paramètres de couleurs Creative Suite. 3 Sélectionnez une couleur dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Si aucun paramètre par défaut ne correspond à vos besoins, sélectionnez l’option Afficher la liste complète des fichiers de paramètres couleur pour consulter d’autres paramètres. Pour installer un fichier de paramètres personnalisés, comme un fichier provenant d’un prestataire de services d’impression, cliquez sur l’option Afficher les fichiers de paramètres couleur enregistrés. Configuration de la gestion des couleurs 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • (Illustrator, InDesign, Photoshop) Choisissez Edition > Couleurs. • (Acrobat) Sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez un paramètre de couleur dans le menu Paramètres, puis cliquez sur OK. Le paramètre sélectionné détermine les espaces de travail colorimétriques utilisés par l’application, les événements qui se produisent lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers munis de profils incorporés et que vous les importez, ainsi que le mode de conversion des couleurs utilisé par le système de gestion des couleurs. Pour afficher la description d’un paramètre, sélectionnez-le, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Remarque : les paramètres de couleur Acrobat constituent un sous-ensemble de ceux utilisés dans InDesign, Illustrator et Photoshop. Dans certaines situations, notamment lorsqu’un prestataire de services fournit un profil de sortie personnalisé, vous devrez peut-être personnaliser des options spécifiques de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Notez que la personnalisation est strictement recommandée aux utilisateurs expérimentés. Remarque : si vous utilisez plusieurs applications Adobe, il est fortement conseillé de synchroniser les paramètres de couleur entre les différentes applications (voir la section « Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe » à la page 435). Voir aussi « Personnalisation des paramètres de couleur » à la page 450 Modification de l’aspect du noir CMJN (Illustrator, InDesign) Le noir CMJN pur (N = 100) apparaît comme du noir intense à l’écran, après impression sur une imprimante de bureau autre que PostScript ou après exportation dans un format de fichier RVB. Si vous préférez pouvoir distinguer le noir pur du noir intense tel qu’il apparaîtra après impression sur une presse commerciale, vous pouvez modifier les préférences d’aspect du noir. Ces préférences ne modifient pas les valeurs chromatiques d’un document. 1 Choisissez Edition > Préférences > Aspect du noir (Windows) ou [nom de l’application] > Préférences > Aspect du noir (Mac OS). 2 Choisissez une option A l’écran : Afficher tous les noirs avec précision Affiche le noir CMJN pur en tant que gris foncé. Ce paramètre vous permet de distinguer le noir pur du noir intense.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 437 Gestion des couleurs Afficher tous les noirs comme noirs intenses Affiche le noir CMJN pur en tant que noir intense (RVB=000). Avec ce paramètre, le noir pur et le noir intense sont identiques à l’écran. 3 Choisissez une option Impression / Exportation : Reproduire tous les noirs avec précision Lors d’une impression sur une imprimante de bureau non PostScript ou d’une exportation dans un format de fichier RVB, le noir CMJN pur est reproduit à l’aide des numéros de couleurs du document. Ce paramètre vous permet de distinguer le noir pur du noir intense. Reproduire tous les noirs comme noirs intenses Lors d’une impression sur une imprimante de bureau non PostScript ou d’une exportation dans un format de fichier RVB, le noir CMJN pur est reproduit en noir intense (RVB=000). Avec ce paramètre, le noir pur et le noir intense sont identiques. Gestion des couleurs quadrichromiques et des tons directs Lorsque la gestion des couleurs est activée, toutes les couleurs que vous appliquez ou créez dans une application Adobe faisant appel à cette fonction utilisent automatiquement un profil colorimétrique correspondant au document. Si vous passez à un autre mode colorimétrique, le système de gestion des couleurs utilise les profils appropriés pour convertir la couleur selon le modèle que vous avez choisi. Gardez à l’esprit les indications suivantes lorsque vous utilisez des couleurs quadrichromiques et des tons directs : • Choisissez un espace de travail CMJN correspondant à vos conditions de sortie CMJN afin de pouvoir définir et afficher correctement les couleurs quadrichromiques. • Sélectionnez des couleurs provenant d’une bibliothèque de couleurs. Les applications Adobe sont livrées avec plusieurs bibliothèques de couleurs standard que vous pouvez charger depuis le menu du panneau Nuancier. • (Acrobat, Illustrator et InDesign) Activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour obtenir une prévisualisation précise et homogène des tons directs. • (Acrobat, Illustrator et InDesign) Utilisez des valeurs Lab (valeurs par défaut) pour afficher des tons directs prédéfinis (comme les couleurs des bibliothèques TOYO, PANTONE, DIC et HKS) et les convertir en couleurs quadrichromiques. Les valeurs Lab offrent la plus grande précision possible et garantissent un affichage homogène des couleurs dans toutes les applications Creative Suite. Si vous souhaitez que l’affichage et la sortie de ces couleurs coïncident avec ceux de versions précédentes d’Illustrator ou d’InDesign, utilisez les valeurs CMJN équivalentes. Pour savoir comment passer des valeurs Lab aux valeurs CMJN pour les tons directs, consultez l’aide d’Illustrator ou d’InDesign. Remarque : la gestion des couleurs en tons directs permet d’obtenir une excellente approximation d’un ton direct sur votre périphérique d’épreuvage ou un moniteur. Cependant, Il est difficile de reproduire avec exactitude un ton direct sur un moniteur ou un périphérique d’épreuvage, car de nombreuses encres de tons directs se situent hors des gamme de couleurs de ces périphériques. Gestion des couleurs des images importées Gestion des couleurs des images importées (Illustrator, InDesign) L’intégration des images importées dans l’espace colorimétrique d’un document est différente selon que l’image possède ou non un profil incorporé : • Lorsque vous importez une image sans profil, l’application Adobe utilise le profil du document actif pour définir les couleurs de l’image. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 438 Gestion des couleurs • Lorsque vous importez une image dotée d’un profil incorporé, les règles de couleur de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs déterminent le mode de traitement du profil par l’application Adobe. Voir aussi « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 452 Utilisation d’un flux de travail CMJN sécurisé Un flux de production CMJN sécurisé garantit que les numéros de couleurs CMJN sont conservés jusqu’au périphérique de sortie et ne sont pas convertis par le système de gestion des couleurs. Ce flux de production est utile si vous souhaitez adopter progressivement des pratiques de gestion des couleurs. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des profils CMJN pour vérifier des documents à l’écran et sur papier sans que des couleurs ne soient converties intempestivement pendant la sortie finale. Par défaut, Illustrator et InDesign prennent en charge un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. Ainsi, lorsque vous ouvrez ou importez une image CMJN à laquelle un profil est incorporé, l’application ignore le profil et conserve les numéros de couleurs bruts. Si vous souhaitez que l’application modifie les numéros de couleurs en fonction d’un profil incorporé, définissez la règle de couleur CMJN sur Conserver les profils incorporés dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Vous pouvez facilement restaurer le flux de production CMJN sécurisé en redéfinissant la règle de couleur CMJN sur Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés). Vous pouvez ignorer les paramètres CMJN sécurisés lorsque vous imprimez un document ou que vous l’enregistrez au format Adobe PDF. Toutefois, cette action risque d’entraîner une nouvelle séparation des couleurs. Par exemple, les objets noirs CMJN purs pourraient être de nouveau séparés en objets noirs intenses. Pour plus de détails sur les options de gestion des couleurs pour l’impression et l’enregistrement des fichiers PDF, consultez l’aide. Voir aussi « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 452 Préparation d’images importées pour la gestion des couleurs Suivez les consignes générales ci-après pour préparer la gestion des couleurs des images dans les applications Adobe. • Incorporez un profil compatible ICC lorsque vous enregistrez le fichier. Les formats de fichier JPEG, PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), Photoshop EPS, Format de document volumineux et TIFF prennent en charge les profils incorporés. • Si vous prévoyez de réutiliser une image en couleurs sur différents périphériques ou supports de sortie finale pour l’impression, la vidéo et le Web, préparez l’image à l’aide des couleurs RVB ou Lab chaque fois que cela est possible. Si vous devez enregistrer une image sous un modèle de couleur autre que RVB ou Lab, conservez une copie de l’image d’origine. Les gamme de couleurs des modèles RVB et Lab sont plus étendues que celles de la plupart des périphériques de sortie ; elles conservent un grand nombre de données chromatiques avant d’être converties en une gamme de couleurs de sortie plus limitée. Voir aussi « Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 448UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 439 Gestion des couleurs Affichage ou modification des profils d’images bitmap importées (InDesign) InDesign vous permet d’afficher, de remplacer ou de désactiver les profils des images bitmap importées. Ces opérations peuvent s’avérer nécessaires pour importer une image ne contenant aucun profil ou un profil incorporé de manière incorrecte. Par exemple, si le profil par défaut du fabricant de scanner est incorporé et que vous avez par la suite incorporé un profil personnalisé, vous pouvez attribuer le profil le plus récent. 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si l’image se trouve déjà sur une mise en page, sélectionnez-la, puis choisissez Objet > Couleurs de l’image. • Si vous importez une image, choisissez Fichier > Importer, sélectionnez Afficher les options d’importation, sélectionnez le fichier, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Couleur. 2 Dans le menu Profil, choisissez le profil source à appliquer à l’image du document. Si un profil est actuellement incorporé, son nom apparaît en haut du menu Profil. 3 (Facultatif) Choisissez un mode de rendu, puis cliquez sur OK. Dans la plupart des cas, il est préférable d’utiliser le mode de rendu par défaut. Remarque : vous pouvez également afficher ou modifier les profils d’objets dans Acrobat. Voir aussi « Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil » à la page 450 « Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil (Photoshop) » à la page 449 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne La gestion des couleurs appliquée en vue d’un affichage en ligne diffère nettement de celle utilisée pour des supports d’impression. Vous pouvez mieux contrôler l’aspect du document final imprimé. Avec les supports en ligne, vos moyens d’action sur l’homogénéité des couleurs sont sensiblement limités, car les documents s’affichent sur une grande variété de moniteurs et systèmes d’affichage vidéo non étalonnés. Lorsque vous gérez les couleurs de documents qui seront exclusivement visionnés sur le Web, Adobe vous recommande d’utiliser l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. Il s’agit de l’espace de travail adopté par défaut pour la plupart des paramètres de couleur Adobe. Vérifiez toutefois que l’option sRVB est sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) ou dans les préférences de gestion des couleurs (Acrobat). Lorsque l’espace de travail est défini sur sRVB, toutes les images RVB créées utilisent sRVB comme espace colorimétrique. Lorsque vous utilisez une image dont le profil incorporé n’est pas sRVB, convertissez ses couleurs vers l’espace de travail sRVB avant de l’enregistrer en vue de son utilisation sur le Web. Si vous souhaitez que l’application convertisse automatiquement les couleurs dans leurs équivalents de l’espace sRVB lorsque vous ouvrez l’image, sélectionnez Convertir selon l’espace de travail comme règle de gestion des couleurs RVB. (Assurez-vous que l’espace de travail RVB est défini sur sRVB.) Dans Photoshop et InDesign, vous pouvez aussi convertir manuellement les couleurs vers l’espace sRVB en choisissant la commande Edition > Convertir en profil. Remarque : dans InDesign, la commande Convertir en profil convertit uniquement les couleurs des objets natifs, et non les objets positionnés, du document. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 440 Gestion des couleurs Voir aussi « A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques » à la page 450 « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 452 Gestion des couleurs de fichiers PDF pour un affichage en ligne Lors de l’exportation des fichiers PDF, vous pouvez choisir d’incorporer des profils. Les fichiers PDF avec des profils incorporés reproduisent les couleurs uniformément dans Acrobat 4.0, ou version ultérieure, exécuté avec un système de gestion des couleurs correctement configuré. Gardez à l’esprit que l’incorporation des profils colorimétriques a pour effet de gonfler la taille des fichiers PDF. Les profils RVB sont généralement petits (environ 3 Ko). Cependant, la taille des profils CMJN peut varier de 0,5 Ko à 2 Mo. Voir aussi « Impression avec la gestion des couleurs » à la page 442 « Gestion des couleurs de fichiers PDF pour l’impression » à la page 444 Gestion des couleurs de documents HTML pour un affichage en ligne La plupart des navigateurs Web ne prennent pas en charge la gestion des couleurs. Parmi les navigateurs prenant en charge cette fonction, il est impossible d’affirmer que tous gèrent effectivement les couleurs sachant que certains fonctionnent sur des systèmes dont les moniteurs ne sont pas étalonnés. En outre, rares sont les pages Web dont les images sont associées à des profils incorporés. Si vous gérez un environnement informatique très contrôlé, comme l’intranet d’un studio de création, il est possible d’obtenir un certain niveau de gestion des images HTML en équipant tous les ordinateurs de navigateurs prenant en charge la gestion des couleurs et en étalonnant tous les moniteurs. Vous pouvez déterminer approximativement l’aspect des couleurs sur des moniteurs non étalonnés en utilisant l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. Cependant, étant donné que la reproduction des couleurs varie d’un moniteur non étalonné à un autre, il vous sera impossible de connaître l’étendue des écarts d’affichage possibles. Vérification des couleurs Vérification des couleurs sur épreuves-écran L’une des étapes d’un processus d’édition traditionnel consiste à tirer une épreuve papier de votre document afin de vérifier l’aspect de ses couleurs une fois reproduites sur un périphérique de sortie particulier. Grâce à la gestion des couleurs et à la précision des profils colorimétriques, vous êtes en mesure de vérifier l’épreuve de votre document directement sur le moniteur. Vous pouvez visualiser un aperçu des couleurs telles qu’elles seront reproduites sur un périphérique de sortie donné. Toutefois, retenez que la fiabilité de l’épreuve-écran dépend de la qualité du moniteur, des profils du moniteur et des périphériques de sortie, sans oublier l’éclairage ambiant de votre environnement de travail. Remarque : une épreuve-écran seule ne permet pas d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect des surimpressions imprimées sur une presse offset. Si vous utilisez des documents contenant des surimpressions, activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour prévisualiser avec précision les surimpressions sur une épreuve-écran. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 441 Gestion des couleurs Utilisation d’une épreuve-écran pour prévisualiser à l’écran la sortie finale d’un document A. Le document est créé dans son espace colorimétrique de travail. B. Les valeurs chromatiques du document sont converties selon l’espace colorimétrique du profil d’épreuve choisi (il s’agit généralement du profil du périphérique de sortie). C. Le moniteur affiche l’interprétation des valeurs chromatiques du document par le profil d’épreuve. Epreuvage à l’écran des couleurs 1 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez un paramètre prédéfini correspondant à la condition de sortie à simuler. • Choisissez Personnalisé (Photoshop et InDesign) ou Personnaliser (Illustrator) pour créer un format d’épreuve personnalisé pour une condition de sortie spécifique. Il s’agit de l’option recommandée pour obtenir l’aperçu le plus précis possible de l’impression finale. 2 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Couleurs d’épreuve pour activer et désactiver l’affichage des épreuves-écran. Lorsque l’épreuvage à l’écran est activé, une coche apparaît à côté de la commande Couleurs d’épreuve, et le nom du paramètre prédéfini ou du profil de l’épreuve apparaît en haut de la fenêtre du document. Pour comparer les couleurs de l’image d’origine et celles de l’épreuve-écran, ouvrez le document dans une nouvelle fenêtre avant de configurer l’épreuve-écran. Paramètres prédéfinis de l’épreuve-écran Espace de travail CMJN Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs à partir de l’espace de travail CMJN actif tel qu’il est défini dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Espace CMJN du document (InDesign) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs à partir du profil CMJN du document. Plaque de travail Cyan, Plaque de travail Magenta, Plaque de travail Jaune, Plaque de travail Noir ou Plaques de travail CMJ (Photoshop) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’encrage CMJN en utilisant l’espace de travail CMJN actif. RVB Macintosh ou RVB Windows (Photoshop et Illustrator) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’une image en utilisant un moniteur standard Mac OS ou Windows comme espace de profil d’épreuve à simuler. Ces deux options supposent que le périphérique simulé affiche le document sans utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Aucune de ces options n’est disponible pour les documents Lab ou CMJN. RVB moniteur (Photoshop et Illustrator) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’un document RVB en utilisant l’espace colorimétrique de votre moniteur actif comme espace de profil d’épreuve. Cette option suppose que le périphérique simulé affiche le document sans utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Elle n’est pas disponible pour les documents Lab et CMJN. Options personnalisées d’épreuvage à l’écran Périphérique de simulation Spécifie le profil colorimétrique du périphérique pour lequel vous voulez créer l’épreuve. L’utilité d’un profil se mesure à la précision avec laquelle il décrit le comportement du périphérique. Ce sont généralement les profils personnalisés définis pour des combinaisons spécifiques de papier et d’imprimante qui produisent les meilleures épreuves-écran. Conserver les numéros CMJN ou Conserver les numéros RVB Simule l’aspect des couleurs qui n’auront pas été converties selon l’espace colorimétrique du périphérique de sortie. Cette option est particulièrement utile lorsque vous utilisez un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. A B C UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 442 Gestion des couleurs Mode de rendu (Photoshop et Illustrator) Lorsque l’option Conserver les numéros est désélectionnée, cette option spécifie un mode de rendu pour la conversion des couleurs en fonction du périphérique que vous essayez de simuler. Utiliser la compensation du point noir (Photoshop) Garantit que le détail des ombres de l’image est conservé par la simulation de toute la gamme dynamique du périphérique de sortie. Sélectionnez cette option si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la compensation du point noir lors de l’impression (recommandé dans la plupart des cas). Simuler la teinte du papier Simule le blanc terne du vrai papier en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Simuler l’encre noire Simule le gris foncé que vous obtenez à la place du noir intense sur de nombreuses imprimantes, en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Dans Photoshop, si vous voulez utiliser le format personnalisé comme format d’épreuve par défaut des documents, fermez toutes les fenêtres de document avant de choisir la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve > Personnalisé. Enregistrement ou chargement d’un format d’épreuve personnalisé 1 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve > Personnalisé. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour enregistrer un format d’épreuve personnalisé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour vous assurer que le nouveau paramètre prédéfini apparaît dans le sous-menu Affichage > Format d’épreuve, enregistrez-le à l’emplacement par défaut. • Pour charger un format d’épreuve personnalisé, cliquez sur Charger. Epreuvage à l’écran des couleurs (Acrobat) 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de la sortie. 2 Choisissez le profil colorimétrique d’un périphérique de sortie déterminé dans le menu Profil de simulation. 3 Choisissez une option d’épreuvage à l’écran : Simuler l’encre noire Simule le gris foncé que vous obtenez à la place du noir intense sur de nombreuses imprimantes, en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Simuler la teinte du papier Simule le blanc terne du vrai papier en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Gestion des couleurs de documents pour l’impression Impression avec la gestion des couleurs Les options de gestion des couleurs pour l’impression vous permettent d’indiquer aux applications Adobe comment traiter les données des images sortantes pour que l’imprimante imprime les couleurs conformément à l’affichage sur le moniteur. Les options d’impression des documents appliquant la gestion des couleurs dont vous disposez dépendent de l’application Adobe utilisée, ainsi que du périphérique de sortie choisi. En général, vous avez le choix entre les options suivantes : • Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs • Laisser l’application déterminer les couleurs UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 443 Gestion des couleurs • (Photoshop et InDesign) Ne pas utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Dans ce flux de production, aucune conversion des couleurs n’a lieu. Vous devrez peut-être aussi désactiver la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Cette méthode sert principalement à imprimer des cibles d’essai d’imprimabilité ou à générer des profils personnalisés. Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression Dans ce flux de production, l’application ne convertit pas les couleurs mais envoie toutes les informations de conversion nécessaires au périphérique de sortie. Cette méthode est particulièrement utile lors de l’impression sur des imprimantes photo à jet d’encre, car chaque combinaison de type de papier, résolution d’impression et paramètres d’impression supplémentaires (comme l’impression grande vitesse) nécessite un profil différent. La plupart des nouvelles imprimantes photo à jet d’encre sont livrées avec des profils précis intégrés au pilote. Le fait de laisser l’imprimante sélectionner le profil approprié vous permet d’économiser du temps et de réduire le nombre d’erreurs. Cette méthode est également recommandée si vous n’êtes pas habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Si vous choisissez cette méthode, vous devez impérativement configurer les options d’impression et activer la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Consultez l’aide pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Si vous sélectionnez une imprimante PostScript, vous pouvez exploiter la gestion des couleurs PostScript. La gestion des couleurs PostScript permet de réaliser une sortie composite couleur ou la séparation des couleurs au niveau du processeur d’image pixellisée (processus appelé séparations In-RIP, de sorte qu’un programme a seulement besoin de spécifier des paramètres de séparation et de laisser le périphérique calculer les valeurs chromatiques finales. Les flux de production de sortie avec gestion des couleurs PostScript nécessitent un périphérique de sortie prenant en charge la gestion des couleurs PostScript à l’aide du langage PostScript Niveau 2, version 2017 ou supérieure ou PostScript Niveau 3. Laisser l’application déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression Avec ce flux de production, l’application procède à la conversion de toutes les couleurs et génère ainsi des données chromatiques spécifiques à un périphérique de sortie. L’application utilise les profils colorimétriques attribués pour convertir les couleurs selon la gamme du périphérique de sortie et envoie les valeurs résultantes au périphérique de sortie. La fiabilité de cette méthode dépend de la précision du profil d’imprimante sélectionné. Utilisez ce flux de production lorsque vous disposez de profil ICC personnalisés pour chaque combinaison d’imprimante, d’encre et de papier spécifique. Si vous choisissez cette option, vous devez impérativement désactiver la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Si vous laissez l’application et le pilote d’imprimante gérer simultanément les couleurs lors de l’impression, vous risquez d’obtenir des résultats inattendus. Consultez l’aide pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau Si les profils de sortie livrés avec l’imprimante ne produisent pas les résultats escomptés, vous pouvez obtenir des profils personnalisés de plusieurs façons : • Achetez un profil correspondant à votre type d’imprimante et de papier. Il s’agit généralement de la méthode la plus simple et la moins coûteuse. • Achetez un profil correspondant spécifiquement à votre imprimante et à votre papier. Cette méthode nécessite l’impression d’une cible de profilage sur votre imprimante et votre papier puis l’envoi de cette cible à une entreprise qui créera un profil adapté. Un profil spécifique est plus onéreux qu’un profil standard mais peut produire de meilleurs résultats, car il compense les écarts de fabrication des imprimantes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 444 Gestion des couleurs • Créez votre propre profil en utilisant un système basé sur un scanner. Cette méthode nécessite un logiciel de création de profils ainsi qu’un scanner à plat pour numériser la cible de profilage. Elle donne d’excellents résultats avec les papiers mats mais pas avec les papiers brillants. (Les papiers brillants contiennent souvent des éclaircissants fluorescents qui apparaissent différemment sur un scanner et sous l’éclairage d’une pièce.) • Créez votre propre profil au moyen d’un outil matériel de création de profils. Cette méthode est coûteuse mais fournit les meilleurs résultats. Un outil matériel de bonne qualité peut vous permettre de créer un profil fiable, même sur des papiers brillants. • Peaufinez un profil créé avec l’une des méthodes précédentes à l’aide d’un logiciel de modification de profils. Ce type de logiciel peut être difficile à utiliser, mais il vous permet de corriger les problèmes inhérents à un profil ou tout simplement d’ajuster un profil afin qu’il génère les résultats attendus. Voir aussi « Installation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 447 Gestion des couleurs de fichiers PDF pour l’impression Lorsque vous créez des fichiers Adobe PDF pour une impression commerciale, vous pouvez indiquer comment les informations relatives à la couleur seront représentées. Pour ce faire, il suffit d’utiliser une norme PDF/X. Cependant, vous pouvez aussi spécifier manuellement des options de traitement des couleurs dans la section Sortie de la boîte de dialogue PDF. Pour plus de détails sur la norme PDF/X et la création de fichiers PDF, consultez l’aide. En général, lorsque vous créez des fichiers PDF, vous avez le choix entre les possibilités de traitement de la couleur suivantes : • (PDF/X-3) Aucune conversion des couleurs. Utilisez cette méthode lorsque vous créez un document qui sera imprimé ou affiché sur de nombreux périphériques ou des périphériques inconnus. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une norme PDF/X-3, les profils colorimétriques sont automatiquement incorporés au fichier PDF. • (PDF/X-1a) Toutes les couleurs sont converties selon l’espace colorimétrique CMJN de destination. Utilisez cette méthode pour créer un fichier prêt à l’impression qui ne nécessite aucune autre conversion de couleur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une norme PDF/X-1a, aucun profil n’est incorporé au fichier PDF. • (Illustrator et InDesign) Les couleurs avec profils incorporés sont converties selon l’espace colorimétrique de destination, mais les numéros des couleurs sans profil incorporé sont conservés. Vous pouvez sélectionner manuellement cette option dans la section Sortie de la boîte de dialogue PDF. Utilisez cette méthode si le document contient des images CMJN sans gestion des couleurs et si vous voulez être sûr que les numéros de couleurs seront conservés. Remarque : toutes les informations de tons directs sont préservées lors de la conversion des couleurs ; seuls les équivalents quadri sont convertis vers l’espace colorimétrique désigné. Voir aussi « Utilisation d’un flux de travail CMJN sécurisé » à la page 438UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 445 Gestion des couleurs Utilisation des profils colorimétriques A propos des profils colorimétriques Une gestion des couleurs homogène et précise exige des profils fiables, conformes à la norme ICC, pour tous vos périphériques couleur. Par exemple, sans un profil de scanner approprié, une image numérisée parfaite peut présenter des défauts dans un autre programme, en raison d’une simple différence entre le scanner et le logiciel d’affichage graphique. Cette représentation équivoque peut vous amener à retoucher voire détériorer inutilement une image d’une qualité satisfaisante. Avec un profil fiable, le programme qui importe l’image peut rectifier tous les écarts entre les périphériques et ainsi afficher les couleurs réelles d’une image numérisée. Un système de gestion des couleurs utilise les types de profils suivants : Profils de moniteur Ils indiquent comment le moniteur reproduit actuellement les couleurs. Il s’agit des premiers profils à créer, car l’affichage fidèle des couleurs sur un moniteur permet de prendre des décisions importantes sur les couleurs lors du processus de conception. Si ce que vous voyez à l’écran ne correspond pas aux couleurs réelles du document, vous ne serez pas en mesure de garantir l’homogénéité des couleurs. Profils de périphérique d’entrée Ils décrivent les couleurs qu’un périphérique d’entrée est capable de capturer ou de scanner. Si votre appareil photo numérique propose plusieurs profils, Adobe vous recommande de sélectionner le profil Adobe RVB. A défaut, utilisez le profil sRVB (profil par défaut de la plupart des appareils photo). Les utilisateurs expérimentés peuvent également utiliser d’autres profils adaptés à diverses sources lumineuses. Pour les profils de scanner, certains photographes créent des profils distincts pour chaque type ou marque de film qu’ils numérisent. Profils de périphérique de sortie Ils décrivent l’espace colorimétrique de périphériques de sortie comme les imprimantes de bureau ou les presses d’imprimerie. Le système de gestion des couleurs utilise les profils de périphérique de sortie pour associer correctement les couleurs d’un document à celles de la gamme de l’espace colorimétrique du périphérique de sortie. Le profil de sortie doit également tenir compte des conditions d’impression spécifiques, telles que le type de papier et l’encre. Par exemple, un papier brillant permet d’obtenir une gamme des couleurs différente de celle obtenue sur du papier mat. La plupart des pilotes d’imprimante sont livrés avec des profils colorimétriques intégrés. Il est recommandé de tester ces profils avant d’investir dans des profils personnalisés. Profils de document Ils définissent l’espace colorimétrique RVB ou CMJN d’un document. En attribuant un profil à un document (on dit alors que vous lui attribuez une description), l’application fournit une définition de l’aspect des couleurs réelles du document. Par exemple, les valeurs R=127, V=12 et B=107 représentent un jeu de numéros que les périphériques afficheront de manière différente. Toutefois, lorsqu’ils sont associés à l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB, ces numéros indiquent une couleur ou une longueur d’onde de lumière réelle. Dans le présent cas de figure, il s’agit d’une teinte spécifique de violet. Lorsque la gestion des couleurs est activée, les applications Adobe attribuent automatiquement aux nouveaux documents un profil basé sur les options Espace de travail de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Les documents sans profils sont dits sans description (ou sans balise) et contiennent uniquement des numéros de couleurs bruts. Lorsque vous utilisez des documents sans description, les applications Adobe utilisent le profil de l’espace colorimétrique actif pour afficher les couleurs et les modifier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 446 Gestion des couleurs Gestion des couleurs à l’aide de profils A. Les profils décrivent les espaces colorimétriques du périphérique d’entrée et du document. B. A partir des informations contenues dans les profils, le système de gestion des couleurs identifie les couleurs réelles du document. C. Le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les valeurs numériques du document dans l’espace colorimétrique du moniteur à l’aide des informations contenues dans le profil de celui-ci. D. Le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les valeurs numériques du document selon les valeurs colorimétriques du périphérique de sortie à l’aide des informations contenues dans le profil de celui-ci, afin d’imprimer les couleurs réelles. Voir aussi « Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant » à la page 447 « Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression » à la page 443 « Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau » à la page 443 « A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques » à la page 450 A propos de l’étalonnage et de la caractérisation du moniteur Les logiciels de profilage permettent à la fois d’étalonner et de caractériser un moniteur. Etalonner un moniteur signifie le rendre conforme à un standard prédéfini. Par exemple, vous pouvez régler votre moniteur afin qu’il affiche les couleurs en utilisant la température de la couleur du point blanc standard de l’industrie graphique de 5 000 degrés Kelvin. Caractériser un moniteur revient simplement à créer un profil qui décrit comment le moniteur reproduit actuellement les couleurs. L’étalonnage d’un moniteur implique le réglage des paramètres vidéo suivants : Luminosité et contraste Respectivement, niveau et écart d’intensité de l’affichage. Ces paramètres sont identiques à ceux utilisés en télévision. Un utilitaire d’étalonnage de moniteur permet de définir la gamme optimale de luminosité et de contraste pour l’étalonnage. Gamma Mesure de la luminosité des tons moyens. Les valeurs comprises entre le noir et le blanc produites par un moniteur ne sont pas linéaires. Si vous les reportez sur un graphe, elles forment une courbe et non une droite. Le gamma définit la valeur de cette courbe à mi-chemin entre le blanc et le noir. Luminophores Substances utilisées par les moniteurs à tube cathodique pour l’émission de lumière. Les caractéristiques colorimétriques varient d’un luminophore à l’autre. Point blanc Couleur et intensité du blanc le plus brillant que le moniteur puisse reproduire. A B C D UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 447 Gestion des couleurs Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant L’étalonnage du moniteur consiste à le régler pour le rendre conforme à une spécification donnée. Une fois que le moniteur est étalonné, l’utilitaire de profilage vous permet d’enregistrer un profil colorimétrique. Le profil décrit la façon dont le moniteur traite les couleurs : les couleurs qu’il peut et ne peut pas afficher et la méthode de conversion des valeurs numériques des couleurs de l’image pour qu’elles s’affichent correctement. 1 Veillez à allumer votre moniteur au moins une demi-heure à l’avance. Ce délai est suffisant pour le préchauffage du moniteur et la production de sorties plus homogènes. 2 Vérifiez que votre moniteur affiche au moins des milliers de couleurs. Dans l’idéal, vérifiez que votre moniteur dispose d’un affichage en millions de couleurs ou en 24 bits au minimum. 3 Supprimez les motifs d’arrière-plan colorés du bureau de votre ordinateur, et configurez votre bureau de sorte qu’il n’affiche que des gris neutres. Les motifs chargés et les couleurs vives autour d’un document faussent la perception de la couleur. 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes pour étalonner votre moniteur et créer son profil : • Dans Windows, installez et utilisez un utilitaire d’étalonnage de moniteur. • Sous Mac OS, utilisez l’utilitaire d’étalonnage situé sous l’onglet Préférences système/ Affichages/ Couleur. • Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, utilisez un logiciel tiers et des appareils de mesure. En général, l’utilisation conjointe d’un appareil de mesure, comme un colorimètre, et d’un logiciel permet de créer des profils plus fiables, car un instrument peut mesurer les couleurs affichées sur un moniteur beaucoup plus précisément que l’œil humain. Remarque : les performances d’un moniteur évoluent et s’amoindrissent au fil du temps. Il est donc conseillé d’étalonner votre moniteur et de lui créer un nouveau profil environ tous les mois. S’il vous semble difficile, voire impossible, de procéder à cette opération selon les normes, c’est que le moniteur est sans doute trop vieux et usé. La plupart des logiciels de profilage attribuent automatiquement le nouveau profil en tant que profil par défaut du moniteur. Pour savoir comment attribuer manuellement le profil du moniteur, consultez l’aide de votre système d’exploitation. Installation d’un profil colorimétrique Lorsque vous installez un nouveau périphérique, des profils colorimétriques sont généralement ajoutés sur votre ordinateur. La fiabilité de ces profils (souvent appelés profils génériques ou profils prêts à l’emploi) varie d’un fabricant à l’autre. Vous pouvez également obtenir des profils de périphérique en vous adressant à votre prestataire de services, en les téléchargeant depuis Internet ou en créant des profils personnalisés à l’aide d’un équipement de profilage professionnel. • Sous Windows, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un profil, puis sélectionnez Installer un profil. Vous pouvez aussi copier les profils dans le dossier WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\color. • Sous Mac OS, copiez les profils dans le dossier /Bibliothèque/ColorSync/Profiles ou le dossier /Users/[nom d’utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/ColorSync/Profiles. Après avoir installé les profils colorimétriques, veillez à redémarrer les applications Adobe. Voir aussi « Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau » à la page 443UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 448 Gestion des couleurs Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique Pour incorporer un profil colorimétrique dans un document créé dans Photoshop, Illustrator ou InDesign, vous devez enregistrer ou exporter ce dernier dans un format prenant en charge les profils ICC. 1 Enregistrez ou exportez le document dans l’un des formats suivants : Adobe PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), JPEG, Photoshop EPS, Format de document volumineux ou TIFF. 2 Sélectionnez l’option d’incorporation des profils ICC. Le nom et l’emplacement exacts de cette option varient selon les applications. Consultez l’aide d’Adobe pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique (Acrobat) Vous pouvez incorporer un profil colorimétrique à un objet ou à un fichier PDF entier. Acrobat joint le profil approprié, spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs, à l’espace colorimétrique sélectionné dans le fichier PDF. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous aux rubriques de conversion des couleurs dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document Il existe très peu de situations qui nécessitent une modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document. Ceci est dû au fait que votre application attribue automatiquement le profil colorimétrique en fonction des paramètres que vous sélectionnez dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Vous devez uniquement modifier manuellement un profil colorimétrique lorsque vous préparez un document pour une autre destination de sortie ou que vous corrigez le comportement d’une règle qui ne doit plus être implémentée dans le document. La modification d’un profil est généralement réservée aux utilisateurs expérimentés. Vous pouvez modifier le profil colorimétrique d’un document en procédant de l’une des manières suivantes : • Attribuez un nouveau profil. Les numéros de couleurs du document restent identiques, mais le nouveau profil risque de modifier considérablement l’aspect des couleurs telles qu’elles s’affichent sur votre moniteur. • Supprimez le profil afin que le document n’utilise plus la gestion des couleurs. • (Acrobat, Photoshop et InDesign) Convertissez les couleurs du document selon l’espace colorimétrique d’un autre profil. Les numéros de couleurs sont décalés pour que l’aspect des couleurs d’origine soit conservé. Attribution ou suppression d’un profil colorimétrique (Illustrator, Photoshop) 1 Choisissez Edition > Attribuer un profil. 2 Sélectionnez une option, puis cliquez sur OK : Ne pas appliquer la gestion des couleurs/Ne pas gérer les couleurs de ce document Supprime le profil existant du document. Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous êtes sûr de ne pas vouloir appliquer la gestion des couleurs au document. Lorsque le profil est supprimé d’un document, l’aspect des couleurs est défini par les profils d’espace de travail de l’application. Espace de travail [modèle de couleur : espace de travail] Attribue le profil d’espace de travail au document. Profil Vous permet de sélectionner un autre profil. L’application attribue le nouveau profil au document sans convertir les couleurs selon l’espace du profil. Cela peut modifier complètement l’aspect des couleurs affichées sur votre moniteur. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 448UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 449 Gestion des couleurs Attribution ou suppression d’un profil colorimétrique (InDesign) 1 Choisissez Edition > Attribuer des profils. 2 Pour Profil RVB et Profil CMJN, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Supprimer (utiliser l’espace de travail actuel) Supprime le profil existant du document. Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous êtes sûr de ne pas vouloir appliquer la gestion des couleurs au document. Une fois le profil supprimé du document, l’aspect des couleurs est défini par les profils de l’espace de travail de l’application. Il n’est alors plus possible d’incorporer un profil au document. Attribuer l’espace de travail actuel [espace de travail] Attribue le profil d’espace de travail au document. Attribuer un profil Vous permet de sélectionner un autre profil. L’application attribue le nouveau profil au document sans convertir les couleurs selon l’espace du profil. Cela peut modifier complètement l’aspect des couleurs affichées sur votre moniteur. 3 Choisissez un mode de rendu pour chaque type d’image du document : vous pouvez choisir l’un des quatre modes standard ou l’option Utiliser le rendu des couleurs qui utilise le mode de rendu en cours de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Pour plus de détails sur les modes de rendu, consultez l’aide. Les types d’images sont les suivants : Rendu des couleurs en aplat Définit le mode de rendu pour toutes les illustrations vectorielles (zones de couleur unie) des objets natifs InDesign. Rendu des images par défaut Définit le mode de rendu par défaut des images bitmap placées dans InDesign. Vous pouvez ignorer ce paramètre pour certaines images. Rendu après application du dégradé Applique le mode de rendu à l’espace colorimétrique final ou d’épreuve pour les couleurs résultant d’interactions entre les transparences de la page. Utilisez cette option lorsque votre document contient des objets transparents. 4 Pour prévisualiser les effets du nouveau profil dans le document, sélectionnez Aperçu, puis cliquez sur OK. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 448 « Affichage ou modification des profils d’images bitmap importées (InDesign) » à la page 439 Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil (Photoshop) 1 Choisissez Edition > Convertir en profil. 2 Dans la section Espace de destination, choisissez le profil colorimétrique vers lequel convertir les couleurs du document. Le document sera converti à ce nouveau profil et en contiendra la description. 3 Dans la section Options de conversion, indiquez un moteur de gestion des couleurs, un mode de rendu et des options de point noir et de simulation (le cas échéant) (voir la section « Options de conversion des couleurs » à la page 453). 4 Pour aplatir tous les calques du document en un seul calque après conversion, sélectionnez Aplatir l’image. 5 Pour prévisualiser les effets de la conversion dans le document, sélectionnez Aperçu. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 448UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 450 Gestion des couleurs Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil Vous convertissez les couleurs dans un fichier PDF à l’aide de l’outil Convertir les couleurs dans la barre d’outils Impression. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous aux rubriques de conversion des couleurs dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Paramètres de couleur Personnalisation des paramètres de couleur Pour la plupart des flux de production utilisant la gestion des couleurs, il est préférable d’utiliser un paramètre de couleur prédéfini ayant fait l’objet d’un test par Adobe Systems. Ne modifiez des options spécifiques que si vous êtes habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs et que vous êtes sûr des changements que vous allez effectuer. Après avoir personnalisé des options, vous pouvez les enregistrer en tant que paramètre prédéfini afin de pouvoir les réutiliser et les partager avec d’autres utilisateurs ou applications. • Pour enregistrer des paramètres de couleur en tant que paramètre prédéfini, cliquez sur Enregistrer dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Pour vous assurer que l’application affichera le nom du paramètre dans cette boîte de dialogue, enregistrez le fichier dans l’emplacement par défaut. Si vous enregistrez le fichier dans un autre emplacement, vous devrez le charger avant de pouvoir sélectionner le paramètre. • Pour charger un paramètre prédéfini de couleur qui n’a pas été enregistré dans l’emplacement standard, cliquez sur Charger dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs, sélectionnez le fichier à charger, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Remarque : il est impossible d’enregistrer des paramètres de couleur personnalisés dans Acrobat. Pour partager des paramètres de couleur personnalisés avec Acrobat, vous devez créer le fichier dans InDesign, Illustrator ou Photoshop avant de l’enregistrer dans le dossier des paramètres par défaut. Il sera alors disponible dans la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Vous avez également la possibilité d’ajouter manuellement des paramètres à ce dossier. A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques L’expression espace de travail désigne un espace colorimétrique intermédiaire utilisé pour définir des couleurs et les modifier dans les applications Adobe. Chaque modèle de couleur est associé à un profil d’espace de travail. Vous pouvez choisir les profils d’espace de travail dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Un profil d’espace de travail fait office de profil source pour les documents nouvellement créés qui utilisent le modèle de couleur associé. Par exemple, si le profil d’espace de travail RVB défini est Adobe RVB (1998), tous les documents RVB que vous créerez utiliseront des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB (1998). Les espaces de travail déterminent également l’aspect des couleurs dans les documents sans description. Si vous ouvrez un document dont le profil colorimétrique incorporé ne correspond pas au profil d’espace de travail, l’application utilise une règle de gestion des couleurs pour déterminer le mode de traitement des données chromatiques. Dans la plupart des cas, la règle par défaut consiste à conserver le profil incorporé. Voir aussi « A propos des profils colorimétriques manquants et non concordants » à la page 451 « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 452UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 451 Gestion des couleurs Options des espaces de travail Pour afficher les options d’un espace de travail dans Photoshop, Illustrator et InDesign, sélectionnez Edition > Couleurs. Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour afficher la description d’un profil, sélectionnez-le, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. RVB Détermine l’espace colorimétrique RVB de l’application. En règle générale, il est recommandé de choisir Adobe RVB ou sRVB plutôt que le profil d’un périphérique spécifique (comme un profil de moniteur). L’option sRVB est recommandée lorsque vous préparez des images pour les placer sur le Web, car elle définit l’espace colorimétrique du moniteur standard utilisé pour visualiser les images sur le Web. Il s’agit également du choix idéal lorsque vous utilisez des images issues d’appareils photo numériques grand public, car la plupart de ces appareils utilisent l’espace sRVB comme espace colorimétrique par défaut. L’option Adobe RVB est recommandée lorsque vous préparez des documents en vue de leur impression, car la gamme Adobe RVB comprend des couleurs imprimables (des cyans et des bleus, par exemple) qu’il est impossible de définir à l’aide de l’option sRVB. Il s’agit également du choix idéal lorsque vous utilisez des images issues d’appareils photo numériques de type professionnel, car la plupart de ces appareils utilisent l’espace Adobe RVB comme espace colorimétrique par défaut. CMJN Détermine l’espace colorimétrique CMJN de l’application. Tous les espaces de travail CMJN dépendent d’un périphérique, ce qui signifie qu’ils sont basés sur des combinaisons d’encre et de papier réelles. Les espaces de travail CMJN fournis par Adobe sont basés sur les conditions d’impression commerciale standard. Niveaux de gris Détermine l’espace colorimétrique des niveaux de gris de l’application. Ton direct (Photoshop) Spécifie l’engraissement à utiliser lors de l’affichage des couches de tons directs et bichromes. Remarque : dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser l’espace colorimétrique dans un mode de sortie incorporé plutôt que l’espace colorimétrique d’un document pour la visualisation et l’impression. Pour plus d’informations sur les modes de sortie, consultez l’aide d’Acrobat. Les applications Adobe sont livrées avec un ensemble standard de profils d’espace de travail recommandés et testés par Adobe Systems pour la majorité des flux de gestion des couleurs. Par défaut, seuls ces profils figurent dans les menus d’espace de travail. Pour afficher d’autres profils colorimétriques installés sur le système, sélectionnez Mode avancé (Illustrator et InDesign) ou Plus d’options (Photoshop). Un profil colorimétrique doit être bidirectionnel, c’est-à-dire qu’il doit contenir des spécifications de conversion vers un espace colorimétrique ou depuis celui-ci pour apparaître dans les menus d’espace de travail. Remarque : vous pouvez créer des profils d’espace de travail personnalisés dans Photoshop. Cependant, Adobe vous recommande d’utiliser un profil d’espace de travail standard plutôt que de créer un profil personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, consultez la base de connaissances du support technique Photoshop à l’adresse suivante : www.adobe.com/fr/support/products/photoshop.html. A propos des profils colorimétriques manquants et non concordants Avec un nouveau document, le flux de production de couleurs est généralement transparent : sauf instruction contraire, le document utilise le profil d’espace de travail associé à son mode colorimétrique pour créer et modifier des couleurs. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 452 Gestion des couleurs Certains documents existants peuvent toutefois ne pas utiliser le profil d’espace de travail spécifié et ne pas bénéficier de la gestion des couleurs. Les exceptions suivantes sont souvent observées dans un flux de production appliquant la gestion des couleurs : • Vous pouvez ouvrir un document ou importer des données chromatiques (par exemple, par copier-coller ou glisser-déposer) depuis un document ne contenant aucune description de profil. Cela se produit souvent lorsque vous ouvrez un document créé dans une application qui ne reconnaît pas la gestion des couleurs ou dans laquelle cette fonction est désactivée. • Vous pouvez ouvrir un document ou importer des données chromatiques depuis un document contenant une description de profil différente de l’espace de travail actif. Cela peut se produire lorsque vous ouvrez un document créé avec des paramètres de gestion des couleurs différents ou un document numérisé et contenant une description de profil de scanner. Dans les deux cas, l’application utilise une règle de gestion des couleurs pour choisir le mode de traitement des données chromatiques du document. Si le profil est manquant ou ne correspond pas à l’espace de travail, il se peut que l’application affiche un message d’avertissement (l’affichage dépend des options définies dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs). Les avertissements sur les profils sont désactivés par défaut, mais vous pouvez les activer pour vous assurer que la gestion des couleurs appropriée des documents s’effectue au cas par cas. Les messages d’avertissement varient d’une application à une autre, mais vous disposez généralement des options suivantes : • (Recommandé) Laisser le document ou les données chromatiques importées inchangés. Par exemple, vous pouvez choisir d’utiliser le profil incorporé (s’il en existe un), de laisser le document sans profil colorimétrique (s’il n’en existe aucun) ou de conserver les numéros des données chromatiques collées. • Ajuster le document ou les données chromatiques importées. Par exemple, lorsque vous ouvrez un document sans profil colorimétrique, vous pouvez lui attribuer celui de l’espace de travail actif ou un autre profil. Lorsque vous ouvrez un document dont le profil colorimétrique n’est pas concordant, vous pouvez ignorer le profil ou convertir les couleurs selon l’espace de travail actif. Lorsque vous importez des données chromatiques, vous pouvez convertir les couleurs selon l’espace de travail actif afin de préserver leur aspect. Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs Une règle de gestion des couleurs détermine comment l’application traite les données chromatiques lorsque vous ouvrez un document ou importez une image. Vous pouvez choisir différentes règles pour les images RVB et CMJN et indiquer à quel moment les messages d’avertissement doivent apparaître. Pour afficher les options des règles de gestion des couleurs, choisissez Edition > Couleurs. Pour afficher la description d’une règle, sélectionnez-la, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. RVB, CMJN et Niveaux de gris Indique la règle à suivre lorsque des couleurs sont amenées dans l’espace de travail actif (lors de l’ouverture de fichiers ou l’importation d’images dans le document actif). (L’option Niveaux de gris est uniquement disponible dans Photoshop.) Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Conserver les profils incorporés Conserve toujours les profils colorimétriques incorporés à l’ouverture des fichiers. Cette option est recommandée pour la plupart des flux de production, car elle permet une gestion homogène des couleurs. Toutefois, si vous souhaitez conserver les numéros CMJN, sélectionnez l’option Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés). • Convertir selon l’espace de travail Convertit les couleurs en fonction du profil d’espace de travail actif à l’ouverture des fichiers et lors de l’importation d’images. Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que toutes les couleurs utilisent un seul profil (le profil d’espace de travail actif).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 453 Gestion des couleurs • Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés) Cette option est disponible dans InDesign et Illustrator pour les couleurs CMJN. Elle conserve les numéros de couleurs à l’ouverture des fichiers et lors de l’importation d’images, mais elle vous permet également d’utiliser la gestion des couleurs pour afficher correctement les couleurs dans les applications Adobe. Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez utiliser un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. Dans InDesign, vous pouvez remplacer cette règle pour un seul objet à la fois en choisissant Objet > Couleurs de l’image. • Désactivé Ne tient aucun compte des profils colorimétriques incorporés lors de l’ouverture de fichiers et de l’importation d’images et n’attribue pas le profil d’espace de travail aux nouveaux documents. Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez ignorer les métadonnées chromatiques fournies par l’auteur du document d’origine. Non-concordances des profils : choix à l’ouverture Affiche un message dès que vous ouvrez un document contenant la description d’un profil différent de l’espace de travail actif. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs des documents au cas par cas. Non-concordances des profils : choix au collage Affiche un message lorsqu’un profil colorimétrique n’est pas concordant, car les couleurs sont importées dans un document par collage ou par glisser-déposer. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs collées au cas par cas. Profils manquants : choix à l’ouverture Affiche un message dès que vous ouvrez un document sans description. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs des documents au cas par cas. Options de conversion des couleurs Les options de conversion des couleurs vous permettent de contrôler la façon dont l’application gère les couleurs d’un document lorsque celui-ci est déplacé d’un espace colorimétrique à un autre. Ne modifiez ces options que si vous êtes habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs et que vous êtes sûr des changements que vous allez effectuer. Pour afficher les options de conversion, choisissez Edition > Couleurs, puis sélectionnez Mode avancé (Illustrator et InDesign) ou Plus d’options (Photoshop). Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Moteur Désigne le module de gestion des couleurs (MGC) utilisé pour associer la gamme d’un espace colorimétrique à celle d’un autre espace. Le moteur par défaut Adobe (ACE) répond à tous les besoins de conversion de la plupart des utilisateurs. Pour afficher la description d’une option de moteur ou de rendu, sélectionnez-la, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Mode (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) Indique le mode de rendu utilisé pour convertir un espace colorimétrique en un autre. Les différences entre les modes de rendu sont perceptibles uniquement lorsque vous imprimez un document ou le convertissez en un espace de travail distinct. Utiliser la compensation du point noir Garantit que le détail des ombres de l’image est conservé par la simulation de toute la gamme dynamique du périphérique de sortie. Sélectionnez cette option si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la compensation du point noir lors de l’impression (recommandé dans la plupart des cas). Simulation (Photoshop) Indique si les couleurs doivent être simulées lors de la conversion d’images à 8 bits par couche entre différents espaces colorimétriques. Lorsque l’option Simulation est sélectionnée, Photoshop mélange des couleurs dans l’espace colorimétrique cible, afin de simuler une couleur qu’il ne possède pas mais qui existe dans l’espace source. La simulation atténue considérablement l’effet de bandes mais risque d’augmenter la taille du fichier lors de la compression des images à diffuser sur le Web.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 454 Gestion des couleurs A propos des modes de rendu Le mode de rendu détermine la façon dont le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les couleurs d’un espace colorimétrique à l’autre. Les règles de détermination d’ajustement des couleurs source varient selon les modes de rendu. Par exemple, les couleurs comprises dans la gamme cible peuvent rester intactes ou être ajustées de sorte qu’elles conservent leur champ de relations visuelles d’origine lorsqu’elles sont converties dans une gamme cible plus petite. Le résultat du mode de rendu choisi dépend du contenu graphique des documents et des profils utilisés pour définir les espaces colorimétriques. Certains profils produisent les mêmes résultats avec des modes de rendu différents. D’une manière générale, il est préférable d’utiliser le mode de rendu par défaut du paramètre de couleur sélectionné, car il a été testé par Adobe Systems pour répondre aux normes industrielles. Par exemple, si vous choisissez un paramètre de couleur pour l’Amérique du Nord ou l’Europe, le mode de rendu par défaut est Colorimétrie relative. Si vous choisissez un paramètre de couleur pour le Japon, le mode de rendu par défaut est Perception. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de rendu lorsque vous définissez des options de conversion des couleurs pour le système de gestion des couleurs, des couleurs d’épreuve-écran et des illustrations : Perception Ce mode vise à conserver les relations visuelles entre les couleurs, afin qu’elles soient perçues comme naturelles à l’œil nu, même si les valeurs chromatiques peuvent elles-mêmes varier. Ce mode convient aux images photographiques contenant beaucoup de couleurs non imprimables. Il s’agit du mode de rendu standard de l’industrie de l’imprimerie japonaise. Saturation Ce mode privilégie l’éclat des couleurs au détriment de leur précision. Ce mode de rendu convient aux images d’entreprise, telles que des graphiques ou des diagrammes, dans lesquelles l’éclat des couleurs saturées est plus important que la précision des relations visuelles entre les couleurs. Colorimétrie relative Ce mode compare les tons clairs les plus intenses de l’espace colorimétrique source à ceux de l’espace colorimétrique cible et décale toutes les couleurs en conséquence. Les couleurs non imprimables sont remplacées par la couleur imprimable la plus proche dans l’espace colorimétrique cible. Le mode Colorimétrie relative préserve davantage les couleurs originales de l’image que le mode Perception. Il s’agit du mode de rendu standard de l’industrie de l’imprimerie en Amérique du Nord et en Europe. Colorimétrie absolue Ce mode conserve les couleurs de la gamme cible intactes. Toutes les couleurs hors de la gamme sont écrêtées. Les couleurs ne sont pas décalées vers le point blanc de destination. Ce mode de rendu vise à privilégier l’exactitude des couleurs au détriment des relations chromatiques. Il permet de simuler les couleurs produites par un périphérique donné lors de la phase d’épreuvage. Ce mode est particulièrement utile pour déterminer par prévisualisation la façon dont la couleur du papier agit sur les couleurs imprimées. Options avancées dans Photoshop Dans Photoshop, pour afficher les options avancées de gestion des couleurs, choisissez Edition > Couleurs, puis sélectionnez Plus d’options. Désaturer les couleurs du moniteur de Indique si les couleurs doivent être désaturées selon la quantité spécifiée lorsqu’elles sont affichées sur le moniteur. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez visualiser la plage complète des espaces colorimétriques dont la gamme est plus étendue que celle du moniteur. Toutefois, l’affichage du moniteur ne correspond plus à l’impression. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, des couleurs distinctes dans l’image risquent d’être identiques à l’affichage. Fusionner les couleurs RVB avec le gamma Contrôle la façon dont les couleurs RVB fusionnent pour produire des données composites (par exemple, lorsque les calques sont fusionnés ou peints en mode Normal). Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, les couleurs RVB sont fusionnées dans l’espace colorimétrique correspondant au gamma spécifié. Un UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 455 Gestion des couleurs gamma de 1,00 est considéré comme « chromatiquement correct » et doit générer un minimum d’aspérités. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, les couleurs RVB sont fusionnées directement dans l’espace colorimétrique du document. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez l’option Fusionner les couleurs RVB avec le gamma, les documents multicalques n’auront pas le même aspect lorsqu’ils seront affichés dans Photoshop et dans d’autres applications.456 Chapitre 15 : Impression Que vous envoyez une ébauche sur une imprimante jet d'encre ou laser, que vous fournissiez un document multicolore à un prestataire de services externe ou que vous imprimiez un document technique complexe avec des formats de page personnalisés, la boîte de dialogue d'impression contient des options qui garantissent que l'aspect du document final répondra à vos attentes. Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Forums sur l'impression et le prépresse : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Centre de ressources Adobe sur l'impression : www.adobe.com/go/print_resource Tâches d’impression de base Impression d'un fichier PDF Si l'option d'impression souhaitée se trouve dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, définissez-la à cet endroit plutôt que dans le pilote de l'imprimante. L'ordinateur sur lequel vous souhaitez imprimer un fichier Adobe® PDF doit être connecté à une imprimante locale, partagée ou réseau et cet ordinateur doit être configuré pour utiliser cette imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que vous avez installé le pilote d'imprimante approprié. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Configuration de l'impression afin de choisir un format de papier, l'orientation des pages et d'autres options d'impression générales. Les options varient en fonction de l'imprimante et du pilote utilisés. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation qui accompagne le pilote d'imprimante. 3 Pour imprimer des commentaires, tels que des notes autocollantes dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Commentaires, puis Imprimer les fenêtres et les notes. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer ou choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 5 Choisissez une imprimante dans le menu situé en haut de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. 6 Définissez des options supplémentaires de pilote d'imprimante dans votre système d'exploitation. 7 Pour imprimer des commentaires ou des formulaires, choisissez une option du menu déroulant Commentaires et formulaires. 8 Indiquez les pages que vous souhaitez imprimer, puis cliquez sur OK. Options de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer La plupart des options de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer d'Adobe Acrobat® sont les mêmes pour les autres applications. Cependant, il existe des changements mineurs spécifiques au système d'exploitation. Commentaires et formulaires Permet de spécifier le contenu visible à imprimer. • Document Imprime le contenu du document et les champs de formulaire. • Document et annotations Imprime le contenu du document, les champs de formulaire et les commentaires. • Document et tampons Imprime le document, les champs de formulaire et les tampons, mais aucune autre annotation telle que les notes et les traits au crayon. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 457 Impression • Champs de formulaire uniquement Imprime les champs de formulaire interactifs mais pas le contenu du document. Vue active/Image sélectionnée Imprime la zone de page (texte, commentaires, etc.) actuellement visible. Le nom de cette option change selon la sélection : aucune page sélectionnée (Vue active), sélection de page (Pages sélectionnées) ou portion d'une page sélectionnée à l'aide de l'outil Instantané (Image sélectionnée). Page active Imprime la page actuellement visible. Pages Spécifie l'étendue de pages à imprimer dans le fichier PDF ouvert. Séparez les numéros de pages d’un groupe à l’aide de traits d’union et plusieurs pages ou groupes de pages à l’aide de virgules ou d’espaces. Si l'option Utiliser les numéros de page logiques est sélectionnée dans les préférences d'affichage, vous pouvez saisir des numéros qui correspondent à la numérotation imprimée sur les pages en chiffres romains ou aux numéros de page réels. Si, par exemple, la première page d'un document est iii, saisissez iii ou 1 pour imprimer cette page. La sélection de Pages impaires ou Pages paires a un impact sur les pages imprimées dans l'étendue choisie. Par exemple, l'étendue 2, 7-10 avec l'option Pages paires permet d'imprimer les pages 2, 8 et 10 uniquement. Pour imprimer à partir d'une page précise jusqu'à la fin du document, entrez le numéro de page suivi d'un tiret. Par exemple « 11- » imprime le document de la page 11 à la dernière page. Jeu partiel Activez Toutes les pages, Pages impaires ou Pages paires pour choisir les pages à imprimer dans l'étendue spécifiée. Inverser Imprime les pages en ordre inverse. Si vous spécifiez des étendue de pages, l'impression s'effectue dans l'ordre inverse de la saisie des numéros. Par exemple, si la zone Pages comprend 3-5, 7-10, l'option Inverser permet d'imprimer les pages 10-7, puis 5–3. Mise à l’échelle Réduit, agrandit ou divise les pages lors de l'impression. • Aucun Imprime la partie supérieure gauche ou le centre de la page (si l'option Rotation auto. et centrage des pages est activée) sans mise à l'échelle. Les pages ou zones sélectionnées ne tenant pas sur la feuille de papier sont détourées. • Ajuster à la zone d'impression Réduit ou agrandit chaque page de manière à l'ajuster à la zone d'impression du format de papier sélectionné. Pour les imprimantes PostScript®, le fichier PPD détermine la zone d'impression du papier. • Réduire à la zone d'impression Réduit les grandes pages de manière à les faire correspondre au format de papier sélectionné, sans toutefois agrandir les petites pages. Si une zone de page est sélectionnée et qu'elle est plus grande que la zone d'impression du format de papier sélectionné, elle est mise à l'échelle de manière à correspondre à cette zone. Cette option est toujours active lors de l'impression N pages par feuille. • Juxtaposer les grandes pages Dispose en mosaïque les pages d'une taille supérieure au format de papier sélectionné à l'échelle spécifiée. Ces pages sont réparties sur plusieurs feuilles de papier. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Echelle de la mosaïque, Chevauchement, Traits de coupe et Intitulés. • Juxtaposer toutes les pages Dispose en mosaïque toutes les pages, quelle qu'en soit la taille. Cependant, seules sont réparties sur plusieurs feuilles de papier les pages d'une taille supérieure au format de papier sélectionné à l'échelle spécifiée. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Echelle de la mosaïque, Chevauchement, Traits de coupe et Intitulés. • Plusieurs pages par feuille Active la fonction d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille, par laquelle plusieurs pages s'impriment sur la même feuille de papier. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Pages par feuille, Ordre des pages, Imprimer le contour et Rotation auto. des pages.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 458 Impression Remarque : La fonction d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille dans Acrobat est indépendante de son équivalent sur les pilotes d'impression. Les paramètres d'impression dans Acrobat ne correspondent pas aux options d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille des pilotes d'imprimante. Sélectionnez l'option d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille dans Acrobat ou dans le pilote d'imprimante, mais pas dans les deux. • Impression en livret Imprime plusieurs pages sur la même feuille de papier dans l'ordre de lecture approprié une fois les feuilles pliées. L'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso (des deux côtés de la feuille). Si cette fonction est disponible, Acrobat l'active automatiquement pour l'impression en livret. Pages par feuille Imprime un nombre de pages prédéfini ou personnalisé (jusqu'à 99) à l'horizontale et à la verticale en mode Plusieurs pages par feuille. Si vous sélectionnez un nombre prédéfini dans le menu, Acrobat sélectionne automatiquement l'orientation de papier la plus adaptée. Ordre des pages Définit l'ordre des pages sur le papier lors de l'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille. L'option Horizontal place les pages de gauche à droite et de haut en bas. L'option Horizontal inversé place les pages de droite à gauche et de haut en bas. L'option Vertical place les pages de haut en bas et de gauche à droite. L'option Vertical inversé place les pages de haut en bas et de droite à gauche. Les deux options d'inversion conviennent aux documents en langues asiatiques. Imprimer le contour Trace la zone de recadrage (limite des pages PDF) lors de l'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille. Rotation auto. et centrage des pages Réglez l'orientation de la page selon l'orientation spécifiée dans les propriétés de l'imprimante. Choisir la source de papier selon le format de la page PDF (Windows) Utilise la taille de la page PDF pour déterminer le bac d'imprimante au lieu de l'option de mise en page. Cette option est pratique pour l'impression de fichiers PDF dont les pages sont de formats divers sur des imprimantes dotées de plusieurs bacs. Imprimer dans un fichier (Windows) Convertit le document en fichier PostScript dépendant du périphérique. Le fichier obtenu contient un code d'activation et de contrôle des fonctionnalités spécifiques du périphérique, ce qui réduit sa compatibilité avec des périphériques autres que le périphérique cible. Pour optimiser la création de fichiers PostScript, utilisez la commande d'enregistrement au format PostScript. La commande d'enregistrement au format PostScript n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader®. Remarque : Vous pouvez créer un fichier PostScript même si vous ne disposez pas d'une imprimante PostScript. Imprimer les couleurs en noir (Windows) Impose l'impression en noir de toutes les couleurs en dehors du blanc. Cette option s'avère utile pour l'impression des dessins d'ingénierie comportant des traits de couleur claire. Cette option ne modifie pas les paramètres de l'aperçu avant impression mais a bien un effet sur les paramètres de couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Conseils Si vous disposez d'une connexion Internet, cette option pointe vers la page du site Web fournissant des informations de dépannage des problèmes d'impression. Avancé Ouvre un ou plusieurs panneaux permettant de configurer des options d’impression supplémentaires. Résumé des commentaires Crée un fichier PDF distinct et prêt à l'impression, contenant tous les commentaires d'un document. Cette option est indisponible lorsque vous imprimez à partir d'un navigateur Web ou si vous imprimez plusieurs documents contenus dans un porte-documents PDF. Voir la section « Impression d'un résumé des commentaires » à la page 194. Voir aussi « Téléchargement de polices asiatiques sur une imprimante » à la page 466 « Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis » à la page 459UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 459 Impression Impression d'une zone sur une page 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Instantané. 2 Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur sur la zone à imprimer. Acrobat copie la zone sélectionnée dans le Presse-papiers. 3 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer pour imprimer la sélection. Impression de calques Généralement, lors de l'impression d'un document PDF contenant des calques, seul le contenu visible à l'écran est imprimé. Toutefois, l'auteur d'un tel fichier PDF peut choisir les calques qui doivent ou non être imprimés (filigranes, informations confidentielles), indépendamment de leur visibilité à l'écran. Si l'impression spécifiée du document diffère de l'affichage à l'écran, un message s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. L'aperçu disponible dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression affiche toujours la page destinée à l'impression. Remarque : Pour travailler avec des calques dans Acrobat, convertissez le document source à l'aide d'un jeu prédéfini de paramètres PDF qui conserve les calques, par exemple Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) ou version ultérieure. Affichage des calques à imprimer 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques . 2 Choisissez Appliquer les priorités d’impression dans le menu Options. Remarque : La fonction Appliquer les priorités d'impression peut être indisponible dans le menu Options selon les options de visibilité spécifiées lors de la création du fichier PDF. Modification des paramètres d'impression d'un calque 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques . 2 Développez la zone des calques, puis choisissez Propriétés du calque dans le menu Options. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque, choisissez l'une des options ci-après dans le menu déroulant d'impression : Toujours imprimer Impose l'impression du calque. Ne jamais imprimer Empêche l'impression du calque. Imprimer lorsque visible Fait correspondre la sortie imprimée à la visibilité à l'écran. Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis Un fichier PDF peut contenir un jeu de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis, c'est-à-dire un ensemble de valeurs propres au document qui servent à définir les options d'impression de base. La création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis vous évite de régler manuellement certaines options de la boîte de dialogue d'impression chaque fois que vous imprimez le document. S'il est judicieux de définir les paramètres d'impression d'un fichier PDF au moment de sa création, les paramètres d'impression prédéfinis permettent d'y ajouter des paramètres de base à tout moment. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés et cliquez sur l'onglet Avancées. 2 Dans la zone Paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression, effectuez les réglages voulus, puis cliquez sur OK. A la prochaine ouverture de la boîte de dialogue d'impression, les valeurs seront définies en fonction de ces paramètres prédéfinis. Il en va de même si vous imprimez un document tiré d'un porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 460 Impression Remarque : Pour conserver des paramètres d'impression prédéfinis dans un fichier PDF, vous devez enregistrer ce fichier après avoir créé les paramètres d'impression prédéfinis. Paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression Mise à l’échelle Prédéfinit l'option Mise à l'échelle de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, avec l'une des valeurs suivantes : • Par défaut Utilise le paramètre par défaut de l'application, soit Réduire à la zone d'impression. • Aucun Empêche la mise à l'échelle automatique en fonction de la zone d'impression. Cette option est pratique pour conserver les dimensions de page dans des documents techniques ou pour garantir que l'impression s'effectue selon la taille légale. Mode recto verso Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, l'imprimante sélectionnée doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso si vous activez cette option. • Recto Imprime d'un seul côté du papier. • Recto verso - Symétrie le long du bord long Imprime sur les deux côtés du papier ; le papier est inversé selon le bord le plus long. • Recto verso - Symétrie le long du bord court Imprime sur les deux côtés du papier ; le papier est inversé selon le bord le plus court. Source du papier selon le format de la page Sélectionne l'option du même nom dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Utilise la taille de la page PDF pour déterminer le bac d'imprimante au lieu de l'option de mise en page. Cette option est pratique pour l'impression de fichiers PDF dont les pages sont de formats divers sur des imprimantes dotées de plusieurs bacs. Etendue à imprimer Préremplit la zone Pages de la section Etendue de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer avec les valeurs de votre choix. Cette option est pratique lorsque le flux de travail concerne des documents composés de pages d'instruction et de pages légales. Par exemple, si les pages 1-2 contiennent les instructions de remplissage du formulaire présenté pages 3-5, vous pouvez définir le travail d'impression de manière à imprimer plusieurs exemplaires du formulaire uniquement. Nombre de copies Préremplit la zone Copies de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Choisissez un nombre de 2 à 5 ou choisissez Par défaut pour utiliser les valeurs d'origine de l'application, c'est-à-dire un seul exemplaire. Cette limitation empêche d'imprimer accidentellement plusieurs exemplaires. Autres méthodes d'impression d'un fichier PDF A propos du livret Un livret est un document dont les multiples pages sont disposées sur les feuilles de papier de manière à respecter l'ordre correct des pages lorsque les feuilles sont pliées en deux. Il est possible de créer des livrets dont chaque feuille présente deux pages juxtaposées au recto et au verso, de manière à pouvoir plier les feuilles en deux et les relier selon le pli. La première page s'imprime sur la même feuille que la dernière page, la deuxième page sur la même feuille que l'avant-dernière page, etc. Chaque page est automatiquement centrée sur la feuille ; les grandes pages sont ajustées (réduites) à la zone d'impression. Si vous assemblez les pages imprimées recto verso, les pliez et les agrafez, vous obtenez un livret dont la pagination est correcte.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 461 Impression Pour imprimer un livret, l'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso automatique ou manuelle. L'impression recto verso manuelle impose deux passages distincts du papier : l'un pour imprimer le recto, l'autre pour imprimer le verso. Pour vérifier si votre imprimante prend en charge l'impression recto verso, consultez la documentation associée, contactez le fabricant ou cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression et recherchez les options faisant référence à l'impression recto verso. Disposition des pages dans le fichier PDF (en haut), disposition des pages en livret (en bas) et pages imprimées et pliées en livret Impression en livret 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 2 Page Choisir, Sélectionner, Cliquer sur Page mise à l'échelle menu. 3 Dans la zone Etendue, spécifiez les pages à imprimer : • Pour imprimer les pages de la première à la dernière, sélectionnez Toutes les pages. • Pour diviser un livret volumineux en liasses plus petites, sélectionnez Pages et spécifiez l'étendue de la première liasse. Imprimez ensuite chaque liasse séparément. • Pour imprimer certaines pages sur différents papiers, spécifiez les pages voulues à l'aide des options Feuilles de / à. Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés et sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation papier approprié, et toute autre option nécessaire. 4 Sélectionnez des options de gestion des pages. L'aperçu se modifie à mesure que vous spécifiez les options. Face(s) du livret Détermine de quel côté s'imprime le papier. Choisissez Recto verso pour imprimer automatiquement des deux côtés du papier (l'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso automatique). Choisissez Recto uniquement pour imprimer toutes les pages apparaissant au recto du papier. Après impression des pages, retournezles, choisissez à nouveau Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Verso uniquement. Selon le modèle d'imprimante, il peut s'avérer nécessaire de retourner et retrier les pages pour permettre l'impression du verso. Dans un environnement d'impression partagée, pour éviter que d'autres utilisateurs impriment sur vos pages avant que vous puissiez imprimer le verso des pages, pensez à les imprimer à partir d'un bac d'alimentation papier différent. Rotation auto. des pages Fait automatiquement pivoter chaque page pour optimiser l'ajustement à la zone d'impression. Feuilles de Spécifient la première et la dernière feuille à imprimer. Acrobat détermine les feuilles à imprimer en fonction du travail d'impression. Par exemple, si vous avez un document de 16 pages, l'impression produit 4 feuilles (1 à 4). Liaison Détermine l'orientation de la reliure. Choisissez Gauche si le texte se lit de gauche à droite ; Gauche (Grand) pour le papier plié sur le bord long, produisant une zone d'impression longue et étroite. Choisissez Droite pour le texte lu de droite à gauche ou verticalement (à la manière asiatique) ; Droite (Grand) si le papier est plié sur le bord long. 1 1 2 3 2 3 4 4 3 1UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 462 Impression Comparaison des options de reliure Droite et Droite (Grand) Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF Un porte-documents PDF est un fichier PDF constitué de plusieurs documents. Vous pouvez imprimer les fichiers PDF composant un porte-documents PDF de manière individuelle ou collective. 1 Ouvrez le porte-documents PDF. Pour imprimer uniquement certains fichiers, sélectionnez-les. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis choisissez l'une des commandes suivantes : Tous les fichiers PDF Imprime tous les fichiers PDF du porte-documents PDF. Fichiers PDF sélectionnés Imprime la sélection de fichiers PDF. Option uniquement disponible lorsque plusieurs fichiers sont sélectionnés dans la liste des documents composant le lot. 3 Sélectionnez les options d'impression nécessaires, puis cliquez sur OK. Les documents s'impriment selon l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaissent dans le porte-documents PDF. Remarque : Pour imprimer les composants du porte-documents qui ne sont pas au format PDF, vous devez utiliser l'application source. Pour ouvrir un fichier composant dans son application native, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Ouvrir le fichier dans l'application native. (L'application native doit être installée sur l'ordinateur afin que vous puissiez ouvrir le fichier.) Voir aussi « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 125UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 463 Impression Impression à partir de l'onglet Signets Vous pouvez imprimer les pages associées à un signet directement à partir de l'onglet Signets. Les signets s'affichent sous forme arborescente, avec des signets parent et enfant (dépendants). Si vous imprimez un signet parent, toutes les pages associées aux signets enfant qui en dépendent sont également imprimées. Certains signets n'affichent pas de contenu de page et ne peuvent donc pas être imprimés. Par exemple, certains signets servent à ouvrir un fichier ou à lire un fichier son. Si vous sélectionnez une combinaison de signets imprimables et non imprimables, ces derniers sont ignorés. Remarque : Les signets composés de contenu balisé affichent toujours un contenu de page car les balises servent à représenter des éléments imprimables du document, tels que des titres et des figures. 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF contenant des signets. Le cas échéant, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets pour faire apparaître les signets dans le navigateur. 2 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs signets, puis cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris. 3 Dans le menu contextuel, choisissez Imprimer les pages. Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 340 « Ajout d'un signet balisé » à la page 343 Impression d'impression personnalisés Impression d'un document surdimensionné Bien que la fonction d'impression soit prévue pour des documents mesurant jusqu'à 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces) dans chaque sens, la plupart des imprimantes de bureau ne peuvent imprimer des pages d'une telle taille. Pour imprimer un document aux dimensions inhabituelles sur votre imprimante de bureau, vous devez imprimer les éléments (ou mosaïques) de chacune des pages du document un par un, puis les rogner et les réassembler. Vous pouvez également augmenter l'échelle d'un document de taille standard et l'imprimer sur plusieurs pages. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Dans le menu Mise à l'échelle, choisissez Juxtaposer toutes les pages si toutes les pages du document sont surdimensionnées. Si certaines pages sont de taille standard, choisissez Juxtaposer les grandes pages. 3 (Facultatif) Définissez l'une des options suivantes, en vous reportant à l'aperçu d'impression afin de vérifier le résultat : Echelle de la mosaïque Ajuste la mise à l'échelle. La mise à l'échelle a un impact sur le mappage des sections de la page PDF avec la feuille de papier. Chevauchement Spécifie le volume minimal d'informations dupliquées à imprimer sur chaque mosaïque afin de faciliter l'assemblage. L'option Chevauchement utilise l'unité de mesure spécifiée dans le document. La valeur doit être supérieure à celle des marges minimales non imprimables. Vous pouvez spécifier jusqu'à la moitié de la hauteur du plus petit côté de la page de document à chevaucher. Par exemple, les mosaïques d'une page mesurant 279,4 par 431,8 millimètres peuvent se chevaucher de 139,7 millimètres au maximum. Libellés Inclut le nom du fichier PDF, la date d'impression et les coordonnées de la mosaïque sur chaque feuille. Par exemple, Page 1 (1,1) signifie rangée 1, colonne 1 de la première page. Les coordonnées de mosaïque servent au réassemblage des mosaïques. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 464 Impression Traits de coupe Imprime des repères à chaque coin d'une mosaïque pour faciliter l'assemblage. Utilisez cette option en conjonction avec l'option Chevauchement. Lorsque vous définissez un bord de chevauchement, puis superposez ces bords, les traits de coupe vous aident à aligner les mosaïques. Mise à l'échelle d'un document pour l'impression Pour imprimer un fichier PDF de très grande dimension sur du papier d'un format inférieur, vous pouvez ajuster la largeur et la hauteur du document par une mise à l'échelle. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Dans le menu Mise à l'échelle, choisissez Ajuster à la zone d'impression ou Réduire à la zone d'impression. Paramètres d'impression avancés A propos des paramètres d'impression avancés Si les paramètres d'impression normaux ne vous permettent pas d'obtenir les résultats souhaités, vous avez la possibilité de spécifier d'autres paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Par exemple, si la sortie papier ne respecte pas l'aspect du document à l'écran, vous pouvez essayer de l'imprimer sous forme d'image. Ou encore, si le document PDF utilise des polices non incorporées, vous devez télécharger ces polices sur l'imprimante avant l'impression. D'autres options avancées vous permettent d'ajouter des repères d'impression à la sortie imprimée et de déterminer la gestion des couleurs. Définition des paramètres d'impression avancés Les paramètres d'impression sont préservés jusqu'à ce que vous les modifiiez. Lorsque vous modifiez une option, la valeur par défaut du paramètre dans Acrobat passe automatiquement à une valeur personnalisée et les nouveaux réglages sont conservés. Vous pouvez également enregistrer les paramètres personnalisés sous un nom unique. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, cliquez sur Options avancées. 2 S'il existe un fichier de paramètres d'impression personnalisés qui répond à vos besoins, sélectionnez-le dans le menu Paramètres. Sinon, choisissez les paramètres par défaut d'Acrobat. Si vous souhaitez en apprendre davantage sur une option, sélectionnez-la. Sa description s'affiche au bas de la boîte de dialogue. 3 Si l'impression normale ne produit pas les résultats escomptés, sélectionnez l'option Bitmap et choisissez une résolution dans la liste déroulante. 4 Sélectionnez les options de sortie composite ou de séparation des couleurs dans les panneaux de gauche de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Remarque : Certaines options de la boîte de dialogue d'impression générale ont un impact sur les paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez l'option Imprimer les couleurs en noir (Windows), les paramètres couleur de la configuration avancée de l'impression sont modifiés. • Configurez les options de couleur et autres conditions de sortie. Voir la section « Options de sortie » à la page 467. • Configurez les options de repères d'impression. Voir la section « Inclusion des repères et fonds perdus » à la page 469.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 465 Impression • Configurez les options d'impression PostScript. Voir la section « Options PostScript » à la page 465. Remarque : Acrobat détermine automatiquement le niveau PostScript, selon l'imprimante sélectionnée. • Configurez les options de gestion des couleurs. Voir « Options de gestion des couleurs » à la page 471. 5 Pour enregistrer les paramètres sous un nom unique, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous, spécifiez un nom de fichier et cliquez sur OK. 6 Cliquez sur OK pour valider les paramètres activés et revenir à la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Options PostScript Utilisez le panneau Options PostScript de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression pour définir les options pour une imprimante PostScript particulière. Ces options comprennent la prise en charge des polices absentes de l'imprimante et le téléchargement des polices asiatiques. Si un fichier PDF contient des paramètres relatifs au périphérique (demi-teintes et fonction de transfert, par exemple), ces paramètres peuvent être envoyés vers l'imprimante PostScript afin de remplacer les paramètres par défaut de l'imprimante. Pour utiliser ces options, il est nécessaire qu'une imprimante PostScript soit connectée, ou qu'un pilote PostScript soit installé et un fichier PPD sélectionné. Règle de gestion des polices et ressources Spécifie la manière dont les polices et les ressources du document sont envoyées vers l'imprimante lorsqu'elles n'y sont pas déjà présentes. • Envoyer au démarrage Télécharge toutes les polices et ressources au démarrage du travail d'impression. Les polices et les ressources restent sur l'imprimante jusqu'à la fin du travail d'impression. Cette option est la plus rapide, mais elle requiert le plus de mémoire d'imprimante. • Envoyer par série Télécharge les polices et les ressources avant l'impression de la première page les utilisant, puis les supprime lorsqu'elles ne sont plus nécessaires. Cette option requiert moins de mémoire d'imprimante. Néanmoins, si un processeur PostScript modifie ultérieurement l'ordre des pages dans le flux de travail, il est possible que le téléchargement des polices ne soit pas ordonné correctement et qu'il manque donc des polices. Cette option ne fonctionne pas avec certaines imprimantes. • Envoyer pour chaque page Télécharge toutes les polices et les ressources pour une page donnée avant son impression, puis les supprime une fois la page imprimée. Cette option est celle qui requiert le moins de mémoire d'imprimante. Mode d'impression Spécifie le niveau PostScript pour la génération des pages. Choisissez le niveau PostScript adapté à votre imprimante. Télécharger les polices asiatiques Permet d'imprimer les documents qui utilisent des polices asiatiques non installées sur l'imprimante ou non incorporées dans le fichier PDF. Les polices asiatiques doivent être présentes sur le système. Convertir les polices TrueType en Type 1 Convertit les polices TrueType en polices PostScript pour le fichier PostScript. Certains périphériques de sortie PostScript de version ancienne imposent cette conversion. Transmettre CIDFontType2 comme CIDFontType2 (PS versions 2015 et ultérieures) Conserve les indications dans la police d'origine lors de l'impression. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, les polices CIDFontType2 sont converties en polices CIDFontType0, compatibles avec davantage d'imprimantes. Cette option est disponible sur les périphériques de sortie PostScript niveaux 2 (PostScript versions 2015 et ultérieures) et 3. Transmettre les demi-teintes Permet de transmettre les demi-teintes incorporées plutôt que d'utiliser les demi-teintes du périphérique de sortie. Les informations de demi-teintes contrôlent la quantité d'encre déposée en un point précis du papier. La variation de la taille du point et de la densité simule une variation des niveaux de gris et des couleurs continues. Pour une image CMJN, quatre trames de demi-teintes sont utilisées : une pour chaque encre utilisée dans le processus d'impression.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 466 Impression Transmettre les fonctions de transfert Transmet les fonctions de transfert incorporées. Les fonctions de transfert sont habituellement utilisées pour compenser l’engraissement ou la perte de points se produisant lorsqu’une image est transférée sur film. L'engraissement survient lorsque les points d'encre constituant l'image imprimée sont plus gros (par exemple en raison de l'étalement sur le papier) que dans la trame de demi-teintes. La perte de points se produit lorsque les points sont plus petits. Avec cette option, les fonctions de transfert s'appliquent au fichier lors de sa sortie. Transmettre la valeur de flèche Permet d'utiliser la valeur de flèche du fichier PDF si celui-ci contient des paramètres d'aplatissement. S'il n'en contient pas, Acrobat se charge de les contrôler pour l'impression PostScript. La valeur de flèche définit la limite d'approximation d'une courbe dans Acrobat. Transmettre des objets sous forme PS Transmet des objets sous forme PostScript pour les XObjects de formulaire au sein du fichier PDF. L'activation de cette option favorise la réduction de la taille globale du travail d'impression, mais peut accroître la quantité de mémoire d'imprimante utilisée. Un XObject de formulaire est un conteneur destiné aux objets graphiques (objets tracé, objets texte et images échantillonnées) au sein du fichier PDF. Les XObjects de formulaire créent une description unique pour les objets complexes qui peuvent apparaître plusieurs fois dans un même document, par exemple les images d'arrière-plan et les logos d'entreprise. Toujours utiliser l'assemblage de copies hôte Détermine si Acrobat doit toujours utiliser l'assemblage de copies hôte pour l'impression sans vérifier le pilote de l'imprimante. Par défaut, Acrobat utilise l'assemblage de copies de l'imprimante. L'assemblage de copies de l'imprimante envoient les travaux d'impression à l'imprimante de manière séparée et autorise l'imprimante à déterminer le mode d'assemblage des pages. Par exemple, si vous envoyez deux copies d'un travail d'impression de deux pages, l'impression reçoit deux travaux de deux pages. L'assemblage de copies hôte détermine comment les pages doivent être assemblées dans Acrobat et envoie ce travail d'impression à l'imprimante. Par exemple, si vous envoyez deux copies d'un travail d'impression de deux pages, l'impression reçoit un seul travail d'impression réordonné de quatre pages. Transmettre UCR/densité de noir Le paramètre de densité de noir permet de calculer la quantité de noir à utiliser pour reproduire une couleur donnée. Les paramètres UCR permettent de réduire la quantité de cyan, magenta et jaune pour compenser la densité de noir ajoutée. Cette méthode, qui utilise moins d'encre, convient au papier journal et au papier non couché. Bitmap Imprime les pages sous forme d'images bitmap. Sélectionnez cette option si l'impression normale ne produit pas les résultats attendus, puis spécifiez une résolution. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec les imprimantes PostScript. Téléchargement de polices asiatiques sur une imprimante Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression, activez l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques si vous souhaitez imprimer un document PDF contenant des polices asiatiques qui ne sont ni installées sur l'imprimante, ni incorporées dans le document. Les polices incorporées sont téléchargées, que cette option soit activée ou non. Cette option est compatible avec les imprimantes PostScript de niveau 2 ou supérieur. Pour pouvoir télécharger les polices asiatiques sur une imprimante, assurez-vous de les avoir téléchargées au préalable sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Personnalisée ou Complète pendant l'installation d'Acrobat. Si l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques n'est pas sélectionnée, le document PDF n'est imprimé correctement que si les polices référencées sont installées sur l'imprimante. Si des polices similaires sont installées sur l'imprimante, elles leur sont substituées. Si aucune police adaptée n'est installée sur l'imprimante, le texte est affiché en Courier. Si l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques ne produit pas le résultat escompté, imprimez le document PDF sous forme d'image bitmap. Impression d'impression prend souvent plus de temps que l'impression par la méthode de substitution des polices.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 467 Impression Remarque : Il arrive qu'une police ne puisse pas être téléchargée sur une imprimante, soit parce qu'elle a été convertie en image bitmap, soit parce que l'incorporation de cette police dans le document est restreinte. Dans les deux cas, une autre police lui est substituée ; la sortie imprimée risque de ne pas être fidèle au document affiché à l'écran. Options de sortie Le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression permet de définir les options de sortie. Couleur Indique les options de sortie composite ou de séparation des couleurs. Selon votre sélection dans ce menu, d'autres options deviennent disponibles dans le panneau Sortie. Pour plus de détails sur les sorties composites en couleurs et les séparations, voir « Impression Couleur » à la page 471. Paramètre prédéfini d'aplatissement de la transparence Aplatit les objets transparents selon le jeu de paramètres prédéfinis que vous choisissez. Simuler la surimpression Simule les effets de la surimpression des encres de tons directs pour les sorties composite et convertit les tons directs en couleurs quadri en vue de l'impression. Cette option, utile lorsque le périphérique d'impression ne prend pas en charge la surimpression, est uniquement disponible si vous choisissez Composite dans le menu Couleur. Ne l'activez pas si vous avez l'intention d'utiliser le fichier pour effectuer une séparation des couleurs par RIP ou pour une sortie finale. Important : Lorsque vous utilisez une imprimante prenant en charge la surimpression, assurez-vous que cette option n'est pas activée afin que la fonction de surimpression de l'imprimante soit utilisée. Utiliser la résolution maximale disponible JPEG2000 Gère l'utilisation des informations de résolution (le cas échéant) lors de la création des fichiers PostScript. Lorsque cette option est activée, la résolution la plus élevée contenue dans l'image est utilisée. Lorsqu'elle est désactivée, les données de résolution sont équivalentes à celles définies dans la zone Aplatissement prédéfini de la transparence. Gestionnaire d’encres Modifie le traitement des encres pendant que le document PDF est ouvert. Voir aussi « Présentation du Gestionnaire d’encres » à la page 494 A propos de la linéature des trames de demi-teintes Chez les imprimeurs, les tons continus sont simulés par des points (appelés points de trame) imprimés sur des rangées (nommées lignes ou linéatures). Les lignes sont imprimées selon des angles différents afin d’en atténuer l’effet. Le menu Tramage du panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Impression affiche les linéatures recommandées en lignes par pouce (lpp) et la résolution en points par pouce (ppp), en fonction du fichier PPD sélectionné. Lorsque vous sélectionnez des encres dans la liste, les champs de linéature de trame et d’angle reflètent les valeurs correspondant à l’encre sélectionnée. Une linéature élevée (par exemple, 150 lpp) réunit étroitement les points pour créer une image précise sur la presse ; une linéature faible (de 60 lpp à 85 lpp) espace considérablement les points pour créer une image moins fine. La taille des points est également déterminée par la linéature. Une linéature élevée utilise des points de petite taille ; une linéature faible utilise des points de grande taille. Le facteur le plus important lors du choix de la linéature est le type de presse utilisé pour votre tâche. Demandez à votre prestataire de services la linéature de sa presse et faites vos choix en conséquence.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 468 Impression Linéatures A. 65 lpp : linéature moins fine destinée à l’impression de publicités et de bons de réduction B. 85 lpp : linéature moyenne destinée à l’impression de journaux C. 133 lpp : linéature de qualité supérieure destinée à l’impression de magazines en quadrichromie D. 177 lpp : linéature très précise destinée à l’impression de rapports annuels et d’images de livres d’art Les fichiers PPD de photocomposeuses haute résolution offrent une large gamme de linéatures possibles associées à diverses résolutions de photocomposeuses. Pour les imprimantes basse résolution, les fichiers PPD proposent un moindre choix de linéatures de trame, moins fines (généralement comprises entre 53 et 85 lpp). Ces linéatures donnent néanmoins les meilleurs résultats sur les imprimantes basse résolution. La définition d’une linéature plus fine, de 100 lpp par exemple, affaiblit la qualité de l’image si vous utilisez une imprimante basse résolution pour la sortie finale. Spécification des linéatures de trames de demi-teintes ? Dans le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour sélectionner l'une des combinaisons prédéfinies de linéature de trame et de résolution, choisissez l'une des options du menu Tramage. • Pour spécifier une linéature de trame de demi-teintes personnalisée, sélectionnez la plaque à personnaliser, puis saisissez la valeur de linéature en lpp dans la zone Linéature et la valeur d'angle dans la zone Angle. Remarque : Avant de créer vos propres trames de demi-teintes, vérifiez quels sont les angles et linéatures de votre prestataire de service d'impression. Sachez que certains périphériques de sortie effacent les angles et les linéatures par défaut. A propos de l’émulsion et de l’exposition de l’image Selon le type de presse utilisé et le mode de transfert des informations entre le film et les plaques d’impression, votre prestataire de services peut vous demander des films négatifs ou positifs, avec l’émulsion sur la face supérieure ou inférieure. L’émulsion correspond à la couche photosensible d’un support d’impression (film ou papier). De manière générale, les imprimeurs exigent des films négatifs aux Etats-Unis et positifs en Europe et au Japon. Vérifiez auprès de votre prestataire quel sens d’émulsion il utilise. Pour distinguer la face de l’émulsion de l’autre (ou base), examinez le film final sous un bon éclairage. L’une des faces est plus brillante que l’autre. La face mate est celle de l’émulsion tandis que la face brillante constitue la base. B D A CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 469 Impression Options d’émulsion A. Image positive B. Négatif C. Négatif avec émulsion sur la face inférieure Important : Les paramètres d’émulsion et d’exposition de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer écrasent toute configuration conflictuelle du pilote d’imprimante. Spécifiez toujours les paramètres d’impression à l’aide de la boîte de dialogue d’impression. A propos de l'émulsion et de l'exposition de l'image 1 Sélectionnez Sortie sur le côté gauche de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. 2 Pour Couleur, choisissez Séparations. 3 Dans Symétrie, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Aucun L'orientation de la zone à flasher ne subit aucun changement. Le texte de l'image est lisible lorsque la couche photosensible vous fait face. Il s'agit de la valeur par défaut. Horizontale Projette la zone à flasher par rapport à un axe vertical. Le texte devient illisible. Verticale Projette la zone à flasher par rapport à un axe horizontal. Le texte est renversé. Horizontale et verticale Projette la zone à flasher par rapport à un axe vertical et un axe horizontal. Le texte devient illisible. Le texte est lisible lorsque la couche photosensible n'est pas face à vous. Cette option est courante pour les images flashées sur film. 4 Sélectionnez l'option Négative pour un film négatif ; désactivez-la pour un film positif. Remarque : L'option Négative est également disponible si vous choisissez Séparations In-RIP dans le menu Couleur. Inclusion des repères et fonds perdus Vous pouvez placer des repères sur la page afin d'indiquer les limites des zones de document prises en charge par Adobe PDF, telles que les zones de rognage et de fond perdu. Ces repères ne s'ajoutent pas au contenu de la page, mais sont inclus dans la sortie PostScript. Les options du panneau Repères et fonds perdus ne sont pas disponibles dans les circonstances suivantes : • Le fichier PDF inclut des repères d'impression ajoutés à l'aide d'une autre fonction Acrobat, l'outil Ajouter des repères d'impression. • Les zones de rognage, de fond perdu et de recadrage ont toutes la même taille. La zone de recadrage est définie dans la boîte de dialogue de recadrage (choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Recadrer des pages). Si l'illustration contient un fond perdu, assurez-vous que la taille de la zone de recadrage est suffisante pour inclure la zone de fond perdu et d'autres repères d'impression. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 470 Impression Repères d'impression A. Traits de coupe B. Repères de montage C. Informations sur la page D. Gammes de couleurs E. Repères de fond perdu 1 Sélectionnez Repères et fonds perdus dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. 2 Choisissez les repères d'impression souhaités. Les repères s'affichent dans l'aperçu, dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Voir aussi « Incorporation de repères d'impression dans un document PDF » à la page 496 Options de repères et de fonds perdus Tous les repères Crée tous les repères d'impression en une fois. Epaisseur de trait Indique l'épaisseur des lignes pour les repères de rognage, de marge et de montage. Style Indique l'aspect des repères. Vous pouvez sélectionner des repères InDesign par défaut ou des repères d'autres applications. Traits de coupe Place un repère à chaque coin de la zone de coupe pour indiquer les limites du cadre de coupe PDF. Repères de fond perdu Place un repère à chaque coin de la zone de fond perdu PDF pour en indiquer les limites. La zone de fond perdu correspond à l'espace supplémentaire autour de la taille de page définie. Repères de montage Place des repères hors de la zone de recadrage afin de permettre l'alignement des séparations d'un document en couleurs. Gammes de couleurs Contient un échantillon de couleur correspondant à chaque niveau de gris ou couleur quadri. Les tons directs convertis en couleurs quadri sont représentés à l'aide de couleurs quadri. Ces indications de couleur permettent au prestataire de régler la densité de l'encre sur la presse. Informations sur la page Place des informations de page en dehors de la zone de coupe de la page. Ces informations comprennent le nom du fichier, le numéro de page, la date et l'heure actuels et le nom de la séparation couleur. A D E C BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 471 Impression Options de gestion des couleurs Utilisez le panneau Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression pour définir les options d'impression des couleurs. Pour plus de détails sur l'impression des couleurs, voir « Impression Couleur » à la page 471. Traitement des couleurs Détermine si la gestion des couleurs est à utiliser et si elle est effectuée au niveau de l'application ou du périphérique d'impression. • Gestion des couleurs par Acrobat Permet de sélectionner un profil ICC décrivant le périphérique de sortie choisi. • Gestion des couleurs par l'imprimante Envoie les données de couleur avec le profil du document directement à l'imprimante qui se charge alors de convertir le document à son espace colorimétrique. Les résultats de cette conversion des couleurs peuvent varier d'une imprimante à l'autre. • Comme la source (sans gestion des couleurs) Supprime toute information relative à la gestion des couleurs et envoie les couleurs du périphérique à l'imprimante. Profil couleur Détermine le profil de gestion des couleurs à utiliser lors de l'impression. Couleur de la sortie Détermine la couleur de sortie en fonction des paramètres du panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Appliquer les options d'aperçu de sortie Permet de reproduire l'espace d'impression défini par le périphérique identifié par le menu Profil de simulation de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie. (Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de la sortie.) Cette option permet de simuler l'aspect obtenu avec un périphérique sur un autre. Impression Couleur Aperçu de la surimpression des couleurs Le mode Aperçu de la surimpression consiste à simuler approximativement à l'écran la fusion et la surimpression dans une sortie faisant appel à la séparation des couleurs. Les effets de surimpression peuvent aussi être simulés lors de la sortie sur un périphérique d'impression composite. Ces deux méthodes sont utiles pour obtenir des épreuves de documents avec couleurs séparées. Comparez l'aspect de l'illustration à l'écran (à gauche) et de l'illustration imprimée (à droite).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 472 Impression Gestion des couleurs Lors de l'impression d'un document RVB ou CMJN faisant appel à la gestion des couleurs, vous pouvez spécifier des options de gestion des couleurs supplémentaires afin d'homogénéiser les couleurs à la sortie. Supposons, par exemple, que le document contienne un profil adapté à un travail de prépresse et que vous vouliez contrôler les couleurs sur une imprimante de bureau. Dans le panneau Gestion des couleurs, vous pouvez attribuer temporairement aux couleurs du document l’espace colorimétrique de l’imprimante de bureau. Le profil de l’imprimante est utilisé à la place du profil actuel du document pour l’impression. En outre, il est possible d'envoyer des données de couleur en tant que valeurs RVB vers une imprimante à l'aide de plusieurs profils RVB. Voir aussi « Définition de la gestion des couleurs » à la page 431 « Homogénéité des couleurs » à la page 433 « Gestion des couleurs de documents pour l’impression » à la page 442 « Utilisation des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 A propos de l'impression composite Lors de l'impression d'un fichier PDF couleur, toutes les couleurs du fichier s'impriment sur une seule plaque. Ce processus s'appelle l'impression composite. Les options disponibles dans le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression varient en fonction de l'imprimante sélectionnée. Les illustrations destinées à la diffusion commerciale et contenant plusieurs couleurs doivent être imprimées sur des plaques distinctes, une pour chaque couleur. Ce processus s’appelle la séparation des couleurs. Si vous créez des séparations de couleurs, vous avez la possibilité d’imprimer une épreuve composite en couleurs ou en niveaux de gris afin d’effectuer des vérifications. Considérez les points suivants lorsque vous imprimez des épreuves composites : • Les options de surimpression que vous sélectionnez prennent effet correctement uniquement si vous utilisez une imprimante prenant en charge la surimpression. Tel n’est pas le cas de la plupart des imprimantes de bureau, mais vous pouvez simuler les effets de la surimpression en activant l’option Simuler la surimpression dans le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l’impression. N'oubliez pas que cette option convertit les tons directs en couleurs quadri pour l'impression. S'il s'agit de produire une sortie finale, ne sélectionnez pas cette option. • Lors de l'impression sur une imprimante noir et blanc, une version composite en niveaux de gris est créée (sauf si l'option Imprimer les couleurs en noir est activée dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression, puisqu'elle imprime en noir toutes les couleurs autres que le blanc). Si le document contient des couleurs, des gris corrigés visuellement permettent de simuler cette couleur. Par exemple, le gris utilisé pour simuler une teinte avec 20 % de jaune sera plus clair que le gris utilisé pour simuler une teinte avec 20 % de noir, car le jaune apparaît plus clair que le noir. Remarque : Gardez à l'esprit que la qualité de reproduction des imprimantes couleurs varie considérablement d'une imprimante à l'autre, à l'instar des moniteurs. Par conséquent, la meilleure manière de vérifier l'aspect final du document consiste à demander des épreuves à un prestataire de service d'impression. Voir aussi « A propos des séparations » à la page 473UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 473 Impression Impression d'une épreuve composite en couleurs 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 2 Sélectionnez des options de gestion de la page. 3 Dans le menu Commentaires et formulaires, choisissez Document et tampons afin d'imprimer tout le contenu visible. 4 Cliquez sur Options avancées, puis sélectionnez Sortie dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue. 5 Choisissez une option composite dans le menu Couleur. 6 Spécifiez d'autres paramètres de couleur et de sortie, puis cliquez sur OK. 7 Si le document contient des objets dotés d'options de transparence, sélectionnez l'une des options du menu Paramètre prédéfini d'aplatissement de la transparence. 8 (Imprimante PostScript uniquement) Dans le panneau Options PostScript, activez les options voulues. Voir aussi « A propos de l’aplatissement » à la page 498 A propos des séparations Pour obtenir des séparations de qualité supérieure, vous devez connaître les principes de base de l’impression, notamment les linéatures, la résolution, les couleurs quadrichromiques et les tons directs. Si les séparations sont effectuées par un prestataire de services d’impression, il est recommandé de travailler en étroite collaboration avec ce service avant chaque travail et pendant toute la procédure. La reproduction d’images en couleurs et en tons continus implique généralement que l’imprimante sépare l’illustration en quatre plaques correspondant aux composantes cyan (C), jaune (J), magenta (M) et noire (N) de l’image. L’encrage à l’aide de la couleur appropriée et l’impression superposée des plaques permet de combiner les couleurs de façon à reproduire l’image d’origine. Le processus de décomposition de l’image en plusieurs couleurs s’appelle séparation des couleurs et les films permettant de créer les plaques sont nommés séparations. Composite (à gauche) et séparations (à droite) Impression des séparations de couleurs Acrobat prend en charge les séparations hôte et In-RIP. La différence est liée à l'emplacement de création des séparations : sur l'ordinateur hôte (le système où sont installés Acrobat et le pilote d'imprimante) ou sur le module de pixellisation (ou RIP, acronyme de l'anglais Raster Image Processor) du périphérique de sortie.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 474 Impression Pour les séparations sur l'hôte, Acrobat génère des informations PostScript pour chaque séparation requise par le document et les envoie au périphérique de sortie. Dans le cas des séparations In-RIP, le processus de séparation d'un fichier est effectué par le processus RIP. Cette méthode est généralement plus rapide que la séparation des couleurs sur l'hôte, mais requiert un périphérique de sortie PostScript 3 doté d'une fonctionnalité de séparation In-RIP. Pour produire des séparations In-RIP, vous devez disposer d'un fichier PPD et d'un périphérique de sortie PostScript de niveau 3 ou de niveau 2 prenant chacun en charge les séparations In-RIP. Voir aussi « Aperçu de la sortie » à la page 486 « A propos des contrôles en amont » à la page 506 Préparation à l'impression des séparations ? Avant de créer les séparations, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Etalonnez le moniteur. Voir la section « Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant » à la page 447. • Indiquez si le document contient des informations de recouvrement, si vous le savez. Voir la section « Présence d'informations de recouvrement » à la page 475. • Affichez un aperçu du résultat des séparations et de l'aplatissement de la transparence. Voir les sections « Affichage d'un aperçu des séparations de couleurs » à la page 488 et « Aperçu des zones de l’illustration qui seront aplaties » à la page 500. • Effectuez un contrôle en amont à partir des critères de votre choix. Voir la section « Profils de contrôle en amont » à la page 517. Remarque : Si les séparations sont effectuées par un prestataire de service d'impression, il est recommandé de travailler en étroite collaboration avec ce service avant chaque travail et tout au long de la procédure. Impression de séparations 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 2 Choisissez une option dans le menu Commentaires et formulaires. 3 Choisissez l'étendue d'impression et les options de gestion. 4 Cliquez sur Avancées. 5 Si vous avez créé un fichier de paramètres d'impression contenant les paramètres de séparation appropriées, choisissez-le dans le menu Paramètres, dans la partie supérieure de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. 6 Sélectionnez Sortie sur la gauche, puis choisissez une option dans le menu Couleur : • Choisissez Séparations si le fichier PPD ne prend pas en charge les séparations In-RIP. • Choisissez Séparations In-RIP si le fichier PPD les prend en charge. Les options de recouvrement s'affichent. Dans le menu Recouvrement, choisissez Adobe In-RIP ou Désactivé. Si vous avez choisi Adobe In-RIP, cliquez sur Recouvrements prédéfinis et faites votre sélection. Cliquez sur OK. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres de une linéature de trame de demi-teintes et l'angle de rotation de l'encre sélectionnée. 8 Si le document contient des objets dotés d'options de transparence, sélectionnez l'une des options du menu Paramètre prédéfini d'aplatissement de la transparence. 9 Dans la zone Gestionnaire d'encres, désélectionnez toutes les couleurs que vous ne souhaitez pas séparer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 475 Impression Les couleurs quadri (cyan, magenta, jaune et noir) s’affichent toujours au début de la liste des plaques de couleur, suivies des tons directs classés par ordre alphabétique. 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Gestionnaire d'encres pour modifier les options d'encres des séparations de couleurs. 11 Cliquez sur Repères et fonds perdus sur la gauche, puis sélectionnez Tous les repères. 12 Cliquez sur Options PostScript sur la gauche, puis sélectionnez les paramètres nécessaires. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue, puis à nouveau sur OK pour imprimer les séparations. Présence d'informations de recouvrement Si vous envoyez vos fichiers PDF à un prestataire de service d'impression, vous pouvez utiliser la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document pour indiquer que l'un d'entre eux contient des informations de recouvrement. Vous éviterez ainsi que le prestataire de service n'ajoute au fichier des commandes de recouvrement potentiellement conflictuelles. Les informations de recouvrement peuvent être importées avec d'autres informations PostScript à partir de l'application de création ou créées dans Acrobat à l'aide d'options de recouvrement prédéfinies prises en charge par le recouvrement Adobe In-RIP. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF et choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Avancées. 3 Choisissez une option dans le menu Recouvrement, puis cliquez sur OK. Oui Le fichier contient des informations de recouvrement. Non Le fichier ne contient aucune information de recouvrement. Inconnu Vous ne savez pas si le fichier contient des informations de recouvrement. Voir aussi « Recouvrement Adobe In-RIP » à la page 478 Enregistrement des séparations au format PostScript En fonction du logiciel de prépresse utilisé, un prestataire peut éventuellement effectuer des tâches de prépresse telles que le recouvrement, l'imposition, la séparation et le remplacement OPI au niveau du processeur RIP du périphérique de sortie. Il préfère donc peut-être que vous lui fournissiez un fichier PostScript composite optimisé pour les séparations In-RIP, plutôt qu'un fichier PostScript préalablement séparé. L'enregistrement du fichier au format PostScript conserve les options de séparation, les informations PPD et les conversions de couleurs spécifiées dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Si vous générez un fichier PostScript à réutiliser dans un flux de travail d'impression, l'utilisation de la commande Enregistrer sous plutôt que Imprimer dans un fichier (dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer) permet d'obtenir les meilleurs résultats. Voir aussi « Options PostScript » à la page 465476 Chapitre 16 : Outils d'impression professionnelle Que vous soyez un concepteur imaginant des créations ou un prestataire de services d'impression préparant un document Adobe® en vue de sa sortie finale, vous vous apercevrez très vite de l'importance des outils d'impression dans l'exécution d'un projet. Outils pour une impression de qualité supérieure Présentation des outils d'impression professionnelle Adobe Acrobat comprend des outils d’impression professionnelle sophistiqués qui garantiront un flux de production PDF complet pour une sortie en couleurs haut de gamme. Ces outils se trouvent dans le menu Options avancées et sur la barre d'outils Impression. Barre d'outils Impression A. Recouvrements prédéfinis B. Aperçu de la sortie C. Contrôle en amont D. Convertir les couleurs E. Gestionnaire d’encres F. Ajouter des repères d'impression G. Recadrer des pages H. Retoucher les filets maigres I. Aperçu de l'aplatissement J. Optimisation PDF K. Définitions de travaux JDF Ouverture de la barre d'outils Impression ? Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Afficher la barre d'outils Impression. Outils d'impression professionnelle Recouvrements prédéfinis Permet de créer et d'appliquer des options de recouvrement en vue d'une exécution ultérieure par un RIP Adobe PostScript 3 qui autorise le recouvrement Adobe In-RIP. Aperçu de la sortie Réunit dans une seule boîte de dialogue pratique l'aperçu des séparations, l'épreuvage logicielle, les avertissements relatifs aux couleurs et bien d'autres options encore. Contrôle en amont Permet d’effectuer plus de 400 vérifications prédéfinies pour toutes les erreurs de sortie habituelles, puis de résoudre toutes les erreurs corrigibles. Convertir les couleurs Permet à l'utilisateur de convertir tous les espaces colorimétriques d'un document vers l'espace colorimétrique cible comme, par exemple, des tons directs. Gestionnaire d’encres Modifie le traitement des encres pendant que le document PDF est ouvert. Le gestionnaire d'encres utilise les mêmes options et commandes que les autres applications Adobe. Ajouter des repères d'impression Ajoute des repères d'impression standard sur une page PDF en vue de son positionnement. Ces repères sont incorporés dans le fichier PDF. Recadrer des pages Permet de définir les zones de recadrage, de support, de fond perdu, de rognage et graphique d'une page. Ces éléments sont importants pour le positionnement et le placement corrects des repères d'impression sur une page, notamment pour l'imposition. A C B D E F G H I J KUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 477 Outils d'impression professionnelle Retoucher les filets maigres Recherche, en fonction des paramètres utilisateur définis, les filets maigres et les remplace par des traits plus épais. Aperçu de l'aplatissement Inclut un aperçu de l'affichage des objets transparents et des effets des paramètres que vous avez définis sur ces objets. L'aperçu de l'aplatissement permet de créer les paramètres prédéfinis que vous pouvez utiliser lors de l'aplatissement de la transparence. Vous pouvez vous servir des paramètres prédéfinis afin de contrôler le niveau de pixellisation survenant lors de l'impression du document. Vous pouvez ensuite enregistrer ces paramètres comme paramètres prédéfinis à des fins d'utilisation ultérieure. Optimisation PDF Propose différents paramètres permettant d'éliminer le contenu superflu en vue de réduire la taille du fichier. Définitions de travaux JDF Permet de créer des définitions de travaux personnalisées à des fins de modification ou d'utilisation dans un environnement de production. Le fichier JDF comprend par ailleurs des informations indispensables à la création de fichiers PDF adaptés au cycle de production, notamment des paramètres de conversion PDF et des profils de contrôle en amont. Pour consulter des vidéos sur les techniques d'impression en production, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Optimisation de la précision du contenu dans un fichier PDF : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4083_a9_fr • Utilisation de plusieurs applications dans un processus créatif : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4205_a9_fr Recouvrement des couleurs A propos du recouvrement de l’encre Lorsqu’un document destiné à l’impression offset utilise plusieurs encres sur une même page, chaque encre doit être imprimée par impression superposée (alignement parfait) de toutes les encres aboutées afin qu’il n’existe aucun blanc à la jointure entre les différentes encres. Toutefois, il est impossible de garantir une impression superposée parfaite pour chaque objet de chaque page imprimée. Des problèmes de repérage des encres risquent donc de se produire. Ces problèmes créent des blancs imprévus entre les encres. Pour masquer ces blancs, vous pouvez agrandir légèrement l’un des objets afin qu’il chevauche un autre objet de couleur différente : cette procédure est appelée recouvrement. Par défaut, lorsqu’une encre est placée sur une autre, l’encre sous-jacente est masquée ou supprimée afin d’éviter les mélanges de couleurs indésirables. Cependant, la procédure de recouvrement requiert une impression superposée, ou l’impression d’une encre sur une autre, afin d’obtenir un chevauchement ou un chevauchement partiel. Problèmes de repérage des encres sans recouvrement (à gauche) et avec recouvrement (à droite) La plupart des recouvrements utilisent la technique de l’étalement : un objet clair est étalé sur un objet foncé. Comme la couleur foncée définit la limite visible d’un objet ou d’un texte, l’étalement de la couleur claire sur la couleur foncée fait apparaître cette limite.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 478 Outils d'impression professionnelle Recouvrement Adobe In-RIP Acrobat peut automatiquement recouvrir les documents couleur à l'aide du moteur de recouvrement Adobe In-RIP, disponible sur les périphériques de sortie Adobe PostScript prenant en charge ce moteur. Le moteur Recouvrement Adobe In-RIP peut calculer et appliquer précisément tous les réglages nécessaires sur les contours du texte ou des images de l’ensemble de votre document. Ils peuvent appliquer des techniques de recouvrement efficaces sur différentes parties d’un seul objet, même si du texte ou des objets InDesign chevauchent plusieurs couleurs d’arrière-plan. Les réglages de recouvrement s'effectuent automatiquement et vous pouvez définir des recouvrements prédéfinis répondant aux exigences de recouvrement d'un groupe de pages spécifiques. Ces effets n’apparaissent que sur les séparations de couleurs générées par un moteur de recouvrement. Vous ne pouvez pas visualiser les résultats à l’écran dans le programme. Le moteur de recouvrement décide des recouvrements à effectuer en recherchant les contours de couleur contrastés. Il crée ensuite des recouvrements en fonction des densités neutres (clair ou foncé) des couleurs aboutées, la plupart des cas en étalant des couleurs plus claires sur les couleurs adjacentes plus foncées. Les paramètres de recouvrement spécifiés dans la palette Recouvrements prédéfinis modifient les résultats obtenus par l’utilisation du moteur de recouvrement. Configuration requise Recouvrement Adobe In-RIP requiert le logiciel et matériel suivant : • Un fichier PPD (PostScript Printer Description) pour imprimante prenant en charge le recouvrement Adobe InRIP. Vous devez sélectionner ce fichier PPD à l'aide du pilote de votre système d'exploitation. • Un périphérique de sortie Adobe PostScript de niveau 2 ou supérieur utilisant un RIP qui prend en charge le recouvrement Adobe In-RIP. Pour savoir si un périphérique de sortie PostScript reconnaît le recouvrement Adobe In-RIP, contactez le fabricant ou le prestataire de services d'impression. Recouvrement d'un fichier PDF Le recouvrement est un processus complexe qui dépend de l’interaction de facteurs de couleur, d’encre et d’impression, les paramètres appropriés variant en fonction de conditions d’impression spécifiques. Ne modifiez pas les paramètres de recouvrement par défaut à moins d'en avoir préalablement discuté avec votre prestataire de services d'impression. 1 Le cas échéant, choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Recouvrements prédéfinis pour créer un recouvrement prédéfini avec des paramètres personnalisés en fonction de vos document et conditions d'impression. 2 Attribuez ce recouvrement prédéfini à un intervalle de pages. 3 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue d'impression, puis cliquez sur Avancées. 4 Sélectionnez Sortie dans la liste de gauche. 5 Choisissez l’option Séparations In-RIP dans la liste déroulante Couleur. 6 Choisissez Adobe In-RIP ou Désactiver dans la liste déroulante Recouvrement. Remarque : Cette option fonctionne uniquement lorsque le périphérique de sortie prend en charge le recouvrement Adobe In-RIP. 7 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire d’encres. Le cas échéant, sélectionnez une encre, spécifiez les options suivantes (uniquement si le prestataire de services conseille la modification des paramètres), puis cliquez sur OK : Type Choisissez un type pour l'encre sélectionnée. Densité neutre Saisissez une valeur autre que celle par défaut. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 479 Outils d'impression professionnelle Séquence de recouvrement Saisissez une valeur pour définir l'ordre d'impression des encres. 8 Continuez à sélectionner d'autres options d'impression, puis cliquez sur OK pour imprimer le document. Voir aussi « Paramétrage des valeurs de densité neutre des encres » à la page 484 « Personnalisation du recouvrement pour les encres spécialisées » à la page 485 « Paramétrage de la séquence de recouvrement » à la page 485 Spécification des paramètres à l'aide de recouvrements prédéfinis Un recouvrement prédéfini est un ensemble de paramètres de recouvrement que vous pouvez appliquer aux pages d'un fichier PDF. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Recouvrements prédéfinis pour saisir des paramètres de recouvrement et enregistrer un ensemble de paramètres comme recouvrement prédéfini. Si vous n'appliquez pas de recouvrement prédéfini à une étendue de pages, le recouvrement prédéfini [Par défaut] est utilisé, c'est à dire un ensemble de paramètres de recouvrement typiques qui sont appliqués à toutes les pages d'un nouveau document. Remarque : Dans Acrobat, l'attribution de recouvrements prédéfinis ne s'applique qu'au document ouvert. Les options de recouvrement ne sont pas enregistrées dans le fichier PDF. Ce comportement diffère dans InDesign, où les recouvrements prédéfinis et leurs attributions sont enregistrés dans le document InDesign. Création ou modification d’un recouvrement prédéfini 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Recouvrements prédéfinis. 2 Sélectionnez un recouvrement prédéfini, puis cliquez sur Créer. 3 Sélectionnez les options suivantes, puis cliquez sur OK. Nom Attribuez un nom au recouvrement prédéfini. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le nom des deux paramètres prédéfinis intégrés : [Aucun recouvrement prédéfini] et [Par défaut]. Largeur de recouvrement Entrez des valeurs pour spécifier la largeur de chevauchement des encres. Aspect de recouvrement Spécifiez les options de contrôle des sommets et des extrémités des recouvrements. Images Spécifiez les paramètres de recouvrement des images. Seuils de recouvrement Entrez des valeurs pour définir les conditions d’application du recouvrement. De nombreuses variables affectent les valeurs que vous devez saisir ici. Pour plus de détails, consultez votre prestataire de services d'impression et les autres rubriques d'aide relatives au recouvrement. Suppression d’un recouvrement prédéfini ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Recouvrements prédéfinis, sélectionnez les recouvrements prédéfinis voulus, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer les deux recouvrements prédéfinis intégrés : [Aucun recouvrement prédéfini] et [Par défaut]. Attribution d’un recouvrement prédéfini à des pages Vous pouvez attribuer un recouvrement prédéfini à un document ou à un intervalle de pages d'un document. Si vous désactivez le recouvrement pour les pages ne contenant pas de couleurs contiguës, celles-ci s'impriment plus rapidement. Le recouvrement ne se produit réellement qu’au moment de l’impression du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 480 Outils d'impression professionnelle La zone Recouvrements dresse la liste des paramètres prédéfinis appliquées à diverses pages. Elle est mise à jour chaque fois que vous cliquez sur Attribuer. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Recouvrements prédéfinis, cliquez sur Attribuer. 2 Dans la zone Recouvrement prédéfini, choisissez le recouvrement prédéfini à appliquer. 3 Indiquez l'intervalle de pages auquel le recouvrement prédéfini doit être appliqué. 4 Cliquez sur Attribuer. Remarque : Si vous cliquez sur OK sans choisir d'abord Attribuer, la boîte de dialogue se ferme sans qu'aucune modification ne soit apportée aux attributions de recouvrement. En revanche, les recouvrements que vous aviez attribués précédemment à l’aide du bouton Attribuer sont conservés. 5 Une fois l'attribution de recouvrements prédéfinis terminée, cliquez sur OK. Désactivation du recouvrement sur les pages 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Recouvrements prédéfinis, cliquez sur Attribuer. 2 Indiquez l'étendue de pages pour laquelle le recouvrement doit être désactivé et sélectionnez [Aucun recouvrement prédéfini] dans la liste déroulante Recouvrements prédéfinis. 3 Cliquez sur Attribuer. 4 Lorsque tous les paramètres voulus sont à jour dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur OK. Options de recouvrements prédéfinis Vous pouvez modifier les options de recouvrements prédéfinis chaque fois que vous créez ou modifiez un recouvrement prédéfini. Les mêmes options de recouvrements prédéfinis sont disponibles dans Acrobat et InDesign. Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez afficher les recouvrements prédéfinis en choisissant Options avancées > Impression > Recouvrements prédéfinis. Dans InDesign, choisissez la commande Fenêtre > Sortie > Recouvrements prédéfinis.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 481 Outils d'impression professionnelle Largeurs de recouvrement La largeur de recouvrement correspond à la largeur du chevauchement de chaque recouvrement. En raison des différences de caractéristiques de papier, de linéature et de conditions d’impression, les largeurs de recouvrement varient. Pour déterminer les largeurs de recouvrement convenant à chaque travail d’impression, consultez votre imprimeur. Valeur par défaut Indique la largeur de recouvrement en points pour le recouvrement de toutes les couleurs, excepté celles contenant du noir. La valeur par défaut est 0,25 pt. Noir Indique la distance d’étalement de l’encre sur le noir ou le niveau de retenue (distance entre les bords noirs et les encres sous-jacentes pour le recouvrement de noirs intenses). La valeur par défaut est 0,5 pt. Cette valeur est souvent 1,5 à 2 fois supérieure à la largeur de recouvrement par défaut. Dans InDesign, la valeur définie pour l’option Couleur noire détermine la valeur pour un noir ou un noir intense, noir quadrichromique (N) mélangé avec des encres de couleur pour augmenter l’opacité et l’intensité de la couleur. Remarque : (InDesign) si vous sélectionnez le recouvrement intégré de l’application et que vous spécifiez une largeur de recouvrement Par défaut ou une largeur de recouvrement Noir supérieure à 4 points, la largeur de recouvrement obtenue se limite à 4 points. Toutefois, la valeur spécifiée reste affichée, car si vous passez au recouvrement Adobe In-RIP, les recouvrements supérieurs à 4 points s’appliquent comme indiqué. Aspect de recouvrement Un sommet représente la jonction de deux bords de recouvrement en une extrémité commune. Vous pouvez contrôler la forme d’un sommet extérieur constitué par deux segments de recouvrement et de l’intersection entre trois recouvrements. Style de sommet Définit la forme du sommet extérieur constitué par deux segments de recouvrement. Choisissez un sommet en pointe, en arrondi ou en biseau. La valeur par défaut est Pointe. Elle correspond aux résultats de recouvrement de versions précédentes du logiciel et permet que la compatibilité avec des versions antérieures du logiciel de recouvrement Adobe soit conservée. Exemples de sommets de recouvrement, de gauche à droite : en pointe, en arrondi, en biseau Style d’extrémité Définit l’intersection de trois recouvrements. La valeur par défaut Pointe rend l’extrémité du recouvrement pointue de sorte qu’elle ne se trouve pas à l’intersection. Cette valeur correspond également aux résultats de recouvrement antérieurs et permet que la compatibilité avec des versions antérieures du logiciel de recouvrement Adobe soit conservée. La valeur Chevauchement affecte la forme du recouvrement généré par l’objet dont la densité neutre est la plus faible et qui coupe au moins deux objets plus foncés. L’extrémité du recouvrement le plus clair est chevauchée au point d’intersection des trois objets.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 482 Outils d'impression professionnelle Exemples d’extrémités de recouvrement : en pointe (à gauche) et chevauchement (à droite) Seuils de recouvrement Vous pouvez ajuster les seuils de recouvrement, comme le recommande votre service de prépresse, selon vos conditions d’impression. Etape Spécifie le seuil de changement de couleur à partir duquel le logiciel crée un recouvrement. Pour certains travaux d’impression, seuls les changements de couleur les plus extrêmes doivent être recouverts. Dans d’autres cas, ce sont les changements de couleur subtils qui requièrent un recouvrement. La valeur Tolérance indique le niveau de variation des composants (tels que les valeurs CMJN) des couleurs aboutées avant l’exécution d’un recouvrement. Pour modifier le degré de variation des encres dans les couleurs aboutées avant de provoquer le recouvrement de ces couleurs, augmentez ou diminuez la valeur Etape. Plus cette valeur est réduite, plus les couleurs subissent de recouvrements. La valeur par défaut est 10 %. Pour des résultats optimaux, choisissez une valeur entre 8 % et 20 %. Les pourcentages inférieurs augmentent la sensibilité aux différences de couleur et donc le nombre de recouvrements. Couleur noire Spécifie la quantité minimale d’encre noire requise avant que la valeur de l’option de largeur de recouvrement Noir ne soit appliquée. La valeur par défaut est 100 %. Pour des résultats optimaux, choisissez une valeur supérieure ou égale à 70 %. Densité du noir Indique la valeur de densité neutre à partir de laquelle InDesign considère que l’encre est noire. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez que la valeur de la largeur de recouvrement Noir soit appliquée à une encre de ton direct foncé, entrez une valeur de densité neutre ici. Cette valeur est en général définie sur un chiffre proche de la valeur par défaut (1,6). Variation Indique le pourcentage de différence (entre les densités neutres des couleurs aboutées) selon lequel le recouvrement est déplacé du côté le plus sombre d’un contour de couleur vers la ligne centrale, afin d’éviter les changements brusques dans l’application et pour créer un recouvrement plus harmonieux. Lors du recouvrement, le logiciel de recouvrement en définit la position, de l’étalement de la couleur claire sur la couleur foncée au chevauchement de la ligne centrale les séparant. Par exemple, une valeur Variation de 70 % a pour effet de déplacer le positionnement du recouvrement afin qu’il commence à chevaucher la ligne médiane lorsque la couleur la plus claire dépasse 70 % de la couleur la plus foncée en densité neutre (densité neutre de la couleur la plus claire divisée par densité neutre de la couleur la plus foncée > 0,70). Les couleurs de densités neutres identiques chevauchent toujours exactement la ligne centrale, à moins que l’option Variation ne soit définie sur 100 %. Réduction de la couleur de recouvrement Indique le pourcentage d’utilisation de composants de couleurs aboutées pour la réduction de la couleur de recouvrement. Cette option permet d’éviter que certaines couleurs aboutées (les pastels, par exemple) ne créent un recouvrement disgracieux plus foncé que chacune de ces couleurs. Si vous choisissez UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 483 Outils d'impression professionnelle une réduction de couleur inférieure à 100 %, la couleur du recouvrement s’éclaircit. Si vous saisissez une réduction de couleur de 0 %, la densité neutre du recouvrement créé est égale à celle de la couleur foncée. Recouvrement d’une image importée Vous pouvez créer un recouvrement prédéfini pour gérer les recouvrements d’images, ainsi que les recouvrements entre images bitmap (photographies et images enregistrées dans des fichiers PDF pixellisés, par exemple) et objets vectoriels (objets de programme d’illustration et fichiers PDF vectoriels, par exemple). Chaque logiciel de recouvrement traite différemment les images importées. Il est important de connaître ces différences lors de la configuration des options de recouvrement. Application Propose des options indiquant l’emplacement du recouvrement lorsque des images bitmap sont recouvertes par des objets vectoriels (notamment les objets dessinés dans InDesign). Toutes les options, excepté Densité neutre, créent un bord cohérent. L’option Bande centrale crée un recouvrement à cheval sur la limite entre les objets et les images. Quand l’option Maigri est activée, les objets chevauchent l’image aboutée. L’option Densité neutre applique les règles de recouvrement utilisées pour le reste du document. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée et qu’un objet recouvre une photographie, les bords risquent d’être visiblement irréguliers, car le recouvrement passe d’un bord à un autre. Quand l’option Grossi est sélectionnée, l’image bitmap chevauche l’objet abouté. Recouvrement d’objets sur images Associée à une option de la liste Application, permet le recouvrement des images par des objets vectoriels (tels que les cadres utilisés comme lignes clés). Si les objets vectoriels ne chevauchent pas les images lors du recouvrement d’un intervalle de pages, désactivez cette option pour accélérer la procédure de recouvrement. Recouvrement d’images sur images Active le recouvrement le long de la limite entre les images bitmap aboutées ou se chevauchant. Cette fonction est activée par défaut. Intérieur des images Active le recouvrement au sein des couleurs de chaque image bitmap (et non uniquement à la jonction entre les illustrations vectorielles et le texte). Utilisez cette option uniquement pour des intervalles de pages contenant des images simples à contraste élevé, telles que des captures d’écran ou des dessins. Désactivez-la pour les images complexes en tons continus, car elle créerait des recouvrements de mauvaise qualité. La procédure de recouvrement est plus rapide lorsque cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Images de 1 bit Permet le recouvrement d’objets aboutés par des images de 1 bit. Cette option n’utilise pas les paramètres d’application, car les images de 1 bit ne contiennent qu’une seule couleur. En règle générale, sélectionnez cette option. Dans certains cas, cette option risque d’obscurcir l’image et de ralentir la procédure de recouvrement, lorsque les pixels d’images de 1 bit sont très espacés par exemple. A propos du recouvrement du noir Lorsque vous créez ou modifiez des recouvrements prédéfinis, la valeur saisie pour l’option Couleur noire détermine ce qui est considéré comme noir et noir intense. La couleur noir intense correspond à n’importe quelle couleur noire utilisant un tramage (ajout d’une ou plusieurs encres quadrichromiques pour intensifier la couleur noire). L’option Couleur noire permet de compenser un engraissement extrême (quand vous utilisez un papier de faible qualité, par exemple). Dans ce cas, les zones dont le pourcentage de noir est inférieur à 100 % s’impriment sous forme de zones unies. Pour compenser l’engraissement et garantir que le logiciel de recouvrement utilise la largeur et l’application de recouvrement correctes pour les objets noirs, tramez le noir et le noir intense (à l’aide de teintes de noir uni) et diminuez la valeur de l’option Couleur noire (définie par défaut sur 100 %). Lorsqu’une couleur atteint la valeur de l’option Couleur noire, la valeur de la largeur de recouvrement Noir est appliquée à toutes les couleurs aboutées et des recouvrements réservés sont créés pour les zones de noir intense à l’aide de l’option de largeur de recouvrement Noir.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 484 Outils d'impression professionnelle Si le tramage s’étend jusqu’au bord d’une zone noire, tout problème de repérage des encres fait apparaître les bords du tramage et crée un flou imprévu ou une distorsion des bords des objets. Le logiciel de recouvrement utilise un recouvrement réservé (retenue) pour le noir intense afin que le tramage reste éloigné des bords d’éléments inversés ou clairs du premier plan. Les éléments clairs conservent ainsi leur netteté. Vous pouvez contrôler la distance entre le tramage et les bords des zones noires en spécifiant une valeur dans le champ de largeur de recouvrement Noir. Remarque : Ne vous inquiétez pas si le paramètre de largeur du recouvrement Noir est trop large pour le recouvrement d’éléments fins, tels que les lignes de contour noires autour des graphiques. Dans ce cas, le logiciel de recouvrement remplace automatiquement le paramètre de largeur et limite le recouvrement à la moitié de la largeur de l’élément fin. Paramétrage des valeurs de densité neutre des encres Vous pouvez régler les valeurs de densité neutre des encres utilisées par le logiciel de recouvrement pour déterminer l’application exacte des recouvrements. Les valeurs de densité neutre par défaut des encres quadrichromiques se basent sur les lectures de densité neutre des échantillons des encres quadrichromiques conformes aux normes reconnues dans différents pays. La langue détermine cette norme. Par exemple, les valeurs de densité neutre des versions anglaise (Etats-Unis) et canadienne sont conformes aux valeurs de la norme SWOP (Specifications for Web Offset Publications) publiée par la fondation Graphic Arts Technical Foundation of North America. Vous pouvez adapter les densités neutres des encres quadrichromiques afin qu’elles correspondent aux normes reconnues dans d’autres pays. Le logiciel de recouvrement déduit les valeurs de densité neutre d’un ton direct de son équivalent CMJN. Pour la plupart des tons directs, les valeurs de densité neutre des équivalents CMJN sont suffisamment précises pour créer des recouvrements corrects. Vous devrez peut-être adapter les valeurs de densité neutre des tons directs qui ne sont pas aisément simulés à l’aide d’encres quadrichromiques, comme les encres métalliques ou les vernis, afin que le logiciel les recouvre correctement. Ainsi, vous garantissez que le logiciel de recouvrement reconnaît les encres foncées et claires en tant que telles. Les options d’application appropriées sont alors automatiquement utilisées. Pour obtenir la valeur de densité neutre convenant à une encre spécifique, contactez votre imprimeur. Pour déterminer la valeur de densité neutre d’une encre de façon précise, mesurez un échantillon de l’encre concernée avec un densitomètre. Lisez la valeur de densité de l’encre (n’utilisez pas de filtre). Si cette valeur diffère de la valeur par défaut, saisissez-la dans la zone de texte Densité neutre. Remarque : la modification de la densité neutre d’un ton direct affecte uniquement le recouvrement de cette couleur. Elle n’a aucune incidence sur l’aspect de la couleur dans le document. Suivez ces instructions lorsque vous ajustez des valeurs de densité neutre : Encres métalliques et opaques Les encres métalliques sont souvent plus foncées que leurs équivalents CMJN. Les encres opaques obscurcissent les encres sous-jacentes. En général, vous devez définir la densité neutre des encres métalliques et des tons directs opaques sur des valeurs beaucoup plus élevées que les valeurs par défaut afin que les tons directs ne s’étalent pas. Remarque : attribuez l’option Opaque ou Ignorer Opaque du menu Type du Gestionnaire d’encres à une encre opaque pour éviter que cette dernière ne s’étale sur d’autres couleurs, à moins qu’une autre encre opaque soit définie sur une valeur de densité neutre plus élevée. Encres pastels Ces encres sont en général plus claires que leurs équivalents quadrichromiques. Vous pouvez donc définir la densité neutre de ces encres sur des valeurs inférieures aux valeurs par défaut afin qu’elles s’étalent sur les couleurs foncées adjacentes. Autres tons directs Certains tons directs, turquoise ou orange néon par exemple, sont beaucoup plus foncés ou clairs que leurs équivalents CMJN. Pour savoir si c’est le cas, comparez des échantillons imprimés des tons directs et des équivalents CMJN. Vous pouvez régler la densité neutre de ces tons directs sur des valeurs plus élevées ou plus faibles, selon les besoins.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 485 Outils d'impression professionnelle Personnalisation du recouvrement pour les encres spécialisées Vous devez tenir compte de certains éléments lorsque vous utilisez certaines encres pour le recouvrement. Par exemple, si vous vous servez d’un vernis sur un document, ce vernis ne doit pas affecter le recouvrement. Toutefois, quand vous surimprimez certaines zones avec une encre entièrement opaque, vous n’avez pas besoin de créer de recouvrement pour les éléments sous-jacents. Des options d’encre sont disponibles pour ces cas de figure. En règle générale, il est préférable de ne pas modifier les paramètres par défaut, à moins que votre service de prépresse ne vous l’ait recommandé. Remarque : il se peut que les encres spécialisées et les vernis utilisés dans le document aient été créés en mélangeant deux tons directs ou en mélangeant un ton direct et une ou plusieurs encres quadrichromiques. 1 Ouvrez le Gestionnaire d’encres, puis sélectionnez une encre requérant un traitement particulier. 2 Choisissez l’une des options suivantes dans le menu Type, puis cliquez sur le bouton OK : Normal A utiliser pour des encres quadrichromiques classiques et la plupart des tons directs. Transparent A utiliser pour les encres claires afin de garantir le recouvrement des éléments sous-jacents. Utilisez cette option pour les vernis et les encres de diazocopie. Opaque A utiliser pour les encres fortes non transparentes afin d’empêcher le recouvrement des couleurs sousjacentes et de permettre le recouvrement le long des bords des encres. Utilisez cette option pour les encres métalliques. Ignorer Opaque A utiliser pour les encres fortes non transparentes afin d’empêcher le recouvrement des couleurs sous-jacentes et le long des bords des encres. Utilisez cette option pour des encres comme les encres métalliques et les vernis, car leur interaction avec d’autres encres crée des effets indésirables. Paramétrage de la séquence de recouvrement La séquence de recouvrement (également appelée ordre de recouvrement) reflète l’ordre d’impression des encres sur la presse, et non celui des séparations sur le périphérique de sortie. La séquence de recouvrement est particulièrement importante lorsque vous imprimez plusieurs couleurs opaques, comme des encres métalliques. Les encres opaques dont la séquence de recouvrement est faible s’étalent sous les encres opaques dont la séquence est plus élevée. Grâce à ce processus, la dernière encre appliquée n’est pas étalée et les recouvrements sont de bonne qualité. Remarque : Ne modifiez pas la séquence de recouvrement par défaut sans consulter votre service de prépresse. 1 Ouvrez le Gestionnaire d’encres. La séquence de recouvrement actuelle s’affiche dans la colonne Séquence de la liste des encres. 2 Sélectionnez une encre, saisissez une nouvelle valeur dans le champ Séquence de recouvrement, puis appuyez sur la touche de tabulation. Cela modifie le numéro de séquence de l’encre sélectionnée, ainsi que les autres numéros de séquence. 3 Recommencez cette étape pour toutes les encres nécessaires, puis cliquez sur le bouton OK. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 486 Outils d'impression professionnelle Aperçu de la sortie Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie La boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie offre une simulation de l'aspect du fichier PDF dans différentes conditions. La partie supérieure de la boîte de dialogue comporte plusieurs options de prévisualisation du document. Le menu Aperçu vous permet de passer de l'aperçu des séparations à l'aperçu des avertissements de couleur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Séparations, la partie inférieure de la boîte de dialogue affiche la liste de toutes les encres du fichier, de même que les commandes de couverture totale de la zone. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Avertissements de couleur, une zone d'avertissement remplace celle des séparations et fournit des informations sur les commandes d'avertissement relatives aux encres. Les options d'aperçu définies dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie sont répercutées directement dans le document ouvert. Vous pouvez également accéder à l'inspecteur de l'objet à partir de la zone Aperçu de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie en vue de contrôler le contenu du document. Pour plus de détails, voir « Affichage d'informations sur le contenu d'un document PDF » à la page 490. La boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie propose également un accès au gestionnaire d'encres permettant de remapper les encres de tons directs lors de l'impression et de l'aperçu. Le mappage des encres pour l'aperçu s'applique uniquement lorsque la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie est ouverte. Remarque : Si vous utilisez un système de gestion des couleurs (SGC) avec des profils ICC parfaitement étalonnés et que vous avez étalonné votre moniteur, l'aperçu à l'écran des séparations de couleurs sera plus proche de la séparation de sortie finale.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 487 Outils d'impression professionnelle Boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, option Séparations sélectionnée A. Profil de simulation B. Options de simulation C. Options d'affichage D. Liste des séparations E. Options de couverture totale de la zone F. Pourcentages d'encre G. Option d'affichage des couleurs Une vidéo sur la prévisualisation du rendu est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4083_a9_fr. Voir aussi « A propos des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 « A propos de l’étalonnage et de la caractérisation du moniteur » à la page 446 « Présentation du Gestionnaire d’encres » à la page 494 « Vérification des couleurs sur épreuves-écran » à la page 440 Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de la sortie. • Activez l’outil Aperçu de la sortie sur la barre d’outils d’impression. A B C E D G FUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 488 Outils d'impression professionnelle Choix du profil de simulation et des options d'aperçu Sélectionnez un profil existant destiné à simuler l'aspect du document une fois imprimé. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, sélectionnez une option dans le menu Profil de simulation. 2 Si vous cochez la case Simuler l'encre noire, les couleurs noires et sombres seront dessinées avec la luminosité du noir tel qu'il est généré par le profil de simulation. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les noirs sont mappés à la couleur la plus sombre que le moniteur puisse reproduire. Si vous cochez la case Simuler la teinte du papier, outre la luminosité de l'encre noire, l'aspect de la couleur du papier est également simulé. Cette option vous permet de voir l'aspect des autres couleurs telles qu'elles seront couchées sur le papier. Si vous désactivez cette option, la teinte du papier correspond au blanc du moniteur. 3 Indiquez le pourcentage d'avertissement d'opacité afin de définir l'opacité de tous les avertissements mis en évidence. Affichage des couleurs par espace source Vous pouvez limiter les couleurs à afficher dans l'aperçu. Vous pouvez également visualiser des types d'éléments spécifiques, tels que des objets en couleurs unis, des images, des ombres lissées, du texte et des dessins au trait. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un espace colorimétrique source, vous voyez uniquement les objets dans cet espace colorimétrique. Limiter les couleurs peut se révéler utile pour voir si la page contient une couleur RVB ou détecter où un ton direct est utilisé. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles dans le menu Affichage. Affichage d'un aperçu des séparations de couleurs Vous pouvez prévisualiser les plaques de séparation à l’écran et la couverture d’encre pour garantir que le document imprimé répond aux conditions requises. L'aperçu des séparations à l'écran peut certes vous aider à détecter des problèmes tout en évitant le coût de l'impression des séparations, mais il ne permet pas d'afficher le recouvrement, les options d'émulsion, les repères d'impression, les trames de demi-teintes et la résolution. Il est nettement préférable de vérifier ces options chez le prestataire de services d'impression à l'aide d'épreuves intégrales ou superposées. Remarque : Les objets répartis sur des calques masqués n’apparaissent pas dans l’aperçu à l’écran. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, choisissez Séparations dans le menu Affichage. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher une ou plusieurs séparations, cochez la case en regard du nom des séparations. Chaque séparation est signalée par la couleur qui lui est attribuée. • Pour masquer une ou plusieurs séparations, désactivez la case en regard du nom des séparations. • Pour afficher toutes les plaques quadri ou en tons directs en même temps, sélectionnez Plaques quadri ou Plaques en tons directs. Remarque : Une plaque quadri ou en tons directs seule s'affiche en tant que plaque noire. Les objets sur une plaque de couleur claire (jaune, par exemple) seront plus visibles. Voir aussi « Séparation des tons directs en tant que couleurs quadrichromiques » à la page 495UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 489 Outils d'impression professionnelle Vérification de la couverture d'encre Une quantité trop importante d'encre risque de saturer le papier et de causer des problèmes de séchage ou de modifier les caractéristiques colorimétriques du document. L’option Couverture totale de la zone indique le pourcentage total de toutes les encres utilisées. Par exemple, 280 signifie 280 % de couverture d'encre, soit 60 % de cyan, 60 % de magenta, 60 % de jaune et 100 % de noir. Demandez à votre prestataire de services d'impression la couverture totale maximale de la presse qui sera utilisée pour l'impression. Vous pourrez ensuite afficher un aperçu du document afin d'identifier les zones où la couverture totale dépasse la limite de la presse. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, choisissez Séparations dans le menu Affichage. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour vérifier la couverture d’une zone particulière, placez le pointeur dessus dans la fenêtre de document. Les pourcentages de couverture d’encre apparaissent dans la liste des encres en regard du nom de l’encre. • Pour vérifier l'intégralité de la couverture du document, choisissez Couverture totale de la zone, puis choisissez un nombre dans le menu déroulant ou saisissez un pourcentage dans la zone. • Pour définir la taille de l'échantillon, choisissez une option dans la liste Taille de l'échantillon. L'option Echantillon ponctuel indique la valeur du pixel sur lequel vous cliquez. Les options Moyenne 3 x 3 et Moyenne 5 x 5 indiquent la valeur moyenne du nombre de pixels spécifié dans la zone sur laquelle vous cliquez. La taille de l'échantillon n'a pas d'incidence sur les avertissements relatifs à l'option Couverture totale de la zone. Elle affecte uniquement les valeurs (exprimées en pourcentage) indiquées en regard des différentes plaques. Vous pouvez ajuster la couverture d'encre en convertissant certains tons directs en couleurs quadri à l'aide du gestionnaire d'encres. Définition de la couleur d'arrière-plan Vous avez la possibilité de simuler l'aspect qu'un document aurait s'il était imprimé sur du papier couleur. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, choisissez Séparations dans le menu Affichage. 2 Cochez la case Définir la couleur d'arrière-plan des pages située au bas de la boîte de dialogue, puis sélectionnez une couleur. Affichage des avertissements de couleur Des problèmes de sortie risquent de se produire lorsqu'il est impossible de reproduire les couleurs d’un document sur une presse spécifique ou que du noir intense est utilisé par mégarde pour les polices. Pour détecter de tels problèmes avant d'envoyer un document PDF à l'impression professionnelle, vous avez la possibilité d'utiliser les divers avertissements de couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie. Les zones dont les pixels génèrent un avertissement sont identifiées par la couleur définie pour l'avertissement située à côté du type d'avertissement. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, choisissez Avertissements de couleur dans le menu Affichage. 2 Sélectionnez une ou les deux options suivantes : Surimpression Indique l'emplacement de la surimpression sur la page dans une sortie faisant appel à la séparation des couleurs. Vous pouvez également afficher un aperçu des effets de la surimpression sur un périphérique d’impression composite en sélectionnant l’option Simuler la surimpression dans le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l’impression. Cette option s’avère utile pour vérifier la séparation des couleurs. Par défaut, lorsque vous imprimez des couleurs opaques qui se chevauchent, la couleur du dessus masque la zone du dessous. L'utilisation de la surimpression vous permet d'éviter le masquage et de rendre transparente l'encre d'impression du dessus qui chevauche les encres sous-jacentes. Le degré de transparence à l'impression varie en fonction de l'encre, du papier et de la méthode d'impression utilisés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 490 Outils d'impression professionnelle Noir intense Indique les zones qui s’impriment en noir intense, c'est-à-dire dans du noir quadri (N) mélangé à des encres de couleur permettant d'augmenter l’opacité et d'accentuer l’intensité de la couleur. Le noir intense est généralement utilisé pour couvrir des zones importantes, car vous avez besoin d'une densité foncée supplémentaire pour rendre le texte noir plutôt que gris. Renseignez le champ de l'option Découpe à, afin de définir le pourcentage de noir minimal requis pour définir le contenu comme du noir intense. Le noir intense utilisé pour cet avertissement est une valeur exprimée en pourcentage de noir (calculé sur la valeur de découpe) ou toute valeur C, M ou J différente de zéro. Pour modifier la couleur d'avertissement utilisée dans l'aperçu, sélectionnez une couleur dans le sélecteur de nuances. Voir aussi « Epreuvage à l’écran des couleurs (Acrobat) » à la page 442 « Préférences d'affichage » à la page 44 Affichage d'informations sur le contenu d'un document PDF La boîte de dialogue Inspecteur de l'objet permet d'afficher la résolution d'une image, le mode couleur, la transparence et d'autres informations sur le contenu d'un document. 1 Dans la section Aperçu de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie, sélectionnez l'option Inspecteur de l'objet. 2 Cliquez dans la fenêtre du document pour afficher dans la boîte de dialogue des informations sur les objets se trouvant sous le pointeur Aperçu de la sortie. Conversion des couleurs et gestion des encres A propos de la conversion des couleurs Les couleurs doivent souvent être converties pour être affichées sur un moniteur ou envoyées à une imprimante. La conversion est requise lorsque les modèles de couleur ne correspondent pas (par exemple, lorsque une couleur CMJN s'affiche sur un moniteur RVB, ou lorsqu'un document avec images dans un espace colorimétrique RVB est envoyé vers une imprimante). Acrobat utilise les espaces colorimétriques source des objets du document PDF afin de déterminer s'il doit convertir les couleurs, le cas échéant, de l'espace RVB à l'espace CMJN, par exemple. Lorsqu'un fichier PDF contient des objets avec des profils de couleur incorporés, Acrobat gère les couleurs à l'aide de ces profils incorporés et non avec les espaces colorimétriques par défaut. Pour les images et autres objets dans le fichier PDF qui contiennent des profils de couleur incorporés, Acrobat utilise les informations dans le profil pour déterminer la gestion de l'aspect de la couleur. Pour les objets avec des couleurs gérées (ceux avec des profils de couleur incorporés), cette conversion se comprend aisément. Toutefois, les couleurs non gérées n'utilisant pas de profils, on peut leur en assigner un provisoirement en vue de la conversion. Le panneau Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences propose des profils de conversion des couleurs non gérées. Vous pouvez également sélectionner des profils spécifiques en fonction des conditions d'impression locales. Une vidéo sur la conversion des couleurs dans un fichier PDF est disponible à l'adresse : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4083_a9_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 491 Outils d'impression professionnelle Voir aussi « Pourquoi les couleurs ne concordent pas toujours ? » à la page 431 « Utilisation des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs Lorsque le document PDF est imprimé sur un périphérique d’impression professionnelle ou intégré dans un flux de travail de prépresse, vous pouvez convertir les objets en couleurs du document à l’espace colorimétrique CMJN ou à un autre espace. Contrairement à d'autres fonctions Acrobat qui convertissent temporairement des couleurs pour l'impression ou l'affichage, la fonction Convertir les couleurs modifie les valeurs des couleurs dans le document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs, vous pouvez convertir les couleurs d'une seule page ou d'un document entier. Remarque : La boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs permet de convertir toutes les couleurs d'un document ou des types d'objets spécifiés vers l'espace colorimétrique de destination. Pour convertir uniquement les couleurs de l'objet sélectionné, utilisez l'outil Retouche d'objet. Boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs A. Attributs de conversion B. Couleurs du document Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Convertir les couleurs. • Activez l’outil Convertir les couleurs sur la barre d’outils Impression. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 492 Outils d'impression professionnelle Conversion des couleurs en espace colorimétrique différent En fonction des espaces colorimétriques que vous sélectionnez, la conversion des couleurs conserve, convertit ou mappe (pseudonymes) les valeurs de couleur de l’espace colorimétrique source à l’espace colorimétrique de destination spécifié comme suit : • Les objets contenant des données RVB non balisées (RVB dispositif) sont convertis, du profil de l'espace de travail RVB à la gamme CMJN de l'espace de destination. Ceci s'applique aussi aux objets non balisés CMJN (CMJN dispositif) et en niveaux de gris (Gris dispositif). • Les objets utilisant des espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique (CalGray, CalRGB ou Lab) sont conservés ou convertis. S’ils sont convertis, Acrobat utilise les informations de profil incorporé de l’objet dont les couleurs sont indépendantes du périphérique. • Les objets en tons directs peuvent être conservés, convertis ou mappés (pseudonyme) à toute autre encre présente dans le document. Les objets comprennent les espaces colorimétriques Séparations, DeviceN et NChannel. Les tons directs peuvent également être mappés à une couleur quadri CMJN si le modèle colorimétrique quadri de l'espace de destination est l'espace CMJN. Vous avez la possibilité d'afficher un aperçu des tons directs mappés à d'autres encres dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de la sortie. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez convertir des plaques en tons directs, utilisez le gestionnaire d'encres en combinaison avec l'outil Convertir les couleurs. Pour convertir des plaques en tons directs spécifiques en plaques quadri, vous devez les mapper à l'espace colorimétrique quadri dans le gestionnaire d'encres. A défaut, tous les tons directs du document seront convertis en couleurs quadri si vous avez sélectionné Ton direct dans le menu Type de couleur. Voir aussi « Utilisation des profils colorimétriques » à la page 445 « Aperçu de la sortie » à la page 486 « Création d’un pseudonyme d’encre pour un ton direct » à la page 495 « A propos des modes de rendu » à la page 454 Conversion des couleurs du document 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs, sélectionnez une commande de conversion. Si la liste est vide, cliquez sur Ajouter afin d'ajouter la commande de conversion par défaut. 2 Sélectionnez la commande de conversion que vous voulez modifier, puis sélectionnez une option de la zone Critères de correspondance : Type d'objet Indique si vous souhaitez convertir les couleurs de l'ensemble du document ou seulement celles d'un type d'objet précis contenu dans le document. Type de couleur Indique l'espace colorimétrique à convertir. Corps de texte minimum et Corps de texte maximum Indiquent les valeurs minimum et maximum du corps des objets de texte. 3 Sélectionnez l'une des commandes de conversion disponibles : Conserver Conserve les objets dans l’espace colorimétrique lors de la sortie du document. Convertir en profil Utilise le profil de couleur de destination pour convertir les objets à un profil ICC commun destiné à un périphérique de sortie. Désincorporer Supprime les profils incorporés des objets en couleurs dans l'espace colorimétrique (ou dans l'espace de remplacement, si un espace de remplacement est spécifié pour un ton direct).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 493 Outils d'impression professionnelle 4 Indiquez le profil de conversion à utiliser. 5 Sélectionnez le mode de rendu à utiliser pour la conversion. L'option définie par défaut est Utiliser le mode du document. Si vous sélectionnez l'un des autres modes, celui-ci remplace le mode du document lors de la conversion. 6 Choisissez Incorporer pour incorporer le profil. L'activation de l'option Incorporer balise tous les objets à l'aide du profil de conversion sélectionné. Par exemple, un document contient cinq objets : un en niveaux de gris, deux en RVB et deux en CMJN. Vous pouvez, dans ce cas, incorporer un profil de couleur pour étalonner les couleurs de chaque espace colorimétrique, et ce pour les trois profils. Cette opération s'avère utile quand le RIP effectue la gestion des couleurs des fichiers PDF ou si vous partagez les fichiers PDF avec d'autres utilisateurs. 7 Activez l'option Convertir les couleurs selon le mode de sortie et spécifiez le profil à utiliser pour la conversion de chaque objet selon le mode de sortie. Un mode de sortie décrit les caractéristiques de reproduction des couleurs d'un périphérique de sortie possible ou d'un environnement d'impression dans lequel le document sera imprimé. 8 Spécifiez les pages à convertir. 9 Choisissez une option de conversion, s'il y a lieu : Conserver les noirs Conserve les objets en couleurs CMJN, RVB ou Niveaux de gris pendant la conversion. Cette option permet d'éviter que le texte en RVB noir soit converti en noir intense lors d’une conversion à l’espace CMJN. Convertir les gris en noir CMJN Convertit les tons gris du périphérique en couleurs CMJN. Conserver les couleurs primaires CMJN Lors de la transformation des couleurs dans la préparation des documents CMJN pour un profil d'impression cible différent, préserve les couleurs primaires. Pour les couleurs à un colorant uniquement, Acrobat utilise ce colorant. Pour les couleurs à plusieurs colorants, Acrobat détermine la couleur la plus proche. 10 Cliquez sur Couleurs du document pour afficher une liste des espaces colorimétriques et des tons directs contenus dans le document. 11 Cliquez sur Gestionnaire d'encres afin de configurer les paramètres d'encre et de créer un pseudonyme de l'encre. Si vous configurez un pseudonyme dans le gestionnaire d'encres, son nom s'affichera en regard du bouton Gestionnaire d'encres dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs. 12 Sélectionnez une commande dans la liste Commandes de conversion, puis cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre afin de modifier l'ordre de conversion. 13 Pour créer un paramètre prédéfini à partir de vos sélections, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez ensuite importer les paramètres en cliquant sur Charger. Conversion des couleurs d'objet Si certains objets contenus dans le fichier PDF ne correspondent pas à l'espace colorimétrique du document, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Retouche d’objet pour les corriger. L'outil Retouche d'objet permet de modifier l'espace colorimétrique des objets sélectionnés. Par exemple, si vous placez une image RVB dans un document CMJN, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil pour modifier uniquement l'image RVB et éviter ainsi de modifier les couleurs dans le reste du document PDF. Vous pouvez modifier temporairement l'espace colorimétrique ou incorporer le profil avec l'objet. Remarque : L'outil Retouche d'objet ne vous permet pas de modifier le mode de sortie, car cela aurait une incidence sur l'ensemble du document. 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées >Retouche d'objet, puis sélectionnez les objets à convertir. 2 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Couleur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 494 Outils d'impression professionnelle 4 Dans le menu Convertir en, choisissez le profil pour la spécification de l'espace colorimétrique de l'objet. L'espace colorimérique actif d'un objet unique (ou des espaces colorimétriques identiques pour des objets multiples) s'affiche dans la partie supérieure de l'onglet Couleur pour référence. Les espaces colorimétriques différents pour des objets multiples ne sont pas affichés. 5 Dans le menu Mode de rendu, choisissez la méthode de conversion appropriée pour l'objet. 6 (Facultatif) Pour incorporer le profil avec l'objet, cochez la case Incorporer le profil. 7 Cliquez sur Convertir les couleurs. Présentation du Gestionnaire d’encres Le Gestionnaire d’encres permet de gérer les encres pour la sortie. Les modifications effectuées à l’aide du Gestionnaire d’encres affectent la sortie, pas la définition des couleurs dans le document. Les options du Gestionnaire d’encres sont particulièrement pratiques pour les prestataires de services d’impression. Par exemple, si un travail comprend un ton direct, un prestataire de services peut ouvrir le document et convertir ce ton direct en équivalent quadrichromique (CMJN). Lorsqu’un document contient deux tons directs similaires alors qu’il n’en a besoin que d’un seul ou qu’un ton direct porte deux noms différents, un prestataire de services a la possibilité d’attribuer un seul pseudonyme aux deux noms. Dans un flux de production de recouvrement, le Gestionnaire d’encres vous permet de définir la densité d’encre pour contrôler le recouvrement, ainsi que la séquence et le nombre corrects des encres. Remarque : InDesign et Acrobat présentent la même technologie de Gestionnaire d’encres. Cependant, seul InDesign comporte l’option Utilise des valeurs Lab standard pour les tons directs. Gestionnaire d’encres A. Encre quadrichromique B. Pseudonyme de ton direct C. Ton direct Ouverture du Gestionnaire d’encres sous Acrobat Procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : • Choisissez la commande Options avancées > Impression > Gestionnaire d’encres. • Activez l’outil Gestionnaire d’encres sur la barre d’outils Impression. • Choisissez la commande Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de la sortie et sélectionnez l’option Gestionnaire d’encres. • Choisissez la commande Fichier > Imprimer et cliquez sur le bouton Avancées. Dans le panneau Sortie de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l’impression, cliquez sur le bouton Gestionnaire d’encres. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 495 Outils d'impression professionnelle • Choisissez la commande Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis choisissez l’option PostScript ou Encapsulated PostScript dans la liste déroulante Type. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres, puis sur le bouton Gestionnaire d’encres. Ouverture du Gestionnaire d’encres sous InDesign Procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : • Dans le menu du panneau Aperçu des séparations (Fenêtre > Sortie > Aperçu des séparations), choisissez l’option Gestionnaire d’encres. • Choisissez la commande Fichier > Imprimer et cliquez sur l’option Sorties. Dans la section Sortie, cliquez sur le bouton Gestionnaire d’encres. Séparation des tons directs en tant que couleurs quadrichromiques Grâce au Gestionnaire d’encres, vous pouvez convertir les tons directs en couleurs quadrichromiques. Lorsque les tons directs sont convertis en équivalents quadrichromiques, ils sont imprimés en tant que séparations plutôt que sur une plaque unique. La conversion d’un ton direct est utile si vous avez ajouté par inadvertance un ton direct à un document de couleur quadrichromique ou si le document contient trop de tons directs pour l’impression. 1 Dans le Gestionnaire d’encres, utilisez l’une des méthodes suivantes : • Pour séparer les tons directs individuels, cliquez sur l’icône de type d’encre en regard du ton direct ou du pseudonyme de ton direct. Une icône de couleur quadrichromique s’affiche. Pour remplacer la couleur quadrichromique par un ton direct, cliquez de nouveau sur l’icône. • Pour séparer tous les tons directs, cochez la case Quadrichromie. Les icônes en regard des tons directs sont remplacées par les icônes de couleurs quadrichromiques. Pour restaurer les tons directs, décochez la case Quadrichromie. Remarque : Lorsque l’option Quadrichromie est sélectionnée, tous les pseudonymes d’encre définis dans le Gestionnaire d’encres sont supprimés et les paramètres de surimpression et de recouvrement du document sont modifiés. 2 (InDesign uniquement) Pour utiliser les valeurs Lab d’un ton direct plutôt que les définitions CMJN, sélectionnez l’option Utiliser des valeurs Lab standard pour les tons directs. Création d’un pseudonyme d’encre pour un ton direct Vous pouvez mapper un ton direct à un autre ton direct ou à une autre couleur quadrichromique en créant un pseudonyme. Ce dernier est utile si un document contient deux tons directs similaires alors qu’un seul ton est requis ou si le document contient trop de tons directs. Le mode Aperçu de la surimpression, une fois activé, vous permet d’observer les effets (à l’écran) du pseudonyme d’encre sur la sortie imprimée. 1 Dans le Gestionnaire d’encres, sélectionnez l’encre du ton direct pour laquelle vous souhaitez créer un pseudonyme. 2 Choisissez une option dans le menu Pseudonyme de l’encre. L’icône de type d’encre et la description de l’encre sont modifiées en conséquence.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 496 Outils d'impression professionnelle Repères d'impression et filets maigres A propos des repères d'impression dans les fichiers PDF Lorsque vous préparez un document en vue d'une impression professionnelle, certains repères sont indispensables au prestataire de services d'impression pour les opérations d'alignement des films de séparation lors de la production des épreuves, de mesure du film pour ajuster l'étalonnage et la densité d'encre, de rognage du film à la taille voulue, etc. Les repères d'impression indiquent les limites des zones de document prises en charge par Adobe PDF, telles que les zones de rognage et de fond perdu. Vous pouvez ajouter des repères d’impression temporaires au moment de l’impression dans le panneau Repères et fonds perdus de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l’impression ou les incorporer dans le fichier (éventuellement dans un calque) dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des repères d’impression. Pour plus de détails sur l’ajout de repères d’impression pour une sortie imprimée vraiment précise, reportez-vous à la section « Inclusion des repères et fonds perdus » à la page 469. Remarque : Un fichier PDF créé dans Adobe InDesign CS ou version ultérieure peut inclure des repères d'impression sur la page ou sur un calque distinct. Vous avez la possibilité d'afficher ces repères à l'aide du panneau Calques dans Acrobat. Si les repères d'impression ont été exportés en tant que calque, tous les repères créés à l'aide de la fonction Ajouter des repères d'impression d'Acrobat remplacent les repères d'impression InDesign. Dans le cas contraire, les repères d'impression Acrobat chevauchent ceux d'InDesign, qui risquent de ne pas correspondre. Incorporation de repères d'impression dans un document PDF 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Ajouter des repères d'impression ou activez l'outil Ajouter des repères d'impression sur la barre d'outils Impression. 2 Spécifiez les pages auxquelles ajouter ces repères. 3 Spécifiez les repères et les paramètres. Voir aussi « Inclusion des repères et fonds perdus » à la page 469 Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages La boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages permet de définir les limites de rognage, de fond perdu et d’art lors de la préparation du document PDF à l’impression ou à un autre type de sortie. Vous pouvez ajuster les marges des zones de document prises en charge par Adobe PDF, y compris les zones de support (format de page), de recadrage, de fond perdu et graphique. Cette fonctionnalité s'avère utile lorsque les repères d'impression ajoutés par le biais de l'outil Ajouter des repères d'impression (et non via le panneau Repères et fonds perdus de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression) sont rognés parce que la zone de recadrage est trop petite pour inclure tous les repères. Les prestataires de services d'impression peuvent également utiliser cet outil afin d'agrandir la page pour des tâches d'imposition. Vous pouvez passer d'une zone à une autre sans perdre les marges que vous avez définies pour chaque zone. A mesure que vous ajustez les zones une à une, les nouvelles options définies sont répercutées dans l’aperçu de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages. Par exemple, si vous agrandissez la zone de recadrage ou de support, l’aperçu du contenu de page « rétrécit ». Affichez la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages en choisissant Document > Recadrer des pages.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 497 Outils d'impression professionnelle Remarque : Lorsque la zone de recadrage est agrandie, la zone de support est redimensionnée en conséquence. Voir aussi « Recadrage des pages » à la page 142 Retouche des filets maigres Les traits très fins, appelés filets maigres, posent des problèmes lors d’une impression offset. Sans modification dans les documents PDF, ils risquent de ne pas apparaître sur le document final imprimé. L’outil Retoucher les filets maigres permet de rechercher la plupart des filets maigres et de les remplacer par des traits plus épais. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Retoucher les filets maigres ou activez l’outil Retoucher les filets maigres sur la barre d’outils Impression. 2 Saisissez une épaisseur pour le filet maigre à rechercher, puis tapez une épaisseur de remplacement. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 498 Outils d'impression professionnelle Retouchez les épaisseurs de filets maigres à l'aide des flèches d'incrément. Cliquez sur les flèches d'incrément en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée pour modifier les valeurs par nombre entier. 3 Choisissez une unité de mesure dans le menu Unités. 4 (Facultatif) Cochez les cases Inclure les polices de Type 3 ou Inclure les motifs pour remplacer les filets maigres en caractères de Type 3 ou les motifs par l'épaisseur de remplacement des autres filets maigres. Toutefois, les caractères et les motifs peuvent être utilisés dans différents contextes au sein d'un même document (par exemple, des valeurs de facteur de zoom différentes). Par conséquent, si vous modifiez l'épaisseur de trait, des résultats inattendus risquent de se produire. Vérifiez les résultats obtenus si vous sélectionnez ces options et adaptez celles-ci, le cas échéant. 5 Spécifiez les pages à vérifier. Aplatissement de la transparence A propos de l’aplatissement Si votre document ou votre illustration fait appel à la transparence, il est généralement nécessaire d’appliquer un processus appelé aplatissement pour sa sortie. L’aplatissement divise l’illustration transparente en zones vectorielles et en zones pixellisées. Plus l’illustration est complexe (mêlant images, vecteurs, tons directs, surimpression, etc.), plus l’aplatissement et son résultat le sont également. L’aplatissement peut être nécessaire lors de l’impression ou lors de l’enregistrement ou de l’exportation dans des formats différents ne prenant pas en charge la transparence. Pour conserver la transparence sans aplatissement lorsque vous créez des fichiers PDF, enregistrez-les en tant que documents PDF Adobe 1.4 (Acrobat 5.0) ou version ultérieure. Vous pouvez spécifier les paramètres d’aplatissement avant de les enregistrer et de les appliquer en tant qu’aplatissements prédéfinis de la transparence. Les objets transparents sont aplatis en fonction des paramètres de l’aplatissement prédéfini sélectionné. Remarque : l’aplatissement de la transparence ne peut pas être annulé après enregistrement du fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 499 Outils d'impression professionnelle Une zone graphique en chevauchement est divisée lors de l’aplatissement. Pour plus d'informations, recherchez des documents portant sur la transparence sur le site Web d'Adobe à l'adresse www.adobe.fr. Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de l'aplatissement Utilisez les options d'aperçu dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de l'aplatissement pour mettre en surbrillance les zones et objets transparents, ainsi que les objets concernés par l'aplatissement de la transparence. Le contenu transparent est mis en surbrillance en rouge et le reste des illustrations apparaît en niveaux de gris. Vous pouvez utiliser ces informations pour ajuster les options d’aplatissement avant d’appliquer les paramètres, puis les enregistrer en tant que paramètres d'aplatissement prédéfinis. Vous pouvez appliquer ces paramètres prédéfinis à partir d'autres boîtes de dialogue dans l'application, notamment Optimisation PDF, Configuration avancée de l'impression et la a boîte de dialogue des paramètres d'enregistrement au format PostScript.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 500 Outils d'impression professionnelle La boîte de dialogue Aperçu de l'aplatissement permet de prévisualiser la page PDF active à l'aide des paramètres d'aperçu et d'aplatissement. Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de l'aplatissement ? Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de l'aplatissement ou activez l’outil Aperçu de l'aplatissement dans la barre d’outils Impression. Aperçu des zones de l’illustration qui seront aplaties Les options d’aperçu de l’aperçu de l’aplatissement permettent de mettre en surbrillance les zones affectées par l’aplatissement. Ces informations fournies sous forme de codes de couleur vous permettent de régler les options d’aplatissement. Remarque : l’aperçu de l’aplatissement ne donne pas un aperçu précis des tons directs, des surimpressions et des objets fusionnés. Pour ce faire, utilisez plutôt l’aperçu de la surimpression. 1 Affichage de la palette Aperçu de l’aplatissement (ou boîte de dialogue) : • Dans Illustrator, sélectionnez Fenêtre > Aperçu de l’aplatissement. • Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de l’aplatissement. • Dans InDesign, sélectionnez Fenêtre > Sortie > Aperçu de l’aplatissement. 2 Dans le menu Sélection, sélectionnez le type de zones à mettre en surbrillance. La disponibilité des options dépend du contenu de l’illustration. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 501 Outils d'impression professionnelle 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres d’aplatissement à utiliser : sélectionnez un paramètre prédéfini ou, le cas échéant, définissez des options spécifiques. Remarque : (Illustrator) Si les paramètres d’aplatissement n’apparaissent pas, sélectionnez Afficher les options dans le menu de la palette pour les afficher. 4 Si l’illustration contient des objets surimprimés ayant une interaction avec des objets transparents, dans Illustrator, sélectionnez une option dans le menu déroulant Surimpressions. Vous pouvez conserver, simuler ou ignorer les surimpressions. Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez Conserver la surimpression pour fusionner la couleur de l’illustration transparente et la couleur d’arrière-plan afin de créer un effet de surimpression. 5 A tout moment, cliquez sur Actualiser pour afficher un aperçu actualisé en fonction des paramètres sélectionnés. Selon la complexité de l’illustration, l’aperçu peut prendre quelques secondes à s’afficher. Dans InDesign, vous pouvez également sélectionner Rafraîchir auto. sélection. Dans Illustrator et Acrobat, pour agrandir l’aperçu, cliquez dans la zone d’aperçu. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, cliquez avec la touche Alt ou Option enfoncée dans la zone d’aperçu. Pour effectuer un panoramique de l’aperçu, maintenez la barre d’espacement enfoncée et faites glisser le curseur dans la zone d’aperçu. Voir aussi « A propos de l’aplatissement » à la page 498 Options d’aplatissement de la transparence Vous pouvez définir les options d’aplatissement de la transparence en créant, modifiant ou affichant un aperçu des aplatissements prédéfinis dans Illustrator, InDesign ou Acrobat. Options de mise en surbrillance (aperçu) Aucune (aperçu en couleur) Désactive l’aperçu. Zones complexes pixellisées Met en surbrillance les zones à pixelliser pour des raisons de performances à l’aide du curseur Equilibre Pixellisation/Vectorisation. Souvenez-vous que les limites de la zone de mise en surbrillance risquent plus fortement de produire des problèmes de raccordement (en fonction de la configuration du pilote d’imprimante et de la résolution de pixellisation). Pour limiter les problèmes de raccordement, sélectionnez Ecrêter les zones complexes. Objets transparents Met en surbrillance les objets sources de transparence, tels que les objets présentant une opacité partielle (y compris les images avec des couches alpha), les objets fusionnés et les objets comportant des masques d’opacité. En outre, notez que les effets et les styles peuvent être porteurs de transparence, et les objets surimprimés peuvent être traités en tant que sources de transparence s’ils sont impliqués dans la transparence ou si la surimpression requiert un aplatissement. Tous les objets concernés Met en surbrillance tous les objets impliqués dans la transparence, y compris les objets transparents et les objets recouverts par des objets transparents. Le processus d’aplatissement a un impact sur les objets mis en surbrillance : leurs contours ou leurs motifs sont décomposés, certaines parties sont pixellisées, etc. Fichiers EPS associés affectés (Illustrator uniquement) Met en surbrillance tous les fichiers EPS associés affectés par la transparence. Graphiques affectés (InDesign uniquement) Met en surbrillance l’ensemble du contenu placé affecté par la transparence ou les effets de la transparence. Cette option est utile pour les prestataires de services qui ont besoin de visualiser les graphiques dont l’impression requiert une attention particulière. Motifs décomposés (Illustrator et Acrobat) Met en surbrillance tous les motifs dont l’implication dans la transparence entraîne la décomposition.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 502 Outils d'impression professionnelle Contours vectorisés Met en surbrillance tous les contours vectorisés du fait de la présence de transparences ou de l’activation de l’option Vectoriser tous les contours. Texte vectorisé (InDesign uniquement) Met en surbrillance l’ensemble du texte vectorisé du fait de la présence de transparences ou de l’activation de l’option Vectoriser tout le texte. Remarque : dans la sortie finale, les contours et le texte vectorisés peuvent apparaître légèrement différents des originaux, notamment les contours très fins et le texte de très petite taille. Toutefois, ces différences n’apparaissent pas dans l’aperçu de l’aplatissement. Contours et texte pixellisés (InDesign uniquement) Met en surbrillance les contours et le texte pixellisés suite à l’aplatissement. Toutes les zones pixellisées (InDesign uniquement) Met en surbrillance les objets et les intersections d’objets auxquels est appliquée la pixellisation car il n’existe aucun autre moyen de les représenter en PostScript ou du fait de leur complexité par rapport au seuil spécifié par le curseur Equilibre Pixellisation/Vectorisation. Par exemple, l’intersection de deux dégradés transparents sera toujours pixellisée, même si la valeur Equilibre Pixellisation/Vectorisation est égale à 100. L’option Toutes les zones pixellisées permet également d’afficher les graphiques pixellisés (tels que les fichiers Photoshop) impliqués dans la transparence, ainsi que les effets de la pixellisation tels que les ombres portées et les contours progressifs. Notez que le traitement de cette option est plus long que les autres. Aplatissement de la transparence Options prédéfinies Nom/Paramètre prédéfini Indique le nom d’un paramètre prédéfini. Selon la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît, vous pouvez saisir un nom dans la zone de texte Nom ou accepter le nom par défaut. Vous pouvez saisir le nom d’un paramètre prédéfini existant afin de le modifier. Vous ne pouvez cependant pas modifier les paramètres prédéfinis par défaut. Equilibre Pixellisation/Vectorisation Spécifie la quantité d’informations vectorielles qui seront conservées. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus le nombre d’objets vectoriels conservés l’est aussi, alors que plus la valeur est faible, plus le nombre d’objets vectoriels pixellisés est important. Une valeur moyenne conserve les zones simples sous forme vectorielle et les zones complexes sous forme pixellisées. Sélectionnez la valeur la plus faible pour pixelliser l’ensemble de l’illustration. Remarque : le niveau de pixellisation atteint dépend de la complexité de la page et des types d’objets se chevauchant. Résolution des dessins au trait et du texte Pixellise tous les objets, y compris les images, les illustrations vectorielles, le texte et les dégradés selon la résolution spécifiée. Acrobat et InDesign autorisent un maximum de 9600 pixels par pouce (ppp) pour les dessins et de 1200 ppp pour les filets. Illustrator autorise un maximum de 9600 ppp à la fois pour les dessins et les filets. La résolution affecte la précision des intersections aplaties. L’option Résolution des dessins au trait et du texte doit généralement être définie entre 600 et 1200 pour une qualité de pixellisation optimale, notamment en serif ou en une petite taille de points. Résolution des dégradés et des filets Indique la résolution des objets de dégradés et de filets Illustrator pixellisés en raison de l’aplatissement. Cette résolution est comprise entre 72 et 2400 ppp. La résolution affecte la précision des intersections aplaties. La résolution des dégradés et des filets doit généralement être définie entre 150 et 300 ppp : en effet, des résolutions supérieures n’amélioreront pas la qualité des dégradés, des ombres portées et des contours progressifs mais augmenteront le temps d’impression et la taille du fichier. Vectoriser tout le texte Convertit tous les objets de type (type de point, type de zone et type de chemin) en contours et supprime l’ensemble des informations de glyphe sur les types dans les pages contenant une transparence. Cette option préserve la largeur du texte lors de l’aplatissement. Notez que l’activation de cette option a pour effet de donner aux petites polices un aspect légèrement plus épais lors de l’affichage dans Acrobat ou lors de l’impression sur des imprimantes à faible résolution. La qualité du type imprimé sur des imprimantes à résolution élevée ou sur des photocomposeuses n’est pas affectée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 503 Outils d'impression professionnelle Vectoriser tous les contours Convertit tous les contours en tracés simples remplis dans les pages contenant une transparence. Cette option préserve la largeur des contours lors de l’aplatissement. Notez que l’activation de cette option a pour effet de donner aux contours fins un aspect légèrement plus épais et peut dégrader les performances de l’aplatissement. Ecrêter les zones complexes Garantit que les limites entre l’illustration vectorielle et l’illustration pixellisée s’inscrivent sur les tracés d’objet. Cette option réduit les artefacts de raccordement qui subviennent lorsqu’un objet est partiellement pixellisé (une partie de l’objet restant vectorielle). L’activation de cette option peut toutefois générer des chemins trop complexes pour pouvoir être gérés par l’imprimante. Raccord à l’intersection de trames et de vecteurs Remarque : certains pilotes d’imprimante traitent les dessins pixellisés et vectorisés différemment, ce qui entraîne parfois un raccordement de couleurs. Pour minimiser les problèmes de raccord, désactivez certains paramètres de gestion des couleurs spécifiques au pilote de l'imprimante. Ces paramètres varient selon les imprimantes, consultez la documentation de votre imprimante pour obtenir plus de détails. (Illustrator uniquement) Sélectionnez Conserver la transparence alpha (boîte de dialogue Aplatissement de la transparence uniquement) Conserve l’opacité globale des objets aplatis. Avec cette option, comme lorsque vous pixellisez une illustration à l’aide d’un arrière-plan transparent, les objets fusionnés et les surimpressions sont perdus mais leur aspect est conservé au sein de l’illustration traitée, ainsi que le niveau de transparence alpha. L’option Conserver la transparence alpha peut être utile lors de l’exportation au format SWF ou SVG, étant donné que ces deux formats prennent en charge la transparence alpha. (Illustrator uniquement) Sélectionnez Conserver les surimpressions et les tons directs (boîte de dialogue Aplatissement de la transparence uniquement) Conserve généralement les tons directs. Cette option conserve également la surimpression pour les objets qui ne sont pas impliqués dans la transparence. Sélectionnez cette option si vous imprimez des séparations et que le document contient des tons directs et des objets surimprimés. Désélectionnez cette option lors de l’enregistrement de fichiers à utiliser dans des applications de mise en page. Avec cette option sélectionnée, les zones surimprimées ayant une interaction avec les transparences sont aplaties, tandis que la surimpression dans les autres zones est conservée. Les résultats sont imprévisibles lorsque le fichier est généré à partir d’une application de mise en page. Conserver la surimpression (Acrobat uniquement) Fusionne la couleur des illustrations transparentes et la couleur d’arrière-plan afin de créer un effet de surimpression. Espace col. de fusion de la transparence au niveau des pages (Actobat uniquement) Désigne l'espace colorimétrique de fusion de la transparence. Cliquez sur l'option de changement afin de modifier l'espace colorimétrique de fusion de toutes les pages du document, de la page sélectionnée ou d'une étendue de pages. L'espace de fusion crée une fusion des différents espaces colorimétriques des objets lorsque leurs transparences interagissent. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 504 Outils d'impression professionnelle A propos des paramètres d’aplatissement des transparences prédéfinis Si vous imprimez ou exportez régulièrement des documents contenant des transparences, vous pouvez automatiser le processus d’aplatissement en enregistrant des paramètres dans un aplatissement prédéfini des transparences. Vous pouvez ensuite appliquer ces paramètres à une sortie imprimée. Vous pouvez également les appliquer lors de la sauvegarde et de l'exportation des fichiers aux formats PDF 1.3 (Acrobat 4.0), EPS et PostScript. Dans Illustrator, vous pouvez appliquer ces paramètres lorsque vous enregistrez les fichiers dans des versions antérieures d’Illustrator ou lorsque vous les copiez dans le presse-papiers. Dans InDesign, vous pouvez également les appliquer lorsque vous exportez les fichiers au format SVG. Enfin, dans Acrobat, vous pouvez appliquer ces paramètres lors de l’optimisation de fichiers PDF. Ces paramètres contrôlent également le comportement de l’aplatissement lors de l’exportation dans des formats ne prenant pas en charge les transparences. Vous pouvez sélectionner un aplatissement prédéfini dans le panneau Avancés de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer ou de la boîte de dialogue propre au format qui apparaît après la boîte de dialogue initiale Exporter ou Enregistrer sous. Vous pouvez créer vos propres aplatissements prédéfinis ou sélectionner une option par défaut fournie avec le logiciel. Les paramètres par défaut sont conçus pour correspondre à la qualité et la vitesse de l’aplatissement avec une résolution appropriée pour les zones transparentes pixellisées : [Haute résolution] S’utilise pour les impressions finales sur presse et les épreuves haute qualité comme les épreuves présentant une séparation des couleurs. [Résolution moyenne] S’utilise pour les épreuves de bureau et les documents destinés à une impression sur demande sur des imprimantes couleur PostScript. [Basse résolution] S’utilise pour obtenir des épreuves rapides à imprimer sur des imprimantes de bureau en noir et blanc et pour des documents destinés à être publiés sur le Web ou exportés au format SVG. Création d'un paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini Il est possible d'enregistrer les aplatissements prédéfinis des transparences dans un fichier distinct. Cela facilite leur sauvegarde ou leur mise à disposition pour vos flasheurs, vos clients ou vos collaborateurs. Une fois que vous avez créé un paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini personnalisé, vous pouvez le modifier dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF. Les paramètres d'aplatissement prédéfinis sont stockés au même endroit que les fichiers de configuration de l'imprimante : (Windows XP) \Documents and Settings\[utilisateur actuel]\Application Data\Adobe\Acrobat\9.0\Preferences (Windows Vista™) \Users\[utilisateur actuel]\AppData\Roaming\Adobe\Acrobat\9.0\Preferences (Mac OS) Users/[utilisateur actuel]/Library/Preferences/Acrobat/9.0 Remarque : Le format de fichier des paramètres d'aplatissement prédéfinis créés dans Acrobat est différent de celui des paramètres prédéfinis créés dans les autres applications Adobe ; le partage entre applications n'est donc pas possible. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Aperçu de l'aplatissement ou activez l’outil Aperçu de l'aplatissement dans la barre d’outils Impression. 2 Pour créer un paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini à partir d'un aplatissement existant, sélectionnez ce dernier dans le menu Paramètre prédéfini. 3 Définissez les options d’aplatissement. 4 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Réinitialiser pour revenir aux paramètres par défaut. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Saisissez un nom, puis cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 505 Outils d'impression professionnelle Remarque : Pour supprimer un paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini personnalisé, sélectionnez-le dans le menu Paramètre prédéfini, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Les paramètres Faible, Moyen et Elévé sont prédéfinis et ineffaçables. Voir aussi « Options d’aplatissement de la transparence » à la page 501 Application d'un paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la boîte de dialogue Aperçu de l'aplatissement, choisissez un paramètre prédéfini, spécifiez une étendue de pages, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. • Dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF, sélectionnez Transparence dans le panneau de gauche, puis sélectionnez un paramètre prédéfini dans la liste. • Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression, sélectionnez Sortie dans le panneau de gauche, puis choisissez un paramètre prédéfini dans le menu Aplatissement prédéfini de la transparence. • Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez un format de fichier PostScript (EPS ou PS), puis cliquez sur Paramètres. Dans le panneau Sortie, sélectionnez un paramètre prédéfini dans le menu Aplatissement prédéfini de la transparence. Modification d'un paramètre prédéfini d'aplatissement dans la boîte de dialogue Optimisation PDF Vous pouvez modifier uniquement les paramètres prédéfinis personnalisés. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Optimisation PDF. 2 Sélectionnez Transparence dans le panneau de gauche. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur le paramètre d'aplatissement prédéfini à modifier, changez les paramètres, puis cliquez sur OK.506 Chapitre 17 : Contrôle en amont Pour vérifier qu'un document Adobe® PDF contient uniquement les fonctions, les polices et le formatage spécifiés, utilisez l'outil Contrôle en amont afin de contrôler, et dans certains cas, de corriger le contenu de ce document. Analyse du document A propos des contrôles en amont L'outil Contrôle en amont permet d'analyser le contenu d'un document PDF afin de déterminer s’il répond aux conditions d'impression requises ainsi qu'à diverses conditions annexes qu'il vous appartient de spécifier. Le contrôle en amont évalue le fichier par rapport à un jeu de valeurs définies par l'utilisateur et appelées profils de contrôle en amont. Selon le profil, certaines erreurs peuvent être corrigées lors du contrôle en amont. La fonction Contrôle en amont effectue également des vérifications et des corrections aux zones visibles ou à certains objets et s'assure que les documents PDF sont conformes aux différentes normes. La fonction Contrôle en amont identifie, entre autres, les problèmes liés aux couleurs, aux polices, à la transparence, à la résolution des images, à la couverture d'encre et à la compatibilité de version PDF. Elle comprend également des outils d'analyse de la syntaxe PDF ou de la structure PDF réelle d'un document. Avant d'utiliser l'outil Contrôle en amont ou de créer un document PDF pour l'impression, suivez ces recommandations : • Si vous avez créé des fichiers PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat Distiller, d'InDesign ou d'Illustrator, optimisez-les pour l'impression ou la presse. Vous pouvez utiliser soit les paramètres prédéfinis dans les styles de Distiller ou d'InDesign soit ceux fournis par votre prestataire de services d'impression. • Incorporez toutes les polices à partir de l'application de création. L'incorporation empêche la substitution des polices. Voir aussi « Choix de paramètres Adobe PDF prédéfinis pour la conversion des fichiers » à la page 107 « Accès à une police et incorporation d'une police dans Distiller » à la page 123 A propos de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont La boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont vous permet de gérer tous les aspects du contrôle en amont. Cette zone est disponible à partir du menu Options avancées (Options avancées > Contrôle en amont ou Options avancées > Impression > Contrôle en amont) lorsqu'un document PDF est ouvert dans l'application. Vous pouvez aussi activer l'outil Contrôle en amont à partir de la barre d'outils Impression.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 507 Contrôle en amont Boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont A. Vues B. Profils de contrôle en amont, vérifie, ou corrige. C. Alerte relatives aux paramètres d'affichage (désactivée par défaut) D. Groupes E. Description de profil Exécution d'un contrôle en amont Vous pouvez utiliser ou modifier un profil existant ou en créer un nouveau. 1 Ouvrez le document PDF et choisissez Options avancées > Contrôle en amont. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher la liste des profils en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des profils . • Pour afficher la liste des vérifications disponibles, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des vérifications individuelles . • Pour afficher la liste des corrections disponibles, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des corrections individuelles . 3 Le menu vous permet de spécifier les éléments visibles : les afficher tous, uniquement les favoris, les éléments les plus récents, les éléments les plus fréquemment utilisés ou encore l'une des catégories disponibles. 4 Choisissez un profil, une vérification ou une correction dans la liste, afin d'afficher la description correspondante. Les profils sont organisés en groupes que vous pouvez développer et réduire. Les profils dotés d'une icône de clé à molette grise englobent des corrections permettant de résoudre les erreurs détectées dans le fichier. La zone de recherche vous permet également de rechercher unn profil, une vérification ou une correction. 5 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez un profil ou une vérification individuelle, développez Autres options et, le cas échéant, effecuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Indiquez si le contrôle doit se limiter aux calques visibles. La sélection de cette option désactive les éventuelles corrections. • Définissez l'étendue de pages à contrôler. A B D E CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 508 Contrôle en amont 6 Si vous avez sélectionné un profil, cliquez sur Analyser afin d'exécuter le contrôle sans corriger les erreurs détectées ou sur Analyser et corriger afin d'identifier et de résoudre les problèmes. Si vous avez sélectionné une seule vérification, seule l'option Analyser est disponible. Si vous avez sélectionné une seule correction, cliquez sur Corriger afin de résoudre le problème. Vous pouvez également cliquer deux fois sur un profil de la liste pour exécuter un contrôle en amont. Si vous cliquez deux fois sur le fichier, les profils contenant les corrections appliquent ces dernières. Pour consulter des vidéos sur le contrôle en amont, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Contrôle en amont pour les professionnels de la création : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4084_a9_fr • Association d'objets aux calques à l'aide du contrôle en amont : http://tv.adobe.com/#vi+f1588v1748 Voir aussi « A propos des profils de contrôle en amont » à la page 517 « Conversion de documents PDF au format PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E » à la page 534 Préférences de contrôle en amont La boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont permet de gérer les rapports de résultats et de spécifier les modes de sortie lors de la création de fichiers PDF/X, PDF/A et PDF/E. Un document PDF peut contenir un mode de sortie incorporé comprenant un profil ICC. Pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont, dans Contrôle en amont, choisissez Options > Préférences de contrôle en amont. Voir aussi « Création des modes de sortie » à la page 537 Onglet Générales L'onglet Générales comprend des options de configuration du mode d'affichage des éléments de la boîte de dialogue et des résultats du contrôle en amont : Nombre maximum de résultats à afficher par type de vérification Indique le nombre d'occurrences d'une incohérence dans la liste des résultats. Utilisez l'option Par page (sous Autres correspondances) pour imbriquer les résultats supplémentaires dans la section Autres correspondances de la liste des résultats. Le nombre maximum de résultats pour un document est de 25 000. Niveau de détail de l'affichage des résultats Indique le niveau de détail des informations affichées dans la liste des résultats du contrôle en amont. Vous pouvez choisir d'afficher les résultats globaux, les plus significatifs ou détaillés. Afficher la boîte de dialogue Paramètres d'affichage - Alerte si l'affichage n'est pas défini sur la qualité la plus élevée Affiche une icône d'avertissement en haut de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont si l'affichage n'est pas défini sur la qualité maximale. Cliquez sur l'icône d'avertissement pour afficher la liste des alertes. Cliquez sur Ajuster pour ajuster automatiquement les paramètres afin d'optimiser la fiabilité de l'affichage du document PDF sélectionné. Options de mode de sortie Vous pouvez définir les options suivantes dans le panneau Modes de sortie de la boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des modes de sortie, voir la section « Modes de sortie » à la page 537. Nom Nom du mode de sortie. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 509 Contrôle en amont Profil du mode de sortie (profil ICC) Profil ICC décrivant la condition d'impression particulière pour laquelle le document a été préparé et nécessaire à la mise en conformité avec les normes PDF/X, PDF/A-, ou PDF/E. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour sélectionner un profil dans le dossier Profiles par défaut. Identifiant de condition de sortie Nom de référence indiqué par le registre ICC des conditions d'impression standard enregistrées. Choisissez une condition dans la liste correspondante (la description s’affiche dans la zone Condition de sortie), ou choisissez Personnalisé et créez votre propre condition. Registre URL où se trouvent davantage d'informations sur le nom du profil de mode de sortie. Dans le cas des conditions d'impression standard enregistrées à l'aide du profil ICC, cette entrée doit correspondre à http://www.color.org/. Condition de sortie Description de la condition d'impression prévue pour le travail, y compris le type d'impression (par exemple, offset commerciale), le type de papier et la linéature de trame. Vous pouvez changer la description des conditions de sortie que vous modifiez ou créez. URL du profil ICC pour PDF/X-4p URL indiquant les informations du mode de sortie des types de fichiers PDF/X-4p. Verrouillage Cette option vous protège des modification accidentelles du mode de sortie. Tous les champs de texte sont grisés. Onglet Mise en surbrillance L'onglet Mise en surbrillance comprend des options permettant d'identifier les objets problématiques sur une page PDF. Les préférences de mise en surbrillance gèrent l'aspect des masques contenus dans les rapports sur les masques. Elles définissent également l'aspect des lignes à l'écran lorsque vous cliquez deux fois sur l'option de mise en surbrillance dans la fenêtre des résultats du contrôle en amont. Vous définissez les propriétés de mise en surbrillance de chaque type d'alerte : Erreur, Avertissement et Infos. Problèmes mis en évidence par des masques de transparence Identifie les problèmes en les mettant en surbrillance. Si cette option est désactivée, le contenu ne posant pas de problème est mis en surbrillance et celui qui pose problème ne l'est pas. Couleur/Opacité Cliquez sur Couleur pour choisir des couleurs dans une gamme de couleurs. Indiquez le degré d'opacité de la couleur. Tracer la bordure du cadre de sélection Trace les mêmes lignes dans un rapport sur un masque que celles visibles à l'écran lorsque vous cliquez deux fois sur un résultat dans la fenêtre des résultats du contrôle en amont. Cette option s'avère pratique pour identifier des objets dans un rapport sur les masques lorsqu'une image occupe la totalité de la page. Dans ce cas, vous ne voyez pas le masque, mais les lignes entourant les objets. Couleur/Style de trait/Epaisseur de trait effective Cliquez sur Couleur pour choisir des couleurs dans une gamme de couleurs. Cliquez sur Style de trait pour sélectionner un motif de trait (traits, points ou tirets). Indiquez la largeur (l'épaisseur) du trait. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 510 Contrôle en amont Affichage des résultats du contrôle en amont, des objets et des ressources A propos des résultats du contrôle en amont Vous pouvez afficher les résultats du contrôle en amont sous forme de liste, de commentaires ou individuellement dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont. Dans la liste des résultats, les incohérences s'affichent par ordre décroissant de gravité : toutes les erreurs en premier lieu, puis les avertissements et enfin les informations. Une icône d'avertissement apparaît en regard de chaque vérification n'ayant pas répondu aux critères spécifiés dans le profil de contrôle en amont. Liste des objets problématiques de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont Les icônes figurant en haut de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont indiquent qu'au moins un problème d'un niveau de gravité donné a été détecté : l'icône d'erreur rouge , l'icône d'avertissement jaune et l'icône d'informations bleue à titre de renseignement (aucune erreur ou aucun avertissement). La coche verte signifie qu'aucun problème n'a été détecté. Voir aussi « Contrôle en amont - Options d'avertissement » à la page 523 Affichage des résultats dans une liste La boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont dresse la liste des problèmes signalés comme non conformes aux critères spécifiés dans le profil sélectionné. 1 Effectuez un contrôle en amont. 2 Lorsque les résultats sont affichés, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Le cas échéant, développez une zone afin d'afficher des informations détaillées relatives au problème détecté. Les préférences de contrôle en amont déterminent le nombre de résultats répertoriés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 511 Contrôle en amont • Pour visualiser un objet dans une fenêtre distincte, sélectionnez Afficher un aperçu. • Pour incorporer une piste d'audit, cliquez sur Incorporer une piste d'audit. Vous pouvez effectuer cette opération uniquement si vous avez utilisé un profil pour effectuer le contrôle en amont. • Si vous avez changé d'affichage dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Rapport pour afficher la liste des résultats. • Pour afficher l'objet dans son contexte sur la page PDF, cliquez deux fois dessus. L'objet en question est mis en surbrillance à l'aide de pointillés afin d'en faciliter l'identification. Cela évite toute confusion lorsqu'un objet (une police, par exemple) est présent à plusieurs reprises dans le document. Dans certains cas, l'élément est un attribut d'objet (un espace colorimétrique, par exemple). Le cas échéant, les objets dotés de cet attribut sont détectés au cours du contrôle. Vous avez la possibilité de modifier le type, l'épaisseur et la couleur de trait via l'onglet Mise en surbrillance des préférences de contrôle en amont. Objet problématique sur une page PDF Voir aussi « Préférences de contrôle en amont » à la page 508 « Exécution d'un contrôle en amont » à la page 507 Identification d'un objet problématique à l'aide de l'aperçu Utilisez l'aperçu pour isoler un élément lorsque vous travaillez sur des pages contenant des zones complexes se chevauchant. Certains éléments, comme les champs d'informations sur le document ou les intitulés de page, sont impossibles à afficher. 1 Développez une zone afin d'afficher les objets problématiques détectés au cours du contrôle. 2 Sélectionnez un objet problématique dans la liste. 3 Cliquez sur Afficher un aperçu. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Mode Aperçu, choisissez une option dans le menu Couleur d'arrièreplan. Tous les objets posant problème s'affichent sur un arrière-plan de cette couleur dans l'aperçu. Vousz pouvez cliquez sur les boutons fléchés, afin d'explorer tous les résultats dans cette vue. SI le panneau de résultats est actif, vous pouvez également utiliser les touches fléchées du clavier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 512 Contrôle en amont Aperçu d'un objet problématique Affichage des informations générales et des ressources La zone d’aperçu de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont répertorie tous les types de propriétés et de ressources du document. Elle indique notamment les espaces colorimétriques, les polices, les motifs, les paramètres de trames de demi-teintes, les états graphiques et les images utilisés. Elle dresse également une liste d'informations générales au sujet du document analysé. Parmi ces renseignements figurent l'application dans laquelle ils ont été créés ainsi que leur date de création et de dernière modification. 1 Dans le panneau de résultats de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, développez les sections Aperçu et Informations sur Contrôle en amont afin d'afficher le détail des résultats 2 Dans la section Aperçu, développez une propriété afin de répertorier les ressources. Voir aussi « A propos des vérifications et des propriétés supplémentaires » à la page 523 Affichage des résultats sous la forme de commentaires Vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer les problèmes de contrôle en amont sous la forme de commentaires dans le document PDF, puis de les visualiser à l'instar de tout commentaire PDF. Par exemple, vous pouvez cliquer sur le bouton Commentaires du navigateur pour répertorier chaque commentaire (ou commentaire filtré) dans une liste. Voir aussi « Affichage des commentaires » à la page 191 Insertion et affichage de commentaires de contrôle en amont 1 Dans le panneau de résultats de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, choisissez Insérer les résultats de contrôle en amont sous la forme de commentaires dans le menu Options. 2 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Incorporer si vous souhaitez incorporer des commentaires, quel que soit leur nombre. 3 Dans le document PDF, placez le pointeur sur un commentaire ou cliquez sur la note qui lui est associée pour visualiser son contenu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 513 Contrôle en amont Exemple de rapport PDF avec note associée Suppression des commentaires de contrôle en amont ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, choisissez Supprimer les commentaires de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options. Incorporation d'une piste d'audit Lors de l'incorporation d'une piste d'audit, une signature numérique est ajoutée ainsi que les informations sur la piste d'audit. Celles-ci indiquent le profil utilisé et l'application de création. Elles précisent également si le contrôle en amont a réussi. 1 Contrôle en amont à l'aide d'un profil complet. 2 Lors de l'affichage des résultats, cliquez sur Incorporer une piste d'audit. 3 Si une boîte de dialogue informative s'affiche, cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez le fichier et fermez la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont. 5 Pour afficher des informations de base sur la piste d'audit, choisisssez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Standards. Dans le panneau Standards, effectuez selon vos besoins l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour vérifier que le profil utilisé dans le document est le même que celui de votre système local, cliquez sur Check Profile Fingerprint. Par exemple, si vous avez demandé à un client d'utiliser un profil particulier, cette option vous permet de vérifier que celui-ci a bien été utilisé. • Pour supprimer la piste d'audit, cliquez sur Remove Preflight Audit Trail. 6 Pour afficher les informations supplémentaires relatives au contrôle en amont, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires sous l'onglet Résumé. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Options avancées. Dans la liste, développez http://www.gwg.org/ns/gwg_preflight_v1. Outre les informations de base sur le contrôle en amont, cette liste comprend un aperçu des résultats ainsi que la date et l'heure de l'exécution du profil. Remarque : Vous pouvez écraser une piste d'audit existante en en incorporant une nouvelle. Des vidéos sur l'incorporation d'une piste d'audit sont disponibles à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4084_a9_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 514 Contrôle en amont Rapports de contrôle en amont Création d'un rapport de résultats Les résultats du contrôle en amont peuvent être recueillis dans différents types de rapports. Vous avez la possibilité de recueillir les résultats sous forme de fichier texte, de fichier XML ou de fichier PDF unique. Un rapport PDF peut inclure un simple aperçu ou des informations détaillées présentées de diverses manières. Un rapport PDF comprend des informations sur le document et les objets problématiques contenus sur les calques que vous pouvez activer ou désactiver dans le panneau Calques du navigateur. Remarque : Vous avez également la possibilité de créer un inventaire de tous les objets et ressources utilisés dans le document PDF. Création d'un rapport des résultats du contrôle en amont 1 Dans le panneau de résultats de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Créer un apport ou choisissez Créer un rapport dans le menu Options. 2 Indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du rapport. Le suffixe _report est automatiquement ajouté au nom du rapport. 3 Sélectionnez le type du rapport, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Types de rapports Rapport PDF Crée un résumé des problèmes accompagné d'informations détaillées présentées à l'aide de masques de transparence, de commentaires ou de calques pour chaque objet problématique. • Aperçu Condense les résultats du contrôle en amont dans un document succinct comprenant les corrections appliquées, un résumé des résultats et des informations sur le document. • Détails Fournit des informations supplémentaires sur chaque objet problématique comme, par exemple, l’emplacement de l’objet sur la page. Problèmes signalés par des masques de transparence place un masque en couleurs, semblable à un masque Photoshop, sur les zones problématiques afin de les faire ressortir. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur du masque dans les préférences de contrôle en amont. Problèmes signalés par des commentaires insère les résultats du contrôle en amont sous la forme de commentaires. Problèmes signalés par des calques affiche le fichier séparé en calques d'objets non-concordants ou d'objets détectés d'après les critères en vigueur dans le profil. Un autre calque intitulé Autres objets comprend les objets sans rapport avec le profil utilisé. Rapport XML Génère un rapport structuré pour les systèmes de flux de production capables d’interpréter et de traiter les résultats du contrôle en amont. Pour plus de détails, contactez votre prestataire de services de prépresse. Rapport au format texte Génère un rapport au format texte standard comprenant des retraits de ligne reflétant l'arborescence de la boîte de dialogue des résultats du contrôle en amont. Ce rapport s'ouvre dans n'importe quel éditeur de texte. Affichage ou masquage des calques dans un rapport PDF 1 Dans le navigateur du rapport PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Calques pour afficher le panneau correspondant. 2 Dans le panneau Calques, développez le rapport et cliquez sur le carré situé à gauche d'un nom de calque pour afficher ou masquer le calque correspondant.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 515 Contrôle en amont A propos des rapports d'inventaire Un rapport d'inventaire présente les ressources utilisées dans un document PDF, notamment les espaces colorimétriques, les images, les motifs, les ombrages, les métadonnées, les polices et les glyphes de chaque famille de polices. Les informations apparentées sont regroupées et organisées sur une page PDF de manière à faciliter l'analyse et l'identification des éléments. Vous pouvez exécuter un rapport d'inventaire avant ou après un contrôle en amont. Contrairement à un rapport de résultats de contrôle en amont, lequel fournit seulement les informations demandées par les vérifications du profil sélectionné, un rapport d'inventaire ne filtre pas le contenu du document PDF. Ensemble, ces deux types de rapports peuvent vous aider à identifier et à corriger des problèmes. Les informations contenues dans un rapport d'inventaire peuvent se révéler pratiques lorsque vous effectuez des tâches de ce type : • Exploration de fichiers paraissant inhabituels (tels que ceux créés dans une application inconnue) ou de fichiers au retraçage à l'écran lent ou copie-coller d'actions non fonctionnelles. • Examen de problèmes de traitement (mauvaise impression, par exemple) ou de problèmes détectés lors de la conversion des couleurs, de l'imposition, du placement sur une page InDesign, etc. • Identification des aspects imparfaits d'un document PDF, tels que l'incorporation accidentelle d'une police en raison d'un caractère d'espacement négligé sur une page de gabarit ou des images recadrées à l'aide de données image superflues ou encore d'objets d'un type non attendu (objets textuels ou vectoriels convertis en images ou fusionnés avec une image, par exemple). • Présentation d'informations supplémentaires sur un objet en plus de son identification. Par exemple, en localisant un ton direct dans le rapport d'inventaire, vous pouvez déterminer s'il est utilisé seul ou en association avec d'autres colorants, comme dans une image en bichromie. Vous pouvez aussi identifier les glyphes d'une police qui sont incorporés, leur aspect et le caractère qu'ils sont censés représenter. Ces informations peuvent vous servir à résoudre une erreur de glyphe manquant. • Exploration des métadonnées XMP incorporées dans le fichier, telles que l'auteur, la résolution, l'espace colorimétrique, le copyright et les mots-clés associés au document. Ces informations sont stockées de manière normalisée à l'aide de la norme XMP (Extensible Metadata Platform). Création d'un inventaire du contenu du document PDF 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, choisissez Créer un inventaire dans le menu Options. 2 Sélectionnez les types d'objets et les ressources à inclure dans l'inventaire. Outre les polices, les couleurs, les images, etc., vous pouvez y inclure les informations suivantes : Xobjects de formulaire Objets référencés dans un document PDF. Si, par exemple, un document PDF contient de nombreuses occurrences d'un même objet, celui-ci existe en tant que ressource unique référencée plusieurs fois. Inclure les métadonnées XMP Inclut les informations incorporées dans le document PDF pouvant être utilisées par un périphérique ou une application du flux de production dont la fonction XMP est activée. Il peut s'agir de descriptions évocatrices et de titres, de mots-clés disponibles pour la recherche, du nom de l'auteur et du copyright. Si vous activez l'option Inclure les champs avancés, vous pouvez inclure les champs et les structures utilisés pour stocker les métadonnées à l'aide d'espaces de noms et de propriétés. Ces informations avancées s'affichent sous la forme d'une vue arborescente textuelle englobant toutes les données XMP du document PDF, à la fois pour le document et pour les images incluses auxquelles sont associées des métadonnées XMP. Remarque : Vous pouvez également afficher les métadonnées d'un document PDF de manière globale dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires. Pour afficher les champs avancés, cliquez sur Avancées dans la liste de gauche. 3 (Facultatif) Enregistrez le rapport.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 516 Contrôle en amont Contrôles avancés Affichage des problèmes de contrôle en amont dans la structure PDF Pour plus de détails sur la structure PDF, voir la documentation du site Web Adobe PDF Technology Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_pdftechnology_fr (en anglais uniquement). Si vous maîtrisez le format de fichier PDF, examinez pour des raisons techniques la structure interne du fichier et ses polices, afin de détecter d'éventuelles incohérences du contrôle en amont. La fonction de contrôle en amont comprend trois options de contrôle approfondi d'un document PDF. Les utilisateurs expérimentés peuvent s'en servir pour analyser les objets et les polices à l'origine du problème. Une connaissance approfondie des structures internes des polices et des spécifications des polices Type 1, TrueType et OpenType s'avère importante. Les spécifications de polices sont répertoriées dans la bibliographie du guide de référence PDF. Remarque : Vous pouvez parcourir le document PDF et les polices dans les fenêtres qui s'affichent sans pouvoir toutefois modifier la structure PDF ou les polices. Parcours de la structure interne du document PDF Affichez la structure d'un document PDF, définie par des flux de contenu et des objets Cos, dans un tableau d'arborescence. (Les flux de contenu représentent des pages, des XObjects de formulaire, des caractères de police de Type 3 et l'aspect des commentaires et des champs de formulaire. Les objets Cos incluent des éléments tels que l'espace colorimétrique, les images et les XObjects.) Vérifiez la syntaxe du document PDF, affichez les résultats d'une correction ou déterminez la cause d'une incohérence. Choisissez entre cinq modes d'affichage qui organisent les flux de contenu de manières différentes. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le document PDF dans la fenêtre de la structure interne du document PDF. Remarque : Ne confondez pas la structure interne et la structure logique dans les documents PDF balisés, qui améliore l'accessibilité pour les utilisateurs souffrant de déficiences visuelles. La structure interne est un jeu complet de tous les objets dans le document, y compris les balises. Avant de pouvoir parcourir la structure interne d'un document PDF, vous devez exécuter un contrôle en amont. 1 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle en amont, choisissez l'option Parcourir la structure interne du document PDF dans le menu Options. La fenêtre Structure interne du document PDF s'ouvre, affichant une arborescence des informations de document et le catalogue du document (la racine de la hiérarchie de l'objet du document). 2 Développez chaque élément de l'arborescence pour afficher le structure du document. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Page pour afficher la structure de chaque page. 4 Pour modifier l'aspect des flux de contenu dans l'arborescence, sélectionnez un mode d'affichage dans la barre d'outils : Standard Affiche le flux de contenu comme comme une séquence d'opérateurs de contenu de page. Développez la sous-arborescence d'un opérateur pour afficher ses opérandes. Il s'agit de l'affichage par défaut. Q Regroupe tous les opérateurs dans le flux de contenu qui appartiennent au même niveau d'imbrication d'états graphiques dans une paire d'opérateurs q/Q. Développez la sous-arborescence d'une paire q/Q pour afficher l'opérateur et les paramètres qu'il contient. BMC Similaire à Q, mais dispose les flux de contenu en fonction des niveaux d'imbrication du contenu marqué (BMC/EMC).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 517 Contrôle en amont BT/ET Dispose les flux de contenu en fonction de blocs de texte, qui se trouvent entre des opérateurs BT et ET. Extrait de code Affiche les flux de contenu sous la forme d'une série d'extraits de code. Un extrait de code est un groupe continu d'objets dotés du même état graphique. Chaque extrait de code représente ici un type d'opération de dessin (par exemple, la zone de dessin) et son état graphique. Parcours de la structure interne des polices du document Affichez la structure interne des polices incorporées dans un document PDF de façon plus détaillée que les résultats de contrôle en amont avec un affichage graphique montrant le contour et les coordonnées de chaque glyphe. Vous pouvez détecter la source de divers problèmes de contrôle en amont, notamment les incohérences de largeurs de glyphe. Avant de pouvoir parcourir la structure interne des polices du document, vous devez exécuter un contrôle en amont. 1 Dans la fenêtre Contrôle en amont, choisissez l'option Parcourir la structure interne des polices du document dans le menu Options. Pour afficher la structure d'une seule police, développez Polices dans les résultats, sélectionnez une police, puis choisissez Parcourir la structure interne des polices dans le menu Options. 2 Pour afficher les détails du glyphe, cliquez sur l'un des boutons suivants : Affichage de la grille Affiche l'origine de l'espace de coordonnées du glyphe, indiqué par deux lignes orthogonales de couleur verte. Affichage des zones Affiche la zone utilisée par le glyphe sélectionné et la zone maximale utilisée par tous les glyphes, à l'aide de lignes de couleur bleue qui se croisent en haut et en bas. Affichage du remplissage Affiche les zones d'un glyphe rempli en gris moyen. Affichage des points Affiche tous les points utilisés pour définir le contour du glyphe. Des points noirs indiquent le contour. Des points rouges indiquent des courbes de Bézier et sont décalés par rapport au contour. Affichage du curseur Affiche la poisition du point actuellement sélectionné, indiqué par deux lignes orthogonales de couleur magenta. Ce bouton n'est disponible que si l'affichage des points est sélectionné. 3 Pour ajuster la taille de la zone d'affichage du glyphe, faites glisser la poignée entre l'arborescence et la zone d'affichage du glyphe. Profils de contrôle en amont A propos des profils de contrôle en amont La réussite d'un contrôle en amont dépend de la pertinence des critères de contrôle que vous avez définis. Les critères de contrôle sont groupés dans un fichier intitulé profil de contrôle en amont. Un profil de contrôle en amont comprend une ou plusieurs vérifications, une ou plusieurs corrections, ou des vérifications et des corrections. Chaque vérification compte une ou plusieurs déclarations de propriétés permettant de valider le contenu PDF. Le contrôle en amont affiche une erreur uniquement lorsque les déclarations de propriétés de la vérification présentent une erreur. Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, vous pouvez définir les valeurs à utiliser et le traitement réservé aux incohérences. Vous pouvez, par exemple, choisir un profil qui se contente de signaler les incohérences ou, au contraire, un profil qui corrige automatiquement une incohérence en fonction des paramètres définis. Un profil comportant une correction est signalé par une icône de clé à molette grise.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 518 Contrôle en amont Adobe Acrobat comprend plusieurs profils de contrôle en amont prédéfinis, organisés en groupes, tels que Impression numérique, Analyse PDF, Prépresse et Conformité PDF/X , PDF/E ou PDF/A. Vous pouvez utiliser les profils prédéfinis tels quels ou les modifier afin de créer des profils personnalisés. Les vérifications constituant les profils (appelées règles dans les versions précédentes d'Acrobat) sont organisées en catégories (Document, Pages, Images et ainsi de suite). Toute vérification d'une catégorie détermine une propriété de document spécifique. Pour vous aider à indiquer les propriétés de document que le profil de contrôle en amont doit analyser, passez en revue les informations sur chaque vérification sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil. Ces informations décrivent les critères utilisés par la vérification pour analyser et, le cas échéant, corriger les propriétés du document. Voir aussi « A propos des vérifications et des propriétés supplémentaires » à la page 523 Affichage des profils 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont n'est pas ouverte, choisissez Options avancées > Contrôle en amont. • Si un autre panneau s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur l'onglet Profils. 2 Développez les groupes de profils selon vos besoins. La liste inclut tous les profils prédéfinis et tous les profils personnalisés que vous avez créés. Configuration de profils favoris 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont n'est pas ouverte, choisissez Options avancées > Contrôle en amont. • Si un autre panneau s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur l'onglet Profils. 2 Développez les groupes de profils selon vos besoins. 3 Sélectionnez un profil, cliquez sur le drapeau situé à côté de son nom, puis choisissez Favori. Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil La boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil dresse la liste des profils disponibles et affiche les propriétés de document en cours d'analyse. Elle vous permet de déverrouiller et de verrouiller un profil, de créer un groupe dans lequel vous organisez des profils et de définir des critères de contrôle. Vous pouvez accéder à des options et des informations supplémentaires en développant le profil. Pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, développez un groupe de profils dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, sélectionnez un profil, puis cliquez sur Modifier (ou choisissez Modifier les profils de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 519 Contrôle en amont Boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil A. Profil B. Jeu de vérifications prédéfini C. Autres options D. Groupes de profils Ajout et suppression d'un profil Vous avez la possibilité de créer des profils de contrôle en amont personnalisés. Avant de vous lancer dans l'élaboration complète d'un profil, vérifiez qu'aucun des profils disponibles ne fournit des résultats similaires à ceux recherchés. Si possible, dupliquez un profil et modifiez uniquement les parties pertinentes. Un profil doit contenir au moins une vérification ou une correction et une propriété permettant de valider le contenu PDF. Lors de l'élaboration d'une vérification entièrement nouvelle, vous pouvez utiliser des propriétés existantes ou en créer de nouvelles. Pour optimiser les résultats lors de la création et de la modification de profils, ajoutez le nombre minimal de vérifications permettant de valider le contenu PDF et maintenez des vérifications et des propriétés simples et directes. Vous pouvez, par exemple, faire appel à un profil PDF/X pour contrôler certains critères, puis ajouter des vérifications pour des critères non inclus dans le profil PDF/X, comme la résolution d'image. Voir aussi « Ajout de vérifications à un profil » à la page 527 « Création ou modification de vérifications personnalisées » à la page 528 « Ajout de corrections à un profil » à la page 530 « Création ou modification d'une correction » à la page 532 Création d'un profil 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des profils . 2 Choisissez Options > Créer un profil de contrôle en amont. 3 Saisissez le nom et la fonction du nouveau profil, puis configurez les autres options de votre choix. Par défaut, les nouveaux profils figurent dans le groupe des profils personnalisés, à moins que vous ne les assigniez à un autre groupe. 4 Développez le profil dans la colonne de gauche. A D B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 520 Contrôle en amont 5 Modifiez les vérifications (le cas échéant). 6 Ajoutez d'éventuelles vérifications et corrections supplémentaires. Duplication d'un profil 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des profils . 2 Sélectionnez un profil existant, puis choisissez Options > Dupliquer le profil de contrôle en amont. Le profil dupliqué est ajouté au même groupe que le profil initial. Création d'un groupe de profils 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, choisissez Créer un groupe dans le menu Groupe. 2 Tapez le nom du groupe, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez un groupe de profils, tous les profils sont déplacés vers ce nouveau groupe. Suppression d'un profil ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, cliquez sur l'icône Supprimer le profil sélectionné . Importation ou exportation d'un profil de contrôle en amont Les profils de contrôle en amont peuvent être partagés avec des tiers. Par exemple, les prestataires de services d'impression peuvent en fournir à leurs clients afin de s'assurer que les travaux sont contrôlés d'après ces profils avant de leur être remis. Les utilisateurs d'un groupe de travail peuvent créer leurs propres profils afin de contrôler un document avant sa mise en ligne, son impression sur une imprimante spéciale ou son émission en interne. Pour échanger un profil, vous devez le conditionner pour l’importation et l’exportation. Le lot résultant comprend toutes les vérifications et propriétés associées au profil sélectionné. Importation d'un profil de contrôle en amont 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, choisissez Importer le profil de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options. • Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, cliquez sur l'icône Importer le profil de contrôle en amont . 2 Localisez le fichier lot de contrôle en amont (doté de l'extension .kfp), puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le profil figure dans la liste affichée dans le groupe Profils importés. 3 (Facultatif) Si le profil est verrouillé, choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil. Il est possible de modifier un profil après son déverrouillage. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez le mot de passe. Vous pouvez également importer un profil de contrôle en amont en faisant glisser le fichier dans la fenêtre Acrobat ou sur l'icône de l'application Acrobat. Exportation d’un profil de contrôle en amont 1 Renommez le fichier si nécessaire (dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier le profil) avant de commencer l'exportation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 521 Contrôle en amont 2 Pour verrouiller le profil avant de l'exporter, choisissez Verrouillé dans le menu déroulant de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Protégé par mot de passe et saisir un mot de passe. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, choisissez Exporter le profil de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options. • Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, cliquez sur l'icône Exporter le profil de contrôle en amont . 4 Indiquez l'emplacement du fichier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ne renommez pas le fichier. Verrouillage, déverrouillage et protection par mot de passe d'un profil Vous pouvez empêcher la modification non autorisée des profils de contrôle en amont en verrouillant ces derniers et en leur attribuant des mots de passe. Ceci peut s'avérer utile lorsque les profils de contrôle en amont sont partagés par plusieurs utilisateurs. Vous avez la possibilité de verrouiller ou de protéger par mot de passe les profils de contrôle en amont lors de leur création ou de tout enregistrement ultérieur. Par défaut, tous les profils prédéfinis sont verrouillés. Déverrouillage d'un profil de contrôle en amont Verrouillage d'un profil 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, sélectionnez un profil. 2 Choisissez Verrouillé dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin supérieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Les options deviennent indisponibles. Protection par mot de passe d'un profil 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, sélectionnez un profil. 2 Choisissez Protégé par mot de passe dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin supérieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue. 3 Saisissez deux fois le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez utiliser des majuscules, des minuscules, des chiffres ou des signes de ponctuation. Les options deviennent indisponibles. Déverrouillage ou annulation de la protection d'un profil 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, sélectionnez un profil. 2 Choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin supérieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue. 3 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez le mot de passe correct et cliquez sur OK. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 522 Contrôle en amont Modification des paramètres d'un profil Vous avez la possibilité de modifier les paramètres d'un profil. Voir aussi « Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil » à la page 518 « Verrouillage, déverrouillage et protection par mot de passe d'un profil » à la page 521 « Ajout et suppression d'un profil » à la page 519 Modification des paramètres généraux d'un profil 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil. 2 Développez le groupe de profils et sélectionnez un profil. 3 Si le profil est verrouillé, choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant. 4 Modifiez un ou plusieurs des paramètres suivants : • Saisissez un nouveau nom pour le profil, puis fournissez-en une description dans la zone Fonction. • Pour appliquer la protection par mot de passe au profil, sélectionnez Protégé par mot de passe dans le menu déroulant. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez deux fois le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. Sinon, choisissez Déverrouillé. • Saisissez votre nom et votre adresse électronique. • Assignez le profil à un groupe. Sélectionnez un groupe existant dans le menu ou choisissez Créer un groupe, indiquez le nom de ce dernier et cliquez sur OK. Les groupes sont triés par ordre alphabétique. 5 Une fois le profil protégé par mot de passe entièrement modifié, sélectionnez Verrouillé dans le menu déroulant. Il peut s'avérer utile de le protéger à nouveau par mot de passe. 6 Cliquez sur OK ou sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. Modification de paramètres de vérification et d'avertissement existants 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil. 2 Développez le groupe de profils et sélectionnez un profil. 3 Si le profil est verrouillé, choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant. 4 Développez le profil afin d'afficher les groupes de propriétés disponibles pour le profil. 5 Sélectionnez un groupe de propriétés. 6 Configurez les critères du contrôle en amont. Ces options varient en fonction de la catégorie de propriétés sélectionnée sous le profil. Vous pouvez sélectionner ou désélectionner des critères, modifier des valeurs ou activer une propriété. 7 Sélectionnez une option d’avertissement dans le menu déroulant et indiquez le mode de traitement des incohérences lors du contrôle en amont. 8 Cliquez sur OK ou sur Enregistrer pour enregistrer vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 523 Contrôle en amont Contrôle en amont - Options d'avertissement Vous devez spécifier le mode de traitement des incohérences lors du contrôle en amont pour chaque vérification d'un profil. Vous pouvez sélectionner une option dans le menu situé en regard de chaque icône d'avertissement. L'icône relative à l'avertissement figure en regard de la vérification dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont. Erreur Génère un message d’erreur pour cette vérification (ou pour toute vérification de cette catégorie). Choisissez cette option pour les incohérences que vous devez absolument corriger avant de passer à l'étape suivante du flux de production. Avertissement Génère un message d'avertissement pour cette vérification (ou pour toute vérification de cette catégorie). Choisissez cette option lorsque vous souhaitez obtenir des informations sur les incohérences et devez corriger ces dernières avant la sortie finale. Infos Génère une simple remarque pour cette vérification (ou pour toute vérification de cette catégorie). Choisissez cette option lorsque vous souhaitez obtenir des informations sur les incohérences, mais que vous ne devez pas corriger ces dernières avant la sortie finale. Non défini Ne génère jamais de message d'avertissement pour cette vérification (ou pour toute vérification de cette catégorie). Choisissez cette option lorsque les incohérences n'affectent pas la qualité de la sortie du document PDF. Vous devez sélectionner un autre état pour que les zones de texte soient disponibles. Affichage d'un résumé du profil Vous pouvez afficher une description de chaque vérification et des critères de contrôle associés pour un profil donné en créant un résumé du profil. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, sélectionnez un profil et choisissez Créer un résumé du profil dans le menu Options. Un résumé de profil se présente sous la forme d'un document PDF. Vérifications supplémentaires A propos des vérifications et des propriétés supplémentaires L'outil Contrôle en amont comprend une série de vérifications supplémentaires (intitulées règles dans les versions précédentes d'Acrobat) que vous pouvez ajouter à un profil. Ces vérifications sont disponibles à partir de la section Vérifications personnalisées de chaque profil. Vous pouvez les modifier de différentes manières, selon la propriété PDF qu'elles décrivent. Vous pouvez également créer des vérifications individuelles rapidement exécutables sans qu'elles fassent partie du profil. Si vous effectuez des vérifications individuelles, tous le contenu repéré s'affiche dans les résultats en tant qu'erreur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 524 Contrôle en amont Certaines propriétés sont définies par une simple déclaration qui peut être vraie ou fausse pour un objet donné d’un document PDF (Police non incorporée ou Utilisation de couleurs gérées par SGC, par exemple). Certaines déclarations de propriétés indiquent les rapports existant entre la valeur réelle d'une propriété (corps du texte ou nom du ton direct, par exemple) et la valeur saisie dans la boîte de dialogue (12 ou Bleu marine, par exemple). D'autres déclarations comparent des valeurs numériques. Groupes de propriétés Les propriétés permettant de définir une vérification sont regroupées au sein de catégories. Vous pouvez afficher la liste de tous les groupes de propriétés dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier la vérification. En outre, vous avez la possibilité de visualiser les propriétés individuelles composant chaque groupe ainsi qu'une explication sur l'utilisation de ces propriétés par l'outil Contrôle en amont. Les groupes de propriétés suivants sont disponibles : Texte Comprend des informations sur le rendu du texte, sa mise à l'échelle (anamorphique ou inclinée) ou son éventuel mappage en Unicode (et donc s'il peut être copié ou exporté sans problème). Police Décrit tous les aspects d'une police dans lequel le texte est généré. Notez que le corps du texte est une propriété du texte et non de la police, car une même police peut être utilisée à plusieurs reprises avec un corps différent dans un document PDF. Le corps du texte fait partie du groupe de propriétés Texte. Image Comprend la résolution, la profondeur, le nombre de pixels, le mode de rendu, etc., de l’image. Couleurs Principales caractéristiques de couleur, telles que les espaces colorimétriques originaux ou de remplacement, les motifs et les tons directs, par exemple. Les espaces colorimétriques de remplacement permettent à Acrobat d'afficher ou d'imprimer certains tons directs simples ou à composantes multiples (DeviceN). Par exemple, pour reproduire la couleur orange sur un moniteur ou sur une imprimante, le document Adobe PDF exige un espace colorimétrique de remplacement (constitué de couleurs RVB ou CMJN) définissant l'aspect du ton direct. Espaces colorimétriques ICC Propriétés d'accès aux caractéristiques des profils ICC incorporés définissant les espaces colorimétriques ICC. Les profils ICC contiennent des données de conversion des couleurs dépendant du périphérique en espace colorimétrique indépendant (Lab, par exemple). Ils permettent ainsi la reproduction homogène des couleurs sur divers périphériques, plates-formes et applications conformes aux normes ICC (comme Adobe Illustrator et Adobe InDesign). Un document contenant des objets dans plusieurs espaces colorimétriques (RVB, CMJN ou Niveaux de gris, par exemple) peut avoir différents profils ICC pour l'étalonnage des couleurs de chaque espace. Propriétés d’image du fond Informations sur les propriétés graphiques de remplissage de zones du document, notamment les valeurs actuelles de couleur. Rapport entre la valeur de la propriété et la valeur saisie Rapport entre valeurs numériques Propriétés booléennes est égale à n’est pas égale à est inférieure à est vrai contient ne contient pas est inférieure ou égale à n'est pas vrai commence par ne commence pas par est égale à finit par ne finit pas par n’est pas égale à est contenu dans n'est pas contenu dans est supérieure à est supérieure ou égale àUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 525 Contrôle en amont Propriétés d’image du contour Comprend les informations sur les propriétés graphiques des tracés de contours, notamment les valeurs chromatiques de l'espace actif, de même que les propriétés des traits telles que l'épaisseur. Propriétés d’image générales Comprend les paramètres de contrôle de l'affichage du texte, des illustrations ou des images sur une page PDF. Les options de surimpression, par exemple, se trouvent dans ce groupe. Trame de demi-teintes Comprend les paramètres graphiques impliqués dans les opérations de prépresse, comme les angles de trame et les linéatures, et les formes de point. Description de la page Comprend des informations générales sur les objets d'une page PDF, telles que le type de l'objet (par exemple, s'il s'agit d'une image, d'un texte ou d'une ombre lissée) ou indique si cet objet est inclus ou exclu de la zone visible de la page ou à quelle distance il se trouve de la zone de rognage. OPI Comprend les propriétés d’analyse de tous les liens (commentaires) OPI existants et de leur version (1.3 ou 2.0). Les entrées OPI possibles dans un fichier PDF sont identiques à celles des fichiers PostScript. Incorporation PostScript Fait référence au code PostScript pouvant être incorporé dans le fichier PDF. Vous disposez de trois propriétés : une propriété pour un opérateur PostScript utilisé directement dans une description de page ; une autre pour du code PostScript incorporé dans un XObject PostScript et une dernière pour une forme antérieure de XObject PostScript, un XObject de formulaire PostScript. Métadonnées d'objet Inclut les informations incorporées avec l'objet, notamment l'auteur, la résolution, l'espace colorimétrique, le copyright et les mots-clés associés. Si, par exemple, une image Photoshop contenant des métadonnées est placée dans un document InDesign et que le document est converti au format PDF, les propriétés de ce groupe peuvent récupérer et vérifier ces informations. Annotations Principales caractéristiques des commentaires et annotations de dessin, du recouvrement et des repères d'impression. Zones de formulaire Ensemble des propriétés de champs de formulaire. Calques Recherche le contenu facultatif pouvant avoir une incidence sur l'aspect d'une page. Pages Propriétés de numéro et de taille des pages, correspondant aux différentes zones de document prises en charge par Adobe PDF 1.3 (ou version ultérieure) : zone de support, de fond perdu, de rognage et graphique. Ce groupe contient aussi les noms des plaques des pages PDF d'un fichier préalablement séparé. Document Comprend toutes les informations s'appliquant au document PDF dans son ensemble : indique s'il est chiffré, s'il contient des champs de formulaire ou des signets, etc. Informations sur le document Liste des entrées également accessibles via la boîte de dialogue Informations sur le document d'Acrobat et des informations requises par la norme ISO 15930 (PDF/X) Métadonnées du document Inclut les informations incorporées dans le document, notamment le titre, l'auteur, le copyright et les mots-clés associés. Ces informations sont également disponibles dans la section Métadonnées du document de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document d'Acrobat. (Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires.) Signatures Comprend des informations sur les signatures contenues dans le document. Document PDF structuré Comprend plusieurs propriétés standard concernant la structure des balises d'un document PDF balisé, pour laquelle la norme PDF/A définit des contraintes. Modes de sortie pour PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E Définit le processus de sortie pour lequel le document PDF a été préparé. Un document PDF destiné à une sortie imprimée de haute résolution est généralement accompagné d'un mode de sortie contenant un profil ICC incorporé, lequel sera utilisé par un périphérique d'épreuvage ou le processeur RIP (processeur d'images pixellisées) d'un périphérique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 526 Contrôle en amont Mode de sortie pour PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E (propriétés du profil ICC) Comprend les propriétés d'accès aux informations provenant d'un profil ICC incorporé dans le mode de sortie. Ce groupe comprend les mêmes propriétés que les profils ICC d'objets (nom et type du profil, par exemple). Le profil ICC décrit le mode de sortie sur le périphérique de flashage du document. Rapport du flux de contenu PDF Permet de déterminer si le codage des descriptions de page est correct. Par exemple, il est possible d'inclure le texte Bonjour comme opérateur de texte pour le mot entier ou sous la forme de plusieurs opérateurs de texte, chacun dédié à un caractère du mot. La seconde solution s'avère moins efficace et ralentit le rendu de la page. Les vérifications d'efficacité renvoient les pourcentages de plusieurs types d'opérateurs. Dans la plupart des cas, une valeur inférieure convient mieux qu'une valeur élevée. Erreurs dans la syntaxe du document PDF Renvoie des informations relatives aux erreurs spécifiques de la syntaxe d'un document PDF. Par exemple, si certains identifiants exigés par la spécification PDF ne sont pas inclus, Acrobat peut tout de même générer le fichier dans certains cas. Pour un rendu de document PDF prévisible, il est néanmoins préférable de coder la totalité du document en stricte conformité avec la spécification PDF. Erreurs dans le document PDF structuré Renvoie des informations sur les erreurs détectées dans la structure des balises d'un document PDF balisé. Par exemple, une erreur est renvoyée si le type d'un objet balisé n'est pas spécifié correctement. Les propriétés de ce groupe permettent d'identifier les erreurs que comporte une structure de balises. Erreurs dans le flux de contenu PDF Renvoie des informations relatives aux erreurs contenues dans les descriptions de page d'un document PDF. Par exemple, trois opérandes de valeurs sont exigées pour définir la couleur RVB. S'il manque l'un des trois opérateurs, il est impossible de générer le rendu de la page. Les propriétés de ce groupe facilitent l'identification des motifs de l'échec du rendu d'une page PDF. Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil (Vérifications personnalisées) La liste des profils de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil contient les profils prédéfinis livrés avec Acrobat, ainsi que les profils personnalisés que vous avez créés. Si vous sélectionnez Vérifications personnalisées, d'autres options permettant de sélectionner et de modifier des éléments s'affichent. Les boutons situés au bas de la colonne donnent accès à des fonctions de modification de base : duplication, suppression ou création, par exemple. La zone de recherche facilite l'identification d'une vérification spécifique. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 527 Contrôle en amont Vérifications personnalisées A. Rechercher B. Description C. Avertissements D. Créer une vérification et l'inclure dans le profil actif E. Dupliquer la vérification et l'assigner au profil actif F. Modifier la vérification G. Supprimer la vérification du profil H. Inclure dans le profil I. Créer une vérification J. Dupliquer la vérification K. Modifier la vérification L. Supprimer la vérification Ajout de vérifications à un profil Acrobat est fourni avec plusieurs profils de contrôle en amont prédéfinis que vous pouvez utiliser tels quels ou personnaliser. Vous avez la possibilité de modifier un profil qui ne vous convient pas entièrement en ajoutant une ou plusieurs vérifications visant à analyser le document à l’aide de critères différents. Par exemple, une vérification existante peut détecter tout texte non entièrement composé de noir, à savoir du texte utilisant une certaine quantité de cyan, magenta ou jaune en plus du noir. Dans la mesure où cela risque de constituer un problème lors de l'impression d'un texte de petite taille, vous pouvez modifier cette vérification de manière qu'elle signale les parties de texte utilisant plusieurs couleurs et dont le corps est inférieur ou égal à 12 points. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez réutiliser une vérification dans n'importe quel profil. N’oubliez pas toutefois que si vous modifiez une vérification utilisée dans plusieurs profils, elle est modifiée pour tous les profils y faisant appel. Afin d'éviter d'apporter des modifications inutiles, renommez la vérification pour chaque profil y faisant appel. Avant de modifier un profil de contrôle en amont, vous devez le déverrouiller. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, sélectionnez un profil et cliquez sur le lien Modifier situé en regard du nom du profil ou choisissez Modifier les profils de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options. 2 Choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin supérieur gauche. 3 Sélectionnez Vérifications personnalisées dans la liste d'éléments affichés sous le nom du profil. D E F G H I J K L B C AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 528 Contrôle en amont 4 Manipulez les différents panneaux en effectuant l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour trouver rapidement une vérification, tapez son nom ou une partie de son nom dans la zone de recherche. Seuls les éléments contenant le terme recherché s'affichent alors. La suppression du nom dans la zone de recherche réactive l'affichage de toutes les vérifications. • Pour ajouter une vérification au profil, choisissez une vérification dans le panneau de droite, cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la gauche, puis, le cas échéant, ajustez le type d'alerte dans le menu déroulant situé dans le coin inférieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Le type d'alerte, Erreur par défaut, indique le genre d'alerte affiché par l'outil Contrôle en amont lors de la détection d'une incohérence. Vous pouvez ajouter autant de vérifications que vous le souhaitez. • Pour supprimer une vérification du profil, sélectionnez son nom dans le panneau de gauche, puis cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la droite. • Cliquez deux fois sur une vérification afin de la modifier. Voir aussi « A propos des profils de contrôle en amont » à la page 517 « Verrouillage, déverrouillage et protection par mot de passe d'un profil » à la page 521 « Affichage de l'emplacement d'utilisation d'une vérification ou d'une propriété » à la page 529 « Correction des zones problématiques » à la page 529 Création ou modification de vérifications personnalisées Bien que vous puissiez modifier n'importe quelle vérification prédéfinie déverrouillée, il est préférable de laisser les vérifications prédéfinies telles qu'elles ont été configurées. Au lieu de cela, vous pouvez en créer une toute nouvelle ou en définir à partir d'une autre. Remarque : Les vérifications dotées d'un verrou se trouvent dans des profils verrouillés et ne sont pas modifiables tant que les profils qui les utilisent ne sont pas tous déverrouillés. Création d'une vérification personnalisée d'un profil 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des profils . 2 Sélectionnez un profil et cliquez sur le bouton Modifier, situé à côté du nom du profil. 3 Le cas échéant, choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant. 4 Sur le côté gauche de la boîte de dialogue, sous le profil, sélectionnez Vérifications personnalisées. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, sous Vérifications personnalisées du profil, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la liste des vérifications, cliquez sur l'icône de création . • Pour créer cette vérification à partir d'une vérification existante, sélectionnez la vérification de référence et cliquez sur l'icône de duplication . 6 Sur le côté gauche de la boîte de dialogue Créer une vérification ou Dupliquer la vérification, effectuez le cas échéant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le message à afficher en cas de détection d'une incohérence et en l'absence d'incohérence détectée. Par exemple, si vous définissez une vérification interdisant l'utilisation de tons directs et que le contrôle en amont n'en détecte aucun, votre message pourrait s'intituler « Document ne contenant aucun ton direct ».UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 529 Contrôle en amont • Entrez une explication pour la vérification. • Sélectionnez les éléments auxquels vous souhaitez appliquer la vérification. 7 Sur le côté droit de la boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez un groupe et une propriété, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Création d'une vérification individuelle 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des vérifications individuelles . 2 Choisissez Options > Créer une vérification de contrôle en amont. 3 Sur le côté droit de la boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez un groupe et une propriété, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. La nouvelle vérification individuelle s'affiche dans l'ensemble approprié à son groupe et à sa propriété. Duplication d'une vérification individuelle 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des vérifications individuelles . 2 Sélectionnez une vérification existante, puis choisissez Options > Dupliquer la vérification de contrôle en amont. Configuration des vérifications individuelles favorites 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des vérifications individuelles . 2 Développez les groupes de profils selon vos besoins. 3 Sélectionnez une vérification individuelle, cliquez sur le drapeau situé à côté de son nom, puis choisissez Favori. Affichage de l'emplacement d'utilisation d'une vérification ou d'une propriété ? Dans la boîte de dialogue de modification du profil de contrôle en amont, cliquez deux fois sur une vérification. Cliquez ensuite sur Application dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier la vérification, pour afficher les profils utilisant cette vérification. Correction des zones problématiques A propos des corrections de contrôle en amont L'outil Contrôle en amont vous permet de corriger de nombreuses erreurs dans un document. Pour ce faire, vous ajoutez des corrections d'erreurs, intitulées corrections, à un profil. Dans la mesure du possible, la correction résout automatiquement le problème ou alors elle fournit des informations vous permettant d'apporter les corrections nécessaires dans le fichier source. Un profil comportant une correction est signalé par une icône de clé à molette grise. Une icône de clé à molette mise en relief signifie qu'aucune correction n'est associée au profil. Le contrôle en amont comprend plusieurs corrections prédéfinies pouvant être ajoutées à un profil. Elles couvrent un large éventail d'erreurs relatives aux couleurs, aux polices, aux images, à l'impression et à la conformité aux normes internationales (PDF/X et PDF/A, par exemple) ainsi qu'à d'autres zones. Contrôle en amont : comprend également une boîte à outils vous permettant de créer vos propres corrections individuelles. Remarque : Une correction modifie le document de manière permanente.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 530 Contrôle en amont Ainsi, les corrections permettent d'effectuer les actions suivantes : • conversion des espaces colorimétriques, à l'instar de la fonction Convertir les couleurs ; • réparation de documents et élimination du contenu superflu en vue de réduire la taille du fichier, à l'instar de la fonction Optimisation PDF ; • conversion du document PDF selon une version différente ; • agrandissement des filets maigres ; • aplatissement de la transparence ; • suppression des objets situés en dehors des zones de rognage et de fond perdu ; • préparation du document PDF à la conversion au format PDF/X, PDF/E ou PDF/A ; • définition des informations sur le document. Ajout de corrections à un profil L'outil Contrôle en amont comprend une série de corrections pouvant être ajoutées à un profil. Ces corrections sont toutes disponibles à partir de la section Corrections de chaque profil. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, puis cliquez sur le lien Modifier situé en regard du nom du profil. 2 Développez la catégorie contenant le profil voulu, puis développez le profil. 3 Le cas échéant, déverrouillez le profil afin de pouvoir le modifier. Choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant situé dans la partie supérieure. 4 Sélectionnez Corrections dans les éléments disponibles sous le profil.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 531 Contrôle en amont Les corrections sont disponibles à partir de la section Corrections de chaque profil. 5 Sélectionnez une correction dans la colonne de droite et cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la gauche pour déplacer la correction dans la colonne de gauche. Vous pouvez ajouter autant de corrections que bon vous semble. Remarque : Pour supprimer une correction d'un profil, sélectionnez son nom dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers la droite. Présentation de la boîte de dialogue Modifier la correction La boîte de dialogue Modifier la correction répertorie les types de corrections prédéfinis pouvant être ajoutés à un profil et les valeurs associées à chaque correction. Vous pouvez l'utiliser pour changer les valeurs associées à une correction ou créer une correction personnalisée à partir d'une correction existante. A l'instar des vérifications, les corrections sont organisées en catégories.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 532 Contrôle en amont Boîte de dialogue Modifier la correction A. Nom de la correction B. Catégories de corrections C. Critères de correction D. Bouton permettant d'afficher les profils utilisant cette correction E. Rechercher F. Zones modifiables de la correction Création ou modification d'une correction Il peut s’avérer pratique de créer une correction personnalisée pour certains travaux ou périphériques de sortie. Les paramètres spécifiés déterminent, entre autres, le mode de sortie utilisé, les conversions de couleurs effectuées, le mode de compression et d'échantillonnage des images ainsi que le niveau de compatibilité PDF pris en charge par le document. Bien que vous puissiez modifier les corrections prédéfinies (sous réserve qu'elles soient déverrouillées), il est préférable de dupliquer une correction existante et d'en modifier les valeurs. Cette technique s'avère particulièrement utile lorsque la correction fait partie de plusieurs profils verrouillés et que vous préférez ne pas rechercher et déverrouiller tous ces profils. Une correction dupliquée est déverrouillée par défaut, car elle ne fait pas encore nécessairement partie d'un profil. Vous pouvez également créer des corrections individuelles rapidement exécutables sans qu'elles fassent partie du profil. Création de la correction d'un profil 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des profils . 2 Sélectionnez un profil et cliquez sur le bouton Modifier, situé à côté du nom du profil. 3 Sur le côté gauche de la boîte de dialogue, sous le profil, sélectionnez Corrections. 4 Le cas échéant, choisissez Déverrouillé dans le menu déroulant. 5 Sous Corrections du profil, cliquez sur l'icône Nouvelle correction . 6 Donnez un nom à la correction et configurez les critères associés. A B D F E CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 533 Contrôle en amont Création d'une correction à partir d'une correction existante 1 Suivez les étapes 1 à 4 de la procédure de création d'une correction d'un profil. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Modifier le profil, sélectionnez la correction à modifier, puis cliquez sur le bouton de duplication situé à droite. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont : Dupliquer la correction, modifiez les informations appropriées ou créez une nouvelle colonne. 4 Pour afficher les profils utilisant cette correction, cliquez sur Application. Il se peut que vous deviez déverrouiller d'autres profils avant de pouvoir modifier la correction. 5 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes, puis cliquez sur OK : • Pour renommer la correction, saisissez son nom dans la zone prévue à cet effet en haut de la boîte de dialogue. • Pour changer le mode de traitement d'une erreur, configurez les options ou les valeurs de chaque option de correction sélectionnée. Création d'une correction individuelle 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des corrections individuelles . 2 Choisissez Options > Créer une correction de contrôle en amont. 3 Donnez un nom à la correction et configurez les critères associés. La nouvelle correction s'affiche dans le groupe approprié à sa catégorie et à son type. Duplication d'une correction individuelle 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des corrections individuelles . 2 Sélectionnez une correction existante, puis choisissez Options > Dupliquer la correction de contrôle en amont. Configuration des corrections individuelles favorites 1 Dans le panneau des profils de la boîte de dialogue de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner des corrections individuelles . 2 Développez les groupes de profils selon vos besoins. 3 Sélectionnez une correction individuelle, cliquez sur l'indicateur situé à côté de son nom, puis choisissez Favori. Fichiers conformes aux normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A A propos des normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A Les normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A sont définies par l’Organisation internationale de normalisation (ISO). Les normes PDF/X s'appliquent à l'échange de contenu graphique, les normes PDF à l'échange interactif de documents d'ingénierie et les normes PDF/A à l'archivage long-terme des documents électroniques. Au cours de la conversion au format PDF, le fichier en cours de traitement est contrôlé en fonction de la norme spécifiée. Si le fichier PDF n'est pas conforme à la norme ISP sélectionnée, vous êtes invité à annuler la conversion ou à créer un fichier non conforme.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 534 Contrôle en amont Plusieurs formats PDF/X représentent les normes les plus courantes dans les flux de production d’imprimerie : PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3 et PDF/X-4 (en 2008). PDF/A-1a et PDF/A-1b (pour des exigences moins rigoureuses) représentent les normes les plus courantes dans l’archivage au format PDF). Pour l'instant, la seule version de PDF/E est PDF/E-1. Remarque : Pour plus d'informations sur les normes PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A, rendez-vous sur les sites Web d'ISO et d'AIIM. Conversion de documents PDF au format PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E Vous pouvez vérifier la conformité d'un fichier PDF aux critères PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E. Vous pouvez également enregistrer une copie d'un fichier PDF au format PDF/X, PDF/A, ou PDF/E, à condition qu'ils soit conforme aux exigences spécifiées de la norme. Par exemple, dans certaines circonstances, un profil ICC décrivant le périphérique de destination est exigé par les normes PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3 et PDF/X-4. Si aucun profil de sortie ICC n’est incorporé dans le document, vous pouvez en incorporer un avant de procéder à l’enregistrement. Vous pouvez convertir un fichier PDF en un fichier PDF conforme aux normes, à l'aide de l'assitant des normes. Celui-ci vous explique les modes de rendu de certains formats au fur et à mesure qu'il vous guide dans le processus. Si vous connaissez les normes, vous pouvez utiliser un profil intégré ou un profil créé via l'assistant pour convertir un fichier PDF. Remarque : Vous pouvez également créer des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X, PDF/E ou PDF/A à l'aide d'Acrobat Distiller. Une vidéo sur la création de fichiers PDF conformes à la norme PDF/X à l'aide de Preflight est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4083_a9_fr. Voir aussi « Paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 111 Convertir au format PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E à l'aide d'un profil 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Profils. 2 Développez un profil de conformité et sélectionnez le profil voulu. Par exemple, sous Conformité PDF/A, séletionnez Convertir en PDF/A-1b (sRGB). 3 Cliquez sur Analyser et corriger. Convertir au format PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E à l'aide d'un assistant 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Normes. 2 Sélectionnez Enregistrer sous PDF/X, Enregistrer sous PDF/A, ou Enregistrer sous PDF/E, puis cliquez sur Continuer. 3 Précisez la version et cliquez sur Continuer. 4 Sélectionnez un profil de conversion et une condition d'affichage ou d'impression, parmi celles qui sont disponibles. 5 Pour appliquer les corrections pendant la conversion, sélectionnez l'option Appliquer les corrections. Cliquez sur l'icône sous forme de point d'interrogation pour afficher la liste des corrections à appliquer. 6 Pour enregistrer le profil, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous le profil. 7 Pour convertir le fichier PDF en fonction du profil et des paramètres sélectionnés, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous. Si la conversion réussit, une coche verte apparaît dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont. Si la conversion échoue, une coche rouge apparaît dans la même boîte de dialogue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 535 Contrôle en amont Vérification de la conformité d'un fichier PDF aux critères PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E Les fichiers PDF/X, PDF/A et PDF/E peuvent être créés selon différentes méthodes, à l'aide d'Acrobat Distiller, par exemple. Vous pouvez afficher les informations relatives aux normes d'un fichier en choisissant Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Standards. Les informations sur la conformité indiquent la norme utilisée pour créer le fichier, le nom ISO et si la conformité du fichier à la norme PDF/X-, PDF/A-, ou PDF/E a été vérifiée. Les informations relatives au mode de sortie indiquent le fichier de paramètres de couleur associé au fichier PDF. Pour vérifier la conformité aux normes du fichier, cliquez sur Vérifier la conformité. Suppression des informations PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E Vous avez la possibilité de supprimer toutes les informations PDF/X, PDF/A ou PDF/E, telles que le mode de sortie ou l’identifiant de version GTS_PDFX. Cela peut s'avérer utile en cas de modification d'un fichier, si vous souhaitez recommencer l'opération ou que la présence d'un profil ICC augmente la taille du fichier de manière excessive. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Profils. 2 Développez un profil de conformité et sélectionnez Supprimer la correction du profil. Par exemple, sous Conformité PDF/A, séletionnez Supprimer les informations PDF/A. 3 Cliquez sur Analyser et corriger. Automatisation de l'analyse d'un document A propos des droplets et du traitement par lot Si vous utilisez généralement le même profil de contrôle en amont pour contrôler vos documents, vous pouvez utiliser un droplet ou une commande de traitement par lot. Un droplet de contrôle en amont correspond à une petite application chargée d'exécuter un contrôle en amont sur un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF que vous faites glisser sur l'icône de droplet . Vous pouvez enregistrer un droplet sur le bureau ou à un autre emplacement sur l'ordinateur. A l'instar des droplets, le traitement par lot contrôle plusieurs fichiers en même temps, sépare les fichiers dont le contrôle a réussi des fichiers contenant des problèmes et crée des rapports aux emplacements spécifiés. En outre, les dossiers actifs peuvent convertir plusieurs types de fichier (JPEG, HTML, RTF, etc.) au format Adobe PDF ou PDF/X à l'aide des paramètres de conversion spécifiés, contrôler les fichiers en amont grâce aux profils sélectionnés et créer une sortie de ces fichiers dans l'un des formats pris en charge par Acrobat (PDF et PostScript compris). Remarque : Si vous effectuez seulement des contrôles en amont, il est sans doute inutile d’enregistrer les modifications et de copier les fichiers dans des dossiers de sortie. Voir aussi « Traitement par lot » à la page 380 « Création d'un rapport de résultats » à la page 514 Création et modification d'un droplet de contrôle en amont Lorsque vous utilisez un droplet de contrôle en amont, vous pouvez séparer les fichiers sans erreurs des fichiers contenant des problèmes, puis passer en revue les résultats dans un rapport disponible en option.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 536 Contrôle en amont Voir aussi « Création d'un rapport de résultats » à la page 514 Création d'un droplet 1 Choisissez Créer un droplet de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont. 2 Choisissez le profil de contrôle en amont dans la liste déroulante. Créez-en un nouveau si le profil exact dont vous avez besoin ne figure pas dans la liste. 3 Configurez les paramètres de traitement des fichiers PDF suite au contrôle, puis enregistrez le droplet. Modification des paramètres du droplet 1 Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône de droplet ou choisissez Modifier le droplet de contrôle en amont dans le menu Options de la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont. 2 Modifiez les paramètres voulus, puis enregistrez le droplet. Paramètres du droplet Les options du droplet permettent de définir le mode de traitement des fichiers PDF par la fonction Contrôle en amont lorsque vous faites glisser les fichiers sur l'icône du droplet. Remarque : Vous pouvez également les définir lors de l'exécution d'un contrôle à l'aide du traitement par lot. (Voir la section « Traitement par lot » à la page 380.) Conserver le profil [profil] Utilise le profil sélectionné pour le contrôle en amont. Capture Insère le profil utilisé par le droplet dans la liste des profils, dans la catégorie Profils importés. Modifier le profil Propose un menu répertoriant tous les profils disponibles. Vous pouvez sélectionner un autre profil pour le contrôle en amont. Exécuter le profil sans appliquer de corrections Contrôle et signale les problèmes sans les corriger. Cette option est uniquement disponible si vous choisissez un profil comprenant une correction des problèmes. Copier le fichier PDF Place une copie du fichier PDF dans le Dossier des bons résultats ou le Dossier d'erreurs. Déplacer le fichier PDF Déplace le fichier PDF contrôlé vers le Dossier des bons résultats ou le Dossier d'erreurs. Enregistrer l'alias du fichier PDF Place un lien renvoyant au document PDF dans le dossier des bons résultats/d'erreurs, de sorte que le fichier d'origine ne soit pas déplacé. Créer un rapport et l'enregistrer dans le dossier des bons résultats/d'erreurs Permet de définir le type du rapport et le niveau de détail. Ce rapport présente les résultats du contrôle en amont. Paramètres Permet de modifier les options de rapport. Dossier des bons résultats/d'erreurs Permet de définir le dossier et l'emplacement des fichiers et des rapports facultatifs. Afficher un résumé au format PDF Crée un rapport sur les fichiers ayant généré des incohérences lors du contrôle. Le rapport indique l'emplacement de chaque fichier ; le chemin d'accès au fichier est un lien actif.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 537 Contrôle en amont Modes de sortie A propos des modes de sortie des documents PDF Un mode de sortie décrit le périphérique de destination final utilisé pour reproduire les couleurs du document PDF (le périphérique d'impression des séparations, par exemple). Les modes de sortie peuvent écraser les espaces de travail lors de la visualisation et de l'impression, mais il ne convertissent pas les couleurs des documents PDF. Remarque : Dans un flux de production PDF/X1-a, le mode de sortie décrit l'espace CMJN de travail. Dans un flux de production PDF/X-3, le profil ICC incorporé dans le mode de sortie sert à convertir les objets aux couleurs gérées vers l'espace colorimétrique du profil ICC du mode de sortie. Dans la plupart des cas, il s'agit de l'espace CMJN, mais il peut également s'agir de l'espace RVB ou Niveaux de gris. Il existe deux types de modes de sortie : le premier incorpore un profil de périphérique définissant l'espace colorimétrique du périphérique de sortie, tel qu'U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2, par exemple ; le second nomme simplement l'espace colorimétrique cible et aussi, le plus souvent, une condition de sortie standard. L'utilisation du second permet de réduire la taille du fichier PDF par rapport au premier, mais cela est généralement possible seulement pour les fichiers PDF/X-1a ou les fichiers PDF/X-3 sans couleurs gérées. Vous incluez les modes de sortie lors de la création du fichier PDF/X ou PDF/A via le panneau Normes de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. (Le mode d'accès aux paramètres Adobe PDF varie selon l'application utilisée.) Vous pouvez également faire appel à des modules externes tiers pour inclure des modes de sortie. Pour les documents dotés d'un mode de sortie nominatif et non de profils incorporés, le programme recherche le profil couleur associé au mode de sortie nominatif. Voir aussi « Paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 111 Création des modes de sortie 1 Dans le panneau Modes de sortie des préférences de contrôle en amont, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un mode de sortie entièrement nouveau, cliquez sur l'icône Créer un nouveau mode de sortie . • Pour créer un mode de sortie à partir d'un mode existant, sélectionnez une option dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur l'icône Dupliquer le mode de sortie sélectionné . Un nombre entier est ajouté au nom du mode de sortie dupliqué. 2 Définissez les options de mode de sortie. Voir aussi « Préférences de contrôle en amont » à la page 508 Extraction d'un mode de sortie à des fins de réutilisation Vous pouvez extraire un mode de sortie incorporé à partir d'un autre fichier PDF, puis l'ajouter à la liste des modes de sortie des préférences de contrôle en amont. 1 Dans le panneau Modes de sortie de la boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont, cliquez sur Capturer. 2 Localisez le fichier contenant le mode de sortie incorporé voulu et ouvrez-le. Le mode de sortie figure en fin de liste, sous un nom indiquant qu'il a été capturé à partir d'un type de fichier donné (« Mode de sortie capturé à partir du fichier PDF/X », par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 538 Contrôle en amont Exportation d'un profil ICC à partir d'un mode de sortie 1 Dans le panneau Modes de sortie de la boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont, sélectionnez le mode de sortie et cliquez sur Exporter le profil ICC. 2 Choisissez un emplacement et saisissez un nom, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le profil ICC s'affiche avec les autres profils ICC dans le dossier Profiles. Suppression d'un mode de sortie 1 Dans le panneau Modes de sortie de la boîte de dialogue des préférences de contrôle en amont, sélectionnez le mode de sortie et cliquez sur le bouton de suppression . 2 Confirmez la suppression.539 Chapitre 18 : Format JDF Vous avez la possibilité de créer de définitions de produit personnalisées que vous enregistrez ensuite au format de fichier JDF (Job Definition Format). A propos des fichiers JDF Un fichier JDF (Job Definition Format) repose sur le langage XML, un transporteur d'informations non propriétaire pouvant lier des fichiers à différents périphériques de production (et y faire des références). Grâce au format JDF, les créateurs de contenu et les prestataires de services d'impression peuvent décrire le mode d'une section imprimée de même que chaque étape du processus nécessaire pour atteindre ce résultat. Un fichier de définition de travail JDF est comparable à un dossier de correspondance électronique autonome comprenant non seulement le contenu du travail (des fichiers InDesign ou PDF, par exemple), mais aussi les instructions d'interaction avec les systèmes de production compatibles JDF. Les travaux sont automatiquement acheminés d'une phase du flux de production à l'autre, de la création du document PDF à l'impression finale en passant par le contrôle en amont et la correction. Eléments inclus dans un fichier JDF Les fichiers JDF contiennent des données telles que les spécifications de support et d'encre, les quantités de production, des informations sur le client, les descriptions des produits. Ils incluent également des références à des fichiers contenant des pages et décrivent l'organisation de ces pages dans le produit. Par ailleurs, un fichier JDF peut très bien comprendre des informations indispensables à la création de fichiers PDF adaptés au cycle de production, notamment les paramètres de conversion PDF et les profils de contrôle en amont. Selon les instructions de la définition de travail et les résultats de processus spécifiques, un fichier JDF peut également comprendre un tampon de validation, lequel indique que le travail d'impression a été constitué conformément aux paramètres et qu'il a été vérifié. Validation de processus L'incorporation de paramètres de conversion PDF et de contrôle en amont dans un lot JDF, ainsi que la vérification des étapes et des processus dans leur intégralité, permettent de garantir l'intégrité des fichiers avant que le travail n'entre en phase d'impression. Ainsi, un prestataire de services d'impression ou le créateur du contenu peuvent se servir d'un fichier JDF pour automatiser la vérification de la création et du contrôle en amont des fichiers PDF. Pour ce faire, vous devez spécifier les paramètres de conversion PDF et le profil de contrôle en amont auxquels un travail doit être conforme afin de pouvoir entrer dans le cycle de production. Si le processus est accompli sans problème, un tampon de validation est ajouté au fichier JDF et un texte de validation s'affiche à l'écran. Mode de génération des définitions de travaux JDF Vous avez la possibilité de générer les définitions de travaux JDF directement depuis l'application Acrobat ou à partir d'un modèle JDF fourni par le prestataire de services d'impression. Ces modèles comprennent généralement les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF, les profils de contrôle en amont et, dans certains cas, d'autres spécifications de travaux courantes. Comme les définitions de travaux JDF reposent sur le langage XML, elles peuvent commencer à un niveau supérieur, décrivant seulement une section imprimée de manière générale. Elles peuvent ensuite être modifiées à l'aide de détails plus pragmatiques. Une autre solution consiste à les créer au cours d'une seule session.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 540 Format JDF Flux de travail JDF de base A. Fichier PDF B. Définitions de travaux JDF nouvelles ou modifiées C. Fichier PDF associé à des définitions de travaux, prêt à être envoyé à un périphérique JDF Affichage des définitions de travaux JDF Une définition de travail JDF dans Acrobat contient des références aux fichiers à imprimer, de même que des instructions et des informations destinées au prestataire de services d'impression sur le site de production. Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF ? Choisissez l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Définitions de travaux JDF. • Activez l'outil Définitions de travaux JDF sur la barre d'outils d'impression. • Une autre solution consiste à cliquer deux fois sur un fichier JDF stocké sur l'ordinateur pour lancer Acrobat et afficher le fichier JDF dans la boîte de dialogue. Affichage des spécifications du travail d'impression Les composants, les spécifications individuelles et l'ordre d'un travail d'impression figurent dans une arborescence de document, laquelle s'affiche dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue Modifier la définition de travail JDF. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Dans l'arborescence du document, dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue Modifier la définition de travail JDF, développez les zones d'une section pour afficher la liste des composants sous-jacents, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez le nom de la définition de travail (premier élément de l'arborescence) afin de visualiser les spécifications du travail d'impression de base et les informations du client. Une définition JDF peut très bien s'intituler « Produit ». • Sélectionnez une section (deuxième niveau de l'arborescence) pour afficher les spécifications de mise en page, de support et d'encre. • Sélectionnez un fichier pour afficher les informations qui lui sont propres. 3 Cliquez sur les panneaux pour visualiser les différentes spécifications. C=54% M=23% Y=89% K=12% Editor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS 343-C, PMS 110-C Service Bureau Negative emulsion up. C=54% M=23% Y=89% K=12% Editor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS 343-C, PMS 110-C Service C=54% M=23% Y=89% K=12% Editor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS 343-C, PMS 110-C Service Bureau Negative emulsion up. C=54% M=23% Y=89% K=12% Editor: Jane Shilbey, Production Artist: Li Jenu. 80 lb. coated cardstock. Spot colors: PMS 343-C, PMS 110-C Service A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 541 Format JDF Création d'une définition de travail JDF Vous avez la possibilité de créer des définitions de travaux JDF selon différentes méthodes à l'aide de la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF. Chaque fichier JDF résultant peut être modifié et utilisé dans un environnement de production. Les imprimeurs qui ont l'habitude d'imprimer certains types de travaux seront peut-être intéressés par la création de plusieurs fichiers JDF correspondant à ces types de travaux, qu'ils pourront utiliser comme modèles. L'utilisation d'un modèle permet de gagner du temps et d'éviter des erreurs coûteuses, mais peut ne pas convenir à toutes les situations. Avant de vous lancer dans l'élaboration complète d'une définition de travail, vérifiez qu'aucune des définitions de travaux disponibles ne fournit des résultats similaires à ceux recherchés. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, cliquez sur Créer. 2 Sélectionnez une méthode de création de définition de travail : Créer Crée une définition de travail vide. D'après le document Utilise les propriétés d'un document PDF ouvert, telles que le format et le nombre de pages. Sélectionnez un document dans la liste de droite qui affiche les noms des fichiers actuellement ouverts dans Acrobat. D'après la définition de travail Crée une copie d'une définition de travail existante avec toutes les propriétés incluses, notamment la liste des fichiers référencés. Assurez-vous que le contenu de page est modifié avant de passer à l'étape suivante du flux de travail. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, la liste des définitions de travaux disponibles pour votre sélection s'affiche à droite et répertorie les fichiers JDF présents dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF. 3 Spécifiez la version de la spécification JDF compatible avec votre définition de travail. Remarque : La version 1.4 est définie par défaut. Cette option n'est pas disponible lorsque l'option D'après la définition de travail est sélectionnée. Dans ce cas, la version est identique à celle de la définition de travail sélectionnée. 4 Cliquez sur Parcourir, spécifiez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer une définition de travail, cliquez sur Créer (ou Créer et modifier afin d'afficher les spécifications à des fins de modification). Modification d'une définition de travail JDF Les définitions de travaux peuvent provenir de différentes sources, y compris d'InDesign CS2 (et versions ultérieures) et d'Acrobat 7.0 Professional (et versions ultérieures). Vous avez la possibilité de modifier ces définitions à partir de la boîte de dialogue Modifier la définition de travail JDF. Le Gestionnaire de contacts et le Gestionnaire de supports ouvrent chacun une boîte de dialogue permettant de spécifier des informations que vous pouvez appliquer à tous les composants du travail d'impression. Voir aussi « Paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF » à la page 108 « Paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 111 « Profils de contrôle en amont » à la page 517 « Définition des informations de contact d'un travail d'impression » à la page 543UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 542 Format JDF Modification d'une définition de travail Vous pouvez ajouter différents types de fichiers à la définition JDF, notamment des fichiers PDF, InDesign, Word et PostScript. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez la définition de travail et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Développez les éléments de gauche, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour changer l'ordre d'impression des composants, sélectionnez un composant et cliquez sur le bouton Monter ou Descendre au bas de la boîte de dialogue. • Pour ajouter un élément de second niveau à l'arborescence, cliquez sur Ajouter une section. • Pour ajouter un fichier à une définition de travail, cliquez sur Ajouter un fichier, localisez le fichier voulu, puis définissez l'étendue de pages à inclure dans le travail d'impression à l'aide des options disponibles dans le panneau Général. Ajoutez les fichiers selon leur ordre d'impression (par exemple, page de couverture, corps du texte et couverture arrière). • Pour modifier d'autres paramètres, sélectionnez un composant, cliquez sur un onglet, puis ajustez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK ou sur un autre panneau pour modifier d'autres options. Options du panneau Général Nom du produit Correspond au nom du produit ou du travail d'impression. ID de travail/ID de référence de travail Correspond à l'identification ou code de référence du travail utilisé par le personnel concerné. Envoi à Dresse la liste des sites de production configurés à l'aide du gestionnaire du site de production. Sélectionnez le site de production voulu ou conservez l'option Spécifier ultérieurement pour différer cette décision jusqu'au moment de l'envoi. (Voir la section « Création d'instructions du site de production » à la page 546.) Profil de contrôle en amont Utilise les critères du profil de contrôle en amont sélectionné pour valider les fichiers Adobe PDF du travail d'impression. Le profil de contrôle en amont est déterminé par le site de production défini sous l'option Envoi à. Paramètres de conversion PDF Convertit les fichiers autres que les fichiers Adobe PDF à l'aide des options du fichier de paramètres Adobe PDF sélectionné. Les paramètres de conversion sont déterminés par le site de production défini sous l'option Envoi à. Contrôle en amont Etat Indique si le fichier JDF et les documents associés ont été envoyés et vérifiés à l'aide de l'outil Contrôle en amont. Cette option indique également si des problèmes ont été identifiés. Ces informations sont incorporées dans un audit JDF, un élément de métadonnées que les systèmes de production compatibles JDF peuvent lire afin de déterminer si le fichier PDF est prêt pour l'étape suivante de la procédure. Description Permet d'ajouter à la définition de travail des commentaires destinés à l'utilisateur. Reliure Propose les menus Type, Côté et Nombre de points permettant de définir les spécifications de reliure. Options du panneau Infos clientèle Utilisez les options d'informations clientèle pour identifier le client et d'autres éléments essentiels au projet. Code de facturation Code de facturation des coûts d'impression.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 543 Format JDF ID client Identification client permettant de relier la définition de travail à un système d'information de gestion (SIG) de facturation ou autre. Il s'agit en général d'un numéro de client interne que le système SIG a créé pour le projet. Travail du client Nom du travail attribué par le client. ID de commande du client Numéro de bon de commande interne du contrat entre l'imprimeur et le client. Ce numéro est en général fourni lorsque la commande est passée et indiqué dans toute correspondance entre l'imprimeur et le client concernant le projet, y compris les factures, les rectificatifs de commande, les livraisons, etc. Contacts Liste des personnes impliquées dans le projet et de leur fonction. Définition des informations de contact d'un travail d'impression Pour spécifier les informations de contact d'un travail d'impression, utilisez le Gestionnaire de contacts. Définition ou mise à jour des informations de contact 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de contacts, puis effectuez une sélection : • Cliquez sur Ajouter pour spécifier un nouveau contact. • Sélectionnez un contact dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier pour mettre à jour les informations. • Sélectionnez un contact dans la liste et cliquez sur Dupliquer pour créer un contact à partir d'un contact existant. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Coordonnées, saisissez le nom et l'adresse du contact dans les zones de texte correspondantes. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour mettre à jour la section Canaux de communication : • Cliquez sur Ajouter pour fournir de nouvelles informations. Les options varient en fonction du type de canal de communication choisi. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier pour mettre à jour les informations. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Supprimer. Ajout d'un contact à une définition de travail 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez une définition de travail et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Infos clientèle. 3 Dans la section Contacts, cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Choisissez un nom dans la liste déroulante Contact. 5 Cliquez deux fois sur une fonction ou choisissez des fonctions dans la colonne de droite, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. Vous pouvez choisir un élément dans la liste par défaut ou ajouter des fonctions personnalisées. 6 Si les informations du contact ne sont pas correctes, cliquez sur Modifier pour les mettre à jour. 7 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, indiquez si le contact doit être mis à jour dans la définition de travail actuelle uniquement ou dans le Gestionnaire de contacts également.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 544 Format JDF Ajout d'une fonction à une définition de travail 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de contacts. 2 Cliquez sur Types de contact supplémentaires. 3 Mettez à jour la liste de fonctions et de types de contact selon les besoins : • Cliquez sur Ajouter pour saisir une nouvelle fonction. • Sélectionnez une fonction dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier pour mettre à jour les informations. • Sélectionnez une fonction dans la liste et cliquez sur Supprimer. Définition des spécifications du support d'un travail d'impression Pour spécifier le support de chaque composant d'un travail d'impression, utilisez le Gestionnaire de supports. Si vous connaissez la marque de papier, indiquez-la. Dans le cas contraire, décrivez les caractéristiques du support et un type de papier correspondant à ces caractéristiques sera attribué sur le site de production. Définition des spécifications du support 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de supports. 2 Indiquez les spécifications de support à appliquer : • Cliquez sur Ajouter pour fournir de nouvelles informations. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier pour mettre à jour les informations. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Supprimer. Ajout de spécifications de support à une définition de travail 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez une définition de travail et cliquez sur Modifier. 2 Dans l'arborescence du document, sélectionnez une section de deuxième niveau. 3 Choisissez une option dans la liste déroulante Supports. 4 Si aucune option de support n'est disponible ou que les supports disponibles ne conviennent pas à la définition de travail, cliquez sur le bouton Gestionnaire de supports. 5 Mettez à jour les spécifications du support selon vos besoins : • Cliquez sur Ajouter pour fournir de nouvelles informations. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier pour mettre à jour les informations. • Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Supprimer. Options de support Utilisez les options de support pour indiquer le papier requis. Description Identifiant unique du support. Type de support Papier ou Transparent.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 545 Format JDF Type de support utilisateur Description du type de support. Qualité Le type de papier, par exemple couché brillant, non couché ou jaunâtre. Grammage Grammage prévu du support. Le grammage peut être exprimé en grammes par mètre carré (g/m2 ) ou en livres par rame (ppr). Epaisseur Epaisseur du support sélectionné, mesurée en microns (um). Opacité Opacité du support. Choisissez Opaque pour les impressions recto verso lorsque vous ne souhaitez pas que l'impression sur une face transparaisse sur l'autre à la lumière du jour. Choisissez Translucide pour un affichage rétroéclairé. Texture Texture prévue du support. Couchage verso/Couchage recto Couchage de prépresse applique aux surfaces recto et verso du support. Marque de papier Marque de papier associée au support. Type de papier Types de papier disponibles. L'impression Offset comprend le papier pour livres. Luminosité Pourcentage de reflet. Recyclage Pourcentage de matériel recyclé, compris entre 0 et 100, que le support peut contenir. Couleur Couleur du support. Grisé Teinte de la couleur, claire ou foncée. Transparent Option indiquant si la couleur est translucide. Ajout et suppression de définitions de travaux JDF Vous pouvez réutiliser et partager des définitions de travaux JDF avec d'autres utilisateurs. Par exemple, les prestataires de services de prépresse peuvent en fournir à leurs clients afin de s'assurer que les travaux d'impression contiennent des spécifications correctes avant de leur être remis. Ajout d'une définition de travail à la liste de travaux 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, cliquez sur Ajouter. 2 Recherchez le fichier de définition de travail JDF (extension .jdf) et cliquez sur Ouvrir, ou cliquez deux fois sur le fichier de définition de travail. Ce fichier figure dans la liste des définitions de travaux JDF. Suppression d'une définition de travail de la liste de travaux ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez la définition de travail et cliquez sur Modifier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 546 Format JDF Conversion d'un fichier de définition de travail au format HTML Vous pouvez convertir des fichiers JDF au format HTML, puis visualiser et imprimer le fichier obtenu à partir d'un navigateur Internet. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez une définition de travail et cliquez sur Exporter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier HTML sous, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier HTML, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 3 Ouvrez la version HTML du fichier de définition de travail dans un navigateur Internet à des fins de visualisation et d'impression. Le fichier HTML généré fait référence à un fichier CSS (tel PrintJDF.css). Si ce fichier CSS n'existe pas, il est généré lors de la conversion initiale du fichier au format HTML. Vous pouvez personnaliser et remplacer le fichier CSS par défaut. Envoi d'un travail d'impression Création d'instructions du site de production A tout moment, vous pouvez préparer le lot JDF (fichiers JDF et PDF) pour envoi au moyen d'instructions provenant du site de production. Tout fichier de profil de contrôle en amont ou de paramètres de conversion PDF incorporé dans la définition de travail est utilisé lors de l'envoi. Voir aussi « Paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF » à la page 108 « Paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 111 « Exécution d'un contrôle en amont » à la page 507 Création d'instructions du site de production 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez la définition de travail et cliquez sur Gestionnaire du site de production. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter ou sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier ou Dupliquer. 3 Définissez les options de site de production. Remarque : Le système de production JDF fait automatiquement appel aux options définies lors de l'envoi du travail. Suppression d'instructions du site de production 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez la définition de travail et cliquez sur Gestionnaire du site de production. 2 Sélectionnez un élément dans la liste et cliquez sur Supprimer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 547 Format JDF Options de site de production Utilisez les options de la boîte de dialogue Site de production pour indiquer le traitement du travail d'impression lors de la procédure d'envoi. Nom Nom unique du site d'envoi. Paramètres de conversion PDF Lorsque la définition de travail JDF est envoyée en production, tous les fichiers non Adobe PDF référencés sont convertis au format Adobe PDF. Les paramètres de conversion proviennent soit des paramètres de conversion PDF incorporés dans la définition de travail, soit du menu déroulant Paramètres de conversion PDF par défaut de la boîte de dialogue Site de production. Les fichiers PDF référencés dans la définition de travail avant envoi ne sont pas concernés par les paramètres de conversion PDF spécifiés. Vérifier que les fichiers PDF correspondent à la définition de travail JDF Compare les informations de la définition de travail et des fichiers associés, et vérifie que tous les fichiers associés existent et sont liés à l'URL approprié. Toutes les incohérences de format de page, d'encre et de nombre de pages génèrent des erreurs. Par exemple, une erreur est signalée lorsqu'une définition de travail indique que les pages 1 à 12 du document A seront utilisées, mais que le document A contient seulement 8 pages. Vous pouvez corriger la définition de travail afin qu'elle corresponde au document, utiliser d'autres fonctions pour corriger le document ou poursuivre sans effectuer de modifications. Remarque : Toutes les erreurs ne peuvent pas être corrigées. Combiner les fichiers PDF en un seul fichier PDF Combine les fichiers PDF de l'arborescence du document en un seul fichier PDF. Vous pouvez éventuellement ajouter une annotation non imprimable dans un coin de chaque page avec le nom de la section et le numéro de la page au sein de la section. Important : Cette fonction n'est pas recommandée pour les flux de production qui reposent sur une conformité à la norme PDF/X. En effet, les fichiers PDF référencés modifiés risquent de ne plus être conformes à la norme PDF/X. La conformité peut être vérifiée si l'option de contrôle en amont des fichiers PDF est sélectionnée et qu'un profil PDF/X adéquat est choisi. Insérer des pages vierges Insère des pages vierges dans le fichier PDF combiné résultant de l'association de plusieurs fichiers PDF, dans lequel aucune page PDF n'est référencée (par exemple, lorsqu'il est indiqué qu'une section contient 12 pages mais qu'aucun fichier PDF n'est référencé). Inclure des annotations Ajoute des annotations aux fichiers PDF envoyés afin d'indiquer leur emplacement dans le travail. Fichiers PDF de contrôle en amont Effectue un contrôle en amont des fichiers PDF associés. Le profil de contrôle en amont utilisé correspond au profil de contrôle en amont incorporé dans la définition de travail ou au profil sélectionné dans le menu déroulant des profils par défaut de la boîte de dialogue Site de production. Convertir en lot MIME et envoyer à un dispositif JMF Rassemble le fichier JDF et les fichiers PDF associés en un seul fichier MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions). Le format MIME constitue une spécification de formatage de messages non ASCII de sorte que ces derniers puissent être envoyés par Internet sans qu'ils soient séparés les uns des autres. Le lot est ainsi envoyé à un périphérique de sortie, qui prend en charge le format JMF (Job Messaging Format), à l'URL indiqué. Le format JMF permet aux périphériques électroniques de communiquer par l'intermédiaire d'un réseau. Envoyer vers un dossier Envoie le fichier JDF et les fichiers PDF associés au dossier spécifié dans la zone Chemin. Demander un emplacement de dossier au moment de l'envoi Contrairement à l'option Envoyer vers un dossier, cette option permet de définir le dossier de réception du fichier JDF envoyé et des fichiers PDF associés au moment de l'envoi du travail. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 548 Format JDF Envoi de fichiers au système de production Lorsque vous êtes prêt à envoyer le travail d'impression, envoyez la définition de travail et les fichiers PDF associés à un système de production préconfiguré compatible avec le format JDF. En fonction des sélections effectuées dans la boîte de dialogue Site de production, une liste des non-concordances entre la définition de travail et le fichier PDF est générée, suivie des résultats du contrôle en amont. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définitions de travaux JDF, sélectionnez la définition de travail et cliquez sur Envoyer. 2 Si le champ Site de production n'est pas spécifié, choisissez un site dans le menu Envoi à. Sinon, le site de production indiqué dans le travail est affiché et utilisé. 3 Cliquez sur Commencer. 4 Lorsque des erreurs d'incohérence sont répertoriées dans la boîte de dialogue d'envoi, sélectionnez-les et voyez si vous pouvez les corriger dans la définition de travail. Dans ce cas, le bouton Mettre à jour JDF devient disponible. (Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Suivant et Précédent pour passer d'une erreur corrigible à l'autre.) 5 Pour mettre à jour la définition de travail, sélectionnez une erreur et cliquez sur Mettre à jour JDF. La définition de travail est automatiquement mise à jour et l'erreur disparaît. Certaines erreurs ne peuvent être entièrement corrigées. Dans ce cas, un avertissement s'affiche à la place de l'erreur. 6 Une fois toutes les erreurs possibles corrigées, cliquez sur Continuer. 7 Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Contrôle en amont dans la boîte de dialogue Site de production, Acrobat effectue un contrôle en amont du fichier PDF et affiche les résultats. 8 Cliquez sur OK pour quitter la boîte de dialogue Contrôle en amont et continuer l'envoi en production. La boîte de dialogue Envoyer indique les résultats de la procédure d'envoi. Si l'envoi échoue, un avertissement décrit l'origine de l'échec. Aucun fichier JDF n'est écrit ni envoyé à un périphérique JDF. Voir aussi « Création d'instructions du site de production » à la page 546 « A propos des résultats du contrôle en amont » à la page 510549 Chapitre 19 : Raccourcis clavier Cette section dresse la liste des raccourcis courants de navigation dans un document. Raccourcis clavier Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils Pour activer les raccourcis à touche unique, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, et sous Générales, cochez la case Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils. Outil Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Outil Main T T Sélection temporaire de l'outil Main Barre d'espacement Barre d'espacement Outil de sélection V V Outil Instantané G G Outil Zoom de sélection Z Z Sélection temporaire de l'outil Zoom dynamique (lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est activé) Maj Maj Zoom arrière temporaire (lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est activé) Ctrl Option Sélectionne temporairement l’outil Zoom avant Ctrl+Barre d’espacement Espace + Commande Objet R R Données d'objet O O Article A A Outil Recadrer C C Lien L L Outil Champ de texte F (Windows uniquement) F Parcours des outils de formulaire : Champ de texte, Case à cocher, Bouton radio, Zone de liste, Liste déroulante, Bouton, Signature numérique, Code à barres Maj+F (Windows uniquement) Maj+F Outil 3D M M Parcours des outils Multimédia : Flash, Vidéo Maj+M Maj+MUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 550 Raccourcis clavier Touches de commentaire Pour activer les raccourcis à touche unique, cochez la case Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils dans les préférences générales. Touches de navigation dans un document PDF Outil Retouche de texte T T Parcours des outils de retouche : Retouche de texte, Retouche de l'ordre de lecture, Retouche d'objet Maj+T Maj+T Mesures B B Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Note S S Modifications de texte E E Tampon K K Outil de mise en surbrillance actif U U Parcours des outils de mise en surbrillance : Texte surligné, Texte souligné, Texte barré Maj+U (Windows uniquement) Maj+U Outil Flèche D D Outil Nuage Q (Windows uniquement) Q Zone de texte X X Fichier joint comme commentaire J J Parcours des outils de pièce jointe : Fichier joint, Enregistrer le commentaire audio Maj+J Maj+J Activation du commentaire Tab Tab Activation du commentaire suivant Maj+Tab Maj+Tab Ouverture de la note contextuelle associée au commentaire actif Entrée Renvoi Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Ecran précédent Page précédente ou Maj+Entrée Page précédente ou Maj+Retour Ecran suivant Page suivante ou Entrée Page suivante ou Retour Première page Origine ou Maj+Ctrl+Pg. préc ou Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Haut Origine ou Maj+Commande+touche fléchée Haut Dernière page Fin ou Maj+Ctrl+Pg. suiv ou Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Bas Fin ou Maj+Commande+touche fléchée Bas Outil Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OSUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 551 Raccourcis clavier Touches de navigation générale Page précédente Touche fléchée Gauche ou Ctrl+Pg. préc Touche fléchée Gauche ou Commande+Pg. préc Page suivante Touche fléchée Droite ou Ctrl+Pg. suiv Touche fléchée Droite ou Commande+Pg. suiv Document précédent Ctrl + F6 (UNIX) Commande+F6 Document suivant Maj + Ctrl + F6 (UNIX) Maj+Commande+F6 Défilement vers le haut Touche fléchée Haut Touche fléchée haut Défilement vers le bas Touche fléchée Bas Touche fléchée Bas Défilement (outil Main activé) Barre d'espacement Barre d'espacement Zoom avant Ctrl+signe égal Commande+signe égal Zoom arrière Ctrl+tiret Commande+tiret Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Activation des menus (Windows ou UNIX) ; agrandir d'abord la commande de menu (UNIX) F10 Contrôle+F2 Activation de la barre d'outils dans le navigateur Web et de l'application Maj+F8 Maj+F8 Passage au document ouvert suivant (panneau de visualisation activé) Ctrl+F6 Commande+F6 Passage au document ouvert précédent (panneau de visualisation activé) Ctrl+Maj+F6 Commande+Maj+F6 Fermeture du document actif Ctrl+F4 Commande+F4 Fermeture de tous les documents actifs Non disponible Commande+Option+W Activation du commentaire, du lien ou du champ de formulaire suivant dans le panneau de visualisation Tab Tab Activation du panneau de visualisation F5 F5 Activation du commentaire, du lien ou du champ de formulaire précédent dans le panneau de visualisation Maj+Tab Maj+Tab Activation de l'outil, de l'élément (une séquence vidéo ou un signet, par exemple) ou de la commande sélectionné(e) Barre d'espacement ou Entrée Barre d'espacement ou Retour Ouverture d'un menu contextuel Maj+F10 Control+clic Fermeture d'un menu contextuel F10 Echap Retour à l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection Echap Echap Activation de l'onglet suivant dans une boîte de dialogue à onglets Ctrl+Tab Non disponible Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OSUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 552 Raccourcis clavier Touches des panneaux de navigation Passage au résultat de la recherche suivant et mise en surbrillance dans le document F3 F3 Recherche dans le document précédent (plusieurs fichiers pris en compte dans les résultats de la recherche) Alt + Maj + touche fléchée Gauche (Windows uniquement) Commande+Maj+touche fléchée Gauche Recherche dans le document suivant (plusieurs fichiers pris en compte dans les résultats de la recherche) Alt+Maj+touche fléchée Droite (Windows uniquement) Commande+Maj+touche fléchée Droite Sélection de texte (outil de sélection activé) Maj+touches fléchées Maj+touches fléchées Sélection du mot suivant ou désélection du mot précédent (outil de sélection activé) Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Droite ou Gauche Non disponible Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Ouverture et activation du navigateur Ctrl+Maj+F5 Commande+Maj+F5 Activation des différents éléments du document, de la barre des messages et des panneaux de navigation F6 F6 Activation du panneau ou du volet précédent Maj+F6 Maj+F6 Parcours des éléments dans le panneau de navigation actif Tab Tab Passage au panneau de navigation précédent ou suivant et ouverture (bouton activé) Touche fléchée Haut ou Bas Touche fléchée Haut ou Bas Passage au panneau de navigation suivant et activation (zone quelconque du navigateur activée) Ctrl+Tab Non disponible Développement du signet actif (panneau Signets activé) Touche fléchée Droite ou Maj+signe plus Touche fléchée Droite ou Maj+signe plus Réduction du signet actif (panneau Signets activé) Touche fléchée Gauche ou signe moins Touche fléchée Gauche ou signe moins Développement de tous les signets Maj+* Maj+* Réduction du signet sélectionné Barre oblique (/) Barre oblique (/) Activation de l'élément suivant dans un panneau de navigation Touche fléchée Bas Touche fléchée Bas Activation de l'élément précédent dans un panneau de navigation Touche fléchée haut Touche fléchée Haut Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OSUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 553 Raccourcis clavier Touches de navigation dans la fenêtre d’aide Touches d'accessibilité Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Ouverture de la fenêtre d'aide F1 F1 ou Commande+? Fermeture de la fenêtre d'aide Ctrl+W (Windows uniquement) ou Alt+F4 Commande + W Retour à la rubrique précédemment ouverte Alt + Flèche Gauche Commande + Flèche gauche Accès à la rubrique suivante Alt + Flèche Droite Commande + Flèche droite Accès à la fenêtre suivante Ctrl+Tab Voir l'aide de votre navigateur par défaut Accéder à la fenêtre précédente Maj+Ctrl+Tab Voir l'aide de votre navigateur par défaut Activer le lien suivant dans un panneau Tab Non disponible Activer le lien précédent dans un panneau Maj+Tab Non disponible Activation d'un lien en surbrillance Entrée Non disponible Impression d'une rubrique d'aide Ctrl+P Commande+P Résultat Action sous Windows Raccourci Mac OS Outil Vérification rapide Maj+Ctrl+6 Maj+Commande+6 Modification des paramètres de lecture du document actif Maj+Ctrl+5 Maj+Commande+5 Redistribution d'un document PDF balisé et retour à l'affichage non redistribué Ctrl+4 Commande+4 Activation et désactivation de la fonction Lecture audio Maj+Ctrl+Y Maj+Commande+Y Lecture à haute voix de la page active uniquement Maj+Ctrl+V Maj+Commande+V Lecture à haute voix de la section comprise entre la page active et la fin du document Maj+Ctrl+B Maj+Commande+B Pause de la lecture à haute voix Maj+Ctrl+C Maj+Commande+C Arrêt de la lecture à haute voix Maj+Ctrl+E Maj+Commande+E554 Index Nombres 3D, barre d'outils 413, 414 3D, contenu affichage 415, 416, 419, 425 arborescence du modèle 417 commentaires 428 coupe 420 création de signets de vues 426 déplacement et redimensionnement 411 interaction 413 JavaScript 430 mesure 422 Préférences de contenu 3D 427 vue définie 425 3D, outil 411 A abonnement à des services Internet 174 accès à un outil par touche unique 41 Accès Internet avertissements de sécurité 247 blocage 247 accès rapide, touche unique 309 accessibilité balises 301 création d'un PDF 312 création de formulaire 317 défilement automatique 309 éléments 299 formulaire 210 langue 300, 328 Lecture audio 311 lien 327 ordre de lecture 301, 321 page Web 315 panneau Balises 330 polices 299 préférences 305 protection 300, 328 raccourcis clavier 308 rapport sur l'ajout des balises 318 signet 300 suppression d'éléments de page de la structure de balises 324 suppression des balises de structure du document 326 texte de remplacement 299 texte disponible pour la recherche 299 vérification 301 vérification complète 303 vérification rapide 302 accessibilité, résultats de la vérification affichage 304 Acrobat Connect 162 Acrobat Distiller à propos 103 définition des zones de document 118 dénomination des fichiers 105 dossier de contrôle 106 paramètres 105, 107, 110 Acrobat Self-Sign Security. Voir protection par certificat par défaut Acrobat. Voir Adobe Acrobat Acrobat.com à propos 160 partage de fichiers 160 partage de porte-documents PDF 130 préférences 163 téléchargement de documents 160 utilisation pour la diffusion de formulaires 165 utilisation pour les révisions partagées 165 action ajout à un clip multimédia 351 ajout à un lien 349 ajout à une page 350 ouverture 350 ouverture et fermeture de page 350 souris 231 type 350 action de formulaire réinitialisation 351 action de page, ouverture et fermeture 350 action liée à la souris à propos 231 déclencheur 351 ActionScript, ajout à un document PDF 405 activation du logiciel 1 Activer la prise en charge Unicode, option 274 Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche, option 62 Adobe Acrobat comparaison des versions 118 compatibilité avec des versions antérieures 151 compatibilité de version 95, 111, 151 Adobe Bridge paramètres de couleur Creative Suite 433, 435 Adobe Digital Editions 61 Adobe Exchange 4 Adobe Photoshop éditeur d'images 368 rééchantillonnage et compression d'images 120 Adobe Policy Server (APS) 265 affichage action sur un champ 351 arborescence du modèle 417 barre d'outils 29 barre des propriétés 31 commentaire 192 commentaires d'un contenu 3D 428 contenu 3D 415, 416, 425 définition d'un travail 540 facteur de zoom 45 fichier PDF obtenu 83 image à basse résolution 155 image de grande taille 41 pièce jointe 37 résultats du contrôle en amont 510 showpage 116 signets 35 table et feuille de calcul 50 vignettes 36 zones graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu 45 affichage d'une page, définition 369 Affichage Web rapide 75, 76 affiche, image d'emplacement pour contenu multimédia 406 Afficher l'écran d'introduction, option 41 Afficher la liste des pages liées, commande 101 Afficher la version signée, commande 297 Afficher les documents dans la barre de tâches 41UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 555 Index Afficher un aperçu de l'élément de page sélectionné, activation 511 agrandissement de la vue Voir aussi zoom agrandisseur d'écran. Voir accessibilité aide raccourcis clavier 553 Aide communautaire 2 Ajouter des balises à un document, commande 318 Alignement d'objets, repères 52 Aligner sur la grille, commande 52 analyse des modèles 3D. Voir mesures Ancrage des barres d'outils 29 angle, mesure 422 annotation d'un document affichage 181 association d'annotations 187 icône 181 Annotation. Voir annotation d'un document Annotations, groupe de propriétés 525 aperçu condition de sortie 486 marges ou zones de document 496 séparation 488 substitutions de polices 123 Aperçu du document (mode) signature d'un document 290 aplatissement à propos de 498 Voir aussi contrôle en amont aperçu 501 calque 379 champ de formulaire 357 paramètres prédéfinis 504 transparence 357 appareil de poche, préparation des PDF 309 applications Microsoft conversion de fichiers au format PDF 80, 81 création d'un fichier PDF 89 paramètres PDF pour les fichiers Office 83 Appliquer les priorités d'impression, option 459 apposition d'une signature PDF 289 approbation d'un document PDF flux de tâches d'approbation 202 lancement d'un flux de tâches d'approbation 201 approbation d'un fichier PDF signature 289 approbation de document PDF à propos 200 arabe, langue 62 Arborescence du modèle aperçu 417 modèle 3D et 413 archive de messagerie, création d'un portedocuments PDF 87 arrière-plan dans les modèles 3D 416 ajout 138 définition du contenu de la page 320 suppression 139, 140 téléchargement 39 Article 354 article à propos 353 définition des propriétés 355 lecture 351 modification 354 navigation 39 articles, défilement 40 asiatique, texte ajout d'un commentaire 188 aspect d'une signature manuscrite, création 285 aspect de recouvrement intensité 481 largeur 481, 483 sommet 481 style d’extrémité 481 Assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité 305 atteindre une page 350 Atteindre, action 350 Atteindre, destination 347 Attribuer des profils, commande 449 Attribuer un profil, commande 448 attribut de texte, modification 362 auteur critère de recherche 392 nom sur le commentaire 179 AutoCAD conversion au format PDF 66 création d'un fichier PDF 92 exportation des commentaires de révision vers AutoCAD 199 Autoriser la définition de l'état des calques selon les informations utilisateur, option 41 Avancés, paramètres Adobe PDF 116 avertissement d'encre 489 avertissement de gamme 489 avertissement de pixel 489 Avertissement, alerte 523 B balise à propos 301 accessibilité 301 ajout d'un texte de remplacement 325 création d'un PDF 312 dans un fichier PDF combiné 315 inclusion dans les index 398 insertion dans un document PDF 318 modification 322 modification pour les illustrations et tableaux 324 page Web 315 recherche 388 référence 335 suppression 359 suppression d'éléments de page 324 suppression et remplacement 326 texte de remplacement 332 Balises, panneau 330 Barre contextuelle, réponse à un commentaire 193 barre d'accroche, sur les barres d'outils 28 barre d'outils Formulaires 210 Barre d'outils d'analyse 385 Barre d'outils de zoom 39 Barre d'outils Navigation 34 Barre d'outils Navigation de pages 34 barre d'outils PDF 80 barre de message du document 26 dans un formulaire 207 options de révision 170 Barre des propriétés 31 Barre des propriétés, commande 31 barres d'outils 3D 413, 414 affichage 28 affichage et masquage 29 affichage et masquage des libellés 30 ancrage 28, 29 déplacement 29UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 556 Index restauration de la configuration par défaut 30 sélection d'un bouton 26 suppression 28 tâches 28 verrouillage 30 verrouillage et déverrouillage 30 barres de défilement 34 base (côté non émulsion) 468 bibliorom 61 Bicubique, sous-échantillonnage 113 biffure du contenu d'une page 279 Biffure, outils 279 Bitmap, option 464, 466 Boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages 496 boucle d'un fichier multimédia 409 bouton à propos 231 affichage et masquage 30 effet contextuel 235 Envoyer 236 importation de données 238 libellé 30, 233 modification 233 réinitialisation du formulaire 237 bouton d’envoi par messagerie, création 236 Bouton Dernière page 35 Bouton Pleine largeur 45 Bouton Première page 35 bouton radio, dans un formulaire 208 boutons mesure 53 Bridge. Voir Adobe Bridge C calque à propos 375 affichage 376 ajout de contenu 380 aplatissement 379 conversion AutoCAD 91 fichier Visio 91 fusion 379 importation 379 impression 375 masquage 377 navigation 378 recherche 388 réorganisation 377 verrouillage 376 Calques, commande 459 Calques, groupe de propriétés 525 CAO, conversion d'un trait lissé en courbe 357 capture Web conversion de pages Web au format PDF 98 options d'affichage 103 Capturer, commande 537 captures d'écran, conversion au format PDF 67, 68 caractère, insertion 364 caractères spéciaux, insertion 364 carré création 187 suppression 187 Carré, outil. Voir Rectangle, outil carte à puce, signature 275 case à cocher, comme élément de formulaire 207 Catalog, préférences 399 catalogue à propos 395 Voir aussi index, catalogue CCITT (Comité de consultation international téléphonique et télégraphique), compression 122 CCITT, filtres de compression 121 CD-ROM, publication de fichiers PDF vers 395 cercle création 187 suppression 187 Cercle, outil. Voir Ellipse, outil certificat authentification 262 création 274 niveaux d'approbation 263 partage 259 serveur de répertoires 264 certificat de tampon temporel validation 296 certification document 291 liste de vérification 291 certificats protection 247 téléchargement automatique 247 CGI application 236 valeurs d'exportation 238 champ effacement des données de formulaire 243 remplissage d'un formulaire 243 champ de formulaire voir aussi formulaire, champ de signature accessibilité 210 aplatissement 359 aspect 221 bouton 231, 233, 237 création à l'aide des outils de formulaire d'Acrobat 210 définition du contenu 320 déplacement manuel 214 effet contextuel 235 lecture à haute voix 312 mesure d'une distance 53 dans les signatures numériques 289 options de calcul 226 ordre de tabulation 339 positionnement à l'aide des grilles 211 propriétés 231 protection 256 règle 52 valeurs d'exportation 238 validation 229 Champ de formulaire, groupe de propriétés 525 champ de texte à propos des éléments de formulaire 208 modification 223, 224 options de calcul 226 chargement de métadonnées XMP 374 chiffrement création d'une identification numérique 274 document 254 fichier, stratégie de protection 266 chiffrement, suppression 258 chinois Voir aussi langues asiatiques chinois, texte ajout d'un commentaire 188 Chinois, traditionnel et simplifié 62 clip multimédia ajout à un document PDF 403 ajout d'une action 351 configuration système requise 409 conservation des bonnes proportions 407 lecture 401 lecture via un bouton 231 mode lecture 409UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 557 Index paramètres de lecture 409 propriétés des supports compatibles Acrobat 5 410 propriétés des supports compatibles Acrobat 6 410 rendu 407 CMJN espace colorimétrique, conversion des images 114 profil de couleur 115 codage vidéo 404 collaboration en direct, à propos 161 collaboration en temps réel 160 collage commentaire sous forme de texte 188 image 159 tableau 158 texte 157 Collage spécial, commande 134 collection, organisation des fichiers PDF 56 Colonne, sélection 158 Colorimétrie absolue 114 Colorimétrie relative 114 combinaison fichiers PDF 547 fichiers PDF dotés de calques 380 Combiner des fichiers, bouton 60 Combiner, commande 132 Commande de comparaison de documents 40 commande de menu, exécution de l'action 350 Commande Utiliser ces propriétés par défaut 231 commandes grisées, protection 248 commentaire affichage 191 affichage et masquage 195 affichage verrouillé 181 aspect 180 association de commentaires 187 comparaison zone de texte/note 189 développement dans la liste des commentaires 192 document PDF 169 droite de liaison 179 droits 166 enregistrement d'une copie d'archive 174 envoi dans un message électronique 171 exportation 197 filtrage 192 importation 197 impression 179, 194, 456 indication de modifications de texte 182 dans modèles 3D 428 navigation 192 note 181 outils 177 ouverture 181 police et corps de police 179 préférences 179 publication pour d'autres réviseurs 172 raccourcis clavier 550 recherche 195, 388, 392 résumé et impression 194 suivi à l'aide de coches 194 tri 192 vérification 171 vérification orthographique 196 Commentaire DSC, conservation 117 commentaire en ligne configuration du serveur 166 préférences 166 commentaire sous forme de note à propos 181 ajout à une annotation 183 impression 194 commentaires à partir de mesures 3D 429 dans un contenu multimédia 407 résultats du contrôle en amont dans 512 Commentaires et annotations, outils 177 comparaison fichiers PDF et JDF 547 versions de documents signés 297 compatibilité changement de version PDF 152 entre versions 95, 111 paramètres 95, 111 versions antérieures d'Acrobat 151 compatibilité de version 95, 111 compensation du point noir 453 composants d'un travail d'impression, affichage 540 composite, impression 472 compression à propos 120 avec Adobe Photoshop 120 dessin au trait 113 fichiers dans Acrobat Distiller 120 image 154 Optimisation PDF 357 par type d'image dans un fichier 120 compression avec ou sans perte de données 121, 357 Compression JPEG 121 Configuration de l'impression, commande (Windows) 456 configuration système requise, clip multimédia 409 Connexion, configuration de la vitesse 39 conseils relatifs à la numérisation 73 conservation commentaires OPI 117 fonctions de transfert 115 informations EPS 117 informations sur le document 117 informations sur les trames de demiteintes 115 paramètres de densité du noir 115 paramètres de surimpression 116 paramètres UCR 115 sémantique copypage Niveau 2 116 Conserver les objets noirs, option 493 Contenu, commande 45 Contenu, panneau 329 contenu, protection 256 contrôle d'un document PDF 506 contrôle de l'utilisation de l'espace 356 contrôle en amont contrôle de fichiers 535 contrôle en amont d'un document affichage des résultats 510 définition de travail 547 exécution d'un contrôle 507 lot de contrôle en amont 520 zones problématiques 506 contrôle en amont du docment incorporation de pistes d'audit 513 contrôle en amont du document affichage des problèmes dans une structure PDF 516 conversion Voir aussi exportation couleurs d’un document 491 dessin Visio 90 fichier AutoCAD 92 fichier JDF au format MIME 547 fichier PDF au format MIME 547 fichiers image 67 fichiers Microsoft Office 80, 81UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 558 Index images des pages Web 103 trait lissé en courbe 360 conversion de fichier au format PDF dans la définition de travail 547 conversion de pages Web à propos 98 conservation de la structure 102 glisser-déposer 102 options d'arrière-plan 103 retour à la ligne du texte 103 conversion des pages Web paramètres d'affichage des pages HTML 103 Convertir en profil, commande 449 coordonnées du curseur 55 copie Voir aussi copie et collage fichier dans le Presse-papiers, OLE 134 interdite 252 page à l'aide de la vignette 145 profil ICC 508 restriction à l'aide de la protection par certificat par défaut 258 URL d'un lien Web 101 Copier l'adresse du lien, commande 101 copier-coller exportation d'une image PDF 157 image du Presse-papiers 159 interdiction 157 outil Instantané 159 sélection d'une image 159 sélection de texte 157 substitution de police 157 copypage, Opérateur PostScript 116 coréen Voir aussi langues asiatiques coréen, texte ajout d'un commentaire 188 correction de contrôle en amont à propos 529 ajout à un profil 530 création 532 modification 531, 532 couleur voir aussi séparation des couleurs affichage en ligne 114 affichage par espace source 488 mappage des espaces colorimétriques 114 options 114 prévention des changements dans le texte 114 quadrillage 53 couleur d'avertissement 489 couleur de surbrillance, préférences 205 couleur dépendante du périphérique 114 couleur quadrichromique impression 473 Couleur, rééchantillonnage et compression d'images 112 couleurs Voir aussi gestion des couleurs, modèle de couleur dans un porte-documents PDF 129 couleurs quadrichromiques à propos de 473 prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 437 Couleurs, groupe de propriétés 524 couleurs, séparation sur l'hôte 474 coupe, contenu 3D 420 courbe, conversion à partir d'un trait lissé 360 couverture d’encre limites 488 vérification 489 Couverture totale de la zone, option 488 création arrière-plan et filigrane 138, 140 en-tête et pied de page 134 fichier EPS 153 fichier HTML 153 fichier JPEG 152 fichier PNG 155 fichier PostScript 153 fichier RTF ou Word 156 fichier TIFF 155 formulaire accessible 317 PDF accessible 312 PDF balisé 312 profil de contrôle en amont 519, 524 signet de page Web 352 création d'un document PDF à partir d'un document Microsoft Office 84 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner 65 à partir du contenu du Presse-papiers 67 à partir d'un fichier AutoCAD 92 à partir d'une capture d'écran 67, 68 fichier compatible PDF/X 117 par glisser-déposer 67 imprimante Adobe PDF 76 dans Internet Explorer 98 à partir d'applications Microsoft 81 par numérisation 69 utilisation d'Acrobat Distiller 103 utilisation de la commande d'impression 76 à partir de page Web 98 création de fichiers PDF à partir de plusieurs fichiers 60 Créer un lien 327 Créer un PDF à partir d'un scanner, commande 70 Créer un PDF à partir du Presse-papiers, commande 67 D damier affichage derrière un objet transparent 45 date, critère de recherche 392 déclencheur, action 351 Déficiences. Voir accessibilité défilement automatique 36, 309 disposition par défaut 41 défilement automatique à propos 309 définition d'un travail informations de contact, ajout 543 définition de la visibilité du calque, action 351 définition de travail affichage 540 ajout de fichiers 541 ajout et suppression 545 contrôle en amont d'un document 547 conversion de fichier 547 création 541 envoi à un système de production 548 modification 541 dégradés, présence de lignes 111 demi-teintes conservation des informations 115 Densité du noir 115 densité neutre Densité du noir 482 mesure 484 réglage 484 valeurs 484UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 559 Index déplacement modèles 3D 411 page à l'aide de la vignette 145 Description de la page, groupe de propriétés 525 dessin au trait compression 113 définition 120 dessin, modification de l'original 368 destination à propos 346 calque PDF 378 création 347 déplacement 347 liste 346 suppression 347 Détramage, options 73 Déverrouillage des barres d'outils 30 diaporama, configuration 368 diaporama. Voir plein écran, affichage dictionnaire ajout de mots 196 exclusion d'un mot 196 didacticiel collaboration en direct 11 création de PDF 7 porte-documents PDF 17 prévu pour la création de formulaires 14 révision partagée 10 signature numérique 21 Didacticiel sur la création d'un fichier PDF 7 dispositif de suivi gestion des révisions 173 préférences 176 disposition, pour un porte-documents PDF 129 Distance, outil à propos 53 modèle 3D 422 Distiller. Voir Acrobat Distiller distribution correction avec l'outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture 321 document avec signature numérique, optimisation 357 document certifié, dans le contenu multimédia 402 document chiffré création 254 ouverture 248 recherche 390 suppression du chiffrement 259, 266 document d'ingénierie conversion d'un trait lissé en courbe 360 épaisseur de filet maigre 497 document Microsoft Office, conversion en fichier PDF 65 document PDF structuré, erreurs dans le groupe de propriétés 526 Document PDF structuré, groupe de propriétés 525 Document protégé 254 Document, groupe de propriétés 525 documents comparaison 40 Documents PDF géographiques 384 données cartographiques copie dans le Presse-papiers 386 dans fichiers PDF 384 exportation 387 données d'autres applications, suppression 360 Données d'objet 374 données du lieu copie dans le Presse-papiers 386 exportation 387 dossier contrôle en amont 535 de contrôle 106 recherche de polices 123 Dossier actif 535 dossier de contrôle configuration 106 fichiers prologue et épilogue 106 indisponibilité 105 double octet, polices 122 doubles moniteurs, mode plein écran 38 droite à gauche, options de langue 62 droits d'utilisation 166 droits d'utilisation supplémentaires 166 Droplet du contrôle en amont 535 E Echantillonnage 112 éclairage, modèle 3D 416 éditeur d'images, sélection 368 éditeur PDF 68 préférences 69 prévention des modifications 69 effacement Voir aussi suppression effets spéciaux bouton 231 élément contextuel bouton 235 éléments de menu grisés, protection 248 ellipse création 187 suppression 187 EMF, format de fichier 498 Emplacements favoris, organisation de fichiers PDF 59 encre spécialisée 484 encre métallique, recouvrement 484 encre opaque, recouvrement 484 encre pastel, recouvrement 484 encre signature à propos 289 utilisation des tablettes graphiques 288 encres angle et fréquence 467 impression une par une 474 pseudonyme 495 engraissement, compensation 483 enregistrement Voir aussi exportation et enregistrement, formats automatique 41 comme document certifié 292 compatibilité PDF 152 fichier PDF 149 format texte accessible 156 illustration transparente 498 image au format image 157 métadonnées 374 modifications 149 optimisation pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web 76 paramètres PDF dans le fichier 116 enregistrement automatique à propos 150 enregistrement 150 fichier 150 préférences 41 enregistrement du logiciel 1 enregistrement, format EPS 153 HTML 153 JPEG, JPEG2000 152 PNG 155 PostScript 153UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 560 Index RTF 156 texte 153 TIFF 155 Word 156 XML 153 Enregistrer sous, changement du nom du document 149 en-tête ajout 134 ajout d'une numérotation Bates 136 ajout lors de la conversion d'une page Web 102 dans un porte-documents PDF 129 modification 135 suppression 136 En-tête, définition du contenu de la page 320 Entrées GPTS 387 Entrelacement dans les fichiers PNG 155 enveloppe, sécurisée pour l'envoi de fichier 268 envoi action sur un formulaire 351 commentaires 170 fichier au système de production 548 Envoyer et collaborer en direct, commande 161 Epaisseur de contour, constante 51 Epaisseur de trait, option (repères et fonds perdus) 470 Epilogue, fichier 116 épreuvage à l’écran à propos 440 dans Photoshop, Illustrator et InDesign 441 épreuve à l’écran des couleurs dans Acrobat 442 EPS, fichier 117 conversion au format PDF 66 Erreur, alerte 523 erreur, correction dans un PDF 529 erreurs dans les groupes de propriétés PDF 526 Espace à largeur nulle, insertion 364 espace colorimétrique conversion 114 conversion vers l'espace de destination 491 définition et étalonnage 115 Espace colorimétrique CalRVB 114 Espace colorimétrique DeviceN 474 espace colorimétrique RVB Adobe 451 espace colorimétrique sRVB 439, 451 espace de fusion, transparence 491 espace de travail couleurs 450, 451 modèle de couleur 448 espace insécable, insertion 364 Espaces colorimétriques ICC, groupe de propriétés 524 étalement. Voir recouvrement Etat de calque, configuration avec les informations utilisateur 377 état de la signature 293 état de révision 194 état initial, calque 377 état par défaut, calque PDF 377 état, suivi de la conversion des fichiers 105 Exchange 4 exclusion de mot, vérification orthographique 196 Exécuter, commande 381 exécution d'un script JavaScript, action 351 exportation Voir aussi enregistrement calque 377 image PDF 157 PDF vers HTML, XML 153 PDF vers JPEG et JPEG2000 152 PDF vers PNG 155 PDF vers PostScript ou EPS 153 PDF vers RTF ou Word 156 PDF vers texte 156 PDF vers TIFF 155 PDF vers XPDF 152 profil de contrôle en amont 520 valeurs de formulaire 238 Exporter, bouton 151 Extraction de pages 144 extras 4 F Faire défiler automatiquement commande 36 fenêtre fractionnement 50 fractionnement d'une feuille de calcul 50 paramètres des préférences 179 plusieurs 51 Fenêtre de l'organiseur 55 Fenêtre fractionnée 50 feuille de calcul, affichage fractionné 50 feuilles de style en cascade 98 fichier voir aussi PDF ajout à des porte-documents PDF 128 automatisation du contrôle 535 combinaison de PDF dotés de calques 380 combinaison en fichier PDF fusionné 132 combinaison en porte-documents PDF 125 extraction à partir d'un porte-documents PDF 130 joindre à un document 190 modification dans un porte-documents PDF 130 suppression dans un porte-documents PDF 130 Fichier de définition d'index (PDX) 396 Fichier joint comme commentaire, outil 190 Fichier MIME 547 fichier PDF collaboration en ligne 161 fichier PDF compatible PDF/SigQ 290 fichier PostScript création avec la commande Imprimer 106, 458 Fichier PostScript Printer Description. Voir PPD, fichiers fichier temporaire, dans une vidéo 408 fichier texte conversion au format PDF 67 fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 444 fichiers géographiques PDF mesure 387 fichiers liés, prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 437 fichiers PDF comparaison 40 fichiers PDF en coréen 62 fichiers PDF en japonais 62 Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques 62 Filet, remplacement 497 filigrane accessibilité 328 ajout 140 suppression 142 film Flash. Voir clip multimédia film. Voir clip multimédia films négatifs 468 Filtrage de commentaires 192 correction. Voir correction de contrôle en amontUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 561 Index Flash ajout à un document PDF 405 ajout à un modèle 3D 412 vidéo dans un document PDF 403 flèche création 187 suppression 187 Flou intérieur, option 73 flux de contenu PDF, erreurs dans le groupe de propriétés 526 fonctions de transfert 115 Fonctions de versions PDF 118 Fond perdu 118 fond perdu repères d'impression 496 Fond perdu, zone 45, 142 fonds perdus format de page et 80 Format d’épreuve, commande 441 format de fichier Voir aussi formats individuels, exportation, et enregistrement format de fichier PICT aplatissement lors de l’export 498 format de page différence avec format de papier 80 format de papier différence avec format de page 80 format vidéo H.264 404 format vidéo, H.264 404 formats multimédia 401 formulaire à propos des types 204 Voir aussi champ de formulaire accessibilité 210 actions et boutons d'envoi 236 actions et boutons d'importation de données 238 bouton de réinitialisation 237 champ de tabulation 339 couleur de surbrillance 205 création à l'aide des outils de formulaire d'Acrobat 210 didacticiel prévu pour la création 14 effacement des données 243 méthodes de diffusion 165 positionnement des champs à l'aide des grilles 211 préférences 205 recherche 388 recueil de données sur le Web 236 remplissage 243 remplissage automatique 205, 246 validation 229 vérification orthographique 196 Web 236 formulaire, action affichage d'un champ 351 envoi 351 formulaires bouton d’envoi par messagerie 236 impression 456 options de calcul 226 utilisation d’un script JavaScript 210 Formulaires barre d'outils 210 formulaires destinés au Web 236 fractionnement de fichiers PDF 145 fusion de calques PDF 379 G gamme de couleurs 431 Gammes de couleurs, option 470 GATF (Graphic Arts Technical Foundation of North America) 484 GeoTiff calque de transparence 387 gestion d'un index incorporé 395 gestion des couleurs à l’impression 472 à propos 431, 432, 433 Voir aussi profils colorimétriques, paramètres de couleur création d’un environnement de visualisation 433 épreuvage à l’écran des couleurs 440, 441, 442 fichiers image 114 pour les images en ligne 439, 440 pour les PDF 440, 444 prise en compte pour l’importation d’images 437, 438 prise en compte pour l’impression de documents 442 prise en compte pour les couleurs quadrichromiques et les tons directs 437 référence des paramètres de couleur 450 réglages 434 sur l'imprimante 471 synchronisation des paramètres de couleur 435 gestion des couleurs, options de conversion JPEG 154 PNG 155 TIFF 155 Gestionnaire d’encres 478, 494 Gestionnaire de contacts 541 Gestionnaire de supports 541, 544 Gestionnaire des approbations 247 Gestionnaire du site de production 546 Graphique, zone 45, 142 graphique. Voir image grille à propos de 52 accrochage 52 affichage et masquage 52 changement d'unité 52 positionnement des champs de formulaire 211 H handicap. Voir accessibilité hébreu, langue 62 Historique 41 Historique (dans l'organiseur) suppression 60 Historique (dans l'organiseur) localisation d'un fichier PDF 56 HTML, fichier conversion au format PDF 67, 98 I ICC (International Color Consortium) 433 ID d'itinérance, signature d'un document PDF 275 identification numérique carte à puce 275 certificat 259 création 274 définition 273 définition d'un mot de passe 276 définition du paramètre par défaut 275 délai d'expiration 276 ID d'itinérance 275 jeton matériel 275 protection 277 que faire en cas de perte ou de vol 277 suppression 276 identité approuvée distribution d'un document chiffré 257 vérification 259UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 562 Index identités approuvées ajout d'un contact 261 Ignorer les données utilisateur, panneau (Optimisation PDF) 357 illustration, définition du contenu 320 image affichage de grandes images 41 conversion au format PDF 67 copier-coller 159 exportation 157 fusion de fragments 360 lissage des contours inégaux 113 masquage 41 modification 361 recherche de métadonnées 388 sous-échantillonnage et compression 120, 357 suppression d'une version 359 tampon 184 téléchargement à partir du Web 98 image de remplacement, suppression 359 image en tons continus, compression 121 image fragmentée, fusion 360 image PDF, exportation vers un autre format 157 Image vectorielle 120 image, compression voir aussi compression, options de compression configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 113 Image, groupe de propriétés 524 images conversion de pages Web au format PDF 103 conversion en CalRVB 114 paramètres de conversion 113 rééchantillonnage et compression 112 résultats inattendus pour les images monochromes 112 images bitmap qualité d’impression 467 images en niveaux de gris profils d'espaces colorimétriques 115 rééchantillonnage et compression 112 images Web prévisualisation prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 439, 440 Images, panneau de l'optimisation PDF 357 importation action sur les données d'un formulaire 350 bouton de données 238 données de formulaire 238 profil de contrôle en amont 520 impression voir aussi paramètres d'impression avec gestion des couleurs 472 commentaire 179, 194 composite 472 contenu des signets 463 couleurs en niveaux de gris 472 document contenant des calques 377, 459 documents PDF 456 épreuves en niveaux de gris 472 et protection renforcée 248 illustration transparente 498 impression silencieuse 247 langues asiatiques 62 livret 461 négatifs 468 non autorisée, protection 252, 258 options d'impression générales 456 plusieurs pages par feuille 457 porte-documents PDF 462 préférences de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 77 priorités de calque 459 prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 442 propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 78 zone sur une page 459 impression professionnelle conversion des couleurs 491 outils d'impression 476 retouche de filets maigres 497 impression, options dépendantes du périphérique 465 imprimante Adobe PDF configuration des propriétés 78 création d'un document PDF 76 création d'un format de page personnalisé 80 préférences d'impression 77 Imprimante en braille, création de texte 309 imprimante non PostScript, et papier 80 imprimante, gestion des couleurs 471 imprimantes de bureau, profils colorimétriques 443 Imprimer dans un fichier, commande (Windows) 458 incorporation police à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte 364 polices, seuil 113 recherche de polices dans un dossier 123 toutes les polices 113 vignettes 111 incorporation d'un index 395 Incorporation PostScript, groupe de propriétés 525 index, catalogue à propos 395 arrêt d'une constitution 397 automatisation des mises à jour 400 création 397 déplacement 400 exclusion d'éléments 397 fichiers Lisezmoi ou Ouvrez-moi 399 fichiers PDF version 1.0 398 inclusion des balises structurelles 398 inclusion des champs XMP 398 instructions multiplate-forme 396 instructions relatives aux propriétés du document 396 mise à jour 399 préférences 399 préparation d'un fichier PDF 396 propriétés personnalisées incluses 398 réduction de la taille 398 index, incorporé 395 informations clientèle pour le travail d'impression 542 informations de contact, spécification pour un travail d'impression 543 Informations PDF, propriétés du document 371 informations personnelles, suppression d'un document PDF 357 Informations sur la page, commande de conversion de pages Web 353 Informations sur la page, option 470 Informations sur le document, groupe de propriétés 525 informations sur le produit pour le travail d'impression 542 Informations sur un document 371 Infos, alerte 523 Insérer des pages, commande 133 Insérer le texte à l'emplacement du curseur, outil 183UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 563 Index insertion caractères spéciaux 364 texte, commentaire de modifications de texte 182 Insertion d'un objet, commande 134 installation Adobe Digital Editions 61 installation des polices 2 Instantané, outil copie de texte et d'images 159 instructions du site de production, création et suppression 546 intégrité du document, vérification 290 interactivité ajout d'un clip multimédia 403 ajout de boutons 231 Internet accès aux contenus multimédia 402 paramètres 39 paramètres pour la révision 166 Internet Explorer conversion de pages Web 98 ouverture d'un fichier PDF 33 interpolation 112 inventaire, contenu du rapport PDF 515 J japonais Voir aussi langues asiatiques japonais, texte ajout d'un commentaire 188 JavaScript action d'exécution d'un script JavaScript 351 avec contenu 3D 430 formulaire 210 clip multimédia 408 prise en charge de Web Capture 98 JDF (Job Definition Format), fichier association à un fichier PDF 539 préparation pour le flux de production JDF 546 jeton matériel, signature 275 jeu partiel de polices modification de texte 365 spécification d'un seuil 113 joboptions, emplacement par défaut des fichiers 110 joindre fichier à un document PDF 190 son 189 Joindre pour une révision par messagerie électronique, commande 168 JPEG 2000 calque de transparence 387 JPEG, image critère de recherche 392 L lancement d'une révision par messagerie 168 langue accessibilité 300 changement dans une vidéo 401 langues de droite à gauche 62 prise en charge 62 langues asiatiques conversion au format PDF (Windows) 62 conversion de pages Web au format PDF 98 impression sous forme d'images bitmap 62 incorporation 62 versions longueur seulement 123 langues non anglo-saxonnes prise en charge 62 lecteur d'écran définition des préférences 305 Voir accessibilité lecteur Flash 401 lecteur intégré Windows 401 Lecteur Windows Media 401 Lecteur, fichiers multimédia 401 Lecture audio 311 lecture d'article 39, 351 lecture en boucle d'un clip multimédia 409 lecture vidéo 406 Libellé, affichage et masquage 30 libellés de la barre d'outils 30 Lien 344 lien accessibilité 327 ajout d'une action 349 création 344 modification 344, 345 suppression 345, 357 utilisation 343 vue en 3D 425 lien Web, ouverture dans un nouveau document PDF 100, 101 liens soulignement 103 lieux géographiques, dans les fichiers PDF 385 ligne création 187 suppression 187 Lisez-moi, fichier 2 Liste de diffusion, modification 259 liste déroulante à propos des éléments de formulaire 207 formatage 227 options de calcul 226 liste des plaques de couleur, gestionnaire d'encres 475 LiveCycle Designer, création d'un fichier PDF 316 livret, impression 461 logiciel activation 1 enregistrement 1 téléchargements 4 Lotus Notes, affichage de PDFMaker 81 M Machine à écrire 363 Macromedia Breeze. Voir Acrobat ConnectNow maigri. Voir recouvrement Main, outil déplacement au sein des pages 49 sélection de texte 41 sélection temporaire 26 touche Bas 39 masquage arborescence du modèle 417 barre d'outils 29 barre des propriétés 31 commentaire 192 pièces d'un modèle 3D 419 signets 35 vignettes 36 masquage, couleurs 477 matière, ajout à un modèle 3D 412 menus, contextuels 27 message électronique ouverture de fichiers PDF 33 messagerie conversion au format PDF 65, 85 messagerie électronique envoi de commentaires 171 révision 166UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 564 Index mesure dimensions du modèle 3D 422 distance 386 outils géographiques 385 préférences de mesures géographiques 387 préférences pour un modèle 3D 423 mesures grilles 52 mesures 3D conversion en commentaires 429 mesures de distance 386 Métadonnées 525 métadonnées affichage 373 chargement d'un fichier XMP 374 création de propriétés de document 372 critère de recherche 392 Métadonnées d'objet, groupe de propriétés 525 Métadonnées du document, groupe de propriétés 525 Mettre la page suivante en antémémoire, option 41 Microsoft Office affichage de PDFMaker 81 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'Excel 84 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un fichier Outlook 85 création d'un fichier PDF à partir de Word ou de PowerPoint 85 Microsoft Word création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion 88 Microsoft, applications joindre un fichier Excel à un document 190 Visio 374 mise à jour 4 index incorporé 395 logiciel de l'application Adobe 60 mise à l'échelle pages pour la conversion Web 102 mise à l’échelle pages à imprimer 457 Mise en page, commande (Mac OS) 456 mise en page, paramètre 49 mise en surbrillance, options 509 mises à jour 4 Mode d'affichage Epaisseurs de trait 51 mode d'ouverture, définition 369 Mode de lecture 37 mode de rendu définition dans Acrobat Distiller 118 nom de profil 118 mode de rendu pour le contenu 3D 415 mode de sortie à propos 537 aperçu 486 création 537 exportation d'un profil ICC incorporé 538 extraction d'un mode incorporé 537 options 508 options d'aperçu 471 PDF/A ou PDF/X 525 PDF/A ou PDF/X (propriétés du profil ICC) 526 suppression 538 Mode FIPS 254 mode lecture 409 Mode plein écran 38, 42 modèle 3D ajout de ressources 412 paramètres d'activation 412 propriétés 411 modes de rendu 114, 454 modification article 354 en-tête et pied de page 135 image 361 interdite 252 lien 344, 345 mot avec retour à la ligne 361 objet 361 profil de contrôle en amont 526 texte 361, 362 vérification de contrôle en amont 527 Modification de la taille d'affichage 45 modification de texte, commentaire ajout d'une note à une annotation 183 suppression 184, 196 modifications perdues, récupération 150 Modifier la séquence, commande 383 Modifier le texte de remplacement 321 Modifier le texte du champ de formulaire, option de menu contextuel 321 module externe Adobe Store 4 gestion 61 Modules d'aplatissement des transparences prédéfinis, commande 504 modules externes Adobe Store 4 mot de passe conseils de création 277 définition des droits 254 exigé pour ouvrir un PDF 248 fonctions grisées 381 ouverture d'un document 252, 254 profil de contrôle en amont 521 restriction de l'accès 26 signature 274 suppression 257 Mot de passe d'accès aux droits 254 Mot de passe d'ouverture 254 Mot de passe utilisateur. Voir mot de passe mot-clé, critère de recherche 392 moteur de recherche communautaire 2 moteur de rendu 427 MP3, fichier. Voir clip multimédia MPEG, fichier. Voir clip multimédia multimédia ajout à des fichiers Word et PowerPoint 85 fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF 128 supprimer du document PDF 407 multimédia (existant) afficher les droits 402 options de lecture 402 N N pages par feuille, impression 457 navigateur affichage et masquage 31 navigateur Web affichage de fichiers PDF 38, 39 ouverture d'un fichier PDF 24, 27, 33 navigateur. Voir Navigateur Web navigation à l'aide des liens 37 article 39 calque 376, 378 raccourcis clavier 550, 551 signets 35 vignettes de page 36, 338 négatif, impression 468 Nettoyage, panneau de l'Optimisation PDF 357 Neutre. Voir densité neutre niveau de langage PostScript, compatibilité 153UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 565 Index Niveaux Adobe PostScript 474 noir intense, interdiction 493 noir, épreuve composite 472 Non défini, alerte 523 normes ISO 533 note 181 Nouvelle fenêtre, commande 51 numérisation compression des images 75 conseils 73 création d'un fichier PDF 70 numérisation de documents 65 Numériser au format PDF, commande 70 numérotation Voir aussi en-tête et pied de page numéros de page logiques 45 page 148 numérotation Bates ajout 136 ajout à des fichiers PDF 136 ajout de documents 137 recherche 137 suppression 138 O objet découpe 367 déplacement 366 informations sur la hauteur et la largeur 55 inversion 367 mise à l'échelle 366, 367 modification 367 modification d'un fichier source 368 positionnement dans un fichier PDF 365 recherche de données 388 rotation 365, 367 sélection 366 suppression 357 Objets à ignorer, panneau de l'Optimisation PDF 357 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) 134 opérateurs booléens à propos 392 recherche de texte 392 OPI (Open Prepress Interface) commentaires 117 groupe de propriétés 525 optimisation à propos 151 Affichage rapide des pages Web, option 357 amélioration des performances 151 contrôle de l'utilisation de l'espace 356 fichiers PDF 75, 357 Optimisation PDF 356 options 357 optimisation de la fréquence d'image 428 Optimisation PDF à propos 356 contrôle de l'utilisation de l'espace 356 options 357 Optimisation. Voir Optimisation PDF options d'optimisation de la numérisation 72 options d’émulsion 468 options de compression avec perte ou sans perte 357 configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 111 JPEG 154 méthodes 121 PNG 155 réduction de la taille de fichier 357 TIFF 155 Options de recherche avancées, panneau 392 ordre de lecture à propos 301 accessibilité 301 modification 321 outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture 319 vérification 321 Ordre de tabulation 339 Ordre des pages, impression de plusieurs pages par feuille 458 orientation mise en page 49 rotation 50 orthographique, projection des modèles 3D 416 outil impression professionnelle 476 prépresse 476 Outil Crayon 187 outil de mesure géographique 386 Outil Droite 187 Outil Ellipse 187 Outil Flèche 187 Outil Gomme 187 outil Instantané sélection de la zone d'impression 459 Outil Loupe 47 Outil Polygone 187 Outil Recadrer 143 Outil Rectangle 187 Outil Retouche de l'ordre de lecture 319 Outil Texte barré 184 Outil Texte souligné 184 Outil Zoom dynamique 45 outils 3D, outil 411 accès par touche unique 41 navigation 3D 414 sélection 26 outils de commentaire et d'annotation à propos 177 création d'un tampon personnalisé 186 outils de mesure 53 ouverture action 350 document protégé par mot de passe 252 lien Web 100, 101 lien Web dans un navigateur 353 lien Web dans un nouveau document 100, 101 mode plein écran 26, 368, 369 pièce jointe 37 Ouvrir l'organiseur, commande 57 Ouvrir les liens interdocument dans la même fenêtre 41 P page atteindre 350 configuration d'une action 350 déplacement 145 mise en page 49 orientation 49, 144 remplacement 146, 147 renumérotation 148 rotation 144 suppression 146 page d'introduction, dans un portedocuments PDF 129 Page entière, commande 46 page Web affichage d'informations 353 ajout à un document 101 ajout à un fichier PDF 99 ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page 102UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 566 Index ajout de toutes les pages liées 101 arrière-plan 103 balises et accessibilité 315 conversion au format Adobe PDF 352 conversion au format PDF 65 conversion au format PDF dans Acrobat 100 conversion dans Internet Explorer 98 conversion des images 103 langues asiatiques, conversion au format PDF 98 paramètres de conversion 102 paramètres de conversion PDF 102 réorganisation d'une page Web convertie 352 retour à la ligne du texte 103 page, déclencheur 351 pages affichage 34 impression 464 logiques 45 mise à l'échelle 457 numérisation 69 Pages hors format, paramètre prédéfini PDF 108 Pages par feuille, option 458 Pages, groupe de propriétés 525 Panneau Articles 39 panneau de navigation ancrage 31 changement d'orientation 32 définition 24, 31 options 32 raccourcis clavier 552 panneau de visualisation, définition 24 panneau flottant 31 Panneau Signets 35 Panoramique et zoom, commande 47 par défaut paramètre de zoom 41 paramètre d’aplatissement prédéfini, création et modification 504 paramètres Adobe PDF 110 avancés 116 dossier de contrôle 107 options de couleur 114 polices 113 Paramètres Adobe PDF. Voir paramètres Adobe PDF paramètres Adobe PDF ignorer 120 paramètres d'impression avancés 464 options générales 456 PostScript 465 repères et fonds perdus 496 sortie 472 paramètres de conversion affichage 103 fichiers image 113 imprimante Adobe PDF 76 pages Web 102 personnalisation 110 Paramètres de conversion PDF 108 paramètres de conversions paramètres prédéfinis 108 paramètres de couleur Voir aussi gestion des couleurs conversions des couleurs 453 espace de travail 450, 451 modes de rendu 453, 454 paramètres prédéfinis 450 personnalisation 450 pour les applications Adobe 436 règles de gestion des couleurs 451 synchronisation avec d’autres applications 435 paramètres de lecture 409 paramètres PDF prédéfinis 108 paramètres prédéfinis aplatissement 504 aplatissement de la transparence 502 conversion des fichiers 108 exportation PDF 108 paramètres prédéfinis d’exportation PDF à propos de 108 création 108 parcours de visualisation, retour en arrière 36 partage d'un porte-documents PDF 130 partage de fichiers 160 partage du bureau 162 Participation à une révision par messagerie 169 pause, insertion dans une séquence de traitement par lot 383 PDF à partir de pages numérisées 69 à partir de pages Web 98 affichage des informations 371 approbation 289 association à un fichier JDF 539 certification 291 comparaison 40 correction d'erreurs 529 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner 69 création d’un fichier PDF à partir de plusieurs fichiers 69 création. Voir création d'un fichier PDF déplacement 145 enregistrement d’une copie 149 envoi au système de production 548 formulaires. Voir formulaire fractionnement 145 impression 464 liste des documents récents 41 métadonnées 373 modification d'un fichier signé 296 navigation 36 ouverture 33 préparation pour le flux de production JDF 546 protection 252, 381, 521 PDF avec contenu enrichi, paramètres Adobe PDF 109 PDF, fichier transparence 498 PDF, fichiers prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 440, 444 PDF, révision affichage des commentaires 191 ajout de réviseurs 175 annotation du texte pour modification 182 exportation des commentaires 197 importation des commentaires 197 mise à jour de votre profil 176 suivi 194 PDF/A enregistrement d'un fichier PDF sous 534 mode d'affichage 37 paramètres prédéfinis 108 suppression des informations du fichier 535 vérification d'un fichier 535 PDF/E suppression des informations du fichier 535 vérification d'un fichier 535 PDF/X conformité des fichiers PostScript 117 conversion de fichiers 117UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 567 Index enregistrement d'un fichier PDF sous 534 paramètres prédéfinis 108 suppression des informations du fichier 535 vérification d'un fichier 535 PDF/X, fichiers non conformes 118 PDF/X, PDF/E et PDF/A 533 PDFMaker à propos 80 affichage dans Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes 81 conversion d'un fichier AutoCAD 92 conversion de documents Microsoft Office 65 conversion de fichiers Microsoft Office 81 conversion de pages Web 98 didacticiel 7 PDX (.pdx), fichier 396 Perception 114 performances. Voir optimisation Périmètre, outil 53 périphérique d’entrée, profils 445, 447 périphérique de sortie, profils 443, 445, 447 Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF 120 personnalisation Voir aussi préférences paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF 110 tampon 184 Personnalisées, propriétés du document 372 photocomposition trames de demi-teintes 467 photographies, compression 121 Photoshop. Voir Adobe Photoshop pièce jointe création 348 fichier source 94 glissement 348 ouverture 37 recherche 349, 388 sécurisation 268 suppression 348 pied de page ajout 134 ajout d'une numérotation Bates 136 ajout lors de la conversion d'une page Web 102 modification 135 suppression 136 plein écran, affichage diaporama 368 fermeture 38, 41 lecture d'un document 38 ouverture d'un document 26 Plusieurs fenêtres 51 Plusieurs pages par feuille, option 457 PMI mode de rendu 427 points de chapitre dans une vidéo 406 police incorporation avec l'outil Retouche de texte 364 incorporée au fichier PDF 122 Police asiatique, téléchargement 465, 466 Police CID (Type 2), conservation des indications 465 Police, groupe de propriétés 524 polices Voir aussi langues asiatiques affichage des informations 372 affichage des résultats du contrôle en amont 512 asiatiques, téléchargement 62 commentaire 179 incorporation dans le fichier PDF 123 modification 362 Multiple Master 122 noms PostScript 124 paramètres Adobe PDF 113 propriétés du document 372 recours à un jeu partiel 113, 122 substitution 122, 123 Polices longueur seulement Voir polices asiatiques polygone création 187 suppression 187 Porte-documents PDF barre d'outils 25 ouverture 24 zone de travail 25 porte-documents PDF à propos 125 affichage des informations détaillées sur un fichier 127 ajout de fichiers 128 aperçu des fichiers dans 127 création 128 création à partir d'une archive de messagerie 87 didacticiel 17 disposition 129 en-tête 129 envoi par messagerie 130 extraction de fichiers 130 fichiers multimédia dans 128 impression 462 modification 128 modification d'un fichier composant 128 modification des fichiers 130 organisation des fichiers dans 129 page d'introduction 129 partage 130 spécification des détails du fichier 129 spécification des modèles de couleurs 129 suppression de fichiers de 130 tri des fichiers dans 127 porte-documents. Voir porte-documents PDF positionnement d'un objet 365 Poste de travail, recherche d'un fichier PDF 56, 59 PostScript, fichier dénomination 106 dépendant du périphérique 458 dossier de correspondance 116 transfert FTP 106 variation de la compression 120 PostScript, fichiers configuration des paramètres 465 PPD, fichier conversion de fichier 153 PPD, fichiers recouvrement et 478 préférences accès à la boîte de dialogue 27 Acrobat Distiller 105 Acrobat.com 163 Affichage 41 aspect d'une signature numérique 285 Contenu 3D 427 Contrôle en amont 508 enregistrement automatique 150 formulaire 205 indexation avec Catalog 399 mesures, données 2D 54 Mesures, modèle 3D 423 ouverture 27 panneau Documents 41 panneau Générales 41UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 568 Index recherche 394 révision 166 Préférences d'affichage 41, 142 préférences de documents 41 Préférences générales 41 prépresse outils 476 prépresse, options du Gestionnaire d’encres 494 présentation configuration 368 préférences 41 prévisualisation couleurs. Voir épreuvage à l’écran Priorités de calque, options d'impression 459 profil de contrôle en amont à propos 506, 517 accès limité 521 affichage des conditions et des règles 526 catégories de propriétés 524 catégories de règles 518 catégories de vérifications 527 création 519, 524 importation et exportation 520 protection 521 verrouillage 521 profil de couleur gestion lors de la conversion des couleurs 493 profil ICC Voir aussi profils colorimétriques 445 enregistrement local 508 exportation à partir du mode de sortie 538 extraction 508 profils colorimétriques à propos 445 attribution et suppression dans des documents 448 conversion 449 installation 447 messages d’avertissement 451 pour les images importées 437, 438, 439 pour les imprimantes de bureau 443 pour les moniteurs 446, 447 profils de document. Voir profils colorimétriques profils de moniteur 445, 446, 447 profils ICC incorporation aux images 114 personnalisés 115 Profondeur, image 524 Programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe 1 Prologue, fichier 116 proportions, conservation dans les clips 407 propriété calque PDF 377 propriétés film 410 groupe de vérifications de contrôle en amont 523 imprimante Adobe PDF 78 vidéo 409 Propriétés d'image du contour, groupe de propriétés 525 Propriétés d'image du fond, groupe de propriétés 524 Propriétés d'image générales, groupe de propriétés 525 propriétés de document création de métadonnées 372 objet de données incorporé 373 panneau Description 371 polices 372 protection 372 propriétés de la signature ajout d'un tampon temporel 287 personnalisation à l'aide de valeurs de base 293 Propriétés du calque, boîte de dialogue 377 Propriétés du calque, commande 459 propriétés du document avancées 372 Informations PDF 371 personnalisées 372 personnalisées incluses dans les index 398 recherche 388 URL de base 372 vue initiale 369, 370 Propriétés du document, boîte de dialogue 369, 371, 373 protection accès limité aux documents PDF 254 accessibilité 300, 328 algorithme de clé RSA 274 avertissements 247 certification d'un document 291 clip multimédia 408 dossier de contrôle 107 enveloppe 268 impression silencieuse 247 liste de diffusion 259 méthode 252 mode FIPS 254 modification (protection par certificat par défaut) 259 mots de passe 78, 104, 252 pièce jointe 268 présentation des signatures numériques 284 profil de contrôle en amont 521 stratégie 61, 266 suppression des restrictions 257 traitement par lot 381 protection par certificat par défaut, chiffrement d'un fichier 257 Protection renforcée emplacements privilégiés 247 protection renforcée avertissements 248 protection, jeton matériel 275 Proximité, recherche 392 Publications numériques 61 Q qualité d'image. Voir compression Qualité de presse, paramètres Adobe PDF 109 Qualité supérieure, paramètre prédéfini PDF 108 qualité vidéo modification 405 QuickTime, fichier. Voir clip multimédia R raccourcis clavier 39, 308 fermeture du mode plein écran 41 raccourcis par touche unique 41 Racine identique, recherche 392 rapport contrôle en amont 514 inventaire PDF 515 Rapport du flux de contenu PDF, groupe de propriétés 526 rapport sur l'ajout des balises 318 RealOne, fichier. Voir clip multimédia RealPlayer 401 recadrage des pages 142 Récents, liste des documents 41 recherche affichage des résultats 371 booléenne 392UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 569 Index commentaire 195 index 395 options de recherche avancées 392 par propriétés du document 392 plusieurs documents 390 préférences 394 Recherche, barre d'outils 388 Rechercher des commentaires, commande 195 recouvrement à propos de 477 contrôle de la densité d’encre 494 engraissement, compensation 483 étalement 477 image importée 483 maigri 483 objets vectoriels sur images 483 pages spécifiques dans un document 480 présence 475 recouvrement réservé 483 sans recouvrement foncé 482 séquence ou ordre 485 seuil 482 tons directs foncés en tant que noir 482 utilisation de noir ou de noir intense 483 valeurs CMJN et limites de tolérance 482 recouvrement prédéfini appliquer à des pages spécifiques 480 enregistrement et chargement 479 recouvrement réservé 483 recouvrement, valeur définie dans Acrobat Distiller 118 rectangle création 187 suppression 187 récupération des modifications perdues 150 redimensionnement agrandissement et réduction 45 commentaire sous forme de note 181 modèles 3D placés 411 page 45 vignettes 48 redistribution à propos de 309 correction à l'aide du panneau Contenu 329 Redressement, option 73 réduction de la taille du fichier 146, 151, 356 Registre, option 509 réinitialisation action de formulaire 351 barres d'outils 30 Réinitialiser le formulaire, bouton 237 Relecture, annotations et commentaires 182 remplacement filet maigre 497 page 146 remplissage automatique à propos 246 préférences 205 rendu à propos 407 configuration système requise 409 rendu en 3D, modes 416 renommer calque 377 fichier PDF 149 Renumérotation des pages 148 renvoi de commentaires de révision 169 réorganisation des calques 377 repère changement de couleur 53 positionnement des champs de formulaire 211 règle 52 repère d'impression, espace requis pour l'impression 496 Repère de règle, création 52 Repères de marge, option 470 Repères de montage, option 470 Repères de rognage, option 470 résolution Voir aussi sous-échantillonnage et trames de demi-teintes affichage des pages 41 configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 111 image 524 résolution des problèmes de contrôle en amont 506 ressources en ligne 4 restauration barres d'outils 30 fichiers 150 restriction pièce jointe 250 URL 250 restrictions, suppression 258 Résumé des commentaires 194 Rétablir, commande 150 retenue (recouvrement) 481, 484 retouche, outils 361 Retoucher les filets maigres, outil 497 retour à la ligne du texte, conversion de pages Web 103 retour forcé, insertion 364 réunion en ligne, démarrage 162 réunion, initiation 162 révision sélection d'une application de messagerie 166 révision d'un document invitation d'autres réviseurs 175 invitation d'un réviseur 168 affichage de la liste des commentaires 192 commentaires sur une vidéo 407 préférences 166 réponse à des commentaires 193 révision des commentaires d'un autre réviseur 181 suivi d'une révision 173 révision d'un document PDF utilisation du dispositif de suivi 173 révision de documents ajout ou modification de l'échéance 175 enregistrement d'une copie avec commentaires 174 lancement d'une révision par messagerie 168 lancement d'une révision partagée 167, 175 mettre fin à une révision 175 outils utilisés 177 participation à une révision 169 rejoindre 172 Voir aussi révision gérée révision gérée 163 révision par messagerie à propos 164, 165 participation 169 suivi d'une révision 173 révision par messagerie électronique lancement 168 révision partagée à propos 164 didacticiel 10 initiation 167 méthodes de diffusion 165 participation 169 suivi de documents 173 RLE, compression 121 Rognage, zone 45UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 570 Index Rotation d'une page 144 rotation d'une page changement d'affichage 50 Rotation de pages, commande 50 Rouvrir les documents à la dernière page affichée, option 41 RSA, protection 274 RSS, abonnement 174 RVB, profils d'espace colorimétrique 115 S Saturation 114 saut de ligne 364 saut de ligne, insertion 364 saut de paragraphe, insertion 364 Section 508 (loi américaine). Voir accessibilité sécurité gestion des paramètres 61 protection 247 suppression des restrictions 258 sécurité d'accès Internet pour les contenus multimédia 402 sélection image 159 objets 366 tableaux 158 texte 157 Sélectionner tout, commande 49, 158 séparation des couleurs à propos de 473 aperçu à l'écran 488 couleurs quadri et tons directs 474 enregistrement sous PostScript 475 gestion de l’engraissement 483 limites de couverture d'encre 488 paramétrage des valeurs de densité d’encre 484 production 474 séparation. Voir séparation des couleurs Séparations hôte 474 Séparations In-RIP, option (recouvrement) 478 séquence audio. Voir clip multimédia séquence d’encre (ordre de recouvrement) 485 séquence de traitement par lot ajout de pauses interactives 383 création 383 modification 382 séquence vidéo. Voir clip multimédia Série de commentaires, réponse 193 serveur réseau, configuration pour la révision 166 service Web de cartographie, copie des données du lieu 386 services Internet, abonnement 174 Seuil d'incorporation 113 Signalisation des modifications de texte, outil 183 signature vérification de l'intégrité du fichier PDF 290 signature manuscrite 289 signature numérique à propos des éléments de formulaire 207 ajout 289 ajout d'un tampon temporel 287 ajout d'une signature manuscrite 285 authentification 260 champ 289 didacticiel 21 identification numérique 274, 275 modification des champs 226 recherche 388 signature de certification 291 signification des icônes 293, 294 validation 293, 294 signatures sécurité 284 validation 293 signatures numériques à propos 284 utilisation des tablettes graphiques 288 Signatures, panneau 296 signet à propos 340 accessibilité 300 affichage et masquage 35 aspect 340 balisage, organisation d'une page Web 352 balisé 343 calque PDF 378 création 340 destination 340 génération 153 gestion 340 impression des pages associées 463 masquage après utilisation 36 navigation 35 recherche 388, 392 recherche du signet actif 35 suppression 342, 357 vue 3D 425 signet balisé organisation d'une page Web 352 suppression 147 signets création à partir d'une page Web 102 Signets, ouverture du panneau 35 Simuler l’encre noire, option 442 Simuler la surimpression, option 467, 472 Simuler le papier blanc, option 442 site Web organisation de plusieurs PDF 395 paramètres pour la révision 166 restriction 250 son, ajout à un document PDF 403 soulignement des liens 103 sous-échantillonnage voir aussi compression réduction de la taille du fichier 357 Sous-échantillonner les images, option de numérisation 75 spécifications du support, définition pour un travail d'impression 544 Specifications for Web Offset Publications. Voir SWOP, norme stratégie à propos 266 application à un document 270 chiffrement de fichier 266 création 267 suppression d'un document 271 Stratégie utilisateur 266 structure du document, suppression 359 style de recouvrement. Voir recouvrements prédéfinis Style, option (repères et fonds perdus) 470 Substitution de police dans un texte copié 157 suivi état des fichiers convertis 105 Suivi d’un document PDF, révision 169 suppression annotation 184, 187, 196 article 354 commentaire 182, 184, 196 contenu confidentiel. Voir Outils de biffure destination 347 données d'autres applications 360UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 571 Index données de formulaire 243 en-tête et pied de page 136 informations masquées 278 informations PDF/A des fichiers 535 informations PDF/X des fichiers 535 informations PDF/XEdes fichiers 535 lien 345, 357 mode de sortie 538 objet et données 357 page 146 signet 342, 357 vignette 338 vignette de page 338 Suppression de l'arrière-plan, option 73 Suppression des ombres sur les contours, option 73 Suppression du halo, option 73 Supprimer des pages, commande 146 surimpression Voir aussi recouvrement aperçu 471 conservation des paramètres 116 simulation 467, 472 Surligneur, outil 184 SWOP, norme 484 T Table des matières. Voir signet tableau copie 158 correction de balises 334 définition du contenu 320 tablette graphique signature d'un fichier PDF 288 taille de fichier contrôle 356 optimisation 151 réduction 146, 151 Taille de fichier minimale, paramètres Adobe PDF 109 taille du fichier vignettes de page 112 Taille écran, commande. Voir Page entière, commande Taille réelle, commande 46 tampon ajout à un document 184 déplacement et redimensionnement 184 dynamique 184 modification 184 personnalisation 184 tampon temporel ajout à une signature numérique 287 dans les signatures numériques 287 validation du certificat 296 technologie d'assistance et enregistrement automatique 150 téléchargement document depuis le Web 39 téléchargement page par page 39, 41, 75 téléchargements mises à jour, modules externes et versions d’essai 4 texte accessible, conversion 156 ajout 363 asiatique. Voir langues asiatiques copie interdite 157 copier-coller 157 exportation 153 modification 361, 362 non reconnaissable 157 numérisé 157 prévention des changements de couleur 114 recherche 388 texte accessible à propos 309 comparaison au texte standard 156 texte alternatif. Voir texte de remplacement texte avec retour à la ligne 361 Texte barré 182 Texte barré, à supprimer 182 texte de remplacement à propos 299 ajout 325 ajout d'abréviations 333 ajout dans le panneau Balises 332 texte de remplacement, conversion de document 156 Texte libre, outil. Voir Zone de texte, outil Texte standard, comparaison au texte accessible 156 Texte surligné (annotation) 182 Texte, groupe de propriétés 524 thaï, langue 62 tiret cadratin, insertion 364 tiret long, insertion 364 tiret, insertion 364 tons directs conversion en couleurs quadrichromiques 494, 495 encres spécialisées 484 équivalents CMJN 494, 495 prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 437 tons directs Lab 495 touches d'accès rapide uniques 309 trait épaississement 497 trait d'union, insertion 364 traitement par lot présentation 380 arrêt 381 définition d'une séquence de commandes 382 dossier actif 535 sélection de fichiers 383 tramage 483 trame de demi-teinte groupe de propriétés 525 trames de demi-teintes spécification 467 Transfert FTP de fichiers PostScript 106 transformations par souris 235 transition 368 transition de page paramètre 370 transition entre les pages affichage en plein écran 368 diaporama 368 transparence Voir aussi aplatissement aplatissement, à propos 357 aplatissement, options 505 aplatissements prédéfinis 502 damier, affichage 45 espace de fusion 491 impression et enregistrement 498 Transparence, panneau de l'Optimisation PDF 357 travail d'impression informations clientèle, définition 542 informations de contact, définition 543 informations produit, définition 542 préparation pour envoi à la production 546 spécifications du support, définition 544 spécifications, affichage 540 spécifications, définition 541UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 PRO 572 Index tri des commentaires 192 Type 1, police 123 Type 32, police 123 type de fichier, multimédia 401 U UCR (Under Color Removal) 115 Une seule page, mise en page 49 Unicode, signature numérique 274 URL restriction 250 Utilisation optimale des octets 39 Utiliser uniquement des modules externes certifiés, option 41 V valeurs de base propriétés d'une signature numérique 293 valeurs par défaut vue en 3D 425 validation certificat de tampon temporel 296 champ de formulaire 229 période de validité d'une signature 262 signature 293, 294 validation des signatures à long terme 294 variation 482 vérification affichage dans un profil 526 cohérence entre les fichiers PDF et JDF 547 description dans le contrôle en amont 523 fichier PDF/A 535 fichier PDF/X 535 fichiers PDF/E 535 Vérification complète, option 303 vérification de contrôle en amont affichage 526 ajout à un profil 527, 528 création 528 modification 527 vérification orthographique ajout d'un mot au dictionnaire 196 en cours de frappe 196 formulaire et commentaire 196 Vérification rapide 302 verrouillage barres d'outils 30 calque PDF 376 commentaire 181 protection d'un document 254 Verrouillage d'un document PDF, mots de passe 252 Verrouillage, option action 349 Verrouillé, option mode de sortie 509 version d'essai 4 versions d’essai 4 Versions PDF, options 95, 111 vidéo ajout de commentaires 407 définir des points de chapitre 406 vidéo (contenu existant) définir les propriétés 409 vidéo, image d'emplacement 406 vidéo, lecture 406 Vidéo, outil 405 vietnamien, langue 62 vignette incorporation 112 vignette de page affichage 36 création 338 déplacement et copie de page 145 navigation 338 passage à une page 36 redimensionnement de l'affichage 48 remplacement de page 147 suppression 338 vignette incorporée, suppression 359 Vignette. Voir vignette de page visibilité, calque 377 Visio affichage des données d'objet 374 création d'un fichier PDF 90 définition de calques pour leur conversion au format PDF 91 vue commentaires dans un modèle 3D 428 Vue initiale, propriétés du document 369, 372 vues définition pour le contenu 3D 425 W WAV, fichier. Voir clip multimédia WGS 1984 387 WMF, format de fichier 498 WMV, fichier. Voir clip multimédia Word, document ajout d'informations 83 X XIF, recherche de métadonnées 388 XML, informations sur le code source du document 373 XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) 373 XMP, format indexation de champs 398 métadonnées 373, 388 Z ZIP, compression 121 zone de document, définition dans Acrobat Distiller 118 zone de liste, à propos des éléments de formulaire 207 Zone de texte 188 zone de texte formatage 227 Zone de travail, personnalisation 27 Zone, outil 53 zoom affichage 45 changement de facteur 45 fenêtre Panoramique et zoom 47 outil Loupe 47 outil Zoom dynamique 45 paramètre par défaut 41 sélection temporaire d'un outil 26 UTILISATION D’ADOBE ACROBAT 9 STANDARD ® ®Copyright © 2009 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Utilisation d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard pour Windows® If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement, this guide, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license. Except as permitted by any such license, no part of this guide may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement. The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide. Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law. The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner. Please be sure to obtain any permission required from the copyright owner. Any references to company names in sample templates or images are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe Garamond, the Adobe PDF logo, Acrobat, Buzzword, Creative Suite, Distiller, Flash, FrameMaker, FreeHand, Illustrator, InDesign, LiveCycle, Photoshop, PostScript, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Apple, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, OpenType, Windows, and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the US and other countries. Helvetica and Times are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. ITC Zapf Dingbats is a registered trademark of International Typeface Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. This Work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution Non-Commercial 3.0 License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/3.0/ The Spelling portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology. © Copyright 1989, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Merriam-Webster Inc. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2003, 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2003, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Dr. Lluis de Yzaguirre I Maura. © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv © Copyright 1990, 1996 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990, 2004 IDE a.s. © Copyright 1990, 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1992 Hachette / Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1991 Text & Satz Datentechnik © Copyright 1991 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc. © Copyright 2004 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. © Copyright 1990 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. © Copyright 1993, 1994, 1995 Russicon Company Ltd. © Copyright 1995 All Rights Reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers, Inc. Burlington, New Jersey USA. This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security, Inc. Portions include technology used under license from Autonomy, and are copyrighted. This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/). Portions © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Incorporated 1967, 1988. Flash CS3 video compression and decompression is powered by On2 TrueMotion video technology. © 1992-2005 On2 Technologies, Inc. All Rights Reserved. http://www.on2.com. This product includes software developed by the OpenSymphony Group (http://www.opensymphony.com/). Speech compression and decompression technology licensed from Nellymoser, Inc. (www.nellymoser.com). Sorenson Spark™ video compression and decompression technology licensed from Sorenson Media, Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Portions copyright Focoltone Colour System. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, California 95110, USA. Notice to U.S. Government End Users. The Software and Documentation are “Commercial Items,” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software Documentation,” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including, if appropriate, the provisions of Executive Order 11246, as amended, Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 (38 USC 4212), and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended, and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60-1 through 60-60, 60-250, and 60-741. The affirmative action clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference.iii Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Mise en route Activation et enregistrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Aide et assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Services, téléchargements et extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Nouveautés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Didacticiels de mise en route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Chapitre 2 : Espace de travail Notions de base sur la zone de travail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Personnalisation de la zone de travail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Affichage des pages PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Ajustement de l'affichage des documents PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Grilles, repères et mesures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Organiseur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Maintenance du logiciel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Langues non anglo-saxonnes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Acrobat sous Mac OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Chapitre 3 : Création d'un fichier PDF Présentation de la création d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Création d'un fichier PDF simple avec Acrobat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Utilisation de l'imprimante Adobe PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Conversion de pages Web au format PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Création d'un fichier PDF avec Acrobat Distiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Polices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Chapitre 4 : Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Combinaison de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Autres options de combinaison de fichiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Réorganisation des pages d'un document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Chapitre 5 : Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Enregistrement d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Exportation d'un fichier PDF vers un autre format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Réutilisation de contenu PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Chapitre 6 : Collaboration Partage de fichiers et collaboration en temps réel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Préparation d'une révision de fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Lancement d'une révision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Participation à une révision de document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD iv Sommaire Suivi et gestion des révisions de fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Gestion des commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Importation et exportation de commentaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Flux de tâches d'approbation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Chapitre 7 : Formulaires Formulaires - Concepts de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Création et diffusion de formulaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Comportement des champs de formulaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Définition des boutons d'action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Publication interactive de formulaires Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Chapitre 8 : Protection Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Sélection d'une méthode de protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Protection par mot de passe d'un document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Protection par certificat d'un document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Configuration d'une stratégie de protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Création ou obtention d'une identification numérique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Suppression du contenu confidentiel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Chapitre 9 : Signatures numériques Signatures numériques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Signature d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Authentification d’une signature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Chapitre 10 : Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Fonctions d'accessibilité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Vérification de l'accessibilité d'un document PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Création d'un fichier PDF accessible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Chapitre 11 : Modification d'un document PDF Vignettes et signets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Liens et pièces jointes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Actions et écriture de scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Conversion de pages Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Modification de texte et d'objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Configuration d'une présentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Propriétés et métadonnées de document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Calques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Utilisation d'un document PDF géographique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD v Sommaire Chapitre 12 : Recherche et indexation Recherche dans des fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Création d'un index PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Chapitre 13 : Multimédia et modèles 3D Multimédia et fichiers PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Manipulation de modèles 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Chapitre 14 : Gestion des couleurs Définition de la gestion des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Homogénéité des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Gestion des couleurs des images importées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Vérification des couleurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour l’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Utilisation des profils colorimétriques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Paramètres de couleur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Chapitre 15 : Impression Tâches d’impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Autres méthodes d'impression d'un fichier PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Impression d'impression personnalisés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Paramètres d'impression avancés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Chapitre 16 : Raccourcis clavier Raccourcis clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3991 Chapitre 1 : Mise en route Avant de commencer à vous servir de votre logiciel, prenez le temps de lire la présentation relative à l'activation et aux nombreuses ressources à votre disposition. Vous avez accès à des vidéos d'explication, des modules externes, des modèles, des communautés d'utilisateurs, des séminaires, des didacticiels, des flux RSS, et bien plus encore. Activation et enregistrement Activation de la licence (Windows) Lors du processus d'installation, votre logiciel Adobe peut tenter de contacter Adobe afin d'achever le processus d'activation de la licence. Lors de cette opération, aucune donnée personnelle ne sera transmise. Pour plus de détails sur l'activation du produit, consultez le site Web d'Adobe à l'adresse http://www.adobe.com/go/activation_fr. L'activation d'une licence monoutilisateur prend en charge deux ordinateurs. Par exemple, vous pouvez installer le produit sur un ordinateur de bureau de votre lieu de travail et sur un ordinateur portable utilisé à votre domicile. Si vous souhaitez installer le logiciel sur un troisième ordinateur, vous devez le désactiver au préalable sur l'un des deux autres ordinateurs. Sélectionnez Aide > Désactiver. Enregistrement Enregistrez votre produit afin de bénéficier, gratuitement, d'une aide à l'installation, de notifications de mises à jour, ainsi que d'autres services. ? Pour procéder à l'enregistrement, suivez les instructions affichées dans la boîte de dialogue d'enregistrement qui s'affiche après l'installation et l'activation du logiciel. Si vous n'enregistrez pas votre produit immédiatement, vous pouvez le faire à tout moment en sélectionnant Aide > Enregistrement. Programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe (Windows) Après un certain nombre d'utilisations de votre logiciel Adobe, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche pour vous inviter à participer au programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe. Si vous accepter d'y participer, des données relatives à votre utilisation du logiciel seront envoyées à Adobe. Aucune information personnelle n'est enregistrée ou transmise. Le programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe a pour unique objectif de recueillir des informations sur les fonctions et les outils du logiciel que vous utilisez et selon quelle fréquence. Vous pouvez rejoindre ou quitter le programme d'amélioration à tout moment : • Pour participer, choisissez Aide > Options du programme d'amélioration, puis cliquez sur Oui. • Pour mettre fin à votre participation, choisissez Aide > Options du programme d'amélioration, puis cliquez sur Non, je ne souhaite pas participer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 2 Mise en route Assistant de personnalisation Adobe L'assistant de personnalisation d'Adobe 9 aide les professionnels de l'informatique à mieux contrôler le déploiement d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard et d'Adobe Reader®. Grâce à lui, vous pouvez personnaliser le programme d'installation et les fonctions de l'application avant son déploiement. L'assistant de personnalisation est un utilitaire téléchargeable gratuitement. Grâce son interface graphique avec le programme d'installation Windows pour Acrobat, l'assistant de personnalisation permet aux administrateurs informatiques d'effectuer les opérations suivantes : • Optimiser le comportement du programme d'installation :installation silencieuse, prédéfinition des numéros de série, redémarrage, installation multilingue et choix de configurations personnalisées • Personnaliser les préférences clés de l'application : désactivation des mises à jour automatiques, ajout et définition d'options de travail par défaut et personnalisation des paramètres de collaboration et de sécurité • Empêcher la modification de certaines préférences par l'utilisateur Lisez-moi Le disque d'installation peut contenir un fichier Lisezmoi (Windows) ou Ouvrez-moi (Mac OS) relatif au logiciel. Ouvrez le fichier pour consulter des informations importantes sur des rubriques telles que les suivantes : • Configuration système • Installation (dont la désinstallation du logiciel) • Activation et enregistrement • Support technique • Informations juridiques Aide et assistance Aide communautaire L'aide communautaire est un environnement intégré sur adobe.com offrant un accès au contenu créé par la communauté et géré par Adobe et les experts du secteur. Les utilisateurs y fournissent des commentaires et des évaluations qui peuvent vous orienter vers les réponses souhaitées. L'aide communautaire s'appuie sur un certain nombre de ressources, notamment : • Vidéos, didacticiels, conseils et techniques, blogs, articles et exemples à l'intention des développeurs et des ingénieurs. • L'aide en ligne complète du produit, mise à jour régulièrement par l'équipe Adobe chargée de la documentation. • Tout le reste du contenu se trouve sur Adobe.com, notamment les articles de la base de connaissances, les téléchargements et les mises à jour, Developer Connection, et bien plus encore. Utilisez le champ de recherche dans l'aide de votre produit pour accéder directement à l'aide communautaire ou rendez-vous sur www.adobe.fr/support/acrobat pour accéder à la page d'aide et de support du produit, un portail menant à tous les contenus d'aide concernant votre logiciel. Les sites que le moteur de recherche de l'aide communautaire permet d'explorer sont spécifiquement choisis et leur qualité est vérifiée par Adobe et les experts de la communauté Adobe. Ces experts veillent également à ce que les premiers résultats d'une recherche renvoient à différents types de contenus, dont des références à l'aide en ligne du produit.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 3 Mise en route Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'aide communautaire, voir http://help.adobe.com/en_US/CommunityHelp/. Une vidéo présentant l'aide communautaire est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4117_xp_fr. Aide du produit Adobe fournit un guide complet sur l'utilisation d'Acrobat sous la forme d'une aide en ligne et d'un document PDF. Lorsque vous effectuez une recherche dans l'aide communautaire, les rubriques de l'aide en ligne sont répertoriés dans les résultats. Si vous souhaitez consulter ou effectuer une recherche dans l'aide en ligne du produit uniquement, vous pouvez y accéder en cliquant sur le lien Aide du produit situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la page d'aide et d'assistance. Veillez à sélectionner l'option Ce système d'aide uniquement sur la page d'aide avant de lancer votre recherche. Le menu Aide au sein du produit ouvre une aide locale, sous-ensemble du contenu disponible dans l'aide en ligne du produit. Comme cette aide locale n'est pas aussi complète et à jour que l'aide en ligne, Adobe recommande d'utiliser la version PDF de cette dernière si vous souhaitez la consulter hors connexion. Vous pouvez télécharger la version PDF de l'aide en ligne complète en deux endroits : • La page d'aide et d'assistance du produit (dans le coin supérieur droit de la page) • L'aide sur le Web (en haut de l'interface d'aide) Pour plus d'informations sur l'accès à l'aide du produit, http://help.adobe.com/en_US/CommunityHelp/. Ressources d'assistance Consultez le site Web d’assistance technique d’Adobe, à l’adresse www.adobe.com/fr/support, pour en savoir plus sur les options d’assistance technique gratuites et payantes. Services, téléchargements et extras Vous pouvez optimiser votre produit en y intégrant divers services, modules externes et extensions. Vous pouvez également télécharger des exemples et autres éléments qui vous aideront dans votre travail. Services créatifs en ligne Adobe Adobe® Creative Suite® 4 s’enrichit de nouvelles fonctionnalités en ligne qui vous permettent d’exploiter toute la puissance du Web à partir de votre Bureau. Vous pourrez utiliser ces fonctionnalités pour vous mettre en contact et collaborer avec des membres de la communauté, tout en tirant le meilleur parti de vos outils Adobe. Extrêmement puissants, les services créatifs en ligne vous permettent de réaliser un vaste éventail de tâches, de la mise en correspondance de couleurs à l’échange de données en direct. Ces services s’intègrent de manière transparente aux applications bureautiques afin que vous puissiez rapidement améliorer les flux de production existants. Certains services offrent des fonctionnalités complètes ou partielles même lorsque vous êtes hors ligne. Consultez le site adobe.com pour en savoir plus sur les services disponibles. Certaines applications de la suite Creative Suite 4 intègrent les fonctions suivantes : Panneau Kuler™ Créez, partagez et découvrez des thèmes de couleurs en ligne. Adobe® ConnectNow Travaillez en étroite collaboration avec des groupes de travail dispersés sur le Web, et partagez voix, données et contenu multimédia.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 4 Mise en route Resource Central Accédez instantanément à des didacticiels, des fichiers d’exemple et des extensions pour les applications vidéo numériques Adobe. Adobe Exchange Visitez le site Adobe Exchange à l’adresse www.adobe.com/go/exchange_fr pour télécharger des exemples, ainsi que des milliers de modules externes et d’extensions fournis par Adobe et des développeurs tiers. Ces modules externes et extensions peuvent vous aider à automatiser des tâches, à personnaliser des processus et à créer des effets professionnels spécifiques, entre autres. Téléchargements Adobe Rendez-vous sur le site www.adobe.com/go/downloads_fr pour bénéficier gratuitement des mises à jour, des versions d'essai et d'autres logiciels utiles. Adobe Labs Le site Adobe Labs à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/labs_fr vous permet de découvrir et d'évaluer les nouveaux produits et technologies développés par Adobe. Adobe Labs vous donne accès à un éventail de ressources : • Préversions de logiciels et technologies à venir • Echantillons de code et méthodes conseillées pour accélérer votre apprentissage • Préversions de la documentation technique et produit • forums, contenu Wiki et autres ressources de collaboration pour vous aider à interagir avec des développeurs qui partagent vos opinions. Adobe Labs favorise la mise en place d'un processus de développement de logiciels axé sur la collaboration. Dans cet environnement, les clients utilisant de nouveaux produits et technologies deviennent rapidement productifs. Adobe Labs comprend également un forum permettant de recueillir les premiers commentaires. L’équipe de développement Adobe s’appuie sur ces commentaires pour créer des logiciels répondant aux besoins et aux attentes de la communauté. Adobe TV Le canal Adobe TV disponible à l’adresse http://tv.adobe.com/fr propose des vidéos permettant de parfaire ses connaissances ou de trouver une source d’inspiration. Suppléments Le disque d’installation contient divers extras qui vous permettront de profiter pleinement des fonctionnalités de votre logiciel Adobe. Certains extras sont installés sur votre ordinateur au cours du processus d’installation, tandis que d’autres sont disponibles sur le disque. Pour afficher les extras installés avec le logiciel, accédez au dossier de l’application sur votre ordinateur. • Windows® : [disque de démarrage]\Program Files\Adobe\[application Adobe] • Mac OS® : [disque de démarrage]/Applications/[application Adobe] Pour afficher les extras disponibles sur le disque, accédez au dossier Goodies pour la langue de votre choix sur le disque. Exemple: • /English/Goodies/UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 5 Mise en route Nouveautés Création de fichiers PDF, modification et recherche Unification d'une large gamme de contenus dans un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez combiner des documents, des dessins, des messages électroniques et des feuilles de calcul en un porte-documents PDF unique et compressé. Utilisez des modèles de conception professionnels, personnalisables pour y intégrer votre logo, et comprenant des descriptions qui aideront les destinataires à parcourir le contenu du document. Conversion de documents papier au format PDF La nouvelle technologie de reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) et la prise en charge d'une gamme plus étendue de scanners améliorent les possibilités de recherche et l'aspect des documents numérisés. Voir « Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF » à la page 66. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF La méthode de capture Web améliorée vous permet de convertir des pages Web complètes ou seulement les sections qui vous intéressent, et d'y inclure ou non les supports multimédia interactifs. Les versions PDF de pages Web sont faciles à imprimer, à archiver, à annoter et à partager. Voir « Conversion de pages Web au format PDF » à la page 89 Conversion de documents à partir des nouvelles versions de Lotus Notes et d'AutoCAD Acrobat prend désormais en charge Lotus Note 8.5 ; Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended prennent en charge AutoCAD 2009. Recherche dans plusieurs fichiers PDF Grâce à aux améliorations apportées à la fonction de recherche, vous pouvez parcourir plusieurs fichiers PDF stockés dans un même dossier afin de trouver rapidement les informations dont vous avez besoin. Collaboration Révisions partagées sur Acrobat.com Les participants téléchargent le fichier à partir d'Acrobat.com, puis y ajoutent des commentaires et des données dans Acrobat ou Adobe Reader. Lorsqu'ils ont terminé, ils publient les commentaires ou envoient leur réponse sur le site Acrobat.com. Si vous utilisez Acrobat.com pour les révisions partagées, vous pouvez aussi autoriser les réviseurs à ouvrir et partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. Voir « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 152. Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne Adobe ConnectNow, outil personnel de conférence sur le Web, permet de mener des réunions en temps réel à partir de votre ordinateur. Les participants rejoignent la réunion en se connectant à l'espace de réunion sur le Web, à partir de leur propre ordinateur. Au cours d'une réunion en ligne ConnectNow, vous pouvez partager votre PC, mener des conversations en direct, partager des tableaux blancs en ligne et utiliser de nombreuses fonctions de collaboration. Voir « Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne » à la page 148. Téléchargement et partage de documents volumineux via Acrobat.com A partir d'Acrobat ou de Reader, vous pouvez créer votre propre compte utilisateur sur Acrobat.com. Acrobat.com permet de télécharger et de partager la plupart des types de document, mais aussi de partager des fichiers PDF ou votre PC dans le cadre de réunions en ligne. Voir « Partage de documents » à la page 146. Formulaires Création et modification simplifiée de formulaires électroniques (Windows) Utilisez le nouvel assistant de création de formulaires pour convertir des fichiers Microsoft® Word et Excel ou des documents papier numérisés en formulaires PDF. Les champs de formulaire sont automatiquement reconnus et convertis en champs à remplir. Ajoutez rapidement des champs de formulaires, modifiez-les et nommez-les. Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour vérifier quels formulaires ont été remplis et par qui. Voir « Création d'un formulaire » à la page 193.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 6 Mise en route Recueil et exportation des données de formulaire Recueillez facilement les données des utilisateurs et exportez-les vers une feuille de calcul pour les analyser et créer un rapport. Voir « Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire » à la page 224. Suivi des formulaires Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour vérifier quels formulaires ont été remplis et par qui. Voir « A propos du suivi des formulaires » à la page 226. Signatures numériques Amélioration de la validation des signatures à long terme Incorporez la chaîne de certificat, l'état de révocation et l'horodatage après la création de la signature. Autorisez l'utilisation de tampons temporels valables même s'ils sont obsolètes. Voir « Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme » à la page 274. Création d'une encre signature Ajoutez une simple signature manuscrite sur une page. Voir « Signature d'un fichier PDF » à la page 269 Didacticiels de mise en route Les didacticiels de cette rubrique vous guident pas à pas dans la prise en main d'Acrobat 9. Vous pouvez ainsi vous familiariser avec les fonctionnalités de l'application : création de documents PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker, partage de documents avec des collègues à des fins de révision et de discussion, création de formulaires électroniques interactifs, assemblage de documents de formats variés dans un porte-documents et apposition de signatures numériques sécurisées sur les documents. Pour découvrir d'autres didacticiels et vidéos présentant toutes les possibilités qu'offre Acrobat, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Exploration des fonctions clés d'Acrobat 9: www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_portfolio_std_fr • A quoi sert Acrobat ?: www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4200_a9_fr • Présentation d'Acrobat 9: www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4081_a9_fr • Utilisation de plusieurs applications dans un processus professionnel : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4204_a9_fr Création d'un fichier PDF Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat PDFMaker (Windows) Convertissez vos documents d'entreprise en fichiers Adobe PDF en un seul clic. Acrobat PDFMaker simplifie la conversion des documents au format PDF dans plusieurs applications de bureautique, telles que la suite Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes. PDFMaker, installé en même temps qu'Acrobat, a pour fonction de gérer automatiquement les applications compatibles. 1 Créez votre document. Concevez et finalisez le document dans une application source prenant en charge PDFMaker. Enregistrez le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 7 Mise en route Document dans une application pouvant être converti au format Adobe PDF 2 Sélectionnez les paramètres de conversion PDF. Dans l'application source, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. Si vous utilisez Lotus Notes, choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. Si vous utilisez une application Microsoft Office 2007, cliquez sur Préférences dans le ruban Acrobat. Dans la zone Paramètres PDFMaker de la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sélectionnez le paramètre PDF prédéfini qui convient dans le menu Paramètres de conversion. Le paramètre PDF prédéfini détermine le taux de compression du fichier, la résolution d'image, l'incorporation ou non des polices et différentes autres valeurs de conversion PDF. Si vous préparez un document à des fins d'impression professionnelle, optez pour le paramètre prédéfini Impression de qualité supérieure ou Qualité optimale. Si le document que vous préparez est destiné uniquement à être consulté en ligne, choisissez Taille de fichier minimale. Le paramètre par défaut Qualité standard convient dans de nombreux cas d'utilisation en entreprise ou lors de la sortie des documents sur une imprimante de bureau. Paramètres de création des fichiers PDFUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 8 Mise en route Après avoir sélectionné les paramètres de conversion, ceux-ci seront appliqués chaque fois que vous créerez un fichier PDF à partir de cette application et tant que vous ne les modifierez pas. 3 Sélectionnez les paramètres de l'application. Dans la zone Configuration de l'application de la boîte de dialogue, indiquez si vous souhaitez inclure les signets, les liens hypertexte, les fonctions d'accessibilité et d'autres options. Cliquez sur l'onglet de l'application (onglet Word, par exemple) pour afficher les options propres à votre application. Dans Word, par exemple, il est possible de convertir les notes de bas de page et les liens. Dans Visio (pris en charge dans Acrobat 9 Professional Extended et Acrobat 9 Professional), il est possible de configurer l'aplatissement des calques. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker. Paramètres spécifiques à l'application pour la création des fichiers PDF 4 Créez le fichier PDF. Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF dans la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou, dans Microsoft Office 2007, cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF sur le ruban Acrobat. Vous pouvez transmettre automatiquement le fichier PDF par voie électronique ou l'envoyer pour révision, en utilisant les autres commandes disponibles dans le menu Adobe PDF. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez un nom et spécifiez un emplacement pour le fichier PDF. Selon l'application utilisée et les paramètres définis, il est possible que vous soyez invité à sélectionner d'autres options au cours de la création du fichier PDF. Vous pouvez également convertir des pages Web au format PDF directement depuis Internet Explorer. Pour ce faire, visitez un site Web à l'aide du navigateur Internet Explorer, puis cliquez sur le bouton Convertir dans la barre d'outils.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 9 Mise en route Collaboration Initiation d'une révision partagée Dans une révision partagée, tous les participants ont la possibilité de consulter les commentaires et d'y répondre. Cela permet aux réviseurs de résoudre les éventuels conflits d'opinion, d'identifier les idées qui méritent d'être approfondies et de développer des solutions créatives pendant la phase de révision. Vous pouvez héberger une révision partagée sur un dossier du réseau, un serveur WebDAV, un espace de travail SharePoint ou Acrobat.com (un nouveau service Web sécurisé). Tout ce dont vous avez besoin est Acrobat, un fichier PDF et un ID Adobe disponible gratuitement. 1 Préparez le document PDF. Enregistrez le document PDF à faire réviser par les participants. Si vous souhaitez attirer l'attention des participants sur des questions ou des sujets spécifiques, n'hésitez pas à ajouter des commentaires dans le document PDF. 2 Envoyez le document PDF en révision partagée. Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer en révision partagée. Acrobat ouvre l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Vous pouvez partager tout document susceptible d'être complété par des commentaires. Si les paramètres de protection du document empêchent la saisie de commentaires, Acrobat vous le signale. 3 Sélectionnez la façon dont vous souhaitez recueillir les commentaires. Indiquez comment vous comptez publier le fichier PDF et recueillir les commentaires des réviseurs. Choisissez Télécharger et suivre automatiquement les commentaires via Acrobat.com si vous préférez utiliser Acrobat.com pour partager la révision. Choisissez Recueillir automatiquement les commentaires sur le serveur interne pour utiliser un serveur réseau, un serveur WebDAV ou un espace de travail SharePoint. Pour gérer les commentaires, laissez-vous guider par l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Si vous hébergez le fichier PDF sur votre propre serveur, sélectionnez le type du serveur et précisez son chemin d'accès. Si vous hébergez le fichier PDF sur Acrobat.com, saisissez votre ID Adobe. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID Adobe, cliquez sur Créer un ID Adobe pour en définir un dans Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 10 Mise en route 4 Invitez les réviseurs. Saisissez les adresses électroniques des personnes que vous souhaitez mettre à contribution ou sélectionnez-les dans votre carnet d'adresses électroniques. Personnalisez à présent le message destiné aux réviseurs. Fixez une échéance pour la révision. Une fois la date limite atteinte, les outils de commentaire ne seront plus disponibles sur le serveur de la révision partagée. Si vous utilisez Acrobat 9 Professional Extended ou Acrobat 9 Professional, les utilisateurs Adobe Reader peuvent participer à la révision partagée. Préparation de l'invitation à la révision 5 Envoyez le fichier PDF. Cliquez sur Envoyer pour publier le fichier PDF sur le serveur et transmettre les invitations électroniques aux participants. Acrobat enregistre une copie du fichier en révision partagée (portant le suffixe “_révision”) au même emplacement. Une fois la procédure de révision partagée commencée, vous pouvez lire les commentaires et y répondre sur le serveur de révision partagée. Vous êtes libre, cependant, de consulter tous les commentaires à la fin de la révision. Servez-vous de la fonction Suivi des révisions, dans Acrobat, pour identifier les auteurs des commentaires, envoyer des rappels aux réviseurs par voie électronique ou changer l'échéance. Activation de la collaboration en direct Il est possible de réviser un document PDF en direct avec un ou plusieurs collègues via Acrobat.com. La fonction de collaboration en direct permet de partager des pages de façon à présenter le même contenu simultanément à tous les réviseurs. Servez-vous de la fenêtre de conversation en direct pour parler du document présenté avec vos collègues. Vous êtes libre d'inviter tout utilisateur disposant d'Acrobat 9 ou de Reader 9 à participer à une discussion en direct.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 11 Mise en route Remarque : La fonction de collaboration en direct n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. 1 Préparez le document. Créez et enregistrez le document qui sera le sujet de la discussion en direct. S'il n'est pas encore au format PDF, convertissez-le à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF, d'Acrobat PDFMaker (Windows) ou des commandes de création de fichier PDF dans Acrobat. Ouvrez le document PDF dont vous souhaitez discuter dans Acrobat. 2 Démarrez la collaboration. Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Envoyer et collaborer en direct. Connectez-vous à Acrobat.com, si vous y êtes invité. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID Adobe, créez-en un. Exécutez l'assistant Envoyer et collaborer en direct pour ouvrir une session de conversation en direct. 3 Invitez les participants. Saisissez les adresses électroniques des collègues avec lesquels vous souhaitez collaborer, en séparant chaque adresse par un point-virgule ou un retour chariot. Vous pouvez également ajouter les adresses électroniques à partir du carnet d'adresses électroniques de votre programme de messagerie (Microsoft Outlook, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 12 Mise en route Préparation de l'invitation à la collaboration Modifiez l'objet et le contenu du message pour personnaliser l'invitation électronique en fonction de la collaboration envisagée. Pour publier le document sur Acrobat.com, choisissez Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.com et envoyer un lien aux destinataires. Sélectionnez un niveau d'accès pour déterminer les personnes habilitées à accéder au document depuis Acrobat.com. Si vous omettez de sélectionner Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.com, Acrobat envoie le document aux participants sous forme de pièce jointe. Le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche dans le document. 4 Attendez que les autres participants rejoignent la session en cours. Pour partager des pages ou discuter en ligne, une autre personne au moins doit être présente. A l'aide d'Acrobat 9 ou de Reader 9, il suffit aux participants de cliquer sur la pièce jointe ou de cliquer sur l'URL dans l'invitation pour rejoindre la session de collaboration. Après avoir ouvert la session avec leurs ID Adobe et mot de passe respectifs ou rejoint la session en tant qu'invités, les participants doivent cliquer deux fois sur le document PDF pour l'ouvrir. Participants rejoignant la session 5 Partagez les pages. Dès qu'une autre personne au moins participe à la session de collaboration en direct, vous pouvez synchroniser les vues de la page de façon à ce que la même page soit visible par tous. Pour mettre des pages en commun, cliquez sur le bouton Commencer le partage de page. Pour interrompre la mise en commun des pages, cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter le partage de page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 13 Mise en route 6 Discutez en ligne. Pour discuter du document, saisissez les messages de conversation dans la zone prévue à cet effet en bas du navigateur Collaboration en direct. Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour sélectionner la couleur de votre texte de conversation. Pour conserver un historique des conversations, choisissez Enregistrer la conversation dans le menu Options du navigateur. Envoyez des messages instantanés aux participants. Formulaires Création d'un formulaire interactif Vous pouvez convertir n'importe quel formulaire en un formulaire interactif que les utilisateurs doivent remplir et renvoyer sous forme électronique. Commencez par numériser un formulaire papier ou créez un document de formulaire. 1 Créez le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez numériser directement un document papier dans Acrobat (choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner). Vous pouvez également convertir un document électronique au format PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat PDFMaker, de l'imprimante Adobe PDF ou de la commande Créer un fichier PDF d'Acrobat. 2 Utilisez l'assistant de création de formulaire pour générer automatiquement les champs du formulaire. Choisissez Formulaires > Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire. Suivez les instructions de l'assistant et cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Bienvenue dans le mode de modification de formulaire. Lorsque vous exécutez l'assistant, Acrobat analyse le document et crée automatiquement les champs du formulaire électronique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 14 Mise en route L'assistant de création ou de modification de formulaire génère automatiquement les champs du formulaire. 3 Vérifiez les champs du formulaire créés par Acrobat. Acrobat répertorie les champs de formulaire générés dans le panneau Champs. Passez en revue le document pour déterminer si Acrobat a oublié des champs ou créé des champs en trop. Pour supprimer un champ, sélectionnez-le dans le panneau Champs et appuyez sur Supprimer. Acrobat a omis les boutons radio Oui et Non. 4 Ajoutez les champs de formulaire et modifiez-les à votre guise.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 15 Mise en route Ajoutez les champs de formulaire aux endroit désirés. Dans le document PDF, vous pouvez insérer des champs de texte, des cases à cocher, des zones de liste, des listes déroulantes, des boutons radio, des boutons d'action, des champs de signature numérique et même des codes à barres. Sélectionnez le type de champ de formulaire dans la liste Ajouter un champ située dans la barre d'outils Formulaires, puis cliquez à l'endroit où vous voulez insérer le champ. Attribuez au nouveau champ un nom unique et évocateur. Ce nom n'est pas visible par les utilisateurs du formulaire, mais sert à identifier le champ si vous manipulez les données au sein de bases de données ou de feuilles de calcul. Cliquez sur Afficher toutes les propriétés dans la boîte de dialogue du nom de champ pour apporter d'autres modifications. Vous êtes libre de modifier l'aspect d'un champ, de configurer un champ de texte afin d'autoriser plusieurs lignes de texte, de créer un libellé pour les utilisateurs ou de définir d'autres propriétés. Pour modifier un champ, assurez-vous que vous êtes en mode d'édition du formulaire, puis cliquez deux fois sur le champ. Pour passer en mode d'édition du formulaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. Pour prévisualiser le formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu dans la barre d'outils Formulaires. Edition des champs de formulaire 5 Enregistrez le formulaire. Prenez soin d'enregistrer le formulaire avec tous les champs que vous avez inclus. Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous pour enregistrer le formulaire sous un nom différent de manière à conserver le document statique original.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 16 Mise en route Porte-documents PDF Création d'un porte-documents PDF Cette opération permet d'organiser rapidement tous les fichiers relatifs à un projet dans un porte-documents PDF cohérent. Il peut s'agir de documents de texte, de messages électroniques, de feuilles de calcul, de dessins de CAO, de présentations PowerPoint, de vidéos, de documents PDF ou bien d'autres types de fichier. Il est inutile de convertir les documents composant le lot au format PDF ; vous pouvez modifier chaque composant séparément sans que cela n'ait d'impact sur le porte-document PDF. 1 Créez le porte-documents PDF. Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF. La barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF s'affiche sous la barre de menus ; Acrobat affiche cette barre d'outils dès que vous ouvrez un porte-documents PDF. Dans Acrobat Professional 9 et Acrobat Professional Extended 9, le panneau de modification du porte-documents figure à droite de la fenêtre. 2 Ajoutez des fichiers au porte-documents PDF. Dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents, choisissez Modifier > Ajouter des fichiers. Affichez les fichiers à inclure. Sélectionnez un fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner une série de fichiers contigus ou appuyez sur la touche Ctrl pour sélectionner plusieurs fichiers dans n'importe quel ordre. Sélection de fichiers d'un porte-documents PDF Lorsque vous ajoutez un fichier dans le porte-documents PDF, une copie de l'original est insérée. Si le document n'est pas au format PDF, tout destinataire du porte-documents PDF devra installer l'application native pour être en mesure de prévisualiser le document en question. Si, par exemple, vous insérez une présentation PowerPoint, l'utilisateur qui consulte le porte-documents PDF devra avoir installé Office pour visualiser ce composant. 3 Publiez le porte-documents PDF. Lorsque vous avez terminé le porte-documents PDF, vous pouvez le partager en l'envoyant dans un courrier électronique ou en le publiant sur Acrobat.com, un service Web sécurisé. Il est possible de le graver sur un CD ou un DVD ou encore de le distribuer comme vous le faites pour tout autre document PDF. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 17 Mise en route En premier lieu, choisissez choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer le porte-documents. Dans le menu de partage qui se trouve sur la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Envoyer par messagerie pour transmettre le porte-documents sous forme de pièce jointe à un courrier électronique. Vous pouvez également le partager sur Acrobat.com ; cette solution est particulièrement adaptée pour les porte-documents PDF trop volumineux pour transiter par les serveurs de messagerie électronique. Dans le menu de partage, choisissez Partager le portedocuments sur Acrobat.com, puis connectez-vous au site Acrobat.com. Protection Apposition d'une signature sur un document A l'instar d'une signature manuscrite, une signature numérique est personnelle. Acrobat offre des fonctions permettant d'assurer la protection de votre signature numérique. A la différence des signatures classiques, les signatures numériques contiennent des informations supplémentaires, telles que la date et l'heure de la signature ainsi que le motif de la signature. Tout comme vous avez défini le style de votre signature, il est possible de donner un aspect personnel à votre signature numérique. 1 Procurez-vous une identification numérique. Si vous n'avez pas d'identification numérique, créez une identification numérique autosignée dans Acrobat. Celleci stocke une clé privée chiffrée utilisée pour la signature ou le déchiffrement des documents. Elle comporte également une clé publique dans un certificat servant à authentifier les signatures et chiffrer les documents. Pour créer une ID numérique autosignée, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID dans la barre d'outils. Sélectionnez Nouvelle ID à créer maintenant, puis continuez de suivre les instructions de l'assistant. Saisissez les informations personnelles à inclure dans votre identification numérique, notamment votre nom. Lorsque vous certifiez ou signez un document, ce nom s'affiche dans le panneau Signatures et dans le champ de signature. Attribuez un nom à votre identification numérique et définissez le mot de passe associé. Ce dernier doit contenir au moins six caractères, à l'exclusion des signes de ponctuation et des caractères spéciaux. Cliquez sur Terminer. Effectuez une copie de sauvegarde de votre fichier d'identification numérique pour pallier l'éventuelle perte ou corruption de l'original.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 18 Mise en route informations personnelles de l'identification numérique 2 Créez l'aspect de votre signature numérique. Votre signature numérique peut être simple ou complexe. Elle peut prendre l'apparence d'une signature manuscrite ou d'un nom saisi électroniquement. Elle peut contenir le logo de la société, la date et l'heure à laquelle vous avez signé et la raison pour laquelle vous l'avez fait. Il est possible de créer plusieurs aspects de signature pour répondre à différentes fins et de sélectionner celui qui convient à la signature d'un document. Si vous souhaitez inclure l'image de votre signature, numérisez-la puis enregistrez-la sous forme de document PDF. Pour créer un aspect, choisissez Edition > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat > Préférences (Mac OS). Sélectionnez Protection dans le panneau gauche, puis cliquez sur Créer dans la section Signatures numériques. Donnez à l'aspect de signature un titre court et descriptif facilement reconnaissable à la signature du document. Sélectionnez les options appropriées et précisez notamment si vous voulez inclure une image importée telle qu'une signature numérisée. Au fur et à mesure que vous apportez des modifications, la signature mise à jour s'affiche dans la fenêtre de prévisualisation. Cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 19 Mise en route Utilisez les préférences de protection pour personnaliser le mode d'affichage de votre signature. Si vous avez sélectionné Motif, cliquez sur Préférences avancées et, dans le panneau de création, sélectionnez Afficher les motifs lors de la signature. Si vous avez sélectionné Lieu, sélectionnez Afficher le lieu et les coordonnées lors de la signature. 3 Lisez attentivement le document. Avant de signer un document, que ce soit physiquement ou électroniquement, veillez à en prendre pleinement connaissance et à localiser tous les champs de signature. Etant donné que le contenu dynamique peut modifier l'aspect du document PDF et vous induire en erreur, consultez le document en mode Aperçu du document avant de signer. Pour activer ce mode, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et sélectionnez Protection dans le panneau gauche, puis sélectionnez Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature. Recherchez les champs de signature dans chacune des pages du document. Vous pouvez être amené à signer un document à plusieurs endroits. Chaque champ de signature est unique, aussi votre signature ne sera pas automatiquement copiée d'un champ à l'autre dans le document. 4 Signez le fichier PDF. Pour signer le document, cliquez sur le champ de signature. En l'absence de champ de signature, choisissez Signer > Placer une signature dans la barre d'outils des tâches et tracez un champ de signature dans la page. Si vous avez configuré Acrobat comme programme de visualisation de documents en mode Aperçu du document avant de signer, une barre de message du document signale si un contenu dynamique figure dans le document. Après examen du document, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document pour continuer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 20 Mise en route Choisissez l'aspect de la signature qui convient au moment de signer le document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Apposer une signature, sélectionnez un aspect, puis ajoutez les informations requises tels que le lieu ou le motif de la signature. Saisissez le mot de passe d'ouverture si votre identification numérique l'exige. Cliquer sur Signer. Indiquez le nouveau nom du document (vous pourrez ainsi modifier le fichier PDF d'origine sans invalider la signature), puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Lorsque vous apposez une signature numérique, Acrobat intègre un condensé chiffré dans le fichier PDF. Acrobat incorpore également les détails provenant de votre certificat et de la version du document à l'heure à laquelle vous l'avez signé. 5 Distribuez votre certificat. Pour vérifier votre identification numérique, d'autres personnes doivent posséder le certificat public associé à votre identification. Pour envoyer votre certificat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection, puis sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. Développez la liste, sélectionnez l'identification numérique à partager, puis cliquez sur Exporter. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour transmettre par courrier électronique votre certificat au format PDF à une personne ou enregistrer le certificat sous un autre format de fichier.21 Chapitre 2 : Espace de travail A mesure que vous vous familiarisez avec votre produit, la configuration de votre environnement de travail doit être une priorité. Plus vous en apprendrez sur le produit, plus vous pourrez tirer parti de ses fonctions, outils et options. Cette application est bien plus perfectionnée qu'il n'y paraît au premier abord. Vous disposez de plusieurs outils masqués, préférences et options pour optimiser l'utilisation de l'application et mieux gérer la présentation et l'affichage de la zone de travail. Notions de base sur la zone de travail Affichage de la zone de travail Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard s'ouvre de deux manières distinctes : en tant qu'application autonome et à partir d'un navigateur Web. Les zones de travail associées diffèrent peu certes, mais de manière conséquente. La zone de travail de l'application autonome comporte un panneau de visualisation et un navigateur. Le panneau de visualisation sert à afficher les documents Adobe® PDF. Le navigateur, présenté sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail, permet quant à lui de parcourir les documents PDF. Les barres d'outils proches du haut de la fenêtre proposent d'autres commandes de manipulation des documents PDF. Zone de travail telle qu'elle apparaît dans Acrobat A. Barre de menus B. Barres d'outils C. Navigateur (panneau Signets affiché) D. Panneau de visualisation Lorsque vous ouvrez un document PDF à partir d'un navigateur Web, les barres d'outils, le navigateur et le panneau de visualisation sont tous disponibles. Remarque : Une barre de message du document accompagne la plupart des documents PDF (mais pas tous). Les portedocuments PDF comportent leur propre zone de travail. A D B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 22 Espace de travail Voir aussi « Barre de message du document » à la page 23 Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF La zone de travail des porte-documents PDF contient les éléments suivants : Barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF Elle figure juste en dessous du menu. C'est ici que se trouvent les options de visualisation du porte-documents, les options de publication, un outil de recherche ainsi qu'un menu Modifier proposant différentes commandes d'édition. Liste des documents et des dossiers composant Elle est située juste en dessous de la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF. Les liste des documents et des dossiers peut être présentées dans différentes dispositions ainsi que dans la vue Détails des fichiers. Zone de travail du porte-documents PDF A. Barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF B. Documents et dossiers composant Voir aussi « Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 334 Ouverture d'un document PDF Il existe plusieurs méthodes pour ouvrir un document PDF, à savoir à partir : de l'application Acrobat, de votre application de messagerie, du système de fichiers ou via un réseau accessible à partir d'un navigateur Web. L'affichage initial du document PDF dépend de la façon dont son auteur en a configuré les propriétés. Par exemple, un document peut s'ouvrir sur une page ou avec un facteur de zoom spécifique. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 23 Espace de travail L'accès à certains documents PDF étant restreint, il nécessite la saisie d'un mot de passe d''ouverture, lequel vous est fourni par le propriétaire du fichier PDF. Si un document est chiffré, vous aurez peut-être besoin de l'autorisation de l'auteur pour l'ouvrir. Il se peut également que des documents protégés ou certifiés n'autorisent pas l'impression d'un fichier ou la copie d'informations dans une autre application. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ouvrir un document PDF ou à utiliser certaines fonctions, contactez l'auteur ou le propriétaire du document. Lorsqu'un document est configuré pour s'ouvrir en mode plein écran, la barre d'outils, la barre de commandes, la barre de menus, ainsi que les boutons et commandes de la fenêtre, sont masqués. Pour quitter le mode plein écran, appuyez sur Ctrl+L. Voir aussi « Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran » à la page 318 « Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF » à la page 22 « Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé » à la page 231 Sélection d'un autre outil Par défaut, l'outil Sélection est actif lorsqu'Acrobat s'ouvre, car il s'agit de l'outil le plus polyvalent. Les outils spécialisés, tels que ceux permettant d'effectuer un zoom avant ou d'ajouter des commentaires de révision, sont disponibles sur les barres d'outils et dans le menu Outils. Voir aussi « Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils » à la page 394 Sélection d'un outil ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez un outil sur la barre d'outils. • Choisissez Outils > [nom de la barre d'outils] > [outil]. Basculement temporaire sur l'outil Zoom avant ou Main Vous avez la possibilité d'utiliser ces outils de manière temporaire, sans pour autant désélectionner l'outil activé. • Pour sélectionner temporairement l'outil Main, appuyez sur la barre d'espacement. • Pour sélectionner temporairement l'outil Zoom avant, maintenez enfoncées les touches Ctrl+barre d'espacement. Lorsque vous relâchez les touches, Acrobat revient à l'outil précédemment actif. Barre de message du document La barre de message du document s'affiche pour certains types de documents PDF seulement. En général, vous voyez cette zone à l'ouverture d'un formulaire PDF, d'un document PDF qui vous a été envoyé pour révision, d'un document PDF doté de droits spéciaux ou de mesures de protection ou encore d'un document PDF conforme aux normes PDF/A, PDF/E ou PDF/X. La barre de message du document s'affiche immédiatement en dessous de la zone des barres d'outils. Pour afficher ou masquer la barre de message du document, cliquez sur son bouton situé du côté gauche de la zone de travail.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 24 Espace de travail La barre de message du document contient les instructions à suivre et un descriptif des éventuels boutons spéciaux associés à la tâche à effectuer. La barre suit un code de couleurs : violet pour les formulaires, jaune pour les révisions et bleu pour les documents PDF certifiés ou protégés. Barre de message du document d'un formulaire Voir aussi « Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF » à la page 227 « Commentaires » à la page 163 Configuration des préférences La boîte de dialogue Préférences contient de nombreux paramètres du programme permettant notamment de configurer l'affichage, les outils, la conversion et les performances. Une fois que vous avez configuré les préférences, elles restent en vigueur tant que vous ne les modifiez pas. 1 Choisissez Edition > Préférences (Windows) ou Acrobat > Préférences (Mac OS). 2 Dans le panneau Catégories, sélectionnez le type de préférence à modifier. Personnalisation de la zone de travail Affichage des menus En général, il est conseillé de conserver les menus d'Acrobat visibles, afin que vous puissiez les utiliser pendant vos manipulations. Il est possible de les masquer à l'aide de la commande Affichage > Barre des menus. Cependant, la seule manière de les afficher et de les utiliser à nouveau consiste à appuyer sur F9/Maj+Commande+M. Acrobat dispose également de nombreux menus contextuels. Pour y accéder, vous cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un élément de la zone de travail ou du document PDF auquel est associé un tel menu. Un menu contextuel affiche les commandes relatives à l'élément ou à la zone activé(e). Par exemple, lorsque vous cliquez sur la zone des barres d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, le menu contextuel correspondant affiche les mêmes commandes que le menu Affichage > Barres d'outils. Remarque : La barre des menus s'affiche uniquement lorsque Acrobat est ouvert en tant qu'application autonome. Si Acrobat est ouvert à partir d'un navigateur, seul le menu de l'application de navigation est visible en haut de la fenêtre. Toutefois, les menus contextuels sont disponibles dans les deux cas de figure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 25 Espace de travail A propos des barres d'outils Les barres d'outils évitent de voir votre zone de travail trop encombrée en organisant les outils sous forme de groupes liés aux tâches. C'est ainsi que la barre d'outils Affichage des pages comprend des boutons permettant de modifier le nombre de pages pouvant être affichées simultanément dans la fenêtre du document. La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations contient des outils permettant de réviser et d'annoter un fichier PDF. Toutes les barres d'outils peuvent flotter ou être ancrées. Les barres d'outils ancrées figurent dans la zone des barres d'outils. Les barres flottantes s'affichent sous forme de panneaux autonomes que vous pouvez déplacer n'importe où dans la zone de travail. Chaque barre d'outils comporte une barre d'accroche, laquelle correspond à une bande grise verticale placée le long du bord gauche de la barre d'outils. • Lorsque vous placez le pointeur sur une barre d'accroche, une info-bulle affiche le nom de la barre d'outils associée. • Lorsque vous faites glisser une barre d'accroche, la barre d'outils est déplacée en conséquence. Vous pouvez faire glisser des barres d'outils hors de la zone des barres d'outils (de manière à les rendre flottantes), les ancrer dans la zone des barres d'outils ou encore les réorganiser au sein de cette zone. Certaines barres d'outils sont affichées par défaut et d'autres, masquées. Barres d'outils d'Acrobat ouvertes par défaut A. Barre d'outils Tâches B. Barre d'outils Fichier C. Barre d'outils Navigation de pages D. Barre d'outils Sélection et zoom E. Barre d'outils Affichage de page F. Barre d'outils Recherche Barres d'outils d'Adobe Reader® ouvertes par défaut A. Barre d'outils Fichier B. Barre d'outils Navigation de pages C. Barre d'outils Sélection et zoom D. Barre d'outils Affichage de page E. Barre d'outils Recherche Chacun des boutons de la barre d'outils Tâches est associé à un menu de commandes. Cliquez sur la flèche située à droite du nom du bouton pour ouvrir le menu. Par exemple, cliquez sur la flèche associée au bouton Collaborer pour afficher un menu proposant des commandes liées aux tâches de collaboration. Placez le pointeur sur un outil pour voir apparaître sa description. Placez le pointeur sur la barre d'accroche disponible sur le bord gauche d'une barre d'outils pour afficher le nom de cette dernière. Tous les outils sont identifiés par leur nom dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils (Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils). Voir aussi « Personnalisation de la zone de travail » à la page 24 « Affichage des menus » à la page 24 B A C D E F A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 26 Espace de travail Affichage et organisation des barres d'outils Lorsque la tâche que vous effectuez n'implique pas l'utilisation des outils d'une barre spécialisée, vous pouvez fermer la barre d'outils afin de ne pas trop encombrer la zone de travail. Par exemple, si vous n'ajoutez pas de commentaires de révision à un document PDF, il est inutile de laisser affichée la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Lorsque vous souhaitez faciliter l'accès à une barre d'outils masquée par défaut, vous pouvez ouvrir la barre d'outils. La barre d'outils s'affiche alors sous forme de panneau flottant que vous pouvez déplacer ou ancrer dans la zone des barres d'outils. Remarque : Si plusieurs documents PDF sont ouverts, vous pouvez entièrement personnaliser les barres d'outils pour chacun d'eux. Les différents états personnalisés sont conservés lorsque vous passez d'un fichier PDF à un autre. Voir aussi « Ouverture ou fermeture du mode de lecture » à la page 35 Affichage ou masquage des barres d'outils • Pour ouvrir une barre d'outils, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > [nom de la barre d'outils]. Les barres d'outils affichées sont signalées par une coche placée en regard de leur nom. • Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Masquer les barres d'outils pour masquer toutes les barres d'outils. • Pour modifier l'état d'une barre d'outils visible ou non, cliquez sur la zone des barres d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis sélectionnez la barre d'outils à afficher ou à masquer. • Pour modifier la visibilité de plusieurs barres d'outils, choisissez Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils ou Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ajouter des outils. Ensuite, sélectionnez et désélectionnez les barres d'outils. (Les barres d'outils visibles sont signalées par une coche placée à gauche de leur nom.) Remarque : L'ouverture d'une nouvelle barre d'outils sous forme flottante ou ancrée dans la zone des barres d'outils dépend de la position par défaut de la barre d'outils ou, le cas échéant, de son emplacement dans la configuration antérieure de la zone de travail. Déplacement des barres d'outils • Pour réorganiser les barres d'outils ancrées, servez-vous de leurs barres d'accroche et faites-les glisser d'une position à l'autre. • Pour déplacer une barre d'outils flottante dans la zone de travail, faites-la glisser par sa barre de titre ou sa barre d'accroche. • Pour rendre flottante une barre d'outils ancrée, faites-la glisser par sa barre d'accroche à partir de la zone des barres d'outils.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 27 Espace de travail Déplacement d'une série d'outils à partir de la zone des barres d'outils à l'aide de la barre de titre. • Pour ancrer une barre d'outils flottante, déplacez-la vers la zone des barres d'outils en la faisant glisser par sa barre de titre ou par sa barre d'accroche. • Pour déplacer toutes les barres d'outils flottantes vers la zone des barres d'outils, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ancrer les barres d'outils. Lors du déplacement des barres d'outils, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des lignes dans la zone des barres d'outils. Rétablissement de la configuration par défaut des barres d'outils ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Réinitialiser les barres d'outils. Verrouillage ou déverrouillage de la zone des barres d'outils Le verrouillage des barres d'outils interdit toute réorganisation au sein de la zone des barres d'outils. De ce fait, les barres d'accroche disparaissent des barres d'outils lorsque celles-ci sont verrouillées. En revanche, le verrouillage n'a aucune incidence sur l'emplacement des barres d'outils flottantes. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Verrouiller les barres d'outils. Sélectionnez une seconde fois la commande pour déverrouiller la zone des barres d'outils. Remarque : Lorsque la zone des barres d'outils est verrouillée, cela ne vous empêche pas de déplacer les barres d'outils flottantes en les faisant glisser par leur barre de titre. Toutefois, vous ne pouvez pas les ancrer à moins de déverrouiller la zone des barres d'outils. Affichage et masquage d'éléments de la barre d'outils Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage d'une barre d'outils donnée de manière à masquer les outils dont vous n'avez pas besoin et à minimiser ainsi l'espace perdu. Vous pouvez également afficher et masquer le libellé des outils. Affichage ou masquage d'outils individuels Acrobat comprend davantage d'outils et de barres d'outils que ceux que vous voyez par défaut. Vous pouvez personnaliser les barres d'outils de sorte que les outils les plus souvent utilisés apparaissent dans la zone des barres d'outils. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez un outil que vous souhaitez afficher ou désélectionnez un outil qui est déjà affiché si vous souhaitez le masquer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 28 Espace de travail • Cliquez sur une barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter des outils. Sélectionnez ensuite des outils et des barres d'outils individuels que vous souhaitez rendre visibles, et désélectionnez ceux qui doivent être masqués. Remarque : Un outil sélectionné figure dans la zone des barres d'outils seulement si la barre d'outils à laquelle il appartient est également cochée dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils. Affichage ou masquage des libellés d'outils L'affichage par défaut montre les libellés de certains boutons de barre d'outils. Vous pouvez afficher les libellés de tous les boutons afin de vous familiariser plus facilement avec Acrobat ou, au contraire, masquer tous les libellés de boutons pour gagner de l'espace dans la zone des barres d'outils. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Afficher les libellés des boutons > [option]. Remarque : Lorsque l'espace commence à manquer dans la zone des barres d'outils, les libellés d'outils sont désactivés de manière sélective. Vérification des propriétés d'outils et d'objets La barre des propriétés facilite l'accès aux propriétés de nombreux outils et objets, tels que des liens, commentaires, champs de formulaire, clips multimédia et signets. Si, par exemple, vous activez l'outil Note, la barre d'outils des propriétés affiche les propriétés par défaut actuelles correspondantes. Si vous sélectionnez une note dans le document, la barre des propriétés affiche les propriétés appliquées à la note en question. La barre des propriétés vous permet de modifier la plupart des paramètres affichés à cet emplacement. Certains éléments n'apparaissent qu'à titre d'information et ne peuvent pas être modifiés. A l'instar des barres d'outils, la barre des propriétés peut flotter ou être ancrée dans la zone des barres d'outils. En revanche, elle ne contient pas d'outils et ne peut pas être personnalisée pour masquer des options. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. 2 Sélectionnez l'objet ou l'outil que vous souhaitez réviser. 3 Modifiez les propriétés de l'élément sélectionné selon vos besoins. Si vous voulez modifier des propriétés d'objet autres que celles répertoriées sur la barre d'outils des propriétés, cliquez sur l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. Affichage ou masquage du navigateur Le navigateur est une zone de l'espace de travail qui peut afficher plusieurs panneaux de navigation. En général, ces panneaux jouent le rôle de table des matières, avec des éléments sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour accéder à une partie spécifique du document. Par exemple, le panneau Pages contient des vignettes de chaque page. Le fait de cliquer sur une vignette ouvre la page correspondante dans le document. Lorsque vous ouvrez un fichier PDF, le navigateur est fermé par défaut, mais les boutons situés le long du côté gauche de la zone de travail permettent d'accéder facilement aux différents panneaux, tels que le bouton du panneau Pages et le bouton du panneau Signets . Lorsqu'Acrobat est ouvert mais vide (sans document PDF affiché), le navigateur n'est pas disponible. 1 Pour ouvrir le navigateur, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ouvrir un panneau, cliquez sur le bouton du panneau voulu sur le bord gauche de la zone de travail. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Afficher le navigateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 29 Espace de travail 2 Pour fermer le navigateur, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton relatif au panneau affiché dans le navigateur. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Masquer le navigateur. Remarque : L'auteur du fichier PDF peut contrôler le contenu de certains panneaux de navigation et les vider. Ajustement des panneaux de navigation A l'instar des barres d'outils, les panneaux de navigation peuvent être ancrés dans le navigateur ou flotter dans la zone de travail. Vous pouvez masquer ou fermer les panneaux inutiles et ouvrir ceux dont vous avez besoin. De même, vous avez la possibilité d'ajuster la largeur du navigateur. Modification de la zone d'affichage des panneaux de navigation • Pour modifier la largeur du navigateur, faites glisser son bord droit. • Pour réduire un panneau flottant sans le fermer, cliquez sur le nom de l'onglet en haut de la fenêtre. Cliquez de nouveau sur le nom de l'onglet pour rétablir la taille réelle du panneau. Modification de l'orientation d'un panneau de navigation ancré Par défaut, certains panneaux, tels que le panneau Signets, s'affichent sous forme de colonne du côté gauche de la zone de travail. D'autres, comme le panneau Commentaires, s'affichent horizontalement au bas du panneau de visualisation. Vous pouvez modifier l'orientation de n'importe quel panneau pour l'afficher verticalement ou horizontalement en faisant glisser le bouton associé à ce panneau, qui apparaît sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail. • Pour orienter le panneau à la verticale, faites glisser le bouton vers la partie supérieure du navigateur, à proximité des boutons d'autres panneaux verticaux. • Pour orienter le panneau à l'horizontale, faites glisser le bouton vers la partie inférieure du navigateur, à proximité des boutons d'autres panneaux horizontaux. Dans l'un ou l'autre cas, un cadre gris met en surbrillance toute la zone de boutons du panneau. Si vous relâchez le bouton de la souris avant que la zone soit mise en surbrillance, le panneau flotte au-dessus de la zone de travail. Si cela se produit, recommencez en faisant glisser l'onglet du panneau vers la partie supérieure ou inférieure de la zone des boutons. Affichage d'un autre panneau dans le navigateur Par défaut, un jeu sélectif de boutons du panneau est visible sur le bord gauche de la zone de travail. D'autres panneaux sont disponibles dans le menu Affichage et peuvent s'ouvrir sous forme de panneaux flottants au lieu de s'afficher dans le navigateur. Cependant, rien ne vous empêche d'ancrer le panneau dans le navigateur par la suite. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la partie gauche du navigateur, sélectionnez le bouton du panneau. • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > [nom du panneau]. Ancrage ou flottement des panneaux de navigation • Pour faire flotter un panneau ancré dans le navigateur, faites glisser le bouton du panneau vers le panneau de visualisation. • Pour ancrer un panneau flottant, faites glisser l'onglet du panneau vers le navigateur. • Pour regrouper deux panneaux flottants, faites glisser l'onglet d'un panneau vers l'autre panneau flottant.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 30 Espace de travail Options disponibles dans un panneau de navigation Tous les panneaux de navigation disposent d'un menu d'options dans le coin supérieur gauche. Les commandes disponibles dans ces menus varient d'un panneau à l'autre. Certains panneaux contiennent également d'autres boutons ayant une incidence sur les éléments du panneau. Une fois encore, cela varie d'un panneau à l'autre et certains panneaux ne comportent aucun bouton de ce genre. Affichage des pages PDF Ouverture d'un document PDF Vous pouvez ouvrir un document PDF à partir de l'application Acrobat, du bureau ou d'autres applications spécifiques. Ouverture d'un document PDF depuis l'application ? Lancez Acrobat, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir ou cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir de la barre d'outils. Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs noms de fichiers, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Les documents PDF portent habituellement l'extension .pdf. • Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > [nom de la collection] > [nom du fichier PDF]. • Choisissez Fichier > Historique > [période] > [nom du fichier PDF]. Si plusieurs documents sont ouverts, vous pouvez basculer entre eux en sélectionnant le nom du document voulu dans le menu Fenêtre. Sous Windows, un bouton s'affiche pour chaque document ouvert sur la barre des tâches de Windows. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour naviguer parmi les documents ouverts.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 31 Espace de travail Ouverture d'un document PDF à partir du bureau ou d'une autre application ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF joint à un message électronique, ouvrez le message et cliquez deux fois sur l'icône de la pièce jointe PDF. • Pour ouvrir un document PDF lié à une page Web affichée, cliquez sur le lien du fichier PDF. Le document PDF s'ouvre généralement dans le navigateur Web. • Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône du fichier PDF voulu dans le système de fichiers. Remarque : Sous Mac OS, il peut arriver qu'un document PDF créé sous Windows ne s'ouvre pas lorsque vous cliquez deux fois sur son icône. Si tel est le cas, choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir avec > Acrobat. Ouverture des pages d'un document PDF Selon le document PDF que vous ouvrez, vous devrez peut-être parcourir de nombreuses pages, consulter différentes sections de la page ou changer de facteur de zoom. Il existe plusieurs moyens de naviguer, mais les éléments suivants sont le plus souvent utilisés : Remarque : Si ces éléments ne sont pas visibles, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Réinitialiser les barres d'outils. Page suivante et Page précédente Les boutons Page suivante et Page précédente sont disponibles sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. La zone de texte située en regard de ces boutons est également interactive : il vous suffit de taper un numéro de page et d'appuyer sur Entrée pour atteindre directement la page voulue. Barres de défilement Les barres de défilement verticale et horizontale se trouvent à droite et en dessous du panneau de visualisation lorsque le document n'est pas affiché en entier dans la vue. Cliquez sur les flèches ou faites glisser le pointeur pour afficher d'autres pages ou des zones différentes de la page. Barre d'outils Sélection et zoom Cette barre d'outils contient des boutons et des commandes permettant de changer le facteur de zoom de la page. Panneau Pages Le bouton Pages situé sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail ouvre le navigateur avec le panneau Pages au premier plan. Ce panneau affiche les vignettes des pages du document. En cliquant sur une vignette, vous ouvrez la page correspondante dans le panneau de visualisation. Voir aussi « Retour en arrière dans les documents visualisés » à la page 34 « Ajustement du facteur de zoom » à la page 42 Parcours d'un document Il existe de nombreuses façons de feuilleter des pages dans un document PDF. La plupart des utilisateurs utilisent les boutons de la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, mais vous pouvez également vous servir des touches fléchées, des barres de défilement et d'autres fonctions pour avancer et reculer dans un document PDF comptant plusieurs pages. Par défaut, la barre d'outils Navigation de pages s'ouvre. La barre d'outils par défaut contient des outils fréquemment utilisés : Page suivante , Page précédente et Numéro de page. A l'instar des autres barres d'outils, vous pouvez masquer et rouvrir la barre d'outils Navigation de pages en choisissant son nom dans le menu Barres d'outils du menu Affichage. Vous pouvez afficher d'autres outils sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages en cliquant sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant un outil spécifique, Afficher tous les outils ou Ajouter des outils et en sélectionnant ou en désélectionnant des outils dans la boîte de dialogue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 32 Espace de travail Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 298 « A propos des vignettes » à la page 296 « Configuration de la mise en page et de l'orientation des pages » à la page 45 Déplacement au sein d'un document PDF ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton Page précédente ou Page suivante de la barre d'outils. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > [emplacement]. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Page, saisissez le numéro de la page dans la boîte de dialogue Atteindre la page, puis cliquez sur OK. • Appuyez sur les touches au clavier Pg. suiv et Pg. préc. Passage à une page spécifique ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • En mode d'affichage Une seule page ou Deux pages, faites glisser la barre de défilement verticale jusqu'à ce que la page voulue s'affiche dans la zone contextuelle. • Tapez le numéro de page de remplacement dans la zone prévue à cet effet sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, puis appuyez sur Entrée. Remarque : Si les numéros de page du document diffèrent de la position réelle de la page dans le fichier PDF, cette position est signalée entre parenthèses après le numéro de page assigné sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. Si, par exemple, vous définissez la numérotation des pages d'un fichier constitué d'un chapitre de 18 pages qui doit commencer par 223, le numéro de la première page active sera le 223 (1 sur 18). Vous avez la possibilité de désactiver les numéros de page logiques dans les préférences d'affichage des pages. Voir les sections « Renumérotation des pages » à la page 133 (Acrobat uniquement) et « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 37. Passage à des pages marquées par des signets Les signets constituent une table des matières qui divise généralement les documents en chapitres et en sections. Ils sont affichés dans le navigateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 33 Espace de travail Panneau Signets A. Bouton Signets B. Cliquez ici pour afficher le menu Options du panneau Signets. C. Signet développé 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets. 2 Pour accéder à une rubrique, cliquez sur le signet correspondant. Développez ou réduisez le contenu du signet selon vos besoins. Remarque : Selon la manière dont le signet a été défini, il se peut qu'une toute autre action soit exécutée lorsque vous cliquez dessus, alors que vous vouliez accéder à cet emplacement. Si la liste des signets disparaît lorsque vous cliquez sur un signet, cliquez sur le bouton Signets pour l'afficher à nouveau. Si vous souhaitez masquer le bouton Signets après avoir cliqué sur un signet, choisissez Réduire après utilisation dans le menu Options. Passage à une page spécifique à l'aide de sa vignette Les vignettes correspondent à des représentations miniatures des pages d'un document. Elles sont situées dans le panneau Pages et permettent de changer le mode d'affichage du document et d'atteindre des pages spécifiques. La vignette active comporte un cadre rouge indiquant la zone de la page qui apparaît. Vous pouvez redimensionner cette zone pour modifier le facteur de zoom. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour ouvrir le panneau Pages. 2 Pour aller à une autre page, cliquez sur son signet. Défilement automatique d'un document Le défilement automatique vous permet de parcourir un document PDF à vitesse constante, en procédant de haut en bas. Si vous interrompez l'opération à l'aide des barres de défilement pour avancer ou reculer d'une page ou d'une section, le défilement automatique reprend à cet emplacement. Parvenu à la fin du document PDF, le défilement automatique s'arrête et ne reprend pas au début à moins que vous n'activiez à nouveau cette commande. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement. 2 Appuyez sur Echap pour arrêter le défilement. C B AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 34 Espace de travail Retour en arrière dans les documents visualisés Vous avez la possibilité de rechercher des pages PDF que vous avez visualisées auparavant en revenant en arrière dans votre parcours de visualisation. Il est utile de comprendre la différence entre le concept de pages précédente/suivante et celui de vues précédente/suivante. Dans le cas de pages, les adjectifs précédent et suivant font référence à deux pages consécutives, placées avant et après la page active. Dans le cas de vues, il s'agit de l'historique de visualisation des pages. Si, par exemple, vous avancez et reculez dans un document, l'historique de visualisation revient en arrière, affichant les pages que vous avez vues dans l'ordre inverse de l'affichage initial. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Vue précédente. 2 Pour continuer à visualiser la suite de votre parcours de visualisation, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Recommencez l'étape 1. • Choisissez Affichage > Atteindre > Vue suivante. Remarque : Vous pouvez afficher les boutons Vue précédente et Vue suivante dans la zone des barres d'outils en cliquant sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant ces options dans le menu contextuel ou en activant la commande Afficher tous les outils. Changement de mode d'affichage PDF/A La norme PDF/A est une norme ISO portant sur les documents PDF. Les documents que vous numérisez au format PDF sont conformes à la norme PDF/A. Vous pouvez indiquer si vous voulez voir les documents dans ce mode d'affichage. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Choisissez une option pour Afficher les documents en mode PDF/A : Jamais ou Uniquement pour les documents PDF/A. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le mode d'affichage PDF/A en modifiant de nouveau ce paramètre de préférence. Navigation à l'aide des liens Les liens vous permettent d'accéder à un autre emplacement du document actif, à d'autres documents PDF ou à des sites Web. Cliquer sur un lien permet également d'ouvrir des pièces jointes et de lire un contenu 3D, une séquence vidéo ou audio. Pour pouvoir lire des clips multimédia, vous devez disposer d'un équipement matériel et logiciel approprié. L'auteur du document PDF décide de l'aspect des liens dans le document PDF. Remarque : Pour qu'un lien fonctionne correctement, vous devez sélectionner l'option Créer des liens à partir des URL dans les préférences générales, à moins que le lien n'ait été créé dans Acrobat à l'aide de l'outil Lien. 1 Activez l'outil Sélection . 2 Pointez sur la zone du lien sur la page, jusqu'à ce que le pointeur se transforme en main pointant avec le doigt. Un signe plus (+) ou un w s'affiche sur la main lorsque le lien pointe vers un site Web. Cliquez ensuite sur le lien. Voir aussi « Liens et pièces jointes » à la page 301 « Préférences multimédia » à la page 340UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 35 Espace de travail Fichiers PDF dotés de pièces jointes Si vous ouvrez un document PDF contenant une ou plusieurs pièces jointes, le panneau Pièces jointes s'ouvre automatiquement, affichant les fichiers joints. Vous pouvez afficher ces fichiers, les modifier et enregistrer vos modifications sous réserve que l'auteur des documents vous y autorise. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, les pièces jointes le suivent automatiquement. Voir aussi « Ouverture, enregistrement ou suppression d'une pièce jointe » à la page 306 Ouverture ou fermeture du mode de lecture Le mode de lecture masque le contenu intégral de la zone de travail à l'exception du document et de la barre des menus. ? Choisissez Affichage > Mode de lecture. Choisissez à nouveau Mode de lecture pour restaurer le mode d'affichage antérieur de la zone de travail, avec les boutons de navigation et les mêmes barres d'outils affichées. Affichage d'un document PDF en mode plein écran En mode plein écran, les pages PDF occupent la totalité de l'écran. La barre des menus, les barre d'outils, ainsi que les boutons et options de la fenêtre sont masqués. L'auteur peut configurer un document PDF pour qu'il s'ouvre en mode plein écran. Vous pouvez également définir l'affichage vous-même. Ce mode d'affichage est fréquemment utilisé pour les présentations, éventuellement associé au défilement automatique des pages et à des transitions. Le pointeur reste actif en mode plein écran pour que vous puissiez cliquer sur les liens et ouvrir les notes. Il existe deux manières de progresser dans un document PDF en mode plein écran : vous pouvez utiliser les raccourcis clavier des commandes de navigation et de facteur de zoom ou vous pouvez configurer une préférence de mode plein écran permettant d'afficher des boutons de navigation sur lesquels vous pouvez cliquer pour changer de page ou quitter le mode plein écran. Voir aussi « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 37 « Configuration d'une présentation » à la page 318 Configuration de la préférence de barre de navigation du mode plein écran 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Plein écran. 2 Cochez la case Afficher la barre de navigation, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Choisissez Affichage > Mode plein écran. La barre de navigation du mode plein écran contient les boutons Page précédente , Page suivante et Fermer le mode plein écran . Ces boutons s'affichent dans le coin inférieur gauche de la zone de travail. Lecture d'un document en mode plein écran Si la barre de navigation du mode plein écran n'est pas visible, vous pouvez utiliser les raccourcis clavier pour parcourir le document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 36 Espace de travail Remarque : Si vous disposez de deux moniteurs, il se peut que l'affichage d'une page en mode plein écran soit disponible uniquement sur l'un d'entre eux. Pour feuilleter le document, cliquez sur l'écran affichant la page en mode plein écran. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Mode plein écran. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour passer à la page suivante, appuyez sur la touche Entrée, Page suivante ou Droite. • Pour passer à la page précédente, appuyez sur Maj+Entrée, Page suivante ou Gauche. 3 Pour fermer le mode plein écran, appuyez sur Ctrl+L ou Echap. Vous devez activer l'option Touche Echap pour quitter dans les préférences du mode plein écran. Pour afficher un outil Plein écran sur la barre d'outils Affichage de page, cliquez sur cette dernière avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Mode plein écran. Cliquez ensuite sur l'outil Plein écran pour basculer dans ce mode. Affichage de fichiers PDF dans un navigateur Web Vous pouvez visualiser les documents PDF dans un navigateur Web pris en charge ou définir les préférences Internet de manière à ouvrir les fichiers PDF liés ou téléchargés dans une fenêtre Acrobat distincte. Si vous ouvrez des documents PDF dans Acrobat en dehors du navigateur, il est impossible d'utiliser l'option d'affichage rapide des pages Web, l'envoi de formulaires dans un navigateur ou la mise en surbrillance des résultats de recherche sur le Web. Dans la mesure où les commandes clavier peuvent être mappées au navigateur Web, certains raccourcis Acrobat risquent de ne pas être disponibles. De la même manière, vous pouvez être amené à faire appel aux outils et commandes de la barre d'outils d'Acrobat plutôt qu'à ceux des barres d'outils et des menus du navigateur. Par exemple, pour imprimer un document PDF, vous devez utiliser le bouton Imprimer de la barre d'outils d'Acrobat au lieu de la commande Imprimer du navigateur Web. (Dans Microsoft Internet Explorer, vous pouvez choisir Fichier > Imprimer, Edition > Copier et Edition > Rechercher sur la barre d'outils d'Internet Explorer.) Préférences Internet Afficher dans le navigateur Affiche tout document PDF ouvert à partir d'Internet dans la fenêtre du navigateur. Si cette option n'est pas activée, les documents PDF s'ouvrent dans une fenêtre Acrobat distincte. Sous Mac OS, si vous disposez à la fois de Reader et d'Acrobat, vous pouvez sélectionner l'application et la version à utiliser. Remarque : Si Reader est installé sur votre système et que vous installez ensuite Acrobat, Safari continue à utiliser Reader pour ouvrir les documents PDF dans votre navigateur. Configurez Safari de façon à ce qu'il utilise Acrobat. Autoriser l'affichage rapide des pages Web Télécharge les documents PDF à afficher sur Internet page par page. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le fichier PDF est entièrement téléchargé avant d'être affiché. Si vous voulez que le téléchargement du document PDF continue à l'arrière-plan pendant que vous consultez la première page d'information demandée, activez aussi l'option Autoriser le téléchargement spéculatif à l'arrière-plan. Autoriser le téléchargement spéculatif à l'arrière-plan Permet de continuer le téléchargement d'un document PDF depuis le Web, une fois la première page demandée affichée. Le téléchargement en arrière-plan s'arrête lorsque une nouvelle tâche est lancée dans Acrobat (le fait de feuilleter le document, par exemple). Vitesse de connexion Choisissez la vitesse de connexion dans la liste déroulante. Ce paramètre est également utilisé par le module externe Multimédia. Propriétés Internet [ou Paramètres réseau] Cliquez pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue ou le panneau de connexion Internet ou réseau de votre ordinateur. Pour plus de détails, consultez l'aide de votre système d'exploitation, votre prestataire de services Internet ou l'administrateur réseau local.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 37 Espace de travail Lecture d'articles Dans les documents PDF, les articles sont des divisions électroniques que l'auteur peut définir au sein du document PDF. Les articles guident le lecteur à travers le contenu du document PDF en sautant les pages ou les zones de la page exclues de l'article, de la même manière que vous filtrez un journal ou un magazine classique, en suivant le fil d'un article et en ignorant le reste. Lorsque vous lisez un article, le contenu de la page peut être agrandi ou réduit de manière à remplir l'écran avec la section d'article en cours de lecture. Voir aussi « Articles » à la page 311 Ouverture et parcours d'une division d'article 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Main ou cliquez sur l'outil Main de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom. 2 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Articles pour ouvrir le panneau Articles. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir le panneau Articles lorsque vous visualisez un document PDF dans un navigateur. Pour l'afficher, vous devez ouvrir le document dans Acrobat. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône de l'article pour atteindre le début de l'article. L'icône prend la forme spécifique suivante . Remarque : Si le panneau Articles est vide, cela signifie que l'auteur n'a pas défini de divisions d'article pour ce document PDF. 4 La division d'article souhaitée étant ouverte, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour parcourir l'article panneau par panneau, appuyez sur Entrée ou cliquez dans l'article. • Pour revenir en arrière dans l'article, panneau par panneau, cliquez sur l'article en appuyant sur la touche Maj ou appuyez sur Maj+Entrée. • Pour revenir au début, cliquez dans l'article en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. 5 A la fin de l'article, cliquez à nouveau dedans. La vue précédente est restaurée et le pointeur prend la forme de fin d'article . Sortie d'une division avant le terme de l'article 1 Assurez-vous que l'outil Main est activé. 2 Cliquez sur la page en maintenant les touches Maj+Ctrl enfoncées. La vue précédente est restaurée. Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF La boîte de dialogue Préférences définit la disposition par défaut des pages et personnalise l'application de biens d'autres manières. Concernant l'affichage des documents PDF, examinez les options disponibles dans les préférences de documents, générales, multimédia et d'affichage. Les paramètres des préférences contrôlent le fonctionnement de l'application ; ils ne sont pas associés à un document PDF spécifique. Remarque : Si vous installez des modules externes tiers, configurez ces préférences par le biais de l'option de menu Préférences de tiers. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 38 Espace de travail Voir aussi « Préférences de contenu 3D » à la page 356 « Préférences multimédia » à la page 340 « Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 282 Préférences de documents Paramètres d'ouverture Restaurer les derniers paramètres affichés lors de la réouverture du document Détermine si les documents s'ouvrent automatiquement à la dernière page affichée lors d'une session de travail. Ouvrir les liens interdocument dans la même fenêtre Ferme le document actif et ouvre le document lié dans la même fenêtre, limitant ainsi le nombre de fenêtres ouvertes. Si le document lié est déjà ouvert dans une autre fenêtre, le document actif n'est pas fermé lorsque vous cliquez sur le lien pour ouvrir l'autre document. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, une nouvelle fenêtre s'ouvre chaque fois que vous cliquez sur un lien pointant vers un document distinct. Autoriser la définition de l'état des calques selon les informations utilisateur Permet à l'auteur d'un document PDF doté de calques de spécifier la visibilité des calques en fonction des informations utilisateur. Permettre aux documents de masquer la barre de menu, les barres d'outils et les commandes Windows Permet de déterminer si la barre de menu, les barres d'outils et les commandes Windows sont masquées lors de l'ouverture du document. Documents dans la liste la plus récente Définit le nombre maximal de documents affichés dans le menu Fichier. Conserver les fichiers dans l'historique de l'organiseur pendant Indique la durée de conservation des fichiers PDF dans l'historique. Paramètres d'enregistrement Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications de document dans un fichier temporaire toutes les _ minutes Détermine la fréquence à laquelle Acrobat enregistre automatiquement les modifications d'un document ouvert. Enregistrement optimisé pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web Restructure le document Adobe PDF en vue du téléchargement individuel des pages à partir de serveurs Web. Mode d'affichage PDF/A Afficher les documents en mode PDF/A Indique les cas dans lesquels ce mode d'affichage s'applique : Jamais ou Uniquement pour les documents PDF/A. Examiner le document Examiner le document Recherche dans le fichier PDF les éléments qui ne sont pas nécessairement visibles, tels que les métadonnées, les pièces jointes, les commentaires ainsi que les calques et textes masqués. Les résultats de cet examen apparaissent dans une boîte de dialogue. Vous pouvez supprimer n'importe quel type d'élément affiché à cet endroit. • Examiner le document lors de sa fermeture (Option désactivée par défaut.) • Examiner le document lors de son envoi par messagerie (Option désactivée par défaut.) Ajuster le nom du fichier lors de l'enregistrement des biffures appliquées Indique un préfixe ou un suffixe à utiliser lors de l'enregistrement d'un fichier auquel des biffures ont été appliquées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 39 Espace de travail Préférences de plein écran Configuration du mode plein écran Appliquer au document actif uniquement Indique si l'affichage se limite à un document PDF. Occuper l'écran avec une page à la fois Définit l'affichage des pages selon la couverture d'écran maximum possible pour une page. Afficher un avertissement lorsque le document nécessite le mode plein écran Affiche un message avant de passer en mode plein écran. Si elle est activée, cette option a priorité sur l'option Ne plus afficher ce message sélectionnée précédemment dans ce message. Moniteur à utiliser Indique le moniteur sur lequel le mode plein écran est activé (pour les utilisateurs disposant de configurations à plusieurs moniteurs). Navigation en mode plein écran Touche Echap pour quitter (Windows/Mac OS) Permet de quitter le mode plein écran à l'aide de la touche Echap. Lorsque cette option n'est pas activée, vous pouvez quitter le mode plein écran en appuyant sur les touches Ctrl+L. Afficher la barre de navigation Affiche la barre d'outils de navigation minimale quelles soient les paramètres du document. Clic avec le bouton gauche pour avancer d'une page et avec le bouton droit pour reculer d'une page Permet de feuilleter le document Adobe PDF page par page à l'aide de la souris. Vous pouvez également feuilleter un document en appuyant sur Entrée, sur Maj+Entrée (pour revenir en arrière) ou en utilisant les touches fléchées. Boucle après la dernière page Permet de feuilleter un document PDF en continu, renvoyant le lecteur à la première page une fois la fin du document atteinte. Cette option est habituellement utilisée pour configurer l'affichage sur une borne. Avancer toutes les _ secondes Permet de passer automatiquement d'une page à l'autre après l'intervalle défini (en secondes). Vous pouvez parcourir un document en utilisant la souris ou le clavier et ce, même si le défilement automatique est activé. Aspect Couleur d'arrière-plan Spécifie la couleur d'arrière-plan de la fenêtre en mode plein écran. Vous pouvez sélectionner une couleur dans la palette de couleurs afin de personnaliser la couleur d'arrière-plan. Curseur de la souris Indique si le pointeur doit être visible ou masqué en mode plein écran. Transitions du mode plein écran Ignorer toutes les transitions Supprime les effets de transition des présentations affichées en mode plein écran. Transition par défaut Spécifie l'effet de transition à afficher lorsque vous changez de page en mode plein écran et qu'aucun effet de transition n'a été défini pour le document. Sens Détermine le flux de la transition par défaut sélectionnée à l'écran (vers le bas, à gauche, horizontal, etc.). Les options disponibles varient en fonction de la transition. Si aucune option de sens n'a d'incidence sur la transition par défaut sélectionnée, cette option n'est pas disponible. Sens en fonction de la navigation Imite la progression de l'utilisateur dans la présentation, telle que la transition de haut en bas lorsque l'utilisateur passe à la page suivante et de bas en haut lorsque l'utilisateur revient à la page précédente. Paramètre uniquement disponible pour les transitions comportant des options de sens.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 40 Espace de travail Préférences générales Outils de base Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils Permet de sélectionner des outils en appuyant sur une seule touche. Cette option est désactivée par défaut. Créer des liens à partir des URL Spécifie si les liens qui n'ont pas été créés dans Acrobat sont identifiés automatiquement dans le document PDF et peuvent être suivis en cliquant dessus. Sélectionner du texte et des images avec l'outil Main Permet à l'outil Main, lorsqu'il se trouve sur du texte dans un document Adobe PDF, de fonctionner de la même manière que l'outil Sélection. Lire des articles avec l'outil Main Change l'aspect du pointeur de l'outil Main lorsqu'il est sur une division d'un article. Lors du premier clic, l'article effectue un zoom pour occuper le panneau de visualisation dans le sens horizontal ; les clics suivants suivent la division de l'article. Activer le zoom de la molette de la souris avec l'outil Main Applique le zoom de la molette de la souris à la place du défilement. Sélectionner les images avant le texte avec l'outil Sélection Modifie l'ordre de sélection appliqué par l'outil Sélection. Utiliser la résolution fixe pour les images d'instantanés Définit la résolution utilisée pour copier une image capturée avec l'outil Instantané. Avertissements Ne pas afficher les avertissements d'édition Désactive les messages d'avertissement s'affichant habituellement lors de la suppression d'éléments tels que des liens, des pages, des vignettes ou des signets. Réinitialiser les avertissements Restaure les paramètres par défaut des avertissements. Imprimer Afficher les vignettes dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression Gère l'affichage de l'aperçu montrant le mode d'impression dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. La désactivation de cette option accélère l'aperçu. Transmettre un PostScript direct lors de l'impression Active l'émission des XObjects Adobe® PostScript® du fichier PDF lorsque ce dernier est imprimé sur une imprimante PostScript. Lancement de l'application Afficher l'écran d'introduction Détermine si l'écran d'introduction de l'application apparaît lors de chaque démarrage. Utiliser uniquement des modules externes certifiés Permet de vérifier que seuls des modules externes tiers certifiés par Adobe sont chargés. La notation Mode certifié actif indique Oui ou Non en fonction de son état. Rechercher les mises à jour Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, le programme vérifie les nouvelles mises à jour en fonction de l'intervalle défini dans les préférences de mise à jour d'Adobe. Vérifier l'accélérateur graphique 2D (Windows uniquement) (Apparaît uniquement si votre matériel informatique prend en charge l'accélération graphique 2D.) Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, permet d'utiliser l'accélération matérielle dès l'ouverture du premier document. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, l'accélération matérielle prend effet après l'ouverture du premier document. Comme la procédure de démarrage risque d'être plus longue avec cette option, elle est désactivée par défaut. Remarque : Elle est disponible à condition d'avoir sélectionné l'option Utiliser l'accélération graphique 2D dans les préférences d'affichage des pages.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 41 Espace de travail Voir aussi « Modification des préférences de mise à jour » à la page 57 Préférences d'affichage Mise en page et zoom par défaut Mise en page Définit la mise en page utilisée pour le défilement lors de la première ouverture d'un document. La valeur par défaut est Automatique. Le réglage de disposition de la page dans Fichier > Propriétés > Vue initiale a priorité sur le réglage correspondant dans les préférences. Zoom Définit le facteur de zoom utilisé à l'ouverture initiale des documents PDF. Cette valeur écrase celle définie pour le document. La valeur par défaut est Automatique. Résolution Utiliser les paramètres système Définit la résolution du moniteur en fonction des paramètres du système. Résolution personnalisée Définit la résolution du moniteur. Rendu Texte arrondi Indique le type de lissage de texte à appliquer. Dessins au trait Applique le lissage en vue d'éliminer les angles aigus des lignes. Images Applique le lissage en vue de réduire les changements abrupts dans les images. Utiliser les polices locales Indique si l'application utilise ou ignore les polices locales installées sur le système. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, des polices de substitution remplacent les polices non incorporées dans le document PDF. S'il est impossible de substituer une police spécifique, le texte est converti en puces et un message d'erreur s'affiche à l'écran. Optimiser les traits fins Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, les traits fins sont tracés de façon plus précise pour une meilleure visibilité. Mettre la page suivante en antémémoire Place la page suivante dans un tampon avant l'affichage de la page active, afin de réduire le temps de passage d'une page à l'autre dans un document. Utiliser l'accélération graphique 2D (Windows uniquement) (Apparaît uniquement si votre matériel informatique prend en charge l'accélération graphique 2D.) Accélère le zoom, le défilement et le retraçage du contenu des pages, ainsi que le rendu et la manipulation d'un contenu PDF 2D. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Remarque : Si cette option n'est pas disponible dans les préférences d'affichage des pages, vous devrez peut-être mettre à jour votre pilote de carte GPU pour activer cette fonction matérielle. Contactez votre distributeur de carte ou le fabricant de l'ordinateur pour obtenir le dernier pilote disponible. Contenu des pages et informations associées Afficher les images de grande taille Affiche les images volumineuses. Si votre système est trop lent pour afficher les pages contenant de nombreuses images, désactivez cette option. Utiliser le zoom progressif (Windows uniquement) Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, les effets d'animation sont désactivés, ce qui améliore les performances. Zones graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu Affiche toute zone définie d'un document : zone graphique, zone de rognage ou de fond perdu. Damier de transparence Affiche une grille derrière les objets transparents.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 42 Espace de travail Utiliser les numéros de page logiques Active la commande de numérotation des pages pour faire correspondre la position de la page dans le fichier PDF avec le numéro imprimé sur la page. Un numéro de page suivi de la position de la page entre parenthèses apparaît sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages, ainsi que dans les boîtes de dialogue Atteindre la page et Imprimer. Par exemple, i (1 sur 1) si le numéro imprimé de la première page est i. Si cette option n'est pas sélectionnée, les numéros de pages sont calculés en utilisant les chiffres arabes et en commençant à 1. Sélectionner cette option permet d'éviter tout comportement inattendu lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Précédent ou Reculer du navigateur Web. Toujours afficher le format de page du document Affiche les dimensions de la page à côté de la barre de défilement horizontal. Utiliser l'aperçu de la surimpression Permet d'activer automatiquement ou systématiquement le mode Aperçu de la surimpression ou uniquement pour les fichiers PDF/X, ou au contraire, de ne jamais l'activer. Si vous choisissez Automatique, le mode Aperçu de la surimpression est activé si le document contient des surimpressions. Le mode Aperçu de la surimpression vous permet d'observer les effets (à l'écran) du pseudonyme d'encre sur la sortie imprimée. Un imprimeur ou un prestataire de service de prépresse peut, par exemple, créer un pseudonyme d'encre lorsque le document contient deux tons directs similaires alors qu'un seul est nécessaire. Mode d'affichage des XObjects de référence Afficher les cibles des XObjects de référence Indique le type de document dans lequel il est possible d'afficher les XObjects de référence. Emplacement des fichiers référencés (Facultatif) Indique l'emplacement des documents référencés. Ajustement de l'affichage des documents PDF Ajustement du facteur de zoom Les outils de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom peuvent modifier le facteur de zoom des documents PDF. Tous ces outils ne sont pas visibles par défaut sur la barre d'outils. Pour tous les afficher, cliquez sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez des outils individuels, l'option Afficher tous les outils ou encore Ajouter des outils, puis sélectionnez des outils spécifiques. Tous les outils de zoom A. Outil Zoom dynamique B. Outil Zoom dynamique C. Bouton Zoom arrière D. Bouton Zoom avant E. Bouton de menu Valeur de zoom F. Bouton Taille réelle G. Bouton Pleine largeur H. Bouton Page entière I. Panoramique et zoom outil J. Outil Loupe • L'outil Zoom de sélection peut être utilisé de différentes manières. Vous pouvez l'utiliser pour tracer un rectangle autour d'une partie de la page qui remplira la zone d'affichage. Vous pouvez aussi simplement cliquer sur l'outil Zoom de sélection pour augmenter le facteur de zoom selon un niveau prédéfini, qui centrera le point sur lequel vous avez cliqué. Pour réduire le facteur de zoom selon un niveau prédéfini, cliquez sur l'outil Zoom de sélection en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • L'outil Zoom dynamique permet d'effectuer un zoom avant lorsque vous le faites glisser vers le haut de la page et un zoom arrière lorsque vous le faites glisser vers le bas. Si votre souris est équipée d'une molette, l'outil effectue un zoom avant lorsque vous faites avancer la molette et un zoom arrière lorsque vous déplacez la molette dans le sens inverse. A B C D E F G H I JUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 43 Espace de travail • Les outils Zoom avant et Zoom arrière changent le facteur d'agrandissement du document selon des niveaux prédéfinis. • L'option Valeurs du zoom modifie l'affichage de la page selon un pourcentage que vous tapez ou sélectionnez dans un menu déroulant. • L'outil Taille réelle affiche la page selon un facteur de zoom de 100 %. • L'outil Pleine largeur ajuste le facteur de zoom de sorte que le fichier PDF occupe la totalité du panneau de visualisation dans le sens horizontal. • L'outil Page entière ajuste le facteur de zoom, de sorte qu'une page occupe la totalité du panneau de visualisation dans le sens vertical. • La fenêtre Panoramique et zoom ajuste le facteur de zoom et la position de la zone d'affichage en fonction de la zone délimitée par un rectangle réglable visible dans la vue miniature de la page dans la fenêtre Panoramique et zoom. • La fenêtre de l'outil Loupe affiche une zone agrandie du document PDF correspondant à la zone définie par un rectangle réglable dans le panneau de visualisation. Redimensionnement d'une page en fonction de la taille de la fenêtre • Pour faire tenir la totalité de la page dans le panneau de visualisation, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Page entière. • Pour que la page occupe toute la largeur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Pleine largeur. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. • Pour que la page occupe toute la hauteur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Pleine hauteur. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. • Pour redimensionner la page de sorte que le texte et les images occupent toute la largeur de la fenêtre, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Contenu. Une partie de la page peut sortir de la vue. Pour connaître les raccourcis clavier permettant de redimensionner le document, déroulez le menu Affichage. Affichage d'une page à sa taille réelle ? Choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Taille réelle. La taille réelle d'une page PDF est habituellement 100 %. Cependant, le document peut avoir été défini sur un autre niveau de zoom lors de sa création. Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide des outils de zoom ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez le bouton Zoom avant ou Zoom arrière de la barre d'outils. • Indiquez un pourcentage d'agrandissement sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom, soit en tapant la valeur soit en choisissant une option dans le menu déroulant. • Faites glisser l'outil Zoom de sélection sur la zone de la page devant occuper le panneau de visualisation. • Faites glisser l'outil Zoom dynamique vers le haut pour augmenter le facteur de zoom et vers le bas pour le réduire. Lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est sélectionné, vous pouvez cliquer tout en appuyant sur la touche Ctrl ou maintenir la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant le glissement afin d'effectuer un zoom arrière. Si vous maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée, vous passez temporairement de l'outil Zoom de sélection à l'outil Zoom dynamique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 44 Espace de travail Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide de l'outil Panoramique et zoom 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Panoramique et zoom ou sélectionnez l'outil Panoramique et zoom sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser les poignées du cadre situé à l'intérieur de la fenêtre Panoramique et zoom pour changer le facteur de zoom du document. • Faites glisser le centre du rectangle pour sélectionner la zone à afficher. • Cliquez sur les boutons de navigation pour changer de page. • Tapez une valeur dans la zone de texte de zoom ou cliquez sur les boutons plus ou moins pour changer de facteur d'agrandissement selon des niveaux prédéfinis. Changement de facteur de zoom à l'aide de l'outil Loupe 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Loupe ou activez l'outil Loupe sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom (s'il est affiché). 2 Cliquez dans la zone du document que vous voulez agrandir. Un rectangle apparaît dans le document ; il correspond à la zone affichée dans la fenêtre Loupe. Vous pouvez faire glisser ou redimensionner le rectangle pour changer l'affichage de l'outil Loupe. 3 Pour changer le facteur de zoom de l'outil Loupe, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser le curseur. • Cliquez sur le bouton plus ou moins. • Saisissez une valeur dans la zone de texte Zoom. L'outil Loupe permet d'afficher une zone agrandie du document. Remarque : Pour modifier la couleur du rectangle de l'outil Loupe, déroulez le menu Couleur de trait situé dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre et sélectionnez une autre couleur. Changement du facteur de zoom à l'aide d'une vignette 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages situé dans la partie gauche de la fenêtre pour afficher les vignettes. 2 Localisez la vignette associée à la page active. Placez ensuite le pointeur sur le coin inférieur droit du cadre indiquant la zone de la page jusqu'à ce que le pointeur prenne la forme d'une double flèche. 3 Faites glisser le coin du cadre afin de réduire ou d'agrandir la taille d'affichage de la page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 45 Espace de travail 4 Le cas échéant, placez le pointeur sur le cadre de la zone de zoom de la vignette jusqu'à ce qu'il prenne la forme de l'icône Main. Faites ensuite glisser le cadre pour visualiser une autre partie de la page dans le panneau de visualisation du document. Le cadre figurant sur la vignette représente la zone de la page actuellement affichée dans le panneau de visualisation. Modification de l'affichage par défaut 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage. 2 Ouvrez le menu déroulant Zoom, puis choisissez un niveau de zoom par défaut. Affichage des zones hors écran d'une page agrandie Lorsque vous effectuez un zoom avant selon un facteur d'agrandissement élevé, vous verrez sans doute une partie seulement de la page. Vous pouvez décaler la vue afin de voir d'autres zones de la page sans changer de facteur de zoom. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Servez-vous des barres de défilement verticales pour passer aux pages précédente et suivante et utilisez les barres de défilement horizontales pour vous déplacer latéralement. • Sur la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom, sélectionnez l'outil Main ou choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Main, puis déplacez la page en la faisant glisser, comme si vous déplaciez une feuille sur une table. Voir aussi « A propos des calques PDF » à la page 325 Configuration de la mise en page et de l'orientation des pages La modification de la mise en page s'avère particulièrement utile lorsque vous voulez effectuer un zoom arrière afin d'avoir une vue d'ensemble de la disposition d'un document. Les types de mises en page suivants sont disponibles pour la visualisation des documents PDF : Une seule page Affiche une seule page à la fois, sans montrer aucune partie des pages adjacentes. Continue Affiche les pages selon une colonne verticale ininterrompue occupant la largeur d'une page. Deux pages Affiche chaque double page sans montrer aucune partie des pages adjacentes. Deux colonnes Affiche les pages du document côte à côte, selon une colonne verticale ininterrompue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 46 Espace de travail Options de mise en page Une seule page, Une seule page en continu, Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu Définition de la mise en page • Pour visualiser une page à la fois, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Une seule page. • Pour visualiser deux pages à la fois, côte à côte, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Deux pages. • Pour faire défiler le document de manière ininterrompue une page après l'autre, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Une seule page en continu. • Pour faire défiler le document de manière ininterrompue deux pages à la fois, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Deux pages en continu. • Pour un document multipage, si vous souhaitez afficher la première page seule sur le côté droit, choisissez l'option Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu. Ensuite, choisissez Affichage > Affichage de page > Afficher la page de couverture (option Deux pages). Vous pouvez également afficher des boutons pour chacune de ces options sur la barre d'outils d'affichage des pages en choisissant Affichage > Barres d'outils > Ajouter des outils et en les sélectionnant dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des outils. Remarque : En mode Une seule page, choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout pour sélectionner le texte complet sur la page active. Dans les autres mises en page, cette commande permet de sélectionner la totalité du texte du document PDF. Rotation de l'affichage d'une page Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage d'une page par incrément de 90 °. Cette opération modifie l'affichage de la page sans modifier son orientation réelle. Vous ne pouvez pas enregistrer cette modification. ? Choisissez Affichage > Rotation > Horaire ou Antihoraire, ou cliquez sur le bouton Rotation horaire ou Rotation antihoraire de la barre d'outils. Remarque : Pour enregistrer la rotation avec le document, choisissez Document > Rotation de pages. Changement de mise en page par défaut 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage. 2 Ouvrez le menu Mise en page, puis choisissez Automatique, Une seule page, Une seule page en continu, Deux pages ou Deux pages en continu. Remarque : Le fichier PDF s'ouvre selon la disposition spécifiée dans les préférences, sauf si une disposition différente a été définie dans les propriétés du document (Fichier > Propriétés > Vue initiale). Le paramètre des propriétés du document a priorité sur le paramètre des préférences. Si vous utilisez les propriétés du document, veillez à enregistrer et à fermer le document pour que les modifications prennent effet. Les utilisateurs d'Acrobat peuvent modifier la vue initiale, sauf si les paramètres de sécurité le leur interdisent. Les utilisateurs de Reader ne peuvent pas modifier la vue initiale. Voir aussi « Ouverture d'un document PDF » à la page 22UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 47 Espace de travail Affichage du document dans une fenêtre fractionnée Vous pouvez afficher un document PDF avec le panneau de visualisation fractionné en deux (commande Fractionner) ou en quatre (commande Fractionner la feuille de calcul). La vue fractionnée vous permet de faire défiler le document, de changer son facteur de zoom ou d'afficher une autre page dans le panneau actif sans toutefois que cela ait une incidence sur l'affichage de l'autre panneau. La vue obtenue avec l'option Fractionner la feuille de calcul se révèle utile si vous voulez conserver l'affichage des entêtes de colonne et des libellés de rangée lorsque vous parcourez une feuille de calcul ou un tableau volumineux. Sous ce mode, lorsque vous modifiez le facteur d'agrandissement d'un panneau, le même facteur est appliqué à tous les panneaux. En outre, le défilement est coordonné entre les panneaux : le défilement à l'horizontale d'un panneau fait également défiler le panneau situé au-dessus ou en dessous ; le défilement à la verticale d'un panneau fait également défiler le panneau situé à sa gauche ou à sa droite. 1 Commencez à créer le type de vue fractionnée de votre choix : • Pour fractionner la vue en deux panneaux, choisissez Fenêtre > Fractionner ou faites glisser la zone grise située audessus de la barre de défilement verticale. • Pour fractionner la vue en quatre panneaux avec des niveaux de zoom et un défilement synchronisés, choisissez Fenêtre > Fractionner la feuille de calcul. 2 Faites glisser la barre de fractionnement vers le haut, le bas, la gauche ou la droite pour redimensionner les panneaux de manière appropriée. 3 Ajustez le niveau de zoom comme vous le souhaitez : • Dans la vue fractionnée, cliquez sur un panneau pour l'activer et modifiez le niveau de zoom de ce panneau uniquement. • Dans la vue fractionnée de feuille de calcul, ajustez le niveau de zoom de manière à obtenir un affichage composé de quatre panneaux. 4 Effectuez un défilement de manière appropriée : • Dans la vue fractionnée, cliquez sur un panneau pour l'activer et effectuez un défilement pour modifier ce panneau uniquement. • Dans la vue fractionnée de feuille de calcul, cliquez sur un panneau et effectuez un défilement à la verticale pour modifier les vues dans le panneau actif et le panneau situé à côté. Effectuez un défilement à l'horizontale pour modifier les vues dans le panneau actif et le panneau situé au-dessous ou en dessous. 5 Choisissez Fenêtre > Supprimer le fractionnement pour revenir à un seul panneau. Affichage d'un document dans plusieurs fenêtres Vous pouvez créer plusieurs fenêtres pour un même document grâce à la commande Nouvelle fenêtre. Les nouvelles fenêtres ont les mêmes taille, facteur de zoom et disposition que la fenêtre d'origine. Elles s'ouvrent à la même page, en haut de la fenêtre d'origine. Lorsque vous ouvrez une nouvelle fenêtre, Acrobat ajoute le suffixe 1 au nom de fichier d'origine et affecte le suffixe 2 à la nouvelle fenêtre. Vous pouvez ouvrir plusieurs fenêtres. Le suffixe augmente pour chaque nouvelle fenêtre. La fermeture d'une fenêtre entraîne la renumérotation séquentielle des fenêtres encore ouvertes. En d'autres termes, si cinq fenêtres sont ouvertes et que vous fermez la troisième, les fenêtres sont renumérotées avec les suffixes 1 à 4. Remarque : Cette fonction n'est pas disponible lorsque les documents PDF sont affichées dans un navigateur. Ouverture d'une nouvelle fenêtre ? Choisissez Fenêtre > Nouvelle fenêtre.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 48 Espace de travail Fermeture d'une fenêtre ? Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la fenêtre. Le système vous invite à enregistrer les modifications. La fermeture d'une fenêtre ne ferme pas le document si plusieurs fenêtres sont ouvertes. Fermeture de toutes les fenêtres d'un document ? Choisissez Fichier > Fermer. Vous êtes invité à enregistrer les modifications avant la fermeture de chaque fenêtre. Affichage d'un document PDF en mode Epaisseurs de trait La vue Epaisseurs de trait affiche les traits contenant les épaisseurs définies dans le document PDF. La vue Epaisseurs de trait applique une épaisseur de contour constante (d'un pixel) aux traits, quel que soit le facteur de zoom appliqué. Lorsque vous imprimez le document, l'épaisseur de contour correspond à l'épaisseur réelle. ? Choisissez Affichage > Epaisseurs de trait. Pour désactiver le mode Epaisseurs de trait, choisissez à nouveau Affichage > Epaisseurs de trait. Remarque : Si vous affichez des documents PDF dans un navigateur Web, vous ne pourrez pas désactiver le mode Epaisseurs de trait. Grilles, repères et mesures Affichage des grilles Les grilles permettent d'aligner avec précision le texte et les objets d'un document. Lorsque la grille est activée, elle apparaît sur le document. L'option Aligner sur la grille aligne un objet sur la ligne de grille la plus proche lorsque vous le déplacez. Affichage ou masquage de la grille ? Choisissez Affichage > Grille. Une coche précède le nom de la commande lorsque la grille est affichée. Activation ou désactivation de l'option Accrocher à la grille ? Choisissez Affichage > Aligner sur la grille. Une coche apparaît en regard du nom de la commande lorsqu'elle est activée. Modification de l'aspect de la grille 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Pour modifier les paramètres de la grille, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier l'espacement entre les lignes de la grille, saisissez des valeurs pour les options Largeur des cellules et Hauteur des cellules. • Pour modifier l'origine de la grille, saisissez des valeurs pour les options Décalage par rapport au bord gauche et Décalage par rapport au bord supérieur. • Pour modifier le nombre de subdivisions de quadrillage, saisissez une valeur pour l'option Subdivisions. Les lignes de subdivision sont plus claires que celles de la grille. • Pour modifier la couleur des lignes de la grille, cliquez sur la nuance de couleur et choisissez une couleur dans la palette qui s'affiche.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 49 Espace de travail Création de repères de règle Les règles horizontales et verticales vous permettent de vérifier la taille des objets contenus dans des documents. Vous pouvez également créer des repères dans votre document. Ils se révèlent particulièrement utiles pour aligner des objets, tels que les champs de formulaire. Vous avez la possibilité de changer les unités de mesure et les couleurs utilisées dans les règles. Création de repères de règle 1 Choisissez Affichage > Règles. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser la règle horizontale vers le bas pour créer un repère horizontal ou la règle verticale vers la droite pour créer un repère vertical. • Cliquez deux fois sur un emplacement de la règle horizontale pour créer un repère vertical ou inversement. Affichage ou masquage des repères ? Choisissez Affichage > Repères. Déplacement ou suppression d'un repère de règle ? Cliquez sur un repère pour le sélectionner, puis faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement ou appuyez sur la touche de suppression. Pour supprimer tous les repères, cliquez dans la zone de la règle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Effacer tous les repères ou Effacer les repères de la page. Changement des couleurs de repères 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur des repères et choisissez une nouvelle couleur dans la palette qui s'affiche. Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l'aire d'un objet Servez-vous des outils de mesure pour mesurer l'aire des objets contenus dans des documents PDF ou la distance qui les sépare. Les outils de mesure sont très pratiques pour calculer les distances et les aires des objets d'un formulaire ou d'un dessin de CAO. Vous pouvez également les utiliser pour mesurer certaines zones d'un document avant d'envoyer celui-ci sur une imprimante professionnelle. Les outils de mesure sont uniquement disponibles si l'auteur du fichier PDF a activé cette fonctionnalité pour les utilisateurs de Reader. Lorsque vous utilisez un outil de mesure, la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures contient diverses informations au sujet de la mesure (opération en cours, valeurs delta et rapport d'échelle appliqué, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 50 Espace de travail Outils de mesure A. Barre d'outils Mesures B. Objet mesuré C. Fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Mesures. 2 Pour mesurer des zones de vos documents PDF, procédez de l'une des façons suivantes : • Activez l'outil Distance pour mesurer la distance entre deux points. Cliquez sur le premier point, déplacez le pointeur sur le second point et cliquez de nouveau. • Activez l'outil Périmètre pour mesurer une série de distances entre plusieurs points. Cliquez sur chaque point à mesurer. Cliquez ensuite deux fois sur le dernier point. • Activez l'outil Aire pour mesurer l'aire des segments de ligne que vous tracez. Cliquez sur chaque point à mesurer. Après avoir cliqué sur les deux derniers points, cliquez de nouveau sur le premier pour valider la mesure. 3 Lorsque vous mesurez des objets, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour accrocher la mesure à une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux tracés . • Pour accrocher la mesure à l'extrémité d'une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux extrémités . • Pour accrocher la mesure au milieu d'une ligne, choisissez Accrocher aux points centraux . • Pour accrocher la mesure à l'intersection de plusieurs lignes, choisissez Accrocher aux intersections . • Pour déplacer les traits de mesure par incrément de 45º, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée. • Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler la mesure. • Pour supprimer une annotation de mesure, cliquez dessus avec l'outil Mesures et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Voir aussi « Modification de l'aspect des commentaires » à la page 166 Options de l'outil de mesure Servez-vous du menu contextuel pour définir les options de l'outil de mesure. Modifier le rapport d'échelle Permet de changer le facteur d'échelle (3:2, par exemple) et l'unité de mesure sur des zones de dessin. Modifier le libellé de l'annotation Permet d'ajouter ou de changer le texte associé à la mesure. A C BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 51 Espace de travail Activer/Désactiver les annotations de mesure Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont activées, les traits de mesure que vous tracez sont ajoutés au document PDF. Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont désactivées, les traits de mesure disparaissent dès que vous mesurez un autre objet ou sélectionnez un autre outil. Activer/Désactiver ortho Si vous choisissez Activer ortho, les traits de mesure sont des traits orthographiques uniquement. Afficher/Masquer les règles Affiche ou masque les règles verticales et horizontales sur la page. (A le même effet que la commande Affichage > Règles.) Accrocher au contenu de la page/Ne pas accrocher au contenu de la page Active ou désactive toutes les fonctions d'accrochage à la page. Annotation de mesure Enregistre, dans un fichier CSV, les données relatives à toutes les mesures effectuées dans votre document PDF. Préférences Donne accès aux préférences de mesure 2D. Préférences de mesure Les préférences de mesure 2D déterminent le mode de mesure des données 2D. Remarque : Dans Reader, les préférences de mesure s'appliquent aux fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaire est activée. Utiliser l'échelle et les unités du document (le cas échéant) Lorsque cette option est activée, ce sont les mesures basées sur les unités provenant du document d'origine qui sont utilisées. Désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement les unités de mesure. Utiliser les traits orthographiques Si vous choisissez Activer ortho, les traits de mesure sont des traits orthographiques uniquement. Couleur du trait de mesure Indique la couleur du trait affiché. Activer les annotations de mesure Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont activées, les traits de mesure que vous tracez sont ajoutés au document PDF. Lorsque les annotations de mesure sont désactivées, les traits de mesure disparaissent dès que vous mesurez un autre objet ou sélectionnez un autre outil. Vous pouvez utiliser les libellés de mesure par défaut ou spécifier vos propres libellés. Utiliser la longueur de la ligne de repère par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Lorsque cette option est désactivée, chaque fois que vous mesurez une distance, il est nécessaire de déplacer la souris pour déterminer la longueur de la ligne de repère. Extrémité de trait par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Indique l'aspect des extrémités de la ligne lors des mesures des distances. Légende (outil Distance uniquement) Indique si la légende de la mesure de la distance doit figurer au niveau ou audessus du trait de mesure. Longueur de la ligne de repère par défaut (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la longueur de la ligne de repère affichée de l'un des côtés des points de mesure. Ligne d'attache par défaut au-dessus du trait (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la longueur de la ligne d'attache affichée au-dessus du trait de mesure. Décalage de la ligne de repère par défaut à partir des points (outil Distance uniquement) Indique la quantité d'espace comprise entre les points de mesure et la ligne de repère.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 52 Espace de travail Paramètres d'accrochage 2D Ces paramètres permettent de définir le comportement d'accrochage. L'option Sensibilité indique la distance à laquelle le pointeur doit se trouver de l'élément d'accrochage. L'option Couleur du conseil d'accrochage permet de choisir la couleur de la ligne d'accrochage visible lorsque le pointeur est placé sur l'objet Affichage des coordonnées du curseur L'option Coordonnées du curseur permet d'afficher la position du pointeur dans le panneau de visualisation. La numérotation de la position commence à partir du coin supérieur gauche du document. L'option Coordonnées du curseur indique également la largeur et la hauteur d'un objet sélectionné à mesure que vous le redimensionnez. Affichage des coordonnées X et Y 1 Choisissez Affichage > Coordonnées du curseur. 2 Déplacez le pointeur de la souris de manière à voir les coordonnées X et Y. Changement des unités de mesure de l'outil Coordonnées du curseur 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Unités et repères. 2 Dans le menu Unités de page et de règle, choisissez une unité de mesure différente. Organiseur Présentation de la fenêtre de l'organiseur L'organiseur vous aide à rechercher des fichiers PDF que vous avez déjà ouverts et d'autres que vous avez organisés en collections et favoris. Grâce à l'organiseur, vous pouvez visualiser les vignettes des pages PDF afin d'identifier rapidement les fichiers. Utilisez l'organiseur pour classer des fichiers PDF apparentés sans les déplacer dans la structure de fichiers. Il vous permet également de rechercher, de localiser et de trier rapidement des documents PDF consultés récemment. L'organiseur et les commandes associées sont disponibles à partir du menu Fichier. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers au sein de l'organiseur, vous pouvez lancer une des nombreuses tâches par l'intermédiaire des boutons situés au-dessus de la liste des fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 53 Espace de travail Fenêtre Organiseur sous Windows A. Panneau des catégories B. Panneau des fichiers C. Panneau des pages Panneau des catégories Le panneau des catégories de la fenêtre de l'organiseur est divisé en sections verticales comptant plusieurs catégories. Ces éléments ont pour objectif de faciliter l'identification et l'organisation de fichiers stockés sur votre ordinateur, sur le réseau et sur Internet. Historique Contient des sous-catégories qui répertorient tous les fichiers PDF ouverts pendant la période spécifiée. Vous ne pouvez pas modifier le nom des sous-catégories ni ajouter manuellement de fichiers PDF à l'historique. Ce dernier est mis à jour automatiquement à chaque fois que vous ouvrez un fichier PDF et en fonction du temps qui passe. Vous pouvez, cependant, effacer tout l'historique par le biais du bouton Effacer l'historique du panneau des fichiers. Vous avez également la possibilité de spécifier la longueur maximale de l'historique des fichiers ou de désactiver cette fonction. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et, sous Documents, sélectionnez une valeur pour l'option Conserver les fichiers dans l'historique de l'organiseur pendant. Poste de travail Recense les disques durs et les dossiers figurant dans l'arborescence actuelle. Cette catégorie se révèle particulièrement utile si vous savez où se trouve un fichier PDF particulier. Emplacements favoris Recense les dossiers, emplacements réseau et répertoires Web définis en tant que destinations favorites. Cette catégorie fonctionne comme les signets et destinations favorites utilisés pour accéder plus rapidement à un emplacement à partir d'un navigateur Web. Dans ce cas, cependant, les destinations sont des dossiers ou des disques durs contenant des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des destinations dans la liste Emplacements favoris, mais vous ne pouvez pas modifier les noms de destination. Collections Contiennent des dossiers de collection qui répertorient tous les fichiers PDF que vous avez associés à chacun de ces dossiers. Chaque dossier de collection peut pointer vers plusieurs fichiers PDF, quel que soit leur emplacement. Par exemple, un seul dossier de collection peut répertorier des fichiers PDF situés dans différents dossiers sur votre ordinateur, sur un réseau et sur Internet. Vous pouvez modifier le nom de chaque dossier de collection, en ajouter de nouveaux et insérer des fichiers PDF dans chaque dossier de collection. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 54 Espace de travail Remarque : Les collections et les porte-documents PDF contiennent tous plusieurs documents PDF, mais de manières différentes. Un porte-documents PDF est lui-même un fichier PDF pouvant se composer de plusieurs fichiers PDF ; il est situé dans un dossier stocké sur votre ordinateur. Il est ainsi tout à fait possible de joindre un porte-documents PDF à un message électronique. Les collections s'apparentent aux mémos facilitant la recherche de fichiers connexes pouvant être disséminés sur votre ordinateur. Panneau des fichiers Le panneau des fichiers de la fenêtre Organiseur répertorie les fichiers PDF inclus dans la sous-catégorie ou le dossier sélectionné(s) dans le panneau des catégories. Chaque liste inclut le nom du fichier, la date de modification, le nombre de pages, la taille du fichier et l'emplacement correspondants, ainsi qu'une vignette de la première page. Vous pouvez trier la liste par nom de fichier, métadonnées, nombre de pages, taille du fichier, date de modification et date de la dernière ouverture. Les boutons situés en haut de la fenêtre de l'organiseur permettent d'ouvrir, d'imprimer, d'envoyer par messagerie ou de combiner un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF sélectionnés. En outre, vous pouvez envoyer un fichier PDF à des fins de révision ou d'approbation. Panneau des pages Le panneau des pages de la fenêtre Organiseur affiche des vignettes pour chaque page de tous les fichiers PDF sélectionnés dans le panneau des fichiers. Le curseur et les boutons de zoom situés au bas du panneau des pages vous permet d'ajuster la taille des vignettes de page. La sélection d'un document PDF (à gauche) entraîne l'affichage d'une vignette par page dans le panneau des pages (à droite). Ajustement de la fenêtre Organiseur Vous pouvez modifier l'affichage de l'organiseur. Voir aussi « Autres options de combinaison de fichiers » à la page 119 « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 152 Affichage de la fenêtre Organiseur ? Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > Ouvrir l'organiseur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 55 Espace de travail Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF faisant partie d'une collection, créer une collection, ajouter un document PDF ouvert à une collection ou ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir de l'historique des fichiers PDF ouverts, vous n'avez pas nécessairement à ouvrir la fenêtre Organiseur. Choisissez Fichier > Organiseur ou Fichier > Historique pour accéder aux commandes permettant d'exécuter ces opérations. Redimensionnement de la fenêtre Organiseur et de ses panneaux • Pour redimensionner un panneau par rapport aux autres, faites glisser la ligne verticale qui sépare deux panneaux. • Pour redimensionner la fenêtre Organiseur, faites glisser le bord gauche, droit ou inférieur de la fenêtre. Tri de la liste du panneau des fichiers 1 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier du panneau des catégories pour afficher les documents PDF dans le panneau des fichiers. 2 Dans le panneau des fichiers , effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour trier la liste des fichiers PDF en fonction d'une propriété précise, choisissez celle-ci dans le menu Trier par. • Pour modifier l'ordre de tri, cliquez sur le bouton Ordre de tri croissant ou Ordre de tri décroissant à droite du menu Trier par. • Pour afficher l'emplacement des fichiers PDF sélectionnés, cliquez sur le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Afficher dans l'Explorateur. Organisation des collections PDF Vous pouvez gérer les collections PDF dans la fenêtre Organiseur. Ajout d'un document PDF à une collection ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la collection avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. • Cliquez sur le fichier PDF dans le panneau des fichiers avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter à une collection > [nom de la collection]. • Faites glisser un fichier PDF à partir du bureau ou d'un dossier vers la collection voulue affichée dans le panneau des catégories. • Après avoir sélectionné une sous-catégorie dans la catégorie Historique, Poste de travail ou Emplacements favoris, faites glisser un fichier PDF à partir du panneau des fichiers vers la collection voulue. • Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le document PDF, puis choisissez Fichier > Organiseur > Ajouter à une collection. Sélectionnez ensuite la collection à laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter le document PDF ou cliquez sur Créer une collection, saisissez un nom, puis cliquez sur Créer. Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir d'une collection, utilisez le bouton Ouvrir dans la fenêtre Organiseur ou choisissez tout simplement le nom du fichier PDF dans un sous-menu, directement dans Acrobat. Pour ouvrir un fichier PDF à partir d'une collection dans Acrobat, choisissez Collections > [nom de collection] > [nom du fichier PDF] dans le sous-menu Fichier > Organiseur ou dans le menu Organiseur de la barre d'outils Fichier. Modification des dossiers de collections • Pour renommer une collection, cliquez sur son nom avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Renommer la collection, puis saisissez le nouveau nom.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 56 Espace de travail • Pour supprimer une collection, cliquez sur son nom avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Supprimer la collection, puis cliquez sur Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation. Les fichiers PDF inclus dans la collection ne sont pas supprimés de leur emplacement d'origine. • Pour créer une collection, cliquez sur le bouton Créer une collection dans la fenêtre Organiseur. Une autre solution consiste, dans Acrobat, à choisir Fichier > Organiseur > Créer une collection. Attribuez un nom à la collection. Déplacement d'un document PDF vers une autre collection ? Pour transférer le fichier PDF d'une collection à une autre, sélectionnez la collection où il se trouve, cliquez sur le fichier PDF en question avec le bouton droit de la souris dans le panneau des fichiers, puis choisissez Déplacer vers la collection > [nom de la collection]. Suppression d'un fichier PDF d'une collection ? Pour supprimer un document PDF d'une collection, sélectionnez la collection, cliquez sur le fichier PDF dans le panneau des fichiers, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Organisation de documents PDF à l'aide de la catégorie Emplacements favoris 1 Pour ajouter un dossier ou un disque dur existant à la catégorie, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un emplacement favori , sélectionnez un dossier ou un disque dur, puis cliquez sur OK. 2 Pour supprimer un dossier ou un disque dur de la liste des emplacements favoris, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer [nom du dossier] des emplacements favoris. Développement de vues dans le panneau des catégories Vous pouvez développer ou réduire les éléments du panneau des catégories de manière à voir plus clairement la structure. Lorsque vous sélectionnez une catégorie de dates, un dossier ou une collection, tous les fichiers PDF associés sont répertoriés dans le panneau des pages. Développement d'une catégorie de l'organiseur 1 Cliquez sur l'icône située à gauche de la catégorie ou du dossier. 2 Sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier sous une catégorie principale. Développement de la structure de fichiers ? Sélectionnez un dossier dans la catégorie Poste de travail. Tous les fichiers PDF inclus dans ce dossier sont répertoriés dans le panneau des fichiers. Lancement d'une tâche à partir du panneau des fichiers de l'organiseur 1 Dans le panneau des catégories, sélectionnez une sous-catégorie ou un dossier dans une catégorie principale afin d'afficher les fichiers PDF dans ce panneau. 2 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers. 3 Pour effectuer une action sur les fichiers PDF sélectionnés, cliquez sur l'un des boutons de tâche situés en haut de la fenêtre de l'organiseur : • Pour ouvrir, imprimer ou envoyer par messagerie des fichiers PDF, utilisez les boutons au-dessus du panneau des fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 57 Espace de travail • Pour combiner des fichiers PDF en un seul fichier PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Combiner des fichiers, puis suivez les instructions de l'assistant. • Pour lancer une révision, sélectionnez le document PDF, puis choisissez le menu Envoyer en révision > Envoyer en révision partagée ou Envoyer en révision > Envoyer par messagerie pour révision. Voir aussi « Autres options de combinaison de fichiers » à la page 119 « Lancement d'une révision » à la page 152 Effacement de l'historique des fichiers PDF ouverts 1 Sélectionnez une sous-catégorie d'historique dans le panneau des catégories. 2 Cliquez sur Effacer l'historique dans le panneau des fichiers. Maintenance du logiciel A propos des mises à jour Il existe diverses méthodes pour mettre à jour les fichiers d'application et composants d'Acrobat. Certaines mises à jour sont disponibles à l'ouverture d'un document PDF, laquelle déclenche l'opération. Par exemple, si vous ouvrez un formulaire utilisant des polices asiatiques, vous êtes invité à télécharger ces polices. D'autres mises à jour sont uniquement disponibles à partir du menu Aide et doivent être installées manuellement. Certaines mises à jour sont disponibles à la fois automatiquement et manuellement. Selon la configuration des préférences, le téléchargement des mises à jour peut être effectué à l'arrière-plan. Mise à jour du logiciel ? Choisissez Aide > Vérifier les mises à jour et suivez les instructions à l'écran. Modification des préférences de mise à jour 1 Choisissez Aide > Rechercher les mises à jour. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue de mise à jour Adobe, cliquez sur Préférences. 3 Sélectionnez la vérification automatique des mises à jour d'Adobe. Ensuite, indiquez si la vérification automatique doit être hebdomadaire ou mensuelle et si vous souhaitez ou non confirmer à chaque fois le téléchargement des mises à jour. 4 Assurez-vous que l'application en cours d'exécution (Adobe Reader ou Adobe Acrobat) est sélectionnée comme le logiciel à mettre à jour. 5 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Parcourir pour accéder à l'emplacement où vous souhaitez stocker les mises à jour.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 58 Espace de travail Gestion des paramètres de sécurité Si votre société utilise des stratégies de protection serveur, vous pouvez configurer Acrobat de façon à vérifier régulièrement si ces stratégies ont fait l'objet de mises à jour. La protection serveur est mise en place par l'administrateur qui fournit l'adresse URL à partir de laquelle les mises à jour sont obtenues. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Protection. 2 Dans la section Paramètres de protection, sélectionnez Charger les paramètres de protection à partir d'un serveur. 3 Saisissez l'adresse du serveur dans le champ URL. 4 Choisissez la fréquence à laquelle vous souhaitez vérifier les mises à jour de la fonction de protection. 5 Choisissez Demander avant d'installer pour recevoir une notification avant chaque vérification. Gestion des modules externes Les modules externes ajoutent des fonctionnalités mais exigent davantage de mémoire que l'application seule. Afin de limiter le volume de mémoire nécessaire, installez seulement les modules externes que vous comptez utiliser. Pour un chargement correct, ils doivent se trouver dans le dossier Plug-ins. Il est également possible de désactiver temporairement les modules externes lorsque vous lancez le logiciel. Désactivation d'un module externe 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Windows) Ouvrez le dossier plug_ins (Program Files\Adobe\Acrobat 9.0\Acrobat\plug_ins). • (Mac OS) Cliquez sur l'icône de l'application en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée, puis choisissez Afficher le contenu du progiciel. Ensuite, cliquez deux fois sur le dossier de contenu et ouvrez le dossier des modules externes. • (UNIX) Déplacez le module externe hors de [emplacement d'installation]/Adobe/Reader9.0/Reader/plug_ins. 2 Sélectionnez les modules externes que vous ne voulez pas charger, puis retirez-les du dossier. Certains d'entre eux peuvent se trouver dans des sous-dossiers du dossier Plug-ins. Désactivation temporaire de tous les modules externes ? Appuyez sur la touche Maj immédiatement après le lancement d'Acrobat. Adobe Digital Editions Utilisez le logiciel gratuit Adobe ® Digital Editions pour lire et organiser des livres électroniques ou autres publications. Digital Editions est une application RIA (Rich Internet Application) Internet autonome remplaçant les fonctions de livre électronique (eBook) des versions antérieures d'Acrobat. Lorsque vous installez Digital Editions, les éléments de votre bibliorom existant sont automatiquement importés et mis à disposition au sein du nouvel univers du bibliorom de Digital Editions. Vous pouvez également importer manuellement des documents PDF dans votre bibliorom Digital Editions. Remarque : Le logiciel Adobe Digital Editions est automatiquement installé sur votre ordinateur la première fois que vous ouvrez un livre électronique (eBook). Pour plus de détails sur Adobe Digital Editions et sur le téléchargement du logiciel, consultez le site Web d'Adobe à la page www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_digital_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 59 Espace de travail Langues non anglo-saxonnes Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques Acrobat permet d'afficher, de rechercher et d'imprimer des documents PDF contenant du texte en langues asiatiques (chinois traditionnel, chinois simplifié, japonais ou coréen). Vous pouvez également utiliser ces langues lorsque vous remplissez des formulaires, ajoutez des commentaires et apposez des signatures numériques. Presque toutes les fonctions Acrobat sont prises en charge pour du texte chinois traditionnel ou simplifié, japonais et coréen si vous installez les polices asiatiques. Dans Acrobat sous Windows, installez les fichiers de prise en charge des langues asiatiques via l'installation personnalisée et les options correspondantes disponibles sous Créer un fichier Adobe PDF et Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu. Lors de la création d'un fichier PDF, PDFMaker et l'imprimante Adobe PDF incorporent automatiquement la plupart des polices asiatiques dans le fichier. Vous pouvez spécifier si vous voulez incorporer des polices asiatiques. Sous Windows, vous pouvez afficher et imprimer les fichiers contenant du texte asiatique même si la prise en charge de ces langues n'est pas installée sur votre système. Si vous essayez d'ouvrir un fichier PDF nécessitant la prise en charge d'une langue, vous êtes automatiquement invité à installer les polices requises. Fichiers PDF en cyrillique, en langues d'Europe centrale et d'Europe de l'Est Vous pouvez utiliser des fichiers Adobe PDF contenant du texte cyrillique (y compris bulgare et russe), d'Europe centrale et d'Europe de l'Est (y compris tchèque, hongrois et polonais) si les polices sont incorporées dans les fichiers PDF. Il est alors possible de les afficher et de les imprimer sur n'importe quel système. L'incorporation des polices n'est pas nécessaire pour utiliser la fonction de recherche. Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans lequel des champs de formulaire ou des zones de texte contiennent ces langues, mais que les polices ne sont pas incorporées ni installées sur le système, choisissez Aide > Rechercher les mises à jour maintenant. Vous êtes automatiquement invité à télécharger et à installer les polices nécessaires. Fichiers PDF en hébreu, en arabe, en thaï et en vietnamien Acrobat prend en charge la saisie et l'affichage de textes en thaï et en vietnamien. Sous Windows uniquement, l'arabe et l'hébreu sont également pris en charge. L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est activée par défaut si vous utilisez les paramètres régionaux correspondant à l'arabe ou à l'hébreu (sous Windows). Activation des langues se lisant de droite à gauche L'activation des options de langues se lisant de droite à gauche permet d'afficher les éléments de l'interface utilisateur définissant le sens de lecture des paragraphes, le style des chiffres et la ligature. Si cette option est activée, vous pouvez spécifier le sens de l'écriture (de gauche à droite ou de droite à gauche) et le type des chiffres (occidental ou arabe) utilisé pour créer et remplir certains champs de formulaire, apposer des signatures numériques et créer des annotations de type zone de texte. L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est activée par défaut si vous utilisez les paramètres régionaux correspondant à l'arabe ou à l'hébreu. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Internationales. 2 Cochez la case Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 60 Espace de travail Acrobat sous Mac OS Acrobat fonctionne, en principe, de la même manière sous Windows et sous Mac OS. Les quelques exceptions sont signalées dans l'aide. Voici, en outre, la liste des principales différences à connaître : Raccourcis-clavier et fonctionnalités classiques Ouverture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences Pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Préférences sous Mac OS, choisissez Acrobat > Préférences. Développement d'une liste imbriquée Certains articles, tels que les signets, figurent parfois dans des listes imbriquées que vous pouvez développer ou réduire. Pour développer une liste sous Mac OS, cliquez sur le triangle pointant vers la droite à gauche de l'icône. Cliquez sur le triangle pointant vers le bas pour réduire la liste. Pour développer ou réduire tous les articles dans une liste constituée de plusieurs sous-niveaux, cliquez sur le triangle en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée. PDFMaker PDFMaker n'est pas disponible sous Mac OS. Il est possible, malgré tout, de créer un fichier PDF depuis de nombreuses applications de bureautique à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Imprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression, choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu Imprimante. Voir aussi « Raccourcis clavier » à la page 394 Windows Mac OS Cliquer avec le bouton droit Cliquer en maintenant la touche Contrôle enfoncée Alt Option Ctrl+[caractère] Commande+[caractère] Cliquer en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée Cliquer en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée Faire glisser le pointeur en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée Faire glisser le pointeur en maintenant la touche Option enfoncée Poste de travail [nom du disque] Explorateur Windows Finder61 Chapitre 3 : Création d'un fichier PDF Le format Adobe® PDF est la solution idéale pour la capture d'informations à partir de n'importe quelle application et quel que soit le système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir de pages vierges, de fichiers document, de sites Web, de documents papier numérisés et du contenu du Presse-papiers. Présentation de la création d'un fichier PDF Quelle est la meilleure manière de créer un fichier PDF ? La création d'un fichier PDF consiste à convertir des documents et des ressources d'un autre type au format PDF (Portable Document Format). Vous pouvez normalement choisir entre plusieurs méthodes de création, selon le type de fichier source et vos exigences concernant le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir de documents imprimés sur papier, de documents Microsoft Word, de fichiers InDesign® et d'images numériques, pour ne citer que quelques exemples. En fonction du type de la source, différents outils sont disponibles pour la conversion au format PDF. Dans la majorité des applications, vous créez un document PDF en sélectionnant l'imprimante Adobe PDF dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Si un fichier est ouvert dans l'application de création (par exemple, une feuille de calcul dans Excel), vous pouvez normalement le convertir au format PDF sans ouvrir Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard. De même, si Acrobat est déjà ouvert, il n'est pas nécessaire d'ouvrir l'application de création du fichier à convertir. Chaque fichier PDF établit un juste équilibre entre efficacité (taille de fichier réduite) et qualité (par exemple, résolution et couleurs). Si cet équilibre est essentiel dans votre cas, vous opterez pour une méthode permettant l'accès à divers paramètres de conversion. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF par un glisser-déposer de fichiers sur l'icône Acrobat. Dans ce cas, Acrobat applique les derniers paramètres de conversion utilisés sans vous y donner accès. Si vous souhaitez maîtriser davantage le processus de conversion, une autre méthode s'avère plus appropriée. Pour plus d'informations au sujet de la création de fichiers PDF, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Forums de la communauté d'utilisateurs Acrobat : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Création de fichiers PDF cohérents : www.adobe.com/cfusion/designcenter/search.cfm?product=Acrobat&go=Go • Création de fichiers PDF sur un Mac ou sous Windows : www.performancegraphics.com/Pages/howtof.html Voir aussi « Création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge » à la page 65 Méthodes de création d'un fichier PDF par type de fichier Reportez-vous aux listes suivantes afin de connaître les méthodes disponibles pour les différentes types de fichier. Principaux fichiers Ces méthodes s'appliquent aux documents et aux images présentés dans presque tous les formats de fichier. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 62 Création d'un fichier PDF Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans la plupart des applications, dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier. Menu contextuel Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Documents papier Nécessite un scanner et une copie papier du document. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un scanner. Ou, pour les documents papier déjà numérisés, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier. Menu Document Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande Numériser au format PDF. Documents Microsoft Office PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) Dans l'application de création, via la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et le menu Adobe PDF. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, sur le ruban Acrobat. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application d'origine, à partir de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer (Windows uniquement) Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier. Menu contextuel (Windows uniquement) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Messages électroniques PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) A partir de Microsoft Outlook ou de Lotus Notes, par un clic sur les boutons de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker. Autre solution : choisir les commandes disponibles dans le menu Adobe PDF (Outlook) ou Actions (Lotus Notes). Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application de messagerie, à partir de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Crée un fichier PDF (et non un porte-documents PDF). Menu contextuel (Outlook 2007 uniquement) Disponible pour un dossier de messages électroniques ou une sélection de messages, par un clic droit. Pages Web Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'une page Web. PDFMaker (Windows uniquement) Dans Internet Explorer ou en cours de modification dans l'application de création Web prenant en charge PDFMaker (telle que Word). Egalement sur la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou dans le menu Adobe PDF. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans Internet Explorer ou en cours de modification dans l'application de création Web (par exemple Word), dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier, en faisant glisser le fichier HTML. Menu contextuel (fichiers HTML) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic sur le fichier HTML avec le bouton droit de la souris. Contenu copié dans le Presse-papiers Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, en choisissant A partir du Presse-papiers (Windows, tout contenu) ou A partir de l'image du Presse-papiers (Mac OS, capture d'écran uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 63 Création d'un fichier PDF Fichiers PostScript et EPS Glisser-déposer Sur le bureau ou à partir d'un dossier, par glisser-déposer sur l'icône d'Acrobat Distiller ou dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller®. Double-clic (Fichiers PostScript® uniquement) Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier. Ouvrir, commande Dans Acrobat Distiller, dans le menu Fichier. Menu Créer un fichier PDF Dans Acrobat, à l'aide de la commande A partir d'un fichier. Imprimante Adobe PDF Dans l'application d'origine, à partir de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Menu contextuel Sur le bureau ou dans un dossier, par un clic avec le bouton droit. Compromis entre la qualité et la taille des fichiers PDF Vous avez à disposition divers paramètres permettant de garantir le juste équilibre entre taille de fichier, résolution et conformité à des normes spécifiques, entre autres facteurs, pour votre fichier PDF. La sélection dépend de la destination prévue du fichier PDF. Par exemple, un fichier PDF destiné à une impression commerciale de haute qualité utilisera des paramètres différents d'un fichier PDF voué à l'affichage à l'écran ou au téléchargement sur Internet. Une fois sélectionnés, les paramètres s'appliquent à la fois à PDFMaker, Acrobat et Acrobat Distiller. Cependant, certains paramètres sont limités à des contextes ou types de fichiers particuliers. Par exemple, les options PDFMaker peuvent varier d'une application Microsoft Office à l'autre. Par souci de simplicité, Acrobat propose des jeux prédéfinis de paramètres de conversion. Vous pouvez en outre créer, définir, enregistrer et réutiliser des jeux personnalisés, spécialement adaptés à vos besoins. Pour les documents numérisés, vous disposez de plusieurs paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation optimisés pour la numérisation de documents et d'images en couleurs ou en noir et blanc. Vous pouvez modifier ces paramètres prédéfinis ou créer les vôtres. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 97 Création d'un fichier PDF simple avec Acrobat Conversion d'un fichier au format PDF 1 Dans Acrobat, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un fichier. • Sur la barre d'outils, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et choisissez A partir d'un fichier. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, sélectionnez le fichier. Vous pouvez parcourir tous les types de fichiers ou en sélectionner un particulier dans le menu Fichiers de type. 3 Cliquez éventuellement sur Paramètres pour modifier les paramètres de conversion. Les options disponibles varient selon le type de fichier. Remarque : Le bouton Paramètres est indisponibles si vous choisissez Tous les fichiers comme type de fichier ou si aucun paramètre de conversion n'est disponible pour le type sélectionné. 4 Cliquez sur Ouvrir pour convertir le fichier au format PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 64 Création d'un fichier PDF Selon le type de fichier choisi, l'application de création s'ouvre automatiquement et une boîte de dialogue de progression s'affiche. Si le format du fichier n'est pas pris en charge, un message s'affiche pour vous indiquer que la conversion au format PDF est impossible. 5 Lorsque le nouveau fichier PDF s'ouvre, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer ou Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. S'il est destiné à une diffusion électronique, limitez le nom de fichier à huit caractères (sans espace) et adjoignez-lui l'extension .pdf. De cette manière, les programmes de messagerie électronique et les serveurs réseau ne tronqueront pas le nom du fichier PDF, qui s'ouvrira comme prévu. Voir aussi « Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker » à la page 79 « Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF » à la page 114 Création d'un fichier PDF par glisser-déposer Pour une plus grande efficacité, il est préférable de réserver cette méthode aux petits fichiers simples, tels que les fichiers image et les fichiers texte brut, lorsque l'équilibre entre taille de fichier et qualité de sortie n'est pas primordial. Cette technique applicable à de nombreux types de fichiers ne vous permet cependant pas d'ajuster les paramètres de conversion en cours de processus. 1 Sélectionnez les icônes d'un ou de plusieurs fichiers. 2 Faites-les glisser vers l'icône de l'application Acrobat. Autre solution possible (sous Windows uniquement), faites glisser les icônes dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat ouverte. Si un message s'affiche indiquant que le fichier ne peut être ouvert dans Acrobat, cela signifie que ce type de fichier ne permet pas la conversion au format PDF par glisser-déposer. Utilisez une autre des méthodes de conversion disponibles pour ce fichier. Remarque : Vous pouvez également convertir des fichier PostScript et EPS au format PDF en les faisant glisser dans la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller ou sur l'icône de cette application. 3 Enregistrez le document PDF. (Windows uniquement) Vous pouvez également cliquer sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris dans l'Explorateur Windows et choisir Créer un fichier PDF. Conversion du contenu du Presse-papiers au format PDF (Windows) Vous pouvez créer des fichiers PDF à partir du texte et d'images que vous copiez depuis n'importe quelle application. 1 Capturez le contenu du Presse-papiers, soit en utilisant la commande Copier de l'application source, soit en appuyant sur la touche Impr. Ecran. 2 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir du Presse-papiers. Remarque : La commande A partir du Presse-Papiers s'affiche uniquement lorsqu'un contenu a été copié dans le Pressepapiers. Si le Presse-papiers est vide, la commande est grisée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 65 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion de captures d'écran au format PDF (Mac OS) Sous Mac OS, vous avez la possibilité de créer des fichiers PDF à partir de captures d'écran. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > [A partir de la capture d'écran, A partir de la capture de fenêtre ou A partir de la capture de sélection]. • Servez-vous de l'utilitaire Capture (disponible via Applications > Utilitaires > Capture) afin de capturer une image d'écran, puis choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier l'image dans le Presse-papiers. Lancez ensuite Acrobat, puis choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir de l'image du Presse-Papiers. Remarque : La commande A partir de l'image du Presse-Papiers s'affiche uniquement lorsqu'une image a été copiée dans le Presse-papiers. Si le Presse-papiers est vide ou s'il contient du texte, la commande n'apparaît pas. Création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge Grâce à la fonction d'éditeur PDF, vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF à partir d'une page vierge (plutôt que d'un fichier), d'une image du Presse-papiers ou d'une numérisation. Cette méthode peut s'avérer utile lors de la création de fichiers PDF relativement petits, d'une vingtaine de pages au maximum. Dans le cas de documents plus longs, plus complexes ou au formatage conséquent, il est en général plus indiqué de créer le document source dans une application qui offrira davantage d'options de mise en page et de formatage, par exemple Adobe InDesign ou Microsoft Word. Remarque : L'éditeur PDF permet uniquement d'effectuer des modifications de texte dans les fichiers PDF créés à partir de pages vierges. Pour insérer une page vierge dans un document PDF créé d'une autre manière, créez un document vierge dans une autre application, puis convertissez ce fichier au format PDF. Importez ensuite le fichier vide dans le document PDF existant. Création d'un fichier PDF vierge et ajout de texte 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page vierge. 2 Commencez à saisir le texte à ajouter à la page. 3 Pour formater le texte, sélectionnez-le puis choisissez les options qui vous intéressent sur la barre d'outils Nouveau document. 4 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez d'autres outils et options. 5 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. Remarque : Dès que la page est remplie de texte, l'éditeur PDF ajoute automatiquement une nouvelle page au document. Modification du texte dans un fichier PDF créé à partir d'une page vierge 1 Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir, puis localisez et sélectionnez un fichier PDF créé à l'aide de l'éditeur PDF (c'est-à-dire créé à partir d'une page vierge). 2 Choisissez Document > Reprendre la modification. 3 Ajoutez du texte et formatez-le comme vous le souhaitez. Prévention des modifications dans l'éditeur PDF Vous pouvez geler le texte que vous avez ajouté à un fichier PDF créé à partir d'une page vierge. Ainsi, personne ne peut en ajouter ou le modifier. Cette opération ne peut être annulée. 1 Choisissez Document > Interdire toute modification supplémentaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 66 Création d'un fichier PDF 2 Dans le message qui apparaît, cliquez sur Interdire toute modification supplémentaire. Ou cliquez sur Conserver le texte modifiable si vous souhaitez continuer à ajouter du texte ou à le modifier dans l'éditeur PDF. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier ou conservez le nom et l'emplacement existant afin de remplacer le fichier d'origine par la version non modifiable. Préférences de l'éditeur PDF Les préférences de l'éditeur PDF sont disponibles via la boîte de dialogue Préférences, dans la catégorie Nouveau document. Police Indique la famille de polices utilisée par défaut lors de la saisie sur une nouvelle page vierge. Corps Indique le corps de la police par défaut. Marges par défaut Spécifie la distance de décalage par rapport au bord de la page : Gauche, Droite, En haut, En bas. Format (dans la zone Page par défaut) Spécifie le format de papier standard, par exemple Lettre, Tabloïd, A4, etc. Orientation Indique si le bord long de la feuille est à l'horizontale (Paysage) ou à la verticale (Portrait). Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF Vous pouvez créer directement un fichier PDF à partir d'un document papier numérisé à l'aide d'un scanner et d'Acrobat. Sous Windows XP et Windows Vista, Acrobat prend en charge les pilotes de scanner TWAIN et WIA (Windows Image Acquisition). Sous Windows, lors de la création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner, vous pouvez choisir le paramètre prédéfini de numérisation le plus adapté au type de document en cours de conversion. (Les paramètres prédéfinis mis à disposition sont les suivants : Document en noir et blanc, Document en niveaux de gris, Document en couleurs et Image en couleurs). Autre solution possible, vous numérisez des documents à l'aide de paramètres personnalisés que vous pouvez ajuster dans les paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation. Remarque : La numérisation prédéfinie est uniquement disponible pour les pilotes de scanner prenant en charge le mode Masquer l'interface native du scanner. Les paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation ne sont pas disponibles sous Mac OS. Sous Windows, si un pilote WIA est installé pour votre scanner, vous pouvez également utiliser le bouton Numériser de votre appareil afin de créer un document PDF. Appuyez sur le bouton Numériser, puis sous Windows, choisissez Adobe Acrobat dans la liste des applications enregistrées. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat Scan, sélectionnez un scanner et un paramètre prédéfini de document ou l'option Numérisation personnalisée. Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF à l'aide d'un paramètre prédéfini (Windows) 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > [ paramètre prédéfini de document]. 2 Si vous êtes invité à numériser d'autres pages, sélectionnez Numériser davantage de pages ou Numérisation terminée, puis cliquez sur OK. Numérisation d'un document papier au format PDF sans recourir à des paramètres prédéfinis 1 Dans Acrobat, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Windows) Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > Numérisation personnalisée. • (Mac OS) Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 67 Création d'un fichier PDF 2 Sélectionnez les options de numérisation pertinentes dans la boîte de dialogue Numérisation personnalisée, puis cliquez sur Numériser. Remarque : Si vous spécifiez préférer utiliser l'interface utilisateur native du scanner plutôt que celle d'Acrobat, d'autres fenêtres ou boîtes de dialogue s'affichent. Pour plus de détails sur les options disponibles, consultez la documentation du scanner. Sous Mac OS, l'interface utilisateur du scanner est toujours visible. 3 Si vous êtes invité à numériser d'autres pages, sélectionnez Numériser davantage de pages ou Numérisation terminée, puis cliquez sur OK. Optimisation d'un document PDF numérisé 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF créé à partir d'un document numérisé. 2 Choisissez Document > Optimiser le fichier PDF numérisé. 3 Sélectionnez les options voulues dans la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK. Les options disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Optimiser le fichier PDF numérisé sont les mêmes que celles de la boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation, décrites à la section du même nom dans cette rubrique. Configuration de paramètres prédéfinis de numérisation (Windows) 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'un scanner > Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres prédéfinis : Document en noir et blanc, Document en niveaux de gris, Document en couleurs ou Image en couleurs. 3 Configurez les paramètres selon vos besoins. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour sauvegarder le paramètre prédéfini, puis sur OK. Options de numérisation Scanner Sélectionnez un scanner installé. Le logiciel de numérisation du fabricant doit être installé sur l'ordinateur. Sous Windows uniquement, cliquez sur le bouton Options afin de spécifier les options du scanner. Faces Spécifiez s'il s'agit d'une numérisation recto seul ou recto verso. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Recto verso alors que le scanner est configuré pour la numérisation recto seul, les paramètres du scanner prennent le pas sur ceux d'Acrobat. Remarque : Vous pouvez numériser le recto et le verso, même sur les scanners qui ne prennent pas en charge la numérisation recto verso. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Recto verso, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche après numérisation des rectos. Vous pouvez ensuite inverser les documents originaux dans le bac, sélectionnez Numériser le verso (recto de la feuille) dans la boîte de dialogue. Cette méthode génère un fichier PDF respectant l'ordre des pages. Mode colorimétrique (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez un mode colorimétrique de base (Couleur, Noir et blanc ou Niveaux de gris) pris en charge par le scanner. Cette option est activée si, dans les options de scanner, vous avez défini l'utilisation de la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat à la place de celle du scanner. Résolution (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez une résolution prise en charge par le scanner. Cette option est activée si, dans les options de scanner, vous avez défini l'utilisation de la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat à la place de celle du scanner. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez un mode colorimétrique ou une résolution non pris en charge par le scanner, un message s'affiche et la fenêtre de l'application du scanner s'ouvre. Sélectionnez les options appropriées dans la fenêtre de l'application du scanner. Format de papier (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez un format de papier ou définissez une largeur et une hauteur personnalisées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 68 Création d'un fichier PDF Inviter à numériser d'autres pages Lorsque cette case est cochée, une boîte de dialogue vous invitant à numériser d'autres pages s'affiche après la numérisation de chaque page. Créer un document PDF Crée un fichier PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Fichiers multiples Crée plusieurs fichiers à partir de multiples documents papier. Cliquez sur Options, puis indiquez si un porte-documents des fichiers doit être créé, précisez le nombre de pages de chaque fichier et tapez le préfixe de nom de fichier à utiliser. Ces options ne sont pas disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Ajouter à un fichier ou à un porte-documents existant Ajoute les pages numérisées à un fichier ou porte-documents PDF existant. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Configurer des paramètres prédéfinis. Petite taille/Qualité supérieure Utilisez le curseur afin d'équilibrer la taille de fichier et la qualité d'image. Cliquez sur Options pour personnaliser l'optimisation à l'aide de paramètres spécifiques de compression de fichier et de filtrage. Indexation (ROC) Activez cette option afin de convertir les images texte présentes dans le fichier PDF en texte indexable et sélectionnable. Cette option applique aux images de texte la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC), la reconnaissance des polices et celle des pages, puis les convertit en texte normal. Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option ajoute également des balises au document, afin de le rendre plus accessible aux personnes handicapées. Cliquez sur Options pour configurer des paramètres spécifiques dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Voir « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 70. Rendre compatible avec la norme PDF/A Sélectionnez cette option pour rendre le document PDF conforme aux normes ISO relatives à PDF/A-1b. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, seule la valeur Image indexable (exacte) du paramètre Style de sortie PDF est disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Ajouter des métadonnées Si cette option est sélectionnée, la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du document s'ouvre après la numérisation. Dans cette boîte de dialogue, vous pouvez ajouter au fichier PDF des métadonnées ou des informations relatives au document numérisé. Si vous créez plusieurs fichiers, vous avez la possibilité de définir des métadonnées communes à tous les fichiers. Boîte de dialogue Options de scanner Méthode de transfert des données Mode natif effectue le transfert selon le mode par défaut du scanner. Mode de mémoire est automatiquement sélectionné pour la numérisation à des résolutions supérieures à 600 ppp (points par pouce). Interface utilisateur L'option Masquer l'interface native du scanner permet de contourner les fenêtres et boîtes de dialogue fournies par le fabricant du scanner. Acrobat les remplace par la boîte de dialogue Numérisation personnalisée. Inverser les images en noir et blanc Cette option crée des images positives à partir de négatifs en noir et blanc, par exemple. Boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation La boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation permet de gérer le filtrage et la compression des images numérisées pour créer le fichier PDF. Les paramètres par défaut conviennent à un large éventail de documents, mais vous pouvez les personnaliser afin d'accroître la qualité des images, de réduire la taille des fichiers ou de remédier à des problèmes de numérisation. Automatique Applique les paramètres par défaut pour équilibrer la taille du fichier et la qualité d'image. • Optimisation importante Applique des paramètres qui réduisent la taille du fichier. Dans certains cas, la sélection de cette option a un effet négatif visible sur la qualité du fichier PDF numérisé.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 69 Création d'un fichier PDF Paramètres personnalisés Affiche des paramètres supplémentaires sous Compression et Filtrage, et désactive l'option Agressive sous Automatique. Si vous sélectionnez Paramètres personnalisées, vous disposez des paramètres Couleur/Niveaux de gris et Monochrome, selon l'option choisie dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat Scan. Couleur/Niveaux de gris Lors de la numérisation de pages en couleurs ou en niveaux de gris, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Sans perte N'applique pas la compression ou les filtres, tels que Redressement, Suppression de l'arrière-plan, etc., aux pages numérisées. • Adaptative Divise la page en zones noir et blanc, niveaux de gris et couleur, puis choisit la méthode qui permet de compresser au maximum le contenu de chaque zone tout en préservant l'aspect de la page. Les résolutions de numérisation recommandées sont les suivantes : 300 ppp (points par pouce) en niveaux de gris et en couleurs RVB, et 600 ppp en noir et blanc. • JPEG Applique la compression JPEG à toutes les zones en niveaux de gris ou RVB de la page. Remarque : Le scanner utilise soit l'option Couleur/Niveaux de gris sélectionnée, soit l'option Monochrome. L'option utilisée dépend des paramètres sélectionnés dans la boîte de dialogue de numérisation d'Acrobat ou dans l'interface TWAIN du scanner, qui peut s'ouvrir lorsque vous cliquez sur Numériser dans la boîte de dialogue d'Acrobat. (Par défaut, la boîte de dialogue de l'application du scanner ne s'ouvre pas.) Monochrome Lors de la numérisation d'images en noir et blanc ou monochrome, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • JBIG2 Applique la méthode de compression JBIG2 aux pages en noir et blanc. Un paramètre de 0,95 ou plus correspond à la méthode sans perte ; en deçà, la compression du texte est élevée. La taille des pages de texte est en général inférieure de 60 % à celle des pages compressées en CCITT - Groupe 4, mais le traitement est plus long. Compatible avec Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) ou version ultérieure. Remarque : Pour assurer la compatibilité avec Acrobat 4.0, utilisez une méthode de compression autre que JBIG2. • Adaptative (Comme décrit à la section Couleur/Niveaux de gris.) • CCITT - Groupe 4 Applique la compression CCITT - Groupe 4 aux pages en noir et blanc. Cette méthode de compression rapide et avec un minimum de pertes est compatible avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2) et version ultérieure. Redressement Fait pivoter toute page qui ne suit pas parfaitement les côtés du scanner afin d'aligner la page PDF verticalement. Choisissez Automatique ou Désactivé(e). Suppression de l'arrière-plan Blanchit les zones presque blanches des numérisations en couleurs ou niveaux de gris (mais pas en noir et blanc). Pour des résultats optimaux, étalonnez votre scanner à l'aide des paramètres de contraste et de luminosité afin que la numérisation d'une page en noir et blanc normale produise une page avec du texte gris ou noir et un arrière-plan blanc. Les options Désactivé(e) ou Faible doivent alors donner les meilleurs résultats. En cas de numérisation de papier blanc cassé ou de papier journal, utilisez l'option Moyen(ne) ou Elevé(e) pour nettoyer la page. Suppression des ombres sur les contours Supprime les raies noires qui peuvent apparaître sur les contours des pages numérisées, là où la lampe du scanner est obscurcie par le bord du papier. Choisissez Désactivé(e), Modérée ou Agressive. Flou intérieur Supprime les tâches noires qui peuvent apparaître à différents endroits d'une page en noir et blanc. L'option Faible utilise un microfiltre de base alors que les options Moyen(ne) et Elevé(e) utilisent à la fois un microfiltre et un filtre plus large pour supprimer les tâches plus importantes situées plus loin des éléments à conserver. Détramage Supprime la trame formée par les points en demi-teinte, qui peut réduire la compression JPEG, créer des effets moirés ou rendre la reconnaissance de texte plus difficile. Convient aux numérisations RVB ou niveaux de gris de 200 à 400 points par pouce ou, avec la compression adaptative, aux numérisations en noir et blanc de 400 à 600 ppp. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 70 Création d'un fichier PDF Le paramètre Automatique (recommandé) applique le filtre aux numérisations RVB et niveaux de gris de 300 ppp ou plus. Choisissez l'option Désactivé(e) lorsque vous numérisez une page sans image ni zones remplies ou si la résolution de numérisation est en dehors de la plage d'efficacité du filtre. Suppression du halo Si cette option est définie sur Activé(e) (recommandé), elle supprime l'excès de couleurs sur les contours à forts contrastes. Cet excès de couleur peut survenir lors de la numérisation comme de l'impression. Ce filtre ne s'applique qu'aux images en couleurs. Conseils relatifs à la numérisation • Acrobat peut numériser des images dont la résolution est comprise entre 10 et 3000 points par pouce. Si vous sélectionnez l'option de style de sortie PDF Image indexable ou ClearScan, la résolution d'entrée doit être supérieure ou égale à 72 points par pouce mais pas supérieure à 600 ppp (dans ce cas, elle est sous-échantillonnée pour obtenir une résolution inférieure ou égale à 600 ppp). • Pour appliquer la compression sans perte à une image numérisée, sélectionnez l'une de ces options dans la section Compression de la boîte de dialogue Options d'optimisation : CCITT - Groupe 4 pour les images monochromes ou Sans perte pour les images en couleur ou niveaux de gris. Si cette image est jointe à un document PDF et que le fichier est sauvegardé à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer, l'image numérisée reste non compressée. Si le document PDF est sauvegardé à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer sous, il se peut que l'image numérisée soit compressée. • Dans la plupart des cas, la numérisation de pages en noir et blanc à 300 ppp produit le résultat le plus adapté à une conversion. A 150 ppp, la précision de la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) est légèrement inférieure et un plus grand nombre d'erreurs peut survenir dans la reconnaissance des polices. A 400 ppp et au-delà, le traitement est ralenti et la compression des pages moindre. Lorsque le document contient des termes non reconnus ou des caractères de petite taille (9 points ou moins), essayez de numériser à une résolution supérieure. Numérisez autant que possible vos documents en noir et blanc. • Lorsque l'option Reconnaître du texte par ROC est désactivée, un éventail complet de résolutions (comprises entre 10 et 3 000 points par pouce) est disponible, mais la résolution recommandée demeure 72 ppp (ou plus). Dans le cas d'une compression adaptative, il est recommandé de choisir une résolution de 300 ppp pour les pages en niveaux de gris et RVB et de 600 ppp pour les pages en noir et blanc. • La numérisation de pages en couleurs 24 bits, à 300 ppp et au format 21,59 x 27,94 cm entraîne la création d'images volumineuses (25 Mo) avant la compression. Il est possible que votre système nécessite 50 Mo de mémoire virtuelle (ou plus) pour effectuer la numérisation. Avec une résolution de 600 ppp, la numérisation et le traitement sont en général quatre fois plus lents qu'avec une résolution de 300 ppp. • Evitez d'utiliser les options de simulation et de demi-teintes du scanner. Ces paramètres peuvent améliorer l'aspect des photographies, mais empêchent la bonne reconnaissance du texte. • Si vous souhaitez numériser un texte imprimé sur du papier couleur, augmentez la luminosité et le contraste d'environ 10 %. Si le scanner reconnaît le filtrage des couleurs, pensez à utiliser un filtre ou un éclairage qui élimine la couleur d'arrière-plan. Si le texte n'est pas suffisamment net, essayez de régler le contraste et la luminosité du scanner afin d'obtenir une numérisation plus précise. • Si votre scanner permet de régler manuelle la luminosité, réglez-le de manière que les caractères soient plus nets et mieux formés. Si les caractères sont accolés, augmentez la valeur de luminosité ; s'ils sont trop éloignés, réduisez-la. Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé Vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat pour reconnaître le texte d'un document numérisé au préalable et converti au format PDF. Le logiciel de reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC) vous permet d'indexer, de corriger et de copier le texte d'un document PDF numérisé. Pour que la reconnaissance optique des caractères soit applicable au fichier PDF, la résolution d'origine doit être de 72 ppp ou plus.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 71 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Une numérisation effectuée à 300 ppp génère le texte le plus adapté à la conversion. Avec une résolution de 150 ppp, la précision de la ROC est légèrement inférieure. Voir aussi « Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page » à la page 121 Reconnaissance du texte d'un document unique 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF numérisé. 2 Choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte > Reconnaissance du texte par OCR. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte, sélectionnez une option dans la zone Pages. 4 Cliquez éventuellement sur Modifier pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, puis spécifiez les options selon vos besoins. Reconnaissance du texte de plusieurs documents 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte par ROC > Reconnaître le texte de plusieurs fichiers par ROC. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paper Capture - Traitement de plusieurs fichiers, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez ensuite les fichiers ou le dossier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez un dossier cible pour les fichiers de sortie, les préférences de nom de fichier et un format de sortie. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Reconnaissance de texte dans les fichiers PDF composants d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF numérisés dans un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte > Reconnaissance du texte par OCR. 3 Réglez les options de la boîte de dialogue Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres. Reconnaissance du texte - Paramètres, boîte de dialogue Langue de ROC principale Détermine la langue que le moteur de ROC doit utiliser pour identifier les caractères. Style de sortie PDF Détermine le type de fichier PDF à générer. Toutes les options nécessitent une résolution d'entrée de 72 ppp ou plus (recommandé). Tous les formats appliquent aux images de texte la reconnaissance optique des caractères (ROC), la reconnaissance des polices et celle des pages, puis les convertissent en texte normal. • Image indexable Rend le texte compatible avec la recherche et sélectionnable. Cette option conserve l'image d'origine, applique un redressement selon les besoins et insère un calque de texte invisible. L'option choisie pour le paramètre Sous-échantillonner les images dans cette même boîte de dialogue indique si l'image est sous- échantillonnée et le niveau de sous-échantillonnage. • Image indexable (exacte) Rend le texte compatible avec la recherche et sélectionnable. Cette option conserve l'image d'origine et insère un calque de texte invisible (recommandée lorsque l'image doit être la plus fidèle possible à l'image d'origine). • ClearScan Synthétise une nouvelle police Type 3 qui simule approximativement l'originale et conserve l'arrièreplan des pages dans une copie basse résolution.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 72 Création d'un fichier PDF Sous-échantillonner les images Réduit le nombre de pixels des images en couleurs, en niveaux de gris et monochromes suite à la reconnaissance optique des caractères. Choisissez le degré de sous-échantillonnage à appliquer. Les options les plus élevées produisent un sous-échantillonnage moindre, et donc des fichiers PDF de résolution supérieure. Activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web dans un fichier PDF L'affichage rapide des pages Web consiste en la restructuration du document PDF en vue du téléchargement individuel des pages (utilisation optimale des octets) à partir de serveurs Web. Grâce à l'affichage Web rapide, le serveur Web envoie la seule page demandée, et non l'ensemble du document PDF. Cette option s'avère particulièrement utile pour les documents volumineux dont le téléchargement à partir d'un serveur requiert un temps considérable. Vérifiez auprès de votre webmestre que le logiciel de serveur Web que vous utilisez prend en charge le téléchargement page par page. Pour garantir l'affichage des documents PDF de votre site Web dans les navigateurs plus anciens, vous pouvez également créer des liens HTML vers les documents en question (plutôt que des scripts ASP ou la méthode POST) et utiliser des chemins d'accès relativement courts (256 caractères ou moins). Vérifiez que l'affichage rapide des pages Web est activé pour le fichier PDF existant ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Vérifiez le réglage (Oui ou Non) du paramètre d'affichage rapide des pages Web dans la partie inférieure droite du panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue. • (Windows uniquement) Cliquez sur l'icône du fichier PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. Cliquez sur l'onglet PDF et vérifiez le réglage (Oui ou Non) du paramètre d'affichage rapide des pages Web au bas du panneau. Vérification des préférences d'affichage rapide des pages Web Suivez cette procédure pour vérifier que la configuration d'Acrobat permet l'activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web lors du processus de création d'un fichier PDF. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Dans la partie droite de la boîte de dialogue, sous Paramètres d'enregistrement, vérifiez que l'option Enregistrement optimisé pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web est activée, puis cliquez sur OK. Activation de l'affichage rapide des pages Web dans un fichier PDF existant Suivez cette procédure après avoir vérifié les préférences d'affichage rapide des pages Web et contrôlé dans les propriétés du fichier PDF que cette fonction n'était pas déjà activée. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. Indiquez le même nom de fichier et le même emplacement. 3 Lorsqu'un message apparaît pour vous demander de confirmer l'écrasement du fichier existant, cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 73 Création d'un fichier PDF Utilisation de l'imprimante Adobe PDF Création d'un document PDF par impression dans un fichier Dans de nombreuses applications de création, vous pouvez utiliser la commande d'impression et l'imprimante Adobe PDF pour convertir le fichier ouvert au format PDF. Votre document source est converti au format PostScript et envoyé directement à Distiller pour conversion au format PDF sans que vous ayez à démarrer manuellement Distiller. Les paramètres actifs de préférence de Distiller et d'Adobe PDF sont utilisés pour la conversion du fichier. Si vous utilisez un format de page non standard, créez un format de page personnalisé. Remarque : (Windows) Pour les documents Microsoft Office, l'imprimante Adobe PDF ne comprend pas toutes les fonctions disponibles à partir de PDFMaker. Vous ne pouvez pas, par exemple, créer de signets et de liens hypertexte à partir de l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Si vous créez un fichier PDF à partir d'un document Microsoft Office et que vous souhaitez inclure ces fonctions, utilisez PDFMaker. Remarque : L'imprimante Adobe PDF crée des fichiers PDF non balisés. Une structure balisée est requise pour la redistribution du contenu vers un ordinateur de poche et est préférable pour l'obtention de bons résultats avec un lecteur d'écran. Voir aussi « Création d'un fichier PDF accessible » à la page 290 « Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) » à la page 77 Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande d'impression (Windows) 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application de création, puis choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu des imprimantes. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés (ou Préférences) si vous souhaitez personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF. (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Mise en page dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences.) 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Par défaut, le fichier PDF est enregistré dans le dossier spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue. L'emplacement par défaut est Mes documents. Le nom et l'emplacement du fichier sont gérés par le paramètre Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF dans la boîte de dialogue. Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de la commande d'impression (Mac OS) 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application de création, puis choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF dans le menu des imprimantes. 3 Choisissez les options PDF dans le menu déroulant sous les zones des paramètres prédéfinis (qui affichent peut- être les copies et les pages par défaut). 4 Choisissez l'un des paramètres Adobe PDF proposés par défaut ou personnalisez les paramètres à l'aide de Distiller. Tous les paramètres personnalisés que vous avez définis sont répertoriés dans cette liste. La plupart des utilisateurs se contenteront des paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF par défaut. 5 Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ou non ouvrir le fichier PDF après sa création. 6 Cliquez sur Imprimer. 7 Sélectionnez un nom et un emplacement pour le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 74 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Par défaut, le fichier PDF est doté du même nom que le fichier d'origine, suivi de l'extension .pdf. Préférences d'impression d'Adobe PDF (Windows) Les préférences d'impression sont appliquées à toutes les applications qui utilisent l'imprimante Adobe PDF, à moins que vous n'ayez configuré autrement l'application de création via le menu Mise en page, Configuration du document ou Imprimer. Remarque : La boîte de dialogue de configuration des préférences d'impression peut porter différents noms selon la manière dont vous y accédez (Options d'impression, Propriétés ou Préférences d'impression d'Adobe PDF, par exemple). Pour accéder aux préférences d'impression : • Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Options d'impression. • Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF et cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés (ou Préférences). (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Configuration dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences pour personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF.) Des options propres au format PDF s'affichent sous l'onglet Paramètres Adobe PDF. Les onglets Papier/qualité et Disposition proposent des options courantes relatives à la source papier, à l'encre de l'imprimante, à l'orientation des pages et au nombre de pages par feuille. Remarque : Les préférences d'impression diffèrent des propriétés de l'imprimante. Les préférences comprennent des options spécifiques pour le processus de conversion au format Adobe PDF. La boîte de dialogue des propriétés contient des panneaux avec des options pour tout type d'imprimante. Paramètres Adobe PDF Dans le menu Paramètres par défaut, sélectionnez un jeu d'options prédéfini ou cliquez sur le bouton Modifier afin d'afficher ou de modifier les paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Protection Adobe PDF Pour protéger le fichier PDF, choisissez l'une des options suivantes ou cliquez sur Modifier pour afficher ou changer les paramètres de protection : • Reconfirmer chaque fois la protection Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Adobe PDF - Protection chaque fois que vous créez un fichier PDF avec l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Spécifiez les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue. • Dernières options de protection connues Utilise les mêmes paramètres de protection que ceux utilisés lors de la dernière création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF sur cet ordinateur. Sortie Adobe PDF Choisissez le dossier de sortie du fichier converti au format PDF ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour ajouter un dossier de sortie ou en changer. Sélectionnez l'option Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF pour spécifier un emplacement et un nom de fichier au moment de la conversion. Menu Format de page PDF Sélectionnez un format de page personnalisé que vous avez défini. Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu Lance automatiquement Acrobat pour afficher immédiatement le document converti. Ajouter les informations sur le document Inclut des informations telles que le nom du fichier et la date et l'heure de création. Se limiter aux polices système ; ne pas utiliser les polices du document Désactivez cette option pour télécharger les polices lors de la création du fichier PDF. Toutes les polices seront disponibles dans le fichier PDF, mais sa création sera plus lente. Conservez cette option activée si vous travaillez sur documents en langue asiatique. Supprimer les fichiers journaux des travaux effectués Supprime automatiquement les fichiers journaux, sauf si le travail échoue.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 75 Création d'un fichier PDF Confirmer le remplacement d'un fichier PDF Vous avertit lorsque vous êtes sur le point d'écraser un fichier PDF existant avec un fichier du même nom. Voir aussi « Création et utilisation d'un format de page personnalisé » à la page 76 Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF (Windows) Sous Windows, la configuration par défaut des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF est généralement satisfaisante, à moins que vous n'ayez défini le partage d'imprimante ou activé les paramètres de sécurité. Remarque : Les propriétés d'impression diffèrent des préférences de l'imprimante. La boîte de dialogue des propriétés contient des panneaux d'options applicables à tout type d'imprimante ; les préférences proposent des options de conversion spécifiques à l'imprimante Adobe PDF. Configuration des propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 1 Ouvrez le panneau Imprimantes et télécopieurs depuis le menu Démarrer, puis cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris. 2 Choisissez Propriétés dans le menu contextuel. 3 Cliquez sur les onglets et sélectionnez les options comme vous le souhaitez. Redéfinition du port utilisé par l'imprimante Adobe PDF 1 Le cas échéant, quittez Distiller et attendez que tous les travaux placés dans la file d'attente de l'imprimante Adobe PDF soient achevés. 2 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer. 3 Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports, puis sur le bouton Ajouter un port. 5 Dans la liste Types de ports disponibles, sélectionnez le port Adobe PDF, puis cliquez sur Ajouter un port. 6 Sélectionnez un dossier local destiné aux fichiers de sortie PDF, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Cliquez ensuite sur Fermer pour quitter la boîte de dialogue. 7 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés d'Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. Pour optimiser les résultats, sélectionnez un dossier situé sur le système sur lequel Distiller est installé. Bien que les dossiers distants ou réseau soient pris en charge, ils connaissent des problèmes d'accès utilisateur et de protection. Suppression d'un dossier et redéfinition de l'imprimante Adobe PDF au port par défaut 1 Le cas échéant, quittez Distiller et attendez quelques minutes que tous les travaux placés dans la file d'attente d'Adobe PDF soient achevés. 2 Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes à partir du menu Démarrer. 3 Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Ports. 5 Sélectionnez le port par défaut, Mes documents, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. 6 Sélectionnez le port à supprimer, cliquez sur Supprimer le port, puis choisissez Oui pour confirmer la suppression. 7 Sélectionnez à nouveau le port Mes documents, puis cliquez sur Fermer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 76 Création d'un fichier PDF Configuration de l'imprimante Adobe PDF (Mac OS) Sous Mac OS, vous devez configurer l'imprimante Adobe PDF dans Distiller, dans le menu Format d'impression de votre application de création et dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression de votre application de création. 1 Dans Distiller, spécifiez les paramètres Adobe PDF, l'emplacement des polices et la protection. 2 Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Format d'impression. 3 Sélectionnez Adobe PDF 9.0 dans le menu Pour. 4 Le cas échéant, spécifiez le format de papier, l'orientation et l'échelle. 5 Dans l'application de création, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Adobe PDF 9.0 dans le menu Imprimante. 6 Dans le menu déroulant sous le menu Paramètres prédéfinis, choisissez Options PDF, puis définissez l'une des options suivantes : • Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres de conversion prédéfinis dans le menu Paramètres Adobe PDF si vous souhaitez écraser les paramètres par défaut. Les paramètres par défaut sont les paramètres actuellement définis dans Distiller. • Spécifiez si vous souhaitez ouvrir les fichiers convertis dans Acrobat depuis le menu Après la création du fichier PDF. 7 Spécifiez les paramètres d'impression comme vous le souhaitez dans les autres menus disponibles sous le menu Paramètres prédéfinis. Création et utilisation d'un format de page personnalisé Il est important de faire la distinction entre le format de page (tel qu'il est défini dans la boîte de dialogue Format d'impression de l'application source de votre document) et le format de papier (la feuille de papier, le morceau de film, une zone de plaque d'impression sur lesquels l'impression est réalisée). Le format de page peut être Lettre US (21,59 par 27,94 cm) mais l'impression doit s'effectuer sur une feuille de papier ou un film plus grand pour inclure les repères d'impression ou le fond perdu. Pour garantir l'impression correcte du document, configurez le format de page dans l'application source et dans l'imprimante. La liste des formats de papier disponibles dans Acrobat provient du fichier PPD (imprimantes PostScript) ou du pilote d'imprimante (imprimantes non-PostScript). Si l'imprimante et le fichier PPD que vous avez choisis pour l'impression PostScript prennent en charge les formats de papier personnalisés, une option personnalisée s'affiche dans le menu Papier. Pour les imprimantes capables de produire des zones d'impression très larges, Acrobat prend en charge les pages mesurant jusqu'à 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces) par 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces). Création d'un format de page personnalisé (Windows) 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez la fenêtre Imprimantes et télécopieurs à partir du menu Démarrer. Cliquez sur l'imprimante Adobe PDF avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Options d'impression. • Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. Sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF et cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés. (Dans certaines applications, vous devrez peut-être cliquer sur Configuration dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression pour accéder à la liste d'imprimantes, puis sur Propriétés ou Préférences pour personnaliser les paramètres de l'imprimante Adobe PDF.) 2 Sous l'onglet Paramètres Adobe PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter en regard du menu Format de page d'Adobe PDF. 3 Spécifiez le nom, la largeur, la hauteur et l'unité de mesure. Cliquez sur Ajouter/Modifier pour ajouter au menu déroulant des formats de page Adobe PDF celui que vous venez de créer. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 77 Création d'un fichier PDF Création d'un format de page personnalisé (Mac OS) 1 Dans une application de création telle qu'Adobe InDesign, choisissez Fichier > Format d'impression. 2 Dans le menu déroulant Format du papier, sélectionnez Gérer les formats personnalisés. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton +. 4 Spécifiez le nom, la hauteur, la largeur et les marges. L'unité de mesure dépend de la langue du système. Utilisation du format de papier personnalisé 1 Choisissez Fichier > Configuration de l'impression. 2 Sélectionnez le nouveau format de page personnalisé dans le menu Papier. Création d'un fichier PDF à l'aide de PDFMaker (Windows) A propos d'Acrobat PDFMaker La fonction PDFMaker d'Acrobat s'exécute au sein de nombreuses applications de bureautique, telles que la suite Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes. Après installation d'Acrobat, les commandes PDFMaker apparaissent dans la zone de travail de l'application de création. L'utilisation de PDFMaker dans une application de création est une procédure simple qui ne requiert qu'un seul clic. Vous devez cliquer sur un bouton de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker ou choisir une commande dans le menu Adobe PDF. Il n'est pas nécessaire d'ouvrir Acrobat. Conversion d'un fichier à l'aide de PDFMaker Sous Windows, l'installation d'Acrobat insère la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et le menu Adobe PDF dans de nombreuses applications de création. Pour créer un fichier PDF, vous pouvez utiliser soit les boutons de la barre d'outils, soit le menu Adobe PDF (le menu Actions dans Lotus Notes). Le menu permet cependant d'accéder aux paramètres de conversion. Bien que la plupart des paramètres de conversion soient communs à toutes les applications de création, certaines applications présentent des options spécifiques. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, les options de création de fichiers PDF sont disponibles à partir du ruban Acrobat. Remarque : Si la barre d'outils PDF n'est pas visible dans une application, affichez-la ou activez-la. Voir aussi « Personnalisation des paramètres Adobe PDF » à la page 99 « Création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion et publipostage Word » à la page 85 Affichage ou activation de PDFMaker dans les applications Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes Si les boutons de la barre d'outils PDF ne sont pas visibles dans les applications Microsoft Office ou Lotus Notes, utilisez l'une des méthodes suivantes pour afficher ou activer PDFMaker. Dans Lotus Notes 7 ou version antérieure, choisissez Fichier > Préférences > Préférences de la barre d'outils. Cliquez sur Barres d'outils, puis activez l'option Visible en regard d'Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 78 Création d'un fichier PDF Dans Lotus Notes 8 ou version ultérieure, choisissez Fichier > Préférences. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, choisissez Barre d'outils > Barres d'outils, puis activez l'option Visible en regard d'Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0. Dans les applications Office 2003 ou antérieures, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Acrobat PDFMaker 9.0. Dans les applications Office 2007, effectuez les opérations suivantes : 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Outils > Trust Center. • (Autres applications Office) Cliquez sur le bouton Office, puis sur le bouton Options d'[application], où [Application] désigne l'application Office qui vous intéresse. Par exemple, dans Word, le nom du bouton Options Word. 2 Cliquez sur Compléments dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si le complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook n'apparaît pas dans la liste, sélectionnez Complément COM dans le menu déroulant Gérer, puis cliquez sur Atteindre. • Si le complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook figure dans la liste des compléments désactivés, sélectionnez Eléments désactivés dans le menu déroulant Gérer, puis cliquez sur Atteindre. 4 Sélectionnez Complément COM Acrobat PDFMaker Office ou PDFMOutlook, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Relancez l'application Office. Conversion d'un fichier au format PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer un fichier PDF sur le ruban Acrobat. 3 Indiquez un nom et un emplacement pour le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Création d'un fichier PDF comme pièce jointe à un message électronique 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007 telles que Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et joindre à un message du ruban Acrobat. Lorsque la conversion est terminée, un message vide s'ouvre automatiquement dans l'application de messagerie par défaut avec, en pièce jointe, le nouveau fichier PDF. Vous pouvez adresser et remplir le message, puis l'envoyer ou l'enregistrer comme brouillon. Attachement d'un fichier au format PDF (Outlook) 1 Dans fenêtre Message de Outlook, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF. Remarque : Si le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF n'est pas visible, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion, puis cochez l'option Afficher les boutons Joindre au format Adobe PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Outlook 2007. 2 Sélectionnez un fichier à attacher et cliquez sur Ouvrir.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 79 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion de fichiers en fichier PDF protégé à joindre à un message électronique (Outlook) 1 Dans la fenêtre de message d'Outlook, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé . Remarque : Le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé apparaît uniquement après que vous avez configuré un serveur Adobe Live Cycle® Right Management Server à l'aide du menu Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Parcourir, sélectionnez un fichier à convertir, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Spécifiez les utilisateurs qui peuvent ouvrir le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur OK : • Pour spécifier uniquement les destinataires du fichier PDF, sélectionnez Restreindre l'accès aux personnes des listes A, Cc: et Bcc: de ce message. Dans ce cas, le fichier PDF n'est protégé qu'une fois que vous avez envoyé le message électronique. • Pour spécifier uniquement les utilisateurs définis par une stratégie de protection, sélectionnez Restreindre l'accès en appliquant la stratégie de protection suivante, puis sélectionnez une stratégie dans la liste. Dans ce cas, le fichier PDF est sécurisé avant d'être joint au message électronique. 4 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe afin de vous connecter à Adobe Live Cycle Right Management Server. Création d'un fichier PDF à envoyer en révision 1 Ouvrez le fichier dans l'application utilisée pour le créer. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer pour révision de la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker, ou (le cas échéant) choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer pour révision. Pour les applications Microsoft Office 2007, notamment Word, Excel, PowerPoint et Access, cliquez sur le bouton Créer et envoyer en révision du ruban Acrobat. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité qui s'affiche, entrez les informations qui vous concernent, puis cliquez sur Terminer. 4 Suivez les indications de l'assistant qui s'affiche, comme décrit à la section « Lancement d'une révision par messagerie électronique » à la page 154. Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker Les paramètres de conversion PDFMaker varient en fonction des types de fichier. Par exemple, les options disponibles pour un fichier PowerPoint ne sont pas identiques à celles proposées pour les fichiers Outlook. Une fois que vous avez sélectionné les paramètres de conversion, vos choix s'appliquent désormais à tous les fichiers PDF créés à partir de ce type de fichier. Il est conseillé de revoir les paramètres de temps à autre. 1 Ouvrez une application compatible avec PDFMaker (par exemple, Word ou Excel). 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. • (Applications Office 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, cliquez sur Préférences. • (Toute autre application) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. 3 (Facultatif) Pour revenir aux paramètres d'origine par défaut, cliquez sur Rétablir les valeurs par défaut sous l'onglet Paramètres.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 80 Création d'un fichier PDF Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 97 « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 86 Onglet Paramètres des paramètres de conversion Les paramètres disponibles de PDFMaker dépendent de l'application dans laquelle vous utilisez cet outil. Paramètres de conversion Spécifie la norme d'optimisation du fichier PDF. Lorsque vous effectuez une sélection dans le menu, une description de l'élément choisi s'affiche immédiatement en dessous. Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu Ouvre le document converti directement dans Acrobat. (Exception : lorsque vous choisissez Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer par messagerie.) Demander le nom du fichier Adobe PDF Permet d'entrer un nom de fichier personnalisé pour le fichier PDF obtenu. Désactivez cette option pour enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF dans le même dossier que le fichier source en utilisant le même nom, suivi de l'extension .pdf. Convertir les informations sur le document Ajoute les informations relatives au document issues de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du fichier source. Ce paramètre remplace les préférences de l'imprimante et les paramètres du panneau Avancés de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Remarque : Le bouton Paramètres avancés ouvre la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF, qui contient d'autres paramètres de conversion. Ces paramètres de conversion s'appliquent à toutes les fonctions Acrobat de création de fichiers PDF, telles que Acrobat Distiller, PDFMaker et à l'application Acrobat elle-même. Créer un fichier PDF conforme à la norme PDF/A Crée le fichier PDF dans le respect de la norme ISO relative à la conservation à long terme des documents électroniques. (Dans l'application Microsoft Publisher uniquement, PDFMaker ne prend pas en charge la norme PDF/A.) Remarque : Si vous accédez aux paramètres de conversion à partir de Word, Excel ou PowerPoint, cette option indique PDF/A 1-a:2005. Si vous y accédez à partir d'Access, elle indique PDF/A 1-b:2005. Onglet Protection des paramètres de conversion Les paramètres disponibles de PDFMaker dépendent de l'application dans laquelle vous utilisez cet outil. Exiger un mot de passe pour l'ouverture du document La sélection de cette option active la zone Mot de passe d'ouverture, dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir le mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent indiquer pour pouvoir ouvrir le document. Restreindre la modification et l'impression du document L'activation de cette option rend les autres options disponibles. Mot de passe de modifications des droits d'accès Permet de définir le mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent indiquer pour effectuer une impression ou des modifications autorisées. Impression autorisée Spécifie si les utilisateurs qui utilisent le mot de passe d'accès aux droits peuvent imprimer le document et à quelle résolution. Modifications autorisées Spécifie les types de modification autorisées pour les utilisateurs détenant le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Autoriser la copie de texte, d'images et d'autre contenu Empêche ou autorise les utilisateurs à copier des éléments du fichier PDF. Activer l'accès au texte pour les lecteurs d'écran destinés aux malvoyants Empêche ou autorise l'accès au texte par les lecteurs d'écran. (Option activée par défaut.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 81 Création d'un fichier PDF Autoriser les métadonnées en texte brut Indique si le moteur de recherche peut lire les métadonnées du document. Disponible uniquement si le paramètre de compatibilité PDF est Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) ou version ultérieure. Conversion de fichiers Microsoft Word, PowerPoint et Excel au format PDF Lors de la création d'un document PDF à partir de Microsoft Word, PowerPoint ou Excel, vous pouvez définir les options de conversion du fichier actif. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l'étendue du contenu du fichier à convertir. Les options de conversion que vous pouvez configurer dans les étapes suivantes comptent parmi les paramètres les plus fréquemment utilisés de la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker. Toutes les modifications que vous apportez aux options de conversion s'appliquent uniquement à la conversion active. Voir aussi « Affichage des paramètres de conversion PDFMaker » à la page 79 « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 86 Conversion de fichiers Excel au format PDF 1 Ouvrez un fichier dans Excel. 2 Sélectionnez éventuellement les cellules à convertir. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Office 2003 ou version antérieure) Dans le menu Adobe PDF, sélectionnez l'une des options de conversion au format Adobe PDF. • (Office 2007) A partir du ruban Acrobat, sélectionnez l'une des options de création. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sélectionnez l'étendue de la conversion, puis cliquez sur Convertir au format PDF. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, spécifiez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. 6 Cliquez éventuellement sur le bouton Options afin de modifier les paramètres de conversion. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour générer le fichier PDF. Conversion de fichiers Word et PowerPoint au format PDF 1 Ouvrez un fichier dans Word ou PowerPoint. 2 Sélectionnez éventuellement des objets et du texte (Word) ou des diapositives (PowerPoint), selon les besoins. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Office 2003 ou version antérieure) Dans le menu Adobe PDF, sélectionnez l'une des options de conversion au format Adobe PDF. • (Office 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, sélectionnez Créer un fichier PDF, Créer et joindre à un message ou Créer et envoyer en révision. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, spécifiez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. 5 Cliquez éventuellement sur le bouton Options afin de modifier les paramètres de conversion. 6 Sélectionnez une étendue de pages (Word) ou une étendue de diapositives (PowerPoint). L'option Sélection est uniquement disponible lorsque vous avez sélectionné au préalable des éléments dans le fichier. 7 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Enregistrer pour générer le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 82 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF Vous pouvez utiliser PDFMaker pour convertir un ou plusieurs messages électroniques de Microsoft Outlook ou Lotus Notes, ou des dossiers complets de messages en porte-documents PDF ou en fichier PDF fusionné. Au sein d'un portedocuments, chaque message électronique constitue un fichier PDF distinct. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion d'Acrobat PDFMaker contient l'option qui détermine si les messages électroniques sont fusionnés en un seul fichier PDF ou combinés dans un porte-documents PDF. Dans l'application de messagerie, les commandes qui activent la conversion au format PDF de messages électroniques sont disponibles en deux endroits : sur la barre d'outils Acrobat PDFMaker et dans un menu. Dans Outlook, le menu s'intitule Adobe PDF et apparaît à droite du menu d'aide d'Outlook. Dans Lotus Notes, les commandes PDF s'affichent dans le menu Actions. Pour convertir un message électronique actuellement ouvert au format PDF (et non dans un porte-documents PDF), choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer. Les paramètres de conversion PDFMaker n'ont aucun impact sur ce processus. Une vidéo sur l'archivage des courriers électroniques au format PDF au sein d'un porte-documents PDF est disponible à l'adresse http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook. Voir aussi « Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications » à la page 86 Indiquez si les messages électroniques sont à fusionner en fichiers PDF ou à combiner en porte-documents PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Modifier les paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour convertir au format PDF et fusionner des messages électroniques en une série de pages consécutives au sein du même document, désactivez l'option Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF. • Pour assembler des messages électroniques convertis en tant que composants d'un porte-documents PDF, activez l'option Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF. Conversion d'un message électronique ouvert au format PDF (Outlook) ? Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF Vous pouvez également convertir un fichier différent au format PDF depuis un message électronique Outlook ouvert, si la barre d'outils Joindre au format Adobe PDF s'affiche. Vous accédez ainsi à une série de boîtes de dialogue permettant la sélection et l'enregistrement du nouveau document PDF et lancez également Acrobat, s'il n'est pas déjà en cours d'exécution. Le document PDF résultant est joint au message électronique ouvert. Conversion de messages électroniques en nouveau fichier PDF 1 Dans Outlook ou Lotus Notes, sélectionnez les messages électroniques individuels. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les messages sélectionnés > Créer un fichier PDF. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Convertir les messages sélectionnés au format Adobe PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 83 Création d'un fichier PDF 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, sélectionnez un emplacement, indiquez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Ajout de messages électroniques ou de dossiers à un fichier PDF existant 1 Dans Outlook ou Lotus Notes, sélectionnez les messages électroniques individuels ou les dossiers. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les messages sélectionnés > Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant ou Adobe PDF > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés > Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. Remarque : Si vous avez déjà créé un ou plusieurs porte-documents, vous pouvez faire votre choix parmi les portedocuments récemment créés en plus de l'option Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Ajouter les messages sélectionnés à un fichier Adobe PDF existant ou Actions > Ajouter les dossiers sélectionnés à un fichier Adobe PDF existant. 3 Localisez et sélectionnez le fichier ou le porte-documents PDF auquel vous souhaitez ajouter les messages convertis, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Important : N'entrez pas de nouveau nom pour le fichier PDF. Si vous le faites, un message d'avertissement s'affiche pour vous indiquer que le fichier PDF est introuvable. Cliquez sur OK et sélectionnez un fichier PDF sans modifier son nom. 4 (Outlook uniquement) Si un message s'affiche afin de vous signaler que le fichier PDF existant a été créé à l'aide d'une version antérieure de PDFMaker, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un porte-documents PDF à partir de l'archive PDF d'origine, cliquez sur Oui et sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement de la nouvelle archive. (Le nom par défaut ajoute _Porte-documents au nom du fichier PDF d'origine.) Une fois la conversion terminée et la boîte de dialogue de création du fichier Adobe PDF fermée, la nouvelle archive s'ouvre dans Acrobat. • Cliquez sur Non et annulez le processus. Remarque : Dans le cas des porte-documents PDF de messages électroniques convertis à partir d'Acrobat 8 ou migrés vers cette version (ou une version ultérieure), seuls les nouveaux messages (autrement dit, les messages ne faisant pas déjà partie du porte-documents PDF) sont ajoutés. Conversion de dossiers de messages électroniques au format PDF PDFMaker peut convertir plusieurs dossiers au format PDF en une seule fois. Il est inutile de sélectionner ces dossiers au début de la procédure, car une boîte de dialogue vous le proposera ultérieurement. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés > Créer un fichier PDF. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés au format Adobe PDF. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les dossiers au format PDF, sélectionnez les dossiers à convertir. Activez ou désactivez ensuite l'option Convertir ce dossier et tous ses sous-dossiers. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier Adobe PDF sous, indiquez l'emplacement et le nom du portedocuments PDF. Une fois l'opération terminée, le nouveau fichier PDF s'ouvre dans Acrobat. Migration d'anciennes archives Outlook PDF vers des porte-documents PDF Il est judicieux de migrer les anciennes archives de messagerie PDF vers des porte-documents PDF pour deux raisons : faciliter le tri et d'autres fonctions, et permettre l'ajout de nouveaux messages électroniques à ces archives.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 84 Création d'un fichier PDF Dans les porte-documents PDF, chaque message électronique est converti en composant PDF. Vous pouvez trier les messages par dossier de messages, expéditeur, ligne d'objet, date, taille ou pièces jointes. Vous avez également la possibilité de créer des catégories personnalisées, qui vous serviront de critères de tri. Si vous ouvrez des archives de messages électroniques créées avec Acrobat 7.0 ou version antérieure, vous devez créer une archive et ajouter les messages sélectionnés à cette dernière. Un assistant vous guide tout au long du processus. 1 Ouvrez Outlook. 2 Choisissez Adobe PDF > Mettre à niveau l'archive PDF Acrobat 7. 3 Si un message s'affiche, cliquez sur Oui pour continuer l'opération de migration. 4 Localisez et sélectionnez l'ancienne archive PDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 5 Sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement du porte-documents PDF migré, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. (Par défaut, le suffixe _Porte-documents s'ajoute au nom de fichier existant : une archive intitulée Boîte de réception.pdf devient Boîte de réception_Porte-documents.pdf.) Une fois la conversion terminée et la boîte de dialogue de création du fichier Adobe PDF fermée, la nouvelle archive s'ouvre dans Acrobat. Configuration de l'archivage automatique du courrier électronique 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • (Outlook) Choisissez Adobe PDF > Configurer l'archivage automatique. • (Lotus Notes) Choisissez Actions > Configurer l'archivage automatique. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, sous l'onglet Archivage automatique, sélectionnez Activer l'archivage automatique. Sélectionnez ensuite les options de fréquence et l'heure d'exécution des opérations d'archivage automatique. 3 Sélectionnez d'autres options en fonction de vos besoins : Garder un journal d'archivage Crée un enregistrement de chaque session d'archivage. Fichier journal Indique le nom et l'emplacement du journal d'archivage. Incorporer l'index pour une recherche plus rapide Crée un index à l'aide duquel vous pouvez rechercher des mots ou des caractères au lieu de parcourir en entier chaque document. 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sélectionnez les dossiers et les sous-dossiers de messages électroniques. Activez ou désactivez ensuite (selon votre préférence) l'option Convertir ce dossier et tous ses sous-dossiers, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer le fichier d'archive PDF sous, sélectionnez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF de courrier électronique archivé. Cliquez ensuite sur Ouvrir. 6 Passez en revue les paramètres et les noms des dossiers d'archive figurant dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter à la liste des dossiers de courrier électronique supplémentaires, cliquez sur Ajouter et sélectionnez le dossier. • Pour supprimer des dossiers de la liste, sélectionnez-les puis cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour apporter des modifications à un fichier d'archive, sélectionnez un nom de dossier dans la liste, cliquez sur Modifier le fichier d'archive et indiquez un nom et un emplacement. • Pour commencer immédiatement l'archivage du courrier électronique, cliquez sur Exécuter l'archivage.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 85 Création d'un fichier PDF Création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion et publipostage Word La fonction de fusion et publipostage dans Word permet de créer des lettres formulaires (l'exemple le plus répandu) dans lesquelles des informations sont personnalisées, telles que le nom et l'adresse des destinataires. Acrobat PDFMaker facilite la procédure grâce à l'utilisation d'un modèle Word spécifique et d'un fichier de données correspondant pour générer des fusions et publipostages directement au format PDF. Vous pouvez même configurer PDFMaker pour qu'il joigne ces fichiers PDF aux messages électroniques qu'il génère pendant la création de fichiers PDF. Remarque : Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de fichiers en vue de l'utilisation de la fonction de fusion et de publipostage Word, consultez l'aide de Microsoft Office Word. 1 Dans Microsoft Word, ouvrez le modèle créé pour la fusion et le publipostage, ou créez-le à l'aide de la barre d'outils Fusion et publipostage de Word et de l'assistant correspondant, selon vos besoins. Important : Ne terminez pas la procédure de fusion et publipostage dans Word. Configurez l'opération comme d'habitude et affichez-en un aperçu pour vérifier que la fusion fonctionnera correctement. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Adobe PDF > Fusion et publipostage au format Adobe PDF. • Cliquez sur le bouton Fusion et publipostage au format Adobe PDF dans la barre d'outils Fusion et publipostage (Affichage > Barres d'outils > Fusion et publipostage). • (Word 2007) Sur le ruban Acrobat, cliquez sur Fusion et publipostage. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker - Fusion et publipostage, sélectionnez les options voulues : • Pour spécifier les données du fichier qui seront importées dans les fichiers fusionnés, sélectionnez Toutes les pages, Page active ou indiquez une étendue de pages dans les champs De la page et à. • Pour nommer le fichier PDF qui sera créé, entrez un nom dans la zone de nom de fichier PDF. Remarque : Ce nom, auquel une série de numéros sera ajoutée, sera attribué au fichier PDF. Par exemple, si vous entrez Lettrejuillet dans la zone de nom de fichier PDF, les fichiers de fusion et publipostage seront Lettrejuillet_0000123, Lettrejuillet_0000124, Lettrejuillet_0000125, etc. 4 Quant à l'option Envoyer automatiquement les fichiers Adobe PDF par messagerie, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer et enregistrer des fichiers PDF fusionnés à imprimer ou à envoyer par messagerie, laissez cette option désélectionnée, puis cliquez sur OK. • Pour créer des fichiers PDF fusionnés et les joindre à un message électronique pour le destinataire adéquat, cochez cette case et remplissez les autres options de messagerie. 5 Lorsque la boîte de dialogue de recherche de dossier s'affiche, repérez l'emplacement voulu et cliquez sur OK. Des indicateurs d'état s'affichent à mesure que PDFMaker génère des fichiers PDF. La durée de cette opération est fonction de la complexité de la fusion et au nombre de fichiers PDF créés. 6 Si vous avez sélectionné Envoyer automatiquement les fichiers Adobe PDF par messagerie, une boîte de dialogue s'affiche et demande votre profil de messagerie. Saisissez les informations appropriées et cliquez sur OK. Une fois la tâche terminée, un message s'affiche pour vous annoncer la réussite de la procédure. Options de messagerie pour les fusions et publipostage en PDF Pour Utilisez le menu déroulant pour sélectionner le champ ou la colonne du fichier de données associé contenant les adresses électroniques. Objet Saisissez le texte qui doit s'afficher dans la ligne d'objet de chaque message électronique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 86 Création d'un fichier PDF Message Ajoutez ou modifiez le corps des messages électroniques. Fichiers PDF créés à partir de Microsoft Project, Publisher et Access Dans les applications ci-après, des différences spécifiques s'appliquent à la création de documents PDF : Microsoft Project Vous pouvez uniquement créer un fichier PDF de la vue active. Les vues désignées comme non imprimables dans Project ne peuvent être converties en PDF. Remarque : La conversion de fichiers Project nécessite Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Microsoft Publisher Les fichiers PDF convertis à partir de Microsoft Publisher prennent en charge les traits de coupe, les liens, les signets, les tons directs, la transparence, les repères de fonds perdus et les couleurs CMJN. Microsoft Access La création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers Access peut impliquer deux étapes supplémentaires : • Vous devez sélectionner l'objet du fichier Access à convertir au format PDF avant de cliquer sur le bouton ou la commande PDFMaker. • Vous pouvez choisir Adobe PDF > Convertir plusieurs états en un seul fichier Adobe PDF. Pour Access 2007, cliquez sur Acrobat, puis sur Convertir plusieurs états. Vous avez la possibilité de sélectionner les états qui vous intéressent avant de cliquer sur Ajouter les états. Lorsque tous les états que vous souhaitez convertir figurent dans la liste Etats au format Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Convertir pour lancer la création du fichier PDF. Remarque : Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier Access au format PDF, les tables, requêtes, formulaires et états Access sont convertis. Paramètres PDFMaker spécifiques aux applications Les paramètres de conversion disponibles dans une application disposant de PDFMaker peuvent différer de ceux d'une autre application. Certains paramètres PDFMaker sont communs à plusieurs applications ; d'autres sont exclusivement réservées à une application donnée. Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 97 « Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Internet Explorer (Windows) » à la page 90 « Conversion de fichiers Microsoft Word, PowerPoint et Excel au format PDF » à la page 81 Options de l'onglet Paramètres disponibles dans la plupart des applications Les paramètres suivants figurent sous l'onglet Paramètres, accessible à partir de la plupart des applications disposant de PDFMaker. Joindre le fichier source Inclut le document en cours de conversion sous forme de pièce jointe au fichier PDF. Créer les signets Convertit certains éléments des documents Office d'origine en signets PDF : titres dans Word et PowerPoint, noms de feuille de calcul dans Excel. La sélection de cette option remplace tout autre paramètre défini dans le panneau Signets de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion. Remarque : Pour les documents Microsoft Publisher 2003, PDFMaker inclut les titres sous forme de signets dans le fichier PDF. PDFMaker ne prend pas en charge la conversion des signets, des liens, de la transparence ni des traits de coupe ou des repères de fond perdus de Publisher 2002. Ajouter des liens Inclut les liens et hyperliens dans le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 87 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Lorsque cette option est désactivée mais que la préférence Créer des liens à partir des URL est activée dans l'application Acrobat du destinataire du fichier PDF, les URL du fichier PDF restent actives. Pour plus de détails, voir « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 37. Activer l'accessibilité et la redistribution avec les fichiers Adobe PDF balisés Intègre des balises dans le formulaire PDF. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à Excel Convertir les commentaires Convertit les commentaires Excel créés par l'utilisateur en notes et les répertorie dans le panneau des commentaires d'Acrobat. Ajuster la feuille de calcul à la taille d'une page Ajuste la taille de chaque feuille de calcul de manière que toutes les entrées qu'elle contient soient incluses dans la même page du fichier PDF.. Ajuster à la largeur du papier Ajuste la taille de chaque feuille de calcul de manière que toutes les colonnes qu'elle contient soient incluses dans la même page du fichier PDF. Inviter à sélectionner les feuilles Excel Ouvre une boîte de dialogue au début du processus de conversion. Celle-ci vous permet de spécifier les feuilles de calcul à inclure dans le fichier PDF, ainsi que l'ordre dans lequel elles doivent apparaître. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à PowerPoint Convertir les éléments multimédias Convertit tout fichier audio-vidéo lié en un fichier FLV et incorpore celui-ci dans le fichier PDF. Conserver l'animation (PowerPoint 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Convertit tous les effets d'animation du fichier PowerPoint en animations équivalentes dans le fichier PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans PowerPoint 2007. Conserver les transitions entre diapositives Convertit les effets de transition des diapositives PowerPoint en effets de transition PDF. Convertir les diapositives masquées en pages PDF Convertit en pages PDF les diapositives PowerPoint qui ne s'affichent pas lors de la lecture normale de la présentation. Convertir les notes du présentateur Convertit les notes du présentateur insérées dans la présentation PowerPoint en notes textuelles dans le fichier PDF. Utiliser les paramètres d'impression de PowerPoint (PowerPoint 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Utilise dans le fichier PDF les mêmes paramètres d'imprimante que dans le fichier d'origine. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans PowerPoint 2007. Options de l'onglet Paramètres spécifiques à la messagerie électronique Les options suivantes s'affichent lorsque vous accédez aux paramètres PDFMaker depuis Microsoft Outlook ou Lotus Notes. Compatibilité Définit le niveau de compatibilité du fichier PDF. Utilisez la version la plus récente (dans ce cas, la version 1.7 ADBE-3) pour prendre en compte les fonctions les plus récentes. Si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier PDF créé à un grand nombre d'utilisateurs, choisissez une version antérieure pour vous assurer qu'ils pourront tous afficher et imprimer ce document. Pièces jointes Indique si tous les fichiers joints à des messages électroniques sont inclus dans le fichier PDF. Générer un porte-documents Adobe PDF lors de la création d'un fichier PDF Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option convertit toujours les messages individuels en fichiers composants d'un porte-documents PDF. Si elle est désactivée, les messages individuels sont fusionnés au sein du même fichier PDF, sur des pages distinctes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 88 Création d'un fichier PDF Ne pas inclure les informations sur le nom de dossier Lorsque cette option est activée, les noms des dossiers de messagerie sont exclus des fichiers PDF. Incorporer l'index pour une recherche plus rapide Crée un index incorporé qui accélère les recherches, notamment lorsque vous convertissez un grand nombre de messages électroniques ou de dossiers de message. Bloquer le téléchargement de contenus externes Lorsqu'elle est activée, cette option interdit le téléchargement de tout contenu Internet externe (images, feuilles de style CSS, scripts JavaScript, etc.). Options de mise en page Indiquent les propriétés de page, à l'instar des propriétés disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer : format de page, orientation et marges. Nombre d'archives récentes à afficher (Outlook uniquement) Lors de la conversion de dossiers et de messages électroniques, les menus Adobe PDF > [Convertir les messages sélectionnés et Convertir les dossiers sélectionnés] présentent les fichiers PDF créés récemment que vous pouvez ajouter. Cette option indique le nombre maximum de fichiers PDF pouvant figurer dans les menus. Afficher les boutons "Joindre au format Adobe PDF" Si cette option est sélectionnée, le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF apparaît dans la fenêtre Message de Outlook. Paramètres de l'onglet Word (Microsoft Word) Convertir les commentaires affichés en notes dans le fichier Adobe PDF Convertit tous les commentaires entrés dans Word en commentaires PDF. Si le document Word ouvert contient des commentaires, d'autres options s'affichent dans la zone Commentaires de cet onglet : • Réviseur Répertorie les noms des réviseurs qui ont entré des commentaires dans le document Word actuel. • Inclure Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les commentaires ne sont pas inclus dans le fichier PDF. • Notes ouvertes Détermine si les fenêtres de commentaires dans le fichier PDF s'ouvrent automatiquement ou si elles restent fermées pour les commentaires de ce réviseur. • Couleur Indique la couleur d'icône des commentaires de ce réviseur. Si vous cliquez de façon répétée sur l'icône de couleur, un nombre limité de couleurs s'affiche en boucle. • Nbre de commentaires Affiche le nombre de commentaires apportés par le réviseur. Convertir les références croisées et la table des matières en liens (Word 2002 et 2003 uniquement) Active la navigation en un clic à partir de ces éléments dans le nouveau document PDF. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Word 2007. Convertir les liens de notes de bas et de fin de page Intègre ces éléments dans le fichier PDF. Activer le balisage avancé Intègre le balisage dans le fichier PDF. Paramètres de l'onglet Signets (Microsoft Word) Les options spécifiées sous cet onglet déterminent les éléments à convertir en signets dans le document PDF. Important : Pour inclure les signets dans l'opération de conversion, assurez-vous que l'option Ajouter des signets au fichier Adobe PDF disponible sous l'onglet Paramètres est activée. Si vous désactivez cette option, elle prend le pas sur toutes les options que vous pouvez sélectionner sous cet onglet et aucun signet n'est créé. Convertir les titres en signets Sélectionnez tous les titres de la liste d'éléments afin de les convertir en signets PDF. Convertir les styles en signets Sélectionnez tous les styles de texte de la liste d'éléments afin de les convertir en signets PDF. (option désactivée par défaut) Convertir les signets Word Convertit tous les signets créés dans Word par l'utilisateur en signets PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 89 Création d'un fichier PDF Liste d'éléments Spécifie les titres et styles Word à convertir en signets PDF. • Elément Répertorie les normes de tous les titres et styles Word. Les icônes Titres et Styles indiquent le type d'élément. • Type Indique également si l'élément est un titre ou un style dans le document Word. • Signet Une coche indique si l'élément en question est converti ou non en signet PDF. Cliquez sur l'option Signet d'un élément pour sélectionner/désélectionner ce dernier. • Niveau Spécifie l'emplacement de l'élément dans l'arborescence du panneau Signets du fichier PDF. Cliquez sur un numéro de niveau pour ouvrir un menu qui vous permet de modifier la valeur. Remarque : Si seulement certains titres et styles Word disponibles sont sélectionnés pour la conversion en signets PDF, des indicateurs le signalent en haut de l'onglet. Si tous les éléments du même type sont sélectionnés, une coche s'affiche. Si seulement certains éléments d'un type donné sont sélectionnés, un carré de couleur s'affiche. Autrement, la zone est vide. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF Pages Web et fichiers PDF La structure d'une page Web repose avant tout sur un fichier écrit en langage HTML (Hypertext Markup Language). En général, le fichier HTML comprend des associations à d'autres fichiers, qui s'affichent au sein de la page ou régissent son apparence ou son fonctionnement. Lorsque vous convertissez une page Web au format PDF, le fichier HTML et tous les fichiers associés (images JPEG, fichiers Adobe FLA, feuilles de styles CSS, fichiers texte, mappages d'image, formulaires, par exemple) sont inclus dans le processus de conversion. Le document PDF obtenu fonctionne de façon très similaire à la page Web d'origine. Par exemple, les images, liens, mappages d'images ou encore la plupart des fichiers multimédia s'affichent et fonctionnent normalement au sein du document PDF. (Les fichiers GIF animés se présentent comme des images fixes et affichent la dernière image de l'animation.) En outre, le fichier PDF fonctionne comme tout autre document PDF. Vous pouvez par exemple parcourir le fichier par défilement ou à l'aide des signets, d'autres utilisateurs peuvent y ajouter des commentaires, vous pouvez le protéger ou y insérer des champs de formulaires ou d'autres fonctions d'amélioration. Dans la préparation à la conversion de pages Web au format PDF, vous devez prendre des décisions qui auront un impact sur le processus de conversion : • Quels éléments souhaitez-vous convertir ? Si vous souhaitez uniquement convertir une zone sélectionnée sur la page Web ouverte, utilisez PDFMaker à partir d'Internet Explorer. Si vous voulez convertir plusieurs niveaux ou l'ensemble d'un site Web multipage, travaillez depuis Acrobat. • Souhaitez-vous créer un nouveau fichier PDF à partir de pages Web ou ajouter les pages converties à un fichier PDF existant ? Cette opération s'effectue aussi bien dans Acrobat que dans Internet Explorer ; vous devez cependant choisir des commandes ou des boutons différents. Remarque : Sur un système Windows occidental, la conversion au format PDF de pages en langue chinoise, japonaise ou coréenne (CJK) nécessite l'installation des fichiers de prise en charge des langues CJK en même tant qu'Acrobat. Il est également préférable de choisir un codage approprié lors de la configuration de la conversion HTML. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 90 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Internet Explorer (Windows) Lorsque vous installez Acrobat, une barre d'outils Adobe PDF s'ajoute à Internet Explorer (version 6.0 ou ultérieure). Les commandes de cette barre d'outils vous permettent de convertir au format PDF la page Web active de différentes façons : vous pouvez convertir la page entière ou des portions de celle-ci ; vous pouvez créer un fichier PDF ou ajouter la page convertie à un fichier PDF existant. Le menu de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF contient en outre des commandes qui lancent des actions complémentaires après la conversion, par exemple joindre le nouveau PDF à un message électronique ou l'imprimer. Menu de la barre d'outils PDF fournissant des commandes simples de conversion et d'impression Voir aussi « Paramètres de conversion des pages Web » à la page 93 Conversion d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Dans Internet Explorer, affichez la page Web voulue. 2 A l'aide du menu Convertir de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : Remarque : Si la barre d'outils PDF n'est pas visible dans Internet Explorer, choisissez Affichage > Barre d'outils > Adobe PDF. • Pour créer un nouveau fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active, choisissez Convertir la page Web au format PDF. Sélectionnez ensuite un emplacement, saisissez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour ajouter une version PDF de la page active à un autre fichier PDF, choisissez Ajouter la page Web à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF existant et sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour créer et imprimer un fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active, choisissez Imprimer la page Web. Lorsque la conversion est terminée et que la boîte de dialogue d'impression s'ouvre, spécifiez les options nécessaires et cliquez sur OK. • Pour créer un fichier PDF à partir de la page Web active et le joindre à un message électronique vide, choisissez Convertir la page Web et envoyer par messagerie. Choisissez ensuite un emplacement et saisissez le nom du fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Après conversion, saisissez les informations nécessaires dans le message électronique qui s'ouvre. • Pour toutes ces options, choisissez Afficher le fichier Adobe PDF obtenu afin d'ouvrir le fichier PDF généré. Conversion d'une section d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Cliquez et faites glisser la souris pour sélectionner le texte et les images d'une page Web. 2 Cliquez sur le contenu sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Pour créer un fichier PDF, choisissez Convertir la sélection en Adobe PDF. Indiquez ensuite le nom et l'emplacement du fichier PDF. • Pour ajouter le contenu sélectionné à un autre fichier PDF, choisissez Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF auquel doit s'ajouter la sélection, puis sélectionnez-le.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 91 Création d'un fichier PDF Conversion au format PDF de zones sélectionnées sur une page Web L'option Sélectionner vous permet de choisir les éléments d'une page Web à convertir. Vous pouvez ainsi convertir des contenus pertinents et omettre les éléments superflus ou indésirables tels que les publicités. 1 Sur la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, cliquez sur Sélectionner . 2 A mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur sur la page Web, une ligne en pointillé rouge indique les zones sélectionnées de la page Web. Cliquez sur les zones à convertir. Les zones sélectionnées sont délimitées en bleu. Pour désélectionner une zone, cliquez à nouveau dessus. 3 Effectuez l'opération de conversion comme à l'accoutumée. 4 Pour désélectionner toutes les zones et quitter le mode de sélection, cliquez à nouveau sur Sélectionner. Conversion d'une page Web liée au format PDF ? Dans la page Web active, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte d'un lien, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Pour ajouter la page Web liée à un fichier PDF existant, choisissez Ajouter la cible du lien à un fichier PDF existant. Localisez ensuite le fichier PDF existant et sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour convertir la page Web liée en un nouveau fichier PDF, choisissez Convertir la cible du lien en Adobe PDF. Remarque : Le menu contextuel comprend également les options Ajouter à un fichier PDF existant et Convertir au format Adobe PDF. Si vous choisissez l'une ou l'autre de ces options, la page Web active (et non le lien sélectionné) sera convertie. Conversion de pages Web au format PDF dans Acrobat Bien qu'il soit possible de convertir au format PDF une page Web ouverte dans Internet Explorer, des options supplémentaires vous sont proposées si vous effectuez la conversion depuis Acrobat. Par exemple, vous pouvez inclure l'intégralité d'un site Web dans le document PDF ou uniquement certains de ses niveaux. Voir aussi « Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques » à la page 59 « Paramètres de conversion des pages Web » à la page 93 Conversion d'une page Web au format PDF 1 Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web. 2 Entrez le chemin d'accès complet à la page Web, ou cliquez sur Parcourir et localisez le fichier HTML. 3 Pour modifier le nombre de niveaux du site Web à convertir, développez l'option Capturer plusieurs niveaux. Indiquez le nombre de niveaux à inclure ou sélectionnez l'option Télécharger le site entier afin d'inclure tous les niveaux du site Web. Remarque : Certains sites Web peuvent contenir des centaines, voire des milliers, de pages. La conversion d'un site Web volumineux peut ralentir ou bloquer le système, voire même saturer l'espace disponible sur le disque dur et la mémoire et ainsi provoquer un blocage complet du système. Il est préférable de commencer par télécharger un niveau de pages, puis de parcourir celles-ci afin de télécharger uniquement les pages liées qui vous intéressent. 4 Si l'option Télécharger seulement n niveau(x) est sélectionnée, sélectionnez l'une ou les deux options suivantes : Utiliser un seul chemin Télécharge uniquement les pages Web subordonnées à l'URL spécifié. Utiliser un seul serveur Télécharge uniquement les pages Web stockées sur le même serveur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 92 Création d'un fichier PDF 5 Cliquez sur Paramètres, modifiez le cas échéant les options sélectionnées dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètre de conversion des pages Web. 6 Cliquez sur Créer. Remarque : Vous pouvez visualiser les pages PDF pendant leur téléchargement, mais vous devez attendre la fin de l'opération pour pouvoir les modifier. 7 Si vous fermez la boîte de dialogue d'état du téléchargement, choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Afficher l'état au premier plan. Ajout d'une page Web non liée à un fichier PDF existant Cette procédure permet d'ajouter des pages à un fichier PDF modifiable. Si le fichier PDF d'origine est en lecture seule, vous obtenez un nouveau fichier PDF plutôt que de nouvelles pages dans le fichier existant. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF existant dans Acrobat (celui auquel vous souhaitez ajouter une page Web). 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Créer un fichier PDF à partir de/Ajouter une page Web. 3 Entrez l'URL de la page à ajouter et sélectionnez les options nécessaires, comme expliqué pour la conversion de pages Web en fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Créer. Ajout d'une page Web liée à un fichier PDF existant 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Si nécessaire, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant les liens vers les pages que vous souhaitez ajouter. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le lien avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ajouter au document. • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Afficher la liste des pages liées. Une boîte de dialogue s'affiche, répertoriant tous les liens détectés sur la page active ou sur les pages référencées par le signet balisé. Sélectionnez les pages liées à ajouter. Cliquez sur Propriétés pour définir les options de téléchargement, si nécessaire, puis cliquez sur Télécharger. • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Ajouter toutes les pages liées. Remarque : Une fois les pages téléchargées, les liens permettant d'y accéder sont convertis en liens internes : lorsque vous activez un lien, la page PDF correspondante s'affiche, et non la page HTML d'origine sur le Web. Conversion d'une page Web liée en un nouveau fichier PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Le cas échéant, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant le lien Web à convertir. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir dans un nouveau document. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez également convertir une page liée à partir d'une page Web affichée dans Internet Explorer, à l'aide de la même commande du menu contextuel. Copie de l'URL d'un lien Web Cette procédure vous permet de copier le chemin d'accès d'un lien dans le Presse-papiers afin de l'utiliser ailleurs. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF converti précédemment dans Acrobat. Si nécessaire, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page contenant les liens vers les pages que vous souhaitez copier. 2 Cliquez sur le lien avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Copier l'adresse du lien.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 93 Création d'un fichier PDF Modification des paramètres de conversion des pages Web Les paramètres de conversion des pages Web au format PDF s'appliquent au processus de conversion. Ils n'ont pas d'impact sur les fichiers PDF existants. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Internet Explorer, affichez le menu de la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, puis choisissez Convertir > Préférences. • A partir d'Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web, puis cliquez sur Paramètres. 2 Sous l'onglet Généraux, configurez le cas échéant les options disponibles sous Paramètres de conversion et Paramètres PDF. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour afficher des options supplémentaires pour le type de fichier sélectionné. 3 Sous l'onglet Mise en page, sélectionnez les options de format de page, d'orientation et de mise à l'échelle. Paramètres de conversion des pages Web La boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web est uniquement disponible à partir d'Internet Explorer et d'Acrobat. Onglet Générales Paramètres de conversion Indiquent les paramètres de conversion des fichiers HTML et texte. Choisissez un type de fichier, puis cliquez sur Paramètres afin de sélectionner les propriétés de police et autres attributs associés. Créer les signets Crée un signet balisé pour chaque page Web convertie ; le titre de la page (élément HTML Title) détermine le nom du signet. Si aucun titre n'est défini pour la page, son URL est utilisé pour nommer le signet. Créer les balises PDF Stocke une structure dans le document PDF correspondant à la structure HTML des pages Web. Cette structure vous permet de créer des signets balisés pour les paragraphes, les entrées de liste et d'autres éléments faisant appel à des éléments HTML. Placer les en-têtes et pieds de page sur une nouvelle page Place un en-tête et un pied de page sur chaque page. Les entêtes indiquent le titre de la page Web ou, en l'absence de titre, l'URL ou le chemin de fichier de la page. Les pieds de page présentent l'URL ou le chemin de fichier de la page Web, ainsi que la date et l'heure du téléchargement. Onglet Mise en page Les options de mise en page indiquent une sélection de formats de page, d'options de mesures (largeur, hauteur, marges) et d'orientation. Les options de mise à l'échelle sont les suivantes : Ajuster le contenu à la largeur de la page Ajuste le contenu de la page, le cas échéant, à la largeur définie. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le format de la page s'ajuste à son contenu (le cas échéant). Passer au mode Paysage au-dessous de (%) Oriente la page en mode Paysage si la nouvelle version de la page est inférieure au pourcentage de taille originale spécifié. Uniquement disponible si vous avez sélectionné l'orientation Portrait.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 94 Création d'un fichier PDF Paramètres de conversion des fichiers HTML Cette boîte de dialogue s'ouvre lorsque vous sélectionnez HTML sous l'onglet Généraux de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web, puis que vous cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. Codage d'entrée Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : • Codage par défaut Codage Définit le codage d'entrée du texte du fichier à partir d'un menu de systèmes d'exploitation et d'alphabets. • Toujours Ignore tout codage spécifié dans le fichier HTML source et utilise la sélection qui apparaît sous l'option Codage par défaut. • Lorsque la page ne spécifie pas le codage Utilise la sélection de l'option Codage par défaut uniquement si le fichier HTML source ne spécifie aucun type de codage. Paramètres des polices spécifiques à la langue Ces paramètres permettent de changer de script de langue, de texte du corps et de corps de police de base. Couleurs par défaut Définit les couleurs par défaut du texte, des arrière-plans de pages et des liens Web. Cliquez sur le bouton de couleur pour ouvrir une palette et y effectuer une sélection. Pour appliquer ces couleurs au document PDF, cochez la case Appliquer ces paramètres à toutes les pages. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les couleurs par défaut sont uniquement appliquées aux pages sans modèle de couleurs défini. Contenu multimédia Permet de désactiver la capture multimédia, d'incorporer les fichiers multimédia lorsque cela est possible ou encore de créer des liens vers un contenu multimédia (fichier SWF, par exemple) par URL. Conserver l'arrière-plan des pages Spécifient l'utilisation de couleurs et de mosaïque d'images comme arrière-plan pour les pages, et de cellules de couleur pour les tableaux. Si les options sont désactivées, les pages converties semblent parfois différentes des pages dans le navigateur Web mais sont plus faciles à lire une fois imprimées. Convertir les images Inclut les images dans le processus de conversion au format PDF. Souligner les liens Souligne le texte des liens Web sur les pages. Paramètres de conversion des fichiers texte Codage d'entrée Définit le codage d'entrée du texte d'un fichier. Paramètres des polices spécifiques à la langue Ces paramètres permettent de changer de script de langue, de texte du corps et de corps de police de base. Couleurs par défaut Définit les couleurs par défaut du texte et des arrière-plans de pages. Cliquez sur le bouton de couleur pour ouvrir une palette et y effectuer une sélection. Au niveau des marges Insère un retour à la ligne lorsque le texte atteint le bord de la zone de texte de la page. Création d'un fichier PDF avec Acrobat Distiller Présentation d'Acrobat Distiller Acrobat Distiller vous permet de sélectionner des paramètres de conversion de documents au format PDF, des options de protection et des informations relatives aux polices. Vous pouvez également utiliser la fenêtre d'Acrobat Distiller pour surveiller les travaux de conversion mis en file d'attente.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 95 Création d'un fichier PDF Fenêtre principale d'Acrobat Distiller (Windows) A. Menus B. Fichiers de paramètres Adobe PDF personnalisés C. Fichiers dans la file d'attente D. Fichier non converti E. Menu contextuel F. Fenêtre d'état Pour lancer Acrobat Distiller à partir d'Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Impression > Acrobat Distiller. Gestion de la file d'attente de conversion Distiller vous permet de mettre en file d'attente des fichiers PostScript créés dans d'autres applications, et de suivre l'intégralité du processus de conversion au format PDF. Mise en file d'attente d'un fichier PostScript 1 Sélectionnez un fichier de paramètres Adobe PDF dans la liste déroulante Paramètres par défaut de Distiller. 2 (Facultatif) Choisissez Paramètres > Protection, puis sélectionnez le niveau de chiffrement. 3 Ouvrez le fichier PostScript et lancez le processus de conversion de l'une des manières suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Ouvrir, sélectionnez un fichier PostScript, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Faites glisser un ou plusieurs fichiers PostScript du Bureau vers la fenêtre Acrobat Distiller. Cliquez sur Pause avant l'étape 3 si vous souhaitez vérifier la file d'attente avant de lancer la conversion des fichiers dans Distiller. Modification de la file d'attente en cours de traitement Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour arrêter temporairement le traitement d'un travail en cours, cliquez sur Pause. • Pour relancer le traitement du travail en cours, cliquez sur Reprise. A C D F B EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 96 Création d'un fichier PDF • Pour supprimer des fichiers de la file d'attente, cliquez sur Annuler le travail. Annuler le travail supprime tous les fichiers de la file d'attente dont la conversion n'est pas encore terminée. (Windows uniquement) Sélectionnez des fichiers et cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler les travaux. Seuls les fichiers sélectionnés sont supprimés. • (Windows uniquement) Pour ouvrir le dossier dans lequel se trouvent les fichiers sélectionnés, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Explorer. • (Windows uniquement) Pour ouvrir le fichier PDF sélectionné dans Acrobat, un navigateur ou Adobe Reader, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Afficher. Vous pouvez également cliquer deux fois sur le fichier PDF pour l'ouvrir dans Acrobat. Conservation d'un historique de la file d'attente (Windows) ? Cliquez sur la file d'attente avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Enregistrer la liste. Distiller procède à l'enregistrement et ouvre l'historique dans un fichier PDF. Effacement de la file d'attente Pour supprimer de la liste tous les fichiers en pause et convertis : • (Windows) Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la file d'attente et choisissez Effacer l'historique. • (Mac OS) Cliquez sur le bouton Effacer la liste situé au-dessus de la file d'attente. Préférences de Distiller Les préférences de Distiller permettent de spécifier les paramètres généraux de Distiller. Vous pouvez accéder aux préférences de Distiller en choisissant Fichier > Préférences (Windows) ou Distiller > Préférences (Mac OS). (Windows) Avertir lorsque le dossier TEMP de Windows est presque saturé Vous avertit si l'espace disque disponible est inférieur à 1 Mo. L'espace disque requis est souvent le double de la taille du fichier PostScript en cours de traitement. Confirmer la destination du fichier PDF Vous permet de spécifier le nom et l'emplacement des fichiers lorsque vous utilisez le glisser-déposer ou la commande Imprimer. Confirmer le remplacement d'un fichier PDF Vous avertit si vous êtes sur le point d'écraser un fichier PDF existant. Visualiser le fichier PDF généré à l'aide de Distiller Ouvre automatiquement le fichier PDF converti. Supprimer les fichiers journaux des travaux effectués Crée un fichier journal (intitulé messages.log) uniquement lorsqu'il existe des messages d'interprétation du fichier PostScript ou qu'une erreur PostScript se produit. (En cas d'échec d'un travail, un fichier journal est toujours créé.) Recommandations relatives à la création d'un fichier PostScript Si vous souhaitez affiner le processus de création des fichiers PDF à l'aide des paramètres Distiller ou des opérateurs pdfmark, commencez par créer un fichier PostScript, puis convertissez-le au format PDF. Pour plus de détails sur le kit SDK d'Adobe Acrobat 9, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement). Dans les applications de création telles qu'Adobe InDesign, utilisez la commande d'impression, puis sélectionnez l'imprimante Adobe PDF pour convertir le fichier au format PostScript. La boîte de dialogue d'impression varie d'une application à l'autre. Pour obtenir des instructions sur la création d'un fichier PostScript à partir d'une application particulière, consultez la documentation de cette application.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 97 Création d'un fichier PDF Gardez à l'esprit les recommandations suivantes lors de la création d'un fichier PostScript : • Utilisez le langage PostScript niveau 3 dès que possible pour profiter des fonctions PostScript les plus avancées. • Utilisez l'imprimante Adobe PDF comme imprimante PostScript. • (Windows) Envoyez les polices utilisées dans le document. • Donnez au fichier PostScript le même nom que le document d'origine, en lui adjoignant l'extension .ps. (Certaines applications utilisent l'extension .prn.) • Utilisez les couleurs et formats de page personnalisés disponibles dans le fichier PPD d'Acrobat Distiller. D'autres fichiers PPD peuvent introduire dans le fichier PDF des couleurs, polices ou formats de pages inadaptés. • Si vous transférez des fichiers PostScript entre ordinateurs via FTP, notamment dans le cas de plates-formes différentes, envoyez-les sous forme de données binaires 8 bits. Cela empêchera la conversion des sauts de ligne en retour chariot et inversement. Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF Choix de paramètres Adobe PDF prédéfinis pour la conversion des fichiers 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Lancez Acrobat Distiller. • Dans une application Adobe Creative Suite®, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante cible et cliquez sur Propriétés. • (Windows) Dans les applications Office 2007, sélectionnez Acrobat > Préférences. • (Windows) Dans une autre application de création ou dans un utilitaire, choisissez Adobe PDF > Modifier les paramètres de conversion. 2 Choisissez des paramètres prédéfinis dan le menu Paramètres par défaut (ou Paramètres de conversion). Paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF Un paramètre prédéfini PDF est un groupe de paramètres ayant un impact sur le processus de création d’un fichier PDF. Ces paramètres sont conçus pour équilibrer la taille et la qualité du fichier, en fonction de l’utilisation du fichier PDF envisagée. La plupart des paramètres prédéfinis sont partagés dans les applications d’Adobe Creative Suite, y compris InDesign, Illustrator, Photoshop et Acrobat. Vous avez également la possibilité de créer et de partager des paramètres prédéfinis personnalisés pour vos exigences particulières en matière de sortie. Un fichier de paramètres prédéfinis PDF est doté de l’extension .joboptions. Certains des paramètres prédéfinis répertoriés ci-dessous ne sont disponibles qu’une fois déplacés, selon vos besoins, du dossier Extras (où ils sont installés par défaut) vers le dossier Settings destiné aux paramètres personnalisés. De manière générale, les dossiers Extras et Settings sont disponibles dans Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF (Windows), dans ProgramData/Adobe/Adobe PDF (Windows Vista) ou dans Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe PDF (Mac OS). Les fichiers de paramètres installés par défaut avec Distiller sont en lecture seule et cachés. Les paramètres personnalisés sont enregistrés à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/[nom utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), Users/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Vista) ou Users/[nom utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 98 Création d'un fichier PDF Quelques paramètres prédéfinis ne sont pas disponibles dans certaines applications Creative Suite. Passez régulièrement en revue les paramètres PDF. Les options par défaut ne sont pas rétablies automatiquement. Les applications et utilitaires de création de fichiers PDF utilisent toujours le jeu de paramètres PDF défini et sélectionné en dernier. Impression haute qualité Crée des fichiers PDF pour la qualité d’impression sur les imprimantes de bureau et les périphériques d’épreuves. Ce paramètre prédéfini utilise PDF 1.4, sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore également les jeux partiels de toutes les polices, ne modifie pas les couleurs et n’aplatit pas la transparence (pour les types de fichiers ayant la capacité de transparence). Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier de paramètres peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 5.0, Adobe Reader 5.0 toute autre version ultérieure. Pages hors format Crée des fichiers PDF adaptés à l’affichage et à l’impression de dessins d’ingénierie dont la taille est supérieure à 200 x 200 po (508 x 508 cm). Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier d’options peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat, Reader 7.0 et toute autre version ultérieure. PDF/A-1b: 2005 (CMJN et RVB) Utilisé pour la préservation (l’archivage) durable des documents électroniques. Le format PDF/A-1b utilise PDF 1.4 et convertit l’ensemble des couleurs en CMJN ou RVB en fonction de la norme sélectionnée. Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier d’options peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat et Reader version 5.0 et ultérieures. PDF/X-1a (2001 et 2003) PDF/X-1a requiert l’incorporation de toutes les polices, la spécification des cadres de sélection PDF appropriés et l’affichage des couleurs en tant que CMJN et/ou couleurs avec tons directs. Les fichiers conformes doivent contenir des informations relatives aux conditions d’impression pour lesquelles ils ont été préparés. Les fichiers PDF créés avec la compatibilité PDF/X-1a peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Le paramètre PDF/X-1a utilise PDF 1.3, sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore les jeux partiels de toutes les polices, crée des fichiers PDF non balisés et aplatit la transparence à l’aide du paramètre Haute résolution. Remarque : Les paramètres prédéfinis PDF/X1-a:2003 et PDF/X-3 (2003) sont importés sur votre ordinateur lors de l’installation. Cependant, ils ne sont pas disponibles avant que vous ne les déplaciez du dossier Extras vers le dossier Settings. PDF/X-4 (2007) Ce paramètre est basé sur PDF 1.4, incluant la prise en charge de la transparence non aplatie. PDF/X- 4 et PDF/X-3 possèdent une gestion des couleurs et des spécifications de couleurs ICC (International Color Consortium) identiques. Vous avez la possibilité de créer des fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X-4 directement avec les trois applications Creative Suite 3 (Illustrator, InDesign et Photoshop). Dans Acrobat 9, utilisez la fonction de contrôle en amont afin de convertir les fichiers PDF en PDF/X-4 PRELIMINAIRE. Les fichiers PDF créés avec la conformité à la norme PDF/X-4 peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 7.0, Reader 7.0 et versions ultérieures. Qualité optimale Crée des fichiers PDF pour la production d'impression de haute qualité (par exemple, pour l'impression numérique ou pour les séparations sur photocomposeuse ou imageuse de plaques). Cependant, il ne crée pas de fichiers compatibles PDF/X. Dans ce cas, la qualité du contenu est prioritaire. Le but est de conserver dans un fichier PDF toutes les informations nécessaires à un imprimeur ou un prestataire de services d’impression afin de garantir la précision de l’impression du document. Ce jeu d'options utilise le format PDF 1.4, convertit les couleurs en CMJN et sous-échantillonne les images en couleurs et en niveaux de gris à 300 ppp et les images monochromes à 1200 ppp. Il incorpore les jeux partiels de toutes les polices et conserve la transparence (pour les types de fichiers ayant la capacité de transparence). Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat 5.0 et Acrobat Reader 5.0 et versions ultérieures.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 99 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Avant de créer un fichier PDF destiné à un imprimeur professionnel ou un service de prépresse, demandezlui de vous indiquer la résolution de sortie et les autres paramètres requis. Vous pouvez aussi demander le fichier .joboptions accompagné des paramètres recommandés. Vous devrez dans certains cas modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF en fonction des recommandations du prestataire de services, puis lui fournir votre propre fichier .joboptions. PDF avec contenu enrichi Permet de créer des fichiers PDF accessibles comprenant des balises, des hyperliens, des signets, des éléments interactifs et des calques. Lorsque ce groupe d’options est sélectionné, le format utilisé est PDF 1.6 et des jeux partiels de toutes les polices sont incorporés. Il optimise également les fichiers pour le téléchargement page à page. Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans et Acrobat Reader 7.0 et versions ultérieures. (Le paramètre prédéfini du fichier PDF avec contenu enrichi se situe dans le dossier Extras.) Remarque : le paramètre prédéfini s’appelait eBook dans les versions précédentes de certaines applications. Taille de fichier minimale Permet de créer des fichiers PDF destinés à être affichés sur le Web ou un réseau intranet, ou à être distribués par messagerie. Cet ensemble d’options utilise la compression, le sous-échantillonnage et une résolution d’image relativement basse. Il convertit toutes les couleurs en sRVB et n’incorpore pas les polices (pour les conversions à l’aide d’Adobe Acrobat Distiller). Il optimise également les fichiers pour le téléchargement page à page. Les fichiers PDF obtenus peuvent être ouverts dans et Acrobat Reader 6.0 et versions ultérieures. Standard Crée des fichiers PDF destinés à l’impression sur des imprimantes de bureau ou numériques, à l’édition sur CD-ROM ou à l’envoi à un client comme épreuve d’impression. Cet ensemble d’options utilise la compression et le sous-échantillonnage pour maintenir une taille de fichier réduite. Cependant, il incorpore également des jeux partiels de toutes les polices (autorisées) utilisées dans le fichier, convertit toutes les couleurs en sRVB et imprime selon une résolution moyenne. Les jeux partiels de polices Windows ne sont pas incorporés par défaut. Les fichiers PDF créés avec ce fichier de paramètres peuvent être ouverts dans Acrobat Reader 6.0 et versions ultérieures. Personnalisation des paramètres Adobe PDF Il peut s'avérer pratique de créer des options de conversion personnalisées pour certains travaux ou périphériques de sortie. Via vos sélections, vous pouvez déterminer l'incorporation des polices et la création de jeux partiels, la compression et/ou l'échantillonnage des objets vectoriels et des images, ainsi que l'inclusion éventuelle d'informations d'impression professionnelles, telles que des commentaires OPI (Open Prepress Interface), dans les fichiers PDF résultants. Il est impossible de modifier les fichiers d'options par défaut mais vous pouvez les dupliquer pour créer plus facilement d'autres fichiers d'options. Remarque : Si le fichier PDF est destiné à l'impression professionnelle, demandez à votre prestataire de services qu'il vous fournisse un fichier .joboptions personnalisé contenant la résolution et l'ensemble des paramètres nécessaires. Ainsi, les caractéristiques du fichier PDF que vous créerez seront optimisées pour le processus d'impression. Création d'un fichier personnalisé de paramètres Adobe PDF 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat Distiller, sélectionnez dans le menu Options par défaut un jeu d'options prédéfini à utiliser comme base, puis choisissez Configuration > Modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF. • Dans les applications de création ou autres utilitaires, sélectionnez Adobe PDF comme imprimante cible (en général dans les boîtes de dialogue Mise en page ou Imprimer) et cliquez sur Propriétés. • (Windows) Dans la boîte de dialogue Acrobat PDFMaker, cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres avancées sous l'onglet Paramètres. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez changer de jeu de paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez Afficher tous les paramètres en bas à gauche, puis sélectionnez un jeu prédéfini dans la liste de gauche.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 100 Création d'un fichier PDF Boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF (Windows) A. Paramètres Adobe PDF prédéfinis B. Panneau des options 2 Sélectionnez un panneau à la fois et effectuez les modifications nécessaires. 3 Enregistrez les paramètres personnalisés de l'une des manières suivantes : • Cliquez sur OK pour dupliquer le fichier personnalisé, qui est automatiquement renommé. Par exemple, si vous modifiez les paramètres prédéfinis Qualité optimale, la première version personnalisée est nommée Qualité optimale (1). • Cliquez sur Enregistrer sous, entrez un nom de fichier évocateur et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le fichier personnalisé est enregistré à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/[nom de l'utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), User/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Vista) ou Users/[nom de l'utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS).. Suppression des fichiers de paramètres Adobe PDF personnalisés 1 Dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez Configuration > Modifier les paramètres Adobe PDF. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier personnalisé et cliquez sur Supprimer. 3 Recommencez l'étape 2 autant de fois que nécessaire, puis cliquez sur Annuler pour fermer la boîte de dialogue de suppression des paramètres Adobe PDF. Paramètres Adobe PDF La boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF d'Acrobat Distiller contient des panneaux d'options qui vous permettent de personnaliser la sortie PDF. Voir aussi « Recherche des noms de polices PostScript » à la page 113 Panneau Généraux Dans ce panneau, sélectionnez la version d'Acrobat avec laquelle le fichier doit être compatible, ainsi que d'autres paramètres de fichier et de périphérique. Compatibilité Définit le niveau de compatibilité du fichier PDF. Utilisez la version la plus récente (dans ce cas, la version 1.7 E) pour prendre en compte les fonctions les plus récentes. Si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier PDF créé B AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 101 Création d'un fichier PDF à un grand nombre d'utilisateurs, choisissez une version antérieure pour vous assurer qu'ils pourront tous afficher et imprimer ce document. Compression de niveau objet Compresse les informations structurelles (signets, fonctions d'accessibilité et objets incompressibles) ; ces informations sont alors invisibles ou inutilisables dans Acrobat 5.0 ou Reader 5.0. L'option Balises uniquement compresse les informations structurelles ; sa désactivation empêche toute compression. Rotation auto. des pages Fait automatiquement pivoter les pages en fonction de l'orientation du texte. • Collective par fichier Fait pivoter toutes les pages pour respecter l'orientation de la majorité du texte du document. • Individuelle Fait pivoter chaque page en fonction de l'orientation de son contenu. • Désactivé Empêche la rotation des pages. Remarque : Si l'option Traiter les commentaires DSC est sélectionnée dans le panneau Avancées et que des commentaires d'orientation d'affichage existent, ces commentaires ont priorité lors de la détermination de l'orientation de la page. Liaison Spécifie si le fichier PDF doit être affiché avec une reliure située à droite ou à gauche. Ce paramètre s'applique à l'aspect des pages selon la disposition Deux pages en continu et à celui des vignettes côte à côte. Résolution Utilisez cette option avec les fichiers PostScript de manière à simuler les résolutions en fonction de l'imprimante de destination. La valeur peut être comprise entre 72 et 4000. Utilisez le paramètre par défaut, à moins que vous souhaitiez imprimer le fichier PDF sur une imprimante particulière tout en simulant la résolution définie dans le fichier PostScript d'origine. Remarque : L'augmentation de la résolution accroît la taille du fichier obtenu et éventuellement le temps nécessaire au traitement de certains fichiers. Pages Spécifient les pages à convertir au format PDF. Incorporer les vignettes Permet d'incorporer une vignette d'aperçu pour chaque page du fichier PDF, ce qui accroît la taille du fichier. Désactivez cette option pour les utilisateurs d'Acrobat 5.0 ou version ultérieure ; ces versions génèrent les vignettes de manière dynamique, à chaque fois que l'utilisateur active le panneau Pages du fichier PDF. Optimiser pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web Restructure le fichier page par page lors du téléchargement à partir d'un serveur Web (utilisation optimale des octets) pour un accès plus rapide. Cette option compresse le texte et les dessins au trait, sans tenir compte des paramètres de compression définis dans le panneau Images. Format de page par défaut Spécifie le format de page à utiliser lorsque aucun format n'est indiqué dans le fichier d'origine. Les fichiers EPS indiquent la taille du cadre de sélection, et non le format de page. Panneau Images Les options du panneau Images définissent la compression et le rééchantillonnage des images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes. Vous pouvez essayer d'ajuster ces options afin d'obtenir le meilleur équilibre entre taille de fichier et qualité d'image. La résolution définie pour les images couleur et en niveaux de gris doit être 1,5 à 2 fois supérieure à la linéature d'impression du fichier. La résolution des images monochromes doit être identique à celle du périphérique de sortie. Sachez cependant que l'enregistrement d'une image monochrome à une résolution supérieure à 1500 ppp fait augmenter la taille du fichier sans améliorer notablement la qualité de l'image. Les images susceptibles d'être agrandies, telles que les cartes, peuvent nécessiter des résolutions supérieures. Remarque : Le rééchantillonnage des images peut provoquer des résultats inattendus en terme d'affichage, par exemple, l'absence totale d'image. Le cas échéant, désactivez le rééchantillonnage et convertissez à nouveau le fichier. Ce problème est plus susceptible de se produire avec l'option d'échantillonnage qu'avec l'interpolation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 102 Création d'un fichier PDF Le tableau ci-après répertorie des types courants d'imprimante et indique pour chacune la résolution en points par pouces, la linéature par défaut en lignes par pouce et une résolution de rééchantillonnage des images mesurée en pixels par pouce. Par exemple, si vous utilisez une imprimante laser à 600 ppp, vous devez entrer une résolution de rééchantillonnage des images de 170. Sous-échantillonnage (désactivé) Si la résolution de l'image dépasse la valeur de la zone Pour les images au-dessus de, cette option la réduit à la résolution du périphérique de sortie en combinant les pixels d'une zone échantillon de l'image en un seul pixel plus grand. Interpolation à Calcule la couleur moyenne des pixels d'une zone échantillon, puis remplace toute la zone par cette couleur à la résolution indiquée. Echantillonnage à Remplace une zone complète par un pixel sélectionné dans cette zone échantillon, selon la résolution spécifiée. Le temps de conversion est moins long qu'avec le sous-échantillonnage, mais les images obtenues sont moins lisses et homogènes. Sous-échantillonnage bicubique à Détermine la couleur de pixel à l'aide d'une moyenne pondérée, au lieu d'une moyenne simple (comme pour le sous-échantillonnage). Cette méthode est la plus lente mais produit les dégradés de tons les plus lisses. Compression/Qualité de l'image Applique la compression aux images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes. Dans le cas des images couleur et en niveaux de gris, il est également possible de spécifier la qualité de l'image. Lissage des gris Lisse les contours inégaux des images monochromes. Choisissez 2 bits, 4 bits ou 8 bits pour spécifier 4, 16 ou 256 niveaux de gris. (Le lissage des gris peut rendre flous les petits caractères et les lignes fines.) Remarque : La compression du texte et des dessins au trait est toujours active. Pour la désactiver, modifiez le paramètre correspondant dans Distiller. Pour plus de détails sur ce kit SDK, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement). Règle Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Règles, dans laquelle vous pouvez définir les options de traitement des images couleur, en niveaux de gris et monochromes dont la résolution est inférieure à celles que vous spécifiez. Pour chaque type d'image, entrez une résolution, puis choisissez Ignorer, Avertir et continuer ou Annuler le travail. Panneau Polices Les options de polices permettent de spécifier les polices à incorporer au fichier PDF et éventuellement d'incorporer des jeux partiels de caractères utilisés dans le fichier. Vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer des polices OpenType®, TrueType et PostScript. Les polices soumises à licence sont répertoriées avec un icône en forme de verrou . Si vous sélectionnez une telle police, la nature des restrictions est indiquée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Résolution d'imprimante Linéature par défaut Résolution de l'image 300 ppp (imprimante laser) 60 lpp 120 ppp 600 ppp (imprimante laser) 85 lpp 170 ppp 1200 ppp (photocomposeuse) 120 lpp 240 ppp 2400 ppp (photocomposeuse) 150 lpp 300 pppUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 103 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Lorsque vous associez des fichiers PDF contenant le même jeu partiel de polices, Acrobat essaie de combiner ces jeux. Incorporer toutes les polices Incorpore l'ensemble des polices du fichier. L'incorporation des polices est requise pour satisfaire à la norme PDF/X. Incorporer les polices OpenType Incorpore toutes les polices OpenType utilisées dans le fichier et conserve les informations relatives à ces polices pour la disposition des lignes. Cette option est uniquement disponible si vous sélectionnez Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6) ou Acrobat 8 (PDF 1.7) dans le menu déroulant Compatibilité du panneau Généraux. Jeux partiels de polices lorsque le pourcentage de caractères est inférieur à Spécifie un pourcentage seuil pour n'incorporer que des jeux partiels de polices. Par exemple, si le seuil est réglé à 35, et que moins de 35 % des caractères sont utilisés, Distiller n'incorpore que ces caractères. Si l'incorporation échoue Indique le mode d'action de Distiller quand aucune police à incorporer n'est détectée dans le fichier traité. Toujours incorporer Pour incorporer certaines polices, placez-les dans la liste Toujours incorporer. Assurez-vous que l'option Incorporer toutes les polices n'est pas sélectionnée. Ne jamais incorporer Placez dans cette liste les polices qui ne doivent jamais être incorporées. Si nécessaire, choisissez dans le menu déroulant un dossier différent pour afficher les polices qu'il contient dans la liste. Remarque : Les polices soumises à licence sont répertoriées avec une icône en forme de verrou. Si vous sélectionnez une telle police, la nature des restrictions est indiquée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Ajouter une police Si la police qui vous intéresse ne se trouve pas dans un dossier de polices, cliquez sur Ajouter une police. Saisissez le nom de la police, sélectionnez Toujours incorporer (ou Ne jamais incorporer), puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Remarque : Une police TrueType peut contenir un paramètre ajouté par son créateur, qui empêche son incorporation dans un fichier PDF. Supprimer Supprime une police de la liste Toujours incorporer ou Ne jamais incorporer. Cette action ne supprime pas la police de votre système, mais retire de la liste toute référence à cette police. Remarque : Acrobat ne contient pas les polices Times, Helvetica et ZapfDingbats. Si vous voulez que les destinataires du fichier PDF puissent afficher et imprimer ces polices dans les fichiers PDF que vous créez, incorporez les polices. Panneau Couleur Que vous utilisiez les informations de gestion des couleurs du fichier PostScript, des fichiers de Distiller ou des paramètres personnalisés, la gestion des couleurs de Distiller est entièrement définie dans le panneau Couleur de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF. Fichier de paramètres Répertorie les paramètres de couleur, y compris ceux utilisés dans les applications graphiques. Le paramètre Aucun vous permet de modifier la gestion des couleurs et les paramètres d'espaces de travail. Gestion des couleurs Spécifie la manière dont Distiller convertit les couleurs non gérées par le fichier PostScript, lorsque vous n'utilisez pas de fichier de paramètres de couleur dans Distiller. Ce menu est disponible lorsque Aucun est sélectionné dans le menu Fichier de paramètres. Remarque : Les valeurs de règles de gestion des couleurs peuvent avoir différents effets sur un fichier PDF, selon le paramètre de compatibilité choisi dans le panneau Généraux. • Reproduire les couleurs Laisse les couleurs dépendantes du périphérique inchangées et conserve les couleurs dépendantes du périphérique sous leur forme équivalente la plus proche. Cette option est très utile aux ateliers UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 104 Création d'un fichier PDF d'imprimerie qui ont étalonné leurs machines et utilisé ces informations pour spécifier les couleurs du fichier, et qui n'effectuent qu'une simple sortie sur ces périphériques. • Référencer (ou Convertir) les couleurs Référence les objets couleur à l'aide d'un profil ICC et étalonne les couleurs pour les rendre indépendantes du périphérique dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3). Convertit les espaces colorimétriques dépendants du périphérique en images (RVB, niveaux de gris et CMJN) en espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique (CalRVB, CalGray et Cie L*a*b) dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). • Référencer (ou Convertir) les images uniquement Référence les profils ICC dans les images uniquement (et non dans le texte ou les objets vectoriels) afin d'éviter que le texte en noir subissent des changements de couleur lors de la conversion des fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3). Convertit les espaces colorimétriques dépendants du périphérique en images (RVB, niveaux de gris et CMJN) en espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique (CalRVB, CalGray et Lab) dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). • Convertir toutes les couleurs en sRVB (ou Convertir toutes les couleurs en CalRVB) Etalonne les couleurs pour les rendre indépendantes du périphérique. Convertit les images CMJN et RVB en sRVB dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) et version ultérieure. Convertit les images CMJN et RVB en CalRVB dans les fichiers PDF compatibles avec Acrobat 3.0 (PDF 1.2). Cette option est recommandée pour les PDF destinés à un affichage à l'écran ou à l'impression sur des imprimantes basse résolution. • Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN Convertit les espaces colorimétriques en DeviceGray ou DeviceCMJN selon les options définies dans la zone Espaces de travail. Toutes les options d'espace de travail doivent être spécifiées. Mode de rendu du document Choisissez une méthode de mappage des couleurs des espaces colorimétriques. Le résultat de chaque méthode dépend des profils des espaces colorimétriques. Par exemple, certains profils produisent des résultats identiques avec différentes méthodes. Acrobat partage quatre modes de rendu (Perception, Saturation, Colorimétrie relative et Colorimétrie absolue) avec les autres applications Creative Suite. Acrobat comprend également l'option Conserver, qui indique que le mode de rendu est spécifié sur le périphérique de sortie, plutôt que dans le fichier PDF. Dans la plupart des périphériques, le rendu par défaut est Colorimétrie absolue. Remarque : Tous les modes de rendu peuvent être ignorés ou remplacés par les opérations de gestion des couleurs résultant de la création du fichier PDF. Espaces de travail Pour toutes les valeurs de gestion des couleurs autres que Reproduire les couleurs, sélectionnez un espace de travail afin de spécifier les profils ICC à utiliser pour la définition et l'étalonnage des espaces colorimétriques niveaux de gris, RVB et CMJN des fichier convertis au format PDF. • Gris Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images en niveaux de gris des fichiers. Le profil ICC par défaut des images en niveaux de gris est Dot Gain 20%. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images en niveaux de gris. • RVB Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images RVB des fichiers. Le profil par défaut sRGB IEC61966-2.1 est reconnu par de nombreux périphériques. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images RVB. • CMJN Choisissez le profil de définition de l'espace colorimétrique de toutes les images CMJN des fichiers. La valeur par défaut est U.S. Web Coated (SWOP) v2. Choisissez Aucun pour empêcher la conversion des images CMJN. Remarque : La sélection de la valeur Aucun pour chacun des trois espaces de travail produit les mêmes résultats que l'option Reproduire les couleurs.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 105 Création d'un fichier PDF Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des profils ICC (tels que ceux fournis par votre service d'impression) en les plaçant dans le dossier ICCProfiles du dossier Common, dans le dossier Windows\System\Color (Windows) ou au sein du Dossier Système/Bibliothèque/ColorSync (Mac OS). Conserver les valeurs CMJN pour les espaces colorimétriques CMJN étalonnés Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les valeurs CMJN indépendantes du périphérique sont traitées comme les valeurs dépendantes (DeviceCMJN), les espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique sont ignorés et les fichiers PDF/X-1a utilisent l'option Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN. Si vous la désactivez, les espaces colorimétriques indépendants du périphérique sont convertis en CMJN, à condition que la règle de gestion des couleurs soit Convertir toutes les couleurs en CMJN. Conserver les paramètres UCR/densité de noir Tient compte de ces paramètres s'ils existent dans le fichier PostScript. Le paramètre de densité de noir permet de calculer la quantité de noir à utiliser pour reproduire une couleur. Les paramètres UCR permettent de réduire la quantité de cyan, magenta et jaune pour compenser la densité de noir. Cette méthode, qui utilise moins d'encre, convient au papier non couché. En présence des fonctions de transfert Spécifie la méthode de traitement des fonctions de transfert dans les fichiers PDF. Les fonctions de transfert servent à produire des effets artistiques et à corriger les caractéristiques d'un périphérique de sortie donné. • Supprimer Elimine les fonctions de transfert appliquées au fichier. Les fonctions de transfert doivent être supprimées, à moins que le fichier PDF soit destiné au même périphérique de sortie que le fichier PostScript d'origine. • Conserver Conserve les fonctions de transfert, habituellement utilisées pour compenser l'engraissement ou la perte de points pouvant se produire lorsqu'une image est transférée sur film. L'engraissement ou la perte de points survient lorsque les points d'encre qui composent l'image sont plus grands ou plus petits que la trame de demi-teintes. • Appliquer Applique la fonction de transfert, en modifiant les couleurs du fichier, mais sans les conserver. Cette méthode est utile pour créer des effets de couleur dans un fichier. Conserver les informations sur les trames de demi-teintes Conserve toutes les informations de demi-teintes dans le fichier. Les informations de trames de demi-teintes sont destinées à un périphérique de sortie particulier. Panneau Avancés Les paramètres avancés permettent de spécifier les commentaires DSC (Document Structuring Conventions) à intégrer au fichier PDF et de définir d'autres options relatives à la conversion à partir du format PostScript. Un fichier PostScript inclut des commentaires DSC qui contiennent des informations relatives au fichier (telles que l'application d'origine, la date de création et l'orientation des pages) et décrivent la structure des pages (par exemple, les arguments de début et de fin d'un prologue). Les commentaires DSC peuvent s'avérer utiles si le document est destiné à une imprimante ou une presse. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation du site Web Adobe PDF Technology Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_pdftechnology_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Remarque : L'option Format ASCII a été enlevée de Distiller, mais reste disponible en tant que paramètre Distiller. Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF Utilise les options stockées dans le fichier PostScript au lieu du fichier d'options PDF actuellement sélectionné. Pour plus de détails sur la personnalisation des paramètres PDF, voir les informations relatives au kit SDK sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Autoriser les XObjects au format PostScript Les XObjects PostScript stockent des fragments de code PostScript à utiliser lors de l'impression d'un fichier PDF sur une imprimante PostScript. Utilisez cette option dans les flux de travail contrôlés, lorsqu'il n'existe aucune autre solution. Cette option est disponible lorsque la sélection du menu Paramètres par défaut est Standard ou Taille de fichier minimale.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 106 Création d'un fichier PDF Convertir les dégradés en ombres lissées Convertit les dégradés en ombres lissées pour Acrobat 4.0 et versions ultérieures, afin d'améliorer la qualité des fichiers PDF tout en réduisant leur taille. Distiller convertit les dégradés provenant des applications Adobe Illustrator, Adobe InDesign, Adobe FreeHand®, CorelDraw, QuarkXPress et Microsoft PowerPoint. Convertir les traits lissés en courbes Réduit la quantité de points de contrôle servant à construire les courbes des dessins de CAO et produit ainsi des fichiers PDF moins volumineux et plus rapides à afficher. Conserver la sémantique copypage Niveau 2 Utilise l'opérateur copypage PostScript Niveau 2 et non celui de Niveau 3. Si vous disposez d'un fichier PostScript et que vous sélectionnez cette option, un opérateur copypage copie la page. Si cette option n'est pas activée, une opération showpage équivalente est effectuée mais l'état des graphiques n'est pas réinitialisé. Conserver les options de surimpression Conserve les options de surimpression dans les fichiers convertis au format PDF. La surimpression crée des couleurs en superposant les encres. Surimpression des objets non nuls par défaut Empêche les objets surimprimés dotés de valeurs CMJN nulles de masquer les objets CMJN situés sous eux. Enregistrer les paramètres Adobe PDF dans le fichier PDF Incorpore au fichier PDF, sous forme de pièce jointe, le fichier de paramètres (.joboptions) utilisé pour la conversion. (Pour consulter le fichier de paramètres dans Acrobat, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes.) Enregistrer les images au format JPEG dans le fichier PDF (si possible) Traite les images JPEG compressées (les images déjà compressées à l'aide de le codage DCT) sans les compresser à nouveau. La désactivation de cette option améliore les performances car seule la décompression a lieu, pas la recompression. Enregistrer le dossier de correspondance dans le fichier PDF Conserve un dossier de correspondance PostScript au sein d'un fichier PDF. Les dossiers de correspondance décrivent le fichier PostScript ; ils peuvent servir ultérieurement dans le flux de travail ou lors de l'impression du fichier PDF. Utiliser les fichiers Prologue.ps/Epilogue.ps Envoie des fichiers prologue et épilogue avec chaque travail. Le fichier Epilogue.ps permet de définir une séquence personnalisée de code PostScript à exécuter au début ou à la fin de chaque conversion d'un fichier PostScript. Les fichiers exemple Prologue.ps et Epilogue.ps sont situés à l'emplacement /Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Windows), /Users/All Users/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Vista) ou /Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Distiller/Data (Mac OS). Dans l'Explorateur Windows, le dossier Application Data est en général caché. Pour l'afficher, choisissez Outils > Options des dossiers, cliquez sur l'onglet Affichage et sélectionnez Afficher les fichiers et dossiers cachés. Vous pouvez taper le chemin dans la zone de texte Adresse. Remarque : Distiller ne tient compte des fichiers Prologue et Epilogue que si les deux fichiers sont présents et situés au bon emplacement. Ces deux fichiers sont obligatoirement utilisés ensemble. Traiter les commentaires DSC Conserve les informations DSC d'un fichier PostScript. • Consigner les avertissements DSC Affiche des messages d'avertissement relatifs aux commentaires DSC présentant des problèmes au cours du traitement et les consigne dans un fichier journal. • Préserver les informations EPS des commentaires DSC Conserve les informations relatives au fichier EPS, telles que l'application et la date de création. • Conserver les commentaires OPI Conserve les informations nécessaires au remplacement d'une image ou d'un commentaire FPO (For Placement Only) par une image haute résolution située sur un serveur prenant en charge l'interface OPI (Open Prepress Interface) versions 1.3 et 2.0. Pour plus de détails, consultez la spécification OPI 2.0 à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_opi2spec_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 107 Création d'un fichier PDF • Préserver les informations sur le document des commentaires DSC Conserve dans le fichier PDF les propriétés du document, telles que le titre, la date et l'heure de création. • Redimensionner la page et centrer les illustrations des fichiers EPS Centre l'image EPS et redimensionne la page pour l'ajuster au plus près à l'image. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, le format et le positionnement de la page sont établis par rapport au coin supérieur gauche de l'objet situé en haut à gauche de la page, et du coin inférieur droit de l'objet situé en bas à droite. Cette option s'applique uniquement aux travaux constitués d'un fichier EPS. Panneau Normes Les options du panneau Normes vous permettent de vérifier que le contenu du fichier PostScript est conforme aux normes PDF/X-1a, PDF/X-3 ou PDF/A avant de créer le fichier PDF. Dans le cas de la norme PDF/X, vous pouvez soumettre les fichiers à des critères de conformité supplémentaires à définir dans le panneau Normes. La disponibilité des options dépend de la norme choisie. Vous pouvez également créer un fichier PDF/X à partir d'un fichier PDF conforme à l'aide de la fonction de contrôle en amont d'Acrobat. Normes PDF/X Etablit la conformité à la norme PDF/X pour la production d'impression haute résolution. Remarque : PDFMaker, qui constitue la méthode de conversion au format PDF des fichiers Microsoft Word et des fichiers issus d'autres applications, ne crée pas de fichiers conformes à la norme PDF/X. Norme PDF/A Etablit la conformité avec la norme PDF/A pour les documents d'archive. Norme à respecter Produit un rapport indiquant si le fichier est conforme à la norme choisie et, à défaut, les problèmes rencontrés. Le fichier .log s'affiche au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Remarque : Les fichiers PDF qui étaient conformes aux normes PDF/X-1a et PDF/X-3 dans Acrobat 6.0 seront par défaut conformes à la norme PDF/X-1a dans Acrobat 9. Si non conforme Détermine si le fichier PDF doit être créé ou non lorsque le fichier PostScript ne satisfait pas aux exigences de la norme. • Continuer Crée un fichier PDF même si le fichier PostScript ne respecte pas les exigences PDF/X et inscrit ces problèmes dans le rapport. • Annuler le travail Crée un fichier PDF uniquement si le fichier PostScript est conforme à la norme PDF/X sélectionné et s'il est par ailleurs correct. Niveaux de compatibilité PDF Lors de la création d’un fichier PDF, vous devez décider de la version de PDF à utiliser. Vous pouvez modifier la version de PDF en sélectionnant un paramètre prédéfini différent ou en choisissant une option de compatibilité lors de l’enregistrement au format PDF ou de la modification du paramètre prédéfini PDF. A moins que la compatibilité avec des versions antérieures ne soit nécessaire, il est en général recommandé d’utiliser la version la plus récente (dans le cas présent, la version 1.7). La dernière version comprend les toutes dernières fonctions et fonctionnalités. Cependant, si vous prévoyez de diffuser le fichier créé à un grand nombre d’utilisateurs, envisagez de choisir Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) ou Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6). L'utilisation de l'une de ces versions permettra de vous assurer que tous les utilisateurs peuvent visualiser et imprimer le document. Le tableau ci-après offre un comparatif de certaines fonctionnalités des fichiers PDF créés avec différents paramètres de compatibilité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 108 Création d'un fichier PDF Partage de paramètres PDF personnalisés Vous pouvez enregistrer et réutiliser vos propres définitions de paramètres prédéfinis Adobe PDF. Vous pouvez également partager un paramètre prédéfini en envoyant une copie du fichier obtenu à d’autres utilisateurs. Ces derniers peuvent ensuite l’ajouter aux applications Distiller installées sur leur propre ordinateur. Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3) Acrobat 5.0 (PDF 1.4) Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5) Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6) et Acrobat 8 et Acrobat 9 (PDF 1.7) Ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat Reader 3.0 et versions ultérieures. Ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 3.0, Acrobat Reader 3.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. La plupart de ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. La plupart de ces fichiers PDF peuvent être ouverts avec Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat Reader 4.0 et versions ultérieures. Cependant, les fonctions spécifiques à des versions ultérieures sont parfois perdues ou non visibles. Illustrations utilisant des effets de transparence dynamiques. Veillez à aplatir toute option de transparence préalablement à la conversion au format PDF 1.3. Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Format prenant en charge l’utilisation des effets de transparence dynamiques dans les illustrations. (La fonction Acrobat Distiller aplatit la transparence.) Calques non pris en charge. Calques non pris en charge. Conserve les calques lors de la création des fichiers PDF à partir d’applications prenant en charge la génération de documents PDF avec des calques, telles que Illustrator CS ou InDesign CS et versions ultérieures. Conserve les calques lors de la création des fichiers PDF à partir d’applications prenant en charge la génération de documents PDF avec des calques, telles que Illustrator CS ou InDesign CS et versions ultérieures. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec huit colorants pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec huit colorants pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec 31 colorants au maximum pris en charge. Espace colorimétrique DeviceN avec 31 colorants au maximum pris en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. (Distiller convertit les polices lors de leur incorporation.) L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. L’incorporation des polices multioctets est prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 40 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits prise en charge. Sécurité RC4 128 bits et AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) 128 bits prise en charge.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 109 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Les fichiers de paramètres PDF sont dotés de l’extension .joboptions. Les fichiers de paramètres prédéfinis personnalisés sont enregistrés sous Documents and Settings/[nom utilisateur]/Application Data/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows), Users/[nom utilisateur]/AppData/Roaming/Adobe/Adobe PDF/Settings (Windows Vista) ou User/[nom utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Application Support/Adobe/PDF/Settings (Mac OS). ? Pour ajouter les fichiers de paramètres PDF personnalisés au menu, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser le fichier .joboptions jusqu’à la fenêtre de Distiller. • Dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez la commande Paramètres > Ajouter des options Adobe PDF, accédez au fichier .joboptions copié, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir. Le fichier de paramètres apparaît comme l’option sélectionnée dans le menu Paramètres par défaut. Compression et sous-échantillonnage des images Lors de la conversion des fichiers PostScript au format PDF, vous pouvez compresser les objets vectoriels (tels que le texte ou les dessins au trait), et compresser et sous-échantillonner les images. Les dessins au trait reposent sur une équation mathématique et se créent en général dans un programme d'illustration tel qu'Adobe Illustrator. Les images (en couleurs, en niveaux de gris ou monochromes) sont définies par des pixels et créées dans des applications telles qu'Adobe Photoshop ou par numérisation. Les images monochromes correspondent à la plupart des illustrations en noir et blanc réalisées dans des programmes de dessin ou à partir d'images numérisées avec une profondeur de 1 bit. Lorsque vous sous-échantillonnez une image, c'est-à-dire que vous en réduisez le nombre de pixels, certaines informations sont effacées. Avec Distiller, vous pouvez spécifier une méthode d'interpolation (interpolation, sous- échantillonnage bicubique ou échantillonnage) afin de déterminer la méthode de suppression des pixels. Selon les options choisies, la compression et le sous-échantillonnage peuvent réduire de manière significative la taille d'un fichier PDF, avec une perte minimale de détails et de précision. Lors de la conversion d'un fichier, Distiller applique normalement les paramètres de compression définis à toutes les images du fichier. Vous pouvez cependant adopter différentes méthodes de compression et de sous-échantillonnage pour chaque image. Variation des méthodes de compression et de sous-échantillonnage au sein d'un fichier PDF Avant de créer un fichier PDF, vous pouvez envisager différentes méthodes d'application des options de compression et de sous-échantillonnage aux diverses images qui composeront ce fichier PDF. • A l'aide d'Adobe Photoshop, rééchantillonnez et compressez les fichiers image existants avant de convertir le fichier dans Distiller. Lorsque vous êtes prêt à créer le fichier PDF dans Distiller, veillez à désélectionner les options de compression et de sous-échantillonnage/échantillonnage. • Créez un fichier PostScript distinct pour chaque section du document à convertir différemment et définissez des paramètres de compression différents pour chaque section. A l'aide de Distiller, fusionnez ensuite les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. • Si vous créez des images couleur, en niveaux de gris ou monochromes dans une application de dessin (telle qu'Adobe Photoshop), sélectionnez les paramètres de compression et de sous-échantillonnage voulus lorsque vous enregistrez chaque image au sein de l'application. • Insérez des paramètres Distiller avant les images d'un fichier PostScript. Cette méthode vous permet de traiter chaque image d'un document de manière différente. C'est également la solution la plus compliquée car elle requiert des connaissances en programmation PostScript. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation des paramètres, voir la documentation relative au kit SDK sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 110 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Pour appliquer les paramètres Distiller insérés, sélectionnez l'option Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF dans le panneau Avancés de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF de Distiller. Cette option permet d'ignorer les paramètres activés dans la boîte de dialogue Adobe PDF. Méthodes de compression Distiller applique la compression ZIP aux textes et dessins au trait, la compression ZIP ou JPEG aux images couleur ou en niveaux de gris et la compression ZIP, CCITT - Groupe 3/4 ou RLE aux images monochromes. Méthodes de compression adaptées à différents types d'illustrations A. ZIP B. JPEG C. CCITT D. RLE Vous pouvez choisir l'une des méthodes de compression suivantes : ZIP Convient aux images qui présentent des zones étendues de couleurs unies ou des motifs récurrents, ainsi qu'aux images en noir et blanc aux textures répétées. Acrobat prend uniquement en charge la compression ZIP 8 bits. Cette compression est sans perte, c'est-à-dire que la réduction de la taille du fichier n'est pas obtenue par suppression de données. La qualité des images est donc conservée. Remarque : La mise en œuvre du filtre ZIP par Adobe dérive de la librairie de compression zlib créée par Jean-loup Gailly et Mark Adler, que nous souhaitons remercier ici pour leur aide précieuse. JPEG Adaptée aux images couleur ou en niveaux de gris, telles que les photographies en ton continu. La compression JPEG génère une perte de données : pour réduire la taille du fichier, elle retire certaines données de l'image et risque donc d'amoindrir la qualité de l'image. Cependant, elle tente de réduire la taille du fichier, avec une perte minimale A C D Sales Plan Kahili Mountain Coffee BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 111 Création d'un fichier PDF d'information. Etant donné que la compression JPEG supprime des données, elle permet d'obtenir des fichiers beaucoup plus petits qu'avec la compression ZIP. CCITT Uniquement disponible pour les images bitmap monochromes. La compression CCITT (Consultative Committee on International Telegraphy and Telephony) convient aux images noir et blanc ou aux images numérisées avec une profondeur de 1 bit. Groupe 4 est une méthode générale qui produit une bonne compression pour la plupart des images monochromes. Groupe 3, utilisé par la plupart des télécopieurs, compresse les images monochromes rangée par rangée. RLE Produit les meilleurs résultats avec les images présentant de grandes zones unies en noir ou en blanc. Polices Incorporation et substitution de polices Une police ne peut être incorporée que si son auteur a ajouté un paramètre permettant de le faire. L’incorporation permet d’empêcher la substitution des polices lors de l’affichage ou l’impression du fichier et garantit que les lecteurs visualisent les polices d’origine. L’incorporation accroît la taille des fichiers dans une faible mesure, à moins que le document ne contienne des polices CID, format généralement utilisé pour les polices asiatiques. Vous pouvez incorporer ou substituer des polices dans Acrobat ou lors de l’exportation d’un document InDesign au format PDF. Il est possible d’incorporer la police complète ou uniquement le jeu de caractères utilisés dans le fichier. Le recours à un jeu partiel permet de s’assurer que les polices et la force de corps de ses caractères seront utilisées à l’impression par la création d’un nom de police personnalisé. De cette manière, par exemple, votre version de la police Adobe Garamond® (et non celle du prestataire de services) est disponible à tout moment pour l’affichage et l’impression du document par le prestataire de services. Il est possible d’incorporer les polices Type 1 et TrueType à condition qu’elles soient incluses dans le fichier PostScript ou disponibles dans l’un des dossiers de polices contrôlés par Distiller et qu’elles ne présentent aucune restriction d’incorporation. Remarque : (Acrobat) dans certains cas, vous ne pouvez pas indexer, copier, couper ou coller les polices TrueType ayant été traitées par un pilote PostScript. Pour remédier à ce problème, utilisez Acrobat sur le système où le fichier PostScript a été créé. Assurez-vous ensuite que les polices TrueType utilisées dans le fichier sont disponibles sur le système. Si la configuration choisie par l’auteur d’une police empêche l’incorporation de cette dernière, une police de caractères Multiple Master lui est temporairement substituée lors de l’affichage et de l’impression du fichier PDF sur un système ne disposant pas de la police d’origine. AdobeSerifMM remplace les polices sérif et AdobeSansMM se substitue aux polices sans sérif. Les caractères Multiple Master peuvent être étirés ou condensés pour occuper le même espace que le caractère d’origine et préserver les sauts de ligne et de page du document d’origine. Cependant, il peut arriver que la forme du caractère de substitution ne corresponde pas à celle du caractère original, notamment lorsque les caractères ne sont pas courants (les caractères d’écriture, par exemple). Remarque : (Acrobat) pour les textes asiatiques, Acrobat fait appel aux polices provenant du kit de langues asiatiques installé sur le système de l’utilisateur ou de polices similaires. Des polices correspondant à certaines langues à des codages inconnus ne peuvent être substituées. Le cas échéant, le texte est remplacé par des puces dans le fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 112 Création d'un fichier PDF Si les caractères ne sont pas standard (à gauche), la police de substitution ne correspondra pas (à droite). Accès à une police et incorporation d'une police dans Distiller Lorsque vous convertissez un fichier PostScript au format PDF, Distiller doit avoir accès aux polices du fichier pour insérer les informations appropriées dans le fichier PDF. Distiller commence par rechercher dans le fichier PostScript les polices Type 1, TrueType et OpenType. Si la police n'est pas incorporée dans le fichier PostScript, Distiller effectue une recherche dans des dossiers de polices complémentaires. Sous Windows, Distiller effectue une recherche dans les dossiers suivants : • /Resource/Font dans le dossier d'Acrobat • /Windows/Fonts Sous Mac OS, Distiller effectue une recherche dans les dossiers suivants : • /Resource/Font dans le dossier d'Acrobat • /Users/[nom d'utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/Fonts • /Bibliothèque/Fonts • /Système/Bibliothèque/Fonts L'installation d'Acrobat inclut des versions longueur seulement de la plupart des polices chinoises, japonaises et coréennes les plus répandues. Distiller peut donc accéder à ces polices dans Acrobat. Assurez-vous que les polices sont présentes sur votre ordinateur. (Sous Windows, choisissez l'option Installation complète lors de l'installation d'Acrobat ou choisissez l'option Installation personnalisée puis sélectionnez Prise en charge des langues asiatiques. Sous Mac OS, ces polices sont installées automatiquement.) Pour plus de détails sur l'inclusion de polices dans le fichier PostScript, voir la documentation associée à l'application ou au pilote d'imprimante que vous utilisez pour créer ce fichier. Remarque : Distiller ne prend pas en charge les polices Type 32. Pour inclure d'autres dossiers de police pour la recherche Distiller, dans Acrobat Distiller, choisissez Paramètres > Dossiers de police. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter un dossier de polices. Cochez la case Ignorer les versions TrueType des polices PostScript standard pour exclure les polices TrueType portant le même nom que des polices faisant partie du jeu de polices PostScript 3. Remarque : Pour permettre à Distiller d'accéder à un dossier de polices qui a été déplacé, utilisez cette boîte de dialogue pour supprimer de la liste la référence à l'ancien dossier et ajouter une référence au nouveau. Aperçu d'un fichier PDF sans polices locales Vous pouvez créer un aperçu imprimable du document dans lequel des polices par défaut sont substituées aux polices disponibles sur l'ordinateur local mais non incorporées dans le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez alors décider d'incorporer ou non les polices locales dans les fichiers PDF, pour garantir l'aspect du document. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Affichage, puis désélectionnez Utiliser les polices locales.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 113 Création d'un fichier PDF Remarque : S'il est impossible de substituer une police spécifique, le texte est converti en puces et Acrobat affiche un message d'erreur. Recherche des noms de polices PostScript Lorsque vous devez saisir un nom de police manuellement dans le panneau Polices de la boîte de dialogue Paramètres Adobe PDF, vous pouvez utiliser un fichier PDF pour retrouver l'orthographe exacte de la police. 1 Créez à l'aide de l'application de votre choix un document d'une page contenant la police voulue. 2 Créez un fichier PDF à partir de ce document. 3 Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Fichier > Propriétés > Polices. 4 Notez le nom de la police tel qu'il apparaît dans la boîte de dialogue des polices du document, en prenant garde de respecter son orthographe, la casse et la césure.114 Chapitre 4 : Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard vous permet de créer facilement des documents Adobe PDF comprenant différents types de fichiers. Vous pouvez rassembler plusieurs fichiers de type différent dans un porte-documents PDF, dans lequel chaque fichier est présenté séparément, avec sa propre pagination. Vous pouvez également convertir et fusionner plusieurs fichiers en un seul fichier PDF, dans lequel les documents convertis sont agencés de manière séquentielle, les uns à la suite des autres. Il est tout aussi facile de modifier un fichier PDF complexe de manière à ce qu'il ne contienne que les informations qui vous intéressent. Vous pouvez apporter vos modifications dans un document ordonné et unifié, qui répond avec efficacité à vos besoins. Combinaison de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF A propos des porte-documents PDF Un porte-document PDF contient plusieurs fichiers assemblés au sein d'un fichier PDF intégré. Les fichiers constituant un porte-documents PDF peuvent être de formats différents et provenir d'applications diverses. Imaginons par exemple que le projet sur lequel vous travaillez inclut des documents texte, des messages électroniques, des feuilles de calcul, des dessins de CAO et des présentations PowerPoint. Vous pouvez combiner tous ces documents en un seul porte-documents PDF. Les fichiers d'origine conservent leur identité propre tout en faisant encore partie du même porte-documents PDF. Chaque fichier composant peut être ouvert, lu, modifié et formaté indépendamment des autres fichiers composant du porte-documents PDF. Créez un porte-documents PDF à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Créer un porte-documents PDF. Sous Windows, dans les applications Outlook et Lotus Notes, Acrobat PDFMaker permet de créer des porte-documents PDF lors de la conversion de messages électroniques. Remarque : Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader® ne peuvent pas créer de porte-documents PDF ou modifier la disposition, les couleurs, les en-têtes, etc. En fonction des circonstances, les porte-documents PDF présentent plusieurs avantages par rapport à la fusion de fichiers multiples dans un fichier PDF unique : Ajout et suppression Vous pouvez facilement ajouter ou supprimer des fichiers, sans avoir à rechercher et à sélectionner toutes les pages provenant du fichier concerné. Prévisualisation Prévisualisez rapidement les fichiers composant, sans nécessairement les ouvrir dans leurs applications natives. Modification Modifiez des fichiers individuels au sein d'un porte-documents PDF sans qu'il n'y ait aucune incidence sur les autres fichiers. Par exemple, vous pouvez renuméroter les pages d'un seul document du porte-documents PDF sans renuméroter les autres. Vous pouvez également modifier des fichiers au format autre que PDF dans leurs applications à partir d'un porte-documents PDF, dans lequel les modifications seront enregistrées. Diffusion Partagez un porte-documents PDF avec d'autres personnes et assurez-vous de leur fournir tous les éléments.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 115 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Tri Classez les fichiers composant par catégorie que vous pouvez ajouter, supprimer, masquer ou personnaliser. Pour trier la liste, cliquez sur l'en-tête d'une colonne. Impression Imprimez tous les documents ou les composants PDF sélectionnés dans un porte-documents. Recherche Recherchez tous les fichiers d'un porte-documents ou un seul d'entre eux. Vous pouvez même rechercher des fichiers composant qui ne sont pas au format PDF. Incorporation d'autres formats Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des fichiers non PDF à un porte-documents PDF existant, sans les convertir au format PDF. Autonomie par rapport aux fichiers source Les fichiers source d'un porte-documents PDF (même les fichiers PDF existants ajoutés à celui-ci) ne sont pas modifiés lors de la création d'un document PDF. Les fichiers source d'un portedocuments PDF (même les fichiers PDF existants ajoutés à celui-ci) ne sont pas modifiés lors de la création d'un portedocuments PDF. Vous pouvez déplacer un porte-documents PDF n'importe où sur l'ordinateur local ou le réseau, sans risquer de perdre ou de déconnecter ses composants. Réutilisation Vous pouvez insérer le même fichier dans plusieurs porte-documents PDF. Remarque : Les porte-documents PDF sont complètement différents des collections créées dans l'organiseur d'Acrobat. En effet, les collections de l'organiseur sont de simples outils destinés à faciliter la recherche de fichiers PDF apparentés, qu'ils soient ou non stockés dans l'arborescence de dossiers de votre ordinateur. En revanche, les porte-documents PDF sont de véritables fichiers PDF stockés à un emplacement unique sur votre ordinateur. De plus, les fichiers PDF joints à d'autres documents PDF n'offrent pas les mêmes avantages que les porte-documents PDF. Pour des vidéos sur les porte-documents PDF, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Création et sécurisation des porte-documents PDF : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4201_a9_fr • Création d'un porte-document PDF professionnel : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4204_a9_fr • Articles, didacticiels et conseils sur les porte-documents PDF : http://acrobatusers.com/ • Galerie de porte-documents PDF : www.acrobatusers.com/gallery/pdf_portfolio_gallery/ • Filtrage des fichiers réponse : http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker • Filtrage des messages Outlook : http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook Voir aussi « Affichage de la zone de travail des porte-documents PDF » à la page 22 « Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 390 « Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 334 Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez trier et afficher des fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF ou également les ouvrir, les modifier et les enregistrer dans leurs applications natives. Certains types de fichier nécessitent l'installation de leur application native sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez ouvrir les porte-documents créés à l'aide d'Acrobat 9 dans les applications Acrobat 8 et Rader 8. Cependant, elles n'incluent pas les fonctions des porte-documents PDF suivantes : • Page d'introduction • En-têteUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 116 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Disposition • Modèles de couleurs • Personnalisation des colonnes dans la vue des informations détaillées sur un fichier • Dossiers. Tous les fichiers contenus dans les dossiers sont disponibles, mais les dossiers ne s'affichent pas. • Aperçu des fichiers Affichage des informations détaillées sur un fichier Lorsque vous ouvrez un porte-documents PDF, les fichiers composant sont organisés dans une disposition indiquée par l'auteur du porte-documents. Pour afficher une liste détaillée des fichiers composant, dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Informations sur le fichier . Pour revenir à la vue initiale, cliquez sur le bouton Racine . Tri et filtrage des fichiers composant d'un porte-documents PDF 1 Dans la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, cliquez sur le bouton Informations sur le fichier , le cas échéant. 2 Cliquez sur un nom de colonne. Cliquez à nouveau dessus pour inverser l’ordre de tri (Croissant ou Décroissant). L'ordre de tri reste en vigueur uniquement pendant la session active ou tant que vous ne les modifiez pas. Lors de la prochaine ouverture du porte-documents PDF, l'ordre de tri d'origine est à nouveau appliqué. Pour changer l'ordre des colonnes dans la vue Informations sur le fichier, faites glisser le nom des colonnes vers un emplacement différent. Si le porte-document PDF contient des fichiers de réponse aux formulaires ou des messages Outlook, vous pouvez filtrer son contenu selon différents critères. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux vidéos suivantes : • http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker • http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/archiving-emails-pdf-microsoft-outlook Aperçu des fichiers composant d'un porte-documents PDF Vous pouvez obtenir un aperçu de différents types de fichiers dans un porte-documents PDF. L'aperçu s'avère utile lorsque que vous souhaitez visualiser le contenu d'un fichier, mais pas le modifier. 1 Dans la vue Informations sur le fichier ou Racine du porte-documents PDF, cliquez deux fois sur un fichier. Le cas échéant, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu 2 Pour afficher les fichiers composant un par un, cliquez sur les boutons Fichier suivant et Fichier précédent . Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier composant dans l'aperçu des porte-documents PDF, une autre barre d'outils d'aperçu s'ouvre sous celle des porte-documents. Le type de fichier dont l'aperçu est actif détermine quels outils sont disponibles. Ouverture, modification et enregistrement d'un fichier composant Tant que l'application est installée sur votre ordinateur, vous avez la possibilité d'ouvrir, de modifier et d'enregistrer un fichier composant dans son application native. Les modifications appliquées aux fichiers composants n'ont aucune incidence sur les fichiers originaux qui ne se trouvent pas dans le porte-documents PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans la vue Racine du porte-documents PDF ou Informations sur le fichier, cliquez sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Ouvrir le fichier dans l'application native (pour les fichiers non PDF) ou Ouvrir le fichier (pour les fichiers PDF).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 117 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Dans le mode aperçu, cliquez sur le bouton Ouvrir situé sur la barre d'outils. 2 Si une boîte de dialogue de confirmation s'affiche, sélectionnez Ouvrir ce fichier ou Autoriser l'ouverture de fichiers de ce type, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Appliquez les modifications souhaitées au document, puis enregistrez le fichier. Création et modification d'un porte-documents PDF La création d'un porte-documents PDF et l'ajout de fichiers sont des opérations simples à réaliser. Vous pouvez créer des dossiers au sein d'un porte-documents PD, supprimer des dossiers et des fichiers composant, modifier leur nom et leur description ou en ajouter une. Voir aussi « Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF » à la page 82 « Enregistrement d'un document PDF » à la page 135 « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 97 Création d'un porte-documents PDF ? Choisissez Fichier > Créer un porte-documents PDF. Ajout de fichiers à un porte-documents PDF ? Ouvrez un porte-documents PDF et effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Ajouter des fichiers. • Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Ajouter un dossier existant, puis sélectionnez le dossier. • A partir du bureau ou d'un dossier, faites glisser les fichiers ou dossiers dans la zone de travail du porte-documents PD. Création d'un dossier dans un porte-documents PDF ? Choisissez Fichier > Modifier le porte-documents PDF > Créer un dossier. Suppression de fichiers et de dossiers dans un porte-documents PDF ? Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers ou dossiers dans le porte-documents et appuyez sur Supprimer. En cas de suppression d'un dossier, l'intégralité des fichiers qui s'y trouvent sera supprimée du porte-documents. Modification du nom et de la description de fichiers composant dans un portedocuments PDF • Pour modifier le nom d'un fichier composant, cliquez sur celui-ci pour le sélectionner, puis cliquez dans le nom du fichier pour afficher le point d'insertion. Saisissez ensuite un nouveau nom de fichier. • Pour modifier la description d'un fichier composant, sélectionnez le fichier en question, puis cliquez sur la zone de description. (Dans la vue Racine, la zone de description se trouve sous le nom de fichier ; dans la vue Informations sur le fichier, elle apparaît dans une colonne dans la liste des fichiers.) Saisissez ensuite une description. Voir aussi « Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 115UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 118 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Extraction de fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF ? Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers, puis choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer des fichiers du porte-documents. Partage d'un porte-documents PDF Partagez un porte-documents PDF avec d'autres personnes en l'envoyant par messagerie électronique ou en le téléchargeant sur Acrobat.com, qui est un service web gratuit et sûr. Envoi d'un porte-documents PDF par messagerie ? Dans le menu de partage qui se trouve sur la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Envoyer par messagerie Partage d'un porte-documents PDF sur Acrobat.com 1 Dans le menu de partage de la boîte d'outils du porte-documents PDF, choisissez Partager le porte-documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Partager d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. Vous pouvez partager de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 4 Dans l'écran relatif à la messagerie électronique, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques des destinataires. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie (Lotus Notes ou Microsoft Outlook, par exemple). Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. • Personnalisez l'objet et le texte du message électronique, comme vous le souhaitez. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger et à ouvrir le fichier. Acrobat télécharge le fichier indiqué vers Acrobat.com et envoie un message aux destinataires comprenant un lien vers les fichiers. Autres fonctions activées dans un porte-documents PDF Ces commandes destinées aux fichiers composant sont disponibles dans les porte-documents PDF : Extension du remplissage de formulaire et de l'enregistrement dans Adobe Reader Cette option permet aux utilisateurs d'enregistrer des données de formulaire et de signer numériquement des composants PDF. Pour de plus amples renseignements, voir « Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader » à la page 194. Réduction de la taille du fichier Permet de réduire la taille des composants PDF. Pour plus d'informations, voir la section « Réduction de la taille des fichiers par enregistrement » à la page 137. Protection par mot de passe Cette option permet de sécuriser un porte-documents ou un composant PDF à l'intérieur d'un porte-documents. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 238. Remarque : D'autres fonctions de sécurité sont également disponibles pour les porte-documents et les fichiers composant dans les porte-documents PD. Pour plus de détails, voir la rubrique « Protection » à la page 231.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 119 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF OCR Cette option vous permet de rechercher, corriger et copier du texte numérisé dans des fichiers composant PDF scannés. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la section « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 70. Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page Ajoutez, mettez à jour et supprimez des en-têtes et pieds de page, des numéros Bates, des arrière-plans et des filigranes dans des fichiers composant PDF. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page » à la page 121. Impression Impression de documents composant. Pour plus d'informations, voir la section « Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 390. Autres options de combinaison de fichiers Création de fichiers PDF fusionnés Dans un fichier PDF fusionné, les documents convertis sont réunis les uns à la suite des autres dans un seul document PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Combiner > Fusionner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. Si un document PDF est ouvert, il figure dans la liste des fichiers inclus. 2 Dans le coin supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue Combiner des fichiers, vérifiez que l'option Fichier PDF unique est activée. 3 A partir du menu Ajouter des fichiers, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour ajouter des fichiers individuels, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez-les. • Pour ajouter tous les fichiers d'un dossier, choisissez Ajouter des dossiers, puis sélectionnez le dossier. Remarque : Si le dossier contient des fichiers non pris en charge par Acrobat pour la conversion au format PDF, ces fichiers ne sont pas ajoutés. • Pour ajouter des fichiers combinés dans des fichiers PDF au cours d'autres sessions, choisissez Réutiliser les fichiers. Sélectionnez ensuite un fichier PDF créé précédemment dans la liste de gauche et, dans la liste de droite, les documents composant. (Si vous n'avez encore jamais utilisé la boîte de dialogue Combiner des fichiers, cette option n'est pas disponible.) • Pour ajouter les fichiers PDF actuellement ouverts, choisissez Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Sous Windows, vous pouvez aussi faire glisser les fichiers ou dossiers à partir du bureau ou d'un dossier dans la boîte de dialogue Combiner les fichiers. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur les éléments sélectionnés et à choisir Combiner les fichiers pris en charge dans Acrobat. Si certains fichiers sont protégés par mot de passe, un ou plusieurs messages s'affichent, vous demandant de saisir le mot de passe approprié. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs fois un même fichier. Par exemple, un fichier peut jouer le rôle de page de transition entre les autres fichiers ou un fichier vide peut servir à ajouter des pages vierges. 4 Le cas échéant, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes dans la liste des fichiers : • Pour changer l'ordre des fichiers dans la liste, sélectionnez un fichier et faites-le glisser, ou cliquez sur Monter ou Descendre. • Pour trier la liste, cliquez sur le nom de la colonne à utiliser comme critère de tri. Cliquez à nouveau pour inverser l'ordre de tri.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 120 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Pour convertir une partie seulement d'un fichier source contenant plusieurs pages, cliquez deux fois sur le fichier ou sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner les pages (voir la remarque). Dans la zone Aperçu, vérifiez et sélectionnez les pages si nécessaire, suivez les instructions présentées dans la boîte de dialogue, lesquelles varient en fonction du type de fichier choisi, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Le libellé du bouton Sélectionner varie en fonction du type de fichier. Dans le cas de fichiers PDF et Word, il s'intitule Sélectionner les pages ; dans le cas de fichiers PowerPoint, il s'appelle Sélectionner les diapositives ; dans le cas de fichiers Excel, Sélectionner les feuilles. 5 Cliquez sur Options pour définir les paramètres de conversion. 6 Spécifiez la taille de fichier, puis cliquez sur Combiner les fichiers. Une boîte de dialogue d'état indique la progression de la conversion de fichiers. Certaines applications source s'ouvrent et se ferment automatiquement. Voir aussi « Conversion de messages électroniques en fichiers PDF » à la page 82 « Paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF » à la page 97 Paramètres de taille de fichier Taille de fichier minimale Réduit les images volumineuses selon la résolution d'écran et procède à leur compression au format JPEG qualité inférieure. Idéal pour l'affichage à l'écran, la messagerie électronique et Internet. Remarque : Si certains fichiers source sont déjà au format PDF, l'option Taille de fichier minimale leur applique la fonction Réduire la taille du fichier. La fonction Réduire la taille du fichier ne s'applique pas si l'option Taille de fichier par défaut ou Taille de fichier maximale est sélectionnée. Taille de fichier par défaut Crée des fichiers PDF adaptés à la visualisation et l'impression de documents professionnels. Taille de fichier maximale Applique le paramètre prédéfini de conversion Qualité supérieure. Insertion d'un fichier PDF dans un autre fichier PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF qui doit servir de base au fichier combiné. 2 Choisissez Document > Insérer des pages > A partir d'un fichier (Windows) ou Document > Insérer des pages (Mac OS). 3 Sélectionnez le fichier PDF. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Insérer des pages, spécifiez l'emplacement d'insertion dans le document (avant ou après la première ou la dernière page, ou une page désignée). Cliquez sur OK. 5 Pour conserver intact le document PDF dans un fichier distinct, choisissez Enregistrer sous et donnez un nouveau nom au fichier PDF fusionné. Vous pouvez également ajouter un fichier existant à un fichier PDF en faisant glisser l'icône du fichier directement dans le panneau Pages du fichier PDF ouvert.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 121 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Insertion d'une sélection de Presse-papiers dans un fichier PDF (Windows) Vous pouvez insérer une ou plusieurs pages de contenu sélectionnées et copiées à partir d'une application dans un fichier PDF existant. 1 Ouvrez le document contenant les éléments à ajouter. Sélectionnez le contenu, puis copiez la sélection (dans la plupart des applications, choisissez Edition > Copier). 2 Ouvrez le fichier PDF devant servir de base au fichier combiné, puis choisissez Document > Insérer des pages > A partir du Presse-papiers. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Insérer des pages, spécifiez l'emplacement d'insertion dans le document (avant ou après la première ou la dernière page, ou une page désignée). Cliquez sur OK. 4 Pour conserver intact le document PDF dans un fichier distinct, choisissez Enregistrer sous et donnez un nouveau nom au fichier PDF fusionné. Placement d'un document PDF en tant que fichier lié dans un autre document Vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer des documents PDF dans d'autres types de fichiers prenant en charge la liaison et l'incorporation d'objets (OLE, Object Linking and Embedding) tels que les fichiers InDesign® ou Word. Ces fichiers sont appelés documents conteneur OLE. Si, par la suite, vous apportez des modifications au document PDF d'origine, les fonctions OLE de l'application conteneur sont en mesure de mettre à jour le fichier incorporé dans le document conteneur de manière à refléter les changements effectués dans le fichier PDF initial. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez la commande d'insertion d'un objet ou d'un hyperlien de l'application conteneur OLE. • (Windows) Dans Acrobat, choisissez Edition > Copier le fichier dans le Presse-papiers, puis la commande Collage spécial dans l'application conteneur. Ajout d'éléments d'unification à une page Ajout et modification d'un en-tête et d'un pied de page Un en-tête et un pied de page présentent des informations homogènes sur les marges des pages de tout le document PDF. Ces informations peuvent ainsi correspondre à une date, à une numérotation de pages automatique, au titre général du document ou encore au nom de l'auteur. Vous pouvez ajouter des en-têtes et des pieds de page à un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF, y compris aux composants d'un porte-documents PDF. Vous pouvez modifier les en-têtes et les pieds de page au sein d'un document PDF. Par exemple, vous pouvez ajouter un en-tête qui affiche le numéro de page dans le coin droit des pages impaires et un autre qui indique le numéro de page du côté gauche des pages paires. Vous pouvez définir et enregistrer les en-têtes et les pieds de page que vous créez à des fins de réutilisation ou simplement les appliquer sans les enregistrer. Après avoir appliqué un en-tête et un pied de page, vous pouvez les modifier, les remplacer ou les supprimer dans le document PDF. Vous pouvez également afficher un aperçu des entêtes et des pieds de page avant leur application et ajuster leurs marges de sorte qu'elles ne chevauchent pas le contenu restant des pages. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page avec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 122 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Le cas échéant, spécifiez les valeurs Polices et Marge. Les propriétés de texte s'appliquent à toutes les entrées d'en-tête et de pied de page faisant partie de la définition de ce paramètre. Il est impossible d'appliquer différents paramètres à des zones de texte d'en-tête et de pied de page individuelles au cours de la même session de la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un en-tête et un pied de page Pour éviter le chevauchement, cliquez sur le lien Options d'aspect et cocher la case Réduire le document pour éviter d'écraser le texte et les images. Pour éviter le redimensionnement ou le repositionnement lors de l'impression du document PDF dans un grand format, cochez la case Conserver la même position et la même taille d'en-tête et de pied de page lors de l'impression des différents formats de page. 3 Saisissez le texte dans l'une des zones de texte d'en-tête et de pied de page. Pour insérer des numéros de page ou la date du jour, cliquez sur une zone, puis sur les boutons appropriés. Pour sélectionner le formatage des saisies automatiques, cliquez sur Format de folio et de date. Remarque : Vous pouvez combiner du texte, des dates et des numéros de page. Rien ne vous empêche d'ajouter plusieurs lignes de texte à une entrée. 4 Pour spécifier les pages sur lesquelles l'en-tête et le pied de page doivent apparaître, cliquez sur le bouton Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 5 Examinez les résultats dans la zone d'aperçu à l'aide de l'option Aperçu de page afin de visualiser différentes pages du document PDF. 6 (Facultatif) Pour enregistrer les paramètres d'en-tête et de pied de page pour une utilisation ultérieure, cliquez sur Enregistrer les paramètres. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Suivez les étapes 2 à 6 de la procédure d'ajout d'en-tête et de pied de page avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir les en-têtes et pied de page, cliquez sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page aux fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez la procédure d'ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page avec un document ouvert. Mise à jour des en-têtes et pieds de page La mise à jour s'applique au dernier jeu d'en-têtes et de pieds de page ajouté. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Mettre à jour.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 123 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 3 Modifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Ajout d'un autre en-tête ou pied de page 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou sélectionnez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter, puis cliquez sur Ajouter dans le message qui s'affiche. L'aperçu affiche les en-têtes et pieds de page existants. 3 Saisissez un texte dans les zones prévues à cet effet afin d'ajouter des en-têtes et des pieds de page supplémentaires. A mesure que vous tapez, l'aperçu met à jour l'aspect de l'ensemble de ces éléments sur la page. 4 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez de nouvelles options de formatage en vérifiant la mise à jour de la page dans l'aperçu. Remplacement de tous les en-têtes et pieds de page 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > En-tête & pied de page > Ajouter, puis cliquez sur Remplacer dans le message qui s'affiche. 3 Configurez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux en-têtes et pieds de page ajoutés dans Acrobat version 7.0 ou ultérieure. Suppression de tous les en-têtes et pieds de page ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou sélectionnez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. Choisissez ensuite Document > En-tête et pied de page > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer les en-têtes et pieds de page dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les documents ouverts, puis choisissez Document > En-tête et pied de page > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux en-têtes et pieds de page ajoutés dans Acrobat version 7.0 ou ultérieure. Ajout et modification d'un arrière-plan Un arrière-plan apparaît sous le texte ou les images d'une page. Il peut s'agir d'une couleur unie toute simple comme d'une image. Vous pouvez seulement appliquer un arrière-plan de manière sélective à des pages individuelles ou à des étendues de pages d'un ou de plusieurs documents PDF. Un document PDF prend en charge un seul arrière-plan par page, mais les pages peuvent disposer d'arrière-plans différents.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 124 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Avant et après l’ajout d’un arrière-plan Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer. Remarque : Si un message s'affiche pour vous informer de la présence d'un arrière-plan existant dans le document ouvert, cliquez sur Remplacer l'arrière-plan. Si vous appliquez le nouvel arrière-plan à des pages spécifiques, l'ancien arrière-plan est conservé tel quel sur les pages ne faisant pas partie de l'étendue définie pour le nouvel arrière-plan. 2 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer l'arrière-plan à une sélection de pages, cliquez sur Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 3 Définissez l'arrière-plan : • Pour réutiliser un autre arrière-plan et les options associées enregistrées lors d'une session antérieure, sélectionnez l'élément voulu dans le menu Paramètres enregistrés. • Pour appliquer un arrière-plan de couleur unie, sélectionnez Couleur. Sélectionnez ensuite une nuance ou une couleur personnalisée dans le sélecteur de couleur . • Pour utiliser une image, choisissez Fichier, puis sélectionnez le fichier image voulu. Pour sélectionner une image spécifique dans un fichier de plusieurs pages, indiquez-la dans la zone Numéro de page. Remarque : Seuls les fichiers PDF, JPEG et BMP peuvent servir d'images d'arrière-plan. 4 Ajustez l'aspect et la position de l'arrière-plan selon vos besoins. 5 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le même arrière-plan à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 125 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un arrière-plan. 4 Suivez les étapes 2 à 4 de la procédure d'ajout, de remplacement ou de modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir l'arrière-plan, cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout, remplacement ou modification d'un arrière-plan pour les fichiers PDF d'un portedocuments 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez les étapes de la procédure d'ajout, de remplacement ou de modification d'un arrière-plan avec un document ouvert. Mise à jour d'une image d'arrière-plan récemment retouchée Si le fichier image d'origine servant d'arrière-plan est modifié, vous pouvez mettre à jour le fichier PDF afin qu'il reflète la nouvelle version de l'image plutôt que de supprimer l'ancienne version et d'ajouter la version plus récente. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Mettre à jour. 3 Cliquez sur OK ou modifiez les autres options d'arrière-plan au préalable. Remarque : Cette procédure s'applique uniquement aux arrières-plan ajoutés dans Acrobat 7.0 ou version ultérieure. Suppression d'un arrière-plan sur une sélection de pages 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Ajouter/Remplacer. 3 Cliquez sur Options d'étendue, puis indiquez l'étendue de page et choisissez une option de sélection, selon les besoins. Suppression d'un arrière-plan sur toutes les pages ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. Choisissez ensuite Document > Arrière-plan > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer l'arrière-plan de plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les fichiers PDF ouverts, puis choisissez Document > Arrière-plan > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 126 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Ajout et modification d'un filigrane Un filigrane est, à l'instar d'un tampon, un texte ou une image figurant sur ou sous le contenu existant d'un document. Vous pouvez, par exemple, appliquer un filigrane intitulé « Confidentiel » à des pages contenant des informations sensibles. Vous pouvez insérer plusieurs filigranes dans un ou plusieurs documents PDF, à condition de procéder filigrane par filigrane. Vous pouvez spécifier la page ou l'étendue de pages sur laquelle le filigrane doit apparaître. Remarque : Contrairement à un tampon, un filigrane s'intègre aux pages PDF en tant qu'élément fixe. Un tampon est un type de commentaire PDF que les lecteurs du document PDF peuvent ouvrir afin d'afficher une annotation de texte ou qu'ils peuvent déplacer, modifier ou supprimer. Avant et après l'ajout d'un filigrane Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigraneavec un document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Ajouter. 2 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le filigrane à une sélection de pages, cliquez sur Options d'étendue. Spécifiez ensuite l'étendue de pages et choisissez une option de sélection, le cas échéant. 3 Spécifiez le filigrane : • Pour réutiliser un filigrane et les options associées enregistrés lors d'une session antérieure, sélectionnez l'élément voulu dans le menu Paramètres enregistrés. • Pour créer un filigrane de texte, sélectionnez Texte, puis effectuez la saisie dans la zone correspondante. Réglez les options de mise en forme du texte selon vos besoins.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 127 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF • Pour utiliser une image comme filigrane, sélectionnez Fichier. Cliquez ensuite sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier image. Si le fichier comprend plusieurs pages dotées d'une image, spécifiez le numéro de la page qui vous intéresse. Remarque : Seules les images PDF, JPEG et BMP peuvent servir de filigranes. 4 Pour modifier la taille d'un filigrane d'image, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour redimensionner le filigrane par rapport à la taille d'origine du fichier image, saisissez un pourcentage pour l'option Echelle absolue (dans la zone Source de la boîte de dialogue). • Pour redimensionner le filigrane par rapport aux dimensions de la page PDF, saisissez une valeur (exprimée en pourcentage) pour l'option Echelle proportionnelle à la page cible (dans la zone Aspect de la boîte de dialogue). 5 Ajustez l'aspect et la position de le filigrane selon vos besoins. 6 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Options d'aspect et spécifiez les options suivantes : • Pour indiquer à quel moment le filigrane doit apparaître, sélectionnez ou désélectionnez Afficher à l'impression et Afficher à l'écran. • Pour contrôler les variations dans les fichiers PDF de pages au format non homogène, activez ou désactivez l'option Conserver la même position et la même taille de texte du filigrane lors de l’impression sur différents formats de page. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à d'autres fichiers PDF, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Ensuite, dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers cible et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigrane sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Ajouter. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des fichiers ou des dossiers en les faisant glisser dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter un filigrane. 4 Suivez les étapes 2 à 6 de la procédure d'ajout ou de remplacement d'un filigrane avec un document ouvert. Lorsque vous avez terminé de définir le filigrane, cliquez sur OK. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination des fichiers, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout ou remplacement d'un filigrane dans les fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF dans un porte-documents. 2 Suivez les étapes de la procédure d'ajout ou de remplacement d'un filigrane avec un document ouvert. Mise à jour d'un filigrane 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple. 2 Choisissez Document > Filigrane > Mettre à jour. 3 Apportez les modifications voulues au filigrane, puis cliquez sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 128 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Important : Si votre document PDF compte plusieurs filigranes, cette procédure met seulement à jour le premier d'entre eux et ignore les suivants. Si vous changez d'avis à propos de la mise à jour des filigranes une fois l'opération effectuée, choisissez immédiatement Edition > Annuler le filigrane. Suppression d'un filigrane ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers composant PDF d'un porte-documents. Choisissez ensuite Document > Filigrane > Supprimer. • Pour supprimer des filigranes de plusieurs fichiers PDF, fermez tous les fichiers PDF ouverts, puis choisissez Document > Filigrane > Supprimer. Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de dénomination de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Recadrage des pages La boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages permet d'ajuster la zone de page visible. Vous pouvez ainsi conserver une plus grande homogénéité au sein d'un document PDF composé de pages de format différent. Le recadrage n'entraîne pas la réduction de la taille du fichier, car les informations sont cachées mais pas écartées. Recadrage des zones vides entourant le contenu de la page 1 Choisissez Document > Recadrer des pages. 2 Sous Commandes de marge, cochez la case Supprimer les marges. Recadrage d'une ou de plusieurs pages 1 Choisissez Document > Recadrer des pages. 2 Ajustez les valeurs des des options de la zone Commandes de marge. 3 Le cas échéant, configurez les paramètres d'étendue. Recadrage d'une page à l'aide de l'outil Recadrer 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Recadrer. 2 Tracez un rectangle sur la page à recadrer. Le cas échéant, faites glisser les poignées des angles du rectangle de recadrage jusqu'à obtention du format de page souhaité. 3 Cliquez deux fois dans le rectangle de recadrage. La boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages s'affiche, indiquant les mesures de marge du rectangle de recadrage et la page à recadrer. Vous pouvez écraser ces paramètres ou appliquer d'autres options en effectuant de nouvelles sélections dans la boîte de dialogue avant de cliquer sur OK. Paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages Les options de la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages définissent une sélection d'options de recadrage des pages. Les options de contrôle de marge sont les suivantes : Conserver les proportions Verrouille les proportions de recadrage de sorte que toutes les marges soient de distance égale.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 129 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Supprimer les marges Recadre la page selon les limites de l'illustration. Cette option s'avère pratique lorsque vous ajustez les bords de diapositives de présentation enregistrées au format PDF. Remettre à zéro Remet à zéro les marges de recadrage. Revenir à la sélection Rétablit la marge de recadrage sélectionnée à l'aide de l'outil Recadrer. Annulation du recadrage Le recadrage d'un document PDF n'entraîne pas la réduction de la taille du fichier, car les informations sont cachées mais pas écartées. En réinitialisant le format d'une page, vous pouvez restaurer l'état initial de la page et de son contenu. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Recadrer des pages en choisissant l'une des options suivantes : • Document > Recadrer des pages. • Recadrer des pages dans le menu Options du panneau Pages. 2 Réinitialisez les marges selon les dimensions initiales. Réorganisation des pages d'un document PDF Rotation d'une page Vous avez la possibilité de faire pivoter la totalité ou une partie des pages d'un document. La rotation est basée sur des incréments de 90°. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Rotation de pages en procédant de l'une des manières suivantes : • Choisissez Document > Pivoter des pages. • Dans le panneau Pages, déroulez le menu Options et choisissez Rotation de pages. 2 Dans le menu Sens, sélectionnez le degré et le sens de la rotation : 90 degrés sens antihoraire, 90 degrés sens horaire ou 180 degrés. 3 Dans la zone Pages, indiquez les pages auxquelles la rotation s'applique : toutes les pages, une sélection de pages ou une série de pages. 4 Dans le menu Rotation, spécifiez les pages paires, impaires ou les deux, puis sélectionnez l'orientation des pages à faire pivoter. Pour changer temporairement de mode d'affichage, choisissez Affichage > Rotation > Horaire ou Antihoraire. L'orientation initiale de la page est restaurée lors de la prochaine ouverture du document PDF. Extraction de pages d'un document PDF L'extraction consiste à réutiliser dans un document PDF des pages sélectionnées dans un autre fichier PDF. Les pages extraites comprennent non seulement le contenu mais aussi tous les champs de formulaire, commentaires et liens associés au contenu initial des pages. Vous pouvez conserver les pages extraites dans le document d'origine ou les en supprimer lors de l'extraction, opération comparable aux opérations classiques de couper-coller ou de copier-coller, à ceci près que la commande agit au niveau de la page. Remarque : Quant aux signets et divisions d'article associés aux pages extraites, ils ne sont pas inclus dans l'opération. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF dans Acrobat et choisissez Document > Extraire des pages.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 130 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 2 Spécifiez l'intervalle de pages à extraire. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Extraire des pages, effectuez une ou plusieurs des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Pour supprimer les pages extraites du document initial, cochez la case Supprimer les pages après extraction. • Pour créer un document PDF pour chaque page extraite, cochez la case Extraire les pages sous forme de fichiers distincts. • Pour conserver les pages d'origine dans le document et créer un seul fichier PDF contenant toutes les pages extraites, désactivez les deux cases à cocher. Les pages extraites sont placées dans un nouveau document sous l'intitulé Pages de [nom du document d'origine]-[n]. Remarque : L'auteur du document PDF peut définir les options de protection afin d'empêcher toute extraction de pages. Pour afficher les paramètres de protection appliqués à un document, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés et activez l'onglet Protection. Voir aussi « Extraction de fichiers composant dans un porte-documents PDF » à la page 118 Fractionnement de fichiers PDF en plusieurs documents Il est possible de fractionner un ou plusieurs documents en un jeu de fichiers plus petits. Vous pouvez définir le fractionnement d'un document selon le maximum de nombre de pages ou de taille de fichier, ou en fonction des signets de premier niveau. Fractionnement d'un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF avec un document ouvert 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF et choisissez Document > Fractionner le document. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Fractionner le document, spécifiez les critères de division : Nombre de pages Spécifiez le nombre maximum de pages de chaque fraction du document. Taille du fichier Spécifiez la taille de fichier maximale de chaque fraction du document. Signets de niveau supérieur Si le document comprend des signets, permet de créer un document pour chaque signet de niveau supérieur. 3 Pour spécifier le dossier de destination des fichiers fractionnés et les préférences de dénomination des fichiers, cliquez sur Options de sortie. Définissez les options selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer le même fractionnement à plusieurs documents, cliquez sur Application multiple. Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts. Sélectionnez les fichiers ou le dossier, puis cliquez sur OK. Fractionnement d'un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF sans document ouvert 1 Choisissez Document > Fractionner le document. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, puis choisissez Ajouter des fichiers, Ajouter des dossiers. Sélectionnez les fichiers ou le dossier, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Suivez les étapes 2 et 3 de la procédure de fractionnement de documents avec un document ouvert.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 131 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Déplacement ou copie d'une page Les vignettes de page permettent de copier ou de déplacer des pages au sein d'un document et de copier des pages d'un document à un autre. Lorsque vous faites glisser une vignette de page dans un panneau Pages, une barre apparaît à proximité des autres vignettes, indiquant l'emplacement où la page s'affichera dans le document PDF. Cette barre s'affiche en bas ou en haut lorsque les vignettes sont disposées dans une colonne ou à gauche ou à droite en affichage multicolonne. Remarque : Les signets balisés ont une incidence sur l'ordre suivi par les dispositifs de lecture, notamment ceux dont se servent les utilisateurs malvoyants. Les signets balisés ne modifient pas l'ordre des pages dans un document PDF. Voir aussi « Insertion d'un fichier PDF dans un autre fichier PDF » à la page 120 « A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution » à la page 280 Déplacement ou copie d'une page de document PDF à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages afin d'afficher le panneau Pages, puis sélectionnez une ou plusieurs vignettes de page. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer une page, faites glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité la boîte de numéro de page de la vignette correspondante ou la vignette elle-même. Une barre indique la nouvelle position de la vignette. Les pages sont renumérotées en conséquence. • Pour copier une page, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en faisant glisser la vignette de page vers un autre emplacement. Copie d'une page d'un document PDF vers un autre à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Ouvrez les deux documents PDF et affichez-les côte à côte. 2 Ouvrez le panneau Pages de chaque fichier PDF. 3 Faites glisser la vignette de la page dans le panneau Pages du fichier PDF cible. La page est copiée dans le document et les pages sont renumérotées en conséquence. Suppression ou remplacement d'une page Vous pouvez remplacer une page PDF complète par une autre page. Seuls le texte et les images contenus sur la page initiale sont remplacés. Les éléments interactifs associés à la page initiale, tels que les liens et les signets, ne sont pas affectés par l'opération. De la même façon, les signets et les liens associés à la page de remplacement ne sont pas transposés après la substitution de page. En revanche, les commentaires sont conservés et sont combinés aux commentaires existants du document. Après une suppression ou un remplacement de pages, il est conseillé d'utiliser la commande Réduire la taille du fichier afin de renommer et d'enregistrer le document restructuré selon une taille de fichier minimale.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 132 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF Exemple de page avant et après son remplacement. Les signets et les liens de la page restent au même endroit. Suppression d'une page à l'aide de la commande de suppression Remarque : L'opération de suppression est irréversible. 1 Choisissez Document > Supprimer des pages. 2 Spécifiez l'intervalle de pages à supprimer, puis cliquez sur OK. Vous ne pouvez pas supprimer toutes les pages ; une page au moins doit rester dans le document. Dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences, si vous avez activé l'option Utiliser les numéros de page LPN du panneau Affichage, vous pouvez saisir un numéro de page entre parenthèses afin de supprimer l'équivalent logique du numéro de page. Par exemple, si la première page d'un document est numérotée i, saisissez (1) dans la boîte de dialogue Supprimer des pages et la page i est supprimée. Suppression d'une page à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Dans le panneau Pages, sélectionnez une page ou un groupe de pages. 2 Choisissez Supprimer des pages dans le menu Options du panneau Pages, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression des éléments associés à un signet balisé 1 Dans le panneau Signets, cliquez sur le signet balisé associé à l’élément que vous souhaitez supprimer. Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner plusieurs signets. 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Supprimer des pages. Le signet balisé et la page associée sont supprimés du document. Remplacement du contenu d'une page 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant les pages à remplacer. 2 Choisissez Document > Remplacer les pages. 3 Sélectionnez le document contenant les plages de remplacement, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 4 Dans la zone Pages d'origine, saisissez les numéros des pages à remplacer dans le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 133 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 5 Dans la zone Pages de remplacement, saisissez le numéro de la première page de la série à remplacer. La dernière page est déterminée en fonction du nombre de pages qui doivent être remplacées dans le document d'origine. Remplacement d'une page à l'aide de sa vignette 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant les pages à remplacer, puis celui comprenant les pages de substitution. 2 Dans le panneau Pages du document PDF contenant les pages de remplacement, sélectionnez une page ou un groupe de pages : • Sélectionnez les boîtes de numéro de page des vignettes à utiliser comme pages de remplacement. • Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin de sélectionner une série de vignettes. Cliquez sur les autres vignettes en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour les ajouter à la sélection. • Tracez un rectangle autour d'un groupe de vignettes de pages. 3 Maintenez les touches Ctrl et Alt enfoncées et faites glisser les vignettes de page sélectionnées vers le panneau Pages du document cible. Relâchez le bouton de la souris lorsque le pointeur se trouve exactement sur la boîte de numéro de page de la première vignette à remplacer de façon à mettre les pages en surbrillance. Les pages sélectionnées dans le premier document remplacent un nombre équivalent de pages dans le document cible, en commençant par le numéro de page sur lequel était positionné votre curseur. Renumérotation des pages Les numéros de page du document ne correspondent pas toujours aux numéros affichés sous les vignettes de page et sur la barre d’outils Navigation de pages. Les pages sont numérotées à l'aide de nombres entiers, commençant par 1 pour la première page du document. Etant donné que certains documents PDF comportent des informations supplémentaires en début de document (une page de droits d'auteur ou une table des matières, par exemple), il peut arriver que les pages du corps du texte proprement dit ne suivent pas la même numérotation que celle affichée sur la barre d'outils Navigation de pages. Numérotation de pages imprimées (en haut) comparée à celle de pages logiques (en bas) La numérotation de pages d'un document comporte plusieurs variantes. Vous pouvez adopter un style de numérotation différent par groupe de pages (1, 2, 3 ou i, ii, iii ou encore a, b, c, par exemple) et personnaliser le système de numérotation en ajoutant un préfixe. Par exemple, la numérotation du chapitre 1 peut suivre le format 1- 1, 1-2, 1-3, etc. et celle du chapitre 2 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, etc. L'utilisation de la commande Numéroter des pages a uniquement une incidence sur les vignettes de page affichées dans le panneau Pages. Il est possible d'insérer manuellement des numéros de page dans un document PDF à l'aide de la fonction d'en-têtes et de pieds de page. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages afin d'ouvrir le panneau Pages et choisissez Numéroter des pages dans le menu Options. 2 Spécifiez une sélection de pages. (L'option Sélection renvoie aux pages sélectionnées dans le panneau Pages.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 134 Combinaison de contenus dans des documents PDF 3 Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes, puis cliquez sur OK : Commencer une nouvelle section Commence une nouvelle séquence de numérotation. Choisissez un style dans le menu déroulant et entrez le numéro de la première page de la section. Spécifiez un préfixe, le cas échéant. Etendre la numérotation de la section précédente aux pages sélectionnées Continue la séquence de numérotation à partir des pages précédentes sans interruption. Voir aussi « Ajout et modification d'un en-tête et d'un pied de page » à la page 121135 Chapitre 5 : Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez enregistrer les modifications dans un fichier Adobe® PDF ou dans un porte-documents PDF ou encore dans une copie du fichier. Vous avez par ailleurs la possibilité d'enregistrer des fichiers PDF individuels sous d'autres formats (texte, XML, HTML, Microsoft Word et d'autres encore). L'enregistrement d'un document PDF au format texte vous permet de lire son contenu au moyen d'un lecteur d'écran, d'une loupe ou de toute autre technologie d'assistance. Si vous n'avez pas accès aux fichiers source ayant permis de créer un document Adobe PDF, vous pouvez tout de même copier des images et du texte provenant de ce document PDF à des fins de réutilisation ultérieure. Vous pouvez aussi exporter le document PDF vers un format réutilisable ou en exporter les images dans un document PDF enregistré sous un autre format. Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader® peuvent enregistrer une copie d'un fichier ou d'un porte-documents PDF si l'auteur du document en question a activé les droits d'utilisation. Si les droits d'utilisation sont activés, ces utilisateurs ont également la possibilité d'enregistrer les commentaires, les données des champs de formulaire ou les signatures numériques qu'ils auront insérés dans le document. Si un document contient des droits d'utilisation restreints ou supplémentaires, la barre de message du document figurant sous la zone des barres d'outils décrit les restrictions ou les privilèges en vigueur. Enregistrement d'un fichier PDF Enregistrement d'un document PDF Cette méthode vous permet d'enregistrer des documents PDF, notamment des porte-documents et des fichiers PDF dans lesquels vous avez inséré des commentaires, des données de champs de formulaire et des signatures numériques. Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent enregistrer les porte-documents PDF, les commentaires et les formulaires remplis, et utiliser les signatures numériques uniquement si l'auteur du document PDF leur a octroyé des droits d'utilisation supplémentaires. Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent enregistrer des fichiers au format PDF ou .txt. Remarque : L'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement est possible mais invalide la signature. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour enregistrer les modifications apportées au document actif, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer. • Pour enregistrer une copie d'un document PDF, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. • Dans Reader, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer une copie ou Enregistrer au format texte. • Pour enregistrer une copie d'un porte-documents PDF, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer le porte-documents sous. Si vous visualisez un document PDF au sein d'un navigateur Web, le menu Fichier d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard n'est pas disponible. Utilisez le bouton Enregistrer de la barre d'outils Acrobat pour enregistrer le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 136 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Voir aussi « Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF » à la page 227 « Participation à une révision de document PDF » à la page 155 Récupération de la dernière version enregistrée ? Choisissez Fichier > Rétablir, puis cliquez sur le bouton du même nom. A propos de la fonction d'enregistrement automatique La fonction d'enregistrement automatique permet de parer à la perte de données en cas de coupure d'alimentation. Elle enregistre de manière incrémentielle et régulière les modifications apportées au fichier et les stocke à un emplacement particulier. Le fichier d'origine n'est pas modifié. Acrobat crée en fait un fichier d'enregistrement automatique des changements, qui inclut toutes les modifications apportées au fichier ouvert depuis le dernier enregistrement automatique. La quantité d'informations nouvelles ajoutées au fichier d'enregistrement automatique dépend de la fréquence à laquelle Acrobat enregistre ce fichier. Si vous définissez un intervalle de 15 minutes, les modifications perdues sont celles effectuées dans les 14 dernières minutes avant la survenue du problème. Des enregistrements automatiques fréquents permettent de parer à la perte de données et s'avèrent pratiques lorsque vous effectuez de nombreuses modifications, par exemple lors de l'ajout de commentaires. Vous pouvez appliquer les modifications enregistrées automatiquement au fichier d'origine lorsque vous relancez Acrobat. Lorsque vous fermez ou enregistrez un fichier, ou rétablissez la dernière version enregistrée, le fichier d'enregistrement automatique est supprimé. Remarque : Si vous utilisez un dispositif d’assistance, tel qu’un lecteur d’écran, il est préférable de désactiver la fonction d’enregistrement automatique afin de ne pas perdre l'emplacement lors du rechargement du fichier. La fonction d'enregistrement automatique ne fonctionne pas dans les cas suivants : • La protection du document est modifiée. Vous devez enregistrer le document afin de réactiver la fonction d'enregistrement automatique. • Le document a été créé à l'aide de la fonction Capture Web ou extrait d'un autre document PDF (Document > Extraire des pages). Vous devez enregistrer le document afin d'activer la fonction d'enregistrement automatique. • Le document est affiché dans un navigateur Web ou incorporé à un document conteneur prenant en charge la fonction OLE (liaison et incorporation d'objets). Ce document ne fait pas partie du système de fichiers par défaut et ne peut prendre en charge l'enregistrement automatique. Récupération des modifications perdues Pour empêcher la perte des modifications après une interruption inattendue, vous devez activer la fonction d'enregistrement automatique, qui est le paramètre par défaut. Configuration de l'enregistrement automatique 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Documents. 2 Activer l'option Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications dans un fichier temporaire toutes les xx minutes (1-99) et indiquez le nombre de minutes. Récupération de modifications perdues après un arrêt inattendu du système 1 Lancez Acrobat ou ouvrez le fichier sur lequel vous travailliez.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 137 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF 2 Cliquez sur Oui lorsque vous êtes invité à ouvrir le(s) fichier(s) d'enregistrement automatique. Si plusieurs fichiers étaient ouverts, Acrobat les ouvre tous. 3 Enregistrez le ou les fichiers sous le même nom que les fichiers sur lesquels vous travailliez à l'origine. Réduction de la taille des fichiers par enregistrement Dans certains cas, il suffit d'utiliser la commande Enregistrer sous pour réduire la taille d'un fichier PDF. La réduction de la taille des fichiers PDF permet d’améliorer les performances des fichiers (en particulier ceux mis à disposition sur le Web) sans modifier leur aspect. La commande Réduire la taille du fichier rééchantillonne et compresse les images, désincorpore les 14 polices de base et incorpore les jeux partiels de polices laissées incorporées. Elle compresse également la structure du document et nettoie les éléments tels que les signets incorrects. Si la taille du fichier est déjà réduite au minimum, cette commande n'a aucun effet. Remarque : Si vous réduisez la taille d'un fichier signé numériquement, la signature numérique disparaît du document. 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF unique ou sélectionnez un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents. 2 Choisissez Document > Réduire la taille du fichier. 3 Sélectionnez le niveau de compatibilité de version requis. Si vous êtes certain que tous les utilisateurs disposent d'Acrobat 9 ou d'Adobe Reader 9, vous pouvez limiter la compatibilité à la version la plus récente afin de réduire la taille du fichier. Remarque : Si vous avez sélectionné Acrobat 4.0 et versions ultérieures alors que le fichier contient des effets de transparence, la conversion échoue. 4 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les mêmes paramètres à plusieurs fichiers, cliquez sur Application multiple et ajoutez les fichiers voulus. Cliquez sur OK, puis spécifiez les préférences de dossiers et de fichiers dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie. Remarque : Le bouton Application multiple n'est pas disponible dans les porte-documents PDF. Voir aussi « Compromis entre la qualité et la taille des fichiers PDF » à la page 63 Exportation d'un fichier PDF vers un autre format Exportation d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez enregistrer un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF vers différents formats, puis ouvrir le fichier obtenu dans d'autres applications. Des formats texte et image sont disponibles. Pour rendre un fichier PDF compatible avec des versions antérieures d'Adobe Acrobat et Reader, réenregistrez ce fichier sous une version PDF antérieure. Lorsque vous enregistrez un document PDF dans un format image, chacune des pages est enregistrée dans un fichier distinct. Remarque : Il est impossible d'exporter des porte-documents PDF (ou les fichiers PDF qu'ils contiennent) vers d'autres formats de fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 138 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Exportation d'un fichier PDF unique 1 Le document PDF étant ouvert, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Fichier > Exporter, puis sélectionnez un format de fichier. • Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis choisissez un format de fichier dans le menu Type. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour définir les options de conversion. (Si le bouton Paramètres n'est pas disponible, cela signifie que le format sélectionné ne comporte pas d'options associées.) Cliquez sur OK pour valider les options. Vous pouvez également modifier les paramètres de conversion disponibles dans le panneau Conversion du format PDF de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Remarque : Ces paramètres de conversion sont stockés séparément de ceux utilisés par la commande Exporter toutes les images. 3 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour exporter le fichier PDF au format sélectionné. Par défaut, le nom du fichier source est utilisé, suivi de la nouvelle extension, et le fichier exporté est enregistré dans le même dossier que le fichier source. Exportation de plusieurs fichiers PDF Remarque : Les paramètres de conversion ne sont pas disponibles lors de la procédure d'exportation de plusieurs fichiers PDF. Avant d'exporter plusieurs documents PDF, vous pouvez définir les paramètres de conversion via le panneau Conversion du format PDF disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans la catégorie Conversion du format PDF, sélectionnez Document Microsoft Word, puis cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Exporter > Exporter plusieurs fichiers. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers, choisissez Ajouter des fichiers ou Ajouter les fichiers ouverts, puis sélectionnez les fichiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des fichiers. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de sortie, spécifiez un dossier, les préférences de nom de fichier et un format de sortie de fichier. Options de format de fichier Lorsque vous exportez des fichiers PDF vers différents formats à l'aide de la commande Enregistrer sous, chacun de ces formats propose des paramètres de conversion qui lui sont propres. Si vous souhaitez utiliser les mêmes paramètres pour chaque conversion de documents PDF dans un format particulier, configurez-les dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans le panneau Conversion du format PDF, sélectionnez un format de fichier dans la liste et cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. (Cliquez à tout moment sur le bouton Par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres par défaut.) Options PostScript ou Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) Vous pouvez exporter un fichier PDF au format PostScript® à des fins d'utilisation dans des applications d'impression et de prépresse. Le fichier PostScript inclut des commentaires DSC (Document Structuring Conventions) complets et d'autres informations avancées conservées par Adobe Acrobat Distiller®. Il est également possible de créer à partir de tout document PDF un fichier EPS à placer ou à ouvrir dans une autre application. Les options disponibles varient selon que vous avez choisi de convertir le document au format PostScript ou EPS. Fichier de description de l’imprimante Le fichier de description de l'imprimante (PostScript Printer Description, PPD) offre toutes les informations nécessaires pour formater un fichier PostScript en vue de son utilisation sur un périphérique de sortie donné. L'option Indépendante du périphérique permet uniquement de créer des fichiers UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 139 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF PostScript ou EPS composites (sans séparation des couleurs). L'option Valeurs Acrobat par défaut sert de point de départ et de référence pour la création de tous les types de fichiers PostScript. Elle restaure également tous les paramètres de conversion par défaut. Adobe PDF 7.0 est compatible avec la plupart des périphériques. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec le format PostScript (PS). ASCII ou Binaire Indique le format de sortie des données image. Une sortie binaire produit des fichiers plus petits. Notez cependant que tous les flux de tâches ne sont pas compatibles avec ce type de sortie. PostScript Indique le niveau de compatibilité PostScript. Utilisez le niveau de langage 3 uniquement si le périphérique de sortie cible le prend en charge. Le niveau de langage 2 convient aux fichiers EPS à insérer dans un autre document avec séparation des couleurs. Utilisez le niveau de langage 2 avec les fichiers EPS que vous importez dans les applications Microsoft. Etendue Indique les pages à exporter. Lorsque vous exportez des fichiers au format EPS, chaque page de l'étendue spécifiée est enregistrée dans un fichier EPS distinct. Voir aussi « Options PostScript » à la page 392 Options HTML et XML Lorsque vous exportez un fichier PDF au format HTML ou XML, les images incluses dans le fichier PDF sont converties au format JPEG. Codage Fait référence aux règles binaires, établies à partir de normes internationales, utilisées pour représenter les caractères de texte. UTF-8 est une représentation Unicode des caractères utilisant un ou plusieurs octets 8 bits par caractère. UTF-16 représente les caractères à l'aide d'octets 16 bits. ISO-Latin-1, une représentation de caractères en 8 bits, est un surensemble de ASCII. UCS-4 est un jeu universel de caractères codés sur 4 octets. HTML/ASCII est une représentation de caractères en 7 bits développé par ANSI. L'option Utiliser la configuration par défaut de la table de mappage permet d'utiliser le codage de caractères par défaut défini dans les tables de mappages, stockées dans le dossier Plug-ins/SaveAsXML/MappingTables. Ces tables de mappage déterminent les attributs de sortie des données, notamment les codages par défaut suivants : UTF-8 (Enregistrer sous XML ou HTML 4.0.1) et HTML/ASCII (Enregistrer sous HTML 3.2). Générer les signets Génère des signets renvoyant au contenu des documents HTML ou XML. Des liens sont placés au début de chaque document HTML ou XML résultant de la conversion. Générer des balises pour les fichiers non balisés Génère des balises pour les fichiers qui en sont dépourvus. C'est notamment le cas des fichiers PDF créés à l'aide des versions 4.0 et antérieures d'Acrobat. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les fichiers non balisés ne sont pas convertis. Remarque : Les balises sont appliquées uniquement pendant la conversion et sont supprimées une fois la procédure terminée. Il ne s'agit pas d'une méthode de création de fichiers PDF balisés à partir de fichiers existants. Générer les images Contrôle la manière dont les images sont converties. Les fichiers image convertis sont référencés dans les documents XML et HTML. Utiliser le sous-dossier Désigne le dossier où sont stockées les images générées. Par défaut, il s'agit du dossier Images. Utiliser le préfixe Désigne le préfixe ajouté aux noms de fichier image si vous disposez de plusieurs versions d'un même fichier. Les noms de fichier attribués aux images ont le format nom_de_fichier_img_#. Format de sortie Détermine le format final. Le format par défaut est JPG.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 140 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Sous-échantillonner à Sous-échantillonne les fichiers image à la résolution indiquée. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les fichiers image sont créés à la même résolution que le fichier source. Ces fichiers ne sont jamais suréchantillonnés. Options JPEG et JPEG2000 Si le document PDF contient une série d'images, vous pouvez les exporter une à une en tant que fichiers JPEG, PNG ou TIFF en choisissant Options avancées > Traitement du document > Exporter toutes les images. Les options disponibles sont différentes selon que le document est exporté au format JPEG ou JPEG2000. Niveaux de gris/Couleur Indique un paramètre de compression qui équilibre la taille de fichier et la qualité d'image. Plus la taille du fichier est réduite, moins l'image est de qualité. Taille du carreau Divise l'image compressée en plusieurs carreaux de la taille spécifiée. (Si la hauteur ou la largeur de l'image n'est pas un multiple de la taille du carreau, du carreau partiel sont utilisés sur les bords.) Les données image de chaque carreau sont compressées séparément et peuvent être décompressées carreau par carreau. Il est recommandé d'utiliser la valeur par défaut de 256. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour le format JPEG2000. Format : Détermine l'affichage du fichier. Disponible uniquement au format JPEG. • Ligne de base (standard) Affiche l'image dès qu'elle est entièrement téléchargée. Ce format JPEG est pris en charge par la plupart des navigateurs Web. • Ligne de base (optimisée) Optimise la qualité des couleurs de l'image et produit des fichiers de plus petite taille. Cette option n'est cependant pas prise en charge par tous les navigateurs Web. • Progressif (3-5 numérisations) Affiche dans un premier temps une image à basse résolution dont la qualité s'améliore à mesure du téléchargement. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris Indique le type de gestion des couleurs à appliquer au fichier de sortie et permet de préciser si un profil ICC doit être incorporé. Remarque : Si vous exécutez la commande Enregistrer sous ou Exporter toutes les images sur un document PDF contenant des images JPEG et JPEG2000, puis que vous exportez son contenu au format JPEG ou JPEG2000, l'image obtenue risque de présenter un aspect différent dans Acrobat. Ceci peut survenir lorsque des images sont dotées d'un profil couleur incorporé au niveau de la page et non des données image. Dans ce cas, Acrobat ne parvient pas à importer le profil couleur de la page dans l'image enregistrée résultante. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laissez Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 pouces par pouce (ppp), ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces ou 173 380 millimètres maximum). Options PNG Le format PNG s'avère pratique pour les images destinées à être publiées sur le Web. Entrelacement Indique si l'image est entrelacée. L'option Non permet de créer une image qui s'affiche dans un navigateur Web lorsqu'elle est entièrement téléchargée. L'option Adam7 permet de créer une image qui affiche des versions à basse résolution dans un navigateur pendant le téléchargement du fichier image. Avec l'option Adam7, le téléchargement semble plus rapide et un message indique aux utilisateurs que l'opération est en cours. Toutefois, la taille du fichier téléchargé est supérieure. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 141 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Filtre Permet de sélectionner un algorithme de filtrage. • Aucun Compresse l'image sans utiliser de filtre. Recommandée pour les images à couleurs indexées et les images en mode bitmap. • Différentiel horizontal Optimise la compression des images comprenant des motifs horizontaux réguliers ou des fusions. • Relâché Optimise la compression des images comprenant des motifs verticaux réguliers. • Différentiel par moyenne Optimise la compression du bruit à faible niveau en calculant la moyenne des valeurs colorimétriques des pixels adjacents. • Filtre de Paeth Optimise la compression du bruit à faible niveau en réattribuant les valeurs colorimétriques adjacentes. • Adaptatif Applique l'algorithme de filtrage (Différentiel horizontal, Différentiel vertical, Différentiel par moyenne ou Filtre de Paeth) le plus adapté à l'image. Sélectionnez Adaptatif si vous n'êtes pas sûr du filtre à utiliser. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris Indique le type de gestion des couleurs du fichier de sortie et si un profil ICC doit être incorporé. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laisser Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 ppp, ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces maximum ou 173 380 millimètres). Options TIFF Le format TIFF est un format d’image bitmap flexible, pris en charge par la plupart des applications de dessin, de retouche d’image et de mise en page. La résolution est définie automatiquement. Monochrome Indique un format de compression. Le format CCITT - Groupe 4, qui est activé par défaut, produit généralement les fichiers les moins volumineux. La compression ZIP génère également des fichiers de petite taille. Remarque : Certaines applications ne peuvent pas ouvrir les fichiers TIFF enregistrés avec une compression JPEG ou ZIP. Par conséquent, nous vous conseillons d'opter pour la compression LZW. RVB/CMJN/Niveaux de gris/Autre Spécifie le type de gestion des couleurs à appliquer au fichier de sortie. Espace colorimétrique, Résolution Indique l'espace colorimétrique et la résolution du fichier de sortie. Vous pouvez laissez Acrobat déterminer automatiquement ces paramètres. Pour convertir les images couleur du fichier en dégradés de gris, choisissez Niveaux de gris. Remarque : Les résolutions les plus élevées, telles que 2 400 ppp, ne conviennent qu'aux petits formats de page (6 826 pouces maximum ou 173 380 millimètres). Exportation d'un fichier PDF au format texte Si vous disposez de la version PDF d'un document et non du fichier de l'application d'origine, vous pouvez exporter le texte au format Microsoft Word ou au format RTF (Rich Text Format). Ce dernier format constitue la norme pour les échanges de contenu entre applications de retouche de texte. Par défaut, les images contenues dans le document PDF sont enregistrées au format JPEG. Il convient de souligner que le fichier texte résultant de l'exportation d'un fichier PDF au format RTF ou Word n'est pas en tous points identique au fichier source issu de l'application de création. Il se peut que certaines informations de codage se soient perdues au cours de la conversion.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 142 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez également exporter un fichier PDF au format texte standard ou texte accessible. Le texte accessible respecte les préférences d’ordre de lecture définies dans les préférences de lecture et comprend en sortie des commentaires et des champs de formulaire. Le texte accessible comprend également des éléments de mise en forme tels que des retours à la ligne. Le texte de remplacement inclus dans les balises du document est utilisé à la place des images et des fichiers. Le texte standard suit la structure du texte du document et ignore au cours de la conversion tous les artefacts et éléments de figure. Les traits d'union insécables sont conservés et les traits d'union normaux retirés. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Exporter, puis choisissez un format de texte : Document Microsoft Word, Format RTF, Texte (accessible) ou Texte (normal). 2 Cliquez sur Paramètres, sélectionnez les options de votre choix, cliquez sur OK, puis sur Enregistrer. Options Word et RTF (Pour une liste des options de texte standard, voir les options des formats HTML et XML.) Options de mise en page Indique le mode d'interprétation de la mise en page du document à utiliser. L'option Conserver le texte redistribuable permet de conserver le flux du texte, mais pas forcément la mise en page. Ce paramètre s'avère pratique lorsque vous exportez un document doté d'une mise en page complexe (sur plusieurs colonnes, par exemple) et que vous souhaitez maintenir le flux du texte afin d'en faciliter la modification. L'option Conserver la disposition des pages permet de maintenir la disposition du document, mais le fichier résultant contient parfois davantage de zones de texte. Régénérer les balises afin d'optimiser la disposition si le document est déjà balisé Lors de l'enregistrement d'un document PDF au format Word ou RTF, Acrobat utilise les balises existantes afin de générer la disposition de sortie. Si les balises d'un document PDF ne reflètent pas la structure logique du document, la disposition résultante n'est pas forcément optimale. Lorsque cette option est activée, Acrobat supprime les balises existantes du document puis en ajoute de nouvelles avant d'exporter le document. Inclure les commentaires Conserve les commentaires PDF. Inclure les images Inclut les images dans la sortie finale. Le format d'image par défaut est JPEG. Format de sortie Indique le format d'image. Sélectionnez JPEG ou PNG, puis l'espace colorimétrique et les options de résolution. Espace colorimétrique à utiliser Désigne l'espace colorimétrique. Choisissez Couleur ou Niveaux de gris, ou conservez l'espace colorimétrique déterminé automatiquement. Modifier la résolution Sous-échantillonne les images. Si vous ne cochez pas cette option, les images sont créées selon la même résolution que le fichier PDF. Sous-échantillonner à Indique la résolution pour le sous-échantillonnage des images. Les images ne sont jamais suréchantillonnées. Exportation d'une image vers un autre format Outre la conversion de chaque page (le texte, les images et les objets vectoriels sur une page) dans un format image à l'aide de la commande Fichier > Enregistrer sous, il est possible d'exporter chacune des images d'un fichier PDF au format image de votre choix. Remarque : Vous pouvez exporter des images pixellisées mais pas les objets vectoriels. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Exporter toutes les images. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les images sous, choisissez un format de fichier pour les images. Par défaut, les fichiers image exportés portent le nom du fichier source.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 143 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF 3 Cliquez sur Paramètres. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue des paramètres d'exportation, sélectionnez les options de fichier, de gestion des couleurs et de conversion liées au type de fichier. 5 Dans la zone Exclure les images inférieures à, spécifiez la taille minimale des images à extraire. Sélectionnez l'option Sans restriction pour extraire toutes les images. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les images sous, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou sur OK. Réutilisation de contenu PDF Sélection et copie de texte L'outil Sélection permet de sélectionner du texte horizontal ou vertical ou des colonnes de texte dans un document PDF. Vous pouvez utiliser les commandes Copier et Coller afin de copier la sélection dans une autre application. Prenez note des remarques suivantes : • Si vous ne parvenez pas à sélectionner du texte, il se peut qu'il fasse partie d'une image. Dans Acrobat, pour exporter le texte des images en texte sélectionnable, choisissez Document > Reconnaissance de texte par ROC > Reconnaître du texte par ROC. • Si les commandes Couper, Copier et Coller ne sont pas disponibles lorsque vous sélectionnez du texte, l'auteur du document PDF a certainement défini des restrictions concernant la copie du contenu. • Si la police du texte que vous copiez n'est pas disponible sur le système, cette police est remplacée par une police proche ou par la police par défaut. Sélectionnez le texte voulu en faisant glisser le curseur du point d'insertion vers le point final (à gauche) ou en déplaçant le curseur en biais sur le texte (à droite). Voir aussi « Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé » à la page 232 Sélection d'une colonne de texte 1 Activez l'outil Sélection , puis déplacez le pointeur sur une colonne de texte. Lorsque le pointeur prend la forme d'une case superposée sur une barre verticale, cela signifie que l'outil Sélection est en mode de sélection de colonne. Vous pouvez forcer l'activation du mode de sélection des colonnes en appuyant sur la touche Alt tout en traçant un rectangle avec la souris sur la colonne de texte. 2 Tracez un rectangle autour d'une colonne de texte. Pour sélectionner le contenu de plusieurs colonnes, faites glisser le curseur depuis le début du texte de la première colonne jusqu'à la fin du texte à sélectionner. Sélection de l'intégralité du texte d'une page 1 Choisissez Affichage > Affichage de pages > Une seule page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 144 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout. • Cliquez quatre fois dans le texte. Cette méthode permet de sélectionner tout le texte de la page quelle que soit la mise en page choisie. Remarque : Si vous choisissez une autre mise en page, l'intégralité du texte du document est sélectionnée. Copie du texte sélectionné 1 Utilisez l'outil Sélection afin de sélectionner un segment de texte sur la page. 2 Copiez le texte : • Choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier la sélection dans une autre application. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte sélectionné, puis choisissez Copier. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le texte sélectionné, puis choisissez Copier avec formatage. Cette commande, qui conserve la disposition des colonnes, s'affiche uniquement lorsque le document est correctement balisé. Vous pouvez coller le texte copié dans des commentaires et des signets de même que dans des documents créés dans des applications tierces. Copie d'un tableau et d'un diagramme 1 S'il n'est pas déjà sélectionné, cliquez sur l'outil Sélection . 2 Mettez en surbrillance la totalité du tableau ou les rangées et colonnes que vous souhaitez copier. Pour forcer l'activation du mode de sélection des colonnes, appuyez sur la touche Alt tout en traçant un rectangle avec la souris sur la colonne de texte. 3 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Copier sous la forme d'un tableau Conserve le formatage lorsque le tableau est copié dans Excel. Dans Excel, utilisez la commande Collage spécial et choisissez Feuille de calcul XML. Enregistrer sous la forme d'un tableau Permet de coller le tableau dans un nouveau fichier. Ouvrir le tableau dans une feuille de calcul Ouvre le tableau dans une application compatible CSV, telle qu'Excel. Pour copier un tableau au format RTF, faites glisser le tableau sélectionné vers un document ouvert dans l'application cible. Copie d'une image A l'aide de l'outil Sélection, copiez et collez des images spécifiques d'un document PDF vers le Presse-papiers (Windows uniquement), une application tierce ou un fichier. Si vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner une image en raison du texte qui la chevauche, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Générales sous Catégories. Activez ensuite l'option Sélectionner les images avant le texte avec l'outil Sélection. 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection , effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur une image ou tracez un rectangle autour de celle-ci pour la sélectionner en entier. • Pour sélectionner une partie de l'image, immobilisez le pointeur sur l'image jusqu'à ce que l'icône en forme de croix s'affiche, puis tracez un rectangle autour de la zone de votre choix.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 145 Enregistrement et exportation d'un fichier PDF Remarque : Cliquez en dehors d'une image pour la désélectionner et recommencer. 2 Copiez l'image : • Choisissez Edition > Copier, puis Edition > Coller pour coller l'image dans un document ouvert dans une autre application. • Cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option afin de copier l'image dans le Pressepapiers ou dans un nouveau fichier. • Faites glisser l'image dans un document ouvert dans l'application cible. Voir aussi « Exportation d'une image vers un autre format » à la page 142 Instantané d'une page Utilisez l'outil Instantané pour copier l'intégralité du contenu sélectionné (texte, images ou les deux) dans le Pressepapiers ou dans une autre application. Le texte et les images sont tous deux copiés sous la forme d'une image. 1 Activez l'outil Instantané en choisissant Outils > Sélection et zoom. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez n'importe où dans la page afin de capturer le contenu intégral affiché à l'écran. • Tracez un rectangle autour du texte ou des images (ou des deux). • Tracez un rectangle au sein d'une image afin de copier la zone qui vous intéresse. Les couleurs de la zone sélectionnée sont inversées momentanément afin de mettre la sélection en surbrillance. Celleci est copiée automatiquement dans le Presse-papiers lorsque vous relâchez le bouton de la souris. Si un document est ouvert dans une autre application, vous pouvez choisir Edition > Coller afin d'insérer directement la sélection dans le document cible. Vous avez la possibilité d'enregistrer toutes les images d'un document PDF. Consultez la section « Exportation d'une image vers un autre format » à la page 142.. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Reader.146 Chapitre 6 : Collaboration Vous pouvez organiser des révisions pour de nombreux types de contenus en diffusant une version Adobe® PDF du document source que d'autres utilisateurs commentent. Les réviseurs ajoutent leurs commentaires au fichier PDF au moyen des outils de commentaires et d'annotations. Dans le cadre des révisions partagées, les réviseurs peuvent publier leurs commentaires dans un espace de travail partagé, puis visualiser et répondre aux commentaires d'autres réviseurs. A partir d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard, vous pouvez créer votre propre compte d'utilisateur sur Acrobat.COM. Acrobat.com permet de télécharger et de partager la plupart des types de document, mais aussi de partager des fichiers PDF ou votre PC dans le cadre de réunions en ligne. Les services Acrobat.COM sont disponibles directement depuis Acrobat. Remarque : Acrobat.com n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. Partage de fichiers et collaboration en temps réel Téléchargement de documents sur Acrobat.com Vous pouvez télécharger de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Télécharger les documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Le cas échéant, entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Cliquez sur Télécharger d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. 4 Cliquez sur Transférer. Partage de documents Vous pouvez partager de nombreux types de fichiers sur Acrobat.com, pas uniquement des fichiers PDF. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Partager des documents sur Acrobat.com. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Partager d'autres fichiers pour ajouter des fichiers supplémentaires. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, effectuez les opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques de personnes à inviter. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. • Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Votre message personnalisé est enregistré ; il s'affichera lors du prochain partage de document. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger le fichier. Acrobat télécharge les fichiers et envoie aux destinataires choisis un message électronique contenant le lien vers les fichiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 147 Collaboration Création et modification d'un document collaboratif Adobe Buzzword permet de créer des documents et de les modifier en même temps que d'autres utilisateurs. Grâce à Buzzword, vous pouvez créer un document à partir de tout ordinateur connecté à Internet, partager le document avec des collaborateurs, le relire et le réviser en équipe. Buzzword s'exécute sur des serveurs Adobe sécurisés, sur lesquels sont également stockés vos commentaires ; ceux-ci sont donc toujours disponibles sur le Web. Remarque : Buzzword n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Créer un document Buzzword. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 3 Choisissez Document > Créer. Une fois le document créé, vous pouvez inviter d'autres utilisateurs à collaborer, en tant qu'auteurs, réviseurs ou lecteurs. Pour plus de détails, dans Buzzword, choisissez Aide > Aide de Buzzword. Collaboration sur un document PDF Utilisez la collaboration en direct pour réviser un fichier PDF avec un ou plusieurs utilisateurs distants dans une session en ligne. Dans une session de collaboration en direct, les participants visualisent un document dans une fenêtre de conversation en direct. Les pages étant partagées, la section du document affichée et le facteur de zoom sont communs à tous les participants ; tous consultent la même partie du document en même temps. Acrobat 9 est indispensable pour lancer une session de collaboration en direct. Acrobat 9 ou Adobe Reader® 9 est nécessaire pour participer à une session de collaboration en direct. Une vidéo sur la collaboration en direct est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr. Ouverture d'une session de collaboration en direct 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Envoyer et collaborer en direct. 2 Le cas échéant, sélectionnez ou localisez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, effectuez les opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Envoyer : • Entrez les adresses électroniques de personnes à inviter. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur les boutons A et Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. • Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. • Pour mener la session de collaboration sur Acrobat.com, sélectionnez Stocker le fichier sur Acrobat.COM et Envoyer le lien aux destinataires. Pour envoyer le fichier aux destinataires sous forme de pièce jointe, laissez cette option désactivée. • Si vous menez la session de collaboration sur Acrobat.com, choisissez une option dans le menu Niveau d'accès afin d'indiquer les utilisateurs autorisés à télécharger le fichier. Le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche dans le document. Dès qu'un participant (au moins) se joint à la session, vous pouvez partager les pages et converser en direct.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 148 Collaboration Participation à une session de collaboration en direct 1 Dans le courrier électronique d'invitation à la collaboration en direct, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si le courrier électronique contient une pièce jointe au format PDF, cliquez deux fois sur ce fichier. • Si le message électronique contient un URL, cliquez dessus ou saisissez-le dans la barre d'adresse d'un navigateur. Le cas échéant, connectez-vous à l'aide de votre ID Adobe et de votre mot de passe. Le fichier PDF s'ouvre et le panneau de navigation Collaboration en direct s'affiche. 2 Le cas échéant, connectez-vous en tant qu'invité ou entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe. 3 Au cours de la session de collaboration en direct, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, le cas échéant : • Saisissez des messages dans la zone de conversation, dans la partie inférieure du panneau. Cliquez sur la zone de couleur pour changer la couleur du texte de la conversation. • Pour partager vos pages de manière à ce que tous les participants disposent de la même vue, cliquez sur le bouton Commencer le partage de page. En mode Partage de page, le libellé du bouton devient Arrêter le partage de page ; il vous permet de mettre fin au partage à tout moment. • Pour partager votre écran dans le cadre d'une réunion Adobe ConnectNow, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Partager mon écran. • Pour enregistrer l'historique de la conversation, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Enregistrer la conversation. • Pour désactiver la collaboration en direct dans un document, dans le menu d'options , choisissez Désactiver la conversation et le partage de pages dans ma copie ou (initiateur uniquement) Désactiver la conversation et le partage de pages dans toutes les copies. Si vous désactivez la collaboration en direct dans toutes les copies, les utilisateurs sont dans l'incapacité de se connecter à une session de collaboration, quelle que soit la copie du document utilisée. Collaboration lors d'une réunion en ligne Adobe ConnectNow est un outil personnel de conférence sur le Web qui permet de mener des réunions en temps réel depuis votre PC. Les participants rejoignent la réunion en se connectant à l'espace de réunion sur le Web, à partir de leur propre ordinateur. Au cours d'une réunion en ligne ConnectNow, vous pouvez partager votre PC, mener des conversations en direct, partager des tableaux blancs en ligne et utiliser de nombreuses fonctions de collaboration. Remarque : Adobe ConnectNow n'est pas disponible dans toutes les langues. Démarrage d'une réunion 1 Choisissez Fichier > Collaborer > Partager mon écran. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, saisissez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe, ou créez un ID si vous n'en avez pas. A partir du moment où vous vous trouvez dans la salle de réunion, vous pouvez y inviter des participants. Lorsque d'autres utilisateurs ont rejoint la salle de réunion, vous pouvez partager votre écran, converser avec les participants, prendre des notes et utiliser les autres fonctions de réunion. Pour plus de détails, dans la salle de réunion, choisissez Aide > Aide d'Adobe ConnectNow. Participation à une réunion 1 Cliquez sur l'URL de la réunion dans le courrier électronique d'invitation, ou saisissez-le dans la barre d'adresse d'un navigateur. 2 Entrez votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe ou connectez-vous en tant qu'invité.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 149 Collaboration Une fois que vous vous trouvez dans la salle de réunion, vous pouvez converser avec les participants, prendre des notes et utiliser les nombreuses fonctions de réunion. Pour plus de détails, dans la salle de réunion, choisissez Aide > Aide d'Adobe ConnectNow. Préférences d'Acrobat.com Pour modifier les paramètres de votre compte Acrobat.com, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis choisissez Acrobat.com sous Catégories. Adresse électronique, Mot de passe Indique votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe. Pour enregistrer votre ID Adobe et votre mot de passe dans les préférences, cliquez sur Mémoriser les informations. Gérer le compte Cliquez pour afficher et gérer les paramètres de votre compte. Changer de mot de passe Cliquez pour effacer le mot de passe actuellement enregistré et en définir un nouveau. Se connecter à l'ouverture des documents dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée Si cette option et l'option Mémoriser les informations sont toutes deux activées, vous êtes automatiquement connecté à l'ouverture d'un fichier PDF dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée. Si cette option est désactivée, vous êtes invité à vous connecter lorsque vous ouvrez un document dont la fonction de collaboration en direct est activée. Me mettre en copie lors de l'envoi d'une invitation électronique via Acrobat.com Activée, cette option vous permet de recevoir une copie de votre courrier électronique d'invitation au partage de document, aux sessions de collaboration en direct, aux révisions partagées et à la diffusion des formulaires. Préparation d'une révision de fichier PDF A propos des révisions PDF gérées Lors d'une révision gérée, un assistant vous permet de configurer la révision, de spécifier l'emplacement du document et d'inviter des participants. Vous n'avez pas à importer des commentaires, à activer la fonction de commentaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader, ni à effectuer un suivi manuel des réponses des réviseurs. Remarque : Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended est nécessaire pour activer la fonction de commentaires pour les utilisateurs Reader dans le cadre des révisions gérées. Acrobat propose deux types de révisions gérées : les révisions partagées et les révisions par messagerie électronique. Chacun des types de révision est associé à un assistant qui vous aide à diffuser un fichier PDF accompagné d'outils spéciaux et d'instructions aux réviseurs. Le dispositif de suivi permet de suivre toutes les révisions gérées. Il permet d'accéder au fichier PDF et aux informations relatives à la révision et à ses participants. Grâce au dispositif de suivi, l'initiateur d'une révision peut modifier l'échéance de la révision, ajouter des réviseurs et mettre fin à la révision. Les participants sont avertis de la disponibilité de nouveaux commentaires, de la modification de l'échéance et de l'ajout de réviseurs, même si Acrobat est fermé. Le dispositif de suivi fournit également des informations sur l'état des erreurs de serveur. Remarque : Il est impossible d'effectuer une révision gérée sur un porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 150 Collaboration Révision partagée Les révisions partagées constituent la meilleure forme de collaboration puisque les participants peuvent lire les commentaires des autres et y répondre. Les commentaires des participants sont stockés dans un référentiel sur Acrobat.com ou sur un serveur interne. Acrobat synchronise les commentaires à intervalles réguliers afin de télécharger les toutes dernières modifications. Les réviseurs sont avisés des nouveaux commentaires dès leur ajout, et peuvent consulter les commentaires des autres réviseurs et y répondre. Grâce à la révision partagée, les destinataires peuvent facilement rejoindre la révision, partager leurs commentaires, suivre les révisions et obtenir des mises à jour régulières. Remarque : Acrobat 9 est indispensable pour initier des révisions partagées sur Acrobat.com. Acrobat 9 ou Reader 9 est nécessaire pour participer à une révision partagée sur Acrobat.com. Pour les révisions partagées non disponibles sur Acrobat.com, Acrobat version 8 ou ultérieure, ou Reader version 8 ou ultérieure est nécessaire pour consulter les commentaires des autres réviseurs. Les réviseurs utilisant des versions antérieures d'Acrobat doivent envoyer leurs commentaires par messagerie électronique. Révision par messagerie électronique Les révisions par messagerie électronique sont idéales lorsque les réviseurs n'ont pas accès à un serveur commun ou lorsqu'une approche de révision collaborative des documents n'est pas indispensable. Lors d'une révision par messagerie électronique, l'initiateur envoie un fichier PDF aux réviseurs sous la forme d'une pièce jointe. Les réviseurs ajoutent leurs commentaires et renvoient le document en cliquant sur le bouton Envoyer les commentaires de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations ou en utilisant la barre de message du document. Une fois qu'il a reçu ces commentaires, l'initiateur peut les fusionner dans sa propre version du fichier PDF. Le principal inconvénient des révisions par messagerie est que les participants n'ont pas accès aux commentaires des autres pendant la révision. Les initiateurs ne peuvent consulter les commentaires qu'après les avoir reçus. Remarque : Pour participer à une révision par messagerie électronique, vous devez disposer d'Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure ou de Reader 7.0 ou version ultérieure.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 151 Collaboration Lors d'une révision par messagerie électronique, les participants envoient leur commentaires à l'initiateur, qui les fusionne dans la version principale du document PDF. Choix d'une option de diffusion Acrobat offre plusieurs options de diffusion dans l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée et Diffuser le formulaire. Lors de votre choix, tenez compte des points suivants : quelles mesures de sécurité faut-il appliquer au fichier, quels serveurs ou sites Web les destinataires pourront utiliser pour télécharger le fichier et comment souhaitez-vous recevoir les commentaires ou données de formulaire. Acrobat.com Acrobat.COM est un service Web sécurisé entièrement gratuit, qui fonctionne avec Acrobat. Les participants téléchargent un fichier à partir d'Acrobat.com, puis ajoutent des commentaires et des données à l'aide de Acrobat. Lorsqu'ils ont terminé, ils publient les commentaires ou envoient les réponses de leur formulaire de manière sécurisée sur le site Acrobat.com. Les réponses de formulaire sont stockées sur votre disque dur à mesure qu'elles sont renvoyées. Si vous utilisez Acrobat.com, vous pouvez aussi autoriser les réviseurs ou les personnes qui remplissent les formulaires à ouvrir et partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. Serveur interne Vous pouvez utiliser un emplacement de serveur interne si les destinataires travaillent à l'abri d'un pare-feu et bénéficient tous d'un accès à un serveur commun. Le serveur peut correspondre à un dossier réseau, à un espace de travail Microsoft SharePoint (Windows uniquement) ou à un dossier situé sur un serveur Web. Vous avez la possibilité d'inclure un lien dans le fichier PDF que vous diffusez ou de l'envoyer en pièce jointe à un message électronique. Dans le cas des révisions, les commentaires publiés sont téléchargés sur le serveur. Pour les formulaires, les réponses sont stockées sur votre disque dur à mesure qu'elles sont renvoyées. Remarque : Les dossiers de serveur Web ne peuvent pas servir à la diffusion de formulaires. Lorsque vous définissez votre propre serveur, l'assistant vous invite à enregistrer un profil réunissant l'emplacement serveur et les options de diffusion de votre choix. Lors de la diffusion suivante, l'assistant vous propose de choisir le profil enregistré. Adresse de messagerie L'assistant de diffusion de formulaires offre une option permettant d'envoyer le formulaire sous forme de pièce jointe. Vous pouvez envoyer le formulaire à partir de votre client de messagerie habituel ou utiliser l'assistant pour créer un message électronique avec le fichier de formulaire en pièce jointe. Une fois que les destinataires ont rempli et renvoyé le formulaire, les réponses reviennent dans votre boîte de réception. Chaque réponse est copiée dans un fichier réponse principal.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 152 Collaboration L'option de pièce jointe n'est pas disponible dans l'assistant Envoyer en révision partagée. Pour ouvrir l'assistant de révision par messagerie, choisissez Commentaires > Joindre pour une révision par messagerie électronique. Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions Les révisions par messagerie électronique et l'envoi de commentaires nécessitent une application de messagerie électronique et une connexion à un serveur de messagerie. Acrobat prend en charge la plupart des applications de messagerie. Si plusieurs applications de messagerie sont installées sur le système, Acrobat peut ne pas lancer votre application favorite lorsqu'il envoie un fichier PDF en tant que pièce jointe. Pour préciser l'application à lancer, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sous Windows, cliquez deux fois sur Options Internet dans le panneau de configuration. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de Internet, cliquez sur l'onglet Programmes, puis sélectionnez votre application de messagerie favorite. Redémarrez Acrobat pour appliquer les modifications. • (Windows) Modifiez les options MAPI dans l'application de messagerie. Acrobat et Reader utilisent l'interface MAPI (Messaging Application Program Interface) pour communiquer avec l'application de messagerie. La plupart des applications de messagerie sont dotées d'options MAPI qui gèrent ces communications. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de l’application de messagerie, voir l’aide qui s’y rapporte. • Sous Mac OS, dans Messagerie, choisissez Messagerie > Préférences, sélectionnez Général, puis choisissez votre application de messagerie favorite dans le menu Logiciel de courrier par défaut. Redémarrez Acrobat pour appliquer les modifications. Si l'application voulue n'est pas proposée, cliquez sur Sélectionner dans le menu déroulant et parcourez l'arborescence pour la localiser. Si vous sélectionnez une application qui ne figure pas dans le menu Logiciel de courrier par défaut, il se peut qu'Acrobat ne la prenne pas en charge. Configuration d'un serveur Si vous diffusez un fichier PDF à partir d'un emplacement serveur personnalisé, vous pouvez utiliser un dossier réseau, un serveur Windows dotés des services Microsoft SharePoint ou un dossier de serveur Web. Les participants doivent disposer d'un accès en lecture et en écriture au serveur spécifié. Demandez à l'administrateur réseau de fournir un emplacement approprié au stockage des commentaires sur le serveur. Aucun logiciel supplémentaire n'est nécessaire pour configurer le serveur. Remarque : Les dossiers de serveur Web ne peuvent pas servir à la diffusion de formulaires. Si tous les destinataires font partie d'un réseau local, les dossiers réseau et les serveurs SharePoint sont les plus adaptés pour constituer un serveur de commentaires. Les dossiers réseau représente généralement la solution la plus économique et la plus fiable. Pour initier une révision sur un serveur SharePoint, l'initiateur doit utiliser Windows ; les participants ont toutefois la possibilité de travailler sous Windows ou Mac OS. Tous les participants doivent disposer de droits d'accès en lecture et en écriture au dossier Bibliothèque de documents, dans l'espace de travail indiqué. Il est préférable de réserver les serveurs WebDAV (serveurs Web utilisant le protocole WebDAV) aux situations où les réviseurs se trouvent à l'extérieur d'un pare-feu ou d'un réseau local. Lancement d'une révisionUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 153 Collaboration Lancement d'une révision partagée Le fichier PDF partagé que vous envoyez inclut la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations et des instructions sur la barre de message du document. 1 Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer en révision partagée. Vous pouvez également initier une révision partagée directement depuis d’autres applications qui utilisent PDFMaker, notamment Microsoft Word. Choisissez Adobe PDF > Convertir au format Adobe PDF et envoyer en révision. Pour les applications Office 2007, sélectionnez Acrobat > Créer et envoyer en révision. 2 Le cas échéant, spécifiez un fichier PDF. 3 Choisissez la méthode de diffusion et de recueil des données : vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat.COM, votre propre serveur interne ou un profil de serveur, si vous en avez déjà créé un. (Pour plus d'informations, voir « Choix d'une option de diffusion » à la page 151.) Suivez ensuite les instructions affichées à l'écran. 4 Dans l'écran de la messagerie électronique, spécifiez les paramètres suivants, le cas échéant : Mode de livraison Cliquez pour spécifier un autre mode de livraison et de recueil des données que celui actuellement défini. A, Cc Entrez les adresses électroniques des réviseurs. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur le bouton A ou Cc pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie. Objet, Message Affichez un aperçu du message électronique et modifiez l'objet et le corps de ce message, le cas échéant. Toutes vos modifications sont enregistrées ; elles s'afficheront la prochaine fois que vous envoyez un document en révision. Pour utiliser le message électronique par défaut, cliquez sur Réinitialiser le message par défaut. Niveau d'accès (Acrobat.com uniquement) Indiquez qui est autorisé à télécharger le fichier à partir d'Acrobat.COM. Vous pouvez limiter l'accès aux seuls destinataires de votre message électronique ou accorder l'accès à toute personne disposant de l'URL. Echéance de la révision Cliquez pour définir une date différente ou supprimer l'échéance. Une fois la révision échue, les réviseurs ne peuvent plus publier leurs commentaires. Remarque : Si un réviseur travaille sur le document dans Acrobat à l'échéance de la révision, il est autorisé à publier ses commentaires avant de fermer le document. Autoriser le partage de vues de page et la conversation pour ce document (Acrobat.com uniquement) Sélectionnée, cette option permet aux réviseurs d'utiliser la fonction de collaboration en direct et de partager le fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une session de conversation en direct. 5 Cliquez sur Envoyer. Une copie du fichier en révision partagée, nommée [nom du fichier d'origine]_révision.pdf, est créée dans le même dossier que le fichier d'origine. Une vidéo sur la mise en place d'une révision partagée est disponible à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 160 « Préférences d'Acrobat.com » à la page 149UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 154 Collaboration Lancement d'une révision par messagerie électronique Lorsque vous initiez une révision par messagerie électronique, vous envoyez une version suivie du document PDF, ce qui vous permet de fusionner facilement les commentaires que vous recevez. (Les champs de formulaire d'un document PDF ne sont pas disponibles pour le remplissage en cours de révision.) Après avoir initié une révision partagée, vous pouvez aussi lancer une révision par messagerie électronique portant sur le même fichier PDF. Lancement d'une révision Avant d'initier une révision par messagerie électronique, assurez-vous que l'application de messagerie est configurée pour fonctionner avec Acrobat. (Voir la section « Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions » à la page 152.) 1 Choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer par messagerie pour révision. 2 Si un message vous y invite, saisissez les informations dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité. 3 Si aucun document PDF n'est ouvert, sélectionnez-en un, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Le document PDF que vous indiquez devient le fichier principal. Vous fusionnerez les commentaires envoyés par les réviseurs dans ce fichier. 4 Spécifiez les réviseurs en entrant leur adresse électronique. Placez un point-virgule ou un retour chariot entre chaque adresse. Cliquez sur Carnet d'adresses pour sélectionner les adresses électroniques voulues dans le carnet d'adresses de votre application de messagerie électronique. 5 Affichez un aperçu de l'invitation électronique et modifiez le message le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer l'invitation. Une copie du document PDF est envoyée aux réviseurs en pièce jointe. Lorsque la pièce jointe au format PDF est ouverte, les outils de commentaires et des instructions s'affichent. Fusion de commentaires Une fois les commentaires des réviseurs reçus, vous pouvez les fusionner dans le document PDF principal pour que tous les commentaires soient affichés au même endroit. 1 Lorsqu'un réviseur vous a envoyé des commentaires, ouvrez le fichier joint dans l'application de messagerie. Si cette application ne parvient pas à trouver la version d'origine du document PDF, elle vous invite à la rechercher. Remarque : Si vous n'avez pas lancé la révision et que vous recevez des commentaires que vous souhaitez transmettre à l'initiateur, fusionnez-les dans votre copie du document PDF, puis envoyez-les (voir « Envoi de commentaires par messagerie électronique » à la page 157). Si vous avez déjà envoyé vos commentaires, l'initiateur ne reçoit que les nouveaux commentaires. Les commentaires fusionnés conservent le nom de l'auteur d'origine. 2 Si vous avez initié la révision, la boîte de dialogue Fusionner les commentaires apparaît. Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Oui Ouvre la version principale du document PDF et fusionne tous les commentaires dans cette version. Une fois tous les commentaires fusionnés, enregistrez la version principale du PDF. Non, ouvrir uniquement cette copie Ouvre la copie du réviseur du document PDF contenant des commentaires. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez malgré tout fusionner des commentaires en choisissant Commentaires > Fusionner les commentaires dans le fichier PDF principal. Annuler Ferme le fichier PDF du réviseur qui contient des commentaires. Pour masquer les commentaires que vous ne souhaitez pas fusionner, utilisez le menu Afficher de la liste des commentaires. Enregistrez et rouvrez le fichier PDF, puis sélectionnez Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de fusion de PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 155 Collaboration Participation à une révision de document PDF Révision d'un document PDF Lorsque vous recevez une invitation électronique pour participer à la révision d'un document PDF, l'invitation contient habituellement le fichier PDF en pièce jointe ou une URL permettant d'accéder au fichier PDF. Il est aussi possible que vous receviez une pièce jointe au format FDF (Form Data Format). Lorsque vous ouvrez le fichier FDF, ce dernier configure les paramètres de révision et ouvre le fichier PDF dans Acrobat. Les fichiers PDF à réviser sont dotés de fonctions spéciales, notamment d'outils de commentaire et d'une barre de message contenant des instructions. Utilisez les outils de commentaire pour ajouter des commentaires au fichier PDF et pour les envoyer, soit en les publiant sur un serveur de commentaires où d'autres personnes pourront les consulter, soit en les envoyant sous la forme d'une pièce jointe à l'initiateur de la révision. Remarque : Si vous recevez un fichier PDF qui ne comporte aucune fonction spéciale, ajoutez vos commentaires à l'aide des outils de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, enregistrez le fichier PDF, puis renvoyez-le. (Voir la section « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 163.) Pour réviser le document PDF ultérieurement, rouvrez-le à partir du dispositif de suivi afin de vérifier que vos commentaires ont bien été ajoutés à la copie suivie du fichier PDF et que l'initiateur a reçu vos commentaires. Si vous n'envoyez pas ou ne publiez pas vos commentaires immédiatement, enregistrez le document PDF avant de le fermer pour éviter toute perte de données. Tant que l'initiateur n'a pas reçu vos commentaires, ceux-ci n'apparaissent que dans votre copie locale du fichier PDF. Les autres réviseurs ne peuvent pas les consulter. Si vous révisez un fichier PDF à l'aide d'Acrobat version 8 ou antérieure, ou de Reader version 8 ou antérieure, certaines fonctions peuvent s'avérer indisponibles. Voir aussi « Réponse aux commentaires » à la page 178 « Rejoindre une révision » à la page 158 « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 160 Participation à une révision 1 Dans votre application de messagerie, ouvrez le fichier PDF en cliquant une fois sur l'URL ou deux fois sur la pièce jointe (PDF ou FDF). 2 Effectuez une ou plusieurs des opérations suivantes, le cas échéant : • Connectez-vous à Acrobat.COM à l'aide de votre ID et de votre mot de passe Adobe. • Cliquez sur Connexion dans la boîte de dialogue Révision partagée. • Cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre Bienvenue dans cette révision partagée. Cette fenêtre indique l'échéance de la révision, les participants, les commentaires éventuellement émis par chaque réviseur et l'emplacement du serveur de commentaires. • Saisissez votre nom, votre adresse électronique, le nom de votre société et votre fonction. 3 Enregistrez le fichier à un emplacement auquel vous le retrouverez facilement, par exemple le bureau. 4 Ajoutez des commentaires au fichier PDF à l'aide des outils de la barre Commentaires et annotations. Pour supprimer un commentaire, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. (Vous pouvez uniquement supprimer les commentaires dont vous êtes l'auteur.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 156 Collaboration 5 Effectuez les opérations suivantes, selon le cas : • Si vous êtes averti que de nouveaux commentaires envoyés par d'autres réviseurs sont disponibles, cliquez sur le message. Ces commentaires s'affichent dans le fichier PDF. • Pour vérifier si d'autres réviseurs ont formulé de nouveaux commentaires, cliquez sur Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires . 6 Pour envoyer vos nouveaux commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Publier les commentaires ou Envoyer les commentaires à l'initiateur de la révision. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Publier les commentaires ou Envoyer les commentaires à l'initiateur de la révision. Lorsque vous envoyez vos commentaires, ceux-ci sont réunis dans un fichier PDF et envoyés en pièce jointe à l'initiateur de la révision. En cas de publication, vos commentaires sont enregistrés sur le serveur de commentaires. Options de la barre de message du document Les options disponibles sur la barre de message du document dépendent de la manière dont l'initiateur a configuré la révision et de votre accès ou non au serveur de commentaires. Des options similaires peuvent également se trouver sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Pour plus de détails sur les différents types de révisions, voir la section « A propos des révisions PDF gérées » à la page 149. Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires Invite Acrobat à synchroniser les commentaires entre le serveur de commentaires et le disque dur local. Si vous ne cliquez pas sur ce bouton, Acrobat recherche les nouveaux commentaires toutes les 10 minutes. Fusionner les commentaires Copie les commentaires du fichier PDF ouvert dans votre copie. Cette option n'est disponible que pour les fichiers PDF que vous recevez des réviseurs dans le cadre des révisions par messagerie. Publier les commentaires Disponible uniquement lors des révisions partagées Télécharge vos nouveaux commentaires sur le serveur de commentaires. Ce bouton est désactivé lorsque la révision est achevée. Enregistrer une version d'archive Disponible uniquement lors des révisions partagées, lorsque la révision est achevée. Enregistre sur le disque dur une copie du document contenant les commentaires de révision. Envoyer les commentaires Crée un message électronique destiné à l'initiateur de la révision. Ce message contient le fichier PDF commenté en tant que pièce jointe. Cette option est également disponible pour les participants à une révision par messagerie électronique. Elle s'affiche dans les révisions partagées si le réviseur a choisi de travailler hors connexion ou en cas d'échec de la connexion au serveur de commentaires. Etat Icône indiquant l'état de la connexion au serveur de commentaires. L'icône peut prendre trois formes : dernière tentative réussie , dernière tentative infructueuse ou tentative de connexion en cours . Si vous cliquez dessus, un menu contenant d'autres options apparaît. La fonction Suivi des révisions ouvre le dispositif de suivi. L'option Enregistrer sous version d'archive enregistre une copie du fichier PDF qui n'est plus connectée à la révision. L'option Travailler hors connexion vous permet d'effectuer des commentaires hors connexion, que vous ne pourrez publier qu'une fois revenu au mode en ligne. Pour passer au mode en ligne, cliquez sur Se reconnecter au serveur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 157 Collaboration Recherche des commentaires publiés récemment Lorsque vous participez à une révision partagée, les commentaires publiés sur le disque dur local sont synchronisés avec les commentaires présents sur le serveur. Vous êtes averti lorsque de nouveaux commentaires sont disponibles. Comme le processus de synchronisation se poursuit après la fermeture du fichier PDF, vous continuerez à recevoir des notifications. Les messages affichés dans la zone de notification vous informent lorsque de nouveaux réviseurs se joignent à la révision, lorsque des mises à jour sont effectuées (plusieurs révisions), lorsque l'échéance change ou lorsque les tentatives de synchronisation échouent. Ils vous avertissent également lorsqu'un nouvel abonnement à une liste de diffusion est ajouté au dispositif de suivi. Vous pouvez modifier la fréquence d'affichage des messages et de synchronisation des commentaires, et déclencher manuellement le processus de synchronisation. Pour consulter les nouveaux commentaires d'une révision partagée, vous devez avoir accès à Acrobat.com ou la possibilité de vous connecter au réseau auquel appartient le serveur de commentaires Si vous ne pouvez pas vous y connecter, vérifiez l'état du serveur dans le dispositif de suivi pour déterminer la cause du problème. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires. • Cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher les nouveaux commentaires de la barre de message du document. Envoi de commentaires par messagerie électronique Si vous révisez un document PDF hors ligne ou en dehors de la zone de protection d'un pare-feu ou si vous êtes déconnecté temporairement du serveur de commentaires, vous devrez peut-être envoyer vos commentaires par messagerie électronique. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Joindre à un message électronique. 2 Entrez l'adresse de l'initiateur, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Remarque : Si le fichier PDF dépasse la taille de fichier maximale de 5 Mo, vous êtes invité à envoyer vos commentaires dans un fichier FDF (Forms Data Format) de plus petite taille, que l'initiateur importera. Pour régler la limite, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Révision, puis tapez la valeur souhaitée dans la zone de texte Envoyer les commentaires sous forme de FDF pour les fichiers de plus de [x] Mo. Publication de commentaires émis par d'autres réviseurs Si vous participez à une révision, vous êtes susceptible de recevoir les commentaires d'autres réviseurs. Si l'un d'eux ne peut accéder au serveur de commentaires, il se peut qu'il vous envoie ses commentaires. Si vous avez demandé l'avis de personnes qui n'ont pas été invitées à la révision, il se peut qu'elles vous renvoient une copie du fichier PDF assortie de leurs commentaires. Si vous prenez ces commentaires à votre compte, vous pouvez les partager avec tous les participants à la révision. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF qui contient les commentaires. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur OK si vous êtes invité à publier les commentaires de ce réviseur. Les commentaires publiés s'affichent dans le fichier PDF. Votre nom s'affiche sur la barre de titre et celui de l'auteur dans le corps des commentaires, précédé de la mention « Pour le compte de ».UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 158 Collaboration • Cliquez sur Oui lorsque vous êtes invité à fusionner les commentaires ou cliquez sur Fusionner les commentaires sur la barre de message du document, puis sur Envoyer les commentaires. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Dans Acrobat, ouvrez une copie du fichier PDF, choisissez Commentaires > Importer des commentaires, puis sélectionnez un fichier contenant les commentaires de réviseurs. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Dans Reader, ouvrez une copie du fichier PDF, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Importer des commentaires, puis sélectionnez un fichier contant les commentaires de réviseurs. Ajoutez l'adresse électronique des autres réviseurs, le cas échéant, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Seuls les nouveaux commentaires et les commentaires modifiés sont publiés ou envoyés. Rejoindre une révision Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour rouvrir les fichiers PDF dans une révision active. Si vous avez reçu une pièce jointe PDF dans un message électronique et que vous ne l'avez pas enregistrée lors de sa première ouverture, ouvrezla à nouveau à partir de l'application de messagerie. Seuls les fichiers PDF que vous avez enregistrés figurent dans le dispositif de suivi. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Suivi des révisions. • Dans Reader, choisissez Affichage > Dispositif de suivi. 2 Dans le dispositif de suivi, cliquez deux fois sur le fichier PDF. 3 Ajoutez de nouveaux commentaires ou modifiez des commentaires existants. Pour supprimer un commentaire, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur Suppr. (Vous pouvez uniquement supprimer les commentaires dont vous êtes l'auteur.) Les commentaires supprimés sont éliminés du document PDF en ligne lors de la prochaine synchronisation des commentaires. Si vous supprimez des commentaires que vous aviez précédemment envoyés par messagerie électronique, ils sont toujours visibles dans le document de l'initiateur. 4 Pour soumettre vos nouveaux commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Publier les commentaires sur la barre de message du document. • Cliquez sur le bouton Envoyer les commentaires ou Envoyer et recevoir des commentaires de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Seuls les nouveaux commentaires et les commentaires modifiés sont publiés ou envoyés. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires » à la page 160UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 159 Collaboration Suivi et gestion des révisions de fichiers PDF Présentation du dispositif de suivi Le dispositif de suivi permet de gérer les révisions de documents et les formulaires diffusés, d'afficher l'état des serveurs de révisions et de formulaires et de contrôler les abonnements de diffusion Web (également appelés flux RSS). Pour ouvrir le dispositif de suivi dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Suivi des révisions. Pour ouvrir le dispositif de suivi dans Reader, choisissez Affichage > Dispositif de suivi. Utilisez le dispositif de suivi pour gérer les révisions, les formulaires et les abonnements de diffusion Web (flux RSS). Le panneau de gauche contient des liens vers les fichiers, les formulaires, les messages d'état du serveur et les flux RSS. Le panneau de droit affiche des informations détaillées sur l'élément sélectionné à gauche. Dernières mises à jour Le panneau Dernières mises à jour fournit un récapitulatif des dernières modifications apportées aux révisions partagées, aux fichiers de formulaires et aux serveurs. Si aucun formulaire ou fichier en révision n'est actif, ce panneau fournit des informations et des liens relatifs à l'initiation de révisions gérées, à la création de formulaires et à leur diffusion. Dans le panneau Dernières mises à jour, vous pouvez également activer ou désactiver les notifications de suivi au sein d'Acrobat et, sous Windows uniquement, dans la barre d'état du système. Révisions Le dispositif de suivi indique qui participe à la révision partagée et combien de commentaires ont été publiés. A partir du dispositif de suivi, vous pouvez rejoindre une révision et envoyer des messages électroniques aux participants. Si vous êtes l'initiateur d'une révision, vous pouvez ajouter ou modifier les échéances, ajouter des réviseurs, mettre fin à une révision et commencez une nouvelle révision avec des réviseurs existants. Le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi affiche tous les documents PDF faisant l'objet d'une révision gérée. Le panneau d'information, à droite, indique la date et l'heure d'envoi du fichier PDF et la liste des réviseurs invités. Les liens vers les fichiers PDF partagés fournissent d'autres informations, notamment l'échéance (si elle est définie) et le nombre de commentaires soumis par réviseur. La suppression d'un lien dans le dispositif de suivi ne supprime pas le fichier PDF correspondant.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 160 Collaboration Formulaires Utilisez la fonction de suivi pour gérer les formulaires que vous avez diffusés ou reçus. Le dispositif de suivi vous permet d'afficher et de modifier l'emplacement du fichier réponse et d'effectuer un suivi des réponses remises par les destinataires. Vous pouvez également ajouter d'autres destinataires, contacter les participants par courrier électronique et afficher les réponses obtenues pour un formulaire. Pour plus de détails, voir « A propos du suivi des formulaires » à la page 226. Etat du serveur Cette section indique l'état de tous les serveurs utilisés pour les révisions et la diffusion des formulaires. L'icône de coche en regard du nom du serveur indique que la dernière tentative de synchronisation a réussi. L'icône d'avertissement indique que la dernière tentative de synchronisation a échoué. Cet icône signale par exemple que le serveur est déconnecté du réseau, qu'il présente des problèmes d'écriture sur le disque, etc. Contactez l'administrateur réseau pour obtenir de l'aide. RSS Vous pouvez utiliser le dispositif de suivi pour vous abonner à des flux RSS, par exemple pour la diffusion d'actualités ou de chaînes musicales. Le format RSS est compatible avec les formats XML et RDF. Suivi de fichiers PDF révisés 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, développez le dossier approprié : Envoyées Répertorie les fichiers PDF concernés par les révisions que vous avez initiées. (Non disponible dans Reader.) Participé Contient les fichiers PDF concernés par les révisions que vous avez reçues. Les fichiers PDF ne figurent dans cette liste qu'après leur ouverture. Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF joint à un message électronique sans l'enregistrer, l'entrée correspondante est supprimée du dispositif de suivi lorsque vous fermez le fichier. Remarque : Les fichiers PDF répertoriés en gras indiquent une ou plusieurs des mises à jour suivantes : des commentaires que vous n'avez pas encore lus, la modification de l'échéance par l'initiateur de la révision ou l'ajout de nouveaux réviseurs. 2 Sélectionnez un fichier PDF. Les informations propres à la révision du fichier PDF sélectionné apparaissent dans le panneau de droite. Pour les révisions partagées, il s'agit des informations d'échéance, des réviseurs ayant rejoint la révision et du nombre de commentaires. Enregistrement d'un document PDF contenant des commentaires Vous pouvez enregistrer une copie du fichier PDF en cours de révision contenant tous les commentaires publiés par les réviseurs ou tous les commentaires que vous avez importés (fusionnés). Si le fichier PDF fait l'objet d'une révision partagée, vous pouvez en enregistrer une version d'archive. Cette copie n'est plus connectée au serveur de révisions ; vous pouvez donc en modifier les contenus et y ajouter des commentaires. Pour créer une copie d'un fichier PDF partagé afin de la diffuser à d'autres personnes, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous. Le fichier résultant inclut tous les commentaires publiés jusqu'à cet instant. Vous pouvez le déplacer, le copier ou le renommer sans que cela influe sur sa connexion à la révision ou au serveur de commentaires. ? Pour enregistrer une copie d'un fichier PDF en révision avec tous les commentaires, ouvrez le fichier, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • S'il s'agit d'une révision partagée, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous version d'archive ou cliquez sur le bouton Etat de la barre de message du document et choisissez Enregistrer sous version d'archive.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 161 Collaboration • S'il s'agit d'une révision par messagerie électronique, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous pour enregistrer une nouvelle copie du fichier PDF. Cette dernière version enregistrée devient alors le fichier PDF suivi. L'ancienne version devient la version d'archive. Invitation de réviseurs supplémentaires Si vous êtes l'initiateur de la révision, vous avez la possibilité d'inviter d'autres utilisateurs à la révision. Si vous êtes vous-même réviseur et souhaitez convier d'autres participants à la révision, demandez à l'initiateur de les inviter. Ainsi, l'initiateur peut effectuer un suivi automatique de tous les participants et être averti lorsque leurs commentaires reviennent. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF concerné, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des réviseurs dans le panneau de droite. 2 Spécifiez l'adresse électronique des réviseurs à ajouter, effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans le message, puis envoyez ce dernier. Les réviseurs supplémentaires apparaissent dans le panneau de droite du dispositif de suivi, avec les autres participants. Ajout ou modification d'une échéance L'initiateur peut ajouter ou modifier l'échéance d'une révision existante. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la révision ne présente aucune échéance, cliquez sur Ajouter une échéance. • Si la révision présente une échéance, cliquez sur Modifier l'échéance. 2 Cliquez sur Echéance de la révision, modifiez l'échéance si nécessaire, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Modifiez le cas échéant les destinataires du message électronique, l'objet et le message, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Fin d'une révision L'initiateur peut mettre fin à une révision existante. Lorsque la révision est terminée, les participants ne peuvent plus publier de commentaires sur le serveur. Vous pouvez par la suite modifier l'échéance de la révision afin de relancer le processus. ? Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Terminer la révision. Initiation d'une révision partagée à partir d'une révision existante avec les mêmes réviseurs 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez un fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Initier une nouvelle révision avec les mêmes réviseurs. 2 Suivez la procédure d'initiation d'une révision partagée. Voir aussi « Lancement d'une révision partagée » à la page 153UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 162 Collaboration Envoi d'un message Lors d'une révision, vous pouvez être amené à contacter d'autres réviseurs ou à leur envoyer un rappel d'échéance. 1 Dans le dispositif de suivi, sélectionnez le fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Envoyer un message aux réviseurs. 2 Le cas échéant, modifiez les zones A et Objet ainsi que le corps du message électronique, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Mise à jour d'un profil Vos commentaires vous identifient en tant qu'auteur en affichant votre nom (le nom que vous avez fourni lorsque vous avez rejoint la session de révision ou que vous l'avez lancée, ou votre nom d'utilisateur système). Vous pouvez modifier le nom de l'auteur et les autres informations de profil à tout moment. Dans ce cas, votre profil actualisé apparaît uniquement dans les nouveaux commentaires. Les commentaires existants ne sont pas modifiés. Mise à jour d'un profil de révision 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Commentaires. 2 Désactivez l'option Toujours utiliser l'identifiant de l'utilisateur dans le champ Auteur. 3 Sélectionnez Identité dans la liste de gauche. 4 Modifiez votre profil en vous assurant d'y inclure l'adresse électronique que vous utiliserez lors des révisions. Cliquez sur OK. Mise à jour d'un profil en vue d'une révision partagée 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Identité. 2 Modifiez votre profil en veillant à inclure une adresse électronique correcte, puis cliquez sur OK. Abonnement à des services de diffusion Internet 1 Cliquez sur le bouton RSS situé dans le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi. Remarque : Si le bouton RSS n'apparaît pas dans le dispositif de suivi, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences d'Acrobat, puis sélectionnez Dispositif de suivi. Activez l'option Activer les flux RSS dans le dispositif de suivi, puis cliquez sur OK. Fermez, puis rouvrez le dispositif de suivi. 2 Cliquez sur S'abonner à un flux RSS, puis entrez une adresse Web dans la zone prévue à cet effet. Préférences du dispositif de suivi Pour spécifiez les paramètres du dispositif de suivi, affichez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Dispositif de suivi sous Catégorie. Rechercher automatiquement les nouveaux commentaires et données de formulaire Spécifie la fréquence de synchronisation des commentaires. Pour désactiver la synchronisation automatique, faites glisser le curseur vers l'extrémité droite, jusqu'à ce que la valeur Jamais s'affiche. Suspendre la recherche de nouveaux commentaires et données de formulaire Spécifie le délai d'inactivité de la révision ou du formulaire après lequel la recherche de commentaires et de données doit être arrêtée. Supprimer des emplacements serveur personnalisés Pour supprimer un profil de serveur, sélectionnez-le dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Supprimer le profil du serveur. Notifications Spécifie à quels endroits les notifications de suivi s'affichent.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 163 Collaboration Activer les flux RSS dans le dispositif de suivi Si cette option est activée, la catégorie RSS apparaît dans le panneau gauche du dispositif de suivi et vous permet de vous abonner à des flux RSS. Commentaires Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Utilisez les outils de commentaire et d'annotation (Affichage > Barres d'outils > Commentaires et annotations) pour ajouter des commentaires. Les commentaires sont des notes et des dessins qui transmettent des idées ou un retour sur des fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez saisir un texte dans une note ou utiliser un outil de dessin pour ajouter une ligne, un cercle ou toute autre forme, puis saisir du texte dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée. Les outils de modification de texte permettent d'ajouter des annotations de révision qui signalent les modifications à apporter au document source. La plupart des outils de commentaire et d'annotation n'apparaissent sur la barre d'outils qu'une fois que vous les y avez ajoutés. Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans un navigateur alors que la révision partagée est achevée, les outils de commentaires sont indisponibles. La plupart des commentaires comportent deux parties : l'icône (ou annotation) affichée sur la page et le message de texte figurant dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note lorsque vous cliquez une ou deux fois sur l'icône ou que vous placez le pointeur dessus. Lorsque vous avez ajouté un commentaire, il reste sélectionné jusqu'à ce que vous cliquiez en un autre point sur la page. Le commentaire sélectionné est mis en évidence par un cadre bleu, qui vous aide à repérer l'annotation sur la page. Un objet filaire doté de poignées de sélection vous permet d'ajuster la taille et la forme du commentaire. Barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations A. Note B. Modifications de texte C. Outil et menu Tampon D. Outil Surligneur E. Outil Légende F. Zone de texte G. Outil Nuage H. Outil Flèche I. Outil Droite J. Outil Rectangle K. Outil Ellipse L. Outil Crayon M. Menu Afficher A B C D E F G H I J K L MUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 164 Collaboration Types de commentaires dans un fichier PDF A. Tampon B. Modification de texte C. Info-bulle de commentaire D. Note Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des outils de commentaire d'Acrobat, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Outils de commentaire : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-comments.html • Forum sur la collaboration et l'ajout de commentaires : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Vidéos sur l'utilisation des outils de commentaire : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4202_a9_fr • Annotation d'un fichier PDF : www.uwec.edu/Help/acrobat8.htm Voir aussi « Affichage et masquage d'éléments de la barre d'outils » à la page 27 « Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D » à la page 357 Affichage de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations n'est pas affichée par défaut, sauf si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF dans le cadre d'une révision gérée. ? Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Commentaires et annotations. Pour ajouter des outils à cette barre ou en supprimer, choisissez Outils > Personnaliser les barres d'outils. Sélection d'un outil de commentaire ou d'annotation ? Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > [outil]. Remarque : Lorsque vous avez saisi votre premier commentaire, l'outil est remplacé par l'outil Sélection. Ce dernier vous permet de déplacer, de redimensionner ou de modifier votre commentaire. (Les outils Crayon, Texte surligné et Ligne restent sélectionnés.) A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 165 Collaboration Conservation de la sélection d'un outil de commentaire Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs commentaires sans devoir sélectionner à nouveau l’outil. 1 Sélectionnez l'outil à utiliser (mais ne vous en servez pas tout de suite). 2 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. 3 Cochez la case Maintenir l’outil activé disponible. Préférences des commentaires Les préférences de commentaire ont un impact sur l'aspect des commentaires et des annotations dans les fichiers PDF, et sur la manière dont vous les consultez. Remarque : Puisque vous pouvez placer des commentaires à un endroit quelconque du cadre du document, vous devez parfois utiliser les fonctions de défilement ou de zoom arrière pour afficher les commentaires se trouvant en dehors de la page. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Commentaires. Police, Corps Sous Windows, vous pouvez définir la police et le corps du texte des fenêtres contextuelles de notes. Sous Mac OS, vous pouvez uniquement sélectionner l'une des options de police suivantes : Grande, Moyenne ou Petite. Ces options s'appliquent à tous les commentaires, nouveaux ou existants. Opacité de la fenêtre Détermine l'opacité de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note à l'aide d'une valeur comprise entre 1 et 100. Lorsque la fenêtre est ouverte sans être sélectionnée, une valeur d'opacité de 100 la rend opaque. Plus cette valeur baisse, plus la fenêtre est transparente. Activer les indicateurs de texte et les info-bulles Affiche une info-bulle indiquant le nom de l'auteur, l'état du commentaire et deux lignes de texte lorsque vous immobilisez le pointeur sur un commentaire assorti d'une note. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Imprimer les fenêtres et les notes Imprime les fenêtres contextuelles de note associées aux commentaires ainsi que les icônes de note et de pièces jointes (audio ou non) telles qu'elles apparaissent sur la page. Plutôt que de sélectionner cette option, vous pouvez imprimer le texte des commentaires selon différentes dispositions. Pour ce faire, choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis cliquez sur Résumer les commentaires. Afficher avec la souris les droites reliant les bulles de commentaire aux fenêtres associées Lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur une bulle de commentaire (texte surligné ou icône de note, par exemple), le connecteur ombré reliant le commentaire à la fenêtre associée s'affiche. Option sélectionnée par défaut. S'assurer que les fenêtres sont visibles lors du défilement du document Lorsque vous faites défiler un document PDF, les fenêtres contextuelles de note situées sur chaque page se déplacent de manière à rester visibles dans le panneau de visualisation. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Ouvrir automatiquement la fenêtre des commentaires pour les commentaires autres que les notes Affiche la fenêtre contextuelle de la note lorsque vous créez un commentaire à l'aide d'un outil de dessin, ou de l'outil Tampon ou Crayon. Masquer les fenêtres de commentaire lorsque la liste est affichée Permet de dégager l'écran lorsqu'une page comprend de nombreux commentaires. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Ouvrir automatiquement les fenêtres sur lesquelles le pointeur est placé Lorsque vous placez le pointeur de la souris sur tout commentaire (y compris les dessins et les tampons), la fenêtre contextuelle de la note s’ouvre. Toujours utiliser l’identifiant de l’utilisateur dans le champ Auteur Détermine le nom qui s'affiche dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note que vous créez. Lorsque cette option est activée, le nom utilisé est celui qui correspond à Identifiant dans le panneau Identité des préférences. Lorsqu'elle est désactivée, le nom utilisé par défaut est celui qui a UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 166 Collaboration été spécifié dans le champ Auteur de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de commentaire. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Créer des fenêtres alignées sur le bord du document Aligne les fenêtres de commentaire sur le bord droit de la fenêtre de document, indépendamment de l'emplacement des bulles de commentaire (icône de note ou texte surligné, par exemple). Si cette option est désactivée, la fenêtre contextuelle de la note s'affiche à côté de la bulle de commentaire. Option sélectionnée par défaut. Copier le texte entouré dans les fenêtres de dessin Copie le texte que vous encerclez à l'aide d'un outil de dessin dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée à l'annotation de dessin. Copier le texte sélectionné dans les fenêtres de texte surligné, de texte barré et de texte souligné Copie le texte sélectionné dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note associée à des commentaires de modification de texte, par exemple ceux créés avec l'outil Texte surligné. Modification de l'aspect des commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur et l'aspect des commentaires ou des annotations avant ou après les avoir créés. Vous pouvez ensuite définir cet aspect comme l'aspect par défaut pour cet outil. Remarque : Pour modifier l'apparence de votre nom dans les commentaires, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Commentaires, puis désactivez l'option Toujours utiliser l'identifiant de l'utilisateur dans le champ Auteur. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Barre des propriétés A. Icône de note sélectionnée B. Texte contextuel sélectionné Modification de l'aspect d'un commentaire et définition du nouvel aspect en tant qu'aspect par défaut 1 Une fois que vous avez créé un commentaire, choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options de la fenêtre contextuelle de note. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur Fermer : • Modifiez des options telles que la couleur et le type d'icône utilisé dans le panneau Aspect. Les options disponibles varient en fonction du type de commentaire sélectionné. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 167 Collaboration • Modifiez le nom de l'auteur et le sujet du commentaire dans le panneau Générales. • Cliquez sur l'onglet Historique des révisions pour afficher les modifications apportées à un commentaire au cours d'une révision. • Activez l'option Verrouillage au bas de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés pour empêcher la modification ou la suppression du commentaire. • Activez l'option Par défaut située au bas de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés afin d'appliquer ces propriétés à tous les commentaires du même type créés par la suite. Définition du verrou par défaut pour un outil 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur l'outil voulu avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés d'outils par défaut. Remarque : Si cet outil ne figure pas sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur la barre d'outils avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l'outil. 2 Définissez les propriétés voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Tous les commentaires que vous créez à l'aide de cet outil utilisent les propriétés que vous avez définies. Les commentaires existants et l'aspect du texte dans les fenêtres contextuelles de note ne sont pas modifiés. Ajout d'une note Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Le type de commentaire le plus courant se présente sous forme de note. Une note est accompagnée d'une icône qui apparaît sur la page et d'une fenêtre contextuelle contenant le texte de la note. Vous pouvez ajouter une note en tout point de la page ou de la zone de document. L'outil Note vous permet d'ajouter un message dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. A. Barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations B. Note C. Case de fermeture D. Menu Options E. Message Ajout d'un commentaire sous forme de note 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Ajouter une note. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Ajouter une note. • Sélectionnez l'outil Note de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, puis cliquez à l'emplacement où vous voulez insérer la note ou tracez une fenêtre de la taille voulue à l'aide de la souris. A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 168 Collaboration 2 Saisissez le texte voulu dans la fenêtre contextuelle de note. Il est également possible d'utiliser l'outil Sélection pour copier et coller dans la note du texte provenant d'un autre document PDF. Remarque : Si vous fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, votre texte y est conservé. Modification d'un commentaire sous forme de note 1 Cliquez une ou deux fois sur l'icône de la note. 2 Apportez les modifications requises : • Pour redimensionner la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, faites-en glisser le coin inférieur gauche ou droit. • Pour modifier le formatage du texte, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, sélectionnez le texte, puis définissez la propriété voulue sur la barre d'outils. Utilisez le panneau Commentaires de la boîte de dialogue Préférences pour modifier le corps de police, le comportement par défaut de la fenêtre et d'autres paramètres de création et d'affichage des commentaires. Le panneau Commentaires n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur le bouton de réduction situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note ou cliquez hors de cette fenêtre. Suppression d'une note 1 Sélectionnez l'outil Note , l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . 2 Sélectionnez l'icône de la note, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer deux fois sur l'icône de note, puis à choisir Supprimer dans le menu Options de la fenêtre contextuelle. Annotation du texte pour modification Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez utiliser les commentaires de modification de texte dans un document PDF afin d'indiquer les endroits du fichier source où le texte doit être modifié. Les commentaires de modification de texte ne modifient pas le texte en tant que tel dans le fichier PDF. Ils indiquent plutôt le texte qui doit être supprimé, inséré ou remplacé dans le fichier source à partir duquel le document PDF a été créé. Vous pouvez ajouter la plupart des types de modifications de texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte. Sélectionnez du texte avec l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris pour afficher le menu contenant les options de modification disponibles. Dans Acrobat pour Windows, vous pouvez exporter des modifications de texte directement vers le document Microsoft Word dont le fichier PDF est issu pour réviser le document source. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez créer le document PDF depuis Word à l'aide de PDFMaker. Avant d'exporter des modifications de texte, vérifiez que les commentaires d'insertion comportent le texte exact, y compris les espaces et les retours chariot, que vous souhaitez ajouter. Si l'annotation contient des indications supplémentaires (par exemple, « Ajouter le texte suivant : »), il faudra les supprimer manuellement du document Word. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 169 Collaboration Option Remplacer le texte A. Le texte sélectionné est barré. B. Le nouveau texte est inséré dans une fenêtre contextuelle liée. Voir aussi « Exportation de commentaires vers Word (Windows) » à la page 184 Remplacement de texte 1 Utilisez l'outil Sélection ou sélectionnez l'outil Modifications de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. 2 Sélectionnez le texte. 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Remplacer le texte, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte à insérer ou à ajouter. Il s'affiche dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. Tout texte sélectionné est barré. Un signe d’insertion s'affiche. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'une nouvelle marque de paragraphe, fermez la fenêtre sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion de paragraphe s'affiche. Ajout d'une note à une modification de texte 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une modification de texte. 2 Choisissez Ouvrir la fenêtre de note dans le menu contextuel. 3 Saisissez la note dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Affichage du texte inséré 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, sélectionnez l'outil Modifications de texte . 2 Cliquez entre les mots ou les caractères où vous voulez insérer du texte. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte à insérer. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'une nouvelle marque de paragraphe, appuyez sur Entrée, puis fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion de paragraphe s’affiche. • Pour indiquer l'ajout d'un espace, appuyez sur la barre d'espacement, puis fermez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note sans saisir de texte. Un signe d’insertion d’espace s’affiche. Pour indiquer des modifications de texte, vous pouvez également sélectionner du texte au moyen de l'outil Sélection , cliquer sur le texte sélectionné avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisir Remplacer le texte (commentaire). A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 170 Collaboration Suppression de texte inséré 1 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, choisissez l'outil Modifications de texte . 2 Sélectionnez le texte et appuyez sur Retour arrière ou Suppr, ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Barrer le texte dans le menu contextuel. Suppression d'une annotation de texte Si les annotations de texte sont empilées, effectuez la suppression à l'aide de la liste des commentaires. Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires dans le navigateur afin d'ouvrir la liste des commentaires, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. ? Sélectionnez l'annotation et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Surlignage, barrage ou soulignage du texte Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez vous servir des outils Texte surligné, Texte barré et Texte souligné pour ajouter des commentaires seuls ou des commentaires et des notes. Les outils Texte barré et Texte souligné ne figurent pas par défaut sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Pour ajouter une note associée à un surlignage ou barrer du texte en sélectionnant ce texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Modifications de texte : cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez l'option voulue dans le menu qui s'affiche. Cependant, si le texte à marquer est important, il est plus facile et plus rapide d'utiliser les outils spécialisés. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations, puis sélectionnez l'outil Texte surligné , Texte barré ou Texte surligné . Remarque : Pour appliquer plusieurs commentaires à l'aide de l'outil Texte barré ou Texte souligné, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés et sélectionnez Maintenir l'outil activé sur la barre des propriétés après avoir sélectionné l'outil. L'outil Texte surligné reste sélectionné après que vous avez saisi le premier commentaire. 2 Faites glisser la souris à partir du début du texte à annoter. Faites glisser la souris en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour tracer un rectangle autour du texte. Cette fonction est particulièrement pratique pour annoter le texte d'une colonne. 3 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter une note, cliquez deux fois sur l'annotation pour ajouter du texte dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note. Apposition d'un tampon sur un document Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L'application d'un tampon sur un document PDF est très similaire à l'application d'un tampon sur un document papier. Vous pouvez choisir un tampon prédéfini ou créer vos propres tampons. Les tampons dynamiques récupèrent sur votre système et dans le panneau Identité de la boîte de dialogue Préférences les informations permettant au tampon d'indiquer votre nom, la date et l'heure. L'outil Tampon apparaît par défaut sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 171 Collaboration Catégories de l'outil Tampon A. Tampon dynamique B. Tampon Signature C. Tampon standard D. Tampon personnalisé Ouvrez la palette Tampons ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. • Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'outil Tampon, puis choisissez Afficher la palette Tampons. Application d'un tampon 1 Sélectionnez un tampon en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur l'outil Tampon. Le tampon utilisé en dernier est activé. • Dans la palette Tampons, choisissez une catégorie dans le menu, puis sélectionnez un tampon. 2 Cliquez sur la page du document où vous voulez placer le tampon, ou tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille et son emplacement. 3 Si vous n’avez spécifié aucun nom dans les préférences d’identité, la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l’identité vous invite à le faire. Modification de l'emplacement ou de l'aspect d'un tampon ? A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Main, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer un tampon, faites-le glisser vers le nouvel emplacement. • Pour redimensionner un tampon, cliquez dessus, puis faites glisser une poignée d'angle. • Pour faire pivoter un tampon, cliquez dessus, déplacez le pointeur sur la poignée en haut du tampon, puis faites glisser l'outil lorsque l'icône de tampon en rotation s'affiche. • Pour supprimer un tampon, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Supprimer. • Pour modifier l'opacité du tampon ou la couleur de sa fenêtre contextuelle de note, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu contextuel. Sous l'onglet Aspect, définissez l'opacité ou la couleur. Déplacement d'un tampon vers la liste des favoris 1 A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Main, sélectionnez une annotation de tampon sur la page. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 172 Collaboration 2 Sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations, cliquez sur l'outil Tampon et choisissez Favoris > Ajouter le tampon actif aux Favoris. Création d'un tampon personnalisé Il est possible de créer des tampons personnalisés à partir de divers formats de fichiers, notamment PDF, JPEG, bitmap, Adobe® Illustrator® (AI), Adobe® Photoshop® (PSD) et AutoDesk AutoCAD (DWT, DXG). Dans Reader, la création d'un tampon personnalisé admet uniquement le format PDF. Remarque : Pour ajouter une seule occurrence d'une image à un fichier PDF, collez l'image dans le document. Les images collées présentent les mêmes caractéristiques que les autres commentaires Tampon ; chacune d'elles comporte une fenêtre contextuelle de note et des propriétés modifiables. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Cliquez sur Importer, puis sélectionnez le fichier. 3 Si le fichier comporte plusieurs pages, faites défiler le fichier jusqu'à la page voulue, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Choisissez une catégorie dans le menu ou saisissez un nouveau nom de catégorie, attribuez un nom au tampon personnalisé, puis cliquez sur OK. Modification du nom ou de la catégorie d'un tampon personnalisé 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Choisissez la catégorie de tampon, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier. 3 Modifiez la catégorie ou le nom du tampon, ou remplacez l’image, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression d'un tampon personnalisé Vous pouvez supprimer les tampons personnalisés que vous avez créés, mais pas les tampons prédéfinis. Lors de la suppression d'un tampon, celui-ci est retiré du menu de l'outil Tampon, mais le fichier correspondant n'est pas supprimé. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Choisissez la catégorie de tampon dans le menu, cliquez sur le tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer. Suppression d'une catégorie de tampon personnalisée 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Gérer les tampons. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Remarque : La suppression de tous les tampons d'une catégorie de tampon personnalisée supprime la catégorie. Ajout d'une ligne, d'une flèche ou d'une forme Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de dessin sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Sélectionnez un outil de dessin en fonction de l'effet recherché. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations, puis sélectionnez un outil de dessin : • Les outils Rectangle , Ellipse , Flèche et Ligne permettent de créer des formes simples.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 173 Collaboration • Les outils Nuage et Polygone permettent de créer des figures fermées à plusieurs côtés. L'outil Polyligne permet de créer des figures ouvertes à plusieurs côtés. • L'outil Crayon permet de tracer des dessins libres et l'outil Gomme , d'effacer les annotations faites au crayon. Pour préciser la largeur de trait, la couleur et d'autres propriétés avant le tracé, cliquez sur l'outil de dessin avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Propriétés, puis définissez les options souhaitées dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés. 2 Dessinez sur le fichier PDF : • Pour créer une forme de nuage ou de polygone, cliquez à l'emplacement du point de départ, déplacez le pointeur, puis cliquez en un autre point afin de créer chacun des côtés. Pour terminer le dessin de la figure, cliquez sur le point de départ ou cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Terminer dans le menu. Cliquez deux fois pour terminer une polyligne. • Pour tracer une ligne, une flèche ou un rectangle, faites glisser le pointeur sur la zone où l'annotation apparaîtra, ou cliquez à deux reprises : l'une pour créer le point de départ et la seconde pour créer le point de fin. • Pour tracer un carré ou un cercle, ou une ligne horizontale, verticale ou inclinée à 45 degrés, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée pendant l'opération. • Pour tracer des formes libres à l'aide de l'outil Crayon , faites glisser le curseur jusqu'au point de début du tracé. Vous pouvez relâcher le bouton de la souris, déplacer le pointeur, puis continuer le dessin. Pour effacer des parties du dessin, sélectionnez l'outil Gomme et faites-le glisser sur les zones du dessin à supprimer. 3 Pour modifier ou redimensionner l'annotation, sélectionnez-la et faites glisser l'une des poignées. 4 Pour ajouter à l'annotation une fenêtre contextuelle de note, sélectionnez l'outil Main puis cliquez deux fois sur l'annotation. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la case de fermeture de la fenêtre contextuelle de la note. Une icône de note apparaît à droite de l'annotation pour signaler la présence de texte dans la fenêtre contextuelle. Remarque : Pour supprimer une annotation de dessin, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Association et dissociation d'annotations Vous avez la possibilité d'associer des annotations afin que vos commentaires ne constituent qu'un seul commentaire. L'association des annotations peut être temporaire, le temps de toutes les déplacer ou de modifier leurs propriétés, au lieu de procéder note par note. L’association permet également de distinguer vos annotations de celles des autres réviseurs dans le cadre de la révision d’un document. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas associer les annotations Modifications de texte. Association d'annotations 1 Sélectionnez une annotation avec l'outil Sélection ou Main. 2 Cliquez sur les annotations à associer tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Commande enfoncée. 3 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Associer. Dissociation d'annotations ? Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Dissocier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 174 Collaboration Ajout de commentaires dans une zone de texte ou une légende Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Zone de texte pour créer une zone qui contient du texte. Vous pouvez le positionner en n'importe quel point de la page et ajuster sa taille. Contrairement à une fenêtre contextuelle de note, une zone de texte ne se ferme pas et reste donc visible sur la page du document. Pour ajouter une zone de texte, vous pouvez également coller du texte copié dans le document PDF. La police et la taille du texte dépendent des paramètres par défaut du système. Remarque : Il est possible d'annoter du texte japonais, chinois et coréen à l'aide de l'outil Zone de texte, mais les fichiers de ressources des langues asiatiques doivent être installés sur l'ordinateur. Les zones de texte acceptent uniquement le texte horizontal. Vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Légende pour créer une zone de texte de légende. Les légendes s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque vous voulez isoler (sans la masquer) une zone particulière du document. Les zones de légende se composent de trois parties : une zone de texte, une ligne coudée et une fin de ligne. Vous pouvez redimensionner chaque partie en faisant glisser une poignée. La ligne coudée ne peut être redimensionnée que dans une seule direction : les lignes coudées horizontales ne peuvent être redimensionnées qu'à l'horizontale et les lignes coudées verticales qu'à la verticale. La zone de texte s'étend à la verticale au fur et à mesure de la saisie de telle manière que tout le texte soit visible. Vous pouvez déplacer la barre de la zone de texte seule ou la déplacer avec la fin de ligne. La zone de texte se déplace autour d'un point d'ancrage fixe (la flèche à l'extrémité de la fin de ligne) créé lorsque vous cliquez pour la première fois dans le fichier PDF. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur et l'aspect de la zone de texte, et ajouter des flèches ou des filets de conduite à la fin de ligne. Ajout d'une zone de texte 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Zone de texte . 2 Cliquez dans le document PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 175 Collaboration 3 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, puis sélectionnez les attributs de couleur, d'alignement et de police du texte. 4 Saisissez le texte. Le texte revient automatiquement à la ligne lorsqu'il atteint le bord droit de la zone. 5 (Facultatif) Pour apporter des modifications supplémentaires à la zone de texte de légende : • A l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Zone de texte, cliquez sur un bord de la zone de texte pour la sélectionner, puis faites glisser un coin pour la redimensionner. Utilisez la barre des propriétés pour modifier les options de contour et de fond. • Cliquez deux fois sur la zone de texte pour modifier le texte ou ses propriétés. Faites glisser le pointeur pour sélectionner du texte, puis activez des options de la barre des propriétés. 6 Pour supprimer la zone de texte, sélectionnez-la, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Vous pouvez également coller un bloc de texte en le sélectionnant et en le copiant dans n'importe quelle application, en activant l'outil Main dans Acrobat, puis en choisissant Edition > Coller. Ajout d'une légende 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Outil Légende . 2 Cliquez une fois pour définir l'emplacement du point de fin, puis cliquez à nouveau pour définir l'emplacement de la zone de texte. 3 Choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés, puis sélectionnez les attributs de couleur, d'alignement et de police du texte. 4 Saisissez le texte. Le texte revient automatiquement à la ligne lorsqu'il atteint le bord droit de la zone. 5 (Facultatif) Pour apporter des modifications supplémentaires à la zone de texte de légende : • Pour redimensionner la légende, sélectionnez-la, puis faites glisser l'une des poignées qui s'affichent. • Pour déplacer la zone de texte, cliquez à l'intérieur, puis faites-la glisser. • Pour déplacer toute la légende, cliquez sur la fin de ligne ou sur un bord de la zone de texte, puis faites-la glisser. • Pour modifier la couleur, l'opacité ou les caractéristiques de la ligne, activez l'outil Sélection et cliquez sur la légende avec le bouton droit de la souris, choisissez Propriétés, puis sélectionnez les options de votre choix. Ajout d'un commentaire audio Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L’outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio permet d’ajouter un son au format WAV ou AIFF préenregistré en tant que commentaire, ou d’enregistrer et de placer un commentaire sonore dans un document. Les pièces jointes audio figurent dans la liste des commentaires et peuvent être lues sur toutes les plates-formes. Cependant, le matériel et les logiciels de lecture appropriés doivent être installés. Par défaut, l'outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio ne figure pas sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Cependant, vous pouvez l'ajouter en choisissant Outils > Personnaliser les outils. Voir aussi « Modification de l'aspect des commentaires » à la page 166UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 176 Collaboration Ajout d'un commentaire audio préenregistré 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Enregistrer le commentaire audio, puis cliquez sur le fichier PDF où vous souhaitez insérer le commentaire audio. 2 Cliquez sur Parcourir (Windows) ou Sélectionner (Mac OS) et sélectionnez le fichier à ajouter. 3 (Facultatif) Pour écouter le commentaire audio, cliquez sur le bouton Lire . Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Arrêter, puis sur OK. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Enregistrement d'un commentaire audio 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Outil Enregistrer le commentaire audio puis cliquez sur le fichier PDF où vous souhaitez insérer le commentaire audio. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer puis parlez dans le micro. Lorsque vous avez terminé l'enregistrement, cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter , puis sur OK. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, spécifiez les options voulues, puis cliquez sur OK. Ajout de commentaires dans une pièce jointe Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. L'outil Fichier joint comme commentaire permet d'incorporer un fichier à un emplacement précis d'un document PDF afin que le destinataire puisse l'ouvrir et le visualiser. L'ajout d'un fichier joint comme commentaire permet de faire référence à des documents trop longs pour être collés dans une fenêtre contextuelle de note ou une zone de texte. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, le fichier incorporé le suit automatiquement. Pour afficher une pièce jointe, l'application nécessaire à son ouverture doit être installée sur l'ordinateur du lecteur. Important : Pour joindre un fichier à des fins de révision, veillez à utiliser l'outil Fichier joint comme commentaire disponible sur la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Les pièces jointes au niveau du document à l'aide de l'icône en forme de trombone (outil Joindre un fichier) de la barre d'outils Fichier ne font pas partie du suivi des commentaires dans une procédure de révision. Vous risquez donc de perdre les commentaires insérés de cette façon. 1 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Fichier joint comme commentaire . 2 Cliquez dans le document PDF à l'endroit où vous voulez placer la pièce jointe. 3 Sélectionnez le fichier à joindre, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Si vous joignez un fichier PDF, vous pouvez mettre en évidence les zones d'intérêt dans ce fichier à l'aide des commentaires. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du fichier joint, sélectionnez les paramètres s'appliquant à l'icône du fichier figurant dans le document PDF. Les commentaires joints apparaissent dans le panneau Pièces jointes. Un numéro de page indique leur emplacement. Remarque : Pour supprimer la pièce jointe, cliquez sur l'icône du commentaire joint avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Supprimer. Collage d'images en tant que commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 177 Collaboration Il est possible d'ajouter une image à un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon. Vous pouvez copier la plupart des format d'image à partir d'applications de dessin et de retouche d'image, telles qu'Adobe Photoshop ou Adobe Illustrator. Pour ajouter plusieurs exemplaires de l'image à des documents PDF, créez un tampon personnalisé à l'aide de cette image. Remarque : L'outil Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon n'est disponible qu'après avoir copié une image. 1 Copiez l'image en utilisant l'une des méthodes suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Outils > Outils de base > Instantané , puis sélectionnez une image dans un fichier PDF. • Dans une autre application, sélectionnez une image et choisissez Edition > Copier. 2 Ouvrez un document PDF. 3 Choisissez Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Tampons > Image du Presse-papiers collée comme tampon. 4 Cliquez dans le document PDF à l'emplacement où doit apparaître l'image. 5 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer l'image, faites-la glisser. • Pour redimensionner l'image, sélectionnez-la puis faites glisser une de ses poignées. Appuyez sur la touche Maj pour redimensionner l'image tout en conservant ses proportions d'origine. • Pour modifier les propriétés de l'image, cliquez avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Propriétés. • Pour supprimer les propriétés de l'image, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit, puis choisissez Supprimer. Voir aussi « Copie d'une image » à la page 144 Gestion des commentaires Affichage des commentaires La liste des commentaires présente l'ensemble des commentaires ajoutés au fichier PDF, ainsi qu'une barre d'outils assurant des fonctions communes telles que le tri, le filtrage, la suppression et la réponse aux commentaires. Le bouton Commentaires du navigateur permet d'ouvrir la liste des commentaires. Affichage de la liste des commentaires 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Afficher la liste des commentaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 178 Collaboration • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Afficher la liste des commentaires. • Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires . 2 A l'aide des options situées dans la partie supérieure de la liste des commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Développez ou réduisez les commentaires. Cliquez sur Développer tout ou Réduire tout dans la barre d'outils de la liste des commentaires. Pour développer ou réduire un commentaire, cliquez sur le signe plus ou moins qui le précède. • Parcourez les commentaires. Cliquez sur un commentaire dans la liste ou cliquez sur le bouton Suivant ou Précédent pour passer au commentaire suivant ou précédent. (Ces boutons ne sont disponibles que si un commentaire est sélectionné.) La page sur laquelle se trouve le commentaire sélectionné s'affiche dans le panneau de visualisation et le commentaire sélectionné apparaît. Pour atteindre une page contenant un autre commentaire, il vous suffit de cliquer sur ce commentaire dans la liste. Tri des commentaires Vous pouvez trier les commentaires de la liste par auteur, page, type, date, couleur, état activé ou désactivé, ou état par auteur. Dans la série des réponses, seul le premier message est trié. Les messages de réponse sont répertoriés dans la même catégorie que le premier message de la série. 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires. 2 Choisissez une option dans le menu de tri de la liste des commentaires. Affichage ou masquage de commentaires Vous pouvez choisir de masquer ou d'afficher les commentaires suivant leur type, le réviseur (auteur), leur état ou la présence d'une coche. Le masquage des commentaires s'appelle également filtrage. Le filtrage a une incidence sur l'affichage des commentaires aussi bien dans la fenêtre du document que dans la liste des commentaires. Lorsque vous répertoriez ou imprimez les commentaires, vous pouvez décider d'inclure ou non les commentaires masqués. Lorsque vous masquez un commentaire de note accompagné d'une réponse, toutes les autres réponses de la série sont également masquées. Remarque : Dans le cadre d'une révision par messagerie électronique, les commentaires masqués ne sont pas inclus lors de l'envoi des commentaires à l'initiateur. ? Dans le menu Afficher de la liste des commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher tous les commentaires, choisissez Afficher tous les commentaires. • Pour masquer tous les commentaires, choisissez Masquer tous les commentaires. • Pour filtrer les commentaires, choisissez les catégories à afficher. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez uniquement afficher les notes que vous n'avez pas cochées, choisissez Afficher par type > Notes pour que seules les notes apparaissent, puis choisissez Afficher par état coché > Non coché afin que seules les notes non cochées s'affichent. • Pour inverser un filtre, choisissez l'option Tous les pour chaque catégorie masquée. Par exemple, si vous avez affiché uniquement les commentaires d'un réviseur spécifique, choisissez Affichage > Afficher par réviseur > Tous les réviseurs. Réponse aux commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 179 Collaboration La fonction de réponse aux commentaires est particulièrement utile dans les révisions partagées, lorsque les participants peuvent lire les commentaires des uns et des autres. L'initiateur de la révision peut aussi s'en servir pour tenir les réviseurs informés du traitement de leurs suggestions. Si un ou plusieurs réviseurs répondent à un message, le lot de réponses est appelé série. Tous les messages d'une série apparaissent dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note et dans la liste des commentaires. Les réponses sont décalées sous le commentaire d'origine. Le nombre de réponses reçues pour un commentaire s'affiche dans un cadre lorsque vous pointez sur le commentaire. Les réponses figurent directement sous le commentaire, dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note et dans la liste des commentaires. A. En-tête de la réponse B. Menu Options C. Option de réponse dans le menu Options Réponse dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note 1 Ouvrez la fenêtre contextuelle de la note du commentaire. 2 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Répondre. 3 Saisissez votre réponse dans la zone affichée. Réponse dans la liste des commentaires 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires . 2 Sélectionnez un commentaire dans la liste des commentaires. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Répondre . 4 Saisissez votre réponse dans la zone affichée. Suppression d'une réponse Si vous supprimez un commentaire accompagné d’une réponse, seul le commentaire est supprimé. Toutes les réponses demeurent dans le fichier PDF, mais ne font plus partie d'aucune série. Il peut s'avérer difficile de les consulter au sein du fichier, car elles sont empilées. Affichez-les dans la liste des commentaires. ? Dans la fenêtre contextuelle de la note, cliquez sur la réponse avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Supprimer cette réponse. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 180 Collaboration Définition d'un état ou d'une coche Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Les états et les coches sont utiles pour effectuer le suivi des commentaires que vous avez lus ou sur lesquels une intervention est requise. Sous Windows, l'état ou la coche permet de désigner les commentaires à exporter vers un document Word. En configurant l'état de la révision, vous pouvez afficher ou masquer un groupe de commentaires et laisser les participants à la révision libres de leur traitement du commentaire. Une fois l'état de la révision spécifié, vous ne pouvez pas le masquer dans le commentaire, dans la liste des commentaires, même si vous définissez l'état de la révision sur Aucun. Les coches servent uniquement à votre usage personnel et ne s'affichent pas lorsque d'autres utilisateurs affichent le document PDF, à moins que vous ne modifiiez l'état des commentaires. Définition d'un état 1 Sélectionnez le commentaire voulu dans la liste, cliquez sur Définir l'état , puis choisissez une option. L'état de la révision apparaît sous le commentaire, avec le nom de la personne qui a défini cet état. Si un autre réviseur définit l'état de révision du même commentaire, les deux états ainsi que le nom des deux réviseurs s'affichent dans la liste. 2 Pour afficher l'historique des modifications d'un commentaire, cliquez sur l'icône de la note, l'annotation ou la barre de titre d'une fenêtre contextuelle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. Cliquez sur l'onglet Historique des révisions. Marquage des commentaires à l'aide d'une coche ? Dans la liste des commentaires, cliquez sur la case située en regard d'un commentaire pour y apposer une coche . Impression d'un résumé des commentaires Le résumé de commentaires permet de répertorier de façon pratique tous les commentaires associés à un document PDF. Lorsque vous résumez des commentaires, vous pouvez soit créer un document PDF imprimable contenant les commentaires, soit imprimer directement le résumé. Ce résumé n'est ni associé, ni lié au document PDF dont les commentaires sont issus.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 181 Collaboration Options de mise en page pour résumés de commentaires A. Document et commentaires avec connecteurs sur page unique B. Document et commentaires avec connecteurs sur pages distinctes C. Commentaires seuls D. Document et commentaires avec numéros d'ordre Par défaut, Acrobat imprime les documents PDF ainsi que tous les tampons qui y ont été apposés, le cas échéant. Pour maîtriser au maximum l'impression des commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Imprimer avec le résumé des commentaires. 1 Filtrez les commentaires pour afficher ceux qui vous intéressent dans le résumé. (Dans la liste des commentaires, cliquez sur le bouton Afficher et choisissez les catégories de commentaires voulues.) 2 Pour maîtriser au maximum l'impression des commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Imprimer avec le résumé des commentaires. Une autre solution consiste à créer un fichier PDF des commentaires distinct. Pour ce faire, choisissez Commentaires > Résumer les commentaires. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options de résumé, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez la disposition du document et des commentaires. Les options disponibles dépendent de la disposition. • Choisissez la façon dont vous souhaitez trier les commentaires. • Indiquez une étendue et précisez si les pages sans commentaires doivent être incluses. • Indiquez si vous souhaitez inclure tous les commentaires dans le résumé ou uniquement les commentaires actuellement visibles. 4 Cliquez sur Imprimer le résumé des commentaires ou sur Créer un fichier PDF du résumé. Recherche d'un commentaire Localisez un commentaire dans la liste en recherchant un mot ou une expression spécifique. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires du navigateur afin d'afficher la liste des commentaires. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Rechercher dans les commentaires de la barre d'outils de la liste des commentaires. 3 Dans la fenêtre Recherche, spécifiez le terme ou l'expression que vous souhaitez rechercher, puis cliquez sur Rechercher dans les commentaires. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 182 Collaboration Voir aussi « Présentation des fonctions de recherche » à la page 332 Suppression d'un commentaire Vous ne pouvez supprimer ni les commentaires des autres réviseurs dans le cadre d'une révision partagée ni les commentaires verrouillés. Si vous ajoutez des commentaires à un fichier PDF, puis publiez ces commentaires, vous ne pouvez plus les supprimer. Pour supprimer tous les commentaires d'un document PDF, utilisez la fonction Examiner le document. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Reader. Voir aussi « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 262 Suppression d'un commentaire ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez le commentaire et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. • Dans la liste des commentaires, sélectionnez les commentaires à supprimer, puis cliquez sur l'icône de la corbeille . Remarque : Avant d'appuyer sur la touche Suppr, assurez-vous que le commentaire est sélectionné. Déverrouillage d'un commentaire 1 Cliquez sur le commentaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Désactivez l'option Verrouillage. Vérification orthographique de l'ensemble du texte des commentaires Vous avez la possibilité de vérifier l’orthographe du texte saisi dans une fenêtre de commentaire ou dans un champ de formulaire. En revanche, il est impossible de vérifier l'orthographe du texte sous-jacent du document PDF. 1 Choisissez Edition > Vérifier l'orthographe > Dans les commentaires, champs et texte modifiable. Si le document PDF est ouvert dans un navigateur Web, assurez-vous que la barre d’outils de modification soit ouverte et cliquez sur le bouton Orthographe des commentaires et des champs de formulaire . 2 Cliquez sur Commencer. 3 Pour modifier un mot, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Modifiez le mot sélectionné. Pour annuler la modification, cliquez sur le bouton d'annulation et pour l'accepter, cliquez sur Modifier. • Cliquez deux fois sur l'une des suggestions. • Sélectionnez une suggestion, puis cliquez sur Remplacer. Cliquez sur Remplacer tout pour remplacer chaque occurrence du mot non reconnu par la suggestion sélectionnée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 183 Collaboration Importation et exportation de commentaires Importer les commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Les commentaires peuvent être importés depuis un document PDF. Vous pouvez également importer des commentaires provenant d'un fichier FDF (Form Data Format) ou XFDF, ce dernier étant un fichier FDF XML. Il est impossible d'ouvrir et d'afficher des fichiers FDF ou XFDF tels quels. 1 Dans le document devant recevoir les commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Importer les commentaires. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Importer les commentaires. 2 Choisissez Tous les fichiers (*.*) dans le menu. Si vous connaissez le format de fichier des commentaires que vous souhaitez importer, sélectionnez-le. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur le nom du document contenant les commentaires. Les commentaires sont importés au même emplacement que dans le fichier d'origine. Si les commentaires ne s'affichent pas à leur place, il est probable que les documents PDF source et cible diffèrent. Par exemple, si vous importez des commentaires à partir d'un document de 10 pages dans un document qui n'en contient que deux, seuls les commentaires des deux premières pages sont importés. Exportation de commentaires Remarque : Dans Reader, les outils de commentaire sont uniquement disponibles pour les fichiers PDF dans lesquels la fonction de commentaires a été spécifiquement activée. Les fichiers PDF soumis à une procédure de révision incluent habituellement des droits de commentaire. Si vous ajoutez des commentaires à un fichier PDF qui n'est pas concerné par une révision gérée, vous devrez exporter vos commentaires pour les envoyer ou importer ceux que vous avez reçus. (Les fichiers PDF concernés par une procédure de révision gérée incluent des options particulières qui permettent d'envoyer ou de publier vos commentaires au lieu de les exporter.) Lorsque vous exportez des commentaires, vous créez un fichier FDF (Form Data Format) contenant uniquement les commentaires. La taille du fichier FDF est donc inférieure à celle du fichier PDF. Vous ou un autre réviseur pouvez alors importer les commentaires du fichier FDF dans le document PDF d'origine. Exportation de commentaires vers un fichier de données 1 Dans le fichier PDF, procédez de l'une des manières suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. 2 Attribuez un nom au fichier et choisissez Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) ou Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) en tant que type de fichier. 3 Indiquez l'emplacement du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 184 Collaboration Exportation des commentaires sélectionnés Remarque : L'exportation de commentaires sélectionnés n'est pas disponible dans Reader. 1 Dans la liste des commentaires, sélectionnez les commentaires que vous souhaitez exporter. 2 Dans le menu Options de la liste des commentaires, choisissez Exporter des commentaires. 3 Attribuez un nom au fichier et choisissez Acrobat FDF Files (*.fdf) ou Acrobat XFDF Files (*.xfdf) en tant que type de fichier. 4 Indiquez l'emplacement du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Exportation de commentaires vers Word (Windows) Dans certains cas, les réviseurs insèrent des commentaires dans un document PDF créé à partir d'un document Microsoft Word. Vous pouvez réviser le document Word d'origine en exportant ces commentaires à partir du PDF. Par exemple, le texte inséré, barré ou remplacé à l'aide des outils de modification de texte dans le document PDF peut être supprimé ou transféré directement dans le document Word source. Le formatage des commentaires (par exemple, texte en gras) n'est pas conservé pendant ce processus. Vous devez l'ajouter manuellement au document Word. Pour réviser un document Word à l'aide de commentaires, créez un fichier PDF balisé à partir du document Word. Avant de transférer les modifications de texte du fichier PDF, supprimez tous les mots ou les informations supplémentaires et fusionnez-les en un seul PDF (si vous avez des commentaires de plusieurs réviseurs). Si vous prévoyez d'importer des commentaires plusieurs fois, faites une copie du document Word au préalable. Dans le cas contraire, l'importation des commentaires pourrait échouer. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers Word. • Dans Word, ouvrez le document source, puis choisissez Commentaires d'Acrobat > Importer les commentaires d'Acrobat. Dans Word 2007, cliquez sur Acrobat, puis sélectionnez Commentaires Acrobat > Importer des commentaires d'Acrobat. 2 Lisez les instructions et cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer des commentaires d'Acrobat, sélectionnez les fichiers PDF et Word, choisissez les options souhaitées parmi les suivantes, puis cliquez sur Continuer : Tous les commentaires Permet d'importer tous les commentaires. Commentaires signalés par une coche Importe uniquement les commentaires signalés par une coche. Modifications de texte uniquement : Insertions, suppressions et remplacements Importe uniquement les commentaires que vous avez ajoutés en utilisant les commandes de modification de texte de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Appliquer des filtres personnalisés aux commentaires Importe uniquement les commentaires que vous désignez par leur auteur, leur type ou leur état. Activer le suivi des modifications avant l'importation Affiche les modifications apportées par les commentaires importés dans Word. 4 (Facultatif) Si vous importez des modifications de texte, cliquez sur Intégrer les modifications de texte dans la boîte de dialogue Importation réussie afin d'examiner et d'appliquer chaque modification individuellement. Dans chacune des modifications, sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Appliquer Apporte la modification dans le document et supprimer la bulle de commentaire. Si un commentaire semble vide, intégrez-le au cas où il s'agirait d'un espace ou d'un saut de paragraphe.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 185 Collaboration Ignorer Rejette la modification et supprime la bulle de commentaire. Suivant Passe directement à la modification de texte suivante. Les modifications de texte ignorées ou non intégrées apparaissent sous forme de bulles dans le document Word. Appliquer partout Restant(s) Intègre toutes les modifications de texte restantes et supprime les bulles de commentaire. Rétablir Annule la dernière modification de texte, notamment les modifications manuelles. 5 Pour supprimer les bulles de commentaires du document Word : • Cliquez sur la bulle de commentaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer le commentaire. • Choisissez Commentaires d'Acrobat > Supprimer tous les commentaires du document. Dans Word 2007, cette option se trouve sur le ruban Acrobat. Flux de tâches d'approbation A propos des flux de tâches d'approbation Acrobat (pour le Chinois traditionnel, Chinois simplifié, japonais ou coréen uniquement), vous offre la possibilité d'adresser à des tiers des documents PDF à des fins d'approbation en les envoyant sous forme de pièces jointes à un message électronique. Lorsque les participants à la révision ouvrent une demande d'approbation d'un document PDF dans Acrobat (toutes les langues), ils peuvent l'approuver en y apposant un tampon d'identité numérique. Ils peuvent ensuite transmettre ce document à d'autres approbateurs ou le renvoyer à l'initiateur et à d'autres participants si nécessaire. L'initiateur de la procédure peut assurer le suivi en choisissant d'être notifié chaque fois que le document PDF est approuvé. Le flux de tâches s'achève dès lors que le dernier participant a émis son approbation finale. En cas de rejet d'un document PDF, le flux de tâches d'approbation doit être relancé. Remarque : Si vous utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour initier le flux de tâches, vous pouvez inviter des utilisateurs de Reader 9 (ou version ultérieure) à participer en activant la fonction de commentaires dans le document PDF. L'assistant configure des flux de tâches d'approbation (à gauche) tandis que la palette Tampons propose des tampons conçus pour approuver les documents (à droite). UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 186 Collaboration Envoi d'un fichier PDF pour approbation Lorsque vous envoyez un fichier PDF par courrier électronique (chinois traditionnel, chinois simplifié, japonais et coréen uniquement), les destinataires reçoivent le fichier PDF en tant que pièce jointe. Lorsque ces personnes ouvrent le fichier PDF joint, elles peuvent y apposer l'un des tampons d'identité numériques de la palette Tampons, puis effectuer la sélection appropriée sur la barre de message du document. Pour envoyer un document PDF pour approbation, utilisez l'assistant approprié dans Acrobat. Cet assistant présente des instructions à l'écran qui facilitent la procédure : invitation des approbateurs, personnalisation des instructions et envoi du document PDF. Avant de lancer un flux de tâches d'approbation, assurez-vous que votre application de messagerie est configurée pour fonctionner avec Acrobat. 1 Pour initier un flux de tâches d'approbation, choisissez Commentaires > Envoyer par messagerie pour approbation. 2 Si un message vous y invite, saisissez votre adresse électronique dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité. 3 Indiquez un fichier PDF, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Dans la zone A, indiquez l'adresse électronique du premier approbateur. 5 Si vous souhaitez être tenu informé de l'état d'approbation de chaque participant, configurez ces options. 6 (Facultatif) Tapez des instructions supplémentaires destinées au premier approbateur en haut de votre message électronique. Seuls le message et les instructions par défaut seront adressés aux approbateurs suivants. Remarque : Le message d'invitation contient les instructions visant à aider les participants à suivre le processus d'approbation. Evitez de modifier ou de supprimer du texte. 7 Cliquez sur Envoyer une invitation. Participation au flux de tâches d'approbation Si vous êtes invité à participer à un flux de tâches d'approbation, un message électronique contenant des instructions détaillées concernant l'approbation du document PDF joint vous sera envoyé. Lorsque vous ouvrez le document PDF, la palette Tampons et la barre de message du document s'affichent en haut du document PDF. Si votre version d'Acrobat est antérieure à la version 7.0, vous êtes invité à télécharger la dernière version de Reader. Pour approuver le document, vous sélectionnez ensuite le tampon d'identité numérique de votre choix parmi ceux que vous propose la palette Tampons. Un tampon d'identité numérique contient les informations d'identité que vous fournissez (nom, titre, société, adresse électronique, etc.). Il peut tenir lieu de signature. Lorsque vous appliquez un tampon, il fait partie intégrante du contenu de la page du document. Bien que vous puissiez supprimer l'un des tampons que vous avez apposés pendant la procédure d'approbation, vous ne pouvez plus le faire une fois la procédure terminée (le tampon est verrouillé). Vous ne pouvez ni déplacer ni supprimer des tampons appliqués par les autres participants à la procédure. Vous pouvez également rejeter des documents non conformes aux normes que vous avez fixées. Outre l'ajout de tampons numériques, vous pouvez apposer d'autres types de commentaires sur un document PDF, notamment des notes, des modifications de texte, des tampons personnalisés et des pièces jointes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 187 Collaboration Voir aussi « Création d'un tampon personnalisé » à la page 172 « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 163 « Sélection d'une application de messagerie pour les révisions » à la page 152 Approbation d'un document PDF 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF joint au message électronique de l'invitation à la procédure d'approbation. Remarque : Si vous n’avez pas ajouté vos informations d’identité au tampon, vous y êtes invité. 2 Sélectionnez un tampon dans la palette Tampons. (Pour afficher tous les tampons, faites défiler la liste ou redimensionnez la fenêtre en faisant glisser l'un de ses coins.) 3 Cliquez sur le document pour apposer votre tampon d'approbation. Remarque : Pour supprimer un tampon d'identité numérique que vous venez d'apposer, sélectionnez-le et appuyez sur Suppr. Si vous sélectionnez Imprimer, Enregistrer une copie ou Envoyer par messagerie lors de la procédure d'approbation, vous ne pouvez pas supprimer le tampon. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour envoyer le document à l'approbateur suivant, cliquez sur le bouton Approuver sur la barre de message du document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer à l'approbateur suivant, saisissez l'adresse électronique de la personne dans la zone A, ajoutez les adresses des autres destinataires, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. • Pour achever la procédure d'approbation, cliquez sur le bouton Approbation finale sur la barre de message du document. Dans la boîte de dialogue Terminer l'approbation finale, indiquez si une notification d'approbation doit être envoyée à partir du menu Méthode d'approbation finale. Si vous envoyez une notification, saisissez une adresse électronique dans la zone A, ajoutez les adresses des autres destinataires, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Si vous n'envoyez pas de notification, cliquez sur Terminer. Si l'option Avertir l'initiateur de l'état de l'approbation par messagerie électronique est sélectionnée, une notification par messagerie distincte s'affiche, adressée à l'initiateur. Cliquez sur Envoyer pour transmettre la notification. Les documents PDF intégrés à un flux de tâches d'approbation sont accompagnés d'instructions et d'outils. 5 Enregistrez le document PDF. Important : Si vous utilisez le bouton de barre d'outils Envoyer par messagerie afin d'envoyer le document PDF, ce dernier cesse de faire partie du flux de tâches. Conséquence : Le destinataire du message ne bénéficiera plus des options d'approbation.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 188 Collaboration Rejet d'un document PDF Si le document PDF reçu dans le cadre d'une demande d'approbation ne répond pas aux conditions requises pour l'approbation, servez-vous des options disponibles sur la barre de message du document pour rejeter le document et le renvoyer à l'initiateur. En cas de rejet d'un document PDF, le flux de tâches d'approbation doit être relancé. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF joint au message électronique de l'invitation à la procédure d'approbation. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Rejeter sur la barre de message du document. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Rejeter le document et envoyer une notification, saisissez l'adresse électronique de l'initiateur dans la zone A. Si l'option Avertir l'initiateur de l'état de l'approbation par messagerie électronique est activée, un message distinct est adressé à l'initiateur. Cliquez sur Envoyer. 4 Cliquez sur Envoyer lorsque le message s'affiche. Ajout ou modification d'informations d'identité pour un tampon numérique 1 Dans le menu Tampons, choisissez Afficher la palette Tampons. 2 Dans la palette Tampons, sélectionnez Tampons d'identité numériques, cliquez sur votre tampon avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Modifier l'identité. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'identité, renseignez ou modifiez les champs Nom, Titre, Société, Service et Adresse électronique, puis cliquez sur Terminer. Vous pouvez également modifier vos informations d'identité à partir de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Sous Catégories, sélectionnez Identité.189 Chapitre 7 : Formulaires Le remplissage de formulaires est possible à partir d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard ou du logiciel gratuit Adobe Reader®. Vous pouvez créer des formulaires statiques ou interactifs dans Acrobat ou Adobe LiveCycle® Designer ES (fournis avec Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour Microsoft® Windows®). Les formulaires interactifs rationalisent la procédure de remplissage de formulaires et de recueil d'informations. Formulaires - Concepts de base A propos des formulaires Vous pouvez créer des formulaires de deux façons différentes dans Acrobat : • En convertissant un document électronique existant (Adobe PDF, Microsoft Word ou Excel, par exemple) au format de formulaire PDF. Remarque : Sous Mac OS, la seule façon de créer un formulaire est d'utiliser un fichier PDF existant. • En numérisant un document papier en vue de le convertir au format PDF. • Création d'un formulaire entièrement nouveau ou d'après un modèle à l'aide de LiveCycle Designer ES. Cela est possible uniquement si vous disposez de Designer ES, d'Acrobat Professional ou d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows. Remarque : Vous pouvez créer ou modifier des formulaires XML dans Adobe Designer, mais pas dans Acrobat. Après avoir converti un document existant au format PDF, vous pouvez ajouter des champs pour en faire un formulaire interactif. Un formulaire interactif peut être rempli sur un ordinateur et envoyé via une connexion Internet ou un réseau local. Pour plus d'informations sur les formulaires, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Mode de disposition des champs de formulaire sur une grille : acrobat.timhuff.net/ • Aide générale sur les formulaires PDF : www.uwec.edu/Help/acrobat8.htm • Conversion d'un document PDF en formulaire remplissable : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-pdf-documentform.html • Articles, didacticiels et conseils sur les formulaires : http://acrobatusers.com/ • Galerie de formulaires : http://acrobatusers.com/gallery/forms_gallery/UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 190 Formulaires A propos de LiveCycle Designer ES Designer ES est une interface graphique de conception de formulaires reposant sur un ensemble de fonctions et de commandes avancées. Une application autonome, Designer ES, est fournie avec Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows. Il est possible également de l'acheter séparément. Designer ES est très pratique pour créer des formulaires dynamiques prévus pour contenir des quantités variables de données ou pour autoriser des interactions avec les utilisateurs. Vous pourriez, par exemple, concevoir un formulaire dans le but de calculer le prix de vente des actions. Au fur et à mesure que les utilisateurs indiqueraient les noms et les quantités des actions dans le champ Vente, celui-ci s'ajusterait automatiquement de façon à accepter toutes les entrées utilisateur. Dès que l'utilisateur entre la quantité à vendre, le champ Montant est automatiquement mis à jour. Designer ES vous permet également de créer des formulaires prenant en charge des données et schémas propres à un secteur d'activité au format XML . Si vous disposez d'Acrobat 8 ou d'une version ultérieure, vous pouvez envoyer des formulaires PDF à plusieurs destinataires à l'aide de l'assistant de diffusion de Designer ES. Cet assistant est accessible à partir du menu Fichier dans Designer ES. Il certifie l'identité de l'émetteur du formulaire et chiffre les données que les destinataires transmettent. Des droits d'utilisation sont, en outre, ajoutés au formulaire pour que les utilisateurs puissent enregistrer ce dernier dans Adobe Reader. Designer ES permet d'étendre les fonctionnalités de base proposées dans Acrobat. Un formulaire conçu avec Designer ES peut contenir, par exemple, des champs Objet d'image qui facilitent l'ajout d'illustrations. Faites appel à Designer ES lorsque vous envisagez d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Créer des formulaires entièrement nouveaux ou basés sur les présentations prédéfinies (des modèles proposés) à modifier et à personnaliser. • Créer des formulaires dynamiques. • Ajouter des illustrations telles que des photographies. • Ajouter des collections de codes à barres. • Créer des formulaires dans des formats susceptibles d'être convertis par Designer au format HTML, notamment si vous souhaitez publier le formulaire interactif sur un site Web pour permettre aux utilisateurs de le remplir et de le renvoyer depuis un navigateur. • Intégrer des formulaires PDF à des flux de production existants en établissant une liaison entre ces formulaires et des schémas XML, des fichiers de données XML, des bases de données et des services Web. • Utiliser des objets de script. Vous devez utiliser Designer pour modifier tout formulaire ayant été ouvert et enregistré dans Designer, même si le formulaire a été à l'origine créé dans Acrobat. Préférences de formulaires Pour garder le contrôle des divers aspects de votre interaction avec les champs de formulaire, définissez les préférences de formulaires. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Formulaires dans le panneau gauche. Les préférences de formulaires sont divisées en trois sections : Générales, Couleur de surbrillance et Remplissage automatique.. Remarque : Les préférences de formulaires permettent de déterminer la façon dont l'application gère les formulaires que vous manipulez. Ces préférences ne sont pas enregistrées avec les formulaires PDF. Voir aussi « Remplissage automatique d'un formulaire » à la page 229UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 191 Formulaires Générales Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs Effectue automatiquement tous les calculs des valeurs de champs lors de la saisie par l'utilisateur. Remarque : Le paramètre de cette option s'applique uniquement à votre session en cours. Afficher le rectangle de mise au point Indique le champ de formulaire actif. Afficher l'indicateur de dépassement des champs de texte Affiche un signe plus (+) dans les champs de texte qui dépassent les limites spécifiées lors de la création du champ. Toujours masquer la barre de message des documents de formulaires Masque par défaut la barre de message du document à chaque ouverture d'un formulaire PDF dans Adobe Reader à moins qu'elle ne contienne un bouton d'envoi du formulaire. Dans ce cas, il est impossible de masquer la barre de message. Afficher un aperçu des champs lors de la création ou de la modification Affiche l'aspect d'un champ de formulaire lorsque vous créez ou modifiez un formulaire. Gérer les paramètres de code à barres Ouvre une boîte de dialogue présentant une liste d'éléments de code à barres (notamment Nom du jeu de paramètres, Symbologie et l'état d'intégration pour chaque élément). Inclut les boutons Créer, Modifier, Supprimer, Importer et Exporter pour la manipulation de jeux de paramètres nouveaux ou sélectionnés. Couleur de surbrillance Afficher la couleur lors du passage sur les champs Affiche un contour noir autour d'un champ lorsque vous immobilisez le pointeur dessus. Couleur de sélection des champs Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur permettant de choisir la couleur des champs de formulaire mis en surbrillance. La mise en surbrillance est visible lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance sur la barre de message du document. Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur permettant de choisir la couleur du contour des champs de formulaire à remplir obligatoirement. La bordure des champs de formulaire obligatoires apparaît seulement lorsque le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance est activé ou après que vous avez essayé d'envoyer le formulaire. Remplissage automatique Menu Remplissage automatique Affiche trois options pour le remplissage automatique : Désactivé, Standard ou Avancé. Mémoriser les données numériques Propose les valeurs numériques préalablement saisies dès que vous saisissez le premier caractère identique dans un champ similaire. Lorsqu'elle est désélectionnée, l'option de remplissage automatique n'effectue des propositions que pour les entrées de texte. (Disponible uniquement avec la sélection Standard ou Avancé.) Modifier la liste Affiche les entrées actuelles stockées dans la mémoire du remplissage automatique. Vous pouvez sélectionner et supprimer les entrées que vous ne souhaitez pas conserver pour d'autres formulaires. (Cette option n'est pas disponible si aucune entrée n'est en mémoire.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 192 Formulaires Création et diffusion de formulaires A propos des éléments de formulaire Une fois que vous avez déterminé les informations que vous souhaitez obtenir des utilisateurs, vous pouvez associer les types d'informations aux éléments de formulaire appropriés. • Pour les données numériques et de texte devant être saisies par l'utilisateur, choisissez d'utiliser des champs de texte ou des listes déroulantes. • Pour un choix unique parmi un nombre limité d'options, utilisez les boutons radio, une zone de liste ou une liste déroulante. • Pour un nombre limité d'options parmi lesquelles l'utilisateur peut sélectionner aucun, un ou plusieurs éléments, utilisez les cases à cocher, ou une zone de liste et définissez les propriétés de champs de formulaire pour autoriser les sélections multiples. • Pour des actions, notamment l'ouverture d'un fichier, la lecture d'un son ou d'une vidéo, l'envoi de données de formulaire et autres, utilisez des boutons. • Pour renforcer la protection du document, ajoutez un champ de signature numérique permettant de vérifier l'identité de l'utilisateur. Vous pouvez également effectuer des modifications de propriétés de champs de formulaire individuelles, afin que les utilisateurs puissent remplir le formulaire PDF sans difficulté et sans erreur. Un formulaire PDF créé dans Acrobat peut contenir les types d'éléments suivants : Codes à barres Codez les données de champs sélectionnés et affichez-les sous forme de motif visuel pouvant être interprété par un logiciel ou un matériel de décodage (disponible séparément). Boutons Ils permettent d'apporter des modifications depuis l'ordinateur de l'utilisateur : ouverture d'un fichier, lecture d'un fichier son ou envoi de données à un serveur Web. Ils peuvent être personnalisés avec des images, du texte et des modifications visuelles déclenchées par des actions de souris. Remarque : Les boutons d'actions sont différents des boutons radio qui représentent des choix de données effectués par l'utilisateur. Cases à cocher Elles proposent de sélectionner ou de désélectionner des éléments individuels. Si le formulaire contient plusieurs cases à cocher, l'utilisateur peut en général en sélectionner autant qu'il le souhaite. Listes déroulantes Elles permettent à l'utilisateur de choisir un élément dans un menu déroulant ou de saisir une valeur. Champ de signature numérique Il permet d'apposer une signature électronique numérique sur un document PDF. Barre de message du document Elle affiche des informations générées automatiquement relatives au formulaire PDF et, le cas échéant, des boutons d'action et d'autres options. Elle indique aux utilisateurs Reader les droits d'utilisation dont ils disposent pour le formulaire. Elle précise également si un formulaire est certifié ou comporte des champs de signature et permet aux utilisateurs de mettre les champs en surbrillance. Si le formulaire ne contient pas de bouton d’envoi, un bouton Envoyer le formulaire est ajouté à la barre de message du document pour que les utilisateurs soient en mesure de transmettre le formulaire. Remarque : Si les destinataires du formulaire utilisent des versions antérieures d'Acrobat ou de Reader, la barre de message du document risque de ne pas être visible ou de contenir d'autres informations. Zones de liste Elle affichent une liste d'options que l'utilisateur peut sélectionner. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 193 Formulaires Remarque : Vous pouvez définir une propriété de champ de formulaire permettant à l'utilisateur de sélectionner plusieurs éléments dans la liste en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Boutons radio Ils présentent un groupe de choix parmi lesquels l'utilisateur peut sélectionner un seul élément. Tous les boutons radio portant le même nom fonctionnent comme un groupe. Champs de texte Ils permettent de saisir du texte (nom, adresse, numéro de téléphone, etc.). Formulaire Adobe Acrobat PDF A. Champ de signature numérique B. Liste déroulante C. Champs de texte D. Barre de message du document de formulaire E. Cases à cocher F. Boutons radio G. Zone de liste H. Boutons Voir aussi « Définition des boutons d'action » à la page 216 « Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader » à la page 194 Création d'un formulaire Vous pouvez convertir un document électronique existant (un document Word, Excel ou PDF, par exemple) ou numériser un document papier au format PDF, puis ajouter des champs interactifs au formulaire. G F E D H A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 194 Formulaires Remarque : Lorsque vous convertissez un document en formulaire Acrobat, Acrobat détecte automatiquement les champs de formulaire du document. Examinez attentivement le document pour vérifier si Acrobat a repéré correctement les champs. Vous êtes libre de créer des formulaires en vous basant sur un document électronique existant (un document Word, Excel ou PDF, par exemple) ou de numériser un formulaire papier au format PDF. Pour créer un formulaire entièrement nouveau ou d'après un modèle, vous devez disposer d'Acrobat Professional, d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour Windows ou de Designer ES. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations ci-après, puis suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran. • Pour convertir un document électronique existant (Word ou PDF, par exemple) au format PDF, choisissez Document électronique existant. Remarque : Si vous ne souhaitez pas utiliser l'assistant, il suffit d'ouvrir le fichier et de choisir Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire pour convertir un document PDF au format Acrobat. • Pour numériser un document papier au format PDF, choisissez Formulaire papier. Remarque : Pour créer un formulaire Acrobat entièrement nouveau, commencez par créer un fichier PDF vierge en choisissant Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page vierge, puis sélectionnez Lancer l'assistant de création de formulaire pour convertir le document PDF en formulaire Acrobat. Pour des didacticiels et des vidéos sur la création de formulaires, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Simplification de la création de formulaire : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4203_a9_fr • Conversion d'un document PDF en formulaire remplissable : www.layersmagazine.com/acrobat-pdf-documentform.html • Création de formulaires Acrobat : http://movielibrary.lynda.com/html/modPage.asp?id=540 • Formulaires – Processus intégral : http://tv.adobe.com/#vi+f1495v1626 Autorisation d'enregistrer les données de formulaire pour les utilisateurs de Reader En général, les utilisateurs de Reader ne peuvent pas enregistrer les formulaires remplis. Toutefois, vous pouvez étendre les droits aux utilisateurs de Reader à cet effet. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF simple ou prévisualisez un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Etendre le remplissage de formulaire et l'enregistrement dans Adobe Reader. Ces droits étendus s'appliquent uniquement au formulaire PDF actif. Si vous créez un autre formulaire PDF, vous devez renouveler cette opération si vous souhaitez autoriser les utilisateurs de Reader d'enregistrer des copies remplies du formulaire PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 195 Formulaires Accessibilité des formulaires Adobe PDF Vous pouvez rendre les champs de formulaire accessibles aux utilisateurs atteints de déficiences visuelles ou motrices en ajoutant au fichier PDF des balises et une structure appropriée. En outre, vous pouvez utiliser la propriété d’infobulle des champs de formulaire pour fournir à l’utilisateur des informations ou instructions relatives au champ. Par exemple, utilisez cette fonction pour qu’un lecteur d’écran annonce « Votre nom ». En cas d'absence d'info-bulle, le lecteur d'écran annonce uniquement le type du champ de formulaire. 1 Le cas échéant, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire et assurez-vous que l'outil Objet est sélectionné. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un champ de formulaire sélectionné pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. 3 Dans le panneau Général, entrez une description dans la zone réservée à l'info-bulle. Remarque : Si vous créez votre formulaire à l'aide de Designer ES, vous devez exécuter le lecteur d'écran avant d'ouvrir le formulaire dans Acrobat afin d'afficher des balises d'accessibilité avec une disposition souple dans Acrobat. Voir aussi « Fonctions d'accessibilité » à la page 278 Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires Le langage JavaScript permet de créer des pages Web interactives. Adobe a amélioré les fonctionnalités JavaScript de sorte que vous puissiez intégrer plus facilement des fonctions interactives dans les formulaires PDF. Parmi les utilisations répandues des scripts JavaScript dans les formulaires Acrobat, citons le formatage, le calcul et la validation de données, ainsi que l'attribution d'une action. Vous pouvez également configurer des formulaires Adobe PDF de sorte qu’ils se connectent directement à des bases de données via ODBC (sous Windows uniquement). Pour plus de détails, consultez le manuel JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Remarque : Lors de la création de formulaires dynamiques, gardez à l'esprit qu'Adobe Reader ne prend pas en charge les scripts JavaScript personnalisé. Pour que le formulaire fonctionne correctement dans Reader, il faut ajouter au document PDF des droits d'utilisation supplémentaires. Vous pouvez utiliser le kit SDK d'Acrobat pour personnaliser l'application. Pour plus de détails sur ce kit SDK, voir le site Web Acrobat Developer Center à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_devcenter_fr (en anglais uniquement). Création de champs de formulaire Dans Acrobat, vous créez un champ de formulaire en choisissant un des outils prévus à cet effet. Pour chaque type de champ, vous pouvez définir une série d'options à partir de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du champ de formulaire. Remarque : Sous Windows, vous pouvez utiliser Designer ES pour modifier les formulaires créés dans Acrobat. Cependant, Acrobat ne peut pas modifier les champs de formulaire qui ont été ouverts et enregistrés dans Designer ES. Voir aussi « Comportement des champs de formulaire » à la page 205 Création d'un champ de formulaire 1 Après avoir converti votre document au format PDF, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 196 Formulaires 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur Ajouter un champ, puis sélectionnez un outil. • Choisissez Formulaires > Outils de formulaire, puis sélectionnez un outil de formulaire. • Cliquez sur la page à l'aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez un outil. Votre curseur prend la forme d'un viseur. 3 Sur la page, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter le champ afin de créer un champ aux dimensions par défaut. Pour créer un champ de dimensions personnalisées, tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille. 4 Dans la zone Nom du champ, saisissez le nom du champ et indiquez si ce champ doit être obligatoirement renseigné ou non. Choisissez un nom pertinent pour faciliter le tri et la collecte des données. 5 Pour afficher la boîte de dialogue des propriétés et modifier les autres propriétés du champ, cliquez sur Afficher toutes les propriétés. Remarque : Si vous avez sélectionné l'option Maintenir l'outil activé sur la barre d'outils Formulaires (visible après que vous avez choisi Ajouter un champ > Afficher les outils sur la barre), la zone Nom du champ n'est pas visible après l'ajout du champ. Il suffit alors de cliquer sur la page pour ajouter un nouveau champ au formulaire. Pour quitter ce mode, appuyez sur la touche Echap ou cliquez sur le bouton Objet . Pour changer les propriétés du champ, cliquez deux fois sur le champ. 6 Pour tester votre formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu . La prévisualisation du formulaire permet non seulement de vérifier votre formulaire, mais aussi de savoir exactement comment il se présente aux yeux des destinataires du formulaire. Lorsque vous êtes en mode d'aperçu, vous pouvez cliquer sur le bouton Modifier la disposition pour revenir en mode d'édition. Disposition des champs de formulaire sur une grille Utilisez les grilles pour vous aider à positionner avec précision les champs de formulaire sur une page. Il est possible de définir l'espacement, la couleur et la position d'une grille. Vous avez également la possibilité d'aligner le contour d'un champ de formulaire sur la grille lorsque vous modifiez le champ. Les lignes de la grille ne s'impriment pas. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Grille. 2 Pour accrocher les champs de formulaire aux lignes de la grille les plus proches lors de leur création ou de leur déplacement, choisissez Affichage > Accrocher à la grille. Copie d'un champ de formulaire Vous pouvez créer des copies d'un champ sur une seule page d'un formulaire PDF. Rien ne vous empêche également de copier et coller le champ sur d'autres pages. Lorsque vous créez des doublons de champs de formulaire, les duplicatas du champ d'origine sont insérés sur une ou plusieurs pages. Ils figurent toujours au même emplacement sur chaque page, comme l'original. Vous pouvez faire glisser les copies et duplicatas à différents emplacements d'une page, mais non d'une page à une autre. Les copies et les duplicatas créés reprennent le même nom que le champ de formulaire d'origine. Un numéro s'ajoute au nom des champs copiés ou dupliqués à l'aide de la commande Insérer plusieurs champs. Tous les champs de formulaire dotés du même nom de base partagent les mêmes données utilisateur et propriétés d'action. Par conséquent, lorsqu'un utilisateur ajoute ou modifie une réponse dans une copie ou un duplicata, cette réponse s'affiche dans tous les champs portant le même nom de base. Si vous changez les propriétés d'une des multiples versions d'un champ de formulaire dont le nom de base est identique, ces modifications n'ont un impact que sur cette copie du champ. La seule exception à cette règle est la modification d'une liste d'actions lorsque le déclencheur n'est pas la souris.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 197 Formulaires Si vous souhaitez éviter que les modifications d'une copie ou d'un duplicata de champ de formulaire ne se répercutent sur l'ensemble des champs dotés du même nom de base, changez le nom des nouveaux champs de formulaire. Création d'une copie de champ de formulaire ? Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour copier le champ de formulaire au centre de l'affichage actuel, choisissez Edition > Copier, puis Edition > Coller. • Pour copier le champ de formulaire et le déplacer ailleurs sur la page, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant que vous le faites glisser. Pour limiter le mouvement à un déplacement vertical ou horizontal, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj en même temps. Création de multiples copies d'un champ de formulaire sur une page 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le champ du formulaire avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Insérer plusieurs champs. • Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire, puis choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Insérer plusieurs champs. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer plusieurs copies de champs, sélectionnez Aperçu, puis déplacez la boîte de dialogue de manière à pouvoir visualiser le champ d'origine et les copies sur la page du formulaire. 3 Effectuez les sélections voulues : • Pour modifier le nombre de copies à créer, saisissez des valeurs différentes pour les options Copier les champs verticalement et Copier les champs horizontalement. • Pour modifier les dimensions du champ initial et de toutes les copies, saisissez des valeurs différentes pour les options Modifier la largeur et Modifier la hauteur. • Pour déplacer le champ initial et toutes les copies, cliquez sur les boutons En haut, En bas, A gauche et A droite. Duplication d'un champ de formulaire sur plusieurs pages 1 Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire à dupliquer. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Dupliquer. Remarque : La commande Dupliquer n'est pas disponible pour les formulaires ne contenant qu'une seule page. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour dupliquer le champ de formulaire sur toutes les pages, sélectionnez l'option Tout, puis cliquez sur OK. • Pour dupliquer le champ de formulaire sur une étendue de pages, cliquez sur le bouton De, puis indiquez les pages de début et de fin sur lesquelles le champ doit apparaître. Remarque : L'inclusion ou l'exclusion de la page sur laquelle le champ d'origine apparaît n'a aucune incidence sur la procédure de duplication. L'inclusion de cette page ne crée pas une deuxième copie du champ sur l'original et son exclusion ne supprime pas le champ d'origine.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 198 Formulaires Sélection de plusieurs champs de formulaire La sélection de plusieurs champs de formulaire est la première étape à effectuer avant d'envisager toute autre tâche (création de copies, alignement et ajustement de l'espace entre les champs de formulaire, etc.). ? Si besoin est, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour sélectionner tous les champs de formulaire quel que soit leur type, choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout. • Pour sélectionner une plage de champs de formulaire, cliquez sur le premier champ, puis cliquez sur le dernier en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. Vous sélectionnez ainsi tous les champs situés entre les deux champs choisis. • Pour sélectionner des champs de formulaire individuels dans différentes parties de la page PDF, cliquez sur chaque champ en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • Pour sélectionner tous les champs de formulaire dans une zone de la page, utilisez l'outil Objet pour dessiner un cadre de sélection autour de la zone. • Pour désélectionner un champ de formulaire individuel, cliquez dessus en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. Le champ mis en surbrillance (en bleu foncé) et dont les poignées apparaissent autour de sa bordure représente l'ancrage. Lorsque vous sélectionnez plusieurs champs de formulaire en cliquant dessus, le dernier champ sélectionné est l'ancrage. Lorsque vous utilisez un cadre de sélection, le premier champ de formulaire créé constitue l'ancrage. Si vous cliquez sur un champ en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour désélectionner l'ancrage, le champ de formulaire en haut à gauche de la sélection devient le nouvel ancrage. Redimensionnement et organisation de champs de formulaire Une fois que vous avez créé des champs de formulaire, vous pouvez changer leur position, les redimensionner ou les déplacer pour donner à la page un aspect plus professionnel. Pour ajuster la disposition des champs de formulaire, assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition (choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire). Redimensionnement d'un champ de formulaire 1 Activez l'outil Objet. 2 Sélectionnez le champ de formulaire à redimensionner. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour redimensionner le champ manuellement, sélectionnez-le en cliquant dessus, puis faites glisser une poignée de la bordure. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et faites glisser une poignée d'angle pour conserver les proportions du champ de formulaire. • Pour redimensionner le champ d'un pixel, appuyez sur Ctrl+touche fléchée. Pour le redimensionner de 10 pixels, appuyez sur Ctrl+Maj+touche fléchée. Redimensionnement de plusieurs champs en fonction du champ sélectionné 1 Sélectionnez tous les champs de formulaire à redimensionner. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ de formulaire auquel doivent correspondre les autres champs de formulaire sélectionnés. Choisissez Définir la même taille pour tous les champs, puis sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Hauteur Permet d'ajuster les valeurs de hauteur sans changer celles de largeur. Largeur Permet d'ajuster les valeurs de largeur sans changer celles de hauteur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 199 Formulaires Les deux Permet d'ajuster les largeurs et hauteurs. Déplacement de champs de formulaire individuels Vous pouvez déplacer des champs de formulaire par un simple glissement. Pour une plus grande précision obtenue en moins de temps, vous pouvez utiliser des fonctions spéciales qui permettent d'aligner les champs les uns avec les autres, d'ajuster l'espace entre les champs et de les centrer sur la page. 1 L'outil Objet vous permet de sélectionner un ou plusieurs champs de formulaire à déplacer. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer les champs vers un emplacement approximatif, faites glisser les champs de formulaire sélectionnés vers le nouvel emplacement. Pour limiter le mouvement à un déplacement vertical ou horizontal, commencez à faire glisser le champ, puis appuyez sur la touche Maj tout en continuant à faire glisser la sélection. • Pour déplacer les champs horizontalement ou verticalement par petits incréments, appuyez sur les touches fléchées pour déplacer lentement le champ vers la position voulue. • Pour déplacer le champ de formulaire vers le centre exact d'une page, choisissez Edition > Couper, accédez à la page voulue, puis choisissez Edition > Coller. Remarque : Les champs sont placés au centre de la page lors du premier collage uniquement. Tout champ collé par la suite est décalé par rapport au champ précédemment collé. Alignement et centrage de multiples champs de formulaire 1 Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire à aligner. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ par rapport auquel aligner les autres. Choisissez Alignement, répartition ou centrage, puis procédez de la façon suivante : • Pour aligner une colonne de champs, choisissez Aligner à gauche, Aligner à droite ou Aligner verticalement. Cela permet d'aligner respectivement les champs par rapport au bord gauche, au bord droit ou à l'axe vertical (centre) du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. • Pour aligner une rangée de champs, choisissez Aligner en haut, Aligner en bas ou Aligner horizontalement. Cela permet d'aligner respectivement les champs par rapport au bord supérieur, au bord inférieur ou à l'axe horizontal (centre) du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. • Pour centrer les champs, choisissez Centrer verticalement, Centrer horizontalement ou Centrer dans les deux sens. Remarque : Lorsque vous cliquez sur l'un des champs sélectionnés avec le bouton droit de la souris, les poignées apparaissent sur le contour du champ pour indiquer qu'il s'agit du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. Les commandes du menu Aligner servent à déplacer les autres champs de formulaire sélectionnés afin de les aligner sur les bords du champ de formulaire d'ancrage. Ajustement de l'espace entre les champs de formulaire Dans le contexte de la disposition des champs de formulaire sur une page, la répartition a pour effet de donner à un groupe de champs de formulaire un espacement uniforme, mesuré à partir du centre des champs adjacents. Les options de répartition ont priorité sur l'option Accrocher à la grille. 1 Sélectionnez les champs de formulaire à ajuster. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 200 Formulaires 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur l'un des champs sélectionnés, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour répartir les champs uniformément entre le champ supérieur et le champ inférieur, choisissez Aligner, Répartir ou Centrer > Répartir verticalement. • Pour répartir les champs uniformément entre le champ le plus à gauche et celui le plus à droite, choisissez Aligner, Répartir ou Centrer > Répartir horizontalement. Remarque : Le bouton Diffuser le formulaire sur la barre d'outils Formulaires a une fonction toute autre : utilisez ce bouton pour envoyer votre formulaire à des tiers, qui le rempliront et vous renverront les données. Suppression d'un champ de formulaire 1 Dans le panneau Champs ou la vue de la page, sélectionnez les champs de formulaire que vous souhaitez supprimer. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Suppr ou choisissez Edition > Supprimer. A propos des codes à barres Les champs de code à barres convertissent les entrées de formulaire utilisateur en format visuel pouvant être numérisé, interprété et incorporé dans une base de données. Les codes à barres s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque les utilisateurs envoient le formulaire par courrier ou par télécopie. Dans ces cas de figure, les codes à barres permettent de gagner du temps, évitant les erreurs de saisie pouvant survenir lorsque les réponses sont lues et enregistrées manuellement. Le flux de production type à suivre pour créer un code à barres comprend les phases suivantes : • L'auteur du formulaire vérifie que l'option Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs est activée dans les préférences de formulaires, puis il crée le formulaire dans Acrobat en configurant tous les autres champs comme à l'ordinaire. • L'auteur du formulaire ajoute le champ de code à barres au formulaire, en configurant le code à barres de manière à capturer les données souhaitées. • L'auteur du formulaire active le formulaire à l'attention des utilisateurs de Reader (en autorisant ou non ces derniers à enregistrer une copie du document rempli ou en définissant des champs de codes à barres). • L'auteur du formulaire diffuse le formulaire aux utilisateurs. • Les utilisateurs remplissent le formulaire sur leur ordinateur, puis ils l'envoient par voie électronique ou en impriment un exemplaire qu'ils transmettent à l'expéditeur. • Les données de codes à barres reçues sont interprétées de l'une des manières suivantes avant d'être éventuellement vérifiées, triées et utilisées par le destinataire du formulaire : Formulaires envoyés par télécopie à un serveur Le destinataire de l'envoi peut utiliser Adobe Acrobat Capture® pour recueillir les images TIFF du serveur de télécopie et les placer dans un dossier de contrôle du décodeur Adobe LiveCycle Barcoded Forms s'il possède ces produits. Formulaires envoyés sur papier Le destinataire de l'envoi peut numériser des formulaires papier, puis utiliser une application telle que le décodeur LiveCycle Barcoded Forms afin de décoder les codes à barres inclus dans les formulaires. Remarque : Acrobat Capture et le décodeur Adobe LiveCycle Barcoded Forms sont des produits autonomes destinés aux flux de production des entreprises ; ils ne sont pas vendus avec Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 201 Formulaires Conseils pour la conception de codes à barres L'utilisation des codes à barres et l'espace nécessaire peuvent avoir un impact sur leur conception et leur placement. A titre d'exemple, la taille du code à barres peut limiter la quantité de données susceptibles d'être codées. Pour optimiser les résultats, suivez ces recommandations. • Placez le code à barres sur la page en veillant à ce qu'il ne soit pas plié lorsque le formulaire est inséré dans une enveloppe. En outre, éloignez-le suffisamment des bords de la page pour qu'il ne soit pas coupé au cours de l'impression ou de l'envoi par télécopie. • Placez-le à un endroit facilement identifiable et numérisable. Avec un scanner à main, évitez d'utiliser des codes à barres d'une taille supérieure à dix cm (quatre pouces). Il est préférable de créer des codes à barres étroits en hauteur dans ce cas. Evitez également de compresser le contenu du code à barres si vous utilisez un scanner à main. • Assurez-vous que le code à barres est suffisant grand pour contenir les données à coder. Si tel n'est pas le cas, la zone du code à barres prend une couleur grise unie. Veillez à tester un formulaire rempli avant de le diffuser, cela en vue de vérifier la taille de la zone du code à barres. Création, test et modification des champs de codes à barres Il est possible d'améliorer les codes à barres dans les formulaires PDF en créant des scripts personnalisés. La rédaction de scripts nécessite des connaissances de base en matière de langage JavaScript et des compétences en code JavaScript spécifique à Acrobat. Pour plus d'informations, voir le manuel Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement). Pour plus de détails sur le code JavaScript de base, reportez-vous aux nombreuses ressources disponibles sur le sujet. Après l'insertion d’un code à barres de taille maximale, si vous modifiez la taille de cellule ou la condition de décodage, le code à barres risque de dépasser les limites de la page. Pour éviter ce problème, sélectionnez une taille de cellule et des conditions de décodage appropriées pour le code à barres. Voir aussi « Gestion des paramètres personnalisés de code à barres » à la page 215 « Onglet Valeur des propriétés de champ de formulaire » à la page 214 « Onglet Options des propriétés de champ de formulaire » à la page 207 Ajout d'un champ de code à barres 1 Ouvrez le formulaire dans Acrobat, affichez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Formulaires dans le panneau de gauche. Activez ensuite l'option Calculer automatiquement la valeur des champs. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. 3 Cliquez sur l'outil Code à barres de la barre d'outils Formulaires ou choisissez Formulaires > Outils de formulaire > Code à barres. 4 Tracez un rectangle pour définir la zone de code à barres, puis cliquez deux fois sur le champ du code à barres pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. 5 Dans le panneau Valeur, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Coder avec le format, puis sélectionnez un format (XML ou Délimité par tabulation). Cliquez sur le bouton Choisir et sélectionnez les champs à coder dans le champ de code à barres. Si vous ne souhaitez pas inclure les noms des champs dans les données de code à barres, désélectionnez l'option Inclure les noms de champ. • Sélectionnez Script de calcul personnalisé, cliquez sur Modifier, puis entrez le code JavaScript personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur de scripts JavaScript.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 202 Formulaires 6 Dans le panneau Options, effectuez toutes les opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une option de symbologie : PDF417, QR Code ou Data Matrix. • Sélectionnez Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres si vous souhaitez appliquer cette compression. Ne sélectionnez pas cette option si vous envisagez d'utiliser un scanner à main pour capturer les données renvoyées par les utilisateurs. • Dans la liste Condition de décodage, sélectionnez le type de matériel utilisé pour traiter les formulaires renvoyés : Scanner de code à barres à main, Serveur de télécopies, Scanner de document ou Personnalisée. • Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Personnalisée, puis entrez les valeurs Dimension X, Rapport Y/X et Niveau de correction de l'erreur. 7 Effectuez toutes les autres modifications nécessaires dans les panneaux Général et Actions. Fermez ensuite la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres. Le code JavaScript est généré automatiquement pour coder les champs sélectionnés au format XML ou Délimité par tabulation. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres se ferme et le code à barres pour lequel vous avez spécifié les valeurs s’affiche sur le formulaire. Remarque : Si vous ajoutez un nouveau champ à un formulaire après avoir créé le code à barres, il n'est pas automatiquement inclus dans les données des codes à barres existants. Toutefois, vous pouvez manuellement inclure les champs de données supplémentaires dans le code à barres Test d'un champ de code à barres 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Fermer la fenêtre de modification ou cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu de la barre d'outils Formulaires. 2 Remplissez le formulaire. Servez-vous des données d'exemple représentant la quantité maximale d'informations prévues dans chaque champ ou susceptibles d'être saisies par les utilisateurs. 3 Si le champ de code à barres est grisé, suivez la procédure de redimensionnement du champ ou la procédure d'ajustement des données. (Voir les tâches suivantes.) 4 Assurez-vous que la zone de champ de code à barres est suffisamment grande pour accueillir toutes les données nécessaires. Choisissez Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire pour supprimer les données d'exemple. 5 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer. Le formulaire à codes à barres est prêt à être diffusé. Inclusion de champs de données supplémentaires dans le code à barres 1 Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres. 3 Dans le panneau Valeur, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si l'option Coder avec le format est sélectionnée, cliquez sur Choisir et sélectionnez les champs de formulaire supplémentaires à coder. • Si l'option Script de calcul personnalisé est sélectionnée, cliquez sur Modifier et créez le code JavaScript pour inclure les champs supplémentaires. Une fois les nouveaux champs de données inclus dans le code à barres, vérifiez si la zone de code à barres est suffisamment grande en testant des exemples de données. Si la zone du code à barres est grisée, ajustez la taille du code à barres ou les propriétés du champ de texte de sorte que le contenu tienne dans la zone.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 203 Formulaires Ajustement des données du contenu à insérer dans un champ de code à barres 1 Pour modifier les propriétés d'un code à barres afin de pouvoir y insérer davantage de données, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans le panneau Options, cliquez sur le bouton Personnalisées et saisissez des valeurs inférieures dans les champs Niveau de correction de l'erreur et Rapport Y/X. • Dans le panneau Options, activez Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres, sous réserve que vous utilisiez un logiciel décodeur Adobe (disponible séparément). • Dans l'onglet Valeur, sélectionnez Délimité par tabulation et non XML comme format de codage des données. Pour coder les informations, le format XML exige une zone de code à barres plus grande que le format Délimité par tabulation. • Dans le panneau Options, sélectionnez une autre option de symbologie. • Dans le panneau Valeur, cliquez sur le bouton Choisir et désélectionnez les champs qui n'ont pas besoin d'être codés. Par exemple, n'incluez pas les champs contenant des informations redondantes.. • Dans le panneau Valeur, entrez un script personnalisé qui convertit tout le texte utilisateur en caractères minuscules ou majuscules pendant le codage. Remarque : Les directives NACTP (National Association of Computerized Tax Processors), utilisées par l'administration fiscale américaine et les organismes d'imposition d'état, recommandent l'utilisation des majuscules pour les données de codes à barres 2D.. 2 Pour minimiser la zone de code à barres réservée aux données, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres, puis, dans le panneau Valeur, tapez un script personnalisé qui limite les données aux caractères alphanumériques et à une casse unique. (Un texte entièrement en minuscules ou en majuscules nécessite moins d'espace qu'un texte identique comportant les deux types de casse.) Envisagez la création de champs de code à barres supplémentaires et le mappage de données différentes à chacun d'entre eux. Définition du mode de navigation dans les champs de formulaire Si aucun ordre de tabulation particulier n'a été prévu pour un document PDF, l'ordre de tabulation par défaut dépend de la structure du document à moins que l’utilisateur ait désactivé l’option proposée sous Ordre de tabulation dans les préférences d’accessibilité. Vous pouvez modifier l'ordre de tabulation après avoir créé les champs. Si vous êtes en mode d'édition du formulaire, vous pouvez organiser les tabulations par structure du document (paramètre par défaut), rangée ou colonne. Il est possible également de définir manuellement l'ordre de tabulation en faisant glisser les champs dans le panneau Champs. Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition, vous pouvez changer les propriétés des pages de façon à classer les tabulations par rangée ou colonne. Il est impossible, en revanche, de personnaliser l'ordre de tabulation de façon manuelle. Voir aussi « Création d'un formulaire » à la page 193 « Accessibilité des formulaires Adobe PDF » à la page 195 Définition de l'ordre de tabulation en mode de modification 1 Si vous n'êtes pas en mode d'édition du formulaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 204 Formulaires 2 Dans le navigateur Champs à gauche, assurez-vous d'avoir choisi Trier par > Ordre de tabulation. 3 (Facultatif) Pour afficher l'ordre de tabulation des champs, choisissez Formulaires > Modifier des champs > Afficher les numéros de tabulation. 4 Sélectionnez une option d'ordre de tabulation : Par défaut L'ordre de tabulation repose sur la structure du document et suit celui défini par les balises. Par rangée L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, rangée par rangée. Par colonne L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de haut en bas et de gauche à droite, colonne par colonne. Manuel Cette option permet de faire glisser un champ et de le déposer à l'endroit voulu dans le navigateur Champs. Vous ne pouvez déplacer qu'un seul champ à la fois. Il n'est pas possible de transférer un champ vers une autre page, un bouton radio vers un autre groupe ou un champ vers un bouton radio. Définition de l'ordre de tabulation dans les propriétés de la page 1 Si vous êtes en mode d'édition, cliquez sur Fermer la fenêtre de modification pour quitter le mode. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour ouvrir le panneau Pages. 3 Sélectionnez une ou plusieurs icônes de page, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options du panneau Pages. 4 Sélectionnez une option d'ordre de tabulation : Utiliser l'ordre des rangées L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, rangée par rangée. Utiliser l'ordre des colonnes L'ordre de tabulation commence par le champ supérieur gauche, de haut en bas et de gauche à droite, colonne par colonne. Utiliser la structure du document Dans le cas d'un formulaire dont les champs sont balisés, l'ordre de tabulation suit celui définit par les balises. Non spécifié L'ordre de tabulation suit la séquence existante. Diffusion du formulaire Après avoir créé un formulaire, vous pouvez procéder de l'une des façons suivantes pour le diffuser : • Héberger votre formulaire sur Acrobat.com et envoyer un lien sécurisé vers le formulaire auquel toute personne ou seulement les destinataires peuvent accéder. • Envoyer le formulaire sous forme de pièce jointe via Acrobat ou votre application de messagerie. Il suffit ensuite de recueillir manuellement les réponses dans votre boîte de réception. Vous pouvez télécharger et organiser automatiquement les réponses via Acrobat.com. • Transmettre le formulaire par l'intermédiaire d'un dossier réseau ou d'un serveur Windows exécutant les services Microsoft SharePoint. Vous avez alors la possibilité de recueillir automatiquement les réponses sur le serveur interne. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Diffuser le formulaire. 2 Une série de messages peut s'afficher, en fonction des conditions détectées dans le formulaire par Acrobat. Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran et enregistrez le formulaire. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 205 Formulaires 3 Si vous envisagez d'utiliser votre propre emplacement sur le serveur, spécifiez un dossier réseau ou un serveur Windows exécutant l'espace de travail Microsoft SharePoint. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Configuration d'un serveur » à la page 152. 4 Sélectionnez l'option qui convient dans l'assistant de diffusion de formulaires. Pour plus d'informations, voir « Choix d'une option de diffusion » à la page 151. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant et respectez les instructions à l'écran pour diffuser le formulaire. 6 Si vous choisissez de recueillir les réponses dans votre boîte de réception de messagerie électronique, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez l'option Recueillir le nom et l'adresse électronique des destinataires pour assurer un suivi optimal. Le système invite les destinataires à indiquer leur nom et leur adresse électronique lorsqu'ils renvoient le formulaire. Cela garantit que le suivi des révisions vous indique les personnes qui ont répondu ou non et la date des réponses. • Désactivez l'option si vous souhaitez recevoir des réponses anonymes ou si ce niveau de suivi ne vous intéresse pas. Remarque : Si vous ne connaissez pas l'adresse électronique des destinataires, entrez la vôtre. Le système vous envoie un lien menant au formulaire, lien que vous pouvez transférer aux destinataires voulus. Une vidéo sur la création et la distribution de formulaires est disponible à l'adresse http://tv.adobe.com/#vi+f1495v1626. Comportement des champs de formulaire A propos des propriétés de champs de formulaire Le comportement d'un champ de formulaire est déterminé par les paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés pour ce champ spécifique. Vous pouvez définir les propriétés qui s'appliquent au formatage, déterminent la relation entre les informations de différents champs de formulaire, imposent des restrictions sur ce que l'utilisateur peut saisir dans le champ de formulaire, déclenchent des scripts personnalisés, etc. L'éventail de propriétés applicables à un champ de formulaire Acrobat varie en fonction du type de champ choisi. Les propriétés relatives à chaque type de champ de formulaire sont sélectionnées sous une série d'onglets. Lorsque vous modifiez une propriété, elle est appliquée dès que vous en sélectionnez une autre ou que vous appuyez sur Entrée. Tous les types de champ de formulaire disposent des onglets Général et Actions. D'autres onglets s'affichent selon les types de champs de formulaire spécifiques. L'onglet Options s'affiche pour la plupart des types de champs mais les options disponibles varient pour chaque type. Deux éléments sont disponibles sur tous les panneaux. Si vous en sélectionnez un sur n'importe lequel des panneaux, l'option sera cochée et activée sur tous les panneaux. Ces options sont : Verrouillage Lorsqu'elle est sélectionnée, l'option permet d'empêcher toute modification aux propriétés du champ de formulaire. Fermer Ferme la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du champ de formulaire. Si vous modifiez les propriétés de plusieurs champs de formulaire, vous pouvez laisser ouverte la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Cliquez sur chaque champ pour en modifier les propriétés. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Verrouillage sur un panneau, toutes les options sont verrouillées pour ce champ, et pas seulement celles disponibles sur ce panneau.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 206 Formulaires Modification des propriétés de champs de formulaire Vous pouvez accéder aux propriétés de champ de formulaire d'Acrobat uniquement en mode d'édition (en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire). Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés de plusieurs champs de formulaire à la fois. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l'une des manières suivantes : • Pour modifier un seul champ de formulaire, cliquez deux fois dessus, ou cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Propriétés. • Pour modifier plusieurs champs de formulaire, sélectionnez les champs qui vous intéressent, cliquez sur l'un des champs sélectionnés avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Apportez les modifications nécessaires aux propriétés sous chaque onglet disponible. La modification prend effet dès que vous sélectionnez une autre propriété ou appuyez sur Entrée. 3 Cliquez sur Fermer pour fermer la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Si vous sélectionnez des champs dont les valeurs de propriétés divergent, certaines options de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés ne sont pas disponibles. Sinon, les modifications apportées aux options disponibles s'appliquent à tous les champs de formulaire sélectionnés. Pour éviter que le champ de formulaire soit accidentellement modifié, cochez la case Verrouillage située dans le coin inférieur gauche de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés avant de la fermer. Pour déverrouiller le champ, cliquez à nouveau sur la case à cocher. Voir aussi « Définition des boutons d'action » à la page 216 Onglet Général des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Général s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire et propose les options suivantes : Nom Spécifie le nom unique du champ de formulaire sélectionné. Info-bulle Affiche le texte qui peut aider l'utilisateur incertain à remplir le champ de formulaire. Les info-bulles s'affichent quand le pointeur survole quelques instants le champ de formulaire. Champ de formulaire Spécifie l'affichage du champ de formulaire, à l'écran et à l'impression. Les options sont : Visible, Masqué, Visible à l'écran, invisible à l'impression et Invisible à l'écran, visible à l'impression. Orientation Permet de faire pivoter le champ de formulaire de 0, 90, 180 ou 270 degrés. Lecture seule Empêche l'utilisateur de modifier le contenu du champ de formulaire. Obligatoire Exige que l'utilisateur remplisse le champ de formulaire sélectionné. Si l'utilisateur tente d'envoyer le formulaire avant de remplir un champ obligatoire, un message d'erreur s'affiche et le champ de formulaire obligatoire vide est mis en surbrillance. Onglet Aspect des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les propriétés d'aspect déterminent l'apparence du champ de formulaire sur la page. L'onglet Aspect s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire à l'exception des codes à barres et propose les options suivantes : Couleur de la bordure Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour le cadre autour du champ. Pour ne pas insérer de cadre autour du champ, sélectionnez Aucune couleur. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 207 Formulaires Epaisseur de trait Spécifie la largeur du cadre autour du champ de formulaire : Fin, Moyen ou Epais. Couleur de fond Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour l'arrièreplan du champ. Pour ne pas colorer le champ, sélectionnez Aucune couleur. Remarque : Si vous choisissez une couleur de fond autre qu'Aucune couleur, toutes les images sur la page PDF qui se trouvent derrière le champ de formulaire seront masquées. Style de trait Permet de modifier l'aspect du cadre. Choisissez Plein, Discontinu, Biseauté, Enchâssé ou Souligné. Corps Définit le corps du texte saisi par l'utilisateur ou de la marque de sélection pour les boutons radio et les cases à cocher. Vous pouvez choisir entre Auto, des valeurs prédéfinies et la saisie d'une valeur différente. Si vous sélectionnez Auto pour un champ de texte, les caractères saisis par l'utilisateur voient leur corps de police changer en fonction de la taille du champ. Couleur du texte Ouvre un sélecteur de couleur dans lequel vous sélectionnez une nuance de couleur pour le texte ou la marque de sélection. Police Répertorie les polices disponibles sur votre ordinateur. Cette option n'est pas disponible pour les champs de formulaire qui n'affichent pas de texte. Remarque : L'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche du panneau Internationales de la boîte de dialogue Préférences a une incidence sur le contenu du panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Lorsque cette préférence est activée, l'onglet Aspect propose des options pour la modification du style de chiffres et le sens du texte pour les champs de texte, les listes déroulantes et les zones de liste. Onglet Options des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les options disponibles sous cet onglet varient en fonction du type de champ de formulaire sélectionné. L'onglet Options s'affiche pour tous les types de champ de formulaire, à l'exception des signatures numériques. Code à barres L'onglet Options pour les propriétés de champ de code à barres propose les options suivantes : Symbologie Comprend les types PDF417, Code QR et Matrice de données. Remarque : Si votre entreprise utilise plusieurs méthodes de traitement des formulaires, sélectionnez la méthode qui prend en charge les images de code à barres de moindre qualité. Par exemple, si les formulaires sont renvoyés par télécopie ou courrier, choisissez Serveur de télécopies comme condition de décodage afin d'assurer un taux de lecture élevé pour tous les formulaires. Compresser les données avant le codage en code à barres Spécifie les données à compresser avant le codage. Les données sont compressées à l’aide de la méthode de compression Flate. Les données compressées nécessitent en général moins d'espace de stockage dans le code à barres, augmentant ainsi la quantité de données de formulaire pouvant être stockée. Sélectionnez cette option si vous utilisez le décodeur de formulaires de code à barres d'Acrobat pour interpréter les données renvoyées. Ne cochez pas cette option si vous utilisez un scanner portable, car la plupart de ces scanners ne peuvent pas décoder de données compressées. Condition de décodage Les conditions de décodage prédéfinies représentent les points de départ conseillés que vous pouvez ajuster en cliquant sur le bouton Personnaliser. Personnalisé Ouvre une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner des paramètres de traitement personnalisés qui conviennent le mieux au matériel de numérisation et de télécopie à votre disposition. (Les options disponibles varient en fonction des types de code à barres.) • Dimension X Largeur de la cellule en millièmes de pouce (1 mil = 0,001 pouce ou 0,025 mm).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 208 Formulaires • Rapport Y/X Rapport hauteur/largeur de la cellule. Par exemple, pour une cellule de données qui est deux fois plus haute que large, entrez 2. (Disponible uniquement pour les codes à barres PDF417.) Remarque : Si vous projetez de décoder le code à barres à l'aide d'un scanner portable, évitez de créer des codes à barres dont la largeur est supérieure à quatre pouces (10,2 cm). Les codes à barres longs et étroits sont généralement plus indiqués pour les scanners à main. Les hauteur et largeur du code à barres ne présentent pas de problème si vous utilisez un décodeur de codes à barres Adobe (vendu séparément). • Niveau de correction de l'erreur Correspond au niveau de répétition des données qui est ajouté au code à barres pour prévenir toute erreur de décodage. Un niveau élevé admet davantage de redondance et un code à barres plus puissant qui entraînera de meilleurs résultats de décodage. Les niveaux plus élevés risquent toutefois de donner un code à barres plus volumineux et une capacité d’encodage réduite des données fournies par l’utilisateur ou de structure du formulaire. Un code à barres plus solide peut limiter les problèmes créés par des marques de crayons, une mauvaise qualité d’impression, une dégradation due à la transmission par télécopie ou des plis dans un document. Cette option est disponible pour les codes à barres PDF417 et QR. Gérer les paramètres de code à barres Permet d'enregistrer vos sélections de code à barres personnalisées dans un fichier. Vous pouvez exporter le fichier et le rendre accessible à d'autres auteurs de formulaire dans votre entreprise. Cases à cocher Style de case Spécifie la forme de la marque qui s'affiche dans la case à cocher lorsqu'elle est sélectionnée : Coche (par défaut), Rond, Croix, Losange, Carré ou Etoile. Cette propriété n'a pas d'incidence sur la forme de la case à cocher. Remarque : La taille de la marque dans la case à cocher dépend du corps de police spécifié dans l'onglet Aspect. Valeur d'exportation Spécifie une valeur pour représenter l'élément si les données sont exportées. Si vous ne saisissez pas de valeur, celle saisie pour Nom sous l'onglet Général est utilisée. Case cochée par défaut Affiche la case cochée sauf si l'utilisateur la désélectionne. Liste déroulante et Zone de liste Pour les listes déroulantes ou les zones de liste, utilisez l'onglet Options pour créer une liste d'éléments parmi lesquels l'utilisateur peut faire son choix. Bien que la plupart des propriétés sous cet onglet soient communes à ces deux types de champs de formulaire, certaines sont spécifiques à un type ou à l'autre. Elément Accepte le texte saisi pour les options qui doivent s'afficher dans le menu contextuel du champ. Ajouter Déplace l'entrée active dans l'élément vers la liste d'éléments. Valeur d'exportation L'emplacement de saisie d'une valeur pour représenter l'élément si les données sont exportées. Si vous ne saisissez pas de valeur, celle saisie pour Nom sous l'onglet Général est utilisée. Liste d'éléments Affiche les choix disponibles dans la liste. Remarque : L'élément affiché en surbrillance dans la zone Liste d'éléments constitue la valeur par défaut du champ de la liste déroulante ou de la zone de liste. Pour changer d'élément par défaut, mettez en surbrillance un autre élément de la liste. Boutons Monter et Descendre Changent l'ordre dans lequel les éléments sont répertoriés dans la liste déroulante. Ces boutons ne sont disponibles que si l'option Trier les éléments est activée. Supprimer Supprime l'élément sélectionné de la liste. Trier les éléments Tri les éléments répertoriés par ordre numérique et alphabétique. Le tri numérique intervient, s'il y a lieu, avant le tri alphabétique.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 209 Formulaires Autoriser l’utilisateur à saisir un texte personnalisé (Listes déroulantes uniquement) Permet aux utilisateurs de saisir une autre valeur que les valeurs répertoriées. Vérifier l'orthographe (Listes déroulantes uniquement) Vérifie l'orthographe du texte saisi par l'utilisateur. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Autoriser l’utilisateur à saisir un texte personnalisé est activée. Sélection multiple (Zones de liste uniquement) Permet aux utilisateurs de choisir plus d'un élément dans la liste. Valider la valeur sélectionnée immédiatement Enregistre la valeur dès que l'utilisateur l'a sélectionnée. Si cette option est désactivée, la valeur est uniquement enregistrée lorsque l'utilisateur passe à un champ de formulaire différent (à l'aide du clavier ou de la souris). Pour les zones de liste uniquement, cette option n'est pas disponible si l'option Sélection multiple est sélectionnée. Boutons radio Créez un groupe de boutons radio pour demander à l'utilisateur de choisir une seule option parmi toutes celles proposées. Tous les boutons radio du groupe partagent le même nom, mais chaque bouton possède une valeur différente. Style de bouton Spécifie la forme de la marque qui s'affiche dans le bouton lorsqu'il est sélectionné : Coche, Rond (par défaut), Croix, Losange, Carré ou Etoile. Cette propriété n'a pas d'incidence sur la forme du bouton. Valeur du bouton Identifie le bouton radio et le différencie des autres boutons radio dotés de la même valeur Nom. Bouton activé par défaut Définit l'état de sélection du bouton lorsque l'utilisateur ouvre le formulaire pour la première fois. Les boutons aux noms et valeurs identiques sont sélectionnés simultanément. Permet la sélection de plusieurs boutons radio associés en un seul clic. Si, par exemple, l'utilisateur sélectionne un bouton radio portant le même nom de champ et la même valeur d'exportation qu'un autre, les deux boutons radio sont activés simultanément. Champs de texte Les champs de texte acceptent la saisie utilisateur, qui peut contenir des caractères alphabétiques, numériques ou les deux. Alignement Permet d'aligner le texte à gauche, à droite ou au centre d'un champ. Valeur par défaut Spécifie le texte qui s'affiche avant que l'utilisateur ne le remplace par un texte personnalisé. Saisissez la valeur par défaut dans cette option. Lignes multiples Autorise des entrées de plus d'une ligne dans le champ de texte. Faire défiler les longs textes Permet d'afficher le texte qui dépasse les limites du champ de texte. Autoriser le format RTF Permet aux utilisateurs d'appliquer des informations de style au texte, notamment de le mettre en gras ou italique. Cette propriété est utile lorsque le formatage de certains champs de texte détermine la signification du texte, comme dans le cas d'un article. Limité à _ caractères Autorise des entrées contenant au maximum le nombre de caractères spécifié. Remarque : Si vous avez tapé un texte par défaut, il respecte cette limite. Mot de passe Affiche le texte saisi par l'utilisateur sous forme d'une série d'astérisques (*). Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Vérifier l'orthographe est désélectionnée. Champ utilisé pour la sélection de fichier Permet à l'utilisateur de saisir un chemin de fichier comme valeur du champ lorsqu'un fichier accompagne le formulaire. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l'option Faire défiler les longs textes est la seule option sélectionnée sous l'onglet Options. Vérifier l'orthographe Vérifie l'orthographe du texte saisi par l'utilisateur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 210 Formulaires Bande de _ caractères Répartit les caractères uniformément en occupant toute la largeur du champ. Si une couleur de bordure est spécifiée sous l'onglet Aspect, chaque caractère saisi dans le champ est séparé par des lignes de cette couleur. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsqu'aucune autre case n'est cochée. Champs de texte avec ou sans la propriété Bande A. Quatre champs de texte dotés d'une bordure de couleur et définis avec la propriétés Bande. B. Champ de texte sans la propriété Bande Onglet Actions des propriétés de champ de formulaire Les propriétés d'actions permettent de spécifier les actions que vous souhaitez associer au champ de formulaire comme, par exemple, atteindre une page spécifique ou lire un clip multimédia. L'onglet Actions s'affiche pour tous les types de champs de formulaire et propose les options suivantes : Sélectionner le déclencheur Spécifie l'action utilisateur à l'origine d'une action : Souris relâchée, Souris enfoncée, Souris entrée, Souris sortie, Champ activé ou Champ désactivé. Sélectionner l'action Spécifie l'événement qui se produit lorsque l'utilisateur déclenche l'action : Exécuter une commande de menu, Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia, Atteindre une vue de page, Importer les données d'un formulaire, Opération multimédia (Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures), Ouvrir un fichier, Ouvrir un lien Web, Lire un son, Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 5), Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 6 et versions ultérieures), Lire un article, Réinitialiser un formulaire, Lancer un script JavaScript, Définir la visibilité du calque, Afficher/Masquer un champ et Envoyer un formulaire. Ajouter Ouvre une fenêtre pour l'action sélectionnée. Actions Affiche la liste des déclencheurs et actions définis. Boutons Monter et Descendre Changent l'ordre dans lequel l'action sélectionnée est répertoriée sous le déclencheur. (Disponibles uniquement lorsque vous avez défini plusieurs actions pour le même déclencheur.) Modifier Ouvre une boîte de dialogue avec des options spécifiques pour l'action sélectionnée. Supprimer Supprime l'action ou la paire déclencheur-action sélectionnée. Onglet Calcul des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Calcul s'affiche dans les boîtes de dialogue Propriétés uniquement pour les champs de texte et les listes déroulantes. Ces options permettent d'effectuer des opérations mathématiques sur des entrées de champs de formulaire existantes, puis d'afficher les résultats. Valeur non calculée Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez que l'utilisateur saisissez une valeur. La valeur correspond à/au Sélectionnez cette option pour accéder à des options supplémentaires : • Menu déroulant Répertorie les fonctions mathématiques à appliquer aux champs sélectionnés. Choisissez « somme (+) » pour ajouter les valeurs saisies dans les champs sélectionnés, « produit (x) » pour les multiplier, « moyenne », « minimum » ou « maximum ». • Choisir Ouvre une boîte de dialogue contenant une liste de champs disponibles dans le formulaire. Vous pouvez les sélectionner pour les ajouter au calcul ou les désélectionner pour qu'ils ne soient pas pris en compte. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 211 Formulaires Notation simplifiée du champ Utilise un script JavaScript avec des noms de champ et de simples symboles arithmétiques. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire, modifier ou ajouter des scripts. Script de calcul personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour effectuer les calculs. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez rédiger et ajouter des scripts JavaScript. Définition de l'ordre de calcul entre les champs de formulaire Lorsque vous définissez plusieurs opérations mathématiques dans un formulaire, l'ordre dans lequel ces dernières sont effectuées correspond à l'ordre de définition des opérations. Dans certains cas, il se peut que vous deviez modifier l'ordre de calcul pour obtenir les résultats corrects. Si, par exemple, vous voulez utiliser le résultat obtenu par le calcul de deux champs de formulaire afin d'obtenir la valeur du troisième, vous devez d'abord calculer les deux premiers champs pour obtenir le résultat final correct. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Modifier les champs > Définir l'ordre de calcul. La boîte de dialogue Champs calculés affiche tous les champs calculables du formulaire ainsi que l'ordre dans lequel ces opérations seront exécutées. 2 Pour changer l'ordre de calcul, sélectionnez le champ dans la liste, puis cliquez sur le bouton Monter ou Descendre, selon les besoins. Acrobat effectue automatiquement tous les calculs associés lorsque vous créez et testez les champs de formulaire. Pour faciliter votre tâche, désactivez la fonction de calcul automatique dans les préférences de formulaires. Onglet Signature des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Signature est disponible uniquement dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature numérique. Les sélections que vous effectuez ici permettent de déterminer le comportement du formulaire lorsque l'utilisateur y appose une signature numérique. Rien ne se passe lorsque la signature est apposée Il s'agit de la valeur par défaut. Mention lecture seule pour Empêche d'apporter des modifications supplémentaires au formulaire signé, en fonction de la sélection dans le menu déroulant : • Tous les champs Empêche d'apporter des modifications à tous les champs. • Tous les champs, excepté Autorise les modifications uniquement pour les champs de formulaire sélectionnés en cliquant sur le bouton Choisir et en sélectionnant les cases à cocher pour les champs qui restent modifiables après signature. • Seulement les champs suivants Empêche d'apporter des modifications aux champs de formulaire sélectionnés uniquement. Le script est exécuté lorsque le champ est signé Permet d'activer un script JavaScript lorsque l'utilisateur appose une signature au formulaire. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier pour changer une action JavaScript ou en créer une. Voir aussi « Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires » à la page 195UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 212 Formulaires Onglet Format des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Format s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés des champs de formulaire de texte et de liste déroulante uniquement. Les options disponibles dépendent de votre sélection dans le menu déroulant Catégorie de format. Non Aucune option supplémentaire n'est disponible. La saisie dans un texte ou une liste déroulante avec cette propriété ne requiert aucun formatage spécifique. N° (numéro) Impose automatiquement les options de formatage sélectionnées aux entrées de données numériques. Positions décimales Définit le nombre de décimales. Type de séparateur Définit le placement des virgules et points. Symbole monétaire Définit le type de devise, par exemple Euro, Dollar ou Yen. Style des nombres négatifs Définit l'affichage des nombres négatifs. Vous pouvez choisir entre Afficher les parenthèses, Texte en rouge, aucune de ces options ou les deux. Pourcentage Impose automatiquement les options de formatage sélectionnées aux entrées de données numériques exprimées en pourcentage. Positions décimales Définit le nombre de décimales. Type de séparateur Définit le placement des virgules et points. Date La liste comprend des variations à un, deux ou quatre chiffres où j indique le jour, m le mois et a l'année. Durée La liste comprend des variations d'affichage où h représente l'heure sur un cadran de 12 heures, H l'heure sur un cadran de 24 heures, MM les minutes, ss les secondes et tt AM ou PM. Spéciale Code postal Pour un code postal à 5 chiffres. Code postal + 4 Pour un code postal à 9 chiffres. N° de téléphone Pour un numéro de téléphone à 10 chiffres. N° de sécurité sociale Pour un numéro d'assuré social à 9 chiffres. Des tirets sont automatiquement ajoutés après les troisième et cinquième chiffres. Masque arbitraire Définit la catégorie de format sur Personnalisée et rend accessible un autre champ de texte, dans lequel vous pouvez saisir un format personnalisé. Utilisez cette option afin de définir les types de caractères que l'utilisateur peut saisir aux différents emplacements ainsi que le mode d'affichage des données dans le champ. • A. Accepte uniquement les lettres (A à Z, a à z). • X Accepte les espaces et la plupart des caractères imprimables, notamment les caractères disponibles sur un clavier standard et les caractères ANSI compris dans les plages suivantes : 32 à 126 et 128 à 255.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 213 Formulaires • O La lettre O accepte les caractères alphanumériques (A à Z, a à z et 0 à 9). • 9 Accepte uniquement les caractères numériques (0 à 9). Par exemple, un paramètre de masque AAA--p#999 accepte la saisie BOE--p#767. Un paramètre de masque OOOOO@XXX accepte la saisie vad12@3Up. Exemple d'entrée de masque arbitraire Personnalisé Permet aux concepteurs de formulaire qui souhaitent écrire leurs propres scripts JavaScript d'accéder à d'autres options pour le formatage et l'utilisation des touches. Un script personnalisé permet, par exemple, de définir un nouveau format monétaire ou de restreindre l'entrée à des caractères de touches spécifiques. Script de format personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour pour le formatage. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire et ajouter des scripts. Script de touches personnalisé Affiche tout script personnalisé que vous avez ajouté pour valider des touches d'accès rapide. Le bouton Modifier permet d'ouvrir une boîte de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez écrire et ajouter des scripts. Vous pouvez obtenir le manuel JavaScript for Acrobat API Reference sur le site Web Acrobat Developer Center, à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_javascript_fr (format PDF, en anglais uniquement).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 214 Formulaires Onglet Validation des propriétés de champ de formulaire L'onglet Validation s'affiche uniquement dans les boîtes de dialogue des propriétés de champ de texte et de liste déroulante. Les propriétés de validation limitent les entrées à des plages, valeurs ou caractères spécifiques, afin de garantir que les utilisateurs saisissent les données appropriées pour un champ de formulaire spécifié. Valeur du champ non validée Désactive la validation. Fourchette de valeurs pour le champ Définit une fourchette numérique pour les champs de formulaire à l'aide de valeurs que vous saisissez en chiffres ou pourcentage. Exécuter le script de validation personnalisé Permet de valider un script JavaScript que vous créez ou fournissez. Voir aussi « Ajout de JavaScript aux formulaires » à la page 195 Onglet Valeur des propriétés de champ de formulaire Le panneau Valeur s'affiche uniquement pour les formulaires à codes à barres. Coder avec le format Permet d'activer les options suivantes : • XML Code les données dans le code à barres au format XFDF standard. Le script JavaScript est automatiquement généré. • Délimité par tabulation Code les champs dans le code à barres sous la forme de valeurs délimitées par tabulation. Le script JavaScript est automatiquement généré. Si le formulaire est configuré pour que les données sorties soient des fichiers XFDF ou XDP distincts, les données contenues dans chaque code à barres doivent suivre un format délimité par tabulation, les noms des champs étant indiqués sur la première ligne. Cette option permet également d’entrer davantage de données dans un code à barres, ou de copier les données dans une base de données ou des tableaux de feuille de calcul. • Choisir Ouvre une boîte de dialogue permettant de sélectionner les champs de données utilisateur qui seront codés dans le code à barres. • Inclure les noms de champ (Disponible uniquement lorsque l'option Délimité par tabulation est sélectionnée.) Code les noms de champ comme première ligne du contenu du code à barres. Les valeurs sont codées en dessous. Script de calcul personnalisé Affiche le script par défaut. Cliquez sur le bouton Modifier pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Editeur de scripts JavaScript, qui permet d'entrer des scripts de calcul personnalisés de code à barres. Référence au formulaire publié Affiche le chemin du formulaire PDF. Vous pouvez modifier ce chemin en tapant l'URL du formulaire publié. Cela vous permet ultérieurement de recréer une version numérique du formulaire rempli en fusionnant le modèle de formulaire avec une instance de données utilisateur. Il permet également de conserver la relation entre un modèle de formulaire spécifique et les fichiers de données de code à barres associés. Lorsque vous codez un code à barres avec l’option XML, la référence URL est codée dans le code à barres et s’affiche dans le formulaire sous le code à barres. Type de code à barres, accompagné de la référence URL en dessous http://www.adobe.com/formscatalog/thisform.pdfUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 215 Formulaires Gestion des paramètres personnalisés de code à barres Vous pouvez enregistrer, réutiliser et partager un jeu de paramètres personnalisés de code à barres afin de les appliquer lorsque vous créez des formulaires à codes à barres. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres personnalisés après les avoir définis. Vous commencez par ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du champ de code à barres. Pour ce faire, cliquez deux fois sur le champ de code à barres. Voir aussi « Création, test et modification des champs de codes à barres » à la page 201 « A propos des codes à barres » à la page 200 Création de jeux de paramètres de code à barres 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Sélectionnez le paramètre existant à utiliser comme point de départ d'un nouveau jeu, et cliquez sur Créer. 3 Saisissez un nom et une description dans les zones correspondantes. 4 Sélectionnez les valeurs des paramètres Symbologie, Dimension X, Rapport Y/X et Niveau de correction de l'erreur, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Le nouveau jeu de paramètres figure dans la liste de la boîte de dialogue Gérer les paramètres de code à barres ; tous les boutons situés dans la partie droite de cette boîte de dialogue deviennent disponibles. La nouvelle définition apparaît également dans le menu déroulant Condition de décodage du panneau Options de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres. Modification ou suppression d'un jeu de paramètres de code à barres personnalisé 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres personnalisés dans la liste. 3 Choisissez l'action appropriée : • Cliquez sur Modifier et apportez les changements voulus aux paramètres, puis cliquez sur Fermer. • Cliquez sur Supprimer. Confirmez la suppression dans le message qui s'affiche en cliquant sur OK. Exportation ou importation d'un jeu de paramètres personnalisés de code à barres 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de champ de code à barres, cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sur Gérer les paramètres de code à barres. 2 Choisissez l'action appropriée : • Sélectionnez un jeu de paramètres de code à barres dans la liste et cliquez sur Exporter. Sélectionnez un emplacement et un nom pour le fichier doté de l'extension .bps. • Cliquez sur Importer, puis accédez au fichier .BPS et sélectionnez-le.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 216 Formulaires Redéfinition des valeurs par défaut pour des propriétés de champs de formulaire Une fois que vous avez modifié les propriétés pour un type spécifique de champ de formulaire, définissez les propriétés comme valeurs par défaut pour ce type de champ. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer une case à cocher, modifier ses propriétés, puis les enregistrer comme valeurs par défaut. 1 Si cela est nécessaire, choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire pour passer en mode d'édition du formulaire. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le champ de formulaire dont vous avez déjà modifier les propriétés, puis choisissez Utiliser ces propriétés par défaut. Remarque : La modification des propriétés par défaut n'entraîne pas la modification des paramètres pour les champs de formulaire existants de ce type. Les nouveaux paramètres par défaut s'appliquent uniquement aux nouveaux champs créés. Définition des boutons d'action A propos des boutons Les boutons constituent l’élément le plus fréquemment associé aux formulaires, mais ils peuvent également être insérés dans tout document. Ils permettent aussi bien d'ouvrir un fichier, de lire un fichier son ou un clip multimédia, que d'envoyer des données à un serveur Web, etc. Lorsque vous configurez l'exécution d'un type d'action, gardez à l'esprit que les boutons présentent des fonctionnalités que les liens et les signets ne possèdent pas : • Un bouton peut activer une seule action ou une série d'actions. • Un bouton peut changer d'aspect en réponse à des actions de souris. • Ils peuvent être copiés sur plusieurs pages en toute simplicité. • Les actions impliquant la souris peuvent déclencher différents types d’opérations. Par exemple, les actions Souris enfoncée (un clic), Souris relâchée (relâchement après un clic), Souris entrée (placement du pointeur sur un bouton) et Souris sortie (éloignement du bouton) peuvent toutes déclencher une action différente pour un même bouton. Les boutons constituent un moyen facile et intuitif de permettre à l'utilisateur de lancer une action dans un document PDF. Ils peuvent comprendre une combinaison d'intitulés et d'icônes visant à guider l'utilisateur dans une séquence d'actions ou d'événements et changent d'aspect lors du déplacement de la souris. Vous pouvez, par exemple, créer des boutons intitulés Lecture, Pause et Arrêt et dotés des icônes appropriées. Vous définissez ensuite des actions associées à ces boutons afin de lancer, d'interrompre et d'arrêter une séquence vidéo. Vous pouvez sélectionner la combinaison de comportements de la souris de votre choix pour le bouton et spécifier une série d'actions liées au comportement de la souris. Ajout d'un bouton à un formulaire PDF d'Acrobat 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ. Votre curseur prend la forme d'un viseur. 2 Sur la page, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez ajouter le bouton afin de créer un bouton aux dimensions par défaut. Pour créer un bouton de dimensions personnalisées, tracez un rectangle afin de définir sa taille. 3 Cliquez deux fois sur le champ du bouton, puis spécifiez un nom, le texte de l'info-bulle et les autres propriétés générales.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 217 Formulaires 4 Cliquez sur l'onglet Aspect, puis configurez les options servant à déterminer l'aspect du bouton sur la page. Veuillez noter que si vous utilisez le noir comme couleur d'arrière-plan, vous ne verrez pas les images placées sous le bouton. Les options de texte concernent l'intitulé défini dans le panneau Options et non le nom du bouton indiqué dans le panneau Général. Remarque : Si l'option Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche est cochée dans le panneau Internationales de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, le panneau Aspect propose des options de changement du style des chiffres et de sens du texte pour les boutons. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis sélectionnez les options déterminant l'aspect des libellés et des icônes sur le bouton. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. Configurez les options déterminant l'opération déclenchée par l'activation du bouton (le renvoi à une autre page ou la lecture d'une séquence vidéo, par exemple). 7 Cliquez sur Fermer. Dans le cas d’un jeu de boutons, il est possible d’accrocher l’objet à des lignes de la grille ou à des repères. Ajout d'un bouton d'envoi Lorsque vous diffusez un formulaire, Acrobat procède à une vérification automatique du formulaire. S'il ne détecte aucun bouton d’envoi, il ajoute un bouton Envoyer le formulaire à la barre de message du document. Il suffira aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur ce bouton pour vous renvoyer le formulaire rempli. Si vous n'avez pas l'intention d'utiliser le bouton Envoyer le formulaire créé par Acrobat, vous pouvez ajouter un bouton d'envoi personnalisé à votre formulaire. 1 Sélectionnez l'outil Bouton et créez un bouton. Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton et définissez les options appropriées dans les panneaux Général et Options. 2 Dans l'onglet Options, choisissez une option de libellé du bouton, une image d'icône ou les deux dans le menu Disposition. Effectuez l'une ou les deux opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte du libellé du bouton qui permettra d'envoyer le formulaire. • Cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, et entrez le chemin d'un fichier image ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le fichier image à utiliser. 3 Dans le panneau Actions, choisissez Envoyer un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l’action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Dans la zone Saisissez un URL pour ce lien, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour recueillir les données de formulaire sur un serveur, entrez son chemin. Par exemple, une adresse Internet telle que http://www. [domaine] / [dossier] / [sous-dossier] / ou un chemin sur un réseau local tel que \\ [serveur] \ [dossier] \ [sous-dossier] \. • Pour recueillir des données de formulaire en tant que pièces jointes à envoyer par messagerie, tapez mailto: suivi de l’adresse en question. Par exemple, mailto:personne@adobe.com. 5 Sélectionnez les valeurs des options de format d'exportation, de sélection de champ et de date, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si les données reviennent au format FDF ou XFDF, l’URL du serveur doit se terminer par le suffixe #FDF (http://serveur/cgi-bin/script#FDF, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 218 Formulaires Options d'envoi des sélections du formulaire Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer les sélections du formulaire : Inclure FDF Renvoie les entrées utilisateur sans le fichier PDF sous-jacent. Vous pouvez choisir d'inclure les données des champs, les commentaires et les modifications incrémentielles dans le document PDF. Remarque : L’option Modifications incrémentielles du PDF s’avère pratique pour recevoir une signature numérique qui sera facilement lue et reconstituée par un serveur. HTML Renvoie le formulaire dans le langage HTML (HyperText Markup Language). Inclure XFDF Renvoie les entrées utilisateur dans un fichier XML. Vous pouvez envoyer les données de champ seules ou inclure également des commentaires. PDF Renvoie l'intégralité du fichier PDF avec les entrées utilisateur. Sélection des champs Spécifie les champs à renvoyer. Pour ne recevoir que certains champs de données remplis, sélectionnez Seulement ceux-ci, cliquez sur Sélectionner les champs et sélectionnez les champs à inclure ou exclure dans la boîte de dialogue Sélection des champs. Par exemple, vous pouvez exclure certains champs de calcul ou en double qui apparaissent sur le formulaire à l'intention de l'utilisateur mais qui n'apportent pas d'informations supplémentaires. Options de date Normalise le format des dates entrées par l'utilisateur. Modification de l'aspect des boutons Un bouton peut s'accompagner d'un libellé, d'une icône ou des deux. L'aspect d'un bouton peut changer selon l'état de la souris (relâchée, enfoncée ou effleurée). Par exemple, vous pouvez créer un bouton intitulé « Accueil » tant que le pointeur de la souris n'est pas placé dessus et qui devient « Cliquez pour revenir à la page d'accueil » lorsque le pointeur s'immobilise dessus. Disposition du bouton A. Libellé uniquement B. Icône seule C. Icône en haut, libellé en bas D. Libellé en haut, icône en bas E. Icône à gauche, libellé à droite F. Libellé à gauche, icône à droite G. Libellé sur l'icône Vous pouvez créer des icônes de bouton à partir de tout format de fichier pris en charge par Acrobat, y compris les formats image PDF, JPEG et GIF. Quel que soit le format choisi, la page entière est utilisée. Autrement dit, si vous n'avez besoin que d'une partie de la page, vous devez recadrer l'image ou la page avant de vous en servir comme icône. Le format de page PDF minimal est de 2,54 x 2,54 cm (1 x 1 pouce). Pour afficher une icône de taille inférieure, mettezla à l'échelle de manière à la faire tenir dans la zone tracée à l'aide de l'outil Bouton. Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton, cliquez sur le bouton Avancées dans le panneau Options afin de choisir la mise à l'échelle de l'icône par rapport à la taille du bouton. Modification d'un bouton ? Sélectionnez le champ Bouton, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier les propriétés du champ de bouton, cliquez deux fois sur le bouton en question. • Pour changer l'apparence des boutons, utilisez les options prévues à cet effet dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. A B C D E F G Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili Kahili KKahili ahiliUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 219 Formulaires • Pour aligner, centrer ou répartir le bouton par rapport à d'autres champs de formulaire, ou encore pour le redimensionner ou le dupliquer, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option dans le menu contextuel. Voir aussi « Mise à l'échelle et positionnement des boutons » à la page 219 Spécification des propriétés d'affichage d’un bouton dans Acrobat 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis cliquez sur l'outil Objet . 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un bouton existant, puis activez l'onglet Options dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Dans le menu Disposition, choisissez un type d'affichage pour l'intitulé du bouton. (Pour plus de détails sur la mise à l'échelle des icônes de bouton, voir la prochaine procédure.) 4 Dans le menu déroulant Comportement, choisissez un type d'affichage pour l'activation du bouton. 5 Pour définir le libellé ou l'icône figurant sur le bouton, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Si vous choisissez une option de libellé dans le menu déroulant Disposition, complétez ensuite la zone Libellé. • Si vous choisissez une option d'icône dans le menu déroulant Disposition, cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, puis sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier voulu. (Cliquez sur Effacer afin de supprimer l'icône sélectionnée.) Options de comportement d'un bouton Non Conserve l'aspect du bouton inchangé. Enfoncé Spécifie l'aspect du bouton pour les états de souris relâchée, enfoncée et survol. Sous Etat, sélectionnez une option, puis configurez les options Libellé et Icône : Relâché Détermine l’aspect du bouton lorsque l’utilisateur ne clique pas sur le bouton de la souris. Enfoncé Détermine l’aspect du bouton pendant que l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton de la souris et avant qu’il ne relâche la pression. Effleuré Détermine l'aspect du bouton pendant que l'utilisateur immobilise le pointeur sur le bouton. Contour Met en surbrillance le contour du bouton. Inversé Permute les tons foncés et les tons clairs du bouton. Mise à l'échelle et positionnement des boutons 1 Assurez-vous d'être en mode d'édition en choisissant Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, puis cliquez sur l'outil Objet . 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un bouton existant afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, sélectionnez une option d'icône dans le menu Disposition, puis cliquez sur Avancées. Remarque : Le bouton Avancées n'est pas disponible si vous choisissez Libellé uniquement dans le menu Disposition. 4 Sélectionnez une option dans le menu Cas de mise à l’échelle : Toujours Met à l'échelle l'icône, quel que soit le rapport entre sa taille et celle du bouton.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 220 Formulaires Jamais Conserve la taille initiale de l’icône et recadre le contour du bouton si l’icône ne tient pas sur le bouton. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Jamais, les options de mise à l’échelle ne sont pas disponibles. Icône trop grande Met à l'échelle l'icône uniquement si sa taille est supérieure à celle du bouton. Icône trop petite Met à l'échelle l'icône uniquement si sa taille est inférieure à celle du bouton. 5 Dans le menu Echelle, spécifiez si l'icône doit être mise à l'échelle de manière proportionnelle. Si ce n'est pas le cas, elle risque d'être étirée. 6 Pour vous assurer que les bords supérieur et inférieur, ou gauche et droit de l'icône sont ajustés aux côtés du bouton, cochez la case Ajuster au contour. 7 Faites glisser les curseurs afin de définir l'emplacement de l'icône sur le bouton. Le placement de l'icône est calculé par rapport au pourcentage d'espace séparant l'icône des bords gauche et inférieur du bouton. Le paramètre défini par défaut (50, 50) place l'icône au centre du champ. Vous pouvez à tout moment rétablir l'emplacement par défaut de l'icône en cliquant sur Réinitialiser. 8 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Fermer. Masquage d'un bouton Acrobat sauf lorsqu'il est effleuré Dans certains cas, il peut être nécessaire de rendre la zone du bouton invisible lorsque le pointeur se trouve au-dessus. En définissant un bouton à affichage alternatif, vous pouvez créer des effets visuels intéressants au sein d'un document. Par exemple, sur une carte, quand vous placez le pointeur sur une ville, une carte détaillée peut s'afficher puis disparaître lorsque le pointeur s'éloigne de cet emplacement. Affichage et masquage d'icônes A. Pointeur hors de la zone du bouton B. Pointeur entrant dans la zone du bouton C. Pointeur quittant la zone du bouton 1 Activez l’outil Bouton , puis faites glisser le curseur sur la zone d’affichage du bouton. Si, par exemple, le fichier PDF contient une carte de France, faites glisser le curseur sur la zone qui affichera une carte détaillée de Paris. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Options, puis choisissez Icône seule dans le menu Disposition. 4 Dans le menu Comportement, choisissez Enfoncé, puis sélectionnez Effleuré dans la liste Etat. 5 Cliquez sur Choisir l'icône, puis sur Parcourir. Sélectionnez un type de fichier dans le menu Type de fichiers, recherchez l'emplacement du fichier image, puis cliquez deux fois sur le fichier. Dans notre exemple, nous sélectionnerions une carte de Paris. Cliquez sur OK pour valider l'image prévisualisée. 6 Cliquez sur l'onglet Aspect. Le cas échéant, désactivez les options Couleur de la bordure et Couleur de fond, puis cliquez sur Fermer. 7 Si vous êtes en mode d'édition, cliquez sur Aperçu. Le champ image défini s'affiche à l'écran lorsque le pointeur passe sur la zone du bouton et disparaît lorsqu'il la quitte. Si vous souhaitez que l'image soit plus grande que la zone d'effleurement ou qu'elle soit placée ailleurs que sur le bouton image qui apparaît, utilisez l'action Afficher/Masquer un champ. Commencez par associer une icône au bouton à masquer et à afficher. Créez ensuite un second bouton jouant le rôle de zone sensible lorsque la souris effleure le bouton. N'affectez pas d'icône d'aspect à ce bouton, mais utilisez l'onglet Actions afin d'afficher le premier bouton lorsque le pointeur entre dans la zone et de le masquer lorsque le pointeur quitte la zone. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 221 Formulaires Publication interactive de formulaires Web A propos des formulaires Web Il est pratique d’utiliser des formulaires PDF pour envoyer et recueillir des informations sur le Web. En effet, les formulaires proposent des actions attribuées à des boutons dont les fonctions sont similaires aux macros de programmation HTML. Vous devez disposer d'un serveur Web sur lequel est installée une application CGI (Common Gateway Interface) destinée à recueillir et à router les informations vers une base de données. Vous pouvez utiliser toute application CGI existante permettant d'extraire des données à partir de formulaires (au format HTML, FDF ou XML). Avant de préparer un formulaire pour le Web, assurez-vous que les noms des champs du formulaire correspondent à ceux définis dans l'application CGI. Important : Vous devez concevoir les scripts CGI en dehors d'Acrobat ; sachez qu'Adobe Acrobat ne permet pas leur création. Ajout de fonctionnalités d'envoi Faites appel à l'action Envoyer un formulaire pour transmettre les données d'un formulaire à une adresse électronique ou à un serveur Web à l'aide d'un URL. Le bouton Envoyer permet également de transmettre d’autres fichiers à un serveur ou à une base de données. Il est possible, par exemple, de joindre à un formulaire des images numérisées ou des fichiers. Les pièces jointes sont envoyées avec les autres données du formulaire lorsque vous cliquez sur le bouton d'envoi. Si le formulaire PDF contient un bouton d'envoi par messagerie, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Diffuser le formulaire afin de faciliter la diffusion de ce formulaire. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Envoyer un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Envoyer les sélections du formulaire, saisissez un URL pour la zone Saisissez un URL pour ce lien : • Pour envoyer les données du formulaire à un serveur Web, entrez l'URL de destination. • Pour envoyer les données du formulaire à une adresse électronique, entrez mailto: suivi de l’adresse en question. Saisissez, par exemple, mailto:personne@adobe.com. 6 Apportez toute modification supplémentaire aux options disponibles, puis cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue. 7 Le cas échéant, modifiez les paramètres sous d'autres onglets dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton, puis cliquez sur Fermer. Options d'envoi des sélections du formulaire Inclure FDF Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier FDF. Vous pouvez sélectionner une ou plusieurs des options disponibles : données saisies par l'utilisateur, commentaires et modifications incrémentielles apportées au fichier PDF. L’option Modifications incrémentielles du PDF s’avère pratique pour exporter une signature numérique qui sera facilement lue et reconstituée par un serveur.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 222 Formulaires Remarque : Si le serveur renvoie à l'utilisateur des données au format FDF ou XFDF, l'URL du serveur doit se terminer par le suffixe #FDF (http://serveur/cgi-bin/script#FDF, par exemple). HTML Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier HTML. Inclure XFDF Exporte le formulaire dans un fichier XML. Vous pouvez choisir d'exporter les données des champs, les commentaires ou les deux. Document intégral (PDF) Exporte la totalité du fichier PDF constituant votre formulaire. Bien que cette option génère un fichier plus volumineux que l'option Inclure FDF, elle s'avère pratique pour la conservation des signatures numériques. Remarque : Si les personnes qui remplissent le formulaire PDF utilise Adobe Reader, vous devez choisir FDF ou XFDF comme option de format d'exportation. Tous les champs Exporte la totalité des champs de formulaire (même ceux qui ne comportent pas de valeurs). Seulement ceux-ci Exporte uniquement les champs de formulaire spécifiés en cliquant sur Sélectionner les champs et en indiquant les champs à inclure (y compris les éventuels champs vides). Convertir les dates au format standard Exporte toutes les dates de formulaire en un format unique, quel que soit leur format de saisie. Ajout d'un bouton de réinitialisation du formulaire Un bouton de réinitialisation du formulaire permet d'effacer toutes les données saisies par un utilisateur dans le formulaire. Cela revient à utiliser la fonction Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire, disponible lorsque vous créez et modifiez des formulaires Acrobat. Vous pouvez toutefois définir le bouton de réinitialisation afin qu'il n'efface que certains champs. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez l'outil Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Réinitialiser un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Réinitialiser un formulaire, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Cliquez sur des cases à cocher individuelles pour sélectionner ou désélectionner des champs à réinitialiser via le bouton.. • Choisissez Sélectionner tout. La liste du panneau Actions affiche maintenant une option Réinitialiser un formulaire sous l'action Souris relâchée. Le cas échéant, vous pouvez ouvrir les autres onglets dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton et appliquer les autres types de propriétés au bouton. Voir aussi « Comportement des champs de formulaire » à la page 205UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 223 Formulaires Ajout d'un bouton d'importation des données Faites appel à l'action Importer les données d'un formulaire afin de permettre aux utilisateurs de remplir des champs de formulaire classiques (tels que le nom et l'adresse électronique) à partir de données importées d'un autre formulaire. Les utilisateurs peuvent également utiliser le bouton d'importation de données afin de remplir les champs de formulaire standard avec les informations figurant dans leur profil personnel. Seuls les champs de formulaire correspondants sont mis à jour. Les autres sont ignorés. Avant de créer une action Importer les données d'un formulaire, configurez un formulaire avec des champs contenant des informations de base à partir desquels des données seront exportées. Remarque : L'action Importer les données d'un formulaire recherche le fichier source des données à importer à des emplacements différents sous Windows et Mac OS. Sous Windows, cette action entraîne la recherche du fichier dans le dossier d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Acrobat Reader, le dossier en cours, le dossier système, le dossier Windows, le dossier Mes documents\Adobe\Acrobat ainsi que les dossiers indiqués dans l'instruction PATH. Sous Mac OS, cette recherche s'effectue dans le dossier d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Acrobat Reader, ainsi que dans le dossier Préférences au sein du Dossier Système. 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs de formulaire, sélectionnez Bouton dans la liste Ajouter un champ, puis créez un bouton. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur le bouton afin d'ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton. 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions, puis sélectionnez Souris relâchée dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur. 4 Choisissez Importer les données d'un formulaire dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 5 Localisez et sélectionnez un fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 6 Activez un autre onglet de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du bouton pour définir d'autres propriétés du bouton ou cliquez sur Fermer. Voir aussi « Gestion des fichiers de données de formulaire » à la page 225 « Ajout d'un bouton à un formulaire PDF d'Acrobat » à la page 216 Valeurs d'exportation CGI Une valeur d'exportation correspond aux données envoyées à une application CGI afin d'identifier un champ de formulaire sélectionné par l'utilisateur. Vous devez définir une valeur d'exportation lorsque les deux conditions suivantes se vérifient : • Les données sont recueillies électroniquement dans une base de données au moyen de l'intranet d'une société ou du Web. • Les données ne correspondent pas à l'élément désigné par le champ de formulaire ou le champ est un bouton radio. Lorsque vous définissez les valeurs d'exportation, gardez à l'esprit les recommandations suivantes : • Utilisez la valeur d'exportation par défaut Oui afin d'indiquer qu'une case à cocher ou qu'un bouton radio a été activé(e). • Définissez une valeur d’exportation pour les listes déroulantes ou les zones de liste uniquement si vous voulez qu’elle soit différente de l’élément figurant dans la liste et qu’elle corresponde, par exemple, au nom d’un champ de formulaire dans une base de données. L'élément sélectionné dans la liste déroulante ou la zone de liste sert de valeur d'exportation tant qu'aucune autre valeur n'a été explicitement saisie dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 224 Formulaires • Les boutons radio associés en groupe doivent porter le même nom de champ, mais contenir des valeurs d'exportation différentes. Cela permet d'activer et de désactiver les boutons radio et de recueillir les valeurs appropriées dans la base de données. Recueil et gestion des données de formulaire Lorsque vous diffusez un formulaire, Acrobat crée automatiquement un porte-documents PDF afin de recueillir les données envoyées par les utilisateurs. Par défaut, ce fichier est enregistré dans le même dossier que le formulaire d'origine et est nommé de la façon suivante : nom du fichier _responses. Vous pouvez vous servir de ce fichier pour compiler les formulaires renvoyés. Collecte des données utilisateur 1 Lorsqu'un utilisateur vous renvoie un formulaire, ouvrez le formulaire en question. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter le formulaire rempli à un fichier réponse, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Ajouter à un fichier réponse existant Permet de compiler les données du fichier réponse créé dans l'assistant de diffusion de formulaires lors de l'envoi du formulaire. (Le cas échéant, cliquez sur Parcourir et accédez au fichier réponse.) Créer un fichier réponse Permet de créer un fichier réponse qui porte le nom saisi et se trouve à l'emplacement choisi. Le fichier réponse s'ouvre dès que vous cliquez sur OK. Chaque formulaire renvoyé ajouté au fichier réponse s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans un porte-documents PDF. Compilation des données de formulaire 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Formulaires > Compiler les formulaires renvoyés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Compiler les données, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes pour sélectionner un fichier réponse PDF : • Cliquez sur Parcourir, accédez au fichier réponse, puis sélectionnez-le. • Saisissez le chemin d'accès au fichier réponse. 3 Cliquez sur Ajouter un fichier, puis accédez au formulaire renvoyé. 4 Recommencez l'étape précédente aussi souvent que nécessaire pour ajouter d'autres formulaires renvoyés. Une fois que vous avez cliqué sur OK, les données des formulaires sélectionnées sont ajoutées au fichier réponse. Chaque formulaire renvoyé s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans un porte-documents PDF. Ajout des données utilisateur à un fichier réponse existant 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le fichier réponse. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation de gauche, cliquez sur Ajouter. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter les formulaires renvoyés, cliquez sur Ajouter un fichier. Accédez aux formulaires renvoyés et sélectionnez-les, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 4 Recommencez l'étape précédente pour ajouter tout autre formulaire renvoyé dans d'autres dossiers. Cliquez ensuite sur OK.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 225 Formulaires Lorsque vous avez terminé, chaque formulaire PDF ajouté s'affiche sous la forme d'un fichier composant dans le portedocuments PDF. Exportation des données utilisateur à partir d'un fichier réponse Procédez de cette façon pour enregistrer toutes les entrées du fichier réponse d'un porte-documents PDF dans une feuille de calcul ou un fichier XML. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le fichier de réponse et sélectionnez les données à exporter. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation de gauche, cliquez sur Exporter. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner le dossier d'enregistrement du fichier, spécifiez les nom, emplacement et format de fichier (CSV ou XML) pour les données de formulaire, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Gestion des fichiers de données de formulaire Vous pouvez convertir les réponses sur un formulaire PDF vers d'autres formats de fichier (et vice-versa). Ces formats permettent de conserver toutes les données et sont nettement moins volumineux que le format PDF. Importation de données de formulaire Il peut arriver que certaines personnes renvoient des formulaires remplis sous la forme de fichiers données uniquement, plutôt que de fichiers PDF complets. Ces fichiers ne sont pas au format PDF mais dans d'autres formats, notamment FDF ou XML. Vous pouvez afficher les données renvoyées par une personne dans le contexte du document PDF en ouvrant le fichier d'origine et en important les informations du fichier de données. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le formulaire PDF dans lequel vous souhaitez importer les données. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Effacer les données du formulaire. Remarque : Lorsque vous importez les données à partir d'un autre fichier dans un formulaire PDF, les données importées remplace toutes les informations qui s'affichaient préalablement dans les champs de formulaire individuels. Toutefois, si le fichier de données importé contient un ou plusieurs champs non remplis, l'importation ne permettra pas d'effacer les données d'origine. 3 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Importer des données. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue de sélection du fichier contenant les données de formulaire, choisissez un format dans le menu Type de fichier correspondant au fichier de données à importer. Localisez et sélectionnez ce fichier, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Remarque : Certains formats sont disponibles uniquement pour des types spécifiques de formulaires PDF, selon l'application utilisée pour créer le formulaire, par exemple Acrobat ou Designer ES. Les données importées d'un fichier texte (.txt) doivent être placées dans des rangées délimitées par tabulation afin de créer des colonnes. Exportation de fichier de données Vous pouvez enregistrer les informations dans un formulaire PDF rempli sous la forme d'un fichier de données dans un autre format de fichier. Vous pouvez par la suite réutiliser les données pour remplir à nouveau le formulaire ou un autre formulaire doté des mêmes champs et des mêmes noms de champs. 1 Dans Acrobat, ouvrez le formulaire rempli. 2 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Exporter les données.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 226 Formulaires 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données du formulaire, sélectionnez le formulaire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer les données (FDF, XFDF, XML ou TXT). Sélectionnez ensuite un emplacement, saisissez le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Remarque : Certains formats sont disponibles uniquement pour des types spécifiques de formulaires PDF, selon la méthode de création du formulaire. Fusion des fichiers de données exportés vers une feuille de calcul Si vous voulez compiler les données de formulaires qui ne se trouvent pas encore dans un jeu de données, procédez comme suit : 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Gérer les données de formulaire > Fusionner les fichiers de données dans une feuille de calcul. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données provenant de plusieurs formulaires, cliquez sur Ajouter des fichiers. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue de sélection du fichier contenant les données de formulaire, choisissez un format dans le menu Type de fichier (Acrobat Form Data Format ou Tous les fichiers). Accédez ensuite aux formulaires à fusionner dans la feuille de calcul, sélectionnez-les, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. 4 Le cas échéant, recommencez l'opération pour ajouter des fichiers de données de formulaire placés ailleurs. 5 Cliquez sur Exporter. Sélectionnez ensuite un dossier et saisissez le nom du fichier pour la feuille de calcul, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Progression de l'exportation, cliquez sur Afficher le fichier maintenant pour ouvrir le fichier de feuille de calcul ou cliquez sur Fermer la boîte de dialogue pour revenir à Acrobat. Remarque : Lorsque les formulaires renvoyés se trouvent dans un fichier réponse, la méthode la plus efficace pour exporter les informations vers une feuille de calcul est d'utiliser le bouton Exporter les données dans le panneau de navigation de gauche pour le fichier réponse du porte-documents PDF. A propos du suivi des formulaires Utilisez la fonction de suivi pour gérer les formulaires que vous avez diffusés ou reçus. Le dispositif de suivi permet d'afficher et de modifier l'emplacement du fichier réponse, d'identifier les destinataires ayant répondu, d'ajouter d'autres destinataires, d'envoyer un message à tous les destinataires et d'examiner les réponses à un formulaire. Suivi des formulaires 1 Choisissez Formulaires > Suivi des formulaires. 2 Dans le panneau de navigation gauche, développez l'élément Formulaires. 3 Sélectionnez un formulaire, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour afficher toutes les réponses au formulaire, cliquez sur Afficher les réponses. • Pour modifier l'emplacement d'un fichier réponse, cliquez sur Modifier l'emplacement du fichier dans la zone Emplacement du fichier réponse. • Pour afficher le formulaire d'origine, cliquez sur Ouvrir le formulaire d'origine. • Pour envoyer le formulaire à d'autres destinataires, cliquez sur Ajouter des destinataires. Une vidéo sur l'utilisation du suivi des formulaires pour le recueil et la gestion des réponses est disponible à l'adresse http://www.acrobatusers.com/tutorials/2008/06/a9video_understanding_form_tracker.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 227 Formulaires Voir aussi « Présentation du dispositif de suivi » à la page 159 Remplissage et envoi de formulaires PDF Remplissage et effacement des données d'un formulaire Si un formulaire PDF contient des champs de formulaire interactifs, vous pouvez remplir le formulaire avec l'un des outils de la barre d'outils Sélection et zoom : l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . Lorsque vous placez le pointeur sur un champ de formulaire interactif, l'icône du pointeur change comme suit : • L'icône de doigt qui pointe ou l'icône de la main qui pointe avec le doigt dotée d'un signe plus . S'affiche lorsque le pointeur se trouve au-dessus d'un bouton, un bouton radio, une case à cocher ou un élément de liste. • L'outil Flèche . S'affiche lorsque vous sélectionnez un élément dans une liste d'options. • L'icône de pointeur en I . S'affiche lorsque vous saisissez du texte dans le champ de formulaire. Si les champs de formulaire ne sont pas interactifs , l'icône du pointeur standard ne change pas. Les formulaires PDF non interactifs peuvent être imprimés et remplis à la main. Vous pouvez également choisir Outils > Machine à écrire et utilisez cet outil pour saisir des informations dans les champs de formulaire vierges, puis imprimez une copie du formulaire rempli. Dans Reader, l'outil Machine à écrire est uniquement disponible si l'auteur de document l'a activé pour les utilisateurs de Reader. Remarque : Certains champs de texte sont dynamiques. Cela signifie que leur taille s'adapte automatiquement à la quantité de données saisie et qu'ils peuvent s'étendre sur plusieurs pages. Voir aussi « Préférences de formulaires » à la page 190 Remplissage d'un formulaire interactif 1 Le cas échéant, choisissez l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection . 2 (Facultatif) Pour faciliter l'identification des champs de formulaire, cliquez sur le bouton Mettre les champs en surbrillance de la barre de message du document. Les champs de formulaire s'affichent avec un arrière-plan coloré (la couleur par défaut est bleu clair). L'arrière-plan des champs de formulaire obligatoires s'affichent dans une autre couleur (rouge par défaut). 3 Cliquez sur le premier champ de formulaire à remplir afin de sélectionner cette option ou de placer le pointeur en I dans le champ pour la saisie. 4 Une fois le texte saisi ou la sélection effectuée, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Appuyez sur Tab ou Maj+Tab pour valider les modifications apportées au champ et passer au champ suivant ou précédent. • Appuyez sur la touche fléchée Haut ou Gauche pour sélectionner le bouton radio précédent dans un groupe de boutons radios, ou appuyez sur la touche fléchée Bas ou Droite pour sélectionner le bouton radio suivant. • Appuyez sur Echap pour rejeter la modification du champ de formulaire et désactiver le champ de formulaire actif. Si vous visualisez le formulaire en mode plein écran, une seconde pression sur la touche Echap désactive ce mode d'affichage.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 228 Formulaires Remarque : Si le champ de formulaire actif est un champ de texte à une seule ligne, appuyez sur Entrée pour valider la saisie et désélectionner le champ. S'il s'agit d'une case à cocher, appuyez sur Entrée ou sur Retour afin de cocher ou de désactiver la case. Dans un champ à lignes multiples, la touche Entrée ou Retour permet de créer un saut de paragraphe. Dans tous les cas, vous pouvez appuyer sur Entrée pour valider la modification et désélectionner le champ de formulaire actif. 5 Une fois les champs de formulaire remplis, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur le bouton d'envoi du formulaire. Vous envoyez ainsi les données du formulaire à une base de données via le Web ou l'intranet de votre société. • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous, puis renommez le fichier afin d'enregistrer le formulaire avec les données saisies. • Dans Reader, choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer une copie, puis indiquez l'emplacement de la copie. Remarque : Si l'auteur du formulaire a octroyé des droits supplémentaires aux utilisateurs de Reader, la copie enregistrée comprend les entrées que vous avez effectuées. Dans le cas contraire, la copie enregistrée est vide. • Exportez les données du formulaire. • Imprimez le formulaire. Effacement des données d'un formulaire dans un navigateur ? Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Le cas échéant, cliquez sur le bouton Réinitialiser le formulaire. Cette action est irréversible. • Quittez le navigateur Web et recommencez l'opération. Remarque : Vous risquez de ne pas effacer entièrement le contenu d'un formulaire en cliquant sur le bouton Recharger, Actualiser, Précédent ou Reculer d'un navigateur Web ou en activant un lien pointant vers une autre page. Effacement des entrées de formulaire non enregistrées ? Choisissez Fichier > Rétablir. Remplissage des formulaires – Conseils de dépannage Si vous rencontrez des problèmes lors du remplissage ou de l'envoi de formulaires, vérifiez les éléments suivants. Vérifications rapides à effectuer en premier lieu • Vérifiez que les paramètres de protection autorisent le remplissage des formulaires. (Voir Fichier > Propriétés > Protection.) • Vérifiez que le fichier PDF comprend des champs de formulaire interactifs ou remplissables. Il arrive que les auteurs de formulaires omettent de convertir les fichiers PDF en formulaires interactifs ou qu'ils conçoivent intentionnellement des formulaires qui ne peuvent être remplis qu'à la main. Si vous ne pouvez effectuer aucune saisie dans les champs de formulaire, il est probable que ceux-ci ne soient pas interactifs. • Vérifiez l'existence de restrictions et de fonctionnalités supplémentaires dans la barre de message du document (de couleur violette) située juste en dessous de la zone des outils. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 229 Formulaires Autres conseils relatifs aux formulaires pour les utilisateurs d'Acrobat • Si le formulaire ne contient aucun champ interactif, ouvrez-le dans Acrobat 9 (toute version) et choisissez Formulaires > Ajouter ou modifier des champs. Vérifiez si le message suivant s'affiche : "Ce document PDF ne contient pas de champs de formulaire pour l'instant. Voulez-vous qu'Acrobat les détecte ?" Vous pouvez cliquer sur Oui pour lancer l'outil de reconnaissance des champs de formulaire ou utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire pour créer des champs. • Si le message "Cette opération n'est pas autorisée" apparaît lorsque les utilisateurs de Reader ouvrent ou envoient le formulaire, vérifiez s'il contient des polices non incorporées ou des objets masqués. Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés > Police pour vérifier la présence de polices non incorporées. Choisissez Document > Examiner le document pour détecter et supprimer le contenu indésirable. Pour plus d'informations, voir http://www.acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/viewtopic.php?pid=35535#p35535. • Si vous avez vérifié tous ces éléments sans résoudre le problème de remplissage ou d'envoi du formulaire, postez une question sur le forum Acrobat à l'adresse : http://www.adobeforums.com/cgi-bin/webx/.3bbeda8b/. Autres conseils relatifs aux formulaires pour les utilisateurs de Reader • Si le formulaire ne contient aucun champ interactif, vous pouvez demander à l'auteur du document d'y insérer des champs de formulaire. Vous pouvez également télécharger gratuitement la version d'essai d'Acrobat 9, valable 30 jours (Windows uniquement). Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser l'outil Machine à écrire ou la reconnaissance des champs de formulaire pour créer de tel champ. • Si l'auteur du formulaire a activé d'autres fonctionnalités, le panneau Extensions de document (Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Extensions de document) est disponible. Ce panneau indique toutes les opérations possibles avec le formulaire. Par exemple, il peut s'avérer possible d'enregistrer et d'imprimer les données, d'ajouter des commentaires et d'apposer une signature numérique au document. D'autres fonctions, telles que la modification du contenu du document ou l'insertion et la suppression de pages, sont restreintes. • Si vous avez vérifié tous ces éléments sans résoudre le problème de remplissage ou d'envoi du formulaire, postez une question sur le forum Reader à l'adresse : http://www.adobeforums.com/cgi-bin/webx/.3bbeda8a/. Remplissage automatique d'un formulaire La fonction de remplissage automatique permet de stocker les entrées saisies dans des champs de formulaire PDF, puis de proposer ou de saisir automatiquement des réponses en fonction de ce que vous avez saisi dans d'autres champs. Les suggestions s'affichent dans un menu contextuel, à partir duquel vous pouvez effectuer votre sélection. Par défaut, la fonction de remplissage automatique est désactivée. Le cas échéant, activez-la à partir des préférences de formulaires. Si vous souhaitez supprimer un entrée de la mémoire de remplissage automatique (par exemple en entrée contenant une erreur de frappe), vous pouvez modifier la liste dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Activation de l'option de remplissage automatique 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez Formulaires dans la liste de gauche. 3 Sous Remplissage automatique, choisissez Standard ou Avancé dans le menu. 4 Cochez la case Mémoriser les données numériques si vous souhaitez que la mémoire de remplissage automatique stocke les valeurs saisies dans les formulaires. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 230 Formulaires Lorsque vous sélectionnez une option dans le menu Remplissage automatique, une description de son impact sur le comportement de la fonction s'affiche dans la zone de texte placée dessous. Suppression d'une entrée dans la mémoire de remplissage automatique 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez Formulaires dans la liste de gauche. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier la liste. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Remplir automatiquement la liste, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, puis cliquez sur Oui dans la boîte de dialogue de confirmation : • Pour supprimer toutes les entrées, cliquez sur Supprimer tout. • Pour ne supprimer que certaines entrées, sélectionnez-les et cliquez sur Supprimer. (Pour sélectionner plusieurs entrées contiguës, appuyez sur Maj et cliquez sur les entrées. Pour sélectionner plusieurs entrées non adjacentes, cliquez dessus en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée.)231 Chapitre 8 : Protection Vous pouvez utiliser des mots de passe visant à restreindre l'ouverture, l'impression et la modification de documents PDF. Les certificats permettent le chiffrement de documents PDF afin qu'ils ne puissent être ouverts que par les utilisateurs autorisés. Si vous souhaitez enregistrer les options de protection pour une utilisation ultérieure, créez une stratégie de protection qui enregistre les options de protection. Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé Avertissements de protection Acrobat® et Reader ® affichent des avertissements de sécurité lorsqu'une action liée aux fichiers PDF représente un danger éventuel pour vos données et votre ordinateur. Les avertissements de sécurité sont affichés dans les cas suivants : Remarque : Si le fichier PDF est certifié et que le certificat est authentifié pour des exploitations de système privilégiées (mise en réseau, impression ou accès aux fichiers), les avertissements de sécurité ne seront pas affichés. Mise à jour des paramètres de protection Adobe télécharge régulièrement des certificats de protection pour des sources authentifiées. Ces téléchargements sont importants car ils servent à garantir que les fichiers PDF signés numériquement et provenant de sources authentifiées conservent leur statut fiable. Avant d'accepter une mise à jour provenant d'une source inconnue, assurez-vous que cette source provienne d'une adresse Web que vous considérez comme fiable. Des mises à jour effectuées depuis des sites Web non-authentifiés peuvent créer des dégâts sur votre ordinateur. Connexion à un site Web inconnu ou non-authentifié Cet avertissement permet d'empêcher les fichiers PDF de se connecter à des sites Internet malveillants. L'avertissement s'affiche lorsqu'un fichier PDF tente de se connecter à un site dans les cas suivants : • le site ne se trouve pas dans la liste de vos sites authentifiés qui se trouve dans le gestionnaire des approbations. • Le fichier PDF ou le site Web n'est pas répertorié en tant qu'emplacement privilégié dans les préférences de protection (renforcée). Avant d'autoriser la connexion, vérifiez attentivement l'URL afin de vous assurer qu'il s'agit bien d'un lien approprié. Afin de comprendre pour quelle raison le fichier PDF tente de se connecter au réseau Internet, veuillez contacter l'administrateur système ou l'auteur du fichier PDF. Impression silencieuse L'impression silencieuse se produit sans confirmation nécessaire de votre part. Ce genre d'impression représente un risque de protection car un fichier malveillant peut, à votre insu, imprimer silencieusement un document à plusieurs reprises, gaspillant ainsi les ressources de l'imprimante. En maintenant l'imprimante active, l'impression silencieuse peut également bloquer l'impression d'autres documents. Elle n'est donc permise que dans les cas suivants : • Le site qui tente de lancer une impression se trouve dans la liste des sites authentifiés du gestionnaire des approbations. • Le fichier PDF actif est répertorié en tant qu'emplacement privilégié dans les préférences de protection (renforcée).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 232 Protection Contactez votre administrateur système afin d'établir quand vous avez l'autorisation d'utiliser l'impression silencieuse. Avertissements de protection renforcée Une fois la protection renforcée activée, Acrobat et Reader vous avertissent lorsqu'un document tente l'une des actions suivantes : Télécharger des données d'un site non authentifié Cet avertissement contribue à empêcher les documents malveillants d'obtenir des données à partir de sites Internet. Cette action est uniquement autorisée pour les documents situés dans des emplacements privilégiés dans la protection renforcée. Si le document vous semble fiable, vous pouvez l'ajouter à vos emplacements privilégiés en ouvrant la boîte de dialogue des préférences et en sélectionnant, à gauche, Protection (renforcée). Insertion des données dans des formulaires Une fois que la protection renforcée est activée, Acrobat et Reader vous avertissent lorsqu'une une source non authentifiée tente d'ajouter des données à un fichier PDF. Par exemple, un fichier FDF peut tenter d'ajouter des données dans un formulaire PDF. Votre entreprise peut utiliser cet objet pour rationaliser les flux de production. Cependant, il peut également être utilisé pour ajouter des données malveillantes dans un fichier PDF. Si vous approuvez le fichier source, ajoutez-le à vos emplacements privilégiés dans Protection renforcée. Cette action autorise l'ajout des données dan un fichier au format PDF ou FDF. Chargement ou exécution d'un script Acrobat et Reader empêchent le chargement ou l'exécution des scripts dans un fichier PDF lorsque les ces derniers proviennent d'une source externe. Par exemple, un fichier FDF peut tenter de charger un script Java script dans un formulaire PDF. Cet objet peut servir à ajouter un script malveillant dans un fichier PDF. Si vous approuvez le fichier source, ajoutez-le dans les emplacements privilégiés de Protection renforcée, afin d'autoriser l'exécution des scripts dans le fichier PDF. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Protection (renforcée) dans le panneau gauche. Voir aussi « A propos de la protection renforcée » à la page 235 « Activez la protection renforcée et définissez des emplacements privilégiés. » à la page 235 Ouverture d'un document PDF protégé Les documents peuvent être sécurisés de plusieurs façons. Pour visualiser les paramètres de protection d'un document, ouvrez l'onglet Protection de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Si vous ne parvenez pas à ouvrir un document PDF ou à utiliser certaines fonctions, contactez l’auteur du document. Protection par mot de passe Un fichier PDF protégé par un mot de passe requiert un mot de passe, soit pour ouvrir le fichier, soit pour modifier ou supprimer des opérations restreintes. Lorsqu'un document est doté de fonctions sous restriction, les options de menu et outils associés à ces fonctions sont grisés. Restriction Si un document est chiffré, qu'il dispose de restrictions ou d'un statut spécifique, l'icône Paramètres de protection apparaît à gauche du document. Cliquez sur l'icône pour afficher le panneau Paramètres de protection et vérifier quelles fonctions sont restreintes. Signature numérique Lorsqu'un document est signé numériquement, le statut de la signature numérique apparaît dans la barre de message du document située au-dessus du document. Une signature numérique garantit au destinataire que le contenu du document est valide. certifiés Par la certification d'un document, les destinataires sont assurés que le document est authentique. Les signatures de certification comprennent également des informations autorisant ou interdisant des actions spécifiques, telles que le remplissage de formulaires et la modification du document. Un document doté d'un certificat affiche une UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 233 Protection icône de ruban bleu . Lorsque vous envoyez un formulaire certifié, vous avez la garantie que ce dernier sera renvoyé à l'auteur qui convient. Voir aussi « Signatures numériques » à la page 264 « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 238 « Protection par certificat » à la page 241 Apposition d'une signature sur un document Lorsqu'un document qui vous est envoyé nécessite votre signature, vous pouvez le signer à l'aide d' une identification numérique existante. Ou créer une identification numérique pour ce document. 1 Ouvrez le formulaire, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si le document contient un champ de signature, cliquez sur le champ et passez à l'étape 4. • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils , appuyez ensuite sur Signer le document. 2 Lisez les informations reprises dans la boîte de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Faites glisser la souris pour créer un espace suffisant à la signature. 4 Pour créer une ID numérique pour ce document, sélectionnez Créer une ID à partir du menu Signature. Pour obtenir de l'aide, consultez les informations relatives à la création d'une ID. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, signez de la manière suivante : Mot de passe Saisissez le mot de passe associé à l'ID numérique. Aspect Choisissez les informations à modifier et à afficher dans la signature (ex : la date ou l'heure). Verrouiller le document après la signature Si cette option est disponible, choisissez-la uniquement si vous êtes le dernier destinataire à signer le document. La sélection de cette option verrouille tous les champs y compris le champ de signature. Voir aussi « Création d'une identification numérique » à la page 258 Certification d’un document En signant un document, vous permettez aux destinataires de vérifier que le document signé a bien été envoyé par vous. Votre ID numérique, qui établit votre identité, fait partie de la signature. Vous pouvez créer votre propre ID numérique ( nommée ID autosignée) ou demander un certificat à une autorité de certification ( une organisation délivrant des certificats). Vous pouvez certifier un document avec ou sans signature visible. Les destinataires du document voient apparaître une icône de ruban bleu au-dessus du document, ce qui signifie que le document est certifié. 1 Ouvrez le document que vous désirez certifier par une signature numérique. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Certifier par une signature visible ou Certifier par une signature invisible. Ou cliquez sur l'icône Signer dans la barre des tâches, puis sur Certifier par une signature visible ou Certifier par une signature invisible. 3 Lisez les informations reprises dans les boîtes de dialogue, puis cliquez sur OK pour chacune d'entre elles. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 234 Protection 4 Si vous sélectionnez Certifier par une signature visible, faites glisser le pointeur de la souris pour créer un champ de signature comme indiqué dans la boîte de dialogue précédente. Si vous ne possédez pas d'ID numérique, la boîte de dialogue Ajouter une ID numérique s'affiche. Le cas échéant, la boîte de dialogue de certification du document s'affiche. Mot de passe Saisissez le mot de passe associé à l'ID numérique. Aspect Sélectionnez un aspect de signature existant ou sélectionnez Créer un aspect, afin de choisir les informations à afficher dans le champ de la signature. Actions autorisées après certification Choisissez des actions spécifiques à autoriser dans le document. 5 Cliquez sur Signer, puis sauvegardez le document. Lorsque les destinataires ouvrent le document, ils peuvent ouvrir le panneau des signatures pour afficher la signature ainsi que ses propriétés. Mesures de protection relatives aux URL et pièces jointes dans des documents PDF Acrobat vous avertit chaque fois que vous tentez d'ouvrir un URL (site Web) ou une pièce jointe utilisant un type de fichier interdit. Les URL et les types de fichiers interdits (EXE, par exemple) sont potentiellement dangereux, car ils risquent de transférer ou d'exécuter des programmes, des macros ou des virus qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez autoriser Acrobat à contacter des sites Web spécifiques en ajoutant les URL correspondants à la liste de sites Web autorisés figurant dans les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. Supprimez tous les URL que vous ne souhaitez plus consulter. Pour ouvrir des pièces jointes dans Acrobat, répondez au message qui s'affiche en indiquant que vous autorisez toujours les fichiers de ce type. Le type de fichier est alors ajouté à une liste se trouvant dans le registre. Pour interdire un type de fichier autorisé auparavant, réinitialisez cette liste selon ses paramètres par défaut dans les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. Gestionnaire des approbations, préférences Pour ouvrir les préférences du gestionnaire des approbations, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez le gestionnaire des approbations à gauche du document. Autoriser l'ouverture de pièces jointes non PDF dans des applications externes Lorsque cette option est activée, les pièces jointes sont autorisées à démarrer des applications externes à l'ouverture des fichiers. Vous devez disposer des applications externes nécessaires afin d'ouvrir les fichiers. Rétablir la liste par défaut des types de pièce jointe autorisés et interdits Supprime les paramètres enregistrés que vous avez choisis pour ouvrir les pièces jointes. Par exemple, si vous choisissez de toujours ouvrir les pièces jointes TMP lorsque vous y êtes invité, l'extension TMP figure dans la liste des types de pièce jointe autorisés. En cliquant sur Restaurer, vous supprimez l'extension TMP de la liste. Modifier les paramètres Lorsque vous cliquez sur ce bouton, vous pouvez spécifier le comportement par défaut du mode d'accès à Internet à partir des fichiers PDF. Pour restreindre l'accès aux URL spécifiés, sélectionnez Spécifier une liste de sites Web autorisés et bloqués (option définie par défaut). Pour autoriser l'accès à tous les URL, sélectionnez Autoriser tous les sites Web. Pour interdire l'accès à tous les URL inclus dans des documents PDF, sélectionnez Bloquer tous les sites Web. Pour définir une liste de sites Web autorisés et bloqués, saisissez chaque URL dans la zone de texte, puis cliquez sur Autoriser ou Bloquer. Indiquez ensuite le comportement par défaut d'Acrobat pour les sites Web ne figurant pas dans la liste.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 235 Protection Remarque : Si vous ouvrez un fichier PDF protégé et êtes invité à autoriser ou à bloquer un URL, sélectionnez Mémoriser mon action pour ce site. Cette action ajoutera l'URL à la liste. Charger les certificats racine approuvés à partir d'un serveur Adobe Permet Acrobat de charger automatiquement les paramètres d'approbation depuis un serveur Adobe. Demander avant d'installer Lorsque cette option est activée, une notification est envoyée à l'utilisateur lorsque de nouveaux certificats racine sont téléchargés depuis Adobe. Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour détecter de nouveaux certificats racine et les installer instantanément. A propos de la protection renforcée De même que les autres formats de fichiers, il arrive qu'un script malveillant, pouvant causer des dégâts sur l'ordinateur ou voler des données lorsqu'il est lancé, soit incorporé au fichier PDF. La protection renforcée d' Acrobat empêche un script d'effectuer des téléchargements depuis des sources inconnues. Grâce à cette option, seul un script provenant du même domaine de serveurs est autorisé. Par exemple, s' il s'avère que le script incorporé au fichier PDF provient de votre entreprise, il sera téléchargé. Acrobat et Reader proposent deux manières de bloquer des fichiers PDF potentiellement dangereux. • Un administrateur système peut ajouter des noms de domaines de l'Internet au fichier crossdomain.xml du serveur. Seuls les fichiers provenant des emplacements répertoriés dans le fichier crossdomain.xml peuvent être téléchargés vers des ordinateurs privés. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration du fichier crossdomain.xml, reportezvous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr ou au document Enhanced security in Adobe Acrobat 9 and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/devnet/reader/articles/reader_compatibility.html. • Les fichiers, les répertoires ou les URL spécifiques peuvent être identifiés en tant qu'emplacements privilégiés dans la boîte de dialogue Protection renforcée. Un fichier PDF résidant sur un emplacement privilégié est alors approuvé. Toutes les actions telles que le chargement de données depuis Internet ou l'exécution d'un script sont autorisées. Par exemple, la protection renforcée bloque le chargement de données depuis des sites Web inconnus par les fichiers PDF. Si vous ajoutez le fichier PDF à votre liste d'emplacements privilégiés, Acrobat autorisera le chargement des données. L'utilisation des emplacements privilégiés vous permet de contourner les restrictions de protection renforcée habituelles. Activez la protection renforcée et définissez des emplacements privilégiés. Configurez les emplacements privilégiés, de sorte à autoriser les fichiers PDF sauvegardés dans les emplacements spécifiques à exécuter des actions qui sont normalement soumises à des restrictions. Par exemple, un fichier PDF stocké sur un site Web à emplacement privilégié peut charger des donnés d'une source externe. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Protection (renforcée) dans le panneau des catégories, à gauche. 2 Sélectionnez l'option Activer la protection renforcée. 3 Choisissez le type d'emplacement à ajouter: • Sélectionnez l'optionFichier si vous désirez ajouter un ou deux fichiers d'un emplacement. Si, par contre, vous disposez d'un nombre plus important de fichiers approuvés, il est conseillé de les classer dans un seul dossier privilégié PDF. • Dossiers Si vous disposez d'un nombre plus important de fichiers approuvés, il est conseillé de les classer dans un seul répertoire privilégié PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 236 Protection • Hôte Saisissez uniquement le nom de la racine de l'' URL. Par exemple, saisissez www.adobe.com et non pas www.adobe.com/products. Afin d'uniquement distribuer davantage de droits aux fichiers consultés depuis des connexions sécurisées, sélectionnez l'option Connexions sécurisées uniquement (https:). 4 Cliquez sur OK pour terminer la tâche. Sélection d'une méthode de protection Type de protection à utiliser Par l'ajout de fonctions de protection, vous pouvez autoriser uniquement les utilisateurs indiqués à effectuer les opérations ayant trait aux documents (visualisation, modification, impression, etc.). Vous pouvez déterminer les conditions d'accès des utilisateurs (mot de passe, ID numérique ou accès à Adobe LiveCycle® Rights Management ES). Acrobat fournit différentes méthodes de protection servant à spécifier l'authenticité, le chiffrement et les paramètres de droits du document. Vous pouvez chiffrer une partie ou l'ensemble d'un document et restreindre les actions de l'utilisateur. Il peut être intéressant, par exemple, d'autoriser seulement certains utilisateurs à remplir les champs du formulaire ou d'éviter que certains d'entre-eux impriment un document PDF. Il est très facile de partager une partie ou l'intégralité de vos paramètres de sécurité avec d'autres utilisateurs en exportant et en important les paramètres. Dans les environnements d'entreprise, vous avez la possibilité d'enregistrer les paramètres de sécurité sur un serveur, puis de les charger en spécifiant l'URL du serveur. Vous pouvez également tirer parti des paramètres exportés pour sauvegarder et restaurer votre configuration, si besoin est. Acrobat utilise les fonctions de protection de Windows XP et un certain nombre d'autres systèmes de protection. Servez-vous de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document pour sélectionner l'une des méthodes de protection suivantes : Remarque : La notion de protection est quelquefois assimilée à la notion d'accessibilité, fonctionnalité facilitant l'accès aux documents pour les utilisateurs malvoyants. Protection par mot de passe Utilisez des mots de passe pour restreindre l'ouverture, la modification et l'impression des fichiers PDF. La protection par mot de passe offre un moyen simple de partager des documents entre les utilisateurs s'il est possible de partager des mots de passe ou si un haut niveau de compatibilité avec des versions antérieures s'avère nécessaire. Dans le cas d'une stratégie par mot de passe, il n'est pas nécessaire de spécifier les destinataires du document. La protection par mot de passe s''applique soit à tout le contenu du document soit uniquement aux pièces jointes. Des enveloppes PDF vous permettent de joindre des fichiers chiffrés à une enveloppe PDF déchiffrée. Protection par certificat La protection par certificat fournit un niveau élevé de protection et évite d'avoir recours au partage de mot de passe. La protection par certificat permet également d'accorder des droits différents à différents utilisateurs dont l'identité peut être vérifiée et gérée. Protection Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Utilisez le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour appliquer une stratégie aux documents, sans avoir recours aux signatures numériques et aux certificats. La stratégie contient une liste des destinataires qui définit les droits individuels de ceux-ci. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 237 Protection Stratégies de protection Si vous appliquez souvent les mêmes paramètres de protection à des documents PDF, envisagez de créer une stratégie de protection afin de rationaliser votre flux de production. Des stratégies différentes sont utiles à la prise en charge de diverses exigences. Stratégie d'enveloppe Vous pouvez sécuriser plusieurs documents en les incorporant à une enveloppe PDF. Les enveloppes peuvent être chiffrées afin d'empêcher des utilisateurs non autorisés d'accéder aux contenus des documents et également certifiées afin de fournir la preuve d'origine. Les destinataires autorisés peuvent ouvrir l'enveloppe et extraire les fichiers dans le but de les visualiser. Stratégie LiveCycle Rights Management ES Les stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, auquel les utilisateurs doivent avoir accès pour pouvoir les utiliser. Pour créer ces stratégies, il est nécessaire de désigner les destinataires des documents à partir d'une liste dans Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Stratégies de mots de passe et de certificats Enregistrez les paramètres de votre mot de passe ou certificat et réutilisezles pour chiffrer des fichiers PDF sans devoir configurer le mot de passe et le certificat pour chaque instance. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des fonctions de sécurité, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Juristes : http://blogs.adobe.com/acrolaw/ • Porte-documents PDF : www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4201_a9_fr Voir aussi « Suppression du contenu confidentiel » à la page 262 « Configuration d'une stratégie de protection » à la page 250 Protection obligatoire: Action: Demandez un mot de passe pour l'ouverture, la copie ou l'impression du contenu d'un fichier PD. Choisissez Protection par mot de passe en appuyant sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches. Dans un porte-documents PDF ouvert, choisissez Fichier > Modifier un porte-documents PDF > Protéger le portedocuments. Si votre entreprise est inscrite, vous pouvez également utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES afin de protéger vos documents. Indiquer que le contenu d'un document PDF est approuvé Signez et certifiez le document PDF. Vous devez obtenir une identification numérique pour pouvoir apposer une signature numérique. Pour les langues asiatiques, vous pouvez appliquer un tampon d'approbation. Eviter que les formulaires ne soient falsifiés Utilisez LiveCycle Designer pour protéger les formulaires et créer des champs de signature verrouillables. Consultez l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Designer. Envoyer des pièces jointes sécurisées par messagerie Utilisez des enveloppes sécurisées. Autoriser la visualisation d'un document PDF aux utilisateurs spécifiés uniquement Choisissez Protection par certificat dans le menu du bouton Protection sur la barre d'outils Tâches ou appliquez les paramètres de protection à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Vous devez disposez de certificats pour vous-même et pour les utilisateurs autorisés à afficher le document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 238 Protection Choisir des méthodes de protection en mode FIPS (Windows) Acrobat et Reader fournissent un mode FIPS servant à limiter la protection de données aux normes fédérales de traitement de l'information (FIPS). Le mode FIPS utilise des algorithmes FIPS 140-2 approuvés qui se servent du module cryptographique RSA BSAFE Crypto Micro Edition (ME) 2.1.0.3. Les options de protection suivantes ne sont pas disponibles en mode FIPS : • Application aux documents des stratégies de protection basées sur un mot de passe. Vous pouvez utiliser les certificats à clé publique ou Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour sécuriser le document, mais vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la protection par mot de passe. • Création de certificats autosignés. Pour créer une identification numérique autosignée, celle-ci doit être enregistrée dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Vous ne pouvez pas en créer une en l'enregistrant dans un fichier. • Chiffrement RC4. Un fichier PDF peut uniquement être chiffré au moyen de l'algorithme de chiffrement AES en mode FIPS. • Méthodes de prétraitement MD5 ou RIPEMD160. En mode FIPS, seules les familles SHA-1 et SHA-2 d'algorithmes digest peuvent être utilisées lors de la création d'une signature numérique. En mode FIPS, vous pouvez ouvrir et afficher des documents qui sont protégés par des algorithmes non conformes aux normes FIPS. Il est toutefois impossible de sauvegarder des modifications dans le document si vous utilisez une protection par mot de passe. Pour appliquer des stratégies de sécurité au document, utilisez les certificats de clé publique ou Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Le mode FIPS est configuré dans le registre Windows par un administrateur système. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Protection par mot de passe d'un document Ajout d'une protection par mot de passe Vous pouvez limiter l'accès à un document PDF en définissant des mots de passe et en verrouillant certaines fonctions, telles que l'impression et la modification. Il est impossible d'ajouter des mots de passe à un document déjà signé et certifié. Il existe deux types de mots de passe : Mot de passe d'ouverture du document Lorsque vous définissez un mot de passe d'ouverture pour un document (ou mot de passe utilisateur), les utilisateurs doivent saisir le mot de passe que vous avez spécifié pour pouvoir ouvrir le document. Mot de passe d'accès aux droits Lorsque vous définissez uniquement un mot de passe d'accès aux droits (ou mot de passe principal ), les destinataires n'ont pas besoin de mot de passe pour ouvrir le document. En revanche, il leur faudra saisir le mot de passe d'accès aux droits pour installer ou modifier les fonctions verrouillées. Si le fichier PDF est sécurisé par les deux types de mot de passe, il pourra être ouvert avec n'importe lequel des deux. En revanche, seul le mot de passe d'accès aux droits autorise l''utilisateur à modifier les fonctions verrouillées. Dû à la protection ajoutée, il est souvent recommandé d'installer les deux types de mot de passe. Tous les produits Adobe appliquent les restrictions définies par le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Toutefois, il se peut que les produits tiers ne prennent pas en charge ces paramètres ou ne les appliquent pas. Les destinataires du document risquent donc de contourner une partie ou l'ensemble des restrictions d'accès.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 239 Protection Important : Si vous oubliez le mot de passe associé à un document PDF, il n'existe aucun moyen de le retrouver à partir de ce document. Il est donc recommandé d'en conserver une copie de sauvegarde non protégée par un mot de passe. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier PDF ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF et choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Chiffrement par mot de passe. • Dans un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le porte-documents et choisissez Fichier > Modifier un porte-documents PDF > Protéger le porte-documents. Dans le menu Méthode de protection, choisissez Protection par mot de passe. 2 Si vous recevez une notification, cliquez sur Oui pour modifier la protection. 3 Choisissez un niveau de compatibilité. Cette option définit le niveau de chiffrement et la taille de la clé. L'algorithme de chiffrement et la taille de la clé sont spécifiques à une version. Assurez-vous que votre niveau de chiffrement soit égal ou inférieur à la version Acrobat ou Adobe Reader des destinataires. 4 Sélectionnez les composants de document à chiffrer. Pour autoriser la recherche dans le contenu du document, laissez les métadonnées déchiffrées. Pour créer des enveloppes de protection, utilisez Chiffrer les pièces jointes. 5 Choisissez le type de mot de passe à ajouter, puis saisissez le mot de passe dans le champ correspondant. Si vous définissez un mot de passe d'accès aux droits, établissez le niveau d'accès. 6 Pour permettre aux destinataires de copier le contenu d'un document PDF dans un autre document, sélectionnez Autoriser la copie de texte, d'images et d'autre contenu. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Lorsque vous êtes invité à confirmer le mot de passe, saisissez à nouveau le mot de passe approprié dans la zone appropriée et cliquez sur OK. Paramètres de protection par mot de passe Vous pouvez configurer les options suivantes lors de la création d’un fichier PDF ou lors de la protection d’un fichier PDF par mot de passe. La disponibilité et les valeurs proposées pour chacune des options dépendent du paramètre Compatibilité. Les options de sécurité ne sont pas disponibles pour les normes ou paramètres prédéfinis PDF/X. Compatibilité Définit le type de chiffrement utilisé pour l’ouverture d’un document protégé par mot de passe. L’option Acrobat 3 et versions ultérieures utilise un niveau de chiffrement peu élevé (RC4 à 40 bits). Les autres options utilisent un niveau supérieur (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). Acrobat 6.0 et versions ultérieures vous permettent d'activer les métadonnées en vue de l'indexation. L'option Acrobat 9.0 et versions ultérieures permet de chiffrer le document à l'aide de l'algorithme de chiffrement AES avec une taille de clé de 256 bits. Toute personne disposant d’une version d’Acrobat antérieure ne pourra pas ouvrir un document PDF doté d’un paramètre de compatibilité ultérieur. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures, le document ne peut pas être ouvert dans Acrobat version 8.0 ou antérieure. Chiffrer l’ensemble du contenu du document Sélectionnez cette option pour chiffrer le document et les métadonnées associées. Si cette option est activée, les moteurs de recherche ne peuvent accéder aux métadonnées du document. Chiffrer l’ensemble du contenu du document excepté les métadonnées Sélectionnez cette option pour chiffrer le contenu d’un document tout en permettant aux moteurs de recherche d’accéder aux métadonnées qui y sont associées. Cette option est disponible si l'option de compatibilité sélectionnée correspond à Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure. Chiffrer les pièces jointes Sélectionnez cette option pour demander la saisie d’un mot de passe afin d’ouvrir les pièces jointes. Ils pourront cependant ouvrir le fichier PDF sans mot de passe. Utilisez ce paramètre pour les enveloppes UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 240 Protection sécurisées. Cette option est disponible si l'option de compatibilité sélectionnée correspond à Acrobat 7.0 ou version ultérieure. Exiger un mot de passe pour l’ouverture du document Sélectionnez cette option pour obliger les utilisateurs à saisir le mot de passe indiqué pour l’ouverture du document. Cette option est indisponible si l’option Chiffrer les pièces jointes est sélectionnée. Mot de passe d’ouverture du document Indiquez le mot de passe nécessaire aux utilisateurs pour ouvrir le fichier PDF. Remarque : Si vous avez oublié un mot de passe, il est impossible de le récupérer à partir du document. Par conséquent, il est conseillé de noter les mots de passe et de les conserver en lieu sûr. Restreindre la modification et l'impression du document Restreint l’accès aux paramètres de sécurité du fichier PDF. Si le fichier est ouvert dans Acrobat, l’utilisateur peut le visualiser, mais il doit indiquer le mot de passe des droits d’accès pour modifier les paramètres de protection et de droits d'accès. Si le fichier est ouvert dans Illustrator®, Photoshop® ou InDesign®, l'utilisateur devra entre le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Il est impossible d''ouvrir un fichier en mode affichage uniquement. Modifier le mot de passe d'accès aux droits Indiquez le mot de passe requis pour modifier les paramètres de droits. Cette option est disponible uniquement si l’option précédente est sélectionnée. Impression autorisée Indique le niveau d’impression autorisé aux utilisateurs pour le document PDF. • Non Empêche l’utilisateur d’imprimer le document. • Faible résolution (150 ppp) Permet aux utilisateurs d’imprimer à une résolution maximale de 150 ppp. L’impression risque d’être plus lente, chaque page étant imprimée comme image bitmap. Cette option est uniquement disponible si l’option de compatibilité est définie sur Acrobat 5.0 () ou version ultérieure. • Haute résolution Permet aux utilisateurs d’imprimer en utilisant la résolution de leur choix, en transférant une sortie vectorielle de haute qualité à des imprimantes PostScript ou dotées de fonctionnalités avancées pour l’impression de haute qualité. Modifications autorisées Définit les opérations de modification autorisées dans le document PDF. • Non Empêche les utilisateurs d’apporter au document toutes les modifications répertoriées dans le menu Modifications autorisées, telles que le remplissage de champs de formulaire ou l’ajout de commentaires. • Insertion, suppression et rotation des pages Permet aux utilisateurs d’insérer, de supprimer et de faire pivoter des pages, mais aussi de créer des signets et des vignettes. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). • Remplir les champs de formulaire et signer les champs existants Permet aux utilisateurs de remplir des formulaires et d’apposer des signatures numériques. Cette option ne les autorise pas à insérer des commentaires, ni à créer des champs de formulaire. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). • Commentaire, remplir les champs de formulaire et signer les champs existants Permet aux utilisateurs d’ajouter des commentaires, d’apposer des signatures numériques et de remplir des formulaires. Cette option n’autorise pas les utilisateurs à déplacer des objets de page ni à créer des champs de formulaire. • Tout sauf l’extraction des pages Permet aux utilisateurs de modifier le document, de créer et de remplir les champs de formulaire, ainsi que d’ajouter des commentaires et d’apposer des signatures numériques. Autoriser la copie de texte, d’images et d’autre contenu Permet aux utilisateurs de sélectionner et de copier le contenu d’un document PDF. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 241 Protection Activer l’accès au texte pour les lecteurs d’écran destinés aux malvoyants Permet aux utilisateurs malvoyants de lire le document à l’aide de lecteurs d’écran, mais n’autorise pas les utilisateurs à copier ni à extraire le contenu. Cette option est uniquement disponible pour un niveau de chiffrement élevé (RC4 ou AES à 128 bits). Suppression de la protection par mot de passe Si vous en avez reçu les droits, vous pouvez supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF ouvert. Si le document PDF est sécurisé à l'aide d'une stratégie de protection basée sur un serveur, seul l'auteur de la stratégie ou l'administrateur système pourront la modifier. 1 Dans le fichier PDF ouvert, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. • Dans le panneau Protection de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés du document, choisissez Aucune protection dans le menu Méthode de protection. 2 Vos options varient en fonction du type de protection par mot de passe joint au document : • Si le document ne possède qu'un mot de passe d'ouverture du document, cliquez sur OK pour le supprimer du document. • Si le document est doté d'un mot de passe d'accès aux droits, entrez-le dans la zone de saisie de mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Cliquez sur OK pour confirmer l'action. Protection par certificat d'un document Protection par certificat Utilisez des certificats pour chiffrer des documents et pour vérifier la signature numérique. Une signature numérique garantit aux destinataires que le document vient de vous. Le chiffrement permet de s'assurer que seul le destinataire prévu peut visualiser le contenu du document. Un certificat conserve le composant à clé publique d'une ID numérique. Lorsque vous sécurisez un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat, vous spécifiez les destinataires et définissez les niveaux d'accès au fichier pour chaque destinataire ou pour chaque groupe. Par exemple, vous pouvez autoriser un groupe à signer et à remplir des formulaires, et permettre à un autre de modifier le texte ou de supprimer des pages. Vous pouvez spécifier des certificats à partir de la liste d'identités approuvées, de fichiers situés sur le disque dur, d'un serveur LDAP ou du magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement). N'oubliez jamais d'inclure votre propre certificat dans la liste des destinataires de sorte à pouvoir ouvrir le document plus tard. Remarque : Dans la mesure du possible, chiffrez les documents à l'aide de certificats d'identifications numériques tierces. En cas de perte ou de vol d'un certificat, l'autorité l'ayant délivré peut le remplacer. Si une identification numérique autosignée est supprimée, tous les fichiers PDF chiffrés à l'aide du certificat de cette identification numérique sont définitivement inaccessibles. Chiffrer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat 1 Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Protection par certificat ou cliquez sur le bouton Protection dans la barre d'outils Tâches, puis sélectionnez Chiffrement par certificat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 242 Protection 3 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, cliquez sur Oui. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de protection par certificat, sélectionnez les composants du document à chiffrer. 5 Dans le menu Algorithme de chiffrement, choisissez un taux de chiffrement, puis cliquez sur Suivant. L'algorithme de chiffrement et la taille de la clé sont spécifiques à une version. Les destinataires doivent disposer de la version Acrobat ou Adobe Reader correspondante ( ou version ultérieure) afin de déchiffrer et lire le document. • Si vous sélectionnez AES à 128 bits, les destinataires doivent disposer de la version 7.0 ou ultérieure d'Adobe Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader pour ouvrir le document. • Si vous sélectionnez AES à 256 bits, vous devez ouvrir le document dans la version 9 ou ultérieure d'Adobe Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader. 6 Créez la liste des destinataires du document PDF chiffré : N'oubliez jamais d'inclure votre propre certificat dans la liste des destinataires de sorte à pouvoir ouvrir le document plus tard. • Cliquez sur Rechercher pour localiser les identités sur un serveur de répertoires ou dans la liste des identités approuvées.. • Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher le fichier contenant les certificats des identités approuvées. • Pour définir les restrictions de modification et d'impression du document, sélectionnez les destinataires depuis la liste, puis cliquez sur Droits. 7 Vérifiez vos paramètres en cliquant sur Suivant, puis cliquez sur Terminer. Lorsqu'un destinataire de la liste ouvre le document PDF, les paramètres de protection qui lui sont associés sont appliqués. Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 256 « Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur » à la page 243 « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 114 Modification ou suppression du chiffrement d'un document PDF Vous pouvez modifier ou supprimer les paramètres de protection des fichiers PDF que vous avez chiffrés. Modification des paramètres de chiffrement 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Afficher les paramètres de protection. 3 Cliquez sur Modifier les paramètres. 4 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes, puis cliquez sur Suivant. • Pour chiffrer des composants de document différents, sélectionnez cette option. • Pour modifier l'algorithme de chiffrement, choisissez-le dans le menu.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 243 Protection 5 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour vérifier l'identité approuvée d'un destinataire, sélectionnez ce dernier, puis cliquez sur Détails. • Pour supprimer des destinataires, sélectionnez-les et cliquez sur Supprimer. Ne supprimez pas votre certificat à moins que vous ne désiriez plus accéder au document à l'aide de celui-ci. • Pour modifier les droits des destinataires, sélectionnez ces derniers, puis choisissez Droits. 6 Cliquez sur Suivant puis sur Terminer. Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document et enregistrez le document pour appliquer les modifications. Suppression des paramètres de chiffrement 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. 3 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le mot de passe d'accès aux droits. Si vous ne le connaissez pas, contactez l'auteur du document PDF. Partage d'un certificat avec d'autres utilisateurs Les entreprises qui utilisent des certificats pour sécuriser les flux de production stockent souvent les certificats sur un serveur de répertoires dont ces personnes se servent pour développer leur liste d'identités approuvées. Lorsque vous recevez un certificat d'une personne, vous pouvez l'ajouter à votre liste d'identités approuvées. Vous pouvez définir les paramètres d'approbation de sorte que toutes les signatures numériques et documents certifiés créés à l'aide d'un certificat spécifique soient approuvés. Vous pouvez également importer des certificats d'un magasin de certificats, tel que celui de Windows. Un magasin de certificats contient généralement de nombreux certificats délivrés par différentes autorités de certification. Pour des informations complètes sur le partage des certificats, reportez-vous au manuel Document Security User Guide For Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Remarque : Les fournisseurs tiers de protection valident généralement les identités par l'utilisation de méthodes propriétaires. Ou ils intègrent leur méthode de validation à l'aide deAcrobat. Si vous utilisez un fournisseur de protection tiers, consultez la documentation du fournisseur tiers. Voir aussi « Exporter les paramètres de protection » à la page 255 Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur Les certificats que vous recevez d'autres personnes sont conservés dans la liste des identités approuvées. Celle-ci est comparable à un carnet d'adresses et vous permet d'authentifier les signatures de ces utilisateurs sur tous les documents qu'ils vous envoient. Voir aussi « Chiffrer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'un certificat » à la page 241UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 244 Protection Envoi d'une requête de certificat à un autre utilisateur 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Cliquez sur Requête de contact. 3 Saisissez vos nom, adresse électronique et coordonnées. 4 Pour permettre aux autres utilisateurs d'ajouter votre certificat à leur liste d'identités approuvées, cochez l'option Inclure mes certificats. 5 Sélectionnez Envoyer la requête par messagerie ou Enregistrer la requête. Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant. 6 Sélectionnez le fichier d'identification numérique à utiliser et cliquez sur Sélectionner. 7 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si la boîte de dialogue Ecrire le message apparaît, saisissez l'adresse électronique de la personne à laquelle vous demandez un certificat, puis cliquez sur Envoyer par messagerie. Envoyez le message qui s'affiche, avec le certificat en pièce jointe, via l'application de messagerie par défaut. • Si la boîte de dialogue Exporter les données sous s'affiche, indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier, cliquez sur Enregistrer, puis sur OK. Ajout d'un certificat à partir d'un message électronique Lorsqu'un contact vous envoie un certificat par messagerie électronique, celui-ci s'affiche en pièce jointe sous format PDF. 1 Cliquez deux fois sur la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Définir l'approbation des contacts dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche. 2 Sélectionnez les options d'approbation qui se trouvent dans l'onglet Approbation de la boîte de dialogue Importer les paramètres de contact. • Sélectionnez Signatures et certificat racine approuvé uniquement si cela est nécessaire à la validation d'une signature numérique. Si vous définissez un certificat en tant qu'ancre d'approbation, vous empêchez sa vérification de révocation (ou celle de tout autre certificat faisant partie de la chaîne). • Pour autoriser des actions potentiellement dangereuses, cliquez sur Protection par certification de document puis sélectionnez les options voulues. Contenu dynamique Inclut les fichiers FLV et SWF ainsi que les liens externes. Scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés Permet d'approuver les scripts incorporés. Exploitations de système privilégiées Inclut la mise en réseau, impression ou l'accès aux fichiers. 3 Cliquez sur OK pour afficher les détails d'importation, puis cliquez à nouveau sur OK. Ajout d'un certificat à partir d'une signature numérique dans un document PDF Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter un certificat à la liste des identités approuvées à partir d'un document PDF signé en commençant par authentifier l'empreinte auprès de l'émetteur ou du certificat. 1 Ouvrez le document PDF contenant la signature autosignée. 2 Ouvrez le panneau des signatures et sélectionnez le certificat. 3 Dans le menu Options, cliquez sur Afficher les propriétés de la signature, puis sur Certificat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 245 Protection 4 Si le certificat est autosigné, contactez l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs d'empreinte de l'onglet Détails sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs correspondent aux valeurs de l'émetteur. 5 Cliquez sur l'onglet Approbation, sur Ajouter aux identités approuvées, puis sur OK. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Importer les paramètres de contact, spécifiez les options d'approbation, puis cliquez sur OK. Importation d'un certificat Si vous détenez un certificat qui est déjà présent dans votre système de fichier, vous pouvez l'importer dans Acrobat pour l'utiliser avec des fichiers PDF. Pour importer des certificats, trouvez leur lieu de stockage (nom du fichier et nom du chemin). 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Dans le menu Affichage, sélectionnez Contacts, puis cliquez sur Ajouter des contacts. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si les identifications numériques de certificats Windows sont autorisées, sélectionnez le répertoire et le groupe appropriés. • Si votre entreprise a configuré un répertoire de recherche d'identités, cliquez sur Rechercher pour localiser les certificats. • Cliquez sur Parcourir, sélectionnez le fichier certificat, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 4 Sélectionnez le certificat que vous venez d'ajouter à la liste des contacts afin de l'ajouter à celle des certificats. Sélectionnez le certificat dans la liste des certificats, puis cliquez sur Détails. 5 Si le certificat est autosigné, contactez l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs d'empreinte de l'onglet Détails sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs correspondent aux valeurs de l'émetteur. 6 Cliquez sur Approbation pour spécifier les options d'approbation et cliquez ensuite sur OK. Configurez Acrobat pour effectuer une recherche dans le magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement). 1 Dans les préférences de protection, cliquez sur Préférences avancées. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Intégration à Windows, puis cochez la case Autoriser la recherche d'autres certificats dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Sélectionnez les options voulues, puis cliquez deux fois sur OK. Les certificats d'approbation du magasin de certificats Windows ne sont pas recommandés. Importation d'un certificat à l'aide de l'assistant d'importation de certificat de Windows (Windows) Si vous utilisez le magasin de certificats Windows pour organiser les certificats, vous pouvez importer ces derniers à l'aide d'un assistant disponible à partir de l'Explorateur Windows. Pour importer des certificats, trouvez leur lieu de stockage (nom du fichier et nom du chemin). 1 Dans l'Explorateur Windows, cliquez sur le fichier certificat avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Installer le fichier PFX. 2 Suivez les invites affichées à l'écran afin d'ajouter le certificat au magasin de certificats Windows.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 246 Protection 3 Si vous êtes invité à valider le certificat avant de l'installer, prenez note des valeurs de prétraitement (des empreintes) MD5 et SHA-1. Contactez ensuite l'émetteur du certificat afin de vous assurer que les valeurs sont correctes. Approuvez le certificat uniquement si ces valeurs sont correctes. Cliquez sur OK. Association d'un certificat à un contact Si vous avez un contact qui n' est pas associé à un certificat ou si vous désirez modifier le certificat associé à un contact, suivez les étapes suivantes : Un contact doit posséder au minimum un certificat valable pour échanger des fichiers PDF chiffrés. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Sélectionnez le contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Cliquez sur Associer un certificat. 4 Sélectionnez un certificat, puis cliquez sur OK. Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Authentification des informations d'un certificat La boîte de dialogue Programme de visualisation des certificats fournit des attributs utilisateur, ainsi que d'autres informations relatives au certificat. Lorsque des utilisateurs tiers importeront votre certificat, ils vous demanderont probablement de comparer vos informations d'empreinte avec celles qui accompagnent le certificat. (L'empreinte désigne les valeurs de prétraitement MD5 et SHA1.) Vous avez la possibilité de vérifier les informations associées à vos fichiers d'identification numérique ou à ceux que vous avez importés. Pour plus d'informations sur la vérification des certificats, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. La boîte de dialogue Programme de visualisation des certificats fournit les informations suivantes: • La période de validité du certificat • L'utilisation prévue du certificat • Les données du certificat, telles que le numéro de série et la méthode de clé publique. Vous pouvez également vérifier si l'autorité de certification n'a pas révoqué le certificat. Les certificats sont en général révoqués lorsqu'un employé quitte l'entreprise ou que la protection n'est plus optimale. Authentifiez votre certificat 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez votre identification numérique, puis cliquez sur Détails du certificat . Authentifiez les informations reprises dans le certificat d'un contact 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 247 Protection 2 Sélectionnez le contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du certificat, puis cliquez sur Certificat. Définition du niveau d'approbation d'un certificat Dans Acrobat ou Adobe Reader, la signature d'un document certifié ou signé n'est valable que si vous approuvez la relation avec le signataire. Le niveau d'approbation du certificat indique pour quelles actions vous approuvez le signataire. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres d'approbation des certificats afin d'autoriser ou d'interdire des actions spécifiques. Par exemple, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres pour activer le contenu dynamique ainsi que le script Java script incorporé au document certifié. Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Sélectionnez un contact, puis cliquez sur Détails. 3 Sélectionnez le nom du certificat, puis cliquez sur Modifier l'approbation. 4 Dans l'onglet Approbation, sélectionnez l'un des éléments suivants pour lequel ce certificat doit être approuvé : Signatures et certificat racine approuvé Permet d'approuver les signatures créées instantanément par le certificat en question. Le certificat racine constitue l'autorité d'origine dans une chaîne d'autorités de certificats ayant délivré le certificat. L'approbation du certificat racine indique que vous approuvez tous les certificats délivrés par l'autorité de certification correspondante. Documents ou données signées Reconnaît l'identité du signataire Documents certifiés Permet d'approuver les documents que l'auteur a certifiés par une signature. Vous approuvez le signataire pour la certification de documents et vous acceptez les actions liées au document certifié. Lorsque la fonction Documents certifiés est sélectionnée, les options suivantes sont disponibles : Contenu dynamique Permet de lancer les films, les fichiers son ou tout autre élément dynamique dans un document certifié.. Scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés Permet d'exécuter un script Java script privilégié incorporé à des fichiers PDF. Les fichiers Java script peuvent être utilisés à des fins malveillantes. Il est recommandé de sélectionner uniquement cette option en cas de besoin sur des certificats que vous avez approuvés. Exploitations de système privilégiées Permet d'utiliser des opérations système (mise en réseau, impression ou accès aux fichiers) dans des documents. Remarque : Autorisez uniquement les scripts JavaScript incorporés avec privilèges élevés et les opérations système privilégiées pour des sources que vous approuvez et avec lesquelles vous travaillez en étroite collaboration (ex: votre employeur ou le prestataire de services). 5 Cliquez sur OK, puis sur Fermer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 248 Protection Suppression d'un certificat des identités approuvées 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Gérer les identités approuvées. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Gérer les identités approuvées. 2 Dans le menu Afficher, choisissez Certificats. 3 Sélectionnez le certificat et cliquez sur Supprimer. Stockage de certificats utilisateur sur des serveurs de répertoires Les serveurs de répertoires sont en général utilisés comme référentiels d'identités centralisés au sein d'une organisation. Ils constituent donc un emplacement idéal pour le stockage de certificats utilisateur dans les entreprises se servant de certificats de chiffrement. Les serveurs de répertoires vous permettent de repérer des certificats sur des serveurs réseau, tels que des serveurs LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). Une fois le certificat repéré, ajoutez-le à votre liste d’identités approuvées pour ne plus avoir à le rechercher. Agrandissez la zone de stockage des certificats approuvés pour faciliter l'utilisation du chiffrement dans votre groupe de travail. Cette opération peut être effectuée par tous les membres du groupe de travail. Pour plus d'informations sur les serveurs de répertoires, reportez-vous au manuel Digital Signature User Guide for Adobe Acrobat and Adobe Reader (PDF) à l 'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Importation d'une configuration de serveur de répertoires (Windows uniquement) Vous importez les paramètres de serveurs de répertoires depuis un fichier FDF. Avant d'ouvrir le fichier FDF, assurezvous que vous approuvez le fournisseur du fichier en question. 1 Pour ouvrir le fichier FDF, cliquez deux fois sur celui-ci et effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Serveurs de répertoires dans le panneau de gauche, puis cliquez sur Importer. Sélectionnez le fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Si le fichier FDF est signé, cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés de la signature pour vérifier le statut actuel de la signature. 4 Cliquez sur Importer pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Importer une configuration de répertoires. 5 Cliquez sur OK lorsque, le cas échéant, vous êtes invité à confirmer votre choix. Le serveur de répertoires s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de protection. Importation d'une configuration de serveur de répertoires (Windows uniquement) Bien qu'il soit recommandé d'exporter les paramètres de protection, vous pouvez exporter des paramètres de répertoire dans un fichier FDF (Form Data Format). Utilisez le fichier FDF pour configurer le serveur de répertoires sur un autre ordinateur. 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cliquez sur Identité, puis indiquez votre nom, votre entreprise et votre adresse électronique afin de créer votre profil. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 249 Protection 3 Sélectionnez Serveurs de répertoires dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur un ou plusieurs serveurs dans la liste de droite. 4 Cliquez sur Exporter, sélectionnez un emplacement cible, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Pour prouver que le fichier vient de votre part, cliquez sur Signer, apposez votre signature et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour sauvegarder le fichier, indiquez son nom et son emplacement, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. • Pour envoyer le fichier en tant que pièce jointe, tapez une adresse électronique dans la zone A, cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Terminer. Voir aussi « Exporter les paramètres de protection » à la page 255 Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES est un système de protection serveur qui permet de contrôler dynamiquement des documents PDF. Il est possible de configurer et d'utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES avec des systèmes d'entreprise du type LDAP et ADS, entre autres. Les stratégies fournies par Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur le serveur et peuvent être mises à jour à partir de ce dernier. Pour exploiter ces stratégies, les utilisateurs doivent se connecter au serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Les stratégies de protection sont stockées sur un serveur exécutant Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, mais pas les fichiers PDF. Dans certains cas, les utilisateurs peuvent avoir à se connecter au serveur, afin d'ouvrir ou de continuer à utiliser des documents PDF protégés par une stratégie. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration d'un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur Aide sur le site Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, après vous être connecté à votre compte. Connexion à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur les serveurs Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management dans le panneau gauche. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Créer . 4 Saisissez un nom dans le champ Nom et un URL dans la zone Nom du serveur. Ajoutez le numéro de port et cliquez sur Connexion à ce serveur. 5 Saisissez le nom d'utilisateur et le mot de passe de votre compte, puis cliquez sur OK. Affichage des stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Gérer mon compte. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 250 Protection La page Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management s'ouvre dans votre navigateur Web. 2 Si vous y êtes invité, indiquez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Connexion. 3 Cliquez sur le lien Stratégies sur la page. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur le lien d'aide situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre. Configuration d'une stratégie de protection Les types de stratégie de protection Si vous appliquez souvent les mêmes paramètres de protection à de nombreux documents PDF, vous pouvez les enregistrer en tant que stratégie à réutiliser. Protection Les stratégies sont un moyen de gagner du temps et d'établir un flux de production qui est plus sécurisé et homogène. La création de stratégies par mot de passe et certificat permet de réutiliser des paramètres de protection pour autant de documents PDF que vous souhaitez. Il existe deux types de stratégie de protection: • Les stratégies d'entreprise s'avèrent particulièrement utiles lorsque vous voulez accorder l'accès à des documents PDF à des tiers pendant une période limitée. Les stratégies Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, auquel les utilisateurs doivent avoir accès pour pouvoir les utiliser. Pour créer ces stratégies, il est nécessaire de désigner les destinataires des documents à partir d'une liste dans Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES surveille l'accès aux documents PDF et aux événements de contrôle en fonction de la stratégie de protection définie. Vous ne pouvez utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES que si votre entreprise a acquis la licence logicielle et vous l'a attribuée. • Les stratégies utilisateur sont des stratégies créées et appliquées par les utilisateurs. Si vous appliquez les mêmes options de protection à plusieurs documents, vous pouvez gagner du temps en créant une stratégie utilisateur. Appliquez ensuite cette stratégie utilisateur aux documents. Les stratégies utilisateur relatives aux mots de passe et aux certificats de clé publique sont stockées sur l'ordinateur local. En accédant à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, vous pouvez également créer une stratégie utilisateur stockée sur un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Vous seul pourrez accéder à cette stratégie. Authentification d'une stratégie d'entreprise Outre la réutilisation de paramètres de protection, les stratégies stockées sur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES permettent d'attribuer une date d'échéance aux documents et de les révoquer, quel que soit le nombre de copies créées ou diffusées. Vous pouvez également surveiller la gestion des documents protégés grâce au suivi des utilisateurs qui les ouvrent. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 251 Protection Stratégies de protection A. Les stratégies sont stockées sur le serveur. B. Les stratégies sont appliquées au document PDF. C. Les utilisateurs ne peuvent ouvrir, modifier et imprimer le document que si la stratégie les y autorise. La configuration des stratégies de protection serveur comprend quatre étapes principales : Configuration du serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management L'administrateur système de la société ou du groupe est la personne qui s'occupe en général de la configuration d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, de la gestion des comptes et de la mise en place des stratégies d'entreprise. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, voir le site Web d'Adobe. Publication d'un document doté d'une stratégie de protection Un auteur crée un document PDF et lui applique une stratégie stockée sur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. Le serveur génère une licence et une clé de chiffrement unique pour le document PDF. Acrobat incorpore la licence au document PDF et chiffre celui-ci à l'aide de la clé de chiffrement. L'auteur ou l'administrateur peuvent se servir de cette licence pour effectuer le suivi du document. Affichage d'un document doté d'une stratégie de protection Lorsque des utilisateurs essaient d'ouvrir un document PDF protégé dans Acrobat 9 (ou Reader 9), ils doivent impérativement s'identifier. Si l'utilisateur obtient l'accès au document PDF, ce document est déchiffré et ouvert en fonction des droits spécifiés dans la stratégie. Gestion des événements et modification des droits d'accès En se connectant à un compte Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES, l'auteur ou l'administrateur peut suivre les événements et modifier les droits d'accès aux documents PDF protégés par stratégie. L'administrateur peut afficher tous les événements système et liés au document PDF, ainsi que modifier les paramètres de configuration et les droits d'accès aux documents PDF protégés par stratégie. Création d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur Les stratégies utilisateur comprennent des mots de passe utilisateur, des certificats ou le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES pour authentifier des documents. Les stratégies par mot de passe et certificat peuvent être stockées sur un ordinateur local. Les stratégies de protection créées à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES sont stockées sur un serveur, ce qui permet de surveiller les actions et de modifier les paramètres de protection de manière dynamique. Vous ne pouvez utiliser Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES que si votre entreprise a acquis la licence logicielle et vous l'a attribuée. Voir aussi « Protection par certificat d'un document » à la page 241 « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 238 « Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES » à la page 249 Création d'une stratégie par mot de passe 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 252 Protection 2 Cliquez sur Créer. 3 Sélectionnez Mots de passe puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez un nom et une description pour la stratégie, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes et cliquez sur Suivant : • Si vous souhaitez définir des mots de passe et des restrictions chaque fois que vous appliquez cette stratégie à un document, désactivez la case à cocher Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie. • Si vous souhaitez enregistrer des mots de passe et des paramètres de restriction avec la stratégie, cochez la case Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie. 5 Indiquez un paramètre de compatibilité et configurez les options de mot de passe. Si vous avez activé l'option Enregistrer les mots de passe avec la stratégie, spécifiez le mot de passe et les restrictions. Cliquez sur OK. 6 Vérifiez les détails de la stratégie, cliquez sur Terminer, puis sur Fermer. Création d'une stratégie par certificat 1 Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Créer. 3 Sélectionnez Certificats à clé publique, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez un nom et une description pour la stratégie, puis spécifiez les composants document à chiffrer. Les certificats doivent être actuels et avoir accès à une clé autorisant le chiffrement. 5 Définir la façon dont il faut appliquer la stratégie: • Ne sélectionnez pas l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée pour créer une stratégie associée à des destinataires. • Sélectionnez l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée pour créer une stratégie associée à des documents. 6 A partir du menu, sélectionnez un algorithme de chiffrement compatible avec la version Acrobat des destinataires, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous avez sélectionné Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie, vérifiez les paramètres de protection et cliquez ensuite sur Terminer. • Si l'option Demander la liste des destinataires lors de l'application de cette stratégie n'est pas activée, spécifiez les destinataires en sélectionnant les ID numériques (y compris votre propre ID numérique). Cliquez ensuite sur Suivant. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer. La création de stratégies pour sécuriser des pièces jointes. Il est possible d'ajouter un ou plusieurs documents en les incorporant à une enveloppe de protection puis en envoyant cette enveloppe en pièce jointe. Cette méthode s'avère particulièrement utile pour l'envoi de pièces jointes protégées sans chiffrer les fichiers. Vous pouvez incorporer les documents à une enveloppe sécurisée en tant que pièces jointes, chiffrer cette enveloppe et l'envoyer aux destinataires. Les destinataires qui ouvrent l'enveloppe protégée peuvent extraire les pièces jointes et les enregistrer. Les fichiers enregistrés sont identiques aux pièces jointes d'origine et ne sont plus chiffrés après leur enregistrement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 253 Protection Par exemple, lorsque vous envoyez des documents confidentiels, dont certains ne sont pas au format PDF, vous souhaitez que les documents soient lus uniquement par le destinataire. Vous pouvez incorporer ces documents à une enveloppe sécurisée en tant que pièces jointes, chiffrer cette enveloppe et l'envoyer par courrier électronique. L'enveloppe, sa page de garde et la liste des éléments qu'elle contient sont accessibles à tout utilisateur. Cependant, seul le destinataire pourra afficher et extraire les pièces jointes incorporées afin de les lire. Incorporez les pièces jointes dans des enveloppes sécurisées pour leur assurer un transit sûr. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Créer une enveloppe sécurisée. 2 Cliquez sur Ajouter le fichier à envoyer, sélectionnez les documents à joindre puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur Suivant. 3 Sélectionnez un modèle d'enveloppe, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Sélectionnez un mode de livraison, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Si une stratégie d'enveloppe a été créée, sélectionnez-la ou sélectionnez Nouvelle stratégie, puis suivez les étapes suivantes afin de créer la stratégie. 6 Vérifiez les informations, puis cliquez sur Terminer. 7 Pour certaines stratégies, vous devrez saisir les informations que vous souhaitez ajouter à l'enveloppe. Pour permettre aux destinataires de reconnaître l'expéditeur de l'enveloppe, saisissez des informations en quantité suffisante. 8 Remplissez les informations de protection ( mot de passe, certificat, ou stratégie). 9 Lorsque l'enveloppe s'affiche, saisissez les noms des destinataires, puis cliquez sur les icônes d'enregistrement ou de messagerie dans la barre d'outils. Si vous cliquez sur l'icône de messagerie, votre application de messagerie s'ouvre par défaut avec l'enveloppe de protection en tant que pièce jointe. Indiquez les adresses électroniques des destinataires, puis envoyez le courrier électronique. Voir aussi « Application d'une stratégie de protection à des fichiers PDF » à la page 254 Création d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES Si vous disposez d'un accès à un serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, vous pouvez restreindre les droits et l'accès à un document des personnes enregistrées sur ce serveur. Lorsque vous créez une stratégie utilisateur à l'aide du serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, vous êtes redirigé vers la page Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez le fichier PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 254 Protection • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 3 Cliquez sur Créer. 4 Sélectionnez Utiliser le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Sur la page Web d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, cliquez sur l'option de stratégies, puis sur l'option de création. 6 Saisissez un nom et une description, définissez la période de validité et d'autres options le cas échéant. 7 Sélectionnez des utilisateurs ou des groupes, définissez les droits associés et cliquez sur OK. 8 Indiquez les composants document à chiffrer et si vous souhaitez utiliser un filigrane. 9 Une fois l'opération terminée, cliquez sur Enregistrer en haut de la page. Application d'une stratégie de protection à des fichiers PDF Il est possible d'appliquer à un document PDF soit une stratégie d'entreprise, soit une stratégie utilisateur. Pour appliquer une stratégie de serveur à un document, connectez-vous au serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. Il est impératif de stocker les stratégies de protection Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management sur un serveur, ce qui n'est pas le cas pour les documents PDF auxquels elles s'appliquent . Pour appliquer des stratégies à des documents PDF, vous pouvez utiliser Acrobat, des séquences de traitement par lot sur un serveur ou d'autres applications, telles que Microsoft Outlook. Seul l'administrateur des stratégies peut modifier ou supprimer des stratégies d'entreprise. Pour plus de détails sur la modification de stratégies de protection, cliquez sur le bouton Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Gérer mon compte. puis cliquez sur Aide dans le coin supérieur gauche. Voir aussi « Protection de documents à l'aide d'Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES » à la page 249 Application d'une stratégie de protection à un document PDF 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Si vous utilisez une stratégie serveur, cliquez sur le bouton Protection dans la barre d'outils Tâches. Choisissez ensuite Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management > Actualiser les stratégies de protection. L'actualisation des stratégies vous assure d' avoir accès aux stratégies serveur les plus récentes. 3 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. Sélectionnez une stratégie, puis cliquez sur Appliquer au document. Dans le menu Protection, vous pouvez distinguer les stratégies d'entreprise des stratégies utilisateur grâce à leurs icônes respectives.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 255 Protection Application d'une stratégie à une pièce jointe dans Outlook Vous pouvez envoyer différents types de fichier en tant que pièces jointes protégées dans Microsoft Outlook. Cette option peut être activée uniquement si Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES est installé et disponible dans Acrobat. 1 Dans Outlook, choisissez Fichier > Nouveau > Message. 2 Sur la barre d'outils, cliquez sur le bouton Joindre au format Adobe PDF sécurisé . 3 Sélectionnez le fichier à joindre en entrant le chemin ou en cliquant sur Parcourir. 4 Spécifiez la méthode de protection de document voulue, puis cliquez sur OK. Le fichier est converti au format PDF, puis chiffré à l'aide de la méthode de protection choisie. 5 Rédigez le contenu du message, puis cliquez sur Envoyer. Suppression d'une stratégie de protection utilisateur d'un document PDF Si vous en avez reçu les droits, vous pouvez supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF. En général, l'auteur du document a le droit de supprimer la protection d'un fichier PDF. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le fichier PDF. • Pour le porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents et choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Supprimer la protection. Exporter les paramètres de protection 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection> Exporter les paramètres de protection. 2 Choisissez le groupe de paramètres que vous souhaitez partager et cliquez sur OK. 3 Vérifiez et modifiez les paramètres de protection selon vos besoins, puis cliquez sur Exporter. 4 Sélectionnez la méthode à utiliser pour le chiffrement des paramètres de protection, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Certifiez le fichier. Copiez, modifiez ou supprimez une stratégie. 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Gérer les stratégies de protection. 2 Dans le menu Affichage, indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher l'ensemble des stratégies auxquelles vous avez accès, les stratégies utilisateur que vous avez créées ou les stratégies d’entreprise. 3 Sélectionnez une stratégie et utilisez ensuite les options que vous désirez : Remarque : Les options de modification ou de suppression des stratégies d'entreprise ne sont disponibles que si vous disposez de droits d'administrateur pour le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management. La modification de ces stratégies ne peut s'effectuer que sur le serveur Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, qui s'ouvre automatiquement lorsque vous sélectionnez une option. Copier Crée une stratégie qui est basée sur les paramètres d'une stratégie existante. Modifier La modification d'une stratégie utilisateur stockée sur l'ordinateur local n'a d'effet que sur les documents auxquels cette stratégie est appliquée après la modification en question. Dans le cas des stratégies utilisateur stockées UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 256 Protection sur le serveur, il est possible de modifier les droits d'accès et d'autres options. Cette option n’est pas disponible pour les stratégies d’entreprise. Supprimer Il est possible que cette option soit indisponible pour les stratégies d'entreprise. Favori Cette option permet d'ajouter la stratégie sélectionnée au menu Protection de la barre d'outils Tâches et au menu Options avancées > Protection. Vous pouvez appliquer l'option Favoris à plusieurs stratégies. Faites usage de cette option pour faciliter l'accès à une stratégie Une étoile s'affiche en regard d'une stratégie favorite. (Pour supprimer une stratégie des favoris, cliquez à nouveau sur Favoris.) Révocation d'un fichier PDF protégé par une stratégie Si vous devez restreindre l'accès à un document PDF protégé par stratégie que vous avez rendu accessible à un groupe d'utilisateurs, vous avez la possibilité de révoquer ce document. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans un fichier unique ou dans un composant PDF d'un porte-documents du même type de format, ouvrez le document PDF et connectez-vous à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES. • Dans un porte-documents PDF, ouvrez-le porte-documents, connectez-vous à Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management, puis choisissez Affichage> Porte-documents > Page de couverture. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Protection > Adobe Rights Management > Révoquer le document. 3 Dans le menu de la page Web, choisissez une option décrivant le motif de la révocation du document ou rédigez un message. Si vous remplacez le document révoqué, saisissez l'adresse URL du nouveau document. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer vos modifications. Création ou obtention d'une identification numérique A propos des identifications numériques Les identifications (ID) numériques contiennent une clé privée que vous protégez et une clé publique (un certificat) que vous partagez avec des tiers.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 257 Protection Une identification numérique est comparable à un permis de conduire ou un passeport. Elle constitue une preuve de votre identité pour les personnes et les institutions avec lesquelles vous communiquez électroniquement. Une identification numérique contient en général votre nom et votre adresse électronique, le nom de la société émettrice, un numéro de série et une date d'expiration. Les identifications numériques contiennent deux clés : la clé publique verrouille ou chiffre les données, et la clé privée déverrouille ou déchiffre les données. Lorsque vous signez des documents PDF, vous utilisez la clé privée pour apposer votre signature numérique. Vous diffusez le certificat contenant la clé publique et d'autres informations d'identification aux personnes devant valider votre signature, authentifier votre identité ou chiffrer des informations pour vous. Seule la clé privée déverrouille des informations chiffrées à l'aide de votre certificat. Veillez donc à la stocker en lieu sûr. Vous devez posséder une identification numérique pour signer et certifier des documents PDF, ainsi que pour les chiffrer à l'aide d'un certificat. Vous pouvez vous procurer une identification numérique auprès d'un fournisseur tiers ou en créer une autosignée. Les identifications numériques autosignées s'avèrent intéressantes dans de nombreuses situations. Toutefois, pour prouver votre identité dans la plupart des transactions commerciales, vous avez besoin d'une identification numérique émise par un fournisseur tiers approuvé appelé autorité de certification. Etant donné que l'autorité de certification est responsable de l'authentification de votre identité, choisissez-en une approuvée par les principales entreprises de commerce sur Internet. Visitez le site Web d'Adobe pour plus de détails sur les partenaires de sécurité d'Adobe qui proposent des identifications numériques et d'autres solutions de protection. S'il vous arrive de signer des documents dans différents contextes ou selon différentes méthodes de certification, vous pouvez obtenir plusieurs identifications numériques correspondant chacune à une tâche spécifique. Les identifications numériques sont habituellement protégées par un mot de passe et peuvent être stockées sur votre ordinateur sous la forme d'un fichier PKCS #12, sur une carte à puce ou un jeton matériel, dans le magasin de certificats Windows ou sur un serveur d'identifications d'itinérance. Acrobat inclut un gestionnaire de signatures par défaut qui peut accéder aux identifications numériques se trouvant à l'un de ces emplacements. (Vous devez enregistrer l'identification numérique dans Acrobat pour pouvoir l'utiliser.) Voir aussi « Partage d'un certificat avec d'autres utilisateurs » à la page 243 « Cartes à puce et jetons matériels » à la page 259 Enregistrement d'une identification numérique Vous devez enregistrer votre identification numérique dans Acrobat avant de pouvoir l'utiliser. Si vous avez créé un fichier d'identification numérique et qu'il n'apparaît pas dans la liste des identifications numériques, recherchez-le Ajoutez-le ensuite à la liste. Vous pouvez reconnaître les fichiers d'identification numérique grâce à leur extension. Pour les fichiers PKCS #12, l'extension est .pfx sous Windows et .p12 sous Mac OS. Afin de terminer cette tâche, vous avez besoin du mot de passe (le cas échéant) créé pour l'identification numérique. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans le panneau gauche. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 258 Protection 4 Sélectionnez ID numérique personnelle existante provenant et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : d'un fichier Sélectionnez cette option si vous avez obtenu une identification numérique sous forme de fichier électronique. Suivez les invites permettant de sélectionner le fichier d'identification numérique, tapez le mot de passe, puis ajoutez l'identification numérique à la liste. D'une ID numérique d'itinérance stockée sur un serveur Sélectionnez cette option pour utiliser une ID numérique stockée sur un serveur de signatures. Lorsque vous y êtes invité, tapez le nom du serveur et l'URL où se trouve l'identification d'itinérance. D'un périphérique connecté à cet ordinateur Sélectionnez cette option si un jeton matériel ou de protection est connecté à l'ordinateur. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les instructions à l'écran pour enregistrer votre ID numérique. Création d'une identification numérique Si vous n'utilisez pas d'identification numérique de fournisseur tiers, vous pouvez créer une identification numérique autosignée. Lorsque vous créez une identification numérique, celle-ci stocke une clé privée chiffrée utilisée pour la signature ou le déchiffrement des documents, ainsi qu’une clé publique incluse dans un certificat. Utilisez le certificat pour valider les signatures et chiffrer les documents. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter une ID . 3 Sélectionnez Nouvelle ID à créer maintenant, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Spécifiez l'emplacement de stockage de l'ID numérique, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Nouveau fichier d'ID numériques PKCS#12 Stocke les informations dans un fichier que vous pouvez envoyer à des tiers. Les extensions de fichier PKCS#12 sont .pfx sous Windows et .p12 sous Mac OS. Les fichiers peuvent être utilisés en alternance par les systèmes d'exploitation. Si vous déplacez un fichier d'un système d'exploitation vers un autre, Acrobat le reconnaîtra systématiquement. Magasin de certificats Windows (Windows uniquement) Stocke l'identification numérique à un emplacement également accessible pour les applications Windows. 5 Tapez le nom, l'adresse électronique et les autres informations personnelles relatives à votre ID numérique. Lorsque vous certifiez ou signez un document, le nom s'affiche dans le panneau Signatures et dans le champ de signature. 6 (Facultatif) Pour représenter les caractères étendus à l'aide de valeurs Unicode, sélectionnez Activer la prise en charge Unicode, puis spécifiez des valeurs Unicode dans les champs appropriés. 7 Choisissez une option dans le menu Algorithme de la clé. L’algorithme RSA à 2 048 bits offre une meilleure protection que celui à 1 024 bits. Ce dernier, en revanche, bénéficie d'une compatibilité plus étendue. 8 Dans le menu Utiliser l'ID numérique pour, précisez si vous voulez utiliser l'identification numérique pour les signatures, le chiffrement des données ou les deux. Cliquez sur Terminer. Vous pouvez exporter et envoyer votre fichier de certificat aux personnes susceptibles d'être amenées à authentifier votre signature. Important : Effectuez une copie de sauvegarde de votre fichier d'identification numérique. En effet, si ce fichier est perdu ou endommagé, ou si vous ne vous souvenez plus du mot de passe associé, vous ne pourrez plus l'utiliser pour apposer ou authentifier des signatures.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 259 Protection Configuration d'un compte d'identification d'itinérance Une identification d'itinérance est une identification numérique stockée sur un serveur et pouvant être téléchargée vers le dossier d'itinérance de l'abonné à la demande de ce dernier. Pour accéder à une ID d'itinérance, vous devez disposer d'une connexion Internet active et un compte d'une entreprise qui fournit des ID numérique d'itinérance. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Identifications numériques, choisissez Comptes d'ID d'itinérance, puis cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un compte. 3 Saisissez le nom et l'URL du serveur d'identifications d'itinérance, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4 Saisissez vos nom d'utilisateur et mot de passe qui vous ont été assignés ou suivez les instructions de création d'un compte. Cliquez sur Suivant, puis sur Terminer. 5 Sélectionnez votre identification d'itinérance ou cliquez sur Déconnexion. Lorsque vous utilisez une identification d'itinérance pour une tâche, vous êtes automatiquement connecté au serveur d'identifications d'itinérance si votre déclaration d'authentification n'est pas arrivée à échéance. Cartes à puce et jetons matériels Une carte à puce ressemble à une carte de crédit et stocke votre identification numérique sur une puce de microprocesseur incorporée. Vous pouvez utiliser l'identification numérique résidant sur une carte à puce pour signer et déchiffrer des documents sur des périphériques dotés d'un lecteur de carte à puce. De même, un jeton matériel de protection est un périphérique de la taille d'une clé USB qui permet de stocker des identifications numériques et des données d'authentification. Vous pouvez accéder à votre identification numérique en connectant le jeton au port USB de l'ordinateur ou du périphérique portable. Certains lecteurs de cartes à puce comprennent un clavier destiné à saisir un numéro d'identification personnel (PIN). Si vous stockez votre identification numérique sur une carte à puce ou un jeton matériel, vous devez le spécifier lorsque vous signez ou certifiez des documents. Voir aussi « Enregistrement d'une identification numérique » à la page 257 Spécification de l'identification numérique par défaut Pour éviter l'affichage répété de ces invites, sélectionnez une identification numérique à utiliser systématiquement pour la signature ou la certification des documents. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Cliquez sur Identifications numériques dans le panneau de gauche, puis sélectionnez l'identification numérique à utiliser par défaut. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Options d'utilisation , puis choisissez une tâche pour laquelle vous souhaitez définir l'ID numérique par défaut. Si vous souhaitez configurer l'ID numérique comme ID par défaut pour deux tâches, cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton Options d'utilisation et sélectionnez une seconde option.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 260 Protection Les options sélectionnées sont signalées par une coche. Si vous sélectionnez uniquement l'option de signature, une icône de signature s'affiche en regard de l'ID numérique. Si vous sélectionnez seulement l'option de chiffrement, une icône de verrou s'affiche. Si vous sélectionnez l'option de certification seule ou avec l'option de signature, une icône de ruban bleu s'affiche. Pour effacer une ID numérique par défaut, recommencez ces étapes et désélectionnez les options d'utilisation activées. Modifiez le mot de passe et le délai d'expiration d'une identification numérique Les mots de passe et délais d'expiration peuvent être définis pour des identifications PKCS#12. Si l'identification PKCS#12 contient plusieurs identifications, vous devez configurer le mot de passe et le délai d'expiration au niveau du fichier. Remarque : Les identifications numériques autosignées sont valables 5 ans. Passée la date d'expiration, vous pouvez utiliser une telle identification pour ouvrir un document, mais pas pour le signer ni le chiffrer. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Développez l'entrée Identifications numériques, puis Fichiers d'ID numériques dans la liste de gauche. Cliquez ensuite sur une identification numérique dans la liste de droite. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Changer le mot de passe. Saisissez l'ancien et le nouveau mot de passe. Confirmez le nouveau mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Avec l'ID toujours active, cliquez sur le bouton Délai d'expiration du mot de passe. 5 Spécifiez la fréquence des invites de mot de passe : Toujours Affiche une invite chaque fois que vous utilisez l'identification numérique. Après Permet de définit un intervalle. Une fois par session Affiche une invite une fois à chaque ouverture d'Acrobat. Jamais Vous n'êtes jamais invité à saisir de mot de passe. 6 Saisissez le mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Veillez à sauvegarder votre mot de passe dans un endroit sûr. Si vous perdez le mot de passe, créez une nouvelle identification numérique autosignée ou achetez une identification auprès d'un fournisseur tiers. Suppression d'une identification numérique Lorsque vous supprimez une identification numérique dans Acrobat, vous supprimez également le fichier PKCS #12 contenant la clé privée et le certificat. Avant de procéder à cette opération, assurez-vous que l'identification numérique n'est pas utilisée par d'autres programmes ou requise pour le déchiffrement de certains documents. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez supprimer que les identifications numériques autosignées créées dans Acrobat. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 261 Protection 2 Sélectionnez Identifications numériques dans la liste de gauche, puis sélectionnez l'identification numérique à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer l'ID, puis sur OK. Voir aussi « Suppression d'un certificat des identités approuvées » à la page 248 Protection d'une identification numérique En protégeant vos ID numériques, vous pouvez interdire l'utilisation non autorisée de vos clés privées pour la signature ou le déchiffrement de documents confidentiels. Assurez-vous qu'une procédure est en place au cas où votre identification numérique viendrait à être perdue ou volée. Comment protéger une identification numérique Lorsque des clés privées sont stockées sur des jetons matériels, des cartes à puce ou d'autres périphériques matériels protégés par un mot de passe ou par un code PIN, veillez à utiliser un mot de passe ou un code PIN sécurisé. Ne révélez jamais votre mot de passe. Si vous devez garder une trace écrite de votre mot de passe, conservez-la en lieu sûr. Contactez votre administrateur système pour qu'il vous guide dans le choix d'un mot de passe sécurisé. Observez les règles suivantes pour créer un mot de passe sécurisé : utilisez au moins huit caractères en combinant des minuscules et des majuscules à des chiffres et des caractères spéciaux. Choisissez un mot de passe difficile à deviner ou à pirater, mais que vous pouvez mémoriser sans avoir à le noter. N’utilisez pas de mots bien orthographiés dans quelque langue que ce soit, car ils sont vulnérables à une « attaque de dictionnaire » qui permet de trouver les mots de passe en quelques minutes. Enfin, modifiez votre mot de passe régulièrement et contactez l'administrateur système pour qu'il vous aide dans le choix d'un mot de passe sécurisé. Afin de protéger vos clés privées dans les fichiers P12/PFX, utilisez un mot de passe sécurisé et définissez correctement les options d'expiration du mot de passe. Si vous utilisez un fichier P12 pour stocker des clés privées pour la signature, définissez l'expiration de votre mot de passe afin qu'il soit toujours exigé (option par défaut). Si vous utilisez le fichier P12 pour stocker des clés privées pour le déchiffrement de documents, assurez-vous de disposer d'une copie de sauvegarde de ces clés ou du fichier P12. Vous pourrez ainsi continuer à ouvrir des documents chiffrés, même si vous perdez les clés privées. Les mécanismes utilisés pour la protection des clés privées stockées dans le magasin de certificats Windows varient en fonction de la société de stockage. Contactez le fournisseur afin de déterminer comment protéger au mieux ces clés de tout accès non autorisé et comment les sauvegarder. En général, utilisez le mécanisme d'authentification disponible le plus sûr et, le cas échéant, exigez un mot de passe ou code PIN sécurisé. En cas de perte ou de vol d'une ID numérique Si votre ID numérique a été fournie par une autorité de certification, contactez-la immédiatement et demandez la révocation du certificat actif. Cessez également d'utiliser la clé privée. Si vous avez généré votre propre ID numérique, détruisez-la et contactez toute personne à qui vous aviez envoyé la clé publique correspondante (certificat). UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 262 Protection Suppression du contenu confidentiel Préparation d'un document PDF pour la diffusion Avant de diffuser un document PDF, il est conseillé de vérifier s'il contient des informations à caractère confidentiel ou privé permettant de remonter jusqu'à vous. De telles informations peuvent être masquées ou ne pas être apparentes à première vue. Par exemple, si vous avez créé un fichier PDF, il est probable que ses métadonnées indiquent le nom de l'auteur, c'est-à-dire le vôtre. Vous souhaiterez peut-être également supprimer le contenu risquant de modifier accidentellement l'aspect du document. Les scripts JavaScript, les actions et les champs de formulaire sont des types de contenu sujets à modification. Si le document ne nécessite pas ces éléments, supprimez-les avant de le diffuser. La commande Examiner le document permet de rechercher et de supprimer le contenu masqué d'un document PDF. Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF Servez-vous de la fonction Examiner le document pour rechercher et supprimer des informations indésirables dans un document, telles que le texte masqué, les métadonnées, les commentaires et les pièces jointes. Si vous souhaitez vérifier la présence d'informations masquées dans chaque document PDF avant de le fermer ou de l'envoyer par messagerie, configurez l'option adéquate dans les préférences de documents via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 1 Choisissez Document > Examiner le document. Si des éléments sont détectés, ils sont répertoriés dans le panneau Examiner le document et signalés par une coche placée en regard de leur nom. 2 Assurez-vous que les cases sont cochées pour les seuls éléments à supprimer du document: Métadonnées Ces métadonnées fournissent des informations sur le document et sur son contenu, telles que le nom de l'auteur, les mots-clés et les informations sur les droits d'auteur, qui peuvent être utilisées par des utilitaires de recherche. Pour afficher les métadonnées, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Pièces jointes Il est possible de joindre au document PDF des fichiers de n'importe quel format sous forme de pièce jointe. Pour visualiser les pièces jointes, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes. Annotations et commentaires Cet élément comprend tous les commentaires ajoutés au document PDF à l'aide des outils de commentaire et d'annotation, notamment les fichiers joints sous forme de commentaires. Pour visualiser les commentaires, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Commentaires. Zones de formulaire Cet élément comprend les champs de formulaire (champs de signature inclus), et les actions et calculs associés. Si vous supprimez cet élément, tous les champs de formulaire sont aplatis et ne peuvent plus être remplis, modifiés ou signés. Texte masqué sur les pages Cet élément indique le texte contenu dans le document PDF qui est soit transparent, soit dissimulé par d'autres informations ou encore de la même couleur que l'arrière-plan. Pour afficher le texte masqué, cliquez sur Aperçu. Cliquez sur les boutons de flèche double pour parcourir les pages contenant du texte masqué, puis UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 263 Protection sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles : Afficher le texte masqué, Afficher le texte visible ou Afficher le texte masqué et le texte visible. Calques masqués Les documents PDF peuvent contenir plusieurs calques que vous choisissez d'afficher ou de masquer. La suppression des calques masqués élimine ces calques du document PDF et aplatit les calques restants en un seul calque. Pour visualiser les calques, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Calques. Signets Les signets sont des liens dotés d'un texte de présentation ouvrant des pages spécifiques du document PDF. Pour visualiser les signets, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets. Index de recherche incorporé Un index de recherche incorporé accélère les recherches dans le fichier. Pour savoir si le document PDF contient un index de recherche, choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. La suppression des index diminue la taille du fichier mais augmente le temps de recherche dans le document PDF. Page masquée et contenu d'image supprimés Les documents PDF conservent quelquefois le contenu qui a été supprimé et qui n'est plus visible (pages recadrées ou pages/images supprimées, par exemple). 3 Cliquez sur Supprimer afin de supprimer tous les éléments sélectionnés du fichier, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Lorsque vous supprimez des éléments sélectionnés, les éléments supplémentaires sont automatiquement éliminés du document : signatures numériques ; informations sur le document ajoutées par des applications et des modules externes tiers ; et des fonctions spéciales permettant aux utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader de réviser, de signer et de remplir les documents PDF. 4 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer, puis indiquez le nom et l'emplacement du fichier. Si vous souhaitez conserver le fichier d'origine, enregistrez le fichier sous un autre nom et/ou à un autre emplacement. Le contenu sélectionné est supprimé de manière définitive lors de l'enregistrement du fichier. Si vous fermez le fichier sans l'enregistrer, vous devez recommencer cette procédure en vous assurant d'enregistrer le fichier. 264 Chapitre 9 : Signatures numériques Une signature numérique s'utilise de la même manière qu'une signature à la main, afin d'approuver des documents. Elle permet de vérifier votre identité et peut comprendre une photo, l'image de votre signature manuscrite ou toute information personnelle de votre choix. L'auteur d'un document peut en authentifier le contenu en y apposant une signature de certification. Signatures numériques A propos des signatures numériques A l'instar d'une signature manuscrite classique, une signature numérique permet d'identifier le signataire d'un document. Contrairement à une signature manuscrite, une signature numérique est très difficile à imiter parce qu'elle contient des informations chiffrées exclusivement utilisées par le signataire et se vérifie facilement. La plupart des signatures numériques constituent ce que l'on appelle des signatures d'approbation. Les signatures qui permettent de certifier un document Adobe® PDF sont des signatures de certification. Seul le premier signataire d'un fichier PDF (en général, l'auteur) peut y ajouter une signature de certification. Une signature de certification atteste de l'authenticité du contenu d'un document. Elle permet aussi au signataire de spécifier les types de modifications autorisés, qui n'invalideront pas la certification. Toutes les modifications apportées au document sont répertoriées dans le panneau Signatures. Pour signer un document, vous devez obtenir une identification numérique ou en créer une autosignée dans Adobe Acrobat®. L'identification numérique contient une clé privée et un certificat (ou clé publique). La clé privée permet d'ajouter une signature numérique tandis que le certificat est destiné à être partagé avec des tiers qui s'en servent pour valider votre signature. Lors de l'apposition d'une signature numérique, Acrobat utilise un algorithme de hachage afin de générer un condensé de message qu'il chiffre ensuite avec votre clé privée. Acrobat incorpore ce condensé chiffré dans le fichier PDF, ainsi que les informations relatives à votre certificat, une image de votre signature et la version du document au moment de la signature. Remarque : Pour obtenir des informations actualisées concernant les signatures numériques, choisissez Aide > Support en ligne > Base de connaissances, afin d'ouvrir la page de support d'Adobe Acrobat disponible (en anglais) sur le site Web d'Adobe. Recherchez ensuite « digital signatures » (signatures numériques). Signature numérique dans un formulaire PDF Pour des articles sur les signatures numériques, reportez-vous aux ressources suivantes : • Signatures numériques dans les documents PDF et Acrobat : www.acrobatusers.com/articles/2006/07/digital_signatures/index.phpUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 265 Signatures numériques • Migration et partage des paramètres de sécurité : www.adobe.com/devnet/acrobat/pdfs/sharing_security_settings_90.pdf • Signatures numériques dans Adobe Acrobat 9, modifications et améliorations (PDF) : www.adobe.com/devnet/reader/articles/reader_compatibility.html Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 256 Création d'un aspect de signature Vous pouvez définir l'aspect de votre signature numérique en sélectionnant les options appropriées dans la section Protection de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Par exemple, vous pouvez inclure une image de votre signature manuscrite, le logo d'une société ou une photographie. Vous pouvez également créer différents aspects pour une même signature, que vous utiliserez à différentes fins. Dans certains cas, vous avez la possibilité de fournir un plus grand nombre de détails. L'aspect d'une signature peut, en outre, inclure des informations qui faciliteront son authentification par d'autres utilisateurs, telles que le motif de la signature, les coordonnées de contact, etc. Configurez ces options via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. En sélectionnant ces préférences, vous ajoutez des options à la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, qui s'affiche chaque fois que vous signez un fichier PDF : Formats de signature A. Signature textuelle B. Signature graphique 1 (Facultatif) Si vous souhaitez inclure l'image de votre signature manuscrite dans la signature numérique, numérisez-la puis enregistrez-la sous forme d'image. Placez cette seule image sur une page, puis convertissez le document au format PDF. 2 Cliquez sur le champ de signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Signer le document ou Certifier par une signature visible. Vous pouvez également définir l'aspect de votre signature numérique à partir de la section Protection de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Dans la section Aspect, sélectionnez l'une des options disponibles ou cliquez sur Créer afin de définir un nouvel aspect. 3 Dans le menu Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Signer, choisissez Créer un aspect. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration de l'aspect de la signature, saisissez le titre de l'aspect de la signature. Pour apposer une signature sur un document, vous devez la sélectionner par son titre. Il est donc recommandé de choisir une formule courte et évocatrice. A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 266 Signatures numériques 5 Pour la configuration de l'image, choisissez une option : Aucune image Affiche uniquement l'icône de signature numérique par défaut et toute autre information spécifiée dans la zone de configuration du texte. Image importée Affiche une image comportant votre signature numérique. Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure une image de votre signature manuscrite. Pour importer le fichier image, cliquez sur Fichier, puis sur Parcourir et sélectionnez le fichier en question. Nom Affiche uniquement l'icône de la signature numérique par défaut et votre nom tel qu'il figure dans votre fichier d'identification numérique. 6 Dans la zone de configuration du texte, sélectionnez les options que vous souhaitez appliquer à la signature. Cochez la case Identifiant afin d'afficher les attributs utilisateur définis dans votre ID numérique, notamment votre nom, celui de votre société et le pays où vous résidez. 7 Dans Propriétés du texte, définissez le sens d'écriture et le type de chiffres utilisés, puis cliquez sur OK. 8 (Facultatif) Si la boîte de dialogue contient la section Informations supplémentaires sur la signature, indiquez la raison pour laquelle vous signez le document, le lieu de signature et les coordonnées du contact. Ces options sont disponibles à condition de les avoir sélectionnées dans la section Préférences avancées de la boîte de dialogue Préférences (Protection > Préférences avancées > onglet Création). Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous au document Adobe Acrobat 9 Digital Signature Appearances (PDF) à l'adresse www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Voir aussi « Activation des langues se lisant de droite à gauche » à la page 59 Définition des préférences de signature 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. 2 Cliquez sur Préférences avancées, puis sur l'onglet Création. 3 (Facultatif) Si vous avez l'intention d'utiliser un module externe tiers comme méthode de signature par défaut, assurez-vous qu'il est bien installé. Choisissez la méthode par défaut de signature des documents. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des options suivantes : Inclure l'état de révocation de la signature Incorpore les informations relatives à la validité du certificat ou à sa révocation (nécessaires à la validation de la signature). Cette option accélère le processus de validation puisqu'il n'est pas nécessaire de vérifier en ligne si le certificat a été révoqué ou non. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Afficher les motifs lors de la signature Permet d'ajouter la raison qui a motivé l'apposition de votre signature dans le champ prévu à cet effet. Lors de la signature d'un fichier PDF, un menu s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document. Ce menu permet de sélectionner l'option qui décrit le mieux vos raisons de signer le fichier PDF. Afficher le lieu et les coordonnées lors de la signature Permet d'ajouter au champ de signature les informations relatives à votre situation géographique. Les coordonnées s'affichent dans l'onglet Signataire de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de signature. Lors de la signature d'un fichier PDF, la boîte de dialogue Signer le document présente des zones de texte dans lesquelles vous pouvez entrer ce type d'informations. Activer la révision des avertissements de document Analyse les documents inclus dans le processus de signature à la recherche du contenu susceptible de modifier l'aspect des documents. Le cas échéant, affiche dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document une option permettant d'examiner ce contenu. Choisissez Toujours, Jamais ou Lors de la certification d'un document. Les options disponibles dépendent du paramètre Empêcher la signature jusqu'à la révision des avertissements de document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 267 Signatures numériques Empêcher la signature jusqu'à la révision des avertissements de document Activez cette option pour obliger le signataire à examiner les avertissements liés au document avant de le signer ou de le certifier. Choisissez Toujours, Jamais ou Lors de la certification d'un document. Ajout d'un tampon temporel à une signature Vous pouvez inclure dans votre signature la date et l'heure à laquelle vous signez le document. Les tampons temporels sont plus faciles à vérifier s'ils sont associés à un certificat approuvé par une autorité. L'inclusion d'un tampon temporel permet de prouver à quel moment précis vous avez signé le document et réduit les risques de non-validité de la signature. Vous pouvez obtenir un tampon temporel d'une autorité tierce ou de l'autorité de certification qui vous a remis votre identification numérique. Les tampons temporels s'affichent dans le champ de signature, ainsi que dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de la signature. Si un serveur de tampons temporels est configuré, le tampon apparaît sous l'onglet Date/Heure de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de la signature. En l'absence d'un serveur de tampons temporels, le champ de signature affiche l'heure locale de l'ordinateur au moment de l'apposition de la signature. Remarque : Si vous n'avez pas incorporé de tampon temporel lors de la signature du document, vous pouvez en ajouter un ultérieurement à votre signature. (Voir « Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme » à la page 274.) Si le tampon temporel est ajouté après la signature du document, l'heure utilisée est celle du serveur de tampons temporels. Configuration d'un serveur de tampons temporels Pour configurer un serveur de tampons temporels, vous devez disposer du nom et de l'URL du serveur, du fichier FDF (Forms Data Format) contenant les paramètres serveur ou d'un fichier de paramètres de protection contenant les informations relatives au serveur de tampons temporels. Si vous disposez d'un fichier de paramètres de protection, installez-le et ne suivez pas les instructions de configuration d'un serveur données ci-dessous. Assurez-vous que le fichier de paramètres de protection provient d'une source approuvée. Avant de l'installer, demandez la permission à votre administrateur système ou au service informatique. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez Serveurs de tampons temporels dans le panneau gauche. 3 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous disposez d'un fichier FDF contenant les paramètres du serveur de tampons temporels, cliquez sur le bouton Importer . Sélectionnez le fichier FDF, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Si vous disposez de l'URL du serveur de tampons temporels, cliquez sur le bouton Créer . Indiquez un nom, puis l'URL du serveur. Indiquez si le serveur requiert un nom d'utilisateur et un mot de passe, puis cliquez sur OK. Définition d'un serveur de tampons temporels par défaut Si vous avez configuré plusieurs serveurs de tampons temporels, définissez-en un par défaut. Remarque : Avant de définir un serveur de tampons temporels par défaut, il peut s'avérer utile de vérifier si l'autorité concernée facture des frais d'utilisation. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Paramètres de protection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 268 Signatures numériques • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Paramètres de protection. 2 Sélectionnez le serveur de tampons temporels, puis cliquez sur le bouton Par défaut . 3 Cliquez sur OK pour confirmer votre sélection. Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 276 A propos des signatures sur tablette graphique Vous avez la possibilité de signer un fichier PDF à l'aide d'une tablette graphique ou d'un autre dispositif de saisie. Vous pouvez alors appliquer une encre signature au sein d'Acrobat ou utiliser un logiciel tiers qui offrira des possibilités supplémentaires. Les fournisseurs de signatures numériques, tels que Silanis et CIC (Communication Intelligence Corporation), proposent cette fonctionnalité par le biais d'un module externe pris en charge par Acrobat. Ce type de module externe peut restreindre votre accès à certaines fonctions de cryptage d'Acrobat. Pour plus d'informations sur les fournisseurs tiers, rendez-vous sur le site Web d'Adobe. Signature d'un fichier PDF Avant de signer un fichier PDF Vous pouvez accélérer le processus de signature et optimiser les résultats en effectuant à l'avance les préparations suivantes : Remarque : Il faut parfois utiliser une identification numérique particulière pour signer. Par exemple, une société ou un service administratif peut exiger des utilisateurs qu'ils se servent exclusivement des identifications numériques émises dans son service pour signer des documents officiels. Prenez connaissance des stratégies appliquées en matière de signatures numériques dans votre organisation afin de déterminer la source appropriée pour votre identification numérique. • Obtenez une identification numérique ou créez-en une autosignée dans Acrobat. Remarque : Il est impossible de créer une identification numérique autosignée en mode FIPS. • Définissez la méthode de signature par défaut. • Créez l'aspect de votre signature numérique. Pour plus d'informations à ce sujet, voir « Création d'un aspect de signature » à la page 265. • Utilisez le mode Aperçu du document afin de supprimer tout contenu dynamique qui pourrait modifier l'aspect du document et vous inciter à apposer votre signature sur un document inapproprié. Pour plus de détails sur l'utilisation du mode Aperçu du document, voir « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 270. • Examinez toutes les pages du document avant de le signer. Le document peut contenir des champs de signature sur plusieurs pages. Voir aussi « A propos des identifications numériques » à la page 256UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 269 Signatures numériques Signature d'un fichier PDF Vous pouvez approuver un document PDF en y apposant une signature numérique ou une encre signature. La signature numérique permet à plusieurs personnes d'apposer plusieurs signatures au fichier PDF. Lorsque vous signez un document, votre signature numérique s'affiche dans le champ de signature. Son aspect dépend des options que vous avez choisies. Les informations qui constituent votre signature numérique sont incorporées au fichier PDF. Dans Acrobat, le premier signataire du document (en général l'auteur) peut y ajouter une signature de certification lui permettant de limiter les modifications du document. Une encre signature correspond à une marque apposée à la main sur la page, semblable à un dessin libre réalisé avec l'outil Crayon de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. L'encre signature n'offre pas la fonctionnalité avancée de la signature numérique. Contrairement à cette dernière, une encre signature ne fait pas appel à une identification numérique ; il est donc impossible de vérifier l'identité du signataire. La validité d'une signature numérique est vérifiable et prend fin en cas de modification du document, alors que l'encre signature ne comporte aucun état de validité et ne peut indiquer que le document a été modifié. Les encres signatures n'apparaissent pas dans le panneau Signatures du document. Remarque : Pour permettre aux utilisateurs de Reader de signer des documents avec différents types de signatures, choisissez Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader. Apposition d'une signature numérique dans un fichier PDF Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, apposez votre signature en mode Aperçu du document. Reportez-vous à la rubrique « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 270. 1 Cliquez sur le champ de signature ou effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Signer le document. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Signer > Signer le document. • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Signer le document. 2 Si le document ne contient aucun champ de signature, vous êtes invité à en tracer un pour y insérer votre signature. 3 Si vous n'avez spécifié aucune identification numérique, vous êtes invité à le faire ou à créer une identification numérique autosignée. il est déconseillé d'utiliser des certificats autosignés pour les activités exigeant un haut niveau d'intégrité sur l'identité du signataire. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Signer le document, choisissez une identification numérique à partir du menu Signature. Pour définir une nouvelle identification numérique, choisissez Créer une ID. 5 Pour créer l'aspect de votre signature ou pour tirer parti d'un aspect déjà défini, utilisez le menu Aspect. Si vous n'avez pas encore défini d'aspect ou si vous souhaitez en prévoir un spécialement pour cette signature, choisissez Créer un aspect. 6 Si la valeur de départ et les règles relatives au document vous y autorisent, vous pouvez choisir de verrouiller le document après la signature en activant l'option correspondante. Cette option empêche d'apporter des modifications supplémentaires aux champs de formulaire ou d'ajouter des signatures visibles. Remarque : L'option Verrouiller le document après la signature n'est pas disponible s'il existe d'autres champs de signature non signés ou si le document est géré par le serveur Adobe LiveCycle® Workflow. 7 Si vous avez sélectionné des préférences avancées de signatures numériques, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes en fonction des options choisies dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences : UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 270 Signatures numériques Pour plus d'informations au sujet des préférences avancées de signatures numériques, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Création d'un aspect de signature » à la page 265. • Choisissez le motif de la signature du document. • Entrez votre situation géographique et vos coordonnées. • Consultez les avertissements liés au document, relatifs au contenu pouvant avoir un impact sur la signature. 8 Si votre identification numérique nécessite un mot de passe, saisissez-le dans la zone Mot de passe. Remarque : Certaines identifications numériques sont configurées pour demander un mot de passe ou un autre moyen d'identification de l'utilisateur dès que vous cliquez sur le bouton Signer. 9 Cliquez sur Signer, indiquez le nom de fichier sous lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer le document signé, puis cliquez sur Enregistrer. Choisissez un nom de fichier différent du document non signé original afin de conserver une copie de celui-ci. Si vous signez à partir d'Adobe Reader, utilisez le bouton d'envoi pour soumettre le document signé au serveur après signature. Apposition d'une encre signature dans un fichier PDF L' encre signature reprend la couleur par défaut de l'outil d'annotation Crayon. Pour modifier la couleur de la signature, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l'outil Crayon de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations. Choisissez ensuite Propriétés d'outils par défaut et modifiez la couleur sous l'onglet Aspect. 1 Pour apposer une encre signature dans un fichier PDF, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Signer et certifier > Appliquer l'encre signature. • Dans Reader, choisissez Document > Signer > Appliquer l'encre signature. (Cette commande est uniquement disponible si l'auteur du fichier PDF a activé les droits de signature numérique et de commentaire.) • Cliquez sur le bouton Signer dans la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Appliquer l'encre signature. Le curseur prend la forme d'un réticule. 2 Cliquez à l'endroit où vous voulez signer et dessinez votre signature. 3 Pour inclure la signature dans le document, enregistrez le fichier PDF. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas ajouter d'encre signature dans un fichier PDF créé dans LiveCycle Designer ES ou sur le serveur de formulaires LiveCycle. Les fichiers PDF ainsi créés n'acceptent aucun commentaire ni aucune annotation. Signature en mode Aperçu du document Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, utilisez la fonction Aperçu du document lors la signature de documents. Cette fonction analyse le document à la recherche de contenus qui pourraient altérer son aspect. Elle supprime ensuite ces éléments, ce qui vous permet de consulter et de signer le fichier dans un état statique et protégé. La fonction Aperçu du document est très pratique pour vérifier si le document inclut un contenu dynamique ou des dépendances externes. Elle vous aide également à déterminer si le document contient des éléments tels que des champs de formulaire, des objets multimédia ou des scripts JavaScript pouvant avoir une incidence sur son aspect. Après avoir analysé le rapport, vous pouvez contacter l'auteur du document pour lui signaler les éventuels problèmes répertoriés dans le rapport. Par ailleurs, le mode Aperçu du document peut être utilisé en dehors du processus de signature afin de vérifier l'intégrité d'un document. Signature d'un fichier PDF en mode Aperçu du document 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 271 Signatures numériques 2 Sélectionnez l'option Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature, puis cliquez sur OK. 3 Dans le fichier PDF, cliquez sur le champ de signature ou sur le bouton Signer de la barre d'outils Tâches, puis choisissez Signer le document. La barre de message du document s'affiche et indique l'état et les options de conformité. 4 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Afficher le rapport sur la barre de message du document (le cas échéant) et sélectionnez chaque élément de la liste pour en afficher les détails. Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez la boîte de dialogue de rapport sur les signatures PDF. 5 Après examen de l'état de conformité du document, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document et apposez votre signature numérique. 6 Enregistrez le fichier PDF sous un nom différent du fichier d'origine, puis fermez le document sans effectuer d'autres changements. Avant de certifier un fichier PDF L'auteur d'un document peut accroître l'intégrité du fichier et s'assurer du maintien de sa certification en se préoccupant des points ci-après avant de certifier le fichier PDF : • Désactiver ou supprimer les éléments qui pourraient altérer le document certifié ou amoindrir son intégrité, par exemple les scripts JavaScript, les actions ou les éléments multimédia incorporés. • Certifiez ou signez un fichier PDF uniquement après toutes les modifications finales. Si vous effectuez des modifications ou que vous enregistrez à nouveau le document PDF après l'avoir signé, vous risquez de compromettre la validité de votre signature ou l'état de certification du document. Voir aussi « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 262 Certification d'un fichier PDF Si vous certifiez un fichier PDF, vous indiquez que vous approuvez son contenu. Vous pouvez également indiquer les types de modifications autorisées pour que le document reste certifié. Supposons, par exemple, qu'un service administratif émette un formulaire doté de champs de signature. Une fois le formulaire créé, celui-ci certifie le document, autorisant uniquement les utilisateurs à modifier les champs du formulaire et à signer le document. Les utilisateurs peuvent donc remplir le formulaire et signer le document, mais s'ils suppriment des pages ou ajoutent des commentaires, l'état de certification du document n'est pas conservé. Vous pouvez apposer une signature de certification uniquement si le fichier PDF ne contient aucune autre signature. Les signatures de certification peuvent être visibles ou invisibles. Une icône de ruban bleu figurant dans le panneau Signatures indique la présence d'une signature de certification valide. Une identification numérique est nécessaire pour l'ajout de la signature numérique de certification. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signer sur la barre d'outils Tâches et choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Certifier par une signature visible. • Certifier par une signature invisible. Si vous choisissez cette option, votre signature apparaît uniquement sur le panneau Signatures. 2 Cliquez sur OK dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous document certifié.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 272 Signatures numériques Si vous utilisez l'option Certifier par une signature visible, vous pouvez placer la signature dans un champ existant ou définir un nouveau champ pour la signature. Suivez les instructions données dans ces messages pour sélectionner l'emplacement. 3 Si vous apposez une signature visible, tracez le champ à cet effet sur la page. Remarque : Si vous avez activé dans les préférences de protection l'option Afficher les documents en mode Aperçu du document lors de la signature, cliquez sur Signer le document sur la barre de message du document. 4 Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour sélectionner une identification numérique, le cas échéant. Spécifiez une identification par défaut pour éviter d'avoir à en choisir une à chaque signature d'un fichier PDF. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue de certification du document, spécifiez les modifications autorisées, saisissez votre mot de passe ou code PIN pour votre identification numérique, puis cliquez sur Signer. Remarque : Certaines identifications numériques sont configurées pour demander un mot de passe ou un autre moyen d'identification de l'utilisateur dès que vous cliquez sur le bouton Signer. 6 Enregistrez le fichier PDF sous un nom différent du fichier d'origine, puis fermez le document sans effectuer d'autres changements. Choisissez un nom de fichier différent du document non signé original afin de conserver une copie de celui-ci. Voir aussi « Spécification de l'identification numérique par défaut » à la page 259 « A propos des signatures numériques » à la page 264 Effacement ou suppression d'une signature numérique ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour supprimer une signature, cliquez sur le champ de la signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Effacer la signature. • Pour retirer toutes les signatures d'un document PDF, choisissez Effacer le contenu de tous les champs de signature dans le menu Options du panneau Signatures. Vous pouvez supprimer une signature à condition de l'avoir insérée et d'avoir installé l'identification numérique qui permet de signer. Pour supprimer le champ de signature dans Acrobat, choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet, sélectionnez le champ de signature, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Personnalisation des propriétés de signature à l'aide de valeurs de base Les valeurs de base offrent un contrôle supplémentaire aux auteurs du document. Elles leur permettent de déterminer les choix que peut effectuer un utilisateur lors de la signature d'un document. En appliquant ces valeurs de base aux champs de signature dans des documents PDF non signés, les auteurs ont la possibilité de personnaliser les options et d'automatiser les tâches. Ils peuvent également spécifier des exigences de signatures pour des éléments tels que les certificats et les serveurs de tampons temporels. Pour plus d'informations à propos de la personnalisation des propriétés de signature à l'aide de valeurs de base, reportez-vous au Digital Signature User Guide (Guide de signature numérique) (PDF) disponible sur www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 273 Signatures numériques Authentification d’une signature Authentification d'une signature Une fois les signatures validées, une icône s'affiche dans la barre de message du document pour indiquer l'état de la signature. Des informations complémentaires sur cet état s'affichent dans le panneau Signatures et dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de signature. Les gestionnaires de signatures tiers peuvent fournir d'autres méthodes de validation des signatures. Vérifiez la documentation qui accompagne votre identification numérique tiers. Important : Pour garantir la validation des signatures à l'ouverture d'un document PDF et l'affichage des informations d'authentification avec la signature, définissez vos préférences d'authentification à l'avance. (Voir « Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures » à la page 275.) Si l'état de signature est indéterminé ou non vérifié, validez la signature manuellement pour identifier le problème et la solution éventuelle. Si la signature est non valide, contactez le signataire pour lui signaler le problème. Pour plus d'informations à propos des avertissements liés aux signatures et au sujet des signatures valides et non valides, reportez-vous au Digital Signature User Guide (Guide de signature numérique) (PDF) disponible sur www.adobe.com/go/learn_acr_security_fr. Voir aussi « Authentification des informations d'un certificat » à la page 246 « Obtention d'un certificat d'un autre utilisateur » à la page 243 Validation manuelle d'une signature Vous pouvez évaluer la validité d'une signature numérique en vérifiant ses propriétés. 1 Définissez vos préférences d'authentification des signatures. Pour plus d'informations, consultez la rubrique « Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures » à la page 275. 2 Ouvrez le fichier PDF contenant la signature, cliquez sur la signature avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Valider la signature. La boîte de dialogue Etat de validation de la signature s'affiche, indiquant la validité de cette signature. 3 Cliquez sur Propriétés de signature et procédez comme suit : • Si l'état est indéterminé, cliquez sur l'onglet Signataire, puis sur Certificat pour afficher les détails du certificat. Si vous utilisez des identifications numériques autosignées, vérifiez l'exactitude des détails du certificat. Si le certificat n'est pas valide, demandez un certificat valide au signataire. Cliquez sur OK. • Cliquez sur l'onglet Date/Heure afin de vérifier le tampon temporel, le cas échéant. • Cliquez sur l'onglet Informations juridiques pour en savoir plus sur les restrictions juridiques auxquelles est soumise la signature. Dans le panneau Informations juridiques, cliquez sur Afficher les propriétés de l'intégrité du document pour vérifier si le document contient des éléments susceptibles de modifier son aspect. Si le document a été modifié après apposition de la signature, vérifiez la version signée du document et comparez-la à cette version-ci. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 274 Signatures numériques Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 276 « Signature en mode Aperçu du document » à la page 270 « Affichage de versions antérieures d'un document signé » à la page 277 Mise en œuvre de la validation des signatures à long terme La validation des signatures à long terme permet de vérifier la validité d'une signature bien après que le document a été signé. Pour ce faire, tous les éléments nécessaires à la validation de la signature doivent être incorporés dans le fichier PDF signé. Cette incorporation peut avoir lieu au moment de la signature du document ou après la création de la signature. Sans l'ajout d'informations spécifiques au fichier PDF, la signature qu'il contient ne peut être validée que pendant une période limitée. Cette limitation s'explique par le fait que les certificats liés à la signature finissent par expirer ou sont révoqués. Lorsqu'un certificat expire, l'autorité qui l'a émis n'est plus tenue d'indiquer l'état de révocation du certificat. Si l'état de révocation n'est pas confirmé, il est impossible de valider la signature. Les éléments nécessaires à la validation d'une signature incluent la chaîne du certificat de signature, l'état de révocation du certificat et, éventuellement, un tampon temporel. Si tous les éléments sont disponibles et incorporés lors de l'apposition de la signature, cette dernière peut être validée sans demander de plus amples informations à des ressources externes. Acrobat et Reader permettent d'incorporer tous les éléments nécessaires, à condition que ces éléments soient disponibles. L'auteur du fichier PDF doit activer les droits d'utilisation pour Reader (Options avancées > Etendre les fonctions d'Adobe Reader). Remarque : L'incorporation des informations de tampon temporel nécessite la mise en place d'un serveur de tampons temporels correctement configuré. En outre, l'heure de validation de la signature doit être réglée sur Heure sécurisée (Préférences > Protection > Préférences avancées > Onglet Authentification. Voir aussi « Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel » à la page 276 « Configuration d'un serveur de tampons temporels » à la page 267 « Définition des préférences de signature » à la page 266 Ajout des informations d'authentification lors de la signature 1 Assurez-vous que l'ordinateur que vous utilisez peut se connecter aux ressources réseau appropriées. 2 Vérifiez que la préférence Inclure l'état de révocation de la signature est bien activée. (Préférences > Protection > Préférences avancées > Onglet Création.) Cette préférence est sélectionnée par défaut. 3 Signez le fichier PDF. Si tous les éléments de la chaîne de certificat sont disponibles, les informations sont automatiquement ajoutées au fichier PDF. Si un serveur de tampons temporels a été configuré, le tampon temporel est également ajouté.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 275 Signatures numériques Ajout des informations d'authentification après la signature Dans certains cas, les informations de validation de la signature sont indisponibles au moment de la signature, mais peuvent être réunies par la suite. Supposons par exemple qu'un représentant légal d'une entreprise signe un contrat sur son ordinateur portable alors qu'il se déplace en avion. L'ordinateur ne peut se connecter à Internet pour obtenir les informations de tampon temporel et de révocation à ajouter à la signature. Lorsque l'accès à Internet devient possible, tout utilisateur qui valide la signature peut ajouter ces informations au fichier PDF. En outre, toutes les validations de signature ultérieures peuvent reprendre ces informations. 1 Vérifiez que l'ordinateur peut se connecter aux ressources réseau appropriées, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la signature dans le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Ajouter les informations d'authentification. Cette commande est indisponible si la signature n'est pas valable ou si le certificat utilisé est autosigné. Définition des préférences d'authentification des signatures 1 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences et cliquez sur Protection dans le panneau gauche. 2 Pour valider automatiquement toutes les signatures d'un fichier PDF à l'ouverture, sélectionnez Authentifier les signatures à l'ouverture d'un document. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. 3 Choisissez Préférences avancées, puis cliquez sur l'onglet Authentification. 4 Sélectionnez les options d'authentification. 5 (Windows uniquement) Cliquez sur l'onglet Intégration à Windows et spécifiez si l'importation d'identités dans la liste d'approbation est possible à partir de la fonction de certificats Windows. Déterminez également si tous les certificats racine situés dans la fonction de certificats Windows doivent être approuvés lors de la validation des signatures et de la certification des documents. Sachez toutefois que la sélection de ces options risque de compromettre la protection. Remarque : Il est déconseillé d'approuver tous les certificats racine situés dans le magasin de certificats Windows. Nombre des certificats distribués avec Windows ont été conçus sans intention d'établir des identités approuvées. Options d'authentification Méthode à utiliser lors de l'authentification Ces options spécifient les méthodes permettant de déterminer le module externe à utiliser lors de la vérification d'une signature. Le module externe adapté est souvent sélectionné automatiquement. Contactez l'administrateur système au sujet des modules externes requis pour la validation des signatures. Exiger la vérification de révocation des certificats lors de l'authentification des signatures Vérifie si les certificats apparaissent dans une liste de certificats exclus au cours de la validation. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Si vous la désactivez, l'état de révocation des signatures d'approbation est ignoré. L'état de révocation est toujours vérifié dans le cas des signatures de certification. Authentifier les signatures avec Sélectionnez une option afin d'indiquer le mode de vérification de la validité de la signature numérique. Vous pouvez vérifier en fonction de l'heure actuelle, en fonction de l'heure définie par un serveur de tampons temporels au moment de l'apposition de la signature (option par défaut) ou encore d'après l'heure de création de la signature. Utilisation de tampon temporel obsolète Le processus de validation utilise l'heure sécurisée fournie par le tampon temporel ou incorporée dans la signature, même si le certificat de la signature a expiré. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Si elle est désactivée, il devient possible de rejeter les tampons temporels obsolètes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 276 Signatures numériques Présentation du panneau Signatures Le panneau Signatures affiche des informations au sujet de chaque signature dans le document actif et présente un historique des modifications apportées au document depuis la première signature. Chaque signature est dotée d'une icône indiquant l'état actuel d'authentification. Les détails d'authentification sont répertoriés en dessous de chaque signature ; pour les afficher, développez la signature. Le panneau Signatures indique également à quel moment le document a été signé et vous renseigne sur la source d'approbation et le signataire. Authentifiez les signatures dans le panneau Signatures. Affichage du panneau Signatures ? Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signatures ou cliquez sur le panneau Signatures dans la barre de message du document. Dans le panneau Signatures, vous pouvez cliquer sur un champ de signature avec le bouton droit de la souris pour effectuer la plupart des tâches associées, telles que l'apposition, l'effacement ou la validation d'une signature. Il se peut néanmoins, dans certains cas, que le champ de signature soit verrouillé après l'apposition d'une signature. Authentification d'un certificat de tampon temporel Vérifiez l'état de validité d'un certificat de tampons temporels dans la section Résumé de la validité de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature. Voici les messages susceptibles d'être affichés dans le résumé : La date et l'heure de la signature sont celles de l'ordinateur du signataire Il s'agit de l'heure locale de l'ordinateur du signataire. La signature est horodatée Le signataire a utilisé un serveur de tampons temporels et vos paramètres indiquent que vous avez établi une relation de confiance avec ce serveur. La signature est horodatée, mais cet horodatage n'a pu être vérifié Vous devrez éventuellement établir une relation de confiance avec le serveur de tampons temporels. Pour ce faire, vous pouvez procéder comme indiqué ci-après, mais il convient d'abord de vérifier si le serveur de tampons temporels vous est familier et si vous lui faites confiance. Renseignez-vous auprès de votre administrateur système. Pour valider une signature contenant un tampon temporel, vous devez obtenir le certificat du serveur de tampons temporels et l'ajouter à votre liste d'identités approuvées. A défaut, le tampon temporel s'affiche avec l'état Non authentifié, et vous devez le valider manuellement. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Signature du navigateur, sélectionnez la signature et choisissez Valider la signature dans le menu Options . 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés de la signature dans la boîte de dialogue Etat de validation de la signature.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 277 Signatures numériques 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la signature, cliquez sur l'onglet Date/Heure pour afficher l'autorité de certification du tampon temporel, puis sur le bouton Certificat. (Ce bouton apparaît dans l'onglet Date/Heure uniquement si le signataire a utilisé un serveur de tampons temporels.) 4 Dans le Programme de visualisation des certificats, cliquez sur l'onglet Approbation afin de déterminer si le certificat de tampons temporels est approuvé. S'il ne l'est pas, mais que vous lui faites confiance, cliquez sur Ajouter aux identités approuvées. Si aucun certificat n'est répertorié pour le serveur de tampons temporels, demandez-en un au signataire. Voir aussi « Protection par certificat d'un document » à la page 241 Affichage de versions antérieures d'un document signé A chaque signature apposée sur un document, une version signée de ce dernier est enregistrée au sein du fichier PDF. Chaque version est enregistrée dans un fichier n'autorisant que l'ajout d'informations. Il est impossible, en outre, de modifier l'original. Vous pouvez accéder à toutes les signatures et versions associées dans le panneau Signatures. 1 Sélectionnez et développez la signature dans le panneau Signatures et choisissez Afficher la version signée dans le menu Options . La version antérieure du document s'ouvre dans un nouveau fichier PDF, le numéro de la version et le nom du signataire étant indiqués sur la barre de titre du fichier. 2 Pour revenir au document original, choisissez son nom dans le menu Fenêtre. Comparaison des différentes versions d'un document signé Lorsqu'un document a été signé, vous pouvez afficher la liste des modifications apportées au document depuis la dernière version. 1 Dans le panneau Signatures, sélectionnez la signature. 2 Choisissez Comparer la version signée à la version active dans le menu Options . 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, fermez le document temporaire.278 Chapitre 10 : Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Les fonctions d'accessibilité assistent les personnes atteintes de déficiences (mobilité réduite, cécité, malvoyance, par exemple) dans leur utilisation d'Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard et des documents Adobe PDF. Fonctions d'accessibilité A propos des fonctions d'accessibilité Un document ou une application est dit accessible lorsqu'une personne souffrant d'un handicap (mobilité réduite, cécité ou déficience visuelle) peut l'utiliser. Les fonctions d'accessibilité d'Adobe Acrobat, d'Adobe Reader® et du format Adobe Portable Document (PDF) permettent aux personnes handicapées d'utiliser des documents PDF avec ou sans l'aide de lecteurs ou d'agrandisseurs d'écran, et d'imprimantes en braille. La création de documents PDF accessibles tend à profiter à l'ensemble des utilisateurs. Par exemple, la structure du document, grâce à laquelle un lecteur d'écran effectue la lecture audio d'un fichier PDF, permet également de redistribuer le document pour l'adapter à l'écran réduit d'un appareil mobile. De la même manière, l'ordre de tabulation prédéfini d'un formulaire PDF accessible s'avère pratique pour tous les utilisateurs (et pas seulement pour les personnes à mobilité réduite) en facilitant le renseignement des champs de formulaire. Les fonctions d'accessibilité disponibles dans Acrobat et Reader se divisent en deux grandes catégories : les fonctions rendant la lecture des documents PDF plus accessible et celles permettant de créer de tels documents. Pour créer des documents PDF accessibles, utilisez Acrobat, et non Reader. Fonctions rendant la lecture des PDF accessible • Préférences et commandes permettant d'optimiser la sortie pour les logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance telles que l'enregistrement du document sous forme de texte accessible sur une imprimante en braille • Préférences et commandes rendant plus accessible la navigation dans les documents PDF (avec l'automatisation du défilement et de l'ouverture des fichiers PDF jusqu'à la dernière page à lire, par exemple) • Assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité facilitant la configuration de la plupart des préférences relatives à l'accessibilité • Combinaisons de touches remplaçant les actions effectuées à l'aide de la souris • Fonction de redistribution permettant d'afficher un texte PDF avec des caractères de grande taille et de présenter les multiples colonnes d'un fichier PDF en une seule colonne, plus lisible • Conversion du texte en voix avec la fonction Lecture audio • Prise en charge des lecteurs et des agrandisseurs d'écran Fonctions de création de documents PDF accessibles • Création de documents PDF balisés à partir des applications d'origine • Conversion de documents PDF non balisés en PDF balisésUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 279 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution • Paramètre de protection permettant aux lecteurs d'écran d'accéder au texte tout en empêchant les utilisateurs de copier, d'imprimer, de modifier et d'extraire du texte • Possibilité d'ajouter du texte à des pages numérisées en vue d'améliorer l'accessibilité du document Les fonctions d'Acrobat Standard permettent de rendre accessibles des documents PDF existants. Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended offrent des fonctions spécifiques (modification de l'ordre de lecture ou des balises de structure du document) indispensable à l'accessibilité de certaines documents et formulaires PDF. Pour plus d'informations au sujet des fonctions d'accessibilité, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Accessibilité dans Acrobat 9 – présentation, nouvelles fonctions et FAQ : www.adobe.com/accessibility/products/acrobat/ • Informations et actualités relatives à l'accessibilité des produits Adobe : blogs.adobe.com/accessibility/pdf/ • Création d'un document PDF accessible : www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility • Conseils généraux en matière d'accessibilité : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ A propos des documents PDF accessibles Les documents PDF accessibles présentent les caractéristiques suivantes. Texte disponible pour la recherche Un document se composant d'images de texte numérisées est, par essence, inaccessible, car le contenu du document correspond à des images et pas à du texte disponible pour la recherche. Les logiciels d'assistance ne sont pas capables de lire ou d'extraire les mots, les utilisateurs ne sont pas en mesure de sélectionner ou de modifier le texte et vous ne pouvez pas manipuler le document PDF à des fins d'accessibilité. Convertissez les images numérisées du texte en texte disponible pour la recherche à l'aide de la fonction de reconnaissance optique des caractères avant d'appliquer les autres fonctions d'accessibilité au document. Polices autorisant l'extraction de caractères sous forme de texte Les polices utilisées dans un document PDF accessible doivent contenir suffisamment d'informations pour qu'Acrobat puisse extraire tous les caractères sous forme de texte à des fins autres que le simple affichage du texte à l'écran. Acrobat extrait les caractères sous forme de texte Unicode lors de la lecture du document PDF par le biais d'un lecteur d'écran ou de la fonction de lecture audio. Acrobat extrait également les caractères au format Unicode lorsque vous enregistrez le document sous forme de texte pour une imprimante en braille. Cette extraction échoue si Acrobat ne parvient pas à déterminer comment mapper la police aux caractères unicode. Ordre de lecture et balises de la structure du document Pour lire le texte d'un document et le présenter sous une forme compréhensible, un lecteur d'écran ou tout autre outil de conversion de texte en voix nécessite l'utilisation d'un document structuré. Les balises de la structure du document PDF définissent l'ordre de lecture et permettent d'identifier les en-têtes, les paragraphes, les sections, les tableaux et d'autres éléments de page. Champs de formulaire interactifs Certains documents PDF contiennent des formulaires à remplir à l'aide d'un ordinateur. Afin d'être accessibles, les champs de formulaire doivent être interactifs. Autrement dit, un utilisateur doit pouvoir saisir des valeurs dans les champs.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 280 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Outils d'aide à la navigation Les outils d'aide à la navigation contenus dans un document PDF (tels que les liens, les signets, les en-têtes, une table des matières et un ordre de tabulation prédéfini des champs de formulaire) facilitent la compréhension du document pour tout un chacun sans forcément lire l'intégralité du document. Les signets s'avèrent particulièrement utiles et peuvent être créés à partir des titres d'un document. Langue d’un document L'indication de la langue du document dans le fichier PDF permet à certains modèles de lecteurs d'écran de basculer vers la langue appropriée. Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des logiciels d'assistance Certains auteurs de documents PDF empêchent les utilisateurs de se servir des options d’impression, de copie, d’extraction, de commentaire ou de modification du texte. Le texte d'un document PDF accessible doit être disponible pour le lecteur d'écran. Grâce à Acrobat, vous pouvez vous assurer que les paramètres de protection n'ont aucun impact sur la capacité d'un lecteur d'écran à convertir en voix le texte affiché à l'écran. Pour plus d'informations sur l'accessibilité des documents PDF, voir www.webaim.org/techniques/acrobat/. Voir aussi « Reconnaissance du texte d'un document numérisé » à la page 70 « Définition de la langue d'un document » à la page 294 « Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran » à la page 295 « Touches d'accessibilité » à la page 398 A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution Les balises PDF présentent de nombreuses similitudes avec les balises XML. Les balises PDF reflètent la structure du document : texte correspondant à un en-tête, contenu représentant une section, texte constituant un signet, et ainsi de suite. Une arborescence de balises logique représente la structure organisationnelle du document. Les balises indiquent ainsi un ordre de lecture précis et facilitent la navigation, notamment dans le cas de documents longs et complexes, sans changer leur aspect. Les logiciels d'assistance déterminent la présentation et l'interprétation du contenu du document à partir de l'arborescence logique. La plupart des logiciels d'assistance s'appuient sur les balises structurelles du document pour identifier l'ordre de lecture correct du texte et traduire la signification des images et d'autres éléments de contenu sous une autre forme comme le son. Un document non balisé ne contenant aucune information de structure, Acrobat doit déduire une structure à partir des paramètres de préférence d'ordre de lecture. Dans un tel cas, les éléments de page sont souvent lus dans le mauvais ordre ou restent non lus. La redistribution du contenu d'un document à des fins d'affichage sur le petit écran d'un ordinateur de poche dépend également de ces balises de structure du document. Il arrive souvent qu'Acrobat ajoute des balises au moment de la création du document PDF. Pour savoir si un document PDF contient des balises, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis repérez la valeur de l'option PDF balisé dans la section Description avancée du panneau Description.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 281 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Voir aussi « Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité » à la page 282 « Préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 283 « Création d'un fichier PDF accessible » à la page 290 « Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant » à la page 294 Vérification de l'accessibilité d'un document PDF A propos des vérificateurs d'accessibilité Bien évidemment, la meilleure façon de tester l'accessibilité d'un document consiste à utiliser le document en vous servant des outils dont dispose votre audience. Cependant, même si vous ne possédez pas de lecteur d'écran ni d'imprimante en braille, vous pouvez faire appel à l'une des méthodes fournies par Acrobat pour vérifier l'accessibilité d'un document PDF. • La fonction Vérification rapide permet d'examiner un document afin d'identifier s'il contient des balises de structure du document, du texte disponible pour la recherche et des paramètres de protection n'interdisant pas l'accessibilité. Cette méthode constitue souvent le meilleur moyen de vérifier l'accessibilité d'un document PDF avant son utilisation. • Utilisez la fonction Redistribuer pour vérifier rapidement l'ordre de lecture. • Faites appel à la fonction Lecture audio pour tester le document dans les conditions d'utilisation des personnes se servant de cet outil de conversion du texte en voix. • Enregistrez le document en tant que texte accessible, puis lisez le fichier texte enregistré dans une application de traitement de texte afin de le tester tel qu'il sera utilisé par les personnes disposant d'une imprimante en braille. Remarque : Les outils du vérificateur d'accessibilité facilitent l'identification des zones de documents pouvant créer des conflits avec l'interprétation des directives d'accessibilité référencées dans l'application et la documentation afférente d'Adobe. Cependant, ces outils ne vérifient pas les documents par rapport aux critères d'accessibilité, y compris ceux mentionnés dans les directives indiquées, et Adobe ne garantit pas la conformité de ces documents à des directives ou des réglementations spécifiques. Voir aussi « Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un lecteur d'écran » à la page 288 « Redistribution d'un document PDF » à la page 287 « Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio » à la page 288 « Enregistrement sous forme de texte accessible pour une imprimante en braille » à la page 287 Vérification rapide de l'accessibilité La fonction Vérification rapide permet d'examiner un document PDF afin d'identifier s'il contient du texte disponible pour la recherche, des balises de structure du document et des paramètres de protection n'interdisant pas l'accessibilité. ? Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Vérification rapide. Si le document n'est pas structuré, un message est susceptible de s'afficher, vous suggérant de modifier les préférences d'ordre de lecture.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 282 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Voir aussi « Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité » à la page 282 Résultats de la vérification rapide de l'accessibilité « Ce document est doté d'une structure logique, mais il ne s'agit pas d'un fichier PDF balisé. Il risque donc de manquer certaines informations d'accessibilité. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté une structure sous-jacente dans le document, dont Acrobat se servira pour contrôler l'ordre de lecture au lieu d'analyser le document par lui-même. Toutefois, la structure de ce document non balisé risque d'être incomplète ou peu fiable. Il se peut donc que les logiciels d'assistance et les fonctions d'accessibilité d'Acrobat (telles que la fonction Lecture audio et la fonction d'enregistrement sous le format texte) lisent la page de manière incorrecte. Si l'ordre de lecture de la page semble erroné, cochez la case Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. « Ce document n'étant pas structuré, son ordre de lecture risque d'être incorrect. Essayez différents ordres de lecture dans le panneau des préférences de lecture. » La fonction de vérification rapide n'a pas détecté de structure sousjacente au document qu'Acrobat peut utiliser pour déterminer l'ordre de lecture. Acrobat analysera l'ordre de lecture du document à l'aide de la méthode d'analyse active définie dans le panneau des préférences d'ordre de lecture. Cependant, les lecteurs d'écran risquent de ne pas lire correctement ce document PDF. Si l'ordre de lecture semble erroné, sélectionnez une option différente dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. « Aucun problème d'accessibilité n'a été détecté lors de cette vérification rapide. Effectuez une vérification plus approfondie à l'aide de la commande Vérification complète. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF contient du texte disponible pour la recherche, qu'il est balisé, qu'il dispose d'une structure sousjacente et qu'aucun paramètre de protection n'interdit l'accès à son contenu aux lecteurs d'écran. Pour vérifier l'absence d'autres types de problèmes d'accessibilité dans le document PDF, faites appel à la fonction Vérification complète. « L'accès est refusé aux lecteurs d'écran en raison de la configuration des paramètres de protection. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF dispose de paramètres de protection empêchant les lecteurs d'écran d'extraire le texte à des fins de conversion en voix. Vous pourrez peut-être utiliser un lecteur d'écran avec ce document si ce produit de technologie d'assistance est enregistré auprès d'Adobe en tant qu'agent de confiance. Renseignez-vous auprès de votre fournisseur de produits de technologies d'assistance. « Le document ne semble pas contenir de texte. Il s'agit peut-être d'une image numérisée. » La fonction de vérification rapide a détecté que le document PDF ne contient pas de texte disponible pour la recherche. Il est probable qu'il se compose uniquement d'images numérisées. Autrement dit, les lecteurs d'écran, la fonction Lecture audio, le mode de redistribution et la plupart des autres fonctions d'accessibilité (reposant sur le texte comme données d'entrée) ne pourront pas être appliqués à ce document. Lecture d'un document PDF doté de fonctions de redistribution et d'accessibilité Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité Acrobat offre plusieurs options de préférence qui facilitent la lecture des documents PDF pour les personnes à mobilité réduite ou malvoyantes. Ces préférences contrôlent l'affichage des fichiers PDF, ainsi que le mode de lecture dans un lecteur d'écran. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 283 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution La plupart des préférences liées à l'accessibilité sont disponibles par le biais de l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité, lequel affiche des instructions de configuration de ces préférences. Certaines préférences ayant une incidence sur l'accessibilité ne sont pas disponibles par l'intermédiaire de cet assistant, notamment celles des catégories Lecture, Formulaires et Multimédia. Vous pouvez définir l'ensemble des préférences via la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Les noms indiqués pour certaines préférences dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité sont différents des mêmes préférences disponibles dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. L'aide d'Acrobat fait référence aux noms des options utilisés dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'accessibilité, voir http://www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility/. Configuration des préférences d’accessibilité dans l’assistant 1 Lancez l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Assistant de configuration. • (Windows uniquement) Lancez Acrobat lors de la première exécution d’un lecteur ou d’un agrandisseur d’écran. 2 Choisissez l'option adaptée à vos logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance. L'assistant présente uniquement les préférences correspondant à vos logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance en fonction de l'option choisie. 3 Suivez les instructions affichées à l'écran. Si vous cliquez sur Annuler à un moment donné, Acrobat utilise les paramètres par défaut pour les préférences configurées par l'assistant (non recommandé). Configuration des préférences d'accessibilité via la boîte de dialogue Préférences ? Configurez les préférences en fonction des logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance installés en passant en revue les différents panneaux de la boîte de dialogue. Préférences d'accessibilité Préférences disponibles dans le panneau Accessibilité Remplacer les couleurs du document Lorsque cette case est cochée, vous pouvez choisir dans une liste une association de couleurs à contraste élevé pour le texte et l'arrière-plan, ou créer votre propre association. Ces paramètres correspondent à l'option Utiliser des couleurs à contraste élevé pour le texte des documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser le style de mise en page Correspond à l'option Ignorer le style de mise en page disponible l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser le paramètre de zoom Correspond à l'option Ignorer le facteur de zoom du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Utiliser la structure du document comme ordre de tabulation en l'absence de toute spécification Améliore la navigation dans les champs de formulaire et les liens de documents dont l'ordre de tabulation n'est pas indiqué. Toujours afficher le curseur de sélection Sélectionnez cette option si vous utilisez un agrandisseur d'écran. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Toujours afficher le curseur de sélection, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Toujours utiliser la couleur de sélection du système Lorsque cette option est activée, la couleur de sélection par défaut (le bleu) est remplacée par la couleur définie sur le système.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 284 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Toujours afficher les porte-documents sous le contrôle de la plate-forme Lorsque cette option est activée, les composants du porte-feuille PDF sont présentés selon la configuration de contrôle de la plate-forme, laquelle est plus accessible. Préférences disponibles dans le panneau Documents Enregistrer automatiquement les modifications de document dans un fichier temporaire toutes les... minutes Lorsque cette case est désactivée, la préférence désactive l'action d'enregistrement automatique. Le lecteur ou l'agrandisseur d'écran doit recharger le document chaque fois que ce dernier est enregistré. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Désactiver l'enregistrement automatique des documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Formulaires Couleur de sélection des champs et Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires Ces préférences définissent les couleurs qui seront utilisées pour mettre en surbrillance les champs de formulaire à remplir. Elles correspondent aux options Couleur de sélection des champs et Couleur de sélection des champs obligatoires disponibles dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Remplissage automatique Permet à Acrobat de proposer le remplissage automatique de certaines entrées de champs de formulaire de manière à éviter à l'utilisateur de taper beaucoup de caractères. Cette préférence n'a pas d'équivalent dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Internet Afficher dans le navigateur Entraîne l'ouverture de documents PDF liés à partir de pages Web dans le navigateur Internet au lieu d'une fenêtre distincte d'Acrobat. Désactivez cette préférence pour améliorer la navigation dans un document avec un lecteur d'écran. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Afficher les documents PDF dans le navigateur Web, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Multimédia • Afficher les sous-titres lorsque disponibles • Lire le doublage audio lorsque disponible • Afficher les légendes de texte supplémentaires lorsque disponibles • Afficher la description audio (ou la description vidéo ou la vidéo descriptive) lorsque disponible Ces préférences n'ont pas d'équivalents dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Affichage Zoom Configure le facteur d'agrandissement des documents à l'écran et permet aux utilisateurs malvoyants de lire plus facilement les documents PDF redistribués. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Ignorer le facteur de zoom du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Texte arrondi Contrôle le lissage du texte. Pour désactiver le lissage du texte et rendre le texte plus net et plus facile à lire à l'aide d'un agrandisseur d'écran, choisissez Aucun. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Désactiver le lissage de texte, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Préférences d'accessibilité disponibles dans le panneau Lecture ordre de lecture Indique l’ordre de lecture des documents. Les préférences d'ordre de lecture sont également disponibles dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document (conseillé) Interprète l'ordre de lecture des documents non balisés à l'aide d'une méthode avancée d'analyse de la mise en page déduisant la structure du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 285 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution • Lire de gauche à droite, de haut en bas Génère le texte d'après sa position sur la page, en lisant de gauche à droite puis de haut en bas. Cette méthode s'avère plus rapide que l'option Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document. En effet, elle analyse uniquement le texte ; les champs de formulaire ne sont pas pris en compte et les tableaux ne sont pas reconnus en tant que tels. • Utiliser l'ordre de lecture dans les flux d'impression bruts Génère le texte selon l'ordre dans lequel il a été enregistré dans le flux d'impression. Cette méthode s'avère plus rapide que l'option Déduire l'ordre de lecture du document. En effet, elle analyse uniquement le texte ; les champs de formulaire ne sont pas pris en compte et les tableaux ne sont pas reconnus en tant que tels. Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés Utilise l'ordre de lecture défini dans les préférences de lecture au lieu de l'ordre spécifié par la structure de balises du document. Choisissez cette préférence uniquement lorsque vous rencontrez des problèmes dans les documents PDF mal balisés. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Ignorer l'ordre de lecture dans les documents balisés, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Page et document Cette préférence détermine la proportion d'un document transmise ponctuellement à un lecteur d'écran. Si le document PDF n'est pas balisé, Acrobat peut l'analyser et tenter de déduire sa structure et son ordre de lecture, ce qui peut prendre du temps dans le cas d'un document long. Il est parfois préférable de configurer Acrobat de manière à transmettre uniquement la page actuellement visible à l'écran afin d'analyser le document par petites tranches. Ce point varie en fonction de la taille et de la complexité du document ainsi que des fonctions proposées par le lecteur d'écran. Lorsqu'Acrobat transmet les informations à un lecteur ou un agrandisseur d'écran (ou tout autre dispositif d'assistance), il charge les informations dans la mémoire tampon mise directement à disposition du logiciel d'assistance. La quantité d'informations transmise au tampon peut avoir une incidence sur le temps que met Acrobat à effectuer certaines tâches telles que l'ouverture du document, le passage à la page suivante, le changement d'affichage et l'exécution des commandes. • Lire les pages actuellement visibles Cette option est généralement conseillée avec les agrandisseurs d'écran. Elle améliore les performances en évitant au logiciel de traiter les parties du document qui ne sont pas visibles. Lorsque Acrobat envoie uniquement les pages actuellement visibles d'un document PDF à la mémoire tampon, la technologie d'assistance n'a accès qu'à ces pages-là. Elle peut passer à une autre page seulement quand la page suivante est visible et qu'Acrobat a transmis les informations à la mémoire tampon. Par conséquent, si vous activez cette option, vous devez utiliser les fonctions de navigation d'Acrobat (pas celles de la technologie d'assistance) afin de parcourir le document d'une page à l'autre. Il est par ailleurs conseillé de définir l'option Mise en page par défaut des préférences sur le paramètre Une seule page si, en fonction de votre choix, Acrobat doit uniquement envoyer les pages visibles à la technologie d'assistance. Etant donné que Acrobat transmet les informations relatives à toutes les pages visibles, la technologie d'assistance peut recevoir des informations concernant des pages partiellement visibles (le bas d'une page ou le haut de la suivante, par exemple) ou des pages l'étant entièrement. Si vous utilisez un paramètre d'affichage des pages autre que Une seule page (Une seule page en continu, par exemple), puis que vous affichez la page suivante, la technologie d'assistance risque de ne pas identifier correctement la partie d'une page antérieure qu'elle a déjà lue à haute voix. Pour des instructions sur la définition de la disposition par défaut des pages sur Une seule page, voir la section « Préférences d'affichage des documents PDF » à la page 37. Cette option correspond à l'option Lire les pages actuellement visibles, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Lire l'intégralité du document Cette option est optimale lorsque vous utilisez un lecteur d'écran disposant de ses propres outils de navigation et de recherche et que vous connaissez mieux que les outils d'Acrobat. Cette option correspond à l'option Lire immédiatement l'intégralité du document, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. • Dans les documents volumineux, lire les pages actuellement visibles Cette option est activée par défaut et s'avère optimale lorsque vous utilisez un lecteur d'écran pour lire des documents PDF longs ou complexes. Elle permet à Acrobat de transmettre la totalité d'un petit document tout en revenant au mode page par page pour les documents UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 286 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution volumineux. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Dans les documents volumineux, lire les pages actuellement visibles, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Confirmer avant de baliser les documents Permet à l'utilisateur de valider les options à utiliser avant qu'Acrobat ne prépare un document non balisé afin d'être lu. Le balisage peut prendre beaucoup de temps, en particulier dans les documents volumineux. Cette préférence correspond à l'option Confirmer avant de baliser les documents, disponible dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Options vocales Configurez les préférences de cette section afin de régler le volume, la vitesse et le ton de la voix utilisée pour lire à haute voix. Vous pouvez utiliser la voix par défaut ou l'une des voix fournies par votre système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les flèches Haut et Bas pour lire des blocs de texte. Ces préférences n'ont pas d'équivalents dans l'assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité. Navigation et contrôle de l'application à l'aide du clavier Vous pouvez naviguer à l’aide du clavier au lieu d’utiliser la souris. Plusieurs fonctions d'accès clavier sont disponibles sous Mac OS. Pour plus de détails, consultez la documentation livrée avec votre système d'exploitation. Sous Windows, certains raccourcis clavier de navigation d'Acrobat sont différents des raccourcis utilisés dans d'autres applications Windows. Lors de l'ouverture d'Acrobat dans un navigateur Web, les commandes clavier sont d'abord mappées au navigateur. En conséquence, certains raccourcis ne sont pas disponibles dans Acrobat ou du moins pas avant l'activation du document PDF. Pour plus de détails sur les fonctions d'accessibilité, voir www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility. Voir aussi « Touches de navigation dans un document PDF » à la page 395 « Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils » à la page 394 « Touches de commentaire » à la page 394 « Touches de navigation générale » à la page 396 « Touches des panneaux de navigation » à la page 397 « Touches de navigation dans la fenêtre d’aide » à la page 397 « Touches d'accessibilité » à la page 398 Activation des touches uniques Les touches d'accès rapide uniques permettent de sélectionner des outils et d'effectuer certaines actions. La plupart des raccourcis clavier disponibles dans Acrobat ne nécessitent pas l'activation de touches d'accès rapide uniques. ? Dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Générales, puis activez l'option Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils. Remarque : Tous les lecteurs d'écran ne sont pas compatibles avec les touches uniques d'Acrobat. Défilement automatique La fonction de défilement automatique permet de parcourir plus facilement un long document PDF, notamment dans le cas de documents redistribués. Vous pouvez faire défiler les pages sans avoir recours à la souris ou au clavier. 1 Choisissez Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 287 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour modifier la vitesse de défilement, appuyez sur une touche numérique (9 pour une vitesse très élevée, 0 pour une vitesse lente). • Pour augmenter ou réduire la vitesse de défilement, appuyez sur les touches fléchées Haut ou Bas, selon le sens du défilement. • Pour inverser le sens de défilement, appuyez sur la touche de signe moins (-). • Pour passer à la page suivante ou précédente, appuyez sur la touche fléchée Gauche ou Droite. Pour arrêter le défilement automatique, appuyez sur la touche Echap ou choisissez à nouveau Affichage > Faire défiler automatiquement. Enregistrement sous forme de texte accessible pour une imprimante en braille Remarque : L'expression « imprimante en braille » est utilisée dans ce document pour faire référence à tout dispositif servant à convertir un texte accessible en formulaire utilisable par une personne aveugle ou malvoyante. Vous avez la possibilité d’enregistrer un document PDF sous forme de texte accessible afin de l’imprimer en braille. Le texte accessible peut être importé et imprimé comme document de niveau 1 ou 2 formaté en braille à l'aide d'une application de conversion en braille. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation accompagnant l'application de conversion en braille. Une version texte d'un document PDF ne contient pas d'images ni d'objets multimédia ; toutefois, la version texte d'un document PDF accessible comprend des descriptions de remplacement pour de tels objets, si elles ont été définies. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. 2 Choisissez Texte (accessible) dans le menu Type (Windows) ou Format (Mac OS). Dans Acrobat, si vous enregistrez le fichier en vue d'un traitement en braille, vous pouvez aussi choisir .doc ou .rtf. Redistribution d'un document PDF Vous avez la possibilité de redistribuer le contenu d'un PDF afin de le présenter temporairement sous la forme d'une colonne occupant toute la largeur du panneau de visualisation. Cette redistribution permet d'améliorer la lisibilité du document sur des appareils mobiles ou d'agrandir l'affichage sur un moniteur standard, sans qu'il soit nécessaire de faire défiler le texte horizontalement. Il est impossible d'enregistrer, de modifier ou d'imprimer un document en mode de redistribution. Dans la plupart des cas, seul le texte lisible est visible dans l'affichage redistribué. Le texte non redistribué inclut les formulaires, les commentaires, les champs de signature numérique et les artefacts de page, tels que les numéros de page, les en-têtes et les pieds de page. Les pages contenant à la fois du texte lisible et des formulaires ou des champs de signature numérique ne sont pas redistribués. Un texte vertical est redistribué horizontalement. Acrobat balise temporairement un document non balisé avant de le redistribuer. Vous pouvez optimiser pour la redistribution des documents PDF que vous créez en les balisant vous-même. Le balisage garantit que les blocs de texte sont redistribués et que le contenu suit les séquences appropriées afin que l'utilisateur puisse lire un article couvrant plusieurs pages et colonnes sans que d'autres sujets interrompent le flux du texte. Pour vérifier rapidement l'ordre de lecture d'un document, affichez-le en mode Redistribution.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 288 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Les titres et les colonnes (à gauche) sont redistribués selon un ordre de lecture logique (à droite). Redistribution d'un document PDF balisé ? Choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Redistribuer. Si le paramètre Mise en page est défini sur Deux pages avant que vous ne choisissiez le mode de redistribution, il devient automatiquement Une seule page lors de la redistribution du document. Si le paramètre Mise en page est défini sur Deux pages en continu avant que vous ne choisissiez le mode de redistribution, il devient automatiquement Continu lors de la redistribution du document. Retour à l'affichage non redistribué ? En mode Redistribution, choisissez Affichage > Zoom > Redistribuer. Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide d'un lecteur d'écran Acrobat prend en charge des logiciels et dispositifs d'assistance (tels que les lecteurs et les agrandisseurs d'écran) permettant aux utilisateurs malvoyants d'interagir avec des applications informatiques. Lorsque vous utilisez de tels dispositifs, Acrobat ajoute des balises temporaires aux documents PDF ouverts afin d’améliorer leur lisibilité. Utilisez l’assistant de configuration de l’accessibilité pour améliorer l’interaction entre Acrobat et les types de logiciels et de dispositifs d’assistance dont vous vous servez. Lors de l'utilisation d'un lecteur d'écran, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de lecture du document actif en choisissant Options avancées > Accessibilité > Modifier les options de lecture. Consultez la documentation de votre logiciel ou dispositif d'assistance. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration requise, la compatibilité et les instructions d'utilisation du logiciel ou dispositif d'assistance avec Acrobat, contactez votre revendeur. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation des lecteurs d'écran, voir www.adobe.com/accessibility/pdfs/accessing-pdfsr.pdf. Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio La fonction Lecture audio permet de lire à haute voix le texte contenu dans un document PDF, y compris les commentaires et descriptions de remplacement des images et des champs de formulaire à remplir. Dans les documents PDF balisés, le contenu est lu selon l'ordre dans lequel il apparaît dans l'arborescence logique du document. Dans les documents non balisés, l'ordre de lecture est déduit, à moins qu'il n'ait été configuré dans les préférences de lecture.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 289 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution La fonction Lecture audio utilise les voix disponibles installées sur votre système. Si les voix SAPI 4 ou SAPI 5 ont été installées à partir d'applications vocales ou de langue, vous avez la possibilité de les sélectionner pour la lecture de documents PDF. Remarque : La fonction Lecture audio n'est pas un lecteur d'écran et n'est pas reconnue par tous les systèmes d'exploitation. Activation ou désactivation de la fonction Lecture audio Vous devez activer la fonction Lecture audio avant de pouvoir l'utiliser. Vous pouvez la désactiver afin de libérer des ressources système et d'accroître les performances d'autres opérations. ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Activer la lecture audio. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Désactiver la lecture audio. Vous pouvez également localiser le texte à l'aide de l'outil Sélection. Activez la fonction de lecture audio, puis choisissez Outils > Sélection. Naviguez dans le document à l'aide des flèches haut/bas et gauche/droite. Vous entendez l'élément situé à l'emplacement de l'outil Sélection, par exemple un titre ou un paragraphe. Parcours d'un document PDF à l'aide de l'outil Lecture audio 1 Affichez la page à lire. 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Lire seulement cette page. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Lire jusqu'à la fin du document. Lecture à haute voix des champs de formulaire 1 Dans le panneau Lecture de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, cochez la case Lire les champs de formulaire dans la section Options de lecture audio. 2 Dans le formulaire PDF, appuyez sur la touche de tabulation pour sélectionner le premier champ de formulaire. 3 Remplissez les champs et définissez les sélections selon vos besoins, puis appuyez sur la touche Tab pour passer au champ suivant en répétant cette étape jusqu'à ce que le formulaire soit entièrement rempli. Acrobat lit l'état des cases à cocher et des boutons radio sélectionnés. Remarque : La fonction de lecture audio ne reproduit pas ce que vous saisissez au clavier. Pour écouter votre saisie, utilisez un lecteur d'écran. Interruption de la lecture à haute voix ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Pause. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Reprise. • Choisissez Affichage > Lecture audio > Arrêt.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 290 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution A propos des outils d'accessibilité du système d'exploitation Outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous Windows Les systèmes d'exploitation Windows 2000, XP et Vista intègrent des outils proposant un accès amélioré ou alternatif aux informations affichées sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Narrator est une version allégée de lecteur d'écran tandis que Magnifier est un outil d'agrandissement de l'écran. Pour plus de détails sur les outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous le système d'exploitation Windows 2000, XP ou Vista, consultez le site Web d'accessibilité de Microsoft. Outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous Mac OS Mac OS X intègre des outils offrant un accès amélioré ou alternatif aux informations affichées sur l'écran de l'ordinateur. Pour plus de détails sur les outils d'accessibilité disponibles sous le système d'exploitation Max OS X, consultez le site Web d'accessibilité d'Apple® Inc. Création d'un fichier PDF accessible Flux de production de création de formulaires PDF accessibles A un niveau supérieur, la procédure de création de fichiers PDF accessibles se divise en quelques étapes simples : 1 Envisagez d'intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dans un document avant de le convertir au format PDF. 2 Le cas échéant, ajoutez des descriptions et des champs de formulaire à remplir, et pensez à définir l'ordre de tabulation. 3 Intégrez d'autres fonctions d'accessibilité dans le document PDF. 4 Balisez le document PDF. 5 Procédez à une évaluation du PDF et réparez les problèmes de balisage. L'ordre des étapes de cette procédure convient à la plupart des besoins. Vous pouvez toutefois effectuer les tâches dans un ordre différent ou répéter certaines étapes. Dans tous les cas, commencez par examiner le document, déterminez l'objectif qu'il sert et utilisez cette analyse pour identifier le flux de production à appliquer. Pour plus d'informations sur la création de documents PDF accessibles, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Guide de création de documents PDF accessibles, Administration des services généraux (en anglais) : www.section508.gov/docs/PDFGuidanceForGovernment.pdf • Module externe Acrobat pour la création de documents PDF conformes à la Section 508 : www.commonlook.com/documents/english/cl_adobe_home.asp • Meilleures pratiques : amp.ssbbartgroup.com Envisagez d'intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dans un document avant de le convertir au format PDF Dans la mesure du possible, pensez à intégrer des fonctions d'accessibilité dès la phase de création des fichiers source dans l'application d'origine (application de traitement de texte ou de mise en page, par exemple).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 291 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution Parmi les tâches standard à effectuer dans l'application de création, citons l'ajout d'un texte de remplacement pour les images, l'optimisation des tableaux et l'application de styles de paragraphe ou d'autres fonctions de structure de document pouvant être converties en balises. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une application source » à la page 292. Ajoutez des descriptions et des champs de formulaire à remplir, et pensez à définir l'ordre de tabulation Si le document PDF comprend des champs de formulaire, choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Exécuter la reconnaissance des champs de formulaire afin de détecter les champs et de les rendre interactifs (disponibles pour le remplissage). Utilisez les outils de formulaire pour créer des champs à remplir, tels que des boutons, des cases à cocher, des menus déroulants et des zones de texte. Lors de la création d'un champ, tapez une description dans la zone Info-bulle de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de ce champ. Les lecteurs d'écran lisent ce texte à haute voix à l'utilisateur. Pour plus de détails, voir « Création de champs de formulaire » à la page 195. Pour plus de détails sur la configuration de l'ordre de tabulation sur la structure du document, voir la section « Définition du mode de navigation dans les champs de formulaire » à la page 203. Intégrez d'autres fonctions d'accessibilité dans le document PDF Cette étape comprend plusieurs tâches : définir la langue du document, vérifier que les paramètres de protection n'ont pas d'incidence sur les lecteurs d'écran et ajouter des signets. Pour plus de détails, voir les sections « Définition de la langue d'un document » à la page 294, « Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran » à la page 295 et « A propos des signets » à la page 298. Balisez le document PDF Vous pouvez améliorer l'accessibilité d'un fichier PDF en lui ajoutant des balises dans Acrobat. Si le document PDF ne contient pas de balises, Acrobat tente de le baliser automatiquement lorsque l’utilisateur lit ou redistribue son contenu, mais les résultats peuvent se révéler décevants. Dans le cas d'un document PDF balisé, l'arborescence logique envoie le contenu à un lecteur d'écran ou à un logiciel ou matériel d'assistance dans l'ordre approprié. Afin d'optimiser les résultats, balisez les documents au moment de leur conversion au format PDF à partir de l'application de création. Il s'agit par exemple des applications Adobe FrameMaker®, Adobe InDesign®, Microsoft Word ou encore OpenOffice Writer. Si vous n'avez pas accès à l'application de création qui permettrait de générer un fichier PDF balisé, vous pouvez baliser le fichier à tout moment dans Acrobat. Le balisage d'un document lors de sa conversion au format PDF nécessite une application de création prenant en charge cette fonction. A partir des styles de paragraphe et autres informations structurelles contenues dans le document source, l'application de création peut alors produire une arborescence logique. L'arborescence logique détermine un ordre de lecture précis et les niveaux de balises appropriés. Ce balisage est capable de mieux interpréter la structure de mises en page complexes (barres latérales incorporées, colonnes rapprochées, alignement de texte irrégulier, tableaux, etc.). Cette méthode de balisage permet également de baliser correctement les liens, les références croisées, les signets et le texte de remplacement (si disponible) inclus dans le fichier. Pour baliser un document PDF dans Acrobat, servez-vous de la commande Ajouter des balises au document. Celle-ci fonctionne avec n'importe quel document PDF non balisé (un document créé à l'aide de l'imprimante Adobe PDF, par exemple). Acrobat analyse le contenu du fichier PDF afin d'interpréter, pour chaque page, ses éléments, leur organisation hiérarchique et l'ordre de lecture souhaité. Il construit ensuite une arborescence de balises reflétant ces informations. Enfin, le logiciel crée des balises pour tous les liens, références croisées et signets ajoutés au document dans Acrobat.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 292 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution La commande Ajouter des balises au document permet de baliser de manière appropriée la plupart des mises en page standard. Elle n'est toutefois pas toujours en mesure d'interpréter correctement la structure et l'ordre de lecture des éléments de page complexes. Ces éléments incluent les colonnes rapprochées, les textes alignés de manière irrégulière, les champs de formulaire à ne pas remplir et les tableaux sans bordure. L'utilisation de la commande Ajouter des balises au document pour baliser ce type de page peut entraîner une mauvaise combinaison des éléments ou la désorganisation des balises. De telles irrégularités provoquent des problèmes d'ordre de lecture dans le fichier PDF. Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une page Web L'accessibilité d'un document PDF que vous créez à partir d'une page Web dépend de celle de la source HTML sur laquelle il repose. Si, par exemple, la mise en page de la page Web repose sur des tableaux, le code HTML du tableau risque de ne pas être distribué selon l'ordre logique exigé par un document PDF balisé, même si le code HTML est suffisamment structuré pour afficher correctement tous les éléments dans un navigateur. Pour obtenir les fichiers PDF les plus accessibles possibles à partir des pages Web que vous créez, commencez par définir un ordre de lecture logique dans leur code HTML. Pour optimiser les résultats, servez-vous des Directives d'accessibilité des contenus Web publiées par le consortium W3C (World Wide Web Consortium). Pour plus de détails, consultez les recommandations du site Web du W3C. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Dans Acrobat, choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > A partir d'une page Web, saisissez l'adresse de la page Web, puis cliquez sur Paramètres. • Dans Microsoft Internet Explorer, sur la barre d'outils Adobe PDF, cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers le bas du bouton Convertir et choisissez Préférences. 2 Dans le panneau Générales, activez l'option Créer les balises PDF et cliquez sur OK. 3 Le cas échéant, configurez d'autres options, puis cliquez sur Créer. Création d'un document PDF balisé à partir d'une application source Dans la plupart des cas, vous créez des fichiers PDF balisés dans une application de création (Adobe FrameMaker ®, Adobe InDesign ou Microsoft Word, par exemple). La création de balises dans l'application source entraîne, en général, de meilleurs résultats que l'ajout de balises dans Acrobat. PDFMaker propose des paramètres de conversion permettant de créer des documents PDF balisés dans Microsoft Excel, PowerPoint et Word. Pour plus de détails sur la création de fichiers PDF accessible, voir http://www.adobe.com/fr/accessibility/. Pour plus de détails, consultez la documentation relative à l'application de création. A propos des balises utilisées dans les fichiers PDF combinés Vous avez la possibilité de combiner plusieurs fichiers provenant de diverses applications en une opération afin de créer un seul fichier PDF. Par exemple, vous pouvez combiner des fichiers de traitement de texte avec des présentations de diapositives, des feuilles de calcul et des pages Web. Choisissez Fichier > Créer un fichier PDF > Fusionner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF. Lors de la conversion, Acrobat ouvre chaque application de création, crée un fichier PDF balisé et assemble ces PDF dans un PDF balisé.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 293 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution La procédure de conversion n'interprète pas toujours correctement la structure du document pour le fichier PDF combiné, car les fichiers source utilisent généralement des formats différents. Utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour créer un fichier PDF accessible à partir de plusieurs documents. Lorsque vous combinez plusieurs fichiers PDF en un seul fichier PDF balisé, il est judicieux de baliser à nouveau le document combiné. La combinaison de fichiers PDF balisés et non balisés produit un fichier PDF partiellement balisé, inaccessible pour les personnes souffrant de handicap. Certains utilisateurs, notamment ceux utilisant un lecteur d'écran, ne peuvent pas détecter les pages non balisées. Si vous souhaitez combiner une série de fichiers PDF mixtes (balisés et non balisés), balisez les fichiers non balisés avant de continuer. Si les documents PDF sont tous non balisés, ajoutez des balises au fichier PDF combiné après avoir inséré, remplacé et supprimé des pages. Lors de la combinaison de pages par insertion, remplacement et suppression de pages, Acrobat accepte les balises existantes dans l'arborescence du fichier PDF consolidé de la manière suivante : • Lorsque vous insérez des pages dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat ajoute des balises (s'il y a lieu) pour les nouvelles pages à la fin de l'arborescence. Cet ordre est respecté même si vous insérez les nouvelles pages au début ou au milieu du document. • Lorsque vous remplacez des pages dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat ajoute des balises (s'il y a lieu) pour les pages d'éntrée à la fin de l'arborescence. Cet ordre est respecté même si vous remplacez des pages au début ou au milieu du document. Acrobat conserve les balises (le cas échéant) des pages remplacées. • Lors de la suppression de pages d'un fichier PDF, Acrobat conserve les balises (le cas échéant) des pages supprimées. Les pages dont les balises sont mal classées dans l'arborescence logique peuvent poser des problèmes aux lecteurs d'écran. En effet, ces dispositifs lisent les balises dans l'ordre descendant de l'arborescence et, de ce fait, risquent de ne pas atteindre les balises d'une page insérée avant la fin de l'arborescence. Pour corriger ce problème, réorganisez l'arborescence à l'aide d'Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Placez les grands groupes de balises dans le même ordre de lecture que les pages elles-mêmes. Pour éviter cette étape, pensez à insérer les pages à la fin du fichier PDF, en constituant le document du début à la fin en séquence. Par exemple, si vous créez la page de titre au format PDF séparément du contenu, ajoutez le fichier PDF du contenu au fichier PDF de la page de titre, même si le fichier du contenu est plus volumineux. Cette méthode permet de placer les balises du contenu à la suite des balises de la page de titre. Il n'est donc pas nécessaire de réorganiser ultérieurement les balises dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Les balises d'une page supprimée ou remplacée ne sont connectées à aucun contenu dans le document. Pour l'essentiel, elles constituent de grandes sections de balises vides dans l'arborescence. Ces balises superflues augmentent la taille de fichier du document, ralentissent les lecteurs d'écran et peuvent entraîner l'affichage de résultats confus par ces dispositifs d'accessibilité. Pour des résultats optimaux, réservez le balisage pour la fin du processus de conversion. Pour retirer de l'arborescence les balises correspondant aux pages supprimées, utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Pour plus de détails, voir « Création de fichiers PDF fusionnés » à la page 119. A propos des outils de création de formulaires PDF accessibles Adobe propose plusieurs outils de création de formulaires PDF accessibles : Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended Chacune de ces applications vous permet d'ouvrir des formulaires PDF balisés ou non (à l'exception des formulaires PDF créés à partir de LiveCycle Designer) afin d'y insérer des champs tels que des zones de texte, des cases à cocher et des boutons. Utilisez les autres outils de l'application pour rendre les formulaires accessibles. Ajoutez des descriptions pour les champs de formulaires, balisez les formulaires non balisés, manipulez les balises et effectuez d'autres tâches d'accessibilité PDF. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 294 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution LiveCycle Designer (Disponible dans Acrobat Professional et Acrobat Professional Extended) Ce produit permet de concevoir et de créer des formulaires entièrement nouveaux ou d'importer des formulaires PDF non balisés existants et de rendre leurs champs disponibles et accessibles. Vous avez la possibilité de déployer des formulaires dans divers formats (PDF balisé, XML et autres) à partir de LiveCycle Designer. Une fois que vous avez créé ou modifié un formulaire Acrobat dans LiveCycle Designer, vous obtenez un fichier LiveCycle Designer. Il ne s'agit plus d'un fichier PDF que vous pouvez modifier ou manipuler dans Acrobat. Les applications Acrobat et Reader peuvent toutes deux ouvrir et lire les formulaires PDF créés dans LiveCycle Designer. Ces formulaires PDF ne contiennent pas néanmoins de droits de modification du fichier. Par conséquent, utilisez LiveCycle Designer uniquement pour manipuler des documents PDF conçus pour contenir des données de formulaire. Ne l'utilisez pas pour insérer des champs de formulaire dans un document comprenant à la fois des pages de texte et quelques pages dotées de champs de formulaire. Dans ce cas, utilisez Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour ajouter les champs de formulaire. Effectuez ensuite les tâches d'accessibilité applicables au reste du contenu du document. Applications de création La plupart des applications de création permettant de concevoir des formulaires ne conservent pas les champs disponibles pour le remplissage après la conversion du fichier au format PDF. Utilisez les outils de formulaire d'Acrobat Professional ou d'Acrobat Professional Extended pour ajouter les champs de formulaire à remplir. De plus, si vous balisez le formulaire lors de la conversion au format PDF, l'application de création peut générer des balises inappropriées pour les libellés des champs. Dans un formulaire complexe, par exemple, les libellés de tous les champs peuvent être réunis sur une seule ligne. Les lecteurs d'écran ne sont pas en mesure d'interpréter ces champs en tant que libellés individuels. Les problèmes d'ordre de lecture de ce type peuvent nécessiter un temps de correction considérable dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. Dans ce cas, il est parfois plus judicieux de générer un formulaire PDF non balisé à partir de l'application de création. Vous pouvez alors utiliser l'outil Formulaires d'Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended pour insérer des champs à remplir avant de baliser le document complet. Certains formulaires sont suffisamment simples pour vous permettre de produire un fichier PDF balisé à partir de l'application de création. Dans ce cas, effectuez quelques retouches dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended après avoir ajouté des formulaires à remplir. Ajout de l'accessibilité à un document PDF existant Ajout de balises à un document PDF existant La création directe d'un document balisé à partir d'une application source constitue la meilleure façon de concevoir des documents PDF accessibles. Toutefois, si un document PDF a été créé sans balises, vous pouvez ajouter celles-ci à l'aide de la commande Ajouter des balises au document. 1 Ouvrez le fichier PDF. 2 Choisissez Options avancées > Accessibilité > Ajouter des balises au document. Remarque : La commande Ajouter des balises au document supprime les balises incluses dans le document avant son exécution. Définition de la langue d'un document L'indication de la langue du document dans le fichier PDF permet à certains modèles de lecteurs d'écran de basculer vers la langue appropriée. Vous pouvez définir la langue d'un document entier à l'aide d'Acrobat Professional, d'Acrobat Professional Extended ou d'Acrobat Standard. De même, il est possible de configurer la langue de parties spécifiques d'un document multilingue dans Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended. • Pour définir la langue de l'ensemble du document, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Sélectionnez ensuite une langue dans le menu approprié de la zone Options de lecture du panneau Avancées.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 295 Accessibilité, balises et redistribution • Pour appliquer à l'ensemble du document une langue qui ne se trouve pas dans le menu Langue, choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. Entrez ensuite le code ISO 639 de la langue voulue dans le champ Langue de la zone Options de lecture du panneau Avancées. Pour plus de détails sur la norme ISO 639, voir www.loc.gov/standards. Paramètres de protection sans impact sur les fonctions des lecteurs d'écran L'auteur d'un document peut configurer un document PDF accessible de manière à interdire la copie, l'impression, l'extraction, le commentaire ou la modification du contenu. Ce paramètre risque de perturber la capacité d'un lecteur d'écran à lire le document, car celui-ci doit être en mesure de copier ou d'extraire le texte du document en vue de le convertir en voix. Pour conserver la protection du document tout en autorisant les lecteurs d'écran à accéder au texte, utilisez l'un des paramètres suivants : • Pour bénéficier d'une protection à niveau de chiffrement faible, sélectionnez l'option Activer la copie de texte, d’images et d’autre contenu dans la boîte de dialogue Protection par mot de passe - Paramètres. • Si vous choisissez un niveau de chiffrement élevé, sélectionnez l'option Activer l'accès au texte pour les lecteurs d'écran destinés aux malvoyants dans la boîte de dialogue Protection par mot de passe - Paramètres. Cette option a priorité sur les paramètres de protection du document dans le seul objectif de donner accès au contenu aux logiciels d'assistance tels que les lecteurs d'écran. Si votre produit de technologie d'assistance est enregistré auprès d'Adobe en tant qu'agent de confiance, vous pouvez lire des fichiers PDF pouvant être inaccessibles avec d'autres solutions d'assistance. Acrobat identifie les lecteurs d'écran et autres produits considérés comme agents de confiance. A des fins d'accessibilité, l'application ignore alors les paramètres de protection du document qui devraient restreindre l'accès au contenu. Cependant, les paramètres de protection restent en vigueur pour toutes les autres fonctions, notamment l'interdiction d'imprimer, de copier, d'extraire, de commenter ou de modifier le texte. Voir aussi « Protection par mot de passe d'un document » à la page 238 A propos des filigranes et des lecteurs d'écran Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter un filigrane à un document PDF balisé sans l'inclure dans l'arborescence des balises. Cela peut s'avérer pratique pour les personnes se servant de lecteurs d'écran, car elles n'entendront pas la lecture du texte du filigrane en tant que contenu du document. La méthode la plus pratique pour ajouter un filigrane qui ne gêne pas les lecteurs d'écran consiste à insérer un document PDF non balisé contenant le filigrane dans un PDF balisé. Voir aussi « Ajout et modification d'un filigrane » à la page 126296 Chapitre 11 : Modification d'un document PDF Le format Adobe® PDF se distingue des autres formats de documents qui vous permettent de copier, coller et déplacer librement du texte et des images sur une page. On peut le considérer comme un instantané du fichier d'origine. Faites appel à Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard afin de retoucher et d'optimiser un fichier à des fins de lisibilité et de diffusion, et intégrez les révisions plus conséquentes directement dans l'application source. Vignettes et signets A propos des vignettes Les vignettes correspondent aux vues miniatures des pages d’un document. Vous pouvez utiliser les vignettes pour atteindre rapidement une page ou en ajuster l'affichage. Dans Adobe Reader®, le déplacement d'une vignette entraîne celui de la page correspondante. Dans Acrobat, le déplacement, la copie ou la suppression d'une vignette entraîne le déplacement, la copie ou la suppression de la page correspondante. Si aucune vignette de page ne s'affiche dans le navigateur, essayez d'appuyer sur la touche F4 pour ouvrir le navigateur. Vous pouvez aussi choisir Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pages pour afficher les vignettes de page. Création d'une vignette Les vignettes de page accroissent la taille du fichier. C'est la raison pour laquelle Acrobat ne les crée pas automatiquement.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 297 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : Acrobat ne prend plus en charge l'incorporation ni la désincorporation des vignettes de page. Toutefois, Acrobat Distiller® offre une solution de remplacement pour l'incorporation des vignettes de page. Voir aussi « Options PostScript » à la page 392 Création d'une vignette ? Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. Les vignettes sont affichées dans le navigateur. Cette opération peut prendre plusieurs secondes, en particulier si le document est volumineux. La création des vignettes peut s'interrompre si vous effectuez d'autres tâches dans l'application au cours de cette opération. Redimensionnement d'une vignette ? Dans le menu Options du panneau Pages, choisissez Réduire les vignettes ou Agrandir les vignettes . Les vignettes de page reviennent à la taille par défaut lorsque vous fermez puis rouvrez le document PDF. Définition de l'ordre de tabulation Dans le panneau Pages, vous pouvez définir l'ordre selon lequel un utilisateur passe d'un champ de formulaire à l'autre, d'un commentaire à l'autre et d'un lien à l'autre à l'aide de la touche de tabulation. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. 2 Sélectionnez une vignette, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options . 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la page, cliquez sur Ordre de tabulation et sélectionnez l'ordre voulu : Utiliser l'ordre des rangées Parcourt les rangées de gauche à droite ou de droite à gauche si les pages sont reliées de droite à gauche. Utiliser l'ordre des colonnes Parcourt les colonnes de gauche à droite et de haut en bas, ou de droite à gauche si les pages sont reliées de droite à gauche. Utiliser la structure du document Parcourt les pages dans l'ordre indiqué par l'application de création. Remarque : Dans les documents structurés (documents PDF créés à partir d'applications de PAO ou contenant des balises), il est recommandé de sélectionner l'option Utiliser la structure du document pour conserver la structure de l'application de création.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 298 Modification d'un document PDF Si le document a été conçu dans une version antérieure d'Acrobat, l'ordre de tabulation défini par défaut est Non spécifié. Avec ce paramètre, la tabulation commence par les champs de formulaire, suivis des liens puis des commentaires triés par rangée. A propos des signets Un signet est un type de lien accompagné d'un texte représentatif dans le panneau Signets du navigateur. Chaque signet atteint une vue ou une page différente du document. Lors de la création des fichiers PDF, les signets sont générés automatiquement à partir des entrées de table des matières des documents créés dans la plupart des programmes de PAO. Ces signets sont souvent balisés et permettent d'apporter des modifications dans le fichier PDF. Un signet affiche la page qui était à l'écran au moment de la création du signet et qui constitue la destination de celuici. Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez définir la destination du signet au moment de sa création. Dans certains cas toutefois, il s'avère plus pratique de créer un groupe de signets, puis d'en définir les destinations ultérieurement. Dans Acrobat, les signets permettent de marquer un point du fichier PDF où vous souhaitez revenir, ou d'accéder directement à une destination au sein du fichier PDF, d'un autre document ou d'une page Web. Enfin, les signets peuvent déclencher des actions, telles que l'activation d'une commande de menu ou l'envoi d'un formulaire. Pour plus d'informations au sujet de la création des signets, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Signets dans Acrobat : www.adobepress.com/articles/index.asp?st=41891 • Utilisation des signets Acrobat : www.abanet.org/lpm/lpt/articles/att10051.html • Options relatives aux signets PDF : www.acrobatusers.com/articles/2007/02/bookmark_options/index.php Remarque : Dans Acrobat, l'ajout de signets à un document dépend de la configuration des options de protection. Les signets font office de table des matières dans certains documents PDF. Voir aussi « A propos des balises, de l'accessibilité, de l'ordre de lecture et de la redistribution » à la page 280 Création d'un signet 1 Ouvrez la page à laquelle le lien doit renvoyer, puis modifiez les options d'affichage. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 299 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Pour créer le signet, activez l'outil de sélection : • Pour associer un signet à une seule image, cliquez sur l’image voulue ou tracez un rectangle autour d'elle. • Tracez un rectangle autour d'une partie d'une image pour lui associer un signet. • Pour associer un signet au texte sélectionné, faites glisser la souris afin de mettre ce dernier en surbrillance. Le texte sélectionné devient l'intitulé du nouveau signet. Il est possible de modifier cet intitulé. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis sélectionnez le signet sous lequel vous souhaitez placer le nouveau signet. Si vous n’effectuez aucune sélection, le nouveau signet est automatiquement ajouté à la fin de la liste. 4 Choisissez Nouveau signet dans le menu Options . 5 Saisissez ou modifiez le nom du nouveau signet. Modification d'un signet Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez modifier les attributs d'un signet à tout moment. Voir aussi « Types d'actions » à la page 308 Pour renommer un signet ? Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez le signet, choisissez Renommer le signet dans le menu Options et saisissez le nouveau nom du signet. Renvoi automatique à la ligne dans un signet long ? Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis choisissez Retour à la ligne automatique des signets trop longs dans le menu Options . La totalité du texte des signets longs s'affiche quelle que soit la largeur du navigateur. (Cette option est activée lorsqu'une coche précède son nom.) Modification de l'aspect du texte d'un signet Vous avez la possibilité de modifier l'aspect d'un signet afin d'attirer l'attention sur lui. 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un ou plusieurs signets. 2 (Acrobat uniquement) Pour changer la couleur et le style du texte, choisissez Affichage > Barres d'outils > Barre des propriétés. Une fois l'aspect du signet défini, vous pouvez réutiliser les paramètres d'aspect choisis. Pour ce faire, sélectionnez le signet et choisissez Utiliser cet aspect par défaut dans le menu Options . 3 Pour modifier le corps de la police, ouvrez le menu Options et choisissez Corps du texte > [corps]. Modification de la destination d'un signet 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet. 2 Dans le panneau de visualisation, choisissez l'emplacement que vous souhaitez définir comme nouvelle destination. 3 Le cas échéant, ajustez le facteur de zoom. 4 Dans le menu Options, choisissez Définir la destination .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 300 Modification d'un document PDF Ajout d'une action à un signet 1 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet. 2 Dans le menu Options , choisissez Propriétés. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du signet, cliquez sur Actions. 4 Choisissez une action dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un signet ? Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez un signet ou une série de signets, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Important : La suppression d'un signet entraîne l'effacement de ses signets enfants. En revanche, cette opération n'a aucune incidence sur le texte du document. Création d'une arborescence de signets Vous avez la possibilité d'imbriquer une liste de signets pour indiquer un rapport hiérarchique entre les rubriques d'un document. Cette opération permet de créer un rapport parent/enfant. Vous pouvez développer ou réduire cette liste au gré de vos besoins. Imbrication d'un ou de plusieurs signets 1 Sélectionnez le(s) signet(s) à imbriquer. 2 Faites glisser l'icône (ou les icônes) directement sous l'icône du signet parent. L'icône de trait indique sa (leur) position. Le(s) signet(s) est (sont) imbriqué(s), mais la page elle-même demeure à son emplacement d'origine dans le document. Imbrication d'un signet (à gauche) et résultat de l'opération (à droite) Déplacement d'un signet hors d'une position imbriquée 1 Sélectionnez le(s) signet(s) à déplacer. 2 Déplacez la sélection en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser l'icône (les icônes) en positionnant la flèche directement sous l'intitulé du signet parent. • Dans le menu Options , choisissez Couper et sélectionnez le signet parent. Choisissez ensuite Coller sous le signet sélectionné dans le menu Options.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 301 Modification d'un document PDF Désimbrication d'un signet (à gauche) et résultat de l'opération (à droite) Développement ou réduction de tous les signets principaux ? Dans le menu Options , choisissez Développer les signets principaux ou Réduire les signets principaux. Ajout d'un signet balisé Les signets balisés permettent de mieux gérer le contenu des pages que les signets classiques. Etant donné que les signets balisés reprennent les informations structurelles sous-jacentes des éléments du document (par exemple, niveaux de titre, paragraphes, titres de tableau), ils vous permettent de modifier le document, par exemple de réorganiser les pages correspondantes dans le fichier PDF ou de supprimer des pages. Ainsi, si vous déplacez ou supprimez un signet balisé de niveau supérieur, les signets balisés de niveau inférieur qui lui sont subordonnés sont également déplacés ou supprimés. De nombreuses applications de PAO, telles qu'Adobe InDesign® et Microsoft Word, créent des documents structurés. Lorsque vous convertissez ces documents en PDF, la structure est convertie en balises qui permettent d'ajouter des signets balisés. Les pages Web converties comprennent habituellement des signets balisés. Si le document n'inclut aucune balise, vous pouvez en ajouter dans Acrobat. 1 Dans le panneau Signets, choisissez Nouveau signet structuré dans le menu Options . (Si cette option n'est pas disponible, cela signifie que le document n'est pas structuré.) 2 Sélectionnez les éléments de structure que vous souhaitez définir comme des signets balisés. Cliquez sur les autres signets en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée pour les ajouter à la sélection. Les signets balisés sont imbriqués sous un nouveau signet sans titre. Voir aussi « Liens et signets dans les pages Web » à la page 310 Liens et pièces jointes Création d'un lien Les liens permettent d'atteindre facilement des emplacements spécifiques dans le même document, dans d'autres documents électroniques, y compris des pièces jointes, ou sur des sites Web. Vous pouvez utiliser les liens pour lancer des actions ou pour garantir à votre lecteur un accès immédiat aux informations associées. Enfin, vous pouvez ajouter des actions destinées à lancer la lecture d'un fichier son ou d'un film.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 302 Modification d'un document PDF Voir aussi « Destinations » à la page 304 Création d'un lien à l'aide de l'outil Lien 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien ou activez l'outil Lien sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Le pointeur se transforme en croix et tous les liens du document deviennent temporairement visibles, y compris les liens invisibles. 2 Tracez un rectangle autour de la zone où vous souhaitez créer un lien. Il s'agit de la zone dans laquelle le lien sera actif. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, choisissez les options d'aspect du lien. 4 Sélectionnez l'une des actions de lien suivantes : Atteindre une vue de page Cliquez sur Suivant pour définir le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom pour le document actif ou un autre document (tel qu'une pièce jointe), puis cliquez sur Définir le lien. Ouvrir un fichier Sélectionnez le fichier cible, puis cliquez sur Sélectionner. Si le fichier est un fichier PDF, spécifiez la méthode d'ouverture du document (par exemple dans une nouvelle fenêtre ou dans une fenêtre existante), puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si le nom du fichier ne tient pas dans la zone de texte, il est tronqué en son milieu. Ouvrir une page Web Indiquez l'URL de la page Web cible. Lien personnalisé Cliquez sur Suivant pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien. Dans cette boîte de dialogue, vous pouvez définir les actions, par exemple la lecture d'un article ou l'exécution d'une commande de menu, à associer au lien. Création d'un lien à l'aide de l'outil Sélection ou Instantané 1 Activez l'outil Sélection ou l'outil Instantané (via le menu Outils > Sélection et zoom), puis faites glisser le curseur pour sélectionner le texte ou l'image à partir duquel vous souhaitez créer un lien. 2 Cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Créer un lien. 3 Sélectionnez les options de votre choix dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien. Remarque : L'option Lien personnalisé n'est pas disponible pour les liens créés à partir d'un texte sélectionné. Modification d'un lien Vous avez la possibilité de modifier un lien à tout moment. Vous pouvez changer sa destination, la zone sensible ou l'action qui lui est associée, ou encore supprimer ou redimensionner le rectangle qui le définit. La modification des propriétés d'un lien existant s'applique uniquement au lien sélectionné. Si aucun lien n'est sélectionné, les propriétés s'appliqueront au prochain lien créé. Il est possible de modifier les propriétés de plusieurs liens simultanément. Pour ce faire, vous devez tracer un rectangle pour les sélectionner à l'aide de l'outil Lien ou Objet. Déplacement ou redimensionnement du rectangle d'un lien 1 Activez les outils Lien ou Sélectionnez un objet , puis déplacez le pointeur sur le rectangle du lien de manière à afficher les poignées. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 303 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer le rectangle du lien, faites-le glisser. • Pour redimensionner le rectangle du lien, faites glisser un des ses coins. Modification de l'aspect d'un lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien et cliquez deux fois sur le rectangle du lien. 2 Dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, choisissez une couleur, une épaisseur de trait et un style de trait pour le lien. 3 Sélectionnez un style de mise en surbrillance qui signalera l'activation du lien : Aucun Ne modifie pas l'aspect du lien. Inversé Remplace la couleur du lien par la couleur inverse. Contour Remplace la couleur de contour du lien par la couleur inverse. Hors-texte Donne l'aspect d'un rectangle en relief. Remarque : Les options Type de lien, Couleur et Style de trait ne sont pas disponibles lorsque l'option d'aspect Rectangle invisible est sélectionnée. 4 Si vous préférez que les utilisateurs ne voient pas le lien dans le document PDF, choisissez Rectangle invisible comme type de lien. Un lien invisible s'avère utile lorsqu'il se trouve sur une image. 5 Cochez la case Verrouillage afin d'empêcher les utilisateurs de modifier les paramètres par inadvertance. 6 Pour tester le lien, activez l'outil Main. Remarque : Les propriétés de lien de la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien s'appliquent à tous les nouveaux liens jusqu'à ce que vous modifiiez ces propriétés. Pour réutiliser les paramètres d'aspect d'un lien, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le lien dont les propriétés seront utilisées par défaut, puis choisissez Utiliser cet aspect par défaut. Modification d'une action de lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien et cliquez deux fois sur le rectangle du lien. 2 Dans le panneau Actions de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, sélectionnez dans la liste l'action à modifier, puis cliquez sur Modifier. Suppression d'un lien 1 Activez l'outil Lien ou l'outil Objet . 2 Sélectionnez le rectangle du lien que vous souhaitez supprimer. 3 Choisissez Edition > Supprimer ou appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Création d'un lien Web à partir d'un URL Vous avez la possibilité de créer automatiquement des liens à partir de toutes les adresses URL contenues dans un document PDF ou des adresses URL situées sur les pages sélectionnées. Lorsqu'il est sélectionné, le paramètre Créer des liens à partir des URL disponible dans les préférences générales permet de générer des liens actifs à partir du texte contenu dans tous les fichiers PDF que vous ouvrez. Création d'un lien Web 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Créer des liens à partir des URL.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 304 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer des liens Web, sélectionnez Toutes afin de définir des liens à partir de tous les URL du document ou choisissez De et indiquez l'étendue sur laquelle des liens seront créés. Suppression de tous les liens Web ? Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Supprimer tous les liens. Lien vers une pièce jointe Pour orienter les utilisateurs vers une pièce jointe PDF, créez un lien dans le document PDF parent pointant vers la pièce jointe. Remarque : Ne confondez pas pièces jointes et fichiers pouvant être ouverts à partir d'un lien. Les documents liés peuvent être stockés dans des emplacements différents alors que les pièces jointes sont toujours enregistrées au même endroit que le document PDF. 1 Ouvrez un document PDF contenant une pièce jointe au format PDF. 2 Affichez l'emplacement où vous souhaitez créer un lien. Si cet emplacement se trouve dans la pièce jointe, cliquez sur le bouton Pièces jointes dans le navigateur, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 3 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien ou activez l'outil Lien sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. 4 Sélectionnez la zone du lien. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, définissez l'aspect du lien, sélectionnez l'option Atteindre une vue de page, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Définissez le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom voulus dans le document PDF parent ou dans la pièce jointe, puis cliquez sur Définir le lien. Destinations Une destination correspond à la cible d'un lien. Elle est représentée par du texte dans le panneau Destinations. Les destinations permettent de définir des chemins de navigation entre différents documents PDF. Il est préférable d'utiliser les destinations lorsque vous manipulez une série de documents. En effet, contrairement à un lien renvoyant à une page, un lien renvoyant à une destination n'est pas modifié en cas d'ajout ou de suppression de pages dans le document cible. Affichage et gestion des destinations Gérez les destinations à partir du panneau Destinations du navigateur. Affichage des destinations ? Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Toutes les destinations sont numérisées automatiquement. Tri de la liste des destinations ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour trier les noms de destination par ordre alphabétique, cliquez sur le libellé Nom situé en haut du panneau Destinations. • Pour trier les destinations par numéro de page, cliquez sur le libellé Page situé en haut du panneau Destinations.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 305 Modification d'un document PDF Modification ou suppression d'une destination ? Dans le panneau Destinations, cliquez sur la destination avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une commande : • Pour afficher l'emplacement cible, choisissez Atteindre la destination. • Pour supprimer la destination, choisissez Supprimer. • Pour définir la page affichée à l'écran comme nouvelle destination, choisissez Définir la destination. • Pour attribuer un nouveau nom à la destination, choisissez Renommer. Création et liaison d'une destination Vous pouvez créer un lien vers une destination au sein du même document PDF ou d'un autre document PDF. 1 Dans le document cible (de destination), choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Si le document contient déjà une destination vers laquelle vous souhaitez créer un lien, passez directement à l'étape 5. 2 Identifiez l'emplacement où vous souhaitez créer une destination, puis définissez l'affichage souhaité. 3 Dans le panneau Destinations, choisissez Nouvelle destination dans le menu Options , puis attribuez un nom à la destination. 4 Enregistrez le document cible. 5 Dans le document source (où vous souhaitez créer le lien), choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Outil Lien , puis tracez un rectangle afin de spécifier l'emplacement du lien. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, définissez l'aspect du lien, sélectionnez l'option Atteindre une vue de page, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 7 Le document cible étant ouvert, dans le panneau Destinations, cliquez deux fois sur la destination. 8 Enregistrez le document source. Ajout d'une pièce jointe Vous pouvez joindre des documents PDF et d'autres types de fichiers à un PDF. Si vous déplacez le document PDF, les pièces jointes le suivent. Les pièces jointes peuvent contenir des liens pointant vers le document parent ou vers d'autres pièces jointes ou des liens qui en sont issus. Ne confondez pas les commentaires joints et les pièces jointes. Un fichier joint comme commentaire est signalé sur la page par une icône de pièce jointe ou de fichier son joint et apparaît dans la liste des commentaires avec tous les autres commentaires. (Voir la section « Ajout de commentaires dans une pièce jointe » à la page 176.) Le panneau Pièces jointes permet d'ajouter, de supprimer ou d'afficher des pièces jointes. 1 Choisissez Document > Joindre un fichier.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 306 Modification d'un document PDF 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ajouter des fichiers, sélectionnez le fichier à joindre, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Important : Si vous joignez un fichier au format EXE, VBS ou ZIP, Acrobat vous avertit que le fichier joint ne sera pas ouvert, car son format est associé à des programmes malveillants, des macros et des virus potentiellement dangereux qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. 3 Pour pouvoir afficher la pièce jointe dans Acrobat 5.0 ou une version antérieure, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Pièces jointes, puis sélectionnez Afficher les pièces jointes par défaut dans le menu Options (option activée par défaut). • Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Vue initiale, choisissez Panneau Pièces jointes et page dans le menu Onglet de navigation, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez le document PDF. 5 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter une description à la pièce jointe et la différencier plus facilement des fichiers similaires dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis choisissez Modifier la description dans le menu Options . Modifiez le texte de la description, puis enregistrez le fichier. Ouverture, enregistrement ou suppression d'une pièce jointe Vous pouvez ouvrir une pièce jointe PDF et la modifier (si vous y êtes autorisé). Vos modifications sont appliquées à la pièce jointe PDF. Vous pouvez ouvrir et enregistrer les autres types de pièces jointes. Lorsque vous ouvrez le fichier, l'application prenant en charge le format de la pièce jointe s'ouvre (pour que vous puissiez ouvrir la pièce jointe, cette application doit être installée sur l'ordinateur). Les modifications apportées ne sont pas répercutées dans la pièce jointe. Vous devez enregistrer les modifications du fichier, puis le joindre de nouveau au document PDF. Remarque : Acrobat n'ouvre pas les fichiers au format EXE, VBS ou ZIP, car ceux-ci sont associés à des programmes malveillants, des macros ou des virus qui pourraient endommager votre ordinateur. Ouverture d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez la pièce jointe, puis choisissez Ouvrir la pièce jointe dans le menu Options . Enregistrement d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez une ou plusieurs pièces jointes, puis choisissez Enregistrer la pièce jointe dans le menu Options . Si vous n'avez sélectionné qu'une seule pièce jointe, vous pouvez la renommer. Suppression d'une pièce jointe ? Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, sélectionnez une pièce jointe, puis choisissez Supprimer la pièce jointe dans le menu Options .UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 307 Modification d'un document PDF Recherche dans les pièces jointes Lors de la recherche de mots ou de phrases spécifiques, vous pouvez inclure des fichiers PDF joints, de même que divers autres types de fichier. Les utilisateurs de Windows peuvent parcourir des documents Microsoft Office (.doc, .xls et .ppt, par exemple), des fichiers dessin AutoCAD (.dwg et .dwf), des fichiers HTML et des fichiers Rich Text Format (.rtf). Quant aux utilisateurs de Mac OS, ils peuvent effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft Word (.doc), HTML et .rtf. Les résultats de la recherche dans les pièces jointes figurent dans une liste placée sous le nom de fichier et l'icône de la pièce jointe. Les pièces jointes d'un autre format ne sont pas prises en compte par le moteur de recherche. Remarque : Pour effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft et AutoCAD, assurez-vous d'avoir installé les filtres IFilter correspondant aux types de fichiers concernés. Ces filtres sont généralement installés avec les applications associées, mais ils sont également téléchargeables à partir des sites Web des produits. Recherche dans les pièces jointes à partir du panneau Pièces jointes 1 Dans le panneau Pièces jointes, choisissez Rechercher dans les pièces jointes dans le menu Options . 2 Dans la fenêtre de recherche avancée, saisissez le mot ou l'expression à rechercher, sélectionnez les options de résultats voulues, puis cliquez sur Rechercher dans les pièces jointes. Recherche dans les pièces jointes à partir de la fenêtre Recherche avancée 1 Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. 2 Saisissez le mot ou l'expression à rechercher, puis sélectionnez les options de résultats voulues. 3 Cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées au bas de la fenêtre, puis cochez la case Inclure les pièces jointes. Actions et écriture de scripts A propos des actions Vous pouvez lier l'exécution d'une action donnée à l'activation d'un signet ou d'un lien, ou encore à l'affichage d'une page. Les liens et les signets permettent par exemple d'atteindre des emplacements spécifiques dans un document, mais également d'exécuter des commandes de menu ou d'autres types d'actions. Les actions sont à définir dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés. Pour les signets et les liens, vous spécifiez une action qui se produit lorsqu'un signet ou un lien est activé. Pour les autres éléments, tels que les pages, clips multimédia et champs de formulaire, vous définissez un déclencheur qui provoque l'action, puis vous spécifiez l'action même. Il est possible d'ajouter plusieurs actions à un seul déclencheur. L'option Verrouillage empêche la modification accidentelle de l'aspect et des actions associées à un objet. Ajout d'une action 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Activez l'outil Main et cliquez ensuite sur le signet ou la vignette avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. • A l'aide de l'outil Objet, cliquez deux fois sur un lien, un clip multimédia ou un champ de formulaire, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 308 Modification d'un document PDF 3 Dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, sélectionnez le type d'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. Vous pouvez ajouter plusieurs actions. Les actions sont exécutées selon leur ordre d'apparition dans la zone de liste Actions. 4 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez une action dans le panneau Actions, puis utilisez les boutons pour réorganiser, modifier ou supprimer l'action. 5 Fermez la fenêtre pour valider l'action. Ajout d'une action à l'aide de vignettes Pour optimiser la fonctionnalité interactive d'un document, vous pouvez définir des actions (telles que le changement de facteur de zoom à l'ouverture ou à la fermeture d'une page). 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Pages dans le panneau de gauche. 2 Sélectionnez la vignette associée à la page qui vous intéresse, puis choisissez Propriétés de la page dans le menu Options . 3 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 4 Dans le menu Sélectionner le déclencheur, choisissez Ouverture de la page pour définir une action à l'ouverture de la page ou choisissez Fermeture de la page pour définir une action à la fermeture de la page. 5 Choisissez une action dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Définissez les options relatives à l'action, puis cliquez sur OK. Les options disponibles varient en fonction de l'action sélectionnée. 7 Pour créer une série d'actions, choisissez une autre action dans le menu, puis cliquez à nouveau sur Ajouter. Les boutons Monter et Descendre vous permettent de classer les actions dans l'ordre d'exécution voulu. Remarque : Si vous définissez une action qui active le mode plein écran à l'ouverture ou à la fermeture d'une page, la prochaine fois que la même page s'ouvrira ou se fermera, le mode plein écran sera activé. Types d'actions Vous pouvez attribuer les actions suivantes aux liens, aux signets, aux pages, aux clips multimédia et aux champs de formulaire : Exécuter une commande de menu Permet d'exécuter une commande de menu en tant qu'action. Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia Atteint la vue 3D indiquée. Atteindre une vue de page Permet d'atteindre la destination spécifiée dans le document actif ou dans un autre document. Importer les données d'un formulaire Permet d'insérer dans le formulaire actif des données de formulaire provenant d'un autre fichier. Opération multimédia (Acrobat 9 et versions ultérieures) Applique une action spécifique à un objet multimédia du fichier (lecture d'un fichier son, par exemple). L'objet multimédia doit être inséré dans le fichier préalablement à la configuration de l'action associée. Ouvrir un fichier Lance et ouvre un fichier. Si vous diffusez un document PDF doté d'un lien renvoyant à un autre fichier, sachez que le lecteur devra disposer de l'application dans laquelle ce fichier a été créée pour pouvoir l'ouvrir. (Il se peut que vous deviez définir des préférences d'ouverture pour le fichier cible.) Ouvrir un lien Web Permet d'atteindre la destination spécifiée sur Internet. Vous pouvez définir le lien à l'aide des protocoles http, ftp et mailto.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 309 Modification d'un document PDF Lire un son Permet de lire un fichier son spécifique. Le son est incorporé au document PDF sous un format multiplateforme. Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 5) Permet de lire un film QuickTime ou AVI compatible avec Acrobat 5. Le film spécifié doit être incorporé dans un document PDF. Lire le support (compatible avec Acrobat 6 et versions ultérieures) Permet de lire une séquence donnée compatible avec Acrobat 6. Le film spécifié doit être incorporé dans un document PDF. Lire un article Permet de suivre les divisions d'un article, que celui-ci soit situé dans le document actif ou dans un autre fichier PDF. Réinitialiser un formulaire Permet d'effacer le contenu d'un formulaire. Vous pouvez déterminer les champs réinitialisés à l'aide de la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner les champs. Lancer un script JavaScript Exécute le script JavaScript spécifié. Définir la visibilité du calque Détermine les paramètres de calque actifs. Avant d'ajouter cette action, définissez les paramètres de calque appropriés. Afficher/Masquer un champ Affiche ou masque un champ dans un document PDF. Cette option s'avère particulièrement utile dans les champs de formulaire. Si, par exemple, vous souhaitez qu'un objet apparaisse chaque fois que le pointeur se trouve sur un bouton, définissez une action qui affiche un champ en présence du déclencheur Souris entrée et qui le masque en présence du déclencheur Souris sortie. Envoyer un formulaire Permet d'envoyer les données d'un formulaire à un URL spécifique. Types de déclencheurs Les déclencheurs déterminent le mode d'activation des actions dans les clips multimédia, les pages et les champs de formulaire. Par exemple, vous pouvez indiquer le film ou la séquence audio à lire à l'ouverture et à la fermeture d'une page. Les options disponibles varient en fonction de l'élément de page spécifié. A propos des scripts JavaScript dans Acrobat Le langage JavaScript a été développé par Netscape Communications en vue de faciliter la création de pages Web interactives. Adobe a amélioré ce langage afin de simplifier l'intégration de ce niveau d'interactivité dans vos documents PDF. Vous pouvez exécuter du code JavaScript à l'aide d'actions associées aux signets, aux liens et aux pages. La commande Définir des actions de scripts permet de créer des actions JavaScript au niveau du document entier. La sélection du déclencheur Le document a été enregistré, par exemple, entraîne l'exécution du script JavaScript après l'enregistrement du document. Acrobat Professional ou Acrobat Professional Extended est nécessaire pour pouvoir utiliser des scripts JavaScript avec des formulaires et des séquences de traitement par lot. Pour plus de détails sur la procédure de création de scripts JavaScript, téléchargez les manuels JavaScript à disposition sur le site Web d'Adobe. Developing Acrobat® Applications Using JavaScript™ contient des informations de base et des didacticiels, et JavaScript™ for Acrobat® API Reference contient des informations de référence détaillées. Ces ressources JavaScript (entre autres) sont situées sur le site Web d'Adobe.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 310 Modification d'un document PDF Conversion de pages Web Liens et signets dans les pages Web Vous manipulez les documents PDF créés à partir de pages Web de la même manière que tous les autres types de documents PDF. Suivant la configuration d'Acrobat, il suffit d'activer un lien sur une page Web convertie pour ajouter la page liée à la fin du document PDF (si celle-ci ne figure pas déjà dans le document). Remarque : N'oubliez pas qu'une page Web peut être convertie en plusieurs pages PDF. Une page Web constitue la seule rubrique (ou le seul URL) d'un site Web et correspond généralement à une page HTML continue volumineuse. Lorsque vous convertissez une page Web en document PDF, cette dernière risque d'être divisée en plusieurs pages PDF de taille standard. Lorsque vous créez un fichier PDF à partir de pages Web, des signets balisés sont générés si l'option Créer les signets est activée dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres de conversion des pages Web. Un signet standard (non balisé) représentant le serveur Web s'affiche en haut du panneau Signets. Sous ce signet viennent se placer les signets balisés des pages Web téléchargées. Le nom de chaque signet balisé est dérivé du titre de la page HTML ou de son URL si aucun titre n'est défini. A l'origine, les signets Web balisés sont tous placés au même niveau. Toutefois, vous pouvez les agencer et les imbriquer dans des groupes afin de suivre l'arborescence du contenu des pages Web. Si vous sélectionnez l'option Créer des balises PDF lorsque vous créez un document PDF à partir de pages Web, les informations de structure qui correspondent à la structure HTML des pages d'origine sont stockées dans le PDF. Vous pouvez utiliser ces informations pour ajouter au fichier des signets balisés renvoyant aux paragraphes et autres éléments HTML. Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 298 Affichage des informations relatives aux pages Web converties Vous pouvez afficher une boîte de dialogue contenant l'URL, le titre et la date et l'heure de téléchargement de la page active, ainsi que d'autres informations. ? Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Informations sur la page. Comparaison des pages converties et des pages Web en cours ? Pour ouvrir une page ou un lien Web, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Capture Web > Ouvrir la page dans un navigateur Web afin d'ouvrir la page active dans un navigateur Web. • Pour ouvrir la page marquée d'un signet, cliquez sur un signet balisé avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir la page dans un navigateur Web. • Pour ouvrir une page liée, cliquez sur un lien de la version PDF de la page Web avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Ouvrir dans un navigateur Web. Le navigateur ouvre la page spécifiée dans une nouvelle fenêtre d'application.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 311 Modification d'un document PDF Articles A propos des articles Dans de nombreux documents imprimés traditionnels, tels que les magazines et les journaux, le texte est agencé sous forme de colonnes ; il peut occuper plusieurs colonnes, voire plusieurs pages. Si ce format est tout à fait adapté à la documentation imprimée, il peut s'avérer difficile à suivre à l'écran dans la mesure où il faut continuellement faire défiler ou agrandir les pages. La fonction d'article vous permet de guider les lecteurs dans un document se présentant sous forme de colonnes multiples qui s'étendent sur plusieurs pages. Il s'agit de la répartition de la division d'un article. L'utilisateur parcourt le texte A, ignore les textes B et C, puis revient au texte A. Définition d'un article Pour créer un article, vous devez définir une série de cadres qui délimitent son contenu selon l'ordre de lecture souhaité. Le chemin de lecture que vous définissez pour un article s'appelle la division d'article. Vous créez une division associant les diverses zones pour créer un flux de texte continu. La plupart des programmes de PAO vous permettent de générer automatiquement des divisions d'article lorsque vous convertissez les fichiers en documents Adobe PDF. Si le fichier que vous consultez contient des articles, vous pouvez afficher le nom de ces derniers dans un panneau et les parcourir facilement. 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Article ou activez l'outil Article sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Le pointeur prend la forme d'une croix dans le panneau de visualisation. 2 Tracez un rectangle destiné à définir la première division d'article. Une division d'article s'affiche autour du texte sélectionné et le pointeur prend la forme du pointeur d'article. Chacune des divisions d'article que vous créez dispose d'un libellé portant le numéro de division et sa place au sein de l'article. Par exemple, la première division du premier article est libellée 1-1, la deuxième division 1-2, etc. Les divisions du deuxième article dans le même document sont intitulées 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, et ainsi de suite. 3 Placez-vous sur la partie suivante du document que vous souhaitez inclure dans l'article, puis tracez un rectangle autour du texte. Recommencez cette opération jusqu'à ce que la totalité de l'article soit définie. Remarque : Pour redimensionner ou déplacer une division d'article, assurez-vous que l'article est entièrement défini au préalable. 4 Pour terminer un article, appuyez sur Entrée. 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l'article, saisissez le titre, le sujet, l'auteur et les mots-clés de l'article, puis cliquez sur OK. 1 A 3 A C 2 A BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 312 Modification d'un document PDF Affichage et modification d'un article L'outil Article vous permet de créer, d'afficher et de modifier une division d'article dans le document PDF. Affichage des articles de la page ? Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Article. Affichage des articles dans le document PDF 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Articles. Remarque : Par défaut, le panneau Articles est un panneau flottant ; il n'est pas ancré au navigateur. Si vous souhaitez ancrer ce panneau aux autres, faites glisser le panneau Articles sur le navigateur. 2 Pour lire un article, cliquez deux fois dessus ou sélectionnez-le et choisissez Lire l'article dans le menu Options du panneau Articles. La première ligne de l'article apparaît dans le coin supérieur gauche. 3 Pour masquer le panneau Articles pendant l'affichage de l'article, choisissez Réduire après utilisation dans le menu Options du panneau Articles. Suppression d'un article ou d'une division d'article ? Dans le panneau Articles, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour supprimer l'intégralité d'un article, sélectionnez l'article concerné dans le panneau Articles, puis appuyez sur la touche Suppr. • Pour supprimer une seule division d'article, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Supprimer dans le menu contextuel. Dans le message d'avertissement qui s'affiche à l'écran, sélectionnez Division. Si vous cliquez sur Article, la totalité de l'article est supprimée. Les articles ou les divisions d'article restants sont automatiquement renumérotés. Insertion d'une division d'article dans une division existante 1 Dans la fenêtre du document, sélectionnez la division d'article après laquelle la nouvelle division doit se placer. 2 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé au bas de la division sélectionnée, puis sur OK lorsque vous êtes invité à tracer et à créer une nouvelle division d'article. Exemple de sélection d'un article avec l'outil Article 3 Tracez une nouvelle division d'article. La nouvelle division est insérée dans l'article et les divisions sont renumérotées en conséquence.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 313 Modification d'un document PDF Déplacement ou redimensionnement d'une division d'article ? A l'aide de l'outil Article, sélectionnez la division d'article, puis effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour déplacer une division, faites-la glisser vers le nouvel emplacement. • Pour redimensionner la division, faites glisser une poignée centrale pour ne modifier que la hauteur ou la largeur ou faites glisser un coin pour modifier les deux dimensions. Exemple de redimensionnement d'une division d'article Modification des propriétés d'article 1 A l'aide de l'outil Article, sélectionnez la division d'article à modifier. 2 Cliquez sur la division avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 3 Modifiez les informations de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l'article, puis cliquez sur OK. Combinaison de deux articles 1 Dans le panneau de visualisation, sélectionnez la division d'article à lire en premier. 2 Cliquez sur le signe plus (+) situé au bas de la division d'article, puis sur OK pour ignorer l'invite de création d'une nouvelle division d'article. 3 Cliquez en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée sur la division d'article que vous souhaitez lire ensuite. La deuxième division s'ajoute à la fin de la première. Toutes les divisions d'article sont renumérotées automatiquement dans le document. Modification de texte et d'objets Choix d'un outil Une idée fausse que l'on se fait souvent des documents PDF est que leur comportement doit être similaire à celui de tout autre document comportant des images et du texte, vous permettant de déplacer ou de modifier les éléments sur une page. Un document PDF est similaire à un instantané du document d'origine. Vous pouvez y apporter des rectifications mineures, mais si une révision importante est nécessaire, il est plus simple d'apporter ces modifications dans le document source et de régénérer le document PDF. Pour modifier le texte et les objets, choisissez les outils nécessaires sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. Pour insérer des annotations de révision dans un document PDF afin de signaler les modifications à apporter au document d'origine, voir la section « Annotation du texte pour modification » à la page 168. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 314 Modification d'un document PDF L'outil Retouche de texte vous permet d'ajouter du texte et de remplacer du texte si les polices utilisées sont installées sur le système. Si les polices ne sont pas installées, vous pouvez seulement modifier l'aspect du texte existant. Cependant, vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux blocs de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte. Pour appliquer un retour à la ligne du texte pendant la modification, sélectionnez Activer le champ retour à la ligne dans les textes dans les préférences de retouche. L'outil Machine à écrire permet de créer du texte mais offre moins d'options de modification de texte que l'outil Retouche de texte. Remarque : L'utilisation de l'outil Retouche de texte risque d'influer sur la redistribution du document, ce qui peut rendre ce dernier moins accessible aux malvoyants. L'outil Objet offre des fonctions de modification de base pour la plupart des objets. Vous pouvez modifier la taille, l'emplacement sur la page et les propriétés des images, des liens, des champs et des objets multimédia. Vous pouvez apporter ces modifications avec l'outil qui a servi à créer l'objet. Modification de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte Modification de texte Vous ne pouvez ajouter ou remplacer du texte que si la police utilisée est installée sur le système. Si la police n'est pas installée sur le système mais que cette police est incorporée ou qu'un jeu partiel est disponible dans le document PDF, vous ne pouvez modifier que la couleur, l'intermots, l'interlettrage, le décalage de la ligne de base et le corps de police. Un texte placé sur des lignes pivotées se modifie de la même façon qu'un texte situé sur des lignes horizontales ; de plus, vous pouvez utiliser des polices verticales à l'instar de polices horizontales. Le décalage de la ligne de base se fait à gauche ou à droite pour les polices verticales tandis qu'il se pratique vers le haut ou vers le bas pour les polices horizontales. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Modification de texte à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche de texte ou activez l'outil Retouche de texte sur la barre d'outils Modifications avancées. 2 Cliquez dans le texte à modifier. Un cadre de sélection encadre le texte sélectionnable. 3 Sélectionnez le texte que vous souhaitez modifier : • Choisissez Edition > Sélectionner tout afin de sélectionner l'ensemble du texte inclus dans le cadre de sélection. • Faites glisser le curseur afin de sélectionner des caractères, des espaces, des mots ou une ligne. 4 Modifiez le texte en effectuant l'une des opérations suivantes : • Saisissez le texte de remplacement de la sélection. • Appuyez sur la touche Suppr ou choisissez Edition > Supprimer afin de supprimer le texte. • Choisissez Edition > Copier afin de copier la sélection.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 315 Modification d'un document PDF • Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez l'option appropriée. Cliquez à l'extérieur de la sélection pour la désélectionner et recommencer. Modification d'attributs de texte 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez dans le texte à modifier. 3 Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Texte. Vous pouvez modifier les attributs de texte suivants : Police Remplace la police du texte sélectionné par la police que vous indiquez. Vous pouvez sélectionner une police parmi celles installées sur le système ou parmi celles entièrement incorporées dans le document PDF. Les polices du document sont répertoriées en premier, tandis que les polices système figurent au-dessous. Corps Remplace le corps de police par le corps (en points) indiqué. Interlettrage Insère un espacement uniforme entre les caractères du texte sélectionné. Intermots Insère un espacement uniforme entre les mots du texte sélectionné. Mise à l'échelle horizontale Détermine le rapport entre la hauteur et la chasse du caractère. Décalage de la ligne de base Décale le texte par rapport à la ligne de base. La ligne de base correspond à la ligne sur laquelle reposent les caractères. Fond Indique la couleur de fond. Contour Indique la couleur du contour. Epaisseur du contour Définit la largeur du contour. Remarque : Pour des raisons juridiques, si vous souhaitez modifier un texte utilisant une police donnée, vous devez avoir acheté et installé cette dernière. Ajout de texte Vous pouvez ajouter du texte à un document PDF dans n'importe laquelle des polices installées sur le système. 1 Activez l'outil Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée à l'emplacement où vous voulez insérer du texte. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s'affiche, sélectionnez la police et le mode voulu, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Saisissez le nouveau texte. 5 Pour modifier le corps de police et d'autres attributs, sélectionnez le texte, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Ajout de texte à l'aide de l'outil Machine à écrire L'outil Machine à écrire permet de saisir du texte n'importe où sur une page de document PDF. Les entreprises proposent souvent des versions PDF de leurs formulaires papier sans champs interactifs. L'outil Machine à écrire offre une solution simple pour remplir ce type de formulaire. Il s'agit d'un outil proche de l'outil Zone de texte mais avec des propriétés par défaut différentes.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 316 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : Les utilisateurs de Reader peuvent se servir de l'outil Machine à écrire si l'auteur du document a activé l'utilisation de cet outil dans le fichier PDF. 1 Choisissez Outils > Machine à écrire > Afficher la barre d'outils Machine à écrire. Cliquez ensuite sur le bouton Machine à écrire. 2 Cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez insérer du texte, puis commencez à le saisir. Appuyez sur Entrée pour ajouter une deuxième ligne. 3 Pour modifier les propriétés du texte, sélectionnez-le, puis utilisez l'un des outils suivantes de la barre d'outils Machine à écrire. • Pour modifier la taille du texte, cliquez sur le bouton Réduire la taille du texte ou Accroître la taille du texte. Vous pouvez également choisir un corps de police différent dans le menu déroulant approprié. • Pour modifier l'espacement des lignes du texte, sélectionnez le texte et cliquez sur le bouton Réduire l'interligne ou Accroître l'interligne. • Choisissez une couleur dans le menu Couleur de texte. • Choisissez un corps de police dans le menu déroulant approprié. 4 Pour déplacer ou redimensionner le bloc de texte tapé à la machine à écrire, activez l'outil Sélection, cliquez sur un bloc de texte tapé à la machine à écrire et faites-le glisser ou déplacez l'un de ses coins. 5 Pour modifier à nouveau le texte, activez l'outil Machine à écrire, puis cliquez deux fois sur le texte tapé à la machine à écrire. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Pour plus d'informations sur l'utilisation de l'outil Machine à écrire, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Utilisation de l'outil Machine à écrire avec des formulaires PDF non remplissables : blogs.adobe.com/bowman/acrobat/ • Présentation de l'outil Machine à écrire : www.abanet.org/lpm/lpt/articles/att04061.shtml Incorporation d'une police à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte L'incorporation de polices permet de garantir que le document PDF utilise les mêmes polices que le document d'origine, quels que soient les systèmes où vous ouvrez le document et les polices installées. 1 Choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Retouche de texte. 2 Cliquez dans le texte contenant les polices incorporées ou les jeux partiels de polices à modifier. Un paragraphe du texte est encadré dans un cadre de sélection. Pour sélectionner du texte dans le paragraphe, cliquez puis faites glisser le pointeur dessus. 3 Cliquez sur le texte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de retouche, cliquez sur l'onglet Texte afin d'afficher le nom et les propriétés de la police de même que les caractéristiques d'incorporation et de création de jeux partiels. 5 Pour afficher la liste de toutes les polices, faites défiler le menu Police. Les polices du document sont affichées en tête de liste. Les polices système sont répertoriées sous les polices du document. 6 Choisissez une police dans le menu Police, vérifiez les droits afin de déterminer les options disponibles pour cette police, puis sélectionnez une option d'incorporation. Les droits déterminent les options disponibles : Incorporation autorisée de la police Vous pouvez sélectionner à la fois les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel. Pour incorporer le jeu de polices entier au lieu d'un jeu partiel, assurez-vous que l'option Jeu partiel est désactivée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 317 Modification d'un document PDF Possibilité d'incorporer une police uniquement pour l'impression et l'aperçu Vous pouvez uniquement créer un jeu partiel de cette police. Vous pouvez intégrer la police pour l'impression et la prévisualisation mais pas pour effectuer des modifications. Incorporation de la police impossible Les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel sont indisponibles. Aucune police système disponible Les options Incorporer et Jeu partiel sont indisponibles. Remarque : La modification et l'enregistrement d'un document PDF signé numériquement sont possibles mais invalident la signature. Voir aussi « Polices » à la page 111 Déplacement ou modification d'un objet L'objet sélectionné est habituellement accompagné d'un cadre de sélection. Des poignées de sélection apparaissent lorsque vous pointez sur l'objet. Lorsqu'il s'agit d'un objet verrouillé, les poignées de sélection restent invisibles. Si vous sélectionnez plusieurs objets, le dernier objet sélectionné sert d'ancre et apparaît en rouge. Les autres objets sont affichés en bleu. L'objet ancre reste fixe pendant les opérations d'alignement. Pour changer d'ancre, cliquez deux fois sur le nouvel objet cible avec la touche Ctrl enfoncée (la première fois pour le désélectionner et la seconde pour le rajouter à la sélection). En tant que dernier objet ajouté à la sélection, il devient l'objet ancre. Lorsque la sélection est constituée d'objets de même type et qu'elle s'étend sur plusieurs pages, vous pouvez modifier l'aspect des objets mais non leur emplacement. Lors de la modification d'une zone de texte, la zone entière est sélectionnée. Si vous souhaitez modifier certains caractères ou mots spécifiques, faites appel à l'outil Retouche de texte. Faites appel à l'outil Objet pour sélectionner et déplacer des objets tels que des champs de formulaire et des liens. Sélection d'un objet 1 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs objets : • Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. • Cliquez sur l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Sélectionner tout dans le menu contextuel. Si l'outil Objet est activé et que le document est en mode Une seule page, tous les objets de la page active sont sélectionnés. Si le document utilise une autre mise en page, tous ses objets sont sélectionnés. Lorsqu'un bouton de la barre d'outils Modifications avancées est activé, tous les objets du type de cet outil situés dans le document sont sélectionnés. • Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur afin de tracer un rectangle autour des objets voulus. Si l'outil Objet est actif, tous les objets englobés dans le rectangle sont sélectionnés. Lorsqu'un bouton de la barre d'outils Modifications avancées est activé, faites glisser le pointeur tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. Tous les objets du même type englobés dans le rectangle sont sélectionnés. 2 (Facultatif) Ajoutez un ou plusieurs objets à la sélection active : • Cliquez sur un objet en maintenant la touche Ctrl enfoncée. • Cliquez en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée afin d'ajouter une série d'objets. (L'outil Objet inclut tous les objets lorsque la touche Maj est enfoncée pendant que vous cliquez sur l'élément.) L'utilisation de la touche Maj permet de sélectionner tous les éléments inclus dans le cadre de sélection rectangulaire formée par la sélection (y compris l'élément que vous venez d'ajouter).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 318 Modification d'un document PDF Déplacement d'un objet 1 Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. 2 Déplacez l'image ou l'objet : • Cliquez et faites glisser l'objet jusqu'à l'emplacement souhaité. Il est impossible de faire glisser un objet vers une autre page (mais rien ne vous empêche de le couper afin de le coller ailleurs). Pour contraindre le mouvement dans le sens vertical ou horizontal, faites glisser l'objet en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée. • Cliquez sur l'image avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez une option pour déplacer l'image sur la page. Redimensionnement d'un objet 1 Cliquez sur l'objet à l'aide de l'outil Objet ou de celui avec lequel vous l'avez créé. 2 Faites glisser une poignée de l'objet. Faites glisser la poignée tout en maintenant la touche Maj enfoncée pour conserver les proportions d'origine. Configuration d'une présentation Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran L'affichage en plein écran est une propriété des documents PDF utilisés dans les présentations. En mode plein écran, les pages PDF occupent la totalité de l'écran. La barre de menus d'Acrobat, la barre d'outils, ainsi que les boutons et options de la fenêtre sont masqués. Vous avez la possibilité de définir d'autres modes d'ouverture de telle façon que vos documents ou jeux de documents s'ouvrent toujours de la même manière. Dans les deux cas, il est possible d'insérer des transitions entre les pages afin d'améliorer l'aspect visuel du document pour l'utilisateur. Pour contrôler la navigation dans un document PDF (le défilement automatique des pages, par exemple), configurez les options du panneau Plein écran de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Ces préférences sont propres au système et non au document PDF. Elles déterminent le mode d'ouverture de tous les documents PDF sur un système donné. Par conséquent, si vous configurez une présentation sur un système que vous gérez, vous pouvez définir ces préférences. Cliquez sur le bouton Plein écran (entouré) pour afficher et parcourir des documents PDF en mode diaporama.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 319 Modification d'un document PDF Définition d'une vue initiale Lorsqu'un utilisateur ouvre votre document PDF ou un porte-documents PDF, la vue initiale du document s'affiche. Vous pouvez préciser le facteur de zoom, la page et la disposition à afficher initialement. Si le document PDF est une présentation, vous pouvez définir une vue initiale en plein écran. Après avoir défini l'affichage initial du document PDF, vous pouvez ajouter des transitions entre les pages sélectionnées ou entre toutes les pages du document. Acrobat prend en charge les transitions de pages et les passages de PowerPoint. Définition de la vue initiale 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, cliquez sur Vue initiale. 3 Sélectionnez les options de votre choix, puis cliquez sur OK. Pour constater les effets, enregistrez puis rouvrez le fichier. Définition de la vue initiale en mode plein écran Si vous paramétrez la vue initiale d'un document PDF en mode plein écran, vous devez définir le mode d'ouverture du document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, sélectionnez Vue initiale. 3 Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Dans le menu Onglet de navigation, choisissez Page seule. • Dans le menu Disposition des pages, choisissez Une seule page. • Définissez l'option Ouvrir à la page sur la page à laquelle vous souhaitez commencer la présentation. 4 Cochez la case Ouvrir en mode plein écran afin d'ouvrir le document sans afficher la barre de menus, la barre d'outils et les options de la fenêtre. Cliquez sur OK. (Pour constater les effets, enregistrez puis rouvrez le fichier.) Remarque : Vous pouvez quitter le mode plein écran en appuyant sur Echap si l'option correspondante est activée dans les préférences de plein écran. Cependant, en mode plein écran, les utilisateurs ne peuvent pas exécuter de commandes ni sélectionner d'outils à moins de connaître les raccourcis clavier correspondants. Vous pouvez définir des actions liées à une page dans le document pour offrir aux utilisateurs cette possibilité. Options de vue initiale dans les propriétés du document Les options de vue initiale dans les propriétés du document sont organisées en trois zones : Disposition et facteur de zoom, Fenêtre et Interface utilisateur. Disposition et facteur de zoom Détermine l'aspect du document. • Onglet de navigation Détermine les panneaux affichés dans le navigateur. • Mise en page Détermine le mode d'organisation des pages du document. • Zoom Définit le facteur de zoom utilisé à l'ouverture du document. L'option Par défaut applique le facteur de zoom défini par l'utilisateur. • Ouvrir à la page Indique la page affichée à l'ouverture du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 320 Modification d'un document PDF Remarque : La configuration des options Par défaut pour le zoom et Mise en page renvoie à la configuration des préférences d’affichage des pages définie dans l’application de l’utilisateur. Fenêtre Détermine le mode d'ajustement de la fenêtre dans la zone de visualisation lors de l'ouverture du document. Ces options s'appliquent à la fenêtre du document par rapport à la zone de visualisation disponible sur le moniteur de l'utilisateur. • Redimensionner selon la page initiale Ajuste la fenêtre du document selon la page d'ouverture, conformément à la configuration des options du document. • Centrer à l'écran Place la fenêtre au centre de l'écran. • Ouvrir en mode plein écran Agrandit au maximum la fenêtre de document et affiche le document sans barre de menus, barre d'outils et commandes. • Nom du fichier Affiche le nom de fichier sur la barre de titre de la fenêtre. • Titre du document Affiche le titre du document sur la barre de titre de la fenêtre. Le titre du document provient du panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Interface utilisateur Détermine les zones de l'interface (la barre de menus, les barres d'outils et les options de la fenêtre) qui sont masquées. Remarque : Si vous masquez la barre de menus et les barres d'outils, les utilisateurs ne peuvent ni exécuter de commandes, ni sélectionner d'outils, à moins qu'ils ne connaissent les raccourcis clavier correspondants. Vous pouvez définir des actions de page qui masquent temporairement les commandes d'interface pendant que la page est affichée. (Voir la section « Ajout d'une action à l'aide de vignettes » à la page 308.) Ajout de transitions de page Vous pouvez créer un effet de transition intéressant qui se produira chaque fois que vous passerez d'une page à une autre dans une série de pages. 1 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Transitions de page. • Dans le panneau Pages, sélectionnez les vignettes auxquelles vous souhaitez appliquer des transitions, puis choisissez Transitions de page dans le menu Options . 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Définir les transitions, choisissez un effet de transition dans le menu Transition. Ces effets de transition sont identiques à ceux définis dans les préférences de plein écran. 3 Choisissez la direction de l'effet de transition. Les options disponibles dépendent de la transition. 4 Choisissez la vitesse de l'effet de transition. 5 Cochez la case Changer de page et saisissez le nombre de secondes devant s'écouler entre les changements de page automatiques. Si cette option est désactivée, l'utilisateur feuillette les pages à l'aide des commandes du clavier ou de la souris. 6 Sélectionnez l'étendue à laquelle vous souhaitez appliquer des transitions. Remarque : Si l'utilisateur active l'option Ignorer toutes les transitions dans les préférences de plein écran, il ne verra pas les transitions de page.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 321 Modification d'un document PDF Propriétés et métadonnées de document Affichage des propriétés de document Vous avez la possibilité de consulter des informations concernant un document PDF affiché à l'écran, notamment son titre, ainsi que les polices et les options de protection utilisées. Certaines de ces informations sont fournies par l'auteur du document tandis que d'autres sont générées automatiquement. Dans Acrobat, il est possible de modifier les données définissables par l'auteur (sous réserve que le fichier n'ait pas été protégé lors de son enregistrement, sans quoi aucune modification ne peut lui être apportée). 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document, cliquez sur un onglet. Voir aussi « Sélection d'une méthode de protection » à la page 236 « Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis » à la page 387 Propriétés du document Description Affiche les informations de base sur le document. Certaines informations, telles que le titre, l'auteur, le sujet et les mots-clés, peuvent avoir été définies par l'auteur du document source dans son application de création (Word ou InDesign, par exemple) ou par l'auteur du document PDF. Vous pouvez rechercher des documents à partir de ces informations. La zone Mots-clés peut se révéler particulièrement utile pour restreindre le champ de la recherche. De nombreux moteurs de recherche utilisent le titre pour décrire le document dans leur liste de résultats. Si un document PDF n'a pas de titre, la liste des résultats indique son nom de fichier. Le titre d’un document et le nom du fichier ne sont pas nécessairement identiques. La zone Description avancée indique la version du document PDF, le format de page, le nombre de pages, si le document est balisé et s'il est activé pour l'affichage Web rapide. (Le format de la première page est indiqué lorsque le document PDF ou le porte-documents PDF contient plusieurs formats de page.) Ces informations sont générées automatiquement et ne sont pas modifiables. Les stratégies Décrit les modifications et les fonctionnalités autorisées dans le document PDF. Si un mot de passe, un certificat ou une stratégie de protection a été appliqué au document PDF, cette méthode est indiquée ici. Polices Dresse la liste des polices et des types de polices utilisés dans le document original, ainsi que les polices, types de polices et codages utilisés pour restituer les polices d'origine. Si le programme a parfois fait appel à des polices de substitution qui ne vous conviennent pas, vous pouvez installer les polices d'origine sur le système ou demander à l'auteur du document de régénérer le document en y incorporant les polices d'origine. Vue initiale (Acrobat uniquement) Décrit le mode d'affichage du document PDF à l'ouverture (notamment la taille initiale de la fenêtre, le numéro de page et le facteur de zoom de départ) et précise si les signets, les vignettes, la barre d'outils et la barre de menus sont visibles. Vous pouvez modifier ces paramètres afin de changer le mode d'ouverture du document pour la suite. Personnalisée (Acrobat uniquement) Permet d'ajouter des propriétés au document. Avancé Dresse la liste des paramètres PDF, des paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression et des options de lecture du document.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 322 Modification d'un document PDF Dans les paramètres PDF, vous pouvez définir un URL de base pour les liens Web du document. Un URL de base facilite la gestion des liens Web renvoyant à des sites Web tiers. Si l'URL lié à un site externe change, il vous suffit de modifier l'URL de base au lieu de rechercher chaque lien Web renvoyant au site. L'URL de base n'est pas utilisé pour les liens spécifiant une adresse URL complète. Vous pouvez également associer un fichier d'index de catalogue (PDX) au document PDF. Lorsque la fonction de recherche parcourt le fichier PDF à partir de la fenêtre Recherche avancée, tous les fichiers PDF indexés par le fichier PDX spécifié sont également analysés. Vous pouvez inclure dans le document des informations de prépresse, telles que le recouvrement. Vous pouvez définir des paramètres d'impression prédéfinis pour un document, lesquels préremplissent la boîte de dialogue Imprimer à l'aide de valeurs se rapportant spécifiquement à ce document. Vous pouvez également définir les options de lecture qui déterminent la manière dont le document PDF est lu par un lecteur d'écran ou par un autre dispositif d'assistance. Ajout d'une description aux propriétés du document Vous pouvez ajouter des mots-clés aux propriétés d'un document PDF que d'autres personnes pourront rechercher à l'aide d'un utilitaire pour localiser ce document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés. 2 Activez le panneau Description, puis saisissez le nom de l'auteur, le sujet et des mots-clés. 3 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires pour ajouter d'autres informations descriptives, telles que les informations sur les droits d'auteur. Création d'une propriété de document Vous pouvez ajouter des propriétés de document personnalisées pour stocker des types spécifiques de métadonnées, notamment le numéro de la version ou le nom de la société émettrice d'un document PDF. Les propriétés que vous créez figurent dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Les propriétés créées doivent être dotées de noms uniques qui n'apparaissent pas dans les autres panneaux de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis sélectionnez Personnalisées. 2 Pour ajouter une propriété, saisissez son nom et une valeur, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 3 Pour modifier les propriétés, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK : • Pour modifier une propriété, sélectionnez-la, changez sa valeur, puis cliquez sur Modifier. • Pour supprimer une propriété, sélectionnez-la, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. Pour renommer une propriété personnalisée, supprimez la propriété et créez une propriété personnalisée portant le nom voulu. Modification des métadonnées de document Les documents PDF créés dans les versions 5.0 et ultérieures d'Acrobat comportent des métadonnées de document au format XML. Ces métadonnées fournissent des informations sur le document et sur son contenu, telles que le nom de l'auteur, les mots-clés et les informations sur les droits d'auteur, qui peuvent être utilisées par des utilitaires de recherche. Les métadonnées de document contiennent (mais ne sont pas limitées à) des informations figurant également dans le panneau Description de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du document. Il est possible d'étendre et de modifier des métadonnées de document à l'aide de produits tiers. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 323 Modification d'un document PDF Le format XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) fournit aux applications Adobe un environnement XML commun afin de normaliser la création, le traitement et l'échange de métadonnées de document entre flux de publication. Il est possible d'enregistrer et d'importer au format XMP le code source XML des métadonnées d'un document, ce qui facilite le partage des métadonnées entre différents documents. Vous pouvez également enregistrer les métadonnées du document dans un modèle, que vous pourrez réutiliser dans Acrobat. Consultation des métadonnées de document 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, puis cliquez sur le bouton Métadonnées supplémentaires dans le panneau Description. 2 Cliquez sur Avancé pour afficher les métadonnées incorporées dans le document. (Celles-ci sont présentées dans un schéma, c'est-à-dire sous forme de groupes prédéfinis d'informations liées.) Pour afficher ou masquer les informations sur les schémas, cliquez sur le nom de schéma. Si un schéma n'est pas identifié par un nom reconnu, il est répertorié comme Inconnu. L'espace du nom XML est présenté entre parenthèses après le nom du schéma. Modification ou ajout de métadonnées de document 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires. 2 Sélectionnez Avancées dans la liste de gauche. 3 Pour modifier les métadonnées, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes avant de cliquer sur OK. • Pour ajouter des informations préalablement enregistrées, cliquez sur Ajouter, sélectionnez un fichier XMP ou FFO, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. • Pour ajouter des informations et remplacer les métadonnées actives par les informations stockées dans un fichier XMP, cliquez sur Remplacer, sélectionnez un fichier XMP ou FFO enregistré, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Les nouvelles propriétés sont ajoutées, les propriétés existantes également spécifiées dans le nouveau fichier sont remplacées et les propriétés existantes ne figurant pas dans le fichier de substitution sont conservées dans les métadonnées. • Pour supprimer un schéma XML, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. • Pour ajouter les métadonnées d'un modèle à la fin des métadonnées actives, maintenez la touche Ctrl (Windows) ou Commande (Mac OS) enfoncée et choisissez le nom du modèle dans le menu de la boîte de dialogue, dans le coin supérieur droit. Remarque : Pour pouvoir importer des métadonnées à partir d'un modèle, vous devez enregistrer le modèle de métadonnées au préalable. • Pour remplacer les métadonnées existantes par un modèle de métadonnées, choisissez le fichier de modèle (XMP) voulu dans le menu contextuel de la boîte de dialogue, dans le coin supérieur droit. Enregistrement de métadonnées en tant que modèle ou fichier 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés, activez l'onglet Description, puis cliquez sur Métadonnées supplémentaires. 2 Sélectionnez Avancées dans la liste de gauche. 3 Enregistrez les métadonnées du document, puis cliquez sur OK : • Pour enregistrer les métadonnées dans un fichier externe, cliquez sur Enregistrer et attribuez un nom au fichier. Les métadonnées sont enregistrées en tant que fichier au format XMP. (Pour utiliser les métadonnées enregistrées dans un autre document PDF, ouvrez ce document et utilisez ces instructions pour remplacer des métadonnées dans le document ou en ajouter à la fin du document.) • Pour enregistrer les métadonnées sous forme de modèle, choisissez Enregistrer le modèle de métadonnées dans le menu situé dans le coin supérieur droit de la boîte de dialogue, puis attribuez un nom au fichier. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 324 Modification d'un document PDF Affichage de données d'objet et de métadonnées Vous pouvez afficher les métadonnées de certains objets, balises et images dans un document PDF. Vous pouvez uniquement modifier et exporter les métadonnées des objets Visio. Activez l'outil Données d'objet pour afficher le regroupement d'objets et les données d'objet. Voir aussi « Recherche de texte dans plusieurs fichiers PDF » à la page 334 Affichage et modification des métadonnées d'objet Visio 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un objet de la page pour afficher les métadonnées correspondantes. L'arborescence des modèles s'ouvre : elle contient la liste de tous les élément structuraux. Les métadonnées de l'objet sélectionné apparaissent en tant que propriétés et valeurs modifiables au bas de l'arborescence des modèles. L'objet sélectionné apparaît en surbrillance sur la page. Vous pouvez changer de couleur en la choisissant dans le menu Couleur de surbrillance dans le menu situé en haut de l'arborescence des modèles. 3 Pour modifier les métadonnées, saisissez les nouvelles valeurs dans les zones situées au bas de l'arborescence des modèles. 4 Pour exporter les métadonnées d'objet, dans le menu Options, choisissez Exporter au format XML > Arborescence complète afin d'exporter tous les objets figurant dans l'arborescence des modèles ou choisissez Exporter au format XML > Noeud actif pour exporter uniquement l'objet sélectionné et ses enfants. Donnez un nom au fichier et enregistrez-le. Exportation des métadonnées d'objet Visio 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un objet de la page pour afficher les métadonnées correspondantes. 3 Dans le menu Options , choisissez l'une des options suivantes : • Choisissez Exporter au format XML > Arborescence complète pour exporter tous les objets. • Choisissez Exporter au format XML > Noeud actif pour exporter uniquement l'objet sélectionné et ses enfants. 4 Donnez un nom au fichier et enregistrez-le.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 325 Modification d'un document PDF Calques A propos des calques PDF Vous pouvez afficher, parcourir et imprimer le contenu doté de calques dans les documents PDF créés à partir d'applications telles que InDesign, AutoCAD et Visio. Les paramètres d'état initial et d'état par défaut vous permettent de gérer l'affichage des calques. Par exemple, vous pouvez masquer un calque contenant un avis de copyright lorsque le document est affiché à l'écran mais inclure ce calque lors de l'impression du document. Une vidéo sur l'utilisation des calques est disponible à l'adresse http://www.adobe.com/go/lrvid4082_a9_fr. Affichage ou masquage d'un calque Les informations peuvent être stockées sur différents calques d'un document PDF. Les calques qui apparaissent dans le document PDF sont fondés sur les calques créés dans l'application d'origine. Le panneau Calques permet d'examiner les calques et d'afficher ou de masquer le contenu de chacun. Il est impossible de masquer les éléments situés sur les calques verrouillées. Certains calques peuvent être imbriqués en groupes dans un calque parent. D'autres calques peuvent être regroupés, sans calque parent. Remarque : Un icône de verrou dans le panneau Calques indique que ce calque est fourni à titre de référence uniquement. La visibilité d'un calque verrouillé n'est pas modifiable. Panneau calques A. L'icône représentant un œil indique que le calque est visible B. Calque verrouillé C. Calque masqué D. Groupe de calques imbriqués E. Groupe de calques 1 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Calques. 2 Pour masquer un calque, cliquez sur l'icône en forme d'œil. Pour afficher un calque masqué, cliquez dans la zone vide. (Les calques visibles sont signalés par une icône représentant un œil. Lorsque cette icône est absente, le calque est masqué. Ce paramètre a temporairement priorité sur les paramètres définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque.) Remarque : Dans un groupe de calques imbriqués, si le calque parent est masqué, les calques imbriqués sont eux-aussi masqués automatiquement. Si le calque parent est visible, les calques imbriqués peuvent être visibles ou masqués. 3 Dans le menu Options , choisissez l'une des options suivantes : Répertorier les calques pour toutes les pages Affiche chaque calque sur chaque page du document. Répertorier les calques des pages visibles Affiche uniquement les calques des pages visibles. A B C D EUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 326 Modification d'un document PDF Rétablir la visibilité initiale Rétablit l'état par défaut des calques. Appliquer les priorités d'impression Affiche les calques d'après les paramètres d'impression définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque (Imprimer lorsque visible, Ne jamais imprimer, Toujours imprimer). Appliquer les priorités d'exportation Affiche les calques d'après les paramètres d'exportation définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque (Exporter lorsque visible, Ne jamais Exporter, Toujours Exporter). Appliquer les priorités de calque Affiche tous les calques. Cette option concerne le contenu facultatif du document PDF, y compris les calques non répertoriés dans le panneau Calques. Tous les calques sont visibles, quels que soient les paramètres définis dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque. Il n'est pas possible de modifier la visibilité des calques par le biais de l'icône représentant un œil tant que cette commande est activée. Lorsque vous effectuez des modifications dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calques, ces changements restent ineffectifs jusqu'à ce que vous choisissiez Rétablir la visibilité initiale dans le menu Options. (Seule exception : la modification du nom du calque prend effet immédiatement.) Remarque : Il est impossible d'enregistrer la vue d'un fichier PDF doté de calques en utilisant l'icône d'œil du panneau Calques destinée à afficher et à masquer les calques. Lors de l'enregistrement, la visibilité d'origine des calques est automatiquement rétablie. Réorganisation des calques Le panneau Calques vous permet de réorganiser individuellement les calques. Cette opération s'avère utile si vous souhaitez modifier l'ordre des calques dans la liste ou déplacer un calque d'un groupe à un autre. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez cependant pas réorganiser des calques verrouillés ou des calques faisant partie de groupes imbriqués. 1 Dans le panneau de navigation Calques, sélectionnez un calque. 2 Tout en maintenant la touche Alt enfoncée, faites glisser le calque jusqu'à l'emplacement voulu. Suppression d'un groupe de calques vide ? Dans le panneau de navigation Calques, sélectionnez un calque vide et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Ajout d'une navigation de calques Vous avez la possibilité d'ajouter des liens et des destinations aux calques, ce qui vous permet de modifier l'affichage d'un document lorsque l'utilisateur clique sur un signet ou sur un lien. Remarque : En général, les modifications apportées à la visibilité des calques à l'aide de l'icône représentant un œil (disponible dans le panneau Calques) ne sont pas mémorisées sur la barre d'outils Navigation. Association d'une visibilité de calque à des signets 1 Définissez les propriétés du calque, l'option de visibilité et le facteur de zoom du calque PDF cible dans le panneau de visualisation. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Signets, puis choisissez Nouveau signet dans le menu Options . 3 Sélectionnez le signet que vous venez de créer, puis choisissez Propriétés dans le menu Options . 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du signet, cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 5 Dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner l'action, choisissez Définir la visibilité du calque, cliquez sur Ajouter, puis sur OK. 6 Dans le panneau Signets, sélectionnez le libellé du signet et choisissez un nom.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 327 Modification d'un document PDF Association de la visibilité d'un calque à une destination de lien 1 Dans le panneau de visualisation, définissez les propriétés du calque associées à la destination. 2 Choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Destinations. Le panneau Destinations s'affiche sous forme de fenêtre flottante. Vous pouvez l'ancrer aux autres panneaux en le faisant glisser vers le navigateur. Si le panneau est réduit, cliquez sur le bouton Destinations pour le développer. 3 Choisissez Nouvelle destination dans le menu Options , puis attribuez un nom à la destination. 4 Activez l'outil Lien , puis tracez le lien dans le panneau de visualisation. (Comme le contenu est ajouté à tous les calques, cela n'a pas d'importance si vous semblez créer le lien sur le calque cible. Le lien fonctionne indépendamment du calque sur lequel vous le créez.) 5 Dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, sélectionnez Lien personnalisé et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le panneau Aspect de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, définissez l'aspect du lien. 7 Cliquez sur l'onglet Actions dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du lien, choisissez Définir la visibilité du calque puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 8 Fermez les boîtes de dialogue. Vous pouvez tester le lien. Pour ce faire, modifiez les paramètres de calque, sélectionnez l'outil Main et activez le lien. Modification d'un contenu doté de calques L'outil Sélection ou Instantané permet de sélectionner ou de copier le contenu d'un document PDF doté de calques. (Dans Reader, le fichier PDF doit inclure les droits d'utilisation.) Dans Acrobat, les outils de retouche permettent de modifier le contenu. Ces outils sont en mesure d'identifier et de sélectionner tout contenu visible, que celui-ci soit situé sur un calque sélectionné ou non. Dans Acrobat, si le contenu que vous modifiez ou que vous supprimez est associé à un calque, le contenu du calque reflète la modification apportée. Si le contenu que vous modifiez ou que vous supprimez est associé à plusieurs calques, le contenu de tous les calques reflète le changement apporté. Si, par exemple, vous souhaitez modifier un titre et une signature figurant sur la même ligne de la page d'ouverture d'un document tout en étant situés sur des calques visibles distincts, la modification du contenu placé sur un calque est répercutée sur les deux. Vous pouvez ajouter un contenu, notamment des commentaires de révision, des tampons ou encore des champs de formulaire, à des documents conçus avec des calques en procédant de la même façon que dans le cas d'un document PDF. Le contenu n'est cependant pas ajouté à un calque spécifique, même si un calque est sélectionné au moment de l'ajout du contenu. En réalité, le contenu est ajouté à tout le document. Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser la commande Combiner les fichiers en un seul fichier PDF afin de combiner les documents PDF contenant des calques. Les calques contenus dans chacun des documents sont groupés sous un entête spécifique dans le panneau Calques du navigateur. Pour développer et réduire le groupe, cliquez sur l'icône figurant sur la barre de titre du groupe. Voir aussi « Déplacement ou modification d'un objet » à la page 317UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 328 Modification d'un document PDF Utilisation d'un document PDF géographique A propos des documents PDF géographiques Un fichier géographique PDF contient les informations requises pour les données de lieu de référence géographique. Lors de l'importation de données géographiques dans un fichier PDF, Acrobat conserve les coordonnées géographiques. Celles-ci vous permettent de visualiser et d'interagir dans le document PDF afin de trouver et de marquer les données du lieu. Les données géographiques peuvent être vectorielles ou pixellisées ou bien les deux à la fois. Une fois les données géographiques importées dans Acrobat, vous pouvez les exploiter de différentes façons, soit pour : • Trouver et indiquer les coordonnées du lieu. • Mesurer une distance, un périmètre ou une aire sur une carte. • Changer les unités de mesure et le système de coordonnées. • Copier les coordonnées du lieu dans le Presse-papiers, puis les utiliser pour afficher des emplacements dans plusieurs utilitaires Web de mappage. • Enregistrer une image pixellisée pour créer un fichier PDF à données géographiques. Interaction avec un fichier PDF géographique Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier PDF géographiquement activé, vous pouvez repérez des lieux, mesurer des distances et ajouter des marqueurs d'emplacement. Vous pouvez également copier des coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers pour les utiliser dans un service Web de cartographie. Affichez les outils de mesure géographique en choisissant Outils > Analyse > Afficher la barre d'outils Analyse. L'outil Lieu géographique permet d'effectuer les tâches suivantes : • Afficher la latitude et la longitude pendant que le curseur est sur une zone contenant des informations géographiques. • Marquer un lieu avec une annotation géographique. • Rechercher un lieu dans un document. Voir aussi « Présentation des outils de commentaire et d'annotation » à la page 163 « Mesure de la hauteur, de la largeur ou de l'aire d'un objet » à la page 49 Recherche d'un lieu sur une carte 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF géographique et choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique . 2 Cliquez sur la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis cliquez sur Rechercher un lieu. 3 Entrez les valeurs de latitude et de longitude (degrés, minutes, secondes ou décimales) dans les deux zones de texte, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. Si au moins un lieu est disponible, celui-ci est surligné avec un carré bleu et la page est centrée sur le lieu en question. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 329 Modification d'un document PDF 4 Si le fichier PDF comporte plusieurs cartes, cliquez sur les boutons Suivant et Précédent pour afficher, le cas échéant, les résultats supplémentaires. Des lieux multiples sont disponibles dans plusieurs cas : • Lorsqu’un document contient plusieurs cartes - si un fichier PDF contient, par exemple, une carte à l'intérieur d'une plus grande carte (telle qu'une ville sur une carte d'un Etat ou d'un pays). Lors de la recherche d'un lieu situé dans une ville, Acrobat trouve ce lieu à la fois dans la carte de la ville et dans la plus grande carte. • Lorsqu'un document contient plusieurs pages d'une carte (si, par exemple, la page un représente un pays et la page deux représente un Etat ou une ville du pays). 5 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter un commentaire (tel qu'un toponyme ou une adresse), cliquez sur le marqueur du lieu, puis ajoutez les informations dans la zone de commentaires. 6 Pour terminer la recherche, cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris. Sélectionnez ensuite Masquer la recherche de lieu pour faire disparaître les zones de recherche. Repérage d'un lieu géographique 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF géographique et choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique . 2 Déplacez le pointeur de la souris sur le document pour afficher la longitude et la latitude des zones contenant des informations géographiques. Cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour rechercher un lieu, cliquez sur Rechercher un lieu. Entrez les valeurs de latitude et de longitude, puis cliquez sur Rechercher. • Pour marquer un lieu avec des informations géographiques, cliquez sur Marquer le lieu. 3 (Facultatif) Pour ajouter un commentaire (tel qu'un toponyme ou une adresse), cliquez sur le marqueur du lieu, puis ajoutez les informations dans la zone de commentaires. Mesure d'une distance, d'un périmètre ou d'une aire sur une carte Lors de l'ouverture d'un fichier géographique PDF, les outils de mesure d'Acrobat lisent les informations géographiques et mesurent la surface et la distance, plutôt que les dimensions d'objet ou de page. Les outils de mesure permettent de calculer la distance, le périmètre et la surface de tout fichier PDF géographiquement activé. Au fur et à mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur de la souris sur le contenu du document, des marqueurs d'accrochage s'affichent et indiquent que vous vous trouvez sur un chemin ou sur une extrémité de chemin. Vous pouvez également afficher la latitude et la longitude de l'emplacement de votre curseur lorsque le pointeur de la souris se trouve sur du contenu géographique. 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Mesures . 2 Dans l'affichage de l'outil de mesure, sélectionnez un type de mesure : Distance , Surface ou Périmètre . 3 Sélectionnez une option d'accrochage : • Accrocher aux tracés • Accrocher aux extrémités • Accrocher aux points centraux • Accrocher aux intersections 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si vous utilisez l'outil Distance, cliquez à l'endroit où vous souhaitez commencer la mesure, puis faites glisser le pointeur sur l'extrémité et cliquez encore une fois. La distance s'affiche dans le coin en bas à droite.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 330 Modification d'un document PDF • Si vous utilisez l'outil Périmètre, cliquez sur la carte dans un coin du périmètre, puis faites glisser le pointeur de la souris sur chaque coin. Cliquez sur chaque coin, puis cliquez deux fois sur l'extrémité. La fenêtre d'information affiche la taille du périmètre. • Si vous utilisez l'outil Zone, cliquez sur la carte dans un coin de la zone, puis faites glisser le pointeur de la souris sur un autre coin. Cliquez avant de changer de direction. Cliquez deux fois à la fin pour afficher la surface totale. 5 Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Terminer la mesure. Ou sélectionnez Annuler la mesure. Vous pouvez également copier des coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers pour les utiliser dans un service Web de cartographie. Après avoir trouvé un lieu dans un fichier géographique PDF, vous pouvez copier ses coordonnées dans le Pressepapiers. Dans le Presse-papiers, vous pouvez coller les données dans un service Web de cartographie capable de lire les coordonnées de latitude et de longitude. 1 Choisissez Outils > Analyse > Lieu géographique , puis cliquez sur le lieu avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la carte. 2 Cliquez sur Copier les coordonnées dans le Presse-papiers Acrobat copie les données dans ce format : latitude, puis longitude, séparées par un espace. Collez les données dans la barre d'adresse d'un service Web de cartographie capable d'interpréter les données du lieu. Modification des unités de mesure au sein d'un document Pour modifier le type d'unité de mesure, cliquez à l'intérieur de la carte avec le bouton droit de la souris à l'aide de l'outil Mesure et choisissez Unité de distance ou Unité d'aire. Sélectionnez ensuite un type de mesure. Modification des préférences de mesures géographiques Vous pouvez changer les unités de mesure de tous les fichiers géographiques PDF dans la boîte de dialogue des préférences. Dans la section catégories, cliquez sur Mesures (géographiques). Activer les annotations de mesure Ajoute un libellé à une mesure géographique. Lorsque l'option Activer les annotations de mesure est sélectionnée, choisissez Utiliser le libellé, puis entrez un libellé pour les mesures. Paramètres d'accrochage Sélectionnez les parties de chemin sur lesquelles vous souhaitez accrocher vos mesures. Affichage des valeurs Détermine le mode de calcul des valeurs de latitude et de longitude. Choisissez une décimale pour afficher ces valeurs en fraction décimale. Choisissez Degrés, minutes, secondes pour diviser chaque degré de longitude en 60 minutes, elles-mêmes divisées en 60 secondes. Affichage de la direction Choisissez entre Signé et Nommé. La direction nommée affiche un N (nord) ou un S (sud) à côté de la latitude et un E (est) ou un O (ouest) pour la longitude. Toujours afficher la latitude et la longitude au format WGS 1984 Cette option permet de garantir que la latitude et la longitude utilisent la norme actuelle de cadre de référence pour la terre (World Geodetic System 1984). Pour les cartes plus anciennes qui ont été réalisées avec une grille antérieure (telle que NAD 1927), vous pouvez désélectionner cette option afin d'afficher les valeurs originales. Lorsqu'une carte plus ancienne est enregistrée dans ses coordonnées natives, celles-ci peuvent différer des normes actuelles utilisées par les appareils GPS et les services Web de cartographie. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut Sélectionnez l'unité de mesure voulue. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut La surface peut se mesurer avec une unité de mesure différente de celle utilisée pour la distance. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 331 Modification d'un document PDF Ne pas afficher le calque de transparence dans les images au format GeoTIFF et JPEG Les formats d'images pixellisées comprennent un calque de transparence que vous pouvez supprimer. Exportation d'annotations d'emplacement et de mesure Vous pouvez exporter des données géographiques et de mesure vers un fichier PDF. A chaque annotation géographique correspond une entrée GPTS. Celle-ci représente la latitude et la longitude de chaque point d'annotation. Parmi les types d'information exportables figurent les suivants : • Lieux marqués saisis dans l'outil Lieu géographique • Mesures de distance, de périmètre (distance composée) et de surface entrées en utilisant l'outil Mesures sur le contenu géographique Vous pouvez exporter les données géographiques à l'aide du menu Commentaires ou du panneau Commentaires. • Dans le menu Commentaires, choisissez Commentaires > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données.. • Dans le panneau Commentaires, choisissez Options > Exporter les commentaires vers un fichier de données. Pour exporter un sous-ensemble des commentaires, sélectionnez-les, puis choisissez Options > Exporter les commentaires. Saisissez ensuite le nom du fichier et cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le fichier PDF est enregistré.332 Chapitre 12 : Recherche et indexation Vous disposez de nombreux modes et moyens pour effectuer des recherches à la fois efficaces et concluantes dans Adobe® Acrobat® 9 Standard. Une recherche peut être globale ou limitée, porter sur des types de données variés et s'appliquer à de multiples fichiers Adobe PDF. Recherche dans des fichiers PDF Présentation des fonctions de recherche Vous effectuez des recherches pour trouver des éléments spécifiques dans les fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche simple (en recherchant un terme dans un seul fichier) ou une recherche plus complexe (en recherchant des données de différents types dans un ou plusieurs fichiers PDF). Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée ou via la barre d'outils Recherche. Dans les deux cas, Acrobat effectue la recherche dans le texte, les calques, les champs de formulaire et les signatures numériques des documents PDF. Vous pouvez également inclure les signets et les commentaires. La fenêtre Recherche avancée propose plus d'options et de types de recherches que la barre d'outils Recherche. Lorsque vous utilisez la fenêtre Recherche avancée, les données d'objet et les métadonnées d'images au format XIF font également partie de la recherche. Pour des recherches dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, Acrobat inclut également les propriétés de document et les métadonnées XMP, et les balises de structure indexées lors de la recherche dans un index PDF. Si certains fichiers PDF disposent de pièces jointes au format PDF, ces dernières sont également incluses dans la recherche. Remarque : Les documents PDF peuvent comprendre plusieurs calques. Si les résultats de la recherche contiennent une occurrence située sur un calque masqué, un message d'avertissement vous demande si vous voulez rendre le calque visible lorsque vous sélectionnez cette occurrence. Voir aussi « Affichage ou masquage d'un calque » à la page 325 « Recherche d'informations masquées dans un fichier PDF » à la page 262UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 333 Recherche et indexation Accès aux fonctions de recherche avancée Le point de départ de la recherche dépend du type de recherche à effectuer. Utilisez la barre d'outils Recherche pour lancer une recherche rapide dans le fichier PDF actif. Faites appel à la fenêtre Recherche avancée pour rechercher des mots ou des propriétés de document dans plusieurs fichiers PDF, appliquer les options de recherche avancée et opérer sur Internet ou dans des index PDF. Affichage de la barre d'outils Recherche ? Par défaut, la barre d'outils Recherche est ouverte. Si elle est fermée, ouvrez-la en choisissant Edition > Rechercher. Ouverture de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ? Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. • Sur la barre d'outils Recherche, cliquez sur la flèche , puis choisissez Ouvrir la recherche avancée d'Acrobat. Une fenêtre distincte s'ouvre. Vous pouvez la déplacer, la redimensionner, la réduire ou la disposer derrière la fenêtre du fichier PDF (en partie ou complètement). Disposition de la fenêtre du document PDF et de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ? Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, cliquez sur Réorganiser les fenêtres. Acrobat redimensionne et dispose les deux fenêtres côte à côte de manière à occuper tout l'écran. Remarque : Un second clic sur le bouton Réorganiser les fenêtres redimensionne la fenêtre du document mais laisse la fenêtre Recherche avancée inchangée. Si vous souhaitez réduire ou agrandir la fenêtre Recherche avancée, faites glisser l'un des coins ou un bord, comme vous procéderiez pour n'importe quelle autre fenêtre sur votre système d'exploitation. Recherche de texte dans un fichier PDF La barre d'outils Recherche permet d'effectuer une recherche dans le document PDF actif. 1 Saisissez le texte à rechercher dans la zone de texte de la barre d'outils Recherche. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de la zone de texte, puis choisissez une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : Mots entiers Recherche uniquement les occurrences du mot complet que vous saisissez dans la zone de texte. Par exemple, si vous recherchez le mot classeur, les mots classe et classeurs ne sont pas recherchés. Respect de la casse Recherche uniquement les occurrences des mots avec la même casse. Par exemple, si vous recherchez le mot Web, les mots web et WEB ne sont pas recherchés. Inclure les signets Inclut le texte du panneau Signets dans la recherche. Commentaires inclus Etend la recherche aux commentaires. 3 Appuyez sur Entrée. Acrobat affiche la première occurrence du terme recherché, qui est mise en surbrillance. 4 Appuyez sur Entrée de manière répétée pour atteindre les occurrences suivantes du terme recherché.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 334 Recherche et indexation Recherche de texte dans plusieurs fichiers PDF La fenêtre Recherche avancée vous permet de rechercher les termes voulus dans plusieurs fichiers PDF. Vous pouvez ainsi effectuer des recherches dans tous les fichiers PDF situés à un emplacement donné ou contenus dans un portedocuments PDF ouvert. Remarque : Si les documents sont chiffrés (c’est-à-dire, s’ils sont dotés de options de protection), ils sont exclus de toute recherche portant sur de multiples documents. Commencez par ouvrir ces documents et recherchez les termes voulus, fichier par fichier. Cependant, les documents chiffrés en tant que publications numériques Adobe font exception et sont disponibles pour la recherche portant sur plusieurs documents. 1 Ouvrez Acrobat depuis votre bureau (et pas depuis un navigateur Web). 2 Effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes. • Sur la barre d'outils Recherche, tapez les termes voulus, puis choisissez Ouvrir la recherche avancée d'Acrobat dans le menu déroulant. • Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, tapez le texte à rechercher. 3 Dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée, sélectionnez Dans tous les documents PDF dans. Dans le menu situé directement sous cette option, choisissez Rechercher l'emplacement. 4 Sélectionnez l'emplacement, sur votre ordinateur ou sur un réseau, puis cliquez sur OK. 5 Pour définir des critères de recherche supplémentaires, cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées et désignez les options voulues. 6 Cliquez sur Rechercher. Au cours d'une recherche, cliquez sur un résultat ou utilisez les touches de raccourci afin de passer en revue les résultats sans interrompre la recherche. Cliquez sur le bouton Arrêter sous la barre de progression de la recherche pour interrompre la recherche et limiter les résultats aux occurrences déjà trouvées. Cette action n'entraîne ni la fermeture de la fenêtre Recherche avancée ni la suppression de la liste des résultats. Pour afficher davantage de résultats, lancez une nouvelle recherche. Recherche dans un porte-documents PDF Dans un porte-documents PDF, vous pouvez effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers PDF composant de même que dans d'autres types de fichiers. Les utilisateurs de Windows peuvent parcourir des documents Microsoft Office (.doc, .xls et .ppt, par exemple), des fichiers dessin AutoCAD (.dwg et .dwf), des fichiers HTML et des fichiers Rich Text Format (.rtf). Quant aux utilisateurs de Mac OS, ils peuvent effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft Word (.doc), HTML et .rtf. Remarque : Pour effectuer des recherches dans des fichiers Microsoft et AutoCAD, assurez-vous d'avoir installé les filtres IFilter correspondant aux types de fichiers concernés. Ces filtres sont généralement installés avec les applications associées, mais ils sont également téléchargeables à partir des sites Web des produits. 1 Ouvrez le porte-documents PDF dans Acrobat depuis votre bureau (et pas depuis un navigateur Web). 2 Dans la zone de recherche de la barre d'outils du porte-documents PDF, tapez le texte à rechercher. 3 Pour définir des critères de recherche supplémentaires, ouvrez le menu déroulant et désignez les options voulues. Les résultats de la recherche indiquent tous les fichiers contenant le texte recherché. Dans le cas des fichiers PDF, pensez à développer la liste afin d'afficher les résultats dans leur contexte. Cliquez sur un résultat pour accéder directement à l'emplacement du texte dans le document PDF. S'il s'agit d'un autre type de fichier, cliquez sur Ouvrir pour ouvrir le fichier, puis recherchez le texte en question.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 335 Recherche et indexation Voir aussi « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 114 « Affichage et modification des composants d'un porte-documents PDF » à la page 115 Vérification des résultats de la recherche Une fois la recherche lancée depuis la fenêtre Recherche avancée, les résultats s'affichent selon l'ordre des pages, imbriqués sous le nom de chaque document analysé. Chaque élément répertorié comprend quelques mots de contexte (le cas échéant) et une icône indique le type de l'occurrence. Saut à une occurrence spécifique dans les résultats de la recherche (seulement pour les fichiers PDF uniques) 1 Le cas échéant, développez les résultats de la recherche. Sélectionnez ensuite une occurrence dans les résultats afin de l'afficher dans le document PDF. 2 Pour afficher d'autres occurrences, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur une autre occurrence dans les résultats. • Choisissez Edition > Résultats de la recherche, puis Résultat suivant ou Résultat précédent. Tri des occurrences dans les résultats de la recherche ? Sélectionnez une option dans le menu Tri par situé au bas de la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Vous pouvez les trier selon les critères suivants : Classement par pertinence, Date de modification, Nom du fichier ou Emplacement. Icônes affichées avec les résultats de la recherche L'icône placée en regard d'une occurrence des résultats indique la zone de recherche dans laquelle figure l'occurrence en question. La sélection d'une icône produit l'effet suivant : Icône de document Active le document dans la fenêtre du document. Développez la liste pour afficher les différents résultats de la recherche au sein de ce document. Icône (générale) des résultats de la recherche Dans les fichiers PDF, atteint cette occurrence particulière du terme recherché, généralement située dans le corps du texte du document PDF. L'occurrence est mise en surbrillance dans le document. Icône des résultats de la recherche de fichier non PDF [ ] Dans le cas des documents non PDF, ouvre le fichier ou, si l'ouverture de ce type de fichier est limitée, affiche une boîte de dialogue de message. Icône de signet Ouvre le panneau Signets et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes recherchés. Icône de commentaire Ouvre le panneau Commentaires et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes recherchés. Icône de calque Peut afficher un message indiquant que le calque est masqué et que vous pouvez l'afficher si vous le souhaitez. Icône de pièce jointe Ouvre un fichier joint au document PDF parent sur lequel porte la recherche et met en surbrillance les occurrences des termes trouvés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 336 Recherche et indexation Options de recherche avancées Par défaut, la fenêtre Recherche avancée affiche les options de recherche de base. Cliquez sur le lien Options de recherche avancées situé au bas de la fenêtre pour afficher des options supplémentaires. Pour restaurer les options de base, cliquez sur le lien Options de recherche de base situé au bas de la fenêtre. Vous pouvez configurer une préférence permettant d'afficher en permanence les options de recherche avancées dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Recherche. Donner les résultats contenant Limite les résultats de la recherche à l'option choisie : • Mot ou expression exacts Recherche la chaîne de caractères complète, en respectant notamment les espaces et l’ordre des mots dans la zone de texte. • Un des mots Recherche toute occurrence d’au moins un des termes indiqués. Si, par exemple, vous recherchez petit homme, les résultats incluent toute occurrence de l’un des deux termes ou des deux ensembles : petit, homme, petit homme ou homme petit. • Tous les mots Recherche des occurrences contenant tous les mots de la recherche, mais pas nécessairement dans l’ordre de la frappe. Option disponible seulement pour une recherche portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des fichiers de définition d'index. • Recherche par opérateurs booléens Fait appel aux opérateurs booléens que vous indiquez avec les mots à rechercher dans la zone Quel terme ou quelle expression recherchez-vous ?. Option disponible uniquement pour les recherches portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des index PDF. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas effectuer de recherches génériques à l'aide d'astérisques (*) ou de points d'interrogation (?) lorsque l'opération de recherche s'applique à des index PDF. Rechercher dans Limite la recherche au document PDF actif, à l'ensemble d'un porte-documents PDF ouvert (le cas échéant), à un index ou un emplacement de votre ordinateur. Si vous choisissez d'effectuer une recherche portant sur un index, un emplacement ou un porte-documents PDF, des options supplémentaires s'affichent sous Critères supplémentaires. Critères supplémentaires (options de texte) Comprend les options de recherche de base plus quatre autres options : • Proximité Recherche plusieurs mots séparés par un nombre défini d'autres mots, conformément à l'option spécifiée dans les préférences de recherche. Option disponible seulement pour une recherche portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des fichiers de définition d'index, et lorsque l'option Tous les mots est sélectionnée. • Racine identique Recherche les mots contenant une partie (la racine) du terme indiqué. Par exemple, une recherche portant sur ouverture trouve des occurrences des termes ouvert, ouverte, ouvertes et ouvertement. Cette option s'applique à des mots individuels et à des expressions lors de recherches portant sur le document PDF actif, un dossier ou un index créé dans Acrobat 6.0 ou version ultérieure. Les caractères génériques (*, ?) ne sont pas autorisés dans les recherches de racine identique. Cette option n'est pas disponible si la case Mots entiers ou Respect de la casse est cochée. • Inclure les signets Etend la recherche au texte des signets, tels qu'ils apparaissent dans le panneau Signets. • Inclure les commentaires Etend la recherche au texte des commentaires ajoutés au document PDF, tels qu'ils apparaissent dans le panneau Commentaires. • Inclure les pièces jointes Etend la recherche aux documents joints au document PDF actif ou à d'autres fichiers PDF joints (jusqu'à deux niveaux d'imbrication). Critères supplémentaires (propriétés du document) Option disponible uniquement pour les recherches portant sur plusieurs documents PDF ou des index PDF. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs combinaisons propriété- modificateur-valeur et les appliquer aux recherches. Ce paramètre ne s'applique pas aux fichiers non PDF contenus dans des porte-documents PDF.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 337 Recherche et indexation Remarque : Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche par propriétés de document uniquement à l'aide des options correspondantes associées à une recherche de texte spécifique. • Case à cocher Applique à la recherche les critères définis dans les trois options apparentées. (La case est automatiquement cochée lorsque vous saisissez des informations dans l'une des trois options d'un jeu. Une fois les options définies, la désactivation de la case à cocher n'efface pas les entrées, mais les écartent simplement de la recherche.) • Premier menu (la propriété) Indique l'attribut du document à rechercher. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Date de création, Date de modification, Auteur, Titre, Sujet, Nom du fichier, Mots-clés, Signets, Commentaires, Images JPEG, Métadonnées XMP et Données d'objet. • Deuxième menu (le modificateur) Indique le niveau de correspondance. Si la sélection dans le premier menu est une date, les options disponibles dans ce menu sont : Est exactement le, Est antérieure au, Est postérieure au et N'est pas le. Pour les autres sélections, les options disponibles sont Contient et Ne contient pas. • Troisième zone (la valeur ou le texte) Indique les informations de référence, que vous devez taper. Si la sélection dans le premier menu est une date, vous pouvez cliquer sur la flèche pour ouvrir un calendrier permettant de localiser et de sélectionner la date voulue. Opérateurs booléens Les opérateurs booléens communément utilisés sont les suivants : ET Utilisez cet opérateur entre deux mots afin de rechercher des documents les contenant tous les deux, quel que soit l'ordre. Par exemple, saisissez paris ET france afin d’identifier les documents comprenant à la fois paris et france. Les recherches à l'aide de l'opérateur ET et aucun autre opérateur booléen aboutissent aux mêmes résultats que lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Tous les mots. PAS Utilisez cet opérateur devant le terme à exclure de la recherche dans des documents qui le contiennent. Par exemple, tapez NON texas afin de trouver tous les documents ne contenant pas le terme texas. Vous pouvez aussi saisir paris PAS texas afin de trouver tous les documents contenant le terme paris sans inclure texas en même temps. OU Utilisez cet opérateur afin de rechercher toutes les occurrences d'un des termes de la chaîne à rechercher. Par exemple, tapez email OU e-mail afin de rechercher tous les documents contenant des occurrences des deux orthographes. Les recherches à l'aide de l'opérateur OU et aucun autre opérateur booléen aboutissent aux mêmes résultats que lorsque vous sélectionnez l'option Un des mots. ^ (OU exclusif) Utilisez cet opérateur pour rechercher toutes les occurrences comprenant l'un des deux termes, mais pas les deux. Par exemple, tapez chat ^ chien afin de rechercher tous les documents contenant des occurrences soit de chat soit de chien, mais pas des deux termes à la fois (chat et chien). ( ) Utilisez les parenthèses pour définir l'ordre d'évaluation des termes. Par exemple, tapez blanche ET (baleine OU achab) pour trouver tous les documents contenant soit blanche et baleine ou blanche et achab. (Le moteur de recherche effectue alors la requête OU portant sur baleine et achab, puis une requête ET à partir de ces résultats sur blanche. Pour plus de détails sur les requêtes, la syntaxe et les opérateurs booléens disponibles pour affiner les recherches, voir tout document standard, site Web ou autre source d'information sur le sujet. Recherche dans des fichiers d'index de documents PDF catalogués Un index de texte intégral est créé lorsqu'un utilisateur se sert d'Acrobat pour définir un catalogue de documents PDF. Vous pouvez effectuer une recherche dans cet index plutôt que d'exécuter une recherche de texte intégral analysant tous les documents PDF inclus dans le catalogue. Une recherche dans un index génère une liste de résultats comprenant des liens renvoyant aux occurrences des documents indexés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 338 Recherche et indexation Remarque : Pour effectuer une recherche dans un index PDF, vous devez ouvrir Acrobat en tant qu'application autonome (et non dans un navigateur Web). Sous Mac OS, les index créés dans d'anciennes versions d'Acrobat ne sont pas compatibles avec la fonction de recherche avancée d'Acrobat 9. Si vous venez de procéder à une mise à niveau de l'application, mettez à jour les index avant d'utiliser la fonction de recherche avancée d'Acrobat 9. 1 Choisissez Edition > Recherche avancée. 2 Saisissez le texte à rechercher, puis cliquez sur Options de recherche avancées. 3 Dans le menu Rechercher dans, choisissez Sélectionner un index. 4 Sélectionnez un index dans la liste ou cliquez sur Ajouter pour insérer l'index. Recommencez cette opération autant de fois que cela est nécessaire. Remarque : Pour lire des informations relatives au fichier index sélectionné, cliquez sur Informations. Pour exclure un index de la recherche, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 5 Cliquez sur OK pour fermer la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner un index, puis choisissez Index sélectionnés dans le menu Rechercher dans. 6 Effectuez l'opération de recherche comme à l'accoutumée. Remarque : Afin de réduire de manière significative le délai d'affichage des résultats, activez l'option Mot entier lors de recherches menées dans des index. Voir aussi « Préférences de la fonction de recherche » à la page 338 Préférences de la fonction de recherche Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sous Catégories, sélectionnez Recherche. Ignorer la chasse des caractères asiatiques Permet de rechercher les occurrences de caractères en langues asiatiques de différentes chasses dans le texte à parcourir. Ignorer les signes diacritiques et les accents Recherche les termes quelles que soient les variantes des caractères alphabétiques. Par exemple, la saisie de cafe permet de trouver à la fois cafe et café. De même, la recherche de café permet de trouver les deux versions. Si cette option est désactivée, la recherche de cafe ne détecte pas les occurrences de café et vice versa. Toujours utiliser les options de recherche avancées Affiche en permanence les options avancées en plus des options de base dans la fenêtre Recherche avancée. Afficher le titre du document dans les résultats de la recherche Affiche les titres des documents dans les résultats de la recherche. Si un document n'a pas de titre, le nom du fichier s'affiche à sa place. Lorsque cette option est désactivée, les noms des fichiers s'affichent dans les résultats de la recherche. Activer la mise en surbrillance dans les recherches à partir d'un serveur externe Met les résultats de la recherche en surbrillance lors de l'utilisation d'un serveur externe, tel qu'un moteur de recherche Internet. Nombre maximal de documents affichés dans les résultats Limite les résultats de la recherche dans la fenêtre Recherche PDF à un nombre donné de documents. La valeur par défaut est 500, mais vous pouvez saisir tout nombre compris entre 1 et 10 000. Plage de mots pour les recherches de proximité Limite les résultats de la recherche aux occurrences dont le nombre de mots entre les mots recherchés est inférieur au nombre indiqué. Admet une plage comprise entre 1 et 10 000.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 339 Recherche et indexation Activer la recherche rapide Génère automatiquement une mise en antémémoire des informations contenues dans tout fichier Adobe PDF utilisé pour une recherche. Cette mise en antémémoire réduit la durée des recherches ultérieures portant sur ce document PDF. Taille maximale de l'antémémoire Limite l'antémémoire temporaire réservée aux informations de recherche rapide à la valeur spécifiée en mégaoctets (entre 5 et 100 000). La valeur par défaut est 100. Vider le contenu de l'antémémoire Supprime l’intégralité de l’antémémoire de recherche rapide. Création d'un index PDF Création et gestion d'un index dans un document PDF Vous pouvez réduire le temps nécessaire à effectuer les recherches dans un long document PDF en incorporant dans celui-ci un index des mots. Acrobat met beaucoup moins de temps à rechercher des mots dans un index que dans un document complet. L'index incorporé est fourni dans les exemplaires diffusés ou partagés du document PDF. Les utilisateurs procèdent de la même façon pour effectuer des recherches dans des documents PDF dotés d'un index incorporé ou non ; aucune étape supplémentaire n'est requise. Pour savoir comment accélérer les recherches dans des documents PDF à l'aide des index, consultez les conseils et la formation de Seneca en matière de conception à l'adresse Web suivante : w.ww.senecadesign.com/designgeek/acrobat.html. Ajout d'un index à un document PDF 1 Le document étant ouvert dans Acrobat, choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Gérer l'index incorporé, cliquez sur Incorporer l'index. 3 Lisez les messages qui s'affichent, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Dans Outlook et Lotus Notes, vous avez la possibilité d'incorporer un index au moment de la conversion des messages électroniques ou des dossiers de courrier au format PDF. Cette option est particulièrement recommandée dans le cas de dossiers contenant de nombreux messages électroniques. Mise à jour ou suppression de l'index incorporé dans un document PDF 1 Choisissez Options avancées > Traitement du document > Gérer l'index incorporé. 2 Cliquez sur Mettre à jour l'index ou Supprimer l'index.340 Chapitre 13 : Multimédia et modèles 3D Les possibilités offertes par les documents Adobe PDF s'étendent à la richesse des communications multimédia. Les documents PDF peuvent comprendre des clips vidéo, du son numérisé, des contenus interactifs et des modèles 3D que les lecteurs ont la possibilité de déplacer, de faire pivoter, d'agrandir et d'examiner un par un. Multimédia et fichiers PDF Lecture de fichiers multimédia Les documents PDF peuvent inclure de nombreux types de fichiers multimédia, notamment (mais non exclusivement) des fichiers Flash®, QuickTime, mp3, MPEG et Windows® Media. Vous pouvez lire ces fichiers sur une page ou les activer à partir d'un lien, d'un signet, d'un champ de formulaire ou d'une action de page. Chaque fichier multimédia comprend une zone de lecture à partir de laquelle le support peut être activé. La zone de lecture figure généralement sur la page PDF sous forme d'image ou de rectangle, mais elle peut très bien être invisible aussi. Ces fichiers sont lisibles sur tout ordinateur équipé d'Adobe Reader®. • Fichiers multimédia créés dans Flash (format FLV) • Fichiers multimédia conformes à la norme de compression vidéo H.264 Les fichiers multimédia enregistrés sous d'autres formats nécessitent des composants matériels et logiciels spécifiques. Pour protéger votre ordinateur contre les virus, Acrobat vous invite à confirmer la lecture des fichiers multimédia issus de sources non vérifiées. Vous pouvez modifier ce comportement par défaut à partir des préférences de fiabilité des contenus multimédia. ? A l'aide de l'outil Main ou de l'outil de sélection, cliquez dans la zone de lecture du fichier vidéo ou du fichier son. Lorsque le pointeur se trouve sur la zone de lecture, il prend la forme de l'icône de mode de lecture . Préférences multimédia Deux types de fichiers PDF vous obligent à définir des préférences multimédia : • Les fichiers PDF créés dans Acrobat version 8 ou antérieure • Les fichiers PDF créés dans Acrobat version 9 ou ultérieure et dans lesquels des fichiers multimédia ont été ajoutés par la méthode d'importation par héritage Ces fichiers vous obligent à identifier un lecteur supplémentaire qui servira à la lecture du contenu multimédia. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Multimédia (existant) dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue. Options du lecteur Choisissez le format d'exécution des contenus multimédia existants : QuickTime, Flash, Windows Media ou le lecteur intégré de Windows. Options d'accessibilité Indiquez les fonctions spéciales (le cas échéant) à exécuter pendant la lecture du contenu multimédia comme, par exemple, les sous-titres et le doublage audio. Spécifiez la langue favorite à sélectionner sur le support lorsque le contenu est disponible en plusieurs versions linguistiques.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 341 Multimédia et modèles 3D Préférences de fiabilité des contenus multimédia La lecture des fichiers multimédia placés dans les documents PDF requiert parfois des ressources complémentaires. Par exemple, certains fichiers font appel à des ressources sur Internet, tel un lecteur multimédia. Les paramètres d'approbation vous permettent de définir si les contenus multimédia sont autorisés à utiliser des ressources externes. • Pour définir des paramètres d'approbation concernant la lecture du contenu créé avec Acrobat 9, utilisez les préférences du Gestionnaire des approbations. • Pour définir des paramètres de lecture du contenu créé dans des versions antérieures d'Acrobat, utilisez les préférences Fiabilité multimédia (existant). Tous ces paramètres sont accessibles à partir de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Voir aussi « Mesures de protection relatives aux URL et pièces jointes dans des documents PDF » à la page 234 Fiabilité multimédia (existant) Les préférences de fiabilité multimédia vous permettent de configurer la lecture des fichiers multimédia incorporés dans les documents PDF approuvés ou non. Un document est approuvé par vous-même ou un auteur en qui vous avez confiance. En configurant les droits de manière à lire exclusivement le contenu multimédia de documents approuvés, vous protégez votre ordinateur contre les dégâts que pourraient causer des programmes, des macros et des virus. La liste des auteurs et documents approuvés est stockée en interne et n'est pas visualisable. Si vous ajoutez un document certifié à la liste, le document et le certificat de son auteur sont tous deux ajoutés à la liste des documents approuvés. Tous les documents certifiés par cet auteur sont approuvés. (Les documents approuvés comprennent également les fichiers PDF créés par des personnes figurant dans la liste des identités approuvées.) Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Fiabilité multimédia (existant) sous Catégories. Afficher les droits pour Indiquez si vous souhaitez définir des droits pour les documents approuvés ou non. Autoriser les opérations multimédia Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser la lecture des clips multimédia. Lorsque cette option est activée, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de droits d'un lecteur spécifique et activer les options déterminant l'aspect du support pendant la lecture. Redéfinir les droits pour le lecteur multimédia sélectionné sur Sélectionnez un lecteur dans la liste, puis choisissez l'une des options suivantes dans le menu : • Toujours Autorise le lecteur sans demander confirmation. • Jamais Interdit l'utilisation du lecteur. • Invite Demande à l'utilisateur de confirmer l'utilisation du lecteur. Si vous sélectionnez cette option et autorisez le lecteur à exécuter le support contenu dans un document spécifique, ce dernier devient alors un document approuvé. Options Autoriser la lecture Trois options de lecture vous permettent de définir le mode d'affichage de la vidéo. • Autoriser la lecture dans les fenêtres flottantes exemptes de barres de titre Sélectionnez cette option pour lire la vidéo sans barre de titre. Dans ce cas, la fenêtre de lecture n'affiche aucun titre ni aucun bouton de fermeture. • Autoriser la définition du texte de titre dans une fenêtre de lecture flottante Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher une barre de titre en cas de lecture de la vidéo dans une fenêtre flottante. Pour modifier le texte de la barre de titre, cliquez deux fois sur la vidéo avec l'outil Objet (Outils > Modifications avancées > Objet). Sélectionnez Modifier le rendu, puis, dans le panneau Emplacement de lecture, sélectionnez Afficher la barre de titre. Ajoutez le texte du titre dans la zone prévue à cet effet.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 342 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Autoriser la lecture en plein écran Cette option permet d'activer automatiquement le mode plein écran lorsque la vidéo est lue. Ce mode peut provoquer des conflits avec les paramètres de sécurité de l'utilisateur final. Effacer la liste des documents approuvés Supprime la liste actuelle des documents et auteurs approuvés. Cette option permet d'interdire la lecture de supports contenus dans des documents faisant auparavant partie des documents approuvés ou ayant été créés par des auteurs approuvés. Cette option est uniquement disponible lorsque le document PDF contenant un support multimédia est ouvert. Manipulation de modèles 3D Affichage d'un modèle 3D Dans Acrobat, vous pouvez afficher et manipuler un contenu 3D de qualité supérieure, créé dans une application de CAO 3D ou de modélisation 3D professionnelle de même que des fichiers PDF incorporés. Ainsi, vous pouvez afficher et masquer certaines pièces d'un modèle 3D, supprimer un couvercle pour voir le contenu du modèle et faire tourner des pièces comme si vous les teniez dans vos mains. Un modèle 3D s'affiche d'abord comme image d'aperçu en deux dimensions. L'activation du modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main ou Sélection sélectionne (ou active) le modèle, affiche la barre d'outils 3D et lance la lecture de l'animation. Objet 3D sélectionné A. Arborescence du modèle B. 3D, barre d'outils C. Objet 3D Remarque : La création et la modification de documents PDF à partir de modèles 3D nécessitent Acrobat Professional Extended. Les utilisateurs d'Acrobat Professional peuvent insérer des modèles 3D dans des fichiers PDF. Présentation de la barre d'outils 3D La barre d'outils 3D s'affiche une fois que vous avez cliqué sur le modèle 3D avec l'outil Main. Cette action active le modèle 3D et lance la lecture des animations configurées pour être lues à l'activation du fichier. La barre d'outils 3D s'affiche toujours dans la zone située au-dessus du coin supérieur gauche du modèle 3D ; son emplacement est fixe. Une petite flèche s'affiche à droite de l'outil Rotation, laquelle vous permet de masquer ou de développer la barre d'outils. B C AUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 343 Multimédia et modèles 3D La barre d'outils 3D permet d'effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, une rotation ou encore un panoramique sur l'objet. L’arborescence du modèle permet de masquer ou d’isoler des pièces, ou de rendre des pièces transparentes. Vous manipulez un modèle 3D en sélectionnant et en faisant glisser divers outils de navigation 3D. Lors d'une navigation en 3D, la visualisation du modèle 3D stationnaire se trouve facilitée si vous prenez la perspective d'une caméra. Vous pouvez alors utiliser différentes fonctions : rotation, panoramique (déplacement vers le haut, vers le bas ou latéral) et zoom avant ou arrière. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer la barre d'outils en cliquant sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et en choisissant Outils > Masquer la barre d'outils. Pour afficher la barre d'outils, choisissez Afficher la barre d’outils dans le même menu contextuel. Cette option n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader. Outils de navigation 3D Rotation Permet de faire tourner les objets 3D par rapport à l'écran. Le déplacement des objets dépend de la vue de départ, du point à partir duquel vous faites glisser la souris et de la direction que vous choisissez. Remarque : L'outil Main permet aussi de faire pivoter un objet. Assurez-vous que l'option Activer la sélection 3D pour l'outil Main est activée dans le panneau 3D de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Toupie Permet de faire tourner un modèle 3D parallèlement à deux axes fixes du modèle 3D, les axes x et z. Panoramique Déplace le modèle dans le sens vertical et le sens horizontal uniquement. Vous pouvez également effectuer un panoramique à l'aide de l'outil Main : maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée pendant le glissement. Zoom Permet de vous rapprocher ou de vous éloigner des objets de la scène lorsque vous déplacez le pointeur à la verticale. Une autre solution pour effectuer un zoom consiste à activer l'outil Main et à maintenir la touche Maj enfoncée pendant l'opération. Parcours Tourne à l'horizontale autour de la scène lors d'un glissement horizontal. Déplace l'objet vers l'avant ou vers l'arrière dans la scène lorsque vous le faites glisser à la verticale ; conserve un niveau d'élévation constant quel que soit le mode de déplacement. L'outil Parcours s'avère particulièrement utile avec les modèles 3D architecturaux. Pour modifier la vitesse d'exécution, modifiez les unités d'affichage par défaut dans les préférences (3D). Remarque : L'outil Parcours est disponible lorsque l'option Consolider les outils de la barre d'outils 3D est activée dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences ou lorsque vous cliquez sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et que vous choisissez Outils > Parcours. Survol Parcourt un modèle tout en conservant l'orientation de la surface. Cliquez avec le bouton droit et faites glisser la souris dans la fenêtre 3D. L'outil Survol se déplace plus lentement à mesure que vous approchez de l'objet. Faites glisser la souris vers la droite ou la gauche pour faire tourner l'objet. Pour faire pivoter la vue de caméra, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris à l'intérieur de la fenêtre 3D et faites glisser la souris. Pour rétablir l'orientation de départ de la caméra, repositionnez la souris à l'endroit où vous avez cliqué. Utilisez la molette de la souris pour effectuer un mouvement rapide en arrière ou en avant en suivant l'orientation de la vue de caméra. Cette méthode s'avère pratique lorsque vous vous perdez dans le modèle ou faites aboutir le survol sur une surface. Propriétés de la caméra Configurent l'angle de la caméra, l'alignement ainsi que d'autres propriétés définissant l'objectif à travers lequel un modèle 3D est visualisé. Les propriétés de la caméra sont des composants des vues définis indépendamment de ces dernières. Mesures 3D Mesure les dimensions et les distances des pièces du modèle 3D. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 344 Multimédia et modèles 3D Commandes d'affichage de la barre d'outils 3D Vue par défaut Rétablit un mode de zoom, de panoramique, de rotation et de projection prédéfini du modèle 3D. Utilisez le menu Options de la Section centrale de l'arborescence du modèle pour définir une autre vue comme vue par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande Gérer les vues du menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D. Si un objet se retrouve hors champ, cela signifie que vous avez détourné la caméra de l'objet. Cliquez sur l'icône Vue par défaut de la barre d'outils 3D pour replacer l'objet dans votre champ de vision. Menu Vues Dresse la liste des vues définies pour le modèle 3D actif. Activer/Désactiver l'arborescence du modèle Affiche et masque l'arborescence du modèle. Lire/Suspendre l'animation Lit ou interrompt l'animation activée par le script JavaScript. Le menu déroulant Lire/Suspendre l'animation ouvre un curseur que vous pouvez faire glisser et placer à divers moments de la séquence d'animation. Utiliser la projection orthographique/en perspective Permet d'alterner entre l'affichage d'une projection en perspective et celui d'une projection orthographique de l'objet 3D. Menu Mode de rendu du modèle Définit le mode d'affichage de la forme 3D. Pour un guide illustré, voir la section « Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle » à la page 344. Menu Activer un éclairage supplémentaire Répertorie les différents effets disponibles pour améliorer l'éclairage de l'objet 3D. Faites des essais pour obtenir les effets visuels que vous souhaitez. Couleur d'arrière-plan Ouvre le sélecteur de couleur, lequel permet de choisir une couleur différente pour l'espace entourant l'objet 3D. Activer/Désactiver la coupe Affiche et masque les coupes de l'objet. Cliquez sur le menu contextuel pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la coupe. Pour plus de détails, voir la section « Création de coupes » à la page 349. Ajouter un commentaire 3D/multimédia Permet d'associer une note à n'importe quelle pièce du modèle 3D. La note est liée à la vue. Voir « Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D » à la page 357. Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle Les modes de rendu du modèle comprennent des combinaisons de facteurs modifiant l'aspect de l'objet 3D. L'illustration ci-dessous montre un objet simple présenté dans les différents modes de rendu disponibles.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 345 Multimédia et modèles 3D Modes de rendu du modèle A. Solide B. Cadre de sélection transparent C. Transparent D. Filaire solide E. Illustration F. Contour solide G. Illustration ombrée H. Cadre de sélection I. Cadre de sélection transparent contouré J. Filaire K. Filaire ombré L. Filaire transparent M. Filaire masqué N. Sommets O. Sommets ombrés Changement de mode de rendu, d'éclairage, de projection ou d'arrière-plan Le mode de rendu du modèle définit l'aspect de la surface du modèle 3D. Le mode de rendu par défaut est généralement solide, mais d'autres modes sont à votre disposition. Vous pouvez également changer l'éclairage ainsi que l'arrière-plan du modèle 3D. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N OUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 346 Multimédia et modèles 3D Changement d'aspect du modèle 3D A. Aspect par défaut B. Mode de rendu filaire C. Eclairage de couleur D. Couleur d'arrière-plan différente ? Les boutons de la barre d'outils 3D vous permettent d'apporter les modifications suivantes : • Pour changer de mode de rendu, choisissez une option dans le menu déroulant Mode de rendu du modèle . • Pour visualiser une projection orthographique, cliquez sur le bouton Utiliser la projection orthographique . Une projection orthographique supprime réellement une cote, en conservant les proportions entre les objets mais en donnant un aspect moins réaliste au modèle 3D. Cliquez à nouveau sur le bouton afin d'appliquer la projection en perspective. • Pour activer ou désactiver l'éclairage ou pour en changer, choisissez une option dans le menu déroulant Activer un éclairage supplémentaire . • Pour changer de couleur d'arrière-plan, cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de la nuance Couleur d'arrière-plan et choisissez une couleur. Remarque : Les options Mode de rendu du modèle, Systèmes d'éclairage et Couleur d'arrière-plan sont également disponibles en cliquant sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis en choisissant Options d'affichage. Les modes de rendu du modèle figurent également sous le menu Options de l'arborescence du modèle. Voir aussi « Exemples de modes de rendu d'un modèle » à la page 344 Présentation de l'arborescence du modèle Le panneau Arborescence du modèle figure dans le navigateur, sur le côté gauche de la zone de travail. Vous pouvez également ouvrir le panneau Arborescence du modèle en cliquant sur le bouton Activer/désactiver l'arborescence du modèle de la barre d'outils 3D. Une autre solution consiste à cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle 3D et à choisir Afficher l'arborescence du modèle. Remarque : L'arborescence du modèle nécessite l'utilisation de la version 7.0.7 ou ultérieure d'Acrobat ou d'Adobe Reader. Les utilisateurs disposant de versions antérieures peuvent certes manipuler les modèles 3D, mais sans l'arborescence associée. L'arborescence du modèle se divise en trois panneaux, chacun présentant un type spécifique d'informations ou d'options. Panneau Structure Le panneau du haut affiche la structure arborescente de l'objet 3D. Par exemple, un objet 3D représentant une voiture comprend des groupes d’objets distincts (appelés noeuds) pour le châssis, le moteur et les A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 347 Multimédia et modèles 3D roues. Dans ce panneau, vous pouvez naviguer dans l'arborescence et sélectionner, isoler ou masquer les différentes pièces. Les informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) s'affichent sous la forme d'un groupe d'éléments au même niveau hiérarchique que l'objet ou l'assemblage associé. Panneau Vue Le panneau central répertorie les vues définies pour l'objet 3D. Lorsque vous modifiez une vue, cliquez sur l'une des vues répertoriées pour rétablir la version enregistrée du modèle 3D. Voir la section « Définition des vues 3D » à la page 354. Le panneau Vue permet également d'ajouter et de modifier des vues. Par exemple, une fois que vous avez isolé et fait pivoter une pièce, vous pouvez enregistrer la vue obtenue, y compris l'angle de caméra, l'arrière-plan, l'éclairage et d'autres attributs. Cette fonction n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader. Panneau Données d'objet Le panneau inférieur affiche d'autres informations, notamment des propriétés et métadonnées sur l'objet ou la pièce. Ces informations ne sont pas modifiables pour les objets 3D dans Acrobat. Arborescence du modèle A. Arborescence d'objets 3D B. Vues enregistrées C. Informations sur l'objet ou la pièce Remarque : Pour modifier le comportement par défaut de l'arborescence du modèle, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, puis sélectionnez Contenu 3D et multimédia. Choisissez ensuite une option dans le menu Ouvrir l'arborescence du modèle lors de l'activation du mode 3D. L'auteur du document PDF peut configurer un modèle 3D dans les paramètres de conversion de sorte que son activation entraîne l'affichage automatique de l'arborescence du modèle. A B CUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 348 Multimédia et modèles 3D Masquage, isolement et modification de l'aspect des pièces Certains modèles 3D se composent de pièces individuelles. L'arborescence du modèle permet de masquer ou d'isoler des pièces, d'effectuer un zoom dessus ou de les rendre transparentes. Les pièces qui s'affichent dans le modèle 3D apparaissent avec une case à cocher dans l'arborescence. Manipulation de pièces A. Pièce sélectionnée B. Pièce masquée C. Pièce isolée D. Pièce transparente 1 Dans le modèle 3D, l'outil Main permet de cliquer sur la pièce à manipuler. Si un paramètre de préférence vous empêche d'utiliser l'outil Main, sélectionnez la pièce dans l'arborescence du modèle. 2 Dans le menu Options de la partie supérieure de l'arborescence du modèle, effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : Remarque : Le contenu du menu Options varie selon que le modèle 3D contient plusieurs pièces ou une seule. La plupart de ces options sont également disponibles en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur une pièce dans le modèle 3D. Mode de rendu du modèle Modifie l'aspect de la surface de l'intégralité du modèle 3D selon l'élément que vous choisissez dans le sous-menu : Cadre de sélection transparent, Solide, Transparent, Filaire solide, etc. Afficher toutes les pièces Affiche la totalité du modèle 3D. Contenu Affiche toutes les pièces visibles et les centre dans la vue. Afficher les propriétés physiques Affiche la surface et le volume (le cas échéant) dans le panneau des données de l'objet de l'arborescence du modèle. Afficher le cadre de sélection Affiche la zone comprenant l'objet ou les pièces sélectionnées 3D du modèle. Définir la couleur du cadre de sélection Permet de changer la couleur du cadre de sélection. Choisissez cette option, sélectionnez une couleur et cliquez sur OK. Masquer Affiche le modèle sans montrer les pièces sélectionnées. Vous pouvez également activer et désactiver des cases à cocher dans le panneau supérieur de l'arborescence du modèle pour masquer et afficher différentes pièces. Isoler Affiche uniquement la pièce sélectionnée en masquant les autres. Isoler la pièce Affiche la géométrie, les informations PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) et toutes les vues (y compris les vues PMI) de la pièce isolée uniquement. Les vues et informations associées à toutes les autres pièces sont masquées ou désélectionnées. Les modifications s'appliquent également à l'arborescence du modèle. Dans le panneau Structure (en haut), seule la pièce isolée est sélectionnée. La structure des autres pièces est disponible mais désélectionnée. Le panneau Vue (section centrale) répertorie uniquement les vues définies pour la pièce isolée, notamment les vues PMI. Si vous cliquez sur une vue, seules les informations PMI correspondantes s'affichent dans le panneau de visualisation. (Pour afficher les informations PMI de la pièce isolée, assurez-vous que l'option Données PMI 3D est activée dans le panneau Structure.) Le panneau Vue masque les vues associées à l'ensemble ou aux autres pièces, y compris les vues personnalisées créées dans Acrobat. Pour ajouter des pièces à la vue, sélectionnez-les dans l'arborescence du modèle. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les commandes Afficher/Masquer du menu d'options de l'arborescence du modèle. Pour annuler la pièce isolée, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une autre pièce à l'aide de la commande Isoler la pièce. A B C DUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 349 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Sélectionnez l'ensemble racine dans l'arborescence du modèle. • Sélectionnez le bouton Racine. Effectuer un zoom sur une pièce Change de point de vue en passant du modèle 3D aux pièces sélectionnées. Cette option s’avère particulièrement utile lors de la rotation de la pièce, en vous permettant de la faire pivoter autour de son propre point de centre plutôt que de celui du modèle entier. Mode de rendu des pièces Affiche l'ensemble des modes de rendu disponibles pour la pièce. Le mode de rendu modifie l'apparence du modèle 3D en fonction de votre sélection. Transparent Affiche une version transparente de la pièce sélectionnée. Exporter au format HTML Crée un fichier XML distinct de l'arborescence complète ou du noeud actif du modèle 3D. Exporter au format CSV Crée un fichier au format CSV contenant l'ensemble des données du modèle. Vous pouvez exporter les données à partir de l'arborescence du modèle complète ou du noeud sélectionné. Le fichier s'ouvre dans n'importe quelle application prenant en charge le format CSV comme, par exemple, Microsoft Excel. Remarque : Si le modèle 3D comprend des données PMI (Product Manufacturing Information), les options d'affichage et de masquage de ces données sont disponibles à partir de ce menu. Création de coupes L'affichage d'une coupe d'un modèle 3D revient à découper le modèle en deux afin d'observer l'intérieur. La boîte de dialogue Options de coupe permet d'ajuster l'alignement, le décalage et l'inclinaison du plan de coupe. Avant et après une coupe 1 Cliquez sur l'icône Activer/Désactiver la coupe de la barre d'outils 3D pour activer ou désactiver la coupe. 2 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur la flèche située en regard de l'icône Activer/désactiver la coupe, puis choisissez l'option Propriétés de la coupe, laquelle ouvre la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la coupe. Effectuez ensuite l'une des opérations suivantes : • Modifiez les paramètres disponibles sous Alignement, Paramètres d'affichage et Position et orientation. • Cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer la vue en coupe afin d'enregistrer la vue en coupe active. (La vue enregistrée apparaît dans le menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D et dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle avec un nom par défaut, Vue en coupe[n].)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 350 Multimédia et modèles 3D Propriétés de la coupe Toute modification apportée ici est immédiatement appliquée. Pour les visualiser, assurez-vous que la fenêtre Propriété de la coupe n'obstrue pas la vue du modèle 3D actif. La fenêtre Propriétés de la coupe reste au premier plan si vous activez ou manipulez le document PDF sous-jacent. Pour la fermer, cliquez sur la case de fermeture située dans le coin supérieur droit. Activer la coupe L'activation de cette option rend les autres options disponibles. Alignement Définit l'axe (x, y, ou z) sur lequel la coupe s'aligne. Aligner sur la face Effectue la coupe selon un plan défini par la surface de toute face sur laquelle vous cliquez dans le modèle 3D. (La boîte de dialogue est grisée tant que vous ne cliquez pas sur la face d'une pièce du modèle.) Aligner sur 3 points Effectue la coupe selon un plan défini par trois points que vous sélectionnez en cliquant dans le modèle 3D. (La boîte de dialogue est grisée tant que vous ne cliquez pas sur trois points d'un modèle.) Afficher les intersections Indique la ligne suivant laquelle le plan sécant coupe le modèle 3D en lui donnant un contour en couleurs. Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur si vous souhaitez changer de couleur. Afficher le plan sécant Affiche le champ bidimensionnel qui coupe le modèle 3D. Cliquez sur la nuance de couleur pour choisir une autre couleur et spécifiez une valeur différente (en pourcentage) pour modifier le degré d'opacité du plan. Ignorer les pièces sélectionnées Elimine les pièces sélectionnées de la vue en coupe. Afficher la transparence Affiche les pièces ne faisant pas partie de la coupe. Opacité du plan sécant Définit le niveau de transparence du plan sécant.. Aligner la caméra sur le plan sécant Fait pivoter le modèle 3D de manière à ce qu'il se trouve au même niveau que le plan sécant. Décalage Détermine la proportion du modèle 3D à couper. Faites glisser le curseur de la gauche vers la droite ou modifiez le pourcentage. Pour comprendre comment chaque axe divise le modèle 3D, sélectionnez un axe, puis faites glisser le curseur de décalage dans les deux directions. Observez les modifications produites dans le modèle 3D incorporé. Retourner Inverse la coupe. Par exemple, si la moitié supérieure du modèle est enlevée de la coupe, cliquez sur Retourner pour afficher la moitié supérieure et couper la moitié inférieure. Curseurs des options Inclinaison 1 et Inclinaison 2 Définissent les angles compris entre le plan de coupe et les axes. Faites glisser les curseurs vers la gauche ou la droite, ou modifiez les valeurs exprimées en pourcentage. Enregistrer la vue en coupe Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Afficher les propriétés dans laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner les propriétés d'affichage à enregistrer avec la vue. Une fois ces propriétés sélectionnées, la vue en coupe est ajoutée à la liste des vues figurant sur la barre d'outils 3D et dans l'arborescence du modèle. La vue enregistrée se voit attribuée un nom par défaut, Vue en coupe[n]. Les propriétés d'affichage que vous choisissez de ne pas enregistrer reprennent la configuration de la vue précédente. Par exemple, si vous n'enregistrez pas la couleur d'arrière-plan, la vue de coupe conserve la couleur d'arrière-plan de la vue précédemment affichée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 351 Multimédia et modèles 3D Mesure d'un objet 3D L'outil Mesures 3D permet de mesurer les modèles 3D. Vous pouvez établir des mesures entre différentes combinaisons de points ou d'arêtes d'un modèle 3D. A mesure que vous déplacez le pointeur sur le modèle 3D, des points et des arêtes sont mis en surbrillance. L'outil Mesures 3D prend en charge quatre types de mesure : la distance perpendiculaire entre deux arêtes droites, la distance linéaire entre deux points, le rayon d'arêtes circulaires et l'angle formé par deux arêtes (ou trois points). Vous pouvez associer des mesures 3D à des vues spécifiques. Si la vue par défaut est active au moment de l'ajout de la mesure, une vue de mesure est créée. Cette vue s'ajoute à la liste des vues dans l'arborescence du modèle. La mesure est uniquement associée à cette vue. Une mesure s'affiche sous la forme d'une entrée enfant de la vue. Vous avez également la possibilité d'afficher des commentaires pendant la prise de mesure. Ces commentaires (également appelés annotations de mesure) sont conservés après la fermeture du document. Affichage de la mesure 3D 1 Cliquez sur un modèle 3D dans un document PDF afin de l’activer. 2 Cliquez sur l'icône Mesures 3D de la barre d'outils 3D. (Si la barre d'outils 3D présente les outils consolidés, sélectionnez l'outil Mesure 3D dans le menu déroulant situé à côté de l'outil de navigation.) 3 Sélectionnez les options voulues dans les zones Accrochage activé et Types de mesures de la palette Mesures 3D. 4 Cliquez sur l'arrière-plan du modèle avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis modifiez les options le cas échéant. Laissez la palette Mesures 3D ouverte. 5 Mesurez le modèle 3D : • Pour mesurer la distance entre deux points du modèle 3D, cliquez pour définir le point de départ. Déplacez ensuite le pointeur vers un autre point ou une arête. • Pour mesurer la circonférence d'une forme ronde, déplacez le pointeur sur l'arête de la forme jusqu'à l'apparition d'un cercle, puis cliquez une fois. • Pour créer et définir une annotation sur la mesure, cliquez sur l'arrière-plan de l'objet avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Modifier le libellé de l'annotation. Saisissez le texte du libellé. Mesurez le modèle 3D comme décrit précédemment. Cliquez pour définir l'extrémité de la mesure, puis une fois encore pour spécifier l'emplacement de la mesure et du libellé. • Pour enregistrer une mesure sous forme de commentaire, activez l'outil Main, cliquez sur la mesure avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Convertir en commentaire. • Pour interrompre une mesure, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Annuler la mesure. • Pour supprimer une annotation de mesure, cliquez dessus avec l'outil Mesures 3D et appuyez sur la touche Suppr. Remarque : Pour savoir comment utiliser les outils Rotation, Panoramique, Zoom et Accrochage tout en effectuant des mesures, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle et choisissez Conseils de navigation dans les mesures 3D. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 352 Multimédia et modèles 3D Options Accrochage activé dans la palette Mesures 3D Accrochage 3D aux points d'extrémité d'arête Effectue un accrochage sur toute l'arête. Accrochage 3D aux arêtes linéaires Effectue un accrochage sur un segment de ligne droite d'une arête. Accrochage 3D aux arêtes radiales Effectue un accrochage à une circonférence. Accrochage 3D aux silhouettes Effectue un accrochage sur l'arête apparente d'une pièce, le côté d'un cylindre par exemple. Accrochage 3D aux facettes planaires Effectue un accrochage sur le plan géométrique créant une face de la pièce. Options Types de mesures dans la palette Mesures 3D Mesure point à point 3D Mesure la distance entre deux points du modèle 3D. Cliquez pour définir le point de départ, puis cliquez à un autre endroit pour définir le point ou l'arrête formant l'autre extrémité. Dimension perpendiculaire 3D Mesure la distance entre deux arêtes prises à angle droit pour l'arête de départ. Dimension radiale 3D Mesure le rayon à l'emplacement sur lequel vous avez cliqué. Mesure d'angle 3D Mesure l'angle entre deux arêtes. Options des annotations et des unités Pour utiliser les outils de mesure Unités et Annotation, sélectionnez l'outil de mesure 3D, puis cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le modèle. Définir les unités du modèle Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier les unités de mesure. Activer l'affichage des coordonnées Affiche ou masque les coordonnées du pointeur de la souris dans la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures. Modifier le libellé de l'annotation Tapez le texte devant accompagner la mesure et qui s'affichera dans la zone du modèle 3D et dans le panneau des commentaires. (Option non disponible si la case Annotation de mesure n'est pas cochée.) Désactiver les annotations de mesure Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous souhaitez effectuer des mesures dans le modèle sans les ajouter au document. Les mesures sont uniquement visibles pendant l'opération de mesure. Si vous effectuez une autre mesure ou changez d'outils, l'annotation disparaît. Ne pas accrocher au contenu 3D Désactive la fonction d'accrochage du point d'insertion à une cible probable. Sélectionnez cette option pour améliorer les performances de l'application lorsque vous travaillez sur un modèle volumineux. Réactivez l'option Accrocher au contenu 3D pour garantir la précision des mesures réalisées sur des objets 3D. Conseils de navigation dans les mesures 3D Ouvre une boîte de dialogue répertoriant les raccourcis clavier de navigation. Ces raccourcis peuvent vous être utiles lors de la prise de mesures. Préférences Ouvre le panneau Mesures (3D) de la boîte de dialogue des préférences. Afficher/masquer la fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures La fenêtre d'infos sur les mesures affiche les paramètres d'unités et d'annotation du modèle. Sélectionnez cette option pour retirer la fenêtre d'infos de la fenêtre du modèle. Afficher/masquer la barre d'outils Mesures Afficher/masquer la palette Mesures 3D. Préférences de mesure Les préférences de mesure 3D déterminent le mode de mesure des données 3D. Ces options sont disponibles dans le panneau Mesures (3D) de la boîte de dialogue Préférences.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 353 Multimédia et modèles 3D Remarque : Dans Adobe Reader, ces préférences s'appliquent aux fichiers PDF dans laquelle la fonction de commentaire est activée. Utiliser l'échelle et les unités du document (le cas échéant) Affiche les mesures en fonction des unités du modèle (le cas échéant), générées à partir du modèle 3D initial. Désactivez cette option pour définir manuellement les unités de mesure. Vous pouvez la modifier via la palette Mesures 3D. Utiliser l'unité d'affichage par défaut Utilise les unités de mesure spécifiées ici plutôt que celles appliquées au modèle 3D. Chiffres significatifs à afficher Ils permettent de spécifier le nombre maximal de chiffres dans le nombre de mesure. Couleur du trait de mesure 3D Indique la couleur du trait visible lorsque vous cliquez ou faites glisser la souris pour mesurer un objet. Mesure de la taille après informations Définit la taille du texte pour l'affichage des mesures. Mesures d'angle affichées dans Indique les unités en degrés ou en radians. Mesures circulaires affichées comme Indique si le diamètre ou le rayon est mesuré pour des pièces circulaires. Afficher le cercle des mesures radiales Affiche la circonférence associée à la mesure radiale. Paramètres d'accrochage 3D Active le mode d'accrochage et indique l'emplacement d'accrochage des éléments suivants : points, arcs, arêtes ou arêtes de silhouette. L'option Sensibilité indique la distance à laquelle le pointeur doit se trouver de l'élément d'accrochage. Pour l'option Couleur du conseil d'accrochage, indiquez la couleur de la ligne d'accrochage visible lorsque le pointeur est placé sur l'objet 3D. Modification des propriétés de la caméra Les propriétés de la caméra définissent avec précision l'angle et le positionnement de l'objet dans une vue. Elles constituent une vue de caméra, qui peut servir d'une vue à une autre mais également d'un fichier à un autre. 1 Dans la barre d'outils 3D, cliquez sur l'icône Propriétés de la caméra . Si vous ne voyez pas cette icône, cliquez sur la flèche à côté de l'outil de navigation dans la partie gauche de la barre d'outils 3D. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous pour nommer la vue de caméra, ou sélectionnez une vue existante dans le menu. 3 Positionnez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra de manière que le modèle 3D soit bien visible. Sélectionnez l'alignement de la caméra : • Choisissez Cible pour aligner les propriétés de la caméra uniquement sur la position cible. • Choisissez Caméra et cible pour aligner les propriétés à la fois sur l'orientation de la caméra et la position cible. 4 Sélectionner le type d'alignement : Sélectionner un modèle Une fois que vous avez sélectionné cette option, cliquez sur le modèle 3D dans le document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre du modèle sélectionné. • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la position de la cible de la caméra est le centre du modèle sélectionné. La caméra est alignée sur le modèle sélectionné. Sélectionner une face Une fois que vous avez sélectionné cette option, cliquez sur une face du modèle 3D dans le document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre de la face sélectionnée.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 354 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la position de la cible de la caméra est le centre de la face sélectionnée. La caméra est alignée sur cette face. Sélectionner 3 points Une fois que vous avez sélectionnée cette option, sélectionnez trois points sur le même modèle ou sur un autre modèle du document. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la caméra indique la position actuelle de la caméra. • Si l'option Cible est sélectionnée, la nouvelle position de la cible de la caméra est le centre des trois points sélectionnés. • Si l'option Caméra et cible est sélectionnée, la cible de la caméra est le centre des trois points sélectionnés. La position de la caméra est alignée sur le plan constitué par les trois points sélectionnés. 5 Dans la zone Position, sélectionnez Unités angulaires pour modifier les valeurs X, Y et Z des options Azimuth, Altitude et Distance. Ces valeurs vous permettent de manipuler la caméra selon l'azimuth (distance) et l'altitude (axe X), mais aussi d'effectuer un zoom en reprenant la valeur Distance. 6 Placez les curseurs de position de la caméra et de la cible à l'endroit voulu. 7 Pour modifier l'angle focal de la caméra, faites glisser le curseur Champ de visée jusqu'au degré voulu. 8 Pour modifier l'angle d'utilisation de la caméra, faites glisser le curseur Bobine jusqu'au degré voulu. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer la vue de la caméra pour enregistrer les paramètres et ajouter la vue à l'arborescence du modèle. La vue est ajoutée à l'arborescence du modèle avec le nom par défaut VueCaméra[n], [n] représentant un nombre séquentiel. Vous pouvez renommer la vue de la caméra dans la liste des vues. Définition des vues 3D La vue par défaut d'un modèle 3D permet de revenir à tout moment à un point de départ lorsque vous manipulez le modèle. Une vue par défaut est différente d'un aperçu, lequel définit ce à quoi ressemble le modèle 3D lorsqu'il est désactivé. La liste de toutes les vues disponibles pour le modèle 3D apparaît dans le menu Vues de la barre d'outils 3D et dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle. Vous pouvez également créer des vues supplémentaires du modèle 3D dans Acrobat. L'application vous permet de parcourir rapidement le contenu 3D comme vous le désirez (en utilisant une vue du dessus, d'en dessous, de gauche, de droite, intérieure, extérieure, décomposée ou assemblée). Une vue comprend les options suivantes : éclairage, position de la caméra, mode de rendu, état de l’arborescence du modèle, transparence et coupe. Les vues personnalisées peuvent comprendre des propriétés de caméra précises. Vous avez la possibilité de lier des vues à des signets via le panneau Signets, ou encore d'utiliser l'action Atteindre une vue 3D pour lier une vue à un bouton et à un lien définis sur une page. Création d'une vue personnalisée 1 Avec l'outil Main activé, cliquez sur le modèle 3D afin de le sélectionner. 2 Servez-vous des outils Rotation, Panoramique et Zoom de la barre d'outils 3D pour modifier la vue. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Afficher les propriétés, sélectionnez les paramètres d'affichage à inclure dans la vue. Les propriétés non sélectionnées appliquent les paramètres d'affichage utilisés en dernier lieu. Si, par exemple, l'option Couleur d'arrière-plan n'est pas activée, celle de la vue est identique à celle qui a été affichée précédemment. La vue est indiquée sous le nom NouvelleVue dans le panneau Vue de l'arborescence du modèle. Sélectionnez le libellé afin de le renommer.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 355 Multimédia et modèles 3D Affichage d'une vue ? Faites appel aux méthodes suivantes pour modifier la vue : • Sur la barre d'outils 3D, sélectionnez une vue dans le menu déroulant Vues. • Dans l'arborescence du modèle, cliquez sur le nom de la vue. • Cliquez sur l'icône Vue par défaut . Modification de la vue par défaut ? Dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez une vue, puis sélectionnez Définir comme vue par défaut dans le menu Options. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur une vue, puis sélectionnez Définir comme vue par défaut. Ajout d'une vue 3D à un signet ou un lien Cette procédure nécessite un modèle 3D comportant une ou plusieurs vues définies (que vous pouvez créer). Vous pouvez associer la vue à un signet ou un lien existant, ou créer un signet ou un lien à cet effet. 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un signet, cliquez sur le bouton Nouveau signet situé en haut du panneau Signets, puis saisissez un nom pour ce signet. Cliquez ensuite avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. • Pour créer un lien, choisissez Outils > Modifications avancées > Lien, puis faites glisser le curseur pour tracer le rectangle du lien à l'endroit voulu sur la page. Puis, dans la boîte de dialogue Créer un lien, sous Lier une action, sélectionnez Lien personnalisé et cliquez sur Suivant. • Pour associer une vue à un signet ou un lien existant, cliquez sur ce dernier avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Propriétés. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés, cliquez sur l'onglet Actions. 3 Dans le menu Sélectionner l'action, choisissez Atteindre une vue 3D/multimédia, puis cliquez sur Ajouter. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Sélectionner une vue 3D, choisissez l'annotation 3D du modèle 3D dans la liste de gauche, puis sélectionnez une option de vue à droite : Vue active Reflète les attributs de rotation 3D, de panoramique et de zoom actifs dans le document au moment de la création du lien ou du signet, que cette vue figure ou non dans l'arborescence du modèle en tant que vue définie. Première vue Change la vue figurant en haut de la liste du panneau Arborescence du modèle. Dernière vue Change la vue figurant au bas de la liste du panneau Arborescence du modèle. Vue précédente Déplace vers le haut la liste de vues définies affichée dans le panneau Arborescence du modèle en procédant vue par vue. Vue suivante Déplace vers le bas la liste de vues définies affichée dans le panneau Arborescence du modèle en procédant vue par vue. Vue existante Change la vue définie sélectionnée dans la liste figurant sous cette option. 5 (Facultatif) Pour qu'un signet ou un lien atteigne également une page et une vue page spécifiques, choisissez Atteindre une vue de page dans le menu Sélectionner l'action. Cliquez ensuite sur Ajouter. Servez-vous ensuite des barres de défilement et des outils de zoom pour ajuster la vue de la page avant de cliquer sur le bouton Définir le lien. L'opération terminée, cliquez sur Fermer dans la boîte de dialogue des propriétés.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 356 Multimédia et modèles 3D Suppression d'une vue 3D ? Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sur la barre d'outils 3D, ouvrez le menu déroulant Vues, puis choisissez Gérer les vues. Sélectionnez les vues que vous souhaitez supprimer, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la vue. • Dans la Section centrale de l'Arborescence du modèle, sélectionnez les vues que vous souhaitez supprimer. Dans la Section centrale, cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer ou cliquez sur le bouton Options et sélectionnez Supprimer la vue. Préférences de contenu 3D Le panneau Contenu 3D et multimédia de la boîte de dialogue Préférences permet de définir si la barre d'outils 3D et l'arborescence du modèle sont affichés par défaut ou non. Vous avez également la possibilité de spécifier un moteur de rendu (convertisseur) par défaut et d'indiquer si les animations sont autorisées. Convertisseur préféré Indique le moteur de rendu utilisé pour déterminer les performances et la qualité. Il est donc important de sélectionner celui qui convient. Vous pouvez changer de moteur de rendu en fonction du système utilisé. Si vous sélectionnez une option DirectX® ou OpenGL, tous les rendus sont effectués à l'aide de la puce graphique de l'adaptateur vidéo. Si Logiciel est sélectionné, le rendu prend plus de temps mais les performances sont normalement semblables à celles du mode de rendu de l'application d'origine. Activer le rendu matériel pour les cartes vidéo existantes Force l'utilisation d'un accélérateur matériel pour les adaptateurs vidéo qui ne prennent pas en charge un pixel shader. Activer le rendu double face Certaines pièces d'un modèle présentent deux faces. Pour économiser du temps et de l'espace, vous pouvez désactiver cette option afin de ne générer que le rendu du côté visible par l'utilisateur. Quand l'utilisateur observe l'intérieur d'une pièce dont un seul côté est rendu, la face arrière est invisible. Mode de rendu PMI 3D préféré Spécifie le mode PMI à utiliser pour le rendu. Vous pouvez sélectionner l'une des options suivantes : Utiliser les paramètres de contenu : lors du rendu des données PMI, les paramètres des données PMI sont utilisés pour décider de se servir ou non du logiciel Z-Buffer. Toujours effectuer le rendu des données PMI 3D devant le modèle : le rendu des données PMI ignore le logiciel ZBuffer quel que soit le paramètre contenu dans le fichier. Toujours effectuer le rendu des données PMI 3D à l'aide de Z-buffer : le rendu des informations PMI active toujours le logiciel Z-Buffer quel que soit le paramètre contenu dans le fichier. Ouvrir l'arborescence du modèle lors de l'activation du mode 3D Indique si l'arborescence du modèle est visible lorsque le modèle 3D est activé. Choisissez Utiliser le paramètre d'annotation pour utiliser le paramètre défini par l'auteur lors de l'insertion du modèle 3D dans le document PDF. Etat par défaut de la barre d'outils Indique si la barre d'outils 3D est affichée ou masquée lors de l'activation du modèle 3D. Choisissez Utiliser le paramètre d'annotation pour utiliser le paramètre défini par l'auteur lors de l'insertion du modèle 3D dans le document PDF. Activer la sélection pour l'outil Main Permet à l'utilisateur de sélectionner et de mettre en surbrillance les pièces d'un modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main. Si cette option est désactivée, utilisez l'outil Données d'objet (Outils > Analyse > Données d'objet) pour sélectionner l'objet. Consolider les outils de la barre d'outils L'activation de cette option place les outils de manipulation et de navigation sous l'outil Rotation, réduisant ainsi la longueur de la barre d'outils 3D. Activer les transitions entre les vues Certains modèles 3D incluent des transitions animées entre les vues. Désélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez empêcher l'animation 3D.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 357 Multimédia et modèles 3D Afficher l'axe d'orientation 3D Active ou désactive l'affichage en contexte d'un axe qui indique l'orientation actuelle de la scène 3D. Méthodes d'optimisation pour une faible fréquence d'images Indique ce qui se produit pour les animations de modèles complexes lorsque la fréquence d'image devient basse. L'option Aucune ne compromet pas les propriétés visuelles et laisse la fréquence d'image basse. L'option Cadre de sélection affiche les plans tridimensionnels englobant les pièces au lieu des pièces proprement dites, ce qui permet de conserver une fréquence d'image élevée. L'option Abandonner les objets n'affiche pas certaines parties du modèle afin de conserver une fréquence d'image élevée. Seuil de fréquence d'images Définit la fréquence minimale en faisant glisser le curseur ou en saisissant un nombre dans la zone de valeur. Si la fréquence d'image descend sous ce nombre d'images par seconde, l'option Méthodes d'optimisation pour une faible fréquence d'images est activée. Ajout de commentaires à une conception 3D Les commentaires ajoutés à un objet 3D sont associés à des vues spécifiques, définies lors de l'ajout des commentaires. Si la vue est modifiée (suite à la rotation ou au déplacement de l'objet 3D, par exemple), les commentaires ne sont plus visibles. Trois méthodes vous permettent d'ajouter des commentaires à un objet 3D : • L'outil de commentaires de la barre d'outils 3D permet d'ajouter des commentaires à des pièces spécifiques d'un modèle 3D. • La barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations permet d'ajouter différents types de commentaires à une vue 3D. • Une mesure 3D peut être convertie en commentaire. Remarque : L'insertion de commentaires dans une vue de modèle 3D nécessite la version 7.0.7 (ou ultérieure) d'Acrobat ou de Reader. Lorsque vous modifiez la vue d'un objet 3D, tout commentaire associé à cet objet disparaît (à droite). Si vous préférez ne pas associer de commentaire à une vue 3D, ajoutez-le en dehors de la zone de l'objet 3D. Voir aussi « Commentaires » à la page 163UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 358 Multimédia et modèles 3D Ajout d'un commentaire 3D à un objet Les commentaires créés à l'aide de l'outil Commentaire 3D sont semblables aux mesures car ils sont associés à une pièce spécifique de la géométrie 3D. Lorsque vous ajoutez des commentaires 3D à la vue par défaut d'un modèle, une vue nommée VueCommentaire3D est créée. Les commentaires 3D ajoutés à d'autres vues sont listés dans l'arborescence du modèle en tant que composants de la vue en question. Vous pouvez modifier et supprimer des commentaires 3D de la même manière que les mesures. 1 Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter un commentaire 3D dans la barre d'outils 3D. 2 Sélectionnez la pièce du modèle pour laquelle vous souhaitez ajouter un commentaire. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Saisir une chaîne de commentaire, entrez votre commentaire. Ajout de commentaires à partir de la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations Lorsque vous ajoutez des commentaires à l'aide des outils de la barre Commentaires et annotations, une vue nommée VueCommentaire est créée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Remarque : Les utilisateurs d'Adobe Reader peuvent insérer des commentaires dans un document PDF si l'auteur de ce dernier active l'option prévue à cet effet dans le PDF. 1 Affichez la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations (Outils > Commentaires et annotations > Afficher la barre d'outils Commentaires et annotations). 2 Sélectionnez un outil de commentaire, puis cliquez dans la zone de l'objet 3D. 3 Cliquez à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D pour créer un commentaire. Une nouvelle définition de vue est ajoutée à l'arborescence du modèle, sous un nom du type VueCommentaire1. 4 Pour ajouter d'autres commentaires, effectuez l'une des opérations suivantes : • Pour créer un autre commentaire dans une vue, vérifiez que la vue en question est sélectionnée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Cliquez ensuite à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D. • Pour créer un commentaire dans une nouvelle vue, vérifiez qu'aucune vue n'est sélectionnée dans l'arborescence du modèle. Cliquez ensuite à l'intérieur de la zone de l'objet 3D. Remarque : Si vous supprimez l'une des vues de commentaire générées automatiquement, les commentaires associés sont encore disponibles. Vous pouvez les visualiser et les sélectionner dans le panneau Commentaires ou l'arborescence du modèle, qui les recense sous les vues. La sélection d'un commentaire bascule le modèle 3D sur la même configuration d'affichage que celle définie lors de l'ajout du commentaire. Conversion de mesures 3D en commentaires Il est possible de convertir des mesures individuelles en commentaires de manière qu'elles puissent être revues et annotées comme d'autres types de commentaires. 1 Dans le panneau des vues de l'arborescence du modèle, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le signe Plus à côté de la vue de mesure voulue afin d'afficher la liste des mesures. 2 Cliquez sur le nom d'une mesure avec le bouton droit de la souris, puis choisissez Convertir en commentaire. Affichage des commentaires relatifs à un objet 3D 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans l'arborescence du modèle, sélectionnez une vue contenant des commentaires. • Cliquez sur le bouton Commentaires ou choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Commentaires.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 359 Multimédia et modèles 3D • Dans la Section centrale du panneau Arborescence du modèle, cliquez sur options, puis choisissez Répertorier les commentaires. 2 Cliquez deux fois sur un commentaire pour ouvrir sa fenêtre. 3 Recommencez les étapes 1 et 2 pour afficher d'autres commentaires associés à des vues. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un commentaire, la vue du modèle 3D dans laquelle le commentaire a été ajouté s'affiche. Exécution d'un script JavaScript Si un fichier JavaScript distinct est associé au fichier PDF du modèle 3D, vous pouvez l'activer. 1 Ouvrez le document PDF dans Acrobat. 2 Cliquez sur le modèle 3D à l'aide de l'outil Main afin de l'activer, puis cliquez sur le modèle 3D avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Lancer un script JavaScript. 3 Localisez le fichier JavaScript à ajouter, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir.360 Chapitre 14 : Gestion des couleurs Définition de la gestion des couleurs Pourquoi les couleurs ne concordent pas toujours ? Aucun module d’édition n’est capable de reproduire la totalité des couleurs perceptibles à l’œil humain. Chaque périphérique utilise son propre espace colorimétrique, qui produit un ensemble (ou gamme) de couleurs spécifique. Un modèle de couleur détermine la relation qui existe entre les valeurs, tandis que l’espace colorimétrique définit les couleurs absolues désignées par ces valeurs. Certains modèles de couleur (CIE L*a*b, par exemple) se caractérisent par un espace colorimétrique fixe, car ils sont directement liés à la manière dont l’être humain perçoit les couleurs. Ces modèles sont dits indépendants du périphérique. Les autres modèles de couleur (RVB, TSI, TSL, CMJN, etc.) peuvent porter sur plusieurs espaces colorimétriques. Etant donné que ces modèles varient selon l’espace colorimétrique ou le périphérique qui leur est associé, ils sont dits dépendants du périphérique. Du fait de la variation de ces espaces colorimétriques, il est possible que l’aspect des couleurs diffère en cas de transfert de documents d’un périphérique à l’autre. Les variations chromatiques peuvent avoir des origines diverses : différences dans les sources d’images, méthode de définition des couleurs utilisée par les applications logicielles, supports d’impression (le papier journal reproduit une gamme plus réduite que le papier pour magazines et revues), ainsi que d’autres variations naturelles, telles que les différences de fabrication des moniteurs ou l’ancienneté de ces derniers. Gamme de couleurs de divers périphériques et documents A. Espace colorimétrique Lab B. Documents (espace de travail) C. Périphériques Définition d’un système de gestion des couleurs Les problèmes de correspondance des couleurs sont liés à l’utilisation d’espaces colorimétriques différents par plusieurs périphériques et logiciels. Pour y remédier, vous pouvez utiliser un système qui interprète et convertit fidèlement les couleurs d’un périphérique à l’autre. Un système de gestion des couleurs (SGC) compare l’espace colorimétrique de création d’une couleur avec son espace colorimétrique de reproduction et procède aux réglages nécessaires pour représenter cette couleur le plus uniformément possible sur plusieurs périphériques. CMYK RGB A B C UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 361 Gestion des couleurs Un système de gestion des couleurs convertit les couleurs grâce aux profils colorimétriques. Un profil désigne une description mathématique de l’espace colorimétrique d’un périphérique. Par exemple, un profil de scanner indique à un système de gestion des couleurs comment le scanner « perçoit » les couleurs. Le système de gestion des couleurs d’Adobe fait appel aux profils ICC, format multiplate-forme normalisé, défini par l’International Color Consortium (ICC). Aucune méthode de conversion chromatique ne pouvant convenir à tous les types d’images, un système de gestion des couleurs propose divers modes de rendu (ou méthodes de conversion) pour vous permettre d’appliquer le mode approprié à un élément graphique particulier. Ainsi, une méthode de conversion chromatique reproduisant les relations exactes entre les couleurs d’une photo de safari peut toutefois dénaturer les couleurs d’un logo comportant des teintes en aplat. Remarque : ne confondez pas la gestion des couleurs avec la correction des couleurs. Un système de gestion des couleurs ne corrige pas une image enregistrée avec des problèmes de tons ou d’équilibre des couleurs. Il fournit un environnement vous permettant d’évaluer en toute fiabilité les images dans l’optique de la sortie finale. Voir aussi « A propos des profils colorimétriques » à la page 373 « A propos des modes de rendu » à la page 382 Avez-vous besoin d’une gestion des couleurs ? Sans un système de gestion des couleurs, vos spécifications chromatiques dépendent du périphérique de sortie. La gestion des couleurs n’est pas nécessaire lorsque le processus de production est rigoureusement orienté vers un seul support. Par exemple, vous pouvez préférer, de même que votre prestataire de service d’impression, retoucher des images CMJN et spécifier les valeurs chromatiques appropriées à un environnement d’impression spécifique bien établi. L’importance de la gestion des couleurs augmente avec l’accroissement du nombre de variables dans le processus de production. La gestion des couleurs est recommandée si vous prévoyez de réutiliser des images en couleurs sur des supports d’impression ou en ligne et d’utiliser divers types de périphériques pour un seul support (différentes presses d’imprimerie, par exemple) ou si vous gérez plusieurs postes de travail. Vous pourrez bénéficier de tous les avantages d’un système de gestion des couleurs si vous devez réaliser l’une des tâches suivantes : • Obtenir une sortie couleur prévisible et homogène sur plusieurs périphériques de sortie utilisant la séparation de couleurs, votre imprimante de bureau et votre moniteur. La gestion des couleurs est particulièrement utile pour procéder à des réglages chromatiques sur des périphériques dont la gamme est peu étendue, comme une presse à imprimer en quadrichromie. • Vérifier minutieusement (prévisualiser) l’épreuve d’un document en couleurs sur le moniteur par simulation d’un périphérique de sortie spécifique. (Les limites d’affichage du moniteur, ainsi que d’autres facteurs comme les conditions d’éclairage, ont une influence sur les épreuves-écran.) • Evaluer avec précision et incorporer de façon homogène des images couleur provenant de diverses sources si elles utilisent aussi la gestion des couleurs, et même, dans certains cas, si elles ne l’utilisent pas. • Envoyer des documents en couleurs vers différents périphériques et supports de sortie sans avoir à ajuster manuellement les couleurs des documents ou des images d’origine. Cette méthode est idéale lorsque vous créez des images destinées à l’impression et à l’affichage en ligne. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 362 Gestion des couleurs • Imprimer correctement des couleurs sur un périphérique de sortie inconnu ; par exemple, vous pouvez stocker un document en ligne afin de reproduire de façon homogène les impressions couleur à la demande dans le monde entier. Création d’un environnement de visualisation pour la gestion des couleurs Votre environnement de travail détermine votre perception visuelle de la couleur sur un moniteur et sur une impression. Afin d’obtenir les meilleurs résultats, exploitez la couleur et la lumière de votre lieu de travail comme suit : • Consultez vos documents dans un endroit où le niveau d’éclairage et la température de la couleur sont constants. Par exemple, l’évolution des caractéristiques chromatiques de la lumière du soleil au cours de la journée se répercute sur l’affichage des couleurs à l’écran. Il est donc préférable d’abaisser les stores ou de travailler dans une pièce sans fenêtres. Pour éliminer la dominante bleu-vert d’un éclairage fluorescent, vous pouvez installer un éclairage D50 (5 000 °Kelvin). Vous pouvez également visualiser des documents imprimés à l’aide d’une table lumineuse D50. • Consultez vos documents dans une pièce dont la couleur des murs et du plafond est neutre. La couleur d’une salle peut agir sur la perception de la couleur affichée et imprimée. Le gris neutre est la couleur idéale d’une salle de lecture. En outre, la couleur de vos vêtements qui se reflète dans le moniteur peut avoir une incidence sur l’aspect des couleurs affichées. • Supprimez les motifs d’arrière-plan colorés du bureau de votre ordinateur. Les motifs clairs et chargés autour d’un document faussent la perception de la couleur. Configurez votre bureau de sorte qu’il n’affiche que des gris neutres. • Examinez vos épreuves dans les mêmes conditions que le public. Par exemple, feuilletez les pages d’un catalogue d’articles ménagers sous les lumières incandescentes de votre domicile ou un catalogue de mobilier de bureau sous l’éclairage fluorescent de votre bureau. Néanmoins, décidez toujours de vos dernières retouches chromatiques sous l’éclairage spécifié par le règlement en matière de bons à tirer en vigueur dans votre pays. Homogénéité des couleurs A propos de la gestion des couleurs dans les applications Adobe La gestion des couleurs d’Adobe a pour fonction de préserver l’aspect des couleurs lorsque vous importez des images à partir de sources externes, modifiez des documents et les transférez entre différentes applications Adobe, puis que vous imprimez vos compositions finies. Ce système repose sur des conventions développées par l’organisme International Color Consortium, un groupe chargé de la normalisation des formats de profil et des procédures visant à garantir l’homogénéisation et la précision des couleurs tout au long d’un flux de production. Par défaut, la gestion des couleurs est activée dans les applications Adobe faisant appel à la gestion des couleurs. Si vous avez acheté Adobe Creative Suite, les paramètres de couleur sont synchronisés entre toutes les applications pour offrir un affichage homogène des couleurs RVB et CMJN. Cela signifie que les couleurs ont le même aspect dans toutes les applications de la suite.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 363 Gestion des couleurs Les paramètres de couleur d’Adobe Creative Suite sont synchronisés dans un emplacement central via Adobe Bridge. Si vous décidez de modifier les paramètres par défaut, des paramètres prédéfinis simples d’utilisation vous permettent de configurer la gestion des couleurs d’Adobe en fonction des conditions d’impression courantes. Vous pouvez également personnaliser les paramètres de couleur pour qu’ils correspondent aux besoins d’un flux de couleur spécifique. Gardez à l’esprit que les types d’images utilisés ainsi que vos besoins en matière de sortie influencent votre manière d’utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Par exemple, les problèmes liés à l’homogénéité des couleurs sont différents pour un flux d’impression photo RVB, d’impression commerciale CMJN, d’impression numérique RVB/CMJN et d’édition via Internet. Procédures élémentaires pour la production de couleurs homogènes 1. Consultez vos partenaires de production (le cas échéant) pour vous assurer que tous les aspects de votre flux de gestion des couleurs s’intègrent au leur en toute transparence. Discutez du mode d’intégration du flux de couleur avec vos groupes de travail et prestataires de services, de la configuration matérielle et logicielle en vue de son intégration au système de gestion des couleurs et du niveau d’implémentation de la gestion des couleurs (voir la section « Avez-vous besoin d’une gestion des couleurs ? » à la page 361). 2. Etalonnez le moniteur, et créez son profil. Le profil de moniteur est le premier profil à créer. La précision des couleurs est essentielle si vous prenez des décisions créatives impliquant la couleur spécifiée dans votre document (voir la section « Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant » à la page 375).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 364 Gestion des couleurs 3. Ajoutez des profils colorimétriques à votre système pour les périphériques d’entrée et de sortie que vous prévoyez d’utiliser, comme les scanners et les imprimantes. Le système de gestion des couleurs utilise des profils pour déterminer comment les périphériques produisent les couleurs et connaître les couleurs réelles d’un document. Lorsque vous installez un nouveau périphérique, le profil correspondant est généralement ajouté sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez également utiliser un logiciel et du matériel tiers pour créer des profils plus précis pour des périphériques et des conditions spécifiques. Si vous prévoyez d’imprimer votre document à des fins commerciales, contactez votre prestataire de services pour déterminer le profil de votre document pour le périphérique ou les conditions d’impression (voir les sections « A propos des profils colorimétriques » à la page 373 et « Installation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 375). 4. Configurez la gestion des couleurs dans les applications Adobe. Les paramètres de couleur par défaut conviennent à la plupart des utilisateurs. Cependant, vous pouvez les modifier en suivant l’une des procédures ci-dessous. • Si vous utilisez plusieurs applications Adobe, servez-vous de l’application Adobe® Bridge CS3 pour choisir une configuration de gestion des couleurs standard et synchroniser les paramètres de couleur dans toutes les applications avant d’utiliser des documents (voir la section « Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe » à la page 364). • Si vous utilisez une seule application Adobe ou si vous souhaitez personnaliser les options avancées de gestion des couleurs, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de couleur d’une application spécifique (voir la section « Configuration de la gestion des couleurs » à la page 365). 5. (Facultatif) Prévisualisez les couleurs sur une épreuve-écran. Après avoir créé un document, vous pouvez utiliser une épreuve-écran pour prévisualiser les couleurs et savoir comment elles apparaîtront une fois imprimées ou visualisées sur un périphérique spécifique (voir la section « Vérification des couleurs sur épreuves-écran » à la page 369). Remarque : une épreuve-écran seule ne permet pas d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect des surimpressions imprimées sur une presse offset. Si vous utilisez des documents contenant des surimpressions, activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour prévisualiser avec précision les surimpressions sur une épreuve-écran. 6. Utilisez la gestion des couleurs lorsque vous imprimez et enregistrez des fichiers. L’objectif de la gestion des couleurs est de garantir l’homogénéité des couleurs sur tous les périphériques du flux de production. Laissez les options de gestion des couleurs activées lorsque vous imprimez des documents, enregistrez des fichiers et préparez des fichiers pour les afficher en ligne (voir les sections « Impression avec la gestion des couleurs » à la page 371 et « Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne » à la page 368). Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe Si vous utilisez Adobe Creative Suite, Adobe Bridge vous permet de synchroniser automatiquement les paramètres de couleur entre les applications. Ainsi, les couleurs sont identiques dans toutes les applications Adobe faisant appel à la gestion des couleurs. Si les paramètres de couleur ne sont pas synchronisés, un message d’avertissement apparaît en haut de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs de chaque application. Adobe vous recommande de synchroniser les paramètres de couleur avant d’utiliser des documents existants ou de nouveaux documents. 1 Ouvrez l’application Bridge. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 365 Gestion des couleurs Pour ouvrir Bridge depuis une application Creative Suite, choisissez Fichier > Parcourir. Pour ouvrir Bridge directement, choisissez Adobe Bridge à partir du menu Démarrer (Windows) ou cliquez deux fois sur l’icône Adobe Bridge (Mac OS). 2 Choisissez Edition > Paramètres de couleurs Creative Suite. 3 Sélectionnez une couleur dans la liste, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Si aucun paramètre par défaut ne correspond à vos besoins, sélectionnez l’option Afficher la liste complète des fichiers de paramètres couleur pour consulter d’autres paramètres. Pour installer un fichier de paramètres personnalisés, comme un fichier provenant d’un prestataire de services d’impression, cliquez sur l’option Afficher les fichiers de paramètres couleur enregistrés. Configuration de la gestion des couleurs 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • (Illustrator, InDesign, Photoshop) Choisissez Edition > Couleurs. • (Acrobat) Sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez un paramètre de couleur dans le menu Paramètres, puis cliquez sur OK. Le paramètre sélectionné détermine les espaces de travail colorimétriques utilisés par l’application, les événements qui se produisent lorsque vous ouvrez des fichiers munis de profils incorporés et que vous les importez, ainsi que le mode de conversion des couleurs utilisé par le système de gestion des couleurs. Pour afficher la description d’un paramètre, sélectionnez-le, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Remarque : les paramètres de couleur Acrobat constituent un sous-ensemble de ceux utilisés dans InDesign, Illustrator et Photoshop. Dans certaines situations, notamment lorsqu’un prestataire de services fournit un profil de sortie personnalisé, vous devrez peut-être personnaliser des options spécifiques de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Notez que la personnalisation est strictement recommandée aux utilisateurs expérimentés. Remarque : si vous utilisez plusieurs applications Adobe, il est fortement conseillé de synchroniser les paramètres de couleur entre les différentes applications (voir la section « Synchronisation des paramètres de couleur entre les applications Adobe » à la page 364). Voir aussi « Personnalisation des paramètres de couleur » à la page 378 Modification de l’aspect du noir CMJN (Illustrator, InDesign) Le noir CMJN pur (N = 100) apparaît comme du noir intense à l’écran, après impression sur une imprimante de bureau autre que PostScript ou après exportation dans un format de fichier RVB. Si vous préférez pouvoir distinguer le noir pur du noir intense tel qu’il apparaîtra après impression sur une presse commerciale, vous pouvez modifier les préférences d’aspect du noir. Ces préférences ne modifient pas les valeurs chromatiques d’un document. 1 Choisissez Edition > Préférences > Aspect du noir (Windows) ou [nom de l’application] > Préférences > Aspect du noir (Mac OS). 2 Choisissez une option A l’écran : Afficher tous les noirs avec précision Affiche le noir CMJN pur en tant que gris foncé. Ce paramètre vous permet de distinguer le noir pur du noir intense.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 366 Gestion des couleurs Afficher tous les noirs comme noirs intenses Affiche le noir CMJN pur en tant que noir intense (RVB=000). Avec ce paramètre, le noir pur et le noir intense sont identiques à l’écran. 3 Choisissez une option Impression / Exportation : Reproduire tous les noirs avec précision Lors d’une impression sur une imprimante de bureau non PostScript ou d’une exportation dans un format de fichier RVB, le noir CMJN pur est reproduit à l’aide des numéros de couleurs du document. Ce paramètre vous permet de distinguer le noir pur du noir intense. Reproduire tous les noirs comme noirs intenses Lors d’une impression sur une imprimante de bureau non PostScript ou d’une exportation dans un format de fichier RVB, le noir CMJN pur est reproduit en noir intense (RVB=000). Avec ce paramètre, le noir pur et le noir intense sont identiques. Gestion des couleurs quadrichromiques et des tons directs Lorsque la gestion des couleurs est activée, toutes les couleurs que vous appliquez ou créez dans une application Adobe faisant appel à cette fonction utilisent automatiquement un profil colorimétrique correspondant au document. Si vous passez à un autre mode colorimétrique, le système de gestion des couleurs utilise les profils appropriés pour convertir la couleur selon le modèle que vous avez choisi. Gardez à l’esprit les indications suivantes lorsque vous utilisez des couleurs quadrichromiques et des tons directs : • Choisissez un espace de travail CMJN correspondant à vos conditions de sortie CMJN afin de pouvoir définir et afficher correctement les couleurs quadrichromiques. • Sélectionnez des couleurs provenant d’une bibliothèque de couleurs. Les applications Adobe sont livrées avec plusieurs bibliothèques de couleurs standard que vous pouvez charger depuis le menu du panneau Nuancier. • (Acrobat, Illustrator et InDesign) Activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour obtenir une prévisualisation précise et homogène des tons directs. • (Acrobat, Illustrator et InDesign) Utilisez des valeurs Lab (valeurs par défaut) pour afficher des tons directs prédéfinis (comme les couleurs des bibliothèques TOYO, PANTONE, DIC et HKS) et les convertir en couleurs quadrichromiques. Les valeurs Lab offrent la plus grande précision possible et garantissent un affichage homogène des couleurs dans toutes les applications Creative Suite. Si vous souhaitez que l’affichage et la sortie de ces couleurs coïncident avec ceux de versions précédentes d’Illustrator ou d’InDesign, utilisez les valeurs CMJN équivalentes. Pour savoir comment passer des valeurs Lab aux valeurs CMJN pour les tons directs, consultez l’aide d’Illustrator ou d’InDesign. Remarque : la gestion des couleurs en tons directs permet d’obtenir une excellente approximation d’un ton direct sur votre périphérique d’épreuvage ou un moniteur. Cependant, Il est difficile de reproduire avec exactitude un ton direct sur un moniteur ou un périphérique d’épreuvage, car de nombreuses encres de tons directs se situent hors des gamme de couleurs de ces périphériques. Gestion des couleurs des images importées Gestion des couleurs des images importées (Illustrator, InDesign) L’intégration des images importées dans l’espace colorimétrique d’un document est différente selon que l’image possède ou non un profil incorporé : • Lorsque vous importez une image sans profil, l’application Adobe utilise le profil du document actif pour définir les couleurs de l’image. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 367 Gestion des couleurs • Lorsque vous importez une image dotée d’un profil incorporé, les règles de couleur de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs déterminent le mode de traitement du profil par l’application Adobe. Voir aussi « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 380 Utilisation d’un flux de travail CMJN sécurisé Un flux de production CMJN sécurisé garantit que les numéros de couleurs CMJN sont conservés jusqu’au périphérique de sortie et ne sont pas convertis par le système de gestion des couleurs. Ce flux de production est utile si vous souhaitez adopter progressivement des pratiques de gestion des couleurs. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser des profils CMJN pour vérifier des documents à l’écran et sur papier sans que des couleurs ne soient converties intempestivement pendant la sortie finale. Par défaut, Illustrator et InDesign prennent en charge un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. Ainsi, lorsque vous ouvrez ou importez une image CMJN à laquelle un profil est incorporé, l’application ignore le profil et conserve les numéros de couleurs bruts. Si vous souhaitez que l’application modifie les numéros de couleurs en fonction d’un profil incorporé, définissez la règle de couleur CMJN sur Conserver les profils incorporés dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Vous pouvez facilement restaurer le flux de production CMJN sécurisé en redéfinissant la règle de couleur CMJN sur Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés). Vous pouvez ignorer les paramètres CMJN sécurisés lorsque vous imprimez un document ou que vous l’enregistrez au format Adobe PDF. Toutefois, cette action risque d’entraîner une nouvelle séparation des couleurs. Par exemple, les objets noirs CMJN purs pourraient être de nouveau séparés en objets noirs intenses. Pour plus de détails sur les options de gestion des couleurs pour l’impression et l’enregistrement des fichiers PDF, consultez l’aide. Voir aussi « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 380 Préparation d’images importées pour la gestion des couleurs Suivez les consignes générales ci-après pour préparer la gestion des couleurs des images dans les applications Adobe. • Incorporez un profil compatible ICC lorsque vous enregistrez le fichier. Les formats de fichier JPEG, PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), Photoshop EPS, Format de document volumineux et TIFF prennent en charge les profils incorporés. • Si vous prévoyez de réutiliser une image en couleurs sur différents périphériques ou supports de sortie finale pour l’impression, la vidéo et le Web, préparez l’image à l’aide des couleurs RVB ou Lab chaque fois que cela est possible. Si vous devez enregistrer une image sous un modèle de couleur autre que RVB ou Lab, conservez une copie de l’image d’origine. Les gamme de couleurs des modèles RVB et Lab sont plus étendues que celles de la plupart des périphériques de sortie ; elles conservent un grand nombre de données chromatiques avant d’être converties en une gamme de couleurs de sortie plus limitée. Voir aussi « Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 376UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 368 Gestion des couleurs Affichage ou modification des profils d’images bitmap importées (InDesign) InDesign vous permet d’afficher, de remplacer ou de désactiver les profils des images bitmap importées. Ces opérations peuvent s’avérer nécessaires pour importer une image ne contenant aucun profil ou un profil incorporé de manière incorrecte. Par exemple, si le profil par défaut du fabricant de scanner est incorporé et que vous avez par la suite incorporé un profil personnalisé, vous pouvez attribuer le profil le plus récent. 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Si l’image se trouve déjà sur une mise en page, sélectionnez-la, puis choisissez Objet > Couleurs de l’image. • Si vous importez une image, choisissez Fichier > Importer, sélectionnez Afficher les options d’importation, sélectionnez le fichier, puis cliquez sur l’onglet Couleur. 2 Dans le menu Profil, choisissez le profil source à appliquer à l’image du document. Si un profil est actuellement incorporé, son nom apparaît en haut du menu Profil. 3 (Facultatif) Choisissez un mode de rendu, puis cliquez sur OK. Dans la plupart des cas, il est préférable d’utiliser le mode de rendu par défaut. Remarque : vous pouvez également afficher ou modifier les profils d’objets dans Acrobat. Voir aussi « Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil (Photoshop) » à la page 377 Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne Gestion des couleurs de documents pour un affichage en ligne La gestion des couleurs appliquée en vue d’un affichage en ligne diffère nettement de celle utilisée pour des supports d’impression. Vous pouvez mieux contrôler l’aspect du document final imprimé. Avec les supports en ligne, vos moyens d’action sur l’homogénéité des couleurs sont sensiblement limités, car les documents s’affichent sur une grande variété de moniteurs et systèmes d’affichage vidéo non étalonnés. Lorsque vous gérez les couleurs de documents qui seront exclusivement visionnés sur le Web, Adobe vous recommande d’utiliser l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. Il s’agit de l’espace de travail adopté par défaut pour la plupart des paramètres de couleur Adobe. Vérifiez toutefois que l’option sRVB est sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) ou dans les préférences de gestion des couleurs (Acrobat). Lorsque l’espace de travail est défini sur sRVB, toutes les images RVB créées utilisent sRVB comme espace colorimétrique. Lorsque vous utilisez une image dont le profil incorporé n’est pas sRVB, convertissez ses couleurs vers l’espace de travail sRVB avant de l’enregistrer en vue de son utilisation sur le Web. Si vous souhaitez que l’application convertisse automatiquement les couleurs dans leurs équivalents de l’espace sRVB lorsque vous ouvrez l’image, sélectionnez Convertir selon l’espace de travail comme règle de gestion des couleurs RVB. (Assurez-vous que l’espace de travail RVB est défini sur sRVB.) Dans Photoshop et InDesign, vous pouvez aussi convertir manuellement les couleurs vers l’espace sRVB en choisissant la commande Edition > Convertir en profil. Remarque : dans InDesign, la commande Convertir en profil convertit uniquement les couleurs des objets natifs, et non les objets positionnés, du document. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 369 Gestion des couleurs Voir aussi « A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques » à la page 378 « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 380 Gestion des couleurs de fichiers PDF pour un affichage en ligne Lors de l’exportation des fichiers PDF, vous pouvez choisir d’incorporer des profils. Les fichiers PDF avec des profils incorporés reproduisent les couleurs uniformément dans Acrobat 4.0, ou version ultérieure, exécuté avec un système de gestion des couleurs correctement configuré. Gardez à l’esprit que l’incorporation des profils colorimétriques a pour effet de gonfler la taille des fichiers PDF. Les profils RVB sont généralement petits (environ 3 Ko). Cependant, la taille des profils CMJN peut varier de 0,5 Ko à 2 Mo. Voir aussi « Impression avec la gestion des couleurs » à la page 371 Gestion des couleurs de documents HTML pour un affichage en ligne La plupart des navigateurs Web ne prennent pas en charge la gestion des couleurs. Parmi les navigateurs prenant en charge cette fonction, il est impossible d’affirmer que tous gèrent effectivement les couleurs sachant que certains fonctionnent sur des systèmes dont les moniteurs ne sont pas étalonnés. En outre, rares sont les pages Web dont les images sont associées à des profils incorporés. Si vous gérez un environnement informatique très contrôlé, comme l’intranet d’un studio de création, il est possible d’obtenir un certain niveau de gestion des images HTML en équipant tous les ordinateurs de navigateurs prenant en charge la gestion des couleurs et en étalonnant tous les moniteurs. Vous pouvez déterminer approximativement l’aspect des couleurs sur des moniteurs non étalonnés en utilisant l’espace colorimétrique sRVB. Cependant, étant donné que la reproduction des couleurs varie d’un moniteur non étalonné à un autre, il vous sera impossible de connaître l’étendue des écarts d’affichage possibles. Vérification des couleurs Vérification des couleurs sur épreuves-écran L’une des étapes d’un processus d’édition traditionnel consiste à tirer une épreuve papier de votre document afin de vérifier l’aspect de ses couleurs une fois reproduites sur un périphérique de sortie particulier. Grâce à la gestion des couleurs et à la précision des profils colorimétriques, vous êtes en mesure de vérifier l’épreuve de votre document directement sur le moniteur. Vous pouvez visualiser un aperçu des couleurs telles qu’elles seront reproduites sur un périphérique de sortie donné. Toutefois, retenez que la fiabilité de l’épreuve-écran dépend de la qualité du moniteur, des profils du moniteur et des périphériques de sortie, sans oublier l’éclairage ambiant de votre environnement de travail. Remarque : une épreuve-écran seule ne permet pas d’obtenir un aperçu de l’aspect des surimpressions imprimées sur une presse offset. Si vous utilisez des documents contenant des surimpressions, activez l’option Aperçu de la surimpression pour prévisualiser avec précision les surimpressions sur une épreuve-écran. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 370 Gestion des couleurs Utilisation d’une épreuve-écran pour prévisualiser à l’écran la sortie finale d’un document A. Le document est créé dans son espace colorimétrique de travail. B. Les valeurs chromatiques du document sont converties selon l’espace colorimétrique du profil d’épreuve choisi (il s’agit généralement du profil du périphérique de sortie). C. Le moniteur affiche l’interprétation des valeurs chromatiques du document par le profil d’épreuve. Epreuvage à l’écran des couleurs 1 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve, puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Choisissez un paramètre prédéfini correspondant à la condition de sortie à simuler. • Choisissez Personnalisé (Photoshop et InDesign) ou Personnaliser (Illustrator) pour créer un format d’épreuve personnalisé pour une condition de sortie spécifique. Il s’agit de l’option recommandée pour obtenir l’aperçu le plus précis possible de l’impression finale. 2 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Couleurs d’épreuve pour activer et désactiver l’affichage des épreuves-écran. Lorsque l’épreuvage à l’écran est activé, une coche apparaît à côté de la commande Couleurs d’épreuve, et le nom du paramètre prédéfini ou du profil de l’épreuve apparaît en haut de la fenêtre du document. Pour comparer les couleurs de l’image d’origine et celles de l’épreuve-écran, ouvrez le document dans une nouvelle fenêtre avant de configurer l’épreuve-écran. Paramètres prédéfinis de l’épreuve-écran Espace de travail CMJN Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs à partir de l’espace de travail CMJN actif tel qu’il est défini dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Espace CMJN du document (InDesign) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs à partir du profil CMJN du document. Plaque de travail Cyan, Plaque de travail Magenta, Plaque de travail Jaune, Plaque de travail Noir ou Plaques de travail CMJ (Photoshop) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’encrage CMJN en utilisant l’espace de travail CMJN actif. RVB Macintosh ou RVB Windows (Photoshop et Illustrator) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’une image en utilisant un moniteur standard Mac OS ou Windows comme espace de profil d’épreuve à simuler. Ces deux options supposent que le périphérique simulé affiche le document sans utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Aucune de ces options n’est disponible pour les documents Lab ou CMJN. RVB moniteur (Photoshop et Illustrator) Crée une épreuve-écran des couleurs d’un document RVB en utilisant l’espace colorimétrique de votre moniteur actif comme espace de profil d’épreuve. Cette option suppose que le périphérique simulé affiche le document sans utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Elle n’est pas disponible pour les documents Lab et CMJN. Options personnalisées d’épreuvage à l’écran Périphérique de simulation Spécifie le profil colorimétrique du périphérique pour lequel vous voulez créer l’épreuve. L’utilité d’un profil se mesure à la précision avec laquelle il décrit le comportement du périphérique. Ce sont généralement les profils personnalisés définis pour des combinaisons spécifiques de papier et d’imprimante qui produisent les meilleures épreuves-écran. Conserver les numéros CMJN ou Conserver les numéros RVB Simule l’aspect des couleurs qui n’auront pas été converties selon l’espace colorimétrique du périphérique de sortie. Cette option est particulièrement utile lorsque vous utilisez un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. A B C UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 371 Gestion des couleurs Mode de rendu (Photoshop et Illustrator) Lorsque l’option Conserver les numéros est désélectionnée, cette option spécifie un mode de rendu pour la conversion des couleurs en fonction du périphérique que vous essayez de simuler. Utiliser la compensation du point noir (Photoshop) Garantit que le détail des ombres de l’image est conservé par la simulation de toute la gamme dynamique du périphérique de sortie. Sélectionnez cette option si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la compensation du point noir lors de l’impression (recommandé dans la plupart des cas). Simuler la teinte du papier Simule le blanc terne du vrai papier en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Simuler l’encre noire Simule le gris foncé que vous obtenez à la place du noir intense sur de nombreuses imprimantes, en fonction du profil de l’épreuve. Tous les profils ne prennent pas en charge cette option. Dans Photoshop, si vous voulez utiliser le format personnalisé comme format d’épreuve par défaut des documents, fermez toutes les fenêtres de document avant de choisir la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve > Personnalisé. Enregistrement ou chargement d’un format d’épreuve personnalisé 1 Choisissez la commande Affichage > Format d’épreuve > Personnalisé. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour enregistrer un format d’épreuve personnalisé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Pour vous assurer que le nouveau paramètre prédéfini apparaît dans le sous-menu Affichage > Format d’épreuve, enregistrez-le à l’emplacement par défaut. • Pour charger un format d’épreuve personnalisé, cliquez sur Charger. Gestion des couleurs de documents pour l’impression Impression avec la gestion des couleurs Les options de gestion des couleurs pour l’impression vous permettent d’indiquer aux applications Adobe comment traiter les données des images sortantes pour que l’imprimante imprime les couleurs conformément à l’affichage sur le moniteur. Les options d’impression des documents appliquant la gestion des couleurs dont vous disposez dépendent de l’application Adobe utilisée, ainsi que du périphérique de sortie choisi. En général, vous avez le choix entre les options suivantes : • Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs • Laisser l’application déterminer les couleurs • (Photoshop et InDesign) Ne pas utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Dans ce flux de production, aucune conversion des couleurs n’a lieu. Vous devrez peut-être aussi désactiver la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Cette méthode sert principalement à imprimer des cibles d’essai d’imprimabilité ou à générer des profils personnalisés. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 372 Gestion des couleurs Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression Dans ce flux de production, l’application ne convertit pas les couleurs mais envoie toutes les informations de conversion nécessaires au périphérique de sortie. Cette méthode est particulièrement utile lors de l’impression sur des imprimantes photo à jet d’encre, car chaque combinaison de type de papier, résolution d’impression et paramètres d’impression supplémentaires (comme l’impression grande vitesse) nécessite un profil différent. La plupart des nouvelles imprimantes photo à jet d’encre sont livrées avec des profils précis intégrés au pilote. Le fait de laisser l’imprimante sélectionner le profil approprié vous permet d’économiser du temps et de réduire le nombre d’erreurs. Cette méthode est également recommandée si vous n’êtes pas habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs. Si vous choisissez cette méthode, vous devez impérativement configurer les options d’impression et activer la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Consultez l’aide pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Si vous sélectionnez une imprimante PostScript, vous pouvez exploiter la gestion des couleurs PostScript. La gestion des couleurs PostScript permet de réaliser une sortie composite couleur ou la séparation des couleurs au niveau du processeur d’image pixellisée (processus appelé séparations In-RIP, de sorte qu’un programme a seulement besoin de spécifier des paramètres de séparation et de laisser le périphérique calculer les valeurs chromatiques finales. Les flux de production de sortie avec gestion des couleurs PostScript nécessitent un périphérique de sortie prenant en charge la gestion des couleurs PostScript à l’aide du langage PostScript Niveau 2, version 2017 ou supérieure ou PostScript Niveau 3. Laisser l’application déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression Avec ce flux de production, l’application procède à la conversion de toutes les couleurs et génère ainsi des données chromatiques spécifiques à un périphérique de sortie. L’application utilise les profils colorimétriques attribués pour convertir les couleurs selon la gamme du périphérique de sortie et envoie les valeurs résultantes au périphérique de sortie. La fiabilité de cette méthode dépend de la précision du profil d’imprimante sélectionné. Utilisez ce flux de production lorsque vous disposez de profil ICC personnalisés pour chaque combinaison d’imprimante, d’encre et de papier spécifique. Si vous choisissez cette option, vous devez impérativement désactiver la gestion des couleurs dans le pilote de l’imprimante. Si vous laissez l’application et le pilote d’imprimante gérer simultanément les couleurs lors de l’impression, vous risquez d’obtenir des résultats inattendus. Consultez l’aide pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau Si les profils de sortie livrés avec l’imprimante ne produisent pas les résultats escomptés, vous pouvez obtenir des profils personnalisés de plusieurs façons : • Achetez un profil correspondant à votre type d’imprimante et de papier. Il s’agit généralement de la méthode la plus simple et la moins coûteuse. • Achetez un profil correspondant spécifiquement à votre imprimante et à votre papier. Cette méthode nécessite l’impression d’une cible de profilage sur votre imprimante et votre papier puis l’envoi de cette cible à une entreprise qui créera un profil adapté. Un profil spécifique est plus onéreux qu’un profil standard mais peut produire de meilleurs résultats, car il compense les écarts de fabrication des imprimantes. • Créez votre propre profil en utilisant un système basé sur un scanner. Cette méthode nécessite un logiciel de création de profils ainsi qu’un scanner à plat pour numériser la cible de profilage. Elle donne d’excellents résultats avec les papiers mats mais pas avec les papiers brillants. (Les papiers brillants contiennent souvent des éclaircissants fluorescents qui apparaissent différemment sur un scanner et sous l’éclairage d’une pièce.)UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 373 Gestion des couleurs • Créez votre propre profil au moyen d’un outil matériel de création de profils. Cette méthode est coûteuse mais fournit les meilleurs résultats. Un outil matériel de bonne qualité peut vous permettre de créer un profil fiable, même sur des papiers brillants. • Peaufinez un profil créé avec l’une des méthodes précédentes à l’aide d’un logiciel de modification de profils. Ce type de logiciel peut être difficile à utiliser, mais il vous permet de corriger les problèmes inhérents à un profil ou tout simplement d’ajuster un profil afin qu’il génère les résultats attendus. Voir aussi « Installation d’un profil colorimétrique » à la page 375 Utilisation des profils colorimétriques A propos des profils colorimétriques Une gestion des couleurs homogène et précise exige des profils fiables, conformes à la norme ICC, pour tous vos périphériques couleur. Par exemple, sans un profil de scanner approprié, une image numérisée parfaite peut présenter des défauts dans un autre programme, en raison d’une simple différence entre le scanner et le logiciel d’affichage graphique. Cette représentation équivoque peut vous amener à retoucher voire détériorer inutilement une image d’une qualité satisfaisante. Avec un profil fiable, le programme qui importe l’image peut rectifier tous les écarts entre les périphériques et ainsi afficher les couleurs réelles d’une image numérisée. Un système de gestion des couleurs utilise les types de profils suivants : Profils de moniteur Ils indiquent comment le moniteur reproduit actuellement les couleurs. Il s’agit des premiers profils à créer, car l’affichage fidèle des couleurs sur un moniteur permet de prendre des décisions importantes sur les couleurs lors du processus de conception. Si ce que vous voyez à l’écran ne correspond pas aux couleurs réelles du document, vous ne serez pas en mesure de garantir l’homogénéité des couleurs. Profils de périphérique d’entrée Ils décrivent les couleurs qu’un périphérique d’entrée est capable de capturer ou de scanner. Si votre appareil photo numérique propose plusieurs profils, Adobe vous recommande de sélectionner le profil Adobe RVB. A défaut, utilisez le profil sRVB (profil par défaut de la plupart des appareils photo). Les utilisateurs expérimentés peuvent également utiliser d’autres profils adaptés à diverses sources lumineuses. Pour les profils de scanner, certains photographes créent des profils distincts pour chaque type ou marque de film qu’ils numérisent. Profils de périphérique de sortie Ils décrivent l’espace colorimétrique de périphériques de sortie comme les imprimantes de bureau ou les presses d’imprimerie. Le système de gestion des couleurs utilise les profils de périphérique de sortie pour associer correctement les couleurs d’un document à celles de la gamme de l’espace colorimétrique du périphérique de sortie. Le profil de sortie doit également tenir compte des conditions d’impression spécifiques, telles que le type de papier et l’encre. Par exemple, un papier brillant permet d’obtenir une gamme des couleurs différente de celle obtenue sur du papier mat. La plupart des pilotes d’imprimante sont livrés avec des profils colorimétriques intégrés. Il est recommandé de tester ces profils avant d’investir dans des profils personnalisés. Profils de document Ils définissent l’espace colorimétrique RVB ou CMJN d’un document. En attribuant un profil à un document (on dit alors que vous lui attribuez une description), l’application fournit une définition de l’aspect des couleurs réelles du document. Par exemple, les valeurs R=127, V=12 et B=107 représentent un jeu de numéros que les périphériques afficheront de manière différente. Toutefois, lorsqu’ils sont associés à l’espace colorimétrique Adobe RVB, ces numéros indiquent une couleur ou une longueur d’onde de lumière réelle. Dans le présent cas de figure, il s’agit d’une teinte spécifique de violet. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 374 Gestion des couleurs Lorsque la gestion des couleurs est activée, les applications Adobe attribuent automatiquement aux nouveaux documents un profil basé sur les options Espace de travail de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Les documents sans profils sont dits sans description (ou sans balise) et contiennent uniquement des numéros de couleurs bruts. Lorsque vous utilisez des documents sans description, les applications Adobe utilisent le profil de l’espace colorimétrique actif pour afficher les couleurs et les modifier. Gestion des couleurs à l’aide de profils A. Les profils décrivent les espaces colorimétriques du périphérique d’entrée et du document. B. A partir des informations contenues dans les profils, le système de gestion des couleurs identifie les couleurs réelles du document. C. Le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les valeurs numériques du document dans l’espace colorimétrique du moniteur à l’aide des informations contenues dans le profil de celui-ci. D. Le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les valeurs numériques du document selon les valeurs colorimétriques du périphérique de sortie à l’aide des informations contenues dans le profil de celui-ci, afin d’imprimer les couleurs réelles. Voir aussi « Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant » à la page 375 « Laisser l’imprimante déterminer les couleurs lors de l’impression » à la page 372 « Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau » à la page 372 « A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques » à la page 378 A propos de l’étalonnage et de la caractérisation du moniteur Les logiciels de profilage permettent à la fois d’étalonner et de caractériser un moniteur. Etalonner un moniteur signifie le rendre conforme à un standard prédéfini. Par exemple, vous pouvez régler votre moniteur afin qu’il affiche les couleurs en utilisant la température de la couleur du point blanc standard de l’industrie graphique de 5 000 degrés Kelvin. Caractériser un moniteur revient simplement à créer un profil qui décrit comment le moniteur reproduit actuellement les couleurs. L’étalonnage d’un moniteur implique le réglage des paramètres vidéo suivants : Luminosité et contraste Respectivement, niveau et écart d’intensité de l’affichage. Ces paramètres sont identiques à ceux utilisés en télévision. Un utilitaire d’étalonnage de moniteur permet de définir la gamme optimale de luminosité et de contraste pour l’étalonnage. A B C D UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 375 Gestion des couleurs Gamma Mesure de la luminosité des tons moyens. Les valeurs comprises entre le noir et le blanc produites par un moniteur ne sont pas linéaires. Si vous les reportez sur un graphe, elles forment une courbe et non une droite. Le gamma définit la valeur de cette courbe à mi-chemin entre le blanc et le noir. Luminophores Substances utilisées par les moniteurs à tube cathodique pour l’émission de lumière. Les caractéristiques colorimétriques varient d’un luminophore à l’autre. Point blanc Couleur et intensité du blanc le plus brillant que le moniteur puisse reproduire. Etalonnage du moniteur et création du profil correspondant L’étalonnage du moniteur consiste à le régler pour le rendre conforme à une spécification donnée. Une fois que le moniteur est étalonné, l’utilitaire de profilage vous permet d’enregistrer un profil colorimétrique. Le profil décrit la façon dont le moniteur traite les couleurs : les couleurs qu’il peut et ne peut pas afficher et la méthode de conversion des valeurs numériques des couleurs de l’image pour qu’elles s’affichent correctement. 1 Veillez à allumer votre moniteur au moins une demi-heure à l’avance. Ce délai est suffisant pour le préchauffage du moniteur et la production de sorties plus homogènes. 2 Vérifiez que votre moniteur affiche au moins des milliers de couleurs. Dans l’idéal, vérifiez que votre moniteur dispose d’un affichage en millions de couleurs ou en 24 bits au minimum. 3 Supprimez les motifs d’arrière-plan colorés du bureau de votre ordinateur, et configurez votre bureau de sorte qu’il n’affiche que des gris neutres. Les motifs chargés et les couleurs vives autour d’un document faussent la perception de la couleur. 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes pour étalonner votre moniteur et créer son profil : • Dans Windows, installez et utilisez un utilitaire d’étalonnage de moniteur. • Sous Mac OS, utilisez l’utilitaire d’étalonnage situé sous l’onglet Préférences système/ Affichages/ Couleur. • Pour obtenir des résultats optimaux, utilisez un logiciel tiers et des appareils de mesure. En général, l’utilisation conjointe d’un appareil de mesure, comme un colorimètre, et d’un logiciel permet de créer des profils plus fiables, car un instrument peut mesurer les couleurs affichées sur un moniteur beaucoup plus précisément que l’œil humain. Remarque : les performances d’un moniteur évoluent et s’amoindrissent au fil du temps. Il est donc conseillé d’étalonner votre moniteur et de lui créer un nouveau profil environ tous les mois. S’il vous semble difficile, voire impossible, de procéder à cette opération selon les normes, c’est que le moniteur est sans doute trop vieux et usé. La plupart des logiciels de profilage attribuent automatiquement le nouveau profil en tant que profil par défaut du moniteur. Pour savoir comment attribuer manuellement le profil du moniteur, consultez l’aide de votre système d’exploitation. Installation d’un profil colorimétrique Lorsque vous installez un nouveau périphérique, des profils colorimétriques sont généralement ajoutés sur votre ordinateur. La fiabilité de ces profils (souvent appelés profils génériques ou profils prêts à l’emploi) varie d’un fabricant à l’autre. Vous pouvez également obtenir des profils de périphérique en vous adressant à votre prestataire de services, en les téléchargeant depuis Internet ou en créant des profils personnalisés à l’aide d’un équipement de profilage professionnel. • Sous Windows, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un profil, puis sélectionnez Installer un profil. Vous pouvez aussi copier les profils dans le dossier WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\color. • Sous Mac OS, copiez les profils dans le dossier /Bibliothèque/ColorSync/Profiles ou le dossier /Users/[nom d’utilisateur]/Bibliothèque/ColorSync/Profiles.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 376 Gestion des couleurs Après avoir installé les profils colorimétriques, veillez à redémarrer les applications Adobe. Voir aussi « Obtention de profils personnalisés pour les imprimantes de bureau » à la page 372 Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique Pour incorporer un profil colorimétrique dans un document créé dans Photoshop, Illustrator ou InDesign, vous devez enregistrer ou exporter ce dernier dans un format prenant en charge les profils ICC. 1 Enregistrez ou exportez le document dans l’un des formats suivants : Adobe PDF, PSD (Photoshop), AI (Illustrator), INDD (InDesign), JPEG, Photoshop EPS, Format de document volumineux ou TIFF. 2 Sélectionnez l’option d’incorporation des profils ICC. Le nom et l’emplacement exacts de cette option varient selon les applications. Consultez l’aide d’Adobe pour obtenir des instructions supplémentaires. Incorporation d’un profil colorimétrique (Acrobat) Vous pouvez incorporer un profil colorimétrique à un objet ou à un fichier PDF entier. Acrobat joint le profil approprié, spécifié dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les couleurs, à l’espace colorimétrique sélectionné dans le fichier PDF. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous aux rubriques de conversion des couleurs dans l’aide d’Acrobat. Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document Il existe très peu de situations qui nécessitent une modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document. Ceci est dû au fait que votre application attribue automatiquement le profil colorimétrique en fonction des paramètres que vous sélectionnez dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Vous devez uniquement modifier manuellement un profil colorimétrique lorsque vous préparez un document pour une autre destination de sortie ou que vous corrigez le comportement d’une règle qui ne doit plus être implémentée dans le document. La modification d’un profil est généralement réservée aux utilisateurs expérimentés. Vous pouvez modifier le profil colorimétrique d’un document en procédant de l’une des manières suivantes : • Attribuez un nouveau profil. Les numéros de couleurs du document restent identiques, mais le nouveau profil risque de modifier considérablement l’aspect des couleurs telles qu’elles s’affichent sur votre moniteur. • Supprimez le profil afin que le document n’utilise plus la gestion des couleurs. • (Acrobat, Photoshop et InDesign) Convertissez les couleurs du document selon l’espace colorimétrique d’un autre profil. Les numéros de couleurs sont décalés pour que l’aspect des couleurs d’origine soit conservé. Attribution ou suppression d’un profil colorimétrique (Illustrator, Photoshop) 1 Choisissez Edition > Attribuer un profil. 2 Sélectionnez une option, puis cliquez sur OK : Ne pas appliquer la gestion des couleurs/Ne pas gérer les couleurs de ce document Supprime le profil existant du document. Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous êtes sûr de ne pas vouloir appliquer la gestion des couleurs au document. Lorsque le profil est supprimé d’un document, l’aspect des couleurs est défini par les profils d’espace de travail de l’application. Espace de travail [modèle de couleur : espace de travail] Attribue le profil d’espace de travail au document. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 377 Gestion des couleurs Profil Vous permet de sélectionner un autre profil. L’application attribue le nouveau profil au document sans convertir les couleurs selon l’espace du profil. Cela peut modifier complètement l’aspect des couleurs affichées sur votre moniteur. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 376 Attribution ou suppression d’un profil colorimétrique (InDesign) 1 Choisissez Edition > Attribuer des profils. 2 Pour Profil RVB et Profil CMJN, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Supprimer (utiliser l’espace de travail actuel) Supprime le profil existant du document. Sélectionnez cette option lorsque vous êtes sûr de ne pas vouloir appliquer la gestion des couleurs au document. Une fois le profil supprimé du document, l’aspect des couleurs est défini par les profils de l’espace de travail de l’application. Il n’est alors plus possible d’incorporer un profil au document. Attribuer l’espace de travail actuel [espace de travail] Attribue le profil d’espace de travail au document. Attribuer un profil Vous permet de sélectionner un autre profil. L’application attribue le nouveau profil au document sans convertir les couleurs selon l’espace du profil. Cela peut modifier complètement l’aspect des couleurs affichées sur votre moniteur. 3 Choisissez un mode de rendu pour chaque type d’image du document : vous pouvez choisir l’un des quatre modes standard ou l’option Utiliser le rendu des couleurs qui utilise le mode de rendu en cours de la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Pour plus de détails sur les modes de rendu, consultez l’aide. Les types d’images sont les suivants : Rendu des couleurs en aplat Définit le mode de rendu pour toutes les illustrations vectorielles (zones de couleur unie) des objets natifs InDesign. Rendu des images par défaut Définit le mode de rendu par défaut des images bitmap placées dans InDesign. Vous pouvez ignorer ce paramètre pour certaines images. Rendu après application du dégradé Applique le mode de rendu à l’espace colorimétrique final ou d’épreuve pour les couleurs résultant d’interactions entre les transparences de la page. Utilisez cette option lorsque votre document contient des objets transparents. 4 Pour prévisualiser les effets du nouveau profil dans le document, sélectionnez Aperçu, puis cliquez sur OK. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 376 « Affichage ou modification des profils d’images bitmap importées (InDesign) » à la page 368 Conversion des couleurs du document dans un autre profil (Photoshop) 1 Choisissez Edition > Convertir en profil. 2 Dans la section Espace de destination, choisissez le profil colorimétrique vers lequel convertir les couleurs du document. Le document sera converti à ce nouveau profil et en contiendra la description. 3 Dans la section Options de conversion, indiquez un moteur de gestion des couleurs, un mode de rendu et des options de point noir et de simulation (le cas échéant) (voir la section « Options de conversion des couleurs » à la page 381).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 378 Gestion des couleurs 4 Pour aplatir tous les calques du document en un seul calque après conversion, sélectionnez Aplatir l’image. 5 Pour prévisualiser les effets de la conversion dans le document, sélectionnez Aperçu. Voir aussi « Modification du profil colorimétrique d’un document » à la page 376 Paramètres de couleur Personnalisation des paramètres de couleur Pour la plupart des flux de production utilisant la gestion des couleurs, il est préférable d’utiliser un paramètre de couleur prédéfini ayant fait l’objet d’un test par Adobe Systems. Ne modifiez des options spécifiques que si vous êtes habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs et que vous êtes sûr des changements que vous allez effectuer. Après avoir personnalisé des options, vous pouvez les enregistrer en tant que paramètre prédéfini afin de pouvoir les réutiliser et les partager avec d’autres utilisateurs ou applications. • Pour enregistrer des paramètres de couleur en tant que paramètre prédéfini, cliquez sur Enregistrer dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Pour vous assurer que l’application affichera le nom du paramètre dans cette boîte de dialogue, enregistrez le fichier dans l’emplacement par défaut. Si vous enregistrez le fichier dans un autre emplacement, vous devrez le charger avant de pouvoir sélectionner le paramètre. • Pour charger un paramètre prédéfini de couleur qui n’a pas été enregistré dans l’emplacement standard, cliquez sur Charger dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs, sélectionnez le fichier à charger, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Remarque : il est impossible d’enregistrer des paramètres de couleur personnalisés dans Acrobat. Pour partager des paramètres de couleur personnalisés avec Acrobat, vous devez créer le fichier dans InDesign, Illustrator ou Photoshop avant de l’enregistrer dans le dossier des paramètres par défaut. Il sera alors disponible dans la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Vous avez également la possibilité d’ajouter manuellement des paramètres à ce dossier. A propos des espaces de travail colorimétriques L’expression espace de travail désigne un espace colorimétrique intermédiaire utilisé pour définir des couleurs et les modifier dans les applications Adobe. Chaque modèle de couleur est associé à un profil d’espace de travail. Vous pouvez choisir les profils d’espace de travail dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs. Un profil d’espace de travail fait office de profil source pour les documents nouvellement créés qui utilisent le modèle de couleur associé. Par exemple, si le profil d’espace de travail RVB défini est Adobe RVB (1998), tous les documents RVB que vous créerez utiliseront des couleurs de la gamme Adobe RVB (1998). Les espaces de travail déterminent également l’aspect des couleurs dans les documents sans description. Si vous ouvrez un document dont le profil colorimétrique incorporé ne correspond pas au profil d’espace de travail, l’application utilise une règle de gestion des couleurs pour déterminer le mode de traitement des données chromatiques. Dans la plupart des cas, la règle par défaut consiste à conserver le profil incorporé. Voir aussi « A propos des profils colorimétriques manquants et non concordants » à la page 379 « Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs » à la page 380UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 379 Gestion des couleurs Options des espaces de travail Pour afficher les options d’un espace de travail dans Photoshop, Illustrator et InDesign, sélectionnez Edition > Couleurs. Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour afficher la description d’un profil, sélectionnez-le, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. RVB Détermine l’espace colorimétrique RVB de l’application. En règle générale, il est recommandé de choisir Adobe RVB ou sRVB plutôt que le profil d’un périphérique spécifique (comme un profil de moniteur). L’option sRVB est recommandée lorsque vous préparez des images pour les placer sur le Web, car elle définit l’espace colorimétrique du moniteur standard utilisé pour visualiser les images sur le Web. Il s’agit également du choix idéal lorsque vous utilisez des images issues d’appareils photo numériques grand public, car la plupart de ces appareils utilisent l’espace sRVB comme espace colorimétrique par défaut. L’option Adobe RVB est recommandée lorsque vous préparez des documents en vue de leur impression, car la gamme Adobe RVB comprend des couleurs imprimables (des cyans et des bleus, par exemple) qu’il est impossible de définir à l’aide de l’option sRVB. Il s’agit également du choix idéal lorsque vous utilisez des images issues d’appareils photo numériques de type professionnel, car la plupart de ces appareils utilisent l’espace Adobe RVB comme espace colorimétrique par défaut. CMJN Détermine l’espace colorimétrique CMJN de l’application. Tous les espaces de travail CMJN dépendent d’un périphérique, ce qui signifie qu’ils sont basés sur des combinaisons d’encre et de papier réelles. Les espaces de travail CMJN fournis par Adobe sont basés sur les conditions d’impression commerciale standard. Niveaux de gris Détermine l’espace colorimétrique des niveaux de gris de l’application. Ton direct (Photoshop) Spécifie l’engraissement à utiliser lors de l’affichage des couches de tons directs et bichromes. Remarque : dans Acrobat, vous pouvez utiliser l’espace colorimétrique dans un mode de sortie incorporé plutôt que l’espace colorimétrique d’un document pour la visualisation et l’impression. Pour plus d’informations sur les modes de sortie, consultez l’aide d’Acrobat. Les applications Adobe sont livrées avec un ensemble standard de profils d’espace de travail recommandés et testés par Adobe Systems pour la majorité des flux de gestion des couleurs. Par défaut, seuls ces profils figurent dans les menus d’espace de travail. Pour afficher d’autres profils colorimétriques installés sur le système, sélectionnez Mode avancé (Illustrator et InDesign) ou Plus d’options (Photoshop). Un profil colorimétrique doit être bidirectionnel, c’est-à-dire qu’il doit contenir des spécifications de conversion vers un espace colorimétrique ou depuis celui-ci pour apparaître dans les menus d’espace de travail. Remarque : vous pouvez créer des profils d’espace de travail personnalisés dans Photoshop. Cependant, Adobe vous recommande d’utiliser un profil d’espace de travail standard plutôt que de créer un profil personnalisé. Pour plus de détails, consultez la base de connaissances du support technique Photoshop à l’adresse suivante : www.adobe.com/fr/support/products/photoshop.html. A propos des profils colorimétriques manquants et non concordants Avec un nouveau document, le flux de production de couleurs est généralement transparent : sauf instruction contraire, le document utilise le profil d’espace de travail associé à son mode colorimétrique pour créer et modifier des couleurs. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 380 Gestion des couleurs Certains documents existants peuvent toutefois ne pas utiliser le profil d’espace de travail spécifié et ne pas bénéficier de la gestion des couleurs. Les exceptions suivantes sont souvent observées dans un flux de production appliquant la gestion des couleurs : • Vous pouvez ouvrir un document ou importer des données chromatiques (par exemple, par copier-coller ou glisser-déposer) depuis un document ne contenant aucune description de profil. Cela se produit souvent lorsque vous ouvrez un document créé dans une application qui ne reconnaît pas la gestion des couleurs ou dans laquelle cette fonction est désactivée. • Vous pouvez ouvrir un document ou importer des données chromatiques depuis un document contenant une description de profil différente de l’espace de travail actif. Cela peut se produire lorsque vous ouvrez un document créé avec des paramètres de gestion des couleurs différents ou un document numérisé et contenant une description de profil de scanner. Dans les deux cas, l’application utilise une règle de gestion des couleurs pour choisir le mode de traitement des données chromatiques du document. Si le profil est manquant ou ne correspond pas à l’espace de travail, il se peut que l’application affiche un message d’avertissement (l’affichage dépend des options définies dans la boîte de dialogue Couleurs). Les avertissements sur les profils sont désactivés par défaut, mais vous pouvez les activer pour vous assurer que la gestion des couleurs appropriée des documents s’effectue au cas par cas. Les messages d’avertissement varient d’une application à une autre, mais vous disposez généralement des options suivantes : • (Recommandé) Laisser le document ou les données chromatiques importées inchangés. Par exemple, vous pouvez choisir d’utiliser le profil incorporé (s’il en existe un), de laisser le document sans profil colorimétrique (s’il n’en existe aucun) ou de conserver les numéros des données chromatiques collées. • Ajuster le document ou les données chromatiques importées. Par exemple, lorsque vous ouvrez un document sans profil colorimétrique, vous pouvez lui attribuer celui de l’espace de travail actif ou un autre profil. Lorsque vous ouvrez un document dont le profil colorimétrique n’est pas concordant, vous pouvez ignorer le profil ou convertir les couleurs selon l’espace de travail actif. Lorsque vous importez des données chromatiques, vous pouvez convertir les couleurs selon l’espace de travail actif afin de préserver leur aspect. Options de la règle de gestion des couleurs Une règle de gestion des couleurs détermine comment l’application traite les données chromatiques lorsque vous ouvrez un document ou importez une image. Vous pouvez choisir différentes règles pour les images RVB et CMJN et indiquer à quel moment les messages d’avertissement doivent apparaître. Pour afficher les options des règles de gestion des couleurs, choisissez Edition > Couleurs. Pour afficher la description d’une règle, sélectionnez-la, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. RVB, CMJN et Niveaux de gris Indique la règle à suivre lorsque des couleurs sont amenées dans l’espace de travail actif (lors de l’ouverture de fichiers ou l’importation d’images dans le document actif). (L’option Niveaux de gris est uniquement disponible dans Photoshop.) Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Conserver les profils incorporés Conserve toujours les profils colorimétriques incorporés à l’ouverture des fichiers. Cette option est recommandée pour la plupart des flux de production, car elle permet une gestion homogène des couleurs. Toutefois, si vous souhaitez conserver les numéros CMJN, sélectionnez l’option Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés). • Convertir selon l’espace de travail Convertit les couleurs en fonction du profil d’espace de travail actif à l’ouverture des fichiers et lors de l’importation d’images. Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que toutes les couleurs utilisent un seul profil (le profil d’espace de travail actif).UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 381 Gestion des couleurs • Conserver les numéros (ignorer les profils liés) Cette option est disponible dans InDesign et Illustrator pour les couleurs CMJN. Elle conserve les numéros de couleurs à l’ouverture des fichiers et lors de l’importation d’images, mais elle vous permet également d’utiliser la gestion des couleurs pour afficher correctement les couleurs dans les applications Adobe. Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez utiliser un flux de production CMJN sécurisé. Dans InDesign, vous pouvez remplacer cette règle pour un seul objet à la fois en choisissant Objet > Couleurs de l’image. • Désactivé Ne tient aucun compte des profils colorimétriques incorporés lors de l’ouverture de fichiers et de l’importation d’images et n’attribue pas le profil d’espace de travail aux nouveaux documents. Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez ignorer les métadonnées chromatiques fournies par l’auteur du document d’origine. Non-concordances des profils : choix à l’ouverture Affiche un message dès que vous ouvrez un document contenant la description d’un profil différent de l’espace de travail actif. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs des documents au cas par cas. Non-concordances des profils : choix au collage Affiche un message lorsqu’un profil colorimétrique n’est pas concordant, car les couleurs sont importées dans un document par collage ou par glisser-déposer. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs collées au cas par cas. Profils manquants : choix à l’ouverture Affiche un message dès que vous ouvrez un document sans description. Vous aurez alors la possibilité de supprimer le comportement par défaut de la règle. Sélectionnez cette option pour garantir une gestion appropriée des couleurs des documents au cas par cas. Options de conversion des couleurs Les options de conversion des couleurs vous permettent de contrôler la façon dont l’application gère les couleurs d’un document lorsque celui-ci est déplacé d’un espace colorimétrique à un autre. Ne modifiez ces options que si vous êtes habitué à utiliser la gestion des couleurs et que vous êtes sûr des changements que vous allez effectuer. Pour afficher les options de conversion, choisissez Edition > Couleurs, puis sélectionnez Mode avancé (Illustrator et InDesign) ou Plus d’options (Photoshop). Dans Acrobat, sélectionnez la catégorie Gestion des couleurs de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Moteur Désigne le module de gestion des couleurs (MGC) utilisé pour associer la gamme d’un espace colorimétrique à celle d’un autre espace. Le moteur par défaut Adobe (ACE) répond à tous les besoins de conversion de la plupart des utilisateurs. Pour afficher la description d’une option de moteur ou de rendu, sélectionnez-la, puis placez le pointeur de la souris au-dessus de son nom. La description apparaît au bas de la boîte de dialogue. Mode (Photoshop, Illustrator, InDesign) Indique le mode de rendu utilisé pour convertir un espace colorimétrique en un autre. Les différences entre les modes de rendu sont perceptibles uniquement lorsque vous imprimez un document ou le convertissez en un espace de travail distinct. Utiliser la compensation du point noir Garantit que le détail des ombres de l’image est conservé par la simulation de toute la gamme dynamique du périphérique de sortie. Sélectionnez cette option si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la compensation du point noir lors de l’impression (recommandé dans la plupart des cas). Simulation (Photoshop) Indique si les couleurs doivent être simulées lors de la conversion d’images à 8 bits par couche entre différents espaces colorimétriques. Lorsque l’option Simulation est sélectionnée, Photoshop mélange des couleurs dans l’espace colorimétrique cible, afin de simuler une couleur qu’il ne possède pas mais qui existe dans l’espace source. La simulation atténue considérablement l’effet de bandes mais risque d’augmenter la taille du fichier lors de la compression des images à diffuser sur le Web.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 382 Gestion des couleurs A propos des modes de rendu Le mode de rendu détermine la façon dont le système de gestion des couleurs convertit les couleurs d’un espace colorimétrique à l’autre. Les règles de détermination d’ajustement des couleurs source varient selon les modes de rendu. Par exemple, les couleurs comprises dans la gamme cible peuvent rester intactes ou être ajustées de sorte qu’elles conservent leur champ de relations visuelles d’origine lorsqu’elles sont converties dans une gamme cible plus petite. Le résultat du mode de rendu choisi dépend du contenu graphique des documents et des profils utilisés pour définir les espaces colorimétriques. Certains profils produisent les mêmes résultats avec des modes de rendu différents. D’une manière générale, il est préférable d’utiliser le mode de rendu par défaut du paramètre de couleur sélectionné, car il a été testé par Adobe Systems pour répondre aux normes industrielles. Par exemple, si vous choisissez un paramètre de couleur pour l’Amérique du Nord ou l’Europe, le mode de rendu par défaut est Colorimétrie relative. Si vous choisissez un paramètre de couleur pour le Japon, le mode de rendu par défaut est Perception. Vous pouvez sélectionner un mode de rendu lorsque vous définissez des options de conversion des couleurs pour le système de gestion des couleurs, des couleurs d’épreuve-écran et des illustrations : Perception Ce mode vise à conserver les relations visuelles entre les couleurs, afin qu’elles soient perçues comme naturelles à l’œil nu, même si les valeurs chromatiques peuvent elles-mêmes varier. Ce mode convient aux images photographiques contenant beaucoup de couleurs non imprimables. Il s’agit du mode de rendu standard de l’industrie de l’imprimerie japonaise. Saturation Ce mode privilégie l’éclat des couleurs au détriment de leur précision. Ce mode de rendu convient aux images d’entreprise, telles que des graphiques ou des diagrammes, dans lesquelles l’éclat des couleurs saturées est plus important que la précision des relations visuelles entre les couleurs. Colorimétrie relative Ce mode compare les tons clairs les plus intenses de l’espace colorimétrique source à ceux de l’espace colorimétrique cible et décale toutes les couleurs en conséquence. Les couleurs non imprimables sont remplacées par la couleur imprimable la plus proche dans l’espace colorimétrique cible. Le mode Colorimétrie relative préserve davantage les couleurs originales de l’image que le mode Perception. Il s’agit du mode de rendu standard de l’industrie de l’imprimerie en Amérique du Nord et en Europe. Colorimétrie absolue Ce mode conserve les couleurs de la gamme cible intactes. Toutes les couleurs hors de la gamme sont écrêtées. Les couleurs ne sont pas décalées vers le point blanc de destination. Ce mode de rendu vise à privilégier l’exactitude des couleurs au détriment des relations chromatiques. Il permet de simuler les couleurs produites par un périphérique donné lors de la phase d’épreuvage. Ce mode est particulièrement utile pour déterminer par prévisualisation la façon dont la couleur du papier agit sur les couleurs imprimées. Options avancées dans Photoshop Dans Photoshop, pour afficher les options avancées de gestion des couleurs, choisissez Edition > Couleurs, puis sélectionnez Plus d’options. Désaturer les couleurs du moniteur de Indique si les couleurs doivent être désaturées selon la quantité spécifiée lorsqu’elles sont affichées sur le moniteur. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, vous pouvez visualiser la plage complète des espaces colorimétriques dont la gamme est plus étendue que celle du moniteur. Toutefois, l’affichage du moniteur ne correspond plus à l’impression. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, des couleurs distinctes dans l’image risquent d’être identiques à l’affichage. Fusionner les couleurs RVB avec le gamma Contrôle la façon dont les couleurs RVB fusionnent pour produire des données composites (par exemple, lorsque les calques sont fusionnés ou peints en mode Normal). Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, les couleurs RVB sont fusionnées dans l’espace colorimétrique correspondant au gamma spécifié. Un UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 383 Gestion des couleurs gamma de 1,00 est considéré comme « chromatiquement correct » et doit générer un minimum d’aspérités. Lorsque cette option est désélectionnée, les couleurs RVB sont fusionnées directement dans l’espace colorimétrique du document. Remarque : si vous sélectionnez l’option Fusionner les couleurs RVB avec le gamma, les documents multicalques n’auront pas le même aspect lorsqu’ils seront affichés dans Photoshop et dans d’autres applications.384 Chapitre 15 : Impression Que vous envoyez une ébauche sur une imprimante jet d'encre ou laser, que vous fournissiez un document multicolore à un prestataire de services externe ou que vous imprimiez un document technique complexe avec des formats de page personnalisés, la boîte de dialogue d'impression contient des options qui garantissent que l'aspect du document final répondra à vos attentes. Pour plus d'informations sur l'impression, reportez-vous aux ressources en ligne suivantes : • Forums sur l'impression et le prépresse : acrobatusers.com/forums/aucbb/ • Centre de ressources Adobe sur l'impression : www.adobe.com/go/print_resource Tâches d’impression de base Impression d'un fichier PDF Si l'option d'impression souhaitée se trouve dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, définissez-la à cet endroit plutôt que dans le pilote de l'imprimante. L'ordinateur sur lequel vous souhaitez imprimer un fichier Adobe® PDF doit être connecté à une imprimante locale, partagée ou réseau et cet ordinateur doit être configuré pour utiliser cette imprimante. 1 Vérifiez que vous avez installé le pilote d'imprimante approprié. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Configuration de l'impression afin de choisir un format de papier, l'orientation des pages et d'autres options d'impression générales. Les options varient en fonction de l'imprimante et du pilote utilisés. Pour plus de détails, voir la documentation qui accompagne le pilote d'imprimante. 3 Pour imprimer des commentaires, tels que des notes autocollantes dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Commentaires, puis Imprimer les fenêtres et les notes. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer ou choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 5 Choisissez une imprimante dans le menu situé en haut de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. 6 Définissez des options supplémentaires de pilote d'imprimante dans votre système d'exploitation. 7 Pour imprimer des commentaires ou des formulaires, choisissez une option du menu déroulant Commentaires et formulaires. 8 Indiquez les pages que vous souhaitez imprimer, puis cliquez sur OK. Options de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer La plupart des options de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer d'Adobe Acrobat® sont les mêmes pour les autres applications. Cependant, il existe des changements mineurs spécifiques au système d'exploitation. Commentaires et formulaires Permet de spécifier le contenu visible à imprimer. • Document Imprime le contenu du document et les champs de formulaire. • Document et annotations Imprime le contenu du document, les champs de formulaire et les commentaires. • Document et tampons Imprime le document, les champs de formulaire et les tampons, mais aucune autre annotation telle que les notes et les traits au crayon. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 385 Impression • Champs de formulaire uniquement Imprime les champs de formulaire interactifs mais pas le contenu du document. Vue active/Image sélectionnée Imprime la zone de page (texte, commentaires, etc.) actuellement visible. Le nom de cette option change selon la sélection : aucune page sélectionnée (Vue active), sélection de page (Pages sélectionnées) ou portion d'une page sélectionnée à l'aide de l'outil Instantané (Image sélectionnée). Page active Imprime la page actuellement visible. Pages Spécifie l'étendue de pages à imprimer dans le fichier PDF ouvert. Séparez les numéros de pages d’un groupe à l’aide de traits d’union et plusieurs pages ou groupes de pages à l’aide de virgules ou d’espaces. Si l'option Utiliser les numéros de page logiques est sélectionnée dans les préférences d'affichage, vous pouvez saisir des numéros qui correspondent à la numérotation imprimée sur les pages en chiffres romains ou aux numéros de page réels. Si, par exemple, la première page d'un document est iii, saisissez iii ou 1 pour imprimer cette page. La sélection de Pages impaires ou Pages paires a un impact sur les pages imprimées dans l'étendue choisie. Par exemple, l'étendue 2, 7-10 avec l'option Pages paires permet d'imprimer les pages 2, 8 et 10 uniquement. Pour imprimer à partir d'une page précise jusqu'à la fin du document, entrez le numéro de page suivi d'un tiret. Par exemple « 11- » imprime le document de la page 11 à la dernière page. Jeu partiel Activez Toutes les pages, Pages impaires ou Pages paires pour choisir les pages à imprimer dans l'étendue spécifiée. Inverser Imprime les pages en ordre inverse. Si vous spécifiez des étendue de pages, l'impression s'effectue dans l'ordre inverse de la saisie des numéros. Par exemple, si la zone Pages comprend 3-5, 7-10, l'option Inverser permet d'imprimer les pages 10-7, puis 5–3. Mise à l’échelle Réduit, agrandit ou divise les pages lors de l'impression. • Aucun Imprime la partie supérieure gauche ou le centre de la page (si l'option Rotation auto. et centrage des pages est activée) sans mise à l'échelle. Les pages ou zones sélectionnées ne tenant pas sur la feuille de papier sont détourées. • Ajuster à la zone d'impression Réduit ou agrandit chaque page de manière à l'ajuster à la zone d'impression du format de papier sélectionné. Pour les imprimantes PostScript®, le fichier PPD détermine la zone d'impression du papier. • Réduire à la zone d'impression Réduit les grandes pages de manière à les faire correspondre au format de papier sélectionné, sans toutefois agrandir les petites pages. Si une zone de page est sélectionnée et qu'elle est plus grande que la zone d'impression du format de papier sélectionné, elle est mise à l'échelle de manière à correspondre à cette zone. Cette option est toujours active lors de l'impression N pages par feuille. • Juxtaposer les grandes pages Dispose en mosaïque les pages d'une taille supérieure au format de papier sélectionné à l'échelle spécifiée. Ces pages sont réparties sur plusieurs feuilles de papier. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Echelle de la mosaïque, Chevauchement, Traits de coupe et Intitulés. • Juxtaposer toutes les pages Dispose en mosaïque toutes les pages, quelle qu'en soit la taille. Cependant, seules sont réparties sur plusieurs feuilles de papier les pages d'une taille supérieure au format de papier sélectionné à l'échelle spécifiée. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Echelle de la mosaïque, Chevauchement, Traits de coupe et Intitulés. • Plusieurs pages par feuille Active la fonction d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille, par laquelle plusieurs pages s'impriment sur la même feuille de papier. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, vous pouvez également spécifier les paramètres Pages par feuille, Ordre des pages, Imprimer le contour et Rotation auto. des pages.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 386 Impression Remarque : La fonction d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille dans Acrobat est indépendante de son équivalent sur les pilotes d'impression. Les paramètres d'impression dans Acrobat ne correspondent pas aux options d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille des pilotes d'imprimante. Sélectionnez l'option d'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille dans Acrobat ou dans le pilote d'imprimante, mais pas dans les deux. • Impression en livret Imprime plusieurs pages sur la même feuille de papier dans l'ordre de lecture approprié une fois les feuilles pliées. L'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso (des deux côtés de la feuille). Si cette fonction est disponible, Acrobat l'active automatiquement pour l'impression en livret. Pages par feuille Imprime un nombre de pages prédéfini ou personnalisé (jusqu'à 99) à l'horizontale et à la verticale en mode Plusieurs pages par feuille. Si vous sélectionnez un nombre prédéfini dans le menu, Acrobat sélectionne automatiquement l'orientation de papier la plus adaptée. Ordre des pages Définit l'ordre des pages sur le papier lors de l'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille. L'option Horizontal place les pages de gauche à droite et de haut en bas. L'option Horizontal inversé place les pages de droite à gauche et de haut en bas. L'option Vertical place les pages de haut en bas et de gauche à droite. L'option Vertical inversé place les pages de haut en bas et de droite à gauche. Les deux options d'inversion conviennent aux documents en langues asiatiques. Imprimer le contour Trace la zone de recadrage (limite des pages PDF) lors de l'impression Plusieurs pages par feuille. Rotation auto. et centrage des pages Réglez l'orientation de la page selon l'orientation spécifiée dans les propriétés de l'imprimante. Choisir la source de papier selon le format de la page PDF (Windows) Utilise la taille de la page PDF pour déterminer le bac d'imprimante au lieu de l'option de mise en page. Cette option est pratique pour l'impression de fichiers PDF dont les pages sont de formats divers sur des imprimantes dotées de plusieurs bacs. Imprimer dans un fichier (Windows) Convertit le document en fichier PostScript dépendant du périphérique. Le fichier obtenu contient un code d'activation et de contrôle des fonctionnalités spécifiques du périphérique, ce qui réduit sa compatibilité avec des périphériques autres que le périphérique cible. Pour optimiser la création de fichiers PostScript, utilisez la commande d'enregistrement au format PostScript. La commande d'enregistrement au format PostScript n'est pas disponible dans Adobe Reader®. Remarque : Vous pouvez créer un fichier PostScript même si vous ne disposez pas d'une imprimante PostScript. Conseils Si vous disposez d'une connexion Internet, cette option pointe vers la page du site Web fournissant des informations de dépannage des problèmes d'impression. Avancé Ouvre un ou plusieurs panneaux permettant de configurer des options d’impression supplémentaires. Résumé des commentaires Crée un fichier PDF distinct et prêt à l'impression, contenant tous les commentaires d'un document. Cette option est indisponible lorsque vous imprimez à partir d'un navigateur Web ou si vous imprimez plusieurs documents contenus dans un porte-documents PDF. Voir la section « Impression d'un résumé des commentaires » à la page 180. Voir aussi « Téléchargement de polices asiatiques sur une imprimante » à la page 393 « Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis » à la page 387 Impression d'une zone sur une page 1 Choisissez Outils > Sélection et zoom > Instantané. 2 Cliquez et faites glisser le pointeur sur la zone à imprimer. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 387 Impression Acrobat copie la zone sélectionnée dans le Presse-papiers. 3 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer pour imprimer la sélection. Impression de calques Généralement, lors de l'impression d'un document PDF contenant des calques, seul le contenu visible à l'écran est imprimé. Toutefois, l'auteur d'un tel fichier PDF peut choisir les calques qui doivent ou non être imprimés (filigranes, informations confidentielles), indépendamment de leur visibilité à l'écran. Si l'impression spécifiée du document diffère de l'affichage à l'écran, un message s'affiche dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. L'aperçu disponible dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression affiche toujours la page destinée à l'impression. Remarque : Pour travailler avec des calques dans Acrobat, convertissez le document source à l'aide d'un jeu prédéfini de paramètres PDF qui conserve les calques, par exemple Acrobat 6 (PDF 1.5) ou version ultérieure. Affichage des calques à imprimer 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques . 2 Choisissez Appliquer les priorités d’impression dans le menu Options. Remarque : La fonction Appliquer les priorités d'impression peut être indisponible dans le menu Options selon les options de visibilité spécifiées lors de la création du fichier PDF. Modification des paramètres d'impression d'un calque 1 Dans le navigateur, cliquez sur le bouton Calques . 2 Développez la zone des calques, puis choisissez Propriétés du calque dans le menu Options. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du calque, choisissez l'une des options ci-après dans le menu déroulant d'impression : Toujours imprimer Impose l'impression du calque. Ne jamais imprimer Empêche l'impression du calque. Imprimer lorsque visible Fait correspondre la sortie imprimée à la visibilité à l'écran. Création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis Un fichier PDF peut contenir un jeu de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis, c'est-à-dire un ensemble de valeurs propres au document qui servent à définir les options d'impression de base. La création de paramètres d'impression prédéfinis vous évite de régler manuellement certaines options de la boîte de dialogue d'impression chaque fois que vous imprimez le document. S'il est judicieux de définir les paramètres d'impression d'un fichier PDF au moment de sa création, les paramètres d'impression prédéfinis permettent d'y ajouter des paramètres de base à tout moment. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Propriétés et cliquez sur l'onglet Avancées. 2 Dans la zone Paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression, effectuez les réglages voulus, puis cliquez sur OK. A la prochaine ouverture de la boîte de dialogue d'impression, les valeurs seront définies en fonction de ces paramètres prédéfinis. Il en va de même si vous imprimez un document tiré d'un porte-documents PDF. Remarque : Pour conserver des paramètres d'impression prédéfinis dans un fichier PDF, vous devez enregistrer ce fichier après avoir créé les paramètres d'impression prédéfinis.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 388 Impression Paramètres prédéfinis de la boîte de dialogue d'impression Mise à l’échelle Prédéfinit l'option Mise à l'échelle de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, avec l'une des valeurs suivantes : • Par défaut Utilise le paramètre par défaut de l'application, soit Réduire à la zone d'impression. • Aucun Empêche la mise à l'échelle automatique en fonction de la zone d'impression. Cette option est pratique pour conserver les dimensions de page dans des documents techniques ou pour garantir que l'impression s'effectue selon la taille légale. Mode recto verso Pour obtenir les meilleurs résultats, l'imprimante sélectionnée doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso si vous activez cette option. • Recto Imprime d'un seul côté du papier. • Recto verso - Symétrie le long du bord long Imprime sur les deux côtés du papier ; le papier est inversé selon le bord le plus long. • Recto verso - Symétrie le long du bord court Imprime sur les deux côtés du papier ; le papier est inversé selon le bord le plus court. Source du papier selon le format de la page Sélectionne l'option du même nom dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Utilise la taille de la page PDF pour déterminer le bac d'imprimante au lieu de l'option de mise en page. Cette option est pratique pour l'impression de fichiers PDF dont les pages sont de formats divers sur des imprimantes dotées de plusieurs bacs. Etendue à imprimer Préremplit la zone Pages de la section Etendue de la boîte de dialogue Imprimer avec les valeurs de votre choix. Cette option est pratique lorsque le flux de travail concerne des documents composés de pages d'instruction et de pages légales. Par exemple, si les pages 1-2 contiennent les instructions de remplissage du formulaire présenté pages 3-5, vous pouvez définir le travail d'impression de manière à imprimer plusieurs exemplaires du formulaire uniquement. Nombre de copies Préremplit la zone Copies de la boîte de dialogue d'impression. Choisissez un nombre de 2 à 5 ou choisissez Par défaut pour utiliser les valeurs d'origine de l'application, c'est-à-dire un seul exemplaire. Cette limitation empêche d'imprimer accidentellement plusieurs exemplaires. Autres méthodes d'impression d'un fichier PDF A propos du livret Un livret est un document dont les multiples pages sont disposées sur les feuilles de papier de manière à respecter l'ordre correct des pages lorsque les feuilles sont pliées en deux. Il est possible de créer des livrets dont chaque feuille présente deux pages juxtaposées au recto et au verso, de manière à pouvoir plier les feuilles en deux et les relier selon le pli. La première page s'imprime sur la même feuille que la dernière page, la deuxième page sur la même feuille que l'avant-dernière page, etc. Chaque page est automatiquement centrée sur la feuille ; les grandes pages sont ajustées (réduites) à la zone d'impression. Si vous assemblez les pages imprimées recto verso, les pliez et les agrafez, vous obtenez un livret dont la pagination est correcte. Pour imprimer un livret, l'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso automatique ou manuelle. L'impression recto verso manuelle impose deux passages distincts du papier : l'un pour imprimer le recto, l'autre pour imprimer le verso. Pour vérifier si votre imprimante prend en charge l'impression recto verso, consultez la documentation associée, contactez le fabricant ou cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés dans la boîte de dialogue d'impression et recherchez les options faisant référence à l'impression recto verso.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 389 Impression Disposition des pages dans le fichier PDF (en haut), disposition des pages en livret (en bas) et pages imprimées et pliées en livret Impression en livret 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez une imprimante. 2 Page Choisir, Sélectionner, Cliquer sur Page mise à l'échelle menu. 3 Dans la zone Etendue, spécifiez les pages à imprimer : • Pour imprimer les pages de la première à la dernière, sélectionnez Toutes les pages. • Pour diviser un livret volumineux en liasses plus petites, sélectionnez Pages et spécifiez l'étendue de la première liasse. Imprimez ensuite chaque liasse séparément. • Pour imprimer certaines pages sur différents papiers, spécifiez les pages voulues à l'aide des options Feuilles de / à. Cliquez sur le bouton Propriétés et sélectionnez le bac d'alimentation papier approprié, et toute autre option nécessaire. 4 Sélectionnez des options de gestion des pages. L'aperçu se modifie à mesure que vous spécifiez les options. Face(s) du livret Détermine de quel côté s'imprime le papier. Choisissez Recto verso pour imprimer automatiquement des deux côtés du papier (l'imprimante doit prendre en charge l'impression recto verso automatique). Choisissez Recto uniquement pour imprimer toutes les pages apparaissant au recto du papier. Après impression des pages, retournezles, choisissez à nouveau Fichier > Imprimer, puis sélectionnez Verso uniquement. Selon le modèle d'imprimante, il peut s'avérer nécessaire de retourner et retrier les pages pour permettre l'impression du verso. Dans un environnement d'impression partagée, pour éviter que d'autres utilisateurs impriment sur vos pages avant que vous puissiez imprimer le verso des pages, pensez à les imprimer à partir d'un bac d'alimentation papier différent. Rotation auto. des pages Fait automatiquement pivoter chaque page pour optimiser l'ajustement à la zone d'impression. Feuilles de Spécifient la première et la dernière feuille à imprimer. Acrobat détermine les feuilles à imprimer en fonction du travail d'impression. Par exemple, si vous avez un document de 16 pages, l'impression produit 4 feuilles (1 à 4). Liaison Détermine l'orientation de la reliure. Choisissez Gauche si le texte se lit de gauche à droite ; Gauche (Grand) pour le papier plié sur le bord long, produisant une zone d'impression longue et étroite. Choisissez Droite pour le texte lu de droite à gauche ou verticalement (à la manière asiatique) ; Droite (Grand) si le papier est plié sur le bord long. 1 1 2 3 2 3 4 4 3 1UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 390 Impression Comparaison des options de reliure Droite et Droite (Grand) Impression des fichiers PDF d'un porte-documents PDF Un porte-documents PDF est un fichier PDF constitué de plusieurs documents. Vous pouvez imprimer les fichiers PDF composant un porte-documents PDF de manière individuelle ou collective. 1 Ouvrez le porte-documents PDF. Pour imprimer uniquement certains fichiers, sélectionnez-les. 2 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer, puis choisissez l'une des commandes suivantes : Tous les fichiers PDF Imprime tous les fichiers PDF du porte-documents PDF. Fichiers PDF sélectionnés Imprime la sélection de fichiers PDF. Option uniquement disponible lorsque plusieurs fichiers sont sélectionnés dans la liste des documents composant le lot. 3 Sélectionnez les options d'impression nécessaires, puis cliquez sur OK. Les documents s'impriment selon l'ordre dans lequel ils apparaissent dans le porte-documents PDF. Remarque : Pour imprimer les composants du porte-documents qui ne sont pas au format PDF, vous devez utiliser l'application source. Pour ouvrir un fichier composant dans son application native, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Ouvrir le fichier dans l'application native. (L'application native doit être installée sur l'ordinateur afin que vous puissiez ouvrir le fichier.) Voir aussi « A propos des porte-documents PDF » à la page 114UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 391 Impression Impression à partir de l'onglet Signets Vous pouvez imprimer les pages associées à un signet directement à partir de l'onglet Signets. Les signets s'affichent sous forme arborescente, avec des signets parent et enfant (dépendants). Si vous imprimez un signet parent, toutes les pages associées aux signets enfant qui en dépendent sont également imprimées. Certains signets n'affichent pas de contenu de page et ne peuvent donc pas être imprimés. Par exemple, certains signets servent à ouvrir un fichier ou à lire un fichier son. Si vous sélectionnez une combinaison de signets imprimables et non imprimables, ces derniers sont ignorés. Remarque : Les signets composés de contenu balisé affichent toujours un contenu de page car les balises servent à représenter des éléments imprimables du document, tels que des titres et des figures. 1 Ouvrez un fichier PDF contenant des signets. Le cas échéant, choisissez Affichage > Panneaux de navigation > Signets pour faire apparaître les signets dans le navigateur. 2 Sélectionnez un ou plusieurs signets, puis cliquez sur la sélection avec le bouton droit de la souris. 3 Dans le menu contextuel, choisissez Imprimer les pages. Voir aussi « A propos des signets » à la page 298 « Ajout d'un signet balisé » à la page 301 Impression d'impression personnalisés Impression d'un document surdimensionné Bien que la fonction d'impression soit prévue pour des documents mesurant jusqu'à 38 100 000 cm (15 000 000 pouces) dans chaque sens, la plupart des imprimantes de bureau ne peuvent imprimer des pages d'une telle taille. Pour imprimer un document aux dimensions inhabituelles sur votre imprimante de bureau, vous devez imprimer les éléments (ou mosaïques) de chacune des pages du document un par un, puis les rogner et les réassembler. Vous pouvez également augmenter l'échelle d'un document de taille standard et l'imprimer sur plusieurs pages. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Dans le menu Mise à l'échelle, choisissez Juxtaposer toutes les pages si toutes les pages du document sont surdimensionnées. Si certaines pages sont de taille standard, choisissez Juxtaposer les grandes pages. 3 (Facultatif) Définissez l'une des options suivantes, en vous reportant à l'aperçu d'impression afin de vérifier le résultat : Echelle de la mosaïque Ajuste la mise à l'échelle. La mise à l'échelle a un impact sur le mappage des sections de la page PDF avec la feuille de papier. Chevauchement Spécifie le volume minimal d'informations dupliquées à imprimer sur chaque mosaïque afin de faciliter l'assemblage. L'option Chevauchement utilise l'unité de mesure spécifiée dans le document. La valeur doit être supérieure à celle des marges minimales non imprimables. Vous pouvez spécifier jusqu'à la moitié de la hauteur du plus petit côté de la page de document à chevaucher. Par exemple, les mosaïques d'une page mesurant 279,4 par 431,8 millimètres peuvent se chevaucher de 139,7 millimètres au maximum. Libellés Inclut le nom du fichier PDF, la date d'impression et les coordonnées de la mosaïque sur chaque feuille. Par exemple, Page 1 (1,1) signifie rangée 1, colonne 1 de la première page. Les coordonnées de mosaïque servent au réassemblage des mosaïques. UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 392 Impression Traits de coupe Imprime des repères à chaque coin d'une mosaïque pour faciliter l'assemblage. Utilisez cette option en conjonction avec l'option Chevauchement. Lorsque vous définissez un bord de chevauchement, puis superposez ces bords, les traits de coupe vous aident à aligner les mosaïques. Mise à l'échelle d'un document pour l'impression Pour imprimer un fichier PDF de très grande dimension sur du papier d'un format inférieur, vous pouvez ajuster la largeur et la hauteur du document par une mise à l'échelle. 1 Choisissez Fichier > Imprimer. 2 Dans le menu Mise à l'échelle, choisissez Ajuster à la zone d'impression ou Réduire à la zone d'impression. Paramètres d'impression avancés A propos des paramètres d'impression avancés Si les paramètres d'impression normaux ne vous permettent pas d'obtenir les résultats souhaités, vous avez la possibilité de spécifier d'autres paramètres dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression. Par exemple, si la sortie papier ne respecte pas l'aspect du document à l'écran, vous pouvez essayer de l'imprimer sous forme d'image. Ou encore, si le document PDF utilise des polices non incorporées, vous devez télécharger ces polices sur l'imprimante avant l'impression. Définition des paramètres d'impression avancés La boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression est disponible pour les imprimantes PostScript et non PostScript. 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue Imprimer, cliquez sur Options avancées. Si vous souhaitez en apprendre davantage sur une option, sélectionnez-la. Sa description s'affiche au bas de la boîte de dialogue. 2 Définissez les paramètres d'impression PostScript, puis cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Acrobat détermine automatiquement le niveau PostScript, selon l'imprimante sélectionnée. Options PostScript Utilisez le panneau Options PostScript de la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression pour définir les options pour une imprimante PostScript particulière. Ces options comprennent la prise en charge des polices absentes de l'imprimante et le téléchargement des polices asiatiques. Si un fichier PDF contient des paramètres relatifs au périphérique (demi-teintes et fonction de transfert, par exemple), ces paramètres peuvent être envoyés vers l'imprimante PostScript afin de remplacer les paramètres par défaut de l'imprimante. Pour utiliser ces options, il est nécessaire qu'une imprimante PostScript soit connectée, ou qu'un pilote PostScript soit installé et un fichier PPD sélectionné. Règle de gestion des polices et ressources Spécifie la manière dont les polices et les ressources du document sont envoyées vers l'imprimante lorsqu'elles n'y sont pas déjà présentes. • Envoyer au démarrage Télécharge toutes les polices et ressources au démarrage du travail d'impression. Les polices et les ressources restent sur l'imprimante jusqu'à la fin du travail d'impression. Cette option est la plus rapide, mais elle requiert le plus de mémoire d'imprimante.UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 393 Impression • Envoyer par série Télécharge les polices et les ressources avant l'impression de la première page les utilisant, puis les supprime lorsqu'elles ne sont plus nécessaires. Cette option requiert moins de mémoire d'imprimante. Néanmoins, si un processeur PostScript modifie ultérieurement l'ordre des pages dans le flux de travail, il est possible que le téléchargement des polices ne soit pas ordonné correctement et qu'il manque donc des polices. Cette option ne fonctionne pas avec certaines imprimantes. • Envoyer pour chaque page Télécharge toutes les polices et les ressources pour une page donnée avant son impression, puis les supprime une fois la page imprimée. Cette option est celle qui requiert le moins de mémoire d'imprimante. Langue Spécifie le niveau PostScript pour la génération des pages. Choisissez le niveau PostScript adapté à votre imprimante. Télécharger les polices asiatiques Permet d'imprimer les documents qui utilisent des polices asiatiques non installées sur l'imprimante ou non incorporées dans le fichier PDF. Les polices asiatiques doivent être présentes sur le système. Convertir les polices TrueType en Type 1 Convertit les polices TrueType en polices PostScript pour le fichier PostScript. Certains périphériques de sortie PostScript de version ancienne imposent cette conversion. Transmettre CIDFontType2 comme CIDFontType2 (PS versions 2015 et ultérieures) Conserve les indications dans la police d'origine lors de l'impression. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, les polices CIDFontType2 sont converties en polices CIDFontType0, compatibles avec davantage d'imprimantes. Cette option est disponible sur les périphériques de sortie PostScript niveaux 2 (PostScript versions 2015 et ultérieures) et 3. Bitmap Imprime les pages sous forme d'images bitmap. Sélectionnez cette option si l'impression normale ne produit pas les résultats attendus, puis spécifiez une résolution. Cette option est uniquement disponible avec les imprimantes PostScript. Téléchargement de polices asiatiques sur une imprimante Dans la boîte de dialogue Configuration avancée de l'impression, activez l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques si vous souhaitez imprimer un document PDF contenant des polices asiatiques qui ne sont ni installées sur l'imprimante, ni incorporées dans le document. Les polices incorporées sont téléchargées, que cette option soit activée ou non. Cette option est compatible avec les imprimantes PostScript de niveau 2 ou supérieur. Pour pouvoir télécharger les polices asiatiques sur une imprimante, assurez-vous de les avoir téléchargées au préalable sur votre ordinateur à l'aide de l'option Personnalisée ou Complète pendant l'installation d'Acrobat. Si l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques n'est pas sélectionnée, le document PDF n'est imprimé correctement que si les polices référencées sont installées sur l'imprimante. Si des polices similaires sont installées sur l'imprimante, elles leur sont substituées. Si aucune police adaptée n'est installée sur l'imprimante, le texte est affiché en Courier. Si l'option Télécharger les polices asiatiques ne produit pas le résultat escompté, imprimez le document PDF sous forme d'image bitmap. Impression d'impression prend souvent plus de temps que l'impression par la méthode de substitution des polices. Remarque : Il arrive qu'une police ne puisse pas être téléchargée sur une imprimante, soit parce qu'elle a été convertie en image bitmap, soit parce que l'incorporation de cette police dans le document est restreinte. Dans les deux cas, une autre police lui est substituée ; la sortie imprimée risque de ne pas être fidèle au document affiché à l'écran.394 Chapitre 16 : Raccourcis clavier Cette section dresse la liste des raccourcis courants de navigation dans un document. Raccourcis clavier Touches permettant de sélectionner des outils Pour activer les raccourcis à touche unique, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences, et sous Générales, cochez la case Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils. Touches de commentaire Pour activer les raccourcis à touche unique, cochez la case Utiliser des touches uniques pour accéder aux outils dans les préférences générales. Outil Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Outil Main T T Sélection temporaire de l'outil Main Barre d'espacement Barre d'espacement Outil de sélection V V Outil Instantané G G Outil Zoom de sélection Z Z Parcours des outils de zoom : Zoom de sélection, Zoom dynamique, Loupe Maj+Z Maj+Z Sélection temporaire de l'outil Zoom dynamique (lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est activé) Maj Maj Zoom arrière temporaire (lorsque l'outil Zoom de sélection est activé) Ctrl Option Sélectionne temporairement l’outil Zoom avant Ctrl+Barre d’espacement Espace + Commande Objet R R Données d'objet O O Article A A Outil Recadrer C C Lien L L Outil Retouche de texte T T Mesures B BUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 395 Raccourcis clavier Touches de navigation dans un document PDF Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Note S S Modifications de texte E E Tampon K K Outil de mise en surbrillance actif U U Parcours des outils de mise en surbrillance : Texte surligné, Texte souligné, Texte barré Maj+U (Windows uniquement) Maj+U Outil Flèche D D Parcours des outils d'annotation de dessin : Flèche, Droite, Rectangle, Ellipse, Polyligne, Polygone, Crayon, Gomme Maj+D (Windows uniquement) Maj+D Zone de texte X X Fichier joint comme commentaire J J Parcours des outils de pièce jointe : Fichier joint, Enregistrer le commentaire audio Maj+J Maj+J Activation du commentaire Tab Tab Activation du commentaire suivant Maj+Tab Maj+Tab Ouverture de la note contextuelle associée au commentaire actif Entrée Renvoi Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Ecran précédent Page précédente ou Maj+Entrée Page précédente ou Maj+Retour Ecran suivant Page suivante ou Entrée Page suivante ou Retour Première page Origine ou Maj+Ctrl+Pg. préc ou Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Haut Origine ou Maj+Commande+touche fléchée Haut Dernière page Fin ou Maj+Ctrl+Pg. suiv ou Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Bas Fin ou Maj+Commande+touche fléchée Bas Page précédente Touche fléchée Gauche ou Ctrl+Pg. préc Touche fléchée Gauche ou Commande+Pg. préc Page suivante Touche fléchée Droite ou Ctrl+Pg. suiv Touche fléchée Droite ou Commande+Pg. suiv Document précédent Ctrl + F6 (UNIX) Commande+F6 Document suivant Maj + Ctrl + F6 (UNIX) Maj+Commande+F6 Défilement vers le haut Touche fléchée Haut Touche fléchée haut Défilement vers le bas Touche fléchée Bas Touche fléchée BasUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 396 Raccourcis clavier Touches de navigation générale Défilement (outil Main activé) Barre d'espacement Barre d'espacement Zoom avant Ctrl+signe égal Commande+signe égal Zoom arrière Ctrl+tiret Commande+tiret Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Activation des menus (Windows ou UNIX) ; agrandir d'abord la commande de menu (UNIX) F10 Contrôle+F2 Activation de la barre d'outils dans le navigateur Web et de l'application Maj+F8 Maj+F8 Passage au document ouvert suivant (panneau de visualisation activé) Ctrl+F6 Commande+F6 Passage au document ouvert précédent (panneau de visualisation activé) Ctrl+Maj+F6 Commande+Maj+F6 Fermeture du document actif Ctrl+F4 Commande+F4 Fermeture de tous les documents actifs Non disponible Commande+Option+W Activation du commentaire, du lien ou du champ de formulaire suivant dans le panneau de visualisation Tab Tab Activation du panneau de visualisation F5 F5 Activation du commentaire, du lien ou du champ de formulaire précédent dans le panneau de visualisation Maj+Tab Maj+Tab Activation de l'outil, de l'élément (une séquence vidéo ou un signet, par exemple) ou de la commande sélectionné(e) Barre d'espacement ou Entrée Barre d'espacement ou Retour Ouverture d'un menu contextuel Maj+F10 Control+clic Fermeture d'un menu contextuel F10 Echap Retour à l'outil Main ou l'outil Sélection Echap Echap Activation de l'onglet suivant dans une boîte de dialogue à onglets Ctrl+Tab Non disponible Passage au résultat de la recherche suivant et mise en surbrillance dans le document F3 F3 Recherche dans le document précédent (plusieurs fichiers pris en compte dans les résultats de la recherche) Alt + Maj + touche fléchée Gauche (Windows uniquement) Commande+Maj+touche fléchée Gauche Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OSUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 397 Raccourcis clavier Touches des panneaux de navigation Touches de navigation dans la fenêtre d’aide Recherche dans le document suivant (plusieurs fichiers pris en compte dans les résultats de la recherche) Alt+Maj+touche fléchée Droite (Windows uniquement) Commande+Maj+touche fléchée Droite Sélection de texte (outil de sélection activé) Maj+touches fléchées Maj+touches fléchées Sélection du mot suivant ou désélection du mot précédent (outil de sélection activé) Maj+Ctrl+touche fléchée Droite ou Gauche Non disponible Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OS Ouverture et activation du navigateur Ctrl+Maj+F5 Commande+Maj+F5 Activation des différents éléments du document, de la barre des messages et des panneaux de navigation F6 F6 Activation du panneau ou du volet précédent Maj+F6 Maj+F6 Parcours des éléments dans le panneau de navigation actif Tab Tab Passage au panneau de navigation précédent ou suivant et ouverture (bouton activé) Touche fléchée Haut ou Bas Touche fléchée Haut ou Bas Passage au panneau de navigation suivant et activation (zone quelconque du navigateur activée) Ctrl+Tab Non disponible Développement du signet actif (panneau Signets activé) Touche fléchée Droite ou Maj+signe plus Touche fléchée Droite ou Maj+signe plus Réduction du signet actif (panneau Signets activé) Touche fléchée Gauche ou signe moins Touche fléchée Gauche ou signe moins Développement de tous les signets Maj+* Maj+* Réduction du signet sélectionné Barre oblique (/) Barre oblique (/) Activation de l'élément suivant dans un panneau de navigation Touche fléchée Bas Touche fléchée Bas Activation de l'élément précédent dans un panneau de navigation Touche fléchée haut Touche fléchée Haut Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS Ouverture de la fenêtre d'aide F1 F1 ou Commande+? Fermeture de la fenêtre d'aide Ctrl+W (Windows uniquement) ou Alt+F4 Commande + W Retour à la rubrique précédemment ouverte Alt + Flèche Gauche Commande + Flèche gauche Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Action sous Mac OSUTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 398 Raccourcis clavier Touches d'accessibilité Accès à la rubrique suivante Alt + Flèche Droite Commande + Flèche droite Accès à la fenêtre suivante Ctrl+Tab Voir l'aide de votre navigateur par défaut Accéder à la fenêtre précédente Maj+Ctrl+Tab Voir l'aide de votre navigateur par défaut Activer le lien suivant dans un panneau Tab Non disponible Activer le lien précédent dans un panneau Maj+Tab Non disponible Activation d'un lien en surbrillance Entrée Non disponible Impression d'une rubrique d'aide Ctrl+P Commande+P Résultat Action sous Windows Raccourci Mac OS Outil Vérification rapide Maj+Ctrl+6 Maj+Commande+6 Modification des paramètres de lecture du document actif Maj+Ctrl+5 Maj+Commande+5 Redistribution d'un document PDF balisé et retour à l'affichage non redistribué Ctrl+4 Commande+4 Activation et désactivation de la fonction Lecture audio Maj+Ctrl+Y Maj+Commande+Y Lecture à haute voix de la page active uniquement Maj+Ctrl+V Maj+Commande+V Lecture à haute voix de la section comprise entre la page active et la fin du document Maj+Ctrl+B Maj+Commande+B Pause de la lecture à haute voix Maj+Ctrl+C Maj+Commande+C Arrêt de la lecture à haute voix Maj+Ctrl+E Maj+Commande+E Résultat Action sous Windows/UNIX Raccourci Mac OS399 Index Nombres 3D, barre d'outils 342 3D, contenu affichage 344, 345, 348, 354 arborescence du modèle 346 commentaires 357 coupe 349 création de signets de vues 355 interaction 342 JavaScript 359 mesure 351 Préférences de contenu 3D 356 vue définie 354 A abonnement à des services Internet 160 accès à un outil par touche unique 37 Accès Internet avertissements de sécurité 231 blocage 231 accès rapide, touche unique 286 accessibilité balises 280 création d'un PDF 290 défilement automatique 286 éléments 279 formulaire 195 langue 280, 294 Lecture audio 288 ordre de lecture 280 page Web 292 polices 279 préférences 283 protection 280, 295 raccourcis clavier 286 signet 280 texte disponible pour la recherche 279 vérification 281 vérification rapide 281 Acrobat Connect 148 Acrobat Distiller à propos 94 dénomination des fichiers 96 paramètres 96, 97, 99 Acrobat Self-Sign Security. Voir protection par certificat par défaut Acrobat. Voir Adobe Acrobat Acrobat.com à propos 146 partage de fichiers 146 partage de porte-documents PDF 118 préférences 149 téléchargement de documents 146 utilisation pour la diffusion de formulaires 151 utilisation pour les révisions partagées 151 action ajout à un clip multimédia 309 ajout à un lien 307 ajout à une page 308 ouverture 308 ouverture et fermeture de page 308 souris 216 type 308 action de formulaire réinitialisation 309 action de page, ouverture et fermeture 308 action liée à la souris à propos 216 activation du logiciel 1 Activer la prise en charge Unicode, option 258 Activer les options de langue de droite à gauche, option 59 Adobe Acrobat comparaison des versions 107 compatibilité avec des versions antérieures 137 compatibilité de version 87, 100, 137 Adobe Bridge paramètres de couleur Creative Suite 362, 364 Adobe Digital Editions 58 Adobe Exchange 4 Adobe Photoshop rééchantillonnage et compression d'images 109 Adobe Policy Server (APS) 249 affichage action sur un champ 309 arborescence du modèle 346 barre d'outils 26 barre des propriétés 28 commentaire 178 commentaires d'un contenu 3D 357 contenu 3D 344, 345, 354 facteur de zoom 42 fichier PDF obtenu 79 image à basse résolution 140 image de grande taille 37 pièce jointe 35 showpage 106 signets 32 table et feuille de calcul 47 vignettes 33 zones graphique, de rognage et de fond perdu 41 affichage d'une page, définition 319 Affichage Web rapide 72 Afficher l'écran d'introduction, option 37 Afficher la liste des pages liées, commande 92 Afficher la version signée, commande 277 Afficher les documents dans la barre de tâches 37 agrandissement de la vue Voir aussi zoom agrandisseur d'écran. Voir accessibilité aide raccourcis clavier 397 Aide communautaire 2 Ajouter des balises à un document, commande 294 Alignement d'objets, repères 49 Aligner sur la grille, commande 48 analyse des modèles 3D. Voir mesures Ancrage des barres d'outils 26 angle, mesure 351 annotation d'un document affichage 167 association d'annotations 173 icône 167 Annotation. Voir annotation d'un document aperçu substitutions de polices 112 Aperçu du document (mode) signature d'un document 270 appareil de poche, préparation des PDF 287UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 400 Index applications Microsoft conversion de fichiers au format PDF 77 création d'un fichier PDF 86 paramètres PDF pour les fichiers Office 79 Appliquer les priorités d'impression, option 387 apposition d'une signature PDF 269 approbation d'un document PDF flux de tâches d'approbation 186 lancement d'un flux de tâches d'approbation 186 approbation d'un fichier PDF signature 269 approbation de document PDF à propos 185 arabe, langue 59 Arborescence du modèle aperçu 346 modèle 3D et 342 archive de messagerie, création d'un portedocuments PDF 83 arrière-plan dans les modèles 3D 345 ajout 123 suppression 125 téléchargement 36 Article 311 article à propos 311 définition des propriétés 313 lecture 309 modification 312 navigation 37 articles, défilement 37 asiatique, texte ajout d'un commentaire 174 aspect d'une signature manuscrite, création 265 Assistant de configuration de l'accessibilité 283 atteindre une page 308 Atteindre, action 308 Atteindre, destination 305 Attribuer des profils, commande 377 Attribuer un profil, commande 376 attribut de texte, modification 315 auteur critère de recherche 336 nom sur le commentaire 165 Autoriser la définition de l'état des calques selon les informations utilisateur, option 37 Avancés, paramètres Adobe PDF 105 B balise à propos 280 accessibilité 280 création d'un PDF 290 dans un fichier PDF combiné 292 insertion dans un document PDF 294 page Web 292 recherche 332 Barre contextuelle, réponse à un commentaire 179 barre d'accroche, sur les barres d'outils 25 barre d'outils Formulaires 195 Barre d'outils d'analyse 328 Barre d'outils de zoom 37 Barre d'outils Navigation 31 Barre d'outils Navigation de pages 31 barre d'outils PDF 77 barre de message du document 23 dans un formulaire 192 options de révision 156 Barre des propriétés 28 Barre des propriétés, commande 28 barres d'outils 3D 342 affichage 26 affichage et masquage 26 affichage et masquage des libellés 28 ancrage 25, 26 déplacement 26 restauration de la configuration par défaut 27 sélection d'un bouton 23 suppression 26 tâches 25 verrouillage 27 verrouillage et déverrouillage 27 barres de défilement 31 bibliorom 58 Bicubique, sous-échantillonnage 102 Bitmap, option 393 bouton à propos 216 affichage et masquage 28 effet contextuel 220 Envoyer 221 importation de données 223 libellé 28, 218 modification 218 réinitialisation du formulaire 222 bouton d’envoi par messagerie, création 221 Bouton Dernière page 32 Bouton Pleine largeur 42 Bouton Première page 32 bouton radio, dans un formulaire 193 boutons mesure 49 Bridge. Voir Adobe Bridge C calque à propos 325 affichage 325 ajout de contenu 327 impression 325 navigation 326 recherche 332 réorganisation 326 verrouillage 325 Calques, commande 387 capture Web conversion de pages Web au format PDF 89 options d'affichage 94 captures d'écran, conversion au format PDF 64, 65 carré création 172 suppression 173 Carré, outil. Voir Rectangle, outil carte à puce, signature 259 case à cocher, comme élément de formulaire 192 CCITT (Comité de consultation international téléphonique et télégraphique), compression 111 CCITT, filtres de compression 110 cercle création 172 suppression 173 Cercle, outil. Voir Ellipse, outil certificat authentification 246 création 258 niveaux d'approbation 247UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 401 Index partage 243 serveur de répertoires 248 certificat de tampon temporel validation 276 certification document 271 liste de vérification 271 certificats protection 231 téléchargement automatique 231 CGI application 221 valeurs d'exportation 223 champ effacement des données de formulaire 227 remplissage d'un formulaire 227 champ de formulaire voir aussi formulaire, champ de signature accessibilité 195 aspect 206 bouton 216, 218, 222 création à l'aide des outils de formulaire d'Acrobat 195 déplacement manuel 199 effet contextuel 220 lecture à haute voix 289 mesure d'une distance 49 dans les signatures numériques 269 options de calcul 211 ordre de tabulation 297 positionnement à l'aide des grilles 196 propriétés 216 protection 240 règle 49 valeurs d'exportation 223 validation 214 champ de texte à propos des éléments de formulaire 193 modification 208, 209 options de calcul 211 chargement de métadonnées XMP 323 chiffrement création d'une identification numérique 258 document 238 fichier, stratégie de protection 250 chiffrement, suppression 242 chinois Voir aussi langues asiatiques chinois, texte ajout d'un commentaire 174 Chinois, traditionnel et simplifié 59 clip multimédia ajout d'une action 309 lecture 340 lecture via un bouton 216 CMJN espace colorimétrique, conversion des images 104 profil de couleur 104 collaboration en direct, à propos 147 collaboration en temps réel 146 collage commentaire sous forme de texte 174 image 144 tableau 144 texte 143 Collage spécial, commande 121 collection, organisation des fichiers PDF 53 Colonne, sélection 143 Colorimétrie absolue 104 Colorimétrie relative 104 combinaison fichiers PDF dotés de calques 327 Combiner des fichiers, bouton 57 Combiner, commande 119 commande de menu, exécution de l'action 308 Commande Utiliser ces propriétés par défaut 216 commandes grisées, protection 232 commentaire affichage 177 affichage et masquage 181 affichage verrouillé 167 aspect 166 association de commentaires 173 comparaison zone de texte/note 174 développement dans la liste des commentaires 178 document PDF 155 droite de liaison 165 enregistrement d'une copie d'archive 160 envoi dans un message électronique 157 exportation 183 filtrage 178 importation 183 impression 165, 180, 384 indication de modifications de texte 168 dans modèles 3D 357 navigation 178 note 167 outils 163 ouverture 167 police et corps de police 165 préférences 165 publication pour d'autres réviseurs 157 raccourcis clavier 395 recherche 181, 332, 336 résumé et impression 180 suivi à l'aide de coches 180 tri 178 vérification 157 vérification orthographique 182 Commentaire DSC, conservation 106 commentaire en ligne configuration du serveur 152 préférences 152 commentaire sous forme de note à propos 167 ajout à une annotation 169 impression 180 commentaires à partir de mesures 3D 358 Commentaires et annotations, outils 163 comparaison versions de documents signés 277 compatibilité entre versions 87, 100 paramètres 87, 100 versions antérieures d'Acrobat 137 compatibilité de version 87, 100 compensation du point noir 381 compression à propos 109 avec Adobe Photoshop 109 dessin au trait 102 fichiers dans Acrobat Distiller 109 image 140 par type d'image dans un fichier 109 compression avec ou sans perte de données 110 Compression JPEG 110 Configuration de l'impression, commande (Windows) 384 Connexion, configuration de la vitesse 36 conseils relatifs à la numérisation 70 conservation commentaires OPI 106 fonctions de transfert 105UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 402 Index informations EPS 106 informations sur le document 107 informations sur les trames de demiteintes 105 paramètres de densité du noir 105 paramètres de surimpression 106 paramètres UCR 105 sémantique copypage Niveau 2 106 Contenu, commande 42 contenu, protection 240 conversion Voir aussi exportation fichiers image 64 fichiers Microsoft Office 77 images des pages Web 94 conversion de pages Web à propos 89 conservation de la structure 93 glisser-déposer 93 options d'arrière-plan 94 retour à la ligne du texte 94 conversion des pages Web paramètres d'affichage des pages HTML 94 Convertir en profil, commande 377 coordonnées du curseur 52 copie Voir aussi copie et collage fichier dans le Presse-papiers, OLE 121 interdite 236 page à l'aide de la vignette 131 restriction à l'aide de la protection par certificat par défaut 242 URL d'un lien Web 92 Copier l'adresse du lien, commande 92 copier-coller exportation d'une image PDF 142 image du Presse-papiers 144 interdiction 143 outil Instantané 145 sélection d'une image 144 sélection de texte 143 substitution de police 143 copypage, Opérateur PostScript 106 coréen Voir aussi langues asiatiques coréen, texte ajout d'un commentaire 174 couleur voir aussi séparation des couleurs affichage en ligne 104 mappage des espaces colorimétriques 104 options 103 prévention des changements dans le texte 104 quadrillage 49 couleur de surbrillance, préférences 190 couleur dépendante du périphérique 103 Couleur, rééchantillonnage et compression d'images 102 couleurs Voir aussi gestion des couleurs, modèle de couleur couleurs quadrichromiques prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 366 coupe, contenu 3D 349 création arrière-plan et filigrane 123, 126 en-tête et pied de page 121 fichier EPS 138 fichier HTML 139 fichier JPEG 138 fichier PNG 140 fichier PostScript 138 fichier RTF ou Word 141 fichier TIFF 141 PDF accessible 290 PDF balisé 290 signet de page Web 310 création d'un document PDF à partir d'un document Microsoft Office 81 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner 62 à partir du contenu du Presse-papiers 64 à partir d'une capture d'écran 64, 65 fichier compatible PDF/X 107 par glisser-déposer 64 imprimante Adobe PDF 73 dans Internet Explorer 90 à partir d'applications Microsoft 77 par numérisation 66 utilisation d'Acrobat Distiller 94 utilisation de la commande d'impression 73 à partir de page Web 89 création de fichiers PDF à partir de plusieurs fichiers 57 Créer un PDF à partir d'un scanner, commande 66 Créer un PDF à partir du Presse-papiers, commande 64 D damier affichage derrière un objet transparent 41 date, critère de recherche 336 déclencheur, action 309 Déficiences. Voir accessibilité défilement automatique 33, 286 disposition par défaut 37 défilement automatique à propos 286 définition de la visibilité du calque, action 309 dégradés, présence de lignes 101 demi-teintes conservation des informations 105 Densité du noir 105 déplacement page à l'aide de la vignette 131 dessin au trait compression 102 définition 109 destination à propos 304 calque PDF 327 création 305 déplacement 305 liste 304 suppression 305 Détramage, options 69 Déverrouillage des barres d'outils 27 diaporama, configuration 318 diaporama. Voir plein écran, affichage dictionnaire ajout de mots 182 exclusion d'un mot 182 didacticiel collaboration en direct 10 création de PDF 6 porte-documents PDF 16 prévu pour la création de formulaires 13 révision partagée 9 signature numérique 17 Didacticiel sur la création d'un fichier PDF 6 dispositif de suivi gestion des révisions 159 préférences 162 Distance, outil à propos 49 modèle 3D 351UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 403 Index Distiller. Voir Acrobat Distiller document certifié, dans le contenu multimédia 341 document chiffré création 238 ouverture 232 recherche 334 suppression du chiffrement 243, 250 document Microsoft Office, conversion en fichier PDF 62 Document protégé 238 Documents PDF géographiques 328 données cartographiques copie dans le Presse-papiers 330 dans fichiers PDF 328 exportation 331 Données d'objet 324 données du lieu copie dans le Presse-papiers 330 exportation 331 dossier recherche de polices 112 double octet, polices 111 doubles moniteurs, mode plein écran 36 droite à gauche, options de langue 59 E Echantillonnage 102 éclairage, modèle 3D 345 éditeur PDF 65 préférences 66 prévention des modifications 65 effets spéciaux bouton 216 élément contextuel bouton 220 éléments de menu grisés, protection 232 ellipse création 172 suppression 173 Emplacements favoris, organisation de fichiers PDF 56 encre signature à propos 269 utilisation des tablettes graphiques 268 enregistrement Voir aussi exportation et enregistrement, formats automatique 38 comme document certifié 271 fichier PDF 135 format texte accessible 141 image au format image 142 métadonnées 323 modifications 135 optimisation pour l'affichage rapide des pages Web 72 paramètres PDF dans le fichier 106 enregistrement automatique à propos 136 enregistrement 136 fichier 136 préférences 38 enregistrement du logiciel 1 enregistrement, format EPS 138 HTML 139 JPEG, JPEG2000 138 PNG 140 PostScript 138 RTF 141 texte 139 TIFF 141 Word 141 XML 139 Enregistrer sous, changement du nom du document 135 en-tête ajout 121 ajout lors de la conversion d'une page Web 93 modification 123 suppression 123 Entrées GPTS 331 Entrelacement dans les fichiers PNG 140 enveloppe, sécurisée pour l'envoi de fichier 252 envoi action sur un formulaire 309 commentaires 156 Envoyer et collaborer en direct, commande 147 Epaisseur de contour, constante 48 Epilogue, fichier 106 épreuvage à l’écran à propos 369 dans Photoshop, Illustrator et InDesign 370 EPS, fichier 107 conversion au format PDF 63 espace colorimétrique conversion 104 définition et étalonnage 104 Espace colorimétrique CalRVB 104 espace colorimétrique RVB Adobe 379 espace colorimétrique sRVB 368, 379 espace de travail couleurs 378, 379 modèle de couleur 376 état de la signature 273 état de révision 180 état, suivi de la conversion des fichiers 96 Exchange 4 exclusion de mot, vérification orthographique 182 exécution d'un script JavaScript, action 309 exportation Voir aussi enregistrement image PDF 142 PDF vers HTML, XML 139 PDF vers JPEG et JPEG2000 138 PDF vers PNG 140 PDF vers PostScript ou EPS 138 PDF vers RTF ou Word 141 PDF vers texte 141 PDF vers TIFF 141 valeurs de formulaire 223 Exporter, bouton 137 Extraction de pages 129 extras 4 F Faire défiler automatiquement commande 33 fenêtre fractionnement 47 fractionnement d'une feuille de calcul 47 paramètres des préférences 165 plusieurs 47 Fenêtre de l'organiseur 52 Fenêtre fractionnée 47 feuille de calcul, affichage fractionné 47 feuilles de style en cascade 89 fichier voir aussi PDF ajout à des porte-documents PDF 117 combinaison de PDF dotés de calques 327 combinaison en fichier PDF fusionné 119 combinaison en porte-documents PDF 114UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 404 Index extraction à partir d'un porte-documents PDF 118 joindre à un document 176 modification dans un porte-documents PDF 117 suppression dans un porte-documents PDF 117 Fichier joint comme commentaire, outil 176 fichier PDF collaboration en ligne 147 fichier PDF compatible PDF/SigQ 270 fichier PostScript création avec la commande Imprimer 96, 386 fichier texte conversion au format PDF 64 fichiers géographiques PDF mesure 330 fichiers liés, prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 366 fichiers PDF en coréen 59 fichiers PDF en japonais 59 Fichiers PDF en langues asiatiques 59 filigrane accessibilité 295 ajout 126 suppression 128 film Flash. Voir clip multimédia Filtrage de commentaires 178 flèche création 172 suppression 173 Flou intérieur, option 69 fonctions de transfert 105 Fonctions de versions PDF 107 Fond perdu, zone 41, 128 fonds perdus format de page et 76 Format d’épreuve, commande 370 format de fichier Voir aussi formats individuels, exportation, et enregistrement format de page différence avec format de papier 76 format de papier différence avec format de page 76 formats multimédia 340 formulaire à propos des types 189 Voir aussi champ de formulaire accessibilité 195 actions et boutons d'envoi 221 actions et boutons d'importation de données 223 bouton de réinitialisation 222 champ de tabulation 297 couleur de surbrillance 190 création à l'aide des outils de formulaire d'Acrobat 195 didacticiel prévu pour la création 13 effacement des données 227 méthodes de diffusion 151 positionnement des champs à l'aide des grilles 196 préférences 190 recherche 332 recueil de données sur le Web 221 remplissage 227 remplissage automatique 190, 229 validation 214 vérification orthographique 182 Web 221 formulaire, action affichage d'un champ 309 envoi 309 formulaires bouton d’envoi par messagerie 221 impression 384 options de calcul 211 utilisation d’un script JavaScript 195 Formulaires barre d'outils 195 formulaires destinés au Web 221 fractionnement de fichiers PDF 130 G gamme de couleurs 360 GeoTiff calque de transparence 330 gestion d'un index incorporé 339 gestion des couleurs à propos 360, 361, 362 Voir aussi profils colorimétriques, paramètres de couleur création d’un environnement de visualisation 362 épreuvage à l’écran des couleurs 369, 370 fichiers image 103 pour les images en ligne 368, 369 pour les PDF 369 prise en compte pour l’importation d’images 366, 367 prise en compte pour l’impression de documents 371 prise en compte pour les couleurs quadrichromiques et les tons directs 366 référence des paramètres de couleur 378 réglages 363 synchronisation des paramètres de couleur 364 gestion des couleurs, options de conversion JPEG 140 PNG 140 TIFF 141 Gestionnaire des approbations 231 Graphique, zone 41, 128 grille à propos de 48 accrochage 48 affichage et masquage 48 changement d'unité 48 positionnement des champs de formulaire 196 H handicap. Voir accessibilité hébreu, langue 59 Historique 38 Historique (dans l'organiseur) suppression 57 Historique (dans l'organiseur) localisation d'un fichier PDF 53 HTML, fichier conversion au format PDF 64, 89 I ICC (International Color Consortium) 362 ID d'itinérance, signature d'un document PDF 259 identification numérique carte à puce 259 certificat 243 création 258 définition 257 définition d'un mot de passe 260 définition du paramètre par défaut 259 délai d'expiration 260 ID d'itinérance 259 jeton matériel 259 protection 261 que faire en cas de perte ou de vol 261 suppression 260UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 405 Index identité approuvée distribution d'un document chiffré 241 vérification 243 identités approuvées ajout d'un contact 245 image affichage de grandes images 37 conversion au format PDF 64 copier-coller 144 exportation 142 lissage des contours inégaux 102 masquage 37 recherche de métadonnées 332 sous-échantillonnage et compression 109 tampon 170 téléchargement à partir du Web 89 image en tons continus, compression 110 image PDF, exportation vers un autre format 142 Image vectorielle 109 image, compression voir aussi compression, options de compression configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 102 images conversion de pages Web au format PDF 94 conversion en CalRVB 104 paramètres de conversion 102 rééchantillonnage et compression 101 résultats inattendus pour les images monochromes 101 images en niveaux de gris profils d'espaces colorimétriques 104 rééchantillonnage et compression 102 images Web prévisualisation prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 368, 369 importation action sur les données d'un formulaire 308 bouton de données 223 données de formulaire 223 impression voir aussi paramètres d'impression commentaire 165, 180 contenu des signets 391 document contenant des calques 387 documents PDF 384 et protection renforcée 232 impression silencieuse 231 langues asiatiques 59 livret 388 non autorisée, protection 236, 242 options d'impression générales 384 plusieurs pages par feuille 385 porte-documents PDF 390 préférences de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 74 priorités de calque 387 prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 371 propriétés de l'imprimante Adobe PDF 75 zone sur une page 386 impression, options dépendantes du périphérique 392 imprimante Adobe PDF configuration des propriétés 75 création d'un document PDF 73 création d'un format de page personnalisé 76 préférences d'impression 74 Imprimante en braille, création de texte 287 imprimante non PostScript, et papier 76 imprimantes de bureau, profils colorimétriques 372 Imprimer dans un fichier, commande (Windows) 386 incorporation police à l'aide de l'outil Retouche de texte 316 polices, seuil 103 recherche de polices dans un dossier 112 toutes les polices 102 vignettes 100 incorporation d'un index 339 index, incorporé 339 Informations PDF, propriétés du document 321 Informations sur la page, commande de conversion de pages Web 310 Informations sur un document 321 Insérer des pages, commande 120, 121 Insérer le texte à l'emplacement du curseur, outil 169 insertion texte, commentaire de modifications de texte 168 Insertion d'un objet, commande 121 installation Adobe Digital Editions 58 installation des polices 2 Instantané, outil copie de texte et d'images 145 intégrité du document, vérification 270 interactivité ajout de boutons 216 Internet accès aux contenus multimédia 341 paramètres 36 paramètres pour la révision 152 Internet Explorer conversion de pages Web 90 ouverture d'un fichier PDF 31 interpolation 102 J japonais Voir aussi langues asiatiques japonais, texte ajout d'un commentaire 174 JavaScript action d'exécution d'un script JavaScript 309 avec contenu 3D 359 formulaire 195 prise en charge de Web Capture 89 jeton matériel, signature 259 jeu partiel de polices modification de texte 316 spécification d'un seuil 103 joboptions, emplacement par défaut des fichiers 100 joindre fichier à un document PDF 176 son 175 Joindre pour une révision par messagerie électronique, commande 154 JPEG 2000 calque de transparence 330 JPEG, image critère de recherche 336 L lancement d'une révision par messagerie 154 langue accessibilité 280 changement dans une vidéo 340 langues de droite à gauche 59 prise en charge 59UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 406 Index langues asiatiques conversion au format PDF (Windows) 59 conversion de pages Web au format PDF 89 impression sous forme d'images bitmap 59 incorporation 59 versions longueur seulement 112 langues non anglo-saxonnes prise en charge 59 lecteur d'écran définition des préférences 283 Voir accessibilité lecteur Flash 340 lecteur intégré Windows 340 Lecteur Windows Media 340 Lecteur, fichiers multimédia 340 Lecture audio 288 lecture d'article 37, 309 Libellé, affichage et masquage 28 libellés de la barre d'outils 28 Lien 302 lien ajout d'une action 307 création 302 modification 302, 303 suppression 303 utilisation 301 vue en 3D 354 lien Web, ouverture dans un nouveau document PDF 91, 92 liens soulignement 94 lieux géographiques, dans les fichiers PDF 328 ligne création 172 suppression 173 Lisez-moi, fichier 2 Liste de diffusion, modification 243 liste déroulante à propos des éléments de formulaire 192 formatage 212 options de calcul 211 LiveCycle Designer, création d'un fichier PDF 294 livret, impression 388 logiciel activation 1 enregistrement 1 téléchargements 4 Lotus Notes, affichage de PDFMaker 77 M Machine à écrire 315 Macromedia Breeze. Voir Acrobat ConnectNow Main, outil déplacement au sein des pages 45 sélection de texte 37 sélection temporaire 23 touche Bas 37 masquage arborescence du modèle 346 barre d'outils 26 barre des propriétés 28 commentaire 178 pièces d'un modèle 3D 348 signets 32 vignettes 33 menus, contextuels 24 message électronique ouverture de fichiers PDF 31 messagerie conversion au format PDF 62, 82 messagerie électronique envoi de commentaires 157 révision 152 mesure dimensions du modèle 3D 351 distance 329 outils géographiques 328 préférences de mesures géographiques 330 préférences pour un modèle 3D 352 mesures grilles 48 mesures 3D conversion en commentaires 358 mesures de distance 329 métadonnées affichage 322 chargement d'un fichier XMP 323 création de propriétés de document 322 critère de recherche 336 Mettre la page suivante en antémémoire, option 37 Microsoft Office affichage de PDFMaker 77 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'Excel 81 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un fichier Outlook 82 création d'un fichier PDF à partir de Word ou de PowerPoint 81 Microsoft Word création d'un fichier PDF à partir de fichiers de fusion 85 Microsoft, applications joindre un fichier Excel à un document 176 Visio 324 mise à jour 4 index incorporé 339 logiciel de l'application Adobe 57 mise à l'échelle pages pour la conversion Web 93 mise à l’échelle pages à imprimer 385 Mise en page, commande (Mac OS) 384 mise en page, paramètre 45 mises à jour 4 Mode d'affichage Epaisseurs de trait 48 mode d'ouverture, définition 319 Mode de lecture 35 mode de rendu pour le contenu 3D 344 Mode FIPS 238 Mode plein écran 35, 39 modes de rendu 104, 382 modification article 312 en-tête et pied de page 123 interdite 236 lien 302, 303 texte 313, 314 Modification de la taille d'affichage 42 modification de texte, commentaire ajout d'une note à une annotation 169 suppression 170, 182 modifications perdues, récupération 136 module externe Adobe Store 4 gestion 58 modules externes Adobe Store 4 mot de passe conseils de création 261 définition des droits 238UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 407 Index exigé pour ouvrir un PDF 232 ouverture d'un document 236, 238 restriction de l'accès 23 signature 258 suppression 241 Mot de passe d'accès aux droits 238 Mot de passe d'ouverture 238 Mot de passe utilisateur. Voir mot de passe mot-clé, critère de recherche 336 moteur de recherche communautaire 2 moteur de rendu 356 MP3, fichier. Voir clip multimédia MPEG, fichier. Voir clip multimédia multimédia ajout à des fichiers Word et PowerPoint 81 multimédia (existant) afficher les droits 341 options de lecture 341 N N pages par feuille, impression 385 navigateur affichage et masquage 28 navigateur Web affichage de fichiers PDF 36 ouverture d'un fichier PDF 21, 24, 31 navigateur. Voir Navigateur Web navigation à l'aide des liens 34 article 37 calque 325, 326 raccourcis clavier 395, 396 signets 32 vignettes de page 33, 296 niveau de langage PostScript, compatibilité 139 note 167 Nouvelle fenêtre, commande 47 numérisation compression des images 72 conseils 70 création d'un fichier PDF 66 numérisation de documents 62 Numériser au format PDF, commande 66 numérotation Voir aussi en-tête et pied de page numéros de page logiques 42 page 133 O objet déplacement 318 informations sur la hauteur et la largeur 52 recherche de données 332 rotation 317 sélection 317 OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) 121 opérateurs booléens à propos 336 recherche de texte 336 OPI (Open Prepress Interface) commentaires 106 optimisation à propos 137 amélioration des performances 137 fichiers PDF 72 optimisation de la fréquence d'image 357 options d'optimisation de la numérisation 68 options de compression configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 101 JPEG 140 méthodes 110 PNG 140 TIFF 141 Options de recherche avancées, panneau 336 ordre de lecture à propos 280 accessibilité 280 Ordre de tabulation 297 Ordre des pages, impression de plusieurs pages par feuille 386 orientation mise en page 45 rotation 46 orthographique, projection des modèles 3D 345 Outil Crayon 173 outil de mesure géographique 329 Outil Droite 172 Outil Ellipse 172 Outil Flèche 172 Outil Gomme 173 outil Instantané sélection de la zone d'impression 386 Outil Loupe 44 Outil Polygone 173 Outil Rectangle 172 Outil Texte barré 170 Outil Texte souligné 170 Outil Zoom dynamique 42 outils accès par touche unique 37 navigation 3D 342 sélection 23 outils de commentaire et d'annotation à propos 163 création d'un tampon personnalisé 172 outils de mesure 49 ouverture action 308 document protégé par mot de passe 236 lien Web 91, 92 lien Web dans un navigateur 310 lien Web dans un nouveau document 91, 92 mode plein écran 23, 318, 319 pièce jointe 35 Ouvrir l'organiseur, commande 54 Ouvrir les liens interdocument dans la même fenêtre 37 P page atteindre 308 configuration d'une action 308 déplacement 131 mise en page 45 orientation 45, 129 remplacement 131, 132 renumérotation 133 rotation 129 suppression 131 Page entière, commande 43 page Web affichage d'informations 310 ajout à un document 92 ajout à un fichier PDF 90 ajout d'en-têtes et de pieds de page 93 ajout de toutes les pages liées 92 arrière-plan 94 balises et accessibilité 292 conversion au format Adobe PDF 310 conversion au format PDF 62 conversion au format PDF dans Acrobat 91 conversion dans Internet Explorer 90 conversion des images 94UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 408 Index langues asiatiques, conversion au format PDF 89 paramètres de conversion 93 paramètres de conversion PDF 93 réorganisation d'une page Web convertie 310 retour à la ligne du texte 94 pages affichage 31 logiques 42 mise à l'échelle 385 numérisation 66 Pages hors format, paramètre prédéfini PDF 98 Pages par feuille, option 386 Panneau Articles 37 panneau de navigation ancrage 29 changement d'orientation 29 définition 21, 28 options 30 raccourcis clavier 397 panneau de visualisation, définition 21 panneau flottant 29 Panneau Signets 33 Panoramique et zoom, commande 44 par défaut paramètre de zoom 37 paramètres Adobe PDF 99 avancés 105 options de couleur 103 polices 102 Paramètres Adobe PDF. Voir paramètres Adobe PDF paramètres Adobe PDF ignorer 109 paramètres d'impression avancés 392 options générales 384 PostScript 392 paramètres de conversion affichage 94 fichiers image 102 imprimante Adobe PDF 73 pages Web 93 personnalisation 99 Paramètres de conversion PDF 97 paramètres de conversions paramètres prédéfinis 97 paramètres de couleur Voir aussi gestion des couleurs conversions des couleurs 381 espace de travail 378, 379 modes de rendu 381, 382 paramètres prédéfinis 378 personnalisation 378 pour les applications Adobe 365 règles de gestion des couleurs 379 synchronisation avec d’autres applications 364 paramètres PDF prédéfinis 97 paramètres prédéfinis conversion des fichiers 97 exportation PDF 97 paramètres prédéfinis d’exportation PDF à propos de 97 création 97 parcours de visualisation, retour en arrière 34 partage d'un porte-documents PDF 118 partage de fichiers 146 partage du bureau 148 Participation à une révision par messagerie 155 PDF à partir de pages numérisées 66 à partir de pages Web 89 affichage des informations 321 approbation 269 certification 271 création d'un fichier PDF à partir d'un scanner 66 création. Voir création d'un fichier PDF déplacement 131 enregistrement d’une copie 135 formulaires. Voir formulaire fractionnement 130 impression 392 liste des documents récents 37 métadonnées 322 modification d'un fichier signé 276 navigation 33 ouverture 30 protection 236 PDF avec contenu enrichi, paramètres Adobe PDF 99 PDF, fichiers prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 369 PDF, révision affichage des commentaires 177 ajout de réviseurs 161 annotation du texte pour modification 168 exportation des commentaires 183 importation des commentaires 183 mise à jour de votre profil 162 suivi 180 PDF/A mode d'affichage 34 paramètres prédéfinis 98 PDF/X conformité des fichiers PostScript 107 conversion de fichiers 107 paramètres prédéfinis 98 PDFMaker à propos 77 affichage dans Microsoft Office et Lotus Notes 77 conversion de documents Microsoft Office 62 conversion de fichiers Microsoft Office 77 conversion de pages Web 89 didacticiel 6 Perception 104 performances. Voir optimisation Périmètre, outil 49 périphérique d’entrée, profils 373, 375 périphérique de sortie, profils 372, 373, 375 Permettre au fichier PostScript d'ignorer les paramètres Adobe PDF 109 personnalisation Voir aussi préférences paramètres de conversion Adobe PDF 99 tampon 170 Personnalisées, propriétés du document 321 photographies, compression 110 Photoshop. Voir Adobe Photoshop pièce jointe création 306 fichier source 86 glissement 306 ouverture 35 recherche 307, 332 sécurisation 252 suppression 306 pied de page ajout 121 ajout lors de la conversion d'une page Web 93UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 409 Index modification 123 suppression 123 plein écran, affichage diaporama 318 fermeture 35, 37 lecture d'un document 35 ouverture d'un document 23 Plusieurs fenêtres 47 Plusieurs pages par feuille, option 385 PMI mode de rendu 356 police incorporation avec l'outil Retouche de texte 316 incorporée au fichier PDF 111 Police asiatique, téléchargement 393 Police CID (Type 2), conservation des indications 393 polices Voir aussi langues asiatiques affichage des informations 321 asiatiques, téléchargement 59 commentaire 165 incorporation dans le fichier PDF 112 modification 315 Multiple Master 111 noms PostScript 113 paramètres Adobe PDF 102 propriétés du document 321 recours à un jeu partiel 103, 111 substitution 111, 112 Polices longueur seulement Voir polices asiatiques polygone création 172 suppression 173 Porte-documents PDF barre d'outils 22 ouverture 21 zone de travail 22 porte-documents PDF à propos 114 affichage des informations détaillées sur un fichier 116 ajout de fichiers 117 aperçu des fichiers dans 116 création 117 création à partir d'une archive de messagerie 83 didacticiel 16 envoi par messagerie 118 extraction de fichiers 118 impression 390 modification 117 modification d'un fichier composant 116 modification des fichiers 117 partage 118 suppression de fichiers de 117 tri des fichiers dans 116 porte-documents. Voir porte-documents PDF Poste de travail, recherche d'un fichier PDF 53, 56 PostScript, fichier dénomination 97 dépendant du périphérique 386 dossier de correspondance 106 transfert FTP 97 variation de la compression 109 PostScript, fichiers configuration des paramètres 392 PPD, fichier conversion de fichier 138 préférences accès à la boîte de dialogue 24 Acrobat Distiller 96 Acrobat.com 149 Affichage 37 aspect d'une signature numérique 265 Contenu 3D 356 enregistrement automatique 136 formulaire 190 mesures, données 2D 51 Mesures, modèle 3D 352 ouverture 24 panneau Documents 37 panneau Générales 37 recherche 338 révision 152 Préférences d'affichage 37, 128 préférences de documents 37 Préférences générales 37 présentation configuration 318 préférences 37 prévisualisation couleurs. Voir épreuvage à l’écran Priorités de calque, options d'impression 387 profil ICC Voir aussi profils colorimétriques 373 profils colorimétriques à propos 373 attribution et suppression dans des documents 376 conversion 377 installation 375 messages d’avertissement 379 pour les images importées 366, 367, 368 pour les imprimantes de bureau 372 pour les moniteurs 374, 375 profils de document. Voir profils colorimétriques profils de moniteur 373, 374, 375 profils ICC incorporation aux images 104 personnalisés 104 Programme d'amélioration des produits Adobe 1 Prologue, fichier 106 propriétés imprimante Adobe PDF 75 propriétés de document création de métadonnées 322 objet de données incorporé 323 panneau Description 321 polices 321 protection 321 propriétés de la signature ajout d'un tampon temporel 267 personnalisation à l'aide de valeurs de base 272 Propriétés du calque, commande 387 propriétés du document avancées 321 Informations PDF 321 personnalisées 321 recherche 332 URL de base 322 vue initiale 319 Propriétés du document, boîte de dialogue 319, 321, 322 protection accès limité aux documents PDF 238 accessibilité 280, 295 algorithme de clé RSA 258 avertissements 231 certification d'un document 271 enveloppe 252 impression silencieuse 231 liste de diffusion 243 méthode 236UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 410 Index mode FIPS 238 modification (protection par certificat par défaut) 243 mots de passe 74, 95, 236 pièce jointe 252 présentation des signatures numériques 264 stratégie 58, 250 suppression des restrictions 241 protection par certificat par défaut, chiffrement d'un fichier 241 Protection renforcée emplacements privilégiés 231 protection renforcée avertissements 232 protection, jeton matériel 259 Proximité, recherche 336 Publications numériques 58 Q Qualité de presse, paramètres Adobe PDF 98 Qualité supérieure, paramètre prédéfini PDF 98 QuickTime, fichier. Voir clip multimédia R raccourcis clavier 36, 286 fermeture du mode plein écran 37 raccourcis par touche unique 37 Racine identique, recherche 336 RealOne, fichier. Voir clip multimédia RealPlayer 340 recadrage des pages 128 Récents, liste des documents 37 recherche affichage des résultats 321 booléenne 336 commentaire 181 options de recherche avancées 336 par propriétés du document 336 plusieurs documents 334 préférences 338 Recherche, barre d'outils 332 Rechercher des commentaires, commande 181 rectangle création 172 suppression 173 récupération des modifications perdues 136 redimensionnement agrandissement et réduction 42 commentaire sous forme de note 167 page 42 vignettes 44 redistribution à propos de 287 Redressement, option 69 réduction de la taille du fichier 131, 137 réinitialisation action de formulaire 309 barres d'outils 27 Réinitialiser le formulaire, bouton 222 Relecture, annotations et commentaires 168 remplacement page 131 remplissage automatique à propos 229 préférences 190 rendu en 3D, modes 345 renommer fichier PDF 135 Renumérotation des pages 133 renvoi de commentaires de révision 155 réorganisation des calques 326 repère changement de couleur 49 positionnement des champs de formulaire 196 règle 49 Repère de règle, création 49 résolution affichage des pages 37 configuration dans Acrobat Distiller 101 ressources en ligne 4 restauration barres d'outils 27 fichiers 136 restriction pièce jointe 234 URL 234 restrictions, suppression 242 Résumé des commentaires 180 Rétablir, commande 136 retour à la ligne du texte, conversion de pages Web 94 réunion en ligne, démarrage 148 réunion, initiation 148 révision sélection d'une application de messagerie 152 révision d'un document invitation d'autres réviseurs 161 invitation d'un réviseur 154 affichage de la liste des commentaires 178 préférences 152 réponse à des commentaires 179 révision des commentaires d'un autre réviseur 167 suivi d'une révision 159 révision d'un document PDF utilisation du dispositif de suivi 159 révision de documents ajout ou modification de l'échéance 161 enregistrement d'une copie avec commentaires 160 lancement d'une révision par messagerie 154 lancement d'une révision partagée 153, 161 mettre fin à une révision 161 outils utilisés 163 participation à une révision 155 rejoindre 158 Voir aussi révision gérée révision gérée 149 révision par messagerie à propos 150, 151 participation 155 suivi d'une révision 159 révision par messagerie électronique lancement 154 révision partagée à propos 150 didacticiel 9 initiation 153 méthodes de diffusion 151 participation 155 suivi de documents 159 RLE, compression 110 Rognage, zone 41 Rotation d'une page 129 rotation d'une page changement d'affichage 46 Rotation de pages, commande 46 Rouvrir les documents à la dernière page affichée, option 37 RSA, protection 258 RSS, abonnement 160 RVB, profils d'espace colorimétrique 104UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 411 Index S Saturation 104 Section 508 (loi américaine). Voir accessibilité sécurité gestion des paramètres 58 protection 231 suppression des restrictions 242 sécurité d'accès Internet pour les contenus multimédia 341 sélection image 144 objets 317 tableaux 144 texte 143 Sélectionner tout, commande 46, 144 séquence audio. Voir clip multimédia séquence vidéo. Voir clip multimédia Série de commentaires, réponse 179 serveur réseau, configuration pour la révision 152 service Web de cartographie, copie des données du lieu 330 services Internet, abonnement 160 Seuil d'incorporation 103 Signalisation des modifications de texte, outil 169 signature vérification de l'intégrité du fichier PDF 270 signature manuscrite 269 signature numérique à propos des éléments de formulaire 192 ajout 269 ajout d'un tampon temporel 267 ajout d'une signature manuscrite 265 authentification 243 champ 269 didacticiel 17 identification numérique 258, 259 modification des champs 211 recherche 332 signature de certification 271 signification des icônes 273, 274 validation 273, 274 signatures sécurité 264 validation 273 signatures numériques à propos 264 utilisation des tablettes graphiques 268 Signatures, panneau 276 signet à propos 298 accessibilité 280 affichage et masquage 32 aspect 298 balisage, organisation d'une page Web 310 balisé 301 calque PDF 326 création 298 destination 298 génération 139 gestion 298 impression des pages associées 391 masquage après utilisation 33 navigation 32 recherche 332, 336 recherche du signet actif 32 suppression 300 vue 3D 354 signet balisé organisation d'une page Web 310 suppression 132 signets création à partir d'une page Web 93 Signets, ouverture du panneau 32 site Web paramètres pour la révision 152 restriction 234 soulignement des liens 94 sous-échantillonnage voir aussi compression Sous-échantillonner les images, option de numérisation 72 stratégie à propos 250 application à un document 254 chiffrement de fichier 250 création 251 suppression d'un document 255 Stratégie utilisateur 250 Substitution de police dans un texte copié 143 suivi état des fichiers convertis 96 Suivi d’un document PDF, révision 155 suppression annotation 170, 173, 182 article 312 commentaire 168, 170, 182 destination 305 données de formulaire 227 en-tête et pied de page 123 informations masquées 262 lien 303 page 131 signet 300 vignette 296 vignette de page 296 Suppression de l'arrière-plan, option 69 Suppression des ombres sur les contours, option 69 Suppression du halo, option 70 Supprimer des pages, commande 131 surimpression conservation des paramètres 106 Surligneur, outil 170 T Table des matières. Voir signet tableau copie 144 tablette graphique signature d'un fichier PDF 268 taille de fichier optimisation 137 réduction 131, 137 Taille de fichier minimale, paramètres Adobe PDF 99 taille du fichier vignettes de page 101 Taille écran, commande. Voir Page entière, commande Taille réelle, commande 43 tampon ajout à un document 170 déplacement et redimensionnement 170 dynamique 170 modification 170 personnalisation 170 tampon temporel ajout à une signature numérique 267 dans les signatures numériques 267 validation du certificat 276 technologie d'assistance et enregistrement automatique 136 téléchargement document depuis le Web 36 téléchargement page par page 36, 37, 72UTILISATION D'ACROBAT 9 STANDARD 412 Index téléchargements mises à jour, modules externes et versions d’essai 4 texte accessible, conversion 141 ajout 315 asiatique. Voir langues asiatiques copie interdite 143 copier-coller 143 exportation 139 modification 313, 314 non reconnaissable 143 numérisé 143 prévention des changements de couleur 104 recherche 332 texte accessible à propos 287 comparaison au texte standard 141 Texte barré 168 Texte barré, à supprimer 168 texte de remplacement, conversion de document 141 Texte libre, outil. Voir Zone de texte, outil Texte standard, comparaison au texte accessible 141 Texte surligné (annotation) 168 thaï, langue 59 tons directs prise en compte de la gestion des couleurs 366 touches d'accès rapide uniques 286 Transfert FTP de fichiers PostScript 97 transformations par souris 220 transition 318 transition de page paramètre 320 transition entre les pages affichage en plein écran 318 diaporama 318 transparence damier, affichage 41 tri des commentaires 178 Type 1, police 112 Type 32, police 112 type de fichier, multimédia 340 U UCR (Under Color Removal) 105 Une seule page, mise en page 46 Unicode, signature numérique 258 URL restriction 234 Utilisation optimale des octets 36 Utiliser uniquement des modules externes certifiés, option 37 V valeurs de base propriétés d'une signature numérique 272 valeurs par défaut vue en 3D 354 validation certificat de tampon temporel 276 champ de formulaire 214 période de validité d'une signature 246 signature 273, 274 validation des signatures à long terme 274 vérification orthographique ajout d'un mot au dictionnaire 182 en cours de frappe 182 formulaire et commentaire 182 Vérification rapide 281 verrouillage barres d'outils 27 calque PDF 325 commentaire 167 protection d'un document 238 Verrouillage d'un document PDF, mots de passe 236 Verrouillage, option action 307 version d'essai 4 versions d’essai 4 Versions PDF, options 87, 100 vietnamien, langue 59 vignette incorporation 101 vignette de page affichage 33 création 296 déplacement et copie de page 131 navigation 296 passage à une page 33 redimensionnement de l'affichage 44 remplacement de page 133 suppression 296 Vignette. Voir vignette de page Visio affichage des données d'objet 324 vue commentaires dans un modèle 3D 357 Vue initiale, propriétés du document 319, 321 vues définition pour le contenu 3D 354 W WAV, fichier. Voir clip multimédia WGS 1984 330 WMV, fichier. Voir clip multimédia Word, document ajout d'informations 80 X XIF, recherche de métadonnées 332 XML, informations sur le code source du document 323 XMP (eXtensible Metadata Platform) 323 XMP, format métadonnées 323, 332 Z ZIP, compression 110 zone de liste, à propos des éléments de formulaire 192 Zone de texte 174 zone de texte formatage 212 Zone de travail, personnalisation 24 Zone, outil 49 zoom affichage 42 changement de facteur 42 fenêtre Panoramique et zoom 44 outil Loupe 44 outil Zoom dynamique 42 paramètre par défaut 37 sélection temporaire d'un outil 23 ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 GUIDE DE L’UTILISATEUR© 2007 Adobe Systems Incorporated. Tous droits réservés. Guide de l’utilisateur Adobe® Captivate™ 3 pour Windows® Si le présent guide est fourni avec un logiciel régi par un contrat d’utilisateur final, le guide, ainsi que le logiciel décrit, sont fournis sous licence et peuvent être utilisés ou copiés uniquement selon les clauses et conditions de la licence. A moins d’une autorisation expresse accordée par cette licence, aucune partie de ce guide ne peut être reproduite, stockée dans un système d’interrogation ou transmise, sous quelque forme ou par quelque moyen que ce soit (électronique, mécanique, par enregistrement ou autre) sans l’autorisation écrite préalable d’Adobe Systems Incorporated. Veuillez noter que le contenu du présent guide est protégé par la loi sur le copyright, même s’il n’est pas distribué avec un logiciel régi par un contrat de licence utilisateur. Les informations contenues dans ce guide sont fournies à titre purement informatif ; elles sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis et ne doivent pas être interprétées comme étant un engagement de la part d’Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe Systems Incorporated n’accepte aucune responsabilité quant aux erreurs ou inexactitudes pouvant être contenues dans le présent guide. Veuillez noter que les illustrations et images existantes que vous souhaiterez éventuellement inclure dans votre projet sont susceptibles d’être protégées par les lois sur le copyright. L’inclusion non autorisée de tels éléments dans vos nouveaux travaux peut constituer une violation des droits du propriétaire. Veuillez vous assurer que vous obtenez toute autorisation nécessaire auprès du détenteur du copyright. Toute référence à des noms de sociétés dans les modèles types n’est utilisée qu’à titre d’exemple et ne fait référence à aucune société réelle. Adobe, le logo Adobe, Adobe Captivate, Authorware, Acrobat Connect et Flash sont des marques commerciales ou des marques déposées d’Adobe Systems Incorporated aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays. Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista et Internet Explorer sont des marques commerciales ou déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. Toutes les autres marques appartiennent à leurs propriétaires respectifs. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, Californie 95110, Etats-Unis. Avis aux utilisateurs du gouvernement des Etats-Unis. Le logiciel et la documentation sont des « articles commerciaux », conformément à la définition du terme « Commercial Items » dans l’article 48 C.F.R. §2.101 du Code de la réglementation fédérale (Code Of Federal Regulations), qui consistent en du « logiciel informatique commercial » et de la « documentation logicielle commerciale », selon la définition de ces termes dans les articles 48 C.F.R. §12.212 et 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, selon le cas. Conformément aux articles 48 C.F.R. §12.212 et 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 à 227.7202-4, le logiciel informatique commercial et la documentation logicielle commerciale sont fournis sous licence aux utilisateurs du gouvernement des Etats-Unis (a) uniquement à titre d’articles commerciaux (b) et leur confèrent seulement les droits octroyés à tous les autres utilisateurs selon les conditions mentionnées aux présentes. Droits non publiés réservés dans le cadre des lois sur le copyright en vigueur aux Etats-Unis. Adobe Systems Incorporated, 345 Park Avenue, San Jose, CA 95110-2704, USA. Adobe s’engage à respecter la législation relative à l’égalité des chances y compris, le cas échéant, les dispositions du décret 11246, tel qu’amendé, à la section 402 de la loi sur l’assistance aux vétérans du Vietnam (Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act) de 1974 (38 USC 4212), et à la section 503 de la loi sur la réadaptation (Rehabilitation Act) de 1973, telle qu’amendée, et la réglementation des articles 41 CFR, alinéas 60-1 à 60-60, 60-250 et 60-741. La clause d’action positive et la réglementation décrites dans la phrase précédente sont incluses par référence.3 Sommaire Chapitre 1 : Démarrage Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Aide d’Adobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Nouveautés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Chapitre 2 : Exploration de l’espace de travail A propos des affichages d’Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 A propos du plan de montage chronologique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Personnalisation de l’environnement de travail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Affichage et ancrage des barres d’outils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Utilisation de la bande de film . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Utilisation de la bibliothèque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Affichage des messages de confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Utilisation des touches de raccourci . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Raccourcis d’agrandissement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Annulation et rétablissement des actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 A propos du moniteur de bande passante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Chapitre 3 : Création de projets Ouverture de projets existants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 A propos de la planification de projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 A propos de l’enregistrement et de la création de nouveaux projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Enregistrement de simulations logicielles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Réenregistrement de simulations logicielles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Enregistrement de simulations de scénarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Enregistrement d’autres types de projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Relier des projets Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 A propos de l’utilisation de modèles de projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Création de projets accessibles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Localisation de projets Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Chapitre 4 : Ajout de légendes de texte A propos de l’ajout de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Ajout de texte à une diapositive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Ajout automatique de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Ajout de légendes de survol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Modification de la zone de survol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Conversion des infobulles en légendes de survol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ajout d’une langue pour les légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Localisation des légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Modification de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824 Création de styles de légendes personnalisés . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Déplacement et redimensionnement de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Copie et collage des légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Importation de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Exportation de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Modification de l’ordre des légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Suppression de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Chapitre 5 : Ajout de fichiers audio et vidéo A propos de l’ajout d’audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Ajout d’audio existant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Matériel d’enregistrement audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Conseils pour l’enregistrement audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Définition des options d’enregistrement audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Calibration de microphones pour l’enregistrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Enregistrement audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Enregistrement de l’audio lors de la création d’un projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Création d’audio d’arrière-plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Utilisation d’un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Ajustement du volume audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Ajout d’audio existant aux objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Enregistrement d’audio pour les objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Définition des sons de frappe sur clavier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Modification des fichiers audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Modification de la durée audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Affichage des détails audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Ajout de sous-titres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Pré-lecture audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Exportation de fichiers audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Suppression de l’audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 A propos de l’ajout de vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Ajout d’un fichier vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Définition des options vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Définition des options audio pour la vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Définition des options de position pour la vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Chapitre 6 : Ajout d’images et d’animations Ajout d’images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Ajout d’images de survol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Insertion d’images en tant que diapositives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Création d’images en filigrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Modification de la qualité JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Suppression d’images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 A propos des animations dans Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Ajout d’animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185 Ajout de texte animé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Ajout de diapositives d’animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Chapitre 7 : Ajout de zones et de boutons Zones de surbrillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Zones de clic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Zones de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Boutons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Ajout de zones de surbrillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Ajout de zones de clic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Ajout de zones de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Ajout de boutons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Modification des boutons sur les diapositives de questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Ajout de JavaScript aux zones et aux boutons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Ajout d’audio aux zones et aux boutons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Suppression de boutons et de zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Chapitre 8 : Modification du déplacement de la souris Modification des pointeurs de souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Modification de la taille du pointeur de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modification des sons du clic de souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Définition de l’effet de clic de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Modification des déplacements de souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Alignement des trajectoires de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Utilisation des trajectoires de souris droites et courbées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Masquage du pointeur de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Activer la molette de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Création d’effets de survol de la souris à l’aide d’une mini-diapositive de survol . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Chapitre 9 : Modification de la durée Personnalisation de l’apparence du plan de montage chronologique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Modification de l’ordre de calques des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Masquage et verrouillage des calques d’objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Aperçu d’une diapositive à l’aide de la tête de lecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Modification de la durée d’une diapositive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Définition automatique de la vitesse des légendes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Modification de la vitesse des frappes de touches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Modification de la vitesse du pointeur de la souris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Modification de la durée d’un objet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Contrôle des projets Adobe Captivate avec des variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Chapitre 10 : Diapositives Ajout de diapositives à un projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Création de groupes de diapositives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Modification des diapositives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Modification du début et de la fin d’un projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Ajout d’habillages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1796 Diapositives sécurisées . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Chapitre 11 : Ajout et gestion d’objets Importation d’objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Utilisation de la bibliothèque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Gestion des objets avec la barre d’outils Scène . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Duplication des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Copie et collage des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Copie et collage des objets depuis d’autres projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Alignement des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Alignement des objets dans le plan de montage chronologique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Modification de l’ordre d’affichage des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Modification de la taille de plusieurs objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Alignement des objets sur la grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Ajustement au pixel près de la taille et de la position des objets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fusion des objets dans une diapositive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Gestion des objets interactifs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Chapitre 12 : Edition des projets Détermination de la taille du projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Suppression de projets ou de modèles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Masquage de projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Prévisualisation de projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Changement de nom des projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Redimensionnement des projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Définition de la couleur d’arrière-plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Définition des préférences du projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Ajout d’un écran de chargement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Définitions des propriétés du projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Utilisation d’un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Vérification de l’orthographe des projets Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Modification du dictionnaire pour la vérification d’orthographe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Recherche de diapositives et remplacement de contenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Chapitre 13 : Création de contenu d’apprentissage électronique A propos des embranchements dans les projets Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 A propos de la modification des embranchements dans les projets Adobe Captivate . . . . . . 217 Déplacement vers une diapositive dans l’affichage Embranchement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Exportation de l’affichage Embranchement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Création de diapositives de questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Définition du seuil de réussite de l’apprentissage électronique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Création de messages de révision des questions pour les quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Création d’un fichier de manifeste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Création d’un PIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Organisation de quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2487 Chapitre 14 : Création d’un menu des projets Adobe Captivate A propos de la création de projets MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Utilisation de texte dans MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Utilisation d’images dans les projets MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Utilisation des zones de clic dans les projets MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Modification des options d’un projet MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Exportation des projets MenuBuilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Chapitre 15 : Publication de projets Publication des projets sous forme de fichiers autonomes (EXE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Publication des projets vers Adobe Connect Enterprise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Publication des projets sous forme de fichiers Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Publication de projets sous forme de document Word imprimables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Publication des projets sur le Web en utilisant FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Envoi des projets par courrier électronique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Publication d’un contenu AICC ou d’un package SCORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Exportation de légendes de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Exportation du contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Importation du contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate à partir de XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Importation et exportation des préférences du projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Chapitre 16 : Adobe Captivate et les autres logiciels Adobe Captivate et Adobe Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Adobe Captivate et Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Adobe Captivate et RoboHelp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Adobe Captivate et Microsoft PowerPoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Chapitre 17 : Dépannage Dépannage du démarrage d’un projet Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Dépannage de la durée d’une animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Dépannage de la distorsion d’une application au cours de l’enregistrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Dépannage de la capture lors de l’enregistrement d’une application Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Dépannage de la capture d’applications en mode élevé sous Windows Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Dépannage en cas d’enregistrement d’images animées non fluide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Correction des couleurs dans les diapositives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Dépannage des polices sur des légendes transparentes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Dépannage de la sortie Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Dépannage des erreurs vidéo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Dépannage du texte affiché dans un navigateur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Dépannage de la taille du texte dans les zones de texte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Dépannage des problèmes de taille de bouton lors du redimensionnement des projets . . . 317 Dépannage du nombre de diapositives dans un projet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Dépannage de la publication des projets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Dépannage des erreurs de quiz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Dépannage de l’exportation des projets vers Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Dépannage d’un JavaScript qui ne s’affiche pas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3198 Dépannage de l’éditeur d’habillage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Désinstallation d’Adobe Captivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Avertissement de sécurité avec Flash Player 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3211 Chapitre 1 : Démarrage Si vous n’avez pas installé votre nouveau logiciel, commencez par lire des informations sur l’installation et autres informations préliminaires. Avant de commencer à utiliser votre logiciel, prenez le temps de parcourir l’aperçu de l’Aide d’Adobe et des nombreuses ressources mises à la disposition des utilisateurs. Vous pouvez accéder à des plugins, des modèles, des communautés d’utilisateurs, des séminaires, des didacticiels, des flux RSS et bien davantage. Installation Configuration requise Pour prendre connaissance de l’ensemble des recommandations et de la configuration requise pour votre logiciel Adobe® Captivate™, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi sur le DVD d’installation. Le fichier est également copié dans le dossier des applications pendant l’installation du produit. Ouvrez ce fichier pour accéder à des informations importantes sur les sujets suivants : • Configuration requise • Installation (y compris désinstallation du logiciel) • Activation et enregistrement • Installation des polices • Dépannage • Assistance clientèle • Avis légaux Installation du logiciel 1 Fermez toutes les autres applications Adobe ouvertes sur votre ordinateur. 2 Insérez le disque d’installation dans votre lecteur de DVD et suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Remarque : Pour de plus amples informations, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi sur le DVD d’installation. Activation du logiciel Si vous disposez d’une licence de détail 1 utilisateur pour votre logiciel Adobe, le programme vous demande d’activer votre logiciel. Il s’agit d’un processus anonyme simple que vous devez effectuer dans les 30 jours suivant le lancement du logiciel. Pour de plus amples informations sur l’activation de votre produit, consultez le fichier Lisez-moi sur le DVD d’installation ou le site Web Adobe à www.adobe.com/go/activation_fr. 1 Si la boîte de dialogue Activation ne s’ouvre pas automatiquement, sélectionnez Aide > Activer. 2 Suivez les instructions s’affichant à l’écran. Remarque : Si vous souhaitez installer le logiciel sur un autre ordinateur, vous devez d’abord le désactiver sur votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez Aide > Désactiver.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 2 Enregistrement Enregistrez votre produit afin de recevoir des notifications de mises à jour et autres services. Pour enregistrer votre produit, suivez les instructions de la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement, qui s’affiche après l’installation et l’activation de votre logiciel. Si vous n’enregistrez pas votre produit immédiatement, vous pouvez le faire à tout moment en sélectionnant Aide > Enregistrement. Aide d’Adobe Ressources d’aide d’Adobe Des documents pour votre logiciel Adobe sont disponibles dans divers formats. Aide intégrée au produit et aide Internet L’aide intégrée au produit vous permet d’accéder à toute la documentation et à toutes les instructions disponibles au moment de l’expédition du logiciel. Vous pouvez y accéder par le biais du menu Aide de votre logiciel Adobe. L’aide Internet inclut tout le contenu de l’aide intégrée au produit, plus des mises à jour et des liens renvoyant au contenu et aux instructions disponibles sur Internet. Vous pouvez accéder à l’aide Internet pour votre produit dans le Centre de ressources d’aide Adobe, à www.adobe.com/go/documentation_fr. Documentation PDF L’aide intégrée au produit est également disponible sous la forme d’un fichier PDF optimisé pour l’impression. Toute la documentation PDF est disponible dans le Centre de ressources d’aide Adobe, à www.adobe.com/go/documentation_fr. Vous trouverez la documentation PDF incluse avec votre logiciel dans le dossier Documentation du DVD d’installation ou de contenu. Documentation imprimée Un Guide de démarrage rapide sur papier vous est également fourni avec le logiciel. Utilisation de l’aide intégrée au produit L’aide intégrée au produit est disponible par le biais du menu Aide. Assistance clientèle Consultez le site Web d’assistance Adobe, à www.adobe.com/go/support_fr, afin de trouver des informations de dépannage pour votre produit et de découvrir les options d’assistance technique gratuites et payantes qui sont à votre disposition. Suivez le lien Training (formation) pour accéder aux ouvrages Adobe Press, à une vaste gamme de ressources de formation, aux programmes de certification logicielle Adobe et bien davantage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 3 Téléchargements Rendez-vous sur www.adobe.com/go/downloads_fr pour bénéficier gratuitement de mises à jour, de versions d’essai et autres logiciels utiles. En outre, Adobe Store (à www.adobe.com/go/store_fr) vous permet d’accéder à des milliers de plug-ins de développeurs tiers, qui vous aideront à automatiser les tâches, personnaliser les flux de travail, créer des effets professionnels spécialisés et bien davantage. Adobe Labs Adobe Labs vous offre l’opportunité de découvrir et d’évaluer des technologies et des produits nouveaux et émergents d’Adobe. Adobe Labs vous permet d’accéder à des ressources comme : • Préversions de logiciels et technologies • Echantillons de code et meilleures pratiques pour accélérer votre apprentissage • Versions anticipées de la documentation technique et des produits • Forums, contenu wiki et autres ressources collaboratives pour vous aider à interagir avec des développeurs partageant la même optique Adobe Labs encourage un processus de développement logiciel coopératif. Dans cet environnement, les clients peuvent rapidement devenir productifs en utilisant les nouveaux produits et technologies. Adobe Labs est également un forum permettant de recevoir de façon précoce les commentaires, dont les équipes de développement Adobe se servent pour créer des logiciels répondant aux besoins et aux attentes de la communauté. Consultez Adobe Labs, à www.adobe.com/go/labs_fr. Pôle de création Adobe Le Pôle de création Adobe offre articles, inspiration et instructions des spécialistes du secteur, des meilleurs concepteurs et des partenaires de publication d’Adobe. Du nouveau contenu est ajouté tous les mois. Vous y trouverez des centaines de didacticiels pour la création de projets et y apprendrez des astuces et des techniques par le biais de vidéos, de didacticiels HTML et d’extraits de livres et guides. Les idées nouvelles sont au cœur du Groupe de réflexion, de la Boîte de dialogue et de la Galerie : Les articles du Groupe de réflexion explorent la façon dont les concepteurs d’aujourd’hui embrassent la technologie et l’impact de ces expériences sur la création, les outils de création et la société. Dans la Boîte de dialogue, des experts partagent des idées nouvelles en termes d’animations et de création numérique. La Galerie expose la façon dont les artistes communiquent leur perspective sur la création d’animations. Découvrez le Pôle de créativité d’Adobe à www.adobe.com/go/designcenter_fr. Pôle de développement Adobe Le Pôle de développement Adobe fournit des exemples, des didacticiels, des articles et des ressources communautaires aux développeurs qui créent des applications Internet, des sites Web, du contenu mobile et autres projets complexes à l’aide des produits Adobe. Le Pôle de développement inclut également des ressources pour les développeurs qui créent des plug-ins pour les produits Adobe.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 4 En plus des échantillons de code et des didacticiels, vous y trouverez des flux RSS, des séminaires en ligne, des kits de développement logiciel, des guides de scripting et autres ressources techniques. Découvrez le Pôle de développement Adobe à www.adobe.com/go/developer_fr. Communautés d’utilisateurs Les communautés d’utilisateurs comprennent des forums, des blogs et autres ressources permettant aux utilisateurs de partager technologies, outils et informations. Les utilisateurs peuvent poser des questions et découvrir comment les autres utilisateurs tirent le meilleur parti de leurs logiciels. Les forums d’utilisateurs sont disponibles en anglais, français, allemand et japonais. Les blogs sont publiés dans de nombreuses langues différentes. Pour participer aux forums ou aux blogs, consultez www.adobe.com/go/communities_fr. Nouveautés Nouveautés importantes dans Adobe Captivate 3 Le logiciel Adobe® Captivate™ 3 permet de créer rapidement des simulations, des formations basées sur des scénarios et des évaluations, toutes puissantes et attrayantes, sans connaissances en programmation ou compétences multimédia particulières. Fondé sur la plate-forme Adobe Flash®, à la pointe du secteur, Adobe Captivate 3 génère automatiquement du contenu interactif compatible avec Flash Player pour une distribution et un accès en ligne faciles. Grâce à l’interface « pointer et cliquer » simple et aux fonctions automatisées d’Adobe Captivate, les enseignants et les utilisateurs professionnels peuvent enregistrer les actions effectuées à l’écran, ajouter des interactions d’apprentissage électronique, créer des scénarios avec des embranchements complexes et des options de commentaires, et inclure un contenu multimédia riche. Enregistrement multimodes Gagnez du temps et générez des simulations logicielles de qualité avec plusieurs modes d’apprentissage, incluant une démonstration de la procédure, une simulation pour pratiquer les étapes et une évaluation, ce en une seule session d’enregistrement. Quiz et groupes de questions aléatoires Améliorez les évaluations des étudiants en sélectionnant les questions au hasard dans un jeu de groupes de questions. Mélangez les réponses proposées pour les questions à choix multiples afin que les réponses soient toujours affichées dans un ordre différent. Partagez les groupes de questions entre plusieurs projets Adobe Captivate. Mini-diapositives de survol Fournissez des informations supplémentaires sur les diapositives Adobe Captivate 3 en affichant du contenu multimédia riche, incluant images, texte, audio et vidéo dans une mini-diapositive (une diapositive miniature dans une diapositive), lorsque l’étudiant déplace la souris sur une zone spécifiée de la diapositive. Exportation et importation XML Simplifiez le processus de localisation des projets : exportez les légendes dans un fichier texte ou XLIFF (XML Localization Interchange File Format). Importez le fichier texte traduit dans une copie du fichier de projet d’origine. Réenregistrement automatisé Mettez rapidement le contenu à jour et réenregistrez automatiquement des procédures entières dans la plupart des applications Web après la modification ou la localisation de l’interface utilisateur (Internet Explorer® 6).ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 5 Effets d’animation Créez du contenu d’apprentissage prenant en charge les transitions de diapositives animées et les animations PowerPoint®. Importez des fichiers PowerPoint (PPT) et conservez de nombreux effets d’animation en convertissant les diapositives PowerPoint en fichiers SWF. Enregistrement audio sans aperçu Synchronisez l’audio avec les diapositives et les objets temporisés. Enregistrez une narration en affichant un aperçu des diapositives en temps réel en les regardant une par une ou sous la forme d’un projet complet. Nouveaux types de questions Améliorez l’efficacité de l’apprentissage avec des types de questions spécialisées, comme les questions de séquence et de zone sensible, ou encore les correspondances de listes déroulantes. Prise en charge multimédia riche Enregistrez l’audio à partir du système ou de l’entrée ligne, en plus du micro. Enregistrement d’images animées Enregistrez des films d’images animées au format SWF, montrant des animations détaillées comme les fonctionnalités de dessin/peinture et les opérations de glisser-déposer. Flux de travail simplifiés et améliorations de la productivité Travaillez plus vite grâce à une vaste gamme de flux de travail simplifiés et d’améliorations d’utilisation : • Fonction Rechercher et remplacer • Enregistrement d’écran amélioré pour capturer l’activité à l’écran • Mode d’enregistrement en temps réel • Intégration du système de gestion de l’apprentissage améliorée • Réutilisation des diapositives de quiz • Réduction de la taille de fichier SWF • Améliorations de l’affichage Embranchement comme la fonction de zoom et le regroupement des diapositives • Nouvelles options pour l’ajout de légendes et de boutons Prise en charge de Microsoft® Windows Vista™ et Microsoft Office 2007 Installez Adobe Captivate 3 sur Windows Vista et importez des fichiers PowerPoint (PPT) à partir d’Office 2007 ou créez des documents ou des procédures étape par étape à l’aide de l’option d’exportation Microsoft Word.6 Chapitre 2 : Exploration de l’espace de travail Adobe® Captivate™ permet de créer facilement des projets. Voici une vue d’ensemble de l’environnement de travail d’Adobe Captivate. A propos des affichages d’Adobe Captivate Adobe Captivate dispose de trois affichages principaux : l’affichage Scénarimage, l’affichage Modifier (avec vignettes) et l’affichage Embranchement. Cliquez sur les onglets d’affichage en haut de la fenêtre de projet ou appuyez sur Ctrl+tabulation pour passer d’un affichage à l’autre. Chaque affichage comprend une fenêtre en bas de l’écran, dans laquelle vous pouvez visualiser, ajouter et modifier des annotations portant sur chaque diapositive de votre projet. Affichage Scénarimage Cet affichage apparaît lorsque vous ouvrez un projet depuis la page de démarrage. Le projet s’ouvre et affiche des petites images qui représentent les diapositives qui le composent. L’affichage Scénarimage est un outil pratique qui vous permet de visualiser simultanément toutes les diapositives d’un projet. Il vous permet également de voir l’enchaînement d’un projet. Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés de plusieurs diapositives en même temps. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj ou Ctrl tout en cliquant sur des diapositives. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A. Affichage Modifier Cet affichage apparaît lorsque vous double-cliquez sur une diapositive dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Embranchement. Une fois que vous avez enregistré un projet Adobe Captivate, c’est généralement dans l’affichage Modifier que vous poursuivez votre travail, car vous pouvez y ajouter des objets (par exemple, légendes, images, zones de clic, vidéos et audio). Dans cet affichage, vous pouvez également apporter de nombreuses modifications à une diapositive. Vous pouvez, par exemple, changer le déplacement et le pointeur de la souris. Dans l’affichage Modifier, vous pouvez voir la bibliothèque qui répertorie tous les éléments d’un projet et vous permet de visualiser et réutiliser les images, arrière-plans, audio et animations de votre projet. L’affichage Modifier contient également les panneaux Bande de film, Plan de montage chronologique et Annotations facultatifs. Affichage Embranchement Pour accéder à cet affichage, cliquez sur l’onglet Embranchement. L’affichage Embranchement vous fournit une représentation visuelle de tous les liens entre les diapositives d’un projet et vous permet de modifier rapidement ces liens. Le volet gauche contient les sections Propriétés, Présentation et Légende, que vous pouvez toutes réduire. La section Propriétés affiche les propriétés du lien de la diapositive ou du lien sélectionné et vous permet de modifier le type de navigation. La section Présentation indique quelle partie du projet vous consultez dans le volet Embranchement principal. La section Légende définit la façon dont est affiché chaque type de lien entre les diapositives. Le volet principal affiche le type de lien entre les diapositives et vous permet de rechercher et de sélectionner la diapositive que vous voulez consulter. Le volet inférieur affiche les annotations portant sur la diapositive sélectionnée dans le volet principal et vous permet d’en ajouter.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 7 L’affichage Embranchement est particulièrement utile lors de la création de documents pédagogiques contenant des diapositives de questions et spécifiant des chemins différents pour les réponses correctes et incorrectes. Par exemple, vous pouvez définir une action (telle que « aller à la diapositive suivante ») lorsqu’un utilisateur répond correctement à une question et définir une action différente (telle que « Ouvrir URL ou fichier ») lorsque l’utilisateur donne une mauvaise réponse. Utilisez l’affichage Embranchement pour modifier aisément la conception des embranchements. Vous pouvez exporter l’affichage Embranchement d’un projet Adobe Captivate existant dans un fichier BMP, JPEG ou JPG. A propos du plan de montage chronologique Le plan de montage chronologique est une représentation visuelle de tous les objets des diapositives. C’est un moyen aisé d’afficher tous les objets d’une diapositive et les relations entre eux. Le plan de montage chronologique permet d’organiser les objets et de contrôler leur durée avec précision. Par exemple, sur une diapositive contenant une légende, une image et une zone de surbrillance, vous pouvez afficher la légende, puis l’image quatre secondes plus tard, puis la zone de surbrillance deux secondes après. Le plan de montage chronologique affiche également l’audio associé à la diapositive ou aux objets de la diapositive, ce qui vous permet de coordonner la durée audio avec les objets. Vous pouvez utiliser le plan de montage chronologique pour masquer ou verrouiller facilement des objets. Cela est particulièrement utile quand une diapositive contient de nombreux objets et vous avez besoin de modifier ces objets séparément. A propos des barres d’outils et menus Dans les trois affichages, le programme possède des menus et des barres d’outils situés dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre. Des menus contextuels accessibles avec le bouton droit de la souris sont également disponibles dans l’ensemble du programme. • Barre de menus Cliquez sur un menu dans la partie supérieure de la fenêtre du programme (par exemple, Fichier, Insérer ou Options) pour accéder aux commandes de ce menu. • Menus contextuels Placez le pointeur de la souris dans le volet dans lequel vous souhaitez travailler. Cliquez du bouton droit, puis sélectionnez une option du menu. • Barres d’outils Cliquez sur une icône de l’une des barres d’outils du programme pour accéder rapidement aux boîtes de dialogue et aux actions. Toutes les options de la barre d’outils (par exemple, afficher/masquer les barres d’outils, position de la barre d’outils, etc.) pour un affichage donné sont regroupées dans le menu Afficher. Pour avoir un espace de modification maximum, ouvrez un projet et appuyez sur F11 pour afficher Adobe Captivate en mode de modification plein écran.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 8 Personnalisation de l’environnement de travail Vous pouvez modifier et personnaliser certains éléments de l’environnement de travail d’Adobe Captivate selon votre style de travail. Pour modifier la taille du volet Diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. Le volet Diapositives s’affiche à gauche avec des icônes de taille moyenne représentant les diapositives d’un projet. a Pour modifier la taille des vignettes, faites glisser la barre de séparation vers l’extérieur de la fenêtre du programme pour diminuer la taille des vignettes, ou vers l’intérieur pour agrandir les vignettes. b Pour masquer le volet Diapositives, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher les vignettes. Pour afficher ou masquer le plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. Par défaut, le plan de montage chronologique s’affiche dans la partie supérieure de la diapositive. a Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. Si vous ne voyez toujours pas le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche de la barre de séparation. b Pour fermer le plan de montage chronologique, sélectionnez à nouveau Afficher > Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. c Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la petite flèche noire. Pour le fermer, cliquez de nouveau sur la flèche. Pour afficher ou masquer la bibliothèque : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la bibliothèque. Pour afficher ou masquer le groupe de questions : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher le groupe de questions. Pour afficher ou masquer le volet gauche dans l’affichage Scénarimage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. Par défaut, le volet s’affiche sur le côté gauche de la fenêtre du programme dans l’affichage Scénarimage. a Pour modifier la taille du volet gauche, faites glisser la barre de séparation vers l’extérieur de la fenêtre du programme pour diminuer la taille, ou vers l’intérieur pour l’agrandir. b Pour masquer entièrement le volet gauche, cliquez sur la flèche de la barre de séparation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 9 Affichage et ancrage des barres d’outils Adobe Captivate contient plusieurs barres d’outils qui permettent d’accéder facilement aux fonctionnalités souvent utilisées. Vous pouvez sélectionner les barres d’outils à afficher ainsi que leur emplacement dans la fenêtre du programme Adobe Captivate. Activer et désactiver l’ancrage des barres d’outils Cette option vous permet de sélectionner des barres d’outils, de les faire glisser dans la fenêtre du programme et de les placer (« ancrer ») à de nouveaux emplacements. Cette option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez la désactiver à tout moment. Pour activer et désactiver l’ancrage des barres d’outils : 1 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 2 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Global. 3 Dans la zone d’ancrage des barres d’outils, sélectionnez ou désélectionnez l’option Activer l’ancrage. Afficher et masquer les barres d’outils Par défaut, les barres d’outils principale, d’objet et d’alignement s’affichent. Remarque : Ces éléments de menu sont disponibles dans l’affichage Modifier uniquement. Pour afficher ou masquer une barre d’outils : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Afficher > Barres d’outils et sélectionnez ou désélectionnez Principale, Alignement, Objet ou Avancé. Afficher ou masquer les légendes sur la barre d’outils principale Les légendes sont du texte qui s’affiche à côté des icônes sur la barre d’outils principale. Par défaut, la barre d’outils principale s’affiche le long de la partie supérieure de la fenêtre du programme, sous la barre de menus. Pour afficher ou masquer les légendes sur la barre d’outils principale : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Afficher > Barres d’outils et sélectionnez ou désélectionnez Etiquettes sur la barre d’outils. Rétablir les paramètres par défaut pour les légendes de texte Si vous avez modifié l’apparence des légendes de texte, vous pouvez rétablir tous les paramètres par défaut pour les légendes de texte. Par exemple, vous modifiez la police des légendes de texte sur Times New Roman et la couleur sur vert. Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir la police par défaut (Arial) et la couleur par défaut (bleu). Pour rétablir les paramètres par défaut pour les légendes de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 10 La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Global. 4 Dans la zone de paramètres des légendes de texte, cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut. Déplacer les barres d’outils vers un nouvel emplacement Vous pouvez ancrer les barres d’outils sur n’importe quel bord de la fenêtre du programme ou vous pouvez détacher une barre d’outils de la fenêtre du programme Adobe Captivate et la faire « flotter » dans sa propre fenêtre indépendante. Pour déplacer une barre d’outils : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur le bord gauche ou supérieur d’une barre d’outils jusqu’à ce qu’une flèche à quatre pointes apparaisse. 3 Faites glisser la barre d’outils jusqu’à un bord de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut s’ancrer ou jusqu’au centre de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut flotter. Vous avez toujours la possibilité de remettre les barres d’outils à leur emplacement d’origine. Utilisation de la bande de film L’affichage Modifier contient la bande de film facultative, qui permet d’afficher toutes les diapositives d’un projet et de travailler sur ces diapositives tout en modifiant une diapositive dans l’affichage Modifier. Utilisez l’affichage Modifier et la bande de film ensemble pour travailler dans Adobe Captivate rapidement et de façon productive. Remarque : La bande de film s’affiche également dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée (Projet > Interaction avancée). Pour afficher la bande de film : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour l’ouvrir dans l’affichage Modifier. La bande de film s’affiche. a La bande de film affiche toutes les diapositives de votre projet dans leur ordre d’apparition. Vous pouvez modifier l’ordre des diapositives en faisant glisser une diapositive vers un nouvel emplacement dans le projet. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj ou Ctrl tout en cliquant sur des diapositives. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A. b Si une diapositive a une étiquette (titre court), l’étiquette s’affiche sous la diapositive. Il est parfois plus facile de déplacer les diapositives et de se souvenir de ce qu’il y a sur ces diapositives si vous leur avez affecté des étiquettes au lieu d’avoir juste un numéro de diapositive. c Si un fichier audio est associé à une diapositive, l’icône audio s’affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l’icône de son pour afficher un menu avec les options audio telles que Lecture, Importer et Modifier. d Si une diapositive est verrouillée, l’icône de verrou s’affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l’icône de verrou pour déverrouiller la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 11 e Si une diapositive contient des déplacements de souris, l’icône de souris s’affiche dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. f Par défaut, le volet Diapositives affiche les diapositives sous forme de vignettes de taille moyenne. Pour modifier la taille des diapositives, sélectionnez Afficher > Taille de la vignette, et choisissez Petite, Moyenne ou Grande. g Une fois l’affichage de l’onglet Groupe de questions activé, vous pouvez changer l’affichage dans la bande de film et passer du projet principal aux groupes de questions en cliquant sur les onglets correspondants. Utilisation de la bibliothèque Dans l’affichage Modifier, vous pouvez voir la bibliothèque qui répertorie tous les éléments média d’un projet et vous permet de facilement visualiser et réutiliser les images, arrière-plans, audio et animations de votre projet. Vous pouvez également ouvrir des éléments à modifier à partir de la bibliothèque. Par exemple, vous pouvez cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une image dans la bibliothèque, sélectionner Modifier avec dans le menu et naviguer jusqu’à votre programme de modification d’images préféré. L’image s’ouvre alors dans ce programme et vous pouvez modifier et enregistrer l’image mise à jour dans le projet. Vous pouvez faire flotter la bibliothèque à l’extérieur de la fenêtre du programme ou la déplacer vers un autre emplacement dans la fenêtre. Pour ce faire, placez le pointeur sur le coin supérieur gauche du volet Bibliothèque jusqu’à ce qu’une flèche à quatre pointes s’affiche. Ensuite, faites glisser la bibliothèque vers un bord de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut s’ancrer, ou au milieu de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut flotter. Vous avez toujours la possibilité de remettre la bibliothèque à son emplacement d’origine. Pour chaque élément, les colonnes suivantes sont affichées dans la bibliothèque : Nom, Type, Taille (en kilo-octets), Nb d’utilisations et Date de modification. (Le nombre d’utilisations correspond au nombre de fois où l’élément est utilisé dans le projet.) Cliquez sur le titre de l’une de ces colonnes pour trier la liste des éléments dans chaque dossier de catégorie d’éléments. Vous ne pouvez voir la bibliothèque que si vous êtes en affichage Modifier. Si vous passez à un autre affichage, vous ne pouvez plus voir la bibliothèque. Quand vous revenez à l’affichage Modifier, la bibliothèque réapparaît au même emplacement. Les nouveaux éléments s’affichent dans la bibliothèque lorsque vous ajoutez un élément au projet. Un élément reste dans la bibliothèque, prêt à être réutilisé, même si vous effacez la diapositive sur laquelle il se trouvait à l’origine. Si vous utilisez un élément dans une diapositive et le faites glisser de la bibliothèque vers une autre diapositive, vous pouvez modifier les propriétés de l’élément dans cette diapositive sans affecter les propriétés de la première. Barre d’outils Bibliothèque La barre d’outils Bibliothèque se trouve dans la partie supérieure du volet principal de la bibliothèque, sous le volet d’aperçu de la bibliothèque. Utilisez les options de barre d’outils suivantes pour effectuer les actions correspondantes. • Ouvrir la bibliothèque Ouvre la bibliothèque d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate. Cela vous permet de réutiliser n’importe quel élément se trouvant dans la bibliothèque de ce projet dans votre projet actuel. • Importer Importe une copie d’un élément à partir de la bibliothèque d’un autre projet. • Exporter Enregistre une copie d’un élément à un emplacement à l’extérieur du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 12 • Modifier Ouvre un élément dans l’application de modification précédemment sélectionnée pour ce type de fichier. Cette option n’est pas activée jusqu’à ce que vous sélectionniez une application de modification pour le type de fichier spécifique, par le biais de l’option Modifier avec du menu contextuel d’un élément de la bibliothèque. • Propriétés Ouvre la boîte de dialogue des propriétés pour l’élément sélectionné. • Utilisation Affiche la liste des diapositives sur lesquelles l’élément sélectionné est utilisé. • Mettre à jour Met à jour les éléments de la bibliothèque qui ont été modifiés à l’extérieur du projet. • Sélectionner les éléments inutilisés Met en surbrillance tous les éléments de la bibliothèque qui ne sont actuellement pas utilisés dans le projet. • Supprimer Supprime le ou les éléments sélectionnés du projet. Remarque : Si vous ne voyez pas la barre d’outils Bibliothèque, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la bibliothèque. Affichage des messages de confirmation Les messages de confirmation s’affichent lorsque vous effectuez des actions importantes, et souvent permanentes, dans Adobe Captivate. Les messages de confirmation vous offrent une chance de changer d’avis, comme par exemple de ne pas supprimer une légende. Si vous pensez que certains messages ne sont pas adaptés à votre façon de travailler ou s’ils ralentissent la création de vos projets, vous pouvez désactiver ces messages de confirmation pour des actions que vous effectuez souvent. Pour afficher ou ne pas afficher les messages de confirmation : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Global. 4 Dans la section des messages de confirmation, sélectionnez les actions pour lesquelles vous souhaitez que des messages de confirmation s’affichent. • Supprimer l’objet Affiche un message de confirmation avant de supprimer un objet. • Supprimer la diapositive Affiche un message de confirmation avant de supprimer une diapositive. • Supprimer le groupe de questions Affiche un message avant la suppression d’un groupe de questions. Le même message s’affiche lors de la suppression d’une question dans le Gestionnaire des groupes de questions. • Redimensionner le projet Affiche un message de confirmation avant de redimensionner un projet. Le redimensionnement d’un projet est une action qui ne peut pas être annulée. Il est donc conseillé d’afficher un message de confirmation pour cette action. • Modification de la qualité vidéo Affiche un message avant de modifier la qualité d’une diapositive. • Supprimer l’audio Affiche un message avant de supprimer un fichier audio. • Annuler les modifications audio Affiche un message avant d’annuler des modifications audio (par exemple, ajuster le volume, couper et coller des sections, etc.). • Vérifier les niveaux d’entrée audio Affiche un message avant de modifier les niveaux d’entrée audio (pour les microphones ou les appareils d’enregistrement). • Publier dans un nouveau dossierADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 13 • Modification de la vitesse de lecture Cette option permet d’afficher un message de confirmation avant de modifier la vitesse de lecture. • Instructions concernant l’exportation FLA Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un message de confirmation avant d’exporter un projet Adobe Captivate vers Flash. • Publier et écraser les fichiers Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un message de confirmation lorsque vous publiez des fichiers plusieurs fois au même endroit. Par exemple, vous publiez vers Flash et créez un fichier SWF stocké dans un emplacement particulier. Si vous publiez de nouveau vers Flash, en créant un fichier SWF et en l’enregistrant dans le même emplacement, un message de confirmation s’affiche vous demandant si vous voulez écraser le fichier existant. • Modifier l’audio Affiche un message lors de l’enregistrement, l’importation ou l’ajout de nouvel audio à une diapositive contenant déjà de l’audio. • Etendre l’élément Affiche un message lors de l’ajout d’audio à un objet si la durée de l’audio dépasse la durée de l’objet. • Retirer l’élément de la bibliothèque Affiche un message lorsque vous supprimez un élément de la bibliothèque. • Partage de l’audio Affiche un message lorsque vous modifiez de l’audio qui est utilisé par une autre diapositive. • Duplication de l’audio Affiche un message lorsque vous ajoutez de l’audio qui est déjà utilisé par une autre diapositive. Utilisation des touches de raccourci Les touches de raccourci fournissent une méthode plus simple et plus rapide pour naviguer et pour utiliser Adobe Captivate. Elles vous permettent d’utiliser des combinaisons de touches du clavier au lieu de la souris ou d’un menu du programme. Vous pouvez généralement accéder aux touches de raccourci en utilisant une touche de fonction (F) du clavier, Alt, Ctrl et Maj avec une lettre ou un chiffre. Touche de raccourci Action F1 Ouvrir l’aide d’Adobe Captivate (pour accéder à l’aide spécifique à une boîte de dialogue, cliquez sur le bouton Aide de cette boîte de dialogue) F3 Tester l’affichage de la diapositive courante (affichage Modifier uniquement) F4 Aperçu du projet F5 Enregistrer l’audio F6 Importer l’audio F7 Vérifier l’orthographe et la grammaire F8 Afficher un aperçu du projet à partir de la diapositive courante F9 Afficher la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée F10 Afficher un aperçu de la diapositive courante et des « n » diapositives suivantes F11 Afficher Adobe Captivate en plein écran F12 Afficher un aperçu du projet dans un navigateur Web Ctrl+A Tout sélectionner Ctrl+C Copier (diapositive dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Bande de film, et objet sélectionné dans l’affichage Modifier) ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 14 Ctrl+D Dupliquer (diapositive dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Bande de film, et objet sélectionné dans l’affichage Modifier) Ctrl+E Prolonger la durée d’affichage d’un objet jusqu’à la fin de la diapositive sur le plan de montage chronologique (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+F Ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Rechercher et remplacer Ctrl+G Modifier la diapositive sur qualité optimisée Ctrl+H Modifier la diapositive sur qualité élevée Ctrl+I Augmenter l’indentation (objet sélectionné dans l’affichage Modifier) Ctrl+J Modifier la diapositive sur qualité JPEG Ctrl+K Verrouiller la diapositive Ctrl+L Synchroniser l’objet sélectionné avec la tête de lecture Ctrl+M Fusionner l’objet sélectionné avec l’arrière-plan Ctrl+N Afficher le volet des annotations de la diapositive Ctrl+O Ouvrir un projet Ctrl+P Aligner l’objet sélectionné sur la tête de lecture du plan de montage chronologique (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+Q Insérer une diapositive de questions aléatoires Ctrl+R Imprimer le projet (à partir de la boîte de dialogue Publier) Ctrl+S Enregistrer Ctrl+T Modifier la diapositive sur qualité standard Ctrl+U Modifier avec (dans la bibliothèque du projet) Ctrl+V Coller le contenu du Presse-papiers (par exemple, diapositive, image, objet, etc.) Ctrl+X Couper (objet sélectionné dans l’affichage Modifier) Ctrl+Y Rétablir Ctrl+Z Annuler Ctrl+= Zoom avant Ctrl+- Zoom arrière Ctrl+Tab Pour alterner entre les vues Scénarimage, Modifier et Embranchement Ctrl+Alt+B Afficher les vignettes (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+Alt+D Mettre la bibliothèque à jour Ctrl+Alt+F Trouver dans la bibliothèque Ctrl+Alt+L Afficher la bibliothèque (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+Alt+N Afficher les annotations de la diapositive (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+Alt+O Enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires Ctrl+Alt+R Rétablir la taille d’origine Ctrl+Alt+T Afficher le plan de montage chronologique (affichage Modifier uniquement) Ctrl+Alt+U Utilisation de la bibliothèque Maj+Ctrl+A Ajouter un objet d’animation (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+B Ajouter un nouveau bouton (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Touche de raccourci ActionADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 15 Raccourcis d’agrandissement Maj+Ctrl+C Ajouter une nouvelle légende de texte (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+D Afficher les propriétés de la diapositive Maj+Ctrl+E Insérer une nouvelle zone de zoom (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+F Insérer une vidéo Flash (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+G Afficher la boîte de dialogue Aller à la diapositive Maj+Ctrl+H Masquer/Afficher la diapositive Maj+Ctrl+I Diminuer l’indentation (objet sélectionné dans l’affichage Modifier) Maj+Ctrl+J Insérer une diapositive vide (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+K Ajouter une nouvelle zone de clic (affichages Modifier et Scénarimage uniquement) Maj+Ctrl+M Ajouter une nouvelle image Maj+Ctrl+N Ajouter une nouvelle diapositive d’animation Maj+Ctrl+O Ajouter une nouvelle image de survol Maj+Ctrl+P Publier le fichier Maj+Ctrl+Q Insérer une diapositive de questions Maj+Ctrl+R Insérer une légende de survol Maj+Ctrl+S Insérer une diapositive d’image Maj+Ctrl+T Insérer une zone de texte Maj+Ctrl+U Insérer la souris Maj+Ctrl+V Coller comme arrière-plan Maj+Ctrl+W Insérer une diapositive PowerPoint Maj+Ctrl+X Insérer une animation de texte Maj+Ctrl+Y Copier l’arrière-plan Maj+Ctrl+Z Insérer une mini-diapositive de survol Touche de raccourci Niveau d’agrandissement Ctrl+& 100 % Ctrl+é 200 % Ctrl+" 300 % Ctrl+’ 400 % Ctrl+= Zoom avant Ctrl+- Zoom arrière Touche de raccourci ActionADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 16 Annulation et rétablissement des actions Vous pouvez annuler la dernière action en utilisant la commande Annuler. Vous pouvez aussi annuler l’action de la commande Annuler en utilisant la commande Rétablir. Pour annuler une action : • Dans le menu Modifier, sélectionnez Annuler ou appuyez sur Ctrl+Z. Chaque clic annule une action supplémentaire. Continuez à sélectionner Annuler (ou à appuyer sur Ctrl+Z) pour supprimer les modifications précédentes selon vos besoins. Lorsque la commande Annuler n’est pas disponible (elle s’affiche alors en grisé), vous ne pouvez pas annuler l’action précédente. Adobe Captivate enregistre les actions depuis l’instant où vous ouvrez un projet jusqu’au moment où vous le fermez. Vous pouvez donc annuler les actions autant de fois que vous le souhaitez tant que le projet reste ouvert. Pour rétablir une action : • Après avoir utilisé la commande Annuler, depuis le menu Modifier, sélectionnez Rétablir ou appuyez sur Ctrl+Y. Modification des touches de capture Adobe Captivate dispose de touches par défaut pour démarrer et arrêter l’enregistrement (enregistrement standard Flash et enregistrement d’images animées). Vous pouvez modifier ces touches à votre convenance. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les touches Echap, Entrée, Tab, Barre d’espace, Maj (sans Ctrl ou Alt), F1 ou Effacement arrière dans une combinaison de touches. Pour modifier les touches de capture d’enregistrement : 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : a Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. Dans le panneau Catégorie de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, sélectionnez Enregistrement. b Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. Dans le panneau Catégorie de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Touches. 2 Pour modifier les touches, cliquez une fois dans un des champs et, sur le clavier, appuyez sur la touche ou la combinaison de touches que vous voulez utiliser. Par exemple, cliquez dans le champ d’arrêt de l’enregistrement, puis appuyez sur Maj+Alt+4. La combinaison de touches entrée s’affiche désormais dans le champ d’arrêt de l’enregistrement. Vous pouvez utiliser presque toutes les touches y compris les touches Ctrl, Alt, Maj+Ctrl ou Maj+Alt. Par exemple, vous pouvez définir la touche d’arrêt de l’enregistrement sur Alt+R. 3 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 17 A propos du moniteur de bande passante Adobe Captivate permet d’afficher la quantité de bande passante nécessaire pour un projet sélectionné. Vous pouvez vérifier la bande passante nécessaire pour chaque diapositive, ainsi que la qualité prévisible du transfert en fonction de divers types de connexions. Grâce à ces informations, vous pouvez effectuer les ajustements nécessaires. Pour analyser la bande passante d’un projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Analyse de bande passante. 3 Adobe Captivate génère les diapositives et la boîte de dialogue Moniteur de la bande passante s’affiche. 4 Cette boîte de dialogue comporte trois onglets : Récapitulatif des diapositives, Graphique et Récapitulatif du projet. Naviguez dans les onglets selon vos besoins. 5 Le Récapitulatif des diapositives fournit des informations sur chaque diapositive. Onglet Récapitulatif des diapositives Cet onglet fournit des informations sur la vitesse et la taille de la diapositive. • Diapositive Affiche le numéro de la diapositive. • Ko par sec (Kilo-octets par seconde) L’expérience montre que les images dont le temps de chargement n’excède pas 3 Ko par seconde peuvent être lues de façon fluide via une connexion Internet de type modem. Les images dont la bande passante est plus importante peuvent, selon plusieurs facteurs, entraîner la pause de la lecture du projet. Si les images précédentes nécessitent une bande passante inférieure, l’image à bande passante plus élevée peut être téléchargée à une vitesse acceptable. Le temps de chargement (Ko/s) de la première image d’un projet est plus élevé, d’une part car c’est la première à être chargée et, d’autre part, car des informations supplémentaires concernant le projet sont chargées en parallèle. • Secondes La durée de l’image en secondes. • Vidéo (Ko) La taille de toute séquence vidéo intégrée. • Audio (Ko) La taille de tout élément audio intégré. Graphique Cet onglet indique les différents flux du projet dans le temps selon différentes vitesses haut débit et de modem. Vous pouvez afficher les images nécessitant une bande passante élevée et voir comment elles s’affichent avec des types de connexions courants. Récapitulatif du projet Cet onglet donne des informations concernant le projet. La taille et le nombre de Ko par seconde sont fournis pour chaque élément de projet. La taille est plus importante que le nombre de Ko par seconde. Par exemple, un projet de 500 Ko de 60 secondes s’affiche en 8,3 Ko par seconde : cela exige une connexion haut débit. D’un autre côté, un projet de 2 000 Ko de dix minutes s’affiche en 3,3 Ko par seconde et peut être lu même sur une connexion modem lente. 6 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Imprimer pour imprimer les informations affichées. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Une fois que vous avez identifié les images nécessitant une connexion haut débit, vous pouvez réduire leur impact sur le projet en prolongeant la durée d’une image nécessitant une connexion haut débit ou de la/des image(s) précédente(s). N’effectuez ces modifications que si vous disposez d’une bande passante limitée ou si vous avez remarqué que la lecture du projet sur Internet occasionne des interruptions perturbatrices.18 Chapitre 3 : Création de projets Vous pouvez créer de nouveaux projets dans Adobe® Captivate™ en important des fichiers existants, en modifiant ou en copiant des projets Adobe Captivate existants, en travaillant à partir de modèles, en suivant les étapes de l’Assistant de projet ou en ouvrant un projet vide. Adobe Captivate vous permet de spécifier de nombreux paramètres et options de projet ; vous pouvez donc personnaliser entièrement chaque projet selon vos besoins précis. Vous pouvez utiliser Adobe Captivate pour générer des projets en mode Démonstration, Formation ou Evaluation. Créez un projet en mode Démonstration pour effectuer des captures d’écran des opérations réalisées dans une application logicielle. Vous pouvez utiliser cette présentation pour faire la démonstration du fonctionnement d’une application logicielle à un public. Si vous générez un projet en mode Simulation de formation, vous pouvez inclure du contenu de formation pour les personnes à qui la formation est destinée. Vous pouvez enregistrer un projet Adobe Captivate en mode Simulation d’évaluation pour évaluer la formation fournie à votre public. Ouverture de projets existants Adobe Captivate stocke les projets dans le dossier Mes projets Adobe Captivate, qui est placé dans le dossier Mes documents lorsqu’Adobe Captivate est installé. Lorsque vous démarrez Adobe Captivate, les projets stockés dans le dossier Mes projets Adobe Captivate sont automatiquement répertoriés sur la page de démarrage sous Ouvrir un projet récent. Tous les projets Adobe Captivate utilisent l’extension de fichier .cp. Pour ouvrir un projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sous Ouvrir un projet récent, cliquez sur le projet que vous désirez ouvrir. Si le projet n’est pas répertorié, cliquez sur Ouvrir et naviguez jusqu’au projet. L’emplacement de stockage par défaut pour les projets est Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. Important : Lorsque vous ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate créé à partir d’une version antérieure d’Adobe Captivate ou à partir de RoboDemo, Adobe Captivate vous demande de mettre Adobe Captivate à niveau ou de convertir le projet en projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez écraser le projet existant ou créer un nouveau projet. Vous ne pouvez pas ouvrir le nouveau projet Adobe Captivate avec une version antérieure d’Adobe Captivate. Les projets créés à partir de RoboDemo 5 portent une extension .rd ou .fcz. Lorsque vous ouvrez un projet RoboDemo dans Adobe Captivate, Adobe Captivate le convertit automatiquement et lui attribue la nouvelle extension de fichier Adobe Captivate : .cp. Adobe Captivate ne prend pas en charge les projets créés avec les versions de RoboDemo antérieures à la version 5. A propos de la planification de projets Vous pouvez commencer à enregistrer des projets Adobe Captivate immédiatement en utilisant les paramètres par défaut, mais un petit peu de planification et la personnalisation de certains paramètres d’enregistrement peuvent être utiles. Adobe Captivate permet de créer un projet simple rapidement ou de créer un projet plus sophistiqué avec des images, de la musique de fond, des animations, des vidéos Flash, des commentaires (avec sous-titres) et des légendes détaillées.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 19 Quel que soit le type de projet que vous voulez créer, la planification s’avère d’une grande utilité préalablement à la réalisation des captures d’écran. Déterminez tout d’abord ce que vous souhaitez que l’utilisateur fasse, apprenne ou accomplisse suite à la visualisation du projet. En prenant en compte cet objectif principal, vous pouvez élaborer une planification complète garante du succès du projet. Une fois que vous avez défini le type de réaction que vous attendez du public, vous pouvez créer la « ligne directrice » du projet. Une fois que vous êtes prêt à rédiger le contenu du projet, vous pouvez utiliser des scénarimages ou des scripts. Les scénarimages sont des croquis simples qui affichent le contenu des diverses diapositives de votre projet. Si vous prévoyez de réaliser un projet essentiellement basé sur des captures d’écran (avec peu de légendes et de texte explicatif), l’utilisation d’un scénarimage est probablement la meilleure méthode. Vous pouvez utiliser Adobe Captivate pour créer des scénarimages. Enregistrez une première version de votre projet, ajoutez quelques diapositives vides aux endroits appropriés, puis publiez le projet sous forme de documentation. Vous pouvez inclure de 1 à 9 diapositives par page et ajouter des lignes vides pour des annotations. Les scripts sont des pages de texte. Ils ressemblent aux pages d’un livre : ils sont logiques, séquentiels et comportent autant de détails que vous le souhaitez. Si votre projet contient un gros volume de texte (légendes), l’utilisation d’un script est la méthode la plus adaptée. Lors de la planification de projets, pensez à la possibilité d’ajouter les éléments suivants : • Page de titre • Page de remerciements • Page de copyright • Graphique d’ouverture / de fermeture ou écran d’accueil • Son (commentaires, musique ou effets sonores) • Images • Text e animé • Zones interactives • Quiz (si nécessaire) Enregistrement d’applications avec élévation de privilèges dans Windows Vista Vous devez attribuer des permissions de niveau Administrateur au fichier AdobeCaptivate.exe pour pouvoir enregistrer ou capturer l’activité des applications s’exécutant en mode élevé/administrateur. Pour attribuer des permissions Administrateur à AdobeCaptivate.exe : 1 Localisez AdobeCaptivate.exe dans votre répertoire d’installation. Si vous n’avez pas modifié les paramètres de l’installation, vous pouvez trouver ce fichier dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3. 2 Cliquez sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Exécuter en tant qu’administrateur. La boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Continuer. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 20 Conseils et astuces d’enregistrement Les conseils et astuces suivants peuvent vous aider à créer rapidement et facilement des projets Adobe Captivate de qualité, d’apparence professionnelle. Conseil 1 – Pensez à l’enregistrement automatique Adobe Captivate vous permet de créer des projets de deux façons. Vous pouvez manuellement enregistrer des actions à l’écran. Cela signifie que chaque fois que vous souhaitez capturer le contenu de votre écran, vous devez appuyer sur la touche Impr écran (ou une autre touche définie) du clavier. Vous effectuez ensuite une modification sur votre écran (déplacement de la souris, sélection d’une icône ou d’un menu, par exemple) et appuyez une nouvelle fois sur Impr écran. Vous pouvez également laisser Adobe Captivate enregistrer automatiquement les actions à l’écran (enregistrement automatique). Cette option permet d’effectuer automatiquement des captures d’écran au cours de l’enregistrement à chaque clic de souris, chaque manipulation de votre application ou page Web ou lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. Vous pouvez également créer efficacement des projets en utilisant conjointement les options d’enregistrement automatique et d’enregistrement manuel. Définissez l’option d’enregistrement automatique, mais appuyez sur Impr écran chaque fois que vous avez besoin d’effectuer une capture d’écran supplémentaire. Cette méthode est particulièrement efficace si vous enregistrez un site Web qui contient des fenêtres contextuelles, des images et des effets spéciaux. Si l’option est activée, Adobe Captivate émettra un son d’obturateur d’appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran automatique. Si vous voyez un effet sur une page Web que vous enregistrez, mais si vous n’entendez pas le bruit d’obturateur d’appareil photo, appuyez sur Impr écran pour effectuer une capture d’écran manuelle. Conseil 2 – Effectuez vos actions plus lentement, surtout si vous enregistrez des sites Web dans Internet Explorer Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. Il est particulièrement important d’aller plus lentement lorsque vous capturez un site Web dans Internet Explorer. Si vous enregistrez manuellement, assurez-vous que chaque page Web est complètement chargée avant d’effectuer une capture d’écran. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement, vous entendez le son d’obturateur d’appareil photo et voyez l’icône de la zone de notification (dans le coin inférieur droit de votre ordinateur) clignoter lorsqu’une page Web est entièrement chargée et qu’Adobe Captivate effectue une capture d’écran. Attendez jusqu’à ce que vous entendiez le son de l’obturateur avant de déplacer la souris et d’effectuer une autre action. Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement, vous pouvez effectuer une capture d’écran manuellement à tout moment en appuyant sur la touche Impr écran. C’est utile si vous voyez que la page Web a changé, mais si vous n’avez pas entendu le son de l’obturateur, car cela signifie que la capture d’écran n’a pas été automatiquement effectuée. Conseil 3 – Effectuez des captures d’écran efficacement Il est important de savoir exactement quand Adobe Captivate effectue des captures d’écran. Adobe Captivate contient une fonctionnalité qui émet un son d’« obturateur d’appareil photo » chaque fois qu’une capture d’écran est effectuée. Cette fonctionnalité est activée par défaut. Cependant, si vous n’entendez pas le son, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Préférences (Modifier > Préférences), sélectionnez Enregistrement et assurez-vous que l’option Entendre les bruits d’appareil photo au cours de l’enregistrement est sélectionnée. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement, Adobe Captivate effectue une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme déplacer la souris, sélectionner un menu ou taper des données dans un champ. Le son d’obturateur d’appareil photo est émis chaque fois qu’une action se déroule.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 21 Si vous enregistrez manuellement, Adobe Captivate effectue des captures d’écran chaque fois que vous appuyez sur une touche ou une combinaison de touches définie. La touche de capture par défaut est la touche Impr écran du clavier. Chaque fois que vous voulez effectuer une capture d’écran, appuyez sur Impr écran ; vous entendrez le son d’obturateur d’appareil photo. Vous pouvez également utiliser les deux méthodes d’enregistrement ensemble. Activez l’option d’enregistrement automatique. Pendant qu’Adobe Captivate effectue des captures d’écran, vous pouvez utiliser la touche Impr écran pour capturer manuellement un écran lorsque vous en avez besoin. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez Microsoft Internet Explorer, il est possible que des menus dynamiques HTML ou Flash s’affichent uniquement lorsque la souris les survole. Adobe Captivate ne capture pas automatiquement la modification qui se produit lors du survol de la souris (vous vous en rendrez compte car vous n’entendrez aucun son d’obturateur d’appareil photo), mais vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche Impr écran et capturer la modification manuellement. Conseil 4 – Définissez une résolution d’écran appropriée Sélectionnez une résolution d’écran appropriée avant de réaliser les captures d’écran. Le choix de la résolution d’écran est fonction du public ciblé. Si votre présentation vise des utilisateurs du Web, n’oubliez pas que la résolution de leur ordinateur peut ne pas dépasser 640 x 480 et qu’une partie de l’écran est occupée par l’interface utilisateur du navigateur Web. Considérant ces utilisateurs, il semble judicieux de choisir une faible résolution (512 x 384) pour réaliser des projets. Une autre option est le mode Plein écran avec le paramètre 640 x 480 ou 800 x 600. Cette résolution légèrement plus élevée peut s’avérer intéressante si les projets sont lus sur un intranet ou par des utilisateurs équipés d’une connexion haut débit. Si vous créez des projets à diffuser sur CD ou sur un média à large bande passante, définissez la taille du projet à 1 024 x 768 ou 800 x 600. Conseil 5 – Désactivez le papier peint Le papier peint du bureau est à éviter dans un projet, car il peut capter l’attention de l’utilisateur final et le détourner du projet lui-même. De plus, un papier peint coloré augmente la taille du projet (notamment les photos en arrièreplan) et en réduit la précision des couleurs, particulièrement nombreuses quand il s’agit d’afficher un tel papier peint. L’idéal est d’utiliser une couleur d’arrière-plan unie. Pour obtenir un résultat professionnel, choisissez une couleur d’arrière-plan identique à celle de la page Web sur laquelle le projet sera affiché. Conseil 6 – Désactivez les icônes Les icônes, comme le papier peint, sont sources de distraction. Réduisez le nombre d’icônes en les disposant dans une barre d’outils. Vous pouvez également réduire le nombre d’icônes de la barre des tâches. Vous pouvez masquer complètement la barre des tâches en cliquant sur Démarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis en double-cliquant sur Barre des tâches et menu Démarrer dans la fenêtre Panneau de configuration. Sélectionnez ensuite Masquer automatiquement la Barre de tâches. Conseil 7 – Supprimez les thèmes et les couleurs non standard Les thèmes et les modèles de couleur reflètent vos goûts personnels et peuvent ne pas donner un bon résultat dans la version définitive du projet. Vous obtiendrez de meilleurs résultats en sélectionnant un thème standard de Windows et en conservant le modèle de couleurs par défaut. (Les étapes peuvent varier selon votre système d’exploitation.)ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 22 Conseil 8 – Supprimez les dégradés de couleurs Les dégradés de couleurs dans les barres de titre des fenêtres augmentent la taille des fichiers de vos projets. Pour désactiver les dégradés de couleurs dans les barres de titre, cliquez sur Démarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Affichage. Cliquez sur l’onglet Apparence, cliquez sur Avancé et localisez le menu déroulant Elément. Sélectionnez Barre de titre active et définissez la même couleur pour Couleur et Couleur 2. Les étapes peuvent varier selon votre système d’exploitation. Techniques d’enregistrement et de réenregistrement Adobe Captivate offre de nombreuses options lorsque vous créez un nouveau projet. Vous pouvez enregistrer des actions automatiquement, utiliser à la fois les options automatique et manuelle ou bénéficier d’un plus grand contrôle en enregistrant manuellement. La décision d’utiliser l’enregistrement automatique ou manuel dépend du but du projet et du temps dont vous disposez. Si vous avez besoin de créer un projet court rapidement, laissez Adobe Captivate enregistrer automatiquement les tâches. Si vous créez un projet plus long et plus détaillé, essayez une combinaison d’options d’enregistrement automatique et manuel. Testez les différentes options d’enregistrement pour trouver la combinaison qui marche le mieux pour vous. Dans Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez définir une touche pour suspendre et reprendre le processus d’enregistrement, ce qui vous permet d’alterner entre enregistrement automatique et enregistrement manuel d’une simulation logicielle. Effectuer des captures d’écran Lorsque vous enregistrez un projet, vous pouvez laisser Adobe Captivate effectuer automatiquement des captures d’écran ou vous pouvez les capturer manuellement. Si vous décidez d’enregistrer automatiquement, Adobe Captivate effectue une capture d’écran de chaque action, comme cliquer sur un bouton ou sur un menu. Adobe Captivate contient une fonctionnalité qui émet un son d’obturateur d’appareil photo chaque fois qu’une capture d’écran est effectuée pour vous aider à déterminer le moment exact des captures d’écran. Si vous choisissez d’enregistrer manuellement, appuyez sur la touche de capture désignée (la touche par défaut du clavier est Impr écran) chaque fois que vous voulez effectuer une capture d’écran. Vous pouvez également utiliser les deux techniques ensemble. Sélectionnez l’option d’enregistrement automatique et laissez Adobe Captivate effectuer des captures d’écran. Si vous avez besoin d’une capture d’écran au cours de l’enregistrement automatique, appuyez sur Impr écran selon vos besoins. Dans Adobe Captivate, lors de la création d’une nouvelle simulation logicielle, vous pouvez sélectionner l’option permettant d’utiliser un fichier de script de réenregistrement. Le script effectue automatiquement des captures d’écran de l’application logicielle et génère un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez définir une touche pour suspendre et reprendre le processus de réenregistrement, ce qui vous permet d’alterner entre réenregistrement automatique et réenregistrement manuel d’une simulation logicielle. Diapositives supplémentaires Si vous capturez des diapositives supplémentaires pour les ajouter dans le projet ou à la fin du projet, les mêmes options que celles utilisées pour enregistrer un projet sont disponibles. Vous pouvez laisser Adobe Captivate capturer les diapositives automatiquement, vous pouvez les capturer manuellement ou vous pouvez utiliser une combinaison des deux.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 23 Effectuer des captures d’écran d’images animées Si vous enregistrez un projet ou des diapositives supplémentaires qui contiennent des mouvements de glisserdéposer, des défilements de la molette de la souris ou des dessins (par exemple, dans un programme graphique), Adobe Captivate peut enregistrer ces actions spéciales à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée pour que les actions soient plus fluides et aient l’air plus réalistes. Cela s’appelle un enregistrement d’images animées. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement un projet ou des diapositives, vous pouvez laisser Adobe Captivate capturer automatiquement les mouvements de glisser-déposer, les actions de la molette de la souris ou les dessins avec des images animées. Adobe Captivate démarrera automatiquement la capture d’images à une vitesse plus élevée chaque fois que vous cliquez sur un objet et que vous le faites glisser ou que vous commencez à dessiner. Lorsque vous arrêtez le glissement ou finissez le dessin, l’enregistrement d’images animées se termine et l’enregistrement normal recommence. Si vous enregistrez manuellement, vous pouvez contrôler le moment ou l’enregistrement d’images animées commence et finit. Pour commencer l’enregistrement d’images animées à tout moment, appuyez sur F9. Pour terminer l’enregistrement d’images animées, appuyez sur F10. Légendes de texte Les légendes de texte sont du texte créé pendant l’enregistrement en mode Démonstration et Personnaliser. Les légendes de texte s’affichent sur une diapositive du projet. Les légendes de texte sont une façon de « parler » aux utilisateurs et sont souvent utilisées pour attirer l’attention sur certaines zones de diapositives, pour expliquer des concepts ou pour donner davantage d’informations aux utilisateurs (par exemple, un numéro de téléphone ou une adresse Web). Vous pouvez créer des légendes de texte automatiquement ou manuellement. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement un projet ou des diapositives supplémentaires, vous pouvez laisser Adobe Captivate créer automatiquement des légendes de texte en même temps. Les légendes de texte sont générées pour plusieurs actions comme sélectionner un menu ou appuyer sur un bouton. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez l’action consistant à sélectionner le menu Fichier, Adobe Captivate ajoute automatiquement une légende « Sélectionner le menu Fichier » dans la même diapositive. Une fois que les légendes de texte sont créées et placées sur des diapositives, vous pouvez modifier le texte ou changer le formatage à tout moment. Si vous créez un projet manuellement, vous pouvez ajouter des légendes de texte selon vos besoins. Zones de clic Les zones de clic sont des zones interactives créées pendant l’enregistrement en mode Simulation d’évaluation, Simulation de formation ou Personnaliser. Les zones de clic s’affichent sur les diapositives et permettent aux utilisateurs d’« utiliser » une application ou un site Web. Lorsque les utilisateurs cliquent sur une zone de clic, vous pouvez faire en sorte que le projet effectue différentes actions comme continuer la lecture, ouvrir un nouveau projet ou aller sur un site Web spécifique. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement un projet ou des diapositives, Adobe Captivate peut ajouter des zones de clic automatiquement. Vous pouvez à tout moment ajouter des zones de clic à un projet existant. Zones de texte automatiques Les zones de texte automatiques sont des zones interactives créées pendant l’enregistrement en mode Simulation d’évaluation, Formation ou Personnaliser. Les zones de texte automatiques sont créées lorsque vous tapez du texte pendant l’enregistrement. Pendant l’enregistrement, le texte de la zone de texte automatique est interrompu quand vous appuyez sur la touche de tabulation ou Entrée pour terminer la zone de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 24 Pour activer les zones de texte automatiques pendant l’enregistrement : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. Dans le panneau Catégorie de la boîte de dialogue Préférences, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Mode(s). 2 Dans Mode, sélectionnez un type de simulation. Les options disponibles sont Démonstration, Simulation d’évaluation, Simulation de formation et Personnaliser. 3 Dans la section Zones de texte, sélectionnez Ajouter automatiquement des zones de texte dans les champs texte et sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Légende de conseil Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un conseil destiné à l’utilisateur. Légende de succès Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message de succès destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende de succès peut être « Oui, c’est correct ». Légende d’échec Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message d’échec destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende d’échec peut être « Désolé, c’est incorrect. Essayez de nouveau. » Limiter les tentatives à [#] Spécifie le nombre de fois que l’utilisateur peut essayer d’entrer le texte correctement dans une zone de texte. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour en sélectionner un. Remarque : Cette option n’est pas disponible si vous avez choisi le mode Démonstration. 4 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Une zone de texte automatique ne peut pas être créée dans des applications comme Java, JavaScript, Flash et DOS. Quand vous tapez un caractère nécessitant la touche Maj, veillez à maintenir la touche Maj enfoncée jusqu’à ce que vous ayez appuyé sur la touche du caractère en question. Par exemple, pour inclure le caractère « ? » à votre texte, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et appuyez simultanément sur la touche « , ». Zones de surbrillance Les zones de surbrillance sont créées pendant l’enregistrement en mode Démonstration et Personnaliser. Les zones de surbrillance sont des carrés transparents et colorés qui peuvent être placés sur la zone d’une diapositive pour attirer l’attention sur cette zone, de la même manière que vous utilisez un surligneur sur une page imprimée. Vous contrôlez entièrement le formatage, la couleur, la transparence et la taille des zones de surbrillance. Si vous enregistrez automatiquement un projet ou des diapositives, Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement créer une zone de surbrillance pour chaque zone sur laquelle un clic de souris est effectué. Vous pouvez ajouter des zones de surbrillance manuellement à un projet existant. Définition des options d’enregistrement Il est généralement préférable de définir des options d’enregistrement avant d’enregistrer un nouveau projet de manière à ce que la plupart des options appropriées soient configurées. Cela peut vous faire gagner énormément de temps en réduisant le nombre de modifications nécessaires pour que vos projets Adobe Captivate soient parfaits. Bien qu’il soit recommandé de définir les options avant de démarrer l’enregistrement, vous pouvez modifier les options d’enregistrement depuis un projet Adobe Captivate à tout moment. C’est utile si vous avez un projet ouvert et voulez enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 25 Pour définir les options d’enregistrement : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate, puis effectuez l’une des actions suivantes : • Cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet et sélectionnez le type d’enregistrement dans la boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet. Cliquez sur Paramètres dans la fenêtre d’enregistrement qui s’affiche. • Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 2 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement, sélectionnez Paramètres, puis faites votre choix parmi les options suivantes : Enregistrement automatique Effectue automatiquement des captures d’écran pendant le processus d’enregistrement. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Les actions qui génèrent des diapositives sont notamment : cliquer sur la souris, manipuler une application ou une page Web, appuyer sur une touche de capture, ouvrir un menu, ouvrir une boîte de dialogue, cliquer sur un bouton d’une barre d’outils, glisser-déposer et cliquer sur un bouton. Enregistrement manuel Effectuez des captures d’écran manuellement à l’aide de la touche Impr écran. Enregistrer un commentaire Enregistre l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner Enregistrer un commentaire et Entendre les bruits d’appareil photo au cours de l’enregistrement ou du réenregistrement. Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’une de ces deux options, l’autre est automatiquement désactivée. Entendre les bruits d’appareil photo au cours de l’enregistrement Permet d’entendre un bruit d’« obturateur d’appareil photo » à chaque fois qu’une capture d’écran est effectuée au cours de l’enregistrement. L’activation de ce son est utile pour connaître le moment exact où une capture d’écran est effectuée. Le bruit d’appareil photo n’est pas audible dans la version définitive du projet. Enregistrer les frappes de touches Enregistre les actions au clavier. Adobe Captivate enregistre les entrées au clavier mais n’effectue pas une capture d’écran de chaque caractère. Les frappes de touches sont incluses dans la version définitive du projet. Entendre les bruits de frappe sur le clavier Rend les bruits de frappe sur le clavier audibles pendant l’enregistrement. Les bruits de frappe sur clavier sont inclus dans le projet enregistré. Paramètres audio Cliquez sur Paramètres audio afin de définir les préférences audio pour l’enregistrement de votre projet. Consultez « Définition des options d’enregistrement audio » pour plus d’informations. Masquer la fenêtre d’enregistrement Masque le rectangle rouge qui s’affiche au cours de l’enregistrement. Masquer l’icône de tâche Adobe Captivate Masque l’icône de tâche pendant l’enregistrement. Lorsque vous enregistrez avec les options plein écran, vous voyez qu’Adobe Captivate est une application ouverte. Si cela gêne votre enregistrement, vous pouvez masquer Adobe Captivate grâce à cette option. Masquer l’icône de la zone de notification d’Adobe Captivate Masque l’icône de la zone de notification pendant l’enregistrement. Il s’agit de la petite icône Adobe Captivate qui s’affiche dans la zone de notification dans le coin inférieur droit de l’écran de l’ordinateur. Si vous avez besoin d’enregistrer cette zone de l’écran de l’ordinateur, mais ne voulez pas que l’icône Adobe Captivate s’affiche dans votre projet, cette option vous permet de masquer l’icône. Déplacer les nouvelles fenêtres dans la zone d’enregistrement Adobe Captivate récupère automatiquement les fenêtres qui s’ouvrent lorsque vous enregistrez et les déplace dans la fenêtre de capture rouge. C’est particulièrement utile si vous enregistrez une application dans laquelle de nombreuses boîtes de dialogue s’ouvrent lorsque vous utilisez l’application.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 26 3 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (précédemment), sélectionnez Paramètres par défaut afin de spécifier le style de légende par défaut à utiliser pour les légendes. 4 Sélectionnez Mode(s). Dans le menu Mode, sélectionnez chaque mode d’enregistrement dans la liste et spécifiez les paramètres d’objets appropriés. Ajouter automatiquement le texte des légendes Crée automatiquement des légendes basées sur les actions que vous effectuez pendant l’enregistrement automatique. Les actions qui génèrent une légende sont les suivantes : sélection de menus et d’options de menu, manipulation de boutons, modification de valeurs dans des listes ou des zones de listes déroulantes, sélection de cases à cocher et ouverture de fenêtres enfants. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez le menu Fichier, Adobe Captivate ajoute une légende « Sélectionner le menu Fichier » dans la même diapositive. En mode Démonstration, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. Convertir les infobulles en légendes de survol Convertit automatiquement les infobulles (petites fenêtres flottantes de texte qui s’affichent lorsque la souris de l’utilisateur survole les boutons) sur les écrans que vous capturez en légendes de survol. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. Sélectionnez-la si nécessaire. Afficher l’emplacement et le mouvement du curseur de la souris Affiche tout mouvement de la souris pendant l’enregistrement automatique. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Démonstration. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de surbrillance à chaque clic de souris Crée automatiquement des zones de surbrillance chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des écrans que vous enregistrez automatiquement. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Démonstration. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de clic en cas de clic de souris Crée automatiquement des zones de clic chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des écrans que vous enregistrez automatiquement. En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. • Légende de conseil Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un conseil destiné à l’utilisateur. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Simulation de formation. • Légende de succès Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message de succès destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende de succès peut être « Oui, c’est correct ». Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Légende d’échec Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message d’échec destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende d’échec peut être « Désolé, c’est incorrect. Essayez de nouveau. » En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Limiter les tentatives à [#] Spécifie le nombre de fois que l’utilisateur peut essayer d’entrer le texte correctement dans une zone de texte. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour en sélectionner un. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Afficher le curseur en forme de main lorsque le pointeur de la souris se trouve sur la zone de clic Affiche le curseur en forme de main lorsque l’étudiant place le pointeur de la souris sur la zone de clic. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de texte dans les champs texte Crée automatiquement des zones de texte chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des zones de texte que vous enregistrez automatiquement. En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 27 • Légende de conseil Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un conseil destiné à l’utilisateur. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Simulation de formation. • Légende de succès Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message de succès destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende de succès peut être « Oui, c’est correct ». Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Légende d’échec Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message d’échec destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende d’échec peut être « Désolé, c’est incorrect. Essayez de nouveau. » En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Limiter les tentatives à [#] Spécifie le nombre de fois que l’utilisateur peut essayer d’entrer le texte correctement dans une zone de texte. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour en sélectionner un. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. 5 Pour définir les préférences concernant l’enregistrement d’images animées, sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées et faites votre choix parmi les options suivantes : Utiliser automatiquement l’enregistrement d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer Enregistre automatiquement toutes les actions de glisser-déposer (par exemple, sélectionner une image et la faire glisser vers une autre zone de l’application ou de l’écran). Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris Enregistre automatiquement toutes les actions de la molette de la souris. Afficher la souris en mode de capture d’images animées Inclut les déplacements de la souris à l’enregistrement d’images animées. Désactiver l’accélération du matériel Crée un film plus fluide (avec notamment de meilleurs déplacements de la souris) en désactivant l’accélération du matériel. Lorsque l’accélération du matériel est activée, elle utilise parfois beaucoup de ressources du système et donne des enregistrements d’images animées moins fluides. La désactivation de l’accélération du matériel donne souvent une meilleure qualité d’enregistrement d’images animées. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, des papillotements risquent d’apparaître sur l’écran de votre ordinateur lorsque vous commencez et arrêtez l’enregistrement d’images animées. Ce papillotement n’endommage pas votre ordinateur et n’apparaît pas dans le projet final. Dossier de travail Le dossier dans lequel les fichiers temporaires sont stockés sur votre disque dur local. Pour changer le chemin par défaut, cliquez sur Parcourir. L’option suivante est disponible dans la section Conversion SWF : Mode de couleur vidéo Définit la couleur de votre vidéo (16 bits ou 32 bits). Si vous sélectionnez 16 bits, vous aurez un fichier de petite taille, mais également une gamme de couleurs plus restreinte. Si vous sélectionnez 32 bits, vous aurez un fichier de taille plus grande, mais également une plus grande gamme de couleurs. 6 Sélectionnez Touches afin de définir les options suivantes pour les touches d’enregistrement. Pour arrêter l’enregistrement, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche à utiliser pour terminer une session d’enregistrement. La touche du clavier par défaut est Fin. Pour suspendre/reprendre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche à utiliser pour suspendre une session d’enregistrement. La touche du clavier par défaut est Pause. Pour reprendre le réenregistrement, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche à utiliser pour suspendre une session de réenregistrement. La touche du clavier par défaut est F8. Pour effectuer une capture d’écran manuellement, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche sur laquelle appuyer pour effectuer une capture d’écran. La touche du clavier par défaut est Impr écran.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 28 Pour démarrer l’enregistrement d’images animées, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche sur laquelle appuyer pour démarrer l’enregistrement d’images animées. La touche du clavier par défaut est F9. Pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées, appuyez sur Spécifie la touche sur laquelle appuyer pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées. La touche du clavier par défaut est F10. 7 Cliquez sur OK pour revenir à la fenêtre d’enregistrement. Configuration des paramètres d’objets pour les différents modes d’enregistrement Après avoir sélectionné plusieurs modes pour générer un projet Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez aussi configurer les objets que vous voulez ajouter automatiquement au projet pendant la capture. Pour configurer les paramètres d’objets pour des modes d’enregistrement différents : 1 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : a Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement. b Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement. 2 Sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode de simulation dans le menu Mode. 3 Sélectionnez ou désélectionnez les options suivantes dans la zone Légendes selon vos besoins. Ajouter automatiquement le texte des légendes Crée automatiquement des légendes basées sur les actions que vous effectuez pendant l’enregistrement automatique. Les actions qui génèrent une légende sont les suivantes : sélection de menus et d’options de menu, manipulation de boutons, modification de valeurs dans des listes ou zones de listes déroulantes, sélection de cases à cocher et ouverture de fenêtres enfants. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez le menu Fichier, Adobe Captivate ajoute une légende « Sélectionner le menu Fichier » dans la même diapositive. En mode Démonstration, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. Convertir les infobulles en légendes de survol Convertit automatiquement les infobulles (petites fenêtres flottantes de texte qui s’affichent lorsque la souris de l’utilisateur survole les boutons) sur les écrans que vous capturez en légendes de survol. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. Sélectionnez-la si nécessaire. 4 Sélectionnez ou désélectionnez les options suivantes dans la zone de la souris selon vos besoins. Afficher l’emplacement et le mouvement du curseur de la souris Affiche tout mouvement de la souris pendant l’enregistrement automatique. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Démonstration. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de surbrillance à chaque clic de souris Crée automatiquement des zones de surbrillance chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des écrans que vous enregistrez automatiquement. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Démonstration. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. 5 Sélectionnez ou désélectionnez les options suivantes dans la zone Zones de clic selon vos besoins. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de clic en cas de clic de souris Crée automatiquement des zones de clic chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des écrans que vous enregistrez automatiquement. En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 29 • Légende de conseil Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un conseil destiné à l’utilisateur. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Simulation de formation. • Légende de succès Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message de succès destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende de succès peut être « Oui, c’est correct ». Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Légende d’échec Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message d’échec destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende d’échec peut être « Désolé, c’est incorrect. Essayez de nouveau. » En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Limiter les tentatives à [#] Spécifie le nombre de fois que l’utilisateur peut essayer d’entrer le texte correctement dans une zone de texte. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour en sélectionner un. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Afficher le curseur en forme de main lorsque le pointeur de la souris se trouve sur la zone de clic Affiche le curseur en forme de main lorsque l’étudiant place le pointeur de la souris sur la zone de clic. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. 6 Sélectionnez ou désélectionnez les options suivantes dans la zone Zones de texte, selon vos besoins. Ajouter automatiquement des zones de texte dans les champs texte Crée automatiquement des zones de texte chaque fois que vous cliquez sur des zones de texte que vous enregistrez automatiquement. En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. Vous pouvez aussi la sélectionner pour les autres modes d’enregistrement. • Légende de conseil Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un conseil destiné à l’utilisateur. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut uniquement en mode Simulation de formation. • Légende de succès Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message de succès destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende de succès peut être « Oui, c’est correct ». Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. • Légende d’échec Ajoute automatiquement une légende contenant un message d’échec destiné à l’utilisateur. Par exemple, une légende d’échec peut être « Désolé, c’est incorrect. Essayez de nouveau. » En mode Simulation d’évaluation et Simulation de formation, cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Limiter les tentatives à [#] Spécifie le nombre de fois que l’utilisateur peut essayer d’entrer le texte correctement dans une zone de texte. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour en sélectionner un. Cette option n’est sélectionnée par défaut pour aucun des modes d’enregistrement. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les valeurs par défaut des paramètres pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. 8 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Entendre les bruits d’appareil photo au cours de l’enregistrement Adobe Captivate peut émettre un son d’« obturateur d’appareil photo » lorsque vous effectuez une capture d’écran au cours d’un enregistrement. Cette fonctionnalité, qui permet de savoir exactement quand une capture d’écran est effectuée, peut s’avérer très utile lorsque vous utilisez la fonctionnalité d’enregistrement automatique. Le bruit d’appareil photo n’est pas audible dans la version définitive du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 30 Pour entendre le son d’obturateur d’appareil photo lors de l’enregistrement : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Sélectionnez Entendre les bruits d’appareil photo au cours de l’enregistrement. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Pause pendant l’enregistrement de projets Vous pouvez suspendre l’enregistrement d’un projet Adobe Captivate. Cette action peut s’avérer nécessaire si vous enregistrez un projet et avez besoin de modifier l’emplacement de la zone d’enregistrement. Pour suspendre l’enregistrement d’un projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate, puis commencez à enregistrer un nouveau projet ou une nouvelle diapositive. 2 Lorsque vous souhaitez suspendre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Pause du clavier. Lorsque vous souhaitez reprendre l’enregistrement, appuyez de nouveau sur Pause. Vous pouvez déplacer la fenêtre d’enregistrement rouge vers un nouvel emplacement et reprendre l’enregistrement dans cette nouvelle zone. Ce changement de zone ne sera pas visible dans le projet. Remarque : Vous pouvez configurer les touches d’enregistrement dans la fenêtre Préférences. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Touches. Définition de l’enregistrement automatique Adobe Captivate dispose d’une option d’enregistrement automatique. Lorsque cette option est définie, Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement des captures d’écran au cours de l’enregistrement chaque fois que vous effectuez les actions suivantes : • Cliquez ou appuyez sur une touche de capture • Ouvrez un menu ou un sous-menu ou sélectionnez un élément de menu • Ouvrez une boîte de dialogue ou une page de propriétés • Cliquez sur un bouton de barre d’outils • Effectuez un processus de glisser-déposer • Cliquez sur un bouton de souris lorsque le curseur est dans la zone de capture Pour définir l’enregistrement automatique : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La fenêtre Préférences s’affiche. 2 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Paramètres. 3 Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. Remarque : Cette option est activée par défaut.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 31 4 Cliquez sur OK. Maintenez que vous avez activé l’option d’enregistrement automatique, vous pouvez enregistrer un projet dans ce mode. Définition de la zone de capture pour l’enregistrement Lorsque vous enregistrez un projet, la zone de capture d’écran correspond à la partie de l’écran utilisée par Adobe Captivate pour créer des diapositives. Par exemple, supposez que votre moniteur soit défini sur 1 024 x 768 pixels et que vous sélectionniez une zone de capture d’écran de 800 x 600 pixels. Adobe Captivate capture une zone de 800 x 600 pixels sur les 1 024 x 768 pixels de votre écran. Adobe Captivate utilise une zone de capture d’écran par défaut de 640 x 480 pixels pour toutes les options d’enregistrement. Adobe Captivate utilise cette valeur par défaut car la lecture des projets de formats supérieurs à 800 x 600 pixels est souvent saccadée sur les connexions Internet par modem. Si les utilisateurs ont la possibilité d’afficher des zones plus grandes, vous pouvez redimensionner la zone de capture d’écran dans Adobe Captivate. Une fois la zone de capture redimensionnée, le nouveau format devient le format par défaut. Utilisez ces paramètres de capture pour offrir la meilleure performance aux utilisateurs : • Modem 28,8K : 640 x 480 ou inférieur • Modem 33,6K : 800 x 600 ou inférieur • Modem 56K : 800 x 600 ou inférieur • Câble/DSL/T1 : 1024 x 768 ou inférieur Pour définir la zone de capture : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. 4 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez une des options d’enregistrement suivantes et cliquez sur OK : Application Redimensionnez la fenêtre en sélectionnant une des poignées de redimensionnement sur le cadre rouge et en la faisant glisser pour obtenir une taille plus petite ou plus grande. Pour modifier l’emplacement de la fenêtre, déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, cliquez et faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Accrocher pour modifier rapidement la taille de la zone d’enregistrement afin qu’elle corresponde à la taille de l’application. Taille personnalisée Modifiez la taille de la fenêtre de capture en tapant les nouveaux nombres dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou spécifiez les nouveaux nombres à l’aide des flèches. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Taille prédéfinie et sélectionner une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant. Cliquez sur Accrocher pour modifier rapidement la taille de la zone d’enregistrement afin qu’elle corresponde à la taille de l’application. Plein écran Capturez tout ce qui est affiché à l’écran, sans avoir à modifier la taille de la zone de capture. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer à enregistrer un nouveau projet dans la taille que vous avez spécifiée.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 32 Remarque : Si vous enregistrez un nouveau projet par le biais de l’option d’importation à partir de Microsoft PowerPoint, dans la boîte de dialogue Convertir les présentations PowerPoint, vous pouvez modifier la taille de la fenêtre du projet en tapant les nouveaux nombres dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou spécifier les nouveaux nombres à l’aide des flèches. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner une option dans le menu déroulant Taille prédéfinie. Ou, si vous commencez un projet en suivant les étapes de l’Assistant de projet, il vous sera demandé de sélectionner la taille de la fenêtre. Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité utile, appelée « enregistrement d’images animées ». Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement un nouveau projet ou des diapositives supplémentaires pour un projet existant, vous pouvez utiliser l’enregistrement d’images animées pour capturer automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide, en particulier lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisser-déposer ou de défilement de la molette de la souris. En capturant à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée, les actions de glisser-déposer ou de défilement de la molette de la souris s’affichent de manière plus fluide dans le fichier SWF Adobe Captivate final. L’expérience est plus réaliste pour les utilisateurs. Si vous activez la fonctionnalité d’images animées, Adobe Captivate démarre la capture d’images à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée chaque fois que vous cliquez sur un objet ou effectuez des actions de la molette de la souris lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement un nouveau projet ou des diapositives. Vous savez que l’enregistrement d’images animées a commencé quand vous voyez l’icône Adobe Captivate dans la zone de notification (située dans le coin inférieur droit de l’écran de votre ordinateur). Lorsque vous enregistrez normalement, l’icône s’affiche comme une icône classique. Lorsque l’enregistrement d’images animées commence automatiquement, l’icône s’affiche avec des bordures rouges et clignote. Pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées, arrêtez le glissement ou le défilement ou appuyez sur la touche de fin d’enregistrement (les touches par défaut sont F10 pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées et FIN pour arrêter totalement l’enregistrement). Une fois l’enregistrement terminé, Adobe Captivate génère les diapositives qui composent le projet et les affiche dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Toutes les actions de glisser-déposer ou de défilement de la molette de la souris enregistrées comme diapositives d’images animées apparaissent dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Les diapositives d’images animées sont enregistrées et incluses dans des projets sous la forme de diapositives d’animation. Pour de meilleurs résultats, surtout avec l’enregistrement d’images animées, effectuez les actions (glissement d’objets, clics, frappe) lentement. La fonctionnalité d’enregistrement d’images animées est activée par défaut. Vous pouvez la désactiver à tout moment. Pour désactiver l’enregistrement d’images animées d’actions de glisser-déposer ou de défilement de la molette de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées. 4 Supprimez la coche en regard de l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer ou de l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris. 5 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 33 Utilisation des modes d’enregistrement Adobe Captivate peut non seulement enregistrer automatiquement des projets, mais il peut également personnaliser les objets ajoutés aux projets créés automatiquement, selon le but de votre projet. Cette fonctionnalité est connue sous le nom de modes d’enregistrement. Par exemple, en sélectionnant un mode d’enregistrement, vous pouvez facilement créer des projets appropriés pour être utilisés comme simulations ou démonstrations. Cela vous permet de créer des projets rapidement car Adobe Captivate se charge de la plupart du travail. Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer des simulations de scénario dans plusieurs modes, que vous pouvez sélectionner dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Remarque : Les modes d’enregistrement peuvent uniquement être utilisés lorsque vous utilisez l’enregistrement automatique. Si vous enregistrez des projets manuellement, les modes ne sont pas disponibles. Pour sélectionner et utiliser un mode d’enregistrement : 1 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 2 Sélectionnez Simulation logicielle dans le panneau gauche et choisissez un des types de projets (Application, Taille personnalisée ou Plein écran). Cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez Mode(s) d’enregistrement et sélectionnez une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : • Démonstration Pour inclure automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Pour inclure automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi choisir de créer automatiquement des zones de texte. Les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Pour inclure automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec dans le projet. Les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Pour choisir les objets, comme les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les zones de clic, que vous voulez ajouter automatiquement au projet. Vous pouvez aussi choisir de créer automatiquement des zones de texte. 4 (Facultatif) Quelle que soit l’option que vous sélectionnez, vous pouvez cliquer sur Paramètres, pour modifier ce qui est créé automatiquement lorsque vous enregistrez un projet. Par exemple, après avoir sélectionné le mode Démonstration, vous pouvez décider que vous ne voulez pas inclure de zones de surbrillance. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Paramètres et décocher la case Ajouter automatiquement des zones de surbrillance à chaque clic de souris, mais conserver les autres paramètres.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 34 A propos de l’enregistrement et de la création de nouveaux projets Vous disposez de nombreuses options pour la création de nouveaux projets. Vous pouvez enregistrer un projet contenant pratiquement tout type d’élément sur l’écran de votre ordinateur. Adobe Captivate permet d’enregistrer facilement une application, un projet d’une taille spécifique ou un projet plein écran. Vous pouvez également créer un projet de simulation fondée sur un scénario en utilisant un modèle de projet pour garantir la cohérence ou en suivant les étapes de l’Assistant de projet. Vous pouvez aussi commencer à partir d’un projet vide ou importer des images ou des fichiers PowerPoint. Adobe Captivate permet de créer facilement des nouveaux projets. Lorsque vous enregistrez un projet Adobe Captivate, vous utilisez l’application ou le site Web que vous voulez présenter comme vous le feriez normalement, en déplaçant votre souris, utilisant votre clavier et naviguant dans les menus. Au fur et à mesure que vous travaillez, Adobe Captivate capture automatiquement l’action à l’écran. Vous pouvez également effectuer des captures d’écran manuellement. Une fois que vous avez fini votre enregistrement, vous pouvez définir des options et ajouter des éléments comme des légendes de texte, de l’audio, des images et des zones de surbrillance. Vous pouvez aussi créer un nouveau projet en suivant les étapes de l’Assistant de projet ou en utilisant un modèle. Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité d’« enregistrement d’images animées » qui capture automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisser-déposer. A propos de l’enregistrement de projets de simulation logicielle Vous pouvez créer des projets de simulation logicielle. Le processus d’enregistrement propose des options uniques, comme expliqué ci-dessous : Application Enregistre toutes les actions sélectionnées dans une application en cours. Taille personnalisée Enregistre toutes les actions sélectionnées dans une zone personnalisée. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, définissez une taille personnalisée dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou sélectionnez une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant Taille prédéfinie. Plein écran Enregistre toutes les actions à l’écran. Cette option s’avère particulièrement utile si vous avez besoin de capturer des actions dans plusieurs applications. Pour suspendre l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Pause. Pour reprendre l’enregistrement, appuyez de nouveau sur Pause. A propos de la création de simulations fondées sur des scénarios Vous pouvez facilement créer du contenu de formation fondé sur des scénarios ou des interactions, comme le contenu de formation aux centres d’appels, qui traite de compétences non techniques ainsi que de compétences logicielles. Vous pouvez suivre les étapes de l’Assistant de projet ou créer votre projet à partir d’un modèle de simulation. Assistant de projet Vous guide tout au long de la création d’un projet complet de simulation de scénario. L’Assistant de projet génère des paramètres fictifs pour vos scénarios, que vous ajoutez au projet une fois que vous l’avez configuré. Créer une nouvelle simulation à partir d’un modèle Vous invite à sélectionner un modèle de simulation à partir duquel créer un nouveau projet. Si vous voulez créer une nouvelle simulation similaire à un projet existant, vous pouvez enregistrer le projet existant comme modèle et choisir cette option quand vous êtes prêt à commencer la nouvelle simulation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 35 A propos de la création d’autres types de projets En plus des simulations fondées sur des scénarios, vous pouvez sélectionner un nouveau type de projet qui ne commence pas par l’enregistrement d’images sur votre écran. Vous pouvez aussi créer un projet composé de fichiers images ou commencer à partir d’un projet vide pour un plus grand contrôle de tous les éléments du projet. Chaque type de projets a des avantages et des options qui lui sont propres. Projet vide Enregistre une diapositive vide à la taille que vous spécifiez. Cette option est utile si vous voulez créer un projet vide, puis importer des images ou des diapositives à partir d’autres projets. Projet d’images Offre une manière facile de créer un projet Adobe Captivate composé d’images. Lorsque le projet publié est visionné par les utilisateurs, il ressemble à un diaporama. Les images sélectionnées sont utilisées comme arrière-plan sur les diapositives. Importer à partir de Microsoft PowerPoint Crée un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate en important des diapositives à partir d’un projet PowerPoint. Quand vous choisissez cette option, vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les diapositives du fichier PowerPoint ou choisir les diapositives individuelles que vous désirez inclure. Créer un projet à partir d’un modèle Crée un projet en utilisant un modèle préalablement enregistré. Enregistrement de simulations logicielles Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer les opérations effectuées dans une application logicielle en cours d’exécution sous la forme de captures d’écran, puis de créer des diapositives contenant les captures d’écran de l’interface utilisateur de l’application dans Adobe Captivate. Enregistrement d’un nouveau projet d’application Vous pouvez utiliser Adobe Captivate pour enregistrer ou simuler les actions d’une application logicielle en cours d’exécution dans un projet de simulation de scénario. Vous pouvez démarrer tout type d’application, comme un programme de traitement de texte, un programme graphique, un programme de tableur ou tout type de logiciel, et enregistrer l’action qui se déroule dans l’application. Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité spéciale d’« enregistrement d’images animées » qui capture automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisserdéposer. Vous pouvez sauvegarder l’enregistrement sous la forme d’un fichier de script. Lorsque vous exécutez le script dans un autre projet, les actions définies dans le fichier sont exécutées et enregistrées. Pour enregistrer un nouveau projet d’application : 1 Ouvrez l’application que vous voulez enregistrer (ouvrez-la avant de commencer l’enregistrement). 2 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 3 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 4 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 5 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Application et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 36 6 Sélectionnez l’application à enregistrer dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner la fenêtre à enregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur Accrocher pour modifier rapidement la taille de la fenêtre que vous enregistrez afin qu’elle corresponde à la taille de la zone de capture rouge. 8 Sélectionnez Mode(s) d’enregistrement et choisissez l’une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : • Démonstration Inclut automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Ajoute automatiquement des objets, comme les légendes, les déplacements de souris, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte au projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la liste des objets à ajouter automatiquement à votre projet en suivant les étapes cidessous : a Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. b Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Sélectionnez les paramètres d’objets appropriés pour chaque mode d’enregistrement. c Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. d Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres prédéfinis. 9 Sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées pour créer un film non modifiable. Tous les mouvements à l’écran du début à la fin de l’enregistrement sont capturés dans le film sans qu’aucun contenu pédagogique soit ajouté. Consultez « Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées » pour plus d’informations. 10 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans le menu déroulant selon que vous enregistrez avec un micro ou un dispositif d’entrée de ligne : Microphone Enregistrez à partir d’un micro relié à votre ordinateur. Entrée Enregistrez à partir d’une connexion d’entrée de ligne. Audio système Enregistrez à partir d’un fichier lu sur votre ordinateur. 11 Cliquez sur Avancé. 12 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 13 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • (Facultatif) Sélectionnez l’option Informations de réenregistrement pour enregistrer l’enregistrement sous la forme d’un fichier de script. Le script de réenregistrement est enregistré dans un fichier XML avec l’extension .cprr. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 37 • (Facultatif) Sélectionnez l’option Informations de réenregistrement et cliquez sur Parcourir (...) pour aller jusqu’au script que vous voulez exécuter. L’enregistrement se fait selon les actions définies dans le script qui est généré quand l’option Informations de réenregistrement est sélectionnée. Remarque : L’option Script de réenregistrement est disponible uniquement en mode Application. 14 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir une vaste gamme d’autres options d’enregistrement, choisir les paramètres d’enregistrement d’images animées et modifier les touches d’enregistrement. 15 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. 16 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. Remarque : Si vous enregistrez automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement, vous pouvez effectuer une capture d’écran manuellement à tout moment en appuyant sur la touche Impr écran. C’est utile si vous capturez un site qui contient de nombreuses fenêtres contextuelles, des cadres et des effets spéciaux qui ne sont pas toujours enregistrés automatiquement. Si vous voyez un effet spécial ou un changement sur une page Web que vous enregistrez, mais si vous n’entendez pas le bruit d’obturateur d’appareil photo, appuyez sur Impr écran pour effectuer une capture d’écran manuelle. 17 Si vous enregistrez manuellement (c’est-à-dire si vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) pour effectuer des captures d’écran. Utilisez l’application comme si vous la présentiez à quelqu’un. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. 18 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur la touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez. Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 38 (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. (Facultatif) Script de réenregistrement Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. 19 Cliquez sur OK. Les diapositives sont générées et le nouveau projet apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, les diapositives d’images animées s’affichent dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Enregistrement d’un nouveau projet de taille personnalisée Vous pouvez enregistrer toutes les actions sélectionnées dans une zone personnalisée. Cette option est particulièrement utile si vous devez respecter une taille spécifique pour vos projets. Par exemple, il est possible que vous ayez besoin d’enregistrer une taille spécifique de manière à générer un fichier SWF Adobe Captivate qui sera incorporé dans une fenêtre ou sur un site Web. Si vous choisissez cette option, définissez une taille personnalisée dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou sélectionnez une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant Taille prédéfinie. Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité d’« enregistrement d’images animées » qui capture automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisser-déposer. Pour enregistrer un nouveau projet de taille personnalisée : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 4 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Application et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. Adobe Captivate utilise une zone de capture par défaut de 640 x 480 pixels. Pour modifier la taille, tapez les nouveaux nombres dans Largeur et Hauteur ou entrez les nouveaux nombres à l’aide des flèches. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Taille prédéfinie et sélectionner une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant. Remarque : En général, la lecture des projets de formats supérieurs à 800 x 600 pixels est souvent saccadée sur les connexions Internet par modem. 5 Dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer (facultatif), sélectionnez une fenêtre ouverte à enregistrer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 39 6 Sélectionnez Mode(s) d’enregistrement et choisissez l’une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : • Démonstration Inclut automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Ajoute automatiquement des objets, comme les légendes, les déplacements de souris, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte au projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la liste des objets à ajouter automatiquement à votre projet en suivant les étapes cidessous : a Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. b Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Sélectionnez les paramètres d’objets appropriés pour chaque mode d’enregistrement. c Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. d Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres prédéfinis. 7 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans le menu déroulant selon que vous enregistrez avec un micro ou un dispositif d’entrée de ligne : Microphone Enregistrez à partir d’un micro relié à votre ordinateur. Entrée Enregistrez à partir d’une connexion d’entrée de ligne. Audio système Enregistrez à partir d’un fichier lu sur votre ordinateur. 8 Cliquez sur Avancé. 9 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 10 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir une vaste gamme d’autres options d’enregistrement et de paramètres d’enregistrement d’images animées, et pour modifier les touches d’enregistrement. 11 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. 12 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. a Si vous enregistrez automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 40 Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement, vous pouvez effectuer une capture d’écran manuellement à tout moment en appuyant sur la touche Impr écran. C’est utile si vous capturez un site qui contient de nombreuses fenêtres contextuelles, des cadres et des effets spéciaux qui ne sont pas toujours enregistrés automatiquement. Si vous voyez un effet spécial ou un changement sur une page Web que vous enregistrez, mais si vous n’entendez pas le bruit d’obturateur d’appareil photo, appuyez sur Impr écran pour effectuer une capture d’écran manuelle. b Si vous enregistrez manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) pour effectuer des captures d’écran. Utilisez ce qui se trouve dans la zone d’enregistrement rouge (par exemple, une application, un site Web, etc.) comme si vous présentiez vos actions à une autre personne. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. 13 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur la touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez. Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. (Facultatif) Script de réenregistrement Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. 14 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 41 Les diapositives sont générées et le nouveau projet apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, ces dernières s’afficheront dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Enregistrement d’un nouveau projet plein écran Utilisez l’option d’enregistrement plein écran pour enregistrer toutes les actions qui se déroulent sur votre écran d’ordinateur. Cette option est utile si vous avez besoin d’enregistrer des actions dans plusieurs applications dans un projet Adobe Captivate. Par exemple, si vous avez besoin d’enregistrer la manière dont un utilisateur copie des données depuis un programme de traitement de texte dans un programme de tableur, utilisez l’option d’enregistrement plein écran pour capturer les actions dans les deux programmes. Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité spéciale d’« enregistrement d’images animées » qui capture automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisserdéposer. Pour enregistrer un nouveau projet plein écran : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 4 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Plein écran et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrement s’affiche. 5 (Facultatif) Si deux moniteurs sont associés à votre ordinateur, spécifiez le moniteur que vous voulez enregistrer en sélectionnant Moniteur 1 ou Moniteur 2. 6 Choisissez l’un des modes d’enregistrement suivants : • Démonstration Inclut automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Ajoute automatiquement des objets, comme les légendes, les déplacements de souris, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte au projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la liste des objets à ajouter automatiquement à votre projet en suivant les étapes cidessous : a Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. b Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Sélectionnez les paramètres d’objets appropriés pour chaque mode d’enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 42 c Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. d Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres prédéfinis. 7 Sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées pour créer un film non modifiable. Tous les mouvements à l’écran du début à la fin de l’enregistrement sont capturés dans le film sans qu’aucun contenu pédagogique soit ajouté. Consultez « Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées » pour plus d’informations. 8 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans le menu déroulant selon que vous enregistrez avec un micro ou un dispositif d’entrée de ligne : Microphone EEnregistrez à partir d’un micro relié à votre ordinateur. Entrée Enregistrez à partir d’une connexion d’entrée de ligne. Audio système Enregistrez à partir d’un fichier lu sur votre ordinateur. 9 Cliquez sur Avancé. 10 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 11 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir une vaste gamme d’autres options d’enregistrement et de paramètres d’enregistrement d’images animées, et pour modifier les touches d’enregistrement. 12 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. a Si vous enregistrez automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement, vous pouvez effectuer une capture d’écran manuellement à tout moment en appuyant sur la touche Impr écran. C’est utile si vous capturez un site qui contient de nombreuses fenêtres contextuelles, des cadres et des effets spéciaux qui ne sont pas toujours enregistrés automatiquement. Si vous voyez un effet spécial ou un changement sur une page Web que vous enregistrez, mais si vous n’entendez pas le bruit d’obturateur d’appareil photo, appuyez sur Impr écran pour effectuer une capture d’écran manuelle. b Si vous enregistrez manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) pour effectuer des captures d’écran. Utilisez ce qui se trouve sur votre écran (par exemple, des applications, des sites Web, etc.) comme si vous présentiez vos actions à une autre personne. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. 13 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur la touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 43 Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. (Facultatif) Script de réenregistrement Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. 14 Cliquez sur OK. Les diapositives sont générées et le nouveau projet apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, les diapositives d’images animées s’affichent dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Enregistrement de simulations logicielles dans plusieurs modes Imaginez une situation où un formateur a une demi-journée pour générer un module de formation, contenant une démonstration, une simulation de formation et une simulation d’évaluation. Grâce à Adobe Captivate, le formateur peut y arriver malgré ce délai très court. Adobe Captivate permet aux formateurs et aux auteurs de créer simultanément des projets de simulation logicielle en mode Démonstration, Formation et Evaluation. Vous pouvez conserver les différents fichiers créés pour les différents modes comme modèles. Pour créer un projet de simulation logicielle dans plusieurs modes : 1 Ouvrez l’application que vous voulez enregistrer. 2 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 3 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 4 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 44 La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 5 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Application et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 6 Sélectionnez l’application à enregistrer dans le menu déroulant Enregistrer une fenêtre. 7 Sélectionnez Mode(s) d’enregistrement et choisissez parmi les options suivantes : • Démonstration Inclut automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Ajoute automatiquement des objets, comme les légendes, les déplacements de souris, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte au projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la liste des objets à ajouter automatiquement à votre projet en suivant les étapes cidessous : a Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. b Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Sélectionnez les paramètres d’objets appropriés pour chaque mode d’enregistrement. c Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. d Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres prédéfinis. 8 Sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées pour créer un film non modifiable. Tous les mouvements à l’écran du début à la fin de l’enregistrement sont capturés dans le film sans qu’aucun contenu pédagogique soit ajouté. Consultez « Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées » pour plus d’informations. 9 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans le menu déroulant selon que vous enregistrez avec un micro ou un dispositif d’entrée de ligne : Microphone Enregistrez à partir d’un micro relié à votre ordinateur. Entrée Enregistrez à partir d’une connexion d’entrée de ligne. Audio système Enregistrez à partir d’un fichier lu sur votre ordinateur. 10 Cliquez sur Avancé. 11 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 45 12 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir une vaste gamme d’autres options d’enregistrement et de paramètres d’enregistrement d’images animées, et pour modifier les touches d’enregistrement. 13 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. 14 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. 15 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur la touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez. Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. (Facultatif) Script de réenregistrement Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. 16 Cliquez sur OK. Des projets de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé indépendants sont créés. Les diapositives sont générées et le projet sélectionné apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, les diapositives d’images animées s’affichent dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 46 Réenregistrement de simulations logicielles Lorsqu’une application logicielle est modifiée ou lorsque vous avez besoin de créer des projets indépendants dans plusieurs langues, vous pouvez utiliser la fonctionnalité de réenregistrement d’Adobe Captivate. Pour ce faire, vous devez sélectionner l’option permettant de générer des informations de réenregistrement lorsque vous créez un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate. Un fichier de script (.cprr) est alors créé. A propos du fichier de script de réenregistrement Vous pouvez utiliser l’option Générer les informations de réenregistrement lorsque vous générez un projet pour la première fois, afin de créer un fichier de script de réenregistrement. Le script de réenregistrement est enregistré dans un fichier XML avec l’extension .cprr. Pour modifier le fichier de script, effectuez les opérations suivantes : • Déboguez les erreurs de réenregistrement en insérant des balises et et et . L’insertion de balises BREAK vous permet d’alterner entre réenregistrement manuel et réenregistrement automatique. Les balises SKIP vous permettent de sauter des lignes dans le script. • Changez le contenu modifiable ou traduisez le contenu localisable en modifiant les termes situés entre les balises . Lorsque vous insérez des balises et et , le script saute automatiquement les opérations qui se trouvent entre ces balises et continue le réenregistrement. Pour de plus amples informations sur la façon de définir la touche permettant d’alterner entre réenregistrement automatique et réenregistrement manuel, consultez l’étape 4 de la procédure « Pour définir les options d’enregistrement : ». Si vous avez traduit le fichier de script dans les langues requises, vous pouvez simplement créer un nouveau projet pour chaque langue en utilisant le script de réenregistrement. Vous pouvez ensuite enregistrer le projet dans les répertoires de langues appropriés. Pendant le réenregistrement, Adobe Captivate applique des points d’arrêt après avoir attendu pendant une durée prédéfinie, puis affiche un message contenant les informations suivantes : Motif de l’arrêt. Le message peut contenir n’importe lequel des motifs suivants : • La mise en page de la page enregistrée est différente de celle de la page que vous réenregistrez. • L’ordre des éléments de la page enregistrée est différent de celui de la page que vous réenregistrez. • Le temps d’attente pour l’ouverture d’une nouvelle fenêtre a expiré. • Le temps d’attente pour l’ouverture d’une boîte de dialogue a expiré. • Le temps d’attente pour le téléchargement d’un document ou d’une page Web à partir d’Internet a expiré. • Index de script. Adobe Captivate affecte un numéro généré automatiquement à chaque action et l’inclut à ce message. • Actions correctives possibles. Vous pouvez choisir d’effectuer l’une des actions correctives suivantes : • Réessayer l’élément en cours. Cliquez sur ce bouton si l’ouverture d’une nouvelle fenêtre ou boîte de dialogue ou le téléchargement d’une page Web échoue. Ce bouton est désactivé si l’erreur est due à une incompatibilité de pages.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 47 • Continuer à partir de l’élément suivant. Cliquez sur ce bouton si la fenêtre ou la boîte de dialogue s’est ouverte ou si la page Web a été téléchargée après l’affichage de ce message. Ce bouton est désactivé si l’erreur est due à une incompatibilité de pages. • Passer en mode manuel. Si une action manuelle est nécessaire pour ouvrir la fenêtre ou bien pour télécharger ou actualiser la page Web, cliquez sur Passer en mode manuel. Vérifiez que la nouvelle fenêtre s’est ouverte ou que la page a été téléchargée, puis appuyez sur la touche prédéfinie pour reprendre le réenregistrement automatique à partir de l’action suivante dans le script de réenregistrement. Pour générer des informations de réenregistrement pendant la création d’un projet Adobe Captivate : 1 Ouvrez l’application que vous voulez enregistrer. 2 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 3 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 4 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 5 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Application et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 6 Sélectionnez l’application à enregistrer dans le menu déroulant Enregistrer une fenêtre. 7 Sélectionnez Mode(s) d’enregistrement et choisissez l’une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : • Démonstration Inclut automatiquement les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les déplacements de souris dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. • Simulation d’évaluation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec une légende d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Simulation de formation Inclut automatiquement les zones de clic avec des légendes de conseil et d’échec et les zones de texte pour les champs de texte avec une légende d’échec dans le projet enregistré automatiquement. Les légendes et les déplacements de souris ne sont pas inclus. • Personnaliser Ajoute automatiquement des objets, comme les légendes, les déplacements de souris, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte au projet enregistré automatiquement. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner la liste des objets à ajouter automatiquement à votre projet en suivant les étapes cidessous : a Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. b Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Sélectionnez les paramètres d’objets appropriés pour chaque mode d’enregistrement. c Cliquez sur Appliquer pour enregistrer les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés pour le mode d’enregistrement sélectionné. d Cliquez sur Restaurer les paramètres par défaut pour rétablir les paramètres prédéfinis. 8 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 48 Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans le menu déroulant selon que vous enregistrez avec un micro ou un dispositif d’entrée de ligne : Microphone Enregistrez à partir d’un micro relié à votre ordinateur. Entrée Enregistrez à partir d’une connexion d’entrée de ligne. Audio système Enregistrez à partir d’un fichier lu sur votre ordinateur. 9 Cliquez sur Avancé. 10 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 11 (Facultatif) Cochez l’option Informations de réenregistrement pour enregistrer l’enregistrement sous la forme d’un fichier de script. Le script de réenregistrement est enregistré dans un fichier XML avec l’extension .CPRR. 12 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir une vaste gamme d’autres options d’enregistrement et de paramètres d’enregistrement d’images animées, et pour modifier les touches d’enregistrement. 13 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. 14 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. 15 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur la touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez. Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 49 Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. Script de réenregistrement Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. 16 Cliquez sur OK. Le(s) fichier(s) de projet approprié(s) et le fichier de script de réenregistrement sont créés et enregistrés. Une fois le fichier de script contenant les informations de réenregistrement créé, vous pouvez créer un autre projet reflétant les mises à jour du produit et utiliser le fichier de script pour réenregistrer les opérations répertoriées avec les dernières captures d’écran, au lieu d’effectuer des captures d’écran manuellement. En outre, si vous souhaitez localiser le projet, vous pouvez traduire le contenu du projet dans le fichier de script et laisser le fichier de script effectuer automatiquement les captures d’écran à partir de l’application logicielle localisée. Pour utiliser le fichier de script de réenregistrement pour créer un projet Adobe Captivate : 1 Ouvrez l’application que vous voulez réenregistrer. 2 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 3 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 4 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 5 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez l’option Application, Taille personnalisée ou Plein écran et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 6 Sélectionnez l’application à enregistrer dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner une fenêtre à réenregistrer. 7 Cliquez sur Avancé. 8 Désélectionnez l’option Informations de réenregistrement. 9 Sélectionnez Script de réenregistrement et spécifiez un nom de fichier de script ou naviguez jusqu’au fichier de script approprié. Les modes d’enregistrement et les paramètres connexes sont déterminés par le fichier de script. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres selon vos besoins. 10 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le fichier de script de réenregistrement commence à enregistrer automatiquement les actions à l’écran. 11 Le script arrête le réenregistrement quand il arrive à la fin du fichier. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer les fichiers du projet s’affiche. Nom du projet Tapez le nom du nouveau projet que vous créez. Ce nom est utilisé avant les valeurs affichées dans les champs Nom du projet de démonstration, Nom du projet d’évaluation, Nom du projet de formation ou Nom du projet personnalisé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez XXX comme nom de projet, les noms de fichiers de démonstration, d’évaluation, de formation et personnalisé apparaîtront automatiquement sous la forme XXX_demo, XXX_assessment, XXX_training ou XXX_custom. Répertoire de projets Saisissez le nom du répertoire dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour trouver le répertoire approprié.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 50 (Facultatif) Nom du projet de démonstration Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de démonstration que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Démonstration dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet d’évaluation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet d’évaluation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation d’évaluation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet de formation Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet de formation que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Simulation de formation dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. (Facultatif) Nom du projet personnalisé Saisissez un nom unique pour le projet personnalisé que vous avez enregistré. Ce champ est activé si vous avez sélectionné l’option d’enregistrement de projet en mode Personnalisé dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Projet à ouvrir Sélectionnez le mode d’enregistrement dans lequel le projet a été créé. Ce projet s’ouvre automatiquement une fois qu’Adobe Captivate a enregistré tous les fichiers de projet. 12 (Facultatif) Dans le champ Script de réenregistrement, saisissez un nom unique pour le fichier de script. Le ou les fichiers de projet réenregistrés appropriés sont créés et enregistrés. Enregistrement de simulations de scénarios Vous pouvez utiliser les modèles intégrés d’Adobe Captivate pour créer des projets avec du contenu de formation interactif pour un scénario donné. Un tel projet peut contenir du contenu de formation et des questions. Vous pouvez aussi créer un module d’évaluation dans la fonctionnalité de simulation de scénario pour aider à évaluer les performances des personnes qui suivent la formation. Cette fonctionnalité d’Adobe Captivate pousse les personnes qui suivent la formation vers la voie de l’autonomie. Création de simulations de scénarios à l’aide de l’Assistant de projet Vous pouvez créer un projet de simulation de scénario à l’aide de l’Assistant de projet. Vous pouvez rapidement et facilement créer une présentation de formation efficace, ressemblant à une présentation MS PowerPoint. Le projet de simulation de scénario vous aide également à évaluer les performances des personnes qui suivent la formation. L’Assistant de projet vous permet de créer des présentations avec des arrière-plans de diapositives portant l’extension de fichier .pot (modèles PowerPoint), .bmp, .jpg, .gif et .png. Ces modèles de diapositives prêts à l’utilisation vous permettent de définir les dimensions, l’arrière-plan et les options de diapositives du projet. Il vous suffit de fournir le contenu sur diapositives et de vous assurer qu’un projet est ouvert. Pour créer un nouveau projet à l’aide de l’Assistant de projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation de scénario. La fenêtre Simulation de scénario s’affiche à droite. 4 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Assistant de projet et cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 51 5 Dans la zone Propriétés du projet, saisissez un nom pour votre projet. 6 Pour spécifier d’autres propriétés pour votre projet, par exemple l’auteur, la société et la description, cliquez sur Autres. 7 Dans la zone Propriétés du projet de l’Assistant de projet, spécifiez la largeur et la hauteur de la fenêtre pour votre projet. Si vous préférez effectuer une sélection dans une liste de tailles de fenêtre prédéfinies, cliquez sur Tailles prédéfinies et sélectionnez la taille de votre choix. 8 Si vous voulez utiliser une couleur d’arrière-plan, sélectionnez Utiliser une couleur d’arrière-plan dans la zone Image ou couleur d’arrière-plan par défaut, puis sélectionnez la couleur que vous désirez utiliser dans le menu. 9 Si vous préférez utiliser une image d’arrière-plan pour votre projet, sélectionnez Utiliser une image d’arrière-plan et sélectionnez l’image de votre choix. Utilisez la barre de défilement pour voir toutes les images disponibles ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour aller jusqu’à un fichier image particulier. 10 Si vous voulez ajouter des diapositives à votre projet, sélectionnez les types de diapositives à ajouter dans la zone d’ajout des diapositives. 11 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Ajout de diapositives à l’aide de l’Assistant de projet Dans la zone d’ajout de diapositives, vous devez préciser les types de diapositives qu’Adobe Captivate doit ajouter à votre nouvelle présentation. Vous devez ajouter au moins un des types de diapositives suivants dans le projet de formation interactif que vous créez à l’aide de l’Assistant de projet : • Introduction Crée la première diapositive du projet en tant que diapositive d’introduction. Cette diapositive inclut le titre de votre projet Adobe Captivate affiché sous forme de texte animé et une légende de texte d’introduction transparente. • Description Crée une seule diapositive de description du scénario. Cette diapositive inclut les informations relatives aux questions ajoutées à votre projet Adobe Captivate. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Diapositives de scénario Crée le nombre spécifié de diapositives en tant que diapositives de questions. Une diapositive Consulter indépendante est également créée. Par défaut, trois diapositives de scénario sont créées. Les diapositives de questions peuvent inclure des questions à choix multiple, à réponse courte ou d’association. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Conclusion Crée la dernière diapositive du projet. Cette diapositive peut contenir, par exemple, un message de fin, un récapitulatif, une adresse électronique, un lien vers un site Web ou un numéro de téléphone. Création de simulations de scénario à l’aide d’un modèle Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option de création d’une simulation de scénario à l’aide d’un modèle et cliquez sur OK, Adobe Captivate ouvre le fichier Sample Template.cptl et affiche la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires. Vous pouvez aussi naviguer jusqu’à un fichier .cptl que vous avez créé et l’utiliser comme modèle. Les options de la boîte de dialogue vous permettent de sélectionner l’option d’enregistrement de nouvelles diapositives à la fin du projet de modèle ou d’enregistrer et d’insérer une nouvelle diapositive après une diapositive sélectionnée dans le projet de modèle. Pour créer une simulation de scénario à l’aide d’un modèle : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 52 La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation de scénario. 4 Sélectionnez l’option Créer une nouvelle simulation à partir d’un modèle. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir pour aller jusqu’au modèle que vous voulez utiliser ou cliquez sur OK pour utiliser le modèle par défaut (Sample Template.cptl). La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez l’option Enregistrer les diapositives à la fin du projet pour ajouter de nouvelles diapositives après la dernière diapositive du projet ou l’option Enregistrer des diapositives et les insérer après la diapositive sélectionnée ci-dessous pour insérer des diapositives après une diapositive sélectionnée. 6 Cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 7 Dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer (facultatif), sélectionnez une fenêtre ouverte à enregistrer. 8 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez l’option Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. 9 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 10 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir diverses options d’enregistrement, y compris la possibilité d’enregistrer automatiquement le projet et de générer automatiquement des légendes de texte. 11 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. Si vous avez sélectionné une fenêtre, vous pouvez cliquer sur Accrocher la fenêtre à la zone d’enregistrement rouge pour modifier rapidement la taille de la fenêtre que vous enregistrez pour qu’elle corresponde à la zone de capture rouge. Vous pouvez positionner la zone de capture où vous voulez sur votre écran. Cependant, vous ne pouvez pas la la redimensionner parce que sa taille est la même que celle du modèle. Si vous avez besoin de modifier la taille de votre projet après avoir enregistré de nouvelles diapositives pour créer un projet avec le modèle, vous pouvez le redimensionner. 12 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. Si vous enregistrez le projet automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. Si vous enregistrez le projet manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) du clavier pour effectuer des captures d’écran. Utilisez ce qui se trouve dans la zone d’enregistrement rouge (par exemple, une application, un site Web, etc.) comme si vous présentiez vos actions à une autre personne. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 53 13 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Les diapositives sont générées et le nouveau projet apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, ces dernières s’afficheront dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Remarque : Lors de la création d’un projet de simulation à l’aide d’un modèle, si vous sélectionnez un modèle créé à partir d’une version antérieure d’Adobe Captivate, Adobe Captivate n’affiche pas la vignette du modèle sélectionné (fichier *.cptl) dans la boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet. Enregistrement d’autres types de projets Adobe Captivate vous permet de créer des projets vides ou des projets fondés sur des images. Vous pouvez aussi importer des projets Microsoft PowerPoint dans Adobe Captivate et les améliorer. Création d’un nouveau projet vide Vous pouvez créer un projet vide composé d’une diapositive vide de la taille que vous spécifiez. Cette option est utile si vous voulez créer un projet vide, puis importer des images ou des diapositives à partir d’autres projets. Définissez une taille personnalisée dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou sélectionnez une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu Taille prédéfinie. Pour créer un nouveau projet vide : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Autre. La fenêtre Autres types de projets s’affiche à droite. 4 Sélectionnez Projet vide et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue Projet vide s’affiche. 5 Adobe Captivate utilise une zone de capture par défaut de 640 x 480 pixels. Pour modifier la taille, sélectionnez Définie par l’utilisateur (personnalisée) et tapez les nouveaux nombres dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou spécifiez les nouveaux nombres à l’aide des flèches. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Taille prédéfinie, puis choisir une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant. Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton Préréglages personnalisés pour ajouter vos propres préréglages. Une fois créés, ils s’affichent dans la liste Taille prédéfinie dans tout le produit. Remarque : En général, la lecture des projets de formats supérieurs à 800 x 600 pixels est souvent saccadée sur les connexions Internet par modem. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Le projet est généré et s’ouvre dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 54 Création d’un nouveau projet d’images Vous pouvez facilement créer un projet Adobe Captivate composé d’images. Cette option est utile pour créer un projet Adobe Captivate qui ressemble à un diaporama. Pour créer un nouveau projet d’images : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Autre. La fenêtre Autres types de projets s’affiche à droite. 4 Sélectionnez Projet d’images et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue Projet d’images s’affiche. 5 Adobe Captivate utilise une zone de capture par défaut de 640 x 480 pixels. Pour modifier la taille, sélectionnez Définie par l’utilisateur (personnalisée) et tapez les nouveaux nombres dans les champs Largeur et Hauteur ou spécifiez les nouveaux nombres à l’aide des flèches. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Taille prédéfinie, puis choisir une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant. Remarque : En général, la lecture des projets de formats supérieurs à 800 x 600 pixels est souvent saccadée sur les connexions Internet par modem. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Adobe Captivate s’ouvre dans l’affichage Scénarimage, et la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 7 Naviguez jusqu’à la première image que vous voulez inclure comme diapositive dans votre projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez créer plusieurs diapositives d’images en choisissant plusieurs images dans la boîte de dialogue Parcourir. 8 Sélectionnez une image et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Remarque : Si l’image que vous avez sélectionnée est plus grande que la taille du projet que vous avez spécifiée, une boîte de dialogue s’affiche et vous donne le choix de recadrer ou redimensionner l’image. Le recadrage coupe des portions de l’image (sur les côtés) de manière à ce qu’elle tienne dans le projet. Le redimensionnement conserve l’image entière, mais la réduit pour que sa taille soit ajustée au projet. L’image sélectionnée s’ouvre comme une diapositive dans l’affichage Modifier. 9 Dans le menu Insérer, sélectionnez Diapositive d’images pour ajouter des images supplémentaires. Création d’un nouveau projet en important des diapositives PowerPoint Vous pouvez facilement importer des diapositives à partir de présentations PowerPoint créées précédemment. Pour créer un nouveau projet d’images : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Autre. La fenêtre Autres types de projets s’affiche à droite.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 55 4 Sélectionnez Importer à partir de Microsoft PowerPoint et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez la présentation PowerPoint à partir de laquelle vous voulez importer des diapositives dans votre projet et cliquez sur OK. La boîte de dialogue Convertir les présentations PowerPoint s’affiche. Nom Spécifiez un nom pour le projet. Largeur et hauteur Spécifiez les dimensions pour le projet. Ces dimensions seront utilisées pour l’affichage de votre projet à l’exécution. Vous pouvez choisir des tailles prédéfinies en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant. Si vous voulez que les dimensions restent proportionnelles quand elles sont modifiées, sélectionnez Conserver le rapport de taille. Inclure Cochez les diapositives à inclure dans la présentation. Par défaut, toutes les diapositives de la présentation sont sélectionnées. Tout sélectionner Sélectionne toutes les diapositives de la présentation. Tout eff acer Désélectionne toutes les diapositives de la présentation. Cette option peut être utile quand vous ne voulez sélectionner que quelques diapositives dans une présentation. Cliquez sur Tout effacer, puis sélectionnez les diapositives à importer dans la présentation uniquement. Animation Importe les présentations PowerPoint avec leurs effets d’animations. Image d’arrière-plan Importe les présentations PowerPoint sans les animations associées. En cas de clic de la souris Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez passer à la diapositive suivante après un clic de souris uniquement. Automatiquement Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez passer à la diapositive suivante après le délai de la diapositive. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Les diapositives qui ne sont pas enregistrées dans PowerPoint ne seront pas importées dans le projet. Création de projets à l’aide d’un modèle Vous pouvez utiliser les modèles Adobe Captivate pour créer un nouveau projet. Les modèles sont d’autres projets que vous avez créés et enregistrés comme modèles avec l’extension de fichier cptl. Les modèles peuvent être utilisés de nombreuses fois et vous permettent de gagner du temps et d’assurer une certaine cohérence d’un projet à l’autre. Lorsque vous ouvrez un modèle, la fenêtre d’enregistrement Adobe Captivate s’affiche pour vous permettre d’enregistrer de nouvelles diapositives et de les ajouter à la fin du modèle ou dans le modèle. Lorsque vous avez terminé, vous pouvez enregistrer le nouveau projet comme un nouveau projet, un nouveau modèle, ou les deux. Remarque : Les modèles sont particulièrement efficaces si vous avez des préférences de projets spécifiques que vous voulez utiliser fréquemment. Créez un projet vide, définissez les préférences, enregistrez le projet vide comme modèle, puis créez un nouveau projet avec le modèle en suivant ces étapes. Pour créer un projet à l’aide d’un modèle : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, sous Autres types de projets, sélectionnez Créer un projet à partir d’un modèle.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 56 La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’ouvre et affiche le contenu du dossier de modèles d’Adobe Captivate (Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates pour les versions de Windows autres que Windows Vista, \Documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates pour Windows Vista). 3 Sélectionnez le modèle que vous voulez utiliser et cliquez sur Ouvrir. S’il n’est pas répertorié, cliquez sur Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’au modèle. Les modèles Adobe Captivate utilisent l’extension de fichier .cptl. La boîte de dialogue Options du modèle s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez l’option pour ajouter de nouvelles diapositives à la fin du projet ou après une diapositive sélectionnée et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 5 (Facultatif) Dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer, sélectionnez une fenêtre ouverte à enregistrer. 6 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. 7 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir diverses options d’enregistrement, y compris la possibilité d’enregistrer automatiquement le projet et de générer automatiquement des légendes de texte. 8 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la position de la fenêtre. Déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. Si vous avez sélectionné une fenêtre, vous pouvez cliquer sur Accrocher la fenêtre à la zone d’enregistrement rouge pour modifier rapidement la taille de la fenêtre que vous enregistrez pour qu’elle corresponde à la zone de capture rouge. Remarque : Vous pouvez positionner la zone de capture où vous voulez sur votre écran. Cependant, vous ne pouvez pas la redimensionner parce que sa taille est la même que celle du modèle. Si vous avez besoin de modifier la taille de votre projet après avoir enregistré de nouvelles diapositives pour créer un projet avec le modèle, vous pouvez le redimensionner. 9 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. 10 Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. Si vous enregistrez le projet automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. Si vous enregistrez le projet manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) du clavier pour effectuer des captures d’écran. Utilisez ce qui se trouve dans la zone d’enregistrement rouge (par exemple, une application, un site Web, etc.) comme si vous présentiez vos actions à une autre personne. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, tapez le texte lentement. 11 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Les diapositives sont générées et le nouveau projet apparaît dans l’affichage Scénarimage d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, ces dernières s’afficheront dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 57 Enregistrement de diapositives supplémentaires dans des projets existants Il peut arriver, après avoir créé un projet Adobe Captivate et commencé à travailler sur les diapositives, que vous constatiez qu’il vous en manque un certain nombre. Vous n’avez pas besoin de réenregistrer le projet entier. Vous pouvez juste enregistrer quelques actions. Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer de nouvelles diapositives et de les insérer dans un projet existant. Pour enregistrer de nouvelles diapositives : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer et insérer de nouvelles diapositives dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Sélectionnez > Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Diapositives supplémentaires. 3 Choisissez où vous voulez ajouter les nouvelles diapositives. Vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles diapositives à la fin du projet ou cliquer sur des diapositives de la liste et les ajouter après la diapositive sélectionnée. 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. Sélectionnez les options selon vos besoins. Par exemple, si vous voulez enregistrer une application ouverte, cliquez sur le menu déroulant à côté de Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer (facultatif) et choisissez l’application. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Paramètres et définir de nombreuses options d’enregistrement. Remarque : Vous pouvez positionner la zone de capture où vous voulez sur votre écran. Cependant, vous ne pouvez pas la redimensionner car sa taille est la même que celle du projet auquel vous ajoutez les diapositives. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. 6 Enregistrez les nouvelles diapositives. 7 Une fois que vous avez fini l’enregistrement, appuyez sur Fin (ou une autre combinaison de touches que vous avez désignée) sur le clavier pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Les nouvelles diapositives enregistrées sont insérées dans votre projet à l’emplacement spécifié. Remarque : Vous pouvez également importer des diapositives à partir d’autres projets Adobe Captivate ou de fichiers PowerPoint. Relier des projets Adobe Captivate Vous pouvez relier des projets Adobe Captivate entre eux ou à d’autres fichiers lorsque vous utilisez les fonctionnalités suivantes : • Objets interactifs : Zone de texte, Zone de clic ou Bouton • Editeur d’habillage • Diapositives de questions • Navigation au sein des diapositives • Action de projet Vérifiez que tous les projets ou fichiers liés se trouvent dans le même dossier avant de suivre la procédure pour les relier.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 58 Pour relier des projets Adobe Captivate à d’autres projets ou fichiers à l’aide des objets interactifs : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Insérez n’importe lequel des objets interactifs dans la diapositive en utilisant les options du menu Insérer. 3 Cliquez sur l’objet interactif avec le bouton droit et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu. La boîte de dialogue correspondant à l’objet interactif s’affiche. 4 Dans le menu déroulant En cas de réussite, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Ouvrir URL ou fichier • Ouvrir un autre projet 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et utilisez la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir pour relier le fichier ou le projet. 6 Supprimez le chemin système, le cas échéant, pour vous assurer que seul le nom de fichier est affiché dans le champ URL/Projet. Pour relier des projets Adobe Captivate à d’autres projets ou fichiers à l’aide de l’éditeur d’habillage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Menu. 4 Cliquez sur Ajouter. La boîte de dialogue Ajouter/Modifier l’option de menu s’affiche. 5 Dans le menu déroulant En cas de clic, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Ouvrir URL ou fichier • Ouvrir un autre projet 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et utilisez la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir pour relier le fichier ou le projet. 7 Supprimez le chemin système, le cas échéant, pour vous assurer que seul le nom de fichier est affiché dans le champ URL/Projet. Pour relier des projets Adobe Captivate à d’autres projets ou fichiers à l’aide des diapositives de questions : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Question notée. La boîte de dialogue pour la diapositive de questions correspondante s’affiche. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Action, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Ouvrir URL ou fichier • Ouvrir un autre projet 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et utilisez la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir pour relier le fichier ou le projet. 6 Supprimez le chemin système, le cas échéant, pour vous assurer que seul le nom de fichier est affiché dans le champ URL/Projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 59 A propos de l’utilisation de modèles de projets Une fois que vous avez créé un projet dans Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez l’enregistrer comme un modèle de projet. Cela vous permet de gagner du temps et d’être cohérent dans vos projets. Vous pouvez réutiliser le modèle de nombreuses fois et garantir que tous vos projets ont le même aspect. Par exemple, si vous avez passé beaucoup de temps sur un projet pour qu’il soit exactement comme vous voulez avec des commandes de lecture personnalisées, une diapositive d’introduction avec le logo de votre organisation, une diapositive de fin qui affiche votre site Web et la taille exacte pour afficher le projet correctement dans votre application, vous pouvez l’enregistrer comme un modèle et l’utiliser comme base pour les projets que vous créerez plus tard. Vous serez en mesure de produire des projets plus rapidement et ils auront tous la même apparence. Remarque : Les modèles sont particulièrement efficaces si vous avez des préférences de projets spécifiques que vous voulez utiliser fréquemment. Créez un projet vide, définissez les préférences, enregistrez le projet vide comme modèle en suivant les étapes de la section suivante, puis créez un nouveau projet avec le modèle. Création de modèles de projets Il est facile d’enregistrer un projet que vous avez créé comme modèle. Pour enregistrer un projet de la version actuelle comme modèle : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Créez un projet. 3 Modifiez le projet selon vos besoins (par exemple, ajoutez des légendes, modifiez la commande de lecture ou ajoutez de l’audio). 4 Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Enregistrer sous. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. 5 Dans le champ de type de fichier, sélectionnez Modèles Adobe Captivate (*.cptl). 6 Saisissez un nom de fichier pour le modèle dans le champ correspondant. 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Votre projet est enregistré sous forme de modèle de projet avec l’extension de fichier .cptl. Adobe Captivate stocke les modèles dans un dossier nommé Templates. Le dossier de modèles se trouve dans C:\Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates. Pour enregistrer un projet d’une version précédente comme modèle : 1 Ouvrez la dernière version d’Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Ouvrir et ouvrez un projet créé à l’aide d’une version précédente d’Adobe Captivate que vous désirez enregistrer comme modèle. Un message vous demandant si vous voulez écraser le fichier ou le sauvegarder en tant que nouveau fichier s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Enregistrer sous et enregistrez le projet sous un autre nom. Le projet s’ouvre dans Adobe Captivate. 4 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer sous. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 60 5 Dans Nom de fichier, saisissez un nom pour le modèle. 6 Dans le champ de type de fichier, sélectionnez Modèles Adobe Captivate (*.CPTL). 7 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Utilisation de l’enregistrement d’images animées Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité utile, appelée « enregistrement d’images animées ». Lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement un nouveau projet ou des diapositives supplémentaires pour un projet existant, vous pouvez utiliser l’enregistrement d’images animées pour capturer automatiquement les images à une vitesse de défilement plus rapide, en particulier lorsque vous enregistrez des actions de glisser-déposer. En capturant à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée, les actions de glisser-déposer s’affichent de manière plus fluide dans le fichier SWF Adobe Captivate final. L’expérience est plus réaliste pour les utilisateurs. Si vous activez la fonctionnalité d’images animées, Adobe Captivate démarre la capture d’images à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée chaque fois que vous cliquez sur un objet lorsque vous enregistrez automatiquement un nouveau projet ou des diapositives. Vous savez que l’enregistrement d’images animées a commencé en regardant l’icône Adobe Captivate dans la zone de notification (située dans le coin inférieur droit de l’écran de votre ordinateur). Lorsque vous enregistrez normalement, l’icône s’affiche comme une icône classique. Lorsque l’enregistrement d’images animées commence automatiquement, l’icône s’affiche avec des bordures rouges et clignote. Pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées, arrêtez le glissement de l’objet ou appuyez sur la touche de fin d’enregistrement (les touches par défaut sont F10 pour arrêter l’enregistrement d’images animées ou Fin pour arrêter totalement l’enregistrement). Une fois l’enregistrement terminé, Adobe Captivate génère les diapositives qui composent le projet et les affiche dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Toutes les actions de glisser-déposer enregistrées comme diapositives d’images animées apparaissent dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Les diapositives d’images animées sont enregistrées et incluses dans des projets sous la forme de diapositives d’animation. Pour de meilleurs résultats, surtout avec l’enregistrement d’images animées, effectuez les actions (glissement d’objets, clics, frappe) lentement. La fonctionnalité d’enregistrement d’images animées est activée par défaut. Vous pouvez la désactiver à tout moment. Vous pouvez définir les préférences pour l’enregistrement d’images animées à l’aide du fichier FMRConsts.ini qui se trouve dans le dossier d’installation d’Adobe Captivate. Les modifications apportées à la configuration sont reflétées lors de l’enregistrement en mode d’enregistrement d’images animées. La taille du fichier SWF publié et le chargement sur votre processeur sont affectés par ces modifications. Pour modifier les préférences d’enregistrement d’images animées à l’aide du fichier FMRConsts.ini : 1 Ouvrez le fichier FMRConsts.ini dans le bloc-notes. Ce fichier se trouve dans le répertoire d’installation d’Adobe Captivate (\\Program files\Adobe Captivate ). 2 Modifiez les éléments suivants selon vos préférences : Capture rate Spécifie le nombre de captures d’écran effectuées par seconde. Si vous augmentez cette valeur, la taille du fichier SWF publié augmente également. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 3 et 15. La valeur par défaut est 15. Key frame interval Si vous augmentez cette valeur, la taille du fichier publié diminue mais la consommation de mémoire augmente pendant la lecture du fichier SWF. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 10 et 50. La valeur par défaut est 10. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 61 Key frame SWF size Si vous augmentez cette valeur, la taille du fichier publié diminue mais la consommation de mémoire augmente pendant la lecture du fichier SWF. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 0 et 3. La valeur par défaut est 1. Split SWF after SWF size 16 bit Augmentez cette valeur pour réduire le nombre de diapositives générées lors de l’enregistrement en mode couleur vidéo 16 bits. La taille des fichiers SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées individuels est élevée mais la taille globale de la sortie reste la même. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 5 et 30. La valeur par défaut est 20. Split SWF after capture data size 16 bit Augmentez cette valeur pour réduire le nombre de diapositives générées lors de l’enregistrement en mode couleur vidéo 16 bits. La taille des fichiers SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées individuels est élevée mais la taille globale de la sortie reste la même. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 100 et 2000. La valeur par défaut est 300. Remarque : Ce sont les valeurs définies pour Split SWF after SWF size 16 bit et Split SWF after capture data size 16 bit qui déterminent quand une nouvelle diapositive est créée. Si vous augmentez ces valeurs, le temps de création du nouveau fichier de projet augmente. Split SWF after SWF size 32 bit Augmentez cette valeur pour réduire le nombre de diapositives générées lors de l’enregistrement en mode couleur vidéo 32 bits. La taille des fichiers SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées individuels est élevée mais la taille globale de la sortie reste la même. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 5 et 30. La valeur par défaut est 6. Split SWF after capture data size 32 bit Augmentez cette valeur pour réduire le nombre de diapositives générées lors de l’enregistrement en mode couleur vidéo 32 bits. La taille des fichiers SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées individuels est élevée mais la taille globale de la sortie reste la même. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 100 et 2000. La valeur par défaut est 100. Remarque : Ce sont les valeurs définies pour Split SWF after SWF size 32 bit et Split SWF after capture data size 32 bit qui déterminent quand une nouvelle diapositive est créée. Si vous augmentez ces valeurs, le temps de création du nouveau fichier de projet augmente. Show hint at memory consumption percentage Un message s’affiche quand la consommation de mémoire, en pourcentage, de l’ordinateur atteint la valeur spécifiée. Cela évite que l’utilisateur ne perde des données non sauvegardées. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 65 et 90. La valeur par défaut est 87. Stop at memory consumption percentage La capture d’écrans s’arrête quand le pourcentage de consommation de mémoire de l’ordinateur atteint cette valeur. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 65 et 98. La valeur par défaut est 95. Show hint at memory available MBs Un message s’affiche quand la mémoire disponible de l’ordinateur atteint la valeur spécifiée. Cela évite que l’utilisateur ne perde des données non sauvegardées. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 80 et 500. La valeur par défaut est 80. Stop at memory available MBs La capture d’écrans s’arrête quand la mémoire disponible sur l’ordinateur atteint cette valeur. Spécifiez une valeur comprise entre 40 et 200. La valeur par défaut est 40. Pour désactiver l’enregistrement d’images animées d’actions de glisser-déposer : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées. 4 Supprimez la coche en regard de l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer et de l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 62 5 Cliquez sur OK. A propos des diapositives d’images animées Grâce à Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez enregistrer des films d’images animées (aussi connus sous le nom d’« enregistrement de glisser-déposer ») au format SWF qui affichent des déplacements détaillés comme des fonctionnalités de dessin/peinture et des actions de glisser-déposer. L’option d’enregistrement d’images animées est un outil puissant qui peut être utilisé dans de nombreux cas. Vous pouvez inclure autant de diapositives d’images animées dans vos projets que vous voulez afin de montrer un concept avec précision aux utilisateurs. Lorsque vous enregistrez en utilisant l’option d’enregistrement d’images animées, Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement commencer la capture de diapositives à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée, ce qui rend les déplacements plus réalistes. Vous pouvez également contrôler le processus en enregistrant les diapositives manuellement. Les diapositives d’images animées sont enregistrées et incluses dans des projets sous la forme de diapositives d’animation. Remarque : Il est important de définir la vitesse de défilement correcte avant de créer les diapositives d’images animées. Le paramètre par défaut est de 30 images flash par seconde et est approprié dans la plupart des cas. Il est possible que vous ayez à modifier la vitesse si vous intégrez votre fichier SWF Adobe Captivate dans un autre fichier SWF ayant une vitesse de défilement différente de 30. Modifiez la vitesse de défilement à l’aide de la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. Adobe Captivate peut capturer automatiquement les images animées ou vous pouvez les capturer manuellement. Voici un scénario d’enregistrement effectué automatiquement et manuellement pour vous donner une idée du processus. Enregistrement automatique d’images animées Un auteur de projet Adobe Captivate doit créer un projet sur une application utilisée pour dessiner. L’option automatique d’enregistrement d’images animées est activée. L’auteur commence à enregistrer le projet Adobe Captivate et veut ensuite montrer comment l’application peut être utilisée pour dessiner. Adobe Captivate reconnaît quand l’auteur commence à dessiner avec l’application et lance automatiquement l’enregistrement au format SWF. Lorsque la session de dessin est terminée, Adobe Captivate revient à la capture d’écran standard. L’auteur peut alors continuer les captures d’écran normales et appuyer sur la touche Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie pour arrêter l’enregistrement) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Les captures d’écran effectuées au début et à la fin de l’enregistrement sont enregistrées comme des diapositives normales et la diapositive d’images animées enregistrée au format SWF est enregistrée comme une diapositive d’animation. Enregistrement manuel d’images animées Un auteur de projet Adobe Captivate doit créer un projet sur une application utilisée pour dessiner. L’option automatique d’enregistrement d’images animées est désactivée. L’auteur commence à enregistrer le projet Adobe Captivate à l’aide de la méthode de capture d’écran standard. Il veut ensuite montrer comment l’application peut être utilisée pour dessiner. L’auteur appuie alors sur la touche de raccourci de début d’enregistrement d’images animées (F9 ou une touche personnalisée) et Adobe Captivate commence à enregistrer au format SWF. L’auteur utilise l’application pour dessiner et Adobe Captivate capture l’action. Lorsqu’il a fini de dessiner, l’auteur appuie sur la touche de fin d’enregistrement d’images animées (F10 ou une touche personnalisée). It peut alors continuer les captures d’écran normales et appuyer sur la touche Fin (ou autre touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Les captures d’écran effectuées au début et à la fin de l’enregistrement sont enregistrées comme des diapositives normales et la diapositive d’images animées enregistrée au format SWF est enregistrée comme une diapositive d’animation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 63 Comparer les diapositives d’images animées et les diapositives de film standard Adobe Captivate permet d’effectuer des captures d’écran en format Impr écran standard et en utilisant l’option d’enregistrement d’images animées. Cette option effectue des captures d’écran à une vitesse de défilement plus élevée, ce qui donne un film plus fluide et plus réaliste. Comme l’option d’images animées crée un film de qualité supérieure, vous devez décider quand utiliser la méthode d’enregistrement standard et quand utiliser l’enregistrement d’images animées. Remarque : Il est important de définir la vitesse de défilement correcte avant de créer les diapositives d’images animées. Le paramètre par défaut est de 30 images flash par seconde et est approprié dans la plupart des cas. Il est possible que vous ayez à modifier la vitesse si vous intégrez votre fichier SWF Adobe Captivate dans un autre fichier SWF ayant une vitesse de défilement différente de 30. Modifiez la vitesse de défilement à l’aide de la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. Pour bien faire la différence entre les deux options, il faut considérer l’enregistrement d’images animées comme une amélioration, et non un substitut, d’un film standard. Le film d’images animées enregistré est placé dans une diapositive de projet et est lu comme un « mini-film » dans un projet plus grand. Les films d’images animées sont utiles lorsque vous avez besoin de montrer une action qui implique un mouvement précis comme par exemple un programme de dessin/peinture, des actions de glisser-déposer détaillées ou un programme 3D. Création de diapositives d’images animées Vous créez des diapositives d’images animées (aussi connues sous le nom d’« enregistrement de glisser-déposer ») dans un projet standard. Une diapositive d’images animées est utile pour montrer une action qui implique un déplacement détaillé comme dessiner ou les actions de glisser-déposer ou 3D. Vous pouvez enregistrer ou ajouter autant de diapositives d’images animées à votre projet Adobe Captivate que nécessaire. Pour enregistrer une diapositive d’images animées lors de l’enregistrement d’un nouveau projet : 1 Depuis la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 2 Sélectionnez Simulation logicielle, puis le type de projet à enregistrer, par exemple Application ou Taille personnalisée. 3 Cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 4 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres. a Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. b Sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées, puis sélectionnez Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer ou Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de molette de la souris si vous voulez qu’Adobe Captivate enregistre automatiquement les images animées lorsque vous commencez des actions de glisser-déposer ou de la molette de la souris. L’enregistrement automatique et l’enregistrement automatique d’images animées sont des options facultatives. Vous pouvez effectuer les deux types d’enregistrement manuellement, si vous préférez. Une fois que vous avez terminé de définir les options, cliquez sur OK. 5 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer l’audio au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 64 6 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique (ci-dessus), cliquez sur le menu déroulant Légendes en pour spécifier la langue dans laquelle le texte des légendes et des infobulles sera automatiquement généré. 7 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Vous pouvez redimensionner la fenêtre en sélectionnant une des poignées de redimensionnement sur le cadre rouge et en la faisant glisser pour obtenir une taille plus petite ou plus grande. Pour modifier l’emplacement de la fenêtre, déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, cliquez et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. • Si vous enregistrez le projet manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), cliquez sur le bouton Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) pour effectuer des captures d’écran. • Si vous enregistrez le projet automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. Remarque : Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, par exemple, tapez le texte le plus lentement possible. 9 Vous pouvez enregistrer des images animées de deux manières : • Si vous enregistrez manuellement des images animées (cela signifie si vous n’avez pas sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer), appuyez sur la touche de démarrage de l’enregistrement d’images animées, F9 (ou sur une autre touche affectée à la capture d’images animées) lorsque vous voulez démarrer l’enregistrement d’images animées. Adobe Captivate commence la capture en mode d’enregistrement d’images animées. Effectuez les actions à enregistrer en mode d’images animées et une fois que vous avez terminé, appuyez sur F10 (ou sur une autre touche affectée à la fin de la capture d’images animées) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Adobe Captivate revient au mode d’enregistrement standard pour que vous puissiez continuer l’enregistrement. • Si vous enregistrez automatiquement des images animées (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer), l’enregistrement d’images animées commence, par exemple, lorsque vous cliquez sur un objet et le faites glisser ou lorsque vous commencez à dessiner dans un programme graphique. L’enregistrement d’images animées s’arrête automatiquement lorsque vous déposez l’objet ou lorsque vous arrêtez de dessiner. Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris, l’enregistrement d’images animées commence quand vous utilisez la molette de la souris. Quand l’enregistrement d’images animées s’arrête, Adobe Captivate revient au mode d’enregistrement standard pour que vous puissiez continuer l’enregistrement de diapositives, selon vos besoins. Remarque : Lorsque vous êtes en mode d’enregistrement d’images animées, une icône Adobe Captivate s’affiche avec une bordure rouge dans la zone de notification dans la partie inférieure droite du bureau de votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous avez fini l’enregistrement d’images animées, l’icône standard d’Adobe Captivate s’affiche de nouveau. 10 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 65 Remarque : Le nouveau projet, y compris la portion d’images animées, est généré et s’affiche dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Si vous avez enregistré des actions de glisser-déposer et avez donc créé des diapositives d’images animées, ces dernières s’afficheront dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. Les diapositives d’images animées sont enregistrées et incluses dans des projets sous la forme de diapositives d’animation. Pour ajouter une diapositive d’images animées à un projet existant : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate auquel vous voulez ajouter une nouvelle diapositive d’images animées. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Diapositives supplémentaires. 3 Choisissez où vous voulez ajouter la nouvelle diapositive. Vous pouvez ajouter une nouvelle diapositive à la fin du projet ou cliquer sur une diapositive de la liste et ajouter une nouvelle diapositive après la diapositive sélectionnée. 4 Cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres. a Dans Enregistrement, sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. b Sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées, puis sélectionnez Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer ou Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de molette de la souris si vous voulez qu’Adobe Captivate enregistre automatiquement les images animées lorsque vous commencez des actions de glisser-déposer ou de la molette de la souris. L’enregistrement automatique et l’enregistrement automatique d’images animées sont des options facultatives. Vous pouvez effectuer les deux types d’enregistrement manuellement, si vous préférez. Une fois que vous avez terminé de définir les options, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez positionner la zone de capture où vous voulez sur votre écran. Cependant, vous ne pouvez pas la redimensionner car sa taille est la même que celle du projet auquel vous ajoutez la diapositive. 6 Définissez les autres options d’enregistrement selon vos besoins. Par exemple, si vous voulez enregistrer une application ouverte, cliquez sur le menu déroulant à côté de Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer (facultatif) et choisissez l’application. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Enregistrer un commentaire pour enregistrer une piste audio tout en capturant la diapositive d’images animées. Une fois que vous avez fini de sélectionner les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. 7 Vous pouvez enregistrer des images animées de deux manières : • Si vous enregistrez manuellement des images animées (cela signifie si vous n’avez pas sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer), appuyez sur la touche de démarrage de l’enregistrement d’images animées, F9 (ou sur une autre touche affectée à la capture d’images animées) lorsque vous voulez démarrer l’enregistrement d’images animées. Adobe Captivate commence la capture en mode d’enregistrement d’images animées. Effectuez les actions à enregistrer en mode d’images animées et une fois que vous avez terminé, appuyez sur F10 (ou sur une autre touche affectée à la fin de la capture d’images animées) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Adobe Captivate revient au mode d’enregistrement standard pour que vous puissiez continuer l’enregistrement, selon vos besoins. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 66 • Si vous enregistrez automatiquement des images animées (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de glisser-déposer), l’enregistrement d’images animées commence, par exemple, lorsque vous cliquez sur un objet et le faites glisser ou lorsque vous commencez à dessiner dans un programme graphique. L’enregistrement d’images animées s’arrête automatiquement lorsque vous déposez l’objet ou lorsque vous arrêtez de dessiner. Si vous avez sélectionné l’option Utiliser automatiquement la capture d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris, l’enregistrement d’images animées commence quand vous utilisez la molette de la souris. Quand l’enregistrement d’images animées s’arrête, Adobe Captivate revient au mode d’enregistrement standard pour que vous puissiez continuer l’enregistrement de diapositives, selon vos besoins. Remarque : Lorsque vous êtes en mode d’enregistrement d’images animées, une icône Adobe Captivate s’affiche avec une bordure rouge dans la zone de notification, dans la partie inférieure droite du bureau de votre ordinateur. Lorsque vous avez fini l’enregistrement d’images animées, l’icône d’enregistrement standard d’Adobe Captivate s’affiche de nouveau. 8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie) pour terminer entièrement l’enregistrement. La nouvelle diapositive d’images animées est placée dans votre projet à l’emplacement spécifié. La diapositive d’images animées s’affiche dans l’affichage Scénarimage avec une icône de caméra dans la partie inférieure droite de la diapositive. Les diapositives d’images animées sont enregistrées et incluses dans des projets sous la forme de diapositives d’animation. Création de projets accessibles Vous pouvez créer des projets Adobe Captivate conformes à la Section 508 du U.S. Rehabilitation Act (Loi sur la réadaptation des Etats-Unis) pour les utilisateurs atteints d’une déficience visuelle ou auditive, de troubles de la mobilité ou d’autres types de handicaps. Normes d’accessibilité mondiales De nombreux pays, y compris les Etats-Unis, l’Australie, le Canada, le Japon et les pays de l’Union Européenne, ont adopté des normes d’accessibilité basées sur les normes développées par le World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). Le W3C publie les Web Content Accessibility Guidelines (Directives d’accessibilité aux contenus Web), un document qui hiérarchise les actions que les créateurs doivent prendre pour rendre le contenu Web accessible. Pour de plus amples informations concernant la Web Accessibility Initiative (Initiative d’accès au Web), visitez le site du W3C sur www.w3.org/WAI. Aux Etats-Unis, la loi qui gouverne l’accessibilité est connue sous le nom de Section 508, un amendement du U.S. Rehabilitation Act (Loi sur la réadaptation des Etats-Unis). La Section 508 interdit aux agences fédérales d’acheter, de développer, de conserver ou d’utiliser de la technologie électronique qui n’est pas accessible aux personnes atteintes de handicaps. En plus de mandater les normes, la Section 508 permet aux employés de la fonction publique d’attaquer les agences en justice dans des tribunaux fédéraux pour non-conformité. Pour de plus amples informations concernant la Section 508, consultez les sites suivants : • Le site sponsorisé par le gouvernement américain sur www.section508.gov • Le Centre de ressources sur l’accessibilité d’Adobe sur www.adobe.com/go/accessibility_frADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 67 Compréhension de la technologie des lecteurs d’écran Les lecteurs d’écran sont des programmes informatiques conçus pour naviguer sur un site Web et lire le contenu Web à haute voix. Les utilisateurs atteints d’une déficience visuelle se servent souvent de cette technologie. Les personnes visionnant vos projets Adobe Captivate doivent avoir Flash Player 6 ou supérieur et Internet Explorer sur Windows 2000 ou supérieur. JAWS, de Freedom Scientific, est un exemple de lecteur d’écran. Vous pouvez accéder à la page JAWS du site de Freedom Scientific sur www.hj.com/fs_products/software_jaws.asp. Window-Eyes de GW Micro est un autre lecteur d’écran couramment utilisé. Pour accéder aux informations les plus récentes concernant Window-Eyes, visitez le site de GW Micro sur www.gwmicro.com. Pour les utilisateurs Windows, Microsoft offre un produit gratuit téléchargeable nommé Microsoft Reader qui contient une fonctionnalité de synthèse vocale. Pour de plus amples informations, visitez le site de Microsoft sur www.microsoft.com. Parce que les différents lecteurs d’écran utilisent des méthodes variées pour traduire les informations en paroles, la façon dont votre contenu est présenté aux utilisateurs varie. Lorsque vous créez des projets accessibles, n’oubliez pas que vous ne pouvez pas contrôler le comportement d’un lecteur d’écran. Vous pouvez uniquement contrôler le contenu, pas les lecteurs d’écran. Vous ne pouvez pas obliger les lecteurs d’écran à lire un texte spécifique à un moment spécifique, ni contrôler la façon dont le contenu est lu. Il est donc très important de tester vos projets avec plusieurs lecteurs d’écran pour vous assurer qu’ils fonctionnent comme vous le voulez. Adobe Captivate et l’accessibilité Vous pouvez créer des sorties conformes à la Section 508 pour les utilisateurs atteints d’une déficience visuelle ou auditive, de troubles de la mobilité ou d’autres types de handicaps. Lors de la création de votre projet, vous pouvez également supprimer les obstacles empêchant les personnes atteintes de handicaps de visionner vos projets Adobe Captivate. Ces solutions soutiennent les efforts des agences gouvernementales pour répondre aux besoins de leurs utilisateurs par le biais de la conformité à la Section 508, ainsi que des sociétés qui désirent améliorer l’accessibilité. Que signifie la conformité à la Section 508 ? La Section 508 fait partie du Rehabilitation Act de 1973 (Loi de 1973 sur la réadaptation) qui exige que les agences fédérales développent, maintiennent, acquièrent ou utilisent la technologie électronique et de l’information pour rendre les systèmes accessibles aux personnes atteintes de handicaps. La version la plus récente (1998) de la Section 508 établit des normes applicables dans l’ensemble de l’administration publique. Que signifie « accessible » ? En général, un système de technologie de l’information est accessible aux personnes atteintes de handicaps s’il peut être utilisé de plusieurs manières ne dépendant pas d’un unique sens ou d’une seule capacité. Par exemple, les utilisateurs doivent pouvoir naviguer avec un clavier, en plus d’une souris (pas uniquement avec une souris). Par ailleurs, les éléments visuels et auditifs de l’interface utilisateur doivent accommoder les utilisateurs malentendants et ceux ayant une déficience visuelle. De quels autres types de logiciels d’aide ont besoin les utilisateurs finaux ? Les lecteurs d’écran ou les utilitaires de synthèse vocale (qui lisent le contenu de la fenêtre active, les options des menus ou le texte que vous avez tapé) et les outils d’aide de révision d’écran traduisent le texte à l’écran en paroles ou en un affichage Braille dynamique et actualisable. Cette technologie d’aide peut fournir une assistance pour le clavier ou des raccourcis, des légendes pour les paroles et les sons et des avertissements visuels comme des barres d’outils clignotantes. Les outils disponibles sont notamment Windows Eye et JAWS (Job Access With Speech). ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 68 Que fait Adobe Captivate pour être conforme à la Section 508 ? La sélection de l’option Conforme à la Section 508 rend certains éléments des projets Adobe Captivate accessibles ou ouverts à la technologie d’accessibilité. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez l’option Conforme à la Section 508 et si vous avez rempli les champs de nom et de description du projet dans Propriétés du projet, un lecteur d’écran lira le nom et la description lorsque le fichier SWF Adobe Captivate est lu. Les éléments Adobe Captivate suivants sont accessibles lorsque l’option Conforme à la Section 508 est sélectionnée : • Nom du projet (provenant des Propriétés du projet) • Description du projet (provenant des Propriétés du projet) • Texte d’accessibilité des diapositives • Etiquette des diapositives (provenant des Propriétés de la diapositive) • Boutons • Commandes de lecture (la fonction de chaque bouton est lue par les lecteurs d’écran) • Protection par mot de passe (si un fichier SWF Adobe Captivate est protégé par un mot de passe, le message demandant le mot de passe est lu par les lecteurs d’écran) • Diapositives de questions (le titre, la question, les réponses, le texte des boutons et la communication de score sont lus par les lecteurs d’écran) Remarque : Les sorties générées avec l’option Conforme à la Section 508 s’afficheront avec tous les navigateurs pris en charge. Cependant, il se peut que votre sortie ne soit pas conforme à la Section 508 à moins qu’elle ne soit affichée avec Internet Explorer. Internet Explorer est le seul navigateur à prendre en charge MSAA (Microsoft Active Accessibility). Remarque : Pour accéder au contenu Flash à l’aide d’un lecteur d’écran, Flash Player 6 ou supérieur doit être installé sur l’ordinateur des utilisateurs. Remarque : L’Access Board est un organisme fédéral indépendant responsable de l’établissement des normes d’accessibilité pour les personnes atteintes de handicaps. Pour de plus amples informations sur les sorties conformes à la Section 508, consultez le site de l’Access Board (www.access-board.gov/508.htm). Publication de fichiers SWF Adobe Captivate conformes à la Section 508 Créez un projet Adobe Captivate en utilisant l’option Conforme à la Section 508 pour afficher et tester la sortie. La génération du projet Adobe Captivate met à jour les fichiers sources contenant les informations du projet et crée des fichiers de sortie que vous pouvez publier pour les utilisateurs. Lisez les conseils de création et utilisez la procédure suivante. Pour publier des projets conformes à la Section 508 : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate que vous voulez publier conformément à la Section 508. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la zone Options de sortie, vérifiez que l’option de conformité à la section 508 est sélectionnée. 5 Cliquez sur OK. 6 Publiez le projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 69 7 Une fois la publication terminée, sélectionnez l’option Afficher la sortie pour afficher et tester le fichier SWF Adobe Captivate. Ajout de texte d’accessibilité à des diapositives Adobe Captivate permet de facilement ajouter du texte spécialement conçu pour être lu par un lecteur d’écran à une diapositive. Vous pouvez créer du texte personnalisé pour chaque diapositive. Le texte sera lu uniquement si l’option Conforme à la Section 508 est sélectionnée. Pour ajouter du texte qui peut être lu par un lecteur d’écran : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter du texte accessible et sélectionnez Propriétés. 3 Cliquez sur Accessibilité. 4 Tapez le texte qui doit être lu par le lecteur d’écran. Si votre diapositive contient du texte, comme une légende de texte, cliquez sur Insérer le texte de la diapositive pour ajouter automatiquement le texte de la légende. Si vous avez des annotations écrites pour la diapositive, cliquez sur Insérer les annotations de la diapositive pour ajouter le texte. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Conseils pour créer des fichiers SWF Adobe Captivate conformes à la Section 508 Bien que les sorties Adobe Captivate avec l’option Section 508 soient conformes pour la navigation, vous devez également vous assurer que les autres éléments sont conformes dans vos rubriques. Les logiciels d’aide doivent pouvoir « lire » les éléments à l’écran aux utilisateurs ayant une déficience visuelle. Utilisez ces conseils pour vous aider à créer des projets accessibles. • Ecrivez un nom et une description pour vos projets Adobe Captivate dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés du projet. • Pour les utilisateurs atteints de déficience auditive, ajoutez les équivalents textuels pour les éléments audio. Par exemple, lorsque vous avez des commentaires audio, il est important d’inclure des légendes en même temps. Vous pouvez, par exemple, mettre une légende transparente à un endroit fixe sur vos diapositives, puis synchroniser le texte avec l’audio à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique. • Si votre projet contient du multimédia visuel, donnez les informations concernant le multimédia aux utilisateurs atteints d’une déficience visuelle. Si un nom et une description sont donnés aux éléments visuels, Adobe Captivate peut envoyer les informations à l’utilisateur grâce au lecteur d’écran. Faites attention lorsque vous utilisez de l’audio dans vos projets Adobe Captivate, car cela peut empêcher les utilisateurs d’écouter le lecteur d’écran. • Ecrivez du texte spécifique affecté à des diapositives devant être lu par les lecteurs d’écran. • Assurez-vous que la couleur n’est pas la seule façon de faire passer les informations. Par exemple, les liens actifs qui utilisent une couleur de police bleue pour indiquer qu’ils sont actifs doivent également utiliser un autre type de formatage (tel que gras, italique ou souligné). Par ailleurs, assurez-vous que le premier plan et l’arrière-plan contrastent suffisamment pour que le texte soit lisible par les personnes ayant une faible vision et par celles atteintes de daltonisme. • Pour les utilisateurs atteints de déficience visuelle ou de troubles de la mobilité, assurez-vous que les commandes sont indépendantes de l’appareil ou accessibles par le clavier. • Les utilisateurs atteints de troubles cognitifs répondent souvent mieux aux conceptions non encombrées dans lesquelles il est facile de naviguer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 70 • Si le déplacement de souris est indispensable dans votre projet Adobe Captivate, pensez à modifier le pointeur de la souris pour qu’il fasse deux fois sa taille normale de manière à ce qu’il soit plus facile à voir. • Documentez les méthodes d’accessibilité pour les utilisateurs. • Evitez de lire les objets en boucle. Lorsqu’un lecteur d’écran rencontre du contenu Flash sur une page, le lecteur d’écran avertit l’utilisateur avec de l’audio, par exemple « Chargement en cours… chargement terminé ». Au fur et à mesure que le contenu change, Flash Player envoie un événement au lecteur d’écran l’avertissant d’un changement. Le lecteur d’écran revient alors en haut de la page et reprend la lecture. Ainsi, une animation de texte en boucle sur une diapositive, par exemple, risque d’obliger le lecteur d’écran à revenir continuellement en haut de la page. Cela peut être très gênant pour les utilisateurs qui se fient au lecteur d’écran. • Si vous créez des zones de clic, vous pouvez les rendre plus accessibles en ajoutant du son. Le son peut être lu lorsque les utilisateurs atteignent la zone de clic en appuyant sur la touche de tabulation ou la survolent. Pour ajouter cette fonctionnalité d’accessibilité, associez un fichier audio à la légende de conseil. Si vous ne voulez pas que la légende de conseil s’affiche sur la diapositive, vous pouvez rendre la légende transparente et ne pas ajouter de texte. • L’accessibilité dans les films Adobe Captivate fonctionne mieux quand toutes les diapositives ont un contenu interactif. Si vous utilisez JAWS 6.1 ou ultérieur, il est possible que JAWS n’efface pas l’arborescence MSAA (Microsoft Active Accessibility). Cela peut provoquer la répétition du contenu de diapositives précédentes dans le cas de diapositives continues. Ce problème ne se produit pas dans JAWS 4.5. A propos du test du contenu accessible Si vous créez votre projet Adobe Captivate pour qu’il fonctionne avec des lecteurs d’écran, téléchargez plusieurs lecteurs d’écran et testez votre projet en le lisant dans un navigateur avec le lecteur d’écran activé. Assurez-vous que le lecteur d’écran n’essaie pas de « parler » à des moments du projet où vous avez inséré de l’audio séparé. Plusieurs applications de lecteur d’écran offrent une version de démonstration du logiciel sous la forme d’un téléchargement gratuit. Essayez le plus de lecteurs d’écran possibles pour garantir la compatibilité pour tous ces lecteurs. Si vous utilisez du contenu interactif, testez-le et vérifiez que les utilisateurs peuvent se déplacer efficacement dans votre projet en utilisant uniquement le clavier. Cela peut s’avérer extrêmement difficile car des lecteurs d’écran différents ne fonctionnent pas de la même manière lorsqu’ils traitent les entrées du clavier, ce qui signifie que votre contenu Adobe Captivate risque de ne pas recevoir les frappes de touches comme vous l’aviez prévu. Assurez-vous de tester tous les raccourcis clavier. Page d’accessibilité d’Adobe Captivate Pour obtenir les informations les plus récentes sur la création et l’affichage de contenu Adobe Captivate accessible, visitez la page Accessibilité du site d’Adobe sur www.adobe.com/macromedia/accessibility/features/captivate/overview.html. Localisation de projets Adobe Captivate La localisation consiste à adapter des informations pour un pays spécifique. Le terme « localisation » est souvent utilisé comme synonyme de traduction, mais la localisation consiste généralement à modifier des informations pour les adapter à une culture particulière en plus de les traduire dans une autre langue. Voici deux options pour localiser des projets Adobe Captivate.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 71 Utilisation d’Adobe Captivate avec une interface utilisateur localisée Si vous créez des projets Adobe Captivate qui montrent un site Web ou une application créé dans plusieurs langues, vous pouvez créer des projets localisés pour chaque langue. Pour créer des projets Adobe Captivate localisés : 1 Créez un projet Adobe Captivate dans votre langue source à l’aide d’une version du site Web ou de l’application dans cette langue source. Par exemple, si votre application a été créée en anglais, créez un projet Adobe Captivate en anglais qui montre l’application en anglais. 2 Exportez les légendes du projet et faites-les traduire dans les langues dont vous avez besoin. Reprenons l’exemple de l’étape 1. Vous pouvez prendre les légendes en anglais du projet en anglais, les exporter et donner le texte à des traducteurs pour qu’ils le traduisent dans d’autres langues comme l’allemand et le japonais. 3 Ouvrez le site ou l’application localisé et enregistrez les mêmes étapes que celles enregistrées dans la langue source du projet. Lorsque vous enregistrez les projets, n’incluez pas automatiquement les objets. Dans cet exemple, cela signifie enregistrer des projets Adobe Captivate (en utilisant les mêmes étapes que dans le projet anglais) de l’application une fois que l’interface utilisateur de l’application a été traduite en allemand et en japonais. 4 Importez tous les objets du projet en langue source. Dans cet exemple, vous devez importer tous les objets de la version anglaise du projet dans les projets allemand et japonais. 5 Importez les légendes localisées créées par les traducteurs à l’étape 2. Dans cet exemple, vous devez ouvrir les projets allemand et japonais et importer le fichier Word des légendes traduites. 6 Testez les versions localisées du projet. Dans cet exemple, ouvrez les projets allemand et japonais et assurez-vous que l’interface utilisateur appropriée s’affiche, que les légendes sont correctement traduites et s’affichent sur la bonne diapositive et que la durée est exacte. Il est possible que vous deviez modifier la durée ou redimensionner les légendes pour qu’Adobe Captivate affiche tout le texte traduit correctement. Localisation des légendes de texte Vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte et les sous-titres d’un projet pour localiser ce projet de manière plus efficace. Pour localiser des légendes de texte : 1 Créez la version initiale (« langue source ») du projet en incluant les légendes de texte nécessaires. 2 Ouvrez le projet terminé. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 4 Par défaut, le fichier Word (DOC) est enregistré dans votre dossier Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez modifier cet emplacement selon vos besoins. Si le fichier du projet a été enregistré, l’emplacement du fichier Word par défaut, intitulé [NomDuProjet] Captions.doc, est le même répertoire que celui dans lequel le projet a été enregistré. Pour modifier le nom du fichier, cliquez directement dans le champ Nom du fichier et saisissez un nouveau nom (conservez l’extension de fichier .doc). Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 5 Le fichier Word est généré avec le nom spécifié et enregistré à l’emplacement sélectionné. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche et vous demande si vous voulez afficher le document. Cliquez sur Oui pour afficher le document dans Word. 6 Le document Word contient l’ID de la diapositive, l’ID de l’élément, le texte de la légende d’origine et le numéro de la diapositive. Il y a également une colonne « Données de légendes mises à jour » dans laquelle vous pouvez modifier le texte des légendes. Communiquez une copie du document Word au traducteur. 7 Le traducteur doit ouvrir le document Word et modifier le texte des légendes directement dans la colonne « Données de légendes mises à jour » du document en remplaçant le texte source par le nouveau texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 72 8 Pendant que le traducteur traduit le texte, faites une copie du projet Adobe Captivate d’origine pour la nouvelle langue. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez une copie du projet d’origine, assurez-vous de conserver les légendes de texte et les soustitres d’origine (dans la langue source) dans le nouveau projet. Les légendes de texte et les sous-titres d’origine agissent comme des paramètres fictifs et sont écrasés lorsque vous importez les nouvelles légendes de texte et les nouveaux soustitres (traduits). 9 Une fois les légendes de texte traduites, ouvrez la copie du projet que vous avez créé. 10 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. Remarque : L’option Importer les légendes et les sous-titres de projet n’est activée qu’une fois les légendes et sous-titres exportés. Vous pouvez uniquement importer un fichier de légendes et sous-titres modifié que vous avez initialement exporté à partir du même projet. 11 L’option Importer les légendes et les sous-titres de projet n’est activée qu’une fois les légendes et sous-titres exportés. Vous pouvez uniquement importer un fichier de légendes et sous-titres modifié que vous avez initialement exporté à partir du même projet. 12 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier Word (DOC) contenant les légendes de texte traduites, sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. 13 Les nouvelles légendes de texte et sous-titres traduits sont importés dans le projet et le formatage est conservé. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche vous informant que l’importation a réussi. Cliquez sur OK. Pour tester les nouvelles légendes de texte, ouvrez les diapositives dans l’affichage Modifier et lisez le nouveau texte des légendes.73 Chapitre 4 : Ajout de légendes de texte Les légendes de texte sont des outils utiles qui permettent d’attirer l’attention sur des zones spécifiques d’une diapositive. Par exemple, vous pouvez les utiliser pour attirer l’attention sur des options de menu ou des icônes. Vous pouvez également utiliser des légendes de texte pour mettre en avant certains détails, qui risqueraient sinon d’être négligés. Si vous n’utilisez pas de commentaires dans un projet, vous pouvez utiliser des légendes de texte dans le même but (les légendes de texte s’adressent à l’utilisateur). Vous pouvez choisir les options d’affichage des légendes de texte (police, taille, couleur, etc.). Adobe Captivate propose une vaste gamme de styles de légendes de texte prédéfinis, mais vous pouvez également créer des styles personnalisés adaptés à votre société ou organisation. Vous pouvez facilement ajouter des légendes de texte manuellement à des diapositives. Cependant, Adobe Captivate permet de rapidement générer automatiquement des légendes de texte selon ce qui est enregistré. Si, par exemple, vous enregistrez la souris cliquant sur le menu Modifier, Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement créer une légende de texte « Sélectionner le menu Modifier » et placer la légende sur la diapositive correspondant à cette action. A propos de l’ajout de légendes de texte Vous pouvez utiliser des légendes de texte pour vous adresser aux utilisateurs ou pour attirer l’attention sur des éléments spécifiques d’une diapositive. Vous pouvez facilement ajouter des légendes de texte à des diapositives et les modifier de manière à ce qu’elles soient exactement comme vous le souhaitez. Pour ajouter une légende de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une légende de texte. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Légende de texte. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur la diapositive avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisir Insérer, puis Légende de texte. 4 Sur l’onglet Légende de texte, définissez les propriétés suivantes : Type de légende Sélectionnez un type de légende de texte. Chaque type de légende de texte a un nom et une petite vignette montre à quoi la légende ressemble. Remarque : Lorsque vous ajoutez ou modifiez une légende de texte, vous devez sélectionner le type de légende avant de définir le style et le format du texte d’une légende de texte. Cela garantit que les modifications du style et du format du texte sont conservées. Police Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner une police de caractères pour la légende de texte. Taille Saisissez un nombre ou cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une taille de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Couleur Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une couleur de police pour le texte de la légende. Surbrillance Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une couleur de police pour le texte en surbrillance. Style de légende Cliquez sur l’un des cinq types de légendes de texte. De nombreux styles de légendes de texte possèdent des appendices, ce qui vous permet de choisir une légende de texte orientée dans la direction appropriée.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 74 Options d’affichage Définissez, à votre convenance, des options d’affichage supplémentaires telles que gras, italique, souligné et justifié. Vous pouvez aligner le texte, le formater et insérer des symboles à l’aide des diverses options. Tapez le texte de la légende ici Entrez le texte de la légende tel que vous souhaitez qu’il s’affiche. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options et définissez les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée d’affichage de la légende de texte sur la diapositive. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Durée spécifique La légende de texte s’affiche pendant le nombre de secondes que vous saisissez. • Reste de la diapositive Si la légende de texte dure plus que quelques secondes, vous pouvez choisir qu’elle s’affiche pendant toute la durée d’affichage de la diapositive. • Reste du projet La légende de texte s’affiche pendant la durée du projet, même sur les autres diapositives. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la légende de texte s’affiche sur la diapositive. Effet Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner un effet de transition pour la légende de texte. Sélectionnez une option d’apparition en fondu ou de disparition en fondu ou sélectionnez Pas de transition. Définissez une valeur à l’aide des touches fléchées ou saisissez une valeur pour les effets de transition dans les champs d’apparition et de disparition en fondu. Effet Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner un effet de transition pour la légende de texte. Sélectionnez une option d’apparition en fondu ou de disparition en fondu ou sélectionnez Pas de transition. 6 Pour ajouter de l’audio à la légende de texte, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio, puis sur Enregistrer nouveau. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. 7 Pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes de la légende, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. L’utilisation de ces options au lieu de faire glisser la zone de texte vous aide à créer des zones de texte cohérentes dans l’ensemble de votre projet. 8 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de légende de texte, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de légende de texte à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Vous pouvez également choisir d’appliquer ces paramètres à toutes les légendes ou uniquement aux légendes de texte du même type que la légende actuelle. 9 Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles légendes de texte que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 11 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. 12 La légende de texte s’affiche sur la diapositive. 13 Dimensionnez et positionnez la légende de texte. Remarque : Si vous créez une légende transparente, évitez de souligner le texte car cela peut réduire la qualité du texte lors de l’affichage du projet. Si vous créez une légende de texte transparente, évitez d’utiliser du texte gras. Le texte normal est plus facile à lire sur la plupart des moniteurs.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 75 Ajout de texte à une diapositive Lorsque vous modifiez un projet, il peut arriver que vous vouliez ajouter du texte à une diapositive, sans pour autant afficher le texte comme une légende de texte sur la diapositive. Il existe un moyen facile d’ajouter du texte à une diapositive. Il vous suffit d’ajouter une légende de texte transparente. Pour créer une légende de texte transparente : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une légende de texte transparente. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Légende de texte. 4 La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle légende de texte s’affiche. 5 Dans Type de légende, sélectionnez [transparent]. 6 Modifiez les autres options de la légende de texte si nécessaire. Police Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner une police de caractères pour la légende de texte. Taille Saisissez un nombre ou cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une taille de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Couleur Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour sélectionner une couleur de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Surbrillance Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une couleur de police pour le texte en surbrillance. Options d’affichage Définissez, à votre convenance, des options d’affichage supplémentaires telles que gras, italique, souligné et justifié. Vous pouvez aligner le texte, le formater et insérer des symboles à l’aide des diverses options. Tapez le texte de la légende ici Entrez le texte de la légende tel que vous souhaitez qu’il s’affiche. 7 Pour ajouter de l’audio à la légende de texte, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio, puis sur Enregistrer nouveau. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. 8 Pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes de la légende, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. L’utilisation de ces options au lieu de faire glisser la zone de texte vous aide à créer des zones de texte cohérentes dans l’ensemble de votre projet. 9 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de légende de texte, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de légende de texte à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Vous pouvez également choisir d’appliquer ces paramètres à toutes les légendes ou uniquement aux légendes de texte du même type que la légende actuelle. Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles légendes de texte que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 11 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si vous créez une légende transparente, évitez de souligner le texte car cela peut réduire la qualité du texte lors de l’affichage du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 76 Une fois la légende de texte transparente ajoutée, vous avez la possibilité de fusionner la légende dans l’arrière-plan de la diapositive. Ajout automatique de légendes de texte Lorsque vous enregistrez des projets ou des diapositives supplémentaires pour les projets, Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement créer des légendes basées sur les actions enregistrées. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez l’action consistant à sélectionner le menu Fichier, Adobe Captivate ajoute automatiquement une légende « Sélectionner le menu Fichier » dans la même diapositive. Les actions qui génèrent des légendes de texte sont les suivantes : sélection de menus et d’options de menu, manipulation de boutons, modification de valeurs dans des listes, des zones de listes déroulantes, sélection de cases à cocher et ouverture de fenêtres enfants. Pour ajouter automatiquement des légendes de texte lors de l’enregistrement d’un nouveau projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. La fenêtre Simulation logicielle s’affiche à droite. 4 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez l’option Application, Taille personnalisée ou Plein écran et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Mode (s) d’enregistrement et choisissez Démonstration ou Personnaliser. Dans ces deux modes, les légendes de texte sont ajoutées automatiquement. 6 Cliquez sur Avancé. Dans Langue, sélectionnez la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les légendes de texte soient écrites. 7 Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 8 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Paramètres. 9 Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. 10 Cliquez sur OK. 11 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer l’enregistrement d’un nouveau projet et créer automatiquement des légendes de texte. 12 Une fois l’enregistrement terminé et le projet généré (avec les légendes de texte créées automatiquement), affichez les diapositives du projet pour voir les légendes de texte. Pour modifier le texte d’une légende, sélectionnez cette légende. Pour ajouter automatiquement des légendes de texte lors de l’enregistrement de diapositives supplémentaires : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Diapositives supplémentaires.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 77 3 Choisissez où vous voulez ajouter les nouvelles diapositives. Vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles diapositives à la fin du projet ou cliquer sur une diapositive de la liste et ajouter de nouvelles diapositives après la diapositive sélectionnée. 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Mode (s) d’enregistrement et choisissez Démonstration, Simulation d’évaluation, Simulation de formation ou Personnaliser. Dans tous ces modes, les légendes de texte sont ajoutées automatiquement. Pour configurer davantage les paramètres personnalisés, cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. 6 Cliquez sur Avancé. Dans Langue, sélectionnez la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les légendes de texte soient écrites. 7 Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 8 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. 9 Cliquez sur OK. 10 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer à enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires. 11 Une fois que vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Fin (sur votre clavier) pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Les nouvelles diapositives sont générées et s’affichent dans l’affichage Scénarimage. 12 Sélectionnez l’une des diapositives enregistrées pour l’afficher et lire les légendes de texte ajoutées automatiquement par Adobe Captivate. Pour modifier le texte d’une légende, double-cliquez sur cette légende. Remarque : Adobe Captivate peut générer automatiquement des légendes de texte pour tous les éléments standard de l’interface utilisateur Windows. Il se peut toutefois qu’Adobe Captivate ne prenne pas en charge d’autres éléments non standard d’interface utilisateur, notamment les textes de menus des applications créées avec Delphi. Ajout de légendes de survol Les légendes de survol sont uniques. Elles se composent d’une légende et d’un rectangle (la zone « sensible »). Les légendes de survol s’affichent lorsque l’utilisateur place la souris sur la zone sensible pendant l’exécution. Vous pouvez personnaliser toutes les caractéristiques d’une légende de survol : l’emplacement, le contour et la taille de la zone sensible, ainsi que les options classiques des légendes. Pour ajouter une légende de survol : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une légende de survol. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Légende de survol. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle légende de survol s’affiche. 4 Sur l’onglet Légende de survol, définissez les propriétés suivantes : Type de légende Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner un type de légende de texte. Chaque type de légende de texte a un nom et une petite vignette montre à quoi la légende ressemble. Police Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner une police de caractères pour la légende de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 78 Taille Saisissez un nombre ou cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une taille de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Couleur Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour sélectionner une couleur de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Surbrillance Cliquez sur le menu déroulant afin de sélectionner une couleur de police pour le texte en surbrillance. Style de légende Cliquez sur l’un des cinq types de légendes. Quatre des styles de légendes ont des appendices, ce qui vous permet de choisir une légende qui pointe dans la direction appropriée. Options d’affichage Définissez, à votre convenance, des options d’affichage supplémentaires telles que gras, italique, souligné et justifié. Vous pouvez aligner le texte, le formater et insérer des symboles à l’aide des diverses options. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options et définissez l’option suivante : Effet Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et choisissez un effet de transition pour la légende de survol. Sélectionnez Apparition et disparition en fondu, Apparition en fondu uniquement, Disparition en fondu uniquement ou Pas de transition. Si vous sélectionnez un effet d’apparition ou de disparition en fondu, spécifiez la durée exacte (en secondes) de l’effet. 6 Pour ajouter de l’audio à la légende de texte, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio, puis sur Enregistrer nouveau. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. 7 Pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes de la légende, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. L’utilisation de ces options au lieu de faire glisser la légende de survol vous aide à créer des légendes de sur vol cohérentes dans l’ensemble de votre projet. 8 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de légende de survol, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de légende de survol à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Vous pouvez également choisir d’appliquer ces paramètres à toutes les légendes ou uniquement aux légendes de survol du même type que la légende actuelle. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles légendes de survol que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 9 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 10 Cliquez sur OK. La légende de survol et la zone de survol sont ajoutées à la diapositive. La zone de survol correspond à la zone que doit survoler le pointeur de la souris pour faire apparaître la légende. Modification de la zone de survol Les légendes de survol et les images de survol se composent d’une légende ou d’une image et d’une zone de survol (la zone « sensible »). La zone de survol correspond à la zone que doit survoler le pointeur de la souris pour faire apparaître la légende ou l’image. Pour modifier la zone de survol : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 79 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, sélectionnez la diapositive contenant la légende ou l’image de survol. • Pour modifier la taille de la zone de survol, cliquez sur une des poignées et faites-la glisser. • Pour déplacer la zone de survol vers un autre emplacement, placez la souris sur la zone de survol jusqu’à ce que le curseur en forme de main s’affiche. Faites ensuite glisser la zone vers l’emplacement souhaité. • Pour modifier les attributs de la zone de survol, double-cliquez sur la zone de survol et utilisez la boîte de dialogue Légende de survol pour effectuer des modifications. Conversion des infobulles en légendes de survol Lorsque vous enregistrez un nouveau projet ou des diapositives supplémentaires dans un projet existant, vous pouvez définir une option d’enregistrement pour qu’Adobe Captivate convertisse les infobulles en légendes de survol. Lorsque cette option est sélectionnée, Adobe Captivate crée une légende de survol pour chaque infobulle sélectionnée lors du processus d’enregistrement. La conversion d’infobulles en légendes de survol est une manière facile de créer automatiquement une légende descriptive pour l’action se déroulant dans un projet. Pour convertir automatiquement des infobulles en légendes de survol lors de l’enregistrement d’un nouveau projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez l’option Application, Taille personnalisée ou Plein écran et cliquez sur OK. 4 Cliquez sur Avancé. Dans Légendes en, sélectionnez la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les légendes de survol soient écrites. 5 Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 6 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et procédez comme suit : • Sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. • Sélectionnez Paramètres par défaut et personnalisez les styles des légendes par défaut. • Sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Dans la zone Légendes, sélectionnez Convertir des infobulles en légendes de survol. 7 Cliquez sur OK. 8 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer l’enregistrement d’un nouveau projet et la conversion automatique des infobulles en légendes de survol. Pour convertir automatiquement des infobulles en légendes de survol lors de l’ajout de diapositives supplémentaires : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Diapositives supplémentaires. La fenêtre Enregistrer des diapositives supplémentaires s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 80 3 Sélectionnez l’option pour ajouter des diapositives supplémentaires à la fin du projet ou à un emplacement spécifique dans le projet. 4 Cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 5 Cliquez sur Avancé. Dans Légendes en, sélectionnez la langue dans laquelle vous voulez que les légendes de survol soient écrites. 6 Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 7 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et procédez comme suit : • Sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans Type d’enregistrement, sélectionnez Enregistrement automatique. • Sélectionnez Paramètres par défaut et personnalisez les styles des légendes par défaut. • Sélectionnez Mode(s) et choisissez un mode dans le menu Mode. Dans la zone Légendes, sélectionnez Convertir des infobulles en légendes de survol. 8 Cliquez sur OK. 9 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer l’enregistrement de diapositives supplémentaires et la conversion automatique des infobulles en légendes de survol. Ajout d’une langue pour les légendes de texte Vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles langues à la liste de langues existantes dans lesquelles les légendes de texte sont enregistrées. La liste de langues existantes se trouve dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement. Les légendes de texte d’évènements sont stockées sous la forme de fichiers CaptureTextTemplates_.rdl dans le répertoire \Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3. Par exemple, le fichier RDL pour le chinois simplifié s’appelle CaptureTextTemplates_Chinese-Simplified.rdl. Vous pouvez utiliser les fichiers RDL pour enregistrer les légendes de texte dans la langue de votre choix. Pour enregistrer des légendes de texte dans une autre langue : 1 Ouvrez l’explorateur Windows et allez jusqu’au répertoire \\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3. 2 Copiez un fichier avec l’extension RDL. 3 Collez le fichier au même endroit et renommez-le en fonction de la nouvelle langue. Par exemple, si vous voulez enregistrer en polonais, renommez le fichier CaptureTextTemplates_Polish.rdl. 4 Ouvrez le fichier RDL dans un éditeur de texte. 5 Dans les étiquettes Object Name et Event Name, changez le texte pour les attributs DefaultTemplate et Template de façon à utiliser la langue spécifiée. Pour ce faire, consultez « Pour saisir du texte dans une autre langue : ». 6 Enregistrez le fichier. 7 Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Enregistrement, en sélectionnant Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrement s’affiche. 8 Définissez les préférences d’enregistrement. 9 Cliquez sur Avancé.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 81 10 Choisissez la langue ajoutée dans le menu déroulant Légendes en. 11 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Les légendes de texte sont générées dans la langue spécifiée. Pour saisir du texte dans une autre langue : 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration Microsoft Windows et double-cliquez sur l’icône Options régionales et linguistiques. La boîte de dialogue des options régionales et linguistiques s’affiche. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Langues. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Détails. La boîte de dialogue des services de texte et langues d’entrée s’affiche. 4 Dans l’onglet Paramètres, cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter. La boîte de dialogue d’ajout de langues d’entrée s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez une langue dans la liste des langues d’entrée. 6 Cliquez sur OK. La langue sélectionnée est incluse à la liste des services installés. 7 Sélectionnez la langue de votre choix dans la liste des langues d’entrée par défaut. 8 Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la boîte de dialogue des services de texte et langues d’entrée. 9 Cliquez sur l’onglet des options régionales et choisissez la langue que vous avez sélectionnée dans la liste des langues d’entrée par défaut. 10 Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK pour enregistrer les paramètres et fermer la boîte de dialogue des options régionales et linguistiques. La barre de langue de l’éditeur de méthode d’entrée s’affiche sur le bureau de votre ordinateur. 11 Tapez du contenu dans le fichier RDL. Le texte s’affiche dans la langue sélectionnée. Si vous changez la langue dans la liste des langues d’entrée par défaut et l’onglet des options régionales, la langue sélectionnée dans la barre de langue est automatiquement mise à jour. Localisation des légendes de texte Vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte d’un projet pour localiser ce projet de manière plus efficace. Pour localiser des légendes de texte : 1 Créez la version initiale (« langue source ») du projet en incluant les légendes de texte nécessaires. 2 Ouvrez le projet terminé. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 4 Par défaut, le fichier Word (DOC) est enregistré dans votre dossier Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. Modifiez l’emplacement selon vos besoins. Le fichier Word est nommé [NomDuProjet] Captions.doc. Pour modifier le nom du fichier, cliquez directement dans le champ Nom du fichier et saisissez un nouveau nom (conservez l’extension de fichier .doc). Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 5 Le fichier Word est généré avec le nom spécifié et enregistré à l’emplacement sélectionné. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche et vous demande si vous voulez afficher le document. Cliquez sur Oui pour afficher le document dans Word.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 82 6 Le document Word contient l’ID de la diapositive, l’ID de l’élément, le texte de la légende d’origine et le numéro de la diapositive. Il y a également une colonne « Données de légendes mises à jour » dans laquelle vous pouvez modifier le texte des légendes. Communiquez une copie du document Word au traducteur. 7 Le traducteur doit ouvrir le document Word et modifier le texte des légendes directement dans la colonne « Données de légendes mises à jour » du document en remplaçant le texte source par le nouveau texte. 8 Pendant que le traducteur traduit le texte, faites une copie du projet Adobe Captivate d’origine pour la nouvelle langue. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez une copie du projet d’origine, assurez-vous de conserver les légendes de texte d’origine (dans la langue source) dans le nouveau projet. Les légendes de texte d’origine agissent comme des paramètres fictifs et sont écrasées lorsque vous importez les nouvelles légendes de texte (traduites). 9 Une fois les légendes de texte traduites, ouvrez la copie du projet que vous avez créé à l’étape 8. 10 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 11 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier Word (DOC) contenant les légendes de texte traduites, sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. 12 Les nouvelles légendes de texte traduites sont importées dans le projet et le formatage est conservé. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche vous informant que l’importation a réussi. Cliquez sur OK. 13 Pour tester les nouvelles légendes de texte, ouvrez les diapositives dans l’affichage Modifier et lisez le nouveau texte des légendes. Modification de légendes de texte Une fois les légendes de texte créées, il est facile d’en modifier le style ou le texte. Remarque : Si vous redimensionnez une légende de texte, vous ne pouvez pas la rendre plus petite que l’image bitmap utilisée pour créer la légende de texte. Par exemple, le style de légende de texte « Pill » utilise des bitmaps d’environ 18 pixels de large par 16 pixels de haut. Ces bitmaps ne peuvent donc pas être redimensionnés à une taille de 15 x 12 pixels. Cependant, les bitmaps des légendes de texte peuvent être agrandis. Si vous avez besoin de légendes très petites, pensez à créer des légendes personnalisées. Pour modifier une légende de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive qui contient la légende de texte que vous voulez modifier. 3 Double-cliquez sur la légende de texte à modifier. 4 La boîte de dialogue Légende de texte s’affiche. 5 Cliquez sur les différents onglets pour effectuer vos modifications. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Si une de vos diapositives contient des légendes de texte et d’autres objets, il peut être souhaitable de faire en sorte que la légende de texte fasse partie de l’arrière-plan. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 83 Création de styles de légendes personnalisés Vous pouvez créer des styles de légendes personnalisés pour vos projets Adobe Captivate à l’aide d’un programme graphique tel que Adobe® Fireworks® ou Adobe® Photoshop®. Les légendes de texte personnalisées doivent être au format BMP (bitmap). En général, cinq images bitmap sont associées à chaque légende de texte Adobe Captivate. Nom des styles de légendes personnalisés Lorsque vous créez des styles de légendes personnalisés, il est important de respecter les conventions d’appellation exactes. Chaque style de légende possède un nom unique qui doit être repris au début du nom des fichiers bitmap associés. Par exemple, si vous créez un nouveau style de légende nommé « bleuvif », les noms des cinq images bitmap qui constituent le nouveau style doivent être les suivants : • Bleuvif1.bmp une image sans appendice • Bleuvif2.bmp une image avec appendice à droite ou en haut à droite • Bleuvif3.bmp une image avec appendice à gauche ou en haut à gauche • Bleuvif4.bmp une image avec appendice dans la partie inférieure droite • Bleuvif5.bmp une image avec appendice dans la partie inférieure gauche Stockage des styles de légendes de texte personnalisés Vous devez stocker toutes les images bitmap d’un style de légende de texte personnalisé dans le dossier Captions d’Adobe Captivate (situé sous C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Captions). Une fois que vous avez ajouté les cinq nouvelles images bitmap au dossier, Adobe Captivate reconnaît les fichiers bitmap comme un nouveau style de légende de texte. La prochaine fois que vous ajouterez une nouvelle légende de texte, votre nouveau style personnalisé s’affichera dans la liste des légendes de texte pour que vous puissiez facilement sélectionner et utiliser le nouveau style. Création de texte personnalisé pour les styles de légendes Vous pouvez créer un style personnalisé pour le texte qui s’affiche dans les légendes de texte. Ces préférences ne sont appliquées que si vous n’avez pas défini de style pour la légende de texte précédemment. Pour créer du texte personnalisé pour les styles de légendes : 1 Ouvrez le fichier fonts.ini, qui se trouve dans le dossier \\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Captions, dans un éditeur de texte. 2 Personnalisez le style pour la légende de texte en utilisant la procédure décrite dans le fichier. 3 Enregistrez le fichier. 4 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 5 Sélectionnez Insérer > Légende de texte. 6 Dans Type de légende, sélectionnez la légende que vous avez personnalisée. Le texte dans la zone de texte change pour refléter le style spécifié. 7 Modifiez le texte dans la zone de texte. 8 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 84 Alignement du texte sur les légendes de texte personnalisées Le texte des légendes personnalisées semble parfois ne pas être aligné. Pour résoudre le problème, vous devez définir des marges à gauche, à droite, en haut et en bas. Chacun des cinq styles de légendes de texte requiert ses propres paramètres de marge car le texte qui y figure s’affiche à un emplacement qui varie légèrement d’une légende à l’autre. Les valeurs de marges sont stockées dans un fichier texte avec l’extension .fcm. Vous pouvez utiliser le Bloc-notes ou WordPad pour créer ou modifier les fichiers FCM. Pour modifier l’alignement du texte sur une légende de texte personnalisée : 1 Avec l’Explorateur Windows, allez à C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Captions. Tous les fichiers BMP des légendes de texte et les fichiers FCM correspondant se trouvent dans ce dossier. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur le fichier FCM à modifier et sélectionnez Ouvrir avec. 3 Sélectionnez le Bloc-notes ou WordPad. 4 Modifiez les valeurs suivantes selon vos besoins : • La marge gauche correspond au nombre de pixels à partir du côté gauche de l’image bitmap jusqu’au texte. • La marge droite correspond au nombre de pixels à partir du côté droit de l’image bitmap jusqu’au texte. • La marge du haut correspond au nombre de pixels à partir du haut de l’image bitmap jusqu’au texte. • La marge du bas correspond au nombre de pixels à partir du bas de l’image bitmap jusqu’au texte. 5 (Facultatif) Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier les paramètres de Marge X et Marge Y. Cela peut s’avérer important si vous ajoutez des légendes automatiquement. • Marge X correspond au nombre de pixels horizontalement depuis le coin le plus proche jusqu’au bout de l’appendice de la légende. • Marge Y correspond au nombre de pixels verticalement depuis le coin le plus proche jusqu’au bout de l’appendice de la légende. Remarque : Le coin le plus proche est identifié dans le fichier ouvert dans le Bloc-Notes ou WordPad sous « Corner » (Coin). Par exemple, Corner=right, top (Coin=droite, haut). 6 Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Enregistrer. Une boîte de dialogue peut s’afficher demandant si vous voulez remplacer le fichier d’origine. Cliquez sur Oui. 7 Fermez le programme (Bloc-notes ou WordPad). Conseils pour créer des légendes de texte personnalisées • Couleurs Les couleurs de la légende de texte doivent être différentes de la couleur transparente. La couleur transparente est définie par le pixel supérieur gauche. Par exemple, si la couleur du pixel supérieur gauche est jaune, tout ce qui est de la même couleur jaune sera transparent dans la légende. Par ailleurs, la légende de texte peut avoir un arrière-plan de couleurs dégradées, mais la zone autour (« derrière ») la légende de texte doit être de couleur unie. • Anti-alias Ne lissez pas les bords de vos légendes de texte. Vos légendes s’affichent dans différentes captures d’écran, lesquelles peuvent parfois présenter un effet de halo irrégulier dû au lissage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 85 Déplacement et redimensionnement de légendes de texte Vous pouvez redimensionner des légendes de texte manuellement ou automatiquement et les déplacer vers un nouvel emplacement dans une diapositive. Remarque : Si vous redimensionnez une légende de texte, vous ne pouvez pas la rendre plus petite que l’image bitmap utilisée pour créer la légende. Par exemple, le style de légende de texte « Pill » utilise des bitmaps d’environ 18 pixels de large par 16 pixels de haut. Ces bitmaps ne peuvent donc pas être redimensionnés à une taille de 15 x 12 pixels. Cependant, les bitmaps de légendes peuvent être agrandis. Si vous avez besoin de légendes très petites, pensez à créer des légendes personnalisées. Pour redimensionner une légende de texte manuellement : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive contenant une légende de texte. 3 Cliquez sur la légende de texte que vous voulez redimensionner. 4 Placez le pointeur de la souris sur l’une des poignées de sélection sur le bord de la légende pour qu’il prenne l’apparence d’une poignée de redimensionnement. 5 A l’aide du bouton gauche de la souris, faites glisser cette poignée pour redimensionner la légende de texte. Pour redimensionner une légende de texte automatiquement : Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement redimensionner une légende de texte selon la quantité de texte contenue dans la légende de texte. Si vous modifiez le texte, la légende change de taille pour s’ajuster à la nouvelle quantité de texte. C’est une façon facile de conserver une apparence équilibrée et proportionnelle. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des légendes de texte. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Taille automatique des légendes. Si une coche s’affiche en regard de l’option, Taille automatique des légendes est activé ; s’il n’y a pas de coche, Taille automatique des légendes est désactivé. Pour déplacer une légende de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive contenant une légende de texte. 3 Placez la souris sur la légende que vous voulez déplacer. 4 Lorsque le curseur en forme de main s’affiche, faites glisser la légende de texte vers un nouvel emplacement de la diapositive à l’aide du bouton gauche de la souris. Copie et collage des légendes de texte Vous pouvez copier et coller des légendes de texte d’une diapositive à l’autre. Cette opération peut vous faire gagner énormément de temps, surtout si la même légende de texte se trouve sur plusieurs diapositives. Pour copier et coller une légende de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 86 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive qui contient la légende de texte que vous voulez copier. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur la légende de texte et sélectionnez Copier. 4 Accédez à la diapositive dans laquelle vous souhaitez coller la légende. 5 Cliquez sur la diapositive à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Coller l’objet. Vous pouvez copier et coller plus d’une légende de texte en même temps. Pour sélectionner plusieurs légendes de texte, appuyez sur Ctrl et cliquez sur les légendes de texte. Cliquez du bouton droit sur l’une des légendes de texte sélectionnées, puis choisissez Copier. Importation de légendes de texte Vous pouvez importer des légendes de texte depuis un fichier DOC. Exportez les légendes de texte de votre projet Adobe Captivate. Adobe Captivate crée un fichier DOC qui conserve le formatage des légendes de texte. Vous pouvez modifier le texte et le formatage des légendes dans un programme de traitement de texte lorsqu’elles sont au format DOC. Ensuite, importez de nouveau les légendes dans le projet Adobe Captivate en suivant les étapes ci-dessous. Remarque : Si vous exportez des légendes de texte vers un fichier DOC, ce fichier DOC peut seulement être réimporté dans le projet d’origine. L’importation et l’exportation de légendes de texte depuis et vers un fichier DOC peuvent s’avérer utiles dans plusieurs situations. Par exemple, si vous avez plusieurs légendes et avez besoin de modifier le texte de toutes les légendes, il est souvent plus facile et plus rapide de travailler avec le texte en format DOC au lieu de naviguer d’une diapositive à l’autre. Pour importer des légendes de texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate contenant des légendes de texte. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 3 Effectuez les modifications nécessaires lorsque les légendes de texte sont au format DOC (dans la colonne Données des légendes de texte mises à jour) et enregistrez le fichier DOC. 4 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 5 Sélectionnez le fichier DOC comportant les légendes de texte exportées. 6 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. 7 Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche confirmant que l’importation a réussi. Cliquez sur OK. Exportation de légendes de texte Vous pouvez exporter des légendes de texte d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers un fichier DOC si Microsoft Word est installé sur votre ordinateur. Le formatage effectué dans Adobe Captivate est conservé lorsque les légendes de texte s’ouvrent en tant que fichier DOC. Vous pouvez modifier le texte et le formatage des légendes lorsqu’elles sont en format DOC, puis les importer de nouveau dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Si vous exportez des légendes de texte vers un fichier DOC, ce fichier DOC peut seulement être réimporté dans le projet d’origine. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 87 L’exportation de légendes de texte peut être utile dans plusieurs situations : • Si vous souhaitez enregistrer des commentaires et si vous devez créer un script, ce dernier peut s’appuyer sur les légendes de texte exportées. • Si vous voulez fournir des instructions étape par étape, vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte et imprimer le fichier DOC. • Si vous souhaitez localiser un projet, vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte dans un fichier DOC et le donner à un traducteur. Pour exporter des légendes de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, entrez le nom du fichier pour le nouveau fichier DOC. Notez le répertoire par défaut dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. Vous pouvez naviguer jusqu’à un autre emplacement pour enregistrer le fichier. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. 5 Les légendes de texte du projet sont converties au format DOC. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît, confirme l’exportation des légendes de texte vers Word et vous demande si vous souhaitez afficher le document. 6 Cliquez sur Oui. 7 Un nouveau fichier DOC contenant les légendes de texte s’ouvre dans Word. Effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans la colonne Données de légendes de texte mises à jour. Le numéro des diapositives est également inclus comme référence. 8 Enregistrez le document. 9 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. Modification de l’ordre des légendes de texte Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter plusieurs légendes à chaque diapositive. Vous spécifiez l’ordre dans lequel ces légendes s’affichent à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique. Le plan de montage chronologique vous permet d’ajuster la durée de tous les objets, y compris les légendes, sur une diapositive. Pour modifier l’ordre des légendes à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Naviguez jusqu’à la diapositive qui contient les légendes dont vous voulez modifier l’ordre. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. 4 Modifiez l’ordre et la durée des légendes selon vos besoins. • Par exemple, déplacez la souris vers le bord gauche ou droit d’une légende du plan de montage jusqu’à ce que le curseur de redimensionnement s’affiche, puis faites glisser le bord gauche ou droit. Cela permet de modifier le moment où la légende apparaît et disparaît, ainsi que la durée d’affichage de la légende. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 88 • Si une légende s’affiche en même temps que la diapositive, mais si vous voulez un léger retard, placez la souris sur le centre de la légende sur le plan de montage jusqu’à ce que le symbole en forme de main s’affiche. Ensuite, faites glisser la légende de manière à ce que le bord gauche s’aligne sur 2s (un retard de deux secondes) ou 4s (un retard de quatre secondes) dans l’en-tête. 5 Si deux légendes se superposent dans la diapositive, vous devez sélectionner la légende qui doit s’afficher devant en définissant l’ordre de superposition. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène » de la diapositive. Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les légendes à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres légendes. Utilisez une des méthodes suivantes pour définir l’ordre de superposition. a Dans l’affichage Modifier, cliquez du bouton droit sur une légende de la diapositive et sélectionnez une des options d’ordre. Vous pouvez cliquer du bouton droit sur d’autres légendes de la diapositive et modifier leur ordre. b Dans l’affichage Modifier, sélectionnez une légende et, dans la barre d’outils de l’affichage Modifier (à côté des propriétés de la diapositive), cliquez sur Envoyer les objets sélectionnés au premier plan, par ordre de superposition ou Envoyer les objets sélectionnés à l’arrière-plan, par ordre de superposition. c Dans l’affichage Modifier, sur le plan le montage, placez la souris sur une légende jusqu’à ce que la main s’affiche et faites glisser la légende vers le haut ou vers le bas pour modifier sa position dans l’ordre de superposition. Le déplacement d’une légende plus haut dans l’ordre de superposition la déplace vers l’avant de la scène, alors que le déplacement d’une légende plus bas la déplace vers l’arrière de la scène Suppression de légendes de texte La suppression d’une légende de texte consiste à la faire disparaître de la diapositive et du projet. Pour supprimer une légende de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, sélectionnez une diapositive contenant des légendes de texte. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur une légende de texte, puis sélectionnez Supprimer.89 Chapitre 5 : Ajout de fichiers audio et vidéo Vous pouvez ajouter une vaste gamme de sons à vos projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez également ajouter des fichiers vidéo Flash (FLV). A propos de l’ajout d’audio Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter des commentaires, de la musique, des instructions étape par étape et pratiquement tout type de son à vos projets. Vous pouvez utiliser l’audio pour donner des consignes, insister sur un point important ou comme effet d’arrière-plan. Tout comme les autres composants d’un projet, le son est généralement géré de manière distincte et souple. Vous pouvez utiliser l’audio dans les projets Adobe Captivate de plusieurs manières. Par exemple, vous pouvez : • Ajouter une piste audio d’arrière-plan qui est lue pendant toute la durée du projet. • Ajouter du son à une diapositive spécifique. • Ajouter du son à un objet spécifique comme une légende, une zone de clic, une zone de surbrillance ou un bouton. • Utiliser les trois options ci-dessus dans un même projet. Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer vos propres fichiers audio (à l’aide d’un équipement simple) ou d’importer des fichiers existants. Vous pouvez enregistrer des fichiers audio en même temps que le projet, ou ajouter un fichier audio ultérieurement. Les fichiers importés peuvent être au format WAV ou MP3. Lorsque vous ajoutez un fichier WAV à un projet, Adobe Captivate convertit automatiquement ce fichier au format MP3 lors de la publication du projet. Une fois que l’audio a été ajouté à un projet, vous pouvez ajuster la durée des objets pour qu’elle corresponde exactement au fichier audio. Adobe Captivate contient également des fonctionnalités qui permettent d’ajouter des périodes de silence aux fichiers audio et de normaliser l’audio de toutes les diapositives de manière à ce que le niveau de son soit constant. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. Ajout d’audio existant Vous pouvez rapidement ajouter de l’audio à un projet si vous avez déjà des fichiers audio au format WAV ou MP3. Il suffit d’importer les fichiers et de les utiliser comme musique d’introduction, commentaires, instructions ou pour tout ce dont vous avez besoin. Remarque : Lorsque vous importez des fichiers WAV dans des projets Adobe Captivate, Adobe Captivate les convertit automatiquement en fichiers MP3 lors de la publication du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 90 Pour ajouter de l’audio à une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 A partir de n’importe quel affichage, sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter du son. 3 Sélectionnez Audio > Importer. La boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio s’affiche. Remarque : Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. 4 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier audio (WAV ou MP3) que vous souhaitez ajouter à la diapositive, sélectionnez le fichier audio, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Si la durée de lecture du fichier audio est supérieure à la durée de lecture de la diapositive, le plan de montage chronologique de la diapositive augmente afin d’avoir une durée identique au fichier audio importé. Matériel d’enregistrement audio La qualité des éléments audio enregistrés est fonction de la qualité du matériel d’enregistrement utilisé. Cependant, on trouve aujourd’hui des équipements audio de base à des prix très abordables. Ordinateur muni d’une carte son La carte son installée sur votre ordinateur sert d’enregistreur de son numérique. Microphone Si possible, évitez d’utiliser le microphone (souvent de médiocre qualité) fourni avec votre ordinateur. Utilisez également un câble de microphone adapté et un socle pour poser le microphone lors de l’enregistrement. Préamplificateur de microphone Un préamplificateur augmente le signal du microphone. L’entrée du microphone de la carte son de votre ordinateur comprend probablement un préamplificateur (souvent de médiocre qualité). Lorsque vous achetez un préamplificateur, vous pouvez choisir un petit mixeur ou une version autonome. Les mixeurs permettent de connecter plusieurs microphones et appareils et de régler leurs volumes indépendamment. Les préamplificateurs autonomes sont meilleurs que les mixeurs pour filtrer les bruits non désirés. Haut-parleurs La qualité des haut-parleurs fournis avec votre ordinateur est suffisante pour des opérations d’enregistrement, bien qu’il soit possible que vous souhaitiez modifier certains paramètres de vos haut-parleurs. Cependant, si vous travaillez avec un ordinateur portable, vous devez utiliser les haut-parleurs d’un ordinateur de bureau à la place des haut-parleurs intégrés. Remarque : Dans les systèmes d’exploitation de Microsoft Windows, vous pouvez généralement trouver les paramètres des haut-parleurs (son), en cliquant sur Démarrer dans le coin inférieur gauche de l’écran, puis en sélectionnant Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Sons. Casque Le casque est important car lorsque le microphone est allumé, les haut-parleurs peuvent générer des bruits intempestifs. De plus, il est préférable d’utiliser un casque qui recouvre les oreilles et qui vous permet de mieux capter tous les sons enregistrés avec le microphone. Lecteurs média Tout logiciel capable de lire les fichiers audio sur votre système. Logiciel d’enregistrement Il existe de nombreux logiciels d’enregistrement. Un bon logiciel se doit de proposer des fonctionnalités d’édition (en vue de corriger les éventuelles erreurs), des options d’effets sonores et musicaux, ainsi que la capacité de créer le format de fichier dont vous avez besoin (par exemple, MP3 ou WAV). Audacity est un excellent logiciel gratuit et simple à utiliser. Il est disponible sur audacity.sourceforge.net.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 91 Local d’enregistrement Après avoir acheté le matériel audio nécessaire, le plus important avant de procéder à l’enregistrement est de trouver un endroit calme pour enregistrer. Fermez les portes, éteignez les équipements informatiques inutilisés, éteignez les appareils d’éclairage générateurs de bruits ou réduisez leur intensité, éteignez les téléphones et les radiomessageurs. Prévenez vos collègues qu’un enregistrement est en cours. Conseils pour l’enregistrement audio Suivez les conseils ci-dessous pour enregistrer la meilleure qualité audio possible. Configuration Une fois en possession du matériel d’enregistrement audio nécessaire, vérifiez qu’il est correctement configuré. Tout d’abord, branchez le microphone au mixeur ou au préamplificateur, puis branchez l’un ou l’autre de ces appareils à l’entrée de la carte son de votre ordinateur. Branchez le casque à votre ordinateur. Réglez ensuite le volume du mixeur ou du préamplificateur. Commencez à parler afin de tester les niveaux et ajustez légèrement le volume jusqu’à atteindre le niveau zéro. Paramètres de la carte son Ouvrez l’application logicielle contrôlant la carte son. Pour définir les paramètres audio dans les systèmes d’exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer dans le coin inférieur gauche de l’écran, puis sélectionnez Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Sons. Sélectionnez la source d’enregistrement (Entrée ligne) et réglez le volume sur 100 %. Le niveau d’enregistrement audio est réglé à l’aide du mixeur ou du préamplificateur. Paramètres du logiciel d’enregistrement audio Lancez votre logiciel d’enregistrement audio. Modifiez les paramètres selon vos besoins. Les mixeurs et les préamplificateurs ne disposant pas de commandes de niveaux sonores, basez-vous sur les vumètres lors de l’enregistrement. Au cours de l’enregistrement, vérifiez sur les vumètres que le volume ne dépasse pas zéro, auquel cas le son risque d’être saturé. Emplacement du microphone La qualité du fichier audio final dépend énormément de la position du microphone. Tout d’abord, restez proche du microphone (entre 10 à 15 cm) en vue de réduire les risques d’enregistrement des sons environnants. Ne parlez pas au-dessus du microphone. Au contraire, positionnez-le audessus de votre nez, incliné vers votre bouche. Enfin, positionnez le microphone légèrement sur le côté de votre bouche pour adoucir le son des lettres S et P. Astuce Ayez un verre d’eau à votre portée pour ne pas avoir la bouche sèche. Avant l’enregistrement, éloignez-vous du microphone, respirez profondément, expirez, respirez à nouveau, ouvrez votre bouche, approchez-vous du microphone puis commencez à parler. Cette astuce permet d’éliminer les sons de respiration et de lèvres souvent captés au début des enregistrements audio. Parlez doucement et articulez. Vous aurez peut-être l’impression que vous parlez trop lentement, de manière non naturelle, mais vous pourrez sans doute ajuster la vitesse à l’aide du logiciel d’enregistrement audio. Enfin, le premier enregistrement ne doit pas être nécessairement parfait. Vous pouvez écouter et évaluer chaque enregistrement et faire une nouvelle prise si nécessaire. Modification du son La modification de sons est identique à la modification de textes. Ecoutez attentivement l’enregistrement. Supprimez les sons externes et lissez l’enregistrement à l’aide des options de votre logiciel. Ajoutez éventuellement de la musique ou des effets sonores. Sélectionnez le format d’enregistrement audio voulu (fichiers MP3 ou WAV). Ajout de fichiers audio à Adobe Captivate Lorsque vous avez terminé d’enregistrer le fichier audio, ajoutez-le au projet Adobe Captivate. Commentaires supplémentaires Une fois l’audio ajouté au projet Adobe Captivate, réécoutez-le. Lisez le projet comme le ferait n’importe quel utilisateur. Demandez enfin à d’autres personnes de visualiser le fichier audio/SWF Adobe Captivate ainsi agrémenté de son. Si nécessaire, modifiez une nouvelle fois le fichier audio. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 92 Définition des options d’enregistrement audio La difficulté rencontrée avec les fichiers audio est de trouver un bon équilibre entre la qualité et la taille. Plus la qualité du son est élevée, plus la taille du fichier est grande. Plus le son est comprimé, plus la vitesse d’échantillonnage est faible. Par ailleurs, plus le fichier est petit, plus la qualité du son est faible. Adobe Captivate vous permet de contrôler la façon dont le son est enregistré et compressé en fonction de vos paramètres d’entrée et de sortie. La création d’audio dans Adobe Captivate s’effectue en deux grandes étapes. Vous enregistrez l’audio au format WAV qu’Adobe Captivate convertit alors en fichier MP3. Lorsque les fichiers sont au format WAV, ils sont plus facilement manipulables. Vous pouvez les modifier et revoir leur qualité « à la baisse », en les compressant sous forme de fichiers MP3 uniquement destinés à être lus. Lorsque vous travaillez avec de l’audio, il est important de ne pas oublier qui sont les utilisateurs. Si un utilisateur est susceptible de visualiser le projet Adobe Captivate par le biais d’un modem à composition automatique, optez pour une combinaison compression élevée/fréquence d’échantillonnage faible, par exemple 56 Kbits/s. En revanche, si votre projet est disponible sur CD-ROM, optez pour une combinaison compression faible/grande fréquence d’échantillonnage, par exemple 144 Kbits/s. La solution optimale consiste à trouver le compromis idéal entre la qualité audio et la taille du fichier pour vos utilisateurs. Avec Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier audio pour une seule diapositive, un groupe de diapositives ou pour tout le projet. Remarque : Pour les diapositives avec des fichiers audio, le plan de montage chronologique de la diapositive est allongé pour correspondre à celui du fichier audio. Cependant, les fichiers audio d’un projet sont coupés s’ils sont plus longs que le plan de montage chronologique du projet. Pour définir les options d’enregistrement audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Enregistrer, puis sélectionnez une des options suivantes : Cette diapositive Enregistrez le fichier audio pour la diapositive sélectionnée uniquement. Projet Enregistrez le fichier audio pour tout le projet. A partir de cette diapositive Enregistrez le fichier audio pour un groupe de diapositives à partir de celle qui est sélectionnée. Pour finir de définir la plage des diapositives incluses dans le groupe, saisissez un numéro de diapositive dans le champ A de la boîte de dialogue d’enregistrement à partir de la diapositive qui s’affiche. Remarque : Pour les trois options, la fenêtre d’enregistrement affiche un panneau d’aperçu dans lequel vous pouvez voir le projet pendant l’enregistrement de l’audio. Sans aperçu Ne prévisualisez pas le projet pendant l’enregistrement du fichier audio. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio s’affiche. 4 Configurez les options suivantes : Source d’entrée Spécifie le type d’appareil avec lequel vous enregistrez l’audio. Sélectionnez Entrée ligne pour tout appareil autre qu’un microphone (comme un CD) ou Audio système pour utiliser un fichier lu sur votre système.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 93 Débit binaire de codage Ici, vous pouvez sélectionner le débit binaire pour le codage audio. Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes selon la qualité de codage audio dont vous avez besoin : • Débit binaire CD (128 Kbits/s) Spécifie la quantité d’informations audio (en Kbits/s) stockées par seconde d’enregistrement, qui est de la qualité d’un CD. • Proche du débit binaire CD (96 Kbits/s) Spécifie la quantité d’informations audio (en Kbits/s) stockées par seconde d’enregistrement, qui est proche de la qualité d’un CD. Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • Débit binaire pour la radio FM (64 Kbits/s) Spécifie la quantité d’informations audio (en Kbits/s) stockées par seconde d’enregistrement, qui est de la qualité de la radio FM. • Débit binaire personnalisé Spécifie la quantité d’informations audio qui seront stockées par seconde d’enregistrement, qualité définie par l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez faire glisser la barre pour définir le débit binaire de votre choix. Fréquence de codage Sélectionnez la fréquence à laquelle doit être effectué le codage audio. Vitesse de codage Vous pouvez faire glisser la barre pour définir la vitesse de codage audio de votre choix. L’augmentation de la vitesse de codage réduit la qualité des fichiers codés. Calibrer l’entrée Cliquez ici pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Calibrer le microphone. Le programme vous demande de lire une phrase dans votre appareil d’enregistrement. Adobe Captivate utilise cet échantillon d’enregistrement pour détecter les niveaux de sensibilité d’enregistrement optimaux. Il est important de calibrer votre appareil d’enregistrement pour une qualité de son optimale. 5 (Facultatif) Si vous avez créé des légendes de texte ou des annotations de diapositive pouvant être utilisées comme scripts, ajoutez-les aux onglets Légendes et Annotations de diapositive. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Le panneau d’aperçu n’est pas affiché si vous avez sélectionné l’option Enregistrer > Sans aperçu. Utilisation d’audio provenant de fichiers de bibliothèque existants Vous pouvez réutiliser des fichiers audio de projets existants dans les diapositives d’un projet. Lorsque vous insérez un nouvel objet (comme une image ou une vidéo) dans votre projet, le bouton Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque de l’onglet Audio de la boîte de dialogue du nouvel élément est activé et vous pouvez rechercher un fichier audio existant dans la bibliothèque. Pour changer la sélection de fichiers audio à partir de la bibliothèque : 1 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui s’affiche lorsque vous insérez un nouvel objet, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio ou Audio d’arrière-plan ou sélectionnez Audio > Modifier > Diapositive. Remarque : L’option Modifier la durée est activée si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de projet contient un fichier audio. Elle est désactivée pour les groupes de questions et les diapositives de questions aléatoires. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque. La boîte de dialogue Sélectionnez l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier dans la liste des fichiers de la bibliothèque, puis cliquez sur OK. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour enregistrer les modifications apportées dans cette boîte de dialogue.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 94 Calibration de microphones pour l’enregistrement Si vous enregistrez de l’audio pour un projet, vous devez régler le microphone ou autre appareil d’enregistrement sur le niveau d’enregistrement correct. Ce processus s’appelle le calibrage de l’appareil d’enregistrement. Adobe Captivate peut détecter automatiquement les niveaux de sensibilité d’enregistrement et de microphone optimaux. Remarque : Adobe Captivate doit pouvoir détecter un appareil d’enregistrement avant d’essayer d’effectuer le calibrage. Avant d’effectuer le calibrage, vérifiez qu’un microphone ou un appareil d’enregistrement utilisant la « ligne d’entrée » est correctement connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est allumé. Pour calibrer un microphone ou un appareil d’enregistrement : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer un nouveau fichier audio. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Paramètres. La boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Calibrer l’entrée. La boîte de dialogue Calibrer le microphone s’affiche. 4 Pour régler le niveau correct pour l’appareil d’enregistrement, lisez la phrase suivante dans le micro jusqu’à ce que la fenêtre d’enregistrement rouge devienne verte : « Je règle le niveau d’enregistrement de mon micro pour l’utiliser avec Adobe Captivate. » 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Enregistrement audio Si vous disposez d’un microphone raccordé à votre ordinateur, vous pouvez enregistrer l’audio à intégrer dans une diapositive. Vous pouvez utiliser l’audio pour de nombreux types de commentaires ou d’instructions. Par exemple, si votre projet contient des légendes de texte, vous pouvez enregistrer la voix d’une personne lisant le texte des légendes. Pour enregistrer l’audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Enregistrer dans le menu principal, puis l’une des options suivantes : • Cette diapositive Enregistrez le fichier audio pour la diapositive sélectionnée uniquement. • Projet Enregistrez le fichier audio pour tout le projet. • A partir de cette diapositive Enregistrez le fichier audio pour un groupe de diapositives à partir de celle qui est sélectionnée. Pour finir de définir la plage des diapositives incluses dans le groupe, saisissez un numéro de diapositive dans le champ A de la boîte de dialogue d’enregistrement à partir de la diapositive qui s’affiche. • Sans aperçu Ne prévisualisez pas le projet pendant l’enregistrement du fichier audio. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio s’affiche. 3 Si vous voulez définir des options audio, cliquez sur Paramètres et effectuez les modifications nécessaires. En fonction du type d’enregistrement (commentaires, musique, etc.) et de la lecture voulue (dans un fichier EXE, sur Internet, etc.), vous pouvez avoir besoin de modifier les paramètres audio.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 95 4 (Facultatif) Si vous avez créé des légendes de texte ou des annotations de diapositive pouvant être utilisées comme script, ajoutez-les aux champs dans les onglets Légendes et Annotations de diapositive. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer pour commencer l’enregistrement. 6 Parlez dans le microphone ou dans l’appareil d’enregistrement. Ou, si vous utilisez un appareil d’entrée de ligne (comme un CD) ou un fichier système, exécutez le fichier que vous voulez enregistrer. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Arrêter. L’audio est converti en format MP3. 8 Cliquez sur Lire pour écouter l’enregistrement. 9 (Facultatif) Si vous voulez ajouter du silence ou régler le volume du fichier audio, cliquez sur Modifier l’audio et modifiez les paramètres à l’aide des options. 10 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Enregistrement de l’audio lors de la création d’un projet Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer une piste audio en même temps que vous enregistrez un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate. C’est une manière efficace de créer rapidement un projet multifonctionnel. La méthode suivante explique comment enregistrer de l’audio tout en créant un projet Adobe Captivate à propos d’une application. Le processus est similaire qu’il s’agisse de la création d’un projet Adobe Captivate de taille personnalisée ou plein écran. Pour enregistrer de l’audio et un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate simultanément : 1 Ouvrez l’application que vous voulez enregistrer (ouvrez-la avant de commencer l’enregistrement). 2 Préparez votre matériel d’enregistrement. 3 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 4 Sur la page de démarrage, cliquez sur Enregistrer ou créer un nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Options du nouveau projet s’affiche. 5 Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Simulation logicielle. 6 Dans le volet droit, sélectionnez Application et cliquez sur OK. La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 7 Sélectionnez l’application à enregistrer dans le menu déroulant Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer. 8 Sélectionnez Enregistrer un commentaire. Choisissez Microphone, Entrée ligne ou Audio système selon que vous enregistrez à partir d’un micro, d’un appareil d’entrée de ligne comme un CD, un DVD, etc. ou d’un fichier lu sur votre système. 9 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir de nombreuses options d’enregistrement, y compris la possibilité d’effectuer des captures d’écran automatiquement et de générer des légendes de texte automatiquement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 96 10 (Facultatif) Au besoin, modifiez la taille et la position de la fenêtre. Vous pouvez redimensionner la fenêtre en sélectionnant l’une des poignées de redimensionnement sur le cadre rouge et en la faisant glisser. Pour modifier l’emplacement de la fenêtre, déplacez la souris sur le cadre rouge pour afficher une flèche à quatre pointes, puis faites glisser la fenêtre entière vers un nouvel emplacement. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Accrocher pour modifier rapidement la taille de la zone d’enregistrement afin qu’elle corresponde à la taille de l’application. 11 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur Enregistrer. Si c’est la première fois que vous enregistrez de l’audio, une boîte de dialogue s’affiche et vous demande si vous voulez tester les niveaux audio. Cliquez sur Oui afin de calibrer l’appareil d’enregistrement pour un enregistrement optimal. Suivez les instructions et une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. 12 Adobe Captivate démarre l’enregistrement de l’action à l’écran. • Au fur et à mesure que vous enregistrez le projet, parlez dans votre microphone ou appareil d’enregistrement pour créer une bande son. Par exemple, vous pouvez expliquer les actions effectuées ou lire le texte d’une légende. • Si vous enregistrez le projet automatiquement (cela signifie si vous avez sélectionné l’option Activer l’enregistrement automatique), Adobe Captivate effectue automatiquement une capture d’écran chaque fois que vous effectuez une action comme sélectionner un menu, cliquer sur un bouton ou taper du texte. • Si vous enregistrez manuellement (c’est-à-dire que vous n’avez pas sélectionné Activer l’enregistrement automatique), appuyez sur la touche Impr écran (ou sur une autre touche de capture définie) pour effectuer des captures d’écran. • Utilisez l’application comme si vous la présentiez à quelqu’un. Si votre ordinateur est équipé de haut-parleurs et si l’option est sélectionnée, vous entendrez le son de l’obturateur d’un appareil photo à chaque capture d’écran. Lorsque vous enregistrez une action à l’écran, il est préférable d’exécuter l’action plus lentement que vous ne le feriez normalement. Si vous enregistrez une action au clavier, par exemple, tapez le texte le plus lentement possible. 13 Lorsque vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, appuyez sur la touche Fin (ou sur une autre touche définie) pour terminer l’enregistrement. Les diapositives sont générées et votre nouveau projet s’affiche dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Les fichiers audio enregistrés sont affectés à la diapositive appropriée et enregistrés sous forme de fichiers MP3. Vous pouvez visionner les fichiers dans la bibliothèque. Remarque : Pour suspendre l’enregistrement du projet, appuyez sur la touche Pause. Pour reprendre l’enregistrement, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche Pause. Création d’audio d’arrière-plan Vous pouvez créer de l’audio d’arrière-plan pour vos projets. L’audio est lu lorsque les diapositives de votre projet s’affichent. L’audio d’arrière-plan peut être de la musique, des effets sonores ou presque tout type de son que vous pouvez importer ou enregistrer. Vous pouvez utiliser de l’audio d’arrière-plan en même temps que l’audio d’une diapositive spécifique pour créer un effet professionnel. Adobe Captivate offre la possibilité de diminuer le volume de l’audio d’arrière-plan lors de la lecture d’une diapositive contenant de l’audio. Par exemple, vous pouvez importer un fichier de musique et le configurer pour qu’il soit lu continuellement en boucle comme audio d’arrière-plan. Dans ce même projet, vous pouvez enregistrer des commentaires pour des diapositives spécifiques et faire en sorte que le volume de la musique diminue lors de la lecture de ces commentaires.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 97 Pour créer de l’audio d’arrière-plan : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Projet et sélectionnez Audio d’arrière-plan. 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Pour importer un fichier audio, cliquez sur Importer, naviguez jusqu’au fichier, sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Si vous voulez utiliser un fichier audio qui est déjà dans votre projet, cliquez sur Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque. • Cliquez sur Enregistrer nouveau et suivez les instructions pour enregistrer l’audio d’arrière-plan. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Lire pour écouter le fichier audio. 6 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Apparition en fondu et Disparition en fondu vous permet de spécifier la durée en secondes de l’effet de fondu de l’audio au début et à la fin du projet. Baisser le volume de l’audio d’arrière-plan sur les diapositives contenant d’autre audio vous permet de réduire automatiquement le volume audio d’arrière-plan sur les diapositives auxquelles sont affectés des fichiers audio uniques, comme un commentaire. Lire l’audio en boucle vous permet de lire le fichier audio d’arrière-plan en continu. Arrêter l’audio à la fin du projet vous permet d’arrêter l’audio d’arrière-plan à la fin du projet. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK pour ajouter l’audio d’arrière-plan à votre projet. Utilisation d’un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité qui enregistre un son de frappe sur clavier chaque fois que vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier lors de l’enregistrement d’un projet. Vous pouvez inclure ou exclure les sons de frappe. Vous pouvez également créer un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé. Pour utiliser un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé : 1 Créez un nouveau son pour les touches ou utilisez un fichier MP3 existant (c’est-à-dire un des fichiers son Windows). 2 Nommez le nouveau fichier son KeyClick.mp3. 3 Enregistrez le fichier et notez le répertoire dans lequel il est enregistré. 4 Avec l’Explorateur Windows, allez au dossier des effets sonores d’Adobe Captivate. (L’emplacement par défaut est C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\SoundEffects.) 5 Trouvez le fichier KeyClick.mp3. Il s’agit du fichier de son de frappe par défaut d’Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Avant d’écraser le fichier, copiez et déplacez le fichier KeyClick.mp3 d’origine dans un dossier de sauvegarde de manière à pouvoir l’utiliser de nouveau en cas de besoin. 6 Copiez le nouveau son de frappe depuis l’emplacement de l’étape 3 ci-dessus et collez-le dans le dossier des effets sonores d’Adobe Captivate. 7 Vérifiez que l’option de son de frappe est sélectionnée.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 98 Ajout de silence à un fichier audio Vous pouvez ajouter une période de silence à tout fichier audio faisant partie d’un projet Adobe Captivate. Cette fonctionnalité s’avère très utile si vous avez importé un fichier audio et avez besoin de synchroniser l’audio avec les objets et les diapositives. L’ajout de périodes de silence permet d’utiliser le fichier audio existant dans un projet Adobe Captivate sans avoir à trop modifier l’audio. Pour ajouter une période de silence à un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des fichiers audio. 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive contenant un fichier audio. Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, les diapositives contenant un fichier audio affichent l’icône de son sous la diapositive. 3 Sélectionnez Audio > Modifier la durée > Diapositive ou Projet selon vos préférences. Remarque : L’option Modifier la durée est activée si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de projet contient un fichier audio. Elle est désactivée en mode de groupes de questions et pour les diapositives de questions aléatoires. 4 La boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio s’affiche. 5 Vous pouvez ajouter du silence au début, à la fin ou à un point spécifique d’un fichier audio. Si vous voulez ajouter du silence dans le fichier, cliquez sur l’emplacement exact directement sur la forme d’onde. Remarque : Les cases d’informations Tête de lecture et Sélectionné situées en bas de la boîte de dialogue peuvent vous aider à définir un emplacement précis dans le fichier audio. Par exemple, si vous voulez ajouter un silence de quatre secondes dans le fichier audio, cliquez sur la forme d’onde jusqu’à ce que la case d’informations Tête de lecture affiche un nombre proche de quatre secondes (par exemple, 00:04:00 s). 6 Cliquez sur Insérer du silence. La boîte de dialogue Insérer du silence s’affiche. 7 La période de silence ajoutée au fichier audio est mesurée en secondes. Dans le champ Insérer, tapez un chiffre pour spécifier la durée de la période de silence. 8 Dans la zone de texte à droite, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez l’emplacement dans le fichier audio où vous voulez ajouter le silence. Les choix sont Position de la tête de lecture, Début de l’audio ou Fin de l’audio. Remarque : Quand vous sélectionnez une partie d’un fichier audio puis cliquez sur Insérer du silence, le menu affiche l’option Sélection courante à la place de l’option Position de la tête de lecture. 9 Cliquez sur OK. La période de silence est ajoutée au fichier audio et vous pouvez la voir dans la forme d’onde. Le fichier audio auquel vous avez ajouté du silence est enregistré sous un nouveau nom de fichier. 10 Pour tester le fichier audio avec la période de silence ajoutée, cliquez sur Lire dans le coin inférieur gauche. Si vous avez besoin d’ajouter fréquemment du silence au même endroit et pour la même durée, appuyez sur ALT+S pour l’insérer sans passer par la boîte de dialogue Insérer du silence. Ajustement du volume audio Vous pouvez ajuster le volume des fichiers audio inclus à vos projets Adobe Captivate. Pour ajuster le volume des fichiers audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des fichiers audio. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 99 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive contenant un fichier audio. Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, les diapositives contenant un fichier audio affichent l’icône de son sous la diapositive. 3 Sélectionnez Audio > Modifier la durée > Diapositive ou Projet selon vos préférences. Remarque : L’option Modifier la durée est activée si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de projet contient un fichier audio. Elle est désactivée en mode de groupes de questions et pour les diapositives de questions aléatoires. La boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Ajuster le volume. La boîte de dialogue Ajuster le volume s’affiche. 5 Pour modifier le volume, cliquez sur la barre de défilement du volume sur la gauche et faites-la glisser vers le haut pour augmenter le volume ou vers le bas pour diminuer le volume. 6 Si vous le désirez, vous pouvez modifier les options de traitement audio : Normaliser Sélectionnez cette option pour qu’Adobe Captivate ajuste automatiquement le volume. La normalisation aide à maintenir un niveau audio constant entre les diapositives. Dynamique Sélectionnez cette option pour amplifier les sections audio calmes pour aider à compenser les variations de volume audio. • Taux Spécifie l’amplification maximum à utiliser. Le paramètre par défaut (2.0) permet d’amplifier les sections audio les plus calmes par un facteur de 2. Un paramètre plus élevé peut améliorer les projets contenant des différences importantes entre les sections calmes et celles comportant des effets audio, mais risque également d’amplifier le bruit de fond. • Seuil du bruit Contrôle l’amplification du bruit de fond. Tout ce qui est plus calme que le seuil du bruit n’est pas amplifié. Si un bruit de fond est trop amplifié, la définition d’un seuil plus élevé peut résoudre le problème. Attention, l’option Dynamique ne fonctionne pas très bien avec les niveaux de bruit élevés. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Ajout d’audio existant aux objets Vous pouvez importer un fichier audio à utiliser avec des boutons, des zones de surbrillance, des zones de clic ou des zones de texte. Vous pouvez également utiliser la bibliothèque pour ajouter un fichier audio qui se trouve déjà dans votre projet courant. Pour importer un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter de l’audio. Doublecliquez ensuite sur le bouton ou la zone. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 4 Cliquez sur Importer. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. 5 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier audio que vous voulez ajouter, sélectionnez le fichier, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 100 6 (Facultatif) Pour écouter et tester le fichier audio, cliquez sur Lire. 7 Paramétrez les options selon vos besoins. • Pour modifier le fichier audio (par exemple, changer le volume, ajouter du silence, modifier la durée, etc.), cliquez sur Modifier. • Si vous voulez que l’audio apparaisse ou disparaisse en fondu, définissez le nombre de secondes à l’aide des flèches dans Apparition en fondu et Disparition en fondu. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Pour sélectionner un fichier audio dans la bibliothèque : Remarque : Pour sélectionner un fichier audio dans la bibliothèque, le projet Adobe Captivate doit contenir au moins un fichier audio. Si le projet ne contient aucun fichier audio, cette option n’est pas disponible. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter de l’audio. Double-cliquez ensuite sur le bouton ou la zone. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 4 Cliquez sur Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque. 5 Sélectionnez un fichier dans la liste qui s’affiche. 6 (Facultatif) Pour écouter le fichier audio, cliquez sur Lecture. 7 Pour ajouter le fichier audio sélectionné au bouton ou à la zone, cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un nouveau fichier audio à utiliser avec des zones et des boutons. Vous pouvez associer un fichier audio à un bouton ou une zone de clic et faire en sorte qu’il soit lu lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton ou la zone de clic (plutôt que quand le bouton ou la zone de clic s’affiche). Créez le bouton ou la zone de clic et sélectionnez l’option de légende de succès. Rendez la légende de succès transparente et n’ajoutez pas de texte. Ajoutez un fichier audio à la légende de succès. Enregistrement d’audio pour les objets Vous pouvez enregistrer un fichier audio à utiliser avec des boutons, des zones de surbrillance, des zones de clic ou des zones de texte. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Remarque : Vous pouvez également ajouter de l’audio existant aux zones et aux boutons. Pour enregistrer un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter de l’audio. Puis effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : a Double-cliquez sur le bouton ou la zone. b Affichez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter un bouton. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de surbrillance, Zone de clic, Zone de texte ou Bouton. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 101 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer nouveau. 6 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio, cliquez sur Enregistrer. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé l’enregistrement, cliquez sur Arrêter. 8 Pour écouter et tester le fichier audio, cliquez sur Lire. 9 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. 10 Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Définition des sons de frappe sur clavier Vous pouvez inclure ou non des sons de frappe sur clavier à vos projets. Les sons de frappe sont inclus dans les projets Adobe Captivate lorsque vous enregistrez et appuyez sur les touches du clavier pendant l’enregistrement. Si vous n’aimez pas les sons de frappe dans votre projet, supprimez-les grâce à la procédure ci-dessous. Le son de frappe est configuré au niveau du projet. Cela signifie que le son est soit lu sur toutes les diapositives soit supprimé de toutes les diapositives. Pour définir des sons de frappe sur clavier : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la section Effets visuels et audio, si l’option Lire le son de frappe enregistré lorsque le projet est généré est sélectionnée, les sons de frappe sur clavier sont lus dans le projet. Si l’option n’est pas sélectionnée, aucun son de frappe sur clavier n’est lu dans le projet. Modification des fichiers audio Vous pouvez modifier les fichiers audio dans votre projet Adobe Captivate à tout moment. La boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio vous permet d’écouter un fichier audio, d’insérer du silence, d’ajuster le volume et de modifier de nombreuses autres options. Pour modifier un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 A partir de l’affichage Scénarimage ou de la Bande de film dans l’affichage Modifier, trouvez une diapositive contenant un fichier audio. 3 Sélectionnez Audio > Modifier la durée > Diapositive ou Projet selon vos préférences. Remarque : L’option Modifier la durée est activée si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de projet contient un fichier audio. Elle est désactivée en mode de groupes de questions et pour les diapositives de questions aléatoires. La boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio s’affiche. 4 Effectuez les modifications nécessaires. Vous pouvez copier et coller des sections du fichier audio, insérer des périodes de silence pour prolonger le fichier audio, ajuster le volume, importer un fichier audio différent et bien davantage. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 102 Couper Cliquez ici pour couper la partie sélectionnée du fichier audio. Copier Cliquez ici pour copier la partie sélectionnée du fichier audio. Coller Cliquez ici pour coller les informations depuis le Presse-papiers. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez une section du fichier audio, puis cliquez sur le bouton Couper ou Copier, l’audio sélectionné est placé dans le Pressepapiers. Vous pouvez alors utiliser la fonctionnalité Coller pour placer l’audio situé dans le Presse-papiers dans un autre emplacement du fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer la partie sélectionnée du fichier audio. Annuler Cliquez ici pour annuler la dernière action. Rétablir Cliquez ici pour rétablir la dernière action. Insérer du silence Cliquez ici pour ajouter une période de silence au début d’un fichier audio, à la fin d’un fichier audio ou à un emplacement spécifique du fichier audio. Ajuster le volume Cliquez ici pour augmenter ou diminuer le niveau de son du fichier audio. Il existe également une option pour améliorer les parties plus calmes du fichier audio. Zoom avant Cliquez ici pour agrandir la forme d’onde. Zoom arrière Cliquez ici pour réduire la forme d’onde. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour configurer plusieurs options comme l’appareil d’enregistrement, le niveau de qualité audio et la calibration de l’appareil d’enregistrement. Enregistrer/Insérer de l’audio Cliquez ici pour commencer l’enregistrement audio. Vous aurez besoin d’un microphone pour l’enregistrement. Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. 5 Cliquez sur Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque pour importer un fichier audio depuis la bibliothèque du projet. 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé de modifier le fichier audio, cliquez sur OK. Modification de la durée audio Adobe Captivate vous permet de modifier la durée des fichiers audio après les avoir enregistrés ou importés. Le contrôle de la durée des fichiers audio vous permet d’utiliser des fichiers audio de durée différente et de les incorporer dans des projets pour une lecture fluide. Une fois le fichier audio enregistré ou importé, il s’affiche comme une forme d’onde dans la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Si votre projet contient plusieurs fichiers audio, vous pouvez voir quels fichiers audio sont affectés aux diapositives spécifiques. Pour modifier la durée audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant un ou plusieurs fichiers audio. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Modifier la durée > Diapositive ou Projet selon vos préférences. Remarque : L’option Modifier la durée est activée si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de projet contient un fichier audio. Elle est désactivée en mode de groupes de questions et pour les diapositives de questions aléatoires.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 103 La boîte de dialogue Modifier la durée de l’audio s’affiche. Les fichiers audio dans le projet Adobe Captivate s’affichent comme des formes d’ondes. Les numéros des diapositives s’affichent dans la partie supérieure de la forme d’onde pour que vous puissiez voir exactement comment les fichiers audio sont actuellement distribués sur les diapositives. • Pour changer la façon dont les fichiers audio sont distribués sur les diapositives, cliquez sur le diviseur de diapositives et faites-le glisser vers la gauche ou la droite. La forme d’onde reste statique, mais vous pouvez modifier le début de la lecture du fichier audio dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Cette option est particulièrement utile si vous avez un long fichier audio et avez besoin d’affecter le fichier à une seule diapositive ou de le lire sur plusieurs diapositives. • Pour écouter l’audio, cliquez sur un emplacement de la forme d’onde, puis cliquez sur Lire. L’audio est lu à partir de l’emplacement sélectionné jusqu’à la fin de tout l’audio du projet. Vous pouvez arrêter la lecture à tout moment en cliquant sur Arrêter. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant sur une zone spécifique de la forme d’onde, cliquez sur la forme d’onde, puis cliquez sur zoom avant ou zoom arrière. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur la forme d’onde et effectuer un zoom avant et arrière à l’aide de la molette de la souris. L’échelle de la forme d’onde s’affiche dans la boîte d’informations Echelle près du coin inférieur droit de la boîte de dialogue. • Pour couper et coller l’audio, sélectionnez une section du fichier audio directement sur la forme d’onde, cliquez sur Couper ou Copier, cliquez sur un emplacement différent sur la forme d’onde, puis cliquez sur Coller. • Pour supprimer l’audio, sélectionnez une section du fichier audio directement sur la forme d’onde et cliquez sur Supprimer. • Vous pouvez insérer une période de silence dans un fichier audio. Si vous voulez que la période de silence commence à un emplacement spécifique d’un fichier audio, cliquez sur l’emplacement directement sur la forme d’onde. Cliquez sur Insérer du silence. Tapez la durée de la période de silence que vous voulez ajouter, puis cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner un emplacement pour la période de silence : l’emplacement sur lequel vous avez cliqué sur la forme d’onde, le début de l’audio ou la fin de l’audio. • Pour ajuster le niveau de son des fichiers audio, cliquez sur Ajuster le volume. Augmentez ou diminuez le volume à l’aide de la barre de défilement et sélectionnez des options de traitement audio. • Pour configurer l’appareil d’enregistrement et les options de qualité audio, cliquez sur Paramètres. • Pour ajouter un nouveau fichier audio, cliquez sur un emplacement de la forme d’onde, cliquez sur Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque, naviguez jusqu’à un fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le fichier audio est importé directement dans le projet Adobe Captivate à l’emplacement spécifié. Affichage des détails audio Vous pouvez afficher tous les détails audio à un seul emplacement pratique dans Adobe Captivate. Cela vous permet de facilement consulter la durée de lecture, la taille et autres caractéristiques des fichiers audio d’un projet. Pour afficher les détails audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Audio avancé. La boîte de dialogue Gestion audio avancée s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 104 3 Affichez tous les détails audio dans la fenêtre Informations audio : Diapositive/objet Le nom de la diapositive. Son La présence (Oui ou Non) d’un fichier son. Durée La durée du fichier son, en secondes. Apparition en fondu La présence (Oui ou Non) d’un fondu en entrée. Disparition en fondu La présence (Oui ou Non) d’un fondu en sortie. Taille La taille du fichier son. Nom de fichier d’origine Le nom d’origine du fichier son. Fréquence d’échantillonnage audio (kHz) Cette fréquence représente le nombre de fois par seconde que la forme d’onde d’origine est traduite en forme numérique. Une fréquence d’échantillonnage plus élevée donne une représentation numérique plus précise du son. La fréquence d’échantillonnage d’un son de qualité CD est de 44 100 échantillons par seconde. Débit binaire (Kbits/s) Ce débit représente le nombre de bits qu’un fichier numérique utilise dans une période de temps spécifique. Il est généralement exprimé en kilobits par seconde. Plus un fichier audio est encodé à un débit binaire élevé, meilleure est la qualité audio. 128 Kbps est un débit couramment utilisé. CC Indique si une transcription du dialogue ou des effets sonores a été incluse au fichier audio. 4 Si nécessaire, cliquez sur une diapositive et sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Lecture Lit l’audio présent dans la diapositive sélectionnée. Arrêter Arrête la lecture de l’audio. Supprimer Supprime l’audio présent dans la diapositive sélectionnée. Exporter Affiche une boîte de dialogue Rechercher le dossier et permet d’exporter le fichier audio sélectionné vers un dossier. Mettre à jour Extrait une version mise à jour du fichier audio. Sous-titre Vous permet de saisir une transcription du dialogue ou des effets sonores inclus dans le fichier audio. Le sous-titrage améliore l’accessibilité de votre projet pour les utilisateurs malentendants. Afficher l’audio au niveau de l’objet Affiche les fichiers audio associés à des objets (zones de clic, légendes, boutons, zones de surbrillance, etc.) dans le projet. Inclure les fichiers MP3 lors de l’exportation Inclut les fichiers MP3 lors de l’exportation de l’audio. Inclure les fichiers WAVE lors de l’exportation Inclut les fichiers WAV lors de l’exportation de l’audio. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Ajout de sous-titres Vous pouvez améliorer l’accessibilité de votre projet en y ajoutant des sous-titres. Le sous-titrage vous permet de créer des transcriptions pour les fichiers audio associés aux diapositives de votre projet. Lors de la lecture d’un fichier audio pour une diapositive, les transcriptions s’affichent, ce qui aide les utilisateurs malentendants. L’option permettant d’activer le sous-titrage est disponible dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage. Pour plus d’informations, consultez « Diapositives », page 161.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 105 Pour ajouter des sous-titres à un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Audio avancé. La boîte de dialogue Gestion audio avancée s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur une diapositive contenant un fichier audio auquel vous voulez ajouter des sous-titres. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Sous-titre . La boîte de dialogue Sous-titrage s’ouvre, avec le fichier audio affiché sous forme d’onde. 5 Si vous voulez voir un aperçu du fichier audio, cliquez sur le bouton Lire. 6 Cliquez sur l’endroit spécifique de la forme d’onde où vous voulez ajouter un sous-titre et cliquez sur +. Une nouvelle rangée de sous-titre s’affiche avec l’heure de début que vous avez sélectionnée sur la forme d’onde. 7 Entrez le sous-titre que vous voulez joindre au fichier audio. 8 Pour ajouter une autre rangée au sous-titre pour le fichier audio, cliquez sur Ajouter. Pour supprimer un sous-titre pour le fichier audio, cliquez sur -. Remarque : Pour plus de précision, vous pouvez faire glisser les marqueurs d’heures de début et de fin de votre sous-titre si vous voulez ajuster manuellement la durée de chaque sous-titre. 9 Une fois que vous avez ajouté toutes les rangées que vous désirez, cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez également ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Sous-titrage de l’une des façons suivantes : • Dans l’affichage Modifier ou Scénarimage, sélectionnez la vignette d’une diapositive, cliquez sur l’icône Audio et sélectionnez Sous-titrage. • Dans le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur le calque Audio avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez l’option Sous-titrage. • Dans le menu Diapositive, sélectionnez Propriétés et dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio puis sur le bouton Sous-titrage. Dans la boîte de dialogue Sous-titrage, vous pouvez ajouter des sous-titres pendant la lecture de l’audio en cliquant sur + ou en appuyant sur Alt+A. Remarque : Si vous saisissez plusieurs sous-titres, ils doivent être adjacents. Si vous ne voulez pas entrer de sous-titre pour une durée intermédiaire, ajoutez un sous-titre vide pour cette durée. Pré-lecture audio Une fois un fichier audio ajouté, vous pouvez en effectuer la pré-lecture pour vérification. Il existe deux méthodes de pré-lecture pour tester l’audio. Vous pouvez effectuer la pré-lecture de tout le projet Adobe Captivate et écouter l’audio associé à un objet, une diapositive ou l’arrière-plan. Cela vous permet de voir exactement où l’audio commence et finit dans le projet et de vous rendre compte de la façon dont vos utilisateurs entendront l’audio. Si vous voulez seulement effectuer la pré-lecture de l’audio sans l’entendre en contexte dans le projet, vous pouvez ouvrir les propriétés audio d’un objet, d’une diapositive ou de l’arrière-plan et lire le fichier audio.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 106 Pour tester l’audio d’un objet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant un objet avec audio associé. 3 Double-cliquez sur l’objet avec l’audio associé. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 5 Cliquez sur Lire pour écouter le fichier audio. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Pour tester l’audio d’une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant de l’audio. 3 Sélectionnez Audio > Enregistrer, puis sélectionnez une des options suivantes : Cette diapositive, Projet, A partir de cette diapositive ou Sans aperçu. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio s’affiche. 4 Pour écouter le fichier audio, cliquez sur le bouton Lire. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Pour tester l’audio d’arrière-plan : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Projet et sélectionnez Audio d’arrière-plan. 4 Cliquez sur Lire pour écouter le fichier audio. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Exportation de fichiers audio Vous pouvez exporter tout fichier audio de vos projets Adobe Captivate. Pour exporter un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Audio > Audio avancé. La boîte de dialogue Gestion audio avancée s’affiche. 3 Faites défiler vers le bas et cliquez sur la diapositive contenant le fichier audio que vous voulez exporter. 4 Si vous voulez exporter les fichiers MP3, sélectionnez Inclure les fichiers MP3 lors de l’exportation. 5 Si vous voulez exporter les fichiers WAV, sélectionnez Inclure les fichiers WAVE lors de l’exportation. Remarque : Vous devez sélectionner au moins un de deux formats de fichiers d’exportation. 6 Cliquez sur Exporter. La boîte de dialogue Rechercher le dossier s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 107 7 Sélectionnez le dossier de destination, puis cliquez sur OK. Suppression de l’audio Il est facile de supprimer un fichier audio d’une diapositive. Vous pouvez aussi supprimer les fichiers son utilisés pour l’audio d’arrière-plan. Pour supprimer l’audio d’une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, sélectionnez une diapositive et cliquez sur l’icône Audio dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, naviguez jusqu’à la diapositive concernée dans la Bande de film, puis cliquez sur l’icône Audio dans le coin inférieur droit de la diapositive. 3 Sélectionnez Supprimer dans le menu. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur Oui pour confirmer la suppression. Pour supprimer l’audio d’arrière-plan : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Projet et sélectionnez Audio d’arrière-plan. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer. Un message de confirmation s’affiche. 5 Cliquez sur Oui pour confirmer la suppression. 6 Cliquez sur OK. A propos de l’ajout de vidéo Les fichiers vidéo Flash (FLV) ajoutent réalisme et profondeur à votre projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez insérer des fichiers FLV afin qu’ils puissent être lus dans n’importe quelle diapositive de votre projet. Vous pouvez inclure trois types de fichiers FLV à votre projet : Téléchargement vidéo progressif Cette option vous permet de charger des fichiers FLV externes dans votre projet Adobe Captivate et de les lire à l’exécution. Du fait que le contenu vidéo reste externe au reste du contenu Adobe Captivate et aux commandes de lecture vidéo, il est relativement facile de mettre le contenu vidéo à jour sans avoir à recompiler le projet Adobe Captivate. Pendant la livraison, la lecture de la vidéo commence dès que le premier segment a été téléchargé et mis en cache sur le disque dur de l’ordinateur local.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 108 Diffusion vidéo La diffusion vidéo, que ce soit à partir de votre propre serveur exécutant Macromedia Flash® Media Server d’Adobe ou à partir d’un service de diffusion vidéo Flash hôte, représente la solution de livraison la plus complète, la plus cohérente et la plus fiable pour les fichiers audio et vidéo. Avec la diffusion, chaque client Flash ouvre une connexion persistante au serveur Flash Communication Server et il y a une relation contrôlée entre la vidéo en cours de livraison et l’interaction du client. La diffusion vidéo est la seule option de livraison qui permet d’inclure une émission vidéo en direct à votre projet Adobe Captivate. Service de diffusion vidéo Flash Cette option est la méthode la plus efficace pour livrer des fichiers FLV à un public le plus large possible sans avoir à configurer et maintenir vos propres réseau et matériel de serveur de diffusion. Les fichiers FLV ne sont pas lus lorsqu’un projet Adobe Captivate est hébergé sur un serveur Web Windows 2003. Remarque : Si votre projet Adobe Captivate contient des fichiers FLV, vérifiez que les fichiers contiennent des métadonnées afin que le lecteur vidéo fonctionne correctement. Les fichiers FLV créés avec Flash Communication Server 1.5.2, FLV Exporter version 1.2 et Sorenson Squeeze 4.0 contiennent automatiquement des métadonnées. Sorenson Squeeze 4.0 est inclus dans le Kit Flash Video. Si vous importez un fichier FLV qui ne contient aucune métadonnée, la vidéo Flash ne sera pas lue correctement dans votre projet. Ajout d’un fichier vidéo Vous pouvez facilement ajouter des vidéos Flash existantes à votre projet. Remarque : Seuls les fichiers vidéos Flash avec métadonnées peuvent être lus dans les projets Adobe Captivate. Si le fichier inséré ne contient pas de métadonnées, utilisez un logiciel tiers comme FLVMDI pour ajouter des métadonnées au fichier. Pour ajouter un fichier vidéo Flash : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Vidéo Flash. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle vidéo Flash s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le type de vidéo à ajouter dans le menu déroulant Type de vidéo. • Si vous sélectionnez Téléchargement vidéo progressif, allez au chemin relatif ou absolu du fichier FLV dans le champ Lien de fichier. • Si vous sélectionnez Diffusion vidéo, entrez le nom du serveur, le nom de l’application et le nom de l’instance dans le champ Serveur URI. (Par exemple, rtmp://monserveur/monapplication/moninstance.) Entrez le nom de la diffusion dans le champ Nom de la diffusion. • Si vous sélectionnez Service de diffusion vidéo Flash, entrez le lien de fichier direct fourni par votre service de diffusion vidéo Flash dans le champ URL. 4 Dans le menu Habillage, sélectionnez l’habillage que vous voulez utiliser dans votre vidéo. (L’habillage est la façon dont la barre de lecture de la vidéo s’affiche dans votre projet terminé. Pour afficher un aperçu des options à votre disposition, sélectionnez chaque habillage dans le menu.) Si vous ne voulez pas inclure de commandes de lecture pour la vidéo, sélectionnez Aucun. 5 Dans le champ Largeur, spécifiez la largeur de la fenêtre de la vidéo. 6 Dans le champ Hauteur, spécifiez la hauteur de la fenêtre de la vidéo.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 109 7 Pour préserver les proportions de la vidéo Flash d’origine, cochez Contraindre (cette option modifie les deux valeurs de taille simultanément). 8 Cliquez sur Détecter la taille si vous voulez vérifier la taille du fichier FLV. Adobe Captivate calcule la taille du fichier FLV et l’affiche dans la section Total avec habillage. 9 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Emission vidéo en direct Insère une émission vidéo en direct. Lecture automatique Lance la lecture de la vidéo automatiquement. Rembobinage automatique Rembobine automatiquement la vidéo une fois la lecture terminée. Remarque : L’option d’émission vidéo en direct est disponible uniquement quand vous sélectionnez Diffusion vidéo. 10 Si vous avez sélectionné Diffusion vidéo ou Service de diffusion vidéo Flash, vous devez saisir un nombre dans le champ Durée du tampon. (La durée du tampon est la quantité de vidéo qui doit être chargée avant que la lecture de la vidéo ne commence dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Le temps réel qu’il faut pour diffuser la vidéo varie selon la bande passante du réseau de l’utilisateur. La durée du tampon ne doit pas dépasser la durée totale du projet.) 11 Vous pouvez définir les options de durée, de transition, audio et de position (décrites ci-dessous) maintenant ou après avoir inséré la vidéo. 12 Pour appliquer les paramètres ou les modifications des paramètres à tous les fichiers FLV de votre projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 13 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Définition des options vidéo Vous pouvez définir les options de durée et de transition pour votre vidéo lorsque vous insérez le fichier vidéo ou ultérieurement. Pour définir les options vidéo : 1 Si vous avez déjà inséré la vidéo, sur la diapositive, cliquez sur le cadre de la vidéo avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Vidéo Flash, cliquez sur l’onglet Options. 3 Dans la section Afficher pendant, effectuez une sélection parmi les options suivantes : Durée spécifique Sélectionnez la durée spécifique et saisissez la durée pendant laquelle lire la vidéo Flash pour un intervalle spécifié. Reste de la diapositive Pour lire la vidéo Flash pendant la durée de la diapositive. Reste du projet Pour lire la vidéo Flash pendant la durée du projet. Durée du fichier Pour lire la vidéo Flash jusqu’à sa fin. 4 Dans le champ Apparaître après, spécifiez le délai avant que la vidéo n’apparaisse (en secondes). 5 Si vous voulez que la vidéo soit lue en boucle, cochez Lire en boucle. 6 L’option Mettre la diapositive en pause jusqu’à la fin de la vidéo est activée si vous sélectionnez Reste de la diapositive dans le menu Afficher pendant. Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez passer à la diapositive suivante après la fin de la lecture de la vidéo Flash.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 110 7 Si vous voulez que la vidéo se synchronise avec le projet Adobe Captivate, cochez Synchroniser avec le projet. 8 Dans la section Transition, sélectionnez l’effet de transition à utiliser pour la vidéo et la durée de cette transition. 9 Pour appliquer les paramètres ou les modifications des paramètres à tous les fichiers FLV de votre projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 10 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Définition des options audio pour la vidéo Vous pouvez ajouter du nouvel audio à votre vidéo ou modifier les paramètres de l’audio quand vous insérez le fichier vidéo. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter du contenu ou le modifier à tout autre moment. Pour définir les options audio pour votre vidéo : 1 Si vous avez déjà inséré la vidéo, sur la diapositive, cliquez sur le cadre de la vidéo avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Vidéo Flash s’affiche. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Vidéo Flash, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 3 Pour enregistrer du nouvel audio, cliquez sur le bouton Enregistrer nouveau et effectuez vos sélections. 4 Pour importer des fichiers son, cliquez sur le bouton Importer et sélectionnez le ou les fichiers à importer. 5 Pour modifier les paramètres audio comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration, cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. 6 Pour appliquer les paramètres ou les modifications des paramètres à tous les fichiers FLV de votre projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Définition des options de position pour la vidéo Vous pouvez définir les options de position de la fenêtre de la vidéo lorsque vous insérez le fichier vidéo ou changer sa position à tout autre moment. Pour définir les options de position pour votre vidéo : 1 Si vous avez déjà inséré la vidéo, sur la diapositive, cliquez sur le cadre de la vidéo avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Vidéo Flash s’affiche. 2 Dans la boîte de dialogue Vidéo Flash, cliquez sur l’onglet Position. 3 Dans le champ Gauche, entrez (ou sélectionnez dans le menu déroulant) le nombre de pixels devant séparer la fenêtre de la vidéo du bord gauche de l’écran. 4 Dans le champ Haut, entrez (ou sélectionnez dans le menu déroulant) le nombre de pixels devant séparer la fenêtre de la vidéo du haut de l’écran.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 111 5 Pour appliquer les paramètres ou les modifications des paramètres à tous les fichiers FLV de votre projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK.112 Chapitre 6 : Ajout d’images et d’animations Vous pouvez ajouter une vaste gamme d’images et d’animations à vos projets Adobe Captivate. Ajout d’images Les images peuvent améliorer l’apparence de vos projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez ajouter des images dans des projets en les utilisant de plusieurs façons : logos, écrans d’accueil, pointeurs, arrière-plans, boutons et bien davantage. Vous pouvez ajouter des images dans les formats suivants : JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF, POT ou WMF. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. Pour ajouter une image : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une image. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Image. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 4 (Facultatif) Le logiciel peut vous proposer de recadrer ou de mettre l’image à l’échelle. Recadrer Cette option permet de centrer l’image et d’en rogner les bords afin qu’elle tienne dans la zone de capture. Mettre à l’échelle Cette option permet de redimensionner l’image pour créer une image redimensionnée de bonne qualité qui tient dans la zone de capture. 5 Sélectionnez une image dans la liste ou parcourez les dossiers pour sélectionner une autre image. Cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone d’image s’affiche. 6 Définissez les propriétés et les options selon vos besoins. L’onglet Image comprend les options suivantes : Transparence Cette option définit la qualité de transparence du fichier image. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. Un nombre plus petit donnera une image plus lumineuse et un nombre plus grand donnera une image plus estompée. Arrière-plan transparent Cette option vous permet de définir des images non rectangulaires en rendant transparent leur arrière-plan. Par exemple, cette option permet d’ajouter des boutons ronds à un projet Adobe Captivate. Aperçu Affiche l’image. Si vous faites des modifications, par exemple, si vous modifiez la transparence, l’aperçu reflétera les modifications.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 113 Rétablir la taille d’origine Sélectionnez cette option pour revenir à la taille d’origine de l’image. Sélectionner une image à partir de la bibliothèque Sélectionnez cette option pour réutiliser une image qui existe déjà dans votre fichier de projet. Sélectionnez une image et cliquez sur OK. Importer Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir et naviguer jusqu’à une image différente stockée sur votre ordinateur. Sélectionnez une nouvelle image, cliquez sur OK et la nouvelle image est ajoutée à votre diapositive. Cette fonctionnalité peut s’avérer très utile si vous testez plusieurs formats de la même image (par exemple GIF, JPEG ou BMP) pour voir quelle image s’intègre le mieux dans la diapositive. L’onglet Options comprend les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de l’image. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage de l’image. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) l’image s’affiche sur la diapositive. Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition pour l’image dans le menu déroulant (par exemple, Apparition en fondu uniquement ou Pas de transition). Apparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image pour apparaître en fondu. Disparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image pour disparaître en fondu. L’onglet Audio comprend les options suivantes : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le fichier audio de l’image. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans l’onglet Taille et position : Position en pixels Définissez la position de l’image sur la diapositive en saisissant un nombre ou en utilisant les flèches, pour les champs Gauche et Haut.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 114 Taille en pixels Définissez la taille de l’image en saisissant une valeur pour la hauteur et la largeur. Vous pouvez taper un nombre ou utiliser les flèches. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. 7 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres d’image, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres d’image à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles images que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 8 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez créer un filigrane à l’aide de la transparence. Insérez simplement une image et définissez la transparence sur 50 %. Ceci s’avère particulièrement pratique pour de nombreux logos d’entreprise. Ajout d’images de survol Les images de survol sont uniques. Elles se composent d’une image et d’une zone de survol (la zone « sensible »). Les images de survol s’affichent lorsque l’utilisateur final place la souris sur la zone sensible pendant l’exécution. Elles sont particulièrement utiles dans les diapositives chargées de détails ou dans les diapositives contenant des boutons ou des barres d’outils nécessitant une explication. Les types de graphiques que vous pouvez utiliser pour les images de survol sont les mêmes que ceux s’appliquant aux images traditionnelles. Vous pouvez également personnaliser l’emplacement, le contour et la taille de la zone de survol des images de survol. Pour ajouter une image de survol : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une image de survol. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Image de survol. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez une image dans la liste ou parcourez les dossiers pour sélectionner une autre image. Cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle image de survol s’affiche. 5 (Facultatif) Le logiciel peut vous proposer de recadrer ou de mettre l’image à l’échelle. Recadrer Cette option permet de centrer l’image et d’en rogner les bords afin qu’elle tienne dans la zone de capture. Mettre à l’échelle Cette option permet de redimensionner l’image pour créer une image redimensionnée de bonne qualité qui tient dans la zone de capture. L’image est ajoutée au projet. 6 Définissez les propriétés et les options selon vos besoins. L’onglet Image de survol comprend les options suivantes :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 115 Transparence Cette option définit la qualité de transparence du fichier image. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. Un nombre plus petit donnera une image plus lumineuse et un nombre plus grand donnera une image plus estompée. Arrière-plan transparent Cette option vous permet de définir des images de survol non rectangulaires en rendant transparent leur arrière-plan. Aperçu Affiche l’image. Si vous faites des modifications, par exemple, si vous modifiez la transparence, l’aperçu reflétera les modifications. Rétablir la taille d’origine Sélectionnez cette option pour revenir à la taille d’origine de l’image. Importer Sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner une image sur le disque. Sélectionner une image à partir de la bibliothèque Sélectionnez cette option pour sélectionner une image dans la bibliothèque. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans l’onglet Options : Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition pour l’image de survol dans le menu déroulant (par exemple, Apparition en fondu uniquement ou Pas de transition). Apparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image de survol pour apparaître en fondu. Disparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image de survol pour disparaître en fondu. L’onglet Audio comprend les options suivantes : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio de l’image de survol. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans l’onglet Taille et position : Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 116 7 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres d’image de survol, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres d’image de survol à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles images de survol que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 8 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 9 Cliquez sur OK. L’image de survol est ajoutée à la diapositive. La zone de survol est également ajoutée à la diapositive. 10 Faites ensuite glisser l’image vers l’emplacement souhaité. 11 Ajustez la zone de survol selon vos besoins. Insertion d’images en tant que diapositives Vous pouvez insérer des images existantes (JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF, POT ou WMF) en tant que diapositives dans des projets Adobe Captivate. Les diapositives d’images sont utiles dans de nombreux types de projets, principalement les présentations de produits ou de sites Web. Les diapositives d’images peuvent également s’avérer utiles lorsque vous utilisez une image telle qu’un logo d’entreprise en tant que diapositive d’introduction du projet. Pour insérer une image en tant que diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive juste avant l’emplacement où vous souhaitez afficher la nouvelle diapositive. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez insérer l’image comme diapositive 6 de votre projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 5 actuelle. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive > Diapositive d’images. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. Sélectionnez une image dans la liste ou parcourez les dossiers pour sélectionner une autre image. Cliquez sur Ouvrir. (Facultatif) Le logiciel peut vous proposer de recadrer ou de mettre l’image à l’échelle. Recadrer Cette option permet de centrer l’image et d’en rogner les bords afin qu’elle tienne dans la zone de capture. Mettre à l’échelle Cette option permet de redimensionner l’image pour créer une image redimensionnée de bonne qualité qui tient dans la zone de capture. La diapositive d’image est ajoutée au projet. Vous pouvez créer plusieurs diapositives d’images en une seule fois en appuyant sur la touche Maj ou Ctrl tout en sélectionnant les images dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir. Vous pouvez également créer plusieurs diapositives d’images en sélectionnant plusieurs images dans l’explorateur et en les faisant glisser jusqu’à la bande de film dans l’affichage Modifier.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 117 Création d’images en filigrane Vous pouvez créer une image en filigrane en définissant la transparence d’une image. Pour créer une image en filigrane : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter un filigrane. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Image. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez une image ou parcourez les dossiers pour sélectionner une autre image. Cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone d’image s’affiche. 5 Définissez la transparence de l’image sur au moins 50 % dans le champ Transparence. Un nombre supérieur donne une version plus estompée de l’image et un nombre inférieur affiche une image plus lumineuse. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. 7 L’image est ajoutée à la diapositive. 8 Positionnez l’image sur la diapositive selon vos besoins. Modification de la qualité JPEG Adobe Captivate définit automatiquement la qualité des images JPEG dans les projets. Vous pouvez cependant modifier ce paramètre en fonction de la nature des images utilisées dans votre projet. Plus le pourcentage est élevé, meilleure est la qualité d’image. Cependant, la taille du fichier augmente également. Pour modifier la qualité JPEG : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la zone Effets visuels et audio, saisissez la valeur de votre choix dans le champ Qualité des images JPEG. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Suppression d’images Vous pouvez supprimer une image d’une diapositive à tout moment. Pour supprimer une image : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’image à supprimer. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur l’image et sélectionnez Supprimer. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Supprimer dans le menu Modifier.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 118 4 Lorsque le message de confirmation apparaît, cliquez sur Oui. A propos des animations dans Adobe Captivate Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter des animations aux fichiers SWF Adobe Captivate de manière à introduire un élément de mouvement efficace et qui attire l’attention des utilisateurs. Ajoutez des fichiers d’animations existants à une diapositive ou utilisez la fonctionnalité de texte animé dans Adobe Captivate. • Si vous avez un fichier d’animation au format SWF, AVI, FLA ou GIF, vous pouvez l’ajouter directement dans une diapositive. Les diapositives contenant un fichier d’animation peuvent être modifiées comme les autres diapositives contenant un objet. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. Remarque : Si vous voulez ajouter un fichier d’animation Flash (FLA), vous devez d’abord le convertir en fichier SWF. Pour effectuer cette conversion, votre ordinateur doit disposer de Flash CS3 ou version ultérieure. • Pour ajouter du texte animé, sélectionnez parmi les effets fournis avec Adobe Captivate. Testez plusieurs polices, couleurs et effets pour trouver l’apparence qui vous convient. Les diapositives contenant du texte animé, avec leur ensemble de texte, de mouvement et de son (si vous choisissez d’ajouter de l’audio) sont idéales au début d’un projet. Remarque : Les polices de caractères du système ne s’affichent pas dans Adobe Captivate. Si vous importez un fichier d’animation contenant du texte créé avec des polices de caractères du système, l’animation s’affiche dans Adobe Captivate, mais le texte ne s’affiche pas. Pour les animations à importer dans Adobe Captivate, essayez d’utiliser les polices intégrées. Ajout d’animations Si vous avez déjà des fichiers d’animation SWF, AVI, GIF ou FLA, vous pouvez les ajouter aux diapositives de votre projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers d’animation aux diapositives de la même manière que vous ajoutez d’autres éléments. Vous pouvez modifier les diapositives contenant un fichier d’animation comme les autres. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. Remarque : Si vous voulez ajouter un fichier d’animation Flash (FLA), vous devez d’abord le convertir en fichier SWF. Pour effectuer cette conversion, votre ordinateur doit disposer de Flash CS3 ou version ultérieure. Pour ajouter des animations à des diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter un fichier d’animation. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Animation. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 119 4 Sélectionnez le fichier d’animation que vous souhaitez ajouter à la diapositive, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle animation s’affiche. 5 Définissez les propriétés et les options selon vos besoins. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans l’onglet Animation : Statistiques Affiche des informations clés sur le fichier d’animation que vous avez sélectionné, y compris la version, la largeur, la hauteur et le nombre de cadres contenus dans le fichier. La durée totale de l’animation est également précisée. Transparence Cette option définit la qualité de transparence d’un fichier d’animation. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. Un nombre plus petit donnera une animation plus lumineuse et un nombre plus grand donnera une animation plus estompée. Bibliothèque Sélectionnez cette option pour réutiliser une animation qui existe déjà dans votre fichier de projet. Sélectionnez l’animation et cliquez sur OK. Importer Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir et vous déplacer vers un fichier d’animation différent. Sélectionnez un nouveau fichier d’animation, cliquez sur OK et la nouvelle animation est ajoutée à votre diapositive. Cette fonctionnalité peut s’avérer très utile si vous testez plusieurs formats de la même image (par exemple SWF, GIF ou AVI) pour voir quelle image s’intègre le mieux dans la diapositive. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans l’onglet Options : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de l’animation. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Reste de la diapositive Si l’animation dure plus de quelques secondes, vous pouvez choisir qu’elle s’affiche pendant toute la durée d’affichage de la diapositive. L’animation est lue une fois, à moins que l’option de lecture en boucle ne soit sélectionnée. • Reste du projet L’animation est lue pendant la durée du projet, même sur les autres diapositives. L’animation est lue une fois, à moins que l’option de lecture en boucle ne soit sélectionnée. • Durée de l’animation L’animation est lue une fois. • Durée spécifique L’animation est lue pendant le nombre de secondes que vous saisissez. Apparaître après [#] secondes Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) l’animation est lue. Synchroniser avec le projet Sélectionnez cette option pour synchroniser la vitesse de lecture du fichier d’animation avec la vitesse du plan de montage chronologique. Si vous trouvez que le fichier d’animation n’est pas lu de manière fluide, testez-le avec et sans cette option pour savoir ce qui donne un meilleur résultat. Lire en boucle Sélectionnez cette option pour lire le fichier d’animation en boucle pendant toute la durée du projet. Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition pour l’animation dans le menu déroulant (par exemple, Apparition en fondu uniquement ou Pas de transition). Apparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’animation pour apparaître en fondu. Disparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’animation pour disparaître en fondu. L’onglet Audio comprend les options suivantes : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 120 Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio de l’animation. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. L’onglet Taille et position comprend les options suivantes : Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. 6 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les nouveaux paramètres d’animation, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les nouveaux paramètres d’animation à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles animations que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. L’animation est ajoutée à la diapositive. Remarque : Les polices de caractères du système ne s’affichent pas dans Adobe Captivate. Si vous importez un fichier d’animation contenant du texte créé avec des polices de caractères du système, l’animation s’affiche dans Adobe Captivate, mais le texte ne s’affiche pas. Pour les animations à importer dans Adobe Captivate, essayez d’utiliser les polices intégrées.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 121 Ajout de texte animé Un texte animé est un texte auquel on a appliqué des effets spéciaux. Adobe Captivate propose de nombreux effets d’animation de texte que vous pouvez tester et utiliser. Par exemple, sur la première diapositive d’un projet, vous pouvez appliquer un effet pour que le texte semble voler ou pour qu’il apparaisse en fondu. Cela crée un début de projet attrayant qui attire l’attention. Les diapositives contenant du texte animé s’affichent dans les deux affichages d’Adobe Captivate, l’affichage Scénarimage et l’affichage Modifier, ainsi que dans la Bande de film (une option de l’affichage Modifier) tout comme les autres diapositives. Pour ajouter un texte animé : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive dans laquelle vous voulez ajouter du texte animé. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Animation de texte. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle animation de texte s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Animation de texte. 5 Dans le champ Texte, entrez le texte à animer. Le texte s’affiche dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. 6 Sélectionnez le menu déroulant Effet et choisissez un effet d’animation. Sélectionnez différents effets pour les prévisualiser dans la fenêtre d’aperçu à gauche. 7 Définissez les options de police, de transparence et de retard : Modifier la police Cliquez ici pour spécifier les options de police comme le nom de la police, le style, la taille, les effets et les couleurs. Transparence Spécifie un niveau de transparence pour le texte animé. Pour obtenir un effet de texte animé très clair, sélectionnez un nombre plus élevé (par exemple 90). Pour obtenir du texte plus sombre, sélectionnez un nombre plus petit (par exemple 10). Retard (images) Cette option spécifie l’intervalle de temps (en images Flash) entre l’affichage des lettres du texte animé. Si vous définissez un nombre plus petit (par exemple, 0 ou 1), toutes les lettres s’affichent très vite, les unes après les autres. Si vous définissez un nombre plus grand (par exemple, 30 ou 40), chaque lettre s’affiche de façon plus distincte. Essayez des nombres différents et regardez le texte dans la fenêtre Aperçu pour sélectionner un nombre qui vous convient. Remarque : Le nombre spécifié dans Retard ne modifie pas la durée d’affichage du texte animé. Par exemple, si vous spécifiez (sur l’onglet Options) que l’effet d’animation de texte doit s’afficher pendant 8 secondes, le nombre dans l’option Retard, que ce soit un ou trente, ne change pas la durée absolue de 8 secondes. 8 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. Cet onglet vous permet de définir la durée et les transitions du texte animé. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée du texte animé. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage du texte animé. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) le texte animé s’affiche sur la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 122 Lire en boucle Sélectionnez cette option pour que le fichier d’animation soit lu continuellement en boucle au cours de la lecture du projet. Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition à l’aide du menu déroulant (par exemple, apparition et disparition en fondu). Apparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’animation pour apparaître en fondu. Disparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’animation pour disparaître en fondu. 9 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio pour définir les options audio du texte animé : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio du texte animé. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. L’onglet Taille et position comprend les options suivantes : Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. 10 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres d’animation de texte, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres d’animation de texte à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et tout nouveau texte animé que vous créez utilise ces paramètres. 11 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 12 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 123 Ajout de diapositives d’animation Si vous avez un fichier SWF, AVI, FLA ou un fichier GIF animé, vous pouvez ajouter ce fichier à votre projet Adobe Captivate sous forme d’une nouvelle diapositive. C’est une manière rapide et facile de rendre votre projet plus informatif en utilisant le contenu que vous avez déjà créé. Remarque : L’ajout d’une animation sous la forme d’une diapositive est plus approprié avec les fichiers d’animation plus volumineux. Remarque : Si vous voulez ajouter un fichier d’animation Flash (FLA), vous devez d’abord le convertir en fichier SWF. Pour effectuer cette conversion, votre ordinateur doit disposer de Flash CS3 ou version ultérieure. Pour ajouter une diapositive d’animation : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive > Diapositive d’animation. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 3 Naviguez vers le fichier d’animation que vous voulez insérer (SWF, AVI, FLA ou GIF animé) et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La diapositive d’animation est générée et ajoutée au projet. Remarque : Il est important de définir la vitesse de défilement correcte. Tous les fichiers d’animation importés seront lus à la vitesse sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet, quelle que soit la vitesse définie avant l’importation du fichier. Le paramètre par défaut est de 30 images flash par seconde et est approprié dans la plupart des cas. Il est possible que vous deviez modifier la vitesse si vous intégrez votre fichier Adobe Captivate SWF dans un autre fichier SWF dont la vitesse de défilement est différente de 30. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez une diapositive d’animation, la durée d’affichage de la diapositive dans votre projet final est la même que la durée du fichier d’animation. Par exemple, si le fichier d’animation que vous utilisez pour créer une nouvelle diapositive d’animation est uniquement d’une durée de 1,2 secondes, la diapositive d’animation s’affichera pendant 1,2 secondes. Pour modifier la durée d’affichage de la diapositive, ouvrez la diapositive en affichage Modifier, sélectionnez le menu Diapositive, sélectionnez Propriétés et entrez un nouveau nombre de secondes dans la case Durée d’affichage. Vous pouvez également modifier la durée d’affichage de la diapositive à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique.124 Chapitre 7 : Ajout de zones et de boutons Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter divers types de boutons et de zones à des diapositives. Certains types sont interactifs, ce qui permet aux utilisateurs de participer activement à l’apprentissage. Vous pouvez ajouter les types de boutons et de zones suivants. Zones de surbrillance Ces zones permettent de mettre en évidence des éléments d’une diapositive. Vous pouvez utiliser ces zones pour indiquer aux utilisateurs où porter leur attention ou saisir des données ou pour insister sur un point particulier. Vous pouvez définir la taille, la couleur, la transparence et les options d’affichage d’une zone de surbrillance. Zones de clic Ces zones cliquables sont interactives. Vous pouvez utiliser les zones de clic pour présenter les fonctionnalités d’une application (par exemple, en demandant aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur un menu ou un bouton). Naturellement, c’est vous qui définissez l’action résultant du clic de l’utilisateur. Par exemple, le projet peut avancer à la diapositive suivante, afficher une adresse URL ou envoyer un e-mail. Vous pouvez également dimensionner et positionner les zones de clic. Zones de texte Ces zones permettent de demander aux utilisateurs d’entrer du texte. Vous pouvez présenter les fonctionnalités d’une application ou d’un site Web en demandant aux utilisateurs d’entrer du texte aux emplacements appropriés. Vous pouvez également utiliser les zones de texte pour poser de simples questions de quiz. Boutons Les boutons augmentent l’interactivité de vos projets Adobe Captivate. Vous contrôlez l’apparence et la fonction des boutons. Vous pouvez également modifier la taille et l’emplacement des boutons sur une diapositive. Ajout de zones de surbrillance Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter des zones de surbrillance pour mettre en évidence certaines zones d’une diapositive. Une zone de surbrillance est l’équivalent en ligne d’un surligneur utilisé sur papier. Ajoutez des zones de surbrillance pour indiquer aux utilisateurs où porter leur attention ou entrer des données, ou simplement pour mettre un élément en valeur. Vous pouvez définir la taille, la couleur, la transparence et la durée des zones de surbrillance.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 125 Pour ajouter une zone de surbrillance : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une zone de surbrillance. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de surbrillance. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone de surbrillance s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Zone de surbrillance et définissez les options suivantes : Couleur du cadre Il s’agit de la couleur de la bordure de la zone de surbrillance. Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour modifier la couleur. Couleur de remplissage Il s’agit de la couleur de remplissage de la zone de surbrillance. Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour modifier la couleur. Largeur du cadre Il s’agit de la largeur de la bordure de la zone de surbrillance. Transparence du remplissage Il s’agit du degré de transparence de la couleur de remplissage. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. Une valeur de 10 % donne un aspect moins transparent (plus opaque) qu’une valeur de 90 %. Remplir la zone extérieure Sélectionnez cette option pour remplir la zone à l’extérieur des bords de la zone de surbrillance. Aperçu Cette zone affiche les paramètres que vous avez sélectionnés dans la section Apparence. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options et définissez les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de la zone de surbrillance. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage de la zone de surbrillance. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la zone de surbrillance s’affiche sur la diapositive. Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition pour la zone de surbrillance dans le menu déroulant. Sélectionnez une option d’apparition en fondu ou de disparition en fondu ou sélectionnez Pas de transition. Si vous sélectionnez une apparition ou une disparition en fondu, définissez la durée exacte (en secondes) de l’effet à l’aide des flèches. 6 Si vous voulez ajouter de l’audio à la zone de surbrillance, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Lire l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer l’audio Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio de la zone de surbrillance. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Audio Affiche le nom du fichier audio associé à la zone de surbrillance, le cas échéant. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 126 Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres audio (source d’entrée, niveau de qualité et calibration). Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. 7 Si vous voulez définir la taille et l’emplacement exacts de la zone de surbrillance en pixels, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Gauche Spécifie la position du bord gauche de l’objet, en pixels. Haut Spécifie la position du bord supérieur de l’objet, en pixels. Largeur Spécifie la largeur (horizontale) de l’objet, en pixels. Hauteur Spécifie la hauteur (verticale) de l’objet, en pixels. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. 8 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de surbrillance, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de surbrillance à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles zones de surbrillance que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 9 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 10 Cliquez sur OK. La zone de surbrillance s’affiche sur la diapositive. Ajout de zones de clic Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter un niveau d’interactivité supplémentaire à vos projets au moyen de zones de clic. Les zones de clic sont des zones cliquables que vous pouvez dimensionner et positionner. Vous pouvez utiliser les zones de clic pour illustrer les fonctionnalités d’une application, par exemple, en demandant aux utilisateurs de cliquer sur un menu ou un bouton. Vous pouvez définir l’action résultant du clic de l’utilisateur. Par exemple, il peut s’agir du passage à la diapositive suivante du projet, de l’ouverture d’une adresse URL ou de l’envoi d’un e-mail. Après avoir ajouté une zone de clic à votre projet, vous pouvez afficher et modifier les propriétés de l’objet dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée en sélectionnant Projet > Interaction avancée. Cette boîte de dialogue affiche les propriétés de tous les objets interactifs de votre projet. Pour ajouter une zone de clic : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une zone de clic. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de clic. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone de clic s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 127 4 Sélectionnez l’onglet Zone de clic. Cet onglet vous permet de déterminer la manière dont le projet réagit à une action de l’utilisateur. Les options sont divisées en deux catégories : les événements se produisant lorsqu’un utilisateur clique dans la zone de clic et les événements se produisant lorsqu’un utilisateur clique en dehors de la zone de clic. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur clique sur la zone de clic : En cas de réussite Spécifiez ce qui ce passe une fois qu’un utilisateur clique dans la zone. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur clique en dehors de la zone de clic : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a le droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. L’option Tentatives illimitées est sélectionnée par défaut. Pour saisir un nombre de tentatives spécifique, désélectionnez d’abord l’option Tentatives illimitées. Tentatives illimitées Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser un nombre de tentatives illimité aux utilisateurs. Après la dernière tentative Spécifiez ce qui se passe après la dernière tentative. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Ouvrir URL ou fichier ou Ouvrir un autre projet, cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. Si vous choisissez Nouveau, Parent ou En haut, vous avez également l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet d’origine lorsque l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet s’ouvre. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Envoyer un e-mail à, vous avez l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet pendant que le message électronique est préparé et envoyé. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option Ouvrir URL ou fichier et spécifiez une adresse URL, cette dernière est visible lorsque vous modifiez la diapositive dans Adobe Captivate. Cependant, elle n’est pas visible par l’utilisateur. Pour afficher l’adresse URL, créez une image simple contenant le texte de l’adresse URL, ajoutez l’image à votre diapositive, puis placez une zone de clic sur l’image. Définir la touche de raccourci Cliquez sur Sélectionner les touches pour choisir une ou plusieurs combinaisons de touches que les utilisateurs doivent utiliser pour soumettre leurs réponses. Le raccourci clavier courant est affiché à gauche du bouton. Remarque : Si votre projet Adobe Captivate doit s’afficher dans un navigateur, définissez des touches de raccourci différentes des raccourcis courants du navigateur. Par exemple, la touche F1 est souvent utilisée comme raccourci clavier pour afficher l’aide. Les touches Ctrl, Alt et Maj correspondent respectivement aux touches Ctrl, Option et Maj du Macintosh. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. Cet onglet permet de définir l’apparence d’une zone de clic. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de la zone de clic. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage de la zone de clic. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la zone de clic s’affiche sur la diapositive. Légende de succès Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de succès (par exemple, Bravo !).ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 128 Légende d’échec Cette option permet d’inclure une légende d’échec (par exemple, Incorrect, essayez de nouveau). Légende de conseil Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de conseil. La légende de conseil s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur place la souris sur la zone de clic. Afficher le curseur en forme de main sur la zone sensible Affiche le curseur en forme de main lorsque l’utilisateur place le pointeur de la souris sur la zone de clic. Arrêter l’audio de la diapositive en cas de clic L’audio s’arrête quand l’utilisateur clique sur la zone de clic. Cette option arrête uniquement l’audio de la diapositive, pas l’audio d’arrière-plan. Par ailleurs, seul un clic de souris sur la zone de clic arrête l’audio. L’audio n’est pas arrêté en cas d’utilisation d’une touche de raccourci. Suspendre le projet jusqu’à ce que l’utilisateur clique Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que la lecture du projet ne commence qu’après que l’utilisateur clique sur la zone de clic. Double-clic de la souris Cette option permet aux utilisateurs de double-cliquer sur la zone de clic. Suspendre pendant les légendes de succès/échec Sélectionnez cette option pour suspendre le projet jusqu’à ce que toutes les légendes de succès et d’échec (voir explications ci-dessus) soient affichées pour que l’utilisateur puisse les lire. 6 Si vous voulez ajouter de l’audio à la zone de clic, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio et sélectionnez une ou plusieurs des options suivantes : Lire l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer l’audio Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio de la zone de clic. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Audio Affiche le nom du fichier audio associé à la zone de clic, le cas échéant. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres audio (source d’entrée, niveau de qualité et calibration). Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. 7 Si vous voulez conserver le score de la zone de clic ou coordonner le score avec un système de gestion de l’apprentissage, cliquez sur l’onglet Communication. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Inclure dans le quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure la zone de clic comme question dans le quiz actuel. Les points attribués à la zone de clic sont ajoutés au score total du quiz actuel. Communiquer les réponses Cette option conserve un score du quiz.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 129 ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question de la zone de clic porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, vous devez utiliser l’ID d’interaction spécifiée par celui-ci. Points Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. Les points attribués à la zone de clic sont ajoutés au score total du quiz actuel. Ajouter au total Cochez cette case si vous voulez inclure les points pour le clic correct au score total. 8 Si vous voulez définir la taille et l’emplacement exacts de la zone de clic en pixels, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Gauche Spécifie la position du bord gauche de l’objet, en pixels. Haut Spécifie la position du bord supérieur de l’objet, en pixels. Largeur Spécifie la largeur (horizontale) de l’objet, en pixels. Hauteur Spécifie la hauteur (verticale) de l’objet, en pixels. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. 9 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de clic, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de clic à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles zones de clic que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 11 Cliquez sur OK. La zone de clic s’affiche sur la diapositive. 12 Dimensionnez et positionnez la zone de clic à votre convenance. 13 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option de légende de succès, d’échec ou de conseil, double-cliquez sur les zones de texte pour modifier le texte. Ajout de zones de texte Les zones de texte permettent d’accroître facilement et rapidement l’interaction des projets Adobe Captivate. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser les zones de texte pour poser des questions de quiz simples. Après avoir ajouté une zone de texte à votre projet, vous pouvez afficher et modifier les propriétés de l’objet dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée en sélectionnant Projet > Interaction avancée. Cette boîte de dialogue affiche les propriétés de tous les objets interactifs de votre projet. Pour ajouter une zone de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une zone de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 130 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de texte. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone de texte s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Zone de texte. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Paramètres : Texte par défaut L’utilisateur voit le texte lorsque la diapositive est affichée. Conserver le texte Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que l’utilisateur voie les réponses qu’il a précédemment saisies lorsqu’il retourne à cette diapositive à l’aide du bouton Précédent. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur entre correctement le texte : Entrées correctes Ajoutez votre propre texte de réponse correcte ici. Vous pouvez entrer plusieurs réponses correctes. Police Ouvre la boîte de dialogue Police de caractères. Vous pouvez ainsi choisir la police, les styles de police et les effets pour le texte. Ajouter Ouvre un nouveau champ dans lequel vous pouvez saisir une autre entrée correcte. Supprimer Supprime l’entrée sélectionnée de la liste. En cas de réussite Spécifiez ce qui se passe lorsqu’un utilisateur entre le texte correct dans la zone de texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Remarque : Voir « Relier des projets Adobe Captivate », page 57 pour plus d’informations sur la façon de relier des projets. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur entre incorrectement le texte : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a le droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. L’option Tentatives illimitées est sélectionnée par défaut. Pour saisir un nombre de tentatives spécifique, désélectionnez d’abord l’option Tentatives illimitées. Tentatives illimitées Accorde à l’utilisateur un nombre illimité de tentatives. Après la dernière tentative Spécifiez ce qui se passe après la dernière tentative. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Ouvrir URL ou fichier ou Ouvrir un autre projet, cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. Si vous choisissez Nouveau, Parent ou En haut, vous avez également l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet d’origine lorsque l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet s’ouvre. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Envoyer un e-mail à, vous avez l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet pendant que le message électronique est préparé et envoyé. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option Ouvrir URL ou fichier et spécifiez une adresse URL, cette dernière est visible lorsque vous modifiez la diapositive dans Adobe Captivate. Cependant, elle n’est pas visible par l’utilisateur. Pour afficher l’adresse URL, créez une image simple contenant le texte de l’adresse URL, ajoutez l’image à votre diapositive, puis placez une zone de clic sur l’image. Définir la touche de raccourci Cliquez pour choisir une combinaison de touches que les utilisateurs doivent utiliser pour soumettre leurs réponses. Le raccourci clavier courant est affiché à gauche du bouton.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 131 Remarque : Si votre projet Adobe Captivate doit s’afficher dans un navigateur, définissez des touches de raccourci différentes des raccourcis courants du navigateur. Par exemple, la touche F1 est souvent utilisée comme raccourci clavier pour afficher l’aide. Les touches Ctrl, Alt et Maj correspondent respectivement aux touches Ctrl, Option et Maj du Macintosh. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options et personnalisez votre zone de texte en utilisant les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de la zone de texte. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage de la zone de texte. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la zone de texte s’affiche sur la diapositive. Suspendre après [#] secondes Spécifie le moment où pauser le projet pour permettre à l’utilisateur de saisir le texte dans la zone de texte. Par exemple, vous pouvez définir cette option sur 5 secondes pour afficher la zone de texte et suspendre le projet 5 secondes après pour que l’utilisateur puisse saisir du texte. Effet Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez un effet de transition pour la zone de texte. Sélectionnez une option d’apparition en fondu ou de disparition en fondu ou sélectionnez Pas de transition. Transparence Il s’agit du degré de transparence de la zone de texte. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. Une valeur de 10 % donne un aspect moins transparent (plus opaque) qu’une valeur de 90 %. L’effet de transparence n’apparaît pas lorsque vous affichez la zone de texte en mode Modifier. Pour tester l’effet de transparence, appuyez sur F4 pour afficher la diapositive en aperçu. Couleur d’arrière-plan Sélectionnez une couleur d’arrière-plan pour la zone de texte. Légende de succès Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de succès (par exemple, Bravo !). Légende d’échec Cette option permet d’inclure une légende d’échec (par exemple, Incorrect, essayez de nouveau). Légende de conseil Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de conseil. La légende de conseil s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur place la souris sur la zone de texte. Suspendre pendant les légendes de succès/échec Sélectionnez cette option pour suspendre le projet jusqu’à ce que toutes les légendes de succès et d’échec (voir explications ci-dessus) soient affichées pour que l’utilisateur puisse les lire. Afficher le bouton Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un bouton avec du texte comme ENTRER ou TERMINER. Pour ajouter ou modifier le texte du bouton, affichez une diapositive en affichage Modifier et doublecliquez sur le bouton afin d’ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Bouton. Afficher le cadre de la zone de texte Sélectionnez cette option pour rendre le cadre de la zone de texte visible par les utilisateurs. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, seul le texte s’affiche. Mot de passe Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez simuler un champ de mot de passe. Respecter la casse Sélectionnez cette option pour rendre la zone de texte sensible à la casse. Cela signifie que l’utilisateur doit respecter les lettres majuscules et minuscules dans ses réponses. 6 Si vous voulez ajouter de l’audio à la zone de texte, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio de la zone de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 132 Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Audio Affiche le nom du fichier audio associé à la zone de texte, le cas échéant. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres audio (source d’entrée, niveau de qualité et calibration). Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. 7 Si vous voulez conserver le score de la zone de texte ou coordonner le score avec un système de gestion de l’apprentissage, cliquez sur l’onglet Communication. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Inclure dans le quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure le bouton comme question dans le quiz actuel. Les points attribués à la zone de clic sont ajoutés au score total du quiz actuel. Communiquer les réponses Cette option communique les réponses à un quiz. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question de la zone de clic porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, vous devez utiliser l’ID d’interaction spécifiée par celui-ci. Points Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. Ajouter au total Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les points de la zone de clic sont ajoutés au total du quiz. 8 Si vous voulez définir la taille et l’emplacement exacts de la zone de texte en pixels, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Gauche Spécifie la position du bord gauche de l’objet, en pixels. Haut Spécifie la position du bord supérieur de l’objet, en pixels. Largeur Spécifie la largeur (horizontale) de l’objet, en pixels. Hauteur Spécifie la hauteur (verticale) de l’objet, en pixels. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. 9 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de texte, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de texte à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 133 Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles zones de texte que vous créez les utilisent. 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 11 Cliquez sur OK. Une zone de texte s’affiche dans la diapositive. 12 Dimensionnez et positionnez la zone de texte à votre convenance. 13 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option de légende de succès, d’échec ou de conseil, double-cliquez sur les zones de texte pour modifier le texte. Ajout de boutons Vous pouvez ajouter un niveau d’interactivité supplémentaire à vos projets Adobe Captivate en ajoutant des boutons cliquables. Pour ajouter rapidement un bouton, utilisez le style de bouton par défaut (un rectangle blanc) ou importez une image de bouton personnalisée que vous avez créée. Vous pouvez modifier la taille et l’emplacement des boutons sur une diapositive. Vous définissez ce qui se passe lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton. Il peut s’agir, par exemple, de passer à la diapositive suivante du projet, d’accéder à une adresse URL ou d’envoyer un e-mail. Après avoir ajouté un bouton à votre projet, vous pouvez afficher et modifier les propriétés de l’objet dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée en sélectionnant Projet > Interaction avancée. Cette boîte de dialogue affiche les propriétés de tous les objets interactifs de votre projet. Remarque : Nous vous recommandons de redimensionner les boutons avant de redimensionner le projet. En effet, le redimensionnement d’un projet ne redimensionne pas automatiquement les boutons. Pour ajouter un bouton : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter un bouton. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Bouton. La boîte de dialogue Nouveau bouton s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Bouton. Cet onglet vous permet de déterminer la manière dont le projet Adobe Captivate réagit à une action de l’utilisateur. Les options sont divisées en deux catégories : ce qui se passe lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton et ce qui se passe lorsque l’utilisateur clique en dehors du bouton. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Type de bouton : Type Sélectionnez le type de bouton que vous voulez créer à l’aide du menu déroulant. Les détails concernant les trois types et les options disponibles pour chaque type sont expliqués ci-dessous. Bouton de texte Cette option permet de créer un bouton qui affiche du texte. Dans le champ Texte du bouton, entrez le texte que vous voulez afficher. • Texte des boutons Tapez le texte qui s’affichera sur le bouton. • Police Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Police qui vous permet de choisir une police de caractères, un style de police, une taille de police, une couleur et des effets pour le texte du bouton.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 134 • Transparent Sélectionnez cette option pour rendre le bouton transparent. Quand un bouton de texte est transparent, seul son texte s’affiche sur la diapositive. Bouton transparent Cette option permet de créer un bouton totalement ou semi-transparent. Vous pouvez sélectionner le degré de transparence. • Couleur du cadre Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Couleurs qui permet de sélectionner une couleur pour la bordure du bouton. • Couleur de remplissage Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Couleurs qui permet de sélectionner une couleur pour le bouton. • Largeur du cadre Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner une taille pour la bordure autour du bouton. • Transparence du remplissage Spécifie un niveau de transparence pour le bouton. Pour obtenir un bouton très clair, sélectionnez un nombre plus élevé comme par exemple 90. Pour obtenir un bouton plus sombre, sélectionnez un nombre plus petit comme par exemple 10. Bouton d’image Cette option permet d’utiliser une image comme bouton. Vous pouvez naviguer jusqu’à l’image requise dans la galerie ou choisir l’image du bouton dans le menu déroulant ci-dessous. Bouton transparent Sélectionnez cette option pour définir la transparence du bouton. Adobe Captivate reconnaît la couleur du pixel supérieur gauche de l’image et rend cette couleur transparente sur tout le bouton. Remarque : Si vous testez le bouton d’image et s’il ne s’affiche pas correctement, essayez d’ouvrir l’image dans un programme graphique (par exemple Fireworks) et de changer la couleur du pixel supérieur gauche. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton : En cas de réussite Spécifiez ce qui ce passe une fois qu’un utilisateur clique dans la zone. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Remarque : Voir « Relier des projets Adobe Captivate », page 57 pour plus d’informations sur la façon de relier des projets. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur clique en dehors du bouton : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a le droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. L’option Tentatives illimitées est sélectionnée par défaut. Pour saisir un nombre de tentatives spécifique, désélectionnez d’abord l’option Tentatives illimitées. Tentatives illimitées Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser un nombre de tentatives illimité aux utilisateurs. Après la dernière tentative Spécifiez ce qui se passe après la dernière tentative. Vous pouvez sélectionner Continuer, Aller à la diapositive précédente, Aller à la diapositive suivante, Aller à la diapositive, Ouvrir URL ou fichier, Ouvrir un autre projet, Envoyer un e-mail à, Exécuter JavaScript ou Pas d’action. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Ouvrir URL ou fichier ou Ouvrir un autre projet, cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. Si vous choisissez Nouveau, Parent ou En haut, vous avez également l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet d’origine lorsque l’adresse URL, le fichier ou le projet s’ouvre. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez Envoyer un e-mail à, vous avez l’option de Continuer la lecture du projet pendant que le message électronique est préparé et envoyé.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 135 Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option Ouvrir URL ou fichier et spécifiez une adresse URL, cette dernière est visible lorsque vous modifiez la diapositive dans Adobe Captivate. Cependant, elle n’est pas visible par l’utilisateur. Pour afficher l’adresse URL, créez une image simple contenant le texte de l’adresse URL, ajoutez l’image à votre diapositive, puis placez une zone de clic sur l’image. Définir la touche de raccourci Cliquez pour choisir une combinaison de touches que les utilisateurs doivent utiliser pour soumettre leurs réponses. Le raccourci clavier courant est affiché à gauche du bouton. Remarque : Si votre projet Adobe Captivate doit s’afficher dans un navigateur, définissez des touches de raccourci différentes des raccourcis courants du navigateur. Par exemple, la touche F1 est souvent utilisée comme raccourci clavier pour afficher l’aide. Les touches Ctrl, Alt et Maj correspondent respectivement aux touches Ctrl, Option et Maj du Macintosh. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. Cet onglet vous permet de choisir l’aspect du bouton. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée du bouton. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage du bouton. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) le bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. Suspendre après [#] secondes Spécifie le moment où pauser le film pour permettre à l’utilisateur de cliquer sur le bouton. Par exemple, vous pouvez définir cette option sur 5 secondes pour afficher le bouton et suspendre le projet 5 secondes après pour permettre à l’utilisateur de cliquer sur le bouton. Légende de succès Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de succès (par exemple, Bravo !). Légende d’échec Cette option permet d’inclure une légende d’échec (par exemple, Incorrect, essayez de nouveau). Légende de conseil Cette option permet d’inclure une légende de conseil. La légende de conseil s’affiche lorsqu’un utilisateur place la souris sur le bouton. Suspendre pendant les légendes de succès/échec Sélectionnez cette option pour suspendre le projet jusqu’à ce que toutes les légendes de succès et d’échec (voir explications ci-dessus) soient affichées pour que l’utilisateur puisse les lire. Arrêter l’audio de la diapositive en cas de clic Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez arrêter l’audio de la diapositive lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton. Cette option arrête uniquement l’audio de la diapositive, pas l’audio d’arrière-plan. Par ailleurs, seul un clic de souris sur le bouton arrête l’audio. L’audio n’est pas arrêté en cas d’utilisation d’une touche de raccourci. Double-clic de la souris Cette option permet à l’utilisateur de double-cliquer sur le bouton. Afficher curseur en forme de main pdt survol bouton Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher le curseur en forme de main lorsqu’un utilisateur place la souris sur le bouton. 6 Si vous voulez ajouter de l’audio au bouton, cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Lire Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer Cliquez ici pour supprimer le fichier audio du bouton. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 136 Audio Affiche le nom du fichier audio associé au bouton, le cas échéant. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres audio (source d’entrée, niveau de qualité et calibration). Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. 7 Si vous voulez conserver le score du bouton ou coordonner le score avec un système de gestion de l’apprentissage, cliquez sur l’onglet Communication. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Inclure dans le quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure le bouton comme question dans le quiz actuel. Les points attribués au bouton sont ajoutés au score total du quiz actuel. Communiquer les réponses Cette option conserve un score du quiz. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question du bouton porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, vous devez utiliser l’ID d’interaction spécifiée par celui-ci. Points Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. Ajouter au total Si vous sélectionnez cette option, les points du bouton sont ajoutés au total du quiz. 8 Si vous voulez définir la taille et l’emplacement exacts de la zone de texte en pixels, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Gauche Spécifie la position du bord gauche de l’objet, en pixels. Haut Spécifie la position du bord supérieur de l’objet, en pixels. Largeur Spécifie la largeur (horizontale) de l’objet, en pixels. Hauteur Spécifie la hauteur (verticale) de l’objet, en pixels. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. 9 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de bouton, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de bouton à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouveaux boutons que vous créez les utilisent.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 137 10 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 11 Cliquez sur OK. 12 Le bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. 13 Dimensionnez et positionnez le bouton à votre convenance. 14 Si vous avez sélectionné l’option de légende de succès, d’échec ou de conseil, double-cliquez sur les zones de texte pour modifier le texte. Pour redimensionner automatiquement les boutons : Adobe Captivate peut automatiquement redimensionner un bouton selon la quantité de texte contenue dans le bouton. Si vous modifiez le texte, le bouton change de taille pour s’ajuster à la nouvelle quantité de texte. C’est une façon facile de conserver une apparence équilibrée et proportionnelle. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des légendes de texte. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Taille automatique des boutons. Si une coche s’affiche en regard de l’option, Taille automatique des boutons est activée ; s’il n’y a pas de coche, Taille automatique des boutons est désactivée. Modification des boutons sur les diapositives de questions Vous pouvez modifier certaines des propriétés des boutons sur les diapositives de questions. Les boutons standard sont les boutons d’effacement, de retour, d’envoi et Ignorer. Remarque : Nous vous recommandons de redimensionner les boutons avant de redimensionner le projet. En effet, lors du redimensionnement du projet, les boutons ne sont pas automatiquement redimensionnés. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour l’ouvrir dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive > Diapositive de questions afin d’insérer une diapositive de questions. 4 Cliquez sur un bouton de question avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la section Type de bouton de la boîte de dialogue qui s’affiche : Type Sélectionnez le type de bouton dans le menu déroulant. Texte des boutons (facultatif) Tapez une autre étiquette. Police Sélectionnez le type, le style, la taille, les effets et la couleur de police pour le texte du bouton. Transparent Quand un bouton est transparent, seul son texte s’affiche. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la section Définir la touche de raccourci : Sélectionner les touches Choisissez une combinaison de touches que les utilisateurs doivent utiliser pour soumettre leurs réponses. Tout raccourci clavier courant est affiché à gauche du bouton. Si votre projet Adobe Captivate doit s’afficher dans un navigateur, définissez des touches de raccourci différentes des raccourcis courants du navigateur.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 138 5 Pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes du bouton en pixels, cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Sélectionnez parmi les options suivantes pour saisir des valeurs en pixels : Gauche La position du bord gauche de l’objet. Haut La position du bord supérieur de l’objet. Largeur La largeur (horizontale) de l’objet. Hauteur La hauteur (verticale) de l’objet. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. 6 Cliquez sur Paramètres pour indiquer si vous souhaitez appliquer toutes les propriétés ou uniquement les propriétés modifiées, à la diapositive en cours ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, les nouveaux boutons que vous créez utilisent les nouveaux paramètres. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les propriétés à toutes les diapositives du projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. Ajout de JavaScript aux zones et aux boutons Vous pouvez ajouter du JavaScript aux zones de clic, aux zones de texte et aux boutons dans les projets Adobe Captivate. Le JavaScript peut être exécuté lorsqu’un utilisateur clique sur ou en dehors d’une zone ou d’un bouton. L’utilisation de JavaScript permet d’améliorer les projets de plusieurs façons tout en ajoutant de l’interactivité. Vous pouvez ajouter du JavaScript lorsque vous créez une nouvelle zone ou un nouveau bouton ou ajouter du JavaScript à une zone ou à un bouton existant. Pour ajouter du JavaScript à une nouvelle zone ou à un nouveau bouton 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une zone ou un bouton avec JavaScript. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de clic, Zone de texte ou Bouton. 4 Dans En cas de réussite ou Après la dernière tentative, sélectionnez l’option Exécuter JavaScript. 5 Dans JavaScript, cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...). La boîte de dialogue JavaScript s’affiche. 6 Entrez votre code JavaScript dans le champ. Si le JavaScript est situé ailleurs, vous pouvez le copier puis le coller dans le champ. 7 Cliquez sur OK. 8 Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Pour ajouter du JavaScript à une zone ou à un bouton existant 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter du JavaScript. 3 Double-cliquez sur la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter du JavaScript. 4 Dans En cas de réussite ou Après la dernière tentative, sélectionnez l’option Exécuter JavaScript.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 139 5 Dans JavaScript, cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...). La boîte de dialogue JavaScript s’affiche. 6 Entrez votre code JavaScript dans le champ. Si le JavaScript est situé ailleurs, vous pouvez le copier puis le coller dans le champ. 7 Cliquez sur OK. 8 Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Ajout d’audio aux zones et aux boutons Vous pouvez importer un fichier audio à utiliser avec des boutons, des zones de surbrillance, des zones de clic ou des zones de texte. Vous pouvez également utiliser la bibliothèque pour ajouter un fichier audio qui se trouve déjà dans votre projet courant. Pour importer un fichier audio : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter de l’audio. Cliquez sur le bouton ou la zone avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 4 Cliquez sur Importer. Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. 5 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier audio que vous voulez ajouter, sélectionnez le fichier, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. 6 (Facultatif) Pour écouter et tester le fichier audio, cliquez sur Lire. 7 Paramétrez les options selon vos besoins. • Pour modifier le fichier audio (par exemple, changer le volume, ajouter du silence, modifier la durée, etc.), cliquez sur Modifier. • Si vous voulez que l’audio apparaisse ou disparaisse en fondu, définissez le nombre de secondes à l’aide des flèches dans Apparition en fondu et Disparition en fondu. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Pour sélectionner un fichier audio dans la bibliothèque : Remarque : Pour utiliser l’option Bibliothèque, le projet Adobe Captivate doit contenir au moins un fichier audio. Si le projet ne contient aucun fichier audio, cette option n’est pas disponible. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive contenant la zone ou le bouton auquel vous voulez ajouter de l’audio. Cliquez sur le bouton ou la zone avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. 4 Cliquez sur Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 140 5 Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres audio (source d’entrée, niveau de qualité et calibration). Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres et effectuez vos sélections. 6 (Facultatif) Pour écouter le fichier audio, cliquez sur Lecture. 7 Pour ajouter le fichier audio sélectionné au bouton ou à la zone, cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez également enregistrer un nouveau fichier audio à utiliser avec des zones et des boutons. Vous pouvez associer un fichier audio à un bouton ou une zone de clic et faire en sorte qu’il soit lu lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton ou la zone de clic (plutôt que quand le bouton ou la zone de clic s’affiche). Créez le bouton ou la zone de clic et sélectionnez l’option Légende de succès. Rendez la légende de succès transparente et n’ajoutez pas de texte. Ajoutez un fichier audio à la légende de succès. Suppression de boutons et de zones Si vous supprimez des boutons ou des zones, ils disparaissent du projet. Vous pouvez supprimer des boutons, des zones de surbrillance, des zones de clic et des zones de texte à l’aide de la méthode suivante. Pour supprimer un bouton ou une zone : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive contenant le bouton ou la zone à supprimer. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez le bouton ou la zone à supprimer. Appuyez ensuite sur la touche Supprimer du clavier. • Cliquez du bouton droit sur le bouton ou la zone, puis sélectionnez Supprimer. Remarque : Lorsque vous supprimez un bouton ou une zone, tous les objets associés (tels que les messages de succès et d’échec) sont également supprimés.141 Chapitre 8 : Modification du déplacement de la souris Dans les projets Adobe Captivate, vous contrôlez l’affichage des déplacements de la souris. Vous pouvez modifier la trajectoire de la souris, sélectionner un pointeur et même décider si la souris s’affiche ou non sur une diapositive spécifique. Modification des pointeurs de souris Vous pouvez modifier le pointeur de la souris de chaque diapositive en lui donnant par exemple la forme d’une main, d’un pointeur de redimensionnement vertical ou d’un pointeur glissant. Vous pouvez sélectionner un pointeur du système ou un fichier CUR existant comme image de pointeur. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un nouveau pointeur de souris, cela affecte uniquement la diapositive dans laquelle il a été défini. Vous pouvez cependant sélectionner un pointeur de souris pour tout le projet. Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou l’affichage Modifier. Dans le menu Diapositive, sélectionnez Souris > Utiliser le pointeur de souris actuel pour toutes les diapositives. Pour modifier le pointeur de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Pointeurs du projet ou Pointeurs actuels. 4 Dans le menu déroulant, sélectionnez un autre pointeur de souris. Remarque : Les divers choix figurant dans le menu Pointeurs actuels reflètent le thème Windows courant. Si vous modifiez le thème Windows, ces choix seront donc eux aussi modifiés. Les fichiers du pointeur étant inclus dans le projet Adobe Captivate, les utilisateurs n’ont pas besoin d’avoir le thème Windows sur leurs ordinateurs. Remarque : Il est possible que certains curseurs d’autres applications ne s’affichent pas correctement dans Adobe Captivate. Pour sélectionner un pointeur de souris personnalisé : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Pointeurs du projet > Parcourir. • Sélectionnez Insérer > Souris, puis cliquez sur Parcourir. 4 Sélectionnez un pointeur de souris personnalisé dans la liste. 5 Cliquez sur Ouvrir.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 142 Modification de la taille du pointeur de la souris Vous pouvez doubler la taille du pointeur de la souris. Cela peut être utile si vous voulez insister sur le déplacement de la souris vers sa destination finale sur une diapositive. Cela peut aussi être utile si vous créez des projets accessibles aux personnes atteintes de handicaps. La taille du pointeur de la souris se règle diapositive par diapositive, vous pouvez ainsi choisir exactement quelles diapositives nécessitent une taille plus importante. Pour modifier la taille du pointeur de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher le pointeur de la souris. 5 Dans l’onglet Options, sélectionnez l’option Double taille de souris. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Le nouveau pointeur de la souris de taille double s’affiche sur la diapositive. Remarque : Pour changer la taille du pointeur pour une souris qui a déjà été ajoutée, double-cliquez dessus dans la diapositive pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris. Remarque : Pour retourner à la taille de pointeur d’origine, il suffit de suivre les étapes ci-dessus et de désélectionner l’option Double taille de souris. Modification des sons du clic de souris Vous pouvez modifier le son par défaut du clic de la souris émis chaque fois que la souris termine un déplacement. Deux raisons majeures peuvent amener à modifier le son du clic de la souris. Si vous créez un projet pour une application où l’exécution d’actions s’effectue à la fois via des clics simples et des doubles clics, vous pouvez définir un son de clic de souris spécifique à chacun de ces types de clics. Vous avez également la possibilité de couper totalement le son de la souris pendant tout le projet. Pour modifier le son du clic de la souris dans une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher le pointeur de la souris. 5 Dans l’onglet Options, sélectionnez une option de son de clic de souris dans le menu correspondant : • Si vous ne voulez pas de son de clic de la souris, supprimez la coche à côté de Son de clic de souris.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 143 • Pour le son d’un seul clic (le son d’un clic avec le bouton de la souris), cochez la case à côté de Son de clic de souris (une coche verte apparaît), cliquez sur la flèche et sélectionnez Un seul clic. • Pour le son d’un double clic (le son de deux clics avec le bouton de la souris), cochez la case à côté de Son de clic de souris (une coche verte apparaît), cliquez sur la flèche et sélectionnez Double clic. • Pour rechercher un autre son de clic de souris, cochez la case à côté de Son de clic de souris (une coche verte apparaît), cliquez sur la flèche et sélectionnez Parcourir. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche et vous pouvez rechercher un fichier MP3. Pour entendre un aperçu du son de clic de souris sélectionné, cliquez sur le bouton Lire. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Pour changer le son de clic pour une souris qui a déjà été ajoutée, double-cliquez dessus dans la diapositive pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris. Définition de l’effet de clic de la souris Vous pouvez définir la couleur ou l’effet du clic de la souris. Cette option permet d’ajouter un halo coloré ou un effet spécial autour du pointeur de la souris à chaque fois qu’un clic de souris intervient au cours de la lecture du projet. Pour définir l’effet du clic de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive contenant des déplacements de souris. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Propriétés. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher le pointeur de la souris. 5 Dans l’onglet Options, sélectionnez Afficher le clic de souris. 6 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Par défaut. Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Couleur. Sélectionnez la couleur voulue, puis cliquez sur OK. • Sélectionnez Personnaliser. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Plusieurs options sont disponibles : BlueCircle, GreenRing, OrangeCircle, OrangeRing, VisualClick et VisualdblClick. Pour voir un aperçu de ces options, sélectionnez-en une et cliquez sur Lecture. Le fichier SWF s’affiche dans la petite fenêtre d’aperçu à droite. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner Parcourir dans le menu déroulant et naviguer jusqu’au fichier SWF. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Prévisualisez le projet pour voir la couleur de clic de la souris. Remarque : Pour changer l’effet de clic pour une souris qui a déjà été ajoutée, double-cliquez dessus dans la diapositive pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 144 Modification des déplacements de souris Vous pouvez modifier les déplacements de souris pour une diapositive distincte. Cette option est utile si vous avez effectué une capture d’écran comportant une action de souris et que vous souhaitez modifier le déplacement afin de le rendre plus compréhensible à l’utilisateur. Pour modifier le point de départ ou d’arrivée du déplacement de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 A l’aide de la souris, déplacez votre pointeur sur la fin de la ligne de la souris sur la diapositive jusqu’à ce que le pointeur prenne la forme d’une main. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser le pointeur de la souris vers un nouvel emplacement de la diapositive. Remarque : Si vous modifiez le pointeur de la souris dans une diapositive, ce changement s’applique également à la diapositive suivante. Prévisualisez le projet pour vérifier que le mouvement de souris est fluide d’une diapositive à l’autre. Remarque : Sur la première diapositive de votre projet contenant un déplacement de souris, vous devez manuellement modifier le point de démarrage du déplacement de la souris car vous ne pouvez pas l’aligner sur une diapositive précédente. Alignement des trajectoires de la souris Il peut arriver que vous souhaitiez immobiliser totalement le pointeur de souris lors de la lecture d’une diapositive et l’aligner parfaitement sur la diapositive précédente ou suivante. Dans pareil cas, il est particulièrement difficile de positionner correctement le pointeur de souris manuellement. Adobe Captivate permet d’aligner automatiquement le pointeur de la souris exactement comme dans la diapositive précédente ou suivante du projet. Pour aligner la trajectoire de la souris d’une diapositive à l’autre : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur le pointeur de la souris, puis sélectionnez Aligner sur la diapositive précédente ou Aligner sur la diapositive suivante. 4 Prévisualisez le projet pour vérifier l’alignement du pointeur de la souris d’une diapositive à l’autre. Remarque : Si la première diapositive de votre projet contient un déplacement de souris, vous pouvez modifier manuellement le point de démarrage du déplacement de la souris (parce que vous ne pouvez pas l’aligner sur une diapositive précédente).ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 145 Utilisation des trajectoires de souris droites et courbées Par défaut, Adobe Captivate crée des déplacements de souris courbés afin de donner une apparence plus réaliste et plus naturelle. Cependant, vous devez parfois utiliser des trajectoires droites. Par exemple, si vous créez un projet dans lequel la souris doit suivre une ligne droite sur une barre d’outils. L’option de déplacement courbé ou droit peut être définie pour une diapositive spécifique. Votre projet peut donc contenir des déplacements de souris droits et courbés. Pour modifier le déplacement de souris en ligne droite : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Trajectoire droite du pointeur. Une coche s’affiche en regard de l’option. Pour revenir au déplacement courbé, suivez les étapes ci-dessus et sélectionnez de nouveau Trajectoire droite de la souris pour effacer la coche en regard de l’option. Remarque : Pour changer la taille du pointeur pour une souris qui a déjà été ajoutée, double-cliquez dessus dans la diapositive pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la souris. Masquage du pointeur de la souris Vous pouvez afficher ou masquer le pointeur de la souris. Cette fonctionnalité est utile si, après avoir enregistré un projet, vous vous rendez compte que le pointeur de la souris est inutile ou gênant. Vous pouvez masquer le pointeur de la souris sur une diapositive en particulier ou sur l’ensemble du projet. Pour masquer le pointeur de la souris sur une seule diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez la diapositive désirée dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Sélectionnez Diapositive > Souris > Afficher la souris. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Afficher la souris dans le menu. La coche située à gauche de l’option disparaît. Pour masquer le pointeur de la souris sur la totalité du projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la section Effets visuels et audio, désélectionnez l’option Inclure la souris lorsque le projet est généré.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 146 Activer la molette de la souris Vous pouvez choisir d’activer le mouvement de la molette de la souris pour lancer l’enregistrement d’images animées. Pour activer la molette de la souris pour l’enregistrement : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Enregistrement d’images animées. 4 Sélectionnez Utiliser automatiquement l’enregistrement d’images animées pour les actions de la molette de la souris et cliquez sur OK. Création d’effets de survol de la souris à l’aide d’une mini-diapositive de survol Dans Adobe Captivate, une mini-diapositive de survol est un espace sur une diapositive qui affiche une minidiapositive (une diapositive dans une diapositive) associée quand la souris survole cet espace. Vous pouvez insérer et afficher des objets dans la mini-diapositive en utilisant la même procédure que pour une diapositive. Par exemple, vous pouvez créer une mini-diapositive de survol pour un état sur une carte afin que les données démographiques de cet état s’affichent quand la souris le survole. Remarque : Vous pouvez créer des mini-diapositives de survol sur les diapositives de questions et les diapositives de consultation de quiz. Vous trouverez ci-dessous des informations supplémentaires sur les mini-diapositives. • Une mini-diapositive est toujours liée à la mini-diapositive de survol et elle est créée en même temps qu’elle. • Vous pouvez insérer les types d’objets suivants sur une mini-diapositive : légende de texte, zone de surbrillance, image, légende de survol, zone de survol, zone de zoom, vidéo Flash, animation et animation de texte. • Vous pouvez placer plusieurs types d’objets sur une mini-diapositive. Les objets deviennent visibles quand la souris passe sur la mini-diapositive de survol. • Vous pouvez faire glisser des fichiers audio et vidéo de la bibliothèque sur la mini-diapositive. • Si une mini-diapositive arrive à sa fin pendant la lecture d’un fichier audio ou vidéo, le fichier s’arrête. • Quand une mini-diapositive ou l’un de ses objets est sélectionné, le plan de montage chronologique affiché et les options de menu correspondantes pour la diapositive sont remplacés par ceux de la mini-diapositive. • Les objets d’une mini-diapositive peuvent être masqués ou verrouillés, mais pas la mini-diapositive. Pour masquer ou verrouiller une mini-diapositive, masquez ou verrouillez la mini-diapositive de survol correspondante sur le plan de montage chronologique de la diapositive. • Vous ne pouvez pas faire glisser les objets de la mini-diapositive hors des limites de la mini-diapositive. • Lorsqu’une mini-diapositive est supprimée, les objets associés le sont aussi et le plan de montage chronologique repasse à celui de la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 147 • Si vous cliquez sur une zone hors de la mini-diapositive ou sur la bande de film, le plan de montage chronologique repasse à celui de la diapositive correspondante. Pour créer une mini-diapositive de survol : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour l’ouvrir dans l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Mini-diapositive de survol. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle mini-diapositive s’affiche. Vous trouverez les options suivantes dans la section Apparence de l’onglet Mini-diapositive : Couleur de la bordure Choisissez une couleur pour la bordure de la mini-diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Largeur de la bordure Entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir l’épaisseur de la bordure de la minidiapositive. Couleur de remplissage Choisissez une couleur de remplissage pour la mini-diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Transparence du remplissage Entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir le pourcentage de transparence. Sélectionner l’image Sélectionnez une image d’arrière-plan pour la mini-diapositive. Effacer Supprimez toute image précédemment sélectionnée. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la section Durée : Afficher pendant Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la durée (en secondes) de la mini-diapositive. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Transition : Effet Sélectionnez un effet de fondu ou aucun effet dans le menu déroulant. Cases d’apparition et disparition en fondu Définissez la durée (en secondes) pour les effets de fondu en saisissant une valeur. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la section Effets : Afficher l’ombre à l’exécution Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher une ombre sous la mini-diapositive à l’exécution. L’ombre donne une impression de 3D. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. Utilisez ces paramètres si vous projetez de joindre un fichier audio à la mini-diapositive. Pour enregistrer et joindre un fichier audio, il vous faut de l’équipement supplémentaire. Les boutons suivants sont disponibles dans la section Audio : Lecture Pour lire le fichier son. Arrêter Pour arrêter le fichier son. Supprimer Pour supprimer le fichier son. Modifier Pour modifier un fichier son existant. Enregistrer nouveau Pour enregistrer un fichier son. Importer Pour importer un fichier existant sur le système. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Pour importer un fichier audio depuis la bibliothèque. Paramètres Pour définir les préférences d’enregistrement. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 148 Pour plus d’informations sur les préférences d’enregistrement, voir « Ajout de fichiers audio et vidéo », page 89 Apparition en fondu et Disparition en fondu Définissez la durée (en secondes) pour les effets de fondu en saisissant une valeur. 6 Cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Position en pixels : Haut et Gauche Saisissez une valeur dans ces cases pour définir la position de la mini-diapositive sur la diapositive. Ce paramètre est écrasé si vous faites glisser la mini-diapositive jusqu’à une nouvelle position. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Taille en pixels : Cases de largeur et de hauteur Saisissez une valeur dans ces cases pour définir la taille de la mini-diapositive. 7 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les propriétés à toutes les mini-diapositives du projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 8 Cliquez sur Paramètres pour choisir d’appliquer toutes les propriétés ou uniquement les propriétés modifiées à la mini-diapositive respective ou à toutes les diapositives. 9 Cliquez sur Appliquer. 10 Cliquez sur OK. La mini-diapositive de survol et la mini-diapositive associée s’affichent sur la diapositive. Pour modifier les propriétés d’une mini-diapositive, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. Remarque : Chaque fois qu’une nouvelle mini-diapositive de survol est insérée, la durée par défaut est « reste de la diapositive ». Pour insérer des objets dans une mini-diapositive : 1 Sélectionnez la mini-diapositive en cliquant dessus. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer, puis choisissez l’objet que vous souhaitez insérer. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue correspondante qui s’affiche, suivez la procédure d’insertion de l’objet. 4 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas insérer de mini-diapositive de survol, de souris, de zone de texte, de zone de clic ni de bouton sur une mini-diapositive. Modification des propriétés d’une mini-diapositive de survol Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés d’une mini-diapositive de survol à l’aide des nombreuses options disponibles dans Adobe Captivate. Pour modifier les propriétés d’une mini-diapositive de survol : 1 Cliquez sur la mini-diapositive de survol avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Mini-diapositive de survol s’affiche. Vous pouvez définir les options suivantes dans la section Apparence : Couleur de la bordure Choisissez une couleur pour la bordure de la mini-diapositive de survol dans le menu déroulant.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 149 Afficher la bordure Désélectionnez cette option si vous ne voulez pas afficher la bordure de la mini-diapositive de survol. Couleur de remplissage Choisissez une couleur de remplissage pour la mini-diapositive de survol dans le menu déroulant. Transparence du remplissage Entrez une valeur ou utilisez les flèches pour définir le pourcentage de transparence. Les options suivantes se trouvent dans la zone Si l’utilisateur clique dans la mini-diapositive de survol : Fixer l’état de la mini-diapositive La mini-diapositive reste affichée, même une fois que vous éloignez la souris de la zone de la mini-diapositive de survol. Naviguer Pour lancer l’action sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant En cas de clic. En cas de clic S’affiche si l’option Naviguer est sélectionnée. Le menu déroulant comprend les options suivantes : • Continuer Pour continuer la lecture du projet. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Pour retourner à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Pour aller à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Lorsque vous sélectionnez cette option, un nouveau champ s’affiche. Sélectionnez le numéro de la diapositive de destination. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Pour aller à une URL spécifique sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner une fenêtre pour l’URL. Pour ouvrir l’URL dans la même fenêtre (elle remplace la présentation), sélectionnez Courante. Pour ouvrir l’URL dans une nouvelle fenêtre, sélectionnez Nouvelle. • Ouvrir un autre projet Pour commencer à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner une fenêtre pour le projet. Pour ouvrir l’autre projet dans la même fenêtre (il remplace la présentation), sélectionnez Courante. Pour ouvrir l’autre projet dans une nouvelle fenêtre, sélectionnez Nouvelle. • Envoyer un e-mail à Pour ouvrir le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Lorsque vous sélectionnez cette option, une nouvelle boîte de dialogue s’affiche. Cliquez sur le bouton de navigation (…) pour entrer le JavaScript que vous voulez exécuter. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la section Définir la touche de raccourci : Sélectionner les touches Cliquez et utilisez les options pour spécifier une touche de raccourci pour cliquer à l’intérieur de la mini-diapositive de survol. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. Vous pouvez définir les options suivantes dans la section Durée : Afficher pendant Pour que la mini-diapositive de survol reste affichée sur la diapositive pendant toute la durée de la diapositive, sélectionnez Reste de la diapositive. Pour spécifier le nombre de secondes pendant lequel la minidiapositive de survol doit rester affichée sur la diapositive, sélectionnez Durée spécifique, puis saisissez une valeur. Apparaître après Spécifiez au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la mini-diapositive de survol s’affiche sur la diapositive. Retard de survol Spécifiez au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) la mini-diapositive s’affiche quand la souris passe sur la mini-diapositive de survol. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Transition :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 150 Effet Sélectionnez un effet de fondu ou aucun effet pour la mini-diapositive de survol. Cases d’apparition et disparition en fondu Définissez la durée (en secondes) pour les effets de fondu en saisissant une valeur. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la section Effets : Afficher la bordure à l’exécution Quand la souris passe sur la mini-diapositive de survol, une bordure s’affiche dans la couleur définie. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio. Utilisez ces paramètres si vous projetez de joindre un fichier audio à la mini-diapositive. Pour enregistrer et joindre un fichier audio, il vous faut de l’équipement supplémentaire. Les boutons suivants sont disponibles dans la section Audio : Lecture Pour lire le fichier son. Arrêter Pour arrêter le fichier son. Supprimer Pour supprimer le fichier son. Modifier Pour modifier un fichier son existant. Enregistrer nouveau Pour enregistrer un fichier son. Importer Pour importer un fichier existant sur le système. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque : Pour importer un fichier audio depuis la bibliothèque. Paramètres Pour définir les préférences d’enregistrement. Pour plus d’informations sur les préférences d’enregistrement, voir « Ajout de fichiers audio et vidéo », page 89 Cases d’apparition en fondu et disparition en fondu Définissez la durée (en secondes) pour les effets de fondu en saisissant une valeur. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Position en pixels : Haut et Gauche Saisissez une valeur dans ces champs pour définir la position de la mini-diapositive de survol sur la diapositive. Ce paramètre est remplacé si vous faites glisser la mini-diapositive de survol jusqu’à une nouvelle position. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Taille en pixels : Cases de largeur et de hauteur Saisissez une valeur dans ces cases pour définir la taille de la mini-diapositive de survol. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver le rapport hauteur/largeur pendant un redimensionnement. Pour modifier la forme de la mini-diapositive de survol, cliquez dessus avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Redessiner la forme dans le menu déroulant. Utilisez la souris pour dessiner une forme pour la mini-diapositive de survol. 5 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les propriétés à toutes les mini-diapositives de survol du projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 151 6 Cliquez sur Paramètres pour choisir d’appliquer toutes les propriétés ou uniquement les propriétés modifiées à la mini-diapositive de survol respective ou à toutes les diapositives. Pour sélectionner tous les objets d’une mini-diapositive, cliquez sur l’un d’entre eux avec le bouton droit de la souris et choisissez Tout sélectionner dans le menu déroulant.152 Chapitre 9 : Modification de la durée Le plan de montage chronologique d’Adobe Captivate permet d’organiser les objets et de contrôler leur durée avec précision dans les diapositives. Le plan de montage chronologique affiche un instantané d’une diapositive et de tous les objets qu’elle contient. Vous avez le contrôle total du moment où les objets apparaissent et vous pouvez même spécifier que les objets doivent apparaître simultanément. Par exemple, sur une diapositive contenant une légende, une zone de surbrillance et une animation, vous pouvez utiliser le plan de montage chronologique pour que la légende s’affiche en premier, puis la zone de surbrillance quatre secondes plus tard, et enfin l’animation deux secondes plus tard. Le plan de montage chronologique montre aussi tout l’audio associé à la diapositive et à ses objets, ce qui vous permet de synchroniser l’audio avec les objets. Le plan de montage chronologique est une façon facile d’afficher tous les objets d’une diapositive et les relations entre eux. Les principaux éléments du plan de montage chronologique sont les objets, l’en-tête et la tête de lecture. Les objets d’une diapositive sont affichés sous forme de barres dans le volet droit du plan de montage chronologique. L’en-tête dans la partie supérieure du plan de montage chronologique indique la durée en secondes (et portions de secondes). La tête de lecture indique le moment où la diapositive s’affiche. Placez le pointeur de la souris sur n’importe quelle barre dans le plan de montage chronologique et utilisez le message de conseil qui apparaît pour voir les détails concernant la durée de cet objet. Personnalisation de l’apparence du plan de montage chronologique Par défaut, le plan de montage s’affiche ancré dans la partie supérieure de la diapositive dans l’affichage Modifier. Cependant, vous pouvez personnaliser la façon dont il s’affiche. Par exemple, vous pouvez : • Ancrer le plan de montage dans la partie supérieure ou inférieure de la fenêtre principale de l’application. • Afficher le plan de montage chronologique dans sa propre fenêtre. • Masquer le plan de montage chronologique. • Modifier la hauteur du plan de montage chronologique pour augmenter ou diminuer l’espace exigé par le plan de montage chronologique. • Modifier le niveau du zoom. Remarque : Adobe Captivate mémorise la position du plan de montage chronologique (emplacement et taille). Si ce plan est affiché au moment de la fermeture d’Adobe Captivate, il s’affichera au même endroit lors de la prochaine ouverture du logiciel. Pour ancrer le plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier et le plan de montage. Si le plan de montage ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur le menu Afficher et sélectionnez Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. • Si le plan de montage est affiché dans une nouvelle fenêtre et si vous voulez l’ancrer, cliquez sur la barre de titre du plan de montage et faites-le glisser vers le bord supérieur ou inférieur de la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 153 • Si le plan de montage est affiché dans la partie supérieure de la diapositive et si vous voulez le placer dans la partie inférieure (ou vice versa), cliquez sur les quatre points verticaux à gauche de la flèche du plan de montage jusqu’à ce qu’une flèche à quatre pointes s’affiche. Ensuite, faites glisser le plan de montage vers un nouvel emplacement (vers la partie supérieure ou inférieure de la diapositive). Pour afficher le plan de montage chronologique dans une nouvelle fenêtre : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier et le plan de montage. Si le plan de montage ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur le menu Afficher et sélectionnez Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. 3 Placez la souris sur les quatre points verticaux à gauche de la flèche du plan de montage chronologique jusqu’à ce qu’une flèche à quatre pointes s’affiche. 4 Faites glisser le plan de montage chronologique légèrement vers la gauche. 5 Relâchez le bouton de la souris. Le plan de montage chronologique s’affiche dans une nouvelle fenêtre au-dessus de la fenêtre principale de l’application Adobe Captivate. Pour masquer le plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. 3 Dans le menu Afficher, sélectionnez Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. La coche en regard de l’option est supprimée et le plan de montage ne s’affiche pas dans l’affichage Modifier. Pour redimensionner le plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier et le plan de montage. Si le plan de montage ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur le menu Afficher et sélectionnez Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique est ancré à la fenêtre principale de l’application, faites glisser la barre séparant le plan de montage chronologique de la fenêtre de l’application. Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas ancré à la fenêtre principale de l’application, faites glisser le coin inférieur droit. Pour modifier le niveau du zoom : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier et le plan de montage. Si le plan de montage ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur le menu Afficher et sélectionnez Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. • Cliquez sur la règle du plan de montage et augmentez ou diminuez le niveau de zoom à l’aide de la molette de la souris. • Vous pouvez également modifier le niveau de zoom à l’aide des frappes de touche. Cliquez sur la règle puis appuyez sur Ctrl + [ pour diminuer le niveau de zoom, Ctrl + ] pour augmenter le niveau de zoom ou Ctrl + W pour définir le niveau de zoom de manière à ce que tous les objets tiennent dans la largeur actuelle du plan de montage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 154 Modification de l’ordre de calques des objets Le plan de montage chronologique affiche tous les objets d’une diapositive, comme les zones de clic, les légendes de texte, les zones de surbrillance, les déplacements de souris et l’audio. Les objets d’une diapositive sont affichés sous forme de barres dans le volet droit du plan de montage chronologique. Si des objets se superposent sur une diapositive, il est important de définir leur ordre de superposition sur le plan de montage chronologique de manière à contrôler les objets qui s’affichent avant les autres. Pour modifier l’ordre calques d’objets sur le plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant des objets. 3 Affichez le plan de montage chronologique en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas affiché, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher le plan de montage chronologique. 4 Déplacez la souris sur un des objets du plan de montage jusqu’à ce que la main s’affiche et faites glisser l’objet vers le haut ou vers le bas pour le repositionner. 5 Si deux objets se recouvrent sur la diapositive, vous devez sélectionner l’objet qui doit apparaître sur l’avant en définissant l’ordre de superposition. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène » de la diapositive. Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les objets à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres objets. Utilisez une des méthodes suivantes pour définir l’ordre de superposition. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, cliquez du bouton droit sur un objet de la diapositive et sélectionnez une des options d’ordre. Vous pouvez cliquer du bouton droit sur d’autres objets de la diapositive et modifier leur ordre. Premier plan Cette option place l’objet sélectionné au premier plan. Lors de la lecture du projet, cet objet s’affiche devant tous les autres. Arrière-plan Cette option envoie l’objet sélectionné à l’arrière-plan. Lors de la lecture du projet, cet objet s’affiche derrière tous les autres. Vers l’avant Cette option permet de déplacer l’objet d’un rang vers l’avant. Vers l’arrière Cette option permet de déplacer l’objet d’un rang vers l’arrière. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, sur le plan de montage chronologique, placez la souris sur un objet jusqu’à ce que la main s’affiche et faites glisser l’objet vers le haut ou vers le bas pour modifier sa position dans l’ordre de superposition. Le déplacement d’un objet plus haut dans l’ordre de superposition le déplace vers l’avant de la scène, alors que le déplacement d’un objet plus bas le déplace vers l’arrière de la scène. Vous pouvez facilement ajuster le niveau de zoom du plan de montage chronologique. Cliquez sur la règle du plan de montage et augmentez ou diminuez le niveau de zoom à l’aide de la molette de la souris. Vous pouvez également modifier le niveau de zoom à l’aide des frappes de touche. Cliquez sur la règle puis appuyez sur Ctrl + [ pour diminuer le niveau de zoom, Ctrl + ] pour augmenter le niveau de zoom ou Ctrl + W pour définir le niveau de zoom de manière à ce que tous les objets tiennent dans la largeur actuelle du plan de montage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 155 Masquage et verrouillage des calques d’objets Le plan de montage chronologique vous permet de verrouiller ou de masquer des calques d’objets individuels sur une diapositive. Lorsqu’il y a plusieurs objets sur une diapositive, masquer un calque d’objet facilite la modification de la diapositive. Pour afficher ou masquer un calque d’objet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. 4 Sur la gauche de la barre qui représente le calque d’objet que vous voulez masquer ou afficher, cliquez sur la colonne qui se trouve sous le symbole d’œil. Si l’objet était affiché, il disparaît de la diapositive et un X apparaît dans la colonne. Si l’objet était masqué, il apparaît dans la diapositive et le X disparaît de la colonne. 5 Lorsque vous masquez un calque d’objet, il n’est masqué que sur la scène. Vous pouvez toujours afficher le calque lors de sa prévisualisation ou de sa publication. Pour verrouiller ou déverrouiller un calque d’objet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. 4 Sur la gauche de la barre qui représente le calque d’objet que vous voulez verrouiller ou déverrouiller, cliquez sur la colonne qui se trouve sous le symbole de verrou. Si l’objet était déverrouillé, un symbole de verrou apparaît dans la colonne et vous ne pouvez plus sélectionner ni modifier l’objet sur la diapositive. Si l’objet était verrouillé, le symbole de verrou disparaît de la colonne et vous pouvez sélectionner et modifier l’objet sur la diapositive. Aperçu d’une diapositive à l’aide de la tête de lecture La tête de lecture se déplace dans le plan de montage chronologique pour indiquer la manière dont la diapositive s’affiche dans le projet. Lorsqu’une mini-diapositive est sélectionnée, le plan de montage chronologique correspond à cette mini-diapositive. C’est une manière rapide et efficace de prévisualiser une diapositive et de vérifier la durée des objets. L’en-tête du plan de montage affiche la durée, en secondes (1s pour 1 seconde, 2s pour 2 secondes, etc.), ce qui vous permet de voir exactement quand les objets s’affichent. Pour prévisualiser une diapositive à l’aide de la tête de lecture : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche située sur la barre du plan de montage. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 156 4 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Faites glisser la tête de lecture vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Lorsque vous déplacez la tête de lecture, les objets s’affichent et disparaissent de la même manière que lorsque l’utilisateur visionnera la diapositive. Cette technique vous permet de contrôler le rythme et de visionner la diapositive à la vitesse voulue, que ce soit très lentement ou très rapidement. • Lorsque la tête de lecture se trouve dans un emplacement du plan de montage, appuyez sur la barre d’espace ou sur F3 pour commencer à lire la diapositive. • Lorsque la tête de lecture se trouve dans un emplacement du plan de montage, appuyez sur Lecture dans le coin inférieur gauche du plan de montage. Pour terminer la lecture, appuyez sur Arrêt. Pour la suspendre, appuyez sur Pause. Modification de la durée d’une diapositive La durée d’affichage de chaque diapositive est un élément tout aussi important que la longueur totale du projet. Les utilisateurs doivent impérativement avoir assez de temps pour lire et comprendre les informations figurant à l’écran. Vous pouvez apporter de nombreuses modifications à la durée d’une diapositive à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique, mais il est également utile de définir au bout de combien de temps la diapositive s’affiche. Remarque : La durée d’une diapositive ne peut pas être plus courte que l’objet le plus long. Si, par exemple, vous avez une diapositive avec une légende de 6 secondes, il est impossible de définir une durée de 4 secondes pour cette diapositive. Pour modifier la durée d’une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive dont vous voulez modifier la durée. Remarque : Le plan de montage chronologique est désactivé pour les diapositives des questions aléatoires. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. 4 La durée de la diapositive se trouve dans un objet du plan de montage chronologique nommé « Diapositive ». Pour raccourcir ou prolonger la durée de lecture de la diapositive, déplacez le pointeur de la souris sur le bord droit de l’objet Diapositive jusqu’à ce que le pointeur de redimensionnement s’affiche ; appuyez sur le bouton de la souris, maintenez-le enfoncé et faites glisser le bord vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Adobe Captivate affiche la durée d’affichage de la diapositive entre parenthèses, à côté du mot Diapositive. La durée d’affichage maximale d’une diapositive est d’une heure (3 600 secondes). Remarque : Pour modifier la durée d’une mini-diapositive, sélectionnez-la et suivez la même procédure que pour une diapositive. La durée de la mini-diapositive se trouve dans un objet du plan de montage chronologique nommé « Minidiapositive ».ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 157 Définition automatique de la vitesse des légendes Adobe Captivate dispose d’une option qui calcule automatiquement la durée des légendes. Cette option par défaut utilise la longueur du texte de la légende pour déterminer la durée d’affichage de la légende. Pour définir automatiquement la vitesse de la légende : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des légendes. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Calculer la durée des légendes. Une coche s’affiche en regard de l’option lorsqu’elle est sélectionnée. Modification de la vitesse des frappes de touches Vous pouvez déterminer si les frappes de touches sont lues lentement ou rapidement dans un projet. Si le projet a de nombreuses frappes de touches, l’augmentation de la vitesse augmentera le rythme du projet. Cependant, si les frappes de touches sont importantes dans le projet, il peut être souhaitable de les lire lentement de manière à ce que les utilisateurs aient le temps de bien les voir. Modifiez la vitesse des frappes de touches à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique. Pour modifier la vitesse des frappes de touches : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des frappes de touches. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant des frappes de touches. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà affiché, agrandissez-le en cliquant sur la flèche à gauche des mots Plan de montage chronologique. 4 Les frappes de touches sont contenues dans un objet du plan de montage chronologique appelé « Frappe ». Pour augmenter ou diminuer la vitesse des frappes de touches, placez le pointeur de la souris sur le bord droit de l’objet Frappe jusqu’à ce que le pointeur de redimensionnement s’affiche ; appuyez sur le bouton de la souris, maintenez-le enfoncé et faites glisser le bord vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Modification de la vitesse du pointeur de la souris Vous déterminez la vitesse à laquelle la souris se déplace dans les diapositives d’un projet. L’augmentation de la vitesse du pointeur de la souris accélère la lecture du projet. Toutefois, si les déplacements de souris sont compliqués, il peut être souhaitable de ralentir la vitesse de la souris pour que les utilisateurs puissent voir tous les déplacements. Pour modifier la vitesse du pointeur de la souris : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant un déplacement de souris. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà affiché, agrandissez-le en cliquant sur la flèche à gauche des mots Plan de montage chronologique.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 158 4 Le déplacement de souris se trouve dans un objet du plan de montage chronologique nommé « Souris ». Pour raccourcir ou prolonger le temps nécessaire pour lire le déplacement de la souris, cliquez sur le bord gauche de l’objet Souris jusqu’à ce que le pointeur de redimensionnement s’affiche ; appuyez sur le bouton de la souris, maintenez-le enfoncé et faites glisser le bord vers la gauche ou vers la droite. Modification de la durée d’un objet Vous pouvez modifier la durée d’affichage d’un objet (comme une légende, une zone de texte ou une image) dans une diapositive. Cette fonction peut se révéler utile à plus d’un titre. Par exemple, il se peut que vous souhaitiez définir la durée précise d’un objet lorsque vous synchronisez des commentaires et une zone de surbrillance. Il peut être souhaitable d’afficher la zone de surbrillance uniquement lorsque la voix du commentateur dit : « entrez la date ici ». Vous pouvez modifier la durée d’un objet en définissant sa durée d’affichage ou à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique. Pour modifier la durée d’un objet en définissant sa durée d’affichage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant des objets. 3 Double-cliquez sur l’objet dont voulez définir la durée. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options. 5 Dans la zone Afficher pendant, sélectionnez une des options suivantes : durée spécifique Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir un nombre correspondant à la durée (en secondes) pendant laquelle l’objet sera affiché à l’écran. reste de la diapositive Si vous sélectionnez Reste de la diapositive pour un objet, puis augmentez la durée de lecture de la diapositive, la durée de l’objet sera modifiée pour correspondre à la nouvelle durée de la diapositive. reste du projet Sélectionnez cette option si vous souhaitez que l’objet soit affiché pendant le reste du projet à partir de cette diapositive. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Pour modifier la durée d’un objet à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive contenant des objets. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. 4 Modifiez la durée des objets selon vos besoins. • Pour modifier le moment et la durée d’affichage d’un objet, déplacez la souris sur le bord gauche ou droit de l’objet du plan de montage jusqu’à ce que le curseur de redimensionnement s’affiche ; appuyez sur le bouton de la souris, maintenez-le enfoncé et faites glisser le bord gauche ou droit. • Pour que deux objets s’affichent en même temps, alignez leurs bords gauches et droits. Par exemple, vous pouvez faire en sorte qu’une zone de surbrillance s’affiche en même temps qu’une image pour que la zone de surbrillance s’affiche sur l’image.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 159 • Pour modifier la durée d’affichage des objets interactifs (comme les zones de saisie de texte, les zones de clic et les boutons), placez le pointeur de la souris sur la ligne entre Actif et Inactif sur la barre jusqu’à ce que la poignée de la barre de défilement apparaisse. Faites glisser la barre de défilement pour modifier la durée d’affichage. Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets et les déplacer en même temps. Maintenez enfoncée la touche MAJ et cliquez sur des objets pour sélectionner plusieurs objets superposés consécutifs dans le plan de montage. Pour sélectionner des objets non consécutifs, maintenez enfoncée la touche Ctrl et cliquez sur les objets à déplacer. Vous pouvez facilement ajuster le niveau de zoom du plan de montage chronologique. Cliquez sur la règle du plan de montage et augmentez ou diminuez le niveau de zoom à l’aide de la molette de la souris. Vous pouvez également modifier le niveau de zoom à l’aide des frappes de touche. Cliquez sur la règle puis appuyez sur Ctrl + [ pour diminuer le niveau de zoom, Ctrl + ] pour augmenter le niveau de zoom ou Ctrl + W pour définir le niveau de zoom de manière à ce que tous les objets tiennent dans la largeur actuelle du plan de montage. Contrôle des projets Adobe Captivate avec des variables Vous pouvez contrôler les projets Adobe Captivate avec des variables qui peuvent être définies sur le plan de montage chronologique. Le contrôle d’un projet avec des variables est utile pour créer une commande de lecture personnalisée SWF ou pour placer un projet dans un fichier FLA Flash. L’utilisation de variables est une fonctionnalité avancée pour les utilisateurs disposant d’une connaissance solide de Flash. Pour contrôler le projet par le biais du fichier d’habillage, ajoutez le préfixe cpSkinLoader_mc aux variables. Les commandes suivantes sont utilisées par les commandes de lecture et l’aperçu : rdcmndPrevious définir à 1 pour aller à la diapositive précédente rdcmndNextSlide définir à 1 pour aller à la diapositive suivante rdcmndPause définir à 1 pour mettre le projet en pause rdcmndResume définir à 1 pour reprendre la lecture d’un projet rdcmndRewindAndStop définir à 1 pour rembobiner et arrêter la lecture du projet rdcmndRewindAndPlay définir à 1 pour rembobiner et lire le projet rdcmndGotoFrame| aller à une image spécifique rdcmndExit définir à 1 pour quitter rdcmndInfo afficher la fenêtre d’informationsADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 160 Les variables suivantes donnent les informations utilisées par les commandes de lecture et l’aperçu : rdinfoFrameCount nombre total d’images swf dans le projet (il ne s’agit pas du nombre d’images dans le plan de montage principal, mais de la somme de toutes les images des diapositives) rdinfoSlidesInProject nombre de diapositives du projet (y compris les diapositives masquées) rdinfoCurrentFrame image actuelle (de 1 à rdinfoFrameCount lorsque vous lisez le projet) rdinfoCurrentSlide diapositive en cours de lecture (en base zéro) rdinfoSlideCount nombre de diapositives du projet (sans compter les diapositives masquées) rdIsMainMovie peut être utilisé pour vérifier si le fichier SWF correspond au projet Adobe Captivate principal161 Chapitre 10 : Diapositives Les projets Adobe Captivate se composent de diapositives. Une diapositive correspond à un « écran » d’un projet. A mesure que chaque diapositive s’affiche, le projet se déroule et chaque action (comme un déplacement de souris) apparaît de façon fluide d’une diapositive à l’autre. Vous pouvez combiner le nombre de diapositives que vous voulez pour créer un projet. La plupart des travaux réalisés avec Adobe Captivate s’effectuent principalement au niveau des diapositives. En fait, après avoir défini certaines préférences et options pour le projet et enregistré l’action à l’écran, vous serez probablement amené à travailler au niveau des diapositives avant d’afficher votre projet en aperçu et de le publier. Il existe différents types de diapositives que vous pouvez inclure dans vos projets Adobe Captivate : • Les diapositives d’image contiennent une image au format JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF ou WMF. • Les diapositives vides sont totalement vides. Elles sont utiles pour l’ajout de graphiques, remerciements, logos, etc. • Les diapositives de questions contiennent les fonctionnalités de quiz. Elles peuvent être totalement interactives et comporter des questions, des réponses et des actions. • Les diapositives PowerPoint sont des diapositives individuelles importées depuis une présentation PowerPoint. • Les diapositives d’animation contiennent une animation au format SWF, GIF ou AVI. Ajout de diapositives à un projet Adobe Captivate propose de nombreuses options pour l’ajout de diapositives à un projet, notamment l’enregistrement, l’importation et la copie. Vous pouvez ajouter différents types de diapositives, comme les diapositives vides, d’image, de quiz ou d’animation. Appuyez sur Ctrl+Maj+G et spécifiez un numéro de diapositive dans la boîte de dialogue Aller à la diapositive pour accéder directement à la diapositive ainsi spécifiée. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser Modifier > Aller à la diapositive pour vous déplacer jusqu’à la diapositive choisie. Enregistrement de diapositives supplémentaires pour un projet Il peut arriver, après avoir enregistré un projet Adobe Captivate et commencé à travailler sur les diapositives, que vous constatiez qu’il vous en manque un certain nombre. Vous n’avez pas besoin de réenregistrer le projet entier. Vous pouvez juste enregistrer quelques actions. Adobe Captivate vous permet d’enregistrer de nouvelles diapositives et de les insérer dans un projet existant. Pour enregistrer de nouvelles diapositives : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dans lequel vous souhaitez enregistrer et insérer de nouvelles diapositives. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Diapositives supplémentaires. 3 Choisissez où vous voulez ajouter les nouvelles diapositives. Vous pouvez ajouter de nouvelles diapositives à la fin du projet ou cliquer sur une diapositive de la liste et ajouter de nouvelles diapositives après la diapositive sélectionnée. 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 162 5 La fenêtre d’enregistrement s’affiche. 6 Sélectionnez les options selon vos besoins. Par exemple, si vous voulez enregistrer une application ouverte, cliquez sur le menu déroulant à côté de Sélectionner une fenêtre à enregistrer (facultatif) et choisissez l’application. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Paramètres et définir de nombreuses options d’enregistrement. Remarque : Vous pouvez positionner la zone de capture où vous voulez sur votre écran. Cependant, vous ne pouvez pas la redimensionner car sa taille est la même que celle du projet auquel vous ajoutez les diapositives. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Enregistrer. 8 Enregistrez les nouvelles diapositives. 9 Une fois que vous avez fini l’enregistrement, appuyez sur Fin (ou une autre combinaison de touches que vous avez désignée) sur le clavier pour arrêter l’enregistrement. Les nouvelles diapositives enregistrées sont insérées dans votre projet à l’emplacement spécifié. Importation de diapositives Adobe Captivate vous permet d’importer des diapositives d’un projet Adobe Captivate dans un autre. Les temps de développement peuvent s’en trouver sensiblement réduits. Pour importer des diapositives d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers un autre : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate auquel vous voulez ajouter des diapositives existantes. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > des diapositives/objets. 3 Sélectionnez le projet comportant les diapositives à importer et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Importer un projet s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez les diapositives que vous voulez importer dans le projet actuel. Dans Importer, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez Diapo et objets, Diapositive ou Objets. Utilisez la barre de défilement, la flèche vers la gauche et la flèche vers la droite pour naviguer dans les diapositives du projet. Cliquez sur Tout sélectionner ou Tout effacer et utilisez les options du menu déroulant pour sélectionner ou effacer toutes les diapositives ou tous les objets. 5 Dans la zone Placer les objets sur, sélectionnez la diapositive sur laquelle vous souhaitez placer les objets. Remarque : Ce champ est activé si vous avez choisi l’option Objets à l’étape 4. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Les diapositives sont ajoutées au projet ouvert. 7 Déplacez les nouvelles diapositives selon vos besoins. Supprimez les diapositives dont vous n’avez pas besoin. Copie et collage des diapositives Vous pouvez copier et coller des diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Modifier (avec les vignettes activées dans la Bande de film). Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. Pour copier une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 163 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive à copier. 3 Sélectionnez Copier la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Pour coller une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive après laquelle vous souhaitez qu’apparaissent la ou les nouvelles diapositives. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez coller la diapositive copiée comme Diapositive 6 de votre projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 5 actuelle. 3 Sélectionnez Coller la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Copie et collage des diapositives depuis d’autres projets Vous pouvez copier et coller des diapositives depuis d’autres projets. Cela peut vous permettre de gagner énormément de temps. Par exemple, si vous avez déjà une diapositive détaillée avec des légendes contenant du texte réutilisable, vous pouvez simplement copier et coller cette diapositive dans les projets que vous créez. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. Pour copier une diapositive depuis un autre projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate contenant la diapositive que vous voulez copier. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur la diapositive. 3 Sélectionnez Copier la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Pour coller une diapositive depuis un autre projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dans lequel vous voulez ajouter la diapositive copiée aux étapes précédentes. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive après laquelle vous souhaitez qu’apparaissent la ou les nouvelles diapositives. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez coller la diapositive copiée comme Diapositive 6 de votre projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 5 actuelle. 3 Sélectionnez Coller la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Insertion de diapositives vides Vous pouvez insérer une diapositive vide dans un projet afin de disposer d’une diapositive « vierge ». Les diapositives vides sont utiles pour intégrer des remerciements, des logos et d’autre texte dans un projet. Pour insérer une diapositive vide : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive après laquelle vous souhaitez qu’apparaissent la ou les nouvelles diapositives vides. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez insérer l’image vide comme diapositive 6 de votre projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 5 actuelle. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive vide. La nouvelle diapositive est ajoutée à votre projet. Vous pouvez modifier et travailler avec la nouvelle diapositive comme avec les autres diapositives du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 164 Insertion d’images en tant que diapositives Vous pouvez insérer des images existantes (JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF, POT ou WMF) en tant que diapositives dans des projets Adobe Captivate. Les diapositives d’images sont utiles dans de nombreux types de projets, principalement les présentations de produits ou de sites Web. Les diapositives d’images peuvent également s’avérer utiles lorsque vous utilisez une image telle qu’un logo d’entreprise en tant que diapositive d’introduction du projet. Pour insérer une image en tant que diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive après laquelle vous souhaitez qu’apparaissent la ou les nouvelles diapositives d’images. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez insérer l’image comme diapositive 6 de votre projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 5 actuelle. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive > Diapositive d’images. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez une image dans la liste ou parcourez les dossiers pour sélectionner une autre image. Cliquez sur Ouvrir. 5 (Facultatif) Le logiciel peut vous proposer de recadrer ou de mettre l’image à l’échelle. Recadrer Cette option permet de centrer l’image et d’en rogner les bords afin qu’elle tienne dans la zone de capture. Redimensionner Cette option permet de redimensionner l’image pour créer une image redimensionnée de bonne qualité qui tient dans la zone de capture. La diapositive d’image est ajoutée au projet. Vous pouvez créer plusieurs diapositives d’images en une seule fois en maintenant la touche Maj ou Ctrl enfoncée tout en sélectionnant les images dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir. Vous pouvez aussi créer une diapositive d’image en faisant glisser une image de l’Explorateur Windows vers la Bande de film. Ajout de diapositives d’animation Si vous avez un fichier SWF, AVI ou un fichier GIF animé, vous pouvez ajouter ce fichier à votre projet Adobe Captivate sous forme d’une nouvelle diapositive. C’est une manière rapide et facile de rendre votre projet plus informatif en utilisant le contenu que vous avez déjà créé. Remarque : L’ajout d’une animation sous la forme d’une diapositive est plus approprié avec les fichiers d’animation plus volumineux. Pour ajouter une diapositive d’animation : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Diapositive > Diapositive d’animation. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 3 Naviguez vers le fichier d’animation que vous voulez insérer (SWF, AVI ou GIF animé) et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La diapositive d’animation générée est ajoutée au projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 165 Remarque : Il est important de définir la vitesse de défilement correcte. Tous les fichiers d’animation importés sont lus à la vitesse sélectionnée dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet, quelle que soit la vitesse définie avant l’importation du fichier. Le paramètre par défaut est de 30 images Flash par seconde et est approprié dans la plupart des cas. Il est possible que vous deviez modifier la vitesse si vous intégrez votre fichier Adobe Captivate SWF dans un autre fichier SWF dont la vitesse de défilement est différente de 30. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez une diapositive d’animation, la durée d’affichage de la diapositive dans votre projet final est la même que la durée du fichier d’animation. Par exemple, si le fichier d’animation que vous utilisez pour créer une nouvelle diapositive d’animation est uniquement d’une durée de 1,2 secondes, la diapositive d’animation s’affichera pendant 1,2 secondes. Pour modifier la durée d’affichage de la diapositive, ouvrez la diapositive en affichage Modifier, sélectionnez le menu Diapositive, sélectionnez Propriétés et entrez un nouveau nombre de secondes dans la case Durée d’affichage. Vous pouvez également modifier la durée d’affichage de la diapositive à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique. Création de groupes de diapositives Lorsque le nombre de diapositives devient ingérable, vous pouvez regrouper les diapositives. En développant et en réduisant les groupes, vous pouvez visualiser des sous-ensembles de diapositives plutôt que toutes les diapositives en même temps. Les groupes permettent également d’obtenir un aperçu utile du projet et ils constituent un moyen pratique de supprimer ou de masquer plusieurs diapositives en même temps (des diapositives que vous ne souhaitez pas publier, par exemple). Pour faciliter l’association des diapositives à leur groupe, vous pouvez attribuer aux diapositives appartenant à un même groupe la même couleur de bordure. La couleur est visible dans les trois modes d’affichage (Scénarimage, Modifier et Embranchement), mais elle n’apparaît pas lorsque le projet est exécuté. Pour créer un groupe de diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur une diapositive que vous souhaitez affecter à un groupe puis, tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée, sélectionnez les autres diapositives du groupe. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Groupe > Créer. Les diapositives sélectionnées sont rassemblées dans une même diapositive de groupe affichant leur numéro et leur description. Pour modifier le nom ou la couleur de bordure d’un groupe de diapositives : 1 Cliquez sur un groupe de diapositives. 2 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Groupe > Modifier. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés du groupe de diapositives s’affiche. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Couleur, sélectionnez une couleur pour toutes les diapositives du groupe. Cette couleur n’est pas affichée lorsque le projet est exécuté. 4 Dans le champ Titre, tapez le nom du groupe. Ce titre apparaît au bas de la diapositive de groupe. 5 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 166 Pour développer ou réduire un groupe de diapositives : 1 Cliquez sur un groupe de diapositives. 2 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Groupe > Développer ou Diapositive > Groupe > Réduire. Pour aller plus vite, vous pouvez également cliquer sur l’icône en forme de flèche dans la partie supérieure de la diapositive de groupe. Pour dissocier des diapositives : 1 Sélectionnez un groupe de diapositives. 2 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Groupe > Supprimer. Modification des diapositives Après avoir enregistré, importé, créé ou copié des diapositives dans un projet Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez les modifier de diverses façons. Duplication des diapositives Vous pouvez dupliquer des diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Modifier (avec la Bande de film activée). La duplication de diapositives est un moyen facile d’agrandir vos projets. Par exemple, si vous avez déjà créé une diapositive avec une certaine couleur d’arrière-plan, mise en forme, légende et zone de clic, il vous suffit de dupliquer cette diapositive et de modifier quelques éléments ou le texte pour ajouter davantage d’informations à votre projet. Pour dupliquer des diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur la diapositive à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Dupliquer la diapositive. • Sélectionnez une diapositive et appuyez sur Ctrl+D. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. La ou les diapositives sélectionnées sont dupliquées et placées dans le projet. Vous pouvez modifier et travailler avec les nouvelles diapositives comme avec les diapositives d’origine. Copie de diapositives dans le Presse-papiers Adobe Captivate permet de facilement copier une diapositive dans le Presse-papiers. Vous pouvez ensuite coller la diapositive dans un programme d’édition graphique (par exemple Fireworks ou PhotoShop), modifier la diapositive, puis la coller de nouveau dans Adobe Captivate. Cette fonctionnalité est utile, surtout si vous n’avez pas beaucoup de temps et si vous avez besoin d’apporter une légère modification à une diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 167 Par exemple, imaginons que vous ayez presque terminé votre projet. Vous vous rendez compte qu’une diapositive, une capture d’écran d’un navigateur Web, contient une ligne d’adresse qui est en fait une adresse interne du serveur de la société. Pour résoudre rapidement le problème, copiez la diapositive dans le Presse-papiers, ouvrez la diapositive dans Fireworks, « effacez » les informations du champ d’adresse en les peignant avec la couleur blanche, enregistrez la diapositive sous forme d’image (par exemple, JPEG), puis, depuis Adobe Captivate, collez l’image dans le projet. Lorsque vous modifiez des diapositives de cette manière, vous n’avez pas besoin de les réenregistrer. Pour copier une diapositive dans le Presse-papiers : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Sur la diapositive, sélectionnez l’image que vous voulez copier sous forme de bitmap. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Copier dans le Presse-papiers comme bitmap. 4 Ouvrez un programme graphique et collez la diapositive dans le programme en cliquant sur Ctrl+V. 5 Apportez les modifications nécessaires à la diapositive. 6 Copiez l’image dans le programme graphique en cliquant sur Ctrl+C afin d’enregistrer l’image dans le Pressepapiers. 7 Sélectionnez Modifier > Coller en tant qu’image. La nouvelle diapositive mise à jour (sous forme d’image) est placée dans le projet. Si la diapositive d’origine contenait des objets comme des légendes ou des zones de surbrillance, ils s’affichent sur la nouvelle diapositive. Dans Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez modifier les images d’arrière-plan directement à partir de la bibliothèque. Pour modifier une image d’arrière-plan, dans la bibliothèque, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’image que vous voulez modifier et sélectionnez Modifier avec mspaint ou Modifier avec pour utiliser une autre application de modification d’images. Modification de l’ordre des diapositives Vous pouvez aisément modifier l’ordre des diapositives une fois un projet enregistré. Vous pouvez modifier l’ordre des diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Modifier (avec la Bande de film). Il est parfois plus facile de déplacer les diapositives et de se souvenir de ce qu’il y a dessus si vous avez affecté des étiquettes aux diapositives. Ces étiquettes sont des titres courts qui permettent d’identifier la diapositive plus spécifiquement qu’un simple numéro. Pour modifier l’ordre des diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur la diapositive que vous souhaitez déplacer en maintenant le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé. 3 Faites glisser la diapositive vers un nouvel emplacement et relâchez le bouton de la souris. Pour modifier l’ordre des diapositives avec la bande de film dans l’affichage Modifier : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Modifier. 3 Cliquez sur la diapositive de la bande de film que vous souhaitez déplacer en maintenant le bouton gauche de la souris enfoncé. 4 Faites glisser la diapositive vers un nouvel emplacement de la bande de film et relâchez le bouton de la souris.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 168 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou dans la bande de film, pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. Modification de la navigation dans les diapositives Vous disposez de nombreuses options de navigation dans les diapositives de votre projet. L’option de navigation de chaque diapositive détermine ce qui se produit une fois la lecture de cette diapositive terminée. Vous pouvez choisir : • Aller à la diapositive précédente • Aller à la diapositive suivante • Aller à la diapositive • Ouvrir URL ou fichier • Ouvrir un autre projet • Envoyer un e-mail à • Exécuter JavaScript Pour modifier la navigation d’une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive dont vous voulez modifier la navigation. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Propriétés. 4 Sélectionnez l’option de navigation désirée dans le menu déroulant Navigation. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Vous pouvez également modifier la navigation pour plusieurs diapositives en les sélectionnant dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en cliquant sur les diapositives que vous voulez modifier. Une fois les diapositives sélectionnées, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’une d’entre elles et cliquez sur Propriétés dans le menu Diapositive. Modification de la couleur des diapositives Les diapositives peuvent être de n’importe quelle couleur que vous sélectionnez. Cependant, la couleur d’une diapositive peut dépendre du type de diapositive ainsi que de la façon dont elle a été capturée. Par exemple, si vous définissez la couleur d’arrière-plan pour un projet, la couleur d’arrière-plan est affectée à toutes les nouvelles diapositives vides. Vous pouvez modifier la couleur d’une diapositive en modifiant ses propriétés. Pour modifier la couleur d’une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive dont vous voulez modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive s’affiche. 4 Dans la section Paramètres de la diapositive, à côté de Couleur, sélectionnez Personnaliser et cliquez sur la case de couleurs. 5 Sélectionnez une couleur :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 169 • Choisissez une couleur dans la palette de base. • Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour créer une couleur personnalisée. • Cliquez sur l’icône de pipette pour sélectionner et copier n’importe quelle couleur sur votre écran. • Dans le champ texte, entrez la valeur de la couleur de votre choix et appuyez sur Entrée. 6 Si vous voulez appliquer la couleur à toutes les diapositives, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout, puis cliquez sur Paramètres pour choisir comment appliquer la modification. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Pour utiliser la couleur du projet sur une diapositive, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive (dans le menu Diapositive, cliquez sur Propriétés). Dans la section Couleur, cliquez sur Projet. Pour modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan d’un projet, sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences, puis cliquez sur Paramètres dans le menu Projet. Dans le panneau Projet sur la droite, sélectionnez la couleur d’arrière-plan du projet dans Couleur d’arrière-plan du projet. Création des étiquettes de diapositive Les étiquettes de diapositive sont des titres courts que vous affectez à chaque diapositive. Il est souvent plus facile de déplacer des diapositives et de se souvenir de ce qu’elles contiennent si vous leur affectez une étiquette au lieu d’un simple numéro. Lorsque vous ajoutez une étiquette à une diapositive, l’étiquette s’affiche sous la diapositive lorsque vous visionnez les diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou dans la bande de film. Si un déplacement de souris ou de l’audio est associé à la diapositive, une icône de souris ou de son s’affiche juste après l’étiquette de la diapositive. Pour ajouter une étiquette à une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une étiquette. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Propriétés. 4 Dans Etiquette, tapez une courte description de la diapositive. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Création des annotations de diapositive Vous pouvez créer et enregistrer des annotations concernant des diapositives spécifiques. Ces annotations ne sont pas visibles par les utilisateurs (ceux qui visionnent votre projet), mais sont un très bon outil d’organisation pour les auteurs de projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez ajouter et modifier des annotations de diapositives dans le volet d’annotations de la diapositive, qui est disponible dans les affichages Scénarimage, Modifier et Embranchement, au bas de la fenêtre Adobe Captivate. Pour ouvrir le volet d’annotations de la diapositive, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher les annotations de la diapositive. Le volet d’annotations de la diapositive s’affiche au bas de la fenêtre Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez aussi afficher les annotations de diapositive dans les Propriétés de la diapositive, dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio (sous Scripts), et si vous publiez des documents (sélectionnez l’option Annotations de la diapositive). Les annotations de diapositive sont utiles dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio car vous pouvez écrire des commentaires dans la zone d’annotation et les lire directement lors de l’enregistrement. Si vous voulez exporter votre projet vers Word pour créer des documents, vous avez la possibilité d’inclure les annotations de diapositive dans le document. Cela peut s’avérer très utile si vous créez une version au format Word de votre projet pour permettre à d’autres personnes de le consulter pour donner leur avis et si vous voulez offrir aux personnes qui visionnent votre projet davantage d’informations sur certaines diapositives. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 170 Une fois que vous avez créé des annotations pour une diapositive, le bouton Annotations de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive s’affiche en caractères gras pour indiquer que la diapositive contient des annotations. Pour créer une annotation : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher les annotations de la diapositive. Le volet d’annotations de la diapositive s’affiche au bas de la fenêtre Adobe Captivate. 3 Cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une annotation. 4 Cliquez sur le volet d’annotations de la diapositive, là où vous pouvez voir « Cliquer pour ajouter des annotations relatives à la diapositive sélectionnée ». 5 Tapez les annotations de la diapositive. 6 Cliquez sur la diapositive suivante à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une annotation ; les annotations sont enregistrées automatiquement. Ajout de texte à une diapositive Lorsque vous modifiez un projet, il peut arriver que vous vouliez ajouter du texte à une diapositive, sans pour autant afficher le texte comme une légende de texte sur la diapositive. Il existe un moyen facile d’ajouter du texte à une diapositive. Il vous suffit d’ajouter une légende de texte transparente. Pour créer une légende de texte transparente : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une légende de texte transparente. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Légende de texte. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle légende de texte s’affiche. 4 Dans Type de légende, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez [transparent]. 5 Modifiez les autres options de la légende de texte si nécessaire. Police Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner une police de caractères pour la légende de texte. Taille Cliquez pour sélectionner une taille de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Couleur Cliquez sur la case de couleur pour sélectionner une couleur de police de caractères pour le texte de la légende. Surbrillance Cliquez sur l’icône de zone de surbrillance et choisissez une couleur de mise en surbrillance du texte dans le menu déroulant Couleur. Style de légende (Il n’y a qu’un style de légende de texte pour les légendes transparentes car seul le texte s’affiche.) Symbole Cliquez sur l’icône du symbole pour insérer un symbole dans le texte. Options d’affichage Selon vos besoins, définissez les options d’affichage supplémentaires telles que gras, italique, souligné et justifié. Tapez le texte de la légende ici Entrez le texte de la légende tel que vous souhaitez qu’il s’affiche. Appliquer à tout Permet d’appliquer les propriétés à toutes les légendes du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 171 Sélectionnez cette option pour appliquer les modifications apportées à toutes les légendes de texte du projet. Les propriétés appliquées à toutes les légendes de texte sont le style de la légende, le type de police, la taille de la police, la couleur de la police et la transition. Le texte et les propriétés de texte (gras, centre, etc.) et la durée d’affichage ne sont pas appliqués à toutes les légendes de texte, mais restent définis pour chaque légende de texte. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Si vous créez une légende transparente, évitez d’utiliser du texte souligné. Pour ajouter correctement un soulignement dans des légendes transparentes, il faut utiliser une méthode d’affichage de police qui risque de diminuer la qualité du texte. Modification d’un texte enregistré sur une diapositive Lorsque vous enregistrez le texte que vous êtes en train de taper, une nouvelle diapositive est créée pour chaque saut de ligne. Chaque ligne de texte tapé est traitée comme un objet à part entière et apparaît sur un calque séparé dans le plan de montage chronologique. Vous pouvez remplacer le texte enregistré sur une diapositive par du nouveau texte avec des effets de frappe. Par exemple, si vous avez enregistré du texte en train d’être tapé dans un programme d’édition et si vous voulez changer le texte enregistré sur la diapositive ultérieurement, vous pouvez le faire à l’aide de cette option. Avant d’enregistrer le texte tapé : • Sélectionnez le mode Démonstration dans la fenêtre Enregistrement. • Sélectionnez Enregistrer les frappes de touches dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour sélectionner Enregistrer les frappes de touches dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences : 1 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 2 Dans le panneau Catégorie, agrandissez Enregistrement et sélectionnez Paramètres. 3 Sélectionnez Enregistrer les frappes de touches dans le panneau Enregistrement. Pour remplacer une partie de texte sur une diapositive enregistrée : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur le calque Frappe du plan de montage chronologique et sélectionnez Remplacer par une animation de texte. La boîte de dialogue Animation de texte s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez une option dans le menu Effets : Saisie de texte Permet de lire le texte sans son de frappe. Frappe avec son Permet de lire le texte avec un son de frappe. 4 Dans le champ Texte, tapez le texte de remplacement, puis cliquez sur OK. Le texte sur la diapositive est remplacé par le texte saisi. Dans le plan de montage chronologique, l’objet de saisie de texte est remplacé par l’objet d’animation de texte et le texte remplacé s’affiche sur l’objet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 172 Ajout de texte pour lecteurs d’écran à une diapositive Les lecteurs d’écran sont couramment utilisés par les personnes atteintes de handicaps, en particulier par les personnes atteintes d’une déficience visuelle. Un lecteur d’écran peut lire le texte qui s’affiche sur l’écran d’un ordinateur à voix haute. Dans Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez écrire du texte pouvant être lu par un lecteur d’écran pour chaque diapositive. Pour ajouter du texte qui peut être lu par un lecteur d’écran à une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter du texte accessible aux personnes atteintes de handicaps. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Propriétés. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Diapositive. 5 Cliquez sur Accessibilité. 6 Tapez le texte qui doit être lu à voix haute par le lecteur d’écran. S’il y a du texte (par exemple, des légendes), des annotations ou des sous-titres sur la diapositive, vous pouvez cliquer sur Insérer le texte de la diapositive, sur Insérer les annotations de la diapositive ou sur Insérer le texte du sous-titre pour ajouter ce texte en tant que texte d’accessibilité des diapositives. 7 Cliquez deux fois sur OK. Ajout de transitions Les transitions sont un effet spécial que vous pouvez définir de sorte qu’elles apparaissent entre les diapositives des projets Adobe Captivate. Selon le contenu du projet, les transitions peuvent améliorer la fluidité entre les diapositives. Essayez d’ajouter une transition et regardez un aperçu de votre projet. Remarque : Lorsque vous définissez un type de transition, l’effet de transition s’applique seulement à la diapositive sélectionnée. Si vous voulez appliquer la transition à toutes les diapositives de votre projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. Pour ajouter une transition entre les diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une transition. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Propriétés. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur le menu déroulant Transition et sélectionnez l’une des options de transition. 5 Si vous voulez appliquer la transition à toutes les diapositives, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout, puis cliquez sur Paramètres pour choisir comment appliquer la modification. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Insertion de zones de zoom Les zones de zoom aident à attirer l’attention de l’utilisateur sur les sections importantes de la diapositive. Par exemple, si vous créez une simulation incluant une étape qui risque d’être oubliée, vous pouvez ajouter une zone de zoom pour mettre cette étape en valeur. Une zone de zoom est la zone que vous voulez mettre en valeur et la destination du zoom, qui affiche l’agrandissement. Après avoir ajouté une zone de zoom, vous pouvez ajouter des options de durée, transition et audio à l’effet de zoom.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 173 Pour ajouter une zone de zoom : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter une zone de zoom. 3 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de zoom. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone de zoom s’affiche. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Zone de destination du zoom et définissez les options suivantes. La section Aperçu vous permet de voir l’effet des modifications que vous avez apportées. Couleur du cadre Choisissez la couleur du cadre entourant la zone de destination du zoom. Couleur de remplissage Choisissez la couleur pour la section située à l’intérieur de la zone de destination du zoom. Largeur du cadre Définissez la largeur du cadre. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le cadre est épais. Transparence du remplissage Définissez la transparence. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus la zone est transparente. Sélectionner l’image Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner une image à partir de la bibliothèque. 5 Dans l’onglet Taille et position, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position et la taille de la zone de destination du zoom. Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. Remarque : Vous pouvez également modifier la taille et la position de la zone de zoom ou de la destination du zoom directement sur la diapositive. Sélectionnez la zone à modifier. Quand le curseur en forme de main s’affiche, ajustez la position de la zone. Quand le curseur en forme de flèche à deux pointes est visible, vous pouvez ajuster la taille. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 7 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de destination du zoom, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de destination du zoom à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles diapositives que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 8 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour voir vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. 9 Cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Remarque : La boîte de dialogue Zone de destination du zoom s’affiche toujours sur le calque supérieur, quel que soit son emplacement sur le plan de montage chronologique d’une diapositive. Modification des zones de zoom Si vous décidez d’apporter des modifications à la zone de zoom après avoir l’ajoutée à une diapositive, il vous suffit de double-cliquer sur la zone de zoom ou la zone de destination du zoom. Quand vous modifiez une zone de zoom, vous pouvez ajouter des options de durée, transition et audio à l’effet de zoom. Quand vous modifiez la zone de destination du zoom, vous pouvez modifier les options de cadre et de remplissage, ainsi que la position de la zone.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 174 Pour modifier une zone de zoom : 1 Sur la diapositive, double-cliquez sur la case de la zone de zoom. La boîte de dialogue Zone de zoom s’affiche. 2 Sur l’onglet Zone de zoom, définissez les options suivantes. La section Aperçu vous permet de voir l’effet des modifications que vous avez apportées. Couleur du cadre Choisissez la couleur du cadre entourant la zone de zoom. Couleur de remplissage Choisissez la couleur pour la section située à l’intérieur de la zone de zoom. Largeur du cadre Définissez la largeur du cadre. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le cadre est épais. Transparence du remplissage Définissez la transparence. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus la zone de zoom est transparente. Remplir la zone extérieure Sélectionnez cette option pour remplir la zone à l’extérieur des bords de la zone de zoom. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Options et définissez les options suivantes : Afficher pendant [durée] Spécifie la durée de l’image. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une option. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Durée spécifique, vous pouvez entrer le nombre exact de secondes correspondant à la durée d’affichage de l’image. Apparaître après [#] secondes Spécifie au bout de combien de temps (en secondes) l’image s’affiche sur la diapositive. Zoom pendant Spécifie la durée du zoom, en dixièmes de seconde. Effet Sélectionnez un effet de transition pour l’image dans le menu déroulant (par exemple, Apparition en fondu uniquement ou Pas de transition). Apparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image pour apparaître en fondu. Disparition [#] secondes Spécifie le temps nécessaire à l’image pour disparaître en fondu. 4 Cliquez sur l’onglet Audio et définissez les options suivantes : Lire l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio. Arrêter l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le fichier audio de l’image. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 175 Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position et définissez les options suivantes : Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 7 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de zoom, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de zoom à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles diapositives que vous créez les utilisent. 8 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour voir vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. 9 Cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Pour modifier une zone de destination du zoom : 1 Sur la diapositive, double-cliquez sur la case de la zone de destination du zoom. La boîte de dialogue Zone de destination du zoom s’affiche. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Zone de destination du zoom et définissez les options suivantes : Couleur du cadre Choisissez la couleur du cadre entourant la zone de destination du zoom. Couleur de remplissage Choisissez la couleur pour la section située à l’intérieur de la zone de destination du zoom. Largeur du cadre Définissez la largeur du cadre. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus le cadre est épais. Transparence du remplissage Définissez la transparence. Plus le nombre est élevé, plus la zone est transparente. Sélectionner l’image Cliquez sur ce bouton pour sélectionner une image à partir de la bibliothèque. 3 Dans l’onglet Taille et position, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position et la taille de la zone de zoom. Position en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la position de l’image sur la diapositive. Taille en pixels Saisissez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la taille de l’image sur la diapositive. Contraindre les proportions Sélectionnez cette option pour verrouiller les proportions de l’image. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 5 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer tous les paramètres de zone de destination du zoom, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les paramètres de zone de destination du zoom à la diapositive actuelle ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres dans cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles diapositives que vous créez utilisent ces paramètres. 6 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour voir vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 176 7 Cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Compression des données d’une diapositive Adobe Captivate vous offre la possibilité de compresser les données d’une diapositive qui sont utilisées par d’autres diapositives. Cette option, définie par défaut, réduit la taille globale du fichier. Remarque : Dans certains cas, les projets compressés peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement lorsqu’ils sont importés dans Flash. Si vous voulez importer votre projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash, ne sélectionnez pas l’option de compression avancée. Bien sûr, sans la compression, votre projet est plus volumineux. Pour compresser la durée entre les diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la zone Options de sortie, sélectionnez Compression de projet avancée. Correction des couleurs dans les diapositives Généralement, les couleurs s’affichent correctement dans les projets Adobe Captivate. Cependant, il peut y avoir des cas où les couleurs s’affichent mal, par exemple si elles sont radicalement différentes d’une diapositive à l’autre. Si la diapositive A utilise la palette de couleurs « ABC », si la diapositive B utilise la palette de couleurs « XYZ » et si les deux palettes sont totalement différentes, alors la diapositive B risque d’utiliser la palette « ABC ». Pour résoudre ce type de problème, il suffit le plus souvent de modifier la qualité vidéo de la diapositive. Adobe Captivate propose quatre niveaux de qualité vidéo, l’option Standard étant recommandée dans la plupart des cas. Pour modifier la qualité vidéo dans une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant les couleurs que vous voulez corriger. 3 Sélectionnez Diapositive > Qualité vidéo et choisissez l’une des options vidéo suivantes : Standard Format par défaut des diapositives. Le format Standard est le plus adapté à la plupart des captures d’écran, car il utilise 256 couleurs optimisées. Les diapositives au format Standard sont également facilement compressibles, ce qui permet d’obtenir des fichiers de taille réduite. Optimisée Cette option produit la meilleure qualité JPEG possible. JPEG Cette option est la plus adaptée lorsque la diapositive comporte une photographie. Vous pouvez modifier la qualité et le taux de compression pour les images JPEG dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. Qualité élevée Alors que le format Standard ne prend en charge que 256 couleurs, ce format utilise 16 millions de couleurs pour les diapositives. Cette option ne doit être utilisée que si les options Standard et Optimisé n’offrent pas la profondeur de couleur voulue. L’utilisation de cette option contribue à augmenter considérablement la taille des fichiers. Remarque : Il se peut que la sélection JPEG, Qualité élevée ou Optimisée augmente la taille du fichier et le temps nécessaire pour télécharger votre projet. Il est recommandé d’utiliser un format autre que Standard uniquement lorsque c’est nécessaire et approprié.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 177 Suppression de diapositives La suppression d’une diapositive consiste à la faire disparaître définitivement du projet. Vous pouvez supprimer des diapositives dans l’affichage Scénarimage ou Modifier (avec la Bande de film activée). Pour supprimer une diapositive dans l’affichage Scénarimage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive à supprimer. 3 Sélectionnez Supprimer la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Pour supprimer une diapositive dans l’affichage Modifier : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive à supprimer. 3 Cliquez sur la diapositive avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Supprimer la diapositive dans le menu déroulant. Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. Modification du début et de la fin d’un projet Vous pouvez définir la façon dont un projet commence et se termine. Adobe Captivate offre plusieurs options telles que l’apparition ou la disparition en fondu, la lecture en boucle et l’affichage d’un écran de chargement. Pour définir le début et la fin d’un projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez Projet et sélectionnez Début et fin. 4 Modifiez les options selon vos besoins. Ecran de chargement Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un écran de chargement au début du projet. Un écran de chargement peut s’avérer utile si la première diapositive du projet est volumineuse ou contient de l’audio et met un moment à s’afficher. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner une image. Remarque : Adobe Captivate comprend plusieurs images d’écran de chargement que vous pouvez utiliser. Vous pouvez également créer une image personnalisée. Pour utiliser une image personnalisée comme option d’écran de chargement, utilisez l’Explorateur de Windows pour copier-coller l’image dans le dossier suivant : ProgramFiles\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Preloaders. Les formats pris en charge sont : JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF, WMF et SWF. Protéger un projet par un mot de passe Sélectionnez cette option pour établir un mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent saisir pour pouvoir voir le projet. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour définir les options de mot de passe. Date d’expiration du projet Sélectionnez cette option pour définir une date d’expiration du projet. Lorsqu’un projet expire, il ne peut plus être visionné. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 178 Message ligne 1 Cette option vous permet de rédiger un message d’expiration. Ce message s’affiche si le projet a atteint sa date d’expiration (définie précédemment) et qu’un utilisateur essaie de l’afficher. Message ligne 2 Cette option vous permet éventuellement d’ajouter une seconde ligne de texte au message d’expiration du projet. Apparition en fondu de la première diapositive Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que la première diapositive du projet apparaisse en fondu. Vous pouvez définir les options suivantes dans la zone Options de fin de projet : Action Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez l’action qui se déroulera à la fin du projet. • Arrêter le projet Cette option arrête le projet après une lecture. • Projet en boucle Cette option permet de lire le projet en boucle. (Lorsque la fin est atteinte, le projet redémarre au début.) • Fermer le projet Cette option permet de fermer la fenêtre de navigation à la fin du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Cette option permet d’obtenir le chargement d’une adresse URL ou d’un fichier à la fin du projet. Pour charger une adresse URL, tapez le chemin entier vers un site (par exemple, http://www.siteweb.com). Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. Pour charger un fichier, cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...), allez au fichier, sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle le fichier doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. • Exécuter JavaScript Sélectionnez cette option pour exécuter une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour entrer le JavaScript que vous voulez exécuter. • Ouvrir un autre projet Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir un autre projet à la fin du projet actuel. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...), naviguez jusqu’au fichier du projet (avec l’extension SWF, RD ou CP), sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle le fichier doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courante, Nouvelle, Parente et En haut. • Envoyer un e-mail à Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir le navigateur de messagerie par défaut et envoyer un message à la fin du projet. Tapez l’adresse entière (par exemple, jean@entreprisezyx.com). Disparition en fondu de la dernière diapositive Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que la dernière diapositive du projet disparaisse en fondu. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Conseils concernant les diapositives d’introduction Les conseils suivants s’appliquent à la création de diapositives d’introduction visant à produire un effet impressionnant. • Utilisez une image pour la première diapositive. Créez une image ou utilisez le logo de votre société dans la diapositive d’introduction du projet. Insérez l’image en tant que diapositive ou ajoutez un graphique à une diapositive vide. • Ajoutez du son. Adobe Captivate permet d’ajouter facilement du son, élément primordial d’une introduction. Vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers audio existants ou enregistrer vos propres commentaires. Vous pouvez inclure un message de bienvenue ou jouer une musique appropriée.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 179 Adobe Captivate contient une galerie de boutons, de sons et d’animations (au format SWF) que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, la galerie est stockée par défaut dans l’emplacement suivant : C:Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery. • Utilisez des effets spéciaux. Si vous voulez ajouter des effets spéciaux à votre projet, pourquoi ne pas commencer par eux ? Les effets spéciaux de qualité, tels que les fondus, donnent un style professionnel et lissé dès le début du projet. • Utilisez du texte animé. Pour créer une diapositive d’introduction « accrocheuse » facilement, utilisez la fonction de texte animé d’Adobe Captivate. C’est une façon rapide de donner un aspect sophistiqué à vos projets. • Utilisez les légendes de manière stratégique. Ajoutez plusieurs légendes dans la diapositive d’introduction et définissez avec soin leur durée pour qu’elles apparaissent et disparaissent en fondu enchaîné. • Pensez à un écran de chargement. Un écran de chargement est un écran qui s’affiche brièvement avant le début du projet. Il contient généralement un message de type « chargement du projet » ou un graphique intéressant destiné à retenir l’attention du public. Un écran de chargement peut être utile lorsque la première diapositive du projet est grande ou qu’elle contient de l’audio. Dans ce cas, l’écran de chargement permet d’attirer ailleurs l’attention de l’utilisateur pendant le chargement du projet. Ajout d’habillages Vous pouvez améliorer vos projets en leur ajoutant un habillage. Un habillage inclut des paramètres de commande de lecture, de bordure et de menu. Les commandes de lecture permettent aux utilisateurs de visionner le projet Adobe Captivate à leur convenance avec des boutons comme Lire, Pause, Muet, Arrêter, Avancer et Rembobiner. Par exemple, si un projet comporte des instructions étape par étape, la présence d’un bouton Pause permet aux utilisateurs de suspendre la lecture du projet afin de lire les informations pertinentes. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage vous permet aussi d’ajouter une bordure personnalisée contenant des commandes de lecture et des éléments de menu, et d’entrer des informations sur le projet. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des éléments de menu et choisir qu’ils s’affichent en haut à gauche, en haut au centre ou en haut à droite de votre projet. Vous pouvez utiliser les éléments de menu pour permettre aux utilisateurs de passer à une diapositive spécifique, d’ouvrir un autre projet ou d’accéder à une URL ou un fichier hors du projet. Vous pouvez aussi exécuter JavaScript ou envoyer des e-mails à partir des éléments de menu. Remarque : Voir « Relier des projets Adobe Captivate », page 57 pour plus d’informations sur la façon de relier des projets. Ajout d’une commande de lecture à votre projet Vous pouvez choisir d’ajouter une barre de lecture BMP ou un thème SWF à votre projet. Une barre de lecture BMP est une commande de lecture élémentaire, composée de boutons qui sont des images bitmap (BMP). Vous pouvez choisir dans une liste de barres de lecture existantes et les visualiser dans la fenêtre d’aperçu de l’Editeur d’habillage. Un thème SWF est au format Flash et vous fournit plus d’options pour la personnalisation de l’apparence de votre projet. Vous pouvez choisir les couleurs et les éléments d’affichage de votre commande de lecture, puis enregistrer le thème afin de l’utiliser dans d’autres projets. Remarque : Lorsque vous créez un projet Adobe Captivate avec l’option Plein écran, il est préférable de sélectionner un style de commande de lecture incluant un bouton Fermer, par courtoisie envers les utilisateurs. Cela permet aux utilisateurs de fermer le projet et d’accéder facilement et rapidement à d’autres applications.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 180 Pour ajouter une barre de lecture BMP à votre projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Habillage, sélectionnez Barres de lecture BMP. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher la commande de lecture. 5 Dans le menu déroulant Barre de lecture, sélectionnez une barre de lecture. Vous pouvez la prévisualiser dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. 6 Lorsque vous avez sélectionné la barre de lecture de votre choix, sélectionnez sa position en cliquant sur le bouton Haut ou Bas. 7 Dans le menu déroulant Mise en forme, sélectionnez un alignement à gauche, au centre ou à droite pour la barre de lecture. 8 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer la commande de lecture mais conserver les paramètres que vous avez sélectionnés en désélectionnant l’option Afficher la commande de lecture sur l’onglet Commande de lecture. Pour créer un thème SWF pour votre projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Habillage, sélectionnez Thème SWF par défaut. Remarque : Si vous avez déjà créé et enregistré des thèmes SWF, ils s’affichent dans le menu déroulant et vous pouvez les réutiliser ou les modifier pour créer de nouveaux thèmes. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher la commande de lecture. 5 Choisissez un emplacement pour votre barre de lecture et cliquez sur l’un des boutons de position : gauche, haut, bas ou droite. 6 La fenêtre d’aperçu illustre les modifications que vous avez apportées. 7 Dans le menu déroulant Mise en forme, sélectionnez l’alignement de votre barre de lecture. (Pour une barre de lecture placée en bas ou en haut de la fenêtre, vous pouvez choisir Gauche, Droite, Centre ou Etiré. Pour une barre de lecture latérale, vous pouvez choisir Haut, Bas, Centre ou Etiré.) 8 Cochez les cases des éléments de la liste que vous désirez inclure à votre commande de lecture. Vous pouvez sélectionner : Lecture/Pause Incluez ce bouton sur la commande de lecture pour que vos utilisateurs puissent mettre la lecture du projet en pause et la reprendre. Rembobiner Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent rembobiner le projet. Avancer Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent avancer à la diapositive suivante. Sous-titrage Incluez ce bouton si vous avez inclus des sous-titres à votre projet et voulez donner à vos utilisateurs la possibilité de les afficher ou de les masquer. Pour consulter ou modifier les paramètres du sous-titrage de votre projet, cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres. Précédent Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent reculer à la diapositive précédente.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 181 Fermer/Quitter Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent quitter le projet. Cela est particulièrement important pour les projets plein écran afin que les utilisateurs puissent fermer la fenêtre rapidement. Muet Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent activer et désactiver l’audio du projet. Barre de progression Incluez ce bouton pour que vos utilisateurs puissent voir la progression à mesure qu’ils se déplacent dans le projet, et avancer ou reculer dans le projet en faisant glisser l’indicateur qui se trouve sur la barre de progression. 9 Pour modifier la transparence de l’arrière-plan de la commande de lecture, cliquez sur les flèches Haut et Bas en regard de la case Transparence ou entrez un nombre dans la zone de texte. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez configurer l’option de transparence que pour l’arrière-plan de la barre de lecture SWF. Vous ne pouvez pas configurer la transparence des boutons de la barre de lecture. 10 Pour modifier la couleur de tout élément de commande de lecture, sélectionnez l’option Couleurs de lecture. Si vous voulez utiliser la couleur par défaut, ne cochez pas cette option. 11 Pour modifier la couleur d’arrière-plan de la commande de lecture, cliquez sur la case de couleur d’arrière-plan et sélectionnez une couleur de l’une des façons suivantes : • Choisissez une couleur dans la palette de base. • Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour créer une couleur personnalisée. • Cliquez sur l’icône de pipette pour sélectionner et copier n’importe quelle couleur sur votre écran. • Dans le champ texte, entrez la valeur de la couleur de votre choix et appuyez sur Entrée. 12 Pour modifier la couleur vive du bouton, autrement dit la couleur qui met le bouton en surbrillance quand un utilisateur passe le pointeur de la souris dessus, cliquez sur la case de couleur vive du bouton et sélectionnez une couleur. 13 Pour changer la couleur du bouton lui-même, cliquez sur la case de couleur du bouton et sélectionnez une couleur. 14 Pour modifier la couleur de l’icône du bouton, autrement dit la couleur du symbole sur le bouton, cliquez sur la case de couleur de l’icône du bouton et sélectionnez une couleur. 15 Si vous voulez enregistrer le nouveau thème SWF pour le réutiliser dans un autre projet, cliquez sur Enregistrer sous et entrez un nom de thème dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous. Cliquez sur OK. 16 Lorsque vous avez terminé d’apporter des modifications, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer la commande de lecture mais conserver les paramètres que vous avez sélectionnés en désélectionnant l’option Afficher la commande de lecture sur l’onglet Commande de lecture. Création de commandes de lecture personnalisées Les utilisateurs contrôlent les projets Adobe Captivate grâce aux boutons de commande de lecture (par exemple, Lire ou Pause). Ces boutons permettent aux utilisateurs de définir la vitesse de lecture du projet. Par exemple, si un projet comporte des instructions étape par étape, la présence d’un bouton Pause permet aux utilisateurs de suspendre la lecture du projet afin de lire et de traiter les informations pertinentes. Vous pouvez sélectionner les commandes de lecture qui apparaissent dans la version définitive du projet. Ces boutons « flottent » sur votre projet à l’emplacement que vous avez spécifié. Adobe Captivate contient de nombreuses commandes de lecture que vous pouvez utiliser dans vos projets. Cependant, vous pouvez également créer des boutons de commande de lecture personnalisés. Vous pouvez créer des commandes de lecture BMP ou SWF personnalisées.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 182 Création de commandes de lecture BMP personnalisées Vous pouvez créer des barres de lecture BMP personnalisées. Chaque commande de lecture BMP se compose d’une série d’images bitmap (BMP). Les images sont stockées dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\BmpBars. Une commande de lecture peut être munie des boutons suivants : • Lire Lit le projet (ou redémarre le projet si vous avez cliqué sur le bouton Pause). • Précédent Permet de revenir à la diapositive précédente. • Suivant Permet de passer à la diapositive suivante. • Pause Permet de suspendre le projet (jusqu’à ce que l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton de lecture). • Quitter Permet de fermer le navigateur Web ou la fenêtre du projet. • Rembobiner Permet de redémarrer le projet depuis le début. • Infos Affiche les informations concernant le projet, comme le nom, la société et le copyright. Les informations qui s’affichent sont tirées des propriétés du projet. Conventions d’appellation des boutons BMP Chaque bouton a deux bitmaps : une image bitmap affiche le bouton dans son état normal et une autre image bitmap affiche le bouton lorsqu’il est enfoncé. La convention d’appellation de ces deux bitmaps est la suivante : • style-playbuttonup.bmp • style-playbuttondown.bmp Le nom de fichier se compose des éléments suivants : • Nom de la commande de lecture (« style ») • Tiret (« - ») • Le nom du bouton (« play ») • Soit « buttonup » ou « buttondown » • Extension de fichier bitmap (.bmp) Pour créer des commandes de lecture BMP personnalisées : 1 Créez de nouveaux boutons à l’aide d’un logiciel graphique tel que Fireworks ou Adobe Photoshop. Enregistrez les boutons sous forme d’images bitmap (BMP) distinctes. Utilisez les conventions d’appellation décrites ci-dessus et enregistrez vos images bitmap. 2 Créez une image bitmap contenant une image d’aperçu de l’ensemble de la commande et appelez le fichier « stylepreview.bmp ». 3 A l’aide de l’Explorateur Windows, placez les images bitmap dans le dossier de commandes de lecture d’Adobe Captivate situé dans C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\BmpBars. 4 Ouvrez votre projet dans Adobe Captivate et ajoutez la commande de lecture BMP à votre projet. Remarque : Tous les boutons de commande de lecture doivent être de même largeur et de même hauteur. Si les images n’ont pas la même taille, elles peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement dans la version définitive du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 183 Création de commandes de lecture Flash personnalisées Vous pouvez créer des commandes de lecture Flash personnalisées. Vous pouvez utiliser Flash 8 or Flash CS3 pour ouvrir le fichier Flash et modifier les boutons, ajouter des couleurs, etc. Vous trouverez le fichier Flash contenant les commandes de lecture SWF dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Templates\PlaybackFLA. Les images SWF sont stockées dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\SwfBars. Lorsque vous créez des commandes de lecture SWF personnalisées, respectez les directives suivantes : • Le fichier FLA source de l’habillage est stocké dans : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Templates\PlaybackFLA • Les noms et symboles de la commande ne doivent pas être modifiés. • La barre de lecture doit être présente sur la Scène, avec le nom d’instance pbcBar_mc. • La barre de lecture doit avoir l’identificateur cpPlaybar dans la bibliothèque. • L’option d’exportation pour ActionScript doit être sélectionnée pour cpPlaybar dans la bibliothèque. • Les actions du calque d’actions ne doivent pas être modifiées. • Tous les boutons doivent être stockés au niveau racine de la bibliothèque. • Les points d’alignement ne doivent pas être modifiés. Le point d’alignement pour chaque symbole se trouve au centre (important pour la modification), à l’exception des symboles suivants : - icoProgress (en haut à gauche) - icoThumb (en haut au centre) - icoThumbBase (en haut à gauche) • Le fichier SWF publié de l’habillage doit être stocké dans : \Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\SwfBars (L’Editeur d’habillage récupère le fichier à cet emplacement.) Conventions d’appellation des boutons Flash Chaque bouton SWF contient trois calques : un bouton, une icône et un calque d’action. Le nom de fichier SWF se compose des éléments suivants : • L’acronyme de « playback control » (« pbc ») • L’identificateur de l’élément de lecture (« Btn » pour bouton, « Bar » pour barre, etc.)ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 184 • Le nom du bouton (« play ») Localisation de la barre de lecture Flash L’anglais est la langue par défaut des barres de lecture Flash. Adobe Captivate installe également des barres de lecture Flash traduites en français, en allemand, en italien, en espagnol et en japonais. Ces barres de lectures Flash sont stockées dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\SwfBars\ Localisation\. Lorsque vous copiez l’une de ces barres de lecture Flash dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PlaybackControls\SwfBars\, les versions localisées apparaissent dans le menu déroulant Barre de lecture de la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage. Les infobulles de ces barres de lecture s’affichent dans la langue sélectionnée. Vous pouvez également ajouter une nouvelle langue si celle que vous désirez n’est pas disponible. Le fichier Flash de barres de lectures SWF par défaut est stocké dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Templates\ PlaybackFLA. Ajout d’une bordure à votre projet Vous pouvez spécifier le style, la taille, la texture et la largeur de la bordure autour de votre projet. Pour ajouter une bordure à votre projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Bordures. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher les bordures. Remarque : Lorsque vous sélectionnez l’option Afficher les bordures, les bordures s’affichent à l’extérieur de votre projet. Lorsque vous désélectionnez l’option Afficher les bordures, il est possible que les bordures se superposent à une partie du contenu du projet. Si vous préférez que les commandes de lecture s’affichent à l’extérieur du projet, sélectionnez l’option Afficher les bordures. 5 Cliquez sur les boutons représentant les côtés de la fenêtre du projet auxquels vous voulez ajouter des bordures. Vous pouvez ajouter des bordures sur toute combinaison de côtés qui vous convient. La fenêtre d’aperçu illustre les modifications que vous avez apportées aux paramètres de bordures. 6 Dans le menu déroulant Style, sélectionnez Coins arrondis ou Bord carré. 7 Pour créer une bordure avec texture, cliquez sur le menu déroulant Texture et sélectionnez une texture. Remarque : Le choix d’une image dans la liste Texture écrase toute sélection de couleur pour vos bordures. Si vous voulez choisir une couleur spécifique pour vos bordures, sélectionnez Aucun dans la liste Texture. 8 Entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir la largeur (en pixels) des bordures. 9 Pour choisir une couleur de bordure, cliquez sur la case de couleur et sélectionnez une couleur : • Choisissez une couleur dans la palette de base. • Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour créer une couleur personnalisée. • Cliquez sur l’icône de pipette pour sélectionner et copier n’importe quelle couleur sur votre écran.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 185 • Dans le champ texte, entrez la valeur de la couleur de votre choix et appuyez sur Entrée. 10 Pour choisir une couleur d’arrière-plan pour toute zone d’arrière-plan affichée à l’extérieur de votre projet et de ses bordures, cliquez sur la case Couleur d’arrière-plan HTML et sélectionnez une couleur. Remarque : C’est également la couleur qui s’affiche si vous publiez votre projet en tant que fichier EXE plein écran. 11 Lorsque vous avez terminé d’apporter des modifications aux bordures de votre projet, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer les bordures mais conserver les paramètres que vous avez sélectionnés en désélectionnant l’option Afficher les bordures sur l’onglet Bordures. Ajout d’éléments de menu à votre projet Vous pouvez créer des éléments de menu et de sous-menu qui s’affichent dans l’ensemble de votre projet. Les éléments de menu peuvent avoir différents types de destinations. Ils peuvent aller à une diapositive spécifique dans le projet, ouvrir un autre projet Adobe Captivate, ouvrir un fichier à l’extérieur du projet, aller à une URL, exécuter du code JavaScript ou envoyer un e-mail. Pour ajouter un élément de menu à votre projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Menu. 4 Sélectionnez Afficher menu. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter. La boîte de dialogue Ajouter/Modifier l’option de menu s’affiche. 6 Entrez le texte de l’élément de menu dans le champ Légende. 7 Sélectionnez l’une des actions d’élément de menu suivantes dans la liste En cas de clic. Aller à la diapositive Sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à vos utilisateurs d’aller à une diapositive spécifique ; sélectionnez la diapositive de destination dans la liste Diapositive. Ouvrir URL ou fichier Sélectionnez cette option pour relier vos utilisateurs à une URL ou un fichier spécifique. Entrez l’emplacement de l’URL ou du fichier dans le champ Adresse URL ou cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) à droite de ce champ pour naviguer jusqu’au fichier. Cliquez sur le bouton fléché à droite du bouton Parcourir pour définir la destination de la fenêtre et d’autres options. Ouvrir un autre projet Sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à vos utilisateurs d’accéder à d’autres projets Adobe Captivate. Entrez l’emplacement du projet dans le champ Projet ou cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) à droite de ce champ pour naviguer jusqu’au fichier. Cliquez sur le bouton fléché à droite du bouton Parcourir pour définir la destination de la fenêtre et d’autres options. Envoyer un e-mail à Sélectionnez cette option pour donner à vos utilisateurs une méthode de communication rapide. Entrez l’adresse de destination de l’e-mail dans le champ Adresse. Exécuter JavaScript Sélectionnez cette option pour exécuter du code JavaScript en cas de clic. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...), entrez le script dans la boîte de dialogue JavaScript, puis cliquez sur OK. Cliquez sur le bouton fléché à droite du bouton Parcourir pour définir la destination de la fenêtre et d’autres options. 8 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 186 Votre nouvel élément de menu ou de sous-menu s’affiche dans la liste des légendes de menu. Remarque : Vous pouvez modifier un élément de menu à tout moment en le mettant en surbrillance dans la liste et en cliquant sur Modifier. 9 Ajoutez ou modifiez autant d’éléments de menu que nécessaire. Remarque : Pour supprimer un élément de menu, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et cliquez sur le bouton Supprimer à droite des boutons Ajouter et Modifier. 10 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres pour configurer des options supplémentaires pour le menu. Dans la boîte de dialogue Paramètres du menu d’habillage, vous pouvez définir l’emplacement du menu (en haut à gauche, en haut au centre, en haut à droite). Vous pouvez également configurer les couleurs et les polices de menu. 11 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez masquer les éléments de menu mais conserver les paramètres que vous avez sélectionnés en désélectionnant l’option Afficher menu sur l’onglet Menu. Ajout d’informations sur le projet Tous les styles de commande de lecture possèdent un bouton d’informations. Ce bouton permet aux utilisateurs d’obtenir des informations sur le projet telles que le nom de l’auteur, le nom de la société et l’adresse du site Web de celle-ci. Vous pouvez ajouter ou modifier ces informations dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage. Il est important de définir les préférences globales si vous créez des projets accessibles conformes à la Section 508. Pour ajouter des informations sur le projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Habillage. La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’affiche. 3 Dans l’onglet Infos, saisissez des informations dans les champs suivants : Nom du projet Entrez un nom permettant d’identifier facilement votre projet. Auteur Entrez le nom des auteurs du projet. Société Entrez le nom de la société ou de l’organisation. E-mail Entrez une adresse électronique. Dans la plupart des cas, il est préférable d’entrer l’adresse électronique générale de l’entreprise ou, le cas échéant, celle du service d’assistance à la clientèle. Site Web Entrez l’adresse du site Web de la société. Copyright Entrez les informations essentielles concernant le copyright de votre projet. Description Entrez une brève description du contenu du projet. Par exemple : « Ce projet présente brièvement le produit ZYX et ses principales fonctionnalités. » 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 187 Aperçu des habillages Vous pouvez voir un aperçu des modifications que vous avez apportées à l’habillage de votre projet dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage. Chaque fois que vous définissez les couleurs des boutons, ajoutez ou supprimez des menus ou configurez les positions des barres de lecture, l’aperçu illustre immédiatement ces modifications. L’aperçu de l’habillage affiche la première diapositive du projet. Il affiche l’image d’arrière-plan (le cas échéant) ou la couleur de la diapositive. Aucun objet de la première diapositive n’est visible dans l’aperçu de l’habillage. Les performances de l’aperçu de l’habillage sont lentes s’il a une image d’arrière-plan volumineuse. Pour éviter ce problème lors de la configuration de l’habillage, vous pouvez insérer une diapositive vide et la définir en tant que première diapositive. Il vous suffit alors d’ouvrir l’Editeur d’habillage et de configurer l’habillage. Ensuite, vous pouvez masquer la première diapositive. La diapositive suivante, qui comprend l’image d’arrière-plan, s’affiche dans la boîte de dialogue d’aperçu de l’habillage. Diapositives sécurisées Vous pouvez verrouiller ou masquer des diapositives spécifiques d’un projet Adobe Captivate. Cette option est utile si d’autres personnes visionnent le premier jet d’un projet. Verrouillage des diapositives Adobe Captivate permet de verrouiller des diapositives. Lorsque vous verrouillez une diapositive, tous les objets de cette diapositive sont affichés mais ne peuvent pas être modifiés. Cette fonctionnalité est utile si vous voulez envoyer votre projet à d’autres personnes pour qu’elles puissent donner leur avis sur votre projet, mais si vous ne voulez pas qu’elles modifient les objets. Quand une diapositive est verrouillée, une petite icône de verrou s’affiche. Cette icône s’affiche sous une diapositive verrouillée dans l’affichage Scénarimage et dans la bande de film. Pour verrouiller une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur la diapositive à verrouiller à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Verrouiller la diapositive. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives, appuyez sur Maj ou Ctrl sur le clavier tout en cliquant sur les diapositives désirées. Pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives, appuyez sur Ctrl+A, ou depuis le menu Modifier, choisissez Sélectionner toutes les diapositives. Masquage des diapositives Adobe Captivate vous permet de masquer une diapositive dans un projet ; la diapositive reste dans le projet, mais elle est cachée et ne s’affiche pas lorsque le projet est lu. Cette option est utile dans plusieurs cas. Par exemple, si d’autres personnes doivent passer le projet en revue et que les informations sur certaines diapositives ne sont pas définitives, vous pouvez masquer ces diapositives jusqu’à ce qu’elles soient correctes. Vous pouvez masquer une diapositive depuis les propriétés de la diapositive ou Tâches de la diapositive. Par ailleurs, lorsque vous publiez des documents, vous pouvez choisir d’inclure ou non les diapositives masquées.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 188 Pour masquer une diapositive depuis les propriétés de la diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur la diapositive et sélectionnez Masquer la diapositive. La diapositive est estompée dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Pour masquer une diapositive depuis l’option Tâches de la diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Scénarimage. 2 Cliquez une fois sur la diapositive que vous voulez masquer. 3 Dans la liste Tâches de la diapositive à gauche, cliquez sur Masquer la diapositive. La diapositive est estompée dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Pour inclure ou exclure les diapositives masquées lorsque vous publiez des documents : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Sélectionnez Imprimer dans le panneau de gauche. 4 Dans Type, sélectionnez Documents. 5 Dans la zone Options de mise en forme des documents, sélectionnez Inclure les diapositives masquées. Si la case Inclure les diapositives masquées est cochée, les diapositives masquées sont incluses dans le document Word. Décochez la case pour exclure les diapositives masquées des documents. 6 Cliquez sur Publier.189 Chapitre 11 : Ajout et gestion d’objets Les objets sont des éléments que vous pouvez ajouter aux diapositives Adobe Captivate. Il existe de nombreux types d’objets différents : Légendes de texte Les légendes sont des « bulles » de texte qui décrivent une diapositive ou donnent des informations supplémentaires. Légendes de survol Les légendes de survol se composent d’une légende et d’une zone de survol (la zone « sensible »). Une légende de survol s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur place la souris sur la zone sensible. Zones de surbrillance Vous pouvez utiliser les zones de surbrillance pour insister sur un point particulier et pour indiquer aux utilisateurs où porter leur attention ou saisir des données. Mini-diapositive de survol Zone d’une diapositive qui répond à l’action de la souris en ouvrant une mini-diapositive, c’est-à-dire une diapositive au sein d’une diapositive, qui possède quasiment toutes les fonctionnalités d’une diapositive normale. Zones de zoom Les zones de zoom attirent l’attention du lecteur sur certains endroits de l’écran. La zone de zoom souligne les informations ou l’image importantes. La destination de zoom est la vue agrandie du contenu de la zone de zoom. Images Les images ajoutent une nouvelle dimension à vos projets et peuvent être notamment utilisées pour les écrans d’accueil, les pointeurs et les arrière-plans. Images de survol Les images de survol se composent d’une image et d’une zone de survol (la zone sensible). Une image de survol s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur place la souris sur la zone sensible. Aspect de la souris Spécifie exactement comment les actions effectuées avec la souris s’affichent sur les diapositives enregistrées. Vidéo Flash Intégrez des fichiers vidéo Flash à votre projet ; relisez les vidéos insérées sans affecter les performances de lecture du projet. Remarque : N’importez dans Adobe Captivate que les fichiers FLV comportant des métadonnées. Si vous importez un fichier FLV qui ne comporte pas de métadonnées, la vidéo Flash ne pourra être relue correctement dans le projet. Animations L’ajout d’animations est une façon facile d’ajouter du contenu et de rendre vos projets Adobe Captivate plus attrayants en utilisant de l’information que vous possédez déjà. Vous pouvez importer des fichiers GIF animés, des fichiers SWF, des fichiers FLA et des fichiers AVI. Texte animé Vous pouvez incorporer du texte animé Adobe Captivate à vos projets de manière à créer des projets de qualité et d’apparence professionnelles. Le texte animé est particulièrement efficace dans les premières et dernières diapositives d’un projet. Dans l’affichage Modifier, ouvrez la bibliothèque pour afficher tous les objets de médias du projet. A partir du menu Afficher, sélectionnez Afficher la bibliothèque pour voir la liste des objets triés dans les catégories suivantes : audio, arrière-plans, images et médias. Les objets suivants ajoutent de l’interactivité aux projets : Zones de clic Les zones de clic sont des zones cliquables qui peuvent être utilisées pour présenter les fonctionnalités d’une application en invitant les utilisateurs à cliquer sur un menu ou sur un bouton.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 190 Zones de texte Les zones de texte permettent d’accroître facilement et rapidement l’interaction des projets Adobe Captivate. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser les zones de texte pour poser des questions de quiz simples. Boutons Les boutons augmentent l’interactivité des projets Adobe Captivate et peuvent être ajoutés, redimensionnés et placés sur une diapositive selon vos besoins. A partir du menu Projet, sélectionnez Interaction avancée pour afficher et modifier les détails de tous les objets interactifs du projet. Importation d’objets Vous pouvez importer des objets (images, légendes, sons, zones de surbrillance, etc.) d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers un autre. Cette option est utile dans deux situations. Premièrement, si vous voulez supprimer un projet existant, mais si vous souhaitez conserver les objets pour les ajouter à un autre projet. Deuxièmement, si vous voulez recréer les diapositives d’un projet, mais si vous souhaitez conserver les objets existants afin de gagner du temps. Remarque : Pour réutiliser des objets de médias individuels provenant d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez ouvrir la bibliothèque de ce projet à partir de la bibliothèque du projet en cours et faire glisser les objets directement sur une diapositive ou dans la bibliothèque du projet actuel pour faciliter leur réutilisation. Pour importer des objets d’un projet Adobe Captivate dans un autre : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate auquel vous souhaitez ajouter les objets existants. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > des diapositives/objets. 3 Sélectionnez le projet comportant les objets à importer et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Importer un projet s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez les objets que vous voulez ajouter dans le projet courant. Pour chaque diapositive, cliquez sur le menu déroulant Importer et sélectionnez une option. Utilisez la réglette ou la touche Tab (diapositive suivante) et Maj-Tab (diapositive précédente) pour parcourir toutes les diapositives du projet. Cliquez sur Tout sélectionner-Objets pour sélectionner tous les objets du projet. Cliquez sur Tout effacer-Objets pour effacer tous les objets du projet. Pour importer uniquement des objets, sélectionnez l’option Objets. Si vous sélectionnez l’option Objets, vous pouvez spécifier exactement la diapositive à laquelle vous voulez ajouter les objets dans le projet courant. Cliquez simplement sur le menu déroulant en regard de Placer les objets sur et sélectionnez un numéro de diapositive du projet. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Les objets sont ajoutés au projet ouvert. 6 Ouvrez différentes diapositives dans l’affichage Modifier pour voir les objets qui ont été importés.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 191 Utilisation de la bibliothèque Dans l’affichage Modifier, vous pouvez voir la bibliothèque qui répertorie tous les objets d’un projet et vous permet de facilement visualiser et réutiliser les images, arrière-plans, audio, vidéos et animations de votre projet. Les bibliothèques d’autres projets Adobe Captivate permettent aussi d’accéder aux objets pour les réutiliser. Vous pouvez également ouvrir des projets à modifier à partir de la bibliothèque. Vous pouvez par exemple cliquer avec le bouton droit sur une image dans la bibliothèque, sélectionner Modifier avec dans le menu et naviguer jusqu’à votre programme de modification d’images préféré. L’image s’ouvre alors dans ce programme et vous pouvez modifier et enregistrer l’image mise à jour dans le projet. (Une fois que vous avez sélectionné un programme de modification pour un type de fichier donné, Adobe Captivate lance par défaut ce programme de modification chaque fois que vous ouvrez ce type de fichier pour le modifier.) Vous pouvez faire flotter la bibliothèque à l’extérieur de la fenêtre du programme ou la déplacer vers un autre emplacement dans la fenêtre. Pour ce faire, placez le pointeur sur le coin supérieur gauche du volet Bibliothèque jusqu’à ce qu’une flèche à quatre pointes s’affiche. Ensuite, faites glisser la bibliothèque vers un bord de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut s’ancrer, ou au milieu de la fenêtre du programme où elle peut flotter. (Il est toujours possible d’annuler cette opération.) Pour chaque objet, la bibliothèque affiche les informations suivantes : Nom, Type, Taille (en kilo-octets), Nb d’utilisations et Date de modification. (Le nombre d’utilisations correspond au nombre de fois où l’objet est utilisé dans le projet.) Cliquez sur le titre de l’une de ces colonnes pour trier la liste des objets dans chaque dossier de catégorie d’objets. Remarque : La bibliothèque ne s’affiche que dans l’affichage Modifier. Si vous passez à un autre affichage, vous ne pouvez plus voir la bibliothèque. Quand vous revenez à l’affichage Modifier, la bibliothèque réapparaît au même emplacement. Les nouvelles ressources (images, audio, animations, etc.) apparaissent dans la bibliothèque lorsque vous les ajoutez au projet. Ces objets de la bibliothèque sont disponibles pour utilisation même si vous supprimez la diapositive sur laquelle ils étaient initialement utilisés. Il est possible de renommer les dossiers de la bibliothèque et de créer des sous-dossiers pour organiser les objets comme vous le souhaitez. Cliquez avec le bouton droit dans la bibliothèque pour la renommer ou créer un sous-dossier. Pour afficher les objets de la bibliothèque : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Modifier pour passer à l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque s’affiche dans le volet de droite. 4 Double-cliquez sur l’un des dossiers (Audio, Arrière-plans, Images, Médias) pour afficher les objets de cette catégorie. 5 Cliquez sur un objet pour l’afficher dans le volet d’aperçu de la bibliothèque. Outre l’affichage des fichiers d’image, le volet d’aperçu permet de lire des fichiers audio et d’animation. Pour réutiliser un objet répertorié dans la bibliothèque : 1 Dans l’affichage Modifier, sélectionnez la diapositive dans laquelle vous voulez ajouter l’objet. 2 Si la bibliothèque est masquée, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la bibliothèque. 3 Dans la bibliothèque, développez le dossier de la catégorie de l’objet à réutiliser.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 192 4 Cliquez sur l’objet à réutiliser et, si nécessaire, affichez-le dans le volet d’aperçu. 5 Faites glisser l’objet sur la diapositive ou mini-diapositive sélectionnée. L’objet fait maintenant partie de la diapositive ou de la mini-diapositive en fonction de son emplacement. Remarque : Une fois que vous avez copié l’objet sur la diapositive, les modifications que vous lui apportez n’ont pas d’effet sur ce même objet utilisé dans d’autres diapositives. Pour réutiliser un objet figurant dans la bibliothèque d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate : 1 Dans l’affichage Modifier, sélectionnez la diapositive dans laquelle vous voulez ajouter l’objet. 2 Si la bibliothèque est masquée, sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la bibliothèque. 3 Sur la barre d’outils Bibliothèque, cliquez sur Ouvrir la bibliothèque et sélectionnez Ouvrir la bibliothèque. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 4 Recherchez et sélectionnez le projet contenant les objets à utiliser puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. La bibliothèque de l’autre projet s’ouvre dans une fenêtre redimensionnable distincte. 5 Cliquez pour sélectionner l’objet à réutiliser. 6 Faites glisser l’objet vers la scène de la diapositive sélectionnée ou vers le dossier approprié dans la bibliothèque du projet en cours. 7 Sélectionnez et faites glisser tous les objets supplémentaires à réutiliser, puis cliquez sur le bouton de fermeture dans le coin supérieur droit de la fenêtre de bibliothèque de l’autre projet. Les nouveaux objets figurent maintenant dans la bibliothèque du projet actuel, même si vous les avez faits glisser directement sur une diapositive, et vous pouvez les réutiliser aussi souvent que vous le souhaitez. Remarque : Après avoir ouvert la bibliothèque d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate, ce projet reste dans le menu Ouvrir la bibliothèque pour vous permettre d’accéder rapidement, et à tout moment, à la bibliothèque de ce projet. Barre d’outils Bibliothèque La barre d’outils Bibliothèque se trouve dans la partie supérieure du volet principal de la bibliothèque, sous le volet d’aperçu de la bibliothèque. Elle contient les options suivantes : Ouvrir la bibliothèque Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir la bibliothèque d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate. Cela vous permet de réutiliser tout objet de la bibliothèque de ce projet dans votre projet actuel. Importer Sélectionnez cette option pour importer un objet dans le projet. Exporter Sélectionnez cette option pour enregistrer une copie d’un objet dans un emplacement externe au projet. Modifier Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir un objet dans l’application de modification précédemment sélectionnée pour ce type de fichier. Cette option est activée uniquement une fois que vous avez sélectionné une application de modification pour ce type de fichier spécifique dans l’option Modifier avec du menu contextuel de l’objet de la bibliothèque. Propriétés Sélectionnez cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l’objet sélectionné. Utilisation Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher la liste des diapositives sur lesquelles l’objet sélectionné est utilisé. Actualisation Sélectionnez cette option pour mettre à jour les objets de bibliothèque qui ont été modifiés en dehors du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 193 Sélectionner les éléments inutilisés Sélectionnez cette option pour mettre en évidence tous les objets de la bibliothèque qui ne sont pas actuellement utilisés dans le projet. Supprimer Sélectionnez cette option pour supprimer le ou les objets sélectionnés du projet. Gestion des objets avec la barre d’outils Scène La nouvelle barre d’outils Scène, disponible en affichage Modifier, contient les icônes suivantes pour vous permettre de gérer les objets : • Propriétés de la diapositive. Cliquez sur cette option pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la diapositive. Cette option de barre d’outils se change en Modifier la question ou en Modifier les résultats si une diapositive de questions ou une diapositive de résultat est sélectionnée. • Couper, copier, coller, supprimer et dupliquer • Ouvrir les propriétés de l’objet sélectionné • Envoyer l’objet sélectionné au premier plan • Envoyer l’objet sélectionné à l’arrière-plan • Afficher/masquer la grille • Accrocher à la grille • Taille et posit ion • Zoom • Redessiner la forme lorsque la mini-diapositive de survol est sélectionnée Duplication des objets Vous pouvez dupliquer des objets dans l’affichage Modifier. La duplication d’objets est un moyen facile de réutiliser du contenu. Par exemple, vous pouvez dupliquer une légende détaillée et modifier une partie du texte pour ajouter rapidement davantage d’informations à votre projet. Remarque : Pour réutiliser les objets de médias figurant dans la bibliothèque, il suffit de faire glisser l’objet de la bibliothèque sur la diapositive. Pour dupliquer un objet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez dupliquer. 3 Cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur l’objet, puis sélectionnez Dupliquer. L’objet que vous avez sélectionné est dupliqué et le nouvel objet est placé sur la diapositive. Vous pouvez travailler sur le nouvel objet et le modifier exactement de la même façon qu’avec l’objet d’origine.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 194 Copie et collage des objets Une fois que vous avez créé un objet tel qu’une légende, une zone de surbrillance ou une zone de clic, vous pouvez copier cet objet et le coller sur la même diapositive, sur une diapositive différente de votre projet, ou sur plusieurs diapositives de votre projet en même temps. Cela peut vous permettre de gagner énormément de temps, surtout si vous créez des objets compliqués avec des tailles, des couleurs et des mises en formes spécifiques. Vous pouvez également copier et coller des objets d’un projet à l’autre. Remarque : Pour réutiliser les objets de médias figurant dans la bibliothèque, il suffit de faire glisser l’objet de la bibliothèque sur la diapositive. Lorsque des objets provenant d’une diapositive sont copiés dans une mini-diapositive, les propriétés suivantes de l’objet sont modifiées : • Si la durée de l’objet est définie sur « Reste de la diapositive » ou « Reste du projet », elle est redéfinie sur « Reste de la mini-diapositive ». • L’option Synchroniser avec le projet perd sa validité avec les fichiers FLV. Pour copier un objet et le coller dans une diapositive différente : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez copier. Dans Modifier, cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez copier. 3 Cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur l’objet, puis sélectionnez Copier. 4 Ouvrez la diapositive dans laquelle vous voulez coller l’objet. Si la bande de film est affichée, vous pouvez cliquer sur toute diapositive. Vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur l’onglet Scénarimage, puis double-cliquer sur une diapositive. 5 Cliquez sur la diapositive à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Coller l’objet. Pour copier un objet et le coller dans plusieurs diapositives : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans Scénarimage, double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez copier. Dans Modifier, cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez copier. 3 Cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur l’objet, puis sélectionnez Copier. 4 Sélectionnez les diapositives dans lesquelles vous voulez coller l’objet. Maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et cliquez sur les diapositives consécutives ou maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée et cliquez sur toutes les diapositives de votre choix, même si elles ne sont pas consécutives. Vous pouvez utiliser l’affichage Scénarimage ou Bande de film dans l’affichage Modifier. 5 Cliquez sur une diapositive sélectionnée à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Coller l’objet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 195 Copie et collage des objets depuis d’autres projets Vous pouvez copier et coller des objets depuis d’autres projets. Cela peut vous permettre de gagner énormément de temps. Par exemple, si vous avez déjà un objet détaillé dans un autre projet, vous pouvez simplement copier et coller cet objet dans les nouveaux projets que vous créez. Remarque : Pour réutiliser des objets de médias provenant d’un autre projet Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez ouvrir la bibliothèque de ce projet à partir de la bibliothèque du projet en cours et faire glisser les objets directement sur une diapositive ou dans la bibliothèque du projet actuel pour faciliter leur réutilisation. Pour copier un objet depuis un autre projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate contenant l’objet que vous voulez copier. 2 Cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur l’objet, puis sélectionnez Copier. Pour coller un objet depuis un autre projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dans lequel vous voulez ajouter l’objet copié dans les étapes ci-dessus. 2 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive dans laquelle vous voulez ajouter l’objet. 3 Sélectionnez Coller l’objet. Vous pouvez aussi importer un ou plusieurs objets à partir d’un autre projet. Alignement des objets Si vous avez plusieurs objets sur une diapositive, Adobe Captivate peut aligner ces objets automatiquement. C’est une manière facile et précise de créer des diapositives de projet d’aspect professionnel. Vous disposez de nombreuses options pour aligner les objets verticalement et horizontalement. Certaines options dépendent de l’emplacement de l’objet d’ancrage. L’objet d’ancrage est tout simplement le premier objet que vous sélectionnez. Il est conseillé de sélectionner l’objet le plus grand ou l’objet qui s’affiche en premier comme objet d’ancrage. L’objet d’ancrage s’affiche avec des poignées de redimensionnement blanches, alors que les autres objets sélectionnés s’affichent avec des poignées de redimensionnement noires. Pour aligner plusieurs objets dans une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez une diapositive contenant plus d’un objet, par exemple deux légendes. Vous pouvez également ouvrir une diapositive et y ajouter plus d’un objet. 3 Si la barre d’alignement n’est pas visible, sélectionnez Afficher > Barres d’outils > Alignement. 4 Pour sélectionner les objets d’une diapositive, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et cliquez sur les différents objets. 5 Effectuez l’une des opérations suivantes : • Cliquez sur une option d’alignement sur la barre d’alignement. • Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur les objets sélectionnés, choisissez Aligner, puis sélectionnez l’option appropriée dans le menu déroulant.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 196 Les coordonnées X (horizontale) et Y (verticale) de la souris s’affichent automatiquement dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre du projet Adobe Captivate lorsque vous déplacez la souris. Les coordonnées peuvent vous aider à placer les objets dans un emplacement précis de la diapositive. Pour aligner des objets, il peut être utile d’afficher la grille. Vous pouvez déplacer les objets en utilisant seulement le clavier. Sélectionnez un objet et appuyez sur une touche de direction de votre clavier pour le déplacer d’un pixel à la fois. Pour déplacer un élément d’un nombre de pixels spécifique, sélectionnez un objet et appuyez sur Ctrl + touche de direction. Pour modifier la hauteur ou la largeur d’un objet de 1 pixel, maintenez enfoncée la touche Maj tout en appuyant sur une touche fléchée. De même, maintenez enfoncées les touches Alt+Maj et appuyez sur une touche fléchée pour une modification de 15 pixels à la fois. Sur la nouvelle barre d’outils Scène, les options de Taille et Position sont utiles pour aligner les objets. Alignement des objets dans le plan de montage chronologique Le plan de montage chronologique permet de facilement aligner des objets. Par exemple, vous pouvez aligner des objets sur la tête de lecture, le début d’une diapositive, la fin d’une diapositive, un autre objet ou un moment spécifique. Pour afficher le plan de montage chronologique d’Adobe Captivate : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant les objets que vous voulez aligner. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. Vous pouvez aussi ouvrir le plan de montage chronologique à partir du menu Afficher, en sélectionnant Afficher le plan de montage chronologique, ou bien en utilisant la combinaison de touches Ctrl+Alt+T. Pour aligner un objet sur la tête de lecture : • Cliquez du bouton droit sur un objet du plan de montage, puis sélectionnez Synchroniser sur la tête de lecture. Pour aligner un objet sur le début d’une diapositive : • Cliquez sur un objet du plan de montage et faites-le glisser vers la gauche du plan de montage. Pour prolonger la durée de lecture d’un objet jusqu’à la fin d’une diapositive : Cliquez du bouton droit sur un objet du plan de montage et sélectionnez Afficher pendant le reste de la diapositive. Pour aligner un objet sur un moment spécifique : • Cliquez sur un objet du plan de montage et faites-le glisser vers la gauche ou vers la droite de manière à ce que le bord gauche de la barre de l’objet s’aligne sur le moment correct dans l’en-tête. Par exemple, si une légende s’affiche actuellement en même temps que la diapositive, mais si vous voulez un léger décalage, faites glisser la légende pour que son bord gauche s’aligne sur 2s (un retard de deux secondes) ou sur 4s (un retard de quatre secondes) dans l’en-tête.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 197 Vous pouvez sélectionner plusieurs objets et les déplacer en même temps. Maintenez enfoncée la touche MAJ et cliquez sur des objets pour sélectionner plusieurs objets superposés consécutifs dans le plan de montage. Pour sélectionner des objets non consécutifs, maintenez enfoncée la touche Ctrl et cliquez sur les objets à déplacer. Vous pouvez facilement ajuster le niveau de zoom du plan de montage chronologique. Cliquez sur la règle du plan de montage et augmentez ou diminuez le niveau de zoom à l’aide de la molette de la souris. Vous pouvez également modifier le niveau de zoom à l’aide des frappes de touche. Cliquez sur la règle puis appuyez sur Ctrl+[ pour diminuer le niveau de zoom, sur Ctrl+] pour augmenter le niveau de zoom ou sur Ctrl+W pour définir le niveau de zoom de manière à ce que tous les objets tiennent dans la largeur courante du plan de montage. Modification de l’ordre d’affichage des objets Adobe Captivate vous permet d’ajouter de nombreux objets, comme des légendes, des zones de surbrillance, des animations ou des images, à des diapositives. Vous spécifiez l’ordre d’affichage des objets. Le plan de montage chronologique vous permet d’ajuster la durée de tous les objets sur une diapositive. Pour modifier l’ordre des objets à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Allez à la diapositive qui contient les objets dont vous voulez modifier l’ordre. 3 Si le plan de montage chronologique n’est pas déjà ouvert, affichez-le en cliquant sur la barre de séparation. Pour agrandir le plan de montage chronologique, cliquez sur la flèche. Vous pouvez aussi ouvrir le plan de montage chronologique en utilisant Afficher > Afficher le plan de montage chronologique ou Ctrl+Alt+T. 4 Modifiez l’ordre et la durée des objets selon vos besoins. Par exemple, déplacez la souris vers le bord gauche ou droit d’un objet du plan de montage jusqu’à ce que le curseur de redimensionnement s’affiche, puis faites glisser le bord gauche ou droit. Cela permet de modifier le moment et la durée d’affichage de l’objet. Si un objet s’affiche en même temps que la diapositive, mais si vous voulez qu’il s’affiche avec un léger retard, déplacez la souris sur le centre de l’objet sur le plan de montage jusqu’à ce que le symbole en forme de main s’affiche. Ensuite, faites glisser l’objet entier de manière à ce que le bord gauche s’aligne sur 2s (un retard de deux secondes) ou 4s (un retard de quatre secondes) dans l’en-tête. 5 Si deux objets se recouvrent sur la diapositive, vous devez sélectionner l’objet qui doit apparaître sur l’avant en définissant l’ordre de superposition. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène » de la diapositive. Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les objets à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres objets. Utilisez une des méthodes suivantes pour définir l’ordre de superposition. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, cliquez du bouton droit sur un objet de la diapositive et sélectionnez une des options d’ordre. Vous pouvez cliquer du bouton droit sur d’autres objets de la diapositive et modifier leur ordre. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, sur le plan de montage chronologique, placez la souris sur un objet jusqu’à ce que la main s’affiche et faites glisser l’objet vers le haut ou vers le bas pour modifier sa position dans l’ordre de superposition. Le déplacement d’un objet plus haut dans l’ordre de superposition le déplace vers l’avant de la scène, alors que le déplacement d’un objet plus bas le déplace vers l’arrière de la scène. Remarque : Si l’ordre d’une mini-diapositive est modifié, les objets qu’elle contient sont également déplacés vers l’avant ou vers l’arrière avec la mini-diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 198 Modification de la taille de plusieurs objets Si vous avez plusieurs objets sur une diapositive, comme par exemple plusieurs légendes, une zone de surbrillance et une zone de clic, vous pouvez modifier la taille de tous ces objets en même temps. Ces objets peuvent être redimensionnés de façon exacte ou les uns par rapport aux autres. Pour modifier la taille de plusieurs objets : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez une diapositive contenant plus d’un objet, par exemple deux légendes. Vous pouvez également ouvrir une diapositive et y ajouter plus d’un objet. 3 Pour sélectionner les objets, maintenez la touche Maj enfoncée et cliquez sur les différents objets. 4 Sélectionnez Modifier > Taille ou cliquez du bouton droit sur l’un des objets sélectionnés et sélectionnez Taille. Remarque : Cette option n’est pas disponible si l’un des objets sélectionnés est une mini-diapositive de survol. 5 Sélectionnez la largeur et la hauteur de votre choix. La zone Largeur contient les options suivantes : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver la taille des objets sélectionnés. Rétrécir selon le plus petit Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la largeur de tous les objets sélectionnés selon la largeur du plus petit objet. Agrandir selon le plus grand Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la largeur de tous les objets sélectionnés selon la largeur du plus grand objet. Largeur personnalisée Sélectionnez cette option pour définir une largeur exacte pour les objets sélectionnés. Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir une nouvelle largeur. La zone Hauteur contient les options suivantes : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option pour conserver la hauteur des objets sélectionnés. Rétrécir selon le plus petit Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la hauteur de tous les objets sélectionnés selon la hauteur du plus petit objet. Agrandir selon le plus grand Sélectionnez cette option pour modifier la hauteur de tous les objets sélectionnés selon la hauteur du plus grand. Hauteur personnalisée Sélectionnez cette option pour définir une hauteur exacte pour les objets sélectionnés. 6 Tapez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir une nouvelle hauteur. 7 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Les coordonnées X (horizontal) et Y (vertical) de la souris s’affichent automatiquement dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre du projet Adobe Captivate lorsque vous déplacez la souris. Les coordonnées peuvent vous aider à placer les objets dans un emplacement précis de la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 199 Alignement des objets sur la grille Adobe Captivate contient une grille facultative que vous pouvez afficher lorsque vous travaillez sur des diapositives dans l’affichage Modifier. La grille vous permet de placer et positionner les objets sur une diapositive avec plus de précision. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Accrocher à la grille pour que les objets placés près des lignes de la grille soient automatiquement « accrochés » aux lignes les plus proches. Pour afficher la grille : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Afficher > Afficher la grille. La grille, un ensemble de points clairs, s’affiche sur la diapositive. Pour aligner des objets sur les lignes de la grille : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur une diapositive pour ouvrir l’affichage Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Afficher > Accrocher à la grille. 4 Pour tester le comportement d’accrochage à la grille, ajoutez un objet à la diapositive, comme par exemple une zone de surbrillance, et déplacez la zone. Elle s’aligne automatiquement sur les lignes de la grille. Pour modifier l’échelle de la grille : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Global. 4 Dans la zone Options de la grille, entrez la nouvelle valeur correspondant à la taille de la grille. Si vous choisissez un nombre plus grand, la grille aura moins de lignes, alors que si vous choisissez un nombre plus petit, la grille affichera plus de lignes pour un positionnement plus précis. Les coordonnées X (horizontal) et Y (vertical) de la souris s’affichent automatiquement dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre du projet Adobe Captivate lorsque vous déplacez la souris. Les coordonnées peuvent vous aider à placer les objets dans un emplacement précis de la diapositive. Vous pouvez déplacer les objets en utilisant seulement le clavier. Sélectionnez un objet et appuyez sur une touche de direction de votre clavier pour le déplacer d’un pixel à la fois. Pour déplacer un élément d’un nombre de pixels spécifique, sélectionnez un objet et appuyez sur Ctrl + touche de direction. Vous pouvez aussi accéder aux options Afficher la grille et Accrocher à la grille en cliquant sur le menu Options et en sélectionnant Préférences. Ces options s’affichent aussi sur la nouvelle barre d’outils au-dessus de la zone de scène.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 200 Ajustement au pixel près de la taille et de la position des objets Vous pouvez spécifier la position d’un objet en ajustant la valeur d’alignement en haut et à gauche au pixel près, et sa taille en ajustant sa hauteur et sa largeur au pixel près. Lorsque vous sélectionnez un objet sur une diapositive en affichage Modifier, quatre zones de texte s’affichent sur la barre d’outils au-dessus de la diapositive. Les zones de texte G, H, L et U concernent l’alignement Gauche et Haut, ainsi que les dimensions de Largeur et de Hauteur. Le cadenas à droite des zones de texte sert à conserver les proportions de l’objet. Lorsque l’option Contraindre les proportions est activée, le cadenas est fermé ; lorsque cette option n’est pas sélectionnée pour cet objet, le cadenas est ouvert. Remarque : Ces options sont également affichées sur l’onglet Taille et position de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de chaque objet, accessible en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur un objet puis en sélectionnant Propriétés. Fusion des objets dans une diapositive Les objets que vous créez et placez dans une diapositive, par exemple une image, une légende, une zone de clic, une zone de surbrillance, une zone de texte ou un bouton, peuvent être fusionnés dans la diapositive. La fusion supprime définitivement l’interactivité de l’objet en en faisant une image de l’objet. La fonctionnalité de fusion peut s’avérer utile dans plusieurs situations. Par exemple, si vous importez une grande image dans une diapositive contenant d’autres objets, vous pouvez fusionner l’image dans la diapositive pour qu’elle serve d’arrière-plan statique pour les autres objets. Vous pouvez faire en sorte que le texte fasse partie intégrante d’une diapositive en créant une légende de texte transparente et en fusionnant la légende. Pour fusionner un objet dans une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant l’objet que vous voulez fusionner. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur l’objet que vous voulez fusionner dans la diapositive (par exemple, une image, une légende ou une zone de clic). 4 Sélectionnez Fusionner dans l’arrière-plan dans le menu déroulant. 5 Un message de mise en garde s’affiche avertissant que la fusion ne peut pas être annulée et vous demandant de confirmer la fusion. Cliquez sur Oui. L’objet est fusionné dans la diapositive. Remarque : La fusion des objets d’une mini-diapositive dans l’arrière-plan fusionne les objets dans l’arrière-plan de la mini-diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 201 Gestion des objets interactifs La boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée permet de voir et de modifier tous les objets interactifs du projet. La boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée s’ouvre dans une fenêtre distincte. Quand vous avez fini d’examiner et de modifier les propriétés de l’objet interactif, cliquez sur Fermer. Remarque : La boîte de dialogue contient de nombreuses informations ; pour faciliter l’examen des informations du projet, il est possible d’imprimer cette boîte de dialogue en cliquant sur Imprimer. Pour afficher et modifier les informations relatives à un objet dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Interaction avancée ou appuyez sur F9. La boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée affiche alors la liste réductible de tous les objets interactifs du projet. 3 Filtrez la liste en cliquant sur le bouton correspondant au type d’objet à afficher, en haut de la fenêtre. Remarque : Vous pouvez choisir de filtrer les objets en fonction de tous les objets pouvant faire l’objet d’un score, des zones de clic, des zones de texte, des boutons, des question ou des diapositives masquées. 4 Cliquez sur le titre d’une diapositive ou sur un objet pour le sélectionner. Remarque : Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner une diapositive spécifique en faisant défiler la bande de film dans le volet de gauche de la boîte de dialogue puis en cliquant sur cette diapositive. Pour supprimer Imprimer de l’affichage, cliquez sur le bouton Imprimer. 5 Pour afficher ou modifier les propriétés ou les résultats d’une diapositive ou d’un objet, cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) où qu’il apparaisse. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner ou effacer des options et modifier les sélections dans les menus déroulants ; les propriétés s’affichent dans les colonnes suivantes : Diapositive/objet Cette colonne contient le nom de la diapositive ou de l’objet. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour afficher la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l’objet ou de la diapositive. En cas de réussite Cette colonne affiche la navigation qui suit la diapositive si l’utilisateur a réussi l’action associée à un objet. Tentatives Cette colonne affiche le nombre maximum de tentatives défini comme limite pour un objet interactif. En cas d’échec Si un objet ou une diapositive présente une possibilité d’échec (si, par exemple, une réponse erronée est sélectionnée pour une question à choix multiples), cette colonne indique ce qui suit la diapositive en cas d’échec. Raccourci Cette colonne permet d’afficher et de modifier les raccourcis clavier d’une diapositive ou d’un objet. Limite de temps Cette colonne affiche la limite de temps d’objets spécifiques. Points Cette colonne affiche le nombre total de points associé à chaque diapositive. Ajouter au total Cette colonne permet d’ajouter ou de supprimer les objets faisant l’objet d’un score au nombre total de points. Suivi du score Cette option permet à l’objet interactif de générer un score pour le quiz général du projet. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, Adobe Captivate ajouter le score de l’objet au score général. (La sélection de cette option sélectionne également l’option Inclure dans le quiz de l’onglet Communication de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l’objet.)ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 202 Communiquer la réponse Cette option permet d’intégrer les scores du quiz du projet à un système de gestion de l’apprentissage. (La sélection de cette option sélectionne également l’option Communiquer les réponses de l’onglet Communication de la boîte de dialogue des propriétés de l’objet.) ID de l’objectif et ID de l’interaction Ces colonnes contiennent les numéros d’ID, si vous les avez définis, pour l’intégration à un système de gestion de l’apprentissage. 6 Quand vous avez fini d’examiner et de modifier les propriétés de l’objet interactif, cliquez sur Fermer.203 Chapitre 12 : Edition des projets Après avoir enregistré ou créé un projet Adobe Captivate, vous disposez de nombreuses options de modification. Détermination de la taille du projet Certaines procédures nécessitent de connaître la largeur et la hauteur du projet. Ces informations sont particulièrement importantes lorsque vous décidez du mode de publication et d’affichage de ce projet pour les utilisateurs. Pour déterminer la taille du projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Depuis l’affichage Scénarimage, examinez les informations sur le projet dans le volet de gauche. La résolution décrit la largeur et la hauteur du projet en pixels. Remarque : Si nécessaire, il est possible de modifier la taille du projet en sélectionnant Redimensionner le projet dans le menu Projet. Suppression de projets ou de modèles Vous pouvez supprimer des projets (fichiers CP) ou des modèles (CPTL) de projet Adobe Captivate à tout moment. Lorsque vous créez des projets et des modèles Adobe Captivate, ceux-ci sont enregistrés par défaut aux emplacements suivants : • Les projets sont enregistrés dans \Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, le chemin est \Users\\Documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. • Les modèles sont enregistrés dans \Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates. Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, le chemin est \Users\\Documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates. Pour supprimer un projet ou un modèle : 1 Ouvrez l’Explorateur Windows. 2 Ouvrez l’emplacement du projet ou du modèle Adobe Captivate (voir la liste des emplacements par défaut cidessus). 3 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le projet ou le modèle et sélectionnez Supprimer. Remarque : La liste Ouvrir un projet récent dans la page de démarrage d’Adobe Captivate peut contenir jusqu’à dix projets. Remarque : Il est possible de masquer un projet sur la page de démarrage sans supprimer le projet de l’ordinateur.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 204 Masquage de projets Adobe Captivate vous permet de masquer un projet sur la page de démarrage. Le projet reste dans le dossier Mes projets Adobe Captivate (dans le dossier Mes documents), mais n’apparaît pas sur la page de démarrage à l’ouverture d’Adobe Captivate. Cette option est utile si vous avez des anciens projets que vous voulez conserver, mais si vous n’avez pas besoin qu’ils s’affichent chaque fois que vous ouvrez Adobe Captivate. Pour masquer un projet sur la page de démarrage : 1 Lancez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sous Ouvrir un projet récent, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur un projet puis sélectionnez l’option Masquer le projet. Remarque : La liste Ouvrir un projet récent dans la page de démarrage d’Adobe Captivate peut contenir jusqu’à dix projets. Prévisualisation de projets Vous pouvez prévisualiser un projet Adobe Captivate au fur et à mesure que vous le créez. Vous pouvez afficher le projet comme les utilisateurs le verront. Pour prévisualiser un projet : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate que vous voulez prévisualiser. 3 Sur la barre d’outils principale, cliquez sur Aperçu et sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : Lire cette diapositive Pour afficher la diapositive actuelle uniquement. Projet Pour afficher la totalité du projet du début à la fin. A partir de cette diapositive Pour afficher le projet de la diapositive actuelle jusqu’à la fin. 5 diapositives suivantes Pour afficher cinq diapositives en commençant par la diapositive actuelle. Dans le navigateur Web Pour afficher le projet dans le navigateur Web par défaut (Internet Explorer, Netscape, Opera, etc.). Adobe Captivate génère le projet et l’affiche dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. Remarque : Lorsque vous publiez des projets, vous pouvez sélectionner la version de Flash utilisée par Adobe Captivate pour générer le fichier SWF. Pour la prévisualisation cependant, Adobe Captivate utilise automatiquement la version de Flash Active X installée sur votre ordinateur. Pour modifier le nombre de diapositives associé à l’option 5 diapositives suivantes : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 205 4 Dans Aperçu suivant, entrez une valeur correspondant au nombre de diapositives que vous souhaitez prévisualiser. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Changement de nom des projets Vous pouvez renommer des projets Adobe Captivate (fichiers CP) à tout moment à l’aide de l’Explorateur Windows. Lorsque vous créez des projets Adobe Captivate, ils sont enregistrés par défaut dans un dossier nommé Mes projets Adobe Captivate, situé dans le dossier Mes documents. Vous pouvez cependant enregistrer les projets où vous voulez. Pour renommer un projet : 1 Ouvrez l’Explorateur Windows. 2 Naviguez vers le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier CP) que vous voulez renommer. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur le fichier CP, puis sélectionnez Renommer. 4 Tapez un nouveau nom pour le projet et appuyez sur ENTREE. Redimensionnement des projets Vous pouvez redimensionner les projets Adobe Captivate, même après les avoir enregistrés. Cette fonctionnalité peut s’avérer très utile et peut vous éviter d’avoir à réenregistrer un projet entier. Par exemple, imaginons que vous ayez enregistré un projet avec une largeur de 640 et une hauteur de 480. Vous réalisez ensuite que vous avez besoin d’une taille légèrement inférieure ou supérieure. Remarque : Le redimensionnement d’un projet ne peut pas être annulé en utilisant le bouton de la barre d’outils ni une combinaison de touches telle que Ctrl+Z. Remarque : Par ailleurs, si vous redimensionnez un projet plusieurs fois, cela risque d’altérer sa qualité. Dans la mesure du possible, essayez de ne pas redimensionner un projet plus d’une fois. Pour redimensionner un projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Redimensionner le projet. 3 Sous Taille, entrez la taille personnalisée exacte en pixels dans Largeur et Hauteur (taille minimum de 100 x 100), ou entrez un pourcentage de la largeur et de la hauteur, la taille courante étant de 100 %. (Par exemple, pour agrandir légèrement un projet, entrez 110 % ; pour réduire de manière importante, entrez 50 %.) Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Taille prédéfinie et sélectionnez une taille couramment utilisée, comme par exemple 640 X 480, dans le menu déroulant. Vous pouvez également sélectionner l’option Conserver le rapport de taille afin de conserver les proportions de hauteur et largeur lorsque l’image est redimensionnée. Cela permet de garantir que l’image s’affiche correctement, sans déformation. 4 Vous avez différentes options si la nouvelle taille que vous sélectionnez est supérieure ou inférieure à la taille d’origine.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 206 Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la zone Si la nouvelle taille est plus grande : Mettre le projet à l’échelle pour l’ajuster à sa nouvelle taille Cette option redimensionne la totalité du projet à la nouvelle taille supérieure que vous avez spécifiée. Pour mettre également à l’échelle les objets du projet, sélectionnez l’option Mettre à l’échelle les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les autres objets. Conserver la taille d’origine du projet et remplir l’arrière-plan avec une couleur Cette option conserve la taille du projet, mais crée pour le projet un arrière-plan de la taille que vous avez spécifiée. Si, par exemple, le projet original mesure 550 x 400 pixels et si vous définissez la nouvelle taille à 640 x 480, cette option conserve le projet à la dimension 550 x 400 et crée un espace supplémentaire de 90 x 80 autour du projet. Vous pouvez sélectionner une couleur d’arrière-plan et choisir la position du projet sur l’arrière-plan, par exemple Centre ou En haut à droite. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la zone Si la nouvelle taille est plus petite : Mettre à l’échelle Cette option met à l’échelle et rééchantillonne le projet pour fournir un projet de bonne qualité. Pour mettre également à l’échelle les objets du projet, sélectionnez l’option Mettre à l’échelle les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les autres objets. Recadrer Cette option rogne le projet pour l’adapter à la nouvelle taille. Si vous sélectionnez l’option de recadrage, cliquez sur Suivant pour afficher la boîte de dialogue Zone de recadrage dans laquelle vous pouvez définir une zone de recadrage. Mettre à l’échelle les légendes, les zones de surbrillance et les autres objets Sélectionnez cette option pour qu’Adobe Captivate mette automatiquement à l’échelle tous les objets du projet, tels que les légendes, les zones de surbrillance, les zones de clic et les zones de texte, en fonction de la nouvelle taille inférieure. 5 Cliquez sur Terminer. Le projet est redimensionné en fonction de vos choix. Remarque : Nous vous recommandons de redimensionner les boutons avant de redimensionner le projet. En effet, le redimensionnement d’un projet ne redimensionne pas automatiquement les boutons. Définition de la couleur d’arrière-plan Vous pouvez définir la couleur d’arrière-plan d’un projet. Selon le type de diapositive et la façon dont la capture d’écran est effectuée, la couleur d’arrière-plan apparaîtra ou non sur toutes les diapositives. Pour définir la couleur d’arrière-plan : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Dans la zone Effets visuels et audio, sélectionnez une couleur dans le menu déroulant Couleur d’arrière-plan du projet. a Choisissez une couleur dans la palette de base. b Cliquez sur Plus de couleurs pour créer une couleur personnalisée. c Cliquez sur l’icône de pipette pour sélectionner et copier n’importe quelle couleur sur votre écran. d Dans le champ texte, entrez la valeur de la couleur de votre choix et appuyez sur Entrée.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 207 5 Cliquez sur OK. Définition des préférences du projet Il est possible de définir de nombreuses préférences du projet. Tous les préférences sélectionnées ne concernent que le projet actuellement ouvert, ce qui vous permet de définir différents paramètres pour différents projets. Il est facile de définir les préférences d’un projet pour les réutiliser pour créer d’autres projets à l’avenir. Créez simplement un projet vide, définissez des préférences en suivant la procédure ci-dessous, puis enregistrez le projet vide sous forme de modèle. Vous pouvez utiliser le nouveau modèle pour créer autant de projets que vous le souhaitez. Pour définir les préférences du projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez Projet et sélectionnez Début et fin. Ecran de chargement Cette option permet d’afficher un écran de chargement au début du projet. Un écran de chargement peut s’avérer utile si la première diapositive du projet est volumineuse ou contient de l’audio et met un moment à s’afficher. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour sélectionner une image. Remarque : Adobe Captivate comprend plusieurs images d’écran de chargement que vous pouvez utiliser. Vous pouvez également créer une image personnalisée. Pour utiliser une image personnalisée comme option d’écran de chargement, utilisez l’Explorateur de Windows pour copier-coller l’image dans le dossier suivant : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Preloaders. Les formats suivants sont pris en charge : JPG, JPEG, GIF, PNG, BMP, ICO, EMF, WMF et SWF. Protéger un projet par un mot de passe Cette option établit un mot de passe que les utilisateurs doivent saisir pour pouvoir voir le projet. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour définir un mot de passe et rédiger les messages portant sur le mot de passe pour les utilisateurs. Date d’expiration du projet Cette option permet de définir la date d’expiration du projet. Lorsqu’un projet expire, il ne peut plus être visionné. Message ligne 1 Cette option vous permet de rédiger un message d’expiration. Ce message s’affiche si le projet a atteint sa date d’expiration (définie précédemment) et qu’un utilisateur essaie de l’afficher. Message ligne 2 Cette option vous permet éventuellement d’ajouter une seconde ligne de texte au message d’expiration du projet. Apparition en fondu de la première diapositive Cette option fait apparaître la première diapositive du projet en fondu. Action Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez l’action qui se déroulera à la fin du projet. • Arrêter le projet Cette option arrête le projet après une lecture. • Projet en boucle Cette option permet de lire le projet en boucle. (Lorsque la fin est atteinte, le projet redémarre au début.) • Fermer le projet Cette option permet de fermer la fenêtre de navigation à la fin du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 208 • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Cette option permet d’obtenir le chargement d’une adresse URL ou d’un fichier à la fin du projet. Pour charger une adresse URL, tapez le chemin entier vers un site (par exemple, http://www.siteweb.com). Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. Pour charger un fichier, cliquez sur Parcourir (...), naviguez jusqu’au fichier, sélectionnez-le, puis cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle le fichier doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. • Exécuter JavaScript Sélectionnez cette option pour exécuter une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour entrer le JavaScript que vous voulez exécuter. • Ouvrir un autre projet Cette option permet d’ouvrir un autre projet à la fin du projet actuel. Cliquez sur Parcourir (...), naviguez jusqu’au fichier du projet (avec l’extension SWF, RD ou CP), sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur Ouvrir. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle le fichier doit s’afficher. Vous avez le choix entre Courant, Nouveau, Parent et En haut. • Envoyer un e-mail à Cette option permet d’ouvrir le navigateur de messagerie par défaut et d’envoyer un message à la fin du projet. Tapez l’adresse entière (par exemple, jean@entreprisexyz.com). Disparition en fondu de la dernière diapositive Cette option permet de configurer la dernière diapositive du projet pour qu’elle disparaisse progressivement. 4 Sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans la zone Paramètres de projet par défaut, apportez les modifications suivantes en fonction de vos besoins : Durée de la diapositive Spécifie la durée par défaut des nouvelles diapositives vides, d’image et de question. Aperçu suivant Spécifie le nombre par défaut de diapositives pour l’option Aperçu > x diapositives suivantes (bouton Aperçu, barre d’outils principale). Dans la zone Options de sortie, apportez les modifications suivantes en fonction de vos besoins : Compression de projet avancée Cette option compresse les données qui sont partagées entre les diapositives, ce qui réduit la taille du fichier. Dans certains cas, les projets compressés peuvent ne pas s’afficher correctement lorsqu’ils sont importés dans Flash. Dans ce cas, ne sélectionnez pas l’option Compression de projet avancée. Lorsque l’option de compression n’est pas sélectionnée, la taille du fichier augmente. Conforme à la Section 508 Sélectionnez cette option si vous avez besoin de créer des projets Adobe Captivate conformes à la Section 508 et accessibles aux utilisateurs atteints de handicaps. Grâce à cette option, votre projet sera plus lisible par les lecteurs d’écran. Compresser le fichier SWF Cette option compresse le fichier SWF pour qu’il soit plus petit. Un fichier SWF de taille plus petite est plus facile à lire, ouvrir et envoyer par e-mail, surtout sur les ordinateurs plus anciens. (Les fichiers SWF compressés ne sont utilisables qu’avec Flash Player 6 ou une version ultérieure ; les versions précédentes de Flash ne peuvent pas lire les fichiers SWF compressés.) Compresser le fichier SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées Cette option compresse le fichier SWF d’enregistrement d’images animées afin d’en réduire la taille. Si vous choisissez cette option, la prévisualisation ou la publication du projet peut prendre plus longtemps.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 209 Publier les métadonnées du serveur Adobe® Connect™ Sélectionnez cette option pour ajouter au fichier du projet Adobe Captivate (SWF) des informations qui facilitent son intégration au serveur Adobe Connect. Ces données intégrées lient le fichier CP Adobe Captivate au fichier SWF lorsque vous publiez le projet sur le serveur Adobe Connect et elles facilitent la recherche du fichier de sortie Adobe Captivate sur le serveur Adobe Connect. Remarque : Cette option augmente la taille du fichier du projet. Si vous ne pensez pas utiliser le projet avec le serveur Adobe Connect, vous pouvez supprimer cette option et réduire ainsi la taille du fichier de projet terminé (SWF). Toutefois, s’il est envisageable que le fichier de sortie (SWF) puisse être utilisé sur le serveur Adobe Connect, il est préférable d’activer l’option Inclure les métadonnées. Images par secondes Cette option définit le nombre d’images Flash qui s’affichent par seconde. Le paramètre par défaut de 30 images par seconde est approprié dans la plupart des cas. Par exemple, avec le paramètre par défaut, une légende qui s’affiche pendant une seconde exige 30 images Flash. En divisant le nombre d’images d’un projet par 30, on obtient donc la durée du projet en secondes. Il est possible que vous deviez modifier la vitesse si vous intégrez votre fichier Adobe Captivate SWF dans un autre fichier SWF dont la vitesse de défilement est différente de 30. Dans la zone Effets visuels et audio, apportez les modifications suivantes en fonction de vos besoins : Couleur d’arrière-plan du projet Cette option spécifie la couleur d’arrière-plan du projet. En fonction du type de diapositive et de la méthode de capture des écrans, la couleur d’arrière-plan peut ne pas apparaître sur toutes les diapositives. Double-cliquez sur la case de couleur pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Couleur et sélectionner une nouvelle couleur. Qualité d’images BMP Définit la qualité du fichier bitmap. Qualité des images JPEG Spécifie le niveau de qualité des images JPEG. Vous pouvez modifier ce paramètre en fonction de la nature des images utilisées dans votre projet. Souvent les images JPEG sont détaillées et contiennent de nombreuses couleurs. Par conséquent, la diminution de leur qualité se remarque. Plus le pourcentage est élevé, meilleure est la qualité d’image. Bien entendu, la taille du fichier augmente en conséquence. Modifiez la qualité en cliquant sur les flèches pour sélectionner un nombre supérieur ou inférieur. Qualité audio Spécifie le niveau de qualité de l’audio du projet. Une qualité plus élevée augmente la taille du fichier. Remarque : Lorsque vous sélectionnez une qualité plus élevée pour un fichier audio, la taille du fichier augmente. Parfois, cependant, la sélection d’un niveau de qualité supérieur n’augmente pas énormément la taille du fichier, mais améliore considérablement la qualité audio. Testez différents niveaux de qualité audio pour trouver le paramètre optimal. Pas de lissage des légendes Le texte de légende transparent dans le fichier publié est lissé. Si vous cochez cette option, le texte transparent ne sera pas lissé. Le lissage adoucit les bords du texte dans le fichier publié. Cette option affecte la taille du fichier SWF lors de la publication du projet. Inclure la souris lors de la génération du projet Cette option inclut les déplacements de souris enregistrés dans le projet. Inclure l’audio lorsque le projet est généré Cette option inclut les fichiers audio qui ont été ajoutés au projet. Lire le son de frappe enregistré lorsque le projet est généré Cette option permet de rejouer le son des frappes de touches dans le projet final. Par exemple, si vous enregistrez l’envoi d’un message e-mail, vous tapez sans doute une adresse e-mail. Le son des touches utilisées pour saisir l’adresse a été enregistré. Grâce à cette option, un son de frappe peut être lu pour chaque touche utilisée. 5 Sélectionnez Audio d’arrière-plan dans le menu déroulant Projet. Lire l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour lire le fichier audio.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 210 Arrêter l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour arrêter le fichier audio. Supprimer l’audio Cliquez sur ce bouton pour supprimer le fichier audio d’arrière-plan. Modifier Affiche la boîte de dialogue Modifier l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de modifier le fichier audio de différentes manières, telles qu’insérer des périodes de silence et régler le volume. Enregistrer nouveau Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer l’audio. L’enregistrement audio nécessite un minimum de matériel. Importer Affiche la boîte de dialogue Importer de l’audio. Cette boîte de dialogue permet de naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio et de l’importer. Sélectionner l’audio à partir de la bibliothèque Cliquez sur ce bouton pour ouvrir la bibliothèque. La bibliothèque répertorie tous les fichiers audio du projet Adobe Captivate actuellement ouvert. Paramètres Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Paramètres audio afin de définir des paramètres comme la source d’entrée, le niveau de qualité et la calibration. Cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications apportées dans cette boîte de dialogue. Apparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour atteindre progressivement son volume maximum. Disparition en fondu [#] secondes Spécifie la durée (en secondes) nécessaire à l’audio pour disparaître progressivement. Baisser le volume de l’audio d’arrière-plan sur les diapositives contenant d’autre audio Sélectionnez cette option pour baisser le volume du son d’arrière-plan sur les diapositives contenant d’autres fichiers audio. Lire l’audio en boucle Sélectionnez cette option pour lire le fichier audio d’arrière-plan en boucle pendant toute la durée du projet. Cette fonctionnalité est utile si le fichier audio est plus court que le projet. Arrêter l’audio à la fin du projet Sélectionnez cette option pour arrêter la lecture du fichier audio lorsque le projet est terminé. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Ajout d’un écran de chargement Vous pouvez ajouter un écran de chargement au début de votre projet. Un écran de chargement peut s’avérer utile si la première diapositive du projet est volumineuse ou contient de l’audio et met un moment à s’afficher. Adobe Captivate inclut des images d’écran de chargement prédéfinies que vous pouvez réutiliser. Vous pouvez aussi créer une image personnalisée à utiliser comme écran de chargement. Pour utiliser une image personnalisée comme écran de chargement, utilisez l’explorateur Windows pour la copier-coller dans le dossier suivant : Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Preloaders. Vous pouvez également créer un fichier SWF à utiliser comme écran de chargement. Le dossier Preloaders d’Adobe Captivate contient un fichier SWF et un fichier FLA d’exemple (à rechercher avec l’Explorateur Windows) nommés DefaultPreloader. Vous pouvez utiliser ces fichiers comme modèles pour créer votre propre fichier SWF. Si vous ajoutez un écran de chargement personnalisé, Captivate appellera les fonctions suivantes si elles existent sur le plan de montage chronologique principal du fichier SWF :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 211 function initialize(projectWidth:Number, projectHeight:Number) function onProgress(loadedBytes:Number,totalBytes:Number) function isDone():Boolean Pour ajouter un écran de chargement : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez Projet et sélectionnez Début et fin. 4 Dans la zone Options de début du projet, sélectionnez l’option Ecran de chargement. Cliquer sur Parcourir (...) et sélectionnez un fichier dans le dossier Preloaders. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option Ecran de chargement sans spécifier de fichier, Adobe Captivate utilise par défaut le fichier DefaultPreloader.swf. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Définitions des propriétés du projet Lorsque vous définissez les propriétés du projet, vous spécifiez les informations générales du projet visibles aux utilisateurs depuis le bouton d’informations fourni avec toutes les commandes de lecture. Il est important de définir les propriétés si vous créez des projets conformes à la Section 508 accessibles aux utilisateurs handicapés. Pour définir les propriétés du projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Général. 4 Entrez les informations dans les champs suivants selon vos besoins : Nom du projet Nom individuel et descriptif du projet. Auteur Le nom de l’auteur du projet. Société Le nom de la société ou de l’organisation. E-mail Une adresse électronique. Dans la plupart des cas, il est préférable d’entrer l’adresse électronique générale de votre organisation ou, le cas échéant, celle de votre service d’assistance technique. Site Web L’adresse Web (URL) de votre société ou organisation. Copyright Les informations concernant le copyright de votre projet. Description Une courte description du contenu du projet. Par exemple : « Ce projet présente brièvement le produit ZYX et ses principales fonctionnalités. » 5 Cliquez sur OK. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 212 Utilisation d’un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé Adobe Captivate comprend une fonctionnalité qui enregistre un son de frappe sur clavier chaque fois que vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier lors de l’enregistrement d’un projet. Vous pouvez inclure ou exclure les sons de frappe. Vous pouvez également créer un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé. Pour utiliser un son de frappe sur clavier personnalisé : 1 Créez un nouveau son pour les touches ou utilisez un fichier MP3 existant (c’est-à-dire un des fichiers son Windows). 2 Nommez le nouveau fichier son KeyClick.mp3. 3 Enregistrez le fichier et notez le répertoire dans lequel il est enregistré. 4 Avec l’Explorateur Windows, ouvrez le dossier des effets sonores d’Adobe Captivate. (L’emplacement par défaut est C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\SoundEffects.) 5 Trouvez le fichier KeyClick.mp3. Il s’agit du fichier de son de frappe par défaut d’Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Avant d’écraser le fichier, copiez et déplacez le fichier KeyClick.mp3 d’origine dans un dossier de sauvegarde de manière à pouvoir l’utiliser de nouveau en cas de besoin. 6 Copiez le nouveau son de frappe depuis l’emplacement de l’étape 3 ci-dessus et collez-le dans le dossier des effets sonores d’Adobe Captivate. 7 Vérifiez que l’option de son de frappe est sélectionnée. Vérification de l’orthographe des projets Adobe Captivate Adobe Captivate vous permet de vérifier l’orthographe du texte des projets dans notamment les légendes, les annotations de diapositives, les noms de diapositives, les animations de texte et les quiz. Avant de vérifier l’orthographe, définissez les options de la vérification d’orthographe. Pour vérifier l’orthographe : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Projet > Vérifier l’orthographe. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur F7. 3 Lorsqu’Adobe Captivate trouve un mot qu’il ne reconnaît pas, ce dernier s’affiche dans le champ Mot non trouvé dans le dictionnaire. Sélectionnez les options appropriées selon ce que vous voulez faire des mots non reconnus : Ignorer une fois Ignore cette instance du mot non reconnu. Tout ignorer Ignore toutes les instances du mot non reconnu. Ajouter au dictionnaire Ajoute le mot non reconnu à votre dictionnaire personnel. Supprimer Supprime le mot non reconnu. Modifier Remplace cette instance du mot non reconnu par le texte que vous tapez dans le champ Mot non trouvé dans le dictionnaire ou par le texte sélectionné dans la liste Suggestions. Tout modif ier Remplace toutes les instances du mot non reconnu de la même manière.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 213 4 (Facultatif) Le dictionnaire anglais est utilisé par défaut pour vérifier l’orthographe. Si vous avez besoin de changer la langue, cliquez sur le menu déroulant dans Langue principale du dictionnaire et sélectionnez une nouvelle langue. 5 (Facultatif) Si vous voulez changer la façon de vérifier l’orthographe, cliquez sur Options. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Fermer. Définition des options de vérification d’orthographe Adobe Captivate vous permet de vérifier l’orthographe du texte de vos projets dans notamment les légendes, les annotations de diapositives, les noms de diapositives, les animations de texte et les quiz. Avant d’utiliser la fonctionnalité de vérification d’orthographe, il peut être souhaitable de réviser et de modifier les options. Pour vérifier les options de la vérification d’orthographe : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Cliquez sur Global. 4 Révisez et définissez les options suivantes : Ignorer les mots commençant par une majuscule Exclut les mots commençant par une lettre majuscule (« Adobe », par exemple) de la vérification d’orthographe. Sélectionnez cette option si votre texte contient de nombreux noms propres. Ignorer les mots en lettres majuscules Exclut les mots écrits en lettres majuscules (par exemple, « MIDI ») de la vérification d’orthographe. Sélectionnez cette option si votre texte contient de nombreux acronymes. Ignorer les mots contenant des nombres Exclut les mots qui contiennent des nombres (par exemple, Q2) de la vérification d’orthographe. Sélectionnez cette option si votre texte contient de nombreux symboles ou codes avec des nombres. Ignorer les mots de casse mixte Exclut les mots écrits en lettres minuscules et majuscules (par exemple, ActionScript) de la vérification d’orthographe. Ignorer les noms de domaine Exclut les mots qui semblent être des noms de domaines Internet (par exemple, www.macromedia.com) de la vérification d’orthographe. Rechercher les doublons Vous avertit lors de la vérification de l’orthographe des mots qui s’affichent deux fois de suite (par exemple, « le le »). Respecter la casse Analyse séparément les versions avec majuscules et sans majuscule des mots. Par exemple, « chicago » et « Chicago » seraient tous les deux vérifiés et le mot en lettres minuscules serait identifié comme une faute d’orthographe. Suggérer des correspondances phonétiques Donne des mots alternatifs basés sur la similarité phonétique du mot mal orthographié. Suggérer des correspondances typographiques Donne des mots alternatifs basés sur la similarité typographique du mot mal orthographié. Suggérer la séparation de mots Donne des suggestions de deux mots pour chaque mot mal orthographié qui semble être formé de deux mots (par exemple, suggérer « appuyer sur » pour « appuyersur ».ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 214 Langue principale du dictionnaire Spécifie la langue du dictionnaire à utiliser au cours de la vérification de l’orthographe. Le dictionnaire par défaut est anglais. Pour modifier la langue, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une nouvelle langue. 5 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Modification du dictionnaire pour la vérification d’orthographe Par défaut, le vérificateur d’orthographe utilise le dictionnaire anglais (Etats-Unis). Vous pouvez changer de dictionnaire et passer à n’importe lequel des dictionnaires installés sur votre ordinateur à tout moment. Pour changer de dictionnaire : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, sélectionnez Global. 4 Dans la zone Préférences d’orthographe, cliquez sur Modifier. 5 Dans le menu déroulant Langue principale du dictionnaire, sélectionnez le dictionnaire que vous voulez utiliser. Tous les dictionnaires installés sur votre ordinateur sont répertoriés. 6 Cliquez sur OK. 7 Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Recherche de diapositives et remplacement de contenu Vous pouvez utiliser les nombreuses options proposées par la fonction de recherche d’Adobe Captivate pour rechercher des informations dans vos diapositives. En plus du texte, vous pouvez localiser différents types d’objets tels qu’une animation de texte ou une image de survol. Pour rechercher et remplacer du contenu : 1 Sélectionnez Modifier > Rechercher et remplacer. La boîte de dialogue Rechercher et remplacer apparaît. 2 Sélectionnez le type de recherche dans le menu déroulant Rechercher dans. La sélection du type détermine les champs qui seront activés dans la boîte de dialogue. 3 Dans le champ Rechercher, entrez le texte ou l’objet à rechercher. Remarque : Le champ Rechercher est activé uniquement pour les recherches portant sur Toutes les commandes, Zone de texte, Bouton et Animation de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 215 4 (Facultatif) Dans le champ Remplacer, entrez le texte qui doit remplacer les éléments trouvés. Remarque : L’option Remplacer est activée uniquement pour les recherches portant sur Toutes les commandes, Zone de texte, Bouton et Animation de texte. 5 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options suivantes : Mot entier Ignorer les différentes formes du texte. Par exemple, rechercher « spécial », mais pas « spécialiste ». Respecter la casse Par exemple, rechercher « Chaise », mais pas « chaise ». Diapositives du quiz Inclure les diapositives de quiz dans la recherche. Diapositives/Commandes masquées Inclure les diapositives ou les commandes masquées dans la recherche. Diapositives/Commandes verrouillées Inclure les diapositives ou les commandes verrouillées dans la recherche. 6 Vous pouvez cliquer sur les boutons suivants : Rechercher suivant L’occurrence suivante du texte ou de l’objet est mise en surbrillance. Tout rechercher Le résultat de la recherche répertorie toutes les instances du texte ou de l’objet. Remplacer Le texte trouvé et sélectionné est remplacé par le texte saisi dans le champ Remplacer. Tout remplacer Toutes les instances du texte figurant dans le champ Rechercher sont remplacées par le texte saisi dans le champ Remplacer. Important: Utilisez Tout remplacer uniquement lorsque vous êtes certain qu’aucune instance du texte recherché ne doit rester intacte. .216 Chapitre 13 : Création de contenu d’apprentissage électronique Adobe Captivate permet de créer des projets d’apprentissage électronique réellement interactifs et totalement compatibles avec les normes SCORM/AICC. L’ajout de la conformité PENS dans Adobe Captivate a nettement simplifié la collecte, la gestion et la publication des résultats de quiz. Avec Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez : • Créer des quiz qui s’intègrent automatiquement à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage. Recueillez les données de score de tous les éléments interactifs, y compris les zones de clic, les zones de texte, les boutons et les quiz. Vous pouvez affecter une pondération, un ID d’objectif et un ID d’interaction à tous les éléments interactifs pour qu’ils soient intégrés dans un système de gestion de l’apprentissage. • Utiliser les paramètres du quiz de la boîte de dialogue Préférences pour définir de nouvelles options PENS et faciliter la gestion et la publication du contenu. • Ajouter divers types de questions dans les projets, y compris des questions à choix multiples, vrai/faux, d’association, de zone sensible, de séquence, à échelle d’évaluation, à compléter et à réponse courte. • Utiliser l’affichage Embranchement pour personnaliser le contenu selon les réponses des utilisateurs. L’embranchement permet de créer des chemins différents en cas de réponses correctes ou incorrectes. Examinez et gérez tous les embranchements de l’affichage Embranchement. • Fournir des commentaires instantanés aux utilisateurs par le biais de messages en cas de réponse correcte, incorrecte ou incomplète. Pour accéder aux options d’apprentissage électronique, sélectionnez Préférences dans le menu Modifier et utilisez les options de quiz dans le panneau Catégorie. Pour ajouter des questions, sélectionnez Diapositive de questions dans le menu Quiz. A propos des embranchements dans les projets Adobe Captivate L’embranchement est un concept important dans la création de documents d’apprentissage électronique efficaces. L’embranchement (parfois nommé « embranchement d’éventualité ») signifie que le chemin qu’un étudiant emprunte dans le programme est déterminé par ses réponses aux questions. C’est une méthode excellente pour personnaliser les documents d’apprentissage. L’embranchement peut être effectué selon les réponses correctes à une question, les réponses incorrectes à une question, une option sélectionnée par l’étudiant ou selon l’expérience de l’étudiant, la catégorie du travail ou toute autre catégorie. Vous pouvez créer des embranchements « intelligents » et sophistiqués dans vos projets Adobe Captivate. Ce chapitre décrit quelques moyens faciles pour ajouter un embranchement au projet. Toutes ces options offrent la possibilité d’évaluer par score les résultats afin qu’ils soient utilisés individuellement ou en combinaison les uns avec les autres. Les diapositives de projets Adobe Captivate peuvent contenir plusieurs objets. Ainsi, par exemple, vous pouvez ajouter une zone de clic sur un élément de menu et un bouton sur une barre d’outils.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 217 Créez des diapositives de questions et spécifiez les différents chemins pour les réponses correctes et erronées. C’est la méthode la plus simple pour ajouter des embranchements. De nombreuses options sont disponibles pour les embranchements de réponses, y compris la poursuite du projet, l’affichage d’une diapositive spécifique ou l’ouverture d’une URL. Vous pouvez définir trois niveaux d’échec et permettre à l’utilisateur trois tentatives pour répondre à une question. Vous pouvez aussi insérer des messages qui s’afficheront en cas de réponse incorrecte. Par exemple, après la première réponse incorrecte, le message « Faux, veuillez réessayer. » pourrait s’afficher. Après la deuxième réponse incorrecte : « Faux, il vous reste un essai », puis, après la troisième, « Désolé, c’est encore faux. Passez à la question suivante. ». Adobe Captivate facilite également l’ajout de messages d’erreur lorsque les réponses sont incorrectes et de messages d’invitation à réessayer comme par exemple « Veuillez essayer de nouveau ». Ajoutez des zones de clic et choisissez les différents chemins si l’utilisateur clique dans la zone de clic ou en dehors de celle-ci. Les zones de clic ont les mêmes options de réponses que les diapositives de questions, mais peuvent être incorporées dans des diapositives existantes au lieu d’avoir leur propre diapositive. Cela vous permet d’ajouter des embranchements et de l’interactivité à vos projets en même temps. Les zones de clic ont d’autres fonctionnalités facultatives y compris l’arrêt de l’audio de la diapositive en cas de clic, la pause du projet jusqu’au clic et l’ajout de légendes de conseil, de succès et d’échec. Ajoutez des zones de texte et créez des embranchements différents si l’utilisateur entre le texte correctement ou incorrectement. Les zones de texte sont très souples et peuvent être utilisées de plusieurs façons. Par exemple, les zones de texte sont une excellente façon de simuler les entrées de données dans une application. Parce qu’elles sont placées sur des diapositives existantes et ne nécessitent pas leur propre diapositive, elles n’interrompent pas le flux du projet autant que le ferait une diapositive de questions. Les zones de texte offrent des options supplémentaires telles que l’affichage d’astérisques à la place des caractères tapés par l’utilisateur pour entrer un mot de passe, l’ajout de la sensibilité à la casse, et l’inclusion de légendes de conseil, de réussite et d’échec. Vous pouvez ajouter des boutons et créer des chemins différents selon que l’utilisateur clique sur le bouton ou en dehors du bouton. Les boutons sont un moyen rapide pour ajouter des embranchements et de l’interactivité à vos projets de manière confortable pour de nombreux utilisateurs. Vous contrôlez entièrement ce qui se passe lorsque les utilisateurs cliquent sur le bouton, comme poursuivre le projet, passer à une diapositive donnée ou ouvrir un programme de messagerie électronique. Vous pouvez également créer le bouton et améliorer son apparence pour votre projet en sélectionnant la couleur de remplissage, les options de texte, le niveau de transparence et la couleur de la bordure. A propos de la modification des embranchements dans les projets Adobe Captivate L’affichage Embranchement offre une représentation visuelle de tous les liens entre les diapositives d’un projet. Le volet gauche contient les sections Propriétés, Présentation et Légende, que vous pouvez toutes réduire. Le volet Propriétés affiche les propriétés de lien de la diapositive ou du lien sélectionné et vous permet de modifier le type de navigation ; le volet Présentation indique quelle portion du projet est examinée dans le volet Embranchement principal ; enfin, le volet Légende définit l’affichage de chaque type de lien entre les diapositives. Le volet principal affiche le type de lien entre les diapositives et vous permet de rechercher et de sélectionner la diapositive que vous voulez consulter. Le volet inférieur affiche les annotations portant sur la diapositive sélectionnée dans le volet principal et vous permet d’en ajouter. Remarque : Pour des informations plus détaillées sur tous les objets interactifs du projet, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Intégration avancée. Dans n’importe quel affichage, sélectionnez Interaction avancée dans le menu Projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 218 Déplacement vers une diapositive dans l’affichage Embranchement Lorsqu’un projet contient un grand nombre de diapositives, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Parcourir à partir de pour visualiser aisément les diapositives souhaitées dans l’affichage Embranchement. Vous pouvez par exemple parcourir à partir de la diapositive sept : les diapositives un à six ne seront pas affichées dans la vue. Pour aller à une diapositive dans l’affichage Embranchement : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Cliquez sur l’onglet Embranchement. 3 Sélectionnez une diapositive. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir à partir de la barre d’outils de l’affichage Embranchement. Les diapositives sont affichées à partir de la diapositive sélectionnée. Le nombre de diapositives affichées dépend des options de zoom qui ont été définies. Utilisez le bouton Parcourir vers l’arrière de la barre d’outils de l’affichage Embranchement pour restaurer l’affichage d’origine des diapositives. Zoom avant dans l’affichage Embranchement Utilisez le curseur de zoom, le menu déroulant ou les boutons de zoom de la barre d’outils de l’affichage Embranchement. Remarque : Vous pouvez effectuer un zoom de 400 % maximum. Exportation de l’affichage Embranchement Vous pouvez exporter l’affichage Embranchement d’un projet Adobe Captivate existant dans un fichier BMP, JPEG ou JPG. Pour exporter un affichage Embranchement : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate dont vous voulez exporter l’affichage Embranchement dans l’affichage Embranchement du projet en cours. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Affichage Embranchement. 3 La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. 4 Dans la zone de texte Nom du fichier, entrez le nom du fichier à enregistrer pour l’exportation. 5 Dans le menu Enregistrer sous, sélectionnez un type de fichier. 6 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez aussi cliquer sur le bouton Exporter l’affichage Embranchement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 219 Création de diapositives de questions Adobe Captivate vous permet de créer des projets d’apprentissage électronique d’apparence professionnelle. Les puissantes fonctionnalités de quiz facilitent la création de différents types de questions comme des questions à choix multiple, à réponse courte, d’association, vrai/faux, d’échelle d’évaluation et à compléter. Vous contrôlez entièrement ce qui se passe lorsque des utilisateurs répondent correctement ou incorrectement à des questions. Par exemple, vous pouvez définir une action (telle que « aller à la diapositive suivante ») lorsqu’un utilisateur répond correctement à une question et définir une action différente (telle que « Ouvrir URL ou fichier ») lorsque l’utilisateur donne une mauvaise réponse. Cela s’appelle un embranchement. Remarque : Voir « Relier des projets Adobe Captivate », page 57 pour plus d’informations sur la façon de relier des projets. Evaluez les performances des étudiants grâce à la fonctionnalité de score adaptée à tout type de quiz. Suivez le nombre de tentatives, les bonnes et les mauvaises réponses, et envoyez les données d’échec/de réussite à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage. Vous pouvez également fournir des commentaires aux étudiants selon leurs réponses correctes ou incorrectes. Vous pouvez créer six types de diapositives de questions dans Adobe Captivate : • Choix multiple • Vrai/ Faux • Champ à compléter • Réponse courte • Association • Zone sensible • Séquence • Echelle d’évaluation (Likert) Conseils et astuces pour créer des quiz La fonctionnalité de quiz d’Adobe Captivate est souple et offre de nombreuses options de conception pour créer des projets d’apprentissage électronique. Par exemple, les quiz peuvent être simples ou plus sophistiqués avec des embranchements détaillés. Voici quelques conseils et astuces à essayer lorsque vous ajoutez des quiz : • Si vous voulez que les utilisateurs aient la possibilité de sauter une question et d’y revenir par la suite, ajoutez un bouton Ignorer. Ce bouton est facultatif, mais il permet aux utilisateurs de mieux se déplacer dans les quiz. • Lorsque vous créez une question d’association, utilisez le glisser-déposer pour ajouter des éléments dans des colonnes. • Ajoutez des commentaires pour communiquer avec les utilisateurs. • Il existe de nombreuses options en cas de réponses correctes ou incorrectes des utilisateurs. Utilisez l’embranchement pour personnaliser les projets en fonction du type d’utilisateurs. • Dans l’affichage Modifier, vous pouvez écrire des messages de réussite et d’échec personnalisés, personnaliser la diapositive avec des couleurs d’arrière-plan, modifier la diapositive de résultat du quiz et choisir l’affichage du score du quiz.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 220 • Pour afficher et modifier tous les objets interactifs du projet, ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée. Pour ouvrir cette boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez Interaction avancée dans le menu Projet. Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de questions à choix multiple Cette option permet de créer une question à laquelle les utilisateurs doivent répondre en sélectionnant une ou plusieurs réponses correctes dans une liste. Pour créer une diapositive de questions à choix multiple : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Choix multiple, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou sur Question d’enquête. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier votre choix dans l’onglet Options. 5 Acceptez le nom par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau nom dans le champ. Un bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. Si vous créez plusieurs questions du même type dans un projet unique, entrez des noms uniques pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Dans Question, tapez la question à choix multiple, exactement comme vous voulez qu’elle s’affiche sur la diapositive. 7 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 8 Dans la zone Réponses, cliquez sur Ajouter et entrez les réponses possibles. Si nécessaire, cliquez sur Supprimer pour enlever une réponse de la liste. 9 Sélectionnez Mélanger les réponses pour modifier l’ordre des réponses sur la diapositive à chaque fois qu’un utilisateur répond au quiz. 10 Selon qu’il existe une seule réponse correcte ou plusieurs réponses correctes, vous pouvez procéder comme suit : • S’il n’y a qu’une seule réponse correcte, sélectionnez Réponse unique dans le menu déroulant Type. Etablissez les réponses correctes en cliquant sur le bouton radio à côté de la réponse correcte. Remarque : Cette option est sélectionnée par défaut. • S’il y a plusieurs réponses correctes, sélectionnez Réponses multiples dans le menu déroulant Type. Sélectionnez les réponses en utilisant la case à cocher placée en regard de la réponse correcte. 11 Dans Numérotation, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez les lettres majuscules, minuscules ou les chiffres. 12 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 13 Dans le champ Type, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et indiquez si la question est notée ou s’il s’agit d’une enquête. 14 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 15 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 221 Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. 16 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). Cette option est désactivée si vous avez choisi l’option Glisser-déposer. 17 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 222 ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci. Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 18 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La nouvelle diapositive de questions à choix multiple s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de questions vrai ou faux Cette option permet de créer une question que les utilisateurs doivent juger vraie ou fausse. Pour créer une diapositive de questions vrai/faux : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Vrai/faux puis cliquez sur Question notée ou sur Question d’enquête. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier votre choix dans l’onglet Options. 5 Acceptez le nom par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau nom dans la zone de texte. Un bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. Si vous créez de nombreuses questions du même type dans un projet unique, saisissez un nom unique pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Dans Question, tapez la question Vrai/faux, exactement comme vous voulez qu’elle s’affiche sur la diapositive. 7 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 8 Dans la zone Réponses, établissez les réponses correctes en cliquant sur le bouton radio en regard de Vrai ou Faux. 9 Dans Type, sélectionnez Vrai/Faux ou Oui/Non. 10 Dans Numérotation, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez les lettres majuscules, minuscules ou les chiffres. 11 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 12 Dans Type, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez si la question est notée ou s’il s’agit d’une enquête. 13 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 14 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 223 Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 15 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). 16 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 224 ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci. Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 17 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La nouvelle diapositive de questions Vrai/faux s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de questions à compléter Cette option permet de créer une question à laquelle les utilisateurs doivent répondre en choisissant parmi plusieurs options de texte pour remplir le champ vide dans une phrase. Pour créer une nouvelle diapositive de questions à compléter : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Champ à compléter, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou sur Question d’enquête. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier votre choix dans l’onglet Options. 5 Acceptez le nom et la description par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau texte directement dans les zones de texte. Le nom et la description s’affichent sur la diapositive dans le projet. Si vous créez de nombreuses questions du même type dans un projet unique, saisissez un nom unique pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 7 Sélectionnez Permuter les réponses de la liste pour modifier l’ordre des réponses sur la diapositive à chaque fois qu’un utilisateur répond au quiz. 8 Dans Phrase, tapez la phrase ou le texte qui contiendra un champ vide que les utilisateurs devront compléter. 9 Sélectionnez un mot ou un groupe de mots dans le champ Phrase et cliquez sur Ajouter champ. 10 Dans la boîte de dialogue Réponse à compléter, sélectionnez l’option dont les utilisateurs doivent se servir pour choisir la réponse correcte. • Si vous souhaitez que l’utilisateur réponde seul, sélectionnez L’utilisateur tapera la réponse qui sera ensuite comparée à la liste ci-dessous. • Si vous voulez fournir à l’utilisateur une liste des réponses possibles, dans laquelle il choisira sa réponse, sélectionnez L’utilisateur sélectionnera une réponse dans la liste ci-dessous. 11 Cliquez sur Ajouter et entrez un mot ou un ensemble de mots complétant correctement le champ vide de la question. Cliquez sur Ajouter et Supprimer selon vos besoins pour constituer une liste appropriée. Remarque : Il est plus rapide d’ajouter des réponses en cliquant directement sur la liste vide.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 225 12 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez La réponse est sensible à la casse pour exiger que les utilisateurs tapent les lettres en respectant les minuscules et les majuscules lorsqu’ils complètent les champs vides. Par exemple, si la réponse à la question est « Windows » et si vous sélectionnez l’option Sensible à la casse, la réponse « windows » serait incorrecte. 13 Cliquez sur OK. 14 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 15 (Facultatif) Dans Type, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et indiquez si la question est notée ou fait partie d’une enquête. 16 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 17 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 18 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 226 Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). 19 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci. Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 20 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La nouvelle diapositive de questions à compléter s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de questions à réponse courte Cette option permet de créer une question à laquelle les utilisateurs doivent répondre en tapant un mot ou un ensemble de mots. Pour créer une diapositive de questions à réponse courte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Réponse courte, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou sur Question d’enquête. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier votre choix dans l’onglet Options. 5 Acceptez le nom par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau nom dans le champ. Un bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. Si vous créez plusieurs questions du même type dans un projet unique, entrez des noms uniques pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Dans Question, tapez la question à réponse courte, exactement comme vous voulez qu’elle s’affiche sur la diapositive.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 227 7 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 8 Dans Réponses acceptables, cliquez sur Ajouter et entrez des phrases ou des expressions constituant des réponses correctes. Cliquez sur Ajouter et Supprimer selon vos besoins pour écrire une liste appropriée. Si vous voulez que ces réponses soient traitées comme une enquête, plutôt que notées, vous devez choisir Créer une question d’enquête lorsque vous ajoutez la question, ou vous devez choisir Enquête dans le menu déroulant Type, sur l’onglet Options. 9 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez La réponse est sensible à la casse pour exiger que les utilisateurs tapent les lettres en respectant les minuscules et les majuscules lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse courte. Par exemple, si la réponse à la question est « Windows » et si vous sélectionnez l’option Sensible à la casse, la réponse « windows » serait incorrecte. 10 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 11 (Facultatif) Dans Type, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et indiquez si la question est notée ou fait partie d’une enquête. 12 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 13 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. Afficher le message Correct Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. 14 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. Tentatives illimitées Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser un nombre de tentatives illimité aux utilisateurs. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 228 Niveaux d’échec Sélectionnez cette option pour insérer des messages qui s’afficheront en réaction à plusieurs réponses incorrectes. Il peut y avoir jusqu’à trois niveaux d’échec. Par exemple, le message « Faux, réessayez » s’affiche après la première réponse incorrecte. Après la deuxième réponse incorrecte : « Faux, il vous reste un essai », puis, après la troisième, « Désolé, c’est encore faux. Passez à la question suivante. ». Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives leur sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Sélectionnez cette option pour afficher un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils ne donnent aucune réponse (par exemple « Sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer »). Remarque : Vous pouvez modifier le texte des messages en cas de réponse correcte, en cas de réponse incorrecte, d’invitation à réessayer et en cas de réponse incomplète dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Cliquez sur Quiz et sélectionnez Etiquettes défaut. 15 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication et modifiez les champs suivants : Communiquer les réponses Cette option conserve un score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question de la zone de clic porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, vous devez utiliser l’ID d’interaction spécifiée par celui-ci. 16 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 229 La nouvelle diapositive de questions à réponse courte s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de questions d’association Cette option permet de créer une question contenant deux listes d’éléments que les utilisateurs doivent associer correctement. Pour créer une diapositive de questions d’association : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Association, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou Question d’enquête. Si nécessaire, vous pouvez modifier votre choix dans l’onglet Options. 5 Acceptez le nom par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau nom dans le champ. Un bouton s’affiche sur la diapositive. Si vous créez plusieurs questions du même type dans un projet unique, entrez des noms uniques pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Dans Question, tapez la question d’association, exactement comme vous voulez qu’elle s’affiche sur la diapositive. Par exemple, « Associez le poste de travail de la colonne 1 au service approprié de la colonne 2 ». 7 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 8 Sélectionnez Mélanger les réponses pour modifier l’ordre des réponses sur la diapositive à chaque fois qu’un utilisateur répond au quiz. 9 Dans Réponses, cliquez sur Ajouter sous chaque colonne et tapez les mots ou phrases à associer. Cliquez sur Supprimer pour supprimer des réponses ou cliquez sur les flèches et pour déplacer les réponses vers le haut ou vers le bas dans la colonne. 10 Pour établir les associations correctes entre les réponses, cliquez sur un élément d’une colonne, puis cliquez sur un élément dans l’autre colonne, et cliquez sur Associer. Une ligne s’affiche entre les deux éléments pour indiquer la relation. Pour corriger des erreurs, cliquez sur Effacer les associations et recommencez. Pour établir rapidement des associations, il est possible de tirer une ligne entre les éléments de la colonne 1 et ceux de la colonne 2. 11 Dans le menu déroulant Style, sélectionnez Glisser-déposer si vous souhaitez que les utilisateurs fassent glisser leurs réponses, ou sélectionnez Liste déroulante si vous souhaitez qu|ils sélectionnent leurs réponses dans des menus déroulants. 12 Dans Numérotation, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez majuscules, minuscules ou valeurs numériques. 13 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 14 Dans le champ Type, cliquez sur le menu déroulant et indiquez si la question est notée ou s’il s’agit d’une enquête.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 230 15 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 16 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 17 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). 18 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 231 Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci. Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 19 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La nouvelle diapositive de questions d’association s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de zone sensible Les diapositives de zone sensible contiennent des zones que l’utilisateur doit identifier. Par exemple : vous pouvez demander à l’utilisateur d’identifier les produits d’une société sur les images affichées sur la diapositive. Les réponses aux questions de zone sensible ne sont valides que lorsque les conditions suivantes sont remplies : • L’utilisateur a cliqué sur toutes les zones sensibles correctes. • L’utilisateur n’a cliqué sur aucune zone sensible incorrecte. Pour créer une nouvelle diapositive de zone sensible : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive qui doit précéder la nouvelle diapositive de questions. Par exemple : cliquez sur la diapositive 6 si vous souhaitez que la nouvelle diapositive soit la diapositive 7. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Zone sensible, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou Question d’enquête. La boîte de dialogue Question de zone sensible apparaît ; l’onglet Question est affiché. 5 Dans la zone Nom, tapez le nom de la question tel que vous souhaitez qu’il apparaisse sur la diapositive. 6 Dans la zone Question, tapez la question telle que vous souhaitez qu’elle apparaisse sur la diapositive. 7 Dans la zone Points, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer un nombre de points à la question. Le nombre maximum est de 100 points. 8 Dans le champ Zones sensibles, entrez le nombre de zones sensibles à placer sur la diapositive. 9 (Facultatif) Pour désactiver les clics de souris sur les zones de la diapositive autres que les zones sensibles, sélectionnez Autoriser les clics sur les zones sensibles uniquement. 10 (Facultatif) Pour personnaliser l’animation qui apparaît lorsque l’utilisateur clique sur la zone sensible, cliquez sur Sélectionner. 11 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 232 12 Dans le menu déroulant Type, sélectionnez s’il s’agit d’une question notée ou d’une question d’enquête. 13 (Facultatif) Pour afficher les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer, sélectionnez les options correspondantes. 14 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 15 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). 16 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 233 Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci. Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 17 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La zone sensible s’affiche sur la diapositive. Vous pouvez placer cette zone sensible sur n’importe quel objet de la diapositive. Remarque : Pour modifier les messages que vous avez choisis de montrer à l’utilisateur, sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. Dans le menu Quiz, sélectionnez Etiquettes défaut. Définition des propriétés de zone sensible Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés d’une zone sensible et son emplacement sur la diapositive. Pour définir les propriétés d’une zone sensible : 1 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la zone sensible et sélectionnez Propriétés dans le menu déroulant. La boîte de dialogue Zone sensible apparaît ; l’onglet Zone sensible est affiché. 2 Dans le menu déroulant Couleur du cadre, sélectionnez une couleur de bordure pour les zones sensibles. Remarque : La couleur de bordure n’apparaît pas si la Largeur du cadre est définie sur zéro. 3 Dans la zone Largeur du cadre, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir l’épaisseur (en pixels) de la bordure de la zone sensible. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Couleur de remplissage, sélectionnez la couleur de remplissage de la zone sensible. Remarque : La couleur de remplissage n’apparaît pas si la Transparence du remplissage est définie sur 100 %. 5 Dans la zone Transparence du remplissage, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour définir le pourcentage de transparence. 6 Si le fait de cliquer sur la zone sensible constitue une bonne réponse, sélectionnez Bonne réponse. 7 Pour faire apparaître l’icône en forme de main lorsque la souris passe sur la zone sensible, sélectionnez Afficher le curseur en forme de main sur la zone sensible. 8 Pour définir une touche de raccourci pour la zone sensible, cliquez sur Sélectionner les touches, utilisez les options, puis cliquez sur OK. 9 Cliquez sur Paramètres pour indiquer si vous souhaitez appliquer toutes les propriétés ou uniquement les propriétés modifiées, à la diapositive en cours ou à toutes les diapositives. 10 (Facultatif) Pour appliquer les propriétés à toutes les diapositives du projet, sélectionnez Appliquer à tout. 11 Cliquez sur OK. 12 Cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes de la zone de révision.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 234 Création d’une nouvelle diapositive de séquence Une diapositive de séquence propose aux utilisateurs une liste d’éléments qui doivent être placés dans le bon ordre. Par exemple : vous pouvez créer une liste de rois ayant régné sur la Pologne et demander aux utilisateurs de faire glisser les éléments pour les disposer dans l’ordre chronologique. Ou, vous pouvez créer la même liste, mais demander aux utilisateurs de sélectionner la séquence chronologique dans des menus déroulants. Si l’utilisateur soumet la réponse sans modifier la disposition des éléments, la séquence qui apparaît sur la diapositive est acceptée comme réponse. Remarque : Les questions de séquence ne sont pas conformes à la Section 508. Pour créer une nouvelle diapositive de séquence : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive qui doit précéder la nouvelle diapositive de questions. Par exemple : cliquez sur la diapositive 6 si vous souhaitez que la nouvelle diapositive soit la diapositive 7. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Séquence, puis cliquez sur Question notée ou Question d’enquête. 5 Dans la zone Nom, tapez le nom de la question tel que vous souhaitez qu’il apparaisse sur la diapositive. 6 Dans la zone Question, tapez la question telle que vous souhaitez qu’elle apparaisse sur la diapositive. (Vous taperez la liste qui correspond à la question ultérieurement.) 7 Entrez une valeur numérique ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer une valeur en points à la question. Le maximum est 100 points, le minimum 0. 8 Dans la zone Réponses, cliquez sur Ajouter et entrez la liste des réponses dans le bon ordre. Lors de la présentation, les réponses sont affichées dans une séquence aléatoire. Si nécessaire, cliquez sur Supprimer pour enlever un élément de la liste. 9 Dans le menu déroulant Style, sélectionnez Glisser-déposer si vous souhaitez que les utilisateurs fassent glisser leurs réponses, ou sélectionnez Liste déroulante si vous souhaitez que les utilisateurs sélectionnent leurs réponses dans des menus déroulants. Vous pouvez passer du format Glisser-déposer au format Liste déroulante après avoir créé la diapositive ; pour cela, modifiez les propriétés de la diapositive de questions. 10 Dans le menu déroulant Numérotation, sélectionnez un style de numérotation. 11 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 12 Dans le menu déroulant Type, sélectionnez s’il s’agit d’une question notée ou d’une question d’enquête. 13 (Facultatif) Pour afficher les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer, sélectionnez les options correspondantes. 14 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Afficher le message Correct Affiche un message destiné aux utilisateurs lorsqu’ils donnent une réponse correcte. Désélectionnez cette case si vous ne souhaitez pas afficher de message en cas de réponse correcte. Action Cliquez sur l’action ou sur la destination souhaitée après la dernière tentative de l’utilisateur. Vous pouvez choisir parmi les options suivantes :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 235 • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 15 Renseignez la zone Si la réponse est incorrecte. Les options disponibles sont les suivantes : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives accordées à l’utilisateur pour répondre à la question avant que l’action que vous avez sélectionnée dans le menu déroulant Action soit déclenchée. Tentatives illimitées L’utilisateur peut tenter de répondre à la question autant de fois qu’il le souhaite. Niveaux d’échec Définit le nombre de tentatives pour lesquelles le message en cas de réponse incorrecte est affiché. Par exemple : si le niveau est défini sur deux, le message d’erreur est affiché pour les deux premières tentatives. Menu déroulant Action Les options sont les mêmes que celles proposées dans la zone Si la réponse est correcte. Afficher le message d’invitation à réessayer Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur donne une réponse incorrecte mais que d’autres tentatives lui sont accordées (par exemple, « Veuillez essayer de nouveau »). Cette option est désactivée si des niveaux d’échec ont été définis. Afficher le message en cas de réponse incomplète Affiche un message lorsque l’utilisateur ne donne aucune réponse (par exemple « Veuillez sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer. »). 16 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication pour accéder aux options suivantes : Communiquer les réponses Conserve le score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Si la question du quiz porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID de l’objectif. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’ID d’interaction définie dans celui-ci.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 236 Limite de temps Définit le temps imparti aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Dans la zone de saisie, tapez la limite de temps au format heures:minutes:secondes. 17 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Pour modifier les messages que vous avez choisis de montrer à l’utilisateur, sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. Dans le menu Quiz, sélectionnez Etiquettes défaut. Création d’une nouvelle diapositive à échelle d’évaluation (Likert) Sélectionnez cette option afin de créer une déclaration pour laquelle les utilisateurs indiqueront leur degré d’adhésion. Il est possible, par exemple, de proposer à un utilisateur l’affirmation « Ce projet Adobe Captivate m’a apporté des informations intéressantes » et une série de réponses parmi lesquelles choisir : Pas d’accord, plutôt pas d’accord, neutre, plutôt d’accord, d’accord. Remarque : Les questions à échelle d’évaluation sont des questions d’enquête et ne sont donc pas notées. Vous ne pouvez pas leur affecter de pondération, ni créer un embranchement pour une réponse correcte ou incorrecte (puisqu’il s’agit d’une question d’enquête, il n’y a pas de bonne ou de mauvaise réponse). Vous pouvez cependant décider de ce qui se passe une fois que l’utilisateur a rempli l’échelle d’évaluation, comme passer à la diapositive suivante, ouvrir un autre projet ou afficher une URL. Pour créer une diapositive à échelle d’évaluation (Likert) : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer une diapositive de questions. Par exemple, si vous voulez que la nouvelle diapositive de questions soit la diapositive 7 du projet, cliquez sur la diapositive 6. 3 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Echelle d’évaluation (Likert), puis cliquez sur Créer une question d’enquête. 5 Acceptez le nom et la description par défaut de la question ou tapez un nouveau texte directement dans les zones de texte. Le nom et la description s’affichent sur la diapositive dans le projet. Si vous créez plusieurs questions du même type dans un projet unique, entrez des noms uniques pour chaque question de manière à pouvoir facilement les distinguer les unes des autres. 6 Dans la zone Questions, cliquez sur Ajouter et tapez une question à échelle d’évaluation directement dans la zone de texte. Vous pouvez ajouter jusqu’à huit questions Likert à une diapositive. 7 Dans la zone Réponses, vous pouvez accepter le texte des réponses par défaut, modifier le texte ou ajouter de nouveaux types de réponses. Pour modifier le texte, double-cliquez sur le texte existant (« Neutre », par exemple) et tapez le nouveau texte. Pour ajouter d’autres types de réponses, cliquez sur Ajouter et tapez le nouveau texte. 8 Sélectionnez l’onglet Options. 9 Si vous voulez que les boutons d’effacement, de retour et Ignorer s’affichent sur la diapositive de questions pour faciliter la navigation, sélectionnez ces options. 10 Dans Après une question d’enquête, sélectionnez dans le menu déroulant ce qui se passe après que l’utilisateur ait répondu aux questions. Vous disposez de plusieurs options : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 237 • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 11 Sélectionnez l’onglet Communication et modifiez les champs suivants : Communiquer les réponses Cette option conserve un score du quiz. Remarque : Les renseignements interactifs tels que l’ID de l’interaction, l’ID de l’objectif et le type d’interaction ne sont pas envoyés à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage (LMS) si cette option n’est pas sélectionnée. Toutefois, les détails du quiz tels que le score total, le résultat et l’état du quiz sont quand même communiqués au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question de la zone de clic porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. ID de l’interaction Si vous souhaitez que le projet Adobe Captivate (fichier SWF) envoie des informations de suivi à votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, vous devez utiliser l’ID d’interaction spécifiée par celui-ci. Limite de temps Sélectionnez cette option pour définir la limite de temps offerte aux utilisateurs pour répondre à la question. Tapez la durée au format : heures:minutes:secondes. 12 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. La nouvelle diapositive de questions à échelle d’évaluation s’affiche à l’emplacement choisi du projet. Pour apporter des modifications à la diapositive de questions, cliquez sur Modifier une question (dans le coin supérieur gauche de la diapositive). Définition des options de sortie de l’apprentissage Adobe Captivate offre de nombreuses options de sortie pour les projet dotés d’éléments d’apprentissage électronique. Par exemple, vous pouvez configurer vos projets pour qu’ils soient conformes aux normes SCORM ou AICC. Pour configurer les options de sortie de l’apprentissage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Communication. 4 Sélectionnez Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet. 5 Sélectionnez la sortie voulue :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 238 Serveur Adobe Connect Permet le suivi sur le serveur Adobe Connect. Reportez-vous à la section « Activation des fonctionnalités de recherche d’Adobe Connect » pour connaître la procédure permettant d’activer les fonctionnalités de recherche d’Adobe Connect. AICC Active la prise en charge AICC. SCORM Active la prise en charge SCORM. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option de publication en plein écran (dans la boîte de dialogue Publier), Adobe Captivate génère deux fichiers HTML adaptés à Windows XP Service Pack 2. Utilisez les deux fichiers HTML avec le fichier SWF afin d’éviter qu’un message d’avertissement sur SP2 ne s’affiche pour les utilisateurs du projet que vous aurez publié. Vous devez établir un lien avec le fichier HTML au nom duquel les lettres « fs » ont été ajoutées, par exemple « mesprojets_fs.htm ». Le fichier HTML dont le nom comporte les lettres « fs » est automatiquement lié au second fichier HTML qui lit votre projet. Manifeste Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Manifeste qui vous permet de définir les options de création d’un fichier de manifeste (exigé par de nombreux systèmes de gestion de l’apprentissage). Pour plus d’informations, consultez Création d’un fichier de manifeste. Questionmark Perception Cette option garantit que le projet est compatible avec Questionmark Perception. Adobe Captivate génère automatiquement un fichier QML pour vous permettre d’importer rapidement des simulations Adobe Captivate dans Perception. E-mail Cette option envoie automatiquement le résultat des scores à une adresse e-mail spécifiée. Tapez une adresse e-mail complète directement dans le champ (par exemple, nom@monentreprise.com). • Corps du message Envoyez les résultats dans le corps du message électronique. • Pièce jointe Envoyez les résultats dans une pièce jointe au message. Cette option fonctionne uniquement avec Internet Explorer. Signaler la réussite ou l’échec Sélectionnez une option pour déterminer si les utilisateurs reçoivent les résultats au format Complet/Incomplet, Réussite/Echec ou l’état tel qu’il est défini dans les données du rapport. Avancé Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir les Paramètres de personnalisation LMS. • Ne jamais envoyer les données de reprise L’activité de l’utilisateur dans le quiz n’est pas communiqué au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. Cela signifie que les détails comme le signet de session, la progression et les questions tentées, ne sont pas envoyés au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. • Codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session Convertit la version et l’ID de session en valeurs codées URL. • Ne pas appliquer le codage URL aux caractères suivants Prend en charge l’option Codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session. Tapez les caractères à exclure du codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session. Choisir les données du rapport Sélectionnez une option pour indiquer quelles données de résultat du test seront communiquées à l’administrateur du test. Communiquer le score LMS en tant que Indique si les utilisateurs reçoivent leurs résultats sous forme de score (8 sur 10, par exemple) ou de pourcentage (exact à 80 %, par exemple). Niveau de communication Détermine si les informations de score seul ou de score et d’interaction sont communiquées au système d’apprentissage. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Communiquer les interactions et les scores, chaque interaction, telle que le type de question, l’option sélectionnée par l’utilisateur, etc., est communiquée au système d’apprentissage.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 239 6 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Pour activer dans Adobe Connect Enterprise le suivi d’un projet ne contenant que les objets interactifs inclus dans le quiz, veillez à ajouter la diapositive de résultats au projet. Création d’une diapositive de questions aléatoires Les diapositives de questions aléatoires affichent des questions sélectionnées au hasard dans un groupe de questions auquel elles sont rattachées. Ces diapositives permettent d’empêcher qu’un quiz ne devienne prévisible. Les diapositives de questions aléatoires n’ont pas de plan de montage chronologique propre, elles utilisent la durée de la diapositive de questions choisie à l’exécution. Remarque : Lorsque vous travaillez avec des diapositives de groupes de questions, l’affichage de la bande de film se modifie pour présenter les Diapositives de groupes de questions. Pour revenir au projet principal, cliquez sur l’onglet Diapositives dans la bande de film. Vous pouvez utiliser les fonctionnalités suivantes pour faciliter et accélérer votre travail lorsque vous utilisez des groupes de questions : • Vous pouvez faire glisser les questions d’un groupe à l’autre dans le Gestionnaire des groupes de questions. • Vous pouvez copier et coller des questions dans le Gestionnaire des groupes de questions. • Vous pouvez verrouiller, déverrouiller, masquer et afficher des questions dans le Gestionnaire des groupes de questions en utilisant les options du menu contextuel. • Vous pouvez modifier les questions à partir du Gestionnaire des groupes de questions en double-cliquant sur la question ou en utilisant le menu contextuel. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas exporter les diapositives de questions aléatoires dans Flash 8 ou Flash CS3. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez pas exporter les groupes de questions dans XML. Pour créer une diapositive de questions aléatoires : 1 Sélectionnez Quiz > Diapositive de question aléatoire. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle question aléatoire s’affiche. 2 Dans l’onglet Question, effectuez les actions suivantes : • Dans la zone Nom, tapez le nom de la question aléatoire. • Dans la zone Points, entrez un nombre ou utilisez les flèches pour attribuer un nombre de points à la question. Le nombre de points doit être compris entre 0 et 100. • Dans le menu déroulant Groupe de questions, sélectionnez le groupe dans lequel la question sera sélectionnée de manière aléatoire. 3 Dans l’onglet Options, effectuez les actions suivantes : • Dans le menu déroulant Type, sélectionnez s’il s’agit d’une question notée ou d’une question d’enquête. • Dans les zones Si la réponse est correcte et Si la réponse est incorrecte, utilisez le menu déroulant pour sélectionner l’une des actions suivantes : • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 240 • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 4 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Pour modifier le groupe de questions associé à une diapositive après sa création, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive et choisissez Modifier la question dans le menu déroulant. Utilisez la boîte de dialogue Question aléatoire pour modifier les paramètres. Pour créer un groupe de questions : 1 Sélectionnez Quiz > Gestionnaire des groupes de questions. La boîte de dialogue Gestionnaire des groupes de questions s’affiche. Remarque : L’affichage de la bande de film se modifie pour présenter les Diapositives de groupes de questions. Pour afficher les diapositives du projet principal, cliquez sur l’onglet Modifier. 2 Cliquez sur le bouton « + » au-dessus du panneau de gauche pour ajouter un groupe de questions. 3 Dans la zone de texte qui apparaît, tapez le nom du groupe de questions. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton « + » au-dessus du panneau de droite pour ajouter des questions au groupe de questions. La boîte de dialogue Types de questions s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez un type de question. 6 Cliquez sur Question notée ou Question d’enquête, puis utilisez les options de la boîte de dialogue qui s’affiche pour paramétrer la question. 7 Répétez la procédure pour ajouter d’autres questions au groupe de questions. 8 Cliquez sur Fermer. Remarque : Vous pouvez utiliser le bouton « - » dans les panneaux de droite ou de gauche pour supprimer des questions des groupes ou de la liste de questions. Remarque : Vous ne pouvez ajouter, supprimer et renommer des groupes de questions que dans le Gestionnaire des groupes de questions. Pour importer les questions provenant de groupes de questions d’autres projets : 1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Groupes de questions. La boîte de dialogue Importer les groupes de questions s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 241 2 Sélectionnez le projet à importer et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Importer les groupes de questions s’affiche. Les groupes de questions apparaissent dans le panneau de gauche et les questions qui leur sont associées apparaissent dans le panneau de droite. 3 Sélectionnez les questions à importer dans le projet en cours et cliquez sur OK. Déplacement de diapositives de questions vers un groupe de questions Vous pouvez déplacer une diapositive de questions ou un ensemble de diapositives de questions pour l’intégrer à un groupe de questions. La diapositive de questions est supprimée du projet principal et placée dans le groupe de questions. Vous pouvez également déplacer des diapositives de questions depuis un groupe de questions vers le projet principal ou vers d’autres groupes de questions. Les groupes de questions ne prennent pas en charge les groupes de diapositives ; c’est pourquoi toutes les informations de groupe associées aux diapositives sont perdues lorsque les diapositives groupées sont placées dans des groupes de questions. Par conséquent, lorsque ces diapositives de questions sont placées à nouveau dans le projet principal, elles ne sont plus associées à aucun groupe. Pour déplacer des diapositives de questions appartenant à un groupe mixte vers un groupe de questions, développez le groupe, sélectionnez les diapositives de questions et déplacez-les vers le groupe de questions. Remarque : Le déplacement de diapositives de questions vers un groupe de questions ou vers le projet principal ne peut pas être annulé. Pour déplacer une diapositive de questions depuis le projet principal vers un groupe de questions : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Cliquez sur la barre Diapositives de groupes de questions dans le panneau de gauche et sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer la diapositive de questions provenant du projet principal. 3 Cliquez sur la barre Diapositives dans le panneau de gauche et sélectionnez la diapositive de questions à déplacer vers le groupe de questions. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives dans la bande de film, cliquez sur les diapositives tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. 4 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive, sélectionnez Déplacer la question vers et sélectionnez le groupe vers lequel vous souhaitez déplacer la diapositive. Pour déplacer une question depuis un groupe de questions vers le projet principal ou vers un autre groupe de questions : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate dans l’affichage Modifier. 2 Cliquez sur la barre Diapositives dans le panneau de gauche et sélectionnez la diapositive après laquelle vous voulez insérer la diapositive de questions provenant du groupe de questions. 3 Cliquez sur la barre Diapositives de groupes de questions dans le panneau de gauche et sélectionnez la diapositive de questions à déplacer vers le groupe de questions. Pour sélectionner plusieurs diapositives dans la bande de film, cliquez sur les diapositives tout en maintenant la touche Ctrl ou Maj enfoncée. 4 Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur la diapositive, sélectionnez Déplacer la question vers, et sélectionnez Projet principal ou Groupe [N°].ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 242 Définition du seuil de réussite de l’apprentissage électronique Lorsque vous ajoutez des quiz dans un projet, vous pouvez définir un seuil de réussite pour les utilisateurs. Le seuil de réussite est le pourcentage ou la valeur numérique que les utilisateurs doivent atteindre pour réussir les quiz. Par exemple, si vous définissez le seuil de réussite sur 80 %, les utilisateurs doivent avoir 80 % de réponses correctes pour réussir. Pour définir le seuil de réussite de l’apprentissage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Réussite ou échec. 4 Sélectionnez une option de réussite/échec : [nombre] % ou plus du total des points nécessaires pour réussir Le nombre maximum de points correspond à la somme de tous les points pondérés. Le pourcentage de points est déterminé par le nombre de points obtenu par un utilisateur divisé par le nombre maximum ou total de points. Si, par exemple, vous indiquez 80 % ou plus du total de points pour réussir, les étudiants doivent obtenir 80 % du nombre total des points du quiz. Chaque question peut rapporter un nombre de points compris entre 0 et 100. [nombre] points nécessaires pour réussir Le nombre maximum de points correspond à la somme de tous les points pondérés. La sélection de cette option signifie que l’utilisateur doit obtenir ce nombre de points (ou plus) pour réussir le quiz. Si, par exemple, un quiz contient 5 question de 20 points chacune (total, 100), et que vous spécifiez qu’il est nécessaire d’obtenir 60 points ou plus pour réussir, l’utilisateur doit répondre au moins à 3 questions pour obtenir au moins 60 points. Remarque : Le nombre total de points figure toujours dans la boîte de dialogue Interaction avancée. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone En cas de note de réussite : Action Spécifie ce qui se passe si un utilisateur reçoit une note de réussite. • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 243 • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone En cas de note d’échec : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. Tentatives illimitées Sélectionnez cette option pour insérer des messages qui s’afficheront en réaction à plusieurs réponses incorrectes. • Continuer La lecture du projet se poursuit. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer la diapositive de destination au sein du projet. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Définition de l’affichage du score de l’apprentissage électronique Vous pouvez accéder à toutes les options de prise en charge de l’apprentissage électronique depuis la boîte de dialogue Préférences du quiz. Pour définir l’affichage du score de l’apprentissage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Sélectionnez les options appropriées : Nom Spécifie un nom unique pour le quiz. Obligatoire Spécifie si l’utilisateur doit compléter le quiz. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une des options suivantes : • Facultatif – L’utilisateur peut ignorer le quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à l’utilisateur de sauter le quiz et de poursuivre la session de formation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 244 • Obligatoire – L’utilisateur doit répondre au quiz pour continuer Sélectionnez cette option pour obliger l’utilisateur à répondre au quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. • Réussite obligatoire – L’utilisateur doit réussir ce quiz pour continuer Sélectionnez cette option pour indiquer que l’utilisateur doit réussir le quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. Cependant, si le projet ne contient pas de diapositive de résultats, l’utilisateur peut poursuivre la formation, même s’il n’a pas réussi le quiz. • Répondre à tout – L’utilisateur doit répondre à toutes les questions pour continuer Sélectionnez cette option pour obliger l’utilisateur à répondre à toutes les questions du quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. Préfixe d’ID de l’interaction Dans les groupes partagés, il est possible que plusieurs questions possèdent le même ID d’interaction. Pour éviter cela, vous pouvez ajouter des caractères de préfixe à l’ID afin de le rendre unique. Tapez les caractères que vous souhaitez utiliser comme préfixe dans ce champ. Mélanger les réponses Modifie l’ordre des réponses sur la diapositive à chaque fois qu’un utilisateur répond au quiz. Autoriser le déplacement en arrière Permet aux utilisateurs d’afficher les diapositives précédentes du projet lorsqu’ils répondent au quiz. Remarque : Si un utilisateur quitte le quiz en retournant en arrière, cela lui coûte une tentative de réponse au quiz. Même les va-et-vient dans le quiz en utilisant le bouton de retour en arrière peuvent lui faire perdre la totalité de ses tentatives de réponse au quiz et provoquer son échec. Les auteurs doivent s’en souvenir lorsqu’ils utilisent le déplacement en arrière dans un quiz. Permettre à l’utilisateur de consulter le quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour permettre aux utilisateurs de consulter le quiz après sa correction. Cliquez sur Messages de consultation des questions pour personnaliser les messages Correct, Incomplet et Incorrect. Les messages sont affichés à l’intention des utilisateurs lorsqu’ils consultent le quiz après avoir terminé. Afficher le score à la fin du quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour permettre aux utilisateurs de voir leur score à la fin du quiz. Cliquez sur Messages de résultats du quiz pour écrire des messages de réussite et d’échec et pour définir la façon d’afficher le score final. Afficher la progression Sélectionnez cette option pour montrer aux utilisateurs le numéro de la question à laquelle ils sont en train de répondre. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Création de messages de révision des questions pour les quiz Comme les quiz sont interactifs, il est important de guider les utilisateurs dans les diapositives de questions que vous ajoutez aux projets. Les messages de consultation des questions sont une bonne façon de communiquer avec les utilisateurs. Ces messages s’affichent, par exemple, lorsqu’un utilisateur sélectionne une réponse correcte ou incorrecte. Ils s’affichent aussi lorsque l’utilisateur examine le quiz en cliquant sur le bouton de révision sur la diapositive de résultats à la fin du projet. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 245 Vous pouvez créer des messages de révision en double-cliquant sur la zone de révision sur une diapositive de question. Les messages de consultation des questions peuvent être personnalisés. Pour modifier la couleur ou la police de caractères des messages de révision, il suffit de double-cliquer sur un message et d’appliquer vos préférences au format. Adobe Captivate fournit un texte par défaut pour les messages de consultation des questions, mais vous pouvez à tout moment le modifier. Pour adapter les messages de consultation des questions à une diapositive de questions : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Etiquettes défaut. La zone Etiquettes de bouton - Question par défaut propose les options suivantes : Texte du bouton d’envoi Spécifie le texte figurant sur le bouton qui permet d’envoyer les réponses du quiz. Texte du bouton d’effacement Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour effacer les réponses données et recommencer. Texte du bouton Ignorer Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour aller à la diapositive suivante. Texte du bouton de retour arrière Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour retourner à la diapositive précédente. La zone Retour d’informations relatif à la question par défaut propose les options suivantes : Message en cas de réponse correcte Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher lorsque l’utilisateur répond correctement. Message en cas de réponse incorrecte Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher lorsque l’utilisateur fournit une réponse incorrecte. Message d’invitation à réessayer Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher lorsque l’utilisateur fournit une réponse incorrecte. Message en cas de réponse incomplète Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher lorsque l’utilisateur ne fournit pas de réponse. Message de durée dépassée Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher lorsque l’utilisateur dépasse la limite de temps accordé pour répondre à la question. 4 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK. Pour personnaliser les messages de retour d’informations de révision : Vous pouvez personnaliser les messages de retour d’informations adressés aux utilisateurs après qu’ils ont terminé le quiz. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez une diapositive de questions. 3 Double-cliquez dans la zone Révision. La boîte de dialogue Zone de révision s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 246 4 Sur l’onglet Zone de révision, spécifiez les messages de retour d’informations de révision et sélectionnez la police. Message en cas de réponse correcte Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher, tel que « Exact ! », lorsque l’utilisateur répond correctement. Message en cas de réponse incomplète Saisissez le texte que vous voulez afficher, tel que « Sélectionnez une réponse avant de continuer », lorsque l’utilisateur ne fournit aucune réponse. Message en cas de réponse incorrecte Saisissez le texte, tel que « Essayez de nouveau », qui doit s’afficher lorsque l’utilisateur fournit une réponse incorrecte. Utilisez les options Police de caractères, Taille, Couleur, Gras et Italique pour personnaliser les messages de retour d’informations de révision. Vous pouvez prévisualiser les changements dans la zone d’aperçu : 5 Cliquez sur l’onglet Taille et position pour spécifier la taille et la position exactes de la zone de révision. L’utilisation de ces options – au lieu de faire glisser le cadre de la zone de révision – permet de créer des cadres de zone de révision identiques tout au long du projet. 6 Utilisez le menu Paramètres pour sélectionner la façon d’appliquer les changements de propriétés au projet. Pour appliquer toutes vos modifications, sélectionnez Appliquer uniquement les propriétés modifiées. Pour appliquer toutes les propriétés de la zone de révision, sélectionnez Appliquer toutes les propriétés. Vous pouvez appliquer les propriétés de la zone de révision à la seule diapositive sélectionnée ou à toutes les diapositives. Remarque : Si vous modifiez les paramètres de cette boîte de dialogue, ils deviennent les paramètres par défaut et les nouvelles zones de révision que vous créez par la suite les utilisent. 7 Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer à tout pour appliquer les paramètres spécifiés dans le menu Paramètres. 8 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez également sélectionner Modifier > Préférences. Dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Paramètres. Dans le panneau Quiz, cliquez sur le bouton Messages de consultation des questions pour personnaliser les messages. Création d’un fichier de manifeste Adobe Captivate comporte une importante fonctionnalité d’apprentissage électronique qui crée un fichier de manifeste. C’est utile si vous voulez exporter un projet Adobe Captivate sous forme d’un cours de formation électronique pouvant être administré et lancé à partir d’un système de gestion de l’apprentissage conforme SCORM 1.2 ou 2004. Le fichier de manifeste qu’Adobe Captivate crée est nommé imsmanifest.xml et contient les références de toutes les ressources de contenu. Le fichier XML utilise des balises XML prédéfinies pour décrire les composants, la structure et les comportements spéciaux. Pour créer un fichier de manifeste : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Communication. 4 Sélectionnez Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 247 5 Sélectionnez SCORM. 6 Cliquez sur Manifeste. 7 Définissez la Version SCORM en cliquant sur le menu déroulant et en sélectionnant 1.2 ou 2004. 8 La zone Cours permet de définir les options de manifeste suivantes. Certaines de ces options sont obligatoires, et certaines autres ne sont que facultatives. Identificateur (Champ obligatoire) L’identificateur est utilisé par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage pour identifier les différents manifestes. Un identificateur par défaut basé sur le nom de votre projet Adobe Captivate est automatiquement ajouté à ce champ. Vous pouvez modifier l’identificateur quand vous le souhaitez en sélectionnant le texte et en tapant le nouveau texte. Titre (Champ obligatoire) Le titre est visible par les étudiants qui utilisent le système de gestion de l’apprentissage. Un nom par défaut basé sur le nom de votre projet Adobe Captivate est automatiquement ajouté à ce champ. Vous pouvez modifier le titre quand vous le souhaitez en sélectionnant le texte et en tapant le nouveau texte. Description (Champ obligatoire) Il s’agit du texte utilisé par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage pour décrire les différents cours aux étudiants. Une description par défaut basée sur le nom de votre projet Adobe Captivate est automatiquement ajoutée à ce champ. Vous pouvez modifier la description quand vous le souhaitez. Version (Champ obligatoire) La version précise un numéro qui peut être utilisé pour faire la différence entre les manifestes dotés du même identificateur. Durée (Champ facultatif) Sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier le temps approximatif nécessaire pour travailler avec ce projet Adobe Captivate. Définissez la durée au format suivant : hh:mm:ss. Objet (Champ facultatif) Sélectionnez cette option pour écrire une courte description du projet Adobe Captivate à l’aide de mots-clés ou de phrases. 9 La zone SCO permet de définir les options de manifeste suivantes : Identificateur (Champ obligatoire) Le système de gestion de l’apprentissage utilise l’identificateur pour identifier différents objets de contenu partagé (SCO). Un identificateur par défaut basé sur le nom de votre projet Adobe Captivate est automatiquement ajouté à ce champ. Vous pouvez modifier l’identificateur quand vous le souhaitez en sélectionnant le texte et en tapant le nouveau texte. Titre (Champ obligatoire) Un titre par défaut basé sur le nom de votre projet Adobe Captivate est automatiquement ajouté à ce champ. Vous pouvez modifier le titre quand vous le souhaitez en sélectionnant le texte et en tapant le nouveau texte. Score critériel (Champ optionnel) Sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier un score de réussite pour le projet Adobe Captivate. Le score doit être compris entre 0 et 100. Seuls les projets Adobe Captivate contenant des objets qui communiquent des scores, comme par exemple les diapositives de quiz, les zones de texte ou les boutons, ont besoin d’inclure un score critériel. Temps autorisé (Champ facultatif) Sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier la durée maximum autorisée pour terminer le projet Adobe Captivate. Action de temps dépassé (Champ facultatif) Sélectionnez cette option pour spécifier l’action à entreprendre lorsque la durée maximum autorisée pour terminer le projet est dépassée. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une des quatre options : Quitter avec message, Quitter sans message, Continuer avec message ou Continuer sans message. Données de lancement (Champ facultatif) Cette option permet de spécifier les données d’initialisation attendues par la ressource. 10 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 248 Le fichier de manifeste est généré. Pour voir le fichier de manifeste, vous devez publier votre projet Adobe Captivate et créer un fichier SWF. Si vous avez utilisé le dossier d’enregistrement par défaut, vous verrez le fichier SWF et le fichier imsmanifest.xml dans le dossier Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate 3. Remarque : Si nécessaire, vous pouvez créer un fichier PIF (package interchange file) regroupant les fichiers de sortie du projet Adobe Captivate et le fichier de manifeste (avec des fichiers supplémentaires si vous utilisez l’option SCORM 2004). Création d’un PIF Adobe Captivate prend en charge la création d’un fichier PIF. Les directives SCORM recommandent, mais n’exigent pas, l’utilisation d’un fichier PIF pour transporter du contenu entre les systèmes. Un fichier PIF contient le jeu complet de fichiers de manifeste et de contenu (CaptivateProject.htm et CaptivateProject.swf) dans un fichier ZIP unique. Pour créer un PIF : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. La boîte de dialogue Publier s’affiche. 3 Dans la partie gauche de la boîte de dialogue, sélectionnez Flash (SWF). 4 Dans le champ Titre du projet, entrez le titre souhaité, sans l’extension .swf. 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin complet du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Dans Options de sortie, sélectionnez Compresser les fichiers et Exporter HTML. Le cours est placé dans un PIF en créant un fichier ZIP qui contient le fichier Flash (SWF) et le fichier .HTML. 7 Cliquez sur Publier. Organisation de quiz Vous pouvez définir les options de quiz en définissant les préférences du quiz. Les options disponibles incluent la conformité SCORM ou AICC, les messages de retour d’informations pour les utilisateurs, les boutons de navigation, les scores et la notification PENS. Remarque : PENS facilite la coordination entre Adobe Captivate et les systèmes de publication et de gestion de l’apprentissage électronique. PENS permet d’automatiser la notification, le transfert et la fourniture d’ensembles de contenu entre Adobe Captivate et les systèmes de gestion de l’apprentissage. Pour définir les options de quiz en utilisant les préférences du quiz : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Communication.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 249 Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet Sélectionnez cette option pour activer tous les choix de sortie. Adobe Connect Permet le suivi dans Acrobat Connect Professional. AICC Active la prise en charge AICC. SCORM Active la prise en charge SCORM. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Manifeste Cliquez ici pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Manifeste qui vous permet de définir les options de création d’un fichier de manifeste (exigé pour SCORM par de nombreux systèmes de gestion de l’apprentissage). Questionmark Perception Cette option garantit que le projet est compatible avec Questionmark Perception. Adobe Captivate génère automatiquement un fichier QML pour vous permettre d’importer rapidement des simulations Adobe Captivate dans Perception. Cette option ne prend pas en charge les diapositives de questions aléatoires. E-mail Cette option envoie automatiquement le résultat des scores à une adresse e-mail spécifiée. Tapez une adresse e-mail complète directement dans le champ (par exemple, nom@monentreprise.com). Les résultats sont envoyés dans un format délimité par des virgules et peuvent facilement être copiés et collés dans un programme de tableur comme Excel®. Signaler la réussite ou l’échec Sélectionnez une option pour déterminer si les utilisateurs reçoivent les résultats au format Complet/Incomplet, Réussite/Echec ou l’état tel qu’il est défini dans les données du rapport. Avancé Cliquez sur Paramètres pour définir les Paramètres de personnalisation LMS. • Ne jamais envoyer les données de reprise L’activité de l’utilisateur dans le quiz n’est pas communiqué au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. Cela signifie que les détails comme le signet de session, la progression et les questions tentées, ne sont pas envoyés au système de gestion de l’apprentissage. • Codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session Convertit la version et l’ID de session en valeurs codées URL. • Ne pas appliquer le codage URL aux caractères suivants Prend en charge l’option Codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session. Tapez les caractères à exclure du codage URL de la version et de l’ID de session. Choisir les données du rapport Sélectionnez une option pour indiquer quelles données de résultat du test seront communiquées à l’administrateur du test. Communiquer le score LMS en tant que Indique si les utilisateurs reçoivent leurs résultats sous forme de score (8 sur 10, par exemple) ou de pourcentage (exact à 80 %, par exemple). Niveau de communication Détermine si les informations de score seul ou de score et d’interaction sont communiquées au système d’apprentissage. Lorsque vous sélectionnez Communiquer les interactions et les scores, chaque interaction, telle que le type de question, l’option sélectionnée par l’utilisateur, etc., est communiquée au système d’apprentissage. 4 Sélectionnez Paramètres dans le menu Quiz et choisissez parmi les options suivantes : Nom Spécifie un nom unique pour le quiz. Obligatoire Spécifie si l’utilisateur doit compléter le quiz. Cliquez sur le menu déroulant et sélectionnez une des options suivantes : • Facultatif – L’utilisateur peut ignorer le quiz Permet à l’utilisateur de sauter le quiz et de poursuivre la session de formation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 250 • Obligatoire – L’utilisateur doit répondre au quiz pour continuer Oblige l’utilisateur à répondre au quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. • Réussite obligatoire – L’utilisateur doit réussir ce quiz pour continuer Oblige l’utilisateur à réussir le quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. Cependant, si le projet ne contient pas de diapositive de résultats, l’utilisateur peut poursuivre la formation, même s’il n’a pas réussi le quiz. • Répondre à tout – L’utilisateur doit répondre à toutes les questions pour continuer Oblige l’utilisateur à répondre à toutes les questions du quiz avant de poursuivre la session de formation. ID de l’objectif Il s’agit d’un paramètre facultatif. Si la question porte sur un objectif défini dans votre système de gestion de l’apprentissage, entrez l’objectif dans ce champ. Préfixe d’ID de l’interaction Dans les groupes partagés, il est possible que plusieurs questions possèdent le même ID d’interaction. Pour éviter cela, vous pouvez ajouter des caractères de préfixe à l’ID afin de le rendre unique. Tapez les caractères que vous souhaitez utiliser comme préfixe dans ce champ. Mélanger les réponses Modifie l’ordre des réponses sur la diapositive à chaque fois qu’un utilisateur répond au quiz. Autoriser le déplacement en arrière Permet aux utilisateurs d’afficher les diapositives précédentes du projet lorsqu’ils répondent au quiz. Remarque : Si un utilisateur quitte le quiz en retournant en arrière, cela lui coûte une tentative de réponse au quiz. Même les va-et-vient dans le quiz en utilisant le bouton de retour en arrière peuvent lui faire perdre la totalité de ses tentatives de réponse au quiz et provoquer son échec. Les auteurs doivent s’en souvenir lorsqu’ils utilisent le déplacement en arrière dans un quiz. Permettre à l’utilisateur de consulter le quiz Permet aux utilisateurs de consulter le quiz après sa correction. Cliquez sur Messages de consultation des questions pour personnaliser les messages Correct, Incomplet et Incorrect. Les messages sont affichés à l’intention des utilisateurs lorsqu’ils consultent le quiz après avoir terminé. Afficher le score à la fin du quiz Permet aux utilisateurs de voir leur score à la fin du quiz. Dans Paramètres, cliquez sur Messages de résultats du quiz pour rédiger les messages de réussite et d’échec et définir l’affichage du score final du quiz. Afficher la progression Montre aux utilisateurs le numéro de la question à laquelle ils sont en train de répondre. 5 Sélectionnez Réussite ou Echec dans le menu Quiz et choisissez parmi les options suivantes : [nombre] % ou plus du total des points nécessaires pour réussir Le nombre maximum de points correspond à la somme de tous les points pondérés. Le pourcentage de points est déterminé par le nombre de points obtenu par un utilisateur divisé par le nombre maximum ou total de points. Si, par exemple, vous indiquez 80 % ou plus du total de points pour réussir, les étudiants doivent obtenir 80 % du nombre total des points du quiz. Chaque question peut rapporter un nombre de points compris entre 0 et 100. [nombre] % ou plus du total des points nécessaires pour réussir Le nombre maximum de points correspond à la somme de tous les points pondérés. La sélection de cette option signifie que l’utilisateur doit obtenir ce nombre de points pour réussir le quiz. Si, par exemple, un quiz contient 5 questions de 20 points chacune (total, 100), et que vous spécifiez qu’il est nécessaire d’obtenir 60 points ou plus pour réussir, l’utilisateur doit répondre au moins à 3 questions pour obtenir au moins 60 points. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone En cas de note de réussite : Action Spécifie ce qui se passe si un utilisateur reçoit une note de réussite. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 251 • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer une destination précise. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton de navigation pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone En cas de note d’échec : Accorder à l’utilisateur [#] tentatives A l’aide des flèches, sélectionnez le nombre de tentatives auquel l’utilisateur a droit avant le déclenchement d’une autre action. Tentatives illimitées Sélectionnez cette option pour autoriser un nombre de tentatives illimité aux utilisateurs. Action Spécifie ce qui se passe si un utilisateur reçoit une note de réussite. • Aller à la diapositive précédente Le projet revient à la diapositive précédente. • Aller à la diapositive suivante Le projet passe à la diapositive suivante. • Aller à la diapositive Une autre zone apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez indiquer une destination précise. • Ouvrir URL ou fichier Le projet passe à une URL sur Internet ou à un fichier local. Cliquez sur le bouton de navigation pour choisir un fichier local. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre dans laquelle l’URL s’affichera : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant si vous voulez que l’URL indiquée s’ouvre dans la même fenêtre du navigateur (à la place de la présentation). Choisissez Nouveau pour que l’URL s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre du navigateur. • Ouvrir un autre projet Le projet commence à lire un autre projet. Cliquez sur la flèche vers le bas pour sélectionner la fenêtre d’affichage du projet : Courant ou Nouveau. Choisissez Courant pour que le nouveau projet remplace le projet en cours. Choisissez Nouveau pour que le nouveau projet s’ouvre dans une nouvelle fenêtre. • Envoyer un e-mail à Ouvre le navigateur de messagerie par défaut. • Exécuter JavaScript Exécute une partie spécifique du code JavaScript. Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et copiez le code JavaScript dans la fenêtre JavaScript. 6 Sélectionnez Etiquettes défaut dans le menu Quiz et choisissez parmi les options suivantes : Les options suivantes figurent dans la section Etiquettes de bouton - Question par défaut : Texte du bouton d’envoi Spécifie le texte figurant sur le bouton qui permet d’envoyer les réponses du quiz. Texte du bouton d’effacement Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour effacer les réponses données et recommencer. Texte du bouton Ignorer Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour aller à la diapositive suivante. Texte du bouton de retour arrière Spécifie le texte du bouton sur lequel vous pouvez cliquer pour retourner à la diapositive précédente.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 252 Remarque : Les modifications apportées aux étiquettes de boutons s’appliquent à toutes les questions ajoutées au quiz. La zone Retour d’informations relatif à la question par défaut propose les options suivantes : Message en cas de réponse correcte Spécifie le message qui s’affiche par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur fournit une réponse correcte à une question. Message en cas de réponse incorrecte Spécifie le message qui s’affiche par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur fournit une réponse incorrecte à une question. Message d’invitation à réessayer Spécifie le message qui s’affiche par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur apporte une réponse incorrecte à une question et peut essayer de répondre de nouveau. Message en cas de réponse incomplète Spécifie le message qui s’affiche par défaut lorsque l’utilisateur ne fournit aucune réponse. Message de durée dépassée Spécifie le message qui s’affiche par défaut lorsque le délai alloué pour répondre à la question a expiré. 7 Sélectionnez PENS dans le menu Quiz. Dans la section Package, choisissez parmi les options suivantes : Remarque : PENS facilite la coordination entre Adobe Captivate et les systèmes de publication et de gestion de l’apprentissage électronique. PENS permet d’automatiser la notification, le transfert et la fourniture d’ensembles de contenu entre Adobe Captivate et les systèmes de gestion de l’apprentissage. • URL source Indiquez l’emplacement où le fichier PIF de contenu est stocké. • ID utilisateur et Mot de passe Entrez l’ID utilisateur et le mot de passe requis. • Expiration de l’URL Entrez la date et l’heure d’expiration du package de contenu de formation. Par défaut, l’expiration a lieu 24 heures après la définition des données PENS. 8 Dans LMS, choisissez parmi les options suivantes. Les options de cet onglet s’appliquent au système de gestion de l’apprentissage qui publie, gère et/ou distribue les résultats du quiz. • URL cible Indiquez l’emplacement du serveur de publication/de gestion. • ID utilisateur et Mot de passe Entrez l’ID utilisateur et le mot de passe requis. • Envoyer avec Sélectionnez la méthode (HTTP-GET ou HTTP-POST) que le serveur doit utiliser pour la transmission du package de contenu de formation. • Commande Sélectionnez l’action que le serveur LMS doit effectuer. Les options disponibles sont Recueillir, Supprimer et Réviser. • Courrier électronique de réception Entrez l’adresse de messagerie à laquelle les résultats du quiz doivent être envoyés. • URL de réception Entrez l’adresse URL (http://, ftp://, etc.) à laquelle les résultats du quiz doivent être envoyés. • Recevoir des alertes lors du traitement du package par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage Sélectionnez cette option pour être informé du traitement du package. • Aperçu Cliquez sur ce bouton pour afficher le résumé des informations PENS. 9 Lorsque vous avez fini d’effectuer vos modifications, cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 253254 Chapitre 14 : Création d’un menu des projets Adobe Captivate MenuBuilder est un élément unique d’Adobe Captivate. Cet outil vous permet de présenter un ensemble de projets Adobe Captivate. Que vous publiiez vos projets sur le Web ou sur un CD, MenuBuilder permet de créer un emplacement unique et central pour accéder à plusieurs projets. MenuBuilder vous permet d’organiser les projets Adobe Captivate liés, ainsi que les liens vers d’autres fichiers, de façon interactive. Grâce à MenuBuilder, vous pouvez créer une page « menu » qui contient des liens vers plusieurs projets Adobe Captivate, des adresses URL et même des liens vers d’autres fichiers. Cette page de menu est un fichier SWF Flash que vous pouvez personnaliser comme vous le souhaitez. De plus, MenuBuilder ne nécessite aucune programmation. Vous pouvez exporter les projets que vous créez avec MenuBuilder sous plusieurs formats : fichiers Flash, HTML, EXE, Word et Macintosh. A propos de la création de projets MenuBuilder Vous pouvez créer plusieurs types différents de projets MenuBuilder en utilisant diverses options de création. Création de nouveaux projets MenuBuilder à l’aide de l’assistant MenuBuilder vous permet de créer facilement des projets à l’aide de l’assistant MenuBuilder. Pour créer un nouveau projet à l’aide de l’Assistant MenuBuilder : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Projet MenuBuilder. La fenêtre MenuBuilder s’affiche. Cette fenêtre permet de créer un nouveau projet MenuBuilder ou d’ouvrir un projet existant. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Nouveau > Projet. La boîte de dialogue Assistant de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 4 Sous Modèles, sélectionnez un modèle pour votre projet MenuBuilder. Le modèle a la même fonction que dans PowerPoint et contient l’image d’arrière-plan et les styles de texte. Un aperçu du modèle sélectionné s’affiche dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. Remarque : Si PowerPoint est installé sur votre ordinateur, les modèles PowerPoint sont répertoriés ici. Les modèles créés auparavant dans MenuBuilder sont également répertoriés. Remarque : MenuBuilder stocke tous les modèles dans un répertoire par défaut. Vous pouvez accéder à ce répertoire ou le modifier selon vos besoins. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Sous Elément de texte, entrez le texte tel que vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans le projet. Vous pouvez définir plusieurs options d’affichage (telles que la police, la couleur, la taille, etc.) dans une autre boîte de dialogue.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 255 7 Dans le menu déroulant Lien, cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers le bas et sélectionnez un type de lien. Les options comprennent Fichier SWF Macromedia, Adresse URL, Adresse électronique, Adresse FTP et Adresse de forum. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher les autres possibilités. Vous pouvez créer un lien vers presque tous les types de fichiers en utilisant le bouton Parcourir. Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’adresse URL appropriée dans ce champ. 8 Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia (contenu Flash), MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM correspondant. Tous les fichiers SWF nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez sélectionner Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. 9 Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. 10 (Facultatif) Dans le champ Infobulle, entrez le texte de l’infobulle de survol. 11 Une fois que vous avez terminé avec le premier élément de texte, cliquez sur Nouvel élément ou Nouveau sous- élément pour ajouter un nouvel élément de texte. Répétez les étapes 6 à 10 autant que cela est nécessaire. 12 Cliquez sur Suivant. 13 Sous Projet, entrez le titre tel que vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans la partie supérieure de la boîte de dialogue du projet final. 14 Si vous envisagez d’exporter le projet sous forme de fichier EXE, cliquez sur Autres pour choisir une icône de CD. Sélectionnez un fichier d’icône (ICO). 15 Sous Arrière-plan, sélectionnez un style de bordure dans le menu déroulant. 16 Sélectionnez une valeur de transparence dans le menu déroulant. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. 17 Sous Taille de la fenêtre, sélectionnez Plein écran ou Personnaliser. Si vous sélectionnez Personnaliser, entrez la largeur et la hauteur désirées. 18 Cliquez sur Terminer. Création de projets MenuBuilder vides Si vous ne souhaitez pas utiliser l’assistant MenuBuilder pour créer un projet, vous pouvez créer un projet vide, puis le modifier. Pour créer un projet vide : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Projet MenuBuilder. La fenêtre MenuBuilder s’affiche. Cette fenêtre permet de créer un nouveau projet MenuBuilder ou d’ouvrir un projet existant. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Nouveau > Projet vide. MenuBuilder ouvre un nouveau projet vide. 4 Ajoutez des éléments au projet selon vos besoins.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 256 Ouverture de projets MenuBuilder existants Utilisez cette procédure pour ouvrir les projets MenuBuilder que vous avez déjà créés. Pour ouvrir un projet existant : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Projet MenuBuilder. La fenêtre MenuBuilder s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Ouvrir. 4 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, localisez et sélectionnez le fichier du projet MenuBuilder (mgp) que vous souhaitez ouvrir. 5 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. Sélection de modèles MenuBuilder Les modèles dans MenuBuilder agissent de la même façon que dans d’autres programmes comme Microsoft PowerPoint. Ils contiennent l’image d’arrière-plan et les styles de texte. MenuBuilder stocke tous les modèles définis par l’utilisateur dans un répertoire par défaut. Vous pouvez accéder à ce répertoire ou le modifier selon vos besoins. En général, vous sélectionnez un modèle lors du développement initial en utilisant l’assistant MenuBuilder. Pour sélectionner un modèle : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer/Créer > Projet MenuBuilder. La fenêtre MenuBuilder s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez Fichier > Nouveau projet. La boîte de dialogue Assistant de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 4 Sous Modèles, sélectionnez un modèle pour votre projet. Un aperçu du modèle sélectionné s’affiche dans la fenêtre d’aperçu à droite. 5 Cliquez sur Suivant et terminez la création du nouveau projet MenuBuilder. Modification des modèles MenuBuilder Vous pouvez définir un nouveau modèle de projet MenuBuilder lors du développement initial ou modifier un modèle défini par l’utilisateur plus tard. Pour modifier un modèle : 1 Ouvrez un modèle défini par l’utilisateur. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Options du projet. 3 Dans le champ Image, repérez le fichier sélectionné. En général, l’image répertoriée ici est l’image d’arrière-plan du modèle sélectionné. Si vous voulez modifier cette image, utilisez le bouton Parcourir (...) pour sélectionner un autre fichier image. 4 Vous pouvez également enregistrer ce projet comme modèle afin de l’utiliser ultérieurement pour d’autres projets. Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer comme modèle.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 257 Ajout d’éléments dans MenuBuilder par glisser-déposer MenuBuilder vous permet d’ajouter facilement des éléments à des projets ouverts en les faisant glisser. Vous pouvez ajouter pratiquement tous les éléments que vous voulez (fichiers, images, adresses URL actives etc.) à vos projets. Pour ajouter un élément en le faisant glisser : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Modifiez la taille de la fenêtre de l’application afin d’avoir assez de place pour voir les autres éléments. 3 Faites glisser l’élément à insérer (fichier, adresse URL etc.) dans MenuBuilder. MenuBuilder insère le texte ou l’image approprié avec le lien correct. 4 Pour modifier les propriétés d’un élément, double-cliquez sur cet élément. Annulation et rétablissement des actions dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez annuler la dernière modification apportée à un document en utilisant la commande Annuler dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez aussi annuler l’action de la commande Annuler en utilisant la commande Rétablir. Pour annuler une action : 1 Dans le menu Modifier, sélectionnez Annuler ou appuyez sur Ctrl+Z. 2 Chaque fois que vous sélectionnez Annuler, vous annulez une action supplémentaire. Continuez à sélectionner Annuler pour supprimer les modifications précédentes selon vos besoins. Lorsque la commande Annuler n’est pas disponible (lorsqu’elle s’affiche en grisé), vous ne pouvez pas annuler la dernière action effectuée. Les actions sont enregistrées depuis l’instant où vous ouvrez un projet jusqu’au moment où vous le fermez. Vous pouvez donc utiliser la commande Annuler autant de fois que vous le souhaitez tant que le projet reste ouvert. Pour rétablir une action : • Après avoir utilisé la commande Annuler, depuis le menu Modifier, sélectionnez Rétablir ou appuyez sur Maj+Ctrl+Z. Prévisualisation de projets dans MenuBuilder Pour afficher votre projet MenuBuilder tel qu’il s’affichera pour les utilisateurs, en incluant les éléments interactifs, vous devez utiliser la commande Aperçu. Pour prévisualiser un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder à prévisualiser. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Aperçu. Vérification de l’orthographe dans les projets MenuBuilder MenuBuilder possède un vérificateur d’orthographe et de grammaire classique. Remarque : Microsoft Word doit être installé sur votre ordinateur pour pouvoir exécuter le vérificateur d’orthographe et de grammaire. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 258 Pour vérifier l’orthographe dans un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder à vérifier. 2 Sélectionnez Outils > Orthographe et grammaire. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur F7. Impression de projets dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez imprimer un projet MenuBuilder à tout moment. L’impression d’un projet MenuBuilder peut s’avérer utile si vous souhaitez que d’autres personnes donnent leur avis sur le contenu de votre projet ou si vous avez besoin de créer de la documentation à distribuer. Pour imprimer un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder à imprimer. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3 Sélectionnez les options désirées, puis cliquez sur OK. Enregistrement de projets MenuBuilder Il est conseillé d’enregistrer régulièrement votre travail lorsque vous créez des projets dans MenuBuilder. Cela permet de protéger votre travail en cas de panne du système. La première fois que vous enregistrez un projet, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche pour vous permettre d’affecter un nom au projet. Pour enregistrer un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder à enregistrer. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer. Enregistrement de projets MenuBuilder comme modèles Vous pouvez enregistrer un projet MenuBuilder comme modèle afin de pouvoir l’utiliser ultérieurement pour d’autres projets. Les modèles MenuBuilder portent l’extension de fichier .mgt. Pour enregistrer un projet comme modèle : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder à enregistrer comme modèle. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Enregistrer comme modèle. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. 3 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, entrez le nom du modèle. Vous pouvez enregistrer le modèle où vous le souhaitez. Cependant, l’assistant de MenuBuilder affiche uniquement les modèles stockés dans le répertoire Modèles spécifié. Vous pouvez modifier ce répertoire selon vos besoins. 4 Cliquez sur Enregistrer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 259 Utilisation de texte dans MenuBuilder La première fois que vous créez un projet MenuBuilder à l’aide de l’assistant MenuBuilder, vous ajoutez le texte et les liens initiaux. Cependant, vous pouvez aussi ajouter du texte aux projets ultérieurement. Ajout de texte dans MenuBuilder Suivez la procédure ci-dessous pour ajouter du texte à un projet MenuBuilder. Pour ajouter du texte : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Texte. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Style, sélectionnez un style de texte. Adobe Captivate importe les styles répertoriés pour créer un nouveau style. 4 Sélectionnez la police de caractères désirée dans le menu déroulant Police. Choisissez également les options de taille et de style. 5 Dans le champ Texte, entrez le texte tel qu’il apparaîtra dans le projet. 6 Sélectionnez le type de lien à activer dans le menu déroulant Lien. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher les autres possibilités. 7 Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’adresse URL appropriée dans ce champ. 8 Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF Macromedia nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. 9 Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. 10 Sélectionnez Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet si vous souhaitez que le fichier soit enregistré avec le projet Adobe Captivate. 11 Dans le champ Infobulle, entrez le texte de l’infobulle de survol. 12 Cliquez sur les cases de couleur à côté de Couleur normale et Couleur de survol pour sélectionner une couleur pour chaque état de texte. La couleur de survol est la couleur qui s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur survole le texte avec la souris. 13 Cliquez sur Appliquer les modifications à tous les éléments. Cette option permet d’appliquer les modifications effectuées dans cette boîte de dialogue à tous les éléments semblables du projet. 14 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 260 Définition des options de texte dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez définir quelques options de texte MenuBuilder lorsque vous créez un élément de texte à l’aide de l’assistant MenuBuilder. Cependant, vous pouvez définir davantage d’options une fois que le texte a été créé. Pour définir les options de texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’élément de texte à modifier. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés du texte s’affiche. 3 Configurez les options de texte : Style Sélectionnez un style de texte. Les styles répertoriés sont importés du modèle sélectionné. Sélectionnez Personnaliser pour créer un nouveau style. Police Sélectionnez une police de caractères. Sélectionnez également les options de taille et de style. Texte Entrez le texte tel que vous voulez qu’il apparaisse dans le projet. Lien Sélectionnez le type de lien à activer. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour chercher d’autres possibilités (vous pouvez créer des liens vers presque tous les types de fichiers). Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’URL appropriée. Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet Enregistre le fichier avec le projet Adobe Captivate. Paramètres avancés Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. Infobulle Entrez le texte de l’infobulle de survol. Couleur normale et Couleur de survol Sélectionnez des couleurs pour chaque état de texte. La couleur de survol est la couleur qui s’affiche lorsque l’utilisateur survole le texte avec la souris. Appliquer les modifications à tous les éléments Applique les modifications effectuées dans cette boîte de dialogue à tous les éléments semblables du projet. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Déplacement de texte dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez déplacer des éléments de texte dans MenuBuilder en les faisant glisser. Pour déplacer du texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément de texte à déplacer et faites-le glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. Vous pouvez déplacer plusieurs éléments de texte en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur différents éléments de texte. Faites glisser les éléments de texte vers le nouvel emplacement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 261 Vous pouvez aussi déplacer du texte par pixels. Sélectionnez le texte à déplacer. Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. Le texte se déplace d’un pixel dans la direction de la flèche. Vous pouvez également déplacer du texte vers la bordure de grille suivante. Sélectionnez le texte à déplacer. Maintenez enfoncées les touches Maj et Ctrl tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. Le texte se déplace sur la bordure de grille suivante. Alignement du texte dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez aligner des éléments de texte horizontalement, verticalement et les uns avec les autres dans les projets MenuBuilder. Pour aligner des éléments de texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Appuyez sur Maj et sélectionnez les éléments de texte à aligner. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Aligner. La boîte de dialogue Alignement s’affiche. 4 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options d’alignement : Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Horizontal : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner à gauche Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures gauches des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments. Aligner à droite Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures droites des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments horizontalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments horizontalement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Vertical : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner le haut Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le haut des bordures des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments. Aligner le bas Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le bas des bordures des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments verticalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments verticalement. 5 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 262 Copie de texte dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement copier et coller du texte dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez copier plusieurs éléments de texte en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les éléments de texte. Pour copier du texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez le texte à copier. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Copier. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Copier. Pour coller du texte : 1 Copiez l’élément de texte que vous voulez coller. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Coller. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Coller. Ordre du texte dans MenuBuilder MenuBuilder vous permet d’ajouter du texte, ainsi que d’autres objets comme des zones de clic et des images, aux projets. Si du texte est superposé sur d’autres objets, ou vice-versa, il est important de définir un ordre de superposition pour contrôler l’ordre d’apparition des objets. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène ». Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les objets à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres objets. Pour ordonner des éléments de texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur le texte dont vous voulez modifier l’ordre de superposition et sélectionnez Premier plan ou Arrière-plan. Affichage de l’emplacement en pixels dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez afficher l’emplacement exact (en pixels) des zones de clic, des images et des éléments de texte dans MenuBuilder. Pour afficher l’emplacement en pixels : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez un élément. 3 Dans la barre Détails (à gauche), les coordonnées de l’élément sont affichées. Les coordonnées sont les valeurs en pixels du point supérieur gauche de l’élément. Le coin supérieur gauche de la fenêtre se situe en 0,0. Si vous déplacez un élément vers la droite, la première valeur augmente. Si vous déplacez un élément vers le bas, la deuxième valeur augmente. Suppression de texte dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement supprimer du texte dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez supprimer plusieurs éléments de texte en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les éléments de texte.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 263 Pour supprimer du texte : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez le texte à supprimer. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Supprimer. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Supprimer. 4 Selon les Préférences de MenuBuilder que vous avez sélectionnées, il se peut qu’une boîte de dialogue affiche un message de confirmation. Si c’est le cas, cliquez sur Oui pour supprimer l’élément. Utilisation d’images dans les projets MenuBuilder Vous pouvez ajouter des images à un projet MenuBuilder à tout moment. Vous pouvez même transformer les images en liens interactifs. Ajout d’images dans MenuBuilder MenuBuilder vous permet d’ajouter des images qui contiennent des liens interactifs. Remarque : Les images peuvent être au format JPEG, GIF, BMP, ICO, EMF ou WMF. Pour ajouter une image : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Image. 3 Sélectionnez l’image que vous voulez ajouter et cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Nouvelle zone d’image s’affiche. 4 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options : Lien Sélectionnez le type de lien à activer. Cliquez sur la flèche pointant vers le bas pour afficher les options. Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’adresse URL appropriée dans ce champ. Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF Macromedia nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. Paramètres avancés Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. Infobulle Entrez le texte de l’infobulle. Arrière-plan transparent Rend transparente la couleur d’arrière-plan de l’image. L’image elle-même ne devient pas transparente. Transparence Rend l’image transparente. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. Appliquer les modifications à tous les éléments Applique les modifications effectuées dans cette boîte de dialogue à tous les éléments semblables du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 264 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Définition des options d’une image dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez modifier les propriétés d’une image dans MenuBuilder à tout moment. Pour définir les options d’une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’image à modifier. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l’image s’affiche. 3 Configurez les options de l’image : Image Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) pour sélectionner un fichier d’image. Les images peuvent avoir les formats suivants : JPEG, GIF, BMP, ICO, EMF ou WMF. Lien Utilisez le menu déroulant accessible en cliquant sur la flèche pointant vers le bas pour sélectionner le type de lien à activer. Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’adresse URL appropriée dans ce champ. Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF Macromedia nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. Paramètres avancés Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. Infobulle Entrez le texte de l’infobulle. Arrière-plan transparent Rend transparente la couleur d’arrière-plan de l’image. L’image elle-même ne devient pas transparente. Transparence Rend l’image transparente. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. Appliquer les modifications à tous les éléments Applique les modifications effectuées dans cette boîte de dialogue à tous les éléments semblables du projet. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Déplacement d’images dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez déplacer des images dans MenuBuilder en les faisant glisser. Pour déplacer une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’image à déplacer et faites-la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 265 Vous pouvez déplacer plusieurs images en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur différentes images. Faites glisser les images vers le nouvel emplacement. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer une image par pixels. Sélectionnez l’image à déplacer. Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. L’image se déplace d’un pixel dans la direction que vous voulez. Vous pouvez également déplacer une image vers la bordure de grille suivante. Sélectionnez l’image à déplacer. Maintenez enfoncées les touches Maj et Ctrl tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. L’image se déplace sur la bordure de grille suivante. Alignement des images dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez aligner des images horizontalement, verticalement et les unes avec les autres dans les projets MenuBuilder. Pour aligner des images : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Appuyez sur Maj et sélectionnez les images à aligner. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Aligner. La boîte de dialogue Alignement s’affiche. 4 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options d’alignement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Horizontal : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner à gauche Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures gauches des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments. Aligner à droite Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures droites des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments horizontalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments horizontalement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Vertical : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner le haut Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le haut des bordures des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments. Aligner le bas Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le bas des bordures des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments verticalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments verticalement. 5 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 266 Copie des images dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement copier et coller des images dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez copier plusieurs images en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les images. Pour copier une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’image à copier. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Copier. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Copier. Pour coller une image : 1 Copiez une image. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Coller. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Coller. Ordre des images dans MenuBuilder MenuBuilder vous permet d’ajouter des images, ainsi que d’autres objets comme des zones de clic et du texte, aux projets. Si une image est superposée sur d’autres objets, ou vice-versa, il est important de définir un ordre de superposition pour contrôler l’ordre d’apparition des objets. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène ». Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les objets à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres objets. Pour ordonner des images : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur l’image dont vous voulez modifier l’ordre de superposition et sélectionnez Premier plan ou Arrière-plan. Affichage de l’emplacement en pixels dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez afficher l’emplacement exact (en pixels) des zones de clic, des images et des éléments de texte dans MenuBuilder. Pour afficher l’emplacement en pixels : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez un élément. 3 Dans la barre Détails (à gauche), les coordonnées de l’élément sont affichées. Les coordonnées sont les valeurs en pixels du point supérieur gauche de l’élément. Le coin supérieur gauche de la fenêtre se situe en 0,0. Si vous déplacez un élément vers la droite, la première valeur augmente. Si vous déplacez un élément vers le bas, la deuxième valeur augmente. Modification de la taille des images dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez dimensionner des images selon leur hauteur, leur largeur et selon les autres images dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez réinitialiser la taille d’une image à sa taille d’origine. Vous pouvez dimensionner plusieurs images en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les images. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 267 Pour modifier la taille d’une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’image à dimensionner. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Taille. 4 Sélectionnez les options. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Largeur : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier la largeur de l’image. Rétrécir selon le plus petit Si vous sélectionnez plus d’une image à dimensionner, cette option permet de dimensionner toutes les images selon l’image la plus petite. Agrandir selon le plus grand Si vous sélectionnez plus d’une image à dimensionner, cette option permet de dimensionner toutes les images selon l’image la plus grande. Largeur Ce champ contient la largeur de l’image en pixels. Vous pouvez modifier cette valeur. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Hauteur : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier la hauteur de l’image. Rétrécir selon le plus petit Si vous sélectionnez plus d’une image à dimensionner, cette option permet de dimensionner toutes les images selon l’image la plus petite. Agrandir selon le plus grand Si vous sélectionnez plus d’une image à dimensionner, cette option permet de dimensionner toutes les images selon l’image la plus grande. Hauteur Ce champ contient la hauteur de l’image en pixels. Vous pouvez modifier cette valeur. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : Vous pouvez également dimensionner une image sélectionnée en faisant glisser ses poignées de redimensionnement. Cette méthode est moins précise que l’utilisation de la boîte de dialogue Taille, mais elle est très pratique. Pour réinitialiser une taille d’image à sa taille d’origine : 1 Créez une image dans MenuBuilder. 2 Redimensionnez l’image selon vos besoins. 3 Cliquez du bouton droit sur l’image et sélectionnez Réinitialiser. L’image revient à sa taille d’origine. Mise à l’échelle des images dans MenuBuilder La mise à l’échelle réduit ou agrandit une image proportionnellement. Vous pouvez modifier l’échelle d’une ou plusieurs images dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez mettre à l’échelle plusieurs images en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur différentes images. Pour mettre à l’échelle une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’image que vous voulez mettre à l’échelle.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 268 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Echelle. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Echelle. 4 Dans le champ Echelle, entrez l’échelle désirée en pourcentage de la taille d’origine de l’image. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Création d’images transparentes dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez personnaliser des images dans MenuBuilder afin qu’elles soient aussi transparentes que vous le souhaitez. Pour créer une image transparente : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’image à modifier. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de l’image s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez Arrière-plan transparent pour que la couleur d’arrière-plan de l’image soit transparente. L’image ellemême ne devient pas transparente. 4 Sélectionnez Transparence pour que l’image soit transparente. Sélectionnez une valeur entre 0 et 100 %. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. 5 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Suppression d’images dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement supprimer des images dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez supprimer plusieurs images en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les images. Pour supprimer une image : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez l’image à supprimer. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Supprimer. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Supprimer. 4 Selon les Préférences de MenuBuilder que vous avez sélectionnées, il se peut qu’une boîte de dialogue affiche un message de confirmation. Si c’est le cas, cliquez sur Oui pour supprimer l’élément.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 269 Utilisation des zones de clic dans les projets MenuBuilder Les zones de clic dans MenuBuilder sont des zones interactives qui ne contiennent pas d’images. Vous pouvez lier les zones de clic à des fichiers de la même façon que pour du texte et des images. Vous pouvez également faire « flotter » les zones de clic devant d’autres éléments. Ajout de zones de clic dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement ajouter et modifier des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder. Pour ajouter une zone de clic : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Insérer > Zone de clic. 3 Sélectionnez le type de lien à activer dans le menu déroulant Lien. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher les autres possibilités. 4 Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’URL appropriée. 5 Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF Macromedia nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. 6 Sélectionnez Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet si vous souhaitez que le fichier soit enregistré avec le projet Adobe Captivate. 7 Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. 8 Dans le champ Infobulle, entrez le texte de l’infobulle de survol. 9 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Définition des options d’une zone de clic de MenuBuilder Vous pouvez modifier une zone de clic dans MenuBuilder à tout moment. Pour définir les options d’une zone de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Dans la fenêtre d’aperçu, double-cliquez sur la zone de clic à modifier. La boîte de dialogue Propriétés de la zone de clic s’affiche. 3 Configurez les options de la zone de clic : Sélectionnez le type de lien à activer dans le menu déroulant Lien. Cliquez sur Parcourir pour rechercher les autres possibilités. Entrez le texte approprié dans le champ Lien. Par exemple, si vous sélectionnez Adresse URL, entrez l’adresse URL appropriée dans ce champ.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 270 Lorsque vous créez un lien vers un fichier SWF Macromedia, MenuBuilder crée automatiquement un lien vers le fichier HTM associé. Tous les fichiers SWF Macromedia nécessitent un fichier HTM associé. Ce fichier contient les informations nécessaires pour lire correctement le fichier SWF. Vous pouvez cliquer sur Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet pour enregistrer le fichier HTM lié avec le fichier SWF. Lorsque vous exportez le fichier SWF, le fichier HTM lié est également exporté. 4 Sélectionnez Enregistrer le fichier avec le projet si vous souhaitez que le fichier soit enregistré avec le projet Adobe Captivate. 5 Si vous créez un lien vers une adresse URL ou vers un fichier HTM, le bouton Paramètres avancés est actif. Cliquez sur ce bouton pour définir les options d’affichage de la fenêtre du navigateur qui contient le lien. 6 Dans le champ Infobulle, entrez le texte de l’infobulle de survol. 7 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Déplacement des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez déplacer des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder en les faisant glisser. Pour déplacer une zone de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez la zone de clic à déplacer et faites-la glisser à un autre emplacement. Vous pouvez déplacer plusieurs zones de clic en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur diférentes zones de clic. Faites glisser les zones de clic vers le nouvel emplacement. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer une zone de clic par pixels. Sélectionnez la zone de clic à déplacer. Maintenez la touche Ctrl enfoncée tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. La zone de clic se déplace d’un pixel dans la direction choisie. Par ailleurs, vous pouvez déplacer une zone de clic sur la bordure de grille suivante. Sélectionnez la zone de clic à déplacer. Maintenez enfoncées les touches Maj et Ctrl tout en appuyant sur une touche de direction. La zone de clic se déplace sur la bordure de grille suivante. Alignement des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez aligner des zones de clic horizontalement, verticalement et les unes avec les autres dans MenuBuilder. Pour aligner des zones de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Appuyez sur Maj et sélectionnez les zones de clic à aligner. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Aligner. La boîte de dialogue Alignement s’affiche. 4 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options d’alignement : Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Horizontal : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner à gauche Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures gauches des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 271 Aligner à droite Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les bordures droites des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments horizontalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments horizontalement. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Vertical : Pas de modification Sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas modifier l’alignement. Aligner le haut Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le haut des bordures des éléments. Centres Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner les centres des éléments. Aligner le bas Sélectionnez cette option pour aligner le bas des bordures des éléments. Espacer régulièrement Sélectionnez cette option pour espacer les éléments verticalement à intervalles réguliers. Centrer dans la fenêtre Sélectionnez cette option pour centrer les éléments verticalement. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Copie des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement copier et coller des zones clic dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez copier plusieurs zones de clic en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les zones de clic. Pour copier une zone de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez la zone de clic à copier. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Copier. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Copier. Pour coller une zone de clic : 1 Copiez une zone de clic. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Coller. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Coller. Ordre des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder MenuBuilder vous permet d’ajouter des zones de clic, ainsi que d’autres objets comme des images et du texte, aux projets. Si une zone de clic est superposée à d’autres objets, ou vice-versa, il est important de définir un ordre de superposition pour contrôler l’ordre d’apparition des objets. La modification de l’ordre de superposition consiste à déplacer des objets vers l’arrière ou vers l’avant de la « scène ». Il est essentiel de ne pas oublier que les objets à l’arrière de la scène s’affichent derrière les autres objets. Pour ordonner des zones de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Cliquez du bouton droit sur la zone de clic dont vous voulez modifier l’ordre de superposition et sélectionnez Premier plan ou Arrière-plan.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 272 Affichage de l’emplacement en pixels dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez afficher l’emplacement exact (en pixels) des zones de clic, des images et des éléments de texte dans MenuBuilder. Pour afficher l’emplacement en pixels : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez un élément. 3 Dans la barre Détails (à gauche), les coordonnées de l’élément sont affichées. Les coordonnées sont les valeurs en pixels du point supérieur gauche de l’élément. Le coin supérieur gauche de la fenêtre a les valeurs 0,0. Si vous déplacez un élément vers la droite, la première valeur augmente. Si vous déplacez un élément vers le bas, la deuxième valeur augmente. Suppression de zones de clic dans MenuBuilder Vous pouvez facilement et rapidement supprimer des zones de clic dans MenuBuilder. Vous pouvez supprimer plusieurs zones de clic en même temps en appuyant sur Maj tout en cliquant sur les zones de clic. Pour supprimer une zone de clic : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez la zone de clic à supprimer. 3 Sélectionnez Modifier > Supprimer. Vous pouvez également cliquer du bouton droit et sélectionner Supprimer. 4 Selon les Préférences de MenuBuilder que vous avez sélectionnées, il se peut qu’une boîte de dialogue affiche un message de confirmation. Si c’est le cas, cliquez sur Oui pour supprimer l’élément. Modification des options d’un projet MenuBuilder Vous pouvez définir plusieurs options de projet MenuBuilder au cours du développement initial du projet. Définition des options d’un projet MenuBuilder Si vous utilisez l’assistant MenuBuilder pour créer un nouveau projet, vous pouvez entre autre définir les dimensions du projet, le titre et la transparence de l’arrière-plan. Cependant, vous pouvez aussi définir d’autres options une fois que le projet est ouvert. Pour définir les options d’un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Options du projet. 3 Dans la section Projet, modifiez les options : Titre Ce champ contient le texte du titre tel qu’il apparaît dans la partie supérieure de la boîte de dialogue du projet terminé. Vous pouvez modifier ce texte. Icône de CD Ce champ contient l’icône à utiliser si vous avez l’intention d’exporter le projet sous forme d’un fichier EXE. Si vous voulez créer ou modifier un fichier d’icône, cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un fichier ICO. 4 Dans la section Arrière-plan, modifiez les options :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 273 Image Ce champ contient l’image d’arrière-plan. En général, il s’agit de l’image d’arrière-plan du modèle. Si vous voulez modifier cette image, cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre fichier image. Une fois l’image sélectionnée, elle s’affiche dans la petite fenêtre d’aperçu. Couleur Ce champ fait référence à la couleur d’arrière-plan du projet. Si l’image remplit entièrement l’arrière-plan, vous ne verrez pas la couleur d’arrière-plan. Cependant, vous pouvez voir la couleur d’arrière-plan lorsque l’image d’arrière-plan est plus petite que les dimensions du projet, et lorsque vous utilisez une image avec un arrière-plan transparent. Mise en page Déterminez l’emplacement de l’image d’arrière-plan à l’aide du menu déroulant. Vous pouvez choisir entre étirement, centre et mosaïque. Style de bordure Ce champ contient le style de bordure. Sélectionnez un style de bordure pour le projet dans le menu déroulant. Transparence Ce champ contient la valeur de transparence du projet. Sélectionnez une valeur de transparence différente dans le menu déroulant. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. 5 Dans la section Taille de la fenêtre, modifiez les options : Plein écran Sélectionnez cette option pour créer un projet en plein écran. Personnaliser Cette option permet de choisir la taille d’un projet. Largeur Entrez une largeur en pixels. Hauteur Entrez une hauteur en pixels. 6 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Association d’icônes aux projets MenuBuilder MenuBuilder permet d’associer des icônes aux projets MenuBuilder. C’est très utile lorsque vous exportez des projets sous forme de fichiers EXE. Lorsque vous exportez un projet MenuBuilder sous forme de fichier EXE, MenuBuilder crée un fichier entièrement exécutable que les utilisateurs peuvent lancer en double-cliquant dessus. Les utilisateurs peuvent bien entendu double-cliquer sur le nom du fichier (par exemple, nomdeprojet.exe) pour ouvrir le fichier EXE. Cependant, si vous associez une icône au projet et si les utilisateurs mettent le fichier sur leur bureau électronique, ils peuvent double-cliquer sur l’icône au lieu de cliquer sur le nom du fichier. Vous devez utiliser des fichiers ICO pour les icônes de projets MenuBuilder. Il existe deux façons d’associer des icônes aux projets. Vous pouvez associer une icône à un projet lorsqu’il est initialement créé en utilisant l’assistant MenuBuilder ou vous pouvez associer une icône à un projet existant en modifiant les options du projet. Pour associer une icône à un projet lorsqu’il est initialement créé : • Créez un projet en utilisant l’assistant MenuBuilder. Dans le troisième écran de l’assistant, cliquez sur Autres à côté du champ Icône de CD pour sélectionner une icône de projet. (N’oubliez pas d’utiliser un fichier ICO.) Pour associer une icône à un projet existant : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Options du projet. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) à côté du champ Icône de CD pour sélectionner un fichier ICO comme icône de projet. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 274 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Création de projets MenuBuilder avec des arrière-plans transparents Les projets transparents MenuBuilder contiennent une valeur de transparence que vous déterminez. La valeur varie de 0 % à 100 %. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. Une valeur comprise entre ces deux extrêmes offre un élément visuel intéressant. Il existe deux façons de créer des projets transparents. En utilisant l’assistant MenuBuilder, vous pouvez rendre un projet transparent lorsqu’il est initialement créé. Vous pouvez également rendre un projet existant transparent en modifiant les options du projet. Pour rendre un projet transparent lorsqu’il est initialement créé : Créez un projet en utilisant l’assistant MenuBuilder. Dans le troisième écran de l’assistant, sélectionnez une valeur de transparence dans le menu déroulant. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. Pour rendre un projet existant transparent : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Options du projet. 3 Dans le menu déroulant Transparence, sélectionnez une valeur de transparence. 0 % est opaque et 100 % est totalement transparent. 4 Cliquez sur Appliquer pour visionner vos modifications sans fermer la boîte de dialogue ou cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue. Ajout d’audio aux projets MenuBuilder Vous pouvez ajouter de l’audio (fichiers WAV, MP3 et WMA) à vos projets MenuBuilder. Pour ajouter de l’audio à un projet : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Options audio. 3 Sélectionnez les actions pour lesquelles vous voulez de l’audio. • Sélectionnez Clic de la souris pour sélectionner un fichier audio qui sera lu lorsque l’utilisateur cliquera avec la souris. Cliquez sur Autres pour naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio. Cliquez sur Lecture pour écouter le fichier. • Sélectionnez Survol de la souris pour sélectionner un fichier audio qui sera lu lorsque l’utilisateur survolera un élément lié. Cliquez sur Autres pour naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio. Cliquez sur Lecture pour écouter le fichier. • Sélectionnez Au démarrage pour sélectionner un fichier audio qui sera lu au début du projet. Cliquez sur Autres pour naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio. Cliquez sur Lecture pour écouter le fichier. • Sélectionnez Arrière-plan pour sélectionner un fichier audio qui sera lu à l’arrière-plan lorsque l’utilisateur visionnera le projet. Cliquez sur Autres pour naviguer jusqu’à un fichier audio. Cliquez sur Lecture pour écouter le fichier. 4 Cliquez sur OK pour accepter les modifications et fermer la boîte de dialogue.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 275 Redimensionnement de projets MenuBuilder lorsque vous travaillez dessus En général, vous déterminez la taille de votre projet MenuBuilder dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences (cela détermine la taille par défaut des projets) ou dans la boîte de dialogue Options du projet MenuBuilder (cela détermine la taille d’un projet spécifique). Cependant, vous pouvez aussi redimensionner des projets lorsque vous travaillez dessus. Pour redimensionner un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet MenuBuilder. 2 Agrandissez l’application MenuBuilder pour qu’elle soit en mode Plein écran. 3 Positionnez la souris dans le coin inférieur droit du projet. Le pointeur de la souris se change en flèche à deux pointes. 4 Appuyez sur le bouton gauche de la souris et faites glisser le coin du projet jusqu’à ce que vous ayez la taille désirée. La largeur et la hauteur modifiées s’affichent dans la partie inférieure droite de la fenêtre du programme. MenuBuilder met tous les éléments à l’échelle dans le projet selon la nouvelle taille. Utilisation des touches de raccourci de MenuBuilder Voici quelques touches de raccourci pour gagner du temps dans MenuBuilder. Définition des préférences MenuBuilder Vous pouvez définir plusieurs préférences concernant MenuBuilder. Ces préférences sont globales : elles ne sont pas spécifiques à des projets MenuBuilder individuels. Pour définir les préférences : 1 Ouvrez MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Préférences et configurez les options. Touche de raccourci Action Ctrl+I Nouvelle image Ctrl+N Nouveau projet Ctrl+P Imprimer le projet Ctrl+S Enregistrer projet/modèle Ctrl+T Nouveau texte Ctrl+W Nouvelle instance de MenuBuilder F1 Aide F4 Aperçu du projet F5 Pré-lecture de l’audio F7 Vérifier l’orthographe F11 Mode plein écranADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 276 Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Options de la grille : Afficher la grille Cette option permet d’afficher la grille dans MenuBuilder. Cette grille n’apparaît pas dans le projet final, mais elle est utilisée lors du développement pour positionner et aligner le texte et les images. Accrocher à la grille Cette option permet d’accrocher le texte et les images à la grille. Taille de la grille Sélectionnez une valeur numérique pour la grille à l’aide des flèches. Les valeurs sont comprises entre 2 et 100. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la zone Options d’enregistrement auto : Projet Cette option permet d’enregistrer les projets sans afficher de boîte de dialogue de confirmation. Bureau Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder s’ouvre avec le projet le plus récent. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Options du nouveau projet : Largeur Entrez une largeur par défaut en pixels pour les nouveaux projets MenuBuilder. Hauteur Entrez une hauteur par défaut en pixels pour les nouveaux projets MenuBuilder. Les options suivantes sont disponibles dans la section Options d’affichage : Dialogue de démarrage Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche la boîte de dialogue MenuBuilder de démarrage, plutôt que de simplement ouvrir le projet le plus récent ou un projet vide. Le projet le plus récent s’ouvre si Options d’enregistrement auto > Bureau est sélectionnée et Options d’affichage > Dialogue de démarrage n’est pas sélectionnée. Un projet vide s’ouvre si Options d’enregistrement auto > Bureau et Options d’affichage > Dialogue de démarrage ne sont pas sélectionnées. Confirmation de suppression Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche une boîte de dialogue pour confirmer la suppression. Confirmation de la fusion Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche une boîte de dialogue pour confirmer la fusion. Confirmation d’importation de lien Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche une boîte de dialogue pour confirmer les importations des liens. Confirmation de la redirection du lien Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche une boîte de dialogue pour confirmer les redirections de liens. Fichiers SWF externes Cette option permet de garantir que MenuBuilder affiche une boîte de dialogue pour confirmer la création de liens avec des fichiers SWF externes. Vous pouvez définir l’option suivante dans la zone Ancrage : Ancrage par glissement automatique Sélectionnez cette option pour faire glisser la barre d’outils de MenuBuilder vers un nouvel emplacement. Pour faire glisser la barre d’outils, cliquez sur une partie de la barre d’outils qui ne contient pas de bouton et faites la glisser vers un nouvel emplacement. 4 Cliquez sur OK. Définition des répertoires par défaut dans MenuBuilder MenuBuilder vous permet de sélectionner les répertoires par défaut pour de nombreux éléments liés aux projets MenuBuilder. Par exemple, si vous avez un répertoire de graphiques susceptible d’être la source de nombreuses images, vous pouvez définir le répertoire Image par défaut de MenuBuilder sur votre répertoire préféré.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 277 Pour définir des répertoires par défaut : 1 Ouvrez MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Options > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Répertoires et configurez les options : Répertoire de projets Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les projets MenuBuilder. Le contenu de ce dossier s’affiche dans la boîte de dialogue MenuBuilder de démarrage, ce qui vous permet de visualiser des projets MenuBuilder existants sans avoir besoin de naviguer. Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire d’arrière-plans Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les images d’arrière-plan. Les images d’arrière-plan font généralement référence aux graphiques d’arrière-plan des modèles. Si PowerPoint est installé sur votre ordinateur et si vous n’avez pas créé de modèles personnalisés, MenuBuilder utilise les modèles PowerPoint comme option par défaut pour les modèles MenuBuilder. Par conséquence, le dossier par défaut des images d’arrièreplan est Mes documents\Mes Images. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire audio Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les effets audio de MenuBuilder. Par défaut, ce dossier est Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\Sound. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire d’icônes Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les icônes de MenuBuilder (fichiers ICO). Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes Images. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire de modèles Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les modèles MenuBuilder. Il s’agit de modèles MenuBuilder, et non de modèles PowerPoint. Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire d’images Cette option fait référence au dossier qui contient les images MenuBuilder. Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes Images. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire d’exportation Cette option fait référence au dossier dans lequel MenuBuilder enregistre les fichiers de projets exportés. Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate. Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. Répertoire de navigation Cette option fait référence au dossier que MenuBuilder parcourt. Par défaut, ce dossier est Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate Cliquez sur Autres pour sélectionner un autre dossier. 4 Cliquez sur OK. Exportation des projets MenuBuilder Vous pouvez exporter des projets MenuBuilder dans différents formats, notamment : • Flash • EXE • HTML • Word • MacADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 278 Exportation de projets MenuBuilder sous forme de fichiers Flash SWF Le format Flash (fichier SWF) est une option d’exportation couramment utilisée pour les projets MenuBuilder. Pour exporter un projet sous forme de fichier Flash SWF : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter. 3 Si vous n’avez pas enregistré le fichier, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. Enregistrez le fichier. La boîte de dialogue d’exportation de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 4 Sélectionnez Film Flash et cliquez sur Suivant. 5 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, acceptez le nom par défaut ou entrez un nouveau nom. 6 Dans le champ Répertoire, acceptez le chemin par défaut ou entrez un nouveau chemin et dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet exporté. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’à un autre dossier. 7 Si vous voulez que le fichier Flash SWF soit lancé automatiquement, sélectionnez Générer un fichier de lancement automatique pour les distribution de CD. 8 Si vous voulez lancer la lecture du fichier Flash SWF immédiatement après l’exportation, sélectionnez Afficher le projet après l’exportation. 9 Cliquez sur Terminer. Exportation de projets MenuBuilder sous forme de fichiers EXE Lorsque vous exportez un projet sous forme de fichier EXE, MenuBuilder crée un fichier entièrement exécutable que les utilisateurs peuvent lancer en cliquant dessus. Pour exporter un projet sous forme de fichier EXE : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter. 3 Si vous n’avez pas enregistré le fichier, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. Enregistrez le fichier. 4 La boîte de dialogue d’exportation de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez EXE et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, acceptez le nom par défaut ou entrez un nouveau nom. 7 Dans le champ Répertoire, acceptez le chemin par défaut ou entrez un nouveau chemin et dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet exporté. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’à un autre dossier. 8 Si vous voulez que le fichier EXE soit lancé automatiquement, sélectionnez Générer un fichier de lancement automatique pour les distribution de CD. 9 Si vous voulez ouvrir le fichier EXE immédiatement après l’exportation, sélectionnez Afficher le projet après l’exportation. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 279 Exportation de projets MenuBuilder sous forme de fichiers HTML Lorsque vous exportez un projet sous forme de fichier HTML, MenuBuilder crée un fichier HTML ainsi que tous les fichiers d’images et audio nécessaires. Pour exporter un projet sous forme de fichier HTML : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter. 3 Si vous n’avez pas enregistré le fichier, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. Enregistrez le fichier. 4 La boîte de dialogue d’exportation de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez HTML et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, acceptez le nom par défaut ou entrez un nouveau nom. 7 Dans le champ Répertoire, acceptez le chemin par défaut ou entrez un nouveau chemin et dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet exporté. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’à un autre dossier. 8 Si vous voulez que le fichier HTML s’ouvre automatiquement, sélectionnez Générer un fichier de lancement automatique pour les distribution de CD. 9 Si vous voulez ouvrir le fichier HTML immédiatement après l’exportation, sélectionnez Afficher le projet après l’exportation. 10 Cliquez sur Terminer. Exportation de projets MenuBuilder sous forme de fichiers Word Lorsque vous exportez un projet sous forme de fichier Word, MenuBuilder crée un fichier DOC qui contient une image du projet. Il s’agit bien entendu d’une image statique. Les éléments de texte et d’image ne contiennent pas de liens interactifs. Cependant, le fichier DOC inclut un tableau des éléments suivants pour référence : type, texte/image, lien et infobulle. Pour exporter un projet sous forme de fichier Word : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter. 3 Si vous n’avez pas enregistré le fichier, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. Enregistrez le fichier. 4 La boîte de dialogue d’exportation de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Word et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, acceptez le nom par défaut ou entrez un nouveau nom. 7 Dans le champ Répertoire, acceptez le chemin par défaut ou entrez un nouveau chemin et dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet exporté. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’à un autre dossier. 8 Si vous voulez ouvrir le fichier Word immédiatement après l’exportation, sélectionnez Afficher le projet après l’exportation. 9 Cliquez sur Terminer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 280 Exportation de projets MenuBuilder pour Macintosh Lorsque vous exportez un projet sous forme de fichier Macintosh Projector, MenuBuilder crée un fichier HQX. Pour exporter un projet sous forme de fichier Macintosh Projector : 1 Créez ou ouvrez un projet MenuBuilder. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter. 3 Si vous n’avez pas enregistré le fichier, la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. Enregistrez le fichier. 4 La boîte de dialogue d’exportation de MenuBuilder s’affiche. 5 Sélectionnez Mac et cliquez sur Suivant. 6 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, acceptez le nom par défaut ou entrez un nouveau nom. 7 Dans le champ Répertoire, acceptez le chemin par défaut ou entrez un nouveau chemin et dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le projet exporté. Vous pouvez également sélectionner Parcourir pour naviguer jusqu’à un autre dossier. 8 Cliquez sur Terminer.281 Chapitre 15 : Publication de projets Une fois que vous avez créé un projet, vous le publiez pour que d’autres personnes puissent le visionner. Adobe Captive compte de nombreuses options de publication et vous pouvez publier le projet dans autant de formats différents que nécessaire. • Publication des projets sous forme de fichiers EXE • Publication des projets vers Adobe® Connect™ Enterprise • Publication des projets sous forme de fichier Flash (SWF) • Publication des projets sous forme imprimable (fichier Microsoft Word). Cette méthode comprend les formats documents, leçon, étape par étape et scénarimage. • Publication des projets sur le Web en utilisant FTP • Envoi des projets par courrier électronique Remarque : Les caractères asiatiques ne sont pas pris en charge dans les noms de fichiers de sortie. (Par exemple, évitez d’utiliser des caractères asiatiques dans un nom de fichier SWF.) Publication des projets sous forme de fichiers autonomes (EXE) Vous pouvez créer des fichiers exécutables autonomes de vos projets Adobe Captivate. Cette option de publication permet de créer un fichier exécutable Windows (EXE). Pour publier un projet sous forme d’un fichier EXE : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Autonome et utilisez les options suivantes : Titre du projet Entrez le nom désiré sans l’extension du fichier (EXE). Dossier Entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 4 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de sortie suivantes : Compresser les fichiers Cette option crée un fichier zip qui contient le fichier EXE. Un programme tel que WinZip peut être utilisé pour ouvrir les fichiers. Plein écran Cette option permet d’ouvrir le fichier EXE en mode plein écran. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Générer le lancement automatique de CD Cette option garantit le lancement automatique du fichier de sortie lorsque le fichier EXE est mis sur un CD. Un fichier de lancement automatique .INF est généré dans le répertoire de publication. Version de Flash Player Adobe Captivate génère le fichier SWF dans la version Flash que vous choisissez. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 282 5 La zone Informations du projet affiche des statistiques utiles concernant le projet, y compris la taille (résolution), le nombre de diapositives, des informations audio, des détails sur l’apprentissage en ligne et la commande de lecture affectée au projet. Pour modifier l’une des options de la zone, cliquez sur le texte en bleu. Pour modifier les préférences, cliquez sur le bouton Préférences. 6 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Publication des projets vers Adobe Connect Enterprise Les spectateurs passifs de vos présentations ou de vos réunions en ligne deviennent des participants actifs grâce aux simulations interactives ou à la formation basée sur des scénarios dans Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Professional ou Adobe Presenter. Il vous est facile de partager en ligne réunions, présentations et cours de formation sur Internet. La publication des projets Adobe Captivate vers Adobe® Connect™ Enterprise vous permet de présenter une formation à plusieurs étudiants simultanément. Pour publier un projet dans Adobe Connect Enterprise : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Adobe Connect. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier le serveur. 5 La boîte de dialogue Serveur Adobe Connect s’affiche. Cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Dans Nom et URL, tapez le nom et l’adresse URL du serveur Connect que vous voulez utiliser. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Le serveur Adobe Connect est maintenant répertorié. 8 Sélectionnez le serveur que vous venez d’ajouter et cliquez sur OK. 9 (Facultatif) Pour que le serveur Adobe Connect assure le suivi de toutes les interactions au sein du projet Adobe Captivate, sélectionnez Activer le suivi de serveur Adobe Connect. Si, par exemple, vous placez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant un quiz dans Acrobat Connect Professional, celui-ci assure le suivi des réponses des utilisateurs qui interagissent avec le quiz. Si vous activez cette option, la liste de sortie d’apprentissage, qui se trouve dans la zone Informations sur le projet, dans la partie droite de la boîte de dialogue, est modifiée. Remarque : Si vous publiez un projet Adobe Captivate sur votre ordinateur, puis le chargez sur le serveur Adobe Connect, vous devez publier vos fichiers au format Flash 7. Les fonctionnalités interactives, comme le suivi des réponses, ne fonctionnent pas dans Acrobat Connect quand les fichiers sont publiés au format Flash 8 ou Flash 9. 10 (Facultatif) Si vous souhaitez publier le fichier de projet Adobe Captivate (fichier CP) vers Adobe Connect Enterprise en même temps que le fichier de projet SWF, sélectionnez Publier les fichiers de projet. Dans ce cas, le fichier CP (et non pas seulement le fichier SWF) est disponible pour les autres utilisateurs. Sélectionnez une des options suivantes, ou les deux : Compresser le fichier de projet Sélectionnez cette option pour compresser le fichier de projet Adobe Captivate (.CP) dans un fichier ZIP avant de le télécharger vers Adobe Connect Enterprise. Publier les fichiers vidéo Sélectionnez cette option si le projet contient des fichiers FLV progressifs, afin de les télécharger vers Adobe Connect Enterprise. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 283 11 Cliquez sur Publier. 12 Entrez le nom d’utilisateur et mot de passe que vous utilisez pour vous connecter à Adobe Connect. Si la connexion est établie, Adobe Connect s’ouvre et affiche votre répertoire de contenus. 13 Une boîte de téléchargement confirme la réussite du téléchargement vers le serveur. Acrobat Connect Professional fournit une URL où vous pouvez accéder au projet en ligne. Publication des projets sous forme de fichiers Flash Il est possible de publier les projets Adobe Captivate sous forme de fichiers SWF Flash 7, 8 ou 9. Après avoir publié le projet sous forme de fichier SWF, vous pouvez utiliser ces fichiers indépendamment les uns des autres ou les inclure dans des pages Web. Remarque : Pour lancer les projets que vous avez publiés en utilisant Flash, vous devez disposer de la version correspondante ou ultérieure de Flash Player. Pour publier un projet sous forme de fichier Flash (SWF) : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Flash (SWF). 4 Dans le champ Titre du projet, entrez le titre souhaité, sans l’extension .swf. 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. Un dossier portant ce nom est créé et tous les fichiers publiés sont placés à l’intérieur de ce dossier. 6 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de sortie suivantes : Compresser les fichiers Cette option crée un fichier zip qui contient le fichier Flash (SWF). Un programme tel que WinZip peut être utilisé pour ouvrir les fichiers. Plein écran Remarque : Cette option permet d’ouvrir le fichier Flash en mode plein écran. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option plein écran, Adobe Captivate génère deux fichiers HTML pour s’adapter au Service Pack 2 de Windows XP. Utilisez les deux fichiers HTML avec le fichier SWF pour éviter qu’une fois le projet publié, ses utilisateurs ne reçoivent un message d’avertissement sur SP2. Il est recommandé de créer un lien vers le fichier html en ajoutant « fs » (par exemple, « monprojet_fs.htm »). Le fichier html avec « fs » sera automatiquement lié au second fichier html qui lit votre projet. Générer le lancement automatique de CD Cette option garantit le lancement automatique du fichier de sortie lorsque le fichier EXE est mis sur un CD. Exporter HTML Cette option permet de créer un fichier .JS standard qui facilite l’intégration du fichier SWF dans le fichier HTML généré. Notifications PENS Cette option envoie la notification de la conformité PENS du projet. Version de Flash Player Adobe Captivate génère le fichier SWF dans la version Flash que vous choisissez. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 284 Remarque : PENS n’est disponible que si l’option de communication est activée. Pour activer la communication, dans le menu Modifier, choisissez Préférences. Dans le menu Quiz, cliquez sur Communication et sélectionnez Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet. 7 La zone Informations du projet affiche des statistiques utiles concernant le projet, y compris la taille (résolution), le nombre de diapositives, des informations audio, des détails sur l’apprentissage en ligne et la commande de lecture affectée au projet. Pour modifier l’une des options de la zone, cliquez sur le texte en bleu. Pour modifier les préférences, cliquez sur le bouton Préférences. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Réduction de la taille d’un fichier SWF Vous pouvez réduire la taille du fichier Flash publié (.SWF) au cours du processus de publication ; toutefois, la qualité du fichier publié en souffrira. 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans le panneau de gauche, sélectionnez Flash (SWF). 4 Dans le champ Titre du projet, entrez le titre souhaité, sans l’extension de fichier SWF. 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Dans la zone Informations sur le projet dans le panneau de droite, cliquez sur Personnaliser après Taille et qualité Flash (SWF). La boîte de dialogue Taille et qualité Flash (SWF) s’affiche. 7 Dans la zone Paramètres, utilisez la barre de défilement pour personnaliser la qualité et la taille du fichier. Remarque : La qualité et la taille du fichier augmentent lorsque vous déplacez le curseur vers le haut de la barre de défilement. 8 Pour utiliser les paramètres modifiés à chaque fois que le fichier est publié, cliquez sur Conserver les paramètres de qualité des diapositives. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Publication de projets sous forme de document Word imprimables Si Microsoft® Word® est installé sur le même ordinateur qu’Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez y publier les projets Adobe Captivate. La sortie peut être publiée dans divers formats : document, leçon, étape par étape et scénarimage. Publication de projets sous forme de documentation Vous pouvez publier des projets Adobe® Captivate® sous forme de documentation au format Microsoft Word. Un projet Adobe Captivate est publié dans un document Word contenant toutes les diapositives telles qu’elles s’afficheraient avec les options que vous avez choisies. Remarque : Microsoft Word doit être installé sur le même ordinateur qu’Adobe Captivate pour pouvoir publier des projets sous forme de documentation.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 285 Pour publier un projet Adobe Captivate sous forme de document : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Imprimer. 4 Dans Titre du projet, entrez le nom désiré sans l’extension du fichier (DOC). 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Sélectionnez une plage d’exportation. La plage d’exportation représente les diapositives que vous voulez exporter vers Word. Vous pouvez sélectionner Tout, Diapositive courante, Sélection ou une plage de Diapositives. 7 Dans Type, sélectionnez Documents. 8 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de mise en forme suivantes : Utiliser les tableaux dans la sortie Sélectionnez cette option pour définir le nombre de diapositives à imprimer sur chaque page. Diapositives par page Spécifie le nombre de diapositives que vous voulez afficher sur chaque page du document Word. Une petite vignette sur la droite donne un aperçu de la mise en page sélectionnée. Texte de la légende Cette option permet d’imprimer le texte des légendes sous la diapositive dans laquelle elles apparaissent. Par exemple, si la diapositive 2 du projet contient une légende, le texte de cette légende sera imprimé sous la diapositive lorsque le projet sera converti au format Word. Ajouter des lignes vides pour les annotations Cette option permet d’imprimer des lignes vides sous chaque diapositive de votre projet dans le document Word. Cette option est appropriée si vous utilisez votre document Word comme document imprimé et voulez offrir à vos utilisateurs une zone pour prendre des notes. Ces lignes s’insèrent sous la diapositive si vous sélectionnez Utiliser les tableaux dans la sortie. Si vous désélectionnez cette option, les lignes vides se trouvent à droite de la diapositive. Annotations des diapositives Cette option permet d’inclure des annotations concernant les diapositives dans votre document Word. Ces annotations ne sont généralement pas visibles par les utilisateurs (les personnes qui visionnent votre projet), mais sont un très bon outil d’organisation pour les auteurs de projets Adobe Captivate. Inclure les objets et les diapositives de questions Cette option permet d’inclure des objets sur des diapositives tels que des légendes, des images, des zones de clic ou des zones de surbrillance. Inclure les diapositives masquées Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure les diapositives que vous avez marquées comme cachées dans votre projet. Les diapositives masquées ne s’affichent pas lorsque le projet est visionné. Inclure la trajectoire de la souris Cette option permet d’inclure les trajectoires de la souris qui s’affichent sur les diapositives. 9 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Microsoft Word s’ouvre avec le nouveau document du projet. Vous pouvez apporter des modifications et enregistrer le fichier à votre convenance. Remarque : Le fichier DOC est créé à l’aide d’un modèle Microsoft Word nommé AdobeCaptivate.dot. Ce modèle contient un haut de page avec la date et un bas de page avec le nombre de pages. Si vous voulez modifier ou supprimer les informations du haut de page ou du bas de page, vous pouvez modifier le fichier DOT en l’ouvrant dans Word. Lorsque vous installez Adobe Captivate, le modèle AdobeCaptivate.dot est automatiquement placé dans le dossier de programme : C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 286 Publication de projets sous forme de leçons Vous pouvez publier des projets Adobe Captivate sous forme de leçons au format Microsoft Word. Un projet Adobe Captivate est publié dans un document Word sous la forme d’une leçon complète avec vos questions et une clé de réponse. Remarque : Microsoft Word doit être installé sur le même ordinateur qu’Adobe Captivate pour pouvoir publier des projets sous forme de documentation. Pour publier un projet Adobe Captivate sous forme de leçon : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Imprimer. 4 Dans Titre du projet, entrez le nom désiré sans l’extension du fichier (DOC). 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Sélectionnez une plage d’exportation. La plage d’exportation représente les diapositives que vous voulez exporter vers Word. Vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les diapositives, la diapositive courante, la sélection courante ou une plage de diapositives. 7 Dans Type, sélectionnez Lesson (Leçon). 8 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de modèle suivantes : Texte d’en-tête Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans l’en-tête du projet. Texte du bas de page Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans le bas de page du projet. Inclure les diapositives masquées Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que les diapositives masquées figurent dans le projet publié. Inclure les diapositives relatives aux questions du quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure les diapositives relatives aux questions du quiz dans le projet publié. Créer une clé de réponse Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez inclure une clé de réponse dans le projet publié. 9 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Microsoft Word s’ouvre avec le nouveau document du projet. Vous pouvez apporter des modifications et enregistrer le fichier à votre convenance. Remarque : Les modèles de leçon (Lesson), de scénarimage (Storyboard) et d’étape par étape (Step by Step) sont enregistrés dans la galerie (C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PrintOutPut). Lors du premier lancement d’Adobe Captivate, ces modèles sont copiés vers le profil utilisateur (par exemple C:\Documents and Settings\\Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates\PrintOutput). Publication de projets sous forme de guides étape par étape Vous pouvez publier les projets Adobe Captivate sous la forme d’un guide étape par étape au format Microsoft Word. Un projet Adobe Captivate est publié dans un document Word qui résume les étapes suivies dans le projet. Par exemple, si le projet enseigne à un utilisateur comment naviguer vers un site Web, le guide étape par étape répertorie les étapes suivies pour y parvenir. Le guide étape par étape n’inclut pas les images des diapositives du projet, mais inclut les images des objets (par exemple les boutons, les liens et ainsi de suite).ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 287 Remarque : Pour publier les projets sous forme de guides étape par étape, Microsoft Word doit être installé sur le même ordinateur qu’Adobe Captivate. Pour publier un projet Adobe Captivate sous forme de guide étape par étape : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Imprimer. 4 Dans Titre du projet, entrez le nom désiré sans l’extension du fichier (DOC). 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Sélectionnez une plage d’exportation. La plage d’exportation représente les diapositives que vous voulez exporter vers Word. Vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les diapositives, la diapositive courante, la sélection courante ou une plage de diapositives. 7 Dans Type, sélectionnez Step by Step (Etape par étape). 8 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de modèle suivantes : Texte d’en-tête Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans l’en-tête du projet. Texte du bas de page Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans le bas de page du projet. Inclure les diapositives masquées Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que les diapositives masquées figurent dans le projet publié. 9 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Microsoft Word s’ouvre avec le nouveau document du projet. Vous pouvez apporter des modifications et enregistrer le fichier à votre convenance. Remarque : Les modèles de leçon (Lesson), de scénarimage (Storyboard) et d’étape par étape (Step by Step) sont enregistrés dans la galerie (par exemple C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PrintOutPut). Lors du premier lancement d’Adobe Captivate, ces modèles sont copiés vers le profil utilisateur (par exemple C:\Documents and Settings\\Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates\PrintOutput). Publication des projets sous forme de scénarimage Vous pouvez publier des projets Adobe Captivate sous forme de scénarimages au format Microsoft Word. Un projet Adobe Captivate est publié dans un document Word incluant un résumé des propriétés du projet (par exemple, le nombre de diapositives utilisées, les détails du paramètre de score, la durée des diapositives et ainsi de suite) ainsi qu’une vue détaillée de chaque diapositive avec un résumé des propriétés de la diapositive. Remarque : Si le projet comporte un quiz et si vous choisissez une sortie sous forme de scénarimage (Storyboard), les réponses figurent en regard de la question. Il n’y a pas de clé de réponse. Remarque : Microsoft Word doit être installé sur le même ordinateur qu’Adobe Captivate pour pouvoir publier des projets sous forme de scénarimages. Pour publier un projet Adobe Captivate sous forme de scénarimage : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Imprimer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 288 4 Dans Titre du projet, entrez le nom désiré sans l’extension du fichier (DOC). 5 Dans Dossier, entrez le chemin entier du dossier dans lequel vous voulez enregistrer le fichier ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour localiser le dossier. 6 Sélectionnez une plage d’exportation. La plage d’exportation représente les diapositives que vous voulez exporter vers Word. Vous pouvez sélectionner toutes les diapositives, la diapositive courante, la sélection courante ou une plage de diapositives. 7 Dans Type, sélectionnez Storyboard (Scénarimage). 8 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de modèle suivantes : Texte d’en-tête Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans l’en-tête du projet. Texte du bas de page Entrez le texte que vous voulez voir figurer dans le bas de page du projet. Inclure les diapositives masquées Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que les diapositives masquées figurent dans le projet publié. Inclure les diapositives relatives aux questions du quiz Sélectionnez cette option si vous voulez que les diapositives masquées figurent dans le projet publié. 9 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Microsoft Word s’ouvre avec le nouveau document du projet. Vous pouvez apporter des modifications et enregistrer le fichier à votre convenance. Remarque : Les modèles de leçon (Lesson), de scénarimage (Storyboard) et d’étape par étape (Step by Step) sont enregistrés dans la galerie (par exemple C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\Gallery\PrintOutPut). Lors du premier lancement d’Adobe Captivate, ces modèles sont copiés vers le profil utilisateur (par exemple C:\Documents and Settings\\Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate\Templates\PrintOutput). Publication des projets sur le Web en utilisant FTP Vous pouvez publier les projets Adobe Captivate directement sur un site Web par FTP. Pour publier un projet par FTP : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez FTP et utilisez les options suivantes : Titre du projet Entrez le nom désiré. Serveur Sélectionnez le nom du serveur qui héberge le site FTP sur lequel vous souhaitez publier votre projet. Pour ajouter un serveur FTP à la liste, cliquez sur le bouton Parcourir (...) et ajoutez ou supprimez des serveurs à l’aide des options de la boîte de dialogue Serveurs FTP. Remarque : Il n’est pas nécessaire de créer une liste de serveurs FTP pour chaque projet parce qu’Adobe Captivate enregistre automatiquement les modifications apportées à la liste FTP. Ces modifications sont également capturées lorsque vous importez ou exportez vos préférences. Répertoire Entrez le répertoire du serveur indiqué au-dessus vers lequel vous souhaitez envoyer les fichiers. Nom d’utilisateur Entrez un nom d’utilisateur disposant des droits requis pour publier des fichiers sur le serveur spécifié.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 289 Mot de passe Entrez un mot de passe valide associé au nom d’utilisateur spécifié. Port Entrez le numéro de port correct par lequel vous devez envoyer les fichiers. Le port numéro 21 est couramment utilisé. 4 Sélectionnez un type de fichier. Fichier SWF Sélectionnez cette option pour créer un fichier Flash SWF vers FTP. Exécutable Windows Cette option permet de créer un fichier exécutable Windows vers FTP. Un fichier exécutable peut être utilisé comme un fichier autonome sur un ordinateur Windows. Fichiers du projet Sélectionnez cette option pour créer des fichiers de projet Adobe Captivate (.CP) vers FTP. C’est utile si vous souhaitez partager le projet avec une autre personne qui a besoin d’ouvrir et de modifier le projet. 5 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Tester les paramètres pour tester les paramètres que vous avez entrés pour le serveur. Vous recevrez un message de confirmation indiquant que la connexion a réussi ou un message d’erreur expliquant pourquoi la connexion n’a pas pu être établie. 6 Effectuez votre sélection parmi les options de sortie suivantes : Compresser les fichiers Cette option crée un fichier ZIP. Un programme tel que WinZip peut être utilisé pour ouvrir les fichiers. Plein écran Cette option permet d’ouvrir le fichier en mode plein écran. Notifications PENS Cette option envoie la notification de la conformité PENS du projet. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Exporter HTML Cette option permet de créer un fichier .JS standard qui facilite l’intégration du fichier SWF dans le fichier HTML. Version de Flash Player Adobe Captivate génère le fichier SWF dans la version Flash que vous choisissez. 7 La zone Informations du projet affiche des statistiques utiles concernant le projet, y compris la taille (résolution), le nombre de diapositives, des informations audio, des détails sur l’apprentissage en ligne et la commande de lecture affectée au projet. Pour modifier l’une des options de la zone, cliquez sur le texte en bleu. Pour modifier les préférences, cliquez sur le bouton Préférences. 8 Cliquez sur Publier. Vous êtes averti lorsque le processus est terminé. Remarque : Après avoir envoyé les fichiers sur le serveur FTP, vous pouvez visualiser le projet à partir de votre navigateur Internet en entrant l’adresse « http://www.votreadresse.com/nomdefichier.htm » (« www.votreadresse.com » est l’URL et « nomdefichier.htm » correspond au nom de fichier spécifié à l’étape 3). Envoi des projets par courrier électronique Vous pouvez envoyer les projets Adobe Captivate dans divers formats par courrier électronique. Vous pouvez choisir d’envoyer un fichier Adobe Captivate (CP), un fichier Windows exécutable, un fichier SWF (pour traverser de nombreux systèmes de protection par pare-feu) ou un fichier XML (fichier XLIFF). Pour envoyer un projet Adobe Captivate par e-mail : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 290 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez E-mail. 4 Dans Titre du projet, entrez le nom désiré. 5 Dans Type de fichier, sélectionnez le type de fichier à créer : Fichier SWF Cette option envoie par e-mail le fichier de projet Flash nécessaire au destinataire sélectionné. Exécutable Windows Cette option envoie par e-mail le fichier exécutable au destinataire sélectionné. Lors de la publication d’un projet sous forme d’un fichier EXE, vous pouvez choisir la version de Flash Player à utiliser. Fichiers du projet Cette option envoie par e-mail le fichier de projet Adobe Captivate au destinataire sélectionné. Fichier XML Cette option envoie par e-mail le fichier XML au destinataire sélectionné, sous la forme d’une pièce jointe. Remarque : Au lieu de publier un projet Adobe Captivate sous la forme d’un fichier XML, vous pouvez exporter le contenu du projet au format XML et utiliser le fichier XML pour le modifier et le traduire dans la langue appropriée. Il vous suffit ensuite d’importer le fichier XML localisé dans le projet Adobe Captivate approprié. 6 Sélectionnez Options de sortie Compresser les fichiers Cette option crée un fichier zip qui contient le fichier Flash (SWF). Un programme tel que WinZip peut être utilisé pour ouvrir les fichiers. Plein écran Cette option permet d’ouvrir le fichier Flash en mode plein écran. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM pour le projet, l’option de publication en plein écran ne peut pas être appliquée. Remarque : Si vous sélectionnez l’option plein écran, Adobe Captivate génère deux fichiers HTML pour s’adapter au Service Pack 2 de Windows XP. Remarque : Utilisez les deux fichiers HTML avec le fichier SWF pour éviter qu’une fois le projet publié, ses utilisateurs ne reçoivent un message d’avertissement sur SP2. Il est recommandé de créer un lien vers le fichier html en ajoutant « fs » (par exemple, « monprojet_fs.htm »). Le fichier html avec « fs » sera automatiquement lié au second fichier html qui lit votre projet. Exporter HTML Cette option permet de créer un fichier .JS standard qui facilite l’intégration du fichier SWF dans le fichier HTML. Version de Flash Player Adobe Captivate génère le fichier SWF dans la version Flash que vous choisissez. 7 La zone Informations du projet affiche des statistiques utiles concernant le projet, y compris la taille (résolution), le nombre de diapositives, des informations audio, des détails sur l’apprentissage en ligne et la commande de lecture affectée au projet. Pour modifier l’une des options de la zone, cliquez sur le texte en bleu. Pour modifier les préférences, cliquez sur le bouton Préférences. 8 Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Publier. Adobe Captivate compile le projet et ouvre le programme de courrier électronique par défaut. 9 Entrez l’adresse électronique voulue dans le champ approprié, puis envoyez le message.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 291 Publication d’un contenu AICC ou d’un package SCORM Adobe Captivate permet de créer un contenu AICC ou un package SCORM, de le publier vers un système de gestion de l’apprentissage qui le téléchargera et l’installera sans intervention manuelle (et sans avoir à informer l’administrateur du système de gestion de l’apprentissage de ce contenu, nouveau ou mis à jour), tout cela d’un seul clic. Grâce à sa prise en charge PENS, Adobe Captivate vous permet d’envoyer un package AICC ou SCORM vers une URL spécifiée. Après publication du package (contenu ZIP), Adobe Captivate envoie au serveur du système de gestion de l’apprentissage une notification PENS de collecte du package de contenu. Cette notification déclenche la récupération et l’importation du contenu par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage, et permet l’envoi de messages d’alerte lorsque le système de gestion de l’apprentissage valide le contenu. Gestion des erreurs par l’utilisation d’exceptions Si la notification PENS ne peut être délivrée au système de gestion de l’apprentissage, un message d’erreur s’affiche pendant le processus de publication et l’opération de publication doit être redémarrée. Cependant, si une erreur survient après la délivrance de la notification PENS, le message d’erreur est envoyé à l’emplacement indiqué dans le champ URL de réception de l’onglet Système de gestion de l’apprentissage, qui figure lui-même dans la section PENS de la boîte de dialogue Préférences. Pour activer la génération de rapports pour un projet : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate que vous voulez publier. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. 3 La boîte de dialogue s’affiche. Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez Communication. 4 Sélectionnez Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet. 5 Sélectionnez l’option AICC ou SCORM. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Pour configurer les paramètres liés à PENS : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate que vous voulez publier. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez l’élément Quiz et sélectionnez PENS. 4 Dans Package, spécifiez les détails suivants : URL Source Spécifiez l’URL où PENS doit localiser le contenu d’apprentissage électronique. ID utilisateur (Facultatif) Spécifiez l’ID d’utilisateur que PENS devra utiliser pour authentifier l’utilisateur qui accédera au package publié. Mot de passe (Facultatif) Spécifiez le mot de passe que PENS devra utiliser pour authentifier l’utilisateur qui accédera au package publié. Expiration de l’URL Spécifiez la date et l’heure où cette URL expirera. Cette étape est obligatoire.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 292 5 Dans LMS, spécifiez les détails suivants : URL cible Spécifiez l’URL où PENS doit publier le contenu d’apprentissage électronique. ID utilisateur (Facultatif) Spécifiez l’ID d’utilisateur que PENS devra utiliser pour authentifier l’utilisateur qui accédera au package publié. Mot de passe (Facultatif) Spécifiez le mot de passe que PENS devra utiliser pour authentifier l’utilisateur qui accédera au package publié. Envoyer avec Sélectionnez HTTP-GET ou HTTP-POST. Commande Sélectionnez Recueillir dans le menu déroulant. URL/Courrier électronique de réception Spécifiez l’URL ou l’adresse de courrier électronique où le système de gestion de l’apprentissage enverra les notifications PENS. Les notifications ne sont envoyées que si l’option Recevoir des alertes lors du traitement du package par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage est sélectionné. Recevoir des alertes lors du traitement du package par le système de gestion de l’apprentissage Sélectionnez cette option pour recevoir des notifications à l’emplacement spécifié dans le champ URL de réception. 6 Cliquez sur le bouton Aperçu pour afficher la configuration PENS que vous avez définie. 7 Cliquez sur OK. Exportation de légendes de texte Vous pouvez exporter des légendes de texte d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers un fichier DOC si Microsoft Word est installé sur votre ordinateur. Le formatage effectué dans Adobe Captivate est conservé lorsque les légendes de texte s’ouvrent en tant que fichier DOC. Vous pouvez modifier le texte et le formatage des légendes lorsqu’elles sont en format DOC, puis les importer de nouveau dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Si vous exportez des légendes de texte vers un fichier DOC, ce fichier DOC peut seulement être réimporté dans le projet d’origine. L’exportation de légendes de texte peut être utile dans plusieurs situations : • Si vous souhaitez enregistrer des commentaires et si vous devez créer un script, ce dernier peut s’appuyer sur les légendes de texte exportées. • Si vous voulez fournir des instructions étape par étape, vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte et imprimer le fichier DOC. • Si vous souhaitez localiser un projet, vous pouvez exporter les légendes de texte dans un fichier DOC et le donner à un traducteur. Pour exporter des légendes de texte : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Légendes et sous-titres du projet. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, entrez le nom du fichier pour le nouveau fichier DOC. 4 Notez le répertoire par défaut dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. Vous pouvez naviguer jusqu’à un autre emplacement pour enregistrer le fichier. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 293 Les légendes de texte du projet sont converties au format DOC. Une boîte de dialogue apparaît, confirme l’exportation des légendes de texte vers Word et vous demande si vous souhaitez afficher le document. 6 Cliquez sur Oui. Un nouveau fichier DOC contenant les légendes de texte s’ouvre dans Word. Effectuez les modifications nécessaires dans la colonne Données de légendes de texte mises à jour. Le numéro des diapositives est également inclus comme référence. 7 Enregistrez le document. 8 Réimportez les légendes dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Vous pouvez aussi exporter les sous-titres vers Microsoft Word pour les modifier et les réimporter dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Pour plus d’informations sur la création des sous-titres, consultez les sections sur l’ajout d’audio au projet. Remarque : Les sous-titres associés aux pistes audio des diapositives sont regroupés et placés dans les dernières lignes du tableau figurant dans le document Word, tandis que les légendes de diapositives sont placées dans le tableau dans le même ordre que les diapositives dans lesquelles elles apparaissent. Exportation du contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers XML Un fichier de projet Adobe Captivate peut être considéré comme une combinaison des types de contenu suivants : • Contenu statique Les exemples incluent les images (bitmaps, boutons, arrière-plans), l’audio, les fichiers flv et les vidéos (swf). Ce type de contenu ne peut pas être personnalisé pour des langues différentes sans créer de nouveaux fichiers incluant ce contenu dans chaque langue respective. • Contenu dynamique ou localisable Les exemples incluent les légendes de texte, le texte des boutons et les annotations de diapositives, qui peuvent être localisés dans différentes langues. Lorsque vous exportez le contenu dynamique d’un projet Adobe Captivate dans un fichier XML, vous pouvez modifier et traduire les objets suivants dans ce fichier XML : • Propriétés du projet • Informations sur le projet (film) • Gestionnaire de menus • Diapositives : Annotations des diapositives Etiquettes des diapositives Texte d’accessibilité des diapositives • Eléments audio (pour les sous-titres uniquement) : Noms des sous-titres • Eléments de diapositives : Eléments de légendes Eléments de légendes de survol ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 294 Text e des b out ons Texte des boutons de la zone de texte Eléments de texte de la zone de texte Légendes de succès Légendes d’échec Légendes incomplètes Légendes de conseil • Eléments de boutons et de légendes des diapositives de questions et de consultation du quiz • Préférences du quiz Pour exporter le contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate vers XML : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate et enregistrez-le sous un nouveau nom pour une nouvelle langue. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Vers XML. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous, entrez le nom du fichier pour le nouveau fichier XML. 4 Notez le répertoire par défaut dans lequel le fichier est enregistré. Vous pouvez également naviguer jusqu’à un autre emplacement si vous le désirez. 5 Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Les objets appropriés du projet sont convertis au format XML. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche confirmant que l’exportation vers XML a réussi. Choisissez d’afficher le fichier XML ou non. Si vous cliquez sur Oui, le fichier XML s’ouvre dans l’afficheur XML par défaut de votre ordinateur. 6 Ouvrez le fichier XML et traduisez tous les termes figurant dans les balises et comprises entre les balises et . Pour les données RTF (telles que les légendes de texte, etc.), le texte à traduire est placé dans les balises et . Pour traduire le texte dans une autre langue, modifiez le champ « font-family » de l’attribut « css-style » et ajoutez le jeu de caractères correspondant. Au lieu d’exporter un projet vers XML, vous pouvez choisir de publier le projet que vous désirez modifier et localiser, et envoyer le contenu au format XML à une adresse e-mail. Lorsque vous envoyez le fichier XML par e-mail, il est envoyé sous la forme d’une pièce jointe à l’adresse e-mail spécifiée. Vous pouvez également compresser le fichier XML avant de l’envoyer par e-mail. Vérifiez que le fichier du projet Adobe Captivate est entièrement modifié avant d’exporter le fichier XML. Vous pouvez utiliser le raccourci Alt+F+I+P pour exporter un fichier vers XML. Remarque : Les infobulles Infos, Barre de lecture et Habillage ne sont pas exportées vers XML car ce type d’informations est stocké dans les fichiers de création Flash. Après la localisation, vous devez donc créer séparément les infobulles Infos, Barre de lecture et Habillage pour la version localisée appropriée du projet Adobe Captivate.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 295 Importation du contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate à partir de XML Remarque : Après avoir traduit le contenu du fichier XML dans la langue appropriée, vous devez importer le fichier XML mis à jour dans Adobe Captivate de façon à ce que le contenu du projet s’affiche dans la langue localisée requise. Remarque : Si vous voulez réenregistrer le projet, n’oubliez pas de le faire avant d’importer le fichier XML. Pour importer le contenu d’un projet Adobe Captivate à partir de XML : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate approprié. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > De XML. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Ouvrir, saisissez le nom du fichier XML que vous voulez importer ou naviguez jusqu’à l’emplacement où vous avez enregistré le fichier XML. 4 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le contenu du fichier XML est importé dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche confirmant que l’importation à partir de XML a réussi. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Le projet localisé dans la langue requise est prêt. Remarque : Si le fichier XML vous a été envoyé par e-mail, ouvrez le message, enregistrez le fichier XML dans le répertoire approprié et traduisez le contenu dans la langue requise. Vous pouvez utiliser le raccourci Alt+F+I+X pour importer un fichier à partir de XML. Importation et exportation des préférences du projet Vous pouvez exporter les préférences définies dans un projet Adobe Captivate et les importer dans d’autres projets Adobe Captivate. Les préférences sont exportées sous la forme d’un fichier XML portant une extension .CPR. Lorsque ce fichier est importé dans un autre projet Adobe Captivate, les préférences définies dans le fichier sont également définies dans le projet. Remarque : Toutes les préférences de votre projet actuel sont modifiées en fonction de celles définies dans le fichier de préférences. Importer les préférences du projet 1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Préférences. 2 Sélectionnez le fichier .CPR qui contient les préférences que vous souhaitez importer. 3 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. Exporter les préférences du projet 1 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Préférences. La boîte de dialogue Enregistrer sous s’affiche. 2 Dans le champ Nom du fichier, tapez le nom du fichier .CPR. 3 Cliquez sur Enregistrer.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 296297 Chapitre 16 : Adobe Captivate et les autres logiciels Vous pouvez intégrer Adobe Captivate à d’autres applications Adobe, notamment Flash, Acrobat Connect et RoboHelp. Vous pouvez également intégrer Adobe Captivate à Microsoft PowerPoint. Les développeurs Flash peuvent utiliser Adobe Captivate pour enregistrer ou créer facilement un projet Adobe Captivate, puis utiliser les fonctionnalités puissantes de Flash pour modifier le fichier. L’intégration d’Acrobat Connect et Adobe Captivate permet aux utilisateurs de générer des simulations et des démonstrations logicielles interactives. Vous pouvez aussi ajouter des présentations Adobe Captivate à des systèmes d’aide HTML en ligne RoboHelp. Les utilisateurs de Microsoft PowerPoint peuvent importer des présentations ou des diapositives PowerPoint dans les projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez également ajouter des projets Adobe Captivate à des présentations Microsoft PowerPoint. Adobe Captivate et Adobe Flash Si vous êtes un développeur Flash, vous pouvez utiliser Adobe Captivate pour enregistrer facilement un fichier SWF et ensuite utiliser les fonctionnalités puissantes de Flash pour modifier le fichier. Importation de projets Adobe Captivate dans Adobe Flash Les développeurs Flash peuvent utiliser l’option Importer (dans le menu Fichier) pour importer un projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash. Pour importer, naviguez et sélectionnez un fichier (CP) de projet Adobe Captivate. Remarque : L’importation de projets Adobe Captivate dans Adobe Flash est possible uniquement lorsqu’Adobe Captivate et Adobe Flash sont installés sur la même machine. Pour importer un projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash : 1 Ouvrez Flash en double-cliquant sur l’icône Flash présente sur votre bureau. 2 Sur la page de démarrage de Flash, sous Créer nouveau, cliquez sur Document Flash. 3 Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Importer > Importer sur la scène. 4 Dans le menu déroulant Fichiers de types, sélectionnez Projet Captivate (*.cp). 5 Naviguez vers un fichier, sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Ouvrir. 6 La boîte de dialogue Options d’Adobe Captivate s’affiche. 7 Sélectionnez les éléments Adobe Captivate à importer. 8 Cliquez sur Importer. Le fichier (CP) du projet Adobe Captivate sélectionné est importé dans le projet Flash. 9 Lorsque vous avez fini, enregistrez le projet en tant que projet Flash (fichier FLA). Vous pouvez maintenant commencer à modifier votre projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 298 Exportation d’Adobe Captivate vers Flash Depuis Adobe Captivate, vous pouvez sélectionner l’option Exporter le projet vers Flash 8 ou Flash CS3 pour exporter un projet Adobe Captivate vers Flash 8 ou Flash CS3 à des fins d’amélioration, d’ajout de scripts ou d’intégration dans un projet plus important. Il y a plusieurs procédures en fonction des différentes versions de Flash. Le processus d’exportation d’un projet d’Adobe Captivate vers Flash 8 ou Flash CS3 inclut les tâches d’exportation du projet depuis Adobe Captivate, l’ouverture de Flash 8 ou de Flash CS3 et l’importation du projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash 8 ou Flash CS3. Remarque : Vous devez enregistrer votre projet Adobe Captivate avant de l’exporter. La méthode la plus facile est de cliquer sur Enregistrer sur la barre d’outils. Remarque : Les options d’exportation sont désactivées si les versions d’Adobe Flash prises en charge n’ont pas été installées sur le système. Pour exporter un projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash 8 ou Flash CS3 : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate que vous voulez exporter. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Projet vers > Flash 8 ou Flash CS3. Si vous n’avez pas encore enregistré votre projet, un message vous y invite. Cliquez sur Oui et sélectionnez un nom de fichier et un emplacement pour le projet. Flash 8 s’ouvre et la boîte de dialogue Options Adobe Captivate s’affiche. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Options, sélectionnez les éléments Adobe Captivate à importer. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone Eléments élémentaires : Arrière-plans de la diapositive Sélectionnez cette option pour importer dans Flash les arrières-plans des diapositives, tels que les captures d’écrans qui composent le projet. Modifications de l’arrière-plan Sélectionnez cette option pour importer dans Flash les modifications de l’arrièreplan, tels que les frappes de touches et les différents états des boutons. Déplacements de souris Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les trajectoires et déplacements de souris dans Flash. Quiz Sélectionnez cette option pour importer tous les éléments du quiz dans Flash. Diapositives comme clip Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les diapositives sous forme de clips vidéo. Le contenu de la diapositive, y compris l’arrière-plan, l’audio et les objets, est inclus dans le calque « Diapositives » du plan de montage chronologique. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone des éléments de diapositives : Zones de surbrillance Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les zones de surbrillance dans Flash. Images Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les images dans Flash. Légendes Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les légendes de texte dans Flash. Animations Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les animations, par exemple AVI ou SWF, dans Flash. Vidéo Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les fichiers vidéo dans Flash. Zones de clic Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les zones de clic dans Flash. Zones de texte Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les zones de texte dans Flash. Boutons Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les boutons dans Flash.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 299 Légendes et images de survol Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les légendes et les images de survol dans Flash. Zoom Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les zones de zoom dans Flash. Les options suivantes figurent dans la zone des éléments du projet : Audio Sélectionnez cette option pour importer tout fichier audio du projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash. Options de fin Sélectionnez cette option pour importer dans Flash les options de fin, telles que le projet en boucle. Conseils Sélectionnez cette option pour inclure les zones de conseils avec les instructions et le calque de conseil dans Flash (les conseils sont une fonctionnalité Flash, non un élément Captivate importé dans Flash. Les conseils ne sont pas inclus dans le fichier SWF du projet.) Contrôleur de lecture Sélectionnez cette option pour importer les commandes de lecture dans Flash. 4 Lorsque l’importation est terminée, enregistrez le nouveau projet Flash (fichier FLA). Remarque : Les objets de zoom, qui ne contiennent pas d’images de destination de zoom, ne seront pas exportés si vous ne sélectionnez pas l’option Diapositives comme clip dans la boîte de dialogue Options Adobe Captivate lors de l’importation d’un projet Adobe Captivate depuis Flash. Conversion des projets Adobe Captivate Lorsque vous exportez un projet Adobe Captivate vers Adobe Macromedia® Flash®, le projet est importé directement sur la Scène ou dans la Bibliothèque sous forme d’un clip. Le projet importé contient des calques pour chaque type d’objet et les méthodes Flash appropriées sont utilisées pour activer les effets spéciaux Adobe Captivate (par exemple, interpolation pour déplacer le pointeur de la souris). Le panneau Bibliothèque Flash affiche tous les objets créés pour le projet Adobe Captivate, organisés logiquement dans des dossiers. La plupart des éléments de vos projets sont convertis de manière à ce qu’ils aient la même apparence et fonctionnent de la même façon dans Flash que dans Adobe Captivate, mais il existe quelques exceptions : • Compression avancée • Conformité à la Section 508 • Transitions de diapositives (fondu entre les diapositives) • Synchronisation en temps réel Modification des projets Adobe Captivate dans Flash Après l’importation ou l’exportation du projet Adobe Captivate dans Flash, le projet s’ouvre et peut alors être modifié. La puissante fonctionnalité de la bibliothèque Flash et des objets du clip crée des éléments réutilisables depuis le projet d’origine. Lorsque vous connaissez la structure du projet dans Flash, vous pouvez facilement modifier la totalité du projet ou prendre des élément Adobe Captivate et les placer dans le projet Flash existant. Tous les éléments du projet Adobe Captivate sont enregistrés dans la bibliothèque Flash et organisés en dossier, ce qui facilite le parcours et la sélection des éléments pour les modifier. Actions Ce calque affiche une étiquette de diapositive (dans l’image ci-dessus, « Diapositive 1 ») de manière à ce que vous puissiez voir quelle diapositive vous êtes en train de modifier. Contrôleur de lecture Ce calque contient la commande de lecture utilisée dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Par défaut, le calque Contrôleur de lecture est masqué.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 300 Transition d’arrière-plan Ce calque contient toute diapositive ou transition (par exemple, apparition en fondu ou disparition en fondu) incluse dans le projet. Par défaut, le calque Transition d’arrière-plan est verrouillé. Trajectoire de la souris Ce calque contient toutes les trajectoires de souris figurant dans le projet. Effets et sons de la souris Ce calque contient les sons ou les effets associés à la souris, comme les sons de clic et les clics visuels. Quiz Ce calque contient tous les quiz qui figurent dans le projet. Questions Ce calque contient toutes les diapositives de questions figurant dans le projet. Objets Ces calques contiennent tous les objets qui figurent dans le projet, tels que légendes de texte, zones de surbrillance, zones de clic ou boutons. Son et effets Ce calque contient tout l’audio ou les effets spéciaux du projet, tels que les états des boutons ou la frappe. Arrière-plan de la diapositive Ce calque contient la couleur d’arrière-plan ou les images d’arrière-plan utilisées sur des diapositives du projet. Arrière-plan du projet Ce calque contient la couleur d’arrière-plan du projet. Remarque : Lorsque l’option Diapositives comme clip est sélectionnée, certains des calques du plan de montage chronologique principal sont intégrés aux clips vidéo des diapositives. Ces calques incluent la transition d’arrière-plan, les objets, les sons et les effets, les diapositives de quiz, les questions, les ressources des diapositives du quiz, les trajectoires de souris, le son et les effets de la souris et l’arrière-plan des diapositives. Navigation dans les projets dans Flash Lorsque le projet Adobe Captivate s’ouvre dans Flash, il est possible de naviguer dans le projet de plusieurs manières : • Dans le panneau Bibliothèque, un dossier nommé Captivate Objects contient toutes les diapositives et les objets du projet. Vous pouvez ignorer les objets répertoriés avec le préfixe « xrd » qui sont des images et des sons utilisés dans d’autres objets. Pour modifier votre projet, double-cliquez sur un élément de la bibliothèque et modifiez cet élément. Les fichiers « xrd » figurent dans un dossier de la bibliothèque. • Vous pouvez également double-cliquer sur des éléments sur la scène (dans Flash). Par exemple, pour modifier le projet, double-cliquez sur ce projet dans la scène. Pour naviguer jusqu’à un élément d’une diapositive, cliquez sur le plan de montage chronologique et positionnez la tête de lecture pour afficher un objet sur la diapositive (par exemple une légende ou une zone de surbrillance), puis double-cliquez sur l’objet pour le modifier. Cette méthode a l’avantage d’afficher chaque élément et objet dans son contexte d’utilisation. Astuces de navigation supplémentaires • Contrairement à Adobe Captivate, Flash n’affiche pas tous les objets en même temps. Flash utilise le plan de montage chronologique pour représenter le moment d’affichage des objets. Cliquez sur le plan de montage chronologique ou faites glisser la tête de lecture pour voir à quoi le projet ressemblera lorsqu’il sera lu. • Le panneau Bibliothèque organise votre projet, ainsi que tous les éléments qu’il contient comme les diapositives, les légendes et les sons dans une hiérarchie de dossiers.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 301 Adobe Captivate et Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional Adobe® Acrobat® Connect™ Professional permet à d’autres personnes de participer rapidement et facilement à des réunions en ligne, des présentations et de la formation sur Internet. L’intégration entre Acrobat Connect Professional et Adobe Captivate permet aux utilisateurs de profiter mieux que jamais d’Acrobat Connect Professional en utilisant des simulations et démonstrations de logiciels interactives. Les fonctionnalités d’intégration clés comprennent les éléments suivants : • Formation à Acrobat Connect Professional et Adobe® Connect™ Améliorez l’efficacité des réunions et de la formation en ajoutant des démonstrations et simulations Adobe Captivate interactives. Les présentateurs peuvent utiliser le bouton de synchronisation pour que toutes leurs actions soient vues par tous les participants, ou bien, s’ils désactivent cette option, les participants sont libres d’interagir avec la démonstration ou la simulation Adobe Captivate sur leur propre ordinateur. • Diffusez et publiez facilement Diffusez des simulations et des démonstrations Adobe Captivate par le biais de navigateurs Web classiques. Les utilisateurs d’Acrobat Connect Professional peuvent publier des projets Adobe Captivate directement vers Connect Enterprise pour les rendre facilement accessibles à d’autres. • Utilisez les options d’intégration pour Acrobat Connect Professional d’Adobe Captivate Dans Adobe Captivate, il est possible de sélectionner deux options qui facilitent la collaboration entre Adobe Captivate et Acrobat Connect Professional. L’option Inclure les métadonnées Adobe Connect ajoute aux fichiers du projet Adobe Captivate des informations qui facilitent les recherches portant sur le projet Adobe Captivate et son contenu dans Acrobat Connect Professional. Vous pouvez aussi sélectionner Acrobat Connect Professional comme option de sortie pour la communication des quiz. Cette option permet à Acrobat Connect Professional de suivre le travail des utilisateurs sur les quiz et les objets interactifs des projets Adobe Captivate. Il est également possible de placer le projet dans un fichier ZIP pour en faciliter le transfert. Grâce à l’intégration avec Acrobat Connect Professional, il vous est facile de mettre à jour les fichiers vidéo. Remarque : Vous pouvez utiliser Adobe Captivate avec Acrobat Connect version 4.1 ou une version ultérieure. L’option de suivi n’est utilisable qu’avec Acrobat Connect version 5 ou suivante. Publication des projets vers Adobe Connect Enterprise Vous pouvez diffuser des simulations et des démonstrations Adobe Captivate par le biais de navigateurs Web classiques. Les utilisateurs d’Adobe Connect peuvent publier leurs projets Adobe Captivate directement vers Adobe Connect Enterprise. Pour publier un projet vers un serveur Connect Enterprise : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans le menu Fichier, sélectionnez Publier. 3 Dans la boîte de dialogue Publier, sélectionnez Adobe Connect. 4 Cliquez sur Modifier le serveur. La boîte de dialogue serveurs Adobe Connect Enterprise s’affiche. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter. 6 Dans Nom et URL, tapez le nom et l’adresse URL du serveur Connect Enterprise que vous voulez utiliser. 7 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 302 8 Le serveur Adobe Connect est maintenant répertorié. 9 Sélectionnez le serveur que vous venez d’ajouter et cliquez sur OK. 10 (Facultatif) Pour qu’Adobe Connect assure le suivi de toutes les interactions au sein du projet Adobe Captivate, sélectionnez Activer le suivi Adobe Connect Enterprise. Si, par exemple, vous placez un projet Adobe Captivate contenant un quiz dans Acrobat Connect Professional, celui-ci assure le suivi des réponses des utilisateurs qui interagissent avec le quiz. Si vous activez cette option, la liste de sortie d’apprentissage, qui se trouve dans la zone Informations sur le projet, dans la partie droite de la boîte de dialogue, est modifiée. 11 (Facultatif) Si vous souhaitez publier le fichier de projet (fichier CP) vers Adobe Connect en même temps que le fichier de projet SWF, sélectionnez Publier les fichiers de projet. Dans ce cas, le fichier CP (et non pas seulement le fichier SWF) est disponible pour les autres utilisateurs. Sélectionnez une des options suivantes, ou les deux : Compresser le fichier de projet Sélectionnez cette option pour compresser le fichier de projet Adobe Captivate (.CP) dans un fichier ZIP avant de le télécharger vers Connect Enterprise. Publier les fichiers vidéo Sélectionnez cette option si le projet contient des fichiers FLV progressif, afin de les télécharger vers Connect Enterprise. 12 Cliquez sur Publier. 13 Connectez-vous sur Adobe Connect avec votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe. 14 Sélectionnez un emplacement pour stocker le projet Adobe Captivate. 15 Cliquez sur Publish to This Folder [Publier vers ce dossier]. 16 Spécifiez un titre pour le projet Adobe Captivate. Une fois que vous avez terminé, cliquez sur Next [Suivant]. 17 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur Customize [Personnaliser] pour définir les permissions sur mesure. 18 Cliquez sur Suivant. 19 Une boîte de dialogue s’affiche et confirme que le projet a été publié avec succès sur le Connect Enterprise que vous avez spécifié. Cliquez sur OK. 20 Cliquez de nouveau sur OK. Utilisation d’Adobe Captivate avec Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional Créez des simulations logicielles et des démonstrations de produits dans Adobe Captivate, puis ajoutez ce contenu à Acrobat Connect Professional ou à des cours de formation. Cela accroît l’interactivité d’Acrobat Connect Professional. Les présentateurs peuvent utiliser le bouton Sync [Synchronisation] pour que toutes leurs actions soient vues par tous les participants. Lorsque le présentateur déplace la souris ou interagit avec la démonstration ou la simulation, tous les participants peuvent voir ses actions sur leur propre ordinateur. Les présentateurs peuvent aussi désactiver cette option pour que les participants soient libres d’interagir avec la démonstration ou la simulation Adobe Captivate sur leur ordinateur. Le présentateur peut activer ou désactiver la fonction de synchronisation aussi souvent que nécessaire. Vous pouvez apporter votre projet Adobe Captivate dans une réunion Acrobat Connect Professional selon deux méthodes différentes : • Publiez le projet Adobe Captivate directement vers Adobe Connect Enterprise, puis ajoutez-le à la réunion Acrobat Connect Professional à partir de la bibliothèque de contenu d’Adobe Connect. (Adobe conseille d’utiliser cette option. L’ajout du projet Adobe Captivate à partir de la bibliothèque de contenu garantit que les fonctionnalités d’Adobe Captivate fonctionneront correctement avec Acrobat Connect Professional.)ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 303 • Publiez le projet Adobe Captivate pour créer un fichier .zip stocké sur votre ordinateur, puis ajoutez le fichier .zip à une réunion Acrobat Connect Professional. Remarque : Le bouton Sync dans Acrobat Connect Professional ne s’affiche pas si le projet Adobe Captivate contient le fichier _skin. Si vous voulez inclure plusieurs fichiers dans un Acrobat Connect Professional, veillez à effectuer les opérations suivantes : 1 Sélectionnez l’option Publier les métadonnées Acrobat Connect Professional sur l’onglet Préférences de la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. 2 Sélectionnez l’option Compresser les fichiers, dans les Options de sortie lorsque vous publiez le fichier Flash SWF. 3 Transférez le fichier ZIP dans la réunion Acrobat Connect Professional. Pour ajouter un projet Adobe Captivate à une réunion Acrobat Connect Professional à partir de la bibliothèque de contenu d’Acrobat Connect Professional : 1 Créez un projet dans Adobe Captivate. 2 Publiez ce projet vers Acrobat Connect Professional. 3 Ouvrez une réunion existante ou créez-en une nouvelle. 4 Envoyez l’adresse URL de la réunion aux personnes que vous voulez inviter. 5 Saisissez la salle de réunion. 6 Choisissez l’option de menu Pods > Share > Select from Content library [Modules > Partager > Choisir dans une bibliothèque de contenu]. 7 Sélectionnez le projet Adobe Captivate, puis cliquez sur le bouton Open [Ouvrir]. 8 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le bouton Sync si nécessaire pour soit permettre aux participants de voir les actions du présentateur, soit leur laisser le contrôle à partir de leur propre ordinateur. 9 Cliquez sur Stop Sharing [Arrêter le partage] pour retourner à la salle de réunion Acrobat Connect Professional. Pour ajouter un projet Adobe Captivate à une réunion Acrobat Connect Professional à partir de votre bureau : 1 Créez un projet dans Adobe Captivate. 2 Publiez le nouveau projet vers Flash pour créer un fichier SWF. 3 Notez l’emplacement du fichier SWF. 4 Connectez-vous à Acrobat Connect Professional. 5 Ouvrez une réunion existante ou créez-en une nouvelle. 6 Envoyez l’adresse URL de la réunion aux personnes que vous voulez inviter. 7 Saisissez la salle de réunion. 8 Choisissez l’option de menu Pods > Share > Select from My Computer [Modules > Partager > Choisir sur mon ordinateur]. 9 Naviguez jusqu’au fichier SWF Adobe Captivate, sélectionnez le fichier et cliquez sur Open [Ouvrir]. 10 Le message de chargement s’affiche. Une fois le fichier SWF transféré, cliquez sur le bouton Lire de la barre de lecture Adobe Captivate pour lancer le projet. 11 (Facultatif) Cliquez sur le bouton Sync si nécessaire pour soit permettre aux participants de voir les actions du présentateur, soit leur laisser le contrôle à partir de leur propre ordinateur.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 304 12 Cliquez sur Stop Sharing [Arrêter le partage] pour retourner à la salle de réunion Acrobat Connect Professional. Ajout du suivi Adobe Connect Si vous ajoutez une simulation Adobe Captivate à une réunion ou à un cours de formation Adobe Connect, vous souhaitez peut-être savoir comment les utilisateurs interagissent avec la simulation, en particulier les quiz. Pour faciliter le suivi des projets Adobe Captivate dans Adobe Connect, utilisez les options de quiz de la boîte de dialogue Préférences pour spécifier Adobe Connect comme option de sortie du projet. Pour ajouter le suivi Adobe Connect à un projet Adobe Captivate : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Quiz > Préférences du quiz. La boîte de dialogue Préférences s’affiche. 3 Dans le menu Quiz, sélectionnez Communication. 4 Sélectionnez Activer la création de rapports pour ce projet. 5 Sélectionnez Serveur Adobe Connect. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Activation des fonctionnalités de recherche d’Adobe Connect Si vous publiez un projet Adobe Captivate vers un serveur Adobe Connect et que vous affichez ce projet lors d’une réunion ou d’un cours de formation, vous pouvez activer la recherche dans Adobe Connect. Cette option ajoute au fichier du projet Adobe Captivate (SWF) des informations qui facilitent son intégration dans Adobe Connect. Les données intégrées font le lien entre le fichier CP Adobe Captivate et le fichier SWF lorsque vous publiez le projet sur un serveur Adobe Connect et elles facilitent la recherche du projet Adobe Captivate à partir d’Adobe Connect. Pour activer la recherche Adobe Connect : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier > Préférences. 3 Dans le panneau Catégorie, développez votre Projet et sélectionnez Paramètres. 4 Sélectionnez Publier les métadonnées du serveur Adobe Connect. 5 Cliquez sur OK. Remarque : L’option Inclure les métadonnées Adobe Connect est activée par défaut. Cette option augmente la taille du fichier du projet. Si vous ne pensez pas utiliser le projet avec Adobe Connect, vous pouvez supprimer cette option et réduire ainsi la taille du fichier de projet terminé (SWF). Cependant, s’il existe une possibilité que le fichier de sortie SWF soit utilisé dans Adobe Connect, il est conseillé de sélectionner l’option Inclure les métadonnées Adobe Connect.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 305 Adobe Captivate et RoboHelp Vous pouvez ajouter des projets Adobe Captivate à des systèmes d’aide HTML en ligne RoboHelp. Vous disposez ainsi de la possibilité de montrer et de fournir des informations importantes aux utilisateurs. L’ajout d’un projet Adobe Captivate à un projet RoboHelp est chose aisée. Il suffit de créer le projet Adobe Captivate, d’ajouter le projet au projet RoboHelp et de sélectionner les options d’affichage du projet. Pour ajouter un projet Adobe Captivate à un système d’aide HTML en ligne RoboHelp : 1 Créez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Publiez le projet sous forme de fichier Flash SWF. Sélectionnez l’option Exporter HTML lors de l’exportation et souvenez-vous du dossier dans lequel le fichier SWF sera stocké. 3 Dans RoboHelp, ouvrez le projet d’aide auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le projet Adobe Captivate. 4 Dans le Project Manager [Gestionnaire de projet], double-cliquez sur le dossier Project Files [Fichiers du projet]. 5 Dans le menu File [Fichier], sélectionnez Import > HTML file [Importer Fichier HTML]. 6 Recherchez et sélectionnez le fichier HTML du projet Adobe Captivate (créé à l’étape 2 ci-dessus). 7 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le fichier HTML et le fichier Flash (SWF) sont importés dans votre projet RoboHelp. Le fichier SWF est ajouté au dossier Project Files [Fichiers du projet] et une nouvelle rubrique (portant le titre du projet) est créée. Remarque : Le fichier HTML (portant le titre du projet) ajouté à votre projet RoboHelp est important. Si vous supprimez cette rubrique, le fichier SWF correspondant est également supprimé du projet. Vous pouvez masquer cette rubrique dans votre projet d’aide (aucun lien, aucune mention dans la table des matières ou l’index, etc.). Options d’affichage du projet Adobe Captivate Une fois le fichier Flash (SWF) ajouté à votre projet RoboHelp, vous devez définir la manière dont s’affichera le projet. Différentes options vous sont proposées. Toutes les options sont très faciles à définir mais certaines d’entre elles peuvent être mieux adaptées que d’autres à votre projet Adobe Captivate et à votre projet RoboHelp. Vous pouvez placer un projet Adobe Captivate directement dans une rubrique RoboHelp afin que le projet s’ouvre et soit lu automatiquement à l’affichage de la rubrique. Pour afficher le projet dans une rubrique existante : 1 Dans RoboHelp, ouvrez la rubrique que vous souhaitez utiliser pour démarrer le projet. 2 Cliquez à l’intérieur de la rubrique. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Adobe Captivate Demo. 3 Allez jusqu’à l’emplacement de votre fichier Adobe Captivate (par exemple, monprojet.swf), sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur OK. 4 Prévisualisez la rubrique pour avoir un aperçu du projet, ou générez et visualisez votre système d’aide pour voir à quoi il ressemble. Vous pouvez insérer un projet Adobe Captivate dans une nouvelle rubrique RoboHelp, puis créer un lien vers cette rubrique depuis toute autre rubrique du système d’aide. Si vous sélectionnez l’option permettant d’ouvrir la rubrique du projet dans une fenêtre contextuelle de taille automatique, la taille de la fenêtre s’ajuste à la hauteur et à la largeur du projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 306 Pour afficher le projet dans une fenêtre contextuelle de taille automatique : 1 Dans RoboHelp, créez une nouvelle rubrique. 2 Ajoutez le projet Adobe Captivate à la rubrique. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Adobe Captivate Demo. 3 Recherchez et sélectionnez le fichier Adobe Captivate (par exemple, monprojet.swf) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez la rubrique. 5 Ouvrez la rubrique que vous souhaitez utiliser pour démarrer le projet. 6 Sélectionnez le texte ou l’image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme lien hypertexte. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Hyperlink [Lien hypertexte]. 7 Dans la liste Select Destination (File or URL) [Sélectionner une destination (fichier ou adresse URL)], sélectionnez la rubrique contenant le projet Adobe Captivate. 8 Dans Hyperlink Properties [Propriétés du lien hypertexte], sélectionnez Display in auto-sizing pop-up menu [Afficher dans un menu déroulant de taille automatique]. 9 Cliquez sur OK. 10 Prévisualisez la rubrique pour avoir un aperçu du projet, ou générez et visualisez votre système d’aide pour voir à quoi il ressemble. Vous pouvez insérer un projet Adobe Captivate dans une nouvelle rubrique RoboHelp, puis créer un lien vers cette rubrique depuis toute autre rubrique du système d’aide. Si vous sélectionnez l’option permettant d’ouvrir la rubrique dans une fenêtre contextuelle de taille personnalisée, vous pouvez définir la hauteur et la largeur de la rubrique. Pour afficher le projet dans une fenêtre contextuelle de taille personnalisée : 1 Dans RoboHelp, créez une nouvelle rubrique. 2 Ajoutez le projet Adobe Captivate à la rubrique. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Adobe Captivate Demo. 3 Allez jusqu’à l’emplacement de votre fichier Adobe Captivate (par exemple, monprojet.swf), sélectionnez-le et cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez la rubrique. 5 Ouvrez la rubrique que vous souhaitez utiliser pour lancer le projet. 6 Sélectionnez le texte ou l’image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme lien hypertexte. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Hyperlink [Lien hypertexte]. 7 Dans la liste Select Destination (File or URL) [Sélectionner une destination (fichier ou adresse URL)], sélectionnez la rubrique contenant le projet Adobe Captivate. 8 Dans Hyperlink Properties [Propriétés du lien hypertexte], sélectionnez Display in custom-sized popup [Afficher dans une fenêtre de taille personnalisée]. 9 Sélectionnez une largeur et une hauteur pour votre projet à l’aide des flèches ou en entrant un nombre. 10 Cliquez sur OK. 11 Prévisualisez la rubrique pour avoir un aperçu du projet, ou générez et visualisez votre système d’aide pour voir à quoi il ressemble. Vous pouvez insérer un projet Adobe Captivate dans une nouvelle rubrique RoboHelp, puis créer un lien vers cette rubrique depuis toute autre rubrique du système d’aide. Si vous choisissez d’ouvrir la rubrique du projet dans une nouvelle fenêtre, le projet s’affiche dans le navigateur Web par défaut de l’utilisateur.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 307 Pour afficher le projet dans une nouvelle fenêtre : 1 Dans RoboHelp, créez une nouvelle rubrique. 2 Ajoutez le projet Adobe Captivate à la rubrique. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Adobe Captivate Demo. 3 Recherchez et sélectionnez le fichier Adobe Captivate (par exemple, monprojet.swf) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez la rubrique. 5 Ouvrez la rubrique que vous souhaitez utiliser pour démarrer le projet. 6 Sélectionnez le texte ou l’image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme lien hypertexte. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Hyperlink [Lien hypertexte]. 7 Dans la liste Select Destination (File or URL) [Sélectionner une destination (fichier ou adresse URL)], sélectionnez la rubrique contenant le projet Adobe Captivate. 8 Dans Hyperlink Properties [Propriétés du lien hypertexte], sélectionnez Display in frame [Afficher dans un cadre]. 9 A partir du menu déroulant à côté de Display in frame [Afficher dans un cadre], sélectionnez New Window [Nouvelle fenêtre]. 10 Cliquez sur OK. 11 Prévisualisez la rubrique pour avoir un aperçu du projet, ou générez et visualisez votre système d’aide pour voir à quoi il ressemble. Vous pouvez insérer un projet Adobe Captivate dans une nouvelle rubrique RoboHelp, puis créer un lien vers cette rubrique depuis toute autre rubrique du système d’aide. Si vous sélectionnez l’option permettant d’ouvrir la rubrique dans la même diapositive, la rubrique du projet remplacera la rubrique originale dans la visionneuse de vos utilisateurs. Pour afficher le projet dans la même diapositive que le lien de la rubrique : 1 Dans RoboHelp, créez une nouvelle rubrique. 2 Ajoutez le projet Adobe Captivate à la rubrique. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Adobe Captivate Demo. 3 Recherchez et sélectionnez le fichier Adobe Captivate (par exemple, monprojet.swf) et cliquez sur OK. 4 Enregistrez la rubrique. 5 Ouvrez la rubrique que vous souhaitez utiliser pour démarrer le projet. 6 Sélectionnez le texte ou l’image que vous souhaitez utiliser comme lien hypertexte. Dans le menu Insert [Insérer], sélectionnez Hyperlink [Lien hypertexte]. 7 Dans la liste Select Destination (File or URL) [Sélectionner une destination (fichier ou adresse URL)], sélectionnez la rubrique contenant le projet Adobe Captivate. 8 Dans Hyperlink Properties [Propriétés du lien hypertexte], sélectionnez Display in frame [Afficher dans un cadre]. 9 A partir du menu déroulant à côté de Display in frame [Afficher dans un cadre], sélectionnez Same Slide [Même diapositive]. 10 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 308 Prévisualisez la rubrique pour avoir un aperçu du projet, ou générez et visualisez votre système d’aide pour voir à quoi il ressemble. Remarque : Vous pouvez modifier le fichier SWF que vous avez inséré dans RoboHelp uniquement si le projet Adobe Captivate associé est enregistré sur votre ordinateur. Adobe Captivate et Microsoft PowerPoint Si vous utilisez à la fois Adobe Captivate et PowerPoint, vous pouvez utiliser le contenu en source unique entre les deux programmes de plusieurs manières. Voici quelques options : • Importez une présentation PowerPoint dans Adobe Captivate. Créez la totalité d’un projet Adobe Captivate à partir d’une présentation PowerPoint complète. • Importez des diapositives PowerPoint dans Adobe Captivate. Importez des diapositives PowerPoint individuelles dans un projet Adobe Captivate pour créer de nouvelles diapositives Adobe Captivate individuelles. • Ajoutez un projet Adobe Captivate à une présentation. Insérez des projets Adobe Captivate dans des présentations PowerPoint. Importation de diapositives PowerPoint Vous pouvez importer directement des diapositives dans les projets Adobe Captivate à partir des présentations Microsoft PowerPoint. Les diapositives PowerPoint importées deviennent des diapositives des projets Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez effectuer les mêmes opérations sur ces diapositives que sur les autres diapositives Adobe Captivate. Par exemple, vous pouvez ajouter des légendes et créer des zones de clic. Adobe Captivate dispose d’un assistant d’importation de diapositives PowerPoint. Remarque : Adobe Captivate ne prend pas en charge les nouveaux formats de fichiers d’Office 12 tels que pptx ou docx. Pour importer des diapositives PowerPoint créées avec Office 12, enregistrez la présentation dans une version antérieure de PowerPoint avant de l’importer. Pour importer des diapositives PowerPoint dans un projet Adobe Captivate : 1 Ouvrez le projet Adobe Captivate auquel vous souhaitez ajouter les objets existants. 2 Sélectionnez Fichier > Importer > Importer des diapositives Microsoft PowerPoint. La boîte de dialogue Ouvrir s’affiche. 3 Déplacez-vous vers la présentation PowerPoint (format de fichier PPT, PPS ou POT) qui contient les diapositives à importer et sélectionnez la présentation. 4 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. La boîte de dialogue Options des diapositives PowerPoint s’affiche. 5 Décidez de l’emplacement où les diapositives PowerPoint seront placées dans le projet Adobe Captivate. Vous pouvez ajouter les diapositives à la fin du projet ou cliquer sur une diapositive de la liste et ajouter les diapositives PowerPoint après la diapositive sélectionnée. 6 Cliquez sur OK. Les diapositives PowerPoint sont extraites et la boîte de dialogue Convertir les présentations PowerPoint s’affiche.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 309 7 Sélectionnez les diapositives PowerPoint à convertir en diapositives du projet Adobe Captivate. Pour sélectionner des diapositives spécifiques, cliquez sur la case dans le coin supérieur droit des diapositives (une coche verte s’affiche). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Tout sélectionner pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives. 8 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes pour l’importation d’animations PowerPoint : • Animation Importez toute animation associée avec les diapositives PowerPoint. • Image d’arrière-plan Importez les diapositives PowerPoint sans leur animation associée. 9 Pour définir les préférences de navigation pour les diapositives sélectionnées, utilisez l’une des options de la liste déroulante Diapositives suivante : • En cas de clic de la souris Passe à la diapositive suivante uniquement en cas de clic de la souris. • Automatiquement Passe à la diapositive suivante lorsque la durée de la diapositive expire. 10 Cliquez sur OK. Les diapositives PowerPoint sont importées dans le projet Adobe Captivate et s’affichent à l’emplacement désigné. 11 Vous pouvez modifier l’ordre des diapositives selon vos besoins. Importation des présentations PowerPoint Vous pouvez importer des présentations Microsoft PowerPoint entières directement dans Adobe Captivate. Lorsque vous importez une présentation PowerPoint, un nouveau projet Adobe Captivate est créé et les diapositives PowerPoint individuelles deviennent des diapositives Adobe Captivate. Une fois que le nouveau projet est créé, vous pouvez lui appliquer toutes les opérations Adobe Captivate habituelles. Vous n’avez plus besoin de travailler dans PowerPoint. Remarque : Vous pouvez également importer des diapositives PowerPoint sélectionnées dans des projets Adobe Captivate existants. Adobe Captivate dispose d’un assistant d’importation de projets. Pour importer une présentation PowerPoint : 1 Ouvrez Adobe Captivate. 2 Sous Autres types de projets, cliquez sur Importer, Projets PowerPoint, et cliquez sur OK. 3 Entrez le nom de la présentation PowerPoint à importer ou cliquez sur Parcourir pour accéder au fichier. 4 Cliquez sur Ouvrir. Un aperçu des diapositives PowerPoint s’affiche. Sélectionnez les diapositives à convertir en diapositives Adobe Captivate. Sélectionnez des diapositives individuelles en cochant la case dans le coin supérieur droit des cadres. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Tout sélectionner pour sélectionner toutes les diapositives. 5 Sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes pour l’importation d’animations PowerPoint : • Animation Importez toute animation associée avec les diapositives PowerPoint. • Image d’arrière-plan Importez les diapositives PowerPoint sans leur animation associée. 6 Pour définir les préférences de navigation pour les diapositives sélectionnées, utilisez l’une des options de la liste déroulante Diapositives suivante : • En cas de clic de la souris Passe à la diapositive suivante uniquement en cas de clic de la souris. • Automatiquement Passe à la diapositive suivante lorsque la durée de la diapositive expire.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 310 7 Sélectionnez une taille pour le nouveau projet Adobe Captivate. Spécifiez une largeur et une hauteur exactes pour le projet dans la zone Définie par l’utilisateur (personnalisée) ou sélectionnez l’option Taille prédéfinie et choisissez une taille souvent utilisée dans le menu déroulant. 8 (Facultatif) Sélectionnez l’option Conserver le rapport de taille pour conserver le rapport de taille (proportions hauteur et largeur) lorsque le projet est redimensionné. Cette option permet au projet de s’afficher correctement sans distorsion. 9 Cliquez sur OK. Le nouveau projet est généré et s’ouvre dans l’affichage Scénarimage. Insertion de projets dans des présentations PowerPoint Vous pouvez insérer des projets Adobe Captivate dans des présentations Microsoft PowerPoint en quelques étapes simples. Créez tout d’abord un projet Adobe Captivate et enregistrez-le sous la forme d’un fichier Flash (SWF). Ouvrez ensuite une présentation PowerPoint et insérez le projet Adobe Captivate dans une diapositive. Pour insérer un projet Adobe Captivate dans une présentation PowerPoint : 1 Créez le projet dans Adobe Captivate. 2 Publiez le projet sous forme de fichier Flash SWF. 3 Notez l’emplacement du fichier SWF enregistré. 4 Ouvrez la présentation PowerPoint à laquelle vous voulez ajouter le projet Adobe Captivate. 5 Dans le menu Affichage, sélectionnez Barre d’outils > Boîte à outils Contrôle. 6 Sélectionnez Autres commandes. 7 Dans la liste des objets, sélectionnez Objet Flash Shockwave. 8 Faites glisser en diagonale pour créer une case pour la taille et l’emplacement du projet. Vous pouvez redimensionner la zone dans laquelle le projet est affiché. Retournez à la diapositive qui contient le projet dans PowerPoint et faites glisser les poignées de redimensionnement. 9 Cliquez du bouton droit sur la case, puis sélectionnez Propriétés. 10 Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés, cliquez une fois sur la ligne supérieure Personnaliser. 11 Cliquez une fois sur Ellipse. La boîte de dialogue Pages de propriétés s’affiche. 12 Dans URL du projet, entrez l’emplacement du fichier Flash (SWF) à ajouter. Tapez le chemin entier en incluant le nom du fichier (par exemple, C\:My Documents\MyFile.swf) ou l’adresse URL vers le fichier Flash que vous voulez lire. 13 Cliquez sur OK. 14 Vous pouvez définir les options de lecture de l’animation suivantes : Dans la boîte de dialogue Propriétés PowerPoint (ouverte à l’étape 8), définissez les propriétés suivantes : • Définissez la propriété de lecture sur Vrai. Cela permet de lire le fichier automatiquement lorsque la diapositive est affichée. Si le fichier Flash (SWF) a une commande Démarrer/Rembobiner intégrée, vous pouvez définir le paramètre de lecture sur Faux. • Si vous ne voulez pas que l’animation soit lue en continu, définissez la propriété Boucle sur Faux (cliquez sur la case pour obtenir une flèche vers le bas, cliquez sur la flèche et sélectionnez Faux).ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 311 • Définissez Intégrer le projet sur Vrai pour garantir que le projet Adobe Captivate est toujours intégré dans la présentation PowerPoint. 15 Une fois que vous avez fini de définir les options, cliquez sur le bouton fermer (le petit X rouge) dans la partie supérieure droite de la boîte de dialogue Propriétés. 16 Faites l’essai du projet. Dans le menu Affichage, sélectionnez Diaporama. Dans Microsoft Windows 2003, cliquez sur le menu Diaporama et sélectionnez Lancer le diaporama. 17 Pour quitter le diaporama et revenir à l’affichage normal, appuyez sur Echap.312 Chapitre 17 : Dépannage Ce chapitre contient des conseils de dépannage en réponse à certaines questions et scénarios. Dépannage du démarrage d’un projet Adobe Captivate Lorsque vous lancez Adobe Captivate, la page de démarrage affiche dans sa partie inférieure droite des liens suggérant à l’utilisateur de prendre connaissance de certaines informations concernant Adobe Captivate. Ces informations correspondent à un fichier SWF qui est chargé par Adobe Captivate grâce à la valeur définie pour la clé ConnectToInternetOnStartUp. Pour les valeurs différentes de zéro, Adobe Captivate recherche le fichier SWF sur Internet. Le champ reste vide jusqu’à ce que le fichier soit trouvé sur Internet. Vous pouvez modifier ce comportement afin qu’Adobe Captivate recherche le fichier SWF local stocké dans le fichier EXE. Pour cela, la valeur de la clé ConnectToInternetOnStartUp doit être définie sur zéro. Pour modifier la clé DWORD ConnectToInternetOnStartUp dans la base de registre : 1 Ouvrez l’éditeur de base de registre (regedit.exe). 2 Recherchez HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Adobe\Adobe Captivate. 3 Remplacez par 0 la valeur de la clé DWORD ConnectToInternetOnStartUp. 4 Fermez l’éditeur de base de registre. 5 Fermez Adobe Captivate et ouvrez-le à nouveau. Si cette clé n’existe pas, vous devez créer une clé de registre ConnectToInternetOnStartUp du type REG_DWORD et mettre sa valeur à 0. Lorsque la valeur est définie, un fichier SWF par défaut est utilisé pour afficher les informations de mise à jour dans la partie inférieure droite du projet. Dépannage de la durée d’une animation Si pendant la prévisualisation d’un projet, vous remarquez qu’un fichier d’animation ajouté en tant qu’objet s’affiche plus longtemps ou moins longtemps que la durée du fichier d’animation, vous pouvez synchroniser l’animation à l’aide du plan de montage chronologique d’Adobe Captivate, afin de mieux contrôler la durée. Pour synchroniser l’animation, double-cliquez sur celle-ci pour ouvrir la boîte de dialogue Animation, cliquez sur l’onglet Options, puis sélectionnez Synchroniser avec le projet. Remarque : Si le fichier d’animation a été initialement enregistré avec une piste audio, vous pouvez trouver que la piste audio est hachée après avoir choisi l’option Synchroniser avec le projet. La meilleure solution est de séparer le fichier d’animation et le fichier audio afin de les utiliser comme deux objets distincts dans le projet.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 313 Dépannage de la distorsion d’une application au cours de l’enregistrement La distorsion de l’application peut se produire avec certaines combinaisons de Windows et de carte graphique. Ce problème peut être résolu en affectant la valeur « Aucun » au paramètre d’accélération du matériel de votre ordinateur. Pour accéder à ce paramètre, utilisez l’option de menu suivante : Menu Démarrer >Paramètres > Panneau de configuration > Affichage > Paramètres > Avancé > Dépannage. Important : La désactivation de l’accélération matérielle peut désactiver l’affichage sur certains ordinateurs. Dépannage de la capture lors de l’enregistrement d’une application Web Lorsque vous capturez une application basée sur le Web ou un site Web dans un navigateur, il arrive que la diapositive n’affiche pas la bonne image. Lorsque vous capturez un écran, vous devez entendre le son de l’obturateur. Le son de l’obturateur indique qu’Adobe Captivate a bien effectué la capture d’écran. Lorsque vous effectuez la capture d’un site Web ou d’une application basée sur le Web, et que vous devez cliquer sur plusieurs liens, vous entendez le son de l’obturateur lors de chaque clic. Après avoir cliqué sur un lien, attendez le chargement complet de la nouvelle page. Lorsque cette page est complètement chargée, vous entendez le son de l’obturateur d’Adobe Captivate. Si vous n’entendez pas le son de l’obturateur lorsque la page est complètement chargée, appuyez sur la touche Impr. écran, qui prendra manuellement l’instantané. Il est conseillé d’utiliser Internet Explorer comme navigateur lors de la capture d’un site Web ou d’une application basée sur le Web. Le respect de ces consignes simples vous permettra d’obtenir les meilleurs résultats. Dépannage de la capture d’applications en mode élevé sous Windows Vista Vous devez attribuer des permissions de niveau Administrateur au fichier AdobeCaptivate.exe pour pouvoir enregistrer ou capturer l’activité des applications s’exécutant en mode élevé/administrateur. Pour attribuer des permissions Administrateur à AdobeCaptivate.exe : 1 Localisez AdobeCaptivate.exe dans votre répertoire d’installation. Si vous n’avez pas modifié les paramètres de l’installation, vous pouvez trouver ce fichier dans le dossier C:\Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3. 2 Cliquez sur le fichier avec le bouton droit de la souris et sélectionnez Exécuter en tant qu’administrateur. La boîte de dialogue Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur s’affiche. 3 Cliquez sur Continuer. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 314 Dépannage en cas d’enregistrement d’images animées non fluide Pour créer un projet plus fluide, avec notamment des meilleurs déplacements de la souris, désactivez l’accélération du matériel. Lorsque l’accélération du matériel est activée, elle utilise parfois beaucoup de ressources du système et donne des enregistrements d’images animées moins fluides. La désactivation de l’accélération du matériel donne souvent une meilleure qualité d’images animées. Pour désactiver facilement l’accélération du matériel lors de l’enregistrement d’un projet animé, sélectionnez l’option Désactiver l’accélération du matériel sur l’onglet Enregistrement d’images animées de la boîte de dialogue Options d’enregistrement. Si vous sélectionnez cette option, des papillotements risquent d’apparaître sur l’écran de votre ordinateur lorsque vous commencez et arrêtez l’enregistrement d’images animées. Ce papillotement n’endommage pas votre ordinateur et n’apparaît pas dans le projet final. Correction des couleurs dans les diapositives Généralement, les couleurs s’affichent correctement dans les projets Adobe Captivate. Cependant, il peut y avoir des cas où les couleurs s’affichent mal, par exemple si elles sont radicalement différentes d’une diapositive à l’autre. Si la diapositive A utilise la palette de couleurs « ABC », si la diapositive B utilise la palette de couleurs « XYZ » et si les deux palettes sont totalement différentes, alors la diapositive B risque d’utiliser la palette « ABC ». Pour résoudre ce type de problème, il suffit le plus souvent de modifier la qualité vidéo de la diapositive. Adobe Captivate propose trois niveaux de qualité vidéo, l’option Standard étant recommandée dans la plupart des cas. Pour modifier la qualité vidéo dans une diapositive : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Double-cliquez sur la diapositive contenant les couleurs que vous voulez corriger. 3 Dans le menu Diapositive, sélectionnez Qualité vidéo et l’une des options vidéo : Standard Format par défaut des diapositives. Le format Standard est le plus adapté à la plupart des captures d’écran, car il utilise 256 couleurs optimisées. Les diapositives au format Standard sont également facilement compressibles, ce qui permet d’obtenir des fichiers de taille réduite. Optimisée Cette option produit la meilleure qualité JPEG possible. JPEG Cette option est la plus adaptée lorsque la diapositive comporte une photographie. Vous pouvez modifier la qualité et le taux de compression pour les images JPEG dans la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. Qualité élevée Alors que le format Standard ne prend en charge que 256 couleurs, ce format utilise 16 millions de couleurs pour les diapositives. Cette option ne doit être utilisée que si les options Standard et Optimisé n’offrent pas la profondeur de couleur voulue. L’utilisation de cette option contribue à augmenter considérablement la taille des fichiers. Remarque : Il se peut que la sélection JPEG ou Qualité élevée augmente la taille du fichier et le temps nécessaire pour télécharger votre projet. Il est recommandé d’utiliser un format autre que Standard uniquement lorsque c’est nécessaire et approprié. ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 315 Dépannage des polices sur des légendes transparentes Ce problème se produit si des légendes transparentes sont créées et si le paramètre de fluidité de la police (lissage) est activé. Pour corriger l’aspect de la police de caractères, désactivez l’option de fluidité de la police. Pour les versions Windows XP : 1 Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Paramètres > Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Affichage. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Apparence. 4 Cliquez sur Effets. 5 Si l’option Utiliser la méthode suivante pour lisser les bords des polices écran est sélectionnée (une coche s’affiche à gauche de l’option), cliquez sur la coche pour la supprimer et désactiver le paramètre. Pour les versions Windows 2000 et plus anciennes de Windows : 1 Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Paramètres > Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Affichage. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Effets. 4 Si l’option de lissage des bords des polices écran est sélectionnée (une coche s’affiche à gauche de l’option), cliquez sur la coche pour la supprimer et désactiver le paramètre. Dépannage de la sortie Adobe Captivate L’un des principes ayant présidé à la conception d’Adobe Captivate est le respect des systèmes à faible bande passante. Un projet ordinaire, comportant des éléments audio (commentaires) et un format d’écran réduit de 512 x 384, est lu à environ 2-3 ko par seconde. Un projet de ce type peut être visualisé en utilisant une connexion par modem à 56k ou moins, sans que le démarrage ne prenne plus de quelques secondes. De plus, il n’y a pas de pause pendant la lecture. • Un projet se lisant bien peut avoir les caractéristiques suivantes : • Taille du fichier : 777 Ko • Durée : 6 minutes 12 secondes • Audio : 286 Ko • Vidéo : 491 Ko • Taille de l’écran : 608 x 460 Remarque : La taille du fichier dépend de plusieurs facteurs. Les fichiers les plus volumineux comportent des éléments tels que des photos, des images, des bandes son, des formats d’écran plus grands, des transitions d’écran rapides, et sont optimisés en vue d’une qualité vidéo et audio supérieure. Plusieurs méthodes permettent d’améliorer la taille de fichier de la sortie Adobe Captivate :ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 316 • Le débit en Ko par seconde est un facteur important. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous à la rubrique Analyser la bande passante. Ne vous découragez pas si la taille de votre projet est trop élevée. Il n’est pas impossible qu’un projet volumineux se lise sans problème via Internet. Par exemple, un projet de 400 Ko peut paraître lourd. Cependant, s’il dure 5 minutes, même un modem 28,8K peut le lire aisément. Le temps de chargement (Ko/s) de la première diapositive d’un projet est plus élevé, d’une part car c’est la première à être chargée et, d’autre part, car des informations supplémentaires concernant le projet sont chargées en parallèle. • Prenez en compte les paramètres des couleurs et les images insérées dans votre projet. Deux conseils rapides pour réduire la taille du fichier : évitez les dégradés de couleurs et les photos. • Si vous ne prévoyez pas de transférer les fichiers SWF vers un serveur Adobe® Connect™ Enterprise, vous pouvez désactiver l’option Inclure les métadonnées Adobe Connect dans les Préférences du projet. Cette option est activée par défaut et elle ajoute au projet les données qui permettent une meilleure intégration avec Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional. Si vous n’utilisez pas Acrobat Connect Professional, désactivez cette option pour réduire le volume du projet. Dépannage des erreurs vidéo La sortie Adobe Captivate n’est pas lue si elle est publiée sur le réseau alors qu’elle contient des fichiers Flash Video (FLV). De même, les fichiers FLV ne sont pas lus lorsque le projet Adobe Captivate contenant du FLV progressif est publié vers un partage du réseau et affiché en cliquant sur le bouton Afficher la sortie. Vous pouvez lire le fichier FLV de la sortie Adobe Captivate en montant l’unité du réseau dans l’Explorateur MS Windows. Le fichier FLV doit contenir des métadonnées pour que le lecteur vidéo fonctionne correctement. Les fichiers FLV créés avec Flash Communication Server 1.5.2, FLV Exporter version 1.2 et Sorenson Squeeze 4.0 contiennent automatiquement des métadonnées. Sorenson Squeeze 4.0 est inclus dans le Kit Flash Video. Les fichiers FLV ne sont pas lus lorsqu’un projet Adobe Captivate est hébergé sur un serveur Web Windows 2003. Dépannage du texte affiché dans un navigateur Si le texte d’un projet ne s’affiche pas correctement dans un navigateur, il est possible qu’un lien appelle le fichier SWF du projet Adobe Captivate au lieu du fichier HTM correspondant au fichier SWF. Si vous ajoutez votre projet à une page Web, ne liez pas directement le fichier SWF. Si vous créez directement un lien vers le fichier SWF, le navigateur ne sait pas à quelle taille afficher le fichier SWF. Il affiche donc le fichier SWF à la même taille que la fenêtre du navigateur. Cela peut produire des problèmes d’affichage, surtout au niveau du texte. Le texte peut devenir illisible. Pour afficher correctement le fichier SWF dans un navigateur, utilisez le fichier HTM pouvant être généré avec le fichier SWF. Le fichier HTM contient le code qui communique la taille correcte du projet au navigateur. Lorsque vous publiez votre projet en tant que fichier SWF, sélectionnez l’option d’exportation HTML. Le fichier HTM est enregistré au même emplacement que celui que vous avez spécifié pour le fichier SWF. Le fichier HTM porte le même nom que le fichier SWF, mais a l’extension HTM. Si vous avez installé Adobe® Flash® Player 8 ou une version ultérieure, la prévisualisation d’un projet Adobe Captivate dans un navigateur provoque l’affichage d’un avertissement sur les paramètres de sécurité. Ceci est dû aux paramètres de sécurité configurés dans Flash Player 8 ou une version ultérieure.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 317 Dépannage de la taille du texte dans les zones de texte Après la mise à niveau d’un projet Captivate 1 vers Adobe Captivate, la police des zones de texte est plus grande dans Adobe Captivate. Ce problème est dû à un bogue de Captivate 1 et de Flash Player. La police utilisée pour la modification et la publication du fichier SWF n’était pas identique à la police d’origine. Le bogue a été corrigé dans Adobe Captivate. Cependant, la police des zones de texte des projets Captivate 1 continuera d’être plus grande après la mise à niveau des projets vers Adobe Captivate. Il existe deux solutions à ce problème. Première solution (conseillée) 1 Après avoir mis à niveau un projet Captivate 1 vers Adobe Captivate, ouvrez le projet mis à niveau. 2 Modifiez la police dans la zone de texte. 3 Utilisez l’option Appliquer à tout pour appliquer le changement à toutes les zones de texte du projet. Seconde solution 1 Mettez à niveau tous les projets Captivate 1 vers Adobe Captivate 3.0. 2 Dans le menu Démarrer, cliquez sur Exécuter, entrez REGEDIT et cliquez sur OK. 3 L’éditeur de base de registre s’affiche. 4 Recherchez HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE > SOFTWARE > Adobe > Adobe Captivate > 3 > FudgeFactor. 5 Modifiez la valeur de la clé FudgeFactor à 1. La valeur par défaut de la clé est 1.4. 6 Fermez l’éditeur de base de registre. 7 Les changements sont pris en compte lorsque vous redémarrez Adobe Captivate. 8 Affichez ou publiez les projets Adobe Captivate. Remarque : Après avoir publié les projets Captivate 1, veillez à remettre la valeur de la clé FudgeFactor à 1 pour les nouveaux projets Adobe Captivate. Dépannage des problèmes de taille de bouton lors du redimensionnement des projets Redimensionnez les boutons avant de redimensionner le projet. En effet, le redimensionnement d’un projet ne redimensionne pas automatiquement les boutons. Dépannage du nombre de diapositives dans un projet D’un point de vue technique, il n’y a pas de limite au nombre de diapositives que peut comporter un projet Adobe Captivate. Ce nombre dépend de la quantité de RAM dont vous disposez. Certains projets créés sur un ordinateur 256 Mo comportent plus de 300 diapositives. La taille des fichiers audio MP3 n’est pas non plus limitée en terme de diapositives. Par défaut, les projets sont définis à 30 images par seconde. Ainsi, une légende s’affichant pendant 1 seconde nécessite 30 images. En divisant le nombre d’images d’un projet par 30, on obtient donc la durée du projet en secondes.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 318 Il existe une méthode facile pour connaître le nombre d’images d’un projet Adobe Captivate. Pour déterminer le nombre d’images composant un projet : 1 Ouvrez un projet Adobe Captivate. 2 Dans l’affichage Scénarimage, le nombre de Diapositives correspond au nombre d’images. Dépannage de la publication des projets Adobe Captivate semble cesser de répondre pendant un moment lors de la publication d’un projet contenant un enregistrement d’images animées de grande taille. Lorsqu’un enregistrement d’images animées volumineux est capturé dans un projet Adobe Captivate, les opérations d’aperçu et de publication sont longues. Si vous souhaitez fréquemment prévisualiser le projet contenant un enregistrement d’images animées volumineux, désactivez l’option Compresser le fichier SWF sur l’onglet Préférences de la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet. Le délai nécessaire pour prévisualiser la sortie s’en trouvera raccourci. Après avoir prévisualisé la sortie, vous pouvez réactiver l’option Compresser le fichier SWF et publier le projet. Dépannage des erreurs de quiz L’utilisateur ne doit pas pouvoir afficher la diapositive de résultats sans avoir répondu au quiz des diapositives de questions. Lors de la conception d’un projet Adobe Captivate contenant des diapositives de résultats, veillez à ne pas autoriser l’utilisateur à naviguer ou à sauter directement à la diapositive de résultats sans avoir répondu aux diapositives de questions ou aux diapositives contenant des objets interactifs, et veillez aussi à activer l’option de création de rapport. Il est important de concevoir le projet de façon à aider l’utilisateur à terminer le quiz avant de passer à la diapositive de résultats. Dépannage de l’exportation des projets vers Flash Deux problèmes peuvent se présenter lors de l’exportation des projets Adobe Captivate vers Flash : • Le fichier RDMFISTUB.DLL fourni dans Macromedia Captivate 1 permettait d’exporter les projets vers Flash 8. Cette DLL, qui était copiée manuellement vers le dossier d’installation d’Adobe Captivate, n’est pas supprimée lors de l’installation d’Adobe Captivate. Si un message d’erreur s’affiche lors de l’exportation du projet Adobe Captivate vers Flash, recherchez cette DLL, déplacez-la vers un autre dossier, et copiez le fichier RDMFISTUB8.dll de Program Files\Adobe\Adobe Captivate 3\ vers cet emplacement. • Après l’exportation de la sortie Adobe Captivate vers Flash, les fichiers requis sont absents. • Enregistrez tout d’abord le projet dans Adobe Captivate, puis prévisualisez ou publiez-le avant de l’exporter vers Flash. Cela garantit que tous les fichiers seront bien exportés.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 319 Dépannage d’un JavaScript qui ne s’affiche pas Un JavaScript ne s’affiche pas lors de la prévisualisation de la sortie Adobe Captivate. Si l’option Exécuter JavaScript est sélectionnée dans les options de fin du projet de la boîte de dialogue Préférences du projet, Adobe Captivate peut ne pas afficher de message d’erreur lors de l’aperçu du JavaScript. En effet, l’option Afficher les bordures est activée par défaut. Lorsque cette option est activée, Adobe Captivate crée plusieurs SWF— les SWF d’habillage et les SWF de contenu. Pour prévisualiser le JavaScript, désactivez l’option Afficher les bordures sur l’onglet Bordures de la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage. Dépannage de l’éditeur d’habillage La boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage affiche l’aperçu de l’habillage de la première diapositive du projet. L’aperçu contient la couleur ou l’image d’arrière-plan de la diapositive, si elle existe. Les performances peuvent se dégrader lorsque l’aperçu de l’habillage montre l’image d’arrière-plan parce que tous les paramètres de la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage s’appliquent immédiatement à l’aperçu. Pour éviter cette lenteur de mise à jour de l’aperçu lors de la modification de l’habillage dans la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage, il est possible d’insérer une première diapositive vide en début de projet. Ouvrez ensuite la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage et définissez tous les paramètres d’habillage, tels que les commandes de la barre de lecture, la position des menus et les bordures. Après avoir finalisé la configuration de l’habillage, vous pouvez masquer la première diapositive vide que vous avez insérée et ouvrir de nouveau la boîte de dialogue Editeur d’habillage pour prévisualiser les dernières modifications. L’aperçu de l’habillage montre toujours la première diapositive qui n’est pas masquée. Désinstallation d’Adobe Captivate Il est relativement facile de désinstaller Adobe Captivate. Lorsque vous désinstallez Adobe Captivate, tous les fichiers enregistrés dans Mes documents\Mes projets Adobe Captivate sont conservés. Pour désinstaller Adobe Captivate : 1 Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Paramètres > Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Ajout/Suppression de programmes. 3 Cliquez sur l’onglet Installer/Désinstaller (si votre version de Windows possède cet onglet). 4 Dans la liste des programmes que vous pouvez supprimer, sélectionnez Adobe Captivate x.x. 5 Cliquez sur Ajouter/Supprimer. 6 Cliquez sur Oui pour confirmer la suppression du programme. Le processus de désinstallation supprime les fichiers, les dossiers et les entrées de registre du programme. Une fois les fichiers supprimés, le système affiche un message signalant que le processus de désinstallation est terminé. 7 Cliquez sur OK.ADOBE CAPTIVATE 3 Guide de l’utilisateur 320 Avertissement de sécurité avec Flash Player 8 Un avertissement de sécurité s’affiche lorsque vous lancez un fichier externe à partir d’un fichier SWF créé dans Adobe Captivate. Le même avertissement de sécurité s’affiche lorsque vous lancez un fichier FlashHelp créé soit dans RoboHelp HTML, soit dans RoboHelp pour Word. La raison en est que Flash Player 8 intègre le nouveau Gestionnaire des paramètres, lequel vous permet de gérer les paramètres globaux de contrôle de l’accès, les paramètres d’enregistrement local, les paramètres de sécurité et les paramètres de notification automatique. Pour modifier les paramètres de manière permanente : 1 Cliquez sur Paramètres. 2 Sélectionnez Modifier. 3 Sélectionnez Ajouter. 4 Dans Faire confiance à cet emplacement, entrez l’emplacement du dossier qui contient votre projet publié. 5 Cliquez sur Confirmer. INDEX 321 Index A accélération matérielle, dépannage 313 accessibilité configuration requise 67 diapositives 69, 172 fichiers Flash (SWF) 68, 69 informations sur le projet 186, 211 lecteurs d’écran 67 normes 66 préférences du projet 208 sites Web 66, 70 sous-titres 104 test 70 Accrocher à la grille 199 Adobe Acrobat Connect Professional présentation 301 Adobe Connect et Adobe Captivate 301 fonctionnalités de recherche 304 publication de projets vers 301 publication des projets Adobe Captivate vers 301 suivi 304 affichage Embranchement 6 déplacement vers une diapositive 218 exportation 218 affichage Modifier 6 affichage Scénarimage 6, 8 affichages 6 afficher le score 243 AICC 237 ajout sous-titres 104 ajouter des diapositives 51 utiliser l’Assistant de projet 51 alignement images dans MenuBuilder 265 légendes de texte personnalisées 84 objets sur la grille 199 objets sur le plan de montage chronologique 196 objets sur les diapositives 195 objets, au pixel près 200 texte dans MenuBuilder 261 trajectoires de souris 144 zones de clic dans MenuBuilder 270 ancrage des barres d’outils 9 animation dépannage 312 animation de texte 118, 121 animations Voir aussi objets ajout 118 définition 189 dépannage 312 diapositives 123, 164 présentation 118 annotations, diapositives 169 annuler une action 16 aperçu audio 105 diapositives 155 projets 204 projets MenuBuilder 257 transitions, diapositive 172 variables 159 appellation boutons, conventions 182 fichiers avec des caractères asiatiques 281 projets 205 apprentissage électronique afficher le score 243 création de diapositives de questions 219 description 216 diapositives de questions à choix multiple 220 diapositives de questions à compléter 224 diapositives de questions à échelle d’évaluation 236 diapositives de questions à réponse courte 226 diapositives de questions d’association 229 diapositives de questions de zone sensible 231, 234 diapositives de questions Likert 236 diapositives de questions vrai/faux 222 embranchement 216, 217 fichier de manifeste 246 fichier de manifeste, création 246 fichier PIF 248 fonctionnalités 216 messages de consultation des questions 244 options 237 options de sortie 237 package interchange file (PIF) 248 seuil de réussite 242 suivi Adobe Connect 304 arrêt de l’enregistrement 27 arrière-plan (projets) 206 assistance de notification PENS 291 Assistant de projet 34, 50, 51 ajouter des diapositives 51 attirer l’attention 172 audio affichage des détails 103 ajout aux zones et aux boutons 99 aperçu 105 arrière-plan, création 96 boutons et zones 139 bruits d’appareil photo 25, 29 calibration du microphone 94 conseils pour l’enregistrement 91 diapositives d’introduction 178 durée 102 écrans de chargement 210 enregistrement lors de la création d’un projet 95 existant, ajout 89 exportation 104, 106 frappes sur clavier, personnalisation 212 logiciels d’enregistrement 90 matériel d’enregistrement 90 modification 91, 101 options d’enregistrement 92 options vidéo 110 ordre des calques d’objets 154INDEX 322 présentation 89 processus d’enregistrement 94 projets MenuBuilder 274 qualité 92, 104, 209 silence, ajout 98 sons de clic, souris 142 sons de frappe 97, 101 suppression 107 taille maximale 317 volume 98 audio d’arrière-plan création 96 présentation 89 suppression 107 autres projets 53 B Bande de film affichage Modifier 6 ordre des diapositives, modification 167 visualiser 10 bande passante 17 résolution d’écran 21 barre d’outils Bibliothèque 192 barre d’outils de la bibliothèque 11 barres d’outils afficher ou masquer 9 ancrage 9 déplacement 10 légendes 9 visualiser 7 barres de lecture BMP 179, 181, 182 bibliothèque affichage des objets 189, 191 affichage Modifier 6 afficher ou masquer 8 présentation 11, 191 boîte de dialogue Intégration avancée 201 bordures, projet 184 Bouton Lire 179, 181 Bouton Pause 179, 181 boutons ajout à des projets 133 audio, ajout aux 99, 139 commandes de lecture 179, 181 conventions d’appellation 182 durée 158 gestion de tous les objets interactifs 201 informations sur le projet 186, 211 Javascript 138 présentation 124, 190 suppression 140 bruits d’appareil photo 25, 29 C calques, objet masquer et verrouiller 155 ordre, modification 154 captures d’écran 20, 22 caractères asiatiques 281 cartes graphiques, dépannage 313 cartes son configuration requise 90 paramètres 91 casques 90 changement de nom des projets 205 commandes de lecture ajout 179 conventions d’appellation 182 informations sur le projet 186 personnalisés 181 propriétés 211 variables 159 communication activation pour un projet 291 compression diapositives 176 fichiers Flash (SWF) 208 projets 208 configuration commandes de lecture 181 espace de travail 8 frappes sur clavier 97, 212 paramètres liés à PENS 291 Plan de montage chronologique 152 styles de légendes 83 configuration liée à PENS activation de la génération de rapports 291 conformité AICC fonctionnalités 216 Gestionnaire de quiz 248 options 237 conformité PENS 216, 248 contenu AICC publication 291 conversion des projets Adobe Captivate 293 vers XML 293 couleur d’arrière-plan diapositives 168, 176 projets 206 couleurs arrière-plan du projet 206 dégradés 22 dépannage 314 diapositives 168, 176 effets de clic 143 non standard 21 papier peint, bureau 21 projets, arrière-plan 206 couleurs dégradées 22 création diapositive de questions de séquence 234 effet de survol de la souris 146 mini-diapositives 146 mini-diapositives de survol 146 questions de séquence 234 D date d’expiration (projets) 207 dates d’expiration 207 définition propriétés de zone sensible 233 dépannage affichage du texte 316 cartes graphiques 313 couleurs 314 couleurs des diapositives 314 désinstallation d’Adobe Captivate 319 diapositives 317 distorsion pendant l’enregistrement 313 durée de l’animation 312 enregistrement 314 enregistrement d’images animées 314 nombre de diapositives dans un projet 317 police dans les zones de texte 317 polices sur des légendes transparentes 315 taille de projet 315INDEX 323 texte affiché dans un navigateur 316 désinstallation d’Adobe Captivate 319 désinstallation d’Adobe Captivate 2,1 319 diapositive de questions de séquence création 234 diapositives Voir aussi projets ; publication accessibilité 69, 172 affichage Embranchement 6 affichage Scénarimage 6 animation 123, 164 annotations 169 aperçu 155 arrêt 177 Bande de film 10 capture 22 compression 176 copie et collage 162, 163 copier dans le Presse-papiers 166 couleurs 168, 176, 314 création d’étiquettes 169 démarrage 177 dépannage des couleurs 314 duplication 166 durée 156 enregistrement d’images animées 62, 63 enregistrement supplémentaire 57 enregistrer nouvelles 161 fusion des objets dans 200 images en tant que 116, 164 importer à partir d’autres projets 162 introduction 178 masquage 187 maximum 317 modification de texte enregistré 171 navigation, modification 168 ordre, modification 167 PowerPoint 308 présentation 161 projets d’images 54 question 219 sécurité 187 suppression 177 texte, ajout 170 texte, brut 75 titres 169 trajectoire de souris, alignement 144 transitions 172 types de 161 vérification de l’orthographe 212 verrouillage 187 vide, insertion 163 zones de zoom 172, 173 diapositives de questions afficher le score 243 association 229 champ à compléter 224 choix multiple 220 conseils 219 création 219 description 219 échelle d’évaluation 236 embranchement 216, 217 fichier de manifeste 246 likert 236 messages de retour d’informations 244 messages de révision 244 options de sortie 237 PIF 248 réponse courte 226 seuil de réussite, définition 242 vérification de l’orthographe 212 vrai ou faux 222 vrai/faux 222 zone sensible 231, 234 diapositives de questions à choix multiple afficher le score 243 création 220 messages de révision 244 seuil de réussite, définition 242 diapositives de questions à compléter 224 diapositives de questions à réponse courte 226 diapositives de questions d’association afficher le score 243 création 229 messages de révision 244 seuil de réussite, définition 242 diapositives de questions d’évaluation 236 diapositives de questions de zone sensible création 231, 234 diapositives de questions Likert 236 diapositives de questions vrai/faux afficher le score 243 création 222 messages de révision 244 seuil de réussite, définition 242 dictionnaire, vérification de l’orthographe 214 diffusion vidéo ajout 108 options 109 documents diapositives masquées 188 publication de projets sous forme de 284 durée animations, dépannage 312 audio 102 objets 158, 197 variables 159 vitesse de frappe de touches 157 vitesse de la souris 157 vitesse de légende 157 E écran de chargement 177, 179, 210 effet de survol de la souris création 146 effets de clic 143 e-mail envoi de projets par 289 zones de clic 126 embranchement 216, 217 embranchement d’éventualité 216, 217 enregistrement 35, 43, 50 arrêt 27 automatique 20, 30 bruits d’appareil photo 25, 29 conseils 20 dépannage d’un mouvement peu fluide 314 dépannage des cartes graphiques 313 dépannage des distorsions 313 diapositives, nouvelles 161 diapositives, supplémentaires 57INDEX 324 frappes de touches 25 images animées 32, 60, 62, 63 légendes de texte, ajout automatique 73, 76 modes 33 molette de la souris, activer 146 options 24 pause 27, 30 plein écran 41 présentation 34 projets d’application 35 projets de taille personnalisée 38 projets MenuBuilder 258 simulations de scénarios 50 simulations logicielles 35 simulations logicielles dans plusieurs modes 43 sons de frappe sur clavier 97, 101, 212 techniques 22 touches de capture, modification 16 zone de capture 31 enregistrement audio calibration du microphone 94 conseils 91 équipement pour 90 lecteurs média 90 logiciels pour 90 lors de la création d’un projet 95 modification 91 options 92 processus 94 zones et boutons 100 enregistrement automatique 20, 30 enregistrement d’images animées activation 32, 60 activer la molette de la souris 146 automatique 62 dépannage 314 désactiver 32, 61 diapositives 62, 63 manuellement 62 options 27 présentation 23 enregistrement d’images animées peu fluide, dépannage 314 enregistrement dans plusieurs modes 43 simulations logicielles 43 enregistrement plein écran 41 envoi de projets par e-mail 289 espace de travail barres d’outils 7, 9 configuration 8 étiquettes, diapositives 169 exceptions gestion des exceptions pour la notification PENS 291 exportation 293 affichage Embranchement 218 audio 104, 106 contenu localisable vers XML 293 contenu modifiable vers XML 293 légendes de texte 86, 292 projets Adobe Captivate dans Flash 298 projets vers Flash 298 exportation des projets MenuBuilder EXE 278 fichiers SWF Flash 278 fichiers Word 279 HTML 279 icônes, association 273 Macintosh 280 F fichier 295 fichier de manifeste 246 fichier de manifeste, création 246 fichier de script 46 à propos du réenregistrement 46 fichier XML importation 295 Fichiers AVI ajout 118 diapositives d’animation 123, 164 présentation 118 fichiers BMP 112 fichiers EMF 112 fichiers EXE exportation des projets MenuBuilder 278 icônes 273 publication de projets sous forme de 281 fichiers FLA ajout 118 conversion au format SWF 118 diapositives 123 présentation 118 variables 159 fichiers Flash (SWF) accessibilité 68, 69 ajout 118 caractères asiatiques 281 compression 208 dépannage de l’affichage du texte 316 diapositives d’animation 123, 164 exportation des projets MenuBuilder 278 présentation 118 publication de projets sous forme de 283 variables 159 fichiers GIF animations 118 diapositives d’animation 123, 164 images 112 fichiers HQX 280, 281 fichiers ICO 112 fichiers Linux Projector 281 fichiers Macintosh Projector 281 fichiers Microsoft Word documents 284 exportation de légendes de texte 292 exportation des projets MenuBuilder 279 guides étape par étape 286 leçons 286 scénarimages 287 fichiers MP3 Voir aussi audio ajout 89 convertir au format 89 enregistrement 92 exportation 104, 106 logiciels pour 90 taille maximale 317 fichiers PIF 248 fichiers PNG 112 fichiers SWF (Flash) accessibilité 68, 69 ajout 118 caractères asiatiques 281 compression 208 dépannage de l’affichage du texte 316INDEX 325 diapositives d’animation 123 exportation des projets MenuBuilder 278 présentation 118 publication de projets sous forme de 283 variables 159 fichiers vidéo Flash (FLV) Voir aussi objets ajout 108 audio 110 définition 189 importation 108 options 109 position 110 présentation 107 fichiers WAV Voir aussi audio ajout 89 convertir au format MP3 89 enregistrement 92 exportation 104, 106 logiciels pour 90 fichiers WMF 112 fichiers Word documents 284 exportation de légendes de texte 292 exportation des projets MenuBuilder 279 guides étape par étape 286 leçons 286 scénarimages 287 films. Voir projets ; vidéo fin, projets 177 Flash conversion Adobe Captivate 299 conversion de projets 299 exportation de projets Adobe Captivate vers 298 exportation vers 298 films Adobe Captivate dans 300 importation de projets Adobe Captivate depuis 297, 298 modification des projets Adobe Captivate dans 299 modification des projets dans 299 navigation dans les projets 300 flotter barres d’outils 10 bibliothèque 11 fonctionnalités de recherche, Adobe Connect 304 formation afficher le score 243 Assistant de projet 50 création de diapositives de questions 219 création de simulations 34 diapositives de questions à choix multiple 220 diapositives de questions à compléter 224 diapositives de questions à échelle d’évaluation 236 diapositives de questions à réponse courte 226 diapositives de questions d’association 229 diapositives de questions de zone sensible 231, 234 diapositives de questions Likert 236 diapositives de questions vrai/faux 222 embranchement 216, 217 fichier de manifeste, création 246 fonctionnalités 216 messages de consultation des questions 244 options 237 package interchange file (PIF) 248 seuil de réussite 242 suivi Adobe Connect 304 formation basée sur des interactions 34, 50 Voir aussi formation formation basée sur des scénarios 34, 50 Voir aussi formation frappes de touches, enregistrement 25 frappes, clavier configuration 97, 212 paramètres 101 Freedom Scientific 67 FTP, publication de projets avec 288 fusion des objets dans des diapositives 200 G galerie animations 118 images 112 préchargements 177, 210 générer des informations pour un réenregistrement 47 Gestionnaire de quiz 248 afficher le score 243 options 237 seuil de réussite, définition 242 suivi Adobe Connect 304 graphiques.Voir images grille 199 guides étape par étape 286 GW Micro 67 H habillages ajout 179 conventions d’appellation 182 informations sur le projet 186, 211 personnalisés 181 handicaps. Voir accessibilité hauteur, projets détermination 203 modification 205 zone de capture 31 haut-parleurs 90 HTML exportation des projets MenuBuilder 279 RoboHelp 305 I icônes association avec les projets MenuBuilder 273 images Voir aussi objets ajout 112 définition 189 diapositives, insertion en tant que 116, 164 durée 158 filigranes 117 formats de fichiers 112 galerie 112 suppression 117 images de survol Voir aussi objets ajout 114 définition 189INDEX 326 images en filigrane 117 images, MenuBuilder ajout 263 alignement 265 copie 266 déplacement 264 mise à l’échelle 267 options 264 ordre 266 suppression 268 taille 266 transparent 268 images, nombre 317 importation 295 contenu localisable à partir de XML 295 contenu modifiable à partir de XML 295 diapositives d’autres projets 162 Diapositives PowerPoint 308 fichiers vidéo Flash (FLV) 108 légendes 86 légendes de texte 86 objets 190 Impr écran 20, 22 impression des projets MenuBuilder 258 infobulles, conversion en légendes de survol 79 informations pour un réenregistrement 47 générer lors de la création d’un projet 47 J Javascript 138 JAWS 67 JPEG formats de fichiers pris en charge 112 qualité 117, 209 L langues caractères asiatiques 281 légendes de texte 71, 81 options d’enregistrement 36, 39, 42, 44, 48, 52, 64 projets 71 largeur, projets détermination 203 modification 205 zone de capture 31 leçons, publication de projets sous forme de 286 lecteurs d’écran diapositives 69, 172 fichiers Flash (SWF) 68, 69 préférences du projet 208 présentation 67 tester les projets 70 lecteurs média enregistrement audio 90 lecture en boucle 177 légendes Voir aussi objets ; légendes de survol ajout automatique 23, 73, 76 barres d’outils 9 copie et collage 85 création de styles personnalisés 83 définition 189 dépannage 315 dépannage des polices 315 déplacement 85 durée 158 exportation 86, 292 images, nombre 317 importation 86 localisation 71, 81 modification 82 ordre 87 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 73 redimensionnement 85 suppression 88 transparent 75, 170 vérification de l’orthographe 212 vitesse 157 légendes de survol Voir aussi objets ajout 77 conversion d’infobulles en 79 définition 189 modification de la zone 78 légendes de texte Voir aussi objets ; légendes de survol ajout automatique 23, 73, 76 copie et collage 85 création de styles personnalisés 83 définition 189 dépannage des polices 315 déplacement 85 durée 158 exportation 86, 292 images, nombre 317 importation 86 localisation 71, 81 modification 82 ordre 87 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 73 redimensionnement 85 suppression 88 transparent 75, 170 vérification de l’orthographe 212 vitesse 157 légendes de texte transparentes 75, 170, 315 localisation caractères asiatiques 281 légendes de texte 71, 81 options d’enregistrement 36, 39, 42, 44, 48, 52, 64 projets 71 localisation d’une diapositive dans l’affichage Embranchement 218 logiciel pour lire les fichiers audio 90 M Macromedia Flash conversion de projets 299 exportation vers 298 modification des projets dans 299 navigation dans les projets 300 masquage barres d’outils 9 calques des objets 155 diapositives 187 Plan de montage chronologique 8, 153 pointeurs 145 projets 204 MenuBuilder affichage de l’emplacement des pixels 262, 266 ajout d’éléments 257 ajout d’images 263INDEX 327 ajout de texte 259 ajout de zones de clic 269 alignement des images 265 alignement des zones de clic 270 alignement du texte 261 annulation et rétablissement des actions 257 arrière-plans transparents 274 association d’icônes 273 audio 274 copie d’images 266 copie de texte 262 copie des zones de clic 271 création de projet à l’aide de l’assistant 254 création de projets vides 255 déplacement d’images 264 déplacement de texte 260 déplacement des zones de clic 270 dimensionnement des images 266 enregistrement de projets 258 enregistrement de projets comme modèles 258 exportation à partir d’un Macintosh 280 exportation au format EXE 278 exportation au format Flash SWF 278 exportation au format HTML 279 exportation au format Word 279 images transparentes 268 impression de projets 258 mise à l’échelle des images 267 modèles 256, 258 options 272 options de texte 260 options des images 264 options des zones de clic 269 ordre des images 266 ordre des zones de clic 271 ordre du texte 262 préférences 275 présentation 254 prévisualisation de projets 257 redimensionnement des projets 275 répertoires par défaut 276 suppression d’images 268 suppression de texte 262 suppression de zones de clic 272 touches de raccourci 275 vérification de l’orthographe 257 menus conventions d’appellation des boutons 182 éléments, ajout 185 habillages 179, 181 informations sur le projet 186, 211 présentation 7 messages de confirmation 12 messages, confirmation 12 métadonnées fichiers vidéo Flash (FLV) 108 serveur Connect Enterprise 209 métadonnées Connect Enterprise 209 mettre l’enregistrement en pause 27, 30 microphone calibration 94 emplacement 91 équipement audio 90 Microsoft PowerPoint importation de diapositives 308 insertion de projets dans 310 présentation 308 Microsoft Reader 67 mini-diapositives création 146 mini-diapositives de survol création 146 mise à l’échelle des projets 205 mise à niveau vers Adobe Captivate 3 problème de police dans les zones de texte 317 mise en valeur des zones de zoom 172 Mode d’enregistrement de démonstration 33 Mode d’enregistrement de simulation d’évaluation 33 Mode d’enregistrement de simulation de formation 33 Mode d’enregistrement personnalisé 33 mode plein écran 21 modèles création 59 création de projets avec 55 MenuBuilder 256, 258 simulations 34 suppression 203 modification propriétés des boutons de questions 137 texte enregistré dans les diapositives 171 modification des diapositives texte enregistré 171 mots de passe, projets 207 N navigateurs dépannage du texte 316 notification PENS gestion des exceptions 291 O objets affichage de la bibliothèque 189, 191 affichage Modifier 6 ajustement de la valeur au pixel près 200 alignement 195, 196, 199, 200 copie et collage 194, 195 duplication 193 durée 158 fusion dans des diapositives 200 gestion interactive 201 importation 190 masquer les calques 155 modes d’enregistrement 33 modification de l’ordre d’affichage 197 modifier la taille 198 ordre des calques 154 présentation 189 redimensionnement 200 réutilisation depuis la bibliothèque 191 verrouiller les calques 155 objets interactifs Voir aussi boutons ; zone de clic ; zone de texte gestion 201 types de 189 orthographe dictionnaire, changement 214 MenuBuilder 257 options, réglage 213 vérification 212INDEX 328 P package interchange file (PIF) 248 package SCORM publication 291 papier peint du bureau 21 papier peint, bureau 21 paramètres de fondu 177 paramètres liés à PENS configuration 291 pièces jointes, e-mail 289 PIF (package interchange file) 248 Plan de montage chronologique affichage dans une nouvelle fenêtre 153 afficher 8 alignement des objets 196 ancrage 152 configuration 152 durée de diapositive 156 durée de l’objet 158 masquage 8, 153 niveau de zoom 153 ordre d’affichage des objets 197 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 7, 152 prévisualisation des diapositives à l’aide de la tête de lecture 155 redimensionnement 153 variables 159 vitesse de frappe de touches 157 vitesse de la souris 157 vitesse de légende 157 planification de projets 18 pointeurs alignement des trajectoires 144 conseils pour l’enregistrement 20 dépannage de l’enregistrement 314 déplacements, modification 144 masquage 145 modification des icônes 141 ordre des calques d’objets 154 paramètres de vitesse 157 propriétés de la souris 189 taille 142 trajectoires droites et courbées 145 police des zones de texte de grande taille après la mise à niveau des projets Captivate 1 317 polices, dépannage des légendes transparentes 315 PowerPoint ajout de projets Adobe Captivate à 310 et Adobe Captivate 308 importation de diapositives 308 importation de diapositives dans Adobe Captivate 308 importation de présentations dans Adobe Captivate 309 insertion de projets dans 310 présentation 308 préchargements 177, 179, 210 préférences projets 207 présentation 46 fichier de script de réenregistrement 46 projets Voir aussi publication ; enregistrement accessibilité 66 aperçu 204 application 35, 41 autres 53 bordures 184 changement de nom 205 compression 208 couleur d’arrière-plan 206 date d’expiration 207 dates d’expiration 207 début, modification 177 écrans de chargement 210 fin, modification 177 image 54 introduction 18 masquage 204 modèles 55, 59 modification dans Flash 299 mots de passe 207 ouvrir existant 18 plein écran 41 préférences 207 propriétés 211 protection par mot de passe 207 redimensionnement 205 résolution 203 suppression 203 taille 203, 315 taille personnalisée 38 taille, largeur et hauteur 203 types de 35 vérification de l’orthographe 212 vide, création 53 projets d’application, enregistrement 35, 41 projets d’images 54 projets de taille personnalisée 38 projets MenuBuilder sur le Macintosh, exportation 280 propriétés paramètres de zones sensibles 233 propriétés de zone sensible définition 233 propriétés des boutons de questions modification 137 propriétés, projet 211 protection par mot de passe (projets) 207 publication contenu AICC ou package SCORM 291 vers un serveur Adobe Connect 301 publication de projets par e-mail 289 présentation 281 sous forme de document Word 284 sous forme de fichiers EXE 281 sous forme de fichiers Flash (SWF) 283 sous forme de guides étape par étape 286 sous forme de leçons 286 sous forme de scénarimages 287 vers Adobe Connect 301 vers le Web avec FTP 288 Q qualité audio 92, 104, 209 JPEG 117, 209 préférences du projet 209 redimensionnement des projets 205 vidéo 176 R raccourci, touches deINDEX 329 Adobe Captivate 13 MenuBuilder 275 raccourcis agrandissement 15 raccourcis d’agrandissement Adobe Captivate 15 redimensionnement des projets 205 réenregistrement 46 à propos du fichier de script 46 simulations logicielles 46 remplacement texte enregistré dans les diapositives 171 renommage des projets 205 résolution écran 21 projets 203 zone de capture 31 résolution d’écran 21 résolution du moniteur 21, 31 rétablir une action 16 RoboHelp 305 S scénarimages 19, 287 SCORM 237 activation 248 certification 216 fichier de manifeste 246 options 237 package interchange file (PIF) 248 script de réenregistrement 22, 49 utilisation 49 scripts 19 Section 508. Voir accessibilité sécurité 207 diapositives 187 mots de passe, projets 207 serveur Connect Enterprise métadonnées 209 seuil de réussite 242 seuil de réussite, définition 242 silence, ajout aux fichiers audio 98 simulations Assistant de projet 50 création 34 enregistrement d’application 35 enregistrement plein écran 41 modes d’enregistrement 33 simulations de scénarios 50 enregistrement 50 simulations logicielles 35, 43, 46 enregistrement 35 enregistrement dans plusieurs modes différents 43 réenregistrement 46 sites Web accessibilité 66, 70 publication de projets vers 288 zones de clic, lien vers 126 son de frappe sur clavier configuration 97, 212 définition 101 son.Voir audio sons de clic, souris 142 sortie Adobe Captivate bande passante 315 souris alignement des trajectoires 144 conseils pour l’enregistrement 20 dépannage de l’enregistrement 314 déplacements, modification 144 effets de clic 143 masquer le pointeur 145 molette, activer 146 objets 189 ordre des calques d’objets 154 paramètres de vitesse 157 pointeurs, modification 141 sons de clic 142 taille du pointeur 142 trajectoires droites et courbées 145 sous-titres accessibilité 104 ajout 104 localisation 71 suivi, Adobe Connect 304 suppression audio 107 boutons 140 diapositives 177 images 117 images dans MenuBuilder 268 légendes 88 modèles 203 projets 203 texte dans MenuBuilder 262 zones 140 zones de clic dans MenuBuilder 272 survols, enregistrement 21 système de gestion de l’apprentissage fichier de manifeste 246 fonctionnalités 216, 219 T taille du fichier bande passante 315 compression des projets 208 diapositives, compression 176 JPEG 117 qualité 176, 209 taille du projet 17 téléchargement vidéo progressif 107, 108 tête de lecture 155, 196 texte ajout aux diapositives 170 dépannage des navigateurs 316 texte animé 118, 121 texte enregistré modifications dans les diapositives 171 texte, MenuBuilder ajout 259 alignement 261 copie 262 déplacement 260 options 260 ordre 262 suppression 262 thèmes SWF 179, 181, 182 thèmes SWF Flash 179, 181, 182 titres, diapositives 169 touches de capture, modification 16 touches de raccourci Adobe Captivate 13 MenuBuilder 275 transitions, diapositives 172 U URL, ouverture zones de clic 126 utilisation du script de réenregistrement 49 V variables 159INDEX 330 vérification de l’orthographe dictionnaire 214 options 213 utilisation 212 verrouillage calques des objets 155 diapositives 187 vidéo Voir aussi objets ajout 108 audio 110 définition 189 importation 108 options 109 position 110 présentation 107 qualité 176 vitesse animations, dépannage 312 durée de l’objet 158, 197 frappe de touche 157 légendes 157 souris 157 vitesse de frappe de touches 157 volume, fichiers audio 98 W Windows-Eyes 67 X XML 293 conversion pour la modification et la localisation 293 Z zone de capture 31 zones Voir aussi objets audio, ajout aux 139 clic, ajout 126 création automatique 23 durée 158 JavaScript, ajout aux 138 ordre des calques d’objets 154 suppression 140 surbrillance, ajout 124 texte, ajout 129 types de 124, 189, 190 zones de clic ajout à des projets 126 audio, ajout aux 99, 139 création automatique 23 durée 158 gestion de tous les objets interactifs 201 Javascript 138 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 124, 189 suppression 140 zones de clic, MenuBuilder ajout 269 alignement 270 copie 271 déplacement 270 options 269 ordre 271 suppression 272 zones de surbrillance Voir aussi objets ajout à des projets 124 audio, ajout aux 99, 139 création automatique 24 définition 189 durée 158 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 124 suppression 140 zones de texte ajout 129 audio, ajout aux 99, 139 durée 158 gestion de tous les objets interactifs 201 Javascript 138 ordre des calques d’objets 154 présentation 124, 190 problème de police après la mise à niveau vers Adobe Captivate 3 317 suppression 140 zones de zoom ajout 172 définition 189 modification 173 zones sensibles définition des propriétés 233